\
V ri'f-:i.i
-t^l
■^„-
l%^-!l^
*V'i
^M.%
>':i
i:i^':-
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
April 5, 1983 Volume 1029 Number 1
CONTENTS
Page
Patent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1029 OG 2
Reissue Applications Filed 1029 OG 2
Request for Reexamination Filed 1029 OG 2
Errata 1029 OG 3
Patent Certificates of Correction 1029 OG 4
Disclaimers 1029 OG 4
Disclaimers and Dedications 1029 OG 5
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries 1029 OG 6
Condition of Patent Applications 1029 OG 7
Reexaminations 1029 OG 9
Defensive Patent Publication: (102,901) 1
Reissue Patents Granted (31,195) 5
Plant Patents Granted (5,020) 9
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,378,606) 11
Chemical (4,378,967) 137
Electrical (4,379,202) 203
Design Patents Granted (268,454) 255
Index of Patentees PI i
Indices of Reissue. Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees PI 28
Index of Applicants of Defensive Publications '.~1 . . . . PI 3 1
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations) PI 33
Designs, Plants and Defensive Publications . .^^<Tr^ PI 35
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors'
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 36
Designs, Plants and Applicants of Defensive Publications PI 37
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printmg Office, Washington, DC, 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly.
THE OFFICIAL g/zETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at SI 00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, $8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, DC, 20231.
Printing authorized by Section ll(a)3 of Title 35, US Code PTO.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13, 1982. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28, 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52.
Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased
as of Oct. 1, 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of
Jan. 1, 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22,
1983. The notice regarding the change in international
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27. on 28 Dec. 1982. The current
schedule of fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee $ 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases 67QtDO
International Fees
Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00
Basic Supplemental Fee (for each
page over 30) 5.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 65.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPLICATIONS RLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
4^20,164, Re. S.N. 355,173, Filed Mar. 5, 1982, CI.
131/84R, TOBACCO DISTRIBUTOR FOR CIGA-
RETTE ROD MAKING MACHINES OR THE
LIKE, Heinz-Christen Lorenzen, Owner of Record:
Hauni- Werke Korber & Co. KG, Hamburg, Germany, At-
torney or Agent: Peter K. Kontler, Ex. Gp.: 335
4^5^7, Re. S.N. 463,750, Filed Feb. 4, 1983, CI.
179/170 NC, SUBSCRIBER LINE INTERFACE CIR-
CUIT FOR A TELEPHONE LINE, Gilbert M. M.
Ferrieu, Owner of Record: Telecommunications
Radioelectriques et Telephoniques, Paris, France. Attorney
or Agent: Thomas A. Briody, Ex. Gp.: 214
4^5,240, Re. S.N. 464,094, Filed Jan. 26, 1983, CI.
73/462, WHEEL UNBALANCE MEASUREMENT
SYSTEM AND METHOD, Kenneth S. Gold, Owner
of Record: IMC Corp., San Jose, Calif. Attorney or
Agent: Henry M. Stanley, et al., Ex. Gp.: 244
4,290^8, Re. S.N. 438,901, Filed Jan. 13, 1983, CI.
51/58, UNIVERSAL CRANKSHAFT FINISHING
MACHINE, Edward E. Judge, Jr., Owner of Record:
Industrial Metal Products Corp., Lansing. Mich., Attorney
or Agent: Lloyd M. Forster, Ex. Gp.: 323
4,333,495, Re. S.N. 464,124, Filed Feb. 4, 1983, CI.
137/484.2, CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY, David E.
Griswold, et al.. Owner of Record: Griswold Controls,
Irvine, Calif, Attorney or Agent: John B. Young, et al.,
Ex. Gp.: 341
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION nLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(aK5) and 1.525(b)).
3,903,127, Reexam. No. 90/000,333, Requested: Mar.
1, 1983, CI. 260/453 AB, PROCESS FOR THE PRO-
DUCTION OF POLYISOCYANATES WITH A
BIURET STRUCTURE, Kuno Wayner, et al., Owner
of Record: Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Lever kusen. Germa-
ny, Attorney or Agent: Joseph C. Gil, Ex. Gp.: 120, Re-
quester: Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Washing-
ton. DC.
4,053,845, Reexam. No. 90/000,336, Requested: Mar.
4, 1983, CI. 330/4.3, OPTICALLY PUMPED LASER
AMPLIFIERS, Gordon Gould, Owner of Record:
Refac Technology Development Corp., New York, N. Y..
Attorney or Agent: Lemer, David, et al., Ex. Gp.: 222,
Requester: General Motors Corp., Detroit, Mich.
4,260,840, Reexam. No. 90/000,335, Requested: Feb.
28, 1983, CI. 585/259, BUTENE-1 CONTAINING
FEED PURIFICATION PROCESS (CS-165),
Friedrich H. Puis, et al., Owner of Record: Exxon Re-
search and Engineering Co.. Florham Park, N.J., Attor-
ney or Agent: Rebecca Yablonsky, Ex. Gp.: 110, Re-
quester: Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Germany
4,272,435, Reexam. No. 90/000,337, Requested: Mar.
7, 1983, CI. 260/192, PROCESS FOR THE PREPA-
RATION OF AZO COMPOUNDS FROM AMINO
COMPOUNDS IN THE PRESENCE OF A PHASE
TRANSFER CATALYST, Teruo Matsuda, et al.,
Owner of Record: Sumitomo Chemical Co.. Ltd.. Osaka,
Japan, Attorney or Agent: Stevens, Davis, et al., Ex.
Gp.: 110, Requester: E. I. du Pont de Nemours & Co.,
Wilmington, Del.
4,276,329,Reexam. No. 90/000,338, Requested: Mar. 7,
1983, CI. 427/393, WOOD TREATMENT PROCESS
AND PRODUCT THEREOF, Ramesh C. Vasishth, et
al.. Owner of Record: Envirosol Systems International.
Ltd.. Orinda, Calif. Attorney or Agent: Townsend &
Townsend, Ex.'Gp.: 162, Requester: Spencer Kellogg,
Buffalo, N.Y.
1029 OG— 2
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG— 3
Errata
The following registration numbers were inadvertent-
ly canceled in the "Trademarks Registrations Canceled,
Section 8" section of the Official Gazettes listed below:
865,746
947,978
962,009
963,115
902,442
971,057
973,817
977,404
981,929
982,320
982,599
984,093
986,174
986,182
986,211
986,448
986,571
986,645
986,786
988,272
992,080
994,834
1,003,967
1,010,776
1,011,622
1,013,002
1,025,542
1,026,808
1,031,812
1,032,840
1,038,668
1,040,139
1,045,350
1,046,293
1,047,791
1,049,654
TM76
TM132
TM67
TM142
TM283
TM149
TM146
TM105
TM145
TM39
TM86
TM185
TM91
TM91
TM91
TM92
TM93
TM93
TM127
TM207
TM216
TM250
TM763
TM157
TM396
TM519
TM141
TM142
TM602
TM140
TM620
TM450
TM604
TM301
TM452
TM150
May 6, 1975
May 8, 1979
Jan. 1, 1980
Jan. 8, 1980
Jan. 22, 1980
May 13, 1980
June 24, 1980
Aug. 19, 1980
Oct. 28, 1980
Nov. 4, 1980
Nov. 11, 1980
Nov. 25, 1980
Dec. 9, 1980
Dec. 9, 1980
Dec. 9, 1980
Dec. 9, 1980
Dec. 9, 1980
Dec. 9, 1980
Dec. 16, 1980
Dec. 30, 1980
Feb. 10, 1981
Mar. 10, 1981
June 30, 1981
Oct. 6, 1981
Nov. 17, 1981
Nov. 24, 1981
May 4, 1982
May 4, 1982
June 22, 1982
July 6, 1982
Sept. 28, 1982
Oct. 19, 1982
Dec. 28, 1982
Jan. 11, 1983
Feb. 15, 1983
Mar. 1, 1983
Consequently, the above identified registrations are
still active.
MARK NEWMAN,
Mar. 11, 1983. Director Trademark
Examining Operation.
The following registration number, listed in the
"Trademarks Registrations Issued" !«ction oi the OfTi-
cial Gazette of Jan. 25, 1983, was inadvertently issued;
1,224,976 TMOG Jan 25, 1983
Consequently, the certificate of registration bearing
the above-identified number was no' issued on the date
indicated, and this registration number has been vacated
MARK NEWMAN,
Mar. 2, 1983. Director Trademark
Examining Operation.
\^
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of Apr. 5, 1983
Re. 30,861
D. 263,977
D. 266,091
D. 267,066
4,038,533
4,097,679
4,133,247
4,158,285
4,174,125
4,179,574
4,224,470
4,236,050
4,246,409
4.247,302
4,267,935
-^28 1,726
4,283,437
4,292.075
4,311,700
4,311,789
4,312,993
4,316,551
4,319.177
4,319,719
4.320.293
4,320,568
4,321,933
4,325,938
4,326,996
4,329,405
4,330.026
4,332,620
4,332,761
4,3>3,176
4,334,089
4,342,183
4,344,329
4,345,372
4,345,395
4.345.901
4.347,227
4.347.584
4,348,190
4,350,724
4,350,776
4,351,827
4,352,116
4,352,425
4,352,714
4,352,760
4,352,869
4,352,995
4,353,620
4,353,820
4,354,108
4,354,256
4,354,442
4,355,117
4,355,201
4,355,518
4,355,678
4,356,014
4,356,41 1
4,356,505
4,357,194
4,357,328
4,357,458
4,357,530
4,358,181
4,358,217
4,358,471
4,358,554
4,358,847
4,359,025
4,359.181
4,359,204
4,359,214
4,359,663
4,360,339
4,360,524
4,360,755
4,360,919
4,361,370
4,361,554
4,361,563
4,361,736
4,361,754
4,362,036
4,362,185;
4,362,369
4,362,471
4,362,707
4,362,738
4,362,955
4,363,052
4,363,058
4,363,194
4,363,312
4,364,251
4,364,688
4,364,909
4,364,928
4,365,284
4,365,444
4,365,513
4,365,754
4,365,896
4,367,114
4,367,156
4,367,465
4,367,467
4,367,490
4,367,639
4,367,713
4,367,809
4,367,874
4,368,117
4,368,148
4,368,202
4,368,383
4.368,439
4.368.504
4.368.643
4,368,705
4,368,716
4,368,739
4,368,765
4,368,790
4,368,986
4,369,190
4,369,244
4,369,883
4,370,027
4,370,034
4,370,044
4,370,805
4,371,020
4,371,462
4,371,473
4,371,583
4,371,931
4,372,005
4,372,286
Disclaimers
3,226,552.— Monroe H. Sweet, deceased, late of Hillcrest,
N.Y., by Russell P. Easton. executor. PHOTOMUL-
TIPLIER ZERO LEVEL CONTROL CIRCUIT.
Patent dated Dec. 28, 1965. Disclaimer filed Sept. 30,
1982, by the assignee, Eastman Kodak Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
i,2U,5l9.— Andre K. Schwerin, Binghamton, N.Y.
PHOTOPOLYMERIZATION IN STRATUM
TRANSFER EFFECTED WITH COLORLESS
WATER INSOLUBLE COLLOIDAL ORGANIC
COMPOUND. Patent dated Apr. 5, 1966. Disclaimer
filed Sept. 30, 1982, by the assignee, Eastman Kodak
Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
3,316,094.— /ioron Ben-Ezra. Binghamton, N.Y. METH-
OD OF INCORPORATING COLOR COUPLERS
IN HYDROPHILIC COLLOIDS. Patent dated
Apr. 25, 1967. Disclaimer filed Sept. 30, 1982, by the
assignee, Eastman Kodak Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
3,316,118.— ftrer A. Landskroener, Binghamton, N.Y.
MIXED RESIN ADHESIVE COMPOSITION
FOR SECURING HYDROPHOBIC CALCIUM
TUNGSTATE SALT LAYER TO HYDROPHIL-
IC BASE. Patent dated Apr. 25. 1967. Disclaimer
filed Sept. 30, 1982, by the assignee, Eastman Kodak
Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
2),A0e,0(n .—Edward Cerwonka, Binghamton, N.Y. COL-
ORED PHOTORESIST AND METHOD OF
PREPARATION. Patent dated Oct. 15, 1968. Dis-
claimer filed Sept. 30, 1982, by the assignee, Eastman
Kodak Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
3,490,904. — Carl E. Johnson and Dewey M. Burners,
Binghamton, NY. COLOR OSCILLOGRAPH RE-
CORDING PAPER. Patent dated Jan. 20, 1970.
Disclaimer filed Sept. 30, 1982, by the assignee, East-
man Kodak Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
i,5n,13i.— Bernard C. Sheffer, Binghamton, N.Y. AU-
TOMATIC SENSITOMETRIC FILM STRIP
CUTTER. Patent dated May 26, 1970. Disclaimer
filed Sept. 30, 1982, by the assignee, Eastman Kodak
Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent. '
3,5U,1A6.— James E. Hoover, Binghamton, N.Y. FILM
WINDING AND STAKING METHOD. Patent
dated July 7, 1970. Disclaimer filed Sept. 30, 1982,
by the assignee, Eastman Kodak Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
>
3,549,460.— Rudolph C. Stobb, Endwell, N.Y. ULTRA-
SONIC SEALING OF FILM CARTRIDGES. Pa-
tent dated Dec. 22, 1970. Disclaimer filed Sept. 30,
1982, by the assignee, Eastman Kodak Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
3,556,792.— Leon Katz, Springfield, N.J. NOVEL
SUBSTITUTED ALLYL POLYMER DERIVA-
TIVES USEFUL AS PHOTORESISTS. Patent dat-
ed Jan. 19, 1971. Disclaimer filed Sept. 30, 1982., by
the assignee, Eastman Kodak Co. I
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
3,5%5,034.— Steven Levinos. Vestal, N.Y. MANUFAC-
TURE OF PHOSPHOR SCREENS. Patent dated.
June 15, 1971. Disclaimer filed Sept. 30, 1982, by the^
assignee, Eastman Kodak Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-^
tent.
3,653,112.— Ralph I. Berge, Binghamton, N.Y. TWO
LAMP LIGHT COMPARISON TYPE DENSI-
TOMETER. Patent dated Apr. 4, 1972. Disclaimer
filed Sept. 30, 1982, by the assignee, Eastman Kodak
Co.
i
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
3,744,904.— Fran* / Loprest. Binghamton, N.Y TRANS-
PARENT PHOTOGRAPHIC MASKS. Patent dat-
1029 OG— 4
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG— 5
ed July 10, 1973. Disclaimer filed Sept. 30, 1982, by
the assignee, Eastman Kodak Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent. ■
3,S12,162.— William R. McKillip, Portland, Oreg.; and
Donald L. Mason, Fair Oaks, Calif. BAND SAW
SYSTEM. Patent dated Mar. 25, 1975. Disclaimer
filed Feb. 7, 1983, by the assignee, R. Hoe & Co.. Inc.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
Disclaimers and Dedications
3,356,389.— Jo/in V. Fredd. Dallas, Tex. LOCKING DE-
VICES FOR WELL TOOLS. Patent dated £)ec. 5,
1967. Disclaimer and Dedication filed Jan. 6, 1983,
by the assignee, Otis Engineering Corp.
Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the re-
maining term of said patent.
3,378,080.— yo/i« V. Fredd Dallas, Tex. FLUID PRES-
SURE OPERATED ACTUATED OPERATOR
TOOL FOR WELL TOOLS. Patent dated Apr. 16,
1968. Disclaimer and Dedication filed Jan. 6, 1983,
by the assignee, Otis Engineering Corp.
Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the re-
maining term of said patent.
3,381,753.— yo/i« V. Fredd Dallas, Tex. FLUID FLOW
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR WELLS. Patent dated
May 7, 1968. Disclaimer and Dedication filed Jan. 6,
1983, by the assignee, Otis Engineering Corp.
Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the re-
maining term of said patent.
3A94A20.— Phillip S. Sizer. Dallas, Tex. METHOD OF
OPERATING A WELL INSTALLATION. Patent
dated Feb. 10, 1970. Disclaimer and Dedication filed
Jan. 6, 1983, by the assignee, Otis Engineering Corp.
Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the re-
maining tenn of said patent.
3,506,068.— M)rmfl/» F. Brown and John V. Fredd. Dallas,
Tex. PUMPABLE IMPELLER PISTONS FOR
FLOW CONDUCTORS. Patent dated Apr. 14,
1970. Disclaimer and Dedication filed Jan. 6, 1983,
by the assignee, Otis Engineering Corp.
Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the re-
maining term of said patent.
4,324,681.— Dov/rf W. House, Arlington Heights, 111.
CHIRAL SUPPORTS FOR RESOLUTION OF
RACEMATES. Patent dated Apr. 13, 1982. Dis-
claimer and Dedication filed Jan. 19, 1983, by the as-
signee, UOP, Inc.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1-9 and dedi-
cates said patent to the Public.
< r
r
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
The libraries listed herein, designated as patent deposi- table following, the collections are organized in patent
tory libraries, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and number sequence.
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail-
of these collections varies from library to library, rang- able in microfilm, in bound volumes of paper copies, or
ing from patents of only recent months or years in some in some combination of both. Facilities for making paper
libraries to all or most of the patents issued since 1870, copies from either microfilm in reader-printers or from
or earlier, in other Ubraries. the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are general-
These patent collections are open to public use and ly provided for a fee.
each of the patent depository libraries, in addition, offers Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections
the publications of the patent classification system (e.g. among the patent depository libraries and in their hours
The Manual of Classification, Index to the U.S. Patent of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the
Classification, Classification Definitions, etc.) and pro- patents at a particular library is advised to contact that
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the library, in advance, about its collection and hours, so as
public in gaining effective access to information con- to avert possible inconvenience,
tained in patents. With one exception, as noted in the
State Name of Library Telephone Contact
Alabama Birmingham PuWic Library (205) 254-2555
Arizona Tempe: Science Library, Arizona State University (602) 965-7607
California Los Angeles Public Library (213) 626-7555 Ext. 273
Sacramento: California State Library (916) 322-45^2
Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* (408) 738-55180
Colorado Denver Public Library (303) 571-2122
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware (302) 738-2238
Georgia Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of
Technology (404) 894-4508
Illinois Chicago Public Library (312) 269-2865
Louisiana Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State
University (504) 388-2570
Massachusetts Boston PubUc Library (617) 536-5400 Ext. 265
Michigan Detroit Public Library (313) 833-1450
Minnesota Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center (612) 372-6552
Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library (816) 363-4600
St. Louis Public Library (314) 241-2288 Ext. 214,
Ext. 215
Nebraska Lincoln: University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Engineering Library .. (402)472-3411
New Hampshire Durham: University of New Hampshire Library (603) 862-1777
New Jersey Newark Public Library (201) 733-7814
New York Albany: New York State Library (518) 474-5125
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (716) 856-7525 Ext. 267
New York Public Library (The Research Libraries) (212) 930-0850
North Carolina Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library, N.C. State University (919) 737-3280
Ohio Cincinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of (513) 369-6936
Cleveland Public Library (216) 623-2870
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries (614) 422-6286
Toledo/Lucas County Public Library (419) 255-7055 Ext. 212
Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library (405) 624-6546
Pennsylvania Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library (215) 448-1321**
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh (412) 622-3138
University Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University . . (814) 865-4861
Rhode Island Providence Public Library (401) 521-7722 Ext. 226
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina (803) 792-2372
Tennessee Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
Center (901) 528-2957
Texas Dallas Public Library (214) 749-4176
Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University (713) 527-8101 Ext. 2587
Washington Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington (206) 543-0740
Wisconsin Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, University of
Wisconsin (608) 262-6845
1 Milwaukee Public Library (414) 278-3043
All of the above-listed libraries, except the Cleveland Public Library, offer CASSIS (Classification And Search
Support Information System), which provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data.
'Collection organized by subject matter.
••Call only between the hours of 10:00 a.m. and 5.<X) p.m.
1029 OG— 6
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant CommissioDer
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF February 19, 1983
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New Case
Awaiting
Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHHRIISTRY, GROUP 110— D. E. TALBERT, Director 1-16-81
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions;'^gano-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chemistry; Metallurgy; Metal-
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120— C. E. VAN HORN, Director 11-20-81
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics;
Steroids; Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140— J. O. THOMAS, JR., Director 7-14-81
Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g., Coating; Molding;
Ink; Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treating Compositions.
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160— S. N. ZAHARNA, Director . .S 1-20-82
Coating: Processes, Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography.
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170—
R. F. WHITE, Director 11-12-81
Fertilizers; Foods; Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making; Glass Manufac-
^ ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid, Gas,
and. Solid Separation^ Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
I Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210-S. W. ENGLE, Director 4-7-81
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION, GROUP 220— KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 3-12-81
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications, Op-
tics; Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
bevices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special, Fuel, Explosive and Tliermic Composi-
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries.
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE. AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230— EARL LEVY, Director 11-24-80
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Data Processing, Computation and Conversion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING, AND MEASURING, GROUP 240—
G. M. FORLENZA, Director 1^)7-81
Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
, Food Treating; Agitating; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projectors;
Web Feeding; Winding and Reeling; Cable Hoists; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling;
' Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors.
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250— S. S. MATTHEWS, Director 8-25-80
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring.
DESIGN, GROUP 290— KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 1-13-81
Industrial Arts; Household, Personal and Fpe Arts.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310— B. R. GRAY, Director 5-18-81
Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Fluid Sprin-
kling; Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; Boats;
Ships; Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment.
MATERIAL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURmG, TOOLS, GROUP 320— M. M. NEWMAN. Director ... 5-18-81
Manufacturing Processes, Assembling, Combined Machines, Special Article Making; Metal Deforming Sheet Metal
and Wire Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Metal Pounding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividmg; Work and
Tool Holders, Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Printed Matter.
AMUSEMENT, HUSBANDRY, PERSONAL TREATMENT, INFORMATION, GROUP 330-
R. E. AEGERTER, Director 2-13-80
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Printing; Typewriters; Infor-
mation Dissemination.
HEAT, POWER, AND FLUID ENGINEERING, GROUP 340— D. J. STOCKING. Director 1 1-17-80
Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Pluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Gearing;
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS, TEXTILES, MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350-
A. L. SMITH, Director 9-12-80
Building Structures; Racks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplinn; Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineering; Earth Drilling; Mining;
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches.
Expiration of patents: The patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during February 1983, except those which
may have expired earlier due to shortened terms under the provisions of Public Law 690, 79th Congress, approved August 8, 1946
(60 Stat. 940) and Public Law 619, 83rd Congress, approved August 23. 1954 (68 Sut. 764). or which may have had their terms cur-
tailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the range of numbers indicated be-
low, may have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 151.
Patents Numbers 3.231.896 to 3,237.200, inclusive
Plant Patents Numbers 2,591 to 2,605 inclusive
-J
1029 GO— 7
REEXAMINATIONS
APRIL 5, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ ] appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexamination specification-matter pnnted
in italics indicates additions made by reexamination
Bl 3,621,243 (68th)
APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR DETERMINING
PARTICLE SIZE BY X-RAY ABSORPTION ANAL-
YSIS
James Peter Olivier; George Keller Hickin, both of
Macon, Ga., assignors to Freeport Minerals Company,
New York N.Y.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,064, Sep. 8, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,621,243, issued
Nov. 16, 1971, Ser. No. 816,649, Apr. 16, 1969.
U.S. a. 378/51 Int. Q.^ GOIN 23/12, 9/24
Bl 3,956,540 (69th)
METHOD OF COATING ARTICLES
Albert J. Laliberte, South Woodstock, Conn.; Armand
DeAngelis, Southbridge, Mass., assignors to Omnitech
Inc., Southbridge, Mass.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,051, Aug. 10, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,956,540, issued
May U, 1976, Ser. No. 395,779, Sep. 10, 1973.
U.S. CI. 427/164 Int.^ B05D 5/06
H . - I 1
-Sut»<.I ((I,.
O]
«4 J 1— T.aMl^.to*
1 J •'■
• IL:?'.^^ ., '
'.ir-.^'
-i -l r:^\A'-''\A I:: 11-'
'•' I -•17 t/ ■■'V-' I V, "" ;
-: I
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1 and 2 were previously disclaimed.
, ^.^^, ,^ „.o Claims 3-8 having been finally determined to be unpat-
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION. IT HAS . , ,.,n,.elled
BEEN DETERMINED THAT: ^r,ub\e. arc cancelled
The patentability of claims 1 and 2 is confirmed.
Claims 9, 13 and 18 are determined to be patentable as
amended:
Claims 3 and 5-11 are determined ta be patentable as ^^^.^^ jq_j2^ ^^^ ,4.17^ dependent on amended
amended: claims, are determined to be patentable.
Claim 4. dependent on amended claims, is determined
to be patentable.
3. An automatic particle size analyzer eompi^ising a
sample chamber for holding a dilute fluid suspension of
finely divided material, means for continuously generating
an X-ray beam, means for continuously directing the
[anj X-ray beam horizontally through the suspension,
means for continuously measuring the intensity of the X-
ray beam horizontally transmitted through the suspen-
sion, electronic or electromechanical means for continu-
ously converting this intensity measurement of X-ray
beam transmittance to a quantity proportional to the
logarithm of the intensity measurement, meaiis for con-
tinuously indicating said quantity as concentration, a digi-
tally programmed means for continuously changing the
vertical distance between the point of intersection of the
X-ray beam with the suspension and the upper or lower
surface of the suspension according to whether the parti-
cles are more or less dense than the suspending fluid, and
a digitally programmed means for simultaneously provid-
ing a continuous [an] indication of the particle size
corresponding to the elapsed sedimentation time and the
[anj instantaneous value of vertical distaince according
to Stokes' Law,- said two digitally programmed means
comprising a single digitally programmed means. ,
New claims 19-22 are added and determined to be
patentable.
19. A process Jor forming a clear distortion-free scratch re-
sistant coating of an organosilicon thermoset cross-linkable
polymer on an optical article including the steps of applying a
coating of a solution of said polymer from a supply of a solution
of said polymer to said article in a controlled atmosphere main-
tained at a first temperature sufficiently above room tempera-
ture to precure a coating of said polymer to a tack free condi-
tion within a predetermined period of time, retaining said arti-
cle in said controlled atmosphere for said predetermined time
to precure said article coating to tack fr^e condition, baking
said article carrying said precured tack free coating at an ele-
vated temperature with reference to said first temperature for a
length of time sufficient to cure said coating fully to said clear
distortion-free scratch resistant condition, and cooling said
supply of said solution of polymer to a temperature sufficiently
below room temperature appreciably to extend the useful life of
said solution, said cooling step including controlling the tem-
perature of said supply of said solution to minify the possibility
of the application of uneven coatings of said solution to said
articles.
1029 OG— 9
1029 OG— 10
OFFICIAL GAZETTE .
APRILS, 1983
Bl 4,144,212 (70th)
AIR-CURING COPOLYMER LATICES
Seymour M. Linder, Baltimore; John W. Calentine, Pasa-
dena, both of Md., assignors to Alcolac Inc., Baltimore,
Md.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,012, Jul. 1, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,144,212, issued
Mar. 13 1979
U.S. a. 524/818 • ' ' Int. d.^" C08F 20/40
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1-8 having been finally determined to be unpat-
entable, are cancelled
9, An air-curing copolymer latex comprising an aqueous
dispersion of a copolymer of a mixture of copolymerizable
monomers, consisting essentially, in percent by weight based
on the total weight of monomers used, of:
(a) about 1% to about 20% of dicyclopentadienyl acrylate
or dicyclopentadienyl methacrylate;
(b) about 99% to about 20% of an alkyl acrylate or alkyl
methacrylate, including mixtures thereof, in which the
alkyl groups contain from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
(c) up to about 5% of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid;
(d) about 0% to about 40% of other acrylic monomers
selected from the group consisting of higher alkyl acry-
lates and alkyl methacrylates in which the alkyl groups
contain from 5 to 18 carbon atoms, acrylamide, metha-
crylamide, diacetone acrylamide, acrylonitrile and
methacrylonitrile; and
(e) about 0% to about 80% of other monoethylenically
unsaturated monomers which are copolymerizable with
(a), (b), (c) and (d);
the above comonomers constituting essentially 100% by
weight of the total monomers in said copolymer and said
copolymer containing essentially 100% of the total weight of
said dicyclopentadienyl acrylate or dicylopentadienyl metha-
crylate present in the latex.
J
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS
PUBLISHED APRIL 5, 1983
Published at the request of the applicant or owner in accordance with the Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O.G. 687. The abstracte of Defensive
Publication applications are identified by distinctly numbered series and are arranged chronologically. The heading of each abstract indicates the
number of pages of specification, including claims and sheets of drawings contained in thKpplication as originally filed. The files of these
applications are available to the public for inspection and reproduction may be purchased (|^30 cents a sheet.
Defensive Publication applications have not been examined as to the merite of alleged invention. The Patent and Trademark OfTice makes no
assertion as to the novelty of the disclosed subject matter.
T102,901
METHOD OF FABRICATING A BEARING
Lairy A. Offenbacher, 4421 Castleton Rd., West, Columbus,
OUo 43220
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,271
Int a.3 B21D 53/10
U.S. a. 29—149.5 R
1 Sheets Drawing. 10 Pages Specification
^
on pastures, or undesirable such as in conjunction with re-
duced tillage practices, and generally wherever it is necessary
or desirable to apply nitrogen on the surface of soil, ensuring
substantially reduced losses of urea nitrogen by volatilization,
and causing a delay of 4 to 7 days in the commencement of
such losses. The product is also suiuble for band application,
resulting in eliminating the problems of seedling damage and
crop stand reduction which are associated with urea or combi-
nations of urea and ammonium phosphates, particularly diam-
monium phosphate.
. - -,, ,. ^ -, 60 '?
OlSTftHCE 'ROM iPfL'CATtOh yiE , MiLL'MtTt«S
' P«o>iU <X U«E«, N-, mn p" «r'E» T«0 D» -CUWIOT
0 lOU 0 0' « "0 MS ADDED TO . aOU»~ Of C>IO«lE< SOL
The mating halves 7 and 11 of a new type of thrust bearing for
a down hole drilling motor 1 are fabricated by a technique
which ensures that the composite diamond compact inserts 9
or 13 are coplanar with each other. Composite compacts are
utilized having a chamfer on both the diamond table 18 and the
substrate 19. These hard inserts are inserted into recesses 17 in
steel bearing body rings 8 or 12, said recesses being the same
depth as the substrate. The composite compacts are furnace
brazed below the degradation temperature of the diamond.
During brazing a weight is placed on the compacts to maintain
their coplanar relationship. The space between the inserts 15 is
maintained at less than half their diameter. This fabrication
technique results in a smooth running, low friction thrust
bearing for rotating equipment.
T102,902
GRANULAR UREA - UREA PHOSPHATE FERTILIZER
Fayez E. Khasawneh, 329 Robinhood Dr., Florence, Ala. 35630
FUed Oct 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,875
Int. a.3 C05C 9/00. 7/08
U.S. a. 71—29
16 Sheets Drawing. 26 Pages Specification
UREA- UREA PHOSPHATE
T102,903
PINNED-ON PLANETARY RING GEAR ASSEMBLY AND
SALVAGE METHOD
Robert S. Orr, 5 Rosewood La., Pekin, DL 61554
Continuation of Ser. No. 546,949, Feb. 4, 1975, abandonei^ and
a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 38S4KI1, Aug. 6, 1973,
abandoned. This application Aug. 30, 1976, Ser. No. 719,027
Int CV F16H 1/28
U.S. a. 74—801
3 Sheets Drawing. 14 Pages Specification
Solid granular fertilizers based on the inclusion of phosphoric
acid as an additive to urea and consisting of a homogeneous
mixture of two solid crystalline phases, i.e., urea and urea
phosphate, and ranging in its overall N:P205 weight ratio from
about 2:1 to about 5:1, preferably from about 2:1 to 3:1. These
fertilizers are suitable for surface application, especially where
immediate incorporation into the soil is not practicable, such as
A ring gear mounted within a final drive or transmission hous-
ing and fixed against rotation with respect thereto. The ring
gear is provided with a plurality of angularly spaced peripheral
semi-circular recesses contiguous with opposing recesses in a
peripheral portion of the housing. Drive pins are inserted
within the circular apertures formed by the opposed semi-cir-
cular recesses. The pins and the ring gear are retained against
axial movement by means of keeper plates fastened to a periph-
eral portion of the housing. In a preferred embodiment the
diameters of the angularly spaced peripheral semi-circular
recesses are greater than those of the drive pins and the centers
of rotation of such enlarged semi-circular recesses are dis-
placed from the centers of the drive pins. A method of salvag-
ing a ring gear-housing assembly having a worn housing spline
The method includes providing the formeriy described semi-
circular recesses in peripheral portions of the ring gear and
housing, providing drive pins for the aperture formed thereby,
and providing keeper plates for retaining the ring gear and
drive pins against axial movement. A method of salvaging a
ring gear-housing assembly having worn semi-circtilar ring
gear retaining recesses in the periphery of the housing. The
method includes removing axial retention keeper plates from
the housing, removing the drive pins from the apertures
formed by the opposi|ig semi-circular recesses in the ring gear
and housing, angularly displacing the ring gear with respect to
the housing, providing additional semi-circular recesses in the
periphery of the housing at poinU thereof contiguous with the
semi-circular recesses provided in the displaced ring gear.
1
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
installing drive pins in the apertures formed by the semi-circu-
lar recesses in the ring gear and newly provided recesses in
housing, and installing keeper plates to retain the pins and ring
gear against axial movement.
1102,904
TIRE CORD ADHESION
Hans M. Wenghoefer, 1513 Maple St., Wilmington, Del. 19805
FUed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,073
, Int. a.3 B29H 77/00, B05D 3/00
I U.S. a. 156—110 A
No Drawing. 10 Pages Specification
It has been found that the adhesion of aramid tire cord to
rubber tire stock can be improved by pretreating the tire cord
with a polyazidoformate under conditions calculated to only
partially decompose the azidoformate groups.
T102,905
CONTROL OF SULRDES IN AQUEOUS SYSTEMS
William H. Kibbel, Jr., 24 Dublin Rd., Pennington, N.J. 08534
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,625
Int. a.3 AOIN 00/00
U.S. a. 210—759
No Drawing. 10 Pages Specification
Solid peroxygens may be compressed into shaped forms with
or without additives to regulate the dissolving rate of the
forms. Use of such peroxygen forms provides a simple and
inexpensive method to dispense active oxygen and an alkali
into a solution over a predetermined time to oxidize sulfides to
sulfates and thus to reduce the chemical oxygen demand. So-
dium carbonate peroxide and sodium perborate are two com-
mercial peroxygen compounds particularly useful for this
application as they provide both the active oxygen to oxidize
the sulfide, and the alkalinity required to raise the pH of the
solution to pH 8 or greater, thus preventing the formation of
elemental sulfur. In addition, the two compounds are compati-
ble with additives, such as carboxymethylcellulose and meth-
ylcellulose, which are useful in regulating the dissolution rate,
as well as soda ash, which can be used to provide additional
alkalinity.
T102,906
METHOD OF REMOVING PHOSPHORUS IMPURITIES
FROM YELLOWCAKE
Richard A. Brown, 112 Glendale Dr., Trenton, N.J. 08618, and
Donald C. Winkley, 2519 Laguna Shores, Corpus Christi, Tex.
78418
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 210,063
Int. a.3 COIG 1/02. 43/025 ,
U,S. a. 423—16 'I
No Drawing. 15 Pages Specification
Phosphorus impurities are removed from yellowcake by dis-
solving it in hydrochloric or sulfuric acid to a U3O8 assay of at
least 150 g/1 at a pH of 2; precipitating uranium peroxide with
hydrogen peroxide while keeping the pH between 2.2 and 2.6
and recovering the uranium peroxide from the phosphorus
impurities remaining in solution.
alcoholysis of lower alkyl 3-(2,2-dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethyl-
cyclopropanecarboxylates with 3-phenoxybenzyl alcohol. A
lower alkyl alcohol, e.g., methanol or ethanol, is generated as
a by-product.
The process is conducted under reflux at a temperature of at
least 100° C. in an inert solvent between approximately
stoichiometric amounts of the reactants. The solvent is
selected to form an azeotropic mixture with, or boil at a
higher temperature than, the lower alkyl alcohol by-product,
and the by-product is removed from the mixture by distilla-
tion as it is produced. If lower alkyl is methyl or ethyl, n-oc-
tane. benzene, toluene, xylene, or mesitylene may be em-
ployed, for example.
The process is promoted by lower alkyl titanium alkoxide
catalysts. The purity of the product 3-phenoxybenzyl 3-(2,2-
dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclopropanecarboxylate, which is
obtained as a bottoms residue after stripping the solvent, is
high enough, greater than 909^ to be suitable for use in com-^
merce as the pyrethroid insecticide "pemiethrin" without
further purification . The purity is enhanced by the use of only
0.00 1-0.0 1 mole of the catalyst per mole of lower alkyl 3-.
(2.2-dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclopropanecarboxylate.
To avoid hydrolysis of the catalyst, the reaction is carried out
under substantially anhydrous conditions.
T102,908
CATALYZED TRANSESTERinCATION SY^JTHESIS
Joseph Halpem, 1072 Springfield Ave., New Providence, N.J.
07974, and Phillip Adams, 27 Burlington Rd., Murray Hill,
N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 801,345, May 27, 1977, abandoned.
This application May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 382,007
Int. a.3 C07C 69/74
U.S. a. 560—124
No Drawing. 12 Pages Specification
Esters of the formula *
O
n
CX2=CH— CH CH— C— OB
\ /
C
/ \
CH3 CH3
wherein X is chlorine or bromine and B is a benzyl group of the
formula
T102,907
PROCESS TO 3-PHENOXYBENZYL
3-(2,2-DICHLOROVINYL)-2,2-DIMETHYLCYCLO-
PROPANECARBOXYLATE
Marc Halfon, P.O. Box 64, 10-14 Deer Creek Dr., Plainsboro,
N.J. 08536, and William G. Scharpf, 804 Roelofs Rd^ Yard-
ley, Pa. 19067
Continuation of Ser. No. 10,183, Feb. 7, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,997
Int. a.3 C07C 69/743
U.S. a. 560— 124
No Drawing. 10 Pages Specification
3-Phenoxybenzyl 3-(2,2-dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclo-
propanecarboxylate is prepared in greater than 90% yield by
— CH2
where Y and Z may be the same or different and are selected
from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl,
lowr alkoxy, phenyl, pheiioxy, lower alkyl phenyl, lower alkyl
phenoxy, halophenyl and halophenoxy, are prepared by trans-
esterification between BOH and a compound of the formula
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK pFFICE
o
II
CH— C— OL
-continued
O
CX2=CH— CH
\ /
c
/ \
CH3 CH3
wherein L is a lower alkyl radical of between 1 and 4 carbon
atoms, using as catalyst an organometallic compound
selected from (RO)4Ti and R'2SnO, where R and R' are alkyl
radicals of between 1 and 6 carbon atoms. Useful
organometallic catalysts include tetrabutyl titanate, tetra-
isopropyl titanate, and dibutyl tin(IV)oxide. About 1% by
weight of the total charge of reactants is catalyst. The process
is conducted at 100°-200° C. under vacuum, generally in the
absence of solvent, with sustained distillation of the LOH by-
product until the theoretical amount of alcohol is collected.
The product ester is then distilled under vacuum. For exam-
ple, 126 g ethyl 3-{2,2-dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclo-
propanecarboxylate, 100 g m-phenoxybenzyl alcohol, and
2.25 grams of tetraisopropyl titanate reacted at 1 50° C./200 mm
Hg yielded the m-phenoxybenzyl ester; bp 181° C. /O.I mm
Hg, 89% yield, 99.5Vo pure.
Ill
IV
are useful intermediates for preparation of an insecticidal com-
pound of formula (I)
CF3
...TT^^nm.^.......^^ .^,^^^?I^-, '" which Ra and R/,are independently hydrogen, halogen, or
INTERMEDIATES AND PROCESS FOR INSECTIODAL alkyl. The intermediate II is prepared by reacting 3,3-dimethyl-
nu... . ^ . ^IPHENYLMETOYL ESTERS 4-pentenoic acid, a salt thereof, a lower alkyl ester or an acid
Phihp A. Cruickshank, 211 Dodds U., Princeton, N.J. 08540, chloride thereof with a compound oT the formula
and Anthony J. Martinez, 20 Weyburne Rd., Hamilton ^ '^
Square, N.J. 08690 "" .
Continuation of Ser. No. 286,489, Jul. 24, 1981, abandoned. This ^
application Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,004 ^
Int. a.3 C07C 69/533 X-CH:-
U.S. a. 560—221
Nol^awiifg. 20 Pages Specification
Compounds of formulae II, III and IV:
I
II
in which X is hydroxy or a good leaving group Intermediate
III is prepared by reacting II with I .l.l-trichloro-2.2.2-t^-
^uoroethane in the presence of a solvent and catalyst. Inter-
mediate III is then dehydro^alogenated in the presence of
base to remove 2 moles of halogen halide per mole of HI in
one or two steps to produce I .
REISSUES
APRIL 5, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ 1 appears in the original patent but fonns no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in italics
indicates additions made by reissue.
Re. 31,195
METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR ASCERTAINING THE
DEGREE OF COMPACnON OF A BED OF MATERIAL
WITH A VIBRATORY COMPACTING DEVICE
Heinz Thurner, BunsoTiigen 29, S-132 00 Saltsjo-Boo, Sweden
Original No. 4,103,554, dated Aug. 1, 1978, Ser. No. 773,783,
Mar. 2, 1977. Application for reissue Feb. 15, 1980, Ser. No.
121,907
Claims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 12, 1976, 7603249;
Aug. 3, 1976, 7608709
Int. a.3 GOIM 7/t)0
U.S. a. 73—573 18 Claims
to allow free rotation of said sleeve with respect to said disk with
the sections separated a predetermined distance, the control device
10. A method for measuring the degree of compaction achieved
in a bed of material by a vibratory roller of a compaction device
comprising steps of:
vibrating the vibratory roller of the compaction device such that
said vibratory roller vibrates against the bed of material to be
compacted to generate a characteristic signal of the vibratory
motion of the vibratory roller against said material, said
characteristic vibratory motion signal having a fundamental
frequency and a plurality of harmonic frequencies;
measuring the amplitude of said characteristic vibratory motion
signal at said fitndamental frequency;
measuring the amplitude of said characteristic vibratory motion
signal for at least the second harmonic of said fundamental
frequency; and
comparing the measured amplitudes of said fundamental fre-
j quency and said at least second harmonic frequency to ascer-
tain the degree of compaction of said bed of material
II
"v:
further comprising constricting means for urging the sections
toward one another so as to constrict said aperture until the disk
engages and restricts rotation of the sleeve.
Re. 31,197
TELEPHONE CORD HAVING BRAIDED OUTER
JACKET
Eugene R. Cocco, Baltimore, Md., assignor to Western Electric
Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Original No. 4,313,645, dated Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 149,597,
May 13, 1980. Application for reissue Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No.
367,188
Int a.' HOIB 7/06
U.S. a. 339—103 M i 6 Qaims
Re. 31,196
THROTTLE CONTROL DEVICE FOR MOTORCYCLES
AND THE LIKE
William E. Sowell, Atlanta, Ga., assignor to Andrew Van Dyken,
Gallatin Gateway, Mont
Original No. 4,137,793, dated Feb. 6, 1979, Ser. No. 831,761,
Sep. 9, 1977. AppUcation for reissue Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No.
231,425
Int a.3 F16D 49/10; G05G 5/16
U.S. a. 74—488 8 Claims
7. A throttle control device, for a throttle apparatus including a
handlebar and throttle operating means mounted on said handle-
bar, said throttle operating means including a sleeve rotatably
mounted on said handlebar, said sleeve being adapted for receiving
a handgrip thereover, and a housing fixed to said handlebar
adjacent to said sleeve, said control device comprising clamping
means for selectively holding said throttle operating means in a
predetermined position, characterized in that said clamping means
includes a disk defining an torture for receiving said sleeve, said
disk being positionqble between said handgrip and said housing
with said handgrip substantially contiguous to said disk, anchoring
means for preventing rotation of said disk with respect to said
housing including a tab fixed to said disPand engageable with
said housing, said disk including at least one open portion separat-
ing adjacent sections of the disk, the aperture being large enough
1. A length of retractile telephone cordage which is coiled in
and heat-set in a heUcal conFiguration, said cordage compris-
ing:
a plurality of conductors, each of said conductors being
inffHlsty<1 with a thermoplastic material which is capable
of being coiled in a helical configuration and of being
heat-set in such configuration;
an inner jacket which is made of a plastic material and which
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
encloses said plurality of individually insulated conduc-
tors; and
a braided outer jacket which encloses and which is in en-
gagement with said plastic inner jacket, said braided outer
jacket including a coating which impregnates an end
portion of the braid and bonds said end portion to said
plas^ inner jacket, said engagement of said braided outer
jacket with said plastic inner jacket being sufficient to
cause said impregnated end portion to adhere to said
plastic inner jacket while being insufficient to [prevent
the inhibition oQ inhibit a substantially uniform distribu-
tion of helices of the retractile cordage when the retractile
cordage is extended.
and having a plurality of teeth, and sensing means having a pair
of poles of magnetic material proximate the tone wheel teeth,
coil means on the poles, and a permanent magnet having one of
its poles connected to the poles on the sensing means for mag-
netizing the poles on the sensing means to induce a signal
voltage in the coil means corresponding to wheel speed upon
rotation of the tone wheel relative to the sensing means, the
poles on the sensing means being phased relative to the teeth
Re. 31,198
METHOD FOR CLEANING ALUMINUM AT LOW
TEMPERATURES
Robert E. Binns, Rosiyn, Pa., assignor to Amchem Products,
Inc., Ambler, Pa.
Original No. 4,124,407, dated Nov. 7, 1978, Ser. No. 755,929,
Dec. 30, 1970. Division of Ser. No. 755,928, Dec. 30, 1976,
Pat. No. 4,116,853, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
607,154, Aug. 25, 1975, Pat. No. 4,009,115, which is a con-
tinuation-in-part of Ser. No. 442,726, Feb. 14, 1974, aban-
doned. Application for reissue Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 189,743
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 22,
1994, has been disclaimed.
Int. C\? B08B 3/08; C23G 1/12
U.S. CI. 134—3 16 Claims
^s~^
on the tone wheel to reduce noise voltage components in the
wheel speed signal voltage due to axial misalignment and
vibration of the tone wheel, and a substantially U-shaped shield
connected to the other pole of the permanent magnet and
enclosing a substantial portion of the sensing means from elec-
tromagnetic noise, a portion of the U-shaped shield being
positioned adjacent the tone wheel remote from the teeth to
provide a return path for magnetic flux.
■KHUVOLT RESPOOSC* V "m Of CICUIM SOLUT10«"(2S'CI
Re. 31,200
RASTER SCAN DISPLAY APPARATUS FOR
DYNAMICALLY VIEWING IMAGE ELEMENTS STORED
IN A RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY ARRAY
Josef S. Sukonick, Cupertino, and Greg J. Tilden, San Jcse, both
of Calif., assignors to Xtrak Corporation, Sunnyvale, Calif.
Original No. 4,070,710, dated Jan. 24, 1978, Ser. No. 650,372,
Jan. 19, 1976. Application for reissue Oct. 9, 1979, Ser. No.
82,592
Int. a.3 G09G 1/16
U.S. a. 340—724 , 45 Qaims
I i I 4
••H Of CLEANTNG SOLUTION
r^^^
■ JKAM-i - LiTta ■ -TDBOf .jO*C «jD
1. A process for cleaning an aluminum surface having thereon
deposits of aluminum fines and lubricant consisting essentially of
removing said deposits by contacting said surface with an aque-
ous cleaning solution comprising hydrofluoric acid in a com-
centration of about 0.005 to about 0. 1 gram per liter of said
aqueous cleaning solution and sulfuric acid in a concentration
of about 1.0 to about 10 g/1 of said aqueous cleaning solution
and having a surfactant dissolved thereia wherein the alumi-
num of said surface is 3004 alloy or an aluminum alloy substan-
tially equivalent thereto.
TOADDITIONM
Re. 31,199
MAGNETIC SPEED SENSOR
Rex W. Presley, Livonia, and Jack R. Lorraine, Howell, botii of
Mich., assignors to The Bendix Corporation, ^gflilthfield,
Mich.
Original No. 3,937,994, dated Feb. 10, 1976, Ser. No. 478,989,
Jun. 13, 1974. AppUcation for reissue Jul. 8, 1977, Ser. No.
814,238
Int. a.J H02K 21/38
U.S. a. 310—168 19 Qaims
1. A speed sensor for a vehicle wheel comprising a tone
wheel driven by the vehicle and subject to axial misalignment
and vibration, the tone wheel being made of magnetic material
2. A computer graphics display system [as recited in claim
1 wherein said video control means includes,] for use in
association with a host computer to provide a visual display of
graphics information contained therein, comprising:
a data bus;
an address bus;
display means for developing a visible image corresponding to
video signals input thereto;
channel adapter means for providing an interface for communi-
cating information including bits of graphics data between
the host computer and said data bus and said address bus;
system control means communicatively coupled to said data bus
and said address bus and operative to generate first and
second control signals;
raster memory means including an array of N rows and M
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
columns of storage sites each capable of storing a bit of graph-
ics data corresponding to a picture element of a graphics
image to be formed by said display means;
raster memory control means communicatively coupled to said
address bus, said data bus, said raster memory means and
said system control means, said raster memory control means
being responsive to said first control signal and operative to
cause bits of graphics data input from the host computer to be
stored in said raster memory means;
video control means communicatively coupled to said address
bus, said data bus, said raster memory means, said display
means, and said system controh means, said video control
means being responsive to said second control signal and
operative to read out in raster fashion data stored in any
selected block ofn rows and m columns of said storage sites,
where n is an integer less than N and m is an integer less than
M. and to use such data to generate a video signal for input
to said display means whereby said display means is caused to
display an image comprised of picture elements correspond-
ing to the data obtained in the selected block of storage sites;
said video memory control means including:
a first control memory for storing a first set of readout con-
trol instructions received from said system control means;
a second control memory for storing a second set of readout
control instructions received from said system control
means;
readout means for reading out bits of graphics data stored in
said raster memory means; and
logic means for causing said readout means to read out daU
stored in a first selected block of storage sites of said raster
memory means under control of said first set of instruc-
tions and to read out data stored in a second selected block
of storage sites of said raster memory means under control
of said "second set of instructions, the dau read out of said
first and second blocks of storage sites being included in
said video signal and said display means being caused to
simultaneously display a first image corresponding to the
data from said first block and a second image correspond-
ing to the data from said second block.
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED APRIL 5, 1983
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,020
AFRICAN VIOLET PLANT
Reinhold Holtkamp, Werther Strasse 112, 4294 Isselburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
I FUed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,516
! Int a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 69 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct cultivar of African violet known by
the cultivar name Vermont and particularly characterized by
the combined features of vigorous growth habit; 9-15 strong
upright flower stems, each of which contains 10-12 or more
deep blue flowers; uniform growth habit, and profuse flower-
ing lush medium green leaves, and by its attractive saleable
plant within 8-9 weeks after potting.
5,021
AFRICAN VIOLET PLANT
Reinhold Holtkamp, Werther Strasse 112, 4294 Isselburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
I Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,517
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 69 1 Qaim
1. A new cultivar of African violet known by the cultivar
name Improved Maine and characterized by the combined
features of profuse blooming habit, with ten or more flower
stems carrying up to 9-12 or more flowers per stem, with the
flowers being basically white but tipped with blue; single
flower form, with an occasional additional petal, frequently in
the center; uniform, compact and vigorous growth habit, es-
sentially continuous blooming, and by its ability to provide an
attractive saleable plant within 8-9 weeks after potting.
I 5,022
AFRICAN VIOLET PLANT
Reinhold Holtkamp, Werther Strasse 112, 4294 Isselburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,556
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 69 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct cultivar of African violet known by
the cultivar Wyoming and particularly characterized by the
combined features of compact growth habit with relatively
small leaves; upright, strong and sturdy stems which tilt
slightly sidewards, forming a profuse, loose flower, head; 9 or
more flower stems, with 9 or more blue and continuously
blooming flowers appearing on each stem, with the center of
each flower being relatively darker, velvety and shiny; uni-
form growth habit; attractive saleable plant with compact
flower head within 7-8 weeks after potting, and by its non-
dropping and long lasting blossoms. ^^
5,023
AFRICAN VIOLET PLANT
Reinhold Holtkamp, Werther Strasse 112, 4294 Isselburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FOed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,628
Int a.' AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 69 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct cultivar of African violet known by
the cultivar name of Chicago and distinguished by combined
characteristics of very compact growth habit for both leaves
and corolla; girl-type leaves, medium green in color with
bright center and serrated on edges; 7 or more upright flower
stems each of which carries 7-11 or more flowers per stem,
with^e flowers being basically white with purple centers and
frequent purple stripes, and having wavy or frilled edges;
single to semi-double and occasional double blossom form;
uniform growth habit, and by its ability to provide an attrac-
tive saleable plant within 10 weeks after potting.
5,024
AFRICAN VIOLET PLANT
Reinhold Holtkamp, Werther Stmse 112, 4294 Isselburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,633
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 69 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct cultivar of African violet known by
the cultivar name Crater Lake and particularly characterized
by the combined features of semi-double to double flowers
with up to ten petals purple-blue in color; seven-eleven strong,
sturdy tilted flower stems, with each carrying eleven or more
flowers; short hairy peduncles; dark brown flower stems and
peduncles; shiny and slightly hairy leaves, vigorous growth
habit, and by its ability to produce a saleable plant with a
compact flower head within 8-9 weeks after potting.
5,025
AFRICAN VIOLET PLANT
Reinhold Holtkamp, Werther Strasse 112, 4294 Isselburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,676
Int a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 69 1 Qaira
1. A new and distinct cultivar of African violet known by
the cultivar name Margit, and particularly characterized by the
combined features of compact growth with relatively small
leaves, very upright and strong flower stems which form a
compact and profuse corolla; nine or more flower stems, with
6-9 or more violet flowers per stem, center of flower is rela-
tively darker, velvety and shiny; uniform growth habit; almost
continuous flowering, and by its ability to provide an attractive
saleable plant with a compact corolla within 7-9 weeks after
potting.
5,026
CHRYSANTHEMUM NAMED QUAKER (G6-217.WS)
May Shoesmith, Woking, England, assignor to Pan American
Plant Co., Parrish, Fla.
Filyl Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,945
' Int a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 74 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct chrysanthemum variety, substantially
as herein shown and described, distinguished by its profuse
production of white daisy-like flowers having spoon-tipped
ray florets, by its adaptability to year round production in
small pots, and by its suitability to be grown as a garden chry-
santhemum.
5,027
CHRYSANTHEMUM NAMED GLAOER (P6-134-W)
Leonard H. Sho^ridtp^'i^eld- Woking, England, assignor to
Pan AmericanPlant'lCBwParrish. Fla.
FUed Octi|PiR981, Ser. No. 312^86
Int a.' AOIH 5/00
VJS. a. Pit— 77 1 Claim
1. A new and distinctive chrysanthemum cultivar, substan-
tially as herein shown and described, particularly character-
ized by the creamy white coloration of its generally standard
type blooms, its vigorous growth habit and its high production
of medium sized flowers.
10
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
5,028
CHRYSANTHEMUM PLANT
Jack M. Meek, and WUliam E. Duffett, both of Salinas, Calif.,
assignors to Yoder Brothers, Inc., Barberton, Ohio
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,332
Int. aj AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Ph.— 78 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct cultivar of Chrysanthemum
morifolium. Ramat., plant known by the cultivar name of Song-
ster, as described and illustrated, and particularly character-
ized as to uniqueness by the combined characteristics of flat
capitulum form; spooned anemone capitulum type; light yel-
low ray floret color, with rapid color oxidation; diameter
across face of capitulum ranging from 85 to 100 mm. at matu-
rity; uniform eight week flowering response; medium plant
height, and semi-spreading branching pattern.
5,029
CHRYSANTHEMUM NAMED BRUIN
May Shoesmith, Woking, England, assignor to Pan American
Plant Company, Parrish, Fla.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,943
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 78 1 Claim
1. A new and distinctive chrysanthemum cultivar, substan-
tially has herein shown and described, characterized by its
small button-type inflorescence of pom pom sha|je and a dis-
tinct bright yellow color, by its capability for year around
production in small pots, and its profuse production of blooms.
\
PATENTS
GRANTED APR. 5, 1983
ERRATA
For Se«
CLASS PATENT NO.
604-024 ; 4,378J97
604-275 4,378.798
604-032 4,378.799-
604-390 4.378.800
604-280 4.378,803
494-054 4.378,906
436-066 4,378.971
436-042 4.378.972
548^72 4.379.091
436-536 4,379, 1 35
377-043 4,379,221
377-081 4,379,222
PATENTS
GRANTED APRIL 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4^78,606
RAIN HAT
Maxine W. Snowden, 1628 15th St, NW., Washington, D.C.
20009
FQed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,986
Int a.3 A42B 7/02
U.S. Q. 2—198 8 Oaims
1. A hat comprising:
a crown having a front periphery and a rear periphery joining
the front periphery at spaced, opposed junctures to enclose
a covering area;
the front periphery being generally inelastic and having a series
of spaced pleats adjacent thereto extending a limited dis-
tance into the covering area to gather the covering area; and
A series of spaced seams sewn in said crown portions to form
said pleats said seams are tucked in opposite directions so
that when the hat is warn the pleats will face outwardly and
downwardly in opposite directions
the rear periphery being elastic to gather the covering area
along the rear periphery whereby the covering area puffs to
loosely enclose the wearer's hair while the front and rear
peripheries fit snugly against the wearer's head generally
adjacent the hairline.
4,378,607
ELBOW REPLACEMENT PROSTHESIS
Thomas G. Wadswortb, 22 Hyde Park Sq., London W2 2NL,
England
Continttation-in-part of Ser. No. 931,319, Aug. 7, 1978,
abandoned. This application Nov. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 210,297
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 31, 1978,
25112/78
Int. a.3 A61F 1/03
U.S. a. 3—1.91 10 Oaims
1. An elbow replacement prosthesis comprising:
a humeral co'^ponent having an articular surface that is
curved concave in a coronal plane and curved convex in
a sagittal plane, a longitudinal U-shaped slot opposed to
said articular surface, said slot being of rectangular section
in the sagittal plane defined by a flat floor and parallel
anterior and posterior walls, said humeral component
further having substantially parallel medial and lateral
walls transverse to said slot,
an arcuate ulnar component having an articular surface that
is curved convex in a coronal plane and curved concave in
a sagittal plane complementary to said articular surface of
said humeral component and has a distal end and a proxi-
mal end,
said aritcular surfaces of said humeral component and said
ulnar component being substantially symmetrical about a
plane perpendicular to the axis of turning of the prosthesis,
said ulnar component has a stem extending therefrom oppo-
site to said articular surface of said ulnar component and
the angle between the forward direction of the tangent to
the distal end of such articular surface and the distal direc-
tion of the longitudinal axis of said stem is more than 90*.
and the articular surface of the ulnar component subtends
at said axis of turning an angle of less than 180*, and
said humeral component has annular grooves in said medial
and lateral walls and longitudinal grooves in said anterior
and posterior walls to assist in cementing the humeral
component in a surgically prepared humeral bone.
4,378,608
APPARATUS FOR COVERING A LIQUID BASIN, AND
RpLLER-BLIND TYPE COVER FOR USE THEREIN
Engbert J. Duintjer, Rolderstraat 13, 9531 TC Borger, Nether-
lands
FUed Nov. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 210,607
Int CV E04H 3/16. 3/18
U.S. CI. 4—500 4 Claims
X-
^
~3
(
/
/
\
1— ^1
,-'
\
li 19
=^^
:jc:
ZP
1. Apparatus for covering a liquid basin, in particular a
swimming pool, the apparatus being arranged outside the
liquid basin, comprising a roller-blind type cover composed of
hollow, elongated slats arranged to be spread over the surface
of the liquid in floating condition, and to be removed from said
surface wherein the longitudinal edge of each of the elongated
slats is provided with a moulding of a first type, and the other
longitudinal edge is provided with a moulding of a second
type, the slats being assembled to form a roller-blind type
cover in a pattern in which, in each adjacent pair of slats, the
longitudinal edge with the moulding of the first type of one slat
is slid into the moulding of the second type of the longitudinal
edge of the other slat to form a slide connection permitting a
hinge effect which, in each adjacent pair of slats includes an
angle of at least approximately 90* in the direction of one of the
sides of the spread roller-blind type cover, and includes a
considerably smaller angle than 90* towards the other side, and
the cover is assembled from a plurality of packets of slats, each
packet including a plurality of slats in which, in one packet, in
each pair of adjacent slats, the hinge effect includes the angle
of at least approximately 90*, relative to the spread cover,
towards one side thereof, and in the adjacent packet of slats
11
12
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
towards the other side thereof, the adjacent packets of slats
being interconnected by means of an elongated coupling mem-
ber having moulded longitudinal edges, one longitudinal edge
of which coupling member is slid into the moulding of the first
type of the longitudinal edge belonging to the end slat of one
packet of slats, and the other longitudinal edge of which cou-
pling member is slid into the moulding of the second type of
the longitudinal edge belonging to the initial slat of the adja-
cent packet of slats to form a coupling which, relative to the
spread roller-blind cover, has a hinge effect including an angle
of substantially 180° to provide for an accordion-wise stacking
of the cover upon retraction of said cover from the surface of
the liquid in the liquid basin.
of said first elements so as to enhance the cleaning effect
obtained with the latter; and
4,378,609
SOFA BED WITH MATTRESS LONGITUDINALLY
COMPRESSED FOR STORAGE AND METHOD
Charles A. Patterson, Long Beach, and Tim M. Uyeda, South
San Gabriel, both of Calif., assignors to Simmons U.S.A.,
Atlanta, Ga.
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,168
Int. a.J A47C/ 7/207
U.S. a. 5—12 R 9 Qaims
(b) grounding means connecting said elements to ground to
thereby enable electrostatic charge on the data carrier to
be dissipated.
4,378,611
MULTIFUNCTION CLEANING AND DRYING DEVICE
James Ninehouser, 97681 Overseas Hwy., Key Largo, Fla.
33037
Filed Jun. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 390,906
Int. CI.3 A47L 7/00
U.S. a. 15—353 4 Qaims
45 5h46 -53
1. A convertible sofa bed including a bed frame movable
from a folded seat position to an unfolded extended bed posi-
tion, and a mattress carried by said bed frame and movable
therewith from the folded seat position to the unfolded ex-
tended bed position, said mattress, when in folded position,
being folded off center whereby one portion of the mattress is
longer than and projects longitudinally beyond the other por-
tion, and means associated with said bed frame for longitudi-
nally compressing the longer portion of the mattress when the
bed frame and mattress are moved in folded condition to the
folded seat position whereby the mattress is stored in a more
compact condition.
4,378,610
DEVICE FOR REMOVING IMPURITIES FROM DATA
CARRIERS
Wolfgang Ermer, Hirten; Bemd Payrhammer, Munich; Heinz
Rapp, Munich, and Alois Bauer, Munich, all of Fed. Rpp. of
Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschan, Le-
verkusen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,600
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 29,
1980, 3007841; Sep. 9, 1980, 3033823
Int. a.3 G03G 21/00
U.S. a. 15—1.5 R 27 Qaims
1. A device for cleaning data carriers, particularly photo-
graphic films, records, magnetic tapes and the like, comprising:
(a) a brush for cleaning a data carrier, said brush including
.separate first and second cleaning elements, and said first
elements being electrically conductive to thereby permit
electrostatic charge on the data carrier to be neutralized
while the data carrier is cleaned by said first elements, said
second elements having a cleaning action superior to that
36
®^'
1. A multi-function cleaning and drying apparatus 10 com-
prising a liquid container 12 having a closed cover 14 thereon,
an air suction pump 22 and motor 24 mounted on and through
said cover, said pump 22 having an air exhaust vent 26 therein
extending externally of said container, a suction inlet pipe 16
having a vacuum hose connection 18 thereon, a drain pipe 20
connected to the bottom of said container 12, said bottom drain
pipe 20 having a standard hose 46 connection thereon provid-
ing a liquid inlet, a pair of spaced-apari valves 48 and 50 in said
bottom pipe 20, an outlet T-pipe 42 connected to said liquid
inlet between its said spaced-apari valves, said outlet connect-
ing T-pipe having a strainer 44 in its T-stem, a standard hose
connection 54 at the end of said outlet T-pipe 42, a liquid high
pressure pump and motor connected to said outlet by a pipe, a
power circuit 30 connecting to both said pump motor 24 on its
said cover 14 and to said high pressure pump motor 40, said
circuit having a normally closed upper fluid level switch 28
extending into said container 14 at its normally high fluid level,
said circuit having normally open low fluid level switch 32,
adjacent the bottom of said container closed when in use but
open when the fluid level is below it and connected to shut off
said high pressure pump motor 40 when the liquid level is
therebelow.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
13
'»^^^„ ^ 4,378,612 discharge a jet of water against and lengthwise of at least one
DOOR CLOSER DELAYED ACTION SPEED CONTROL of the members that will receive matenals from the Hesh side
SYSTEM
Bruce N. Beers, Princeton, 111., assignor to Schlage Lock Com-
pany, San Francisco, Calif. «^ « « „ , %--^
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,888
U.S. a. 16—62
Int. a.3 E05F 3/22
20
8 Claims
1. A door closing device comprising:
a fluid filled cylinder;
a piston reciprocally and slidably displaced within said cyl-
inder forming a first, second and third chambers;
a gear mechanism connected to said piston and adapted to be
further connected to a pivofable door in order t.o transmit
opening and closing movements of the door to the piston
and vice versa;
a spring forceably biasing said piston in one of its slidable
directions;
a first valve means, a second valve means, and third valve
means which sequentially control the fiow of fiuid from
said first chamber to said second chamber;
a fourth valve means for automatically controlling said fiuid
from said third chamber to said second chamber;
said piston is formed with a piston head and sealing surface
at each end jointed together by a reduced center rack gear
section;
said rack section cooperates with a pinion gear to connect
said piston to a pivotable door;
said reduced portion of said piston forms said second cham-
ber;
a first passage means connects said first chamber with said
second chamber sequentially through said first valve
means, said second valve means and said third valve
means;
a second passage means communicating between said third
chamber and said second chamber through said fourth
valve means; and
a third passage means communicating said first fluid passage
alternately with said first chamber and said second cham-
ber at a point between said first valve means and said
second valve rneans.
of the skins from a position adjacent at least one end of said one
member.
4,378,613
FISH SKINNING APPARATUS
Joseph Crouch, Pleasant Valley Rd., Cumberiand, Me.
Filed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,384
Int. a.3 A22B 5/16: A22C 25/1 7
U.S. a. 17—62 14 Qaims
1. Fish skinning apparatus including a chute down which a
fish, skin side down, will slide under the influence of gravity, a
Ijnife member disposed transversely of the chute adjacent the
outfeed end thereof and in a position to be engaged by a fish
sliding down said chute and then to so penetrate the flesh as to
form a flap of skin, first and second rotor members each of
which has lengthwise teeth which are in mesh, a drive for said
rotor members, said rotor members so disposed relative to said
outfeed end of the chute and to said knife member as to catch
said flap and pull said fish against the knife member until the
skin is pulled free from the flesh, and flushing means having
discharge outlet means disposed substantially {larallel to an'
elongated axis of at least one of said members and operable to
4,378,614
AUTOMATIC-RELEASE HOOK FOR SAILBOARD
HARNESS
John McKenney, 20 Vista del Sol, South Laguna, Calif. 92677
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 184,798
Int. a.3 A44B 13/00. 19/00
U.S. a. 24—201 TR 7 Qaims
1. An automatic-release latching hook assembly comprising:
a base plate with a hole in its central portion; a latch hook
extending outward from the front surface of said plate and
having a base portion with a pivot pin through it, said pin
extending generally parallel to said surface, and said base
portion also intruding into said hole and having a notch iatch-
abl\ cngagcable with ;i side of said hole to prevent said hook
from rotating about said pivot pin; and a leaf spring extending
generally parallel to said surface and anchored thereto by
anchoring means at its ends and having a folded central ridge
portion fitting over said pivot pin to position said pin and urge
said notch into engagement with said side of said hole;
whereby an outward pulling force on said hook greater than a
predetermined force will pull said notch out of engagement to
permit said hook to rotate freely about said pivot pin and
thereby disengage a line hooked into said hook.
4,378,615
FASTENER RECEPTACLE HAVING PRESS-IN
MOUNTING
Conrad J. Gunther, Uniondale, N.Y., assignor to Dzus Fastener
Co., Inc., West Islip, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,186
Int. a.^ A44B 17/00
U.S. a. 24—221 A 6 Qaims
1. An improved fastener receptacle which is useful in pro-
viding protection against dust, weather and radiofrequency
leakage for use in a quick release fastener of the type having an
interengageable fastener receptacle and fastener stud with the
stud having a head and a dependent shank with a spiral cam
slot formed with a locking shoulder extending inwardly from
the lower end thereof, said fastener receptacle comprising:
14
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
an enclosing casing having a cylindrical side wall formed
with a serrated toothed shoulder and a groove and rib
immediately adjacent thereto providing a self-clinching
press-in mounting at the inner end of the cylindrical wall,
said casing having a sealing cap enclosing the outer end of
the cylindrical wall;
fr^vrr^ "^^^W-^
arranged for locking said outer clamping member in clamping
condition, said locking means including a first locking element
provided with arresting projections which fix said bent end
portions of said spring ring in the clamping condition, and a
second locking element which is spaced from said first locking
element and arranged to press said bent end portions of said
outer clamping member against said first locking element.
ji v
and locking means engageable with the spiral cam slot of the
stud disposed within the casing and shiftable longitudi-
nally thereof and normally urged towards the upper end
thereof by means of a helical spring disposed within the
casing whereby the locking means may shift downwardly
against the force exerted by the spring when it is engaged
by the spiral cam slot of a fastener stud.
4,378,617
CLASP
Gerard Bums, 38 Kawerau Ave., Devonport, Auckland, New
Zealand
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,381
Int. a.3 A44B 17/00. 21/00
U.S. a. 24—336 3 Oaims
^ 4,378,616
ARRANGEMENT FOR MOUNTING A FLEXIBLE FILM
OR THE LIKE
Artur Fischer, Weinhalde 34, 7244 Tumlingen, Waldachtal, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, and Gerhard Porlein, Tumlingen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Artur Fischer, Tumlingen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,240
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 22,
1979, 2942634
Int. a.^ E04B 1/40
L.S. a. 24—245 R 12 Claims
1. An arrangement for mounting a flexible film or the like,
particularly to seal a substrate, comprising an inner clamping
member connected with a substrate and having an outer sur-
face onto which a film is placed, said inner clamping member
having an undercut portion adjacent to the substrate; an outer
clamping member surrounding the film in the region of said
undercut portion of said inner clamping member so that the
film is clamped between said inner and outer clamping mem-
bers, said outer clamping member being a spring ring which is
open and has two end portions which are bent in direction
away from one another; a disc-shaped carrying member associ-
ated with said outer clamping member so that the latter presses
said disc-shaped carrying member against the fdm; and locking
means provided on said disc-shaped carrying member and
1. For use to support the marginal edge of pliable sheets, a
one-piece normally open clip of bendable plastic material
comprising,
a first and second hingedly connected leaf, a hinge zone, each
leaf having a zone adjacent said hinged connection and a
first hole outboard of said hinged connection, each said first
hole being at a common distance and relative location to
register with one another when the inside surfaces are in
confronting relation;
each said leaf having an edge bounding an inside surface to
confront one another and an outside surface, and each leaf
defining a substantial area to overlay a portion of opposite
marginal surfaces of a shade sheet and said edges presenting
a smooth surface free and clear of pointed comers as the
leaves are viewed in plan, the edge of each leaf having a
length parallel to the axis of the hinge zone greater than the
length of the edges perpendicular to the hinge zone,
said hinged connection comprising a generally circular zone
including reinforcing ribs and defining an axial through
passageway,
a plurality of locating pins on said first leaf extending generally
perpendicularly of the inside surface and arranged in spaced
relation about said hole,
a plurality of recesses in the inside surface of the second leaf for
companionate interengagement in registry with the pins for
orienting the leaves when in overlaying relation of the mar-
gin of a sheet and transmitting forces to the leaves, and
lock means comprising a pair of male member each extending
from the second leaf towards said first leaf and being located
adjacent the outboard edge of the second leaf and one of the
edges perpendicular to the axis of the hinge zone and includ-
ing a barbed outer end for hooked-up engagement in a
throughhole provided in the first leaf to hold the pins in their
respective recesses and to clamp the clip to the margin of a
sheet.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
IS
! 4^78,618
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING VELOUR-NEEDLEFELT
WEBS
Richard Dilo, Eberbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Oskar DUo Maschinenfabrik KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 108,041
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 11,
1979, 2900935
Int. aj D04H 18/00. 11/08
U.$. a. 28—110 3 Claims
1. A machine for the production of valour needlefelt webs in
the form of a tube, said machine comprising a frame, a shaft
mounted in said frame, a lamella plate helically wound and
coupled to said shaft and having a constant pitch, said plate
being associated with at least one needle beam equipped with
felting and fork needles which can be radially moved towards
the shaft, at least one fleece band feeding means and at least one
tube turning and feeding means comprising endless belt means
associated with said shaft in the working area of the needles of
said needle beam.
4,378,619
METHOD FOR ATTACHING CONNECTORS IN FOIL
CAPACITORS
Walter Billeriss; Josef Hdsl, both of Landshut, and Werner
Dresen, Obergangkofen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Ernst Roederstein SpezialfidHik Fiir Kondensatoren
GmbH, Landshut, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 46,903, Jon. 8, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 327,167
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 22,
1978, 2827469
Int. a.3 HOIG 13/00. 1/14
U.S. a. 29— 25.42 1 Claim
wm—
1. A method for attaching connecting wires to wound foil
capacitors which consist of alternately arranged wound strips
of metal foil and therinoplastic plastic foil, said plastic foil
strips protruding laterally beyond said metal foil strips, com-
prising the steps of providing a connecting wire with a bent
end, providing at least one inserted metal strip having out-
wardly projecting end portions, said metal strip being welded
to a corresponding metal foil strip, soldering said connecting
wire with said bent end by means of a soldering piece arranged
at said end of said connecting wire to said outwardly project-
ing end portions of said at least one metal strip, and pressing
said outwardly projecting end portions of said metal strip into
said protruding plastic foil, wherein the improvement com-
prises that said metal strip being formed with a U-shaped
configuration and being dimensioned in such a way that said
end portions are formed as two ends arranged in said wound
capacitor in diametrically opposed locations, said bent end of
said connecting wire being soldered to said two ends of said
U-shaped metal strip, said two ends of said U-shaped metal
strip being arranged to project outwardly of said foil capacitor
and being bent to extend toward each other.
4,378,620
METHOD OF MAKING SMALL SIZED WOUND
CAPACITORS
Bernard La?ene, Ocean, N.J., assignor to Electronic Concepts,
Inc., Eatontown, N J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 108,593, Dec. 31, 1979, abandoned.
This application Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 330,867
Int. a.' HOIG 4/18
U,S. CI. 29—25.42 2 Oaims
26^
22-
28-
32 1 34 10.
^1 y,l4 '' ,I2\ I I ,20]
1. A method of fabricating substantially small sized wound
capacitors comprising plating a plurality of continuous regu-
larly spaced metallic electrodes on one side of each of a pair of
dielectric plastic webs, said electrodes being parallel to the
web and further the electrodes being separated from each
other forming a plurality of regularly spaced unplated length-
wise directed openings;
(a) arranging the electrodes so that in each pair of webs at
least one has an electrode lying along one edge and the
other has an op>en area lying along one edge;
(b) mating said pair of webs so that the unplated side of a first
of the webs is in physical contact with the plated side of
the second web and further arranged so that the plated
edge of one web lies over the unplated edge of the other
so that the remainder of the electrodes in each web are in
a staggered and overlapping arrangement relative to each
other such that substantially the same portion of the re-
maining electrodes on said pair of webs will fall over the
remaining open spaces in said webs;
^ (c) winding a length of said mated webs to form a cylindrical
layered coil to form an alternating arrangement of contin-
uous electrodes spaced from layer to layer along the outer
edges of said coil as it is wound;
(d) flattening said cylindrical layered coil to form a substan-
tially rectangular layered coil;
(e) tempering the plastic in said webs so that the electrodes
and plastic are fixed together with each electrode being
fully insulated from those around it without the addition
of any separate adhesive;
(0 chopping the coil to provide a clear cut through the
alternating open spaces and electrodes in the webs such
that at the chopped edges for every layer there is an
arrangement in which an electrode is at one edge and an
open space at the other, alternating from one layer to the
next, the coil being chopped only once to form an individ-
ual capacitor of wound continuous electrodes with no
further chopping or tempering of said capacitors; and
(g) bonding conductors to the chopped edges of said capaci-
tors, said conductors making electrical contact with each
of the plated electrodes lying at the edge to form a finished
16
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
capacitor steps c. d, e, f, and g being performed in se-
quence.
4,378,621
HEADSTOCK FOR A UNIVERSAL MILLING AND
DRILLING MACHINE
Werner Babel, Pfronten-Meilingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Maho Werkzeugmaschinenbau Babel & Co.,
Pfronten, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No, 204,867
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 7,
1979, 2944983
Int. a.' B23Q 39/02; B23C 1/JO
U.S. a. 29—26 A 4 Claims
1. A universal milling and drilling machine headstock having
a vertical front face, said headstock comprising:
main drive means in said headstock,
a horizontal spindle in said headstock extending through said
front face;
a first surface on said headstock facing upwardly at a 45'
angle from and above said front face, said first surface
having a central opening therethrough with a first axis
normal to said first surface;
a swivel head rotatably mounted to said headstock and
havmg a second surface in confronting juxtaposition with
said first surface, said swivel head being rotatable between
a first position and a second position;
a hollow cylindrical extension mounted to said swivel head
and extending into said headstock through said opening
coaxial with said first axis, said swivel head being rotat-
able about said first axis;
clamping means coupled to said headstock and surrounding
said cylindrical extension, said clamping means compris-
ing at least two annular segments shaped and configured
to engage a mating surface on said cylindrical extension to
selectively prevent rotation of said swivel head with re-
spwct to said headstock;
a vertical milling head mounted on said swivel head so that
when said swivel head is in said first position, said vertical
milling head is vertically adjacent said front face of said
headstock, and when said swivel head is in said second
position said front face is free of said vertical milling head;
horizontal drive shaft means connected to said horizontal
spindle;
vertical drive shaft means comprising a first part mounted in
said headstock parallel to said horizontal spindle and a
second part mounted in said swivel head, said first and
second parts being connectable when said swivel head is
in said first position; and
means for selectively coupling said main drive means to said
horizontal and said vertical drive shaft means.
4,378,622
METHOD OF MAKING COMPRESSIBLE PRINTING
ROLLER
Melvin D. Pinkston, Waynesville, and Wayne W. Easley, Lake
Junaluska, both of N.C., assignors to Dayco Corporation,
Dayton, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 850,435, Nov. 10, 1977, abandoned. This
application Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,764
Int. a.3 B21H 1/14: B21K 1/02
U.S. a. 29—148.4 D 1 Qaim
1. A method of making a printing roller comprising the steps
of, providing a central support made of a comparatively rigid
material, forming a tubular inner layer of a salt-leached micro-
porous rubber material that has voids therein comprising be-
tween 30 and 70% of the total volume of said inner layer and
defined by cavities interconnected by passages, disposing said
tubular inner layer of microporous rubber material around said
central support so that said inner layer is under radial expan-
sion and is secured to said central support solely by the result-
ing friction fit therewith, and placing a polymeric tubular outer
layer around said inner layer in such a manner that said inner
layer is under compression by said outer layer whereby said
outer layer is secured to said inner layer solely by the resulting
friction fit therewith, said layers cooperating to define said
printing roller and assure said roller provides optimum contact
between said roll and material being coated thereby at compar-
atively small nip pressures, said disposing step comprising the
step of forcing said central support within said tubular inner
layer upon relatively moving said central support and tubular
inner layer towards each other and thereby causing said radial
expansion of said tubular inner layer around said central sup-
port and the frictionally holding of said inner layer there-
against, said placing step comprising the step of partially com-
pressing said inner layer radially inwardly and relatively mov-
ing said outer layer around said inner layer during said partial
compression such that upon release thereof said inner layer
expands radially against said outer layer so that said outer layer
is held firmly in position against said inner layer solely by the
resulting frictional engagement between said inner layer and
said outer layer, said partially compressing step being achieved
solely by relatively axially moving said outer layer over said
inner layer.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
17
4,378,623
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR THE PRODUCTION
OF DISC WHEELS MADE OF SHEET METAL,
PARTICULARLY LIGHT SHEET METAL
Theo Zimmermann, Konigswinter, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Lemmerz-Werke KGaA, Konigswinter, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,487
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 7,
1980, 3008738
Int. a.3 B21H 1/02; B21K 1/32: B23P 11/02
U.S. a. 29—159.01 • 5 Oaims
1. A process for assembling and joining together a rim and its
dish into a disc wheel, wherein said rim and dish are each made
from a sheet of a light metal, said process comprising the steps
of:
(a) Pre-fabricating said rim and said dish so as to be over-
sized in their diameter with respect to their final diameter
and in such a manner that the dish and rim may be assem-
bled together in a manner substantially free of radial de-
formation;
(b) Permanently shaping the assembled dish and rim by
means of a tool acting first radially inwardly on the rim,
and then radially pressing the rim and dish together in said
inwardly radial direction until the dish bears against an
inner back-up support and a permanent press fit of the dish
in the rim is achieved;
(c) Calibrating the rim simultaneously with the said shaping
of step (b) by means of said tool;
(d) Then welding the said dish to said rim while maintaining
said press fit.
4,378,624
SCALPEL BLADE REMOVER
Roger E. Klingenberg, Wollaston, Mass., assignor to Braintree
Scientific, Inc., Braintree, Mass.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,479
Int. C\? B23P 19/04
U.S. a. 29—239 10 Claims
a movable block also mounted on said base, at least one of said
blocks being made of resilient material, means for moving said
movable block toward and away from said fixed block, move-
ment toward said fixed block being effective to clamp said
blade between confronting surfaces of said fixed and movable
blocks, and means formed adjacent one end of one of said
blocks to contact an end of said blade and disengage said blade
from said handle, movement of said movable block away from
said fixed block permitting separation of said handle from said
blade.
4,378,625
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING IMPROVED
REFRIGERATABLE BEVERAGE CONTAI?<ER HOLDER
Thomas L. Crisman; Stanley R. Moore, and Harry R. Weaver,
all of Dallas, Tex., assignors to Freezesleeves of America,
Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 133,452, Mar. 24, 1980, Pat. No. 4,299,100.
This application Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,377
Int. Cy? B23P 11/02
U.S. a. 29—450 6 Oaims
1. A method of manufacturing a refreezable beverage con-
tainer holder comprising the steps of:
providing a cylindrical outer cup of foam material;
providing a cylindricjal inner cup having a height less than
that of the outer cup and a radially extending fianged
region at an open end which comprises an inwardly and
downwardly tapered rib circumferentially disposed about
the mner cup that has an outer diameter greater than the
inner diameter of the outer cup;
injecting freezeable gel into said outer cup;
inserting said inner cup into said outer cup to squeeze said
gel up around said inner cup; and
embedding said flanged region within the side walls of an
open end of said outer cup by press-fitting the inner cup
into the outer cup with the inner and outer cup side wall
spaced from each other to seal said gel behind a juncture
of closure between said inner and outer cups.
1. A device for removing a scalpel blade from a handle
comprising a support base, a fixed block mounted on said base,
4,378,626
COOLED MIRROR CONSTRUCHON BY CHEMICAL
VAPOR DEPOSITION
Frederick G. Eitel, North Palm Beach, Fla., assignor to United
Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Coui.
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,426
Int. a? B22D 11/126; B23P 15/26
U.S. a. 29—527.2 4 Qaims
1. A method of forming a cooled laser mirror comprising the
steps of:
(a) positioning a plurality of disposable cores for coolant
passages at predetermined positions in a coolant passage
array;
(b) depositing material from a chemical vapor on said plural-
ity of disposable cores in sufficient volume to band to-
gether said plurality of disposable cores in a mirror face-
plate;
18
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
(c) removing said disposable cores, whereby coolant pas-
sages remain in said mirror faceplate;
(d) attaching coolant inlet and outlet means to said coolant
passages; and
(e) polishing one side of said mirror faceplate.
' 4^78,627
SELF-ALIGNED METAL PROCESS FOR HELD EFFECT
TRANSISTOR INTEGRATED CTRCUITS USING
POLYCRYSTALLINE SILICON GATE ELECTRODES
Chakrapani G. Jambotkar, Hopewell Junction, N.Y., assignor to
International Business Machines Corporation, Annonk, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 167,172
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/302. 21/31
U.S. a. 29—571 8 Oaims
e n 'H" "•■*' >'.
a a ;: m
y 1 1 1 1-f.j.iJAK.j I ^.i:ji\t^-i^-m.
'<CS^ '
o
(J-
"h^
^TTTS'
--J-
1. A method of forming a short-channel field effect transistor
integrated circuit comprising:
providing a silicon body having monocrystalline silicon
regions dielectrically isolated from similar regions at a
major surface of said body;
providing a substantially vertically sided silicon dioxide
mask located over the said major surface of at least some
of said monocrystalline silicon regions;
reactively ion etching the exposed said monocrystalline
silicon to a depth of between about 0.4 to 1.5 micrometers;
ion implanting a dosage of oxygen into the exposed said
{ monocrystalline silicon at low energy and annealing the
structure to form a silicon dioxide layer covering the
horizontal said exposed monocrystalline silicon regions
I while allowing the vertically exposed said monocrystal-
line silicon to remain exposed;
forming on said major surface of said silicon body a doped
polycrystalline silicon layer substantially the same thick-
I ness as said silicon dioxide mask and in all areas other than
the locations of said silicon dioxide mask;
ion implanting a dosage of nitrogen at low energy and an-
nealing the structure to form a /silicon nitride layer cover-
ing said doped polycrystalline silicon layer;
heating the structure to diffuse impurities through said verti-
cally exposed monocrystalline silicon to form FN junc-
tions therein;
etching away said silicon dioxide mask to provide substan-
tially vertical and substantially horizontal surfaces on the
structure and with openings to the surface of said mono-
crystalline silicon regions;
depositing a first conformal insulating coating on both said
substantially vertical and substantially horizontal surfaces;
reactive ion etching said first conformal insulating coating to
substantially remove said first conformal coating from
said horizontal surfaces and to provide narrowed said
openings therebetween due to presence of said insulating
coating on the vertical surfaces of said monocrystalline
silicon regions;
forming a short -channel region through said narrowed open-
ings;
etching away said first conformal insulating coating on the
vertical surfaces;
depositing a second conformal insulating coating on both
said substantially vertical and substantially horizontal
surfaces;
reactive ion etching said second conformal coating to sub-
stantially remove said second conformal coating from said
horizontal surfaces and to provide narrow dimensioned
dielectric regions on said silicon body;
thermally oxidizing the surface of said monocrystalline sili-
con between certain of said narrow dimensioned regions
to form the gate dielectric regions for said integrated
circuit;
forming a highly doped second polycrystalline silicon layer
on the designated said gate dielectric regions for said field
effect transistor integrated circuits wherein said layer is
the gate electrode for said circuits;
removing the remaining said first polycrystalline silicon
layer by reactive ion etching to leave the said narrow
dimensioned regions and said second polycrystalline sili-
con layer on said gate dielectric on said silicon body; and
forming a conductive layer on said silicon body which has
portions thereof electrically separated by said narrow
dimensioned regions for contacting the said source/drain
regions.
4,378,628
COBALT SILiaDE METALLIZATION FOR
SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED ORCUITS
Hyman J. Levinstein, Berkeley Heights; Shyam P. Murarka,
and Ashok K. Sinha, both of New Providence, all of N.J.,
assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Mur-
ray HiU, N.J.
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,914
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/285
U.S. a. 29—571 22 Claims
1. A method for fabricating cobalt disilicide electrode metal-
lization contacts for a semiconductor integrated circuit includ-
ing heating a cobalt silicide layer overlying in contact with
exposed silicon portions of a patterned silicon wafer to a tem-
perature of at least 700° C, whereby said layer is converted
into a layer essentially of cobalt disilicide, and forming a layer
of silicon dioxide on said layer of cobalt disilicide.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
19
4^78,629
SEMICONDUCTOR EMBEDDED LAYER TECHNOLOGY
INCLUDING PERMEABLE BASE TRANSISTOR,
FABRICATION METHOD
Carl O. Bozler, Sudbury, Mass.; Gary D. Alley, Londonderry,
N.H.; WilUam T. Lindley, Lexington, and R. Allen Murphy,,
Hudson, both of Mass., assignors to Massachusetts Institute
of Technology, Cambridge, Mass.
FUed Aug. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 65,514
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/20. 21/74, 21/95
U.S. a. 29—580 6 Claims
4,378,630
PROCESS FOR FABRICATING A HIGH PERFORMANCE
PNP AND NPN STRUCTURE
Cheng T. Homg, San Jose, Calif.; Richard R. Konian, Pough-
keepsie, N.Y.; Robert O. Schwenker, San Jose, Calif., and
Armin W. Weider, Stamberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to International Business Machines Corporation, Armonk,
N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 146,921, May 5, 1980, PaL No. 4,339,767.
This appUcation Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,627
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/203. 21/22
U.S. a. 29—580 8 Qaims
p^irpn™^^^
.]-
^C^i^n.=.J^jp^
fiT^^z^V-Rj:^~j]=
1. A method of fabricating a transistor device of the type
comprising a single type of semiconductor material divided
into emitter and collector regions by a metal base layer, the
method comprising:
growing a single semiconductor crystal to form a first emitter
or collector region of the transistor;
providing a Schottky barrier metal base layer on a surface of
the crystal, the thickness of the metal base layer being in the
order of 10% of the zero bias depletion width in the semi-
conductor, the metal base layer having slits therein of a
width in the order of the zero bias depletion width of the
semiconductor; and
growing a single semiconductor crystal from the first region
over the metal base layer to provide a second collector or
emitter region of the transistor.
fm^] L^-U
1. WH ,l»
ffl^^I^iXS^a'
1. In a process for forming on a planar surface of a P type
silicon substrate (1, FIG. 1) an improved NPN transistor and
20
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
an improved PNP transistor, said process including the follow-
ing steps:
(a) form an N type region (2. FIG. 1) in said planar surface
of said P type silicon substrate;
(b) form a thm epitaxial layer (3. FIG. 1) df N type silicon on
said surface of said substrate:
(c) form a thin silicon dioxide layer (4. FIG. 1) on said
exposed surface of said substrate;
(d) form a silicon nitride fayer (5. FIG. 1) on said exposed
surface of said substrate;
(e) form a polysilicon layer (6, FIG. 1) on said exposed
surface of said substrate;
(0 remove all but a predetermined portion (6', FIG. 2) of
said polysilicon layer (6);
(g) chemically vapor deposit a silicon dioxide layer (7. FIG
3) on said exposed surface of said substrate;
(h) reactive ion etch the exposed surface of said substrate to
expose the surface of said polysilicon region (6', FIG. 4)
and said surface of said silicon nitride layer (5, FIG. 4);
(i) remove said polysilicon region (6');
(j) remove the exposed portion of silicon nitride layer (5);
(k) provide a mask (8, FIG. 5) having windows Wl and W2
and wherein said window W2 has a block out frame "B";
(I) utilizing said mask having windows Wl. W2 and block
out frame "B". remove the exposed portions of the silicon
dioxide layer (4. FIG. 5);
(rp) remove the mask (8);
(n) utilizing the remaining portion of the silicon dioxide
layer (4) and blockout frame "B" as a block out mask
provide shallow trenches (STl. ST2 and ST3. FIG. 6);
(o) remove the remaining portion of silicon dioxide layer (4)
and blockout frame "B" (FIG. 6);
(p) chemically vapor deposit a layer of silicon dioxide layer
(9, FIG. 7) on the exposed surface of the substrate;
(q) form a mask (10. FIG. 7) having windows W3, W4 and
W5;
(r) utilize reactive ion etching to remove the portions of the
silicon dioxide layer (9. FIG. 7) exposed by windows W3.
W4 and W5 of the mask (10);
(s) remove mask (10);
(t) utilize reactive ion etching and the windows W3, W4 and
W5 in silicon dioxide layer (9) to provide deep trenches
DTI. DT2 and DT3 in the exposed surface of the sub-
strate (FIG. 8);
(u) remove the remaining portion of silicon dioxide layer (9,
FIG. 8);
(v) thermally oxidize the exposed surface of the substrate to
provide oxide layer (11. FIG. 9);
(w) form a relatively thick oxide layer (12, FIG. 10) on the
exposed surface of the substrate, said relatively thick oxide
layer (12) filling said shallow trenches (STl, ST2 and
ST3). said deep trenches (DTI, DT2 and DT3) and tend-
ing to planarize said exposed surface of said substrate;
(x) utilizing a photoresist material (13, FIG. 10) planarize the
exposed surface of the substrate;
(y) utilize reactive ion etching to thin back the exposed
surface of the substrate to the surface of the epitaxial layer
' (3. FIG. 11);
(z) form a block out mask (14, FIG. 12) to block out a prede-
termined region (B, FIG. 11) of the epitaxial layer;
(a-1) ion implant arsenic ions, A5 + , into the exposed regions
. of the epitaxial layer (FIG. 12), the regions implanted with
arsenic are the emitter of the NPN device, the collector
reach through reach region of the NPN device, and the
reach through region of the PNP device (FIG. 12);
(b-1) form a block out mask (15, FIG. 13) to block out prede-
termined portions of said epitaxial layer;
(c-1) ion implant phosphorous ions, P+, into the exposed
surface of the substrate;
(d-1) remove the block-out mask (15);
(e-1) form a mask (16, FIG. 14) having windows W6 and
W7;
(f-1) utilize a silicon dioxide etchant to provide recesses (Rl,
R2 and R3, FIG. 15) in the exposed surface of the sub-
strate;
(g-1) vacuum evaporate a platinum, Pt, film (17, FIG. 16) on
the exposed surface of the substrate;
(h-1) etch the exposed surface of the substrate with an etch-
ant which etches N+ regions (18, 20, FIG. 17) at greater
rate than N" region (19, FIG. 17), the etching being
terminated when the N+ regions, as compared to the N~
region, are over etched a predetermined depth;
(i-1) remove the platinum, Pt, film;
(j-1) thermally oxidize the exposed surface of the substrate to
provide a relatively thick oxide layer (21, FIG- 18) on the
exposed N+ regions and a relatively thin oxide layer on
the N~ regions;
(k-1) remove the relatively thin oxide layer on the N" re-
gions;
(1-1) chemically vapor deposit a silicon nitride, Si3N4 film
(22, FIG. 19) on the exposed surface of the substrate;
(m-1) convert the silicon nitride Si3N4 film (22) on the N"
regions to anodic silicon dioxide;
(n-1) remove the anodic silicon dioxide from the N" regions;
(o-l) chemically vapor deposit a relatively thick P+ polysili-
con layer (23, FIG. 20) on the exposed surface of the
substrate, said relatively thick P+ polysilicon layer filling
said recesses Rl, R2 and R3 (FIG. 19);
(p-1) utilizing a photoresist material (24, FIG. 20) planarize
the exposed surface of the substrate; and
(q-1) utilize reactive ion etching to thin back the exposed
surface of the substrate to the silicon nitride film (22, FIG.
21).
4,378,631
METHOD OF FABRICATING A CHARGE PLATE FOR
AN INK JET PRINTING DEVICE
Donald L. Head, Kettering, and Edward A. Dudis, Vandalia,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Mead Corporation, Dayton,
Ohio
Filed Jun. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 161,986
Int. a.3 HOIR 43/00
U.S. C\. 29—825 7 Qaims
1. A method of forming a charge plate for an ink jet printing
device, wherein the steps comprising:
coating a relatively more difficult to deplate metal on a
relatively easier to deplate core wire;
positioning a plurality of said coated wires on a nonconduc-
tive support plate having notches formed in an edge por-
tion thereof at predetermined equal intervals and at suffi-
cient depth to locate said coated wires in parallel spaced
relation along said edge portion; r
securing said coated wires to said support plate with non-
conductive means;
making said coated wires flush with opposite surfaces of said
support plate longitudinal to longitudinal axes of said
coated wires;
deplating said core wires to leave said coating to form
charge rings in said charge plate defining holes through
which droplets of printing liquid can pass to be charged.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
21
4^78,632 during a shaving operation, and spring finger biasing means
IMETHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR PULL-FITTING integral with said body portion and exercising a bias against
CONTACTS
J. Preston Ammon; Harry R. Weaver, both of Dallas, Tex., and ^^
Richard O. Norman, Camarillo, Calif., assignors to ELFAB
I Corporation, Addison, Tex.
FUed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,994
Int. a.3 H05K 3/00; B23P 79/00
U.S. a. 29—845 17 Qaims
1. A meniod of mounting contacts having tails protruding in
two spaced parallel rows from the bottom of a mounting mem-
ber by applying a longitudinal force to said contacts relative to
said mounting member; said method comprising the steps of:
providing a support member for supportij^ the mounting
member between the contact tails protruding therefrom,
said support member including a plurality of apertures
therethrough;
positioning said mounting member and contacts upon said
support member;
clamping the contact tails to the support member;
providing means for moving the mounting member up-
wardly relative to the support member and contacts
clamped thereto, which means includes mounting pins
slidably positioned within said apertures and extendable
through said support member; and
moving the mounting member upwardly relative to the
support member and contacts clamp)ed thereto by extend-
ing said mounting pins through said support member and
into engagement with said mounting member.
4,378,633
RAZOR BLADE ASSEMBLY -^
Chester F. Jacobson, Southboro, Mass., assignor to The Gillette
Company, Boston, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 101,101, Dec. 7, 1979, Pat, No.
4,270,268. This application Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,711
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 2, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. C1.3 B26B 21/06, 21/22
U.S, a. 30—47 9 Qaims
1. A razor blade assembly comprising a body member, a
guard member fixed to said body member for movement
thereon, blade means mounted on said body member for move-
ment thereon, said guard member and said blade means being
independently movable in response to forces encountered
said guard member and said blade means, said guard member
being a rotalable cylindrically-shaped member.
4,378,634
RAZOR BLADE ASSEMBLY
Chester F. Jacobson, Southboro, Mass., assignor to The Gillette
Company, Boston, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 101,101, Dec. 7, 1979, Pat. No.
4,270,268. This application Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,976
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 2, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.-^ B26B 21/06. 21/22
U.S. a. 30—47 9 Qaims
1. A razor blade assembly comprising a body member, a
guard member fixed to said body member for movement
thereon, blade means mounted on said body member for move-
ment thereon, said guard member and said blade means bemg
independently movable in response to forces encountered
during a shaving operation, and spring finger biasing means
integral with said body portion and exercising a bias against
said guard member and said blade means, said blade means
comprising a shaped member having a base portion and a
cutter portion, said base and cutter portions defining therebe-
tween an obtuse angle.
11 Qaims
4,378,635
HAIR TRIMMING DEVICE
Lorraine Burch, 3813 Blaine, Detroit, Mich. 48206
Filed Aug. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 180,029
Int. C\? B26B 21/10
U.S. Q. 30—58
1. A hair trimming device comprising a handle;
a blade-like member;
a blade support;
said blade-like member being mounted on said support;
means for mounting said support on said handle;
said suppori comprising two plate-like members hingedly
<:onnected about a axis parallel to said handle;
means for locking said blade support in association with said
handle, with said blade firmly held in said blade support;
a fiexible connection link movably extending along said han-
dle;
means for alternately extending and retracting said flexible
connection link along said handle;
1029 O.G.— 2
22
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
said flexible connection link being fixedly connected to said
plate-like members;
said flexible connection link being flexible transversely of its
length;
said handle having a ledge extending transversely of an outer
end thereof;
said blade support being urged against and supported upon said
ledge with said plate-like members supporting said blade-like
member when said connection link is in a first retracted
position; and
said flexible connection link being movable to a second posi-
tion wherein said plate-like members are spaced from said
ledge and said flexible connection link projects outwardly
from said handle with said flexible connection link being
flexible transversely of its length sufficiently for movement
of one of said plate-like members relative to the other for
insertion of a blade between the latter members.
said first pivot means, and having a handle portion extend-
ing radially outward with respect to said first pivot axis;
drive sprocket means mounted for rotation about said sec-
ond pivot axis and having sprocket teeth meshing with
said main gear teeth;
pawl means engageable with said drive sprocket means and
responsive to angularly recipf^ating motion of said
ratchetting lever member, within a predetermined angular
range with respect to said one lever member, for provid-
ing ratchetted closing motion between said blade portion
and said holding portion;
means limiting angular motion of said ratchetting lever
member beyond said angular range in one direction for
holding said ratchetting lever member in fixed angular
relation to said one lever member during further angular
motion of said ratchetting lever member in said one direc-
tion, with respect to the other of said cutting lever mem-
ber and said holding lever member, to effect rapid opening
of said cutting portion from said holding portion; and
means limiting angular motion of said ratchetting lever
member beyond said angular range in the opposite direc-
tion for holding said ratchetting lever member in fixed
angular relation to said one lever member during further
angular motion of said ratchetting lever member in said
opposite direction, with respect to the other of said lever
member and said holding lever member, to effect rapid
closing of said cutting portion toward said holding por-
tion.
4^78,636
CUTTING TOOL
John R. Wick, 11143 Hendrix St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19116
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,771
Int. aj B26B 13/00
U.S. a. 30—92 12 Oaims
4,378,637
HEDGE CUTTING ARRANGEMENT
Hermann Kieser, Niirtingen, and Norbert Schur, Metzingen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Metabowerke
GmbH & Co., Niirtingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,120
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 26,
1980, 3007110
Int. a.3 AOIG 3/04
U.S. a. 30—216 32 Qaims
i
1. A tool suitable for severing thick multistrand communica-
tions cable or the like, comprising:
a cutting lever member, a holding lever member, and first
pivot means pivotally mounting said cutting lever member
and said holding lever member to each other for rotation
about a first pivot axis intermediate their respective oppo-
site ^ds;
said cuttihg lever member comprising a blade portion on one
side of said pivot axis having a cutting edge facing said
holding lever member;
said holding lever member comprising a concave holding
portion on said one side of said pivot axis and facing said
cutting edge to provide an opening between said cutting
edge and said holding (>ortion for receiving an object to be
severed by movement toward each other of said cutting
edge and said holding portion;
a ratchetting lever member, and second pivot means pivot-
ally mounting said ratchetting lever member to one of said
cutting lever member and said holding lever member on
the opposite side of said first pivot means, said ratchetting
\ lever member having a ratchetting handle portion extend-
ing radially outward with respect to the pivot axis of said
second pivot means;
the other of said cutting lever member and said holding lever
member comprising an integral main gear having main
gear teeth thereon extending coaxially with said axis of
V
y'-Ai
r
/v— 1
1
o o
tf
kr^.
.,4
Vi '// " /y.
1. A hedge cutting arrangement, comprising cutting means;
a drive motor arranged to drive said cutting means; a coupling
arranged between said drive motor and said cutting means and
connecting said drive motor with and disconnecting said drive
motor from said cutting means; two handles arranged for two
hand operating the arrangement; and two switching devices
each associated with a respective one of said handles and
having an actuating member movable between switching on
and switching off positions, said coupling being connected
with both actuating members so that when even only one of
said actuating members moves to its switching off position,
said cutting means disconnects from said drive motor.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
f
23
4^78,638
CHANGEABLE SURVEYORS ROD
Ernest H. Harder, Rte. 1, Whitewater, Kans. 67154
FUed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,159
Int. a.3 GOIC 15/06
U.S. a. 33—293 8 Claims
4378,639
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNIFORMLY
DRYING A CONTINUOUS WEB OF CELLULOSIC
nBERS
Peter J. Walker, Pointe Qaire, Canada, assignor to Midland-
Ross Corporation, Oeveland, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 971,854, Dec. 21, 1978, abandoned.
I This application Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,608
Int. a.3 F26B 3/24. 13/08
U.S. a. 34—12 13 Oaims
1. A method of uniformly drying a continuous web of wet
fibrous material as the web travels along a processing line,
comprising:
(a) constantly monitoring the moisture content of the web to
sense dry streaks therein below a certain desired moisture
content, when the web is in a dry end of the line where the
moisture content of the web is less than 20%, by weight,
and
(b) adding moisture to the web in areas thereof which are
spaced substantially upstream from the dry end and longi-
tudinally aligned with any dry streaks sensed in the dry
end of the line, the moisture being added in accordance
with the moisture content of any such dry streaks, when
the web is in a wet end of the line where the moisture
content of the web is greater than 23%, and at least 50%
\
greater than the moisture content thereof where moni-
tored at the dry end of the line, and where the web mois-
ture content is not less than 35% of its moisture content
1. A surveyor's measurement rod including upright pole
support means, measurement scale means selectively attach-
able to said pole support means and including first and second
calibrated measurement faces lying on opposite surfaces of said
measurement scale means whereby one of said first and second
faces will be in a hidden opposing relationship with a surface of
said pole support means when the other of said first and second
faces is visible to a user during a use of said surveyor's mea-
surement rod, clamp means utilized to attach said measurement
scale means to said pole support means, said clamp means being
fixedly securable to said measurement scale means and revers-
ible relative thereto so as to permit a reversing of said first and
second faces as desired by a user, said clamp means being
attachable to an edge portion of said measurement scale means
so as not to interfere with a user's observation a particular
calibrated measurement face being utilized, said clamp means
being of an L-shaped configuration having first and second
extending leg members, said first leg member being attachable
to said edge portion of said measurement scale means and said
second leg member extending along a back surface of said pole
support means to facilitate an attachment of said measurement
scale means to said pole support means.
before drying is begun, the differential in moisture content
between the area of moisture monitoring and the areas of
moisture addition being at least 10%.
4,378,640
FLUID FLOW DEFLECTOR APPARATUS AND SHEET
DRYER EMPLOYING SAME
Adolf Buchholz, 11694 SE. Qover La., Portland, Oreg. 97266
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,570
Int. C1.3 F26B 13/04
U.S. a. 34—155 14 Qaims
1. A sheet dryer apparatus for removing water absorbed in
sheet material, comprising:
dryer means including at least one drying chamber, for
drying sheet material as it is moved through said chamber;
conveyor means for conveying said sheet material through
said chamber, including first and second conveyors for
conveying first and second sheets in spaced relationship to
each other;
heating means for providing heating fluid within said drying
chamber including a first stream of heating fluid flowing
primarily in one direction between said first and second
conveyors; and
deflector means including a first set of helical deflector
members supported between said first and second sheets
with the longitudinal axes of the deflector members ex-
tending transversely to said one direction of flow of said
first stream, for deflecting said first stream of heating fluid
with each deflector member in a first direction into
contact with said first sheet and in another direction into
contact with, said second sheet and for mixing the heating
fluid for more uniform drying.
24
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,378,641
BOAT SHOE
Arthur S. Tarlow, 7 Cove Cir., Marion, Mass. 02738
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,967
Int. a.' A43B 13/04, 13/26: A43C 15/00
U.S. a. 36—32 R 18 Qaims
first line which substantially bisects the rearfoot region in the
longitudinal direction, a plurality of discrete cleats integrally
molded to said base and extending outwardly from the major
exterior surface in the forefoot region of the sole, said cleats
being spaced in both the longitudinal and transverse direction
of the sole, said cleats having rearwardly facing gripping edges
1. A shoesole having a tread side characterized in that there
IS means at the edge of the tread side defining a continuous
uninterrupted wiper peripherally of the tread side and means
on the surface of the tread side bounded by the wiper defining
a plurality of uniformly distributioned. longitudinally and
transversely-spaced, friction-engendering means which indi-
vidually are more yieldable to bending in a direction longitudi-
nally of the sole than transversely thereof
1 4,378,642
SHOCK-ABSORBING FOOTGEAR HEEL
Leon H. Light, and Gordon E. Maclellan, both of London, En-
gland, assignors to National Research Development Corpora-
tion, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 922,156, Jul. 5, 1978, abandoned. This
application Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 196,099
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 8, 1977,
28783/77
Int. a.^ A43B 21/26. 13/18
U.S. a. 36—35 R 8 Claims
from which projecting lines extend to intersect the transverse
plane to the inside of the sole at angles which correspond in
magnitude to an angle of abduction formed between the first
line and a line defining the direction of travel during the pro-
pulsion phase of runnigg by a typical athlete who abducts his
or her feet slightly outward while pushing forwardly against
the ground.
4,378,644
POWERED SNOW REMOVAL APPARATUS
Lloyd H. Tuggle, Shreveport; Ronald C. Loyd, Keithville, both
of La.; Stanley A. Johnson, Jr., Brookfield, Wis.; A. Gary
Patridge, Shreveport, La.; John W. Ingham, Shreveport, La.,
and Kenneth J. Friend, Shreveport, La., assignors to Emerson
Electric Co., St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,994
Int. C\? EOIH 5/00
U.S. a. 37—244 38 Oaims
/a'
1 An article of footwear, comprising:
a heel construction having a higher shock absorbing capabil-
ity in a rear portion compared to the remainder thereof,
this difference resulting from the incorporation, at least in
said rear portion, of a layer of substantially non-cellular
elastomenc material having a low compression set of less
than 5 percent and a recovery which is delayed, after
compression, by a time of an order not less than that
during which load through said construction is transferred
from said rear portion to said remainder following heel
strike during normal walking;
said recovery time being within the range of 40 milliseconds
to one second.
4,378,643
SOLE WITH SKEWED CLEATING ARRANGEMENT
Jeffrey O. Johnson, Newton, N.H., assignor to BRS, Inc., Bea-
verton, Oreg.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 112,842, Jan. 17, 1980, Pat. No.
4,327,503. This application Feb. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 119,377
Int. a.^ A43B 5/00. 13/04. 23/28
U.S. a. 36—129 ; 21 Oaims
1. A sole for an athletic shoe comprising a molded base
having a forefoot region and a rearfoot region, the forefoot and
rearfoot regions being separated by a transverse plane which is
perpendicular to a major extenor surface of the base and to a
\.>
1. A portable power operated snow removal apparatus
adapted to be hand carried and maneuvered for removing
snow from a surface, said apparatus comprising:
an elongated support;
handle means on said apparatus for carrying and maneuver-
ing said apparatus to remove snow from a surface;
a power unit including a prime mover and a power takeoff
shaft, said power unit being mounted on one end of said
support;
an elongated drive shaft rotatably supported by said support
and interconnected between said power takeoff shaft and
drive mechanism mounted at the opposite end of said
support, said drive mechanism including a housing rotat-
ably supporting an output shaft having opposed end por-
tions projecting from said housing and rotatable about an
axis substantially perpendicular to said support;
impeller means comprising separate snow impellers mounted
on respective ones of said opposed end portions of said
output shaft for removing snow from said surface, each of
said impellers including a plurality of angularly spaced
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
25
generally radially projecting paddle blades connected to a
hub adapted for mounting said impeller on said output
shaft;
means drivably interconnecting said output shaft with said
impellers, respectively; and
a shroud disposed at said one end of said support and par-
tially enclosing said imf>ellers, said shroud including a rear
wall and spaced apart side walls extending forwardly from
said rear wall in the direction of movement of said appara-
tus to engage a quantity of snow with said impellers, said
shroud forming a discharge chute for directing snow
removed from said surface by said impellers in a direction
generally upward and away from said handle means.
are
4,378,645
' SPREADER FEEDER APPARATUS
William W. Allen, Plantation, and Alvin G. Lundquist, Jr., Fort
Lauderdale, both of Fla., assignors to Jensen Corporation,
Fort Lauderdale, Fla.
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,315
Int. a.3 D06F 67/04
U.S. a. 38—8 29 aaims
-I 15. 33 ti ^ lis T
J- t ;; — r-9 '.? • _
1/ In an apparatus having:
a conveyor for receiving laundry flat pieces;
clamps at the entry side of the apparatus for releasably grip-
ping a laundry flat piece at adjacent comers along a top
edge thereof;
means for moving the clamps apart laterally to spread the
laundry flat piece along its top edge;
means for actuating said clamps to release the laundry flat
piece onto the conveyor after it has been spread apart
along its top edge;
and spreader means below said clamps at the entry side of
the conveyor for engaging and spreading laterally the
laundry flat piece below its top edge;
the improvement which comprises:
means for moving said conveyor to an extended position
beyond said clamps and said spreader means at the entry
side of the apparatus to facilitate hand feeding of small
laundry flat pieces directly onto the conveyor without
engagement by said clamps and said spreader means;
and means operable when the conveyor is in said extended
|X>sition to disable said clamp moving means and spreader
means.
4,378,646
COLLAPSIBLE WORK HOLDING STRUCTURE
Albert Mazeika, Tucson, Ariz., assignor to Needlepointer, Tuc-
son, Ariz.
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,411
Int. a.3 D05C 1/04: A47B 97/04
U.S. a. 38—102 8 Oaims
1. A collapsible work holding structure comprising:
(a) a first ifomially vertically extending member;
(b) a second member adapted to rest upon a seating surface
and extend beneath a person seated thereon, said second
member being pivotally connected to said first member
proximate one end thereof and being adapted to pivot
relative to said first member through an angle of about
270° from a work position wherein said members
substantially perpendicular to a transport position wherein
said members extend generally parallel to each other;
(c) a work holding assembly operably connected to said first
member proximate the other end thereof, said assembly
comprising:
(1) a pivotable portion connected to said first member and
being adapted to pivot from an aligned work position
into a transport position;
(2) a work holding member rotatably connected to said
pivotable portion for rotation about a horizontal axis,
said work holding member comprising a frame having
at least two perpendicularly extending legs and includ-
ing a generally cylindrically shaped member extending
substantially at right angles to one of said legs; and
(d) locking means for releasably locking said pivotable por-
tion and said first member in an aligned work position.
' 4,378,647
PHOTOGRAPHIC ALBUM AND METHOD OF
FABRICATION OF SAME
Vincenzo Stancato, 1717 Broadway, Hewlett, N.Y. 11557
Filed Dec. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 105,662
Int. a.3 A47G 1/06; G09F 1/10: B42D 3/00
U.S. a. 40— 158 R 6 Qaims
1. A process of fabricating an album having a prebound
binding wherein upon the individual pages thereof items of an
aesthetic nature are capable of being mounted so as to create an
album whose pages once having pictures mounted thereon
provide a uniform plane surface, said process comprising the
steps of;
(a) removing a first protective covering from the back sur-
face of a mat assembly, said mat assembly comprising;
(i) a mat having a front surface and a back adhesive sur-
face that defines a symmetrically positioned opening
therein, therebeing an indented adhesive surface bor-
dering said opening formed within the back face of said
mat, said indented adhesive surface defining a recessed
area formed only within the back surface of said mat;
(ii) a first protective covering being removeably affixed to
said indented adhesive surface, said indent and said
adhesive surface only becoming exposed upon the re-
moval of said first protective covering; and
(iii) a second protective covering removeably affixed to
26
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
the remaining portion of said back adhesive surface of
said mat not covered by said first protective covering;
(b) placing an item of aesthetic nature within said indented
adhesive recessed area formed within the back surface of
said mat such that the face of said item of aesthetic nature
comes into direct contact with said indented adhesive
surface, said item of aesthetic nature having dimensions
identical to said recessed area formed within the back
surface of said mat, such that said item of aesthetic nature
fits exactly within the confines of said indented recess, the
depth of said indented recess and the thickness of said item
of aesthetic nature being identical;
(c) removing said second protective covering from the back
adhesive of said mat assembly so as to uncover an adhe-
sive surface that borders the back surface of said mat
assembly; and
(d) mounting said mat assembly onto a page of said album,
such that said back adhesive surface exposed by the re-
moval of said second protective covering comes into
contact with said page, each of said pages of said album
comprising;
(i) a base member having a first surface and a second
surface, a fold being formed within both surfaces of said
base member, symmetrical with respect to each other,
said folds traversing both surfaces of said base member
parallel to the binding of said page within said album;
(ii) a first border member and a second border member,
identical in shape to each other, said first and second
border members each defining a symmetrically posi-
tioned opening therein identical in size to said mat
assembly, said first border member being affixed to one
surface of said base member and said second border
member being affixed to said second surface of said base
member such that there is defined a recessed area as to
each surface of said page, said recessed area of each
I surface of said page being identical in depth to the
thickness of said mat assembly such that when said mat
assembly is mounted on said page, the entire surface of
I said page with mounted mat assembly presents a uni-
form planar surface.
body, which is deformable to substantially annular form for
receiving wires in the upper portion of said range.
4,378,649
REFLECTIVE SHIELD FOR GAS DISCHARGE DISPLAY
Jon Cokefair, Deerfield, 111., assignor to Cherry Electrical Prod-
ucts Corporation, Waukegan, 111.
Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,702
Int. C1.3 G09F 13/22; HOI J 17/48. 63/04; H05B 33/10
U.S. a. 40— 544 7 Claims
1. A gas discharge display envelope comprising:
(a) a base plate having on one flat surface screen printed
cathode display segments,
(b) a face plate having on a confronting fiat surface screen
printed anodes,
(c) a sealant on each plate adjacent to the peripheral edges
thereof and embracing said cathode display segments and
said anodes and sealing said plates together to form the
display envelope,
(d) first mask means for covering said base plate so that said
cathode display segments are exposed to form glow dis-
charge segments for viewing through said anode face
plate, and
(e) second mask means on said face plate extending inwardly
of said sealant for shielding from view the light of the
glow discharge of said cathode display segments reflected
off of said sealant.
4,378,648
MARKING DEVICE FOR ELECTRICAL WIRES
Goran Loof, Gullspang, and Lars Skarin, Otterbacken, both of
Sweden, assignors to Partex Fabriksaktiebolag, Gullspang,
Sweden
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,545
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Sep. 10, 1980, 8006337
Int. a.5 G09F 3/00
U.S. a. 40—316 3 Qaims
1. A device for marking electrical wires, cables and the like,
comprising a body of a synthetic resin material having an inner
passage for receiving the wire, the body being resiliently de-
formable so as to permit use thereof on wires within a given
diameter range, characterized in that, in its undeformed state,
the cross-section of the body, as seen in a plane perpendicular
to the longitudinal axis of the passage, is such that its outer
contour is substantially rectangular, whereas its inner contour
forms inter-communicating part-circular recesses for receiving
wires within the lower portion of said diameter range while
retaining the substantially rectangular outer contour of the
4,378,650
SIGNPOST WITH MEANS AND METHOD FOR
INSTALLING AND REMOVING THE SAME
James A. Ottoson, Rte. 4, Box 159, Monroe, Wis. 53566
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,477
Int. a.3 G09F 15/00
U.S. a. 40—607 1 Qaim
1. A wooden signpost and metal mounting base comprising,
a metal mounting base having a first pointed end section for
extending into the ground and a second upstanding end
section for extending above the ground, said second sec-
tion being of uniform circular cross section along its
length,
a wooden signpost having an axial circular opening for
matingly receiving said second section of said metal
mounting base and the cross-sectional area of said wooden
post less the area of said axial opening being sufficient to
provide vertical and lateral support on said second section
of said metal mounting base,
a collar rigidly secured on said metal mounting base at the
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
27
juncture of said first and second sections for limiting the
penetration of said first section into the ground and sup-
porting said wooden signpost therein and said collar and
said wooden post having cooperating multisided surfaces
for limiting rotation of said wooden post relative to said
collar and said mounting base, and
metal Hns mounted on the first end section below said collar
for limiting rotation of said first end section and said
mounting base relative to the ground.
4,378,651
REINFORCED CUSHIONED GUN
Frank A. Pachmayr, Los Angeles, and Jack R. Fi
both of Calif., assignors to Pachmayr Gun Woi
Angeles, Calif.
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 184,757
Int. aj F41C 23/00
U.S. a. 42—71 P
IP
, Whittier,
Inc., Los
14 Qaims
1. A gun grip comprising:
two grip sections each including a body of elastomeric material
and a reinforcing plate embedded in and more rigid than said
elastomeric material;
said bodies of elastomeric material forming two side walls to be
received at opposite sides respectively of a gun handle, and
which have rear edge portions adapted to be received at
opposite sides of a back surface of the gun handle in a spaced
relation leavingsaid surface exposed between said rear edge
portions wh^njfie-lKKlies are mounted on the handle;
said bodies of fl^tom^c material forming two front flanges of
said elastomeric material projecting inwardly toward one
another at ibrward edges of said two side walls respectively
and at locations to be received in front of said handle;
said reinforcing plates having main portions which are embed-
ded in and reinforce said side walls of the elastomeric mate-
rial and which have rear edgds within said rear edge portions
of the elastomeribk side walls spaced apart for reception at
opposite sides of said rear surface of the handle;
said reinforcing plates having forward portions projecting
inwardly toward one another within said flanges of the
elastomeric material at locations to be received in front of
said gun handle and closer together than are said spaced rear
edges of the plates.
4,378,652
MOTOR DRIVEN HSHING REEL
Peter B. Lindgren, 2700 NE. 7th Ave., Pompano Beach, Fla.
33064
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,813
Int. a.^AOlK 59/077
U.S. a. 43—26.1 1 Gaim
1. A Ashing device comprising:
(a) A spool having a shaft;
(b) a fishing line windable on said spool;
(c) electric power means;
(d) electric motor means which when connected to said
power means rotates said spool shaft so as to rewind said
fishing line on to said spool but which when unconnected
is rotated by the unwinding of the fishing line in the re-
verse direction so as to generate an electric current;
(e) first switch means for connecting said power means ^o
said motor means; and '
(0 second switch means actuable by a predetermined mini-
mum voltage of said generated current so as to actuate
said first switch means, causing said electric motor means
to reverse and rewind said fishing line on said spool.
4,378,653
AERODYNAMIC TOY
Bernard O'Brien, 64D Beacon Village, Burlington, Mass. 01803
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,764
Int. a.5 A63H 27/00
U.S. O. 46—74 D 4 Qaims
1. An aerodynamic toy adapted to be thrown through the air
comprising:
a substantially hemispherically shaped body formed of a
strong and resilient material and having a substantially
hemispherically shaped cavity disposed therein, said body
having an axis extending normally from a plane defined by
a base of said body, said cavity progressively increasing in
cross sectional area toward said base; and
a solid rim disposed around the outer surface of said body
closely adjacent said base and projecting outwardly away
from the outer surface of said body, said rim having an
upper surface spaced from said base and extending gener-
ally normally to said axis of said body and an outer frusto-
conically shaped wall extending from said upper surface
inwardly and downwardly toward said base, said rim
reinforcing said body adjacent said base and providing
aerodynamic balance to said toy during flight.
28
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,378,654
KIT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF A THREE
DIMENSIONAL FIGURE
Alan A. Wilson, Agincourt, Canada, assignor to Progressive
Merchandising Display Limited, Scarborough, Canada
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,960
Claims priority, application Canada, Jan. 30, 1980, 344654
Int. a.^ A63H 3/00
U.S. CI. 46— 115 3aaims
carry at least one dominant gene for reduced intemode
length (DO;
I Repeoi 3-4 !ifne«
1
1. A kit for the construction of a three dimensional figure
having a body portion and a head portion integral therewith,
comprising;
a cylindrical core of a roll of sheet paper product;
a wrappable member having a peripheral contour delineat-
mg the outline of the figure in two dimensions, the body
portion having projecting limbs and being wrappable
about the vertical axis of the cylindrical core including
portions adapted to project outwardly from the surface of
the core, and the head portion being wrappable over the
end of the core thereby covering it; and
spaced apart projections on the member positioned at the
end of the body portion adjacent the head portion, the
projections being shaped to conform to and abut the head
portion when the three dimensional figure is assembled,
with the head portion extending between the projections
and forming therewith an enclosure to conceal the core
end. \
(b) cross pollinating the plants (P1 + P2) to produce hybrid
seeds Fi; and
(c) harvesting the hybrid seeds.
4,378,656
ANTI-CLAMPING DEVICE FOR A VEHICLE DOOR
Siegfried Heinrich, Edermunde, and Manfred Horn, Kaufungen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Firma Gebr. Bode
&. Co. GmbH, Kassel, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,770
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 21,
1980, 3019373
Int. C\? E05F 15/20
U.S. CI. 49—28 10 Claims
4,378,655
SEMI-DWARF HYBRID SUNFLOWER SEED AND
PLANT AND METHOD OF PRODUONG HYBRID SEED
Freeman K. Johnson, Moorhead, Minn., assignor to Red River
Commodities, Inc., Fargo, N. Dak.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,363
Int. a.5 AOIH 1/02
U.S. a. 47—58 24 Qaims
1. A method of producing semi-dwarf hybrid sunflower
seeds which will produce sunflowers with reduced intemode
length under normal growing conditions, which comprises:
(a) growing a pair of parent plants (Pi and P2) wherein in at
least one parent substantially all pollen is nonfunctional
and at least one parent has gametes with nuclei which
1. An anti-clamping device for a vehicle door driven in
opening and closing movements by a turnable shaft in turn
driven by a transmission rod, said device comprising a tele-
scopic element interposed in said transmission rod, said tele-
scopic element including first and second telescopically en-
gaged parts including means respectively connecting said parts
to said transmission rod in axial alignment therewith such that
drive to the door is effected through said transmission rod and
said telescopic parts, said telescopic parts each being movable
to undergo telescopic movement relative to the other part, said
telescopic parts having retracted and extended positions, con-
trol means on one of said parts and movable therewith and
switch means on the other of said parts and movable therewith,
said switch means facing and being operatively associated with
said control means to control a circuit to reverse the direction
of door movement both when the door is opening or closing
and encounters an obstacle, said telescopically engaged parts
of said telescopic element not undergoing extension or retrac-
tion during opening or closing of the door without encounter-
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
29
ing an obstacle to transmit drive from the transmission rod to
the tumable shaft whereas when an obstacle is encountered
during opening or closing of the door the telescopically en-
gaged parts undergo relative telescoping movement to pro-
duce retraction or extension of said parts to actuate the switch
means.
4,378,657
BUMPER ACTUATED GATE
Felix B. Romberg, P.O. Box 218, Holland, Tex. 76534
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,754
Int. aj E05C 15/00
U.S. a. 49—364 20 Qaims
1. A vehicle thrust actuated gate, comprising:
a frame for a generally rectangular gate, said frame including
a pair of upright end members interconnected by a plural-
I • ity of stiff longitudinal intermediate members;
an upright gate post;
means mounting said gate frame at one end member thereof
on said gate post for pivotal movement about an upright
hinge axis between closed and open positions;
first latch means mounted on the upper end portion of the
other end member of said frame;
a bumper thrust transmitting assembly for receiving and
transmitting vehicle thrust laterally against the lower part
I of said other end member to twist said gate frame and
thereby store torsional spring energy in said frame;
second latch means for retaining said first latch means when
said gate frame is in its closed position and for releasing
said first latch means at a predetermined angle of gate
twist; and
upright structure mounting said bumper thrust transmitting
assembly and said second latch means in a vertically
spaced operating relationship with respect to said other
end member and said first latch means mounted thereon.
4,378,658
MOUNTING FOR A VEHICLE DOOR
John Z. DeLorean, New York, N.Y., assignor to Delorean Re-
search Limited Partnership, Bloomfield Hills, Mich.
j Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,398
' Int. a.3 E05F 7/00
U.S. a. 49—379 8 Qaims
a door;
a pair of hinges disposed on a common hinge axis, for mount-
ing said door on said vehicle body for movement between
a closed position and an open position, each hinge having
a mounting plate, a hmge plate and a pin mounted on said
axis and in said mounting plate with said hinge plate piv-
oted thereon;
means securing said mounting plate to said vehicle body;
at least one bolt securing each respective hinge plate to said
door frame, said bolt having a projecting head for abutting
said vehicle in a recessed manner in a closed position of
said door; and
a torsion bar having one end secured to said door and an-
other end secured to said vehicle body biasing said door
toward said open position.
4,378,659
WINDOWS
Stephen L. Hosmer, Englewood, Colo., and Paul R. Steuer,
Cheltenham, Pa., assignors to Caterpillar Tractor Co., Peoria,
111.
Filed Jul. 17, 1978, Ser. No. 925,300
Int. a. 3 E06B 1/04
U.S. a. 49—504 2 Qaims
! .-.]
1. In combination:
a vehicle body;
1. In a window assembly comprismg a transparent viewmg
section and an annular main frame carrying the viewmg sec-
tion and adapted to mount the assembly in a structure having
inside and outside walls and an opening means therein, the
annular main frame comprising:
an annular center web;
means on the interior of the web for mounting the viewing
section;
an outside peripheral fiange connected to one edge of the
web and extending radially outwardly thereof, the outside
fiange being adapted to engage the outside of the outside
wall of the structure mounting the window;
an inside peripheral fiange connected to the opposite edge of
the web and extending radially outwardly thereof, the
inside fiange being adapted to engage the outside of the
inside wall of the structure mounting the window;
said fianges extending outwardly so that the periphery of the
inner fiange defines a cross sectional area smaller than the
cross sectional area formed by the periphery of the outer
fiange and providing for the assembly to be pushed, from
a direction outside to inside, into the structure opening
and positioned with said fianges engaged as aforesaid;
aperture means on the inside fiange to receive mounting
screw bearing on and extending thru the inside wall of the
structure; and
a support connected to the inside fiange and having means to
30
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
support a cover for the heads of said mounting screws so
that the heads can not be viewed from inside the structure.
4^78,660
METHOD OF AND MEANS FOR GRINDING PAIRS OF
GEAR WHEELS AS SPIRAL OR CURVED TOOTHED
BEVEL GEAR WHEELS
Dieter Wiener, 9 Tulpenstrasse, D-7505 Ettlingen-Bruchhausen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of S£r. No. 104,071, Dec. 17, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 904,883, May 11,
1978, abandoned. This application Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No.
205^52
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 11,
1977, 2721164; Nov. 10, 1979, 2945483
Int. a.5 B24B 19/00
U.S. a. 51—56 G 21 Qaims
^-n «-^;] :r^~ "■■■
1. Apparatus for use in grinding pairs of at least one of spiral
and curved tooth bevel gears, the apparatus comprising a cup
grinding wheel mounted for rotation about a grinding axis, the
cup grinding wheel having two rectilinear grinding flanks that
are linear in cross section and inclined relative to each other to
form a tool with a conical ring, and means for applying a slight
eccentric elliptical cyclic motion to the cup grinding wheel
during a grinding operation.
4,378,661
APPARATUS FOR HOLDING VALVE ELEMENT AND
REHNISHING TOOL
Ernest E. Grimsley, 4533 Wake Forest Rd., Portsmouth, Va.
23703
Filed May 29, 1980, Ser. No. 154,357
Int. C\? B24B 15/00
U.S. a. 51—125 8 Qaims
frame member lying substantially in a second plane, said
second plane being substantially orthogonal to said first
plane;
carriage means for holding said tool, said carriage means
being selectively positionable in said first plane of said
frame means so that the position of said tool is selectively
adjustable with respect to said second plane, said tool
being held by said carriage so that said tool may be selec-
tively pivoted about an axis parallel to a line formed by the
intersection of said first plane and said second plane;
vise means for holding said gate valve element so that said
sloped surface thereof faces said tool; and,
suppxjrt means mounted on said second frame member and
upon which said vise member is rigidly mounted, said
support member having a support surface inclined at an
angle with respect to said second frame member upon
which it is mounted so that said sloped surface of said
wedge-shaped gate valve element held in said vise means
acquires a desired orientation with respect to said tool.
4,378,662
AIRLESS CENTRIFUGAL BLAST DEVICE
Raymond M. Leliaert, South Bend; Richard C. Kanouse, Misha-
waka; Bill J. Butler, Mishawaka, and Robert N. Lindner,
Granger, all of Ind., assignors to Wheelabrator-Freye Inc.,
Hampton, N.H.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 909,770, May 26, 1978, Pat.
No. 4,207,711. This application May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 149,156
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 17,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B24C 5/06. 7/00
U.S. a. 51—432 20 Qaims
1. A portable apparatus for refinishing a sloped surface of a
wedge-shaped gate valve element, said apparatus comprising:
a tool having a working surface mounted thereon by a
swivel joint;
frame means, said frame means comprising a first frame
member lying substantially in a first plane and a second
1. A device for airless blast with particulate media compris-
ing wheel blades mounted for rotational movement in a verti-
cally disposed plane, means offset laterally from the plane of
rotation of the blades for feeding particulate material from a
feeding opening in crosswise alignment with the inner end
portions of the blades to the inner end portions of the wheel
blades for engagement by the blades during rotational move-
ment of the wheel at high speed whereby the engaged particu-
late media is projected from the ends of the blades comprising
a vertically disposed tubular member having vertically dis-
posed side walls and an inlet opening at the top and an opening
in the vertically disposed side wall below the inlet and a hori-
zontally disposed hollow body having an open end portion
extending from and in registry with the opening in the side
wall of the tubular member and a feed opening in an end por-
tion facing the wheel blades and laterally offset from the lateral
edges thereof for flowing particulate media from the ihlet,
through the tubular member and hollow body onto the inner
end portions of the blades.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
31
4^78,663
STRUCTURAL PANEL
Gordon A. Audet, 1139 Rosalind, Rialto, Calif. 92376
FUed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,992
Int. C1.3 E04C 1/10
MS. a. 52—580 1 Claim
^
14
I
/•'"
34
J"^
i
4
a?
^^V
^
9r
\9
— 40—
m
~4
0
-r^O —
^
—40 —
-2-
16
1. A prefabricated structural panel for use with other like
panels in the on-site construction of a building, comprising:
a pair of laterally spaced, elongated rails extending generally
parallel to one another and forming two opp>osite longitu-
dinal edges of the panel;
each of said rails having a lengthwise-extending channel
formed in the surface facing the other rail, said channel
being formed with sloping, downwardly converging
sides;
a pair of lengthwise extending, narrow slots formed in said
surface of each rail at the top edges of said sloping sides;
each of said rails having, on the side opposite said channel, a
configuration that is adapted to interlock with a mating
configuration on the rail of the next-adjacent panel;
a plurality of ribs extending perpendicularly between said
rails, the ends of said ribs being beveled to fit snugly into
said channels and bearing against the sloping sides thereof;
two panels of relatively flat, structural sheet material dis-
posed on opposite sides of said ribs and having edges that
fit snugly into said narrow slots;
said panels of sheet material cooperating with said rails and
said ribs to enclose a dead air space between them; and
a plurality of fasteners, some driven through said rails and
through the edges of said panels that are seated in said
narrow slots; and others driven diagonally through oppo-
site sides of said rails so that they penetrate the adjacent
panel near the bottom edge thereof and also penetrate the
beveled surfaces of said rib at an angle approaching the
perpendicular thereto;
the projection of said rib ends down into said channels, with
said beveled surfaces bearing against the sloping sides of
said channel, providing a positive, mechanical interlock
that prevents any forcible lateral displacenjent of the rib
with respect to the rails.
4,378,664
SYSTEM FOR CONSTRUCHNG A BUILDING
Antonio P. Andaya, Metro Manila, Philippines, assignor to Pilar
Development Corporation, Manila, Philippines
FUed Apr. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 141,389
Qaims priority, application Philippines, Jun. 8, 1979, 22867
Int. a.3 E04C i/00; E04G 21/00
U.S. a. 52—745 3 Claims
1. An improved system for constructing a building with
prefabricated panels, comprising the steps of:
preparing a level-topped foundation for the prefabricated
wall panels utilizing* templates having a plurality of pre-
formed holes at preselected locations, fitted with remov-
able vertically extending dowels, with the templates
placed on top of foundation pouring forms so that anchor- .
ing holes are formed at predetermined locations in the top
of the foundation following setting and curing of concrete
poured into the forms;
preparing forms for socket type pedestals each with an
opening to fit a prefabricated, precast column to be lo-
cated at a end of a wall section;
preparing a floor slab by embedding a plurality of wooden
blocks or pegs during the pouring of the concrete for the
floor slab, whereby a plurality of angled wall panel stabi-
lizing braces can be secured to the wooden blocks during
erection of the building;
hoisting the prefabricated, precast columns with hoisting
equipment provided with means for connection to the
column, and lowering the columns into place in the socket
type pedestals;
providing a plurality of prefabricated wall panels, all suitable
as load-bearing wall panels and all being similar in outer
dimensions, each panel also including protruding bolts and
nuts at the top end comers of the panel and each including
downwardly protruding steel bar dowels at its bottom,
spaced for registry with and for close fit with the pre-
formed anchoring holes in the foundation;
hoisting the prefabricated panels, one by one, with hoisting
equipment including a steel cable stretching between the
ends of a panel, and including steel cup-claws attached to
the ends of the steel cable and slipped and locked onto the
bolts and nuts protruding at the top end comers of the
panel;
installing the first prefabricated wall panel in place on the
foundation by positioning it over the foundation and low-
ering the panel so that the steel bar dowels at the bottom
of the panel fit into the anchoring holes of the foundation;
temporarily retaining the installed wall panel in place using
said angled brace, secured to one of the wooden blocks
embedded in the floor slab, including connecting the other
end of the brace to the installed wall panel and manipulat-
ing the brace to assure the plumb of the panel, and remov-
ing the cup-claws from the bolts and nuts at the top ends
of the panel;
erecting succeeding prefabricated wall panels in like manner
as the first panel, but instead of using a brace, intercon-
necting the subsequent panel with the previously installed
panel by securing a flat bar strap onto the bolts and nuts at
the adjacent top ends of the adjoining panels, and continu-
ing this procedure for succeeding panels along the same
wall;
at comers, installing adjacent prefabricated wall panels in
the same maimer as subsequent panels, but utilizing an
L-shaped flat bar strap;
at T-shaped wall intersections, installing adjacent prefabri-
cated panels in the same manner as subsequent panels, but
utilizing a T-shaped flat bar strap for connection to the
protruding bolts and nuts at the top ends of three adjacent
panels in the T-shaped intersection;
installing prefabricated roof trusses by positioning each truss
to fit, at each end, between angled brackets bolted to a flat
bar strap connecting adjacent wall panels, with flanges of
the brackets extending upwardly, and bolting the truss to
the flanges of the brackets while the truss rests on the flat
bar strap and on the tops of the wall panels, which serve
as a roof beam, with no separate roof beam required; and
placing bonding mortar into voids formed along the joints of
adjoining panels. ,
32
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^78,665
MACHINE FOR ORIENTING AN ARTICLE AND
PERFORMING A WORK OPERATION ON THE
ARTICLE
Michael Craakshaw, Santa Fe Springs, and Leo Kucheck, Irvine,
both of Calif., assignors to Label-Aire Inc., FuUerton, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 930,720, Aug. 3, 1978, Pat. No.
4,201,621. ThU application Mar. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 134,572
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 6, 1997,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.5 B65G 29/00
U.S. a. 53—69 22 Oaims
1. An apparatus for orienting article-, which are moved along
a path by a conveyor so that a work operation may be per-
formed on the articles while the articles are oriented, said
apparatus comprising:
a wheel having a peripheral surface, at least a portion of said
peripheral surface being resiliently deformable;
means for mounting said wheel for rotation about a rota-
tional axis which extends generally transverse to the direc-
tion of movement of the conveyor adjacent said wheel,
said wheel being adapted to lie at least partially in the path
of the articles conveyed to the wheel by the conveyor;
motor means for rotating said wheel about said rotational
axis; and
guide means adjacent said peripheral surface of said wheel
for urging articles conveyed to the peripheral surface of
said wheel against the peripheral surface to resiliently
deform the peripheral surface sufficiently to capture the
articles and hold the articles in a predetermined orienta-
tion whereby the articles are captured between the guide
means and the wheel and held in a predetermined orienta-
tion during normal operation of the apparatus so that the
work operation can be performed.
' 4,378,666
PACKING MACHINE WITH BAG-SUPPORTING DEVICE
Masami Onishi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Taiyo Shokai Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,062
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 14, 1979, 54-
127650[U]
Int. a.' B65B 1/06, 7/06. 43/26
U.S. a. 53—570 3 Qaims
1. A packing machine for filling and sealing a series of bags
comprising a pair of intermittently operated pinching rollers
for intermittently transferring a strip-like bag material of a
collapsed plastics film strip, a stationary heat-sealer, a movable
heat-sealer arranged to move toward and away from said
stationary heat-sealer in a horizontal plane to seal the tops of
said bags, a guide plate provided under said stationary heat-
sealer at a front portion of the machine for guiding a leading
bag section formed in said bag material and having a trans-
versely extending opening portion thereof, said guide plate
having along a front face a plurality of vertically extending
parallel slits, a supporting device for supporting the leading
bag section, said supporting device being provided on a rear
side of said guide plate and arranged to be capable of being
raised and lowered therealong and comprising a comblike
supporting member having a pectination projecting front-
wardly of said guide plate through said slits thereof and ar-
ranged to be swung about a horizontal axis so as to be capable
of upholding a bottom of the leading bag section with said
pectination when said supporting member is swung upwardly,
said pectination being normally biased obliquely downwardly
by means of a spring, a reciprocating crank mechanism opera-
tively connected to said movable heat-sealer for sequentially
operating operative parts of the machine and said movable
heat-sealer, said reciprocating crank mechanism being driv-
ingly connected to said supporting member by means of a
flexible pulling member so that said supporting member can be
TO
swung upwardly about said horizontal axis against the action
of said spring as said flexible pulling member is pulled by said
crank mechanism, means for operatively connecting said recip-
rocating crank mechanism and said movable heat-sealer such
that said crank mechanism pulls said flexible pulling member to
cause said supporting member to be upwardly swung immedi-
ately before said movable heat-sealer is moved toward said
stationary heat-sealer and after the filling operation to raise at
least a portion of said top of said bag relative to said heat
sealers to a proper sealing f)Osition.
4,378,667
DISPOSABLE TAIL SLEEVE ENVELOPING ASSEMBLY
Ernest Velarde, Jr., Rte. 1, Box 472, Markleeville, Calif. 96120
FUed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,268
Int. a.3 AOIK yj/oo
U.S. a. 54—78 7 Qaims
1. A disposable assembly for substantially enveloping the tail
of an animal having a tail bone, said assembly including:
a. a guide ring of substantial width and of such internal
diameter as to encircle said tail of said animal, said ring
having first and second laterally spaced circular edges,
and said ring capable of being moved longitudinally on
said tail to dispose said first edge over said tail bone;
a. an elongate tubular sleeve of a light weight woven mate-
rial that is wound in over lapping circular folds on said
ring, said sleeve having first and second ends, and said
sleeve including a tab on said first end that is adjacent said
first circumferential edge;
c. a resilient elongate strip that extends in opposite directions
from said tab, said strip capable of being disposed to encir-
cle said tail bone in a tensioned condition and then knotted
to removably hold said first end of said sleeve on said tail
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
33
bone, with said ring and the balance of said sleeve being
moved longitudinally away from said tail bone, with said
sleeve peeling from said ring until none remains thereon,
with said ring now being discarded, and said second end
of said sleeve knotted for said sleeve to substantially en-
velop said tail.
4,378,668
LAWNMOWER-EDGE TRIMMER
Brad Gullett, 376 Hidden Pines Cir., Casselberry, Fla. 32707
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 76,146, Sep. 17, 1979,
abandoned. This application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,678
Int. a.3 AOID 46/00
U.S. a. 56—12.7 13 Qaims
1. Apparatus for mowing a lawn and trimming edges com-
prising, in combination, a wheel-supported central rotary pul-
ley-type mower having a housing with a guard extending
around the lower part thereof and wheel-supporting means
supporting said housing on front and rear axles for movement
of said mower, said guard having a plurality of gaps therein,
retractable guard elements for covering said gaps, means for
retracting said guard element, a handle for guiding said appara-
tus, a central rotary shaft pulley rotatably supported within
said housing, means for rotating said pulley, a plurality of whip
blade elements arranged peripherally underneath said housing
each in the vicinity of one of said gaps and each having at least
one whip blade, and belt means for turning said whip blade
elements.
4,378,669
PULL TYPE AUTOMATIC TOBACCO HARVESTER AND
METHOD OF HARVESTING TOBACCO
Arvin W. Prince, Whitevilie, N.C., assignor to Harrington Man-
ufacturing Company, Lewiston, N.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 884,181, Mar. 7, 1978, abandoned, '
which is a division of Ser. No. 701,791, Jul. 1, 1976, Pat. No.
4,332,128. This application Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,357
Int. a.3 AOID 45/16
U.S. a. 56—27.5 8 Claims
1., A method of harvesting tobacco in a field having a plural-
ity of laterally spaced rows throughout the field with at least
one skip row provided at intervals within the field for allowing
a tractor to pass therethrough, wherein said method of harvest-
ing tobacco utilizes a pull type automatic harvester having a
main frame having ground engaging means mounted thereto
for supporting said main frame and allowing the same to move
on the ground during the harvesting operation, said ground
engaging main frame being connected to a tractor that is
adapted to move through respective skip rows within the field
and to pull said ground engaging main frame of the harvester
therebehind through the field during the tobacco harvesting
operation, said method comprising the steps of: positioning the
ground engaging main frame of said harvester in a first position
relative to said tractor where a defoliator assembly carried
thereby aligns with a first row of tobacco; pulling said ground
engaging main frame of the harvester through the field such
that the defoliator assembly carried thereby comes into opera-
tive engagement with stalks of said first row for defoliating
leaves therefrom for harvesting said first row during the har-
vesting operation; simultaneously moving said ground engag-
ing main frame of said harvester together with said defoliator
assembly laterally over the ground with respect to said tractor
to a second position where the defoliator assembly carried by
said ground engaging main frame aligns with a second row
laterally spaced from said first row, whereby said first and
second laterally spaced rows may be harvested with the tractor
occupying the same skip row while the harvester is positioned
in said first or second position for harvesting said first and
second rows, and pulling said ground engaging main frame of
the harvester through the field such that the defoliator assem-
bly carried by said ground engaging main frame comes into
operative engagement with stalks of said second row for defo-
liating leaves from the respective stalks thereof
4,378,670
HAND SCOOP FOR GRASS AND LEAVES
Mathias M. Check, 34 Bowman Dr., Greenwich, Conn. 06830,
and Elia L. Goodby, 22 Barrow Dr., East Greenwich, R.I.
02818
Filed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,215
Int. a.' AOID 7/00
U.S. a. 56—400.01 9 Claims
1. A hand scoop for gathering leaves or other debris and
depositing into a receptacle comprising a scoop body having a
depression for holding a large amount of leaves and debris and
a generally curved periphery for said scoop body, means on
said scoop body for the user's hand to grip and manually move
said scoop, and a flat marginal edge at the bottom of said scoop
body being provided with a plurality of spaced teeth for raking
and assembling said leaves or other debris, and said curved
periphery providing easy entry into said depositing receptacle.
I 4,378,671
RAKE
Lorenzo Gascon, 175 Archambault St., Hull, Quebec, Canada
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 35634
Int. C\? AOID 7/00
U.S. a. 56—400.12 4 Qaims
1. A pick-up rake comprising a rake handle having a main
rake head with a raking side and a rear side secured to its
lowermost end
and an auxilliary rake head assembly including an auxilliary
34
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
rake head carried by the rake handle which is selectively
movable from a storage position adjacent the rear side of
the main rake head enabling normal raking to a pick-up
position opposite the raking side of the main rake head
enabling leaves, grass and debris to be gathered and held
between the two rake heads,
the auxilliary rake head assembly including a shaft pivotally
secured at its upper end to a pair of outwardly extending
sleeve arms which are fixedly secured to a handle sleeve
which is mounted for guided sliding movement along the
rake handle,
and a pair of auxilliary rake head guide arms pivotally se-
cured to the shaft adjacent its lower end and pivotally
secured to a collar carried by the rake handle, the collar
being mounted for rotational movement with respect to
the rake handle and being restrained against relative axial
movement,
and guide means for guiding movement of the handle sleeve
with respect to the rake handle in a first selected path for
reciprocal movement of the auxilliary rake head assembly
in pick-up capacity, and in a second selected path for
movement of the auxilliary rake head assembly to and
from storage position.
\
B
4,378,672
RING/TRAVELER SYSTEM NOISE REDUCTION
Dean Lassiter, Greensboro, N.C., assignor to Burlington
Industries, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.
Filed NoY. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,048
Int. Cl.^ DOIH 7/54
U.S. a. 57—122 14 Claims
/o^^
■—HP
20
%
/4-
1. A spinning or twisting ring assembly for mounting a
traveler, and adapted to be mounted to a ring rail, said assem-
bly comprising
a metal ring for mounting a traveler thereon;
a rigid holder support having a plurality of openings formed
therein for receipt of fasteners for attaching it to a ring
rail;
an annular ring holder of resilient material operatively con-
nected between said metal ring and said rigid holder sup-
port;
a plurality of fasteners for receipt by said openings in said
rigid holder support; and
bushing means of resilient material for cooperation with said
fasteners to attach said rigid holder support to a ring rail
while isolating said support from the ring rail, so that no
portion of said support touches the ring rail and no metal
portion of said fasteners touches the ring rail.
4,378,673
FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR GAS TURBINE ENGINE
Toshimi Abo, and Hidetoshi Kanegae, both of Yokohama, Japan,
assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jyn. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 156,776
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1979, 54-69553
Int. a.3 F02C 9/04
U.S. a. 60— 39.141 14 Claims
"- ,.^'-'>
>-•
^
' -AW • V.V
^
V^-^ig
vocf^ggW)
•M- ■/•
>
1. Apparatus for controlling the speed of a turbine having a
power shaft mounted independently of a gasifier shaft, the
gasifier shaft being driven in response to fuel flowing through
a fuel controller, comprising first means for controlling the
amount of fuel flowing through the fuel controller during
starting of the turbine, second means for controlling the
amount of fuel flowing through the fuel controller during
normal operation of the turbine, and means for switching
operation from the first controlling means to the second con-
trolling means in response to a predetermined relationship
between the fuel flowing through the fuel controller during
starting and the smaller of first and second errors between set
point and actual values of the speeds of the power and gasifier
shafts.
4,378,674
VARIABLE APERTURE ANNULAR NOZZLE FOR
ROCKET MOTOR IGNITER
Frank H. Bell, Logan, Utah, assignor to Thiokol Corporation,
Newtown, Pa.
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,706
Int. a.^ F02C 7/26: F02K 1/00, 9/95. 9/97
U.S. CI. 60—39.823 12 Qaims
42 12 28
1. An ignition device comprising
a body forming a combustion chamber having oppositely
disposed first and second openings in the wall thereof, at
least the second of said openings being generally circular,
an insulation coating on the wall of the chamber between the
chamber wall first and second openings,
a propellant charge having an axial bore and substantially
filling the coated portion of the chamber wall with the
bore of the charge extending longitudinally between the
chamber wall first and second openings,
a shaft having a first end and a second end, said shaft extend-
ing in sealing manner through the first opening in the wall
of the chamber and through the bore of said charge with
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
33
the second end thereof in position adjacent the second
opening in the chamber wall, and
a plug supported by the second end of said shaft adjacent the
second chamber wall opening, said plug having an annular
flange that diverges outwardly with respect to the second
chamber wall opening thereby forming an annular aper-
ture the area of which is predetermined in accordance
with the adjusted position of said shaft within the cham-
ber.
4^78,675
HYDRAULIC PUMP INTERLOCK SYSTEM
Bernard Otto, Arlington, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,980
Int. a.3 FOIB 25/02
U.S. a. 60—421 2 Claims
7
1
3«H, «0^
/
^"^
m 1 PUMP ON , ^fi 2 PUMP OM
2. In combination:
first and second hydraulic source means for supplying pres-
surized fluid;
first and second hydraulic circuits, each connected to said
first and second hydraulic source means;
first valve means for permitting fluid flow between said first
hydraulic source means and said first and second hydrau-
lic circuits;
second valve means for permitting fluid flow between said
second hydraulic source means and said first and second
hydraulic circuits; and
third valve means connected between said first valve means
and said second hydraulic circuit and between second
valve means and said first hydraulic circuit for preventing
fluid flow whenever both said first and second hydraulic
source means are operating.
4,378,676
BOOSTER FOR A HYDRAULIC CLUTCH SYSTEM
David Parsons, Kenilworth, and David R. Arrowsmith, Leaming-
ton Spa, both of England, assignors to Automotive Products
Limited, Leamington Spa, England
Filed Jun. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 159,378
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 15, 1979,
7920909
Int. a.3 B60T 13/12
U.S. a. 60—548 2 Oaims
1. An air/hydraulic servomotor unit for providing power
assistance for a clutch operating hydraulic system and compris-
ing:
a compressed air cylinder having a housing with end walls;
said air cylinder housing having a co-axial tubular extension
at one end;
a servo piston located in the housing and responsive to a
pressure differential to provide said assistance, said piston
having co-axial tubular projections extending one on each
side of the piston and sealingly passing through their
respective air cylinder housing end walls;
a hydraulic slave cylinder co-extensively fitted in said tubu-
lar extension and being arranged co-axially with said
servo piston and being the means whereby an input load is
transmitted to the servo motor unit;
a co-axial clutch operating means at the other end of the
housing and located in one of the tubular projections;
a load proportioning means also located in said one tubular
projection and which determines the ratio in which the
servo motor unit output is derived from the hydraulic
slave cylinder and the air cylinder;
a control valve for controlling the pressure differential
across the servo piston and which is located in the other
tubular projection;
^^,
k:^
■JSl.
.iia^
a slave cylinder piston operated by the hydraulic slave cylin-
der and which has a co-axial extension that passes through
the control valve and servo piston so that both pistons
engage with the load proportioning means through which
all output loads are transmitted to the clutch operating
means; and
said slave cylinder and co-axial tubular extension having
sufficient annular space therebetween so that the tubular
projection which houses the control valve can telescope
into said annular space.
4,378,677
BYPASS CONTROL APPARATUS FOR
TURBOCHARGED INTERNAL-COMBUSTION ENGINES
Bruno Zumstein, Lucerne, Switzerland, assignor to BBC Brown,
Boveri & Company Limited, Baden, Switzerland
Filed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,606
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 11, 1979,
6464/79
Int. CI.' F02B 37/00
U.S. a. 60—606 3 Claims
"
0 ^
2
0-
-o-
0-
o -
0
■ ■■* T
16 ,
oO
4-1 , n SH 11 23
1. In a bypass control apparatus for turbocharged internal-
combustion engines having an opening characteristic, depend-
ing upon the engine speed, for a bypass valve located in a
bypass pipe which connects a point of a boost air pipe located
downstream of a compressor to a point of an exhaust gas pipe
located upsteam of a turbine inlet of a turbocharger for the
engine, the improvement which comprises:
36
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
a flow pipe intended to accommodate a fluid stream for flow
therethrough and flow communicating with the bypass
valve;
said fluid stream serving as a work medium for actuation of
the bypass valve;
fluid source for delivering said fluid stream to said flow pipe;
a supply pipe operatively associated with said fluid source
means for receiving said fluid stream;
a discharge pipe flow communicating with said supply pipe
for the outflow of said fluid stream;
said flow pipe extending between said supply pipe and said
discharge pipe to define a pipe section;
a fixedly adjustable throttle valve provided for said pipe
section;
a spring-loaded control throttle valve provided for said pipe
section;
electrical signal transducer and amplifier means for operat-
ing said spring-loaded control throttle valve as a function
of the speed of the engine;
proportional electromagnetic means including an armature;
a signal line connecting the amplifier with said proportional
electromagnetic means; and
said armature being rigidly connected with said control
throttle valve for controlling operation of said control
throttle valve as a function of the speed of the engine.
4,378,678
TURBINE SYSTEM
Demos Papastavros, 2429 NE. 184th Ter., North Miami Beach,
Fla. 33160
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 279,765, Jul. 2, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 104,438,
Dec. 17, 1979, abandoned. This application Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No.
395,498
Int. CV FOIK 23/02
U.S. CI. 60—655 7 Claims
1. In a turbine system having:
first and second turbines having their respective rotors cou-
pled to each other for rotation in unison with each other,
each of said tubines having a fluid inlet and a fluid outlet;
first, second, third and fourth heat exchangers each having a
first fluid passageway arrangement having opposite ends
and a second fiuid passageway arrangement having oppo-
site ends, said first and second fluid passageway arrange-
ments in each heat exchanger being in heat transfer rela-
tionship to one another;
fluid conduit means operatively connecting the output of
said first turbine to one end of said first fluid passageway
arrangement in said first heat exchanger;
and fluid conduit means operatively connecting the output
of said second turbine to ope end of said first fluid passage-
way arrangement in said third heat exchanger;
the improvement which comprises the combination of:
fluid conduit means operatively connecting the opposite
end of said first fluid passageway arrangement in said
first heat exchanger to one end of said first fluid pas-
sageway arrangement in said second heat exchanger;
fluid conduit means operatively connecting the opposite
end of said first fluid passageway arrangement in said
second heat exchanger to one end of said second fluid
passageway arrangement in said third heat exchanger;
fluid conduit means operatively connecting the opposite
end of said second fluid passageway arrangement in said
third heat exchanger to the inlet of said first turbine;
fiuid conduit means operatively connecting the opposite
end of said first fluid passageway arrangement in said
third heat exchanger to one end of said first fluid pas-
sageway arrangement in said fourth heat exc^angerf
fluid conduit means operatively connecting the opposite
end of said first fluid passageway arrangement in said
fourth heat exchanger to one end of said second fluid
passageway arrangement in said first heat exchanger;
fluid conduit means operatively connecting the opposite
end of said second fluid passageway arrangement in said
first heat exchanger to the inlet of said second turbine;
a cooler having a fluid inlet, a fluid outlet, and cooling
means between its inlet and outlet for cooling fluid;
fluid conduit means operatively connecting thf outlet of
said cooler to one end of the second fluid passageway
arrangement in said second heat exchanger;
fluid conduit means operatively conecting the opposite
end of said second fluid passageway arrangement in said
second heat exchanger to the inlet of said cooler;
fluid conduit means operatively connecting the outlet of
said cooler to one end of said second fluid passageway
arrangement in said fourth heat exchanger;
and fluid conduit means operatively connecting the oppo-
site end of said second fluid passageway arrangement in
said fourth heat exchanger to the inlet of said cooler.
4,378,679
AIR CONDITIONING APPARATUS
George E. Stocking, and Bruce L. Ruark, both of Louisville, Ky.,
assignors to General Electric Company, Louisville, Ky.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,351
Int. a.3 F25B 47/00
U.S. a. 62— 280 6aaims
T^;r
1. A self-contained refrigeration heat pump air conditioning
unit operable in a heating and cooling cycle for conditioning
the air of an enclosure comprising:
a chassis including a base member and a barrier dividing said
chassis into an indoor compartment and an outdoor com-
partment;
indoor and outdoor heat exchangers mounted respectively
in said indoor and outdoor compartments;
an indoor air moving means for recirculating enclosure air
through said indoor compartment;
an outdoor air moving means for circulating air through said
outdoor compartment;
a compressor mounted in said outdoor compartment;
means for selectively connecting said compressor to said
heat exchangers whereby said outdoor heat exchanger
functions as an evaporator during operation of the unit on
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
the heating cycle and said indoor heat exchanger func-
tions as an evaporator during the cooling cycle;
a condensate collection sump in said outdoor compartment
formed in said base member being arranged to collect
condensate from said indoor and outdoor heat exchangers;
means for directing condensate formed on said indoor and
outdoor heat exchangers into said sump; and
condensate disposal means arranged in said outdoor com-
partment including a housing forming a compartment
comprising:
(a) a hood portion projecting from said one wall of said
housing to a position overlying a portion of said sump to
deflne a condensate lifting area,
(b) a passageway having substantially parallel side walls and
upper and lower walls diverging from an inlet communi-
cating with said housing lifting area to an outlet positioned
in said indoor compartment through an opening in said
barrier,
(c) a motor operable in the heating cycle being mounted in
said compartment with the drive shaft of said motor ex-
tending through one wall of said housing,
(d) a condensi*''" Mfting disc rotatably mounted on said shaft
being positioned under said hood,
(e) the diameter of said disc being sufficient to place a por-
tion of its lower circumferentially disposed edge in said
sump, said circumferentially disposed edge p>ortion of said
disc being tapered to form substantially a knife edge effec-
tive for lifting and throwing a diverging thin wall of mist
tangentially off said edge portion,
(0 said disc being f>ositioned axially on said shaft so that said
knife edge is in a plane in alignment with said passageway
inlet for directing said diverging thin wall of mist into said
passageway inlet and through said passageway outlet in
said indoor compartment into the path of air.
4,378,680
SHELL AND TUBE ICE-MAKER WITH HOT GAS
DEFROST
Milton W. Garland, Waynesboro, Pa., assignor to Frick Com-
pany, Waynesboro, Pa.
Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,749
Int. a.J F25C 5/10
U.S. a. 62— 352 7aaims
r^^
1. Apparatus for producing and harvesting ice intermittently
comprising vertical shell means having tube means therein,
means for supplying water to the interior of said tube means, an
accumulator-separator for refrigerant, a first conduit means
connecting the lower portion of said accumulator-separator to
said shell means for supplying liquid refrigerant thereto, a
second conduit means connecting the upper portion of the
37
accumulator-separator to the shell means for withdrawing
gaseous refrigerant from said shell means, said first and second
conduit means being connected to spaced portions of the shell
means so that liquid and gaseous refrigerant flow through the
shell means is in the same direction during ice making, said
shell means having a false twttom at its lower portion which
snugly engages said tub means and which constitutes a wall of
an enclosed space, restricted flow means in said false bottom,
said flow means comprising apertures of predetermined size
located intermediate said tube means and substantially prevent-
ing liquid flow but permitting gaseous flow, means for supply-
ing relatively high temperature and pressure gaseous refriger-
ant to the space beneath the false bottom for upward flow
through said flow means into said shell means and to cause
release of ice from the tube means, and means for retaining the
liquid refrigerant within said shell means when said relatively
high temperature and pressure gaseous refngerant is supplied
to the space beneath the false bottom for harvesting the ice.
4,378,681
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Jerry Modisette, Houston, Tex., assignor to Modisette, Inc.,
Houston, Tex.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,715
Int. CI.' F25B 1/06
U.S. CI. 62—500 17 Oaims
1. A closed refrigeration system in which a fluid refrigerant
can be circulated, comprising:
(a) heating means for converting the fluid to a relatively high
pressure gas;
(b) an expansion chamber downstream from the heating
means, the expansion chamber including a cylindncal
chamber with a fluid inlet opening adapted for introduc-
ing the gas tangentially into the chamber and an outlet
concentric about the chamber axis, and of smaller diame-
ter than the chamber so that conservation of angular
momentum causes the fluid to increase the tangential
component of its velocity, thereby producing an approxi-
mately isentropic expansion with reduced pressure and
temperature as it passes through the expansion chamber;
(c) a compression chamber connected to the outlet of the
expansion chaml)er, the compression chamber being ap-
proximately a mirror image of the expansion chamber, so
that the tangential component of the fluid velocity is
caused to decrease by the conservation of angular momen-
tum as the fluid passes from the small diameter inlet to the
tangential outlet, thereby producing an approximately
isentropic compression;
(d) condensing means downstream of the compression
chamber and upstream of the heating means for condens-
ing the gas from the compression chamber to a liquid;
(e) vaporizing means for vaporizing a portion of the liquid at
a relatively low pressure for providing refrigeration, the
inlet of the vaporizing means being connected between
the condensing means and the heating means for diverting
a portion of the fluid flowing from the condensing means;
(0 a conduit connected at one end to the outlet of the vapor-
38
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
izing means, the other end being located on the axis of the
expansion chamber so that the low pressure region will
cause Huid to circulate through the vaporizing means;
(g) circulating means for circulating fluid through the con-
densing means, heating means, expansion chamber, and
compression chamber;
(h) the outlet of the compression chamber being larger than
the inlet to the expansion chamber so as to accommodate
the increased flow volume, including the added flow from
the evaporator and the increased volume of the gas due to
heating;
(i) means within the expansion chamber in the form of a
generally conically shaped body to guide the flow to the
tangential outlet in a smooth manner.
4^78,682
PRESSER FOOT FOR A KNITTING MACHINE
Max W. Betts, Coventry, England, assignor to Courtaulds Lim-
ited, London, England
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,828
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 3, 1979,
7934342
Int. a.^ D04B 7/04
U.S. a. 66—64 9 Qaims
J7
26
54 3Q 35
1 A presser foot for a knitting machine having indepen-
dently operable needles disposed in at least two needle beds,
said presser foot being adapted for movement across the needle
beds in synchronism with needle operation and comprising an
elongate presser member comprising:
(a) two elongate side-by-side presser elements providing side
parts of said presser member,
(b) said side parts sloping upwardly and inwardly with re-
spect to one another in a roof-like configuration.
4,378,683
TRANSVERSELY STRETCHABLE STRINGER TAPE FOR
SLIDE FASTENERS
Yoshio Matsuda, Nyuzen, and Yoshiharu Yamaguchi,
Namerikawa, both of Japan, assignors to Yoshida Kogyo K.
K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,972
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 18, 1980, 55-
35579[U]
Int. a.' D04B 2im. 23/10
U.S. a. 66—193 21 Qaims
22
21 19 20
11
uwm^s^.
^ ^ .' 22'
- w ^1 \\
25
7U
25
22'
p,PM^f^flf^^c{P^GjS^
W, IS
1^18 17' 1/ 17
1/ 17 22 18
1
b
1. A transversely stretchable stringer tape for a slide fastener
having a pair of rows of coupling elements, comprising:
(a) an elongate warp-knit web having a plurality of longitu-
dinal wales disposed between a pair of longitudinal edges,
said web including a pair of marginal portions extending
along said pair of longitudinal edges, respectively, and an
intermediate portion extending between said marginal
portions, at least one of said marginal portions being non-
stretchable for supporting therealong one coupling ele-
ment row of the slide fastener;
(b) said intermediate portion being transversely stretchable
and including a plurality of yams (hereafter called second
yams) forming a knit ground structure containing stitch
loops, and at least one elastic yam (hereafter called third
yarn) laid in said knit ground structure and extending
transversely across a plurality of adjacent ones of said
wales, said second yarns being elastic and each extending
across at least an adjacent pair of said wales, the number of
the wales across which each said second yam extends
-> being smaller than the number of the wales across which
said third yam extends.
4,378,684
DOUBLE CYLINDER SLIDING DOOR LOCK
Thomas J. Dugan, 226 Paseo de Cristobal, and Dennis G. Dugan,
117 Avenida Dominguez, both of San Gemente, Calif. 92672
Filed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,370
Int. a.^ E05B 65/08
U.S. a. 70—100 4 Claims
1. A locking mechanism for a door which comprises:
a locking member for securing an associated door in a closed
position, said locking member being arcuate;
means for mounting said locking member to permit rotation
about an axis;
a first lock extending in a first direction, said first lock opera-
tively cooperating with said locking member;
a second lock extending in a second direction which is oppo-
site to said first direction, said second lock operatively
cooperating with said locking member;
means for transferring rotary movement of one of said locks
to said locking member;
said means for transferring motion comprising a shaft ex-
tending intermediate said first and second lock, and fur-
ther including at least a collar cooperating with said shaft
in a manner which prevents relative angular motion be-
tween said collar and said shaft, a second collar cooperat-
ing with said shaft, said second collar including means
cooperating with said shaft to prevent relative angular
motion therebetween; and
at least one spring biased member having an axis and at least
one planar surface extending radially of the axis and bear-
ing on the peripheral surfaces of the collars in at least
some angular positions of the collars.
4,378,685
METHOD OF SETTING AXIAL POSITION OF LOOSELY
CARRIED SLEEVE IN A ROLLING MILL
Shigeni Ogawa; Yiiyi Uehori; Hiromi Matsiunoto, all of Kita-
kyushu, and Koe Nakujima, Nakama, all of Japan, assignors
to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,697
Int. CV B21B 31/16
U.S. a. 72—21 6 Claims
1. A method of changing the axial position of a sleeve in a
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
39
rolling mill having at least one roll on which said sleeve is
loosely positioned and contacting the inner surface of the
sleeve along a straight line parallel to the roll axis for rotating
of the sleeve with the roll, said sleeve further being axially
shiftable along the outer circumferential surface of the said one
roll, said one roll, during normal op>eration of said rolling mill,,
being subjected to a rolling load from one side of the sleeve
directed toward the sleeve center and onto the outer circum-
ferential surface of said one roll, and the roll necks of said one
--1 5
2
I 2'
1 t
4'
roll being subjected to a balancing force for said load through
bearing means, said method comprising displacing said sleeve
in one direction along said roll axis by exerting on said sleeve
transversely thereof a force which produces a force trans-
versely of said sleeve axis for inclining the sleeve axis slightly
so that the end toward which it is desired to displace the sleeve
is moved in the same direction as the direction in which said
sleeve is moving at the line of contact of said one roll with the
inner surface of said sleeve.
4^78,687
METHOD FOR ROLLING H-SECTIONS IN
CONTINUOUS MILL
Vladislav A. Shilov, ulitsa S. Kovalevskoi, 1, Wt. 77; Vitaly K.
Smimov, ulitsa MalysheTi, 130-b, kv. 31; Viktor S. Pe-
chersky, ulitsa 40 let Oktyai>rya, 36, kv. 7, all of STerdloTsk;
Alexandr A. Kugushin, Kemerovskoi oblasti, protpekt Metal-
lurgOT, 25, kv. 128, Novokuznetsk; Vladimir N. Bespalov,
Kemerovskoi oblasti, ulitsa Kurako, 16, kv. 85, Novokuzaesk;
Jury O. Labetsky, Kemerovskoi oblasti, ulitsa Kirova, 56, kv.
61, Novokuznesk, and Boris M. Melnikov, Kemerovskoi ob-
lasti, ulitsa Suvorova, 2, kv. 79, Novokuznetsk, all of U^.S.R.
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,368
Int. a.3 B21B ]/08
U.S. a. 72—366 3 Claims
1. A method for rolling H-sections in a continuous mill,
comprising bevelling a forward end of a billet prior to rolling
on the faces that are to be horizontal during rolling at an angle
of 20°-30° relative to a horizontal axis of said billet, and subse-
quent rolling of said billet in slitting and beam passes.
4,378,686
FORMING OF MATERIALS BY EXTRUSION
John A. Pardoe, Lytham St. Annes, England, assignor to United
Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority, London, England
Filed Mar. 6, 1978, Ser. No. 883,662
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 16, 1977,
11047/77
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 5, 1997,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B21C 23/02, 29/00
UJS. a. 72—262 9 Qaims
1. In apparatus for the continuous forming of materials by
extrusion, a wheel member with an endless peripheral groove
and comprising an assembly of two parts joined in a radial
plane within the groove base width, at least one of the parts
having a portion which abuts with the other part along the said
joining plane, the amount of abuttment being limited to extend-
ing radially only part way to a driving shaft to which the wheel
member is secured for rotation therewith, for providing an
annular separation zone extending from the driving shaft pe-
riphery part way towards the groove of the wheel member,
and means for holding the two wheel member parts in abutting
position during rotation of the wheel member by the driving
shaft for operation to perform extrusion.
4,378,688
APPARATUS FOR FEEDING AND ORIENTING
WORKPIECES IN A PRESS
Edwin A. Spanke, Oak Forest, and Melvin H. Francey, Palos
Heights, both of III., assignors to Gulf A Western Manufac-
turing Company, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,247
Int. a.3 B21D 43/00; B21J 13/08
U.S. a. 72—420 30 Claims
1. Apparatus for feeding and orienting a workpi-ce relative
to a work station in a press comprising, shuttle means, means
supporting said shuttle means for reciprocation relative to said
press between workpiece receiving and press loading posi-
tions, means including workpiece support means on said shut-
tle means underlying and supporting a workpiece in a working
position at said work station and in a feeding position spaced
above said working position, mounting means supporting said
workpiece support means on said shuttle means for displace-
ment relative thereto along a vertical axis for said workpiece
support means to engage under and displace a workpiece
between said feeding and working positions, said mounting
means further supporting said workpiece support means for
displacement about said vertical axis to rotate a workpiece
supported at said work station in said feeding position, and
means for displacing said workpiece support means along and
about said axis.
40
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4378,689
CORE FOR A PIPE THAT IS TO BE BENT
Theodor Molz, Chur, Switzerland, assignor to W. Eckold AG,
Switzerland
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,245
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 4,
1980, 3000170
Int. a.^ B21D 9/03
U.S. a. 72—466 14 Claims
^'m « fn*
a central opening formed through the base plate and the stub
leg and in alignment with the die drawing openings; and
a sinter holding body (4') in the form of a molded body
positioned essentially flush with the side surface (10),
surrounding portions of the die and the stub leg including
the conical surface thereof, and shaped to fit into the cup
shaped die holder, said carrier and die being fitted in the
die holder so that the carrier extends across the die holder
opening with the side surface engaging the iiiner wall of
the die holder and the sinter holding body being posi-
tioned intermediate the bottom wail and the open end of
said die holder with the sinter holding body in engage-
ment with the bottom wall and upstanding inner wall, a
side of said die opposite said one side being solely sup-
ported by said sinter holding body and said plate and die
being arranged for drawing of wire through the combina-
tion in the direction First through the base plate and the
stub leg, then through the die, and then through the sinter
body to place the sinter body in compression and, in use,
in direct contact with the die holder (5).
1. Core for a pipe that is to be bent, comprised of elements
that are coupled to one another in articulated manner, charac-
tenzed in that there are arranged on a wire cable (10) separate
wedge elements which are themselves articulated and, be-
tween successive wedge elements, expanding elements that can
be expanded transversely to the extension of the cable, the
wedge elements can be pushed together in the direction of
extension of the cable with the expanding elements being ex-
panded, each of such wedge elements being comprised of a
joint member of round cross-section at least m the bending
plane of the pipe and a semi-wedge member arranged at each
side, having a bearing face complementary to the cross-section
of the joint member.
4,378,690
DIAMOND DRAWING DIE AND SETTING
COMBINATION
Wolfram Stiebritz, Konigsbrunn; Georg Sitterer, Graben, and
Klaus Scidel, Mittelstetten, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Patent-Treuliand-Gesellschaft flir Elektrische
Gliihlampen mbH, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,224
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 15,
1980, 3001261
Int. a.3 B21C i/02, 3/12
U.S. CI. 72—467 5 Claims
4,378,691
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL SENSOR
Jiro Terada, and Tsunehani Nitta, both of Katano, Japan, as-
signors to Matsusliita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,181
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 2, 1980, 55-12889;
Apr. 2, 1980, 55-12890
Int. C\? COIN 27/12, 31/06
U.S. a. 73—27 R 6 Claims
1. A multi-functional sensor capable of detecting humidity
and a gas or gases comprising
(a) a sensing element consisting essentially of a p-type metal-
oxide ceramic semiconductor,
(b) means attached to said sensing element for detecting or
measuring humidity in terms of variations in ion conduc-
tion due to the physical absorption of water, temperature
lower than 150' C, and
(c) means attached to said sensing element for detecting or
measuring a gas or gases in terms of variations in electron
conduction due to the chemical absorption of said gas or
gases at temperature between 200* C. and 600* C.
1. Diamond drawing die and die setting- combination
adapted for insertion in a separate die holder (5), the die holder
being cup-shaped and having upstanding inner wall portion, an
open end and a bottom wall;
said die and die setting combination comprising
a carrier (7) including a disk portion forming a base plate (8)
and having a side surface (10) extending along the outer
peripheral edge of said disk fitting into the upstanding
inner wall portions of the holder,
and a stub leg (14) extending essentially centrally from the
base plate having conical side surfaces and a die seating
surface (16) opposite the base plate, one side of said die (3)
being secured to said seating surface;
4,378,692
LEAK DETECTING MONITOR
L. Irwin Walle, Largo, Fla., assignor to Air Monitor Co., Inc.,
Largo, Fla.
FUed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,683
Int. a.' GOIM 3/32
U.S. a. 73—49.2 10 Claims
1 A fluid pressure monitor, comprising:
an axially displaceable sensing piston having a first surface
exposed to a fluid pressure to be monitored and a second
surface opposite to said first surface, having a first portion
exposed to a reference gas pressure in a first chamber and
a second portion not so exposed;
a balance valve having an axially displaceable valve stem
mounted on said second portion of said sensing piston and
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
41
within said first chamber, having a valve face formed on
said valve stem and having a valve seat which operatively
mates with said valve face when said valve stem is axially
displaced in conjunction with the axial displacement of
said sensing piston in response to changes in the relative
magnitude of said fluid pressure to be monitored with
respect to said reference gas pressure;
an axially displaceable signal piston having a first surface
exposed to gas pressure in a second chamber which com-
municates through said valve seat of said balance valve
with said first chamber, and a second surface opposite to
said first surface;
which vary differentially according to the angle and direction
of tiltj means for applying an A.C. voltage across the first
impedance, means for applying an antiphase A.C. voltage
across the second impedance, rectifier means for deriving a
positive D.C. voltage having a magnitude depending on the
magnitude of the first impedance and deriving a negative D.C.
voltage having a magnitude depending on the magnitude of the
second impedance, means for adding the positive DC. voltage
and the negative D.C. voltage to derive a D.C. voltage the
magnitude of which is dependent on the angle of tilt and the
sign of which is dependent on the direction of tUt.
SENSING BALANCE SICSNAL
PISTON VALVE PISTON
said axial displacement of said balance valve controlling the
rate of flow of said reference gas from said fist chamber to
said second chamber;
a gas jet having an inlet connected to a sensing gas pressure
source and sensing gas pressure detector and an outlet
proximate to said second surface of said signal piston;
said signal piston blocking said outlet of said gas jet, produc-
ing a pneumatic signal detectable by said detector, in
response to said reference gas being admitted from said
first chamber to said second chamber through said valve
seat in response to a decrease in said fluid pressure to be
monitored with respect to said reference gas pressure
which axially displaces said sensing piston, moving said
valve face away from said valve seat of said balance valve.
> 4,378,693
DEFLECTION MEASURING SYSTEM
Edward L. Ratciiffe, Ottawa, Canada, assignor to Hambro Inter-
national (Structures) Limited, Ottawa, Canada
Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,645
Int. a.3 GOIB 5/28
U.S. a. 73—105 7 Qaims
4,378,694
INSTRUMENT FOR MEASURING THE SPEED AND
FUEL CONSUMPTION OF MOTOR VEHICLES
Nandor Bohm; Janos Bohm, and Robert Bohm, all of Budapest,
Hungary, assignors to Kozuti Kozlekedesi Tudomanyos
Kutato Intezet, Budapest, Hungary
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,786
Int. a.' GOIF 9/02
U.S. CI. 73—114 17 Oaims
1. An instrument for continuously indicating the instanta-
neous rate of fuel consumption during operation of a motor
vehicle equipped with a speedometer and with a flowmeter
traversed by fuel fed to the motor,
comprising:
a stationary speed scale logarithmically graduated with first
markings representing distance per hour;
a movable consumption scale logarithmically graduated
with second markings representing units of fuel per prede-
termined distance, said consumption scale being disposed
on a carrier operatively coupled with said flowmeter; and
a pointer driven by said speedometer for simultaneously
sweeping said speed scale with increasing speed in a direc-
tion of increasing markings of said speed scale and de-
creasing markings of said consumption scale, said con-
sumption scale advancing codirectionally with said
pointer upon a rise in speed accompanied by an increased
fuel flow, said speedometer being provided with a loga-
rithmically calibrated restoring spring.
4,378,695
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING FUEL INJECTION
TIMING
Hidekazu Oshizawa, Kumagaya, Japan, assignor to Diesel Kiki
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,554
. Clainu priority, application Japan, Dec. 25, 1979, 54-168977
Int. Cl.^ GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 73—119 A 8 Qaiou
1. An apparatus for measuring the fuel injection timing of a
fuel injection apparatus which ii\jects fuel into an engine,
1. A system for sensing deviation of a surface, structure or comprising:
the like from a reference axis comprising a tilt sensitive trans- a pulse generator for generating a pulse train signal which
ducer including a first and a second impedance the values of changes in frequency in relation to the speed of the engine;
42
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
a first timing detecting means for generating a first timing
pulse in response to fuel injection;
a second timing detecting means for generating a second
timing pulse at the time when the associated crank of the
engine is at top dead center;
a gate signal generator for generating a gate signal having a
pulse width corresponding to the period from the time of
occurrence of said first timing pulse to the time of occur-
rence of said second timing pulse, and;
14 i3
a counter for counting the pulses of said pulse train signal
from said pulse generator for the period of the pulse width
of the gate signal,
wherein said pulse generator has a sensor for generating a
signal changing in frequency in response to the speed of
the engine and a frequency multiplying circuit for multi-
plying the frequency of said signal from said sensor.
4,378,696
PRESSURE SENSOR FOR DETERMINING AIRSPEED
ALTITUDE AND ANGLE OF ATTACK
Richard V. DeLeo, Hopkins, and Floyd W. Hagen, Eden Prairie,
both of Minn., assignors to Rosemount Inc., Eden Prairie,
Minn.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Set. No. 236,900
Int. a.^ GOIC 21/00: GOIP 5/165
U.S. CI. 73—180 13 Qaims
Z).. c/) c/
1. An air data sensing probe for sensing the angle of relative
movement between the probe and a fluid stream, comprising a
barrel having a longitudinal axis and including:
a leading end and a trailing end, a first generally cylindrical
section, a second generally cylindrical section spaced
rearwardly from the first generally cylindrical section, the
second section being larger diameter than the first gener-
ally cylindrical section, and an increasing diameter surface
section generated about the longitudinal axis and joining
the first and second sections the increasing diameter sur-
face section forming an included angle of between in the
range of 5* and 25* with respect to the longitudinal axis;
a pair of pressure sensing port means on said increasing
diameter section, said port means having axes which to-
gether with the barrel longitudinal axis define a plane in
which an angle to be sensed is to be measured with respect
to a reference position of the longitudinal axis;
means to subtract the pressure at one of said port means from
the other; and
means providing a signal representing a ratio of the differ-
ence between the pressures sensed at the respective port
means and a pressure quantity including a pitot pressure
function which provides a ratio value which is nonlinear
with increasing angles of above about twenty degrees
with respect to the reference position of the longitudinal
axis.
4,378,697
STRUT MOUNTED MULTIPLE STATIC TUBE
Richard V. DeLeo, Hopkins, and Floyd W. Hagen, Eden Prairie,
both of Minn., assignors to Rosemount Inc., Eden Prairie,
Minn.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,860
Int. a? GOIP 5/165
U.S. a. 73—182 15 Oaims
1. In a probe for sensing static fluid pressures, said probe
having a laterally extending mounting strut at a rear portion
thereof for mounting said probe in spaced relationship to an
external surface in a Huid How stream and having a probe
barrel with a longitudinal axis, the improvement comprising;
an annular smoothly curved corrugation formed on the
outer surface of said barrel in a position between the
leading end of said probe and the strut to form a pressure
disturbance along said barrel and having substantially
equal static pressure occurring at axially spaced positions
on opposite sides of a radial plane lying on the minimum
cross sectional dimension of said annular corrugation.
4,378,698
AMPLITUDE AND PHASE DETECTOR IN A HARMONIC
OSOLLATOR SYSTEM
Lucien Masse; William L. Medlin, both of Dallas, and James H.
Sexton, Duncanville, all of Tex., assignors to Mobil Oil Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,770
Int. a.J GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 73— 579 4 Qaims
n
'!» *\\* •}"
CI O, , r -
n
-^•'^' ;n^
1.1' -'M.
J ,1' -'\
1. In a system for measuring dynamic elastic constants of
rock materials having a rock material horizontally supported
between a pair of masses which are vertically suspended and a
coil-magnet system driven by a sinusoidal current such that the
masses move in opposition with the rock material acting as a
spring element connecting them, the improvement comprising:
(a) a pair of coil-magnet displacement detectors mounted on
each of said masses,
(b) means for connecting the coils of said coil-magnet dis-
placement detectors so as to produce an emf displacement
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
43
signal across said coils that is proportional to the relative
displacements of said masses,
(c) a resistive element connected in series with the driving
coils to said masses, whereby the voltage across said resis-
tive element has the same phase as said sinusoidal driving
current,
(d) means for utilizing the voltage across said resistive ele-
ment to produce a first square wave signal in phase with
the driving current and a second square wave signal 90°
out of phase with said Hrst square wave signal,
(e) a synchronous detector to which said displacement signal
and said first square wave signal are applied, said detector
producing a output when said displacement signal is in
phase with said first square wave signal,
(0 a quadrature detector to which said displacement signal
and said second square wave signal are applied, said detec-
tor producing a signal when said displacement signal is In
phase with said second square wave signal.
I ¥'t
jfci
1. A scanning acoustic mircoscope comprising:
transducer means for providing a convergent beam of acous-
tic radiation;
means for causing relative movement in the focal plane of
the focus of said beam and a sample under investigation;
transducer means for receiving acoustic radiation modulated
by the sample near the beam focus; and
means for supplying a gas at higher than atmospheric pres-
sure to a volume between surrounding the transducer
means and the sample.
4,378,700
INDICATING SYSTEM FOR USE IN NONDESTRUCTIVE
TESTING
John J. Flaherty, Elk Grore Village, and Eric J. Strauts, Park
Ridge, both of III., assignors to Magnaflux Corporation, Chi-
cago, III.
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204,950
Int. a.3 GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 79—620 25 Qaims
1. In an indicating system for a nondestructive testing system
which includes means for concurrently developing first and
second analog test signals having amplitudes which concur-
rently vary relative to each other as a function of characteris-
tics of a structure under test, said indicating system comprising:
recording means for recording digital reference signals which
establish set limits with respect to relative variations of the
amplitudes of said first and second analog signals and which
define a certain range of characteristics of a structure under
test, converter means for converting said first and second
analog test signals into first and second digital test signals.
4,378,699
SCANNING ACOUSTIC MICROSCOPE
Hemantha K. Wickramasinghe, London, England, assignor to
National Research Development Corporation, London, En-
gland
PCT No. PCr/GB80/00089, § 371 Date Jan. 23, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 23, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02594, PCT Pub.
Date Nov. 27, 1980
PCT Filed May 15, 1980, Ser. No. 229,576
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 24, 1979,
7918101
Int. a.3 GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 73—606 12 Claims
"Id [_,-J KUI t _,
comparator means for comparing said first and second digital
test signals and said digital reference signals, and output means
coupled to said comparator means for output of a signal indi-
cating the existence or non-existence of correspondence be-
tween the relationship of the amplitudes of said first and sec-
ond analog signals and said set limits.
4,378,701
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INDICATING STRESS
IN AN OBJECT
David S. Mountain, Portsmouth; Anthony J. Ailnutt, Chis-
lehurst; Lionel R. Baker, Orpington; Laurence J. Cox; Alan J.
Picot, both of Beckenham; Peter F. Wardropper, West Wick-
ham, and Julian M. Webber, Beckenham, all of England,
assignors to Sira Institute Limited, Kent, England
PCT No. PCr/GB79/00081, § 371 Date Jan. 31, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 11, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO79/01156, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 27, 1979
PCT Filed May 25, 1979, Ser. No. 179,285
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 31, 1978,
26014/78
Int. Q.' GOIN i/n
U.S. Q. 73—808 37 Qaims
1. A method for indicating and distinguishing tension and
compression in a predetermined part of a complex shaped
object comprising determining a continuously changing load
on the object and measuring and distinguishing increases and
decreases in temperature of the predetermined part of the
object with change of load, said measuring of ^e temperature
44
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
being performed by determining the thermal radiation of the
predetermined part and correlating these changes of tempera-
SKWAL KtOCtSS»«Q APPMATU9
(Wm-OtD OCTECTION SYSTtM
13
ture with respect to the instantaneous value of the continu-
ously changing load.
1
radial and thrust fluidic bearings, and turbine means associated
with each head to rotate the rotor in response to fluid flow; the
improvement that the geometries of the bearing heads and
associated turbine means differ and are chosen so that the
transitions from laminar to turbulent flow occur at different
flow rates and the decline in the characteristic curve due to the
first transition coincides with a rise due to laminar flow prior to
the second transition.
4. A flow meter of the type comprising a body having an
inlet passage leading to a stator passage which splits the flow
4,378,702
FLAT MEASURING STRING CONSTRUCTION
Eugene Meier, Meilen, Switzerland, assignor to Mettler In-
strumente AG, Greifensee, Switzerland
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. Slo. 300,487
Gaims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 16, 1980,
9253/80
Int. CI.' GOIN 3/08
U.S. a. 73—826 8 Claims
4,378,703
FLOWMETER
Richard A. Furness, South Benfleet, and Robert A. Lauder,
Romford, both of England, assignors to The British Steam
Specialties Limited, Lee Circle, England
Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,040
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 11, 1980,
8000963; Jan. 11, 1980, 8001041
Int. G.5 GOIF 1/12
U.S. G. 73—861.79 4 Gaims
1. In a flow meter of the type comprising a body including a
double ended rotor provided with two spaced bearing heads
cooperabie with bearing seats in the body to act as combined
from the inlet passage, a double-ended rotor in the stator pas-
sage, the rotor having a pair of bearing heads cooperabie with
bearing seats in the body to form combined radial and thrust
bearings supporting the rotor in the fluid flowing through the
stator passage, the rotor having turbine means whereby it is
rotated by fluid flow, said flow meter characterized by the fact
that:
the turbine means for rotating the rotor are formed by an-
gled passages through the bearing heads, each of said
angled passages having an inlet end and an outlet end
spaced from the periphery of its respective bearing head.
4,378,704
PROCESS AND DEVICE TO IDENTIFY DIFFERENCES
IN YARN TENSION
Hans- Joachim a' Brassard; Robert Kloss; Paul Ketzler, and
Johannes Wolz, all of Heinsberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors tc Akzona, Incorporated, Asheville, N.C.
Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 174,745
Int. G.3 GOIL 5/10
U.S. CI. 73—862.07 13 Gaims
\
A flat measuring string, comprising
unitary body member formed by punching from a metal
sheet, said body member including
(a) a Hat planar central main string portion (12);
(b) a pair of flat end portions (14) arranged at the ends of
said main string portion, respectively; and
(c) a pair of nodal portions arranged between said main
strmg portion and said end portions, respectively, each
of said nodal portions including a flat center portion
coplanar with said main string portion and of flat, inte-
gral wing portions (18) folded with respect to said
center portion about parallel fold lines (18a), respec-
tively.
1. A process to identify differences in yarn tension in a
traveling sheet of parallel yam ends on a textile machine,
especially a creel or a warper, wherein individual ends in the
yam sheet are equidistant from each other in a measuring zone,
characterized in that the entire yam sheet is deflected under
identical conditions for individual ends from a general plane
into another plane of a length limited in the direction of travel
by the measuring zone and is returned to the general plane
after the measuring zone, that individual ends are deflected in
a specific sequence at a predetermined force in the measuring
zone from said another plane, and that the extent of deflection
is measured and used to determine the tension in each succes-
sive yam end whereby operation of the textile machine can be
monitored.
5. A device for determining differences in yam tension in a
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
45
sheet of parallel yam ends on a textile machine which com-
prises at least two yarn deflecting bars, said yam deflecting
bars simultaneously acting to establish a measuring zone; a reed
for guiding individual yam ends in the measuring zone, in a
direction transverse to the yarn sheet; a movable measuring
carriage equipped with a yarn feeler movable along a line
essentially or nearly perpendicular to the yam sheet plane in
the measuring zone, said feeler being biased towards the yam
sheet and having means for contacting the individual yarn ends
in sequence to effect deflection of the yam ends from the yarn
sheet plane and the position of the feeler being determined by
measuring means; and the measuring means being connected to
means for indicating the tension of the individual ends thereby
permitting control of the operation of said textile machine.
4,378,705
RECIPROCATING DEVICE
Kei^i Oka, Ebina, Japan, assignor to Tokico, Ltd., Kawasaki,
Japan
Filed Aug. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 179,530
Gaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 20, 1979, 54-105639
Int. C1.3 F16H 19/06
U.S. a. 74—37 2 Oaims
1. A reciprocating device comprising:
an endless member such as a chain or belt having a forward
side span and a backward side span, and moving in circula-
tion;
driving means for driving said endless member along only
one direction;
a reciprocating member freely movable for reciprocation,
said reciprocating member comprising a first movable
member and a second movable member, said second mov-
able member being unitarily movable with said first mov-
able member and also separately and relatively movable
with respect to said first movable member;
guide means for guiding said reciprocating member substan-
tially parallel along said forward side span and backward
side span of said endless member, saj^ guide means guid-
ing said first movable member;
engaging means consisting of a sprocket wheel rotatably
provided on said reciprocating member, for selectively
engaging with either said forward side span or backward
side span of said endless member, said sprocket wheel
having a projection and being provided with teeth
throughout a predetermined angular range, said recipro-
cating member moving to one side according to the move-
ment of said endless member upon engagement of said
endless member with said forward side span of said end-
less member, and moving to the other side upon engage-
ment of said engaging means with said backward side span
of said endless member;
changeover means for changing over the engagement of said
engaging means from either one side span of said endless
member to the other side span of said endless member, at
predetermined reciprocating movement range limit posi-
tions of said reciprocating member, said changeover
means having locking and releasing means for locking said
sprocket wheel in a non-rotatable state and releasing the
locking with respect to said sprocket wheel; and
stopping means for stopping the movement of said first
movable member at the predetermined reciprocating
movement range limit positions of said reciprocating
member, said stopping means being arranged and pro-
vided in a manner such that the stoppmg operation of said
stopping means and the lock releasing operation of said
locking and releasing means are performed simulta-
neously,
said stopping means comprising means which moves unitar-
ily with said first movable member and stops the move-
ment of said first movable member by engaging with said
guide means in an immovable manner at the reciprocating
movement range limit positions of said reciprocating
member,
said second movable member having an elongated opening
with said projection of said sprocket wheel inserted there-
through, said elongated opening extending in a direction
perpendicular to said forward and backward side spans of
said endless member, said second movable member mov-
ing relatively with respect to said first movable member
during rotation of said sprocket wheel due to the engage-
ment between said projection and said elongated opening,
said sprocket wheel engaging to either said forward side
span or backward side span in a non-rotatable state when
said sprocket wheel is locked, to move uniurily with said
reciprocating member in accordance with the movement
of said endless member, and being rotated by the move-
ment of said endless member when the lock with respect
to said sprocket wheel is released to engage with the other
side span of said endless member from either said forward
side span or backward side span of said endless member,
said locking and releasing means having first and second
locking means for locking said projection of said sprocket
wheel in a state where said sprocket wheel is fixedly
engaged with either one of said forward side span or
backward side span of said endless member, and means for
respectively releasing the locking operation of said first
and second locking means at said predetermined recipro-
cating movement range limit positions of said reciprocat-
ing member at both said forward and backward side spans
of said endless member.
4,378,706
RECIPROCALLY DRIVING DEVICE
Koichi Miyamoto, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,740
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1979, 54-119050;
Oct. 9, 1979, 54-130313
Int. a.3 F16H 33/02. 29/02
U.S. a. 74—89.22 13 Oaims
1. A mechanism for reciprocally driving a movable member,
said mechanism comprising:
a constant speed drive source movable in a predetermined
direction;
movement converting means for converting the movement of
said drive source into a reciprocal movement in which the
time required for backward movement is shorter than the
time required for forward movement;
output means connected to said movement converting means
to put out a reciprocal movement for driving the movable
member; and
speed control means for controlling the speed of the forward
movement of said movable member so as not to exceed a
46
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
predetermined speed, said sjseed control means comprising
overrunning clutch means interposed between said constant
4,378,708
NORMAL FRICTION FORCE DEVELOPING SYSTEM
FOR TRACTION DRIVE TRANSMISSIONS
Harvey N. Pouliot, Livermore. Calif., assignors to Vadetec
Corporation, Troy, Mich.
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Scr. No. 217,751
Int. a.i F16H 13/10. 13/00, 15/16
U.S. a. 74—191 5 Qaims
speed drive source effecting a constant speed movement and
said output means.
4,378,707
INDEXING APPARATUS
Richard W. Jeffries, Birmingham, Mich., assignor to Jackson
Machine Products, Madison Heights, Mich.
Filed Aug. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 180,385
Int. a.3 F16H 29/04; B23Q 17/00
U.S. a. 74—117 3 Claims
1. In an indexing apparatus operated by a unidirectionally
rotating drive shaft supported on a base, an indexing member
rotatably mounted to the base, a driven member supported by
the base adapted to selectively rotatably engage the indexing
member, interconnecting means driven at a first end by a first
crank arm associated with said drive shaft and connected at a
second end to said driven member by a second crank arm
whereby said drive shaft oscillates said driven member in
opposite first and second directions through an arc of travel,
releasably engaging means carried by said driven member
engaging said indexing member during oscillation of said
driven member in said first direction, locking means operated
in timed relation to rotation of said drive shaft to selectively
engage said indexing member to lock said indexing member
against rotation and to release said indexing member for rota-
tion during oscillation of said driven member in said first direc-
tion; the improvement comprising:
means for varying the length of said second crank arm so as
to vary the length of said arc of travel of said driven
member.
Zi^
1. In a biconical torque transmitting body having a pair of
oppositely convergent, generally conical traction surfaces of
revolution about one axis inclined with respect to and inter-
secting another axis coaxial with another pair of axially spaced
traction surfaces against which said conical traction surfaces
are retained under normal force loading for the transmission of
torque by rolling friction between said respective pairs of
rolling surfaces, such normal force loading being variable in
accordance with torque loading on the biconical body and
developed by force application acting to separate a pair of cone
members carrying said conical surfaces along said one axis, the
improvement comprising:
a torque member coaxial with and supported by the biconi-
cal body with freedom for rotatable and axial movement
relative thereto:
ramp means operative between said torque member and said
cone members to develop an axial thrusting force between
said cone members; and
means for preventing relative rotation of said cone members
while permitting axial separation thereof.
4,378,709
FRICnON DRIVE FOR POSITIONING TABLE
Anwar Chitayat, Plainview, N.Y., assignor to Anorad Corp.,
Happauge, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,238
Int. aJ F16H 13/10, 15/00
U.S. a. 74—207 5 Qaims
I. A positioning apparatus comprising:
a frame;
a table on said frame, said table being movable back and
forth in a straight line;
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
47
a friction drive bar centered along an axis of motion of said
table;
means for attaching said friction drive bar to said table;
a servomotor fixed to said frame having a rotatable shaft;
means for pinching a peripheral surface of said shaft into
frictional contact with friction drive bar; and
said means for attaching being effective to permit translation
of said friction drive bar in a direction normal to said axis
of motion and substantially parallel to a surface of said
table.
4,378,710
VARIABLE-SPEED TRANSMISSION FOR MOTOR CARS
Gunter Knodel, Miihlacker, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Getnig Getriebe-und Zahnradfabrik GmbH, Ludwigsburg,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,228
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 6,
1979, 2936009
Int. a.^ F16H 3/38; F16D 23/06
U.S. a. 74—339 7 Claims
1. A multi-step reduction gear for motor vehicles, compris-
ing a transmission of the countershaft type of construction,
having several forward gear sets and one reverse gear set in
which at least the reverse gear set is synchronized and con-
stantly engaged with each other, at least one gear set of the
forward speeds and reverse speed is engaged for the transmis-
sion of power by a clutch having an axially sliding member,
said clutch serving to actuate the reverse gear being blocked
against engagement therewith by a stop actuated by centrifugal
force when a given speed is exceeded, said stop being built into
the clutch and engaging the axially movable member positively
when engaged to prevent movement thereof into engagement
with the gear set for reverse motion.
4,378,711
PLANETARY MECHANISM HAVING A FLUID BAFFLE
Steven A. Daniel, Marquette Heights, 111., assignor to Caterpil-
lar Tractor Co., Peoria, 111.
per No. PCr/US80/01284, § 371 Date Sep. 29, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 29, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01232, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 15, 1982
PCT FUed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 261,115
iBt CL^ F16H 57/04
VJS. a. 74—467 16 Claims
1. In a planetary mechanism (10) of the type having a station-
ary support (30,48,50,66), a ring gear element (18), a sun gear
element (20), a planet carrier element (22), and a plurality of
planet gear elements (24) rotatably mounted on the planet
carrier element (22) and in meshing engagement with the sun
gear element (20) and the ring gear element (18), the elements
(18,20,22,24) being rotatably connected to the stationary sup-
port (30,48,50,66), the improvement comprising:
a baffle (78) encircling the elements (18,20,22,24) of the
planetary mechanism (10) and deflning with the support
(30,48,50,66) an internal chamber (96) and an external
chamber (98), the baffle (78) including an opening (86/88)
and wiping means (90) for wiping fluid from one of the
elements (18,20,22,24) of the planetary mechanism (10)
and directing fluid from the internal chamber (96) to the
external chamber (98) through the opening (86/88) and
reducing the fluid level within the internal chamber (96) in
response to rotation of the one element (18,20,22,24).
4,378,712
CONTROL CABLE
Junnosuke YoshiAOi, Takarazuka, Japan, assignor to Nippon
Cable System, Inc., Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 63,402, Aug. 3, 1979, abandoned. This
application Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,415
aaims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 27, 1979, 54-22766;
Apr. 6, 1979, 54-42256; Apr. 6, 1979, 54-42275
Int. a.' F16C 1/10
U.S. a. 74—501 R 3 Qaims
-3i
1. A gear-operable control cable comprising:
a conduit,
an inner cable inserted in the conduit to be operated, the
inner cable being a screw inner cable engagable with a
gear comprising a core and teeth formed by winding a
wire spirally on the outer surface circumference of the
core at a constant gap tightly, and
a foamed elastic layer adhered closely to the outer circum-
ference of core between adjacent teeth along the entire
core so as to project more than the height of the teeth
outward radially.
4,378,713
SELF-ADJUSTING CABLE CONTROL DEVICE
Hugh H. Haskdl, Kcat, Eagiand, aad WilUaa J. GilMre,
Maaltoa Beach, Mich., aarigaors to Acco iMlostrics lac,
TruBball, Cou.
Filed Jna. 10, 19M, Ser. No. 158,315
lat aJ F16C 1/22; F16D 13/75. 65/52
U.S. a. 74—501.5 R 6 Oabm
1. Self-adjusting cable control device for automatically com-
pensating for wear in a control cable system where the system
includes a movable control cable connected at one of its ends
to a controlled member and operatively connected at an oppo-
site end to an actuation member through which a control force
may be exerted on the controlled member; the improvement
48
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
comprising in that said device includes a cable termination
member adapted to connect with an end of a control cable, a
connecting member adapted to connect with an actuation
member, clutch means carried by said connecting member
adapted to lock with said termination member, a main housing
adapted to be anchored with respect to said control cable
surrounding said termination member and said connecting
member, first spring means for urging said termination member
towards said clutch and said connecting member, second
sprmg means operatively positioned between said main hous-
ing and said connecting member for urging said connecting
member towards the termination member and urging the
clutch to an unlocked position with respect to said termination
member whereby when said clutch is unlocked with respect to
J t^rfrrrPn
apertures respectively associated with the camming surfaces
thereof; said apertures receiving the jaws at the junctions of the
camming and slide surfaces thereof upon outward jaw move-
ment under the bias of the spring means; and means for axially
positioning the sleeve with respect to the driver.
w,,,.^^,^, .,.,-■-.
said termination member, said termination member is free to
move with respect to said clutch and connecting member to
compensate for wear in a control cable system and when an
actuation member is moved against the force of said second
spring means, said clutch will lock with respect to said termi-
nation member to cause movement of said cable to actuate a
controlled member, said clutch comprising an annular collar
loosely surrounding said termination member and an ear por-
tion on said collar contained within a slot on said connecting
member whereby when an actuation member is moved to in
turn move said connecting member against the force of said
second spring means, said annular collar will tilt about said
termination member to engage and lock with said termination
member.
4,378,715
APPARATUS FOR KEEPING OPtN THE GAP CUT BY A
SAW IN A WORK PIECE
Gerhard Kiiiser, Metzingen, and Eric Spieth, Gomaringen, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Gustav Wagner Mas-
chinenfabrik, Reutlingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,075
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 2,
1981,3113356
Int. a.3 B23D 47/04
U.S. a. 83—113 3 Claims
4,378,714
ADJUSTABLE SOCKET INCLUDING APERTURED
SLEEVE
David S. Colvin, 23933 Haynes, Farmington Hills, Mich. 48018
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,672
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 22,
1997, "has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B25B Ii/12
U.S. a. 81—128 3 Qaims
1. An apparatus for keeping open the gap cut by a saw blade
in a work piece, comprising fixed abutment means arranged on
one side of a work piece, said abutment means being substan-
tially centrally aligned with said saw blade, first and second
clamping jaw means arranged substantially opposite said fixed
abutment means and spaced laterally on one and the other side
of said saw blade, power drive means operatively connected to
said first and second clamping jaw means for pressing and
moving said first and second clamping jaw means toward and
away from said fixed abutment means, each of said first and
second clamping jaw means comprising a base portion, a work
piece engaging portion and means slidably mounting the work
piece engaging portion to the respective base portion for per-
mitting lateral movement of the work piece engaging portion
relative to the base portion, and further power drive means
operatively connected to the respective work piece engaging
portions of the clamping jaw means for laterally moving the
respective work piece engaging portion independently of the
operation of said first mentioned power drive means and in a
direction extending substantially perpendicularly to the direc-
tion of movement of said first mentioned power drive means.
1. An adjustable socket comprising: a driver adapted to be
rotatively driven about an axis of rotation thereof; a plurality
of jaws each of which has a mounting lug including an en-
4^ged end mounted on the driver for radial movement with
"~™^pect to the axis of rotation thereof; each jaw also having
camming and slide surfaces that are oriented in opposite axial
directions; said camming and slide surfaces having a junction
with each other which defines the outer radial extremity of the
jaw; the driver having a jaw support end that engages the slide
surfaces on the jaws; spring means for biasing the jaws radially
outward; a sleeve that receives the driver and the jaws and is
axially movable with respect thereto; said sleeve having cam-
ming surfaces that respectively engage the camming surfaces
of the jaws to position the jaws against outward radial move-
ment under the bias of the spring means; the sleeve having
4,378,716
RIPPER ATTACHMENT FOR MULTI-PURPOSE
WOODWORKING POWER TOOL GUIDE TABLE
Michael J. ^k, 216^Keon Rd., Severna Park, Md. 21146
ContinuationHii-partof ^r. No. 128,554, Mar. 10, 1980, Pat.
No. 4320,678. This application Nov. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 204,065
Int. Q\? B27B 19/06, 27/02
U.S. a. 83—438 12 Oaims
1. A device to enable ripping of material by a portable power
saw comprising a table member having a saw blade slot, first
and second abutment members on the table member, means to
adjust and lock at least one abutment member relative to the
other whereby the space between said abutment members may
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
49
I
be varied, a portable power saw positioning means carried by
one abutment member including an elongated plate body por-
tion, a pair of opposing elements on said elongated plate body
portion having spaced end faces directed toward each other
and adapted to engage opposite upper portions of a portable
saw sole plate to prevent upward and lateral displacement of
the sole plate which also engages the other abutment member,
and at least one of the opposing elements of said pair of oppos-
ing elements being adjustable and lockable on said plate body
portion relative to the other of the opposing elements.
4,378,717
CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT FOR AN ADJUSTING DRIVE
FOR A PRESS RAM ADJUSTMENT
Franz Schneider, Goppingen; Ewald Bergmann, Rechberg-
hausen, and Gerhard Gering, Siissen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to L. Schuler GmbH, Goppingen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Aug. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 62,579
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 2,
1978, 2833829
Int. a.3 B26D 7/26; B30B 15/14
U.S. a. 83—530 6 Qaims
k f
36 ti
■3
7ly' n JO
'' « 32
^
1. In a high-speed cutting press Comprising a press ram, a
platen, an upper die means attached to the press ram, a lower
die means attached to the platen, the upper die means being
adapted to penetrate into the lower die means during a cutting
operation, and drive means for driving the press ram to adjust
the position thereof, the improvement comprising a control
arrangement for the adjusting drive of the press ram compris-
ing means for actuating the drive means, switching means for
controlling the connection between the drive means and the
actuating means so that said drive means may be actuated in
either a direction to raise the press ram or a direction to lower
the press ram, and means for maintaining a depth of penetra-
tion of the upper die means into the lower die means at a
constant value during operation of the high-speed cutting press
in dependence upon an operating condition of the high-speed
cutting press, wherein said maintaining means includes at least
one limit switch means adjustably mounted at a press frame in
a displacement path of the press ram for sensing the operating
condition of the high-speed cutting press at the bottom end
position of the moving press ram and for providing an output
signal indicative of the sensed operating condition, and oscilla-
tor means operatively connected with the at least one limit
switch means and the switching means for controlling the
switching means so that the drive means is actuated in a direc-
tion so as to one of raise and lower the press ram to adjust the
position thereof in response to the sensed operating condition.
4,378,718
HANDLE FOR PIVOTABLE MACHINE PARTS
Winfried Kraft, Werdorf; Artur Reichel, Wetzlar, and Giinter
Holmok, Lahnau-Waldgirmes, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Ernst Leitz Wetzlar GmbH, Wetzlar, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,997
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 25,
1979, 7921193[U]
U.S. a. 83—592
Int. CiJ GOIN 1/06
'6 ^'
!^ ,c 19 Po ^^
6 Qaims
1. In a microtome having a blade holder in the form of an
arcuately pivotable arm, a handle for said blade holder com-
prising a thumb support member for receiving the thumb of an
operator, said thumb support member being essentially square
and having a bevelled surface for supporting the operator's
thumb, a grip member for receiving the remaining fingers of
the hand of an operator, said grip member being rotatably
mounted on the bottom side of said thumb support by a cylin-
drical connecting piece, the axis of said connecting piece form-
ing an angle of less than 90° with the bevelled surface of said
thumb support, and means for adjusting the relative position of
said thumb support member and said grip member.
' 4,378,719
SAW CHAIN CONNECTOR
Vernon J. Burgess, 1976 Oub View Dr., Highland, Mich. 48031
Continuation of Ser. No. 5,341, Jan. 22, 1979, abandoned. This
application Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 212,812
Int. a.3 B27B ii/l4
U.S. a. 83—831 5 Qaims
4i 4?
1. A saw chain comprising:
a plurality of elongated center links;
a plurality of elongated connecting links;
50
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
a plurality of elongated saw tooth links;
wherein said saw tooth links are constructed of an extremely
hard material;
wherein said center links and said connecting links are con-
structed of a nonhardened metal;
wherein each center link has an aperture formed in each
longitudinal end, each connecting line has an aperture
formed in each longitudinal end and said saw tooth link
has an aperture formed in each longitudinal end, and
further comprising means for detachably connecting one
end of at least one center fink between one end of one saw
tooth link and one end of one connecting link, said last-
mentioned ends of said connecting link, saw tooth link and
center link being positioned so that the apertures in said
last-mentioned ends are in registry with each other, said
detachable connecting means further comprising a female
member having a sleeve portion positioned through said
registering apertures and a male member which thread-
ably engages said female member, said members each
including an enlarged head whereby said Hnks are en-
trapped between the enlarged heads; and
wherein said apertures in said connecting links and said
center links are substantially the same diameter and
wherein said female member includes a cylindrical sleeve
having an outer diameter substantially equal to the diame-
ter of said last-mentioned apertures, said sleeve including
an internally threaded axial bore, and further including a
reduced diameter portion having substantially the same
diameter as the diameter of said apertures in said saw
tooth links, and said male member including an externally
threaded shank which threadably engages said sleeve axial
bore.
to be played in the form of note pitch data and duration data
of notes constituting a progression of the musical piece;
keyboard indicator means coupled to said memory means and
responsive to each application of note pitch data read out of
said memory means for visually indicating a key to be de-
pressed on said keyboard means by an operator of the instru-
ment; and
control means coupled to said memory means for reading at
least the note pitch data of said performance data out of said
memory means and including means for sequentially apply-
ing the read out note pitch data corresponding to each note
to said keyboard indicator means and for causing said key-
board indicator means to visually indicate to an operator a
respective key determined by said note pitch data of each
note at an indication time which precedes by a substantial
amount of time a correct key depression timing instant at
which said indicated key is to be depressed for a correct
performance of the musical piece, said instant being in syn-
chronism with the rhythm deflned by said consecutive beats
defmed by said automatic accompaniment, said substantial
amount of time being previously determined in relation to
the progression of the musical piece.
4,378,720
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING
MUSICAL PERFORMANCE TRAINING SYSTEM
Akjra Nakada, Hamamatsu; Eisaku Okainoto, Hamakita;
Toshio Sugiura, and Kiyoshi Yoshida, both of Hamamatsu, all
of Japan, assignors to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Hamamatsu, Japan
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,385
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 6, 1979, 54-114414
Int. a.3 GIOF 7/00
U.S. a. 84—1.03 8 Qaims
TP 4J
1. An electronic musical instrument comprising:
an automatic performance device for effecting an automatic
accompaniment which sounds a plurality of consecutive
beats in a music rhythm progression, said beats deflning
reference times for correct timing of a musical performance;
keyboard means having keys representing respective notes and
being capable of being depressed by an operator of the
instrument;
tone forming circuit means coupled to said keyboard means for
producing musical tone signals corresponding to notes of the
keys being depressed;
memory means for storing performance data of a musical piece
4,378,721
PICKUP APPARATUS FOR AN ELECTRIC STRING TYPE
INSTRUMENT
Kenkichi Kaneko; Katsuyuki Tanaka, both of Hamamatsu;
Satoni Hayashi, Toyoda; Kensaku Hakamada, Hamamatsu;
Masakazu Matsumoto, Hamamatsu; Shiivji Tagaki, Hamama-
tsu, and Takayuki Goshima, Toyoda, all of Japan, assignors to
Kabushiki Kaisha Kawai Seisakusho, Hamamatsu, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 56,436, Jul. 10, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,356
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 20, 1978, 53-87693;
Dec. 8, 1978, 53-168034; Dec. 20, 1978, 53-173704; Dec. 29,
1978, 53-180128; Dec. 29, 1978, 53-180129; Feb. 2, 1979,
54-11534
Int. a.3 GIOH 3/18
U.S. a. 84—1.14 10 Qaims
20
1 la
1. Pickup means for electric string-type instrument, which
instrument comprises a frame and a plurality of strings
mounted on a frame, each string producing a note; said pickup
means comprising:
a plurality of individual elastic elongated pickups, each
pickup comprising:
an elastic, cylindrical piezo-electric member, said piezo-elec-
tric member being prepared by mixing a high molecular
material with a piezo-electric ceramic powder and a vul-
canizing agent, said piezo-electric member being polar-
ized;
a pair of electrodes on said piezo-electric member, one of
said electrodes comprising a lead wire embedded axially
in said piezo-electric member, the other electrode being
mounted on the circumferential periphery of said piezo-
electric member; and
an insulating member encasing said piezo-electric member
and said pair of electrodes, said elastic member having an
upper non-planar surface; and^
a bridge member directly mounted on the upper non-planar
surfaces of the plurality of pickups, the pickups being
disposed longitudinally parallel to one another;
the pickup means being directly interposed between said
strings and said frame, with said pickups resting on said
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SI
frame so that th^ plurality of pickups and the bridge mem-
ber extend to support plural strings covering plural notes
of the instrument so as to be common thereto.
4,378,722
MAGNETIC PICKUP FOR STRINGED MUSICAL
INSTRUMENTS
David A. Isakson, 24618 Nameless La., Fort Bragg, Calif. 95437
j Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,223
Int. a.3 GIOH 3/18
U.S. a. 84-1.15 15 aaims
1. In devices for sensing vibrational motions of tuned strings
and producing thereby an electrical signal corresponding to
the relative harmonic emphasis of a stringed musical instru-
ment, a magnetic pickup comprised of:
a. coil windings of insulative conductive wire,
b. a magnetically susceptible linear string segment of each
string of a musical instrument,
c. magnetic means for providing a magnetic field within
each said linear string segment and portions of said coil
windings,
wherein portions of a coil are disposed proximate each said
linear string segment, two said portions of a coil being oppo-
sitely disposed to the axis of each said linear string segment, the
axes of the coil wires in each said oppositely disposed portion
of coil being substantially perpendicular to the axis of the
proximate said linear string segment, said magnetic means
providing a magnetic field within a portion of coil windings
disposed proximate each said linear string segment, the overall
north to south direction of said magnetic field within each said
portion of coil windings being substantially parallel to the axis
of the proximate said linear string segment and perpendicular
to the axes of the coil wires in said portions of coil windings,
whereby magnetic "lines of force" are disposed perpendicu-
larly to and caused to move perpendicularly through said
proximately disposed coil wires at two opposite points in each
elliptical oscillation of a vibrating said linear string segment,
angular motions at one said point on the ellipse causing a peak
positive impulse at a coil lead while motions at the opposite
point cause a peak negative impulse at the same said coil lead
and the remaining composite of angular motions complete the
translation of elliptical motion to a linear electrical wave form,
said magnetic pickup further including means for stably posi-
tioning said coil windings and said magnetic means relative to
the quiescent axes of said linear string segments of said musical
instrument, and means for electrically connecting the leads of
said coil windings to appropriate signal preamplification and
amplification devices.
a support piece for carrying said clamping member,
and manual tuning means coupled to and for longitudmally
displacing said support piece to increase and decrease
string tension to thereby tune said stringed musical instru-
ment,
4,378,723
STRING TUNING AND FASTENING ARRANGEMENT
Donald T. Scholz, 13 Rich VaUey Rd., Wayland, Mass. 01778
FUed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,248
Int. a.3 GIOD 3/14
UJS. a. 84—297 R 12 Claims
1. Fastening and tuning apparatus for a stringed musical
instrument comprising:
a support base,
means for securing the support base to the instrument,
a clamping member,
said clamping member comprising a wedge member con-
strained to move lineariy along an inclined plane toward
the base of the support piece to wedge the string against
the base of the support piece.
4,378,724
WIND INSTRUMENT PRACTICE ACCESSORY
Rene Lamart, 7205 Fountain Ave., West Hollywood, Calif.
90046
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,621
Int. a. J G09B 15/06; GIOD 9/02
U.S. a. 84— 465 , "^ 3aaims
1. An accessory co-operable with the mouthpiece portion of
a wind musical instrument for use in practicing without the
complete instrument, said mouthpiece portion having one end
co-operable with the player's embouchure and the other end
adapted for connection to the instrument, said mouthpiece
portion having a generally cylindrical longitudinal bore there-
through, said bore having its largest diameter adjacent said
other end, said accessory comprising, a base having a dimen-
sion larger then said largest diameter of said bore, and a plug
mounted on said base and having a cross sectional area less
than the cross sectional area of said largest diameter permitting
the plug to project into the bore for a distance greater than said
largest diameter of the bore, friction retaining means arranged
on said plug and extending outwardly therefrom serving to
engage the sidewalls of said bore adjacent said other end for
maintaining the device in connection with the mouthpiece at a
selected position so that the base is spaced a selected distance
from said mouthpiece other end.
4,378,725
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING SEALED ROPE AND
KNOTTED NETTING FROM SUCH ROPE
Johannes Hospers, Ijssel, and Gerhard ten Lohuis, Apeldoom,
both of Netherlands, assignors to Anza B.V., Apeldoom,
Netherlands
Filed Nov. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,577
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Nov. 22, 1979,
7908515
Int a.3 D04C 1/12: D02G 3/04.^/40: D07B 1/04
U.S. a. 87—12 < 9 Claims
1. A method for producing a sealed rope of braided or
52
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
twisted filaments comprising forming a rope of braided or
twisted, heat-shrinkable filaments about a core containing
thermoplastic material, placing the rope under tension and,
while under tension, treating the rope to cause the thermoplas-
tic core material to melt while simultaneously maintaining the
rope at a temperature sufficient to cause the heat-shrinkable
filaments to shrink but not to melt, whereby the shrinking of
the filaments, while the rope is under tension, reduces the cross
section of the rope and causes the melted thermoplastic mate-
rial to penetrate into the openings between and to surround and
seal the filaments of the rope.
2. A method for producing a knotted netting of sealed rope
cal piston body having a circumferential groove therein, said
groove having sidewalls, a sealing washer concentrically en-
circling said body in radial alignment with said groove and
having two axially spaced annular flanges which project sub-
stantially radially into said groove and engage said sidewalls
thereof, an annular magnet disposed in said groove between
said flanges of said sealing washer, two annular plates disposed
in said groove between said flanges of said sealing washer and
on opposite axial sides of said magnet, and an annular guide
ring support on and concentrically encircling said sealing
washer.
4,378,727
DATA STATION WITH WIRE AND AIR DUCT
James A. Doss, Spring Lake, Mich., assignor to Structural
Concepts Corporation, Spring Lake, Mich.
Filed Jun. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 163,788
Int. a.3 F24F 7/QO
U.S. a. 98—33 R 2 Qaims
of braided or twisted filaments comprising forming a rope of
braided or twisted, heat-shrinkable filaments about a core
containing thermoplastic material, knotting the rope to form a
reticulated network of ropes, placing the knotted reticulated
net under tension in all directions, and treating the net, while
under tension, to cause the thermoplastic core material to melt
while simultaneously heatmg the net to a temperature suffi-
cient to cause the filaments to shrink but not to melt, whereby
the shrinking of the filaments, while the net is under tension,
reduces the cross section of the ropes of the net and causes the
melted thermoplastic material to penetrate into the openings
between and to surround and seal the filaments of the ropes of
the net.
4,378,726
PISTON DESIGNED FOR USE WTTH A MAGNETIC
FORCE PICKUP
Kurt StoU, Lenzhalde 72, 7300 Esslingen/N, Fe4 Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,104
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 24,
1979, 2947516
Int. a.? F16J 9m ^ -
U.S. a. 92— 243 6aaims
1. In an open space office system including:
a room;
freestanding work stations including vertical panels and
horizontal work surfaces supported by said vertical pan-
els, said work stations being arranged about said room in
a selected configuration for dividing the room into sepa-
rate interrelated work areas;
ventilation means for providing air circulation in said room;
the improvement which comprises:
said vertical panels arranged to form a vertical conduit
with said work surfaces being radially arranged about
said vertical conduit;
said conduit arranged adjacent said work surfaces;
port means in said work areas communicating air between
said ventilation means and said conduit;
duct means communicating with said conduit for either
withdrawing air from said room through said port
means or for supplying air to said room through said
port means;
wherein air circulating in said room is communicated to said
duct means by said conduit or air is supplied to said room
from said ventilation means through said conduit.
1. A piston, comprising means defining a generally cylindri-
4,378,728
COATING BOOTH FOR ELECTROSTATIC
APPLICATION OF PULVERIZED MATERIALS
Adolf Berkmann, Weissach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Nordson Corporation, Amherst, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 17,879, Mar. 5, 1979, Pat. No. 4,245,551,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 15,408, Feb. 26, 1979,
abandoned. This application May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 149,589
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 2,
1978, 2809020
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 20,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q\} B05C 75/00
U.S. a. 98—115 SB 4 Oaims
1. An assembly of a powder spray booth and at least one
interchangeable portable filter module, said powder spray
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
53
booth being adapted to receive an electrostatic spray means for
spraying dry particulate powder material onto workpieces
contained in the booth, said assembly comprising,
first and second vertical walls and a floor angled down-
wardly from said first vertical wall toward said second
vertical wall, said first vertical wall being connected to
said floor by a spiral curved wall section, a ceiling con-
necting the top of said first vertical wall to the top of said
second vertical wall, vertical end walls extending from
said first vertical wall generally toward said second verti-
cal wall,
at least one interchangeable filter module, said module in-
cluding a powder collection chamber, said powder collec-
tion chamber being disposed adjacent said second vertical
wall, said booth and said powder collection chamber
being separated by said second vertical wall, said second
vertical wall extending downward from the ceiling so as
to form a barrier to the flow of powder laden air from said
booth into said powder collection chamber,
an air inlet opening in said first vertical wall,
said second vertical wall having a lower edge spaced from
said floor so as to define a booth outlet opening adjacent
the lower edge thereof providing an air flow path through
which powder laden air is free to pass without significant
restriction from said booth directly into said collection
chamber;
means for collecting oversprayed dry particulate powder
, material in the bottom of said powder collection chamber,
said collecting means being operable to collect said pow-
der material in a dry condition suitable for reuse in said
electrostatic spray means,
a clean air chamber sealed from the booth, said clean air
chamber being located adjacent to and above said powder
collection chamber, said clean air chamber having a clean
air chamber opening from the powder collection chamber
thereinto;
fijter means mounted adjacent said clean air chamber open-
ing for preventing powder from entering said clean air
chamber from said booth outlet opening while permitting
air flow from the powder collection chamber into said
clean air chamber;
blower means having an inlet connected to said clean air
chamber to create a negative pressure in said clean air
chamber, whereby air flows downwardly in said booth
and through said booth outlet opening directly into said
powder collection chamber and then upwardly through
said filter means into said clean air chamber,
sealing means to sealingly secure said filter module to said
booth outlet opening and to said blower means, and
one wall of said filter module being located immediately
adjacent said booth and being hinged at one side so that it
is free to pivot outwardly into the interior of said booth in
the event of an explosion within said filter module.
1029 O.G.— 3
4,378,729
APPARATUS FOR PREPARING PIZZA IN A BAKING
OVEN
Richard L. Pierick, 3256 Hampshire Ave., North, Minneapolis,
Minn. 55427
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 261,511, May 7, 1981. This
application Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,815
Int. a.3 A47J i7/00
U.S. a. 99-400 14 Qaims
1. An oven appliance for heating pizza comprising a base
including a baffle with a vent opening of smaller cross sectional
dimension than the diameter of the pizza, a plurality of up-
wardly extending risers integral with the baffle and having
coplanar upper edges defining a pizza supporting surface
above the base in a position to enable the pizza to be centered
thereon directly over the vent opening in the baffle, the sup-
porting surface being open to allow air to flow freely across
the lower surface of the pizza, and the baffle serving as a shield
means surrounding the vent opening and positioned below the
support surface to shield the peripheral edge of the pizza from
infrared radiation arising from beneath said baffle, the hot air
rising through the vent opening will strike the center of the
lower surface of the pizza to thereby disrupt and reduce stag-
nant boundary layer air whereby the pizza will be heated
uniformly thereby.
4,378,730
CITRUS PRESS DEVICE
Marcel Coggiola, Le Perreux, France, assignor to Robot-Coupe,
S.A., Bagnolet, France
Filed Jun. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 160,814
Oaims priority, application France, Jun. 18, 1979, 79 15502
Int. C\? A23N 1/00
U.S. a. 99—501 4 Qaims
1. A citrus press device for use with a food processor, said
processor comprising a casing, an upwardly directed drive
shaft and a bowl provided on the casing into which the upper
of the end of the drive shaft penetrates, the device comprising
a basket, the base of which includes apertures and a cone
54
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
APRIL 5, 1983
mounted in removable fashion inside the basket, wherein a hub
portion is formed in the center of the base of the basket, said
hub portion having an orifice, the cone including elastic prongs
which penetrate into the hub portion, thereby mounting the
cone to the basket, the exterior cylindrical surface defined by
said prongs being of greater diameter than that of said hub
portion orifice.
width thereof comprising a guide member for guiding said
twine along said intake aperture, spring means biasing said
guide member toward a lateral rest position, said spring means
being tensioned by movement of said guide member into a start
position opposite said rest position and control means for con-
4,378,731
NUT CRACKING DEVICE
Suwat Ruangburapa, P.O. Box 2263, Norman, Okla. 73070
Filed Aug. 29, 1980, S«r. No. 182,806
Int. a.3 A23N 5/00
U.S. a. 99—571
8 Claims
8. A nut cracking device comprising:
a frame;
a rest connected to said frame for receiving a nut in a nut
cracking position;
means for cracking a nut disposed on said rest in a nut crack-
ing position;
a turntable having a slot therein and rotatably connected to
said frame;
a plurality of pieces each of which removably fits in said slot
and each having an opening sized for receiving a predeter-
mined size and shape of nut therein in an orientation for
being received on said rest;
means for rotating said turntable;
a table above which said turntable rotates such that said
table supports a nut received in said opening of a selected
one of said pieces disposed in said turntable slot and hav-
ing a hole disposed above said rest such that a nut will fall
from said opening into said rest; and
a reservoir disposed above said turntable for holding a plu-
rality of nuts in communication with said turntable such
that as said turntable rotates, nuts disposed in said reser-
voir will roll on said turntable and will be oriented by said
rolling to be received in said opening as said opening
rotates beneath said reservoir.
trolling the rate of feed of said guide member during tying, said
control means comprising a ratchet and pawl mechanism oper-
ating to hold said guide member in position against the force of
said spring means and to release said guide member from
movement toward said rest position under the force of said
spring means.
4,378,733
EMBOSSING DRIVE MECHANISM FOR AN
AUTOMATIC EMBOSSING SYSTEM
Michael D. Polad, Mendota; Leroy E. Gerluh, Bloomington;
Edward R. Gabel, Eden Prairie; Robert H. Schmidt, and
Glenn H. Heiller, both of Minnetonka, all of Minn., assignors
to Data Card Corporation, Minnetonka, Minn.
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,486
Int. a.' B31F 1/07
U.S. a. 101—18 18 Qalms
4,378,732
TYING APPARATUS FOR AGRICULTURAL ROLL
BALERS
Jiirgen Simonis, and Hans-Otto Sacht, both of Wolfenbiittel,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Gebriider Welger GmbH
A Co. Kommanditgesellschaft, Wolfenbiittel, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,643 I
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Not. 8,
1980, 3042254
Int a.5 B65B 7i/7« !
UJS. a. 100—5 17 Claims
1. An apparatus for helically tying with twine roll bales of
agricultural crop material formed in a bale chamber housing of
a roll baler having an intake aperture extending across the
1. A drive mechanism for actuating a die element carried by
a die wheel and a punch element carried by a punch wheel to
emboss a document positioned between the punch element and
the die element, comprising:
a cam;
means for driving said cam in constant rotation;
a first bail arm mounted for pivotal movement in a plane
transverse to said die wheel;
a second bail arm mounted for pivotal movement in a plane
transverse to said punch wheel;
first and second cam followers, mounted on said first and
second bail arms, respectively, said first and second cam
followers biased in rolling contact with said cam and
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
55
driven by rotation of said cam for in turn driving said first
and second bail arms in complementary oscillatory move-
ment;
first interposer means adjustably mounted on said first bail
arm and selectively actuable to be disposed between said
first bail arm and the die element;
second interposer means adjustably mounted on said second
bail arm and selectively actuable to be disposed between
said second bail arm and the punch element;
said first and second interposer means driving the corre-
sponding die and punch elements into and out of engage-
ment with the document for embossing the document in
response to the complementary oscillatory movement of
said first and second bail arms, said first and second inter-
poser means being adjustable relative to said first and
second bail arms, respectively, to achieve a desired em-
bossing height on the document.
1. Sheet transfer cylinder for a sheet-fed rotary printing
machine convertible between first form and perfector printing
having a gripper device for gripping the leading edge of a sheet
and a suction device for gripping the trailing edge of the sheet
and tightening and smoothing the sheet in travel direction
thereof through the machine and transversely to the travel
direction comprising first control means including at least one
circumferential cam for controlling circumferential sheet-
tightening movement, second control means including lateral
cams for controlling lateral sheet-tightening movement, the
suction device having parts thereof disposed side-by-side in
axial direction of the cylinder and formed with suction holes,
and transmission means operatively connecting said first and
said second control means with said parts of said suction de-
vice so as to superimpose actions thereon for applying a diago-
nal tightening force to the sheet, said first and said second
control means being independent of one another.
fountain blade and the ink fountain roller and an ink agitator
means extending into said ink fountain and reciprocating along
the full length of the ink fountain roller comprising:
(a) a blade holder having a relatively narrow, flexible, scrap-
ing blade adjustably attached to said blade holder;
(b) means for adjustably positioning said scraping blade
adjacent the surface of said ink fountain roller and above
said ink fountain so that said flexible blade can be moved
a predetermined distance from the surface of said ink
' 4,378,734
SHEET TRANSFER CYLINDER FOR SHEET-FED
ROTARY PRINTING MACHINES CONVERTIBLE
BETWEEN nRST FORM AND PERFECTOR PRINTING
Arno Wirz, Bammental, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Heidelberger Dnickmaschinen AG, Heidelberg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,513
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 30,
1980, 3036790
Int. a.3 B41F 5/02. 21/04. 21/08. 5/22
U.S. a. 101—230 10 Qaims
' 4,378,735
ANTILINTING DEVICE FOR INK FX)UNTAINS
John MacPhee, Rowayton, Conn., assignor to Baldwin Gegen-
heimer Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,514
Int. a.3 B41F 31/06. 35/04
MS. a. 101—363 5 Claims
1. An antilinting system for use in a printing press having an
ink fountain, an ink fountain blade, an ink fountain roller, an
ink metering nip formed between the terminal end of the ink
DAMPENING
SYSTtM
fountain roller so as to remove the ink film and lint on said
ink fountain roller whereby the ink film and lint falls into
said ink fountain and the lint will not clog said ink meter-
ing nip; and
(c) means interconnecting said blade holder and said flexible
scraping blade to said ink agitator means so that said
flexible blade reciprocates back and forth along the entire
length of said ink fountain roller so as to continuously
remove ink and lint from said ink founUin roller.
4,378,736
INKING DEVICE
Jean L. Sarda, 25, rue Pradier, Paris, France (75019)
Continuation of Ser. No. 27,829, Apr. 6, 1979, abandoned. This
appIicaHon Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,392
Gaims priority, application France, Apr. 7, 1978, 78 10437
Int. a.^ B41F 31/04. 31/34
U.S. a. 101—365 9 Claims
1. A mechanism for inking the printing parts of a press,
comprising:
at least one roller means for simultaneously distributing a
plurality of inks to the printing parts of the press;
a single, rotating, non-grooved cylindrical means for carry-
ing the plurality of inks in narrow zones from near the top
side of the outer surface of the cylindrical means to said at
least one roller means located near the bottom side of the
outer surface of the cylindrical means;
at least one blade means, positioned near the top side of the
cylindrical means, for micrometrically proportioning the
thickness of each of the plurality of inks being carried on
the outer surface of said cylindrical means;
a plurality of lever means, maintained in contact with the
inner face of the at least one blade means, for indepen-
dently adjusting the bottom edge of the at least one blade
means from the outer surface of the cylindrical means;
a plurality of screw means, positioned above the at least one
56
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
blade means, for independently actuating each of the
plurality of lever means;
a plurality of separator means for dividing the plurality of
inks into the narrow zones on the outer surface of the
cylindrical means; and
a plurality of holder means, positioned near the top side of
the cylindrical means, for maintaining the plurality of
separator means in simultaneous contact along one edge
against the outer surface of the cylindrical means and
along another edge against the outer face of the at least
one blade means;
wherein said cylindrical means includes a plurality of inter-
nal vane means for radiating heat away from the outer
surface thereof;
wherein said cylindrical means includes a collar means for
forming the outer surface thereof; and
wherein said outer surface of the cylindrical means is coated
with a hardened elastomer.
4,378,737
ROLLER APPARATUS WITH REPLACEMENT
BLANKET
Alan D. Kirkpatrick, Martinsville, N.J., assignor to Robud
Company, Pine Brook, N.J.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,871
Int. a.^ B41F 27/06
U.S. a. 101-415.1 9 Claims
1. Roller apparatus comprising:
a core;
means formed on said core for mounting said core with
respect to a machine to be served;
a channel formed in the surface of said core and extending
across the surface of said core, said channel being tapered
in width from a first width adjacent a first edge to a sec-
ond width adjacent a second opposite edge;
a blanket for covering said core, said blanket comprising a
split element adapted to fit around the surface of said core
and having first and second abutting edges; and
first and second flanges depending from said first and second
abutting edges, said first and second fianges, when in
abutting relationship, defining a cross-sectional area sub-
stantially identical to said channel formed in said surface
of said core.
4,378,738
ELECTROMAGNETIC AND ELECTROSTATIC
INSENSITIVE BLASTING CAPS, SQUIBS AND
DETONATORS
Paul W. Proctor, Rte. 2, Box 60 Kathy La., White Plains, Md.
20695, and Robert L. Dow, Rte. 5 Box 415, La Plata, Md.
20646 I
FUed Dec. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 105,467
Int. a.3 F42C iim
U.S. a. 102—202.7 8 Claims
I. An electroexplosive device protected against premature
initiation from electromagnetic radiation comprising:
a conductive housing having an upper portion and a closed
lower portion wherein said lower portion contains an
explosive train comprising an ignition mix, a primer, and a
base charge;
an insulating plug contained in said housing having mounted
therein a pair of conductors extending into said lower
portions;
a bridgewire coupled between said pair of conductors and
imedded in said ignition mix;
attenuator means formed of a lossy ferrite material contained
within said housing and spaced from said insulating plug,
said ferrite material having a Curie temperature greater
than about 1 50° C. and said attenuator means being config-
ured to receive said conductors therethrough; and
nonconductive seal means mounted within the upper portion
of said housing and extending therefrom, wherein said
conductors pass through said seal means for coupling to a
source of power for initiating said device.
4,378,739
PRIMER nRING MEANS
Edward A. Klein, Florissant, and Morry L. Schhnmel, Univer-
sity City, both of Mo., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,480
Int. Q\} F42C 19/10
U.S. a. 102—204 8 Qaims
1. A firing mechanism for detonating at least two percussion
primers comprising:
a housing defining a cavity,
an explodable means secured to the housing and communi-
cating with the cavity for providing an explosive energy
within the cavity upon detonation of the explodable
means,
at least two percussion primers having an output upon deto-
nation of the explodable means for firing an external ex-
plodable device, each of the at least two percussion prim-
ers being secured with respect to the housing and having
means communicating with the cavity and detonatable by
the explosive energy, and
a detonation coupling means secured to the housing and
disposed within the cavity between the explodable means
and the at least two percussion primers, the detonation
coupling means being provided with at least two passage-
ways for transmitting to the at least two percussion prim-
ers the explosive energy provided by the explodable
means for initiating the at least two percussion primers,
/
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
57
the length and direction of travel provided by the at least
two passageways for the explosive energy providing
means for the substantially simultaneous initiation of the at
least two percussion primers.
4^78,741
INTERFACED CONVEYOR SYSTEMS AND
DRIVERLESS VEHICLE FOR USE THEREIN
Katsuhiro Nagabori, Chiba, Japan, assignor to SI Handling
Systems, Inc., Easton, Pa.
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,586
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 21, 1980, 55-5524
Int. a.3 B61B 13/12: B61K 1/00
U.S. a. 104—18 9 Qaims
4,378,740
MUNITION FUSE SYSTEM HAVING OUT-OF-LINE
SAFETY DEVICE
Qayton J. Schneider, Jr., East Aarora, N.Y., assignor to Cal-
span Corporation, BufTalo, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,307
Int. a? F42C 15/40
U.S. a. 102^216 13 Qaims
5. A driverless vehicle comprising a base mounted on sup-
port wheels^ at least one drive wheel assembly pivotable about
an upright axis on said base between a drive position and an
accumulation position, means for pushing another vehicle by
interfacing said base with another vehicle moving in the same
direction, said means including a contact arm movably sup-
ported by said base for movement between an extended posi-
tion wherein the arm extends transversely beyond a side edge
of the base and a retracted inoperative position.
1. A fuze for arming and exploding a projectile, the said
projectile being launched along a longitudinal axis of rotation,
the said fuze comprising:
a. a source of electrical energy;
b. an electronic control circuit having a power input, a signal
input, a first signal output responsive to a first signal input,
and a second signal output responsive to a second signal
input;
c. means for sensing the said launching thrust of the projec-
tile and responsive thereto connecting the said source of
electrical energy to the said power input of the electronic
control circuit whereby the control circuit is energized;
d. an electric signal fired detonator charge communicating
with the said second signal output of the said electronic
control circuit;
e. a booster charge;
f. means initially positioning the said booster charge and the
said detonator charge in spaced apart non-communicable
firing relationship;
g. means initiated by an electric signal, communicating with
the said first signal output of the electronic control circuit,
for moving the said booster charge and the said detonator
charge into communicable firing relationship;
h. means for sensing a first predetermined condition of rota-
tion of the said projectile and providing a first signal input
to the electronic control circuit whereby the said booster
charge and the said detonator charge are moved into
communicable firing relationship; and
i. means for sensing a second predetermined condition of
rotation of the said projectile and providing a second
signal input to the electronic control circuit whereby the
said electronic control circuit provides the said second
signal output firing the said detonator exploding the pro-
jectile.
4,378,742
HOLD DOWN BAR FOR HOPPER CAR HATCH COVERS
James R. Saylor, Lewis H. Wiens, both of Johnson County,
Kans., and Orrille E. Blume, Buchanan County, Mo., assign-
ors to Aero Plastics of K.C., Inc., Kansas City, Mo.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,322
Int. a.3 B61D 39/00; B63B 19/00
U.S. a. 105—377 11 Qaims
1. In a hold down bar arrangement having a channel member
adapted to cover one end of a hopper car hatch cover, means
mounting the channel member on the hopper car for pivotal
movement between latching and release positions relative to
the hatch cover, and releasable means for maintaining the
channel member in the latching position to hold down the
hatch cover, an insert for the channel member comprising:
a rigid insert bar adapted to be inserted in the channel mem-
ber;
means for securing said insert bar in the channel member;
and
a resilient gasket carried on said insert bar at a location to
seal against said one end of the hatch cover in the latching
position of the channel member.
58
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^78,743
PAPERBOARD PALLET HAVING INTERLOCKED
RUNNERS
William M. McFarland, Georgetown, S.C., assignor to Interna-
tional Paper Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,672 {
Int. a.3 B65D 19/34
liJS. a. 108—51.3 1 Qaim
tions, the angle of disposition of each of said passages being
determined by the position of said tubular sleeve body relative
to said hollow socket member as determined by said indicating
member, and a retaining sleeve disposed in said hollow socket
20a. ^/» * ^?«. '^ ^^*
1. A pallet which comprises:
(a) a tray constructed of corrugated sheet material which
comprises a bottom wall, a pair of first side wall panels
foldably connected to said bottom wall at the ends
thereof, a pair of second side wall panels foldably con-
nected to said first side wall panels, each of said second
side wall panels having at least one locking tab at the free
edge thereof, each of said pair of first and second side wall
panels being folded into face-to-face contact to form a pair
of side walls, a pair of end walls foldably connected to said
bottom wall at the other ends thereof, each of said end
walls having a pair of foldably connected end flaps at
either end thereof, said pairs of end flaps being sand-
wiched between said first and second side wall panels, said
locking tab engaging with a groove provided in the bot-
tom wall to maintain the tray in an erect condition;
(b) said tray having a plurality of runners disposed in spaced
relationship upon the bottom wall to provide a rigid deck
for the pallet, the ends of each of said runners being held
in position by recesses provided in the second side wall
panels, each of said runners having at least two support
blocks which are accommodated in apertures provided in
the bottom wall of the tray whereby legs are provided for
the pallet and entry is afforded the tines of a forklift truck.
member between said hollow socket member and said tubular
sleeve body and being threaded to said hollow socket member
and engaged on said ledge to urge said curved surface of said
tubular sleeve body into engagement with the curved surface
of said hollow socket member.
4,378,745
METHOD AND FjURNACE FOR INONERATION OF
SOLID AND LIQUID WASTE
Torkjell Flatland, Notodden, Norway, assignor to Norsk Hydro
A.S., Oslo, Norway ^r
Filed Jun. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 162,794
Claims priority, application Norway, Jul. 5, 1979, 792236
lnt.a,^F23G 5/12
U.S. a. 110—346 8 Oaims
4,378,744
FLUIDIZED BED COMBUSTOR AND REMOVABLE
WINDBOX AND TUBE ASSEMBLY THEREFOR
Angelo DeFeo, Totowa, and William Hosek, Mt. Tabor, both of
N.J., assignors to Curtiss-Wright Corporation, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 62,746, Aug. 1, 1979, Pat. No. 4,292,023.
This application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,852
Int. a.3 F23L 5/00
U.S. a. 110—182.5 10 Qaims
1. A tuyere for directing air into a fluidized bed of a fluidized
bed reactor comprising a hollow socket member having an
exterior threaded portion for threading it to a support by an
amount to position it at a predetermined angular position and
having an air inlet passage therethrough and an interior with a
curved receiving surface, an indicating member connected to
said hollow socket member and projecting outwardly from
said curved receiving surface, a tubular sleeve body engaged in
said hollow socket member and having a side wall with a ledge
portion and a sleeve body curved surface below said ledge
portion engaged on said curved receiving surface and having a
recess into which said indicating member extends to fix said
tubular sleeve body angularly in respect to said hollow socket
member, the interior of said hollow socket member being
spaced outwardly of said tubular sleeve body and having a
coarse threaded portion, said tubular sleeve body having an
interior passage therethrough aligned with said air inlet pas-
sage and having a plurality of radially extending discharge
passages adjacent the upper end thereof extending radially
outwardly therefrom at a plurality of angularly spaced loca-
1. A method for the incineration of solid and liquid waste,
said method comprising:
providing a primary combustion zone, a secondary combus-
tion zone, and a restricted annular space extending from
said primary combustion zone to said secondary combus-
tion zone, with the area of said annular space being less
than the areas of said primary and secondary combustion
zones, and with said annular space having an inner surface
defined by a substantially cylindrical central member
having a height greater than its diameter;
conducting primary combustion of waste in said primary
combustion zone, thereby generating products of combus-
tion including unbumed combustibles and incombustible
particles;
passing said products of combustion from said primary com-
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S9
bustion zone, smoothly through said annular space,
toward said secondary combustion zone;
introducing secondary combustion air, in a quantity suffi-
cient to achieve complete combustion of said unburned
combustibles, into said annular space in the form of high
velocity air jets from a plurality of openings in said central
member;
introducing said secondary combustion air and said products
i of combustion into said secondary combustion zone under
conditions of violent rotation and expansion, and thereby
achieving mixing of said secondary combustion air and
said unburned combustibles in said secondary combustion
zone, and causing said incombustible particles to be
thrown outwardly through an outlet and discharged from
said secondary combustion zone;
conducting secondary combustion of said unburned combus-
tibles in said secondary combustion zone; and
collecting said discharged incombustible particles in an ash
pit separate from said combustion zones.
4,378,746
APPARATUS FOR MAKING POCKETS OF THE STRIP
TYPE WITH SLIDE FASTENER
Silvano Perlino, Pavia, Italy, assignor to Necchi Societa per
Azioni, Pavia, Italy
Filed Jun. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 40,400
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 19, 1978, 42907 A/78
Int. a.3 D05B 3/12
U.S. a. 112—104 1 Qaim
1. An apparatus for producing pockets of a strip type with a
slide fastener comprising a roller on which there is wound a
slide-fastener tape, a sewing machine for the sewing of strip
pockets having a movable support frame, a presser frame lying
over the support frame and movable therewith, two needles
and a knife supported on the sewing machine and adapted to
carry out vertical reciprocations in order to produce two
parallel seams on the work and a cut which is parallel and
central to the seams, the presser frame being provided with
two guides which engage the teeth of the two portions of the
slide fastener tape, the sewing machine being further provided
with two reversing knives adapted to form two V-shaped
incisions at the two ends of the cut formed by the knife.
4,378,747
AQUATIC RECREATION VEHICLE
Theodore D. Beatty, 20911 Skimmer La., Huntington Beach,
Calif. 92646, and James J. Beatty, 5573 Rainier St, Ventura,
Calif. 93003
FUed Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,317
Int. a.3 B63B 5/24
VJS. a. 114—56 10 Oaims
1. An aquatic vehicle capable of buoying and transporting
one or more crew members which comprises:
a hull symmetrical about a longitudinally extending, cen-
trally located, vertical symmetry plane;
said hull having a plurality of integrally formed longitudi-
nally extending surfaces;
said surfaces including at least three longitudinally extending
sections and at least two longitudinally extending pressure
ridges symmetrically located to the right and left of said
vertical symmetry plane, each of said pressure ridges
downwardly and inwardly directed toward said symme-
try plane, each of said pressure ridges interspaced between
two of said hull sections;
said sections of said hull and said pressure ridges curving
outwardly and downwardly from the fore end of said hull
and extending backwardly to the aft end of said hull said
pressure ridges diverging from points adjacent said sym-
metry plane at said fore end;
said hull including a deck forming the uppermost surface of
the hull;
a longitudinally extending superstructure located over said
hull extending along a portion of the length of said hull
upwardly from said deck;
said vertical symmetry plane dissecting said superstructure
along its longitudinal axis into essentially symmetrical
right and left side halves;
the combined centers of gravity and buoyancy of said hull
and said superstructure normally lying essentially in said
vertical symmetry plane;
said superstructure including a longitudinally oriented crew
supporting means located above the center of buoyancy of
said vehicle, and projecting upwardly from said deck, said
deck extending from said crew supporting means out-
wardly to the right and the left of said vertical symmetry
plane, said crew supporting means sized and shaped to
allow one or more of said crew members to individually
straddle said supporting means such that if two or more
crew members occupy said vehicle, said crew members
are aligned tandemly one behind the other along the
length of said supporting means and each of said crew
members independently can sit astride said crew support-
ing means with their legs projecting downwardly and
outwardly towards said deck with their feet locatable on
said deck;
said crew members capable of freely shifting their center of
gravity from a position directly over the center of buoy-
ancy of said vehicle to positions to the right or left of a
point directly over the center of buoyancy of said vehicle
such that when the center of gravity of said crew is shifted
to the right or left of a point directly over the center of
buoyancy of said vehicle, said pressure ridge located on
said side of said vertical symmetry plane to which said
center of gravity is shifted will be depressed downwardly
with respect to the static water line of said vehicle.
4,378,748
SAILBOAT KEEL APPARATUS
Joel Kurtz, Box 26, Damascus, Pa. 18415
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 339,985
Int. a.^ B63B 41/00
U.S. a. 114—141 26 Claims
1. In a boat, attitude control apparatus comprising a keel axis
mounted for elevational angulation at a medial poiiit on the
underside of said boat; first positioning means coupled to said
keel axis for adjusting the elevation angle between said keel
axis and the longitudinal axis of said boat and for maintaining
60
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
said keel axis in fixed orientation, after adjustment, relative to
the longitudinal axis of said boat; a keel means pendant from
said keel axis for angulation about said fixedly oriented keel
4,378,750
WATER SKI TOW HARNESS FLOAT
Henry J. Holzhauer, Spirit Lake, Iowa, assignor to BerMey and
Company, Inc., Spirit Lake, Iowa
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,096
Int. a.3 B63B 21/56
U.S. a. 114—249 2 Qaims
axis; and second positioning means coupled to said keel means
for adjusting the angular position of said keel means about said
keel axis.
4,378,749
ROTATABLE TIRE FOR BARGE BUMPER
Raymond F. Leblanc, North Canton, and William T. Cummins,
Mogadore, both of Ohio, assignors to Teiedyne Industries,
Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,260
Int. a.3 B63B 59/02
U.S. a. 114—220 3 Qaims
1. In combination with a motor powered boat, a tow line
harness comprising:
a tubular float, said float having a slot at one end thereof and
a pulley mounted at the other end thereof, with said pulley
having a rope receiving piissageway therethrough;
a hitch rope roved through said pulley for attachment at
both ends to the transom of said boat to form a V with the
pulley located at the apex thereof and
a tow rope, one end of which is passed through said slot
around said float through the rope receiving passageway
of said pulley, back along said float and through said slot
in an opposite direction and secured to the remainder of
said tow rope.
4,378,751
CONDITION INDICATING DEVICE FOR A PUFFER
TYPE LOAD BREAK SWITCH
Donald L. Lott, Portland; Guenter G. Schockelt, Tigard, and
Matthew L. Worrix, Sheridan, all of Oreg., assignors to Sie-
mens-AIlis, Inc., Atlanta, Ga.
Division of Ser. No. 903,694, May 8, 1978, Pat. No. 4,319,105,
which is a division of Ser. No. 754,574, Dec. 27, 1976, Pat. No.
4,123,637. This application Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,710
Int. a.3 GOIL 19/12; HOIH 9/00
U.S. a. 116—271 3 Qaims
1. In a bumper for an offshore oil rig or barge loading struc-
ture of the type in which an upright metal bumper pipe is
mounted on upper and lower shock cells in turn mounted on a
leg of such structure, and in which a stack of rubber rings
normally surrounds said upright metal bumper pipe between
said shock cells; wherein the improvement consists of a series
of rotatable energy-absorbing, distortion-resisting, ringlike
sleeves surrounding said upright metal bumper pipe stacked
directly on one another and extending solely between said
shock cells; each ringlike sleeve consisting of a rim-free pneu-
matic-type rubber-containing vehicle tire carcass, and a cured-
within-the-carcass lightweight elastomeric foam filling in the
carcass; and there being a rubber inner tube located within the
oarcass; the elastomeric foam filling being located within the
rubber inner tube; and the foam filling being cured within said
rubber inner tube located within the carcass.
1. In a pressure condition indicating device for a pressurized
electrical envelope;
an indicator drum rotatably joumaled for movement from a
flrst condition indicating position to a second, different
condition indicating position;
a biasing spring o{>erably connected to bias said drum from
its first position to its second position;
a stop plate supported in fixed relationship to the envelope;
releasable holding means having a first end and a second
end, said second end extending into inteifering engage-
ment with said drum for maintaining said dnim in the first
position, said holding means extending through said stop
plate;
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
61
an actuator means after operably coupled to the second end
of said releasable holding means to effect a release of said
holding means from said drum to free said drum for move-
ment to its second position by operation of said biasing
spring, said actuator including a bellows connected in
sealed relationship to the envelope in a manner to be
responsive to the pressure within the envelope wherein a
drop in pressure in the envelope below a predetermined
value effects operation of said actuator, a tubular collar
disposed in abutting engagement with said stop plate and
secured to said bellows, a compression spring disposed in
coaxial relationship within said collar and working be-
tween said stop plate and said bellows, and means con-
necting said collar to said releasable holding means; and
a pinch Filler tube sealingly coupled to said bellows to com-
municate with the interior of said envelope and extending
upwardly through said collar;
whereby a drop in pressure within the envelope below a
predetermined value will result in the collapse of said
bellows under the influence of said compression spring
and said collar being secured to said bellows will be drawn
downwardly to thereby effect the release of said holding
means from said indicator drum and said drum under the
influence of said biasing spring is moved from its first
condition indicating position to its second condition indi-
cating position.
4,378,752
nXING APPARATUS
Wilhelm Knechtel, Biebertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 893,434, Apr. 4, 1978, abandoned. This
application Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,703
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 20,
1977, 2717391
Int. a.3 B05C 11/00: G03G 21/00
U.S. a. 118—60
5 Claims
1. A fixing apparatus comprising roller means for fixing a
toner image formed on a supporting element, a vessel contain-
ing an offset preventing liquid, a member, having an end sur-
face contactable with said roller means, for applying, by capil-
lary action, the offset preventing liquid on the surface portion
of said roller means which is utilized for the fixing action,
means provided adjacent to said end surface of said liquid
applying member for controlling the capillary action to
thereby control the amount of liquid applied to said roller
means by said liquid applying member, means for supporting
Said liquid applying member, and means for moving said sup-
port means toward and away from said roller means such that
said end surface of said liquid applying member is movable into
land out of contact with said roller means.
4,378,753
DEVELOPING APPARATUS FOR AN IMAGE
REPRODUCTION
Kenji Ueno, and Yoshio Ymazaki, both of Hachioji, Japan,
assignors to Konishiroku Pboto Industry Co., Ltd., Japan
FUed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,418
Int. a.3 G03G 15/09
U.S. a. 118—657 3 Claims
1. In an electrophotographic copying machine having a
movable photosensitive member and a magnetic brush devel-
oping device in juxtaposition to said photosensitive member
for transporting and applying developer thereto, said develop-
ing device comprising a housing having a developing chamber
for storing developer, developing means mounted in said
chamber comprising a cylindrical sleeve formed of nonmag-
netic material, a plurality of radially spaced magnets positioned
within said sleeve and extending along the central axial section
thereof, and means mounting said sleeve and said axially
spaced magnets for relative rotation adjacent said photosensi-
tive member, whereby said magnets cause adherence of devel-
oper to said sleeve for transport from said chamber toward said
photosensitive member, and a regulating plate positioned adja-
cent said chamber and having an edge extending axially across
and adjacent to the surface of said sleeve at a predetermined
distance therefrom to regulate the thickness of the adhering
developer coming from said chamber, the improvement com-
prising a second regulating plate having an edge extending
axially across and adjacent to the surface of said sleeve at a
predetermined distance therefrom, and means mounting said
second plate relative to said sleeve downstream of said first
plate and immediately before the juxtaposition of said sleeve
and said photosensitive member to recontrol the thickness of
the adhering developer, and in which the outer edges of at least
one of said plates opposite the respective outer edges of said
sleeve are substantially wider and closer to said sleeve than the
center sections of said plates, whereby spreading and swelling
of the developer at the outer edges of said sleeve is prevented.
4,378,754
TONER APPLICATOR SYSTEM FOR
MAGNETOGRAPHY
Houshang Rasekhi, Convent Station, NJ.; Alfred M. Nelson,
Redondo Beach, Calif.; John S. Kula, Jr., Budd Lake, and
John J. Sudano, Paterson, both of N.J., assignors to Wang
Laboratories, Inc., Lowell, Mass.
FUed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,274
Int. a.3 G03G 15/09
U.S. a. 118—658 9 Qaims
1. In apparatus having a movable magnetizable medium
capable of carrying latent magnetic images, magnetically at-
tractable toner particles capable of developing the magnetic
images of said medium and magnetic roll means for bringing
said toner particles from a relatively remote location into
continuous operative contact with said medium, the improve-
62
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
ment comprising an eccentrically mounted and operated rake
arrangement havmg a center wire stem and a plurality of
moment of said aircraft relative to said stations; and
means for automatically controlling said spraying means in
response to said sensing means.
I 29
4,378,756
ANIMAL BEDDING, PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR
PREPARING THE SAME
Patrick W. Whiteman, Reston, Va., assignor to Recycled Paper
Bedding, Inc., Reston, Va.
Continuation of Ser. No. 74,238, Sep. 10, 1979, abandoned. This
application Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,482
Int. a.3 AOIK 1/015
U.S. a. 119—1 2 Qaims
transversely oriented curved wire tines, for urging toner parti-
cles into contact with said magnetic roll.
4,378,755
DE-ICING AND CLEANING SYSTEM FOR AIRCRAFTS
Ulla M. Magnusson, and Kjell-Eric Magnusson, both of For-
stenavagen 3A, S-161 35 Bromma, Sweden
per No. PCT/SE78/00071, § 371 Date Jul. 25, 1979, § 102(e:
Date Jul. 25, 1979, PCT Pub. No. WO79/00331, PCT Pub
Date Jun. 14, 1979 ,
per Filed Nov. 8, 1978, Ser. No. 173,135 '
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 12, 1977, 7713619
Int. a.3 B05C 5/00
U.S. a. 118—684 14 Qaims
1. An apparatus for de-icing and cleaning aircraft compris-
ing:
1. An animal bedding comprising subdivided newsprint
consisting essentially of flat particles with irregularly shaped
major surfaces of a maximum diameter not more than about
three times the minimum diameter, said maximum diameter
being less than about one-inch, said particles having a particle
size distribution including at least about 15 wt. percent greater
than one-quarter inch maximum diameter, at least about 40 wt.
percent greater than 1/32 inch but less than one-quarter inch in
maximum diameter and not more than about 30 wt. percent
smaller than 1/32 inch in maximum diameter. ^
first and second stationary stations for accommodating the
sequential passage of said aircraft from said first station to
said second station, and for application for first and second
discrete treatments, respectively, to said aircraft;
means disposed within said stationary stations for spraying
said aircraft with liquid;
means for supporting said spraying means which comprises
a corridor having an opening substantially similar to a
frontal profile of said aircraft for allowing the passage of
said aircraft through said stations;
said support means comprising conduits connected to said
spraying means and forming a rigid frame in the form of a
substantially closed loop defining said corridor;
wherein a lower part of said frame in at least one of said first
and second stationary stations is dis]X)sed beneath the
roadway on which the aircraft is moving through the
station for encompassing all the exterior surface portions
of said aircraft such that said spraying means treats sub-
stantially all said exterior surface portions of said aircraft;
first and second separate drainage systems operatively asso-
ciated with said first and second stationary stations, re-
spectively for separately collecting said liquid;
one or more means provided along the movement path of
the aircraft for sensing the position and motion at any
4,378,757
MILKING METHOD AND MACHINE
Jorn Hamann, Aschauweg 18, D-2300 Kiel-Kronshagen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,728
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 31,
1980, 3020758
Int. a.3 AOIJ 5/10
U.S. a. 119—14.02 52 Claims
1. A method of milking a milk producing animal, such as a
cow, comprising the steps of alternately appying and interrupt-
ing the application of suction to the teats of the animal's udder
so that successive individual streams of milk issue from milk
orifices at the tips of the respective teats; establishing a path for
the flow of said streams to a collector station; admitting at at
least one of said individual milk streams into said path at a first
location and admitting at least one other individual stream into
said path at at least one second location downstream of said
first location for combined flow with said first stream; and
introducing into said path a concurrent stream of air in the
region of at least one of said locations so as to accelerate the
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
63
flowing milk in a direction toward the collector station and
thereby prevent droplets of milk from being aspirated back
into contact with the teat tips during subsequent applications of
suction to the teats.
4,378,758
INCUBATION METHOD AND PROCESS
Marilyn A. Coleman, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to Gerald L.
Smith and Jerry K. Mueller, Jr., both of Columbus, Ohio, a
ptut interest
I Filed Jun. 29, 1979, Ser. No. 53,407
Int. a.' AOIK ^7/00, 41/02
U.S, a. 119-35 8 Qaims
d
/»6
u
extend completely from the front face to the back face of
said support plate member;
(b) a frame member affixed over each of said openmgs in said
support plate with said frame members having a hollow
interior extending completely through the frame member
with two openings on each end of each frame member
such that one opening of such frame member is m position
directly over its adjacent opening and the other opening
being directed outwardly away from the front face of the
plate;
(c) loop means affixed through the hollow interior of the
frame members and through the openings in said plate
with the loop portion extending out through the opening
in the frame into the area outwardly of the plate.
48a
48b •<
4,378,760
DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING THE VENTILATING
MEANS OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Jean Barge, Montbeliard, France, assignor to Aciers et Outillage
Peugeot, Audinconrt, France
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 273,567
Oaims priority, application France, Jun. 16, 1980, 80 13299
Int. a.' FOIP 5/02
U.S. a. 123-41.12 18 Qaims
6. A tray for the incubation of eggs comprising:
means to support eggs and means to receive, transmit and
discharge light, said discharging means discharging light
in a pattern to encounter the upper surface of each egg
which could be supported below said tray by an identical
and vertically aligned tray;
with said tray in operative position, the means to receive
light being near the sides of the tray and the means to
discharge light discharging a portion downward.
I 4,378,759 '
ANIMAL RESTRAINING DEVICE
Ted L. Garrett, 5694 County Rd. 23, Fostoria, Ohio 44830
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,679
Int. a.3 A61D 3/00
U.S. a. 119—98 2 Claims
1. A device for holding an animal's legs securely in position
for purposes of administering medical treatment to such ani-
mal, said device comprising:
(a) a support plate member, said support plate member hav-
ing a. front face an back face, said support plate member
being adapted to be supported in a substantially upright
position, and said support plate member having two open-
ings in a portion of said plate, each of which opening
1. A device for controlling ventilating means of a radiator of
an internal combustion engine comprising a temperature sensor
placed in contact with a heat-carrying fluid circulating in said
engine and control means responsive to said sensor for supply-
ing power to motor means drivingly connected to the ventilat-
ing means as a function of variations in the temperature of the
heat-carrying fluid, said temperature sensor comprising a com-
ponent including a thermistor sensitive to a continuous range
of temperatures and a continuous regulating loop for regulat-
ing the power supplied to said motor means, said temperature
64
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
sensitive component being connected, as an input element, to
said loop, and said loop comprising a threshold circuit deter-
mitiing a lower value of said temperature range, and an opera-
tional amplifier which is arranged as a comparator and has an
input connected to said temperature sensitive component, said
operational amplifier being moreover provided with a negative
feedback circuit having a negative feedback level which is
defined by a fixed reference voltage which determines a
threshold beyond which said loop effects the temperature
regulation.
4,378,762
TWO-STROKE INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE AND
METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF
Josef Ehrlich, Ashridge Near Berkhempsted, England, assignor
to Outboard Marine Corporation, Waukegan, III.
Division of Ser. No. 184,487, Sep. 5, 1980, Pat. No. 4,340,016.
This application May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,738
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 29, 1980,
8027983
Int. a.3 F07B 33/04
U.S. a. 123—73 PP 8 Qaims
4,378,761
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM FOR A MULTI-CYLINDER
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yoshihisa Kawamura, Fujisawa, Japan, assignor to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Oct. 29, 1979, Ser. No. 89,266
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 1, 1978, 53-135031
Int. a.^ F02B 19/10. 75/18
U.S. CI. 123—52 M 11 Oaims
1. A fuel supply system for a single point fuel injection
internal combustion engine comprising:
a primary induction air passage in an intake manifold;
a secondary induction air passage defined by partitioning the
air intake manifold and positioned on at least a portion of
the outer circumference of said primary induction air
passage, said secondary induction air passage having an
exit where it is joined with said primary induction passage,
said exit facing a portion of a floor surface of a riser por-
tion of the intake manifold;
a fuel injection valve provided in said intake manifold adja-
cent to said exit facing said portion of the floor section of
the riser portion;
primary and secondary throttle valves provided in said
primary and secondary induction air passages, respec-
tively; and
a linking mechanism cooperatively connecting said primary
and secondary throttle valves for controlling the rate of
opening of said secondary throttle valve in comparison
with that of the primary throttle valve is smaller in the
region of a low load on the engine than the rate of opening
of said secondary throttle valve as compared to that of
said primary throttle valve in the region of a high load on
the engine.
3. A two-stroke internal combustion engine including a
cylinder, a crankcase extending from said cylinder, a piston
movable relative to said cylinder between top dead center and
bottom dead center positions and relative to first, second,
third, fourth, and fifth positions respectively spaced from said
top dead center position at respectively greater distances,
whereby said cylinder and said crankcase are subject to cycli-
cal conditions at relatively low and high pressure, a first trans-
fer passage communicable with said cylinder in response to
piston travel and with said crankcase in response to piston
travel, a second transfer passage communicating with said
crankcase and communicable with said cylinder in response to
piston travel, means for supplying a fuel-air mixture to said
crankcase when said crankcase is subject to low pressure,
means for igniting said fuel-air mixture within said cylinder
when said piston is located generally adjacent to said top dead
center position, thereby creating within said cylinder above
said piston high pressure ignition gases, means for isolating said
first transfer passage from said crankcase while establishing
communication between said first transfer passage and said
cylinder during piston travel from said first position to said
second position and during the presence of high pressure igni-
tion gases within said cylinder, whereby the high pressure
ignition gases are introduced into said first transfer passage,
means for maintaining the isolation between said crankcase and
said first transfer passage and the communication between said
cylinder and said first transfer passage during piston travel
from said second position to said third {position and during
conditions of low pressure in said cylinder, whereby the high
pressure ignition gases supplied to said first transfer passage
flow into said cylinder, means for establishing communication
between said second transfer passage and said cylinder when
said crankcase is subject to high pressure and during piston
travel between said fourth position and said bottom dead cen-
ter position, whereby the fuel-air mixture flows from said
crankcase into said cylinder through said second transfer pas-
sage, and means for establishing communication between said
first transfer passage and said crankcase when said crankcase is
subject to high pressure and during piston movement between
said fifth position and said bottom dead center position,
whereby the fuel-air mixture flows from said crankcase into
said cylinder through said first transfer passage in addition to
the flow of fuel-air mixture into said cylinder through said
second transfer passage.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
65
4,378,763
LUBRICATING SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Masao Ishihama, Yokosuka, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Aug. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 178,059
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 17, 1979, 54-104766
Int. a.J FOIM 1/00
U.S. a. 123—196 R 9 Qaims
1. A lubricating system for the internal combustion engine of
an automotive vehicle, said engine having a cylinder block
deflning a crankcase and being provided with an oil pump, said
system comprising:
a crankcase cover sealingly secured to the bottom surface of
the cylinder block, said crankcase cover cooperating with
said cylinder block to define a first chamber, said crank-
case cover being constructed and arranged to absorb
vibration;
a vehicle body frame member spaced from said engine and
said crankcase cover, said frame member defining a sec-
ond chamber;
a first flexible conduit for establishing a fluid connection
between said first and second chambers whereby oil in
said first chamber may drain into said second chamber;
and
a second flexible conduit for establishing a fluid connection
between said second chamber and said oil pump.
4,378,764
PISTON AND COMBUSTION CHAMBER WITH
IMPROVED FUEL CIRCULATION
Adam A. Jorgens^n, 1911 NW. 36 St., Oakland Park, Fla. 33309
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,141
Int. a.3 P02F 3/24
U.S. CI. 123—307 15 Qaims
pr-r.^.V.-.^^.^ ^
' 1. In an internal combustion engine comprising at least one
cylinder with a combustion chamber, a piston disposed coaxi-
ally, slidably, reciprocally movable between an upper and
lower dead center position inside said cylinder, said piston
having generally horizontal upper surfaces, said cylinder hav-
ing an intake port and an exhaust port, means for opening and
closing said ports in a timed relationship with the movement of
said piston, means for delivery of fuel and air to said cylinder,
means for igniting fuel and air combined in said cylinder,
means for transfer of energy produced from the expansion of
hot g^ses resulting from the combustion of said combination
of fuel and air, from said piston to an external recipient of said
energy, the improvement further comprising:
a first combustion chamber section defined by part of the
upper surface of said piston, and the top of the cylinder
walls;
a second combustion chamber section defined by the walls
and the top of said cylinder, and the upper surface of a
piston extension;
said piston extension coordinated with said second combus-
tion chamber section such that said piston extension is
slidably received inside said second combustion chamber
section, and such that gas captured inside said second
combustion chamber section is compressed, and wherein
said piston extension and said second combustion chamber
section have coordinated air passages such disposed that
during the last part of the piston's upward movement, said
air passages become partially overlapping, thereby pro-
viding a common passage for the gas contained in com-
pressed condition in said second combustion chamber
section to said first combustion chamber section, such that
the gas contained therein can escape, thereby imparting to
the gas in said first combustion chamber section an agi-
tated swirling motion.
4,378,765
BRAKING DEVICE FOR A VALVE CONTROLLED
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Hubert Abermeth; Andreas Deckert, both of Cologne; Helmut
Miiller, Bensberg, and Jiirgen Wahnschaffe, Bergisch Glad-
bach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Klockner-
Humboldt-Deutz Aktiengesellschaft, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,124
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 1,
1980, 3003566
Int. C\? P02D 13/04
U.S. a. 123—321 , 5 Claims
1. A braking device for a valve-controlled, four-cycle, inter-
nal combustion engine for motor vehicles, wherein the internal
combustion engine includes cylinders having exhaust and in-
take valves and wherein the exhaust and intake valves are
opened by single cam lobes mounted on a cam shaft, which
engage valve operators so that during power operation, the
exhaust and intake valves are each opened once during each set
of four cycles, the braking device comprising:
a bore extending through the cam shaft;
an operating shaft received within said bore for reciproca-
66
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
tion therein, the operating shaft having a reduced diame-
ter portion and an enlarged diameter portion thereon;
a hole through the cam shaft positioned 160° to 200° ahead of
the lobe on the cam shaft in the direction of rotation of the
cam shaft;
a supplemental cam positioned within the hole and being in
engagement with the operating shaft that is within the
cam shaft;
means for aligning the reduced diameter portion of the
op)erating shaft with the supplemental cam during power
operating of the engine;
means for moving the operating shaft in the cam shaft to a
position where the enlarged diameter portion engages the
supplemental cam to project the supplemental cam a suffi-
cient distance beyond the cam shaft to engage the valve
operator to opjen the exhaust valve during braking opera-
tion of the engine, whereby air compressed within the
cylinder is released through the exhaust valve during
what would have been the power cycle of the engine.
(g) moving said valve member forcibly to said neutral posi-
tion when said electromagnetic valve is de-energized.
4,378,766
CLOSED LOOP IDLE ENGINE SPEED CONTROL WITH
A VALVE OPERATING RELATIVE TO NEUTRAL
POSITION
Hisamitsu Yamazoe, Kariya; Ichita Sogabe, Gifu; Kazuyoshi
Tamaki, Nagoya, and M atsuju Yoshida, Bisai, all of Japan,
assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,627
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 22, 1980, 55-21765
Int. a.' F02M 51/06; F02D 11/10, 1/04; B05B 1/30
U.S. a. 123—339 9 Qaims
1. A method for controlling the idle speed of an internal
combustion engme by supplying thereto an auxiliary air flow
through an auxiliary air delivery system including an electro-
magnetic valve, said valve comprising a valve member mov-
able with respect to a valve seat, said valve member being
normally located at a neutral position between two positions at
which said air flow is at maximum and minimum respectively,
said valve member being spaced a sufficient distance from said
valve seat when located at said neutral position to prevent
vapor-laden air from clogging the space between said valve
member and said valve seat when the vapor is frozen, the
method comprising:
(a) detecting the actual idle speed of said engine;
(b) establishing a reference idle speed;
(c) deriving a deviation signal representing the deviation of
said actual idle speed with respect to said reference idle
speed;
(d) deriving a valve control signal from said deviation signal;
(e) detecting whether said valve control signal is more or
less than a predetermined value corresponding to said
neutral position;
(0 moving said valve member in a first direction away from
said neutral position when said valve control signal is
more than said predetermined value to increase the auxil-
iary air flow and moving said valve member in a second,
opposite direction away from said neutral position when
said valve control signal is less than said predetermined
value to decrease the auxiliary air flow; and
4,378,767
IDLING SPEED CONTROL DEVICE OF AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Mamoru Kobashi, Aichi; Shlnichiro Tanaka, Toyota, and Hiro-
shi Ito, Nagoya, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,644
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-127091
Int. a.3 F02B 3/00
U.S. a. 123—339 13 Qaims
r
1. An idling speed control device of an internal combustion
engine having an intake passage and a throttle valve arranged
in the intake passage, said device comprising:
a bypass passage interconnecting the intake passage located
upstream of the throttle valve to the intake passage lo-
cated downstream of the throttle valve;
valve means arranged in said bypass passage and having a
control valve controlling a flow area of said bypass pas-
sage;
a step motor for controlling the amount of air flowing within
said bypass passage in accordance with a change in the
operating condition of the engine at the time of idling, said
step motor comprising a motor housing, a stator stationar-
ily arranged in said motor housing, and a rotor rotatably
arranged in said motor housing;
a valve shaft axially movable in said motor housing and
actuated by said rotor, s£id control valve being fixed onto
said valve shaft, said rotor being rotatably mounted on
said valve shaft; and
transforming means, including said rotor and operatively
coupling said rotor and said valve shaft, for transforming
the rotation motion of said rotor to the axial movement of
said valve shaft.
4,378,768
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING
THE IDLING SPEED OF AN ENGINE
Hiroshi Itoh, Nagoya, and Mamoru Kobashi, Aichi, both of
Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Toyota, Japan
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,713
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 23, 1981, 56-8145
Int. a.3 F02D 11/10; F02M 77/00
U.S. Q. 123—339 4 Claims
1. Apparatus for controlling the idling speed of an engine,
said engine including a main intake passage having a throttle
valve disposed therein, the apparatus comprising:
a bypass passage having first and second ends connected to
the main intake passage upstream and downstream of the
throttle valve, respectively;
means for controlling the amount of air passing through the
bypass passage;
means for measuring the actual idling speed of the engine;
means for calculating the speed difference between said
actual idling speed and a predetermined desired speed,
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
C7
said calculating means calculating said speed difference
after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed since the
previous calculation, said waiting time being increased
when said measuring means initially measures said actual
idling speed after the operating condition of the engine is
changed to an idling operating condition; and
means for adjusting the controlling means to cause actual
idling speed to approach the desired speed only when
speed difference exceeds a predetermined value.
4^78,769
DIGITAL IGNITION CONTROL FOR A
MAGNETOPOWERED IGNITION SYSTEM OF AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Georg Haubner, Berg; Jiirgen Wesemeyer, Nuremberg; Werner
Meier, Rednitzhembach, and Hans Schrumpf, Oberasbach, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH,
Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,758
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 20,
1980, 3006288
Int. Cl,3 F02P 1/00, 3/02, 5/04 "^
U.S. a. 123—416 11 Qaims
storage means with said motor speed specifying signal,
thereby reading out a count value indicative of said de-
sired timing advance at said then present motor speed,
furnishing said timing advance count value to said digital
timing counter means for entry at the times of its activa-
tion by said reference signals, and furnishing said spark
initiating signal when said timing counter means reaches a
count indicative of the end of a time interval correspond-
ing to said count value.
4,378,770
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IGNITION SYSTEM
SPARK TIMING CONTROL DURING ENGINE
CRANKING
Keiyi Ikeura, Yokosuka, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 137,001, Apr. 3, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jun. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 387,277
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 16, 1979, 54-45323
Int. a.3 P02P 5/04
U.S. a. 123—424 14 Qaims
1. In an ignition system for an internal combustion engine
having a magneto generator driven by said engine for power-
ing and timing ignition for said engine, said magneto generator
having an AC voltage wave output of a repetition rate corre-
sponding to the engine speed, and means for creating a spark in
response to a spark initiation signal: apparatus for creating said
spark initiation signal comprising
means (32) connected to said output of said magneto genera-
tor for deriving a reference signal at a predetermined
point in each repetition of said AC voltage wave;
means (36,41) furnishing clock signals;
digital speed counter means (35) for counting said clock
pulses from receipt of a speed counter activating signal
until receipt of a speed counter stop signal;
storage means (38) for storing a plurality of constants each
signifying a desired timing advance at a given motor
speed;
digital timing counter means (40) connected for activation in
response to each reference signal produced by said refer-
ence signal deriving means, and
digital control means (33) connected to said digital speed
counter means, said storage means, and said digital timing
counter means for furnishing said speed counter activating
and stop signals in response to selected ones of said refer-
ence signals so that the count on said digital speed counter
means upon receipt of said speed counter stop signal con-
stitutes a motor speed specifying signal, addressing said
1. A method for the control of an ignition system spark
timing for a spark ignition internal combustion engine having
an idle speed, said method comprising the steps of;
detecting a cranking condition wherein the engine is under
cranking and generating a cranking condition signal indic-
ative of the cranking condition;
detecting cranking speed of the engine and generating a
cranking speed signal indicative of the cranking speed;
and
decreasing, in response to the cranking condition signal and
the cranking speed signal, the value of spark advance in
accordance with a drop in the detected cranking speed of
the engine when the engine is under cranking and at the
same time the detected cranking speed is lower than a
predetermined value which is lower than the idle speed.
5. An apparatus for the control of an ignition system for a
spark ignition internal combustion engine having an idle speed,
said apparatus comprising:
an engine cranking sensor for detecting a cranking condition
wherein the engine is under cranking and generating a
cranking condition signal indicative of the cranking condi-
tion;
an engine revolution speed sensor for detecting cranking
speed of the engine and generating a cranking speed signal
indicative of the cranking speed of the engine; and
correction means, in response to the cranking condition
signal and the cranking speed signal, for decreasing the
value of spark advance in accordance with a drop in the
detected cranking speed of the engine when the engine is
under cranking and at the same time the detected cranking
speed is lower than a predetermined value which is lower
than the idle speed.
68
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,378,771
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING IGNITION TIMING IN
AN ENGINE
Daisaku Sawada; Takashi Shigematsu, and Yuji Takeda, all of
Shizuoka, Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 42,343, May 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4,320,729.
This application Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,075
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1978, 53-63568
Int. a.' F02P 5/14
U.S. a. 123—425 15 Qaims
1. A system for controlling ignition timing of an engine
comprising:
means for generating an operation signal related to an oper-
ating condition of said engine;
means for generating a knocking signal related to knocking
in said engine;
means for controlling said ignition timing in response to said
operation signal and said knocking signal;
means for determining a peak value of said knocking signal;
means for generating a fault signal when said peak value is
beyond a predetermined threshold;
means for generating a dummy signal, said dummy having
the effect of retarding said ignition timing to a timing at
which knocking is unlikely to occur when said dummy
signal is applied to said controlling means; and
means for substituting said dummy signal for said knocking
signal to said controlling means in response to said fault
signal.
4,378,772
OPEN LOOP ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT FOR ALTITUDE
COMPENSATION
Paul M. Meyer, East Alton, III., assignor to ACF Industries,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 278,298
Int. a.3 F02M 7/12
U.S. a. 123—438 2 Qaims
WLTAGE
REGULATOR
'-A - i-
rwuLO'-i
carburetor having an associated solenoid controlling auxiliary
air bled into the fuel circuits of the carburetor thereby to
control the air-fuel ratio of the mixture produced by the carbu-
retor, the circuit comprising a bridge circuit having a variable
resistant element which includes a strain gage the resistance of
which changes as a function of altitude, the bridge circuit
producing an electrical signal the amplitude of which changes
in response to changes in air density; means responsive to the
electrical signal for generating a variable pulse width control
signal which is supplied to the solenoid, the signal response
means operating in the range of 10-100 Hz and varying the
pulse width of the control signal in response to amplitude
changes in the electrical signal, the signal responsive means
being calibrated to generate a control signal having a zero
percent duty cycle at sea level and an increasing duty cycle at
increasing altitude above sea level; and, thermal responsive
means connected to the output of the signal responsive means,
the thermal responsive means changing the pulse width of the
control signal produced by the signal responsive means if the
engine is operating at colder temperature conditions than for
which the circuit is otherwise calibrated, the thermal respon-
sive means affecting the control signal for the carburetor to
produce a richer air-fuel mixture than what otherwise be pro-
duced thereby making it easier to start and operate the engine.
4,378,773
CONTROL SYSTEM
Masaaki Ohgami, Musashino, Japan, assignor to Fuji Jukogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,385
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 2, 1979, 54-98853
Int. a.3 F02B ii/00; F02M 7/00
U.S. a. 123—440 24 Oaims
f
0-
0-
p
°"-L
pp
DP
A
1 cycle
1. An open loop electronic circuit for altitude compensation
of a carburetor installed on an internal combustion engine, the
1. A feedback control system comprising
a dither signal generating circuit means for producing a
periodical dither signal having a pattern of pulses having
a period which comprises a plurality of alternating posi-
tive excursions and negative excursions,
at least one of said positive excursions being lower than
another of said positive excursions and at least one of said
negative excursions being shallower than another of said
negative excursions, said dither signal deflning a center
line having a level,
shift control circuit means for shifting the level of the center
line of said dither signal so as to provide a shifted dither
signal from time to time,
driving circuit means operatively connected to said shift
control circuit means for producing a driving output
depending on said dither signal,
actuator means operatively connected to said driving output
for producing a controlled output,
output means including detecting means for sensing the
controlled output and, means for distinguishing higher
values of said controlled output from lower values of said
controlled output, and providing an output signal, said
higher values being higher than a desired value, said lower
values being lower than said desired value,
comparing circuit means for comparing said output signal
with reference pulses having the same period as that of
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
«9
corresponding of said pulses of said dither signal and for
producing a control signal corresponding to said dither
signal but said control signal omitting corresponding
portions of the dither signal from time to time dependent
on said output signal,
a shift signal generating circuit means for producing a shift
signal dependent on said control signal for shifting the
level of said center line of said dither signal from time to
time via said shift control circuit means.
4,378,774
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Masaaki Kato, Kariya, Japan, assignor to Nippondenso Co.,
Ltd., Kariya, Japan
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,196
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 14, 1980, 55-49494
Int. a.J F02M 39/00
U.S. a. 123—446 5 Qaims
4,378,775
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FUEL INJECTION IN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES IN PARTICULAR
DIESEL ENGINES
Max Straubel, Stuttgart; Hermann Eisele; Klaus-Dieter Zim-
mermann, both of Vaihingen, and Wilheim Vogel, Stuttgart,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,426
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 1,
1980, 3024886; May 12, 1981, 3118669
Int. a.3 F02M 39/00
U.S. a. 123—458 29 Qaims
1. A fuel injection system for an internal combustion engine,
comprising a substantially cylindrical injector body having a
delivery cylinder which has a first cylinder bore and an injec-
tion cylinder which has a second cylinder bore connected to
and deviated from said first cylinder bore, a delivery plunger
which is slidably fitted in said first cylinder bore and which
defines a delivery pump chamber in the delivery cylinder, an
injection plunger which is slidably fitted in said second cylin-
der bore of the injection cylinder and which defines an injec-
tion pump chamber in the injection cylinder, said injection
plunger being displaced by the fuel fed into the injection pump
chamber, through a stroke in proportion to the amount of the
fed fuel, fuel passage means for feeding the fuel into the injec-
tion pump chamber, and nozzle means for injecting the fuel
delivered by the injection pump chamber, said injection
plunger being moved under the pressure which occurs in the
delivery pump chamber due to the displacement of the deliv-
ery plunger to deliver the fuel in the injection pump chamber
into the nozzle means.
11. An apparatus for regulating fuel injection in an internal
combustion engine having a fuel supply pump which provides
an inlet pressure, in particular a Diesel engine, having a piston
injection pump which includes:
a piston; [
a pump work chamber;
an adjusting device connected to the piston injection pump to
alter the end of a piston supply stroke;
a diversion opening in the wall of the piston injection pump;
a control face on the piston which controls the diversion open-
ing;
an inlet line provided with an inlet valve;
a pressure regulating valve connected to regulate the inlet
pressure;
wherein the inlet valve is a magnetic inlet valve and is con-
nected to the pump work chamber to regulate a fuel quantity
which is prestored in the pump work chamber; the piston
injection pump also including:
an electromechanical adjusting element connected to actuate
the adjusting device;
a pulse generating means which is connected to generate a
control pulse to the electromechanical adjusting element to
alter the piston position;
a set-point transducer which generates set-point information to
the adjusting device;
an adjustment-path transducer which generates adjustment
path information to the adjusting device;
an electrical control device connected to generate a signal to
the electromechanical adjusting element such that the elec-
tromechanical adjusting element is dependent on the electri-
cal control device, and wherein the electrical control device
is connected to the set-point transducer to receive the set-
point information and to the adjustment path transducer to
receive the adjustment path information, and wherein the
electrical control device is also connected to generate a
metering pulse to the magnetic inlet valve to determine
duration of the magnetic valve opening.
70
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,378,776
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE HAVING EXHAUST
GAS REaRCULATION SYSTEM
Takayoshi Nishimori, Hiroshima, Japan, assignor to Toyo
Kogyo Co., Ltd., Hiroshima, Japan
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,519
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 25, 1980, 55-117462
Int. a.^ F02M 25/06
U.S. a. 123—571 5 Oaims
speed signal, valve member position sensing means for detect-
ing the position of the valve member means in the circulation
valve means, first memory means storing memories of desired
positions of the valve member means under various combina-
tions of values of the engine load and the engine speed, control
means for controlling the circulation valve means in accor-
dance with the load and engine speed signals so that the actual
position of the valve member means conforms with the desired
position under the detected engine load and speed, second
1. An internal combustion engine comprising an exhaust
system for passing exhaust gas from combustion chamber
means, an intake system leading to said combustion chamber
means to provide a supply of intake gas thereto, an exhaust gas
recirculation system having exhaust gas recirculation passage
means for returning certain amount of exhaust gas to said
intake system, recirculation valve means provided in said recir-
culation psissage means, said recirculation valve means includ-
ing valve member means of which position can be changed to
vary the amount of exhaust gas which is to be returned to the
intake system, engine load sensing means for detecting engine
load and producing an engine load signal, engine speed sensing
means for detecting engine speed and producing an engine
sf)eed signal, valve member position sensing means for detect-
ing the position of the valve member means in the recirculation
valve means, memory means storing memories of desired posi-
tions of the valve member means under various combinations
of values of the engine load and the engine speed, control
means for controlling the recirculation valve means in accor-
dance with the load and engine speed signals so that the actual
position of the valve member means conforms with the desired
position under the detected engine load and sp)eed, means for
closing said recirculation passage means, said control means
including means for actuating said closing means when the
actual position of the valve member means does not conform
with the desired position within a predetermined time.
4,378,777
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE HAVING EXHAUST
GAS REaRCULATION SYSTEM
Katsuyoshi lida; Yoshikuni Yada, and Katbumi Okazaki, all of
Hiroshima, Japan, assignors to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd., Hiro-
shima, Japan
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,539
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 27, 1980, 55-118767
Int. aj F02M 25/06
U.S. a. 123—571 3 Qaims
1. An internal combustion engine comprising an exhaust
system for passing exhaust gas from combustion chamber
means, an intake system leading to said combustion chamber
means to provide a supply of intake gas thereto, an exhaust gas
recirculation system having exhaust gas recirculation passage
means for returning a certain amount of exhaust gas to said
intake system, recirculation valve means provided in said recir-
culation passage means, said recirculation valve means includ-
ing valve member means of which position can be changed to
vary the amount of exhaust gas which is to be returned to the
intake system, engine load sensing means for detecting engine
load and producing an engine load signal, engine speed sensing
means for detecting engine speed and producing an engine
4r,
memory means storing memories of desired values of intake
gas flow under various combinations of values of the engine
load and engine speed, intake flow sensing means for detecting
actual intake gas flow and producing an intake flow signal, said
control means further including means for controlling the
circulation valve means so that the valve member means is
moved beyond the desired position when the actual intake gas
flow is greater than the desired value so as to compensate for
a decrease in the recirculated exhaust gasT""
4,378,778
IGNITION SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINES
Werner Harter, Hummelberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,612
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 12,
1980, 3034440
Int. a.3 F02P 5/04
U.S. a. 123—609 11 Qaims
-/"
!e^
«]
L^
lU'
h
^d
ID'
^
O 23 -r
.^
'^^
^•'
ik
n/D
' 30
n
1. An ignition system for an internal combustion engine
including an ignition coil having primary and secondary wind-
ings, ignition timing shift means for determining the ignition
moment of each cycle of the system, an intemiptor switch in
circuit with said primary winding electrically controllable so
as to provide timing of ignition in response to said ignition shift
means by primary circuit interruption and also controllable in
circuit closure to provide dwell time for ignition coil energiza-
tion, said system further comprising;
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
71
a generator of engine rotation increment signals including a
rotary device driven by said engine;
means for counting the number of said increment signals
during the initial fraction (fit) of dwell time in which the
current in said primary winding builds up to a predeter-
mined value (lo) and for storing said number;
means (16, 17) for deriving from said number a larger num-
ber of increment signals determining a first approximation
of the full dwell time;
means (18) for correcting the output of said number deriving
means by the ratio of the duration of the increment signal
from said generator appearing at a predetermined f>oint of
the cycle of operation of the system to the duration of the
most recent increment signal from said generator, and
means responsive to the corrected derived number provided
by said deriving and correcting means to determine the
beginning of dwell time.
4,378,779
IGNITION SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINES
Takasi Hachiga, Kariya, and Yasuo Taguchi, Yokohama, both of
Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya and To-
shiba Corporation, Kawasaki, both of, Japan
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,895
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 27, 1979, 54-96509
Int. a.3 F02P 1/QO
U.S. CI. 123—644 4 Qaims
1. An ignition system for an internal combustion engine
comprising:
an ignition coil mcluding a primary winding divided into
two parts by a center terminal connected to one end of a
power source and a secondary winding;
a first pair of spark plugs connected in parallel with one end
of said secondary winding of said ignition coil;
a second pair of spark plugs connected in parallel with the
other end of said secondary winding;
a high-tension diode connected between each of said spark
plugs and said ignition coil secondary winding with a
polarity such that a positive-going output and a negative-
going output generated in said secondary winding are
distributed to said spark plugs;
a pair of power transistors having collectors thereof respec-
tively connected to one and the other ends of said primary
winding of said ignition coil and also having emitters
thereof connected to each other;
a primary current detecting resistor connected between said
interconnected emitters and the other end of said power
source;
S a current control circuit responsive to a primary current
detected by said primary current detecting resistor to
control said power transistors so as to feedback control
said primary current; and
ignition signal generating means for generating ignition
signals so as to turn off said power transistors at different
ignition times.
4,378,780
ARROW REST FOR ARCHERY BOW
Tadao Izuta, Hamamatsu, Japan, assignor to Nippon Gakki
Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 768,860, Feb. 15, 1977, abandoned.
This application Nov. 16, 1978, Ser. No. 961,248
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 24, 1^6, 51/21011
Int. Q.3 F41B 5/00
U.S. Q. 124—24 R 4 Qaims
^
12
11
^
^
-F
II
Mb
=^
lla
1. An archery bow for use with an arrow of the type which
includes a cylindrical shaft having a nock formed on one end
thereof and a plurality of fletchings spaced 120° apart about the
periphery of said shaft, said archery bow comprising:
(a) an archery bow having a sight window formed therein,
said sight window including a generally horizontal bottom
wall and a generally vertical side wall; and
(b) an improved arrow rest, comprising:
(1) an elongated body having a free end and being flexible
in a direction parallel to said generally horizontal bot-
tom wall;
(2) support means coupled to said elongated body at a
point spaced from said free end; said support means
supporting said elongated body along a line extending
between a first point and a second point forward of, and
closer to said side wall than, said first point; said second
point defining said free end of said elongated body and
being sufficiently close to said side wall to ensure that
when said arrow is shot by said bow with a first one of
said fletchings oriented substantially perpendicular to
said side wall and the remaining said fletchings contact-
ing said side wall, a second fletching of said arrow
contacts said elongated body and is biased, along with
said nock, towards said side wall by the combined effect
of said elongated body and said support means; said
elongated body having a scooped portion therein ex-
tending from said free end towards the other end of said
elongated body, said scoop portion limiting the distance
which said arrow shot by said bow can move away
from said generally vertical side wall.
• I"
4,378,781
ARROW LOCATING DEVICE
David C. Shiflett, 2001 Berkley, Flint, Mich. 48504
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,162
Int. Q.^ F41B 5/00
U.S. Q. 124—24 R
8 Qaims
1. An arrow locating device for use with an archery bow
72
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
and arrow for locating the arrow after flight from a bow, the
combination comprising: a hollow spool of line coiled for
dispensing said Hne axially from internally of said spool, attach-
ing means at one end of said spool engageable with comple-
mentary attaching means adapted to be fixed on a bow to
dispose said spool with its axis generally parallel to the path of
an arrow, said line having one end attachable to an arrow for
pulling line from said sf>ool upon discharge of said arrow from
said bow, and second attaching means for supporting said
spool on an arrow in readiness for detachment from said arrow
and attachment to said bow.
4,378,782
CERAMIC TILE CUTTER
Schotter D. Richard, Glenwood, and Robert P. Heinis, Totowa,
both of N.J., assignors to Red Devil Inc., Union, N.J.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,420
Int. OJ B28D 1/32
U.S. a. 125—23 T 7 Qaims
between said disc and said actuator; means for minimizing
abrasive action as a result of relative movement between
said actuator and said disc, and for facilitating a smooth
tunable control of gas flow through said disc; and means
for effecting movement of said actuator and rigid material
washer to effect or relieve compression of said disc to
*J f^^
1. A tile scoring and fracturing device comprising a base, a
resilient tile receiving member on said base, spaced links
swingably secured to the base at opposed ends thereof and
extending upwardly from said base, an elongated guide bar
having a top and a bottom edge, said guide bar being freely
coupled at each end to one of the free ends of the links, a tile
scoring head slidably carried by the guide bar, a slot in said
head to receive the bar therethrough, a top and a bottom
bearing surface in said slot, a tile scoring member carried by
the tile scoring head adjacent the surface of the resilient tile
receiving member, tile fracturing legs on each side of the tile
scoring head extending from the tile scoring head in the direc-
tion of the resilient tile receiving member, means coupled to
the links to swing the said links through an arc about their base
secured portion whereby the bottom edge of the guide bar
acting against the bottom bearing surface of the tile scoring
head slot rotates said scoring head to bring the tile fracturing
legs into forcible contact with a scored tile.
4,378,783
HOT SPOT BUTANE HEATER
James B. Hunter, Newton Square, Pa., assignor to Johnson
Matthey Inc., Malvern, Pa.
Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,352
Int. a.3 F24B 3/00
U.S. a. 126—25 B 10 Qaims
1. A portable heater comprising
a combustion chamber;
a hollow casing component having an interior cross-sec-
tional area large enough to receive a canister of combusti-
ble gas therein:
control valve means mounted within said casing component
for receiving a canister of combustible gas and valving the
flow of combustible gas from said canister;
means for providing the transport of combustible gas from
the canister through said control valve means into said
combustion chamber;
means for providing the transport of ambient air into said
combustion chamber to mix with said combustible gas to
effect combustion; and
said control valve means comprising: a disc of flexible mate-
rial and means deHning a small opening in said disc; a
hollow tube actuator; a washer of rigid material disposed
close or op)en, respectively, the small opening in said disc
to prevent or allow, respectively, combustible gas flow
therethrough, said means for effecting movement of said
actuator comprising means for effecting rotation of said
actuator, and means for transforming rotary movement of
said actuator into linear movement thereof toward and
away from said disc.
4,378,784
SOLAR HEATING SYSTEM
Arthur M. Frank, Plainview, N.Y., assignor to Grumman Aero-
space Corporation, Bethpage, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 122,856, Feb. 20, 1982, Pat. No. 4,329,979,
which is a division of Ser. No. 885,356, Mar. 13, 1976,
abandoned. This application Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,685
Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. CI. 126—418 2 Claims
1. A domestic solar hot water system having a pressurized
water input and output comprising:
means for reducing the input water pressure;
an insulated low pressure preheater tank with an input in
fluid communication with said pressure reducing means
and an output discharge conduit leading from said pre-
heater tank;
a first pumping means between the system output and said
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
73
preheater tank output for communicating water from said
preheater tank to a pressurized external hot water heater
when useage requires;
an array of interconnected solar assembly units having input
and output ports, both being connected to said preheater
tank;
COLO WATER
TO LOW PRESSURE
PREHEATER TANK
a differential temperature controller connected between said
solar array and said preheater tank, being adjustable to
actuate when said array receives sufficient solar energy to
heat the water therein to a temperature greater than that
of the water in said preheater; and
second pumping means connected to and actuated by said
differential temperature controller to pump water from
said preheater through said solar array.
4,378,785
SOLAR HEATING SYSTEM
Dale Fleischmann, P.O. Box 321, Dorchester, Wis. 54425, and
Marvin E. Blanton, 118 Wymore Rd., Winter Park, Fla.
32789
I Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,946
' Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
VS. a. 126—421 I 8 Qaims
1. A solar heating system for a building comprising:
A. building walls deflning an air space and a living space;
B. means forming at least one wall of said air space to allow
sunlight to heat said air space;
C. a heat reservoir;
D. heat transfer means to transfer heat from said reservoir to
said living space;
£. forced air duct means within said air space;
F. first heat pump means comprising an evaporator within
said duct means to collect low grade heat from said duct,
a compressor to transform said low grade heat into higher
grade heat, a condenser to receive said higher grade heat,
second transfer means to transfer said higher grade heat
from said condenser to said heat reservoir, and a refriger-
ant circuit including a liquid line and a suction line to
circulate a refrigerant between said evaporator, said con-
denser, and said compressor,
G. first damper means to regulate air flow through said duct;
H. sensing means in said suction line to detect the refrigerant
pressure therein; and
I. control means operatively connecting said sensing means
to said damper means to close said damper means to de-
crease heat transfer to said evaporator when the pressure
detected by said sensing means exceeds a predetermined
level, maintaining the heat pump in an efficient operating
condition.
4,378,786
APARTMENT SOLAR HEATING PANEL
Joseph E. Comeau, Jr., 24-A Chestnut Sq., Foxboro, Mass.
02035
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,910
Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—429 1 Claim
13A5 9678
1. A Solar Heating Panel wherein said panel can be placed in
a south facing window in order to heat a room, said panel
comprising;
a piece of clear plastic that will make up the front, left, right,
and top sides of the panel;
a piece of aluminum that will make up the back of said panel,
said back is a flat vertical sheet wherein there are at least
seven fins rising vertically from the back, three fins that
are the closest to said left side shall be at an angle of 80
degrees with respect to said back, another three fins that
are the closest to said right side shall be at an angle of 80
degrees with respect to said back, a central degrees with
respect to said back, a central fin between the three fins on'
the left and the three fins on the right and be at an angle
of 90 degrees with respect to the back;
said fins shall be painted flat black or be black anodized
aluminum so that the air that the fan is pushing across the
fins will be heated;
an air input opening at the top back of said panel, so that a
fan will draw in the warm air near the ceiling of said room
to make it^even warmer;
an air output opening at the bottom back of said panel, so
that the warm air will be exhausted from said panel into
the cooler air near the floor of said room thereby wanning
said room;
a piece of aluminum that starts at the front bottom of the fins
and goes from the left to the right sides, that angles down
74
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
so that it will end at the bottom back of the fins to create
an air deflector in said panel;
a fan having blades located just a few inches below the air
input opening at the top back of said panel;
a cone type air duct that starts at all of the inside sides just
below the air input duct and gets smaller as it goes down
until it reaches the fan blades at which time it gets bigger
until it reaches all of the inside sides just above the top of
the fins of said panel;
a series of photovoltaic ceils at the top front inside of said
panel to provide electrical power to the fans motor;
a stand which consists of a flat plate forming the bottom of
said panel to stably support panel in an upright position;
said panel shall be of an overall size that will enable one
person to carry said panel.
4,378,788
SHEET-FLOW CONCRETE SOLAR COLLECTOR
Albert F. Naccache, 918 Ramona, Albany, Calif. 94706
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,253
Int. CIJ F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—445 15 Qaims
4,378,787
SOLAR HEATING SYSTEM
Dale Fleischmann, P.O. Box 321, Dorchester, Wis. 54425
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,947
Int. a.^ F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—430 11 Qaims
1. A solar heating system for a building comprising:
A. building walls defining an air space and a living space;
B. means forming at least one wall of said air space to allow
solar energy to heat said air space;
C. a heat reservoir;
D. first heat pump means comprising a first refrigerant coil
to collect relatively low grade heat from said air space, a
first compressor to transform said low grade heat into
relatively concentrated heat, and a second refrigerant coil
to receive said relatively concentrated heat from said
compressor;
E. first transfer means to transmit said relatively concen-
trated heat from said second refrigerant coil to said reser-
voir;
F. second heat pump means comprising a third refrigerant
coil to collect heat from said reservoir, a second compres-
sor to transform said heat into highly concentrated heat,
and fourth refrigerant coil to receive said highly concen-
trated heat from said second compressor:
G. second transfer means to transmit said heat from said
reservoir to said third refrigerant coil; and
H. third transfer means to transmit said highly concentrated
heat from said fourth coil into said living space.
1. A sheet-flow type solar collector, comprising a reinforced
concrete slab acting as a backing insulation and having an
upper surface acting as a photothermal conversion surface, an
inner glazing substantially in contact with the conversion
surface, an outer glazing spaced from the inner glazing, means
retaining the two glazings to the slab, the inner glazing serving
to contain the flow of a heat transfer fluid along the conversion
surface and the outer glazing serving to reduce convection and
radiation heat losses, the conversion surface including a series
of parallel grooves from the upper end of the slab to the lower
end, with ridges between the grooves and with the inner glaz-
ing resting substantially on the ridges, for containing the heat
transfer fluid in the grooves and under the inner glazing, means
for admitting the heat transfer fluid to flow longitudinally over
the conversion surface, and means for collecting heated trans-
fer fiuid from the conversion surface, the concrete slab being at
least about two inches thick and of good insulation properties,
the photothermal conversion surface being coated with an
impermeable cermet solar selective coating having high ab-
sorptivity to light radiation and low emissivity for thermal
radiation, said coating further having an exp>osed surface of
high capillarity.
4,378,789
SOLAR HEATING UNITS
Pierre Vironneau, Chemin des Pal^ques, Portet-sur-Garonne
31120, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 12,128, Feb. 14, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,524
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 16, 1978, 78 04996
Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—450 5 Claims
1. A solar heating collector unit comprising a polygonal
casing, a polygonal transparent panel closing one side of said
casing, an insulation substrate disposed within the casing, a
polygonal metal heat-absorbing panel having a polygonal
upstanding marginal flange disposed within said casing be-
tween said insulation substrate and said transparent panel, said
marginal flange extending continuously about all sides of said
heat-absorbing panel and spacing said heat-absorbing panel
from said transparent panel, a thermally polymerized elasto-
mer forming a continuous polygonal peripheral Joint between
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
75
said transparent panel and said upstanding marginal flange and
sealing said flange to said transparent panel in fluidtight rela-
tionship and securing said panels together^ an inert gas sealed
in the space between said panels by said elastomer, and means
deflning a path for heat exchange fluid against the side of said
metal panel that is opposite said transparent panel.
4,378,790
DEMOUNTABLE SOLAR OVEN
Samuel F. Erwin, P.O. Box 2209, Sedona, Ariz. 86336
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,565
Int. a.3 F24J i/02
U.S. a. 126—451
14 Qaims
for generating an electrical output signal (Eo) which is
linearly proportional to such tension,
first force controlling means for generating an electrical output
signal (Emax) representing a desired maximum tension in
said cord,
second force controlling means for generating an electrical
output signal (Emin) representing a desired minimum ten-
sion in said cord, and
comparator circuit means for cyclically connecting said power
means for rotation of said drum in the wind-up direction
upon Eo equaling or being less than Emin, and connecting
said power means for rotation of said drum in the wind-
down direction upon Eo equaling or exceeding Emax.
1. A demountable solar oven comprising a supporting base,
a horizontally rotatable member mounted on said base, a hol-
low columnar member having a circular opening disposed on
said rotatable member, a pair of arms removably attached at
one end to said columnar member and having their other ends
projecting upwardly, a hemispherical oven chamber including
a diametrically opposed first pair of pivot members on its open
rim removably disposed, respectively, on said other ends, a
gear mechanism sup]X)rted by said columnar member, a gear
member disposed on the surface of said hemispherical oven
chamber and engaged with said gear mechanism, means for
rotating said gear mechanism and pivoting said oven chamber
about said diametrically opposed first pivots for changing the
oven's solar angle, a self leveling food container including a
rim removably disposed in said oven chamber, said self level-
ing food container comprises a second pair of pivot members
on said rim inward of said hemispherical oven chamber on the
same axis as said diametrically opposed pivots, and a third pair
of pivot members on said food container on an axis at right
angles to said second pair of pivot members.
4,378,791
THERAPEUTIC TRACTION APPARATUS
Ivan D. Sarrell, Rising Fawn, Ga., assignor to Qiattanooga
Cprporation, Chattanooga, Tenn.
FUed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,381
Int. Q\} A61F 5/00
U.S. a. 128—71 13 Claims
1. In a therapeutic traction applying apparatus adapted to
intermittently apply a traction force to the body of a patient,
and comprising a rotatably mounted drum, a length of cord
having one end wound upon said drum and an opposite end
adapted to be affixed to a traction appliance positioned on a
patient, power means for rotating said drum in either direction
to thereby selectively either wind-up or wind-down the cord
on said drum, and control means for cyclically reversing the
direction of rotation of said drum upon predetermined mini-
mum and maximum forces being present in said cord, the
improvement wherein said control means comprises
means for continuously monitoring the tension in said cord and
4,378,792
PENILE PROSTHESIS
Roy P. Finney, Tampa, FUu, assignor to Medical Engineering
Corporation, Racine, Wis.
Division of Ser. No. 150,231, May 15, 1980, Pat. No. 4,31836.
This application Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,729
Int. Q\} A61F 5/00
U.S. a. 128—79 3 Claims
JC*
30S
1. A penile implant for use in a penile prosthesis comprises an
elongated, flexible member of physiologically ineri material
having at one end a relatively shori stem adapted to be inserted
into the root end of the corpus cavemosum of a penis; a distal
tip adapted to be implanted in the corpus cavemosum of the
pendulous penis at the other end; a pair of axially aligned
chambers intermediate said stem and said tip, the first of said
chambers being collapsible and located adjacent the stem and
the second of said chambers being non-distensible and located
adjacent the tip, both of said chambers being substantially
filled with liquid and separated by a dividing wall having an
opening for communication between said chambers and lock-
ing means for holding said first chamber in a collapsed condi-
tion.
76
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,378,793
REMOVABLE ANKLE BRACE
Donald M. M auldin, and Richard E. Jones, III, both of Dallas,
Tex., assignors to Kenneth D. Driver, Dallas and Melvin L.
Stills, Lewisville, both of, Tex., part interest to each
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,966
Int. a.3 A61F 3/00
U.S. a. 128—80 H 3 Qaims
first pKJrtion thereof and being curved inwardly to conform
to the calf of the patient;
each side member further including a layer of foam padding
secured to the inside surface thereof and extending upwardly
along the inner surfaces of the second and third portions of
the metal ankle stay and the thermoplastic ankle piece; and
fastening means for securing the shoe and the side members to
the foot and the calf of the patient, respectively.
92 -
^
I '
te
1^
- 92
1 ,
9?'
I
le-
i
gs
y
— 92
»4 -
A.
~V — "0
;• /.^^' ' '°«
ti
if^>A^^
1. A removable ankle brace for stabilizing the ankle of pa-
tient comprising:
a rigid shoe having a planar upper surface for engaging the sole
of the patient's foot, side walls extending perpendicularly to
the upper surface and downwardly therefrom, and an outer
sole comprising the lowermost surface of the shoe;
the outer sole of the shoe having a fulcrum, a planar first
portion extending rearwardly from the fulcrum to the heel
of the shoe and a second portion comprising a continuous
curve extending from the fulcrum upwardly and forwardly
to the toe of the shoe;
means for locating the foot of the patient on the planar upper
surface of the shoe with the metatarsal pomt of the foot
positioned forward of the fulcrum so that the shoe normally
sets on the planar first portion of the outer sole and pivots
about the fulcrum onto the curved second portion as the
weight of the patient shifts forward of the metatarsal point of
the foot;
left and right side members positioned on opposite sides of the
shoe and each including a thermoplastic side piece and a
metal ankle stay;
the metal ankle stay of each side member engaging the adjacent
side wall of the shoe and extending upwardly therefrom
beyond the ankle of the patient;
the thermoplastic side piece of each side member surround-
ing the metal ankle stay thereof on the front, on the out-
side, and on the rear and extending upwardly from the
shoe in contact with the metal ankle stay;
means securing the metal ankle stay of each side member to the
side piece thereof;
a plurality of fasteners extending through the metal ankle stay
and the thermoplastic side piece of each side member and
into the adjacent side wall of the shoe for rigidly securing
the side members to the shoe;
the metal ankle stay and the thermoplastic side piece of each
side member comprising a first p>ortion secured to the side
wall of the shoe, a second portion extending from the upper
end of the first portion angularly upwardly and outwardly
with respect thereto and a third portion extending upwardly
from the upper end of the second portion substantially paral-
lel to the first portion;
the metal ankle stay of each side member terminating at the
upper end of the third portion thereof;
the thermoplastic side piece of each side member further in-
cluding a fourth portion extending from the end of the third
portion ahgularly upwardly and inwardly with respect
thereto and a fifth portion extending upwardly from the
upper end of the fourth portion generally parallel to the first
and third portions;
the fifth portion of each side piece being positioned over the
4,378,794
SURGICAL DRAPE
Robert F. Collins, Barrington, III., assignor to The Kendall
Company, Boston, Mass.
Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,189
Int. a.^ A61F li/00
U.S. a. 128—132 D 7 Qaims
vzj rl6b
-c
J2
/
36 a
• ^TT -1.,/ /, V ,_.
f-^ A/hi.
1. A surgical drape, comprising:
a main sheet of flexible material having a pair of side edges,
a pair of end edges connecting said side edges, a fenestra-
tion, an opening located intermediate said fenestration and
one of said end edges, and a pair of generally aligned fold
lines extending between said side edges and defining a flap
secured to an underlying portion of the main sheet, with a
lower edge of the opening being located adjacent a lower
portion of the flap such that the flap overlies a lower
portion of the opening, with the flap having an upper edge
and defining a cavity facing toward the fenestration, and
with an upper portion of the opening being located inter-
mediate the upper edge of the flap and the fenestration;
and
a fluid pervious screen covering said opening.
4,378,795
FLUID CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
Leonard J. Feathers, Henfleld, and Peter M. Ely, Pulborough,
both of England, assignors to Chubb Panorama Limited, Sus-
sex, England
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,627
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 16, 1980,
8012581
Int. a.3 A62B 7/00
U.S. a. 128—202.27 5 Claims
1. A fluid connector assembly comprising a tlrst fluid-con-
ducting member defining a tubular spigot; a second fluid-con-
ducting member defining a socket for said spigot and into
which said spigot fits in fluid-tight manner; the second fluid-
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
77
conducting member including a pair of passages extending
chordwise through said second fluid-conducting member on
opposite sides of said socket with a portion of each said pass-
sage intersecting the socket; and a generally U-shaped locking
clip having a pair of legs joined by a base portion; said legs
being received respectively within said passages and being
arranged to be slid longitudinally through the passages be-
tween a flrst position in which a portion of each leg lies within
the aforesaid portion of the respective said passage so as to
intrude chordwise into said socket, and a second position in
which the legs are withdrawn from such intrusion; said spigot
being configured externally with recessed portions which are
juxtaposed to the said portions of said passages when the spigot
is inserted into the socket so as to receive said |x>rtions of the
legs of the locking clip to prevent withdrawal of the spigot
from the socket when said legs are slid from said second to said
first position; and the second fluid-conducting member being
further provided with a formation extending generally perpen-
dicularly to said passages which formation presents an inclined
face followed by a recess so as to be engaged by the base
portion of the locking clip with a snap action when said legs
are slid from their second to their first position, thereby to
retain the legs in their first position.
4,378,796
ENDO-TRACHEAL OR TRACHEOTOMIC TUBE WITH
SHIELD FOR ANAESTHESIA
Alain Milhaud, Amiens, France, assignor to FORGES Societe
Anonyme, Paris, France
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,488
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 17, 1981, 81 07820
Int. a.3 A61M 25/00
U.S. a. 128—207.15 2 Oaims
1. A tracheal device for anesthesia comprising:
a flexible tubular assembly having a distal end adapted to be
positioned within the trachea of a patient and a proximal
end positioned outside the body of said patient;
an inflatable balloon carried on and encircling said tubular
assembly adjacent its distal end, said balloon being
adapted to be extended by fluid pressure into sealing
contact with the trachea;
a thermal shield adapted to be positioned within the trachea,
said shield comprising a flexible generally circular heat-
resisting disc substantially coaxial with and transversely
aflixed to said tubular assembly at a point adjacent said
balloon between said balloon and said proximal end, said
shield having a diameter only slightly smaller than that of
the trachea, thereby effectively shielding said balloon
from damage caused by radiant heat energy directed
toward said balloon;
first conduit means in said assembly for conveying anesthesia
and ventilation gases from said proximal end to said distal
end;
second conduit means in said assembly for conveying a fluid
under pressure from said proximal end to said balloon; and
third conduit means in said assembly for conveying a stream
of inert gas from said proximal end to and through an
opening in said assembly at a point adjacent said shield
between said shield and said proximal end.
4,378,797
EXTRAVASCULAR ORCULATION OF OXYGENATED
SYNTHETIC NUTRIENTS TO TREAT TISSUE HYPOXIC
AND ISCHEMIC DISORDERS
Jewell L. Osteriiolm, Radnor, Pa., assignor to Thomas JefTerson
University, Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed Apr. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 139,886
Int. a.J A61K 31/00; A61M 5/14
U.S. CI. 604—24 7 Claims
Jf
— LiSL?
nrnm
WTCi
tumr-
I
« — nii.cwiiii
I t «i*w l«— —
,It»fMl
i-^^^Sn.
TDui
CICMCM.
-nmr
Sjmoorar
urn
Ewnsa
1. An apparatus for treating hypoxic-ischemic neurologic
tissue, comprising:
(a) a reservoir containing synthetic oxygenatable nutrient
liquid for treating hypoxic-ischemic neurologic tissue;
(b) oxygenator means for oxygenating said liquid, to pro-
duce an oxygenated liquid;
(c) cerebrospinal injection means for injecting said oxygen-
ated liquid into an extra-vascular cerebrospinal body path-
way; and
(d) cerebrospinal withdrawal means for withdrawing fluid
from said extra-vascular cerebrospinal pathway to create,
in combination with said injection means, a circulation of
said oxygenated liquid within said cerebrospinal pathway.
4,378,798
SINGLE SHOT STOCK OF ANIMAL SEMEN FOR
ARTIFiaAL INSEMINATION OF BIRDS, ESPEQALLY
TURKEYS, HENS, AND GUINEA FOWL
Betrand Cassou, Saint Symphorien les Bruyeres; Maurice Cas-
sou, and Robert Cassou, both of Rue Clemenceau, all of 61300
L'Aigle, France
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,401
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 8, 1981, 81 00196;
May 18, 1981, 81 09864
Int. a.3 A61M 7/00
U.S. a. 604—275 11 Claims
'^■i
.,fim*mm
faisi
1. A single-shot semen stock for artiflcially inseminating
poultry, comprising a flexible tube having a hollow cylindrical
poriion of diameter small enough to contain semen by capillar-
ity and presenting an inner diameter substantially greater than
its wall thickness, and a reentrant brim at an open end of said
tube and integral with said cylindrical poriion, wherein said
78
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
brim presents a free edge in direct contact with the inside of
said cyUndrical portion of the tube.
4^78,799
APPARATUS FX)R VAGINAL HYGIENE
Elizabeth C. Bernacky, 1011 Dettling Rd., Woodland Heights,
WUmington, Del. 19805
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,217
Int. a.3 A61M 7/02
U.S. a. 604—32 6 Oaims
1. A vaginal hygiene apparatus comprising in combination:
an annular cushion having a resilient inner core and an outer
fluid repellant skin and a cut-away portion;
a movable base adjacent said cushion and said cut-away
portion, a fluid container mounted on said base, at an
adjustable, predetermined angle, said container having a
Hrst, shaped orifice and a movable elongated fluid injec-
tion member extending through said shaped orifice having
fluid conduit means connected to said fluid injection mem-
ber and directed through a second opening in said fluid
container.
4,378,800
DISPOSABLE DIAPER
Charles H. Schaar, Lake Zurich, Ill;> assignor to Colgate-Pal-
molive Company, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 410,375, Oct. 29, 1973, Pat. No. 4,100,921.
This application Feb. 17, 1977, Ser. No. 769,547
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 18,
1995, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61F n/16
U.S. a. 604—390 10 Qaims
16'
T
32
-10
A ,30
-f -r -^ ■» -f '-r -r ^^ -r t
34
1. A tape fastener system in combination with a disposable
diaper of the type which comprises an absorbent core inter-
posed between a fluid-pervious body-contacting cover sheet
and a fluid-impervious backing sheet, said tape fastener system
comprised of a composite tape formed from two strips of
flexible sheet material coated with pressure-sensitive adhesive
on one surface and a release coating on the other surface, said
strips being longitudinally aligned and joined to each other at
a narrow zone of overlap with the adhesive surfaces of the
overlapped strips being in contact at the zone of overlap to
form a permanent bond, one end portion of the composite tape
adjacent the overlap zone having its adhesive dispoised on the
face of the composite tape opposite from that face of the com-
posite tape on which the adhesive of the other end portion is
disposed, the first end portion of said composite tape being
secured by said adhesive to the cover sheet of said diaper at
one comer adjacent the diaper edge, and the second end por-
tion of said composite tape being adapted to extend beyond the
edge of the diaper for use in fastening the diaper around the
waist.
4,378,801
ELECTROSURGICAL GENERATOR
Roger L. Oosten, New Port Ritchey, Fla., assignor to Medical
Research Associates Ltd. #2, Clearwater, Fla.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 104,692, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat. No.
4,318,409. This application Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 215,046
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 9,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J A61B 17/39
U.S. a. 128—303.14 14 Claims
1. A generator for electrosurgery comprising first and sec-
ond command switches for selecting command status of opera-
tion; a command control means coupled to said first and sec-
ond command switches for preventing simultaneous activation
of said first and second command switches; a first mode switch
for selecting a mode of operation when the first command
switch is activated; a second mode switch for selecting a mode
of operation when the second command switch is activated; a
mode control means coupled to said first and second mode,
switches for determining the mode of operation indicated by
said first and second command switches and said first and
second mode switches, said command control means being
coupled to said mode control means by first and second com-
mand lines; first, second, third and fourth voltage amplifiers,
each said voltage amplifier being coupled to said mode control
means so that one of said voltage amplifiers corresponding to
the mode of operation indicated by said first and second mode
switches and said first and second command switches is acti-
vated by said mode control means; a first NAND gate having
two inputs, the inputs of said first NAND gate being coupled
respectively to the said first and second command lines; high
frequency oscillator means and low frequency oscillator means
coupled to the output of said first NAND gate so that said high
and low frequency oscillator means are activated by said first
NAND gate when either command line is activated; a three-
input NAND gate, the output of said high frequency oscillator
means being coupled to a first input of said three-input NAND
gate, the output of said low frequency oscillator means com-
prising a duty cycle interrupt signal and being coupled to a
second input of said three-input NAND gate, variable fre-
quency divider means, the output of said high frequency oscil-
lator means also being coupled to said variable frequency
divider means, said variable frequency divider means also
being coupled to the output of said mode control means, the
output of said variable frequency divider means being coupled
to the third input of said three-input NAND gate and compris-
ing a waveform interrupt signal comprised of a high voltage
portion and a low voltage portion, the wave-length of said
waveform interrupt signal being an integer multiple of the
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
79
wave-length of the output of said high frequency oscillator
means, the ratio of the length of said high voluge portion to
the length of said low voltage portion being altered by said
variable frequency divider means corresponding to the mode
of operation indicated by said flrst and second mode switches
and said first and second command switches; a voltage con-
trolled main amplifier means, the output of said three-input
NAND gate being coupled to the input of said voltage con-
trolled main amplifier means and comprising groups of pulses,
said voyage controlled main amplifier means including means
for selectively increasing the amplitude of a pulse of each said
group of pulses from said three-input NAND gate, said voltage
controlled main amplifier means being coupled to said first,
second, third and fourth voltage amplifiers so that said voltage
amplifiers control the output level of said voltage controlled
main amplifier means; a DC voltJl|e supply and an isolation
transformer means, the output of said voltage controlled main
amplifier means being coupled through the primary winding of
said isolation transformer means to said DC voltage supply,
said isolation transformer means having first and second sec-
ondary windings, the side taps of said first secondary winding
being coupled through first and second blocking capacitors,
respectively, to first and second output terminals for monopo-
lar operation, one side tap of said second secondary winding
being coupled through a third blocking capacitor to a third
terminal for bipolar operation, the other side tap of said second
secondary winding being coupled directly to a fourth output
terminal for bipolar operation.
4,378,802
SEPTAL SPLINT
Robert A. Ersek, 2300 Cypress Point West, Austin, Tex. 78746
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,963
Int. a.3 A61B 77/00
U.S. a. 128—346 2 Oaims
1. A septal splint for post-operative bilateral support of a
human nasal septum comprising a resilient clip member, a pair
of plate members sized for insertion in a patient's nostrils, and
fastening' means securing the plate members to the clip mem-
ber,
said clip member comprising a strip of resilient material formed
as a central loop and having a pair of flat parallel struts
extending in the same direction from the loop for a distance
related to the length of the human nasal septum, and having
spaced apposed inner surfaces, said struts being provided
with drainage holes,
said plate members being of thin rigid material which is benign
and non-adherent to human mucosa, and being formed with
fields of drainage holes communicating with said drainage
^ holes in said struts,
said fastening means securing said plate members to the inner
faces of said struts,
and the spacing between said plate members and the resilience
of said clip member being such that when said plate members
are inserted into the nostrils of a patient, said plate members
engage the sides of the nasal septum with a continuous pres-
sure less than capillary blood pressure.
4,378,803
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG ANTITHROMBOGENIC
VINYL ACETATT POLYMER OR HYDROLYZATE
THEREOF
Kunihiko Takagi, Kyoto, and Yasunori Yabushita,
Yamatotakada, both of Japan, assignors to Unitika, Ltd.,
Hyogo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 43,601, May 29, 1979, abandoned. This
application Not. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,360
Claims priority, application Japan, May 27, 1978, 53-63660
Int. a.5 A61M 25/00: C08F 8/30, 8/32
U.S. a. 604—280 29 Qaims
1. A process for producing an antithrombogenic hydrolyzed
ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer containing about 3 to 45
weight % vinyl acetate and about 97 to 55 weight % ethylene
which comprises treating a water-insoluble hydrolyzed ethy-
lene-vinyl acetate copolymer containing about 3 to 45 weight
% vinyl acetate and about 97 to 55 weight % ethylene in the
form of a shaped article with a solution of a fibrinolytic enzyme
so as to fix the enzyme to the copolymer wherein the hydro-
lyzed vinyl acetate copolymer contains a reactive functional
group capable of forming a covalent bond with the fibrinolytic
enzyme and the enzyme is fixed to the copolymer through
covalent bonding,
said reactive functional group being selected from the group
consisting of
(A) an isocyanate group which has been introduced there-
into by treating the hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl acetate
copolymer with a polyisocyanate,
(B) an epoxy group which has been introduced thereinto by
treating the hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer
with a polyepoxide,
(C) a formyl group which has been introduced thereinto by
treating the hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer
with a polyaldehyde,
(D) an acid chloride group which has been introduced there-
into by treating the hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl acetate
copolymer with an acid chloride,
(E) a carboxylic acid anhydride group which has been intro-
duced thereinto by treating the hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl
acetate copolymer with a polycarboxylic acid anhydride,
(F) an amino group which has been introduced thereinto by
treating the hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer
with an amino acetal, and
(G) an amino group which has been introduced thereinto by
first treating the hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl acetate co-
polymer with a polyfunctional reagent having at least two
functional groups capable of reacting with both a hydroxy
group and amino group and then treating the copolymer
with a polyamine, said polyfunctional reagent being se-
lected from the group consisting of a polyisocyanate, a
polyepoxide, a polycarboxylic acid anhydride, a polyalde-
hyde and a polyacid chloride.
8. A process for producing an antithrombogenic hydrolyzed
ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer containing about 3 to 45
weight % vinyl acetate and about 97 to 55 weight % ethylene
which comprises treating a water-insoluble hydrolyzed ethy-
lene-vinyl acetate copolymer containing about 3 to 45 weight
% vinyl acetate and about 97 to 55 weight % ethylene in the
form of a shaped article with a solution of a fibrinolytic enzyme
so as to fix the enzyme to the copolymer wherein the hydro-
lyzed ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer contains a reactive
functional group capable of forming a covalent bond with the
fibronolytic enzyme and the enzyme is fixed to the polymer
through covalent bonding,
said reactive functional group being selected from the group
consisting of an isocyanate group, an epoxy group, a
formyl group, an acid chloride group, a carboxylic acid
anhydride group and the reactive functional group having
been introduced thereinto by treating the hydrolyzed
ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer having an amino group
with a polyfunctional reagent, selected from the group
consisting of a polyisocyanate, a polyepoxide, a polyalde-
hyde, a polyacid chloride and a polycarboxylic acid anhy-
80
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
dride, having at least two of the reactive functional groups
capable of reacting with an amino group, and
the fibrinolytic enzyme is fixed to the polymer through
covalent bonding, wherein said amino group has been
introduced:
(A) by treating the hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl acetate co-
polymer with an amino acetal; or
(B) by first treating the hydrolyzed ethylenevinyl acetate
copolymer with a polyfunctional reagent having at least
two functional groups capable of reacting with a hydroxy
group and amino group and then treating the copolymer
with a polyamine, said polyfunctional reagent being se-
lected from the group consisting of a polyisocyanate, a
polyep>oxide, a f)olycarboxylic acid anhydride, a polyalde-
hyde and a polyacid chloride.
4,378,804
FACIAL TREATMENT DEVICE
Thomas A. Cortese, Jr., 5411 E. 56th St., Indianapolis, Ind.
46226
Filed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,530
Int. a.^ A61H 7/00. 33/00
U.S. a. 128—355 _ 5 Oaims
1. A facial treatment device comprising a Venturi tube hav-
ing the mouth of the converging portion adapted for attach-
ment to a conventional bathroom water faucet, an aperture in
the throat portion of said tube and a housing overlying said
aperture, a turbine rotor mounted within said housing for
rotation on an axis transverse to the longitudinal axis of said
Venturi tube, said rotor having vanes extending through said
throat aperture whereby said rotor is rotated by water moving
through said Venturi tube, a remote facial brush operatively
connected to said turbine rotor for rotation thereby, a vacuum
controlling rotor of hollow cylindrical configuration within
said housing and connected to said turbine rotor for coaxial
rotation thereby, said housing having a suction aperture
therein, a remote suction head connected by a flexible tube to
said housing ap>erture, a plurality of apertures in said vacuum
controlling rotor longitudinally aligned with said vacuum
aperture, whereby rotation of said vacuum controlling rotor
periodically opens and closes said suction aperture to pulse the
vacuum appearing at the suction head caused by the static
pressure reduction in said housing produced by the increase in
kinetic energy of water flowing past said throat aperture.
' 4,378,805
ONE PIECE BODICE GARMENT FOR MASTECTOMY
PATIENT
D. Jeanie Reichert, W. 620 • 7th Ave., #104, Spokane, Wash.
99204; Carol S. Trottier, N. 320 Blake Rd., Spokane, Wash.
99216, and Cathy Y. Calhoon, N. 904 WUbur Rd., Spokane,
Wash. 99206
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,552
Int. a.3 A41C 1/06
U.S. a. 128—450 10 Oaims
1. A one piece bodice garment for mastectomy patients,
comprising:
an inner garment panel extending between a neckline and
a waistline;
said inner garment panel having an intermediate front breast
cup structure in which the structure has at least one breast
cup adapted to receive a breast prosthesis;
said inner garment panel having an upper panel extending
between the breast cup structure and the neckline for
engaging the patient's chest;
said inner garment panel having a lower section extending
between the breast cup structure and the waistline for
engaging the patient's abdomen;
said inner garment panel having back sections adapted to
extend to the back of the patient to engage the patient's
lower back with the back sections having means for being
interconnected to enable the inner garment panel to
snugly encircle the patient;
shoulder strap members having one end operatively con-
nected to the breast cup structure and an opposite end
operatively connected to a respective back section of the
inner garment panel and adapted to extend over the shoul-
ders of the patient to provide upward-lateral support of
the breast cup structure to secure the breast cup structure
firmly to the patient's body;
waist strap members having one end operatively connected
to the breast cup structure and an opposite interconnect-
ing end which is adapted to extend downward from the
breast cup structure and around the patient's waist to
provide downward-lateral support to the breast cup struc-
ture to secure the breast cup structure firmly to the body;
an outer garment layer affixed to the inner garment layer
along the neckline and draped downward over the under
garment panel to the waistline; and
a front neckline tension strap operatively interconnecting
the shoulder straps and supporting the upper section of the
inner garment panel and the outer garment panel along the
neckline to maintain a front portion of the neckline of the
inner garment panel and the outer garment layer taut and
to provide upward support to the breast cup structure
intermediate the shoulder strap members.
4,378,806
GAPPED RESONANT MICROWAVE APPARATUS FOR
PRODUONG HYPERTHERMIA THERAPY OF TUMORS
Julian L. Henley-Cohn, 60 Lincoln St., New Haven, Conn.
06005
FUed Aug. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 177,388
Int. a.3 A61N 5/04
U.S. a. 128—504 31 Qaims
1. An apparatus for treating biological tissue by microwave
induced hyperthermia comprising:
(a) a primary resonant source of microwave energy,
(b) a resonant microwave circuit including a pair of resonant
waveguide means coupled to said primary resonant source
to form a resonant loop having a gap between spaced ends
of said waveguide means, and wherein a dielectric loading
comprising the biological tissue to be treated is adapted to
be located within said gap, and
(c) layered dielectric means at each of said spaced ends
providing an interface between said tissue and said wave-
guide means for optimally coupling said microwave en-
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
81
ergy in opposite directions, said layered dielectric means
including a plurality of dielectric media with each dielec-
. Control
Computer
-;'
- Control
Interfoce
Po»*r
Supply
10 . \ //Micro»o»«
jX V Source
11 .11. ^Beom
NOOK Oisperset
H_J--lgMmbi»id»rj— IIH
Circuit
Tuner
trie medium providing a gradual increase in intrinsic impe-
dance in the direction of propagation of said microwave
energy.
4^78,807
BLOOD PRESSURE MEASUREMENT APPARATUS
Ronald T. Peterson, and Israel M. Stein, both of Brookline,
Mass., assignors to Clinical Data, Inc., Brookline, Mass.
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,764
Int. a.3 A61B 5/02
U.S. a. 128—677 21 Qaims
4,378,808
LIQUID CRYSTAL INnLTRATION SENSING SYSTEM
Joseph Lichtenstein, Colonia, N J., assignor to Whitman Medi-
cal Corporation, Clark, N J.
Filed Apr. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 137,741
Int. a.J A61B 6/ JO
U.S. a. 128—736 11 Claims
^11
-^^^
?- P'° ^° f^"^
1. A device for detecting infiftration of infusion fluid in
human body tissue surrounding a point of infusion into a body
vessel of a patient, said device comprising a flexible patch of
liquid crystal material, said patch having an underside which
conforms to the patient's skin at a location proximate said point
of infusion, said liquid crystal material having a variable color
versus temperature characteristic wherein the material remains
at one color when at normal human skin temperature, said
patch having a straight edge positioned closest to said point of
infusion and having comers which are all rounded, said liquid
crystal material further including an integral prescribed area
located within the confmes of the patch permanently colored
at said one color.
1. Blood pressure measurement apparatus using an inflatable
cuff which constricts an appendage of a subject whose blood
pressure is to be measured, said apparatus comprising means
for changing the pressure in the cuff, means for sensing the
auscultatory sounds from the appendage while the pressure in
the cuff is changing, means for producing a signal having an
amplitude which corresponds with the pressure in the cuff,
valve means for modulating the pressure in the cuff as the
pressure changes during the sensing of said auscultatory
sounds, and means for controlling said valve means to linearize
the change in pressure in said cuff which comprises means for
generating a reference, linear ramp signal, which starts prior to
the sensing of said auscultatory sounds, means for comparing
said reference signal with said pressure signal to produce a first
output corresponding to the difference in amplitude therebe-
tween, means for generating a train of repetitive triangular
waves each having a period much less than the duration of said
ramp signal, means for comparing such repetitive triangular
waves with said first output to produce a train of pulses, the
durations of the pulses varying in accordance with the magni-
tude and sense of deviation of said pressure signal from said
linear ramp signal, and means for applying said variable dura-
tion pulses to said valve means for of>ening and closing said
valve means in accordance with the duration of the pulses in
said pulse train such that the pressure in said cuff changes
linearly in amplitude, correspondingly with said ramp signal.
4,378,809
AUDIO-TELEMETRIC PRESSURE SENSING SYSTEMS
AND METHODS
Eric R. Cosman, Belmont, Mass. 02178
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 895,953, Apr. 13, 1978, Pat. No.
4,281,666, and Ser. No. 895,954, Apr. 13, 1978, Pat. No.
4,281,667, and Ser. No. 908,615, Jun. 12, 1981, abandoned. This
application Jun. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 161,098
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 10,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' A61B 5/00
U.S. a. 128—748 10 Claims
1. A method for detecting an in-vivo differential pressure,
said method comprising the steps of;
(a) implanting beneath the skin in a living body a differential
pressure sensor comprising:
(1) a flexible-diaphragm means having a flrst side and a
second side, the differential pressure sensor being so
adapted that when implanted in the living body the first
side of the flexible diaphragm means is in mechanical
pressure communication with a first bodily medium and
the second side of said flexible diaphragm means is in
mechanical pressure communication with a second
bodily medium, so that changes in the difference in the
pressures in said two bodily regions will cause move-
ment of said flexible diaphragm means;
(2) means located within said differential pressure sensor
and at least in part cooperatively connected to said
flexible diaphragm means having a detectable charac-
teristic response to movement of said flexible dia-
phragm means, said detectable characteristic response
being detectable by external detection apparatus which
82
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
is located outside the living body, said external detec-
tion apparatus being so adapted to convert said detect-
able characteristic response to an audible acoustic signal
that is an audible representation of the changes in the
difference in pressures on said two sides of said flexible
diaphragm means;
(b) detecting said audible acoustic signal in order to detect
variations in the difference in said two pressures on said
flexible diaphragm means and;
(c) applying an external pressure on the skin above said
implanted sensor with a controllable pressure source
while detecting said audible audio signal, and varying said
external pressure on the skin until said audible audio re-
S]X)nse indicates that said diaphragm means is at a stop
position, at which point the value of said external pressure
is in a known pressure relationship to said internal bodily
pressure to be measured.
1. An assembly especially suitable for performing biopsies on
living organs or tissue, comprising: a straight, open-ended
hollow tubular member serving as a combination probe and
guide, said tubular member including a front end section hav-
ing a substantially flat exterior surface substantially parallel
with and on one side of the longitudinal axis of the tubular
member for palpating the surface of the organ or tissue being
biopsied to detect irregularities, spaced flnger-like segments on
the opposite side of said axis from said flat surface and extend-
ing outwardly away from said flat surface substantially perpen-
dicular thereto for holding said organ or tissue in an immobile
position while a biopsy specimen is collected and an opening
into said tubular member on said opposite side and between
said flnger-like segments for gaining access through said tubu-
lar member to the organ or tissue held between said segments;
handle means connected with said tubular member for holding
the latter during performance of said biopsy; and means includ-
ing a needle which is positionable through said tubular member
for collecting said specimen.
4^78^11
SURGICAL DEVICE
Ronald Levitan, Transrial, Sooth Africa, assignor to Accurette
(Pty) Ltd^ Johannesburg, Sooth Africa
FUed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,568
Int a.' A61B 70/00. 17/22
U.S. a. 128—757 4 Claims
1. A collapsible curette capable of accurate sampling of the
uterine endometrium for the investigation and diagnosis of a
variety of gynaecological conditions, said curette comprising:
A. a tubular sleeve formed of flexible synthetic plastic mate-
rial, said sleeve having a uniform inner and outer diameter
throughout its length;
B. a piston inserted in the sleeve having a length greater than
that of the sleeve and a diameter slightly smaller than the
inner diameter of the sleeve, said piston being axially
slidable in the sleeve and being rotatable therein;
C. a collapsible sampling element which normally has a
diamond-shaped conflguration, one apex of which is inte-
gral with one end of the piston, said element being formed
of four branches, at least one of which has a cross-sec-
tional shape deflning a cutting edge to derive samples of
endometrium when the piston is rotated, the element
being collapsed into a substantially linear form and being
4,378,810
ASSEMBLY FOR PERFORMING BIOPSIES USING A
COMBINATION PROBE-GUIDE
Goro Ishizakl, and Harold R. Parker, both of Davis, Calif.,
assignors to The Regents of the University of California,
Berkeley, Calif.
FUed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,791
Int. Q\? A61B 70/00
U.S. a. 128—754 8 Claims
retractable into said sleeve when the piston is axially
withdrawn relative thereto, said piston and said element
being molded of a resilient acetal resin material which
maintains said cutting edge long after the time of molding
and which imparts to said element sufficient memory to
cause it to fully recover its normal diamond shape when
the collapsed element is axially extended by said piston;
and
D. a collar slidably mounted on said sleeve to adjust the
extent to which the sleeve is inserted in the cervical canal
of a patient under investigation.
4,378,812
DEVICES FOR SAMPLING BLOOD
Walter Sarstedt, Niimbrecht, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kunststoff-Spritzgubwerk, Niimbrecht, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,1$1
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 4,
1979, 2948653
Int. a.J A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 128—765 13 Claims
1. A blood sampling device comprising:
a cylindrical sampling tubule having front and rear ends;
a piston displacable in air tight manner in said sampling
tubule;
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
83
a closure cap having a circumference, said closure cap being
removably fitted to said front end of said cylindrical sam-
pling tubule;
an axially projecting tubular extension provided on said cap;
a passage in said closure cap in communication with said
extension;
a piercable, self-sealing closure plug inserted in said exten-
sion;
a guide sleeve having a diameter with an open end and a
closed end, said guide sleeve being axially movable on said
extension, a space separating a portion of said guide sleeve
from said closure cap;
a cannula having sharpened front and rear ends mounted in
the closed end of said guide sleeve and axially aligned
with said guide sleeve, said sharpened front end projecting
forwardly from said guide sleeve for introduction into a
patient and said sharpened rear end projecting rearwardiy
into said guide sleeve so that it can puncture said closure
plug during relative axial movement between said guide
sleeve and said extension; and
means for venting the space between said guide sleeve and
said extension.
I 4^78,813
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOVING A PROBE TO
FOLLOW MOVEMENTS OF TISSUE
Alan M. Lovelace, Admiaistrator of the National Aeronautics
and Space Administration, with respect to an invention of;
Cyril Feldstein, late of Sierra Madre, Calif.; Thomas W.
Alidrews, Pasadena, Calif.; Donald W. Crawford, and Mark
A. Cole, both of Long Beach, Calif.
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,957
Int. a.' A61B 5/W
U.S. a. 128—774 8 Oaims
1. Apparatus for use with a probe, to move the probe to
follow moving tissue, comprising:
a servo positioner which includes a frame, a servo member
moveably positioned on said frame, a distance sensor
means for sensing change of distance to a sensed object
and which generates a signal indicating change of distance
to said sensed object, said sensor means mounted on said
servo member to move with it, and means responsive to
said sensor means for moving said servo member to main-
tain a substantially constant distance from the sensed
object;
a follower assembly which includes a follower having a
sensed object near said distance sensor means to be sensed
by said sensor means and having a tissue engaging member
positioned remote from said sensed object to engage tis-
sue, so that the servo member is directed to follow move-
ments of remotely located tissue, and guide means for
guiding movement of said follower toward and away from
said sensor means; and
a probe holder having an inner end mounted on said servo
member to move with it, and having an outer end for
holding the probe at the tissue.
4,378,814
HAIR CURLING DEVICE
Humberto Quevedo, 323 W. 43rd St., New York, N.Y. 10036
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,861
Int. a.3 A45D 2/00
UJS. a. 132—40 8 Claims
1. A device for imparting curls to a strand of hair compris-
mg:
a longitudinally extending body around which said strand of
hair may be wrapped, said body having a non-uniformed
cross section along its length, said body including an
intermediate member having a generally oblate spheroid
configuration, and a pair of generally cylindrical portions
extending axially away from the opposed ends of said
intermediate member, said generally cylindrical portions
each having a cross sectional diameter less than the cross
sectional diameter of said intermediate member; and
means for maintaining said strand of hair in a fixed position
relative to said body, whereby in use said strand of hair is
wound around said body in a helical manner along the
length of said body, said hair being affixed to said body by
said maintaining means such that the diameter of succes-
sive turns of said strands varies and such that when said
maintaining means is released and said strand is unwound
from said body, curls having various curvatures will be
formed along the length of said strand.
4,378,815
PRESSURE CONTROL DEVICE WITH A FLUID
DISCHARGE PREVENTION MECHANISM
Hanio Mochida, and Michiaki Sasaki, both of Yokohama, Ja-
pan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,001
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 7, 1980, 55-44638
Int. a.3 F16K 17/36
U.S. a. 137^43 5 Claims
1. A pressure control device with a fluid discharge preven-
tion mechanism, which comprises:
/
84
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
(a) a vessel body having a tank-communicating port;
(b) a lid having an atmosphere-communicating port, said lid
being fixed to said vessel body to define a valve housing
chamber;
(c) a valve body having a weight housing chamber opening
upwards to form a conical surface valve seat and a fuel
discharge prevention valve housing chamber opening
downwards to provide a flat valve seat, both valve seats
being communicated with each other through a through
hole, the top circumferential surface of said valve body
being brought into contact with the inner surface of said
lid when the pressure in the tank rises above a predeter-
mined value, and is kept apart from the inner surface
thereof to introduce atmospheric pressure thereinto when
the pressure falls below a predetermined value;
(d) a weight housed in the weight housing chamber formed
in said valve body so as to be brought into contact with
the conical valve seat when the pressure in the tank is
below a predetermined value and be kept apart therefrom
against its weight when the pressure therein is above a
predetermined value;
(e) a fuel discharge prevention valve housed in the fuel
discharge prevention valve housing chamber formed in
said valve body; and
(0 a connecting member connecting said weight and said
fuel discharge prevention valve integrally, said connect-
ing member being placed through the through hole
formed in said valve body, said fuel discharge prevention
valve being urged against the flat valve seat formed in said
valve body to prevent fluid from being discharged when
said weight is moved on said conical seat formed in said
valve body by action of gravity on said weight in case the
pressure control device is inclined or overturned, or cen-
trifugal force is applied to the device,
whereby the pressure within the tank is regulated within a
predetermined range and fuel discharge is prevented even
in abnormal conditions.
4^78,816
HYDRAULIC PRIORITY VALVE
Joachim Peiffer, M eerbusch, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Integral Hydraulik & Co., Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,406
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 24,
1979, 2952369
Int. a.' G05D 16/10
U.S. a. 137—116 7 Qaims
surized, said hydraulic priority valve having protecting means
for protecting both loops from excess pressure comprising a
pressure-limiting valve which functions to make an outlet flow
path available when pressure is excessive;
the improvement wherein the priority valve is a sequence
valve in a structural module with the pressure-limiting
valve, having a valve element means with a hydraulic
fluid interface surface which valve element means acts
against the force of a resistance means, said valve element
means being permanently pressurized from the pressure
medium source,
whereby when a first given pressure is attained a first pres-
sure medium flow path is opened from a pressure connec-
tion which is upstream of the flow control means to a first
consuming device connection which is linked to the sec-
ondary loop, said first pressure medium flow path being
activated by the movement of the valve element means,
whereby when a second higher given pressure is attained a
second pressure medium flow path is opened by a valve
member acted upon by the pressure medium, to direct the
pressure medium to an outlet connection and back to the
tank, said second pressure medium flow path being acti-
vated by a further movement of the valve element means
in the same direction, and
whereby after at least the first given pressure is attained, the
valve element has been moved sufficiently to permit a
permanent link between the pressure medium source and
the first consuming device connection so that when the
second given pressure is attained the secondary loop is
linked to said outlet connection in addition to being linked
to the primary loop; and
wherein the flow control means is a check valve, the valve
element means is a slideable control piston having an end
face opposite to the resistance means which is a return
spring, the hydraulic interface surface comprising at least
said end face in the control piston, and the pressure me-
dium is hydraulic fluid; whereby when the first given
pressure is attained, the end face passes a first control edge
and as a result opens up a flow path from a second bore
hole which accommodates the control piston and a third
bore hole which is connected to the pressure medium
source, to a ring-shaped groove located in the second bore
hole which is linked to a first consuming-device connec-
tion; whereby an inner blind hole extending inwardly
from the end face into the control piston is linked via
transverse hole means to the outer surface of the control
piston at the bottom of the inner blind hole, so that when
the second given pressure is attained, the transverse hole
means moves into fluid communication with a first bore
hole which is linked to the outlet connection.
1. In a hydraulic priority valve for preferential feeding of a
low consumption primary loop in fluid communication with a
hydraulic accumulator which is chargeable from a pressure
medium source via a flow control means, against a non-prefer-
ential secondary loop which can be switched in with the aid of
said priority valve when said prinjary loop is sufficiently pres-
4,378,817
SLIDE VALVE ASSEMBLY
James L. Houston, Broken Arrow, Okla., assignor to Superior
Valve Corporation, Tulsa, Okla.
per No. PCrAJS81/00379, § 371 Date Jul. 6, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 6, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO82/03258, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 30, 1982
PCT Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 310,233
Int. a.3 F16K 3/16, 25/00
U.S. a. 137—315 6 Qaims
1. A slide valve comprising:
a body having a throat allowing fluid passage therethrough,
an annular shoulder within the body including passage
means communicating with the throat,
a side portion extending transversely from the body and
having an interior space communicating with the throat,
a valve seat member removably positionable upon the shoul-
der,
a guide member removably positionable within the body
adjacent the shoulder, extending into the side portion,
a closure member positionable slidably upon the guide mem-
ber for opening and closing the passage means, and
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
8S
a wedge member positionably adjustable between a portion
of the seat member and the guide member and slidably
upon the seat member portion and the guide member to
maintain close critical adjustment of the closure member
in reference to the seat member, as well as the adjustment
of the guide member, and wherein the wedge member is
adjustable from exteriorly of the valve body without
disassembling the valve elements.
4^78,818 i
WELL DRILLING FLOAT VALVE
Arthur J. Cormier, Jr., 122 Downing, Laftiyette, La. 70506
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,566
Int. a.3 F16K 21/04
U.S. a. 137—523 11 Qaims
4,378,819
DETACHABLE CONNECTION ARRANGEMENT FOR A
SHED FORMING DEVICE OF A LOOM
Helmut Macho, Constance, Fed. Rep. of Germany, anignor to
Aktiengesellschaft Adolph Saurer, Arbon, Switzerland
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 184,939
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 26, 1979,
8670/79
Int. C\? D03C 9/06
U.S. a. 139—88 7 Qaims
A float valve comprising:
a valve body having a flow bore therethrough;
a valve seat on said valve body at said bore;
a flapper valve pivotally mounted on said valve body
between fully open flow and fully closed flow positions,
with said flapper valve sealing said seat in the fully closed
position;
spring means cooperatively connected to the valve body
and flapper valve for urging the flapper valve toward the
fully closed position;
pre-settable catch means carried by and movably mounted
upon the flapper valve between engaged and disengaged
positions for preventing movement of the flapper valve to
the fully closed position when the catch means desirably
occupies the engaged position as so pre-set, the flapper
valve thus assuming a partially open position responsive to
both urging of the spring means and the pre-set engaged
positioning of the catch means; and
biasing means associated with the catch means for biasing
the catch means to the disengaged position when the
flapper valve moves from the partially open position to
the fully open position, the flapper valve being movable to
the fully closed position when the catch means is disen-
gaged. I
1. A detachable connection arrangement between a harness
and a harness lever arrangement of a shed forming device of a
loom, comprising:
a lifter means hingedly connected with the harness lever
arrangement;
a coupling element supported at an end of said lifter means
located at the region of the harness;
a counter coupling element provided at the harness with
which form-lockingly engages said coupling element;
said coupling element comprises a connection block having
at least two substantially parallel surfaces;
means for supporting said connection block at the lifter
means;
said counter coupling element comprising a substantially
C-shaped claw member fixedly connected with the har-
ness;
said claw member having inner leg surfaces deflning support
surfaces for the connection block;
resihently-biased latching means provided for said claw
member; and
said resiliently-biased latching means releasably retaining the
connection block in the claw member and being effective
in a predetermined direction of force application.
4,378,820
APPARATUS FOR BEATING-UP WEFT THREAD IN
TRAVELLING WAVE SHEDDING LOOMS
Valerian P. Lileer, ulitsa Nagomaya, 46/48, korpus 20, kv. 2:
Eduard A. Onikov, ulitsa Paaferova, 5, korpus 2, kv. 106, and
Alexandr A. Zabotin, ulitsa ProfMJuznaya, 96, k?. 85, all of
Moscow, U.S.S.R.
FUed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 195,985
Int. a.3 D03D 47/26
U.S. a. 139—436 5 Claims
1, An apparatus for beating-up weft thread in a traveling
wave shedding loom, comprising: a stationary reed for divid-
ing warp threads; a rotary shaft; plates secured to said shaft;
combs defined by said plates and arranged helically along said
shaft; said plates of at least one comb being made and arranged
1029 O.G.-
86
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
relative to plates of other combs in such a manner that, during
rotation of the shaft, the plane of revolution of at least a portion
of each plate of the comb is displaced along the shaft away
from the plane of revolution of plates of other combs.
4^78,821
WEFT DETAINING DEVICE OFSHUTTLELESS LOOM
Hidetsugo Umezawa, Narahashi, Japan, assignor to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,714
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 27, 1980, 55-86497;
Aug. 15, 1980, 55-111776
Int. a.3 D03D 47/36
U.S. Q. 139—452 16 Claims
ZPrV""tl_0='
1. A weft detaining device of a shuttleless loom having a
weft inserting nozzle for picking a weft yam from a weft
source, comprising:
a stationary drum formed oh its peripheral surface with first
and second holes, said first hole being located farther from
the weft inserting nozzle than said second hole in the axial
direction of said drum;
a weft wind-guide member located near the peripheral surface
of said drum and rotatable around the drum peripheral sur-
face in timed relation to the operational cycle of the loom to
guide the weft yam between the weft inserting nozzle and
the weft source to be wound around the peripheral surface
of said drum;
first and second hook levers located outside of said drum and
formed tespectively with first and second hook sections
which are capable of projecting respectively into said first
and second holes of said drum to catch the weft yam on the
drum peripheral surface so as to prevent the weft yam from
moving, a predetermined length of the weft yam for each
weft picking being detained between said projected first and
second hook sections; and
means for causing said first and second hook sections to project
respectively into the first and second holes of the drum at
predetermined timings in timed relation to the operational
cycle of the loom.
4,378,822
SPIRAL BINDING MACHINE FOR SPIRALLY FEEDING
A SPIRAL BINDING ELEMENT
Leslie J. Morris, Famham, England, assignor to Morris Broth-
ers (Aldershot) Limited, Aldershot, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 129,702, Mar. 12, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,449
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 19, 1979,
7909603; Aug. 24, 1979, 7929491
Int. a.3 B21F 45/16
U.S. a. 140—92.3 13 Claims
4 '" "5
1. A spiral binding machine for spirally feeding a spiral
binding element, said machine comprising: a fixed structure, a
stationary mandrel supported on said fixed structure for sup-
f)oriing a spiral binding element received thereon; a driving
wheel mounted in said machine for rotating a spiral binding
element on said mandrel by gripping said element between the
periphery of said driving wheel and said mandrel, the periph-
ery of said driving wheel being frictionally engagable with said
element; a single suppori pin connected to said mandrel and by
which the mandrel is supported on said fixed structure, said
mandrel having a plain ungrooved cylindrical external surface,
said pin extending between adjacent tums of the spiral binding
element for, in operation of the machine, being in direct
contact with a turn of the element and providing the entire
axial reaction contact of the machine with the element; said
machine having an open unobstructured space on the opposite
side of said pin from said driving wheel for accommodating
different size spiral binding elements; and means for rotating
said driving wheel.
4,378,823
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNTWISTING AND
CUTTING TWISTED CABLE
Richard W. Normann, Otego, and Paul D. NUes, Bainbridge,
both of N.Y., assignors to The Bendix Corporation, South-
field, Mich.
FUed Apr. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 137,167
Int. a.J B21F 1/02
U.S. a. 140—139 25 Claims
1. An apparatus for untwisting and shearing a length of
twisted conductive strands, the apparatus comprising:
first and second strand receivers having front and rear sur-
faces and guide bores for receiving the strands, each of the
guide bores being sized to receive one conductive strand
and having an opening on the front surface of its respec-
tive strand receiver with the guide bores in said first
strand receiver converging from their openings to a com-
mon pwint sized to receive the twisted conductive strands
and the guide bores in said second strand receiver diverg-
ing from their openings, said bores and openings being in
alignment when the strand receivers are located in a first
position;
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
87
means for locating the front surfaces of said strand receivers
in spaced facing relationship and disposing the bores in
their first position; and
means for displacing one strand receiver with respect to the
other strand receiver so as to displace the bore openings
from their first position to a second position where the
4^78^25
LOG SPLITTER
Edward M. Schroeder, R.R. Box 158, Chapin, 111. 62628
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,305
Int a.J B27L 7/00
UJS. a. 144—193 R 18 Cbdm
bore openings are nonaligned, said twisted conductive
strands being constrained into said bores upon being urged
against said common point, untwisted when passed
through the bores radiating outwardly therefrom and into
the bores in the other receiver and sheared when the
receivers are moved.
Carder
4,378,824
FLUID DISPENSING NOZZLE
Mervin L. Carder, Sr., Fenton, Mo., assignor to M.
Industries, Incorporated, Fenton, Mo.
FUed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,817
Int a.3 B65B 57/04
U.S. a. 141—206 16 Qaims
10. A fluid dispensing nozzle including a casing defining a
flow passage having an inlet and an outlet; a main valve in said
casing for selectively opening and closing said flow passage,
said main valve including a valve stem slidably mounted in said
casing; an automatic high-level shut-off means for shutting said
main valve in response to fllling of a tank or the like with said
fluid, said shut-off means including a plunger slidably mounted
in said casing, a hole extending transversely through said
plunger at a lower end thereof; a manually operable lever
engaging said valve stem for operating said main valve, said
lever including a pair of side walls straddling said lower end of
said plunger; openings extending through said pair of side
walls of said lever in register with said hole in said plunger; a
pivot pin extending through said hole in said plunger and said
openings in said lever, said pivot pin pivotally mounting said
plunger to a forward end of said lever; and a hand guard, side
walls of said hand guard extending around each end of said
lever on both transverse sides of said lever, characterized by a
yoke, said yoke including a pair of legs extending between said
side walls of said lever and said side walls of said hand guard,
said yoke being constructed and arranged to prevent applica-
tion to said plunger, adjacent said hole through said plunger, of
a substantial bending moment sufficient to break said plunger
by transverse motion of said lever.
M •' M
1. A log splitter comprising:
(a) a frame which supports the parts of said log splitter;
(b) means for penetrating a log which exerts force against
said log;
(c) means for holding said log against the force exerted upon
said log by said means for penetrating said log;
(d) a handle pivotally mounted at a flrst end to said frame
and manually moved in an arcuate path at a second end;
(e) a sheave rotatably mounted on said frame and driven in
rotational motion by said handle when said handle is
manually moved in said arcuate path;
(0 a drive cable attached at a flrst end to said sheave so that
said drive cable is wound onto said sheave as said sheave
is driven in said rotational motion, thereby providing said
force between means for penetrating said log and said
means for holding said log;
whereby arcuate motion of said handle rotates said sheave
causing said drive cable to wind about the exterior surface
of said sheave and said winding causes the distance be-
tween said means for penetrating said log and said means
for holding said log to decrease, thereby exerting com-
pressive force upon said log and causing said means for
penetrating said log to penetrate said log and solit said log.
4,378,826
HYDRAULIC LOG SPLITTER
Michael E. Beach, East Troy, Wis., assignor to Didier Corpora-
tion, Franksrille, Wis.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,954
Int. a.3 B27L 7/00
U.S. a. 144—193 A 2 Claims
1. A log splitter comprising,
a beam,
a splitting wedge mounted at one end of the beam,
a butt plate fued on the other end of the beam,
a hydraulic ram including a tie rod cylinder in which tie rods
interconnect the cylinder head and the piston rod end
head,
the piston rod end of said ram being mounted on said plate
by said tie rods with the cylinder head projecting away
from the beam.
88
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
a push plate connected to the piston rod of said ram to push
logs resting on the beam against said wedge.
4^78,827
VENEER LATHE LUG CHARGER SYSTEM HAVING
ENHANCED ACCURACY AND RATE OF PRODUCTION
Kenneth L. Shnim, Glide, and Donald L. Trax, Roseburg, both
of Oreg., assignors to Sun Studs, Inc., Roseburg, Oreg.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,017
Int. a.3 B27L 5/02
U.S. a. 144—209 A 3 Qaims
1. A charger for a veneer lathe comprising:
(a) scanning means for sensing the shape of a log for deter-
mining the location of the longitudinal axis of the log for
optimum production of veneer;
(b) adjustmg means responsive to said scanning means for
moving said log so as to align said longitudinal axis of said
log with a reference axis;
(c) said adjusting means including a frame and slidable means
for sliding with respect to said frame so as to move said
log, further including bearing means interposed between
said frame and said slidable means for guiding said slidable
means relative to said frame, said bearing means being
movable with respect to said frame toward said slidable
means in a transverse direction relative to the sliding
direction of said slidable means; and
(d) means for exerting a predetermined fluid pressure on said
bearing means for forcing said bearing means against said
slidable means in said transverse direction.
condition comprising a top wall for providing a work surface
when the workbench is in its unfolded condition; side walls
extending downwardly from said top wall when the work-
bench is in its unfolded condition; leg panels movable from an
open position for supporting the workbench in its unfolded
condition to a closed position when the workbench is in its
folded condition; a tool carrier movable from a storage posi-
tion when said workbench is in its folded condition to an
operative position when said workbench is in its unfolded
condition; a storage space for maintaining said tool carrier in
its storage position when said workbench is in its folded condi-
tion, said storage space deflned by said top wall, side walls and
leg panels; and means for maintaining said tool carrier in its
operative position, when said workbench is in its unfolded
condition.
4,378,828
COMBINED COLLAPSIBLE WORKBENCH AND
REMOVABLE TOOL CARRIER
James Shiminski, Sheffield, Mass., assignor to Stanley Zilka,
Monterey, Mass., a part interest
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,507
Int. a.5 B65D 85/54
U.S. a. 144—285 8 Qaims
4,378,829
VENEER LATHE LOG CHARGER SYSTEM HAVING
ENHANCED ACCURACY AND RATE OF PRODUCTION
Fred Sohn, Roseburg, Oreg., assignor to Sun Studs, Inc., Rose-
burg, Oreg.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,711
Int. CV B27L 5/02
U.S. a. 144—357 8 Qaims
1. A collapsible workbench with a removable tool carrier
adapted to be moved from a folded condition to an unfolded
1. A charger for a veneer lathe comprising:
(a) log engagement means for engaging opposing ends of an
elongate log;
(b) final scanning means for sensing the shape of said log
while it is engaged by said log engagement means for
determining the location of the longitudinal axis of the log
for optimum production of veneer;
(c) transfer means for transferring said log from said log
engagement means to a position wherein said longitudinal
axis of said log is aligned with the rotational axis of said
veneer lathe;
(d) preliminary scanning means for sensing the shape of said
log for determining the location of a preliminary longitu-
dinal axis of said log for optimum production of veneer;
and
(e) final scanner loading means responsive to said prelimi-
nary scanning means for transferring said log from said
preliminary scanning means to a position wherein said
preliminary longitudinal axis of said log is in a predeter-
mined alignment with respect to said log engagement
means.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
89
4^78,830
VENEER LATHE LOG CHARGER SYSTEM HAVING
ENHANCED ACCURACY AND RATE OF PRODUCTION
David E. Itkin, Eugene, Oreg., assignor to Sun Studs, Inc.,
Roseburg, Oreg.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,018
< Int. a.3 B27L 5/02
U.Sf. a. 144—357 6 Qaims
4,378,831
COUPON WALLET AND ATTACHMENT DEVICE
Irving M. Koltz, 1329 Steeles Ave. T.W 4, Willowdale,
Ontario, Canada (M2R 3N2)
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,331
Int. Q\? A45C 11/18
U.S. a, 150—39 16 Qaims
1. A blank capable of being folded into a closable coupon
holder, comprising:
(a) a first set of four contiguous panels, each of said panels of
said first set being separated from at least one other panel
by first fold means;
(b) a second set of two contiguous panels, each panel of said
second set of panels being separated from at least one
other panel by second fold means;
(c) a third set of two contiguous panels, each of said panels
of said third set being separated from at least one other
panel by third fold means;
(d) closure means, said closure means including a tab panel
separated from said first set of contiguous panels by a
forth fold means and a tab panel receiving slot in one panel
of said first set of panels;
(e) fifth fold line means between said second set of panels
and two panels of said first set of panels;
(0 sixth fold line means between said third set of panels and
two panels of said first set of panels.
1. A charger for a veneer lathe comprising:
(a) scanning means for sensing the shape of a log for deter-
mining the location of the longitudinal axis of the log for
optimum production of veneer;
(b) transfer means for transferring said log from said scan-
ning means to a position wherein said longitudinal axis of
said log is aligned with the rotational axis of said veneer
lathe;
(c) said veneer lathe including a peeling knife and means for
^ moving said knife in a reciprocating motion toward and
away from said rotational axis of said veneer lathe;
(d) said transfer means including means resix)nsive to said
motion of said knife for advancing said log toward said
rotational axis of said veneer lathe simultaneously with
and in proportion to the movement of said knife toward
said rotational axis.
4,378,832
GOLF CLUB COVER
Albert N. Thompson, Winnipeg, Canada, assignor to M.H.A.
Enterprises Ltd., Manitoba, Canada
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,760
Qaims priority, application Canada, Mar. 21, 1980, 348172
Int. a.3 B65D 65/04, 65/06; A63B 53/00
U.S. Q. 150—52 G 2 Qaims
1. A golf club head cover comprising a pair of generally
mirror-imaged rigid half-shells, each of said half-shells being
provided with an internal padding, hinge means extending
along a stem ix)rtion and a rear part of a head portion of a rim
of each half-shell for hingedly securing the pair of half-shells
together, and releasable latch means for releasably maintaining
the half-shells in a closed state wherein an enclosed cavity, of
a shape having a bulbous head portion merging with an elon-
gate stem portion, is defined for covering a head and adjacent
shank of a single golf club; wherein a series of vent passages are
provided extending through each half-shell and the internal
padding thereof for communicating said cavity with the exte-
rior of the head cover; and wherein a shank end of each of the
half-shells has an inwardly directed flange with a golf club
shank centering recess therein, said recesses defining together,
in said closed state of the half-shells, an end opening which, in
end view, is drop-shaped, having a rounded portion directed
toward the |x>rtion of the rim along which the hinge means
extends and a covergent portion converging in a direction
transversely away from the hinge means, whereby a partly
offset shank of a club will be pushed to a centered position as
the half-shells are brought from an open state into said closed
state.
90
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^78,833
ANTI-SKID DEVICE FOR VEHICLES
Lennart Lindblad, Hedasgatan 16, S-440 20 Vargarda; Karl-Erik
Lindblad, Annelundsvagen 22, S-441 00 Alingsas; Sven-Olof
Lindblad, Kopmansgatan 60, S-441 00 Alingsas, and Hans
Lindblad, Hjiiiinared, S-441 00 Alingsas, all of Sweden
per No. PCr/SE79/00222, § 371 Date Jul. 3, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 3, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00945, PCX Pub.
Date May IS, 1980
PCT Filed Nov. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 198,103
Int. a.J B60C 27/00
U.S. a. 152—226 5 Qaims
1. An anti-skid device for a wheel of a vehicle, comprising:
at least two gripping elements, each gripping element being
made from a continuous wire of resilient material and having
two gripping portions which, when the anti-skid device is
mounted on the wheel occupy positions spaced from each
other circumferentially across the tread of the wheel, each
gripping element also having two pairs of frame portions re-
spectively connected to said gripping portions and when
mounted on the wheel extending towards the center of the
wheel on opposite sides thereof, each gripping element also
having a connecting portion interconnecting the frame por-
tions on one and the same side of the wheel while the frame
portions on the other side of the wheel remain free and spaced
apart from each other, and flexible strap means interconnecting
all free frame portions, said flexible strap means including a
central strap, and pairs of straps respectively connected to said
central strap and extending therefrom to said free frame por-
tions, whereby said free frame portions are free to move
towards each other and towards the center of the wheel but are
restrained from moving away from each other and radially
outwardly from said center.
said tire (14) axially on said machine (10), said support
means (30) being mounted on said base;
means (28,42) for controUably drawing said second rim half
(20) into abutting relationship with said second portion
(26), said drawing means (28,42) being mounted on said
base (29); and
expander means (34) adapted for restraining said first portion
(24) of said tire (14) from substantial radial movement
relative to said drawing means (24,42), said expander
means being mounted on said base (29) and adapted for
abutment with said first portion (24).
4,378,835
FOUNDRY CORE OR MOLD MAKING MACHINE
Gilbert J. Janke, Parma, Ohio, assignor to The Osbom Manu-
facturing Corporation, Oeveland, Ohio
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,176
Int. Q\? B22D li/U
LI.S. a. 164—183
45 Claims
4,378,834
WHEEL ASSEMBLY MACHINE AND METHOD
Ronald L. Satzler, Princeville, III., assignor to Caterpillar Trac-
tor Co., Peoria, lU.
PCT No. PCTAJS81/00486, § 371 Date Apr. 13, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 13, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO82/03603, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 28, 1982
PCT FUcd Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 278,497
Int. Q\} B60C 25/06
U.S. a. 157—1.1 27 Claims
6. A machine (10) adapted for assembling first and second
rim halves (20) and a closed torus tire (14), said tire (14) having
a rim abutting surface (22), said rim abutting surface (22) hav-
ing a first portion (24) abutuble with a first rim half, and a
second portion (26) abuttable with said second rim half (20),
comprising:
a base (29);
support means (30) for supporting said tire (14) and locating
1. A foundry core or mold blowing machine comprising a
blow head, a pivoting frame, separable mold halves supported
for closing and for separation on said pivoting frame, and
means to pivot said frame in one direction to clamp such halves
when closed against said blow head, said frame extending
generally horizontally and pivoted at one end.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
91
4^78,836
MANIPULATION METHOD AND DEVICE FOR A
FOUNDRY
Robert Moussault, 92, rue du Marechal Joffre, 78380 Bougi-
val, France
per No. PCT/FR79/00054, § 371 Date Feb. 22, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 15, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00136, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 7, 1980
per FUed Jun. 22, 1979, Ser. No. 193,941
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 22, 1978, 78 18729
Int. a.J B22D 41/12
U.S. a. 164—336 9 Claims
1. A transfer device comprising a frame including a fixed
part and a mobile part rotatable relative to said fixed part about
a vertical shaft, an arm hinged at one end thereof to the top of
said mobile part about a horizontal pin and provided at its
other end with means for attaching a load, means for rotating
the mobile part of the frame relative to its fixed part, means for
driving the arm about said horizontal pin, said driving means
arranged between the mobile part of the frame and said arm in
such a manner that the arm can rotate through approximately
180° and wherein said arm is arranged such that the attachment
means is driven along a substantially vertical semicircle above
a horizontal plane passing through said horizontal pin and said
vertical semicircle including the axis of said vertical shaft, and
means for controlling said rotating means, said control means
being operative when said attachment means is directly above
the axis of said vertical shaft.
! 4,378,837
HEAT EXCHANGER
Gustav Ospelt, Vaduz, Liechtenstein, assignor to Hoval
Interliz AG, Vaduz-Neugut, Liechtenstein
Filed Feb. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 120,161
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 15,
1979, 2905732
Int. a.3 F28F 3/10 \
MS. a. 165—166 1 Claim
' 3 \
comers at comer pack edges thereof have triangular comer
notches between which marginal strips of said plates extend,
said plates in pairs at two oppositely-lying plate edges flatly lie
one upon the other with said marginal strips extending be-
tween said comer notches forming altemately crossing flow-
through passages between said plates and at said marginal
strips the plates are connected with one another, a frame
housing surrounding the exchanger pack, said frame housing
comprising two covers which are disposed adjacent outer
plates of the exchanger pack and four struts connecting the
covers at their comers, said struts being operatively con-
nected in sealing fashion with the comer pack edges of the ex-
changer pack which comer pack edges contain the comer
notches of the plates,
the stmts, on sides thereof facing the comer pack edges of
the exchanger pack which comer pack edges contain the
comer notches of the plates, being formed with a triangu-
lar recess the improvement wherein said triangular recess
having a depth greater than the depth of the comer
notches,
said comer pack edges with the corner notches as well as
with the end of the respectively connected said marginal
strips, adjacent to the corner notches. o\ the plates,
project into said recesses, respectively, and
a sealing filling fills up said recesses on said struts up to
beyond said comer notches, said tnangular recess
constitutes a mold form for sealing said scaling filling
both to said stmts and to said comer pack edges with the
comer notches as well as with the ends otthc respectively
connected said marginal strips when said exchanger pack
is mounted in said frame housing, said sealing filling
consisting of a molding resin which is poured into the
mold form with the exchange pack mounted in the frame
housing.
• I 4,378,838
PIPE WIPERS AND CUPS THEREFOR
James D. Ogden, Carrollton, and Pat M. White, Lewisrille, both
of Tex., assignors to Otis Engineering Corporation, Dallas,
Tex.
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,080
Int. a.5 E21B 33/08
U.S. a. 166—153 10 Claims
1. In a heat exchanger having a exchanger pack which com-
prises a plurality of individual foil-type rectangular plates
spaced from one another, said plates define edges and at their
1. A pipe wiper, comprising:
a. a body;
b. at least one resilient external annular cup-like flange on
said body extending outwardly and rearwardly; and
c. a plurality of radially disposed, longitudinally extending
webs integral with said body and said flange for strength-
ening said flange to better resist being turned wrong side
out.
92
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^78,839
WELL TOOL
Ernest P. FUher, Jr., CarroUtoa, Tex., auignor to Otis Engi-
neering Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Mar. 30. 1981, Ser. No. 249,189
Int. a.' E21B 23/00
U.S. a. 166—217 11 Oaims
radially compressed shrink Fit connection to the underlying
pipe base member at atmospheric temperatures, but being
either slightly out of contact with said pipe base member or at
least substantially unstressed at elevated operational tempera-
1. A locking mandrel comprising:
a body;
locking dogs carried by the body and extensible radially to
lock the mandrel in a landing nipple;
prop-out means slidable in the body between an upper out-
of-the-way position permitting the dogs to retract,
an intermediate position propping said dogs in extended
position, and
a lower out-of-the-way position permitting said dogs to
retract;
a setting sleeve movable downwardly from an upper run-
ning position to a lower setting position and moving said
prop-out means from its upper out-of-the-way position to
its intermediate dog extending position;
means between said body and said setting sleeve preventing
movement of said setting sleeve below said lower setting
position;
a release sleeve carried by said prop-out means and movable
from an upper position to a lower position and moving
said prop-out means to its lower out-of-the-way position
to release said dogs;
means releasably securing said setting sleeve to said body in
its upper running position; and
means releasably securing said release sleeve to said setting
sleeve.
4,378,840
BIMETALLIC WELL SCREEN USE IN INJECTION
WELLS AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
James A. Lilly, Minneapolis, Minn., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,360
Int. O.^ E21B 43/08
U.S. a. 166—233 2 Qaims
1. A bimetallic well screen assembly for use in an injection
well at elevated temperatures comprising a pipe base member
having a perforated portion intermediate its ends and unperfo-
rated portions adjacent thereto, a well screen member having
a slotted portion overlying said perforated portion and unslot-
ted end ring portions overlying said unperforated portions,
said well screen member having a temperature coefficient of
expansion which is greater than the temperature coefficient of
expansion of the pipe base member, said well screen member
having one of said end ring portions welded to the underlying
pipe base member, the other of said end ring portions having a
tures, any spacing between said other end ring and said pipe
base member at said elevated operational temperatures being
less than the maximum width of the slot openings in the slotted
portion of the screen member.
4,378,841
IGNITION TECHNIQUE FOR AN IN SITU OIL SHALE
RETORT
Chang Y. Cha, Golden, Colo., assignor to Occidental Oil Shale,
Inc., Grand Junction, Colo.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,787
Int. a.3 E21B 43/243
U.S. a. 166—261 39 Claims
1. A method for igniting a fragmented permeable mass of
formation particles containing oil shale in an in situ oil shale
retort formed in a subterranean formation containing oil shale,
comprising the steps of:
(a) establishing a combustion zone at about the top surface of a
first region of the fragmented permeable mass of formation
particles, the top surface of the first region located at a first
elevation in the retort;
(b) introducing a retort inlet mixture comprising an oxygen-
supplying gas into the retort for advancing the combustion
zone downwardly through the first region of the fragmented
permeable mass of formation particles to a second elevation
in the retort below the first elevation; and then
(c) igniting the top surface of a second region of the frag-
mented permeable mass of formation particles at about the
second elevation, the second region being spaced apart
laterally from the first region for spreading the combustion
zone laterally across the fragmented permeable mass of
formation particles at about the second elevation in the
retort.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
93
4,378,842
VALVE
Dhir^jlal C. Patel, Carrollton, Tex., assignor to Otis Engineer-
ing Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,710
Int. a.5 E21B 34/14
U.S. a. 1^6—278 3 Qaims
1. A valve comprising,
a body having a bore therethrough,
a valve opener carried by said body in said bore,
a valve seat slidable in said bore,
shear means releasably positioning said seat in said bore,
a check valve rotatable about pivot means carried by said
seat and cooperable with said valve seat for preventing
flow through said bore from its first end to its second end,
means urging said check valve toward seated position,
means urging one of said valve seat and valve opener toward
a position in which said valve opener engages said check
valve and holds it in open position, and
means for shearing said shear means to release said seat from
said body.
ment with the wall of the borehole to anchor the packer to
the wall of the borehole above said open borehole; and
|}ermitting the cement within the sleeve to set, and detaching
the running string from the packer and removing the
running string of pipe from the borehole leaving the
packer in position therein to act as a plug to isolate said
formation from the open borehole below the packer.
I 4,378,844
EXPLOSIVE CUTTING SYSTEM
David D. Parrish, and John A. Barton, both of Spring, Tex.,
assignors to NL Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 29, 1979, Ser. No. 53,298
Int. a.' E21B 29/02
V.S. CI. 166—297 17 Claims
4,378,843
METHOD FOR COMPLETION OF WELLS
George O. Suman, Jr., 4200 Westheimer Rd., Ste. 211, Houston,
Tex. 77027
I Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,449
Int. a.3 E21B 33/13. 43/04
U.S. CI. 166—278 8 Claims
1. In a well having an open borehole with a formation which
is to be isolated from a lower portion of open borehole, the
method comprising:
running a string of pipe into the open borehole with an
{ inflatable packer releasably attached to the lower end of
' the string;
positioning the packer at a desired depth below said forma-
tion to be isolated;
the packer having a radially expansible resilient sleeve seal-
ingly connected at its ends to an interior mandrel and
I having passage means for permitting flow of fluid to the
exterior of the mandrel into the interior of the sleeve;
preventing flow through the mandrel into the open borehole
below said packer prior to passing cement through the
pipe;
then passing cement down through the pipe string and into
the mandrel with flow into the open borehole thcrebelow
prevented through said passage means into said sleeve in
an amount and under a pressure sufficient to expand the
sleeve in an amount and under a pressure sufficient to
expand the sleeve outwardly into tight gripping engage-
o^.
1. Apparatus for cutting tubular members comprising:
a. a generally elongate distribution of explosive material
having first and second ends;
b. a first non-electric detonator for communication with said
first end of said distribution of explosive material for
initiating said explosive material;
c. a second non-electric detonator for communication with
said second end of said distribution of explosive material
for initiating said explosive material;
d. an electrical blasting cap;
first mild detonating fuze means for communication be-
tween said blasting cap and said first detonator whereby
e.
94
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
detonation of said blasting cap effects initiation of said first
detonator; and
f. second mild detonating fuze means for communication
between said blasting cap and said second detonator
whereby detonation of said blasting cap effects initiation
of said second detonator;
g. wherein said first and second mild detonating fuze means
are mutually equal in length and equal in velocity of deto-
nation, whereby initiation of said blasting cap to simulta-
neously mitiate said first and second mild detonating fuze
means effects simultaneous initiation of said first and sec-
ond ends of said generally elongate distribution of explo-
sive material.
4,378,845
SAND CONTROL METHOD EMPLOYING SPECIAL
HYDRAULIC FRACTURING TECHNIQUE
William L. Medlin, Dallas; Lynn D. Mullins, De Soto, and Gary
L. Zumwalt, Dallas, all of Tex., assignors to Mobil Oil Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,478
Int. a.3 E21B 43/04. 43/119. 43/267
U.S. CI. 166—297 4 Claims
4,378,846
ENHANCED OIL RECOVERY APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Kurtis B. Brock, 6870 E. 11th St., Long Beach, Calif. 90815
FHed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,425
Int. a. J E21B 43/24
U.S. a. 166—303 7 Qaims
1. A sand control method for use in a borehole having a
loosely consolidated or unconsolidated pay zone which is
otherwise likely to introduce substantial amounts of pay sand
into the borehole, comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a borehole casing through said pay zone;
(b) perforating said casing at preselected intervals there-
along to form at least one set of longitudinal, in-line perfo-
rations;
(c) pumping high consistency index fracturing fluid contain-
ing a gravel pack sand through said perforations at the
highest practicaUate to form a fracture height and width
contiguous to said perforations which exceeds the height
and width of said set of said perforations;
(d) gradually increasing the sand concentration during step
(c) to approach sand-out at shut in;
(e) shutting in the well to permit said fracturing fluid to
decompose;
(0 flowing the well back slowly to reduce the well head
pressure to about the reservoir pressure; and
(g) producing from the well at a gradually increasing pro-
duction rate without any sudden pressure changes,
said steps (c), (d), (e), (0 and (g) being performed in a man-
ner which ensures that the sand fill of the fracture formed
adjacent to said set of perforations exceeds the height and
width of said set of perforations and is not washed out
above the topmost perforation before fracture closure has
occurred, whereby sand production from said pay zone is
controlled.
1. Apparatus for heating hydrocarbons in an underground
reservoir and facilitating flow of the hydrocarbons, compris-
ing, in combination:
(a) flow channel means disposable in a reservoir of hydro-
carbons for forming a flow path for a working fluid; and
(b) heating means associated with the flow channel means
for heating the working fluid prior to discharging the
heated working fluid from the flow path and into a reser-
voir of hydrocarbons to be heated, the flow channel
means including, in combination:
(1) a housing having an exterior and defining a hollow
chamber; and
(2) conduit means arranged in the chamber of the housing
and communicating with the exterior of the housing for
forming the flow path, the conduit means including a
fluid inlet to the chamber, a restricted fluid flow circuit
through the chamber and a fluid outlet from the cham-
ber, the housing being provided with connector means
for attaching the housing to a lower end of a pipe string,
the fluid inlet and fluid outlet being respectively located
in the maximum spaced portions of the housing, and the
fluid flow circuit of the conduit means forming a tor-
tious path, substantially "S" shaped, between the fluid
inlet and fluid outlet and arrangeable relative to an
associated pipe string to form three substantially paral-
lel, vertically disposed legs, the working fluid being a
liquid, and the heating means including a pair of series
connected electrodes at least partially forming a middle
one of the legs, the latter being arranged forming an
upwardly directed flow path means passing between the
pair of electrodes for assuring that the liquid of the
working fluid completely fills the associated one of the
legs.
6. A method for facilitating the recovery from wells of
hydrocarbons having relatively high viscosities, comprising
the stepw of:
(a) arranging a heating unit at the bottom of a pipe string in
a reservoir of hydrocarbons;
(b) passing through the heating unit a fluid heat transfer
medium;
(c) heating the fluid as it passes through the heating unit;
(d) injecting the heated fluid into the reservoir of hydrocar-
bons for reducing viscisity of the hydrocarbons;
(e) recovering by conventional techniques the reduced vis-
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
95
cosity hydrocarbons; the step of heating the fluid includ-
ing the step of passing the fluid between a plurality of pairs
of series connected electrodes and using the fluid as part
of an electrical circuit connecting the pairs of electrodes;
and
(0 maximizing a resistance in a path through the working
fluid between the electrodes in relation to a total resis-
tance of the associated circuit for causing a maximum
voltage to occur in the working fluid.
4,378,847
VALVE
Dhirajlal C. Patel, and Robert B. Wheeler, both of Carrollton,
Tex., assignors to Otis Engineering Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,711
Int. a.3 E21B 34/14
U.S. a. 166—317 3 Qaims
^
i
.
»
S»b
, il
4 fi
?9
7
i99
34 :
3i
4
'X :
I
rP
i
■
1 i
^
' — ■ — *»'■
[
1. A valve comprising,
a body having a bore therethrough,
a downwardly facing shoulder in said body bore,
a land in said body bore below said shoulder,
a groove in said body bore below said land,
an annular valve seat in said body bore having a tubular
extension,
a valve opener telescoped in said tubular extension,
shear means releasably connecting said tubular extension
and valve opener,
resilient means urging said valve opener upward to hold said
valve seat against said downwardly facing shoulder,
seal means between said valve seat and said land,
a check valve carried by said valve seat,
resilient means urging said check valve toward closed posi-
tion,
and a prop-out sleeve removably held in said body bore and
propping said valve member in open position.
' 4,378,848
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING
SUBSEA WELL TEMPLATE PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Lionel J. Milberger, Spring, Tex., assignor to FMC Corporation,
Chicago, 111.
FUed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 191,046
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 2, 1979,
7934106
Int. a.3 E21B 34/04. 43/017
UJS. a. 166—362 24 Claims
1. A system for control of subsea template production sys-
tems for use with a surface control unit, a riser positioned in the
open sea terminating at a riser base, a template remote from
said riser base and having attached subsea trees, and a plurality
of satellite wells having attached operators, said system com-
prising:
a power source coupled to said surface control unit;
a base control module mounted on said riser base;
means for coupling said base control module to said power
source and to said surface control unit;
a plurality of template control modules mounted on said
template;
lit-* 2S,
\\C^''
means for coupling said surface control unit and said power
source to said satellite wells to control said operators in
said satellite wells;
means for coupling said surface control unit and said power
source to said template control modules; and
means for coupling said template control modules to said
subsea trees for supplying control signals to said subsea
trees from said template control modules.
4,378,849
BLOWOUT PREVENTER WITH MECHANICALLY
OPERATED RELIEF VALVE
oe A. Wilks, P.O. Box 45085, Baton Rouge, La. 70895
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,829
Int. a.3 E21B 33/06
U.S. a. 166—369 9 Claima
9. A method for preventing blowouts in a well comprising:
a. attaching a blowout preventer having a movable flow
restricting means therein to a well casing pipe;
b. connecting a pressure relief pipe to the casing pipe be-
tween the blowout preventer and the bottom of the well,
said pressure relief line having a valve therein; and
c. mechanically linking said movable internal flow restrict-
ing means of the blowout preventer to said valve so that
said valve is opened when said blowout preventer is actu-
ated.
96
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,378,850
HYDRAULIC FLUID SUPPLY APPARATUS AND
METHOD FOR A DOWNHOLE TOOL
Burchus Q. Barrington, Duncan, Oida., assignor to Halliburton
Company, Duncan, Okia.
Filed Jun. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 159,304
Int. a.3 E21B 34/64
U.S. a. 166—373 17 Qaims
\
1. A hydraulic fluid supply apparatus for a downhole tool,
comprising:
a first zone adapted to be filled with hydraulic fluid;
a second zone adapted to be filled with a pressurized second
fluid, said second zone being completely defined within a
container means adapted to be placed downhole;
Hoating piston means, separating said first and second zones,
for transmitting pressure from fluid in one of said zones to
fluid in the other of said zones; and
control valve means, connected between said first zone and a
hydraulically powered component of said downhole tool,
for directing hydraulic fluid under pressure from said first
zone to said hydraulically powered component of said
downhole tool.
4,378,851
METHOD FOR INHIBITING EXPLOSIONS
Egbert deVries, Kettering, Ohio, assignor to Quad Environmen-
tal Technologies Corporation, Highland Park, 111.
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,024
Int. a.3 A62C 1/00
U.S. a. 169—45 7 Claims
6. A method for suppressing or attenuating explosions within
processing equipment having an entrance and an exit in which
flammable mixtures of air with gas, dust or vapor are at least
occasionally produced which comprises introducing into said
equipment a sufficient quantity of aqueous microdroplets hav-
ing a diameter less than about 20 microns to provide a droplet
concentration in the air throughout the equipment including at
the equipment exit sufTicient to quench an incipient gas, dust or
vapor explosion and the droplet concentration is such that the
spacing between individual micro droplets is such that the
passages or pathways throughout the mass of said microdrop-
lets are sufficiently narrow to prevent flame progagation in
said fiammable mixtures.
4,378,852
WEDGE LOCK STABILIZER
William R. Garrett, 24 Palmer Dr., Conroe, Tex, 77302
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,471
Int. a.3 E21B 17/10
U.S. CI. 175—325 14 Qaims
ini: •
J
1. A drill string stabilizer for accommodating and retaining a
plurality of replaceable wear elements thereabout for contact-
ing the surface of the borehole during drill string operation,
said stabilizer having a body including a plurality of longitu-
dinal slots of substantially uniform width, each of said
slots being undercut to either side so that the width dimen-
sion at the surface of the stabilizer body is narrower than
t^le undercut width,
at least one wear element fitting into each of said slots and
conforming, on the underneath side thereof, at least on
one side, with the undercut portion thereof,
the underneath side of said wear element also including a
surface at a non-parallel angle with respect to the sides of
said slot, said non-parallel angled surface including an
undercut surface along at least a portion thereof, and
at least one tapered wedge bearing against said angled sur-
face for holding said element in said slot and fitting at least
in part within the undercut surface of said non-parallel
angled surface and lying beneath the wear surface of said
wear element.
4,378,853
CAVITATION NOZZLE PLATE ADAPTER FOR ROCK
BITS
Weng-Kwen R. Chia, Irvine, and Robert S. Forrest, Tustin, both
of Calif., assignors to Smith International, Inc., Newport
Beach, Calif.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,793
Int. a.3 E21B 10/18
U.S. a. 175—340 6 Oaims
1. In a rock bit of the type that utilizes drilling mud directed
through a drillstring and through said rock bit, said rock bit
comprising:
a bit body having a first pin end and a second cutting end,
said bit body further forming a chamber therein, said
chamber being in direct communication with said drilling
mud in said drillstring,
one or more non-cavitating nozzles in said bit body in com-
1
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
97
munication with said chamber to direct said drilling mud
in a borehole bottom, and
one or more separate flow cavitation nozzle restriction
means adapted to be positioned adjacent said one or more
non-cavitating nozzles, said one or more flow cavitation
restriction mdans comprises a substantially circular flow
.cavitation disc positioned adjacent said separate non-
cavitating nozzle body, said disc forming a central nozzle
orifice thereby, a flow cavitating restriction means is
positioned within said nozzle orifice, said flow cavitation
restriction means being attached to said disc, to cause said
drilling mud to exit said nozzle openings in a turbulent
flow and to cavitate as said drilling mud passes through
said one or more separate nozzle flow restriction means.
4,378,854
BLOOD COLLECTION BAG WEIGHING DEVICE
Evan W. Rosen, Tucson, Ariz., assignor to Engineering & Re-
search Associates, Inc., Tucson, Ariz.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 81,164, Oct. 2, 1979. This
appUcation Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,586
Int. a.3 GOIG 13/02. 3/08. 23/00
U.S. a. 177—118 8 Qaims
10 -^
1. A blood collection bag weighing device for filling a blood
collection bag with a predetermined weight of blood flowing
from a tube extending from the vascular system of a donor, said
device comprising in combination:
(a) means for clamping the tube, said clamping means includ-
ing a member for embodying stored energy when posi-
tioned in a retained state and for clamping the tube when
positioned in a clamped state, said member including a
planar surface and means for exerting a first magnitude of
force against retention in the retained state and a second
magnitude of force for clamping the tube in the clamped
state;
(b) a permanent barium ferrite magnet for overcoming the
{
first magnitude of force to magnetically capture and retain
said member in the retained state, said magnet including a
straight edge and movable mounting means for accommo-
dating realignment of said magnet to position said straight
edge of said magnet in aligned contacting relationship
with said planar surface of said member and maximize the
magnetic coupling therebetween;
(c) means for momentarily disrupting the magnetic field of
said magnet to a value insufficient to overcome the first
magnitude of force and independent of the magnitude of
the second magnitude of force and permit repositioning of
said member from the retained state to the clamped state
in response to said exerting means;
(d) means for sensing achievement of the predetermined
weight by the blood collection bag during the filling of the
blood collection bag; and
(e) means for generating an electrical signal in response to
said sensing means to energize said disrupting means;
whereby, the energy level of said barium ferrite magnet and of
said generated electrical signal may be unrelated to the level of
energy of the second magnitude of force to clamp the tubing.
4,378,855
MULTI-SPEED DRIVE WITH FORWARD/REVERSE
LOCKOUT
Donald J. Haub, Champiin; Neil T. Brown, Minneapolis; Keith
N. Krier, Tonka Bay; Raymond C. Hawkins, Minneapolis, and
Howard N. Seim, Columbia Heights, all of Minn., assignors to
Tennant Company, Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Aug. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 68,160
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 21,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ B60K 1/02
U.S. a. 180—65 R 11 Qaims
B,
•^ " ,4C
'
MSI . ") /M. lOf'
R5-
ris3 ^icb'^ I
IIP'' zniT
lOf
1. A floor maintenance vehicle comprising in combination a
body, a plurality of wheels for supporting said body, means for
steering said vehicle, means for maintaining floor surfaces, a
plurality of reversible electric drive motors, each of said mo-
tors having a field coil and an armature coil, said motors being
adapted for driving said wheels, a power source, means for
selectively changing the electrical connection between said
plurality of motors from series to parallel and parallel to series,
reversing means for reversing the flow of current through each
of said field coils while leaving unchanged the flow of current
through the corresponding armatures to reverse the direction
of said motors, means for preventing reversing direction of said
drive motors until said vehicle has slowed to a predetermmed
speed; said preventing means including a circuit for sensing the
rotation of said motors in a coasting state wherein said motors
are rotating without voltage applied to said field coil and for
98
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
preventing the application of voltage to said field coils which
would reverse the direction of said motors until said motors
have slowed to a predetermined rotational velocity, said cir-
cuit including; voltage detecting means powered by said
power source, said detecting means including means for ampli-
fymg a detected voltage, said detecting means being connected
in parallel with said armature coils and having one pole of said
armature coils and one side of said detecting means at the same
electrical potential at all times for detecting voltage generated
therein when said motor is in said coasting state and amplifying
said voltage, and preventing means responsive to said detect-
ing means for preventing application of said reversing voltage
to said motor while said detecting means is sensing said gener-
ated voltage.
ther including horizontal pivot means for carrying said steer-
ing head mounting means at the front end of said main frame,
4,378,856
PASSAGEWAY FOR TRUCK CAB AND SLEEPER UNIT
Ray S. Miller, Shipsbewana, Ind., assignor to Double Eagle
Industries, Inc., Shipsbewana, Ind.
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,627
Int. a.^ B62D 2J ^iX)
U.S. a. 180—89.14 7 Qaims
4,378,857
MOTOR-CYCLE FRAME
Eriand Andersson, Hageryd 2923, Kullavik, Sweden (43041)
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,664
Int. aJ B62D 61/02; B62K 25/04
U.S. a. 180—227 9 Oaims
1. A motor-cycle having a frame including a main frame
member with a front end and a rear end, means at said front
end for mounting a steering head supporting a front fork rotat-
able about a substantially vertical pivot axis, a rear fork swing-
ably supported at the rear end of said main frame member, and
spring means at said front and said rear forks, said frame fur-
and movement transfer means connecting said rear fork with
said horizontal pivot means.
4,378,858
DRIVEN STEERING SHAFT ASSEMBLY
Manfred Gbft; Dieter Maurer, both of Friedricbsbafen, and
Erich Aucktor, Offenbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Ldbr & Bromkamp GmbH, Offenbach, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 174,174
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 4,
1979, 2931764
Int. a.^ B60K 17/30; F16D 3/84
U.S. a. 180—259 7 Qaims
1. An arrangement including a passageway connection for
interconnecting the interior of a vehicle driver's cab, of a
cab-over engine tractor having a driver's cab carried by a
frame and upwardly swingable for providing engine access,
and the interior of a sleeper unit mounted to said frame sepa-
rately from and behind said cab, comprising:
(a) an outer accordian seal mountable perimetically continu-
ously surrounding an external side of an opening in a wall
of said sleeper unit and a facing opening in an exterior wall
of said cab at respective opposite ends thereof, said ac-
cordian seal being fastened at one end to said sleeper unit
and at the other end to said cab, the mounting of at least
one of said ends of the accordian seal being by an easily
demountable fastening means; and
(b) an inner boot member mountable about an inner side of
said openings at respective opposite ends thereof, in a
manner estending from the inner side of the opening in the
wall of the sleeper unit, through said outer accordian seal
and through the opening in the facing wall of the cab, to
the inner side thereof, said inner boot being fastened at one
end to said sleeper unit and at the other end to said cab, the
mounting of at least one of the ends of the boot member
being by an easily demountable fastening means.
1. A driven steering shaft assembly especially for a planetary
steering shaft comprising: a universal joint interposed between
a first and a second shaft coupled therethrough; said universal .
Joint including an outer Joint member coupled with said first
shaft and an inner Joint member coupled with said second
shaft; means interconnecting said inner Joint member and said
second shaft in rotative driving engagement while permitting
assembly and disassembly therebetween by axial movement of
said second shaft relative to said inner Joint member; a resilient
sealing boot mounted to seal therein said universal Joint, said
sealing boot having at one end thereof a neck portion mounted
in sliding engagement with said second shaft and, at an oppo-
site end, means releasably fastening said sealing boot to said
outer Joint member of said universal Joint; a cylindrical sealing
face on said second shaft having said neck portion of said
sealing boot engaged thereabout; a sleeve arranged between
said cylindrical sealing face and said neck portion of said seal-
ing boot, said neck portion being structured to create an inher-
ent resilient spring force about said sleeve for holding said
sleeve in tight sliding engagement on said cylindrical sealing
face; a shoulder formed on said second shaft on the outside of
said sealing boot adjacent said neck portion, said shoulder
having a radially extending end face facing toward said sealing
boot in sealing engagement with at least one of said sleeve and
said neck portion; said sealing boot having an inherent resil-
iency in the axial direction of said assembly enabling adjust-
ment to its greatest axial length and permitting assembly and
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
99
disassembly between said second shaft and said universal joint
together with said seahng boot by axial movement relative
thereto of said second shaft without detachment of said fasten-
ing means of said sealing boot; said resiliency in the axial direc-
tion of said sealing boot operating to maintain said sealing
engagement between said end face and said at least one of said
sleeve and said neck portion.
4,378,859 i
SILENCER FOR INTAKE/EXHAUST GAS DUCT
Seigo Satomi, and Masanosuke Ikai, both of Nagoya, Japan,
assignors to NGK Insulators, Ltd., Nagoya, Japan
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,100
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 13, 1979, 54-172822
\ Int. a.J E04F 17/04; POIN 1/02
VS. a. 181—224 4 Qaims
1. A silencer for an intake/exhaust gas duct having a duct
casing wall defming an inside space over the entire length
thereof with inlet and outlet openings, said silencer comprising
noise-absorbing partition means extending through said inside
space over the entire length of said gas duct in parallel with but
spaced from said duct casing wall, said noise-absorbing parti-
tion means comprising a plurality of porous ceramic plates
assembled side by side, said ceramic plates being provided with
a plurality of minute apertures extending across the thickness
bf said plates; gas passage means extending in said inside space
from said inlet opening to said outlet opening, said gas passage
means having a sidewall, at least a major portion of said side-
wall being said ceramic plates; noise-absorbing space means
deflned in said inside space adjacent said gas passage means
with said noise-absorbing partition means disposed therebe-
tween, said noise-absorbing space means being free of noise-
absorbing material; noise-shielding plates disposed at inlet and
outlet openings of said gas duct so as to close said noise-absorb-
ing space means; and a plurality of gas chambers defmed in said
noise-absorbing space means by a plurality of noise-shielding
sectional walls disposed in said noise-absorbing space means.
4,378,860
MOVABLE STAGING SCAFFOLD SYSTEM FOR
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
Oaude C. Newberry, P.O. Box 1111, Silverdale, Wash. 98383
FUed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,329
Int. CI.3 E04G 3/10, 3/16
U.S. a. 182—38 15 Claims
; 1. A building construction work staging scaffold system
domprising a pair of transversely spaced, elongated parallel
frame members, a pair of elongated transversely spaced track
members extending transversely between said frame members
and interconnecting the same to form an open staging area
framework, means for suspending said framework alongside a
building structure and adapted to permit shifting the suspended
positioning of said framework as the work progresses, at least
one elongated traverse track extending transversely between
said track members, a flrst set of carriage means movably
engaging the respective track members and movably support-
ing the traverse track thereon for translational movement
along said track members, at least one worker car movably
f-
■i
J u
mounted on said traverse track, and means operable to move
said car along said traverse track.
Edwards, Loxwood,
Inflatables Limited,
4,378,861
ESCAPE SLIDES
Philip M. Burrough, Liss, and David V.
both of England, assignors to RFD
Surrey, England
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,222
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 19, 1979,
7936453
Int. a.5 A62B 1/20; B64C 1/22; B64D 1/08
U.S. Q. 182—48 13 Qaims
1. An escape slide arranged to provide an inclined descent
path for evacuees, the slide comprising support structure and a
slideway supported thereby, the slideway comprising a first
sheet of flexible material provided with holes through which
water drains and a second sheet of a woven fabric arranged in
such spaced relation beneath the first sheet as to permit drain-
age of water through the first sheet while serving as a support
therefor when the first sheet distends under load during use of
the slide by evacuees.
4,378,862
PORTABLE SPIRAL STAIRCASE
A. Peter Cannel, Peekskill, N.Y., assignor to Modular Indus-
tries Ltd., New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct 21, 1980, Ser. No. 199,338
Int. a.^ E06C 1/383; A47C 9/12; E04F 11/12
U.S. a. 182—106 11 CUims
1. A portable spiral staircase in the form of a free-standing
structure comprising a plurality of step means for providing
horizontal support surfaces, said step means being hingedly
mounted to a pintel post for swingable movement and angu-
larly displaceable about a common vertical axis from a nested
100
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
non-operative mode into an open operative mode, coupling
means for releasably securing the steps in the open mode, said
*'«^^i ;; fi iJ n '^ '^ n '^ n^i
pinte! post having means adapted for supporting elongate
handle means.
4,378,863
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTER FOR HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATOR
Heinz W. Baum, Saarbrucken-Dudweiler, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignor to Lucas Industries Limited, Birmingham,
England
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,948
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 30, 1979,
7930119
Int. CI.' F16D 65/40
U.S. a. 188—71.8 6 Gaims
tached to a fixed part and to a brake block holder, and with
means for connection to a brake force applying such rod,
comprising in combination,
said brake block hanger means including structure extending
from its pivotal attachment position on the fixed part
considerably past the center of the brake block holder to
a single pivoted position on the brake block holder,
and means engaging said push rod with the brake block
holder near the center thereof in a position intermediate
the pivot positions of theTutsger means.
4,378,865
RUBBER AND VISCOUS/RUBBER TORSIONAL
DAMPERS AND METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME
Ronald L. McLean, Tonawanda, N.Y., assignor to Houdaille
Industries, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, Fla.
Filed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 215,111
Int. a.3 F16F 7/10
U.S. a. 188—379 19 Qaims
-^. .Mj'A.^;»
1. An automatic adjuster for a hydraulic actuator for a vehi-
cle brake comprising a housing, a clutch mechanism in said
housing operative between a piston of the actuator and an
auxiliary mechanical actuator, the clutch mechanism compris-
ing a threaded rod and slit nut, the rod being threadedly en-
gaged with said slit nut and one end of the rod being rotatably
secured to the actuator piston for axial movement therewith at
all times, said slit nut being 1>iassed towards a rest position in
which the slit nut engages a fixed stop, the threaded rod being
freely rotatable and axially movable relative to said slit nut
when the slit nut is in said rest position, said slit nut and
threaded rod being constructed to grip together only upon
actuation of the auxiliary mechanical actuator.
4,378,864
RAILWAY VEHICLE BRAKE BLOCK HOLDER
Anders O. G. Stjiime, Loddekopinge, Sweden, assignor to SAB
Nife AB, Landskrona, Sweden
Filed Apr. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 141,047
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Apr. 20, 1979, 7903480
Int. a.5 B60T 11/04
U.S. a. 188—153 R 9 Claims
1. A railway vehicle brake block assembly with means for its
suspension including brake block hanger means pivotally at-
1. In a torsional damper assembly including a rotor disk
having a radially outer annular body portion and an annular
inertia mass having an annular chamber with a radially in-
wardly directed annular opening through which said annular
body portion is received into said chamber, and elastic ring
means of substantial width having substantially planar radially
extending surfaces at least one of which is fixedly secured to
said body portion and another such surface pressing against a
substantial radial width of axially inwardly facing surface area
within said chamber of the inertia mass under preload com-
pression between said surface area and said body portion, the
improvement comprising:
and annular groove of minor width in the radially inner side
portion of said surface area and close to said annular
opening;
an abrupt substantially right-angular radially outwardly
facing annular shoulder at the radially inner side of said
groove;
an annular rib protruding from said another radially extend-
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
101
ing surface of said elastic ring means of minor radial extent
relative to the radial extent of said ring means adjacent to
the radially inner diameter of said elastic ring means and
complementary to and fitting in said groove and having a
substantially right-angular radially inwardly facing shoul-
der engaging said groove shoulder;
said shoulders cooperating for restraining said elastic ring
means against radially inward extrusion flow displacement
toward said opening, so that said preload compression is
maintained radially outwardly relative to said rib.
4,378,866
COMPARTMENTED SPORT BAG
Joseph Y. Pelavin, North Bergen, N.J., assignor to CPG Prod-
ucts Corp., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,341
Int. a.3 B65D 30/22: A45C 3/00. 13/26
U.S. a. 190—52 10 aaims
1. A compartmented sport bag for a racquet and associated
wearing apparel comprising a case formed by a pair of opposed
side panels, a pair of opposed end walls, a bottom wall, and a
top wall, said end, bottom and top walls forming a gusset
which surrounds the sport bag, said bag having an inner sur-
face, said top wall being provided with a first opening, closure
means for closing said first opening, one of said side panels
being provided with a second opening proximate the bottom
wall, closure means for closing said second opening, an elon-
gated, flexible hanging compartment within the sport bag
which forms a first compartment therin, said hanging compart-
ment having a top edge and being substantially the same length
as the length of the sport bag, said compartment including a
pair of elongated side panels and a pair of opposed end panels,
means for joining the bottom edges of said side panels together,
means for joining said end panels to the ends of the side panels,
and .means for securing the top ends of said side panels to the
top wall of the sport bag whereby said hanging compartment
is suspended within the sport bag, the top edges of said end
panels remaining unattached to the top wall of the bag, the
bottom of said hanging compartment being spaced a predeter-
mined distance from the bottom wall of the sport bag whereby
a second compartment is formed within the sport bag, said first
opening permitting articles to be placed in said first or hanging
compartment and said second opening permitting articles to be
placed in said second compartment. . i
4,378,867
CLUTCH DRUM RETAINER
Luciano Pasqualucci, 6183 Shady Side Rd., Shady Side, Md.
i 20867
FUed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,075
Int. d? F16D 13/56. 13/69
U.S. a. 192—70.13 12 aaims
1. An antigrab clutch assembly for motorcycles and the like
comprising:
(a) drive means including a sprocket and chain,
(b) a clutch housing secured to said sprocket and rotatable
therewith,
(c) clutch hub means movable mounted in said sprocket,
(d) throwout assembly means secured to said clutch hub
means,
(e) friction clutch disc means mounted on said hub means,
(0 engageable clutch disc means mounted on said clutch
housing and cooperating with said friction clutch disc
means,
(g) support shaft means mounted m said throwout assembly
means,
(h) said throwout assembly means rotatable on said support
shaft means, and
(i) means engageable with said clutch housing and mounted
on said support shaft means for preventing axial move-
ment of said clutch housing.
• w
4,378,868
LIVE SPINDLE WHEEL ASSEMBLY WITH TORQUE
RESPONSIVE DRIVE ENGAGEMENT MEANS
Harry A. Petrak, Boulder, Colo., assignor to Tenneco Inc.,
Bannockbum, III.
Filed Apr. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 143,197
Int. CI.3 F16D 11/00. 43/20
U.S. a. 192—93 A 13 Qaims
1. In a wheel assembly having a live spindle, said spindle
having a central aperture and said spindle being mounted for
rotation in a bore of a mounting member, a drive axle extend-
ing into said aperture in said spindle, wherein the improvement
comprises:
a substantially annular space between said drive axle and a
surface defining said central aperture in said spindle;
a passive member within said annular space and in a radially
spaced relationship from each said aperture defining sur-
102
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
face and said axle and means for preventing said passive said means to thereby mechanically lock said impeller to said
member from rotating; and turbine shaft to thereby eliminate at highway speeds of the
clutch means engaged with said passive member and said
axle whereby when said axle is forced to rotate said clutch
means is operated.
4,378,869
CLUTCH DISC
Oswald Friedmann, Buhl, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
LuK Lameilen und Kupplungsbau GmbH, Buhl, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 113,305
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 20,
1979, 2902188
Int. a.3 F16D 3/14
U.S. a. 192—106.2 14 Qaims
4,378,870
VEHICLE TORQUE CONVERTER
Edwin C. McRae, Box 922, Cusseta, Ala. 36852
Filed Nov. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 96,907
Int. C\? B60K 41/28
U.S. a. 192—3.24 3 Qaims
1. In a motor vehicle torque converter having impeller and
turbine and stator members mounted to define a fluid circuit, a
turbine shaft having one end fixed to said turbine with its other
end connected to the driving wheels of the vehicle when said
vehicle is operating at highway speeds, means disposed be-
tween said stator member and said turbine shaft for preventing
the stator member from overrunning the turbine shaft in a
forward direction, and an engageable-disengageable mechani-
cal drive connection between said impeller and said stator
which is effective in one operational mode to mechanically
lock said impeller to said stator and which co-operates with
vehical all of the slippage that would otherwise occur between
said impeller and turbine.
4,378,871
METHOD OF PRODUONG SMOOTH-UNIFORM
STREAMS OF SEMI-POURABLE FIBROUS PARTICLES
James d'A. Qark, Chuckanut Point, Bellingham, Wash. 98225
Continuation of Ser. No. 839,195, Feb. 6, 1978, abandoned. This
application Apr. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 32,700
Int. a.3 B65G 11/16
U.S. Q. 193—2 R 7 Qaims
1. A clutch disc, especially for use in friction clutches of
motor vehicles, comprising a first subassembly including a
rotary hub; a second subassembly coaxial with said first subas-
sembly, including at least one friction lining and being rotat-
able within limits relative to said first assembly; energy accu-
mulator means interposed between and arranged to oppose at
least some of the limited angular movement of said subassem-
blies relative to each other; and friction generating means
interposed between said subassemblies and including a substan-
tially washer-like axially stressed part which reacts against one
of said subassemblies and establishes a form fitting connection
with the other of said subassemblies, said other subassembly
including at least one additional part which establishes said
connection with said washer-like part, one of said parts includ-
ing at least one contour which tapers in the axial direction of
said subassemblies and the other of said parts having a counter-
contour in engagement with said contour to hold such parts
against angular movement with reference to one another.
PARTICLE
DISTRIBUTING
APPARATUS
1. In the process of feeding semi-pourable fibrous particles in
the form of wood wafers, plates or shavings which tend to
cling together as clumps or clusters to apparatus that serves to
form the particles into a structure, the steps of obtaining a more
uniform structure by continuously feeding the particles into
the upper portion of a downwardly inclined conveyor, and
under the influence of gravitational force and the motion of the
conveyor agitating the particles during downward movement
through the conveyor to cause clusters of particles to be bro-
ken up and spaced longitudinally, thus causing the particles to
issue from a lower portion of the conveyor in the form of a
smooth, continuous uniform stream, and feeding said smooth,
continuous, uniform stream directly to said apparatus.
4,378,872
ARTICLE HANDLING APPARATUS
William L. Brown, Easton, Pa., assignor to SI Handling Sys-
tems, Inc., Easton, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 781,617, Mar. 28, 1977, abandoned.
This appUcation Dec. 13, 1978, Ser. No. 968,931
Int. C\? B65G 37/00
U.S. Q. 198—570 6 Claims
1. Article handling apparatus for pushing articles comprising
a horizontally disposed shelf, spaced dividers on said shelf
dividing the upper surface of said shelf into parallel lanes, said
dividers having a rear end portion and a forward end portion,
pusher means having a vertically disposed face for pushing
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
103
J/"
articles along one of said lanes, said face extending generally
perpendicular from the divider adjacent the lane in which the
face is disposed, endless means supported by said divider for
reciprocating said face along the lane in which it is disposed
between a rear position adjacent said divider rear end position
and a forward position, connecting means for connecting one
end of said pusher means to a top run of said endless means so
that said pusher means is pivotable about a vertical axis passing
through said connecting means, a wheel supported by each end
portion of said divider, at least the wheel at the rear end por-
tion of said divider having a peripheral driving surface which
is at least partially exposed so that it may be contacted by a
drive means, said endless means extending around a portion of
each wheel, said pusher means being pivotable only in its rear
position from an article contacting position in its associated
lane to a loading position wherein a major portion of said face
projects beyond the longitudinal end of said divider and is
generally parallel to a vertically disposed plane passing
through the lengthwise dimension of said divider, and means to
prevent said face from pivoting out of contact with an article
when said face is in its associated lane and spaced from its rear
position.
4,378,873
CONTINUOUS LINEAR CHAIN CONVEYOR SYSTEM
OPERATING THROUGHOUT MULTIPLE TIERS WITH
DUAL SPACED CHAINS MOVING DIRECTLY
ATTACHED MULTIPLE ADJACENT TRAYS WHICH
LEVEL TO SUPPORT THE CONVEYED PRODUCT
Westley R. Ooudy, Edmonds, Wash., assignor to Qoudy A
Britton Inc., Mountlake Terrace, Wash.
Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,932
Int. C1.5B65G 17/18. 47/94
U.S. a. 198—796 13 Qaims
.y"
1. A continuous positive travel essentially linear like path
dual spaced chain conveyor and temperature treatment system,
utilizing essentially standard components of like coefficients of
expansion and contraction, operating throughout multiple
horizontal tiers to transport on identical horizontally sup-
ported movable trays except for possible products discharge,
products which are being either cooled, frozen, warmed,
heated, or dried, during a retention time within the enclosure,
comprising:
(a) a large temperature treatment enclosure with an access
end wall, having an air circulation system,
(b) a long supporting frame having multiple vertical spaced
horizontal linear tier frame components disposed within
the enclosure,
(c) a pair of transversely oppositely spaced uniformly driven
chain sprockets arranged at each end of each horizontal
linear tier of the conveyor, being mounted on shafts rotat-
ably supported on bearings secured to the supporting
frame,
(d) a cooperating transversely oppositely spaced standard
idler chain sprocket which matches each driven chain
sprocket and is longitudinally spaced a short distance from
the driven sprockets at the end of each horizontal linear
tier of the conveyor, the idler sprockets also being
mounted on shafts rotatably supported on bearings se-
cured to the supporting frame and driven at the same
speed as the driven chain sprockets,
(e) continuous positive travel essentially linear like path dual
spaced chain drive assembly with a chain at each side of
the frame, each of which extends throughout the multiple
tiers and respectively passes around all of the driven chain
sprockets on that one side of the tier.
(0 multiple, spaced trays pivotally secured at a pivot con-
nection at one of their corner ends on each side to the
respective opposite links of the continuous dual spaced
chains and at their other corner ends having a cross rod
end to engage the idler sprockets,
(g) a horizontal longitudinal slide on support secured to and
extending along the supporting frame at each tier to keep
the trays level during their linear travel along their respec-
tive tier,
(h) the idler chain sprockets being mounted in horizontal
alignment and longitudinally spaced from the driven chain
sprockets by a distance equal to the dimension between
the tray pivot connection and the cross rod end,
(i) the enclosure end wall being positioned close to the sup-
porting frame and having a first horizontal opening adja-
cent the uppermost tier and a second horizontal opening
adjacent the lowermost tier for permitting the dual spaced
chains and their associated trays to pass therethrough.
(j) a pair of take-up sprockets located outside the end wall of
the enclosure and aligned with the drive and idler sprock-
ets and around which the dual chains pass and which
constitute the loading and unloading portion of the con-
veyor system,
(k) the idler chain sprockets of each tier adjacent the end
wall being closer to the end wall and disposed outside of
the driven chain sprocket while the idler chain sprockets
at the other end of the tiers are disposed inside the driven
chain sprockets,
(1) the pivoted end of each of the trays being disposed further
away from the end wall when such trays are within the
enclosure, so that such trays can pivot downwardly to
unload when the tray pass through the second opening in
the end wall, and
(m) support means associated with each idler sprocket, and
with the exterior portion of the dual spaced chains for
supporting the tray horizontally when moving from one
elevation to another.
4,378,874
PALLET ELEVATOR FOR A SHIP
Randall J. Schwab, Portland, Oreg., assignor to Transco North-
west, Inc., Portland, Oreg.
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,168
Int. a.5 B65G 17/16
U.S. a. 198—802 9 Qaims
1. In an elevator,
an endless chain;
a drive sprocket and an idler sprocket, each of the sprockets
104
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
meshing with the chain and adapted to reverse the direc-
tion of travel thereof;
a symmetrical follower pivotally mounted at its center on
the chain;
a pair of follower rollers symmetrically mounted on the
follower, one roller of the pair being mounted at each end
of the follower;
a symmetrical carrier tray carried by the follower, the center
line of the tray being coincident with the center of the
follower, the plane of the tray being perpendicular to the
line joining the centers of the follower rollers; and
an endless guide track for guiding the rollers on the fol-
lower, the track comprising a single race adjacent one
flight of the chain, a pair of parallel races adjacent the
other flight of the chain, and a pair of outer cam tracks
means for guiding the rollers adjacent the sprockets,
the outer cam track means merging the single race and the
parallel races along generally arcuate paths,
the follower rollers being guided substantially vertically one
above the other when they are in the single race, thereby
to place the carrier tray in a horizontal load-carrying
position when it is adjacent the one flight of the chain,
the follower rollers being guided one in each of the parallel
races with the line joining their centers being substantially
horizontal, thereby to place the carrier tray in a generally
vertical position when it is adjacent the other flight of the
chain,
the follower rollers passing from the single race to the paral-
lel races and vice versa as they are guided by the outer
cam track means, whereby the carrier tray is rotated
ninety degrees as the follower is guided from the single
race adjacent the one flight of the chain to the parallel
races adjacent the other flight of the chain and vice versa.
4,378,875
SLING BELT BULK MATERIAL CONVEYOR
Kenneth N. Allan, Menomonee Falls; Thomas J. Worringer,
Wauwatosa, and Robert T. Baugh, Brookfield, all of Wis.,
assignors to Allis-Chalmers Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,587
Int. a.3 B65G 15/08
U.S. a. 198—815 11 Oaims
11. A conveyor including a pair of endless support cables
each having a forwarding run and a return run between longi-
tudinally spaced tail and head ends of said conveyor, said
forwarding runs being substantially coextensive and situated at
substantially the same elevation and support means supporting
said support cables for respective movement along endless
paths described by said support cables, said conveyor charac-
terized by
a plurality of transverse slings arranged at longitudinally
spaced intervals along said endless support cables, each
sling including an intermediate flexible transverse strap
and a pair of rigid hangers with first corresponding ends
connected, respectively, to the opposite transverse ends of
said strap and second corresponding ends pivotally con-
nected, respectively, to fixed transversely aligned points
on said support cables by pivot means for pivotal move-
ment about axes generally transverse to the axes of said
cables, and
3^
an endless flexible conveyor belt having a working run and
a return run, said working run being supported by said
straps without attachment thereto in the forwarding run
of said support cables.
4,378,876
DISPLAY COIN HOLDER ASSEMBLIES
Bela G. Szabo, 109 Park Rd., Rosslyn Farms, Carnegie, Pa.
15106, and Dean J. Hirschfield, 261 Trotwood Dr., Pitts-
burgh, Pa. 15241
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,085
Int. CI.' B65D 25/10
U.S. CI. 206—45.34 6 Qaims
1. A display or shipping box of transparent plastic material,
for a small valuable disk-like object, comprising
(a) a base having a substantially square recess in the upper
surface thereof for seating the disk-like object therein,
(b) a cover for said base overlying said recess,
(c) a substantially square insert of molded plastic material
with rounded corners, said insert having thin boundary
walls and an external perimetrical outline conforming to
the boundaries of said recess, and
(d) four thin integral yieldable tongues projecting inwardly
from said boundary walls and spaced equidistantly therein
relative to the comers of the insert, for resilient engage-
ment with the periphery of said object at a pluraity of
equidistant points, said tongues being of uniform length,
and of a height conforming to the height of said boundary
walls, curved along their length, and of rectangular cross-
section diminishing from the junctions with said walls.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
105
4,378,877
REUSABLE ENCLOSED CARRIER CARTON
David L. Botterman, and Natalie A. Wolff, both of Arlington,
Tex., assignors to Container Corporation of America, Chi-
qigo, III.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,250
Int. a.3 B65D 65/28. 75/08. 5/54
U.S. a. 206-141 4 aaims
1. A fully enclosed article carrier carton, formed of a unitary
blank of foldable paperboard, and having removable portions
to provide access to the contents of the carton without de-
stroying the integrity of the carton for reuse with empty bot-
tles, said carton comprising:
(a) opposed pairs of side and end wall panels foldably joined
to each other to form a tubular structure open at the top
and bottom;
(b) said side and end wall panels including upper and lower
sections separated from each other by horizontally dis-
posed fold lines;
(q) bottom closure flaps foldably joined to said lower sec-
tions of said side wall panels and secured to each other in
at least partially overlapped relation closing the bottom of
said structure;
(d) top closure flaps foldably joined to said upper sections of
said side wall panels and secured to each other in at least
partially overlapped relation closing the top of said struc-
ture; and
(e) portions of said end wall upper and lower sections form-
ing detachable portions being joined to the remaining
portions thereof by weakened lines of tear permitting said
detachable portions to be detached from said remaining
portions to provide access to the contents of the carton
without destroying the integrity of the center so that it can
have limited reuse.
4,378,878
CROWN SUPPORT CARRIER
Earl J. Graser, Monroe, La., assignor to Manville Service Cor-
poration, Denver, Colo.
} Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,109
Int. a.3 B65D 25/22. 5/50
U.S. a. 206—153 1 Qaim
1. The production blank for a crown support carrier com-
prising:
(a) a pair of central panels hingedly attached together, the
central panels having positioned therein at least two bottle
receiving openings, each bottle receiving opening having
formed thereon a plurality of sunburst neck receiving tabs;
(b) an elongated panel hingedly attached to each central
panel, each elongated panel having formed thereon handle
means for carrying the erected container; and
(c) a pair of top reinforcing panels, hingedly attached on
opposite ends of each pair of central panels for folding
beneath the central panels whenever the carrier is erected,
each top reinforcing panel having formed thereon on
opposite sides thereof a side reinforcing panel hingedly
attached to the top reinforcing panel and having formed
thereon partial handle openings formed by a handle tab
and positioned adjacent the handle means formed on the
elongated panels, each top reinforcing panel also having
formed thereon bottle receiving openings having formed
thereon sunburst neck receiving tabs formed adjacent to
the bottle receiving openings and the neck receiving ubs
/
ittr
-^
formed on the central panels of the crown support carrier
production blank.
4,378,879
CROWN SUPPORT BEVERAGE CARRIER
Earl J. Killy, Monroe, La., assignor to Manville Service Corpo-
ration, Denver, Colo.
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,703
Int. a,3 B65D 85/62
U.S. a. 206-158 5 Qaims
1. The production blank for a crown support beverage car-
rier, comprising:
(a) a first side wall panel having formed thereon a handle
opening;
(b) a first outer top wall panel hingedly attached to the first
side wall panel;
(c) a second outer top wall panel hingedly attached to the
first outer top wall panel, the first and Second outer top
wall panels having formed therein at least two sun burst
bottle neck receiving openings; \
(d) a second side wall panel hingedly attached to the second
outer top wall panel and having formed therein a handle
opening;
(e) a first end wall panel hingedly attached to one side of the
second side wall panel and having formed thereon on one
side thereof a glue flap;
(0 a second end wall panel hingedly attached to the other
side of the second side wall panel and having formed
thereon a glue flap on one side thereof;
(g) a first inner top wall panel hingedly attached to one side
of the first outer top wall panel;
(h) a second inner top wall panel hingedly attached to one
106
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
side of the second outer top wall panel and also hingedly
attached to the first inner top wall panel, the first inner top
wall panel and the second inner top wall panel having
formed thereon a sun burst bottle neck receiving opening;
(i) a first inner side wall panel hingedly attached to the first
inner top wall panel;
(j) a second inner side wall panel hingedly attached to the
second inner top wall panel;
(k) a third inner top wall panel hingedly attached to the
other side of the first outer top wall panel;
(1) a fourth inner top wall panel hingedly attached to the
other side of the second outer top wall panel, the third
inner top wall panel and the fourth inner top wall panel
hingedly attached to the outer side of the first outer top
wall panel and second outer top wall panel having formed
thereon a sun burst bottle neck receiving opening;
(m) a third inner side wall panel hingedly attached to the
third inner top wall panel formed on the other side of the
first outer top wall panel; and
(n) a fourth inner side wall panel hingedly attached to the
fourth inner top wall panel hingedly attached to the other
side of the second top wall panel.
4,378,881
PORTABLE SECURING ASSEMBLY FOR AN ELECTRIC
MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
Paul de Vries, 38 W. 10th St., New York, N.Y. 10011
Continuation of Ser. No. 95,437, Nov. 19, 1979, abandoned. This
application Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,197
Int. a.3 A45C 11/00
U.S. a. 206—314 7 Qaims
4,378,880
BASKET CARRIER
Gus E. Summers, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to The C. W. Zum-
biel Co., Cincinnati, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 105,535, Dec. 20, 1979. This application
Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 223,995
Int. CV B65D 75/00
U.S. a. 206—170 8 Qaims
1. In an electric keyboard musical instrument having a plu-
rality of actions including keys, reeds and pickup means in
spaced relation to said reeds for generating an electric oscilla-
tion signal from the vibrations of said reeds and control com-
ponents therefor, a hand protable protective and securing
assembly, comprising:
a protective and supporting assembly including two housing
members being hingably connected to each other,
whereby said members are adapted to be positioned in a
longitudinally aligned configuration and a folded adjacent
configuration,
each member having an open portion along a first longitudi-
nal section thereof through which said keys extend, said
open portions being adapted to be in longitudinally
aligned configuration; and
removable panel members adapted to overlie the keys and
interconnect with said members to form a protective
casing for said keys when the members are in a folded
configuration, said housing members have bottom, back
and top walls which enclose the actions, reeds and pick-up
means except along the op>en portion, and said panel mem-
bers and said housing members interconnect with an end
member to complete the casing when the housing mem-
bers are in a folded configuration.
1. A basket carrier movable from a flattened knock-down
position to an erected position, said carrier comprising
opposed side walls and opposed end walls.
a primary fioor foldably connected to one side wall along a
bottom edge thereof, and a secondary floor foldably con-
nected to the other side wall along the bottom edge
thereof,
a floor support panel foldably connected to one end wall
along the bottom edge thereof,
a glue flap foldably connected to said floor support panel,
the inside face of said glue flap being glued to the outside
face of said primary floor panel, and
a gusset flap foldably connected to said floor support panel
and foldably connected to said secondary floor, said gus-
set flap cooperatmg with both said primary and secondary
floors to minimize sag of said carrier floor when said
carrier is loaded, and to automatically unfold said primary
floor into its set-up position as said carrier is erected from
its knock-down position.
4,378,882
STORAGE DEVICE FOR nSHING REELS
James A. Miller, 204 E. Diamond St., KendallTille, Ind. 46755
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,932
Int. C\? B65D 85/00. 85/62. 81/00; A63B 55/00
U.S. a. 206—315 R 10 Claims
1. A storage device for fishing reels comprising an enclosure
having an access opening and a first wall, a plurality of spaced
supporting posts secured at one end to said wall and projecting
outwardly therefrom, each of said posts having CWo spaced
reel-retaining keepers thereon, one of said keepers being se-
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
107
cured against movement and the other being movable longitu-
dinally of the respective post, and first means for holding said
I_."a_
movable keeper against movement away from said secured
keeper.
i 4,378,883
BICYCLE CARRYING CASE
Joseph G. Profeta, 16810 5th Ave. East, Spanaway, Wash. 98387
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,467
Int. a.3 B60R 9/10
U.S. a. 206-335 4 Qaims
rC
36 -\
1. A bicycle container comprising:
a container body dimensioned to hold a bicycle therein includ-
ing a closure openable to allow the introduction of a bicycle
into said container body and closable to secure the bicycle
therein;
said container body including an aperture therethrough posi-
tioned to coincide with an open region of the frame of the
bicycle contained therein;
whereby said bicycle container may be carried by engagement
therewith through said opening; and
wherein said aperture is of sufficient size to allow the container
to be carried on the shoulder with a person's arm extending
therethrough.
said merchandise carrying means carrying merchandise
having common characteristics;
multiple merchandise identifying mdicia located on said
merchandise said identifying indicia being associated with
said common characteristics; and
an identifying placard mounted to said display surface and
having indicia generally identifying the merchandise dis-
played by said display surfaces; the improvement in selec-
tion means carried by said placard comprising:
a matrix of indicia, said matrix having a first axis comprising
requirement indicia associated with one characteristic of
the displayed merchandise,
a second axis comprising requirement indicia associated with
another characteristic of the displayed merchandise; and
^
a body comprising selection indicia aligned with said re-
quirement indicia and corresponding with said merchan-
dise identifying indicia;
whereby merchandise of predetermined characteristics can
be selected from the displayed merchandise by locating
the requirement indicia corresponding with each of said
predetermined characteristics along the respective axis of
said matrix determining the selection indicia of said matnx
associated with said requirement indicia, and the selecting
the merchandise identified by the merchandise identifying
indicia corresponding with said selection indicia of said
matrix.
4,378,885
PILL BOX
Norbert Leopoidi, Chicago, and William P. Heinrich, McHenry,
both of III., assignors to Qoverline, Inc., Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,921
Int. a.3 B65D 8i/04. 85/56. 43/14
U.S. a. 206-540 3 c\una
4,378 884
APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR THE DISPLAY AND
SELECnON OF MERCHANDISE
David N. Anderson, 16210 Meadowcrest, Sherman Oaks, Calif.
91403
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,515
Int. a.3 B65D 73/00; A47F 7/00
U.S. a. 206-459 8 Qaims
1. In apparatus for the display and selection of merchandise,
said merchandise having a plurality of identifying characteris-
tics and including:
a display surface for displaying merchandise;
multiple merchandise carrying means mounted to said dis-
play surface for carrying displayed merchandise, each of
1. A pill box of circular form comprised of a top box mem-
ber, a bottom box member, and an enclosure surrounding the
top and bottom box members and having relative sliding move-
c
108
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
ment around the box parts to control the loading and discharge
of pills from the pill box, said box members each have an
outstanding rim forming a track upon which the enclosure is
mounted, a guideway in the enclosure embracing both said
outstanding rims, said guideway overlapping said rims to main-
tain said top and bottom box members in assembled relation,
said bottom box member having an annular bearing seat
around the inner periphery thereof, said top box member
formed with an annular depending flange fitting into said
bearing seat, said outstanding rim members on the top and
bottom box members limiting entry of said depending annular
flange into said bearing seat, said top and bottom box members
each having an opening disposed in opposite relation which
when aligned form a pill discharge opening in the assembled
pill box members, said enclosure being formed with an opening
adapted to register with said opposed openings in the top and
bottom boxes when the enclosure is rotated to align the open-
ing therein with the opposed openings in the box members, a
key way formed in a facing edge of one of said box members,
and a key formed in an opposing edge of the other box mem-
ber, said key and keyway being engaged to interlock the box
members against relative rotation.
I 30
^
B
in-. 1
4,378,887
SPHERICAL FRUIT ASSORTING INSTRUMENT
Toru Ishii, 14-Go, 3-Ban, 4-Chome Takehata-Cho, Matsuyama-
shi, Ehime-Prefecture, Japan (790)
Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,641
Int. a.3 B07C 5/06
U.S. a. 209—622 5 Qaims
4,378,886
DECOMPOSITION APPARATUS WITH REVERSIBLE
REMOVAL CONVEYOR
Hanns Roediger, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Techtransfer GmbH & Co. KG, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,068
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 20,
1979, 2937965
Int. a.3 B07C 5/36
U.S. a. 209—606 8 Qaims
1. A spherical fruit assorting instrument comprising:
(a) an endless conveyor;
(b) a plurality of spaced shafts carried by the conveyor;
(c) a plurality of assorting plates pivotally carried by each
shaft, with the assorting plates being provided with
throughholes which decrease in diameter from the upper-
most assorting plate to the lowermost assorting plate
when the assorting plates are collectively disposed in a
horizontal disposition;
(d) means for maintaining the assorting plates in the horizon-
tal disposition;
(e) guide means for permitting the assorting plates of each
shaft to sequentially pivot downwardly about the shaft
during movement of the conveyor;
(f) a receiving plate pivotally carried by each shaft and
disposed beneath the lowermost assorting plate for releas-
ing fruits from the assorting plates;
(g) shock absorbing means carried by each receiving plate
and aligned with the throughholes of its corresponding
assorting plate; and
(h) stopper means carried by each shaft for limiting the
pivotal movement of the receiving plate and maintaining
same in a vertical disposition.
4,378,888
UMBRELLA SUPPORT FOR USE IN VEHICLES
Judson D. Reed, 9110 Wire Aye., Silver Spring, Md. 20901
Filed Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,002
Int. a.5 A47G 25/12
U.S. CI. 211—63 17 aaims
1. Apparatus for the aerobic decomposition of garbage,
sludge, and similar organic waste materials, said apparatus
including a reaction container (10) for the material to be de-
composed having vertical walls and a lower discharge opening
with discharge elements (14) extending over the entire area of
the discharge opening, and a removal device located below the
discharge opening and extending at least across its entire
width, characterized by: the discharge opening (12) extending
over the entire cross-section of the container, a first receptacle
(22) for material that has not been adequately purified, a sec-
ond receptacle (24) for purified material spaced from said first
recepUcle, and the removal device comprising a reversible
direction conveyor belt (16) disposed between said first and
second receptacles for transporting material removed from the
discharge opening (12) to either said first or second recepta-
cles.
1. An umbrella support for use in vehicles, comprising:
a mounting plate defining first and second substantially
planar and parallel sides;
a trough member projecting from a first side of said mount-
ing plate for receiving and supporting a folded umbrella;
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
109
said trough member enclosed at and adjacent to a first end
thereof to form a tubular receptacle for said umbrella
substantially along one-half the length of said trough
member;
said trough member defining an upwardly opening open
portion at and adjacent to a second end thereof, said open
portion extending substantially along one-half the length
of said trough member; and
said tubular receptacle defining a drain hole in fiuid commu-
nication between said first and second sides of said mount-
ing plate for enabling water to drain from said receptacle.
4,378,889
SPICE RACK AND BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Sam Lebowitz, New York, N.Y., assignor to Copco, Inc., Secau-
cus, N.J.
j Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,853
' Int. a.3 A47F 7/28
U.S. CI. 211—75 8 Oaims
i==m^^:-
■U
\. An improved telescoping uncoupling lever for uncoupling
i . ■ '
railroad cars having a coupler and a support bracket mounted
to the endsill thereof, said lever including first and second
adjacent longitudinal housings, first and second telescoping
members slidably received by said first and second housmgs,
respectively, each telescoping member having a distal end and
a proximal end, a handle member connected to the distal end of
said first telescoping member including a handle portion for
being pivotally supported by said support bracket, an uncou-
pling arm connected to the distal end of said telescoping mem-
ber for engaging said coupler, the improvement comprising:
(a) first bearing disposed between said first telescoping mem-
ber and said first housing;
(b) second bearing disposed between said second telescoping
member and said second housing, said first and second
bearings slidable with respect to the telescoping member
and the housing associated therewith, said bearings dimen-
sioned to prevent axial rotation of each telescoping mem-
ber relative to its associated housing thereby transmitting
torque from one telescoping member to the other tele-
scoping member; and
(c) means for captivating said first and second bearings
within said first and second housings, respectively, said
first and second bearings cooperating with said captivat-
ing means to allow the proximal end of each telescoping
member to extend beyond its associated housing without
restriction due to said bearings.
if 1. A rack and bracket assembly whose rack is adapted to
hold an array of bottles containing different spices or other
products, said assembly comprising:
(A) a rack constituted by a staircase frame having a series of
steps, each formed by a landing and a wall normal thereto,
each landing having a row of semi-circular notches
therein, each notch lying in registration with a semi-circu-
lar well projecting rearwardly from the associated wall to
define one half of a bottle-receiving socket which is com-
pleted by a semi-circular shield projecting forwardly from
the wall; and
(B) a bracket operatively coupled to the rack to supjwrt it at
a desired position.
4,378,890
TELESCOPING UNCOUPLING LEVER FOR RAILROAD
CARS
Kenneth G. Empson, 470 N. Broadway, Aurora, 111. 60507
1 Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,681
Int. a.3 B61G im
U.S. a. 213—166 18 Qaims
4,378,891
BOTTLE CLOSURE
Thomas A. Fowles, McHenry; Glenn L. Slater, Ingleside, both of
III., and David A. Winchell, Twin Lakes, Wis., assignors to
Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc., Deerfield, III.
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,604
Int. a.^ B65D 1/02
U.S. a. 215—32 6 Qaims
1. In a hermetically sealed plastic container having a neck, a
top integrally formed with the neck, a frangible line of weak-
ness defined between the neck and top and a threaded jackmg
ring operable upon rotation to exert axial force on the top to
sever it from the neck along the line of weakness, the improve-
ment comprising, in combination:
a separately-formed closure interior of said container, said
closure comprising a tubular member retained in fluid-
tight position within the neck and defining a dispensing
outlet for the container, and means normally closing said
dispensing outlet, whereby said interior closure may be
maintained in sterile condition within the hermetically
sealed plastic container until the top thereof is removed
for dispensing.
110
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^78,892
CLOSURE CAP WITH METALLIC INNERSEAL AND
SEALED PACKAGE
Charles S. Ochs, Lancaster, and Carl E. Koontz, Thom?ille,
both of Ohio, assignors to Anchor Hocking Corporation,
Lancaster, Ohio
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,749
Int. a.3 B65D 41/18
U.S. a. 215—232 13 Qaims
1. A closure cap for sealing a container having a sealing
finish including a rounded corner and a closure retaining bead
at its rim comprising a molded plastic shell with a cover and a
depending skirt, a stacking ring at the outer edge of said cover,
a retaining bead on the inside of said skirt, a metallic innerseal
positioned within said plastic shell at the underside of said
cover, said cover and said skirt being relatively thin and
readily deformable under pressure, said retaining bead on said
closure skirt being on the upper portion of said skirt for engag-
ing the container bead, said innerseal extending into the corner
between said closure cover and said skirt for wrapping around
the container finish comer and the distance between said clo-
sure cap retaining bead and a portion of the closure cap cover
above the inner edge of the container rim being proportioned
to stretch the closure cap plastic at the corner between the
closure cap cover and skirt for locking the cap onto the con-
tainer.
4,378,893
COMPOSITE CLOSURE
Sheldon L. Wilde; Thomas J. McCandless, both of Crawfords-
ville, and Robert M. Saunders, Ladoga, all of Ind., assignors to
H-C Industries, InCV Crawfordsville, Ind.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 77,566, Sep. 21, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,241
Int. C\? B65D 53/04 1
U.S. a. 215—246 74 Qaims
said pedestals having a free end spaced from said top wall
portion, said free ends being spaced from each other to
defme liner-receiving spaces therebetween, said pilfer
band having an internal diameter at least as large as the
internal diameter of said skirt for insertion onto said con-
tainer; and
a plastic liner disposed in said cap and connected to and
retained within said cap by said pedestals, said plastic liner
having a resilient annular sealing bead adjacent said skirt
for resiliently sealing against the fmish of said container
and a centrally disposed disc-shaped portion extending
substantially across and connected to said annular sealing
bead, said centrally disposed disc-shaped portion extend-
ing from a position adjacent said top wall portion to a
position spaced from the free ends of said pedestals in a
direction generally away from said top wall portion, said
disc-shaped portion providing a generally planar surface
for substantially covering the mouth of said container;
wherein said cap has an internal annular lip extending in-
wardly of said skirt providing a retainer for engaging and
retaining said plastic liner and for providing a seal during
the liner-forming process.
4,378,894
TAMPER-EVIDENT CLOSURE
W. Coy Willis, Hagerstown, and Leman P. Albrecht, Richmond,
both of Ind., assignors to Aluminum Company of America,
Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,306
Int. a.3 B65D 41/34
U.S. Q. 215—252 5 Claims
1. A composite closure for a container, such as a bottle,
having a neck and a fmish about the mouth of said container,
comprising:
a plastic cap formed of spirally orientated molecules for
enhanced strength, said plastic cap having a top wall
portion with an underside, an internally threaded annular
skirt depending from said top wall portion and a heat-
shrinkable pilfer band detachably connected to said skirt,
said top wall portion having a plurality of liner-engaging
pedestals extending from its underside in generally normal
relation thereto in an area bounded by said skirt, each of
1. A tamper-evident closure assembly for engaging and
closing the open mouth of a container by rotation of the clo-
sure with respect to the container and comprising:
a cap portion having a skirt wall including means thereon for
engaging closure retaining means on the outer surface of a
container mouth and an integral portion located centrally of
the top of said skirt wall and connected thereto by frangible
bridge means;
a rigid disc liner underlying said integral portion and affixed
thereto, said liner having sufficient radial extent for dispo-
sition of an outer edge portion thereof against a container
wall around the container mouth and being adapted to seal
the same against the container mouth to an extent sufficient
to prevent separation of the seal during at least a first portion
of rotational movement of the closure in effecting a disen-
gagement of the closure from the container and thereby said
liner and said integral portion are restrained from being
rotated with the closure during at least a first portion of
removal of the closure from the container to cause fracture
of at least a portion of said bridge means.
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
^ 4^78,895
CONTAINER-CXOSURE ARRANGEMENT
Peter A. Woinarski, WooUahra, Australia, assignor to Innova-
tive Design G>mpany Pty. Limited, Woollahra, Australia
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,561
, Claims priority, application Australia, Jan. 27, 1981, PE7371
Int. a.3 B65D 41/16. 41/18
U.S. a. 220— 306 ISQaims
' 1. A container-closure arrangement comprising a plastics
material container and a plastics material closure therefor; the
container having a lip incorporating a radially inwardly di-
rected bead which defines an opening to the container, and the
closure comprising a central portion which locates within the
container opening and a rim portion which engages the con-
tainer lip when the closure is fitted to the container; the rim
portion of the closure including an inner skirt which locates
within the lip of the container, the inner skirt having a radially
outwardly projecting ledge which normally engages with an
undercut below the container bead, and the inner skirt being
formed with a portion which depends below the ledge and
which flares downwardly and radially inwardly to merge with
the central portion of the closure; the flared portion of the
closure incorporating a zone having a section thickness which
is less than that of the adjacent portions of the closure whereby
the closure will tend to deform predominatly in such zone in
the event that the closure is subjected to an impact force, and
the zone of reduced section thickness being disposed generally
on an imaginary line which extends upwardly and outwardly
at an acute angle to the longitudinal axis of the container.
4,378,896
REMOVABLE HATCH LID
Claude M. Begnaud, Houma, La., assignor to Texaco Inc., White
Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,098
Int. a.J B65D 45/00
U.S. a. 220—327 6 Qaims
1. A removable hatch lid for attaching suction means to
degas fumes from a large tank, wherein said tank has at least
one hatch with a coaming integral therewith,
said coaming havmg a flange on one edge only for bolting to
said tank,
said hatch lid comprising
impervious planar means for contacting said flangess edge of
said coaming to close said hatch,
means for fastening said planar means in sealing relation with
said flangless edge of said coaming, and
111
gas tight means for coupling said suction means to said
planar means for degasing said large tank.
4,378,897
VOLUMETRIC FEEDING APPARATUS FOR
MATERIALS IN BULK FORM
Harry R. Kattelmann, Oakland, Calif., assignor to Fabricated
Metals, Inc., San Leandro, Calif.
Filed Jun. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 161,510
Int. a.5 B67D 5/08
U.S. O. 222—56 9 Claims
1. Apparatus for volumetric feeding of bulk material com-
prising:
(a) a hopper;
(b) inlet means disposed above said hopper for controlling the
dep>osit of bulk material into said hopper;
(c) discharge means disposed below said hopper for control-
ling the discharge of bulk material from said hopper;
(d) an upper level sensor mounted on said hopper and activated
in response to the bulk material in said hopper reaching a
predetermined height;
(e) a lower level sensor mounted on said hopper and activated
in response to the bulk material in said hopper falling below
a predetermined height;
(0 control means responsive to the activation of said upper
level sensor for closing said inlet means to interrupt the
dejxjsit of bulk material into said hopper and for opening
said discharge means for the discharge of bulk material from
said hopper, said control means being responsive to the
activation of said lower level sensor for closing said dis-
charge means to interrupt the discharge of bulk material
from said hopper and for opening said inlet means for the
deposit of bulk material into said hopper;
(g) a vibrator feeder disposed below said discharge means in
communication with said discharge means for controlling
the rate at which bulk material is discharged from said appa-
ratus, said vibrator feeder comprising a cavity to receive the
bulk material from said hopper, said cavity being of a volu-
metric capacity to hold a sufficient quantity of bulk material
to continue the flow of bulk material from said apparatus
during the intermittent periods in which said discharge
means are closed; and
(h) a vacuum conduit connected to said hopper for providing
a vacuum for said hopi>er to aerate the bulk material in said
hopper and to reverse air flow in said hopper for inhibiting
an uncontrolled flow of bulk material from said hopper
when said discharge means are opened.
112
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,378,898
CARGO CARRIER
Paul A. Smeenge, 7955 Shadybrook, SE., Ada, Mich. 49301, and
George Smeenge, A-3977 Beeline Rd., Holland, Mich. 49423
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,597
Int. a.^ B60M 9/04
U.S. a. 224—328 17 Qaims
..-^^
4,378,900
MACHINE WITH HNGERGUARD
Otto Sauermilch, Stolberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
WUUam Prym-Werke KG, Stolberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 136,965
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 14,
1979, 2915327
Int. Q\? B21J 15/10, 15/28
U.S. a. 227-8 7 Qaims
9 s
1. A cargo carrier comprising:
a tray-shaped base cargo container having a generally hori-
zontal bottom portion and continuous generally vertical
side walls with a continuous flange extending outwardly
in a horizontal direction from the lower edge of the side
walls, the exterior of said walls being tapered inwardly;
means for mounting the base to the roof of a vehicle;
continuous resilient base sealing means for preventing the
entry of air into the space between the bottom of the base
and the roof of the vehicle;
an inverted tray-shaped removable cover having a generally
horizontal top portion and downwardly extending contin-
uous side walls with a continuous flange extending out-
wardly in a horizontal direction from the lower edge of
the side walls, the inside dimensions of the cover being
larger than the outside dimensions of the base such that
when placed over the base, the cover side walls surround
the base side walls and the bottom surface of the cover
flange rests flatly on the top surface of the base flange; and
means for attaching the cover to the base to permit said
cover to be opened in a clamshell fashion from either side.
1. Machine, comprising a workpiece support for a work-
piece; a lower tool and a cooperating upper tool; movable first
means mounting said upper tool for downward movement
prior to and during a working step towards said lower tool and
workpiece support; a fingerguard surrounding said upper tool;
fmgerguard moving means operating as a function of said first
means and mounting said fingerguard for downward move-
ment prior to a working step toward said lower tool and said
workpiece support so that said fingerguard moves down-
wardly ahead of said upper tool; second means mounting said
lower tool with limited freedom of receding during the work-
ing step from the approaching downwardly moving first
means; biasing means for resiliently resisting the receding of
said lower tool during the working step; and third means
mounting said workpiece support, said third means being con-
nected to said first means for displacing said workpiece support
between at least an upper and a lower end position as a func-
tion of the movement of said first means.
4,378,899
TAPE DRIVE CAPSTAN
Herbert F. Sanford, Littleton, Colo., assignor to Honeywell,
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,850
Int. a.3B65H 17/22
U.S. a. 226—188 6 Qaims
4,378,901
APPARATUS FOR APPLYING A STAPLE SUTURE
Ernest M. Akopov, Alexeevsky studentchesky gorodok, 6b pro-
ezd, dom 5a, kv. 28, and July G. Shaposhinikov, ulitsa Chai-
kovskogo, 18, kv. 6, both of Moscow, U.S.S.R.
Filed May 22, 1980, Ser. No. 153,625
Int. a.3 B25C 5/00
U.S. a. 227—19 6 Oaims
/rnir
—
MOTOR
.
J
4
r
6
i
1. A surgical instrument for applying a staple suture com-
prising:
1. A capstan comprising a y^^^ constituted by a substantially D -shaped frame having a
a matnx of ceramic particles forming a network of intersti- side and a pair of legs extending therefrom, said legs having
tial interconnected pores and respective free ends which are capable of moving toward
an elastomer matenal substantially filling said pores to pro- each other due to resilience of said n -shaped frame;
vide a surface on said matrix having a Upe driving capabil- a rod detachably carried by said free ends of said legs at respec-
■^y- tive areas of interaction to impart rigidity to said frame, said
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
113
rod being formed with a pair of inwardly facing stop sur-
faces, each of which embraces an outwardly facing surface
formed on a respective one of said free ends so as to define
a lock joint therewith;
retaining means formed on said free ends for fixing said rod in
position when said lock joint is defined, said retaining means
including a retainer shoulder formed on each of said free /
ends, each shoulder extending outwardly beyond a respec- '■'^' ^' ^29— 6 R
tive one of said outwardly facing surfaces formed on said ;
free ends, and wherein the extent of movement of said free;
ends toward each other is determined by the size of said
retainer shoulders;
said rod and said free ends of the frame legs being formed with
respective flat spots at said areas of interaction, said fiat spots ;
being located in planes which are substantially parallel to the .
plane on which said frame is situated, said flat spots formed
on said rod being contiguous with said flat spots formed on
said free ends;
one of said legs and said rod being receivable within the other
of said free legs and said rod in the direction defined by said
legs;
a die having recesses formed therein mounted on one of said
legs;
a staple head carrying a staple magazine slidably mounted in
said frame;
ejection means mounted on said frame for driving staples from
said magazine; |
means for actuating said staple head; and
means for actuating said ejection means.
4^78,903
HANGING TAB WITH SINGLE LINE OF ADHESIVE
AND HANGING HOLE CLEAR OF ADHESIVE
Irvin W. Sherwood, Downers Grove, III., assignor to Champion
International Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
TiTed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,493
Int. a.' B65D 5/46
4 Claims
/
4,378,902
APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING WIRE SAG IN THE
WIRE BONDING PROCESS FOR PRODUCING
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Tibbr Fedak, Huntingdon Valley, Pa., assignor to The Jade
Corporation, Huntingdon Valley, Pa.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,327
Int. aj H05K 1/04
U.S. a. 228—6 A 1 Qaim
1. In an apparatus for the assembly of microcomponent
semiconductor devices wherein there is accomplished a step in
which thin conductor wires are bonded between bonding pads
on a semiconductor chip and leads for connecting the semicon-
ductor or device to an external circuit, wherein a capillary tube
from which the wire is drawn articulates between positions
above a bonding pad of the chip and above a corresponding
lead, and wherein a lower anvil reciprocates upward to a
position underneath and supporting the chip during the bond-
ing step and then downward away from the semiconductor
chip after the bonding step, the improvement comprising a
vertical wall projecting upwardly from the upper surface of
the lower anvil and surrounding the chip between the bonding
pads and the leads during the bonding step, the vertical height
of the wall being greater than the vertical height of the chip
and the leads so that the wires, after being bonded to the bond-
ing pads, are supported by the wall as the wires are withdrawn
from the capillary tube and bonded to the leads.
1. A hanging assembly connected to an end of a paperboard
container wall, said hanging assembly comprising:
(a) a first panel foldably connected to said end of said con-
tainer wall, said first panel being provided with a through
hole, and said first panel being folded about a first fold line
into face-to-face contact with a surface of said container
wall;
(b) a second pane) foldably connected to said first panel, said
second panel being provided with a cut score line defining
a plug conforming to the shape of said through hole, and
said second panel being folded about a second fold hne
into face-to-face contact with said first panel with said
plug being contiguous to said through hole;
(c) adhesive means disposed between said first and second
panels to adhesively secure said panels together to form a
compound hanging tab, said adhesive means extending
across said plug and being operative, via said through
opening, to adhesively secure said plug and said hanging
tab to said container wall;
(d) said score line being operable to rupture when said hang-
ing tab is pivoted to an operative position away from said
container wall about said first fold line thereby leaving
said plug adhered to said container wall and, forming a
compound opening through said hanging tab; and
(e) said container wall includes an embossed portion project-
ing into said through opening to provide a limited area for
securement of said plug to said container wall.
4,378,904
COLLAPSIBLE OPEN SIDE CARTON
Duane R. Mode, Edina, Minn., assignor to Champion Interna-
tional Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,590
Int. a.3 B65D 5/36
U.S. a. 229—41 B 4 Claims
1. A collapsible paperboard carton comprising:
(a) opposed front and back panels;
(b) opposed end panels foldably connected to opposite ends
of said front and back panels; and
(c) opposed side panels foldably connected to opposite sides
of one of said front and back panels, said side panels being
free of connection with said end panels and the other of
114
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
said front and back panels, said side panels being folded
inwardly into the confines of said carton in face-to-face
engagement with said front and back panels when said
carton is in a flattened collapsed form, and said side pan-
els, due to the inherent springiness of the paperboard.
4,378,906
SOLID JACKET CENTRIFUGE FOR MATERIAL
EXCHANGE BETWEEN LIQUIDS
Wolfgang Epper, Bergheiin, and Theodor Paschedag, Beckum,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Klockner-Hum-
boldt-Deutz AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 2834^1
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 17,
1980, 3027020
Int. a.3 B04B 1/20
U.S. a. 494—54 10 Qaims
being operable to swing to a position disposed at an acute
angle with respect to said one of said front and back
panels, when said carton is in an expanded form and at
least one end edge of each of said side panels being dis-
posed in engagement with at least one of said end panels to
retain said carton in said expanded form.
4,378,905
CARTON WITH STRAP HANDLE AND BLANK FOR
FORMING SAME
Harry I. Roccaforte, Western Springs, 111., assignor to Cham-
pion International Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 253,011, Apr. 10, 1981,
abandoned. This application Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,659
Int. C1.3 B65D 5/46, 25/28
U.S. a. 229—52 B 3 Qaims
,06.*.96— ' 90 78
.80
74
^62
r
1. A carton, comprising
top and bottom walls;
front, back and side walls connecting said top and bottom
walls;
said top wall having inner and outer panels extending from
said front and back walls, respectively, and being over-
lapped and secured together;
first and second side flaps extending from opposite side
edges of said outer top panels and secured to the inside of
said side walls;
inner and outer elongated handle panels foldably connected
together and formed from portions of said outer top panel
and said side flaps, extending substantially parallel to and
equally spaced from the top edges of said front and back
walls and substantially perpendicular to said side walls,
said outer handle panel being defined by a perforated
score line formed in said outer top panel which extends
entirely across the length of said outer top panel and
substantially parallel to said top edges of said front and
back walls and only partially across each of said side flaps
and by a handle fold line formed in said outer top panel
and extends parallel to said score line and across the entire
length of said outer top panel and said side flaf)S and is
located between said score line and the top edge of said
front panel, said inner handle panel being defined between
said handle fold line and by said perforated score line,
when severed, of said outer top panel and underlying and
being secured to said outer handle panel.
1. A jacketed centrifuge for exchanging material between
liquids, at least one of which contains suspended solids, com-
prising:
a housing,
a drum mounted for rotation within said housing,
a conveyor worm mounted for rotation coaxially with said
drum,
inlet and outlet means for introducing a relatively light
liquid into said drum and withdrawing it from said drum,
inlet and outlet means for introducing a heavier liquid hav-
ing solids suspended therein into said drum and out of said
drum, and
discharge means for discharging solids from said drum,
said drum having a larger cross-sectional area at said dis-
charge means than at either inlet means, and said dis-
charge means being located at the area of greatest radius
of said drum.
4,378,907
DUAL FUNCnON THERMAL VALVE
Nobuyuki Hashimoto, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Aisin Seiki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 98,752, Nov. 30, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,693
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 6, 1978, 53-151754
Int. a.3 G05D 23/W
U.S. a. 236—48 R 6 Claims
6. A thermally responsive valve assembly comprising two
paths, a first valve mechanism, a second valve mechanism, said
first and second valve mechanisms being interposed between
the two paths to provide for two parallel passages joining the
first and second paths, the second valve mechanism including
an orifice and a valve and seat assembly for closing the orifice
or opening the orifice to permit throttled flow between said
two paths, and said first valve mechanism, when open, permit-
ting full flow between said two paths, said assembly further
comprising a cavity disposed remotely from the valve mecha-
nisms, a first bimetallic element, a second bimetallic element,
the first and second bimetallic elements being of different
thermal responsive character and held in the cavity, two mo-
tion transfer members respectively operatively comiecting the
first and second bimetallic elements to the first and second
valve mechanisms, and isolating means for isolating the cavity
from the first and second valve mechanisms, whereby the first
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
115
and second paths are fluidly connected through said orifice
when in an open position, and whereby said orifice is bypassed
by the first valve mechanism when said first valve mechanism
is in an opened position, wherein said first valve mechanism
comprises a seat formed in a portion of said body and a first
Meo«
valve disposed adjacent to the seat, wherein said first valve
mechanism further comprises first spring means biasing said
first valve against said first bimetallic element and said second
valve mechanism further comprises second spring means an-
chored between said first and second valves to thereby nor-
mally urge said second valve to said second bimetallic element.
4,378,908
REVERSIBLE SOLAR ASSISTED HEAT PUMP
Robert A, Wood, 59425 10 MUe, Apt. 6B, South Lyon, Mich.
48178
j FUed Dec. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 101,687
! Int. a.3 605D 23/00
U.S. a. 237—2 B 7 Claims
h\r" -
2. In a solar assisted heating system comprising at least one
solar collector panel in fluid communication with a storage
tank in fluid communication with a heat pump, a heat transfer
package located in said storage tank, said package comprising
a container having a lower chamber, a middle chamber, and an
upper chamber, and wherein said lower chamber has a main
pump therein for selectively effecting the transfer of fluid into
said middle chamber under pressure and wherein said middle
chamber is connected to a conduit communicating with said
panel and to a conduit communicating with said heat pump.
4,378,909
nSH-PLATES FOR ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTING
RAILWAY RAILS
Rene Oger, Ville D' Array, France, assignor to C. Deiachaux,
Genneyiliiers, France
FUed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,618
Oaiik-pclprity, application France, Not. 6, 1979, 79 27304
Int. dj.3 B60M 5/00: EOIB 11/04; HOIR 3/06
U.S. a. 238^244 5 claims
1. A fish-plate for joining together two electrically conduct-
ing railway rails, each railway rail comprising a conventional
rail including a foot, a head and a web extending between the
head and the foot, and two conducting sections extending
along the entire length of the conventional rail, between the
foot and the head thereof, and forming the side walls of the
rail, said fish-plate comprising:
two fish-plate sections for location one on each side of adja-
cent ends of the two electrically conducting railway rails
to be joined,
a surface on each of said two fish-plate sections for contact-
ing co-operating surfaces of the conducting sections form-
ing the side walls of the two electrically conducting rail-
way rails,
teeth on each said surface of each of said two fish-plate
sections, said teeth extending parallel to the length of the
electrically conducting railway rails for engagement with
complementary teeth formed on said co-operating sur-
faces of the conducting sections,
at least two bolts for passing through the two fish-plate
sections, the conducting sections and the conventional
rails to draw the two fish-plate sections towards one an-
other and against the electrically conducting railway rails
with the teeth on the surfaces of the fish-plate sections in
engagement with the teeth of the co-operating surfaces of
the conducting sections of the electrically conducting
railway rails, and
means for allowing relative vertical adjustment between the
electrically conducting railway rails and the two fish-plate
sections to enable the fish-plate to be located at various
heights relative to each of the electrically conducting
railway rails such that the electrically conducting railway
rails may be joined with their upper surfaces in alignment
even though they may be of a different height.
4,378,910
ELASTICALLY YIELDABLE DEVICE FOR nXING A
RAIL ON A SUPPORT
Roger P. Sonneville, 1507 Gordon Cove Rd., Annapolis, Md.
21403
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 179,880, Aug. 20, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 290,055
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jun. 30, 1980, 80 14523
Int a.3 EOIB 9/00. 9/48
U.S. a. 238—349 14 Claims
1. An elastically yieldable device in combination with a rail
and a support for fixing the rail on the support, said device
comprising a spring which has a first branch rigid with the
support at a first end of the spring, a bent portion and a second
branch which is connected to the first branch by the bent
portion and extends from the bent portion towards the rail, the
second branch having a thickness which progressively de-
creases in the direction of the rail to a thin end portion of the
116
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
spring adjacent a second end of the spring opposed to said first
end thereof and a length less than a distance between the
curved portion of the spring and the flange of the rail, and a
compensating block which bears at one end of the block on the
said nut having a central opening including a restricting sur-
face,
locking means threadably insertable through said opening of
said nut into the end of said shaft having a holding member
which said nut in the tendency to rotate is caused to engage
to prevent rotation thereof.
4 378 912
SHEET MATERIAL DISPENSER APPARATUS
Jack L. Perrin, Los Angeles; Council A. Tucker, Glendale, and
Oliver B. Gains, Arcadia, all of Calif., assignors to Crown
Zellerbach Corporation, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,257
Int. a? B65H 19/04; G03B 1/58
U.S. a. 242—55.3 4 Claims
flange of the rail and at an opposite end of the block on the
support and is clamped by the thin end portion of the spring at
an intermediate point of the block in the vicinity of the edge of
the flange of the rail but outside the rail.
4,378,911
CAGE MILL
Thomas O. Adams, Lawrenceburg, and Jim A. Henke, Aurora,
both of Ind., assignors to Wean United, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jul. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 165,517
Int. a.5 B02C 13/22
U.S. a. 241—187 21 Qaims
L
1^ " - ^ '/
:zi
'67 .97 --:;■
1. In a cage mill for disintegrating or reducing material
comprising:
a housing forming a material reducing chamber,
two axially opposed shafts each having their one end extended
in said chamber,
each said shaft includes a hub having a bore for mounting on a
complimentary portion of said extended end,
cooperating cage assemblies connected to and for rotation with
a different one of said hubs,
means for maintainmg each said hub and its respective cage
assembly on their respective shaft comprising:
a split ring arranged concentrically with said extended end
portion of said shaft and having inner peripheral and outer
peripheral load transmitting surfaces, said latter surfaces
engaging with an associated cage assembly in a manner to
oppose movement of the hub axially towards the end of the
shaft,
a nut threadably mounted on the outer end of said shaft having
an outer peripheral load transmitting surface for engaging
said inner surface of said split ring in a manner to oppose
movement of the ring axially toward the end of the shaft.
1. In a dispenser cabinet for sequentially dispensing sheet
material from a primary roll and a reserve roll, the improve-
ment comprising:
a plurality of selectively rotatable rollers, at least two of said
rollers defining a nip and at least one of said rollers having
at least one depression formed therein;
sensing means in registry with said depression and urged
theretoward, said sensing means engageable with sheet
material being dispensed from said primary roll along a
predetermined path between the sensing means and de-
pression and prevented by said primary roll sheet material
from entering said depression;
tucker means for engaging sheet material from said reserve
roll and introducing said reserve roll sheet material into
said nip responsive to the absence of said primary roll
sheet material between the sensing means and depression
and to the subsequent entry of said sensing means into said
depression; and
mounting means, said sensing means and said tucker means
being mounted for joint pivotal movement about said
mounting means.
4 378 913
DEVICE FOR SECURING AGAINST AXIAL
DISPLACEMENT
Artur Fdhl, Schomdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Repa
Feinstanzwerk GmbH, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 917, Jan. 4, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,925
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 5,
1978, 2800497
Int. a.5 F16B 21/02
U.S. a. 242—74 2 Claims
1. Device for securing an element projecting through an
opening against axial displacement of the element comprising a
first end of the element projecting through the opening being
formed with a noncircular cross-section and with a peripheral
slot, a closed substantially circular perforated disc mounted on
said projecting first end for rotating therewith and having at
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
117
least a part thereof formed of material harder than that of the
element, said perforated disc having an inner contour corre-
sponding to the cross-section of said projecting first end, slot-
shaped recesses interrupting said inner contour, at least one
projection formed at an outer peripheral region thereof within
the substantially circular periphery thereof for facilitating
turning thereof and, after being mounted on said projecting
first end, said perforated disc being tumable relative to the
element to an extent that at least said part thereof formed of
said harder material engages in said peripheral slot, a U-shaped
bearing bracket having said opening formed therein and an-
other opening formed therein, said perforated disc being dis-
posed outside said bracket, said element having a second end
and being a shaft rotatably projecting through said openings
and having another slot formed therein between said ends for
securing the end of a safety belt, and another projection larger
than said other opening being integral with said second end
outside said bracket.
4,378^14
UNIFORM DRAG SYSTEM FOR SPIN CAST REELS
John T. Shackelford, Littleton, Colo., and Robert L. Carpenter,
Tulsa, Okla., assignors to Brunswick Corporation, Skokie, 111.
FUed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 289,067
Int. a.3 AoiK moi
U.S. a. 242—84.21 A 16 Claims
1. In a spinning reel including a cylindrical reel body having
a deck plate, a forwardly extending hub affixed to the deck
plate and having an opening therethrough, a spool carried by
the hub forwardly of the deck plate, a center shaft extending
axially through the opening in the deck plate and the hub, a
crank drive mechanism mounted in the reel body for rotating
the center shaft, the improvement including:
(a) rotatable shaft means extending through the deck plate
along an axis lying parallel to the axis of the center shaft;
(b) a clutchwheel affixed on said shaft means and having a
portion extending outward beyond the surface of the reel
body, said shaft means being rotated by said clutchwheel
and being movable transversely of said clutchwheel;
(c) a gear affixed on said shaft means;
(d) second gear means rotatably mounted about said hub and
located between said spool and said deck plate, said sec-
ond gear means being in meshing relationship with said
first named gear; and
(e) means for moving said second gear means toward and
away from said spool upon turning said clutchwheel.
4,378,915
BRAKING DEVICE FOR SAFETY BELTS
Artur Fdhl, Schoradorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aMignor to Repa
Feinstanzwerk GmbH, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,758
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 14,
1979, 2950443
Int. a.3 A62B 35/02; B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 242— 107J 12 Claims
1. Braking device for safety belts, especially safety belts for
motor vehicles, which have a locking system ahead of the
braking device, comprising a bracket, a movable brake roller
partly wrapped around by the belt rotatably supported in the
bracket, means sufficient to retain said brake roller in position
during normal operation but insufficient to prevent movement
of said brake roller out of position when activated by a belt pull
which exceeds a predetermined force, a stationary clamping
bar disposed adjacent one side of the belt near said brake roller,
a movable arresting element having one portion near said
movable brake roller and another portion disposed on the side
of the belt opposite the side on which said stationary clamping
bar is disposed , said arresting element including means for
arresting rotation of said brake roller when said arresting
element and brake roller are in contact, whereby, upon activa-
tion of a belt pull in excess of said predetermined force move-
ment of said brake roller out of its normal position and against
said arresting element which latter moves toward the station-
ary clamping bar to cause clamping of the belt and which also
arrests the brake roller by contact therewith, and wherein
braking friction between the roll surface of said brake roller
and said belt partly wrapped around said brake roller is great
enough so that a force moment is transferred to said arresting
element which is sufficient to clamp the belt by means of the
arresting element without slippage.
4,378,916
WIND-UP DEVICE FOR SAFETY BELTS
Franz Keinberger, Wolfsbnrg, Fed. Rep. of Gcmumy, aMignor to
Volkswagenwerk AG, WolMmrg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Ffled Jon. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,447
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jon. 20,
1980, 3023028
Int a.J A62B 35/02: B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 242— 107J 6 ClalM
1. In a wind-up device for a vehicle safety belt, which device
includes a housing, a winding system composed of a winding
drum mounted in the housing for automatically winding up the
belt so that a portion of the belt is wound around the drum, the
drum being blocked in the direction of unwinding when a
given operating state occurs, and a belt braking device which
includes a rotatably mounted brake roller partially surrounded
by the belt and mounted for displacement between a normal
1029 O.G.— 5
position in which it is free to rotate and, when the winding being connected to said control device so as to subtract the
drum is blocked, a braking position in which it opposes move- signal output of the bandpass filter from the guided control
ment of the belt, movement into the braking position being signals to be sent to said missile; said bandpass filter blocks the
effected by the tension forces acting on the belt, the braking passing of low frequency signals from the output signal of said
gyro such as those produced in tracking a target; said bandpass
118
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
device further including a bias spring mounted to urge the
brake roller into its normal position, the improvement wherein
said brake roller is mounted to be displaced under the force of
the belt tension to brakingly contact the outer turn of the belt
portion wound on said drum.
4^78^17
TAPE-END DETECTING DEVICE
TokiiUi Negishi; Yukio Ito, and Satoshi Takagi, all of Toda,
Japan, assignors to Clarion Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,148
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 12, 1979, 54-
155830rUl
Int a.3 B65H 59/38; G03B 1/04
U.S. a. 242—186 2 Claims
MISSILE
COMMAND
ELECTWWICS
StGHTtNG
TELESCOPE
POSITION
GTPC
BANDPASS
FILTER
SiGNATUffC
'from MISSILE
^COMMANDS
TO MISSILE
TARGET
"scene
ANGLE JITTER
.-INPUT TO
CHASSIS
-tTs
filter further blocking high frequency output signals from said
gyro such as those generated by electronic noise; and said
bandpass filter allowing to pass signals from said gyro which
are in the angle jitter frequency range so as to eliminate from
the guidance of the missile most unwanted angle jitter input.
4,378,919
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ORIENTATION OF A
SUSPENDED LOAD
Harlan B. Smith, Canby, Oreg., assignor to Erickson Air Crane
Co., Hillsboro, Oreg.
FUed Jul. 19, 1977, Ser. No. 817,058
Int. a.3 B64D 9/00
U.S. a. 244—118.1 7 Claims
.'^x
% -P»"
1. In a tape-end detecting device for use in a tape recorder,
said tape recorder having a chassis and a reel turntable spaced
from and supported for rotation with respect to said chassis,
which comprises a magnet member supported on a lower
portion of said reel turntable so as to rotate conjointly there-
with and detector means for detecting variation in a magnetic
field caused by rotation of said magnet member, wherein the
improvement comprises: a printed circuit board disposed on
said chassis, said detector means being fixed to said chassis
through said printed circuit board.
4,378,918
QUASI-STABILIZATION FOR LINE OF SIGHT GUIDED
MISSILES
Walter E. Miller, Jr., and James W. McKelvy, both of Hunts-
▼ille, Ala., asrignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,863
Int a.3 F41G 7/20
UJS. a. 244—3.11 6 Claims
1. In a system wherein a sighting device is aimed with un-
wanted angle jitter at a target, a missUe is guided towards said
target along a boresight of said sighting device by a control
device which sends guided control signals to said missUe to
bring said missUe into the boresight line of said sighting device,
the improvement comprising a gyro mounted to a chassis and
having an output signal at its output which is a measure of
movement of said chassis; a bandpass fUter having an input and
an output; the output signal of said gyro being connected to the
input of said bandpass filter; the ou^ut of said bandpass filter
1. Apparatus for controlling orientation of a load suspended
from the fuselage of a helicopter by a cable comprising:
spreader bar means connected to the cable for supporting a
load connected thereto; and
frame means mounted on the fuselage for transmitting heli-
copter yaw movement to said spreader bar means and for
simultaneously permitting the load to be suspended sub-
stantiaUy isolated from helicopter pitch and roU, said
frame means including a first assembly mounted on the
fuselage for pivotal movement relative to the fuselage
about a first pivot axis including a first pair of strut mem-
bers pivotaUy connected adjacent one set of their ends to
the fuselage and a second pair of strut members pivotaUy
connected adjacent one set of their ends to the fuselage
opposite to said first pair, each pair defining a generaUy
triangular plane which is inclined toward the cable, each
strut member of said first pair being connected to a strut
member of said second pair, said frame means also includ-
April 5, 1983
GENEIiAL AND MECHANICAL
119
ing a second assembly connected to said first assembly for
pivotal movement about a second pivot axis extending
transversely to said first pivot axis, said second assembly
also being provided with guide means for receiving said
spreader bar means and for transmitting yaw movement of
the helicopter thereto.
i
4^78^20
COMBUSTIBLY INERT AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM AND
METHOD
Joe N. Runnels, BelleTne, and Kennetii R. Fagerlund, Federal
Way, both of Wash., aarignora to The Boeing Company, Seat-
tle,Wa8h.
{ FUed Jul. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 169,140
f Int a.J B64D 37/32
VS. a. 244—135 R 12 Claims
J7H£(?
^
-fe^-y-^
fimeis fa. r 74}
1. A combustibly inert gas supply system, comprising:
a first source of combustibly inert gas comprising an inert
gas generator, said generator including an inlet for com-
pressed atmospheric air, an outlet, and flow-through
means between the inlet and outlet for converting the
compressed air into combustibly inert gas;
first conduit means for delivering compressed air to the inlet;
second conduit means for delivering inert gas to a utiliza-
tion
a second source of combustibly inert gas comprising storage
means for storing inert gas at a high pressure;
third conduit means leading from the outlet to the second
. conduit means;
fourth conduit means leading from the storage means to the
second conduit means;
fifth conduit means leading from the third conduit means to
the fourth conduit means, and including a compressor for
charging the high pressure storage means;
regulator means for switching between said first and second
' sources and for supplying said second source from said
first source.
8. A method of supplying combustibly inert gas at both low
and high flow rates with a substantial saving in equipment
weight, comprising the steps of:
providing a noncombusting, inert gas generator sized to
meet low system flow rate demand;
using said inert gas generator to produce a nitrogen en-
riched, combustibly inert gas by withdrawing oxygen
from flowing, compressed, atmospheric air,
delivering the inert gas, as it is^oduced by the generator,
directly to the utilization site during system flow rate
demand periods that are less than or equal to said low
system flow rate;
providing at least one high pressure inert gas storage con-
tainer;
compressing some of the inert gas from the generator and
storing it in the storage container at a high pressure; and
selectively delivering inert gas to the utilization site from the
container during system flow rate demand periods that are
higher than said low system flow rate.
4,378,921
NEGATIVE ROTATION CINCH STRAP
Ronald E. Ailoi, Fleet Port Office, N.Y.; Robert J. HadMm,
Ridgecrcft, and Manhall W. Hager, CUbb Lake, both of
Calif., asrigDon to The Uaited States of Aiwrka as rcpre-
sented by die Secretary of the Nary, Washii«toB, D.C
FUed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,559
Int CL^ B64D 17/30; A62B 35/00: B68B 5/00
U.S. CL 244—151 R 6 n.t—
1. An improved parachute torso harness having a unitary
construction utilizing a single fastening means across the front
of the torso, said construction including a pair of vertically
oriented main lift webbings, a saddle strap attached to the
bottom ends of said main lift webbings, a pair of groin straps
connected to said saddle strap and passing slidably through
said main lift webbing, a lap strap connected to each groin
strap, a pair of diagonal backstraps connected to said groin
straps terminating in said fastening means at the front of said
torso, wherein the improvement comprises:
a pair of webbed straps each attached to each of said groin
straps, forward of said main lift webbing; and
means for tightening said webbed strap pair operably at-
tached to one of said diagonal back straps and said pair of
webbed straps;
a pair of adjustable buckles through each of which one of
said pairs of webbed straps is threaded;
a pair of strap retainers slidably mounted about each of said
diagonal backstraps aft of each of said main lift webbings;
and
a pair of buckle straps each attached at the end of each of
said strap retainers at one end and to each of said buckles
at the other end.
I 4,378,922
AIRCRAFT HAVING IMPROVED STRAKE
CONFIGURATION
Donald Pierce, AMershot, England, assignor to The Secretary of
State for Defence in Her Brittnnnic Mi^esty's GawtrmmeaX of
the United Kingdooi of Great Britnin and Northern Ireland,
London, ^Jigi***!
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,102
Claims priority, application United Ungdom, Apr. 18, 1980,
8012872
Int CV B64C 1/26. 23/06
U.S. CL 244—199 3 OaiM
1. An aircraft having a longitudinal axis, a nose, and a series
of laterally projecting barbs extending longitudinally rear-
wards from and on each side of the nose without adjacent
120
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
barbs in the series vertically overlying one another, each of
said barbs being in the form of a low aspect ratio semi-delta
type aerofoil, and each barb lying substantially parallel to the
aircraft longitudinal axis.
4,378,923
BINDING DEVICE FOR ELONGATED PIPES
Isao Takei, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nippon Kokap Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Chiyoda and Nichiei Distribution Systems, Inc.,
Kawasaki, both of, Japan
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,569
Int. a.3 F16L i/22
U.S. a. 248—68 R 6 Qaims
1. A binding device for a plurality of elongated pipes, com-
prising:
a pair of pipe reception blocks, each block being formed in a
first region thereof with a plurality of concavities, the
concavities of one block cooperating with those of the
other block so that successive pairs of concavities, each
pair consisting of one concavity formed in one block and
a cooperating concavity formed in the other block, define
a plurality of spaces for respectively receiving side by side
an associated plurality of elongated pipes, adjacent ones of
said spaces being equally spaced apart, each space having
substantially the same curvature as that of the outer sur-
face of the pipe associated therewith, and each block
having a second region spaced apart from said first region
thereof, said two regions of each block being made of
different materials;
first and second sleepers which resp)ectively support and rest
on a pair of said pipe reception blocks, one of said sleepers
being in contact with said second region of one of said
blocks and the other of said sleepers being in contact with
said second region of the other of said blocks; and
bundling strap means for tightly encircling and fastening
said blocks and sleepers.
cross section defining an inner and an outer clamping arm
with an opening therebetween which has an interfering fit
with the outside of the mounting ring when the ring is
received therein to securely clamp the upper portion of a
bag to said mounting ring,
forwardly extending protuberance formed at the outer
portion of said clamping member to provide a grip for
removing the clamp from the ring and for substantially
reinforcing the outer portion of the clamping member to
insure a positive lock around the outer portion of the
mounting ring when the bag is in clamped position, and
the outer arm of the U-shaped clamping member is substan-
tially thicker than the inner arm thereof to reinforce the
outer arm portion and provide a secure clamping action
around substantially the entire circumference of the ring
and at least the outer peripheral portion of the clamping
member extending around a substantial cross sectional
portion of the mounting ring with the thickened outer arm
forming a lip which underlies a substantial portion of the
front underlying cross sectional portion of the mounting
ring to positively lock at least the forward circumferential
portion of the clamping member onto the mounting ring.
4,378,925
T-BRACKET SHELF ASSEMBLY
Charles E. Griffin, Florence, Ky., assignor to Lingo Manufactur-
ing Company, Florence, Ky.
Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,367
Int. a.3 A47G 29/02
U.S. a. 248—242 7 Qaims
4378,924
BAG HOLDER
James H. Christensen, 2736 Ensign Ave. North, Minneapolis,
Minn. 55427
FUed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,523
Int. a.J B65B 67/04
U.S. a. 248—101
1. A bag holder comprising
a generally cylindrical mounting ring adapted to be con-
nected at its rear portion to a suitable supporting structure,
a clamping member made from resilient, integrally moulded
material with an underlying generally inverted U-shaped
2 Claims
1. A shelf supporting assembly comprising:
a vertical channel having a plurality of T-shaped vertically
spaced openings therein, said T-shaped openings each
being defined by a horizontally disposed upper slot and a
vertically disposed lower slot projecting downwardly
from and in communication with said upper slot centrally
thereof;
an elongated shelf supporting bracket comprising a body
having a horizontally disposed upper edge and a vertically
disposed base at one end thereof adapted to be seated
against said vertical channel;
a plurality of projections extending rearwardly from said
body for selective engagement with the T-shaped open-
ings in said channel;
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
121
a first of said projections comprising a horizontally disposed
pair of T-shaped elements lying in tandem relation to each
other and extending in prolongation of the upper edge of
said body, said T-shaped elements each having a top and
a centrally disposed leg, the tops of said T-shaped ele-
ments each being of a width to be selectely passed through
the upper slots of said T-shaped openings when the body
of said shelf supporting bracket is vertically disposed, the
legs of said T-shaped elements being of a width to be
received in the lower slots of said T-shaped openings, the
tops of said T-shaped elements being wider than said
lower slots, whereby said T-shaped elements may be
selectively passed through one of said T-shaped openings
and the shelf supporting bracket moved downwardly so as
to engage the corresponding leg of the T-shaped element
in the lower slot of said opening with the outer ends of the
top of the T-shaped element engaging the channel on
opposite sides of said lower slot, the shelf supporting
bracket extending horizontally outwardly from said chan-
nel when the innermost of said T-shaped elements is en-
gaged in said T-shaped opening, and said shelf supporting
bracket is inclined downwardly relative to said channel
when the other of said T-shaped elements is engaged in
said T-shaped opening; and
at least one lower projection extending rearwardly from the
base of said shelf supf>orting bracket, said lower projec-
tion being connected to said vertical base by a connecting
member disposed at right angles to said vertical base and
engaging in one of the T-shape openings underlying the
T-shaped opening in which said first projection is en-
gaged.
4,378,926
ARTICLE-HANGER AND ILLUSION-AMUSEMENT
DEVICE
Robert J. Hodack, 2132 Holmes Ave., Springfield, 111. 62704
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 901,614, May 1, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jun. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 162,797
Int. a.3 A47G 1/16
U.S. a. 248— 489 4 Qaims
4,378,927
VEHICLE SEAT MOUNTING DEVICES
Kevin J. Graves, Cogenboe, England, assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Filed May 12, 1980, Ser. No. 149,206
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 16, 1979.
7916983
Int. CIJ F16M 13/00
U.S. a. 248-561 8 Qaims
1. A combined article-hanger and illusion-amusement de-
vice, comprising: a body member simulating in size, shape and
appearance the beveledly truncated head-end portion of a
railroad-rail-anchoring spike, a relatively small rod-like screw
element fixed to and extending perpendicularly from the op-
posite-the-head end of said body member for relatively non-
defacing perpendicular penetration of a wall-like structure for
slantingly fixing said body-member to said structure, a second
body member simulating the beveledly truncated point end of
a railroad-rail-anchoring spike, and a second small rod-like
screw element extending from the opposite-the-point end of
said second body member for slantingly fixing said second
body member in alignment with said first-mentioned body
member and on the opposite side of a door, partition or similar
$tnicture.
1. A vehicle seat mounting device comprising two frames
(11, 12), means mounting said frames one above the other for
connection to the fioor of a vehicle and to the underside of a
vehicle seat, said mounting means comprising spaced-apart
guide rails (llo, 11*) on one of said frames (11) and rollers (17)
on the other frame (12), said rollers engaging in the guide rails
(11a, lib) to permit relative sliding movement between the
two frames, a third or intermediate frame (13), a position-
adjusting device (15) including means for selectively connect-
ing said intermediate frame (13) to a first one of the frames (11)
and spring means (21) interposed between the intermediate
frame (13) and the second frame (12), to allow a predetermined
amount of relative movement therebetween, the position-
adjusting device including a first actuator (24A, 24fl) movable
into and out of an engaged-state in which it locks the position-
adjusting device (15) in any one of a plurality of selected static
positions of the first frame (11) relative to the intermediate
frame (13), lock-out means (16) including a second actuator
(40/i) movable into and out of an engaged state in which it
causes the lock-out means (16) to lock the intermediate frame
(13) to the second frame (12) thereby rendering the spring
means (21) inoperative, characterised by a common operating
member (27 or 127) and coupling means (2Sb, 34, 35) connect-
ing the operating member (27) to said first actuator (24* or
124*) and to said second actuator (40/i or 140*) and movable
between a first mode 'A' in which the first actuator (24*) is in
its engaged state and the second actuator (40A) is in its disen-
gaged state so that the first and third frames (11, 13 or 111, 113)
are secured together but movable relative to the second frame
(12 or 112) under the restraint of the spring means (21 or 121),
a second mode *B' in which both first and second actuators are
in their engaged state so that relative movement between the
first, second and third frames is prevented, and a third mode
'C in which the first actuator is in its disengaged state and the
first frame is movable relative to the second and third frames to
change their selected relative positions.
122
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^78,928
MOLDING APPARATUS
Edward J. Kopp, Elmhurst; Leon J. Iwinski, Westchester, Frank
Guzzo, Melrose Park; Ronald F. Speechley, Westchester, and
Frank Femali, Hillside, all of III., assignors to Beatrice Foods
Company, Chicago, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 161,758, Jun. 23, 1980, abandoned.
This application Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,732
Int. a.3 B29F 1/14: B29C 7/00
U.S. a. 249—63 10 Qaims
\. Apparatus for injection molding a hollow plastic tub
having an open end, a closed end and an uninterrupted interior
side wall surface of circular transverse cross-section, said inte-
rior side wall surface diverging toward said closed end
whereby the tub has a smaller radius at said open end than at
said closed end, said apparatus comprising:
mold core means for molding an interior surface of said
plastic tub, including central core segment means defining
a pjolygonal transverse cross-sectional outer envelope
with polygon faces and a plurality of peripheral core
segment means surrounding said central core segment
means, said outer envelope defined by said polygon faces
diverging in a direction toward said closed end of said tub;
said peripheral core segment means being mutually contigu-
ous and having respective outward faces collectively
defining a continuous circular transverse cross-sectional
shape with each individual peripheral core segment means
defining a continuous, uninterrupted outer surface diverg-
ing in a direction toward said closed end for molding said
interior surface of said side wall of said plastic tub;
the divergence of the outer envelope of said central core
segment means being greater than the divergence of the
uninterrupted outer surface of said jseripheral core seg-
ment means;
core collapsing means for causing relative movement be-
tween said central core segment means and said peripheral
core segment means during a tub extraction phase of
operation;
said means for causing said relative movement including
means for imparting at least a component of motion to said
peripheral core segment means which is in a radially
inward direction relative to said central core segment
means and the plastic tub, whereby to reduce the trans-
verse diameter of said mold core means and to provide
clearance during said tub extraction phase for said contin-
uous, uninterrupted diverging surfaces of said peripheral
core segment means.
4,378,929
MOLD FOR DENTAL MODELS BASE
Ronald E. Hnffman, Tucson, Ariz., assignor to KV33 Corpora-
tion, Tucson, Ariz.
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,330
Int. a.5 B29C 1/14. 1/02
U.S. a. 249—124 17 Claims
1. A disassembleable mold for forming the tooth die support-
ing base of a dental model upon curing of a pourable harden-
able compound deposited therein, said mold comprising in
combination:
(a) a substructure having guide means attached thereto;
(b) a sidewall member defining a portion of the perimeter of
said mold;
(c) a removable insert member cooperating with said guide
means, said insert member cooperating with said sidewall
member to define with said substructure a mold cavity
therebetween;
(d) said insert member having a projection extending within
the mold cavity at a height substantially that of said side-
wall member and suitable for forming a recess within the
base and for delineating a platform for supporting the
tooth die of the dental mold; and
(e) means for indexing the base.
4,378,930
NOVEL APPARATUS
Jiirgen Rabe, Aurachtal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to INA
Walzlager Schaeffler KG, Herzogenaurach, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Apr. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 368,040
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 25,
1981, 3116526
Int. a.3 B29C 1/00: B29F 7/00
U.S. a. 249—160 2 Qaims
1. An apparatus for producing a cage made of castable or
injection moldable material for cylindrical rollers, the pockets
of the cage being defined by webs which have projections
projecting into the pockets at their longitudinal sides for radi-
ally retaining the rollers comprising slide plates radially move-
able for forming the roller pockets, each slide plate being
formed of several partial slide plates, the end faces of the slide
plates having cover plates arranged thereon to cover the con-
nection juncture between the partial slide plates and secured to
one of the partial slide plates.
4,378,931
VALVE AND ACTUATOR THEREFOR
James B. Adams, Jr., Lewisville, Tex., assignor to Otis Engi-
neering Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
FUed Jun. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 156,200
Int. a.J F16K 31/122
U.S. a. 251—58 6 Claimi
1. A valvflTcomprising,
a housing,
a valve member and valve seat controlling flow through said
housing,
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
123
an actuator moving said valve member between open and
closed positions with reciprocation of said actuator,
a crosshead slidably mounted on said actuator and adapted
for attachment to the reciprocating rod of a reciprocating
motor,
spaced stops on said actuator, and
'^^
resilient means on said actuator on opposite sides of said
crosshead, said resilient means confined between said
crosshead and said stops and transmitting movement of
r'said crosshead in opposite directions to said actuator, said
resilient means permitting the crosshead to slide along said
actuator and prevent excessive force from being applied
to said actuator by said crosshead during normal opera-
tion of the valve.
4,378,932
PRESSURE RESPONSIVE VALVE ASSEMBLY
Alfred J. Avery, Flushing, Mich., assignor to Good News Unlim-
ited Incorporated, Dryden, Mich.
; FUed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,543
1 Int. a.3 F16K 31/126
U.S. a. 251—61.4 4 Qaims
1. A valve assembly for use with an external pressure source,
said valve assembly comprising a housing having a fluid cou-
pling formed at one end, said fluid coupling having an inlet, an
outlet and a fluid passageway extending therebetween,
a gate slidably mounted in said housing and movable be-
tween a closed position in which said gate extends across
said passageway and blocks fluid flow from said inlet and
to said outlet and an open position in which said gate
opens at least a portion of said passageway,
means responsive to the external pressure source for moving
said gate from said closed position to said open position
only when the pressure at the pressure source falls below
a predetermined level,
wherein said moving means comprises an elongated rod
secured at one end to said gate, a diaphragm, means for
communicating said pressure source to one side of said
diaphragm and wherein the other end of the rod abuts
against the other side of the diaphragm, and resilient
means for urging said gate towards said open position,
wherein said housing comprises an upp)er part defmmg a
chamber in which said diaphragm is contained, a lower
part which includes said coupling, and at least two elon-
gated supports extending between and secured to said
housing parts,
wherein said moving means further comprises a first spring
retainer secured to said lower housing part and a second
spring retainer secured to said rod and axially slidably
mounted to said supports, and wherein said resilient means
comprises a pair of compression springs, one compression
spring being disposed around each support and entrapped
between said spring retainers,
wherein said rod and said supports are substantially aligned
and parallel to each other and wherein each spring re-
tainer comprises an elongated flat bracket, and
wherein said lower housing part includes an annular, re-
duced diameter upper portion formed around said rod,
and said first spring retainer bracket includes an aperture
adapted to receive said upper portion of said lower hous-
ing to prevent excentric application of forces by said
springs on said lower housing.
4,378,933
CRANE ASSEMBLY
Robert E. Hoiston, Moorestown, N J., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,720
Int. a.3 B66D 3/04
U.S. CI. 254—399 3 Claims
1. A crane assembly for use with a structure having a mount-
ing hole and an attachment point, with the mounting hole
located vertically above the attachment point; said crane as-
sembly comprising:
a rigid mast having upper and lower ends;
a spreader having three rigid sides joined at first, second and
third comers, with the first comer attached to the lower
end of said mast;
a pivot post for insertion in said mounting hole, the pivot
post being attached to the lower end of the mast by a
hinge pin;
a lower cable assembly comprising two cabies attached
respectively to the second and third comers of said
124
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
^U
spreader, and attached at the other ends to connecting
means, which in turn is attached to said attachment point;
an upper cable assembly comprising two cables attached
respectively to the second and third comers of said
spreader, and attached at the other ends to the upper end
of said mast;
and hoisting means including at least one pulley attached to
the upper end of said mast.
4^78,934
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SALVAGING LARGE
PIPE ELBOWS
George W. Tucker, Rt. 13, Box 276, Fort Worth, Tex. 76119
FUed Jan. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 156,592
Int. a.3 B23K 7/04
U.S. a. 266—55 10 Qaims
1. Apparatus for reflnishing the circular openings of rela-
tively large tube turns, comprising:
(a) a platform adapted to securely hold a tube turn such that
a first end is supported in a cantilevered manner and the
circular opening of said first end lies in a generally vertical
plane;
(b) a circular .track which is positionable to support a cutting
torch for rotative movement around the track in a plane
that is near and parallel to the cantilevered end of the tube
turn, whereby the cutting torch may be caused to operate
on the cantilevered end;
(c) means for centering said circular track with respect to
the cantilevered end of the tube turn, and said means being
adapted to be positioned with respect to the interior sur-
face of the cantilevered tube end; and
(d) means for selectively positioning the tube turn with
respect to the circular track, such that the tube turn and
the circular track may be moved to and from a cutting
position.
4,378,935
ROLLING LOBE AIRSPRING
Paul R. Brown, Tallmadge, and Henry D. Fresch, Cuyahoga
Falls, both of Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire & Rubber
Company, Akron, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 18,400, Mar. 8, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,627
Int. a.3 F16F 9/04
U.S. a. 267— 64J7 3 Qaims
1. A rolling lobe fluid spring comprising:
a mounting member;
a piston having a radially extending mounting end, and an
axially and circumferentially extending piston surface, the
surface including circumferentially extending serrations
axially adjacent the piston mounting end, a circumferen-
tially extending working area axially away from the piston
mounting end and serrations, and a circumferentially
extending recess extending axially between the serrations
and the working area, the recess having a circumferen-
tially extending blunt end axially adjacent the working
area and axially away from the mounting end and serra-
tions; and
a flexible, tubular member having a first end and a second
end with a leading edge, the tubular member being of
substantially uniform thickness throughout the second end
to the leading edge, such that the second end is a taper
free, blunt end, and the leading edge is a blunt leading
edge, the first end of the tubular member being mounted
and secured in a fluid tight manner to the mounting mem-
ber, and the second end of the tubular member being
mounted and secured to the piston in a fluid tight manner
about the serrations, (a) such that a circumferentially
extending area of securement is defined in the second end
of the tubular member, (b) such that a rolling lobe is
formed in the tubular member between the area of secure-
ment and the first end of the tubular member which ex-
tends longitudinally, past the piston recess to the working
area, and (c) such that the non-tapered, blunt tail including
the blunt leading edge is formed in the second end of the
tubular member;
the blunt tail extending from the securement area in a direc-
tion within the tubular member away from the rolling lobe
and first end;
the blunt tail being in the recess and thereby being between
the rolling lobe and piston; and
the blunt tail substantially filling the recess both axially and
radially such that the blunt leading edge of the tail lies at
the blunt end of the recess without a substantial gap be-
tween the blunt leading edge and blunt end of the recess,
and further such that the tail has a radially outer surface
which, with the working area, presents a substantially
continuous surface over which the rolling lobe may roll.
4,378,936
ENGINE MOUNTINGS FOR TRUCKS, MOTOR
COACHES OR THE LIKE UTILITY VEHICLES
Heinz Brenner, Neuenahr-Ahrweiler, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to BOGE GmbH, Eitort, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,098
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 27,
1980,3024090
Int. a.3 F16F 1/36, 13/00
U.S. a. 267—140.1 8 Claims
1. An engine mounting for trucks, motor coaches or the like
utility vehicles, comprising a first relatively rigid member for
attachment to the vehicle frame, a second relatively rigid
member for attachment to the engine, main elastomer spring
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
means disposed relatively outwardly from the axis of the
mounting and extending between said first and second mem-
bers for carrying the major proportion of the engine mounting
shear load, generally annularly shaped elastomer spring means
located relatively radially inwardly of said main elastomer
spring means and at least part of the second rigid member and
extending between parts of said first and second members for
carrying a comparatively small proportion of the engine
mounting load, said annularly shaped elastomer spring means
being connected to a main body portion of a damping means
supported by said part of said first member, said annular spring
means extending from said main body portion to connect with
said part of said second member, a generally plate shaped
7 26 9 18 12 21
2 11 13 n 6
12S
member and support said second pipe member in end to end
confrontation with said one pipe member; and means mounting
a selected number of said supports on said jaws for rotation
relative thereto about substantially parallel axes.
Sweda
4^78,938
DOCUMENT STACKING DEVICE
Tadeusz Staniszewski, Budd Lake, N.J., assignor to
International, Inc., Panunus, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 82,459, Oct. 9, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,153
Int. a.5 B65H 31/04. 29/42
U.S. CI. 271—179 9 Qaims
folded bellows connected to and extending across said second
member opposite said generally annularly shaped spring means
and said main body portion such that said bellows, said main
body portion and said generally annularly shaped spring means
define a closed volume, an elastic separating wall extending
across and carried by said second member and subdividing said
closed volume into a chamber filled with damping fluid on the
side facing said main body and annularly shaped spring means,
and a compensating chamber on the side facing said bellows, a
throttle aperture in said elastic separating wall for fluidly
communicating said chambers, and said bellows being substan-
tially unrestrained such that said compensating chamber can
receive damping fluid through said throttle aperture without
appreciable pressure.
4,378,937
PIPE ALIGNING TOOL
Timothy C. Dearman, P.O. Box 937, Pearland, Tex. 77581
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 83,175, Oct. 9, 1979,
abandoned. This application May 9, 1980, Ser. No. 148,416
Int. a.3 B23K 37/04
U.S. a. 269—6 20 Qaims
1. A document stacking device for stacking documents
comprising:
a document stacker member mounted for rotation about an
axis of rotation; and
means for rotating said stacker member about said axis of
rotation;
said stacker member including a portion extending obliquely
to said axis of rotation and effective upon rotation of said
stacker member to move said documents along the direc-
tion of said axis of rotation;
said stacking device including means for gripping said docu-
ments and moving them in a given direction away from
said said stacker member;
said given direction extending transversely to said axis of
rotation;
said gripping means being mounted on said stacker member
and contacting said obliquely extending portion, whereby
said documents are gripped between said gripping means
and said obliquely extending portion.
4,378,939
BED FRAME SIT-UP EXEROSER
Norman W. Wild, 3762 Locust Ave., Long Beach, Calif. 90807
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 153,441
Int. a.' A63B 23/02
U.S. a. 272—93 6 Qaims
1. A clamp for use in welding first and second pipe members
to one another in end to end relation, said clamp comprising
first and second clamp jaws; means mounting said jaws for
relative movement toward and away from one another into
and out of clamping engagement with one of said pipe mem-
bers and adjacent one end thereof; a plurality of elongate
supports carried by said jaws and extending therefrom a dis-
tance to project beyond said one end of said one pipe member
when said jaws are in clamping engagement with said one pipe
1. A sit-up exercise device to be utilized in conjunction with
a bed having a frame, said device comprising:
(a) a mounting plate;
126
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
(b) means for detachably securing said mounting plate to the
bed frame;
(c) a mounting arm pivotally connected to said mounting
plate at one end thereof so as to be movable from a posi-
tion substantially parallel to said mounting plate to an
angular position relative thereto;
(d) a foot engaging loop located at the other end of said
mounting arm;
(e) means for pivotally connecting said loop to said other
end of said mounting arm, said pivotal connecting means
including means for permitting said loop to pivot about a
vertical and horizontal axis relative to said mounting arm;
and
(0 spring means for connecting said one end of said mount-
ing arm to said mounting plate to permit said mounting
arm to be placed into one of a plurality of angularly ori-
ented use positions and to retract said mounting arm to a
position substantially parallel to said mounting plate in a
nonuse position.
means and said submitting means and switching on said
inputting means and said determining means.
4,378,940
ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR PLAYING BINGO, LOTTO
AND ALLIED CARD GAMES
Jacob GIuz, 799 Pitcairn Dr., Foster City, Calif. 94404, and
Benjamin Poku, P.O. Box 1494, New Haven, Conn. 06506
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,351
Int. a J A63F 3/06
U.S. a. 273—237 11 Qaims
OOOOOOCOOC5C CG&OO'-CCCoOft
cooo?corfi6Cu .j'oooecaooco
•3 QC ohc o Qr-wo t lor-ecocorcc
cocoooococ..
I' - ; L-iC-SJi.--. I -^ 1
i '- J ua ',-, UT.
H en en csi id ctJ
|C'. -•• - _ -.--J ■
(["'; ".tT *-"iH-"'i
i
' :-;5i;:n.'i' -
; LK----::i:a,
■iFiriSHni 'T- -
' "^ rn ^ n "^ ' ^i^r^
iJLnnaagJ |'p__
iJa™:!p
ifdec^Fin" 1 D t" "
4,378,941
BIRDING GAME METHOD
Paul A. Derby, 555 Glen Dr., San Leandro, Calif. 94577
Continuation of Ser. No. 85,854, Oct. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,758
Int. aj A63F 3/00
U.S. a. 273—273 - 1 Qaim
" — ^ t: —
'— ; — 1 - W .;■
r"TiA'>i
it < '
— r^ — '
•f
■MM -
*-
,•'
:>
1. A game for the matching of bird species and their geo-
graphical habitats comprising providing a plurality of tiles
bearing on their faces habitat identification information, pro-
viding a plurality of playing cards bearing on their faces bird
species identification information, arranging said tiles collec-
tively in face-up position so that each of the players may
choose his own make-up of tiles for the play of the game,
selectively apportioning tiles among the players in accordance
with their respective choices whereby each player is responsi-
ble for a selection of habitat descriptions to be matched with
the bird species qf said cards, displaying the selectively appor-
tioned tiles in face-up position adjacent the players who chose
them, distributing a predetermined number of said cards as
card hands in face-down condition to each of the players, and
sequentially comparing said card hands with predetermined
displayed tiles to discern species and habitat matchings.
4,378,942
TRADING GAME
Paul J. Isaac, P.O. Box 456, Tuckahoe, N.Y. 10707
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,178
Int. a.3 A63F 3/00, 1/00
U.S. CI. 273—278
10 Oaims
1. An electronic game, such as a bingo, a lotto and the like,
comprising
a plurality of data cards each including a set of numbers for
a single card;
means for successively reading numbers on said data cards
and subsequently storing a plurality of card images each
consisting of the respective set of said numbers;
means for submitting by a player and storing a configuration
pattern specifying sets of named positions on said card
images which are considered to be winning;
means for successive inputting by a player a plurality of
further numbers introduced by a dealer, comparing each
of said thusly inputted further numbers with each number
of each of said stored card images, and recording the
numbers which coincide with said further inputted num-
bers;
displaying means including first means for determining and
displaying the numbers of each card image on which the
further numbers inputted by said inputting means have
coincided with said set of positions specified by the con-
figuration pattern submitted by said submitting means and
which thereby is a winning card image; and
start game means operative for switching off said reading
XE/-~a
Rixn, _
a/y
Sttt
(i>-rYr7r>
65
ro
Sy
a^'
1. A trading game, consisting of
a plurality of tokens, each said token having a numbered
indicia on one side selected from a given numerical range
whereby a randomly selected number of said tokens estab-
lishes a first component of a final settlement price;
a first set of "Bull" designated cards, each said card having
an indicia of an event on one side and an indicia of a
numerical weight for the respective event to establish a
second component of the final settlement price;
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
127
a second set of "Bear" designated cards, each said card
having an indicia of an event on one side and an indicia of
a numerical weight for the respective event to estabhsh a
third component of the final settlement price;
a die having an indicia of a "Bull" or "Bear" on each of a
selected number of faces thereof;
a plurality of transaction tickets, each said ticket having
indicia thereon for recording a round number, one of a
"buy" or "sale" transaction, a quantity of the transaction,
a price of the transaction, a purchaser and a seller;
a plurality of trader's tally sheets, each said sheet having
indicia for determining one of a profit and loss for each
transaction of a player in a given round; and
at least one broker's tally sheet having columnar indicia for
itemizing and totaling the profits and losses of all players
in a given round.
4,378,943
TURNTABLE FOR FOLDING GAME BOARDS
Meigs W. Newberry, 29 Martin St., Sprinfield, Mass. 01108
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,010
Int. a.3 F16M 11/08
U.S. a. 273—280 2 Qaims
y'
t^K
'■^rv-
.11
.'7 IS'
2d
1. A rotatable support for a substantially flat game board
comprising a base portion adapted to rest on a table or the like,
and being provided with an upwardly directed annular ridge, a
platform portion, and a pivot pin mounting the platform por-
tion rotatably on the base portion, the platform portion being
constituted by upper and lower relatively slidable marginally
flanged flat rectangular plates adapted to support a game
board, two board engaging spring clamps mounted at opposite
ends of the, respective plates, and means for adjusting the
distance between the clamps, each plate being longitudinally
slotted and the slots overlapped to provide an aperture to
receive the pivot pin, the lower plate being provided with a
plurality of downwardly projecting elements adapted to stabi-
lize the adjusted position of said plate in relation to the pivot
pin.
4,378,944
PROJECTILE AND TETHERED TARGET GAME
APPARATUS
Robert J. Johnston, 2705 Cherrywood Rd., Minnetonka, Minn.
55343
FUed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,495
Int. a.3 F41J 7/02: A63F 9/02
U.S. a. 273—393 9 Claims
1. A game apparatus comprising:
a stand having an elevated platform with a generally hori-
zontal top surface and a plurality of discrete sides;
point value indicia associated with each of said sides;
a target object supportable on the platform;
tether means connecting the target object to the stand;
said sides being concave in shape;
a projectile throwable by a game participant to attempt to
knock the target object from the platform whereby it
hangs over one of said sides suspended by the tether
means with the tether means giving a point value indica-
tion.
4,378,945
BELLOWS-TYPE SPRING SEAL
Gregory J. Trautman, Seattle, Wash., assignor to PACCAR Inc.,
Bellevue, Wash.
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,731
Int. a.J F16L 37/10
U.S. a. 277—200 12 Oaims
1. A bellows-type spring seal to connect between a cab-
mounted air intake pipe and a frame-mounted air cleaner canis-
ter while providing an effective breakaway joint when the cab
tilts from over the engine in a cab-over-engine truck, compris-
ing:
a bellows extending upwardly from the canister top, having
an upper, deformable sealing end, and being capable of
providing self-alignment between the air intake pipe and
the canister;
means for attaching the lower end of the bellows to the
canister; and
means encircling the bellows for biasing the sealing end of
the bellows away from the canister toward the intake pipe
and for providing a positive preload for the seal.
4,378,946
STROLLER CANOPY STRUCTURE
Charles L. Voytko, and Robert J. Boudreau, both of Bedford,
Pa., assignors to Brown Group Recreational Products, Inc.,
Bedford, Pa.
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,155
Int. a.3 B62B 11/00
U.S. a. 280-642 6 Clains
1. In a collapsible baby vehicle of the type including a front
wheeled frame member, a rear wheeled frame member, a seat-
supporting frame member and a pusher handle all being pivot-
ally connected to permit the seat-supporting frame member to
be moved from an elevated location above the ground to a
collapsed position wherein the seat-supporting frame member
is located adjacent the ground, the improvement comprising
A. a generally U-shaped bail whose bight is shorter than the
distance between the arms of the pusher handle,
B. first means for pivotally connecting the free ends of the
bail arms to the pusher handle arms at the inboard walls
128
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
thereof at locations spaced above the seat-suppoiling
frame member,
C. a second generally U-shaped bail shallower than the first
whose bight is longer than the distance between the
pusher handle arms,
D. second means for pivotally connecting the free ends of
the second bail arms to the pusher handle arms at the
outboard walls thereof at locations spaced above the first
connecting means,
E. a flexible fabric body having a leading edge connected to
that its longitudinal slit is positioned at a side of the cross bar
which is away from the guide slot of the fitting plate, at least
one plug-like locking part with one side of the locking part
having a longitudinal slot fitting the cross bar, and the other
side of the locking part having a longitudinal key which fits in
the longitudinal slit of the deflection element, said plut-like
locking part when pressed form- or force fittingly into the
sleeve opening of the sleeve deflection element locks the de-
flection element to the cross bar.
4,378,948
SAFETY CLOSURE LATCH
Anthony Chrones, Warwick, R.L, assignor to Reliance Products
Corporation, Woonsocket, R.L
Filed Jun. 15, 1976, Ser. No. 696,486
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 5,
1994, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.3 E05C 7/00
U.S. CI. 292—19 2 Claims
the bight of the first bail and a trailing edge connected to
the bight of the second bail, the length of the fabric body
being such that when the first bail is in a lower position
wherein it lies in a substantially horizontal plane, the
second bail bight engages the pusher handle and the fabric
body is in a taut condition, said first bail being swingable
between said lower position and a raised position wherein
it is swung behind and below the pusher handle and re-
poses on the now depending second bail, thereby to main-
tain the fabric body in a folded out-of-the-way position
behind and below the plane of the pusher handle.
4,378,947
REFLECnON HTTING FOR THE SAFETY BELT OF
RESTRAINING SYSTEM
Artur Fohl, Schomdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Repa
Feinstanzwerk GmbH, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Not. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 203,890
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 8,
1979, 2945174
Int. a.^ A62B i5/02
U.S. Q. 280—808 10 Qaims
1. Deflection fitting for a safety belt of a restraining system,
especially for motor vehicles, comprising a fitting plate, a
guide slot in the fitting plate for passage of the safety belt
therethrough, a cross bar of the fitting plate for support of the
safety belt, a sleeve-like deflection element with a rounded
roll-off surface for the safety belt and having at least one longi-
tudinal slit to permit sliding the deflection element onto the
cross bar and, after said deflection element is pushed onto the
cross bar, the deflection element is rotated in such a manner
1. A safety closure latch for a drawer or the like comprising
a stop member and a complimentary latch member for releas-
ably retaining said drawer in partially open position,
said stop member comprising a base for mounting in the
drawer opening and an elongated downwardly depending
frame integrally from said base, said frame provided with
at least one opening defining an upper edge and a lower
edge forming upp)er and lower shoulders respectively for
engaging said latch member,
said latch member comprising a base for mounting to the
inner face of the front drawer wall, with a pair of resilient
arms extending horizontally inward from said base in
alignment with the opening in said stop member, said arms
being in vertically spaced parallel relation, the outer ends
of said arms provided with hooked portions, the hooked
portion on the upper of said arms facing upwardly to
engage the upper shoulder of said stop member and the
hooked portion on the lower of said arms facing down-
wardly to engage the lower shoulder of said stop member.
4,378,949
PRODUCnON OF SHALE OIL BY IN-SITU RETORTING
OF OIL SHALE
J. Blaine Miller, Englewood, Colo., assignor to Gulf Oil Corpo-
ration, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 59,321, Jul. 20, 1979,
abandoned. This application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,626
Int. Q\} E21C 41/10
U.S. CI. 299—2 18 Claims
1. A method of producing shale oil from an in-situ retort in
an underground oil shale deposit comprising:
(a) excavating a room in the shale deposit, said room con-
forming in cross section to the retort and having a volume
at least as large as the minimum void space in a mass of
rubblized oil shale blasted from the oil shale deposit and
random free falling to fill open volume the size of the
desired retort;
(b) drilling a plurality of substantially vertical shot holes
through the oil shale overlying the room, said shot holes
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
129
extending upwardly through the shale overlying the room
at least to approximately the upper end of the desired
retort;
(c) after completion of step (a), initiating rubblization of the
shale by detonating an explosive charge in the shot holes
near the lower end thereof to fragment oil shale overlying
and adjacent the room and cause random free fall of the
fragments into the room to form a random-filled rubblized
mass of oil shale therein with an open space between the
rubble and overlying unfragmented shale;
(d) repeating the detonation of explosive charges at succes-
sively higher levels in the shot holes to fragment the shale
adjacent the open space and cause random free fall of
14 —JS'
3=
^^.■^•
T m
-ii-
fragments of oil shale formed by each detonation through
open space onto rubblized oil shale in the room underlying
the unfragmented oil shale until a random-filled rubblized
in-situ retort of the desired height is formed, the time
between successive detonations being adequate to allow
movement of shale broken by a detonation sufficiently to
avoid interference by particles of shale broken by a later
or earlier detonation whereby there is random free fall of
the shale particles onto the upper surface of the shale in
the room;
(e) passing a retorting gas downwardly through the in-situ
l' retort to heat oil shale in the retort and release shale oil
< therefrom; and
(0 delivering shale oil from the in-situ retort to the surface.
I 4,378,950
INSHOT VALVE ARRANGEMENT FOR RAILWAY
BRAKE CONTROL APPARATUS EMPLOYING
COMBINED AIR RESERVOIR/BRAKE CYLINDER
DEVICE
James E. Hart, Trafford, Pa., and Robert J. Zahradnik, Far-
mington, N. Mex., assignors to American Standard Inc., Wil-
merding, Pa.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 217,969
Int. a.3 B60T 15/22
U.S. a. 303—36 12 Qaims
1. An inshot valve device comprising:
' (a) first valve means having an open and a closed position for
conducting and interrupting, respectively, the venting of
brake control fluid pressure in response to which venting
I a brake application is established;
(b). a control piston having first and second positions in
which said control piston is engageable with said first
valve means to control operation thereof to said open and
closed positions, respectively, said control piston having
opposing pressure chambers formed on the respective
sides thereof subject to said brake control pressure, said
brake control pressure of one of said opposing chambers
acting on a first pressure area of said control piston and
said brake control pressure of the other of said opposing
chambers acting on a second pressure area of said control
piston;
(c) means for biasing said control piston in said first position,
in which position said brake control pressure in said one of
said opposing chambers is trapped during an emergency
brake application, so that said venting of said brake con-
trol pressure during said emergency application esub-
lishes a pressure differential across said control piston to
overcome said bias and force said control piston to said
second position; and
(d) said control piston further having a third pressure area on
the same side thereof as said first pressure area, such that
said first and third pressure areas combined are a predeter-
mined percentage greater than said second pressure area,
said third pressure area being defined by a vented pressure
chamber, said control piston further including second
valve means operative in said second position of said
control piston for connecting said trapped brake control
pressure to said vented pressure chamber so as to be effec-
tive on said first and third pressure areas of said control
piston and thereby prevent said control piston from reset-
ting to said first position for a predetermined duration.
4,378,951
TRAVELING WAVE COUPLED TYPE OPTICAL WAVE
ORCULATORS
Tsukasa Nagao, 4-75, Mabori, Yokosuka-shi, Kanagawa-ken,
Japan
Filed Jun. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 161,075
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 27, 1979, 54-81180
lot. a.^GOlB 5/172
U.S. a. 350—96.15 16 Qaims
1. A traveling wave coupled circulator comprising a magne-
to-optic circular-cylindrical-transmission-line structure made
of magneto-optic material having optical anisotropy under
biasing magnetic field to act magneto-optic Faraday rotation,
said magneto-optic structure being arranged on the common
axis, and said magneto-optic structure being optically shielded,
plural numbers of optical waveguiding couplers, each cou-
pler being positioned against an opening formed on a
given area on said magneto-optic structure in rotational
symmetry around said common axis,
and means for magnetically biasing said magneto-optic
structure in the direction parallel to said common axis.
130
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,378^52 incident light with less than about 2% combined {^sorption
DYNAMIC IMAGE ENHANCER FOR FIBERSCOPES and diffraction losses of said incident light over | span of
Walter P, Siegmund, Woodstock, Conn., assignor to Warner wavelengthsof incident light in the range of about 260 to about
Lambert Technologies, Inc., Southbridge, Mass.
Filed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,318
Int. a.5G02B V/7
U.S. a. 350—96.25
JDQ^^-fe
SQaims
1,000 nanometers.
4,378,954
METHOD OF MAKING OPTICAL HBER
TERMINATION
James C. Baker, Highfield, England, assignor to ITT Industries,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 113,378
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 18, 1979,
7901884
Int. a.3 G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350—320 1 Qaim
fr^
-^s
10
1. In a dynamic image enhancing system for fiberscopes, the
improvement comprising:
a distal image-forming objective having first and second
lenses, the first of said lenses being fixed in aligned spaced
relationship with one end of an image-transporting fiber
bundle of a fiberscope incorporating said image-enhancing
system and the second of said lenses being positioned
between said first lens and fiber bundle;
means permitting pivoting of said second lens relative to said
one end of said fiber bundle; and
means for effecting said pivoting in controlled oscillating
fashion for causing images produced by said objective to
repeatedly scan across said one end of said fiber bundle.
4,378,953
THIN, OPTICAL MEMBRANES AND METHODS AND
APPARATUS FOR MAKING THEM
Ray Winn, Studio City, Calif., assignor to Advanced Semicon-
ductor Products, Santa Cruz, Calif.
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,489
Int. a.3 G02B 27/14
U.S. a. 350—171 37 Qaims
1. An optical membrane capable of being edge-supported
and having a predetermined thickness in the range of about O.S
to about 10 micrometers, with a precision of plus or minus
about 2%, edge-to-edge variations in said thickness of less than
about 2% over a distance of at least about 2.5 centimeters, and
a capacity to transmit an average of at least about 91% of
1. A method of manufacturing an optical fiber termination
comprising the steps of:
inserting an end of an optical fiber into one end of a tubular
ferrule of a transparent material, said ferrule having an
inner diameter substantially greater than the diameter of
said fiber;
closing the other end of said ferrule by a lens;
filling the ferrule with a transparent ultra-violet curing glue
before or after said fiber end is inserted into said ferrule;
passing light via said fiber to said lens;
adjusting the angular and radial setting of said fiber end with
respect to said lens until the light leaving said lens is a
collimated beam which is symmetrical with respect to the
center axis of said ferrule;
thereafter curing the glue adjacent to said lens and said fiber
end by injecting ultra-violet light into said glue by a beam
splitter in the path of said collimated beam to seal said lens
and said fiber end into said ferrule so that the collimated
beam may be monitored while the glue is curing; and
curing the remaining glue in said ferrule by exposing the
transparent ferrule to ultra-violet light by successively
uncovering the outer cylindrical surface of the ferrule
commencing from said other end housing said lens.
4,378,955
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR A MULTIMODE
IMAGE DISPLAY WITH A LIQUID CRYSTAL LIGHT
VALVE
William P. Bleha, Jr.; Eliezer Wiener- Avnear, both of Carlsbad,
and Paul F. Robusto, Oceanside, all of Calif., assignors to
Hughes Aircraft Company, Culver City, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 63,649, Aug. 3, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,283
Int. a.3 G02F l/lii
U.S. a. 350—334 27 Qaims
1. In a method of displaying an image wherein a writing light
input image modulates a polarized projection beam with an
electric field driven hybrid field effect liquid crystal light
valve, said light valve having a nematic liquid crystal structure
helically twisted through an acute angle, the multi-mode field
effect improvement comprising the steps of:
(a) orienting the polarization direction of said projection
beam incident on said light valve to fall within said acute
angle of said liquid crystal structure; and
(b) adjusting the magnitude of said electric field applied
across said liquid crystal layer so that predetermined
intensity levels of said input image modulates said projec-
tion beam to produce one of: (a) a simultaneous display of
color symbology and achromatic gray scale images and
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
131
(b) a separate display of one of them, said orienting of said
projection beam polarization being such that, as said mag-
•\ -
4,378,957
REDUCTION GEAR OF ELECT'RONIC WRISTWATCH
WITH STEPPING MOTOR AND SWEEP SECOND HAND
Daniel D. Malkin, ulitsa Junykh Lenintsev, 95/13, Korpus 1, kv.
31; Alexei V. Simbirtsev, 2 Vokzalny Pereulok 5, kv. 45; Boris
A. Peredkov, ulitp Moldagulo?oi 16, Korpus 2, kv. 19, and
Gennady A. Kruglov, Baltiiskaya ulitsa, 4, kv. 31, all of Mos-
cow, U.S.S.R.
PCT No. PCT/SU79/00028, § 371 Date Apr. 11, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 10, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00380, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 6, 1980
PCT- Filed Apr. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 195,200
Qaims priority, application U.S.S.R., Aug. 11, 1978, 2653351
Int. a.3 G04B 37/00
U.S. a. 368—300 9 Qaims
75
VOLTAtE (dEHTIVE UIITS)
nitude of said electric field is increased beyond a predeter-
mined value, transmission of white light through said light
valve is reduced to substantially zero.
4,378,956
DIRECT IMAGING OF INFORMATION USING LIGHT
PIPE DISPLAYS
Robert W. Lester, 46 Abbey Rd., Munsey Park, Manhasset,
N.Y. 11030
Filed Jan. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 156,821
Int. a.5 G03B 41/00. 27/00
U.S. a. 355—3 R 10 Qaims
1. A reduction gear of an electronic wristwatch having a
stepping motor and a sweep second, comprising three concen-
tric output shafts rotating at different speeds, a first one of the
shafts being provided with a bearing in the form of a support-
ing bush press-fitted in a bore in a wristwatch plate, said first
shaft making one revolution per hour and supporting a friction
wheel, the shafts being drivingly connected to one another and
to a shaft of the stepping motor through gear wheels and a
bridge coordinated with respect to the plate and secured
thereon by threaded means, wherein the improvement com-
prises the first shaft freely passing through a bore provided m
the supporting bush, the supporting bush being press-fitted in
the bore of the plate so that a portion of said supporting bush
projects from the plate towards the bridge, said shaft being
prevented from unlimited axial displacement in one direction
by the end face of the supporting bush and in the other direc-
tion by the end face of a gear wheel which is mounted on said
first shaft with an interference fit.
4,378,958
VAULT CADDY
Herbert N. Mauldin, Rt. 7, Viewmont, Dr., Greenville, S.C.
29609
Continuation of Ser. No. 881,709, Feb. 27, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,142
Int. Q.' B60P 3/28
U.S. Q. 414—461 2 Qaims
Windows
24
A light pipe information display, comprising:
non-conductive, transparent first sheet and a non-conduc-
tive substantially opaque second sheet, each having sub-
stantially planar inner and outer surfaces, said non-con-
ductive sheets being disposed adjacent to one another
with their inner surfaces opposing one another in spaced-
apart relationship, said second non-conductive sheet hav-
ing a plurality of discrete transparent light pipes formed
therethrough, at least one of said non-conductive sheets
including electrical conductors disposed on its inner sur-
face thereof, said conductors being connected to an elec-
troluminescent display material disposed between said
first and second sheets, arranged in discrete character-
forming segments, each segment of which is aligned with
one of said discrete light pipes.
1. A self-propelled vault carrying vehicle for transporting
132
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
and vertically positioning a vault object and the like compris-
ing:
a frame including a pair of said frame members carried in
spaced opposed relation, and a bridging frame member
integrally connecting said side frame members adjacent an
upper portion Thereof;
said side frame members converging upwardly to said bridg-
ing member;
lift means carried by said bridging member for raising and
lowering said object;
said frame being open at the ends and bottom thereof inter-
mediate said side frame members enabling said side frame
members to straddle said object and provide vertically
unobstructed raising and lowering of said object with
resp)ect to said frame;
a pair of driven wheels carried by said frame adjacent each
of said side frame members;
drive means including a first hydraulic powered drive for
driving the driven wheels adjacent one of said side frame
members and a second hydraulic powered drive for driv-
ing the driven wheels adjacent the other of said side frame
members affording positive drive traction for each wheel
of each said pair; and third hydraulic powered drive for
driving said lift means;
hydraulic power supply means for operating said first, sec-
ond and third hydraulic powered drives;
control means carried by said frame disposed for operation
by an operator standing on the ground including a sepa-
rate control for controlling and operation of said first and
second powered drives separately and independently of
one another to provide a high degree of tractive steering
of said vehicle, and including a separate control for con-
trolling operation of said lift means;
said control means including separate hydraulic control
valves connected to respective ones of said first, second,
and third hydraulic powered drives; said control valves
being connected in series with said hydraulic power sup-
ply means providing a live hydraulic circuit by which
hydraulic powered drives are simultaneously energized
affording a highly responsive control of the movement of
said vehicle and said vault object; and
longitudinally spaced removable load support members
carried transversely extending between said side frame
members adjacent the front and rear thereof being affixed
as a integral structure to said frame for stably supporting
said object during transportation and being removable
affording said unobstructed vertical movement.
able base, and a means for transmitting fluid between said
stationary base and said hydraulically actuated means through
l^-^-
4,378,959
APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING WORK FUNCTIONS
Kenneth J. Susnjara, Santa Claus, Ind., assignor to Thermwood
Corporation, Dale, Ind.
Filed Jun. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 48,006
Int. a.3 B25J 3/04
U.S. a. 414—732 32 Qaims
1. An apparatus for performing a work function on a work-
piece comprising a stationary base, a rotatable base mounted
on said stationary base, a means for rotatably displacing said
rotatable base relative to said stationary base, a lower arm
member pivotally mounted on said rotatable base, hydrauli-
cally actuated means for angularly displacing said lower arm
member relative to said rotatable base, an upper arm member
pivotally mounted on said lower arm member, hydraulically
actuated means for angularly displacing said upper arm mem-
ber relative to said lower arm member, a wrist assembly
mounted on said upper arm member, a hand member univer-
sally mounted on said wrist assembly, hydraulically actuated
means for angularly displacing said hand member relative to
said wrist assembly, said stationary and rotatable bases includ-
ing a rotary fluid slip ring assembly, said fluid slip ring assem-
bly including a rotatable member rigidly secured to said rotat-
said fluid slip ring assembly for operating said hydraulically
actuated means
4,378,960
VARIABLE GEOMETRY TURBINE INLET NOZZLE
Herman N. Lenz, Lambertville, Mich., assignor to Teledyne
Industries, Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed May 13, 1980, Ser No. 149,432
Int. aj FOID 5/14
U.S. a. 415—115 7 Qaims
1. A nozzle assembly for a turbine engine, said engine com-
prising a housing and an annular gas stream passageway
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
formed in the housing immediately upstream from one or more
turbine stages, said nozzle assembly comprising:
; a plurality of vanes, each vane being secured to a shaft,
I means for rotatably mounting said shafts to said engine
I housing so that said vanes are disix)sed in said gas stream
passageway,
means for rotating said shafts in unison with each other;
means for cooling said vanes,
I an annular mounting member secured to said housing, said
mounting member having a plurality of circumferentially
spaced apertures formed through it through which said
I shafts are rotatably mounted, and means for cooling said
mounting member,
1 wherein said mounting member apertures are greater in
cross sectional area than said shafts thus forming an open-
j ing therebetween which is open at one end to said gas
! stream, and
: wherein said means for cooling said mounting member fur-
ther comprises supplying a source of pressurized fluid to
the other side of said openings.
133
; 4,378,961
CASE ASSEMBLY FOR SUPPORTING STATOR VANES
Edmund D. Trousdell, Tolland, Conn., assignor to United Tech-
nologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 2,502, Jan. 10, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,066
Int. a.3 FOID 25/26
U.S. a. 415—137 5 Qaims
i^^^^j
1. In a gas turbine engine of the type having an engine case
assembly and a plurality of vanes extending in a substantially
radial direction therefrom, the improvement which comprises:
a case assembly having
a wall element,
a band element extending circumferentially about the wall
element and
t a plurality of blocks trapped radially between the band
I element and the wall element by said band element and
said wall element wherein each of said blocks is adapted
j to engage one of said vanes and is slidable in a generally
circumferential direction on one of said elements to
dissipate vibratory energy in the vane.
4,378,962
LIQUID FUEL INJECHON PUMPING APPARATUS
David J. C. Law, London, England, assignor to Lucas Industries
Limited, Birmingham, United Kingdom
lulled Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,191
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 18, 1980,
8023516
Int. a.3 F04B 19/22. 29/00
U.S. a. 417—462 4 Claims
1. A liquid fuel injection pumping apparatus for supplying
fuel to an internal combustion engine comprising a rotary
distributor member rotatably mounted within a body part and
arranged in use to be driven in timed relationship with an
associated engine, at least two radial bores formed in the dis-
tributor member, said bores being disposed in the same radial
plane and meeting each other at their inner ends and having
their axes angularly ofT-set, a passage communicating with the
inner ends of the bores, plungers in said bores respectively,
port means defined by the distributor member and body part
and through which fuel can flow to said bores through said
passage to effect outward movement of the plungers, a cam
ring surrounding said distributor member and having cam
lobes formed thereon which during rotation of the distributor
member impart simultaneous inward movement to said plung-
ers, further port means defined by the distributor member and
body part through which fuel displaced from said bores, as the
plungers are moved inwardly, can flow to the associated en-
gine, the inner ends of the plungers being shaped so that when
the plungers have moved inwardly their maximum extent,
substantially the whole of the space of the inner ends of the
bores will be occupied by the plungers, each plunger having an
axial slot defined therein which extends from the inner end of
the plunger, the apparatus including a plate-like member lo-
cated in the slots in the plungers respectively and acting to
retain the plungers against angular movement within the bores.
4,378,963
INJECTION MECHANISM FOR MOLDING PLASTICS
Hendrikus J. E. Schouenberg, Burg. Stolklaan 16, 4002 WJ Tiel,
Netherlands
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,545
Int. C1.3 B29F 1/03. 1/05
U.S. a. 425—144 20 Qaims
1. A mechanism for injecting plastics from an injection
molding machine into one or more mold cavities via one or
more gates in said one or more mold cavities, said mechanism
comprising:
an injection bushing for receiving molten plastic from said
injection molding machine;
more than one injection nozzle for injecting molten plastic
into said one or more mold cavities, each of said nozzles
having one or more nozzle conduits therethrough for
134
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
passage of molten plastic, each said nozzle conduit termi-
nating in a nozzle aperture positioned immediately oppo-
site one of said mold cavity gates;
a distributor block for providing flow paths for the molten
plastic between said receiving bushing and said injection
nozzles, said distributor block including distributor chan-
nel means communicating with said nozzle conduits, said
injection nozzles being connected to said distributor
block;
means for maintaining the molten plastic at an adjusted
temperature;
means for injecting the molten plastic from said injection
bushing through said distributor channel means and said
nozzle conduits into said mold cavity gates;
a needle valve positioned in each of said nozzle conduits for
closing each respective mold cavity gate when moved
longitudinally outwardly from said nozzle aperture;
a guide bushing slideably mounted for longitudinal move-
ment in said distributor block opposite each said nozzle
conduit, each said guide bushing having the end of one of
said needle valves remote from said nozzle aperture
fixedly mounted therein, each said guide bushing also
having a surface area exposed to the molten plastic being
injected through said distributor block whereby the pres-
sure of the molten plastic when being injected by said
injection means tends to move said guide bushing away
from said nozzle aperture thereby moving said needle
valve longitudinally and opening said mold cavity gate;
a chamber in said distributor block; and,
one plunger slideably mounted in said distributor block
chamber and connected to several of said guide bushings
and thereby to their respective needle valves for moving
said needle valves longitudinally outwardly to close their
respective mold cavity gates, said plunger being actuated
by fluid pressure and being adapted for longitudinal move-
ment in the same direction as said needle valve to which
said plunger is connected.
4^78,964
INTERNALLY INSULATED EXTRUSION DIE
John R. Wolfe, Jr., Rogers, Ark., assignor to TRW Inc., Cleve-
land, Ohio
Filed Jan. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 110,515
Int. aj B29B 1/OS
U.S. a. 425—463 3 Qaims
body, said wall portion and said forward end face, and
said first and second layers having said extrusion ports
passing therethrough;
a third layer of second insulating material disposed contigu-
ous to and forwardly of the forward end face to inhibit
heat transfer from the die body and a plurality of openings
extending through said third layer and disposed in align-
ment with said extrusion ports to allow communication of
the extruded material therethrough;
a subplate forming a fourth layer having an inner face dis-
posed contiguous with the second insulating material third
layer and substantially parallel to the forward end face, an
outer end face oppositely disposed to the inner face, a
plurality of openings extending between the inner and
outer faces and disposed in alignment with said extrusic^
ports to allow communication of the extruded material
therethrough, and the subplate being constructed of the
first material and being fixedly connected with the die
body;
a fifth layer of facing material fixedly secured to the subplate
outer face substantially parallel to the die body forward
end face at least in an area around the extrusion ports and
having holes therein to allow extruded material to pass
therethrough, and the fifth layer of facing material being
constructed of a second material which is harder than the
first material such that the facing material is relatively
wear resistant; and
the extrusion die having a layered structure between the
heating fluid flow channel and the exterior of the facing
which serially includes in a substantially parallel relation-
ship the first insulating material first layer, the second
layer of the first material, the second insulating material
third layer, the fourth layer of the first material, and the
fifth layer of the second material, respectively.
4,378,965
SPROCKET WHEEL FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERA
Shizuo Ishii, and Saburo Yoneyama, both of Hachioji, Japan,
assignors to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Feb. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 123,510
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 28, 1979,
54/25773[U]
Int. a.3 F16H 19/00
U.S. a. 474—161 2 Claims
1. An internally, doubly insulated extrusion die comprising:
a die body constructed from a first material and having a
rearward face, an oppositely disposed forward end face, a
plurality of extrusion ports extending therethrough be-
tween the rearward and forward end faces, a heating fluid
flow channel disposed therein adjacent the forward end
face in a heat transfer relationship with the extrusion ports
whereby a heated fluid passing through the channel is
adapted to transfer heat to a material being extruded
through the extrusion ports, and heating fluid flow chan-
nel having a rearwardly facing wall portion disposed
adjacent and generally parallel with the forward end face;
a first layer of a first insulating material disposed on the wall
portion in close proximity and generally parallel to the
forward end face for reducing heat transfer from the
heated fluid toward the forward end face;
a second layer of said first material forming a part of said die
1. An improved sprocket wheel for substantially planar
feeding of a strip of film in a photographic camera by applying
a thrust to end edges of two parallel and spaced apart rows of
perforations provided along the film strip through penetrating
engagement in the perforations, and wherein each of the film
strip perforations includes at least a rounded comer, the im-
provement comprising:
at least a train of film penetrating and feeding teeth on said
sprocket wheel, each of said teeth including a curved film
thrusting surface confronting the plane along which film is
fed in the camera and comprising a base portion having a
more gentle slope with respect to the film feeding plane
than a corresponding surface of an involute tooth profile
and an upper portion having a steeper slope with respect
April 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
to the film feeding plane than the corresponding surface of
an involute tooth profile,
said sprocket wheel further including a second train of film
feeding teeth such that each of said trains is engageable
with a respective one of said rows of perforations on the
film strip, an outer side surface on each of said teeth, and
a ridge defined between said outer side surface and said
film thrusting surface of each tooth, said ridge being
rounded so as to conform to the rounded comer of each
perforation on the film strip and thereby facilitate smooth
feeding of film by said sprocket wheel in the camera.
4,378,966
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A PIPE-CUTTING
DEVICE
Wilhelm Schumacher, Dusslingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Fa. Christian Majer K.G., Maschinenfabrik, Tuebin-
gen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 911,303, Jun. 1, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jan. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 110,929
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 2,
1977, 2724899
Int. a.3 B31C i/00
U.S. a. 493—22 2 Oaims
1. In a continuous spiral pipe winding machine having a
winding spindle for winding a band of sheet material and a
cutting member operatively mounted on a sled which is mov-
able reciprocally along said winding spindle which cutting
member advances along said winding spindle during operation
at the same speed as the advancing movement of the formed
pipe, an arrangement for controlling the advancing speed of
said cutting member toward said winding spindle in depen-
dence with the feed speed of said band of sheet material, com-
prising in combination,
135
a guide roller rotatably mounted in said machine over which
said band of sheet material is guided;
a pulse emitter operatively connected to said guide roller;
drive means mounted in said machine for reciprocally mov-
ing said cutting member toward said spindle;
and AND/OR-value-comparator stage having a pulse
counter and an AND/OR-comparator, said pulse emitter
being operatively connected to said pulse counter;
and said AND/OR-comparator being op>eratively con-
nected to said drive means, the outpulses of said compara-
/ /I / L 1 ^^^\
,2»' I 28 20
■ - r
2^/2
<■ !
lJ
tor being conducted to said drive means thereby determin-
ing the speed of movement of said cutting member toward
said spindle; said AND/OR-value-comparator stage has
an OR-value input stage, and computer means being oper-
atively connected to said pulse emitter, on the one hand,
and said OR-value input stage, on the other hand; said
computer receiving and processing pulse sequences which
are being emitted in accordance with the width B of the
band and the running-in angle a of the band with respect
to the spindle. i
CHEMICAL
4,378,967
PROCESS FOR BLEACHING nBROUS MATERIAL BY
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE
Minora Yotsuya, Toride; Kiyoshi Mae, Toyonaka; Seikyu Jin-
nouchi, and Toshio Ochiai, both of Matsudo, all of Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 114,255, Jan. 22, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,925
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 26, 1979, 54>8068
Int. a.5 D06L 3/04, 3/14
U.S. a. 8—111 14 Qaims
1. A process for bleaching a fibrous material by hydrogen
peroxide, which comprises bleaching a fibrous material by
hydrogen i}eroxide in a bleaching solution having a weakly
acidic state at a pH of 5-7 and at a temperature of 50°- 120° C,
and then adding an alkaline agent to the bleaching solution by
one whole charge or continuously and successively bleaching
the fibrous materials at a pH of 8.5-1 1 by the remaining hydro-
gen peroxide in a weakly alkaline state.
\ 4,378,968
PROCESS FOR PREVENTING THE REDEPOSITION OF
SOIL DURING DRY CLEANING, AND COMPOSITION
FOR CARRYING OUT THIS PROCESS
Michel Peignier, Versailles, and Oaude Renault, Saint-Remy-
Les Chevreuse, both of France, assignors to Chloe Chimie,
Puteaux, France
Filed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,546
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 20, 1980, 80 13700
Int. C1.3 D06L 1/02, 1/10; CUD 3/44
U.S. a. 8—142 9 Claims
1. Process for reducing soil redeposition onto textile articles
made of natural, synthetic or artificial fibers or blends thereof,
during dry cleaning operations using stabilized perchloroethyl-
ene, wherein a sufficient amount of at least one primary or
secondary alcohol of the formula ROH, in which R represents
an alkyl or alkenyl radical containing from 4 to 6 carbon atoms,
is incorporated as anti-redeposition adjuvant into this perchlo-
roethylene, said alcohol having a boiling point of between 95°
and 140° and forming, with the perchloroethylene, an azeo-
trope having a boiling point of between 80° and 130° C.
4,378,969
FLUID FORMULATIONS OF OXIDATION DYES FOR
MINERAL OIL PRODUCTS, FATS AND WAXES
Guenter Hansen, Ludwigshafen; Hans J. Kolbinger, Graenstadt;
Rudolf Senninger, Ludwigshafen, and Georg Zeidler, Dann-
stadt-Schaueraheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,273
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 2,
1980, 3020891
Int. C1.3 D06P 3/00
U.S. a. 8—521 7 Oaims
1. A fluid formulation of an oxidation dye which is obtained
by oxidizing a compound selected from the group consisting
of:
and
Ri is unsubstituted or hydroxy-, Ci-Cg-alkoxy-, or Ci-Cg-
alkanoy loxy-substituted C2-C 1 3-alkyl,
R2 is hydrogen or unsubstituted or hydroxy- or Ci-Cg-
alkoxy-substituted Ci-Cn-alkyl,
R^ is selected from the group consisting of
C6H13, C7H15. C8H17. CH2CH
/
\
\
.C2H5
C4H9
C9H19, C10H21. C11H23. C12H25. CijH27, C6H12OH,
" CH3
C2H5
/
CH— {CH2)3— COH. (CH2)3C)CH2CH
I \
CH3 C4H9
and CH2CH2OCOC7H15; and
X is hydroxy or
— N
/
i
\
Ri
R2
with air in an organic solvent containing an iron tet-
raaza(l4)annulene catalyst.
4,378,970
RED MONOAZO SULPHONIC AOD DYESTUFFS FOR
POLYAMIDE
Paul Lienhard, Frenkendorf, and Fabio Beffa, Riehen, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy AG, Basel, Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 111,301, Jan. 11, 1980, Pat. No. 4,312,808,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 720,621, Sep. 3, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 624,883, Oct. 22,
1975, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 389,511,
Aug. 20, 1973, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No.
102,062, Dec. 28, 1970, abandoned. This application Oct. 15,
1981, Ser. No. 311,595
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 29, 1969,
19309/69
Int. C\? C09B 29/28: C07C 107/04
U.S. a. 8—683 2 Claims
1. A process for the dyeing or printing of an organic fiber
material selected from the group consisting of a basic modified
polyolefin fiber material, polyurethane fiber material and natu-
ral or synthetic polyamide fiber material which comprises
employing a monoazo dyestuff of the formula:
NH2
S03©M®
(I)
wherein
ai)
wherein
Xi represents hydrogen or the methyl group, and
M® represents a colorless cation.
137
138
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^78,971
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR QUANTITATIVELY
DETERMINING THE LEVEL OF HEMOGLOBIN IN A
BIOLOGICAL SAMPLE
Samuel Schwartz, St. Louis Park, Minn., assignor to Regents of
the University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,399
Int. a.3 GOIN 3i/72. 33/32: BOIL 3/00
U.S. a. 436—66 42 Qaims
4378,974
START-UP METHOD FOR COAL GASinCATION PLANT
Peter J. Petit, Milwaukee, and Khosrow Famia, Brookfield,
both of Wis., assignors to Allis-Chalmers Corporation, Mil-
waukee, Wis.
Filed Jun. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386,749
Int. a.5 ClOJ 3/00
U.S. a. 48—197 R 8 Claims
19 DILUTION GAS
1. A method of quantitatively determining the level of hemo-
globin in feces, urine or gastric juice comprising the following
steps:
preparing a test sample of feces, urine or gastric juice;
converting the heme portion of the hemoglobin in said test
sample to porphyrin by combining said test sample with
an effective quantity of oxalic acid and a reducing salt
selected from the group consisting of ferrous oxalate and
ferrous sulfate;
assaying the fluorescence of the converted porphyrin; and
comparing the fluorescence of the converted porphyrin to
the fluorescence of a standard.
4,378,972
TITRATION AGENT AND METHOD FOR USING SAME
Eugen Scholz, Garbsen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Riedel-De Haen Aktiengesellschaft, Seelze/Hannover, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Not. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 210,857
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 5,
1980, 3008421; Oct. 20, 1980, 3039511
Int. a.3 GOIN 33/18
U.S. a. 436-42 8 Qaims
1. A Karl Fischer titration agent capable of detecting mois-
ture in a substance, said agent containing an amine, sulfur
dioxide and iodine, wherein the amine is a Ave- or six-mem-
bered heterocyclic compound having at least two hetero-
atoms, at least one of the hetero-atoms being a nitrogen atom
and the molar ratio of heterocyclic compound to sulfur dioxide
being from 10:1 to 0.3:1.
1. A method for initiating operation of a plant for the gasifi-
cation of solid carbonaceous material containing chlorine by
heating a gasiflcation reactor having a refractory lining to a
temperature proflle sufficient to permit autothermic operation
of the gasiflcation process wherein said plant includes equip-
ment fabricated in part from materials susceptible to chloride
induced stress corrosion cracking in the presence of oxygen;
the method comprising:
a. combusting a near stoichiometric mixture of a combustible
fuel and an oxygen containing gas to produce an exhaust
gas containing essentially no free oxygen;
b. diluting said exhaust gas with a diluent gas containing
essentially no free oxygen to produce a product gas of a
mixture of diluent gas and exhaust gas;
c. introducing a flow of said product gas at a temperature
above 500° F. to said reactor;
d. measuring the temperature of said product gas introduced
to said reactor;
e. increasing the temperature of said product gas flowing to
said reactor in response to the temperature of said product
gas within said reactor to increase the temperature of said
product gas within said reactor at a rate sufficiently low to
prevent thermal induced cracking of said refractory lin-
ing;
f. increasing the temperature of said product gas within said
reactor until said reactor achieves said temperature pro-
file;
g. discontinuing said flow of said product gas to said reactor
when said reactor achieves said temperature proflle; and
thereafter,
h. initiating said gasification process whereby said reactor is
heated to said temperature proflle necessary to permit
autothermic operation of said gasiflcation process while
abating stress corrosion cracking of said materials by
operation of chlorine liberated from said carbonaceous
material during said gasiflcation process.
4,378,973
DIESEL FUEL CONTAINING CYCLOHEXANE, AND
OXYGENATED COMPOUNDS
William M. Sweeney, Wappingers Falls, N.Y., assignor to Tex-
aco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,563
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/J8
U.S. a. 44—56 7 Claims
1. A diesel fuel composition comprising a mixture of hydro-
carbons boiling in the range of 320° to 700° F. and a particu-
late-suppressing amount of a mixture of cyclohexane with at
least one oxygenated compound selected from the group of
aldehydes and ketones having from 3 to 16 carbon; normal
alcohols having from 2 to 26 carbon atoms in the chain; ethers
or cyclic ethers having from 2 to 16 carbon atoms and mixtures
thereof; said compound being present in an amount sufficient
to provide from 0.0001 to 1.5 weight percent of oxygen to said
fuel.
4,378,975
ABRASIVE PRODUCT
Peter N. Tomlinson, 315 Enford Rd., Mondeor, Transvaal, and
Aulette Davies, 45 Arend Ave., Randpark Ext. 5, Randburg,
Transvaal, both of South Africa
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,124
Oaims priority, application South Africa, Aug. 14, 1980,
80/4996; Nov. 26, 1980, 80/7383
Int. a.5 B24D 3/02
U.S. a. 51—309 10 Claims
1. A tool insert comprising a plurality of discrete chromium-
coated diamond particles bonded together by means of a tough
wear-resistant bonding alloy having a melting point below
1 100° C. and containing 65 to 90 percent by weight nickel and
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
139
5 to 15 percent by weight chromium, the concentration of
diamond particles being in the range 10 to 40 percent by vol-
ume of the insert and the chromium coating being provided in
an amount of up to 10 percent by weight coated particle.
4,378,976
COMBINED SONIC AGGLOMERATOR/CROSS FLOW
HLTRATION APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR SOLID
PARTICLE AND/OR LIQUID DROPLET REMOVAL
FROM GAS STREAMS
William F. Rush, Tinley Park, 111., assignor to Institute of Gas
Technology, Chicago, 111.
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,946
Int. a.3 BOID 51/04, 51/08. 46/24
U.S. a. 55—15 32 Oaims
1. Apparatus for removing solid particles and/or liquid
droplets from gas streams comprising in combination;
at least one sonic agglomerator comprising a gas conduit and
a sound source means generating a sonic field within said
gas conduit for agglomerating liquid droplets into liquid
agglomerates as said gas stream passes through said con-
duit, said gas conduit having heating means capable of
maintaining the temperature of said solid particles above
the solidifying temperature of the liquid droplets thereof;
and
a cross flow filter comprising a housing and a rigid porous
filter element having an input side and an output side
within said housing; said filter housing having an input
port in communication with the exit of said sonic agglom-
erator gas conduit and said filter element output side, and
an exit port in said filter housing in communication with
said filter element input side, said filter element having
pore diameters suitable to retain said liquid agglomerates
adjacent said input side of said filter element, said filter
element being at an angle to the horizontal whereby a
portion of said gas stream passes through said clean gas
port and a portion of said gas stream and said liquid ag-
glomerates pass through said exit port of said filter hous-
ing.
15. A process for removing solid particles and/or liquid
droplets from gas streams comprising the steps:
heating and maintaining the temperature of said solid parti-
cles above the solidifying temperature of the liquid drop-
lets thereof to form and maintain said liquid droplets
thereof; agglomerating at least a substantial portion of said
liquid droplets into liquid agglomerates by passing said
liquid droplets through at least one sonic field, and remov-
ing said liquid agglomerates from said gas stream by pass-
ing said gas stream with said liquid agglomerates in
contact with the input side of a cross fiow filter having a
rigid porous filter element, a portion of said gas stream
passing through said filter element to an output side and
through a clean gas port adjacent said output side and a
portion of said gas stream and agglomerates passing
through an exit port adjacent said input side, said filter
element having pore diameters suitable to retain said ag-
glomerates adjacent said input side of said filter element
and being at an angle to the horizontal whereby said liquid
agglomerates drip off said input side of said filter element
and pass through said exit port.
4,378,977
REMOVAL OF UNDESIRED GASEOUS COMPONENTS
FROM HOT WASTE GASES
Gerhard Linde, Gruenwald; Peter Haeussinger, Munich, and
Claus Schliebener, Strasslach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Linde Aktiengesellschaft, Wiesbaden, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 93,089, Nov. 9, 1979, Pat. No.
4,294,590. This application Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,641
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 11,
1978, 2848721; Oct. 25, 1979, 2943130
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 13,
1S>98, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 BOID 53/14
U.S. a. 55—48 35 Claims
2. In a process for removing undesired gaseous components
from hot combustion gases by scrubbing with a regenerable
absorbent, the undesired gaseous components being passed
through dessicators prior to removal from the system, and the
scrubbed combustion gases being removed through an exhaust
stack,
the improvement comprising:
conducting the scrubbing with a liquid physical absorbent at
a temperature less than 0* C. and supplying the required
cooling of the scrubbing process by means of an absorp-
tion-type refrigeration unit, cooling the combustion gases
140
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
prior to scrubbing, in indirect heat exchange with gas
streams to be heated, the indirect heat exchange being
performed in an upper temperature range and a lower
temperature range, and using air as said gas stream to be
heated in the upper temperature range of the indirect heat
exchange, resultant heated air being used in part as (a)
preheated air of combustion, in part as (b) an energy
source for the operation of the absorption-type refrigera-
tion unit, in part as (c) an admixture to the purified com-
bustion gases for increasing the temperature of the puri-
fied combustion gas and thus, the draft in the exhaust stack
of the system, and for lowering the dew point of water in
the flue gas, or in part as (d) a purging gas for regenerating
the dessicators arranged for having the stream of products
removed from the regenerated absorbent pass there-
through before removal from the system.
4,378,979
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PURGING AND
ISOLATING A nLTER COMPARTMENT WITHIN A
BAGHOUSE INSTALLATION
S. Michael Dunseith, Louisville, Ky., assignor to Ailis-Chalmers
Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
FUed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,128
Int. a.3 BOID 46/04
U.S. a. 55—96 10 Claims
-, 27 29
4,378,978
DEGASSING OF LIQUID MIXTURES
Nils E. Andersson; Sten Eriksson, and Bengt Sinner, all of
Viisteras, Sweden, assignors to ASEA Aktiebolag, Viisteras,
Sweden
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,086
Claims priority, application Sweden, Aug. 25, 1980, 8005927
Int. a.' BOID 19/00
U.S. a. 55—52 15 Qaims
rt
^
20
.^0:<±3
ky'
IB'
H>-J
1. A method of degassing a mixture of a liquid first material
and at least one second material, the liquid first material being
initially contained in a container means, comprising the steps of
withdrawing the liquid first material from the container means
and mixing it with each second material to form a mixture,
regeneratively pumping the mixture through a mixture clean-
ing means and into an aeration tank, and maintaining the level
of the mixture in the aeration tank substantially even with the
level of the liquid first material in the container means.
4. In a system for degassing a mixture of a liquid first mate-
rial and at least one second material which includes a container
means for containing the liquid first material, an aeration tank,
a mixture cleaning means and pumping and mixing means for
mixing the liquid first material with the second material to
form a mixture and pump the mixture through the mixture
cleaning means into the aeration tank, the improvement
wherein the pumping and mixing means includes a regenera-
tive pump located between the mixture cleaning means and the
aeration tank, the regenerative pump acting to slow down the
mixture flow rate through the mixture cleaning means while
permitting a pressure drop thereacross, and wherein the aera-
tion tank, the mixture cleaning means and the pumping and
mixing means are positioned to be at substantially the same
level as the top of the container means, and such that the level
of liquid first material in the container means can be maintained
substantially even with the level of the mixture in the aeration
tank.
1. In a process for cleaning a dirty gas stream in a gas clean-
ing system having a plurality of filter compartments wherein
hot dirty gases containing corrosive agents are directed into a
common inlet manifold at a subatmospheric pressure and
drawn through an inlet duct into each of the filter compart-
ments where the dirty gases flow through filter bags supported
within the compartments and exit each of the compartments
and flow into a common outlet manifold through normally
open first damper means in an outlet passage connecting each
of the compartments to the common outlet manifold, the sys-
tem further including a conduit connecting the outlet manifold
to a reverse gas manifold including normally open second
damper means adapted to regulate a flow of filter gases from
the outlet manifold into the conduit, normally closed third
damper means in the outlet passage of each of the compart-
ments adapted to regulate a flow of filtred gases from the
conduit into the compartments, and normally closed fourth
damper means connected to the conduit between the compart-
ments and the second damper means operable to vent the
conduit to the atmosphere, the improvement comprising the
steps of:
closing said first damper means of one of the compartments
to prevent the flow of filtered gases into the outlet mani-
fold;
opening said third damper means on said one compartment
to allow filtered gases in the outlet manifold to flow into
said compartment through the conduit connecting the
outlet manifold to said compartment;
drawing filtered gases from the outlet manifold and directing
said gases through the conduit into said one compartment
through said third damper means so that they flow
through the filter bags countercurrent to the normal flow
of dirty gases;
closing said second damper means within the conduit to
prevent the flow of filtered gases from the outlet manifold
into the conduit;
opening said fourth damper means to vent the conduit to the
atmosphere; and
drawing a stream of ambient air through said fourth damper
means and directing it through the conduit into said one
compartment to purge dirty gases from within said com-
partment.
9. A baghouse installation for cleaning hot dirty gases con-
taining corrosive agents, comprising:
a plurality of parallel filter compartments, each of said com-
partments having a gas inlet and a gas outlet, and a plural-
ity of filter bags mounted within each of the compart-
ments adapted to filter dirty gases entering the compart-
ment through the inlets whereafter the resultant filtered
gases exit the compartments through the outlets;
a common inlet manifold for the dirty gases connected with
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
141
each of said inlets to accommodate the flow of dirty gases
•into the filter compartments;
a common outlet manifold for the resultant filtered gases
connected with each of said outlets for conveying said
gases away from the compartments;
blower means connected with the outlet manifold to draw
the gases through the compartments at subatmospheric
pressure;
first damper means operatively positioned and aligned with
each of the outlets of the compartments selectively opera-
ble to close off a selected one of the compartments to
prevent gases from flowing between said compartment
and the outlet manifold;
a conduit connected with the outlet manifold including
second damper means operably positioned and aligned
with respect to the conduit to selectively close off the
conduit;
a reverse gas manifold connected with said conduit and
including a reverse gas port opening into each of the
compartments;
third damper means operatively positioned and aligned with
each of the reverse gas ports selectively operable to pro-
vide selective communication between the compartments
and the reverse gas manifold;
second blower means connected with the conduit and the
reverse gas manifold adapted to draw filtered gases from
, the outlet manifold and direct said gases into the reverse
gas manifold; and
a duct connected with the conduit between said second and
third damper means including fourth damper means oper-
atively positioned and aligned with respect to the duct to
I selectively vent the conduit to the atmosphere through
the duct; whereby
upon closing said first and fourth damper means and opening
said second and third damper means filtered gases fiow
through the filter bags countercurrent to the normal flow
of dirty gases thereby cleaning the filter bags, and upon
closing said first and second damper means and ojaening
said third and fourth damp>er means ambient air is drawn
into the conduit and directed into said compartment to
purge dirty gases from within the compartment.
in two opposite first and second directions (16 and 16a) which
is located between the inlet and outlet openings, rollers (18)
mounted on the casing at the tips of the projections and movea-
bly supporting the filter medium and belt with the first surface
of the filter medium adjacent the inlet opening and the second
surface of the filter medium in contact with the belt, wherein
the inlet and the outlet openings are separated by the filter
medium in the casing for filtration and including means for
moving the feed belt to remove the filter medium and means
for collecting the removed filter medium, the improvement
which comprises:
(a) closing the projections pointing in the first direction (16a)
with a first side of the casing (10) such that the projections
pointing in the second direction (16) define inlet openings;
(b) closing the projections pointing in the second direction
(16) with a second side of the casing (10) opposite to the
first side such that the projections pointing in the first
direction (16fl) define outlet openings;
wherein in use gas flow with the particles is along the first
surface (13fl) of the filter medium towards the sawtoothed
projections closed in the second direction (16) on the
second side of the casing, then at an angle from the gas
flow along the first surface through the filter medium,
then through the feed belt and then along the second
surface (13b) of the filter medium and the belt away from
the projections closed in the first direction (16a) on the
first side of the casing and then out the outlet openmg.
4^78,980
GAS BORNE PARTICLE nLTERING APPARATUS
James Long, Bloomfield Hills, Mich., assignor to James M.
Hammond, East Lansing, Mich., a part interest
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,264
Int. a.3 B03C 3/30; BOID 46/18
U.S. a. 55— 103 MQaims
lOb ^^-^^
4,378,981
GAS SEPARATION APPARATUS
Roger S. Otstot, and Charles J. Runlde, both of Raleigh, N.C.,
assignors to Monsanto Company, St Louis, Mo.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,640
Int. Cl.^ BOID 53/22
U.S. a. 55—158 6 Claims
12. In a gas borne particle filtering apparatus including a
filter medium (13) having first and second surfaces (13a and
13b) and a depth (d) between the surfaces, an outer casing (10)
having an inlet and an outlet opening (11,12), an endless move-
able feed belt (14) in the casing defining rounded tip (15) multi-
ple sawtoothed cross-sectioned projections alternately pointed
1. Apparatus for separating one fluid from a mixture of fluids
comprising
(a) a cylindrical shell having an enlarged end portion, said
end portion having therein an inlet for admitting said fluid
mixture;
(b) a bundle of hollow fibers positioned in the shell, said
fibers being more permeable to said one fluid than other
fluids of the mixture;
(c) a tube sheet secured to the enlarged end of the shell for
closing said end portion, said hollow fibers extending
through said tube sheet, and
(d) a tubular distribution element mounted in the enlarged
end portion of the shell and extending the length of said
enlarged end portion, said distribution element cooperat-
ing with said enlarged end portion and the tube sheet to
form an annular chamber surrounding said element, said
element having therein a port so positioned that
0.4gi/Dgl.3
0.2gd/DS0.6
where d is the distance from the tube sheet to said port, 1 is
the distance from the tube sheet to said inlet and D is the
diameter of the bundle of fibers.
142
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^78,982
COMPACT OXYGEN CONCENTRATOR
Norman R. McCombs, Tonawanda, N.Y., assignor to Greene &
Kellogg, Inc., Tonawanda, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,361
Int. a.J BOID 53/04
U.S. a. 55—162 64 Qaims
moving a HEPA Alter to a position in said one chamber in
engagement with said baffle means;
first clamp means for clamping the forward end of the
HEPA filter against said baffle means in a gastight engage-
ment about said aperture by pressure applied to the rear
end of the filgter; and
4,378,983
HOUSING FOR MOUNTING HEPA HLTERS
Dayid T. Martin, Essendon, Australia, assignor to The Common-
wealth of Australia, Melbourne, Australia
PCT No. PCT/AU80/00078, § 371 Date Jub. 15, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 15, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01109, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 30, 1981
PCT Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 276,386
Qaims priority, application Australia, Oct. 26, 1979, PE1088
Int. a.3 BOID 46/00
U.S. a. 55—357 16 Claims
1. A housing for mounting a HEPA filter in an air flow
circuit of a building air-conditioning or ventilation system,
including an open ended tubular casing; baffle means formed to
define an aperture and disposed to divide the interior of said
casing into respective chambers which are accessible from
respective open ends of the casing; gas ports for each of said
chambers; and a pair of cover members for closing the respec-
tive open-ends of the casing, each of which cover members
includes a flange complementary to the associated end of the
casing; characterized by:
slide structure within one of said chambers for slidably
1. A vessel for an adsorbent bed for use in a PSA machine
comprising a first pipe of predetermined length, comprising the
body of said vessel, a second piptf^of a predetermined length
shorter than said first pipe and positioned within said first pipe
to create an annular space between said first and second pipes,
means to close both ends of said first pipe, one of said end
closing means for said first pipe also closing one end of said
second pipe, said one end closing means comprising a cap
member having a shape corresponding to the cross-sectional
shape of said first pipe, means to sealingly mount said cap
members on both of said one ends of said first and second pipes,
and means to permit a flow of gas in and out of said vessel
through said cap member communicating separately and di-
rectly with each of said annular space and the space inside said
second pipe, whereby the functional length of an adsorbent
bed in said vessel is substantially equal to twice the length of
said first pipe and the physical length of said vessel is substan-
tially equal to the length of said first pipe.
23. In a machine for separating a component gas out of a
mixture of gases using a PSA technique, said machine includ-
ing a gas compressor, means for deadening the sound of the gas
intake to said compressor, and said sound deadening means
comprising an intake hose having a predetermined length and
a predetermined diameter both selected to minimize said sound
of said gas being taken into said compressor.
second clamp means, independent of the first, and associated
seal means, for clamping the cover members to said casing
to effect gastight engagement of said flanges with the
respective ends of the casing.
4,378,984
DISTILLATIVE FREEZING PROCESS FOR
SEPARATING VOLATILE MIXTURES
Chen-Yen Cheng, and Sing- Wang Cheng, both of 9605 La Playa
St., NE., Albuquerque, N. Mex. 87111
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 181,002, Aug. 22, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 930,312,
Aug. 2, 1978, Pat. No. 4,218,893, and Ser. No. 676,640, Apr. 13,
1976, abandoned, and Ser. No. 816,852, Jul. 18, 1977,
abandoned. This application Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 2SM>,130,
Int. a.3 F25J i/00
U.S. a. 62—12 17 Oaims
1. A crystallization separation process for separating a multi-
component mixture that is at least partly in a liquid state and
includes at least two key volatile components, denoted respec-
tively as A-component and B-component, into a B-enriched
portion and a B-lean portion through formation of a B-
enriched solid mass, wherein the two components form a
binary system
(a) whose characteristic vapor pressure ratio defined as the
ratio of the vapor pressure of A-component to that of
B-component both evaluated at the triple point tempera-
ture of B-component is in the range of 0.1 to 10 and is less
than the ratio of the heat of sublimation to the heat of
melting of B-component evaluated at the triple point
temperature of B-component, and
(b) whose constant pressure phase diagram that includes a
three phase (B-enriched solid, liquid and va[>or) state has
a two phase (B-enriched solid and vapor) region covering
a substantial concentration range above the temperature
of the three phase state and a two phase (B-enriched solid
and liquid) region below the temperature of the three
phase state,
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
that comprises a Hrst step of forming a first vapor mixture and
a first condensed mass that comprises a mother liquor and a
solid phase mass enriched in B-component by concurrently
vaporizing the two components from the mixture in a first zone
under a first temperature and a first pressure that are respec-
tively lower than the triple point temperature and the triple
point pressure of the pure B-component.
4^78^5
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING AN
OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE nBER
Dale R. Powers, Painted Post, N.Y., assignor to Coming Glass
Works, Coming, N.Y.
} Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,235
Int. a.J C03B 79/06. i7/025. 37/07
U.S, a. 65—3.12 17 Qaims
Kl f i 1 '
49
_L |-|M«t«fing {^ — |SICI4 |
H Metering }i -j — |g«CU |
I
loa
Control l«f
94
12. A method of forming a cylindrically-shaped porous glass
preform comprising the steps of
providing an elongated cylindrical core member,
directing a first stream of glass particulate material toward a
lateral surface of said core member to build up a first
coating thereon,
rotating said core member,
longitudinally moving said core member, and
reciprocatingly moving said stream of particulate material
with respect to a portion of the length of said core mem-
ber to deposit a particulate material coating, each cycle of
reciprocating movement spanning a different portion of
the length of said core member than the preceding cycle,
whereby continuous reciprocation of said stream causes a
tapered coating to be built up.
13. In a method of forming a porous glass preform compris-
ing the steps of
providing a substrate, and
directing a stream of glass particulate material toward said
substrate to form a porous coating thereon, the improve-
ment comprising
reciprocatingly moving said stream of glass particulate ma-
terial with respect to a portion of said substrate, the con-
centration of a dopant constituent within said stream of
glass particulate material varying as a function of the
position of said stream along the path of its reciprocating
movement, the portion of said porous coating along which
said stream is being reciprocatingly moved is conically-
shaped, the change in concentration of said dopant con-
stituent being such that the refractive index of said partic-
ulate material is greatest when said stream is directed
toward the region of said conically-shaped coating having
the smallest radius.
143
4,378,986
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING OPTICAL HBERS
Tomoo Yaoase, and Motohiro Aral, both of Tokyo, Japaa, as-
signors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,093
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 1, 1980, 55-89813
Int. a.' C03B 19/06, 37/025
U.S. a. 65—3.12 19 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing an optical fiber having core
and clad sections, comprising the steps of:
forming around a thin glass member first porous glass layers
which, together with said thin glass member, are to consti-
tute a core section of said optical flber;
forming around said first porous glass layers second porous
glass layers which are to constitute a clad section of said
optical fiber;
heating and defoaming said first and second porous glass
layers to produce a transparent glass preform;
heating said transparent preform so formed to a drawing
temperature thereof; and
drawing the heated transparent preform to reduce the cross-
sectional area of said thin glass member and said first
porous glass layers to form a core section of said optical
flber, the reduced cross-sectional area of said thin glass
member constituting a pari of said core section, the re-
duced cross-sectional area of said flrst porous glass layers
constituting the remainder of said core section.
4378,987
LOW TEMPERATURE METHOD FOR MAKING
OPTICAL nBERS
Stephen B. Miller, Coming, and Peter C. Schultz, Painted Pott,
both of N.Y., assignors to Coming Glass Works, Coming,
N.Y.
FUed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,786
Int. a.3 C03B 37/025. 37/07
U.S. Q. 65— 3.12 I 10 Claims
m
l*^ — \AAA/WV\^
, r-. l8o'-
56 56'-tJ
^
d
I8b' Tr^^r
56 56"
69-
1. In a method of forming an optical flber preform compris-
ing
providing a substrate,
forming glass precursor particulate material by flowing at
least two glass forming reactants into a reaction zone
144
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
■■>
adjacent to said substrate where they react to form a
suspension of particulate reaction product, said at least
two reactants being maintained separate until they reach
said reaction zone where said reaction product is pro-
duced, and
depositing the particulate reaction product on said substrate
to yield an optical fiber preform,
the improvement wherein said reaction product is a metal
halide, one of said glass forming reactants is a compound con-
taining a cation of the resultant metal halide and an anionic
substituent which renders the compound into a volatile state,
and another of said reactants is a halogenating agent.
4^78,988
ELEMENTS FOR BENDING PLATES MADE OF A
MATERIAL IN THE PLASTIC STATE, USE OF SUCH
ELEMENTS FOR BENDING AND HARDENING PLATES
AND A DEVICE EQUIPPED WITH SUCH ELEMENTS
Claude Presta, Courbevoie, France, assignor to Saint Gobain
Vitrage, Neuilly-sur-Seine, France
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,054
Oaims priority, application France, Jun. 10, 1980, 80 12851
Int. a.3 C03B 23/023
U.S. a. 65—182.3 19 Claims
1. An element for bending or hardening a movable plate of
a material in a plastic state where the element is adapted to be
positioned below said movable plate to support the same,
characterized in that the surface of said element contacting the
plate has a plurality of bending profiles taken in a plane perpen-
dicular to the direction of movement of the plate, in that adja-
cent bending profiles blend smoothly with one another and in
that said surface has a radius of curvature which varies in a
continuous manner over the complete length of the surface,
and in having adjustment means for relatively moving a plate
over different longitudinal portions of said surface.
4,378,989
APPARATUS FOR LASER ASSISTED MACHINING OF
GLASS MATERIALS
Carlo F. La Fiandra, New Canaan; Burke E. Nelson, Ridgefield,
and Douglas F. Baker, West Reading, all of Conn., assignors
to The Perkin-Elnicr Corporation, Norwalk, Conn.
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,176
Int. a,3 C03B 29/00. 33/10
U.S. a. 65—271 8 Claims
1. A system for removing material from the surface of a glass
workpiece comprising:
(a) means for holding and rotating said glass workpiece;
(b) a beam applicator for directing concentrated energy
beam towards the surface of said glass workpiece to soften
the glass material in the area of impingement of said beam;
(c) a materia] removal device disposed in close fixed proxim-
ity to said beam applicator in physical contact with said
glass workpiece and in the path of rotation of said glass
workpiece following the softening of said glass material
by said beam to remove the material softened by said
beam, said material removal device being maintained at
substantially the same radial distance as said beam applica-
tor during removal of material; and
(d) means for changing the relative positions of said beam
applicator and said material removal device by relatively mov-
ing said beam applicator and said material removal device
radially with respect to the direction of rotation of said glass
workpiece whereby diflerent areas of said glass workpiece are
exposed to said beam to permit removal of material therefrom.
4,378,990
HERBiaDAL COMPOSITION
Keiji Endo, Shimada; Tomomi Toriyama, and Kisaku Mori, both
of Shizuoka, all of Japan, assignors to Schering Aktiengesell-
schaft, Berlin and Bergkamen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,679
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 3, 1979, 54-156561
Int. C\? AOIN 43/02. 31/00
U.S. a. 71—90 3 Claims
1. Herbicidal composition consisting essentially of as active
components an effective amount of a mixture of 5-(N-phenyl-
carbamoylamino)-l,2,3-thiadiazole and a diphenyl ether of
the formula
rvor\
N02
wherein the substituents X are chlorine, Y is hydrogen or
lower alkoxy, and n is an integer from 1 to 3, in a ratio from
about 8:1 to 1:8 paris by weight , and an ineri carrier material.
4,378,991
HERBiaDAL O-ARYL OR ALKARYLSULFONYLUREAS
George Levitt, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 168,347, Jul. 11, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 264^31
Int. C\? C07D 251/46. 251/16. 251/22; AOIN 43/66
VJS. a. 71—93 27 Claims
1. A compound selected from
.0:
Ri
SO2NHCONH— A
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
14S
-continued
C4
n is 0 or 1;
Rl is H, F, CI, Br, NO2, CF3, C1-C4 alkyl, OCF3 or Ci
alkoxy;
R2 and R3 are selected independently from H and CH3;
R4is H, C1-C3 alkyl, F, CI, Br, CF3, OCF3 or C1-C3 alkoxy;
R5 is CH3, CI, Br or H;
A is
- -<
X is H, CH3, OCH3, OCH2CH3, OCH2CF3, CH2OCH3 or
CI;
Y is CH3, OCH3 or OCH2CH3;
Z is N, and
Q is CH2 or O;
provided that the total number of carbons in R is less thah or
equal to nine.
19. A method for controlling the growth of undesired vege-
tation which comprises applying to the locus to be protected
an effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
4^78,992
UREA DERIVATIVES, AND THEIR PRODUCTION AND
USE
Ryo Yoshida, Kawanishi; Ichiki Takemoto, Takarazuka; Seizo
Sumida, Nishinomiya, and Katsuzo Kamoshita, Osaka, all of
Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 114,746
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 30, 1979, 54-9944
Int. a.3 AOIN 47/30; C07C 69/76. 127/19
U.S. a. 71—120 11 Claims
7. A herbicidal composition comprising as an active ingredi-
ent at least one of the compounds of the formula:
l-(Z)„-Y-/ \
/
NHCN
II \
O CH3
wherein R is a C4-C10 cycloalkyl group, a C4-C10 cycloalke-
nyl group, a C4-C10 cycloalkyl group condensed with a ben-
zene ring or substituted with at least one C1-C4 alkyl group or
a C4-Ciocycloalkenyl group condensed with a benzene ring or
substituted with a C1-C4 alkyl group, Z is a C1-C4 alkylene
group which may have an atom of oxygen and/or sulfur at the
terminal of the carbon chain, Y is an oxygen atom or a sulfur
atom, A is a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or a methoxy
group and n is an integer of 0 or 1 with the proviso that in the
chain consisting of — (Z)„— Y— , oxygen and/or sulfur atoms
are not present in succession, and an inert carrier.
4,378,993
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING
HEIGHT LEVEL OF MELTING ZONE IN BLAST
FURNACE
Tsutomu Fukushima; Takeshi Furukawa; Shin-ichi Saito, all of
Yokohama; Takashi Kobayashi, Yoyogimachi, and Takeo
Yamada, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Kokaa
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Not. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204,843
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, No?. 9, 1979, 54-144332
Int. a.3 C21B 5/00
U.S. a. 75—41 8 Claims
1. A method of measuring the height level of the top of a
melting zone of a charge within a blast furnace, said method
comprising the steps of:
Inserting and lowering at least one coaxial or multi-core cable
having an electrically opened forward end into said furnace
from the top thereof in such a manner that the forward end
of said cable reaching the top of said melting zone is melted
and said cable is drawn downward continuously along with
a charge falling within said furnace;
applying at predetermined intervals a sharp step voltage to said
cable from the furnace top side thereof toward said forward
end; and
measuring a response of a reflected wave from said forward
end caused by said step voltage,
whereby measuring variation in the length of said cable due to
the melting of said cable forward end reaching the top of
said melting zone in accordance with the time response of
said reflected wave by said step voltage and determining
from the result of said measurement the height level of the
top of said melting zone.
4,378,994
METHOD FOR ESTIMATING GEOGRAPHICAL
DISTRIBUTION OF COHESIVE ZONE IN BLAST
FURNACE
Kiichi Narita, Kobe; Shinichi Inaba, Kakogawa; Masakata Shi-
mizu, Kobe; Kenichi Okimoto, Hyogo, and Isao Kobayashi,
Mild, all of Japan, assignors to Kobe Steel, Ltd., Kobe, Japan
FUed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,586
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 9, 1980, 55-1631
Int a.3 C21B 7/24
U.S. a. 75—41 5 Claims
1. A method for estimating the geographical distribution of
a fusion belt in a blast furnace which is intermittently charged
with an iron ore material to produce molten iron in a continu-
ous manner, said method comprising:
altering at least a part of the composition of the charging
iron ore material at a certain time point;
measuring variations in the composition of the produced
molten iron ore and slag over a given time period; and
estimating from said measured variations, the shape of said
fusion belt in said furnace wherein the shape of said fusion
146
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
belt is estimated from a relation of a pattern of variation of
at least one selected component of said furnace at a point
downstream from said fusion belt and the speed of gravita-
tional descent of said charged material in said furnace.
4,378,995
IRON BLUE PIGMENT, PROCESS FOR MAKING THE
SAME AND USE
Everhard Gratzfeid, Wesseling; Eva Oausen; Helmut Reinhardt,
both of Cologne, and Hans Schaefer, Hanau, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft, Frank-
furt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Scr. No. 309,425
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 10,
1980,3038328
Int. CI. J C09D 11/00: COIC 3/12
U.S. a. 106—15.05 13 Qaims
1. Iron blue pigment, characterized by a potassium content
of 0.5-4.5% by weight, a sodium content of 0.2-1.0% by
weight, an ammonium content of 2.0-4.5% by weight, a color-
ing power in accordance with DIN 53 204 and DIN 53 234 of
5-15% above the Vossen Blue 705 Standard and the following
color intervals determined in accordance with DIN 53 204 and
DIN 53 234 in conjunction with DIN 6174, in relation to
Vossen Blue 705 as standard:
AL: -0.7 to -1.5
Aa: -0.5 to 1.5
Ab: -0.6 to -2.3
AC: 0.5 to 2.0
4,378,997
HYDRATION-EXPANSIVE CRUSHING CARTRIDGE
Tsuneo Kasama; Takao Saito, and Makoto Wada, all of
Kawagoe, Japan, assignors to Nippon Oil and Fats Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,574
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 27, 1980, 55-149360
Int. a.' C04B 7/02
U.S. a. 106—89 10 Oaims
1. A cartridge adapted to be inserted into a bore hole in a
monolithic structure and adapted to expand in said bore hole to
cause cracks to be formed in said structure, comprising:
a closed, elongated, tubular casing, said casing being filled
with a hydration-expansive agent which is capable of
volumetric expansion caused by hydration thereof, said
casing being permeable to water while being impermeable
to said agent so that when said casing is immersed in
water, the water will permeate into the interior of said
casing and will wet said agent to cause hydration and
expansion thereof while said agent is retained inside said
casing, said casing being made of a frangible material
which is capable of being punctured by a thrusting rod so
that the mixture of said agent and water will flow to fill
the bore hole and said agent will expand therein during
hydration of said agent and the expansion pressure of said
agent as it undergoes hydration will cause cracking of the
monolithic structure.
4,378,996
M^HOD FOR PREPARING BINDER FOR
REFRACTORY POWDERS
Dennis Yarwood, Wrexham, England, assignor to CUno Foundry
Supplies Limited, England
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,944
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 4, 1980,
8018233
Int. a.} B28B 7/34
VS. a. 106—38.35 7 Qaims
1. A method of preparing a binding liquid comprising the
steps of:
mixing an aqueous acidified silica sol having a silica content
of at least 60% with an unhydrolysed alkyl silicate and a
mutual solvent for water and the alkyl silicate, the sol
containing water in a substantially stoichiometric amount
sufficient to hydrolyse the alkyl silicate, thereby provid-
ing a binding liquid substantially free of water and with at
least 50% by weight of the total silicate present being
derived from the sol.
4,378,998
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF OXIDATION
PRODUCTS OF ETHYLENE COPOLYMERS, AND
THEIR USE
Helmut Korbanka, Adelsried; Karl-Heinz Stetter, Gersthofen;
Giinther Illmann, Stadtbergen; Rolf Jacob; Otto Malitschek,
both of Gersthofen, and Josef Strehle, Augsburg, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 202,010
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 2,
1979, 2944375; Dec. 15, 1979, 2950602
Int. a.3 CD8F 8/06
U.S. a. 106—270 4 Claims
1. A hard, easily processable polar wax with a dropping
point above 80° C. and below 110° C, a needle penetration
index below 10-10~' mm and an acid number of up to 200,
obtained by oxidation of an ethylene/vinylacetate copolymer
having a melt index between 0.01 and 400 g/10 minutes and a
vinylacetate content of from about 1 to about 30% by weight,
with oxygen or oxygen-containing gases, in the molten state
and dispersed in a dispersing agent being ineri towards oxygen,
at a temperature between the melting point of the copolymer
and 100° C. above the melting point, an excess pressure be-
tween 0 and 100 bars and with continuous intensive mixing.
4,378,999
PULVERULENT BITUMEN CONCENTRATE AND TTS
USE
Karl-Hans Miiller, Brochkobel, and Walter Barthel, Langensel-
bold, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Degussa AG,
Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 175,742
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 17,
1979, 2933339
Int. a.' C08L 95/00
UJS. a. 106—281 R 11 Claims
1. A powdery bitumen concentrate having 40 to 80% of
synthetic silica wherein the synthetic silica is precipitated silica
having a BET surface area of 120 to 500 m^/g or pyrogenically
produced silica having a BET surface area of 100 to 400 mVg.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
147
4,379,000
PLASnSOLS FOR COATING POLYMERIC MATERIALS
Ian S. Biggin, Cardiff, and Alan S. Wilson, South Glamorgan,
both of Wales, assignors to BP Chemicals Limited, London,
England
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,604
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 22, 1980,
8002130
Int. a.3 C08K 5/01. 5/12
U.S. a. 106—311 6 Claims
1. A plastisol comp>osition comprising a mixture of a butyl
phthalate and at least one alkyl benzene having one or more
straight or branched chains containing between 7 and 17 car-
bon atoms in a ratio by volume of between 90:10 and 40:60
respectively.
' 4,379,001
METHOD OF MAKING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Tetsushi Sakai, Sayama; Yoshgi Kobayasi, Tokyo; Yousuke
Yamamoto, Musashino, and Hironori Yamauchi, Asaka, all of
Japan, assignors to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public
Corp., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 18, 1979, Ser. No. 58,417
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 19, 1978, 53-87996;
Jul. 19, 1978, 53-87997
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/263. 21/20, 21/22
U.S. a. 148—1.5 6 Oaims
at at
' II Si n\ m rk it| »/
Ml
n i »■ »« » at »c m (
Hi.i!^» »» * «' !fc ^ ««
^ m~ml
1. A method of manufacturing a bipolar transistor compris-
ing the steps of:
selectively oxidizing a semiconductor substrate of a first
conductivity type to form a first insulator region extend-
ing into said substrate and to simultaneously form a base
diffusion window surrounded by said region;
forming a base region having a second conductivity type
through said window;
forming a polycrystalline silicon layer, and second and third
insulating layers having different etching characteristics,
on said substrate;
selectively etching said third insulating layer to form a third
insulation region on said base region and near the central
portion thereof;
etching said second insulating layer to form a second insulat-
ing region by using said third insulating region as a mask;
implanting ions of an impurity having the same conductivity
type as said base region into said polycrystalline silicon
layer by utilizing said second and third insulating regions
as masks, thereby separating the same into a region im-
i planted with said ions and a region not implanted with
said ions;
side etching said second insulating region for exposing said
non-implanted polycrystalline silicon region;
etching said non-implanted region to insulate and separate
said implanted region from said non-implanted region;
forming a thermal oxide film on the surface of said substrate
and at the same time diffusing an impurity in said ion
implanted region contiguous to said base region into the
same to form a base contact;
removing said insulating film to expose said non-implanted
polycrystalline silicon region;
diffusing an impurity of said first conductivity type into said
exposed polycrystalline silicon region to form an emitter
region of said semiconductor substrate, and
forming wiring layers in said ion-implanted region and in
said regions diffused with said impurity of said first con-
ductivity type.
4,379,002
METHOD AND EQUIPMENT FOR DIVIDING SLABS
INTO PREDETERMINED WIDTHS
Sadayuki Saito, Yotsukaido; Hiroji Moriwaki, Chiba, and Ka-
zuya Higuchi, Ichihara, all of Japan, assignors to Kawasaki
Steel Corporation, Hogyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,448
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 22, 1981, 56-95375;
Oct. 20, 1981, 56-166306
Int. a.3 B23K 7/02
U.S.a. 148— 9R j 8 Claims
9 12 ' 10 .
21. 2
f-v — I I .' ■ , — vr] ■ri,
-^Vn \ , .1 . . ,„ 1 ^
T-rT^^'^^ ?-**'
1. A slab dividing method comprising the steps of:
stopping a slab being conveyed by conveyance rollers;
raising the slab from the conveyance rollers;
dividing, at the raised position, the slab lengthwise thereof
by gas cutting into at least two;
returning the divided slabs onto the conveyance rollers one
after the other; and
conveying the divided slabs to the downstream, where slags
formed on the lower end edges of the cut surface of each
slab are removed.
4,379,003
MAGNETIC DEVICES BY SELECnVE REDUCnON OF
OXIDES
Murray Robbins, Berkeley Heights, and Richard C. Sherwood,
New Providence, both of N J., assignors to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N J.
FUed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,641
Int a.3 HOIF 1/02
U.S. a. 148—104 8 Claims
1. A method of making a magnetic material by steps com-
prising compacting oxide powder comprising at least one oxide
species of a magnetic metal, thereby forming an oxide com-
pact, and heating said compact in a reducing environment,
thereby reducing said one oxide species to a metal,
characterized in that said oxide powder further comprises at
least one oxide species which does not substantially re-
duce during said heating, and which oxide species substan-
tially migrates to grain boundaries of said magnetic metal
or alloys thereof during said reducing step, thereby ren-
dering the magnetic material obtained after said reducing
step substantially insulated so that the macroscopic resis-
tivity of said magnetic material is at least 1.0 ohm-centime-
ters.
148
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,004
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING AN AMORPHOUS
MAGNETIC ALLOY
Yoshimi Makino; Masatoshi Hayakawa; Koichi Aso; Satoru
Uedaira; Shigeyasu Ito, and Kazubide Hotai, all of Kanagawa,
Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 19, 1980, Scr. No. 161,077
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 27, 1979, 54-80955
Int. a.J HOlF 1/02
U.S. a. 148—108 7 Qaims
1. A method of manufacturing an amorphous magnetic alloy
comprising the steps of:
(a) preparing an amorphous magnetic alloy ribbon; and
(b) annealing said amorphous alloy ribbon at an elevated
temperature, which is lower than the crystallization tem-
perature Tcry of said alloy in a magnetic field, wherein
said amorphous magnetic alloy ribbon and the direction of
said magnetic field are continuously rotated with respect
to one another, the relative rotation being at a velocity
which is faster than the thermal diffusion velocity of the
atoms forming the amorphous alloy at said elevated tem-
perature.
5. A method of manufacturing an amorphous magnetic alloy
having high permeability and high saturation magnetic induc-
tion comprising the steps of:
(a) preparing an amorphous magnetic ribbon containing
transition metal elements and glass-forming elements, and
having a crystallization temperature Tcry lower than the
Curie temperature of said alloy; and
(b) annealing said alloy ribbon in an external magnetic field
at an elevated temperature which is lower than said crys-
tallization temperature Tcry of the alloy, but higher than
200° C, and wherein said amorphous ribbon and said
magnetic field are continuously moved rotationally rela-
tive to one another, said relative movement being faster
than the thermal diffusion of the atoms composing the
amorphous alloy, whereby the formation of induced mag-
I netic anisotropy is prevented.
4,379,005
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE FABRICATION
Harold J. Hovel, Katonah, and Jerry M. Woodall, Bedford
Hills, both of N.Y., assignors to International Business Ma-
cbines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 88,718, Oct. 26, 1979, abandoned. Tbis
j ^ application Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,526
Int. a.' HOIL 21/24
U.S. a. 148—187 4 Oaims
j1^z:!±1
D:
^v
1. The process of fabrication of semiconductor structures by
the steps of providing a semiconductor body having at least
two layers;
an exposed first layer having a different solubility in a partic-
ular metal than a second underlying layer;
providing a vertical differentiation of semiconductor device
elements by selective removal of portions of said first
layer thereby exposing regions of said second layer;
applying said particular metal to said regions of said second
layer and to the remaining portions of said first layer and
fusing said metal and the underlying semiconductor mate-
rial.
4,379,006
B2 O3 DIFFUSION PROCESSES
James E. Rapp, Oregon, Obio, assignor to Owens-Illinois, Inc.,
Toledo, Ohio
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,139
Int. a.J HOIL 21/223
U.S. a. 148—189 4 Claims
1. A method of diffusing B2O3 from the surface of a glass-
ceramic consisting essentially of the following:
Component
Mole Percent
Si02
15-60
AI2O3
10-30
B2O3
20-60
RO
3-25
BaO
0-15
wherein Al203/RO= 1.5-4
wherein RO is selected from BaO, MgO, CaO, SrO and mix-
tures thereof; and
when Si02 is over 40, B2O3 is not over 40, RO is not over 20,
and BaO is at least 1 ;
when Si02 is not over 40, AI2O3 is at least 15, RO is at least 5,
MgO is not over 15, CaO is not over 10, SrO is not over 10,
BaO is not over 15, La203 is 0-5, Nb203 is 0-5 and Ta203 is
0-5,
which comprises heating said glass-ceramic to a temperature of
700*- 1200' C. while flushing the surface thereof with an inert
transport or carrier gas comprising at least 60 mol percent
helium.
4,379,007
CATALYSTS FOR NTTRAMINE PROPELLANTS
Robert A. Fifer, Bel Air, and James E. Cole, Aberdeen, both of
Md., assignors to The United States of America as represented
by the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,434
Int. a? C06B 43/00
U.S. a. 149—22 11 Claims
1. A propellant composition, which comprises a particulate
organic nitramine propellant and an effective amount for bum
rate acceleration of a metal tetrahydridoborohydride of the
following formula: Me(BH4)j(, wherein Me represents an alkali
metal or an alkaline earth metal and x is 1 when Me is an alkali
metal and x is 2 when Me is an alkaline earth metal.
4,379,008
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEALING
CARDBOARD CONTAINERS
Helmut Gross, and Hermann Hauck, both of Hochhelm, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to AB Akerlund A Rauslng, Swe-
den
per No. PCT/SE80/00060, § 371 Date Nov. 3, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 27, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01789, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 4, 1980
PCT FUed Mar. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 201,402
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 3,
1979,2908397
Int. a.' B29C 27/00
U.S. a. 156—69 3 Claims
1. A method of sealing a container top to a container bottom
in which the container top and container bottom are Woth made
of cardboard, at least a sealing surface of the container top
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
149
being coated with an ionomer resin and at least a sealing sur-
face of the container bottom to be attached to the sealing
surface of the container top being coated with a polyester
resin, comprising the steps of preheating the sealing surface of
the container bottom so that the polyester resin is brought to a
softened state and thereafter sealing the container top to the
container bottom while the polyester resin is still in its softened
state by heating the sealing surfaces of the container top and
the container bottom and simultaneously pressing the sealing
4^79,010
METHOD FOR MAKING FLYING SURFACES
Larry H. Renger, Hawaiian Gardens, Calif., assignor to Mattel,
Inc., Hawthorne, Calif.
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,623
Int. a.J B60J 7/00.- B32B 31/00: A63H 27/00
U.S. a. 156—108 12 Claims
^
^
u
M i-»r /urn A^M
\ArmcnMj- ^^^mn
^
r /»//■ {4/r Jtff/rrt//r/-s
-\
.■fe
surfaces of the container top and the container bottom together
at spaced intervals so that the polyester resin is displaced away
from preselected areas on the sealing surface of the container
bottom which are pressed against the sealing surface of the
container top, whereby the ionomer resin adheres to the seal-
ing surface of the container bottom in the preselected areas
thereon, the preselected areas being selected such that substan-
tially all of the ionomer resin will remain with the container
top upon separation of the container top from the container
bottom.
1 A J'TO 009
SEALING METHOD USING HEAT-SHRINKABLE HLM
Taluuki Shibata, Nagareyama, and Tetsuhiro Yamamoto,
Osaka, both of Japan, assignors to Doryokuro Kakunenryo
Kaihatsu Jigyodan, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,254
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1980, 55-126836
Int. a.3 B29C 27/00: B32B 31/00; B29C 17/04; B23P 11/02
U.S. a. 156—86 9 Qaims
1. A method for indicating tampering of an element posi-
tioned in a transmission system, the element having a periph-
eral surface facing outwardly and spaced from other compo-
nents of the transmission system and having side surfaces ex-
tending inwardly from said peripheral surface, said method
using a heat shrinkable fllm carrying identifying indicia
thereon and comprising:
wrapping said peripheral surface with the heat-shrinkable
film in such a manner that both side edges of said film
extend beyond the side edges of said peripheral surface;
bonding longitudinal edges of said film to each other; and
heating said heat-shrinkable film to permit said film to shrink
to thereby seal said peripheral surface and a portion of said
side surfaces adjacent to said peripheral surface, the film
adapted to shrink to protect the element so that access to
the element requires alteration of the film thereby provid-
ing an indication of such access.
1. A method of making a plurality of flying surfaces each
having a relatively stiff frame of light weight plastic covered
with a sheet of thin film material, comprising the steps of:
providing a panel formed of the material of which the frame
is to be made, and sufficiently large to accommodate the
plurality of flying surfaces, the panel having a first surface;
simultaneously forming a plurality of apertures in the panel
to define the interior of multiple frames;
providing the sheet of thin film material having a second
surface;
applying an adhesive to one of the first and second surfaces;
laminating said sheet of thin film material over said first
surface to cover the panel to form a laminated panel; and
simultaneously forming a plurality of flying surfaces from
the laminated panel which each flying surface includes a
plurality of apertures defining the interior surface of a
frame member.
4,379,011
METHOD OF MAKING ARCHED V-BELTS
Dewey D. Henderson, Springfield, Mo., assignor to Dayco Cor<>
poration, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 263,965
Int. a.' B28H 7/22
U.S. a. 156—140 10 Claims
1. In a method of making a plurality of arched, polymeric
V-belts comprising the steps of, defining an uncured belt sleeve
having an inside and an outside surface, providing a forming
member having a plurality of substantially identical axially
aligned annular forming surfaces of concave cross-sectional
configuration, placing said uncured belt sleeve with one of its
surfaces adjacent said forming surfaces, compressing said belt
sleeve against said forming member and its forming surfaces to
thereby form annular arched portions in said sleeve, each of
1029 O.G.— 6
150
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
said arched portions corresponding roughly in conHguration to
a forming surface, curing said belt sleeve during said compress-
ing step, and cutting the cured belt sleeve to define a plurality
of arched belts corresponding in number to said plurality of
annular forming surfaces with each of said arched belts also
corresponding roughly in configuration to a forming surface,
the improvement m said method in which, said step of provid-
ing a forming member comprises providing said forming mem-
ber as a polymeric member which has said forming surfaces
defined as radially inwardly facing polymeric surfaces, said
placmg step comprises placing said belt sleeve with said one
surface being its normal outside surface adjacent said poly-
meric forming surfaces, said compressing step comprising the
step of compressing said belt sleeve by engaging said inside
surface thereof and transmitting the same pressure radially
outwardly against each unit of area of said inside surface and
thereby define each belt portion of said sleeve that will provide
one arched belt with a convex surface and an opposite concave
surface which are defined with great precision and with all
arched belts cut from the cured belt sleeve being substantially
identical in configuration, said compressing step comprising
the step of compressing said belt sleeve with a single self-con-
tained inflatable polymeric bladder comprised of a pair of
annular end walls having inner and outer edges, a cylindrical
inner wall extending between said inner edges, and a cylindri-
cal outer wall extending between said outer edges, said walls
being highly Hexible and said cylindrical outer wall engages
said inside surface throughout its entire surface area and trans-
mits said same pressure against each unit area thereof upon
inflating said bladder, said curing step comprising the step of
providing a steam curing apparatus, said apparatus comprising
a housing, a top access opening, and confining walls within
said housing, said confining walls comprising, a bottom plate
structure fixed to said housing, a first tubular structure fixed to
said bottom structure, a second tubular structure fixed to said
bottom structure concentrically outwardly of said first struc-
ture and defining an annular volume therebetween, and a top
plate structure adapted to be detachably fastened to said first
and second tubular structures; and said method comprising the
further steps of disposing said polymeric forming member
through said access opening with an outside surface thereof
against said second tubular structure and with said polymeric
forming surfaces facing radially inwardly toward said volume;
said placing step comprising the step of moving said belt sleeve
vertically downwardly through said top access opening within
said volume; said compressing step comprising the step of
inserting said bladder through said top access opening within
said annular volume between said belt sleeve and first tubular
structure and confining said end walls between said top and
bottom plate structures and said cylindrical inner wall employ-
ing said first tubular structure while allowing said cylindrical
outer wall to move freely against said entire inside surface area
of said belt sleeve upon inflating of said bladder; said curing
step comprising the step of sealing a lid over said access open-
ing and introducing steam within said housing to provide
curing of said belt sleeve; said cooling step comprising the
steps of removing said polymeric forming member and said
cured belt sleeve as a unit from between said first and second
tubular structures and cooling said polymeric forming member
and said cured belt sleeve together as a unit; and separating
said cured belt sleeve from said polymeric forming member
after the same have been cooled, said separating step being
achieved with comparative ease due to the small tendency of
said belt sleeve to adhere to said polymeric forming member
and its forming surface.
4,379,012
ADHESIVE TAPE FOR AND METHOD OF JOINING
WEBS
Willi Heymanns, Kaarst, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Jagenberg Werke AG, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,587
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 21,
1980 3002069
' Int. a.^ B65H 19/18; B32B 7/06. 7/10; C09J 7/02
U.S. a. 156—157 3 Qaims
1. An adhesive tape for the joining of webs, consisting essen-
tially of a first tape provided on both its faces with adhesive, a
second cover tape adhering to one face of the first tape, a third
cover tape adhering to the other face of the first tape, and
adhesive on the outside of the second cover tape, the adhesive
on the outside of the second cover tape being stronger than the
adhesive provided on both faces of the first tape.
2. A method of joining webs, as in a wind-up stand for paper
webs, by the use of an adhesive tape according to claim 1,
comprising securing the outside face of the second cover tape
to a carrier bar having a tear-off edge, removing the third
cover tape, adhering the exposed face of the first tape to the
tail end of a first web, removing the second cover tape with
carrier bar attached from the first tape which continues to
adhere to the web, and then adhering the freshly exposed face
of the first tape to the head end of a second web.
4,379,013
HNE nLM PRESSURE BAGS FORMING COMPOSITE
STRUCTURES
William C. Tambussi, Cherry Hill, N.J., assignor to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,571
Int. a.3 B32B 31/00
U.S. CI. 156—189 11 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for curing a tubular composite structure of
laminated, resin-impregnated fibrous material which includes
structure retaining means having a contoured inner surface
adjacent the outer surface of the composite structure and
pressure bag means disposed within and extending between
opposite ends of the composite structure, for applying pressure
to the inner surface of the composite structure, the improve-
ment wherein the pressure bag means comprises at least one
pressure bag formed of a material having inherent release
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
4,379,014
METHOD OF MANUFACTURE OF PACKING
CONTAINERS AND PACKING CONTAINERS
MANUFACTURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
METHOD
Anders R. Rausing, Lausanne, and E. Ingvar Nilsson, Akarp,
both of Switzerland, assignors to Tetra Pak Developpement
SA, Pully>Lausanne, Switzerland
Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,074
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Oct. 22, 1979,
9466/79
Int. a.' B31C 81/00
U.S. a. 156—191 9 Qaims
'^A
1. A method for the manufacture of packing containers from
a striplike film, comprising the steps of coating a polyester strip
which is monoaxially molecular-oriented in the strip direction
with a layer of a non-molecular-oriented amorphous polyester
material, spirally winding the coated polyester strip onto a
mandrel to form a tube, overlapping edge zones of successive
turns of the strip during winding with the width of the said
overlapped zones constituting at the most 15% of the width of
said strip, sealing the edge zones together in a continuous joint
by applying heat to the edge zones for melting and fusing
together of the non-molecular-oriented polyester coating, the
width of said strip being 75-150% of the diameter of the tube.
4,379,015
PRODUCTION OF WATERPROOF CORRUGATED
PAPERBOARD
Franklyn O. Ware, DanviUe, III., and William S. McDonald,
Statesville, N.C., assignors to MPW Tech. Associates, Dan-
viUe, III.
FUed Aug. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 177,666
Int. a.3 C09J 3/02: C08L 7/00
U.S. a. 156—205 7 Qaims
1. In a process for the production of waterproof corrugated
board wherein a waterproofing resin is added to a conven-
tional Stein-Hall high performance starch based composite
adhesive containing cooked and uncooked starch employed to
produce the corrugated board from a paper stock so as to
render the corrugated board waterproof, the improvement
which comprises employing an amount of resin, from about
225-600 lbs. of the resin per 1,000 gallons of adhesive, which
imparts extremely poor stability to the adhesive; adding the
resin the adhesive simultaneously with or immediately prior to
the application of the adhesive to the paper stock; and applying
the resin-containing adhesive to the paper stock at the rate of
about 3.5-5 lbs/1,000 sq. ft. of board.
151
characteristics and adapted to be connected to a pressure
source, and the pressure bag includes at least one overlapped
folded portion extending between the opposite ends of the
adjacent composite structure, to allow the pressure bag to
expand radially against the inner surface of the composite
structure when the pressure bag is connected to the pressure
source.
4,379,016
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR APPLYING ELASTIC
STRIPS IN SECnONS ONTO A WEB OF MATERIAL
USED FOR MAKING DIAPERS
Kurt Stemmler, Neuwied, and Heinrich Metbeiaen, RengMiorf,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Winkler + Duo-
nebier Maschinefabrik und Eisengiesseret GmbH A Co. KG,
Neuwied, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 254,015
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 26,
1980, 3016197
Int. Q.3 A61F 13/16; B32B 31/04
U.S. Q. 156—205
13 Claims
1. A method for mounting elastic strips in discrete sections
onto a web of material for making diapers, comprising the steps
of:
gathering-up a web of material by forming a multiplicity of
fine transverse folds therein; and
mounting unstretched elastic strips longitudinally, relative
to the web, in discrete sections onto the edge areas of said
gathered-up web of material, such that said strips are each
affixed at least at discrete points along the total un-
stretched length thereof to said folds in contact therewith,
so as to produce a web having, in the longitudinal direc-
tion thereof, alternating relatively continuous, smooth and
non-elastic areas and gathered-up, relatively elastic areas.
4,379,017
DECALCAMANIA PICTURE FOR APPLYING DESIGNS
OR IMPRINTS TO OBJECTS OF GLASS, CERAMICS OR
SUCH— LIKE, PROCESS FOR TRANSFERRING
DECALCAMANIA PICTURES OF THAT KIND, AND
APPARATUS FOR CARRYING OUT SAID PROCESS
Franz Barta, Trazerberggasse 6, 1130 Vienna, Austria
Filed Jan. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 111,408
Qaims priority, application Austria, Jan. 12, 1979, 248/79
Int. Q.3 C03B 29/00; C04B 33/34; B32B 31/00. 3/02
U.S. Q. 156—238 11 Qaims
ii
I
1. A process for applying decalcamania pictures to an object
of glass-or ceramics-type material which comprises providing
a decalcamania picture comprising a water-absorbing carrier
paper having on one surface a vitrifiable color image layer not
152
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
extending over the entirety of the paper and an interface layer
between said image layer and said paper to ease separation
thereof, and on its other surface a substantially water-impervi-
ous screening layer which is intact only in those areas corre-
sponding to those where no color image is present on the
opposite side of the pajjer, positioning the picture on to the
object with the screening layer on the outer side opposite said
object, transferring the image layer to the object under the
action of moisture applied from the opposite surface of said
decalcamania picture from that bearing the color image layer,
heat and pressure, and releasing the paper with said screening
layer from the transferred image layer.
4,379,018
HEAT TRANSFER APPARATUS
Carl P. Griesdorn, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to Planet Products
Corporation, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser, No. 331,570
Int. a.^ B30B 15/34; B32B 31/20
U.S. a. 156—359 15 Qaims
an offset to the frame displaced in the direction of the outer
side of the frame;
a primary tape roll holder mounted on the outer side of the
rear portion of the frame for rotation about a first axis, said
primary tape roll holder adapted to have a roll of masking
tape mounted thereon;
a paper roll holder having a given length mounted on the
inner side of the offset portion of the frame for rotation
about a second axis, said paper roll holder adapted to have
a roll of paper having a hollow cylindrical bore mounted
thereon for rotation about the second axis;
a handle bracket having an upper and a lower side mounted
on the upper central portion of the frame and extending in
a direction substantially parallel to the second axis and
away from the inner side of the frame;
a handle secured to the lower surface of the handle bracket
and depending from the handle bracket so that the hand of
the user of the masking machine is spaced from the inner
side of the frame;
a guide bar mounted on the front portion of the frame;
an auxiliary tape roll holder adapted to have a roll of mask-
ing tape mounted thereon;
means for mounting the auxiliary tape roll holder on the
upper side of the handle bracket for rotation about a third
axis substantially perpendicular to the upper surface of the
handle bracket; and
means for severing strips of masking tape from a roll of
1. A heat transfer apparatus, comprising:
(a) a dome type enclosure member with a peripheral sealing
surface, said enclosure member including an internal top
portion that is in spaced relationship to the peripheral
sealing surface;
(b) a heating element secured to the internal top portion of
the enclosure member in spaced relationship to the periph-
eral sealing surface;
(c) a diaphragm in selective sealing relationship with the
peripheral sealing surface and exposed to atmospheric
pressure on one of its sides, the diaphragm cooperating
with the enclosure member to define an internal chamber
with the other of its sides; and
(d) a tool buildup secured to the diaphragm, the tool buildup
being disposed within the internal chamber when the
peripheral sealing surface is in sealing relationship with
the diaphragm.
4,379,019
MASKING MACHINE
Daniel L. Pool, 4414 E. Lincoln Dr., Paradise VaUey, Ariz.
85253
FUed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,188
Int. a.' B32B 31/00
\}S. a. 156—527 7 Claims
1. A hand held masking machine for dispensing paper and
tape to a surface comprising:
a frame having an outer, an inner and an upper side, and
front, central and rear portions;
masking tape mounted on the auxiliary tape roll holder
mounted on said means for mounting the auxiliary tape
roll holder on the handle bracket.
4. A hand held masking machine for dispensing paper and
tape to a surface comprising:
a frame having outer, inner and upper sides; and a front,
central and rear portions;
an offset to the frame displaced in the direction of the outer
side of the frame;
a primary tape roll holder mounted on the outer side of the
rear portion of the frame for rotation about a first axis, said
primary tape roll holder adapted to have a roll of masking
tape mounted thereon;
a paper roll holder having a given length mounted on the
inner side of the offset portion for rotation about a second
axis, said first and second axes being substantially parallel,,
said paper roll holder adapted to have a roll of paper
having two sides, a hollow cylindrical bore, and a given
width, mounted thereon for rotation about the second
axis; the width of the roll of paper being greater than the
length of the paper roll holder;
a handle bracket mounted on the upper central portion of the
frame and extending inwardly from the frame in a direc-
tion substantially parallel to the second axis;
a handle secured to the handle bracket and depending there-
from so that the hand of the user is spaced from the inner
side of the frame;
a guide bar mounted on the front portion of the frame;
a subframe;
an auxiliary tape roll holder mounted on the subframe for
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
153
rotation about a third axis, said auxiliary upe roll holder
adapted to have a roll of masking tape mounted thereon;
an auxiliary paper roll holder mounted on the subframe for
rotation about a fourth axis, said third and fourth axes
being substantially parallel; and
means for mounting the subframe on the inner side of the
frame so that the auxiliary paper roll holder is positioned
within the bore of the roll of the paper mounted on the
paper roll holder and masking tape from a roll of masking
tape mounted on the auxiliary tape roll holder overlies a
portion of the side of a roll of paper proximate the sub-
frame.
solidifying from said melt, said molten material being
added in such quantities that the overall quantity of said
1. A process for forming large grain polycrystalline films of
random crystallographic orientation from amorphous films
comprising:
(a) depositing a thin amorphous film on a substrate in a
controlled atmosphere;
(b) inducing the formation of crystalline embryos at prede-
termined spaced apart locations in the free upper surface
of said amorphous film by localized surface treatment
thereat and inhibiting nucleation elsewhere in said film;
and
(c) allowing said crystalline embryos to grow in a controlled
atmosphere and at a temperature below the melting point
of said amorphous film with random crystallographic
orientation by the excess free energy of said amorphous
film, without further nucleation occurring in said amor-
phous film, until the growth of said embryos is halted by
impingement on adjacently growing embryos, with the
resultant grain size of said polycrystalline film being deter-
mined by the distances between said spaced apart loca-
tions and being greater than the thickness of said film,
with transformation from said amorphous films to said
large grain polycrystalline films being effected in a solid
phase transition from the amorphous to the crystalline
state.
4^79,021
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING SINGLE CRYSTALS
Johannes P. M. Damen, and Theodorus J. Berben, both of Eind-
hoven, Netherlands, assignors to U^. Philips Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,267
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Sep. 24, 1980,
8005312
Int. a.3 C30B urn
UJS. a. 156—616 R 10 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing a single crystal of a composite
oxide by gradually solidifying a melt comprising the steps of
arranging a seed crystal in contact with a volume of a melt,
said seed crystal initially having the top of the seed crystal
between 20 and SO mm below the top surface of said melt,
solidifying said melt starting from said seed crystal, said melt
initially consisting of not more than 25% by weight of the
single crystal to be grown, and
adding to said melt, after said single crystal begins to grow,
molten material having the same composition as material
4,379,020
POLYCRYSTALLINE SEMICONDUCTOR PROCESSING
Andreas M. Glaeser, Scituate; John S. Haggerty, Lincoln, and
Stephen C. Danforth, Winchester, all of Mass., assignors to
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 159,734, Jun. 16, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 311,850
Int. a.3 C30B I/IO
U.S. a. 156—603 12 Qaims
v^
I
melt remains constant throughout substantially the entire
process.
\,
4,379,022
METHOD FOR MASKLESS CHEMICAL MACHINING
Robert L. Melcher, Yorktown Heights; Labomyr T. Romankiw,
Briarcliff Manor, and Robert J. Von Gutfeld, New York, all of
N.Y., assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 37,074, May 8, 1979, Pat. No. 4,283,259.
This application Jul. 21, 1960, Ser. No. 170,472
Int. C\? C23F 1/02
U.S. a. 156—643 — 10 Claims
1. A method of masklessly producing machined patterns by
preferential chemical machining of regions of a surface of a
workpiece comprising the following steps:
contacting the surface with a chemical machining etching
solution; and directing an
energy beam having an intensity in the range from about 10^
W/cm2 to about 10^ W/cm^ onto the workpiece of suffi-
cient intensity to heat only said regions of said surface to
be machined locally with said surface in contact with said
etching solution to promote enhanced etching of the sur-
face to provide preferentially machined patterns in said
regions heated by said beam where preferential machining
is sought.
I 4,379,023
CHARGING HOLE LOCK FOR HORIZONTAL COKE
OVENS
Josef Stratmann, Recklinghausen, and Willi Brinkmann, Heme,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Firma Carl Still
GmbH A Co. KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,908
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 6,
1981, 3108483
Int a.3 ClOB 25/24, 31/04
U.S. a. 202—247 9 Claims
1. In combination, a horizontal coke oven having a charging
154
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
hole, a charging hole lock and a charging member, comprising:
a charging hole frame inserted into the charging hole, said
frame having an opening aligned with the charging hole;
a casing connected over and sealed to said frame in a gas-
tight fashion to define a gateway space therewith;
a spectacle gate having a gate opening and a plug portion,
slidably mounted in said space for movement into an open
which comprises liquid extraction of a water-containing, crude
butylene oxide with a solvent consisting essentially of acyclic,
paraffinic hydrocarbons having from 7 to 9 carbon atoms to
remove water in an aqueous raflinate and recovering an or-
ganic extract comprising butylene oxide oxide and solvent.
"3o
position with said gate opening aligned with said frame
opening, and a closed position with said plug portion
aligned with said frame opening;
a linkage connected to said spectacle gate for moving said
spectacle gate; and
seal means provided on said casing for establishing a gastight
seal with the charging member.
4^79,024
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTTURE OF
ALKYLAMINOALKANOL
David M. Gardner, Worcester, Pa., assignor to Pennwalt Corpo-
ration, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,211
Int. a.^ BOID 3/34
U.S. a. 203—6 6 Claims
II'
*
*
|-~:-|
1:."^-
-'
41 — h
1
"i
««•! Mf*,
-#
■/•r
/''
'
_,
ruai
c^
b^..
1. In a process for preparing a color-stable alkylaminoalk-
anol by the reaction of alkylene oxide with an excess of the
class of ammonia and a primary or secondary amine to form a
reaction mass, the improvement which comprises the steps of
(1) adding to the product of the reaction prior to removal of
excess amine at least about one mole of alkali metal borohy-
dride per 16S0 mole of alkylene oxide used in the reaction (2)
stripping-off excess amine reactant and (3) distilling the resul-
tant reaction mass to recover the alkali metal borohydride and
color-forming bodies as bottoms and alkylaminoalkanol as
distillate.
4^79,025
WATER REMOVAL FROM BUTYLENE OXIDES BY
LIQUID EXTRACTION WITH SELECTED EXTRACTIVE
SOLVENTS
Amos YudoTich, Tulsa, Okla., and Norman H. Swecd, Berkeley
Heights, N J., assignors to Atlantic Richfleld Company, Los
Angeka, Calif.
FUed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,122
Int. a.» BOID 3/40: C07D 301/32
U.S. a. 203—14 8 Claims
1. A process for removing water from crude butylene oxides
4,379,026
PROCESS FOR THE PURIFICATION OF
BENZALDEHYDE
Cornells Jongsma, Oirsbeek, Netherlands, assignor to Stamicar-
bon, B.V., Geleen, Netherlands
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 125,661, Feb. 28, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 341,108
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 2, 1979,
7901670
Int. a.3 BOID 3/34
U.S. a. 203—31 20 Claims
17. Process for the purification in the presence of water of
impure benzaldehyde including odiferous impurities compris-
ing the steps of:
(a) admixing said impure benzaldehyde and said water,
(b) passing said admixture of step (a) over a bed containing
solid particles of at least one metal less noble than hydro-
gen in Groups lA, IIA, IIB, IIIA, IVA, and VIII of the
periodic table of elements to purify said impure benzalde-
hyde, wherein said admixture and said bed are maintained
at conditions of temperature and pressure sufficient to
eliminate at least a substantial portion of said impurities
and at least a portion of said metal in said bed is consumed,
and
(c) distilling said purified benzaldehyde.
4,379,027
SELECnVE HYDROGENATION OF VINYLTOLUENE
John M. Klosek, Sewaren, and Margaret M. Wu, Belle Mead,
both of N J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,346
Int. a.3 BOID 3/14: C07C 5/10. 7/04. 7/163
U.S, a. 203—32 9 Claims
1. A process for obtaining m-methylstyrene from a mixture
with p-methylstyrene that comprises hydrogenating a mixture
of p-methylstyrene and m-methylstyrene in the presence of a
modified zeolite having a Constraint Index of about 1 to about
12, a silica to alumina ratio of at least about 12, and a dried
crystal density of not less than about 1.6 grams per cubic centi-
meter, modified with at least one element of Group I A, IIA,
I VB, or VB of the Periodic Chart of the Elements and a metal
of Group VIII of the Periodic Chart of the Elements; thereby
obtaining a mixture of m-methylstyrene and p-ethyltoluene,
and removing p-ethyltoluene by distillation.
4,379,028
SEPARATION OF ETHYL ACETATE FROM ETHANOL
AND WATER BY EXTRACnVE DISTILLATION
Lloyd Berg, and Pisant Ratanapupech, both of 1314 S. Third
Ave., Bozeman, Mont. 59715
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,638
Int CL' BOID 3/40: C07C 67/48
UJS. a. 203—51 9 Claims
1. A method for recovering ethyl acetate from a mixture of
ethyl acetate, ethanol and water which comprises distilling a
mixture of ethyl acetate, ethanol and water in a rectification
column in the presence of an effective amount of an extractive
agent, recovering essentially pure ethyl acetate as overhead
product and obtaining the extractive agent, ethanol and water
from the stillpot or reboiler, the extractive agent includes
dimethylsulfoxide.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
ISS
4^9,029
METHOD OF MEASURING METALLIC CATION AND
WATER TRANSPORT NUMBERS FOR CATION
EXCHANGE HYDRAULICALLY IMPERMEABLE
MEMBRANES AND TEST CELL THEREFOR
Howard L. Yeager, Calgary, Canada, assignor to Olin Corpora-
tion, New Haven, Conn.
FUed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 301,071
Int. a.' GOIN 27/2S. 27/40
U.S. a. 204—1 T 23 Claims
1. An electrochemical membrane test cell comprising:
a pair of half cells, each containing a horizontally disposed,
inwardly directed, truncated right conical chamber, said
cell being formed by joining said half cells at their trun-
cated apexes so that said truncated chambers are aligned
and abut each other to form a biconic electrolytic cell;
electrode means within each half cell, said means being
adapted to be an anode in one of said pair of half cells and
a cathode in the other of said pair;
permselective membrane means, said membrane being seal-
ingly suspended between said half cells, so that said cell is
separated into an anodic and a cathodic compartment;
stirring means within each half cell, said means being ex-
tended to be close to the surface of said membrane means;
heating means within each of said compartments; and
electrolyte introduction means within each of said compart-
ments, said cell being adapted to perform electrochemical
studies to measure the water and metallic cation transport
numbers for said membrane means.
16. A method of measuring metallic cation and water trans-
port numbers for cation exchange hydraulically impermeable
membranes comprising:
forming a cell, said cell comprising two half cells, each of
said half cells containing an internal horizontally disposed,
inwardly directed, truncated right conical inner chamber,
said cell being formed by joining said half cells at their
truncated apexes so that said truncated chambers are
aligned and abut each other to form a biconic electrolytic
cell, said half cells having one of said membranes sealingly
suspended therebetween to form an anode and a cathode
compartment, each of said compartments having elec-
trode means, heating means, sensing means, stirring means
and electrolyte introduction means;
filling said anode and cathode compartments with anolyte
and catholyte solutions and heating said solutions to equil-
ibrate, said membrane at a preselected test temperature;
removing said solutions and replacing them with weighed
portions of the same solutions;
adding a measured amount of radioactive tracer material to
said anolyte solution;
heating and stirring said solutions to achieve a uniform
concentration of said anolyte and tracer;
energizing said electrode means to electrolyze said solutions
for a period of time, said electrolysis producing a transfer
of said tracer material through said membrane into said
cathode compartment;
at the conclusion of said electrolysis period, measuring the
quantity of tracer which has passed through said mem-
brane; and
measuring the net change in the water content of the electro-
lyte in each compartment, said quantities being indicative
of the moles of meullic cation and water which have been
transferred. i \
4,379,030
ALUMINUM ELECTROPLATING SOLUTION
Tbeo E. G. Daenen; Gerardus A. R. Van Dijk, and SteTen A.
Stolk, all of EindhoTen, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 339,932
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 6, 1981,
8100570
Int. a.3 C25D 3/44
U.S. a. 204—14 N 5 Claims
1. An electrolyte liquid for the electrodeposition of alumi-
num onto a substrate, which liquid contains an organic com-
plex of an aluminum halohydride, characterized in that the
liquid consists of a solution of one or more compounds AlHx-
Cl^.tL in a aprotic solvent having the structure
R[0-(CH2)m]/r-0-(CH2),-OR>.
wherein
X -I- y = 3 and both x and y amount to at least
0.2S and not more than 2. 75,
t is an integer selected from 1 , 2, 3 or 4
L is a ligand forming a coordination compound with the
halohydride,
R and R' are alkyl groups and
m and n are integers between 1 and 6 and
p has a value of 1, 2 or 3.
4,379,031
EVAPORATION DRIVEN COUNTERFLOW RINSE
SYSTEM AND METHOD
James A. Krotkiewicz, Elyria; Wayne A. Kruper, Willowick, and
Otto C. Niederer, Madison, all of Ohio, assignors to Imperial
Clevite Inc., Rolling Meadows, III.
FUed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,709
Int. a.' C25D 17/02
U.S. a. 204—45 R 13 Claims
1. An electroplating apparatus comprising:
a plating tank for receiving a plating solution including
plating chemicals and water to a predetermined fluid level
in which a selected number of workpieces on a supporting
structure are submersed and plated, the plating solution
level being diminished by evaporation;
a first rinse tank for receiving rinsing solution to said prede-
termined level, the first rinse tank being disposed suffi-
ciently adjacent the plating tank to enable plated work-
pieces to be submersed in the first rinse tank solution to
rinse the plating solution from the plated workpieces,
whereby the rinsing solution in the first rinse tank includes
water and the plating chemicals rinsed from preceding
workpieces;
a first elongated fluid path interconnecting the plating tank
and the first rinsing tank, the first fluid path being disposed
at or below said predetermined level such that solution
flows by gravity from the first rinsing tank to the plating
tank to replace evaporated plating solution, whereby
plating chemicals are returned to the plating tank, with
1S6
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
said first fluid path including a plurality of baffles therein
to prevent fluid from flowing directly therethrough;
a final rinse tank for receiving rinsing solution to said prede-
termined level, the final rinse tank being disposed suffi-
ciently adjacent the first rinse tank to enable the rinsed
workpieces to be submersed in the final rinse tank solution
to rinse the plated workpieces further, whereby the rins-
ing solution in the final rinse tank includes water and the
plating chemicals rinsed from preceding workpieces;
a second elongated fluid path in fluid connection with the
first and final rinse tanks, the second fiuid path being
disposed at or below said predetermined level such that
solution flows by gravity from the final rinse tank to the
first rinse tank with said second fluid path including a
plurality of baffles therein to prevent fluid from flowing
directly therethrough; and
level maintaining means operatively connected with the
final rinse tank for maintaining the rinsing solution in the
final rinse tank at said predetermined level, whereby the
solutions in the first rinse tank, final rinse tank and the
plating tank are maintained at said predetermined level
and plating chemicals are returned from the final rinse
] tank to the first rinse tank and from the first rinse tank to
the plating tank.
13. A method of electroplating with an electroplating appa-
ratus which includes a plating tank filled to a predetermined
level with a plating solution including plating chemicals and
water, a first rinse tank filled to said predetermined level with
a rinsing solution including water and a dilute concentration of
plating chemicals, a first elongated fluid path interconnecting
the plating and first rinse tank below the predetermined level,
a final rinse tank filled to said predetermined level with a
rinsing solution including water and a more dilute concentra-
tion of plating chemicals, a second elongated fluid path in fluid
communication with the first and final rinse tanks below the
predetermined level, an overflow outlet disposed in the final
rinse tank substantially at said predetermined level, and a water
inlet for supplying water to the final rinse tank, the method
comprising:
selecting a workpiece to be plated and the supporting struc-
ture therefor so that when said workpiece and said sup-
portmg structure are submerged in said plating tank the
volume of fluid displaced is less than the volume of said
first elongated fluid path;
running water from the water inlet into the final rinse tank at
a rate greater than the rate of evaporation of water from
the plating tank and allowing any excess water to flow
through the overflow outlet, whereby the level of fluid in
the tanks is maintained substantially at said predetermined
level;
submersing said workpiece in the plating tank and electro-
plating the same;
withdrawing the workpiece from the plating tank and sub-
mersing it in the first rinse tank;
withdrawing the workpiece from the first rinse tank and
submersing it in the final rinse tank; and
withdrawing the workpiece from the final rinse tank.
N
R'
April 5, 1983
(1)
o
o
v-f-
CH3
4^79,032
PROCESS FOR PREPARING
OXAZOLINEAZETIDINONE DERIVATIVES
^igeni Torii, Akaiwa; Hideo Tanaka, Okayama; Junzo Nokami,
Okayama; Takashi Shiroi, Okayama; Norio Saito, Itano, and
Michio Sasaoka, Okayama, all of Japan, assignors to Otsuka
Kagaku Yakuhin Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 407,134
Int. a.5 C25C 7/00
IIJ.S. a. 204—59 R 10 Qaims
1. A process for preparing an oxazolineazetidinone deriva-
ve represented by the formula (1)
wherein R' represents hydrogen atom, alkyl group, alkenyl
group, substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group, substituted
or unsubstituted aryl group, or substituted or unsubstituted
aryloxymethyl group, R2 represents free or protected carboxyl
group and R^ represents hydrogen atom or methoxy group, the
process comprising electrolyzing a penicillin derivative repre-
sented by the formula (2)
R'-CNH^f V S
(2)
R2
wherein R', R2 and R^ are as defined above in an alcoholic
solvent in the presence of a chloride.
4,379,033
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING ALUMINUM IN A
HALL-HEROULT CELL
James M. Clark, Elizabethton, and Duane R. Secrist, Sevier-
ville, both of Tenn., assignors to Great Lakes Carbon Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,536
Int. a.i C25C 3/06. 3/12
U.S. a. 204-67 21 Qaims
1. A method for manufacturing aluminum by the electrolysis
of alumina in molten cryolite in a Hall-Heroult cell employing
a non-consumable anode produced by the process of:
(a) forming a first conductive ceramic material to produce a
core having a substantially flat working surface and a
non-working surface;
(b) forming a physically adherent coating over said non-
working surface of said core, on at least the portion
thereof which is to be exposed to the electrolyte bath in
the cell, said coating consisting of a second conductive
ceramic material having, as compared to said first conduc-
tive ceramic material,
(1) a coefficient of thermal expansion differing by no more
than about 0.5%,
(2) an essentially matched shrinkage during sintering,
(3) a higher electrical resistivity, and capable of being
chemical diffusion bonded thereto; and
(c) sintering the coated core thus formed to produce a mono-
lithic ceramic anode having a substantially flat working
surface and a non-working surface, said non-working
surface having an impervious coating thereon, at least in
the portion thereof exposed to the electrolyte bath, of
higher resistivity than the core and chemical diffusion
bonded thereto, whereby substantially all of the current
Applied to said anode is conducted into the electrolyte
bath through said flat working surface.
April 5, 1983
t
CHEMICAL
4,379 034
START-UP PROCEDURE FOR OXYGEN ELECTRODE
Douglas K. Rogers, Painesville, Ohio, assignor to Diamond
Shamrock Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
I Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,777
Int. a.3 C25B 1/34
U.S. q. 204-98 5 Qaims
157
32-
7\
20
i
4^
.. 9
22
^^'
28
r*
It
V,.
36
-30
1. A start-up procedure for an alkali metal halide electrolyz-
ing cell having an oxygen cathode comprising subjecting said
cathode to a positive gauge pressure but a lesser gauge pressure
than it will encounter during operation and contacting the
cathode with an alkali metal hydroxide at temperatures rang-
ing from about 60° to 85° for from about 1 to about 24 hours
prior to operational use.
I 4,379,035
METHOD OF OPERATING AN ELECTROLYTIC CELL
Ronald D. Chamberlin, Wadsworth, Ohio, assignor to PPG
Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,328
Int. a.3 C25B 1/16. 1/26
U.S. a. 204-98 6 Qaims
1. In a method of operating an electrolytic cell having an
anolyte compartment with an anode therein, a catholyte com-
partment with a cathode therein, wherein the cathode has a
low hydr6gen overvoltage surface thereon, and the catholyte
compartment has exposed iron therein, the low hydrogen
overvoltage surface having a lower hydrogen overvoltage
than the exposed iron, which method comprises feeding alkali
metal chloride brine to the anolyte compartment, passing an
electrical current from the anode to the cathode, and recover-
ing an aqueous alkali metal hydroxide catholyte containing
iron as an impurity, the improvement comprising adding an
iron corrosion inhibiting amount of a composition comprising
alkali metal benzoate and alkali metal nitrite to the catholyte
compartment during electrolysis.
4,379,036
CONTINUOUS ELECTROCHEMICAL AMMONIA
SCRUBBER
Harold R. Kunz, Vernon; Paul J. Damiano, Manchester, and
Francis J. Luczak, Glastonbury, all of Conn., assignors to
United Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,138
I ' Int. a.3 C25B 7/00, 1/02. 1/22
U.S. a. 204—103 11 Claims
stream by reacting ammonia in the gas stream with the acid to
form an ammoniated salt of the acid on said porous material,
and continuously converting the ammoniated salt to acid,
nitrogen gas and hydrogen gas by holding the porous material
at an electrochemical potential sufficient to oxidize the ammo-
niated salt of the acid.
4,379,037
REMOVAL OF MANGANESE AND CHLORIDE IONS
FROM AQUEOUS AODIC ZINC SULPHATE
SOLUTIONS
Gerald L. Bolton, Fort Saskatchewan; Vemer B. Sefton, and
Nicolaus Zubryckyj, botii of Edmonton, all of Canada, assign-
ors to Sherritt Gordon Mines Limited, Toronto, raimdii
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 86,877, Oct. 22, 1979, Pat No.
4,290,866. This application Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,723
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 20, 1978.
49207/78
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 22,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C25C 1/16: C25B 1/26
U.S. a 204-119 ^ 11 Claims
l£*C«-
. ^
MnOi
* ^Cj.Cl;
PIXFlMTt*
KINMNESE
I CHjORINE
K.«NkL
* Ei£CTnowi»M*.0 I
t
TVK
OBCXXCT
1. A process for removing manganese and chloride ions from
an aqueous acidic sulphate solution containing zinc, manganese
and chloride ions without removing a substantial amount of
zinc ions from the solution, said solution having a free acidity
of at least about 0. 1 molar, the process comprising treating the
solution with ozone to oxidize manganese ions to manganese
dioxide, continuing the ozone treatment after the manganese
concentration has fallen to a low level to oxidize chloride ions
to chlorine gas and removing manganese dioxide from the
solution.
Hg+NHa-^t
... . . .„n/,.., . , . ., .^n ; .„
-♦H;
^N=
1. In the continuous removal of ammonia gas from a gas
stream, the steps of providing a bed of solid porous material
wetted with an acid, removing ammonia gas from the gas
4,379,038
PROCESS FOR PREPARING A PHYSIOLOGICALLY
ACnVE SUBSTANCE CONTROLLED RELEASE
COMPOSTTE COMPOSmON
Isao Kaetsu, and Masaru Yoshida, both of Takalkaki, Japan,
assignors to Japan Atomic Energy Research Institute, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,812
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 27, 1979, 54/123198
Int. a.3 A61K 9/16. 41/00; C08F 2/46; C12K 1/00
U.S. a. 204—159.12 6 Claims
1. A process for preparing a physiologically active substance
controlled release composite composition which comprises the
steps of:
using a physiologically active substance-containing adsor-
bent prepared by adsorbing a first physiologically active
substance onto an inorganic adsorbent;
dispersing and mixing a second physiologically active sub-
stance, which is different from said first physiologically
active substance, onto said physiologically active sub-
stance containing adsorbent;
dispersing the resulting mixture in a polymerizable vinyl
monomer containing 0-50% of a synthetic high molecular
1S8
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
weight substance which is polymerizable at a temperature
of below -20* C; and
after holding the desired shape, irradiating the resulting
dispersion with an ionizing radiation at a temperature
within the range of —20* to — 100' C. to polymerize.
4^79,039
ULTRAVIOLET CURABLE RESIN COMPOSITION
Hiroahi Fqjimoto, Shiga, and Hideo Miyalce, Otsu, both of
Japan, asrignora to Toyo Boscid Kahuahiki Kaisii, Japan
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Scr. No. 219,568
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1979, 54-171820
Int a.3 C08G 63/04
IU.S. a. 204—159.15 22 Claims
1. An ultraviolet curable resin composition which comprises
(I) a saturated copolyester having a molecular weight of
2,000 to 15,000 which is soluble in a polymerizable com-
pound (II), 20% to 100% by mole of saturated polycar-
boxylic acid components of the saturated copolyester
being an aromatic dicarboxylic acid, wherein 19 to 98%
by mole of the aromatic dicarboxylic acid is terephthalic
acid, and the glycol component of the saturated copolyes-
ter being 10 to 80% by mole of ethylene glycol and 90 to
20% by mole of an alkylene glycol selected from the
group consisting of propylene glycol, butanediol, neopen-
tylglycol and hexanediol;
(II) a pxjlymerizable compound comprising 10 to 95% by
weight of a compound having one polymerizable double
bond in the molecule selected from the group consisting of
(i) a styrene comf>ound, (ii) a substituted or unsubstituted
alkyl mono(meth)acrylate, (iii) a mono(meth)acrylate of a
bisphenol A alkylene oxide adduct, (iv) a urethane modi-
fied mono(meth)acrylate, (v) an epoxy mono(methacry-
late) and (vi) an oligo ester of a mono<meth)acrylate and
90 to 5% by weight of a compound having two or more
polymerizable double bonds in the molecule selected from
the group consisting of (vii) a substituted or unsubstituted
alkylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, (viii) a di(meth)acrylate
of a bisphenol A alkylene oxide adduct, (ix) a urethane
modified di(meth)acrylate, (x) an epoxy di(meth)acrylate,
(xi) an oligo ester of a di(meth)acrylate, (xii) a poly(meth-
)acrylate of a polyvalent aliphate alcohol having three or
more hydroxyl groups, and (xiii) a urethane modified
^ poly(meth)acrylate, and
(III) a photosensitizer.
4,379,041
POLYMERIC MEMBRANE SELECTIVE TO CALCIUM
(ID IONS
Jaroslav Petiinek; Olen Ryba, botii of Prague; MiloslaT Sender,
and Miroslav Panoch, both of Tumov, all of CzechoaloTakia,
assignors to CeskosloTenska akademie ved, Prague, Czecho-
slovakia
FUed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,019
Claims priority, application Czechoslovakia, Apr. 24, 1980,
2865-80
Int. a.3 COIN 27/46
U.S. a. 204-415 4 Claims
1. A membrane selective to calcium (II) ions, formed by a
solid film of plastic material which contains an active neutral
carrier in a plasticizer for the plastic material, wherein the
active carrier is a ternary complex of (a) a macrocyclic polye-
therdiamide of the general formula
R2 O '
c.
R4 o
vy
CO—
1^
R«
v>
where Ri, R2, R3, R4 are H or alkyl containing 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, Rs and Re are alkyl or arylalkyl with 6 to 10 carbon
atoms with (b) the calcium (II) ion and (c) a lipophilic organic
anion, while the general formula of the ternary complex is
2 po!yetherdiainide.Ca.2A~,
where A~ is the lipophilic organic anion.
4,379,040
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROL OF
REACnVE SPUTTERING DEPOSITION
F. Howard Cillery, Allison Park, Pa., assignor to PPG Indus-
tries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Dirision of Ser. No. 229,378, Jan. 29, 1981, Pat No. 4,336,119.
This appUcation Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,898
Int a.3 C23C WOO
UJS. a. 204—192 P 14 Claims
1. A method of producing a transparent electroconductive
article comprising the steps of:
a. magnetically sputtering an inner transparent film of tita-
nium oxide onto a transparent substrate surface, said mag-
netic sputtering conducted in an evacuated environment
having partial pressures of oxygen and a chemically inert
gas to produce a film having an optical extinction coeffici-
ent in the range between about 0.03 and about 0.3;
b. depositing a substantially transparent electroconductive
film onto the inner titanium oxide film; and
magnetically sputtering an outer transparent film of tita-
nium oxide onto said electroconductive film, said outer
film magnetically sputtered in an evacuated environment
having partial pressures of oxygen and a chemically inert
gas to produce a film having an optical extinction coeffici-
ent less than about 0.3.
4,379,042
APPARATUS USING AN AXULLY MOVING
CONTINUOUS ELONGATED TOOL
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohaina, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 915,205, Jun. 13, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Feb. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 120,107
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 14, 1977, 52-70248;
Jul. 5, 1977, 52-80063; Aug. 16, 1977, 52-98440
Int. a.5 B23P 1/04. 1/12; B28D 1/08
U.S. a. 204—224 M 7 Claims
PM2
1. An apparatus for shaping a workpiece with an axially
moving continuous elongated tool, comprising:
a supply reel for continuously feeding said continuous elon-
gated tool at a predetermined rate of axial displacement in
the range between 0.1 and 5 meters/minute;
a take-up reel for winding up said continuous elongated tool
under tension;
a pair of guide members disposed across a cutting region
between said supply and tsjce-up reels in the path of said
continuous elongated tool for guiding the same;
means for successively storing under tension said continuous
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
159
elongated tool through a flrst zone between said supply
reel and one of said guide members and a second zone
between the other guide member and said take-up reel;
means for reciprocating said continuous elongated tool be-
tween said guide members at a predetermined rate of axial
movement in the range between 5 and 30 meters/second
and with a stroke determined within the storage stored by
said storing means; and
drive means including a pair of pulse motors (PM5, PM^
controlled by a numercial controller for displacing said
workpiece in an X-Y plane relative to said reciprocating
axially moving continuous elongated tool incrementally
with an increment of displacement of 1 to 5 microns and
along a predetermined path in said plane to machine a
correspondingly shaped contour in the workpiece, said
guide members comprising a pair of guide rollers and a
pair of pulse motors (PM3, PM4) drivingly coupled to said
guide rollers, respectively, and constituting said recipro-
cating means for rotating said guide rollers synchronously
in one and the other directions alternately.
4,379,043
WATER-DECOMPOSITION AND GAS-GENERATING
APPARATUS
Oaude L. Chappelle, Seabrook, Tex., assignor to Robert G.
Francisco, Flint, Mich.; Loren V. Williams, Houston, Tex.;
Dan Hennlgan, Houston, Tex.; James R. Cornish, Houston,
Tex. and Charles R. Allen, Houston, Tex.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 190,872, Sep. 25, 1980,
abandoned. This application Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,497
Int. C1.3 C25B 11/03. 11/12. 9/00. 15/02
U.S. a. 204—229 17 Qaims
1. Apparatus for decomposing water and producing detonat-
ing gas comprising:
(a) a plurality of annular carbon electrodes concentrically
arranged about a common vertical axis, said annular elec-
trodes each having an upper end and a lower end, each
annular electrode having a plurality of perforations along
its surface;
(b) a central, solid carbon electrode positioned along said
axis;
(c) sealing and insulating elements positioned adjacent said
lower electrode ends to form, with the annular electrodes
and central electrode, a plurality of concentrically-
arranged cells which are adapted to hold liquid electro-
lyte;
(d) means for supplying liquid electrolyte to said cells; and
(e) means for applying a direct current across said electrodes
in order to evolve detonating gas from said cells.
4,379,044
INSTALLATION FOR DEGASSING AND RECYCLING
THE ELECTROLYTE IN AN ELECTROLYZER FOR
PRODUONG GAS
Gerard Pere, Le Breuil, France, assignor to Creusot- Loire,
Paris, France
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,286
Qaims priority, application France, Jul. 22, 1980, 80 16106
Int. a.3 C25B 9/00. 15/08. 1/02
U.S. a. 204-237 1 Oaim
M"
1. Electrolysis installation for producing gas, of the type
comprising an eiectrolyser having an anolyte outlet (1) with
flow A, the said anolyte being charged there with bubbles of
the gas (02) due to the electrolysis reaction on the anode side,
and a catholyte outlet (2) with flow C, said catholyte being
charged there with bubbles of the gas (H^) due to the electroly-
sis reaction on the cathode side, said elecWolyser also being
provided with an anolyte inlet (3) with the same flow A as at
said anolyte outlet and with a catholyte inlet (4) with the same
flow C as at said catholyte outlet, an electrolyte return circuit
being provided between said eiectrolyser inlets and said eiec-
trolyser outlets and comprising
(a) a circuit (5) for transferring a portion
A X
A + C
of the anolyte flow A from said anolyte outlet (1) to said
catholyte inlet (4), said transfer circuit being equipped
with a liquid-gas separator (6) for thorough degassing;
(b) a circuit (7) for transferring a portion
c X
/< -I- c
of the catholyte flow C from said catholyte outlet (2) to
said anolyte inlet (3), said transfer circuit also being
equipped with a liquid-gas separator (8) for thorough
degassing;
(c) a circuit (9) for transferring the remaining
A -It C
of the anolyte flow A from said anolyte outlet (1) to said
anolyte inlet (3), said circuit being equipped with a liquid-
gas separator (10) for crude degassing; and
(d) a circuit (11) for transferring the remaining portion
C2
A + C
of the catholyte flow C from said catholyte outlet (2) to
160
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
said catholyte inlet (4), said circuit being equipped with a
liquid-gas separator (12) for crude degassing.
4,379,045
CO-PROCESSING OF RESIDUAL OIL AND COAL
Costandi A. Audeh, Princeton, N.J., assignor to Mobil Oil Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,075
Int. a.J ClOG 1/OS. 11/00. 9/00; ClOC 3/00
U.S. a. 208—9 3 Oaims
1. A process for the production of gaseous olefins and light
iquid distillate from residual oil co-processed with coal which
comprises:
(a) heating a mixture of residual oil, pulverized coal and a
rare earth exchanged zeolite Y cracking catalyst under
conditions effective to reduce the viscosity of the residual
oil without the substantial formation of coke, the amount
of said cracking catalyst being effective to provide olefinic
hydrocarbons, a distillate in the gasoline boiling range,
light gas oil, and heavy gas oil,
(b) separating the reaction mixture of step (a) into a gaseous
phase, a liquid phase and a solid phase comprising crack-
ing catalyst, coal ash and coal solids, and
(c) fractionally distilling the gaseous and liquid phase of step
(b) to provide a light olefinic hydrocarbon fraction, a
distillate in the gasoline boiling range, light gas oil, heavy
gas oil, and a bottoms fraction.
4,379,046
INTEGRATED TWO STAGE COKING AND STEAM
CRACKING PROCESS AND APPARATUS THEREFOR
Morey E. Oldweiler, Chester, N.J., assignor to Exxon Research
& Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,503
Int. a.J ClOG 51/02. 9/32: F27B 15/08
U.S. a. 208—54 14 Qaims
ing said second stage reaction zone to raise the conversion
product to steam cracking temperatures within the range
of 1200° to 1700° F. and supply the endothermic heat of
reaction;
(d) solids are separated from product gas within the reactor;
(e) products are recovered comprising low molecular
weight unsaturated hydrocarbons, the improvement
which comprises:
(0 withdrawing from the reactor a portion of separated
solids and preventing its entry into said first stage coking
zone; allowing another portion to enter said coking zone
and regulating the ratio between the amount of solids
withdrawn and the amount of solids allowed to enter said
coking zone to maintain the coking zone within said tem-
perature range.
4,379,047
ADDITIVE FOR GLYCOL SOLVENT USED IN
AROMATIC EXTRACnON
Donald M. Fenton, Anaheim, Calif., assignor to Union Oil Com-
pany of California, Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,635
Int. a.3 ClOG 21/16
U.S. CI. 208—333 13 Qaims
1. In a process for treating a fluid mixture of aromatic com-
pounds and aliphatic compounds wherein the fluid mixture is
contacted with a glycol solvent solution containing water and
a glycol under conditions such that said aromatic compounds
are selectively extracted into said solvent, and a glycol-aromat-
ics extract is separated from an aliphatic raffinate, and said
extract is separated into glycol and aromatic compounds, with
said glycol being recycled to contact said fluid mixture, the
improvement comprising reducing the concentration of perox-
ides formed in said solution by adding hydrazine to said glycol
solvent solution and heating the resultant admixture.
4,379,048
FLOAT-AND-SINK SEPARATOR
Johann J. Jansen, CZ Nieuwstadt, Netherlands, assignor to
Stamicarbon, B.V., Geleen, Netherlands
per No. PCr/NL81/00002, § 371 Date Oct. 13, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 13, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02259, PCT Pub.
Date Aug. 20, 1981
PCT Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 314,082
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 16, 1980,
8000978
Int. a.3 B03B 5/36
U.S. a. 209—172.5 6 Claims
1. In an integrated, two stage 'coking and steam cracking
process for the production of products including low molecu-
lar weight unsaturated hydrocarbons in which
(a) a carbonaceous material is reacted in a reactor in a first
stage coking zone containing a bed of fluidized solids
wherein steam is introduced to obtain a superficial fluidiz-
ing gas velocity in the range of O.S to S feet per second,
maintained at fluid coking conditions including a tempera-
ture in the range of about 950° F. to about 1 150° F. to form
a vaporous coking zone conversion product and coke, said
coke depositing on said fluidized solids;
(b) said vaporous coking zone conversion product is passed
with entrained solids to a second stage reaction zone;
(c) hot solids at a sufficient temperature and in sufficient
amount are introduced into said conversion product enter-
1. Apparatus for separating particles differing in specific
gravity by means of a liquid separatory medium, said apparatus
comprising:
a washing tank for containing a predetermined volume of
said separatory medium means defining an edge and in-
cluding discharge means for accepting discharged parii-
cles therefrom;
first removing means for removing particles which are sub-
stantially floating in said separatory medium;
second removing means movable along the bottom of said
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
washing tank for removing particles which gravitating! y
settle through said separatory medium; and
reciprocating means for reciprocating said second removing
means between first and second extreme positions thereby
transporting settled particles to said discharge means and
wherein said second removing means comprises at least
one collecting tray having an open end and being recipro-
cably movable along the bottom of said washing tank
between said first and second extreme positions by virtue
of said reciprocating means, whereby said collecting tray
in said first extreme position is substantially centrally
positioned on the bottom of said washing tank thereby
collecting a predetermined amount of said settling parti-
cles and in said second extreme position tiltedly rests on
said edge defining means so that said settled particles
collected therein are encouraged to be discharged to said
discharge means.
161
4,379,049
nNE MATERIAL SCREW WASHER
Leo H. Bassett, Burrton, Kans. 67020
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,430
Int. a.3 B03B 5/52
U.S. a. 209—464
7 Claims
1. A fine material screw washer comprising a longitudinal
tank having a belly pan therein, upper and lower end walls, a
spiral screw extending longitudinally in the tank in close prox-
imity to the belly pan, the screw having a support shaft at each
end thereof which extends through openings in the upper and
lower end walls of the tank, support bearings for said shaft
positioned on the outside of the end walls for supporting the
screw, the improvement comprising:
adjustment means associated with each support bearing
I allowing separate horizontal and vertical movement of the
bearing to adjust the clearance between the screw and the
belly pan;
an adjustably movable seal plate positioned over the opening
in the lower end wall including a seal therebetween, an
aperture in the seal plate for passage of the support shaft;
and
a flexible shaft seal attached to the seal plate approximate the
aperture surrounding the support shaft whereby as the
bearing requires horizontal or vertical adjustment, the seal
plate can be adjusted in a like manner.
4,379,050
GRANULAR FLUID BIOHLTER REVERSING
W. John Hess, and Morris C. Croker, both of Walla Walla,
Wash., assignors to The United SUtes of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,551
Int. a.3 C02C 1/04
U.S. a. 210—151 29 Claims
1. A fluid filter system comprising
a. a fiuid-holding container;
b. first means through which influent enters said container to
be filtered;
c. second means through which eflluent exits said container;
d. a fluid filter bed comprised of a mass of buoyant granules,
said fluid filter bed being disposed above said second
means; and
e. fluid flow reversal means for periodically causing said
influent to enter said container through said second means
and said effluent to exit said container through said first
means.
4,379,051
nLTERING APPARATUS
Edwin Hiesinger, Jenbach; Klaus Keplinger, and Hermann Nes-
sler, both of Innsbruck, all of Austria, assignors to Inkomag,
Basel, Switzerland
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,731
Oaims priority, application Austria, Apr. 16, 1980, 2057/80
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct 27,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 BOID 37/02
U.S. a. 210—193 9 Claims
1.2 30
1. An apparatus for the filtering of particles from a fluid
comprising at least one substantially cylindrical filter chamber
divided into two compartments by an annular circular support
fabric for a precoat filter layer, the first of said compartments
having at least one closable inlet opening for a carrier medium
162
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
of the precoat filter layer, at least one closable inlet for the
imedium to be filtered and at least one closable inlet for a wash-
ing medium, the second of said compartments having a clos-
lable outlet opening for the purified filtrate, wherein said filter
Ichamber is divided into two axially symmetric compartments
by means of said support fabric, wherein said support fabric is
planar and clamped along a reinforced outer ring-shaped rim
Region of said two compartments and a reinforced inner pe-
Iriphery between a pair of rings defining a central channel
through said compartments and said fabric, and wherein each
3f said compartments is delimited parallel to said support fabric
by a movable wall adapted to be pressed against said support
abric by means of external pressure, respective bottom plates
flanking the assembly of said movable walls and said fabric and
annular side walls surrounding said compartments and clamp-
ing said rim region of said fabric.
4379,052
COOLANT HLTER ASSEMBLIES
Earl J. Stearns, Fairfield, Conn., assignor to FIush-O-Matic
Corp., Fairfield, Conn.
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,446
Int. a.3 BOID 29/04
IU.S. Q. 210—223 27 Oaims
% «»> [ -/
1. A coolant filter assembly for use in an automobile cooling
system including an engine block, a radiator, radiator outlet
ind inlet hoses and a pump for circulating the coolant therein,
the coolant filter assembly comprising:
(A) a filter cartridge having a cartridge shell including a
cylindrical sidewall and an endwall, the cartridge shell
being open at one end to admit coolant and the cartridge
shell being perforated with openings to permit coolant to
exit, and filter material deployed within the cartridge shell
for filtering coolant passing therethrough; and
(B) means removably supporting the filter cartridge in the
coolant inlet flow path to the radiator with the open end
of the cartridge shell receiving the coolant flow, whereby
the coolant filter assembly cleans the coolant and the filter
cartridge can be removed and replaced when dirty,
(C) said filter cartridge being sized and said supporting
means being adapted to permit coolant flow both through
and around the filter cartridge, whereby coolant flow is
maintained if the filter cartridge becomes clogged.
4,379,053
nLTER BYPASS VALVE ASSEMBLY
Earl P. Brane, 9470 Ulmerton Rd., Largo, Fla. 33541
Filed Jnn. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,953
Int. a.3 BOID 27/10
HJ.S. a. 210—234 2 Claims
1. A device for filtering liquid comprising:
a main body having a liquid inlet and a liquid outlet with a
filter passage therebetween;
a filter removably mounted to said main body;
first valve means movably mounted to said main body and
movable between a fiter position directing all flow from
said inlet to said filter and a bypass position directing all
flow from said inlet directly to said outlet bypassing said
filter; and,
automatic valve means movably mounted in said main body
and automatically moving from an open position allowing
flow from said filter to said outlet when said first valve
means is in said filter position to a closed position blocking
flow between said filter and said outlet when said first
valve means is in said bypass position and wherein:
said first valve means includes a first valve rotatably
mounted to said main body and including a first passage in
communication at all times with said inlet arid movable to
be in communication with said filter passage and said
outlet respectively as said first valve means is in said filter
position and said bypass position;
said first valve means includes a seal mounted thereto seal-
ingly blocking flow between said inlet and said filter
passage and said inlet and said outlet respectively when
said first valve means is in said bypass position and said
filter positions;
said first valve means includes a valve body with opposite
end portions forming a pair of spaced apart drums with
sealing means thereon in engagement with said main body,
said first valve means further includes spring means posi-
tioned between said valve body and said seal with said seal
movably mounted to said valve body with said spring
means urging said seal against said main body closing said
filter passage when said first valve means is in said bypass
position but yieldable to allow said seal to move relative to
said main body as said first valve means moves to said
filter position, said seal and spring means along with said
first passage are positioned between said drums.
4,379,054
OPEN SEA SKIMMER BARGE
William M. Ayers, Duncan, Okla., assignor to Halliburton
Company, Duncan, Okla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 161,087, Jun. 19, 1980, abandoned.
This application Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,393
Int. a.3 E02B 15/04
U.S. a. 210—242.3 4 Qaims
1. A towed open sea skimming vessel for use in the skimming
of oil and the like from the surface of a body of water and/or
the erosion of silt and debris from the bottom of said body of
water adjacent said vessel, said vessel comprising:
a hull having a bow, a bottom, side walls, a stem having a
substantially horizontal elongate slot extending across a
portion thereof, and a deck;
tunnel means communicating with the substantially horizon-
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
tal elongate slot extending across a portion of the stem of
said hull and exiting said hull downwardly through the
bottom thereof in a substantially vertical position interme-
diate the bow and stem thereof thereby producing sub-
stantially zero fore or aft thrust on said hull, said tunnel
means including:
an initial portion having a curvilinear upper wall for said
oil and the like to flow therealong in contact therewith,
the curvilinear shape of the upper wall causing said oil
and the like from the surface of said body of water to
buoyantly flow therealong in a substantially uninter-
rupted layer when said vessel is positioned to have the
upper wall extending from above the surface of said
body of water to below the surface of said body of
water;
an intermediate portion; and
an exit portion having a transition section having flow
deflectors therein so that water of said body of water
exiting said tunnel means exits said hull downwardly
through the bottom thereof in a substantially vertical
position;
pump means contained within the intermediate portion of
said tunnel means for pumping of said oil and the like and
a portion of said water or said water only thereinto and
the pumping of only said water therethrough;
tank means selectively communicating with the intermediate
portion of said tunnel means, said tank means having
movable flap means located in the bottom thereof mov-
able into the intermediate portion of said tunnel means to
selectively allow communication between the intermedi-
ate portion of said tunnel means and said tank means;
induction header means communicating with said tank
means;
induction pump means communicating with said induction
header means to pump any of said water in said tank
means therefrom into said body of water;
secondary oil separation means contained within said tank
means;
tertiary oil separation means communicating with said sec-
ondary oil separation means;
transverse stem thruster tunnel means located in the stem of
said vessel below the initial portion of said tunnel means
having the ends thereof in the side walls of said hull
thereby creating a flow path in the stem of said vessel
from one side thereof to the other;
transverse stem thruster means located in said transverse
stem thruster tunnel means to selectively cause said water
to flow through said transverse stem thruster tunnel
means from one side of said hull to the other; and
adjustable bow thruster means located in the bow of said
hull extending therebelow
whereby during operation said vessel may be utilized for the
skimming of oil and the like from the surface of a body of
water and/or the erosion of silt from the bottom of said
body of water by causing said water to be pumped into
said tunnel means by said pump means thereby causing
any oil and the like flowing into said tunnel means along
with a portion of the water of said body of water flowing
into said tunnel means to flow along the curvilinear upp>er
wall of the initial portion of said tunnel means, the oil and
the like being caused to flow into the tank means from the
portion of water by extending the movable flap means
located in the bottom of said tank means being extended
into said tunnel means thereby causing said oil and the like
and a portion of the portion of the water in said tunnel
means to flow into said tank means where said oil and the
like is separated by said secondary separation means from
any water of said body of water contained therewith
thereby allowing the remaining portion of water from said
body of water to flow through said tunnel means exiting
therefrom to erode the bottom of said body of water when
said vessel is adjacent thereto while the location of said
vessel during operation with respect to said body of water
is controlled by the selective actuation of said transverse
stem thruster means and said bow thruster means while
163
water contained with said oil and the like exiting said
secondary separation means is further separated from the
water by said tertiary separation means.
M79,055
APPARATUS FOR THE DRIP DRY CONVEYANCE OF
OIL-FRIED DOUGH PRODUCTS
John L. Carlson; Roger F. Parson, and David F. Nicholson, all of
Duluth, Minn., assignors to Jeno's, Inc., Duluth, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 180,197, Aug. 22, 1980. This
appUcation Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 331,079
Int. a.3 BOID 33/04
U.S. 0. 210-400 I 3Clainu
1. Apparatus for draining excess oil from hot, drenched,
oil-fried dough crust of the type having an upper surface to be
topped, comprising:
(A) an inclined, endless conveyor having
A 1 an infeed and,
A 2 an outfeed end, the infeed end being lower than the
outfeed end, said conveyor comprising,
A 3 a foraminous belt bearing a plurality of vertical
flights, each flight comprising a grate which is deflned
by vertically disposed spaced apart tines, said tines
being connected top and bottom by a rigid frame, said
flights and frame being secured to said belt at closely
spaced apart intervals wherein the length of each flight,
end to end, relative to the spaced apart distance be-
tween respective flights, is determined by a flight length
multiple of 4.5-9.0 times the preselected distance be-
tween adjacent flights, adjacent flights defming slotted
compartments for receiving and conveying oil-fried
crust at a positive angle relative to the horizontal;
(B) at least one drain disposed beneath said conveyor for
collecting oil dripped from said crust; said drain pan hav-
ing an inclination which is common to the angle of inclina-
tion of the conveyor;
(C) inverter discharge means for engaging drained crust
upon outfeed from said conveyor, disposed in extension of
the conveyor, said discharge means positioning the upper
surface of the crust in predetermined adjusted orientation,
relative to the horizontal for subsequent handling and
pack ofT.
r-
164
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^79,056
nLTERING SCRAPER CXEANING DEVICES
Tadashi Hagihara, 4-1, 5<home, Minami Nagasaki, Toshima-
ku, Tokyo, Japan
Contiiiiiatioa of Ser. No. 79,354, Sep. 27, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,013
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 2, 1997,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ BOID 23/24
U.S. a. 210—415 2 Oaims
1. A filter cleaning system, comprising:
a positioning means including a downstream slit cleaning
means and a filter body,
said slit cleaning means for movement in a line having a
constant course straight or arcuate in one plane for remov-
ing debris from through openings in said filter cleaning
system, said slit cleaning means including moving slit
. cleaning elements moving in a line having a constant
course straight or arcuate in one plane,
said filter body of sheet m&terial with a plurality of hills and
dales having a generally broad upstream surface and a
broad downstream surface with a row of said through
openings in each dale bordered by a non channeled body
portion, each row includes a plurality of individual,
spaced apart, long, narrow through openings,
each opening of said through openings being aligned with an
opening in adjacent rows without an interconnecting
channel,
each said opening having an entrance at said upstream sur-
face and an exit at said downstream surface with each said
exit being larger than each said entrance,
each said exit aligned with respect to said entrance,
each side opening shaped without offset and including side
walls and end ^alls continuously sloping without offset
away from the opposite wall between said entrance and
said exit, and
positioning means for guiding a slit cleaning element be-
tween aligned openings in adjacent dales, and for position-
ing said slit cleaning means and each said opening aligned
with an opening in adjacent row of said filter body for
linear movement of said slit cleaning elements in said
openings from dale to dale in each row,
drive means connected to said filter cleaning system to move
said slit cleaning means along a linear path relative to said
filter body to remove debris from the opening in said filter
body.
4379,057
METHOD FOR THE CYCUC REGENERATION OF
WATER-SOFTENING SYSTEMS AND PROGRAMMED
WATER-SOFTENING SYSTEM FOR APPLYING THE
METHOD
Ewald Meiser, Weisham, and Horst Bauer, Erftstadt-Lechenich,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Gebriider Heyl
KG, Hildesheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,728
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 17,
979, 2950728
Int. a.' C02F 1/42
JS. a. 210—662 23 Oaims
1. In a method for a cyclic regeneration of a water softening
System, which comprises an exchange medium in a treatment
:
container and a regeneration medium in a storage container,
comprising:
first passing a regeneration medium from the bottom
through the exchange medium to the top thereof in a
direction counter-current to the fiow of water during the
softening cycle, then slowly Hushing the exchange me-
dium with treated water in the same direction of flow, and
then strongly flushing in the same direction, the improve-
ment wherein
(1) a maximum time interval and a maximum degree of
exhaustion of the exchange medium between regenera-
tions are preselected and monitored as limit values;
(2) each regeneration is initiated by the one of said two limit
values which is reached first;
(3) in each regeneration cycle only the amount of regenera-
tion medium proportional to the degree of exhaustion is
used; and
(4) the regeneration medium is diffused through the ex-
change medium at such a low flow velocity that the parti-
cle layers in the exchange medium remain substantially
unchanged.
4,379,058
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR nLTERING
CONTAMINATING PARTICLES FROM A
LIQUID/PARTICLE MIXTURE
Joseph A. Bolton, Glens Falls, N.Y., assignor to Albany Interna-
tional Corp., Menands, N.Y.
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,368
Int. a.J BOID 41/04
U.S. a. 210—791 14 Claims
1. An apparatus for filtering contaminating particles of solid
material from a liquid/particle mixture comprising; a hollow
tank having a peripheral side wall and top and bottom ends, an
inlet opening in the wall adjacent the top adapted to be con-
nected to a source of a liquid/particle mixture, an outlet open-
ing in the side wall spaced from the inlet opening and interme-
diate the top and bottom of the tank, a sealable drainage open-
ing in the tank, a filter in the tank and having small filtering
apertures, the filter being mounted in essentially a vertical
position with its upper end just below the inlet opening and
perpendicular thereto, the outlet opening being located inter-
mediate the ends of the filter, the drainage opening being at the
lower end of the tank and the filter being spaced from the inner
peripheral side wall of the tank, the filter extending around a
substantial portion of the inner peripheral surface of the tank,
the filter being open at both its upper and lower ends and the
filtering apertures in its side wall, the inlet opening being posi-
tioned so that the mixture is introduced into the open upper
end of the filter and filtered liquid from the mixture will pass
through the apertures in the side wall of the filter and through
the outlet opening and collected particles can be dumped from
the lower open end of the filter through the drainage opening
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
165
when it is unsealed, the open upper end of the filter having a
substantially larger diameter than the diameter of an inlet
opening and the apertures in the filter being considerably
smaller than the inlet opening, and the ratio of sizes of the
apertures in the filter, the open upper end of the filter, and the
inlet opening being selected so that when the liquid/particle
mixture is introduced at a predetermined velocity through the
inlet opening it will enter the open upper end of the filter and
be dispersed and brought into contact with the filter side wall
with a desired low flow velocity per square inch of filter area
and separation of the liquid and particles in the tank is effec-
tively accomplished without significant clogging of the filter
apertures by particles during the filtering operation, a shower
conduit extending through the upper end of the tank, a plural-
ity of nozzle orifices in the portion of the shower conduit
extending into the interior of the tank, and the shower adapted
to be connected to a source of washing fluid so that when
washing fluid is introduced into the tank through the nozzle
orifices in the shower conduit and the drainage opening is
unsealed it will facilitate the washing of the collected particles
on the interior of the filter out through the drainage opening.
8. A method for filtering contaminating particles of solid
material from a liquid/particle mixture comprising; introduc-
ing a liquid/particle mixture into a hollow tank having a pe-
ripheral side wall and top and bottom ends through an inlet
opening in the wall adjacent the top, filtering the particles from
the mixture by use of a filter in the tank disposed essentially
vertically and perpendicular to the inlet opening and extending
around a substantial portion of the peripheral side wall of the
tank, removing the filtered fluid collected from the mixture
through an outlet opening in the side wall of the tank spaced
from the inlet opening and intermediate the top and bottom of
the tank, removing the filtered contaminated particles through
a scalable drainage opening in the tank when the drainage
opening is unsealed, providing apertures in the filter that are
considerably smaller than the inlet opening and the inlet open-
ing being of a substantially smaller diameter than the open
upper end of the filter and the ratio of the apertures in the filter,
the open upper end of the filter and the inlet opening being
selected so that when a liquid/particle mixture is introduced at
a predetermined velocity through the inlet opening it will enter
the open upper end of the filter and be dispersed and brought
into contact with the filter at a low flow velocity per square
inch of filter area so that separation of the liquid and contami-
nated particles in the tank is effectively accomplished without
significant clogging of the filter apertures by particles during
the filtering operation, and periodically washing the interior of
the filter by using a rotating shower conduit extending through
the upper end of the tank, a plurality of nozzle orifices in the
portion of the shower conduit extending into the interior of the
tank, and the shower conduit adapted to be connected to a
source of washing fluid so that when washing fluid is intro-
duced into the tank through the nozzle orifices in the shower
conduit and the drainage opening is unsealed it will facilitate
the washing of the collected particles on the interior of the
filter out through the drainage opening.
4,379,059
FABRIC SOFTENING COMPOSITION AND A PROCESS
FOR PREPARING IT FROM CATIONIC SURFACTANT
AND THICKENER
John A. Hockey; Malcolm A. Shaw; John L. Wilby, and Allan A.
Wilson, all of Wirral, England, assignors to Lever Brothers
Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,514
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 7, 1980,
8035862
Int. a.3 CUD 1/62: D06L 1/12
U.S. a. 252—8.8 5 Qaims
1. A process for the manufacture of a fabric softening com-
position having a stable final viscosity, characterized by se-
quentially or simultaneously,
(i) forming an aqueous dispersion comprising from about 2%
to about 20% by weight of a cationic surfactant, said
dispersion having a viscosity of 30-50 cps at 25° C. and
1 10 sees" ' shear rate; and
(ii) thickening the composition to the final viscosity with
from about 0.01% to about 0.8% of a nonionic or weakly
anionic polymer selected from the group consisting of
polyacrylamide, polyvinylacetate, guar gum and mixtures
of guar gum and xanthan gum containing no more than
10% by weight of xanthan gum, said final viscosity being
70 centipoise or more measured at a temperature of 25° C.
and at a shear rate of 110 secs~ '.
4,379,060
USE OF NORBORNYL ETHERS IN AUGMENTING OR
ENHANCING THE AROMA OF FABRIC SOFTENER
ARTICLES AND COMPOSITIONS
Mark A. Sprecker, Sea Bright, N.J., assignor to International
Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 280,275, Jul. 6, 1981, Pat. No.
4,330,416, which is a division of Ser. No. 200,012, Oct. 23, 1980,
Pat. No. 4,311,861. This application Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No.
335,562
Int. a.^ B32B 3i/00: D06M /i//*
U.S. CI. 252—8.9 24 Qaims
1. A fabric softening article comprising a non-woven cloth
substrate, in contact with said substrate a substrate coating and
in contact with said substrate coating and outer coating, said
outer coating comprising at least one compound having a
structure selected from the group consisting of:
and
wherein "R" represents C3-C6 alkyl; phenethyl; methoxy-
ethyl; cyclohexyl; allyl; and hydroxyethyl and the moieties
"R" are the same in each of the molecules, in an amount suffi-
cient to augment or enhance the aronfa of the headspace in a
dryer on operation thereof when using said article.
166
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^79,061
DETERGENT COMPOSITION WITH REDUCED
SOIL-REDEPOSmON EFFECT
Hermann Rabitsch, Vienna, Austria, and Helmut A. Sosath,
Mannheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Lever Broth-
ers Company, New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,720
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 17, 1980,
8040445
Int. a.^ CUD 3/20. 3/22
U.S. a. 252—174.18 3 Qaims
1. Detergent composition with reduced soil-redeposition
efTect, comprising an active detergent material and a ternary
mixture of sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, a linear polycar-
boxylate and a cellulose ether, characterized in that the cellu-
lose ether is an alkyl cellulose in which the alkyl substituent is
a lower alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, the degree of
substitution is at least O.S and the degree of polymerisation is
not greater than 300, the alkyl cellulose being essentially free of
other substituents.
4,379,062
THREAD SEALING AND LUBRICATING COMPOSITION
Raymond D. Prengaman, 2207 Ravinia Dr., Arlington, Tex.
76012
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,814
Int. a.3 ClOM 7/70
U.S. a. 252—26 6 Qaims
1. A thread sealing and lubricating composition which com-
prises:
(a) 8-25% by weight finely divided copper flakes;
(b) 5-20% by weight finely divided aluminum particles;
(c) 4-15% by weight non-metallic, non-carbon powder
which is selected from the group consisting of talc, alumi-
num oxide (AI2O3), magnesium oxide (MgO), silicon
dioxide (Si02) and calcium oxide; and
(d) 40-83% by weight petroleum vehicle.
proviso that R' +R^ shall have a combined total of from
7 to 10 carbon atoms and at least one of R' or R^ has at
least 4 carbon atoms,
R^ is hydrogen or a monovalent Ci to C9 branched or
straight chain aliphatic group,
Z is an alkali metal cation or a nitrogen containing cation
having at least one hydrogen attached to the nitrogen, a
positive charge equal to x and selected from the group
consisting of ammonium cation and cations of a water
soluble alkanolamine having 2 to 4 carbon atoms in the
alkanol group, C2 to Ce alkyl amine, alkyl alkanolamine
having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl group and 2 to 4
carbon atoms in the alkanol group, heteroaliphatic mono-
amine in which the heteroatom is oxygen, heteroaliphatic
polyamine having oxygen or nitrogen heteroatoms, alkyl-
ene diamine having 2 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkylene
group, N-alkyl or N-hydroxyalkyl substituted alkylene
diamine having 2 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkylene group,
morpholine, N-alkyl substituted morpholine or N-
aminoalkyl substituted morpholine,
X is 1 to 3,
y is 1 and
m is 1 to 3
5. A corrosion inhibiting, aqueous functional fluid composi-
tion having a pH in the range of from 8 to 12 comprising (a)
water, (b) a surface active, corrosion inhibiting, water soluble
or disp)ersible alkali metal, ammonium or organic amine salt of
a water insoluble carboxylic acid group terminated amide
having one amide linkage
(-N-C-)
per molecule and (c) a second surface active agent, wherein (b)
has the following formula
[r2 O O "I
I II II (_)
R'— N— C— R— C— O I
(I)
0^n
where ,
R is a divalent C4 to Cs cycloaliphatic radical,
R' is a monovalent organic radical selected from the group
of:
(a) a monovalent C7 to Cio aliphatic radical having at least
one methyl or ethyl branch when R^ is hydrogen, or
(b) a monovalent C] to C9 straight or branched chain
aliphatic group when R^ is a monovalent Ci to C9
straight or branched chain aliphatic group with the
(D
4,379,063
NOVEL FUNCTIONAL FLUID
Mark A. Williams, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to Cincinnati
Milacron Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,330
Int. a.3 C09K 15/22; ClOM 1/06. 3/04; C23F 77/70
U.S. a. 252—33.6 6 Claims
1. A corrosion inhibiting, aqueous functional fluid composi-
tion having a pH in the range of from 8 to 12 comprising (a)
water, (b) a surface active, corrosion inhibiting, water soluble
or dispersible alkali metal, ammonium or organic amine salt of
a water insoluble carboxylic acid group terminated amide
having one amide linkage
O
I II
(-N-C-)
per molecule and (c) a second surface active agent, wherein (b)
has the following formula
[r2 O O 1
R'-N-C-R-C-O-i-^ 0 + %
where
R is a divalent radical selected from the group consisting of
a monoethylenically unsaturated C2 to C3 aliphatic radical
having two free valences in a cis stereo configuration,
R' is a monovalent organic radical selected from the group
of:
(a) a monovalent C7 to Cio aliphatic group having at least
one methyl or ethyl branch or a monovalent heteroali-
phatic group having at least one methyl or ethyl branch
and the formula R^— OR*n (II) wherein R^ is a straight
chain or a methyl or ethyl branched Ce to C12 alkyl
radical, R^ is a C2 to C3 alkylene radical and n is 1 to 2
when R^ is hydrogen, or
(b) a monovalent Ci to Cn straight or branched chain
aliphatic radical when R^ is a Ci to Cii straight or
branched chain monovalent aliphatic radical with the
proviso that R' -I- R^ shall have a combined total of from
8 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one of R' or R^ shall
have at least 5 carbon atoms,
R2 is hydrogen or a monovalent Ci to Cn branched or
straight chain aliphatic group,
Z is an alkali metal cation or a nitrogen containing cation
having at least one hydrogen attached to the nitrogen, a
positive charge equal to x and selected from the group
consisting of ammonium cation and cations of a water
soluble alkyl alkanolamine having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in
the alkyl group and 2 to 4 carbon atoms in the alkanol
group, heteroaliphatic monoamine in which the hetero-
atom is oxygen, heteroaliphatic polyamine having oxygen
or nitrogen heteroatoms, alkylene diamine having 2 to 6
carbon atoms in the alkylene group, N-alkyl or N-
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
167
hydroxyalkyl substituted alkylene diamine having 2 to 6
carbon atoms in the alkylene group, morpholine, N-alkyl
substituted morpholine or N-aminoalkyI substituted mor-
pholine,
X is 1 to 3,
y is 1 and '
m is 1 to 3. I
4^79,064
OXIDATIVE PASSIVATION OF
POLYAMINE-DISPERSANTS
John A. Cengel, Wheaton; Mark W. Hunt, Napeirille; Joseph S.
Strukl, Lisle, and Peter G. Pappas, Downers Grove, ail of 111.,
assignors to Standard Oil Company Gndiana), Chicago, lU.
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 246,007
Int. a.3 ClOM 1/32, 3/26. 1/20
U.S. a. 252—51.5 A 11 Qaims
1. A process for improving the compatibility of a polyamine
dispersant with fluorocarbon compositions which comprises
reacting said dispersant with an oxidizing agent which is se-
lected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur oxides,
nitrogen oxides, peroxides and ozone, wherein the amount of
said oxidizing agent is effective to reduce the TBN of said
dispersant by about 50% to about 90%.
4,379,065
AMINO PHENOLS IN COMBINATION WITH ASHLESS
ESTER DISPERSANTS AS USEFUL ADDITIVES FOR
FUELS AND LUBRICANTS
Richard M. Lange, Euclid, Ohio, assignor to The Lubrizol Cor-
poration, Wickliffe, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 253,830, Apr. 13, 1981, Pat. No.
4,320,021, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 914,710, Jun. 12,
1978, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
892,529, Apr. 3, 19i78, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part
of Ser. No. 676,172, Apr. 12, 1976, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 622,358, Apr. 14, 1975,
abandoned. This application Mar. 15, 1082, Ser. No. 358,510
Int. a.J ClOM 1/32
U.S. a. 252—51.5 A 21 Qaims
1. A composition comprising a combination of:
(A) at least one amino phenol of the general formula
(OH)f
{R)a-Ar-(NH2)ft
wherein R is a substantially saturated, hydrocarbon-based
substituent of at least 30 aliphatic carbon atoms; a, b and c
are each independently an integer of one up to three times
the number of aromatic nuclei present in Ar with the
proviso that the sum of a, b and c does not exceed the
unsatisfied valences of Ar; and Ar is an aromatic moiety
having 0-3 optional substituents selected from the group
consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkoxyl, nitro, halo or
combinations of two or more of said substituents; and
(B) at least one ashless dispersant, wherein said dispersant is
^ an ester composition of a high molecular weight carbox-
ylic acid acylating agent containing at least 30 carbon
atoms in the acyl moiety wherein the weight ratios of (A)
to (B) is about 0.1 to about 10 to 1.
13. A fuel composition containing a major proportion of a
normally liquid fuel and about 1 to about 10,000 parts by
weight per million parts of fuel of at least one composition
claimed in claim 1.
16. A lubricant comf)osition comprising a major proportion
of at least one oil of lubricating viscosity and about O.OS to
about 30 parts by weight per 100 parts oil of at least one com-
position claimed in claim 1.
19. An additive concentrate comprising about 30-90% of at
least one composition of claim 1 and a substantially inert,
normally liquid organic solvent/diluent.
4,379,066
METHOD FOR REDUCING BRAKE NOISE IN
OIL-IMMERSED DISC BRAKES
Vernon R. Small, Jr., Rodeo, Calif., assignor to Cbciron Re-
search Company, San Francisco, Calif.
FUed Not. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,569
Int. a.' ClOM 1/26
U.S. a. 252—56 R 5 Qaims
1. A method for reducing oil-immersed disc brake chatter by
lubricating the contacting surfaces of oil-immersed disc brakes
with a composition comprising a hydrocarbon-based lubricant
containing an effective amount to reduce chatter of a hydroxy-
alkyl alkanoate of the formula:
R— CH— CH2
I I
OR' OR"
wherein R is alkyl containing from 8 to 28 carbon atoms and
one of R' and R" is hydrogen and the other is alkanoyl
containing 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or mixtures thereof.
4,379,067
SELF-SEALING REFRIGERANT
Joseph J. Packo, 11000 Onion Creek Ct., Austin, Tex. 78747,
and Donald L. Bailey, Traverse City, Mich., assignors to
Joseph J. Packo, Austin, Tex.
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,969
Int. a.3 C09K 5/04
U.S. a. 252—67 16 Claims
1. A leak sealing and leak preventing refrigeration fluid
composition for refrigeration and air conditioning units com-
prising:
(a) a refrigerant fluid selected from the group consisting of
chlorofluorocarbons, ammonia, sulfur dioxide, ethyl chlo-
ride, methyl chloride, dimethyl either, mixtures of methyl
chloride and dimethyl ether, and mixtures of carbon diox-
ide with nitrous oxide;
(b) a vapor and liquid phase sealant for forming a seal at the
site of a leak in an air conditioning or refrigeration circuit,
said sealant being an hydrolyzable or polymerizable or-
ganosilane or mixture thereof compatible with said refrig-
erant fluid which does not substantially interfere with the
properties of the refrigerant fluid, which exists as a liquid
in the liquid portion of the circuit and as a gas in the
gaseous portion of the circuit, and which is substantially
inert to the material from which the circuit is made, said
organosilane sealant being selected from the group con-
sisting of aminosilanes, mercaptosilanes, acyloxysilanes,
mixtures of alkoxysilanes with an acidic anhydride or an
amine, and mixtur^ of said aminosilanes and said other
organosilanes.
' 4,379,068 I
HYDROPHIUC COTELOMERS HAVING A TERMINAL
SULFONATE GROUP AND CONTAINING AOD AND
AMINE FUNCnONS, AND THEIR APPUCATION IN
DETERGENT COMPOSITIONS
Pierre Couderc, Bethnne, France, aMignor to Sodetc Chimique
des CharboBnagsi, Paris, F^wcc
FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,400
Claims priority, application France, Jon. 25, 1980, 80 14061
Int a.J CUD 7 /IS
U.S. a. 252—99 18 Claims
5. A dry, powdered detergent composition comprising a
bleaching agent, at least one surfactant, sodium sUicate, and
168
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
10-50% by weight of a hydrophilic cotelomer having the
formula
H-
1 1
H COOM .
a
-c— c—
I I
H NH2J6
-{- A ^tTTTTTTSOs M '
wherein Ri, R2. R3 and R4 are each independently H or Cm
alkyl; M is H or an alkali metal; M' is an alkali metal; 8 = a = 40;
and 1 = b = 20; and A represents structural units having at least
one of the formulae:
■c— c-
I I
L H CONH2 Jf L H COOR7 Jd
RSR.
■c— c-
r 1 * 1 '1
1 1
-c— c-
1 1
— ; or
1 1
. H Y.
e
' H
1
H
1
c
1
c
1
. COOM
cooz_
/
wherein R3, R4, R5 and Rt are each independently H or C1.4
alkyl; R7 is Ci.g alkyl; Rg and R9 are each independently H or
C1.2 alkyl; Y is aryl; M is H or an alkali metal; Z is M or Ci.g
alkyl; 0^c^2; 0^d^3; 0^e^2; and O^fS 10.
4,379,069
DETERGENT POWDERS OF IMPROVED SOLUBILITY
Anthony A. Rapisarda, Elmhurst, N.Y.; Joseph Romeo, Bergen-
field, and Jose A. Lopez, Palisades Park, both of N.J., assign-
ors to Lever Brothers Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,319
Int. aj CUD 7/00
U.S. a. 252—135 9 Qaims
1. A process for making a powder detergent of improved
solubility, comprising the steps of:
(1) preparing a silicate free alkaline blend consisting essen-
tially of, in percent by weight of the finished product,
about 10-60% builder, about 0.6-6% surfactant, about
20-50% alkaline agent and 0 to about 70% filler; and
(2) thereafter mixing said blend with about 10-30% solid
alkali metal silicate and a chlorine donor providing about
0.4-1.5% available chlorine, the pH of the resulting prod-
uct being about 10.4 or greater at about 0.25% product use
concentration.
9. A composition made by the process of claim 1, 7 or 8
wherein the solid alkali metal silicate is less alkaline than meta-
silicate.
4,379,070
TIN-PHOSPHORUS OXYFLUORIDE GLASS
CONTAINING AROMATIC ORGANIC COMPOUND
Paul A. Tick, Coming, N.Y., assignor to Coming Glass Works,
Coming, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,791
Int. a.3 C09K 11/06
U.S. a. 252—301.16 8 Qaims
500 600
WAVELENGTH
700
(nm)
LUMINESCENCE
2,3 BENZANTRACENE IN CHCLj
BENZANTRACENE IN GLASS
GLASS ALONE
1. A tin-phosphorous oxyfluoride glass article containing at
least one dissolved polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon which
exhibits a response to light or an electric field, the compound
being present in a concentration ranging up to about 1% by
weight of the glass.
4,379,071
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
MICROCAPSULES
Hildegard Schnoring, Wuppertal-Elberfeld; Manfred Dahm,
Bergisch-Neukirchen, and Gottfried Pampus, Leverkusen, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesell-
schaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 448,247, Mar. 5, 1974, abandoned. This
application Mar. 8, 1976, Ser. No. 664,908
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 9,
1973, 23117126
Int. a.3 BOIJ 13/02
U.S. a. 252—316 14 Qaims
1. A process for the production of microcapsules containing
solid or liquid substances, which are sparingly soluble in water,
comprising the steps
(a) continuously mixing material to be encapsulated with a
product obtained by the reaction of a diol or a polyol
having a molecular weight of from 400 to 10,000 with
phosgene, a diisocyanate or a polyisocyanate, said product
containing at least two chloroformic acid ester or isocya-
nate groups per molecule;
(b) continuously introducing in separate streams into a zone
of high turbulence the mixture from step (a), an aqueous
phase and a chain lengthening agent, partially or com-
pletely dissolved in the aqueous phase, which is at least
bifunctional and is an aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic
glycol, an amino glycol or an aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or
aromatic amine whereby flow through the zone of high
turbulence is at least 300 parts by volume of liquid per unit
volume of turbulent zone space per hour;
(c) maintaining the zone of high turbulence at temperatures
from 50° to 150° C. to thereby form a high molecular
weight polymer which envelops the substance to be en-
capsulated and forms microcapsules; and
(d) continuously removing the formed microcapsules from
said zone of high turbulence.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
169
I 4,379,072
' WATER-BASED RUST INHIBITOR
Oliyer L. Yarham, Park Forest, III.; John M. Sech, Whiting, and
Car! S. Kennedy, Dyer, both of Ind., assignors to NaJco Chem-
ical Company, Oak Brook, 111.
Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,653
Int. a.J C23F 11/14. 11/12
U.S. a. 252—389 R 4 Oaims
1. A non-petroleum based metal corrosion inhibiting compo-
sition comprising: ,
Ingredients
% by Weight
Water
75-90
Linseed Oil Fatty Acid
2-8
C6-C12 Dibasic Acid
1-10
Amine Blend, comprising a 1:2 to
2:1 ratio of a cyclic amine from
the group consisting of cyclohexyl
amine, morpholine and C2-C4
alkanol amine.
3-8
Water-soluble alkali metal base
.5-3
4.379.073
COMPOSITION FOR WOOD TREATMENT
Charles J. Zimmerman, Steep Bank Rd., St. James, N.Y. 11780
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,822
Int. a.3 B44D 1/16
U.S. a. 252—400 R 3 Oaims
1. A wood preservative for pressure treating wood, said
wood preservative comprising:
(a) chromated copper arsenate;
(b) l-amino-8-naphthol-3,6-disulfonic acid;
(c) brown acid dye; and
(d) mixing chromated copper arsenate, l-amino-8-naphthol-
3, 6-disulfonic acid and brown acid dye together in the
following proportions: Three pounds of l-amino-8-naph-
thol-3, 6-disulfonic acid with nine pounds of brown acid
dye and 1,000 gallons of 2.5% or less of chromated copper
acid.
4,379,074
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION BASED ON TITANIUM
TRIHALIDE, A METHOD FOR ITS PREPARATION, AND
A PROCESS FOR THE POLYMERIZATION OR
COPOLYMERIZATION OF UNSATURATED
COMPOUNDS WHICH USES THIS COMPOSITION
Agostino Balducci, San Donato Milanese; Margherita Corbel-
lini, Milan, and Mirko Osellame, Ombriano, all of Italy,
assignors to Anic S.p.A., Palermo and Snamprogetti, S.p.A.,
Milan, both of, Italy
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,658
j Qaims priority, application Italy, Feb. 1, 1980, 19619 A/80
! Int. a.i C08F 4/64
U.S. a. 252—429 B 4 Oaims
1. A catalyst system consisting of: (a) a compound of the
fonriula:
TiX3.mM'Y„.qM"Y>cAlY'3_sR's
in which X is halogen, M' and M" are metals different from
each other, selected from the group consisting of Mg, Al, Ti,
Zr, Mo, V, Mn, Cr, Fe and Zn; Y.Y' and Y", the same or
different from each other, are halogens and can be the same as
or different from X, m and q can be zero or greater than zero,
but cannot be both zero simultaneously, c has a value between
O.S and SO; n and p represent the valencies of M' and M"
respectively; S has a value from 0 to 3; and R' is a hydrocarbon
radical having a number of carbon atoms less than or equal to
10, in combination with (b) a compound of the formula:
AlR"pX'3_p'
in which R" is a hydrocarbon radical, X' is halogen and p' is a
number between 1 and 3.
4,379,075
PROCESS FOR POLYMERIZING HIGH MELT INDEX
OLEnNS AND POLYMERIZATION CATALYSTS USED
THEREFORE
Louis J. Rekers, Wyoming, and Stanley J. Katzen, Cincinnati,
both of Ohio, assignors to National Petro Chemicals Corp.,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,677
Int. O.^ C08F 4/78
U.S. O. 252—430 7 Oaims
1. A catalyst system obtained by heat activating a supported
organophosphoryl chromium compound obtained by the reac-
tion of chromium trioxide with an organophosphorous com-
pound having the formula: 1
O
OH
RO— P— OR or RO— P— OR
I
OR , .
wherein R is alkyl, aralkyl, aryl, cycloalkyi, or hydrogen, but
at least one R is other than hydrogen, and combining the heat
activated supported material with a melt index increasing
amount of at least one organoborane catalyst modifier having
the formula:
B— H
wherein
m and n each is zero or 1,
R] and R2 are each a hydrocarbyl group of from I to 10
carbon atoms, or one of Ri and R2 is hydrogen, or to-
gether Ri and R2 constitute a hydrocarbyl group of from
2 to 10 carbon atoms.
4,379,076
REFORMING WITH MULTIMETALLIC CATALYSTS
Paul E. Eberly, Jr.; Charles H. Mauldin, and William C. Baird,
Jr., all of Baton Rouge, La., assignors to Exxon Research and
Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 53,375, Jun. 29, 1979, Pat. No.
4,265,786. This application Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,765
Int. O.^ BOIJ 27/02
U.S. O. 252—439 12 Oaims
1. A reforming catalyst which comprises from about 0.1 to
about 2 percent platinum, from about 0.1 to about 2 percent
iridium, from about 0.01 to about 0.1 percent copper, from
about 0.001 to about 3 percent selenium, and from about 0.1 to
about 2.5 percent halogen, composited with an inorganic oxide
support.
4,379,077
ACnVE CARBON CONDITIONING PROCESS
Frank Solomon, Great Neck, N.Y., assignor to Diamond Sham-
rock Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
FUed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,580
Int. 0.3 BOIJ 21/18; HOIM 4/88
U.S. O. 252—444 7 Claims
1. In a process for making an oxygen cathode having a
carbon supported hydroxide forming catalyst the improvement
170
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
comprising treating active carbon particles by contacting said
active carbon particles with an alkali and thereafter contacting
said. active carbon particles with an acid, said contacting with
alkali being conducted at temperatures ranging from about 90°
to 140* C. for a time period of at least about O.S hours, said
contacting steps occurring prior to placement of any catalyst
on the carbon.
4^79,078
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG GRANULATED CATALYST
FOR THE SYNTHESIS OF AMMONIA
Viktor P. Lytkin, ulitsa Trudovye Rezervy, 70b. kv. 95; Vladimir
N. Menshov, ulitsa Bcrezhnogo, 21, kv. 24; Jury S. Froiov,
ulitsa Kuibysheva, 14, kv. 26; Zinaida A. Polikarpova, ulitsa
Kommunisticheskaya, 23a, kv. 19; Viktor S. Sobolevsky,
ulitsa Moskovskaya, 2/14, kv. 5; Maria G. Seljutina, ulitsa
Jubileinaya, 3, poselok "25 let Khimkombinata"; Vladimir N.
Anokhin, ulitsa Berezovaya, 9, kv. 2; Nikolai D. Barbosov,
ulitsa S. Esenina, 3, kv. 22, all of Novomoskovsk Tulskoi
oblasti, all of U.S.S.R.; Sergei P. Vorontsov, deceased, late of
Novomoskovsk Tulskoi oblasti, U.S.S.R.; by Nina F. Voront-
sova, administrator, ulitsa Moskovskaya, 20, kv. 60., Novo-
moskovsk Tulskoi oblasti, U.S.S.R.; Ehivid B. Chistozvonov,
deceased, late of Novomoskovsk Tulskoi oblasti, U.S.S.R., and
by Vera G. Chistozvonova, adminstrator, ulitsa Kirova, 4/23,
kv. 51., Novomoskovsk Tulskoi oblasti, U.S.S.R.
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,507
Int. a.3 BOIJ 21/04. 23/78
U.S. a. 252—466 J 5 Oaims
1. A process for producing a granular catalyst for the synthe-
sis of ammonia which comprises simultaneous melting and
oxidation of iron with the use of a promoter selected from the
group consisting of potassium carbonate, calcium oxide, alu-
mina and mixtures thereof in a melt layer of 30 to 70 mm
thickness of the resulting catalyst mass, followed by granulat-
ing said melt with a current of air ensuring a horizontal move-
ment of the resulting catalyst granules and cooling them to a
temperature of 1,000° C. and then reducing the resulting gran-
ules as they cool spontaneously with a reducing gas.
4,379,079
USE OF METHYL-THIO-2-METHYL-2-PENTENOATE IN
AUGMENTING OR ENHANONG THE AROMA OF
PERFUME COMPOSITIONS, COLOGNES AND
PERFUMED ARTICLES
Raman R. Patel, Plainsboro; Alan O. Pittet, Atlantic Highlands,
and Ranya Muralidhara, Fair Haven, all of N.J., assignors to
International Flavors A Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 322,843
Int. a.3 A61K 7/46: CUB 9/00
\}S. a. 252—522 R 5 Oaims
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of
consumable materials selected from the group consisting of
perfume compositions, colognes and perfumed articles com-
prising the step of intimately admixing with a perfume compo-
sition base, a cologne base or a perfumed article base, an aroma
augmenting or enhancing quantity of a methyl-thio-2-methyl-
2-pentenoate defined according to the structure:
wherein the wavy lines represent covalent bonds juxtaposed in
a "cis" or "trans" configuration around the carbon-carbon
double bond of the structure.
4,379,080
GRANULAR DETERGENT COMPOSITIONS
CONTAINING FILM-FORMING POLYMERS
Alan P. Murphy, Colerain Township, Belmont County, Ohio,
assignor to The Procter A Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,454
Int. a.3 CUD 3/08. 3/12. 3/37. 17/06
U.S. a. 252—526 31 Qaims
1. A granular detergent composition comprising:
(a) from about 5% to about 40% by weight of an organic
surfactant selected from the group consisting of anionic,
nonionic, zwitterionic, ampholytic and cationic surfac-
tants, and mixtures thereof;
(b) from about 10% to about 60% by weight of a finely
divided aluminosilicate ion exchange material selected
from the group consisting of:
(1) crystalline aluminosilicate material of the formula:
NaJ(A102)^.(Si02),].xH20
wherein z and y are at least 6, the molar ratio of z to y
is from 1.0 to O.S and x is from 10 to 264, said material
having a particle size diameter of from about 0. 1 micron
to about 10 microns, a calcium ion exchange capacity of
at least about 200 mg. CaCOs eq./g. and a calcium ion
exchange rate of at least about 2 grains Ca+ '''/gallon/-
minute/gram/gallon;
(2) amorphous hydrated aluminosilicate material of the
empirical formula:
Mi(zA102.ySi02)
wherein M is sodium, potassium, ammonium, or substi-
tuted ammonium, z is from about O.S to about 2 and y is
1, said material having a magnesium ion exchange ca-
pacity of at least about SO milligram equivalents of
CaCOa hardness per gram of anhydrous aluminosilicate
and a Mg+ + exchange rate of at least about 1 grain/gal-
lon/minute/gram/gallon; and
(3) mixtures thereof; and
(c) from about 5% to about 75% by weight of a water-solu-
ble neutral or alkaline salt; and
(d) from about 0.1% to about 10% by weight of a film-form-
ing polymer soluble in an aqueous slurry comprising the
above components, said film-forming polymer being an at
least partially neutralized salt of: a homopolymer or co-
polymer of acrylic acid, hydroxyacrylic acid, or meth-
acrylic acid, cellulose acetate sulfate; cellulose sulfate;
hydroxyethylcellulose sulfate; methylcellulose sulfate; or
hydroxypropylcellulose sulfate; said composition contain-
ing less than about 10% by weight of phosphate materials
and less than about 3% by weight of alkali metal silicate
materials.
4. A composition according to claim 1 wherein the organic
surfactant is selected from the group consisting of linear alkyl-
benzene sulfonates containing from about 11 to 14 carbon
atoms in the alkyl group, tallowalkyl sulfates; coconutalkyl
glyceryl ether sulfonates; alkyl ether sulfates wherein the alkyl
moiety contains from about 14 to 18 carbon atoms and wherein
the average degree of ethoxylation is from about 1 to 4; olefin
or paraffin sulfonates containing from about 14 to 16 carbon
atoms; alkyldimethyl amine oxides wherein the alkyl group
contains from about 11 to 16 carbon atoms; alkyldimethylam-
monio propane sulfonates and alkyldimethylammonio hydroxy
prppane sulfonates wherein the alkyl group contains from
about 14 to 18 carbon atoms; soaps of higher fatty acids con-
taining from about 12 to 18 carbon atoms; condensation prod-
ucts of C9-C]5 alcohols with from about 4 to 8 moles of ethyl-
ene oxide, and mixtures thereof.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
J
4^79,081
METHOD OF ENCAPSULATING WASTE RADIOACTIVE
MATERIAL
Michael W. Rootham, MonroeTille, Pa., and James A. Forrester,
Buckinghamshire, United Kingdom, assignors to Westing-
house Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,103
Int. a.J G21F 9/16
U.S. CI. 252—628 10 Qaims
1. A method of encapsulating radioactive waste comprising
the steps of:
drawing a predetermined amount of radioactive liquid waste
having a cement setting retardant therein from a source, said
retardant constituting a component which variably retards
set and strength development in a cement mix;
mixing said liquid waste in a high shear mixer to provide a
homogeneously mixed, predetermined volume of liquid;
introducing a corresponding volume of cement into the prede-
termined volume of liquid to provide a cement paste;
subjecting the cement paste to high shear mixing in said mixer
for a time sufficient to remove the retardant from the cement
hydrating surface and until the retarding reactions have been
overcome to thusly produce a thixotropic rapid setting
cement.
171
4,379,083
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF BLOOD
PLASMA FRACTIONS
Jiirgen Falke; Helmut Gciger, both of Marburg; Wolfpmg Griin-
bein, Liederbach, and Heinz-Georg Kandel, Wetter, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Behringwerke Aktiengesell-
schaft, Marburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,719
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 16,
1980, 3018669
Int. a.5 C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 260—112 B 3 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a plasma constituent
which comprises separately and continuously feeding plasma,
precipitant and buffer to a circulating pump for admixture in a
zone of high turbulence and introduction to a loop reactor
comprising said pump, a stirring vessel, a conduit extending
from an outlet of the vessel to the pump, and a recirculating
conduit extending from the pump to an inlet of the vessel for
circulating the mixture to and from said vessel, and continu-
ously withdrawing a portion of the reaction mixture from the
loop reactor for separation of a precipitated plasma protein.
4,379,084
PROTEIN MATERIAL AND METHOD FOR THE
MANUFACTURE THEREOF
Susumu Teranishi; Yoichi Kawasaki, both of Osaka; Tsutomu
Katayama, Izumisano, and Hitoshi Taniguchi, all of Japan,
assignors to Fi^i Oil Company Limited, Osaka, Japan
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,353
Qaims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 22, 1980, 55/132076
Int. Q\} A23J 1/02, 1/14. 1/16. 3/00
VS. a. 260—112 R 7 Claims
1. A method for manufacturing a fibrous protein material
which comprises the steps of dispersing into an aqueous slurry
or paste of protein an emulsion containing oil and water phase,
the external phase of said emulsion being the oil phase, to mix
said emulsion with said slurry or paste, and forming the mix-
ture into fibrous material.
4,379,082
METHOD OF REMOVING RUTHENIUM
CONTAMINATION FROM A LIQUID RADIOACTIVE
EFFLUENT
Jean-Paul Gauchon, Pertuis, France, assignor to Commissariat a
I'Energie Atomique, Paris, France
FUed Apr. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 145,320
Claims priority, application France, May 7, 1979, 79 11468
Int. a.5 G21F 9/10
U.S. a. 252—631 8 Claims
at
5 •'S ?
i«
^^?m
tf «
1. A method of removing ruthenium contamination from a
radioactive liquid effluent, consisting in adding to said liquid
effluent a reducing agent and cupric ions, to form, in said
eflluent, a cuprous oxide precipitate oo^vhich the ruthenium is
fixed, and subsequently separating the precipitate thus formed
from the effluent.
4,379,085
HEAT STABILIZATION OF PLASMA PROTEINS
Craigenne A. WUliams, and MUan Wickerhauser, both of Be-
thesda, Md., assignors to American National Red Cross,
Washington, D.C.
FUed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,229
Int. a.3 C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 260—112 B 10 Claims
1. A method for the heat stabilization of a plasma protein
comprising heating the protein in an aqueous medium in the
presence of ammonium or potassium citrate in an amount in
exc of 2.0 M to saturation of the aqueous medium.
4,379,086
METHOD OF PREPARING IMMUNOGLOBULIN
SUITABLE FOR INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION
USING PEG
Tokusttke Kimura, Tokyo, and Fumio Kurosn, Hasnda, both of
Japan, assignors to Fi^izoki Pharmaceuticai Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 383,050
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jnn. 9, 1981, 56/87503
Int a.3 C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 260—112 B 1 Claim
1. The method of preparing immunoglobulin suitable for
intravenous administration which comprises the steps of:
(1) dissolving Cohn Plasma Fraction II in a Phosphate buffer
solution having a pH of 7.0 to 8.0 to a concentration of 2%
to 3%,
(2) adding polyethylene glycol (PEG) having a molecular
weight of 4000 to the solution to a concentration of 3% to
4%.
172
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
(3) removing aggregates of immunoglobulin produced and
precipitated by centrifugation,
(4) adding PEG (M.W. 4000) to the supernatant to a concen-
tration of 6% to 8% at a pH of 6.5 to 7.0, and
(5) separating immunoglobulin as a paste from the aqueous
liquid.
4,379,087
METHOD OF PREPARING ALPHA-l-PROTEINASE
INHIBITOR
Michael H. Coan, El Cerrito, and William J. Brockway, San
Leandro, both of Calif., assignors to Cutter Laboratories, Inc.,
Berkeley, Calif.
Filed Jun. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 389,202
Int. C\J C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 260—112 B 16 Oaims
1. A method for separating alpha- 1 -proteinase inhibitor from
a blood plasma fraction containing the same, which comprises
the steps of
(a) holding an aqueous solution of the blood plasma fraction at
a pH of about 6.5-8.5, and a temperature of about 2°-50° C.
for a period of about 0.2-24 hours,
(b) mixing the solution with a p)olycondensed polyglycol in the
proportion of about 10-15 grams of polyglycol per 100 ml of
aqueous solution containing the blood plasma fraction and
adjusting the pH of the mixture to about 4.6-5.7 to selec-
tively precipitate unwanted proteins from the solution with-
out precipitation of alpha- 1 -proteinase inhibitor, and
(c) separating alpha- 1 -proteinase inhibitor from the solution.
4,379,088
N-AMINOALKYLENESULFONAMIDO SUBSTITUTED
MONOAZO COLORANTS
Nathan N. Crounse, Myrtle Beach, S.C, assignor to Sterling
Drug Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 195,118, Oct. 8, 1980. This application Aug.
17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,393
Int. a.^ C09B 29/20 29/03. 29/15. 29/036
U.S. a. 260—157 10 Qaims
1. A mixture consisting essentially of a monoazo compound
which is substituted with an average of x (N-substituted sulfon-
amido) groups per molecule wherein said monoazo compound
is of the formula
N=N
in which
X represents a number from 1 to 4,
R represents hydrogen or the moiety
R*
a1kyIene-NCH2CH2NHC=0 and alkyiene-NCH2CH2N=CCH3
I I I I
in which alkylene represents — CH2CH2 — and
— CH2CH2CH2— ,
R^ represents hydrogen, Ci to C3 alkyl or Ci to C3 alkoxy; or
the acid-addition salt forms of said mixtures of monoazo com-
pounds.
4,379,089
POLYAMINOALKYLENESULFONAMIDATEDDISAZO
COLORANTS
Nathan N. Crounse, Myrtle Beach, S.C, assignor to Sterling
Drug Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,118
Int. a.3 C09B 29/38, 35/04, 29/16, 29/20
U.S. a. 260—161 3 Claims
1. A mixture consisting essentially of a disazo compound
which is substituted with an average of x (N-substituted sulfon-
amido) groups per molecule wherein said disazo compound is
of the formula
H3C
N=N— Y— N=N
OH
HO
CH3
-4;S02N-R> J,
in which
X represents a number from 1 to 4,
Y represents a moiety selected from the class having the
formulas
ry:-!H(3
R' represents a moiety selected from the group consisting of
alkylene-NH-alkylene-NH2, alkylene-N-(non-tertiary Ci
to C4 alkyl)2.
alkylene-NCH2CH2NHC=sO and alkylene-NHC2CH2=CCH3
I I I I
in which R*is hydrogen, C| to C3 alkoxy or Ci to C3 alkyl,
R' represents a moiety selected from the group consisting of
alkylene-NH-alkylene-NH2,
alkylene-N-(Ci to C4 alkyl)2,
in which alkylene represents — CH2CH2 — and
— CH2CH2CH2— ,
R2 represents hydrogen, Ci to C3 alkyl or Ci to C3 alkoxy; or
the acid-addition salt forms of said disazo compounds.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
173
4^79,090
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF 1-(PHENYL
AND
HALOPHENYL)-3,4.DIHYDRO^[(DIMETHYLAMINO)-
METHYLENE]5H.2-BENZAZEPIN.5-0NE.2OXIDES
Eugene J. Trybulski, Paraippany, N J., assignor to Hoffiaumn-
La Roche Inc., NuUey, SJ.
Division of Ser. No. 150,509, May 16, 1980, Pat No. 4,318,854,
wliich is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 10,118, Feb. 7, 1979,
abandoned. This application Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,293
Int. a.J C07D 223/16
U.S. a. 260—239 BB i Claim
1. A process to produce a compound of the formula
4,379,092
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
ANTHRAQUINONE AND ITS SUBSTITUTED
DERIVATIVES
Michel DeTic, Lyons, France, assignor to P C U K Produits
Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann, Coorbevoie, France
FUed Not. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,520
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 16, 1980, 80 26637
Int a.3 C07C 50/18; C09B 7/00
U.S. a. 260—369 7 Claims
1. Process for the preparation of anthraquinone compounds
of the general formula:
(I)
in which Rj, R2, R3, R4 represent hydrogen, halogen or a
linear or branched alkyl containing 1 to 5 carbon atoms which
«.»,-«!« Y o«^ V o,« c 1 ♦ ^ «• »u c comprises reacting a phthalic anhydride or substituted phthalic
wherem X and Y are selected from the group consistmg of anhydride of the formula:
hydrogen, halogen and trifluoromethyl, which consists essen-
tially of:
(a) reacting a compound of the formula
ai)
with a benzene compound of the formula:
wherein X and Y are as above, with a peracid in an inert
organic solvent at from about 0° C. to 40° C. and separat-
ing the analogous N-oxide thereof and
(b) thereafter reacting the N-oxide of step (a) with dimethyl-
formamide dimethylacetal in an inert solvent at from
about 0* C. to 100° C. to produce the end product.
ail)
wherein Ri, R2, R3. and R4 have the same deflnition as above,
in the presence of a catalyst mixture of hydrofluoric acid and
boron trifluoride, and converting the thus obtained o-benzoyl
benzoic acid of the formula:
4,379,091
ESTERS OF ARYLPROPIONIC AQDS ENDOWED WITH
AN ANTI-INFLAMMATORY ACTIVITY
Paok) Ferruti; Ferdinando DanussO, both of MUan; Maria C.
Tanzi, Monza, and Giuseppe Quadro, Milan, all of Italy,
assignors to Ansonia Farmaceutid sjrj., Rome, Italy
FUed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,665
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Feb. 13, 1980, 19879 A/80
Int a.3 C07C 69/76
UJS. a. 548—472 7 Claims
1. The tetraethylene glycol monoester with 2-<4-isobutyl-
phenyl) propionic acid.
(IV)
in which R|, R2. R3. and R4 have the same definition as above,
into the compound of formula (I) by cyclization.
174
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^79,093
PROCESS FOR PREPARING HIGH PURITY
URSODEOXYCHOLIC ACID
Antonio Bonaldi, Chiudono, and Egidio Molinari, Longone al
Segrino, both of Italy, assignors to ErregieiTe S.p.A., Ber-
gamo, Italy
FUed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 277,005
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Apr. 14, 198^21137 A/81
Int. a.5 C07J 9/00
U.S. a. 260—397.1 4 Qaims
1. A process for preparing high purity ursodeoxychoUc acid
Fe + "(OSiRR'R ")x(C)COR"')„ .
COOH
4,379,095
METHOD FOR REDUONG THE MECHANICAL
STABILITY OF NATURAL RUBBER LATEX
Richard C. Oldack, Uniontown, Ohio, assignor to The Firestone
Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 158,959, Jun. 12, 1980, abandoned.
This application Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,184
Int. a.3 C08L 7/02
U.S. a. 260—815 4 Qaims
1. A method for reducing the mechanical and chemical
stability of natural rubber latex comprising the step of:
adding to the latex a nonionic polyol block copolymer sur-
factant selected from the group consisting of block poly-
mers of propylene oxide sandwiched between block poly-
mers of ethylene oxide in an amount of about 0.5 parts per
100 parts of rubber and block copolymers of ethylene
oxide and propylene oxide bonded to ethylenediamine in
an amount of from about 0.1 to about 0.5 parts, per 100
parts of rubber, and having a cloud point of less than 100°
C, in order to reduce the amount of pressure necessary for
the latex to bond to substances upon which it is applied.
HO
characterised in that a compound of formula
CCXDRi
RlO
in which Ri = H or a — Si(CH3)3 group, is reduced with hydra-
zine hydrate in the presence of an alkaline base and triethylene
glycol, and the product obtained, if Ri = — Si(CH3)3 is sub-
jected to acid hydrolysis.
4,379,096
COMPOUND CARBURETOR
Hiroshi Yokoyama; Tokuzi Ishida, both of Hamama*su; Kunio
Kikuchi, Odawara, and Kazuaki Zama, Chigasaki, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Suzuki Motor Co., Ltd., Hamana and
Mikuni Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, both of, Japan
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,486
Int. a.5 F02M 11/02
U.S. a. 261—23 A 7 Qaims
4,379,094
FERROSILOXANE THERMAL STABILIZERS FOR
DIORGANOPOLYSILOXANES
Gail D. DiSalvo, Greenwich, and James D. Reedy, New Fair-
field, both of Conn., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,613
Int. Q.3 C07F 15/02, 7/08
U.S. Q. 260—439 R 7 Claims
1. A ferrosiloxane compound of the formula:
Fe + ''(OSiRR'R");,(OCOR ")„ - X
wherein n has a value of 2 or 3; x has a value of 1 to 3 inclusive;
R, R', R" and R'" are individually are alkyl, alkaryl, alkenyl,
alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroatom substituted alkyl, cyclo-
alkyl or aryl group having from 1 to 25 carbon atoms; R' could
also be hydrogen or a siloxy group and wherein R" could also
be a siloxy or substituted siloxy group.
4. A process for subilizing diorganopolysiloxanes from heat
by adding an effective amount of a ferrosiloxane compound of
the formQla:
1. A compound carburetor comprising a primary bore pro-
vided therein with a primary throttle valve and branched in the
downstream part of said primary throttle valve to be respec-
tively connected to a plurality of cylinders of an engine to be
used, a secondary bore arranged adjacently to said primary
bore and branched in the downstream part to be respectively
connected to said plurality of cylinders through secondary
throttle valves arranged respectively for said plurality of cylin-
ders, and a plurality of secondary slow-running fuel systems set
respectively independently for said plurality of cylinders,
opened respectively in the vicinity of said respective second-
ary throttle valves and cooperating respectively with said
respective secondary throttle valves.
4,379,097
HYDROTHERAPY JET UNIT
Wilbur P. Leggett, 2189 Geronimo Way, Las Vegas, Nev. 89109
FUed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 249,892
Int. Q.3 BOIF 3/04
U.S. Q. 261—78 A H Claims
1. An improvement in a hydrotherapy jet unit for use under
submerged conditions comprising a cylindrical housing bear-
ing external threads throughout substantially its entire cylindri-
cal length, and provided with means for attaching said housing
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
to pipe means connected to a pressurized water source and by
separate and substantially parallel pipe means to ambient air,
said housing bearing an integral circular mounting flange at the
exit end of the cylindrical housing, said flange being of larger
diameter than said cylindrical housing to facilitate insertion of
said housing in a wall of a water-bearing vessel, said housing
containing a water-air mixing chamber into which air is in-
duced via said air pipe means and an axially aligned integral
plenum cavity, said housing further containing an expansion
chamber, a deflection nozzle cavity adjacent said expansion
chamber, a deflection nozzle mounted in the deflection nozzle
cavity, and a cover cap, whereby water and air which are
brought together and mixed in said water-air mixing chamber
are jetted through said housing at high velocity passing from
said water-air mixing chamber to said expansion chamber,
thence through said deflection nozzle and thence through an
opening in said cover cap.
I I 4,379,098
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION SHIELDING
COMPOSITES AND METHOD OF PRODUCTION
THEREOF
Anthony Gumienny, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to Transmet
Corporation, Columbus, Ohio
Filed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,671
Int. a.3 H05B 6/60; H02M 3/04
U.S. CI. 264—24 39 Qaims
175
1. A method of preparing an electromagnetic shielding com-
posite which exhibits high conductivity and low resistance
comprising:
providing a composite comprising an electrically conductive
material dispersed within a matrix material; and
applying an electrical potential difference across said com-
posite of sufficient magnitude to increase the conductivity
of the composite whereby an additional application of said
electrical potential difference will not further increase the
conductivity of the composite, and thereafter passing an
^ electrical current through the composite of sufficient
magnitude to further increase the conductivity of the
composite while maintaining the electrical potential dif-
ference at a value which does not exceed the value of the
electrical potential difference which was previously ap-
plied, said electrical current being of a value greater than
the value of any current which previously passed through
the composite during application of said electrical poten-
tial difference.
4,379,099
METHOD FOR PRODUHNG POLYESTER CONTAINER
Akiho Ota, Funabashi, and Fumio Negishi, Tokyo, both of Ja-
pan, assignors to Yoshino Kogyoabo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 150,662, May 16, 1980, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 19,913, Mar. 12, 1979, abuidoned.
This application Not. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,887
Qaims priority, application Japui, Jon. 29, 1978, 53-
89840[U]; Jul. 4, 1978, 53-81340; Oct. 9, 1978, 53-124303
Int. a.5B29C7 7/07
U.S. a. 264—25 6 Clainu
1. A method for producing a hollow bottle-shaped container
of biaxially oriented polyethylene terephthalate having a neck
section, a bottom section, and a body section extending be-
tween said neck section and bottom section from a preform
having a prefinished neck section with an annular radially
outwardly extending ledge at its lower end, said method com-
prising the steps:
heating only the neck section of said preform, including the
ledge, with a radiant heater at at least the glass transition
temperature for at least 2 minutes 30 seconds and thereaf-
ter cooling the neck section to increase the density of the
sphcrulitic texture only in the neck section to produce a
preform having a milky color only in the neck section
including the ledge and the remainder of the preform
being transparent; and thereafter
biaxially orienting in a mold said preform in the regions of
the preform below said ledge, including those immedi-
ately therebelow with no stretching in the neck section
including the ledge to form the hollow-shaped container
having a milky color only in the neck section including the
ledge and the remainder of the container being transpar-
ent.
4,379,100
POLYURETHANE MOLDING PROCESS WITH
SILOXANE INTERNAL RELEASE AGENT
Wayne C. Salisbury, Middleton, and Lee Hodaoa, BarringtoD,
both of N.H., assignors to Ex-Cell-O Corporation, Troy,
Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 230,896, Feb. 2, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 246,103
Int a.3 B28B 7/i6. 7/38
U.S. a. 264—39 10 Claims
1. A process wherein the ingredients for a polyurethane-
forming composition are brought together and reacted in a
mold cavity to form a molded article, said ingredients includ-
ing a polyol, an isocyanate and a normally liquid carboxy-func-
tional siloxane internal mold release agent (hereinafter, "said
CFS"), comprising:
I. dividing said ingredients into at least two components, viz:
(a) an isocyanate-containing component free of said CFS
(b) a polyol-containing component containing said CFS
and free of said isocyanate and free of material that will
react undesirably with said CFS;
m
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
II. preconditioning the surfaces of said moid cavity contact-
ing said ingredients by cleaning said surfaces and uni-
formly and thinly applying said CFS thereto, and repeat-
ing several molding cycles with intermittent cleaning and
reapplication of CFS as required;
> pc^rCL m'f HLO^*iU
'f^M>£POirf£a
1 srfp
1
- — r--"
104.0 I JUr
JUtriCLE
III. maintaining said CFS present in said ingredients in a
minimal amount sufficient to effect adequate release with
said preconditioning which minimal amount is inadequate
to maintain continued release in the absence of precondi-
tioning.
4,379,101
FORMING APPARATUS AND METHOD
Carl M. Smith, Oakville, Canada, assignor to Allen Industries,
Inc., Troy, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 156,437, Jan. 4, 1980, abandoned. This
application Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,106
Int. a.3 B29J 5/00
\5S. a. 264—40.3 9 Qaims
',23
-+
\^^.&msM0^
*'3l ^
49'
44' J
1. In a method of forming a pad construction of discon-
nected fibers comprising the steps of; randomly disposing said
fibers to define a web thereof; dispersing an adhesive material
throughout said fibers for bonding same up>on heating and
compressing said fibers and adhesive material; cutting said web
to define a workpiece; providing a press having a first and a
second platen supported for relative movement toward and
away from each other and a first and a second mold supported
by said first and second platen respectively; said molds having
forming surfaces which define the configuration of said pad
construction; supporting said workpiece between said forming
surfaces; heating said workpiece; and compressing said work-
piece between said forming surfaces; said heating step compris-
ing the steps of providing hot humid air and flowing said hot
humid air through said workpiece resulting in a rapid penetra-
tion and improved heating of said fibers and adhesive material
and thereby enabling comparatively high speed forming of said
pad construction with minimum forming pressure during said
compressing step; said flowing step comprising, flowing said
hot humid air through a first manifold in said flrst mold and
through a plurality of air passages in said flrst mold which
communicate with said flrst manifold with each air passage
terminating in an aperture in the forming surface of said flrst
mold, and receiving said hot humid air after passage thereof
through said workpiece in a plurality of apertures in the form-
ing surface of said second mold with said apertures in the
forming surface of said second mold communicating with
associated passages which in turn communicate with a second
manifold in said second mold; the improvement in which said
step of providing hot humid air comprises the step of mixing
ambient air and superheated steam; said mixing step compris-
ing mixing said superheated steam and ambient air employing
a control system which controls a control device for said steam
and a control device for said ambient air, and operating said
control device for said ambient air independently of the opera-
tion of said control device for said steam to purge said mani-
folds and said passages of water vapor and to tend to cool said
workpiece after said hot humid air has been provided through
said workpiece, initially operating said control device for said
ambient air and said control device for said steam to provide
said ambient air at a high volume and said steam at a low
volume to establish fluid flow through said workpiece before
said step of providing said hot humid air and starting while said
workpiece is being initially compressed between said forming
surfaces, said step of providing said hot humid air comprising
the step of operating said control device for said ambient air
and said control device for said steam to provide said ambient
air at a reduced volume from said high volume thereof and said
steam at an increased volume from said low volume thereof,
said step of operating said control device for said ambient air
independently of the operation of said control device for said
steam to purge comprising the step of again increasing the
volume of said ambient air to said high volume thereof
4,379,102
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING ELECTRIC WIRE
HAVING WIRE-ENAMEL-TYPE INSULATION
Eberhard Kertscher, Romanel, Switzerland, assignor to Mail-
lefer S.A., Ecublens, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 26,060, Apr. 2, 1979, abandoned, which
is a division of Ser. No. 811,362, Jun. 29, 1977, Pat. No.
4,165,957. This appUcation Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,755
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 1, 1976, 8446/76
Int. a? B29F 3/10
U.S. a. 264—40.7 6 Qaims
31 19 ?3 41
1. Method of manufacturing electric insulated wires for use
in magnetic windings for motors, transformers, and the like,
which wires comprise a metal core covered with an insulation
sheath having a predetermined diameter of a magnitude 10 to
100 micrometers greater than the diameter of the core for a
core diameter of 0. 1 to 4 mm, comprising the steps of
processing a synthetic resin having a melting point of at least
250° C. through a screw extruder with simultaneous heat-
ing of the resin to a temperature at least 30* C. higher than
said melting point to obtain said resin in a hydrostatic
liquid state,
forwarding said resin from said screw extruder into an extru-
sion head for feeding said head with said resin in said
hydrostatic liquid state and in a pressure comprised be-
tween 10 and 1000 bars, said head having at least one inlet
opening for receiving the metal core therein, at least one
outlet opening for delivering the insulated wire with the
said sheath thereon, and a distribution chamber of a fixed
size with static compression means, for bringing said resin
onto said core,
regulating said pressure to keep it at a constant value,
and travelling said core through said extrusion head at a
speed such that the resin is pulled along by the core.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
177
' 4^79,103
METHOD OF FORMING A FOAM RESIN CORE
STRUCTURE HAVING A SMOOTH COMPOSITE
REINFORCED INTEGRAL SKIN
Ralph G. Doerfling, Northville, Mich., assignor to Detroit Gas-
ket A Manufacturing Co., Detroit, Mich.
FUed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,740
Int. a.J B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264—45.5 8 Claims
(c) foaming such material to form a tire comprising the
annular, thin walled core having an annular covering of
IV s
-'\\\^\^V\V\V;Aff'v'N'A'x' ^ '^'x^
foamed, synthetic resinous material of generally cresce^t-
shaped radial cross section thereon; and
(d) removing said tire from the mold halves.
1. The method of forming a foam resin core structure having
a smooth composite reinforced integral skin, comprising the
following steps:
(a) inserting two pervious, absorbant, low density, flexible
sheets in an enclosed die assembly having opposed spaced
apart die surfaces and side surfaces, said die surfaces form-
ing an enclosed die cavity, said sheets positioned within
said die cavity in spaced apart relationship to one another
and generally parallel to said opposed spaced die surfaces,
and said opposed die surfaces having pressure relief open-
ings,
(b) injecting a fluid foamable thermosetting resin reaction
mixture under pressure into said enclosed die cavity and
into the space between said sheets, said reaction mixture
foaming and expanding or forcing said sheets against said
opposed spaced die surfaces, said sheets absorbing said
fluid thermosetting resin while permitting gas to escape
therethrough into said pressure relief openings, and said
resin saturating said sheets and forming a thin resin film on
the exterior surfaces of said sheets adjacet said opposed
spaced die surfaces, and
(c) curing said foamed thermosetting resin in said enclosed
die cavity, forming a thermoset resin foam core between
said sheets and a relatively smooth composite reinforced
integral skin on opposed sides of said core, said composite
reinforced integral skin comprising said absorbant sheets
soaked with thermosetting resin and a smooth external
film of resin.
4,379,104
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MOULDING A TIRE FOR A
WHEEL RIM
Arie Koorevaar, 630 Rivierdgk, 3371 EE Hardinxyeld-Giessen-
dam, Netherlands
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,872
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 21, 1980,
8001681
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264—45.5 12 Claims
1. The method of making a tire which comprises the steps of:
(a) providing an aimular mold cavity which is of generally
crescent shape in radial cross section by enclosing with
abutment of the cavity defined rim portion a thin walled
annular core between mold halves which define a toroidal
space therebetween, said core being formed of synthetic
resinous material;
(b) introducing foamable synthetic resinous material into
said mold cavity in amount sufficient to fill said cavity
completely when such material has foamed;
4,379,105
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF ELASTIC
SHAPED ARTICLES
Ronald P. Taylor, Coraopolis, and Barry A. Phillips, Slovan,
both of Pa., assignors to Mobay Chemical Corporation, Pitts-
burgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 170,426, Jul. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,222
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264—45.5 12 Qaims
1. A process for the production of optionally cellular, elastic,
shaped articles having an impervious surface layer of polyure-
thane-polyurea elastomers by reacting a reaction mixture com-
prising:
(A) an organic polyisocyanate;
(B) an ethylene oxide-tipped difunctional or higher func-
tional polyoxyalkylene polyol having a hydroxy! number
of from about 22 to about 35 and a total ethylene oxide
content of from about 12 to about 22% by weight, based
on the total amount of alkylene oxide present in said ethyl-
ene oxide-tipped polyol;
(C) a propylene oxide-tipped difunctional or higher func-
tional polyoxyalkylene polyol conuining oxyethylene
segments in the internal block of the polyol in a quantity of
from 15 to 60% by weight, based on the total amount of
alkylene oxide present in said propylene oxide-tipped
polyol, and having a hydroxy] number of from about 22 to
about 35;
(D) a catalyst; | ||
(E) an aromatic amine chain extender, said amine being
miscible with components (B) and (C), in any proportion,
and optionally;
(F) blowing agents, surfactants and/or fiow enhancing
agents;
said reaction mixture being processed as one-shot systems by
the reaction injection molding technique (RIM process) and
said reactants being used in quantities corresponding to an
isocyanate index of from 70 to 130, further characterized in
that (i) the polyols (B) and (C) are used in a weight ratio less
than or equal to 5: 1 , and (ii) the composition and proportions of
(B) and (C) are selected such that the total concentration of
oxyethylene groups in the final polyurethane is from about 7 to
about 14% by weight.
178
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^79,106
METHOD OF EXPANDING HEAT EXPANDABLE
THERMOPLASTIC ELEMENTS WITH STEAM AND A
HORIZONTAL EXPANDER WTTH A FEED NEAR THE
BOTTOM FOR EXPANDING THE HEAT EXPANDABLE
ELEMENT
Harry Bussey, Jr., P.O. Box 115, Serpentine Rd., Navesink,
N.J. 07752
FUed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,697
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00; F27B 9/18
U.S. Q. 264—51 32 Claims
4,379,108
STRENGTHENING PHOSPHATE SHALE BRIQUETTES
James A. Robertson, Leirittown, Pa., assignor to FMC Corpora-
tion, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 122,099
Int a.' C04B 35/64
U.S. a. 264->56 8 Claims
1. The methcxl of producing phosphate shale agglomerates
of enhanced strength which comprises adding to and mixing
with crushed phosphate shale ore, the crushed ore containing
from about 20% to about 30% by weight P2O5 and including
particles varying in size from fmes up to about \ inch, temper-
ing water and a water-soluble alkali metal or ammonium phos-
phate, the amount of water being sufficient to bring the mois-
ture content of the mixture between 9 and about 12%, the
water-soluble phosphate being added in an amount up to about
0.1% by weight of the phosphate shale, compacting the mix-
ture to form green briquettes, calcining the green briquettes at
a temperature of from about 2,000* F. (1,095* C.) to about
2,500' F. (1,375° C.) and recovering the calcined briquettes.
1. A method of expanding heat expandable thermoplastic
elements, said method comprising the steps of
feeding a supply of heat expandable thermoplastic elements
into a horizontally disposed chamber near the bottom
dead center of the chamber at one axial end thereof to
maintain the chamber in a substantially filled condition;
agitating the elements in the chamber while conveying the
elements towards an outlet at an opposite end of the cham-
ber; and
passing a heated medium upwardly into the chamber for
heating and expanding the elements therein during con-
veyance toward the outlet.
4,379,109
METHOD OF PREPARING A MONOLITHIC
STRUCTURE HAVING FLOW CHANNELS
Edgar A. Simpson, Sevema Park, Md., assignor to W. R. Grace
A Co., New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 2, 1978, Ser. No. 874,584
Int. a.3 C04B 39/12
U.S. a. 264—60 8 Claims
4,379,107
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE CONTINUOUS
PRODUCnON OF A UNIFORM SLAB OR SHEET FROM
HEAT EXPANDABLE THERMOPLASTIC PARTICLES
Rolf E. Berner, R.D. #6, Box 1444, New Castie, Pa. 16103
FUed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,281
Int. Q\? B29D 27/00: B29C 29/00
U.S. a. 264—51 13 Oaims
1. A method for producing a continuously molded thermo-
plastic sheet from heat expandable granules in a heated zone
within a molding channel comprising:
a. introducing water into said molding channel to cause said
granules to adhere to one another; and
b. introducing a hot gas into contact with said wetted gran-
ules td^sxpand said granules into said thermoplastic sheet.
1. A method of preparing a ceramic monolithic structure
having a plurality of flow channels comprising
(a) shaping a substantially uniform mixture of a composition
comprising a ceramic powder, an organic thermoplastic
binder, and a plasticizer to form flat sheets;
(b) forming a series of ribs on a first side of at least a poriion
of the sheets;
(c) extracting the plasticizer from the sheets to form sheets
comprising the ceramic powder and the organic thermo-
plastic binder;
(d) applying a ceramic cement composition to the ribs or to
the second side of the extracted sheets;
(e) positioning the sheets in a layered structure such that the
ceramic cement composition is in adhesive contact with a
surface of the adjacent sheet; and
(0 firing the layered structure to sinter the ceramic powder
and the cement composition and to decompose the binder.
4,379,110
SINTERING OF SILICON NITRIDE TO HIGH DENSITY
Charles D. Greskovich, Schenectady; John A. Palm, Jonesville,
and Svante Prochazlu, Ballston Lake, all of N. Y., assignors to
General Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 65,121, Aug. 9, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,707
Int. Q\? C04B 35/58
U A a. 264—65 5 Claims
1. A method of producing a high density pre-shaped sintered
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
179
polycrystalline silicon nitride body which consists essentially
of providing at least a significantly homogeneous dispersion
having an average particle size which is submicron of silicon
nitride, oxygen and a beryllium additive, said beryllium addi-
tive being selected from the group consisting of beryllium,
beryllium oxide, beryllium carbide, beryllium fluoride, beryl-
lium nitride, beryllium silicon nitride and mixtures thereof, said
beryllium additive being used in an amount wherein the beryl-
lium component is equivalent to from about 0. 1 % by weight to
about 2% by weight of elemental beryllium based on the
amount of silicon nitride, shaping said dispersion into a com-
pact, said compact containing oxygen in an amount ranging
from about 1.4% weight to about 7% by weight of said silicon
nitride, said compact containing increasing amounts of said
oxygen with increasing amounts of said beryllium component,
said compact containing about 7% by weight oxygen for an
equivalent amount Of said elemental beryllium of about 2% by
COHDITIOMS WMCKC SKHTAMCOUS
xcoitPOSiTioti Of Silicon
uirmoe occuns
SI,N„,.SI,.,.SI,„.SI,.|.N„
SI|.i*Sl..l"«!i,i
weight, and initially first sintering said compact at a tempera-
ture ranging from about 1900' C. to about 2100' C. in a sinter-
ing atmosphere of nitrogen at supra atmospheric pressure until
at least the pores in the entire outside surface of the compact
are closed making such sintered surface impermeable to nitro-
gen gas, said nitrogen pressure during said first sintering rang-
ing from a minimum of about 10 atmospheres at a sintering
temperature of about 1900* C. to a pressure of about 37 atmo-
spheres at a sintering temperature of about 2100' C, and then
secondly sintering said compact at a temperature ranging from
about 1800' C. to about 2100* C. under a pressure of nitrogen
ranging from about two times to about four times the value of
said first sintering pressure thereby yielding a sintered body
with a density ranging from about 95% to about 100%, said
nitrogen being at super-atmospheric pressure which at said
sintering temperatures prevents significant thermal decomposi-
tion of said silicon nitride the maximum pressure of said nitro-
gen in said second intering being lower than 100 atmospheres.
4^79,111
METHOD FOR PRODUCING CHROMIUM OXIDE
COATED REFRACTORY FIBERS
Rnssell D. Smith, Grand bland, N.Y., and Richard E. Tressler,
Julian, Pa^ assignors to Kennecott Corporation, Stamford,
Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 41,033, May 21, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Jnl. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,652
Int a? B32B 9/00: BOSD 3/02; B29G 5/00
MS. a. 264—137 5 Claims
1. A method for uniformly coating a ceramic fiber to in-
crease the shrink resistance of the ceramic fiber comprising
spraying a solution containing from about 0.1 to about 20
weight percent chromium ion upon the fiber at a fiber tempera-
ture of about 350* C. to the melting temperature of the fiber to
form a fiber having increased shrink resistance, said spraying
occurring during fiberization prior to initial cooling.
4,379,112
METHOD FOR MAKING A REINFORCED ELASTOMER
PISTON PACKING
George E. Helkes, Jr., and Claude L. Henderson, both of Den-
ver, Colo., assignora to The Gates Rubber Company, DenTer,
Colo.
Division of Ser. No. 92,406, Not. 8, 1979, Pat No. 4,280,709.
This appUcation Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,999
Int a.3 B29H 9/04
U.S. a. 264-159 , 2 Claims
of:
1. A method for making piston rubbers comprising the steps
f:
wrapping a length of rubberized thread fabric several times
around a mandrel and over itself in volute fashion to
define a plied sleeve having a desired radial thickness with
side portions of the thread fabric at an outer generally
cylindrical surface of the sleeve;
radially cutting the sleeve into a plurality of bands having
desired widths;
positioning the bands and elastomeric material in mold cavi-
ties of generally cylindrical piston rubber shape so that
portions of the thread fabric at the outer generally cylin-
drical portion of the sleeve are juxtaposed a mold surface
portion having the cylindrical piston rubber shape;
pressurizing, heating, curing and molding the bands and
elastomeric material together to defme piston rubbers
while leaving side portions of the thread fabric at an
exterior portion of the piston rubbers to defme wear-resist-
ant surfaces.
I
• I
4,379,113
MELT SPINNING PROCESS FOR ACRYLONTTRILE
POLYMER FIBER-THREE OR MORE STRETCH STAGES
Chi C. Young, and Francesco DeMaria, both of Gulf Breeze,
Fla., assignora to American Cyanamid Company, Stamford,
Conn.
FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,612
Int a.3 DOIF 7/00
U.S. a. 264—206 7 Claims
1. In a process for preparing an acrylonitrile polymer fiber
wherein a single phase fusion melt of acrylonitrile polymer and
water is extruded through a spinnerette directly into a steam-
pressurized solidification zone maintained under conditions of
saturation, pressure and temperature which control the rate of
release of water from the nascent extrudate and maintain the
nascent extrudate in a stretchable state and stretching the
extrudate while it remains within said solidification zone, the
improvement which comprises conducting the stretching in at
least three stretch stages, the first stage being conducted at a
stretch ratio in the range of about 1 . 1 to 10 relative to the linear
speed of the fusion melt through the spinerette, the second and
third stages being conducted at a total stretch ratio greater
than that of the first stage and the third and any subsequent
stages being conducted at a stretch ratio that reduces steam
pressure requirements for fiber relaxation.
180
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April S, 1983
4^79,114
METHOD OF JOINING WATERPROOF SHEETS, AND
THEIR JOINT STRUCTURE
Toshiaki Fi^iki; Hikani Kano, both of Kobe, and Tom Nishi,
Nishinomiya, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsuboshi Belting
Limited, Hyogo, Japan
FUed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,348
Int. a.3 B29C 24/00. 27/00. 15/00
U.S. a. 264—248 8 Claims
faces of said enlargement during said constraining step and
said axially applying step.
1. A method for joining edges of two sheets together, com-
prising: disposing a cure tape, which will flow under heat and
pressure and is heat curable, between overlapping edge por-
tions of the sheets to be joined, said tape having a width which
is substantially equal to that of said overlapping edge portions,
positioning said edge portions with said cure tape between
pressing members with a resilient cushion between one of said
sheets and one of said members, applying heat and pressure to
said sheets and the interposed cure tape causing said cure ta]}e
to flow, thereby resulting a gently curved joint between said
two sheets free from any acutely stepped portion, said cushion
being deformed when said pressure is applied so as to form a
shaping cavity for the joint therein.
4,379,115
PIPE SOCKET FORMING
Barry G. Seach, Castle Hill; Hans Miiller, Seven Hills, and
Solomon E. Cohen, Eastwood, aU of Australia, assignors to
James Hardie ft Coy, Ply. Limited, New South Wales, Aus-
tralia
Division of Ser. No. 201,545, Mar. 14, 1979. This application
Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,102
Qaims priority, application Australia, Mar. 20, 1978, PD3758
Int. a.3 B29D 23/00
U.S. O. 26*— 296 6 Claims
1. A method of forming a socket on an end portion of a pipe
in a plastically deformable condition, comprising the steps of:
expanding the end portion of the pipe to form a cylindrical
enlargement having a diameter greater than that of the
remainder of the pipe;
externally constraining said enlargement by enclosing it
within a contour die formed as an envelope having the
external shape required of the socket;
applying an axially directed loading to the ends of said
enlargement for reducing the length of said enlargement
and for preventing wall thickness reduction thereof; and
forming the socket by applying pressure radially outwardly
against interior surfaces of said enlargement and by con-
currently circumferentially trowelling the interior sur-
4,379,116
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
POLYVINYLBUTYRAL SHEETING AND ADHESION
CONTROL
Robert E. Moynihan, Lowell, Ohio, assignor to E. I. Du Pont dc
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,117
Int a.3 B29B 1/04
U.S. a. 264—349 6 Claims
1. In a process for the preparation of polyvinylbutyral sheet-
ing comprising admixing an aqueous slurry of polyvinylbutyral
and a compatible quantity of plasticizer, removing at least part
of the water from the aqueous slurry and extruding the result-
ing admixture in the form of a sheet, the improvement which
comprises adding to the admixture, after water removal and
prior to extrusion, about from 10 to 1,000 ppm of at least one
metal carboxylate of the formula M(C02R)2 wherein M is
magnesium or calcium and R is CH3 or hydrogen.
4,379,117
METHOD FOR PREPARING A nLM OF VINYLIDENE
CHLORIDE POLYMER
William G. Baird, Jr., Winchesten Stanley E. Holbrook, South
Acton, and Jeremy A. Piatt, Cambridge, all of Mass., assign-
ors to W. R. Grace A Co., Duncan, S.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 460,855, Apr. 15, 1974, Pat. No.
4,048,428, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 114,692, Feb. 11,
1971, Pat. No. 3,821,182, which is a division of Ser. No. 590,107,
Jun. 2, 1966, abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 157,194,
Dec. 5, 1961, abandoned. This application Mar. 1, 1976, S^r. No.
662,662
Int. a.3 B29D 23/01. 23/04
U.S. a. 264—514 10 Claims
1. A process for production of fUm of hot-tacky thermoplas-
tic material by the blown fllm process, which material is tacky
to the extent that in production thereof by the blown film
process, wherein a tube of the material is independently ex-
truded, the extruded tube is inflated and thereafter flattened
with squeeze rollers so that walls of the tubing are superim-
posed, the superimposed walls become bonded together,
which comprises extruding two tubes, one outside the other to
produce a two ply tube comprising an inner ply and an outer
ply, inflating the two ply tube, and thereafter flattening the
two ply tube with squeeze rollers, and removing the flattened
two ply tube from the squeeze rollers, the outer ply being said
hot-tacky thermoplastic material, and the inner ply being a
tack-free thermoplastic material.
7. A process for production of a multi-ply film of a copoly-
mer of vinylidene chloride by the blown film process, which
copolymer is tacky to the extent that in production thereof by
the blown film process, wherein a tube of the copolymer is
independently extruded, inflated and thereafter flattened with
squeeze rollers so that walls of the tube are superimposed, the
superimposed walls become bonded together, which com-
prises extruding at least two tubes, one outer to the other to
APRll. 5. 1983
CHEMICAL
181
produce a multi-ply tube comprising an inner ply and an outer
ply, mflating the multi-ply tube, and thereafter flattening the
multi-ply tube with squeeze rollers, and removing the flattened
multi-ply tube from the squeeze rollers, the outer ply being a
copolymer of vinylidene chloride, and the inner ply being a
tack-free thermoplastic material.
4,379,118
PROCESS FOR MEASURING A CONTINUOUS
NEUTRON FLUX AND MEASURING APPARATUS FOR
CARRYING OUT THIS PROCESS
Michel Roche, Dijon, France, assignor to Commissariat a I'En-
ergie Atomique, Paris, France
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,427
Claims priority, application France, Sep. 21, 1979, 79 23514
Int. CI.' G21C 17/00
U.S. CI. 376—154 9 Qaims
3-fO
3i2 3H S30 i 226
324
320
1. Process for measuring a continuous neutron flux, compris-
ing the steps of:
disposing in the neutron flux a probe comprising a first part
defining an enclosure and a second part disposed inside the
enclosure and constituted by an electrical resistor previously
calibrated in order to know the variation thereof as a func-
tion of the temperature, the electrical resistor being sepa-
rated from the enclosure by a medium whose heat conduc-
tance is known and one of said parts being made at least
partially of a fissile material whilst the other part is made of
inert material,
measuring said electrical resistor to yield the temperature of
the second part and measuring the temperature of the first
part of the probe, and
establishing from the difference in the temperatures measured
at equilibrium between the two parts of the probe and the
corresponding value of the heat conductance of the medium,
the power continuously released by the part made of fissile
material.
4,379,119
APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING CORE CONSTITUTING
ELEMENTS IN NUCLEAR REACTOR CORE
Shigeru Fujimoto, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 207,010 I
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 20, 1979, 54-149574
Int. CI.' G21C 9/00
U.S. a. 376—302 2 Claims
So 96 9q ?Q 'b r
sr^z? r-
1. Apparatus for supporting a nuclear reactor core compris-
1029 O.G.
ing a support frame for supporting core elements and a friction
damper through which said support frame is secured to an
inner wall of a reactor vessel, said friction damper comprising
first and second cylindrical members which are loosely tele-
scoped with each other and a ring spring disposed in said
cylindrical members, said first cylindrical member being con-
nected to said support frame and comprising a first cylindrical
portion having an open end facing said inner wall of the reac-
tor vessel, a shaft portion concentric with said first cylindrical
portion and extending through said open end, and an annular
head mounted on a protruded end of said shaft portion, said
second cylindrical member being secured to said inner wall of
the reactor vessel and comprising a second cylindrical portion
and a cylindrical chamber connected to an inside of said sec-
ond cylindrical portion through a partition wall which is pro-
vided with a through hole having a diameter less than that of
said annular head, said annular head being positioned inside of
said cylindrical chamber, said ring spring being arranged
within said first and second cylindrical portions about said
shaft portion.
4,379,120
SULFIDATION RESISTANT NICKEL-IRON BASE
ALLOY
C. Raymond Whitney, and Andrew R. Walsh, both of Reading,
Pa., assignors to Carpenter Technology Corporation, Reading,
Pa.
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,681
Int. CI.' C22C 19/05
U.S. a. 420—448 4 Oaims
1. An austenitic nickel-iron base alloy resistant to sulfidation
at elevated temperatures of about 1200-1500 P., which has
good hot strength and stress rupture life at elevated tempera-
tures up to about 1500 F. when heat treated, as well as thermal
stability as indicated by freedom from the formation of more
than 10 v/o chromium-rich alpha phase when exposed to
temperatures of from about 1200-1500 F. for about 1500 hours,
said alloy consisting essentially by weight of about
C
Mn
Si
P
S
w/o
0.02-0.08
2 Max.
0.25 Max.
0.03 Max.
0.03 Max.
Ni
52-60
Mo
1-3.5
Ti
1.75-3.25
^
A!
0.75-2.25
Cb
0.50-2
B
up to 0.02
the balance being essentially iron, and said alloy being bal-
anced so as to have an average electron-vacancy number Nv
not greater than 2.50. |
4,379,121
BRAZING RLLER METAL COMPOSITION AND
PROCESS
John H. McMurray, Stratford, and Jule Miller, Derby, both of
Conn., assignors to Avco Corporation, Stratford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,794
Int. a.' C22C 19/05
U.S. a. 420—452 2 Oaims
1. A brazing filler metal composition comprising, by weight,
from about 3.0% to about 4.0% chromium; from about 1.0% to
about 2.0% boron; from about 2.0% to about 2.5% silicon;
from about 1.0% to about 2.0% iron; from about 5.0% to about
6.0% phosphorus; a maximum of about 0.06% carbon; and the
remainder nickel.
182
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,122
MIXING HEAD FOR REACTIVE COMPONENTS
Peter Taub«nmann, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Krauss-Maffei Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, l^ed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,945
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 13,
1980 3005231
Int. a.3 BOIF 5/04. 15/02. 17/00: BOIJ 13/00
U.S. Q. 422—133 6 Qaims
4,379,123
FLUID CATALYST CONVERSION OF ALCOHOLS AND
OXYGENATES TO HYDROCARBONS
Nicholas Daviduk, Pennington, and James H. Haddad, Prince-
ton Junction, both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 89,706, Oct. 30, 1979, Pat. No. 4,238,631.
This application Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 176,830
Int. a.3 BOIJ 8/28, 8/26; C07C 1/20
U.S. a. 422—142 3 Qaims
ID.- "
1. A mixing head for two reactive components comprising:
housing means forming a mixing chamber and having re-
spective inlets suppUed with said components and adapted
to open into a mold cavity;
a control member displaceable in said housing means be-
tween a first position wherein flow from said inlets into
said chamber is blocked and residual mixtures of said
components are displaced from said chamber, and a sec-
ond position wherein flow from said inlets into said cham-
ber is unblocked, said control member defining passages
for recirculating said compartments from said inlets in said
first position of said control member;
a first cylinder arrangement including a piston operatively
connected to said control member and hydraulically actu-
atable to shift said control member between said positions;
a displacement body laterally shiftable into and out of said
chamber for controlling the mixing of said components
thereof;
a second cylinder arrangement having a piston connected to
said body and hydraulically operable to shift said body
into said chamber;
a third cylinder arrangement mounted on said housing
means and having a piston positioned for mechanical
displacement by the piston of said first cylinder upon
movement of said member from said first position to said
second position to displace hydraulic fiuid from said third
cylinder arrangement; and
a duct connecting said second and third cylinder arrange-
ments whereby the movement of the piston of said third
cylinder arrangement induces movement of the piston of
said second cylinder arrangement, and independent of the
hydraulic operation of said first cylinder arrangement, for
establishing hydraulic fluid communication therebetween
for shifting said body into said chamber upon movement
of said member from said first position »o said second
position and for withdrawing said body from said cham-
ber upon movement of said member from said second
position toward said first position.
15 f' «
1. An apparatus for converting reactants comprising lower
alcohols and related oxygenates in the presence of fluid cata-
lyst particles to Cioand lower boiling hydrocarbons including
LPG and gaoline-boiling components comprising:
a relatively large diameter reactor vessel provided with a
perforated grid means across a lower cross-section
thereof, a fluid bed of catalyst particles above said grid
means and a plurality of vertical elongated tubular baffle
means arranged within said bed of catalyst, said tubular
baffle means being provided with a plurality of openings
in the walls thereof sufficient to provide cross-flow of
catalyst particles through said tubular baffle means and
restrict reactant bubble growth within desired limits,
a riser reactor in open communication with the bottom of
said large diameter reactor vessel beneath said grid means,
a plurality of satellite stripping-cooling chambers adjacent
said large reactor vessel, each of said chambers provided
with a catalyst transfer conduit between said fluid bed of
catalyst and said stripping-cooling chamber, a gaseous
material transfer conduit communicating between the top
of said stripping-cooling chamber and said large diameter
vessel above the upper level of the bed of catalyst therein,
conduit means communicating between the bottom of said
stripping-cooling chambers and the lower portion of said
riser reactor, means for charging vaporous reactant mate-
rial to a lower portion of said riser reactor, means for
charging stripping gas to a lower portion of said stripping-
cooling chambers beneath indirect heat exchange means
therein, and
means for withdrawing reaction product material from an
upper portion of said large diameter reactor vessel.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
183
4,379,124 floor of the dissolving chamber, the dissolving chamber has an
REACTOR MADE FROM STEEL WITH PARTICULARLY elongate layout and at least one vertical or inclined screen
HIGH RESISTANCE TO THE EFFECTS OF OXO
SYNTHESIS AND METHOD OF PREPARING STEEL
FOR USE IN CONSTRUCTING AN OXO REACTOR
Raymond Fouquet, Paris, France, assignor to Produits Chi-
miques Ugine Kuhlmann, Courbevoie, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 60,872, Jul. 26, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,680
Qaims priority, application France, Sep. 1, 1978, 78 25261
Int. a.3 BOIJ 79/02 jng
U.S. a. 422— 240 Saaims Vl ^l-';^':--^--^; ^ ■•■■■;;; ^-J^r^'^^
1. An OXO reactor for carrying out oxo synthesis comprising:
a. vertical tubes,
b. means coupling the tops and bottoms of said vertical
tubes, said tubes and coupling means being formed of steel
having a Brinell hardness of less than 300 and including in
said steel 1-6% chromium and 0.4-0.7% molybdenum,
c. inlet means for introducing the oxo reagents into the
reactor and structured to result in immediate mixing of
said reagents introduced into the reactor, and
d. the steel used in making said coupling means being differ-
ent from the steel used in making said vertical tubes and
having a higher chromium content.
6. A method of constructing an oxo synthesis reactor com-
prising vertical tubes and means coupling the tops and bottoms
of said tubes, said method comprising the steps of:
a. forming said vertical tubes and coupling means of steel
with a Brinell hardness of less than 300,
b. including in said steel 1-6% chromium and 0.4-0.7%
molybdenum, and
c. the steel used in making said coupling means being differ-
ent from the steel used in making said vertical tubes and
having a higher chromium content.
4,379,125
APPARATUS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF AQUEOUS
SOLUTIONS OF SODIUM CHLORIDE FROM ROCK
SALT
Siegfried Benninger, Schwalbach; Karl Reining, Kelkheim, and
Werner Krasel, Hofheim am Taunus, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am
Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 240,317, Mar. 4, 1981, Pat. No. 4,343,621.
This application Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,167
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 6,
1980, 3008563
Int. a.3 BOID 11/02
U.S. a. 422—274 24 Qaims
1. Apparatus for the production, free from vapors, of con-
centrated, aqueous sodium chloride crude brine, comprising a
dissolving chamber for dissolving rock salt which is equipped
with appliances for feeding in brine which is unsaturated in
respect of salt and for removing saturated crude brine, wherein
pipes for the admission of unsaturated brine are installed on the
which is permeable by brine, but not by rock salt and which
delimits a salt-free space in the dissolving chamber, is instaNed
longitudinally in the dissolving chamber.
Ill
4,379,126
PROCESS FOR RECOVERING TUNGSTEN VALUES
FROM ALKALI SOLUTIONS
Tai K. Kim; Joseph E. Ritsko; Martin B. Maclnnis< and Martin
C. Vogt, all of Towanda, Pa., assignors to GTE Products
Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,376
Int. a.3 COIG 41/00
U.S. a. 423—54 , 1 Qaim
^=1-
>>
?^^^^,
i;i
I
KOHC H lOL'N O*
1. A continuous process for producing ammonium tungstate
from an aqueous alkali metal tungstate solution and reduciing
the concentration of alkali metal impurities in ammonium
tungstate produced comprising the steps of: (a) extracting
tungsten values into an organic extractant by contacting said
aqueous alkali metal tungstate solution with said organic ex-
tractant for a sufficient period of time to form a loaded organic
extractant containing tungsten values and an aqueous solution,
said organic extractant comprising: a high molecular weight
tertiary alkyl amine and an water insoluble aliphatic organic
solvent, (b) separating said loaded organic extractant from said
aqueous solution, (c) stripping said loaded organic extractant
from step b by contacting with an aqueous ammonia solution to
form an aqueous ammonium tungstate solution and a stripped
organic extractant, (d) separating said aqueous ammonium
tungstate from said stripped organic extractant, (e) washing
said stripped organic extractant to remove a portion of alkali
metal impurities and (0 contacting said stripped organic ex-
tractant with activated carbon for removing additional alkali
metal impurities, (g) feeding said stripped organic extractant
from step (e) to step (a) for use as said organic extractant.
184
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,127
METHOD OF RECOVERING MOLYBDENUM OXIDE
Giinter Bauer, Fiirth, and Joachim Eckert, Zirndorf, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to GfE Geseilschaft fUr
Elektrometallurgie mbH, Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,845
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 22,
1981, 3128921
Int. a.' COIG 39/02
U.S. a. 423—55 2 Claims
1. A method of producing molybdenum oxide which com-
prises the steps of:
(a) forming an aqueous suspension of a molybdenum sulfide
impurity-containing concentrate having a particle size of
substantially 70 microns;
(b) subjecting the suspension produced in step (a) to an
elevated oxygen partial pressure and an elevated tempera-
ture m an autoclave to oxidize the molybdenum sulfide to
molybdenum oxide and produce another suspension, and
maintaining the suspension density during oxidation
within a range between 100 and 150 g of solids per liter;
(c) filtering said other suspension to recover molybdenum
oxide therefrom and produce a first filtrate containing
sulfuric acid;
(d) neutralizing said first filtrate at least partially by adding
lime or limestone thereto to produce a third suspension
containing calcium sulfate;
(e) filtering said third suspension to recover calcium sulfate
and produce a second filtrate;
(0 recirculating said second filtrate to step (a) as the sole
recirculated liquid and at a rate sufficient to maintain the
suspension density of the suspension entering step (b)
between substantially 100 and 150 g of solids per liter; and
(g) controlling the temperature in said autoclave to maintain
it between 230° C. and 245° C. and maintaining the pres-
sure in said autoclave by varying said suspension density
within said range.
4,379,128
PHOSPHOROUS-DOPED ALKALI TANTALUM DOUBLE
FLUORIDES
Reinhard Hahn, Goslar, and Dieter Behrens, Bad Harzburg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hermann C.
Starck Berlin, Goslar, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,991
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 2,
1980, 3005207
Int. C\? COIB 9/08
U.S. a. 423—63 7 Claims
1. In the process of producing a K2TaF7 double salt compris-
ing the steps of extracting an an elevated temperature an or-
ganic solution of H2TaF7 with an aqueous extraction solution
of a potassium salt to form said K2TaF7, said aqueous solution
being immiscible with said organic solution, followed by crys-
tallization and separation of said K2TaF7 from said aqueous
extraction solution, the improvement wherein a selected
amount of a phosphorous-containing compound is added to
said aqueous extraction solution after said extraction step and
before crystallization of said K2TaF7 whereby a phosphorous-
doped K2TaF7 double salt is provided, the amount of phospho-
rous containing comf>ound added to said extraction solution
being selected such that the phosphorous content of said doped
double salt is between about 50 and 500 ppm, by weight.
4,379,129
METHOD OF DECOMPOSING OZONE
Akira Abe, Minami-ashigara, Japan, assignor to Fuji Xerox Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 794,151, May 5, 1977, abandoned. This
application Nov. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,770
Claims priority, application Japan, May 6, 1976, 51-50930
Int. CV BOID 53/36
U.S. a. 423—210 11 Qaims
1. A process for decomposing ozone discharged from an
electrophotographic duplicating machine, which comprises
contacting the discharged ozone with a catalyst comprising
active carbon with silver deposited on the surface thereof.
4,379,130
PROCESS FOR REGENERATING SCRUBBING
SOLUTIONS
Jack D. Brady, Fayetteville, Ga., assignor to Andersen 2000
Inc., Atlanta, Ga.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,778
Int. a.3 COIB 77/00
U.S. CI. 423—242 12 Claims
1. A method of regenerating an aqueous solution containing
sodium sulfite and sodium bisulfite comprising the steps of:
(a) introducing calcium oxide in the form of pebble lime into
the solution containing the sodium sulfite and sodium
bisulfite;
(b) impinging substantially all of the pebble lime in the solu-
tion and the solution against an impingement surface to
mechanically remove any film of calcium sulfite formed
on the surface of the pebble lime so that substantially all of
the calcium oxide in the pebble lime reacts with the solu-
tion to convert the sodium bisulfite to sodium sulfite and
form an aqueous slurry containing dissolved sodium sul-
fite, solid calcium sulfite and the unreacted residue of the
pebble lime whereby the unreacted residue enhances the
settling rate of the solids in the slurry; and
(c) separating the solid calcium sulfite from the slurry by
settling the slurry to form a regenerated aqueous solution
having a reduced sodium bisulfite concentration.
10. A process for removing gaseous sulfur oxides from a gas
stream by contacting the gas stream with a circulating aqueous
scrubbing solution containing sodium sulfite, sodium bisulfite
and sodium sulfate so that the sulfur oxides react with the
sodium sulfite in the scrubbing solution to increase the sodium
bisulfite content, said process comprising the steps of:
monitoring the density of the scrubbing solution;
withdrawing a portion of the circulation scrubbing solution
in response to the increase in density of the scrubbing
solution to a storage tank;
when the withdrawn portion of the scrubbing solution in the
storage tank reaches a prescribed starting level, transfer-
ring the scrubbing solution from the storage tank to a
reactor vessel at a substantially constant flow rate;
introducing calcium oxide in the form of pebble lime into the
scmbbing solution in the reactor vessel for reaction with
the scrubbing solution;
repeatedly impinging substantially all of the pebble lime and
scrubbing solution in the reactor vessel against an im-
pingement surface in the reactor vessel to mechanically
remove any film of calcium sulfite formed on the surface
of the pebble lime as the solution reacts with the calcium
oxide in the pebble lime so that substantially all of the
pebble lime reacts with the solution to form an aqueous
slurry containing increased sodium sulfite content, solid
calcium sulfite and the unreacted residue of the pebble
lime whereby the settling rate of the slurry is greatly
enhanced;
withdrawing the aqueous slurry from the reactor vessel at
substantially the same flow rate as the scrubbing solution
is transferred to the reactor vessel;
forcing the withdrawn aqueous slurry through a plate type
settler so that the solid calcium sulfite in the aqueous
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
18S
slurry settles by gravity to produce a concentrated slurry
at the lower end of the settler and a substantially solids
free aqueous solution at the upper end of the settler;
withdrawing the solids free aqueous solution from the upper
end of the settler as an overflow;
withdrawing the concentrated slurry from the lower end of
the settler as an underflow;
filtering the concentrated slurry in a rotary vacuum filter
and recovering the substantially solids free aqueous solu-
tion produced as a filtrate;
combining the substantially solids free aqueous solution
withdrawn from the settler with the substantially solids
free aqueous solution from the rotary vacuum filter to
produce a regenerated scrubbing solution with a reduced
sodium bisulfate concentration; and
returning the regenerated scrubbing solution to the circulat-
ing scrubbing solution.
4,379,131
PRODUCTION OF PHOSPHORUS PENTOXIDE WITH
UTILIZATION OF REACTION HEAT
Hellmuth Daniel, Erftstadt; Robert Queck, Hiirth-Burbach;
Bernhard Kuxdorf, Briihl, and Herbert Piische, Erftstadt, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,159
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 3,
1980, 3033109
Int. a.3 COIB 25/12
U.S. CI. 423—304 8 Claims
O'
kii
« t
i-©^
1. In the process for making phosphorus pentoxide by sub-
jecting elementary phosphorus to a combustion reaction with
the aid of dried air inside a combustion chamber of which the
metallic walls are arranged so as to form a cooling system with
cavities therein; circulating a cooling medium through the
cooling system for taking up the reaction heat, the improve-
ment which comprises subjecting the phosphorus to combus-
tion with dried air containing, per m^, 5 g down to 0.01 g of
water; circulating a liquid or liquid/steam-mixture through the
cooling system under pressures within the range of 1 to 150
bars, the liquid or mixture assuming a temperature of more
than 150° C. up to 500° C; steam which is being formed in the
cooling system being continuously taken therefrom and uti-
lized for the production of energy; an equivalent proportion of
fresh liquid being introduced into the cooling system; and hot
P2O5 issuing in vapor form from the combustion chamber
being condensed or worked up into desirable final product.
4,379,132
PROCESS FOR SODIUM HYPOPHOSPHITE
Dennis C. Annarelli, Newtown, Pa., and Richard E. Hall, Tren-
ton, N.J., assignors to FMC Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Aug. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 405,223
Int. a.^ COIB 15/16, 25/26
U.S. CI. 423—305 14 Claims
10. A process of purifying a solution containing sodium,
hypophosphite, calcium, and hydroxide ions comprising:
(a) adding sufficient phosphoric acid or an acid phosphate
salt to adjust the pH of the solution to between 6.5 and 7.0
thereby neutralizing the hydroxide ions in solution and
precipitating the equivalent calcium ions as an insoluble
calcium phosphate,
(b) separating the insoluble calcium phosphate from the
neutralized solution, and
(c) contacting the neutralized solution with a cation ion
exchange resin bearing sodium ions thereby exchangmg
the calcium ions with sodium ions.
4,379,133
PROCESS FOR ANISOTROPIC CARBON PRODUCTION
Maximilian Zander, Castrop-Rauxel; Gerd-Peter Bliimer, Dat-
teln; Gerd Collin, Duisburg; Herbert Glaser, Gladbeck, and
Rolf Marrett, Castrop-Rauxel, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Rutgerswerke Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am
Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,290
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 26,
1980, 3024423
Int. a.3 COIB 31/00: C09C 1/48: ClOG 21/18
U.S. a. 423—445 2 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of anistropic carbon com-
prising extracting coal tar pitch with an organic solvent, add-
ing picric acid to the extract solution to form picrates, recover-
ing the picrates, decomposing the picrates and heating the
resulting coal tar pitch fraction at 350° to 550° C. at a pressure
of 0.1 to 50 bar for about 100 to 30 minutes to transform it
substantially quantitatively into anisotropic carbon and recov-
ering the anisotropic carbon formed at 350° to 550° C.
4,379,134
PROCESS OF PREPARING HIGH PURITY ALUMINA
BODIES
Willis W. Weber, South Salem, N.Y., and Joseph A. Herbst.
Turnersville, N.J., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 234,205, Feb. 13, 1981,
abandoned. This application Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347.336
Int. Cl.^ COIF 7/02
l^S. a. 423—626 23 Claims
' 1. A process for the production of alpha-alumma bodies
which comprises:
(i) blending a peptizing acid, water and fluoride anions with
alumina, said peptizing acid and water being of a sufficient
amount to form an extrudable mixture, and said extrudable
mixture containing an effective amount of fluoride anions
to form the alpha-alumina bodies;
(ii) extruding said extrudable mixture to form shaped bodies;
(iii) calcining said bodies at a temperature from about 400° C.
to about 700° C. for a sufficient duration to convert the
alumina of said bodies to a gamma-alumina phase: and
(iv) calcining said bodies in the gamma-alumina phase at a
temperature from about 1200° C. to about 1700° C. for a
sufficient duration to convert essentially all the gamma-
alumina of said bodies to an alpha-alumina phase, said
alpha-alumina bodies characterized by having at least 85
percent of the pore volume being represented by pores
having a diameter of form 10,000 to 200,000 Angstroms
and having a square area less than one square meter per
gram.
4,379,135
METHOD FOR ENUMERATION OF ORAL
GRAM-NEGATIVE BACTERIA
Shuji Sasaki, Odawara, and Yoji Yamazaki, Kadoma, both of
Japan, assignors to Lion Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 18,175, Mar. 7, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,576
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1978, 53-27402
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/64. 33/54: C12Q 1/04. 1/24
U.S. CI. 436—536 4 Claims
1. A method for the enumeration of oral gram-negative
bacteria selected from the group consisting of Bactewides
186
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
melaninogenicus and Capnocytophaga sp. by an indirect fluo-
rescent antibody method comprising the steps of:
(a) preparing a smear of a sample containing bacteria se-
lected from the group consisting of Bacteroides
melaninogenicus and Capnocytophaga sp.;
(b) pretreating said smear with phosphate buffered saline,
having a low pH, to remove human immuno-globulins
combined with said bacteria;
(c) treating, said sample with an unlabelled antiserum se-
lected from the group consisting of an antiserum to Bacte-
roides meluninofienictis which is diluted from 32 to 512
times and an antiserum to Capnocytophaga sp. which is
diluted from 64 to 512 times, the antiserum to Bacteroides
melaninogenicus being prepared by treating the bacterial
cells with formalin, suspending the treated cells in
Freund's complete adjuvant to obtain an antigen and
injecting the antigen subcutaneously into a rabbit and
collecting the antiserum from the rabbit and the antiserum
to Capnocytophaga sp. being prepared by lysing the Cap-
nocytophaga sp. bacterial cells by ultrasonic treatment,
treating the lysed cells with formalin and suspending the
treated cells in Freund's complete adjuvant to obtain an
antigen and injecting the antigen subcutaneously into a*^
rabbit and collecting the antiserum from the rabbit;
(d) treating the reaction product of the sample and the anti-
serum with a fluorescent conjugated antibody obtained by
immunizing a different species of animal with -y-globulin
of the same species of animal as the antiserum and label-
ling the obtained antibody to said y-globulin with a fluo-
rescent substance; and
(e) enumerating the oral gram-negative bacteria by observa-
tion under a fluorescent microscope.
4,379,137
DISINFECTING AND PRESERVING COMPOSITION
COMPRISING A SYNERGISTIC COMBINATION OF A
POLYMERIC QUATERNARY AMMONIUM
COMPOUND AND A 3-ISOTHIAZOLONE COMPOUND
Helmut H. Ehlers; Heinz Eggensperger, both of Hamburg;
Lothar Bucklers, Norderstedt; Ulrich Eigener, Henstedt-
Ulzburg; Karl-Heinz Diehl, Norderstedt, and Norbert Wei-
gand, Reutlingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Sterling Drug Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,571
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 30,
1979, 2930865
Int. a.3 AOIN 33/12. 43/78
U.S. a. 424—78 2 Qaims
1. A synergistic bactericidal composition comprising in
admixture
(a) a mixture of polymeric quaternary ammonium com-
pounds having the formula
C2H4OH
HOC2H4-N^A
I
C2H4OH
■CH3 CH3
■N«-A— N«.A-
I I
.CH3 CH3 _
C2H4OH
— N^C2H40H.(2n + 2)C|-
„ C2H4OH
4,379,136
SOLID STICK OF POWDER FOR COSMETIC AND
TOILET USE AND A METHOD FOR PREPARING
THEREOF
Nobuo Mochida, 4-17-2, Minamiogikubo, Suginami-ku, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Dec. 6, 1978, Ser. No. 967,085
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 7, 1977, 52-146169
Int. Q.3 A61K 7/32. 31/745
U.S. Q. 424—65 3 Qaims
1. A method for manufacturing a solid stick of powder for
cosmetic and toilet use comprising the steps of, blending (1)
one or more particulate materials selected from the group
consisting of talc, kaolin, calcium carbonate, magnesium car-
bonate, starch, zinc white, titanium dioxide, metallic soap,
silica; particulate resin, hydrocarbons, fats and oils, waxes,
fatty acids, lower and higher alcohols, esters, and phospholip-
ids; (2) one or more ingredients consisting of surface active
agents, perfumes, pigments and preservatives and (3) as a
binding aid, one or fnore ingredients selected from the group
consisting of particulate polyethylene, zinc stearate, com
starch, silicone oil, lanolin and kaolin, and mixing with agita-
tion at a temperature of from 90' C. to 160* C; pulverizing the
resultant mixture, and compressing said pulverized material at
an impact pressure of about 3.0 kg/cm^ to 8.0 kg/cm^ to form
a solid stick.
where A is — CH2CH=CH— CH2— and n is a number
from 2 to 30; and
(b) a mixture of 5-chloro-2-methyl-3-isothiazolone and 2-
methyl-3-isothiazolone;
wherein the ratio of component (a) to component (b) is
about 1:1 to 2:1.
4,379,138
BIODEGRADABLE POLYMERS OF LACTONES
Colin G. Pitt, and Anton E. Schindler, both of Durham, N.C.,
assignors to Research Triangle Institute, Research Triangle
Park, N.C.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,188
Int. Q.3 C08G 63/08
U.S. Q. 424—78 13 Qaims
1. An elastomeric, biodegradable polymer formed by the
opening polymerization of at least one monocyclic lactone and
at least one polycyclic dilactone containing two lactone
groups, each of which may be polymerized by ring opening to
form a two-dimensional polymer.
4,379,139
ANTICOAGULANT RODENTIODE WITH LACERATION
MEANS
Ray F. Dawson, Winter Park, Fla., assignor to Lancaster Labo-
ratories, Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,607
Int. Q.3 AOIN 25/00; AOIM 25/00. 1/20
U.S. Q. 424—84 21 Qaims
1. A rodenticide composition consisting essentially of an
anticoagulant present in a concentration of at least about
0.005% by weight, based on the weight of the total rodenticide
composition, an edible bait and a lacerating agent present in a
concentration of at least about 5% by weight, based on the
weight of the total rodenticide composition.
4,379,140
TURKEY RHINOTRACHEITIS VACONE
Marcus M. Jensen, Provo, Utah, assignor to Brigham Young
University, Provo, Utah
FUed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,402
Int Q.^ A61K 39/02; C12N 1/20
U.S. Q. 424—92 8 Claims
1. A live vaccine against turkey rhinotracheitis
having good immunizing capabilities and, the absence of
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
adverse side-effects, containing a pharmaceutically ac-
ceptable carrier and an immunologically effective amount
of a temperature sensitive, non-virulent, genetically stable
strain of Alcaligenes faecalis that can be back passed 6
times in the nasal mucosa of turkeys and show no signs of
changes in growth characteristics or virulenece, said
strain being substantially similar in immunizing properties
to the strain oi Alcaligenes faecalis ATCC No. 31770.
4. A method for the immunization of turkeys against rhino-
tracheitis which comprises applying the vaccine of claim 1 in
an immunologically effective amount to a turkey.
8. A biologically pure culture of a temperature sensitive,
non-virulent, genetically stable strain of Alcaligenes faecalis
which is the strain oi Alcaligenes faecalis having ATCC No.
31770.
4,379,141
METHOD FOR RECOVERING MYELOPEROXIDASE
AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION
CONTAINING MYELOPEROXIDASE AS MAJOR
CONSTITUENT
Eichi Hasegawa, and Takashi Kobayashi, both of Hirakata,
Japan, assignors to The Green Cross Corporation, Osaka,
Japan
Division of Ser. No. 179,783, Aug. 20, 1980, Pat. No. 4,306,025.
This application Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,418
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 28, 1979, 54-172109;
Feb. 22, 1980, 55/22113
Int. a.3 A61K 37/48
U.S. a. 424—94 12 Claims
1. A pharmaceutical composition effective against tubercle
bacillus resistant to isonicotinic acid hydrazide deficient or
diminished in catalase synthesizing activity, consisting essen-
tially of 5 to O.OS m moles of a pharmacologically acceptable
alkali metal halide for 100 to O.OS units of a myeloperoxidase
originated from human myelogenous leukocytes.
4,379,142
THROMBIN INHIBITOR AND PREPARATION AND USE
THEREOF
Hans Port, Weilheim-Unterhausen; Jiirgen Schrenk, Weilheim,
and Peter Wunderwald. Haunshofen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Boehringer Mannheim GmbH, Mannheim-
WUdhof, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,665
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 9,
1980, 3038163 ;
Int. a.3 A23J 1/06
U.S. a. 424— 101 6 Claims
1. Thrombin inhibitor comprising a glycoprotein of a molec-
ular jweight of 68,000 to 69,000 Dalton and an isoelectric point
of pH 4.S, obtained by the process of treating plasma, serum or
a fraction obtained therefrom with an insoluble carrier-bound
heparin or dextran sulfate, eluting the latter, after removal of
non-bound material, with a salt solution having an ion strength
of 0.12 to 0.36 and a pH value from 6.S to 8.3, and recovering
the thrombin inhibitor from the eluate, and is further charac-
terized in that it inhibits thrombin in the presence of heparin,
differs immunologically from antithrombin III, and does not
inhibit factor Xa, plasmin and trypsin.
4,379,143
TOPICAL LIQUID OR OINTMENT
Howiu^ S. Sherry, Cherry Hill, N.J., and Elliott P. Hertzen-
berg, Wilmington, Del., assignors to PQ Corporation, Valley
Forge, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 213,261, Dec. 5, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,340
Int. a? A61K 33/06
MS, a. 424—154 11 Claims
1. An analgesic preparation comprising 1 to 6 parts by
weight of an activated zeolite of the formula:
187
I
wherein x and y are integers greater than 6, the molar ratio of
X to y is 0. 1 to 1.1 and M is a metal with the valence of n; and
4 to 9 parts of an anhydrous liquid wherein the zeolite is the
sole warmi..g ingredient.
4,379,144
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG A FLOW ABLE FUNGIODE
FORMULATION
Joseph T. Dilday, North Little Rock, Ark., assignor to Olin
Corporation, New Haven, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 71,227, Aug. 30, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,667
Int. a.3 AOIN 61/02. 33/18, 43/78 43/80
U.S. a. 424—168 28 Qainu
1. A process for producing a flowable fungicide formulation
comprising the steps of:
(a) heating at least one solid active fungicidal compound, a
hydrocarbon solvent, and a surfactant to reduce the parti-
cle size of said solid fungicidal compound and to form a
liquid melt from said mixture;
(b) adding an aqueous solution to said melt to form a water-
in-oil emulsion; and
(c) thoroughly mixing said emulsion in the presence of an
amount of a thickening agent to form a stable flowable
fungicide formulation, said flowable fungicide formula-
tion comprising from about 1 % to about 50% by weight
of active fungicidal compounds, from about 15% to about
40% by weight of said hydrocarbon solvent, from atmut
2% to about 10% by weight of said surfactant, from about
10% to about 50% by weight of water, and from about
0.25% to about 3% by weight of said thickening agent.
4,379,145
ANTITUMOR PROTEIN HYBRID AND PROCESS FOR
THE PREPARATION THEREOF
Yasuhiko Masuho; Naoji Umemoto, both of Hino; Takeshi
Hara, Hachioji, and Hidematsu Hind, Sapporo, all of Japan,
assignors to Tegin Limited, Osaka and Hidematsu Hirai,
Hokkaido, both of, Japan
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,709
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 14, 1979, 54-161609
Int. a. J A61K 37/00; C07C 103/52: O07G 7/00
U.S. a. 424—177 4 Claims
1. Antitumor protein hybrid, having a moiety consisting of
the antitumor immunoglobulin and a moiety substantially con-
sisting of the fragment A of a diphtheria toxin, which is ex-
pressed by the following formula (I):
AlH-NHCO-X— S|— S:FA)„
(I)
where Ab indicates a moiety consisting of the antitumor immu-
noglobulin and FA indicates a moiety substantially consisting
of the fragment A of a diphtheria toxin; X is an alkylene group
or phenylene group which either has or does not have a branch
chain of 1 to 5 carbon atoms; N in the amido bond is a nitrogen
atom arising from the amino group in the antitumor immuno-
globulin; Si and S2 are both sulfur atoms, S2 indicating a sulfur
atom arising from the disulfide bond in a diphtheria toxin; n
stands for an integer of I to 5.
188
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,146
SUBSTITUTED PHOSPHONAMIDES AS
ANTIHYPERTENSIVES
William J. Greenlee, Teaneck; Elbert E. Harris; Arthur A.
Patchett, both of Westfield, and Eugene D. Thorsett, Fan-
wood, all of N.J., assignors to Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway,
N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 235,336, Feb. 17, 1981. This
application Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,221
Int. a.3 A61K 37/00: C07C 103/52; C07D 277/20
U.S. a. 424—177 24 Claims
1. A compound of the general formula
O
II
R3
Rl — P— NH— CHCON
I
O
I
Rl
CO2R4
wherein:
Rl is alkyl or substituted alkyl of Ci-Ca wherein thesubstitu-
ent is halo, amino, acylamino;
aralkyl wherein the alkyl is C1-C4 optionally substituted
by amino or acylamino and wherein the aryl function is
phenyl or naphthyl optionally substituted by halo or
hydroxyl; or,
heteroaralkyi wherein the alkyl is C1-C4 optionally substi-
tuted by amino or acylamino and wherein the heteroa-
ryl group can be indolyl or thienyl;
R2 is H, lower alkyl of C1-C4, aralkyl;
R3 is lower alkyl of Ci-Cb optionally substituted by an
amino group;
R4 is H, lower alkyl of C\-C(„ aralkyl;
X is (CH2)/i wherein n is 1 or 2; and,
the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof
4,379,147
SUBSTITUTED 2-(ANILINOMETHYL)-2-IMIDAZOLINE
DERIVATIVES, COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THESE
DERIVATIVES, AND THE USE THEREOF FOR
COMBATING PESTS
Manfred Biiger, Weil am Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Urs
Burckhardt, Basel, Switzerland; Haukur Kristinsson, Bott-
mingen, Switzerland; Giinter Mattern, Liestal, Switzerland,
and Walter Traber, Reinach, Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-
Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,280
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 9, 1981, 842/81
Int. a.3 AOIN 57/32; C07F 9/24
U.S. a. 424—200 12 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
Rl R2
x=p
1/
>
\
0R3
lU
wherein
Rl and R2 independently of one another are each a chlorine
atom or the methyl group,
R3 is methyl or ethyl,
R4 is alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy having 1 or 2
carbon atoms, alkylthio having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or
phenyl, and
X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and
including acid addition salts thereof.
7. A pesticidal composition comprising (1) a pesticidally
effective amount of a compound according to claim 1 and (2)
a carrier.
4,379,148
ANALGESIC AND ANTI-INFLAMMATORY
COMPOSITION
Makoto Sato, Moriyama; Isami Kimura, and Azuma Yamaguchi,
both of Shiga, all of Japan, assignors to Morishita Pharmaceu-
tical Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 342,963
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 30, 1981, 56/13523
Int. a.3 A61K 27/00. 31/625
U.S. a. 424—232 4 Qaims
I. An analgesic and anti-inflammatory pharmaceutical
composition for oral administration comprising an analgesic
and anti-inflammatory effective amount of a combination of
4-ethoxy-2-methyl-5-morpholino-3(2H)-pyridazinone and a
non-steroidal acid anti-inflammatory agent selected from the
group consisting of phenylbutazone, ibuprofen, mefenamic
acid, indomethacin. acetylsalicylic acid, naproxen, ketopro-
fen and flurbiprofen, said composition comprising about '/a to
'/: of the oral clinically effective amount of 4-ethyoxy-2-
methyl-5-morpholino-3(2H)-pyridazinone and about V^ to '/:
the oral clinically effective amount of the non-steroidal acid
anti-intlammatory agent.
^ 4,379,149
PROCESS FOR INTRODUaNG AN
OXYGEN-CONTAINING FUNCTIONAL GROUP INTO
ANSAMYCINS
Wilhelm Kump, Biel-Benken, Switzerland, assignor to Ciba-
Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 167,970, Jul. 14, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,457
Int. a.3 A61K 31/395; C07D 491/08
U.S. a. 424—244 13 Qaims
7. A rifamycin S derivative of the formula
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH3O
(lA)
CH3
O— R
CH3
in which
each of R and R' represents a hydrogen atom or
R' represents acetyl and R represents a radical Alk or a
radical Ar or the acyl radical of a carboxylic acid R^ — (C-
=0) — in which R^ is hydrogen, Alk or Ar, whereby Alk
represents an alkyl radical having a maximum of 7 carbon
atoms or such an alkyl substituted with hydroxy or alkoxy
having a maximum of 4 carbon atoms, and Ar represents
phenyl or a phenyl substituted with lower alkyl, lower
alkoxy, methylendioxy or formyl,
and a corresponding derivative of the SV series.
13. Therapeutic method for inhibiting or relieving microbial
infections in a warm-blooded animal, characterised by the
administration to these warm-blooded animals of a compound
according to claim 7, alone or in the form of a preparation, in
amounts which in these warm-blooded animals are effective to
inhibit or relieve the infection.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
189
I 4 379 150
DIBENZ[B,F][l,4]OXAZEPINE DERIVATIVES, PROCESS
FOR PREPARING THE SAME, AND PHARMACEUTICAL
COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING THE SAME
Kiyohiko Ito, Tama; Masuo Koizumi; Yasushi Murakami, both
of Tokyo; Michitaka Akima, Sakado; Jinichiro Aono;
Yasuhiro Ohba, both of Kawasaki; Tamotsu Yamazaki,
Tokorozawa; Kazushige Sakai, Tokyo; Shun-ichi Hata, Yoko-
hama, and Shigeru Takanashi, Asaka, all of Japan, assignors
to Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,897
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 24, 1980, 55-181831
Int. a.3 A61K 31/55; C07D 413/06
U.S. a. 424-244 lO Qaims
1. A compound of the formula: t
a compound selected from the group consisting of 3-phenox-
yazetidines of the formula:
H— N
wherein R is hydrogen, aminocarbonyl or trifluoromethyl and
pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof m
admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
A— N
(wherein R] is a hydrogen atom or a lower alkyl group; R2 is
a branched lower alkyl group; R3 is a hydrogen atom, a car-
boxyl group, a carbamoyl group, a lower alkoxycarbonyl
group or a lower alkoxy group with the proviso that both Ri
and R3 are not hydrogen; R4 and R5 are each a lower alkyl
group or may, when taken together with a nitrogen atom, form A— N
a heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of piper-
idino, piperazino, pyrrolidino or morpholino; A is a lower
alkylene group) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
10. A pharmaceutical composition for preventing and treat-
ing circulatory diseases which comprises an amount effective
for preventing or treating a circulatory disease of a compound
of the formula:
4,379,152
t CEPHALOSPORINS
Isamu Saikawa; Shuntaro Takano, both of Toyama; Chosaku
Yoshida, Takaoka; Okuta Takashima, Toyama; Kaishu
Momonoi, Shinminato; Seietsu Kuroda, Toyama; Miwako
Komatsu, Fuchumachi; Takashi Yasuda, Kosugimachi, and
Yutaka Kodama, Toyama, all of Japan, assignors to Toyama
Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 915,873, Jun. 15, 1978, Pat. No. 4,219,554,
which is a division of Ser, No. 654,060, Jan. 30, 1976, Pat. No.
4,112,090. This application May 17, 1979, Ser. No. 39,904
Int. CI.' C07D 501/26; A61K 31/545
U.S. CI. 424-246 27 Claims
1. An antibacterial compound of the formula (I).
AY
(1)
N— C— NH— R— CONH
CH2R*
A— N
\
R5
(wherein Ri is a hydrogen atom or a lower alkyl group; R2 is
a branched loWer alkyl group; R3 is a hydrogen atom, a car-
boxyl group, a carbamoyl group, a lower alkoxycarbonyl
group or a lower alkoxy group with the proviso that both Ri
and R3 are not hydrogen; R4 and R5 are each a lower alkyl
group or may, when taken together with a nitrogen atom, form
a piperidino, piperazino, pyrrolidino or morpholino ring; A is
a lower alkylene group) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt
thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
4,379,151
3-PHENOXYAZETIDINES FOR ANOREXIGENIC
ACTIVITY
Albert D. Cale, Jr., Mechanicsville, Va., assignor to A. H. Ro-
bins Company, Inc., Richmond, Va.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 886,487, Mar. 14, 1978,
abandoned. This application Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,046
Int. a.3 C07D 205/04; A61K 31/395
U.S. a. 424—244 4 Claims
1. A process which comprises administering to a living
animal body for its anorexigenic effect an effective amount of
(R2 R-')
COOR"
wherein R is a group represented by the formula
R^
I
— C—
each of said moieties A, R', R2. r3. r4, r5 apj r6 j^ ^ conven-
tional penicillin or cephalosporin substituent selected from
the groups or atoms which each of said moieties represents
as set forth subsequently, wherein R^ represents alkyl, cyclo-
alkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkadienyl, aryl, aralkyi, aryloxy.
alkylthioalkyl, furyl, thienyl, oxazoly, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl.
isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, pynmi-
dyl. pyridazyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl. quinazolyl, indolyl.
indazolyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl. 1,3,4-
thiadiazolyl or 1,2,4-thiadiazolyl, any of which may be sub-
stituted by halogen, hydroxy, nitro, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio.
acyl or alkylsulfonylamino; R^ represents a hydrogen atom;
and R5 and R*" together with a common carbon atom may
form a cycloalkyi, cycloalkenyl or cycloalkadienyl ring;
R' represents a hydrogen atom, a blocking group of a conven-
tional penicillin or cephalosporin or a pharmaceutically
acceptable salt-forming cation of a conventional penicillin or
cephalosporin;
n represents 1 or 2; each of the n X's, which may be identical
or different from one another, represents individually an
oxygen or sulfur atom, and the n X's are attached m any
combination to the 2-, 3-, or S-positions of the piperazme
ring;
m represents 4-n; each pair of R^ and R^ are linked to the same
carbon atom, and each R^ and R^ of m pairs of R^ and R-\
which may be the same or different, represent individually
hydrogen, halogen, carboxyl, alkyl, cycloalkyi, aryl, acyl.
190
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
aralkyi, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxy-
carbonyl, cycloalkyloxycarbonyl, aralkoxycarbonyl. arylox-
ycarbonyl, amino. N-alkylamino, N.N-dialkylamino, N-
arylaminocyclic amino or carbamoyl; any of which may be
substituted by halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, acyl or nitro;
and any pair of R^ and R^ together with a common carbon
atom may form a cycloalkyl ring
A represents hydrogen, hydroxy, nitro. cyano. alkyl, alkenyl,
alkynyl, alkadienyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkadie-
nyl, aryl, acyl, aralkyi, acyloxyalkyi, alkoxy, cycloalkyloxy,
alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxy, cycloalkyloxycarbonyl, arylox-
ycarbonyl. aralkoxycarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfo-
nyl, arylsulfonyl. carbamoyl, N-alkylaminocarbonyl, N-
arylaminocarbonyl, N,N-dialkylaminocarbonyl, cyclic
aminocarbonyl, thiocarbamoyl, N-alkylammothiocarbonyl,
N-aryiammothiocarbonyl, N,N-dialkylaminothiocarbonyl,
cyclic aminothiocarbonyl, acylcarbamoyi, acylthiocarbam-
oyl, alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl, arylsulfonylcarbamoyi, alkyl-
sulfonylthiocarbamoyi, arylsulfonylthiocarbamoyi, sulfa-
moyl. alkoxycarbonylthioalkyl, alkoxythiocarbonylthioal-
kyl, ammo, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyridazyl, pyrazyl, thiadiazo-
!yl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl or quinolyl, any of which may be
substituted by halogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio,
nitrci. cyano. amino, carboxyl, or acyl;
V represen s an oxygen or sulfur atom; and
R'* represent> hydrogen, an acyloxy group or a carbamoyloxy
group
4,379,154
THIOCARBOXAMIDE DERIVATIVES AND THEIR USE
AS PHARMACEUTICALS
Jean-Claude Aloup, Villeneuve-le-Roi; Jean Bouchaudon, Mor-
sang-sur-Orge; Daniel Farge, Thiais, and Claude James, Paris,
all of France, assignors to Rhone-Poulenc Sante, France
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,550
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 18, 1980, 80 18035
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 9, 1S>98,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61K 31/50; C07D 237/08
U.S. a. 424—250 19 Qaims
1. A thioformamide derivative of the formula:
4,379,153
BENZENESULFONYL UREAS, AND
PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS
Vblker Hitzel, Hofheim am Taunus; Rudi Weyer, Kelkheim;
Karl Geisen. Frankfurt am Main, and Giinter Regjtz, Bad
Soden am Taunus, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Nov. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 211,273
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 1,
1979, 2948522
Int. a.-' C07D 471/04; A61K 31/395
U.S. CI. 424—256 7 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
Pv ir N— C— NH— Y— ^^— SO2NH— C— NH— R'
\ II O
o
or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof in which
0
is a fused pyridine ring in which the nitrogen atom is in
any of the four possible positions;
X is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 C atoms or halogen;
Y is alkylene of 2-3 C atoms; and
R' is alkyl of 4 to 8 C atoms, cycloaklyl, alkylcycloalkyl.
dialkylcycloalkyi, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl or alkyl-
cycloalkenyl, in each instance with 5-9 C atoms, methyl-
cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexenylmethyl, chlorocy-
clohexyl, methoxycyclohexyl, bicycloheptyl, bicy-
cloheptenyl, bicycloheptylmethyl, bicycloheptenyl-
methyl, bicyclooctyl, nortricyclyl, adamantyl or benzyl.
7. A method of treatment of hyperglycemia which com-
prises administering to a diabetic a hypoglycemically effective
amount of a compound as defined in claim 1.
wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl radical of I
through 4 carbon atoms, and
(i).Het represents a heterocyclic radical of aromatic character,
containing one or two nitrogen atoms, selected from the
group consisting of pyrid-3-yl, pyrid-4-yl, pyridazinyl,
pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, quinolyl, imidazolyl, naphthyridinyl,
quinoxalinyl and quinazolinyl, X represents a sulphur or
oxygen atom and Y represents a sulphur or oxygen atom, a
valency bond or a methylene radical, or
(ii) Het represents the pyrid-2-yl radical, X represents a sul-
phur or oxygen atom and Y represents a sulphur or oxygen
atom or a methylene radical, or
(iii) Het represents the pyrid-2-yl radical, X represents an
oxygen atom and Y represents a valency bond.
\
4,379,155
3,5-DISUBSTITUTED-lH-l,2,4-TRIAZOLE DERIVATIVES
Amedeo Omodei-Sale, Voghera; Pietro Consonni, Milan; Giulio
Galliani, Monza, all of Italy, and Leonard J. Lerner, Cran-
bury, N.J., assignors to Gruppo Lepetit S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 254,816, Apr. 16, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 47,411,
Jun. 11, 1979, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 11,297, Feb. 12, 1979, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 897,313, Apr. 18, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,033
Int. C\? A61K 31/41; C07D 249/08
U.S. Q. 424—269 9 Claims
1. A 3,5-disubstituted-lH-l,2,4-triazole of the formula
1
wherein:
R is selected from hydrogen, (CM)alkyl, (CM)alkoxy, al-
lyloxy, propargyloxy, trifluoromethyl, phenyl, fluoro,
chloro and dimethylamino;
Rl represents a (CM)alkyl group;
R2 is selected from hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, (CM)alkyl,
methoxy and ethoxy;
R3 is selected from hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, (CM)alkyl and
(Ci-4)alkoxy;
R and R3 taken together represent a methylenedioxy group,
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
191
with the proviso that, when R, R2 and R3 simultaneously
represent hydrogen, Ri cannot be methyl;
with the further proviso that, when R2 and one of R and R3
simultaneously represent hydrogen, Ri and the other of R
and Rj cannot simultaneously represent methyl; and with
the still further proviso that compounds of formula I are
excluded wherein R2 is hydrogen and one of R and R3 is
simultaneously a 2-positioned alkyl group and the other of
R and R3 is hydrogen;
or a salt thereof with a pharmaceutically acceptable acid.
8. A pharmaceutical composition for preventing littering ip
impregnated female animals comprising a pharmaceutical car-
rier and, as the active ir "redient an effective amount of a
compound of the formula
H— N
I
4^79,157
SULPHONYL COMPOUNDS, METHOD OF PREPARLNC
THE NEW COMPOUNDS, AS WELL AS APHICIDAL
COMPOSITIONS ON THE BASIS OF THE NEW
COMPOUNDS
Roelof van Hes; Arnoldus C. Grosscurt, and Wouter Balk, all of
Weesp, Netherlands, assignors to Duphar International Re-
search B.V., Netherlands
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226.533
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Jan. 23, 1980,
8000414
Int. a.3 C07D 275m
U.S. a. 424—270 14 Qaims
1. Compounds of the general formula
NHR'5
wherein R, Ri, R2 and R3 are defined as in claim 1, or a salt
thereof with a pharmaceutically acceptable acid.
4,379,156
HETEROCYCLIC CHEMICALS, THEIR PREPARATION
AND USE
Peter J. Islip, Sanderstead, and Mirjana V. Bogunovic, Bromley,
both of England, assignors to Burroughs Wellcome Co., Re-
search Triangle Park, N.C.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,553
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 21, 1979,
7944276
Int. a.3 C07D 277/i8; A61K 31/425
U.S. a. 424—270 11 Claims
1. A compound of formula (III)
,CH2.CO.NH.R*
O2N
N
^■"^
wherein
R' is a single substituent substituted in a position of the
. phenyl ring selected from position 2 and position 3 and
when in the 2-position R' is selected from a chlorine atom,
a methyl group and a nitro group and when in the 3-posi-
tion R^ is a nitro group; and
R* is selected from a hydrogen atom and a CO.CH3 group.
6. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising a non-toxic
effective schistosomal amount of the compound of claim 1 in
association with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier there-
for.
wherein
X' is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and
R5' is a hydrogen atom, a 2-chloroethyl group, or a cy-
clohexylcarbamoyl group.
(HI)
4,379,158
ANTISECRETORY IMIDAZOLE AMIDINE
COMPOUNDS, COMPOSITION AND METHOD OF USE
Yasufumi Hirata, Omiya; Isao Yanagisawa; Toshinari Tamura,
both of Tokyo, and Masaaki Takeda, Urawa, all of Japan,
assignors to Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 934,276, Aug. 16, 1978, Pat.
No. 4,252,819. This application Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,742
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 29, 1977, 52-104079;
Jul. 17, 1978, 53-86944
Int. Q.3 A61K il/6l5: C07D 2i3/(>4; A61K il/444: C07D
401/12
U.S. Q. 424—273 R 9 Qaims
1. A heterocyclic compounnd of the formula
Het-(CH2)m-Z-(CH2)„-C:
NH— Y
wherein Het represents imidazolyl, either unsubstituted or
substituted by halogen, hydroxyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy,
hydroxymethyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyano, amino, ammoalkyl,
amidinoalkyl; Z represents sulfur or oxygen; X represents the
formula N— Ri wherein Ri represents cyano, unsubstituted or
lower alkyl-substituted carbamoyl, unsubstituted or iower-
alkyl-substituted thiocarbamoyl; Y represents alkyl substituted
by hydroxyl, amino or halogen, cycloalkyl of 3-6 carbon
atoms, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, aryl, unsubstituted or
substituted by hydroxyl, amino or halogen, aralkyl, unsubsti-
tuted or substituted by hydroxyl, amino, or halogen, cyano, or
carbamoyl; and m and n represent an integer of 1 to 3; or a
pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof
4. A composition for inhibiting gastric acid secretion con-
taining as the active ingredient an effective amount of a hetero-
cyclic compound of claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable
carrier.
192
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
Aprils, 1983
4,379,159
ANTIINFLAMMATORY
2-SUBSTITUTED-THIO-4,5-DIHYDRO-4,5-DIARYL-lH-
IMIDAZOLES
Saul C. Cherkofsky, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours & Company, Wilmington, Del.
Eiled Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,750
Int. a.3 A61K 31/415: C07D 233/28
U.S. a. 424—273 R 15 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
Rj N
H
SRi
where
Rl =Ci-C4 alkyl, mono- or polyfluoro C2-C4 alkyl with the
proviso that a fluoro group cannot be present in the a
position, or ally);
R2 and R3 independently =
'-0-
where
X = H, F, CI, Br, NO2 or CH3S(0)„; n=0, 1 or 2;
Y-H. For CI;
provided when Y = F or CI, X must be F or CI, and provided
R2 and R3 cannot both be phenyl; or a pharmaceutically suit-
able acid addition salt thereof
4,379,160
CARBAZOLE COMPOUNDS AND MEDICINAL USE
THEREOF
Morton Harfenist, Chapel Hill, and Charles T. Joyner, Raleigh,
both of N.C., assignors to Burroughs Wellcome Co., Research
Triangle Park, N.C.
Division of Ser. No. 16,914, Mar. 2, 1979. This application May
12, 1980, Ser. No. 149,186
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 1, 1978,
42845/78
Int. a.3 A61K 31/40
U.S. CI. 424—274 38 Claims
22. The method of treating aggression in a human which has
been identified as exhibiting aggressive symptoms which com-
prises administering to said human an effective nontoxic an-
tiaggression amount of 9-[3-(3,5-cis-dimethylpiperazino)-
propylj-carbazole, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate of a pharmaceutically
acceptable salt thereof.
4,379,161
NOVEL SUBSTITUTED HETEROCYCLIC
PHENOXY AMINES, THE METHOD OF PREPARATION
THEREOF AND THE USE THEREOF AS LOCAL
ANAESTHETICS
Michel Thominet, 82, rue Bonaparte, 75006 Paris, and Jacque-
line Franceschini, 28, avenue Larroumes, 94240 L'Hay les
Roses, both of France
FUed Jun. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 162,796
Qaims priority, application^ France, Jun. 7, 1979, 79 17610;
Jan. 4, 1980, 80 07352
Int. a.3 C07D 223/04. 207/08; A61K 31/40. 31/55
U.S. a. 424—274 24 Oaims
1. A heterocyclic phenoxy-amine of the formula
^(CH2)3^
0-(CH2)m-CH2^ ^N-R
^(CH2)„
where
m is 0 or 2, n is 0 or 2, and m-l-n is 2;
where
X is F, CI or Br; '
where
A is hydrogen or alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; and
where
R is alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to 6 carbon
atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkenyl of 4 to
6 carbon atoms, or cycloalkenyl-alkyl or cycloalkyl-alkyl
with the cycloalkenyl, cycloalkyl and alkyl groups having
4 to 6 carbon atoms, 3lo 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 6 carbon
atoms respectively.
22. A method of providing local anesthesia to a patient in
need of same which comprises applying an effective amount of
a compound of claim 1 to the surface of said patient's skin.
4,379,162
l-BENZOTHIEPIN-4-CARBOXAMIDES
Melvin H. Rosen, Kendall, Fla., assignor to Ciba-Geigy Corpo-
ration, Ardsley, N.Y, '
Division of Ser. No. 119,717, Feb. 8, 1980, Pat. No. 4,277,484,
which is a division of Ser. No. 944,218, Sep. 20, 1978, Pat. No.
4,226,998, which is a division of Ser. No. 854,176, Nov. 23, 1977,
Pat. No. 4,185,109, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 743,208,
Nov. 18, 1976, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 585,147, Jun. 9, 1975, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 509,524, Sep. 26, 1974,
abandoned. This application Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,766
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 28,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07D 337/08: A61K 31/38
U.S. CI. 424—275 2 Qaims
1. N-p-Fluorophenyl-7-chloro-5-hydroxy-2,3-dihydro-l-
benzothiepin-l-oxide-4-carboxamide or the sodium salt
thereof.
2. An antiinflammatory pharmaceutical composition com-
prising an anti-inflammatory effective amount of a compound
of claim 1, together with one or more pharmaceutically accept-
able excipients.
4,379,163
PYRETHROIDS
Paolo Piccardi; Francesco Corda, both of Milan; Franco Gozzo,
San Donato Milanese; Augusto Menconi, and Angelo Lon-
goni, both of Milan, all of Italy, assignors to Montedison,
S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 15,105, Feb. 26, 1979, Pat. No.
4,328,237. This application Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,541
Qaims priority, application Italy, Feb. 28, 1978, 20713 A/78;
Jan. 30, 1979, 19703 A/79
Int. C\? AOIN 43/08: C07D 307/54
U.S. Q. 424—285 7 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
A i? JQ
CF3— C=CH— CH— CH— C— O— CH2— " "
CHz-^
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
193
6. A method for fighting infestations by insects and acari,
comprising distributing in the zone to be protected an effective
amount of one or more of the compounds of claim 1.
(I)
Q— A— Z
K^&
wherein .
Q stands for — S— or —SO—,
A stands for Ci.6 straight or branched chain alkylene,
B stands for ethylene, vinylene or ethynylene,
R' represents hydrogen or C 1.4 alkyl,
R2 represents Ci.g straight or branched chain alkyl,
R^ stands for hydrogen or acetyl, and
Z represents — COOH, — CN, — CH2OH or — COOW,
wherein W stands for an equivalent of a pharmacologi-
cally acceptable cation or C 1.4 alkyl.
8. A platelet inhibiting, vasodilative, bronchodilative and
stomach-mucosa-protective method of treatment which com-
prises administering to a subject in need thereof an effective
amount of a compound as deflned in claim 1.
4,379,165
ANTI-CONVULSANT
Charles R. Clark, Auburn, Ala., assignor to Research Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
) Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,604
Int. C[J C07C 103/75; A61K 31/16
U.S. a. 424—324 5 Oaims
1. A method of treating epilepsy and other convulsive disor-
ders comprising administering an N-substituted amino-benza-
mide selected from the group consisting of 4-amino-N-phenyl-
benzamide, 4-amino-N-cyclohexyl-benzamide, 4-amino-N-
amyl-benzamide, 4-amino-N-benzyl-benzamide, 4-amino-N,N-
(di-n-propyl)-benzamide, 4-amino-N-(n-hexyi)-benzamidp, 4-
amino-N-(n-butyl)-benzamide, 3-amino-N-(alpha-methylben-
zyl)-benzamide, 2-amino-N-(alpha-methylbenzyl)-benzamide,
and 4-amino-N-(alpha-methyIbenzyl)-benzamide.
4,379,166
ARYLMETHOXY-, ARYLMETHYLTHIO-,
HETEROARYLMETHOXY-, AND
HETEROARYLMETHYLTHIO-ALKYLAMINOAL-
COHOLS
Bernard R. Neustadt, and Elyah H. Gold, both of West Orange,
N.J., assignors to Schering Corporation, Kenilwortb, N.J.
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,339
Int. a.3 A61K 31/165. 31/135; C07D 253/08, 217/18
U.S. a. 424—324 14 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
4,379,164
VASODILATIVE 4-THIA-PGIi AND 4-SULnNYL-PGI 1
AND DERIVATIVES THEREOF
Istvan Tbmbskbzi; Peter Gyory; Gabor Kovacs; Sandor Virag;
Peter Kormoczy, and Istvan Stadler, all of Budapest, Hun-
gary, assignors to Chinoin Gyogyszer es Vegyeszeti Termekek
Gyara R.T., Budapest, Hungary
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,433
Qaims priority, application Hungary, Oct. 28, 1980, 2596
Int. a.3 A61K 31/335; C07D 307/935
U.S. a. 424—285 8 Qaims
1. A 4-thia- or 4-sulfmyl-PGli -compound of the formula 1
OH H
HO
— CH— CH2CH2— Y— CH2— R
CH3
'I
wherein
X is carbamoyl, mono- or di- Ci to Ct alkyl carbamoyl. Ci to
Caalkylthio, C| to CbalkylsuJfinyl, or Ci to Cealkylsulfo-
nyl; I
Y is O. S. SO or SO:; and
R is phenyl; phenyl substituted by Ci to €& alkyl, hydroxy,
Ci to Caalkoxy, halo, carboxy, C] to Cfc alkoxycarbonyl.
or nitro groups; heteroaryl groups having 5 to 10 ring
members having one or two rings comprising aromatic
carbon atoms and from 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms, and substi-
tuted derivatives thereof wherein said heteroaryl group is
substituted by Ci to C6 alkyl, hydroxy. Ci to €& alkoxy.
halo, phenyl, or Ci to Ce alkoxycarbonyl. and wherein
said heteroaryl group is joined to the side chain at one of
said ring aromatic carbon atoms;
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
12. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective
antihypertensive amount of a compound of claim 1 together
with a non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
4,379,167
1-ARYLOXY-4-AMINO-2-BUTANOLS AND THE
PHARMACEUTICAL USE THEREOF
Carl D. Lunsford, and Ying-Ho Chen, both of Richmond, Va.,
assignors to A. H. Robins Company, Inc., Richmond, Va.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 730,498, Oct. 17, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 618,984, Oct. 2,
1975, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
518,122, Oct. 25, 1974, abandoned. This application Jul. 5, 1977,
I Ser. No. 813,056
Int. C\? A61K 31/135; C07C 93/06
U.S. Q. 424—330 15 Qaims
1. l-AryIoxy-4-amino-2-butanol compounds having local
anesthetic.beta-adrenergic blocking, antihypertensive and anti-
arrhythmic properties of the formula
ArO-CH2-CHOH-CH2-CH2-NR'R2 ,
wherein Ar is 1-haphthyl. R' is lower alkyl having one to eight
carbon atoms, phenethyl or lower cycloalkyl having five to
seven carbon atoms, R^ is hydrogen or lower alkyl having one
to eight carbon atoms, and pharmaceutically acceptable acid
addition salts thereof
4,379,168
PESTIODES CONTAINING D-LIMONENE
Vincent Dotolo, 1989 Bellair Rd., Qearwater, Fla. 33516
Continuation of Ser. No. 130,138, Mar. 14, 1980, abandoned.
This application Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,448
Int. C\? AOIN 27/00
U.S. Q. 424—356 37 Qaims
1. A pesticide composition for topical application on small
animals, i.e., an animal pesticide dip consisting essentially of
about 2-25% D-limonene from citrus products about 1-15%
liquid, water soluble, surface-active agent capable of emulsify-
ing the D-limonene, and the remainder water, by volume.
194
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,169
NEW GUM BASE AND CHEWING GUM CONTAINING
SAME
Richard A. Reggio, Yorktown Heights; Ronald P. D' Amelia,
Hicksville, both of N.Y.. and Dominick R. Friello, Danbury,
Conn., assignors to Nabisco Brands, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,490
Int. a.i H23G 3/30
U.S. a. 426—3 13 Qaims
1. A gum base which has excellent film-fonning capability,
comprising from about 0.5 to about 25% by weight of an
elastomer, from about 50 to about 85% by weight of one or
more ester gums, and from about 1 to about 25% by weight of
3 plasticizer selected from the group consisting of acids se-
lected from the group consisting of oleift acid, lauric acid,
lactic acid, isosteanc acid, caprylic acid and capric acid, esters
of said acids, mono-, di- and triglycerol esters of said acids,
polyglycerol esters of said acids having a hydrophobic hydro-
philic character of HLB 2 to 13, sorbitan or polysorbate ester
of said acids, stripped coco, and mixtures thereof, said gum
base being substantially free of inorganic fillers.
4,379,170
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURE OF CHEESE
David H. Hettinga, Northbrook; Robert J. Wargel, Winnetka,
and Richard C. Tripp, Wheeling, all of 111., assignors to Kraft,
Inc.. Glenview, III.
Filed Nov. 30, 1977, Ser. No. 856,016
Int. a.' A23C 19/05, 9/12
U.S. CI. 426—40 26 Qaims
1. In a process for the manufacture of cheese the steps of
preparing a non-hydrolyzed milk protein composition which is
substantially free of fermentable sugars and in which the pro-
tein and salts are capable of forming a stable matrix for fat, said
milk protein composition being prepared by removing water
and fermentable sugars from milk, separately preparing a hy-
drolyzed milk protein composition by treating a milk protein
with a protease to hydrolyze this milk protein and to develop
cheese flavor components and precursors therefor, mixing the
hydrolyzed milk protein composition with said non-hydro-
lyzed milk protein composition, the hydrolyzed milk protein
composition having a trichloroacetic acid soluble tyrosine in
an amount between about 500 and about 3000 micrograms per
milliliter and providing a minor portion of the protein in the
cheese, adding a culture to the mixture, adding a coagulant to
cause setting, breaking the set mixture to provide curd and
whey, finning the curd by cooking, draining whey from the
curd, and recovering and pressing the curd.
14. In a process for the manufacture of cheese the steps of
preparing a non-hydrolyzed m.ilk protein composition which is
substantially free of fermentable sugars and in which the pro-
tein and salts are capable of forming a stable matrix for the fat,
said milk protein composition being prepared by removing
water and fermentable sugars from milk, separately preparing
a hydrolyzed milk protein composition by treating milk protein
with a protease to hydrolyze this portion of milk protein and to
develop cheese flavor components and precursors therefor,
mixing the hydrolyzed milk protein with said milk protein
composition, treating milk fat with a lipase to hydrolyze the
milk fat and to develop cheese flavor components and precur-
sors therefor, mixing the hydrolyzed milk fat with the said milk
protein composition and said hydrolyzed milk protein compo-
sition, adding a culture to the mixture, adding a coagulant to
cause setting, breaking the set mixture to provide curd and
whey, firming the curd by cooking, draining whey from the
curd, and recovering and pressing the curd.
4,379,171
METHOD FOR PREPARING FOOD PRODUCTS WITH
SWEET FRUCTOSE COATINGS
Ivan Furda, Wayzata, and Shirley C. Gengler, Bloomington,
both of Minn., assignors to General Mills, Inc., Minneapolis,
Minn.
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,533
Int. a.3 A23L 1/164; A23G 3/00
U.S. a. 426—291 10 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a ready-to-eat cereal exhibiting
enhanced sweetness, comprising the steps of:
(a) providing pieces of ready-to-eat cereal;
(b) coating the cereal pieces with high fructose corn syrup
seeded with jxjwdered crystalline fructose wherein the
weight ratio of cereal pieces to seeded fructose corn syrup
ranges from about 1:0.05 to 1:0.30 to form syrup-coated
cereal pieces;
(c) coating the syrup-coated cereal pieces with powdered
crystalline fructose wherein the weight ratio of total crys-
talline fructose to the seeded fructose syrup ranges from
about 1:1 to 2:1 to form coated cereal pieces;
(d) applying an edible oil to the coated cereal pieces wherein
the edible oil has a melting point of from about 70° F. to
120° F., wherein the weight ratio of cereal base to oil
ranges from about 1:0.06 to 1:0.5, and wherein the temper-
ature of the oil is sufficiently high such that the oil remains
liquid while being enrobed onto the cereal base to form a
liquid oil enrobed cereal base.
4,379,172
SEPARATING VOLATILE AROMATICS FROM
ROASTED AND GROUND COFFEE
Richard T. Liu, Worthington, Ohio, assignor to Societe D' As-
sistance Technique pour Produits Nestle S.A., Lausanne,
Switzerland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 156,166, Jun. 3, 1980,
abandoned. This application Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 249,701
Int. a.5 A23F 5/48. 5/50
U.S. a. 426—386
^
-/O
11 Claims
i
ff
V^,4
'£
1
d
tL
/y
^
40
46
\-.4
V^
-■
^
42
-
^f4 y^r
_^i
-0
H^'
?
^
44
/'
I
4: —
K
-56
^
T^
s,
^J
>'
-
-3i
At
"a
66
1
6J
1. A process for separating volatile aromatics from roasted
and ground coffee beans which comprises:
(a) wetting dry, roasted and ground coffee beans with an
aqueous extraction medium in a first zone to evolve aro-
matics-laden gases and simultaneously extracting unex-
tracted wetted roasted and ground coffee beans in a sec-
ond zone with an aqueous extraction medium to obtain an
extract at a temperature below 100° C. at essentially atmo-
spheric pressure;
(b) passing both the aromatics-laden gases and the extract
April 5, 1983
X
CHEMICAL
through a separation chamber to separate aromatics-laden
gases from extract;
(c) passing the separated aromatics-laden gases through at
least two condensers wherein the first condenser con-
denses and removes water from the aromatics-laden gases
and the last condenser is maintained at a temperature of
from about 0° C. to about 5° C. to condense volatile aro-
matics entrained with the aromatics-laden gases; and then
(d) collecting the condensed volatile aromatics.
195
4,379,173
PROCESS FOR PREPARING BISCUITS CONTAINING
I 1 GLUCOMANNAN
V^oshinari Masuyama, No. 5-19-19, Higashi Gotanda, Shinaga-
wa-ku, Tokyo, Japan (141)
1 Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 96,159, Nov. 20, 1979,
abandoned. This application Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,096
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 5, 1979, 54-128035
Int. a.3 A21D 13/08
U.S. a. 426— 549 5 Qaims
1. A process for preparing biscuits containing glucomannan
consisting essentially of the steps of:
adding a sufficient amount of glucomannan powder to a
predetermined amount of roasted flour so as to provide a
binding effect through the water and gluten contained in
the flour,
mixing the glucomannan powder and flour until a binding
effect of gluten is obtained, .
placing the mixture into a mold, and '
baking the mixture in the mold at a temperature of from
about 70° to 85° C. for about 25 to 45 minutes.
4,379,174 >
DIETETIC CAKE MIX
Sol B. Radlove, Sunrise, Fla., assignor to Batterlite-Whitlock
Incorporated, Springfield, III.
Continuation-Jn-part of Ser. No. 73,106, Sep. 6, 1979, Pat. No.
4,277,504, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 818,531, Jul.
25, 1977, Pat. No. 4,185,127. This application Jan. 29, 1981, Ser.
No. 278,197
I ' Int. a.3 A21D 70/00
U.S. a. 426—554 n Qaims
1. In a dietetic, dry cake mix, free of artificial sweeteners and
sucrose, having
(1) a non-shortening portion comprising flour, skim milk
solids, dried egg whites and a sweetener;
(2) a shortening portion comprising a shortening, and an
1 emulsifier;
(3) a baking powder portion comprising an alkaline bicar-
bonate component and an acidic component;
wherein the improvement comprises:
the sweetener comprises a high fructose com syrup wherein
j : the dry weight of the fructose ranges from about 40% to
I about 60% of the dry solids;
the acidic component of the baking powder includes gluco-
< no-delta-lactone and the ratio by weight of the acidic
j component to the alkaline component is greater than
Ubout 1.5:1.0;
the dry weight of the fructose and glucono-delta-lactone are
, . present in such portions that the ratio by weight of the
!j fructose to the acidic component is between about 5 and
about 10 so that the cake baked from batter formed when
\ the dry cake mix is combined with water is acidic with a
pH of between about 3.5 and about 6.5, has acceptable
] sweetness, moisture, good volume, texture, mouth-feel
and shelf life. -—
4,379,175
PREPARATION OF LOW FAT IMITATION CREAM
CHEESE
Donald B. Baker, Tulsa, Okla., assignor to The Pro-Mark Com-
panies, Tulsa, Okla.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 224,207, Jan. 12, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 9,466,
Feb. 6, 1979, Pat. No. 4,244,983. This application Jul. 21, 1981,
Ser. No. 285,630
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 13,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' A23C 19/08. 20/00
U.S. a. 426-582 9 Qaims
1. A metliod for makmg a low fat cheese product which
resembles cream cheese in appearance, texture and Uste com-
prising the steps of:
(a) admixing milk, a milk fat-containing earner having a
butterfat content of at least 30% by weight and a stabi-
lizer, the relative proportions of milk and milk fat-contain-
ing carrier being selected to provide a fat content in he
cheese product from about 0.5% to less than 4% by
weight;
(b) heating said mixture 10 a temperature in the range from
about 170° to 185° F for a time sufficient to form a uni-
form substantially homogeneous mixture and to effect
pasteurization;
(c) admixing dry cottage cheese curd and said milk fa (con-
taining carrier-stabilizer mixture to coat said cotiage
cheese curd therewith and to form a curd mixture wherein
said curd comprises from 50 to 85% by weight of said
curd and milk fat-containing carrier-stabilizer mixture:
(d) agitating said curd and milk fat-containing carrier-siabil-
izer mixture to form a substantially uniform and fluid
mixture while maintaining saia curd mixture at a tempera-
ture in the range from about 70° to lt)0° P.;
(e) adding flavorants comprising buttermilk flavor and bac-
terial culture to said agitated curd mixture from step (d);
(0 adding flavorants comprising salt, an edible acid and
lipase modified butterfat products and a preservative to
said mixture at any time prior to step (g); and
(g) homogenizing said curd mixture at pressures in the range
500 to 5000 psig.
' 4,379,176
ICING HAVING A SUBSTANTIALLY TEMPERATURE
INDEPENDENT VISCOSITY
Karen Scherwitz, Fort Atkinson, Wis., and James Citti. Minne-
apolis, Minn., assignors to The Pillsbury Company, Minneap-
olis, Minn.
FUed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,270
Int. a.3 A23G 3/00
U.S. a. 426—613 10 Claims
1. An icing composition which has a substantially tempera-
ture independent viscosity and remains pliable and spreadable
even at freezing conditions, and yet which is spreadable and
not runny at temperatures ranging from room temperature, to
refrigerator storage temperatures, comprising:
an icing formulation having a total fat content of from about
12% by weight to about 20% by weight, from about 30%
to about 60% by weight of powdered sugar, from about
9% to about 22% total water content by weight, with the
total fat content comprising a mixture of liquid oil and
hydrogenated shortening, and the ratio of liquid oil to
liquid oil plus shortening being from within the range of
about 0.26 to 0.43:1.
196
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,177
STABLE DEHYDRATED COCRYSTALLINE AMINO
ACID FOOD ADDITIVES
Stephen A. McCoy, Villa Hills, Ky., and James L. Bono, Cincin-
nati, Ohio, assignors to The Procter A Gamble Company,
Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 164,977, Jul. 1, 1980, abandoned, which
is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 55,224, Jul. 5, 1979,
abandoned. This application Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 328,989
Int. CV A23J 3/00; A23L 1/30
U.S. a. 426—656 6 Qaims
1. A dry, stable amino acid food additive comprising: a
uniform cocrystalline matrix of:
(1) an amino acid material; and
(2) a soluble edible cocrystallizer material, the ratio by
weight of the cocrystallizer to the amount of edible amino
acid being from 0.9:1 to about 6:1, said cocrystallizable
material being selected from the group consisting of edible
alkaline and alkali earth metal salts of halides, phosphates
and nitrates, crystalline starches, crystalline cellulose,
crystalline sugars, crystalline polyhydric alcohols and
mixtures thereof:
wherein said amino acid material is selected from the group
consisting of
N-acyl derivatives of L-methionine,
N-acyl derivatives of cystine and cysteine,
N-acetyl L-methionine,
N-acetyl derivatives of L-methionine,
N-acetyl derivatives of L-cystine,
N-acetyl derivatives of L-cysteine,
N,N'-diacetyl L-cystine,
N-acetyl L-cysteine,
their salts, and mixtures thereof, and wherein the N-acyl
substituent is derived from a fatty acid having from 1 to 24
carbon atoms.
4,379,178
HNGERPRINTING SYSTEM
Louis B. Meadows, Valencia, and Arthur S. Diamond, Ventura,
both of Calif., assignors to Dactek International, Inc., Van
Nuys, Calif.
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,275
Int. Cl.^ A61B 5/10
U.S. a. 427—1 14 Claims
1. A method of producing a print of a finger or other body
part comprising the steps of:
applying an aqueous solution of a color-forming, water-solu-
ble, metal salt compound to said part to form an invisible,
latent pattern; transferring said invisible pattern to a card
impregnated with 10 to 40 parts by weight of a developer
for said metal compound comprising a mixture of at least
one water-soluble color developing compound selected
from a polyhydroxy aromatic compound, a quinolinol
compound and mixtures thereof with 1 to 10 parts by
weight of a viscosity control agent consisting essentially
of a dibasic organic acid containing from 8 to 18 carbon
atoms; and
forming a dark image on said card by reacting said pattern of
metal salt compound with said color-forming developer.
10. A fingerprint imaging device comprising:
a card having a first information receiving area and a second
fingerpring receiving area;
at least said second area being impregnated with a mixture of
a water-soluble developer capable of developing invisible,
latent patterns of water-soluble transition metal salts se-
lected from at least one of a polyhydroxy compound and
a quinolinol with 2 to 8 percent by weight of a water-solu-
ble dibasic fatty acid containing from 8 to 18 carbon
atoms. I
4,379,179
METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE MAGNETIC
ANISOTROPY HELD IN THE MANUFACTURE OF
MAGNETIC DOMAIN DEVICES
Russell D. Pierce, Randolph, and Walter B. Venard, Bemards-
ville, both of N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories,
Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,627
Int. CV B05D 5/J2
U.S. a. 427—8 7 Qaims
1. A method for making a plurality of magnetic devices,
each of said devices comprising a layer of a magnetic material
on a substrate, said method comprising depositing said layer on
said substrate and ascertaining the magnetic anisotropy field of
said layer, such ascertaining comprising
(1) subjecting said layer to a magnetic field in a direction
having a chosen azimuth and a preferred angle of eleva-
tion, and
(2) inspecting a magnetic domain pattern produced in said
layer upon essential removal of said field,
said method being characterized in that said preferred
angle of elevation has been determined essentially by
(i) determining a functional relationship between a
tentative angle of elevation and a magnetic field
strength, said tentative angle of elevation being asso-
ciated with a tentative direction whose azimuth is
essentially said chosen azimuth, and said magnetic
field strength being the strength of a magnetic test
field which is in said tentative direction and which is
the weakest field such that, upon essential removal of
said magnetic test field, a preferred magnetic domain
' pattern is produced in said layer, said preferred mag-
netic domain pattern being equal or most nearly
equal, as a function of said magnetic field strength, to
an array of essentially circular magnetic domains, and
(ii) selecting said preferred angle of elevation to be
essentially equal to an angle of elevation correspond-
ing to an essentially linear portion of said functional
relationship, said essentially linear portion being adja-
cent to a peak of said functional relationship.
4,379,180
METHODS FOR MAKING GRADED INDEX
ANTIREFLECriVE SURFACES
John E. E. Bagiin, Yorktown Heights; Ralph Feder, Hyde Park;
Ivan Haller, Chappaqua, all of N.Y.; William N. Hammer,
Brookfield Center, Conn., and Eberhard Spiller, Mt. Kisco,
N.Y., assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 91,299
Int. aj B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06; B29C 17/08
U.S. a. 427—38 11 Claims
1. A method for increasing the absorptivity of a surface of a
material to a predetermined band of electromagnetic radiation
which comprises:
exposing the surface to a flux of ions which introduces ion
tracks into the surface, said track density being greater
than about lO^/cm^, and
contacting said exposed surface with an etchant which at-
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
II
197
tacks
array
said ion tracks for a time sufficient to develop an
of protuberances having a mean height not less than
JX„, where X„ is maximum wavelength of the light to be
absorbed.
4,379,181
METHOD FOR PLASMA DEPOSITION OF
AMORPHOUS MATERIALS
Vincent D. Cannella, Detroit, and Masatsugu Izu, Birmingham,
both of Micfa., assignors to Energy Conversion Devices, Inc.,
Troy, Mich.
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,388
' Int. a.3 B05D 3/06
U.S. a.427— 39 4 Claims
'1. In the method of manufacture of amorphous semiconduc-
tor devices including the deposition of at least one layer of
amorphous semiconductor grade material of preselected elec-
trical and optical properties upon a large area substrate
wherein a reaction gas mixture containing at least silicon and
fluorine is introduced into a plasma region between said sub-
strate and a cathode and an alternating electric field is applied
therebetween so that said reaction gas mixture is ionized to
form a plasma for deposking said layer of amorphous semicon-
ductor grade material of said preselected properties upon said
substrate, the improvement comprising the steps of: maintain-
ing the frequency of said alternating electric field between
about 50 nd 200 kilo Hertz and maintaining the power density
of said plasma at about 0.3-0.5 watt/cm^, whereby the amor-
phous material deposited onto said substrate is a semiconduc-
tor grade material which additionally exhibits the characteris-
tics of substantial uniformity of thickness and substantial reduc-
tion of tensile stresses.
4,379,182
METHOD OF MAKING A REGENERABLE ELECTRIC
LAYER CAPACITOR
Reinhard Behn, Munich; Horst Pachonik, Taufkirchen, and
Gerhard Seebacher, Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Siemens Aktiengeselischaft, Berlin A Munich,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 123,890, Feb. 22, 1980, abandoned.
This application Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 319,938
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 5,
1979, 2908467
Int. a.5 B05D 3/06; C23C 11/00
U.S. a. 427—41 1 Qaim
1. A method for the manufacture of a capacitor having a
substrate with upper and lower metal layers with a glow poly-
merization layer therebetween and contact strips on the sub-
strate, comprising the steps of: providing only one diaphragm
with a parallelogram-shaped diaphragm aperture; placing the
diaphragm on the substrate and producing the lower layer
within the aperture such that it overlaps one of the contact
strips; laterally displacing the same diaphragm with the aper-
ture parallel to the substrate in a direction which is not parallel
to any side edge of the aperture, placing said diaphragm di-
rectly in contact with the lower layer, and then forming the
polymerization layer through the aperture such that a decreas-
ing thickness marginal zone of the polymerization layer adja-
cent edges of the aperture results which approaches zero at the
adjacent edges; and again lifting off the diaphragm upwardly
to clear the polymerization layer without damaging the same,
laterally displacing the aperture of the same diaphragm parallel
to the substrate in a direction which is not parallel to any side
edge of the aperture, and then forming the upper layer through
the aperture of said same diaphragm such that it overlaps the
other contact strip, whereby through use of the same dia-
phragm placed in contact with the substrate or lower and
upper layers, in a simplified manner layers of equal coverage
are insured in a glow polymerization dielectric type capacitor.
4,379,183
METHOD OF PRODUONG COBALT-MODIHED
MAGNETIC PARTICLES
Yasuo Araki, Kawachinagano; Hajime Uno, Sakai; Shigeharu
Higuchi, Sakai, and Seyi Matsumoto, Sakai, all of Japan,
assignors to Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., Osaka. Japan
Filed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,667
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 20, 1981, 56-7633
Int. a.3 COIG 49/06
U.S. a. 427—127 16 Qaims
1. A method of producing cobalt-modified magnetic parti-
cles which comprises:
(a) heating an aqueous suspension of amorphous ferric hy-
droxide at an elevated temperature from 100° C. to 250° C.
at an alkaline pH in the presence of an effective amount of
at least one growth regulating agent dissolved in the sus-
pension, in the presence or in the absence of a-ferric oxide
seed crystals of minor axes not more than 0.4 microns in
average in amounts of 0.1-25 mole % in terms of Fe
content in relation to the ferric hydroxide in the suspen-
sion, the growth regulating agent being selected from the
group consisting of an organic phosphoric acid, a hydrox-
ycarboxylic acid, a polybasic acid, an aminocarboxylic
acid, an aminosulfonic acid, an aromatic sulfonic acid, a
thiocarboxylic acid, a water soluble salt of any one of the
acids, a water soluble ester of any one of the acids, a
polyamine, a thioalcohol, a polyhydric alcohol and a
/3-dicarbonyl compound, for a length of time sufficient to
convert the amorphous ferric hydroxide into acicular
o-ferric oxide,
(b) converting the a-ferric oxide into y-ferric oxide by re-
duction thereof followed by oxidation, and
(c) forming an aqueous suspension of the y-ferric oxide and
198
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
APRIL 5, 1983
ferrous hydroxide and cobaltous hydroxide in amounts of
0.5-50 mole %. respectively in relation to the Fe content
of the 7-ferric oxide in the suspension, said suspension
having an alkaline pH and maintaining the suspension at a
temperature from 30° C. to 50° C. for a time sufficient to
form a cobalt modified y-ferric oxide; said cobalt modified
7-ferric oxide when incorporated into a tape effecting a
magnetic recording tape having an improved squareness
ratio.
4,379,184
PROCESS FOR FORMING A REFLECTING COPPER
COATING ON A FACE OF A GLASS SUBSTRATE
Nikolai S. Tsvetkov, ulitsa Peskovaya, 31, kv. 4; Igor I. Maleev,
ulitsa Goncharova, 29, kv. 13; Irina E. Opainich, ulitsa
Fedorova, 12, kv. 13; Lidia A. Lobkovskaya, ulitsa Uzhgorod-
skaya, 7, kv. 5; Alexandr R. Bogush, ulitsa Nauchnaya, 105,
kv. 105; Alexandra D. Sozanskaya, ulitsa Engelsa, 35, kv. 2;
Evgeny I. Onischak, ulitsa Marshala Rybalko, 12, kv. 72;
Evgeny I. Gladyshevsky, ulitsa Saksaganskogo, 5, kv. 6, and
M ikfiail D. Opainich, ulitsa Fedorova, 12, kv. 13, all of Lvov,
U.S.S.R.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,880
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., Feb. 28, 1979, 2743205;
Dec. 20, 197'' 2849301
Int. CV B05D 1/36. 3/02. 5/06: G02B 5/08
U.S. a. 427—169 7 Qaims
1. A process for forming a reflecting copper coating on a
face of a glass substrate, comprising the steps of:
(a) activating the glass face by contacting it with a 0.0005 to
0.007% by weight aqueous solution of SnCl2.2H20 to
sensitize it, then contacting, the sensitized glass face with
a 0.005 to 0.15% by weight aqueous solution of AgNGs;
(b) chemically coating the activated face of the glass sub-
strate with copper for 3 to 15 minutes in a coppering
solution preheated to 30° to 65° C;
(c) stabilizing the coated fact of the glass substrate with an
aqueous solution of a stabilizer;
(d) drying the stabilized copper coated face of the gla.ss
substrate.
4,379,185
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURE OF INLAID
VINYL-FLOORING
Merrill M. Smith, Morrisville, Pa., and Donald C. Ferguson,
Trenton, N.J., assignors to American Biltrite, Inc., Cam-
bridge, Mass.
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,402
Int. a.' B05D 5/06. 5/02
U.S. CI. 427—209 14 Qaims
curing the two layers of plastisol to form substantially
unitary layer encompassing said webbing;
feeding said backing material through a plurality of rotary
screen printers;
rotary screen printing the first of said plurality of pigmented
plastisols in a layer at least 8 mils (0.2 mm.) thick on a first
portion of said blocking material by forcing said plastisol
through an array of holes in the first of said rotary screen
printers;
partially gelling the first of said plastisols immediately after
it is printed on said backing;
rotary screen printing the second of said plurality of pig-
mented plastisols in a layer at least 8 mils thick on a second
portion of said blocking material by forcing said plastisol
through an array of holes in the second of said rotary
screen printers;
partially gelling the second of said plastisols immediately
after it is printed on said backing; and
curing said plurality of plastisols whereby a decorative
sheeting material is formed having a decorative pattern
defined by the differently pigmented plastisols deposited
on said backing.
4,379,186
FLUIDIZING FINE POWDER
Eric L. Bush, Matching Green, Near Harlow, and Ernest J.
Workman, Bishop's Stortford, both of England, assignors to
ITT Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,201
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 20, 1980,
8009410
Int. a.3 BOIJ 8/32: C23C 11/02
U.S. a. 427—213 7 Qaims
1. A process of coating inert powder that is too fine to be
readily fluidized on its own comprising the step of:
placing the powder in a fluidization chamber admixed with
a sufficient quantity of additional coarse powder of a
substantially large particle size, large enough to be capable
of being fluidized on its own in said fluidization chamber,
the quantity by weight of said fine powder significantly
exceeding the quantity by weight of said coarse powder
but the ratio by weight of said fine powder to said coarse
powder being not more than about 10;
fluidizing the fine powder with the coarse powder in the
chamber with a gas and/or vapor phase fluid; and
coating the fine powder with a valve metal.
4,379,187
METHOD OF PRODUONG A BRICK WALL FAONG
David C. Seman, 640 Brown Ave., Erie, Pa. 16502
Filed Dec. 2, 1974, Ser. No. 528,674
Int. a.3 B05D 1/32
U.S. a. 427—282 23 Qaims
1. A method of making a decorative sheeting material com-
prising the steps of:
preparing a plurality of differently pigmented plastisols
having a Brookfield viscosity of approximately 25 to 35
poise as measured at 25* C. and 20 rpm on a No. 4 spindle;
forming a backing material by:
depositing a first layer of plastisol on a release paper;
depositing an open mesh webbing on said first layer;
depositing a second layer of plastisol on said webbing and
first layer; and
1. A unit for simulating mortar lines of a brick wall compris-
ing a horizontal pressure sensitive adhesive tape of width and
length corresponding to a horizontal mortar line of a course of
a plurality of bricks, and a plurality of vertical tapes of length
and width corresponding to vertical mortar lines between
bricks in said course, the vertical tapes being adhered at one
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
199
end to said horizontal tape on spacing corresponding to the
spacing of the bricks in said course, and said unit being preas-
sembled and capable of installation as a unit on a surface on
which said mortar lines are to be simulated.
9. Starting with the unit of claim 1, the method of applying
a simulated brick facing to a wall which comprises
(1) applying to said wall a plurality of said units, said units
being applied to the wall with horizontal tapes spaced to
correspond to the horizontal mortar lines of a brick wall
and with the vertical taf)es of adjacent units in staggered
relation to each other in the manner of vertical mortar
lines in a brick wall,
(2) Plastering a skim coat of cement over said wall and tapes,
and
(3) pulling off the tapes substantially immediately to remove
the cement overlying the tapes and expose the mortar lines
while leaving the balance of the skim coat adhered to the
wall.
I 4,379,188
SURFACE HYDROLYZED OLEHN-VINYL ESTER
CONTAINER COATINGS
Alfred B. Zimmerman, Fairfield, and Leroy J. Memering, Cin-
cinnati, both of Ohio, assignors to National Distillers A
Chemical Corp., New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 140,509, Apr. 15, 1980, abandoned.
ij This application Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,258
Int. a.J B05D J/06. 3/04. 3/10: B65D 23/08
U.S. a. 428—35 13 Qaims
1. A container provided with an impact absorbent shatter
resistant coating having a frosty app>earance which comprises a
surface hydrolyzed olefin-vinyl ester copolymer, wherein the
degree of hydrolysis of said olefin-vinyl ester copolymer is
essentially to a depth of from about 10 percent to about 30
percent of the average thickness of the coating.
4,379,189
NONWOVEN TEXTILE FABRIC WITH FUSED FACE
AND RAISED LOOP PILE
Louis Piatt, Seneca, S.C, assignor to Phillips Petroleum Com-
pany, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,142
Int. a.3 D04H 18/00
U.S. a. 428—89 46 Qaims
4. A textile fabric comprising:
a first side and a second side;
coherent nonwoven fibers;
a first fused face on said first side wherein at least a portion
of said nonwoven fibers on said first side are fused to-
gether;
a second fused face on said second side wherein at least a
portion of said nonwoven fibers on said second side are
fused together; and
an unfused plurality of said nonwoven fibers extending out-
wardly from one of said sides of said fabric whereby a
raised pile is formed on said one of said sides.
4,379,190
HLLED THERMOPLASTIC COMPOSITIONS BASED ON
MIXTURES OF ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMERS
Timothy T. Schenck, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 251,989, Apr. 6, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 176,782,
Aug. 11, 1980, abandoned. This application Jun. 15, 1981, Ser.
No. 273,420
Int. a.3 B32B 27/30: C08K 5/01. 5/10 5/11
U.S. a. 428—95 28 Qaims
1. A composition consisting essentially of
(a) from about 5 percent to about 60 percent by weight of a
mixture of at least two copolymers of ethylene, copolymer
(A) and copolymer (B), each copolymer having at least
one polar comonomer selected from the group consistmg
of vinyl esters of saturated carboxylic acids wherein the
acid moiety has up to 4 carbon atoms, unsaturated mono-
or dicarboxylic acids of 3 to 5 carbon atoms, the salts of
said unsaturated acids, and esters of said unsaturated acids
wherein the alcohol moiety has I to 8 carbon atoms,
copolymer (A) having a polar comonomer content of
from about 2 to about 30 percent by weight, an ethylene
content of from about 70 to about 98 percent by weight
and a melt index of from about 0. 1 to about 20, and co-
polymer (B) having a polar conomoner content of from
about 28 to about 70 percent by weight, an ethylene con-
tent of from about 30 to about 72 percent by weight and a
melt index of from about 5 to about 1000, provided that
the polar comonomer content of copolymer (B) is at least
12 percent by weight higher than the polar comonomer
content of copolymer (A) and the weight ratio of copoly-
mer (A) to copolymer (B) is from about 99/1 to about
55/45;
(b) from about 40 percent to about 90 percent by weight of
filler;
(c) from 0 percent to about 1 5 percent by weight of at least
one plasticizer selected from the group consisting of pro-
cessing oils, polyesters, polyethers and polyether esters
provided that, when the filler level is above about 75
percent by weight, there is at least about 1 percent by
weight of plasticizer present, provided that when the filler
level is at least 70 percent by weight said composition
exhibits a tensile elongation at least 50% higher than a
blend containing a single copolymer of ethylene having
the same polar comonomer content and melt index as the
mixture of at least two copolymers of ethylene has;
(d) from 0 to about 27% by weight of elastomeric polymer;
and
(e) from 0 to about 48% by weight of olefin polymer selected
from the group consisting of low density branched poly-
ethylene, high density linear polyethylene, linear copoly-
mers of ethylene and another olefm comonomer, polypro-
pylene and copolymers of propylene and ethylene where
the ethylene content is up to 20% by weight.
4,379,191
HONEYCOMB NOISE ATTENUATION STRUCTURE
Stanley L. Beggs, Cbula Vista; Frank J. Riel, San Diego, and D.
W. R. Lawson, Bonita, ail of Calif., assignors to Rohr Indus-
tries, Inc., Vista, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 604,200, Oct. 13, 1975. This application
Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,192
Int. a.3 B32B 3/12
U.S. Q. 428—118 7 Qaims
1. An acoustical honeycomb sandwich panel for use as sup-
porting structure within an aircraft jet engine inlet and nacelle
structures wherein said acoustical honeycomb sandwich panel
is exposed to the sound of jet engines and other noise produc-
ing mechanisms comprising:
a honeycomb core having a multiplicity of open cells with
walls of thin sheet material disposed transversely to the
panel;
200
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
a perforated facing of thin sheet material having one surface
thereof bonded to one core face;
an imperforate facing of thin sheet material bonded to the
other core face; and
a thm sheet of porous fibrous material bonded to the other
surface of said perforated facing sheet with a bonding
medium selected from a class of electrically insulating
adhesive systems whose melt viscosity, during the curing
process, is sufficiently high so that the adhesive will not
fiow into the pores of the porous sheet by capillary attrac-
tion whereby to maintain the full porosity of the porous
fibrous materia! over the holes in said perforate facing
sheet and insulating said thin sheet of porous fibrous mate-
rial from said peforated facing sheet, the pores of said
porous material providing communication between the
core cells and the atmosphere through the perforations of
said perforated sheet.
\
4,379,192
IMPERVIOUS ABSORBENT BARRIER FABRIC
EMBODYING nLMS AND FIBROUS WEBS
Joseph D. Wahlquist, Woodstock, and Jay Shultz, Roswell, both
of Ga., assignors to Kimberly-Clark Corporation, Neenah.
Wis.
Filed Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,247
Int. CI.' B32B 3/00
U.S. CI. 428—156 20 Claims
D a u
13
1. An absorbent impervious barrier fabric comprising a
fibrcus section including a mat of polymeric melt blown micro-
fibers with an average diameter of up to about 10 microns and
a basis weight between about 0.3 oz/yd^ and 4.0 oz/yd^, and an
impervious polymeric film between about 0.0006 and 0.0016
inches thick adjacent said mat, said fibrous section and film
being united in a pattern of compacted bond regions occupying
less than about 1 5 percent of the total area and formed by the
application of heat and pressure, said bond regions comprising
pillars of bonds extending completely through the fabric from
the outer surface where the fibrous elements are fused, to the
mterface between the mat and the film where the microfibers
are fused to the film and the film has increased crystallinity in
the bond regions without disruptions in the imperviousness of
the film, the bond intensity tapering from said fused regions
toward a low bonding level in the central plane of said mat to
provide a double gradient in bond intensity in said pillars of
bonds, the surface of the fibrous section of the fabric having a
shape formed by depressions m the bond regions, providing a
three dimensional configuration.
4,379,193
HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATES
CONTAINING AN AIR-LAID WEB AND METHOD OF
PRODUCING SAME
James E. B. Hunt, Staines, England, assignor to Formica Corpo-
ration, Wayne, N.J.
Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,418
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 29, 1980,
8007002
Int. aj B32B 3/00. 23/04. 23/10
U.S. a. 428—196 7 Qaims
1. A heat and pressure consolidated high pressure decorative
laminate comprising, in superimposed relationship,
(a) a monostichous layer of randomly oriented, substantially
non-hydrogen bonded, air-laid cellulosic fibers from about
0.5 to 2.5 mm in average length, said layer being from
about 0.25 mm to 2.25 mm thick, of uniform composition
and basis weight and containing from about 20 to 35%, by
weight, based on the total weight of fiber and resin in (a),
of a thermoset resin and
(b) a thermoset resin impregnated, decorative sheet.
4,379,194
HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATES
CONTAINING AN AIR-LAID WEB OF HBERS AND
HLLER AND METHOD OF PRODUCING SAME
Theodore R. Clarke, and John F. Hosier, both of Cincinnati,
Ohio, assignors to Formica Corporation, Wayne, N.J.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,345
Int. a.3 B32B 3/00. 5/02
U.S. CI. 428—203 5 Claims
1. A heat and pressure consolidated decorative laminate
comprising, in superimposed relationship,
(a) a monostichous layer of randomly oriented, substantially
non-hydrogen bonded, air-laid cellulosic fibers of from
about 0.25 mm to 2.25 mm thickness and containing from
about 10 to 40%, by weight, based on the total weight of
fiber and resin in (a), of a thermoset resin and from about 1%
to about 20%, by weight, based on the total weight of said
fiber, of pulverized, particulate filler having a particle size
no larger than about 200 microns, and
(b) a thermoset resin impregnated cellulosic print sheet.
4,379,195
LOW VALUE RESISTOR INKS
Ashok N. Prabhu, Plainsboro, and Kenneth W. Hang, Princeton
Junction, both of N.J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,937
Int. C1.3 B32B 3/10: HOIB 1/02
U.S. CI. 428—209 10 Claims
1. A resistor ink suitable for forming a resistor film on a
circuit board comprising:
(a) from about 30 to about 85 percent by weight of a conduc-
tive component comprising stannous oxide and molybde-
num trioxide or a mixture of molybdenum trioxide and
metallic molybdenum;
(b) from about 10 to about 65 percent by weight of a glass
selected from the group consisting of:
(i) a barium aluminum borate glass consisting of from
about 40 to about 55 percent by weight of barium oxide,
from about 16 to about 22 percent by weight of alumi-
num oxide, and from about 14 to about 40 percent by
weight of boron trioxide; and
(ii) a barium calcium borosilicate glass consisting of from
about 40 to about 55 percent by weight of barium oxide,
from about 10 to about 15 percent by weight of calcium
oxide, from about 14 to about 25 percent by weight of
boron trioxide and from about 1 3 to about 23 percent by
weight of silicon dioxide; and
(c) from about 5 to about 40 percent by weight of a suitable
organic vehicle.
April 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
201
' 4,379,196
PROTECTIVE COATING FOR ALUMINUM AND
METHOD OF MAKING
Warren Halper, Hendersonville, N.C., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
I Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,895
Int. a.3 G02B 5/08; B32B 15/04
U.S. a. 428-213 7 Qaims
1. A corrosion and abrasion resistant composite reflective
aluminum article articled comprising an aluminum substrate, a
silica glass coating on said aluminum substrate tightly adherent
thereto, and a second coating overlying said silica glass coating
comprising a mixture of colloidal silica and the partial conden-
sate of a silanol.
6. An article as defined in claim 1, said silica glass coating
having a thickness of not more than about 0.2 mil.
7. An article as defined in claim 6, said second coating being
substantially thicker than said silica glass coating.
4 379 197
STRETCH WRAP HLM COMPOSITION
Cipriano Cipriani, Morristown, and Henry J. Boyd, Laurence
Harbor, both of N.J., assignors to El Paso Polyolefins Com-
pany, Paramus, N.J.
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,716
Int. a.3 B32B 7/02
U.S. a. 428-220 10 Qaims
1. A stretch wrap film composition consisting essentially of
(a) a linear low density polyethylene resin free of any poly-
merized vinyl acetate groups said resin being a copolymer
of ethylene with one or more comonomers selected from
C4 to C 10 alpha-olefins and having a density in the range of
from about 0.900 to about 0.940 g/cc and a melt index
between about 0.1 and 10 g/10 min. and
(b) from about 0.3 to about 3.0 weight percent sorbitan
monooleate based on the weight of the resin,
said composition in film form having excellent cling properties
without exhibiting excessive adherence to film processing
equipment.
4,379,198
COMPOSITE MATERIAL CONTAINING A
THERMOPLASTIC SYNTHETIC RESIN LAYER
Hans Jaeschke, St.-Augustin; Paul Spielau, Troisdorf-Eschmar,
and Horst Ulb, Troisdorf-Sieglar, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft, Troisdorf,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
j Filed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,615
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 1,
1980, 3036994
Int. a.3 B32B 27/04. 31/08. 31/12. 31/20
U.S. a. 428-288 7 Qaims
synthetic resin and a textile layer pressed onto the resin layer in
the heated condition; said textile layer consisting of a mechani-
cally prestrengthened, polyester fiber mat bound chemically
with a binder consisting essentially of a synthetic resin disper-
sion of polymers of acrylic or methacrylic acid esters and/or
copolymers of esters of acrylic or methacrylic acid and of
acrylonitrile.
7. A method for producing a composite materia! which
comprises chemically bonding the fibers of a polyester fiber
mat which has been needled with a binder consisting essen-
tially of a dispersion of polymers of acrylic or methacrylic acid
esters and/or copolymers of esters of acrylic acid or meth-
acrylic acid and acrylonitrile. and thereafter laminating the
polyester mat to a layer of a synthetic resin by application of
heat and pressure.
4,379,199
HEAT-RESISTING LAYER-CONSTRUCTIONS AND
METHOD FOR PREPARING THE SAME
Susumu Senaha; Tetsuya Chiba; Akira Ohno, and Shitomi Kata-
yama, all of Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to Yokohama Kiko
Co. and NHK Spring Co., Ltd., both of Kanagawa, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 26,396, Apr. 2, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 287,855
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 1, 1978, 53/39409
Int. Q.3 B32B 9/04. 15/08. 27/06
U.S. Q. 428-332 5 Qaims
250 'C
TIME (hr)
1. Heat resisting layer-constructions consisting of
(a) a heat resistant, base substrate and
(b) a resinous layer coated and heat cured on said substrate,
said resinous layer (b) comprising a polyaralkylsiloxane com-
prising structural units having the general formula (I)
R
I
Ar
(I)
(-Si-0-),.(-Si-0-)^.(-Si-0-)^
wherein R is a lower alkyl radical; Ar is an ary! radical; X is a
polycondensable functional radical; x, y and z, each represents
the molar proportion of the unit for which it is the subscript,
respectively, and wherein the free bonds in each of the struc-
tural units shown in the general formula (I) are selected from
the radicals as defined for R, Ar and X, or may combine with
one another to form a bridging bond or may be a mono-func-
tional radical, so long as thj numerical molar fraction:
aryl radicals
aryl radicals + alkyl radicals
1. A composite material, especially suitable for chemical
apparatus construction comprising a layer of a thermoplastic
in said polyaralkylsiloxane having the general formula (I) is
from 0.65 to 1 .00,
the functionality of the polycondensable functional groups
in said polyaralkylsiloxane having the general formula (I)
is from 2 to 3, and
the ratio of the number of carbon atoms to the number of
silicon atoms in said polyaralkylsiloxane having the gen-
eral formula (I) is from 4.25 to 16.
202
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^79,200
NOVEL METHOD OF PRODUaNG ION EXCHANGE
MEMBRANE
Sueo Machi, Takasaki; Isao Ishigaki, Maebashi, and Takanobu
Sugo, Gunma, all of Japan, assignors to Japan Atomic Energy
Research Institute, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 118,104, Feb. 4, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,054
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 5, 1979, 54-11992
Int. a.3 B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 428—337 5 Qaims
1. A method of producing an ion exchange membrane hav-
ing an electrical resistance of 50n cm or lower and a uniform
graft distribution comprising
irradiating a polyethylene film not more than 150 ^m thick
with ionizing radiation for a total dose of 1-30 Mrads in
vacuum or in an inert gas,
then contacting the irradiated film with a 15 to 50 wt%
aqueous solution of acrylic acid and/or methacrylic acid,
substantially free of oxygen and which contains a homo-
polymerization inhibitor of a ferrous salt or a cupric salt to
graft acrylic acid and/or methacrylic acid onto the poly-
ethylene film, for a time sufficient to provide a degree of
grafting of at least 60%, and
then treating the grafted film with a 2 to 10 wt% aqueous
solution of potassium hydroxide at a temperature of room
temperature to 90° C. for 5-120 minutes.
4,379,201
MULTIACRYLATE CROSS-LINKING AGENTS IN
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE PHOTOADHESIVES
Steven M. Heilmann, North St. Paul, and John D. Moon, Has-
tings, both of Minn., assignors to Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,116
Int. CV B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 428—345 19 Qaims
1. Method of making pressure-sensitive adhesive tape using a
coatable mixture which is polymerizable by ultraviolet radia-
tion to a pressure-sensitive adhesive state, which mixture com-
prises (a) partially polymerized acrylic acid ester of non-terti-
ary alcohol, the alkyl groups of which have an average of
about 4 to 14 carbon atoms, said acrylic acid ester being per se
polymerizable to a sticky, stretchable, elastic adhesive mass
and (b) a photoinitiator, which coatable mixture is (1) coated
onto a backing member and (2) exp)osed to ultraviolet radiation
to polymerize the mixture to a pressure-sensitive adhesive
state, wherein the improvement comprises:
dissolved in the mixture is polyacrylic-functional crosslink-
ing monomer having less than 10 atoms in the chain be-
tween polymerizable vinyl groups and being present in an
amount providing about 0.5 to 5 X 10" ' diacrylate equiva-
lent per gram of component (a),
thus providing a crosslinked adhesive coating affording an
Adhesion Value of at least 83 N/dm and a Shear Value of at
least 1250 minutes.
8. A photoactive mixture having a coatable viscosity of 300
to 20,000 centipoises at ordinary room temperature and com-
prising
(a) a partially polymerized acrylic acid ester of non-tertiary
alcohol, the alkyl groups of which have an average of
about 4 to 14 carbon atoms, said acrylic acid ester being
per se polymerizable to a sticky, stretchable, elastic adhe-
sive mass, and
(b) a photoinitiator
wherein the improvement comprises
dissolved in the mixture is polyacrylic-functional crosslink-
ing monomer having less than 10 atoms in the chain be-
tween polymerizable vinyl groups and being present in an
amount providing about 0.5 to 5 X 10 "'diacrylate equiva-
lent per gram of component (a).
15. Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape comprising a flexible
backing member and a pressure-sensitive adhesive coating
comprising a copolymer of
(a) a partially polymerized acrylic acid ester of non-tertiary
alcohol, the alkyl groups of which have an average of
about 4 to 14 carbon atoms, said acrylic acid ester being
per se polymerizable to a sticky, stretchable, elastic adhe-
sive mass, and
(b) at least one copolymerizable monomer selected from
acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, acrylamide,
methacrylamide, an N-acryloylamino acid, and N-vinyl-2-
pyrrolidone in an amount providing up to about 12% by
weight of component (a),
which adhesive coating is free from chlorine and other corro-
sive material, wherein the improvement comprises,
the tape has an Adhesion Value as herein defined of at least
83 N/dm and a Shear Value of at least 1250 minutes.
ELECTRICAL
4,379^2
SOLAR CELLS
Bruce Chalmers, Falmouth, Mass., assignor to Mobil Solar
Energy Corporation, Waltham, Mass.
I Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,905
Int. a.3 HOIL 31/04
U.S. a. 136—256 10 Claims
1 1. A solar Cell assembly comprising in combination
! a solar cell for generating an electrical current in resgjjnse to
electromagnetic radiation, said cell having a front surface
and an electrode obscuring a plurality of regions of said
front surface, said regions each having a characteristic
dimension in a first direction and being spaced from one
another along said first direction in a predetermined spa-
tial frequency, said electrode comprising a comb-like
array of equally spaced-apart like conductors;
I a transparent front cover of predetermined refractive index
having opposed first and second surfaces, said first surface
facing said front surface of said cell and confronting a
medium having a refractive index different from said
predetermined refractive index, said first surface having a
contour comprising a plurality of substantially identical
cylindrical segments having a like plurality of substan-
tially cylindrical axes, adjacent ones of said cylinder axes
being spaced apart a distance similar to that between
adjacent ones of said conductors, each of said cylinder
axes being disposed (a) in a plane substantially parallel to
said conductors, (b) parallel to individual conductors, and
(c) equidistant from an adjacent pair of said conductors,
said cylinders being dimensioned and disposed so that
selected rays of said radiation incident upon them are
deflected through a predetermined angle and directed to
regions of said front surface which are not obscured by
said electrode, and said second surface being a substan-
tially planar surface parallel to said cylinder axes; and
means securing said front cover to said cell in overlaying
relation to said front surface with said first surface posi-
tioned at a predetermined distance from said electrode.
4,379,203
HOUSING FOR LASER APPARATUS
Giinther Koszytorz, Erlangen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,456
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 23,
1980, 3019915
Int. a.3 HOIS 3/04
U.S. a. 174—15 R 5 Qaims
comprising two semi-cylindrical housing halves which in the
assembled configuration of the housing form a cylindrical
housing, each housing half comprismg a semi-circular outer
surface and a planar inner surface having a cutout extending
therein parallel to the axis of the housing half, the cutouts of
the respective housing halves being oppositely arranged in the
assembled configuration of the housing to form a chamber,
each cutout including a base and the base of at least one of the
cutouts being a planar surface, between the cutout and the
semicircular outer surface of at least one of the housing halves
are disposed parallel to the axis of that housing half at least two
canals for coolant and at least one cable channel for electrical,
wires, and means for joining the two housing halves together.
4,379,204
STUFFING TUBE
Frederick Perrault. Torrance, and Raymond E. Perrault, Ran-
cho Palos Verdes, both of Calif., assignors to Whipple Patent
Management Corporation, Sherman Oaks, Calif.
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,916
Int. a.3 H02G 3/22
U.S. a. 174—65 SS 23 Claims
1. A stuffing tube device for providing a seal around electri-
cal cables or the like extended through bulkheads and decks of
ships comprising:
a tube of substantially uniform wall thickness havmg
a first portion of a first diameter,
a second portion of a second and larger diameter, and
a shoulder between said first and second portions,
a member having an interiorly and exteriorly tapered por-
tion, a straight cylindrical section at the inner end of said
tapered portion, and an opening therethrough adapted to
receive an electrical cable or the like,
the exterior of said tapered portion engaging said shoul-
der, washer means in said second portion,
a threaded member adjacent said washer means,
said second portion of said tube having threads at the
outer end thereof meshed with the threads of said
threaded member, whereby said threaded member can
bias said washer means inwardly of said tube upon
relative advancement of said threads,
and a seal between said washer means and said member,
one end of said seal engaging said washer means and the
opposite end of said seal engaging said tapered portion,
whereby upon such relative advancement, said seal is
compressed for providing a seal around an electrical
cable extending through said tubular member and
around the wall of said second portion of said tubular
member.
1. A housing for laser apparatus to which a coolant is sup-
plied and which is provided with electrical lines, the housing
! 4,379,205
ANALOG SIGNAL SCRAMBLING SYSTEM
Aaron D. Wyner, Maplewood, N J., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N J.
FUed Jun. 22, 1979, Ser. No. 51,107
Int a.3 H04L 9/00
U.S. a. 178—22.10 8 Claims
1. Scrambling apparatus for converting digital samples of an
analog signal having a prescribed bandwidth into a scrambled
203
204
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
analog signal for application to a channel having a bandwidth
no greater than that needed for the original signal, comprising:
means for forming a first vector a of discrete prolate sphe-
roidal sequence coefficient signals from said digital sam-
ples of said analog signal,
means responsive to said signals formed by said first means
for rearranging said first vector of signals into a scrambled
,0« .'C-
.'■'' t
n:
■Ci' ■•_
vector /3 of discrete prolate spheroidal sequence coeffici-
ent signals.
means responsive to said output rearranging means for re-
forming said scrambled vector of discrete prolate spheroi-
dal sequence coefficient signals to output scrambled digi-
tal signal samples {B„) for transmission, and
means for applying said output scrambled digital signal
samples as an analog signal to said channel.
4,379.206
MONITORING CIRCUIT FOR A DESCRAMBLING
DEVICE
Shinichiro Aoki, Sagamihara, Japan, assignor to Fujitsu Lim-
ited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,261
Int. CI.' H04L 9/()0: G06F H/08
L.S. CL 178—22.13 12 Claims
connected to said first and second pseudo noise sequence
generators, respectively, for discriminating between the
first and second pseudo noise sequence signals, and for
generating a pulse shaped signal when the first and second
pseudo noise sequence signals are different;
gate means, having first and secoiid inputs operatively con-
nected to the codeword detector and said discriminator,
respectively, for transmitting therethrough the pulse
shaped signal when said gate means is operatively acti-
vated by the codeword detector signal, said gate means
comprising:
a gate signal generator, having an input operatively con-
nected to the codeword detector, and having an output,
for generating a gate signal, wherein the time period of
the gate signal is a first predetermined time period, after
said gate signal is operatively activated by the code-
word detector signal; and
an AND gate having first and second inputs operatively
connected to the output of said gate signal generator
and said discriminator, respectively, and having an
output; and
a monitoring signal generator, operatively connected to
the output of said AND gate, for converting the pulse
shaped signal into a monitoring signal.
4,379,207
AUTOMATIC NOISE ELIMINATING DEVICE FOR AN
FM RECEIVER
Masaki Kubota, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,712
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1979, 54-
126993[U]
Int. CI.' H04H 5/00
U.S. CI. 179—1 GJ 4 Claims
'fcx
1cooe«OR:
IsSfxi m5.«|
:-j
C.T c,s=
-.a -J
7. A monitoring circuit, operatively connected to a code-
word detector which generates a codeword detector signal,
and operatively connected to receive first and second demodu-
lator signals, for a descrambling device, comprising:
a first pseudo noise sequence generator, operatively con-
nected to the codeword detector, for generating a first
pseudo noise sequence signal when the codeword detector
signal is received;
a second pseudo noise sequence generator, operatively con-
nected to the codeword detector, for generating a second
pseudo noise sequence signal when the codeword detector
signal is received;
first means, having a first input operatively connected to said
first pseudo noise sequence generator and having a second
input operatively connected to receive the first demodula-
tor signal, for generating a first data signal from the first
pseudo noise sequence signal and the first demodulator
signal;
second means, having a first input operatively connected to
said first pseudo noise sequence generator and having a
second input operatively connected to receive the second
demodulator signal, for generating a second data signal
from the second pseudo noise sequence signal and the
second demodulator signal;
a discriminator, having first and second inputs operatively
1. An automatic noise eliminating device for an FM receiver,
comprising:
(a) a multipath detector which detects an amplitude modu-
lated signal caused by multipath transmission in an FM
intermediate frequency signal and outputs a control signal
according to the magnitude of the amplitude modulated
signal, said detector having (I) an amplifier with an auto-
matic gain control circuit connected to an intermediate
frequency amplifier of the FM receiver, (2) a first AM
detector receiving the output of said amplifier and deriv-
ing an envelope signal therefrom, (3) a capacitor through
which is fed the envelope signal from said first AM detec-
tor and which cuts off low frequency signal components
and the direct current component therefrom; and (4) a
second AM detector connected in series with said capaci-
tor and detecting a signal including amplitude modulated
signal components in the signal passed by the capacitor
and outputting a DC voltage signal depending upon the
detected signal; and
(b) at least one high frequency cutoff circuit which cancels
higher frequency signal components of an audio signal
according to the level of the control signal from said
multipath detector.
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
I 4,379,208
AM STEREO RECEIVER LOGIC
Tim D. Isbell, and Don R. Sauer, both of San Jose, Calif., assign-
ors to National Semiconductor Corporation, Santa Clara,
Calif.
Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,336
Int. a.3 H04H 5/00
U.S. CI. 179—1 GS 4 Claims
ij
1
AlC
f >!.(
Af.'
1^
L
fl I '
_LX.
-SI
' ilUSSPHAil TjU*-
ItlKK
1. A logic circuit for operating an AM stereo radio receiver,
said receiver including an envelope detector which provides
an L + R signal along with a DC potential, a phase modulation
decoder which provides an L — R signal along with a stereo
pilot signal and an excess phase potential which appears when
said receiver is mistuned, and a matrix which combines said
L + R and said L — R signals to produce L and R signals for
stereo sound reproduction, said matrix including electronic
means for blending said L and R signals thereby to mute said
stereo, said logic circuit comprising:
means for visually indicating the presence of a stereo signal
in said receiver;
means coupled to said phase modulation decoder output for
extracting said stereo pilot signal;
means for actuating said visually indicating means in re-
sponse to said stereo pilot signal; and
an OR gate having a first input coupled to said means for
extracting said pilot signal and a second input coupled to
said excess phase potential, whereby said receiver oper-
ates in a monaural mode when either mistuned or in the
absence of said stereo pilot signal.
4,379,209
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
Hideki Sakano, Iwafunemachi, Japan, assignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasakishi, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,394
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 20, 1980, 55-20099
Int. a.3 H03F 1/38
U.S. a. 179—1 A 13 Claims
.«
i«v ~^: t
^-
iia, ,i6
4^Me
"T Lj.i^ll?!..; ^0
J4
• ••lOip
1. An audio amplifier for connection to a pair of terminals of
a loudspeaker through like individual extension wires compris-
a line input terminal;
205
a line amplifier having an input terminal connected to the
line input terminal;
a line output terminal for connection to one of the termmals
of the loudspeaker through one of the extension wires;
a grounded terminal for connection to the other of the termi-
nals of the loudspeaker through the other of the extension
wires;
an auxiliary terminal for connection to the grounded termi-
nal of the loudspeaker;
a positive feedback circuit connected between the auxiliary
terminal and the input terminal of the line amplifier; and
apparatus for protecting the line amplifier and loudspeaker
from damage by voltage overload including:
(a) a first switch m the positive feedback circuit between
the auxiliary terminal and the input terminal of the line
amplifier: and
(b) controller means sensitive to the voltage at the auxil-
iary terminal for opening, or maintaining open, said
switch when the latter voltage exceeds a predetermined
value.
4,379,210
RINGING DETECTOR FOR USE BY THE DEAF
Richard G. Sparber, Wheaton, III., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,751
Int. a.5 H04M J 1/02
U.S. a. 179—84 L
11 Oaims
se
20Kr t ■■ iU .
DINGING ,-UJ_ ir-^
^4t
1. A telephone ringing detector circuit connectible between
an illuminating device and a source of alternating current and
to a telephone line, said detector circuit comprising:
first circuit means including first rectifier means connected
between said illuminating device and said source for sup-
plying current to said illuminating device only during first
half cycles of said alternating current for energizing said
illuminating device to a first level of illumination; and
second circuit means including second rectifier means and
also connected between said illuminating device and said
source operated responsive to ringing voltage on said line
for supplying current to said illuminating device also
during second half cycles of said alternating current for
energizing said illuminating device to a second, higher
level of illumination.
4,379,211
ARCUATELY TENSIONED PIEZOELECTRIC
DIAPHRAGM MICROPHONE
Edwin Joscelyn, Commack; Michael J. Ferrante, Bayshore, and
Robert F. Saiya, North Babylon, all of N.Y., assignors to
Telephonies Corporation, Huntington, N.Y.
Filed Oct 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,528
Int. a.JH04R 17/02
U.S. a. 179—110 A 11 aaims
1. A piezoelectric acousto-electric transducer composing:
(a) a peripherally supported, metallized piezoelectric dia-
phragm;
(b) a baffle plate in close parallel proximity to said piezoelec-
tric diaphragm;
(c) a boss protruding from said baffle plate with sufficient
206
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
height to arcuately tension said diaphragm away from said
baffle plate; and
(d) means for making electrical contact to the metallized
piezoelectric diaphragm.
4,379,212
ELECTRO-ACOUSTIC TRANSDUCER
Erwin Martin, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Sie-
mens Aktiengeseijschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,692
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 29,
1980, 3007834
Int. a.' H04R 15/00
U.S. CI. 179—110 A 7 Qaims
,« 9 I] li 17
^^^Mv5r^
JIZZZZZZZZZZZ.
^^
1. An electro-acoustic transducer, comprising:
a transducer plate arranged in a housing and by which a
space in the housing is divided into a front chamber and a
rear chamber;
a fitting which closes off the front chamber;
at least one Helmholtz absorption resonator means arranged
in conjunction with a plate in the real* chamber for attenu-
ating rises in resonance;
the Helmholtz resonator means comprising a cylindrical
collar zone having one end closed off except for narrow
slot-like sound openings arranged in said plate and the
other end of the collar being substantially completely
open; and
the slot-like openings being die cast in the plate and the
specific dimensions being chosen to establish a desired air
friction resistance of the Helmholtz resonator means to
achieve a desired attenuation response.
4,379,213
ELECTROACOUSTICAL CONVERTER
Lutz Lehnhardt, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
BM-Elektronik Meletzky KG, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 209,115
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 21,
1979. 2946981
Int. a.J H04R 7//¥, 9/06
U.S. a. 179—115.5 R 11 Qaims
1. An electro-acoustic converter, comprising:
a vibration generator having an annular vibration coil;
means at least partially housing said vibration generator and
providing a gap out through which said vibration coil
projects;
a barrel-shaped diaphragm member comprising a plurality of
pre-bent arcuate strip means arranged in a ring so as to be
convex outwards and so as to have two opposite annular
ends;
the vibration generator being disposed at one end of the
barrel-shaped diaphragm with the vibration coil thereof
connected to said one end of said diaphragm;
a traverse bar mounted to said vibration generator housing
means and extending longitudinally centrally through said
vibration generator;
means connecting the opposite end of the diaphragm with
the traverse bar; and
a sound-conducting member spacedly disposed internally of
the diaphragm and based in the vicinity of said one end of
said diaphragm, the diaphragm and sound-conducting
member being so shaped and positioned relative to one
another so as to leave an annular gap therebetween, which
gap expands in cross-sectional area from said one end
toward said opposite end of said diaphragm, so that sound
waves radiated internally from said diaphragm are con-
ducted towards said opposite end of said diaphragm.
4,379,214
TRIGGER OPERATED TOOL HANDLE SWITCH
Benjamin H. Matthews, Peninsula, Ohio, assignor to Lucerne
Products, Inc., Hudson, Ohio
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,827
Int. a.^ HOIH 13/08
U.S. CI. 200—157 4 Oalms
1. In an electric switch mechanism for portable electric
motor drive type tools having a reciprocable contact carrier
and a movable electrically conductive bridging contact carried
by the contact carrier for making and breaking electrical
contact with coacting stationary contacts in the switch mecha-
nism, the improvement comprising; said bridging contact hav-
ing a protuberance at each point of contact with the contact
carrier to ensure that such contact therebetween at each such
point is always at the same spot(s) on the bridging contact
when the bridging contact is reciprocated by the contact car-
rier in either direction, said bridging contact including a hori-
zontally elongated body portion having a downwardly and
rearwardly extending trailing contact end portion having one
of said protuberances on its rearward edge, and said body
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
207
,lo
rtion having an upwardly extending stem having another of
said protuberances on its forward edge.
4,379,215
ORBITAL CASSETTE WELDING HEAD
Roderick G. Rohrberg, 3121 Fujita St., Torrance, Calif. 90505
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,092
Int. a.J B23K 9/225
U.S. a. 219—60 A 8 Qaims
r I
1. In a welding device for welding together tubing sections
or the like and having a tube clamping unit for clamping said
tube sections together with their edges in abutment against
each other, a cassette type welding unit carrying the welding
electrode which can be removably joined to said clamping unit
with the welding electrode directly opposite the interface
between said tubing sections and means for rotatably driving
the electrode in an orbital path around the interface between
the tubing sections, the improvement comprising
a drive member fabricated of an electrically conductive
material, the electrode being mounted on said drive mem-
ber in electrical contact therewith, said drive member
being horseshoe shaped and having a plurality of paired
balls seated therein in opposing relationship, said balls
protruding from the opposite surfaces of said drive mem-
ber to form bearings therefor,
a housing forming a cassette rotatably supporting said drive
I member, said housing having an outer portion fabricated
' of an electrically non-conductive material and an inner
j portion in the form of a plate member fixedly mounted in
said outer portion, said inner portion having a pair of
oppositely positioned raceways in which the paired balls
of said drive member ride,
a drive motor,
gear train means for coupling the drive shaft assembly of
said drive member to said drive motor,
brush means for coupling welding current to said drive
member and thence to said welding electrode,
homing switch means for disconnecting power to said drive
I motor when said drive means has completed a predeter-
mined orbital rotation, and
amping means for removably connecting the welding unit
to the clamping unit.
4,379,216
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SOLDER BONDING
MULTILAYER TUBING
Hans J. Weiss, Nassaulsche Str. 21, 5912 HUchenbach, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,854
Qainis priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 28,
1980, 3012086
Int. a.3 B23K 1/14
U^. a. 219—85 CM 9 Oaims
1. In a method of making tubing wherein:
steel strip is continuously pulled at a predetermined feed
speed from a supply, is shaped into a multilayer tube of a
predetermined mass per unit of length, and said tube is
advanced at said speed through a soldering station;
solder is continuously fed to said tube in said station;
an electric current is passed through said tube between a
contact engaging said tube in said station and a contact
engaging said tube adjacent said station to fuse said solder;
and , ^
«e — .^ «9-
said tube and solder are cooled downstream of said station to
bond same together; the improvement wherein
the spacing between said contacts is set in dependence on the
product of said feed speed and said predetermined mass
per unit of length of said tube and is varied substantially
proportionately with said product when same varies.
4,379,217
METHOD AND MEANS OF MELTING FROZEN
MATERIAL ON TERRAIN OR WATER SURFACES
Grace A. Youmans, 1816 - 80th St., Des Moines, Iowa 50322
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,734
Int. a.' B23K 27/00
U.S. a. 219—121 L 9 Qaims
1.--
1. The combination of an airborne helicopter and an ice and
snow melting device, comprising,
a helicopter device having the capability of hovenng in
midair and the ability to move both laterally and verti-
cally,
said helicopter having a chassis with an undercarriage
means,
a downwardly extending turret on said undercarriage,
a rotatable heat ray emitting means on said turret for emit-
ting heat rays downwardly from said helicopter to melt
ice and snow on the terrain below said helicopter.
208
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,218 welding mask so as to insure intimate contact between the strip
FLUXLESS ION BEAM SOLDERING PROCESS and support member and subjecting the combination to a laser
Kurt R. Grebe, Beacon, and James M. E. Harper, Yorktown
Heights, both of N.Y., assignors to International Business
Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 278,964 (
Int. a.5 B23K 15/00
L.S. CI. 219—121 ED 8 Qaims
^
^
Kill [^■^■MlB^IB^II I I I I I
, I!
. . . . t
19 1 ,AA/\J\, .tr^J . 'k-^
beam so that energy passes through the mask to weld the strip
and support member together.
1. A process for fluxlessly joming members together includ-
mg the steps of:
(a) providing a first member having disposed a plurality of
pads of a low melting material;
(b) providing a second member having disposed a plurality
of matching pads to which pads of said first member is to
be jomed;
(c) simultaneously exposing said pads on said first and sec-
ond members to an ion beam of sufficient energy and for
a time sufficient to clean and melt said pads;
(d) coolmg said exposed pads to cause said pads to solidify;
(e) placing the pads of said first member in juxtaposition to
matching pads of said second member; and thereafter
(0 exposing said pads to ion beam radiation of sufficient
energy and for a time sufficient to cause said pads to
refiow whereby upon cooling said matching pads are
joined.
4,379,220
METHOD OF HEATING LIQUID
Lee M. Middleman, Portola Valley, Calif., and Roger S. Good-
rich, Smyrna, Ga., assignors to Raychem Corporation, Menlo
Park, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 38,218, May 11, 1979, Pat. No. 4,276,466.
This application Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,445
Int. CV F24H J/06: H05B 3/04
U.S. CI. 219—331 42 Qaims
i?- ^* *>, /?
4,379,219
SHAVING UNIT AND METHOD OF MANUFACTURE
THEREFOR
Henry Behrens, Topsfield, and Chester F. Jacobson, Southboro,
both of Mass., assignors to The Gillette Company, Boston,
Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 142,324, Apr. 21, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,320
Int. a.J B23K 27/00
US. a. 219—121 LC 16 Claims
1. A method for welding a steel blade strip having cutting
edge means thereon to a metallic support member, said method
comprising holding said strip in tension while positioning it
and said member with respect to each other, positioning a
1. A method for heating a liquid comprising the steps of (1)
placing in the liquid a heating article comprising (a) a water-
impermeable, heat conductive housing fabricated from a melt-
able material having a notched Izod impact strength of at least
about O.S ft-lbs/in. and (b) a flexible heating element within the
housing and in intimate engagement w^th the housing, the
flexible heating element being capable of providing from about
1 to about 10 watts per square inch of surface area of the
heating element; and (2) connecting the heating article to a
source of electric power so that heat is transferred from the
heating element through the housing to the liquid.
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
209
4^79,221
CIRCUIT FOR DETECTING PHASE RELATIONSHIP
BETWEEN TWO SIGNALS
Jeremiah Y. Avins, Kendall Park, and Donald W. Phillion,
Princeton, both of N.J„ assignors to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
j Filed Jul. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 167,488
! Int. a.^ H03D B/00; G06M 3/14; GOIR 25/00
U.S. a. 377-43 6 Qaims
*i_A
:)I>7
OlIIECtlOt
KDICATIIIC SICIIAt.
-:^'L>
(CLOCl
—I HEMS 5UCN «S «
mCRO PHOCESSOli
OR ll-DIIIECTIOML
COUITEH m DECODIIC
AID UTIUIIK ClOCI
PULSE MD DIMCTIOI
IIDICATIIC SlCltlS
«<D FOI CEIEHATIIC
ICItOllEDCEKEaT
SIC»»l5
III
1*'
-J Sl(
L.
«CI«ulLEOCE>EIT SIMAl-
1. A circuit for determining the leading or lagging phase
relationship between first and second two-level signals at each
level transition of said first two-level signal, and comprising:
first and second Exclusive OR gate means each having first
input terminals for receiving said first and second two
level signals respectively and further having a second
input terminal and an output terminal;
decoding means having first and second input terminals
coupled respectively only to the output terminals of said
first and second Exclusive OR gate means and responsive
only to the level transitions of said first signal to detect the
leading or lagging phase relationship of said first and
second signals at said each level transition of said first
signal, and to supply to the second input terminals of said
first and second Exclusive OR gate means after each
detection of said phase relationship a third signal having a
level equal f tbe concurrent level of said first signal.
4,379,222
HIGH SPEED SHIFT REGISTER
Alan B. Hayter, and Bernard L. Reagan, Jr., both of Ithaca,
N.Y., assignors to NCR Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
I Filed Aug. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 180,186
' Int. C\? G06F 5/04
U.S. CI. 377—81 10 Qaims
1. A high speed shift register circuit comprising in combina-
tion:
first shift register means having a first output conductor, said
first shift register means being responsive to a leading edge
of a first clock signal for serially shifting data in said first
shift register means onto said first output conductor;
second shift register means having a second output conduc-
tor, said second shift register means being responsive to a
leading edge of a second clock signal for serially shifting
data in said second shift register means onto said second
output conductor;
means for producing said first and second clock signals, said
second clock signal being the logical complement of the
first clock signal, the delay between a leading edge of said
first clock signal and a corresponding trailing edge of said
second clock signal being less than a predetermined value;
first means for logically combining a signal on said first
output conductor with said second clock signal to pro-
duce a first signal;
second means for logically combining a signal on said sec-
ond output conductor with said first clock signal to pro-
duce a second signal; and
third means having a third output conductor, said third
means being responsive to the signals produced by said
first and second means for producing a third signal
wherein data contained in said first and second shift regis-
ter means is interleaved and serially shifted onto said third
OCLX
S/LI
^1=4
HOI.. »»T «» l!QL,«.T
conductor at a rate which is equal to a multiple of the
frequency of said first clock signal.
4,379,223
UNIVERSAL CHAIN LINK COUNTING APPARATUS
AND METHOD
Scott Summers, 605-2nd Ave. S., Wheaton, Minn, 562%
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,525
Int. a.' G06M 1/00
U.S. a. 235-103 2 Claims
1. A universal chain link counting apparatus, said apparatus
comprising:
a frame; I i
a cross-bolt disposed through openings in opposite sides of
said frame;
a plurality of sprockets rotatably mounted in spaced relation
on said cross-bolt, each of said sprockets having a differ-
ent number and spacings of teeth thereon designed to
accommodate a different size of chain;
a plurality of pegs mounted on the interior surface of each of
said sprockets, the number of pegs on any given sprocket
corresponding to the number of teeth on that sprocket;
a counting mechanism slidably mounted on top of said frame
such that a lever arm of said counting mechanism contacts
said pegs as a length of chain is pulled across said
sprocket, thus counting each link of chain;
sliding means permitting said counting mechanism to be slid
210
into position to contact the pegs on any of said sprockets means and an input end located between the output ends of said
and thus count hnks of any size chain. flrst and second bundles, such that said light receiving bundle
gathers light from said given zone, wherein the numerical
4^79^24
APPARATUS FOR INTERPRETING CODE 39 BAR CODE '°
DATA
Robert J. Engstrom, Minneapolis, Minn., assignor to Honeywell
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,151
Int. a.J G06K 7/W
U.S. a. 235—463 3 Qaims
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
SIGNAL
CONDITIONER
/O
MICRO
PROCESSOR
-*■ OUTPUT
23
1. In a system for optically reading Code 39 bar code data
wherein said system comprises (i) an optical code pen for
reading bar code data and for producing an analog electrical
output signal indicative of such data, and (ii) electrical condi-
tionmg means connected to said pen to receive said output and
to produce a digital output signal indicative of said bar code
data, said digital signal being characterized by relatively nar-
row and/or wide bars separated by relatively narrow and/or
wide spaces, apparatus for interpreting said digital output
signal of said system, said apparatus comprising:
(a) means connected to receive said digital output signal and
for measuring the time duration of each bar, said time
duration data for all bars in a code character being stored,
(b) means for receiving said code character time duration
data and for identifying the minimum and maximum width
bars,
(c) means for producing a first bar cutoff value of a time
duration approximately 1.5 times the time duration of the
minimum width bar,
(d) means for producing a second bar cutoff value of a time
duration approximately equal to one-half of the sum of the
time durations of the minimum and maximum bar widths,
(e) means for comparing said first and second bar cutoff
values and for using the greater of such values as a refer-
ence against which all of the bars in said characters are
measured, those bars having a time duration greater than
that of said reference bar cutoff value then being inter-
preted as wide bars and those bars having a time duration
less than that of said reference bar cutoff value then being
interpreted as narrow bars.
aperture of the fibers of said light receiving bundle is lower
than the numerical aperture of the fibers in said first and second
illuminating bundles.
4,379,226
METHOD AND SENSOR DEVICE FOR MEASURING A
PHYSICAL PARAMETER UTILIZING AN
OSCILLATORY, LIGHT MODULATION ELEMENT
Georg H. Sichling, Corvallis, Oreg.; Helmut Schwab, and Ber-
nard Schwab, both of Princeton, N.J., assignors to Siemens
Corporation, Iselin, N.J.
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,868
Int. a.3 GOIL 1/10; G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 250—231 R 1 Qaim
•EASlJIllW SEIISOB
4,379,225
RBEROPTIC HEAD WITH nBER BUNDLES HAVING
DIFFERENT NUMERICAL APERTURES
Richard L. Apothaker, Northfield, N.J., assignor to Kontes
Glass Company, Vineland, N J.
Filed Jul. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 165,383
Int. a.' G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 250—227 3 Qaims
1. A head for use in apparatus for scanning a test surface of
the type having a light source and light detector means, said
head comprising first and second illuminating fiberoptic bun-
dles, each having an input end situated to receive light from the
source and an output end illuminating an area on the test sur-
face, said output ends being spaced from each other with said
illuminated areas overlapping in a given zone, a light receiving
fiberoptic bundle having an output end adjacent the detector
1. A sensor device for measuring a physical parameter at a
first location remote from a second location, comprising in
combination:
(a) means for generating at least one light pulse of high
energy and a light beam,
(b) light modulation means arranged at said first location and
having a modulation frequency determined by said physi-
cal parameter to be measured, said light modulation means
modulating the amplitude of said light beam, said light
modulation means comprising,
a mechanical oscillator arranged at said first location
having a mechanical oscillator frequency, said oscillator
reflecting or transmitting said light beam in accordance
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
211
with said oscillator frequency, said oscillator compris-
ing a single means for both receiving said light pulse and
modulating said light beam, wherein said oscillator is
formed to oscillate due to molecule pressure when said
light pulse hits said single means, and
(c) frequency detector means arranged at said second loca-
tion for measuring the frequency of said modulated light
beam, said frequency indicating the value of said physical
parameter.
1. An apparatus for monitoring the build-up of ice on engine
and plant parts, comprising
a first means for heating of a reference surface at the engine
or plant part to a temperature above the freezing point;
at least one second means for illuminating said reference
surface and a remotely thereof located monitoring surface
at said engine or plant pari;
at least one third means for measuring the intensity of the
light reflected from said reference surface and said moni-
toring surface; and
at least one fourth means for determining the difference
between the values measured by said at least one third
means and for the generation of a corresponding output
signal.
4^79,228
NEUTRON-NEUTRON-LOGGING
Linus S. Allen, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
I FUed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 196,001
Int. a.J GOIV 5/00
U.S. a. 250—266 9 Claims
1. A system for logging the formations traversed by a bore-
hole, comprising:
(a) a borehole tool,
(b) means for moving said borehole tool through a borehole,
(c) a steady-state source of fast neutrons located within said
borehole tool for irradiating the formations surrounding
the borehole with neutrons.
(d) first and second radiation detectors located within said
borehole tool at spaced-apart positions from said source,
said first and second detectors measuring the same type of
radiation
(e) a third radiation detector located within said borehole
tool and spaced at the same distance from the fast neutron
source as one of said first or second detectors, said third
detector measuring a difTerent type of radiation than that
measured by said first and second detectors,
(0 means for producing a signal representative of the ratio of
the radiations measured by said first and second detectors,
and
4,379,227
APPARATUS FOR AND A METHOD OF MONITORING
THE BUILD-UP OF ICE
Paul Koyacs, Obere Biihistrasse 13, CH-8700 Kiisnacht, Swit-
zerland
FUed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,096
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Apr. 21,
1980,80200360
Int. a.3 GOIW 7/00
U.S. a. 250—231 R 12 Qaims
(g) means for producing a second signals representative of
the ratio of the radiations measured by said third detector
and the one of said first or second detectors spaced at the
same distance from that fast neutron source within the
borehole tool as said third detector.
4,379,229
MEASURING OF GAMMA-RAY ENERGY DUE TO
THERMAL NEUTRON CAPTURE OF COPPER AND
NICKEL
Wyatt W. Givens, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil Corpora-
tion, Ne,« York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,481
Int. a.3 GOIV 5/00
U.S. a. 250—270 6 Qaims
5. The method of determining concentrations of a selected
element of metallic material in formations adjacent a borehole
which comprises:
(a) irradiating the formations surrounding the borehole with
neutrons from a fast neutron source having energies suffi-
cient to excite thermal neutron capture in select metallic
materials within said formations,
(b) detecting and counting gamma-rays emitted from the
formations in response to thermal neutron capture from
said select metallic materials,
(c) detecting and countmg fast neutrons directly from said
fast neutron source and
212
4,379,230
AUTOMATIC BEAM CORRECTION IN A SCANNING
TRANSMISSION ELECTRON MICROSCOPE
Gijsbertus Bouwhuis, Eindhoven; Hendrik De Lang, Heeze, and
Nicolaas H. Dekkers, Eindhoven, all of Netherlands, assign-
ors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,561
Gaims priority, application Netherlands, Sep. 5, 1979,
17906632
Int. CI.' COIN 23/00: HOIJ 37/26
U.S. CI. 250—307 11 Claims
id '
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
(d) determining the ratio of the count of fast neutrons with
the count of gamma-rays for each select metallic material
to compensate said count of gamma-rays for variations in
the output of said fast neutron source and thereby provide
a quantitative indication of the metallic material content
within the formations surrounding the borehole.
impinge upon a specimen at a predetermined incident angle
while continuously changing the incident azimuth of the elec-
tron beam incident upon the specimen at said predetermined
incident angle at a predetermined frequency to transmit the
electron beam through the specimen; a magnifying lens system
for magnifying the transmitted electron beam in angular
^'
-■^■^-
•
44
^
J
1. A method of providing at least one of automatic focus and
astigmatism correction in an electron microscope comprising
the steps of
scanning an object in the object plane of an electron micro-
scope with a spot-focussed electron beam,
forming an electron interference pattern in a detector plane,
said interference pattern being caused by interaction of
said object with said electron beam,
displacing said interference pattern over said detector plane
in response to said scanning,
sensing electron intensity at a plurality of individually
spaced locations in said detector plane,
processing sensed signals by at least comparing signals from
a pair of spaced locations to determine displacement of
said electron intensity pattern over said detector plane,
wherein said step of comparing signals includes the steps of
forming a correlation integral of the two signals with
respect to time for different applied time delays, determin-
ing a time delay required to cause said correlation integral
to become a maximum, and generating a correction con-
trol signal dependent on said determined time delay,
and
applying said correction control signal to correct energiza-
tion of an electro-optical element of said electron micro-
scope in order to provide at least one of an optimum focus
condition and a predetermined amount of astigmatism
correction to the electron beam scanning said object
plane.
spread; and a viewing fluorescent screen for receiving the
magnified electron beam projected thereon to form a visual
enlarged image of the specimen on the viewing fluorescent
screen wherein the beam is continuously rotated so that the
resulting image on the viewing screen will be blurred in the
direction of astigmatism.
4,379,232
FERROELECTRIC IMAGING SYSTEM
George S. Hopper, Piano, Tex., assignor to Texas Instruments
Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 861,812, Dec. 19, 1977, Pat. No.
4,162,402. This application Jan. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 50,027
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 24,
1996, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' HOIJ 31/49; GOIJ 7/00, H04N 5/33
U.S. a. 250—332 11 Qaims
DC WAR
HOUSING
26
I 4,379,231
ELECTRON MICROSCOPE
Kazuo Shii, Asahimura, and Toshiyuki Ohashi, Katsuta, both of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 129,754
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 14, 1979, 54-28703
Int. a.3 GOIN 23/00
U.S. a. 250—311 24 Oaims
1. An electron microscope comprising means for generating
an electron beam; means for causing the electron beam to
1. A thermal energy detection system comprising:
(a) a detector matrix having a plurality of capacitor type
thermal sensors;
(b) switching means operatively connected to the detector
matrix for selectively addressing the plurality of capacitor
type thermal sensors;
(c) bias means operatively connected to the switching means
for charging said sensors; and
(d) readout means operatively connected to the detector
matrix for reading out signals representative of the ther-
mal energy impinging on said sensors.
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
213
4^79^3
OPTICAL ARRANGEMENT FOR QUANTITATIVE
ANALYSIS INSTRUMENT UTILIZING PULSED
RADIATION EMITTING DIODES
Scott B. Rosenthal, Gaithersburg, Md., assignor to Trebor In-
dustries, Inc., Gaithersburg, Md.
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,555
Int. a.3 HOIL 9/00
U.S. a. 250—553 6 Qaims
M.
—
1 )
— -
1 )
1 )
^i:::
1 )
32
36
34
1. An instrument for quantitative analysis of a sample com-
prising:
a plurality of pulsed radiation emitting diodes positioned in a
matrix to direct radiation to a sample;
baffles separating the diodes in the matrix;
narrow bandpass filters positioned adjacent the diodes to
allow only preselected wavelengths of radiation to be
directed to the sample;
a sample chamber having at least portions thereof transpar-
ent to the radiation from the diodes and bandpass filters;
lens means positioned adjacent the matrix of diodes and
bandpass filters to that radiation from all of the diodes
passes through the lens and is bent toward the center of a
focal plane adjacent the sample chamber;
radiation altering means to allow radiation from the lens
means to pass to the sample but with uniform energy
distribution from each of the diodes;
photodetecting means for detecting the radiation which
passes through a sample in the sample chamber;
means to calculate and display quantitative analysis based on
the output of the photodetecting means.
4,379,234
ELECTRO OPTIC CONTROLLED PISTON RING
INSTALLING APPARATUS
Jose C. Cruz, Columbus, Ind., assignor to Cummins Engine
Company, Inc., Columbus, Ind.
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,046
Int. a.3 G02B 5//4
U.S. O. 250—561 13 Galms
orientation in a plurality of corresponding grooves contained
in the exterior surface of a piston, comprising
(a) ring assembly means for operating in successive cycles
including a holding cycle in which a set of piston rings are
retained in the order in which the set will be installed and an
assembling cycle in which the set of piston rings are installed
in the grooves of a piston in the order in which the piston
rings were retained during the immediately preceding hold-
ing cycle;
(b) detection means for sensing the order or orientation in
which the ring assembly means reUins the set of piston rings
during a holding cycle and for generating a stop signal if the
rings are not in proper order or orientation; and
(c) control means connected with said detection means for
preventing said ring assembly means from operating in the
assembling cycle in response to the generation of said stop
signal by said detection means.
4,379,235
WAVE ACTION GENERATOR
John A. Trepl, II, 1691 Mesa Dr., Apt. F-13, Santa Ana, Calif.
92707 .
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,659
Int. C\? P03B 13/12
U.S. a. 290—53 16 Qaims
1. Apparatus for installing a set of dissimilar piston rings
which must be arranged in a proper predetermined order or
1. Apparatus for producing electric power from wave mo-
tion, comprising:
(a) suppori means arranged to be fixedly positioned in a body
of water subject to wave motion;
(b) generator means mounted on said support means;
(c) flywheel means associated with said generator means to
store rotational energy for driving said generator means;
(d) impeller means movably mounted with respect to said
support means for imparting rotational energy to said
flywheel means; and
(e) float means arranged to move said impeller means in
response to wave motion in said body of water, said float
means being coupled to a swivel arrangement for permit-
ting the float means to turn into the direction of a wave
current by a castering action;
(0 said float body adapted to be partially submerged;
generally parallel fin means depending from said float body;
said float body having on its underside an inclined surface
whose upper end is generally adjacent one end of said fin
means and whose lower end is generally adjacent the
other end of said fin means;
means arranged to suppori said float for pivotal movement
about a generally vertical axis.
1029 O.G.— 8
214
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^79,236
WINDMILL GENERATOR APPARATUS
Minoni Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Meisei University,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257^03
Int. a.3 F03D 1/04
MS. a. 290—55 6 Claims
1. A windmill generator apparatus comprising:
a duct possessing structure including:
a first annular floor and a first annular roof of prescribed
inner and outer diameters, substantially horizontally
disposed and spaced apart from each other by a pre-
scribed distance, and a prescribed number of vertical
stationary guiding partitions radially provided between
said first floor and said first roof; a first space in the
shape of a hollow cylinder being formed within the
central portion of said duct possessing structure;
a revolving body mcluding:
a circular second floor and a circular second roof of outer
diameters smaller than the outer diameter of the first
space, the inner sides of said second fioor and of said
second roof defining a smooth continuous surface with
" the inner sides of said first floor and said first roof, and
two duct-forming guide pillar members disposed be-
tween said second floor and said second roof symmetri-
cally at the outer circumferential portions thereof tak-
ing as a plane of symmetry a plane that contains the
diameters of said second floor and said second roof,
each of said guide pillar members comprising a duct-
blocking arcuate outer wall along the outer circumfer-
ence of said second floor and said second roof, and a
duct-forming curved inner wall connecting both side
edges of said arcuate outer wall; said revolving body
being adapted for rotation within said first space on an
axis coaxial therewith;
a windmill supported for rotation within a second hollow
space, defined by said second floor, said second roof and
by said two guide pillar members of said revolving body,
and on an axis which is the vertical central axis of said
second hollow space;
a rotational generator rotated by said windmill; and
wind directional means for turning said revolving body so as
to point said windmill in the windward direction.
4,379,237
LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROL DEVICE AND QRCUIT
THEREFOR
Lawson P. Mosteller, Jr., 7404 Famum St., Springfield, Va.
22151
FUed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,066
Int. a.3 HOIH 43/00: H05B 39/02
U.S. a. 307—141 17 Qaims
1. A device for producing a gradual change in power sup-
plied to a load comprising:
a first solid state switching device having first and second
power electrodes and a gate electrode,
a variable timer network connected to said gate electrode
and comprising a chargeable capacitor and a switchable
resistive network,
a first light emitting diode connected to receive current
passed by said switching device and emit light propor-
tional to the received current,
a first photoresistor positioned to receive light emitted by
said first light emitting diode,
a second solid state switching device having first and second
power electrodes and a gate electrode and controlling the
supply of current to said load,
said first photoresistor being connected to the gate of said
second switching device whereby power is supplied to
said load as a function of the light received by said first
photoresistor from said light emitting diode,
said resistive network being adjustable so that with said
capacitor, said timer network controls the rate of change
of voltage to the gate electrode of said first switching
device and thereby the rate of change of power supplied
to said load.
4,379,238
INTEGRATED SIGNAL PROCESSING ORCUIT
Hiroshi Minakuchi, Shiga, Japan, assignor to Matsushita Elec-
tric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 51,862, Jun. 25, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,852
Int. a.3 H03K 5/00, 17/56
U.S. a. 307—243 4 Qaims
1. An integrated signal processing circuit for transmitting
externally a plurality of output signals over a signal output path
comprising:
a first input signal path for receiving a first output signal
which varies between at least two D.C. levels;
a second input signal path for receiving a second output
signal having a pulse width shorter than the period of
level variation of said first output signal;
a mixing circuit coupled to said first and second input signal
paths for synthesizing a composite output from said first
and second output signals, said mixing circuit inveriing
the phase of said second output signal and transmitting it
to said signal output path when said first output signal has
a first level and transmitting said second output signal to
said signal output path without inversion when said first
output signal has a second level, said mixing circuit com-
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
215
prising a first AND gate having input terminals receiving
said first output signal and a phase inverted said second
output signal, a second AND gate having input terminals
receiving a phase inverted first output signal and said
second output signal, and an OR gate having input termi-
nals receiving output signals from said first and second
AND gates.
"I
4,379,239
ORCUIT FOR GENERATING A TRIGGER PULSE
Manfred Knuefelmann, Duesseldorf; Burkhard Brandner, and
Reinhold Blauhut, both of Werdohl, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Finna Atlas Fahrzeugtechnik GmbH, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,351
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 22,
1981, 3128922
Int. CIJ H03K 3/00. 5/01; F02P 5/04
U.S. a. 307—268 4 Qaims
1. Circuit for generating a trigger pulse delayed within a
period of a motion of variable periodic time, the phase lag
relative to a zero phase being dependent on the periodic time
and other parameters, a zero pulse and angle pulses starting at
zero phase being generated, the pulse frequency being in-
versely proportional to the periodic time, the angle pulses
being fed into a counter and correcting data being generated
within every period during a constant-time window, charac-
terized by the following elements:
(a) During every period the angle pulses are counted by a
phase address counter (20) the output of which provides a
multi-bit address signal assigned to the respective angle
pulse;
(b) the multi-bit address signal is fed into the input of a
correction data memory (22) the output of which provides
a multi-bit correction signal;
(c) the output of the correction data memory (22) can be
disabled by the output pulse of a time window circuit (25)
(d) the angle pulses are fed into a controlled pulse duplicator
(13) the duplicating input (14) of which is controlled by
one bit of the multi-bit correction signal;
(e) the output of the controlled duplicator (13) is connected
to a counter (15) with a disable input (17) controlled by a
second bit of the multi-bit correction signal.
4,379,240
LATCHING PULSE WIDTH MODULATION
COMPARATOR
Robert A. Mammano, Costa Mesa, Calif., assignor to Silicon
General, Inc., Garden Grove, Calif.
Filed Aug. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 179,538
Int. a.i H03K 5/24
U.S. Q. 307—356 14 Qaims
a/ri^i/r i_nj~T_r
1. A comparator circuit having integral latching and reset-
ting, comprising:
a differential input stage having first and second sides which
are driven by first and second input signals, respectively,
whereby when one of said sides is conducting, the other of
said sides is pot conducting, each of said sides having an
output;
a voltage gain stage including first and second transistors
which are connected to be supplied by said outputs of said
first and second sides of said input stage, respectively, said
first and second transistors having drive inputs which are
connected to be driven by said output of said first side of
said input stage;
an output stage connected to be driven by said output of said
second side of said input stage, said output stage having an
output; and
a positive feedback network connected from said output of
said output stage to provide positive feedback to drive
said first and second transistors of said voltage gain stage,
said feedback network including circuitry for removing
said positive feedback from said first and second transis-
tors upon application of a reset signal.
4,379,241
EDGE DEHNED OUTPUT BUFFER aRCUTT
Joseph Piuno, Austin, Tex., assignor to Motorola, Inc., Schaiun-
burg, lU.
FUed May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 149,607
Int. a.3 H03K J 7/693. J 9/096
VJS. Q. 307—481 II 11 Claims
2^4 ISC
1. An edge defiiiition circuit for synchronizing an input
signal with first and second clock signals, comprising:
first means coupled to said input signal and to said first clock
signal for producing a first voltage transition on an output
node in response to a voltage transition of said input sig-
216
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
nal, said first voltage transition occuring at a time deter-
mined by said first clock signal; and
second means coupled to said first means and said second
clock signal for producing a second voltage transition on
said output node in response to another transition of said
input signal, said second voltage transition occurring at a
time determined by said second clock signal.
4,379,242
EDDY CURRENT COUPLING HAVING ROTATING AND
NON-ROTATING FLUX PATHS
Daniel J. MacDonald, Brookfield, Wis., assignor to Litton In-
dustries Products, Inc., Beverly Hills, Calif.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,059
Int. a.3 H02K 49/02
U.S. a. 310—105 8 Claims
1. An eddy current coupling comprising:
rotatable input and output shafts;
a generally tubular inductor member mounted on one of said
input and output shafts for rotation therewith;
a magnetic rotor member mounted on the other of said input
and output shafts for rotation therewith, said rotor mem-
ber being located within said inductor member and having
a plurality of peripheral, arcuately spaced, poles separated
from said inductor member by a circumferential air gap;
a field coil positioned radially inwardly from said rotor
member and surrounding the associated shaft, said field
coil generating an encircling magnetic flux causing torque
transmission between said inductor and rotor members
and said input and output shafts; and
a stationary support for said field coil, said support being in
proximity to said rotor member poles for providing a
stationary field coil flux return path between said poles,
said support being positioned with respect to the rotating
elements of the coupling for dividing the flux between a
field coil fiux return path in the rotating elements in paral-
lel with the stationary fiux return path of said support, said
stationary support and rotating elements being so dimen-
sioned as to provide fiux return paths transmitting flux at
maximum density.
I 4,379,243
STATOR END TURN SUPPORT SYSTEM
George F. Dalley, Plum; Charles R. Ruffing, Edgewood Bor-
ough, and Leonard B. Simmonds, Monroeville, all of Pa.,
assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,099
Int. a.3 H02K 3/46
U.S. a. 310—260 20 Oaims
1. A system for supporting end turns of a plurality of cylin-
drically configured stator coils, said system comprising:
a first support member, said first support member being
nonmagnetic, nonconducting and generally rigid, said first
support member having a bore therethrough, said first
support member having the shape of a frustum of a cone
and having an inside surface, said end turns being disposed
proximate and generally parallel to said inside surface,
said first support member having a central axis and a first
and a second axial end, said first support member being a
filament wound structure with the filament wound about
said first support member in a spiral helix manner, said
filament being wound at a first preselected angle in the
region of said first axial end and at a second preselected
angle in the region of said second axial end, said inner
surface having circumferentially running grooves therein;
a conformable means for attaching said end turns to said
inside surface;
means for permitting relative motion between said end turns
and said attaching means; and
means for supporting said support member, said supporting
means being disposed radially outward from said support
member.
4,379,244
METHOD OF DETECTION OF THE ASYMMETRY OF
PIEZO-ELECTRIC CRYSTAL RESONATORS IN THE
FORM OF TUNING FORKS AND RESONATORS FOR
CARRYING IT OUT
Rudolf J. Dinger, St. Aubin, Switzerland, assignor to Ebauches,
S.A., Switzerland
Filed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 181,715
Oaims priority, application France, Aug. 31, 1979, 79 21864
Int. aj HOIL 41/08
U.S. CI. 310—312 5 Oaims
,-46
^
WtfJi
a
1. A piezoelectric crystal resonating structure having two
substantially parallel main surfaces and comprising
a tuning fork resonator having two tines located on each side
of an axis of symmetry;
a base for holding said resonator at least during its manufac-
ture;
means integral with said base and said resonator for connec-
ting said base with said resonator;
means for causing vibration of said resonator in response to
an excitation voltage, comprising excitation electrodes
disposed on said tines; and
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
217
means for sensing an asymmetry voltage produced in re-
sponse to said vibration in the event of an asymmetry of
said tines, comprising auxiliary electrode means disposed
on said connecting means.
4,379,245
MANUALLY OPERABLE ROTARY PULSE
GENERATING APPARATUS FOR PULSE COUNTING
AND SIMILAR APPLICATIONS
Richard Goldstein, Northbrook, III., assignor to Dynascan Cor-
poration, Chicago, III.
I Filed Mar. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 132,090
I Int. a.3 HOIL 41/08
U.S. a. 310—319 10 Qaims
4,379,246
POLYMERIC PIEZOELECTRIC DRIVE ELEMENT FOR
WRITING JETS IN MOSAIC INK PRINTING DEVICES
Max Guntersdorfer, Zomeding; Peter Kleinschmidt, Munich,
and Klaus Dietrich, Gauting, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 9, 1980, Ser. No. 148,496
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 5,
1979, 2927269
Int. Cl.^ HOIL 41/08; GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 310—328 6 Qaims
1. In electrical apparatus having control means responsive to
the number of pulses fed to the input thereof, a manually opera-
ble pulse generating apparatus whose output is to be coupled to
the input of said control means and comprising: a manually
operable dial knob member movable in at least a first operating
direction, a cam member having sawtooth ratchet teeth-form-
ing lobes, means coupling said dial knob member to said cam
member when said dial knob member is moved in said operat-
ing direction, a spring force-urged detenting and force-trans-
mitting pawl member mounted to ride upon said sawtooth
ratchet teeth-forming lobes, said pawl member normally lo-
cated between adjacent lobes in a manner to detent the move-
ment of said dial knob member and cam member, so that the
dial knob member has discrete positions which it assumes as it
is advanced in said operating direction, each of said lobes
having a gradually rising leading side over which said pawl
member rides when said knob member is moved in said operat-
ing direction and a sharply dropping trailing side, the spring
force on said pawl member being such that the pawl member
riding on any point of the gradually rising side of a lobe of said
cam member will rotate the cam member to position the pawl
member in the crotch between said gradually rising side of a
lobe and the trailing side of the adjacent lobe, a stationary
piezoelectric element with output terminals across which an
appreciable damped waveform appears when the stress on the
same is suddenly changed, said spring-urged pawl member
applying an initial stress to said piezoelectric element as said
pawl member rides up the leading side of a lobe of said cam,
which stress reaches a maximum value and is suddenly relieved
to generate a damped waveform at said output terminals when
said pawl member falls off the high point of one of said lobes,
and debouncing circuit means coupled between the output
terminal of said piezoelectric element and the input of said
control means to convert said damped waveform to a single
pulse output.
1. In a fluid ejecting writing jet having a cylindrical channel
containing said fluid which terminates in a discharge aperture,
a drive element for separately forcing droplets of said fluid out
of said channel comprising a power consuming winding having
a plurality of adjacent plies of a first foil comprised of piezo-
electric material and a second foil comprised of insulating
material which cylindrically surround a portion of said chan-
nel, said foils being coiled together such that said plies are in
contact with adjacent plies over a substantial portion of their
respective surfaces, and a means for connecting said winding
to a pulsed voltage source for expandmg and contracting the
interior diameter of said winding and generating pressure for
expelling said "droplets of fluid from said channel.
4,379,247
RESONATOR PLATE CAPABLE OF EXCFTATION TO
THICKNESS SHEAR VIBRATIONS
Werner Mattuschka, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,762
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 6,
1980, 3004331
Int. a.3 HOIL 41/08
U.S. a. 310—367 10 Qaims
1. A piezoelectric resonator for excitation into thickness
shear vibrations, comprising:
a body of piezoelectric material including
a pair of major spaced-apart surfaces;
a pair of electrodes carried on and completely covering
respective ones of said major surfaces;
a pair of border regions adjacent said major surfaces and free
of electrode coating, each of said border regions extend-
ing from one of said major surfaces toward the other
major surface and shaped such that there is a longitudinal
offset of at least portions of said major surfaces; and
a pair of connection members each comprising U-shaped
clips and each engaging a respective electrode on a major
surface and a respective border region.
218
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
I 4,379,248
IONIZATION CHAMBER HAVING COAXIALLY
ARRANGED CYLINDRICAL ELECTRODES
Naoki Wakayama, Tohkaimura; Hideshi Yamagishi, Mito; To-
shimasa Tomoda, and Hiroji Tanaka, both of Amagasaki, all
of Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha and
Japan Atomic Energy Research Institute, both of Tokyo,
Japan
Filed May 4, 1979, Ser. No. 36,236
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 4, 1978, 53-53570
Int. a.3 HOI J 47/02, 1/92. 17/04
U.S. a. 313—93 8 Qaims
6 i2 .6 14 19^7.5 13
I I I
.1^ I
io -^ti- '-i
3
^ -4 '
-0 -^
3
2
5. An ionization chamber comprising:
inner and outer cylindrical electrodes arranged coaxially;
a sealed casing containing an ionizable gas within which said
inner and outer cylindrical electrodes are disposed;
means disposed within said casing for securing said inner and
outer electrodes within said casing such that at least one
axial end surface portion of each of said inner and outer
electrodes is free from axial contact with and axial re-
straint from said securing means and for allowing substan-
tially free unimpeded axial movement of said at least one
end surface portion and such that radial shifting of said
inner and outer electrodes is prevented by said securing
means.
! 4,379,249
! INCANDESCENT LAMP WITH ELLIPSOIDAL
ENVELOPE AND INFRARED REFLECTOR
Peter Walsh, Stirling, N.J., assignor to Duro-Test, Corporation,
North Bergen, N.J.
j I Filed Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,718
' Int. a.3 HOIJ 1/14. 1/32
L.S. a. 313—112 12 Claims
' 12
said envelope transmitting energy in the visible light
range,
a filament within said envelope which incandesces upon the
application of current thereto to produce and radiate
energy in both the visible and the infrared range, said
filament located on or closely adjacent to said focal circle
and in substantially the same plane as said focal circle,
means for supplying current to said filament, the infrared
radiant energy radiated by the filament from any one point
on the focal circle being reflected by said reflecting means
to intercept such filament at a point on or closely adjacent
to said focal circle.
1. An incandescent electric lamp comprising
an envelope of material which is transmissive to visible light,
said envelope having the shape of an ellipse rotated about
an axis to define an ellipsoid with a plurality of foci lo-
cated on a circle and defining a focal circle,
means on the major portion of said envelope for reflecting
radiant energy in the infrared range, at least a portion of
4,379,250
HELD EMISSION CATHODE AND METHOD OF
FABRICATING THE SAME
Shigeyuki Hosoki, Hachioji; Shigehiko Yamamoto,
Tokorozawa; Hideo Todokoro, Hinodemachi; Susumu Ka-
wase, Higashimurayama, and Yasuharu Hirai, Chofu, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,176
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 19, 1979, 54-134167;
Oct. 24, 1979, 54-136410; Apr. 9, 1980, 55-45591
Int. a.^ HOIJ 1/16
U.S. a. 313—336 18 Qaims
1. A field emission cathode comprising a heating filament
which is formed in the shape of a hairpin and which consists of
a fine metal wire having resistance against high temperatures,
and a tip which consists of a metal having resistance against
high temperatures and which is joined to the top of said fila-
ment so that electrons are emitted from the tip thereof in the
electric field, wherein in order to reduce the work function on
the surface of said tip, a metal is adsorbed via oxygen onto the
surface of said tip to a thickness which does not exceed the
thickness of the monolayer of atoms, said metal having a work
function which is smaller than the work function of the metal
forming said tip, and an oxide of said metal having resistance
against high temperatures, wherein said metal is at least one
which is selected from the group consisting of chromium,
aluminum, cerium, magnesium and titanium.
4,379,251
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
Marcel Brouha; Waithenis W. van den Hoogenhof, and Peter C.
van Loosdregt, all of Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 208,970
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 21, 1979,
7909232
Int. Q.3 HOIJ 29/07. 31/20
U.S. Q. 313—403 4 Claims
1. A cathode-ray tube for displaying coloured pictures com-
prising in an evacuated envelope means to generate a number
of electron beams, a display screen comprising a large number
of areas luminescing in different colours, and colour selection
means comprising a large number of apertures which assign
each electron beam to luminescent regions of one colour, in
which colour selection means a magnetic quadnipole field is
generated to form a magnetic quadrupole electron lens in each
aperture, which luminescent regions have the shape of substan-
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
219
t
tially parallel strips the longitudinal direction of which is sub-
stantially parallel to the defocusing direction of the quadrupole
lenses, characterized in that the apertures are elongate, sub-
stantially hexagonal and symmetrical relative to their longitu-
dinal axes and are situated with their longitudinal axes in a
number of parallel rows which extend substantially parallel to
strips, and the apertures of two juxtaposed rows are shifted
relative to each other.
two low voltage primaries and a high voltage secondary, an
electronic amplifier, means including one of said pnmary
windings for feeding a first voltage to said amplifier for the
operation thereof, and means including the other of said pri-
mary windings for feeding a second voltage to the input of said
amplifier, the other of said primary windings being phased
relative to said one primary winding to provide positive feed-
back to said amplifier to cause it to oscillate, the last said means
including an adjustable RC network to pulse modulate said
oscillating amplifier whereby said secondary will produce high
voltage, high frequency energy carrying pulse modulation.
4,379^54
DIMMER CIRCUIT FOR FLUORESCENT LAMP
Frederick L. Hurban, Vineland, N.J., assignor to Andrew L.
D'Orio, Vineland, N.J.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,524
Int. C\.i H05B 4]/392
U.S. a. 315—291 3 Qaims
4,379,252
ARC DISCHARGE DEVICE CONTAINING HG196
Dale E. Work, Topsfield, and Stephen G. Johnson, Georgetown,
both of Mass., assignors to GTE Products Corporation, Stam-
ford, Conn.
{ Filed Sep. 5, 1978, Ser. No. 939,558
Int. a.3 HOIJ 61/42. 61/20
U.S. CI. 313— 485 7aaiiiis
2
7
-^
t
1. A mercury-containing arc discharge device for convert-
ing electrical energy into resonance radiation, the Hg'^^ con-
tent of the mercury within the device being greater than that in
natural mercury in order to increase the efficiency of convert-
ing said electrical energy into said resonance radiation.
4,379,253
ORNAMENTAL LAMP AND METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR OPERATION THEREOF
Robert E. Myer, Denville, N.J., assignor to Matthews Research
& Development Corp., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,084
Int. C1.3 H05B 37/00
U.S. a. 315—289 2 Qaims
1. A power supply for a three dimensional, colored, moving
light display comprising a hollow light transmitting envelope
having a gas sealed therein, electrode means for ionizing the
gas within said envelope and power supply means for applying
high voltage, high frequency energy to said electrode means to
produce mo^i'ing light emitting discharge paths with said enve-
lope, the last said means including a transformer having at least
1. In an intensity control for fiuorescent lamps wherem a
triac in series with the lamp provides control of the current
through the lamp, a triac gating circuit comprising:
(a) square wave generating means for generat-unipolar
square waves at twice the frequency of an a.c. power
input to the triac, each square wave having a pulse width
approximately equal to a half cycle of said a.c. power
input; j
(b) ramp wave generating means for generating a ramp
voltage signal corresponding to each of said square waves,
each ramp rising abruptly at the leading edge of the corre-
sponding square wave and decaying linearly to reach zero
potential at the trailing edge of said square wave, and said
ramp waves being applied to the base of a PNP transistor;
(c) means for producing a voltage signal proportional to
current through the lamp, said voltage signal being super-
imposed on said square waves;
(d) an intensity control potentiometer for producing a select-
able intensity d.c. control signal of an opposite polarity to
said square waves and superimposed voltage signal, said
intensity control signal being at least equal to and opposite
said square waves, and further being variable to higher
than said square waves, whereby only all or a portion of
said superimposed voltage signal passes to an input of an
inverting and integrating operational amplifier;
(e) said amplifier generating a d.c. output proportional to the
received signal and of opposite polarity, said output signal
being applied (o the base of said PNP transistor; and
(0 said PNP transistor acting as a gating switch to selec-
tively apply a control signal to the gate of the triac when-
ever the combined ramp signal and amplifier output signal
at the base of the PNP transistor fall below zero potential.
220
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,255
CONTROLLER WITH AT LEAST ONE SWITCH
ACTUATABLE WITHIN A PREDETERMINED RANGE
OF MOTION, IN COMBINATION WITH A SET POINT
SELECTOR
Hans-Joachim Klose, Heii^tedt-Ulzburg, and Udo-Frank Hell-
mig, Pinneberg, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Jungheinrich Unternehmensverwaltung KG, Hamburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 937,129, Aug. 28, 1978, abandoned.
This application Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,630
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 2,
1977, 2739538
Int. CV H02P 5/16
U.S. CI. 318—313 10 Qaims
1. A controller comprising: a first movable actuating mem-
ber, a control member movable by said actuating member,
sensing means sensibly coupieable to said control member for
producing signals in response to the position of the control
member, a circuit having a first input coupled to said sensing
means, said control member defining a specific characteristic
having a given form and slope configuration representing a
specific variation of one variable relative to a variation in
another variable, said sensing means being arranged for pro-
ducing an output correspondhg to the characteristic when the
control member is moved by the actuating member through a
given range, said circuit having an output for producing an
output signal corresponding to the characteristic and its vari-
ables including the form and slope configuration when the
control member is moved by the actuating member through
the range, said circuit having a reference value forming portion
for forming a reference value and a second input connected to
the reference value forming portion, variable second input
means for applying a second signal to said second input, said
second input means being adjustable independent of said cir-
cuit for varying the reference value, said second input means
having circuit means for shifting the signal at the output to a
different level but with the same form and slope configuration
of the signal so that in the output signal the absolute value of
the one variable changes without changing the variation of the
one variable relative to the variation of the other variable.
4,379,256
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MEASURING THE
SPEED OF A MOVABLE SYSTEM WITH RESPECT TO A
DATA CARRIER
Christian Maury, Velizy, France, assignor to Compagnie Inter-
nationale Pour ITnformatique CII Honeywell Bull, Paris,
France
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,295
Qaims priority, application France, Sep. 21, 1979, 79 23580
Int. aj G05B 13/00
U.S. a. 318—561 10 Qaims
1. Apparatus for measuring the speed of a movable system
with respect to a carrier for data recorded on a plurality of
tracks having addresses written on the carrier in a plurality of
reference zones, the number of reference zones being at least
equal to the number of tracks, each track being associated with
at least one zone, the recorded data being read by a data read
head, the apparatus comprising: means responsive to the re-
corded data read by the head for determining the address read
by the head at predetermined sampling times, means respon-
sive to the address read by the head at the sampling times for
calculating the speed v of the system as a function of the differ-
ence between the addresses read by the head at sampling times
separated by predetermined time intervals, the means for cal-
culating the speed v of the movable system comprising means
for calculating the measured speed Vm of the system as a func-
tion of the difference between the addresses ADL(nT-f koT)
and ADL(nT) read by the head at the sampling times
tAo = nT+koT and t„ = nT, n and ko being integers, the sam-
CEl^
pling times t^o and t„ being separated by time intervals equal to
T seconds, said calculating means deriving a signal having an
amplitude representing Vf„, means for compensating the aver-
age estimation delay 6 of the measured speed V;„ with respect
to the speed v of the system and for deriving a compensation
signal yp, signal combining means responsive to the measured
speed representing signal and the compensation signal yf for
deriving a signal having a magnitude representing (v^ + y/r)
that is more substantially equal to the actual speed of the mov-
able system than v^-
4,379,257
DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES
Donald L. Hore, 10, Charnhill Vale, Mangotsfield, Bristol BS17
3,JT, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 573,602, Apr. 30, 1975, abandoned.
This application Mar. 8, 1977, Ser. No. 775,441
Int. a.3 H02K 37/00
U.S. a. 318—695 17 Qaims
1. An alternating current dynamo electric machine compris-
ing:
a stator having at least one winding wound thereon, ar-
ranged to be energized with alternating current to provide
a magnetic flux field which is continually alternating or
changing in magnitude; and a further member, formed of
a ferromagnetic material, movable with respect to the
stator and having at least one short circuited winding
formed thereon and movable unitarily therewith, provid-
ing at each position of the movable member, alternative
paths of low and high reluctance to the passage of the
alternating magnetic flux, to cause the ferromagnetic
movable member to adopt a 'null' position in which link-
age of the said at least one short circuited winding of the
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
221
movable member, with the energized at least one stator
winding is minimized.
4,379,258
POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR INDUCTION MOTOR
Hidehiko Sugimoto, Nagoya, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,224
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1980, 55-53403
Int. a.3 H02P 5/40
U.S. a. 318—805 4 Qaims
^ v^t ;..
1. A power control circuit for an induction motor, said
power control circuit comprising:
a detecting means connected between an alternating current
power source and said induction motor for detecting the
supply power and the feedbacic power flowing between
said source and said motor;
a voltage regulating means for controlling an input voltage
applied to said induction motor such that the ratio be-
tween the supply power and the feedback power is main-
tained at a predetermined value;
wherein said supply power is defined to be equal to the
product of the instantaneous value of said voltage applied
to said motor and a current flowing through said motor
when said product is positive in value; and
wherein said feedback power is defined to be equal to the
product of the instantaneous value of said voltage applied
to said motor and said current fiowing through said motor
when said product is negative in value.
and operatively coupling a PC driver card to each of the
storage cards, the driver cards being mounted outside the
chamber and having drive electronics for enabling pattern
testing of the ICs on each of the storage cards;
subjecting the ICs to short duration pattern testing to verify
that the ICs function in combination as a memory system;
elevating the temperature within the chamber and applying
dynamic signals to the ICs to accomplish accelerated
dynamic burn-in thereof; and
subjecting the ICs to parallel long functional testing while
still in the chamber, including pattern testing of the ICs
over a predetermined range of temperatures to determme
the system interaction capabilities of the ICs, and logging
hard and soft errors exhibited by individual ones of the
ICs.
4,379,260
DUAL-SLOPE INTEGRATOR
Herwig Labus, Jiilich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Kern-
forschungsanlage Jiilich GmbH, Jiilich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 105,670
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 21,
1978, 2855282
Int. a.' GOIR 17/06: H03K ]3/20
U.S. a. 324—99 D 6 Qaims
T"
V, ♦llj-IH
£L
■^r-ti
SI SI S) u SS
,j \ \ — \ — \ L
kD oci»' ; 1-' — Si r"^ — H
lJ-m-JJ 4-"_-^
4,379,259
PROCESS OF PERFORMING BURN-IN AND PARALLEL
FUNCTIONAL TESTING OF INTEGRATED aRCUIT
MEMORIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTAL CHAMBER
Andrew G. Varadi, Saratoga, and Walid H. Maghribi, Milpitas,
both of Calif., assignors to National Semiconductor Corpora-
tion, Santa Clara, Calif.
Filed Mar. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 129,721
Int. a.5 GOIR 15/12
U.S. a. 324—73 AT 4 Qaims
CESS "I
OF IC< I
^
WAFtR-PftOel I
TCSTtM OF ICi I
^1^^
TION \
INGOF ]
. IC> J
'TsStMBLT Of iCi^
QhTO USCW ST5TEM>
Z' DIE SEP*«*'
AND PACKAG
NDIVIOUAL
I
T
M.P CUSTOMER/
JSER STSTCM .
FABRICATOR
EmJ
TESTING
PERFOnUCD
BT CHIP
MAKER
ONE BY ONE
I I TESTING Of iCi FOR
I CATASTROPHIC FAILURES J
'' i -
I BURN-IN Of iCt a THEREAFTER
. LONG FUNCTIONAL TESTING OF
. ICi OVER WIDE RANGE OF TEMP-
|l ERATUfiES. BOTH WHILE ICi ARE
; IN ENVIRONMENTAL CHAMBER
TESTING OF
USER SVSTEK
; Z' SMI^MCMT I
I ( USER SYSTi
I > U3c>4 SVSTEM 1
I V TO USER V
Tone bt one short functional
! testing Of good iCt IN A
I SINGLE TEST APPARATUS
>
ic. •-,
1. A process for testing a plurality of digital memory ICs
comprising:
plugging the ICs into PC storage cards each adapted for
interconnecting the ICs in row-column arrays to form a
/ memory board, the storage cards being constructed to
have high temperature resistance and high signal integrity;
loading the storage cards into an environmental chamber
1. A dual-slope integrator comprising:
an integrating network including an integrating capacitor;
first and second switches respectively triggerable to apply a
measurement voltage and a reference voltage to an input
of said integrating network;
a control circuit connected to said switches for triggering
same;
a clock pulse generator connected to said control circuit for
triggering said switches in the cadence of the clock pulses
of said generator;
a first counter having a count capacity Ni and a second
counter having a count capacity N2 connected to said
control circuit for counting clock pulses during integra-
tion of said voltages, said clock pulse generator being
connected to said counters by said control circuit upon
application of a signal thereto;
an amplifier having an amplification factor N*2^N2 con-
nected to said integrator capacitor and having an output;
a third switch connected between said output of said ampli-
fier and a terminal of a holding capacitor, said third switch
being triggerable by said control circuit;
a fourth switch connected between said terminal of said
holding capacitor and said input of said integrating net-
work and triggerable by said control circuit; and
a comparator connected in parallel with said amplifier to
said integrating network and controllingly coupled with
said control circuit to apply said signal thereto and so that
said holding capacitor is connected to said input of said
integrating network to apply a residual voluge of the
integrating network amplified by the factor N*2 to the
integrating network after the first zero passage of the
reference voltage and simultaneously form a combined
count in said counters of a value Zi X N2 - Z2 under the
222
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
control of the reference voltage where Z\ and Z2 are the
counts in the first and second counters respectively, said
control circuit being provided with a delay for triggering
said third and fourth switches following the zero passages
of the comparator output beyond the subsequent flank of
a clock pulse by a fixed delay greater than the width of
disturbance pulses, said delay corresponding to a fixed
pulse count increasing the backward count in the com-
bined counters, said reference voltage being the same for
each control of the formation of said combined count.
4,379,261
ROTATING MAGNETIC nELD DEVICE FOR
DETECTING CRACKS IN METAL
Kenneth M. Lakin, 2601 Oakwood Rd., Ames, Iowa 50010
Filed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 185,968
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/90: GOIR 33/12
U.S. a. 324—240 14 Claims
9 5
1. Eddy current inspection apparatus for detecting cracks in
a metallic article having a fiat surface, comprising:
(a) a central magnetic core extending longitudinally along a
central axis, the central core having two ends designated
the first and second ends, respectively;
(b) at least three L-shaped peripheral magnetic cores,
» (i) each peripheral core having first and second leg por-
tions joined to form the two legs of an L-shaped mem-
ber, the first leg portion being magnetically coupled to
the first end of the central core and extending radially
away from the central axis, and the second leg portion
extending parallel to the central axis and terminating in
a foot, and
(ii) the feet of each of the peripheral cores and the second
end of the central core being substantially coplanar;
(c) a drive coil wound on each of the peripheral cores;
(d) means for electrically energizing each drive coil with an
alternating-current signal, the signals applied to the differ-
ent drive coils having at least two different electrical
phases so as to produce in the metallic article, when the
feet of the peripheral cores are positioned abutting the
surface of the article, a magnetic field rotating about the
central axis;
(e) a sensor coil wound on the central core; and
(0 means for detecting the voltage appearing across the
sensor coil, the value of the voltage indicating whether a
crack exists in the metallic article.
4,379,262
NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE SYSTEMS
Ian R. Young, Sunbury-on-Thames, England, assignor to Picker
Internationa] Limited, Wembley, England
Filed Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,672
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 10, 1979,
7927%5
Int. a.^ GOIN 27/00
U.S. a. 324—309 13 Qaims
1. A nuclear magnetic resonance apparatus comprising:
first magnetic means for generating a steady magnetic field
which bulges outwardly from one side of said first mag-
netic means so as to protrude into a body positioned adja-
cent said first magnetic means on said one side, thereby to
establish therein a magnetic field which varies in strength
with distance in at least a first direction in said body and
is of constant strength in curved surfaces in said body;
means for preferentially exciting resonance of nuclei within
the body lying in a selected one of said curved surfaces of
constant magnetic field strength;
second magnetic means for applying a magnetic field having
a gradient in a second direction orthogonal to said first
direction, thereby to restrict resonance to a line in said one
surface wherein said one surface intersects a surface in
which the magnetic field produced by said second mag-
netic means is constant;
means for dispersing the phase of the resonance along said
line; and
means for sensing the dispersed resonance as a function of
position in said line.
4,379,263
ENGINE ANALYZERS
Geoffrey J. Everett, Somerton, and Christopher J. Hunt, Tiver-
ton, both of England, assignors to TI Crypton Limited, Bridge-
water, England
Filed Nov. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,528
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 27, 1979,
7940836
Int. a.3 F02P 77/00
U.S. a. 324—379 9 Qaims
PRIOR ART
yv 1 ^ 1 Y-
1. An engine analyser, adapted to process ignition voltage or
current signals from a pair of engine components comprising
the spark plug and the lead feeding that spark plug of a spark
ignition internal combustion engine of the kind in which said
signals comprise a succession of alternating real and wasted
sparks, said analyser including a probe to be connected to one
component of said pair of components, for emitting an input
signal to the analyser representative of the ignition voltage or
current, circuitry means connected between said probe and
said analyser which will pass those pulses of the input signal
representative of the real spark and to inhibit passage of those
pulses of said input signal representative of the wasted spark.
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
223
4,379^64
. BROADBAND PHASE SHIFTER
Wilfried K. Lenhardt, Richardson, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 176,896
Int. a.3 GOIR 25/04
U.S. a. 328—24 15 Qaims
VARIABLE
GAIN
QuAORATjRE
HYBRID
O.'A
A CONVERTER
VARIABLE
OAiN
44
»~J — ^
P«OM
D/A
CONVEtTEl ^l^so
OWTftd
u
time (Ti) upon sensing voltage equality between said
ramp voltage and said time period analog voltage;
I
jT V''/ r/M^ ^^/ ^^v
\lMffV£j
'■ V /\
I ^*S»f7
ffflfur}J»'^^S
'4t
i 'Mmi'Afiivf^
1. A phase shifting circuit comprising:
receiving means for receiving an incoming electrical signal
having a frequency selected from a wide band of frequen-
cies and producing two signals one 90 degrees out of
phase with the other; having amplitudes approximately
equal to said incoming electrical signal
first gain means for amplitude varying one of said two sig-
nals over a continuous range;
second gain means for amplitude varying an other of said
two signals over a continuous range and
combining means for combining said one amplitude varied
signal and said other amplitude varied signal and produc-
ing a signal having a phase shift from said incoming signal.
4,379,265
DUAL CLOCKING TIME DELAY GENERATION
ORCUIT
Robert D. Catiller, Garden Grove, Calif., assignor to Burroughs
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,071
Int. a.3 H03L 7/00: H03K 5/15
U.S. a. 328—55 11 Qaims
1. A circuit for generating two separate clocking signals
having a delay period, d/, therebetween, said dual clocking
delay circuit comprising:
(a) first means to generate a ramp voltage;
(b) second means to generate an analog voltage proportional
to a time period;
(c) third means to set an initial voltage representing a time
(To) which will initiate a first output clock signal when
said ramp voltage is equal to said initial voltage;
(d) fourth means to provide a first output clock signal at said
time (To);
(e) fifth means to initiate a second output clock signal at a
d.
fv^n/ffijf r*'!^
(0 reference clock means to energize said first and second
means.
4,379,266
PSK DEMODULATOR WITH AUTOMATIC
COMPENSATION OF DELAY INDUCED PHASE SHIFTS
Michael D. Rubin, Saratoga, Calif., assignor to Ford Aerospace
& Communications Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Apr. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 136,867
Int. a.3 H04L 27/22: H03D i/00
U.S. a. 329—104 8 Oaims
swtntPi)
Smill-PJ'PDI -53
BELM
)
SPLnifR
54 1x60
.. .-SPiiIIER)
ai<(#'-PJ-^i J l?C0S(''I-f!->'5-«'0! i
I 52 ' ? •i^os(?n'PJ-PO-<n'fS) r
l^tHPlI-PJ-PD-Pl-PSlf-i^pSIWPIMJ-Ptl-fmi s
SINmi^Il SINllNPhPO) -^5ltl<PWPJ^TO - i^sW PJ-«>SP01 6J ,o 5
.-51 55- <\.-LPf1..- 6U > V-LPf i-WLllPUEivlMJ"!; V^^
C0SIII.PI.P5) 59 I ^SI«<^I-"-'^ "D' l/jCOyPI-PJ.PS-<DI 7
; SPIIITEP
L
,, SIII(»T.PI.PS)
5* 90-
' 'v«PI«Brr] ' hyb'riD [o* bj ' HYBRID \
s
smmi'Pi)
-^-
,64
[COHO'tiONriKJ
H wPiifiEfi r
I^Sill(?(PI-PJI.?(PS-PD))
PHtSE ItilCdllCClRClin
1. A coherent PSK signal demodulator having automatic
compensation of phase variations in its delay element compns-
ing:
means for splitting the signal to be demodulated into two
paths:
a delay element connected to said first path but not to said
second path;
a variable phase shifting device connected to said second
path but not to said first path; and
a phase tracking circuit having a first input responsive to an
224
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
output of said delay element and having a second input
responsive to an output of said variable phase shifting
device, said phase tracking circuit further having an out-
put for controlUng the variable phase shifting device to
maintain constant the phase differential between the phase
variation introduced by the delay element and the phase
^ variation introduced by the variable phase shifting device.
1. A differential amplifier for connection to a first voltage
source (28) to amplify a difference signal, said differential
amplifier having two input terminals (14 and 20) and first and
second output terminals (16 and 22) and having a feedback
node (18), and having a feedback means comprised of:
a first MOSFET (30) having a source, drain and gate, said
gate coupled to said first output terminal (16), said drain
for connection to a first voltage source (28) and said
source (46) for connection to a first current source means
for supplymg a substantially constant current, for provid-
ing a first feedback signal at said source (46) proportional
to the signal at said first output terminal (16);
a second MOSJ^T (34) having a source, drain and gate, said
gate coupled to said source (46) of said first MOSFET and
said drain coupled to said first output terminal (16) and
said source coupled to a second current source means for
supplying a substantially constant current, for providing a
negative second feedback signal to said first output termi-
nal (16) tending to keep the voltage on said terminal sub-
stantially constant;
a third MOSFET (38) having a gate, drain and source, said
drain coupled to said feedback node (18), said gate cou-
pled to said source (42) of said second MOSFET and said
source for coupling to a second voltage source (44) for
receiving said first feedback signal and for converting it to
a third negative feedback signal at said feedback node (18)
causing said differential amplifier to reject substantially all
common mode input signals and causing substantially all
of the amplified difference signals to appear at said second
output terminal (22).
4,379,268
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLinER CIRCUIT
Mitsuru Nagata, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,755
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 30, 1979, 54-110702
Int. a.3 H03F 3/45
U.S. a. 330—260 8 Qaims
4,379,267
LOW POWER DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
Ian A. Young, Farmers Branch, Tex., assignor to Mostek Corpo-
ration, Carrollton, Tex.
PCT No. PCT/US80/00805, § 371 Date Jun. 25, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 25, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00071, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 7, 1982
PCT Filed Jun. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 252,972
Int. a.' H03F 3/45, 3/16
U.S. a. 330—253 31 Claims
i ;i 0.-^ ^w
tn !-it
1. A differential amplifier circuit comprising:
a pair of differential amplifier units, each unit including a
pair of equal impedance transistor circuits, each transistor
circuit of a pair including a transistor having its emitter
connected to a common current source individual to the
pair, one current source being larger than the other, the
emitters of the transistors of the one unit connected to the
larger current source being coupled through individual
ones of a first pair of equal impedances to the associated
current source, the individual impedances of the first pair
being larger than any impedance between the emitters of
the transistors of the other unit and the smaller current
source,
wherein the bases of the individual transistors in each unit
are connected to the bases of different ones of the transis-
tors of the other unit and the collectors of the individual
transistors of each unit are connected to the collectors of
different ones of the transistors of the other unit in which
the bases of the transistors in the pairs of units are not
connected to each other.
4,379,269
RF AMPLinER HAVING AUTOMATIC GATE BIAS
SWITCHING IN RESPONSE TO BAND SELECTION
Sadayoshi Ijichi, Soma, Japan, assignor to Alps Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,607
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 4, 1980, 55-27111
Int. a.3 H03F 3/193: H03J 5/24; H04N 5/44
U.S. CI. 330— 277 5 Claims
i
22 AGC ,;,; ■'.
-.6
1. An RF amplifier of the type equipped with a dual gate
MOS FET, comprising:
input means receptive to frequencies of high and low bands;
selecting means for feeding the first gate of said FET selec-
tively with either frequencies in said high band or frequen-
cies in said low band;
means for feeding the second gate of said FET with an
automatic gain control (AGC) voltage; and
means for feeding the first gate of said FET with a bias
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
225
voltage difTering in accordance with the selecting of either
said high or said low band.
4,379^71
INPUT SELECTION ARRANGEMENT FOR APPLYING
DIFFERENT LOCAL OSOLLATOR SIGNALS TO A
PRESCALER OF A PHASE-LOCK LOOP TUNING
SYSTEM
William L. Lehmann, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,580
Int. CI.' H04B I If): H04N 5/44
U.S. a. 331—49 7 Qaims
4,379,270
PHASE LOCKED LOOP HAVING RAPID TUNING
Margaret P. Carter, South Ruislip, and David Hodgson, Oxford,
both of England, assignors to British Communications Corpo-
ration, Ltd., Bracknell, England
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 238.154
Claims priority, application. United Kingdom, Apr. 30, 1980,
8014231
Int. CI.3 H03L 7/18 *
U.S. a. 331—1 A 8 Qairas
[^I-Kjlh:^
>Kf|
«i»wo
1. A frequency tuning arrangement for tuning a variable
frequency to a desired frequency, comprising
a source of the variable frequency,
a source of reference frequency,
frequency changing means connected to receive the fre-
quency from one said source and to alter it by an adjust-
able factor so as to produce a control frequency,
phase comparison means for repeatedly comparing the pha-
ses of the control frequency and the frequency from the
other said source whereby to produce in response to each
comparison a control signal dependent on the magnitude
and direction of any phase error detected,
adjusting means responsive to the control signal and con-
nected to adjust the variable frequency source so as to
change the variable frequency in a sense and by an amount
so as to produce a temporary phase error in the opposite
direction to the detected phase error, the magnitude of the
temporary phase error being substantially equal to the
detected phase error, and
control means operative to make such change in the control
signal as causes a change in the variable frequency in the
opposite sense and by such an amount and at such time
before the next phase comparison as to eliminate the tem-
porary phase error and to tend to equalize the control
frequency and the frequency from the other said source.
1. Apparatus, comprising: •
frequency divider means having an input terminal for divid-
ing the frequency of a local oscillator signal applied to said
input terminal;
a first local oscillator for generating at a first output point a
first local oscillator signal having a frequency in a first
band of frequencies when enabled to operate;
a second local oscillator for generating at a second output
point a second local oscillator signal having a frequency in
a second band of frequencies lower in frequency than said
first band when enabled to operate;
band selection means for selectively enabling said first and
second local oscillator means to operate to generate re-
spective ones of said first and second local oscillator sig-
nals;
input means including reactive components coupled be-
tween said first and second output points and said input
terminal; and
configuration selection means coupled to said input means
and said band selection means for selectively configuring
said input means to form a first reactive network having a
first frequency response characteristic for passing signals
in said first band when said first local oscillator is enabled
and configuring said input means to form a second reac-
tive network having a second frequency response charac-
teristic different from said first frequency response charac-
teristic for passing signals in said second band and reject-
ing signals in said first band when said second local oscilla-
tor is enabled.
4,379.272
AGC aRCUIT WITH LEVEL-COMPENSATING INPUT
Mark A. Wheatley, Maidenhead, England, assignor to Racal-
Dana Instruments Limited, Berkshire, England
Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,272
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 15, 1979,
7943279
Int. a.J H03C 7/06, H03G 3/20
U.S. a. 332—38 3 Qaims
1. In an electrical circuit arrangement for automatic gain
control including an AGC loop responsive to an input signal
and operative to maintain an output signal at a desired mean
level represented by a reference signal applied in the loop,
level changing means outside the loop and connected to
change the level of the input signal by an amount corre-
226
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
S
spending to changes in level represented by changes in the
reference signal, so that the level of the input signal as
miGm
P*SS
LOW
■ P'SS
received by the AGC loop is at least approximately at the
right value.
4,379,273
PULSE TRANSFORMER LASER DIODE PACKAGE
Gerald M. Bender, University City, Mo., assignor to McDonnell
Douglas Corporation, Long Beach, Calif.
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,074
Int. a.^ H03H 7/38
U.S. CI. 333—32 11 Claims
1. A device for matching the impedance of a transmission
line to the impedance of an electronic device, said matching
device including:
a body of electrically conductive material having a first
surface in which is defined a generally toroidal shaped
cutout with a center post extending out of said first sur-
face;
a toroidal transformer positioned about said center post and
in said defined generally toroidal shaped cutout having a
primary winding thereabout and means for connecting
said primary winding to the transmission line; and
a cover positioned in electrical communication with said
first surface and the electronic device to enclose said
toroidal transformer with a single electrical loop including
the electronic device, whereby said body and said cover
form a secondary winding about said toroidal transformer
connected to the electronic device.
a substantially rectangular substrate having a plurality of
boundaries;
a first frequency sensitive electro-acoustic transducer re-
sponsive to a signal at the first input port and situated on
the substrate so as to launch acoustic surface waves in a
direction which is oblique to the substrate boundaries;
a first acoustic multistrip coupler situated on the substrate
adjacent the first electro-acoustic transducer so as to
receive surface waves launched therefrom and to launch
additional acoustic surface waves in a direction parallel to
the received surface waves and oblique to the substrate
boundaries;
a first output transducer disposed on the substrate adjacent
the first acoustic coupler for receiving the surface waves
launched therefrom and for developing a corresponding
electrical signal at the output port;
a second frequency sensitive electro-acoustic transducer
responsive to a signal at the second input port and situated
on the substrate so as to launch acoustic surface waves in
a direction which is oblique to the substrate boundaries;
a second acoustic multistrip coupler situated on the substrate
adjacent the second electro-acoustic transducer so as to
receive surface waves launched therefrom and to launch
additional acoustic surface waves in a direction parallel to
its received surface waves and oblique to the substrate
boundaries; and
a second output transducer disposed on the substrate adja-
cent the second acoustic coupler for receiving the surface
waves launched therefrom and for developing a corre-
sponding electrical signal at the output port,
whereby an electrical signal applied to one of the input ports
is converted to a filtered signal at the output port, and
acoustic waves reflected by the substrate's boundaries are
rendered less easily detectable by the transducers.
4 379 274
ACOUSTIC SURFACE WAVE MULTIPLEXING HLTER
Kai Hansen, Arlington Heights, 111., assignor to Zenith Radio
Corporation, Glenview, 111.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,649
Int. a.^ H03H 9/72, 9/64
^.S. a. 333-194 13 oaiins
1 An acoustic surface wave multiplexing filter for receiving
in electrical signal at one of first and second input ports and for
developing a filtered electrical signal at an output port, com-
prising:
4,379,275
DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING LARGE FORCES
Werner Elsel, Erlangen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 281,936
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 21,
1980, 3027605
Int. a.3 HOIF 7/22
U.S. a. 335—216 9 Claims
1. In a device for transmitting large forces between a super-
conducting magnet winding which is cooled to a very low
temperature, and an abutment which takes up the forces and is
at a higher temperature level, especially of an energy storage
device, including several support bodies which are arranged
one behind the other in the direction of the force transmission
and are thermally subdivided by a metal sheet serving as a heat
shield, the improvement comprising at least one box shaped
hollow support element being provided as each support body,
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
227
and at least one cooling tube thermally connected to the metal
sheet of the heat shield for keeping said metal sheet at a prede-
^
lateral surfaces adjoining said upper surface of a body, said
stack extending longitudinally and said plates being per-
pendicular to the longitudinal dimension of said stack, said
plates each having at least one opening and said openings
being aligned along said stack to form at least one longitu-
dinally extending hollow,
a first magnetic assembly received in said hollow and com-
prising at least one stack of alternating permanent magnets
and pole pieces with the pole pieces of said first assembly
alternating in magnetic polarity:
a second magnetic assembly mounted in said body and com-
prising at least one stack of permanent magnets for creat-
ing magnetic polarities alternating along said second as-
1^
w
termined intermediate temperature using a coolant conducted
therethrough.
4,379,276
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR THE MULTIPOLAR
MAGNETIZATION OF A MATERIAL IN STRIPS
Claude Bouchara, Bernin; Robert Henaff, Saint-Martin-
d'Heres, and Pierre Jacob, Eybens, all of France, assignors to
Aimants Ugimag S.A., Saint-Pierre-d'Allevard, France
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,742
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 15, 1980, 80 03758
Int. CI.3 HOIF 7/20
U.S. a. 335—284 13 Claims
z~yjj^f/ji}^Afii*jfij^iijY
1. An apparatus for the multipolar magnetization of a hard
magnetic material in the the form of a strip or sheet comprising
two opposing stacks separated from each other by an air gap
wherein the magnetizable material is moved laterally between
the stacks, each stack being formed from main permanent
magnets having parallel bases and a high coercive field and
pole pieces formed of mild magnetic material, said pole pieces
being positioned alternately between said permanent magnets,
said magnets and pole pieces of each of said stacks being situ-
ated in opposing relationship, and the direction of magnetiza-
tion of said main permanent magnets define opposing compo-
nents of magnetization perpendicular to said bases of the facing
main magnets and said strip.
sembly, said pole pieces corresponding in thickness mea-
sured along the longitudinal dimension generally to the
thicknesses of said plates, the magnetic pitch of said first
assembly being equal to the distance between correspond-
ing portions of successive pole pieces; and
means mounted on said body engaging one of said assemblies
for displacing same longitudinally through a distance at
least equal to said magnetic pitch thereby shifting selec-
tively between an ON position in which a magnetic field
appears at each of said surfaces to affix a workpiece
thereto and an OFF position in which the magnetic field
at said surfaces is substantially canceled, the other of said
assemblies being fixed relative to said body.
4,379,278
RESETABLE ORCUIT BREAKER
Walter J. Kuczynski, 871 Pennsylvania Ave., and Robert A.
Kuczynski, 1075 W. Chestnut St., both of Union, N.J. 07083
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,596
Int. a.3 HOIH 61/04
U.S. a. 337—91 10 Claims
, » SI JB
%m^
4,379,277
MAGNETIC CHUCK
Philibert M. Braillon, Montmelian (Savoie), France
Filed Aug. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 181,085
Oaims priority, application France, Aug. 27, 1979, 79 21%2
Int. C\? HOIF 7/04
U.S. a. 335—295 7 Qaims
1. A magnetic device, especially a chuck for magnetic reten-
tion of workpieces, comprising:
a stack of alternately magnetic and nonmagnetic plates de-
fining an exposed upper surface and at least two exposed
1. A manually resettable switch comprising first and second
terminals, said second terminal having a contact, a moveable
actuator affixed to said first terminal and having a contact
adapted to move into and out of engagement with said second
terminal contact, said actuator having a tail and being between
said terminals, said second terminal not extending directly
above said tail, and an insulating slide biased to be disposed
between said contacts when said contacts are not mutually
engaged, said slide and said tail having mutual perpendicular
longitudinal axes, thereby providing clearance for said actua-
tor tail whereby said actuator is free to move over a relatively
large area.
4,379,279
SUBMERSIBLE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER PACKAGE
Saeed Nasiri, San Jose, Calif., assignor to National Semiconduc-
tor Corporation, Santa Qara, Calif.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,487
' Int. a.3 HOIL 10/10
U.S. a. 338—42 4 Qaims
228
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
1. A submersible pressure transducer comprising in combi-
nation:
a generally cylindrical housing having first and second sub-
stantially cylindrical chambers formed in opposite ends
therein and disposed coaxially of said housing;
a cylindrical bore communicating between said chambers;
a pressure responsive silicon transducer chip mounted in a
fixed position in a first one of said chambers and having
first a portion subject to pressure in said first chamber and
a second portion thereof communicating via said bore and
subject to pressures in said second chamber;
a diaphragm sealingly closing each of said chambers;
a separate body of isolation fluid of substantially equal vol-
umes filling each of said chambers and contacting a re-
spective one of said first and second portions of said trans-
ducer chip; and
first and second pressure ports for communicating a refer-
ence fiuid and a pressure fluid to a respective one of said
diaphragms for establishing a responsive pressure on said
transducer chip.
4,379,280
VEHICLE DETECTION SYSTEMS
Kamran Eshraghian, Hectorrille South, and Robert E. Bogner,
College Park Soutb, both of Australia, assignors to U.S. Phil-
ips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 20, 1978, Ser. No. 953,328
Qaims priority, application Australia, Nov. 9, 1977, PD235S
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 18,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.5 G08G 1/01: G06G 7/76
V.S. a. 340—38 L 5 Qaims
1. A vehicle detection system comprising a transmitter for
supplying a continuous wave signal, a receiver and sensing
means for coupling said continuous wave signal to said re-
ceiver so that the approach of a vehicle produces a disturbance
having a leading edge with a changing voltage level in the
e nvelope of the signal received by said receiver, said envelope
rising to at least a first peak level, said receiver including:
first means for deriving from said received signal a first
signal representative of the maximum slope of said leading
edge of said disturbance at a first instant preceding the
occurrence of said first peak,
peak detecting means for deriving from the received signal a
peak signal representative of the first peak of the envelope
voltage during the leading edge portion of said distur-
TflflNSMITTER-
1
' f SIG
GEN
1
J -RECEIVER
RECEIVING
ST«GE
l2 t m
DEMODULATOR J
M 1 _
1
F^
IDENTIFICATION
STAGE
; STORAGE
DEVICES
^T_[K>i
-TIMING
GENERATOR
bance less the envelope voltage prior to said disturbance,
and
means for producing from said first and peak signals a signal
representative of the ratio between said first and peak
signals which is proportional to the velocity of the vehi-
cle.
4,379,281
ALARM SYSTEM FOR BICYCLES AND THE LIKE
John C. Thomas, 2984 Canna St., Thousand Oaks, Calif. 91360
FUed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,343
Int. a.3 B60R 25/10
U.S. a. 340—63 4 Oaims
,6 4 8
1. An alarm system for bicycles and the like having a chassis
and handlebars mounted on a rotatable post, comprising:
a collar having an undulating exterior surface and including
means for being mounted on the handlebar post to rotate
therewith,
a pin member carrying a first electrical contact means,
means for mounting said pin member on said chassis with
said pin member longitudinally directed toward said col-
lar,
spring means urging said pin member toward an inward
position seated against the undulating collar surface,
whereby said pin is moved to an outward position by the
undulating collar surface in response to rotation of the
handlebar post,
an electrically operated alarm,
an energizing circuit for said alarm, said circuit comprising
means for receiving a source of electrical power, a second
electrical contact means positioned to be contacted by the
first electrical contact means in response to outward
movement of the pin member when the handlebar post is
rotated, and circuit means connected to complete an ener-
gization circuit for the alarm in response to contact being
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
229
made between the first and second electrical contact
means, and
a third electrical contact means held opposed to and electri-
cally connected to the second electrical contact means on
the collar side of the first electrical contact means, said
third contact means positioned to be contacted by the first
contact means moving inwardly under the influence of the
spring means in response to removal of the collar, and
thereby complete the alarm energizing circuit when the
collar is removed.
4,379,282
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEPARATION OF
OPTICAL CHARACTER RECOGNITION DATA
David C. Bailey, San Jose, Calif., assignor to Dest Corporation,
San Jose, Calif.
Filed Jun. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 44,488
Int. a.3 G06K 9/00
U.S. a. 382—9 4 Claims
I ■.'Mil'" at<«:"
I 178 B. •■-.^
Black
» _ 3( rcTO«
^^) n.4r..
<^--"- 1^
two adjacent characters by said touchmg character sepa-
ration means.
4,379,283
TYPE FONT OPTICAL CHARACTER RECOGNITION
SYSTEM
Koji Ito, and Akira Kondo, both of Yokohama, Japan, assignors
to Toyo Keiki Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 30, 1981. Ser. No. 229,996
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 5, 1980, 55-12601
Int. a.' G06K 9/46
U.S. CI. 382-18 10 Claims
ABcn • ,2 ^
HXE0
MfMOKV
(ROM)
L'r
ARITHMETIC I
UNIT I
FUNCTlOJJ, "]
GfNFOATOS
( WOMl
n^
jB :f(.)
ADOeN
TRACT I
I m I
loi-rta.)
I "
MEMOAl
(RAM;
1
1. In an optical character recognition system of the type
having a scanner for sequentially viewing the character in a
line of type, some of which characters may be underlined or
kerning or touching and generating a digital data field having
data bits which are representative of vertical columns and
horizontal rows of black and white image values of said char-
acters, and having digital storage means for accumulating
columns of said data and digital comparison means for compar-
ing the data with patterns of known characters for the purpose
of identifying the characters being scanned, an apparatus for
separating character data prior to recognition, comprising:
white column detection means for determining when a con-
tinous vertical column of white bits appears within the
data field of two adjacent characters;
kerning detection means for determining when a path of
contiguous white bits extending from the bottom row to
the top row of the character data field of two adjacent
characters exist;
kerning character separation means for determining which
data bits within the data field of two adjacent characters
should be grouped with the first character and which data
bits should be grouped with the second character;
touching character separation means for determining the
column having the lowest black bit count within a group
of data columns located in the area of the data field of two
adjacent characters having the greatest probability of
being the area in which the two characters touch; and
means responsive to the white column detection means and
the kerning character detection means for first evaluating
whether a white column can be detected, and if so, for
' outputing a signal defining the column at which the sepa-
ration of the character must be made, and if not, for next
evaluating whether kerning character can be detected,
and if so, for outputing a signal to the kerning character
separation means to provide separation of the data bits for
each character by said kerning character separation
means, and if not, for outputing a signal to the touchmg
character separation means to provide separation of the
1. An optical character recognition system comprising:
first memory means for temporarily stormg an mput charac-
ter information read by optica! scanning of a printed char-
acter on a paper in the form of a digitized data including
background digital bits indicative of a paper white back-
ground area and character digital bits indicative of a char-
acter black data area;
location normalizing means for normalizing a location occu-
pied by said input character information on a storage
plane of said first memory means;
counting means for dividing said normalized input character
information on said storage plane into a plurality of seg-
ments each having an area of 4x4 meshes, counting the
number of character digital bit indicative meshes in each
of said segments and generating the resulting count values
as a set of segment information;
subtracting means for subtracting 1 from each of said count
values of said segment information set when the same is
greater than 1;
second memory means for temporarily storing as an input
information a collection of said segment information for
one character applied via said subtracting means:
third memory means preliminarily storing permanently a set
of standard character information representing a plurality
of different characters in the same segment information
form as the information form of said input information;
matching means for performing the process of pattern
matching between said input information and each of said
set of standard character information; and
decision means responsive to the result of said pattern
matching process to determine whether said primed char-
acter is to be recognized as one corresponding to the most
matched one of said set of standard character information
or the same is to be rejected.
230
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,284
COHERENT PHASE SHIFT KEYED DEMODULATOR
FOR POWER LINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
John R. Boykin, Arnold, Md., assignor to Westinghouse Electric
Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 77,824, Sep. 21, 1979, Pat. No. 4,311,964.
This application Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,261
Int. a.J H03D 3/00; H04L 27/22; H04M 11/04
U.S. a. 340—310 R 7 Qaims
logic states during the received carrier data symbols of a
single carrier data transmission.
4,379,285
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER
Daniel J. Dooley, 21193 Deepweil Ct., Saratoga, Calif. 95070
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,908
Int. a.3 H03K 13/09
U.S. a. 340—347 AD 7 Qaims
uxrt.
sum I mjKm\
law per w
10
-IKiC
'mac
r
»&iari
,.. , I CUBfll
wit I -ru-Lrtj
Mirjirrn
>0 Cti^ i _
:* :», 1"^ «y
ix.. '"
' illiv
"^ ??5
1. A power line carrier communication system for transmit-
ting coherent phase shift keyed (CPSK) carrier data transmis-
sions, comprising:
power line coupler means for being mounting in signal commu-
nication with power line conductors transmitting a carrier
having binary phase modulated data;
receiver means for receiving carrier signals from said power
hne coupler and including high pass filter means for attenu-
ating electric power frequencies conducted on said power
line conductors along with said carrier, said receiver further
including band filter means having a center frequency sub-
stantially equal to a predetermined frequency of said carrier
and still further including signal clipping and amplifying
means for producing hard limited signals varying between
two levels in response to said carrier; and
a coherent phase demodulator for receiving said hard limited
signals and including a source of sampling pulses having a
predetermined sampling frequency wherein the ratio of said
carrier frequency and said sampling frequency is not equal to
an integer, polarity sampling means for producing polarity
sample bit signals having binary values responsive to the two
levels of said hard limited signals and occurring at the fre-
quency of said sampling pulses, said sample bit signals hav-
ing reoccurring predetermined groups thereof with an inte-
ger number of said groups occurring during each one of
equal data symbol times in said carrier, whereby said groups
define plural carrier segments within each data symbol time,
said demodulator further including means producing first
vector signals representing a relative phase angle corre-
sponding to the binary coded values of each of said groups
of sample bits and still further including means producing
reference vector signals representing a phase angle respon-
sive to weighted sum averages of phase angle representa-
tions corresponding to binary coded values of each of a
predetermined integer number of said groups of sample bits
occurring an integer number of said data symbols, said de-
modulator still further including phase detector means re-
sponsive to said first vector signals and said reference vector
signals for producing correlation signals representing rela-
tive measures of positive and negative correlation of the
phase angles of said first and reference vector signals, said
demodulator still further including summing means for alge-
braically adding said correlation signals derived from each
of said first vector signals produced during said plural car-
rier segments and within each data symbol and correspond-
ingly producing correlation sum signals having positive and
negative values representing opposite binary conditions of
the carrier data symbols, and said demodulator still further
including data bit output means having means for continu-
ously relating the positive and negative values of said corre-
lation sum signals to one and the other of said opposite
binary conditions of said data symbols, respectively, for
producing data bit output signals having the same binary
^■'•,12 ,'fS? ,kii
1. An analog to digital conversion circuit of the stage by
stage, successive approximation type, wherein at least the
initial stage comprises
mirror current means, including an input terminal for receiv-
ing an analog input current and for generating a first
mirror current of the same magnitude as the magnitude of
the input current,
reference current means for generating a reference current
whose magnitude is one half of the full scale current range
of the conversion circuit,
comparator means connected to the mirror current means
and to the reference current means for comparing the
magnitude of the first mirror current with the magnitude
of the reference current and for generating a first binary
output signal and, additionally, a stage output signal
which is twice the magnitude of the difference of the first
mirror current and the reference current when the magni-
tude of the first mirror current is greater than the magni-
tude of the reference current and for generating a second
binary output signal and, additionally, a stage output
signal having twice the magnitude of the first mirror
current, when the magnitude of the first mirror current is
less than that of the reference current.
4,379,286
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING ORCUIT
Teppei Yokota, Cbiba, and Yoshiro Joichi, Tokyo, both of Ja-
pan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 285,840
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 28, 1980, 55-103320
Int. a.3 H03K 13/02
U.S. Q. 340—347 DD 2 Oaims
1. A digital signal processing circuit, in which first and
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
231
second error correction words are generated from a predeter-
mined number of words among data consisting of a plurality of
words each consisting of n bits and which can process digital
data of a data format where at least said predetermined number
of words and said first and second error correction words
constitute one block, comprising an input terminal 1 to which
said plurality of n-bit data words are supplied, a first error
correction word generating circuit 20 for generating said first
error correction word from said predetermined number of data
words, a second error correction word generating circuit 10
for generating said second error correction word, and a timing
signal generating circuit for generating a timing signal for
controlling said first and second error correction word gener-
ating circuits, a plurality of data words each consisting of m
bits (m being a positive integer greater than n) being supplied
to said input terminal 1, said second error correction word
generating circuit 10 effecting operations necessary for gener-
ating said second error correction word with at least one clock
signal among a bit clock of m-n bits and controlled by a timing
pulse output from said timing signal generating circuit.
basic strokes of two or more, at least a portion of said poly-
graphic keys being digraphic, means responsive to the actua-
<~\
ji ^ A •', A ';, > ^^. /^~N ^~^. ,'--s r-N / — y /-^'
S*:e &«.-' / EX Of ZODE
tion of said keys to generate a code signal representative of the
stroke or sequence of strokes represented thereby.
I 4,379,287 -
CAPAOTIVE SWITCH AND PANEL
Hugh J. Tyler, Santa Ana, Calif., and William H. Conway,
Midlothian, Va., assignors to Robertshaw Controls Company,
Richmond, Va.
Continuation of Ser. No. 932,086, Aug. 8, 1978, abandoned. This
application Jan. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 114,596
Int. a.3 G06F 3/02; HOIG 1/005. 1/01. 1/013
U.S. a 340-365 C 8 Qaims
15
?-^ABLE CONNECTOR
DRIVER /SENSOR
1. In a user, touch actuable switch panel of the capacitive
type including one or more touch actuable capacitive switches
each switch including at least two capacitive plate means
formed on a dielectric panel and conductive paths formed on
said dielectric panel for interconnecting the capacitive plate
means to means for applying signals to said capacitive plate
means forming a respective capacitive switch and sensing a
resulting change in signal level when said respective switch is
actuated by said user, the improvement comprising:
means formed on said dielectric panel for balancing the
effect of stray capacitance between said conductive paths
and said capacitive plate means forming said one or more
capacitive switches and maintaining the level of said
change of signal at a determined value upon the actuation
of one of said respective capacitive switches.
4,379,288
MEANS FOR ENCODING IDEOGRAPHIC CHARACTERS
Daniel L. Leung, and Lai-Wo S. Leung, both of 1260 Lawrence
Ave., East, Don Mills, Ontario, Canada (M3A 1C4)
FUed Mar. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 129,350
Int. C\? G06F 3/02: B41J 5/00
U.S. a. 340—365 R 19 Qaims
12. A keyboard for encoding Chinese type characters in
accordance with five basic strokes and the sequence thereof
comprising three horizontal ranks, each rank comprising about
ten keys wherein all character coding keys locate, wherein five
said keys locating in positions in the middle rank are mono-
graphic and representative of a basic stroke, and about twenty
three said keys are polygraphic, representative of a sequence of
4,379,289
HBER OPTICS SECURITY SYSTEM
S. Christopher Peek, Andover, Mass., assignor to GTE Labora-
tories Incorporated, Waltham, Mass.
Filed Mar. 8, 1979, Ser. No. 18,533
Int. a.5 G08B 79/00. 13/18
U.S. a. 340-555 5 Qaims
-f 1 " J 3-
^* *» <■ ■ .*
1. A fiber optics security system comprising
a radiant energy source including a solid state source and
means for pulsing said solid source at a repetition rate;
a radiant energy receiver including means for detecting
radiant energy at said rate;
closed loop fiber optic link means having one end coupled to
receive energy from said source and having an opposite
end coupled to provide energy to said receiver, said fiber
optic link means including, in serial connection, a plurality
of fiber optic links and a plurality of detection means; and
means responsive to cessation of energy to said receiver for
providing a signal; wherein one of said detection means
comprises
a first optical fiber having a first end;
a second optical fiber having a first end;
first holding means for holding said first end of said first
optical fiber;
second holding means for holding said first end of said sec-
ond optical fiber in axial alignment with said first end of
said first optical fiber; and
bimetallic element means attached to said second holding
means, whereby
upon heating of said bimetallic element means, said bimetal-
lic element means causes displacement of said second
holding means, and, thus, causes displacement of said first
232
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
end of said first optical fiber with respect to said first end
of said second optical fiber.
4,379,290
ALARM DEVICE WITH A CONDITION SENSOR
ELEMENT
Jiirg Muggli, Mannedorf, and Gustav Pfister, Uerikon-Stafa,
both of Switzerland, assignors to Cerberus AG, Mannedorf,
Switzerland
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,985
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 17, 1979,
11137/79
Int. a.^GOSB/ 7/;o
LJ.S. a. 340—629 20 Claims
ONIZATlON Fire ALABM
^
Li^
^L^i
1. An alarm device comprising:
a condition sensor element for delivering an output voltage
which upon occurrence of a condition which is to be
reported alters said output voltage in order to initiate
giving of an alarm signal;
an opto-elcctrical transducer operatively connected with
said sensor element for applying an electrical potential
thereto;
at least one radiation-conducting element for transmitting
electromagnetic radiation to said opto-electrical trans-
ducer m order to thereby deliver said electrical potential
for the voltage supply of the sensor element;
un electro-optical transducer operatively connected with
said sensor element;
an input radiation-conducting element for infeedmg electro-
magnetic radiation to said electro-optical transducer;
an output radiation-conducting element for outfeeding elec-
tromagnetic radiation from the electro-optical transducer;
and
said electro-optical transducer modulating, in response to
said sensor element, the electromagnetic radiation passing
from said input radiation-conducting element to said out-
put radiation-conducting element.
when said rotor is not contacting said contact portion, but
conducting when said rotor contacts said contact portion;
a relay including an operator coil in series circuit with said
source and a load circuit path of said electronic switch
means, and said relay including relay contactor means
operable by said coil responsive to conduction of current
J, . - - - —
so
^' 0
'fr . ■ r- " '
- .-^^ :<- - -
through said load circuit path and coil to operate said
contactor means; and
an indicator circuit including an indicator and a normally-
open contact portion of said relay contactor means, for
energizing said indicator in response to said operation of
said contactor means by said relay coil.
4,379,292
METHOD AND SYSIEM FOR DISPLAYING COLORS
UTILIZING TRISTIMULUS VALUES
Sachie Minato, Tokyo, and Haruo Kamata, Kamakura, both of
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited, Yoko-
hama, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 12,212, Feb. 14, 1979. This application
Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 213,116
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 22, 1978, 53-18544
Int. aj G09G 1/28
U.S. CI. 340—701 16 Qaims
la BEf£=rNCE *Hi'f ■.,
4,379,291
BEARING FAILURE INDICATOR FOR ROTATING
ELECTRIC MACHINES
Larry E. Hubbard, Oolitic, and Clifford A. Rhorer, Springville,
both of Ind., assignors to Texas Eastern Scientific Research,
Inc., Pasadena, Tex.
Filed Sep. 4, 1979, Ser. No. 72,124
Int. a.5 G08B 2]/00
U.S. a. 340—682 7 Qaims
1. In an electrical machine having a stator which is generally
symethcal about an axis, and a rotor coaxial with the stator,
with a plurality of pole portions on the stator, the improvement
comprising:
sensor means having a fixed position relative to said stator
and including a contact portion operable as a circuit
switch contactor in response to radial movement of said
rotor relative to said stator;
a source of electrical energy;
electronic switch means having a control element in series
circuit relationship with said contact portion and said
rotor and said source in a sensor circuit, said contact
portion and said rotor serving as a normally-open sensor
switch whereby said sensor circuit is non-conducting
1. A method for displaying a desired color, said method
comprising the steps of:
(A) converting in a computer the tristimulus values of a
desired color into corresponding electrical signals;
(B) providing said so-converted electrical signals to a color
display means that displays a color representative of the
desired color in a color display area in response to said
so-provided electrical signals;
(C) causing said color display means to display a reference
light in a display area thereof other than said color display
area;
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
233
(D) determining the tristimulus values of said reference
light;
(E) generating tristimulus values representative of a prede-
termined standard light, said generating step being inde-
pendent of step (C);
(F) comparing the so-determined tristimulus values of said
reference light with said tristimulus values representative
of said predetermined, standard light;
(G) generating in said computer an error signal representa-
tive of the compared difference between said tristimulus
values of said reference light and said predetermined
standard light; and
(H) combining said error signal with said electrical signals
representative of . le tristimulus values of the desired
color to correct the displayed color for the differences
between the reference light provided by said display
. means and said predetermined standard light.
4,379,293
TRANSPARENT ADDRESSING FOR CRT CONTROLLER
Conrad Boisvert, and William J. Greger, both of San Jose,
Calif., assignors to Honeywell Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,209
Int. a.3 G09G 1/16
U.S. a. 340—750 37 Qaims
a plurality of stations,
a serial data communications bus to which each of said
stations is interfaced and through which each of said
stations communicates to every other of said stations, and
a plurality of circuit means, each in communication with one
of said stations, for controlling orderly and collision-free
access by said station to said serial bus and each operative
in a selected one of the modes including a normal trans-
mission mode and an emergency transmission mode, each
circuit means comprising:
first means for monitoring said bus for transmission inactiv-
ity over a preassigned first time period which is substan-
tially common to all of the stations of said plurality, said
first means including means for reinitializing its monitor-
ing time upon detection of bus transmission activity within
said first time period and for repeating monitoring of said
bus over another first time period upon detection of trans-
mission inactivity throughout a first time period, said first
means further including means for generating a first signal
upon initiation of each repeat of a monitoring operation,
second means for monitoring said bus for transmission inac-
tivity over a selected one of preassigned second and third
time periods, each circuit means corresponding to a sta-
tion of said plurality being preassigned a unique set of
second and third time periods, all said preassigned second
time periods being shorter in time than the shortest of said
preassigned third time periods, said preassigned first time
period being longer in time than the longest of said preas-
"1-.1
1. A controller for cathode ray tubes comprising:
processor terminal means for connecting said controller to a
processor;
CRT terminal means for connecting said controller to a
cathode ray tube;
refresh address generator means for generating refresh ad-
dresses to be connected to a refresh memory so that a
display on the CRT can be refreshed;
update address generator means for generating update ad-
dresses to the refresh memory so\that information within
the refresh memory can be updated;
refresh memory terminal means for connecting the update
address generator means and the refresh address generator
means to the refresh memory; and,
control means for exclusively connecting said update ad-
dress generator means and said refresh address generator
means to said refresh memory terminal means so that only
one of said generator means has control of said refresh
memory at a time.
4,379,294
DATA HIGHWAY ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
James F. Sutherland, Limerick, Ireland; Donald F. Furgerson,
MurrysTille, Pa., and Mladen Kezunovic, Sanyevo, Yugosla-
via, assignors to Electric Power Research Institute, Inc., Palo
Alto, Calif.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 234,060
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/00
VJS. a. 340—825.5 3 Claims
1. In a digital communication system, a serial data communi-
cations network comprising:
signed third time periods, said second means including
means for reinitializing its monitoring time upon detection
of bus transmission activity within said selected time per-
iod and for generating a second signal upon detection of
transmission inactivity throughout said selected time per-
iod, said second means further including means for repeat-
ing monitoring said bus over another selected time period
concurrent with said repeat of monitoring operation of
said first means;
means for selecting one of said preassigned second and third
time periods corresponding to the desired transmission
mode of said normal and emergency transmission modes
of said corresponding station, respectively;
means governed by said second signal to conditionally gen-
erate a third signal to permit said corresponding station
exclusive transmission access to said bus, whereby colli-
sion-free access by each corresponding station to said bus
is achieved;
means for enabling said generating means to generate said
third signal in accordance with a function based on a
combination of time period selection and bus transmission
activity, and a first signal generation; and
means for disabling said generating means to prevent genera-
tion of said third signal upon transmission activity of said
corresponding station and for maintaining disablement
thereof after said transmission until enabled by said en-
abling means, whereby an orderly and emergency access
by each corresponding station to said bus is achieved.
234
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
I 4,379,295
LOW SIDELOBE PULSE COMPRESSOR
Bernard L. Lewis, Oxon Hill, and Frank F. Kretschmer, Laurel,
both of Md., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 230,984
Int. aj GOIS 13/28
U.S. a. 343—17.2 PC 6 Claims
If- H/r
I I .
I f AMP
1 1
MlHRTtPLV
-1-,
J t rftOID
[r-
I lOIQTAi.
— • H POINT r
DtL*TW-ilT| Ot
aw'g'r] Pt t Ar' Q ]
3. A pulse compression system which will yield low side-
lobes comprising:
means for generating a step-approximation to linear FM
signal with N frequency steps;
means for transmitting said signal;
means for receiving echos from said transmitted signal;
means for converting said received echo signal to a baseband
signal and including means for narrow band filtering said
signal;
means for digitizing said baseband signal at the Nyquist
sampling rate for the baseband;
Fast Fourier Transform means for weighting a discrete set of
N^ digitized samples from said digitizing means and gener-
ating N outputs therefrom representing the passbands for
the N transmitted frequency steps;
means for difTerentially delaying said N passband outputs
such that the N passband outputs occur simultaneously;
and
means for adding said differentially delayed outputs to form
a single pulse, such that when an echo is properly indexed
within a discrete set of N^ digitized samples, then a short
pulse will be generated with a peak amplitude.
4,379,296
SELECTABLE-MODE MICROSTRIP ANTENNA AND
SELECTABLE-MODE MICROSTRIP ANTENNA ARRAYS
Frederick G. Farrar, and Daniel H. Schaubert, both of Silver
Spring, Md., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,673
Int. a.^ HOIQ 1/38
U.S. a. 343—700 MS 13 Qaims
1. A selectable mode microstrip antenna comprising:
a dielectric substrate;
a conductive patch on one surface of said substrate, said
conductive patch being substantially rectangular with a
first pair of sides with dimensions "a" and a second pair of
sides with dimensions "b", said conductive patch having a
first centerline parallel to said first pair of sides and a
second centerline parallel to said second pair of sides;
a conductive layer, forming a ground plane, on an opposed
surface of said substrate;
means for providing a radio frequency transmission path to
said conductive patch; and
means for selecting the radiation pattern of said conductive
patch comprising first multiple pairs of switchable short-
ing means for providing electrically conductive paths
between said conductive patch and said ground plane, said
multiple pairs of switchable shorting means selectively
positioned symmetrically on said first centerline around a
center of said first centerline and substantially away from
said center.
4,379,297
ORIENTABLE ANTENNA SUPPORT
Rene Chevallier, Paris, France, assignor to Thomson-CSF,
Paris, France
Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 222,875
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 11, 1980, 80 00611
Int. CV HOIQ 1/12. 1/22
U.S. CI. 343—882 3 Claims
1. An orientable antenna support constituted by a carrying
member and a coupling device for coupling an antenna to the
carrying member, said coupling device including means defin-
ing a vertical rotation axis integral with the carrying member
and means defining an upper end and a lower end; and a hori-
zontal rotation axis integral with the antenna, said horizontal
rotation axis having an end coinciding with the upper end of
the vertical rotation axis, and the two rotation axes being
respectively formed by a first and a second rod forming the
two sides of the right angle of a right-angled triangle, whose
hypotenuse is formed by a third rod integral with the first and
second rods.
4,379,298 -
TUNABLE aTIZEN BAND ANTENNA
Richard G. Vincent, Mesa; Frank Sacks, and Robert F. Steele,
both of Phoenix, all of Ariz., assignors to PAL International,
Phoenix, Ariz.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,267
Int. a.3 HOIQ 1/36
U.S. a. 343—895 15 Claims
1. A tunable antenna comprised of:
a flexible core;
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
235
a conductive internally threaded tuning extender mounted 4,379,300
to the top of said flexible core; INK JET PRINTING
a conductive base mounted to the bottom of said flexible Kenneth H. Fischbeck, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
core; tion, Stamford, Conn.
a conductive wire forming an electrical path from said con- ^'•«*' Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,490
ductive base to said tuning extender;
U.S. a. 346—1.1
Int. a.^ GOID J5/18
2 Claims
/*
_ conductive externally threaded tuning screw threaded
within said conductive tuning extender;
a conductive internally threaded jam nut coupled on said
tuning screw; and
a rubber "0"-ring mounted between said conductive jam nut
and said conductive tuning extender.
1. A method of drop-on-demand ink jet printing comprising;
(a) providing a drop-on-demand ink jet for expellmg mk
droplets;
(b) oscillating said drop-on-demand ink jet in a first direction
while simultaneously moving a record-receiving member
continuously and in a direction orthogonal to the direc-
tion of oscillation of the ink jet, the record-receiving
member being in a location to receive ink droplets ex-
pelled from the ink jet;
(c) expelling ink droplets from said ink jet; and
(d) electrostatically deflecting at least a portion of said mk
droplets in a direction orthogonal to the direction of
oscillation of said ink jet an amount sufficient to at least
partially square off the trace of mk droplets impacting on
the record-receiving surface.
4,379,301
METHOD FOR INK JET PRINTING
4,379,299 Kenneth H. Fischbeck, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
RECORDING STRUCTURE FOR DIRECT READ AFTER tion, Stamford Conn
WRITE RECORDING Filed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,492
Brian J. Fitzpatrick; Rameshwar N. Bhargava, both of Ossining, int. C\.^ GOID 15/18
N.Y.; Alfred E. Milch, Teaneck, N.J., and Pedro Tasaico, U.S. CI. 346—1.1 i Qaim
Windsor, N.Y., assignors to North American Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
j FUed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,419
Int. a.3 GOID 15/34
U.S. CI. 346—1.1 ' 2 Claims
1. A method of writing information on a recording medium
comprising the steps of forming a Group Il-IV semiconductor
film of CdTe on a plastic substrate, directing a laser beam to
the surface of said semiconductor film, locally generating an
area of heat at said semiconductor film where said laser beam
is applied, generating high pressure gaseous components of
said plastic, substrate adjacent to said heated area« of said semi-
conductor film, and causing said gaseous components to burst
through said semiconductor film.
1. A method of correcting velocity induced droplet place-
ment errors in an oscillating bar drop-on-demand ink jet
printer, which comprises:
providing a row of drop-on-demand ink jet ejectors on a bar
parallel to the long axis of said bar;
providing a first and a second electrode, one on either side of
each of said ink jet ejectors, and positioned between said
ejectors in a line parallel to the long axis of said oscillating
bar;
providing direction and velocity sensor means for sensing
the direction and velocity of movement of said bar; and
providing direction and velocity control means responsive
to said direction and velocity sensor means to control the
236
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
application of electrical potential to the trailing electrode
of said first and second electrodes to substantially com-
pletely compensate for velocity induced droplet place-
ment error.
4,379,302
POWDERED MAGNETIC INK PRINTING DEVICES
Christian Dot. Gif sur Yvette. and Jean-Yves Valet, Beauchamp,
both of France, assiipiurs to Societe D' Applications Generates
D'Elect., Paris, France
Filed Jul. 22, 1980. Ser. No. 171,099
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 24, 1979, 79 19113
Int. a.' G03G l'i/00: GOIP 15/06
U.S. CI. 346—74.2 8 Claims
type comprising a source supplying writing fluid or ink under
pressure, a cylindrical electrostrictive element imparting en-
ergy to said ink for forming droplets of ink, an orifice for
ejecting said ink droplets therefrom, annular sealing members
of elastic material making partial engagement with said elec-
trostrictive element for defining an annular ink pump chamber,
and a fluid passage-providing member of cylindrical shape
supporting said sealing members and defining an inlet path
between said ink pump chamber and said ink supp^ source and
an outlet path between said ink pump chamber and said orifipe,
said ink pump chamber being defined by the inner peripheral
face of said cylindrical electrostrictive element, the annular
side faces of said sealing members and the outer peripheral face
of said fluid passage-providing member.
o',
-
7
^
."^JtiT:,
1 1
- — •%
■ \
AJ,
4,379,304
SCREEN FOR A MOSAIC INK RECORDER
Joachim Heinzl, Munich, and Erich Kattner, Neubiberg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,848
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 22,
1980, 3006726
Int. a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—140 R 6 Oaims
1. A printing device comprising: a travelling surface, for
example the surface of a drum, driven in rotation by the action
of first motor means, said traveling surface supporting a thin
magnetic layer; a scanning support driven with a step-by-step
reciprocal movement, perpendicular to the movement of the
travelling surface of said drum, by the action of second motor
means, said scanning support supporting at least one group of
integrated magnetic induction heads, this group of heads being
connected to sequential control means; powdered magnetic ink
supply means; ordinary paper supply means; said scanning
support having an annular shape surrounding the travelling
surface of the drum over a considerable part at least of its
circumferential extent; said scanning support comprising two
lateral parts surrounding a central part; said lateral parts being
arranged to create a seal between themselves and said travel-
ling surface of said drum; said central part supporting one, or
preferably more, groups of integrated magnetic induction
heads: a compressed gas supply device connected to said cen-
tral part; said powdered magnetic ink supply means being
connected to the outside of said scanning support.
4,379,303
INK-JET RECORDING HEAD APPARATUS
Mitsuhiro Nakagaki; Osamu Isoo; Shinji Matsuoka, all of Hita-
chi, and Takabiro Yamada, Ibaraki, all of Japan, assignors to
Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 287,874
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 29, 1980, 55/103186
Int. aJ GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—75 9 Qaims
1. In a mosaic ink recorder having a recording head with a
plurality of ink channels disposed therein, said ink channels
having respective terminations covered with a nozzle plate,
said nozzle plate having a plurality of outlet openings in regis-
try with the terminations of the ink channels, and each ink
channel having a piezoelectric drive element selectively actu-
atable for discharging ink droplets from a respective channel,
the improvement of:
a blocking screen disposed between the terminations of the
ink channels and the nozzle plate, said blocking screen
having a plurality of groups of apertures, each group of
apertures being disposed in registry with a respective
channel termination and a respective outlet opening, each
group of said apertures consisting of a plurality of aper-
tures disposed in symmetrical fashion around a center
aperture, said center aperture being centered with respect
to a central axis of an outlet opening and said apertures
having a cross-section which is approximately one-third
of a cross-section of said outlet openings, said apertures
being of a size for maintaining an ink seal of the respective
ink channels after discharge of an ink droplet therefrom
for preventing entry of air into said ink channel.
4,379,305
MESH GATE V-MOS POWER FET
Muni M. Mitchell, Huntington Station, N.V., assignor to Gen-
eral Instrument Corp., Clifton, N.J.
Filed May 29, 1980, Ser. No. 154,280
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/06
U.S. a. 357—23 16 Oaims
1. A V-MOS, field-effect, semi-conductor device having
gate, source and drain electrodes, which comprises:
1. An ink-jet recording head apparatus of charge modulation a planar, doped, silicon substrate;
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
237
a first, doped, silicon layer epitaxially grown on said silicon
substrate;
a second, doped silicon layer epitaxially grown on said first
silicon layer;
a plurality of regularly spaced, parallel, first V-grooves
extending through said and second and into said first
layers;
a corresponding plurality of regularly spaced, parallel, sec-
ond V-grooves extending through said second into said
first layer, said first and second V-grooves having doped
poly-silicon on the walls thereof and being orthogonally
-■ 'J-
(J
/ ; oKceri
oriented with respect to one another and defining by their
intersection a plurality of generally rectangular, first re-
gions of the first doped layer which act as body elec-
trodes; and
a plurality of second regions of said first first doped layer,
said second regions acting as additional source regions,
each region electrically contacting at least one corner of
the four immediately adjacent, an individual device being
defined by one source region and portions of the four
immediately adjacent additional source regions; (b) the
V-groove gate electrode; and (c) the substrate which acts
as the drain electrode for the device.
4,379,306
NON-COPLANAR BARRIER-TYPE CHARGE COUPLED
DEVICE WITH ENHANCED STORAGE CAPACITY AND
REDUCED LEAKAGE CURRENT
Pallab K. Chatterjee, Dallas, and Aloysious F. Tasch, Jr., Rich-
ardson, both of Tex., assignors to Texas Instruments Incorpo-
rated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Aug. 26, 1977, Ser. No. 827,998
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 14,
1S>99, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/78; GllC 19/28, 11/34
U.S. a. 357—24 8 Oaims
1. A charge coupled device comprising:
a substrate of semiconductor material having a dopant impu-
rity of P-type conductivity, said substrate having a first
surface;
a body of insulating material disposed on said first surface of
said substrate;
means defining a surface charge transfer channel in said
substrate lying along said first surface of said substrate;
first and second spaced apart phase electrodes overlying said
surface channel in transverse relation thereto, each of said
first and second phase electrodes including a first elec-
trode portion and an integral second electrode portion
': offset with respect to the first electrode portion and ar-
ranged with respect to said body of insulating material so
as to provide a layer of insulating material of non-uniform
thickness between each of said phase electrodes and said
first surface of said substrate including a relatively thin
insulation portion between the first electrode portion of
each electrode and said first surface and a relatively thick
insulation portion between the offset second electrode
portion of each electrode and said first surface;
a dopant layer having a dopant impurity of N-type conduc-
tivity in said surface charge transfer channel lying rela-
tively near to said first surface of said substrate;
said substrate under each of said first and second phase
electrodes being divided into a barrier region and an
adjacent well region respectively defined under one and
the other of said first electrode portion and said offset
second electrode portion of each electrode, said dopant
layer of said N-type conductivity extending through said
barrier regions and said well regions;
an enhanced relatively deep layer having a dopant impurity
of P-type conductivity and of greater concentration than
the P-type conductivity dopant impurity in the semicon-
ductor material of said substrate disposed within said
substrate at a depth spaced from said first surface and
extending through said barrier regions and said well re-
gions beneath said first and second phase electrodes; and
the N-type conductivity dopant impurity of said N-type
conductivity dopant layer having a Gaussian distribution
with a peak iying within 500 A-2000 A from said first
surface of said substrate, and the P-type conductivity
dopant impurity of said enhanced relatively deep P-type
conductivity layer having a Gaussian distribution with a
peak lying within 5000 A- 15,000 A from said first surface.
4,379,307
INTEGRATED ORCUIT CHIP TRANSMISSION LINE
Sidney I. Soclof, San Gabriel, Calif., assignor to Rockwell Inter-
national Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 160,031
Int. a.3 HOIL 27/04
U.S. a. 357—68 3 Qaims
1. An integrated chip interconnection which substantially
reduces the RC time constant over current interconnections,
comprising:
a substrate having an elongated cavity etched therein;
a conductive coating along said cavity to comprise a first
conductor; and,
a second conductor in spaced apart relation with said cavity
and generally disposed in the mouth thereof, being formed
from a metal layer applied to said substrate and etched
through to form said cavity.
238
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,308
APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE PARAMETERS
OF nCURES ON A SURFACE
Wojciech Kosmowski, San Juan Capistrano; Richard Eddy,
Gardena, and Martin O'Neill, Placentia, all of Calif., assign-
ors to Cooper Industries, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 124,443, Feb. 25, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,097
Int. a.' H04N 7/18
U.S. a. 358—106 11 Qaims
determining the size and center of said flgure from the
grid addresses of said three boundary picture elements.
"^ro ct'^mamim ^t£iOtm i^mt
aOA^' »W*'"0* y r^tarmo one
■**r; .-•».*■ w«5 r^^o ■> ."«»
1. An inspection apparatus for determining parameters of a
generally circular figure on a surface, comprising:
camera means for generating a video signal representative of
the field of view before said camera means;
table means for supporting said camera means and said sur-
face in an adjustable spaced position with respect to each
other such that selected portions of said surface may be
brought within said field of view, said table means accept-
ing position signals to adjust said spaced position;
control means for generating position signals to bring at least
a portion of said figure within said field of view and for
supplying said position signals to said table means;
digitizer circuitry generating from said camera means video
signal an associated digital signal which discriminates
between portions of said video signal representing a por-
tion of said figure within said field of view and other
portions of said video signal;
sampling means for sampling said digital signal to determine
associated values for a grid of picture elements, each said
picture element corresponding to a fixed portion of said
field of view and having a value indicating whether said
corresponding fixed portion of said field of view includes
a portion of said figure;
addressable storage means for storage and retrieval of said
picture element values; and
processing means, accessing said storage means, for deter-
mining the size and position of said figure from said pic-
ture element values associated with the video signal gener-
ated when said figure is entirely within said field of view
of said camera means,
wherein said processing means includes means for accessing
said storage means to locate first and second boundary
picture elements in a grid column, each representing dis-
tinct boundary portions of said figure; means for locating
a midpoint picture element in the grid midway between
said first and second boundary picture elements; means for
accessing a third boundary picture element in the same
grid row as said midpoint picture element, representing
another distinct poriion of said figure; and means for
4,379,309
COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL SEPARATOR
Herbert Berke, Maitland, and Joseph Portoghese, Altamonte
Springs, both of Fla., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,355
Int. a.3 H04N 5/08
U.S. a. 358—154 11 Oaims
♦ TO «lttiC*».
^^^FOs.-
1. A composite video signal separator comprising, in combi-
nation:
an input terminal adapted for receiving a composite video
signal, said composite video signal having therein a hori-
zontal sync component, a vertical sync component, and a
video component;
first separating means having an input connected to said
input terminal, and an output for passing therethrough the
video component of said composite video signal, for am-
plifying the video component of said composite video
signal, and for inverting the video component of said
composite video signal so as to provide at the output
thereof a video signal;
second separating means having an input connected to said
input terminal and an output for passing therethrough the
horizontal sync and vertical sync components of said
composite video signal, for amplifying the horizontal sync
and vertical sync components of said composite video
signal, and for inverting the horizontal sync and vertical
sync components of said composite video signal;
first phase lock loop circuit means having a data input con-
nected to the output of said second separating means and
an output for locking in upon the vertical sync component
of said composite video signal so as to provide at the
output thereof a vertical sync signal, said vertical sync
signal having therein a plurality of vertical sync pulses;
second phase lock loop circuit means having a data input
connected to the output of said second separating means,
first and second control inputs, and an output for locking
in upon the horizontal sync component of said composite
video signal so as to provide at the output thereof a hori-
zontal sync signal, said horizontal sync signal having
therein a plurality of horizontal sync pulses;
first one-shot multivibrator means having a data input con-
nected to the output of said first phase lock loop circuit
means and an output for expanding the pulse width of
each pulse of said vertical sync signal; and
second one-shot multivibrator means having a data input
connected to the output of said second phase lock loop
circuit means, first and second control inputs, and an
output for expanding the pulse width of each pulse of said
horizontal sync signal.
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
239
4,379,310
1 IMAGE TUBE SUPPRESSION aRCUIT
Sidney L. Bendeli, Riverton, N.J., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 9, 1977, Ser. No. 831,944
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 21, 1977,
11902/77
Int. a.3 H04N 5/J9. 5/34; HOIJ 3 J/26. 29/52
U.S. a. 358—219 9 Qaims
VIDEO OUTPUT I,
14 i 15
T tj ij t, «j t| OfTfCTOI
' THESKU
: MJIIST
3« L« \ 30
f
, wiosmu . „
[ »lllTI»l>ll>TOIl| '»
: 1 i r - n
' "1
FlIMCOf 1-26
1-3 — _M
"Lr"
>l_._._J
1. A tube circuit for automatically enabling the excessive
highlight suppression mode of operation of a camera pickup
tube in response to a video signal level indicative of excessive
highlights in the viewed scene, wherein the pickup tube in-
cludes a tube target and an electrode configuration with a
control grid, an auxiliary grid, and a cathode, adapted to gener-
ate a high intensity beam for bombarding the tube target during
the line flyback period, comprising the combination of:
highlight detector means coupled to the tube target and
including threshold means for automatically generating an
enable command only in response to the existence of
excessive highlights; and
control/timing means coupled to the highlight detector
means for generating and introducing selected signals to
the control grid, the auxiliary grid and the cathode in
response to the enable command to increase the scanning
beam to said high intensity during a selected portion of the
line flyback periods, and thus to enable the excessive
highlight suppression mode of operation of the pickup
tube only in response to the excessive highlights.
4,379,311
RECORDING BIAS SETTING DEVICE FOR A
MAGNETIC RECORDING AND REPRODUCING
APPARATUS
Takashi Ohkawara, Chofu, Japan, assignor to Nakamichi Corpo-
ration, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 164,492
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 6, 1979, 54-93082[U]
Int. a.5 GllB 5/47
U.S. a. 360— 66 2 Qaims
..^j
™..^
1. A recording bias setting device for a magnetic recording
and reproducing apparatus comprising:
means to record and reproduce an AC test signal;
means to select a bias current value from among a plurality
of predetermined bias current values for recording said
AC test signal;
an information processor to control said means to select a
bias current value in accordance with a reproduced output
level of said AC test signal whereby the bias current value
is set;
said information processor including means to detect a semi-
peak reproduoed output level depending on a semipeak
bias current value which provides the maximum repro-
duced output level of said test signal among the selected
bias current values, means to detect among said selected
bias current values a first bias current value less than said
semipeak bias current value and a second bias current
value greater than said semipeak bias current value, both
of which provide reproduced output levels lower than
said semipeak reproduced output level by substantially
equal amounts, and means to control said means to select
a bias current value so that the bias current is set at a value
substantially equal to an average value of said first and
second bias current values.
4,379,312
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR AUDIO-VISUAL PROJECTOR
Michael G. Lee, Redmond, Wash., assignor to Indal Corp.,
Bellevue, Wash.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,082
Int. a.' GllB 31/00
U.S. a. 360—80 9 Qaims
1. A control system for an audio-visual device for sequen-
tially projecting a plurality of frames of a filmstrip and for
presenting an audio program recorded on an audio tape includ-
ing spaced-apart coded signals located at the start of each
portion of each audio program associated with a frame of said
filmstrip, said control system comprising:
first tone-detector means detecting said coded signals for
generating an advance pulse responsive thereto;
^ a film-advance mechanism for advancing said filmstnp re-
sponsive to an advance-actuating signal;
film-advance feedback means for generatmg an advance-
complete pulse after said filmstrip has advanced each
frame; and
advance-counter means incremented by each of said ad-
vance pulses and decremented by each of said advance-
complete pulses, said counter means generating said ad-
vance-actuating signal when the contents of said counter
means do not correspond to a predetermined number,
whereby advance pulses occurring at a rate faster than the
cycle time of said advance mechanism are recorded by
said counter means until said advance mechanism is able
to respond thereto.
240
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379^13
TAPE CASSETTE LOADING DEVICE IN A MAGNETIC
RECORDING AND/OR REPRODUCING APPARATUS
Eiichi Tsuchiya, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Victor Company
of Japan, Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
FUed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,577
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 23, 1979, 54-107578
Int. a.3 GllB 77/00
U.S. CI. 360—96.5 7 Qaims
a cassette holder to receive a cassette inserted from outside the
chassis;
an actuator arm pivotally disposed within the chassis and
normally urged to rotate in a predetermined direction to
counteract insertion of the cassette;
a slide plate adapted for sliding movement to a predetermined
position through a locking position in synchronized associa-
tion with a rotation of the actuator arm in a direction oppo-
site the predetermined direction;
a hook plate normally urged to rotate away from said slide
plate and adapted to engage the slide plate the moment the
slide plate passes the locking position; and
a cassette positioning lever pivotally provided in said chassis
and adapted to initiate a rotation upon completion of said
rotation of the actuator arm to perform a positioning opera-
tion of the cassette received in the cassette holder.
1. A tape cassette loading device in a magnetic recording
and/or reproducing apparatus comprising:
a cassette holder means for holding a tape cassette therein,
said cassette holder being movable vertically between a
receiving position and a playing position, without a hori-
zontal movement thereof;
detection means for detecting a partial insertion of said tape
cassette in a horizontal direction into said cassette holder;
a driving source means for operating in rotation in response
to the detection of said partial cassette insertion by said
detection means;
drawing means for drawing said partially inserted tape cas-
sette into said cassette holder at said receiving position,
said drawing means being driven by the rotational driving
force transmitted from said driving source means; and
tape cassette loading means for lowering said cassette holder
to said playing position while holding said tape cassette
therein, said lowering being responsive to the driving
force transmitted from said driving source means after
said tape cassette is drawn into said cassette holder assum-
ing said receiving position.
^ 4,379,314
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER
Teturo Kamimura; Masahiro Komatsubara; Shizuo Ando;
Takuzi Inanaga, and Akira Takahashi, all of Kawagoe, Japan,
assignors to Pioneer Electronic Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,928
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55-41506;
Mar. 31, 1980, 55-42675[U]
Int. Q.3 GllB 5/008. 15/32. 15/00; G03B 1/04
U.S. Q. 360—96.5 10 Qaims
1 4« i9 M M* Ma M
4,379,315
CARRIAGE LOADING ARM ASSEMBLY HAVING TWO
MAGNETIC TRANSDUCERS FOR A DOUBLE SIDED
FLOPPY DISC
Heinz Schuler, Ventura, Calif., assignor to Applied Magnetics
Corporation, Goleta, Calif.
Filed Oct. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 199,381
Int. Q.^ GllB 5/48; BllB 5/54; GllB 5/58 21/20
U.S. Q. 360—105 15 Qaims
1. A cassette tape player comprising
a chassis;
1. Apparatus for maintaining two magnetic transducers in
operative relation with both sides of a rotatable flexible planar
magnetic recording media comprising
a carriage having a first end and a second end;
a first transducer coupled to said first end of the carriage
through a differential torsion spring support means, said
carriage being adapted to position said first transducer in
different data transfer positions relative to and in engage-
ment with one side of a said media, said differential torsion
spring support means being adapted to support said first
transducer against the one side of a said media in a semi-
compliant relationship with high flexure stiffness about
two axes, one of which is radial with respect to a said
media and the other of which is normal to a said media and
in a fully compliant relationship with low flexure stiffness
about a third axis which is circumferential with respect to
a said media;
a loading arm having a first end and a second end with said
first end being pivotally connected to said second end of
the carriage, said loading arm being positioned relative to
the other side of a said media and adapted to have its
second end movable toward and away from the other side
of a said media;
a second transducer coupled to said second end of the load-
ing arm through a gimbal support means, said loading arm
being adapted to position said second transducer in differ-
ent data transfer positions relative to and in engagement
with the other side of said media, said gimbal support
means being adapted to support said second transducer in
a fully compliant relationship with low flexure stiffness
about all three of the axes with respect a said media; and
means operatively coupled to said carriage and said loading
arm for moving said second end of the loading arm
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
241
toward the other side of said media to position said second
transducer into contiguous engagement with the other
side of a said media and to urge a said media into contigu-
ous engagement with the first transducer positioning a
said media in close operative relationship therebetween,
said first transducer and said second transducer being
responsive to a said media being rotated therebetween
such that the variations in flexure of a said media along the
axes which are radialand normal to a said media are
compensated primarily by movement of the second trans-
ducer against its gimbal support means and partially by
movement of the first transducer against its differential
torsion spring support means and variations in flexure of a
said media along the third axis circumferential thereto are
compensated by movements of each transducer against its
associated supported means to maintain contiguous en-
gagement between each said of a said media and its respec-
tive transducer.
4,379,316
READ/WRITE HEAD CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY FOR A
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
Jan G. Krane, San Juan Capistrano, Calif., assignor to Siemens
Corporation, Iselin, N.J.
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,493
Int. a.3 GllB 5/54. 5/48. 21/20
U.S. CI. 360—105 10 Qaims
1. A read/write head carriage assembly for a data storage
device for use with a flexible, double-sided magnetic recording
medium, said carriage assembly comprising, in combination:
(a) a carriage base mounted in said data storage device for
relative motion in a substantially linear direction parallel
to the plane of said recording medium, said base having a
first transducer mounting location;
(b) a support arm having two ends, one end being pivoted
with respect to said base and the other end having a sec-
ond transducer mounting location movable with said
support arm toward and away from said first transducer
location;
(c) a first gimbal mounted on said base at said first transducer
mounting location;
(d) a first magnetic transducer mounted on said first gimbal
so as to be in operative relationship with one side of said
recording medium, said first transducer having two de-
grees of freedom about two perp)endicular first axes sub-
stantially parallel to the plane of said recording medium;
(e) a first load point means, coupled to said base, engaging a
central region of said first transducer to provide a load
point that is fixed relative to said base in a direction nor-
mal to the plane of said recording medium;
(0 a second gimbal mounted on said support arm at said
second transducer mounting location;
(g) a second magnetic transducer mounted on said second
gimbal so as to be in operative relationship with the oppo-
site side of said recording medium, said second transducer
having two degrees of freedom about two perpendicular
second axes substantially parallel to the plane of said
recording medium;
(h) spring means for mechanically biasing said support arm
toward said base, thereby causing said second transducer
to exert a tracking force through said recording medium
against said first transducer,
said base being mounted in said data storage device such that
said recording medium remains substantially planar in the area
where it passes between said first and second transducers.
4,379,317
SOLID-STATE LOAD PROTECTION SYSTEM HAVING
LOSS OF PHASE SENSING
Ernest F. Conroy, Jr., Monroeville; Daniel P. Orange, Jean-
nette, and Robert T. Elms, Monroeville, all of Pa., assignors to
Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,108
Int. a.5 H02H 3/13
U.S. a. 361— 85 ^_ 12 Qaims
1. A poly-phase alternating current system, comprising:
sensor means for sensing circuit current in an electrical circuit,
said sensor means providing an output signal which is re-
lated to said circuit current;
first storage means connected to said output signal for provid-
ing a potential level which is related to said output signal;
second storage means connected to said output signal for pro-
viding a potential level which is related to the minimum
value of said output signal during the cycle being sensed;
loss of phase sensing means connected to said first storage
means and said second storage means for detecting when the
potential level of said first storage means is greater than the
potential level of said second storage means exceeding a
predetermined period of time, thereby indicating a loss of
phase and initiating a trip signal; and
circuit control trip means connected to said loss of phase sens-
ing means and to said electrical circuit for opening said
electrical circuit when said trip signal is provided.
4,379,318
OVERCURRENT SAFETY CONSTRUCTION FOR A
PRINTED CTRCUrr BOARD
Tetsuo Ootsuka, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,713
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 21, 1979, 54-
129973[U]
Int. Q.3 H02H 7/20
U.S. Q. 361—104 2 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing a printed circuit board having
an overcurrent safety construction for protecting electrical
components of the printed circuit board against overcurrent
damage, which comprises the steps of:
(a) forming a metal foil pattern on the board and simulta-
neously forming a narrow gap in said metal foil between
the position at which said pattern is to be connected to a
power source and the position at which said components
to be protected are to be mounted on said board;
(b) mounting said circuit components on said board; and
242
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
(c) dipping the printed circuit board in a reservoir of molten
solder so as to form simultaneously a bridge across the gap
ing an emission maximum at a longer wavelength than that of
the first fluorescer and having an absorption spectrum overlap-
I
^r
>i
2. 4 _ 3 2
and connections to safd components in circuit mounted on
the board.
4,379,319
MONOLITHIC CERAMIC CAPACITORS AND
IMPROVED TERNARY CERAMIC COMPOSITIONS FOR
PRODUaNG SAME
James M. Wilson, Victor, N.Y., assignor to Ferro Corporation,
Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,849
Int. a.3 C04B 35/00; HOIG 4/12
U.S. a. 361—321 3 Qaims
ping a substantial portion of the emission spectrum of the first
fiuorescer.
4,379,321
PLASTIC HEAVY-DUTY LUMINAIRE WITH DIRECT
BALLAST CONNECTION
Jerry R. Plemmons, Asheville, and Carl D. Taylor, Henderson-
ville, both of N.C., assignors to General Electric Company,
Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,709
Int. a.3 F21Y 29/00
U.S. a. 362—267 9 Qaims
PB(N.',,Nb 4,103
Pb(Fe'.,Neij)03
X
Pt>(F«Z»,*'.,)Oj
1. A ceramic composition capable of producing capacitors
having a temperature coefficient range of +22% to —56% at
an operating temperature range of + 10° C. to +85° C, and an
insulation resistance of 7.5xl0^fl or higher, and consisting
essentially of [Pb(FejNbj)03]X, [Pb(FejWj)03]Y and
[Pb(NijNb§)03]Z, and from 0.1 to 0.75 wt.% Mn(N03)2,
where X + Y + Z= 1.0, and the proportions of X, Y, and Z fall
within the ranges of about:
0.55^X^0.70,
0.15^Y^0.36. and,
0.07 ^z ^0.32.
3. A multilayer ceramic capacitor made from a ceramic
composition of the type claimed in claim 1.
4,379,320
CHEMICAL LIGHTING DEVICE
Arthur G. Mohan, Somerville, and Michael M. Rauhut, Bridge-
water, both of N.J., assignors to American Cyanamid Com-
pany, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,863
Int. a.3 F21K 2/06; C09K 11/07
U.S. a. 362—34 7 Qaims
1. A chemical light device comprising a chemiluminescent
mixture with a first fluorescer activated by reaction of a
chemiluminescer compound with a peroxide component, all
contained inside a transparent or translucent container, a sec-
ond fiuorescer incorporated in the walls of the container or in
a wrap surrounding the container, said second fiuorescer hav-
1. A luminaire comprising:
a housing assembly of plastics having good resistance to
weathering or corrosion but capable of withstanding only
low structural stress, said assembly providing a weather-
proof enclosure for a ballast compartment and an optics
compartment,
metal mounting means for securing to a structural support,
a main metal bracket within the ballast compartment for the
support of heavy electrical components, said main bracket
being supported directly from said mounting means inde-
pendently of the housing assembly,
a reflector within the optics compartment attached to said
housing assembly
and means fastening said housing assembly to said mounting
means.
4,379,322
COMPOUND REFLECTOR FOR LUMINAIRE
James P. Kelly, Waterford, Wis., assignor to McGraw-Edison
Company, Rolling Meadows, 111.
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,482
Int. a.3 F21V 7/00
U.S. CI. 362—300 10 Qaims
1. A luminaire adapted to illuminate a generally planar sur-
face with substantially constant light magnitude with a light
pattern having relatively sharp bottom and top cut-offs com-
prising:
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
243
a light source,
a concave reflector having an ojsen end, a closed end and a
light center defined therein, said light source mounted
within said concave reflector,
said open end having a top edge and a bottom edge,
said concave reflector including a top reflector segment and
a bottom reflector segment,
said top reflector segment having a first cylindrical portion
circular in section, a second cylindrical portion circular in
section, and a third cylindrical portion circular in section,
said first cylindrical portion being situated between said top
edge of said concave reflector and said second cylindrical
portion and having its circular center forward of the light
center in the direction of said open end of said concave
reflector,
said second cylindrical portion being situated between said
first cylindrical portion and said third cylindrical portion
and having its circular center behind said light center in
the direction of said closed end,
said third cylindrical portion being situated between said
second cylindrical portion and said bottom reflector seg-
ment and having its circular center behind said light cen-
ter in the direction of said closed end,
said bottom reflector segment having a bottom transient
portion and a cylindrical portion parabolic in section,
said bottom transient portion being situated between said top
reflector segment and said parabolic cylindrical portion,
said parabolic cylindrical portion being situated between
said bottom transient portion and said bottom edge of said
concave reflector, and having its foci at the light center.
4,379,323
REFLECTOR INSERT FOR MULTI-FLASH UNIT
David R. Broadt, Lewisburg, Pa., assignor to GTE Products
Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 221,073
Int. a.3 F21V 7/00
U.S. a. 362—346 12 Qaims
1. In a multi-lamp photoflash unit having a housing member
with a back portion with a plurality of spaced cavities, each
contoured to receive a flashlamp and a light transmitting front
portion formed to fold over and enclose said flashlamps within
said cavities, the improvement comprising a reflector unit
having a plurality of spaced cavities with each cavity having a
back surface contoured to nest within one of said spaced cavi-
ties of said back portion of said housing member and a front
surface covered with a light reflective material and formed to
receive a flashlamp.
4,379,324
BULB MOUNTING OF SOLAR CELL
Marion E. Thompson, 2807 N. Prospect St., Colorado Springs,
Colo. 90907
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,501
Int. a.3 F21V B/00: HOIL i]/04
U.S. a. 362-253 28 Qaims
1. An energy converting assembly for attachment to an
elongated light source, and comprising:
a solar eel!;
an elongated base member to which said solar cell is
mounted;
electrical interconnections operativelv attached to said solar
cell;
light reflective wrap means operatively connected to said
base member for mounting said base member on an elon-
gated light source with the dimension of elongation of the
base member coextensive with the dimension of elonga-
tion of the elongated light source, said light reflective
wrap means dimensioned so as to substantially surround
the elongated light source along substantially the length of
said base member in the dimension of elongation thereof;
and
means for holding said wrap means in place substantially
surrounding the light source.
4,379,325
SYSTEM FOR BRIDGING BRIEF NETWORK FAILURES
Dietrich Krampe, Neukirchen/Brand; Hans-Peter Schneider,
Herzogenaurach, and Hans-Hermann Zander, Eriangen, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,981
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 1,
1980, 3029358
Int. a.3 H02J i/i6: H02H 7/12
U.S. a. 363—35 4 Qaims
... tST r jNCTto
CTFFICB 1 l>^OU.»TO» I .J,
^^-/
u''_!:' ?L I
P> WTCORATtW
contikxld*
1. An arrangement for bridging a network failure, the ar-
rangement being of the type wherein kinetic energy in load
motors is reconverted into electrical energy by lowering the
frequency of operation of a converter, the arrangement com-
prising:
controller means having an input for receiving a first voltage
244
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
signal corresponding to the difference between desired
and actual voltage values of the converter; and
frequency converter means connected to said controller
means for producing a frequency correction signal for
lowering the frequency of operation and said associated
desired voltage value of the converter whereby the load
motors operate oversynchronously as generators to sup-
ply electrical energy to the converter during the network
failure.
4,379,326
MODULAR SYSTEM CONTROLLER FOR A
TRANSITION MACHINE
Mark S. Anastas, Auburn, and Russell F. Vaughan, Enumclaw,
both of Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle,
Wash.
Filed Mar. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 128,878
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 9,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' G06F 15/16. 9/06. 9/46
U.S. a. 364—200 47 Oaims
n
■ /» Cf 5.*TCH S
OATA CONSTRUCTS seCTpOPi |'6-
■dtTfl miki, ' » 'iff ' Tti>t ' • '
» h~^i^;*iT r^4^^>** ^1
««IOCtOu"t
OtTCMHtNATiON
1 tOO'C CiWCU-T
.. ^HC*
9 I
._l
said application program each of said variable status indi-
cations having a given value corresponding to and indicat-
ing satisfaction of a given one of said data conditions, said
given data conditions being logical relationships involving
at least one element of said data set being determined by
said data processors upon execution of said application
programs, said updating means including means for modi-
fying a plurality of said status indications upon execution
of at least one of said application programs;
(d) means connected to at least two of said relevance storage
means and said at least one status storage means for deter-
mining the eligibility of at least some of said application
programs for execution by said plurality of processors;
and
(e) means responsive to said eligibility determining means
and operatively connected to said data processors for
enjibling execution of eligible application programs by
said plurality of data processors whereby at least some of
said application programs which are determined eligible
may be executed concurrently.
4,379,327
UNIVERSAL INTERFACE CIRCUIT FOR
SYNCHRONOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS BUSES
Donald Tietjen; Sharon Lamb; Pern Shaw; Duane Cawthron, and
Paul D. Shannon, all of Austin, Tex., assignors to Motorola,
Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,481
Int. a.3 G06F 3/00
U.S. CI. 364—200 7 Qaims
2 6 8 10
1. A modular hardware executive apparatus for use in a
multiprocessing system for concurrent operation of a plurality
of data processors for solving computational problems defined
by a plurality of application programs and a control program,
said data processors connected for accessing said plurality of
application programs stored in application program memory
storage means and data stored in data memory storage means
including at least a common data memory area accesible by
said plurality of data processors, said plurality of data proces-
sors generating variable status indications upon execution of
said application programs said hardware executive apparatus
connected to said plurality of data processors and executing
said control program and comprising:
(a) at least one status storage means for storing status indica-
tions Sj corresponding to data conditions defined on ele-
ments of a data set appropriate for determining eligibility
of said application programs, whereby said stored status
indications correspond to data conditions which are rele-
vant for enabling execution of application programs by
said plurality of processors which are utilized in solving
said computational problems;
(b) a plurality of modular units, each unit including a rele-
vance storage means for storing groups of relevance indi-
cations R// each group corresponding to the relevance of
at least some of said status indications to at least one of
said application programs where i is an integer designating
one of said groups and corresponding one of said applica-
tion programs and j is an integer designating one of said
status indications;
(c) means connected to said status storage means and con-
nected to receive said variable status indications from said
data processors, and responsive to said variable status
indications for updating said status indications stored in
said status storage means at the completion of execution of
■i- 82 42
1. An interface circuit for use in conjunction with a data
processing system bus, comprising:
first means coupled to said bus for receiving a select signal
from said data processing system;
second means for receiving an indication as to whether said
bus is synchronous or asynchronous;
third means coupled to said first means for passing said select
signal if said bus is synchronous; and
fourth means coupled to said first and second means for
synchronizing said select signal if said bus is asynchro-
nous.
4,379,328
LINEAR SEQUENCING MICROPROCESSOR
FAOLITATING
Robert D. Catiller, Garden Grove, and Brian K. Forbes,
Huntington Beach, both of Calif., assignors to Burroughs
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 52,687, Jan. 27, 1979, Pat. No.
4,292,667. This application Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,681
Int. a.3 G06F 9/30. 13/00. 3/04
U.S. a. 364—200 11 Claims
1. A universal-type microprocessor system which cooper-
ates with an application-dependent logic module to form a
peripheral-controller capable of handling data transfers be-
tween the main memory of a host computer and a plurality of
peripheral terminal units which can be either "word-oriented"
or "byte-oriented", and wherein said application-dependent
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
245
^
logic module provides external register means having bus
connections to said plurality of peripheral terminal units and to
said host computer, and wherein said application-dependent
logic module further includes an external memory for storage
of programs related to control of said peripheral terminal units
and for temporary storage of data undergoing transfer, and
wherein said application-dependent logic module further in-
cludes control logic means for communicating with and con-
trolling said external register means, said external memory, and
communicating with a decoder-controller in said microproces-
sor system, the said microprocessor system comprising:
(a) data processing means including:
(al) an arithmetic logic unit providing an output to a shift
logic circuit and to a byte-swap circuit;
(a2) said shift logic circuit providing output to an I/O bus,
said shift logic circuit functioning to rotate one or more
bits of a word being processed to the right or to the left;
(a3) said byte-swap circuit providing output to said I/O
bus, said byte-swap circuit functioning to exchange the
I sequential positions of the higher order byte and the
lower order byte of a received two-byte word;
(b) said I/O bus providing connecting lines from said data
processing means to said external registers, to said external
memory, to an accumulator register means, and to an
addressing means;
(c) said addressing means receiving input data from said I/O
bus and storing addresses useful for accessing data from
internal program or external memory storage, said ad-
dressing means including:
-J
miriATts
rcTCn)
f*l/A. k
V MEM. y )
S.JS.JJ
IS BIT — '
mmnKTieic. -
fziies ; jj^
i_fiir
la/r
i^srtri \ *DDi>us errs
m
^"j" i : ycLCAR
INSTR
SieiST
rnr t ceri \J>"^
~ iOUKC AtWia r 1
- Afj!ii% — LioZ;-*//*!*
DtCOOCR
COMTKOueH
WITH L INC Alt
SCOUCMCtH
CONTRtK TtAM
SKHALS TO
^AU SICT/ONS
l> or
ANO AAPL
Dtp, LOeiC
to,
1
SlUCt AOBK.
SOUPCt AS
Mim'io on KU
€K?h
CONDITION
SlISCT
MunintxoK
i3.
])
PPOM
J3.
[exrinHAi rLAts\
<APrUC.DlP. 1
\LOtlC tOi^l
.CNT£R I : MUA
(cl) a program counter storing consecutive addresses of
data located in said internal program memory;
(c2) a memory reference register for storing addresses of
data located in said external memory, and including:
(c2-l) a memory address bus which connects to said
external memory;
(c2-2) and wherein a dedicated non-address bit in said
memory reference register is set to signal said decod-
er-controller to initiate a byte-swap operation in said
byte-swap circuit, or when not-set, to pass data with-
out a byte-swap operation;
(c3) an address register means in said decoder-controller
connecting by means of said I/O bus to said accumula-
tor register means which include a plurality of accumu-
lator registers for selection of data from an addressed
accumulator register;
(d) said internal program memory storage for storing pro-
gram instructions and data words, said internal memory
being addressed from said program counter and providing
instruction words and data, via an instruction bus, to an
instruction register and to a memory operand register;
(e) register means for temporary storage of data, said register
means including:
(el) said plurality of addressable accumulator registers
providing an output to the input of said arithmetic logic
unit, and said accumulator registers receiving input data
words from said I/O bus, said plurality of accumulator
registers including:
(el-1) address bus input means from said decoder-con-
1029 O.G.— 9
troller for addressing selected registers in said plural-
ity of registers;
(e2) said memory operand register for receiving operand
data from said internal program memory via said in-
struction bus or from said external memory via a mem-
ory data bus and providing an output to the input of said
arithmetic logic unit;
(e3) said instruction register for receiving instruction
words from said internal program memory via said
instruction bus and providing instruction words to said
decoder-controller;
(0 said instruction decoder-controller receiving instruction
signals from said instruction register and including incom-
ing and outgoing control signal lines connected to said
data processing means, to said addressing means, to said
register means, to said internal and external memory
means, to said external registers and said control logic
means;
(fl) and wherein said decoder-controller further includes:
(flo) linear sequencing means for selecting microcode
instructions for execution in a predetermined se-
quence, said sequencing means including a microcode
instruction memory for storing microcode instruc-
tions, said linear sequencing means including:
(flo-1) a state counter connected to said microcode
instruction memory for receiving count control
signals from said microcode instruction memory
and for providing a first portion of address signals
to said microcode instruction memory;
(flo-2) input control lines from said instruction regis-
ter to provide a second portion of address signals to
said microcode instruction memory;
(flo-3) and wherein said microcode instruction mem-
ory provides said microcode instructions for the
output lines of said decoder-controller in response
to said first and second address portions;
(fla) connection means for receiving control signals
from said control logic in said application-dep>endent
logic module for performing clocking, interrupt and
halt functions;
(fib) address lines to said external registers for selecting
a specific register;
(flc) control lines to said external registers for strobing
address signals;
(g) said memory data bus for carrying data from said exter-
nal memory to said instruction register and to said mem-
ory operand register;
(h) a repetition counter having an input from said I/O bus
and an output to said memory reference register;
(i) instruction word means in said internal program memory
for signalling said decoder-controller, said instruction
word means including:
(il) a GET operator which functions to place the contents
of said repetition counter into a selected accumulator
register as its destination;
(i2) a PUT operator which functions to take the contents
of said destination accumulator and place it via said data
processing means into a selected external register;
(j) means for controlling the number of repetitive operations
of a selected instruction word means, said means for con-
trolling including flip-flop means, in said decoder-con-
troller, which receives information signals from said repe-
tition counter.
246
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4^79,329
RADIOLOGY
Christopher A. G. LeMay, Osterley, England, assignor to EMI
Limited, Hayes, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 735,745, Oct, 26, 1976, Pat. No.
4,066,903, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 596,623, Jul. 17,
1975, Pat. No. 4,002,910. This application Jul. 25, 1977, Ser. No.
818,810
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 11,
1994, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61B 6/00
U.S. a. 364—414 3 Qaims
INITIAL
PROCESSOS JJ
,/ OAT*
DIFFERENCING
CONVOLUTION
PROCESSOR
3?
J2'
STORE
STORE
DIFFEIENCE
STORE
HATRII
STORE
rJl
JL
3d
STEP-BT-STEP
INTEGRATOR
1. A method of constructing a representation of the distribu-
tion of attenuation of penetrating radiation in a planar region of
a body, the method including the steps of: measuring the atten-
uation of the radiation along a plurality of beam paths in said
planar region, said paths constituting a plurality of sets of paths
where the centre lines of the paths of each set are spaced in said
region, with the sets having different orientations therein;
providing electrical signals indicative of the said measure-
ments; modifying the electrical signals by combining each
electrical signal to be modified with weighted contributions
from other electrical signals representing the attentuation
suffered by the radiation m travelling along other paths of the
same set; forming signals representing the differences between
electrical signals representing attenuation of the radiation
along adjacent paths in the same set and repeating the differ-
encing procedure at least once to form electrical signals repre-
senting higher order differences for the original electrical
signals; intepolating between the difference signals to form a
larger number of electrical signals representing differences
which vary more smoothly; accumulating the larger number of
differences to form further electrical signals which are of the
same form as the original modified signals but which corre-
spond to the attenuation which would be suffered by the radia-
tion in travelling along paths some of which are interpolated
between those for which the intensity was measured, and
whose center lines are more closely spaced; and allocating to
each of a plurality of predetermined points in a field notionally
delineated in said planar region, contributions from the modi-
fied electrical signals or further electrical signals associated
with the paths whose centre lines pass within a predetermined
distance of the respective point, to form said representation,
and forming a tangible and visible picture of said representa-
tion.
4,379,330
RAILROAD CAR WHEEL DETECTOR
W. Woodward Sanville, Brentwood, N.Y., assignor to Servo
Corporation of America, Hicksville, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,912
Int. a.3 B61L 13/04
U.S. Q. 364—424 5 Claims
3. A system for use in determining whether an output signal
of a magnetic wheel detector mounted along a length of rail-
road track is being triggered by an actual train wheel moving
along the length of track or a spurious signal comprising:
(a) a magnetic wheel detector mounted along the length of
railroad track and adapted to generate an output signal
upon the passage of a train wheel;
(b) an amplitude comparator connected to said wheel detec-
tor and to an amplitude threshold setting circuit for com-
paring the amplitude of said wheel detector output signal
with the amplitude threshold of said circuit and for deter-
mining when said output signal amplitude exceeds said
amplitude threshold;
(c) an amplitude threshold setting circuit connected to said
amplitude comparator;
(d) a timer connected to the output of said amplitude com-
parator for determining the time duration from the time at
which said output signal amplitude exceeds said amplitude
threshold to a zero crossing of said output signal;
(e) a time comparator connected to said timer and to a time
threshold value setting circuit for comparing (1) the time
duration from the time at which said output signal ampli-
jTl^T^f^'1| Hw^l Gatgj
tude exceeds said output signal amplitude threshold to a
zero crossing of said output signal to (2) a time threshold
value;
(0 a time threshold setting circuit connected to said time
comparator;
(g) means for determining the speed of said train; said means
being connected in controlling relationship to said ampli-
tude threshold setting circuit and said time threshold
setting circuit whereby said amplitude threshold and time
threshold are set as functions of the train speed, and,
(h) means connected to said amplitude and time comparators
for determining if said amplitude and time thresholds have
been exceeded whereby said output signal is presumed to
have been triggered by a train wheel passing said detector.
4,379,331
FAILURE WARNING FOR A VEHICLE INFORMATION
PROCESSING SYSTEM
Peter M. F. Watson, Wokingham, England, assignor to Minister
of Transport in Her Britannic Migesty's Goyemment of the
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, Lon-
don, England
FUed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,223
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 23, 1979,
7929410
Int. a.3 G06F 11/32; B60T 8/00
U.S. a. 364-^26 5 Claims
1. A failure warning means for a vehicle wheel rotation
control system including:
a wheel rotation control section for processing wheel rota-
tion information signals and providing wheel rotation
control signals; i
a speedometer; I
a speedometer power line for supplying a driving voltage to ,
the speedometer to give a speedometer reading;
wherein the speedometer power line connects the speedom-
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
247
eter and a point in the wheel rotation control section such
that the speedometer driving voltage derives from signals
2
COA/l/£P7/P
S
r
"9
-J
-^
in the wheel rotation control section so that failure of the
control section produces a null speedometer reading.
4,379,332
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION CONTROL SYSTEM
FOR AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Darryl W. Busser, Southfield, and Joseph P. Szafranski, West
Bloomfield, both of Mich., assignors to The Bendix Corpora-
tion, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Sep. 25, 1978, Ser. No. 945,988 I
Int. a.3 F02B 3/12: F02D 5/02: G05B 15/02
U.S. CI. 364-431.05 37 Qaiins
fuel quantity signal to deliver to the engine a quantity of fuel
corresponding to the value of said fuel quantity signal;
wherein the control signal comprises at least said fuel quantity
signal.
4,379,333
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A
POWER-PRODUONG MACHINE AT MAXIMUM
TORQUE UNDER VARYING OPERATING CONDTHONS
Masakazu Ninomiya; Atsushi Suzuki, both of Kariya, and Yi^i
Hirabayashi, Aichi, all of Japan, assignors to Nippondenso
Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
Filed Jun. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 159,435
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 29, 1979, 54-110939;
Feb. 7, 1980, 55-14605
Int. a.3 P02P 5/08: F02B 5/02: G05B 13/02
U.S. CI. 364—431.05 23 Qaims
WTEBRUPT
_, CONTPCK.
1
J^J=.
HNCKWOlU
RAM
o4f
COUNTt"
3' I— I 01011*1 "~l I
=[
^[Ipr
wy^\
CONIBOl.
l^'^i
TE)K«ATU«
SHSOR
jaoj
SPfEO
CWTWID
SPtED
conwio
&e
n^p
/JiO
^
ELECIROIIC
cmTRa
1*11
mjfaM r
ciKuiiin I \
1. In the operation of an internal combustion engine having
at least one cylinder and means for delivering a quantity of fuel
to the at least one cylinder in response to a control signal, the
method of generating the control signal controlling the quan-
tity of fuel to be delivered to the cylinder comprising the steps
of:
generating an actual sp>eed signal indicative of the engine's
actual speed;
generating a commanded speed signal indicative of the en-
gine's commanded speed;
integrating the difference between the actual engine speed
signal and the commanded speed signal to generate an inte-
gral fuel quantity signal indicative of the engines fuel re-
quirements;
generating from said actual speed signal and said commanded
speed signal a proportional fuel quantity signal indicative of
the fuel needed to bring the actual engine speed into agree-
ment with the commanded engine speed;
summing said integral fuel quantity signal with said propor-
tional fuel quantity signal to generate a percent load signal;
generating an air quantity signal indicative of the quantity of
air being suppli^ to the engine;
generating from said air quantity signal a full load signal indic-
ative of the maximum quantity of fuel to be delivered as a
function of the quantity of air being delivered to the engine;
selecting from between said percent load signal and said full
load signal, the signal having the lowest value to generate a
fuel quantity signal, indicative of the quantity of fuel to be
delivered to the engine; and
activating the means for delivering a quantity of fuel with said
10. A method of operating an internal combustion engine at
maximum output torque under varying operating conditions,
said engine having an output shaft and an adjustable spark
ignition variable the setting of which controls the output
torque, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) reading a reference spark ignition datum from a memory;
(b) repeatedly causing ignitions to occur a predetermined
number of times at a reference timing based on the datum
read from said memory;
(c) storing a datum representative of the speed of revolution
of said output shaft during an interval in which said igni-
tions occurred;
(d) generating an advance spark ignition datum representing
an ignition timing which is advanced with respect to said
reference timing by a predetermined amount;
(e) repeatedly causing ignitions to occur at advanced timing
said predetermined number of times in accordance with
said advance ignition datum generated in the step (d);
(0 storing a datum representative of the speed of revolution
of said output shaft during an interval in which said igni-
tions occurred at said advanced ignition timing;
(g) generating a retard spark ignition datum representing an
ignition timing which is retarded with respect to said
reference timing by a predetermined amount;
(h) repeatedly causing ignitions to occur at retarded timing
said predetermined number of times in accordance with
said retard spark ignition datum generated in the step (g);
(i) storing a datum representative of the speed of revolution
of said output shaft during an interval in which the igni-
tions occurred at said retarded timing;
0) comparing the data stored in the steps (c), (0 and (i) with
each other to detect whether said compared data establish
one of first and second sequential relationships of a plural-
ity of possible sequential relationships indicating that said
reference timing is on one of the advance and retard sides,
respectively, of an optimum position;
(k) varying said reference spark ignition datum of the step (a)
248
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
in a flrst direction only when said first sequential relation-
ship is detected and in a second direction only when said
second sequential relationship is detected; and
(1) repeating the steps (a) to (k).
20. A control system for operating an internal combustion
engine at maximum output torque under varying operating
conditions, said engine having an output shaft and an adjust-
able spark ignition advance timing means the setting of which
controls the output torque, comprising:
a random access memory;
means for generating a speed signal related to the speed of
revolution of said output shaft;
means for sensing the intake air pressure of said engine; and
a microcomputer programmed to perform the following
steps:
(a) storing in said random access memory a set of reference
ignition setting data as a function of said speed signal and
as a function of the sensed intake air pressure;
(b) selectively reading a datum from said random access
memory at periodic intervals in response to said speed
signal and intake air pressure;
(c) oscillating the setting of said spark ignition timing means
by a predetermined amount with respect to the setting of
said datum read out of said memory;
(d) successively storing data representative of said speed
signal during at least three successive phases of the oscilla-
tion in said memory;
(e) detecting when said stored speed representative data
establish one of first and second sequential relationships of
a plurality of possible sequential relationships indicating
that the setting of said ignition timing means is on one of
the advance and retard sides, respectively, of an optimum
position; and
(0 correcting said stored reference ignition setting data by a
predetermined amount in one of a first and second direc-
tions exclusively in response to one of said detected first
and second relationships.
4,379^34
ELECTRONIC PARKING METER
Thomas J. Feagins, Jr., Houston, Tex., and Calvin O. Vogt,
Tulsa, Okla., assignors to Allright Auto Parks, Inc., Houston,
Tex.
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,545
Int. a.3 G07C 1/30
U.S. a. 364—467 11 Qaims
INTMFftCC 1 r5
PWNTtD cincurT U*
BOMO
1. An electronic parking meter and lot check register in
combination providing unattended supervision and sale of
space usage for a plurality of parking spaces and efficient lot
inventory comprising:
(a) an electronic parking meter comprising:
computer means including a memory;
identification means for customer entry of identification
data;
cash acceptance means receiving and storing money en-
tered therein by the customer;
display means visually displaying the amount of money
and identification data entered by the customer through
said identification means; and
(b) an electronic lot check register for providing a lot status
log and having identification means, memory and display,
and a data link for connection to said electronic parking
meter for transfer of information from said parking meter
to said lot check register such that during lot inventory
said display of said lot check register provides a visual
indication of a violation, said identification means of said
lot check register providing entry of parked vehicle iden-
tification information for each parking space for storage in
said memory of said lot check register for transfer thereof
to said parking meter through said data link for updating
a subsequent lot status log to contain current parked vehi-
cle identification information for each parking space.
4,379,335
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER AND PORTABLE
PROGRAMMER SYSTEM FOR A
PNEUMATICALLY-POWERED POINT-TO-POINT
ROBOT
Kerry F. Kirsch, Livonia; Kirk R. Stauffer, Royal Oak, and
Robert J. Tindall, Troy, all of Mich., assignors to Auto-Place,
Inc., Troy, Mich.
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 202,013
Int. a.J G06F 15/46; G05B 19/42
U.S. a. 364—513 25 Qaims
23. In a control system for a pneumatically-powered point-
to-point robot having a plurality of cylinder means for per-
forming a plurality of robot functions and valve means for
controlling the supply of air to said cylinder means, including
microcomputer controller means for storing a sequence of
robot functions forming a user program and transmitting con-
trol signals to said cylinder means in accordance with said user
program for executing said sequence of robot functions, a
portable teach control programmer unit removably connected
to said controller means for entering, editing and testing said
sequence of robot functions, comprising:
interface means for providing serial communication with
said controller;
a keyboard having a key dedicated to each of said plurality
of robot functions;
a digital display for indicating the step numbers and corre-
sponding robot function codes stored in said user pro-
gram; and
circuit means coupled to said interface means for decoding
said keyboard and driving said display.
4,379,336
MODULAR CALCULATOR WITH SEPARABLE
KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY MODULES
Hideo Yamamoto, Mission Viejo; Susuma Takase, Costa Mesa,
and R. Dale Thomas, Irvine, all of Calif., assignors to Canon
Business Machines, Inc., Costa Mesa, Calif.
Filed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 154,866
Int a.3 G06F 15/02
U.S. a. 364—708 28 Claims
1. A modular calculator, comprising:
a. an input module including an input module housing, a
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
249
keyboard having data keys and function keys mounted on
said input module housing, input module electrical circuits
contained in said input module housing and connected to
said data keys and to said function keys for receiving data
corresponding to operation of said data keys, for process-
ing the received data according to op>eration of said func-
tion keys and for organizing the processed data into elec-
trical signals for serial transmission, said input module
electrical circuits including an output terminal on which
electrical signals corresponding to the processed data are
provided;
b. an output module including an output module housing, a
display device mounted on said output module housing,
output module electrical circuits contained in said output
module housing and including an input terminal for re-
ceiving said processed data electrical signals by serial
transmission from said output terminal and for further
processing said signals for data presentation on said dis-
play device;
c. releasable mechanical connecting means for connecting
said input module housing to said output module housing
to form a uniform calculator housing; and
d. electrical connector means for electrically connecting said
output terminal of said input module with said input termi-
nal of said output module; whereby said modules cooper-
ate to provide a calculator whose keyboard and calculator
function control comp>onents are housed in said input
module and whose display components are housed in said
output module, said electrical connector means compris-
ing an elongated wire which enables said calculator to
operate when said input and output module are physically
separated. II
4^79^37
METRIC COMPUTER
Dda O'Biso, 24 Northwest St., Lincoln Park, N J. 07035
Continnation of Ser. No. 55,827, Jul. 9, 1979, abandoned, and a
continuation of Ser. No. 818,397, Jul. 25, 1977, abandoned. This
application Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,318
Int a.i G06F J5/20
liJS. CL 364—715 2 Claims
I 1. An apparatus for determining the metric equivalents of a
given metric measurement comprising:
(a) a first set of display means arranged on a console to
display a plurality of metric units within a given desired
parameter selected from the parameters length, liquid and
mass or weight;
(b) a second set of display means arranged on said console to
display a given known numerical measurement as ex-
pressed in one of the metric units displayed in said first set
of display means as well as the numerical equivalents of
said measurement as expressed in the remaining metric
units displayed in said flrst set of display means; said sec-
ond set of display means being arranged such that each of
the numericaT equivalents is displayed in visual conjunc-
tion with the metric unit corresponding to said numerical
equivalent; said first set and second set of display means
comprising rows of windows with metric units and nu-
merical measurements, respectively, appearing therein;
(c) parameter selecting means comprising an endless web
having a plurality of rows of printed metric unit designa-
tions, said printed metric unit designations arranged so as
to be aligned with the first row of display windows in said
first set of display means when moved in place behind the
windows, and means for moving the endless web in place
behind the first row of viewing windows for viewing
therethrough, each said row of printed metric unit desig-
nations being limited to metric units within a single param-
eter;
(d) measurement input means and metric equivalent deter-
W-
mining means comprising a web having a plurality of rows
of printed numbers, each said number being the numerical
metric equivalent, of each of the other numbers as ex-
pressed respectively in each of the remaining printed
metric unit designations, the rows and the numbers in the
rows being arranged so that the numbers in a given row
will be aligned with the windows in said second set of
display means when said row is moved in place behind the
windows, and means for moving the web in place behind
said windows for viewing therethrough, each of said
numbers being further arranged so that each said number
is displayed in the window which visually corresponds to
an appropriate metric unit designation displayed in the
first set of display means such that all of the numbers in a
given row as expressed in the visually corresponding
metric units are metric equivalents.
4,379338
ARITHMETIC ORCUIT WITH OVERFLOW DETECOON
CAPABILITY
Takao Nishitani, and Yuichi Kawakami, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Not. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 209,250
Claims priority, application Japan, Not. 22, 1979, 54-151534
Int. a.^ G06F 7/48
U.S. CI. 364—745 7 Claims
In I iir\
' * ' fj M M n
sa. 1
1. In an arithmetic circuit of the type for performing an
arithmetic operation comprising a plurality of consecutive
internal addition or subtraction operations, said circuit includ-
ing a calculating means for receiving first and second inputs
1248
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
in a first direction only when said first sequential relation-
ship is detected and in a second direction only when said
second sequential relationship is detected; and
(1) repeating the steps (a) to (k).
20. A control system for operating an internal combustion
engine at maximum output torque under varying operating
conditions, said engine having an output shaft and an adjust-
able spark ignition advance timing means the setting of which
controls the output torque, comprising:
a random access memory:
means for generating a speed signal related to the speed of
revolution of said output shaft;
means for sensing the intake air pressure of said engine; and
a microcomputer programmed to perform the following
steps:
(a) storing in said random access memory a set of reference
ignition setting data as a function of said speed signal and
as a function of the sensed intake air pressure;
(b) selectively reading a datum from said random access
memory at periodic intervals in response to said speed
signal and intake air pressure;
(c) oscillating the setting of said spark ignition timing means
by a predetermined amount with respect to the setting of
said datum read out of said memory;
(d) successively storing data representative of said speed
signal during at least three successive phases of the oscilla-
tion in said memory;
(e) detecting when said stored speed representative data
establish one of first and second sequential relationships of
a plurality of possible sequential relationships indicating
that the setting of said ignition timing means is on one of
the advance and retard sides, respectively, of an optimum
position; and
(0 correcting said stored reference ignition setting data by a
predetermined amount in one of a first and second direc-
tions exclusively in response to one of said detected first
and second relationships.
4,379^34
ELECTRONIC PARKING METER
Thomas J. Feagins, Jr., Houston, Tex., and Calvin O. Vogt,
Tulsa, Okla., assignors to Allright Auto Parks, Inc., Houston,
Tex.
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,545
Int. a.3 G07C 1/30
U.S. a. 364—467 11 Oaims
1. An electronic parking meter and lot check register in
combination providing unattended supervision and sale of
space usage for a plurality of parking spaces and efficient lot
inventory comprising:
(a) an electronic parking meter comprising:
computer means including a memory;
identification means for customer entry of identification
data;
cash acceptance means receiving and storing money en-
tered therein by the customer;
display means visually displaying the amount of money
and identification data entered by the customer through
said identification means; and
(b) an electronic lot check register for providing a lot status
log and having identification means, memory and display,
and a data link for connection to said electronic parking
meter for transfer of information from said parking meter
to said lot check register such that during lot inventory
said display of said lot check register provides a visual
indication of a violation, said identification means of said
lot check register providing entry of parked vehicle iden-
tification information for each parking space for storage in
said memory of said lot check register for transfer thereof
to said parking meter through said data link for updating
a subsequent lot status log to contain current parked vehi-
cle identification information for each parking space.
4,379,335
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER AND PORTABLE
PROGRAMMER SYSTEM FOR A
PNEUMATICALLY-POWERED POINT-TO-POINT
ROBOT
Kerry F. Kirsch, Livonia; Kirk R. Stauffer, Royal Oak, and
Robert J. Tindall, Troy, all of Mich., assignors to Auto-Place,
Inc., Troy, Mich.
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 202,013
Int. a.3 G06F 15/46; G05B 19/42
U.S. a. 364—513 25 Oaims
23. In a control system for a pneumatically-powered point-
to-f)oint robot having a plurality of cylinder means for per-
forming a plurality of robot functions and valve means for
controlling the supply of air to said cylinder means, including
microcomputer controller means for storing a sequence of
robot functions forming a user program and transmitting con-
trol signals to said cylinder means in accordance with said user
program for executing said sequence of robot functions, a
portable teach control programmer unit removably connected
to said controller means for entering, editing and testing said
sequence of robot functions, comprising:
interface means for providing serial communication with
said controller;
a keyboard having a key dedicated to each of said plurality
of robot functions;
a digital display for indicating the step numbers and corre-
sponding robot function codes stored in said user pro-
gram; and
circuit means coupled to said interface means for decoding
said keyboard and driving said display.
4,379,336
MODULAR CALCULATOR WITH SEPARABLE
KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY MODULES
Hideo Yamamoto, Mission Viejo; Susiunu Takase, Costa Mesa,
and R. Dale Thomas, Irvine, all of Calif., assignors to Canon
Business Machines, Inc., Costa Mesa, Calif.
FUed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 154,866
Int. C1.3 G06F 15/02
VS. a. 364—708 28 Claims
1. A modular calculator, comprising:
a. an input module including an input module housing, a
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
249
keyboard having data keys and function keys mounted on
said input module housing, input module electrical circuits
contained in said input module housing and connected to
said data keys and to said function keys for receiving data
corresponding to operation of said data keys, for process-
ing the received data according to operation of said func-
tion keys and for organizing the processed data into elec-
trical signals for serial transmission, said input module
electrical circuits including an output terminal on which
electrical signals corresponding to the processed data are
provided;
b. an output module including an output module housing, a
display device mounted on said output module housing,
output module eltxtrical circuits contained in said output
module housing and including an input terminal for re-
ceiving said processed data electrical signals by serial
transmission from said output terminal and for further
processing said signals for data presentation on said dis-
play device;
. releasable mechanical connecting means for connecting
said input module housing to said output module housing
to form a uniform calculator housing; and
. electrical connector means for electrically connecting said
output terminal of said input module with said input termi-
nal of said output module; whereby said modules cooper-
ate to provide a calculator whose keyboard and calculator
function control components are housed in said input
module and whose display components are housed in said
output module, said electrical connector means compris-
ing an elongated wire which enables said calculator to
operate when said input and output module are physically
separated.
4^79^7
METRIC COMPUTER
Dda O'Biso, 24 Northwest St, Lincoln Park, N J. 07035
Continnation of Ser. No. 55,827, Jul. 9, 1979, abandoned, and a
continuation of Ser. No. 818,397, Jul. 25, 1977, abandoned. This
appUcation Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,318
Int a.J G06F 15/20
U.S. a. 364—715 2 Claims
1. An apparatus for determining the metric equivalents of a
given metric measurement comprising:
(a) a first set of display means arranged on a console to
display a plurality of metric units within a given desired
parameter selected from the parameters length, liquid and
mass or weight;
(b) a second set of display means arranged on said console to
display a given known numerical measurement as ex-
pressed in one of the metric units displayed in said first set
of display means as well as the numerical equivalents of
said measurement as expressed in the remaining metric
units displayed in said Tirst set of display means; said sec-
ond set of display means being arranged such that each of
the numerical equivalents is displayed in visual conjunc-
tion with the metric unit corresponding to said numerical
equivalent; said flrst set and second set of display means
comprising rows of windows with metric units and nu-
merical measurements, respectively, appearing therein;
(c) parameter selecting means comprising an endless web
having a plurality of rows of printed metric unit designa-
tions, said printed metric unit designations arranged so as
to be aligned with the first row of display windows in said
first set of display means when moved in place behind the
windows, and means for moving the endless web in place
behind the first row of viewing windows for viewing
therethrough, each said row of printed metric unit desig-
nations being limited to metric units within a single param-
eter;
(d) measurement input means and metric equivalent deter-
10-
13
LINEAR
|«ilo-I kucro-l IMCi-l |„,„l rSfcnn icmiiH Elu
Im'tH |llETEI»| [lltTtg I "'""I [lltM*] |lWTC»| iMTtl
,0015 I OIS I [ OH I I 1.50 I I 150 | | 150 | 1 1500
X -^
f—IB
mining means comprising a web having a plurality of rows
of printed numbers, each said number being the numerical
metric equivalent, of each of the other numbers as ex-
pressed respectively in each of the remaining printed
metric unit designations, the rows and the numbers in the
rows being arranged so that the numbers in a given row
will be aligned with the windows in said second set of
display means when said row is movad in place behind the
windows, and means for moving the web in place behind
said windows for viewing therethrough, each of said
numbers being further arranged so that each said number
is displayed in the window which visually corresponds to
an appropriate metric unit designation displayed in the
first set of display means such that all of the numbers in a
given row as expressed in the visually corresponding
metric units are metric equivalents.
4,379,338
ARITHMETIC CIRCUIT WITH OVERFLOW DETECnON
CAPABILITV
Takao Nisliitani, and Yuiclii Kawakami, botb of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd^ Tokyo, Japan
FUed Not. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 209,250
Claims priority, application Japan, Not. 22, 1979, 54-151534
Int. a.3 G06F 7/48
U.S. a. 364-745 7 Claims
r
•'«
»t5£T
, J ,
:se.
A
I 9< it)
1. In an arithmetic circuit of the type for performing an
arithmetic operation comprising a plurality of consecutive
internal addition or subtraction operations, said circuit includ-
ing a calculating means for receiving first and second inputs
250
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
represented in two's complement-fixed point and adding or
subtracting said inputs to provide an output and accumulator
means for receiving and storing said calculating means output,
the content of said accumulator means being provided as said
second input and said first input being externally supplied,
whereby said arithmetic circuit performs consecutive additions
or subtractions in response to consecutive externally supplied
first inputs, said circuit further comprising:
overflow occurrence detection means for providing an over-
flow occurrence signal output each time an overflow
occurs in one of said internal operations;
overflow direction detection means for providing an over-
flow direction signal output indicating the direction of
each said overflow; and
overflow monitoring means responsive to said overflow
occurrence and overflow direction signals for offsetting
positive and negative overflows against one another, said
overflow monitoring means providing a net overflow
occurrence signal and a net overflow direction signal
indicating the occurrence and direction of a net overflow
if an unequal number of positive and negative overflows
has occurred during said arithmetic operation, said over-
flow monitoring means providing no net overflow occur-
rence signal if an even number of alternately occurring
positive and negative overflows has occurred during said
arithmetic operation.
missing constituent of the timer input data is indicated on
the display means whenever erroneous or missing constit-
uents of the timer input data is detected by said judgment
means.
4^79^39
ELECTRONIC TIMER
Ryuho Narita, Nagoya, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denkj Kabusfaiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Dec. 18, 1979, Ser. No. 104,868
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 18, 1978, 53-156198;
Feb. 14, 1979, 53-15674; Feb. 14, 1979, 53-15675; Feb. 23, 1979,
54-20483
Int. a.J G06F 3/02
U.S. a. 364—900 15 Qaims
FIG 1A
FIG IB
1. An electronic timer, comprising:
timer input data designating means for randomly designating
timer input data, including day of the week, AM or PM
and time of the day constituents, to control the operation
of at least one selected device;
buffer memory means, electrically connected to said timer
input designating means, for temporarily storing the timer
input data specified by said timer input data designating
means;
data storage means, electrically connected to said buffer
memory means, for storing timer input data from said
buffer memory means;
data transfer means, electrically connected to said buffer
memory means for transferring the timer input data from
said buffer memory means to said data storage means and
vice versa;
display means, electrically connected to said buffer memory
means, for displaying at least timer input data stored in
said buffer memory means;
judgment means, electrically connected to said buffer mem-
ory means, for judging if each constituent of the timer
input data is correctly and completely entered before the
transfer operation of the timer input data from said buffer
memory means to said data storage means is initiated by
said data transfer means; and
designation error display control means, electrically con-
nected to said judgment means and said display means, for
controlling said display means whereby an erroneous or
4,379,340
COMMUNICATIONS SUBSYSTEM IDLE LINK STATE
DETECTOR
Thomas O. Holtey, Newton, Mass.; Richard P. Kelly, Nashua,
N.H.; Steven S. Noyes, Boylston, and James C. Raymond,
Framingham, both of Mass., assignors to Honeywell Informa-
tion Systems Inc., Waltham, Mass.
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,698
Int. a.3 G06F 3/04
U.S. a. 364—900 5 Claims
1. In combination with a communication line coupled via a
modem to adata processing system comprising a system bus, at
least one central processing unit (CPU), one main memory
system, one peripheral controller and a communications sub-
system all coupled in common to a system bus, said communi-
cation subsystem including a communications controller cou-
pled to said system bus and also including typical communica-
tions devices such as said modem, a dialing unit, a touch tone
receiver, a cathode ray tube (CRT) and a universal synchro-
nous receive transmit device (USRT) each communicating
with the communications controller, said communications
subsystems comprising:
(a) a data signal line coupled to said communications con-
troller and to said typical communication devices for
transmitting a stream of said serial data bits to said USRT
from said modem;
(b) a clock signal line also coupled to said communications
controller and to said typical communication devices for
transmitting a stream of serial clock pulses over said clock
signal line from saifl modem to said USRT;
(c) counter means coupled to said data signal and clock
signal lines for counting the number of successive binary
one pulses received by said communications controller;
(d) disabling means coupled to said counter means for dis-
abling said counter means and preventing any further
count when said counter counts a predetermined number
of successive binary one bits, thus indicating that the
communication line and the data processing system is in
an idle state, means for communicating said idle state to
said USRT;
(e) a microprocessor coupled to said USRT for controlling
the operations of said communications controller such as
transmit and receive information;
(0 a first PROM means coupled to said microprocessor (/tP)
and to said USRT for storing first signals for controlling
the generation of a first intercept request signal, said first
PROM means responsive to a data service request from
said USRT when said USRT has assembled a byte of
information from the stream of said data bits for generat-
ing said first intercept request signal;
(g) intercept control logic means coupled to said first PROM
April S, 1983
ELECTRICAL
251
means and to said nP for receiving and transmitting the
first intercept request signal to said microprocessor; and
(h) second PROM means in said flrst PROM means for
storing second signals for controlling the generation of a
second intercept request signals, said second PROM
means only responsive to said idle state for generating said
second intercept request signals, whereby said micro-
processor being responsive to the first intercept request
signal to receive the second intercept signals for identify-
ing and processing the particular communication channel
request associated with the interrupting USRT and to
reset the counter means.
SERIES RESONANCEDRIVE aRCUIT FOR MAGNETIC
BUBBLE MEMORY
Takashi Toyooka; Mamoni Sugie, both of Sayama; Hirokazu
Aoki, Hachioji, and Shigeru Yoshizawa, Tokorozawa, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,527
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 19, 1980, 55-129329
Int a.^ GllC 19/08
U.S. a. 365—6 7 Qaims
'1.2
1. A series resonance drive circuit for a magnetic bubble
memory, comprising:
(a) a magnetic bubble memory chip or chips in which mag-
netic bubbles are driven in accordance with a rotating
magnetic filed;
(b) X and Y coils arranged orthogonally to each other to
generate said rotating magnetic field in a plane of said
magnetic bubble memory chip or chips;
(c) resonance capacitors each connected in series with re-
sf>ective one of said X and Y coils to form a series reso-
nance circuit with the respective one of said X and Y coils
at a frequency of said rotating magnetic field;
(d) power supplies each connected to the respective one of
said resonance circuits to supply a cyclic wave current
containing only an A.C. component to the respective one
of said resonance circuits; and
(e) a reactance device connected to said resonance circuits to
compensate a mutual inductance due to a mutual inductive
coupling between said X and Y coils and a capacitance
due to a capacitive coupling between said X and Y coils.
an input/output amplifier operatively connected to each of
said pairs of bus lines;
row decoder means for selecting a corresponding one of said
row lines of said plurality of memory blocks;
a column decoder comprising column lines, each having a
potential, and operatively connected in common to said
plurality of memory blocks, said column decoder selec-
tively connecting a corresponding pair of said input/out-
put terminals of the plurality of sense amplifiers in each of
said memory blocks to a corresponding one of said pairs of
bus lines corresjxjnding to the memory block in response
to a change in the potential of a corresponding one of said
column lines connected between said column decoder and
said plurality of memory blocks;
oof, I.,. : f
SA11
jQlmo '9"*
■S4I ■ '
.SBC .-B? ' * t "
Wo >— i CJOID 0,3 "iM 1 II
Oojl
0"
row block decoders operatively connected to receive said
block selecting address signals, to said sense amplifier
array and to said plurality of memory blocks, said row
block decoders selectively enabling said sense amplifier
array of a corresponding one of said plurality of memory
blocks in accordance with block selecting address signals;
and
block bus line decoders operatively connected to receive
said block selecting address signals, to corresponding ones
of said pairs of bus lines, and to corresponding ones of said
plurality of a sense amplifiers, said block bus line decoders
selectively connecting said corresponding ones of said
pairs of bus lines of each of said memory blocks to a
corresponding pair of said data bus pairs connected to said
input/output amplifier in accordance with said block
selecting address signals.
4,379343
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE
READ-ONLY MEMORY CELL HAVING A SHARED
DIFFUSION
Norman E. Moyer, Balboa, Calif., assignor to Hngiies Aircraft
Company, ColTer City, Calif.
FUed Not. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,477
Int a.5 GllC Z/00
U.S. a. 365—185 7 Clainu
4^79,342
SEMICONDUCTOR DYNAMIC MEMORY DEVICE
Tomio Nakano, Kawasald, and Yoshihiro Takemae, Yokohama,
both of Japan, assignors to Fi^itsa Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,718
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55/41622
Int a.3 GllC 11/40
VJS. a. 365—182 8 Claims
1. A semiconductor memory device, operatively connected
to receive address signals including block selecting address
signals, comprising:
a plurality of memory blocks each including row lines, data
bus pairs, a pair of bus lines and a sense amplifier array
comprising a plurality of sense amplifiers each having a
pair of input/output terminals, and a pair of memory cell
groups including dynamic type memory cells;
; :
-" r
/»
^"
1
"^:^
»-^^
1 t'^ "
'^
" 1
. A
1. An electrically erasable programmable memory compris-
mg:
a semiconductive substrate of a first conductivity type;
a well region of a second conductivity type in said substrate;
252
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
a coimnon diffusion in said well region of said first conduc-
tivity type;
first and second diffusions in said well region of said first
conductivity type located on opposite sides of said com-
mon diffusion and forming first and second source-to-
drain channels, respectively, with said common diffusion;
first and second floating gates overlying said first and second
channels respectively, each of said floating gates associ-
ated with a tunneling region permitting charge flow be-
tween said substrate and said floating gates; and
means overlying said flrst and second floating gates, for
controlling charge flow in said channels
4^79,344
PRECHARGE aRCUIT
Takashi Ozawa, and Yasuhiko Nagahashi, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,175
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 13, 1980, 55-16368
Int. a.^ GllC 7/00
U.S. a. 365—203 10 Oaims
6. In a circuit including a flrst and a second data nodes, a
voltage source of a first voltage, a first insulated gate field
effect transistor coupled between said first node and said volt-
age source, a second insulated gate field effect transistor cou-
pled between said second node and said voltage source, and a
third insulated gate field effect transistor connected between
said first and second nodes, said first to third transistors being
made conductive in a precharge period thereby to precharge
said first and second nodes, the improvement comprises means
for operatively supplying a gate of said third transistor with a
second voltage, an absolute value of said second voltage being
larger than that of said first voltage.
to
of
4,379,345
DYNAMIC READ AMPLIHER FOR
METAL-OXIDE-SEMICONDUCrOR MEMORIES
KarUicinz Uri, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep.
Germany
FUed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,424
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 29,
1980, 3028754
Int a.i GllC 7/06
U.S. a. 365—205 1 Claim
1. A dynamic, flip-flop differential read amplifier for metal-
oxide-semiconductor memories, and for operation with first
through fifth clock pulses, said read amplifier comprising:
a pair of first data terminals for connection to a pair of first
data lines;
a voltage supply terminal and a ground terminal;
first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth
field effect transistors each including a source, a drain and
agate;
the drain-source paths of said fifth, third, first and seventh
transistors connected in series between said voltage sup-
ply terminal and said ground terminal, and the drain-
source paths of said sixth, fourth, second and seventh
transistors likewise connected in series between said volt-
age supply terminal and said ground terminal;
said gates of said first and second transistors respectively
connected to the drain of the other such transistor to form
a flip-flop, with said fifth and sixth transistors operating as
load resistors and said third and fourth transistors operat-
ing as cut-off transistors;
the drain-source path of said eighth transistor connected
between said first data terminals and across the junctions
of said fifth and third transistors and said sixth and fourth
transistors and operable as a balance transistor;
said gates of said seventh, third and fourth, and fifth and
sixth and eighth transistors respectively connected to
receive the first, second and third clock pulses;
a pair of second data terminals for connection to a second
pair of information lines;
first and second capacitors connected to receive the fifth
clock pulses;
ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth, fif-
teenth, sixteenth, seventeenth, and eighteenth field effect
transistors each including a source, a drain and a gate;
said ninth and tenth transistors constituting switching tran-
sistors having their drain-source paths connected in series
with the drain-source paths of said fifteenth and sixteenth
transistors, constituting load transistors, respectively, and
their gates connected to the gates of said first and second
transistors, respectively;
said gates of said fifteenth and sixteenth and transistors
connected to said gates of said fifth, sixth and eighth
transistors to receive the third clock pulses;
the drain-source paths of said eleventh and twelfth transis-
tors connected in series across said voltage supply termi-
nal and one of said first data terminals, and the drain-
source path of said thirteenth and fourteenth transistors
connected in series across said voltage supply terminal
and the other of said first data terminals;
said gates of said twelfth and fourteenth transistors con-
nected to receive the first clock pulses and said gates of
said eleventh and thirteenth transistors connected to re-
ceive the fifth clock pulses via said first and second capaci-
tors, respectively;
the drain-source path of said seventeenth transistor con-
nected as a cut-off transistor between one of said second
data terminals and said gate of said eleventh transistor,
said first capacitor and the junction of said ninth and
fifteenth transistors, and said gate of said seventeenth
transistor connected to receive the fourth clock pulses;
and
the drain-source path of said eighteenth transistor connected
as a cut-off transistor between the other of said second
data terminals and said gate of said thirteenth transistor,
April 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
253
said second capacitor and the junction of said tenth and
sixteenth transistors, and
said gate of said eighteenth transistor connected to receive
the fourth clock pulses,
whereby the clock pulses are in a sequence such that a third
clock pulse operates said fifth, sixth, eighth, fifteenth and
sixteenth transistors to connect the supply voltage termi-
nal to said first data terminals and said second data termi-
nals, during such pulse, to prepare said amplifier for dy-
namic operation,
a fourth clock pulse operates said seventeenth and eigh-
teenth transistors to connect the respective second data
terminals to the respective junctions of said ninth and
fifteenth transistors and tenth and sixteenth transistors,
a second clock pulse operates said third and fourth transis-
tors to cut-off from the differential amplifier flip-flop the
capacitance of the data lines connected to said first data
terminals in order to provide for a fast switching of the
flip-flop and to prevent signal level reduction,
a first clock pulse, at the same time as a second clock pulse,
operates said seventh transistor to connect that end of the
flip-flop to ground and permit the flip-flop to be set in
accordance with the data applied at the first data terminals
causing said third and fourth transistors to operate as loads
and causing the data to be applied, via said ninth and tenth
transistors and said seventeenth and eighteenth transistors,
to said second data terminals, and a fifth clock pulse, at the
same time as, and in conjunction with a first clock pulse,
causes regeneration by, during the time of such pulses,
operating said eleventh, twelfth, thirteenth and fourteenth
transistors to connect said supply voltage terminal to said
first data terminals and to ground via respective sides of
the flip-flop.
positive feedback amplifier means coupled with said at least
one word line to amplify said received row access signals
supplied to said at least one word line and to positively
feed back to said at least one word line said amplified row
access signals.
4^79^7
RECEIVER FOR PCM-ENCODED MULTIFREQUENCY
DIALING SIGNALS
Guglielmo Girardi, San Mauro Torinese, and Franco Miroglio,
Turin, both of Italy, assignors to Cselt - Centro Studi e
Laboratori Telecomunicazioni S.p.A,, Turin, Italy
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,459
Oaims priority, application Italy, Nov. 5, 1979, 69149 A/79
Int. a.3 H03K lS/01
U.S. a. 375-94 5 Qaims
CLA
SIA
CO
bp Y^r :-f« ^ ccT }-^ ■■■r^
/
MB
01 &IT»L
^-
FB
-OES-C.O
cc-
'2
ClB
SIB
4,379,346
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DEVICE
Kiyofumi Ocliii, Yokohama; Masami Masuda, Tokyo, and
Takeo Kondo, Yokosuka, all of Japan, assignors to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,687
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 26, 1979, 54/95526
Int. a.3 GllL 13/00
U.S. a. 365-222 38 Qaims
PFAO-< MC-M
DO-i \ DM
AMP
DO-i \ DM
htOf pi
^i5:_S'
*b-2
l/Q \~
DO-N 1 OH«r 1^
9u^\x^h
^ „ PI-
' AMP
Imcmn '^*'-»'
COLUMN OECOOCR/SENSE AMPUF1ER
1. A semiconductor memory device for use with a row
decoder supplying row access signals and a column decoder
for supplying column access signals, the device comprising:
at least one memory cell;
at least one word line connected to said at least one memory
cell and receiving the row access signals;
at least one data line connected to said at least one memory
cell to transfer data to and from said at least one memory
cell in accordance with said column access signals; and
1. A receiver for periodically recurring quantized signal
samples of a sine wave, each signal sample occurring during a
predetermined sampling period substantially shorter than a
half-cycle of said sine wave and including a sign bit and a
predetermined number of amplitude bits, comprising:
a sign-bit extractor connected to an incoming-signal path for
converting the sign bits of consecutive signal samples into
a square wave with rising and falling pulse flanks sub-
jected to delays of up to one sampling period with refer-
ence to an incoming sine wave;
interpolation means including a zero-crossing detector con-
trolled by said sign-bit extractor and further including
amplitude-bit-extraction means connected to said incom-
ing-signal path for establishing a corrective time interval
equal to a fraction of a sampling period in response to any
detected sign change, the magnitude of said fraction being
determined by the values of two consecutive signal sam-
ples having different sign bits;
logical circuitry connected to outputs of said sign-bit extrac-
tor and of said interpolation means for delaying by said
time interval the generation of a pulse flank beyond the
instant of appearance of the second one of said consecu-
tive signal samples to separate the time of generation of
such a pulse flank by substantially a whole sampling per-
iod from the occurrence of the corresponding zero cross-
ing; and
decoding means connected to said logical circuitry for con-
verting said square wave into numerical information.
254
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
4,379,348
X-RAY SECURITY SCREENING SYSTEM HAVING
MAGNinCATION
Darid J. Haas, Suffern; Costas Blionas, New York, and Joseph
P. Muenzen, Pearl River, all of N.Y., assignors to North
American Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 189,995
Int. a.^ G03B 41/16
U.S. a. 378—57 17 Claims
1. An X-ray inspection system comprising a source of X-
rays, a chamber in the path of said X-rays for containing arti-
cles, fluorescent screen means in said chamber opposite to said
source for converting X-ray images of said articles into visible
images, means for directing said visible image to a viewing
sution, and means for viewing said visible images of said arti-
cles, said viewing means includmg a lens magnification switch-
ing system for selectively viewing the entire visible image or
only a magnified portion of said visible image at various posi-
tions.
DESIGNS
APRIL 5, 1983
268,454
ATHLETIC SUPPORTER
Raul Novo, 5801 Pollard Dr., Richmond, Va. 23226
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,848
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2— 01
U,S. a. D2— 10
268,457
CASE FOR A PORTABLE TYPEWRITER
Mario Bellini, Milan, Italy, assignor to Ing. C. Olivetti A C.
S.p.A., Ivrea, Italy
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,738
Oalms priority, application Italy, Sep. 17, 1980, 53514/80fU]
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3—02
U.S. a. D3— 72
268,455
SANDAL
Joseph P. Famolare, Jr., Putney, Vt., assignor to Famolare, Inc.
New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,930
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2— 04
U.S. a. D2— 293
268,458
ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT STAND
Darrell A. Schoenig, Fort Collins, Colo., assignor to Teledyne
Industries, Inc.
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,124
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6~99
U.S. a. D6— 29
268,456
CRUTCH PAD
Donald Oleniak, Squamscott Rd., Stratham, N.H. 03885, and
Gerald R. Bedard, 419 Campbell St., Manchester, N.H. 03103
■ „ Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,946
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D3— 03
U.S. a. D3— 10
25S
256
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
268,459 268,462
ARMCHAIR PLANT HOLDER
Henry OIko, Chicken Valley Rd., Locust Valley, N.Y. 11650 James T. Douglas, 12800 La Cadena, Colton, Calif. 92324
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,858 Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,787
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 01 Int. CI. D6— 06
U.S. a. D6— 57 U.S. a. D6— 137
"^
268,460
CHRISTMAS TREE STAND
Ralph Ives, Rte. 2, Box 281A, Lovettsville, Va. 22080
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,375
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 99
U.S. a. D6— 105
268,461
COMBINED nSHING ROD RACK AND CARRIER
Kenneth F. Wess, San Angelo, Tex., and Charles E. Day, de-
ceased, late of San Angelo, Tex. (hy Frances B. Day, execu-
trix), assignors to Margaret L. Wess and Frances B. Day, both
of San Angelo, Tex.
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 207,066
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 06, D3—02
U.S. a. D6— 114 ^
268,463
WINE RACK
Ralph B. Olson, Lombard, III., assignor to Amco Corporation,
Chicago, III.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,757
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D06— 04
U.S. a. D6— 188
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
257
268,464 268,466
MERCHANDISE DISPLAY RACK CHILD'S PROTECTIVE SHIELD FX)R ATTACHMENT
Hal D. Sandy, 4937 Glendale Rd., Shawnee Mission, Kans. BETWEEN THE BACKRESTS OF AUTOMOTIVE FRONT
66205 SEATS
F>''»f Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,568 lyan Rados, Intagsgrtind 56, S-163 57 Spanga, Sweden
Term of patent 14 years Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,814
Int. a. D06—04 Oaims priority, application Sweden, Aug. 25, 1980, 80-1586
U.S. a. D6— 189 Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 99
U.S. a. D6— 191
T
268,465
SOFA FRAME
Gregory D. Bergguist, Mountain Brook, and John A. Jones, 268,467
TrussTille, both of Ala., assignors to Simmons Universal Cor- PICTURE FRAME OR THE LIKE
poration. New York, N.Y. Robert H. C. M. Daenen, Hekelgem, Belgium, assignor to Dart
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,442 Industries Inc., Northbrook, 111.
Term of patent 14 years Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,189
Int. a. D6— 06 Term of patent 14 years
U.S.a.D6-191 Int.a. D6-07
U.S. a. D6— 235
J58
268,468 268,470
DRESSER MIRROR CANISTER OR THE LIKE
Henry W. Mower, Stevens Point, Wis.; Allen Seymour, Oayton, Masao Kato, Okazaki, Japan, assignor to Dart Industries Inc.,
Ohio; Jerome P. Koziatek, Hinckley, Ohio, and Joseph G. Northbrook, 111.
Lendvay, Ravenna, Ohio, assignors to Questor Corporation, Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,173
Toledo, Ohio Term of patent 14 years
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,759 Int. CI. D07-07
Term of patent 14 years U.S. O, D7— 79
Int. a. D6— 07
1J.S. a. D6— 244
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
268,469
BEVERAGE CONTAINER
(|:raig Ruxton, and Ronald McGowan, both of Harris County,
Tex., assignors to Igloo Corporation, Houston, Tex.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,863
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. mi— 01
llJ.S. a. D7— 77
268,471
CASSEROLE COOKING APPLIANCE
Dan E. Gremonprez, West Bend, Wis., assignor to Dart Indus-
tries, Inc., Northbrook, III.
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,023
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 02
U.S. a. D7— 355
^^'M^
11
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
259
268,472 268,475
HOT AIR SUPPLY TYPE ELECTRIC OVEN FX)AM TRIMMER
Nishikawa Hideo, Osaka, Japan, assignor to Imanishi Flexible Leo C. Markwat, 4241 Four Mile Rd^ NE., Grand Rapids,
Tube Mfg. Co. Ltd., Japan Mich. 49505
FUed Aug. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 179,512 FUed Jun. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 159,050
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 23, 1980, 55-16340 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. CI. Di—05
Int. CI. D7— 02 U.S. a. D8— 67
U.S. a. D7— 348
268,476
POWER SAW GUIDE
Vance Owen, P.O. Box 27536, Honolulu, Hi. 96827
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,170
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D8— 05. DIO— 0^
U.S. a. D8— 71
268,473
WRENCH FOR DRAWINGS HOLDER NUTS
Bennie W. Rust, 2304 Troy Ave., South El Monte, Calif. 91733
Filed Apr. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 144,224
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D8— 05
U.S. a. D8—17
-55 4t 4T
268,477
PANEL CARRIER
DeForest D. Underdahl, 16150 Valley Rd., Eden Prairie, Minn.
268,474 55344
SOLDER EXTRACTOR *'""' ^^- *• *'*"• ^'- ^°- 211,699
Frank Sylvia, Columbia, Md., assignor to Pace Incorporated, T*™ **' P*^* ** J"*"
Laurel, Md.
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,963
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D08— 05
U.S. a. D8— 30
Int. a. D8— 05
U.S. a. D8— 71
u4i^
J
^
260
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
268,478
MULTIPLE ACCESS SLIDE-LOCK
David C. Domes, Reno, Nev., assignor to Caravan Camper Man-
ufacturing Co., Reno, Nev.
Filed Not. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,050
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D8— 07
U.S. a. D8— 341
268,481
BOX BLANK
Edwin A. Van Inwagen, Pine City, N.Y., assignor to F. M.
Howell & Company, Elmira, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,111
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— 03
U.S. a. D9— 433
268,479
CONFECTION DISPLAY PACKAGE
Pamela S. Pullman, 1127 Redfield Ter., Dunwoody, Ga. 30338
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,997
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D9— Oi
U.S. a. D9— 307
268,482
CAP FOR A DRUM
Kinji Mineo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Yamato Iron Works Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 5, 1980, Ser. No. 147,266
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D9— 07
U.S. a. D9— 439
268,480
PLASTIC CONTAINER FOR LIQUIDS
John A. Cox, Bethel Park, Pa., assignor to Mobay Chemical
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,241
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— o; <3^
U.S. a. D9— 378
268,483
CAP FOR A DRUM
Kiiyi Mineo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Yamato Iron Works Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 8, 1980, Ser. No. 147,865
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— 07
U.S. a. D9— 439
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
261
2«.4W 268.487
CLOSURE CAP BRACELET
Glenn H. Morris, 4203 Highwood Dr., Chattanooga, Tenn. Anita M. Kolman, 5052 N. Marine Dr., Chicago, lU 60640
1... . , . ,-, ,«-« ''"«• ^*"- 23, 1979, Ser. No. 22,969
Filed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,881 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. a. Dll— 07
Inta. D7— 07 U.S.a. Dll— 4
U.S. a. D9— 443
268,485
WRIST WATCH
Georges Oaude, lOTbis, rue du Pare, La Chaux-de-Fonds, Swit-
zerland
Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 168,730
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. DIO— 02
U.S. a. DIO— 38
268,486
CYCLOMETER
Roger Huret, Nanterre, France, assignor to Etablissements
Huret et Ses Fils, Nanterre, France
Filed Jan. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 4,160
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DIO— 04
U.S. a. DIO— 70
^ 268,488
BICYCLE STORAGE RACK
John Amott, and Mark I. Campbell, both of Toronto, Canada,
assignors to John Amott A Associates Limited, Toronto,
Canada
FUed Jul. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 169,070
Claims priority, application Canada, Apr. 21, 1980, 21-04-80-3
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D8— 99
U.S. a. D12— 115
262
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
268,489
TIRE
Harm J. Arends, Voerendaal, Netherlands; Henri J. Mirtain,
Noyon, France, and Norbert Zinnen, Aachen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Uniroyal Englebert Reifen GmbH,
Aachen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,511
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 3,
1981, 73 MR 3265
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 75
U.S. a. D12— 143
268,491
VEHICLE TIRE
Hiroshi Kojima, Hino; Hideaki Nishio, Urawa, and Toshihiko
Yashima, Higashi Murayama, all of Japan, assignors to
Bridgestone Tire Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 212,965
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 22, 1980, 55-34073
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 75
U.S. a. D12— 147
268,490
MOTORCYCLE TIRE
Anthony M. Mills, Williamsville, and Daniel C. Egan, Akron,
both of N.Y., assignors to Dunlop Tire and Rubber Corpora-
tion, Buffalo, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,876
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 75
U.S. a. D12— 146
268,492
TIRE
Philippe Grenie, Chateaugay, France, assignor to Compagnie
Generale des Etablissements Michelin, Oermont-Ferrand,
France
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,209
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 23, 1981, 50
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 15
U.S. a. D12— 147
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
263
268,493
SWITCH KEY
Richard L. MitcheU, and Thomas A. Heron, both of St. Louis,
Mo., assignors to Emerson Electric Co., St Louis, Mo.
FUed Mar. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 135,874
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 37
268,496
MINIATURE COMPUTER OR THE LIKE
Tsuneo Hanzawa, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Entex Industries,
Inc., Compton, Calif.
FUed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,542
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 9, 1980, 55-4440
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 02
U.S. a. D14— 100
268,494
SPEAKER MOUNTING BRACKET
Alexander Cyrell, 3540 N. Knoll Dr., Hollywood, Calif. 90068
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 205,925
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— OA 99
U.S. a. D14— 37
268,497
PLOW ASSEMBLY
Ronald C. Adair, 914 Morris Rd., Toney, Ala, 35773
FUed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,365
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— Oi
U.S. CI. D15— 11
268,495
TELEVISION RECEIVER
Makoto Terauchi; Nobuo Momota, both of Ibaraki; Osamu
SugUiara, Takatsuki, and Joseph J. Nukazawa, Tokyo, all of
Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,880
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1980, 55-23634
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 03
U.S. a. D14— 80 —
"V
268,498
ROTOR ELEMENT COMPONENT FOR A COAL
CRUSHER
WUbur W. Bagby, Birmingham, Ala., assignor to Bagby Engi-
neering Co., Birmingham, Ala.
FUed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,719
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D15— 99
U.S. a. D15— 123
264
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
268,499 268,502
CHUCK JAW BORE-TRUING nXTURE PERSONAL MESSAGE CENTER
Kenneth W. Vezner, 6107 Fremont Ave. North, Minneapolis, Jacob Y. Wong, 4589 Camino Molinero, Santa Barbara, Calif.
Minn. 55430 93110
FUed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 182,993 FUed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,487
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 09 Int. Q. D20— Oi
U.S. CI. D15— 138 U.S. a. D20— 18
268,500
TOOL HOLDER
Gary J. Kraus, 4420 Woodtrail La., Cincinnati, Ohio 45239
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,364
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 99, D6--06. DS— 08
U.S. a. D15— 140
268,503
GAME BOARD
Michael H. Saint Ive, Englewood, Colo., assignor
Corp., Englewood, Colo.
FUed Jan. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 52,616
to Lagess
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 0/
-
U.S. a. D21— 34
1 v
42 . !•
1 '2 — 6-X 3iJ[
\ : =' -s^/X ^."
27 4
1 30^*i.- J
/ v v
%
7\ A A 21
1 ^° <^ A liA A A '*
,7 1 / Y V Y Y Y
A A^ v\ \ V Art
1 II 2 7 15 26 40 57
5
268,501
MARKING INSTRUMENT
Peter A. Kriickel, Heroldsberg, and Gerhard Miick, Kirchehren- 268,504
bach, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Schwan- ^'^^ AGITATOR
Stobilo Schwiinhausser GmbH & Co., Nuremberg, Fed. Rep. ^^^'^ ^- ^°^ *3404 Calais Dr., Del Mar, Calif,
of Germany Fi'*^ Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 224,005
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,538 ''"«™ *>' »»«*«"* "^ y«*"
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 4,
1980, MR VI 442
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D19— 06
U.S. a. D19— 43
Int. a. D21— o;
U.S. a. D21— 41
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
265
268,505
TOY COFFIN
Harold W. Wells, 73 Chestnut Cir., Northport, N.Y. 11768
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,895
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07 ^
U.S. a. D21— 59
268,508
PORTABLE WALL MOUNTED WEIGHT LimNG
EXERaSER
Ira J. Silberman, Opelika; William J. Hill, Lanett, and Robert
C. Kelley, Opelika, all of Ala.^ assignors to Diversified Prod-
ucts Corporation, Opelika, Ala.
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,552
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 02
U.S. a. D21— 195
268,506
DOG TOY
Wai-Kuen Tung, Kwai Chung, Hong Kong, assignor to The Best
Toys Co. Ltd., Kowloon, Hong Kong
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,391
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 29, 1980,
80997305
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D21— O;
U.S. a. D21— 161
/
268,507
GAME APPARATUS
Anne T. Alwell, St. Paul, Minn.; A. Edward Fogarty; Bonnie R. 268,509
Fogarty, both of Sarasota, Fla.; David A. PaganI, Newport PORTABLE, FIGURE-REDUCING ROLLER EXERCISER
Beach, Calif., and Peter D. Pook, Minneapolis, Minn., assign- Larry W. Breaux, P.O. Box 856, Newhall, Calif. 91322
ors to Leisure Dynamics, Inc., Minneapolis, Minn. Filed Jul. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 57,365
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,038 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int Q. D21— 02
Int. a. D21— 0/ U.S. CI. D21— 198
U.S. a. D21— 168
266
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
268,510 268,513
NOVELTY EXTENSION TOY FAUCET HANDLE
Lee C. Gallagher, 7 Rockford Rd. H-24, Wilmington, Del. 19806 Bruce R. Thompson, Tranmere, Australia, assignor to UPL
Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 152,840 Group Limited, Brisbane, Australia
Term of patent 14 years Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,535
Int. a. D21— 0/ Qaims priority, application Australia, Dec. 4, 1980, 82768
U.S. a. D21— 240 Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— o;
U.S. a. D23— 28
268,511
nREARM MAGAZINE
Mack W. Gwinn, Jr., Levant, Me., assignor to Firepower, Inc.,
Hancock, Me.
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,660
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 01
U.S. a. D22— 7
268,514
FAUCET HANDLE
Bruce R. Thompson, Tranmere, Australia, assignor to UPL
Group Limited, Brisbane, Australia
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,528
Claims priority, application Australia, Jan. 5, 1981, 82982
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 0/
U.S. a. D23— 31
268,515
268,512 FAUCET HANDLE
HYDRAULIC LOCKING VALVE Bruce R. Thompson, Tranmere, Australia, assignor to UPL
Douglas E. Lien, Blaine, Minn., assignor to Roger W. Boeckers, Group Limited, Brisbane, Australia
White Bear Lake, Minn., a part interest Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,531
FUed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,709 Oaims priority, appUcation Australia, Dec. 17, 1980, 82850
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D23— 0/ Int Q. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 19 U.S. a. D23— 31
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
267
268^16 268,519
^ FAUCET HANDLE OIL-nRED SPACE HEATER
Brace R. Thompson, Tramnere, Austndia, assignor to UPL Kazuhara Nakamora, 1^, Sonoyama-cho, Chiknsaku. Na-
Group Limited, Brisbane, Australia goya-shi, Aichi-ken, Japan
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,532 Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,491
aauns priority, appUcation AustraUa, Not. 20, 1980, 82661 Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 16, 1980, 55-19340
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D23— 31 u,s. a. 023—123
268,517
FAUCET HANDLE
Brace R. Thompson, Tranmere, Australia, assignor to UPL
Group Limited, Brisbane, Australia
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,539
Oaims priority, application Australia, Jan. 5, 1981, 82980
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 0/
U.S. a. D23— 31
268,520
AIR FRESHENER
Robert A. LeCaire Jr., Appleton, Wis., assignor to The Coca-
Cola Company, Atlanta, Ga.
FUed Not. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,581
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D23— 04
U.S. a. D23— 150
268,518
OIL-nRED SPACE HEATER
Kazuhara Nakamura, 1-48, Sonoyama-cho, Chikusa-ku, Na-
goya-shi, Aichi-ken, Japan
FUed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,490
Claims priority, application Japan, May 16, 1980, 55-19341
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— Oi
VJS. a. D23— 123
268,521
ELECTRIC FAN FOR ENGINE COOLING
Roger Qemente, 1789 Vauxhill Rd., Union, N J. 07083
FUed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,939
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D23— 0^
U.S. a. D23— 158
i
LQjtWMIWIWHHWm I
268
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
268,522 268,524
OCCLUSIVE SPHYGMANOMETER FOR THE ACUPRESSURE INSTRUMENT FOR APPLYING
MEASURING OF ARTERIAL BLOOD PRESSURE ROLLING PRESSURE TO THE HUMAN BODY
Ulf S. Tanun, 122 Chi. de la Montague, 1224 Chene Bougeries, Salvatore R. D'Addio, and Janie D'Addio, both of 2609 E. Mon-
Switzerland roe. Orange, Calif. 92667
FUed Sep. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 74,785 FUed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,348
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2A—02 Int. O. D2S— 03
U.S. a. D24— 21 _ U.S. a. D24— 41 i
'
\J
■V
268,523
SERREHNE
Dennis R. Scanlan, Jr., Boca Raton, Fla., and Robert A. Arp,
Eden Prairie, Minn., assignors to Scanlan International, Inc.,
St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Aug. 13, 1980, Ser, No. 177,731
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 02; D8— 05
U.S. d. D24— 27
268,525
SUCTION DRAINAGE DEVICE FOR SURGICAL
PURPOSES
Harold W. Andersen; Charles H. Harrison, both of Oyster Bay,
and Melvin H. Worth, Jr., Staten Island, all of N.Y., assignors
to University Testing Service Inc., Oyster Bay, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 176,447
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D24— 02
U.S. a. D24— 56
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
269
268,526 268J28
RAILING BALUSTER TORCH
Robert V. F>beM905 NE. 49th Are., Portland, Oreg. 97213, Kung C. Hung, Tsuen Wm, Hong Kong, usignor to Freezinbot
and Ronald D. Sylwerter, P.O. Box 1404, Lake Gro.e, Oreg. Bottle Company Limited, Kowtoon, Hong Kong '''^"^
r... J ,. ^'"^ ''«»»• 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,060
FUed Etec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,530 Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Noy. 12. 1980
Term of patent 14 years 997522
lisnm^77 I"t- CI- D25-0; Term of patent 14 years
u.». u. U25— 77 Int. a. D26— 02
U.S. a. D26-49
Oil
268,529
ADJUSTABLE DESK LAMP
Samuel Lebowitz, Brooldyn, N.Y., assignor to Ketcham A
. McDougall, Inc., Roseland, NJ.
Filed Apr. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 137,499
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D26— 05
U.S. a. D26— 65
268,527
FLASHLIGHT
Alan B. Bachman, 59 Richard Sweet Dr., Woodbridge, Conn.
06525
FUed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,541
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D26— 02
VS. a. D26— 46
268,530
LIGHTING nXTURE
Duane S. Ament, Hollywood, Calif., assignor to Miracle Recrea*
tion Equipment Company, Grinnell, Iowa
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,620
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07. D26— 05
U.S. a. D26— 94
270
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 5, 1983
268^31
COMBINED PIPE RACK AND BOOKEND
Hope E. Uppvd, 13600 Sylvan St., Van Nuys, Calif. 91401
FUed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,426
Term of patent 14 yean
Int. a. D27— 99, D6— 06
U.S. a. D27— 06
268,534
HORSESHOE
Thomas M. Charlson, P.O. Box 991, Goliad, Tex. 77963
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,743
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D30— 07
U.S. a. D30— 35
\)
268,532
FACE SHIELD
Ruth £. Kravitz, 1631 Michigan Ave., Miami Beach, Fla. 33139
Filed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,858
268,535
HORSESHOE
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2S—03
U.S. a. D28— 9
Thomas M. Charlson, P.O. Box 991, Goliad, Tex. 77963
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,744
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D30— 0/
U.S. a. D30— 35
D
268,533
AQUARIUM STAND
Barbara A. Ford, 6823 Grebe PI., Philadelphia, Pa. 19142
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 943,479, Sep. 15, 1978. This
application Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,605
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D30— 02
U.S, a. D30— 12
268,536
BRANDING IRON
Edward M. Davis, 1453 Flushing Rd., Flushing, Mich. 48433
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201^8
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D30—S
U.S. a. D30— 43
April 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
271
2^t537 268 538
• ^, „ MOBILE SALAD BAR COPIER STAND
Joe D. Craig, Woodridge; Joan Grez, La Grange; Edward H. Michio Imada, Kodaira, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Rensi, Downers Grore, and Richard R. Salsbury, Schaiun- Company Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
burg, all of 111., assignors to McDonald's Corporation, Oak FUed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,890
Brook, 111. Claims priority, appUcation Japan,'Mar. 24,'l980, 55/011355
FUed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 197,925 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. Q. D6—03
Int.a. D12— 02 U.S.a. D34— 17
U.S. a. D34— 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 5TH DAY OF APRIL, 1983
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
A. H. Robins Company, Inc.: See —
Cale. Albert D., Jr.. 4.379.151, CI. 424-244.000.
Lunsford, Carl D.; and Chen, Ying-Ho. 4,379,167, CI. 424-330.000.
AB Akerlund A. Rausing: See —
Gross, Helmut; and Hauck. Hermann. 4.379.008, CI. 156-69.000.
Abe. Akira, to Fuji Xerox Co.. Ltd. Method of decomposing ozone.
4,379.129. CI. 423-210.000.
Abermeth, Hubert; Deckert, Andreas; Muller. Helmut; and Wahn-
schaffe, Jurgen. to Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz Aktiengesellschaft.
Braking device for a valve controlled internal combustion engine.
4.378,765. CI. 123-321.000.
Abo. Toshimi; and Kanegae. Hidetoshi, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Fuel
control system for gas turbine engine. 4,378,673. CI. 60-39.141.
a'Brassard. Hans-Joachim; Kloss, Robert; Ketzler, Paul; and Wolz,
Johannes, to Akzona, Incorporated. Process and device to identify
differences in yam tension. 4,378,704, CI. 73-862.070.
Acco Industries Inc.: See —
Haskell. Hugh H.; and Gilmore, WUliam J.. 4.378.713, CI. 74-
S01.50R.
Accurette (Pty) Ltd.: See—
Levitan. Ronald. 4.378.811, CI. 128-757.000.
ACF Industries, Inc.: See —
Meyer. Paul M.. 4.378,772. CI. 123-438.000.
Aciers et Outillage Peugeot: Siee —
Barge, Jean, 4,378,760, CI. 123-41.120.
Adams, James B., Jr., to Otis Engineering Corporation. Valve and
actuator therefor. 4,378.931. CI. 251-58.000.
Adams. Thomas O.; and Henke. Jim A., to Wean United, Inc. Cage mill.
4,378,911, CI. 241-187.000.
Advanced Semiconductor Products: See —
Winn, Ray, 4,378,953, CI. 350-171.000.
Aero Plastics of K.C., Inc.: See—
Saylor, James R.; Wiens, Lewis H.; and Blume, Orville E.,
4,378,742, CI. 105-377.000.
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Ermer, Wolfgang; Payrhammer, Bemd; Rapp, Heinz; and Bauer,
Alois, 4,378,610, Cl. 15-1.50R.
Ainunts Ugimag S.A.: See —
Bouchara, Claude; Henaff, Robert; and Jacob, Pierre. 4,379.276, Cl.
335-284.000.
Air Monitor Co., Inc.: See —
Walle, L. Irwin, 4,378.692, Cl. 73-49.200.
Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Hashimoto, Nobuyuki, 4,378,907, Cl. 236-48.00R.
Akima, Michitaka: See —
Ito, Kiyohiko; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu;
Sakai, Kazushige; Hata. Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru,
4.379.150, Cl. 424-244.000.
Akopov. Ernest M.; and Shaposhinikov. July G. Apparatus for apply-
ing a staple suture. 4.378.901. Cl. 227-19.000.
Aktiengesellschaft Adolph Saurer: See-
Macho, Helmut, 4.378.819. Cl. 139-88.000.
Akzona, Incorporated: See—
a'Brassard. Hans-Joachim; Kloss. Robert; Ketzler, Paul; and Wolz,
Johannes, 4,378,704, Cl. 73-862.070.
Albany International Corp.: See —
Bolton, Joseph A., 4.379,058, Cl. 210-791.000.
Albrecht, Leman P.: See —
Waiis, W. Coy; and Albrecht, Uman P., 4,378,894, Cl. 215-252.000.
Allan. Kenneth N.; Worringer, Thomas J.; and Baugh, Robert T., to
Allis-Chalmers Corporation. Sling belt bulk material conveyor.
4.378.875. Cl. 198-815.000.
Allen. Charles R.: See—
Chappelle, Claude L., 4,379,043, Cl. 204-229.000.
Allen Industries. Inc.: See —
Smith. Carl M., 4,379,101, Cl. 264-40.300.
Allen, Linus S., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Neutron-neutron-loeging.
4,379,228, Cl. 250-266.000.
Allen. Ronald E.; Hudson. Robert J.; and Hager, Marshall W.. to
United States of America, Navy. Negative roution cinch strap.
4.378,921. Cl. 244-151.00R.
Allen. William W.; and Lundquist. Alvin G., Jr.. to Jensen Corporation.
Spreader feeder apparatus. 4.378.645. Cl. 38-8.000.
Alley. Gary D.: See—
Bozler, Carl O.; Alley. Gary D.; Lindley. William T.; and Murphy.
R. Allen, 4,378,629, Cl. 29-580.000.
Allis-Chalmers Corporation: Sw—
Allan, Kenneth N.; Worringer, Thomas J.; and Baugh. Robert T..
4.378.875. Cl. 198-815.000.
Dunseith. S. Michael. 4.378.979. Cl. 55-96.000.
Petit, Peter J.; and Famia, Khosrow. 4.378,974. Cl. 48-197.00R.
Allnutt. Anthony J.: See-
Mountain, David S.; Allnutt, Anthony J.; Baker, Lionel R.; Cox,
Laurence J.; Picot. Alan J.; Wardropper. Peter P.; and Webber.
Julian M., 4,378,701, Cl. 73-808.000.
Allright Auto Parks, Inc.: See—
Feagins, Thomas J., Jr.; and Vogt, Calvin O.. 4,379,334, Cl.
364-467.000.
Aloup, Jean-Claude; Bouchaudon, Jean; Farge, Daniel; and James,
Claude, to Rhone-Poulenc Sante. Thiocarboxamide derivatives and
' their use as pharmaceuticals. 4,379,154, Cl. 424-250.000.
Alps Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Ijichi, Sadayoshi. 4,379,269, Cl. 330-277.000.
Aluminum Company of America: See —
Willis, W. Coy; and Albrecht, Leman P., 4,378.894, Cl. 215-252.000.
American Biltrite, Inc.: See —
Smith, Merrill M.; and Ferguson, Donald C. 4,379,185. Cl.
427-209.000.
American Cyanamid Company: See —
Mohan, Arthur G.; and Rauhut, Michael M., 4,379,320, Cl
362-34.000.
Young, Chi C; and DeMaria, Francesco, 11,379,113, Cl.
264-206.000.
American National Red Cross: See-
Williams, Craigenne A.; and Wickerhauser, Milan, 4.379,085, Cl.
260-1 12.00B.
American Standard Inc.: See —
Hart, James E.; and Zahradnik, Robert J., 4.378,950, Cl. 303-36.000
Ammon, J. Preston; Weaver, Harry R.; and Norman, Richard O., to
ELFAB Corporation. Method of and apparatus for pull-fitting
contacts. 4,378,632, Cl. 29-845.000.
Anastas, Mark S.; and Vaughan, Russell F., to Boeing Company, The.
Modular system controller for a transition machine. 4,379,326, Cl.
364-200.000.
Anchor Hocking Corporation: See —
Ochs. Charles S.; and Koontz, Carl E., 4,378,892, Cl. 215-232.000.
Andaya, Antonio P., to Pilar Development Corporation. System for
constructing a building. 4,378,664, Cl. 52-745.000.
Andersen 2000 Inc.: See —
Brady, Jack D., 4,379,130, Q. 423-242.000.
Anderson, David N. Apparatus and system for the display and selection
of merchandise. 4,378,884, Cl. 206-459.000.
Andersson, Erland. Motor-cycle frame. 4,378,857, Cl. 1 80-227.000.
Andersson, Nils E.; Eriksson, Sten; and Sinner, Bengt, to ASEA Ak-
tiebolag. Degassing of liquid mixtures. 4,378,978. Cl. 55-52.000.
Ando, Shizuo: See —
Kamimura, Teturo; Komatsubara, Masahiro; Ando, Shizuo;
Inanaga, Takuzi; and Takahashi, Akira, 4,379,314, Cl. 360-96.500.
Andrews, Thomas W.: See —
United States of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; Feldstein, Cyril; Andrews, Thomas W.; Crawford,
Donald W.; and Cole, Mark A., 4,378,813, Cl. 128-774.000.
Anic S.p.A.: See —
Balducci. Agostino; Corbellini. Margherita; and Osellame, Mirko,
4,379,074, Cl. 252-429.00B.
Annarelli, Dennis C; and Hall, Richard E., to FMC Corporation.
Process for sodium hypophosphite. 4,379,132, Cl. 423-305.000.
Anokhin, Vladimir N.: S^ —
Lytkin, Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Polikar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Maria G.;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei
P., deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G., adminstrator,
4,379,078, Cl. 252-466.00J.
Anorad Corp.: See —
Chitoyat, Anwar, 4,378,709, Cl. 74-207.000.
Anza B.V.: See—
Hospers, Johannes; and ten Lohuis, Gerhard. 4.378.725. Cl.
87-12.000.
Aoki. Hirokazu: See —
Toyooka, Takashi; Sugie. Mamoru; Aoki. Hirokazu; and Yo-
shizawa, Shigeru. 4.379,341, Cl. 365-6.000.
Aoki, Shinichiro, to Fujitsu Limited. Monitoring circuit for a deacram-
bling device. 4,379,206, Cl. 1 78-22. 130.
Aono, Jinichiro: See —
Ito, Kiyohiko; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu;
Sakai, Kazushige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru,
4,379.150. Cl. 424-244.000.
Apothaker. Richard L.. to Kontes Glass Company. Fiberoptic head
with fiber bundles having different numerical apertures. 4.379.225, Cl.
25O-227.000.
PI I
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Applied Magnetics Corporation: See —
Schuler, Heinz, 4.379,315, CI. 360-105.000.
Arai, Motohiro: See—
Yanase, Tomoo; and Arai, Motohiro, 4,378,986, CI. 65-3.120.
Araki, Yasuo; Uno, Hajime; Higuchi, Shigeharu; and Matsumoto, Seiji,
to Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Method of producing cobalt-
modified magnetic particles. 4,379,183, CI. 427-127.000.
Arrowsmith, David R.: See —
Parsons. David; and Arrowsmith, David R., 4,378,676, CI.
60-548.000.
ASEA Aktiebolag: See—
Andersson, Nils E.; Eriksson, Sten; and Sinner, Bengt, 4,378,978,
CI. 55-52.000.
Aso, Koichi: See—
Makino, Yoshimi; Hayakawa, Masatoshi; Aso, Koichi; Uedaira,
Satoru; Ito, Shigeyasu; and Hotai, ICazuhide, 4,379,004, CI.
148-108.000.
Atlantic Richfield Company: See —
Yudovich. Amos; and Sweed, Norman H., 4,379,025, CI.
203-14.000.
Atlas Fahrzeugtechnik GmbH, Firma: See —
Knuefeltnann, Manfred; Brandner, Burkhard; and Blauhut, Rein-
hold, 4,379,239, CI. 307-268.000.
Aucktor, Erich: See —
Goft, Manfred; Maurer, Dieter; and Aucktor, Erich, 4,378,858, CI.
180-259.000.
Audeh, Cosundi A., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Co-processing of resid-
ual oil and coal. 4,379,045, CI. 208-9.000.
Audet, Gordon A. Structural panel. 4,378,663. CI. 52-580.000.
Ausonia Farmaceutici s.r.l.: See —
Ferruti, Paolo; Danusso, Ferdinando; Tanzi, Maha C; and Quadro,
Giuseppe, 4,379,091, CI. 548-472.000.
Auto- Place, Inc.: See —
Kirsch, Kerry F.; StaufTer. Kirk R.; and Tindall, Robert J..
4,379.335, CI. 364-513.000.
Automotive Products Limited: See —
Parsons, David; and Arrowsmith, David R., 4,378,676, CI.
60-548.000.
Avco Corporation: See—
McMurray. John H.; and Miller, Jule, 4,379,121, CI. 420-452.000.
Avery, Alfred J., to Good News Unlimited Incorporated. Pressure
responsive valve assembly. 4,378.932, CI. 251-61.400.
Avins. Jeremiah Y.; and Phillion. Donald W., to RCA Corporation.
Circuit for detecting phase relationship between two signals.
4.379.221. CI. 377-43.000.
Ayers, William M., to Halliburton Company. Open sea skimmer barge.
4,379,054, CI. 210-242.300.
Babel, Werner, to Maho Werkzeugmaschinenbau Babel & Co. Head-
stock for a universal milling and drilling machine. 4.378,621, CI.
29-26.0OA.
Baglin, John E. E.; Feder, Ralph; Haller, Ivan; Hammer. William N.;
and Spiller, Eberhard, to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion. Methods for making graded index antireflective surfaces.
4.379.180, CI. 427-38.000.
Bailey, David C, to Dest Corporation. Apparatus and method for
separation of optical character recognition dau. 4.379,282. CI.
382-9.000.
Bailey. Donald L.: See—
Packo, Joseph J.; and Bailey, Donald L., 4,379,067. CI. 252-67,000.
Baird, William C, Jr.: See—
Eberly. Paul E., Jr ; Mauldin, Charles H.; and Baird, William C.
Jr.. 4,379,076, CI. 252-439.000.
Baird, William G., Jr.; Holbrook, Stanley E.; and Piatt, Jeremy A., to
W. R. Grace A Co. Method for preparing a film of vinylidene chlo-
ride polymer. 4,379,117. CI. 264-514.000.
Baker. Donald B.. to Pro-Mark Companies, The. Preparation of low fat
imiution cream cheese. 4.379.175, CI. 426-582.000.
Baker, Douglas F.: See-
Li Fiandra, Carlo F.; Nelson, Burke E.; and Baker, Douglas F..
4,378.989, CI. 65-271.000.
Baker, James C, to ITT Industries, Inc. Method of making optical fiber
termination. 4,378.954, CI. 350-320.000.
Baker. Lionel R.: See-
Mountain, David S.; Allnutt, Anthony J.; Baker. Lionel R.; Cox,
Laurence J.; Picot. Alan J.; Wardropper, Peter F.; and Webber,
Julian M., 4,378,701, CI. 73-808.000.
Balducci, Agostino; Corbellini. Margherita; and Osellame. Mirko. to
Anic S.p.A.; and Snamprogetti, S.p.A. Chemical composition based
on titanium trihalide. a method for its preparation, and a process for
the polymerization or copolymerization of unsaturated compounds
which uses this composition. 4,379,074, CI. 252-429.00B.
Baldwin Gegenheimer Corporation: See —
MacPhee, John, 4,378,735, CI. 101-363.000.
Balk, Wouter: See-
van Hes, Roelof; Grosscurt, Amoldus C; and Balk, Wouter,
4.379,157, CI. 424-270.000.
Barbosov. Nikolai D.: See—
Lytkin. Viktor P.; Menshov. Vladimir N.; Frolov. Jury S.; Polikar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Maria G.;
Anokhin. Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei
P., deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova. Vera G.. adminstrator.
4,379,078. CI. 252-466.00J
Barge. Jean, to Aciers et Outillage Peugeot. Device for controlling the
ventilating means of an internal combustion engine. 4,378.760, CI.
123-41.120.
Barrington. Burchus Q.. to Halliburton Company. Hydraulic fluid
supply apparatus and method for a downhole tool. 4,378,850, CI.
166-373.000.
Barta, Franz. Decalcamania picture for applying designs or imprints to
objects of glass, ceramics or such — like, process for transferring
decalcamania pictures of that kind, and apparatus for carrying out
said process. 4,379.017. CI. 156-238.000.
Barthel. Walter: See—
Muller. Karl-Hans; and Barthel. Walter. 4.378.999. CI. 106-28 l.OOR.
Barton. John A.: See —
Parrish, David D.; and Barton, John A.. 4,378,844, CI. 166-297.000.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Hansen, Guenter; Kolbinger, Hans J.; Senninger, Rudolf; and
Zeidler, Georg, 4,378,969, CI. 8-521.000.
Bassett, Leo H. Fine material screw washer. 4,379,049. CI. 209-464.000.
Batterlite-Whitlock Incorporated: See —
Radlove. Sol B.. 4.379.174. CI. 426-554.000.
Bauer, Alois; See —
Ermer. Wolfgang; Payrhammer. Bemd; Rapp. Heinz; and Bauer,
Alois. 4.378.610, CI. 15-1. 50R.
Bauer, Gunter; and Eckert, Joachim, to GfE Gesellschaft fur Elek-
trometallurgie mbH. Method of recovering molybdenum oxide.
4,379,127, CI. 423-55.000.
Bauer, Horst: See —
Meiser. Ewald; and Bauer. Horst. 4,379,057, CI. 210-662.000.
Baugh, Robert T.: .See —
Allan, Kenneth N.; Worringer, Thomas J.; and Baugh, Robert T..
4.378,875, CI. 198-815.000.
Baum, Heinz W.. to Lucas Industries Limited. Automatic adjuster for
hydraulic brake actuator. 4,378,863, CI. 188-71.800.
Baxter Travenol Laboratories. Inc.: See —
Fowles. Thomas A.; Slater. Glenn L.; and Winchell, David A..
4.378.891. CI. 215-32.000.
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Schnoring. Hildegard; Dahm. Manfred; and Pampus. Gottfried,
4,379,071, CI. 252-316.000.
BBC Brown, Boveri & Company Limited: See —
Zumstein. Bruno, 4,378,677, CI. 60-606.000.
Beach. Michael E.. to Didier Corporation. Hydraulic log splitter.
4,378.826. CI. 144-193.00A.
Beatrice Foods Company: See —
Kopp. Edward J.; Iwinski, Leon J.; Guzzo, Frank; Speechley.
Ronald F.; and Femali. Frank, 4,378.928. CI. 249-63.000.
Beatty, James J.: See —
Beatty, Theodore D.; and Beatty. James J., 4,378,747. CI.
1 14-56.000.
Beatty, Theodore D.; and Beatty, James J. Aquatic recreation vehicle.
4,378,747, CI. 1 14-56.000.
Beers, Bruce N., to Schlage Lock Company. Door closer delayed
action speed control system. 4,378.612; CI. 16-62.000.
Beffa, Fabio: See^
Lienhard. Paul; and Beffa. Fabio. 4.378,970, CI. 8-683.000.
Beggs. Stanley L.; Riel. Frank J.; and Lawson, D. W. R.. to Rohr
Industries, Inc. Honeycomb noise attenuation structure. 4,379,191,
CI. 428-118.000.
Begnaud, Claude M., to Texaco Inc. Removable hatch lid. 4,378,896,
CI. 220-327.000.
Behn, Reinhard; Pachonik, Horst; and Seebacher. Gerhard, to Siemens
Aktiengesellschaft. Method of making a regenerable electric layer
capacitor. 4,379,182, CI. 427-41.000.
Behrens, Dieter: See —
Hahn. Reinhard; and Behrens. Dieter. 4,379,128, CI. 423-63.000.
Behrens, Henry; and Jacobson, Chester F.. to Gillette Company. The.
Shaving unit and method of manufacture therefor. 4.379,219, CI.
219-121.0LC.
Behringwerke Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Faike, Jurgen; Geiger, Helmut; Grunbein, Wolfgang; and Kandel.
Heinz-Georg. 4,379,083, CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Bell. Frank H.. to Thiokol Corporation. Variable aperture annular
nozzle for rocket motor igniter. 4.378.674, CI. 60-39.823.
Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated: See —
Levinstein. Hyman J.; Murarka. Shyam P.; and Sinha, Ashok K.,
4,378.628, CI. 29-571.000.
Pierce. Russell D.; and Venard, Walter B., 4,379,179, CI. 427-8.000.
Robbins, Murray; and Sherwood, Richard C, 4,379,003, CI.
148-104.000.
Sparber, Richard G.. 4.379.210. CI. 179-84.00L.
Wyner. Aaron D., 4.379.205. CI. 178-22.100.
Bendell, Sidney L., to RCA Corporation. Image tube suppression
circuit. 4,379.310. CI. 358-219.000.
Bender. Gerald M.. to McDonnell Douglas Corporation. Pulse trans-
former laser diode package. 4.379.273. CI. 333-32.000.
Bendix Corporation, The: See —
Busser, Darryl W.; and Szafranski, Joseph P., 4,379,332, CI.
364-431 050.
Normann, Richard W.; and Niles, Paul D., 4,378.823, CI.
140-139.000.
Benninger. Siegfried; Reining, Karl; and Krasel, Werner, to Hoechst
Aktiengesellschaft. Apparatus for the production of aqueous solu-
tions of sodium chloride from rock salt. 4,379,125, CI. 422-274.000.
Berben, Theodorus J.: See —
Damen, Johannes P. M.; and Berben. Theodorus J., 4,379,021, CI.
156-616.00R.
Berg, Lloyd; and Ratanapupech. Pisant. Separation of ethyl aceUte
from ethanol and water by extractive distillation. 4,379,028, CI.
203-51.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
Bergmann, Ewald: See—
Schneider, Franz; Bergmann, Ewald; and Gering, Gerhard,
4,378,717, CI. 83-530.000.
Berke, Herbert; and Portoghese, Joseph, to United Stotes of America,
Navy. Composite video signal separator. 4,379,309. CI. 358-154.000.
Berkley and Company, Inc.: See—
Holzhauer, Henry J., 4,378,750, CI. 114-249.000.
Berkmann, Adolf, to Nordson Corporation. Coating booth for electro-
sUtic application of pulverized materials. 4,378,728, CI. 98-115.0SB.
Bemacky, Elizabeth C. Apparatus for vaginal hygiene. 4,378,799, CI.
604-32.000.
Bemer, Rolf E. Method and apparatus for the continuous production of
a uniform slab or sheet from heat expandable thermoplastic particles.
4,379,107, CI. 264-51.000.
Bespalov, Vladimir N.: See—
Shilov, Vladislav A.; Smimov, Vitaly K.; Pechersky, Viktor S.;
Kugushin, Alexandr A.; Bespalov, Vladimir N.; Labetsky, Jury
O.; and Melnikov, Boris M., 4.378,687, CI. 72-366.000.
Betts, Max W., to CourUulds Limited. Presser foot for a knitting ma-
chine. 4,378,682, CI. 66-64.000.
Bharg^ava, Rameshwar N.: See—
Fitzpatrick, Brian J.; Bhargava, Rameshwar N.; Milch, Alfred E.;
and Tasaico, Pedro, 4,379,299, CI. 346-1.100.
Biggin, Ian S.; and WUson, Alan S., to BP Chemicals Limited. Plastisols
for coating polymeric materials. 4,379,000, CI. 106-311.000.
Billeriss, Walter; Hosl, Josef; and Dresen, Werner, to Ernst Roederstein
Spezialfabrik Fur Kondensatoren GmbH. Method for attaching
connectors in foil capacitors. 4,378,619, CI. 29-25.420.
Bianton, Marvin E.: See —
Fleischmann, Dale; and Bianton, Marvin E., 4,378,785, CI.
126421.000.
Blauhut, Reinhold: See—
Knuefelmann, Manfred; Brandner, Burkhard; and Blauhut, Rein-
hold, 4,379,239, CI. 307-268.000.
Bleha, William P., Jr.; Wiener-Avnear, Eliezer; and Robusto, Paul F., to
Hughes Aircraft Company. Method of and apparatus for a multimode
image display with a liquid crystal light valve. 4.378,955. CI.
350-334.000.
Blionas, Costas: See-
Haas, David J.; Blionas, Costas; and Muenzen, Joseph P., 4,379,348,
CI. 378-57.000.
Blume, Orville E.: See—
Saylor, James R.; Wiens, Lewis H.; and Blume, Orville E..
4,378,742, CI. 105-377.000.
Blumer, Gerd-Peter: See-
Zander, Maximilian; Blumer, Gerd-Peter; Collin. Gerd; Glaser.
Herbert; and Marrett. Rolf, 4,379.133. CI. 423-445.000.
BM-Elektronik Meletzky KG: See—
Lehnhardt, Lutz, 4,379,213, CI. 179-1 15.50R.
Boehringer Mannheim GmbH: See —
Port, Hans; Schrenk, Jurgen; and Wunderwald, Peter, 4,379,142,
CI. 424-101.000.
Boeing Company, The: See—
Anastas, Mark S.; and Vaughan. Russell F.. 4.379,326, a.
364-200.000.
Runnels, Joe N.; and Fagerlund, Kenneth R.. 4,378,920, CI. 244-
135.00R.
Tambussi, William C, 4,379,013, CI. 156-189.000.
BOGE GmbH: See-
Brenner, Heinz, 4,378,936, CI. 267-140.100.
Boger, Manfred; Burckhardt, Urs; Kristinsson, Haukur; Mattem, Gun-
ter; and Traber, Walter, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Substituted
2-(anilinomethyl)-2-imidazoline derivatives, compositions containing
these derivatives, and the use thereof for combating pests. 4,379,147,
CI. 424-200.000.
Bogner, Robert E.: See—
Eshraghian, Kamran; and Bogner, Robert E., 4,379,280, CI. 340-
38.00L.
Bogunovic, Mirjana V.: See—
Islip, Peter J.; and Bogunovic, Mirjana V., 4,379,156, CI.
424-270.000.
Bogush, Alexandr R.: See —
Tsvetkov, Nikolai S.; Maleev, Igor I.; Opainich, Irina E.; Lobkov-
skaya, Lidia A.; Bogush, Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya, Alexandra
D.; Onischak, Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky. Evgeny I.; and Opai-
nich, Mikhail D., 4,379.184. CI. 427-169.000.
Bohm, Janos: See —
Bohm, Nandor; Bohm, Janos; and Bohm, Robert, 4,378,694, CI.
73-114.000.
Bohm, Nandor; Bohm, Janos; and Bohm. Robert, to Kozuti Ko-
zlekedesi Tudomanyos Kutato Intezet. Instrument for measuring the
speed and fuel consumption of motor vehicles. 4.378.694. CI.
73-114.000.
Bohm. Robert: See—
Bohm, Nandor; Bohm, Janos; and Bohm, Robert, 4,378,694, CI.
73-114.000.
Boisvert, Conrad; and Greger, William J., to Honeywell Inc. Transpar-
ent addressing for CRT controller. 4,379,293, CI. 340-750.000.
Bolton, Gerald L.; Sefton. Vemer B.; and Zubryckyj. Nicolaus, to
Sherritt Gordon Mines Limited. Removal of manganese and chloride
ions from aqueous acidic zinc sulphate solutions. 4.379,037, CI.
204-119.000.
Bolton, Joseph A., to Albany International Corp. Method and apparatus
for Altering contaminating particles from a liquid/particle mixture.
4,379,058, CI. 210-791.000.
Bonaldi, Antonio; and Molinari. Egidio, to Erregierrc S.p.A. Process
for preparing high purity ursodeoxycholic acid. 4.379.093. CI.
260-397.100.
Bono, James L.: See —
McCoy. Stephen A.; and Bono, James L., 4.379,177, CI.
426-656.000.
Botterman. David L.; and Wolff. Natalie A., to Container Corporation
of America. Reusable enclosed carrier carton. 4,378.877. CI.
206-141.000.
Bouchara, Claude; HenafT. Robert; and Jacob, Pierre, to Aimanu Ugi-
mag S.A. Process and apparatus for the multipolar magnetization of
a material in strips. 4.379.276. CI. 335-284.000.
Bouchaudon, Jean: See —
Aloup, Jean-Claude; Bouchaudon, Jean; Farge. Daniel; and James,
Claude. 4.379,154, CI. 424-250.000.
Boudreau, Robert J.: See—
Voytko, Charles L.; and Boudreau, Robert J., 4,378,946. CI.
280-642.000.
Bouwhuis. Gijsbertus; De Lang. Hendrik; and Dekkers, Nicolaas H., to
U.S. Philips Corporation. Automatic beam correction in a scanning
transmission electron microscope. 4,379,230, CI. 250-307.000.
Boyd, Henry J.: See-
Cipriani, Cipriano; and Boyd, Henry J., 4.379,197. CI. 428-220.000
Boykin, John R., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Coherent phase shift
keyed demodulator for power line communication systems.
4,379,284, CI. 340-3 lO.OOR.
Bozler, Carl O.; Alley. Gary D.; Lindley. William T.; and Murphy, R
Allen, to Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Semiconductor
embedded layer technology including permeable base transistor,
fabrication method. 4,378,629, CI. 29-580.000.
BP Chemicals Limited: See-
Biggin. Ian S.; and Wilson. Alan S., 4,379.000, CI. 106-311.000.
Brady, Jack D., to Andersen 2000 Inc. Process for regenerating scrub-
bing solutions. 4,379.130, CI. 423-242.000.
Braillon, Philibert M. Magnetic chuck. 4.379,277, CI. 335-295.000.
Braintree Scientific, Inc.: See—
Klingenberg, Roger E., 4,378,624, CI. 29-239.000.
Brandner, Burkhard: See—
Knuefelmann, Manfred; Brandner, Burkhard; and Blauhut, Rein-
hold, 4,379,239, Q. 307-268.000.
Brane, Earl P. Filter bypass valve assembly. 4,379,053, CI. 210-234.000.
Brenner, Heinz, to BOGE GmbH. Engine mountings for trucks, motor
coaches or the like utility vehicles. 4,378,936, CI. 267-140.100.
Brigham Young University: See-
Jensen, Marcus M., 4,379,140, CI. 424-92.000.
Brinkmann, Willi: See —
Stratmann, Josef; and Brinkmann, Willi, 4,379,023, CI. 202-247.000.
British Communications Corporation, Ltd.: See —
Carter, Margaret P.; and Hodgson, David, 4,379,270, CI. 331-
l.OOA.
British Steam Specialties Limited, The: See —
Fumess, Richard A.; and Lauder, Robert A., 4,378.703, CI.
73-861.790.
Broadt, David R., to GTE Products Corporation. Reflector insert for
multi-flash unit. 4,379.323. CI. 362-346.000.
Brock. Kurtis B. Enhanced oil recovery apparatus and method.
4.378,846, CI. 166-303.000.
Brockway, William J.: See—
Coan, Michael H.; and Brockway. William J., 4,379,087, CI. 260-
1I2.00B.
Brouha, Marcel; van den Hoogenhof, Waltherus W.; and van Loos-
dregt, Peter C, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Cathode-ray tube.
4,379,251, CI. 313-403.000.
Brown Group Recreational Products, Inc.: See —
Voytko, Charles L.; and Boudreau, Robert J., 4,378,946. CI
280-642.000.
Brown, Neil T.: See—
Haub, Donald J.; Brown, Neil T.; Krier, Keith N.; Hawkins, Ray-
mond C; and Seim, Howard N., 4,378,855, CI. I80-65.00R.
Brown, Paul R.; and Fresch, Henry D., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber
Company, The. Rolling lobe airspring. 4,378,935, CI. 267-64.270.
Brown, William L., to SI Handling Systems, Inc. Article handling
apparatus. 4,378,872, CI. 198-570.000.
BRS, Inc.: See-
Johnson, Jeffrey O., 4,378,643, CI. 36-129.000.
Brunswick Corporation: See —
Shackelford, John T.; and Carpenter, Robert L., 4,378,914, CI.
242-84.21 A.
Buchholz, Adolf Fluid flow deflector apparatus and sheet dryer em-
ploying same. 4,378,640, CI. 34-155.000.
Bucklers, Lothar: See —
Ehlers, Helmut H.; Eggensperger, Heinz; Bucklers, Lothar; Ei-
gener, Ulrich; Dienl, Karl-Heinz; and Weigand, Norbert,
4,379,137,0.424-78.000.
Burch, Lorraine. Hair trimming device. 4,378,635, CI. 30-58.000.
Burckhardt, Urs: See —
Boger, Manfred; Burckhardt, Urs; Kristinsson, Haukur; Mattem,
Gunter; and Traber. Walter, 4.379,147, CI. 424-200.000.
Burgess, Vernon J. Saw chain connector. 4,378,719, CI. 83-831.000.
Burlington Industries, Inc.: See —
Lassiter, B. Dean, 4,378,672, CI. 57-122.000.
Bums, Gerard. Clasp. 4,378,617, CI. 24-336.000.
Burrough, Philip M.; and Edwards, David V., to RFD Inflaubles
Limited. Escape sUdes. 4,378,861, CI. 182-48.000.
Burroughs Corporation: See —
Catiller, Robert D., 4,379,265, Q. 328-55.000.
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Charles T., 4.379,160, CI.
Catiller. Robert D.; and Forbes, Brian K., 4,379,328. CI.
364-200.000.
Burroughs Wellcome Co.: See —
Harfenist, Morton; and Joyner,
424-274.000.
Islip, Peter J.; and Bogunovic, Mirjana V., 4,379,156, CI.
424-270.000.
Bush, Eric L.; and Workman, Ernest J., to ITT Industries, Inc. Fluidiz-
ing fmc powder. 4,379,186, CI. 427-213.000.
Busser, Darryl W.; and Szafranski, Joseph P., to Bendix Corporation,
The. Electronic fuel injection control system for an internal combus-
tion engine. 4,379,332, CI. 364-431.050.
Bussey, Harry, Jr. Method of expanding heat expandable thermoplastic
elements with steam and a horizontal expander with a feed near the
bottom for expanding the heat expandable clement. 4,379,106, CI.
264-51.000.
Butler, Bill J.: See—
Leliaert, Raymond M.; Kanouse, Richard C; Butler, Bill J.; and
Lindner, Robert N., 4,378.662, CI. 51-432.000.
C. Delachaux: See—
Oger. Rene, 4,378,909, CI. 238-244.000.
C. W. Zumbiel Co., The: See-
Summers, Gus E., 4,378,880, CI. 206-170.000.
Cale, Albert D., Jr., to A. H. Robins Company, Inc. 3-Phenoxyazeti-
dines for anorexigenic activity. 4,379,151, CI. 424-244.000.
Calhoon, Cathy Y.: See—
Reichert, D. Jeanie; Trottier, Carol S.; and Calhoon, Cathy Y.,
4,378.805, CI. 128-450.000.
Calspan Corporation: See —
Schneider, Clayton J., Jr., 4,378,740. CI. 102-216.000.
Cannella, Vincent D.; and Izu. Masatsugu, to Energy Conversion
Devices. Inc. Methoid for plasma deposition of amorphous materials.
4.379,181, CI. 427-39.000.
Canon Business Machines. Inc.: See —
Yamamoto. Hideo; Takase. Susumu; and Thomas, R. Dale,
4.379,336, CI. 364-708.000.
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Knechtel, Wilhelm, 4,378,752, CI. 118-60.000.
Miyamoto. Koichi. 4,378,706, CI. 74-89.220.
Carder, Mervin L., Sr., to M. Qarder Industries, Incorporated. Fluid
dispensing nozzle. 4.378,824, CI. 141-206.000.
Carl Still GmbH &. Co. KG, Firma: See—
Stratmann, Josef; and Brinkmann, Willi, 4.379,023, CI. 202-247.000.
Carlson, John L.; Parson, Roger F.; and Nicholson, David F., to Jeno's,
Inc. Apparatus for the drip dry conveyance of oil-fried dough prod-
ucts. 4,379,055, CI. 210-400.000.
Carmel, A. Peter, to Modular Industries Ltd. Poruble spiral staircase.
4.378,862, CI. 182-106.000.
Carpenter, Robert L.: See —
Shackelford. John T.; and Carpenter, Robert L., 4,378,914, CI.
242-84.21 A.
Carpenter Technology Corporation: See —
Whitney, C. Raymond; and Walsh, Andrew R., 4,379,120, CI.
420-448.000.
Carter. Margaret P.; and Hodgson, David, to British Communications
Corporation. Ltd. Phase locked loop having rapid tuning. 4.379,270,
CI. 331-l.OOA.
Cassou, Betrand; Cassou, Maurice; and Cassou, Robert. Single shot
stock of animal semen for artificial insemination of birds, especially
turkeys, hens, and guinea fowl. 4,378,798, CI. 604-275.000.
Cassou. Maurice: See —
Cassou, Betrand; Cassou, Maurice; and Cassou, Robert, 4.378.798.
CI. 604-275.000.
Cassou, Robert: See —
Cassou, Betrand; Cassou, Maurice; and Cassou, Robert, 4,378,798,
CI. 604-275.000.
Caterpillar Tractor Co.: See —
Daniel, Steven A., 4.378.711. CI. 74-467.000.
Hosmer. Stephen L.; and Steuer. Paul R., 4.378.659, CI. 49-504.000.
Satzler. Ronald L.. 4.378,834. CI. 157-1.100.
CatiUer, Robert D.. to Burroughs Corporation. Dual clocking time
delay generation circuit. 4,379.265, CI. 328-55.000.
Catiller, Robert D.; and Forbes, Brian K., to Burroughs Corporation.
Linear sequencing microprocessor facilitating. 4,379,328, CI.
364-200.000.
Cawthron, Duane: See —
Tietjen, Donald; Lamb. Sharon; Shaw. Pern; Cawthron. Duane;
and Shannon. Paul D.. 4.379,327, CI. 364-200.000.
Cengel, John A.; Hunt, Mark W.; Strukl, Joseph S.; and Pappas, Peter
G.. to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Oxidative passivation of
polyamine-dispersants. 4.379,064, CI. 252-5 1.50A.
Cerberus AG: See—
Muggli, Jurg; and Pfister, GusUv, 4,379,290, CI. 340-629.000.
Ceskoslovenska akademie ved: See —
Petranek, Jaroslav; Ryba, Olen; Semler, Miloslav; and Panoch,
Miroslav, 4,379.041, CI. 204-415.000.
Cha, Chang Y., to Occidental Oil Shale, Inc. Ignition technique for an
in situ oil shale retort. 4,378,841, CI. 166-261.000.
Chalmers, Bruce, to Mobil Solar Energy Corporation. Solar cells.
4.379.202, CI. 136-256.000.
Chamberlin, Ronald D.. to PPG Industries, Inc. Method of operating an
electrolytic cell. 4,379,035, Q. 204-98.000.
Champion International Corporation: See —
Mode, Duane R., 4,378,904, CI. 229-4 l.OOB.
Roccaforte, Harry I., 4,378,905, CI. 229-52.00B.
Sherwood, Irvin W., 4.378.903, CI. 229-6.00R.
Chappelle, Claude L., to Francisco, Robert G.; Williams, Loren V.;
Hennigan, Dan; Cornish, James R.; and Allen, Charles R. Water-
decomposition and gas-generating apparatus. 4.379,043. CI.
204-229.000.
Chattanooga Corporation: See—
Sarrell, Ivan D., 4,378,791, CI. 128-71.000.
Chatterjee, Pallab K.; and Tasch, Aloysious F., Jr., to Texas Instru-
ments Incorporated. Non-coplanar barrier-type charge coupled
device with enhanced storage capacity and reduced leakage current.
4,379.306. CI. 357-24.000.
Check, Mathias M.; and Goodby, Elia L. Hand scoop for grass and
leaves. 4,378,670, CI. 56-400.010.
Chen, Ying-Ho: See—
Lunsford. Carl D.; and Chen, Ying-Ho, 4,379,167, CI. 424-330.000.
Cheng, Chen- Yen; and Cheng, Sing- Wang. Distillative freezing process
for separating volatile mixtures. 4.378,984, CI. 62-12.000.
Cheng, Sing- Wang: See —
Cheng, Chen-Yen; and Cheng, Sing-Wang, 4,378,984, CI.
62-12.000.
Cherkofsky, Saul C, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Antiinflammatory 2-substituted-thio-4,5-dihydro-4,5-diaryl- 1 H-
imidazoles. 4,379,159, CI. 424-273.00R.
Cherry Electrical Products Corporation: See—
Cokefair. Jon, 4,378,649, CI. 40-544.000.
Chevallier, Rene, to Thomson-CSF. OrienUble antenna support.
4,379,297, CI. 343-882.000.
Chevron Research Company: See —
Small, Vernon R., Jr., 4,379,066, CI. 252-56.00R.
Chia, Weng-Kwen R.; and Forrest, Robert S., to Smith International,
Inc. Cavitation nozzle plate adapter for rock bits. 4,378.853. CI.
175-340.000.
Chiba, Tetsuya: See —
Senaha. Susumu; Chiba. Tetsuya; Ohno, Akira; and KaUyama.
Shitomi, 4,379.199. CI. 428-332.000.
Chinoin Gyogyszer es Vegyeszeti Termekek Gyara R.T.: See—
Tomoskozi, Istvan; Gyory. Peter; Kovacs. Gabor; Virag, Sandol;
Kormoczy, Peter; and Stadler, Istvan, 4,379,164. CI. 424-285.000.
Chistozvonov, David B., deceased: See —
Lytkin, Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Polikar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Maria G.;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsbv, Sergei
P., deceased; Vorontsova. Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G.. adminstrator.
4.379.078. CI. 252-466.00J.
Chistozvonova. Vera G.. adminstrator: See —
Lytkin, Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Polikar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Maria G.;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei
P., deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G., adminstrator,
4,379.078. CI. 252-466.00J.
Chitayat. Anwar, to Anorad Corp. Friction drive for positioning table.
4.378.709. CI. 74-207.000.
Chloe Chimie: See —
Peignier, Michel; and Renault. Claude. 4,378,968, CI. 8-142.000.
Christensen. James H. Bag holder. 4.378.924. CI. 248-101.000.
Chrones, Anthony, to Reliance Products Corporation. Safety closure
latch. 4,378,948, CI. 292-19.000.
Chubb Panorama Limited: See —
Feathers, Leonard J.; and Ely, Peter M., 4,378,795. CI. 128-202.270.
Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Ito. Kiyohiko; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu;
Sakai. Kazushige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru,
4,379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Ciba-Geigy AG: See—
Lienhard, Paul; and Beffa, Fabio. 4.378,970, CI. 8-683.000.
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See —
Boger, Manfred; Burckhardt, Urs; Kristinsson, Haukur; Mattem,
Gunter; and Traber, Walter, 4,379,147, CI. 424-200.000.
Kump, Wilhelm, 4,379,149, CI. 424-244.000.
Rosen, Melvin H., 4,379,162, CI. 424-275.000.
Cincinnati Milacron Inc.: See —
Williams, Mark A., 4,379,063, CI. 252-33.600.
Cipriani, Cipriano; and Boyd, Henry J., to El Paso Polyolefins Com-
pany. Stretch wrap film composition. 4,379,197, CI. 428-220.000.
Citti, James: See —
Scherwitz, Karen; and Citti, James, 4,379,176, CI. 426-613.000.
Clarion Co., Ltd.: See—
Negishi, Tokuji; Ito, Yukio; and Takagi, Satoshi. 4.378.917, CI.
242-186.000.
Clark, Charles R., to Research Corporation. Anti-convulsant. 4,379,165,
CI. 424-324.000.
Clark, James d'A. Method of producing smooth-uniform streams of
semi-pourable fibrous particles. 4,378,871, CI. 193-2.00R.
Clark, James M.; and Secrist, Duane R., to Great Lakes Carbon Corpo-
ration. Method of manufacturing aluminum in a Hall-Heroult cell.
4,379,033, a. 204-67.000.
Clarke, Theodore R.; and Hosier, John F., to Formica Corporation.
High pressure decorative laminates containing an air-laid web of
fibers and filler and method of producing same. 4,379,194. CI.
428-203.000.
Clausen. Eva: See —
Gratzfeld. Everhard; Clausen. Eva; Reinhardt. Helmut; and Schae-
fer. Hans. 4,378,995, CI. 106-15.050.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PIS
Clinical Data, Inc.: See —
Peterson, Ronald T.; and Stein, Israel M., 4,378,807, CI.
128-677.000.
Clino Foundry Supplies Limited: See —
Yarwood, Dennis, 4,378,996. CI. 106-38.350.
Cloudy ft Britton Inc.: See—
Cloudy, Westley R., 4,378,873, CI. 198-796.000.
Cloudy, Westley R., to Cloudy ft Britton Inc. Continuous linear chain
conveyor system operating throughout multiple tiers with dual
spaced chains moving directly attached multiple adjacent trays which
level to support the conveyed product. 4,378,873, CI. 198-796.000.
Cloverline, Inc.: See —
Leopold!, Norbert; and Heinrich, William P., 4,378,885, CI.
206-540.000.
Coan, Michael H.; and Brockway, William J., to Cutter Laboratories,
Inc. Method of preparing alpha- 1 -proteinase inhibitor. 4,379,087, CI.
260-1 12.00B.
Coggiola, Marcel, to Robot-Coupe, S.A. Citrus press device. 4,378,730,
CI. 99-501.000.
Cohen, Solomon E.: See —
Seach, Barry G.; Muller, Hans; and Cohen, Solomon E., 4,379,1 15,
CI. 264-296.000.
Cokefair, Jon, to Cherry Electrical Products Corporation. Reflective
shield for gas discharge display. 4,378,649, CI. 40-544.000.
Cole, James E.: See—
Fifer, Robert A.; and Cole, James E., 4,379,007, CI. 149-22.000.
Cole, Mark A.: Sec-
United States of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; Feldstein, Cyril; Andrews, Thomas W.; Crawford,
Donald W.; and Cole, Mark A., 4,378,813, CI. 128-774.000.
Coleman, Marilyn A., to Smith, Gerald L.; and Mueller, Jerry K., Jr., a
part interest. Incubation method and process. 4,378,758, CI.
119-35.000.
Colgate-Palmolive Company: See —
Schaar, Charies H., 4,378,800, CI. 604-390.000.
Collin, Gerd: See-
Zander, Maximilian; Blumer, Gerd-Peter; Collin, Gerd; Glaser,
Herbert; and Marrett, Rolf, 4,379,133, CI. 423-445.000.
Collins, Robert F., to Kendall Company, The. Surgical drape.
4,378,794, CI. 128-132.00D.
Colvin, David S. Adjustable socket including apertured sleeve.
4,378,714, CI. 81-128.000.
Comeau, Joseph E., Jr. Apartment solar heating panel. 4,378,786, CI.
126-429.000.
Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique: See —
Gauchon, Jean-Paul, 4,379,082, CI. 252-631.000.
Roche, Michel, 4,379,118, CI. 376-154.000.
Commonwealth of Australia, The: See —
Martin, David T., 4,378,983, CI. 55-357.000.
Compagnie Internationale Pour I'lnformatique CII Honeywell Bull:
See—
Maury, Christian. 4,379,256, CI. 318-561.000.
Conroy, Ernest F., Jr.; Orange, Daniel P.; and Elms, Robert T., to
Westinghouse Electric Corp. Solid-state load protection system
having loss of phase sensing. 4,379,317, CI. 361-85.000.
Consonni, Pietro: See —
Omodei-Sale, Amedeo; Consonni, Pietro; Galliani, Giulio; and
Lemer, Leonard J., 4,379,155, CI. 424-269.000.
Container Corporation of America: See —
Botterman, David L.; and Wolff, Natalie A., 4,378,877, CI.
206-141.000.
Conway, William H.: See-
Tyler, Hugh J.; and Conway, William H., 4,379,287. CI. 340-
365.00C.
Cooper Industries. Inc.: See —
Kosmowski, Wojciech; Eddy, Richard; and O'Neill, Martin,
4,379,308. CI. 358-106.000.
Copco, Inc.: See —
Lebowitz. Sam. 4.378.889. CI. 211-75.000.
Corbellini, Margherita: See —
Balducci, Agostino; Corbellini, MargheriU; and Osellame, Mirko,
4,379,074. CI. 252-429.00B.
Corda, Francesco: See —
Piccardi. Paolo; Corda, Francesco; Gozzo. Franco; Menconi,
Augusto; and Longoni, Angelo, 4,379,163, CI. 424-285.000.
Cormier, Arthur J., Jr. Well drilling float valve. 4,378,818. CI.
137-523.000.
Coming Glass Works: See —
Miller. Stephen B.; and Schultz, Peter C. 4,378,987, CI. 65-3.120.
Powers. Dale R., 4,378,985. CI. 65-3.120.
Tick. Paul A.. 4.379.070. CI. 252-301.160.
Cornish. James R.: See —
ChappeUe, Claude L.. 4,379.043. CI. 204-229.000.
Cortese. Thomas A., Jr. Facial treatment device. 4.378.804. CI.
128-355.000.
Cosman. Eric R. Audio-telemetric pressure sensing systems and meth-
ods. 4.378,809. CI. 128-748.000.
Couderc, Pierre, to Societe Chimique des Charbonnages. Hydrophilic
cotelomers having a terminal sulfonate group and containing acid and
amine functions, and their application in detergent compositions.
4,379.068. CI. 252-99.000.
Courtaulds Limited: See —
Setts, Max W., 4,378,682, CI. 66-64.000.
Cox, Laurence J.: See —
Mountain, David S.; Allnuti, Anthony J.; Baker, Lionel R.; Cox,
Laurence J.; Picot, Alan J.; Wardropper, Peter F.; and Webber,
Julian M., 4,378,701, CI. 73-808.000.
CPG Products Corp.: See—
Pelavin, Joseph Y., 4,378,866, CI. 190-52.000.
Crankshaw, Michael; and Kucheck, Leo, to Label-Aire Inc. Machme
for orienting an article and performing a work operation on the
article. 4,378,665, CI. 53-69.000.
Crawford, Donald W.: See-
United Sutes of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admm-
istration; Feldstein, Cyril; Andrews, Thomas W.; Crawford.
Donald W.; and Cole, Mark A.. 4,378,813, CI. 128-774.000.
Creusot-Loire: See —
Pere, Gerard, 4,379,044, CI. 204-237.000.
Crisman, Thomas L.; Moore, SUnley R.; and Weaver, Harry R., to
Freezesleeves of America, Inc. Method of manufacturing improved
refrigeratable beverage container holder. 4,378,625, CI. 29-450.000.
Croker, Morris C: See—
Hess, W. John; and Croker, Morris C, 4,379,050, CI. 210-151.000.
Crouch, Joseph. Fish skinning apparatus. 4,378,613, CI. 17-62.000.
Crounse, Nathan N., to Steriing Drug Inc. N-Aminoalkylenesul-
fonamido substituted monoazo colorants. 4,379,088, CI. 260-157.000.
Crounse, Nathan N., to Sterling Drug Inc. Polyaminoalkylenesul-
fonamidated disazo colorants. 4,379,089, CI. 260-161.000.
Crown Zellerbach Corporation: See —
Perrin, Jack L.; Tucker, Council A.; and Gains, Oliver B.,
4,378,912, CI. 242-55.300.
Cruz, Jose C, to Cummins Engine Company, Inc. Electro optic con-
trolled piston ring installing apparatus. 4,379,234, CI. 250-561.000.
Cselt - Centro Studi e Laboratori Telecomunicazioni S.p.A.: See —
Girardi, Guglielmo; and Miroglio, Franco, 4,379,347, CI.
375-94.000.
Cummins Engine Company, Inc.: See —
Cruz, Jose C, 4,379,234, CI. 250-561.000.
Cummins, William T.: See —
Leblanc, Raymond F.; and Cummins, William T., 4,378,749, CI.
1 14-220.000.
Curtiss- Wright Corporation: See—
DeFeo, Angelo; and Hosek, William, 4,378,744, CI. 110-182.500
Cutter Laboratories, Inc.: See—
Coan, Michael H.; and Brockway, William J., 4,379,087, CI. 260-
II2.00B.
Dactek International, Inc.: See —
Meadows, Louis B.; and Diamond, Arthur S., 4,379,178, CI.
427-1.000.
Daenen, Theo E. G.; Van Dijk, Gerardus A. R.; and Stolk, Steven A.,
to U.S. Philips Corporation. Aluminum electroplating solution.
4.379.030. CI. 204-14.00N.
Dahm. Manfred: See —
Schnoring. Hildegard; Dahm, Manfred; and Pampus, Gottfried,
4,379,071, CI. 252-316.000.
Dailey, George F.; Ruffing, Charles R.; and Simmonds, Leonard B., to
Westinghouse Electric Corp. Sutor end turn support system.
4,379,243, CI. 310-260.000.
D' Amelia, Ronald P.: See—
Reggio, Richard A.; D' Amelia, Ronald P.; and Friello, Dominick
R., 4,379,169, CI. 426-3.000.
Damen, Johannes P. M.; and Berben, Theodorus J., to U.S. Philips
Corporation. Method of manufacturing single crystals. 4,379,021, CI.
156-616.00R.
Damiano, Paul J.: See —
Kunz, Harold R.; Damiano, Paul J.; and Luczak, Francis J.,
4,379,036, CI. 204-103.000.
Danforth, Stephen C: See—
Glaeser, Andreas M.; Haggerty, John S.; and Danforth, Stephen C,
4,379,020, CI. 156-603.000.
Daniel. Hellmuth; Queck. Robert; Kuxdorf, Bemhard; and Pusche,
Herbert, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Production of phosphorus
pentoxide with utilization of reaction heat. 4,379,131, CI. 423-304.000
Daniel, Steven A., to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Planetary mechanism
having a fluid baffle. 4,378,711, CI. 74-467.000.
Danusso, Ferdinando: See —
Ferniti, Paolo; Danusso, Ferdinando; Tanzi, Maria C; and Quadro,
Giuseppe, 4,379,091, CI. 548-472.000.
Dau Card Corporation: See —
Polad, Michael D.; Gerlach, Leroy E.; Gabel, Edward R.; Schmidt,
Robert H.; and Heiller, Glenn H., 4,378,733, CI. 101-18.000.
Daviduk, Nicholas; and Haddad, James H., to Mobil Oil Corporation.
Fluid catalyst conversion of alcohols and oxygenates to hydrocar-
bons. 4,379,123, CI. 422-142.000.
Davies, Aulette: See —
Tomlinson, Peter N.; and Davies, Aulette, 4.378.975, CI.
51-309.000.
Dawson, Ray F., to Lancaster Laboratories, Inc. Anticoagulant roden-
ticide with laceration means. 4,379,139, CI. 424-84.000.
Dayco Corporation: See —
Henderson, Dewey D., 4,379,011, CI. 156-140.000.
Pinkston. Melvin D.; and Easley, Wayne W., 4.378.622. CI. 29-
148.40D.
Dearman. Timothy C. Pipe aligning tool. 4,378.937. CI. 269-6.000.
Deckert. Andreas: See —
Abermeth. Hubert; Deckert, Andreas; Muller, Helmut; and Wahn-
schaffe, Jurgen, 4,378,765, CI. 123-321.000.
1029 O.G — 10
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
DeFeo. Angelo; and Hosek, William, to Curtiss-Wright Corporation.
Fluidized bed combustor and removable windbox and tube assembly
therefor. 4.378.744, CI. 110-182.500.
Degussa AG: See —
Muller. Karl-Hans; and Barthel. Walter, 4.378,999, CI. 106-28 l.OOR.
Degussa Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Gratzfeld, Everhard; Clausen, Eva; Reinhardt. Helmut; and Schae-
fer. Hans, 4,378,995, CI. 106-15.050.
Dekkers, Nicolaas H.: See—
Bouwhuis, Gijsbertus; De Lang, Hendrik; and Oekkers, Nicolaas
H.. 4.379.230, CI. 250-307.000.
I>e Lang, Hendrik: See —
Bouwhuis, Gijsbertus; De Lang, Hendrik; and Dekkers, Nicolaas
H., 4,379.230. CI. 250-307.000.
DeLeo, Richard V.; and Hagen, Floyd W., to Rosemount Inc. Pressure
sensor for determining airspeed altitude and angle of attack.
4,378.696, CI. 73-180.000.
DeLeo, Richard V.; and Hagen, Floyd W., to Rosemount Inc. Strut
mounted multiple sUtic tube. 4,378,697. CI. 73-182.000.
DcLorean. John Z.. to Delorean Research Limited Partnership. Mount-
ing for a vehicle door. 4.378,658, CI. 49-379.000.
Delorean Research Limited Partnership: See—
DeLorean, John Z., 4,378,658, CI. 49-379.000.
DcMaria, Francesco: See —
Young, Chi C; and DeMaria, Francesco, 4,379,113, CI.
264-206.000.
Derby. Paul A. Birding game method. 4.378,941, CI. 273-273.000.
Dest Corporation: See —
Bailey, David C, 4,379,282, CI. 382-9.000.
Detroit Gasket & Manufacturing Co.: See —
Doerfling. Ralph G., 4,379.103, CI. 264-45.500.
Devic, Michel, to P C U K Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann.
Process for the preparation of anthraquinone and its substituted
derivatives. 4,379,092, CI. 260-369.000.
deVries, Egbert, to Quad Environmental Technologies Corporation.
Method for inhibiting explosions. 4,378.851, CI. 169-45.000.
de Vries, Paul. Portable securing assembly for an electric musical
mstrument. 4,378,881, CI. 206-314.000.
Diamond, Arthur S.: See —
Meadows, Louis B.; and Diamond, Arthur S., 4,379,178, CI.
427-1.000.
Diamond Shamrock Corporation: See —
Rogers, Douglas K., 4,379,034, CI. 204-98.000.
Solomon. Frank, 4,379,077, CI. 252-444.000.
Didier Corporation: See —
Beach, Michael E., 4,378,826, CI. 144-193.00A.
Diehl, Karl-Heinz: See—
Ehlers. Helmut H.; Eggensperger, Heinz; Bucklers, Lothar; Ei-
gener, Ulrich; Diehl, Karl-Heinz; and Weigand, Norbert,
4,379.137, CI. 424-78.000.
Diesel Kiki Co.. Ltd.: See—
Oshizawa. Hidekazu, 4,378,695, CI. 73-119.00A.
Dietrich, Klaus: See —
Guntersdorfer, Max; Kleinschmidt, Peter; and Dietrich, Klaus,
4,379.246, CI. 310-328.000.
Dilday, Joseph T., to Olin Corporation. Process for producing a flow-
able fungicide formulation. 4.379,144. CI. 424-168.000.
Dilo, Richard, to Oskar Dilo Maschinenfabrik KG. Apparatus for
producing velour-needlefelt webs. 4,378,618, CI. 28-110.000.
Dinger, Rudolf J., to Ebauches, S.A. Method of detection of the asym-
metry of piezo-clectric crystal resonators in the form of tuning forks
and resonators for carrying it out. 4,379,244, CI. 310-312.000.
DiSalvo, Gail D.; and Reedy, James D., to Union Carbide Corporation.
Ferrosiloxane thermal stabilizers for diorganopolysiloxanes.
4,379,094, CI. 260-439.00R.
Doerfling, Ralph G.. to Detroit Gasket & Manufacturing Co. Method
of forming a foam resin core structure having a smooth composite
reinforced integral skin. 4,379,103, CI. 264-45.500.
Dol, Christian; and Valet, Jean- Yves, to Societe D' Applications Gene-
rales D'Elect. Powdered magnetic ink printing devices. 4,379,302, CI.
346-74.200.
Dooley, Daniel J. Analog to digital converter. 4,379,285, CI. 340-
347.0AD.
D'Orio, Andrew L.: See —
Hurban, Frederick L., 4,379,254, CI. 315-291.000.
Doryokuro Kakunenryo Kaihatsu Jigyodan: See —
Shibata, Takaaki; and Yamamoto, TeUuhiro, 4,379.009, CI.
156-86000.
Doss, James A., to Structural Concepts Corporation. Data station with
wire and air duct. 4,378,727, CI. 98-33.00R.
Dotolo, Vincent. Pesticides containing D-limonene. 4,379,168, CI.
424-356.000.
Double Eagle Industries, Inc.: See —
Miller, Ray S., 4,378,856, CI. 180-89.140.
Dow, Robert L.: S«e—
Proctor, Paul W ; and Dow, Robert L., 4,378,738, CI. 102-202.700.
Dresen, Werner: See —
Billeriss, Walter; Hosl, Josef; and Dresen, Werner, 4,378,619, CI.
29-25.420.
Driver, Kenneth D.: See —
Mauldin, Donald M.; and Jones, Richard E., Ill, 4,378,793, CI.
128-80.00H.
Dudis, Edward A.: See —
Head, Donald L.; and Dudis, Edward A., 4,378,631, CI. 29-825.000.
Dugan, Dennis G.: See —
Dugan. Thomas J.; and Dugan, Dennis G., 4,378,684, CI.
70-100.000.
Dugan, Thomas J.; and Dugan, Dennis G. Double cylinder sliding door
lock. 4,378,684, CI. 70-100.000.
Duintjer, Engbert J. Apparatus for covering a liquid basin, and roller-
blind type cover for use therein. 4,378,608, CI. 4-500.000.
Dunseith, S. Michael, to Allis-Chalmers Corporation. Method and
apparatus for purging and isolating a filter compartment within a
baghouse installation. 4,378,979, CI. 55-96.000.
Duphar International Research B.V.: See —
van Hes, Roelof; Grosscurt, Amoldus C; and Balk, Wouter,
4,379,157, CI. 424-270.000.
Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company: See—
Cherkofsky, Saul C, 4,379,159, CI. 424-273.00R.
Levitt, George, 4,378,991, CI. 71-93.000.
Moynihan, Robert E., 4,379,116, CI. 264-349.000.
Schenck, Timothy T., 4,379,190, CI. 428-95.000.
Duro-Test, Corporation: See —
Walsh, Peter, 4,379,249, CI. 313-112.000.
Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Jaeschke, Hans; Spielau, Paul; and Ulb, Horst, 4,379.198, CI.
428-288.000.
Dynascan Corporation: See —
Goldstein, Richard, 4,379,245, CI. 310-319.000.
Dzus Fastener Co., Inc.: See —
Gunther, Conrad J., 4,378,615, CI. 24-221. OOA.
Easley, Wayne W.: See —
Pinkston, Melvin D.; and Easley, Wayne W., 4,378,622, CI. 29-
148.40D.
Ebauches, S.A.: See —
Dinger, Rudolf J., 4,379,244, CI. 310-312.000.
Eberly, Paul E., Jr.; Mauldin, Charles H.; and Baird, William C, Jr., to
Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Reforming with multimetallic
caulysts. 4,379,076, CI. 252-439.000.
Eckert, Joachim: See —
Bauer, Gunter; and Eckert, Joachim, 4,379,127, CI. 423-55.000.
Eddy, Richard: See—
Kosmowski, Wojciech; Eddy, Richard; and O'Neill, Martin,
4,379,308, CI. 358-106.000.
Edwards, David V.: See —
Burrough, Philip M.; and Edwards, David V., 4,378,861, CI.
182-48.000.
Eggensperger, Heinz: See —
Ehlers, Helmut H.; Eggensperger, Heinz; Bucklers, Lothar; Ei-
gener, Ulrich; Diehl, Karl-Heinz; and Weigand, Norbert,
4,379,137, CI. 424-78.000.
Ehlers, Helmut H.; Eggensperger, Heinz; Bucklers, Lothar; Eigener,
Ulrich; Diehl, Karl-Heinz; and Weigand, Norbert, to Sterling Drug
Inc. Disinfecting and preserving composition comprising a synergis-
tic combination of a polymeric quaternary ammonium compound and
a 3-isothiazolone compound. 4,379,137, CI. 424-78.000.
Ehrlich, Josef, to Outboard Marine Corporation. Two-stroke internal
combustion engine and method of operation thereof. 4,378,762, CI.
123-73.0PP.
Eigener, Ulrich: See —
Ehlers, Helmut H.; Eggensperger, Heinz; Bucklers, Lothar; Ei-
gener, Ulrich; Diehl, Karl-Heinz; and Weigand, Norbert,
4,379,137. CI. 424-78.000.
Eisele, Hermann: See —
Straubel, Max; Eisele, Hermann; Zimmermann, Klaus-Dieter; and
Vogel, Wilhelm, 4,378,775, CI. 123-458.000.
Eitel, Frederick G., to United Technologies Corporation. Cooled
mirror construction by chemical vapor deposition. 4,378,626, CI.
29-527.200.
El Paso Polyolefins Company: See —
Cipriani, Cipriano; and Boyd, Henry J., 4,379,197, CI. 428-220.000.
Electric Power Research Institute, Inc.: See—
Sutherland, James F.; Furgerson, Donald F.; and Kezunovic,
Mladen, 4,379,294, CI. 340-825.500.
Electronic Concepts, Inc.: See —
Uvene, Bernard, 4,378,620, CI. 29-25.420.
ELFAB Corporation: See—
Ammon, J. Preston; Weaver, Harry R.; and Norman, Richard O.,
4,378,632, CI. 29-845.000.
Elfes. Lee E.: See—
Pouliot, Harvey N.; and Elfes, Lee E., 4,378,708, CI. 74-191.000.
Elms, Robert T.: See—
Conroy, Ernest F., Jr.; Orange, Daniel P.; and Elms, Robert T.,
4,379,317, CI. 361-85.000.
Elsel, Werner, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Device for transmitting
large forces. 4,379,275, CI. 335-216.000.
Ely, Peter M.: See-
Feathers, Leonard J.; and Ely, Peter M., 4,378,795, CI. 128-202.270.
Emerson Electric Co.: See—
Tuggic, Lloyd H.; Loyd, Ronald C; Johnson, Stanley A., Jr.;
Patridge, A. Gary; Ingham, John W.; and Friend, Kenneth J.,
4,378,644, CI. 37-244.000.
EMI Limited: See—
LeMay, Christopher A. G., 4,379,329, CI. 364-414.000.
Empson, Kenneth G. Telescoping uncoupling lever for railroad cars.
4,378,890, CI. 213-166.000.
Endo, Keiji; Toriyama, Tomomi; and Mori, Kisaku, to Sobering Ak-
tiengesellschaft. Herbicidal composition. 4,378,990, CI. 71-90.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
Energy Conversion Devices, Inc.: See —
Cannella. Vincent D.; and Izu, Masatsugu, 4,379,181, CI.
427-39.000.
Engineering & Research Associates, Inc.: See —
Rosen, Evan W., 4,378,854. CI. 177-118.000.
Engstrom, Robert J., to Honeywell Inc. Apparatus for interpreting
Code 39 bar code data. 4,379,224, CI. 235-463.000.
Epper, Wolfgang; and Paschedag, Theodor, to Klockner-Humboidt-
Deutz AG. Solid jacket centrifuge for material exchange between
liquids. 4,378,906, CI. 494-54.000.
Erickson Air Crane Co.: See —
Smith, Harlan B., 4,378,919, CI. 244-118.100.
Eriksson, Sten: See —
Andersson, Nils E.; Eriksson, Sten; and Sinner, Bengt, 4,378,978,
CI. 55-52.000.
Ermer, Wolfgang; Payrhammer, Bemd; Rapp, Heinz; and Bauer, Alois,
to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft. Device for removing impurities
from data carriers. 4,378,610, CI. 15-1.50R.
Ernst Leitz Wetzlar GmbH: See-
Kraft, Winfried; Reichel, Artur; and Holmok, Gunter, 4,378,718.
CI. 83-592.000.
Ernst Roederstein Spezialfabrik Fur Kondensatoren GmbH: See—
Billeriss, Walter; Hosl, Josef; and Dresen, Werner, 4,378,619, CI.
29-25.420.
Erregierre S.p.A.: See —
Bonaldi, Antonio; and Molinari, Egidio, 4,379,093, CI. 260-397.100.
Ersek, Robert A. Septal splint. 4,378,802, CI. 128-346.000.
Erwin, Samuel F. DemounUble solar oven. 4,378,790, CI. 126-451.000.
Eshraghian, Kamran; and Bogner, Robert E., to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion. Vehicle detection systems. 4,379,280, CI. 340-38.00L.
Everett, Geoffrey J.; and Hunt, Christopher J., to TI Crypton Limited.
Engine analyzers. 4,379,263, CI. 324-379.000.
Ex-Cell-O Corporation: See-
Salisbury, Wayne C; and Hodson, Lee, 4,379,100, CI. 264-39.000.
Exxon Research and Engineering Co.: See—
Eberly, Paul E., Jr.; Mauldin, Charles H.; and Baird, William C,
Jr., 4,379,076, CI. 252-439.000.
Oldweiler, Morey E., 4,379,046, CI. 208-54.000.
Fa. Christian Majer K.G., Maschinenfabrik: See —
Schumacher, Wilhelm, 4,378,966, CI. 493-22.000.
Fabricated Metals, Inc.: See —
Kattelmann, Harry R., 4,378,897, CI. 222-56.000.
Fagerlund, Kenneth R.: See —
Runnels, Joe N.; and Fagerlund, Kenneth R., 4,378,920, CI. 244-
135.00R.
Falke, Jurgen; Geiger, Helmut; Grunbein, Wolfgang; and Kandel,
Heinz-Georg, to Behringwerke Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the
preparation of blood plasma fractions. 4,379,083, CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Farge, Daniel: See —
Aloup, Jean-Claude; Bouchaudon, Jean; Farge, Daniel; and James,
Claude, 4,379,154, CI. 424-250.000.
Famia, Khosrow: See —
Petit, Peter J.; and Famia, Khosrow, 4,378,974, CI. 48-197.00R.
Farrar, Frederick G.; and Schaubert, Daniel H., to United States of
America, Army. Selectable-mode microstrip antenna and selectable-
mode microstrip antenna arrays. 4,379,296, CI. 343-700.0MS.
F&rrftT J&ck R. * Sec
Pachmayr, Frank A.; and Farrar, Jack R., 4,378.651, CI. 42-71.00P.
Feagins, Thomas J., Jr.; and Vogt, Calvin O., to Allright Auto Parks,
Inc. Electronic parking meter. 4,379,334, CI. 364-467.000.
Feathers, Leonard J.; and Ely, Peter M., to Chubb Panorama Limited.
Fluid connector assembly. 4,378,795, CI. 128-202.270.
Fedak, Tibor, to Jade Corporation, The. Apparatus for preventing wire
sag in the wire bonding process for producing semiconductor de-
vices. 4.378,902, CI. 228-6.00A.
Feder, Ralph: See —
Baglin, John E. E.; Feder, Ralph; Haller, Ivan; Hammer, William
N.; and Spiller, Eberhard, 4,379,180, CI. 427-38.000.
Feldstein, Cyril: See-
United States of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; Feldstein, Cyril; Andrews, Thomas W.; Crawford,
Donald W.; and Cole, Mark A., 4,378,813, CI. 128-774.000.
Femali, Frank: See —
Kopp, Edward J.; Iwinski, Leon J.; Guzzo, Frank; Speechley,
Ronald F.; and Femali, Frank, 4.378,928, CI. 249-63.000.
Fenton, Donald M., to Union Oil Company of California. Additive for
glycol solvent used in aromatic extraction. 4,379,047, CI. 208-333.000.
Ferguson, Donald C: See-
Smith, Merrill M.; and Ferguson. Donald C. 4,379,185, CI.
427-209.000.
Ferrante, Michael J.: See—
Joscelyn, Edwin; Ferrante, Michael J.; and Saiya, Robert F..
4,379.211, CI. 179-1 lO.OOA.
Ferro Corporation: See —
Wilson, James M., 4,379,319, CI. 361-321.000.
Ferruti, Paolo; Danusso, Ferdinando; Tanzi, Maria C; and Quadro,
Giuseppe, to Ausonia Farmaceutici s.r.l. Esters of ary I propionic acids
endowed with an anti-inflammatory activity. 4,379.091, CI.
548-472.000.
Fifer. Robert A.; and Cole, James E., to United States of America,
Army. Catalysts for nitramine propellants. 4,379,007. CI. 149-22.000.
Finney. Roy P.. to Medical Engineering Corporation. Penile prosthesis.
4.378,792, CI. 128-79.000.
Firestone Tire & Rubber Company, The: See —
Oldack. Richard C, 4.379,095, CI. 260-815.000.
Richard E., 4,379.132, CI
166-362.000.
. 264-56.000.
GmbH Device
CI. 242-74.000.
for securing
CI
CI
CI.
CI.
Fischbeck, Kenneth H., to Xerox Corporation. Ink jet printmg
4,379,300, CI. 346-1.100.
Fischbeck, Kenneth H., to Xerox Corporation Method for mk jet
printing. 4,379,301, CI. 346-1.100.
Fischer, Artur; and Porlein, Gerhard, to Fischer, Artur Arrangement
for mounting a flexible film or the like. 4,378,616, CI 24-245 COR
Fisher, Ernest P., Jr., to Otis Engineenng Corporation Well tool
4,378,839, CI. 166-217.000.
Fitzpatrick, Brian J.; Bhargava, Rameshwar N.; Milch, Alfred E.; and
Tasaico, Pedro, to North American Philips Corporation. Recording
structure for direct read after write recording. 4,379,299, CI
346-1.100.
Flaherty, John J.; and Strauts, Eric J., to Magnaflux Corporation.
Indicating system for use in nondestructive testing. 4,378,700. CI
73-620.000.
Flatland, Torkjell, to Norsk Hydro AS. Method and furnace for incin-
eration of solid and liquid waste. 4,378,745. CI 110-346.000.
Fleischmann, Dale; and Blanton, Marvin E. Solar heating system.
4,378,785. CI. 126^21.000.
Fleischmann, Dale. Solar heating system. 4.378.787. CI 126-430.000
Flush-O-Matic Corp.: See-
Steams. Earl J.. 4.379.052. CI. 210-223.000.
FMC Corporation: See —
Annarelli. Dennis C; and Hall,
423-305.000.
Milberger. Lionel J.. 4.378.848. CI.
Robertson. James A.. 4.379.108, CI
Fohl, Artur, to Repa Feinstanzwerk
against axial displacement. 4,378,913
Fohl, Artur, to Repa Feinstanzwerk GmbH Braking device for safety
belu. 4,378,915, CI. 242-107.200.
Fohl, Artur, to Repa Feinstanzwerk GmbH. Reflection fitting for the
safety belt of restraining system. 4,378,947, CI. 280-808 000
Forbes, Brian K.: See —
Catiller, Robert D.; and Forbes, Bnan K, 4.379,328,
364-200.000.
Ford Aerospace & Communications Corporation; See —
Rubin, Michael D., 4,379,266, CI. 329-104.000.
Formica Corporation: See —
Clarke, Theodore R.; and Hosier, John F.. 4,379,194,
428-203.000.
Hunt, James E. B., 4,379,193, CI. 428-196.000.
Forrest. Robert S.: See —
Chia, Weng-Kwen R.; and Forrest, Robert S., 4,378,853,
175-340.000.
Forrester, James A.: See —
Rootham, Michael W.; and Forrester, Jamev A., 4,379,081,
252-628.000.
Fouquet, Raymond, to Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann. Reactor
made from steel with particularly high resistance to the effects of Oxo
synthesis and method of preparing steel for use in constructing an
Oxo reactor. 4.379.124. CI. 422-240.000.
Fowles. Thomas A.; Slater. Glenn L.; and Winchell.
Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Bottle closure
215-32.000.
Franceschini. Jacqueline: See —
Thominet. Michel; and Franceschini, Jacqueline,
424-274.000.
Francey, Melvin H.: See —
Spanke, Edwin A.; and Francey, Melvin H.,
72-420.000.
Francisco, Robert G.: See —
Chappelle, CUude L., 4,379,043. CI. 204-229 000.
Frank, Arthur M., to Gmmman Aerospace Corporation. Solar heating
system. 4,378,784, CI. 126-418.000
Freezesleeves of America, Inc.: See —
Crisman, Thomas L.; Moore, Stanley R.; and Weaver, Harry R.,
4,378,625, CI. 29-450.000.
Fresch, Henry D.; See —
Brown, Paul R.; and Fresch, Henry D., 4,378,935, CI. 267-64.270.
Frick Company: See —
Garland, Milton W., 4,378,680, CI 62-352.000.
Friedmann, Oswald, to LuK Lamellen und Kupplungsbau GmbH
Clutch disc. 4.378.869. CI. 192-106.200.
Friello, Dominick R.: See —
Reggio. Richard A.; D' Amelia. Ronald P.; and Fnello. Dominick
R., 4.379,169, CI. 426-3.000.
Friend, Kenneth J.; See —
Tuggic, Lloyd H.; Loyd, Ronald C; Johnson. Stanley A., Jr.;
Patridge, A. Gary; Ingham, John W.; and Friend, Kenneth J.,
4.378,644, CI. 37-244.000.
Frolov, Jury S.: See —
Lytkin, Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Pohkar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Maria G.;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei
P., deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G., admmstrator,
4,379,078, CI. 252-466.00J.
Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Ohgami, Masaaki, 4,378.773. CI. 123-440.000.
Fuji Oil Company Limited: See —
Tcranishi, Susumu; Kawasaki. Yoichi; Kauyama, Tsutomu; and
Taniguchi. Hitoshi. 4,379.084. CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Fuji Xerox Co.. Ltd.: See-
Abe. Akira, 4.379.129. CI. 423-210.000.
David A.,
4.378,891,
to
CI.
4,379,161, CI
4,378,688, CI
PI 8
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Fujiki, Toshiaki; Kano, Hikaru; and Nishi, Tom, to Mitsuboshi Belting
Limited. Method of Joining waterproof sheets, and their joint struc-
ture. 4,379,114, CI. 264-248.000.
Fujimoto, Hiroshi; and Miyake, Hideo, to Toyo Boseki Kabushiki
Kaish. Ultraviolet curable resin composition. 4,379,039, CI.
204-159.150.
Fujimoto, Shigeni, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Appa-
ratus for supporting core constituting elements in nuclear reactor
core. 4,379.119, CI. 376-302.000.
Fujitsu Limited: See —
Aoki, Shinichiro, 4,379,206, CI. 178-22.130.
Nakano, Tomio; and Takemae, Yoshihiro, 4,379,342. CI.
365-182.000.
Fujizoki Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See —
Kimura, Tokusuke; and Kurosu, Fumio, 4,379,086, CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Fukushima, Tsutomu; Funikawa, Takeshi; Saito, Shin-ichi; Kobayashi,
Takashi; and Yamada, Takeo, to Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha.
Method and apparatus for measuring height level of melting zone in
blast furnace. 4,378,993, CI. 75-41.000.
Furda, Ivan; and Gengler, Shirley C, to General Mills, Inc. Method for
preparing food products with sweet fructose coatings. 4,379,171, CI.
426-291.000.
Furgerson, Donald F.: See —
Sutherland, James F.; Furgerson, Donald F.; and Kezunovic,
Mladen, 4,379,294, CI. 340-825.500.
Fumess, Richard A.; and Lauder, Robert A., to British Steam Special-
ties Limited, The. Flowmeter. 4,378,703, CI. 73-861.790.
Furukawa, Takeshi: See —
Fukushima, Tsutomu; Furukawa, Takeshi; Saito, Shin-ichi;
Kobayashi, Takashi; and Yamada, Takeo, 4,378,993, CI.
75-41.000.
Gabel. Edward R.: See—
Polad, Michael D.; Gerlach, Leroy E.; Gabel, Edward R.; Schmidt.
Robert H.; and Heiller, Glenn H., 4,378,733, CI. 101-18.000.
Gains, Oliver B.: See—
Perrin, Jack L.; Tucker, Council A.; and Gains, Oliver B.,
4,378.912, CI. 242-55.300.
Galliani, Giulio: See —
Omodei-Sale, Amedeo; Consonni, Pietro; Galliani, Giulio; and
Lemer. Leonard J., 4,379,155. CI. 424-269.000.
Gardner. David M.. to Pennwalt Corporation. Process for the manufac-
ture of alkylaminoalkanol. 4,379.024. CI. 203-6.000.
Garland. Milton W.. to Frick Company. Shell and tube ice-maker with
hot gas defrost. 4.378.680. CI. 62-352.000.
Garrett, Ted L. Animal restraining device. 4,378,759, CI. 119-98.000.
Garrett, William R. Wedge lock sUbilizer. 4,378,852, CI. 175-325.000.
Gascon, Lorenzo. Rake. 4,378,671, CI. 56-400.120.
Gates Rubber Company, The: See—
Heikes, George E., Jr.; and Henderson. Claude L.. 4.379,112, CI.
264-159.000.
Gauchon, Jean-Paul, to Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique. Method of
removing ruthenium contamination from a liquid radioactive effluent.
4,379,082, CI. 252-631.000.
Gebr. Bode & Co. GmbH, Firma: See—
Heinrich, Siegfried; and Horn. Manfred. 4.378.656, CI. 49-28.000.
Gebruder Heyl KG: See—
Meiser. Ewald; and Bauer. Horst. 4.379,057, CI. 210-662.000.
Gebruder Welger GmbH & Co. Kommanditgesellschaft: See—
Simonis, Jurgen; and Sacht, Hans-Otto, 4,378,732. CI. 100-5.000.
Geigcr. Helmut: See —
FaJke. Jurgen; Geiger. Helmut; Grunbein, Wolfgang; and Kandel,
Heinz-Georg. 4.379.083. CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Geisen. Karl: See —
Hitzel. Volker; Weyer. Rudi; Geisen. Karl; and Regitz. Gunter.
4.379.153. CI. 424-256.000.
General Electric Company: See —
Grcskovich. Charles D.; Palm. John A.; and Prochazka, Svante,
4.379.110. CI. 264-65.000.
Halper. Warren. 4.379.196, CI. 428-213.000.
Plemmons, Jerry R.; and Taylor, Carl D., 4,379,321, CI.
362-267.000.
Stocking, George E.; and Ruark, Bruce L., 4,378,679. CI.
62-280.000.
General Instrument Corp.: See —
Mitchell. Muni M.. 4.379,305. CI. 357-23.000.
General Mills, Inc.: See—
Furda, Ivan; and Gengler, Shirley C, 4,379,171, CI. 426-291.000.
Gengler, Shirley C: See—
Furda, Ivan; and Gengler, Shirley C, 4,379,171, CI. 426-291.000.
Gering, Gerhard: See —
Schneider. Franz; Bergmann, Ewald; and Gering. Gerhard.
4,378,717, CI. 83-530.000.
Gerlach, Leroy E.: See—
Polad, Michael D.; Gerlach. Leroy E.; Gabel. Edward R.; Schmidt,
Robert H.; and Heiller, Glenn H., 4,378,733, CI. 101-18.000.
Getrag Getriebe-und Zahnradfabrik GmbH: See—
Knodel, Gunter, 4,378.710. CI. 74-339.000.
GfE Gesellschaft fur ElektromeUllurgie mbH: See—
Bauer. Gunter; and Eckert. Joachim, 4,379,127, CI. 423-55.000.
Gillery. F. Howard, to PPG Industries, Inc. Method of and apparatus
for control of reactive sputtering deposition. 4,379,040, CI. 204-
192.00P.
Gillette Company, The: See —
Behrens, Henry; and Jacobson, Chester F., 4,379,219, CI. 219-
121.0LC.
Jacobson, Chester F., 4,378.633, CI. 3047.000,
Jacobson, Chester F., 4,378,634, CI. 30-47.000.
Gilmore, William J.: See—
Haskell, Hugh H.; and Gilmore, William J., 4,378,713, CI. 74-
501.50R.
Girardi, Guglielmo; and Miroglio, Franco, to Cselt - Centro Studi e
Laboratori Telecomunicazioni S.p.A. Receiver for PCM-encoded
multifrequency dialing signals. 4,379,347, CI. 375-94.000.
Givens, Wyatt W., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Measuring of gamma-ray
energy due to thermal neutron capture of copper and nickel.
4,379,229, CI. 250-270.000.
Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.: See —
Tsvetkov, Nikolai S.; Maleev, Igor I.; Opainich, Irina E.; Lobkov-
skaya, Lidia A.; Bogush, Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya, Alexandra
D.; Onischak, Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.; and Opai-
nich, Mikhail D., 4,379,184, CI. 427-169.000.
Glaeser, Andreas M.; Haggerty, John S.; and Danforth, Stephen C, to
Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Polycrystalline semiconduc-
tor processing. 4,379,020, CI. 156-603.000.
Glaser, Herbert: See —
Zander, Maximilian; Blumer, Gerd-Peter; Collin, Gerd; Glaser,
Herbert; and Marrett, Rolf, 4,379,133, CI. 423-445.000.
Gluz, Jacob; and Poku, Benjamin. Electronic device for playing bingo,
lotto and allied card games. 4,378,940, CI. 273-237.000.
Goft, Manfred; Maurer, Dieter; and Aucktor, Erich, to Lohr & Brom-
kamp GmbH. Driven steering shaft assembly. 4,378,858, CI.
180-259.000.
Gold, Elijah H.: See—
Neustadt, Bernard R.r and Gold, Elijah H., 4,379,166, CI.
424-324.000.
Goldstein, Richard, to Dynascan Corporation. Manually operable
rotary pulse generating apparatus for pulse counting and similar
applications. 4,379,245, CI. 310-319.000.
Good News Unlimited Incorporated: See —
Avery, Alfred J., 4,378,932, CI. 251-61.400.
Goodby, Elia L.: See-
Check, Mathias M.; and Goodby, Elia L., 4,378,670, CI. 56-400.010.
Goodrich, Roger S.: See —
Middleman, Lee M.; and Goodrich, Roger S., 4,379,220, CI.
219-331.000.
Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The: See —
Brown, Paul R.; and Fresch. Henry D., 4,378.935, CI. 267-64.270.
Goshima, Takayuki: See —
Kaneko, Kenkichi; Tanaka. Katsuyuki; Hayashi. Satoru;
Hakamada, Kensaku; Matsumoto, Masakazu; Tagaki, Shinji; and
Goshima, Takayuki, 4,378,721, CI. 84-1.140.
Gozzo, Franco: See —
Piccardi, Paolo; Corda, Francesco; Gozzo, Franco; Menconi,
Augusto; and Longoni, Angelo, 4,379,163, CI. 424-285.000.
Graser, Earl J., to Manville Service Corporation. Crown support car-
rier. 4,378,878, CI. 206-153.000.
Gratzfeld, Everhard; Clausen, Eva; Reinhardt, Helmut; and Schaefer,
Hans, to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft. Iron blue pigment, process for
making the same and use. 4,378,995, CI. 106-15.050.
Graves, Kevin J., to UOP Inc. Vehicle seat mounting devices.
4,378,927, CI. 248-561.000.
Great Lakes Carbon Corporation: See —
Clark, James M.; and Secrist, Duane R.,
Grebe, Kurt R.; and Harper, James M. E.,
Machines Corporation. Fluxless ion
4,379,218, CI. 219-121.0ED.
Green Cross Corporation. The: See —
Hasegawa, Eichi; and Kobayashi,
424-94.000.
Greene & Kellogg, Inc.: See —
McCombs, Norman R., 4,378,982, CI. 55-162.000.
Greenlee, William J.; Harris, Elbert E.; Patchett, Arthur A.;
Thorsett, Eugene D., to Merck & Co., Inc. Substituted phosphona-
mides as antihypertensives. 4,379,146, CI. 424-177.000.
Greger, William J.: See —
Boisvert, Conrad; and Greger, William J., 4,379,293, CI.
340-750.000.
Greskovich, Charles D.; Palm, John A.; and Prochazka, Svante, to
General Electric Company. Sintering of silicon nitride to high den-
sity. 4,379,110, CI. 264-65.000.
Griesdom, Carl P., to Planet Products Corporation. Heat transfer
apparatus. 4,379,018, CI. 156-359.000.
Grifnn, Charles E., to Lingo Manufacturing Company. T-Bracket shelf
assembly. 4,378,925, CI. 248-242.000.
Grimsley, Ernest E. Apparatus for holding valve element and refinish-
ing tool. 4,378,661, CI. 51-125.000.
Gross, Helmut; and Hauck, Hermann, to AB Akerlund & Rausing.
Method and apparatus for sealing cardboard containers. 4,379,008,
CI. 156-69.000.
Grosscurt, Amoldus C: See —
van Hes, Roelof; Grosscurt, Amoldus C; and Balk, Wouter,
4,379,157, CI. 424-270.000.
Grumman Aerospace Corporation: See —
Frank, Arthur M.. 4,378,784, CI. 126-418.000.
Grunbein, Wolfgang: See —
Falke, Jurgen; Geiger, Helmut; Grunbein, Wolfgang; and Kandel,
Heinz-Georg, 4,379,083, CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Gruppo Lepetit S.p.A.: See —
Omodei-Sale, Amedeo; Consonni, Pietro; Galliani, Giulio; and
Umer, Leonard J., 4,379,155, CI. 424-269.000.
GTE Laboratories Incorporated: See —
Peek, S. Christopher, 4,379,289, CI. 340-555.000.
4,379,033, CI. 204-67.000.
to International Business
beam soldering process.
Takashi, 4,379,141, CI.
and
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
GTE Products Corporation: See —
Broadt, David R., 4,379,323, CI. 362-346.000.
Kim, Tai K.; Ritsko, Joseph E.; Maclnnis, Martin B.; and Vogt,
Martin C, 4,379,126, CI. 423-54.000.
Work, Dale E.; and Johnson, Stephen G., 4,379,252, CI.
313-485.000.
Gulf Oil Corporation: See —
Miller, J. Blaine. 4,378,949, CI. 299-2.000.
Gulf & Western Manufacturing Company: See —
Spanke, Edwin A.; and Francey, Melvin H., 4,378,688, CI.
72-420.000.
Gullett, Brad. Lawnmower-edge trimmer. 4,378,668, CI. 56-12.700.
Gumienny, Anthony, to Transmet Corporation. Electromagnetic radia-
tion shielding composites and method of production thereof
4,379,098, CI. 264-24.000.
Guntersdorfer, Max; KJeinschmidt, Peter; and Dietrich, Klaus, to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Polymeric piezoelectric drive element
for writing jets in mosaic ink printing devices. 4,379,246, CI.
310-328.000.
Gunther, Conrad J., to Dzus Fastener Co., Inc. Fastener receptacle
having press-in mounting. 4,378,615, CI. 24-22 l.OOA.
Gustav Wagner Maschinenfabrik: See —
Kaiser, Gerhard; and Spieth, Eric, 4,378,715, CI. 83-113.000.
Guzzo, Frank: See —
Kopp, Edward J.; Iwinski, Leon J.; Guzzo, Frank; Speechley,
Ronald F.; and Femali, Frank, 4,378,928, CI. 249-63.000.
Gyory, Peter: See—
Tomoskozi, Istvan; Gyory, Peter; Kovacs, Gabor; Virag, Sandol;
Kormoczy, Peter; and Stadler, Istvan, 4,379,164, CI. 424-285.000.
H-C Industries, Inc.: See —
Wilde, Sheldon L.; McCandless, Thomas J.; and Saunders, Roberi
M., 4,378.893, CI. 215-246.000.
Haas, David J.; Blionas, Costas; and Muenzen, Joseph P., to North
American Philips Corporation. X-Ray security screening system
having magnification. 4,379,348, CI. 378-57.000.
Hachiga, Takasi; and Taguchi, Yasuo, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd.; and
Toshiba Corporation. Ignition system for internal combustion en-
gines. 4,378,779, CI. 123-644.000.
Haddad, James H.: See—
Daviduk, Nicholas; and Haddad, James H., 4,379,123, CI.
422-142.000.
Haeussinger, Peter: See —
Linde, Gerhard; Haeussinger, Peter; and Schliebener, Claus,
4,378,977, CI. 55-48.000.
Hagen, Floyd W.: See—
DeLeo, Richard V.; and Hagen, Floyd W., 4,378,696, CI.
73-180.000.
DeLeo, Richard V.; and Hagen, Floyd W., 4.378,697, CI.
73-182.000.
Hager, Marshall W.: See-
Mien, Ronald E.; Hudson, Robert J.; and Hager, Marshall W.,
4,378,921, CI. 244-151.00R.
Haggerty, John S.: See—
Glaeser, Andreas M.; Haggerty, John S.; and Danforth, Stephen C,
4,379,020,0 156-603.000.
Hagihara, Tadashi. Filtering scraper cleaning devices. 4,379,056, CI.
210-415.000.
Hahn, Reinhard; and Behrens, Dieter, to Hermann C. Starck Berlin.
Phosphorous-doped alkali tantalum double fluorides. 4,379,128, CI.
423-63.000.
Hakamada, Kensaku: See —
Kaneko, Kenkichi; Tanaka, Katsuyuki; Hayashi, Satoru;
Hakamada, Kensaku; Matsumoto, Masakazu; Tagaki, Shinji; and
Goshima, Takayuki, 4,378,721, CI. 84-1.140.
Hall, Richard E.: See—
Annarelli, Dennis C; and Hall, Richard E., 4,379,132, CI.
423-305.000.
Haller, Ivan: See —
Baglin, John E. E.; Feder, Ralph; Haller, Ivan; Hammer, William
N.; and SpUler, Eberhard, 4,379,180. CI. 427-38.000.
Halliburton Company: See—
Ayers, William M., 4,379,054, CI. 210-242.300.
Barrington, Burchus Q., 4,378,850, CI. 166-373.000.
Halper, Warren, to General Electric Company. Protective coating for
aluminum and method of making. 4,379,196, CI. 428-213.000.
Hamann, Jom. Milking method and machine. 4,378,757, CI. 1 19-14.020.
Hambro International (Structures) Limited: See —
Ratcliffe, Edward L., 4,378,693, Q. 73-105.000.
Hammer, William N.: See —
Baglin, John E. E.; Feder, Ralph; Haller, Ivan; Hammer, William
N.; and SpUler, Eberhard, 4,379,180. CI. 427-38.000.
Hammond, James M.: See —
Long, James, 4,378,980, CI. 55-103.000.
Hang, Kenneth W.: See—
Prabhu, Ashok N.; and Hang, Kenneth W., 4,379,195, CI.
428-209.000.
Hansen, Guenter; Kolbinger, Hans J.; Senninger, Rudolf; and Zeidler,
Georg, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Fluid formulations of oxidation
dyes for mineral oil products, fats and waxes. 4,378,969, CI. 8-521.000.
Hansen, Kai, to Zenith Radio Corporation. Acoustic surface wave
multiplexing filter. 4,379,274, CI. 333-194.000.
Hara, Takeshi: See —
Masuho, Yasuhiko; Umemoto, Naoji; Hara, Takeshi; and Hirai,
Hidemateu, 4,379,145, CI. 424-177.000.
Harder, Ernest H. Changeable surveyors rod. 4,378,638, CI. 33-293.000.
Harfenist, Morton; and Joyner, Charles T., to Burroughs Wellcome Co.
Carbazole compounds and medicinal use thereof 4,379,160, CI.
424-274.000.
Harper, James M. E.: See —
Grebe, Kurt R.; and Harper, James M. E., 4,379,218, CI. 219-
121.0ED.
Harrington Manufacturing Company: See —
Prince, Arvin W.. 4,378,669, CI. 56-27.500.
Harris, Elbert E.: See—
Greenlee, William J.; Harris, Elbert E.; Patchett, Arthur A.; and
Thorsctt, Eugene D., 4,379,146, CI. 424-177.000.
Hart, James E.; and Zahradnik, Robert J., to American Standard Inc
Inshot valve arrangement for railway brake control apparatus em-
ploying combined air reservoir/brake cylinder device. 4,378.950, CI.
303-36.000.
Harter, Werner, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Ignition system for internal
combustion engines. 4,378,778, CI. 123-609.000.
Hasegawa, Eichi; and Kobayashi, Takashi, to Green Cross Corporation,
The. Method for recovering myeloperoxidase and pharmaceutical
composition containing myeloperoxidase as major constituent.
4,379,141, CI. 424-94.000
Hashimoto, Nobuyuki, to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Dual function
thermal valve. 4,378,907, CI. 236-48.00R.
Haskell, Hugh H.; and Gilmore, William J., to Acco Industries Inc.
Self-adjusting cable control device. 4,378,713. CI. 74-501.50R.
Hata, Shun-ichi: See —
Ito. Kiyohiko; Koizumi. Masuo; Murakami. Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono. Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu;
Sakai. Kazushige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi. Shigeru,
4.379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Haub, Donald J.; Brown, Neil T.; Krier, Keith N.; Hawkiru, Raymond
C; and Seim, Howard N., to Tennant Company. Multi-speed drive
with forward/reverse lockout. 4,378,855, CI. 180-65.00R.
Haubner, Georg; Wesemeyer, Jurgen; Meier, Werner; and Schnimpf,
Hans, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Digital ignition control for a mag-
netopowered ignition system of an internal combustion engine.
4,378,769, CI. 123-416.000.
Hauck, Hermann: See —
Gross, Helmut; and Hauck, Hermann, 4,379,008, CI. 156-69.000.
Hawkins, Raymond C: See —
Haub, Donald J.; Brown, Neil T.; Krier, Keith N.; Hawkins, Ray-
mond C; and Seim, Howard N., 4,378,855, CI. 180-65.00R.
Hayakawa, Masatoshi: See —
Makino, Yoshimi; Hayakawa, Masatoshi; Aso, Koichi; Uedaira,
Satoru; Ito, Shigeyasu; and Hotai, Kazuhide, 4,379,004, CI.
148-108.000.
Hayashi, Satoru: See —
Kaneko, Kenkichi; Tanaka, Katsuyuki; Hayashi, Satoru;
Hakamada, Kensaku; Matsumoto, Masakazu; Tagaki, Shinji; and
Goshima, Takayuki, 4,378,721, CI. 84-1.140.
Hayter, Alan B.; and Reagan, Bernard L., Jr., to NCR Corporation.
High speed shift register. 4,379,222, CI. 377-81.000.
Head, Donald L.; and Dudis, Edward A., to Mead Corporation, The.
Method of fabricating a charge plate for an ink jet printing device.
4,378,631, CI. 29-825.000.
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG: See —
Wirz, Amo, 4,378,734. CI. 101-230.000.
Heikes. George E.. Jr.; and Henderson. Claude L.. to Gates Rubber
Company. The. Method for making a reinforced elastomer piston
packing. 4.379.112. CI. 264-159.000.
Heiller, Glenn H.: See—
Polad, Michael D.; Gerlach, Leroy E.; Gabel, Edward R.; Schmidt.
Robert H.; and Heiller, Glenn H., 4,378,733, CI. 101-18.000.
Heilmann, Steven M.; and Moon, John D., to Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company. Multiacrylate cross-linking agents in pres-
sure-sensitive photoadhesives. 4,379,201, CI. 428-345.000.
Heinis, Robert P.: See —
Richard, Schotter D.; and Heinis, Robert P., 4,378,782, CI. 125-
23.O0T.
Heinrich, Siegfried; and Horn, Manfred, to Gebr. Bode A Co. GmbH,
Firma. Anti-clamping device for a vehicle door. 4,378,656, CI.
49-28.000.
Heinrich, William P.: See—
Leopoldi, Norbert; and Heinrich, William P., 4,378,885, CI.
206-540.000.
Heinzl, Joachim; and Kattner, Erich, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
Screen for a mosaic ink recorder. 4,379,304, CI. 346-I40.00R.
Hellmig, Udo-Frank: See—
Klose, Hans-Joachim; and Hellmig, Udo-Frank. 4,379,255, CI.
318-313.000.
Henaff, Robert: See—
Bouchara, Claude; Henaff, Robert; and Jacob, Pierre. 4,379,276, CI.
335-284.000.
Henderson, Claude L.: See —
Heikes, George E., Jr.; and Henderson, Claude L., 4,379,112, CI.
264-159.000.
Henderson, Dewey D., to Dayco Corporation. Method of making
arched V-belU. 4,379,011, CI. 156-140.000.
Henke, Jim A.: See —
Adams, Thomas O.; and Henke, Jim A., 4,378,91 1. Q. 241-187 000
Henley-Cohn, Julian L. Gapped resonant microwave apparatus for
producing hyperthermia therapy of tumors. 4,378,806, CI.
128-504.000.
Hennigan, Dan: See —
Chappelle, Claude L., 4,379,043, CI. 204-229.000.
1029O.G.— 11
1>I
10
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
llerbst. Joseph A.; See —
Weber, Willis W.; and Herbst, Joseph A.. 4,379.134. CI.
423-626.000.
^ennann C. Starck Berlin: See—
Hahn, Reinhard; and Behrens, Dieter, 4,379,128, CI. 423-63.000.
Hertzcnberg, Elliott P.. See —
Sherry, Howard S.; and Hertzcnberg, Elliott P., 4,379,143. CI.
424-154.000.
l(less, W. John; and Croker, Morris C. to United States of America,
Army. Granular Huid biofilter reversing. 4,379.050. CI. 210-151.000.
iflettinga, David H.; Wargel, Robert J.; and Tripp. Richard C, to Kraft,
Inc. Process for manufacture of cheese. 4,379,170, CI. 426-40.000.
Meymanns, Willi, to Jagenberg Werke AG. Adhesive Upe for and
method of joining webs. 4.379,012, CI. 156-157.000.
filidematsu Hirai: See —
Masuho, Yasuhiko; Umemoto, Naoji; Hara, Takeshi; and Hirai,
Hidematsu. 4.379,145, CI. 424-177.000.
llliesinger, Edwin; Keplinger, Klaus; and Nessler, Hermann, to Inko-
mag. Filtering apparatus. 4.379,051. CI. 210-193.000.
^iguchi, Kazuya: See —
Saito. Sadayuki; Moriwaki, Hiroji; and Higuchi, Kazuya, 4,379,002,
CI. 148-9.00R.
Ijliguchi, Shigeharu: See —
Araki. Yasuo; Uno. Hajime; Higuchi, Shigeharu; and Matsumoto,
Seiji, 4,379,183, CI. 427-127.000.
^irabayashi, Yuji: See —
Ninomiya. Masakazu; Suzuki. Atsushi; and Hirabayashi. Yuji,
4,379.333. CI. 364-431.050.
l|iirai, Hidematsu: See —
Masuho, Yasuhiko; Umemoto, Naoji; Hara, Takeshi; and Hirai,
Hidematsu, 4.379,145. CI. 424-177.000.
(lirai, Yasuharu: See —
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; Yamamoto, Shigehiko; Todokoro, Hideo; Ka-
wase, Susumu; and Hirai, Yasuharu. 4,379,250. CI. 313-336.000.
^irata, Yasufumi; Yanagisawa. Isao; Tamura, Toshinari; and Takeda,
Masaaki, to Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Antisecretory
imidazole amidine compounds, composition and method of use.
4.379.158, CI. 424-273.00R.
liirschfield. Dean J.: See —
Szabo, Bcla G.; and Hirschfield. Dean J., 4,378.876, CI. 206-45.340.
Hitachi. Ltd.: See—
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; Yamamoto, Shigehiko; Todokoro, Hideo; Ka-
wase. Susumu; and Hirai, Yasuharu, 4,379,250, CI. 313-336.000.
Nakagaki, Mitsuhiro; Isoo, Osamu; Matsuoka, Shinji; and Yamada,
Takahiro, 4.379,303, CI. 346-75.000.
Shii, Kazuo; and Ohashi, Toshiyuki. 4.379.231. CI. 250-311.000.
Toyooka, Takashi; Sugie. Mamoru; Aoki, Hirokazu; and Yo-
shizawa, Shigcru, 4,379.341, CI. 365-6.000.
Iflitzel. Volker; Weyer, Rudi; Geisen, Karl; and Regitz, Gunter, to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Benzenesulfonyl ureas, and pharmaceu-
tical preparations. 4,379,153. CI. 424-256.000.
jockey. John A.; Shaw, Malcolm A.; Wilby, John L.; and Wilson.
Allan A., to Lever Brothers Company. Fabric softening composition
and a process for preparing it from cationic surfactant and thickener.
4,379.059. CI. 252-8.800.
Hodack, Robert J. Article-hanger and illusion-amusement device.
4,378,926, CI. 248-489.000.
^odgson, David: See —
Carter, Margaret P.; and Hodgson, David, 4,379,270, CI. 331-
l.OOA.
Hodson, Lee: See —
Salisbury, Wayne C; and Hodson. Lee, 4,379,100, CI. 264-39.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Benninger, Siegfried; Reining, Karl; and Krasel, Werner. 4.379,125,
CI. 422-274.000.
Daniel, Hellmuth; Queck. Robert; Kuxdorf, Bemhard; and Pusche,
Herbert, 4,379,131, CI. 423-304.000.
Hitzel, Volker; Weyer, Rudi; Geisen, Karl; and Regitz, Gunter,
4,379,153. CI. 424-256.000.
Korbanka, Helmut; Stetter. Karl-Heinz; Illmann, Gunther; Jacob,
Rolf; Malitschek, Otto; and Strehle, Josef, 4,378.998, CI.
106-270.000.
ioffmann-La Roche Inc.: See —
Trybulski, Eugene J., 4,379.090, CI. 260-239.0BB.
-lolbrook, Stanley E.: See—
Baird, William G., Jr.; Holbrook, Stanley E.; and Piatt, Jeremy A.,
4.379,117, CI. 264-514.000.
-lolmok, Gunter: See —
Kraft, Winfried; Reichel. Artur; and Holmok. Gunter, 4,378.718,
CI. 83-592.000.
Colston, Robert E., to United States of America, Army. Crane assem-
bly. 4.378,933, CI. 254-399.000.
■loltey, Thomas O.; Kelly. Richard P.; Noyes. Steven S.; and Ray-
mond, James C. to Honeywell Information Systems Inc. Communi-
cations subsystem idle link state detector. 4.379.340. CI. 364-900.000.
liolzhauer. Henry J., to Berkley and Company. Inc. Water ski tow
harness float. 4,378,750. CI. 114-249.000.
^oneywell Inc.: See —
Boisvert, Conrad; and Greger, William J., 4,379,293, CI.
340-750.000.
Engstrom! Robert J.. 4,379.224. CI. 235-463.000.
Sanford, Herbert F., 4.378,899. CI. 226-188.000.
Honeywell Information Systems Inc.: See —
Holtey. Thomas O.; Kelly. Richard P.; Noyes. Steven S.; and
Raymond, James C. 4.379.340. CI. 364-900.000.
Hopper. George S., to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Ferroelectric
imaging system. 4,379,232, CI. 250-332.000.
Hore, Donald L. Dynamo electric machines. 4,379,257, CI. 3*8-695.000.
Horn, Manfred: See —
Heinrich, Siegfried; and Horn, Manfred, 4,378,656. CI. 49-28.000.
Homg. Cheng T.; Konian, Richard R.; Schwenker. Robert O.; and
Weider. Armin W.. to International Business Machines Corporation.
Process for fabricating a high performance PNP and NPN structure.
4,378,630, CI. 29-580.000.
Hosek, William: See—
DeFeo, Angelo; and Hosek, William, 4,378,744, CI. 110-182.500.
Hosl, Josef: See —
Billeriss, Walter; Hosl, Josef; and Dresen, Werner, 4,378,619, CI.
29-25.420.
Hosier, John F.: See —
Clarke, Theodore R.; and Hosier, John F., 4,379,194, CI.
428-203.000.
Hosmer, Stephen L.; and Steuer. Paul R., to Caterpillar Tractor Co.
Windows. 4.378.659, CI. 49-504.000.
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; Yamamoto, Shigehiko; Todokoro, Hideo; Kawase,
Susumu; and Hirai, Yasuharu, to Hitachi, Ltd. Field emission cathode
and method of fabricating the same. 4,379,250, CI. 313-336.000.
Hospers, Johannes; and ten Lohuis, Gerhard, to Anza B.V. Method of
manufacturing sealed rope and knotted netting from such rope.
4.378.725. CI. 87-12.000.
Hotai, Kazuhide: See —
Makino, Yoshimi; Hayakawa, Masatoshi; Aso. Koichi; Uedaira,
Satoni; Ito, Shigeyasu; and Hotai, Kazuhide, 4.379.004, CI.
148-108.000.
Houdaille Industries, Inc.: See —
McLean. Ronald L.. 4,378,865, CI. 188-379.000.
Houston, James L., to Superior Valve Corporation. Slide valve assem-
bly. 4,378,817, CI. 137-315.000.
Hoval Interliz AG: See —
Ospelt, Gustay, 4,378.837. CI. 165-166.000.
Hovel. Harold J.; and Woodall. Jerry M.. to International Business
Machines Corporation. Semiconductor device fabrication. 4,379,005,
CI. 148-187.000.
Hubbard. Larry E.; and Rhorer. Clifford A., to Texas Eastern Scientiflc
Research, Inc. Bearing failure indicator for rotating electric ma-
chines. 4,379,291. CI. 340-682.000.
Hudson, Robert J.: See —
Allen, Ronald E.; Hudson, Robert J.; and Hager, Marshall W.,
4,378,921, CI. 244-151.00R.
Huffman, Ronald E., to KV33 Corporation. Mold for dental models
base. 4,378,929, CI. 249-124.000.
Hughes Aircraft Company: See —
Bleha, William P., Jr.; Wiener- A vnear, Eliezer; and Robusto, Paul
F., 4,378.955, CI. 350-334.000.
Moyer, Norman E., 4,379,343, CI. 365-185.000.
Hunt, Christopher J.: See —
Everett, Geoffrey J.; and Hunt, Christopher J., 4,379,263, CI.
324-379.000.
Hunt, James E. B., to Formica Corporation. High pressure decorative
laminates containing an air-laid web and method of producing same.
4.379,193, CI. 428-196.000.
Hunt, Mark W.: See—
Cengel, John A.; Hunt, Mark W.; Strukl, Joseph S.; and Pappas,
Peter G., 4,379,064, CI. 252-5 1.50A.
Hunter, James B.. to Johnson Matthey Inc. Hot spot butane heater.
4,378,783, CI. 126-25.00B.
Hurban, Frederick L., to D'Orio, Andrew L. Dimmer circuit for fluo-
rescent lamp. 4,379,254, CI. 315-291.000.
lida, Katsuyoshi; Yada, Yoshikuni; and Okazaki. Kathumi, to Toyo
Kogyo Co., Ltd. Internal combustion engine having exhaust gas
recirculation system. 4,378,777, CI. 123-571.000.
Ijichi, Sadayoshi, to Alps Electric Co., Ltd. RF Amplifler having
automatic gate bias switching in response to band selection. 4,379,269,
CI. 330-277.000.
Ikfli IVf 3&&iiosiikc' Sec
Satomi, Seigo; and Ikai, Masanosuke, 4,378,859, CI. 181-224.000.
Ikeura, Kenji, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for
ignition system spark timing control during engine cranking.
4,378,770, CI. 123-424.000.
Illmann, Gunther: See —
Korbanka, Helmut; Stetter, Karl-Heinz; Illmann, Gunther; Jacob,
Rolf; Malitschek, Otto; and Strehle, Josef, 4,378,998, CI.
106-270.000.
Imperial Clevite Inc.: See —
Krotkiewicz, James A.; Kniper, Wayne A.; and Niederer, Otto C,
4,379,031, CI. 2O4-45.00R.
INA Walzlager Schaeffler KG: See—
Rabe, Jurgen, 4,378,930, CI. 249-160.000.
Inaba, Shinichi: See —
Narita, Kiichi; Inaba, Shinichi; Shimizu, Masakata; Okimoto, Keni-
chi; and Kobayashi, Isao, 4.378,994, CI. 75-41.000.
Inanaga, Takuzi: See —
Kamimura, Teturo; KomaUubara, Masahiro; Ando, Shizuo;
Inanaga, Takuzi; and Takahashi, Akira, 4,379,314, CI. 360-96.500.
Indal Corp.: See —
Lee, Michael G., 4,379,312, CI. 360-80.000.
Ingham, John W.: See —
Tuggle, Lloyd H.; Loyd, Ronald C; Johnson, Stanley A., Jr.;
Patridge, A. Gary; Ingham, John W.; and Friend, Kenneth J.,
4,378,644, CI. 37-244.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
Inkomag: See —
Hiesinger, Edwin; Keplinger, Klaus; and Nesslcr, Hermann,
4,379,051, CI. 210-193.000.
Innovative Design Company Pty. Limited: See —
Woinarski, Peter A., 4,378,895, CI. 220-306.000.
Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated: See —
Inoue, Kiyoshi, 4,379,042, CI. 2O4-224.0OM.
Inoue, Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Apparatus
using an axially moving continuous elongated tool. 4,379,042, CI.
204-224.00M.
Inoue, Minoru, to Meisei University. Windmill generator apparatus.
4,379,236, CI. 290-55.000.
Institute of Gas Technology: Sec-
Rush, William F., 4,378,976, CI. 55-15.000.
Integral Hydraulik & Co.: See—
Peiffer, Joachim, 4,378,816, CI. 137-116.000.
International Business Machines Corporation: See —
Baglin, John E. E.; Feder, Ralph; Haller, Ivan; Hammer, William
N.; and Spiller, Eberhard, 4,379,180, CI. 427-38.000.
Grebe, Kurt R.; and Harper, James M. E., 4,379,218, CI. 219-
121.0ED.
Homg, Cheng T.; Konian, Richard R.; Schwenker, Robert O.; and
Weider. Armin W., 4,378.630, CI. 29-580.000.
Hovel, Harold J.; and Woodall. Jerry M., 4,379,005, CI.
148-187.000.
Jambotkar, Chakrapani G., 4,378,627, CI. 29-571.000.
Melcher, Robert L.; Romankiw, Lubomyr T.; and Von Gutfeld,
Robert J., 4,379,022, CI. 156-643.000.
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.: See —
Patel, Raman R.; Pittet, Alan O.; and Muralidhara, Ranya,
4,379.079, CI. 252-522.00R.
Sprecker. Mark A., 4,379,060. CI. 252-8.900.
International Paper Company: See —
McFarland. William M., 4.378,743. CI. 108-51.300.
Isaac. Paul J. Trading game. 4,378,942. CI. 273-278.000.
Isakson. David A. Magnetic pickup for stringed musical instruments.
4.378,722, CI. 84-1.150.
Isbell. Tim D.; and Sauer. Don R.. to National Semiconductor Corpora-
tion. AM Stereo receiver logic. 4.379.208. CI. 179- LOGS.
Ishida, Tokuzi: See—
Yokoyama, Hiroshi; Ishida, Tokuzi; Kikuchi. Kunio; and Zama,
Kazuaki. 4,379,096. CI. 261-23.00A.
Ishigaki, Isao: See —
Machi. Sueo; Ishigaki. Isao; and Sugo, Takanobu, 4,379,200, CI.
428-337.000.
Ishihama, Masao, to Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd. Lubricating system for
internal combustion engine. 4.378.763, CI. 123-196.00R.
Ishii. Shizuo; and Yoneyama. Saburo, to Konishiroku Photo Industry
Co.. Ltd. Sprocket wheel for photographic camera. 4,378.965, CI.
474-161.000.
Ishii. Toru. Spherical fruit assorting instrument. 4.378.887, CI.
209-622.00a
Ishizaki. Goro; and Parker. Harold R.. to University of California, The
Regents of the. Assembly for performing biopsies using a combina-
tion probe-guide. 4.378,810, CI. 128-754.000.
Islip, Peter J.; and Bogunovic, Mirjana V., to Burroughs Wellcome Co.
Heterocyclic chemicals, their preparation and use. 4,379,156, CI.
424-270.000.
Isoo, Osamu: See —
Nakagaki, Mitsuhiro; Isoo, Osamu; Matsuoka, Shinji; and Yamada,
Takahiro, 4.379,303, CI. 346-75.000.
Itkin, David E., to Sun Studs, Inc. Veneer lathe log charger system
having enhanced accuracy and rate of production. 4,378,830, CI.
144-357.000.
Ito, Hiroshi: See —
Kobashi, Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Ito, Hiroshi, 4,378,767,
CI. 123-339.000.
Ito, Kiyohiko; Koizumi. Masuo; Murakami. Yasushi; Akima. Michitaka;
Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba. Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu; Sakai, Kazu-
shige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru, to Chugai Seiyaku
Kabushiki Kaisha. Dibenz[b,f][l,4]oxazepine derivatives, process for
preparing the same, and pharmaceutical compositions comprising the
same. 4,379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Ito, Koji; and Kondo, Akira, to Toyo Keiki Company Limited. Type
font optical character recognition system. 4,379,283, CI. 382-18.(XX).
Ito, Shigeyasu: See —
Makino, Yoshimi; Hayakawa, Masatoshi; Aso, Koichi; Uedaira,
Satoni; Ito, Shigeyasu; and Hotai, Kazuhide, 4,379,004, CI.
148-108.000.
Ito, Yukio: See—
Negishi, Tokuji; Ito, Yukio; and Takagi, Satoshi, 4,378,917, CI.
242-186.000.
Itoh, Hiroshi; aiid Kobashi, Mamoru, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Method of and apparatus for controlling the idling speed
of an engine. 4,378,768, Q. 123-339.000.
ITT Industries, Inc.: See —
Baker, James C, 4,378,954, CI. 350-320.000.
Bush, Eric L.; and Workman, Ernest J., 4.379,186. CI. 427-213.000.
Iwinski, Leon J.: See —
Kopp. Edward J.; Iwinski, Leon J.; Guzzo, Frank; Speechley,
Ronald F.; and Femali, Frank, 4,378,928, CI. 249-63.000.
Izu, Masatsugu: See —
Cannella, Vincent D.; and Izu, Masatsugu, 4,379.181. CI.
427-39.000.
Izuta, Tadao, to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Arrow rest for
archery bow. 4.378.780. CI. 124-24.00R.
Jackson Machine Products: See —
Jeffries. Richard W., 4.378.707, CI. 74-1 17.000.
Jacob. Pierre: See—
Bouchara. Claude; Henaff, Robert; and Jacob. Pierre, 4.379,276, CI.
335-284.000.
Jacob, Rolf See —
Korbanka, Helmut; Stetter, Karl-Heinz; Illmann, Gunther; Jacob,
Rolf; Malitschek, Otto; and Strehle. Josef. 4,378,998, CI
106-270.000.
Jacobson, Chester F., to Gillette Company, The. Razor blade assembly
4.378.633, CI. 30-47.000.
Jacobson, Chester F., to Gillette Company, The. Razor blade assembly.
4.378.634, CI. 30-47.000.
Jacobson, Chester F.: See —
Behrens, Henry; and Jacobson, Chester F., 4,379,219, CI. 219-
121.0LC.
Jade Corporation, The: See —
Fedak, Tibor, 4,378,902, CI. 228-6.00A.
Jaeschke, Hans; Spielau, Paul; and Ulb, Horst, to Dynamit Nobel
Aktiengesellschan. Composite material containing a thermoplastic
synthetic resin layer. 4,379,198, CI. 428-288.000.
Jagenberg Werke AG: See—
Heymanns, Willi. 4.379.012. CI. 156-157.000.
Jambotkar, Chakrapani G., to International Business Machines Corpo-
ration. Self-aligned metal process for field effect transistor integrated
circuits using polycrystalline silicon gate electrodes. 4,378,627, CI.
29-571.000.
James, Claude: See —
Aloup, Jean-Claude; Bouchaudon, Jean; Farge, Daniel; and James,
Claude, 4,379,154, CI. 424-250.000.
James Hardie & Coy, Pty. Limited: See —
Seach, Barry G.; Muller, Hans; and Cohen, Solomon E., 4.379.1 15,
CI. 264-296.000.
Janke. Gilbert J., to Osbom Manufacturing Corporation, The. Foundry
core or mold making machine. 4.378.835. CI. 164-183.000.
Jansen. Johann J., to Stamicarbon. B.V. Float-and-sink separator.
4,379,048, CI. 209-172.500.
Japan Atomic Energy Research Institute: See —
Kaetsu, Isao; and Yoshida, Masaru, 4,379,038, CI. 204-159.120.
Machi, Sueo; Ishigaki, Isao; and Sugo, Takanobu, 4,379,200, CI.
428-337.000.
Wakayama, Naoki; Yamagishi, Hideshi; Tomoda, Toshimasa; and
Tanaka, Hiroji, 4,379,248, CI. 313-93.000.
Jeffries, Richard W., to Jackson Machine Products. Indexing apparatus.
4.378.707. CI. 74-117.000.
Jeno's. Inc.: See —
Carlson. John L.; Parson. Roger F.; and Nicholson, David F.,
4,379,055, CI. 210-400.000.
Jensen Corporation: See —
Allen, William W.; and Lundquist, Alvin G., Jr., 4,378,645, Q.
38-8.000.
Jensen, Marcus M., to Brigham Young University. Turkey rhinotra-
cheitis vaccine. 4,379.140. CI. 424-92.000.
Jinnouchi, Seikyu: See —
Yotsuya, Minoru; Mae, Kiyoshi; Jinnouchi, Seikyu; and Ochiai,
T ,shio, 4,378,967, CI. 8-111.000.
Johnson, Freeman K., to Red River Commodities, Inc. Semi-dwarf
hybrid sunflower seed and plant and method of producing hybrid
seed. 4,378,655. CI. 47-58.000.
Johnson. Jeffrey O.. to BRS. Inc. Sole with skewed cleating arrange-
ment. 4.378.643. CI. 36-129.000.
Johnson Matthey Inc.: See —
Hunter. James B.. 4.378,783, CI. 126-25.00B.
Johnson, Stanley A., Jr.: See —
Tuggle, Lloyd H.; Loyd, Ronald C; Johnson, Stanley A., Jr.;
Patridge, A. Gary; Ingham, John W.; and Friend, Kenneth J.,
4,378,644, CI. 37-244.000.
Johnson, Stephen G.: Sec-
Work, Dale E.; and Johnson, Stephen G., 4,379,252, CI.
313-485.000.
Johnston, Robert J. Projectile and tethered target game apparatus.
4,378,944, CI. 273-393.000.
Joichi, Yoshiro: See —
Yokota. Teppei; and Joichi. Yoshiro. 4,379,286, CI. 340-347.0DD.
Jones, Richard E., Ill: See —
Mauldin, Donald M.; and Jones, Richard E.. Ill, 4,378.793. CI
128-80.00H.
Jongsma. Comclis. to Stamicarbon. B.V. Process for the purification of
benzaldehyde. 4.379.026, CI. 203-31.000.
Jorgensen, Adam A. Piston and combustion chamber with improved
fuel circulation. 4,378,764, CI. 123-307.000.
Joscelyn, Edwin; Ferrante, Michael J.; and Saiya, Robert F., to Tele-
phonics Corporation. Arcuately tensioned piezoelectric diaphragm
microphone. 4,379,211, CI. 179-1 lO.OOA.
Joyner, Charles T.: See —
Harfenist, Morton; and Joyner. Charles T., 4,379,160, CI
424-274.000.
Jungheinrich Untemehmensverwaltung KG: See—
Klose, Hans-Joachim; and Hellmig, Udo-Frank, 4,379,255. CI.
318-313.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Kawai Seisakusho: See—
Kaneko, Kenkichi; Tanaka, Katouyuki; Hayashi, Satoru;
Hakamada, Kensaku; MaUumoto, Masakazu; Tagaki, Shinji; and
Goshima, Takayuki, 4,378,721, CI. 84-1.140.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Kaetsu, Isao; and Yoshida, Masani, to Japan Atomic Energy Research
Institute. Process for preparing a physiologically active substance
controlled release composite composition. 4,379,038, CI. 204-159.120.
Kaiser, Gerhard; and Spieth, Eric, to Gustav Wagner Maschinenfabrik.
Apparatus for keeping open the gap cut by a saw in a work piece.
4.378,715, CI. 83-113.000.
Kamata, Hanio: See —
Minato, Sachie; and Kamata, Hanio, 4,379,292, CI. 340-701.000.
Kamimura, Teturo; Komatsubara, Masahiro; Ando, Shizuo; Inanaga,
Takuzi; and Takahashi, Akira, to Pioneer Electronic Corporation.
Cassette tape player. 4,379,314, CI. 360-96.500.
Kamoshita, Katsuzo: See —
Yoshida, Ryo; Takemoto, Ichiki; Sumida, Seizo; and Kamoshita,
Katsuzo, 4,378.992, CI. 71-120.000.
Kandel, Heinz-Georg: See —
Falke, Jurgen; Geiger, Helmut; Grunbein, Wolfgang; and Kandel,
Heinz-Georg, 4,379,083, CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Kanegae, Hidetoshi; See —
Abo, Toshimi; and Kanegae, Hidetoshi. 4.378.673, CI. 60-39.141.
Kaneko, Kenkichi; Tanaka, Katsuyuki; Hayashi, Satoru; Hakamada,
Kensaku; Matsumoto, Masakazu; Tagaki, Shinji; and Goshima,
Takayuki, to Kabushiki Kaisha Kawai Seisakusho. Pickup apparatus
for an electric string type instrument. 4,378.721, CI. 84-1.140.
Kano, Hikani: See —
Fujiki. Toshiaki; Kano, Hikani; and Nishi, Tom, 4,379,114, CI.
264-248.000.
Kanouse. Richard C: See —
Leliaert, Raymond M.; Kanouse, Richard C; Butler, Bill J.; and
Lindner, Robert N., 4.378.662, CI. 51-432.000.
Kasama, Tsuneo; Saito, Takao; and Wada, Makoto, to Nippon Oil and
Fats Co., Ltd. Hydration-expansive crushing cartridge. 4,378,997, CI.
106-89.000.
Katayama, Shitomi: See —
Senaha, Susumu; Chiba, Tetsuya; Ohno, Akira; and Kauyama,
Shitomi, 4,379.199, CI. 428-332.000.
Katayama, Tsutomu: See —
Teranishi, Susumu; Kawasaki, Yoichi; Katayama, Tsutomu; and
Taniguchi, Hitoshi, 4,379,084, CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Kato, Masaaki, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Fuel injection system for
internal combustion engines. 4,378,774, CI. 123-446.000.
Kattelmann, Harry R., to Fabricated Metals, Inc. Volumetric feeding
apparatus for materials in bulk form. 4,378,897, CI. 222-56.000.
Kattner, Erich: See—
Heinzl, Joachim; and Kattner, Erich, 4,379,304, CI. 346-140.00R.
Katzen, Stanley J.: See —
Rekers, Louis J.; and Katzen, Stanley J., 4,379,075, CI. 252-430.000.
Kawakami, Yuichi: See —
Nishitani, Takao; and Kawakami, Yuichi, 4,379,338, CI.
364-745.000.
Kawamura, Yoshihisa, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Fuel supply system
for a multi-cylinder internal combustion engine. 4,378,761, CI. 123-
52.00M.
Kawasaki Steel Corporation: See—
Saito, Sadayuki; Moriwaki, Hiroji; and Higuchi, Kazuya, 4,379,002,
CI. 148-9.00R.
Kawasaki, Yoichi: See —
Teranishi, Susumu; Kawasaki, Yoichi; KaUyama. Tsutomu; and
Taniguchi. Hitoshi. 4,379,084, CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Kawase, Susumu: See —
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; Yamamoto, Shigehiko; Todokoro, Hideo; Ka-
wase, Susumu; and Hirai, Yasuharu, 4,379,250, CI. 313-336.000.
Keinberger, Franz, to Volkswagenwerk AG. Wind-up device for safety
belts. 4,378,916, CI. 242-107.200.
Kelly, James P., to McGraw-Edison Company. Compound reflector for
luminaire. 4,379,322, CI. 362-300.000.
Kelly, Richard P.: See—
Holtey, Thomas O.; Kelly, Richard P.; Noyes, Steven S.; and
Raymond. James C. 4,379,340, CI. 364-900.000.
Kendall Company, The: See —
Collins, Robert F., 4,378,794. CI. 128-132.0OD.
Kennecott Corporation: See-
Smith, Russell D.; and Tressler, Richard E., 4,379,111, CI.
264-137.000.
Kennedy, Carl S.: See—
Yarham, Oliver L.; Sech, John M.; and Kennedy, Carl S.,
4,379,072. CI. 252-389.00R.
Keplinger. Klaus: See—
Hiesingcr, Edwin; Keplinger. Klaus; and Nessler. Hermann,
4,379,051, CI. 210-193.000.
Kemforschungsanlage Julich GmbH: See—
Labus, Herwig, 4.379,260, CI. 324-99.00D.
Kertschcr, Eberhard. to Maillefer S.A. Method for manufacturing
electric wire having wirc-enamel-type insulation. 4,379.102. CI.
264-40.700.
Ketzler, Paul: See—
a'Brassard. Hans-Joachim; Kloss, Robert; Ketzler, Paul; and Wolz,
Johannes, 4,378,704, CI. 73-862.070.
Kezunovic, Mladen: See —
Sutherland, James F.; Furgerson. Donald F.; and Kezunovic.
Mladen. 4.379.294. CI. 340-825.500.
Kieser, Hermann; and Schur, Norbcrt. to Metabowerke GmbH & Co.
Hedge cutting arrangement. 4.378.637. CI. 30-216.000.
Kikuchi, Kunio: See —
Yokoyama. Hiroshi; Ishida, Tokuzi; Kikuchi, Kunio; and Zana,
Kazuaki. 4,379,096, CI. 261-23.00A.
Killy. Earl J., to Manville Service Corporation. Crown support bever-
age carrier. 4,378,879. CI. 206-158.000.
Kim, Tai K.; Ritsko, Joseph E.; Maclnnis. Martin B.; and Vogt, Martin
C, to GTE Products Corporation. Process for recovering tungsten
values from alkali solutions. 4,379,126, CI. 423-54.000.
Kimberly-Clark Corporation: See —
Wahlquist, Joseph D.; and Shultz, Jay, 4,379,192, CI. 428-156.000.
Kimura, Isami: See —
Sato, Makoto; Kimura, Isami; and Yamaguchi, Azuma, 4,379,148,
CI. 424-232.000.
Kimura, Tokusuke; and Kurosu, Fumio, to Fujizoki Pharmaceutical
Co., Ltd. Method of preparing immunoglobulin suitable for intrave-
nous administration using PEG. 4,379,086, CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Kirkpatrick, Alan D., to Robud Company. Roller apparatus with re-
placement blanket. 4,378,737, CI. 101-415.100.
Kirsch, Kerry F.; Suuffer, Kirk R.; and Tindall, Robert J., to Auto-
Place, Inc. Electronic controller and portable programmer system for
a pneumatically-powered point-to-point robot. 4,379,335, CI.
364-513.000.
Klein, Edward A.; and Schimmel, Morry L., to United Sutes of Amer-
ica, Navy. Primer firing means. 4,378,739, CI. 102-204.000.
Kleinschmidt, Peter: See —
Guntersdorfer. Max; Kleinschmidt, Peter; and Dietrich, Klaus,
4,379,246, CI. 310-328.000.
Klingenberg, Roger E., to Braintree Scientific, Inc. Scalpel blade
remover. 4.378.624, CI. 29-239.000.
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz AG: See—
Epper. Wolfgang; and Paschedag. Theodor. 4.378,906, CI.
494-54.000.
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Abermeth, Hubert; Deckert, Andreas; Muller, Helmut; and Wahn-
schaffe, Jurgen, 4,378,765, CI. 123-321.000.
Klose, Hans- Joachim; and Hellmig, Udo-Frank, to Jungheinrich Unter-
nehmensverwaltung KG. Controller with at least one switch actuat-
able within a predetermined range of motion, in combination with a
set point selector. 4,379,255, CI. 318-313.000.
Klosek, John M.; and Wu, Margaret M., to Mobil Oil Corporation.
Selective hydrogenation of vinyltoluene. 4,379,027, CI. 203-32.000.
Kloss, Robert: See—
a'Brassard, Hans-Joachim; Kloss. Robert; Ketzler, Paul; and Wolz,
Johannes. 4.378.704. CI. 73-862.070.
Knechtel. Wilhelm. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Fixing apparatus.
4.378.752. CI. 118-60.000.
Knodel, Gunter, to Getrag Getriebe-und Zahnradfabrik GmbH. Varia-
ble-speed transmission for motor cars. 4,378,710, CI. 74-339.000.
Knuefelmann. Manfred; Brandner. Burkhard; and Blauhut. Reinhold. to
Atlas Fahrzeugtechnik GmbH. Firma. Circuit for generating a trig-
ger pulse. 4.379.239, CI. 307-268.000.
Kobashi. Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Ito, Hiroshi. to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Idling speed control device of an
internal combustion engine. 4.378.767. CI. 123-339.000.
Kobashi, Mamoru: See —
Itoh, Hiroshi; and Kobashi, Mamoru. 4.378,768. CI. 123-339.000.
Kobayashi, Isao: See —
Narita, Kiichi; Inaba, Shinichi; Shimizu, Masakata; Okimoto, Keni-
chi; and Kobayashi, Isao, 4,378,994, CI. 75-41.000.
Kobayashi, Takashi: See —
Furukawa, Takeshi; Saito, Shin-ichi;
and Yamada, Takeo, 4,378,993, CI.
Kobayashi, Takashi, 4,379,141, CI.
Fukushima. Tsutomu;
Kobayashi. Takashi;
75-41.000.
Hasegawa, Eichi; and
424-94.000.
Kobayasi, Yoshiji: See —
Sakai, Tetsushi; Kobayasi, Yoshiji; Yamamoto. Yousuke; and
Yamauchi. Hironori. 4.379,001. CI. 148-1.500.
Kobe Steel, Ltd.: See—
Narita. Kiichi; Inaba, Shinichi; Shimizu, Masakata; Okimoto, Keni-
chi; and Kobayashi, Isao, 4.378.994. CI. 75-41.000.
Kodama, Yutaka: See —
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima,
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroda, Seietsu; Komatsu, Miwako;
Yasuda, Takashi; and Kodama, Yutaka, 4,379,152, CI.
424-246.000.
Koizumi, Masuo: See —
Ito, Kiyohiko; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu;
Sakai, Kazushige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru,
4,379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Kolbinger, Hans J.: See —
Hansen, Guenter; Kolbinger, Hans J.; Senninger, Rudolf; and
Zeidler, Georg, 4,378,969, CI. 8-521.000.
Koltz, Irving M. Coupon wallet and attachment device. 4,378,831, CI.
150-39.000.
Komatsu, Miwako: See —
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima,
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroda, Seietsu; Komatsu, Miwako;
Yasuda, Takashi; and Kodama, Yutaka, 4,379,152, CI.
424-246.000.
Komatsubara, Masahiro: See —
Kamimura, Teturo; Komatsubara, Masahiro; Ando, Shizuo;
Inanaga, Takuzi; and Takahashi, Akira, 4,379,314, CI. 360-96.500.
Kondo, Akira: See —
Ito, Koji; and Kondo, Akira, 4,379,283, CI. 382-18.000.
Kondo, Takeo: See —
Ochii, Kiyofumi; Masuda, Masami; and Kondo, Takeo, 4,379,346,
CI. 365-222.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
Konian, Richard R.: See—
Homg, Cheng T.; Konian, Richard R.; Schwenker. Robert O.; and
Welder, Armin W., 4,378,630, CI. 29-580.000.
Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishii, Shizuo; and Voneyama, Saburo, 4,378,%5, CI. 474-161 000
Ueno, Kenji; and Ymazaki, Yoshio, 4,378,753, CI. 118-657.000.
Kontes Glass Company: See —
Apothaker, Richard L., 4,379,225, CI. 250-227.000.
Koontz, Carl E.: See—
Ochs, Charles S.; and Koontz, Carl E., 4,378,892, CI. 215-232.000.
Koorevaar, Arie. Method and device for moulding a tire for a wheel
rim. 4,379,104, CI. 264-45.500.
Kopp, Edward J.; Iwinski, Leon J.; Guzzo, Frank; Speechley, Ronald
F.; and Femali, Frank, to Beatrice Foods Company. Molding apDara-
tus. 4,378,928, CI. 249-63.000.
Korbanka, Helmut; Stetter, Karl-Heinz; Illmann, Gunther; Jacob, Rolf;
Malitschek, Otto; and Strehle, Josef, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft!
Process for the preparation of oxidation products of ethylene copoly-
mers, and their use. 4,378,998, CI. 106-270.000.
Kormoczy, Peter: See—
Tomoskozi, Istvan; Gyory, Peter; Kovacs, Gabor; Virag, Sandol;
Kormoczy, Peter; and Stadler, Istvan, 4,379,164, CI. 424-285.000.
Kosmowski, Wojciech; Eddy, Richard; and O'Neill, Martin, to Cooper
Industries, Inc. Apparatus for determining the parameters of figures
on a surface. 4,379,308, CI. 358-106.000.
Koszytorz, Gunther, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Housing for laser
apparatus. 4,379,203, CI. 174-15.00R.
Kovacs, Gabor: See—
Tomoskozi, Istvan; Gyory, Peter; Kovacs, Gabor; Virag, Sandol;
Kormoczy, Peter; and Stadler, Istvan, 4,379,164, CI. 424-285.000.
Kovacs, Paul. Apparatus for and a method of monitoring the build-up of
ice. 4,379,227, CI. 250-23 l.OOR.
Kozuti Kozlekedesi Tudomanyos Kutato Intezet: See—
Bohm, Nandor; Bohm, Janos; and Bohm, Robert, 4,378,694, CI.
73-114.000.
Kraft, Inc.: See—
Hettinga, David H.; Wargel, Robert J.; and Tripp, Richard C,
4,379,170, CI. 426^.000.
Kraft, Winfried; Reichel, Artur; and Holmok, Gunter, to Ernst Leitz
Wetzlar GmbH. Handle for pivotable machine parts. 4.378,718 CI
83-592.000. . , , .
Krampe, Dietrich; Schneider, Hans-Peter; and Zander, Hans-Hermann,
to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. System for bridging brief network
failures. 4,379,325, CI. 363-35.000.
Krane, Jan G., to Siemens Corporation. Read/write head carriage
assembly for a floppy disk drive. 4,379,316, CI. 360-105.000.
Krasel, Werner: See—
Benninger, Siegfried; Reining, Karl; and Krasel, Werner, 4,379,125,
CI. 422-274.000.
Krauss-Maffei Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Taubenmann, Peter. 4,379,122, CI. 422-133.000.
Kretschmer, Frank F.: See-
Lewis, Bernard L.; and Kretschmer, Frank F., 4,379,295, CI. 343-
Krier, Keith N.: See—
Haub, Donald J.; Brown, Neil T.; Krier. Keith N.; Hawkins, Ray-
mond C; and Seim, Howard N., 4,378,855, CI. 180-65.00R.
Knstinsson, Haukur: See—
Boger, Manfred; Burckhardt, Urs; Kristinsson, Haukur; Mattem,
Gunter; and Traber, Walter, 4,379,147, CI. 424-200.000
Krotkiewicz, James A.; Kruper, Wayne A.; and Niederer, Otto C, to
Impenal Clevite Inc. Evaporation driven counterflow rinse system
and method. 4,379,031, CI. 204-45.00R.
Kruglov, Gennady A.: See—
Malkin, Daniel D.; Simbirtsev, Alexei V.; Peredkov, Boris A. and
Kruglov, Gennady A., 4,378,957, CI. 368-300.000.
Kruper, Wayne A.: See—
Krotkiewicz, James A.; Kruper, Wayne A.; and Niederer, Otto C,
4,379,031, CI. 204-45.00R.
Kubota, Masaki, to Nissan Motor Company, Ltd. Automatic noise
eliminating device for an FM receiver. 4,379,207, CI. 179-l.OGJ
Kucheck, Leo: See—
Crankshaw, Michael; and Kucheck, Leo, 4,378,665, CI. 53-69.000.
Kuczynski, Robert A.: See—
Kuczynski, Walter J.; and Kuczynski, Robert A., 4,379,278, CI.
337-91.000.
Kuczynski, Walter J.; and Kuczynski, Robert A. Resetable circuit
breaker. 4,379,278, CI. 337-91.000.
Kugushin, Alexandr A.: See—
Shilov, Vladislav A.; Smimov, Vitaly K.; Pechersky, Viktor S.
Kugushin, Alexandr A.; Bespalov, Vladimir N.; Labetsky, Jury
O.; and Melnikov, Boris M., 4.378,687, CI. 72-366.000.
Kula, John S., Jr.: See—
Rasekhi, Houshang; Nelson, Alfred M.; Kula, John S., Jr.; and
Sudano, John J., 4,378,754, CI. 118-658.000.
Kump, Wilhelm, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Process for introducing
an oxygen-containing functional group into ansamycins. 4,379,149,
Kunststoff-Spritzgubwerk: See—
Sarstedt, Walter, 4,378,812, CI. 128-765.000.
Kunz, Harold R.; Damiano, Paul J.; and Luczak, Francis J., to United
Technologies Corporation. Continuous electrochemical ammonia
scrubber. 4,379,036, CI. 204-103.000.
Kuroda, Seietsu: See—
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima,
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroda, Seietsu; Komatsu, Miwako;
and Kodama, Yutaka, 4,379,152. CI.
Yasuda, Takashi;
424-246.000.
Kurosu, Fumio: See —
Kimura, Tokusuke; and Kurosu, Fumio, 4,379,086. CI. 260-1 12 OOB
Kurtz. Joel. Sailboat keel apparatus. 4,378,748, CI. 1 14-141.000
Kuxdorf, Bemhard: See-
Daniel, Hellmuth; Queck, Robert; Kuxdorf, Bernhard; and Pusche
Herbert, 4,379,131, CI. 423-304.000
KV33 Corporation: See —
HufTman, Ronald E., 4,378,929, CI. 249-124.000
L. Schuler GmbH: See-
Schneider, Franz; Bergmann, Ewald; and Gering, Gerhard.
4.378,717, CI. 83-530.000.
Labcl-Aire Inc.: See—
Crankshaw, Michael; and Kucheck, Leo. 4.378.665, CI 53-69 000
Labetsky, Jury O.: See—
Shilov, Vladislav A.; Smimov, Vitaly K.; Pechersky, Viktor S
Kugushm, Alexandr A.; Bespalov, Vladimir N.; Labetsky, Jury
O.; and Melnikov, Boris M., 4,378,687, CI. 72-366.000.
Labus, Herwig, to Kemforschungsanlage Julich GmbH. Dual-slope
mtegrator. 4,379,260, CI. 324-99.00D.
La Fiandra, Carlo F.; Nelson, Burke E.; and Baker, Douglas F., to
Perkin-Elmer Corporation, The. Apparatus for laser assisted machin-
ing of glass materials. 4,378,989, CI. 65-271.000.
Lakin, Kenneth M. Rotating magnetic field device for detecting cracks
in metal. 4,379,261, CI. 324-240.000.
Lamart, Rene. Wind instrument practice accessory. 4,378,724 CI
84-465.000.
Lamb, Sharon: See —
Tietjcn, Donald; Lamb, Sharon; Shaw, Pern; Cawthron, Duanc
and Shannon, Paul D.. 4,379,327, CI. 364-200.000.
Lancaster Laboratories, Inc.: See—
Dawson, Ray F., 4,379,139, CI. 424-84.000.
Lange, Richard M., to Lubrizol Corporation, The Amino phenols m
combination with ashless ester dispersants as useful additives for fuels
and lubricants. 4,379,065, CI. 252-5 1.50A.
Lassiter, B. Dean, to Burlington Industries, Inc. Ring/traveler system
noise reduction. 4,378,672, CI. 57-122.000.
Lauder, Robert A.: See—
Fumess, Richard A.; and Lauder, Robert A., 4,378,703. CI
73-861.790.
Lavene, Bernard, to Electronic Concepts. Inc. Method of making small
sized wound capacitors. 4.378,620, CI. 29-25.420.
Law, David J. C, to Lucas Industries Limited. Liquid fuel injection
pumpmg apparatus. 4,378,962, CI. 417-462.000.
Lawson, D. W. R.: See—
Beggs. Stanley L.; Riel, Frank J.; and Lawson. D. W. R.. 4.379.191
CI. 428-118.000.
Leblanc, Raymond F.; and Cummins. William T.. to Telcdyne Indus-
tries, Inc. Rotatabic tire for barge bumper. 4,378,749. CI. 1 14-220.000.
Lebowitz. Sam, to Copco, Inc. Spice rack and bracket assembly
4.378,889, CI. 211-75.000.
Lee, Michael G.. to Indal Corp. Control system for audio-visual proiec-
tor. 4,379,312, CI. 360-80.000.
Leggett, Wilbur P. Hydrotherapy jet unit. 4.379,097, CI. 26I-78.00A.
Lehmann, William L., to RCA Corporation. Input selection arrange-
ment for applying different local oscillator signals to a prescaler of a
phase-lock loop tuning system. 4,379,271, CI. 331-49.000.
Lehnhardt, Lutz, to BM-Elektronik Meletzky KG. Electroacoustical
converter. 4.379,213, CI. 179-11 5. 50R.
Leliaert, Raymond M.; Kanouse, Richard C; Butler, Bill J,; and Lind-
ner, Robert N., to Wheelabrator-Freye Inc. Airless centrifugal blast
device. 4,378,662, CI. 51-432.000.
LeMay, Christopher A. G.. to EMI Limited. Radiology. 4,379,329, Q.
Lemmerz-Werke KGaA: See—
Zimmermann, Theo, 4,378,623, CI. 29-159.010.
Lenhardt, Wilfried K., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Broadband phase
shifter. 4,379,264, CI. 328-24.000.
Lenz, Herman N., to Teledync Industries, Inc. Variable geometry
turbine inlet nozzle. 4,378,960, CI. 415-115.000.
Leopoldi, Norbert; and Heinnch, William P., to Cloverline, Inc Pill
box. 4,378,885, CI. 206-540.000.
Lemer, Leonard J.: See —
Omodei-Sale, Amedeo; Consonni, Pietro; Galliani, Giulio and
Lemer, Leonard J., 4,379,155, CI. 424-269.000.
Lester, Robert W. Direct imaging of information using light pipe dis-
plays. 4,378,956, CI. 355-3.00R. e e f »-
Leung, Daniel L.; and Leung, Lai-Wo S. Means for encoding ideo-
graphic characters. 4,379,288, CI. 340-365.00R.
Leung, Lai-Wo S.: See-
Leung. Daniel L.; and Leung, Lai-Wo S.. 4,379,288, CI. 340-
365.00R.
Lever Brothers Company: See-
Hockey, John A.; Shaw, Malcolm A.; Wilby, John L.; and WUson,
Allan A., 4,379,059, CI. 252-8.800.
Rabitsch. Hermann; and Sosath, Helmut A.. 4.379,061, CI.
252-174.180.
Rapisarda, Anthony A.; Romeo, Joseph; and Lopez. Jose A..
4.379,069, CI. 252-135.000.
Levinstein, Hyman J.; Murarka, Shyam P.; and Sinha, Ashok K , to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Cobalt silicide metallization
for semiconductor integrated circuits. 4,378,628, CI. 29-571.000.
Levitan. Ronald, to Accurette (Pty) Ltd. Surgical device. 4,378,81 1. G.
128-757.000.
k 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
^evitt. George, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Herbi-
cidal o-aryl or alkarylsulfonylureas. 4,378,991, CI. 71-93.000.
t^wis, Bernard L.; and Kretschmer, Frank F., to United States of
America, Navy. Low sidelobe pulse compressor. 4,379,295, CI. 343-
17.2PC.
Lichtenstein, Joseph, to Whitman Medical Corporation. Liquid crystal
I infiltration sensing system. 4,378,808, CI. 128-736.000.
(..ienhard, Paul; and EJiefTa, Fabio, to Ciba-Geigy AG. Red monoazo
sulphonic acid dyestuffs for polyamide. 4,378,970, CI. 8-683.000.
^ight, Leon H.; and Maclellan, Gordon E., to National Research
Development Corporation. Shock-absorbing footwear heel.
: 4.378,642, CI. 36-35.00R.
(-ileev, Valerian P.; Onikov, Eduard A.; and Zabotin, Alexandr A.
Apparatus for beating-up weft thread in travelling wave shedding
! looms. 4,378,820, CI. 139-436.000.
^illy, James A., to UOP Inc. Bimetallic well screen use in injection
wells and method of making same. 4,378,840, CI. 166-233.000.
indblad, Hans: See —
Lindblad, Lennart; Lindblad, Karl-Erik; Lindblad, Sven-Olof; and
Lindblad, Hans, 4,378,833, CI. 152-226.000.
indblad, Karl-Erik: See—
Lindblad, Lennart; Lindblad, Karl-Erik; Lindblad, Sven-Olof; and
Lindblad, Hans, 4,378,833, CI. 152-226.000.
1. indblad, Lennart; Lindblaid, Karl-Erik; Lindblad, Sven-Olof; and
Lindblad, Hans. Anti-skid device for vehicles. 4,378,833, CI.
152-226.000.
1 ..indblad, Sven-Olof: See—
Lindblad, Lennart; Lindblad, Karl-Erik; Lindblad, Sven-Olof; and
Lindblad, Hans, 4,378,833, CI. 152-226.000.
-inde Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Linde, Gerhard; Haeussinger, Peter; and Schliebener, Claus,
4.378,977, CI. 55-48.000.
^inde, Gerhard; Haeussinger, Peter; and Schliebener, Claus, to Linde
Aktiengesellschaft. Removal of undesired gaseous components from
hot waste gases. 4.378,977, CI. 55-48.000.
-indgren, Peter B. Motor driven fishing reel. 4,378.652, CI. 43-26.100.
-indley, William T.: See —
Bozler, Carl O.; Alley. Gary D.; Lindley. William T.; and Murphy,
R. Allen, 4,378.629, CI. 29-580.000.
-indner, Robert N.: See —
Leliaert, Raymond M.; Kanouse, Richard C; Butler, Bill J.; and
Lindner, Robert N., 4,378,662, CI. 51-432.000.
i-ingo Manufacturing Company: See —
Grimn, Charles E., 4,378,925. CI. 248-242.000.
-ion Corporation: See —
Sasaki. Shuji; and Yamazaki, Yoji, 4,379,135, CI. 436-536.000.
-itton Industries Products, Inc.: See —
MacDonald, Daniel J., 4,379.242, CI. 310-105.000.
i-iu, Richard T., to Societe D' Assistance Technique pour Produits
Nestle S.A. Separating volatile aromatics from roasted and ground
coffee. 4,379,172, CI. 426-386.000.
I^bkovskaya, Lidia A.: See —
Tsvetkov, Nikolai S.; Afaleev, Igor I.; Opainich, Irina E.; Lobkov-
skaya, Lidia A.; Bogush, Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya, Alexandra
D.; Onischak, Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.; and Opai-
nich. Mikhail D., 4,379.184. CI. 427-169.000.
l-ohr & Bromkamp GmbH: See —
Goft, Manfred; Maurer, Dieter; and Aucktor. Erich, 4,378,858, CI.
180-259.000.
u}ng, James, to Hammond, James M., a part interest. Gas borne particle
filtering apparatus. 4,378,980, CI. 55-103.000.
^ngoni, Angelo: See —
Piccardi, Paolo; Corda, Francesco; Gozzo, Franco; Menconi,
Augusto; and Longoni, Angelo, 4,379,163, CI. 424-285.000.
-oof, Goran; and Skarin, Lars, to Partex Fabriksaktiebolag. Marking
device for electrical wires. 4,378,648, CI. 40-316.000.
-opez, Jose A.: See —
Rapisarda, Anthony A.; Romeo, Joseph; and Lopez, Jose A.,
4,379,069, CI. 252-135.000.
-ott, Donald L.; Schockelt, Guenter G.; and Worrix, Matthew L., to
Siemens-Allis, Inc. Condition indicating device for a puffer type load
break switch. 4.378,751, CI. 116-271.000.
-oyd. Ronald C: See—
Tuggle, Lloyd H.; Loyd, Ronald C; Johnson, Stanley A., Jr.;
Patridge, A. Gary; Ingham, John W.; and Friend, Kenneth J.,
4,378,644, CI. 37-244.000.
-ubrizol Corporation, The: See —
Lange. Richard M., 4,379,065, CI. 252-51. 50A.
-ucas Industries Limited: See —
Baum. Heinz W.. 4.378,863, CI. 188-71.800.
Law. David J. C. 4.378.962, CI. 417-462.000.
-uceme Products, Inc.: See —
Matthews, Benjamin H., 4,379,214, CI. 200-157.000.
l-uczak, Francis J.: See —
Kunz, Harold R.; Damiano. Paul J.; and Luczak, Francis J.,
4,379,036, CI. 204-103.000.
1-uK Lamellen und Kupplungsbau GmbH: See —
Friedmann, Oswald, 4,378,869, CI. 192-106.200.
1-undquist, Alvin G., Jr.: See —
Allen, William W.; and Lundquist, Alvin G., Jr., 4.378,645. CI.
38-8.000.
^unsford, Carl D.; and Chen, Ying-Ho, to A. H. Robins Company, Inc.
l-Aryloxy-4-amino-2-butanols and the pharmaceutical use thereof
4.379,167. CI. 424-330.000.
^ytkin. Viktor P.; Mcnshov. Vladimir N.; Frolov. Jury S.; Polikarpova,
Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Maria G.; Anokhin,
Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei P., deceased;
by Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov, David B.,
deceased; and by Chistozvonova. Vera G.. adminstrator. Process for
producing granulated catalyst for the synthesis of ammonia.
4.379.078. CI. 252-466.00J.
M. Carder Industries, Incorporated: See —
Carder, Mervin L., Sr., 4.378,824, CI. 141-206.000.
M.H.A. Enterprises Ltd.: See —
Thompson, Albert N., 4,378,832, CI. 150-52.00G.
MacDonald. Daniel J., to Litton Industries Products, Inc. Eddy current
coupling having rotating and non-rotating flux paths. 4,379.242, CI.
310-105.000.
Machi, Sueo; Ishigaki, Isao; and Sugo, Takanobu, to Japan Atomic
Energy Research Institute. Novel method of producing ion exchange
membrane. 4,379.200. CI. 428-337.000.
Macho. Helmut, to Aktiengesellschaft Adolph Saurer. Detachable
connection arrangement for a shed forming device of a loom.
4,378,819, CI. 139-88.000.
Maclnnis, Martin B.: See —
Kim. Tai K.; Ritsko, Joseph E.; Maclnnis, Martin B.; and Vogt,
Martin C, 4,379,126, CI. 423-54.000.
Maclellan, Gordon E.: See —
Light, Leon H.; and Maclellan, Gordon E., 4,378,642. CI. 36-
35.00R.
MacPhee, John, to Baldwin Gegenheimer Corporation. Antilinting
device for ink founUins. 4,378,735, CI. 101-363.000.
Mae, Kiyoshi: See —
Yotsuya, Minoru; Mae, Kiyoshi; Jinnouchi, Seikyu; and Ochiai,
Toshio, 4,378,967. CI. 8-111.000.
Maghribi, Walid H.: See—
Varadi. Andrew G.; and Maghribi, Walid H., 4,379,259, CI. 324-
73.0AT.
Magnaflux Corporation: See —
Flaherty, John J.; and Strauts, Eric J., 4,378,700, CI. 73-620.000.
Magnusson, Kjell-Eric: See —
Magnusson, Ulla M.; and Magnusson, Kjell-Eric, 4,378,755, CI.
118-684.000.
Magnusson, Ulla M.; and Magnusson, Kjell-Eric. De-icing and cleaning
system for aircrafts. 4,378,755, CI. 118-684.000.
Maho Werkzeugmaschinenbau Babel & Co.: See —
Babel, Werner, 4,378,621, CI. 29-26.00A.
Maillefer S.A.: See—
Kertscher, Eberhard, 4.379.102. CI. 264-40.700.
Makino, Yoshimi; Hayakawa, Masatoshi; Aso, Koichi; Uedaira, Satoru;
Ito, Shigeyasu: and Hotai, Kazuhide, to Sony Corporation. Method
of manufacturing an amorphous magnetic alloy. 4,379,004, CI.
148-108.000.
Maleev, Igor I.: See —
Tsvetkov, Nikolai S.; Maleev, Igor I.; Opainich, Irina E.; Lobkov-
skaya, Lidia A.; Bogush, Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya, Alexandra
D.; Onischak, Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.; and Opai-
nich, Mikhail D., 4,379,184. CI. 427-169.000.
Malitschek, Otto: See —
Korbanka, Helmut; Stetter, Karl-Heinz; Illmann, Gunther; Jacob,
Rolf; Malitschek. Otto; and Strehle, Josef, 4,378,998, CI.
106-270.000.
Malkin, Daniel D.; Simbirtsev, Alexei V.; Peredkov, Boris A.; and
Kruglov, Gennady A. Reduction gear of electronic wristwatch with
stepping motor and sweep second hand. 4.378,957, CI. 368-300.000.
Mammano, Robert A., to Silicon General, Inc. Latching pulse width
modulation comparator. 4,379.240. CI. 307-356.000.
Manville Service Corporation: See —
Graser. Earl J.. 4.378.878, CI. 206-153.000.
Killy, Earl J., 4,378,879, CI. 206-158.000.
Marrett, Rolf: See-
Zander, Maximilian; Blumer, Gerd-Peter; Collin, Gerd; Glaser,
Herbert; and Marrett. Rolf, 4,379,133, CI. 423-445.000.
Martin, David T., to Commonwealth of Australia, The. Housing for
mounting HEPA filters. 4,378.983. CI. 55-357.000.
Martin, Erwin, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Electro-acoustic trans-
ducer. 4,379,212, CI. 179-1 lO.OOA.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology: See —
Bozler, Carl O.; Alley, Gary D.; Lindley, William T.; and Murphy,
R. Allen, 4,378,629, CI. 29-580.000.
Glaeser. Andreas M.; Haggerty, John S.; and Danforth, Stephen C,
4,379,020, CI. 156-603.000.
Masse, Lucien; Medlin, William L.; and Sexton, James H., to Mobil Oil
Corporation. Amplitude and phase detector in a harmonic oscillator
system. 4,378,698, CI. 73-579.000.
Masuda, Masami: See —
Ochii, Kiyofumi; Masuda, Masami; and Kondo, Takeo, 4,379,346,
CI. 365-222.000.
Masuho. Yasuhiko; Umemoto, Naoji; Hara, Takeshi; and Hirai, Hide-
matsu, to Teijin Limited; and Hidematsu Hirai. Antitumor protein
hybrid and process for the preparation thereof 4,379,145, CI.
424-177.000.
Masuyama, Yoshinari. Process for preparing biscuits containing gluco-
mannan. 4,379.173, CI. 426-549.000.
Matsuda, Yoshio; and Yamaguchi, Yoshiharu, to Yoshida Kogyo K. K.
Transversely stretchable stringer tape for slide fasteners. 4,378,683,
CI. 66-193.000.
Matsumoto, Hiromi: See —
Ogawa, Shigeni; Uehori, Yuji; Matsumoto, Hiromi; and Nakajima,
Koe, 4.378,685, CI. 72-21.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 15
Matsumoto, Masakazu: See —
Kaneko, Kenkichi; Tanaka, Katsuyuki; Hayashi, Satoni;
Hakamada, Kensaku; Matsumoto, Masakazu; Tagaki, Shinji; and
Goshima, Takayuki. 4,378,721. CI. 84-1.140.
Matsumoto, Seiji: See—
Araki, Yasuo; Uno, Hajime; Higuchi, Shigehani; and Matsumoto,
Seiji, 4,379,183, CI. 427-127.000.
Matsuoka, Shinji: See—
Nakagaki, Mitsuhiro; Isoo, Osamu; Matsuoka, Shinji; and Yamada,
Takahiro, 4,379,303. CI. 346-75.000.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Minakuchi, Hiroshi, 4,379,238, CI. 307-243.000.
Terada, Jiro; and Nitta, Tsuneharu, 4,378,691. CI. 73-27.00R.
Mattel, Inc.: See—
Renger. Larry H., 4,379,010, CI. 156-108.000.
Mattem, Gunter: See —
Boger, Manfred; Burckhardt, Urs; Kristinsson, Haukur; Mattem,
Gunter; and Traber, Walter, 4,379,147, CI. 424-200.000.
Matthews, Benjamin H., to Lucerne Products, Inc. Trigger operated
tool handle switch. 4,379,214, CI. 200-157.000.
Matthews Research & Development Corp.: See—
Myer, Robert E., 4,379,253, CI. 315-289.000.
Mattuschka, Werner, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Resonator plate
capable of excitation to thickness shear vibrations. 4,379,247, CI.
310-367.000.
Mauldin, Charles H.: See—
Eberly, Paul E., Jr.; Mauldin, Charles H.; and Baird, William C,
Jr., 4,379,076, CI. 252-439.000.
Mauldin, Donald M^; and Jones, Richard E., Ill, to Driver, Kenneth D.;
and Stills, Melvin L., part interest to each. Removable ankle brace.
4,378,793, CI. 128-80.00H.
Mauldin, Herbert N. Vault caddy. 4,378,958, CI. 414-461.000.
Maurer, Dieter: See—
Goft, Manfred; Maurer, Dieter; and Aucktor, Erich, 4,378,858, CI.
180-259.000.
Maury, Christian, to Compagnie Internationale Pour I'lnformatique CII
Honeywell Bull. Apparatus and method for measuring the speied of a
movable system with respect to a daU carrier. 4,379,256, CI.
318-561.000.
Mazeika, Albert, to Needlepointer. Collapsible work holding structure.
4,378,646, CI. 38-102.000.
McCandless, Thomas J.: See —
Wilde, Sheldon L.; McCandless, Thomas J; and Saunders, Robert
M., 4,378,893, CI. 215-246.000.
McCombs, Norman R.,- to Greene & Kellogg, Inc. Compact oxygen
concentrator. 4,378,982, CI. 55-162.000.
McCoy, Stephen A.; and Bono, James L., to Procter & Gamble Com-
pany, The. Stable dehydrated cocrysUlline amino acid food addi-
tives. 4,379,177, CI. 426-656.000.
McDonald, William S.: Sec-
Ware, Franklyn O.; and McDonald, William S., 4,379,015. CI.
156-205.000.
McDonnell Douglas Corporation: See-
Bender, Gerald M.. 4,379,273, CI. 333-32.000.
McFarland, William M., to International Paper Company. Paperboard
pallet having interlocked runners. 4,378,743, CI. 108-51.300.
McGraw-Edison Company: See —
Kelly, James P., 4,379,322, CI. 362-300.000.
McKelvy, James W.: See-
Miller, Walter E., Jr.; and McKelvy, James W.. 4.378,918, CI.
244-3.110.
McKenney, John. Automatic-release hook for sailboard harness.
4,378,614, CI. 24-201.0TR.
McLean, Ronald L., to Houdaille Industries, Inc. Rubber and viscous/-
rubber torsional dampers and method of making the same. 4,378,865,
CI. 188-379.000.
McMurray, John H.; and Miller, Jule, to Avco Corporation. Brazing
filler metal composition and process. 4,379,121, CI. 420-452.000.
McRae, Edwin C. Vehicle torque converter. 4,378,870, CI. 19i-3.240.
Mead Corporation, The: See —
Head, Donald L.; and Dudis, Edward A., 4,378,631, CI. 29-825.000.
Meadows, Louis B.; and Diamond, Arthur S., to Dactek International,
Inc. Fingerprinting system. 4,379,178, CI. 427-1.000.
Medical Engineering Corporation: See—
Finney, Roy P., 4,378,792, CI. 128-79.000.
Medical Research Associates Ltd. 2: See—
Oosten, Roger L., 4,378,801, CI. 128-303.140.
Medlin, William L.; Mullins, Lynn D.; and Zumwalt, Gary L., to Mobil
Oil Corporation. Sand control method employing special hydraulic
fracturing technique. 4,378,845, CI. 166-297.000.
Medlin, William L.: See—
Masse, Lucien; Medlin, William L.; and Sexton, James H.,
4,378,698, CI. 73-579.000.
Meier, Eugene, to Mettler Instrumente AG. Flat measuring string
construction. 4,378,702, CI. 73-826.000.
Meier, Werner: See—
Haubner, Georg; Wesemeyer, Jurgen; Meier, Werner; and
Schrumpf, Hans, 4.378,769, CI. 123-416.000.
Meisei University: See —
Inoue, Minora, 4,379,236, CI. 290-55.000.
Meiser, Ewald; and Bauer, Horst, to Gebrader Heyl KG. Method for
the cyclic regeneration of water-softening systems and programmed
water-softening system for applying the method. 4.379.057, CI.
210-662.000.
Melcher. Robert L.; Romankiw. Lubomyr T.; and Von Gutfeld, Robert
J., to International Business Machines Corporation. Method for
maskless chemical machining. 4,379,022. CI. 156-643.000.
Melnikov. Boris M.: See—
Shilov. Vladislav A.; Smimov, Vitaly K.; Pechersky. Viktor S.;
Kugushin. Alexandr A.; Bespalov, Vladimir N.; Labetsky. Jury
O.; and Melnikov, Boris M.. 4.378.687. CI. 72-366.000.
Memering. Lcroy J.: See-
Zimmerman. Alfred B.; and Mcmenng. Lcroy J.. 4.379.188, CI.
428-35.000.
Menconi. Augusto: See —
Piccardi. Paolo; Corda. Francesco; Gozzo. Franco; Menconi,
Augusto; and Longoni. Angelo. 4.379.163. CI. 424-285.000.
Menshov, Vladimir N.: See —
Lytkin. Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Polikar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky. Viktor S.; Seljutina. Mana G.;
Anokhin. Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov. Sergei
P., deceased; Vorontsova. Nina F.. administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B.. deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G., adminstrator,
4,379,078. CI. 252-466.00J.
Merck & Co.. Inc.: See—
Greenlee, William J.; Harris, Elbert E.; Patchett. Arthur A.; and
Thorsett, Eugene D., 4.379.146. CI. 424-177.000.
Metabowerke GmbH & Co.: See—
Kieser. Hermann; and Schur. Norbert. 4.378.637, CI. 30-216.000.
Metheisen, Heinrich: See —
Stemmler, Kurt; and Metheisen, Heinrich, 4,379.016. CI.
156-205.000.
Mettler Instrumente AG: See-
Meier. Eugene. 4.378.702. CI. 73-826.000.
Meyer. Paul M., to ACF Industries. Inc. Open loop electronic circuit
for altitude compensation. 4,378.772, CI. 123-438.000.
Middleman. Lee M.; and Goodrich. Roger S.. to Raychem Corpora-
tion. Method of heating liquid. 4.379.220. CI. 219-331.000.
Midland-Ross Corporation: See —
Walker. Peter J.. 4.378.639. CI. 34-12.000.
Mikuni Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Yokoyama, Hiroshi; Ishida, Tokuzi; Kikuchi. Kunio; and Zama,
Kazuaki, 4,379.096. CI. 261-23.00A.
Milberger, Lionel J., to FMC Corporation. Method and apparatus for
controlling subsea well template production systems. 4.378,848. CI.
166-362.000.
Milch, Alfred E.: See—
Fitzpatrick, Brian J.; Bhargava, Rameshwar N.; Milch. Alfred E.;
and Tasaico. Pedro. 4,379.299. CI. 346-1.100.
Milhaud. Alain, to PORGES Societe Anonyme. Endo-trachcal or
tracheotomic tube with shield for anaesthesia. 4.378.796. CI.
128-207.150.
Miller. J. Blaine, to Gulf Oil Corporation. Production of shale oil by
in-situ retorting of oil shale. 4.378.949. CI. 299-2.000.
Miller. James A. Storage device for fishing reels. 4.378.882, CI. 206-
315.00R.
Miller, Jule: See—
McMurray. John H.; and Miller. Jule. 4.379.121, CI. 420-452.000.
Miller, Ray S., to Double Eagle Industries, Inc. Passageway for track
cab and sleeper unit. 4,378.856. CI. 180-89.140.
Miller. Stephen B.; and Schultz, Peter C, to Coming Glass Works. Low
temperature method for making optical fibers. 4.378.987. CI. 65-3. 120.
Miller. Walter E.. Jr.; and McKelvy. James W.. to United Sutes of
America, Army. Quasi-sUbilization for line of sight guided missiles.
4.378.918, CI. 244-3.110.
Minakuchi, Hiroshi, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Inte-
grated signal processing circuit. 4.379.238. CI. 307-243.000.
Minato. Sachie; and Kamata. Harao. to Nissan Motor Company, Lim-
ited. Method and system for displaying colors utilizing tristimulus
values. 4,379.292, CI. 340-701.000.
MinnesoU Mining and Manufacturing Company: See—
Heilmann, Steven M.; and Moon. John D.. 4.379,201.
428-345.000.
Miroglio, Franco: See —
Girardi. Guglielmo; and Miroglio, Franco. 4.379.347.
375-94.000.
Mitchell. Muni M.. to General Instrament Corp. Mesh gate V-MOS
power FET. 4.379.305. CI. 357-23.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Sugimoto. Hidehiko. 4.379,258. CI. 318-805.000.
Wakayama, Naoki; Yamagishi, Hideshi; Tomoda, Toshimasa; and
Tanaka. Hiroji, 4.379.248. CI. 313-93.000.
Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co.. Inc.: See—
Yotsuya, Minora; Mae. Kiyoshi; Jinnouchi. Seikyu; and Ochiai.
Toshio. 4,378,967. CI. 8-111.000.
Mitsuboshi Belting Limited: See—
Fujiki, Toshiaki; Kano, Hikara; and Nishi, Tora. 4.379.114, CI
264-248.000.
Miyake, Hideo: See —
Fujimoto, Hiroshi; and Miyake, Hideo. 4.379.039. CI. 204-159.150.
Miyamoto, Koichi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Reciprocally driving
device. 4,378,706, CI. 74-89.220.
Mobay Chemical Corporation: See—
Taylor. Ronald P.; and Phillips. Barry A.. 4.379.105. CI. 264-45.500.
Mobil Oil Corporation; See-
Allen. Linus S.. 4.379.228. CI. 250-266.000.
Audeh. Costandi A.. 4.379,045. CI 208-9.000.
Daviduk, Nicholas; and Haddad. James H., 4,379,123, CI.
422-142.000.
Givens, Wyatt W., 4,379,229, CI. 250-270.000.
CL
CI.
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Klosek, John M.; and Wu, Margaret M., 4,379,027, CI. 203-32.000.
Lenhardt. Wilfried K., 4,379,264, CI. 328-24.000.
Masse, Lucien; Medlin, William L.; and Sexton, James H.,
4,378,698, CI. 73-579.000.
Medlin, William L.; Mullins, Lynn D.; and Zumwalt, Gary L.,
4,378,845, CI. 166-297.000.
Otto, Bernard, 4,378,675, CI. 60-421.000.
Mobil Solar Energy CorporatTon: See —
Chalmers, Bruce, 4,379,202, CI. 136-256.000.
Mochida, Haruo; and Sasaki, Michiaki, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
Pressure control device with a fluid discharge prevention mechanism.
4.378,815, CI. 137-43.000.
Mochida, Nobuo. Solid stick of powder for cosmetic and toilet use and
a method for preparing thereof. 4,379,136, CI. 424-65.000.
Mode, Duane R., to Champion International Corporation. Collapsible
open side carton. 4,378,904, CI. 229-4 l.OOB.
Modisette, Inc.: See —
Modisette, Jerry. 4,378,681, CI. 62-500.000.
Modisette, Jerry, to Modisette, Inc. Refrigeration system. 4.378.681. CI.
62-500.000.
Modular Industries Ltd.: See —
Carmel, A. Peter, 4,378,862, CI. 182-106.000.
Mohan, Arthur G.; and Rauhut, Michael M., to American Cyanamid
Company. Chemical lighting device. 4,379,320, CI. 362-34.000.
Molinari, Egidio: See —
Bonaldi, Antonio; and Molinari, Egidio, 4,379,093, CI. 260-397.100.
Molz, Theodor, to W. Eckold AG. Core for a pipe that is to be bent.
4,378,689, CI. 72-466.000.
Momonoi, Kaishu: See —
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima,
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroida, Seietsu; Komatsu, Miwako;
Yasuda, Takashi; and Kodama, Yutaka, 4,379,152, CI.
424-246.000.
Monsanto Company: See —
Otstot. Roger S.; and Runkle, Charles J., 4,378,981, CI. 55-158.000.
Montedison, S.p.A.: See —
Piccardi, Paolo; Corda, Francesco; Gozzo, Franco; Menconi,
Augusto; and Longoni, Angelo, 4,379,163, CI. 424-285.000.
Moon, John D.: See —
Heilmann. Steven M.; and Moon. John D., 4,379,201, CI.
428-345.000.
Moore, Stanley R.: See —
Crisman, Thomas L.; Moore, Stanley R.; and Weaver, Harry R.,
4.378,625, CI. 29-450.000.
Mori, Kisaku: See —
Endo, Keiji; Toriyama, Tomomi; and Mori, Kisaku, 4,378,990, CI.
71-90.000.
Morishita Pharmaceutical Co.. Ltd.: See —
Sato. Makoto; Kimura, Isami; and Yamaguchi. Azuma, 4,379,148,
CI. 424-232.000.
Moriwaki, Hiroji: See —
Saito, Sadayuki; Moriwaki, Hiroji; and Higuchi, Kazuya, 4,379,002,
CI. 148-9.00R.
Morris Brothers (Aldershot) Limited: See —
Monis, Leslie J., 4.378.822, CI. 140-92.300.
Morris, Leslie J., to Morris Brothers (Aldershot) Limited. Spiral bind-
ing machine for spirally feeding a spiral binding element. 4,378.822.
CI. 140-92.300.
Mostek Corporation: See —
Young, Ian A., 4,379,267, CI. 330-253.000.
Mosteller, Lawson P., Jr. Light intensity control device and circuit
therefor. 4,379,237, CI. 307-141.000.
Motorola, Inc.: See —
Pumo. Joseph. 4.379.241. CI. 307-481.000.
Tietjen, [X>nald; Lamb, Sharon; Shaw, Pern; Cawthron, Duane;
and Shannon, Paul D., 4,379,327, CI. 364-200.000.
Mountain, David S.; Allnutt, Anthony J.; Baker, Lionel R.; Cox, Lau-
rence J.; Picot, Alan J.; Wardropper, Peter F.; and Webber, Julian
M., to Sira Institute Limited. Apparatus and method for indicating
stress in an object. 4,378,701, CI. 73-808.000.
Moussault, Robert. Manipulation method and device for a foundry.
4,378,836, CI. 164-336.000.
Moycr, Norman E., to Hughes Aircraft Company. Electrically erasable
programmable read-only memory cell having a shared diffusion.
4,379,343, CI. 365-185.000.
Moynihan, Robert E., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Ptocess for the preparation of polyvinylbutyral sheeting and adhesion
control. 4,379,116, CI. 264-349.000.
MPW Tech. Associates: Sec-
Ware, FrankJyn O.; and McDonald, William S., 4,379,015, CI.
156-205.000.
Mueller, Jerry K., Jr.: See —
Coleman, Marilyn A.. 4.378.758. CI. 119-35.000.
Muenzen. Joseph P.: See —
Haas, David J.; Blionas, Costas; and Muenzen, Joseph P., 4,379,348,
CI. 378-57.000.
Muggli, Jurg; and Pfister, Gustav, to Cerberus AG. Alarm device with
a condition sensor element. 4,379,290, CI. 340-629.000.
Muller, Hans: See —
Seach, Barry G.; Muller, Hans; and Cohen, Solomon E., 4,379,1 15,
CI. 264-296.000.
Muller, Helmut: See—
Abenneth, Hubert; Deckert, Andreas; Muller, Helmut; and Wahn-
schafTe, Jurgen, 4,378,765, CI. 123-321.000.
Muller, Karl-Hans; and Barthel, Walter, to Degussa AG. Pulverulent
bitumen concentrate and its use. 4,378,999, CI. 106-28 l.OOR.
Mullins, Lynn D.: See —
Medlin, William L.; Mullins, Lynn D.; and Zumwalt, Gary L.,
4,378,845, CI. 166-297.000.
Murakami, Yasushi: See — s
Ito, Kiyohiko; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu;
Sakai, Kazushige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru,
4,379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Muralidhara, Ranya: See —
Patel, Raman R.; Pittet, Alan O.; and Muralidhara, Ranya,
4,379,079, CI. 252-522.00R.
Murarka, Shyam P.: See —
Levinstein, Hyman J.; Murarka, Shyam P.; and Sinha, Ashok K.,
4,378,628, CI. 29-571.000.
Murphy, Alan P., to Procter & Gamble Company, The. Granular
detergent compositions containing film-forming polymers. 4,379,080,
CI. 252-526.000.
Murphy, R. Allen: See —
Bozler, Carl O.; Alley, Gary D.; Lindley, William T.; and Murphy,
R. Allen, 4,378,629, CI. 29-580.000.
Myer, Robert E., to Matthews Research & Development Corp. Orna-
mental lamp and method and apparatus for operation thereof.
4,379,253, CI. 315-289.000.
Nabisco Brands, Inc.: See —
Reggio, Richard A.; D' Amelia, Ronald P.; and Friello, Dominick
R., 4,379,169, CI. 426-3.000.
Naccache, Albert F. Sheet-flow concrete solar collector. 4,378,788, CI.
126-445.000.
Nagahashi, Yasuhiko: See —
Ozawa, Takashi; and Nagahashi, Yasuhiko, 4,379,344, CI.
365-203.000.
Nagahori, Katsuhiro, to SI Handling Systems, Inc. Interfaced conveyor
systems and driverless vehicle for use therein. 4,378,741, CI.
104-18.000.
Nagao, Tsukasa. Traveling wave coupled type optical wave circulators.
4,378,951, CI. 350-96.150.
Nagata, Mitsuru, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Differen-
tial amplifier circuit. 4,379,268, CI. 330-260.000.
Nakada, Akira; Okamoto, Eisaku; Sugiura, Toshio; and Yoshida, Kiyo-
shi, to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronic musical
instrument having musical performance training system. 4,378,720,
CI. 84-1.030.
Nakagaki, Mitsuhiro; Isoo, Osamu; Matsuoka, Shinji; and Yamada,
Takahiro, to Hitachi, Ltd. Ink-jet recording head apparatus.
4,379,303, CI. 346-75.000.
Nakajima, Koe: See —
Ogawa, Shigeru; Uehori, Yuji; Matsumoto, Hiromi; and Nakajima,
Koe, 4,378,685, CI. 72-21.000.
Nakamichi Corporation: See —
Ohkawara, Takashi, 4,379,311, CI. 360-66.000.
Nakano, Tomio; and Takemae, Yoshihiro, to Fujitsu Limited. Semicon-
ductor dynamic memory device. 4,379,342, CI. 365-182.000.
Naico Chemical Company: See —
Yarham, Oliver L.; Sech, John M.; and Kennedy, Carl S.,
4,379,072, CI. 252-389.00R.
Narita, Kiichi; Inaba, Shinichi; Shimizu, Masakata; Okimoto, Kenichi;
and Kobayashi, Isao, to Kobe Steel, Ltd. Method for estimating
geographical distribution of cohesive zone in blast furnace. 4,378.994,
CI. 75-41.000.
Narita, Ryuho, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronic
timer. 4,379,339, CI. 364-900.000.
Nasiri, Saeed, to National Semiconductor Corporation. Submersible
pressure transducer package. 4,379,279, CI. 338-42.000.
National Distillers &. Chemical Corp.: See —
Zimmerman, Alfred B.; and Memering. Leroy J., 4,379,188, CI.
428-35.000.
National Petro Chemicals Corp.: See —
Rekers, Louis J.; and Katzen, Stanley J., 4.379.075. CI. 252-430.000.
National Research Development Corporation: See —
Light, Leon H.; and Maclellan, Gordon E., 4,378,642, CI. 36-
35.00R.
Wickramasinghe, Hemantha K., 4,378,699, CI. 73-606.000.
National Semiconductor Corporation: See —
Isbell, Tim D.; and Sauer, Don R., 4,379,208, CI. 179-l.OGS.
Nasiri, Saeed, 4,379,279, CI. 338-42.000.
Varadi, Andrew G.; and Maghribi, Walid H., 4,379,259. CI. 324-
73.0AT.
NCR Corporation: See—
Hayter. Alan B.; and Reagan, Bernard L., Jr., 4,379,222, CI.
377-81.000.
Necchi Societa per Azioni: See —
Perlino, SUvano, 4,378,746, CI. 112-104.000.
Needlepointer: See —
Mazeika, Albert, 4,378,646, CI. 38-102.000.
Negishi, Fumio: See —
Ota, Akiho; and Negishi, Fumio. 4,379,099, CI. 264-25.000.
Negishi, Tokuji; Ito, Yukio; and Takagi, Satoshi, to Clarion Co., Ltd.
Tape-end detecting device. 4,378,917, CI. 242-186.000.
Nelson, Alfred M.: See—
Rasekhi, Houshang; Nelson, Alfred M.; Kula, John S., Jr.; and
Sudano, John J., 4,378,754, CI. 118-658.000.
Nelson, Burke E.: See-
La Fiandra, Carlo F.; Nelson, Burke E.; and Baker, Douglas F.,
4,378,989, CI. 65-271.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 17
Nessler, Hermann: See —
Hiesinger, Edwin; Keplinger, Klaus; and Nessler, Hermann.
4,379,051, CI. 210-193.000.
Neustadt, Bernard R.; and Gold, Elijah H., to Schering Corporation.
Arylmethoxy-, arylmethylthio-, heteroarylmethoxy-, and heteroaryl-
methylthio-alkylaminoalcohols. 4,379,166, CI. 424-324.000.
Newberry, Claude C. Movable staging scaffold system for building
construction. 4,378,860, CI. 182-38.000.
Newberry, Meigs W. TumUble for folding game boards. 4,378,943, CI.
273-280.000.
NGK Insulators, Ltd.: See—
Satomi, Seigo; and Ikai, Masanosuke, 4,378,859, CI. 181-224.000.
NHK Spring Co., Ltd.: See—
Senaha, Susumu; Chiba, Tetsuya; Ohno, Akira; and Katayama,
Shitomi, 4,379,199, CI. 428-332.000.
Nichiei Distribution Systems, Inc.: See —
Takei, Isao, 4,378,923, CI. 248-68.00R.
Nicholson, David F.: See-
Carlson, John L.; Parson, Roger F,; and Nicholson, David F.,
4,379,055, CI. 210-400.000.
Niederer, Otto C: See—
Krotkiewicz, James A.; Kruper, Wayne A.; and Niederer, Otto C,
4,379,031, CI. 204-45.00R.
Niles, Paul D.: See—
Nermann, Richard W.; and Niles, Paul D., 4,378,823, CI.
140-139.000.
Nilsson, E. Ingvar: See —
Rausing, Anders R.; and Nilsson, E. Ingvar, 4,379,014, CI.
156-191.000.
Ninehouser, James. Multifunction cleaning and drying device.
4.378,611, CI. 15-353.000.
Ninomiya, Masakazu; Suzuki, Atsushi; and Hirabayashi, Yuji, to Nip-
pondenso Co., Ltd. Method and system for operating a power-pro-
ducing machine at maximum torque under varying operating condi-
tions. 4,379,333, CI. 364-431.050.
Nippon Cable System, Inc.: See —
Yoshifuji, Junnosuke, 4,378,712, CI. 74-501.00R.
Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.: See —
Nishitani, Takao; and Kawakami, Yuichi, 4,379,338, CI.
364-745.000.
Ozawa, Takashi; and Nagahashi, Yasuhiko, 4,379,344, CI.
365-203.000.
Yanase, Tomoo; and Arai, Motohiro, 4,378,986, CI. 65-3.120.
Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Izuta, Tadao, 4,378,780, CI. 124-24.00R.
Nakada, Akira; Okamoto, Eisaku; Sugiura, Toshio; and Yoshida,
Kiyoshi, 4,378,720, CI. 84-1.030.
Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Fukushima, Tsutomu; Furukawa, Takeshi; Saito, Shin-ichi;
Kobayashi, Takashi; and Yamada, Takeo, 4,378,993, CI.
75-41.000.
Takei, Isao, 4,378,923, CI. 248-68.00R.
Nippon Oil and Fats Co., Ltd.: See—
Kasama, Tsuneo; Saito, Takao; and Wada, Makoto, 4,378,997, CI.
106-89.000.
Nippon Steel Corporation: See —
Ogawa, Shigeni; Uehori, Yuji; Matsumoto, Hiromi; and Nakajima,
Koe, 4,378,685, CI. 72-21.000.
Nippon Telegraph &. Telephone Public Corp.: See —
Sakai, Tetsushi; Kobayasi, Yoshiji; Yamamoto, Yousuke; and
Yamauchi, Hironori, 4,379,001, CI. 148-1.500.
Nippondenso Co., Ltd.: See —
Hachiga, Takasi; and Taguchi, Yasuo, 4,378,779, CI. 123-644.000.
Kato, Masaaki, 4,378,774, CI. 123-446.000.
Ninomiya, Masakazu; Suzuki, Atsushi; and Hirabayashi, Yuji,
4,379,333, CI. 364-431.050.
Yamazoe, Hisamitsu; Sogabe, Ichito; Tamaki, Kazuyoshi; and
Yoshida, Matsuju, 4,378,766, CI. 123-339.000.
Nishi, Toru: See —
Fujiki, Toshiaki; Kano, Hikaru; and Nishi, Toru, 4,379,114, CI.
264-248.000.
Nishimori, Takayoshi, to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd. Internal combustion
engine having exhaust gas recirculation system. 4,378,776, CI.
123-571.000.
Nishitani, Takao; and Kawakami, Yuichi, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.
Arithmetic circuit with overflow detection capability. 4,379,338, CI.
364-745.000.
Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.: See —
Abo, Toshimi; and Kanegae, Hidetoshi, 4,378,673, CI. 60-39.141.
Ikeura, Kenji, 4,378,770, CI. 123-424.000.
Ishihama, Masao, 4,378,763, CI. 123-196.00R.
Kawamura, Yoshihisa, 4,378,761, CI. 123-52.00M.
Kubota, Masaki, 4,379,207, CI. 179-1. OGJ.
Minato, Sachie; and Kamata, Haruo, 4,379,292, CI. 340-701.000.
Mochida, Haruo; and Sasaki, Michiaki, 4,378,815, CI. 137-43.000.
Ootsuka, Tetsuo, 4,379,318, CI. 361-104.000.
Umezawa, Hidetsugo, 4,378,821, CI. 139-452.000.
Nitta, Tsuneharu: See —
Terada, Jiro; and Nitta, Tsuneharu, 4,378,691, CI. 73-27.00R.
NL Industries, Inc.: See —
Parrish, David D.; and Barton, John A., 4,378,844, CI. 166-297.000.
Nokami, Junzo: See —
Torii, Sigeni; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Shiroi, Takashi;
Saito, Norio; and Sasaoka, Michio, 4,379,032, CI. 204-59.00R.
Nordson Corporation: See —
Berkmann, Adolf, 4,378,728, CI. 98-115.0SB.
Norman, Richard O.: See —
Ammon, J. Preston; Weaver, Harry R.; and Norman. Richard O.,
4.378,632. CI. 29-845.000.
Nermann, Richard W.; and Niles, Paul D.. to Bendix Corporation, The
Method and apparatus for untwisting and cutting twisted cable
4.378.823, CI. 140-139.000.
Norsk Hydro AS.: See—
Flatland, Torkjell, 4.378,745. CI. 1 10-346.000.
North American Philips Corporation: See—
Fitzpatrick. Brian J.; Bhargava, Rameshwar N.; Milch, Alfred E ;
and Tasaico, Pedro. 4,379,299, CI 346-1 100.
Haas, David J.; Blionas, Costas; and Muenzen, Joseph P., 4.379.348,
CI. 378-57.000.
Noyes, Steven S.: See —
Holtey, Thomas O.; Kelly. Richard P.; Noyes. Steven S.; and
Raymond. James C, 4.379,340. CI. 364-900.000.
O'Biso. Ilda. Metric computer. 4.379.337. CI. 364-715.000.
O'Brien, Bernard. Aerodynamic toy. 4,378,653, CI. 46-74.00D.
Occidental Oil Shale, Inc.: See—
Cha. Chang Y., 4,378.841, CI. 166-261.000.
Ochiai, Toshio: See —
Yotsuya. Minoru; Mae. Kiyoshi; Jinnouchi. Seikyu; and Ochiai.
Toshio, 4,378,967, CI. 8-111.000.
Ochii, Kiyofumi; Masuda, Masami; and Kondo. Takeo. to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Semiconductor memory device
4,379,346, CI. 365-222.000.
Ochs, Charles S.; and Koontz. Carl E., to Anchor Hocking Corpora-
tion. Closure cap with metallic innerseal and sealed package
4.378,892, CI. 215-232.000.
Ogawa, Shigeni; Uehori, Yuji; Matsumoto, Hiromi; and Nakajima,
Koe, to Nippon Steel Corporation. Method of setting axial position of
loosely carried sleeve in a rolling mill. 4,378.685. CI. 72-21 000
Ogden, James D.; and White. Pat M.. to Otis Engineenng Corporation
Pipe wipers and cups therefor. 4,378,838, CI. 166-153.000.
Oger, Rene, to C. Delachaux. Fish-plates for electrically conducting
railway rails. 4,378,909, CI. 238-244.000.
Ohashi, Toshiyuki: See—
Shii, Kazuo; and Ohashi, Toshiyuki. 4,379.231, CI. 250-311.000.
Ohba, Yasuhiro: See —
Ito. Kiyohiko; Koizumi. Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki. Tamotsu;
Sakai, Kazushige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru,
4,379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Ohgami, Masaaki, to Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Control system.
4,378,773, CI. 123-440.000.
Ohkawara, Takashi, to Nakamichi Corporation. Recording bias setting
device for a magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus.
4,379,311, CI. 360-66.000.
Ohno. Akira: See —
Senaha. Susumu; Chiba. Tetsuya; Ohno. Akira; and Kauyama.
Shitomi, 4,379,199, CI. 428-332.000
Oka, Kenji, to Tokico, Ltd. Reciprocating device. 4,378,705, CI.
74-37.000.
Okamoto. Eisaku: See—
Nakada. Akira; Okamoto. Eisaku; Sugiura, Toshio; and Yoshida,
Kiyoshi, 4,378,720, CI. 84-1.030.
Okazaki, Kathumi: See —
lida, Katsuyoshi; Yada, Yoshikuni; and Okazaki. Kathumi.
4.378.777, CI. 123-571.000.
Okimoto, Kenichi: See —
Narita, Kiichi; Inaba. Shinichi; Shimizu. Masakata; Okimoto. Keni-
chi; and Kobayashi. Isao. 4.378,994, CI. 75-41.000.
Oldack, Richard C, to Firestone Tire & Rubber Company. The
Method for reducing the mechanical stability of natural rubber latex.
4,379,095, CI. 260-815.000.
Oldweiler, Morey E., to Exxon Research &. Engineering Co. Integrated
two stage coking and steam cracking process and apparatus therefor
4,379,046, CI. 208-54.000.
Olin Corporation: See —
Dilday, Joseph T., 4,379,144. CI. 424-168.000.
Yeager. Howard L., 4.379,029, CI. 204- LOOT.
Omodei-Sale, Amedeo; Consonni, Pietro; Galliani, Giulio; and Lemer,
Leonard J., to Gruppo Lepetit S.p.A. 3,5-Disubstituted-l H- 1,2,4-
triazole derivatives. 4,379,155. CI. 424-269.000.
O'Neill, Martin: See—
Kosmowski, Wojciech; Eddy, Richard; and O'Neill, Martin.
4,379.308, CI. 358-106.000.
Onikov, Eduard A.: See —
Lileev, Valerian P.; Onikov, Eduard A.; and Zabotin. Alexandr A..
4,378,820, CI. 139-436.000.
Onischak, Evgeny I.: See —
Tsvetkov, Nikolai S.; Maleev, Igor I.; Opainich, Irina E.; Lobkov-
skaya, Lidia A.; Bogush, Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya, Alexandra
D.; Onischak, Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.; and Opai-
nich, Mikhail D., 4,379,184, CI. 427-169.000.
Onishi, Masami, to Taiyo Shokai Co., Ltd. Packing machine with
bag-supporting device. 4,378,666, CI. 53-570.000.
Oosten, Roger L.. to Medical Research Associates Ltd. 2. Elcctrosurgi-
cal generator. 4,378,801. CI. 128-303.140.
Ootsuka, Tetsuo, to Nissan Motor Company, Limited. Overcurrent
safety construction for a printed circuit board. 4.379.318, CI.
361-104.000.
Opainich, Irina E.: See —
Tsvetkov, Nikolai S.; Maleev, Igor I.; Opainich, Irina E.; Lobkov-
skaya, Lidia A.; Bogush, Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya, Alexandra
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
D.; Onischak, Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.; and Opai-
nich, Mikhail D.. 4,379.184, CI. 427-169.000.
Qpainich, Mikhail D.: See —
Tsvetkov, Nikolai S.; Maleev, Igor I.; Opainich, Irina E.; Lobkov-
skaya, Lidia A.; Bogush, Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya, Alexandra
j D ; Onischak, Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.; and Opai-
J nich. Mikhail D., 4,379,184, CI. 427-169.000.
cirange, Daniel P.: See —
Conroy, Ernest F., Jr.; Orange, Daniel P.; and Elms, Robert T.,
4.3,79,317, CI. 361-85.000.
Qsbom Manufacturing Corporation. The: See —
Janke. Gilbert J.. 4,378,835, CI. 164-183.000.
psellame. Mirko: See —
Balducci, Agostino; Corbeilini. Margherita; and Oseilame, Mirko.
4.379.074. CI. 252-429.00B.
dshizawa. Hidekazu. to E>iesel Kiki Co., Ltd. Apparatus for measuring
jfuel injection timing. 4,378.695. CI. 73-119.00A.
dskar Dilo Maschinenfabrik KG: See—
! Dilo. Richard. 4,378.618, CI. 28-1 10.000.
Cispelt. Gustay. to Hoval Interliz AG. Heat exchanger. 4,378,837, CI.
J 165-166.000.
dsterholm, Jewell L., to Thomas Jefferson University. Extravascular
I circulation of oxygenated synthetic nutrients to treat tissue hypoxic
J and ischemic disorders. 4,378,797, CI. 604-24.000.
Cita, Akiho; and Negishi, Fumio. to Yashins. Kogyosho Co.. Ltd.
I Method for producing polyester container. 4,379,099, CI. 264-25.000.
Otis Engineering Corporation: See —
I Adams, James B., Jr.. 4,378,931, CI. 251-58.000.
i Fisher. Ernest P., Jr., 4,378,839, CI. 166-217.000.
Ogden. James D.; and White, Pat M., 4,378,838, CI. 166-153.000.
Patel, Dhirajlal C. 4.378.842. CI. 166-278.000.
Patel. Dhirajlal C; and Wheeler. Robert B., 4.378.847. CI.
166-317.000.
Otstot. Roger S.; and Runkle, Charles J., to Monsanto Company. Gas
separation apparatus. 4.378,981, CI. 55-158.000.
Ctsuka Kagaku Yakuhin Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Shiroi. Takashi;
Saito. Norio; and Sasaoka. Michio. 4.379,032, CI. 204-59.00R.
Otto, Bernard, to Mobil Oil Corporation. Hydraulic pump interlock
system. 4.378,675. CI. 60-421.000.
Cttoson. James A. Signpost with means and method for installing and
removing the same. 4.378.650. CI. 40-607.000.
Qutboard Marine Corporation: See —
Ehrlich. Josef. 4,378,762, CI. I23-73.0PP.
!|wens-Illinois, Inc.: See —
Rapp, James E., 4,379.006, CI. 148-189.000.
Izawa, Takashi; and Nagahashi. Yasuhiko. to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd. Precharge circuit. 4.379.344. CI. 365-203.000.
I C U K Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann; See —
Devic, Michel, 4,379,092, CI. 260-369.000.
PlACCAR Inc.: See—
Trautman, Gregory J., 4,378,945, CI. 277-200.000.
P^chmayr, Frank A.; and Farrar. Jack R., to Pachmayr Gun Works.
Inc. Remforced cushioned gun grip. 4,378,651, CI. 42-7 LOOP.
P|achmayr Gun Works, Inc.: See —
Pachmayr, Frank A.; and Farrar, Jack R., 4.378,651. CI. 42-71.00P.
Pfachonik. Horst: See —
Behn. Reinhard; Pachonik, Horst; and Seebacher. Gerhard,
4,379.182. CI. 427-41.000.
Fbcko. Joseph J.; and Bailey. Donald L.. to Packo, Joseph J. Self-seal-
mg refrigerant. 4,379,067, CI. 252-67.000.
PJAL International: See —
Vincent, Richard G.; Sacks, Frank; and Steele, Robert F.,
4,379,298, CI. 343-895.000.
Flalm, John A.: See —
Greskovich, Charles D.; Palm, John A.; and Prochazka, Svante,
4,379,110, CI. 264-65.000.
Pjampus, Gottfried: See —
Schnoring, Hildegard; Dahm, Manfred; and Pampus. Gottfried.
4.379,071. CI. 252-316.000.
P^noch. Miroslav: See —
Petranek, Jaroslav; Ryba, Olen; Semler. Miloslav; and Panoch.
Miroslav. 4.379,041, CI. 204-415.000.
Pjapasuvros, Demos. Turbine system. 4,378,678, CI. 60-655.000.
Pappas, Peter G.: See —
Cengel, John A.; Hunt, Mark W.; Strukl, Joseph S.; and Pappas,
Peter G.. 4,379,064, CI. 252-5 1.50A.
Pjardoe. John A., to United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority. Form-
ing of materials by extrusion. 4.378.686. CI. 72-262.000.
Plarker. Harold R.: See—
Ishizaki. Goro; and Parker, Harold R., 4,378,810, CI. 128-754.000.
Parish, David D.; and Barton, John A., to NL Industries, Inc. Explo-
sive cutting system. 4.378,844. CI. 166-297.000.
Parson, Roger F.: See —
Carlson, John L.; Parson, Roger P.; and Nicholson, David F.,
4,379,055, CI. 210-400.000.
Plirsons. David; and Arrowsmith, David R.. to Automotive Products
Limited. Booster for a hydraulic clutch system. 4,378,676. CI.
60-548.000.
Pirtex Fabriksaktiebolag: See —
Loof. Goran; and Skarin, Lars, 4,378,648. CI. 40-316.000.
P|aschedag, Theodor: See —
Epper. Wolfgang; and Paschedag. Theodor, 4,378,906. CI.
494-54.000.
Phsqualucci, Luciano. Clutch drum retainer. 4,378,867, CI. 192-70.130.
Patchett. Arthur A.: See —
Greenlee. William J.; Harris, Elbert E.; Patchett, Arthur A.; and
Thorsett, Eugene D., 4,379,146, CI. 424-177.000.
Patel, Dhirajlal C, to Otis Engineering Corporation. Valve. 4,378,842,
CI. 166-278.000.
Patel, Dhirajlal C; and Wheeler, Robert B., to Otis Engineering Corpo-
ration. Valve. 4,378,847, CI. 166-317.000.
Patel, Raman R.; Pittet, Alan O.; and Muralidhara, Ranya, to Interna-
tional Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Use of methyl-thio-2-methyl-2-pen-
tenoate in augmenting or enhancing the aroma of perfume composi-
tions, colognes and perfumed articles. 4,379,079, CI. 252-522.00R.
Patent-Treuhand-Gesellschaft fur Elektrische Gluhlampen mbH: See —
Stiebritz, Wolfram; Sitterer, Georg; and Seidel, Klaus, 4,378,690,
CI. 72-467.000.
Patridge, A. Gary: See —
Tuggle, Lloyd H.; Loyd, Ronald C; Johnson, Stanley A., Jr.;
Patridge, A. Gary; Ingham, John W.; and Friend, Kenneth J.,
4,378,644, CI. 37-244.000.
Patterson, Charles A.; and Uyeda, Tim M., to Simmons U.S.A. Sofa bed
with mattress longitudinally compressed for storage and method.
4,378,609, CI. 5-12.0OR.
Payrhammer, Bemd: See —
Ermer, Wolfgang; Payrhammer, Bemd; Rapp, Heinz; and Bauer,
Alois, 4,378,610, CI. 15-1. 50R.
Pechersky, Viktor S.: See —
Shilov, Vladislav A.; Smimov, Vitaly K.; Pechersky, Viktor S.;
Kugushin, Alexandr A.; Bespalov, Vladimir N.; Labetsky, Jury
O.; and Melnikov, Boris M., 4,378,687. CI. 72-366.000.
Peek, S. Christopher, to GTE Laboratories Incorporated. Fiber optics
security system. 4,379,289. CI. 340-555.000.
Peiffer, Joachim, to Integral Hydraulik & Co. Hydraulic priority valve.
4,378,816. CI. 137-116.000.
Peignier, Michel; and Renault, Claude, to Chloe Chimie. Process for
preventing the redeposition of soil during dry cleaning, and composi-
tion for carrying out this process. 4,378,968, CI. 8-142.000.
Pelavin. Joseph Y.. to CPG Products Corp. Compartmented sport bag.
4.378,866, CI. 190-52.000.
Pennwalt Corporation: See —
Gardner, David M., 4.379.024. CI. 203-6.000.
Pere. Gerard, to Creusot-Loire. Installation for degassing and recycling
the electrolyte in an electrolyzer for producing gas. 4.379.044. CI.
204-237.000.
Peredkov. Boris A.: See —
Malkin. Daniel D.; Simbirtsev, Alexei V.; Peredkov, Boris A.; and
Kniglov. Gennady A.. 4.378.957, CI. 368-300.000.
Perkin-Elmer Corporation, The: See —
La Fiandra, Carlo F.; Nelson, Burke E.; and Baker, Douglas F..
4,378,989. CI. 65-271.000.
Perlino. Silvano, to Necchi Societa per Azioni. Apparatus for making
pockets of the strip type with slide fastener. 4.378.746. CI.
112-104.000.
Perrault. Frederick; and Perrault, Raymond E., to Whipple Patent
Management Corporation. Stuffing tube. 4,379.204. CI. 174-65.0SS.
Perrault, Raymond E.: See —
Perrault, Frederick; and Perrault, Raymond E., 4,379,204, CI.
174-65.0SS.
Perrin. Jack L.; Tucker, Council A.; and Gains, Oliver B., to Crown
Zellerbach Corporation. Sheet material dispenser apparatus.
4,378,912, CI. 242-55.300.
Peterson. Ronald T.; and Stein. Israel M., to Clinical Data, Inc. Blood
pressure measurement apparatus. 4,378,807, CI. 128-677.000.
Petit, Peter J.; and Famia, Khosrow, to Allis-Chalmers Corporation.
Start-up method for coal gasification plant. 4,378,974, CI. 48-197.00R.
Petrak, Harry A., to Tenneco Inc. Live spindle wheel assembly with
torque responsive drive engagement means. 4,378,868, CI. 192-
93.00A.
Petranek, Jaroslav; Ryba, Olen; Semler, Miloslav; and Panoch, Miros-
lav, to Ceskoslovenska akademie ved. Polymeric membrane selective
to calcium (II) ions. 4,379,041, CI. 204-415.000.
Pfister, Gustav: See —
Muggli, Jurg; and Pfister, Gustav, 4,379,290, CI. 340-629.000.
Phillion, Donald W.: See—
Avins, Jeremiah Y.; and Phillion, Donald W., 4,379,221, CI.
377-43.000.
Phillips, Barry A.: See —
Taylor, Ronald P.; and Phillips, Barry A., 4,379,105, CI. 264-45.500.
Phillips Petroleum Company: See —
Piatt, Louis, 4,379,189, CI. 428-89.000.
Piccardi, Paolo; Corda, Francesco; Gozzo. Franco; Menconi, Augusto;
and Longoni. Angelo. to Montedison, S.p.A. Pyrethroids. 4,379,163,
CI. 424-285.000.
Picker International Limited: See —
Young, Ian R., 4,379,262, CI. 324-309.000.
Picot, Alan J.: See —
Mountain, David S.; Allnutt, Anthony J.; Baker, Lionel R.; Cox,
Laurence J.; Picot, Alan J.; Wardropper, Peter F.; and Webber,
Julian M., 4,378,701, CI. 73-808.000.
Pierce, Donald, to United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland, The Secretary of State for Defence in Her Brittannic Majes-
ty's Government of the. Aircraft having improved strake configura-
tion. 4,378,922, CI. 244-199.000.
Pierce, Russell D.; and Venard, Walter B., to Bell Telephone Laborato-
ries, Incorporated. Method for determining the magnetic anisotropy
field in the manufacture of magnetic domain devices. 4,379,179, CI.
427-8.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
Pierick, Richard L. Apparatus for preparing pizza in a baking oven.
4.378,729, CI. 99-400.000.
Pilar Development Corporation: See —
Andaya, Antonio P., 4,378,664, CI. 52-745.000.
Pillsbury Company, The: See—
Scherwitz, Karen; and Citti, James, 4,379,176, CI. 426-613.000.
Pinkston, Melvin D.; and Easley, Wayne W., to Dayco Corporation.
Method of making compressible printing roller. 4,378,622, CI. 29-
148.40D.
Pioneer Electronic Corporation: See —
Kamimura, Teturo; Komatsubara, Masahiro; Ando, Shizuo;
Inanaga, Takuzi; and Takahashi, Akira, 4,379,314, CI. 360-96.500.
Pitt, Colin G.; and Schindler, Anton E., to Research Triangle Institute.
Biodegradable polymers of lactones. 4,379,138, CI. 424-78.000.
Pittet, Alan O.: See—
Patel, Raman R.; Pittet, Alan O.; and Muralidhara, Ranya,
4,379,079, CI. 252-522.00R.
Planet Products Corporation: See—
Griesdom, Carl P., 4,379,018, CI. 156-359.000.
Piatt, Jeremy A.: See—
Baird, William G., Jr.; Holbrook, Stanley E.; and Piatt, Jeremy A.,
4,379,117, CI. 264-514.000.
Piatt, Louis, to Phillips Petroleum Company. Nonwoven textile fabric
with fused face and raised loop pile. 4,379,189, CI. 428-89.000. ..
Plemmons, Jerry R.; and Taylor, Carl D., to General Electric Com-
pany. Plastic heavy-duty luminaire with direct ballast connection.
4,379,321, CI. 362-267.000.
Poku, Benjamin: See —
Gluz, Jacob; and Poku, Benjamin, 4,378,940, CI. 273-237.000.
Polad, Michael D.; Gerlach, Leroy E.; Gabel, Edward R.; Schmidt,
Robert H.; and Heiller, Glenn H., to Data Card Corporation. Em-
bossing drive mechanism for an automatic embossing system.
4,378,733, CI. 101-18.000.
Polikarpova, Zinaida A.: See —
Lytkin, Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Polikar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Maria G.;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei
P., deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G., adminstrator,
4,379,078, CI. 252-466.00J.
Pool, Daniel L. Masking machine. 4,379,019, CI. 156-527.000.
PORGES Societe Anonyme: See—
Milhaud, Alain, 4,378,796, CI. 128-207.150.
Porlein, Gerhard: See —
Fischer, Artur; and Poriein, Gerhard, 4,378,616, CI. 24-245.00R.
Port, Hans; Schrenk, Jurgen; and Wunderwald, Peter, to Boehringer
Mannheim GmbH. Thrombin inhibitor and preparation and use
thereof 4,379,142, CI. 424-101.000.
Portoghese, Joseph: See —
Berke, Herbert; and Portoghese, Joseph, 4,379,309, CI. 358-154.000.
Pouliot, Harvey N.; and Elfes, Lee E., to Vadetec Corporation. Normal
friction force developing system for traction drive transmissions.
4,378,708, CI. 74-191.000.
Powers, Dale R., to Coming Glass Works. Method and apparatus for
forming an optical waveguide Tiber. 4,378,985, CI. 65-3.120.
PPG Industries, Inc.: See—
Chamberlin, Ronald D., 4,379,035, CI. 204-98.000.
Gillery, F. Howard, 4,379,040, CI. 204-192.00P.
PQ Corporation: See —
Sherry, Howard S.; and Hertzenberg, Elliott P., 4,379,143, CI.
424-154.000.
Prabhu, Ashok N.; and Hang, Kenneth W., to RCA Corporation. Low
value resistor inks. 4,379,195, CI. 428-209.000.
Prengaman, Raymond D. Thread sealing and lubricating composition.
4,379,062, CI. 252-26.000.
Presta, Claude, to Saint Gobain Vitrage. Elements for bending plates
made of a material in the plastic state, use of such elements for bend-
ing and hardening plates and a device equipped with such elements.
4,378,988, CI. 65-182.300.
Prince, Arvin W., to Harrington Manufacturing Company. Pull type
automatic tobacco harvester and method of harvesting tobacco.
4,378,669, CI. 56-27.500.
Pro-Mark Companies, The: See-
Baker, Donald B., 4,379,175, CI. 426-582.000.
Prochazka, Svante: See —
Greskovich, Charles D.; Palm, John A.; and Prochazka, Svante,
4,379,110, CI. 264-65.000.
Procter & Gamble Company, The: See —
McCoy, Stephen A.; and Bono, James L., 4,379,177, CI.
426-656.000.
Murphy, Alan P., 4,379,080, CI. 252-526.000.
Proctor, Paul W.; and Dow, Robert L. Electromagnetic and electro-
static insensitive blasting caps, squibs and detonators. 4,378,738, CI.
102-202.700.
Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann: See —
Fouquet, Raymond, 4,379,124, CI. 422-240.000.
Profeta, Joseph G. Bicycle carrying case. 4,378,883, CI. 206-335.000.
Progressive Merchandising Display Limited: See —
Wilson, Alan A., 4,378,654, CI. 46-115.000.
Pumo, Joseph, to Motorola, Inc. Edge defmed output buffer circuit.
4,379,241, CI. 307-481.000.
Pusche, Herbert: See —
Daniel, Hellmuth; Queck, Robert; Kuxdorf, Bemhard; and Pusche,
Herbert, 4,379,131, CI. 423-304.000.
Quad Environmental Technologies Corporation: See —
deVries, Egbert, 4,378,851, CI. 169-45.000.
Quadro, Giuseppe: See —
Ferruti, Paolo; Danusso, Ferdinando; Tanzi. Maria C ; and Quadro,
Giuseppe, 4,379,091, CI. 548-472.000.
Queck, Robert: See-
Daniel, Hellmuth; Queck, Robert; Kuxdorf, Bemhard; and Pusche,
Herbert, 4,379,131, CI. 423-304 000
Quevedo, Humberto. Hair curling device. 4,378,814. CI. 132-40.000.
Rabe, Jurgen, to INA Walzlager SchaefFler KG. Novel apparatus
4,378,930, CI. 249-160.000.
Rabitsch, Hermann; and Sosath, Helmut A., to Lever Brothers Com-
pany. Detergent composition with reduced soil-redeposition effect.
4,379.061. CI. 252-174.180.
Racal-Dana Instruments Limited: See —
Wheatley. Mark A.. 4.379,272. CI. 332-38.000.
Radlove. Sol B.. to Batterlite-Whitlock Incorporated. Dietetic cake
mix. 4.379.174. CI. 426-554.000.
Rapisarda. Anthony A.; Romeo. Joseph; and Lopez. Jose A., to Lever
Brothers Company. Detergent powders of improved solubility.
4.379.069. CI. 252-135.000.
R^pp, Heinz: See —
/ Ermer, Wolfgang; Payrhammer. Bemd; Rapp. Heinz; and Bauer.
Alois. 4.378.610, CI. 15-1.50R.
Rapp, James E.. to Owens-Illinois. Inc. B2 O3 Diffusion processes.
4,379,006, CI. 148-189.000.
Rasekhi, Houshang; Nelson, Alfred M.; Kula, John S., Jr.; and Sudano,
John J., to Wang Laboratories. Inc. Toner applicator system for
magnetography. 4.378.754. CI. 118-658.000.
Ratanapupech. Pisant: See —
Berg. Lloyd; and Raunapupech. Pisant. 4,379.028. CI. 203-51 000.
Ratcliffe. Edward L.. to Hambro International (Structures) Limited.
Deflection measuring system. 4.378.693, CI. 73-105.000.
Rauhut, Michael M.: See —
Mohan, Arthur G.; and Rauhut, Michael M., 4,379,320, CI
362-34.000.
Rausing, Anders R.; and Nilsson, E. Ingvar, to Tetra Pak Developpe-
ment SA. Method of manufacture of packing containers and packing
containers manufactured in accordance with the method. 4,379,014,
CI. 156-191.000.
Raychem Corporation: See —
Middleman, Lee M.; and Goodrich, Roger S., 4,379,220, CI.
219-331.000.
Raymond, James C: See —
Holtey, Thomas O.; Kelly, Richard P.; Noyes, Steven S.; and
Raymond, James C. 4.379.340. CI. 364-900.000.
RCA Corporation: See —
Avins. Jeremiah Y.; and Phillion. Donald W.. 4.379.221. CI.
377-43.000.
Bendell. Sidney L.. 4.379.310. CI. 358-219.000.
Uhmann. William L.. 4.379.271. CI. 331-49.000.
Prabhu. Ashok N.; and Hang. Kenneth W.. 4.379.195. CI
428-209.000.
Reagan, Bernard L., Jr.: See—
Hayter, Alan B.; and Reagan, Bernard L.. Jr. 4.379,222. CI.
377-81.000.
Recycled Paper Bedding. Inc.: See—
Whitemao. Patrick W.. 4.378.756. CI. 119-1.000.
Red Devil Inc.: See —
Richard. Schotter D.; and Heinis. Robert P.. 4,378,782, CI 125-
23.00T.
Red River Commodities, Inc.: See —
Johnson, Freeman K., 4,378,655, CI 47-58.000.
Reed, Judson D. Umbrella support for use in vehicles. 4,378,888, CI.
211-63.000.
Reedy, James D.: See—
DiSalvo, Gail D.; and Reedy, James D., 4.379,094, CI. 26O-439.00R
Reggio, Richard A.; D' Amelia, Ronald P.; and Fricllo, Dominick R, to
Nabisco Brands, Inc. New gum base and chewing gum containing
same. 4,379.169. CI. 426-3.000.
Regitz. Gunter: See —
Hitzel. Volker; Weyer, Rudi; Geisen, Karl; and Regitz, Gunter.
4.379.153. CI. 424-256.000.
Reichel, Artur: See —
Kraft, Winfried; Reichel, Artur; and Holmok, Gunter, 4,378,718,
CI. 83-592.000.
Reichert, D. Jeanie; Trottier, Carol S.; and Calhoon, Cathy Y One
piece bodice garment for mastectomy patient. 4,378,805, CI.
128-450.000.
Reinhardt, Helmut: See —
Gratzfeld, Everhard; Clausen, Eva; Reinhardt, Helmut; and Schae-
. fer, Hans, 4,378,995, CI. 106-15.050.
Reining, Karl: See —
Benninger, Siegfried; Reining, Karl; and Krasel, Werner, 4,379,125,
CI. 422-274.000.
Rekers, Louis J.; and Katzen. Stanley J., to National Petro Chemicals
Corp. Process for polymerizing high melt index olefins and polymeri-
zation catalysts used therefore. 4.379,075. CI. 252-430.000.
Reliance Products Corporation: See—
Chrones. Anthony. 4.378.948. CI. 292-19.000.
Renault. Claude: See —
Peignier. Michel; and Renault. Claude. 4.378.968, CI 8-142.000
Renger. Larry H.. to Mattel. Inc. Method for making flying surfaces.
4.379.010. CI. 156-108.000.
Repa Feinstanzwerk GmbH: See—
Fohl. Artur. 4.378.913. CI. 242-74.000.
Fohl. Artur. 4.378.915. CI. 242-107.200.
Fohl. Artur. 4.378.947, CI. 280-808.000.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Research Corporation: See —
Clark. Charles R., 4,379,165, CI. 424-324.000.
Research Triangle Institute: See —
Pitt, Colin G.; and Schindler, Anton E., 4,379,138, CI. 424-78.000.
RFD Innatables Limited: See—
Burrough, Philip M.; and Edwards, David V., 4,378,861, CI.
182-48.000.
Rhone-Poulenc Sante: See —
Aloup, Jean-Claude; Bouchaudon, Jean; Farge, Daniel; and James,
Claude, 4,379.154, CI. 424-250.000.
Rhorer, Clifford A.: See—
Hubbard, Larry E.; and Rhorer, Clifford A., 4,379,291. CI.
340-682.000.
Richard, Schotter D.; and Heinis, Robert P., to Red Devil Inc. Ceramic
tile cutter. 4,378,782, CI. 125-23.0OT.
Riedel-De Haen Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Scholz, Eugen, 4,378,972, CI. 436-42.000.
Riel, Frank J.: See—
Beggs, SUnley L.; Riel. Frank J.; and Lawson. D. W. R., 4,379,191.
CI. 428-118.000.
Ritsko, Joseph E.: See —
Kim, Tai K.; Ritsko, Joseph E.; Maclnnis, Martin B.; and Vogt,
Martin C. 4,379,126, CI. 423-54.000.
Robbins, Murray; and Sherwood. Richard C. to Bell Telephone Labo-
ratories, Incorporated. Magnetic devices by selective reduction of
oxides. 4,379,003. CI. 148-104.000.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See—
Harter, Werner, 4,378,778. CI. 123-609.000.
Haubner, Georg; Wesemeyer. Jurgen; Meier, Werner; and
Schrumpf, Hans, 4.378,769. CI. 123-416.000.
Straubel. Max; Eisele, Hermann; Zimmermann. Klaus-Dieter; and
Vogel, Wilhelm. 4.378,775, CI. 123-458.000.
Robertshaw Controls Company: See —
Tyler. Hugh J.; and Conway. William H.. 4,379,287, CI. 340-
365.00C.
Robertson, James A., to FMC Corporation. Strengthening phosphate
shale briquettes. 4,379.108, CI. 264-56.000.
Robot-Coupe, S.A.: See—
Coggiola. Marcel, 4,378,730, CI. 99-501.000.
Robud Company: See —
Kirkpatrick, Alan D., 4,378.737, CI. 101-415.100.
Robusto, Paul F.: See—
Bleha, William P., Jr.; Wiener-Avnear, Eliezer; and Robusto, Paul
F., 4,378.955, CI. 350-334.000.
Roccaforte, Harry I., to Champion International Corporation. Carton
with strap handle and blank for forming same. 4,378.905. CI. 229-
52.00B.
Roche, Michel, to Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique. Process for
measuring a continuous neutron flux and measuring apparatus for
carrying out this process. 4,379,118, CI. 376-154.000.
Rockwell International Corporation: See —
Soclof, Sidney I.. 4.379,307, CI. 357-68.000.
Roediger, Hanns, to Techtransfer GmbH & Co. KG. Decomposition
apparatus with reversible removal conveyor. 4,378,886, CI.
209-606.000.
Rogers. Douglas K., to Diamond Shamrock Corporation. Start-up
procedure for oxygen electrode. 4,379,034. CI. 204-98.000.
Rohr Industries, Inc.: See—
Beggs, Stanley L.; Riel, Frank J.; and Lawson, D. W. R., 4,379,191,
CI. 428-118.000.
Rohrberg, Roderick G. Orbital cassette welding head. 4,379,215, CI.
219-60.00A.
Romankiw, Lubomyr T.: See —
Melcher, Robert L.; Romankiw, Lubomyr T.; and Von Gutfeld,
Robert J., 4,379,022, CI. 156-643.000.
Romberg, Felix B. Bumper actuated gate. 4,378,657. CI. 49-364.000.
Romeo, Joseph: See —
Rapisarda, Anthony A.; Romeo, Joseph; and Lopez, Jose A.,
4.379.069, CI. 252-135.000.
Rootham, Michael W.; and Forrester, James A., to Westinghouse
Electric Corp. Method of encapsulating waste radioactive material.
4,379.081. CI. 252-628.000.
Rosemount Inc.: See —
DeLeo, Richard V.; and Hagen. Floyd W., 4,378,696, CI.
73-180.000.
DeLeo, Richard V.; and Hagen, Floyd W., 4,378,697, CI.
73-182.000.
Rosen, Evan W., to Engineering & Research Associates, Inc. Blood
collection bag weighing device. 4,378,854, CI. 177-1 18.000.
Kosen, Melvin H., to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. l-Benzothiepin-4-car-
boxamides. 4,379,162, CI. '«4-275.000.
Rosenthal, Scott B., to Trebor Industries, Inc. Optical arrangement for
quantitative analysis instrument utilizing pulsed radiation emitting
diodes. 4,379.233, CI. 250-553.000.
luangburapa, Suwat. Nut cracking device. 4,378,731, CI. 99-571.000.
luark, Bruce L.: See-
Stocking, George E.; and Ruark, Bruce L., 4,378,679, CI.
62-280.000.
llubin, Michael D., to Ford Aerospace & Communications Corpora-
tion. PSK Demodulator with automatic compensation of delay in-
duced phase shifU. 4,379,266, CI. 329-104.000.
llufring, Charles R.: See—
Dailey, George F.; RufTmg, Charles R.; and Simmonds, Leonard
B., 4.379,243, CI. 310-260.000.
Kunkle, Charles J.: See—
Otstot. Roger S.; and Runkle. Charles J., 4,378,981, CI. 55-158.000.
Runnels, Joe N.; and Fagerlund, Kenneth R., to Boeing Company. The.
Combustibly inert air supply system and method. 4,378,920, CI.
244-135.0OR.
Rush, William F., to Institute of Gas Technology. Combined sonic
agglomerator/cross flow filtration apparatus and process for solid
particle and/or liquid droplet removal from gas streams. 4,378,976,
CI. 55-15.000.
Rutgerswerke Aktiengesellschaft: See-
Zander, Maximilian; Blumer, Gerd-Peter; Collin, Gerd; Glaser,
Herbert; and Marrett. Rolf, 4.379.133. CI. 423-445.000.
Ryba. Olen: See—
Petranek, Jaroslav; Ryba, Olen; Semler, Miloslav; and Panoch.
Miroslav. 4,379,041, CI. 204-415.000.
SAB Nife AB: See—
Stjarne, Anders O. G., 4,378,864, CI. 188-153.00R.
Sacht, Hans-Otto: See—
Simonis, Jurgen; and Sacht, Hans-Otto. 4,378,732, CI. 100-5.000.
Sacks, Frank: See —
Vincent, Richard G.; Sacks, Frank; and Steele, Robert F.,
4,379,298, CI. 343-895.000.
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima,
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroda, Seietsu; Komatsu. Miwako; Ya-
suda, Takashi; and Kodama, Yutaka, to Toyama Chemical Co., Ltd.
Cephalosporins. 4,379,152, CI. 424-246.000.
Saint Gobain Vitrage: See —
Presta, Claude, 4,378,988, CI. 65-182.300.
Saito, Norio: See —
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Shiroi, Takashi;
Saito, Norio; and Sasaoka, Michio, 4,379,032, CI. 204-59.00R.
Saito, Sadayuki; Moriwaki, Hiroji; and Higuchi, Kazuya, to Kawasaki
Steel Corporation. Method and equipment for dividing slabs into
predetermined widths. 4,379,002, CI. 148-9.00R.
Saito, Shin-ichi: See —
Fukushima, Tsutomu; Furukawa, Takeshi; Saito, Shin-ichi;
Kobayashi, Takashi; and Yamada, Takeo, 4,378,993, CI.
75-41.000.
Saito, Takao: See —
Kasama, Tsuneo; Saito, Takao; and Wada, Makoto, 4,378,997, CI.
106-89.000.
Saiya, Robert F.: See —
Joscelyn, Edwin; Ferrante, Michael J.; and Saiya, Robert F.,
4,379,211, CI. 179-1 lO.OOA.
Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.: See —
Araki, Yasuo; Uno, Hajime; Higuchi, Shigeharu; and Matsumoto,
Seiji, 4,379,183, CI. 427-127.000.
Sakai, Kazushige: See —
Ito, Kiyohiko; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu;
Sakai, Kazushige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeni.
4,379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Sakai, Tetsushi; Kobayasi, Yoshiji; Yamamoto, Yousuke; and Yamau-
chi, Hironori, to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corp.
Method of making semiconductor devices. 4,379,001, CI. 148-1.500.
Sakano, Hideki, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Audio
amplifier. 4,379,209, CI. 179-l.OOA.
Salisbury, Wayne C; and Hodson. Lee, to Ex-Cell-O Corporation.
Polyurethane molding process with siloxane internal release agent.
4,379,100, CI. 264-39.000.
Sanford, Herbert F., to Honeywell, Inc. Tape drive capstan. 4,378,899,
CI. 226-188.000.
Sanville, W. Woodward, to Servo Corporation of America. Railroad
car wheel detector. 4,379,330, CI. 364-424.000.
Sarda, Jean L. Inking device. 4,378,736, CI. 101-365.000.
Sarrell, Ivan D., to Chattanooga Corporation. Therapeutic traction
apparatus. 4.378,791, CI. 128-71.000.
Sarstedt, Walter, to Kunststoff-Spritzgubwerk. Devices for sampling
blood. 4,378,812, CI. 128-765.000.
Sasaki, Michiaki: See —
Mochida, Haruo; and Sasaki, Michiaki, 4,378,815, CI. 137-43.000.
Sasaki, Shuji; and Yamazaki, Yoji, to Lion Corporation. Method for
enumeration of oral gram-negative bacteria. 4,379,135, CI.
436-536.000.
Sasaoka, Michio: See —
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Shiroi, Takashi;
Saito, Norio; and Sasaoka, Michio, 4,379,032, CI. 204-59.00R.
Sato, Makoto; Kimura, Isami; and Yamaguchi, Azuma, to Morishita
Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Analgesic and anti-inflammatory composi-
tion. 4,379,148, CI. 424-232.000.
Satomi, Seigo; and Ikai, Masanosuke, to NGK Insulators, Ltd. Silencer
for intake/exhaust gas duct. 4,378,859, CI. 181-224.000.
Satzler, Ronald L., to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Wheel assembly machine
and method. 4,378,834, CI. 157-1.100.
Sauer, Don R.: See —
Isbell, Tim D.; and Sauer. Don R.. 4,379,208, CI. 179-l.OGS.
Sauermilch, Otto, to William Prym-Werke KG. Machine with flnger-
guard. 4,378,900, CI. 227-8.000.
Saunders, Robert M.: See —
Wilde, Sheldon L.; McCandless, Thomas J.; and Saunders, Robert
M., 4,378,893, CI. 215-246.000.
Sawada, Daisaku; Shigematsu, Takashi; and Takeda, Yuji, to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. System for controlling ignition
timing in an engine. 4,378,771, CI. 123-425.000.
Saylor, James R.; Wiens, Lewis H.; and Blume, Orville E., to Aero
Plastics of K.C., Inc. Hold down bar for hopper car hatch covers.
4,378,742, CI. 105-377.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTTEES
PI 21
Schaar, Charles H., to Colgate-Palmolive Company. Disposable diaper.
4,378,800, CI. 604-390.000.
Schaefer, Hans: See —
Gratzfeld, Everhard; Clausen, Eva; Reinhardt, Helmut; and Schae-
fer, Hans, 4,378,995, CI. 106-15.050.
Schaubert, Daniel H.: See—
Farrar, Frederick G.; and Schaubert, Daniel H., 4,379,296, CI.
343-700.0MS.
Schenck, Timothy T., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Filled thermoplastic compositions based on mixtures of ethylene
interpolymers. 4,379,190, CI. 428-95.000.
Schering Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Endo, Keiji; Toriyama, Tomomi; and Mori, Kisaku, 4,378,990, CI.
71-90.000.
Schering Corporation: See —
Neustadt, Bernard R.; and Gold, Elijah H., 4,379,166, CI.
424-324.000.
Scherwitz, Karen; and Citti, James, to Pillsbury Company, The. Icing
having a substantially temperature independent viscosity. 4,379,176,
CI. 426-613.000.
See—
A.; and Schimmel, Morry L., 4,378,739, CI.
Schimmel, Morry L
Klein, Edward
102-204.000.
Schindler, Anton E
Sec-
Pitt, Colin G.; and Schindler, Anton E., 4,379,138, CI. 424-78.000.
Schlage Lock Company: See —
Beers, Bruce N., 4,378,612, CI. 16-62.000.
Schliebener, Claus: See —
Linde, Gerhard; Haeussinger, Peter; and Schliebener, Claus,
4,378,977, CI. 55-48.000.
Schmidt, Robert H.: See—
Polad, Michael D.; Gerlach, Leroy E.; Gabel, Edward R.; Schmidt,
Robert H.; and Heiller, Glenn H., 4,378,733, CI. 101-18.000.
Schneider, Clayton J., Jr., to Calspan Corporation. Munition fuse
system having out-of-line safety device. 4,378,740, CI. 102-216.000.
Schneider, Franz; Bergmann, Ewald; and Gering, Gerhard, to L.
Schuler GmbH. Circuit arrangement for an adjusting drive for a press
ram adjustment. 4,378,717, CI. 83-530.000.
Schneider, Hans-Peter: See —
Krampe, Dietrich; Schneider, Hans-Peter; and Zander, Hans-Her-
mann, 4,379,325, CI. 363-35.000.
Schnoring, Hildegard; Dahm, Manfred; and Pampus, Gottfried, to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the production of microcap-
sules. 4,379,071, CI. 252-316.000.
Schockelt, Guenter G.: See—
Lott, Donald L.; Schockelt, Guenter G.; and Worrix, Matthew L.,
4,378,751, CI. 116-271.000.
Scholz, Donald T. String tuning and fastening arrangement. 4,378,723,
CI. 84-297.00R.
Scholz, Eugen, to Riedel-De Haen Aktiengesellschaft. Titration agent
and method for using same. 4,378,972, CI. 436-42.000.
Schouenberg, Hendrikus J. E. Injection mechanism for molding plas-
tics. 4,378,963, CI. 425-144.000.
Schrenk, Jurgen: See —
Port, Hans; Schrenk, Jurgen; and Wunderwald, Peter, 4,379,142,
CI. 424-101.000.
Schroeder, Edward M. Log splitter. 4,378,825, CI. 144-193.00R.
Schrumpf, Hans: See —
Haubner, Georg; Wesemeyer, Jurgen; Meier, Werner; and
Schrumpf, Hans, 4,378,769, CI. 123-416.000.
Schuler, Heinz, to Applied Magnetics Corporation. Carriage loading
arm assembly having two magnetic transducers for a double sided
floppy disc. 4,379,315, CI. 360-105.000.
Schultz, Peter C: See-
Miller, Stephen B.; and Schultz, Peter C, 4,378,987, CI. 65-3.120.
Schumacher, Wilhelm, to Fa. Christian Majer K.G., Maschinenfabrik.
Apparatus for controlling a pipe-cutting device. 4,378,966, CI.
493-22.000.
Schur, Norbert: See —
Kieser, Hermann; and Schur, Norbert, 4,378,637, CI. 30-216.000.
Schwab, Bernard: See —
Sichling, Georg H.; Schwab, Helmut; and Schwab, Bernard,
4,379,226, CI. 250-23 l.OOR.
Schwab, Helmut: See —
Sichling, Georg H.; Schwab, Helmut; and Schwab, Bernard,
4,379,226, CI. 250-23 l.OOR.
Schwab, Randall J., to Transco Northwest, Inc. Pallet elevator for a
ship. 4,378,874. CI. 198-802.000.
Schwartz, Samuel, to University of Minnesota, Regents of the. Method
and apparatus for quantitatively determining the level of hemoglobin
in a biological sample. 4,378,971, CI. 436-66.000.
Schwenker, Robert O.: See —
Homg, Cheng T.; Konian, Richard R.; Schwenker, Robert O.; and
Weider, Armin W., 4,378,630, CI. 29-580.000.
Seach, Barry G.; MuUer, Hans; and Cohen, Solomon E., to James
Hardie & Coy, Pty. Limited. Pipe socket forming. 4,379,115, CI.
264-296.000.
Sech, John M.: See—
Yarham, Oliver L.; Sech, John M.; and Kennedy, Carl S.,
4,379,072, CI. 252-389.00R.
Secrist, Duane R.: See —
Clark, James M.; and Secrist, Duane R., 4,379,033, CI. 204-67.000.
Seebacher, Gerhard: See —
Behn, Reinhard; Pachonik, Horst; and Seebacher, Gerhard,
4,379,182, CI. 427-41.000.
Sefton, Vemer B.: See —
Bolton, Gerald L.; Sefton, Vemer B.; and Zubryckyj, Nicolaus,
4.379,037, CI. 204-119.000.
Seidel, Klaus: See —
Stiebritz, Wolfram; Sitterer, Georg; and Seidel, Klaus, 4,378,690,
CI. 72-467.000.
Seim, Howard N.: See —
Haub. Donald J.; Brown. Neil T.; Krier, Keith N.; Hawkins, Ray-
mond C; and Seim, Howard N., 4.378.855, CI. 180-65.00R.
Seljutina, Maria G.: See —
Lytkin, Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Polikar-
pova. Zinaida A.; Sobolcvsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Mana G;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei
P.. deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G.. adminstrator.
4,379,078. CI. 252-466.00J.
Seman, David C. Method of producing a bnck wall facing. 4,379,187,
CI. 427-282.000.
Semler, Miloslav: See —
Petranek, Jaroslav; Ryba, Glen; Semler, Miloslav; and Panoch,
Miroslav, 4,379,041, CI. 204-415.000.
Senaha, Susumu; Chiba, Tetsuya; Ohno, Akira; and Katayama, Shitomi.
to Yokohama Kiko Co.; and NHK Spring Co., Ltd. Heat-resisting
layer-constructions and method for preparing the same. 4,379.199, CI.
428-332.000.
Senninger, Rudolf: See —
Hansen, Guenter; Kolbinger, Hans J.; Senninger, Rudolf; and
Zeidler, Georg, 4,378,969, CI. 8-521.000.
Servo Corporation of America: See —
Sanville, W. Woodward, 4,379,330, CI. 364-424.000.
Sexton, James H.: See —
Masse, Lucien; Medlin, William L.; and Sexton. James H.,
4,378,698, CI. 73-579.000.
Shackelford, John T.; and Carpenter, Robert L., to Brunswick Corpora-
tion. Uniform drag system for spin cast reels. 4.378,914. CI. 242-
84.21A.
Shannon, Paul D.: See —
Tietjen, Donald; Lamb, Sharon; Shaw, Pern; Cawthron, Duane;
and Shannon, Paul D., 4,379.327, CI. 364-200.000.
Shaposhinikov, July G.: See —
Akopov, Ernest M.; and Shaposhinikov. July G., 4.378.901, CI.
227-19.000.
Shaw. Malcolm A.: See —
Hockey. John A.; Shaw. Malcolm A.; Wilby. John L.; and Wilson,
Allan A., 4,379,059. CI. 252-8.800.
Shaw. Pern: See —
Tietjen, Donald; Lamb, Sharon; Shaw, Pern; Cawthron, Duane;
and Shannon, Paul D., 4,379,327, CI. 364-200.000.
Sherritt Gordon Mines Limited: See —
Bolton, Gerald L.; Sefton, Vemer B.; and Zubryckyj, Nicolaus,
4.379,037, CI. 204-119.000.
Sherry, Howard S.; and Hertzenberg, Elliott P.. to PQ Corporation.
Topical liquid or ointment. 4.379.143. CI. 424-154.000.
Sherwood, Irvin W., to Champion International Corporation. Hanging
tab with single line of adhesive and hanging hole clear of adhesive.
4,378.903, CI. 229-6.00R.
Sherwood, Richard C: See —
Robbins, Murray; and Sherwood, Richard C, 4,379.003, CI.
148-104.000.
Shibata, Takaaki; and Yamamoto, Tetsuhiro. to Doryokuro Kakunen-
ryo Kaihatsu Jigyodan. Sealing method using heat-shrinkable fllm.
4.379.009, CI. 156-86.000.
Shiflett, David C. Arrow locating device. 4,378,781, CI. 124-24.00R.
Shigematsu, Takashi: See —
Sawada, Daisaku; Shigematsu, Takashi; and Takeda. Yuji,
4,378,771, CI. 123-425.000.
Shii, Kazuo; and Ghashi, Toshiyuki, to Hitachi, Ltd. Electron micro-
scope. 4,379,231, CI. 250-311.000.
Shilov, Vladislav A.; Smimov, Vitaly K.; Pechersky, Viktor S.; Kugu-
shin, Alexandr A.; Bespalov, Vladimir N.; Labetsky, Jury O.; and
Melnikov, Boris M. Method for rolling H-sections in continuous mill.
4,378,687, CI. 72-366.000.
Shiminski, James, to Zilka, Stanley, a part interest. Combined collaps-
ible workbench and removable tool carrier. 4,378,828, CI.
144-285.000.
Shimizu, Masakata: See —
Narita, Kiichi; Inaba, Shinichi; Shimizu, Masakata; Okimoto, Keni-
chi; and Kobayashi, Isao, 4,378,994, CI. 75-41.000.
Shiroi, Takashi: See —
Torii, Sigeni; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Shiroi, Takashi;
Saito, Norio; and Sasaoka, Michio, 4.379.032, CI. 204-59.00R.
Shnim, Kenneth L.; and Trax, Donald L., to Sun Studs, Inc. Veneer
lathe lug charger system having enhanced accuracy and rate of
production. 4,378,827, CI. 144-209.00A.
Shultz, Jay: See—
Wahlquist, Joseph D.; and Shultz, Jay, 4,379,192, CI. 428-156.000.
SI Handling Systems, Inc.: See —
Brown, William L., 4,378,872, CI. 198-570.000.
Nagahori, Katsuhiro, 4,378,741, CI. 104-18.000.
Sichling, Georg H.; Schwab, Helmut; and Schwab, Bernard, to Siemens
Corporation. Method and sensor device for measuring a physical
parameter utilizing an oscillatory, light modulation element.
4.379.226, CI. 250-23 l.OOR.
Siegmund, Walter P., to Warner Lambert Technologies, Inc. Dynamic
image enhancer for fiberscopes. 4,378,952, CI. 350-96.250.
ri22
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Behn, Reinhard; Pachonik, Horst; and Seebacher, Gerhard,
4,379,182,0.427-41.000.
Elsel, Werner, 4,379,275, CI. 335-216.000.
Guntersdorfer, Max; Kleinschmidt, Peter; and Dietrich, Klaus,
4,379.246, CI. 310-328.000.
Heinzl, Joachim; and Kattner, Erich, 4.379.304, CI. 346-14O.00R.
Koszytorz, Gunther, 4,379,203, CI. 174-15.00R.
Krampe, Dietrich; Schneider, Hans-Peter; and Zander, Hans-Her-
mann, 4,379,325, CI. 363-35.000.
Martin, Erwin, 4,379,212. CI. 179-1 lO.OOA.
Mattuschka, Werner. 4,379,247, CI. 310-367.000.
Url, Karlhemz, 4,379,345, CI. 365-205.000.
Sjiemens-Allis, Inc.: See —
Lott, Donald L.; Schockelt, Guenter G.; and Worrix. Matthew L.,
4,378,751, CI. 116-271.000.
Sliemens Corporation: See —
Krane, Jan G., 4,379.316, CI. 360-105.000.
Sichling, Georg H.; Schwab, Helmut; and Schwab, Bernard,
4,379,226, CI. 250-23 l.OOR.
Sjilicon General, Inc.: See —
Mammano, Robert A., 4,379,240, CI. 307-356.000.
S|imbirtsev, Alexei V.: See —
Malkin, Daniel D.; Simbirtsev, Alexei V.; Peredkov, Boris A.; and
Kruglov, Gennady A., 4,378,957. CI. 368-300.000.
$immonds, Leonard B.: See —
Dailey, George F.; Ruffrng, Charles R.; and Simmonds, Leonard
B., 4,379,243, CI. 310-260.000.
S)immons U.S.A.: See —
Patterson, Charles A.; and Uyeda, Tim M., 4,378,609, CI. 5-12.00R.
S|imonis, Jurgen; and Sacht, Hans-Otto, to Gebruder Welger GmbH &
Co. Kommanditgesellschaft. Tying apparatus for agricultural roll
balers. 4,378.732, Ci. 100-5.000.
Stimpson, Edgar A., to W. R. Grace & Co. Method of preparing a
monolithic structure having flow channels. 4,379,109, CI. 264-60.000.
Sjinha, Ashok K.: See —
Levinstein, Hyman J.; Murarka, Shyam P.; and Sinha. Ashok K.,
4,378,628, CI. 29-571.000.
Sjinner. Bengt: See —
Andersson, Nils E.; Eriksson, Sten; and Sinner, Bengt, 4,378.978.
CI. 55-52.000.
S^ra Institute Limited: See —
Mounuin, David S.; Allnutt, Anthony J.; Baker, Lionel R.; Cox,
Laurence J.; Picot. Alan J.; Wardropper, Peter P.; and Webber,
Julian M., 4,378,701, CI. 73-808.000.
Sjtterer, Georg: See —
Stiebritz, Wolfram; Sitterer, Georg; and Seidel, Klaus. 4,378.690,
CI. 72-467.000.
Sjcarin, Lars: See —
Loof. Goran; and Skarin, Lars, 4.378.648. CI. 40-316.000.
Slater, Glenn L.: See—
Fowles. Thomas A.; Slater, Glenn L.; and Winchell, David
4,378,891, CI. 215-32.000.
Shiall, Vernon R., Jr., to Chevron Research Company. Method
reducing brake noise in oil-immersed disc brakes. 4,379,066,
252-56.00R.
Sneenge, George: See—
Smeenge, Paul A.; and Smeenge, George, 4,378.898,
224-328.000.
Sineenge, Paul A.; and Smeenge, George. Cargo carrier. 4,378,898, CI.
224-328.000.
Snimov, Vitaly K.: See —
Shilov, Vladislav A.; Smimov, Vitaly K.; Pechersky, Viktor S.;
Kugushin, Alexandr A.; Bespalov, Vladimir N.; Labetsky, Jury
O.; and Melnikov, Boris M., 4,378,687, CI. 72-366.000.
Sinith, Carl M., to Allen Industries, Inc. Forming apparatus and
method. 4,379,101, CI. 264-40.300.
Smith, Gerald L.: See —
Coleman, Marilyn A., 4,378,758, CI. 1 19-35.000.
Sinith, Harlan B., to Erickson Air Crane Co. Apparatus for controlling
orientation of a suspended load. 4,378,919, CI. 244-118.100.
SJnith International, Inc.: See —
Chia, Weng-Kwen R.; and Forrest, Robert S., 4,378,853, CI.
175-340.000.
Sinith, Merrill M.; and Ferguson, Donald C, to American Biltrite, Inc.
Method for manufacture of inlaid vinyl-flooring. 4,379,185, CI.
427-209.000.
Sinith, Russell D.; and Tressler, Richard E., to Kennecott Corporation.
Method for producing chromium oxide coated refractory fibers.
4.379,111. CI. 264-137.000.
Siiamprogetti, S.p.A.: See —
BaJducci. Agostino; Corbellini, Margherita; and Osellame, Mirko,
4,379,074, CI. 252-429.00B.
Siiowden, Maxine W. Rain hat. 4,378,606, CI. 2-198.000.
S^bolevsky, Viktor S.: See—
Lytkin. Viktor P.; Menshov. Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Polikar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Seljutina, Maria G.;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov. Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei
P.. deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov.
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G., adminstrator,
4.379,078, CI. 252-466.00J.
S^iete Chimique des Charbonnages: See —
Couderc, Pierre, 4,379,068, CI. 252-99.000.
Si>ciete D' Applications Generates D'Elect.: See —
Dol, Christian; and Valet, Jean- Yves. 4.379.302. CI. 346-74.200.
A.,
for
CI.
CI.
Societe D'Assistance Technique pour Produits Nestle S.A.: See —
Liu, Richard T., 4,379,172, CI. 426-386.000.
Soclof, Sidney I., to Rockwell International Corporation. Integrated
circuit chip transmission line. 4,379,307, CI. 357-68.000.
Sogabe, Ichita: See —
Yamazoe, Hisamitsu; Sogabe, Ichiu; Tamaki, Kazuyoshi; and
Yoshida, Matsuju, 4.378.766. CI. 123-339.000.
Sohn. Fred, to Sun Studs, Inc. Veneer lathe log charger system having
enhanced accuracy and rate of production. 4,378,829, CI.
144-357.000.
Solomon, Frank, to Diamond Shamrock Corporation. Active carbon
conditioning process. 4.379,077. CI. 252-444.000.
Sonneville. Roger P. Elastically yieldable device for fixing a rail on a
support. 4,378,910, CI. 238-349.000.
Sony Corporation: See —
Makino, Yoshimi; Hayakawa, Masatoshi; Aso, Koichi; Uedaira,
Satoru; Ito, Shigeyasu; and Hotai, Kazuhide, 4,379,004, CI.
148-108.000.
Yokou. Teppei; and Joichi. Yoshiro. 4,379,286, CI. 340-347.0DD.
Sosath. Helmut A.: See —
Rabitsch. Hermann; and Sosath. Helmut A.. 4,379,061, CI.
252-174.180.
Sozanskaya. Alexandra D.: See —
Tsvetkov. Nikolai S.; Maleev, Igor I.; Opainich. Irina E.; Lobkov-
skaya. Lidia A.; Bogush. Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya, Alexandra
D.; Onischak, Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.; and Opai-
nich, Mikhail D., 4,379,184, CI. 427-169.000.
Spanke, Edwin A.; and Francey, Melvin H., to Gulf & Western Manu-
facturing Company. Apparatus for feeding and orienting workpieces
in a press. 4,378,688, CI. 72-420.000.
Sparber, Richard G., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Ringing detector for use by the deaf. 4,379,210, CI. 179-84.00L.
Speechley, Ronald F.: See —
Kopp, Edward J.; Iwinski, Leon J.; Guzzo, Frank; Speechley,
Ronald F.; and Femali. Frank. 4,378,928, CI. 249-63.000.
Spielau, Paul: See —
Jaeschke, Hans; Spielau, Paul; and Ulb. Horst. 4,379.198. CI.
428-288.000.
Spieth. Eric: See —
Kaiser. Gerhard; and Spieth. Eric, 4,378,715, CI. 83-113.000.
Spiller. Eberhard: See —
Baglin. John E. E.; Feder, Ralph; Haller, Ivan; Hammer, William
N.; and Spiller. Eberhard, 4,379,180, CI. 427-38.000.
Sprecker, Mark A., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Use of
norbornyl ethers in augmenting or enhancing the aroma of fabric
softener articles and compositions. 4,379,060, CI. 252-8.900.
Stadler, Istvan: See —
Tomoskozi, Istvan; Gyory, Peter; Kovacs, Gabor; Virag, Sandol;
Kormoczy, Peter; and Stadler, Istvan, 4,379,164, CI. 424-285.000.
Stamicarbon, B.V.: See —
Jansen, Johann J., 4,379,048, CI. 209-172.500.
Jongsma, Comelis, 4,379,026, CI. 203-31.000.
Stancato, Vincenzo. Photographic album and method of fabrication of
same. 4,378,647, CI. 4O-158.00R.
Standard Oil Company (Indiana): See —
Cengel, John A.; Hunt, Mark W.; Strukl, Joseph S.; and Pappas,
Peter G., 4,379,064, CI. 252-5 1.50A.
Staniszewski, Tadeusz, to Sweda International, Inc. Document stacking
device. 4,378,938, CI. 271-179.000.
Stauffer, Kirk R.: See—
Kirsch, Kerry F.; Stauffer, Kirk R.; and Tindall, Robert J.,
4,379,335. CI. 364-513.000.
Stearns. Earl J., to Flush-O-Matic Corp. Coolant filter assemblies.
4,379,052. CI. 210-223.000.
Steele. Robert F.: See —
Vincent, Richard G.; Sacks, Frank; and Steele, Robert F.,
4,379,298. CI. 343-895.000.
Stein. Israel M.: See —
Peterson. Ronald T.; and Stein, Israel M., 4,378,807, CI.
128-677.000.
Stemmler, Kurt; and Metheisen. Heinrich. to Winkler + Dunnebier
Maschinefabrik und Eisengiesseret GmbH & Co. KG. Method and
device for applying elastic strips in sections onto a web of material
used for making diapers. 4.379,016, CI. 156-205.000.
Sterling Drug Inc.: See —
Crounse. Nathan N., 4,379,088, CI. 260-157.000.
Crounse, Nathan N., 4,379,089, CI. 260-161.000.
Ehlers, Helmut H.; Eggensperger, Heinz; Bucklers. Lothar; Ei-
gener. Ulrich; Diehl. Karl-Heinz; and Weigand. Norbert.
4,379,137, CI. 424-78.000.
Stetter, Karl-Heinz: See—
Korbanka, Helmut; Stetter, Karl-Heinz; Illmann, Gunther; Jacob,
Rolf; Malitschek, Otto; and Strehle, Josef, 4,378,998, CI.
106-270.000.
Steuer, Paul R.: See—
Hosmer, Stephen L.; and Steuer, Paul R., 4,378,659. CI. 49-504.000.
Stiebritz. Wolfram; Sitterer. Georg; and Seidel, Klaus, to Patent-Treu-
hand-Gesellschaft fur Elektrische Gluhlampen mbH. Diamond draw-
ing die and setting combination. 4.378.690, CI. 72-467.000.
Stills, Melvin L.: See —
Mauldin, Donald M.; and Jones, Richard E.. Ill, 4,378,793, CI.
128-80.00H.
Stjame. Anders O. G., to SAB Nife AB. Railway vehicle brake block
holder. 4.378.864. CI. 188-153.00R.
Stocking, George E.; and Ruark, Bruce L., to General Electric Com-
pany. Air conditioning apparatus. 4,378,679, CI. 62-280.000.
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Stolk, Steven A.: See—
Daenen, Theo E. G.; Van Dijk, Gerardus A. R.; and Stolk, Steven
A., 4.379,030, CI. 204-14.00N.
Stoll, Kurt. Piston designed for use with a magnetic force pickup.
4,378,726, CI. 92-243.000.
Stratmann, Josef; and Brinkmann, Willi, to Carl Still GmbH & Co. KG,
Firma. Charging hole lock for horizontal coke ovens. 4,379,023, CI.
202-247.000.
Straubel, Max; Eisele, Hermann; Zimmermann, Klaus-Dieter; and
Vogel, Wilhelm, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Method and apparatus for
fuel injection in internal combustion engines in particular diesel
engines. 4,378,775, CI. 123-458.000.
Strauts, Eric J.: See —
Flaherty, John J.; and Strauts, Eric J., 4,378,700, CI. 73-620.000.
Strehle, Josef: See —
Korbanka, Helmut; Stetter, Karl-Heinz; Illmann, Gunther; Jacob,
Rolf; Malitschek, Otto; and Strehle, Josef, 4,378,998, CI.
106-270.000.
Structural Concepts Corporation: See —
Doss, James A., 4,378,727, CI. 98-33.00R.
Strukl, Joseph S.: See—
Cengel, John A.; Hunt, Mark W.; Strukl, Joseph S.; and Pappas,
Peter G., 4,379,064, CI. 252-5 1.50A.
Sudano, John J.: See —
Rasekhi, Houshang; Nelson, Alfred M.; Kula, John S., Jr.; and
Sudano, John J., 4,378,754, CI. 118-658.000.
Sugie, Mamoni: See —
Toyooka, Takashi; Sugie, Mamoni; Aoki, Hirokazu; and Yo-
shizawa, Shigeru, 4,379,341, CI. 365-6.000.
Sugimoto, Hidehiko, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Power
control circuit for induction motor. 4,379,258, CI. 318-805.000.
Sugiura, Toshio: See —
Nakada, Akira; Okamoto, Eisaku; Sugiura, Toshio; and Yoshida,
Kiyoshi, 4,378,720, CI. 84-1.030.
Sugo, Takanobu: See —
Machi, Sueo; Ishigaki, Isao; and Sugo, Takanobu, 4,379,200, CI.
428-337.000.
Suman, George O., Jr. Method for completion of wells. 4,378,843, CI.
166-278.000.
Sumida, Seizo: See —
Yoshida, Ryo; Takemoto, Ichiki; Sumida, Seizo; and Kamoshita,
Katsuzo, 4,378,992, CI. 71-120.000.
Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited: See —
Yoshida, Ryo; Takemoto, Ichiki; Sumida, Seizo; and Kamoshiu,
Katsuzo, 4,378,992, CI. 71-120.000.
Summers, Gus E., to C. W. Zumbiel Co., The. Basket carrier. 4,378,880,
CI. 206-170.000.
Summers, Scott. Universal chain link counting apparatus and method.
4,379,223, CI. 235-103.000.
Sun Studs, Inc.: See —
Itkin, David E., 4,378,830, CI. 144-357.000.
Shrum, Kenneth L.; and Trax, Donald L., 4,378,827, CI. 144-
209.00A.
Sohn, Fred, 4,378,829, CI. 144-357.000.
Superior Valve Corporation: See —
Houston, James L., 4,378,817, CI. 137-315.000.
Susnjara, Kenneth J., to Thermwood Corporation. Apparatus for
performing work functions. 4,378,959, CI. 414-732.000.
Sutherland, James F.; Furgerson, Donald F.; and Kezunovic, Mladen,
to Electric Power Research Institute, Inc. Data highway access
control system. 4,379,294, CI. 340-825.500.
Suzuki, Atsushi: See —
Ninomiya, Masakazu; Suzuki, Atsushi; and Hirabayashi, Yuji,
4,379,333, CI. 364-431.050.
Suzuki Motor Co., Ltd.: See—
Yokoyama, Hiroshi; Ishida, Tokuzi; Kikuchi, Kunio; and Zama,
Kazuaki, 4,379,096, CI. 261-23.00A.
Sweda International, Inc.: See —
Staniszewski, Tadeusz, 4,378,938, CI. 271-179.000.
Sweed, Norman H.: See —
Yudovich, Amos; and Sweed, Norman H., 4,379,025, CI.
203-14.000.
Sweeney, William M., to Texaco Inc. Diesel fuel containing cyclohex-
ane, and oxygenated compounds. 4,378,973, CI. 44-56.000.
Szabo, Bela G.; and Hirschfleld, Dean J. Display coin holder assem-
blies. 4,378,876, CI. 206-45.340.
Szafranski, Joseph P.: See —
Busser, Darryl W.; and Szafranski, Joseph P., 4,379,332, CI.
364-431.050.
Tagaki, Shinji: See—
Kaneko, Kenkichi; Tanaka, Katsuyuki; Hayashi, Satoru;
Hakamada, Kensaku; Matsumoto, Masakazu; Tagaki, Shinji; and
Goshima, Takayuki, 4,378,721, CI. 84-1.140.
Taguchi, Yasuo: See —
Hachiga, Takasi; and Taguchi, Yasuo, 4,378,779, CI. 123-644.000.
Taiyo Shokai Co., Ltd.: See—
Onishi, Masami, 4,378,666, CI. 53-570.000.
Takagi, Kunihiko; and Yabushita, Yasunori, to Unitika, Ltd. Process for
pr(xlucing antithrombogenic vinyl acetate polymer or hydrolyzate
thereof. 4,378,803, CI. 604-280.000.
Tflkflffi S&toshi* Sec
Ne'gishi, Tokuji; Ito, Yukio; and Takagi, Satoshi, 4,378,917, CI.
242-186.000.
Takahashi, Akira: See —
Kamimura, Teturo; Komatsubara, Masahiro; Ando, Shizuo;
Inanaga, Takuzi; and Takahashi, Akira, 4,379,314, CI. 360-96.500.
Takanashi, Shigeru: See —
Ito, Kiyohiko; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamouu;
Sakai, Kazushige; Hau, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru,
4,379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Takano, Shuntaro: See—
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima.
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroda, Seietsu; Komatsu, Miwako;
Yasuda, Takashi; and Kodama. Yutaka, 4,379.152, CI.
424-246.000.
Takase, Susumu: See —
Yamamoto, Hideo; Takase, Susumu; and Thomas, R. Dale.
4,379,336, CI. 364-708.000.
Takashima, Okuta: See —
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima.
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroda, Seietsu; Komatsu. Miwako;
Yasuda, Takashi; and Kodama, YuUka, 4.379,152. CI.
424-246.000.
Takeda, Masaaki: See —
Hirata, Yasufumi; Yanagisawa, Isao; Tamura, Toshinari; and
Takeda, Masaaki, 4,379,158. CI. 424-273.00R.
Takeda, Yuji: See—
Sawada, Daisaku; Shigematsu, Takashi; and Takeda, Yuji.
4,378.771, CI. 123-425.000.
Takei, Isao, to Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha; and Nichiei Distribu-
tion Systems. Inc. Binding device for elongated pipes. 4,378,923, CI.
248-68.00R.
Takemae, Yoshihiro: See —
Nakano, Tomio; and Takemae. Yoshihiro, 4.379.342, CI
365-182.000.
Takemoto, Ichiki: See —
Yoshida, Ryo; Takemoto, Ichiki; Sumida, Seizo; and Kamoshita,
Katsuzo, 4,378,992, CI. 71-120.000.
Tamaki, Kazuyoshi: See —
Yamazoe, Hisamitsu; Sogabe. Ichita; Tamaki. Kazuyoshi; and
Yoshida, Matsuju. 4,378.766, CI. 123-339.000
Tambussi, William C, to Boeing Company. The. Fine film pressure
bags forming composite structures. 4,379,013, CI. 156-189.000
Tamura, Toshinari: See —
Hirata, Yasufumi; Yanagisawa, Isao; Tamura. Toshinan; and
Takeda, Masaaki, 4.379.158. CI. 424-273.00R.
Tanaka, Hideo: See —
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Shiroi, Takashi;
Saito, Norio; and Sasaoka, Michio, 4,379.032. CI. 204-59.00R
Tanaka, Hiroji: See —
Wakayama, Naoki; Yamagishi, Hideshi; Tomoda. Toshimasa; and
Tanaka, Hiroji, 4,379,248, CI. 313-93.000.
Tanaka, Katsuyuki: See —
Kaneko, Kenkichi; Tanaka, Katsuyuki; Hayashi, Satoru;
Hakamada, Kensaku; Matsumoto. Masakazu; Tagaki. Shinji; and
Goshima. Takayuki. 4.378.721. CI. 84-1.140.
Tanaka, Shinichiro: See —
Kobashi, Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Ito, Hiroshi. 4,378,767,
CI. 123-339.000.
Taniguchi, Hitoshi: See —
Teranishi. Susumu; Kawasaki. Yoichi; Katayama, Tsutomu; and
Taniguchi. Hitoshi. 4.379.084. CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Tanzi. Maria C: See—
Ferruti. Paolo; Danusso, Ferdinando; Tanzi, Maria C; and Quadro,
Giuseppe, 4,379,091. CI. 548-472.000.
Tarlow. Arthur S. Boat shoe. 4,378,641. CI. 36-32.00R.
Tasaico, Pedro: See —
Fitzpatrick, Brian J.; Bhargava, Rameshwar N.; Milch. Alfred E.;
and Tasaico, Pedro, 4,379,299, CI. 346-1.100.
Tasch, Aloysious F., Jr.: See —
Chatterjec, Pallab K.; and Tasch, Aloysious F., Jr., 4,379,306, CI.
357-24.000.
Taubenmann, Peter, to Krauss-MafTei Aktiengesellschaft. Mixing head
for reactive components. 4,379,122, CI. 422-133.000
Taylor, Carl D.: See —
Plemmons, Jerry R.; and Taylor, Carl D.. 4.379,321, CI.
362-267.000.
Taylor, Ronald P.; and Phillips, Barry A., to Mobay Chemical Corpora-
tion. Process for the production of elastic shaped anicles. 4,379,105,
CI. 264-45.500.
Techtransfer GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Roediger, Hanns, 4,378.886, CI. 209-606.000.
Teijin Limited: See —
Masuho, Yasuhiko; Umemoto. Naoji; Hara, Takeshi; and Hirai,
Hidematsu, 4,379,145, CI. 424-177.000.
Teledyne Industries, Inc.: See —
Leblanc, Raymond F.; and Cummins, William T., 4,378,749, CI.
1 14-220.000.
Lenz, Herman N., 4,378,960, CI. 415-115.000.
Telephonies Corporation: See—
Joscelyn, Edwin; Ferrante, Michael J.; and Saiya, Roben F.,
4,379,211, CI. 179-1 lO.OOA.
ten Lohuis, Gerhard: See—
Hospers, Johannes; and ten Lohuis, Gerhard, 4,378,725, CI.
87-12.000.
Tennant Company: See—
Haub, Donald J.; Brown, Neil T.; Krier, Keith N.; Hawkins, Ray-
mond C; and Seim, Howard N., 4,378,855, CI. 18O-65.00R.
Tenneco Inc.: See —
Petrak, Harry A., 4.378,868, CI. 192.93.00A.
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Terada. Jiro; and Nitta, Tsuneharu, to Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd. Multi-functional sensor. 4,378,691, CI. 73-27.00R.
Teranishi, Susumu; Kawasaki, Yoichi; Katayama, Tsutomu; and
Taniguchi, Hitoshi, to Fuji Oil Company Limited. Protein material
and method for the manufacture thereof. 4,379,084, CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Tetra Pak Developpement SA: See —
Rausing, Anders R.; and Nilsson, E. Ingvar, 4.379,014, CI.
156-191.000.
Texaco Inc.: See —
Begnaud, Claude M., 4,378,896, CI. 220-327.000.
Sweeney, William M., 4,378,973, CI. 44-56.000.
Texas Eastern Scientific Research, Inc.: See—
Hubbard, Larry E.; and Rhorer, ChfTord A., 4.379.291. CI.
340-682.000.
Texas Instruments Incorporated: See —
Chatterjee. Pallab K.; and Tasch. Aloysious F., Jr., 4,379,306, CI.
357-24.000.
Hopper, George S.. 4,379.232, CI. 250-332.000.
Therm wood Corporation: See —
Susnjara, Kenneth J., 4,378,959. CI. 414-732.000.
Thiokol Corporation: See —
Bell, Frank H., 4.378.674, CI. 60-39.823.
Thomas Jefferson University: See —
Osterholm. Jewell L., 4.378,797. CI. 604-24.000.
Thomas, John C. Alarm system for bicycles and the like. 4,379,281, CI.
340-63.000.
Thomas. R. Dale: See —
Yamamoto, Hideo; Takase. Susumu; and Thomas, R. Dale,
4,379,336, CI. 364-708.000.
Thominet, Michel; and Franceschini. Jacqueline. Novel substituted
heterocyclic phenoxyamines, the method of preparation thereof and
the use thereof as local anaesthetics. 4.379.161. CI. 424-274.000.
Thompson, Albert N., to M.H.A. Enterprises Ltd. Golf club cover.
4,378,832, CI. 15O-52.00G. .
Thompson, Marion E. Bulb mounting of solar cell. 4,379,324, CI.
362-253.000.
Thomson-CSF: See—
Chevallier, Rene, 4,379,297, CI. 343-882.000.
Thorsett, Eugene D.: See —
Greenlee, William J.; Harris, Elbert E.; Patchett, Arthur A.; and
Thorsett, Eugene D.. 4,379,146, CI. 424-177.000.
TI Crypton Limited: See —
Everett. Geoffrey J.; and Hunt. Christopher J.. 4.379.263. CI.
324-379.000.
Tick. Paul A., to Coming Glass Works. Tin-phosphorus oxyfluoride
glass containing aromatic organic compound. 4,379,070, CI.
252-301.160.
Tietjen, Donald; Lamb, Sharon; Shaw, Pern; Cawthron, Duane; and
Shannon, Paul D., to Motorola, Inc. Universal interface circuit for
synchronous and asynchronous buses. 4,379,327, CI. 364-200.000.
Tindall, Robert J.: See—
Kirsch, Kerry F.; Stauffer, Kirk R.; and Tindall, Robert J.,
4,379,335, CI. 364-513.000.
Todokoro, Hideo: See —
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; Yamamoto. Shigehiko; Todokoro, Hideo; Ka-
wase, Susumu; and Hirai, Yasuharu, 4,379,250, CI. 313-336.000.
Tokico, Ltd.: See-
Oka, Kenji, 4,378,705, CI. 74-37.000. -5^
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See — '^
Fujimoto. Shigeru, 4,379,119, CI. 376-302.000.
Nagata, Mitsuru, 4,379.268, CI. 330-260.000.
Nanu. Ryuho, 4,379,339, CI. 364-900.000.
Ochii, Kiyofumi; Masuda, Masami; and Kondo, Takeo, 4,379,346,
CI. 365-222.000.
Sakano, Hideki. 4,379.209, CI. 179-l.OOA.
Tomlinson, Peter N.; and Davies, Aulette. Abrasive product. 4.378,975.
CI. 51-309.000.
Tomoda, Toshimasa: See —
Wakayama, Naoki; Yamagishi. Hideshi; Tomoda. Toshimasa; and
Tanaka, Hiroji, 4,379,248. CI. 313-93.000.
Tomoskozi, Istvan; Gyory, Peter; Kovacs, Gabor; Virag, Sandol;
Kormoczy, Peter; and Stadler, Istvan, to Chinoin Gyogyszer es
Vegyeszeti Tcrmekek Gyara R.T. Vasodilative 4-thia-PGIi and
4-sulfinyl-PGIi and derivatives thereof. 4,379.164. CI. 424-285.000.
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka. Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Shiroi. Takashi; Saito,
Norio; and Sasaoka, Michio, to OUuka Kagaku Yakuhin Kabushiki
Kaisha. Process for preparing oxazolineazetidinone derivatives.
4,379,032, CI. 204-59.00R.
Toriyama, Tomomi: See —
Endo, Keiji; Toriyama, Tomomi; and Mori, Kisaku, 4,378,990, CI.
71-90.000.
Toshiba Corporation: See —
Hachiga, Takasi; and Taguchi. Yasuo, 4,378,779, CI. 123-644.000.
Toyama Chemical Co., Ltd.: See —
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima,
Okuta; Momonoi. Kaishu; Kuroda, Scietsu; Komatsu. Miwako;
Yasuda. Takashi; and Kodama, Yutaka. 4,379,152, CI.
424-246.000.
Toyo Boseki Kabushiki Kaish: See —
Fujimoto. Hiroshi; and Miyake, Hideo, 4,379,039, CI. 204-159.150.
Toyo Keiki Company Limited: See —
Ito. Koji; and Kondo, Akira, 4.379.283. CI. 382-18.000.
Toyo Kogyo Co.. Ltd.: See—
lida, Katsuyoshi; Yada. Yoshikuni; and Okazaki. Kathumi.
4,378.777. CI. 123-571.000.
Nishimori. Takayoshi. 4.378.776. CI. 123-571.000.
Toyooka, Takashi; Sugie, Mamoru; Aoki, Hirokazu; and Yoshizawa,
Shigeru, to Hitachi. Ltd. Series resonance drive circuit for magnetic
bubble memory. 4.379,341. CI. 365-6.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Itoh, Hiroshi; and Kobashi. Mamoru, 4,378,768, CI. 123-339.000.
Kobashi, Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Ito, Hiroshi, 4,378,767.
CI. 123-339.000.
Sawada, Daisaku; Shigematsu, Takashi; and Takeda, Yuji,
4,378,771, CI. 123-425.000.
Traber, Walter: See—
Boger. Manfred; Burckhardt. Urs; Kristinsson, Haukur; Mattern,
Gunter; and Traber. Walter, 4.379.147, CI. 424-200.000.
Transco Northwest. Inc.: See —
Schwab. Randall J., 4,378.874, CI. 198-802.000.
Transmet Corporation: See —
Gumienny. Anthony. 4.379,098, CI. 264-24.000.
Trautman, Gregory J., to PACCAR Inc. Bellows-type spring seal.
4,378,945, CI. 277-200.000.
Trax, Donald L.: See —
Shrum, Kenneth L.; and Trax. Donald L., 4,378,827, CI. 144-
209.00A.
Trebor Industries. Inc.: See —
Rosenthal, Scott B.. 4,379,233, CI. 250-553.000.
Trepl, John A., II. Wave action generator. 4,379,235, CI. 290-53.000.
Tressler. Richard E.: See —
Smith. Russell D.; and Tressler. Richard E., 4.379.111. CI.
264-137.000.
Tripp, Richard C: See —
Hettinga. David H.; Wargel. Robert J.; and Tripp, Richard C.
4.379.170. CI. 426^H).000.
Trottier. Carol S.: See—
Reichert. D. Jeanie; Trottier. Carol S.; and Calhoon, Cathy Y..
4,378,805, CI. 128-450.000.
Trousdell. Edmund D., to United Technologies Corporation. Case
assembly for supporting stator vanes. 4,378,961, CI. 415-137.000.
TRW Inc.: See-
Wolfe, John R., Jr., 4,378,964. CI. 425-463.000.
Trybulski. Eugene J., to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Process for the
preparation of 1 -(phenyl and halophenyl)-3,4-dihydro-4-[(dime-
thyIamino)methylene]5H-2-benzazepin-5-one-2-oxides. 4.379.090. CI.
260-239.0BB.
Tsuchiya, Eiichi. to Victor Company of Japan. Ltd. Tape cassette
loading device in a magnetic recording and/or reproducing appara-
tus. 4.379.313. CI. 360-96.500.
Tsvetkov. Nikolai S.; Maleev. Igor I.; Opainich. Irina E.; Lobkovskaya.
Lidia A.; Bogush. Alexandr R.; Sozanskaya. Alexandra D.; Onischak,
Evgeny I.; Gladyshevsky, Evgeny I.; and Opainich, Mikhail D.
Process for forming a reflecting copper coating on a face of a glass
substrate. 4,379,184, CI. 427-169.000.
Tucker, Council A.: See —
Perrin, Jack L.; Tucker, Council A.; and Gains. Oliver B..
4.378,912. CI. 242-55.300.
Tucker. George W. Method and apparatus for salvaging large pipe
elbows. 4.378.934. CI. 266-55.000.
Tuggle, Lloyd H.; Loyd. Ronald C; Johnson, Stanley A., Jr.; Patridge,
A. Gary; Ingham, John W.; and Friend, Kenneth J., to Emerson
Electric Co. Powered snow removal apparatus. 4,378,644, CI.
37-244.000.
Tyler, Hugh J.; and Conway, William H., to Robertshaw Controls
Company. Capacitive switch and panel. 4,379,287, CI. 34O-365.00C.
Uedaira, Satoru: See —
Makino, Yoshimi; Hayakawa, Masatoshi; Aso, Koichi; Uedaira,
Satoru; Ito, Shigeyasu; and Hotai, Kazuhide, 4,379,004, CI.
148-108.000.
Uehori, Yuji: See —
Ogawa, Shigeru; Uehori, Yuji; Matsumoto, Hiromi; and Nakajima,
Koe, 4,378.685, CI. 72-21.000.
Ueno, Kenji; and Ymazaki, Yoshio, to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co.,
Ltd. Developing apparatus for an image reproduction. 4,378,753, CI.
118-657.000.
Ulb, Horst: See—
Jaeschke, Hans; Spielau, Paul; and Ulb, Horst, 4,379,198, CI.
428-288.000.
Umemoto, Naoji: See —
Masuho, Yasuhiko; Umemoto, Naoji; Hara, Takeshi; and Hirai,
Hidematsu, 4,379,145, CI. 424-177.000.
Umezawa, Hidetsugo, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Weft detaining device
of shuttleless loom. 4,378,821, CI. 139-452.000.
Union Carbide Corporation: See —
DiSalvo, Gail D.; and Reedy, James D., 4,379,094, CI. 260-439.00R.
Weber. Willis W.; and Herbst, Joseph A., 4,379,134, CI.
423-626.000.
Union Oil Company of California: See —
Fenton, Donald M., 4,379,047, CI. 208-333.000.
United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority: See —
Pardoe, John A., 4,378,686, CI. 72-262.000.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, Minister of
Transport in Her Britannic Majesty's Government of the: See —
Watson, Peter M. F., 4,379,331, CI. 364-426.000.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, The Secretary
of State for Defence in Her Brittannic Majesty's Government of the:
See-
Pierce, Donald, 4,378,922, CI. 244-199.000.
United States of America
Army: See —
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
Farrar, Frederick G.; and Schaubert, Daniel H.. 4,379,296, CI.
343-70O.OMS.
Fifer, Robert A.; and Cole, James E., 4,379,007, CI. 149-22.000.
Hess, W. John; and Croker, Morris C, 4,379,050, CI. 210-151.000.
Holston, Robert E., 4,378,933, CI. 254-399.000.
Miller, Walter E., Jr.; and McKelvy, James W., 4,378,918, CI.
244-3.110.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration; administrator;
with respect to an invention of:
Feldstein, Cyril; Andrews, Thomas W.; Crawford, Donald W.;
and Cole, Mark A. System and method for moving a probe to
follow movements of tissue. 4,378,813, CI. 128-774.000.
Navy: See —
Allen, Ronald E.; Hudson, Robert J.; and Hager, Marshall W.,
4,378,921, CI. 244-151.00R.
Berke, Herbert; and Portoghese, Joseph, 4,379,309, CI.
358-154.000.
Klein, Edward A.; and Schimmel, Morry L., 4,378,739, CI.
102-204.000.
Lewis, Bernard L.; and Kretschmer, Frank F., 4,379,295, CI.
343-17.2PC.
U.S. Philips Corporation: See —
Bouwhuis, Gijsbertus; De Lang, Hendrik; and Dekkers, Nicolaas
H., 4,379,230, CI. 250-307.000.
Brouha, Marcel; van den Hoogenhof, Waltherus W.; and van
Loosdregt, Peter C, 4,379,251, CI. 313-403.000.
Daenen, Theo E. G.; Van Dijk, Gerardus A. R.; and Stolk, Steven
A., 4,379,030, CI. 204-14.00N.
Damen, Johannes P. M.; and Berben, Theodorus J., 4,379,021, CI.
156-616.00R.
Eshraghian, Kamran; and Bogner, Robert E., 4,379,280, CI. 340-
38.00L.
United Technologies Corporation: See —
Eitel, Frederick G., 4,378,626, CI. 29-527.200.
Kunz, Harold R.; Damiano, Paul J.; and Luczak, Francis J.,
4,379,036, CI. 204-103.000.
Trousdell, Edmund D., 4,378,961, CI. 415-137.000.
Unitika, Ltd.: See—
Takagi, Kunihiko; and Yabushita, Yasunori, 4,378,803, CI.
604-280.000.
University of California, The Regents of the: See —
Ishizaki, Goro; and Parker, Harold R., 4,378,810, CI. 128-754.000.
University of Minnesota, Regents of the: See-
Schwartz, Samuel, 4,378,971, CI. 436-66.000.
Uno, Hajime: See —
Araki, Yasuo; Uno, Hajime; Higuchi, Shigeharu; and Matsumoto,
Seiji, 4,379,183, CI. 427-127.000.
UOP Inc.: See-
Graves, Kevin J., 4,378,927, CI. 248-561.000.
Lilly. James A., 4,378,840, CI. 166-233.000.
UrI, Karlheinz, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Dynamic read amplifier
for metal-oxide-semiconductor memories. 4,379,345, CI. 365-205.000.
Uyeda, Tim M.: See —
Patterson, Charies A.; and Uyeda, Tim M., 4,378,609, CI. 5-12.00R.
Vadetec Corporation: See —
Pouliot, Harvey N.; and Elfes, Lee E., 4,378,708, CI. 74-191.000.
Valet, Jean- Yves: See—
Dol, Christian; and Valet, Jean-Yves, 4,379,302, CI. 346-74.200.
van den Hoogenhof, Waltherus W.: See—
Brouha, Marcel; van den Hoogenhof, Waltherus W.; and van
Loosdregt, Peter C, 4,379,251, CI. 313-403.000.
Van Dijk, Gerardus A. R.: See—
Daenen, Theo E. G.; Van Dijk, Gerardus A. R.; and Stolk, Steven
A., 4,379,030, CI. 204-14.00N.
van Hes, Roelof; Grosscurt, Amoldus C; and Balk, Wouter, to Duphar
International Research B.V. Sulphonyl compounds, method of pre-
paring the new compounds, as well as aphicidal compositions on the
basis of the new compounds. 4,379,157, CI. 424-270.000.
van Loosdregt, Peter C: See —
Brouha, Marcel; van den Hoogenhof, Waltherus W.; and van
Loosdregt, Peter C, 4,379,251, CI. 313-403.000.
Varadi, Andrew G.; and Maghribi, Walid H., to National Semiconduc-
tor Corporation. Process of performing bum-in and parallel func-
tional testing of integrated circuit memories in an environmental
chamber. 4,379,259, CI. 324-73.0AT.
Vaughan, Russell F.: See —
Anastas, Mark S.; and Vaughan, Russell F., 4,379,326, CI.
364-200.000.
Velarde, Ernest, Jr. EMsposable tail sleeve enveloping assembly.
4,378,667, CI. 54-78.000.
Venard, Walter B.: See-
Pierce, Russell D.; and Venard, Walter B., 4,379,179, CI. 427-8.000.
Victor Company of Japan, Ltd.: See —
Tsuchiya, Eiichi, 4,379,313, CI. 360-96.500.
Vincent, Richard G.; Sacks, Frank; and Steele, Robert F., to PAL
International. Tunable citizen band antenna. 4,379,298, CI.
343-895.000.
Virag, Sandol: See —
Tomoskozi, Istvan; Gyory, Peter; Kovacs, Gabor; Virag, Sandol;
Konnoczy, Peter; and Stadler, Istvan, 4,379,164, CI. 424-285.000.
Vironneau, Pierre. Solar heating units. 4,378,789, CI. 126-450.000.
Vogel, Wilhelm: See—
Straubel, Max; Eisele, Hermann; Zimmermann, Klaus-Dieter; and
Vogel, Wilhelm, 4,378,775, CI. 123-458.000.
Vogt, Calvin O.: See —
Feagins, Thomas J., Jr.; and Vogt, Calvin O., 4,379,334, CI.
364-467.000.
Vogt, Martin C: See-
Kim, Tai K.; Ritsko, Joseph E.; Maclnnis, Martin B , and Vogt.
Martin C, 4,379.126, CI. 423-54.000.
Volk, Michael J. Ripper attachment for multi-purpose woodworking
power tool guide ubie. 4,378,716, CI. 83-438.000.
Volkswagenwerk AG: See —
Keinberger, Franz. 4,378.916. CI. 242-107.200.
Von Gutfeld, Robert J.: See—
Melcher, Robert L.; Romankiw. Lubomyr T ; and Von Gutfeld.
Robert J.. 4,379,022. CI. 156-643.000.
Vorontsov, Sergei P., deceased: See—
Lytkin, Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov. Jury S.; Polikar-
pova. Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Scljutina, Mana G.;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov, Sergei
P., deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator; Chistozvonov,
David B., deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G.. adminstrator,
4.379,078, CI. 252-466.00J.
Vorontsova, Nina F., administrator: See —
Lytkin, Viktor P.; Menshov, Vladimir N.; Frolov, Jury S.; Polikar-
pova, Zinaida A.; Sobolevsky, Viktor S.; Scljutina, Maria G.;
Anokhin, Vladimir N.; Barbosov, Nikolai D.; Vorontsov. Sergei
P.. deceased; Vorontsova, Nina F.. administrator; Chistozvonov.
David B.. deceased; and Chistozvonova, Vera G.. adminstrator,
4,379,078, CI. 252-466.00J.
Voytko, Charles L.; and Boudreau, Robert J., to Brown Group Recre-
ational Products, Inc. Stroller canopy structure. 4,378,946, CI.
280-642.000.
W. Eckold AG: See—
Molz, Theodor, 4.378,689, CI. 72-466.000.
W. R. Grace & Co.: See—
Baird, William G.. Jr.; Holbrook, SUnley E.; and Piatt. Jeremy A.,
4,379,117, CI. 264-514.000.
Simpson, Edgar A.. 4.379,109, CI. 264-60.000.
Wada, Makoto: See —
Kasama, Tsuneo; Saito, Takao; and Wada. Makoto. 4,378,997, CI.
106-89.000.
Wadsworth, Thomas G. Elbow replacement prosthesis. 4.378.607, CI.
3-1.910.
Wahlquist. Joseph D.; and Shultz, Jay, to Kimberly-Clark Corporation.
Impervious absorbent barrier fabric embodying films and fibrous
webs. 4,379,192, CI. 428-156.000.
Wahnschaffe, Jurgen: See —
Abermeth, Hubert; Deckert, Andreas; Muller, Helmut; and Wahn-
schaffe, Jurgen, 4,378,765, CI. 123-321.000.
Wakayama, Naoki; Yamagishi, Hideshi; Tomoda, Toshimasa, and
Tanaka, Hiroji, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha; and Japan
Atomic Energy Research Institute. Ionization chamber having coaxi-
ally arranged cylindrical electrodes. 4,379.248, CI 313-93.000
Walker, Peter J., to Midland-Ross Corporation. Method and apparatus
for uniformly drying a continuous web of cellulosic fibers. 4,378.639.
CI. 34-12.000.
Walle, L. Irwin, to Air Monitor Co., Inc. Leak detecting monitor.
4,378,692, CI. 73-49.200.
Walsh, Andrew R.: See-
Whitney. C. Raymond; and Walsh, Andrew R., 4.379.120, CI.
420-448.000.
Walsh, Peter, to Duro-Test. Corporation. Incandescent lamp with
ellipsoidal envelope and infrared reflector. 4.379,249. CI 313-1 12.000.
Wang Laboratories, Inc.: See-
Alfred M.; Kula, John S., Jr.; and
CI. 118-658.000.
Rasekhi, Houshang; Nelson,
Sudano, John J., 4,378.754.
Wardropper, Peter F.: See-
Mountain, David S.; Allnutt,
Laurence J.; Picot, Alan J.;
Anthony J.; Baker. Lionel R.; Cox.
Wardropper. Peter F ; and Webber,
Julian M., 4.378,701, CI. 73-808.000.
Ware, Franklyn O.; and McDonald, William S . to MPW Tech Associ-
ates. Production of waterproof corrugated paperboard. 4,379.015, CI.
156-205.000.
Wargel, Robert J.: See—
Hettinga, David H.; Wargel. Robert J.; and Tripp, Richard C,
4,379.170, CI. 426-40.000.
Warner Lambert Technologies, Inc.: See —
Siegmund, Walter P.. 4,378,952, CI. 350-96.250.
Watson, Peter M. F., to United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland, Minister of Transport in Her Britannic Majesty's Govern-
ment of the. Failure warning for a vehicle information processing
system. 4,379,331, CI. 364-426.000.
Wean United, Inc.: See —
Adams, Thomas O.; and Henke. Jim A., 4.378.91 1. CI. 241-187.000.
Weaver. Harry R.: See —
Ammon, J. Preston; Weaver, Harry R.; and Norman. Richard O..
4,378,632, CI. 29-845.000.
Crisman, Thomas L.; Moore, Stanley R.; and Weaver, Harry R.,
4,378,625, CI. 29-450.000.
Webber, Julian M.: See-
Mountain, David S.; Allnutt, Anthony J.; Baker, Lionel R.; Cox,
Laurence J.; Picot, Alan J.; Wardropper, Peter F.; and Webber,
Julian M., 4,378,701, CI. 73-808.000.
Weber, Willis W.; and Herbst, Joseph A., to Union Carbide Corpora-
tion. Process of preparing high purity alumina bodies. 4,379,134, CI.
423-626.000.
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 5, 1983
Weider, Armin W.; See —
Homg, Cheng T.; Konian, Richard R.; Schwenker, Robert O.; and
Welder, Armin W,, 4,378,630, CI. 29-580.000.
Weigand, Norbert: See —
Ehlers, Helmut H.; Eggensperger, Heinz; Bucklers, Lothar; Ei-
gener, Ulrich; Diehl, Karl-Heinz; and Weigand, Norbert,
4,379.137, CI. 424-78.000.
Weiss, Hans J. Method and apparatus for solder bonding multilayer
tubmg. 4.379,216, CI. 219-85.0CM.
Wcsemeyer, Jurgen: See —
Haubner. Georg; Wesemeyer, Jurgen; Meier. Werner; and
Schrumpf, Hans, 4.378,769. CI. 123-416.000.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See —
Boykin, John R., 4,379,284, CI. 340-3 lO.OOR.
Conroy. Ernest F.. Jr.; Orange, Daniel P.; and Elms, Robert T..
4,379,317, CI. 361-85.000.
Dailey, George F.; Ruffrng, Charles R.; and Simmonds. Leonard
B.. 4,379.243, CI. 310-260.000.
Rootham. Michael W.; and Forrester. James A.. 4.379,081, CI.
252-628.000.
Weyer, Rudi: See —
Hitzel, Volker; Weyer, Rudi; Geisen, Karl; and Regitz, Gunter,
4.379.153. CI. 424-256.000.
Wheatley, Mark A., to Racal-Dana Instruments Limited. AGC Circuit
with level-compensating input. 4,379,272, CI. 332-38.000.
Wheelabrator-Freye Inc.: See —
Leliaert, Raymond M.; Kanouse, Richard C; Butler, Bill J.; and
Lindner, Robert N., 4,378.662, CI. 51-432.000.
Wheeler, Robert B.: See—
Patel, Dhirajlal C; and Wheeler, Robert B., 4,378,847, CI.
166-317.000.
Whipple Patent Management Corporation: See—
Perrault, Frederick; and Perrault. Raymond E., 4,379.204, CI.
174-65.0SS. -
White, Pat M : See—
Ogden, James D.; and White, Pat M., 4,378,838, CI. 166-153.000.
Whiteman, Patrick W., to Recycled Paper Bedding, Inc. Animal bed-
ding, process and apparatus for preparing the same. 4,378.756, CI.
119-1.000.
Whitman Medical Corporation: See —
Lichtenstein, Joseph. 4.378.808. CI. 128-736.000.
Whitney, C. Raymond; and Walsh, Andrew R.. to Carpenter Technol-
ogy Corporation. Sulfldation resistant nickel-iron base alloy.
4,379,120, CI. 420-448.000.
Wick, John R. Cutting tool. 4,378,636. CI. 30-92.000.
Wickerhauser, Milan: See —
Williams, Craigenne A.; and Wickerhauser, Milan, 4,379.085. CI.
260-1 12.00B.
Wickramasinghe. Hemantha K., to National Research Development
Corporation. Scanning acoustic microscope. 4,378.699, CI.
73-606.000.
Wiener-Avnear, Eliezer: See —
Bleha, William P., Jr.; Wiener-Avnear, Eliezer; and Robusto, Paul
F., 4.378,955. CI. 350-334.000.
Wiener, Dieter. Method of and means for grinding pairs of gear wheels
as spiral or curved toothed bevel gear wheels. 4,378,660, CI. 51-
56.0OG.
Wiens, Lewis H.: See —
Saylor, James R.; Wiens, Lewis H.; and Blume, Orville E.,
4.378.742, CI. 105-377.000.
Wilby, John L.: See-
Hockey, John A.; Shaw, Malcolm A.; Wilby, John L.; and Wilson,
Allan A., 4,379,059, CI. 252-8.800.
Wild, Norman W. Bed frame sit-up exerciser. 4,378.939. CI. 272-93.000.
Wilde. Sheldon L.; McCandless, Thomas J.; and Saunders. Robert M..
to H-C Industries, Inc. Composite closure. 4.378,893, CI. 215-246.000.
Wilks, Joe A. Blowout preventer with mechanically operated relief
valve. 4.378,849. CI. 166-369.000.
William Prym-Werke KG: See—
Sauermilch. Otto. 4,378.900, CI. 227-8.000.
Williams, Craigenne A.; and Wickerhauser, Milan, to American Na-
tional Red Cross. Heat stabilization of plasma proteins. 4,379,085. CI.
260-1 12.00B.
Williams, Loren V.: See —
Chappelle, Claude L., 4,379,043, CI. 204-229.000.
Williams, Mark A., to Cincinnati Milacron Inc. Novel functional fluid.
4,379,063, CI. 252-33.600.
Willis, W. Coy; and Albrecht. Leman P., to Aluminum Company of
America. Tamper-evident closure. 4.378,894. CI. 215-252.000.
Wilson, Alan A., to Progressive Merchandising Display Limited. Kit
for the construction of a three dimensional figure. 4,378,654, CI.
46-115.000.
Wilson. Alan S.: See-
Biggin. Ian S.; and Wilson. Alan S.. 4,379,000, CI. 106-311.000.
Wilson, Allan A.: See —
Hockey, John A.; Shaw, Malcolm A.; Wilby. John L.; and Wilson,
Allan A.. 4,379.059, CI. 252-8.800.
Wilson, James M., to Ferro Corporation. Monolithic ceramic capacitors
and improved ternary ceramic compositions for producing same.
4,379,319. CI. 361-321.000.
Winchell, David A.: See—
Fowles. Thomas A.; Slater, Glenn L.; and Winchell, David A.,
4.378,891, CI. 215-32.000.
Winkler -I- Dunnebier Maschinefabrik und Eisengiesseret GmbH & Co.
KG: See—
Stemmler. Kurt; and Metheisen. Heinrich, 4,379,016, CI.
156-205.000.
Winn, Ray, to Advanced Semiconductor Products. Thin, optical mem-
branes and methods and apparatus for making them. 4,378,953, CI.
350-171.000.
Wirz, Amo, to Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG. Sheet transfer
cylinder for sheet-fed rotary printing machines convertible between
first form and perfector printing. 4,378,734, CI. 101-230.000.
Woinarski, Peter A., to Innovative Design Company Pty. Limited.
Container-closure arrangement. 4,378,895, CI. 220-306.000.
Wolfe, John R., Jr., to TRW Inc. Internally insulated extrusion die.
4,378,964. CI. 425-463.000.
Wolff, Natalie A.: See—
Botterman, David L.; and Wolff, Natalie A., 4,378,877, CI.
206-141.000.
Wolz, Johannes: See —
a'Brassard, Hans-Joachim; Kloss, Robert; Ketzler, Paul; and Wolz.
Johannes. 4,378,704, CI. 73-862.070.
Wood, Robert A. Reversible solar assisted heat pump. 4,378,908, CI.
237-2.00B.
Woodall, Jerry M.: See-
Hovel, Harold J.; and Woodall. Jerry M., 4,379,005. CI.
148-187.000.
Work. Dale E.; and Johnson. Stephen G., to GTE Products Corpora-
tion. Arc discharge device containing HG196. 4,379,252. CI.
313-485.000.
Workman, Ernest J.: See —
Bush, Eric L.; and Workman. Ernest J.. 4.379.186, CI. 427-213.000.
Worringer. Thomas J.: See —
Allan, Kenneth N.; Worringer, Thomas J.; and Baugh, Robert T.,
4,378,875. CI. 198-815.000.
Worrix. Matthew L.: See —
Lott, Donald L.; Schockelt. Guenter G.; and Worrix, Matthew L.,
4,378,751, CI. 116-271.000.
Wu, Margaret M.: See —
Klosek, John M.; and Wu, Margaret M., 4,379,027, CI. 203-32.000.
Wunderwald, Peter: See —
Port, Hans; Schrenk, Jurgen; and Wunderwald, Peter, 4,379,142.
CI. 424-101.000.
Wyner, Aaron D.. to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Analog signal scrambling system. 4,379,205. CI. 178-22.100.
Xerox Corporation: See —
Fischbeck, Kenneth H., 4,379,300, CI. 346-1.100.
Fischbeck, Kenneth H., 4,379,301, CI. 346-1.100.
Yabushita, Yasunori: See —
Takagi, Kunihiko; and Yabushita, Yasunori, 4,378,803, CI.
604-280.000.
Yada, Yoshikuni: See —
lida, Katsuyoshi; Yada, Yoshikuni; and Okazaki, Kathumi,
4.378,777, CI. 123-571.000.
Yamada, Takahiro: See —
Nakagaki, Mitsuhirb; Isoo. Osamu; Matsuoka, Shinji; and Yamada,
Takahiro. 4,379,303, CI. 346-75.000.
Yamada, Takeo: See —
Fukushima. Tsutomu; Furukawa. Takeshi; Saito, Shin-ichi;
Kobayashi, Takashi; and Yamada, Takeo, 4,378,993, CI.
75-41.000.
Yamagishi, Hideshi: See — ^
Wakayama, Naoki; Yamagishi, Hideshi; Tomoda, Toshimasa; and
Tanaka, Hiroji, 4,379,248, CI. 313-93.000.
Yamaguchi, Azuma: See —
Sato. Makoto; Kimura, Isami; and Yamaguchi, Azuma, 4,379,148,
CI. 424-232.000.
Yamaguchi, Yoshiharu: See —
Matsuda, Yoshio; and Yamaguchi, Yoshiharu, 4,378,683, CI.
66-193.000.
Yamamoto. Hideo; Takase, Susumu; and Thomas, R. Dale, to Canon
Business Machines, Inc. Modular calculator with separable keyboard
and display modules. 4,379,336, CI. 364-708.000.
Yamamoto. Shigehiko: See —
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; Yamamoto, Shigehiko; Todokoro, Hideo; Ka-
wase, Susumu; and Hirai, Yasuharu, 4.379,250, CI. 313-336.000.
Yamamoto, Tetsuhiro: See —
Shibata, Takaaki; and Yamamoto, Tetsuhiro, 4,379,009, CI.
156-86.000.
Yamamoto, Yousuke: See —
Sakai. Tetsushi; Kobayasi, Yoshiji; Yamamoto, Yousuke; and
Yamauchi, Hironori, 4,379,001, CI. 148-1.500.
Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See —
Hirata, Yasufumi; Yanagisawa, Isao; Tamura, Toshinari; and
Takeda, Masaaki, 4,379,158, CI. 424-273.00R.
Yamauchi, Hironori: See —
Sakai, Tetsushi; Kobayasi, Yoshiji; Yamamoto, Yousuke; and
Yamauchi, Hironori, 4,379,001, CI. 148-1.500.
Yamazaki, Tamotsu: See —
Ito, Kiyohiko; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami, Yasushi; Akima, Mi-
chitaka; Aono, Jinichiro; Ohba, Yasuhiro; Yamazaki, Tamotsu;
Sakai, Kazushige; Hata, Shun-ichi; and Takanashi, Shigeru,
4,379,150, CI. 424-244.000.
Yamazaki, Yoji: See —
Sasaki, Shuji; and Yamazaki, Yoji, 4,379,135, CI. 436-536.000.
Yamazoe, Hisamitsu; Sogabe, IchiU; Tamaki, Kazuyoshi; and Yoshida,
Matsuju, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Closed loop idle engine speed
April 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 27
control with a valve operating relative to neutral position. 4,378,766,
CI. 123-339.000.
Yanagisawa, Isao: See —
Hirata, Yasufumi; Yanagisawa, Isao; Tamura, Toshinari; and
Takeda, Masaaki, 4,379,158, CI. 424-273.00R.
Yanase, Tomoo; and Arai, Motohiro, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.
Method of manufacturing optical fibers. 4,378,986, CI. 65-3.120.
Yarham, Oliver L.; Sech, John M.; and Kennedy, Carl S., to Naico
Chemical Company. Water-based rust inhibitor. 4,379,072, CI. 252-
389.00R.
Yarwood, Dennis, to Clino Foundry Supplies Limited. Method for
preparing binder for refractory powders. 4,378,996, CI. 106-38.350.
Yasuda, Takashi: See —
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima,
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroda, Seietsu; Komatsu, Miwako;
Yasuda, Takashi; and Kodama, Yutaka, 4,379,152, CI.
424-246.000.
Yeager, Howard L., to Olin Corporation. Method of measuring metallic
cation and water transport numbers for cation exchange hydrauli-
cally impermeable membranes and test cell therefor. 4,379,029, CI.
204- LOOT.
Ymazaki, Yoshio: See —
Ueno, Kenji; and Ymazaki, Yoshio, 4,378,753, CI. 1 18-657.000.
Yokohama Kiko Co.: See —
Senaha, Susumu; Chiba, Tetsuya; Ohno, Akira; and Katayama,
Shitomi, 4,379,199, CI. 428-332.000.
Yokota, Teppei; and Joichi, Yoshiro, to Sony Corporation. Digital
signal processing circuit. 4,379,286, CI. 340-347.0DD.
Yokoyama, Hiroshi; Ishida, Tokuzi; Kikuchi, Kunio; and Zama,
Kazuaki, to Suzuki Motor Co., Ltd.; and Mikuni Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Compound carburetor. 4,379,096, CI. 261-23.00A.
Yoneyama, Saburo: See —
Ishii, Shizuo; and Yoneyama, Saburo, 4,378,965, CI. 474-161.000.
Yoshida, Chosaku: See —
Saikawa, Isamu; Takano, Shuntaro; Yoshida, Chosaku; Takashima,
Okuta; Momonoi, Kaishu; Kuroda, Seietsu; Komatsu, Miwako;
Yasuda, Takashi; and Kodama, Yutaka, 4,379,152, CI.
424-246.000.
Yoshida, Kiyoshi: See —
Nakada, Akira; Okamoto, Eisaku; Sugiura, Toshio; and Yoshida,
Kiyoshi, 4,378,720, CI. 84-1.030.
Yoshida Kogyo K. K.: See—
Matsuda, Yoshio; and Yamaguchi, Yoshiharu, 4,378,683, CI.
66-193.000.
Yoshida, Masaru: See —
Kaetsu, Isao; and Yoshida, Masaru, 4,379,038, CI 204-159.120.
Yoshida, Matsuju: See —
Yamazoe, Hisamitsu; Sogabe, Ichita; Tamaki, Kazuyoshi; and
Yoshida, Matsuju, 4,378,766, CI. 123-339.000.
Yoshida, Ryo; Takemoto, Ichiki; Sumida, Seizo; and Kamoshita, Kat-
suzo, to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited. Urea derivatives,
and their production and use. 4,378,992, CI. 71-120.000.
Yoshifuji, Junnosuke, to Nippon Cable System, Inc. Control cable.
4,378,712, CI. 74-501.00R.
Yoshino Kogyosho Co., Ltd.: See-
Ota, Akiho; and Negishi, Fumio, 4,379,099, CI. 264-25.000.
Yoshizawa, Shigeru: See —
Toyooka, Takashi; Sugie, Mamoru; Aoki, Hirokazu; and Yo-
shizawa, Shigeru, 4,379,341, CI. 365-6.000.
Yotsuya, Minoru; Mae, Kiyoshi; Jinnouchi, Seikyu; and Ochiai, Toshio,
to Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Inc Proces.s for bleaching fibrous
material by hydrogen peroxide. 4,378.967, CI. 8-111 000
Youmans, Grace A. Method and means of melting frozen matenal on
terrain or water surfaces. 4,379,217, CI. 219-121 OOL
Young, Chi C; and DeMaria, Francesco, to American Cyanamid
Company. Melt spinning process for acrylonitnle polymer fiber-three
or more stretch stages. 4,379,1 13, CI. 264-206.000
Young, Ian A., to Mostek Corporation. Low power differential ampli-
fier. 4,379,267, CI. 330-253.000.
Young, Ian R., to Picker International Limited Nuclear magnetic
resonance systems. 4,379,262, CI. 324-309.000.
Yudovich, Amos; and Sweed, Norman H., to Atlantic Richfield Com-
pany. Water removal from butylene oxides by liquid extraction with
selected extractive solvents. 4,379,025, CI. 203-14.000
Zabotin, Alexandr A.: See —
Lileev, Valerian P.; Onikov, Eduard A.; and Zabotin, Alexandr A..
4,378,820, CI. 139-436.000.
Zahradnik, Robert J.: See —
Hart, James E.; and Zahradnik, Robert J., 4,378.950, CI. 303-36.000
Zama, Kazuaki: See —
Yokoyama, Hiroshi; Ishida, Tokuzi; Kikuchi, Kunio; and Zama,
Kazuaki, 4,379,096, CI. 261-23.00A.
Zander, Hans-Hermann: See—
Krampe, Dietrich; Schneider, Hans-Peter; and Zander, Hans-Her-
mann, 4,379,325, CI. 363-35.000.
Zander, Maximilian; Blumer, Gerd-Peter; Collin. Gerd; Glaser. Her-
bert; and Marrett, Rolf, to Rutgerswerke Aktiengesellschaft Process
for anisotropic carbon production. 4,379,133, CI. 423-445.000.
Zeidler, Georg: .See —
Hansen, Guenter; Kolbinger, Hans J.; Senninger, Rudolf: and
Zeidler, Georg, 4,378,969, Ci. 8-521.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See —
Hansen, Kai, 4,379,274, CI. 333-194.000.
Zilka, Stanley: See —
Shiminski, James, 4,378,828, CI. 144-285.000.
Zimmerman, Alfred B.; and Memering, Leroy J , to National Distillers
& Chemical Corp. Surface hydrolyzed olefin-vinyi ester container
coatings. 4,379,188, CI. 428-35.000.
Zimmerman, Charles J. Composition for wood treatment. 4,379,073, CI.
252-400.00R.
Zimmermann, Klaus-Dieter: See —
Straubel, Max; Eisele. Hermann; Zimmermann, Klaus-Dieter; and
Vogel, Wilhelm, 4,378,775, CI. 123-458.000.
Zimmermann, Theo, to Lemmerz-Werke KGaA. Process and apparatus
for the production of disc wheels made of sheet metal, particularly
light sheet metal. 4,378,623, CI. 29-159.010
Zubryckyj, Nicolaus: See—
Bolton. Gerald L.; Sefton, Vemer B.; and Zubryckyj. Nicolaus.
4,379,037, CI. 204-119.000.
Zumstein, Bruno, to BBC Brown. Boveri & Company Limited. Bypass
control apF)aratus for turbocharged internal-combustion engines.
4.378,677, CI. 60-606.000.
Zumwalt, Gary L.: See —
Medlin, William L.; Mullins, Lynn D.; and Zumwalt, Gary L..
4,378,845, CI. 166-297.000.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 5th DAY OF APRIL, 1983
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Amchem Products, Inc : See —
Binns, Robert E.. Re. 31,198, CI. 134-3.000.
Bendix Corporation, The: See —
Presley, Rex W.; and Lorraine, Jack R., Re. 31,199, CI.
310-168.000.
Binns, Robert E., to Amchem Products, Inc. Method for cleaning
aluminum at low temperatures. Re. 31,198, CI. 134-3.000.
Cocco, Eugene R., to Western Electric Company, Inc. Telephone cord
having braided outer jacket. Re. 31,197, CI. 339-103.00M.
Lorraine, Jack R.: See —
Presley, Rex W.; and Lorraine, Jack R., Re. 31,199, CI.
310-168.000.
Presley, Rex W.; and Lorraine, Jack R., to Bendix Corporation, The.
Magnetic speed sensor. Re. 31,199, CI. 310-168.000.
Sowell, William E., to Van Dyken, Andrew. Throttle control device
for motorcycles and the like. Re. 31,196, CI. 74-488.000.
Sukonick, Josef S.; and Tilden, Greg J., to Xtrak Corporation. Raster
scan display apparatus for dynamically viewing image elements
stored in a random access memory array. Re. 31,200, CI. 340-724.000.
Thumer, Heinz. Method and a device for ascertaining the degree of
compaction of a bed of material with a vibratory compacting device.
Re. 31,195, CI. 73-573.000.
Tilden, Greg J.: See —
Sukonick, Josef S.; and Tilden, Greg J., Re. 31,200, CI 340-724.000.
Van Dyken, Andrew: See —
Sowell, William E., Re. 31,196, CI. 74-488.000.
Western Electric Company, Inc.: See —
Cocco, Eugene R., Re. 31,197, CI. 339-103.00M.
Xtrak Corporation: See —
Sukonick, Josef S.; and Tilden, Greg J., Re 31,200, CI. 340-724.000.
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Oliver. James Peter; and Hickin, George Keller, to Freepxjrt
Minerals Company. Apparatus and process for determining par-
ticle size by X-ray absorption analysis. Bl 3,621,243, CI. 378 —
51
Freeport Minerals Company: See —
Oliver, James Peter, and Hickin, George D. Keller. BI
3,621,243. CI. 378—51,
Linder, Seymour M.; and Calentine, John W.. to Alcolac Inc.
Air-curing Copolymer latices. Bl 4,144,212, CI. 524—818.
Alcolac Inc.: See —
Linder, Seymour M.; and Calentine, John W. Bl 4,144,212, CI.
524—818.
Laliberte, Albert J., and DeAngelis, Armand, to Omnitech Inc.
Method of coating articles. Bl 3,956,540, CI. 427—164.
Omnitech Inc.: See —
Laliberte, Albert J., and DeAngelis, Armand. Bl 3,956,540, CI.
427—164.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Adair, Ronald C. Plow assembly. 268,497, 4-5-83, CI. D15-1 1.000.
Alwell, Anne T.; Fogarty, A. Edward; Fogarty, Bonnie R.; Pagani,
David A.; and Pook, Peter D., to Leisure Dynamics, Inc. Game
apparatus. 268,507, 4-5-83, CI. D2 1-168.000.
Amco Corporation: See —
Olson, Ralph B., 268.463, CI. D6-188.000.
Ament, Duane S., to Miracle Recreation Equipment Company. Light-
ing fixture. 268,530, 4-5-83, CI. D26-94.000.
Andersen, Harold W.; Harrison, Charles H.; and Worth, Melvin H., Jr.,
to University Testing Service Inc. Suction drainage device for surgi-
cal purposes. 268,525, 4-5-83, CI. D24-56.000.
Arends, Harm J.; Mirtain, Henri J.; and Zinnen, Norbert, to Uniroyal
Englebert Reifen GmbH. Tire. 268,489, 4-5-83, CI. D 12- 143.000.
Amott, John; and Campbell, Mark I., to John Amott & Associates
Limited. Bicycle storage rack. 268,488, 4-5-83, CI. D 12- 115.000.
Arp, Robert A.: See —
Scanlan, Dennis R., Jr.; and Arp, Robert A., 268,523, CI. D24-
27,000.
Bachman. Alan B. Flashlight. 268,527, 4-5-83, CI. D26-46.000.
Bagby Engineering Co.: See —
Bagby, Wilbur W,, 268,498, CI. D15-123.000.
Bagby, Wilbur W., to Bagby Engineering Co. Rotor element compo-
nent for a coal crusher. 268,498, 4-5-83, CI. D 15- 123.000.
Bedard, Gerald R. See—
Oleniak. Donald: and Bedard, Gerald R., 268,456. CI. D3-10.000.
PI 28
Bellini, Mario, to Ing. C. Olivetti & C. S.p.A. Case for a portable
typewriter. 268,457, 4-5-83, CI. D3-72.000.
Bergguist, Gregory D.; and Jones, John A., to Simmons Universal
Corporation. Sofa frame. 268,465, 4-5-83, CI. D6- 19 1.000.
Best Toys Co. Ltd.. The: See-
Tung, Wai-Kuen, 268,506, CI. D21-161.000.
Boeckers, Roger W.: See —
Lien, Douglas ,£.. 268,512. CI. D23-19.000.
Breaux, Larry W. Portable, figure-reducing roller exerciser. 268,509,
4-5-83. CI. D2 1-198.000.
Bridgestone Tire Company Limited: See —
Kojima, Hiroshi; Nishio, Hideaki; and Yashima, Toshihiko,
268,491, CI. D12-147.000.
Campbell, Mark I.: See —
Amott, John; and Campbell, Mark I., 268,488, CI. D12-1 15.000.
Caravan Camper Manufacturing Co.: See —
Domes, David C, 268,478. CI. D8-341.000.
Charlson. Thomas M. Horseshoe. 268.534, 4-5-83, CI. D30-35.000.
Charlson, Thomas M. Horseshoe. 268,535, 4-5-83, CI. D30-35.000.
Claude, Georges. Wrist watch. 268,485, 4-5-83. CI. D 10-38.000.
Clemente, Roger. Electric fan for engine cooling. 268,521, 4-5-83, CI.
D23- 158.000.
Coca-Cola Company, The: See —
LeCaire Jr., Robert A., 268,520, CI. D23-1 50.000.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 29
Compagnie Generale des Etablissements Michelin: See —
Grenie, Philippe, 268,492, CI. D 12- 147.000.
Cox, John A., to Mobay Chemical Corporation. Plastic container for
liquids. 268,480, 4-5-83, CI. D9-378.000.
Craig, Joe D.; Grez, Joan; Rensi, Edward H.; and Salsbury, Richard R.,
to McDonald's Corporation. Mobile salad bar. 268,537, 4-5-83. CI.
D34- 14.000.
Cyrell, Alexander. Speaker mounting bracket. 268,494, 4-5-83, CI.
D 14-37.000.
D'Addio, Janie: See —
D'Addio, Salvatore R.; and D'Addio, Janie, 268,524, CI. D24-
41.000.
D'Addio, Salvatore R.; and D'Addio, Janie. Acupressure instrument for
applying rolling pressure to the human body. 268,524, 4-5-83, CI.
D24-41.000.
Daenen, Robert H. C. M., to Dart Industries Inc. Picture frame or the
like. 268,467, 4-5-83, CI. D6-235.000.
Dart Industries Inc.: See —
Daenen, Robert H. C. M., 268,467. CI. D6-235.000.
Gremonprez. Dan E., 268,471, CI. D7-355.000.
Kato, Masao, 268.470, CI. D7-79.000.
Davis. Edward M. Branding iron. 268,536, 4-5-83, CI. D30-43.000.
Day, Charles E., deceased: See —
Wess, Kenneth F.; and Day, Charles E., deceased. 268.461. CI.
D6- 114.000.
Day, Frances B.: See —
Wess, Kenneth F.; and Day, Charles E., deceased, 268,461, CI.
D6- 114.000.
Day, Frances B., executrix: See —
Wess, Kenneth F.; and Day, Charles E., deceased. 268,461, CI.
D6- 114.000.
Diversified Products Corporation: See —
Silberman, Ira J.; Hill, William J.; and Kelley, Robert C. 268,508.
CI. D21-195.000.
Domes, David C, to Caravan Camper Manufacturing Co. Multiple
access slide-lock. 268,478, 4-5-83, CI. D8-341.000.
Douglas, James T. Plant holder. 268,462, 4-5-83, CI. D6- 137.000.
Dunlop Tire and Rubber Corporation: See —
Mills, Anthony M.; and Egan, Daniel C. 268.490. CI. D12-146.000.
Egan. Daniel C: See—
Mills. Anthony M.; and Egan, Daniel C, 268,490, CI. D12-146.000.
Emerson Electric Co.: See —
Mitchell, Richard L.; and Heron, Thomas A., 268,493, CI. D13-
37.000.
Entex Industries, Inc.: See—
Hanzawa, Tsuneo, 268,496, CI. D 1 4- 100.000.
Etablissements Huret et Ses Fils: See —
Huret, Roger. 268.486, CI. DlO-70.000.
F. M. Howell & Company: See —
Van Inwagen, Edwin A., 268,481, CI. D9-433.000.
Faber, Robert V.; and Sylwester, Ronald D. Railing baluster. 268,526,
4-5-83, CI. D25-77.000.
Famolare, Inc.: See —
Famolare, Joseph P., Jr., 268,455, CI. D2-293.000.
Famolare, Joseph P., Jr., to Famolare, Inc. Sandal. 268,455. 4-5-83. CI.
D2-293.000.
Firepower, Inc.: See —
Gwinn, Mack W., Jr., 268,511, CI. D22-7.000.
Fogarty, A. Edward: See —
Alwell, Anne T.; Fogarty, A. Edward; Fogarty, Bonnie R.; Pagani,
David A.; and Pook, Peter D., 268,507, CI. D21-168.000.
Fogarty, Bonnie R.: See-^
Alwell, Anne T.; Fogarty, A. Edward; Fogarty, Bonnie R.; Pagani,
David A.; and Pook, Peter D., 268,507, CI. D2I- 168.000.
Ford, Barbara A. Aquarium stand. 268,533, 4-5-83, CI. D30-12.000.
Freezinhot Bottle Company Limited: See —
Hung, Kung C, 268,528, CI. D26-49.000.
Gallagher, Lee C. Novelty extension toy. 268,510, 4-5-83, CI. D21-
240.000.
Gremonprez, Dan E., to Dart Industries, Inc. Casserole cooking appli-
ance. 268,471, 4-5-83, CI. D7-355.000.
Grenie, Philippe, to Compagnie Generale des Etablissements Michelin.
Tire. 268,492, 4-5-83, CI. D 12- 147.000.
Grez, Joan: See —
Craig, Joe D.; Grez, Joan; Rensi, Edward H.; and Salsbury, Rich-
ard R., 268,537, CI. D34- 14.000.
Gwinn, Mack W., Jr., to Firepower, Inc. Firearm magazine. 268,511,
4-5-83, CI. D22-7.000.
Hanzawa, Tsuneo, to Entex Industries. Inc. Miniature computer or the
like. 268,496, 4-5-83, CI. D14-100.000.
Harrison, Charles H.: See —
Andersen, Harold W.; Harrison, Charles H.; and Worth, Melvin H.,
Jr., 268,525, CI. D24-56.000.
Heron, Tliomas A.: See —
Mitchell, Richard L.; and Heron, Thomas A., 268,493, CI. D13-
37.000.
Hill, William J.: See—
Silberman, Ira J.; Hill, William J.; and Kelley, Robert C, 268,508,
CI. D21-195.000.
Hung, Kung C, to Freezinhot Bottle Company Limited. Torch.
268,528, 4-5-83, CI. D26-49.000.
Huret, Roger, to Etablissements Huret et Ses Fils. Cyclometer. 268,486,
4-5-83. CI. D 10-70.000.
Igloo Corporation: See—
Ruxton, Craig; and McGowan, Ronald. 268.469, CI. D7-77.000
Imada, Michio, to Olympus Optical Company Ltd Copier stand
268,538, 4-5-83, CI. D34- 17.000.
Imanishi Flexible Tube Mfg. Co. Ltd.: See—
Nishikawa Hideo, 268.472, CI. D7-348.000.
Ing. C. Olivetti & C. S.p.A.: See-
Bellini, Mario. 268,457, CI. D3-72.000
Ives. Ralph. Christmas tree stand 268,460, 4-5-83, CI. D6-105 000.
John Amott & Associates Limited: See —
Amott. John; and Campbell. Mark I.. 268,488, CI. D12-1 15.000.
Jones, John A.: See —
Bergguist, Gregory D.; and Jones, John A., 268,465. CI D6-
191.000.
Kato, Masao, to Dart Industries Inc. Canister or the like. 268,470,
4-5-83, CI. D7-79.000.
Kelley, Robert C. See—
Silberman, Ira J.; Hill, William J.; and Kelley, Robert C . 268,508.
CI. D21-195.000.
Ketcham & McDougall. Inc.: See —
Lebowitz. Samuel. 268.529. CI. D26-65 000.
Kojima, Hiroshi; Nishio, Hideaki; and Yashtma, Toshihiko, to Bndge-
stone Tire Company Limited. Vehicle tire. 268,491. 4-5-83, CI. D12-
147.000.
Kolman, Aniu M. Bracelet. 268,487, 4-5-83, CI. Dl 1-4.000.
Koziatek, Jerome P.: See-
Mower, Henry W.; Seymour, Allen; Koziatek, Jerome P , and
Lendvay, Joseph G., 268.468, CI. D6-244.000.
Kraus, Gary J. Tool holder. 268,500, 4-5-83, CI. D15-140.000.
Kravitz, Ruth E. Face shield. 268.532. 4-5-83, CI. D28-9.000.
Kruckel, Peter A.; and Mock, Gerhard, to Schwan-Subiio Schwan-
hausser GmbH & Co. Marking instrument. 268,501, 4-5-83, CI. D19-
43.000.
Lagess Corp.: See —
Saint Ive, Michael H., 268,503, CI. D2 1-34.000
Lebowitz, Samuel, to Ketcham &. McDougall, Inc. Adjustable desk
lamp. 268,529. 4-5-83. CI. D26-65.000
LcCaire Jr.. Robert A., to Coca-Cola Company. The. Air freshener.
268.520. 4-5-83. CI. D23- 150.000.
Leisure Dynamics. Inc.: See —
Alwell. Anne T.; Fogarty. A. Edward; Fogarty, Bonnie R.; Pagani.
David A.; and Pook. Peter D . 268.507, CI. D21-168.000
Lendvay. Joseph G.: See —
Mower, Henry W.; Seymour, Allen; Koziatek. Jerome P; and
Lendvay. Joseph G., 268.468, CI D6-244.000
Leppard, Hope E. Combined pipe rack and bcokend. 268.531. 4-5-83.
CI. D27-06.000.
Lien. Douglas E., to Boeckers, Roger W., a part interest. Hydraulic
locking valve. 268,512, 4-5-83, CI. D23-19.000.
Markwat, Leo C. Foam trimmer. 268,475, 4-5-83. CI. D8-67.000,
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See —
Terauchi, Makoto; Momota, Nobuo; Sugihara, Osamu, and
Nukazawa, Joseph J., 268,495, CI. D 14-80.000.
McDonald's Corporation: See —
Craig, Joe D.; Grez, Joan; Rensi, Edward H.; and Salsbury, Rich-
ard R.. 268.537. CI. D34- 14.000.
McGowan, Ronald: See —
Ruxton, Craig; and McGowan, Ronald, 268,469, CI. D7-77.000.
Mills, Anthony M.; and Egan. Daniel C. to Dunlop Tire and Rubber
Corporation. Motorcycle tire. 268.490. 4-5-83, CI. D 12- 146.000.
Mineo. Kinji. to Yamato Iron Works Co., Ltd. Cap for a drum. 268,482,
4-5-83, CI. D9-439.000.
Mineo, Kinji, to Yamato Iron Works Co., Ltd. Cap for a drum 268,483,
4-5-83, CI. D9-439.000.
Miracle Recreation Equipment Company: See —
Ament, Duane S., 268,530, CI. D26-94.000.
Mirtain, Henri J.: See —
Arends, Harm J.; Mirtain, Henri J.; and Zinnen. Norbert, 268.489,
CI. D12-143.000.
Mitchell, Richard L.; and Heron, Thomas A., to Emerson Electric Co.
Switch key. 268,493, 4-5-83, CI. D13-37.000.
Mobay Chemical Corporation: See —
Cox, John A.. 268,480. CI. D9-378.000.
Mock. Gerhard: See —
Kruckel. Peter A.; and Mock. Gerhard. 268.501. CI D19-43.000
Momota. Nobuo: .See —
Terauchi. Makoto; Momota. Nobuo; Sugihara, Osamu; and
Nukazawa, Joseph J., 268,495, CI. D14-80.000.
Morris, Glenn H. Closure cap. 268,484, 4-5-83, CI. D9-443 000
Mower, Henry W.; Seymour, Allen; Koziatek. Jerome P.; and Lend-
vay. Joseph G.. to Questor Corporation. Dresser mirror. 268.468,
4-5-83. CI. D6-244.000.
Nakamura. Kazuharu. Oil-fired space heater. 268.518. 4-5-83. CI. D23-
123.000.
Nakamura, Kazuharu. Oil-fired space heater. 268,519, 4-5-83, CI. D23-
123.000.
Nishikawa Hideo, to Imanishi Flexible Tube Mfg. Co. Ltd Hot air
supply type electric oven. 268,472, 4-5-83, CI. D7-348.000.
Nishio, Hideaki: See —
Kojima, Hiroshi; Nishio, Hideaki; and Yashima. Toshihiko.
268.491. CI. D12-147.000.
Noga. Robert A. Dice agiutor. 268.504. 4-5-83. CI. D2 1-41 000.
Novo. Raul. Athletic supporter. 268,454. 4-5-83. CI. D2- 10.000.
PI 30
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Nukazawa, Joseph J.: See —
Terauchi. Makoto; Momota, Nobuo; Sugihara, Osamu; and
Nukazawa, Joseph J., 268.495, CI. D14-80.000.
Oleniak, Donald; and Bedard, Gerald R. Crutch pad. 268,456, 4-5-83.
CI. D3-10.000.
OIko. Henry Armchair. 268,459. 4-5-83, CI. D6-57.0OO.
Olson, Ralph B.. to Amco Corporation. Wine rack. 268,463, 4-5-83, CI.
D6- 188.000.
Olympus Optical Company Ltd.: See —
Imada, Michio, 268,538. CI. D34- 17.000.
Owen. Vance Power saw guide. 268,476, 4-5-83, CI. D8-7 1.000.
Pace Incorporated; See —
Sylvia, Frank, 268,474, CI. D8-30.000.
Pagani. Oavid A.: See —
Alwell, Anne T.; Fogarty, A. Edward; Fogarty, Bonnie R.; Pagani,
David A.; and Pook, Peter D.. 268,507. CI. D21-168.000.
Pook, Peter D.: See—
Alwell, Anne T.; Fogarty, A. Edward; Fogarty. Bonnie R.; Pagani.
David A.; and Pook, Peter D.. 268,507, CI. D21-168.0OO.
Pullman, Pamela S. Confection display package. 268,479, 4-5-83. CI.
D9-3O7.00O.
Questor Corporation. See —
Mower. Henry W.; Seymour, Allen; Koziatek, Jerome P.; and
Lendvay. Joseph G., 268,468, CI. D6-244.000.
Rados, Ivan. Child's protective shield for attachment between the
backrests of automotive front seats. 268,466, 4-5-83, CI. D6-191.000.
Rensi, Edward H.: See —
Craig, Joe D.; Grez. Joan; Rensi. Edward H.; and Salsbury, Rich-
ard R., 268,537. CI. D34- 14.000.
Rust. Bennie W. Wrench for drawings holder nuts. 268.473, 4-5-83, CI.
D8- 17.000.
Ruxton, Craig; and McGowan, Ronald, to Igloo Corporation. Beverage
conuiner. 268.469, 4-5-83. CI. D7-77.0OO.
Saint Ive, Michael H., to Lagess Corp. Game board. 268,503, 4-5-83, CI.
D2 1-34.000.
Salsbury, Richard R.: See—
Craig. Joe D.; Grez, Joan; Rensi, Edward H.; and Salsbury, Rich-
ard R.. 268.537, CI. D34- 14.000.
Simdy, Hal D. Merchandise display rack. 268.464. 4-5-83, CI. D6-
189.000.
Scanlan, Dennis R.. Jr.; and Arp, Robert A., to Scanlan International,
Inc Serrefine. 268.523. 4-5-83, CI. D24-27.000.
Scanlan International. Inc.: See —
Scanlan, Dennis R., Jr.; and Arp. Robert A.. 268.523. CI. D24-
27.000.
Schoenig. Darrell A., to Teledyne Industries. Inc. Adjustable support
stand. 268,458, 4-5-83. CI. D6-29.000.
Schwan-Stabilo Schwanhausser GmbH & Co.: See—
Kruckel. Peter A.; and Mock, Gerhard, 268,501, CI. D19-43.000.
Seymour, Allen: See —
Mower, Henry W.; Seymour, Allen; Koziatek, Jerome P.; and
Lendvay. Joseph G.. 268,468, CI. D6-244.000.
Silberman. Ira J.; Hill, William J.; and Kelley, Robert C, to Diversified
Products Corporation. Portable wall mounted weight lifting exer-
ciser. 268.508. 4-5-83, CI. D21-195.000.
Simmons Universal Corporation: See —
Bergguist, Gregory D.; and Jones, John A., 268,465, CI. D6-
191.000.
Sugihara, Osamu: See —
Terauchi, Makoto; Momota, Nobuo; Sugihara, Osamu; and
Nukazawa, Joseph J., 268,495, CI. D 14-80.000.
Sylvia. Frank, to Pace Incorporated. Solder extractor. 268,474, 4-5-83,
CI. D8-30.000.
Syl wester. Ronald D.: See —
Faber. Robert V.; and Sylwester, Ronald D., 268,526, CI. D25-
77.000.
Tamm, Ulf S. Occlusive sphygmanometer for the measuring of arterial
blood pressure. 268,522, 4-5-83, CI. D24-21.000.
Teledyne Industries, Inc.: See — '^
Schoenig, Darrell A., 268,458, CI. D6-29.000.
Terauchi, Makoto; Momota, Nobuo; Sugihara, Osamu; and Nukazawa,
Joseph J., to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Television
receiver. 268,495, 4-5-83, CI. D14-80.000.
Thompson, Bruce R., to UPL Group Limited. Faucet handle. 268,513,
4-5-83, CI. D23-28.000.
Thompson, Bruce R., to UPL Group Limited. Faucet handle. 268,514,
4-5-83, CI. D23-3 1.000.
Thompson, Bruce R., to UPL Group Limited. Faucet handle. 268,515,
4-5-83, CI. D23-31.000.
Thompson, Bruce R., to UPL Group Limited. Faucet handle. 268,516,
4-5-83, CI. D23-3 1.000.
Thompson, Bruce R., to UPL Group Limited. Faucet handle. 268,517,
4-5-83. CI. D23-31.000.
Tung, Wai-Kuen, to Best Toys Co. Ltd.. The. Dog toy. 268,506, 4-5-83,
CI. D21-161.000.
Underdahl. DeForest D. Panel carrier. 268,477, 4-5-83, CI. D8-7 1.000.
Uniroyal Englebert Reifen GmbH: See —
Arends, Harm J.; Mirtain. Henri J.; and Zinnen, Norbert, 268,489,
CI. D12-143.000.
University Testing Service Inc.: See —
Andersen, Harold W.; Harrison, Charles H.; and Worth, Melvin H..
Jr., 268.525. CI. D24-56.000.
UPL Group Limited: S^e—
Thompson, Bruce R.. 268,513, CI. D23-28.000.
R. 268,514, CI. D23-3 1.000.
R., 268,515, CI. D23-3 1.000.
R., 268,516, CI. D23-3 1.000.
R., 268,517, CI. D23-3 1.000.
A., to F. M. Howell & Company. Box blank.
268.481. 4-5-83, CI. D9-433.000.
Vezner. Kenneth W. Chuck jaw bore-truing fixture. 268,499, 4-5-83, CI.
D15-138.000.
Wells, Harold W. Toy coffin. 268,505. 4-5-83, CI. D21-59.000.
Wess, Kenneth F.; and Day. Charles E., deceased (by Day, Frances B.,
executrix), to Wess. Margaret L.; and Day. Frances B. Combined
fishing rod rack and carrier. 268,461, 4-5-83, CI. D6-1 14.000.
Wess, Margaret L.: See —
Wess. Kenneth F.; and Day, Charles E., deceased, 268,461, CI.
D6- 114.000.
Wong, Jacob Y. Personal message center. 268,502, 4-5-83, CI. D20-
18.000.
Worth. Melvin H., Jr.: See-
Andersen. Harold W.; Harrison, Charles H.; and Worth, Melvin H.,
Jr.. 268,525, CI. D24-56.000.
Yamato Iron Works Co., Ltd.: See—
Mineo, Kinji, 268.482, CI. D9-439.000.
Mineo, Kinji, 268,483, CI. D9-439.000.
Yashima, Toshihiko: See —
Kojima, Hiroshi; Nishio, Hideaki; and Yashima, Toshihiko,
268,491, CI. D12-147.000.
Zinnen, Norbert: See —
Arends, Harm J.; Mirtain, Henri J.; and Zinnen, Norbert, 268,489,
CI. D12-143.000.
Thompson, Bruce
Thompson, Bruce
Thompson, Bruce
Thompson, Bruce
Van Inwagen, Edwin
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
Duffett. William E.: See-
Meek. Jack M.; and Duffett, William E.. 5.028. CI. 78.000.
Holtkamp. Reinhold. African violet plant. 5.020. 4-5-83, CI. 69.000.
Holtkamp, Reinhold. African violet plant. 5,021. 4-5-83. CI. 69.000.
Holtkamp. Reinhold. African violet plant. 5,022, 4-5-83, CI. 69.000.
Holtkamp, Reinhold. African violet plant. 5,023, 4-5-83. CI. 69.000.
Holtkamp. Reinhold. African violet plant. 5.024, 4-5-83, CI. 69.000.
Holtkamp. Reinhold. African violet plant. 5.025. 4-5-83, CI. 69.000.
Meek, Jack M.; and Duffett, William E.. to Yoder Brothers, Inc. Chry-
santhemum plant. 5,028, 4-5-83, CI. 78.000.
Pan American Plant Co.: See —
Shoesmith, Leonard H., 5,027, CI. 77.000.
Shoesmith, May, 5,026, CI. 74.000.
Shoesmith, May, 5,029, CI. 78.000.
Shoesmith, Leonard H., to Pan American Plant Co. Chrysanthemum
named Glacier (P6-134-W). 5,027, 4-5-83. CI. 77.000.
Shoesmith, May, to Pan American Plant Co. Chrysanthemum named
Quaker (G6-217-WS). 5,026, 4-5-83, CI. 74.000.
Shoesmith, May, to Pan American Plant Company. Chrysanthemum
named Bruin. 5,029, 4-5-83, CI. 78.000.
Yoder Brothers, Inc.: See —
Meek, Jack M.; and Duffett. William E., 5,028, CI. 78.000.
LIST OF DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS
APPLICANTS TO WHOM
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS WERE ISSUED ON THE 5th DAY OF
APRIL, 1983
Published at the request of the applicant or owner in accordance with the Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O. G 687.
Adams, Phillip: See —
Halpem, Joseph; and Adams, Phillip, 7102,908, CI. 560-124.000.
Brown, Richard A.; and Winkley, Donald C. Method of removing
phosphorus impurities from yellowcake. 7102,906, 4-5-83, CI.
423-16.000.
Cruickshank, Philip A.; and Martinez, Anthony J. Intermediates and
process for insecticidal biphenylmethyl esters. 7102,909, 4-5-83, CI.
560-221.000.
Halfon, Marc; and Scharpf, William G. Process to 3-phenoxybenzyl
3-(2,2-dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclopropanecarboxylate.
7102,907, 4-5-83, CI. 560-124.000.
Halpem, Joseph; and Adams, Phillip. Catalyzed transesterification
synthesis. 7102,908, 4-5-83, CI. 560-124.000.
Khasawneh, Fayez E. Granular urea - urea phosphate fertilizer.
7102,902, 4-5-83, CI. 71-29.000.
Kibbel, William H., Jr. Control of sulfides in aqueous systems
7102,905, 4-5-83, CI. 210-759.000.
Martinez, Anthony J.: See—
Cruickshank, Philip A.; and Martinez, Anthony J , 7102,909, CI.
560-221.000.
Offenbacher, Larry A. Method of fabricatmg a bearing 7102,901,
4-5-83, CI. 29-149.50R.
Orr, Robert S. Pinned-on planetary ring gear assembly and salvage
method. 7102,903, 4-5-83, CI. 74-801 000.
Scharpf, William G.: See—
Halfon, Marc; and Scharpf, William G., 7102,907. CI 560-124.000
Wenghoefer, Hans M. 7ire cord adhesion. 7102,904, 4-5-83, CI 156-
IIO.OOA.
Winkley, Donald C. See-
Brown, Richard A.; and Wmkley, Donald C, 7102,906, CI
423-16.000.
PI 31
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED APRIL 5, 1983
Note. — First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
CLASS2
198 4,378,606
CLASS3
1.91 4.378,607
CLASS4
500 4,378,608
CLASSS
12 R 4,378,609
CLASSS
111 4,378,%7
142 4,378,968
521 4,378,969
683 4,378,970
CLASS IS
1.5 R 4,378,610
353 4,378.611
CLASS 16
62 4,378,612
CLASS 17
4,378,613
CLASS 24
201 TR 4,378,614
221 A 4,378,615
245 R 4,378,616
336 4,378,617
CLASS 28
110 4,378,618
CLASS29
25.42 4,378,619
4,378.620
26 A 4.378.621
148.4 D 4.378.622
159.01 4.378.623
239 4.378.624
450 4.378,625
527.2 4.378.626
571 4.378,627
4,378,628
580 4,378,629
4,378,630
825 4,378,631
845 4,378,632
CLASS 30
47 4,378,633
4.378.634
58 4.378,635
92 4.378,636
216 4.378,637
CLASS 33
293 4,378,638
CLASS 34
12
155
4,378,639
4,378,640
CLASS 36
32 R 4,378.641
35 R
129
4,378.642
4,378,643
CLASS 37
244 4,378,644
CLASS 38
8 4,378.645
102 4.378,646
CLASS 40
158 R 4.378.647
316 4.378,648
544 4,378,649
607 4,378,650
CLASS 42
71 P 4,378,651
CLASS 43
26.1 4,378.652
CLASS 44
56 4.378.973
CLASS 46
74 D 4,378,653
115
4,378,654
CLASS 47
58 4,378,655
CLASS
197 R
CLASS
28
364
379
504
CLASS
56 G
125
309
432
580
745
69
570
CLASS
CLASS
48
4,378,974
49
4,378,656
4,378,657
4,378,658
4,378,659
51
4,378,660
4.378,661
4,378,975
4,378.662
S2
4.378.663
4,378,664
S3
4,378,665
4,378,666
CLASS S4
78 4,378,667
CLASS SS
15 4,378,976
48 4.378,977
52 4,378,978
96 4.378,979
103 4,378.980
158 4,378,981
162 4,378.982
357 4,378,983
CLASS S6
12.7 4.378.668
27.5 4.378,669
400.01 4,378,670
400.12 4,378,671
CLASS S7
122 4,378,672
CLASS 60
39.141 4.378,673
39.823 4,378,674
421 4,378,675
548 4,378,676
606 4,378,677
655 4,378,678
CLASS 62
12 4,378,984
280 4,378,679
352 4,378,680
500 4,378,681
CLASS 65
3.12 4,378,985
4,378,986
4,378,987
182.3 4,378,988
271 4,378,989
CLASS 66
64 4,378,682
193 4,378,683
CLASS 70
100 4,378.684
CLASS 71
4,378,990
4,378,991
4,378,992
90
93
120
CLASS 72
21 4,378,685
262 4,378,686
366 4,378,687
420 4,378,688
466 4,378,689
467 4,378,690
CLASS 73
27 R 4,378,691
49.2
105
4,378,692
4,378.693
1 14 4,378,694
119 A 4,378,695
180 4,378,696
182 4,378,697
573 Re.3I,195
579 4,378,698
606 4,378,699
620 4,378,700
808 4,378,701
826 4,378,702
861.79 4,378,703
862.07 4,378.704
CLASS 74
37 4,378,705
89.22 4,378,706
117 4,378,707
191 4,378,708
207 4,378,709
339 4,378,710
467 4,378,711
488 Re.31,196
501 R 4,378,712
501.5 R 4,378,713
CLASS 75
41 4,378,993
4,378,994
CLASS 81
128 4,378,714
CLASS 83
113 4,378,715
438 4,378,716
530 4,378,717
592 4,378,718
831 4,378,719
CLASS 84
1.03 4,378,720
1.14 4,378,721
1.15 4,378,722
297 R 4,378,723
465 4,378,724
CLASS 87
4,378,725
12
CLASS 92
243 4,378,726
CLASS 98
33 R 4,378,727
115 SB 4,378,728
CLASS 99
400 4.378,729
501 4,378,730
571 4,378,731
CLASS 100
5 4,378,732
CLASS 101
18 4,378,733
230 4,378,734
363 4,378,735
365 4,378,736
415.1 4,378,737
CLASS 102
202.7 4,378,738
204 4,378,739
216 4,378,740
CLASS 104
18 4,378,741
377
CLASSICS
4,378,742
CLASS 106
15.05 4,378.995
38.35 4,378,996
89 4,378,997
270 4,378,998
281 R 4,378,999
311 4,379,000
CLASS 108
51.3 4,378,743
CLASS 110
182.5 4,378,744
346 4,378,745
CLASS 112
104 4,378.746
CLASS 114
56 4,378,747
141 4,378,748
220 4,378,749
249 4,378,750
CLASS 116
271 4,378,751
CLASS 118
60 4,378,752
657 4,378,753
658 4,378,754
684 4,378,755
CLASS 119
1 4,378,756
14.02 4,378,757
35 4,378,758
98 4,378,759
CLASS 123
41.12
52 M
73 PP
196 R
307
321
339
416
424
425
438
440
446
458
571
609
644
4,378,760
4,378,761
4,378,762
4,378,763
4,378,764
4,378,765
4,378,766
4,378,767
4,378,768
4,378,769
4,378,770
4,378,771
4,378,772
4,378,773
4,378,774
4,378,775
4,378,776
4,378,777
4,378,778
4,378.779
CLASS 124
24 R 4,378,780
4,378,781
CLASS 125
23 T 4,378,782
CLASS 126
25 B 4,378,783
418 4,378,784
421 4,378,785
429 4,378,786
430 4,378,787
445 4,378,788
450 4,378,789
451 4,378,790
CLASS 128
71
79
80H
132 D
202.27
207.15
303.14
346
355
450
504
677
736
748
754
757
765
774
4,378,791
4,378,792
4,378,793
4.378,794
4,378.795
4.378,796
4.378,801
4,378.802
4,378,804
4,378,805
4,378,806
4,378,807
4,378,808
4,378,809
4,378,810
4,378,811
4,378,812
4,378,813
CLASS 132
40 4,378,814
CLASS 134
3 Re.31,198
CLASS 136
256 4,379,202
CLASS 137
43 4,378,815
116
315
523
4,378,816
4.378,817
4.378,818
CLASS 139
88 4,378,819
436 4,378,820
452 4,378,821
CLASS 140
92.3 4,378,822
139 4,378,823
CLASS 141
206 4,378,824
CLASS 144
193 A 4,378,826
193 R 4,378,825
209 A 4,378.827
285 4.378.828
357 4,378,829
4.378,830
CLASS 148
1.5 4,379.001
9 R 4,379,002
104 4.379,003
108 4,379,004
187 4.379.005
189 4,379,006
CLASS 149
22 4,379,007
CLASS 150
39 4,378,831
52 G 4,378,832
CLASS 152
226 4,378,833
CLASS 156
69
86
108
140
157
189
191
205
238
359
527
603
616 R
643
4,379,008
4,379,009
4,379,010
4,379,01 1
4,379,012
4,379,013
4,379,014
4,379,015
4,379,016
4,379,017
4,379,018
4,379,019
4,379,020
4,379,021
4,379,022
CLASS 157
1.1
4,378,834
CLASS IM
183
4,378,835
336
4,378,836
CLASS 165
166
4,378,837
CLASS 166
153
4,378,838
217
4,378,839
233
4,378,840
261
4,378,841
278
4,378,842
4,378,843
297
4,378,844
4,378,845
303
4,378,846
317
4,378,847
362
4,378,848
369
4,378,849
373
4,378.850
CLASS 169
45 4,378,851
CLASS 174
15 R 4,379,203
65 SS 4,379,204
CLASS 175
325 4,378,852
340 4,378.853
CLASS 177
118 4.378.854
CLASS 178
22 10 4,379,205
22.13 4,379,206
CLASS 179
1 A 4,379,209
1 GJ 4,379,207
1 GS 4.379,208
84 L 4,379,210
110 A 4,379,211
4,379,212
115.5 R 4,379.213
CLASS 180
65 R 4,378,855
89.14 4,378,856
227 4,378,857
259 4,378,858
CLASS 181
224 4.378.859
CLASS 182
38 4,378.860
48 4,378,861
106 4,378,862
CLASS 188
71.8 4,378,863
153 R 4,378,864
379 4,378,865
CLASS 190
4,378,866
52
CLASS 192
3.24 4,378,870
70.13 4,378,867
93 A 4,378,868
106.2 4.378,869
CLASS 193
2 R 4,378,871
CLASS 198
570 4,378,872
796 4,378,873
802 4,378,874
815 4,378,875
CLASS 200
157 4,379,214
CLASS 202
4,379,023
CLASS 203
4,379,024
247
6
14
31
32
SI
4,379,025
4,379,026
4,379,027
4,379,028
CLASS 204
1 T
14 N
45 R
59 R
67
98
103
119
159.12
159.15
192 P
224 M
229
237
415
4,379,029
4.379,030
4.379,031
4,379,032
4,379,033
4.379,034
4,379,035
4,379,036
4,379,037
4,379,038
4,379,039
4,379,040
4,379,042
4,379,043
4,379,044
4,379,041
CLASS 206
45.34 4,378,876
141
153
158
170
314
315 R
335
459
4,378,877
4,378,878
4,378,879
4,378,880
4,378,881
4.378,882
4,378,883
4,378,884
PI 33
PI 34
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
540
4,378.885
CLASS 208
9 4,379.045
54 4.379.046
333 4.379.047
CLASS 209
172 5 4.379.048
464 4.379.049
606 4.378,886
622 4.378.887
CLASS 210
151 4,379.050
193 4.379,051
223 4.379.052
234 4,379,053
242 3 4.379,054
400 4,379,055
415 4,379,056
662 4.379,057
791 4,379.058
CLASS 211
63 4.378.888
75 4.378.889
CLASS 213
4.378.890
CLASS 215
4.378.891
4.378,892
4,378.893
4,378,894
166
32
232
246
252
CLASS 219
60 A
85 CM
121 ED
121 L
121 LC
331
4,379.215
4.379.216
4.379,218
4.379.217
4.379.219
4.379,220
306
327
56
328
188
8
19
CLASS 220
4.378,895
4.378.896
CLASS 222
4.378,897
CLASS 224
4,378,898
CLASS 226
4,378,899
CLASS 227
4,378,900
4.378.901
CLASS 228
6 A 4.378.902
CLASS 229
6 R 4.378.903
41 B 4.378.904
52 B 4.378,905
CLASS 235
103 4.379,223
463 4.379,224
CLASS 236
48 R 4,378,907
CLASS 237
2 B 4,378,908
CLASS 238
244 4,378,909
349
187
4,378,910
CLASS 241
4.378,911
CLASS 242
553
74
84 21
107.2
186
4,378,912
4,378,913
4,378,914
4,378,915
4,378,916
4.378,917
CLASS 244
1 * 378.0 1»
118.1
135 R
151 R
199
4.378.919
4.378.920
4.378,921
4,378.922
CLASS 248
68 R 4,378,923
101 4,378,924
242 4,378,925
489 4,378,926
561 4,378,927
CLASS 249
63 4.378.928
124 4.378,929
160 4,378,930
CLASS 250
227 4,379,225
231 R 4,379,226
4,379,227
266 4,379.228
270 4,379,229
307 4,379.230
311 4.379,231
332 4,379,232
553 4,379,233
561 4,379.234
CLASS 251
4.378.931
4.378,932
58
614
CLASS 252
8.8
8.9
26
33.6
51 5 A
56 R
67
99
135
174.18
301.16
316
389 R
400R
429 B
430
439
444
466 J
522 R
526
628
631
4,379.059
4,379,060
4,379,062
4,379,063
4.379.064
4,379.065
4,379.066
4.379,067
4,379,068
4,379,069
4,379,061
4,379,070
4.379,071
4.379.072
4.379.073
4.379.074
4.379.075
4.379.076
4.379.077
4,379,078
4,379.079
4,379,080
4,379.081
4.379.082
399
CLASS 254
4.378.933
CLASS 260
112 B
112 R
157
161
239 BB
369
397.1
439 R
815
4.379,083
4.379,085
4.379,086
4.379,087
4.379,084
4,379,088
4,379,089
4,379,090
4,379,092
4,379,093
4,379,094
4,379,095
CLASS 261
23 A 4,379,096
78 A 4.379,097
CLASS 264
24
25
39
40.3
40.7
45.5
51
56
60
65
4,379.098
4.379,099
4,379,100
4,379,101
4,379.102
4.379.103
4.379.104
4,379.105
4,379,106
4,379,107
4,379.108
4.379,109
4,379.110
137
159
206
248
296
349
514
55
4.379,111
4,379,112
4,379.113
4,379,114
4,379,115
4,379,116
4,379,117
CLASS 266
4,378,934
CLASS 267
64.27 4,378,935
140.1 4,378.936
CLASS 269
6 4.378.937
CLASS 271
4.378.938
CLASS 272
4,378,939
CLASS 273
4,378,940
4,378.941
4.378.942
4.378.943
4.378.944
CLASS 277
4,378,945
CLASS 280
4,378,946
4.378,947
CLASS 290
4,379.235
4,379.236
CLASS 292
4.378,948
CLASS 299
4,378,949
CLASS 303
4,378,950
CLASS 307
4,379,237
4,379,238
4,379,239
4,379,240
4,379,241
CLASS 310
4,379,242
Re.31,199
4,379,243
4,379,244
4,379,245
4,379,246
4.379.247
CLASS 313
4,379,248
4.379.249
4.379,250
4,379,251
4,379,252
179
93
237
273
278
280
393
200
642
808
53
55
19
36
141
243
268
356
481
105
168
260
312
319
328
367
93
112
336
403
485
313
561
695
805
CLASS 315
289 4,379,253
291 4,379,254
CLASS 318
4,379,255
4,379,256
4.379.257
4.379,258
CLASS 324
73 AT 4,379.259
99 D 4.379.260
240 4.379,261
309 4.379.262
379 4,379,263
CLASS 328
24 1,379,264
^ 4.3''9.26-
104
253
260
277
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
1 A
49
38
32
194
216
284
295
91
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
329
4,379,266
330
4,379,267
4,379,268
4.379,269
331
4,379,270
4,379,271
332
4,379,272
333
4,379,273
4,379,274
335
4.379.275
4,379,276
4.379,277
337
4,379,278
CLASS 338
42 4,379,279
CLASS 339
103 M Re.31,197
CLASS 340
38 L
63
310 R
347 AD
347 DD
365 C
365 R
555
629
682
701
724
750
825.5
4,379,280
4,379,281
4,379,284
4,379,285
4,379.286
4.379,287
4.379.288
4.379,289
4,379,290
4,379,291
4.379.292
Re.31,200
4,379.293
4,379,294
CLASS 343
17.2 PC 4,379,295
700 MS
882
895
4,379.296
4.379,297
4,379,298
CLASS 346
1.1 4,379,299
4,379,300
4,379,301
74.2 4,379,302
75 4,379,303
140 R 4.379.304
CLASS 350
96.15 4.378,951
96.25 4.378.952
171 4.378,953
320 4.378.954
334 4,378.955
CLASS 355
3 R 4,378,956
CLASS 357
23 4.379,305
24 4,379,306
68 4,379,307
CLASS 358
106 4.379,308
154
219
66
80
96.5
105
4,379,309
4,379,310
CLASS 360
4,379,311
4,379,312
4,379,313
4,379.314
4.379.315
4.379.316
CLASS 361
85 4.379,317
W^ 4,379.31S
21 -r.W»,.<l
34
253
267
300
346
35
200
414
424
426
431.05
467
513
708
715
745
900
6
182
185
203
205
222
300
94
154
302
43
81
M
57
9
18
461
732
115
137
462
448
452
133
142
240
274
54
55
63
210
242
304
305
445
626
65
78
84
92
94
101
CLASS 362
4,379,320
4,379,324
4,379,321
4,379,322
4,379,323
CLASS 363
4,379,325
CLASS 364
4,379,326
4,379,327
4,379,328
4,379,329
4,379,330
4,379,331
4.379.332
4,379.333
4.379,334
4,379.335
4,379.336
4,379.337
4.379,338
4,379,339
4,379,340
CLASS 365
4,379,341
4,379,342
4,379,343
4,379,344
4,379,345
4,379,346
CLASS 368
4.378.957
CLASS 375
4,379,347
CLASS 376
4,379,118
4,379,119
CLASS 377
4,379.221
4,379,222
CLASS 378
Bl ^.h2l.:4,1
4.379,348
CLASS 382
4,379,282
4,379,283
CLASS 414
4,378,958
4.378.959
CLASS 415
4.378.960
4.378.961
CLASS 417
4.378.962
CLASS 420
4.379.120
4.379.121
CLASS 422
4.379,122
4.379,123
4,379,124
4,379,125
CLASS 423
4,379,126
4,379,127
4,379,128
4,379,129
4,379,130
4,379,131
4,379,132
4,379,133
4,379,134
CLASS 424
4,379.136
4.379.137
4.379.138
4.379,139
4.379.140
4.379.141
4.379,14
154 4,379,143
168 4.379,144
177 4,379,145
4,379,146
200 4,379,147
232 4,379,148
244. 4,379,149
4,379,150
4,379,151
246 4.379.152
250 4,379,154
256 4,379,153
269 4,379,155
270 4,379,156
4,379,157
273 R 4,379,158
4,379.159
274 4,379,160
4,379,161
275 4,379,162
285 4,379,163
4,379,164
324 4,379,165
4,379,166
330 4,379.167
356 4,379,168
CLASS 425
144 4.378.963
463 4,378,964
CLASS 426
3 4,379,169
40 4,379,170
291 4,379,171
386 4,379,172
549 4,379,173
554 4,379,174
582 4,379,175
613 ' 4,379,176
656 4.379,177
CLASS 427
164 Bl .^y.Sh.Md
1 4,379,178
8 4,379,179
38 4,379,180
39 4,379,181
41 4,379,182
127 4,379,183
169 4,379,184
209 4,379.185
213 4,379,186
282 4,379,187
CLASS 428
35 4,379,188
89 4,379.189
95 4,379,190
118 4,379,191
156 4.379,192
196 4,379.193
203 4.379,194
209 4,379,195
213 4,379,196
220 4,379,197
288 4,379,198
332 4,379,199
337 4,379,200
345 4,379,201
CLASS 436
42 4,378,972
66 4.378.971
536 4,379,135
CLASS 474
161 4,378,965
CLASS 493
22 4,378,966
CLASS 494
54 4,378,906
(1.A.SS524
IX Bl 4.l44.:i2
CLASS 548
472 4,379,091
CLASS 604
24 4,378,797
32 4,378,799
275 4,378,798
280 4.378.803
I 3W 4.378,800
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
•
PI 35
D2-
10
268,454
D7— 77
268,469
268,483
D15-
11
268.497
D22-
7
268.511
56
268,525
293
268,455
79
268,470
443
268,484
123
268.498
D23-
19
268,512
D25-
77
268.526
D3-
10
268.456
348
268.472
DIO—
38
268.485
138
268.499
28
268,513
D26-
46
268,527
72
268,457
355
268,471
70
268.486
140
268.500
31
268,514
49
268,528
D6—
29
268,458
D8- 17
268,473
Dll-
4
268.487
D19-
43
268.501
268,515
65
268,529
57
268,459
30
268,474
D12-
115
268.488
D2(>-
18
268.502
268.516
94
268,530
105
268,460
67
268,475
143
268,489
D21-
34
268.503
268,517
D27-
06
268,531
114
137
188
189
268,461
268,462
268,463
268,464
268,465
71
268,476
146
268,490
41
268,504
123
268.518
D28-
9
268,532
268.477
147
268,491
59
268,505
268,519
D30-
12
268,533
341
268.478
268,492
161
268,506
150
268,520
35
268,534
191
D9- 307
268,479
D13-
37
268,493
168
268.507
158
268.521
268,535
268,466
378
268,480
D14—
268,494
195
268.508
D24-
21
268.522
4J
268,536
235
268,467
433
268.481
80
268,495
198
268.509
27
268.523
D34-
14
268,537
244
268,468
439
268.482
100
268,496
240
268,510
41
268,524
17
268,538
P.—
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
69
5,020
5.021
5,022
5,023
5,024
5,025
74
77
5,026
5.027
78
5,028
5,029
29— 149.5 R T102,901
71— 29 T102,902
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS APPLICATIONS
[Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O.G. 6877]
74— 801 T102,903
156— 110 A T102.904
210— 759 T102.905
423— 16 T102.906
560— 124 7102,907
7102,908
221 7102,909
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. States, Territories and Armed Forces, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
Alabama 1
Alaska 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California '..... 6
Canal Zone 7
Colorado 8
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 11
Florida 12
Georgia 13
Guam 14
Hawaii 15
Idaho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana 18
Iowa 19
Kansas 20
Kentucky 21
Louisiana 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota 27
Mississippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York 36
North Carolina 37
North Dakota 38
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 45
South Dakota 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 48
Utah 49
Vermont 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
West Virginia 54
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army 58
U.S. Navy 59
(First number in listing denotes legation according to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the Official Gazette to obtain details
as to inventor name, location, etc.)
PATENTS
01
04
05
06
4.378,870
4,378,918
4.379,165
4,378,646
4,378,790
4,378,854
4,378,929
4,379,019
4,379,298
4,378,964
4,379,144
Re. 3 1,200
4,378,609
4,378,614
4,378,630
4,378,651
4,378,663
4,378,665
4,378,667
4,378,684
4,378,708
4,378,722
4,378,724
4,378,747
4,378,788
4,378,810
4,378,813
4,378,846
4,378,853
4,378,884
4,378,897
4,378,912
4,378,939
4,378,940
4,378,941
4,378,953
4,378,955
4,379,010
4,379,047
4,379,066
4,379,087
4,379,178
4,379,191
4,379,204
4,379,208
4,379,215
4,379,220
4,379,235
4,379,240
4,379,259
4,379,265
4,379,266
4,379,279
08
09
10
11
12
13
4,379,281
4,379,282
4,379,285
4,379,287
4,379,293
4.379,307
4,379,308
4,379,315
4,379,316
4,379,328
4,379,336
4,379,343
4,378,659
4,378,841
4,378,868
4,378,899
4,378,914
4,378,949
4,379,112
4,379.324
4.378,670
4,378,735
4,378,806
4,378,952
4,378,961
4,378,989
4,379,036
4,379,052
4,379,094
4,379,121
4,378,799
4,378,991
4,379,159
4,379,190
4,378,606
-4,378,611
4,378,626
4,378,645
4.378,652
4,378,668
4,378.678
4.378.692
4.378.764
4.378.792
4.378.801
4.379,053
4,379,113
4,379,139
4,379,162
4,379,168
4,379,174
4,379,309
Re.31,196
17
18
19 :
20 :.
r
/
21 :.
22 :
4,378,791
4,378,879
4.378.696
4.379,253
4,379,130
4,378,896
4.378.697
4,379,254
4,379,192
4,379,076
4.378,729
4,379,278
4,378,612
23 : 4,378,613
4,378,733
4,379,310
4,378,649
24 : Re.31,197
4,378.840
4,379.320
4,378,688
4,378,716
4.378.855
4.379,337
4,378,700
4,378,738
4.378.904
35 : 4.378,984
36 : 4,378.613
4,378,711
4,378,867
4,378,924
4,378,772
4,378,888
4,378,944
4.378.627
4,378,794
4,378,910
4,378,971
4.378.647
4,378,800
4.379.007
4.379.055
4.378.658
4,378,825
.; 4,379,085
4.379,171
4.378,709
4,378,834
/i 4,379,109
4,379,201
4,378.740
4,378,885
4.379.233
4,379,223
4.378.784
4,378,890
4.379.284
4,379,224
4.378.814
4,378,891
4,379,295
29 : 4,378,739
4.378,823
4,378,903
4,379,296
4,378,824
4,378,862
4,378,905
25 : 4,378,624
4,379.01 1
4,378,865
4,378,926
4,378,629
4.379.273
4,378,881
4,378,928
4,378.633
30 : 4,379.028
4,378,889
4,378,976
4,378,634
32 : 4,379,097
4,378,921
4,379,015
4,378,641
33 : 4,378,643
4,378,942
4,379,064
4,378,653
4,379,100
4,378,956
4,379,072
4,378,723
34 : 4,378,620
4,378,973
4,379,170
4,378.786
4.378,628
4,378,982
4,379,210
4,378,807
4,378,737
4,378.985
4,379,245
4,378,809
4,378,744
4.378,987
4,379,274
4,378,828
4,378,754
4,379,005
4,378,662
4,378,943
4,378,782
4,379,022
4.378.804
4,379,020
4,378.808
4,379,058
4.378.856
4,379,117
4,378.866
4,379.069
4.378.882
4,379,202
4.378,933
4,379,070
4.378,893
4,379,219
4,378,938
4,379.073
4.378.894
4,379,252
4,379,003
4,379,077
4.378.911
4,379,289
4,379,013
4,379,110
4.378.959
4,379.340
4,379,027
4,379,111
4.379.234
26 : Re.31.199
4,379,045
4,379,134
4.379.271
4.378,635
4,379,046
4,379,169
4.379.291
4,378.707
4,379,060
4,379,180
4,378,750
4,378.714
4,379,079
4,379,211
4,379,217
4.378.719
4,379,090
4,379,218
4,379,261
4.378.727
4,379,106
4,379,222
4,378,638
4.378.781
4,379,123
4,379,299
4,378,742
4.378.898
4,379,143
4,379,305
4,379,049
4.378.908
4,379,146
4,379,319
4,378.679
4.378.932
4.379.166
4,379,330
4,378,925
4.378,960
4.379.179
4,379,348
4,378,979
4,378,980
4,379,195
37 : 4,378,622
4,379,177
4,379,103
4,379,197
4,378,669
4,378,644
4,379,181
4,379,205
4,378.672
4,378,818
4,379,332
4,379,221
4.378.981
4,378,849
4,379,335
4,379,225
4.379,138
4,378,878
27 : 4,378.655
4,379.249
4.379.160
PI 36
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
PI 37
39
4.379,196
4,379,321
4.378,631
4.378.749
4,378.758
4,378.759
4.378,835
4.378.851
4.378,880
4.378.892
4.378.935
4.379.006
4,379.018
4.379,031
4.379.034
4.379.035
4.379.063
4.379.065
4.379,075
4,379,080
4,379,095
4.379.098
4,379.116
40
41
42
4.379.172
4.379.188
4.379.194
4.379.214
4,378.731
4,378.817
4,378,850
4,379,025
4,379,054
4,379,175
4,378,640
4,378,751
4,378,827
4,378,829
4,378,830
4,378,874
4,378,919
4,379.226
Re.31.198
4.378,636
4,378,680
4,378,748
4,378,783
44
4,378,797
4,378,872
4,378,876
4,378,902
4,378.946
4,378.950
4,379,024
4,379,040
4,379,081
4,379,105
4,379,107
4,379,108
4.379,120
4,379,126
4,379,132
4,379,185
4,379,187
4,379.243
4,379.301
4,379,317
4,379,323
4,378,948
45
47
48
4,378,743
4,378,958
4,379,088
4,379,089
4,379,189
4,379,033
4,378,625
4,378,632
4.378,657
4.378,675
4,378,681
4,378.698
4,378,793
4,378,802
4,378.838
4.378.839
4,378,842
4,378,843
4,378,844
4,378,845
4,378.847
4,378,848
49
51
4.378,852
4.378.877
4.378.931
4.378.934
4.378,937
4,379,043
4,379,062
4.379,067
4,379.228
4,379,229
4,379,232
4,379,241
4,379,264
4,379,267
4,379,300
4.379,306
4.379,327
4,379,334
4.378,674
4.379.140
4,378,661
4,378,756
53
55
,379,151
.379.167
.379,237
,378.805
.378.860
.378,871
,378.873
,378.883
.378.920
.378.945
.379.050
.379.312
.379,326
,378,650
,378.785
,378,787
,378.826
.378.875
.378,974
,379,176
.379,242
,379,322
DESIGN PATENTS
01 :
268,465
268,524
15
268,476
268,499
268,505
268,469
268,497
268,530
17
268,463
268,507
268,525
268.534
268,498
268,531
268,487
268,512
268,529
268,535
268.508
08 :
268,458
268,537
29
268,493
39 :
268,500
50 : 268,455
06 :
268,462
268,503
20
268,464
32
268,478
41
268,526
51 268,454
268,473
09 :
268,527
23
268,511
33
268,456
42
268,480
268,533
268,484
268.460
268,494
268,502
268.504
10 :
12 :
268,510
268,523
268,532
24
26
268,474
268,475
268,536
34
36
268,521
268,459
268,481
47 :
55 : 268,468
268.471
268,509
13 :
268,479
27
268,477
268,490
48 :
268,461
268,520
06
01
10
5,028
T102.902
T102.904
17
34
PLANT PATENTS
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS APPLICATIONS
[Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O.G. 6877]
7102,903
7102,905
7102,906
7102,907
7102,908
7102,909
39
7102,901
US GOVERNMEN7 PR1N71NG OFFICK O- I9X>
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
NAME— FIRST.
1
LAST
1
1
1
COMPANY
NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
1
STREET ADDRESS
1 III 1
CITY
1
1
STATE
ZIP CODE
1
PLEASE PRINT OR TTPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
(or) COUNTRY
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20A02
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
@ %
Domestic; @ %
Foreign.
NAME— FIRST, LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
jj
CITY
STATE
ZIP CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
(or) COUNTRY
II II
Q Rtminanct Encloted (Mski
checks payabit to Suparin-
tandent of Documanti)
Q Charge to my Deposit
Accourtt No
MAIL ORDER FORM TO:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington. DC. 20402
■■vr -.■■■,
.ri>-
'Zi- :r.
■^■
>?^
■=*
■Tk
,-^(V
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
April 12, 1983 Volume 1029 Number 2
*^
CONTENTS
Page
Patent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1029 OG 12
Reissue Applications Filed 1029 OG 12
Request for Reexamination Filed 1029 0(j 13
Notice of Availability for Licensing 1029 OCi 13
Errata . •' 1029 ()( , 13
Patent Certificates of Correction 1029 OG 14
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries '029 OG 15
Condition of Patent Applications 1029 OG I ft
Reexaminations 1029 OG 17
Reissue Patents Granted (3L201) -73
Plant Patents Granted (5,030) -77
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,379,349) 279
Chemical (4,379,708) -^03
Electrical (4,379,943) -^^^
Design Patents Granted (268,540) ^\^
Index of Patentees f ' '
indices of Reissue. Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees PI 27
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations) PI 31
Designs and Plants "^- •' PI 33
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 34
Designs and Plants PI 35
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington. D.C., 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly.
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1.00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color. $8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, DC, 20231.
Printing authorized by Section ll(a)3 of Title 35, U.S. Code P.T.O.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13, 1982. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28, 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52.
Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased
as of Oct. 1. 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of
Jan. 1, 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22,
1983. The notice regarding the change in international
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27, on 28 Dec. 1982. The current
schedule of fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee $ 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases 670.00
International Fees
Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00
Basic Supplemental Fee (for each
page over 30) 5.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 65.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPLICATIONS HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
3,297,422, Re. S.N. 378,157, Filed Mar. 14, 1982, CI.
65/38, METHOD OF MAKING MOLDS FOR
MULTI-FOCAL OPTHALMIC LENSES, Stanley S.
Emerson, et al.. Owner of Record: Camelot Industries.
Burlington, Me.. Attorney or Agent: Leo R. Reynolds, et
al., Ex. Gp.: 173
3,667,170, Re. S.N. 378,462, Filed May 14, 1982, CI.
51/389, FINISHING ARTICLE AND SUPPORT
MEMBER THEREFOR, Joseph H. MacKay, Owner of
Record: Standard Abrasives, Inc., Northridge, Calif.. At-
torney or Agent: B. G. Nilsson, Ex. Gp.: 323
3,720,351, Re. S.N. 408,142, Filed Aug. 16, 1982, CI.
222/1. PULVERIZED FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM
FOR A BLAST FURNACE, Earl E. Coulter, et al.,
Owner of Record: Babcock A Wilcox Co., New York,
N. Y., Attorney or Agent: R. C. Mai, Ex. Gp.: 311
3,877,244, Re. S.N. 472,225, Filed Dec. 15, 1982, CI.
62/314, MODULAR DRY-AIR EVAPORATIVE
COOLER, Leonard J. Di Peri, Owner of Record: Inven-
tor, Attorney or Agent: David J. Breezner, Ex. Gp.: 344
3,980,339, Re. S.N. 398,381, Filed July 14, 1982, CI.
299/2, PROCESS FOR RECOVERY OF CARBONA-
CEOUS MATERIALS FROM SUBTERRANEAN
DEPOSITS, David D. Heald, et al.. Owner of Record:
Geokinetics, Inc., Concord, Calif, Attorney or Agent:
Freling E. Baker, Ex. Gp.: 356
4,007,851, Re. S.N. 461,170, Filed Jan. 26, 1983, CI.
215/307, ANTI-MISSILING BOTTLE CLOSURE,
Rocco D. Walker, Owner of Record: Zapata Industries,
Inc.. Frackville, -Pa.. Attorney or Agent: Stanton T.
Lawrence, Jr., et al., Ex. Gp.: 241
4,028,912, Re. S.N. 300,902, Filed Sept. 10, 1982, CI.
66/149R, FABRIC TAKE-UP MECHANISM, Richard
Schneck, Owner of Record: Sulzer Morat GmbH, Bon-
landen. Germany. Attorney or Agent: Jack F. Kramer,
Ex. Gp.: 353
4,030,895, Re. S.N. 396,261, Filed July 8, 1982, CI.
48/111, APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING COMBUS-
TIBLE GASES FROM CARBONACEOUS MATE-
RIALS, Robert A. Caughey, Owner of Record: First
National Bank of Peterborough, Peterborough. N.H., At-
torney or Agent: Robert T. Gammons, Ex. Gp.: 173
4,085,187, Re. S.N. 461,169, Filed Jan. 26, 1983, CI.
264/280, PROCESS FOR COMPRESSION ROLLING
OF POLYMERIC FILMS, Richard H. Jenks, et al..
Owner of Record: Revere Copper and Brass. Inc.. New
York, N Y., Attorney or Agent: Willis H. Taylor, Jr., et
al., Ex. Gp.: 147
4,105,937, Re. S.N. 428,772, Filed Sept. 30, 1982, CI.
318/568, TEACH-IN METHOD AND APPARATUS
FOR USE IN AN INDUSTRIAL ROBOT, Goro
Tuda, et al., Owner of Record: Kobe Steel Ltd., Kobe,
Japan, Attorney or Agent: Stanley P. Fisher, Ex. Gp.:
217
4,150,749, Re. S.N. 445,281, Filed Nov. 29, 1982, CI.
209/437. ORE CONCENTRATOR TABLE SUP-
PORT, Walter W. Stevens, Owner of Record: Inventor.
Attorney or Agent: Max E. Shirk, Ex. Gp.: 177
4,241,949, Re. S.N. 451,881, Filed Dec. 21, 1982, CI.
297/003, ROCKABLE FURNITURE, Michael S. Park-
er, Owner of Record: Inventor. Attorney or Agent: Dan-
iel H. Kane, Jr., Ex. Gp.: 355
4,245,461, Re. S.N. 459,185, Filed Jan. 19, 1983, CI.
59/82, NON-EXPANSIBLE LINKAGE BRACKLET
AND METHOD OF MANUFACTURE THEREOF,
Stephen F. Bert, Owner of Record: Textron, Inc.. Provi-
dence, R.I. Attorney or Agent: Maurice E. Gauthier, et
al., Ex. Gp.: 321
4,248,392, Re. S.N. 464.333, Filed Feb. 7. 1983, CI.
242/96, APPARATUS FOR APPLICATION OF
(PLASTICS STRETCH) SHEET-LIKE MATERIALS
AND FILMS, John C. Parry, Owner of Record: Inven-
tor. Attorney or Agent: Walter G. Finch, Ex. Gp.: 245
4,249,329, Re. S.N. 465.069. Filed Sept. 28, 1979, CI.
40/361, APPARATUS FOR VIEWING AND SORT-
ING PHOTOGRAPHIC SLIDE TRANSPAREN-
CIES, Owen L. Lamb. Owner of Record: Inventor. At-
torney or Agent: None, Ex. Gp.: 333
4,249,426, Re. S.N. 465.453, Filed Feb. 10. 1983, CI.
74/441, ANTI-BACKLASH NUT HAVING LONGI-
TUDINAL FLEXURAL MEMBERS WITH RAMPS
THEREON AND MEANS TO APPLY AN AXIAL
PRE-LOAD FORCE TO SAID RAMPS, Kenneth W.
Erikson. et al.. Owner of Record: Kerk Motion Products.
Inc.. Nashua. N.H., Attorney or Agent: Richard A.
Wise, et al., Ex. Gp.: 352
1029 OG— 12
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG— 13
4,309,655, Re. S.N. 405,859, Filed Aug. 6, 1982, CI.
324/1 17R, MEASURING TRANSFORMER, Heinz
Lienhard, et al., Owner of Record: LGZ Landis and
GYR Zug AG, Zug, Switzerland, Attorney or Agent:
George Finnegan, Ex. Gp.: 252
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(aX5)and 1.525(b)).
3,935,105, Reexam. No. 90/000,340, Requested: Mar.
4, 1983, CI. 210/138, TUBULAR FILTER IN SET-
TLER, Stephen N. McEwen, Owner of Record: Henry
Manufacturing Co.. Inc., Bowling Green, Ohio, Attorney
or Agent: Hugh Adam Kirk, Ex. Gp.: 176, Requester:
Filtra-Systems, Inc., Bloomfield Hills, Mich.
3,976,622, Reexam. No. 90/000,334, Requested: Mar.
1, 1983, CI. 525/60, PROCESS FOR THE PRODUC-
TION OF POLYISOCYANATES WITH A BIURET
STRUCTURE, Kuno Wagner, et al.. Owner of Record:
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Germany, Attorney
or Agent: Joseph C. Gil, Ex. Gp.: 142, Requester: Asahi
Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Washington, D.C.
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Government-Owned Inventions
Notice of Availability for Licensing
The inventions listed below are owned by agencies of
the U.S. Government and are available for licensing in
the U.S. in accordance with 35 U.S.C. 207 to achieve ex-
peditious commercialization of results of federally funded
research and development. Foreign patents are Tiled on
selected inventions to extend market coverage for U.S.
companies and may also be available for licensing.
Technical and licensing information on specific inven-
tions may be obtained by writing to:
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
U.S. Department of Commerce
P.O. Box 1423
Springfield, Va. 22151
Please cite the number and title of inventions of inter-
est.
Douglas J. Campion.
Program Coordinator,
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Department of Commerce.
U.S. Department of Agriculture
SN 6-171,625 (4,373,853). LOG HANDLING MA-
CHINE.
U.S. Department of the Air Force
SN 6-270,050 (4,373,255). METHOD OF MAKING
OXIDE PASSIVATED MESA EPITAXIAL DI-
ODES WITH INTEGRAL PLATED HEAT
SINK.
U.S. Department of the Army
SN 6-111,738 (4,373,553). BROAD BAND FLUERIC
AMPLIFIER.
SN 6-225,596 (4,373,688). CANARD DRIVE MECHA-
NISM LATCH FOR GUIDED PROJECTILE
SN 6-198,322 (4,373,808). LASER DOPPLER ATTI-
TUDE MEASUREMENT.
SN 6-277,365 (4,373,977). METHOD OF MAKING A
COMPOSITE WIRE.
SN 6-293,415 (4,374,091). GAS GENERATORS HAV-
ING CONTROLLED OPERATIONAL ATTI-
TUDES.
SN 6-219,056 (4,374,112). STABLE NF4+ SALT OF
HIGH FLUORINE CONTENT.
SN 5-471,792 (4,374,201). PROCESS FOR COATING
A DRY VARIOLA VIRUS
U.S. Department of Commerce
SN 6-313,045 (4,374,171). SMOLDER AND FLAME
RESISTANT INSULATION MATERIALS. COM-
POSITION AND METHOD.
U.S. Department OF Health and Human Services
SN 6-294,203 (4,372,888). NONDENATURING
ZWITTERIONIC DETERGENTS.
SN 6-459,251. ADAPTABLE BLOOD PRESSURE
CUFF FOR HUMANS AND ANIMALS.
SN 6-458,312. MEDICATION COMPLIANCE MON-
ITORING DEVICE.
SN 6-410,968. ANALGESIC AND ANTITUSSIVE
NORMORPHINAN-6-ONES.
Errata
The following registration numbers were inadvertent-
ly canceled in the "Trademarks Registrations Canceled,
Section 8" section of the Official Gazettes listed below:
965,550
TM144
Feb. 12, 1980
992,970
TM453
Feb. 24. 1981
996,127
TM571
Mar. 31. 1981
996,317
TM572
Mar. 31, 1981
1,030,329
TM450
June 15, 1982
1,028,255
TM294
July 13, 1982
1,049,458
TM149
Mar. 1. 1983
Consequently,
the above-identified
registrations are
still active.
MARK M
NEWMAN,
Mar. 15, 1983.
Director Trademark
Examining Operation.
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of Apr. 12, 1983
D. 267,653
4,024,163
4,105,235
4,200,257
4,239,383
4,251.801
4,265,331
4,271,734
4,277,454
4,290,003
4,302,098
4,302,255
4,308,342
4,310,065
4,311,033
4,313,850
4,331,395
4,332,809
4,333.878
4,335,041
4,336,587
4,338,453
4,340,417
4,340,997
4,346,352
4,346,697
4,347,381
4,347,847
4,348,851
4,349,661
4,349,817
4,349,936
4,350,628
4,350,974
4,351,631
4,351,909
4,352,369
4,352,653
4,352,738
4,352,810
4,353,783
4,353,834
4,354,077
4,354,258
4,354,628
4,354,925
4,355,246
4,355.310
4,355,504
4,356.210
4,356,245
4,356,273
4,356,430
4,356,972
4,357,085
4,357,125
4,357,144
4,357,581
4,357,640
4,357,666
4,358,057
4,358,108
4,358,158
4,358,803
4,359,706
4,359,754
4,359,907
4,360,203
4,360,423
4,360,499
4,360,713
4,361,067
4,361,440
4,361,441
4,361,553
4,362,446
4,362,731
4,363,106
4,363,302
4,364,632
4,364,747
4,364,778
4,364,783
4,365,095
4,365,110
4,365,151
4,365,195
4,366,323
4,367,116
4,367,217
4,367,297
4,367,462
4,367,586
4,367,686
4,367,708
4,367,782
4,367,801
4,367,905
4,368,129
4,368,275
4,368,729
4,368,815
4,368,901
4,369,102
4,369,189
4,369,337
4,369,573
4,369,892
4,369,913
4,370,169
4,370,214
4,370,327
4,370,382
4,370,405
4,370,459
4,370,610
4,370,726
4,370,730
4,371,066
4,371,344
4,371,375
4,371,443
4,371,948
4,372,017
4,372,024
4,372,128
4,372,324
4,372,344
4,372,611
4,373,732
1029 TMOG— 14
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
The libraries listed herein, designated as patent deposi- table following, the collections are organized in patent
tory libraries, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and number sequence.
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail-
of these collections varies from library to library, rang- able in microfilm, in bound volumes of paper copies, or
ing from patents of only recent months or years in some in some combination of both. Facilities for making paper
libraries to all or most of the patents issued since 1870, copies from either microfilm in reader-printers or from
or earlier, in other libraries. the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are general-
These patent collections are open to public use and ly provided for a fee.
each of the patent depository libraries, in addition, offers Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections
the publications of the patent classification system (e.g. among the patent depository libraries and in their hours
The Manual of Classification, Index to the U.S. Patent of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the
Classification, Classification Definitions, etc.) and pro- patents at a particular library is advised to contact that
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the library, in advance, about its collection and hours, so as
public in gaining effective access to information con- to avert possible inconvenience,
tained in patents. With one exception, as noted in the
State Name of Library Telephone Contact
Alabama Birmingham Public Library (205) 254-2555
Arizona Tempe: Science Library, Arizona State University (602) 965-7607
California Los Angeles Public Library (213) 626-7555 Ext. 273
Sacramento: California State Library (916) 322-4572
Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* (408) 738-5580
Colorado Denver Public Library (303) 571-2122
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware (302) 738-2238
Georgia Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of
Technology (404) 894-4508
Illinois Chicago Public Library (312) 269-2865
Louisiana Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State
University (504) 388-2570
Massachusetts Boston Public Library (617) 536-5400 Ext. 265
Michigan Detroit Public Library (313) 833-1450
Minnesota Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center (612) 372-6552
Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library (816) 363-4600
St. Louis Public Library (314) 241-2288 Ext. 214,
Ext. 215
Nebraska Lincoln: University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Engineering Library . . (402) 472-3411
New Hampshire Durham: University of New Hampshire Library (603) 862-1777
New Jersey Newark Public Library (201) 733-7814
New York Albany: New York State Library (518) 474-5125
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (716) 856-7525 Ext. 267
New York Public Library (The Research Libraries) (212) 930-0850
North Carolina Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library, N.C. State University (919) 737-3280
Ohio Cincinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of (513) 369-6936
Cleveland Public Library (216) 623-2870
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries (614) 422-6286
Toledo/Lucas County Public Library (419) 255-7055 Ext. 212
Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library (405) 624-6546
Pennsylvania Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library (215) 448-1321**
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh (412) 622-3138
University Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University (814) 865-4861
Rhode Island Providence Public Library (401) 521-7722 Ext. 226
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina (803) 792-2372
Tennessee Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
Center (901) 528-2957
Texas Dallas Public Library (214) 749-4176
Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University (713) 527-8101 Ext. 2587
Washington Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington (206) 543-0740
Wisconsin Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, University of
Wisconsin (608) 262-6845
Milwaukee Public Library (414) 278-3043
All of the above-listed libraries, except the Cleveland Public Library, offer CASSIS (Classification And Search
Support Information System), which provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data.
•Collection organized by subject matter
•*Call only between the hours of 10:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m.
1029 OG— 15
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF February 19, 1983
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New Case
Awaiting
Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY, GROUP 1 lO-D. E. TALBERT, Director 1-16-81
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metai and Organo-MeUlloid Chemistry; Metallurgy Metol-
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120— C. E. VAN HORN, Director 11-20-81
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines- Cosmetics
Steroids; Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140-J. O. THOMAS, JR.. Director . 7-14-81
Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g., Coating; Molding-
Ink; Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treating Compositions
COATING. LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY. GROUP 160-S. N. ZAHARNA, Director 1-20-82
Coating: Processes, Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photoeraphv
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170-
R F WHITE. Director , j.jj.g,
Fertilizers; Foods; Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making^ Glass Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid, Gas,
and Solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators' Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS. GROUP 210-S. W. ENGLE, Director 4-7-81
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors-
Switches; Photography: Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION. GROUP 220-KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 3-12-81
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubncation; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications, Op-
tics; Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography- Laser
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special. Fuel, Explosive and Thermic Composi-
tions. Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries.
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION. STORAGE, AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY. Director 1 1-24-80
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Data Processing. Computation and Conversion-
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING. WINDING. AND MEASURING. GROUP 240—
G M FORLENZA, Director 1-07-81
Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
Food Treating; Agitating; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projectors-
Web Feeding: Winding and Reeling; Cable Hoists; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling-
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors.
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS, Director 8-25-80
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring.
DESIGN, GROUP 290-KENNETH L. CAGE. Director I.I3.8I
Industrial Arts; Household. Personal and Fine Arts.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310— B R. GRAY, Director 5-18-81
Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements, Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Fluid iSprin-
klmg; Fire Extinguishers; Com Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; Boats-
Ships; Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment
MATERIAL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURING, TOOLS, GROUP 320-M. M. NEWMAN? Director 5-18-81
Manufactunng Processes. Assembling. Combined Machines, Special Article Making; Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
and Wire Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding. Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and
Tool Holders, Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Printed Matter
AMUSEMENT. HUSBANDRY. PERSONAL TREATMENT, INFORMATION, GROUP 330-
R. E. AEGERTER, Director 2-13-80
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Printing; Typewriters Infor-
mation Dissemination.
HEAT. POWER. AND FLUID ENGINEERING. GROUP 340-D. J. STOCKING, Director 11-17-80
Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Gearing
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS. TEXTILES. MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350—
A. L. SMITH. Director 9-12-80
Building Structures; Racks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplings; Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineering; Earth Drilling Mining-
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches.
Expiration of patents: TTie patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during February 1983, except those which
may have expired earlier due to shortened terms under the provisions of Public Law 690, 79th Congress, approved August 8 1946
(60 Sut 940) and Public Law 619. 83rd Congress, approved August 23, 1954 (68 Stot. 764), or which may have had their term's cur-
tailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the range of numbers indicated be-
low, may have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 151.
Pf «"'s Numbers 3,231,896 to 3,237,200, inclusive
Plant Patents Numbers 2.591 to 2.605 inclusive
1029 OG— 16
REEXAMINATIONS
APRIL 12, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ ] appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexamination specification; matter printed
in itahcs indicates additions made by reexamination
Bl 4,295,004 (71st)
WIRE CONNECTOR
William C. Dauser Jr., Trustee North Muskegon, Mich.,
assignor to Lloyd A. Heneveld, Grand Rapids, Mich.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,133, Dec. 28, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,295,004, issued
Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 99,624, Dec. 3, 1979.
U.S. a. 174/87 Int. a.' HOIR 11/00.
with the wires of said wire conductors to provide an
electiical connection between said wires [there-
between upon movement of said cap member and
conductive member along said elongated body].
Bl 4,189,034 (72nd)
HYDRAULIC DAMPER
Tetuo Kato, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokico Ltd.,
Kawasaki, Japan
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,189, Apr. 13, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,189,034, issued
Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 922,163, Jul. 5, 1978.
U.S. a. 188/318 Int. a J F16F 9/06.
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentabihty of claims 6-17 is confirmed.
Claims 1, 4 and 5 are determined to be patentable as
amended.
Claims 2 and 3. dependent on amended claims, are de-
termined to be patentable.
J. A self-stripping solderless electrical connector com-
prising:
an elongated body of insulating material having a sur-
face extending along an axis of said body and having
wire conductor receiving channels formed along at
least a portion of [itsj the length of said surface,
extending in the same general direction of said axis,
and located at spaced intervals around said axis;
a cap member of insulating material having a conduc-
tive member fixed thereto, said cap member and said
conductive member being adapted for positioning
over and snugly interfitting with said elongated body
upon being linearly movable in a linear direction along
said axis and along a portion of said elongated body
and said channelv said conductive member [adapt-
edj having a cutting edge: said channels being tapered
inwardly toward said axis whereby by means of the
snug interfit of said conductive member with said body,
upon said movement of said cap member and conduc-
tive member in said linear direction along said portion
of said elongated body said cutting edge is guided along
the channels to engage a plurality of insulated wire
conductors positioned in said channels, cut through
the insulation thereof in a direction lengthwise of said
conductors, and [engage] make electrical contact
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION. IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT
Claim 1 is determined to be patentable as amended.
Claim 2, dependent on an amended claim, is deter-
mined to be patentable.
1. In a hydraulic damper having a cylinder having an
actuating chamber therein for containing hydraulic oil, a
piston slidable in the actuating chamber and partitioning
said actuating chamber into upper and lower portions, a
piston rod having one end thereof being secured to the
piston and the other end thereof projecting through the
upper end of the cylinder to the outside, a resisting force
generating means mounted on the piston for controlling
oil flow across the piston for generating resisting force
against the movement of the piston in both directions in
the cylinder, a volume compensating chamber disposed
around the actuating chamber and having hydraulic oil
and gas therein for compensating for the change in
volume of hydraulic oil in the actuating chamber caused
by ingress or exit of the piston rod into or out of the
actuating chamber, and unvalved passage means for the
hydraulic oil permanently connecting only the lower end
of said volume compensating chamber with the lower
portion of said actuating chamber, the improvement
wherein said passage means has a hydraulic oil passage
there through with a cross-sectional size for generating a
pressure in the lower portion of said actuating chamber
which increases with an increase in the flow rate there-
1029 OG— 17
1029 OG— 18
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
through and which is substantially higher than that of the
volume compensating chamber and than that of the
upper portion of the actuating chamber when the piston
moves at the maximum speed in the contraction stroke of
the damper, whereby the pressure of the gas in said
volume compensating chamber necessary for causing
opening of said resisting force generating means can be
substantially reduced to atmospheric pressure.
Bl 3,344,023 (73rd)
TREATMENT OF HYPERTENSION WITH L-ALPHA-
METHYL-3,4-DIHYDROXYPHENYLALANINE
Donald F. Reinhold and Meyer Sletzinger, North Plain-
field, N. J., assignors to Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway,N,J.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,127, Dec. 21, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,344,023, issued
Sep. 26, 1967, Ser. No. 255,641, Feb. 1, 1963.
U.S. CI. 424/319 Int. CI.' A61K 31/195.
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claim I is confirmed.
1. A method of treating hypertension which comprises
the oral administration to a hypertensive patient of 0.1 to
5.0 g. of L-a-methyl-3,4-dihydroxyphenylalanine substan-
tially free of its D form.
REISSUES
APRIL 12, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ ] appears in ;he original patent but forms no part of this reissue specification; matter pnnted in italics
indicates additions made by reissue.
Re. 31,201
LOCKING CONNECTION FOR SUPPORTING GRID
SYSTEMS
Gale E. Sauer, Williamsville, N.Y., assignor to Donn Products
Incorporated, Westlake, Ohio
Original No. 3,922,829, dated Dec. 2, 1975, Ser. No. 397,432,
Sep. 14, 1973. Application for reissue Aug. 27, 1979, Ser. No.
69,774
Int. CI.' E04C 2/42
U.S. CI. 52—667 7 Oaims
electrodes; and electrical circuit means connected with the
electrodes for discharging a spark across the electrodes to bum
Re. 31,202
POULTRY BEAK REMOVER
John S. Goodling; Gayner R. McDaniel, both of Auburn, Ala.,
and Richard A. Steadham, Texas City, Tex., assignors to
Auburn Research Foundation, Auburn, Ala.
Original No. 4,040,425, dated Jun. 9, 1977, Ser. No. 646,924,
Jan. 6, 1976. Application for reissue Aug. 2, 1979, Ser. No.
63,355
Int. Q\? A61B n/i6
U.S. a. 128—303.14 15 Qaims
1. A poultry beak remover for dcbeaking fowl, comprising:
a housing having a beak receiving aperture therein of a size to
receive the beak of a fowl, for insertion of the beak of a fowl
into the housing; a pair of spaced apart electrodes supported in
the housing in substantial alignment with the aperture and
spaced therefrom a distance such that when the beak is inserted
through the aperture, a portion thereof extends between the
the beak of the fowl received therebetween and thus effect
removal of a desired portion of the beak.
1. A locking connection for supporting grid systems and the
like comprising a first support member having a flange and a
web upstanding therefrom; said web being provided with a
slot; a second support member having a fiange and web up-
standing therefrom: said second member web being provided
with a locking connector extending axially therefrom and
insertable through said slot; said locking connector having a
first portion engaging one side of said first support member
web and a resiliently yieldable second portion having a termi-
nal edge inclined at an angle relative to the plane of said first
support member web in ihe fully assembled relation therewith;
said terminal edge having at least a portion thereof engaging
against the side of said first support member web opposite said
first locking connector portion whereby said first portion and
said edge portion simultaneously engage the opposite sides of
said first support member web in the fully assembled relation
therewith.
Re. 31,203
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING INSIDE AND OUTSIDE
SURFACES OF CONTAINERS
John M. Jackson, Potters Bar, England, assignor to Qeamax
Limited, Hertfordshire, England
Original No. 4,026,311, dated May 31, 1977, Ser. No. 560,143,
Mar. 20, 1975. Application for reissue Aug. 2, 1978, Ser. No.
930,658
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 21, 1974,
12651/74
Int. Q\} B08B i/00: B67C 7/00
U.S. a. 134—48 28 Qaims
28. Apparatus for cleaning open-mouthed containers of a given
size, the apparatus comprising a frame; a turret rotatably mounted
on said frame; a plurality of pot assemblies supported on the turret,
each pot assembly having a core, a shell, and a lid co-operating
with said core and shell to define a cavity for reception of one of
said containers and said cavity having at least one wall, the cavity
having a shape corresponding approximately to that of the con-
tainer and a size such that the container therein subdivides the
cavity into two chambers in which the wall of the cavity is spaced
close to the inside and outside surface of the container, and con-
duit means for passing cleaning fluid through said chambers so
that the cleaning fluid fills the chambers and flows along the
inside and outside surfaces of the container, drive means operable
to rotate the turret so that each pot assembly passes in succession
past a container unloading station and a container loading station,
lid control means operable to move the lid of each pot assembly
273
274
OFFICIAL GAZETTK
AiRiL 12. 1983
into an open position immediately prior to passage of the pot
assembly past said unloading station to permit ejection of a
cleaned container at said unloading station and introduction of a
container to be cleaned into the cavity of the pot assembly at said
loading station, said lid control means also being operable to move
the lid of each pot assembly into a closed position immediately
after passage of the pot assembly past said loading station, and
valve means for regulating flow of fluid through said conduit
means and chambers only during passage of each pot assembly
between said loading station and said unloading station.
Re. 31,204
SPRINKLER FLOW CONTROL SYSTEMS
George E. Sanner, Cypress Hill, Sparks, Md. 21204
Original No. 4,014,359, dated Mar. 29, 1977, Ser. No. 625,350,
Oct. 23, 1975. Continulation-in-part of Ser. No. 466,693, May
3, 1974, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 272,793,
Jun. 18, 1972, Pat. No. 3,848,616, which is a continuation-in-
part of Ser. No. 18,829, Feb. 12, 1970, abandoned, which is a
division of Ser. No. 456,787, May 18, 1965, Pat. No.
3,500,844. Application for reissue Mar. 28, 1979, Ser. No.
24,685
Int. a.' AOIG 25/16
U.S. a. 137—78.3 49 Qaims
:a:
.■■i
i;ir..,i
i_..i I
[l^^'^pt.-
oJSI r ^. !
• lL2*^:irJj' '
54. A flow control for a fluid flow system having a fluid conduit
with a flow control valve therein, said flow control valve having an
electrically operated valve actuator means and said flow control
comprising: a first circuit means for connecting a source of operat-
ing voltage to said valve actuator means: a first switching means
comprising timing means for automatically completing said first
circuit means to energize said valve actuator means and thereby
open said valve and allow flow of fluid through said conduit for a
predetermined period of time, and upon completion of said lime
period, for interrupting said first circuit means, causing said valve
actuator means to be de-energized and said valve to close, thereby
terminating flow through said conduit; a second switching means
which, when energized, interrupts the continuity of said first circuit
means, thereby overriding said first switching means and de-ener-
gizing said valve actuator means, thus causing said valve to open
and terminate fluid flow through said conduit and which, upon
de-energization of said switch actuator means, restores control of
said first switching means over said valve actuator means, complet-
ing continuity of said first circuit means and energizing said valve
actuator means, causing said valve to open and said fiuid to flow
therethrough, said second switching means comprising a switching
means with an electrically operated actuator means; a third circuit
means comprising, in series, said switch actuator means, third
circuit conductor means, said source of operating voltage, and
moisture sensitive switching means which, when closed, completes
continuity of said third circuit means and which, when open,
interrupts continuity of said third circuit means; said moisture
sensitive switching means are adapted to be electrically connected
by the presence of rain on said moisture sensitive switch, thereby
completing the continuity of said third circuit means, energizing
said switch actuator means, overriding said first switching means,
interrupting said first circuit means, de-energizing said valve
actuator means, closing said valve, and terminating fluid flow
therethrough; said means which are adapted to be electrically
connected by the presence of rain on said moisture sensitive switch-
ing means being further adapted, concomitantly with the subse-
quent absence of rain thereon, to interrupt said third circuit
means, thereby de -energizing said switch actuator means and
restoring control of said valve actuator means to .aid first switch-
ing means: and when iaid second switching means is energized,
said source of operating voltage energizes a second circuit means
providing said source of operating voltage for ancillary control
when said moisture switch is activated and said first circuit means
is interrupted.
97. A flow control for a fiuid flow system, comprising: a casing
having a cylindrical main casing member, a bottom cover fitted
and fixed to said casing member at one end thereof, a panel
affixed to and closing said main casing member at the opposite
end thereof, said panel having a peripheral fiangc in contiguous
abutment with the main casing member, and a top cover which is
telescoped over said peripheral panel flange to form a closure
between said top cover and the cxtcncr of said panel, said bottom
cover having a portion spanning said main casing member and a
peripheral flange abutting the interior oj said main casing mem-
ber; a con'inuous annular gwket ir.erted contiguously between
the peripheral extremities of ^^aid panel flange and said main
casing member, the peripheral extremity of -iaid panel flange being
sandwiched circumferentiaUy into one annular face of said annu-
lar gasket, and the opposite annular face thereof being telescoped
over said peripheral extremity of said main casing member,
thereby providing a seal between said top cover and said main
casing member; a fluid flow valve disposed in said casing, said
valve having an inlet and an outlet and an electrically operated
actuator; conductor means extending from the interior to the
exterior of said casing for electrically connectir^g said actuator to
an external electrical power source; manually manipulatable
connection means externally of said casing to which fluid supply
and delivery means can he coupled; and means providing fluid
communication from suid ronnection means to the inlet and outlet
of said fiuid fiow valve.
Re. 31,205
AERIAL SLED
Domina C. Jalbert, 425 Wavecrest Ct., Boca Raton, Fla. 33432
Original No. 3,972,495, dated Aug. 3, 1976, Ser. No. 383,629,
Jul. 30, 1973. Division of Ser. No. 41,022, May 27, 1970, Pat.
No. 3,749,337, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
867,116, Sep. 30, 1969, abandoned. Application for reissue
Aug. 1, 1978, Ser. No. 930,000
Int. CI.' B64D 17/02
U.S. CI. 244—145 16 Claims
1
8. An aerial device comprising afiexible wing having upper and
lower fiexible walls, each wall having a forward edge and a rear-
ward edge, said rearward edges of said upper and lower flexible
walls forming a wing trailing edge, said forward edges of said
upper and lower walls being spaced apart to form first opening
means at the forward edges, flexible side walls defining a hollow
space with said flexible upper and lower walls, said first opening
means providing for a flow of air into said wing for pressurizing
said wing, shroud means connected to said lower flexible wall, a
second opening means located in said lower flexible wall, and
flexible valve means in said second opening means whereby said
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
275
second opening means and said valve means may provide for a Re. 31,207
flow of air into said voting from the bottom thereof for pressurizing LEAK CURRENT SUPPRESSING PRINTED CIRCUIT
said wing. BOARD
Tokuichi Tsunekawa, Yokohama, and Tetsuya Taguchi, Tokyo,
both of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushikj Kaisha, Japan
Origina) No. 4,114,036, dated Sep. 12, 1978, Ser. No. 703,962,
Jul. 9, 1976. Application for reissue Jul. 17, 1979, Ser. No.
58,198
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 24, 1975, 50-90533
Int. a.3 HOIJ 40/14
U.S. CI. 250—214 R 23 Qainu
117
Re. 31,206
METHOD OF LOWERING AND RAISING LOADS BY
MEANS OF A JACK ASSEMBLY AND LIFTING
ELEMENT
Nils H. Ahlgren, 22 Skyttevagen, S-133 00 Saltsjobaden, Sweden
Original No. 3,895,778, dated Jul. 22, 1975, Ser. No. 321,154,
Jan. 5, 1973. Application for reissue Jul. 15, 1977, Ser. No.
815,989
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 12, 1972, 295/72
Int. a.3 B66F 7/00
U.S. a. 254—1 11 aaims
6. A device for preventing leakage current in a light responsive
circuit of a camera comprising:
(fl) a photoelectric element in the light responsive circuit for
receiving light from an object: and
(b) a guard line surrounding at least a part of said light respon-
sive circuit, said guard line having applied thereto a potential
equal to the potential of the light responsive circuit for pre-
venting leakage current in a light responsive circuit.
Re. 31,208
SIGNAL MODinCATION DEVICE FOR MEMORY
CONTROLLED MANIPULATOR APPARATUS
Takehiko Watanabe, Akashi, Japan, assignor to Unimation, Inc.,
Danbury, Conn.
Original No. 4,025,838, dated May 24, 1977, Ser. No. 536,542,
Dec. 26, 1974. Application for reissue Apr. 26, 1979, Ser. No.
33 482
Int. a.' G05B 79/00
U.S. a. 318—568 27 Claims
u
OCITAl ''OSi^iON
4»BTRUCTiCW SIGNAL
BUFFER BEGiSTE"
10
I
I MODIFYING
' VALUE
SETTING
DEVICE
S
T
MOOIFTING
_ VALUE
BUFFER
5, REGISTER
ADDER
Sj'
14
I
ADDRESS
SETTING
DEVICE
SK)
\
1 '•-
■ " T" -^
u. ,
iMEMOf^-
15
(
^
ADDRESS
— BUFFER
' REGISTER
S7
se
!
[■ "prH CONTROL UNi T
; *« :s9
1. A method of lowering and raising a load by means of a
jack assembly and lifting element, which comprises transfer-
ring the load from the lifting element by supporting means
moveable along said lifting element and alternately carrying
the supporting means by one-and-then the other of two carry-
ing means having holes accommodating the passage of the
lifting element, with said carrying means being mounted on
[relatively moveable] parts of the jack assembly which are
moveable relative to each other, and said lifting element being
joined in series with other lengths of lifting element by connec-
tors of a size incapable of passing through the holes of the
carrying means and of a length substantially less than that of any
one length of lifting element, and alternately dismounting the
[carrier J carrying means to permit free passage of the connec-
tors upwards and downwards and thus to permit free passage of
the joined lengths of the lifting element.
START Signal
Gf^RA'iNG SWITCH
27. In a programmable manipulator, the combination of, a
manipulator arm movable in a plurality of axes, memory storage
means having stored therein a program comprising a plurality of
digital command signal steps corresponding to successive different
positions to which said arm is to be moved during each one of a
plurality of playback cycles: means controlled by said stored com-
mand signal program steps for sequentially moving said arm to
said different positions, means for setting and inputting preselected
data corresponding to a desired modification in direction and
magnitude of at least one of said stored program steps, means for
identifying and addressing said one program step in said memory
storage means, means for combining said one program step and
said desired positional modification data to produce a modified
program step, and means for writing said modified program step
into said memory storage means.
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED APRIL 12, 1983
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,030
CARNATION NAMED STACHERRY
Maurits C. van Staaveren, 30 Hornweg, at 1432 GM, Aalsmeer,
Netherlands, assignor to B. V. Handeiskwekcrij and M. C. van
Staaveren, both of Aalsmeer, Netherlands
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,333
Int. Cl.^ AOIH -VOO
U.S. a. Pit.— 71 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of carnation plant, substantially
as herein shown and described, characterized by its continuous
and profuse production of medium sized flowers of a deep pink
color carried on long, strong and erect stems.
5,031
ROSE PLANT
F. Harmon Saville, Rowley, Mass., assignor to Nor'East Minia-
ture Roses. Inc., Rowley, Mass.
Filed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. N«>. 307,379
Int. Cl.^ AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 7 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct variety of rose plant of the miniature
class, substantially as shown and descrioed, characterized by
flowers of orange red and yellow coloring darkening before
fading and borne singly as well as in large sprays.
5,032
ROSE PLAN!
Ralph S. Moore, 2519 E. Noble Ave., Visalia, Calif. 93277
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,48S
Int. CI.' AOIH .WOO
U.S. CI. Pit.— 9 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of mini^.ture rose plant of
hardy; dwaif, bushy, rounded, much branched habit, substan-
tially as illustrated and described, characterized by buds and
flrwers that are essentially pink in color, the ositer petals being
generally of a lighter pink than »he inner petals giving the
freshly open flower a blended or two color effect; the general
habit of growth as well as flow er form and color being similar
to June Time (miniature — US Plant Pat. No. 2,563), and
further characterized by a plant of compact well rounded
shape; vigorous; the said plant being easy to propagate from
cuttings, with an abundance of small matte foliage and an
abundance of flowers borne singly or several to the stem in
loose clusters.
5,033
ROSE PLANT
Ralph S. Moore. 2519 E. Noble Ave., Visalia, Calif. 93277
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,799
Int. CIJ AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Ph.— 9 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of miniature ro^e plant of
hardy, dwarf, bushy, rounded, much branched habit, substan-
tially as illustrated and described, characterized by buds and
flowers of exhibition form, essentially pink to rose pink in color
and resembling Mary Marshall (miniature — U.S. Plant Pat. No.
3,346) in bud and flower form but being somewhat larger in
size; and further characterized by a plant of compact well
rounded shape with above average vigor, the said plant being
easy to propagate from cuttings or by budding, with an abun-
dance of small semi-glossy to matte foliage and an abundance
of flowers borne singly or several to the stem in loose clusters.
5,034
HIBISCUS PLANT
Roberta J. Ludick, 13095 NE. 2nd Ave., North Miami, Fla.
33161
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 310,070
Int. a.i AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 54 " 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of hibiscus plant, of Rosa-sinen-
sis species, substantially as herein described and illustrated, and
characterized particularly as to novelty by its vigorous, up-
right habit of growth, its crisp green foliage, and its brilliant,
long-lasting flowers.
5,035
HYBRID MINIATURE ROSE PLANT CV. ARORASP
Jack E. Christensen, Ontario, Calif., assignor to Armstrong
Nurseries, Inc., Ontario, Calif.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,239
Int. a.' AOIH 5/00
U.S. CI. Pit.— 8 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of rose plant of the hybrid
miniature class, substantially as herein shown and described,
and being especially characterized by its deep yellow buds and
blooms of unique wavy form, by its tall, vigorous, upright,
bushy habit that produces, on long stems suitable for cutting,
flowers of heavy substance and good color retention
5,036
HYBRID SHRUB ROSE CV. MACMIGMOU
Samuel McGredy, IV, Auckland, New Zealand, assignor to
Armstrong Nurseries, Inc., Ontario, Calif.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,243
Int. CV AOIH 5/00
U.S. CI. Pit.— 2 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of rose plant of the hybrid
shrub class, substantially as herein shown and described, and
being especially characterized by its orange and white blooms
with a distinct near white "eye" coloration in the center of
each flower; the abundance of its "eyed" flowers borne on
pyramidal clusters; a vigorous easily grown shrub with excel-
lent disease resistance; and its total dropping of faded petalage.
5,037
ROSE PLANT— 71-4992
William A. Warriner, Tustin, Calif., assignor to Jackson A
Perkins Company, Medford, Oreg.
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,998
Int. CI.' AOIH 5/00
U.S. CI. Pit.— 20 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of rose plant of the hybrid lea
class, substantially as herein shown and described, character-
ized particularly as to novelty by the unique combination of its
vigorous, upright plant, ability to open blooms well in all
weather, quilled petals, red color lighter than that of American
Pride, deltoid shaped petals and little fragrance.
5,038
MINIATURE ROSE PLANT — MEIDDANEGO VARIETY
Marie L. Meilland, Aotibes, France, assignor to The Conard-
Pyle Company, West Grove, Pa.
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 319,105
Int. a,^ AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Ph.— 10 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct variety of Rose plant of the Miniature
Class, which is a sport of the Meirov variety, substantially as
illustrated and described, characterized by the fact that:
277
278
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
from the physical standpoint the plant has medium green
aduh wood and a bushy growth habit, and forms double
flowers which are blood red in color wherein the petals
are yellowish at the base and possess a great degree of
substance; and
from the biological standpoint the plant has vigorous vegeta-
tion, is well adapted to hot culture, is resistant to disease,
and has the ability to hold its flowers for a long period of
time.
5,039
ROSE PLANT 78-5111— PETTICOAT
William A. Warriner, Tustin, Calif., assignor to Jackson A.
Perkins Company, Medford, Oreg.
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 319,106
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 7 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct variety of rose plant of the miniature
class, substantially as herein shown and described, character-
ized particularly as to novelty by the unique combination of its
compact plant, mildew resistant foliage, pink edged white,
very double flowers.
PATENTS
GRANTED APR. 12, 1983
FRRATA
For See
("LASS PATENT I
6OM)06 4.379/
60-^145 4.379/
604-897 4,379.4
604-320 ; 4.379.4
604-264 4.379.4
428-042 4.379.5
436-082 4.379.7
419 -060 4.379.7
436-545 4.379.7:
436-543 4.379.7^
378 1 36 4.379.97
PATENTS
GRANTED APRIL 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4,379,349
SUN-OUT FACE SHIELD
Betty D. Larson, 3915 Lupe, Chino, Calif. 91710
Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,081
Int. a.3 A42B 1/18: A45C 3/00
U.S. a. 2—9
{10;110a,110A) on the guide member (5. 105) and a pinion (9.
109) rotatably mounted m the shde member (6. 106) and engag-
mg the two racks (8,108;10,110a.ll0fc). the gearmg effectmg a
7 Claims
forward displacement of the shde member (6. 106) and,
thereby, of the shank (1) upon a pivotal movement of the shank
(1) relative to the attachment member (3).
1. A face shield to cover a sunbather's head and face com-
prising a sheet member of transparent, ultraviolet blockmg
material formed into a cylindrical or hyperbolic arch resting
upon a pair of generally "U"-shaped leg members which are
respectively rotatably attached to each one of the lower end
regions of said arched sheet member, said leg members, when
used to support said arched sheet member, being blocked by
contact with said arched sheet member from rotations respec-
tively outward from the concave region beneath said arched
sheet member, and said leg members, when equally rotated
toward the plane bisectmg the concave region in a direction
parallel to the axis of revolution of the arched sheet member,
come into close proximity with each other to serve as carrymg
handles for the face shield when inverted to form a tote.
4,379,351
DEBRIS TRAP FOR POOL COVER
Cornelius A. Hinsperger, 28 Columbus Crescent, Guelph, On-
tario, Canada
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,233
Claims priority, application Canada, Mar. 24, 1981, 373575
Int. a.' E04H 3/19
U.S. CI. 4—498 16 Claims
4,379,350
PROSTHETIC JOINT FOR KNEE AND ABOVE-KNEE
AMPUTEES
Giinter Munny, Wipperfiirther Str. 49, 5064 Odenthal-Eikamp,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,719
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Feb. 11, 1981,
81100947.1
Int. a.' A61F 1/04. 1/08
U.S. CI. 3—22 8 Claims
1. Prosthetic joint for knee and above-knee amputees, com-
prising a hollow shank (1), open at the top for receiving the
femoral stump and, articulatedly joined to this shank, an at-
tachment member (3) for fitting of a below-knee prosthesis (2).
wherein the articulated joint comprises a guide member (5,
105), connected rigidly to the attachment member (3) and
having rectilinear guide grooves (\la,\lb;\\la, 1176), a slide
member (6,106) guided slidably in said guide member, a sup-
port (7, 107) guided shiftably in said slide member by means of
arcuate guide bars (18a,186;118a,118A), which support is con-
nected rigidly to the shank (1), and a gearing located between
the arcuate support (7, 107), on the one hand, and the guide
member (5,105) on the other hand, the gearing consisting of an
arcuate rack (8,108) on the support (7, 107). a rectilinear rack
3
V
\^
I A tlcxiblc cover for a swimming pool comprising a sheet
of flexible material ot a si/e to cover the pi>ol and an upper
layer of flexible material ovcrlvmg a part of the area ot said
sheet with said upper layer being peripherally secured to said
sheet and having a tree inner e<lgc, said upper layer and said
sheet constituting a pair of cooperating pocket-detmmg
members providing therebetween a pocket having a pocket
opening spaced inwardly from an edge of said cover, at least a
portion of the material of at least one of said pocket defining
members being perforate permitting passage of water there
through while retaining in said pocket accumulated debris
during removal of the cover from the pi)ol
4 379 352
MOTOR VEHICLE SEAT AND PROCESS RELATING
THERETO
Siegfried Hauslein; Hans Steinberger; Willibald Heigl, all of
Munich; Georg Scheichl, Unterschleissheim, and Erwin Kaud-
erer, Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Baye-
rische Motoren Werke A.G., Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 135,527
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 29,
1979, 2912461
Int. a.' A47C 7/02
U.S. a. 5—471 6 Claims
1. A seat comprising a seat component and a back compo-
_ /
280
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
nent, at least one of the seat component and back component
mcluding a spring core, a cushion layer, and a ribbed uphol-
stery cover provided with a plurahty of spaced parallel ribs
defined by spaced parallel rib seams, a plurality of individual
securing tabs bemg provided at respective portions along the
rib seams on a side of the upholstery cover which faces the
cushion layer for connecting the upholstery cover to the spring
'-ore in an essentially pomt type fastening arrangement, each
securing tab including a first end portion attached to a seam of
the ribs and a free end portion which is secured directly to a
coil of the spnng core by a fastener.
4,379,353
CONTINUOUS METHOD FOR BLEACHING WITH
PEROXIDE
Horst Holderer, Krefeld, and Johannes Kutz, Tonisvorst, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Eduard Kusters, Krefeld,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,301
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar 15
1980, 3010139
Int. CI.' D06L 3/16 '
U.S. a. 8-149.1 6 Claims
1. In a continuous method for bleaching goods containing
cotton with peroxide, wherein a web of material is left standing
in a bleaching bath and is subsequently steamed, the improve-
ment comprising carrying out the step of leaving the material
standing by means of a retention in folded condition at a tem-
perature of W± 10° C., and carrying out the steaming, with the
material under tension, at a temperature in the vicinity of 100°
C.
4,379,354
RELEASABLE LOCKING DEVICE
Norbert Hahn, Cudahy, and Steven J. Hipp, Milwaukee, both of
Wis., assignors to Rite-Hite Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,348
Int. a.J EOID 1/00
U.S. a. 14-71.3 1, ci^^
1. A releasable locking device for use in securing a parked
vehicle to an adjacent structure, said device comprising a
carriage mountable on the structure for limited relative move-
ment in a substantially vertical plane and being biased to as-
sume a predetermined elevated rest position; a rotary first
means carried on said carriage and movable therewith in said
substantially vertical plane, said first means being rotatable
between an operative mode and an inoperative mode, when in
said operative mode, said first means having a section thereof
projecting outwardly from said carnage and being adapted to
interlockingly engage the parked vehicle, and when in an
inoperative mode, having said section in a depending vehicle-
release position and substantially enclosed within said carriage;
second means operatively connected to said first means to
effect movement of the latter from said inoperative mode to
said operative mode, said second means including a rotary first
member carried on said carriage adjacent to said first means,
said first means and said first member rotating as a unit about
a common axis, a flexible second member having one end
portion thereof connected to the periphery of said first member
and a second end portion thereof remote from said first mem-
ber for imparting a manual pull thereto to effect a predeter-
mined tangential force in one direction on said first member
and movement of said first means from said inoperative mode
to said operative mode, and a unit connected to and intermedi-
ate the end portions of said flexible second member to effect
the application of said predetermined tangential force on said
first member from a manual pull force of substantially less
magnitude applied to the second end portion of said flexible
second member; and third means mounted on said carriage for
releasably retaining said first means in said operative mode. ^
4,379,355
WASHING MACHINE FOR HOLLOWWARES
Kiyoshi Kobayashi, Noda, and Shuji Suga, Fujishiro, both of
Japan, assignors to Hukuba Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Chiba,
Japan
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,831
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 6, 1981, 56-15480rUl
Feb. 16. 1981, 56-20470[U]
Int. a.3 A47L 15/00
U.S. a. 15-101 9 aai„.
1. A washing machine for washing hollowwares comprising:
casing means having secured to the interior thereof station-
ary teeth means;
rotary gear means meshing with said stationary teeth means
and rotatably mounted in the interior of said casing means;
a rotating shaft projected outwardly from said casing means
and connected to said rotary gear means;
a washing implement mounted on a projected end of said
rotating shaft, said washing implement adapted to be
covered with a hollowware to be washed; and
said rotary gear means being movable along said stationary
teeth means by means of a hollowware held by an opera-
tor's hand, thereby rotating said rotary gear means, said
rotating shaft and said washing implement about the axis
of said routing shaft.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
281
4,379,356
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRODUONG
SKINLESS SAUSAGES
Hans Geissbiihler, Zuzwil, Switzerland, assignor to C. Hoegger
& Cie, A.G., Gossau, Switzerland
Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,360
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 21, 1979,
10391/79
Int. a J A22C 11/00
U.S. a. 17—45 6 Claims
4,379,357
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING WASTE
FROM A FIBER-AND-WASTE MIXTURE
Wolfgang Beneke, and Walter Jager, both of Monchen-Glad-
bach. Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Tnitzschlar GmbH
& Co. KG, Monchen-Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 174,103
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 4,
1979, 2931699
Int. a.i DOIG 15/80
U.S. a. 19—105 9 Qaims
g'^^i^e
1. Apparatus for producing skinless sausages, comprising:
a. a plurality of individual molds;
b. conveying means to convey said molds sequentially along
a predetermined path;
c. filling means to introduce sausage meat into said molds;
d. heating means to coagulate the surface of said sausage
meat in the molds; and
e. means to extract the surface-coagulated sausages from said
molds; wherein the improvement comprises:
f. said molds comprise hollow tubes open at least at one end,
and are loosely supported on the conveying means;
g. means at a filling station along said path for releasably
gripping a mold to hold it against movement relative to
said conveying means;
h. said filling means including:
1. a filling tube insertable into a gripped mold through an
open end thereof;
2. means for reciprocating the filling tube into and out of
said gripped mold; and
3. means for supplying ground sausage meat under pres-
sure to said filling tube during reciprocation thereof;
and
i. means effective after movement of the filling tube out of
the gripped mold to release said gripping means;
j. said heating means being effective to expand the meat
through the open ends of the molds and to coagulate the
surfaces of the meat at the open ends of the molds.
4. A method of producing skinless sausages, comprising:
a. introducing sausage meat into a plurality of individual
molds;
b. heating the molds until the surface of the sausage meat is
coagulated; and
c. extracting the surface-coagulated sausages from the
molds;
wherein the improvement comprises:
d. said molds are hollow lubes having at least one end open
during said heating, so that the sausage meat is free to
expand at said open ends and coagulates at its expanded
end surfaces.
5. In an apparatus for separating fibers from a fiber-and-
waste mixture in a textile machine having a rotary roll entrain-
ing said mixture; including means for effecting a detachment of
the mixture from said roll in a first zone for causing a travel of
the mixture tangentially to the roll under the effect of the
centrifugal force thereof; the improvement comprising
(a) means defining a braking channel having an inlet posi-
tioned to receive the mixture traveling from said roll;
(b) air pressure means including a pressurized air channel for
directing pressurized air to said inlet of said braking chan-
nel for impinging on the mixture in a second zone down-
stream of said first zone as viewed in the direction of
travel of the mixture for decelerating particles of said
mixture passing into said braking channel through said
inlet, whereby fibers of the mixture are returned to the roll
and waste particles of the mixture are allowed to continue
their travel in said braking channel;
(c) means defining a waste collecting chamber communicat-
ing with an outlet of said braking channel; and
(d) suction means communicating with said waste collecting
chamber for removing particles therefrom.
4,379,358
CORD ADJUSTERS
Giiter Wibrow, Norderstedt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
ITW-ATECO GmbH, Norderstedt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,701
Int. a.' F16G 11/00
U.S. a. 24—136 R »0 Claims
1. A cord adjuster compnsing a body having a through
passage which is divided longitudinally for the accommoda-
tion of cord sections capable of being passed therethrough in
side-by-side spaced arrangement and an arresting member
supported on the body for displacement between two end
positions, said arresting member being provided with clamping
areas disposed in the through passage and cooperating with
respective associated clamping areas of the body in order to
clamp the cord sections between them in tight clamping en-
gagement in one end position of the arresting member, charac-
terised in that the passage is at least in part an open-topped
channel, a stationary clamping projection is arranged on the
bottom of the channel, and the arresting member is a lid mem-
ber slidingly displaceable on the upper surface of the body and
282
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
closing the channel, said lid member being provided on the
underside thereof with at least one guiding projection for
locating and slidingly guiding said projection engaging be-
neath a corresponding guiding portion of the body, and the
clamping area being formed integrally with the lid member and
4 a79.360
METHOD OF MAKING A HINGE WITH AN INTEGRAL
PINTLE
John Papsdorf, Lake Orion, Mich., assignor to Liberty Hard-
ware Manufacturing Corp., Long Island Qty, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,536
Int. a.3 E05D 11/10
U.S.a.29-11 4ciains
extending on both sides of the clamping projection while being
spaced therefrom, said lid and said body having opposed finger
engaging sections thereon for engagement by a thumb and one
other finger to effect relative sliding movement of said body
and said lid between clamping and non-clamping positions.
4 379 359
POSITIVE LOCK HOSE CLAMP
Donald L. Young, 2805 Hill Valley Dr., Escondido, Calif. 92025
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,454
Int. C\J B65D 63/10
U.S. a. 24-273 3 a^^.
1. A hose clamping strap for clamping a nexible hose to a
cylindrical air supply conduit, comprising:
an elongated fiexible woven fabric strap having a first end
and a second end,
a friction buckle secured to said first end of said strap and
adapted to receive said second end for establishing a loop
of a selective size,
a toggle lever having a fixed end fixed to said strap at spaced
points along said strap adjacent said first end, and a curved
free end normally extending along said strap in a direction
toward and substantially to said buckle and pivotal to
extend in a second direction for removing slack from said
strap and clamping said strap against a flexible hose, and
fastening means comprising a slot in the free end of said
toggle lever, and a releasable twist fastener secured to said
strap for extending through said slot and rotating to a
securing position for releasably securing said free end of
said toggle lever to said strap in a position extending in
said second direction opposite said first direction.
1. A method of forming a male hinge member having a
mounting base, substantially cylindrical pin means remote from
said base, and neck means intermediate said base and said pin
means, the end of said neck means most remote from said base
being curled and forming a partial sleeve around said pin
means, said method including the steps of:
(a) forming a flat sheet metal blank having a first portion
adapted to be formed into said mounting base, a second
portion remote from said first portion and adapted to be
formed into said pin means, said second portion compris-
ing an outer longitudinal edge and two inner longitudinal
edges, said inner edges and the associated portions of said
outer edge defining two projecting ends of said second
portion, said outer edge having a surface lying in a plane
perpendicular to the plane of said blank, and a third por-
tion, intermediate and narrower than said first and second
portions, connected to said second portion and adapted to
be formed into said neck means;
(b) bending the outermost portion of said second portion so
that the plane in which the surface of said outer longitudi-
nal edge lies is rotated substantially 45° in a given direc-
tion of rotation with regard to the plane of the remainder
of said second portion;
(c) bending the end of said third portion remote from said
base substantially 90° in said given direction of rotation,
thereby turning said second portion in its entirety approxi-
mately 90° further in said direction;
(d) curling said second portion with respect to itself so that
said outer edge plane is rotated an additional angle of
approximately 225° in said given direction of rotation,
whereby said outer edge plane is brought into proximity
to the region of the third portion at which the latter is
connected to the second portion and said outer edge plane
is substantially perpendicular to the plane of said third
portion and whereby said second portion is formed into
semi-cylindrical shape;
(e) shearing the upper inner longitudinal edge portions, of
said semi-cylindrically-shaped second portion, from said
third portion in the region of the respective boundaries of
said upper inner edges and said third portion;
(0 swaging the inner longitudinal edge portions of said
semi-cylindrically-shaped second portion so as to curi said
inner longitudinal edge portions in such a direction as to
form said projecting ends into substantially cylindrical
shapes, thereby to form a longitudinally-extending pin
having two substantially cylindrical end portions;
(g) curling said second and third portions, as a unit, further
in said given direction of rotation approximately 45*, so as
to form the end of said third portion most remote from
said base into a sleeve extending partially about said pin;
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
283
(h) curling said sleeve and pin portions, as a unit, further in
said given direction of rotation, an additional approxi-
mately 45° so that said sleeve portion extends approxi-
mately 180° around the periphery of said pin portion; and
(i) rolling said sleeve and pin portions, as a unit, in said given
direction of rotation approximately an additional 90°, such
that said outer edge plane has been rotated through an
angle of approximately 540° from its starting position with
respect to the plane of the uncurled end of said third
portion and said sleeve portion extends around about
three-quarters of the periphery of said pin portion;
wherein step (d) comprises placing said outer edge in and along
one longitudinal edge of a die groove having a substantially
semi-circular cross-section and forcing said outer edge of said
second portion further into said groove whereby said outer
edge is forced to slide circumferentially around the inner sur-
face of said groove so as to be curled into a substantially semi-
cylindrical shape and wherein the longitudinal length of said
groove is substantially greater than the longitudinal length of
said outer edge and the outer edges of successive metal blanks
are positioned along different longitudinal regions of said
groove for said curling step, comprising the step of moving
successive blanks to be formed to different longitudinal regions
of said groove.
4,379^2
MOTION CONVERSION MECHANISM
Sidney A. G«tts, 1923 N. Church St., Rockford, III. 61103
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 49,427, Jun. 18, 1979, Pat. No.
4,255,858. This application Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,744
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 17,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. 0.i B27B 19/09
U.S. a. 30—393 10 Qaims
I 4,379,361
METHOD FOR MAKING MOLDED ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
John L. Webster, Painesville, and John T. Venaleck, Mentor,
both of Ohio, assignors to Chabin Corporation, Santa Clara,
Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 74,978, Sep. 13, 1979. This application May
7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,587
Int. a.^ HOIR 43/00
U.S. a. 29—857 21 Qaims
2X
1. Mechanism for converting rotary motion to back and
forth motion, said mechanism comprising a support, a power
driven shaft mounted on said support to rotate about a prede-
termined axis, a driven member operably connected to said
shaft, and means for causing said driven member to move back
and forth in response to rotation of said shaft in one direction,
said means comprising a resiliently yieldable strap connected
between-^aid support and said driven member and positioned
to flex resi\ipntly in the general direction of said back and forth
motion thereby to dampen vibration of said driven member,
said resiliently yieldable strap comprising a stack of leaf springs
disposed in face-to-face relation, each of said springs having
one end cantilevered on said support and having an opposite
end connected to said driven member.
4,379,363
DAMPED REMOTE CENTER COMPLIANCE DEVICE
Daniel E. Whitney, Arlington, Mass., assignor to The Charles
Stark Draper Laboratory, Inc., Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,220
Int. a.3 GOIB 5/25
U.S. a. 33—169 C 15 Qaims
1. A method of making a cable termination assembly for a
cable having at least one conductor and insulation covering at
least a major extent thereof, comprising: sliding along a first
length of insulation for ultimate removal from an end of the
cable to expose a portion of the conductor, sliding a second
length of insulation at least partly over the exposed conductor
end leaving an intermediate portion of the conductor exposed
between the second length of insulation and the major extent of
the cable insulation, electrically connecting an electrically
conductive member to the intermediate portion of the conduc-
tor to form a junction thereof, and enclosing the junction and
the intermediate portion in a connector body while leaving a
part of the electrically conductive member exposed for electri-
cally connecting the conductor with an external device.
/^
1. A damped remote center compliance system comprising:
mounting means;
a remote center compliance device including:
support means;
operator means interconnected with said support means;
a plurality of radial members extending between and at-
tached to said support means at one end and said mounting
means at the other end and having a focus at, near or
beyond the free end of said operator means; and
damping means disposed between said mounting means and
said remote center compliance device for suppressing
vibrations in said remote center compliance device.
284
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,364
ARTISTS FREEHAND SKETCHING DEVICE
Ivan L. Fish, 2804 Carolina NE., Albuquerque, N. Mex. 87110
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 173,288, Jul. 29, 1980,
abandoned. This application Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,164
Int. a.J B43L 13/16
U.S. a. 33-277 5 Qaims
3. A device for use by artists and others to aid in free hand
sitetching comprising;
a baseboard being generally flat and rectangular having two
arcuate notches along its bottom edge, and a groove along
its top edge sized to accept a vertical member, and;
the vertical member, being transparent, and generally flat,
and the vertical member being inserted into the groove,
and the vertical member being secured to the baseboard
by bolts and nuts, said bolts passing through matching bolt
holes in the baseboard and the vertical member, and;
the baseboard having a plurality of vertical slots in its center,
and;
a chm rest post having a foot region, a stem region and a
slotted end wherein the foot region has a plurality of bolt
holes matching the vertical slots in the baseboard so that
the chin rest post may be adjustably affixed to the base-
board, and wherein the foot region is angled with respect
to the stem region so that the stem region slopes upward
and away from the vertical member, and wherein the
slotted end has two slots which do not intersect each other
but which angle toward each other forming generally a V
without the vertex, and;
a removeable chin rest which slideably mates with the slot-
ted end.
4,379,365
GYROCOMPASS
Heinz Riethmiiller, Sandhausen; Rainer Sindlinger, Hirschberg,
and Peter Schultz, Dielheim b. Heidelberg, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to TELDIX GmbH, Heidelberg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,788
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Noy. 29,
1979, 2948051
Int. a.' GOIC 19/38
U.S. a. 33—316 32 Qaims
1. In a gyrocompass including a first gimbal, a gyro motor
mounted in the first gimbal and including a gyro rotor
mounted to rotate about a horizontally alignable spin axis, a
body in which the first gimbal is mounted to be rotatable about
a vertically alignable axis of rotation, a housing in which the
body is rotatably suspended, a verticality device associated
with the body for allowing the body to assume an orientation
in the housing in which the axis of rotation is vertical, and a
follow-up device including a pickup mounted for sensing the
angular position, about the axis of rotation, of the gimbal rela-
tive to the body and a drive connected for rotating the body
relative to the housing about the axis of rotation in dependence
on the position sensed by the pickup, the improvement wherein
said drive comprises a stepping motor constructed to rotate in
highly uniform steps and simultaneously serving to provide an
indication of the angular position of said body relative to said
housing about said axis of rotation.
4,379,366
DIRECTION HNDING SYSTEM
Akira Kuno, Oobu; Muneaki Matsumoto, Okazaki, and Koji
Numata, Toyokawa, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Soken,
Inc., Nishio, Japan
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,137
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 25, 1980, 55-55863
Int. Q.3 GOIC 17/JO
U.S. Q. 33—361 9 Qaims
XF . jjU'\f- ^ „ I ^J J^ re Spf
36
%y "Co
BATT
1. A direction finding system comprising:
a terrestrial magnetism sensor for detecting two perpendicu-
lar components of the direction of the earth's magnetic
field and generating two electric signals corresponding to
the detected components; and
electronic means for generating a direction signal specifying
one of 4N, where N is a positive integer, directions in
accordance with the two electric signals from said terres-
trial magnetism sensor, said electronic means producing
2N radialized boundaries representing signal components
from said two electric signals to define 4N radialized
regions, said electronic means including means for dis-
criminating the signal components to discriminate to
which region of said radialized regions said direction of
the earth's magnetic field corresponds, and said electronic
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
285
means including means for generating binary signals to
specify the corresponding one region in dependence upon
the discrimination of levels of said signal components.
4,379,367
ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED LEVEL
Marcel Legris, Place de la Parette, Air Bel Bt 48, 13011 Mar-
seille, France
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,637
Int. aj GOIC 5/04. 9/22
U.S. a. 33—367 2 Oaims
at a location laterally outwardly-spaced, from the moist solids
inlet of)ening and the air inlet opening, a pneumatic conveying
conduit extending from the solids outlet opening for conveymg
selected solids from the upper portion of the drying chamber,
when they have reached the desired dryness and particle size,
blower means for maintaining a primary flow of heated drying
air upwardly through the bottom air inlet, drying chamber,
and solids outlet opening and through the conveying conduit
at a volume rate providing lateral lifting of at least partially
«a ^^^ M .4
1. Apparatus for comparing the level of two spaced points,
comprising a pair of vertically movable chambers, flexible
conduit means of reduced section interconnecting the two
chambers, reference means on each chamber adapted to come
into contact with a said point whose level is to be compared,
thereby to predetermine the position nf said chamber relative
to said point, said chambers and conduit containing mercury
which is free to flow from chamber to chamber through said
conduit, a flexible elastic diaphragm fixed about its periphery
to the walls of each chamber, said diaphragm enclosing the
mercury in the part of said chamber in which opens the flexible
conduit along a substantially horizontal section of said cham-
ber, said flexible elastic diaphragms flexing under the differ-
ence in the hydrostatic pressures resulting from the difference
in the levels of the chambers relative to each other, electric
means responsive to the direction of flexing of said diaphragms
to determine which of said points with which said chambers
are in contact by said reference means is at the higher level,
and means permitting variation of the volume enclosed by said
flexible diaphragms, said chambers and said flexible conduit
means.
4,379,368
HOT AIR DRIER
A. Kent Keller, Mantorviile, Minn., assignor to Whey Systems,
Inc., Mantorrille, Minn.
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,848
Int. a.3 F26B 17/10
U.S. a. 34—57 R 20 Qaims
1. A hot air drier for particles and aggregates of moist solids
utilizing the upward movement of heated air at a volume rate
sufficient to lift partially dried solids of desired particle size
through a upwardly expanding cross section chamber and yet
insufficient to lift particles of all moisture contents and sizes
through the expanding cross section chamber and thereby
dropping oversized and undesirably moist aggregates back
down through such chamber for further disintegration and
drying, said drier comprising a body portion having a bottom
air inlet opening, a top wall spaced above the bottom air inlet
opening, a moist solids inlet opening directly above the air inlet
opening, and body side wall portions extending upwardly from
the edges of the bottom opening to the top wall and including
at least one sloping side wall portion extending upwardly and
outwardly from the bottom opening to an area of the top wall
spaced laterally outwardly from the solids inlet opening,
thereby defining a drying chamber of upwardly expanding
cross section from the air inlet opening to the top wall, said
chamber having an upper portion with a solids outlet opening
,,-e5>-^
dried and separated solids upwardly through the chamber and
outwardly through the solids outlet opening and dropping of
undesirably moist and unseparated solids down through the
chamber toward the air inlet opening for further drying and
particle separation by the heated air entering that opening, said
drier also having a rake member movable across said air inlet
opening within the chamber for engaging and breaking up
dropped solids into particles suitable for air lifting to the solids
outlet, and means for moving the rake member across the said
air inlet opening while the drier is operating.
4,379,369
DRYING CYLINDER FOR MACHINES FOR MAKING
PAPER ANP A METHOD FOR MAKING THE DRYING
CYLINDER
Christian Schiel, Heidenheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
J. M. Voith GmbH, Heidenheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,715
Int. a.3 F26B 13/18
U.S. a. 34— 110 eOaims
1. A steam heating drying cylinder for machines for making
paper comprising:
a cylindrical shell having inner surfaces thereon, said cylin-
drical shell comprising a center region of subsuntially
uniform thickness having inner surfaces thereon, end
fianges extending radially inwardly of said center region
286
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
and having inner surfaces thereon, and transition regions
being disposed between said center region and said end
flanges, said transition regions having inner surfaces that
taper radially outwardly from said end flanges toward said
center region, and
an insulation layer being disposed on said inner surfaces of
said transition region^for providing substantially uniform
drying along the widfn of the paper being made.
4,379,370
DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING THE INCLINATION OF THE
CUFF OR ANKLE COVERING PORTION OF A
FOOTWEAR ARTICLE, IN PARTICULAR A SKI BOOT
Renzo Balbinot, Vittorio Veneto, Italy, assignor to Nordica
S.p.A., Montebeiluna, Italy
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,154
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 23, 1980, 21894/80[U]
Int. a.' A43B 5/04
U.S. CI. 36—121 3 Claims
'\
\
1. A device for adjusting inclination of a cuff, particularly on
a ski boot, comprising an abutment block for engagement with
a shell of the boot, said abutment block having an abutment
surface for said cuff such as to determine the inclination be-
tween said cuff and said shell in a rest position of said cuff, and
further comprising a serrated protrusion on said shell, a serra-
tion on said abutment block for cooperation with said serrated
protrusion, a longitudinal throughgoing slot in said abutment
block, a pin projecting outwardly from said shell at the region
of said serrated protrusion and extending through said longitu-
dinal slot, a threaded region on said pin, and a tightening ring
nut for cooperation with said threaded region for tightening
said abutment block against said shell at selected different
height levels.
4,379,371
TRACK SKELETONIZER
Allan D. Jenkins, Maple Plain; John T. Appelen, Mound, and
Nils Lind, Minnetonka, all of Minn., assignors to Railway
Track-Work Company, Excelsior, Minn.
Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 245,348
Int. a.3 E02F 5/22
U.S. a. 37-104 42 Qaims
1. Apparatus for performing work on a railway roadbed
comprising:
a mobile support framework;
a front truck and a rear truck, each of said trucks roUtably
supporting wheels for riding on rails of a railway track;
means for connecting each truck to said framework;
rail hook means carried by said framework for selectively
connecting said framework with the rails upon which said
wheels are riding;
means carried by said framework for raising said framework
and a section of rail connected to said framework by said
rail hook means with respect to the ground;
a roadbed working tool;
suspension means carried by said framework for selectively
suspending said tool from said framework;
motor means for moving said suspension means between a
tool supporting position wherein said tool is suspended
from said framework and a release position wherein said
tool is free to drop from said framework;
-fj^-'l^
(5
powered handling boom means supported by said frame-
work for moving said tool with respect to said framework
after said tool has been released from said framework by
said suspension means; and
adjusting means for moving each of said trucks laterally with
respect to the lengthwise dimension of said framework.
4,379,372
PLANT TAG
Lee J. Alexander, Piano; Harold E. Vanberg, and Qyde E. King,
both of Dallas, all of Tex., assignors to Horticultural Prin-
ters/Carscallen Nursery Label Company, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,510
Int. a.i G09F 3/18. 3/08
U.S. a. 40-10 C 15 aaims
%t<
1. A plant tag for use on a plant comprising:
a resilient portion having first and second nonoverlapping
holes formed therethrough with nonlinear cuts extending
from the edge of each of the holes, the resilient portion
being foldable along a predetermined line between the
first and second holes to align the holes, the cuts extending
from each of the holes to an edge of the resilient portion,
the resilient portion jjermitting placement of the tag on the
plant by separating the edges of the cuts for passage of the
plant into the first and second holes, the resilient portion
resiliently unfolding after placement on the plant until the
portion of the edge of each of said first and second holes
adjacent to the predetermined line contacts one side of the
plant and the portion of the edge of each of said first and
second holes distal the predetermined line contacts the
opposite side of the plant to lock the tag on the plant and
maintaining the tag in a fixed position on the plant for
facilitating observation, the cuts being nonaligned to lock
the tag on the plant.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
287
4,379,373
DISPLAY DEVICE HAVING A COLLAPSIBLE EASEL
Felix Transport, 98 Riverside Dr., New York, N.Y. 10024
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,106
Int. a.' G09F 1/12
U.S. a. 40—152.1 9 Qaims
whereby to permit the enclosure to tilt downwardly to
said closed position as a consequence of its weight plus the
weight of the rodent, whereupon said closure means at
least partially occludes said doorway, trapping the rodent
and suffocating it, said trigger means comprising a shelf
pivotally supported in said enclosure, and means connect-
ing said trigger means to said latch arm.
4,379,375
HYDROPONIC GROWING SYSTEM AND METHOD
Steven K. Eisenberg, Simi, and Mark W. Hancock, Los Angeles,
both of Calif., assignors to Whittaker Corporation, Los An-
geles, Calif.
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,557
Int. a.5 AOIG 31/02
U.S. a. 47—65 17 Qaims
1. A display device supportable at a predetermined angle to
a horizontal surface having a collapsible easel comprising:
a guide panel slidably engaging said display device;
a support panel having first and second edges, said first edge
hinged to said guide panel; and
a stay panel having first and second edges, the first edge of
said stay panel hinged to said second edge of said support
panel and said second edge of said stay panel hinged to
said display device.
4,379,374
RODENT TRAP
Donald C. Lindley, Irvine, Calif., assignor to Contectrol Incor-
porated, Costa Mesa, Calif.
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 176,768
Int. a.^ AOIM 23/18
U.S. CI. 43— 61 8 Qaims
-I bl ^ I f'J, • /
^-"V.iJ'^T- -,, ;— -V-^ r-
-^rfit^.
1. A rodent trap comprising:
a base;
an enclosure including a top, a bottom, and a peripheral side
wall that forms an end face with a doorway through it,
hingedly mounted to said base for angularly tilting move-
ment relative thereto, said enclosure being angularly mov-
able between a ready position tilted relative to said base
with the doorway open and a closed position closer to said
base with the doorway closed, said hinged mounting being
disposed adjacent to the end of said enclosure farthest
removed from said end face;
closure means adapted at least partially to occlude said
doorway when the enclosure is in said closed position;
latch means interposed between said enclosure and said base,
adapted to hold said enclosure in said ready position, said
latch means comprising a post rising from said base
through the bottom of said enclosure to form a stop, a
latch arm extending along the bottom of said enclosure
movable to a first position on and a second position off of
said stop to support said enclosure in said ready position
and to allow it to lower to the said closed position, respec-
tively, and bias means biasing said latch arm toward said
first position; and
trigger means inside said enclosure adapted to receive a bait,
said trigger means being linked to said latch arm to move
said latch arm from its first to its second said position
1. An improved hydroponic growing system, said system
comprising, in combination:
a. an elongated hollow trough having substantially closed
sidewalls and bottom and an open top definmg a central
space, said trough defining a pair of spaced horizonul
tracks extending into said space along the length thereof;
b. an elongated flexible strip horizontally slideably disposed
in said tracks and defining spaced apertures extending
vertically therethrough along the length thereof;
c. a plurality of plant growing cups, each said cup compris-
ing a hollow body having a central space, an open top, a
porous bottom and substantially closed sidewalls. said
sidewalls bearing peripherally outwardly extending sup-
port means, each of said cups being disposed in a different
one of said apertures with said body extending down-
wardly into said trough space below said strip and with
said cup support means releasably securing said cup to
said strip.
4,379,376
UNIVERSAL EDGE GUARD
Robert Adell, Novi, Mich., assignor to U.S. Product Develop-
ment Company, Novi, Mich.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,512
Int. Q.^ B60J .5/00
U.S. Q. 49—462 15 Qaims
1. In an edge guard of the type comprising a metal strip
formed into a generally U-shaped cross section having inner
and outer legs and beads at the distal ends of the legs via which
288
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
the edge guard is self-retained on the edge of an object when
installed thereon, the improvement wherein the U-shaped
cross section has a generally semi-circularly contoured base
and includes inward offsets joining the ends of the base with
each bead so that the beads are disposed in inwardly off-set
relation to the diametrically opposite ends of the generally
semi-circularly contoured base and including a pattern of
notches spaced at intervals along the length of the inner leg,
said notches extending from the distal end of the inner leg,
along the inner leg, and into the generally semi-circular base.
4,379,377
EDGE GUARD
Robert Adell, Sunnyvale, Tex., assignor to U.S. Product Devel-
opment Company, Novi, Mich.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,513
Int. aj B60J 5/00
U.S. a. 49-462 12 Claims
1. In an edge guard of the type comprising a metal strip
formed into a generally U-shaped cross section having inner
and outer legs and beads at the distal ends of the legs via which
the edge guard is self-retained on the edge of an object when
installed thereon, the improvement wherein the U-shaped
cross section has a generally semi-circularly contoured base
and includes inward offsets joining the ends of the base with
each bead so that the beads are disposed in inwardly offset
relation to the diametrically opposite ends of the generally
semi-circularly contoured base.
4,379,378
AUDITORIUM CONVERTIBLE FLOOR
Norman C. McMahan, 3976 Black Oak Dr., Shingle Springs,
Calif. 95682
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,639
Int. aj E04N 3/12
U.S. a. 52-9 9 Qaims
"? — r^^v-!
1. An auditorium convertible floor comprising a sub-struc-
ture, a base on said sub-structure, a column, means for pivoting
said column on said base to move relative to said base between
a horizontal f>osition and a vertical position, means for holding
said column in said vertical position, a theatre chair having a
frame movable between a horizontal position and a vertical
position, means for securing said frame and said column to-
gether with said column extending above said theatre chair
when said column is in said vertical position and said chair is in
said horizontal position, a floor support, means for intercon-
necting said floor support and said column, and a floor section
adapted to interengage said floor support.
4,379,379
DEVICE FOR nXING A WINDOW MOLDING ONTO A
WINDOWPANE
Ikuo Sengoku, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Aichi, Japan
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,679
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 5, 1980, 55-154570
Int. a.' E04F 19/02
U.S. a. 52-208 18 Qaims
40
24 25 26 22
XL A windowpane assembly of a vehicle, which has a win-
dov^N-molding and a windowpane arranged in an L-shaped
cross-sectional fillister of a vehicle body, said fillister extending
along an outer periphery of the windowpane and comprising a
riser portion which extends inwardly from the vehicle body,
and a bottom portion which extends substantially parallel to
the vehicle body from an inner end of said riser portion, the
windowpane being stuck onto the bottom portion by means of
an adhesive material, a gap formed between the riser portion
and the outer periphery of the windowpane being covered by
the window molding which has a substantially C-shaped cross-
section, said device having a molding clip inserted into the gap
for fixing the window molding onto the windowpane, said
molding clip comprising:
a holding portion engageable with the C-shaped cross-sec-
tion of said window molding;
a central base portion connected to said holding portion and
extending substantially perpendicular to said holding
portion towards the bottom portion of said fillister;
a pair of V-shaped elastic wings intended to resiliently abut
against the outer periphery of said windowpane within
said gap and extending outwardly from said central base
portion in opposite directions, each of said elastic wings
comprising a first wing portion which extends outwardly
from said central base portion along the riser portion of,
said fillister and has an outermost end, and a second wing
portion which extends inwardly from said outermost end;
latch means arranged on said second wing portions and
being engageable with said central base portion for main-
taining said elastic wings in a compressed state to accumu-
late the elastic force of said elastic wings, and;
disengaging means for disengaging said latch means from
said central base portion and causing said elastic wings to
resiliently abut against the outer periphery of said win-
dowpane.
4,379,380
METHOD OF CONSTRUCTING ANGLED BRICK
PANELS
William H. Vetovitz, 8174 Strongsville Blvd., Strongsville, Ohio
44136
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,318
Int. a.3 E04B 1/54
U.S. a. 52—259 12 Qaims
1. A method of joining a pair of bricks so as to have outer
surfaces disposed at a predetermined surface angle to each
other comprising the steps of: beveling the end of at least one
of the bricks at an angle such that when said bricks are posi-
tioned relative to each other at the predetermined angle with
the outer comers in contact, the inner comers will be spaced a
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
289
distance of approximately 1 J to 2 J inches with the maximum
bevel angle on any one brick not exceeding about 55*; position-
ing said bricks with their outer surfaces disposed at said prede-
termined angle facing downwardly with their outer comers in
abutting engagement to define an upwardly facing V-shaped
notch; filling said V-shaped notch with a cement; and allowing
said cement to harden.
4,379,381
ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM
J. L. Holcombe, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Emerson H. Mizeli,
Atlanta, Ga.
Filed Jun. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 156,606
Int. a.3 E04B 2/28. 2/60: E04F 21/00
U.S. a. 52—404 7 Qaims
(k) said support structure including main support brackets
and longitudinal support brackets;
(1) said main support brackets being generally U-shaped and
having base, side and flange portions;
(m) said base of said support bracket being positioned be-
tween and transverse to said roof purlins;
(n) said side portions extending vertically upward from said
base of said support bracket;
(o) said flange portions being attached to the upper end of
said sides and being connected to said roof purlins;
(p) said base of said main support bracket having length, two
sides and a downwardly projecting stacking flange on
both sides and running the length of said base;
(q) said longitudinal support brackets being of one continu-
ous piece and having length, two sides and two edges;
(r) said two ends of said longitudinal support bracket having
connecting means;
(s) said longitudinal support brackets having downwardly
projecting stacking flanges on both sides and running
almost the length of said longitudinal support bracket;
and,
(t) said longitudinal support brackets being connected to said
base of said main support brackets and being generally
parallel to the length of said roof joists.
4,379,382
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INSULATING A
FURNACE HAVING A CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE
Robert A. Sauder, Emporia, Kans., assignor to Sauder Indus-
tries, Inc., Emporia, Kans.
Filed Jun. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 155,173
Int. a.5 F27D 1/00: C04B 43/02: B23P 21/00: E04B 1/80
U.S. CI. 52—506 19 Claims
i> (0
1. An insulation system comprising:
(a) spaced roof joists having length and side and top sur-
faces;
(b) support structures located between and supported by
said roof joists;
(c) a semi-rigid insulation blanket overlying said support
structures and said roof joists;
(d) said semi-rigid insulation blanket having front, back and
side surfaces and length and width;
(e) said semi-rigid insulation blanket having a vapor barrier
on said back surface and between said support structure
and said insulation blanket;
(0 said semi-rigid insulation blanket having a series of prede-
termined recesses cut into said front surface;
(g) said predetermined recesses providing hinges for laying
said insulating blanket over said support structure and
roof joists;
(h) approximately U-shaped trough areas formed by said
insulation blanket between some of said predetermined
recesses;
(i) a series of said blankets in side-by-side relationship with
the widths of said blankets running approximately parallel
to the lengths of said roof joists;
(j) insulation material contained within and generally filling
said trough areas;
1. A high temperature insulation module for use in a cham-
ber containing a corrosive atmosphere, comprising:
a first ceramic fiber mat, the first mat having a hot face
adapted for exposure to the interior of a high temperature
chamber, the first mat having a thickness, the first mat
having a rear face generally opposite from the hot face;
a support member, the support member being disposed
against the rear face of the first mat, the support member
being displaced from the hot face of the first mat by at
least the thickness of the first mat to protect the support
member from excessive heat;
a second ceramic fiber mat, the second mat having a front
face disposed against the support member, the second mat
having a thickness, the second mat having a cold face
generally opposite from the front face, the second mat
being adapted to maintain the support member in a region
displaced from the cold face by at least the thickness of the
second mat; and,
the first mat, the support member and the second mat form-
ing a module, the support member being positioned be-
tween the first mat and the second mat and being dis-
placed from the cold face in a zone of the module where
the temperature at the zone during operation of the cham-
ber will generally be too high for corrosive gases and
water vapor to condense.
290
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,383 4 379 354
INSERTER WITH IMPROVED RAM MECHANISM METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY
William Adamoski, Stamford, and Alan B. Hotchkiss, Westport, PACKAGING STOCKINGS
both of Conn., assignors to Pitney Bowes Inc., Stamford, Masao Nishikawa, Nara, Japan, assignor to Takatori Machinery
Conn- Works Ltd., Japan
Filed Sep. 11, 1980. Ser. No. 185,856 Filed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 185,630
Int. a.^ B65B 5/04. 35/20 Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1979, 54-117585;
U.S. a. 53—266 A 2 Qaims Oct. 11, 1979, 54-132213; Jun. 7, 1980, 55-76937
Int. a.^ B65B 9/08, 63/04
U.S. a. 53—415 12 Qaims
f
96 64 '
1. In an envelope inserter having an enclosure pick-up sta-
tion, means for delivering enclosures to the pick-up station, an
envelope station, means for delivering envelopes to the enve-
lope station, ram means including a ram blade and a ram block,
means for moving the ram means from a home station in front
of the pick-up station to the envelope station on a forward
stroke and back to the home station on a return stroke, the
moving means including guide means and drive means, the
improvement comprising: means for returning said ram means
in a path which extends in a plane other than the plane of the
forward stroke and other than that of the pick-up station, said
returning means including means interconnecting the ram
block and guide means, the interconnecting means including a
carriage, said returning means including means securing the
ram block to the carriage for vertical movement relative to the
carriage, the means securing the ram block to the carriage for
vertical movement including means forming a sliding dovetail
engagement between the ram block and the carriage and in-
cluding a spring for urging the ram blade to an uppermost
elevation relative to the carriage, the guide means extending
between the home station and the envelope station at a fixed
elevation, said ram block having a portion thereof extending
towards the drive means, said portion havmg a slot formed
therein, said drive means including a pin extending mto said
slot and engaging said portion for forward and return move-
ment of the ram means, said pin limiting vertical movement of
the ram block, said portion having follower means extending
therefrom, camming means mounted along the path of said ram
means for engagement by the follower means, the camming
means including a first camming surface, the follower means
engaging the first camming surface on the forward stroke, the
camming means including a second camming surface, the
second camming surface being at an elevation below that of the
first camming surface, the follower means engaging the second
camming surface during the return stroke, means guiding the
follower means between the first and second camming sur-
faces, the follower guiding means comprising a latch hinged to
the camming means and extending forwardly thereof, the
follower means engaging the upper surface of the latch on the
forward stroke, the follower means being disengaged from the
latch when the ram means is at the envelope station, the latch
varying its position in response to disengagement of the fol-
lower means, and the follower means engaging the undersur-
face of the latch and being cammed thereby into engagement
with the second camming surface- on the return stroke,
whereby a successive enclosure may be loaded into the pick-up
station prior to the completion of the return stroke.
1. A method for automatically packaging stockings using an
apparatus having a setting station arranged adjacent one side of
an operation table and an enclosing station arranged on said
operation table at a position downstream to and substantially
coplanar with said setting station, said method comprising the
steps of receiving at said setting station a pair of stockings on
a horizontal transfer plate of a transfer assembly arranged on
said operation table and provided with a transfer gripping
plate; delivering an insert from a supply thereof using an insert
feeding assembly arranged on said operation table facing said
setting station and feeding same onto said stockings at a posi-
tion overlying said transfer plate; provisionally fixing at said
setting station the position of said stockings and insert relative
to said transfer plate using an insert gripping plate of an insert
gripping assembly arranged adjacent to said transfer assembly;
concurrently folding waist and toe end sections of said stock-
ings around said insert being gripped by said insert gripping
plate using a stockings folding assembly arranged on said
operation table facing said setting station; feeding an envelope
to said enclosing station using an envelope feeding assembly
arranged on said operation table; transferring said stocking
with said insert 10 a conveyor assembly by horizontally recip-
rocating said transfer assembly between said setting station and
the upstream terminal of said conveyor assembly; conveying
said stockings folded around said insert towards said enclosing
station using said conveyor assembly arranged on said opera-
tion table and provided with a conveyor gripping plate; enclos-
ing said stockings with said insert in said envelope using a
stockings enclosing assembly arranged on said operation table
facing said enclosing station and provided with an encloser for
gripping said stockings folded around said insert; said step of
transferring said stockings with said insert to said conveyor
assembly is accomplished by said transfer gripping plate taking
over the gripping of said stockings and insert from said insert
gripping plate and said conveyor gripping plate taking over the
gripping of said stockings and insert from said transfer gripping
plate; and conveying said stockings and said insert to said
stocking enclosing assembly by said encloser taking over the
gripping of said stockings and insert from said conveyor grip-
ping plate so that said stockings and insert are continuously
gripped while being transferred from said setting station to said
enclosing station.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
291
4,379,385
COMPACTION APPARATUS FOR USE WITH LAWN
GROOMING EQUIPMENT
Ulf Reinhall, 834 171st PI., NE., Bellevue, Wash. 98008
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,645
Claims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 6, 1980, 8006979
Int. a.3 AOID 35/22
U.S. a. 56^16.6 12 Qaims
said second sliver clamp means being arranged before said
sliver delivery device in the transport direction at a dis-
5! i- 5?D M 7st
no/
6n
1. In lawn grooming equipment in which lawn grooming
means are mounted within a main body adapted to be moved
over the surface to be groomed, which grooming means are
driven to generate a flow of refuse material picked up from the
lawn into a compacting device connected to said main body,
said compacting device comprising a conveyor which rotates
within a housing to convey the refuse material from a material
inlet end to a material outlet end therein, the improvement
comprising:
(a) a conveyor housing surrounding a solid type compacting
screw conveyor rotating therein to convey the refuse
material while compressing it progressively therein as it is
advanced through said housing from said material inlet to
said material outlet end;
(b) perforations in the wall of said conveyor housing for
evacuating accompanying air and moisture from the re-
fuse material during the compression step; and
(c) a tubular casing extensibly connected to the outlet open-
ing of said conveyor housing for receiving the initially
compacted refuse material and allowing it to expand
against the tubular wall thereof to plug one end thereof
and thus cause the casing and the enclosed compacted
refuse material to advance like a sausage from said outlet
end under the force of the continuous advancement of
refuse material from said conveyor housing.
tance which is at least as large as the average fiber staple
length.
4,379,387
CYLINDER CONTROL SYSTEM FOR MULTICYLINDER
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Hanihiko lizuka, and Fukashi Sugasawa, both of Yokohama,
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited, Yoko-
hama, Japan
Filed Nov. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 96,460
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 6, 1978, 53-151444
Int. a.' FOIN 3/20; P02D J 7/00
U.S. a. 60—277 6 Qaims
*l«JtCT«»*j 1
T coNTjoiJ crimncp 1 ■
- CON'BO. L
/ 4,379,386
APPARATUS FOR INTERRUPTING THE SLIVER
SUPPLY IN OPEN-END SPINNING APPARATUS
Georg Goldammer, Gaimersheim, and Ludwig Schmitt, Manch-
ing, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Schubert A
Salzer, Ingoistadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,645
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 18,
1980, 3010303
Int. Q.3 DOIH 13/18, 7/882
U.S. Q. 57—405 8 Qaims
1. Apparatus for interrupting the sliver supply in an open-
end spinning machine which includes an opening device, a
sliver delivery device, a first sliver clamp associated with said
sliver delivery device, means including a yam monitor or a lap
monitor when a supply roller continues to run for actuating
said sliver clamp, comprising:
a second sliver clamp means actuatable simultaneously with
said First sliver clamp for clamping said sliver;
1. A cylinder control system for a multicylinder internal
combustion engine with an exhaust gas purification device for
purifying the exhaust from the cylinders, the cylinders forming
at least a first and a second group of cylinders, each of the
groups having at least one fuel injection valve controlled
independently of the fuel injection valves for other groups, the
air supply to the first group being controlled by a first throttle
valve, the air supply to the second group being controlled by
the first and second throttle valves, the cylinder control system
comprising:
(a) air flow sensor means for measuring the air flow through
the first throttle valve and generating an air flow signal
indicative thereof;
(b) Fuel injection control circuit means responsive to said air
flow signal to generate a fuel injection signal indicative of
a quantity of fuel to be injected;
(c) cylinder control circuit means responsive to said fuel
injection signal to generate a control signal when said fuel
injection signal falls below a predetermined value, said
second throttle responding to said control signal to inter-
rupt the supply of air to the second group;
(d) detector means for sensing the temperiture of the ex-
haust purification device and generating a first signal
indicative thereof;
(e) comparator means for comparing said first signal to a first
292
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
reference value representative of a predetermined temper-
ature value above which the purification device may be
damaged by heat and for generating a second signal when
said first signal exceeds said first reference value; and
(0 gate means responsive to said control signal and the
absence of said second signal for gating said fuel injection
signal to said at least one fuel injection valve of said sec-
ond cylinder group.
4,379,388
OCEAN RAFT ENERGY GENERATOR
ByrI L. Williamson, and Betty Wiliiamson, both of c/o Good
Sam Qub P.O. Box 404, Agoura, Calif. 91301
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,514
Int. a.3 F16D 31/02
U.S. a. 60—398 6 Qaims
40 42 44 61
1. A system for generating energy comprising:
a hollow flotation raft;
at least one raceway of arcuate cross-section in said raft;
a heavy metal ball in each said raceway to roll therealong in
either direction in response to movement of said raft on
the sea;
a hydraulic system; and
a prime mover driven by pressurized liquid in said hydraulic
system;
said hydraulic system comprising:
at least one pair of aligned cylinders along each raceway
disposed with their heads at opposite ends;
a pair of pistons slidable in said cylinder;
a push rod interconnecting said pistons;
a pivoted lever connected to said push rod and extending
into the path of travel with a ball on said raceway so that
engagement of said lever by said ball rolling in opposite
directions will reciprocate said interconnected pistons;
a pressure tank;
supply conduits connected between the closed ends of said
cylinders and said pressure tanks;
a delivery conduit opening from said pressure tank for deliv-
ery of pressurized fluid to said prime mover;
a reservoir for hydraulic fluid positioned above said cylin-
ders;
an accumulator chamber connected between said reservoir
and each of said cylinders to ensure a ready supply of fluid
thereto; and
a float-operated, one-way check valve below said chamber
and above said cylinder to open for flow to said cylinder
in the event of any fluid insufficiency therein;
a vent line connecting the head of each said cylinder to
atmosphere;
a valve member normally closing ofl" said vent line; and
means on said push rod for opening said valve member at the
end of a pressure stroke of each piston.
4,379,389
HORSEPOWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL FOR
VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS
Kenneth P. Liesener, Peoria, HI., assignor to Caterpillar Tractor
Co., Peoria, 111.
PCT No. PCT/US80/01194, § 371 Date Sep. 12, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 12, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01046, PCT Pub
Date Apr. 1,1982
This PCT application filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 261,098
Int. a.3 F16D 31/02
U.S. a. 60—428 6 Claims
6. A fluid circuit (10) having a plurality of fluid motors (13),
a variable displacement pump (11) having a discharge pressure
(P/)), connected to each of said motors (13) and including a
control member (38) movable between first and second dis-
placement positions, first biasing means (58) for urging said
control member (38) towards its first displacement position,
second biasing means (62) for urging said control member (38)
towards its second displacement position in response to an
actuator pressure signal (P^) communicated thereto from said
pump (11), and means (34) for modulating said actuator pres-
sure signal (P^) in response to variations in a load pressure
signal (?/,) communicated thereto from a respective one of said
fluid motors (13) during a predetermined range of horsepower
consumption of said pump (11), horsepower limiting means
(39) for blocking communication of said actuator pressure
signal (P^) with said second biasing means (62) and for venting
said actuator pressure signal (P^) from said second biasing
means (62) in response to a pressure control signal (Pc) which
is responsive to said pump discharge pressure (P/j) indicating
that said pump (11) has exceeded said predetermined range of
horsepower consumption and summing means (22) for modu-
lating said pressure control signal (Pc) in response to the aver-
age fluid discharge pressures (P/j) of said pumps (11).
4,379,390
ICE-MAKING EVAPORATOR
Edward W. Bottiun, 9357 Spencer Rd., Brighton, Mich. 48116
FUed Feb. 28, 1977, Ser. No. 772,539
Int. a.3 F25C 5/08
U.S. a. 62—354 2 Claims
1. An ice-making evaporator comprising an elongated hol-
low tubular member having an outer surface and inner surface
and having a bottom end and a top end wherein the bottom end
is adapted to be installed lower than the top end, said bottom
end of the tubular member being completely open, a baffle
covering part of the top end of the hollow tubular member for
directing water passed into the top end of the tubular member
toward the sides thereof and permitting free flow of water
through the baffle to the sides of the tubular member from the
top end thereof toward the bottom end thereof on the inner
surface thereof, a relatively soft metallic helical tubular coil for
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
293
the member, said coil having flattened surface portions of
substantial area fluid-pressure expanded in pressure contact
with the outer surface of the tubular member, one end of the
coil being a fluid inlet and the other end of the coil being a fluid
outlet, whereby water sprayed onto the baffle at the upper end
of the hollow tubular member may be frozen as it progresses
from the top end of the tubular member toward the bottom end
of the tubular member for subsequent removal from the bottom
end of the tubular member as ice, the coil having a plurality of
convolutions in spaced apart relation axially of the hollow
parallel with said first switch and closed to drive said blower
when said door is opened.
4^7932
APPARATUS FOR STEAMING PRINTED FABRICS
Sergio Centis, Gerenzano, Italy, assignor to Arioli A C^.r.I.,
Gerenzano, Italy
Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,213
Claims priority, application Italy, Oct. 1, 1979, 26160 A/79
Int. a.3 D06B 3/30
U.S. a. 68—5 C 11 Claims
tubular member, and further including a second helical tubular
coil having convolutions alternating with that of the first tubu-
lar coil, which second coil also has flattened surface portions of
substantially fluid pressure expanded in pressure contact with
the tubular member with one end portion of the second coil
also being a fluid inlet and the other end of the second coil
being a fluid outlet whereby ice formed on the inner surface of
the hollow tubular member may be released therefrom for
subsequent removal from the bottom end of the tubular mem-
ber by gravity on passing of a heated substance through said
second coil.
4,379,391
REFRIGERATOR
Jae W. Rhee, 369-7 Sukyo-Dong, Mapo-ku, Seoul, Rep. of Korea
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,353
Claims priority, application Rep. of Korea, Jun. 5, 1980,
3614/80
Int. Cl.^¥2SD 17/04
U.S. a. 62—408 4 Qaims
1. A refrigerator comprising a refrigerator body, a door
fitted to said refrigerator body so as to be able to be opened and
closed, at least one set of an air jetting port and air sucking port
provided opposed to each other in the opening of the refrigera-
tor body to form an air curtain in said opening when said door
is opened, a blower arranged within said body and connected
on the blowing side to said air jetting port and on the second
side to said air sucking port, a normally open first switch means
fitted to the handle of said door and closed to start said blower
when said handle is gripped by a hand to open said door, and
a second switch means fitted to said body and connected in
^ X
1. In an apparatus for treating pnnted fabrics in which air is
circulated and at least a portion of the circulating air circulates
between intermediate levels with respect to the height of the
treating chamber, the improvement which comprises a double
wall static structure, constituting the treating environment,
said structure defining in the interior thereof a chamber opened
at the bottom, having a saddle roof (10), double vertical side
walls (12) and double vertical front wall (14), gaps formed by
said double walls (16, 18, 20), perforated ducts (22) for emitting
steam into a water pool at the base of said gaps in the vertical
side walls and vertical front walls to the top of said chamber
under said saddle roof, ports (28) in said saddle roof for intro-
ducing said steam from the top to the bottom into said treating
environment, at least one operating assembly located in at least
a portion of the side walls of the static structure, means for
introducing air at the base of said operating assembly, said
operating assembly including mechanical means effective to
cause the air to circulate through a circuit looped through said
operating assembly, said assembly including radiator means
(42) for applying thermal energy to the air circulating through
said circuit, and a supply system adapted to supply selectively
liquid and/or gaseous substances and power means effective to
supply said radiator means with thermal energy, said supply
system being effective to be put in an operative or inoperative
position to selectively set said apparatus to operate, by satu-
rated steam or superheated steam, or by hot air.
4,37933
LOCK FOR OPEN FRAME VEHICLES
Roger A. Schott, Redford, and Lawrence A. Schott, Detroit, both
of Mich., assignors to Freedom Industries, Inc., Redford,
Mich.
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,997
Int. a.3 B62H 5/00: E05B 71/00. 73/00: F16G 11/00
U.S. a. 70—234 1 Claim
1. In a cable lock system for tubular frame vehicles such as
bicycles and motorcycles and for other tubular frame devices
wherein a lock cable is stored in a hollow frame tube and
capable of being withdrawn to lock the vehicle to a post or
similar stationary member, that improvement which com-
prises:
(a) an entrance tube passing through and affixed to a wall of
a hollow frame member and extending partway into said
member, and
(b) a cable of relatively stiff resilient material dimensioned to
294
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
pass through said entrance tube and having an entrance
end permanently bent at an angle relative to the general
lineal line of said cable, a stop tube on the bent portion of
the entrance end of said cable also dimensioned to pass
through said entrance tube having a projecting portion
extending away from the entrance end of said cable to
project beyond the normal radial dimension of said cable,
said cable being flexible enough to permit straightening
for inserting said stop tube and said cable through said
entrance tube, whereby when through said tube said cable
end will assume the bent position and thrust said project-
ing portion of said stop tube outwardly to block reverse
motion of said entrance end of said cable out of said en-
trance tube.
4,379,394
KEY HOLDER
Minora Toyoda, Nagoya, Japan, assignor to Aisin Seiki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 68,568, Sep. 8, 1979. This application Dec.
5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,565
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 8, 1978, 53-110845;
Feb. 6, 1979, 5^03025; Feb. 6, 1979, 54-13026; Feb. 6, 1979,
54-13027; Feb. 6/19^9, 54-13028; Feb. 6, 1979, 54-13029
U.S. CI. 70—456 R
Int. CI.' A47G 29/10
7 Claims
1. A pendant type key holder comprising:
a body having supported lugs including concave portions,
said body and supporting lugs extending in a single plane;
a key having opposite side portions and being pivotably
mounted on said body and rotatable out of said plane
between an operating position in which the key is disposed
in said plane and outside said body and a non-operating
position in which the key is in said plane and is housed
within said lugs of said body;
said key further comprises stopper means attached to at least
one of said opposite side portions and adapted to pressure
engage with said concave portions to thereby maintain the
key at the non-operating position thereof;
whereby the key can freely rotate except when said concave
portions engage said stopper means in the non-operating
position.
4,379,395
INTERSTAND TENSION CONTROL SYSTEM AND
METHOD FOR TANDEM ROLLING MILL
Seizi Konishi; Kazuyuki Tashiro, both of Kitakyushu; Yoshihiro
Kamigane, Hitachi; Takakazu Sakurai, Mito; Shinya Tanifuji,
and Yasuo Morooka, both of Hitachi, all of Japan, assignors
to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,405
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 20, 1980, 55-19091
Int. Cl.^ B21B 37/06
U.S. CI. 72-8 14 aaims
U
100
J
—^400
**■' < — : ■
VXJ Ml
no
200
^-\ I'll, :
2'^
.-^tJ
- CONTBGL
411 414 --- ><
■ J
42i
424
.plg)
J
.J
HYOPAULJC
PRESSURE
UNIT
lOCO
1. An interstand tension control system for a tandem rolling
mill including a plurality of rolling stands and a shear means
disposed upstream of the tandem rolling mill, for cutting the
leading and trailing ends of a workpiece, said system compris-
ing means for detecting process data required for a computa-
tion of interstand tension imparted to a workpiece being rolled
by the tandem rolling mill, computing means for computing
the interstand tension on the basis of the outputs from said
process data detecting means thereby generating an interstand
tension control signal for cancelling a deviation of the com-
puted interstand tension from a desired value, interstand ten-
sion regulating means for regulating the interstand tension at
the desired value on the basis of the interstand tension control
signal generated from said computing means, means for pro-
ducing a hold timing signal covering the operating period of
said shear means by estimating or directly detecting an operat-
ing period of said shear, and means for inhibiting the interstand
tension control on the basis of said detected process data dur-
ing the operating period of said shear.
4,379,396
OPERATION OF A MULTI-STAND HOT ROLLING MILL
Thomas Hope, Doncaster, and Ewan C. Hewitt, Sheffield, both
of England, assignors to Davy-Loewy Limited, Sheffield,
England
Filed Aug. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 178,003
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 14, 1979,
7928222
Int. a.5 B21B 37/08, 37/10, 45/02
U.S. a. 72—13 9 aaims
^■r
«
hr'^
^i
1. A method of operating a multi-stand hot rolling mill for
rolling metal strip, comprising the steps of:
rotating the rolls of the stands of said rolling mill at a rela-
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
295
lively slow rate of speed so as to thread the head end of a
hot metal workpiece through said rolling mill stands;
determining and adjusting the rolling load at each of said
stands during said threading operation so as to obtain the
required desired output gauge of said strip and the re-
quired desired shape of said strip at the last stand, and to
predetermine the rolling temperature at said last stand;
rotating said rolls of said stands of said rolling mill at a speed
faster than that of said threading speed for rolling said
workpiece through said mill;
providing coolant means for said workpiece at one or more
interstand locations for cooling said workpiece during
said rolling operation;
determining the rolling load at each of the next stands down-
stream from said one or more interstand coolant applica-
tion locations during said higher-speed rolling operation
and comparing said high-speed rolling operation load
values with said low-speed threading operation load val-
ues; and
controlling the quantity of coolant applied to said workpiece
at each of said coolant interstand locations as a function
of. and in response to, the differential between said high-
speed and low-speed load values such that said rolling
load at each of said downstream stands during said rolling
operation remains substantially the same as said rolling
load at each of said stands as determined during said
threading operation, and the rolling temperature at said
last stand remains substantially at said predetermined
temperature level.
4,379,398
PULL-BACK TYPE INDIRECT EXTRUSION PRESS
Akira Asari, Osaka; Tatsuhiko Noyori, Kobe, and Tetsuro
Takehata, Osaka, all of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha
Kobe Seiko Sho, Kobe, Japan
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 272,019
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 12, 1980, 55-80779;
Jun. 12, 1980, 55-83608(U]
Int. a.' B21C 29/()(). 33/00. 35/04. 23/21
U.S. CI. 72—273.5 3 Claims
4 379 397
APPARATUS HAVING SHAPING JAWS FOR
MANUFACTURING BODIES OF SPINDLE-TYPE
SHAPES
Oidrich Langr, Olomouc, Czechoslovakia, assignor to Sigma
concern, Olomouc, Czechoslovakia
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 72,469, Sep. 4, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,586
Claims priority, application Czechoslovakia, Sep. 1, 1978,
5661-78; Sep. 4, 1978, 5714-78
Int. CI.' B21K 1/12
U.S. CI. 72=95 2 Claims
1 A pull-back type indirect extrusion press comprising:
a fixed platen;
a plurahty of tie rods;
a first and second movable platen opposed to each other on
opposite sides of said fixed platen connected together by
said plurality of tie rods;
a main cylinder device provided on said fixed platen for
driving said first and second movable platens, wherein a
space defined between said first movable platen and said
fixed platen serves as a billet ?one. while a space defined
between the second movable platen and said fixed platen
serves as an extrusion zone having a container therein;
a scalping member disposed in said billet zone wherein a
scalped-billet standby space formed in said billet zone and
extends into the fixed platen; and
a movable closure member diposed in said extrusion zone
and between said fixed platen and said container.
4,379,399
TUBE BENDER CONSTRUCTION
Leonard J. Kowal, Prospect Heights, 111., assignor to Imperial
Clevite Inc., Rolling Meadows, III.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,863
Int. a.' B21D 9/05
U.S. CI. 72—388 15 Claims
1. Apparatus for manufacturing spindle-type bodies of circu-
lar cross-section from a tubular semi-product, said apparatus
comprising at least three shaping jaws which are periodically
pressed together and apart in the direction transverse to the
longitudinal axis of the manufactured body, said shaping jaws
forming a continuous passage having an inlet part, a shaping
part and a calibrating part, the shaping part being formed as a
cavity of circular cross-section the center of which lies at the
inlet of the shaping part and coincides with the axis of the inlet
part, the center, which trails the calibrating part, lying on a
spiral the lead of which corresponds to the lead of the manu-
factured body, the eccentricity of the spiral increasing along
the whole length of the shaping part continuously from zero to
the value corresponding to the eccentricity of the spindle of
the manufactured body.
P' —
1. In a manually operable tube bender having a mandrel
defining a tube-receiving bending groove extending arcuately
about a bend axis, and a forming member mounted to said
mandrel to swing about said bend axis for urging a tube to be
bent into said bending groove, improved means for holding the
tube against longitudinal and rotational displacement in said
bending groove during a tube bending operation, said tube
holding means comprising:
means for supporting a portion of the tube in a clamping
space adjacent the mandrel;
a clamp member;
means for mounting the clamp member for pivotal move-
1029O.G.— 13
296
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
ment into and from engagement with a tube supported by
said supporting means in said clamping space to clamp the
tube to the supporting means; and
adjustable means for providing a selective infmite adjust-
ment of the pivotal mounting means to adjust the dispo-
sition of the clamp member in the tube engagement dispo-
sition between maximum and minimum disposition
wherein the clamp member is in engagement with the tube
for adjusting the clamping force applied by said clamp
member to the tube. -'
4 379 400
TUBE BENDER CONSTRUCTION
Albert J. Schwarz, Lincoinwood, 111., assignor to Imperial Qe-
vite Inc., Rolling Meadows, HI.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,864
Int. a.^ B21D 9/05
U.S. a. 72-388 9 c,^„.
strength structural panel means having planar surfaces, such as
steel armor plate and the like as used on military tanks and
other armored vehicles which are subject to close-by detona-
tion of high energy explosive charges, such as land mines and
the like, said system comprising in combination:
a. selectively closeable and openable, principal electrical
circuit means for measuring and obtaining evaluating data
for computing desired measurements, said principal cir-
cuit means including wire conductor cable means with
means for selectively connecting said cable means with a
source of d.c. electrical current;
b. said circuit means also including conductor cable terminal
means adaptable to be connected to said structural means
as a negative ground portion of said circuit;
c. novel, motion-sensing accelerometer transducer means
having body means, a plurality of metallic pin-like contact
probes supported by said body means, said probes having
respective first ends projecting freely from said body
means so that said free ends are closely adjacent but at
relatively slightly different distances from said planar
surface of a structure whose deformation is to be sensed
and measured, said first-end-spacings from said surface
being such as to have at least two of said probe ends
potentially contactable by the deforming surface;
1. In a tube bender having a mandrel defining a bending
groove extending arcuately in a first direction from a bend
start point, a tube retaining space adjacent said bend start point
in a second direction opposite said first direction, and forming
means swingable about the mandrel for urging a tube to be bent
progressively into the bending groove, improved means for
holdmg the tube against longitudinal displacement during a
bending operation comprising:
a tube holding member having a tube engaging portion and
a mounting portion; and
slidable lockable means for mounting the tube holding mem-
ber in association with the mandrel with the tube engaging
portion being position in a selected one of a plurality of
infinitely different fixed positions transversely to a tangent
to said bending groove at said bend surt point extending
through said tube retaining space for urging a tube por-
tion, engaged by the tube holding member and extending
from said bend start point to said tube retaining space,
infinitely adjustably pivotally about the mandrel at said
bend sUrt point to an angular disposition accurately tan-
gential to the bending groove at said bend start point.
4,379,401
SYSTEM FOR MEASURING PLATE DEFORMATION
PRODUCED BY EXPLOSIVE SHOCK WAVES, AND
MOTION-SENSING ACCELEROMETER TRANSDUCER
USED THEREIN
Anthony San Miguel, Uucadia, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Army, Washington, D.C.
RIed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,294
Int a.3 COIN 33/20. 33/22. 3/30
U.S.a.73-12 17 Claims
1. A system embodying novel, motion-sensing accelerome-
ter transducer means for measuring exceptionally high force
levels in the domain of from about 1,000,000 to 10,000,000 Gs
and also for facilitating measuring structural deformation and
average velocity of such deformation of normally high
d. means for supporting said transducer means in a position
closely adjacent the structural planar surface to be subjected to
deformation;
e. said principal electrical circuit means further including a
plurality of electrical probe conductor wires each connected at
one end respectively with a separate portion of said respective
probes which separate portion is remote from said first free
ends thereof, said probe conductor wires forming plural in-par-
allel subcircuits for each probe and respectively connected in
said principal circuit means to be potentially activated by said
electrical power source and plate-to-pin contact closure of the
subcircuit; --'
f each of said in-parallel subcircuits including a resistance
capacitor and fast-response electrical data measuring and re-
cording means connected in series between said probe and said
principal circuit conductor cable ahead of said means for selec-
tively connecting it with the power source;
g. whereby at least two of said in-parallel subcircuits are
adapted to be closed when a said deformable structural surface
is blast force deformed so as to make at least brief said electri-
cal plate-to-pin contact with said corresponding at least two
probes, and whereby the respective resistance capacitor is
discharged to thereby instantaneously generate signal data for
reading by display on said data measuring and recording
means.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
297
4,379,402
GAS ANALYSIS INSTRUMENT HAVING FLOW RATE
COMPENSATION
John N. Harman, III, Placentia, Calif., assignor to Beckman
Instnunents, Inc., Fullerton, Calif.
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,332
Int. a.5 GOIN il/QO
U.S. a. 73—23 16 aaims
1 . In a gas analyzer having a detector assembly for receiving
a sample gas stream and for producing an output signal that
varies in accordance with the mass rate of flow of a component
of the sample gas stream, a flow restricting element for limiting
the rate at which the sample gas stream is admitted into the
detector assembly, and an output indicator for displaying the
concentration of said component, the improvement compris-
ing:
(a) correction signal generatmg means for generatmg a cor-
rection signal that varies in accordance with the mass rate
of flow of the sample gas stream, and
(b) correcting means for applying to said output indicator a
corrected output signal that varies in accordance with the
output signal of said detector assembly and said correction
signal.
4,379,403
kNOCK DETECTING APPARATUS FOR INTERNAL
^ COMBUSTION ENGINES
Tadashi Hattori, Okazaki; Hiroaki Yamaguchi, Ai^o, and Yo-
shinori Ootsuka, Okazaki, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon
Soken, Inc., Nishio, Japan
Filed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,445
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 18, 1979, 54-134817;
Oct. 25, 1979, 54-138133
Int. Q\} GOIL 2i/22
U.S. a. 73—35 9 Claims
ring-shaped support member, said reed member being
projected from an inner wall of said ring-shaped support
member toward the center thereof, both of said reed
member and said support member being made as a unitary
body of a magnetic material, said reed member having a
resonance characteristic corresponding to a knocking
frequency of an engine;
a bar-shaped magnetic core having one end being located
adjacent to but spaced from said reed member to form an
air gap therebetween;
a cup-shaped housing of a magnetic material for accommo-
dating said vibrator means and said bar-shaped magnetic
core so that said support member of said vibrator means is
fixed to an inside surface of said cup-shaped housing;
magnetic flux generating means for generating magnetic flux
through a magnetic path formed by said bar-shaped mag-
netic core, said air gap, said reed member, said support
member and a side wall of said cup-shaped housing, said
magnetic flux generating means including an excitation
coil for generating controllable magnetic flux; and
magnetic flux sensing means disposed adjacent to and cou-
pled with said magnetic path to sense changes in the mag-
netic reluctance of said magnetic path caused by changes
in the width of said gap due to vibrations of said reed
member.
4,379,404
PIEZOELECTRIC ENGINE-KNOCK SENSOR
Hans J. Hamisch; Manfred Boruschweitz, and Theodor Gast, all
of Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmhH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feh. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,907
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 22,
1980, 3006655; Mar. 7, 1980, 3008780
Int. Q\? GOIL 2i/22
U.S. a. 73—35 8 Claims
2. A knock detecting apparatus for internal combustion
engines, comprising:
vibrator means including at least one reed member and a
1. A sensor for detecting oscillations in an internal combus-
tion engine resulting from engine knocks, comprising:
a tubular body (16) of piezoelectric material having a pair of
electrodes (23,24) on diammetrically opposite longitudinal
patches of a first cylindrical surface of said tubular body
and a counter-electrode on a second cylindrical surface of
said tubular body;
a casing having an internal cylindrical opening for receiving
said piezoelectric body, said casing having an internal stop
portion (13,14) for holding said tubular body against axial
movement;
means (15) for insulatingly and supportingly spacing said
tubular body from said stop portion (13,14) of said casing;
a flexure vibration member (18) having a free end extending
from a base portion, said base portion having oppositely
directed lateral extensions for dynamically connecting
vibratory motion of said free end differentially as pressure
variations to two diametrically opposite portions of the
end of said tubular body (16) opposite from the end
thereof supported by said spacing means (15);
a compression spring (17) for pressing said lateral extensions
of said vibration member (18) against said end portions of
said tubular body (16), and
means (19) held on said casing (25) for compressing said
298
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
spring (17) against said lateral extensions of said vibration
member.
4 379 405
FORCE TRANSDUCER, PARTICULARLY FOR
BALLISTIC PRESSURE MEASURING
Paul Engeler, Frauenfeld; Hans C. Sonderegger, Neftenbach,
and Peter Wolfer, Andelflngen, all of Switzerland, assignors to
Kistler Instrumente AG. Winterthur, Switzerland
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,842
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 10,
1980, 3021778
Int. CV GOIL 5/N
U.S. a. 73-167 llQaims
1. A force transducer for use in ballistic pressure measure-
ment, which comprises:
a force transmission element including a first surface ex-
posed to a pressure to be measured;
sensor element means for producing an electrical signal
representing said pressure to be measured, said elements
being held under pretension between a second surface of
said force transmission element and a basic receiver com-
ponent; and
an outer sleeve surrounding the exterior of said force trans-
mission element, said outer sleeve being coupled to said
basic receiver component, said outer sleeve including a
front surface exposed to said pressure to be measured;
wherein the spring rigidity of said outer sleeve is coordi-
nated with the spring rigidity of said force transmission
element such that said outer sleeve yields to approxi-
mately the same extent as said force transmission element
to the effective force of said pressure to be measured in an
axial direction of said transducer.
means for detecting surrounding environmental tempera-
ture;
means for producing a temperature compensation signal
which varies proportionally with detected environmental
temperature;
oscillator means for producing a d.c. voltage signal which is
periodically discharged at a frequency (f/) equal to a free
running discharge frequency (fo) of said oscillator means
plus a compensation frequency (fc) induced in said oscilla-
tor means by said temperature compensation signal;
Li
4 379 406
RELATIVE HUMIDITY DETECTOR SYSTEMS AND
METHOD OF INCREASING THE CALIBRATION
PERIOD OF RELATIVE HUMIDITY DETECTOR
SYSTEMS
Paul F. Bennewitz, 8310 Cutler Ave., Albuquerque, N. Mex.
87110, and Matt C. Bennewitz, 905 Nakomis Ct., NE., Albu-
querque, N. Mex. 87112
Filed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,734
Int. a.' GOIN 25/56
U.S. a. 73-336.5 „ Qaims
1. A relative humidity detector system for generating an
output signal which varies linearly with relative humidity,
essentially independent of changes in surrounding environmen-
tal temperature, comprising:
8P 5*"»f
-" ► •
82 Ju'pu'
'■-'' Ju'pu' sfjoc • "
•* 1
1 ^ ' '.' V3i
1 t'' „*.
1 ■*-) '■pf«»fOfu'F
'00 TMrm-Vor
relative humidity sensor means for producing a detected
relative humidity signal, said relative humidity sensor
means connected to said oscillator means such that said
relative humidity sensor means functions as a frequency to
voltage converter to adjust said detected relative humid-
ity signal for changes in surrounding environmental tem-
perature proportionally with said frequency (f/);
means for producing said output signal which varies linearly
with relative humidity in response to the adjusted relative
humidity signal.
4 379 407
SYSTEM FOR CONDUCTING RESONANCE
MEASUREMENTS OF ROCK MATERIALS UNDER
CONFINING PRESSURE
Lucien Masse; William L. Medlin, both of Dallas, and James H.
Sexton, Duncanville, all of Tex., assignors to Mobil Oil Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,775
Int. aj GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 73—579
■>•» »"i t.t
, ^ ' ~. ,r'' .,'
2 Claims
-J t s
1. In a system for measuring resonance characteristics of
rock material under an oscillatory driving force, the improve-
ment comprising:
(a) means for enclosing said rock material under confining
pressure,
(b) means for adjusting the confining pressure without intro-
ducing significant viscous damping in the oscillations, and
(c) means for controlling pore pressure within said rock
material independently of said confining pressure.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
299
4,379,408
LIQUID CRYSTAL TECHNIQUE FOR EXAMINING
INTERNAL STRUCTURES
Jaswinder S. Sandhu, Chicago, 111., assignor to Raj Technology
Partnership, Chicago, 111.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 224,173, Jan. 12, 1981. This
application Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,247
Int. Cl.^ GOIN 29/00; G02F 1/11
U.S. a. 73—603 23 Qaims
^60
from one another along said output surface commensurate
with the spacing of said zones, and
means causing said fiber bundles to have different optical
1. A liquid-crystal acousto-optical detector cell for ultra-
sonic energy detection and image display said cell having a
pair of substantially rigid covers, a liquid crystal material
positioned between said covers, and a peripheral spacer and
sealing member surrounding said liquid crystal material and
sealingly engaging said covers, wherein the improvement
comprises said cell exhibiting a good quality image, high sonic
transmission and low angular dependence, and wherein
(a) each of said covers is substantially acoustically transpar-
ent;
(b) at least one of said covers is optically transparent and said
optically transparent cover is a laminate having at least
three layers, with each of said layers of said laminate
having a thickness much much less than k of the wave
length of the ultrasonic energy propagating through said
layer; and
(c) with the other cover having at least one layer and the
thickness of that layer being much much less than \ of the
wave length of the ultrasonic energy propagating there-
through.
path lengths to provide predetermined time delays for the
laser light exiting from said respective fiber bundles at said
output surface when said bundles are energized simulta-
neously at said input surface.
4,379,410
BATTERY ELECTRODE FATIGUE SIMULATOR
David H. Fritts, Dayton, and John F. Leonard, Xenia, both of
Ohio, assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,565
Int. CI.' GOIN 3/32. 3/08
U.S. CI. 73—809 6 Claims
4 379,409
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING ULTRASONIC WAVES
IN A WORKPIECE
Erik Primbsch, Ahrensburg, and Wolf Bickel, Bergisch Glad-
bach, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Krautkram-
er-Branson, Inc., Stratford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,049
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 6,
1980, 3041875
Int. CI.' GOIN 9/24. 29/00; G02B 5/14
U.S. CI. 73—643 4 <^'la'n's
1. An apparatus for producing in a light absorbing work-
piece ultrasonic waves having predetermined direction of
propagation and wave-form, the ultrasonic waves being in-
duced in the workpiece by subjecting spaced surface zones
having predetermined geometric shapes to laser pulse illumina-
tion in predetermined time sequence comprising:
an optical fiber cable comprising a plurality of fiber bundles,
each bundle having a plurality of fibers, said bundles
having respective light input ends disposed at a common
input surface for ^eing coupled to a laser for receiving
light energy from such laser at said input surface, and
having respective light output ends disposed at a common
output surface of a probe head for causing said surface
zones to be illuminated with said light energy when said
output surface is disposed opposite said surface zones;
the output end of each of said bundles disposed in said probe
head -having its fibers fanned out at said output surface in
accordance with the predetermined geometric shape of a
respective zone which said bundle is to illuminate, and
said respective output ends of said bundles being spaced
^Wlf
y
1. A battery electrode fatigue simulator comprising:
a frame;
a first support beam pivotally mounted at one end thereof to
said frame and having a cam follower mounted at the
other end thereof, said first support beam further having a
plurality of notches situated therein, said notches being
longitudinally displaced from each other with respect to
the pivoting end of said first support beam, and means
located in at least one of said notches for fixedly securing
therein one end of an element which is to undergo fatigue
simulation;
a second support beam adjustably secured at both ends
thereof to said frame juxtaposed said first support beam.
300
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said second support beam having a plurality of notches
therein oppositely disposed from said notches in said first
support beam, and means located in at least one of said
notches in said second support beam for fixedly securing
the other end of said element therein;
a cam of preselected configuration rotatably mounted within
said frame adjacent said cam follower, means operably
connected to said cam for rotating said cam at a predeter-
mined rate of speed, and means interconnected between
said frame and said first support beam for constantly bias-
ing said cam follower against said cam whereby rotational
movement of said cam causes pivotal movement of said
first support beam to take place in order to apply a prede-
termined cyclic stress to said element;
means secured to said frame juxtaposed said first support
beam for determining the displacement of said first sup-
port beam at a plurality of locations along said first sup-
port beam, said locations being coincidental with said
plurality of notches located in said first support beam in
order to provide displacement information about said
element during application of said cyclic stress; and
means operably connected between said element securing
means in said first support beam and said element securing
means in said second support beam for determining resis-
tance in said element during the application of said cyclic
stress;
whereby a relationship established between said displace-
ment and said resistance is representative of battery elec-
trode fatigue undergone during actual battery operation.
4,379,412
SAMPLING PROBE FOR STACK GAS MONITORING
SYSTEM
Richard D. Wood, Uwisburg, W. Va,, assignor to The Bendix
Corporation, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,705
Int. a.3 GOIN 1/24
U.S. a. 73-JkS3.24 3 q^^
D
J ^3 4t .^
4,379,411
FLOW TRANSDUCER
Edmund G. Laviano, Patchogue, and Gerald S. Lefebvre, Holts-
Tille, both of N.Y., assignors to Interactive Design Inc., Lalte
Ronlionkoma, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,304
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/075
U.S. a. 73-861.78 , ,3 a^^s
42 40
1. A now transducer for measuring the fiow of a fluid, said
transducer comprising:
a housing having two spaced apart depending legs;
a shaft rotatably mounted between said legs;
a rotor secured on said shaft for rotation therewith, and
being freely rotatable between said legs by means of the
fiow of fluid thereacross;
a chamber provided in one of said legs with a portion of said
shaft passing into said chamber;
trigger means secured on said shaft portion for rotation
therewith, and being retained in said chamber for produc-
ing a change in a measurable characteristic as a function of
the rotation of said rotor;
sensor means contained in said housing adjacent to said
trigger means, and producing an electrical output respon-
sive to said change in the measurable characteristic;
said rotor including a paddle wheel having a plurality of thin
blades radially extending from a central hub; and
a distal end of each blade being angularly shaped curving
toward one side edge of said blade.
1. A probe for the extraction of gas samples from a high
temperature, particulate laden gas stream, comprising,
an elongated tube;
a pair of plugs having axial bores therein, said plugs being
fitted in opposite ends of said tube with said bores in
alignment;
a hollow, porous walled cylinder supported by said plugs
concentrically within said tube, said cylinder and said tube
being dimensioned to provide a clearance space between
the outer wall of said cylinder and the inner wall of said
tube, said cylinder forming a conduit interconnecting said
plug bores;
means for admitting particle laden gas to be sampled to said
bore of one of said plugs;
means for withdrawing gas samples from said clearance
space surrounding said porous cylinder;
a combination ejector-blowback valve secured to the other
of said plugs externally of said tube, said ejector-blowback
valve including,
a body, said body having therein
a cylindrical chamber, a convergent walled cavity adjacent
to and communicating with said chamber and an exit bore,
said body being secured to said other plug with said cham-
ber, said cavity and said exit bore coaxially aligned with
said axial bore of said other plug,
a hollow cylindrical insert supported in said body chamber
coaxially with and forming an extension of said axial bore
of said other plug, said insert extending tly length of said
chamber and into said cavity, said insert being dimen-
sioned to provide a clearance space between the outer'
wall of said insert and the wall of said cavity;
a transverse bore in said body intersecting said exit bore;
a valve stem rotatably mounted in said transverse bore, said
valve stem having a transverse aperture therein which is
aligned with said exit bore in one rotational position of
said stem, said exit bore being closed by said stem in a
second rotational position of said stem; and
means for admitting fluid under pressure to said body cham-
ber; said tube, said plugs, said porous cylinder, said body,
said insert and said valve stem each being formed of tem-
perature 40 and corrosion resistant material.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
301
4,379,413
ANGLE DRIVE UNIT
Michael A. Brammer, Columbia City, and Donald P. Bowers,
Fort Wayne, both of Ind., assignors to Dana Corporation,
Toledo, Ohio
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,182
Int. a.3 F16H 1/44
U.S. a. 74—710.5 9 Claims
1. In a drive unit adapted to drivingly connect angularly
disposed rotatabie drive and driven shafts, said drive unit
comprising:
a housing drivingly connected to said drive shaft,
drive means in said housing for transmitting rotation from
said housing to said driven shaft,
the improvement wherein said drive means comprises
an input member drivingly connected to said housing,
an output member drivingly connected to said driven shaft,
said input and output members are unfinished gear blanks
having opposed annular beveled outer surfaces,
locking means integral with at least one of said input and
output members engaging to directly connect said housing
and driven shaft,
said beveled surface on one of said gear blanks has a recess
for mating with said beveled surface of said other gear
blank and constituting said locking means.
4,379,414
HIGH RATIO SPEED REDUCER
Hugh St. L. Dann-tt Bethel, Conn., assignor to Pitney Bowes
Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,051
Int. a.3 F16H 1/28
U.S. a. 74—805 8 Claims
U
'^',
-r*
^V
1 /^ !>
L^ i'~/\,^ " I 11"'
1. A high ratio speed reducer comprising: rotatabie input
and output shafts having a common axis, said input shaft hav-
ing an eccentric portion;
an output sprocket mounted on said output shaft for rotation
therewith, said output sprocket having a circumferential
perimeter including a number of teeth;
a drive sprocket having a circumferential perimeter includ-
ing a number of teeth differing by at least one tooth from
the number of output sprocket teeth, said drive sprocket
being rotatably mounted with respect to said eccentric
portion of said input shaft and orbiting with respect to said
common axis as said input shaft is rotated, a segment of
said drive sprocket perimeter being located outside said
output sprocket perimeter as said drive sprocket orbits;
an endless double chain engaging both sprockets, said chain
having a driving length portion engaging said drive
sprocket teeth on said segment while being disengaged
from said teeth of said output sprocket, said chain having
a driven length portion diametrically opposite said driving
length portion engaging said output sprocket teeth and
being disengaged from said drive sprocket teeth; and
means for preventing turning of said drive sprocket as it
orbits, including (i) a slide body attached to one side of
said drive sprocket for movement therewith, said body
including two parallel slide surfaces extending in parallel
relation to said common axis of said input and output
shafts; (ii) a housing including an elongate slot receiving
said slide body, said elongate slot having two parallel slip
surfaces engaging said slide surfaces of said slide body to
permit reciprocal movement of said slide body in said slot
in a first direction transverse to said common axis; and (iii)
means permitting reciprocal movement of said housing in
a second direction transverse to both said first direction
and said common axis.
4,379,415
AUTOMATIC TURRET LATHE
Adolph V. Klancnik, Glenview, and Kenneth A. Klancnik, Pala-
tine, both of III., assignors to Universal Automatic Corpora-
tion, Des Plaines, 111.
Division of Ser. No. 60,790, Jul. 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4,324,161.
This application Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,428
Int. a.' B23B 29/32
U.S. a. 82—36 A 4 Claims
tilt
1. In a turret lathe where a turret is roUUbly supported for
indexing movement to one of several tool positions on the head
of a turret slide having both tool advance and tool return
motion, and wherein the turret is carried by a rotauble turret
index shaft supported by a bearing inside said head on an axis
tilted from the vertical
an indexing ratchet fixed to one end of said shaft to turn the
shaft when the ratchet is actuated;
said bearing comprising a pair of tapered bearing races re-
spectively on said head and said shaft and capturing there-
between a set of tapered roller bearings;
one of said tapered bearing races having an end engaged
with said ratchet;
screw means at the other end of said index shaft for adjusting
said shaft axially to cause said ratchet to engage said one
of the bearing races with more or less force to apply a
selected pre-load to said bearing;
and a thrust bearing interposed between the opposing sur-
faces of the turret and head.
302
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,416
FOOD-SLICING MACHINE AND METHOD
Fritz Kuchler, Klagenfiirt, Austria, assignor to Brain Dust Pa-
tents Establishment, Vaduz, Liechtenstein
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 911,289, May 31, 1978, Pat.
No. 4,217,650, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 911,290,
May 31, 1979, abandoned, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
74,775, Sep. 12, 1979, abandoned. This application Apr. 24, 1980,
Ser. No. 143,929
Claims priority, application Austria, Jun. 1, 1977, 3858/77;
Jun. 1, 1977, 3859/77; Sep. 13, 1978, 6603/78
Int. a.' B26D 7/32. 7/30
U.S. a. 83-23 6 Qaims
-1. - -'"^ i.i."i> '
3 A method of preparing slices of an elongated foodstuff of
generally uniform cross section, said method comprising the
steps ^{
supportmg said foodstuff on a table adjacent a blade;
. relatively displacing said table and said blade in a predeter-
mined slice direction perpendicular to the longitudinal
direction of said foodstuff into a succession of slices each
having a respective width measured parallel to said'slice
direction;
depositing said succession of slices on a support in a plurality
ot rows with the slices in each row offset from one an-
other by a predetermined first distance and the rows being
relatively offset by a predetermined second distance;
generating an output signal when said blade engages into and
cuts said foodstuff;
continuously monitoring the relative positions of said table
and said blade in said slice direction;
signaling the monitored relative positions of said table and
said blade on generation of said output to measure the
widths of said slices; and
automatically varying at least one of said distances in depen-
dence on the measured width.
movement to move said saw away from the other portion
of the workpiece, and
r
•U
M IJ
; i/i;-' P i
! I
u
Tata
(e) retracting said saw relative to the workpiece by moving
said arm.
4 379 418
SAFETY BOOT FOR PUNCH OR THE LIKE
Robert P. Martin, Jr., c/o Martin Sheet Metal, Inc., 7108 Madi-
son Ave., Cleveland, Ohio 44102
Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,253
Int. Cl.^ B26F 1/02: B26D 7/22
U.S. CI. 83-544 9 ^^^^
4,379,417
METHOD OF CUTTING A WORKPIECE
Paul Pieper, and Walter Cordier, both of Menden, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Rolf Peddinghaus, Ennepetal, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 71,282, Aug. 30, 1979, Pat. No. 4,289,054.
This application May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,069
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 5,
1978, 2838656
Int. CI.' B23D 45/04
U.S. CI. 83-27 8 Qaims
1 An improved method of cutting a workpiece comprising
the following steps:
(a) positioning a workpiece for cutting such that a saw,
including drive means, supported by an arm is movable
with the arm transversely of the workpiece,
Cb) cutting the workpiece into two portions by moving the
saw relatively transversely thereof,
(c) effecting movement of one of the portions away from the
other portion,
(d) displacing the arm laterally of said relative transverse
1. In combination, a press brake having a bed and a ram
movable vertically in a stroke cycle towards and away from
the ram, a C-frame assembly removably secured to the bed of
the press brake, said C-frame having a pair of generally hori-
zontal jaws vertically spaced from one another, the free ends
of the jaws being adapted to support a pair of tool elements in
working alignment, operator means on an upper one of said
jaws and disposed in the path of said ram, said operator means
being forcibly displaced by said ram to cause said tool elements
to cooperate in working a workpiece disposed between said
jaws, said operator means being constructed and arranged to
be contacted by the ram through a final portion of its forward
stroke such that a gap exists between the ram and operator
means during the initial part of the forward stroke of the ram,
and safety shield means extending between said ram and said
operator means, said safety shield means being capable of
excluding inadvertent positioning of an operator's limb in said
gap, said safety shield means including fittings at its upper and
lower ends, an upper end fitting including means to laterally
stabilize the sleeve by engaging said ram, a lower end fitting
including means to engage the upper jaw of said C-frame, both
of said engaging means allowing said sleeve to be laterally
stabilized by both said ram and said C-frame, said safety shield
means, including said lower end fitting, being constructed and
arranged to leave the space between said jaws unobstructed
through the full stroke cycle of the ram.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
"^03
4,379,419
PANEL GROOVING APPARATUS
Jean P. Woock, 5, Rue d'Aquitaine, Reichstett, 67460 - Souffel-
weyersheim, and Christian Baerst, 8, Rue de la Liberie, 67380
- Lingolsheim, both of France
Filed Jul. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 165,459
Qaims priority, application France, Jul. 6, 1979, 79 18306
Int. a.^ B26D 3/06
U.S. a. 83—875 10 Qaims
1. In panel grooving apparatus, the improvement comprising
in combination:
a table for supporting a panel at a working level;
a rail along a side of the table;
a working assembly mobile on said rail;
- means for selectively immobilizing said working assembly in
various grooving positions, including stops movable and
selectively arrestable along said rail and engageable by
part of said working assembly; and
movable peripheral elements on said table for releasabiy
retaining said panel;
said working assembly including a carriage movable in said
rail, and a rectilinear tool guide having an arm articulated
on said carriage;
said carriage having a base and a plurality of axles supported
by, and extending perpendicularly to said base, and pul-
leys rotatabiy mounted on said axles for rollingly engag-
ing said rail;
said base having two lateral flanges for pivotally mounting
said arm, and an upper flange for supporting said arm;
said base carrying a locking device for engaging said stops;
and
said locking device including a lever pivoted on said base
and having a cut-out for engaging said stops for immobi-
lizing the carriage, and a handle at a free end of said lever.
cal instrument having keying means comprising an array of
keyswitches operable between actuated and released states and
having a number of tone generators assigned i« actuated keys-
witches, apparatus for imitating a strummed stringed musical
instrument comprising;
a detection means responsive to operable states of said array
of keyswitches wherein a switch data value is generated
corresponding to each keyswitch operated in an actuated
state,
a status memory for storing said switch data values,
a chord detect means, responsive to the switch data values
stored in said status memory, comprising a matched filter
processor wherein a musical chord type is selected from a
preselected set of musical chord types irrespectively of
whether or not said stored switch data values correspond
to a musical chord type,
a root note detect means, responsive to the switch data
values stored in said status memory, for selecting a chord
root note corresponding to said selected musical chord
type,
an interval measuring means responsive to the switch data
values generated by said detection means, whereby a time
interval number is generated corresponding to the elapsed
time between successive actuated state of the keyswitches
m said array of keyswitches,
an interval detection means responsive to said time interval
number wherein a plurality of control signals are gener-
ated,
a strum generation means, respt^nsive to said pluarlity of
control signals, wherein a sequence of strum keying sig-
nals is generated,
a note data generator means responsive to said selected
chord type and said selected chord root note wherein
input note data is generated,
a plurality of tone generators operable at frequencies respon-
sive to said input note data,
a strum keying means, responsive to said strum keying sig-
nals, for selectively providing said input note data to said
plurality of tone generators thereby imitating said
strummed stringed musical instrument.
4,379,420
ADAPTIVE STRUM KilVING FOR A KEYBOARD
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
Ralph Deutsch, Sherman Oaks, Calif., assignor to Kawai Musi-
cal Instrument Mfg. Co., Ltd., Hamamatsu, Japan
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,026
Int. a.^ GIOH 1/38. 1/40, 7/00
U.S. a. 84—1.03 15 Claims
r\
/^
,50L0
SCLO
KEYBOARD
SglTCMES
i| NOTE DETECT
3 «ND
1 ASSIGNOR
1 NUMBER
1 °''
KEYS
[
i^
J
CHORD
DETECT
ROOT
NOTE
DETECTOR
1
1
>-7
u
CnOftO
TRANSPOSE
ADSR
GENERATOR
J
T"
y-in
riia
r^
-1
LEG«TO
OtTECTOR
GENERA'OR
ASSIGNOR
TONE
GENERATORS
I
P STRUM
I INTERVAL
I GENERATOR
.di
SELECT
GATE
4,379,421
ELECTRICAL PICKUPS
Kevin N. 1. Nunan, Lake Cottage, Stoke Rd., Biships Qeere,
Cheltenham, Gloucestershire GL52 4RP, England
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,124
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 22, 1980,
8033999
Int. CI.' GIOH 3/18
U.S. a. 84—1.15 9 Cl*»«ns
In combination with a keyboard operated electronic musi-
1. An electrical pickup assembly for a stringed musical in-
strument, comprising an elongate permanent magnet which is
magnetized so that the magnetic poles thereof are respectively
positioned at opposite side edge^BTthe magnet, and a coil
surrounding and wound lengthwise around the magnet, the
magnet and coil being relatively rotatable about a longitudinal
axis of the magnet and the assembly having mounting means so
304
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
that it can be fixed to an instrument without impeding said
relative rotation of the magnet and coil through at least an
angle of 180* at the limits of which angle a magnetic axis of the
magnet is substantially aligned with the winding axis of the
coil.
4,379,422
POLYPHONIC ELECTRONIC MUSIC SYSTEM
Walter Munch, Fort Thomas, Ky., and Dale M. Uetrecht, Cole-
rain Township, Hamilton County, Ohio, assignors to Baldwin
Piano A Orgtn Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 824,656, Aug. 15, 1977. This
application Apr. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 372,137
Int. aj GIOH 1/02
U.S. a. 84-1.19 16 Qaims
I cma.,-
r "
««*r 'i^Cu^'S
^ ■
' tH.
t
44
*1
IT. '
- i
4S
¥(y<fc^
41tC
-i
•-1
mmr-miete* \
CI0C-J
•'
/«.«c 1
'T -2
-\
,igF.
'-• ''''*CS,»tM4Sl f
,1 nsr^-i-i- ;*''•*
r^
n0 smfc-
4mo f\-(« : »c^-T
^
H
1. A polyphonic electronic music system for an electronic
musical instrument having at least one manual of keys corre-
sponding to the notes of the musical scale comprising:
means for producing tone signals of frequencies correspond-
ing to the notes of keys contemporaneously played on the
manual of keys; and
means for gating and filtering the tone signals to produce a
different pattern of voices to be assigned to played notes
depending upon the number and sequence of keys played
at any given time.
4. A polyphonic electronic music system for an electronic
musical instrument comprising:
a clock means for providing a plurality of clock outputs;
counter and decoder means for generating from the clock
outputs a first set of time division logic signals representa-
tive of twelve notes of an octave, a second set of time
division logic signals represenutive of two or more oc-
taves, and a third set of time division logic signals repre-
sentative of at least two manuals of keys of the electronic
musicaJJnstrument;
means for transmitting representative ones of the first set of
time division logic signals to corresponding ones of the
key switches of the at least two manuals;
multiplexer means for receiving the logic signals corre-
sponding to actuated key switches, the second set of logic
signals, and the third set of logic signals and providing a
serial train of time division multiplex signal identifying the
actuated key switches;
memory means for storing the serial train of logic signals
represenutive of the then actuated key switches during
the next cycle of the counter and decoder means and
providing a hold signal when the stored serial train does
not correspond to the next serial train;
priority selector means for providing time division logic
signals representative of the three lowest notes and the
highest note of the actuated key switches;
monostable and enable logic means for receiving the hold
signal from the memory means, and the logic signals from
the priority selector means and providing in response
thereto output logic signals representative of the number
of actuated keys and logic signals representative of the
lowest three notes and the highest note of the actuated
keys;
programmable counter means for receiving the logic signals
from the monostable and enable logic means representa-
tive of the actuated keys, the first set of logic signals
representative of the twelve notes of an octave, and logic
signals representative of the two or more octaves and in
response thereto, and producing output tone signals corre-
sponding to the notes of the actuated key switches and
voluges representative of the notes of the actuated key
switches;
voltage controlled gate and filter means for wave shaping
the output tone signals from the programmable counter
means to produce desired voicing characteristics;
an output system for converting the wave shaped tone sig-
nals into audible sound.
7. In an electronic organ including key switches operable by
keys on a keyboard corresponding to the notes of the musical
scale, tone generators for producing tone signals correspond-
ing to the notes of the key switches, means for applying the
tone signals of actuated key switches to a primary audio output
system; an improved accompaniment system comprising;
a secondary audio output system;
means for simultaneously producing a plurality of secondary
tone signals corresponding to certain preselected simulta-
neously actuated ones of said key switches;
means for wave shaping said secondary tone signals so that
individual ones of said secondary tone signals are wave
shaped to have individual distinct voices, said wave
shaped tone signals being applied to said secondary audio
output system to provide an orchestral accompaniment
for tone signals sounded by the primary audio output
system.
4,379,423
HYDRAULIC AMPLIHER
Giinther Leineweber, Gifhom, and Rolf Wamecke, Winkel, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Volkswagenwerk AG,
Wolfsburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 19, 1977, Ser. No. 760,657
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 21,
1976, 2602050
Int. a.3 F15B 9/10
U.S. a. 91—373 5 Qaims
_i.
^^^gS
IZZtJ^ li B 28 20/h
1. A hydraulic amplifier comprising:
(a) a housing having an axial bore as well as a pressure
conduit and a return conduit;
(b) an amplifier piston arranged axially slidably in said bore,
said piston having a piston face and a blind axial bore;
(c) a control slide axially slidably arranged in said blind bore
of said piston;
(d) said piston and slide together constituting a unit being
provided with passages for placing said piston face in
communication with said pressure and return conduits,
respectively, said passages including first and second
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
305
passage means for selectively cx)ntrolling the communica-
tion between said piston face and said pressure and return
conduits, respectively, i.e. the flow of hydraulic fluid
through said pressure and return conduits, respectively,
depending on the axial position of said slide in said bore of
said piston;
(e) said unit being free of pressure equalization by arranging
each of said flrst and second passage means asymmetri-
cally with respect to the peripheral surface of said slide;
(0 each of said first and second passage means being ar-
ranged such that whichever passage means is, at any given
time, closed, it is automatically tightly sealed as a result of
radial displacement of said slide towards such closed
passage means, said radial displacement being actuated by
a radial force resulting from the difference between the
lower pressure prevailing in the immediate region of said
closed passage means and the higher pressure acting on
the peripheral surface of said slide upstream of said imme-
diate region.
4,379,425
DOUBLE-ACTING PISTON FOR SWASH-PLATE TYPE
COMPRESSORS
Yutaka bhiznka, Konan, Japan, anignor to Diesel Kiki Co.,
Ltd., Saitama, Japan
FUed Not. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,540
Gaims priority, application Japan, Not. 30, 1979, 54-
165681[U1; May 24, 1980, 55-inii[U]
Int. aj FOIB 3/02; FtHB 1/16: B23P 15/10
U.S. a. 92—71 14 Clainu
10b
lOo 15b 10 ^^ _
16b
16
4,379,424
DEVICES FOR LIMITING THE STROKE OF A
HYDRAULIC RAM USED IN MINING APPARATUS
Harry Rosenberg, Liidinghansen; Karl-Heinz Plester, Lunen;
Friedrich Eggenstein, Bergluunen-Oberaden, and Giinter Ter-
horst, Diilmen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia, Lunen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jun. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 158,628
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 16,
1979, 2924380
Int. a.5 F15B 15/24
VJS. a. 92—13.41 13 Claims
1. In or for mineral mining apparatus; the combination of a
double-acting hydraulic ram with a relatively-displaceable
cylinder component and piston rod, a head piece component
fltted to the piston rod to confront the cylinder components,
and an adjustable device for selectively limiting the stroke of
the ram, said device comprising a stop member disposed be-
tween said components, the stop member partly surrounding
the piston rod so as not to extend around the full periphery
thereof, and connecting means at least including a plurality of
elongate pins aligned parallel to the piston rod for connecting
the stop member to one of said components so as to abut with
the other of said components thereby to limit the stroke of the
ram, wherein the pins are located in some of a group of recep-
tion apertures in the said one component, said apertures being
spaced around a common pitch circle with its centre on the
axis of the piston rod, the total number of apertures exceeding
the number of pins to permit the stop member to be angularly
oriented around the piston rod into a variety of dispositions.
1. A double-acting piston for use in a swash-plate type com-
pressor of the type including a frame having at least one cylin-
der bore formed therein, a drive shaft axially extending
through said frame, a swash plate secured on said drive shaft,
and shoes arranged in sliding contact with said swash plate at
opposite side surfaces thereof; said double-acting piston com-
prising:
a pair of piston heads provided at opposite ends of said
piston, said piston heads each having a first part which
includes a first hollow cylindrical member extending
axially inwardly of said piston and a second part which
includes a second hollow cylindrical member extending
radially outwardly from said flrst part, said piston heads
each having a peripheral lateral surface adapted for sliding
contact with an inner peripheral surface of said cylinder
bore, said piston heads each being formed of at least one
piece and said flrst and second hollow cylindrical mem-
bers being formed of respective separate pieces;
an intermediate coupling member interposed between said
piston heads to couple same to each other, said intermedi-
ate coupling member comprising a piece separate from
said at least one piece forming each of said piston heads;
means joining said piston heads and said intermediate cou-
pling member to each other;
said flrst parts of said piston heads each having opposed
inner ends thereof spaced from each other and cooperat-
ing with said intermediate coupling member to deflne
therebetween a central recess opening radially inwardly
of said compressor, said first hollow cylindrical member
forming said flrst part of each of said piston heads having
an inner end face formed with a ball pocket in the form of
a ball-receiving recess; and
a pair of generally ball-shaped members respectively en-
gaged in said ball-receiving recesses of said flrst hollow
cylindrical members, said generally ball-shaped members
being spaced from each other in the axial direction of said
piston, said space between said generally ball-shaped
members being in said central recess opening deflned
between said inner ends of said flrst parts;
said swash plate having a peripheral fringe portion thereof
engaged in said space between said generally ball-shaped
members via said shoes which respectively engage be-
tween one of said generally ball-shaped members and said
swash plate.
306
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,426
TRUSS-FABRICATING MACHINE
James L. Thompson, BaJIwin, and Owen T. Hornkohl, Webster
Gro?es, both of Mo„ assignors to Moehienpah Industries,
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,398
Int. a.' B30B 15/00
U.S. a. 100-100 47 Qaims
1. A machine for fabricating trusses of the type comprising a
pair of generally parallel wood chord members havmg oppos-
ing mside faces spaced apart a fixed predetermined distance,
and outside faces, a series of web members spanning the wood
chord members, and connector means having teeth adapted to
be pressed into the wood chord members for rigidly intercon-
necting the web and chord members, said machine comprising:
a table havmg an elongate top for supporting said pair of chord
members, said web members and said connector means in a
position in which the web members are generally horizontal,
in which the teeth of said connector means are generally
vertical, and in which the wood chord members extend
longitudinally of the table;
means on the top of the table for clamping the chord members
in fixed position with respect to the table comprising outside
jaw means engageable with the outside faces of the chord
members of said pair of chord members, said outside jaw
means comprising expansible tube means extending longitu-
dinally of the table for effecting clamping action of the
outside jaw means on said chord members to clamp them in
fixed position with respect to the table, said tube means
havmg inlet means for entry of a pressurized fluid into the
tube means thereby to expand the tube means in cross sec-
tion, said tube means during such expansion being adapted to
effect said clamping action; and
a press movable longitudinally with respect to the table top for
pressing the teeth of said connector means into the chord
members when the chord members are clamped in fixed
position with respect to the table.
said path between two limit positions thereby carrying the
marking carriage transversely with respect to said path so
4 379 427
APPARATUS FOR APPLYING MARKS TO A PRODUCT
E.G. A COIL OF ROLLED STEEL
Jan Middel, Barsingerhorn, and Cornells A. Gorter, Velsen-
Noord, both of Netherlands, assignors to Estel Hoogovens
B.V., Ijmuiden, Netherlands
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,336
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Sep. 3, 1980,
8004984
Int. CiJ B41F 17/20. 17/06
U.S. a. 101—35 5 Qaims
1. Apparatus for applying marks to the surface of a product,
comprising
(a) a base,
(b) means for moving said base reciprocatingly along a path
which path is adjacent the surface of the product to be
marked,
(c) a marking carriage,
(d) marking means mounted on said marking carriage for
applying marking material to the surface to be marked,
(e) at least two swivellable support arms movably mounting
said marking carriage on the base, the arms having first
and second ends and being pivotally secured to the base at
their first ends and pivotally secured to the marking car-
riage at their second ends at spaced apart points, thereby
forming an articulated quadrilateral which is so aligned
that the arms are swivellable transversely with respect to
Yh
^sY~X
that said marking means can apply marks at at least two
locations on said surface which are mutually laterally
spaced with respect to said path.
4,379,428
HAMMER LOCATING AND OPERATIONAL MEANS
David E. Schmulian, Woodland Hills, Calif., assignor to Bur-
roughs Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Jul. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 168,945
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 24, 1979,
7925811
int. Cr.3 B41J 9/12
U.S. CI. 101-93.09 11 Qaims
n
— ~
1. A chain impact printer comprising:
an array of hammers, each hammer being positionable at a
plurality of hammer operating positions along a line of
printing, said array of hammers being movable;
a stepping motor operable to position said array of hammers
along said line of printing, said stepping motor having a
plurality of step positions between each adjacent pairs of
hammer operating positions along said line of printing;
a position transducer cooperating with said stepping motor
to indicate when said array is a first predetermined num-
ber of steps away from one of said plurality of operating
positions; and,
a controller executing a movement sequence to move said
array from a first operating position to the next adjacent
operating position, said movement sequence including
commanding said stepping motor to perform said first
predetermined number of steps, said controller receiving
the output of said position transducer at the end of said
first predetermined number of steps to indicate a first state
if said hammer array is in the correct stepping position to
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
307
subsequently arrive correctly at the next operating posi-
tion, and a second state if the hammer array is not in its
correct stepping position to arrive correctly at the next
operating position, said controller responding to said
position transducer output being a first state by command-
ing said stepping motor to move a second predetermined
number of steps to bring sard array to said next adjacent
operating position, and responding to said second state to
command said motor to perform a position correction
sequence by commanding said stepping motor to perform
individual steps and monitoring said output of said trans-
ducer for each of said individual steps until a step is found
at which said transducer provides a first state indication
that said hammer array is in the correct stepping position.
pairs of rollers in said upper guide tracks to said lower
guide tracks when said shelf is moved rearwardly toward
said pushed in storage position.
4,379,430
CLAMP-BOLT SHELVING
Friedrich Ruschitzka, Im Bnihl (ohne Mummer), 6921 Zuzen-
hausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany r
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,327
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 7,
1979, 7916400[U]; Apr. 26, 1980, 3016218
Int. a.' A47B 9/00
U.S. a. 108—107 15 Qaims
4 379,429
HEIGHT AND INCLINATION ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT
SHELF
Bernd Gubbe, Nuremberg; Klaus-Dieter Krause, Oberasbach;
Rudolf Neidhardt, Nuremberg, and Otto Schonemann, Furth,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Triumph- Adler A.G.,
Nuremberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,459
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 15,
1980, 3014276
Int. a.5 A47B 21/02, 21/03
U.S. a. 108—5 2 Qaims
1. A work station comprising a platform and spaced legs
supporting said platform,
multitrack roller guide means mounted on said legs below
said platform, and
a shelf having a first pair of rollers and a second pair of
rollers spaced forwardly of said first pair of rollers for
cooperation with said roller guide means to guide move-
ment of said shelf to selected pulled out heights and incli-
nations,
said roller guide means having lower guide tracks and verti-
cally spaced upper guide tracks for guiding said pairs of
rollers during forward movement of said shelf to selected
pulled out positions and rearward movement to a pushed
in storage position,
said lower guide tracks defining said pushed in shelf storage
position whereat said shelf is spaced below said platform
by a distance sufficient to accommodate the height of a
machine supp>orted on said shelf,
said upper guide tracks each having a first pair of openings
and a second pair of openings spaced forwardly of said
first pair of openings to allow said first and second pairs of
rollers to be moved into said upper guide tracks,
said first and second pairs of rollers being spaced from one
another a distance less than the distance between said first
and second pairs of openings whereby only one pair of
rollers at a time can be switched from said lower to said
upper guide tracks upon manipulation of said pulled out
shelf about the other pair of rollers, thereby to establish a
selected height and inclination thereof relative to said
platform, and
inclines terminating said upper guide tracks,
said inclines extending upwardly and forwardly from the
rear edges of said pairs of openings to automatically direct
1. Erectable shelving comprising shelving posts, crosspieces.
shelving bases, and clamp bolts, wherein said shelving posts
each have channel-section-shaped legs and bores are drilled in
the legs of the channel-section-shaped shelving posts, between
the legs of at least two shelving posts there is placed a cross-
piece, said crosspiece being of channel-section-shaped cross-
section and having obliquely downwardly and outwardly
extending slotted crosspiece holes lying opposite the bores m
said legs, a clamp bolt being placed in the bores and m the
slotted cross-piece holes, said bores and said slotted crosspiece
holes lying opposite one another, and each of the channel-sec-
tion-shaped shelving posts has at the outer ends of its legs a
tubular section provided on the outside with bores and on the
inside with slotted holes extending parallel to the flange in the
legs.
4,379.431
SHELVING ASSEMBLY
Joseph J. Qement, Bradenton, Fla.. assignor to The Mead Cor-
poration, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Aug. 24, 1977, Ser. No. 827,227
Int. CI.' A47B 57/06
U.S. a. 108—111 2 Claims
1. In combination, a plurality of support posts, a plurality of
shelves disposed one above the other and supported by said
308
^
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
support posts, support structure connected with said support
posts for supporting a tiltable shelf disposed below said plural-
ity of shelves and having front, back and side edges, said sup-
port structure comprising a front base panel having a horizon-
tal support surface arranged to engage and support the front
portion of the shelf, a pair of side base panels spaced apart
sufficiently to receive the shelf therebetween and with the side
edges of the shelf in close juxtaposition thereto, an elongated
horizontally disposed primary shelf support ledge disposed at
substantially the same level as said support surface of said front
base panel and arranged to engage the rear edge of the shelf so
as to support the shelf in a substantially horizontal attitude, and
an elongated horizontally disposed tilting ledge disposed at a
level substantially below said primary shelf support ledge and
forwardly thereof and arranged to engage the rear edge of the
shelf so as to support the shelf in a rearwardly tilted attitude,
the lowermost one of said plurality of shelves being disjoint-
edly mounted on said support posts and being movable to a
tilted position at the rear of said tiltable shelf to form a tilted
back support therefor.
the lower section, a ring structure disposed between the lower
end of the upper stack section and the upper end of the lower
suck section and having a central opening, said ring structure
including a tapered flange bordering said central opening, said
flange diverging in an upward direction, an upwardly diverg-
ing sleeve freely supported on the ring structure and disposed
concentrically of said tapered flange, said sleeve having a
plurality of perforations, and air inlet means associated with
4,379,432
ARTICLE DISPLAY STAND
Robert D. Grossman, 22 Rivo Alto Dr., Miami Beach, Fla. 33139
Filed Aug. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 175,783
Int. a.3 A47B 3/06
U.S. a. 108-153 8 Qaims
1. An article display stand including a pair of substantially
identical vertical support members and a pair of substantially
identical horizontal support members, each of said horizontal
support members including retaining means on one side thereof
to hold said vertical support members in position between said
horizontal support members, each of said vertical support
members is an integral molded element having a pair of longi-
tudinal side edges, and said retaining means comprises four
separate elements adapted to hold a portion of said side edges
and each of said retaining means elements comprises a pair of
leg members connected by a bight portion and said portion of
said side edges is frictionally held between said leg members.
4,379,433
INaNERATOR
Gordon H. Hoskinson, 186 Mayfair Rd., Floral Park, N.Y.
11001
DiTision of Ser. No. 81,686, Oct. 4, 1979, Pat. No. 4,291,633.
This application Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,404
Int a.i F23B 5/00
U.S. a. 110-214 5 Qaims
1. As incinerator, comprising a housing defining a combus-
tion chamber, a stack connected to the combustion chamber
for discharging waste gases of combustion, said stack including
a lower stack section and an upper stack section spaced above
said ring structure for providing communication between the
atmosphere and the upper stack section, waste gases of com-
bustion passing upwardly from said lower stack section
through said sleeve causing an aspirating effect to draw air
from the atmosphere through said air inlet means and into said
upper stack section and into said perforations to effect a final
combustion zone for the waste gases of combustion, expansion
of said sleeve due to heating causing the sleeve to move up-
wardly relative to said flange.
4 379 434
LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR AND ALARM SYSTEM
Petur Thordarson, 13700-^2nd Pi. N.E., Seattle, Wash. 98125
Filed Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 158,288
Int. a.3 GOIF 23/08
U.S. a. 116-228 23 Claims
1. Apparatus for determining a liquid level condition of a
liquid within a holding tank, comprising:
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
309
a float adapted to be positioned on a body of liquid within a
liquid holding tank, including a first permanent magnet;
means defining a chamber partitioned in a fluid tight manner
from the body of liquid;
a second permanent magnet located within said chamber in
line with said first permanent magnet;
means forming a gas inlet port for said chamber and means
forming a gas outlet port for said chamber; and
signal means comprising a normally closed valve positioned
within one of said ports, said valve including a normally
extended valve stem which is in line with said second
permanent magnet and is depressible to operate the signal
means and which projects into said chamber and when
depressed opens said valve;
wherein the float and the two magnets are so positioned that
as the liquid level in the liquid holding tank moves
towards said chamber the first permanent magnet is
moved by the float towards the second permanent mag-
net, and wherein the two permanent magnets have like
poles facing towards each other, so that when the first
permanent magnet is moved a predetermined amount
towards the second permanent magnet, the two magnets
will tend to repel each other and in response the second
magnet will be urged into contact with the valve stem,
moving such valve stem into a signal operating position.
4^79,436
WATER-TURBULENCE LIGHT-SHIELDING METHOD
AND APPARATUS FOR CONRNED- VOLUME HSH
GROWTH AND THE LIKE
Albert H. Knowles, Concord, N.H., assignor to Robert H. Rines
and Carol M. Rines, both of Concord, N.H., part interest to
each
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,474
Int. a.3 AOIK 67/00
U.S. a. 119—3 9 Qainu
4,379,435
DRYING OVEN FOR INDEnNITE LENGTH MATERIAL
Jong-Hein Wailing, Beaconsfield; Gerald R. Arbuthnot,
Chateauguay, and Michel Gerrais, Verdun, all of Canada,
assignors to Northern Telecom Limited, Montreal, Canada
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,652
Int. a.3B05Ci//7Z 77/00
U.S. a. 118—643 4 Qaims
1. A method of providing at least a partially light-shielded
surface area in a confined fish-holding water-circulating vol-
ume, that comprises, producing turbulence over a selected area
of predetermined defined shape occupying a substantial por-
tion of said surface that reduces the amount of light entering
the volume under said selected area and thereby provides a
uniform light-subdued region thereunder, by agitating the
surface of said volume over said selected area; illuminating
relatively calm regions external to said selected area; and
applying feed to said calm regions while continuing agitation
over said selected area.
4,379,437
PROCESS AND SYSTEM FOR ACCELERATED GROWTH
OF SALMONIDS AND THE LIKE IN DEEP-WATER
CAGES AND SIMILAR WATER VOLUMES
Albert H. Knowles, Concord, N.H., assignor to Robert H. Rines
and Carol M. Rines, both of Concord, N.H., part interest to
each
FUed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,769
Int. a.3 AOIK 67/00
U.S. a. 119—3 10 Claims
1. A drying oven for an indefinite length of material com-
prising a structure defining a drying chamber having an inlet
and an outlet for the indefinite length passing through the
oven, heating means within the chamber to directly dry the
material, the chamber surrounded by an annular heat ex-
changer comprising a plurality of heat exchange members
which between them define and separate flow passages extend-
ing axially of the chamber and around the chamber, at least a
first of the passages being a flow passage for incoming gas,
having an inlet for said gas and having an outlet leading into
the chamber at a first location, and a second of the passages
being a flow passage for outgoing gas from the chamber, hav-
ing a gas inlet leading from the chamber at a second location
spaced from the first location to cause gas flow through said
chamber to pass across said heating means, said second passage
also having a gas outlet to effect flow of gas heated in the
chamber outwardly from said chamber, the heat exchange
members provided to cause heat transfer from outgoing gas in
said second passage to incoming gas in the first passage.
8. A system for accelerated fish growth having, in combina-
tion with a fish-holding volume through which water circu-
lates and into which feed is applied at one or more predeter-
mined locations, means for bounding the bottom straU of said
volume at a water depth at which daylight from above the said
volume is attenuated to the degree that said bottom strato are
substantially dark; means for producing and directing artificial
illumination after daylight hours, and if desired during over-
cast daylight conditions as well, across upper surface trans-
verse strata of said volume including said predetermined feed
310
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
application locations to provide a denned diffuse laterally
illuminated near-surface feed area as viewed upwardly from
said dark bottom strata, and without introducing artificial light
into the dark bottom strata; and means for producing feed
application at said predetermined locations beyond daylight
hours and durmg the artificial illumination.
.-^- n
at-
"il -■•■
■'fp'-v"'^
11. An improved portable horse spa. said spa comprising, in
combination
(a) a hollow housmg adapted to be placed on the ground and
defining
1. a horse therapy compartment having a closed bottom,
closed sides and closed ends, at least one of said ends
having an openable door, said therapy compartment and
door being watertight,
ii. a plurality of integral storage chambers adjacent to said
therapy compartment bearmg water for said therapy com-
partment and stabilizing said housing against tilting; and
iii at least one of said chambers holding hot water and
another of said chambers holding cold water therein;
(b) water temperature regulating means in said housing;
(c) water circulation means in said housing connected to said
therapy compartment, temperature regulating means and
said water chambers for movement of water therebetween;
(d) remote control means disposed on the outside of said hous-
ing and connected to said circulations means and said tem-
perature regulating means for control thereof; and
(e) water purification means in said housing connected to said
water circulation means and/or said therapy compartment,
wherein said therapy compartment includes ports and
wherein said spa includes moveable high intensity lamps
which can beam selected radiation into said therapy com-
partment through said ports.
4,379,439
ANIMAL FEEDER
Robert P. Baur, 8425 Filion Rd., Pigeon, Mich. 48755
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,253
Int. a.5 AOIK 5/02
U.S. a. 119-52 B 7 aaims
1. An aminal feeder for an animal cage assembly formed of
a plurality of animal cages arranged side-by-side in a horizontal
alignment, with a feed trough extending along the front of the
animal cages, the animal feeder comprising:
carriage means movably disposed for horizontal movement
along the front of the cage assembly, the carriage means
including a hopper for storing feed;
feed means carried by the carriage means for dispensing feed
from the hopp)er into the feed trough;
first drive means for activating the feed means, the first drive
means including an electric motor and means driven by
the electric motor and operatively coupled to the feed
means for activating the feed means;
control means, carried by the carriage means, for deactivat-
ing the feed means when predetermined levels of feed are
detected in the feed trough; and
detector means for detecting the level of feed remaining in
4,379,438
HORSE SPA
Richard Peardon, 22100 Burbank Blvd. F-152, Woodland Hills,
Calif. 91367
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser, No. 199,030
Int. a.' A61D 11/00: AOIK 29/00
U.S. a. 119-29 13 aaims
the feed trough as the carriage means traverses along the
cage assembly, the detector means being carried by and
causing pivotal movement of the control means when a
predetermined level of feed is detected in the feed trough;
the control means decoupling the feed activating means
from the feed means to stop dispensing of feed when the
predetermined level of feed trough is detected.
4,379,440
LIVESTOCK SPRAY APPARATUS
Dale E. Thedford, Enid, and Gil C. Wilson, Kremlin, both of
Okla., assignors to AG Industries International, Ltd., Enid,
Okla.
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,162
Int. CI.' AOIK 13/00. 29/00
U.S. CI. 119-159 13 Claims
H ^^^>^
1. Apparatus for livestock spraying which functions with a
source of spray solution, comprising:
chute housing means having opposite sides and roof portions
and defining a longitudinal chute way from a livestock
entry end to a livestock exit end;
chassis frame means affixed to and supporting opposite sides
of said chute housing means;
solution spray means disposed longitudinally centrally
within said chute housing means and directed across said
chute way;
plural sector filter tank means having a perforate grating
thereover and being formed as first sector means disposed
at the livestock entry end for entrapment of solid waste, a
second sector means disposed generally longitudinally
centrally in baffied communication with said first sector
means for primary collection of recycled solution, and
third sector means disposed adjacent the livestock exit end
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
311
in screen filter communication with said second sector
means;
at least one holding tank formed as a fluid-tight longitudmal
receptacle integral with said chassis frame means and
disposed laterally adjacent to said filter tank means in
screen filter communication with said third sect(.r means;
means conducting solution from si'id at least ore holding
tank to said source; and
means conducting soh.'tion from said source to said solution
spray means.
stroke, the barrel bore being of uniform diameter and forming
at one end a housing for a spring closed fuel pressure opened
fuel delivery valve contained therein and blocking the one end
thereof connected to a fuel injection line, the plunger and
delivery valve being axially spaced along the barrel bore to
define a fuel chamber therebetween, the barrel having a fuel
inlet-spill port opening through the wall of the barrel into the
fuel chamber and constituting a valve seat, a source of supply
fuel under a low pressure connected to the inlet-spill port, an
4,379.441
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE AIR-FIH:! R4TIO LN
A COMBUSTION ENGINE
Makoto Anzai, Yokosuka, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company. Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Division of Scr. No. 625,666, Oct. 24, 1975, i'bandoned. I his
application Dec. 21, 1976, Ser. No. 752,961
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 25, 1974, 49-123110:
May 13, 1975, 50-55500
Int. CI." F02B 75/ IQ
U.S. CI. 123—440 •' Claims
57 , ^207^
14
rhiF.-t-HLN
1 ( : -t"!
:C6!
>c
50
^
204 I PlZ-f
ADDEP
u
104
lOO
I-20C
,.^_--
1. In a closed loop mixture con'rol system for an inteinal
combustion engine including exhaust means, meatis lor gener
ating a first signal representative of th: deviation of the air-fuel
ratio within said txhaust means fiom a desired aii fuel raficr an
integration circuit for providing integration of said fi'-st sit,nal
and mixture supplying means responsive to the output of said
integration circuit to supply air and fuel ii. a variable ratio to
said engine, wherein said integration circuit comprises:
an RC circuit, including a capacitor, for generating a second
signal representative of tht nonlinear integration of said first
signal:
reference setting means for setting a predetermined voltage
level, said predetermined voltage level being determined
such that the nonlinear integration of said first signal by
means oi said RC circuit equals to the linear integration of
said first signal by means of a linear integrator; and
polarity sensitive means including clamping means for passing
signals of a given polarity applied thereto when suid prede-
termined voltage level is reached, the voltage developed
across said capacitor of said RC circuit being clamped at said
predetermined voltage level.
■ta
. I. fclMlll tot
electromagnetically controlled spill port control valve mov-
ably mounted with respect to the spill port valve seat and
selectively operable to control the buildup and duration of
pressure in the fuel chamber to a level effecting opening of the
delivery valve and injection of fuel into the injection line upon
movement of the plunger through its pumping stroke, the spill
port valve including a ball universally seatable on the valve
seat to be self-aligning w ith lespeci to the valve seat, a solenoid
engageable with the spill port valve, and spring means biasing
the ball to an unseated position.
4,379,443
INTAKE MANIFOLD MOUNTED AIR AND FUEL
MIXTURE HEATER
CTiarles C. Granger, 1203 Chestnut St., Henderson, N.C. 27536
Filed Sep. 2, 1980. Ser. No. 183,039
Int. CV F02M 31/00
U.S. a. 123—549 n Qaims
4,379,442
ELECTROMAGNETICALLY CONTROLLED FUEL
INJECTION PUMP
Aladar O. Simko, Dearborn Heights, Mich., assignor to Ford
Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 193,985, Oct. 6, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,253
Int. C\? F02M 59/00
U.S. a. 123-458 5 Qaims
1. A fuel injection pump of the spill port type having a
housing having a central cavity therein receiving a rotatable
engine driven camshaft, a stationary pump plunger barrel
projecting radially from the camshaft through the housing and
having a bore containing a plunger movable therein, cam
means on the camshaft engageable with the plunger to move
the plunger axially along its bore through a fuel pumping
2^
1. In combination with a combustion engine of the type
including air and fuel mixture induction passage means, an air
and fuel mixture heater for said combustion engine, said heater
including structure defining a transversely enlarged thin hol-
low chamber in said passage means including a first pair of
closely spaced, parallel and registered opposite side walls
having at least generally registered inlet and outlet air and fuel
mixture openings formed therethrough opening upstream and
downstream into said passage means, said chamber also includ-
ing peripheral wall portions extending between corresponding
peripheral edge portions of said side walls, a baffle plate
312
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
mounted in said chamber spaced intermediate and generally
paralleling said side walls and registered with and extending
outwardly beyond all marginal portions of said openings, said
baffle plate including at least one pair of opposite marginal
portions thereof spaced inwardly of the opposing peripheral
wall portions of said chamber each marginal portion defining
with the opposing peripheral wall a passage therebetween, said
baffle plate further including a plurality of additional openings
formed. Therethrough spaced inwardly from said marginal
portions, and a generally flat heating coil assembly disposed in
said chamber between one side of said baffle plate and the
opposing side wall of said chamber in registry with the opening
in said opposing housing side wall, said heating coil assembly
includmg a main coil portion consisting of a plurality of contin-
uous spiral convolutions, said main coil portion being of a plan
area at least substantially equal to the cross sectional areas of
the opening with which said main coil portion is registered.
circuit means and causing the ignition system to transition
to a run mode of operation only during a predetermined
period of the firing cycle period wherein said logic gate
means is enabled by the ignition system.
7. In an adaptive dwell ignition system including an adaptive
dwell capacitor which sets the excess dwell time in a firing
cycle of the ignition system, a start-to-run transitioning circuit
wherein the improvement comprises the start-to-run transition-
ing circuit being coupled to the adaptive dwell capacitor
which is responsive to the system being in a start mode only for
causing the charge and discharge of the adaptive dwell capaci-
tor to provide start retard, the start-to-run transitioning circuit
being responsive to the termination of the start mode for pro-
viding transitioning of the ignition system to a run mode only
during a predetermined portion of the firing cycle.
4 379 444 ~ ■
START-TO-RUN aRCUIT FOR AN ELECTRONIC
IGNITION SYSTEM
Howard Weber, Scottsdale, Ariz., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, III. 4,379,445
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,423 RUBBER BAND RIFLE
Int. a.3 F02P 9/00 Vincent LoBiondo, 8873 19th Ave., Brooklyn, N.Y. 11214
U.S. a. 123— 609 7aainis FUed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,425
Int. a.3 F41B 7/00
U.S. a. 124-19 3 Claims
18, IJSJl'*
STAKT
DUELL
•• •^p?*
*D*PT DUELU-, 2S](
"^ 106 0~° ""»•
L'ilii
66 ,^__i 1_
rTu ,,□'■ ^'" STMT ./"^ 'O'"^ OWELi..,
' hr90 5T»»T >-| . ^ ^
DUCll Pv 1-^^^ - -
sTMt I no I 1 je
1. A start-to-run circuit suitable to be utilized in an adaptive
dwell ignition system for an engine having an adative dwell
capacitor which provides a dwell control signal that varies the
excess dwell time in response to variations in engine rpm, an
amplifier which is rendered conductive in response to the
dwell control signal during each firing cycle period to provide
dwell current to charge an ignition coil and a feedback circuit
for limiting the dwell current to a predetermined magnitude
prior to discharge of the coil, comprising:
start dwell circuit means coupled with the adaptive dwell
capacitor which is responsive to the ignition system being
in a start mode of operation for charging and discharging
the adaptive dwell capacitor for producing a first logic
signal at an output thereof during a predetermined interval
of each firing cycle period;
logic gate means coupled with both the ignition system and
said output of said start dwell circuit means which is
responsive to said first logic signal for providing first and
second output signals, said first output signal rendering
the amplifier conductive and said second output signal
being produced while the dwell current is not being lim-
ited by the feedback circuit; and
logic circuit means coupled with the ignition system, said
start dwell circuit means and said logic gate means which
is responsive to a start command signal supplied thereto at
an input for causing said ignition system to be in a start
mode of operation, said logic circuit means being respon-
sive to the termination of said start command signal in
combination with receiving said second output signal
from said logic gate means for inhibiting said start dwell
1. A rubber band rifle for shooting one or a plurality of
rubber band members comprising a body having a forward
barrel portion and a rear shoulder portion, a forward end wall
of said barrel portion having a plurality of horizontal grooves
disposed therein, one end of each of said rubber band members
being disposed in one of said horizontal grooves in said for-
ward end wall, a slide mechanism movably disposed on said
forward barrel portion, said slide mechanism comprising a top
and a pair of downwardly extending walls, an upper surface of
said top of the slide mechanism having a plurality of notches
disposed therein, each said rubber band members being
stretched rearwardly from said forward extending wall of said
barrel portion, wherein the other ends of said rubber band
members being disposed in one of said notches, said forward
barrel portion having a pair of sidewalls, each said sidewall
having a longitudinally aligned groove therein and a boss
disposed on the interior surface of each downwardly extending
wall of said slide mechanism, each said boss being disposed in
one of said longitudinally aligned grooves in said sidewalls of
said barrel portion, means for locking said slide mechanism in
a fixed position on said forward barrel portion, said locking
mechanism comprises said barrel portion having a plurality of
transverse holes therethrough, said holes being aligned in a
longitudinal aligned row along said barrel portion, a plurality
of openings through each downwardly extending wall of said
slide mechanism, each set of said openings being aligned in a
longitudinal row along each said downwardly extending wall
of said slide mechanism, one of said holes being alignable with
said openings, and a pin member, said pin member being insert-
able into said hole being aligned with said openings.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
313
4,379,446
FAN ACCESSORY FOR HEATER
Donald G. Porter, 8620 Wilkinson Blvd., Charlotte, N.C. 28208
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 365,594, Apr. 5, 1982. This
application Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,398
Int. a.' F24H 3/02
U.S. a. 126-110 B 8 Claims
coil being mounted in a rectangular frame extending diag-
onally from one comer of said box to a diagonally oppo-
site comer in a plane angled to the path between said
openings.
3. A fan accessory for recovering heated air generated by a
heater and comprising:
housing means for directing air flow and having an upper
wall, a rear wall defining an ambient air inlet, a lower wall
defining a heated air inlet, and a front portion defining an
air outlet for ambient air and heated air.
divider wall means extending within said housing means and
cooperating therewith so as to define juxtaposed ambient
and heated air passageways isolated from each other for
separate flow of heated air and ambient air through said
housing means and out of said air outlet,
fan means cooperating with said ambient air passageway for
inducing ambient air to enter said ambient air inlet and
flow through said ambient air passageway and out of said
air outlet,
said divider wall means being so arranged relative to said
housing means that the flow of ambient air out of the
ambient air passageway causes an aspirating effect on the
flow of heated air out of said air outlet by inducing the
heated air to more rapidly move through said heated air
passageway and to project further away from said housing
means to thereby permit blending of the ambient and
heated air to take place over a greater distance from said
housing means and to provide a more efficient operation
of a heater, and
heater engaging means on said housing means for positioning
said housing means to receive through said heated air
inlet, heated air generated by a heater.
4,379,448
TRIGGER TO INITIATE CRYSTALLIZATION
Imants P. Kapralis, 3020 S. Punta Del Este Dr., Hacienda
Heights, Calif. 91745, and Harry Krukle, 7023 Bern Are.,
Van Nuys, Calif. 91405
Continuation of Ser. No. 113,356, Jan. 18, 1980, abandoned. This
application Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,564
Int. a.' F24J 7/00
U.S. a. 126—263 3 Claims
/
ye
i!a
a\/
-J5
-//
jr
J3a
4,379,447
HEAT SAVER FOR HOUSEHOLD HEATERS
Uwrence A. Schott, 15940 Warwick Rd., Detroit, Mich. 48223,
and Roger A. Schott, 15060 Seminole, Redford, Mich. 48239
Filed Feh. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,063
Int. Q\} F24H i/12: F24B 7/QO
U.S. a. 126—117 2 Qaims
1. A heat saving system for recovering heat from a fumace
chimney flue pipe which comprises:
(a) a chamber in said flue pipe through which the flue gases
pass,
(b) a first heat exchange coil in said chamber interposed in
the path of flue gas,
(c) a cold fluid inlet leading to said fumace,
(d) a fluid in said coil, and
(e) means to connect said coil to said cold fluid inlet to
transfer heat from said chimney flue pipe to the inlet fluid
to be heated in said fumace, said chamber comprising a
rectangular box of fireproof material having an opening at
opposite ends to connect to a chimney flue pipe, and said
1. For use in initiating crystallization of a supercooled salt
solution, the combination that includes a flexible container
containing said solution, and a trigger located in the container
in contact with the solution, said trigger comprising
(a) a thin strip having a perimeter,
(b) said strip having a multiplicity of generally parallel slits
formed therein, each slit characterized as having opposed
elongated edges which face one another in near touching
relation,
(c) the strip further characterized as having two configura-
tions between which it is bendable with snap-displacement
causing the slit edges to initiate progressive exothermic
crystallization of said salt in the solution,
(d) the strip being in the general form of a dished disc having
a central portion and an outer portion surrounding said
central portion, the outer portion having a curved periph-
ery,
(e) said slits confined to said outer portion and said central
portion being free of said slits, said slits everywhere
spaced inwardly from the disc periphery and located in an
annular zone extending about said central portion, the slits
defining a sector shaped portion of the annular zone lo-
cated at a side of said central portion, whereby said pe-
riphery is free of slit edges which could otherwise pene-
trate the container, the container consisting of plastic
material,
(0 the strip consisting of metal and having molecular struc-
ture which is impact oriented.
314
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
*'379,449 4,379,450
SOLAR HOT AIR SYSTEM TRACTION BENCHES
John y^. Wiggins, and Damon E. Moore, both of P.O. Box 138, Per-Olof Sjolinder, Tanneforsgatan 3, S-582 24 Linkooine
Dundee, Mich. 48131 Sweden
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,572 Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,499
Int. a J F24J 3/02 !„,. q.' A61F 5/00
U.S. a. 126-449 1 Oaim U.S. CI. 128—74 5 Qaims
1. A solar hot air heating system adapted to be installed in an
opening within a building disposed between the interior and
the exterior of the building comprising:
a perimetric frame secured in said opening and having upper
and lower sides;
a light transparent plate secured in said frame and having
first and second sides, the first outer side facing the exte-
rior and the second inner side facing the interior;
a single light absorptive corrugated metal sheet plate se-
cured within said frame with the corrugations thereof
vertically oriented, said plate having first and second
sides, the first side facing the second side of the light
transparent plate and being displaced from the first side of
the light absorptive plate, the opening of the building, the
second side of the optically transparent plate and the first
side of the light absorptive plate defining a first air flow
passage containing a volume of air which is heated by
light energy passing through the transparent plate and
absorbed by the light absorptive plate;
a light absorptive mesh secured to the second side of the
transparent plate, the metal mesh functioning as a light
absorptive means for part of the light energy passing
through the optically transparent plate, as a means for
preventing reflection of light energy back through the
optically transparent plate and as a means for insulating
the optically transparent plate from the volume of air to
lessen heat flow from the first volume of air out through
the transparent member;
a light reflective plate secured within said frame having first
and second sides, the first side of the light reflective plate
being displaced from and facing the second side of the
light absorptive plate, the opening of the building, the
second side of the light absorptive plate and the first side
of the light reflective plate forming a second air flow
passage containing a volume of air;
an insulating plate secured to the second side of the light
reflective plate;
said light reflective plate having an upper inlet opening and
an upper separate outlet opening, and said corrugated
plate having air circulating apertures at both its upper and
lower marginal edges, said apertures being intermediate
the plate corrugations and affording communication be-
tween said first and second air flow passages, and blower
means for circulating air through said first and second air
passages, cool air entering said inlet opening, flowing
downwardly through said second passage through the
lower apertures in said corrugated plate, then upwardly
through said first passage and through the upper apertures
of said corrugated plate to exit through the outlet opening
of said light reflective plate, the air being heated by the
single corrugated plate during its flow in opposite direc-
tions through the first and second passages.
1. A traction bench for the treatment of the vertebral column
and extrrmities of a human body comprising a table on which
a patient tu be treated may lie, said table comprising a pair of
elongated separate table sections disposed in spaced longitudi-
nally aligned relation to one another, support means attached
to at least one of said table sections for mounting said one table
section in a manner permitting said one table section to be
displaced relative to tiie other of said table sections in any
selected one or more of four different movements, said support
means including first means supporting said one table section
for traiislational movement longitudinally relative to said other
table section along a first Iranslational axis parallel to the longi-
tudinal axis of said elongated one table section, second means
supporting said one table section for translational movement
transversely relative to said other table section along a second
translational axis that is oriented at right angles to said first
translational axis, third means supporting said one table section
for tilting movement in a first angular direction relative to said
other table section to tilt the plane of said one table section
relative 'o the plane of said other table sections about a first
pivotal axis which extends transversely fo the direction of
elongation of said one table section, and fourth means support-
ing said one table section for furthei tilting movement in a
second angular direction t-ansverse to said first angular direc-
tion to till the plane of said one table section transversely
relative to the plane of said other table section about a second
pivotal axis which extends parallel to the direction of elonga-
tion of said one table section, and fixation means on each of said
table sections for fixedly securing one portion of the patient's
body to one of said table sections and for fixedly securing
another portion of the patient's body to the other of said table
sections, said fixation means comprising a mounting structure
which is adapted to be selectively moved to any one of a
plurality of positions on the surface of its associated table
section, means for securely attaching said mounting structure
to the surface of said table section at the selected position on
said surface, and a harness attached to said mounting structure
for engagement with a portion of the patient's body adjacent
said selected position on the surface of said table section, said
mounting structure comprising a circular disc having an elon-
gated bar extending across the diameter thereof, said disc being
adapted to be attached to the selected position on the surface of
said table section with said bar oriented in any selected one of
a plurality of possible directions relative to the side edges of
said table section, said harness being attached to said bar.
4,379,451
INTRAMEDULLARY HIP PIN AND CORTICAL PLATE
Philip E. Getscher, 4230 Burnham Suite 140, Las Vegas, Nev.
89109
Filed No>. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 204,063
Int. a.^ A61F 5/04
VJS. a. 128—92 CA 2 Qaims
1. An intramedullary pin, comprising:
an elongate shaft having a longitudinally extending groove
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
315
and a threaded portion formed intermediate its ends, the
shaft having an enlarged, flattened end; •.
an expansible cage adapted to be secured to the shaft, the
cage including a first section in the form of a ring encir-
cling the shaft, the ring including a boss extending into the
groove, the first section being a generally concave or
conical basket including a pair of fingers having reversely
bent end portions as well as a pair of legs having openings
formed near their ends, the fingers and legs alternating
circumferentially of the ring and being spaced 90 degrees
from each other, the cage also including a second section,
the second section having a generally concave or conical
basket the generally concave or conical baskets of the first
and second sections having their concave sides facing one
another, wherein the fingers extend through openings in
the legs to form an interlocking cage;
.r
60
60
1
96
60
0
60
• «
60
«
0.
the bosses of the first and second sections being axially
aligned for engagement with the longitudinal groove in
the shaft;
a nut engagable with the threads on the shaft and with one of
the sections such that, upon tightening the nut, the sec-
tions are clamped between the nut and the enlarged end
and are compressed axially, thereby expanding the fingers
radially outwardly of the shaft;
an elongate section securable to the lateral cortex of the shaft
of a femur; and
a tubular portion positioned at an obtuse angle with respect
to the longitudinal axis of the elongate section, the tubular
portion adapted to receive the shaft in sliding, non-rotat-
ing relationship.
module is out of operative association with the pump
rotor, in a predetermined arcuate configuration outwardly
bowed from one of said sidewalls and resiliently biased
toward an upright freestanding position generally perpen-
dicular to said one sidewall with said outwardly bowed
portion of one of said conduit means concentrically posi-
tioned closely adjacent to said outwardly bowed portion
of the other of said conduit means to accommodate simul-
taneous operative contact with the pump rotor when said
module is moved into operative association therewith.
4,379,453
INFUSION SYSTEM WITH SELF-GENERATING
' PRESSURE ASSEMBLY
Howard C. Baron, 935 Park Ave., New York, N.Y. 10021
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 543, Dec. 28, 1978, abandoned.
This application Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 186,955
Int. a.^ A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—145 19 Qaims
4,379,452
PREPACKAGED, SELF-CONTAINED FLUID CIRCUIT
MODULE
James H. DeVries, McHenry, III., assignor to Baxter Travenoi
Laboratories, Inc., Deerfield, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 843,223, Oct. 18, 1977, abandoned.
This application Dec. 6, 1979, Ser. No. 100,975
Int. aj A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—6 32 Qaims
1. A prepackaged, self-contained fluid circuit module selec-
tively movable by an operator into and out of operative associ-
ation with a pump rotor, said module comprising
flexible first conduit means and flexible first auxiliary con-
duit means each defining a fluid pathway adapted for
communication with a source of fluid, and
housing means having sidewalls peripherally defining a
hollow interior and including means on said sidewalls for
supporting a portion of each of said conduit means within
the confines of said hollow interior and for supporting
another portion of each of said conduit means, when said
1. For use with a flexible-walled infusion bag storing a sup-
ply of fluid to be fed intravenously and having an outlet, an
infusion system for dispensing fluid under pressure from said
infusion bag comprising:
an outer container having a substantially inextensible wall
portion defining an interior cavity sized for removably
receiving said infusion bag therein;
an expandable envelope disposed within said cavity adjacent
said infusion bag, said expandible envelope being com-
pletely sealed and having a normal collapsed condition in
which it occupies a minor portion of said cavity; and
manually operable inflation means within said expandible
envelope including at least two separate frangible cap-
sules, each of said capsules being independently ruptur-
316
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
able only by manipulation through the wall of said ex-
pandible envelope to generate separate supplies of gas
within said expandible envelope, when ruptured, to ex-
pand said envelop>e and squeeze said infusion bag against
said inextensible wall portion, thereby dispensing said
fluid from said infusion bag through said outlet.
4,379,454
DOSAGE FOR COADMINISTERING DRUG AND
PERCUTANEOUS ABSORPTION ENHANCER
Patricia S. Campbell, and Santosh K. Chandrasekaran, both of
Palo Alto, Calif., assignors to ALZA Corporation, Palo Alto,
Calif.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,068
Int. a.3 A61M 7/00
U.S. a. 604—897 16 Oaims
^'.34
36 37^
1. A unit dosage form for coadministering a drug and a
percutaneous absorption enhancer to a predetermined area of
unbroken skin of a patient for a predetermined time period, the
dosage form comprising a body
(a) having a basal surface
(i) of area at least about equal to the area of skin,
(ii) that is adapted to contact the area of skin over the time
period, and
(iii) via which the drug and enhancer are presented to the
area of skin for absorption thereby;
(b) containing a supply of the drug that communicates with
the basal surface to provide drug at the basal surface over
the time period such that over a substantial portion of the
time period the amount of drug provided is in excess of
that which the area of skin is able to absorb;
(c) containing a supply of the percutaneous absorption en-
hancer that communicates with the basal surface over said
time period; and
(d) including means for maintaining the rate at which the
enhancer is provided at the basal surface substantially
constant over a substantial portion of the time period, the
rate being
(i) below the maximum rate the area of skin is able to
absorb, and
(ii) sufficient to increase the permeability of the area of
skin to the drug such that the drug is absorbed thereby
at a rate that provides a therapeutically effective level
of the drug in the bloodstream of the patient.
4,379,455
MEDICAL RECEPTACLE WITH DISPOSABLE LINER
ASSEMBLY
Dtrid W. Deaton, 922 Rnswood Cir., AbUenc, Tex. 79601
DiTision of Ser. No. 113,620, Jin. 21, 1980, Pat. No. 4,321,922.
This appUcation Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,527
Int a.3 A61F 5/44
U.S. a. 604—320 11 Claims
1. Apparatus for receiving fluids from the body of a patient
comprising:
a rigid outer canister means having an open mouth defined
by sidewalls and a rim extending laterally from a canister
sidewall, said rim having a recess formed therein, a gasket
disposed within said recess;
a disposable container means for being removably inserted
within said canister means, said container means having an
open mouth deflned by a lip extending laterally from a
container sidewall;
a peripheral sealing suppori lid means removably attachable
to said canister means and supporting said container
means from said canister rim;
a removable cover means coacting with said sealing support
lid means for being retained over said mouth of said canis-
ter means;
said cover means sealingly pinching said container lip be-
tween said cover means and said lid means;
said cover means having a patient port for receiving fluid
from the body of a patient;
said cover means having a vacuum port for effecting a vac-
uum within said container means for drawing fluid
through said patient port for collection in said container
means;
said canister rim extending laterally below and outwardly
beyond said container lip;
said lid means having a lateral sealing portion between said
container lip and said canister rim, said sealing portion
having a downwardly extending annular lug engaging
said gasket disposed in said rim;
said lid means having a securement portion engaging said
cover for securing said cover in sealing engagement with
said container lip therebelow;
said lid means having a portion releasably abutting said
canister rim;
said cover means extending laterally beyond said container
lip;
said securement portion of said lid engaging the outer edge
of said cover means;
said canister rim extending laterally beyond said outer edge
of said cover means; and
said container lip and said sealing portion of said lid means
being annularly interfitted in detented registry with the
combined vertical thickness thereof substantially constant;
said container means, lid means and cover means forming a
single, separable unit from said canister means.
4,379,456
LANCET INJECTOR
William D. Cornell, Ballwin, and Camot Evans, St Louis, both
of Mo., assignors to Sherwood Medical Company, St Louis,
Mo.
FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,024
Int a.3 A61B 17/ 32
U.S. a. 128—314 17 Claims
1. A lancet injector comprising an elongate housing, a lancet
holder slidable in said elongate housing and adapted to have a
lancet releasably connected thereto for piercing the skin,
spring means in said housing having one end connected to said
holder and the other end engaging a proximal end portion of
said housing, control means connected to said holder for mov-
ing said holder, said control means being movable to move said
holder linearly against the force of said spring means to a
releasable retracted position thereby compressing said spring
means, said control means being movable to release said holder
from said retracted position so that the force of said spring
means and the inertia of said holder during movement thereof
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
317
moves said holder linearly toward a distal end portion of said
housing to a lancet piercing position in which said spring
means is tensioned to move said holder proximally from said
piercing position.
4,379,457
INDICATOR FOR SURGICAL STAPLER
Roy D. Gravener, Bethany; Alfred F. De Carlo, Stamford, and
Douglas G. Noiles, New Canaan, all of Conn., assignors to
United States Surgical Corporation, Norwalk, Conn.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,720
Int. a.5 A61B n/04. 17/08
U.S. a. 128—334 R 13 Qaims
36a.
1. In a surgical stapler, provided with:
(a) an anvil;
(b) a staple carrying assembly, located proximally of the
anvil; the staple carrying assembly being adapted to be
activated, so that its staples are urged distally against the
anvil to staple tissue between the anvil and the staple
carrying assembly;
(c) a threaded rod, adapted to move axially and connected to
the anvil or to the staple carrying assembly;
(d) rotatable moving means, located proximally of the staple
carrying assembly and threadedly engaged with the
threaded rod, for moving the threaded rod axially upon
rotation of the moving means; the moving means being
rotatably connected to the anvil, if the threaded rod is
connected to the staple carrying assembly, or to the staple
carrying assembly, if the threaded rod is connected to the
anvil; and the portions of the threaded. rod, threadedly
engaged with the moving means, being located within the
moving means; and
(e) means, connected to the threaded rod and the moving
means, for indicating that the axial position of the
threaded rod relative to the moving means is such that the
spacing between the anvil and the staple carrying assem-
bly is within a range of spacings that is generally suitable
for stapling tissue between the anvil and the staple carry-
ing assembly;
the improved indicating means (e) which comprises:
an indicator marking which is connected to the threaded rod
and is adapted to move axially within the moving means
between the threaded rod and the moving means; and
a helical surface in the lateral surface of the moving means
which faces proximally and which substantially parallels
the helical path of the indicator marking, relative to the
moving means, when the moving means is rotated and the
indicator marking is located axially of the helical surface;
the indicator marking not being laterally covered by the
moving means and being continuously visible proximally
of, and adjacent to, the helical surface as the moving
means is rotated when and only when the spacing between
the anvil and the staple carrying assembly is within the
range of generally suitable spacings.
4,379,458
TROCAR SLEEVES HAVING A BALL VALVE
Siegfried Bauer, Heidelsheim, and Manft^ Boebel, Oetisheim,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Richard Wolf
GmbH, Knittlingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 959,561, Not. 13, 1978, Pat. No. 4,233,982.
This application Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 168,070
Int. a.5 A61B 17/34; A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—264 1 Claim
3 7a 8
T 'TROCAR!
11 12
1. A hollow surgical trocar sleeve instrument adapted to be
inserted into the abdomen to enable another surgical instru-
ment to be passed therethrough into the abdomen of the pa-
tient, and comprising an outer cylindrical metal sleeve and an
inner concentric insulating plastic sleeve joined to one another
in concentric relation, the tip of the inner insulating plastic
sleeve extending considerably beyond the tip of the outer metal
sleeve so that there is a sleeve portion of insulating plastic
material in front of the tip of the metal sleeve without there
being metal at the distal tip of the trocar instrument, a one-
piece plastic housing joined to the rear of the outer metal
sleeve, said housing supporting at the proximal end a seal cap
of resilient material having a central aperture therethrough
aligned to the bore of the inner plastic sleeve for capturing the
other instrument by a seal fit when passed therethrough.
4,379,459
CARDIAC PACEMAKER SENSE AMPLIHER
Marc T. Stein, Tempe, Ariz., assignor to Medtronic, Inc., Min-
neapolis, Minn.
FUed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,537
Int a.3 A61N 1/36
U.S. a. 128—419 PG 3 Claims
1. A cardiac signal amplifier of the type having terminal
means for receiving input signals, output means for providing
an output signal upon detection of natural heart signal and
blanking signal receiving means for blanking the signal ampli-
fier for a predetermined blanking time interval, comprising:
reference level integrating circuit means for establishing a
reference level signal representative of sensed extraneous
repetitive noise input signals received from said termmal
means;
instantaneous level integrating circuit means for establishing
318
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
an instantaneous level signal representative of non-recur-
ring signals received from said terminal means;
means responsive to said reference level and instantaneous
level signals for providing said output signal when said
instantaneous level signal exceeds said reference level
signal by a predetermined signal level;
current supply means for establishing a predetermined mini-
mum signal level on said reference level and instantaneous
level integrating circuits in the absence of any signal in-
puts on said terminal means and for establishing said refer-
A*'
so that said output signal is a function of only respiration
activity,
a first rale means foi providing a heart rale signal 'o said
filter means,
said filter means including;
a first analog filter means for receiving said impedance signal
as input, and
a second analog filter means for providing said output signal,
said second analog filler means arranged in a cascaded,
lime-delay arrangement with said first filter means,
said output signal being a summation of outputs of said first
filter means and said second analog filter means as a func-
tion of respiration activity with respect to time
4,379,461
THERMOGRAPHIC APPARATUS
Eriing S. Nilsson, Vitmaravagen 77, Upplands VSiby, and Staf-
fan G. Zetterquist, Vesslevagen 4, Taby, both of Sweden
PCT No. PCT/SE89/000i4, § 371 Date Sep. 17, 1980. § 102(e)
Date Sep. 8, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01S14, PCT Pub.
Date Jul. 24, 1980
PCT Filed Jan. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 204,366
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 17. 1979. 7900434
Int. CV A61B 5/00. 5/02
I .S. CI. 128—736 7 Claims
ence and mstantaneous signal levels on said integrating
circuits in the presence of noise and heart signals; and
comparator means having a first input coupled to said refer-
ence level integrating circuit means and a second input
coupled to said instantaneous level integrating circuit
means and an output coupled to said current supply means
and operative during blanking of said signal amplifier f(U
maintaining said instantaneous signal level nearly equal to
said reference signal level during blanking ^ii said sense
amplifier.
4,379,460
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOVING
CARDIAC ARTIFACT IN IMPEDANCE
PLETHYSMOGRAPHIC RESPIRATION MONITORING
Neil H. K. Judell, 509A Lafayette Rd., North Kingston, R.I.
02852
Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,392
Int. CI." A61B 5/08
U.S. CI. 128—671 4 Qaims
1. In an impedance plethysmographic apparatus of the type
for monitoring respiration of a patient including means for
measuring an impedance signal generated by changes occur-
ring in the patient's chest, wherein the improvement com-
prises:
means for removing artifact from the impedance signal
caused by cardiac activity in the chest including;
filter means which produces an output signal dependant only
upon respiration acfivity in the patient's chest by remov-
ing any signals from said output signal caused by cardiac
activity which is substantially periodic in character, said
filter means receives as input an impedance signal which is
a function of both cardiac and respirati6t> activity, said
filter means adapted to filter said input impedance signal
1
1. An apparatus for detecting circulation disturbances in the
legs of a patient by measuring and recording the skin surface
temperature along the legs of the patient, comprising:
at least one temperature sensor manually movable over the
skin surface along the legs of a patient resting with his legs
in a substantially horizontal position and capable of sens-
ing the skin surface temperature of the momentarily adja-
cent portion of the patient's leg and generating an electric
signal corresponding thereto;
a movable apparatus frame structure adapted to be located at
the feet of a patient under examination;
means mechanically connecting said temperature sensor to
said apparatus frame, and including signal generating
means responsive to the movement of said temperature
sensor relative to said apparatus frame and for generating
an electric signal representing the position of the tempera-
ture sensor along its path of movement;
signal recording means mounted in said apparatus frame for
receiving said temperature signal and said position signal
and capable of recording the temperature being sensed as
a function of the position of the temperature sensor; and
digital signal processing means mounted in said apparatus
frame for receiving said temperature and position signals
and including data storing means for storing associated
values of said temperature and position signals from at
least two, different, measured temperature-position-rela-
tions and calculating means for comparing the tempera-
ture values as a function of the position for said two tem-
perature-position-relations stored in said storing means
and for producing signals representing the temperature
difference as a function of the position for said two tem-
perature-position relations, said recording means being
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
319
capable of receiving said last mentioned signals for re-
cording said temperature difference as a function of the
position.
4,379,462
MULTI ELECTRODE CATHETER ASSEMBLY FOR
SPINAL CORD STIMULATION
William N. Borkan, North Miami; Frank M. Savino, Fort Lau-
derdale, both of Fla., and Joseph M. Waltz, Rye, N.Y., assign-
ors to Neuromed, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, Fla.
Filed Oct. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 201,783
Int. CI." A61N 1/04
U.S. CI. 128—786 16 Claims
4,379,464
COOKED FLAVORS FOR SMOKING PRODUCTS
D. Louise Wu, and James W. Swain, both of Richmond, Va.,
assignors to Philip Morris Incorporated, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 18, 1981. Ser. No. 235,456
Int. a.' A24B 15/iO
U.S. a. 131—275 12 Oaims
1. A process for preparing a reaction flavor product which
comprises the following steps:
(a) preparing a mixture of a reducmg sugar and ammonium
hydroxide wherein the weight ratio of reducing sugar to
ammonium hydroxide is in the range of 5-15 1;
(b) adding a trace amount of a compound selected from the
group consisting of an amino acid and a monoamide
thereof to said mixture of step (a), wherein the ratio of
reducing sugar to said compound is in the range of
200-300:1;
(c) heating said mixture to a temperature in the range of W"
to 105° C; and thereafter
(d) cooling said mixture to rotim temperature.
t «« 3f la
1. A catheter electrode assembly for insertion through a
needle to lie along and stimulate the spinal cord comprising:
a sheath having a distal and a proximal end and an outtr
diameter of less than approximately 0.05 inches;
at least three in-line electrodes equally spaced along the
exterior of said distal end of said sheath to lie in-line along
a spinal cord;
at least three in-line terminals at the proximal end of said
shealh; and
at least three sets of individually insulated stranded stainless
steel wires interconnecting an electrode and a respective
terminal, the insulation of said sets of wires hermetically
seals said sets of wires independent of said sheath without
reducing the flexibility of said sets of wires.
4,379,463
MULTICENTRIC KNEE CAGE
Robert H. Meier, and Evelyn Farr, both of Jackson, Mich..
assignors to Camp International, Inc., Jackson, Mich.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,047
Int. CI.' A61F 5/00
U.S. CI. 128—80 C 13 Claims
1. A knee cage for supporting the knee comprising, in combi-
nation, a flexible cover having upper, lower and lateral edges
and inner and outer surfaces, said cover including lateral por-
tions, cover securing means mounted upon said cover adapted
to secure said cover about the wearer's knee, hinge means
defined upon said cover lateral portions, said hinge means each
including first and second elongated elements interconnected
by a floating pivot, and hinge mounting means releasably
mounting said hinge means elements upon said cover outer
surface at said lateral portions to permit selective positioning of
said hinge means upon the associated cover lateral portion.
4,379,465
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING A FILTERING STRUCTURE
IN PARTICULAR FOR CIGARETTE FILTERS
Francois C'oq, Perpignan. France, assignor to Job. ancirns Ets
Bardou Jt>b & Pauilac, Perignan. France
Filed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,569
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 27, 1979, 79 19269
Int. CI.' A24D 3/02. 3, 04. 3/06
U.S. CI. 131—332 19 Claims
1. In a process for producing a filtering structure, in particu-
lar for cigarette filters, comprising, mixing fibres of different
types to form a homogeneous fibrous mass, one type of the
fibres being synthetic and thermofusible at a low melting point
and possessing adhesive properties in the molten stale, another
type of the fibres being absorbent with respect to harmful
products of tobacco smoke and stable at the melting tempera-
ture of the thermofusible fibres, shaping the fibrous mass into a
cylindrical rod which is not yet in a coherent state but is homo-
geneous and comprises fibrous networks which are closely
imbricated relative to each other, the improvement compris-
ing; employing a notable proportion of the thermofusible fibres
relative to the absorbent fibres, said thermofusible fibres being
elongated in form; and heating the fibrous mixture in said rcxl
to a temperature which leaves the absorbent fibres intact but is
sufficiently high for completely melting and fiuidifying all the
thermofusible substance which is initially present in the form of
the elongated fibres to convert same into fine droplets dis-
persed in the network of absorbent fibres so as to create, by this
conversion, on one hand, multiple connection at crossing
points of the absorbent fibres which remain stable and. on the
other hand, a network of pores which intercommunicate in all
directions and are constituted by spaces left empty upon the
complete melting of the thermofusible fibres
320
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4379,466
COUNTING DEVICE FOR COIN SORTING AND
COUNTING MACHINE
Katusuke Funiya, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Laurel Bank Ma-
chine Co^ Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,539
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1979,
54/182586[U]
Int. a.^ G07D 9/04
U.S. a. 133—3 C 5 Claims
independent of the feeding means is connected to the washing
tank means for recirculating the cleaning fluid, the circulatory
means includes a pump means for pumping the cleaning fluid
through the circulatory means, and filter means for filtering
the cleaning fluid as the cleaning fluid is recirculated in the
circulatory means.
4,379,468
VENTILATOR APPARATUS FOR A FLEXIBLE SHEET
Steve Szukhent, Jr., Montrose, Mich., assignor to Tex-All Com-
pany, Inc., Montrose, Mich.
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,214
Int. a.3 A45F 1/08
U.S. a. 135—88 10 Qaims
1. A coin sorting and counting apparatus which comprises a
coin guiding and sorting mechanism for guiding coins to be
sorted and for sorting coins by changing the guided coins'
courses at predetermined p>ositions according to the sizes of the
coins, a coin feeding mechanism for feeding the coins to the
coin guiding and sorting mechanism one by one, and a count-
ing device arranged along the coin guiding and soriing mecha-
nism including a plurality of vibrating elements for being vi-
brated by the coming coins when the latter come into contact
with the former and arranged at the respective positions where
the coins change their course, a plurality of vibration sensors
connected with the vibrating elements, respectively, for con-
verting the vibrations of said vibrating elements into electrical
signals, and calculating means responsive to the electric signals
for separately calculating the numbers of the coins having the
different sizes.
4,379,467
WASHING UNIT FOR AN OFFSET DUPLICATING
MACHINE
Horst Purr, Tennenbronn, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Mathias Bauerle GmbH, Georgen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,431
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 13,
1980, 3005236
Int. a.3 B08B 3/04
VJS. a. 134—111 16 Qaims
7. Ventilator apparatus for a flexible sheet, such as a boat
covering, having a ventilation aperture through a portion of
said sheet intermediate edge portions of said sheet, said cover-
ing having inner and outer sides, said apparatus comprising:
cover means for covering said ventilation aperture, said
cover means having at least one passage therein for com-
municating ambient air to said aperture;
an inner support section on the inside of said sheet, having at
least one passage therein in fluid communication with said
ventilation aperture and said first mentioned passage;
means coupling said cover means and said lower section to
secure said cover means and said inner section to said
outer and inner side, respectively, of said sheet;
said cover means and said inner section including cooperat-
ing, sheet-pinching detent means and detent receiving
means, clamped to opposite sides of said sheet, for displac-
ing a portion of said sheet out of the plane of said sheet to
inhibit lateral movement of said ventilator apparatus rela-
tive to said sheet; and
extensible and retractable support means coupled to said
inner support section for supporting said ventilator appa-
ratus at any selected one of a plurality of different levels to
position the portion of said sheet adjacent said aperture at
any selected one of a plurality of different levels relative
to the edge portions of said sheet.
1. A washing unit for an offset duplicating machine, the
washing unit comprising a washing tank means for accommo-
dating a cleaning fluid, a washing roll means arranged in the
washing tank means so as to enable a portion thereof to be
dipped into the cleaning fluid accommodated in the washing
tank means, and feeding means for feeding cleaning fluid to the
washing tank means, characterized in that a circulatory means
4,379,469
nRE HYDRANT CAP WITH RECESSED VALVE
Ame J. Britz, 1775 W. 8th St., Brooklyn, N.Y. 11223
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,767
Int. aj E03B 9/06, 9/14
UJS. a. 137—296 4 Claims
1. In combination with a valve body of the type including an
upstanding tubular body and an uppr end bonnet secured over
the upper end of said body, said bonnet including an upper
central wall portion upwardly through which a rotatable valve
actuating stem projects and is rotatably received, said bonnet
including a plurality of upwardly projecting lobes spaced
outwardly from and about said central portion, said stem in-
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
321
eluding an upper terminal end defining a non-circular cross
section wrench engageable portion for telescopic engagement
thereof with a similar non-circular cross section rotary wrench
shank terminal end, said lobes projecting above said central
portion to an elevation spaced a predetermined distance above
the upper terminal end of said stem, the lower portions of said
the sub-pressure opening, and a sub-pressure spring biased
between said valve seat plate and said tappet urging said disc
portion onto said sub-pressure valve seat.
lobes being spaced apart about said central portion, said bonnet
defming water drainage zones thereof extending generally
radially outwardly from said central portion between adjacent
lobes and disposed at a lower elevation than said central por-
tion, said bonnet being free of obstructions overlying said
shank, lobes and water drainage zones, the upper ends of said
lobes being smoothly rounded.
4,379,470
CLOSING CAP, PARTICULARLY FOR A MOTOR
VEHICLE RADIATOR
Heinrich Reutter, Waiblingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Reutter Metallwarenfabrik GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,552
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 1,
1980,3008002
Int. a.3 F16K 17/196
U.S. a. 137—493.8 11 Qaims
3 16u"|^lf 30^/,o
19 "OX n
34
1. A removable motor vehicle radiator closing cap for a
vehicle cooling system, comprising, a cap housing having an
open end, a resilient valve seat plate extending across said
housing and dividing it vertically into a closed top space and a
bottom space adjacent the opened end, an excess pressure
valve mounted in said plate including a cup-shaped extension
portion having an excess pressure opening extending through
said seat plate, an excess pressure valve seat defined around the
excess pressure opening, an excess pressure valve disc engage-
able on said valve seat to close the excess pressure opening, a
top cover member overlying said excess pressure valve disc
and having a top bearing face with a top opening, an excess
pressure spring biased between said disc and said bearing face
and urging said valve disc toward said excess pressure valve
seat, a sub-pressure valve mounted in said plate including a
sub-pressure opening through said plate, a sub-pressure valve
seat defined around said sub-pressure opening, a sub-pressure
valve including a disc portion engageable with the sub-pres-
sure valve seat and having a tappet portion extending through
4,379,471
THREAD PROTECTOR APPARATUS
Rainer Kuenzel, 2 Gessner Rd., Houston, Tex. 77024
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 957,139, Not. 2, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 835,750, Sep. 22,
1977, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 667,320,
Apr. 15, 1976, abandoned. This application Dec. 15, 1980, Ser.
No. 216,154
Int. a.J F16L 55/10
U.S. a. 138—89 9 Claims
5< 50 X
-'■V ^ \J <J \^ K^
23
1. A thread protector apparatus adapted to be installed on
the threaded end of a pipe comprising:
a flexible member having first and second ends and an elon-
gated portion therebetween which flexible member is
capable of being drawn into a tubular configuration in
which said flrst and second ends are spaced by a first
distance when said thread protector apparatus is in an
unlocked state and spaced by a second distance when said
thread protector apparatus is in a locked state;
a resilient material member formed concentrically with said
flexible member and adapted to be contacted against
threads on the end of a pipe;
first and second tab means formed on said first and second
end portions of said flexible member respectively;
a locking means comprising a wedge shaped locking mem-
ber for operatively contacting said first and second tab
means for altering the circumference of said flexible mem-
ber from a relaxed size corresponding to the unlocked
state to a locking size corresponding to the locked state
and wherein said tabs and said locking member are formed
such that camming of said tabs by said locking member
urges said resilient member against the threads of the pipe;
and
detent means supported at one end to and extending from
said flexible member and having an end portion positioned
intermediate said tab members for bias against said locking
means.
4,379,472
MAINTAINING THE DIMENSIONAL INTEGRITY OF
THERMOPLASTIC TUBING ENDS FOR RECEIVING A
LUER
Joel Cunningham, Del Mar, Calif., anigiior to Baxter TraTenol
Laboratories, Inc., Decrfield, 111.
DirisioB of Ser. No. 110,261, Jan. 7, 1980, Pat No. 4,297,316.
This appUcation Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,908
iBt a.J F16L 55/10
\}&. a. 138—89 2 ClalBi
1. A heat sterilizable, sealed tubing assembly comprising
a length of thermoplastic tubing having an exterior portion
with a normal exterior diameter and an interior bore with
a normal interior diameter which undergoes dimensional
distortion at a temperature sufficient to effect heat steril-
ization thereof, and
322
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
an end cap removably engageable on the end of said tubing ,
said end cap being made of a thermosetting material and
including
exterior wall means defming an end wail operative for
engagement against the tubing end to seal the interior
portin of the tubing from communication with the at-
mosphere during heat sterilization, 'first interior wall
means connected to said exterior walls means and defin-
ing an inner member which extends inwardly from said
end wall into and axially along the interior bore of the
tubing and which has an outer diameter generally equal
to the interior diameter of the tubing bore for support-
mg the interior portion of the tubing at its normal diam-
eter during heat sterilization, and
second interior wall means connected to said exterior wall
means and extending from said end wall outwardly
radially spaced from said first interior wall means and
having an interior diameter less than the exterior diame-
ter of the tubing for compressing the exterior portion of
the tubing radially inwardly toward said first interior
wall means during heat sterilization.
4,379,473
LONGITUDINALLY DIVIDED CABLE SLEEVE OF A
SHRINKABLE MATERIAL
Dieter Kunze, Neuried, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Sie-
mens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,526
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 10,
1980, 3009078
Int. a.' F16L 11/12. 25/00, 55/16
U.S. CI. 138-167 15 Claims
4,379,474
HEDDLE FRAME ACTUATING MECHANISM LOCATED
BETWEEN A DOBBY AND THE HEDDLE FRAMES OF A
WEAVING MACHINE
Otto Mueller, Uetikon am See, Switzerland, assignor to Staeubli
Ltd., Horgen-Zuerich, Switzerland
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,726
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Oct. 19, 1979,
9401/79
Int. a.i D03D 39/16
U.S. a. 139—21 . 5 Qaims
1. A heddle frame actuating mechanism for operatively
coupling a weaving machine having a movably supported
heddle frame and a shed-forming machine having two lifting
units, comprising a first lever supported for pivotal movement
about a stationary first axis, means for drivingly coupling one
of said lifting units to said first lever, a second lever supported
on said first lever for pivotal movement about a second axis
spaced from and substantially parallel to said first axis, means
for drivingly coupling the other of said lifting units to said
second lever, a third lever supported for pivotal movement
about a stationary third axis spaced from and substantially
parallel to said first and second axes, means for drivingly cou-
pling said third lever to said heddle frame, a connecting mem-
ber having first and second ends, the distance between said first
and second ends being substantially equal to the distance be-
tween said first and third axes, means for pivotally supporting
said first and second ends of said connecting member on said
second lever and said third lever, respectively, at selected
locations thereon so that said first and second ends of said
connecting member are respectively spaced from said second
and third axes and so that, when said second lever is in a prede-
termined position relative to said first lever, the distance be-
tween said first axis and said first end of said connecting mem-
ber is substantially equal to the distance between said third axis
and said second end of said connecting member.
1. In a longitudinally divided cable sleeve having a strip-like
sleeve member composed of a heat shrinkable material having
a sealing system along its edge composed of a longitudinal
extending bead on each edge and a sealing bar engaging the
beads in a sealed manner, the improvements comprising each
of the beads having a non-shrinkable longitudinally extending
strengthening element embedded therein, and the sealing bar
having a pair of side elements interconnected by a central web,
said side elements projecting from the central web to form an
undercut groove on each side of said web so that the sealing
bar has a cross-sectional configuration of a pair of C-shaped
profiles facing in opposite directions and each groove receives
one bead of the sleeve member to close said cable sleeve.
4,379,475
WEDGING APPARATUS USEFUL FOR LOG SPLITTING
Ronald W. Nokes, 8150 LaPlace Ct., Westminster, Colo. 80030
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 823,490, Aug. 10, 1977, Pat.
No. 4,254,808. This application Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,075
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 10,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' B27L 7/00
U.S. a. 144—193 C 12 Qaims
6. Manually operated apparatus for performing wedging
type operations on a severable material as in log splitting and
the like, comprising:
first and second elongated members positioned in concen-
tric, coaxially slidable relation to each other, the first of
said elongated members having a base and a tapered
wedge body extending from said base to a tip and a first
impact surface adapted to receive impact force compo-
nents directed parallel to therlongitudinal axis of said
tapered wedge body, and the second of said elongated
members being adapted to be driven manually by a person
in coaxial, longitudinal relation to the first elongated
member and having a second impact surface in axial align-
ment with the first impact surface on the first elongated
member and adapted to impact on and to transfer forces
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
323
from the inertial momentum of said second elongated
member to the said first impact surface on said first elon-
gated member when said second elongated member is
moved coaxially in relation to said first elongated mem-
ber,
a pair of semi-flexible, springy handle bars, each of which is
affixed to and extends radially outwardly from respec-
tively opposite sides of said second elongated member and
is adapted to effectively transmit driving force compo-
= /$.:' ..
i
nents parallel to the longitudinal axis of said tapered body
exerted on the distal end thereof by a person's hand to
move said second impact member on said second elon-
gated member toward and into contact with said first
impact surface on said first elongated member while also
being adapted to dampen the shock created by said first
and second impact surfaces striking each other and trans-
mitted by said second elongated body member to the
persons hand.
4,379,476
VENEER LATHE LOG CHARGER SYSTEM HAVING
ENHANCED ACCURACY AND RATE OF PRODUCTION
Larry R. Berry, Roseburg, Oreg., assignor to Sun Studs, Inc.,
Roseburg, Oreg.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,898
Int. a.3 B27B 1/00; B27L 5/02
U.S. a. 144—357 7 Claims
1. A charger for a veneer lathe comprising:
(a) respective log engagement means for engaging opposing
ends of an elongate log by extension of said log engage-
ment means toward said opposing ends;
(b) actuating means for causing said log engage-means to
move said log;
(c) position sensing means connected to said log engagement
means for sensing the distance between said log engage-
ment means as said log engagement means extend toward
said opposing ends of said log;
(d) length measuring means for measuring the length of said
log prior to engagement of said log by said log engage-
ment means; and
(e) means controlling the operation of said actuating means
and connected to said position sensing means and said
length measuring means respectively for comparing the
length of said log as measured by said length measuring
means with the distance between said log engagement
means as sensed by said position sensing means and initiat-
ing operation of said actuating means in response to said
length and distance respectively being substantially equal.
4,379,477
VENEER LATHE LOG CHARGER SYSTEM HAVING
ENHANCED ACCURACY AND RATE OF PRODUCTION
Kenneth L. Shrum, Glide, Oreg., assignor to Sun Studs, Inc.,
Roseburg, Oreg.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,103
Int. a.' B27L 5/02
U.S. a. 144—357 13 Oaims
1. A charger for a veneer lathe comprising:
(a) rotary means for engaging opposing ends of an elongate
log and rotating said log longitudinally about an axis of
rotation, said rotary means including log engagement
means for engaging each of said opposing ends of said log
only within a portion of a circular area surrounding said
axis of rotation so as to thereby leave a second circular
area on each of said ends, concentric with and smaller
than the first circular area, free of engagement by said
rotary means;
(b) scanning means for sensing the shape of said log while it
is rotated by said rotary means for determining the loca-
tion of the longitudinal axis of the log for optimum pro-
duction of veneer;
(c) means for disengaging said rotary means from said op-
posing ends of said log;
(d) means for transferring said log from said rotary means to
a position wherein said longitudinal axis of said log is
aligned with the rotational axis of said veneer lathe;
(e) rotary spindle means on said veneer lathe for engaging
each of said opposing ends of said log;
(0 said second circular area being sufficiently large to enable
said rotary spindle means to engage each of said ends of
said log within said second circular area.
4,379,478
FOLDING OVERHEAD DOORS
Dale Lichy, 4651 Sylvan Dr., Allison Park, Pa. 15101
Filed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 157,951
Int. a.5 E06B 3/00
U.S. a. 160—35 8 Qaims
1. A folding overhead door assembly comprising opposite
side support and guide means defining a door opening between
them, said guide means including a pair of side-by-side channel
members extending the height of the door opening on each side
thereof and thereafter horizontally one spaced above the other,
passage means between said two channels over their side-by-
side length, a door component comprising a plurality of up-
standing elongate, normally coplanar veriically stacked door
324
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
sections normally closing said opening, means pivotally attach-
ing adjacent door sections together along successive like hori-
zontal edges, follower means at the top and bottom of each end
of each door section, one at the top engaged in said one of said
pair of channels extending horizontally above the other and the
other in the other of said channels, said follower means being
operable to guide door sections between the normally coplanar
vertical position in the side-by-side channels and an overhead
side-by-side vertical position in the one above the other chan-
#
+
62 .
50- 1^
22, 25.
2r 20--
2C
' ■ T
21, 200^
J
z-
25
27
i-30c
./-I3
nel portions, each door section all the while remaining in a
substantially vertical position, wherein the means pivotally
attaching the door sections together is a lever arm extending
from a lever arm guide fixed to the bottom of one door section
to a guide fixed to the bottom of the next adjacent door section
said lever arm being pivoted at its ends in the lever arm guides
of two adjacent door sections for rotation between a vertical
plane parallel to the plane of the door sections to a position
generally parallel to the bottom edges of two adjacent sections
connected thereby in the vertical side-by-side position.
4,379,479
ROLLER ASSEMBLY
Lauren C. Whiting, Clarence, N.Y., assignor to Whiting Roll-Up
Door Mfg. Corp., Akron, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 384,026
Int. a.3 E06B 3/38
U.S. a. 160—201 3 Qaims
ZZ'
1. In an upwardly-acting door structure arranged in a body
opening, said door structure including a track mounted on said
body and including at least two vertically-adjacent door pan-
els, one of said panels having its lower marginal end portion
configured as an elongated hinge section, another of said pan-
els having its upper marginal end portion configured as a
cooperative elongated hinge section, said hinge sections being
slidably interfitted together in such manner as to permit one
panel to shift relative to the other along the axis of elongation
of said hinge sections while coupling said panels together for
relative pivotal movement along the path of said track, the
improvement which comprises: a roller assembly for guiding
movement of said panels along said track and for reducing the
ease with which said panels may shift laterally relative to one
another, said roller assembly including
a shaft having an exteriorly-threaded shank portion matingly
received in one of said hinge sections, and having a hub
portion arranged without said one hinge section, said hub
portion providing a shoulder surface arranged without
said one hinge section in spaced facing relation thereto;
a roller rotatably mounted on said hub and arranged in said
track; and
a stop member having one portion normally sandwiched
between said one hinge section and said shoulder surface,
and having another portion arranged proximate said roller
member in spaced relation thereto.
4,379,480
ENERGY EFFiaENT GARAGE DOOR CONSTRUCTION
AND THE LIKE
John J. Kempel, and Ronald F. Otto, both of West Branch,
Mich., assignors to Garland Manufacturing Company, De-
troit, Mich.
Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 168,537
Int. C1.J E06B 3/12. 9/00
U.S. CI. 160—232 1 Claim
1. An energy efficient laminated building structure for a
sectional-type door having a plurality of said structures, and
hinges movably connecting adjacent structures and permitting
rocking movement therebetween, comprising:
first and second spaced, elongated metal panel members of
identical cross-sections shape, each panel member having
a main surface and first and second side edges;
said first side edges of said panel members being formed to
provide a recessed area and said second side edges of said
panel members being formed to provide a tongue area,
said tongue area being insertable in said recessed area of an
adjacent structure to create a baffle effect for inhibiting
the passage of air therebetween, while also providing a
clearance between said tongue and recess areas sufficient
to permit limited relative movement between adjacent
structures;
each of said first side edges including a return bend portion
adjacent said main surface, an inwardly projecting portion
extending from said return bend portion and a reverse
bend portion extending from said inwardly projecting
portion;
each of said second side edges including an inwardly otTset
and inclined portion adjacent said main surface, a U-
shaped portion extending from said inwardly offset and
inclined portion, an inwardly projecting portion extend-
ing from said U-shaped portion and a reverse bend portion
extending from said inwardly projecting portion
a unitary expanded core fabricat«l of a heat insulating media
interiorly disposed between and adhesively bonded to said
panel members the reverse bend portions on the first side
edges being spaced from each other, and the reverse bend
portions on the second side edges being spaced from each
other and together with said expanded core the said
spaced reverse bend portions acting to prevent direct
contact between the first and second panel members,
a generally U-shaped end member secured to the interior
edges of said panel members at each end thereof;
retainer means operatively associated with said reverse bend
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
32S
portion of said first and second side edges for securing said
first and second panel members together along said flrst
and second side edges; and
reinforcement means of generally C-shaped cross-section,
nestingly received and secured interiorly of said panel
members along said first and second side edges, for rein-
forcing said panel members at said hinges
said retainer means being characterized by a plurality of
alternately facing generally L-shaped deformable fingers
formed in said reinforcement means for confining said
reverse bend portions of said first and second side edges.
4^79,482
PREVENTION OF CRACKING OF CONTINUOUSLY
CAST STEEL SLABS CONTAINING BORON
Hiroo Saznki, Yokohuna; KoieU Yaaanoto, KawMiki; Yan-
hide Ohno, and Koa Miyamora, both of Kitakyoshn, all of
Japan, aarignon to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212335
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 6, 1979, 54-157457
Int. a.J B22D 11/16
U.S. a. 164—485 5 Claimi
1100
.» 1000
\\X'
S MO
• \ J>tr^
3 S i
( \ ' '
\ \ «
BOO
>-
TIIElMt.)
4,379,481
X-RAY APPARATUS AND CLOSURE MECHANISM
THEREFOR
Adolph Juner, City Island; David J. Haas, Suffem, both of N.Y.,
and Chester D. Rudd, Westwood, N J., assignors to North
American Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 864,504, Dec. 27, 1977, abandoned.
This application Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,553
Int. a.3 GOIN 23/00: G21F 7/00; A47G 5/02
U.S. a. 160—310 14 Claims
1. An apparatus for inspecting various articles comprising
a chamber defining structure including enclosing walls and a
retractable door, said structure being substantially imper-
meable to X-rays,
a shaft member inside said structure and provided for carry-
ing said retractable door, said retractable door including a
flexible construction windable on said shaft member,
wherein winding said flexible construction onto said shaft
member opens said chamber and unwinding said flexible
construction from said shaft member closes said chamber,
motor means for driving said shaft member in rotation,
a gear train mechanically linking said motor means and said
shaft member, said gear train including a drive gear driven
by said motor means and having gear teeth only about a
portion of its circumference, and a driven gear connected
to said shaft member and having gear teeth only about a
portion of its circumference,
said driven gear being moved independently of said drive
gear upon closing said chamber, and said drive gear en-
gaging said driven gear upon opening said chamber, and
switch means actuated by said drive gear for controlling said
motor means.
1. A method for preventing crackings of boron-containing
steel slabs in continuous casting of molten steels containing
nitrogen and boron in amounts falling within Zone 11 defined
in FIG. 2, which comprises cooling the steels through a range
of from the melting f>oint to 900' C. with an average cooling
rate ranging from 0.01* to 1' C./sec. to prevent precipiution of
boron-containing compounds along austenite grain boundaries
thereby promoting precipitation of the boron-containing com-
pounds in the austenite grains.
4,379,483
METHOD OF CONTROLLING HEATING AND
COOLING SOURCES
Scott R. Farley, Wichita, Kans., assignor to The Coleman Com-
pany, Inc., Wichita, Kans.
FUed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,185
Int. a.3 F25B 29/00. 7/00
U.S. a. 165—2 7 Claims
MO He A T~3
1. A method of controlling a plurality of heating sources
comprising the steps of:
(a) selecting a set temperature at which it is desired to main-
tain the indoor temperature;
(b) selecting an on temperature at which all heating sources
will be turned on;
(c) selecting an add heat temperature;
(d) selecting an off temperature at which all heating sources
which are not in a locked-on mode will be turned oft';
(e) turning all heat sources on when the indoor temperature
is below the on temperature;
(0 turning all heat sources off except a heat source which is
in a proporational control mode and any heat source
which is in a locked-on mode as the indoor temperature
rises past the ofT temperature;
(g) transferring one of the heat sources from an ofT mode to
a proportional control mode if the indoor temperature
falls past the add heat temperature;
(h) proportionally controlling the heat source which is in the
proportional control mode in order to try to maintain the
indoor temperature adjacent the set temperature; and
326
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
(i) transferring the Jicat source vshich is in the proportional
control mode to a locked-on mode in which the heat
source is turned on and transferring another heat source
from an off mode to the proportional control mode each
time the indoor temperature falls past the add heat temper-
ature until all heat sources are on the locked-on mode.
4,379,484
CONTROL FOR A V ARIABLE AIR VOLUME
TEMPERATLRE CONDIllOMNG SYSTEM-OL TDOOR
AIR ECONOMIZER
Duane L. Lorn, and John F. Klouda, both of La Crosse, Wis..
assignors to The Trane Company, La Crosse. Wis.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224.709
Int. CI." F25B 29 '00: F24F 7/0()
L.S. CI. 165—16 10 Claims
OC^ATiON 0* OlSCHAWt fljO TfMM «»0M ^t'^tN^ V^ * TvpiCAL
1 .A control for a temperature conditioning system which
includes an outdoor air economizer comprising
a. an outdoor ambient air temperature sensor;
b a discharge air temperature sensor: and
c means for selectively modulating the economizer in one oi
two modes, the first mode being in response to tempera-
ture conditioning demand and the second mode being in
response to the discharge air temperature, said one mode
being selected as a function of the temperature condition-
ing demand and the outdoor ambient temperature,
wherein the temperature conditioning demand is deter-
mined by the deviation of the discharge air temperature
from a setpoint.
4,379,485
WET/DRY STEAM CONDENSER
Warren H. Fisher, Jr., Parsippany, and Barry M. Barnet, Mor-
ris Plains, both of N.J., assignors to Foster Wheeler Energy
Corporation, Livingston, N.J.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,546
Int. CI.' F28B 1/02. 1/06
U.S. CL 165— 110 16 Claims
1. A wet/dry steam condensing apparatus comprising:
a steam receiving plenum adapted to receive steam from a
steam source:
a plurality of substantially vertically aligned, heat pipes,
each of said heat pi|?es having an evaporator section ex-
tending in said plenum and adapted to receive heat energy
from said steam, and a condensing section extending out of
said plenum, each of said pipes containing a quantity of a
heat transfer fluid adapted to transfer said heat energy
from its evaporator section to its condensing section
through a vapor/condensation cycle;
a separation baffle mounted on the condensing section of
said heat pipes and dividing each section into two por-
tions;
a plurality of fins disposed on a portion of the condensing
section of each of said pipes; and
cooling water application means operatively associated with
the remaining portion of the condensing section of each of
said pipes and adapted to selectively direct cooling water
thereto.
2. A wet/dry steam condensing apparatus comprising:
a steam receiving plenum adapted to receive steam from a
steam source;
a plurality of substantially vertically aligned, heat pipes,
each of said heat pipes having an evaporator section ex-
tending in said plenum and adapted to receive heat energy
from said steam, and a condensing section extending out of
said plenum, each of said pipes containing a quantity of a
heat transfer fluid adapted to transfer said heat energy
from its evaporator section to its condensing section
through a vapor/condensation cycle:
a plurality of fins disposed on a portion of the condensing
section of each of said heat pipes;
a plurality of spray heads adapted to direct a spray of cool-
ing wafer onto the remaining heat pipe portions; and
a flood water trough located on said remaining heat pipe
portions and adapted to receive cooling water and flow
the water downwardly onto said remaining heat pipe
portions of said heat pipes.
'M-
T
l!T,. :
.J
--r-h--^ - .„
^
3. A wet/dry steam condensing apparatus comprising:
a steam receiving plenum adapted to receive steam from a
steam source;
a plurality of substantially vertically aligned, heat pipes,
each of said heat pipes having an evaporator section ex-
tending in said plenum and adapted to receive heat energy
from said steam, and a condensing section extending out of
said plenum, each of said pipes containing a quantity of a
heat transfer fluid adapted to transfer fluid adapted to
transfer said heat energy from its evaporator section to its
condensing section through a vapor/condensation cycle;
each condensing section having an upper fmned portion and
a lower unfinned portion; and
cooling water application means operatively associated with
the lower unfinned portion of the condensing section of
each of said pipes and adapted to selectively direct cooling
water thereto.
4,379,486
HEAT EXCHANGER
Tetsuo Kurihara, Utsunomiya, Japan, assizor to Fuji Jukogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,223
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 3, 1979, 54-99191
Int. a.3 F28F 3/00
U.S. a. 165—153 12 Claims
1. In a heat exchanger having a plurality of layered tube
units for refrigerant in a gas phase and a liquid phase, the tube
units being disposed substantially one above the other, each of
the tube units comprising at least one tube made of two elon-
gated plates and having a refrigerant inlet side and a refrigerant
outlet side at opposite elongated ends, and spacer blocks dis-
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
327
posed between said tubes of said tube units forming air pas-
sages between said tubes of said tube units, said air passages
having an air inlet side and an air outlet side, adjacent upper
and lower of the tube units being alternately arranged in rela-
tion to respective said refrigerant inlet and outlet sides, said
spacer blocks defining refrigerant flow passages between said
tubes of each said tube units and respectively between alter-
nately arranged respective and said refrigerant inlet and outlet
sides of said adjacent upper and lower of the tube units, the
improvement wherein
each of said at least one tube of a common of said tube units
has said refrigerant inlet and outlet sides on common sides
respectively and constitutes means for the refrigerant to
flow therethrough in the same direction defming a single
refrigerant tubular passage in said common tube unit,
a single refrigerant inlet opening formed in a lower most of
said plates in each of said tube units at said refrigerant inlet
side and adjacent said air inlet side,
at least one refrigerant outlet opening formed in an upper-
most of said plates of said tube units, respectively, at the
refrigerant outlet side of each said tube units.
mf^>
to maintain the shape of the cross-sections of the module
similar along the length thereof
(d) said twisted passages in each of said modules being sepa-
rated by a flowguide partition; each of said flowguide
partitions comprising a continuous surface bound by six
adjoining lines, one of each of said lines being contained
within each of the four module side partitions and each of
the two end planes of said module, each of said flowguide
partitions serving to transform the cross-sectional configu-
ration of said pair of twisted passages so that the orienta-
tion of said cross-sectional configuration of said twisted
passages at one end of said module end planes is substan-
tially at right angles to the orientation of said cross-sec-
tional configuration of said twisted passages at the other of
said module end planes
(e) said primary manifold section having one layer of passage
an elongated inside fin dis|X)sed in each said tube dividing
said tube cross-sectionally in width into a plurality of
elongated separated channels for guiding refrigerant flow
from said refrigerant inlet side to the refrigerant outlet
side, and
said inside fin in the lowermost of said tubes is spaced from
sad inlet opening and said refrigerant inlet side leaving a
free space between said refrigerant inlet opening and said
refrigerant inlet side, respectively, and said inside fin,
at least one of said spacer blocks is formed with only one of
said refrigerant flow passages extending substantially from
said air inlet side to said air outlet side constituting means
for spreading out and mixing the refrigerant flowing up-
wardly therethrough and for passing downwardly flow-
ing portions of the refrigerant at said air outlet side, such
that there is a refrigerant distribution with most of the
refrigerant flowing in the tubes adjacent said air inlet side,
with the gas phase primarily at said air outlet side and the
liquid phase primarily at said air inlet side, and said inside
flns maintaining said distribution in said tubes.
4,379,487
INTERMESHING PASSAGE MANIFOLD
Kalman Krakow, 102 Radcliffe Rd., Montreal West, Quebec,
Canada (H4X 1C2)
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,930
Int. a.3 F28F 9/02
U.S. a. 165—165 7 Galms
1. An intermeshing passage manifold adapted for connecting
ducts each conveying different fluids to the ends of a heat
exchanger core comprising;
(a) one primary and an integral number of secondary mani-
fold sections adjacent successively in an end-to-end man-
ner
(b) each of said manifold sections comprising a plurality of
passage modules adjacent in a side-by-side manner
(c) each of said passage modules including a pair of similar
twisted passages enveloped by four module side partitions
modules oriented so that when said two ducts are con-
nected to it at one end, the two passages defined by said
ducts are subdivided into separate adjacent intermeshed
passages at the other end
(0 each of said secondary manifold sections having a plural-
ity of layers of passage modules adjacent in a side-by-side
manner
(g) each of said secondary manifold sections contains a
larger number of passage modules than the preceding
manifold section such that an integral number of passage
modules of each of the secondary manifold sections is
aligned and congruent with each of the passage modules
of the preceding manifold section
(h) said passage modules being oriented so that the passages
at the end of the manifold which is opposite to that end to
which the said ducts are connected are separate adjacent
intermeshed passages.
4,379,488
LATCH FOR WELL TOOL
Eddie J. Hamm, CarroUton, Tex., assignor to Otis Engineering
Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,879
Int. a.3 E21B 23/02
U.S. a. 166—217 14 Qaims
I . A device for reieasably locking a well tool in a flow con-
ductor which includes a receptacle having a locking recess
therein, comprising:
(a) body means including:
(1 ) an upper body member; and
(2) a lower body member having means on its lower
end for attaching a well tool thereto;
(b) means on said upper and lower body members co-
engageable for connecting them together preventing
substantial longitudinal movement therebetween;
1029 O.G.— 14
328
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
(c) holding means mounted m said body means maintaining
c()-engagement of said co-engageable means;
(d) latch means on said body means expandable into en-
gagement with said locking recess; and
(e) expander means slidably mounted in said body means
L-t^J -M^
for expanding said latch means into locking engagement
with said locking recess on longitudinal movement of said
expander means to a lower position, said expander means
being movable to an upper position to allow said latch
means to disengage said locking recess, and means on
said expander means engageable by an operating tool.
4 379 489
METHOD FOR PRODUCTION OF HEAVY OIL FROM
TAR SANDS
Louis D. Rollmann, Princeton, N.J., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,355
Int. a.5 E21B 43/22, 43/24. 43/40
U.S. a. 166-266 6aaims
1. In the production of heavy oil from a subterranean reser-
voir penetrated by spaced injection and recovery systems, the
method comprising:
(a) introducing into said injection system adjacent to said
reservoir liquid sulfur and oxygen-containing gas. thereby
obtaining a mixture of sulfur and oxygen-containing gas,
(b) igniting said mixture to produce sulfur dioxide,
(c) maintaining the pressure of said oxygen-containing gas
sufTicient to keep said sulfur dioxide in the liquid state, at
the temperature of the reservoir.
(d) flowing liquid sulfur dioxide into said reservoir, whereby
there is formed a solution of heavy oil in the reservoir in
said liquid sulfur dioxide,
(e) flowing said solution toward said production system, and
(0 recovering said solution from said production system.
4,379 490
METHOD FOR REMOVAL OF ASPHALTENE
DEPOSITIONS WITH AMINE-ACTIVATED DISULnDE
OIL
Shelby P. Sharp, Tulsa, Okla., assignor to Standard Oil Com-
pany (Indiana), Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,430
Int. a.^ E21B 43/25
U.S. a. 166-304 15 Qaims
1. A method for treating an asphaltene deposit comprising
contacting the asphaltene deposit with an amine-activated
dialkyl disulfide oil.
12. A method for treating asphaltene deposits in an oil-bear-
ing formation comprising:
(a) injecting an amine-activated dialkyl disulfide oil into a
well penetrating said formation;
(b) displacing said amine-activated dialkyl disulfide oil into
said formation;
(c) shutting said well in for a time period; and
(d) returning said well to production.
4,379,491
LEVELING SYSTEM FOR A WHEELED IMPLEMENT
Paul R. Riewerts, Port Byron, III., and Stephen M. Hillman,
Mesa, Ariz., assignors to Deere & Company, MoUne, 111.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,758
Int. a.3 AOIB 59/042
U.S. a. 172-328 17 Qaims
vr?y<5;
1. A wheeled implement including a leveling system, said
implement having a frame adapted to support ground-engag-
ing tools, a hitch structure pivotally connected to said frame
for movement about a transverse axis and extending forwardly
to a forward end connectible to a traction vehicle, and support
wheels mounted on said frame and movable between transport
and working positions, said leveling system comprising:
(a) power means for raising and lowering said support
wheels, said power means including at least two wheel lift
cylinders connected to parallel;
(b) fore-and-aft leveling means for stabilizing said frame
during transport and for maintaining said frame substan-
tially parallel to the ground during both transport and
working positions, said fore-and-aft leveling means includ-
ing a first support arm pivotally attached at one end to a
front portion of said frame, a second support arm securely
attached to a point on said frame rearward of said first
support arm, a hydraulic cylinder attached to said first
support arm and being coaxially aligned with a spring
assembly which is attached to said second support arm,
said hydraulic cylinder being connected in parallel with
said wheel lift cylinders to retain said frame substantially
parallel to the ground during movement of said frame
between said transport and working positions and to hold
said frame stable during transport, and said spring assem-
bly cooperating with said hydraulic cylinder to permit
flexible movement of said frame while said implement
traverses over uneven ground;
(c) a mechanical link connected between said first support
arm and said hitch structure for angularly retaining said
hitch structure relative to said front portion of said frame
to accommodate a drawbar hitch which can be positioned
at various heights on said traction vehicle;
(d) fluid supply means for supplying pressurized fluid to said
wheel lift cylinders and to said fore-and-aft hydraulic
leveling cylinder; and
(e) flow dividing means for dividing the volume of said
pressurized fluid equally between said wheel lift cylinders
and said fore-and-aft hydraulic leveling cylinder such that
said frame can be raised and lowered with respect to the
ground in a substantially horizontal fashion.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
329
4^79,492
TORQUE CONTROL APPARATUS FOR PNEUMATIC
IMPACT WRENCH
Masaaki Hiraoka, Yao, Japan, assignor to Nippon Pneumatic
Manufacturing Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Jun. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 155,084
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1979, 54-71687
Int. a.3 B25B 23/145
U.S. a. 173—12 3 Claims
11 ft
1. A pneumatic impact apparatus connected to a compressed
air source, said apparatus comprising: a rotary air motor and
means defining a first air passage connecting said air source
and said motor;
a torsion bar having a first and a second end and connected
at said first end to said motor for rotation therewith, said
torsion bar having an exhaust passage directed through
the side thereof at one of said first and second ends;
a spindle case having third and fourth ends surrounding said
torsion bar and held at said third end to said torsion bar
only at the other of said first and second ends for move-
ment therewith, said fourth end of said spindle case being
free for rotation with said other of said first and second
ends of said torsion bar when a torque is applied to said
first end of said torsion bar resisted by an external force at
said second end, said spindle case having an exhaust pas-
■^ sage opening to the atmosphere normally aligned with
said exhaust passage of said torsion bar for allowing air to
pass therethrough when said fourth end of said spindle
case is rotating relative to said one of said first and second
ends of said torsion bar out of alignment with said torsion
bar;
a two-position main valve, located in said first air passage,
for controlling the air flowing to said motor from the air
source, said main valve including first and second dia-
phrams responsive to air pressure applied thereto, for
respectively opening and closing said main valve to re-
spectively allow and block the flow of air to said motor;
fluid control means, having a first inlet, first and second
outlets and first and second control orifices, responsive to
air pressure applied to said first and second control ori-
fices for switching the flow of air entering said first inlet to
said first and second outlets, respectively; said fluid con-
trol means having first and second pilot passages, said first
and second outlets respectively communicating with said
first and second diaphrams through said first and second
pilot passages, respectively;
throttling valve means, having a second inlet, a third outlet
communicating with said exhaust passage of said torsion
bar, and a fourth outlet communicating with said second
control orifice of said fluid control means, for controlling
the flow of air from said second inlet to said exhaust
passage of said torsion bar and for reducing the air pres-
sure at said second control orifice to less than the air
pressure at said second inlet;
control valve means, located in said first passage between
said air source and said motor, for controlling air flow
from the air source to said second inlet of said throttling
means, said first inlet of said fluid control means, said first
control orifice of said fluid control means and said motor,
said control valve means having a third inlet in said first
passage for communicating with the air source, a fifth
outlet for communicating with said motor when said main
valve is open, and a sixth outlet communicating with said
first control orifice of said fluid control means, said con-
trol valve means being continuously moveable between
first, second and third successively adjacent positions, said
control valve means blocking communication between
said third inlet and said fifth and sixth outlets in said first
position, said fifth and sixth outlets communicating with
said third inlet and with each other when said control
valve means is in said second position, said third inlet
communicating with said fifth outlet andi^^d control
valve means blocking communication between said fifth
and sixth outlets and said third inlet, when said control
valve means is in said third position said fifth outlet com-
municating with said second inlet of said throttling means
and said first inlet of said fluid control means;
whereby when said control valve means is moved from said
first to said second position, air pressure is applied through
said control valve means to said first inlet and said first
orifice of said fluid control means to direct air from said
first inlet through said first outlet to apply pressure to said
first diaphram to open said main valve so as to allow
airflow to said air motor to drive said motor to apply
torque to said torsion bar and said spindle case;
whereby when said control valve means is moved from said
second position to said third position, air pressure to said
first orifice of said fluid control means is cut off, airflow is
directed through said throttling valve means to said tor-
sion bar and through said exhaust passage, the air pressure
at said second control orifice of said fluid control means
being at a reduced value insufficient to switch the flow of
air entering said first inlet of said fluid control means to
said second outlet thereof so that air pressure on said first
diaphram is maintained and said motor continues to be
driven; and
whereby if rotation of said torsion bar is blocked by an
external force while said control valve means is in said
third position, said fourth end of said spindle case is ro-
tated relative to said one of said first and second ends of
said torsion bar, whereby said exhaust passage of said
spindle case is instantaneously closed so that airflow
through said third outlet of said throttling valve means is
interrupted so that air pressure at said second control
orifice of said fluid control means is increased to switch
the flow of air entering said first inlet of said fluid control
means to said second outlet thereof, so that pressure to
said second diaphram is applied to close said main valve to
shut off said motor; return of said torsion bar to its normal
position relative to said spindle case then opening said
exhaust valve resulting in said main valve again opening to
allow said motor to be driven by airflow from the air
source.
4,379,493
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING
WIRELINE KINKING IN A DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
SYSTEM
Gene Thibodeaux, 7036 Linden Qr., Anchorage, Ak. 99502
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,387
Int. a.' E21B 7/04. 7/12. 47/024. 47/12
U.S. a. 175--«1 45 Claims
1. In a wireline directional drilling system including a drill
string having a bit and downhole motor for rotating the bit, a
bent angle sub and a jar and a wireline directional tool
mounted within the drill string adjacent the bent angle sub
with a wireline extending from the directional tool upward to
a surface location wherein the improvement comprises:
a landing sub coaxially mounted within the drill string above
the jar and having at least one longitudinal passage there-
through for permitting drilling fluid to pass within the
330
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
drill string, through said landing sub and through the
downhole motor and bit; and
stop means connected to the wireline for engaging said
landing sub and supporting the wireline between said
landing sub and the directional tool while concomitantly
permitting drilling fluid to pass through said landing sub,
said stop means being connected to the wireline in a posi-
means being aligned with said slot in the predetermined
position;
block means for insertion through said slot and into the flat
on said restricting means; and
fastening means for fastening said block means to said re-
stricting means to secure said cylindrical body in the
predetermined position.
26. A method for assembling a stabilizer for a drill string in
a well bore comprising the steps of:
positioning cylindrical members in flats formed on diametri-
cally opposed sides of a section in the drill string,, the
cylindrical members having an outer surface with a flat
formed therein, the outer surface forming a continuation
of the outer surface of the drill string section when posi-
tioned;
fitting a cylindrical body over the section of the drill string,
the cylindrical body having a plurality of well bore
contact surfaces formed thereon and aligning slots formed
therethrough with the flats in said cylindrical members in
the drill string section to place the cylindrical body in a
predetermined position, the cylindrical body preventing
removal of the cylindrical members from the drill string
section when in the predetermined position;
inserting locking blocks into each of the slots and into the
aligned flats and securing the locking blocks to the cylin-
der members to secure the cylindrical body in the prede-
termined position.
tion to permit a degree of slack in the wireline between the
landing sub and the directional tool in excess of the maxi-
mum stroke of the jar but with sufficient tautness in the
wireline between said landing sub and the directional tool
to minimize coiling of the wireline adjacent the jar and
reduce the tendency of the jar to kink the wireline during
dynamic action thereof
4^79,494
REPLACEABLE DRILL STABILIZER SLEEVE
Adel Sheshtawy, Norman, Okla., assignor to International Pe-
troleum Engineering Corporation, Noble, Okla.
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,490
Int. a.3 E21B 17/10: E21C 9/00
U.S. a. 175-325 27 Qaims
4,379,495
WEIGHING SCALE WITH LOW SUSCEPTIBILITY TO
VIBRATION
Michael H. Cocks, and Gary A. Evans, both of Dayton, Ohio,
assignors to Hobart Corporation, Troy, Ohio
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,212
Int. a.3 GOIG 23/10
U.S. a. 177-1 8 Qaims
rV25
'°i_. *°}
>°7
ecu.
r
— «
tmufia
•*
riLTiii
— --•
ANALOG TO
DKITAL
coNvcirrcii
~ -|
a)-'
X
SCALE IN UOriOM
^/| WEIGHT »EUfilNC
CIRCUIT
K<LE in MCUOE
MOTION WEIGHT
DECISION READING
1. A method for determining a representative average
weight reading based on a series of weight readings from a
scale subject to vibrations comprising the steps of
generating signals at regular intervals representative of the
weight readings from said scale, and
averaging the weight signals occurring during one complete
vibrational cycle, or integral multiple thereof.
1. An apparatus for stabilizing a drill string in a well bore
comprising:
a drill string section for placement in the drill string and
having at least one flat formed therein;
restricting means for insertion into the flat on said section to
restrict movement parallel to the longitudinal axis of said
section, said restricting means having a flat formed
therein;
a cylindrical body having at least one well bore contact
surface thereon with at least one slot formed through said
body, said cylindrical body for mounting at a predeter-
mined position on said section, the flat in said restricting
4,379,496
WEIGHT MEASURING BALANCE
Jean Godat, Olivet, and Jean Paget, Breuillet St. Yon, both of
France, assignors to Fonderie A Ateliers des Sablons, France
FUed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,400
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 28, 1980, 80 06975
Int. a.3 GOID 19/22
U.S. a. 177—25 5 Claims
1. A weight measuring balance for proportioning a liquid
product mixture from cumulative formulas in weight furnish-
ing the weight of each of the products added, cumulative with
the weight of the products previously added, including a pan
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
331
supported by a gauge which furnishes a signal representative of
the weight of the load, comprising:
a. a first display for displaying the weight detected by said
gauge, which is equal to the weight of the load of materi-
als already on the pan;
b. a keyboard on which is entered the weight of a new
cumulative weight of products to be on said pan, which is
indicated in the cumulative formula, which weight corre-
sponds to the sum of the quantity of products already
loaded, plus the quantity of the new product to be loaded;
c. means for subtracting the weight of the products already
loaded on said pan from the new cumulative weight of
s
products to obtain only the weight of the new material or
product to be loaded;
d. a second display for initially displaying the weight of the
new material or product to be loaded as determined by
said subtracting means;
e. means for displaying on said second display a decreasing
value from the initially displayed value of said second
display in terms of the quantity of products loaded on the
pan, so that a return to zero of said second display indi-
cates that a given quantity of product has been loaded; and
{. a signalling means for allowing a visual indication of the
approach to zero of the weight of the quantity which
should be loaded on said pan.
energizing means for driving the vehicle along said guidepath,
the improvement which comprises:
marker means on said floor surface a spaced distance from
said intersecting portion of said guidepath for indicating
the proximity of said intersecting portion on said guide-
path;
first sensing means on said first vehicle to detect said marker
means and for generating a first proximity signal respon-
sive thereto;
first transmitter means on said first vehicle and connected to
said first sensing means for transmitting a polling signal
responsive to said first proximity signal;
first receiver means on said first vehicle for detecting spatial
communication signals generated by said second vehicle;
second sensing means on said second vehicle for detecting
said marker means and generating a second proximity
signal responsive thereto;
second receiver means on said second vehicle for receiving
said polling signal;
second transmitter means on said second vehicle for trans-
mitting a blocking signal in response to said polling signal
when said second vehicle is within said potential conges-
tion zone;
said first receiver means on said first vehicle is responsive to
said blocking signal for generating a stop signal corre-
sponding thereto; and
first control means on said first vehicle coupled to said first
receiver means for disabling said energizing means of said
first vehicle in response to said stop signal generated by
said first receiver means until such time as said blocking
signal is no longer received by said first receiver means,
whereby said first vehicle will automatically stop when
approaching said potential congestion zone as long as said
second vehicle is passing therethrough.
4,379,497
VEHICLE COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM
Thomas E. Hainsworth, Holland, and Robert W, Houskamp,
Grand Rapids, both of Mich., assignors to Bell A Howell,
Company, Chicago, 111.
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,241
Int. a.3 B62D 1/28
U.S. a. 180—168 17 Qaims
4,379,498
SAFETY DEVICE FOR LADDERS
Richard H. Krusmark, 812 Pembroke Ave., Wabasha, Minn.
55981
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 129,118, Apr. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 278,988
Int. a.^ E06C 7/48
U.S. a. 182—107 21 Qainu
1. In an automatic guidance system having first and second
self-propelled vehicles adapted to follow a predetermined
guidepath having an intersecting portion defining a potential
congestion zone on a floor surface, each of said vehicles having
1. A safety device for a ladder having a pair of spaced side
rails joined by spaced rungs, said safety device comprising:
(a) a holding member;
(b) means for rototably fastening said holding member to the
rung of the ladder, for rotational movement about a longi-
tudinal axis of the rung; and
(c) means for gripping a cylindrical object, said gripping
means connected to said holding member in a manner
wherein said gripping means is disposed to lie generally
perpendicular to the rung, whereby when the ladder is
placed against a vertically positioned cylindrical object,
said gripping means engage the cylindrical object along a
length generally parallel to a longitudinal axis of the cylin-
drical object. ^
332
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4^79 499
EMERGENCY POWER ELEVATOR RECOVERY AND
SERVICE SYSTEM
Frederick H. Nowak, Southington, Conn., assignor to Otis Ele-
vator Company, Fannington, Conn.
Filed JuJ. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,843
Int. Cl.i B66B 5/02
U.S. a. 187-29 R 10 ciai^
1. An elevator system including a group controller means
and a plurality of elevators operable either in response to
normal electrical power provided by a feeder or in response to
emergency electrical power in the absence of normal power at
said feeder;
each elevator including a car movable between landings of a
shaftway m a building, motion means for providing and
arresting motion of the related car in its shaftway, and car
controller means, for registering requests for service to said
landings, for providing car control signals indicative of said
requests for service and of conditions of said car, and for
controlling said motion means and providing access between
said car and said landings in response to said car control
signals, for monitoring said feeder and for providing in
response to loss of power at said feeder and to a signal indic-
ative of said group controller selecting said elevator to run,
signals to said motion means to cause said car to approach
and provide access to said designated landing and either a
first signal indicative of providing access to said designated
landing or a second signal indicative of failure to provide
access to said designated landing after a determined time
period;
said group controller means comprising means for exchanging
signals with each of said car controller means, for monitor-
ing said feeder and providing, to said car controller means,
in response to loss of normal power at said feeder, select
signals indicative of successive ones of said elevators se-
lected to run on emergency power to recover said elevators
to a designated landing, the select signal for each elevator
ending in response to receipt of either said first signal or said
second signal from the related car controller means, for
providing a phase two signal in response to receipt from
each of said car controller means of either said first signal or
said second signal, and for providing to at least one of said
car controller means said select signal indicative of the re-
lated elevator being designated to run in response to said
phase two signal; characterized by:
each of said car controller means comprising means for provid-
ing a third signal indicative of the related car not being at
said designated landing, responsive to the absence of said
select signal for rendering the related elevator inoperative,
responsive to concurrence of said second signal and said
phase two signal for a given time interval to cease providing
said second signal, and responsive to the absence of said first
signal concurrently with the presence of said select signal to
cause said car to approach and provide access to said desig-
nated landing; and
said group controller means comprising means responsive to
the absence of said second signal concurrently with the
presence of said third signal from the same one of said car
controller means and said phase two signal for providing a
select signal to said one car controller means, whereby any
car not recovered prior to provision of the phase two signal
may be periodically selected to run in an attempt to recover
the car to the designated landing after provision of the phase
two signal.
4 379 500
PARKING BRAKE CABLE ADJUSTING DEVICE
Kyoichi Kamino, Fujisawa, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,345
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 25, 1980, 55-
Int. a.3 F16D 65/54
U.S. a. 188-196 B 4a^^
1. A parking brake cable adjusting device comprising:
a brake lever;
a control cable interconnecting said brake lever and a brake-
operating mechanism;
a ratchet mechanism interconnecting a first end section of
said control cable and said brake lever and permitting said
control cable first end section to advance in one axial
direction relative to said brake lever thereby taking up any
slack in said control cable; and
biasing means for urging said control cable first end section
in said one axial direction;
said ratchet mechanism including a series of ratchet teeth
formed on said control cable first end section along the
axis thereof and a pawl pivotally mounted on said brake
lever in a position to engage said ratchet teeth;
said control cable having a flange mounted thereon at a
location adjacent said control cable first end section, said
biasing means including a tension spring whose ends are
respectively attached to said brake lever and said control
cable fiange.
4,379,501
VENTILATED DISK BRAKE
Yutaka Hagiwara, Figisawa; Toshiaki Takada, and Tetu
Yamazakj, both of Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Nis-
san Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
FUed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,620
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1980, 55-22811
Int. aj F16D 65/847
U.S. a. 188-218 XL 12 Qaims
1. A ventilated disk brake comprising:
a pair of brake pads;
a rotor having a brake-pad engaging portion with a pair of
brake-pad engaging walls arranged to be pressed between
and by the pair of brake pads;
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
333
a plurality of cooling ribs extending radially between the
pair of brake-pad engaging walls, the spacing and thick-
4,379,503
GRAVITY ROLLERWAY CONVEYOR
Andrew T. Komylak, Hamilton, Ohio, assignor to Komylak
Corporation, Hamilton, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 782,936, Mar. 30, 1977, abandoned.
This appUcation Sep. 6, 1978, Ser. No. 940,078
Int. C1.5 B65G 13/00
U.S. a. 193—37 5 Claims
ness pattern of said ribs being randomized so that any
identical spacing and thickness pattern is not repeated.
4,379,502
WINCH CLUTCH
Harold M. Ball, Broken Arrow, and Robert G. Beach, Tulsa,
both of Okla., assignors to Ramsey Winch Company, Tulsa,
Okla.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,349
Int. a.3 F16D 11/12; B66D 1/00
U.S. a. 192—71 * Claims
3. A roller, comprising: a substantially rigid hub having
bearing means for rotating the roller about an axis; an outer
annular tire at least partially extending radially outwardly from
the remainder of the roller to provide a load engaging surface,
with the annular tire having an outer peripheral surface and an
inner peripheral surface; said hub supportingly engaging said
annular tire inner peripheral surface; said annular tie, when
supported on its hub, being of an elastomeric material having a
relaxed tension that is uniform throughout its cross-section
when removed from said hub and turned inside out; when said
tire is removed from said hub in a relaxed state inside out with
respect to its positioning on said hub, the inner diameter of said
tire being substantially smaller than the outer diameter of said
hub; each of said tires having a maximum peripheral tension at
its outer peripheral surface uniformly changing along a radius
to a maximum compression at its inner peripheral surface to
constitute means to provide ? rolling resistance at substantially
zero speed that is substantially less than the rolling resistance it
would exhibit if the annular tire was turned inside out from its
mounted position and replaced on said hub.
4,379,504
ARTICLE FEEDING DEVICE
Sandro Salicini, Bologna, Italy, assignor to Carle A Montanari
S.p.A., Bologna, Italy
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,711
Qaims priority, appUcation Italy, Dec. 21, 1979, 15339/79[U)
Int. CI.5 B65G 47/12
U.S. a. 198—455 8 Claims
1. In a winch, a clutch assembly comprising a housing, a
power shaft having four slots spaced equidistantly on the
surface of the said power shaft, a cylindrical clutch housing
having a retainer plate mounted on one end of the said cylindri-
cal clutch housing with at least one dowel pin and at least two
steel balls located in said cylindrical clutch housing, the said
cylindrical clutch housing being attached to a cable drum; a
cylindrical clutch locking ring having a pair of grooves
therein, being slidably mounted around the said cylindrical
clutch housing, the said cylindrical clutch locking ring being
actuated by a yoke pivotly mounted on the clutch housing; the
said yoke being attached to a clutch handle.
1. A device for feeding articles in orderly succession for
further processing, comprising
(a) a horizontally disposed, circular disc having a crown of
recesses spaced along its circumference for receiving said
articles;
(b) means for rotating said disc;
(c) the surface of said disc being subdivided into
334
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
(i) a larger receiving portion acting as a feed reservoir
completely enclosed by a fixedcircumferential side wall
extending along the periphery of said disc, and a fixed
partition waJl extending across the interior of said disc;
and
(ii) a smaller delivery portion located outside of said feed
reservoir;
(d) a distributor dish of generally conical shape which cov-
ers a portion of said receiving portion and has an arcuate
circumferential portion adjacent to the inner periphery of
said crown of recesses, said distributor dish presenting, in
top plan view, the approximate shape of a sector with
rounded corners, the arc of said sector being concentric
with the rotation axis of said disc and extending close to
the inner periphery of said crown of recesses, and the
radial edge of said sector located upstream in the direction
of rotation of said disc being curved in a convex manner,
while the radial edge of said sector located downstream in
the direction of rotation of said disc is curved in a concave
manner; and
(e) means for driving said distributor dish in a rotary oscillat-
ing path in a plane parallel to the surface of said disc about
a vertical axis;
(0 whereby said articles fed into said feed reservoir are
agitated sufficiently to prevent clogging of said reservoir
and to facilitate their orderiy reception in said recesses.
4,379,506
CATHETER ASSEMBLY
Alan C. Davidson, 15 Edgehill Dr., Woodbridge, Conn. 06525
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,239
Int. a.3 B65D 27/36. 85/08
U.S. a. 206-364 ,0 Qaims
4,379 505
INTEGRATED ORCUIT CARRIER
James C. Alemanni, Oceanside, Calif., assignor to Gibson-Egan
Company, Duarte, Calif.
Filed Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,000
Int. CIJ B65D 73/02. 85/42
U.S. a. 206-329 ,0 Qaims
1. A carrier for an integrated circuit Hat pack having a body
with a plurality of leads projecting from opposite ends of the
body, the carrier comprising a base; an opening in the base for
receivmg the body of the flat pack; end walls at opposite ends
of the openmg having a plurality of grooves for receiving the
leads of the nat pack; resilient retaining fingers on the base
extendmg generally into comers of the opening, the retaining
fingers having fianged tips in which the fianges project toward
the opening transversely to the length of the grooves at oppo-
site ends of the opening; separate ridges on the base extending
into opposite sides of the opening for holding the bottom edges
of a fiat pack body inserted in the opening; the retaining fingers
being bendable away from the opening, under application of an
external bending force, for allowing the leads of the fiat pack
to bypass the bent retaining fingers and fit into the grooves at
opposite ends of the opening, the retaining fingers returning to
a normal locking position, when the external bending force is
released, for positioning the flanged tips of the fingers over
adjacent leads of the flat pack for retainingjthe flat back in the
opening of the carrier.
1. A package assembly for storing a device such as catheters
and the like in a sterile manner while enabling manual removal
of the device without breaking its sterility, comprising:
a bottom layer underiying the device;
a top layer overiying the device and the bottom layer and
being releasably attached to the top layer to retain the
device between the layers, said bottom and top layers
being formed of a material enabling the protection of the
device against contamination, said top layer further being
sufficiently flexible while attached to the bottom layer to
enable one to manually grip the device through said top
layer while attached to the bottom layer, said top layer
being separable from said bottom layer while gripping the
device with one hand through the top layer and tearing
away the bottom layer from the top layer with the other
hand;
said top layer being provided with a backing located on a
side opposite to the bottom layer, said backing being
attached to said top layer at spaced locations selected to
enable said one hand to fit between the backing and the
top layer to permit the back of said hand to restrain said
top layer as the bottom layer is torn away in a direction
away from said hand, whereby upon said layer separation
said device is exposed for use while being held in a sterile
manner by said one hand through the separated top layer.
4,379,507
OPTICAL DISK CASSETTE
Raymond Llabres, Paris, France, assignor to Thomson-CSF,
Paris, France
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,112
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 7, 1980, 80 05197
Int. a.3 B65D 85/51 85/02; GllB 5/16. 17/00
U.S. a. 206-444 9 QauM
26. 21 ,3 ,20
24
M,' 25' 23
^
r/!777777A
22
1. A cassette for an optical disk of the type comprising a
plate possessing a first circular cavity for taking an optical disk
and an envelope for containing the said plate, the envelope
having an opening through which the plate may be inserted
and the disk possessing a recording area on each side defined
by two concentric circles of given first and second diameters,
a second annular cavity being provided at the bottom of said
first cavity of inner and outer diameters respectively less than
and greater than those of the first and second given diameters,
and in which a third cavity also of annular shape and of dimen-
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
335
sions virtually equal to those of said second cavity is provided
in the inner surface of the envelope cover, said second and
third cavities being concentric when the plate is inserted in the
envelope so that only unrecorded portions of said disk touch
said plate or envelope independent of the orientation of said
cassette in space.
4 379 508
NESTING TRAY WITH STACKING KEYED INTERLOCK
Daniel R. Miller, Cincinnati; Thomas Deaton, Mason, and Ro-
bert Royer, Cincinnati, all of Ohio, assignors to Nestier Cor-
poration, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,376
Int. a.3 B65D 21/04
U.S. CI. 206—507 8 Claims
^j='Si^
li.j
1
^^
and differing from said first plurality of said trays substan-
tially only in having a second unique pattern of said web
means and corresf>onding said notches of said upper and
said lower stacking elements so that when said second
plurality of said trays are stacked on and vertically aligned
with one another each of said web means will be received
within a notch of the adjacent tray; and
said first plurality of said trays unique pattern having a
difference between said second plurality of said trays
unique pattern such that said difference prevents the seat-
ing of said ridge of any one of said first plurality of said
trays within said groove means of any one of said second
plurality of said trays.
4,379,509
HIGH EFTiaENCY SORTING APPARATUS
Lorenz Bohle, Im Luren 5, 4722 Ennigerloh, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,350
^ Int. a.3 B07C 5/34
U.S. a. 209—598 17 aaims
1. A plurality of trays, comprising:
each tray being of a one piece construction molded from
synthetic resin material, having a rectangular structure,
parallel opposed side walls, a bottom wall and parallel
opposed end walls, said side walls and said end walls
extending vertically upward from said bottom walls, said
end walls having a height greater than said side walls, and
said end walls having free upper and lower edges,
said side walls and said end walls having surface means
formed thereon for enabling said trays to be stacked in a
vertically aligned position, and for enabling said trays to
be sucked in a nested position when one of said trays is
rotated at least 90 degrees relative to another of said trays
about an axis perpendicular to said bottom walls from said
stacked position;
said surface means including upper stacking elements
formed integrally with said end walls extending along said
upper edges of said end walls, and lower stacking elements
formed integrally with said end walls at said lower edges
of said end walls;
one of said upper and lower stacking elements comprising a
ridge and the other of said upper and lower stocking
elements comprising groove means wide enough and deep
enough to receive said ridge;
web means extending across the width of said groove means
for preventing the seating in said groove means of por-
tions of said ridge Which are vertically aligned with said
web means when said upper and said lower stacking ele-
ments of adjacent stocked trays engage;
said ridges including notches having dimensions that corre-
spond with the dimensions of said web means such that the
engagement of said web means within said notches per-
mits the seating of said ridge within said groove means of
adjacent stocked trays;
a first plurality of said trays being identical and having a
unique pattern of said web means and corresponding said
notches of said upper and said lower stacking elements so
that when said first plurality of said trays are stacked on
and vertically aligned with one another each of said web
means will be received within a notch of the adjacent tray;
a second plurality of said trays being identical to each other
1. Apparatus for sorting items according to size compnsing
a pair of opposed sorting discs having facing sides with the
spacing between said sides varying radially of said discs, means
for depositing items to be sorted to between said facing sides of
said sorting discs and means interposed at various radial loca-
tions between said facing sides for withdrawing said items
separately from between said sorting discs in accordance with
the size of said items; said depositing means being located to
permit said items to fall by force of gravity to between said
facing sides of said sorting discs; said depositing means com-
prising contoiner means, oscillating conveyor means for re-
ceiving said items from said container means, and a pair of feed
discs having sides generally aligned with the facing sides of
said sorting discs, said feed discs being arranged to receive said
items from said conveyor means between said facing sides
thereof and to deposit said items to between said facing sides of
said sorting discs.
4,379,510
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SORTING STONES
Douglas H. Ziegel, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,730
Int. C\? B07C 5/00: GOIN 27/00
U.S. a. 209—643 8 Claims
1. An apparatus for sorting stones contained within a supply
reservoir by viewing said stones individually through a micro-
scope comprising:
a pick-up tube having a first opening disposed at one end
thereof, said first opening adapted to form a substantially
airtight seal with one of said stones,
a vacuum source connected to a second opening disposed at
the other end of said pick-up tube, said second opening
being in communication with said first opening,
support means supported by a platform and connected to the
other end of said pick-up tube for moving the one end of
said tube between a first position disposed at a transfer
336
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
location whereat said one end is exposed to the stones
within the supply reservoir, and a second position outside
said reservoir whereat said one end is positioned exactly
within the field of view of an objective of said microscope
such that a stone held adjacent said first opening is dis-
posed precisely at the focal length of said microscope
objective, and
4.379,512
CLOSURE HAVING AN IMPROVED LINER
Hidehiko Ohmi, Hiratsuka; Katsuhisa KiUgawa, Kasugai; Shoji
Morimoto, Komaki; Tateo Kubo, Hiratsuka; Misao Ohno,
Komakj, and Seitaro Takahashi, Komaki, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Toyo Seikan Kaisha, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,398
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 24, 1979, 54-151334
Int. a.3 B65D 53/04
U.S. a. 215-327 4 claims
a sliding tray adapted to support said supply reservoir along
with a reject reservoir and an accept reservoir, said tray
attached to said platform by means for sliding said tray
back and forth to allow each of said reservoirs to be posi-
tioned at said transfer location wherein the one end of said
pick-up tube, while at said first position, has access
thereto.
4,379,511
DEVICE FOR DRAWING LIQUIDS FROM CONTAINERS
Mario F. del Fabro, Santiago, Chile, assignor to Fiora del Fabro
Y Cia. Ltda., Santiago, Chile
FUed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,196
Oaims priority, application Chile, May 9, 1980, 308/80
Int. C1.3 B65D 83/00
U.S. a. 215-1 A 13 Qaims
1. A closure including a metal shell having a circular top
surface and a substantially cylindrical skirt depending from the
peripheral edge of the top surface, and a synthetic resin liner
press formed on the inside top surface of the shell with the liner
having at least first and second concentric annular projections
with said first annular projection being positioned radially
outwardly of said second annular projection and with the inner
peripheral surface of said first annular projection adapted to
seal with the outer peripheral surface of a container including
a mouth having an upper horizontal surface; the improvement
comprising in that said second annular projection has a radial
thickness such decreases towards a projection tip at the end
thereof and has a radially outward peripheral surface inclined
radially inwardly towards said tip with said tip adapted to
initially contact the horizontal upper surface of a container to
be bent inwardly when the shell and liner are sealed to a con-
Uiner and said radially outwardly peripheral surface adapted
to be bent radially inwardly when positioned against an upper
surface of a mouth of a container to form a seal therewith and
in that a third concentric annular projection is positioned
radially inwardly of said second annular projection and is
adapted to initially contact an inner peripheral edge of the
mouth when the shell and liner are sealed to a container and
then to be bent inwardly to be spaced from the inner peripheral
edge of the mouth. ^ .? '
4,379,513
PRESSURE VESSEL FASTENING MEANS
Ernest P. Basterfield, Bedfordview, and Llewellyn P. Baster-
field, Silvermont, both of South Africa, assignors to Chern
Developments (Proprietary) Limited, Edenvale, South Afiica
Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,727
Claims priority, application South Africa, Jun. 30, 1980,
80/3903
Int. a.3 B65D 45/16
U.S. a. 220—325 5 Qaims
1. A pressure vessel comprising a container, a lid sealingly
engageable with the container, and means for securing the lid
to the container in an air tight manner, the securing means
comprising a plurality of brackets on the lid and a plurality of
— clamping devices which are on the container, each bracket
1 A c»r«%»y ti,rr...«i, .^Ki^i. li^..;^ w_ J including two supports which are spaced from each other and
1 J,t onl Tx Ih^* n 1^ . M'T ^^'"Pr"^ '* «''«^ '° 'he lid, extending radially outwardly from the lid, the
least one extended open channel member havmg flotation outer end of each support including an upwardly extending
means connected to said channel member which flotation formation, and each clamping device including a threaded
means extends the full length of said channel member for shank which is pivotally movable into the space between the
causmg the device to float at a predetennined level within the two supports, and a member threadly engaged with the shank
''^"•** which is screwed down to secure the lid to the container, the
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
337
upwardly extending formations on the supports permitting a 4^79,515
degree of release of the clamping device and preventing piv- AUTOMATIC DISPENSER FOR RINSE WATER
otal movement of the shank out of the space when the threaded ^, ^ ^ ^ ^ „« ^'^P'^^u .^^ r». c ^ u/..k(..
Marvin S. Towsend, 1365 Potomac Heights Dr., Fort Washing-
ton, Md. 20744
V - ' FUed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,720
Int. a.3 B67D 5/08
U.S. a. 222—52 10 Chums
member is below a first position on the shank, so that excess
pressure can escape from the container while the lid is still
secured to the container.
4,379,514
BLADE HOLDER AND DISPENSER
Edward J. Joffe, Linden, N.J., assignor to Howard Strauss,
Union, N.J., a part interest
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,994
Int. a.3 B65G 59/00
U.S. a. 221—279 8 Qaims
1. An article for automatically dispensing laundry additive
during the rinse cycle in an automatic washing machine, com-
prising:
a reservoir having a collapsible wall and a quantity of laun-
dry additive, said wall being collapsible during the spin
cycle of the automatic washing machine;
a rigid receptacle for receiving the laundry additive and for
dispensing the laundry additive; and
a communication means for passing the laundry additive
from said reservoir to said receptacle during the spin
cycle.
4,379,516
DEVICE FOR DISPENSING FUSED MATERIALS SUCH
AS THERMOPLASTIC ADHESIVES
Rene Barlogis, Vagney, France, assignor to Societe Francaise
d'Agrafage Industriel • Sofragraf, Vagney, France
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,739
Qaims priority, application France, Dec. 14, 1979, 79 30718
Int. a.' B67D 5/62
U.S. a. 222—146 HE 11 Qaims
1. A holder and dispenser for replaceable knife blades com-
prising:
a back plate having a rectangular main portion;
a cover having a front face, opposed side faces and opposed
end faces, said cover mating with said back plate to define
therewith a magazine for receiving a plurality of blades in
stacked relation, at least one end face having an aperture
extending partially thereacross from one side face, the
opposite side face having a blade discharge slot immedi-
ately adjacent said one end face, the front face having an
opening extending the length thereof and, on each side of
said opening and extending the length thereof, a rail re-
cessed from the front surface of said front face; and
a manually movable follower slideably received in said
opening of said front face, said follower including a plate
portion projecting into said magazine and shoulder por-
tions slidingly engaging each of the rails of the sides of the
opening.
1. A device for dispensing a fused material such as a thermo-
plastic adhesive, comprising a housing equipped with a heating
chamber including a delivery nozzle and an inlet tube for
progressively introducing a rod of the material to be dispensed
into said heating chamber, whereby the material of the intro-
duced rod is progressively fused and expelled outside of the
heating chamber through said delivery nozzle, a clamping
member arranged so as to catch the rod, so that said clamping
member is carried away with said rod when a push is exerted
on said rod, and means for generating a resilient return force
when said clamping member is carried away with said rod, so
that said rod is brought rearwards under the action of said
return force when a push is no longer exerted on said rod.
338
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4^79,517
MAGNETIC TAPE RUNNING SYSTEM
Sell Miyakawa; Manabu Ikeda, both of Yokohama; Shin Ha-
shizuine, Kamakura, and Kazunori lijima, Shimoinayoshi, all
of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,615
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 29, 1979, 54-138791
Int. a.^B65H 17/22
U.S. a. 226-189 5 Qaims
26 25
tween opposed side walls of the box and two vertical arm
portions respectively adapted to abut opposed end areas of
said opposed side walls, only one of said vertical arm
portions being foldably secured to a portion of one edge of
said horizontal bottom portion, and
(3) a second horizontally U-shaped vertical divider having a
vertical bight portion adapted to traverse the space be-
tween said opposed side walls of the box in horizontally
spaced relation to the bight portion of said first vertical
divider and two vertical wall portions respectively
adapted to abut the other opposed end areas of said op-
posed side walls of the box, only one of said vertical wall
portions of said second vertical divider being foldably
secured to a portion of the other edge of said horizontal
base portion.
2. In a magnetic tape running system in which said magnetic
tape is guided by guide rollers and tape guides such that said
magnetic tape runs along a cylinder lead with a selected inlet
angle so as to effect magnetic recording and reproduction: the
improvement comprising means including an adjustable tape
guide for guiding the lower edge of said magnetic tape to
determine the vertical position thereof and a guide roller hav-
ing a stopper for limiting axial movement of said guide roller
around which said tape passes, the inlet side and outlet side of
said magnetic tape to said guide roller being inclined down-
wardly to the inlet side and upwardly to the outlet side respec-
tively at a predetermined angle (0) to the line normal to the
axis of said guide roller, and means for finely adjusting said
predetermined angle {6) by moving up and down said adjust-
able tape guide to cause said magnetic tape to move along the
selected inlet angle of said cylinder lead.
4,379,519
PAPER BAG STIFFENER
Tom W. Sherwood, Las Vegas, Ne?., assignor to Unique Prod-
ucts Company, Inc., Las Vegas, Nev.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,540
Int. C\? B65D 33/02
U.S. a. 229-55 3 claims
4,379,518
THREE CELL DIVIDER FOR CARTON
Edwin C. Taylor, Sr., Toledo, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Illinois,
Inc., Toledo, Ohio
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,824
Int. a.^ B65D 5/48
U.S. a. 229-15 4 Qaims
loV
v-»
1. In combination, a bag adapted to be maintained in an open
position or a folded position, the bag having front, rear, and
opposing side panels defining a rectangular horizontal cross-
section when the bag is in the open position, upper edges of
said panels defining a bag mouth, the opposing side panels
having the intermediate vertical creases therein, and
stiffening members, each having a length greater than the
horizontal dimension of the side panel of the bag, remov-
ably mounted over the upper edges of the opposing side
panels to maintain the bag mouth in the open position.
1. A three cell corrugated divider for insertion in an open
top of a rectangular box comprising a single blank folded to
define:
(1) a horizontal bottom portion insertable in the box and
conforming to the bottom of the box;
(2) a first horizontally U-shaped vertical divider having the
vertical bight portion adapted to traverse the space be-
4,379,520
TEMPERATURE REGULATING SYSTEM FOR AIR
CONDITIONING OR HEATING PLANTS, PREFERABLY
IN RAILWAY VEHICLES
Peter Tomsu, Vienna, Austria, assignor to Alex Friedmann
Kommanditgesellschaft, Vienna, Austria
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,211
Qaims priority, application Austria, Aug. 6, 1980, 4057/80
Int. Q.^ G05D 23/00: GOIK 7/00
U.S. Q. 236—49 6 Qaims
1. A temperature-regulating system for an air conditioning
or heating plant which includes
a programmable digital processing unit which includes at
least one input and at least one output, and
a value-measuring unit which includes at least one tempera-
ture sensor, a capacitor, a switching element, a switching
means and a reference voltage-generating means, each
temperature sensor being connected to a capacitor so as to
charge the capacitor by a current proportional to the
measured temperature, the switching element being con-
nected to the output of the digital processing unit and to
the capacitor so as to cause the capacitor to discharge at a
rate determined by the digital processing unit, the switch-
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
339
ing means including an output connected to the input of
the digital processing unit and two inputs, the capacitor
being connected to one input of the switching means and
the other input of switching means being connected to the
reference voltage-generating means, the digital processing
unit acting via the switching element to discharge the
the top edge of said inclined surface is at least at the level of the
foot of said rail; and (c) a rail locking element adapted for
location between the clipholder and the rail Hange, the locking
element interfitting with said clipholder in a wedge-like rela-
tionship such that movement of the locking element in the
longitudinal direction of the rail is translated into a holding
force perpendicular to the edge of the rail flange, said locking
element being formed of an electrically insulating material and
(d) an insulator pad for location between the rail and the tie.
I p^-
ICi
I
I
capacitor and also repeatedly checking the output of the
switching means for a signal change, the number of such
checks commencing from the beginning of measurement
to a change in the signal representing digital values corre-
sponding to the measured temperature, the switching
means changing its output signal when the capacitor volt-
age reaches the reference voltage.
4,379,522
FOLDING SPRAY BOOM ASSEMBLY
Marion D. Elliott, Woodward, and Wendell D. Reece, Ankeny,
both of Iowa, assignors to Deere & Company, Moline, III.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,494
Int. a.3 B05B 1/20
U.S. a. 239—167 15 Qaims
4,379,521
SPRING RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM
Hartley F. Young, Melton, Australia; Hendrikus M. Verhoef,
deceased, late of Broadview, Australia (by Edmund M. Ver-
hoef, executor), and Wally A. Remes, Redwood Park, Austra-
lia, assignors to Ralph McKay Limited, Victoria, Australia
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,109
Oaims priority, application Australia, Dec. 19, 1979,
54004/79
Int. C1.5 EOIB 9/30. 21/04. 29/24
U.S. a. 238—349 3 Qaims
-'V^
«0
» '. K
\
1. A rail fastening system by which a rail is secured, by
elastic rail clips mounted to press on the rail flange, to a tie
comprising in combination (a) an elastic rail clip comprising a
U-shaped member having a base and two arms extending there-
from, said base adapted to be secured to said tie outwardly
spaced from the foot of said rail, said arms being bent inwardly
beyond said base and oriented for conUct with the flange of
said rail such that said arms are deflected upwardly relative to
said rail to develop downward clamping forces tending to hold
said rail on said tie, said clip bemg formed from metal plate and
each arm of the clip being tapered; (b) a clip holder adapted to
be secured to a rail tie and being formed from metal plate, said
clip holder comprising a vertically oriented channel section,
the sides of which extend away from said rail and are slotted
toward the base of the channel section which lies adjacent to
said rail, said slots being adapted to receive said one portion of
the rail clip, and an upwardly inclined surface on the top edge
of the base of said vertically oriented channel section such that
1. In a mobile sprayer adapted for forward movement over
a field and having a support frame, a spray boom assembly
comprising:
an inner boom and an outer boom, each said boom having
inboard and outboard ends;
means for mounting the inboard end of the inner boom on
the boom support frame;
hinge means pivotally connecting the outboard end of the
inner boom to the inboard end of the outer boom for
rocking outer boom with respect to the inner boom gener-
ally horizontally about a substantially upright axis be-
tween preselected positions including a generally out-
wardly extending, unfolded position and an inwardly
extending, folded position;
elongated support means extending above the inner boom
connected to the outer boom adjacent the hinge means
and to the support frame and tensioned therebetween for
providing vertical subility to the inner and outer booms
when the latter is in either its folded or unfolded position;
and
overcenter means connecting the support means to the outer
boom for biasing the outer boom towards the unfolded
position when it is within a range of positions between the
unfolded position and an intermediate position between
said folded and unfolded positions, said overcenter means
including a bracket member fixed to the outer boom and
offset in the fore-and-aft direction to one side of the piv-
otal axis when the outer boom is in the unfolded position,
said bracket offset to the opposite side of the axis when the
outer boom is in the folded position.
340
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,523 4 379 524
P.™.R«^ rta- Gn.bH « Co OU., Frt. R.p. of G.™«, FU«, M«. I«. iSl, ^. Nr245.I«
CUi«. phJ^S^ lSi>I^Z\t^Z S'£L.„ Sep. 5, «,SSr '*"*'• '""'"'°" '^■"'*' "■''°"- ^"^ »• "«»•
lyoU, 3033417 _ ,-^ ,
Int. a.3 B05B 3/06 u s Q 239-533 8 ^'^ ''"'"
US. a. 239-222 9 q^^ LJ.S. O. 239 533.8
SOaims
-f
". - ■ ■ •
— - ->-- \\\\.Hl,''/7//V
.^r^^
t], ^ -lEji Up
1. A swivelling fan-jet sprinkler which is convertible from a
coarse sprinkling mode in which it covers a relatively large
irrigation area to a gentler spraying mode in which it covers a
smaller irrigation area, the sprinkler comprising in combina-
tion:
a sprinkler housing with a sprinkler stand supporting the
housing;
a hose connector on the sprinkler housing for the supply of
pressurized water to the sprinkler housing;
a tubular nozzle cylinder having a longitudinal axis, said
tubular nozzle cylinder extending horizontally from the
sprinkler housing in a cantilever fashion, the nozzle cylin-
der being rotatably supported by the sprinkler housing
and having arranged on an upper side of said nozzle cylin-
der a row of nozzle bores oriented in a diverging fantail
spray pattern with a common plane;
means utilizing the water flow in the sprinkler housing for
driving the nozzle cylinder to execute a slowly reciprocat-
ing swivelling motion about said longitudinal axis; and
a spinner cage having a longitudinal bore extending there-
through, and a plurality of passage means extending from
said longitudinal bore to an outer surface of said spinner
cage for causing rotation of said spinner cage upon impact
by water jets exiting from the nozzle bores, said spinner
cage having positioning means cooperating with the tubu-
lar nozzle cylinder for axially positioning the spinner cage
on the nozzle cylinder in a freely rotatable manner for
readily attachable and detachable connection to the noz-
zle cylinder for the conversion of the latter from a coarse
sprinkling mode with a deUched spinner cage to a gentle
spraying mode with an attached spinner cage; and
wherein
the spinner cage, when attached to the sprinkler, surrounds
the nozzle cylinder, being freely rotatable thereon, the
water jets exiting from the nozzle cylinder being disturbed
by the spinner cage, while imparting a rotary motion to
the latter to accomplish said gentler spraying mode.
1. A fuel injection nozzle comprising a fuel pressure opera-
ble valve member slidable within a bore, a seating at one end of
the bore, the valve member being shaped for co-operaton with
said seating to prevent fuel flow from an inlet to an outlet,
resilient means for biassing the valve member into contact with
the seating, a chamber, a valve through which fuel under
pressure can flow to said chamber, a surface in said chamber,
the fuel pressure acting on said surface creating a force which
assists the action of said resilient means characterized in that
the valve is located in a first passage connecting said inlet with
said chamber, said valve including a valve element and a valve
seating, the valve element being lifted from the valve seating
by the fuel pressure at the inlet to allow fuel flow into said
chamber, a first piston subject at one end to the pressure in said
chamber, a second piston of larger diameter than the first
piston, one end of said second piston being engaged with the
other end of said first piston, a second passage through which
the other end of said second piston is subject to the pressure in
said chamber, resilient means opposing movement of the pis-
tons under the action of the pressure in the chamber acting on
the differential area of the pistons, said pistons being positioned
so that when they move against the action of the resilient
means, the valve element of said valve will be held upon the
valve seating to prevent a further increase in the pressure of
fuel in the chamber.
4,379,525
PROCESS FOR RECYOJNG PLASTIC CONTAINER
SCRAP
Casimir W. Nowicki, Sylvania, and Alan M. Jaffee, Toledo, both
of Ohio, assignors to Owens-Illinois, Inc., Toledo, Ohio
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,643
Int. a.3 B02C 19/14
U.S. a. 241-20 ,5 ciaiaa
1. A process for punfying scrap plastic granules from ther-
moplastic containers by removing label residue therefrom
comprising the steps of:
(a) charging a mixing tank with a batch of said granules; ^
(b) charging said mixing tank with hot water from a hot
water reservoir to form a mixture of said hot water and
said granules;
(c) agitating said mixture to separate a first portion of said
label residue from said granules;
(d) removing said hot water and said label residue from said
granules;
(e) filtering said label residue from said hot water;
(0 returning said hot water to said reservoir;
(g) repeating steps b-f sufficiently to remove substantially all
of said label residue from said granules;
(h) charging said mixing tank with an amount of said hot
water from said reservoir to overflow said granules over
an overflow weir into a dewatering tank;
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
341
(0 separating said granules from a major portion of said hot ni wt a«fmbi Y
water and returning said hot water to said hot water SHUTTLE DRlVt A^MiJViifLY
* Ronald T. Albo, Los G«to«; James E. Carney, Jr., Santa Crnz,
and Robert E. Riehl, Sunnyrale, ail of Calif., assignors to
Caterpillar Tractor Co., Peoria, 111.
PCX No. PCT/US80/00020, § 371 Date Jan. 9, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 9, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02000, PCT Pub.
Date Jul. 23, 1981
PCT Filed Jan. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 130,490
Int. a.3 B65H 81/04; B29H 17/02; HOIF 41/08
reservoir; and
p -u-
U.S. a. 242—4 BE
17 Claims
I
-f^-
- L
(j) subsequently drying said granules to remove substantially
all of said residual water from said granules.
4,379,526
ORE MILL AND METAL SEPARATING DEVICE
William E. Dodds, 478 Jessie Ave., Winnipeg, Manitoba, Can-
ada (R3L 0P6)
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,916
Oaims priority, application Canada, Apr. 21, 1980, 350311
Int. CV B02C 4/02
U.S. a. 241— 79.1 6 Oaims
+2 ai
1. An ore mill and metal separating device, said separating
device comprising in combination means to receive the mill
sludge from the ore mill, conveyor means conveying said
sludge from said means to receive same, a mercury bed, said
conveyor moving said sludge to one side of said bed and
through said bed and discharging means at the other end of
said bed, said separating device including a first solid blade
type screw conveyor portion inclining downwardly at an
angle from said means to receive the mill sludge, a substantially
horizontal container for said mercury bed, a central, solid
blade type screw conveyor spanning said container and being
partially submerged in the mercury within said mercury bed
and being operatively connected by one end thereof to one end
of said first conveyor portion, and a third solid blade type
screw conveyor portion inclining upwardly at an angle from
the other end of said bed and being operatively connected by
one end thereof to the other end of said central screw con-
veyor thereby forming a continuous articulated conveyor
assembly.
«?-' ^
1. A shuttle drive assembly (10) having a base (12) and
comprising:
a support frame (16) carried by said base (12) and having an
article-receiving opening (32) in the midportion therein,
said support frame (16) having a cutout segment providing
an access passage (38) into said article-receiving opening
(32) therein,
a shuttle (22) having an article-receiving opening (108) in the
midportion thereof, said shuttle (22) having a cutout seg-
ment providing an access passage (106) into said article-
receiving opening (108) therein, said opening (108) and
passage (106) in said shuttle (22) being alignable with the
opening (32) and passage (38) in said frame (16) for receiv-
ing a toroidal-shaped article (24) in said aligned openings
(108,32) through the aligned access passages (38,106) in
said frame (16) and said shuttle (22),
means (85,87) for supporting and rotatably driving said
shuttle (22), said means (85,87) including a drive roll as-
sembly carried by said frame (16) and having drive rollers
(92), mating means (115) for engaging with said drive
rollers (82). said mating means being mounted on said
shuttle (22) and disengaging from each of said drive rollers
(82) during a portion of each full rotation of said shuttle
(22).
a motor (140), and
motion transmission means (192, 191, 190, 186, 188) for
connecting said drive roll assembly means (85,87) to said
motor (140) for rotetably driving said shuttle (22) relative
to said frame (16) in a plane substantially transverse to said
toroidal-shaped article (24),
said drive roll assembly means (85. 87) comprising a plurality
of long drive roll assemblies (87) and a plurality of short
drive roll assemblies (85), each long drive roll assembly
(87) having two axially aligned pulleys (84,84) on one side
of said frame (16) and a roller (92) on the other side of said
frame (16).
4,379,528
THREAD REELING APPARATUS
Alfred Tschentscher, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to FMN Schuster GmbH A Co. KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,565
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 30,
1980, 3016662
Int. a.3 B65H 54/28
U.S. a. 242—43 R ' Claims
1. An apparatus for reeling thread on a bobbin, said appara-
tus comprising:
342
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
(a) a rotary cam drum having a helical groove extending
along the longitudinal axis thereof,
(b) a first traversing thread guide assembly mounted to move
along said helical groove and effective to guide the thread
to-and-fro along the longitudinal axis of the rotary cam
drum,
(c) tension controlling means located between the rotary
cam drum and the bobbin to receive the thread from the
first traversing thread guide assembly for controlling the
tension of the thread, and
(d) a friction roller for rotating the bobbin,
(e) said tension controlling means including a smooth roller
located downstream from said first traversing thread
guide assembly for receiving a thread on its smooth pe-
ripheral surface and a second traversing thread guide
assembly between the smooth roller and the friction rol-
ler,
(0 said second traversing thread guide assembly being effec-
tive to guide the thread between the smooth roller and the
friction roller.
4,379,529
TUBE FOR YARN BOBBIN
Hans B. Nielsen, Buhlstrasse 3, CH-8125 Zollikerberg, Switzer-
land
per No. PCr/DK80/00033, § 371 Date Feb. 19, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 19, 1981, PCX Pub. No. WO80/02832, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 24, 1980
-- PCT Filed May 28, 1980, Ser. No. 237,149
Int. a.3 B65H 75/20
U.S. CI. 242-118.11 6aaims
< i I
rt
ti
'p
J t
1. A tube made of molded plastic material for yam bobbins
of variable axial length, said tube including a plurality of axi-
ally spaced apart concentric rings each of which has a plurality
of arms extending longitudinally of the tube, said arms having
outer sides which together form a cylindrical or slightly coni-
cal surface of the tube for receiving yam bobbins, said includ-
ing and rings being connected together by resilient spring
members molded integrally with said rings and located radially
inward of said surface formed by said arms, said spring mem-
bers being of such dimensions that the tube may be compressed
in axial direction by virtue of the resilience of the plastic mate-
rial and said spring members being stretchable in the axial
direction of the tube and when so stretched said spring mem-
bers extend substantially parallel to the generatrixes in the
surface of the tube.
4,379,530
FISHING REEL
Takehiro Kobayashi, Fukuyama, Japan, assignor to Ryobi Lim-
ited, Fuchu, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 183,768
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 3, 1979, 54-122129[U]
Int. a.3 AOIK 89/02
U.S. a. 242-220 gaaims
1. A fishing reel comprising:
a base plate;
a main rod;
means for rotatably mounting said main rod relative to said
base plate;
a handle;
a supporting shaft;
means for affixing said handle to said supporting shaft;
means for rotatably mounting said support shaft relative to
said base plate;
a main gear;
means for affixing said main gear to rotate in unison with
said supporting shaft;
a pinion;
means for slidabiy mounting said pinion in an axial direction
on said main rod. said pinion being normally forced to
mesh with said main gear;
a clutch lever;
means for mounting said clutch lever relative to said base
plate to permit limited axial movement relative to said
main rod;
means for affixing said clutch lever to said pinion;
a clutch cam;
means for rotatably mounting said clutch cam relative to
said base plate;
a kick lever;
means for interlocking said kick lever with said clutch cam;
a slider;
means for slidabiy mounting said slider on said base plate;
means for attaching said kick lever to said slider wherein
movement of said kick lever imparting a sliding move-
ment to said slider;
a kick plate;
means for pivotally mounting said kick plate on said slider;
a ratchet wheel;
means for affixing said ratchet wheel to said support shaft,
said ratchet wheel being coaxially mounted on said sup-
port shaft relative to said main gear;
said kick plate including a first end being selectively, opera-
tively engageable with said ratchet wheel;
said kick lever being movable in a first direction to impart
rotary motion to said clutch cam to axially move said
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
343
clutch lever and said pinion to disengage said pinion from
said main gear, movement of said kick lever in said first
direction imparts sliding motion to said slider to position
said first end of said kick plate into operative engagement
with said ratchet wheel, subsequent rotation of said handle
imparts rotary movement to said support shaft and said
ratchet wheel to impart a rotary movement to said first
end of said kick plate to slide said slider and impart move-
ment to said kick lever to rotate said clutch cam to axially
move said clutch lever and said pinion to reengage said
pinion with said main gear.
relatively pivotable to deflect issuing propulsive streams in
selectable directions; pilot operable control means connected
with the fins and the terminal elements for effecting simulta-
neously selective pivoting of the terminal elements and angular
adjustment of the fins, the pilot operable control means includ-
ing a handgrip swivelled to a handle for movement in select-
able directions, and a plurality of control cables connecting the
fins and the terminal elements with the handgrip; and the
aircraft body having laterally spaced walls in each of which
one of the engines is housed.
4,379,531
PROJECTILE
John R. Manis, 418 Millbum Ave., Millbum Township, Essex
County, N.J. 07041
Division of Ser. No. 444,008, Feb. 20, 1974, Pat. No. 4,176,487,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 308,755, Nov. 22, 1972,
abandoned, and a continuation of Ser. No. 90,608, Nov. 18, 1970,
abandoned. This application Oct. 15, 1979, Ser. No. 84,735
Int. a.3 F42B 15/14
U.S. a. 244—3.23 8 Qaims
1. A firearm projectile, comprising,
a cylindric forward area, and a helicoidal rearward area in
the form of a series of helical notches constructed and
arranged to completely surround said rearward area, all of
said helical notches structure arranged to begin immedi-
ately from the adjacent demarcation point of a laterally
disposed one of the other of said notches construction.
4,379,532
AIRCRAFT ATTACHABLE TO THE BODY OF A PILOT
Igor Dmitrowsky, 92-36 54th Ave., Elmhurst, N.Y. 11373
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,496
Int. a.5 B64C 39/00. 15/02
U.S. a. 244—4 A 3 Qaims
'J8
4,379,533
TRANSPORT AIRPLANE
Edward W. Caldwell, Kennesaw, and Rollo G. Smethers, Jr.,
Atlanta, both of Ga., assignors to Lockheed Corporation,
Burbank, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 54,275, Jul. 2, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,670
Int. a.3 B64D 9/00
U.S. a. 244—118.1 9 Qainis
2. A winged aircraft comprising a saddle form aircraft body
adapted at its exterior underside to be mounted upon and
secured to the back of a pilot; multiple engines housed in the
aircraft body having exhaust tubes opening through the rear of
the aircraft body for issuing propulsive streams to propel and
sustain the aircraft in flight; angularly adjustable flns project-
ing from opposite sides of the aircraft body for effecting select-
able flight patterns; the exhaust tubes having terminal elements
1. A transport airplane formed at the forward end by a
control cabin and aft by a basic flyable backbone adapted to
removably secure and carry a payload selected from at least
one of a variety of payloads of different shapes and sizes
thereon including sizes and shapes defining non-aerodynamic
configurations extending beyond the limits of structural mem-
bers forming a part of and carried by said backbone, said back-
bone comprising:
a flatbed formed by a payload supporting surface planar
throughout its length and extending aft from the rear of
said cabin adjacent the bottom thereof to the extremity of
the airplane and substantially parallel to the ground at all
times;
a pair of fixed wings one secured to and extending laterally
from each side of said flatbed and below said payload
supporting surface, said wings being located approxi-
mately midway between said cabin and said aft airplane
extremity thereby establishing the location of the center of
gravity of the airplane whereby said selected payload
center of gravity is located vertically above and substan-
tially aligned with said airplane center of gravity;
at least one engine carried by each said wing; and
an empennage formed by a horizontal aerodynamic surface
contiguous to and extending laterally from each side of
said flatbed below said payload supporting surface and a
vertical surface extending upwardly from the outer end of
said horizontal surface, said empennage being immovably
secured to said flatbed at all times.
4,379,534
CARGO LIFT SYSTEM
Ralph A. Miller, Monmontb Beach, N J., and Randall F. White,
Paradise, Calif., assignors to The United Sutes of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,305
Int. CI.' B64D //OS. 17/72
U.S. a. 244—137 R 5 Claims
1. In a cargo lift system having a support bridle, support
sling, and hook for transporting externally slung cargo by an
elevated platform, an improved cargo recovery apparatus
comprising, in combination:
344
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
a recovery bridle formed at one end to be connected to the
cargo;
a streamlined container closed at one end;
pivot means connected between said ends of said container
and formed to be secured to the platform for providing a
360° rotation of said container about a vetical axis there-
through to permit alignment of said other end of said
container witti the cargo;
a hinged door releasably connected at said other end of said
container and having a shear pin for releasably latching
thereto;
a pendant means formed at one end to be connected to said
recovery bridle and at said other end having a connector
through which said shear pin releasably latch said door to
said container;
uninflated parachute means deployably stowed in said con-
tainer; and
inflator means connected within said uninflated parachute
means having a compressed gas reservoir for inflating said
uninflated parachute means.
4,379,535
PALLET RESTRAIN SYSTEM
Floyd G. Baldwin, Garden Grove, and Donald E. Evans, Marina
Del Rey, both of Calif., assignors to McDonnell Douglas
Corporation, Long Beach, Calif.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,460
Int. C1.3 B64D l/IO. 1/12
U.S. a. 244-137 R « Qaims
'in J]
b4 1 ^i*' '* .2^82 ^64 ^^86 88t
l44' ' ?0' -21 -^ ''V-2."'.t6-"'= ^=^8.24 ,7ol,74r<;0 r?6 -q '74 '62 ^23 ^70 [^74
,0 '46 ^'2 M2-J -48;-^
•, J I 4
4379,536
MEANS FOR RETAINING A ROD-SHAPED MATERIAL
Yoshiro Mizuno, and Akihiko Kitamura, both of Aichi, Japan,
assignors to Kojima Puresu Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Aichi,
Japan
FUed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,673
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 11, 1980. 55-
31317[U]
Int. a.3 F16L 3/08
U.S. a. 248-73 ,5 Qaims
1. A restraint system for use on floor in aircraft cargo bay to
engage and hold a pallet in air drop sequence comprising:
two load sensitive latches moveably mounted on said floor in
such a manner that they will engage one side of the pallet;
hydraulic actuators attached to said latches and to said cargo
floor to provide movement to said latches;
hydraulic interconnection between hydraulic actuators to
provide transfer of hydraulic fluid from one actuator to
the other, thereby moving the latches into full engage-
ment with said pallet, and
guide means to engage the side of the pallet opposite the load
sensitive latches to assist in restraining and guiding of said
pallet from said aircraft cargo bay.
1. For use in the support and retention of a rod-shaped
material, having an annular groove peripherally thereabout,
solely for rotational movement:
a mounting body having a top surface with a pair of laterally
spaced slits deflned therethrough, said mounting body
being adapted to receive and support the rod-shaped
material in overlying relation to said top surface between
said slits;
a clip having a holding portion formed in generally U-
shaped configuration for accommodation of said rod-
shaped material therein, and a pair of depending leg mem-
bers extending from said U-shaped holding portion and
insertable through said top surface into said slits to the
opposite sides of a body-supported rod-shaped material,
each of said leg members having a resilient locking pawl
extending from its lower end remote from said U-shaped
configuration for resilient securing engagement with said
slit, each locking pawl terminating in a free end and in-
cluding an arresting face at the free end adapted to engage
with the lower edge of the corresponding slit upon inser-
tion of the leg member into the slit to preclude withdrawal
of said pawl; and
at least one of said mounting body and said clip having a
retaining element projecting therefrom for engagement
with the annular groove formed on the periphery of said
rod-shaped material.
4,379,537
CABLE HANGER
Frederick Perrault, Torrance, and Raymond E. Perrault, Ran-
cho Palos Verdes, both of Calif., assignors to Whipple Patent
Management Corporation, Sherman Oaks, Calif.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,350
Int. a.3 F16L 3/08
U.S. a. 248-74 R iQ Claims
1. A bracket for supporting a cable or the like comprising
a unitary one-piece member having
an internally threaded sleeve,
a substantially flat plate spaced from one end of said sleeve
and substantially perpendicular to the axis thereof, with
a portion of said substantially flat plate being opposite a
portion of said one end of said sleeve,
an interconnecting element forming a continuation of and
extending axially from said one end of said sleeve to one
side edge of said substantially flat plate for connecting
said sleeve to said plate,
and opposite end flanges projecting from said plate
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
345
toward said sleeve, said end flanges defining slots there- portion in the direction from said first end toward said second
through adapted to receive a strap extended around said end, said plastic member means further having opposite side
edges between said first and second ends and converging with
respect to one another in the direction from said first end
^?0 toward said second end, and said means to releaseably retain
said outer end of said strap portion in said fastening position
including interengaging fastener means on said front side of
said mounting portion and. said outer end of said strap portion.
'JO
/s'' y^-
plate to hold cables to the surface of said plate opposite
from said sleeve.
4,379,538
ARTICLE SUPPORTING DEVICE 4,379,539
Theodore W. Welles, 23400 Shaker Blvd., Shaker Heights, Ohio POWER SEAT ADJUSTER
44122 Claude Rion, and Winfried Ruckbeim, both of Ingolstadt, Fed.
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,494 Rep. of Germany, assignors to Audi Nsu Auto Union Aktien-
Int. Q\} B65B 67/12 gesellschaft, Neckarsulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany
U.S. a. 248—95
16 Oaims Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,783
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 22,
1979, 2952030
Int. Q\? A47G 25/00
U.S. a. 248—371 17 Oaims
1. An article support comprising a mounting portion and a
strap portion of thin flexible plastic material, said mounting
portion and strap portion having corresponding front and back
sides, means on said back side of said mounting portion for
attaching said article support to a surface, said strap portion
having an inner end interconnected with said mounting portion
along a line of juncture and an outer end spaced from said line
of juncture, said outer end of said strap portion being displace-
able toward said mounting portion and to a fastening position
in which said strap portion forms an article supporting loop
having a bight pxjrtion between said line of juncture and said
outer end for supporting an article in suspension means to
releaseably retain said outer end of said strip portion in said
fastening position, and said strap portion including constrain-
ing means between said line of juncture and said outer end
constraining said bight portion of said loop to have a generally
uniform curvature under the weight of an article supported in
suspension thereby, said mounting portion having an outer
peripheral edge and said inner end of said strap portion being
defined by slits extending inwardly of said peripheral edge and
having terminal ends spaced inwardly from said peripheral
edge, said terminal ends being spaced apart to define said line
of juncture between said inner end of said strap portion and
said mounting portion, said constraining means including plas-
tic member means integral with said front side of said strap
portion and having an outer surface spaced outwardly from
said front side, said plastic member means having a first end
adjacent said terminal ends of said slots and a second end
spaced from said first end in the direction toward said outer
end of said strap portion, said outer surface of said plastic
member means converging toward said front side of said strap
1. An adjuster for displacing an automotive seat relative to a
vehicle frame, said adjuster comprising:
a sun gear centered on and rotatable about a sun gear axis
relative to said frame;
a planet gear meshing with said sun gear;
support means for displacement of said planet gear angularly
of said axis while in mesh with said sun gear between a
pair of angularly offset end positions;
control means connected to said planet gear for displacing
same between said end positions;
a first output gear meshable with said planet gear in one of
said end positions;
a second output gear meshable with said planet gear in the
other of said end positions;
drive means for routing said sun gear and thereby routing
said planet gear and driving any gear in mesh with said
planet gear from said sun gear; and
means connecting said output gears to said seat for displace-
ment of said seat in a first direction when said first output
gear is driven by said sun gear through said planet gear in
said one position thereof and for displacement of said scat
in a second direction different from said first direction
when said second output gear is driven by said sun gear
through said planet gear in said outer position thereof.
346
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,540 4379,541
ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT DEVICES FOR SWIVEL HOLDER FOR A CONTAINER
t u * «, ., .- ^M.P^l^ Donald M. Harkness, 294 Main North Rd., Christchurch, New
Jolin A. W. French, Milton Keynes, England, assignor to Zealand
WIPAC Group Sales Limited, Buckingham, England FUed Jun. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 162,435
FOed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,305 Qaims priority, application New Zealand, Jul. 23, 1979.
CUums priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 6, 1979, 191083
''^^'^^ Int. a.3 A47K 1/08
U.S. a. 248—406 1 Claim
4^
i-i-6
1. In an adjustable support device for a swivel chair, of the
type comprising inner and outer telescopic tubes having an axis
arranged, in use, to extend vertically with the seat part of the
chair mounted at the upper end of one of said tubes, said one
tube being rotatable and the other tube being stationary, bear-
ing means, a screw rotatably mounted within the inner and
outer tubes on the axis of the tubes by said bearing means
which permits the screw to rotate about a vertical axis, a nut
rigid with the said one tube and engaged with the screw, said
screw being mounted for vertical movement, spring means
biasing said screw into an upper limit position, and friction
clutch means comprising a first friction member carried by the
screw, and a second, stationary, friction member, said first
friction member engaging said second friction member in the
upper limit position of the screw in order to prevent the screw
from rotating whereby rotation of the nut relative to the screw
in this position effects adjustment of the seat height, and said
clutch means being released by downwards movement of the
screw from its upper limit position by a vertical load applied
when the chair is occupied, the improvement comprising a
drag-applying member mounted on the screw and resiliently
engaging the interior surface of the said one tube to apply a
continuous but limited frictional drag between the screw and
the nut, said drag being less than the force exerted by the
engaged friction members of the clutch means to prevent
roution of the screw in the upper limit position, but said drag
being sufficient to ensure that the screw and the nut rotate as a
unit when the said one tube is swivelled with the chair occu-
pied, the drag-applying member being of annular section and
being interposed between the screw and the said one tube, and
being split axially to provide the resilient bias.
1. A holder for a container, comprising, a backplate one face
of which has an engagement surface thereon, a ledge spaced
from said engagement surface, the plane of said ledge being
substantially perpendicular to said one face, a guide which
slopes from said one face downwards and outwards towards
said ledge, a step on said guide, and a semi-rigid retaining strap
each end of which is secured to the backplate so as to define a
space between part of one face of the retaining strap and said
one face of the backplate, said part of one face of said retaining
strap having thereon at least one projection with a curved
outer face, said engagement surface, ledge, guide, retaining
strap and projection being dimensioned and arranged such that
when the holder is in use, a container occupies said space with
at least part of the base of the container resting on said ledge,
an upper part of the container wall bearing against said engage-
ment surface, and an intermediate part of the container wall
bearing against said projection.
4,379,542
SUSPENSION MEANS FOR MOUNTING AN
INSTRUMENT SUSCEPTIBLE TO S«OCK
Ludwig Pietzsch, Max-Beckmann-Str. 27, 7500 Karlsmhe 41,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Rudolf Hartmann, Karlsbad- Auer-
bach. Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Ludwig Pietzsch,
Karlsruhe, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 6, 1979, Ser. No. 63,774
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 10,
1978, 2844114
Int. a.3 F16M 13/00
U.S. a. 248—561 21 Claims
1. A suspension means for mounting on a movable carrier an
instrument or the like which is susceptible to shock, said means
comprising:
flexible sealing means adapted to absorb shocks in at least
one direction, said flexible sealing means including two
coaxial, radially spaced rubber-elastic sealing rings which
are biased between the annular surfaces of an inner ring
connected with the instrument and an outer ring con-
nected with the carrier, said inner and outer rings being
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
347
disposed to radially define a fluid pressure cavity which
controls the axial spacing of said sealing rings; and
a blocking device adjustable against the resiliency of the
sealing means in the axial direction for rigidly coupling
the instrument with the carrier.
4,379,543
VANE TYPE VALVE ACTUATOR
V. Randon Reaves, Houston, Tex., assignor to Valinco, Inc.,
Houston, Tex.
Filed Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,661
Int. a.3 FOIC 9/00; F16J 1/10
U.S. a. 251—59 6 Claims
« 7t
1. A valve actuator, comprising:
(a) a housing sealingly enclosing a vane connected to a valve
via a shaft rotated by said vane;
(b) means for moving said vane in said housing to a valve
open position;
(c) a movable piston and return spring enclosed by a piston
housing fixedly secured to said vane housing, said piston joined
to an elongate rod wherein one end of said rod protrudes
through an opening in said vane housing to contact said vane;
(d) said elongate rod including a cylindrical cross-bar per-
pendicularly extending from said one end of said rod, said
cross-bar providing a bearing surface for a bearing means
to enable rolling contact with said vane.
valve body means having an inlet and an outlet with a valve
seat therebetween;
a valve member in said valve body means and including a
valve stem having an end extending through said valve
body means in guiding arrangement whereby said valve
member is guidably movable into and out of seating en-
gagement with said valve seat;
guide stem means extending through a portion of said valve
body means in guiding arrangement and having one end
adapted to be engaged by said actuating means;
reset lever means pivotably secured to said valve body
means and slidably secured to said end of said valve stem
and the other end of said guide stem means for movement
therewith;
biasing means acting on said lever means to move said valve
member to the seated position whereby when said guide
stem means is engaged by said actuating means said valve
member is held out of seating engagement with said valve
seat and when said actuating means is acted upon by an
actuating force and pivots in response thereto, said guide
stem means becomes disengaged from said actuating
means permitting said biasing means to move said reset
lever means causing said valve member to seat and said
guide stem means to move to a position preventing reen-
gagement with said actuating means until manually reset.
4,379 545
SIDE LIFT JACK FOR UNIBODY AUTOMOBILES
Joseph L. Gray, and James J. Gray, both of St. Joseph, Mo.,
assignors to Gray Manufacturing Co. Inc., St. Joseph, Mo.
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,436
Int. a.3 B66F i/00
U.S. a. 254—8 B 14 Claims
4,379,544
TURBINE TRIP VALVE MECHANISM
Eugene V. Angelo, Greensburg, Pa,, and Prem PraUp, West-
boro, Mass., assignors to Elliott Turbomachinery Company,
Inc., Jeannette, Pa.
FUed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,398
Int a.3 F16K il/44
U.S. a. 251—74 4 Qaims
1. A trip mechanism for a trip valve controlling the flow of
operating fluid to a turbine comprising:
actuating means pivotally mounted and adapted to be moved
by an actuating force;
^JY'/
"trsr"
10
1. A jack assembly for tilting a four wheel vehicle off the
ground, comprising:
elongated lifting arm means presenting an inner end and an
outer end;
upright post means including extensible means; and
348
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
means rigidly connecting said post means and arm means
adjacent said inner end of the latter to present an included
obtuse angle between the arm means and post means,
said arm means being constructed and arranged for position-
ing at least partially under said vehicle from one side
thereof and of a length to extend across the width of the
vehicle from said one side with said outer end engaging an
outer conuct area on the ground more than one-half of
the wheel track dimension of said vehicle,
said assembly having inboard ground-engaging means for
engaging an inner contact area on the ground proximal to
said post means,
said extensible means including means for swinging the arm
means through an arc to engage the vehicle and extert a
tilting force thereon,
said included angle remaining constant during said travel of
said arm means with said outer end of said arm means
pivpting adjacent said outer contact area, and with said
inboard ground-engaging means shifting along said
ground, at least a portion of said shifting being toward said
vehicle.
said upper and lower runners from a first direction to a
second direction opposite to said first direction.
4^79,546
LIFTING JACK
Thomas K. Mcintosh, Bloomfield, Ind., assignor to Bloomfield
Manufacturing Co., Inc., Bloomfield, Ind.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,072
Int. a.3 B66F 1/04
U.S. a. 254-111 7 Qaims
1. A lifting jack comprising:
a standard having a plurality of spaced apertures;
an upper runner disposed about said standard;
a first climbing pin carried by said upper runner and adapted
to fit within said apertures;
a lower runner disposed about said standard;
a second climbing pin carried by said lower runner and
adapted to fit within said apertures;
level means pivotally attached to said upper runner for
moving said upper runner along said standard;
a pitman pivoully attached at a first end to said lever means
and at a second end to said lower runner thereby coopera-
tively coupling said upper and lower runners together,
movement of said upper and lower runners including
alternately positioning said first and second climbing pins
into said apertures, said pitman being die-formed of a
single-piece construction and having a generally U-shaped
lateral cross-section configuration and having a narrowing
taper from said second end to said first end; and
reversing means for changing the direction of movement of
-- 4,379 547
CONTINUOUS COLD ROLLING AND ANNEALING
APPARATUS FOR STEEL STRIP
Ichiro Shimbashi; Hiroshi Ikegami, both of Kitakyushu, and
Hideharu Bando, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon
Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,805
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 11, 1980, 55-46935
Int. C\? C21D 7/02. 9/56
U.S. a. 266-103 5 Claims
^ i5a ibo
1. A continuous cold rolling and annealing apparatus for a
steel strip, comprising:
a continuous annealing furnace having a heating zone;
at least one cold rolling mill located upstream of the en-
trance of said continuous annealing furnace for cold roll-
ing a steel strip;
an intermediate reel for supplying a spare steel strip to said
continuous annealing furnace when the supply of the steel
strip from the cold rolling mill is interrupted, said interme-
diate reel being located between said cold rolling mill and
said continuous annealing furnace;
a welder for connecting said spare steel strip to a previously
processed steel strip, said welder being located between
said intermediate reel and said continuous annealing fur-
nace;
a coil car for supplying a spare steel strip coil to said interme-
diate reel; and
a coil skid which is capable of holding a plurality of spare
steel strip coils thereon and of moving each spare steel
strip to a predetermined position for supplying it to said
coil car.
4,379 548
EXHAUST SYSTEM ESPECIALLY FOR USE IN THE
CAST HOUSE OF A BLAST FURNACE
Billy Boshoven, Heerhugowaard, Netherlands, assignor to Estel
Hoogovens BV., IJmuiden, Netherlands
FUed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,253
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 7, 1980,
8001371
Int. a.3 C21B 7/22: C21C 5/38
U.S. a. 266-158 13 Claims
1. In an exhaust apparatus, especially for use in the cast
house of a blast furnace, comprising at least one movable
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
349
exhaust hood which is connected by a duct to a suction source
for extraction of gas from the hood, said duct having a fixed
duct section and a swivelhng duct section swivellable about an
axis and connecting the hood to the fixed duct section, the
hood being carried by the swivelhng duct section,
the improvement that:
said fixed duct section and said swivelhng duct section each
have a portion extending generally coaxially with said axis
of swivelling of the swivelling duct section, which por-
tions are connected together, and that said swivelling duct
section is supported so as to extend in cantilever fashion
substantially freely to said hood, by low friction bearing
means located outside the duct and extending circumfer-
entially around the duct, and said bearing means is sup-
ported by said portion of the fixed duct section which
thereby carries the swivelling duct section and the hood.
4^79^50
GROUND SUPPORTED PLAYGROUND DEVICE
Tom L. Petersen, Fmeiu Boge, Dennuu-k, assignor to Miil>
tikunst Legepladser I/S, Ringe, Denmark
FUed Jul. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 56,147
Int. a.3 A63G 77/00
U.S. a. 272—52 1 Claim
4,379,549
SHEET PAPER STACKING APPARATUS
Kenichi Mizuma, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Company,
Ltd., Japan
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,623
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 29, 1980, 55-24712
Int. a.3 B65H 5/22
U.S. a. 271—3.1 13 Claims
1. Apparatus for receiving sheets of paper one by one to
arrange them in the form of a stack and then discharging the
thus stacked sheets of paper one by one, comprising:
a bottom plate on which said stack is to be formed;
side reference means for providing a side reference line with
which one side edge of each of said sheets of paper is to be
aligned;
front reference means for providing a front reference line
with which the front edge of each of said sheets of paper
is to be aligned;
rotating means disposed above said bottom plate, said rotat-
ing means being movable between two positions including
an operative position where said rotating means brings
said sheets of paper into alignment with said side and front
reference lines during a sheet paper receiving mode and an
inoperative position where said rotating means is sepa-
rated away from said stack during a sheet paper discharg-
ing mode;
a discharging path for receiving sheets from said stack, said
discharging path extending from an entrance thereto lo-
cated above said front reference means;
discharging means disposed in the vicinity of the entrance of
said discharging path for discharging said stacked sheets
of paper one by one upon contact during a sheet paper
discharging mode; and
control means for changing the relative positional relation
between said bottom plate and said discharging means
such that the topmost sheet of said stack is located away
from said discharging means during a sheet paper receiv-
ing mode and the topmost sheet of said stack is in contact
with said discharging means during a sheet paper dis-
charging mode.
1. A playground device of the type carried on resilient
means for support which, in use, is likely to be subjected to
tilting or displacement forces, said resilient means for support
being secured to base anchoring means for firmly anchoring
the lower end of the resilient means for support to the ground,
characterized in that said base anchoring means comprise a
lightweight mounting member for holding the lower end of the
resilient means for support generally in the ground surface
level and provided with mutually spaced, downwardly pro-
tecting leg members which, at their respective lower ends, are
secured in lightweight plate means which are mounted or
mountable in a generally horizontal, subterranean position,
the mounting member is an inverted cup-shaped sheet metal
member provided with holes in its depending edge flange
for receiving fastening bolts for the upper ends of said leg
members,
and underneath the top portion of the cup member there is
arranged a cross member, the opposite end portions of
which are spaced from the cup top portion by distance
members secured to the cup top portion by means of bolts
additionally serving to hold the lower end of the resilient
means for support against the cup member top side, the
central portion of the cross member being spaced from the
underside of the cup top portion so as to define a space in
which is received the upper, inwardly bent end portions of
the leg members.
4,379,551
PLAYGROUND TUBE SLIDE
Paul W. Ahrens, Grinnell, Iowa, assignor to Miracle Recreation
Equipment Company, Grinnell, Iowa
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,049
Int. a.3 A63G 27/00
U.S. a. 272—56.5 R 7 Claims
1. A playground tube slide comprising,
an elevated deck.
350
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
a bed extending from said deck to the ground,
said bed including a curved tube section having top and
bottom half sections interconnected by fastening means
engaging laterally outwardly extending flanges along the
length of said top and bottom half sections of said curved
tube section, ^
said bed including at least one other section which includes
a laterally extending arcuate end flange connected to an
adjacent laterally extending arcuate end flange on said
curved tube section,
said curved tube section extending in one direction and
being adapted to be turned in the opposite direction by
rotating said curved tube section relative to said other
section,
said half sections of said curved tube section being identical
and each including said arcuate end flange at each end,
and
the bottom section of said curved tube section including a
series of shingled metal bed members overlaying the inside
surface of said bottom section.
4,379,552
EXERaSING DEVICE
Ronald W. Webb, and Robert L. Morgan, both of Spokane,
Wash., assignors to Rotator, Ltd., Spokane, Wash.
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,053
Int. a.^ A63B 21/00
U.S. a. 272-67 8 Qaims
1. A hand held device for exercising the muscles of the
human arms and wrists, comprising:
a housing;
a first handle stationary on the housing, extending outwardly
therefrom along a first axis, adapted to be grasped and
held secure along with the housing by a user's hand with
the first axis being transverse to the forearm thereof;
shaft means mounted to the housing for rotation thereon
about a second axis oriented transversely in relation to the
first axis;
a second handle mounted to the shaft means at an angular
orientation to the second axis, to be grasped by the user's
other hand so the forearm thereof is substantially aligned
with the second axis and adapted to be turned about the
second axis in one direction by the muscles associated
with one wrist motion and in an opposite direction by the
muscles associated with an opposite wrist motion; said
second handle being mounted at an obtuse angle to the
shaft means and wherein the second axis intersects the
second handle between the ends thereof; and
adjustable restrictor means on the housing and engaging the
shaft means for selectively resisting rotational motion of
the shaft about the second axis relative to the first handle
in response to movement of the second handle by the hand
grasping the second handle.
4,379,553
BOWLING LANE WITH FIRE RETARDANT
DECORATIVE SURFACE
Peter B. Kelly, Pasadena, Tex., assignor to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 59,215, Jul. 20, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,972
Int. a.3 A63P 1/04: B32B 17/02, 17/12. 21/10
U.S. a. 273-51 25 Oaims
1. In a bowling lane having a surface characterized by a
falling ball impact resistance of at least 60 inches, a coefficient
of friction of at least 0. 16 and a Taber abrasion resistance of at
least 500 cycles, said bowling lane comprised of a substrate
selected from the group consisting of natural wood, consoli-
dated wood fibers, plywood, flakewood, chipboard, and hard-
board, and at least one decorative plastic laminate secured to
the surface of said substrate, said plastic laminate comprising a
plurality of thermosetting resin impregnated fibrous core
sheets, a melamine resin impregnated decorative fibrous print
sheet, and an overlying melamine resin containing protective
layer, the improvement which comprises
said fibrous core sheets being comprised of sheets of glass
and paper, said glass being selected from the group con-
sisting of woven glass cloth, glass net and glass scrim, the
interlaminar bond strength between said glass and paper
sheets being sufficient to prevent delamination of said
glass and paper sheets upon impact with a dropped bowl-
ing ball from heights up to about 4 feet, said glass also
being impregnated with an organic fire retardant material
and said paper sheets also being impregnated with an
inorganic fire retardant material.
23. In a decorative plastic laminate of a length and width for
securing to a substrate selected from the group consisting of
natural wood, consolidated wood fibers, plywood, fiakeboard,
chipboard, and hardboard to form therewith all or part of a
bowling lane having a surface characterized by a falling ball
impact resistance of at least 60 inches, a coefficient of friction
of about 0. 16 and a Taber abrasion resistance of at least about
500 cycles, said plastic laminate sheet comprising a plurality of
thermosetting resin impregnated fibrous core sheets, a mela-
mine resin impregnated decorative fibrous print sheet, and an
overlying melamine resin containing protective layer, the
improvement which comprises:
said fibrous core sheets being comprised of sheets of glass
and crepe paper, said glass being selected from the group
consisting of woven glass cloth, glass net and glass scrim,
said glass also being impregnated with an organic fire
retardant material and said crepe paper also being impreg-
nated with an inorganic fire retardant material.
25. The method of producing a bowling lane having a sur-
face characterized by a falling ball impact resistance of at least
60 inches, a coefficient of friction of about 0.16 and a Taber
abrasion resistance of at least about 500 cycles comprising:
impregnating a plurality of glass core sheets with a formula-
tion comprised of a thermosetting resin and an organic fire
retardant material;
impregnating a plurality of creped paper sheets with a for-
mulation comprised of a thermosetting resin and an inor-
ganic fire retardant;
laying said plurality of impregnated glass core sheets be-
tween said plurality of impregnated crepe paper core
sheets in an alternative manner beginning with and ending
with a crepe paper core sheet;
consolidating said impregnated core sheets, a resin impreg-
nated decorative fibrous print sheet, and an overlying
resin containing protective layer under heat and pressure
to produce a unitary decorative plastic laminate sheet; and
securing at least one such plastic laminate sheet to a substrate
selected from the group consisting of natural wood, con-
solidated wood fibers, plywood, fiakeboard, chipboard
and hardboard to produce the desired bowling lane.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
351
4,379,554
PLATFORM TENNIS PADDLE
Andreas D. Schuyler, WyckofT, and Richard K. Maier, Allen-
dale, both of N.J., assignors to Skymar Corporation, WyckofT,
NJ.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,733
Int. a.3 A63B 59/00
U.S. a. 273—67 R 3 Claims
tern, each of said independent cues including a message of
a relationship between two or more indicia and an indica-
tion of one or more positions in which said indicia may
properly be disposed, said indication of one or more posi-
tions being a replica of said plurality of positions in adja-
cent rows with one or more of said positions marked to
indicate positions in which said indicia may properly be
disposed.
4,379,556
STRIPPING GLAND FOR MULTICABLES WITH
CONNECTOR
Herbert A. Rundell, Houston, and Eugene B. Horton, Jr., Bel-
laire, both of Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains,
N.Y.
Filed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,354
Int. C1.3 E21B 33/08; F16J 15/56
U.S. a. 277—12 13 Qainis
1. A platform tennis paddle comprising in combination:
a. a blade portion in turn comprising in combination;
(1) an inner laminated ply structure having uniform thick-
ness defmed by opposed substantially planar surfaces;
(2) a central af)erture in said inner laminated ply structure;
(3) a pair of outer laminated ply structures having substan-
tially planar surfaces, each one attached to one of said
opposed substantially planar surfaces of said inner lami-
nated ply structures;
(4) said blade portion including a plurality of holes being
deHned by said inner and outer ply structures;
(5) resilient plug means for insertion into said central
aperture dimensioned to fit therewithin;
b. a handle portion in turn comprising in combination:
(1) a pair of half-handles attached to either side of said
blade portion; (and)
(2) plurality of peg means for securing the ply structures
to said half-handles;
(3) grip means for encasing said half-handles(.) ; and,
c. wherein said central aperture is less than 50 percent of the
area of said blade portion.
4,379,555
PUZZLE-GAME
Carl J. Dean, RFD. Southbridge, Mass. 01550
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,927
Int. aj A63F 3/00
U.S. a. 273—236
1 Qaim
1. A puzzle game for one or more players comprising:
a planar surface having areas for representing a plurality of
positions in adjacent rows;
a set of indicia-bearing elements for disposing at said posi-
tions to attempt to achieve a predetermined pattern of said
indicia unknown to said player or players;
cue elements for providing a number of independent cues
which taken together establish said predetermined pat-
1. A stripping gland for maintaining a pressure seal with
multicables having a larger diameter connector joining pairs of
said cables, comprising in combination
a packing gland for each of said cables,
a housing for said connector;
a latching holder for said housing,
said holder incorporating one of said packing glands, and
a receptacle for said latching holder having another of said
packing glands associated therewith.
4,379,557
VALVE STEM PACKING STRUCTURE
Hamid J. Saka, Houston, Tex., assignor to ACF Industries,
Incorporated, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,700
Int. a.3 F16J 15/18, 15/40
U.S. a. 277—59 12 Claims
1. A packing structure for a valve stem extending through a
packing chamber in a valve housing having a flow passage
therethrough wherein said packing chamber is provided with
packing stops at the ends thereof, one of said packing stops
being an inner packing stop located nearest to the flow passage
of the valve and exposed to the fluid pressure of the flow
passage of the valve, and the other packing stop being an outer
packing stop located outward of the inner packing stop with
respect to the flow passage, said packing structure comprising:
a low temperature packing assembly positioned within the
packing chamber between the valve stem and valve hous-
ing in surrounding relation to said valve stem and resting
on said inner packing stop, said low temf>erature packing
assembly being in sealing contact with the stem and valve
352
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
housing at normal temperature conditions of the valve
housing;
a rigid spacer member received about the valve stem and
positioned within the packing chamber outwardly of said
low temperature packing assembly and in engagement
therewith; and
a high temperature packing assembly positioned within the
packing chamber between the valve stem and valve hous-
ing in surrounding relation to said valve stem and located
outwardly of said spacer member so as to be sandwiched
between said outer packing stop and said spacer member,
said high temperature packing assembly being in sealing
contact with the valve stem and valve housing at normal
temperature conditions of the valve housing and at abnor-
mally high temperature conditions of the valve housing
which are destructive to said low temperature packing
assembly so that the packing structure will not leak flow
passage fluid when subjected to abnormally high tempera-
tures.
4,379,558
ANTI-EXTRUSION PACKING MEMBER
Fred B. Pippert, Houston, Tex., assignor to Utex Industries,
Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,454
Int. a.3 F16J 15/18
U.S. a. 277—188 A 6 Qaims
18
W
12
1. A packing comprising:
an extrudable body member having at least one sealing
surface thereon; and
anti-extrusion means incorporated in said body member to
form a reinforced portion of said body member; said anti-
extrusion means serving to resist extrusion forces acting
on said body member in the area contiguous to said rein-
forced portion, said anti-extrusion means being comprised
of a flat helical spring with adjacent helical spring seg-
ments overlapping to form a tubular shell.
4,379,559
PIPE SEALING DEVICE
Nils-Erik Bohman, Forsheda, Sweden, assignor to Forsheda
Gummifabrik AB, Forsheda, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 53,701, Jun. 29, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,619
Int. a.3 F16L 79/00
U.S. a. 277—207 A 3 Oalms
,l,j\^,,, ,,,,,,,,/; ,lf//lH
■zz.
1. A pipe joint comprising, in combination,
an outer pipe having an annular groove therein and an inner
pipe inserted within said outer pipe,
a sealing ring having a body portion of resilient material, said
sealing ring positioned in the annular groove in said outer
pipe and having a sealing portion adapted to sealingly
engage said inner pipe introduced therein,
said sealing ring having a first radially inwardly extending
projection having an annular conical entry surface to
center the inner pipe as it is being inserted into the outer
pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may be
present from the outer surface of the inner pipe,
said sealing ring having a second radially inwardly extend-
ing projection forming said sealing portion and having an
annular conical surface to provide an elongated deforma-
tion length which serves as a sealing area with respect to
the inner pipe when the inner and outer pipes are assem-
bled,
an annular groove provided in the body portion between the
first and second projections,
an annular retainer ring positioned in the annular groove of
the body portion for retaining the sealing ring in the annu-
lar groove in the outer pipe,
said first projection being deformed by the inner pipe in-
serted into the outer pipe to engage the inner surface of
the retainer ring and being compressed between said re-
tainer ring and inner pipe to provide force on said retainer
ring so that the body portion of said sealing device is
securely maintained in the annular groove of the outer
pipe, and
said second projection being folded radially outwardly as
the inner pipe is inserted to form a seal between the inner
and outer pipe.
4,379,560
TURBINE SEAL
Gordon J. Bakken, Plymouth, Mass., assignor to Fern Engineer-
ing, Bourne, Mass.
FUed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,688
Int. Q\? FOID 11/00; F02C 07/28
U.S. a. 277—236 3 Cbdms
1. Turbine seal, comprising:
(a) an outer tubular element,
(b) an inner tubular element, the elements being concentric
and radially spaced,
(c) a first ring joined to the outer tubular element, the ring
having an inwardly-directed groove,
(d) a second ring joined to the inner tubular element, the ring
having an outwardly-directed groove, each groove of the
first and second rings being with spaced, parallel radial
surfaces, and
(e) a junction element in the form of a washer having an
outer peripheral edge lying in the inwardly-directed
groove and an inner peripheral edge lying in the outward-
ly-directed groove, the «ige of the junction element lying
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
353
in each groove having an annular enlargement of circular means from its said second configuration to spring radially
cross-section that fits snugly between the radial surfaces, outwardly towards its said first configuration.
4,379,562
INDEXING APPARATUS
Carlos J. Corbacho, Newark, N.J., assignor to Joyal Products,
Inc., Linden, N.J.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,558
Int. a.3 B23Q 3/08
U.S. a. 279—5 9 Oaims
the grooves in the first and second rings having a depth in
the radial direction that is at least greater than the minor
diameter of the enlargement.
4,379,561
WELL PACKER
Hugh D. Nelson, Sydney, Australia, assignor to Mono Pumps
Limited, Manchester, England
Filed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,568
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 29, 1981,
8102742
Int. a.3 E21B 23/00, 43/00
U.S. a. 277—237 R 20 Oaims
1. A well packer comprising: a packer sleeve means; means
defining a tapered external surface portion of said packer
sleeve; expansible annular collet means; means defining an
internal surface to said collet means of a tai>er able to cooperate
with that of the external tapered surface portion of the packer
sleeve means; means defining an external surface of said collet
means capable of frictionally engaging a well casing pipe hav-
ing a diameter larger than the external diameter of the packer
sleeve means; said expansible collet means being resiliently
deformable from a relaxed first configuration in which it has a
first diameter to a second configuration in which it has a diam-
eter smaller than said first diameter and it engages the tapered
external surface portion of the packer sleeve means; collet-
holding means for holding said collet means in said second
configuration while engaged around the tapered external sur-
face portion of the packer sleeve means; and collet release
means operable from a remote location to release said collet
1. Indexing apparatus, comprising rotating means for incre-
mentally rotating a workpiece to be indexed, said routing
means including a first end, a second end, a first tubular mem-
ber, a second tubular member mounted for reciprocating and
rotating movement within said first tubular member, gripping
means threadedly attached to said second tubular member at
said first end of said rotating means and keyed to said first
tubular member such that said gripping means is free to move
axially relative to said first tubular member but is prevented
from rotating relative to said first tublar member, said gripping
means being movable in response to the axial position of said
second tubular member relative to said first tubular member
between a first position in which said gripping means grips the
workpiece to be indexed and a second position in which said
gripping means releases a workpiece after it has been indexed,
locking means for releasably locking said first tublar member
to said second tubular member such that said second tubular
member is rotatable conjointly with said first tubular member,
and determining means for determining the increments of
rotation of said rotating means, said determining means being
removably positioned adjacent to said second end of said rotat-
ing means to facilitate the removal of said determining means
for replacement purposes; moving means positioned between
said gripping means and said determining means for moving
said gripping means between said first position and said second
position in response to the axial position of said second tubular
member relative to' said first tubular member, said moving
means including reciprocating means for axially reciprocating
said second tubular member within said first tubular member
and connecting means for connecting said reciprocating means
to said second tubular member such that said second tubular
member is rotatable about its longitudinal axis relative to said
first tubular member when said second tubular member is not
locked to said first tubular member, whereby said second
tubular member can be rotated relative to said first tubular
member and hence said gripping means when said second
tubular member is not locked to said first tubular member to
thereby threadedly detach said gripping means from said sec-
ond tubular member for replacement purposes.
4,379,563
AUXIUARY ICE SKATE BLADE
Serge Arsenault, 1700 Longneuil, St Bmiio, Qncbec, Canada
FUed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,125
Int. a.J A63C 3/00
U.S. a. 280—7.1 7 Clains
1. An auxiliary ice skate blade for attachment to a skate blade
secured to a skate boot, said auxiliary skate blade comprising a
rigid blade support member having a lower blade retention
354
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
slot, a narrow elongated blade having an ice contacting edge 4,379,565
portion and a securable upper end portion retained in said NONFOULING WHEEL HOUSING FOR COMPACTION
retention slot, and attachment means in said support member VEHICLE
Charles F. Riddle, Brookfield, Wis., assignor to Rexworks Inc.,
Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,202
• U. Int. a.3 B60R 79/00
^J_ ^ U.S. a. 280— 160 lOQaims
for detachable securement of said support member to a skate
blade secured to a boot whereby said skate blade and elongated
blade are in axial planar alignment.
4,379,564
ROLLER SKATE
John J. Welker, 1904 LaFontenay a., Louisville, Ky. 40223
Continuation of Ser. No. 75,699, Sep. 14, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,630
Int. a.^A63C 77/74
U.S. a. 280—11.2 7 Qaims
'37 38
1. A roller skate comprising:
a foot-plate member with a toe portion and a heel portion
having at least two pairs of slots in said toe portion
thereof, each pair of slots being aligned and on opposite
sides of said member receiving a first adjustable belt there-
through, said member including means on said heel por-
tion receiving a second adjustable belt therethrough; and,
a first front pair of aligned spaced rollers rotatively
mounted to a first axle of a first truck assembly including
a support portion centrally disposed of said first axle and
extending transversely from the underside of said toe
portion of said member and a second rear pair of aligned
spaced rollers rotatively mounted to a second axle of a
second truck assembly, said second truck assembly includ-
ing a support portion centrally disposed of said second
axle and extending transversely from the underside of said
heel portion of said member, spacing between rollers of
said first pair of spaced rollers is less than the spacing
between rollers of said second pair of rollers, the center of
the tread of each of said rollers of said first pair of rollers
being in substantially longitudinal alignment with the
inside edge of each of said rollers of said second pair of
rollers which are on the same side of said member, said
first pair of rollers and said second pair of rollers being of
substantially the same size and diameter whereby the first
and second axles swing in use in opposite directions to
enable steering of said roller skate by tilting of the foot
plate member.
1. In a vehicle for compacting sanitary landfill refuse and the
like including paired, opposite cleated drum wheels spaced
from the respective side walls of the vehicle housing, said walls
extending downward to the projected underside of the vehicle,
wheel closure means between each side wall and wheel com-
prising a partial cylinder extending from the wall to the periph-
ery of the wheel drum which is above the projected underside
of the vehicle, and a flat plate fixed to and extending from the
vehicle underside to the inner wheel face and joined to the
lower margins of said fixed partial cylinder, the minimum
operating clearance which is required to be provided between
said fixed cylinder and wheel drum being located a substantial
distance from the side wall such that refuse is unlikely to be
drawn into said clearance and, for example, wrapped around
the axle housing.
4,379,566
OPERATOR POWERED VEHICLE
Steven E. Titcomb, Stoneham, Mass., assignor to Creative Mo-
tion Industries, Inc., Danvers, Mass.
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,264
Int. a.3 B62K 27/7*. B62M 1/04
U.S. a. 280—251 38 Oaims
1. An operator powered vehicle comprising:
a. a vehicle frame;
b. a drive-wheel assembly including drive hub, a drive wheel
rotatably mounted on said frame, and coupling means
including a unidirectional clutch coupling said hub to said
drive wheel to prevent relative forward rotation of said
hub with respect to said drive wheel but permit relative
\
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
3SS
forward rotation of said drive wheel with respect to said
hub;
c. a force-reception element mounted on said frame for
reciprocation from a rest position thereof to other position
thereof;
d. a cable attached to said force-reception element and
trained in a path for travel upon movement of said force-
reception element, said cable being coupled to said hub to
permit rotation of said hub without travel of said cable
when said force-reception element is in its rest position but
to constrain said hub, while said force-reception element is
in at least a drive portion of its other positions, to rotate in
the forward direction upon travel of said force-reception
element away from said rest position thereof, propulsion
of said vehicle forward thereby being possible by recipro-
cation if said force-reception element, but rearward move-
ment of said vehicle being possible without travel of said
cable when said force-reception element is in its rest posi-
tion.
4379,568
ARTICULATED TRACTOR LOADER WITH SIDE REAR
VIEW MIRRORS
Thomas W. Kerkman, Salem, Wis., assignor to Dresser Indus-
tries, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Not. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,105
Int. a.3 B62D 63/04
U.S. a. 280—400 4 Claims
4,379,567
FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR A MOTORCYCLE
Valentino Ribi, Genoa, Italy, assignor to Honda Giken Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Asaka, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,373
Oaims priority, application Italy, Nov. 22, 1979, 12835 A/79
Int. a.3 B62K 21/02
U.S. a. 280— 276 llQaims
1. A front suspension wheel system for a motorcycle wheel,
comprising
(a) a downwardly and forwardly inclined suspension struc-
ture mounted on the steering column;
(b) two swinging arms pivoted at one end to said suspension
structure and at the other end to a wheel-carrying element
so that said suspension structure, said two swinging arms
and said wheel-carrying element form an articulated quad-
rilateral;
(c) resilient means acting on said ariiculated quadrilateral to
oppose relative movement between said suspension struc-
ture and said wheel-carrying element due to a load applied
to the motorcycle;
(d) a swinging lever having one part fulcrumed to said sus-
pension structure, and another part connected to said
resilient means and to a downwardly extending connect-
ing rod;
(e) a prolongation on said wheel-carrying element extending
forwardly beyond the pivot points between said two
swinging arms and said wheel-carrying element, and
adapted for mounting a motorcycle wheel;
(0 said articulated quadrilateral being located rearwardly of
said suspension structure and said resilient means being
mounted on a forward portion of said suspension structure
and being connected to one of (1) said two swinging arms
and (2) said wheel-carrying element, through said con-
necting rod.
1. In an articulated tractor loader comprising a front frame
section supported on front rubber tired wheels and supporting
an of>erator's cab, a rear frame section hingedly connected to
the front frame section and supported on rear rubber tired
wheels and supporting a power plant, said front wheels and
said rear wheels being disposed outboard of their respective
frame sections, a pair of right and left boom arms mounted on
transverse pivots on opposite sides of the front frame section
forwardly of the operator's cab, a pair of right and left support
standards fixedly mounted to the sides of the front frame sec-
tion and supporting a pair of right and left headlight housings
forwardly of the cab and above the boom arm pivots outboard
of the front frame section, and a pair of right and left side rear
view convex mirrors mounted to the headlight housings pro-
viding a panoramic rearward and downward view looking
from the operator's cab, said view including at least the sides of
the tractor loader vehicle rearwardly of the front wheels, the
ground area between said front and rear wheels, and a ground
area rearwardly of the rear wheels.
4,379,569
TRAILER HITCH ADAPTOR
Richard L. Koch, 314 E. Rovey Ave., Phoenix, Ariz. 85012
FUed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,518
Int. a.5 B60D 1/06
U.S. a. 280—415 A 3 Claims
V
1. A hitch adaptor for use in combination with a pintle hook
that is mounted to a towing vehicle to convert the pintle hook
hitch into a ball-and-socket type, the pintle hook hitch includ-
ing a hook and closure member that form an eyelet when
mated, the hitch adaptor including a cylindrical bar that is
closely received through the eyelet, the improvement compris-
ing:
the bar extending beyond the width of the pintle hook hitch;
a base plate mounted along the length of the bar and extend-
ing directly therefrom having a first aperture formed
centrally therein to accommodate the hook and closure
member and a second aperture formed near the rear por-
tion of said base plate to receive a ball member; and
mounting means disposed at each end of the bar for affixing
356
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
the hitch adaptor to the towing vehicle while providing
stability and preventing rotation of the hitch adaptor
about the pintle hook hitch.
4,379,570
SKI STOPPER
Gerhard Sedlmair, Farchant, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Marker-Patentverwertungsgesellschaft mbH., Baar, Switzer-
land
Filed May 22, 1980, Ser. No. 152,193
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 23,
1979, 2920981
Int. a.3 A63C 7/10
U.S. a. 280—605 6 Qaims
2. A ski brake mountable on a ski for impeding the move-
ment of a ski down a slope when the ski is detached from a
skier's boot, said ski brake comprising:
first and second braking spurs, said first braking spur being
on the opposing side of the ski from said second braking
spur;
a pivot pin having an axis; said braking spurs being moveable
about said axis of said pivot pin between a non-braking
skiing position and a braking position;
a base plate fixed to said ski, said base plate pivotally con-
necting said pivot pin to said ski;
an arm attached to said pivot pin, said arm operable by a ski
boot for moving said braking spurs from said braking
position to said non-braking position when said boot en-
gages said arm;
spring biassing means on said arm for biassing said braking
spurs to said braking position when said ski is detached
from a skier's boot;
coupling means for coupling said spring biassing means to
said ski; and
connecting means spaced from said pivot pin axis for releas-
ably connecting said coupling means to said ski, said cou-
pling means being deliberately releasable from said con-
necting means to disable said spring biassing means.
4,379,571
TRAILER WITH ADJUSTABLE WHEELS
Lovel R. Simmons, P.O. Box 1206, Jackson, Miss. 39205
Continuation of Ser. No. 925,308, Jul. 17, 1978, abandoned. This
appUcation Feb. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 119,094
Int. a.3 B62D 61/10
U.S. a. 280—656 2 Claims
30 "
1. A load carrying machine comprising structure of substan-
tially rectangular outline having a front end and a back end for
receiving and supporting a load, a plurality of wheels compris-
ing at least two sets of wheels, each set comprising at least four
wheels arranged as two tandem pairs, the pairs of each set
being axially spaced transversely of said machine, one set of
which is adjacent the front end and one set of which is adjacent
the rear end of said load supporting structure, the wheels of
each tandem pair being respectively adjacent opposite sides of
said structure, said front set of wheels being mounted from said
machine for pivoting about a substantially vertical axis, means
interconnecting said wheels and said structure for moving
axially spaced tandem pairs of said wheels of each set toward
and away from one another axially of such wheels, and means
for moving all of said wheels up and down relative to said
supporting structure to vary the height of said supporting
structure, the underside of said structure adjacent the front
thereof being substantially flat to permit said front set of
wheels to pivot with said wheels in axially extended relation,
the wheels of each tandem pair respectively being mounted on
tandem pairs of pivot arms, each tandem pair of pivot arms
being pivoted on a common member, each such member being
mounted from said structure for rocking about a respective axis
transverse of said machine, said pivot arms being pivoted on
said member relatively adjacent the upper portion of said
member and diverging downwardly therefrom respectively in
fore and aft directions, and wherein the means for moving
up-and-down comprises means acting between pairs of pivot
arms to effect pivoting thereof to raise or lower the wheels
relative to said supporting structure, said arms having portions
thereof abuttable with lower portions of a respective common
member to serve as stops for said arms to limit lowering of said
wheels.
4,379,572
UNIVERSAL AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
William E. Hedenberg, 490 Buffalo Grove, Buffalo Grove, 111.
60090
Filed May 12, 1980, Ser. No. 149,008
Int. a.3 B60G 11/26
U.S. a. 280-711 2 Claims
1. An air suspension system for a vehicle, said vehicle having
a frame, a front axle, at least one rear axle and wheels mounted
near opposite ends of said rear axle, said air suspension system
being mounted adjacent each wheel on said rear axle to sup-
port at least that portion of the load of said vehicle applied
through said frame to said axle and to absorb forces imparted
to each wheel and said axle during movement of said vehicle,
said air suspension system including carrier arm means having
a pivotal link means at the rear end thereof, one end of said
pixotal link means being pivotally connected to said frame, and
a mounting platform portion, said mounting platform portion
being pivotally connected to the other end of said pivotal link
means, said carrier arm means being connected to said axle by
an axle hanger assembly being fixedly attached to said mount-
ing platform portion of said carrier arm means at a lower
portion thereof, said air suspension system including means to
adjust the alignment of said axle after mounting of said air
suspension, said means to adjust alignment being pivotally
connected between the forward end of said carrier arm means
and said frame, and an air spring disposed on said mounting
platform portion of said carrier arm means between said piv-
otal link means and said axle hanger assembly and interposed
between said mounting platform portion and said frame.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
357
4^79,573
BUSINESS FORM WITH REMOVABLE LABEL AND
METHOD FOR PRODUCTNG THE SAME
Ronald C. Lomeli, and Gary E. Stewart, both of Phoenix, Ariz.,
assignors to Trade Printers, Inc., Phoenix, Ariz.
Filed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 188,502
Int. a.3 G09F 3/04
U.S. a. 428—42 1 Oaim
1. A business form having a die cut label area removable
therefrom, said form including
(a) a sheet of paper having a back side, an imprinted front
side and an outer peripheral edge;
(b) at least one piece of transfer tape including a layer of
adhesive adjacent a layer of backing material and having
an outer peripheral edge, said tape being secured to a
limited area on the back of said paper sheet by contacting
said sheet with said layer of adhesive such that the outer
peripheral edge of said piece of transfer tape generally lies
within said outer peripheral edge of said paper sheet; and
(c) a label area die cut in said sheet of paper above said piece
of transfer tape and having an outer peripheral edge,
(i) the outer peripheral edge of said die cut label generally
lying within the outer peripheral edge of said transfer
tape,
(ii) a portion of said business form lying between the
peripheral edge of said die cut label and the peripheral
edge of said transfer tape and including a first portion of
said layer of adhesive sandwiched between a section of
said sheet of paper and a section of the layer of backing
material of said transfer tape, and
(iii) a second portion of said layer of adhesive
lying between said label and said layer of backing mate-
rial of said transfer tape, and
adhering to said label and separating from said backing
material when said label is f)eeled away from said
backing material, and
said transfer tape being sized such that said first portion of
adhesive in said portion of said business form between the
peripheral edge of said die cut label and the peripheral edge of
said transfer tape is sufficient to maintain said transfer tape in
position on said paper sheet when said label is peeled from said
backing material of said transfer tape.
4,379,574
RADIATOR ASSEMBLY (BAYONET LOCK)
Ludwig Leichtl, Troy, Mich., assignor to Ex-Cell-O Corpora-
tion, Troy, Mich.
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,836
Int a.3 F16L 5/02
U.S. a. 285—211 5 Qaims
1. A tank assembly of the type utilized in a heat exchanger
such as a radiator, said assembly comprising; a tank wall hav-
ing an opening, a cylindrical spout extending from said open-
ing in said tank wall, said spout having a lower portion extend-
ing into said opening, said lower portion having at least two
radially extending tabs, said opening having a skiri extending
inwardly from said tank wall, said skirt having at least two
cam/lock sections with each cam/lock section including a cam
surface leading from a receiving end to a locking recess, said
cam surface increasing in distance from said tank wall in the
direction from said receiving end thereof to said locking re-
cess, said spout and said tank wall having radially extending
overlying portions, and sealing means disposed between said
overlying portions, said tabs being disposed in said locking
recesses to compress said sealing means between said overlying
portions and retaining said spout in said opening, said overly-
ing portion of said tank wall defining an annular seal recess to
define an annular shoulder for radially retaining said sealing
means in said recess, said spout including an upper cylindrical
portion of a greater diameter than said lower portion thereof,
said overlying portion of said spout comprising a radially
extending shoulder integrally interconnecting said upper and
lower portions, the outer diameter of said upper portion of said
spout being no greater than the diameter of said annular shoul-
der of said seal recess.
4,379,575
COMPOSITE COUPLING
Charles L. Martin, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to Raychem Cor-
poration, Menio Park, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 118,867, Feb. 6, 1980, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 608,209, Aug. 27, 1975, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 404,723, Oct. 9, 1973,
abandoned, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 404,724, Oct.
9, 1973, abandoned. This application May 15, 1981, Ser. No.
263,993
Int. a.3 F16L 77/02
U.S. a. 285—369 5 Qaims
1. A composite coupling for joining cylindrical substrates
which comprises:
(a) a tubular heat recoverable compression sleeve made of a
memory metal that recovers when heated above its transi-
tion temperature; and
(b) a tubular metallic insert snuggly and concentrically dis-
posed within the sleeve, the insert having an interior
principal surface adjacent to the substrates when said
substrates are inserted into the coupling and an exterior
principal surface adjacent to the sleeve, each principal
surface including a plurality of axially spaced apart radial
teeth, the teeth being aligned pairwise, one over the other,
each tooth on the exterior principal surface of the insert
having a width greater than the width of its aligned tooth
on the interior principal surface for maximum transmission
of recovery forces to the substrates, the insert being capa-
ble of forming a secure and gas-tight connection between
said substrates when said sleeve is heated above its transi-
tion temperature.
358
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,576 retraction of said lock bolt, said door striker plate being l-i-
SLIDING CLOSURE SECURITY SYSTEM shaped, and said locking plate being slidably mounted within a
LeVone A. Blough, 4437 Mumford Dr., Hoffmann Estates, 111.
60195, and David L. Gregory, 10207 Union Park Dr., Or-
lando, Fla. 32817
Filed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,617
Int. a.' E05C 3/04
V.S. a. 292—205 15 Qaims
■
u .t '<
■ ° 1 ^ "■ 1
"^I'A
.ft
1 Jr:^
. ^- "">
- p-v
i
A
L-i -shaped spacer plate, said i-i -shaped spacer plate being
mounted within said striker plate.
1. A locking system for securing sliding closures which
move within tracks and wherein at least one of the sliding
closures comprises a glass patio door formed of a glass pane
and a frame mounting the pane to form a recess defined by the
pane and peripheral edge surfaces of the frame bounding said
pane, comprising:
locking means attached to the closures for preventing rela-
tive movement therebetween when in an operative config-
uration and for allowing relative movement between the
sliding closures when in an inoperative configuration, the
locking means comprising a stationary locking element
mounted to a face of one of the closures and a pivotable
stop element mounted to a leading edge of the other clo-
sure, the stop element being pivotable to a blocking rela-
tionship with the stationary locking element to prevent
movement between the closures, the stationary locking
element further comprising a U-shaped portion and a
flange portion extending vertically from a first leg of the
U-shaped portion when the stationary locking element is
disposed with the longitudinal axis thereof in a vertical
orientation, the U-shaped portion fitting into the recess
contiguous to lower horizontal peripheral edge surfaces of
the frame and being spaced from vertical peripheral edge
surfaces of the frame, and means for mounting the station-
ary mounting element to the frame; and,
blocking means disposed upon upper horizontal frame sur-
faces of the closures between said closures and the tracks
for preventing the closures from being lifted out of the
tracks.
4,379,577
LATCH BOLT STRIKE LOCK
Gene V. Robertson, 1906 Esther Dr., Carlisle, Pa. 17013
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,691
Int. a.3 E05C 13/02
U.S. a. 292—341.15 11 Oaims
1. A latch bolt strike lock comprised of a door jamb, said
ooor jamb having a recessed portion, a door lock mounted in
a door, said door lock having a lock bolt, said lock bolt having'
a flat face, having a bolt locking recess in said flat face, being
movable between extended and retracted positions, and engag-
ing said recessed portion of said door jamb when said door is
closed and said lock bolt is in the extended position, there not
being any holes, openings or grooves in the rim of said recess,
a door striker plate attached to said door jamb and having an
opening therein corresponding to said recessed portion of said
door jamb to allow entry of said lock bolt, and a locking plate
attached to or mounted in or on said striker plate so as to be
reciprocal between a first position wherein said locking plate
does not engage said bolt locking recess in said lock bolt and a
second position wherein said locking plate engages said bolt
locking recess in said lock bolt to thereby prevent undesired
4,379,578
REUSABLE BOTTLE HOLDER
Heriberto Schuler, P.O. Box 1553, Casselberry, Fla. 32707
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 126,455, Mar. 3, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 246,084
Int. aj B65D 23/10
U.S. a. 294—31.2 5 Qaims
1. A reusable bottle holder adapted to be used with a necked
bottle having a neck flange comprising:
a handle member; and
means connected to the handle member for securing the
neck of the bottle having a top member having an aperture
with a width greater than the width of the neck of the
bottle immediately above the neck flange; a side wall
connected to the perimeter of said top member having a
width greater than the width of the neck flange; and a
bottom member connected to the side wall, and having a
semi-annular first section with a central angle greater than
one hundred eighty degrees (180*) and terminating in a
pair of projections disposed a distance less than the diame-
ter of the neck of the bottle immediately below the flange,
from each other, and an angular section gently sloping
from the respective projections to the side wall, said semi-
annular first section having a radius which is approxi-
mately the same as the radius of the neck of the bottle
immediately below the neck flange.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
359
4,379,579
AUTOMATIC LOCKING AND EJECTING HOOK
ASSEMBLY
Richard S. Mahan, Cuyahoga Falls; Paul G. Tritt, Norton, both
of Ohio, and James H. Ward, Jr., Plymouth, N.C., assignors
to The B. F. Goodrich Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,120
Int. a.^ B66C 1/38; A44B 13/00
U.S. a. 294—83 R ' Claims
r>
extending position when said second body part is longitudi-
nally moved with respect to said first body part by a traction
on the rope, and
wherein said second body part comprises a guiding rod for
launching the grapnel along a ballistic trajectory by means
of a launching tube, said guiding rod forming the tail
portion of said body, said means for atUching a rope
comprising means for reUining a first end of at least one
loop of said rope on said second body part near the for-
ward end of said guiding rod and comprising a movable
attaching member slidably mounted on said guiding rod
and retaining a second end of said loop of the rope, so as
to retain the rope in the stretched condition thereof near
the free end of said guiding rod.
1. An automatic hook assembly for locking a ring in a hook
load retaining eye when loaded and ejecting the ring from the
eye upon release of the load comprising a hook body having a
hook portion, a hook supporting portion spaced from said
hook portion, a locking and ejecting cam pivotally mounted on
said hook body between said hook portion and said supporting
portion, said cam having a locking jaw movable into a locking
position at said load retaining eye, a releasable latch pivotally
mounted on said body, said latch being engageable with said
cam to lock said jaw in said locking position, an actuating
member connected to said latch for arming said hook assembly
by rotating said latch out of engagement with said cam, said
cam having an ejecting surface for engagement with said ring,
resilient means connected to said releasable latch and to said
cam for yieldingly urging said cam in a direction to maintain
said releasable latch in said locking position prior to arming of
said assembly and in the same direction after arming to move
said hook jaw out of said locking position and press said cam
ejecting surface against said ring for ejecting said ring upon
release of loading pressure by said hook on said hook portion
of said body.
4,379,580
GRAPNEL
Jackie Staempfli, Geneva, Switzerland, assignor to Valinor,
S.A., Vaduz, Liechtenstein
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,734
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 22, 1980,
4004/80
Int. a.3 B66C 1/10: F42B 13/56
U.S. a. 294—86 R « Claims
1. A grapnel comprising a substantially rod-shaped body, a
plurality of grapnel arms and means for attaching a rope, said
body comprising at least first and second body parts in longitu-
dinally movable relationship with each other, said grapnel
arms being pivotably mounted on said first body part and
adapted for pivoting between a retracted position close to the
body and a position in which they are outwardly extending
from said body, each arm comprising a cam-shaped portion
adapted to co-operate with an actuating piston coupled to said
second body part so as to urge said arms into the outwardly
4,379,581
TAKE-OUT TONG ASSEMBLY
Jack I. Perry, Sylvania, Ohio, assignor to Owens-IUinois, Inc.,
Toledo, Ohio
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,765
Int. aJ B66C 1/42. 1/28
U.S. a. 294—115 ♦ Claims
1. In glassware take-out mechanism wherein a pair of op-
posed tongs are moved into operative relationship with respect
to the neck or finish of a glass container and closed about the
neck for lifting the container by the neck and transferring the
container to a machine dead plate, the improvement in the long
operating mechanism comprising:
a cylinder housing;
a piston positioned in said cylinder housing having a rod
extending vertically downward therefrom;
a bifurcated hanger assembly extending generally parallel to
said piston rod and at either side thereof;
a shaft extending between the lower ends of said hanger
assembly;
a pair of tong holders mounted on said shaft and pivotally
supported with respect to the axis of said shaft;
a compression spring biasing said piston in a downward
direction into its lowermost positions;
at least a pair of equal length links pivotally connected to
and extending from the lower end of said piston rod to the
1029 O.G.— 15
360
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
upper ends of said tong holders respectively, said links
describing a straight line when the piston rod is in its fully
extended, lowermost position.
4,379,582
DEVICE FOR IMPROVING AERODYNAMIC AND
SAFETY CHARACTERISTICS OF AUTOMOTIVE
VEHICLES
Tsutomu Miwa, 3010-8, Sayainagaoka, l-Cbome, Tokorozawa-
shi, Saitama 359, Japan
per No. PCr/JP80/00020, § 371 Date Oct. 7, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 7, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01672, PCT Pub.
Date Aug. 21, 1980
PCT FUed Feb. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 194,831
Oajms priority, application Japan, Feb. 9, 1979, 54-014920;
Feb. 14, 1979, 54-016774
Int. a.J B62D 35/00
U.S. a. 296-1 S 6 Qainis
1 A device for improving the aerodynamic and safety char-
acteristics of an automotive vehicle, comprising an impact
absorbing member defining an air induction passage extending
longitudinally of the vehicle for directing air upwardly and
rearwardly of the vehicle from a point forward thereof and
through a passage outlet during vehicle movement, and an
anti-lift member formed of a material being mounted in said air
induction passage, said anti-lift member having a trailing edge
positioned higher than a leading edge thereof, said impact
absorbing member and anti-lift member being located below
the level of a vehicle hood.
4,379 583
VEHICLE CABS HAVING AIRFLOW DEFLECTORS ON
THEIR ROOFS
Merrick W. Taylor, George R. Allen, both of Warwickshire, and
Terence Strong, Coventry, all of England, assignors to Motor
Panels (Coventry) Limited, Coventry, England
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,391
Int. a.3 B62D 35/00. 33/06
U.S.a.296-lS ^ 9aainis
connecting means between said deflector adjacent a front edge
thereof and a front upper portion of the cab whereby said
deflector can be swung about a horizontal axis between raised
and lowered positions relative to the cab, side walls and a rear
wall extensibly connected between said deflector and the cab,
means for swinging said deflector upwardly about said pivotal
connecting means and means to retain said deflector in a raised
position at which said deflector and said side and rear walls
define a compartment above the cab, an opening in the roof of
the cab providing access to said compartment from the cab,
and a bunk extending transversely of the cab in an elevated
position within the envelope defined by the cab and said com-
partment and substantially directly above said driver's seat,
said bunk being accessible by way of said opening when said
deflector is in a raised position.
4,379,584
MOTORCYCLE SAFETY WINDSHIELDS
Barry A. WiUey, 138 S. 8th Ave., Maywood, III. 60153
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,434
Int. a.3 B62J 17/04
U.S. a. 296-78.1 27 Qaims
y
••v
1. A cycle windshield assembly comprising, in combination,
a wind deflector shield unit and a shield mounting portion, said
shield unit having front and rear surfaces and a generally
transparent first portion adapted to be seen through by the
rider of an associated cycle and a second portion adapted to
receive mounting braces, at least one pair of spaced apart
mounting pad units, each of said pad units having a body
portion and a front surface portion with a contour correspond-
ing to the contour of said rear surface of said second portion of
said shield unit, said mounting pad front surface portion being
adhesively bonded to said rear shield surface, said mounting
pad body portion being adapted to receive mounting braces
which are in turn adapted to be fixedly received in use with
respect to a forward portion of an associated cycle.
4,379,585
EXTERNAL DOOR FOR VEHICLES
Leonard Strick, 2401 Pennsylvania Ave., Philadelphia, Pa.
19130
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,148
Int. a.3 B60J 5/12
U.S. a. 296—146 17 Claims
5?
^^^
>» ^40
I. A vehicle cab in which is a driver's seat and which has an 1. In a vehicle body for holding cargo therein having a first
airflow deflector on a roof thereof of generally plate form end, a pair of opposed sidewalk and a roof, said first end
extending over substantially the same width as the cab, pivotal including an opening communicating with the interior of said
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
361
body, the improvement comprising an externally disposed
sliding door assembly, said door assembly including sliding
door means movable from a stored position above said roof to
a pivoted open position wherein said door means covers said
opening but is pivoted outward from said opening about a
pivot axis located adjacent the bottom of said opening, said
door being pivotable to a pivoted closed position wherein said
door is pivoted toward said opening to fully close said opening.
4,379,587
SEAT STRUCTURE
Leo D. Duncan, R.R. #2, Webster, Wis. 54893
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,643
Int. a.3 A47C 9/00
U.S. a. 297—192
1 Claim
4,379,586
SLIDING ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLY
Milton C. Kaltz, Allen Park; Edward M. Chojnowski, North-
▼ille; David C. Garascia, NoW; Barney J. Bauer, Howell, and
Richard D. George, Brownstown, all of Mich., assignors to
American Sunroof Corporation, Southgate, Mich.
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,468
Int. a.3 B60J 7/04
U.S. a. "i^b—lll 27 Claims
.--^
iOi
1. A modular sliding roof panel assembly adapted to be
mounted to the stationary roof structure of a vehicle having an
opening in the roof thereof which is opened and closed by the
sliding roof panel, said assembly comprising:
an integral housing adapted to be mounted to the interior of
said stationary roof structure of said vehicle, said housing
having an aperture therein aligned with said opening in
said roof of said vehicle;
a movable roof panel;
guide rails mounted to said housing and extending in the
sliding direction of said movable roof panel;
front and rear guide shoes mounted to said movable roof
panel and engaging said guide rails for controlling the
movement of said movable roof panel between open and
closed positions, said front guide shoes being pivotally
mounted to said movable roof panel;
drive means including tArust transmitting drive cables opera-
bly connected to said rear guide shoes for moving said
movable roof panel between open and closed positions;
guide blocks mounted to said movable roof panel and having
a cam track formed therein;
cam follower means pivotally mounted to said rear guide
shoes and engageable with said guide blocks for selec-
tively raising the rear edge of said movable roof panel
above said stationary roof structure of said vehicle and for
lowering said rear edge of said movable roof panel below
said stationary roof structure such that said movable roof
panel can slide beneath said stationary roof opening;
actuator means for actuating said drive means;
means associated with the end of one of said cables, for
detecting when said movable roof panel is in the closed
position closing the roof opening; and
control means, responsive to said detecting means, for con-
necting said actuator means to said drive means to enable
said movable roof panel to be selectively moved to an
open position from said closed position and to a flip-up
venting position from said closed position.
1. A seat structure for fishing purposes particularly adapted
to be elevated upon an upstanding receptocle, having in combi-
nation
a rigid seat plate member,
a plurality of spaced leg members depending from said plate
member,
said leg members having open ended notches at their bottom
end portions,
a cylindrical upstanding receptacle forming a bucket mem-
ber having an upper rim portion,
said leg members being spaced to have their respective
notches seat upon said rim portion, and
said leg members being of such height as to elevate said plate
member in such spaced relation to said rim portion to
provide free reaching access into said bucket.
4,379,588
REVOLVING SOLAR LOUNGER
Donald G. Speice, 14 Barberry La., Westerly, R.I. 02891
FUed Not. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,548
Int a.J A47C il/OO
U.S. a. 297—217 7 Claims
1. A solar lounger comprising:
(a) a base;
(b) means for supporting a person in a recUned disposition on
said base;
(c) collecting means disposed in a substantially unobstructed
upwardly facing location on said lounger receiving and
collecting solar energy and continuously converting same
to electrical energy; and
(d) electrical motor means mounted in said lounger and
powered by said electrical energy continuously routing
said support means relative to said base during periods
when solar energy reaches said collecting means in said
lounger so that a person supported on the support means
receives even exposure to the sun's rays.
362
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4^79,589
RECLINABLE CHAIR
Mario H. S. Marino, Buenos Aires, Argentina, assignor to Inte-
rieur Forma S.A., Capital, Argentina
Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,818
Int. a.3 A47C 3/00
U.S. a. 297—299 4 Qaims
1. In a reclinable chair having a back and a seat articulated
for reclining movement of the back with respect to the seat, the
improvement comprising a generally U-shaped plate having
opposed legs disposed at an angle with respect to each other,
one of said legs being joined to said back and the other of said
legs being joined to said seat, the material of said plate exerting
a restoring force tending to restore said legs to said angle when
forced away from said angle, said plate being substantially
encased by a resilient material generally U-shaped in section,
with the legs of said plate being substantially encased within
the legs of said U-shaped resilient material, and said resilient
material includes a flap extending parallel to and between said
legs of said resilient material.
4 J79 590
VENTILATION AIR AND PROCESS AIR DISTRIBUTION
FOR IN SITU OIL SHALE RETORTS
C. Arthur Lefler, Casa Grande, Ariz.; John E. McCarthy, Palos
Verdes, Calif.; Gordon B. French, Bakersfield, Calif.; Eugene
A. Mills, Whittier, Calif., and David E. Miall, Lafayette, La.,
assignors to Occidental Oil Shale, Inc., Grand Junction, Colo.
Continuation of Ser. No. 24,459, Mar. 27, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 892,652, Apr. 13, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 768,878, Feb. 15,
1977, abandoned. This application Jul. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 165,081
Int. a.3 E21C 41/10
U.S. a. 299-2 26 Oaims
containing a fragmented permeable mass of formation particles
containing oil shale, the method comprising the steps of:
excavating an upper level of underground workings;
excavating a first inlet airway between above ground and at
least the upper level of underground workings;
excavating a lower level of underground workings at an
elevation below the elevation of the upper level of under-
ground workings;
excavating a second exhaust airway between above ground
and at least the lower level of underground workings ;
establishing air communication between the upper level of
underground workings and the lower level of under-
ground workings;
withdrawing ventilation air under pressure from the exhaust
airway for drawing ventilation air from above ground
through the inlet airway, through the upper level of un-
derground workings, through the air communication
between the upper level of underground workings and the
lower level of underground workings, and through the
lower level of underground workings into the exhaust
airway;
forming a plurality of in situ oil shale retorts, each of said
retorts having a top boundary at an elevation below the
elevation of the upper level of underground workings, a
bottom boundary at an elevatin at or above the elevation
of the lower level of underground workings and contain-
ing a fragmented permeable mass for formation particles
containing oil shale;
establishing air communication between the upper level of
underground workings and the top boundary of each of
plurality of such in situ oil shale retorts;
establishing a combustion zone in each of a plurality of such
in situ oil shale retorts having air communication with
upper level of underground workings;
withdrawing process off gas containing gaseous products
under pressure from the bottom boundaries of such a
plurality of in situ oil shale retorts having combustion
zones therein for drawing process air through the inlet
airway and through the upper level of underground work-
ings into such in situ oil shale retorts for advancing such a
combusion zone downwardly through such a fragmented
mass for retorting oil shale therein, wherein said process
off gas is withdrawn from-the in situ retorts at a pressure
lower than air pressure in the upper and lower level of
underground workings; and
withdrawing liquid products from the bottom boundary of
such in situ retorts having a combustion zone therein.
1. A method for recovering liquid and gaseous products
from a plurality of in situ oil shale retorts in a subterranean
formation containing oil shale, such an in situ oil shale retort
4,379,591
TWO-STAGE OIL SHALE RETORTING PROCESS AND
DISPOSAL OF SPENT OIL SHALE
Joseph P. Tassoney, Diamond Bar, Calif., assignor to Occidental
Oil Shale, Inc., Grand Junction, Colo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 752,990, Dec. 21, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 658,811,
Feb. 17, 1976, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No.
496,970, Aug. 13, 1974, abandoned. This application Aug. 21,
1980, Ser. No. 179,988
Int. a.3 E21B 4i/26
U.S. a. 299—2 7 Claims
1. A method for recovering shale oil from a subterranean
formation containing oil shale and for disposing of spent shale
from surface retorting, comprising the steps of:
forming an in situ oil shale retort containing a fragmented
permeable mass of formation particles containing oil shale;
retorting oil shale particles in the fragmented mass for pro-
ducing liquid and gaseous products of retorting and a
spent in situ retort containing a mass of hot in situ retorted
oil shale particles having a temperature sufficient to pro-
duce steam upon contact with water;
surface retorting a mass of formation particles containing oil
shale for producing liquid and gaseous products of retort-
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
363
ing and a mass of spent surface retorted formation parti-
cles;
drilling through the spent in situ retorted oil shale particles
with a drill bit carried on each of a plurality of elongated
conduits for installing the conduits at a plurality of loca-
tions spaced apart across the horizontal cross section of
the spent in situ oil shale retort and in fluid communication
with the hot in situ retorted oil shale particles;
which oil assumes desired fluidity in the oil-bearing bed
and for displacing oil to the recovery wells;
extracting oil from the recovery wells to the working gal-
lery;
extracting water through said additional wells simulta-
neously with the injection of the heat earner into the inlet
wells and extraction of oil from the recovery wells; and
delivering oil from said working gallery via the workings to
the ground surface.
r^'
■Arte r^tf*^^
~T
1 r
k
^/<**f /y*'***-'*
V^i
.% I -1
introducing a slurry containing water and the surface re-
torted spent oil shale particles into the spent in situ oil
shale retort through the conduits principally to the hot m
situ retorted oil shale particles for contacting at least said
hot in situ retorted oil shale particles with the water in said
slurry for generating steam in the spent in situ oil shale
retort; and
withdrawing steam from the spent in situ retort through one
or more outlet lines that open into a portion of the spent in
situ retort containing such generated steam.
4 379 592
METHOD OF MINING AN OIL-BEARING BED WITH
BOTTOM WATER
Gennady I. Vakhnin, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Oktyabrskaya, 2,
kv. 11; Vladimir G. Verty, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Kosmonav-
tov, 4, kv. 29; Pavel G. Voronin, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Mira,
4 kv. 6; Evgeny I. Gurov, ulitsa Mira, 2, kv. 3; Vladimir G.
iMikin, ulitsa 30 let Oktyabrya, 3, kv. 49; Vladimir N. Mis-
hakov, uKtsa Pushkinskaya, 1, kv. 4, all of Komi ASSR,
Ukhta; Alexandr I. Obrezkov, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Nef-
tyanikov, 1, kv. 14, Komi ASSR; Vitaly S. Sukrushev, poselok
Yarega, ulitsa Mira, 2, kv. 12, Komi ASSR, Ukhta; Vladimir
P. Tabakov, ulitsa Sofii Kovalevskoi, 4 "A", kv. 125, Moscow;
Boris A. Tjunkin, ulitsa Oplesnina, 30, kv. 33, and Ljudmila I.
Fotieva, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Lermontova, 10, kv. 1, both of
Komi ASSR, Ukhta, all of U.S.S.R.
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,242
Qaims priority, appUcation U.S.S.R., Apr. 17, 1979, 2749653
Int. a.3 E21C 41/10
U.S. a. 299—2 2 Qaims
4 379 593
METHOD FOR IN SITU SHALE OIL RECOVERY
Bernard E. Weichman, Houston, Tex., assignor to Multi Min-
eral Corporation, Houston, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 117,570, Feb. 1, 1980, Pat. No. 4,285,547.
This application Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,041
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 25,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' E21C 41/10
U.S. a. 299—2 *3 Qaims
.-fS
r':m
9. A method of preparing an underground stope having
generally vertical side walls for the in situ processing of oil
shale ore comprising the steps of:
(a) removing a portion of the oil shale ore from the stope;
(b) rubblizing the remaining ore in the stope;
(c) extracting the rubblized ore from the stope;
(d) crushing the extracted ore to obtain ore particles of a size
desired for retorting; and
(e) laterally supporting said side walls of the stope while the
rubblized ore is being extracted by restoring at least a
portion of the crushed oil shale particles to the stope at
approximately the same rate as the rubblized ore is ex-
tracted to maintain the stope substantially filled.
1. A method of mining an oil-bearing bed with bottom wa-
ter, comprising: . . , .
arranging a plurality of underground workings and at least
one working gallery;
drilling inlet and recovery wells from said working gallery;
drilling from said working gallery additional wells to the
water-bearing portion of the bed in the zone of oil contact
with bottom water;
force-feeding a heat carrier through the inlet wells into the
oil-bearing bed for heating the latter to a temperature at
4,379,594
PROCESS FOR SINKING OF SHAFTS
Alfred Zitz; Otto Schetina; Herwig WruUch, and Amulf Kiasich,
aU of Zeltweg, Austria, assignors to Voest-Alpine Aktien-
gesellschaft, Vienna, Austria
FUed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,382
Claims priority, appUcation Austria, Nov. 9, 1979, 7210/79
Int. a.3 E21D 1/06: E21C 41/00
IJ S CI 299—10 ^2 CuuBM
1. Process for sinking of shafts into the earth by means of a
partial-cut cutting tool, characterized in that the shaft is sunk
by means of a partial-cut cutting machine, having an umver-
sally pivouble cutting arm carrying at least one cuttmg head
364
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
and having a chassis fitted with crawler tracks, along a screw 4^79 595
surface in the earth having its axis coinciding with the shaft to SUPERPOSITIONED VEHICLE WHEEL BALANCE
WEIGHTS AND METHOD
o ^ Bernard J. Green, Bristol, Tenn., and Jerome J. Chorosevic,
Bristol, Va., assignors to Speed Qip Manufacturing Corp.,
Bristol, Tenn.
Filed Sep. 14, 1979, Ser. No. 75,665
Int. a.^ B60B 13/00
U.S. a. 301-5 B 4 Claims
be sunk, the cutting machine being moved on said screw sur-
face.
4 379 595
RIPPER WITH OFFSET IMPACTING MEANS AND
SLOTTED SHANK
Michael A. Roussin; Steven D. Jones, and Albert L. Woody, all
of Peoria, III., assignors to CaterpiUar Tractor Co., Peoria, III
per No. PCr/US81/00209, § 371 Date Feb. 17, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 17, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO82/02813, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 2, 1982
PCT Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 277,741
Int. a.3 EOlC 23/09: AOIB 35/00
U.S. a. 299-37 ,7 ci„.
1. A balance weight for counterbalancing vehicle wheels
having a rim flange with a protruding lip comprising,
a mass of a heavy metal having a body forming, a first bal-
ance weight for positioning on said flange,
a wheel securing means positioned on said weight for secur-
ing the weight to the wheel,
said body having a front face directed outwardly from the
wheel when the weight is affixed to the wheel,
said front face having a plurality of cutout areas for receiv-
ing at least one additional weight,
said cutout means including side wall and rear wall surfaces,
said side wall surfaces forming a retention means for said
additional weight,
said retention means for restraining said additional weight
from movement transverse to said side walls within the
plane parallel to the plane of said vehicle wheel,
at least one additional mass of heavy metal forming a balance
weight positioned within at least one of said cutout areas,
said additional weight including an adhesive layer to secure
said additional weight to said rear wall surface of said
cutout area to restrain said additional weight from move-
ment transverse to the plane of said vehicle wheel,
whereby more than one additional weight may be affixed to
said first balance weight without removing said first bal-
ance weight from said vehicle wheel.
1. In a ripper apparatus (11, lie) having a movable support
member (14,14fl), a ripper tip (13) mounted on said support
member and disposed for impacting movement along a first
hne (Li). and an impacting means (17) for intermittently apply-
ing an impacting force to said support member (14,14fl) in the
direction of a second line (L2), the improvement comprising
said first (L|) and second (L2) lines being substantially offset
relative to each other and spring means (25,25o) between
said impacting means (17) and said ripper tip (13) for
inducing transmission of said impacting force from said
second line (L2) to said first line (Li) directly.
4 379 597
EDGE LUGGED TIRE CARRYING RIMS, WHEELS AND
FASTENING ASSEMBLIES
William D. Walther, Kettering, Ohio, assignor to Dayton-
Walther Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Jun. 27, 1977, Ser. No. 810.436
Int. a.3 B60B 23/10
U.S. a. 301-12 R 4 Claims
1. A combination of dual inner and outer tire carrying rims
seated and locked by inner and outer rim fastening assemblies
on a vehicle wheel,
said wheel (120) having a plurality of inner and outer spoke
members, each of said inner spoke members having a
felloe comprising a radially outer axially oriented surface
(131) substantially parallel to the rotational axis of said
wheel and an adjacent radially inwardly directed surface
(132) substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis of
said wheel and providing a mounting location for an
axially projecting component of said fastening assemblies,
each of said outer spoke members having a felloe compris-
ing a radially inwardly directed surface (137) substantially
perpendicular to the rotational axis of said wheel and
providing a mounting location for an axially projecting
component of said fastening assemblies aiid an adjacent
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
365
radially inner axially oriented lateral surface (138) substan-
tially parallel to the rotational axis of said wheel,
each of said rims (121) having a rim base edge portion com-
prising a radially inclined axially inner surface intersecting
an axially oriented radially inner surface intersecting a
radially directed axially outer surface, said rim base edge
portion having a plurality of radially inwardly projecting
clamp lugs integrally secured thereto,
each said clamp lug (145) having a curved body portion
(148) with a radially outer face comprising surfaces for
mating engagement with conforming rim base edge por-
tion surfaces when each said clamp lug is being integrally
secured to said rim base edge portion,
each said clamp lug (145) still further having a radially
inwardly directed leg portion (146) extending inwardly
from said body portion (148) substantially perpendicular
to the rotational axis of said rim and having a bore (147)
therein for receiving said axially projecting component of
said fastening assemblies, said bore having an effective
diameter greater than the effective diameter of an axially
projecting component of said fastening assemblies,
each said clamp lug body portion having a radially inner
axially oriented lateral surface (152) adjacent said leg
portion (146),
each said outer rim fastening assembly (122) comprising said
axially projecting component and a clamp element (160)
and a rotatable nut (59) carried thereon, said clamp ele-
ment having a bore (161) therein for receiving said axially
felloe surfaces (138); said final tightening of said rotatable
nuts (59) against said axially outer clamp element surfaces
(166) locking said rim on said wheel by the full surface
engagement of said axially inner clamp element surfaces
(165) with said clamp lug leg portions (146) and by the full
surface engagement of said clamp lug leg portions (146)
with said radially inwardly directed wheel felloe surfaces
(137).
4,379,598
MAGNETIC BEARING
Michael P. Goldowsky, Valhalla, N.Y., assignor to North Ameri-
can Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,058
Int. a.3 F16C i9m
U.S. a. 308—10 15 Qainis
K-i?
» y^
r ' ^'^
projecting component, said bore having an effective diam-
eter greater than the effective diameter of said axially
projecting component,
each said clamp element further having dual concentric and
segmental axially movable axially oriented surfaces; a
radially outer surface (163) and a radially inner surface
(164),
each said clamp element still further having parallel axially
movable radially directed surfaces; an axially inner surface
(165) and an axially outer surface (166),
whereby, said inner rim is seated on, and thereafter locked
on, said wheel by initial and final tightening of said inner
rim fastening assemblies against each said clamp lug leg
portion, said initial tightening of said inner rim fastening
assemblies seating said axially oriented clamp lug lateral
surfaces (152) in concentric registry with said axially
oriented wheel felloe surfaces (131); said final tightening
of said inner rim fastening assemblies locking said rim on
said wheel by the full surface engagement of said clamp
lug leg portions (146) with said radially inwardly directed
wheel felloe surfaces (132),
and, whereby, said outer rim is seated on, and thereafter
locked on, said wheel by initial and final tightening of said
outer rim fastening assemblies, said initial tightening of
said rototable nuts (59) against said axially outer clamp
element surfaces (166) seating said axially oriented clamp
lug lateral surfaces (152) in concentric registry with said
radially outer clamp element surfaces (163) and seating
said radially inner clamp element surfaces (164) in concen-
tric registry with said radially inner axially oriented wheel
1. A bearing structure comprising
an inner cup-shaped ring of magnetic material, having an
outer surface and outwardly extending fianges,
a first permanent magnet ring comprising a plurality of
angularly distributed, radially and axially extending seg-
ments disposed on said outer surface between said fianges,
said ring supporting and restraining said segments and
providing a fiux return path for said first ring,
an outer cup-shaped ring of magnetic material, having an
inner surface and inwardly extending fianges, and
a second permanent magnet ring comprising a plurality of
angulariy distributed, radially and axially extending seg-
ments disposed on said inner surface between said in-
wardly extending flanges, said outer ring supporting and
restraining the segments of said second ring and providing
a flux return path therefor,
said first and second rings being spaced from each other to
provide a gap therebetween, said magnets being poled
perpendicular to the gap with like poles facing one an-
other.
4,379,599
BEARING INNER RING
Yngre Sundqvist, Partille, Sweden, assignor to SKF Industries,
Inc., King of Prussia, Pa.
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 221,018
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 28, 1980, 8000631
Int. a.5 F16C n/5i. 33/66
U.S. a. 308—187 2 Ctaims
1. An inner ring for a rolling bearing having at least one
raceway, a plurality of rolling elements travelling in a prede-
366
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
termined direction relative to said raceway, means defining a
plurality of closely spaced grooves which extend over substan-
tially the entire raceway surface substantially transversely to
said predetermined direction of the rolling elements, said
grooves being formed by a grinding operation on said inner
raceway surface and the spacing between adjacent grooves
being less than about one hundredth the diameter of a rolling
element, said grooves operable to retain a lubricant therein and
form a layer or film between the raceway and the rolling
elements.
first position, a flap hingably attached to the cabinet and dis-
posed within said opening, said flap being movable with re-
spect to said top surface from a position substantially coplanar
with said top surface to positions approximately 90 degrees
above and 90 degrees below said top surface, and interlock
4,379,600
JOURNAL BEARING WITH DUST SEAL
Armin M iiller, Kronungen, Fed, Rep. of Germany, assignor to
FAG Kugelfischer Georg Schafer & Co., Schweinfurt, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,390
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 20.
1979, 7935867[U]
Int. a.3 F16C 33/80
U.S. a. 308-187.1 4 Qaims
', ' '°r^— .,£.
3
1. In a journal bearing having an inner race and an outer race
with confronting, generally cylindrical coaxial surfaces ac-
commodating a set of rotary bodies in a clearance therebe-
tween,
the combination therewith of a sealing ring of generally
L-shaped half-section centered on the axis of said surfaces
and provided with a plastically deformed peripheral lip
received in an annular groove of one of said surfaces near
an annular edge thereof, said sealing ring having a web
extending radially close to the other of said surfaces at a
location spaced axially outwardly from said groove for
substantially closing said clearance toward the outside,
said one of said surfaces being formed with a transverse
shoulder spaced axially inwardly from said groove, and an
annular member centered on said axis and in contact with
said one of said surfaces between said shoulder and said
groove, said member being provided with an annular
camming edge overlappmg said groove and facing said
sealing ring while locking said lip in said groove.
4,379,601
SEWING MACHINE CRADLE SAFETY INTERLOCK
William G. Hauser, Faawood, NJ., assignor to The Singer
Company, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Set. No. 244,376
Int. a.^ A47B 81/00
U.S. a. 312-21 5 ciai^
1. A cabinet for a sewing machine having a top surface
provided with an opening through which a sewing machine
may project, a sewing machine, a platform having the machine
mounted thereon and being movable with respect to said top
surface into either a first position within said opening below
the level of the said top surface and substantially horizontal for
sewing, or a second position extending downwardly under said
top surface for storing the sewing machine when not in use.
latch means with mutually engagable parts on the cabinet and
said platform for selectively retaining the platform in said first
position, the latch means being capable of being unlatched by
raising said platform a predetermined amount from the said
means mounted on the cabinet for movement into and out of a
position wherein the interlocking means supports said flap in
the said position substantially coplanar with said top surface
and wherein the interlocking means interferes with upward
movement of the platform by said predetermined amount to
prevent the unlatching of said latch.
4,379,602
ROTATABLE STOCK CONTAINER CLOSET
Takusuke lemura; Takeshi Goto, and Hiroshi Komaki, all of
Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Okamura Corporation, Japan
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,449
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 11, 1980, 55-
30585[U]
Int. a. J A47B 49/00; B65G 17/16
U.S. a. 312-268 8 Qaims
-im
1. A rotatable stock container closet including a plurality of
container conveying units arranged vertically one on another,
each container conveying unit comprising:
(a) an endless loop outer rail means extending in the horizon-
tal plane; the outer rail means generally having an elliptic
shape comprising a pair of discrete straight sections ex-
tending in parallel with each other and a pair of discrete
curvilinear sections, with the sections having free ends
and the free ends of the curvilinear sections being con-
nected to the free ends of the straight sections;
(b) discrete inner rail means extending in the horizontal
plane, arranged inside the outer rail means at a certain
distance away therefrom;
(c) discrete guide channel means extending in the horizontal
plane, arranged between the inner and the outer rail means
at a certain distance away therefrom;
(d) an endless loop traction chain means which is guided by
the guide channel means and is adapted to be moved along
the same;
(e) a means for driving the traction chain means; and
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
367
(0 a plurality of container means releasably disposed to the
traction chain means and connected to ride along the rail
means so as to be moved on and along the inner and the
outer rail means and together with the traction chain
means.
4,379,603
DRAWER WITH REMOVABLE HANDLE
John R. Johnson, Arcadia, and Robert Brydolf, Pasadena, both
of Calif., assignors to Acme General Corporation, San Dimas,
Calif.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,529
Int. a.3 A47B 95/02
U.S. a. 312—320 10 Claims
1. A drawer assembly comprising:
a drawer front structure having a front face and a rear face;
a pair of spaced apart upper edges above the front and rear
faces; and a recess formed in the front and rear faces
between the upper edges of the drawer front structure, the
recess having a lower edge extending across the drawer
front structure belqw said upper edges;
a slot formed adjacent the rear face of the drawer front
structure below the lower edge of the recess; and
a drawer handle for being removably attached to the drawer
front structure, the drawer handle having a cross-section
of generally inverted U-shaped channel configuration
including spaced apart front and rear flanges on opposite
sides of a base portion of the channel; and a locking flange
on a lower portion of the rear flange projecting toward
the front flange of the channel, the locking flange being
shaped to extend into the slot adjacent the rear face of the
drawer front structure for releasably interlocking the
locking flange in the slot to hold the rear flange in a fixed
position with respect to the drawer front structure when
the base portion of the channel rests on the upper edges of
the drawer front structure for maintaining the front flange
in a fixed position adjacent the front face of the drawer
front structure, while the rear flange extends adjacent the
rear face of the drawer front structure and covers at least
a portion of the recess in the drawer front structure.
ing
each of one of said first and second connecting means com-
prising a vertically extending T-shaped rail;
each of the other of said first and second connecting means
comprising a vertically extending slot of a dimension to
vertically slidably receive by complementary abutting
surface contact a respective said T-shaped rail;
the said member having therein each said slot having a
hollow box-like configuration including an inner side wall
and an upper web, said slot being formed in said inner side
wall and opening into a T-shaped opening in said upper
web;
said back member and said side members having formed in
inner sides thereof respective longitudinal horizontal
grooves extending in a single horizontal plane when said
back member and said side members are connected; and
a bottom drawer member slidably fitting into said grooves
4,379,605
ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLE OF MOLDED BODY
CONSTRUCTION
Ernest G. HofTman, Middlefield, Conn., assignor to Harvey
Hubbell Incorporated, Orange, Conn.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980. Ser. No. 207,345
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/38
U.S. a. 339—14 R 42 Qaims
4,379,604
DRAWER
Erich Rikk, and Josef Brunner, both of Hochst, Austria, assign-
ors to Julius Blum Ges.in.b.H., Hochst, Austria
Filed Nov. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,397
Int. a.3 A47B 88/00; B65D 6/00
U.S. a. 312—330 R 5 Claims
1. A drawer for an article of furniture, said drawer compris-
two side members and a back member;
each said member being formed of a plastic material;
opposite ends of said back member including integral first
connecting elements connectable to respective second
connecting elements of said side members by relative
vertical movement between said back member and said
side members;
1. A general purpose type of duplex receptacle comprising:
a receptacle body having a plurality of side walls;
a front cover mounted on said side walls;
at least one side cover connected to said front cover by a
web hinge to pivot relative thereto toward and away from
said receptacle body;
first and second groups of spaced-apart receptacle apertures
extending through said front cover, each group of aper-
tures accommodating the male blades of a male plug
insertable into one or both of the groups,
a plurality of female conucts made of electrically conduc-
tive material, each of said female contacts mounted in
substantia] alignment with a different one of the apertures
for making electrical contact with a corresponding blade
of a male plug in an aperture;
a plurality of terminal members composed of electrically
conductive material mounted in the receptacle body con-
nected to different ones of said female contacts, each of
said terminal members having an insulation severing por-
368
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
tion whereby electrical contact may be made with an
insulation-covered conductor wire by penetrating the
insulation:
means for electrically connecting a first one of said female
contacts in the first group of apertures with a first one of
said terminal members and means for electrically connect-
ing a second one of said female contacts with a second one
of said terminal members;
the one side cover having conductor pusher surfaces, opera-
tive when said at least one side cover is pivoted toward
said receptacle body, to press an insulation-covered con-
ductor having an unstripped free end placed on one of said
terminal members against the one terminal member to
cause severing of the conductor insulation by said one
terminal member and the making of an electrical connec-
tion therebetween.
transverse members being offset from each other in both
longitudinal and transverse directions relative to said
longitudinal member;
one of said slides being located about said frame in opposed
relationship to the other of said slides wherein said longi-
tudinal member of one of said slides is spaced apart from
i2e
I32A
KDOA
I06B
4,379,606
CARTRIDGE HOLDER AND CONNECTOR SYSTEM
Richard P. Qark, Hershey; Robert H. Frantz, Carlisle; Gary W.
Hawk, Halifax, and John A. Root, Harrisburg, all of Pa.,
assignors to AMP Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed Apr. 8, 1981. Ser. No. 252,511
Int. CI.' HOIR 23/70
L'.S. a. 339-17 CF 12 Claims
^^^^^T^^gs^s-r^r^-Ais^ <^ >T^
-S4
■ 40
1. A cartridge receiving connector system comprising:
a holder housing having means for mounting said holder
housing on a circuit board, said holder housing defining a
cartridge receiving cavity;
a connector housing detachably secured to said holder hous-
ing to close one end of said cartridge receiving cavity;
a plurality of electrical terminals mounted in said connector
housing, each said terminal having one end making inter-
connection to said circuit board and an opposite end ex-
tending into said cartridge receiving cavity;
face plate means mountable on said holder housing defining
a profiled entry to the other end of said cartridge receiv-
ing cavity; and
a cartridge assembly receivable in said cartridge receiving
cavity and formed by a pair of mating cover members
defining a circuit cavity therebetween, a circuit assembly
mounted in said circuit cavity and having electrical con-
nector means directed outwardly of said circuit cavity,
and an apertured cover plate enclosing said circuit cavity
and defining a profile for said cartridge which allows it to
be inserted into said cartridge receiving cavity of said
holder housing.
4,379,607
SHUTTERED RECEPTACLE
Wade R. Bowden, Jr., Northport, N.Y., assignor to Slater Elec-
tric Inc., Glen Cove, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,615
iBt a.3 HOIR li/44
\}&. a. 339—40 23 Claims
I. A shutter for selectively opening the slots of an electrical
receptacle, said shutter comprising:
a frame and a pair of slides in contact therewith for sliding
thereon;
each of said slides being formed of a longitudinal member
having two transverse members coupled thereto, said
/II6 ^102
I34B 1088 I lOe
I32A I24A
the longitudinal member of the other of said slides; and
wherein
a first of said transverse members of each of said slides serves
as a barrier for closing the passageway of one of said slots,
a second of said transverse members of each of said slides
serves as a cam for deflecting said barrier when an imple-
ment is inserted through another of said slots.
4,379,608
FLAT CABLE TO PLANAR CIRCUIT CONNECTOR
Billy E. Olsson, New Cumberiand, and Lit-Yan Kam, Camp Hill,
both of Pa., assignors to AMP Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,748
Int. a.3 HOIR 23/66
U.S. a. 339—75 MP 4 Qaims
1. A flat cable to substrate connector, comprising:
a clamping bar having a sidewall and a row of resilient
springs spaced from said sidewall to define a width of an
open side of said bar,
a housing having an opening receiving said clamping bar
with said open side initially projecting from said opening
and having an initial width larger than the width of said
opening and larger than the combined thicknesses of a flat
cable and a circuit carrying substrate when inserted into
said open side,
said springs being biased by said housing upon relative dis-
placement of said springs into said housing opening to
clamp against the combination of said cable and said sub-
strate,
means for latching said clamping bar to said housing while
said springs are biased by said housing,
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
369
said means comprising at least one resilient flange of said 4^79,610
clamping bar having a tab projecting through a respective ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR WTTH POLARTTY BARRIER
slot in said housing and impinged against an external James E. Upchurch, Indiuapolis, Ind., usignor to Woodi Wire
surface of said housing. Products, I"C-C«ni€|j I"^
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,882
Int. a.J HOIR 13/50. 13/64
U.S. a. 339—184 R 2 Claims
4,379,609
MODULAR CORD COUPLER JACK HAVING A
DISCONNECnON ENCUMBRANCE
Edwin C. Hardesty, Perry Hall, Md., assignor to Western Elec-
tric Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,951
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/639
U.S. a. 339—91 R 36 Claims
30 -^
V
46
fL a»
1. A modular cord having connectorized ends, said cord
comprising:
a length of cordage which comprises a plurality of individu-
ally insulated conductors which are enclosed in a jacket of
plastic material;
a modular plug which terminates each end of said length of
cordage, said plug comprising a body, a plurality of termi-
nals mounted in said body and a resilient tab having one
end connected to said body, a free end, and a pair of
oppositely extending locking shoulders spaced from said
free end, said tab in a normal orientation extending
obliquely outwardly from said plug body; and
a coupler jack which is connected to one of said modular
plugs which terminate said length of cordage, said coupler
jack comprising:
a housing which includes two modular plug-receiving
cavities each communicating with an associated exter-
nal surface of said housing, a plurality of passageways
that extend between and communicate with said cavi-
ties, and means formed within each of said cavities for
cooperating with said oppositely extending shoulders of
the tab of a plug that is received in each of said cavities
for locking the plug within the housing when the plug
tab is in said normal orientation, said one plug which
terminates an end of said length of cordage being dis-
posed in one of said cavities with at least said one of said
cavities extending sufficiently inwardly from its associ-
ated extelmal surface to cause the free end of the tab of
a plug received in said one cavity to be within said one
cavity and spaced from its associated external surface a
distance which is sufficient to prevent facile unlocking
and withdrawal of said one plug from said housing; and
a plurality of wire-like contact elements each having a
linear portion which is positioned in one of said passage-
ways and retroflexed end portions which are positioned
in said cavities and which are adapted to be engaged by
terminals of modular plugs that are inserted into said
plug-receiving cavities.
1. A female polarized electrical connector formed within a
mold to receive a polarized electrical plug having a pair of
blades, one of which is narrower than the other comprising:
a first and second female electrical contact, each with a wire
extending therefrom, each contact including a top and
bottom longitudinally extending edge with receiving
means disposed therebetween and sized to receive a blade
of said electrical plug;
housing means formed by said mold and enclosing said first
and said second contact and including contact passage
means leading externally from said receiving means;
a polarity barrier of electrically nonconductive material
mounted on said first contact prior to insertion into said
mold for formation of said housing means and positioned
between said passage means and said receiving means of
said first contoct and defining at least one conUct hole
sized to allow passage of only the narrower of said blades
of said plug, said barrier sized to fit with said first contoct
entirely within said mold;
first stop means on said barrier with said first stop means
engaged with said top and bottom longitudinally extend-
ing edges of said first contoct limiting relative lateral
motion between said first contoct and said barrier and
wherein:
said barrier includes a top wall and a downwardly extending
portion integrally connected together, said top wall has a
downwardly facing surface which extends over and adja-
cent said top edge of said first contact with said one
contoct hole extending though said top wall toward said
receiving means, said barrier further includes a bottom
portion integrally attached to said downwardly extending
portion, said bottom portion has an upwardly facing sur-
face positioned adjacent said bottom edge of said first
contact, said first stop means being located on said down-
wardly facing surface and said upwardly facing surface
and holding said first contact adjacent said downwardly
facing surface;
said first stop means includes at least one projection on said
downwardly facing surface forming a first channel adja-
cent said downwardly extending portion receiving said
top edge of said first contact;
said first stop means further includes at least one projection
on said upwardly facing surface forming a second channel
adjacent said downwardly extending portion and aligned
with said fu^t channel receiving said bottom edge of said
first contact.
370
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,611
CONNECTOR WITH LOW FORCE SOCKET CONTACT
HAVING AN INTEGRAL HOOD
Ronald E. Foege, Mission Viejo, and Leslie L. Kerek, Iirine,
both of Calif., assignors to Hughes Aircraft Company, Culver
City, Calif.
Filed Not. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,180
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/40. 13/12
U.S. a. 339-217 S ^^ 15 Qaims
1. A socket contact for removable emplacement within a
cavity in a connector body comprising:
means having an opening for receiving a pin contact and in-
cluding at least one spring member normally positioned in
the opening and movable out of the opening when contacted
by the pin contact;
a resilient support movable generally perpendicularly to the
movement of said spring member; and
a hood shielding said opening means and coupled to said resil-
ient support, said hood having means defining a non-circular
opening larger than the pin contact and having larger and
smaller dimensions, with the larger dimension extending
generally parallel to the direction of the spring member
movement to permit easy entry of the pin contact into elec-
trical contact with said spring member even if the pin
contact has an axis which is not centrally aligned with either
of the openings, said hood being movable by the pin contact
in a direction generally parallel with the smaller dimension
of said non-circular opening means through flexure of said
resilient support.
4,379,612
SCANNING OPTICAL SYSTEM HAVING A FALL-DOWN
CORRECTING FUNCTION
Kazuhiko Matsuoka, and Kazuo Minoura, both of Yokohama,
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,088
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 4, 1979, 54-113094
Int. a.3G02B27//7
U.S. a. 350-6.8 7 Qaims
a light source portion;
a first imaging optical system for linearly imaging the light
beam from said light source portion; '
a deflector having its deflecting-reflecting surface near the
linear image formed by said first imaging optical system;
and
a second imaging optical system disposed between said
deflector and a medium to be scanned, having means for
making constant the moving velocity of a light beam spot
on said medium, and comprising, in succession from the
deflector side, a spherical single lens and a single lens
having a toric surface, said toric surface having its curva-
ture radius, in the deflecting surface formed by the light
beam deflected by said deflector, greater than its curva-
ture radius in the plane orthogonal to the deflecting sur-
face, said single lens having a toric surface having a posi-
tive refractive power and comprising a surface having a
negative refractive power on the deflector side and a
surface having a positive refractive power on the medium
side, in a cross-section containing the optical axis of said
spherical single lens and perpendicular to the deflecting
surface, said single lens having a toric surface further
satisfying (l/r3)>(l/r4), where rs is the curvature radius
of the deflector side surface thereof in said deflecting
surface and r4 is the curvature radius of the scanned me-
dium side surface thereof in said deflecting surface.
4,379,613
SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTOR
John F. Cobum, Cranford, N.J., assignor to Exxon Research
and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,824
Int. a.3 G02B 5/172
U.S. a. 350—96.10 7 Qaims
1. A scanning optical system having a fall-down correcting
function, comprising:
1. A planar fluorescent concentrator having a surface for
receipt of incident solar radiation, the improvement compris-
ing: said planar concentrator having the end walls, side walls
and bottom surface coated with a light reflective material, said
concentrator having an aperture defining a substantially circu-
lar band portion within said concentrator; and,
a substantially axially symmetrical light transmitting body
having a first end and a circular light transmissive second
end, said first end having an annular ring adapted to mate
with and optically coupled to said band portion of said
concentrator, said light transmitting body having a coat-
ing on the exterior surfaces thereof other than said annular
ring and said circular light transmissive second end
whereby light incident on said planar concentrator is
internally reflected and radially directed toward said
circulr band, enters said light transmitting body and is
directed to and exits from said second end of said light
transmitting body.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
371
4^79,614
SPLICE CONNECTION FOR A PAIR OF LIGHT
WAVEGUIDE CABLES WITH OPTICAL RBERS IN
TUBULAR SHEATHS
Heinrich Liertz, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin ft Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Aug. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 181,946
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 11,
1979, 2936716
Int. a.3 G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350—96.21 2 Qaims
-'"■'^^ :gIKi J^ \ s-v-v^.
^ ^ iJL-l! ' '■^■■^
multi-core cable cores, a second end of said at least one
dummy cable being connected to one of said sutionary
terminal units; and
at least one dummy cable storing device arranged between
said at least one dummy bobbin and said one of said sta-
tionary terminal units for storing said at least one dummy
cable as said rotor is rotated.
4,379,616
ALUMINUM METAPHOSPHATE OPTICAL HBERS
James W. Fleming, Jr., Fanwood, and John W. Shiever, Cedar
Grove, both of N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories,
Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 26,410, Apr. 2, 1979, Pat. No.
4,302,074. This application May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,431
Int. a.3 C03B i7m; G02B 5/172
U.S. a. 350—96.34 2 Cl««n«
1. A connecting device for a pair of light waveguide cables
each having an optical fiber being loosely enclosed and ar-
ranged in a helical formation in a tubular sheath with an end of
the fiber extending out of the end of the sheath, the device
comprising the ends of the two optical fibers being butt-spliced
together, an inner tube surrounding the butt-splice of the two
fibers and having its ends being telescopically inserted into the
ends of the sheaths to bridge the interval therebetween, and an
outer tube having a longitudinally extending slot and being
telescopically received on the ends of the sheaths, said outer
tube being reduced in diameter to grip the ends of the sheaths
so that the ends of the sheaths are supported by the inner tube
as they are gripped by the outer tube.
12 13
1. An optical fiber comprising a core and a cladding, the said
fiber comprising aluminum metaphosphate, and in which fiber
the molar ratio of aluminum to phosphorus is given substan-
tially by the formula A1(P03)3. the N.A. is greater than 0.3 at
0.9 microns, and the material dispersion is less than 0.07
nanoseconds/nanometer-kilometer at 0.9 microns.
4,379,615
DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING ENERGY THROUGH
ELECTRIC WIRE OR OPTICAL CABLE WOUND ON
DRUM
Yuichi Toda; Kolgi Yano, and Katsigi Sakamoto, all of Yoko-
hama, Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 176,609
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 20, 1979, 54-104929;
Aug. 20, 1979, 54-104930
Int. a.3 G02B 5/14, 5/172; H04B 9/00
U.S. a. 350—96.23 » Claims
4,379,617
REAR PROJECTION SCREEN FOR A COLOR
TELEVISION PROJECTOR
Yasutomo Funakoshi, Sakai, and Tamotsu Wakahata, Katano,
both of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial
Company, Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,903
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 8, 1980, 55-46392;
Apr. 8, 1980, 55-46393
Int. a.' G03B 21/60
U.S. a. 350—126 »♦ Claims
8b 7b
6b 4 15z 16y 16216. LaHMl
■ii. ' — * __
10 11 ^
u
1. A device for transmitting signals between a movable unit
and a plurality of stationary units, comprising:
a multi-core cable, each core of said multi-core cable havmg
a first end connected to said movable unit;
a rotor for winding said multi-core cable therearound;
at least one dummy bobbin;
means for coaxially mounting said at least one dummy bob-
bin with said rotor so as to be integrally rotatable there-
with;
at least one dummy cable wound around said at least one
dummy bobbin, a first end of said at least one dummy
cable being connected to a second end of one of said
1. A rear projection screen for a color television projector,
comprising:
(a) a body in the form of a sheet made of a transparent
synthetic resin; and
(b) a plurality of lenticular lenses integrally formed with said
body, said plurality of lenticular lenses being arranged in
parallel on one surface of said sheet, each of said plurality
of lenticular lenses having a cross-section the contour of
which is formed of a pair of linear portions and an arcuate
portion interposed between the pair of linear portions,
each of said linear portions having an inclination angle
with respect to said sheet that is less than a total internal
reflection angle defined by the material of said lenticular
lenses.
372
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,618
MAGNIHER VIEWER AND STAND
Marion A. Tall, 10419 NW. 32nd PL, Apt. 236, Bellevue, Wash.
98004
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,838
Int. a.' G02B 27/02, 7/02
U.S. a. 350—239 4 Qaims
strates, confines an electrolyte, the improvement comprising
joining the peripheral edges of said oppositely disposed sub-
strates with an addition reaction type silicone resin adhesive
containing an inorganic substance in the form of a fine powder,
said inorganic substance preventing the electrolyte from leak-
ing out of the display in gaseous form through the adhesive.
1. A magnifier viewer and stand having a one-piece base
consisting of a rectangular sheet of synthetic resin formed in a
continuous shape defining a fiat horizontally disposed front
portion, an upwardly extending compound curved portion
adjacent said front portion and extending transversely of said
base, the longitudinal edges of said curved portion being dis-
posed on the plane of said flat front portion, an upwardly
angled inclined portion adjacent said curved portion on the
opposite edge thereof with respect to said front portion, said
inclined portion arranged to support an opened book to be
viewed with said book engaging said curved portion, a down-
wardly angled portion adjacent said inclined portion having a
transversely extending lower section on said plane of said front
portion, a secondary curved portion adjacent said lower sec-
tion of said downwardly angled portion and extending trans-
versely of said base, said secondary curved portion forming the
terminal back edge of said one-piece base, transversely extend-
ing spaced slits in said flat front portion defining a band like
section therebetween raised with respect to said plane of said
front portion and a rectangular molded magnifier lens of a size
comparable with said inclined portion of said base, a support
arm for said lens, said support arm being curved between its
ends to define a fiat extension on one end slidably disposed
beneath said band-like section of said front portion and an
angled extension on its other end engaging said lens arranged
to position said lens on the same angle as said upwardly angled
inclined portion of said base.
4,379,619
ELECTRO-CHROMIC DISPLAYS
Hiroshj Kuwagaki, Kyoto; Kohzo Yano, and Sadatoshi Takechi,
both of Nara, all of Japan, assignors to Sharp Kabushiki
Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,419
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1979, 54-170974
Int. a.5G02F///7
U.S. a. 350-357 3 ci^^^
4,379,620
LIGHT MODULATOR EMPLOYING ELECTROOPTIC
CRYSTALS
Kent E. Erickson, Brookside, N.J., assignor to Keuffel & Esser
Company, Morristown, N.J.
Filed Mar. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 132,025
Int. a.3 G02F 1/03
U.S. a. 350-387 8 Qaims
1. An electrooptic modulator comprising an assembly com-
prising:
(a) a pair of electrooptic crystal subassemblies, each of
which comprises:
(i) an elongate, rectilinear, transparent crystal element
consisting essentially of a compound exhibiting elec-
trooptic birefringence, said crystal eleriSent hiving a
transverse directional optic axis disposed perpendicular
to two parallel opposing longitudinal faces of said crys-
tal element and,
(ii) a pair of rigid, elongate, electrically-conductive elec-
trodes, each of which is affixed to and contiguous with
a respective one of said opposing faces, thereby estab-
lishing, with respect to said directional optic axis, a
front and a back electrode for said subassembly;
(b) said subassembly pair being arranged end-to-end with the
longitudinal axes of said crystal elements in line and the
respective optic axes of said crystal elements disposed
orthogonal to one another and to the longitudinal axis of
said end-to-end arrangement; and
(c) a pair of rigid, electrically-conductive pole pieces respec-
tively affixed to and bridging the front electrode of the
first and the back electrode of the second of said subassem-
bly pair, and the front electrode of the second and the
back electrode of the first of said subassembly pair.
1. In an electro-chromic display wherein the outer frame of
the display, comprising a pair of oppositely disposed sub-
4,379,621
IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE UTILIZING
BIREFRINGENCE PROPERTIES OF FERROELECTRIC
CERAMIC MATERIAL
Masani Ikedo, Neyagawa; Masafumi Watari, Moriguchi; Yo-
shitake Yasuno, Kyoto, and Tadaoki Yamashita, Hirakata, all
of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Com-
pany, Limited, Osaka, Japan
FUed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,658
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 1, 1979, 54-142642;
No?. 15, 1979, 54-148417
Int Q.3 G02F 1/03
U.S. Q. 350—392 14 Claims
1. An image display device comprising:
first and second polarizers having their planes of polariza-
tion oriented at right angles to each other;
APRIL 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
373
a transparent electrooptic plate of ferroelectric material
between said first and second polarizers; and
a matrix electrode arrangement secured to one surface of
said electrooptic plate including a plurality of parallel
rows of electrodes and a plurality of parallel columns of
electrodes to define a plurality of elemental areas on said
electrooptic plate, said matrix arrangement further includ-
ing in each of said elemental areas first parallel finger
!
U H~ h >^ t.tLTRODf
H
•JIR
7T.
4i6
h SCAN MATRIX
l-r ELECTRODE 41,
4,379,623
40X MICROSCOPE OBJECTIVE
Edward B. Rybicki, Depew, N.Y., assignor to Warner Lambert
Technologies, Inc., Southbridge, Mass.
Filed Apr. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 144,478
Int. a.5 G02B 9/60. 21/02
U.S. a. 350—414 3 Qaims
dj H, R, R, R, R, R, Re R„ 'ij »,5 »- "il
u
1. A semi-apochromatic microscope objective having a
numerical aperture of 0.80 which comprises, aliped in se-
quence along an optical axis, a concavo-convex positive singlet
I, a concavo-convex positive doublet II, a plano-convex posi-
tive doublet III. a biconvex positive triplet IV and a concavo-
convex negative doublet V, said biconvex positive triplet IV
comprising a convex-concavo first element, a biconvex second
element, and a concavo-convex third element.
electrodes connected in circuit with a said row electrode
and second parallel finger electrodes connected to a said
column electrode, and a unidirectionally conductive
means connected between said first finger electrodes and
the said row electrode for reducing cross coupling be-
tween plural elemental areas defined by the said row
electrode, said first and second finger electrodes being
interleaved with each other and oriented at 45 degrees to
the planes of orientation of said first and second polarizers.
4,379,624
LASER BEAM STEERING DEVICE
Samuel A. Miller, and Larry L. Jeffris, both of Ridgecrest,
Calif., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,417
Int. a.'G02B27//7
U.S. CI. 350—486 5 Qaims
4,379,622
BROAD BAND PHASE SHIFT SYSTEM
Dennis G. Fischer, Mountain View, and Arnold L. Bloom,
Menlo Park, both of Calif., assignors to Coherent, Inc., Palo
Alto, Calif.
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,240
Int. C\? G02B 5/30, 27/28
U.S. a. 350—394 2 Claims
-dLci
22 -14
10-
16
-22
r24
-30
1. A broad band phase shift system having phase retardation
of substantially ninety degrees comprising:
two substantially identical reflecting means, each having an
angle of phase retardation of substantially forty-five de-
grees;
each reflecting means comprising:
a substrate of a material having high reflectivity;
a plurality of first dielectric material having low refractive
index;
a plurality of second dielectric material having high re-
fractive index; and
said first and second dielectric materials on said substrate
in alternate layers.
1. A laser beam steering mechanism for azimuth and eleva-
tion direction control of an incident laser beam comprising:
an inner shaft with an aperture the length of its axis, said axis
aligned with said incident laser beam to permit direct
passage of said incident laser beam;
an outer shaft concentrically mounted around said inner
shaft for providing a dual routional axis around said
incident laser beam;
a pivoted mirror rigidly attached to said inner shaft for
deflecting said incident laser beam after it has passed
through said inner shaft aperture, said mirror reflecting
said beam in a given azimuthal direction determined by
the rotation of said inner shaft;
means for determining the orienution of said inner shaft;
means for monitoring the orienUtion of said outer shaft;
a cam attached to said outer shaft for changing the elevation
of said mirror;
a cam follower connected to said mirror and set to the azi-
muthal position of said inner shaft for following said cam;
374
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
a torque motor set against said outer shaft for rotating said
inner shaft;
a clutch assembly mounted to said outer shaft for coupling
said inner shaft to the motion of said outer shaft at selected
times, said inner and outer shaft either can be turned
together or only said outer shaft turns; and
a dome with at least one window mounted to said inner shaft
for transmitting said reflected laser beam despite rotation
of said inner shaft.
1. An operation microscope comprising a body, an objective
lens, a pair of magnification power changing lens systems
located behind said objective lens and in parallel with an opti-
cal axis of said objective lens, a light dividing means for divid-
ing light passed through at least one of the pair of magnifica-
tion power changing lens systems and for introducing said
light into a pair of eye lenses and a camera, a first illumination
system for illuminating operated parts of a patient's body for
observation, and a second illumination system for illuminating
operated parts of the patient's body for photographing, said
second illumination system including a lamp house and a
socket, said socket being positioned in a recess formed in said
microscope body at a side of said pair of magnification power
changing lens systems, said lamp house having a plug and
being adapted to be fitted to said recess after removing said
objective lens from said microscope body so as to insert said
plug into said socket, and said lamp house including a light
source.
4,379,626
FAaUTY FOR CONDUCTING OPHTHALMOLOGICAL
EXAMINATIONS
Paul F. Bailey, Jr., 4885 NW. Barnes Rd., Portland, Oreg.
97210
FUed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,261
Int. a.3 A61B i/OO
U.S. a. 351-200 6 Qaims
1. A facility for conducting ophthalmologist tests on a plu-
rality of patients comprising:
a first examining station defined by a room having an open-
ing provided in one wall thereof;
a second examining station defined by a room also provided
with an opening in one wall thereof opposed laterally to
said first examining station;
first display means disposed inside said second examining
sution for displaying test indicia to be visually perceived
by a patient situated in said first examining station;
second display means disposed inside said first examining
station for displaying test indicia to be visually perceived
by a second patient situated in said second examining
station;
first isolating means for isolating said first display means
from said second examining station including a window
presented toward and substantially aligned with the open-
ing of said first examining station; and
4,379,625
OPERATION MICROSCOPE
Yoshihisa Uchiumi, and Akira Tanabe, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Tokyo Kogaku Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,032
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 3, 1980, 55-44012rU]
Oct. 31. 1980, 55-154786[U]
Int. a.3 G02B 21/06
U.S. a. 350-528 4 Qaims
^ n
1
I
i:
L..
second isolating means for isolating said second display
means from said first examining station including a win-
dow presented toward and substantially aligned with the
opening of said second examining station.
4,379,627
TRAY FOR STORING AND CLASSIFYING SLIDES AND
A VIEWER FOR SLIDES DISPOSED IN SUCH TRAYS
Albert Nael, Sainte Genevieve des Bois, France, assignor to
Compagnie Generate d'Automatisme CGA Alcatel, Paris,
France
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,275
Qaims priority, application France, Sep. 9, 1980, 80 19406
Int. Q.3 G03B 23/08
U.S. Q. 353-27 A 6 Qaims
1. A tray for storing and classifying slides, said tray compris-
ing:
parallel, plane, top and bottom members held in fixed rela-
tionship to each other,
said parallel, plane, top and bottom members being provided
with corresponding facing sets of transverse, slide-receiv-
ing grooves,
said tray being symmetrical about a longitudinal plane pass-
ing through the mid points of both sets of grooves and
having open left and right sides via which slides may be
inserted in or removed from the tray, and
two, symmetrically disposed, independently movable side
flaps pivotably mounted on at least one of said top and
bottom members,
each side flap having a first, open position in which it allows
slides to be inserted or removed via its side of the tray, and
a second, closed position in which it prevents insertion or
removal of slides.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
375
4,379,628
FOLDING TRANSPARENCY (MICROnCHE) VIEWER
John N. Graef, West Bend, Wis., assignor to Realist, Inc.,
Menomonee Falls, Wis.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,247
Int. a.' G03B 21 /3V
U.S. a. 353—73 10 Claims
<f0
4i
aa
JZ
1. A folding viewer for transparencies comprsing
a housing containing means providing a Ugh; source and a
folded Hght path including a condenser lens ard a projec-
tion lens,
means for positioning a transparency between the lenses,
a second housing pivotally connected io the first housing for
movement between a folded position in which the second
housing fits over the first housing in telescopic fashion and
a viewmg position in which it lies under the first housmg,
a screen depending into the second housing when the second
housing is in said viewing position, said screen being
positioned to have an image of the transparer.cy projected
thereon,
a mirror fixed in the second housing,
a viewing aperture in the second housing permitting the user
to see the image on the screen as reflected by the mirror.
direction to the electrical motor to drive the motor in a for-
ward direction for film take-up and having a second sutc for
supplying current in the opposite direction to the electncal
motor to drive the motor in a reverse direction for film rewind,
the apparatus comprising:
a displacement member for controlling the state of the
change-over switch means, the displacement member
having a first position at which it disposes the change-over
switch means in the first sUte and having a second posi-
tion at which the change-over switch means is in the
second state;
means for controlling the position of the displacement mem-
ber, the controlling means including first and second
members, each having first and second operating posi-
tions, and first and second biasing means for respectively
biasing the first and second members to the first operating
position, the first and second members being operable to
hold the displacement member in its first position upon at
least one of the first and second members being in the first
operating position and being operable to permit move-
ment of the displacement member to its secomd position
only upon both the first and second members being in the
second operating position, the first member being dis-
posed in the second operating position when film is wound
upon the take-up spool, and the second member being
disposed in the second operating position in response to
the initiation of film rewind; and
means operable upon initiation of film rewind for releasably
holding the second member in the second operating posi-
tion until initiation of subsequent film take-up.
4.379,629
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING HLM
ADVANCEMENT IN A CAMERA 4,379,630
Koichi Daitoku, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Kogaku K.K., TRANSFER ROLLER FOR ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC
Japan APPARATUS
Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,173 Yoshiro Suzuki, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Claims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1980, 55-66381 Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Int. QV G03B ///« Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,279
U S a. 354—173 * Claims Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 1, 1980, 55-41158;
Aug. 29, 1980, 55.122935[Ln
Int. a.' G03G 15/16
U.S. a. 355—3 TR
rut;:*- jb
17 i7a>-;o
I 210 ?ic!
[cON^RoTlfi^--^ \
j 1 140 14(.
■f^E
1. An apparatus for controlling film advancement in a cam-
era of the type that has driving means, including an electrical
motor, for driving a take-up spool to wind film thereon from a
supply spool for film take-up and for alternatively dnving the
supply spool to rewind film, and which has change-over
switch means having a first state for supplying current in one
1. In a transfer roller for electrophotographic apparatus for
transferring a toner image formed on a latent image electric
charge holding body to a record sheet by making the record
sheet closely contact with the latent image electric charge
holding body, the improvement comprising:
an electrically conductive roller shaft connected to a trans-
fer bias electric source and operative to apply a given
transfer bias voltage between the roller shaft and the latent
image electric charge holding body; and
an electrically conductive resilient member coated around
the outer periphery of the electrically conductive roller
shaft, said resilient member having a constant outer diame-
ter and having a resistance value which is increased
toward the respective end faces at two end portions of the
electrically conductive resilient member.
376
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,631
APPARATUS HAVING A COPIER FUNCTION AND A
PRINTER FUNCTION
Takashi Kitamura, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
shikj Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 156,218
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 8, 1979, 54-72611;
Jun. 11, 1979, 54-73635; Jul. 13, 1979, 54-89112; Dec. 26, 1979,
54-169565; Dec. 28, 1979, 54-171332
Int. a.' G03G 15/00: G03B 19/00
U.S. a. 355-14 R - 5 cx$Ams
least one scanned region of the selected portion of the original
in said position; means for forming a quotient of the determined
density gradient and the density range of the respective se-
lected portion, a source of reference signals denoting a prede-
termined threshold value; and means for comparing said quo-
tient with said threshold value, an original being considered fit
for the makmg of reproductions when said quotient exceeds
said threshold value.
\Ar
1. An apparatus for recording on a recording medium with
beam carrying mformation, said apparatus comprismg:
an original table having a transparent plate providing a
surface on which an original may be placed;
means defining a first optical path extending between said
ongmal table and the recording medium;
means for producing a high energy beam carrying informa-
tion;
means defining a second optical path extending between said
beam producing means and the recording medium; and
means, provided across said first optical path, for blocking
the high energy beam produced by said producing means
from being projected to said original table.
4,379,632
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVIEWING
EXPOSED PHOTOGRAPHIC HLMS OR THE LIKE
Hubert Dedden, Langenfeld, and Jiirgen Pfingst, Leverkusen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert
Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 102,152, Dec. 10, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 854,906, Nov. 25,
1977, abandoned. This application Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No.
320,473
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 3,
1976, 2654943
Int. a.3 G03B 27/80
U.S. a. 355-68 37 cx^ms
"l
crrctt)!'!*-
lion
'"•
'tit '
mraiot
-'
HOIO
SCtliUt
PHI
OllltlOt
mnCfr
:>
4,379,633
APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING ADJUSTMENT OF
COINCIDENCE AND RELATIVE PHASE
RELATIONSHIP OF LIGHT BEAMS IN AN
INTERFEROMETER
Wolf BickeJ, i)ergisch Giadbach; Walter Kaule, Cologne, and
Erik Primbscli, Ahrensburg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Krautkramer-Branson, Inc., Stratford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,036
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 6.
1980,30 29 716
Int. a.' GOIN 29/04; GOIB 9/02
U.S. a. 356-359 21 Qaims
'—11
] Bt\ ...
21. Apparatus for examining a series of successive originals
of varying sharpness, such as exposed and developed film
frames, to allow for detection of those originals which are unfit
for the making of reproductions, comprising means for moving
successive originals of a series of originals to a predetermined
position; means for photoelectrically scanning at least a se-
lected portion of the original in said position, including means
for generating signals which are indicative of the characteris-
tics of such selected portion of the original in said position;
means for utilizing said signals to ascertain the density range of
the selected portion of the original in said position; means for
processing said signals to determine the density gradient of at
1. The method for automatically maintaining an adjustment
of the coincidence and of the relative phase relationship of
beams oflight in the field of view of an interferometer in which
beams of laser light are so delayed in time relative to one
another over the different optical paths as to satisfy the inter-
ference condition required for producing an amplitude modu-
lated signal from a measuring beam which has been frequency
modulated by ultrasonic df^formations manifest on a workpiece
surface comprising:
illuminating the workpiece surface on which ultrasonic wave
defo'-mations are inaniiest with a beam of laser light and
passing the light reflected at said workpiece surface as a
measuring beam, frequency modulated by said deformations,
to an optical interferometer,
separating a portion of said laser light from said laser beam
before it is incident on the workpiece surface and passing
said non-incident portion as a control beam to said interfer-
ometer;
causing s.nid measunng beam and said control beam to traverse
said interferometer through substantially the same optical
paths;
sensing by means of first photoelectric means said measuring
beam after it has traversed said interferometer and providing
a corresponding amplitude modulated electrical signal;
disposing in the field of view plane of the control beam second
photoelectric means which responsive to the control beam
illumination thereupon provide an electrical control signal
adapted to indicate a change of the alignment of the optical
paths of the interferometer from a set condition, and
applying said control signal from said second photoelectric
means to electromechanical positioning means supporting an
optical component of the interferometer to cause a position-
ing adjustment of said optical component for restoring said
set condition responsive to said control signal being indica-
tive of such change.
APRIL 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
377
4,379,634
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETECTING
BIREFRINGENT SUBSTANCES IN LIQUIDS
Moshe Rosenthal, Biindnerstrasse 18, Basel, Switzerland (4055)
Filed Sep. 20, 1977, Ser. No. 835,015
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 28, 1976,
12282/76
. Int. a.' G02B 27m: COIN I/IO, 21/23
U.S. a. 356—365 ♦ Claims
longitudinal axis of said slots whereby substantially uniform
movement of said slotted apertured material and comparator
mask means and said light beam size control means with re-
spect to one another along said diagonal axis provides a rela-
tively uniform rate of change of light passing through said
slots.
4,379,636
INSPECTION DEVICE
Hajime Yoshida, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to H^jime Industries
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,712
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct, 18, 1979, 54-134502
Int. a.' GOIJ 3/50
U.S. a. 356—407 7 Qaims
A.
1. Method for determination of birefrmgent solid particles or
crystals in liquids, said method comprising placing a small
amount of the liquid to be analysed between two polarizing
sheets, moving said two sheets relative to each other to a
relative position where they directly overlie each other with
crossed directions of polarization, pressing said two sheets
against each other, and observing in transmitted light the pres-
ence or absence of light traces contrasting against the dark
background of the crossed polarizers, the presence of which
traces indicating the presence of birefringent solid particles or
crystals in said liquid.
4,379,635
AUTOMATIC APERTURE SIZE MEASUREMENT
APPARATUS AND PROCF.SS
James R. McColl, Concord, Mass., assignor to GTE laborato-
ries Incorporated, Waltham, Mass.
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,833
Int. CVGOIB 11/02
U.S. a. 356—387 13 Qaims
1. In apparatus for automatically measuring aperture size of
a slotted apertured material having a plurality of slots each
with a longitudinal axis, a comparator mask means overlaying
the slotted apertured material, a light source and light detector
positioned on opposite sides of said comparator mask means
and slotted apertured material and providing a light beam for
passage therethrough and a computer means coupled to the
slotted apertured material and comparator mask means and
responsive to a signal from said light detector representing
light transmission of the slots, the improvement comprising a
light-beam size control means including a rhombic-shaped
aperture having a diagonal axis substantially normal to said
^^^ lib 'Ti
im....:
M //
1. An inspection device comprising:
(a) a color sensor means having photoelectric conversion
elements, each being responsive to respective different
wave lengths of light from an object to be inspected and
producing an electrical signal;
(b) a light wave length detecting means for receiving the
electrical signal from said color sensor means and for
producing an output voltage which is varied to negative
and positive sides in response to wave length component
ratio of light incident from said object on said color sensor
means;
(c) a zero balance setting means which processes the output
voluge from said light wave length detecting means and
then takes a zero balance when a standard object is picked
by said color sensor means;
(d) a tolerance range setting means which receives an output
of said zero balance setting means and produces an abnor-
mal signal when the last mentioned output exceeds a
predetermined tolerance range;
(e) a location detection means which produces an electrical
signal to notify when said object arrives at a predeter-
mined location; and
(0 a detection location timing means which receives the
electrical signal from said location detection means, pro-
duces a pulse signal with a short time width and passes the
out. at of said tolerance range setting means only when
the output pulse signal appears.
4,379,637
RADIATION MEASURING APPARATUS
Carl J. Schmid, Port Washington, N.Y., assignor to Peerless
Electronics Research Corp., Commack, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 15,943, Feb. 28, 1979, Pat. No.
4,273,449. This appUcation May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,174
Int. a.' GOIN 21/85; G02B 27/14
U.S. a. 356—411 »8 Claims
1. Apparatus for measuring a characteristic of a sample, the
apparatus comprising, in combination:
a source of radiation;
means for receiving radiation from said source and directing
the same along an optical axis;
^ housing means supporting the radiation directing means for
378
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
movement in a direction at least substantially transverse to
said optical axis;
radiation dividing means disposed in a stationary position
along said optical axis for separating radiation from said
radiation directing means into separate beams;
an optical system located in spaced relationship with said
optical axis for receiving one of said beams;
a sample holder in position to receive said one beam from
said optical system;
ftj i_J — JlJ ^
4,379,638
DEVICE FOR PUTTING INTO CONTACT SUBSTANCES
EXISTING IN AT LEAST TWO DIFFERENT PHASES
Francois J. Prudhon, Versailles, and Augustin L. Sciduna,
Aubervilliers, both of France, assignors to Rhone-Poulenc
Industries, Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 19,362, Mar. 12, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,358
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 14, 1978, 78 07248
Int. a.^ BOIF 5/00. 15/06. 15/02
U.S. CI. 366-149 5 Qaims
ing from the outlet opening to define a bicone between said
converging and diverging sections which define a restricted
axial passage at the outlet, at least one axial pipe, the outlet of
which is at the level of the restricted passage through which at
least one of the other phases is introduced for issuance at the
restricted passage to be engaged by the helicoidal flow at about
the restricted passage, and a cylindrical dividing member
which extends axially through the housing intermediate the
inlet and outlet, having passages therein for enabling the heli-
coidal flow of the one phase for enabling passage of the helicoi-
dal flow of the one phase therethrough from the inlet to the
outlet.
4,379,639
ALARM WATCH WITH REMOTE SONIC AMPLIHER
Eugene Stephens, 19311 Montrose, Detroit, Mich. 48235
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,542
Int. a.3 G04B 47/00
U.S. a. 368—12 7 Claims
a detector for receiving said one beam from the sample
holder and for detecting the intensity of the received
beam; and
means for moving the housing means in said substantially
transverse direction to move said radiation directing
means toward and away from said optical system and
thereby change the intensity of said one beam.
-Vr-^
1. An alarrr! device comprising:
a watch having means for producing an audio signal at a
selected time;
audio amplifier means physically separated from said watch,
and sensing means for energizing said audio amplifier
means in response to an audio alarm produced by said
watch; and
the audio amplifier means including a silicone element, and a
microphone for amplifying the alarm, said microphone
being partially embedded in the silicone element.
4 379 640
TIMEPIECES HAVING A DEVICE OF REQUESTING
AND RECITING TIME SETTINGS IN THE FORM OF
AUDIBLE SOUNDS
Tomohiro Inoue, Nara, Japan, assignor to Sharp Kabushiki
Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 96,319, No?. 21, 1979, abandoned. This
application Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,130
Oaiffis priority, application Japan, No?. 22, 1978, 53-144401
Int. CV G04B 21/08; GIOL 1/00
U.S. a. 368-63 3 Qaims
DSP
1. A device for putting into contact substances existing in
different phases, at least one of which is a fiuid or gaseous
phase comprising a housing of circular cross section, an inlet
adjacent the outer periphery of the housing for introduction of
the fluid or gaseous phase tangentially into the housing for
helicoidal flow therein, an axial outlet opening at the center of 1. A timepiece including a voice synthesizer system for
the housing, said housing having a converging section extend- automatically instructing an operator by audibly presenting
ing inwardly to said outlet opening, a divergent section extend- time setting instructions comprising:
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
379
time indicating means for informing the operator of the
actual time of day;
first storage means for holding synthetic speech data in a
plurality of locations;
second storage means for holding position data representa-
tive of the locations of said synthetic speech data, said
position data being stored in a plurality of locations, each
representative of a portion of a said instruction;
first selection means for selecting locations in said second
storage means, thereby selecting instructions to be audibly
reproduced;
said instructions audibly instructing the operator of the
correct procedures for programming the actual time of
day;
second selection means for recalling synthetic speech data
from said first storage means in correspondence to the
position data produced by said second storage means; and
synthetic speech generator means for producing audible
instructions derived from said synthetic speech data to
instruct a timepiece user of the correct time setting proce-
dures.
4^79,642
APPARATUS FOR THE SELECTION OR CORRECTION
OF DATA IN AN ELECTRONIC WATCH
Clement Meyrat, LeLanderon, Switzerland, assignor to
Ebaucbes, S.A., Switzerland
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,864
Claims priority, application Switzeriand, Feb. 13, 1980,
1161/80
Int. a.3 G04C 9/00; G04B 29/QO
U.S. a. 368—188 7 Claims
4,379,641
MULTI-ALARM ELECTRONIC WATCH
Shigi Maezawa, and Masami Murata, both of Suwa, Japan,
assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 160,767
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 18, 1979, 54-77189
Int. C1.3 G04B 2i/02
U.S. a. 368—74 21 Claims
.■16
r?:
Tfuciimis*
17^
rrriTrrrco:
■:cCO.i-Li_Lu.i
iTlI.IJ.Li.i_lB-'
1 I HTttLLLLL'
CCLLLLLLLLLiJ
in 28.59
-I
00
10- - 17
40
50
16
13
1. Apparatus for the selection or the correction of daU in an
electronic watch provided with a rotatable spindle, the appara-
tus comprising commutation means operated by the rotation of
the spindle in one direction or the other and arranged to pro-
duce two series of commutation pulses which are phase-dis-
placed with respect to each other, the sign of the phase dis-
placement depending on the direction of rotation of the spin-
dle, and a circuit responsive to the series of commuUtion
pulses to provide a signal indicating the direction of rotation of
the spindle and to produce selection or correction pulses, the
commutating means comprising two cams mechanically cou-
pled to the rotatable spindle and angularly displaced one with
respect to the other and two resiliently flexible strips of electri-
cally conductive material each of which cooperates with a
respective one of the cams and has one fixed end and one free
end, the free end of each strip being alternately brought in
contact with and moved away from a respectively fixed
contact during the rotation of the spindle.
1. In a multi-alarm electronic watch having an oscillator
generating a high frequency time standard signal, a divider
circuit dividing down said high frequency standard signal,
timekeeping means accumulating said divided signals in a
plurality of time units, liquid crystal display means for display
of said accumulated timekeeping signals, the improvement
therein comprising:
an alarm circuit, said alarm circuit capable of being simulta-
neously and selectively set for a plurality of alarm times;
means for actuating said alarm circuit at each time corre-
sponding to a set alarm time;
liquid crystal display means for simultaneous display of said
plurality of set alarm times, signals from said alarm circuit
causing said simultaneous display, said display means for
simultaneous display providing a visible time schedule of
said plurality of set times in the form of a grid matrix,
said time schedule display means including a first group of
electrodes, said first group of electrodes being divided
into rows, and a second group of electrodes, said second
group of electrodes being divided into columns, said rows
and columns being transverse one to the other, the over-
lapped portions of said transverse electrodes forming
picture elements in said grid matrix,
said colunms representing hours and said transverse rows
representing portions of an hour in minutes, each select-
able alarm time having a unique fixed location on said grid
matrix, selected alarm times being indicated by an ON
condition of said display at said respective fixed locations,
non-selected alarm times being in an OFF condition at
said respective fixed locations.
4,379,643
TIMEPIECE CASE/BACKCOVER ASSEMBLY
James J. Halicbo, Sonnyrale, Calif., aasignor to Timex Corpora-
tion, Waterbury, Conn.
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, SeT. No. 286,423
Int a.' G04B 37/00. 29/00
VJS. a. 368—309 »♦ Claims
1. In a timepiece construction, the combination of:
(a) a case having a first engagement surface with a polygonal
plan profile composed of a plurality of first circular arc
surface portions having a common center point and a
plurality of first noncircular surface portions connecting
the first circular arc surface portions together, and
(b) a back cover member having a second engagement sur-
face with a polygonal plan profile composed of a plurality
of second circular arc surface portions having a common
center point and a plurality of second noncircular surface
portions connecting the second circular arc surface por-
380
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
tions together, the second circular arc surface portions
being adapted for snap-fitting against the respective first
4,379,645
LARGE FORMAT PAPER HANDLING ASSEMBLY FOR
TYPEWRITERS OR LIKE BUSINESS MACHINES
Gunter ScheinpHug, Nuremberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Triumph-Adler A.G, fur Biiro-und Informationstechnik,
Nuremberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,461
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 5.
1981, 3108262
Int. a.3 B41J 15/06
U.S. a. 400-623 2 Qaims
M Ji
circular arc surface portions to hold the back cover mem-
ber and case releasably together.
4,379,644
TIMEPIECE CASE/DIAL PLATE ASSEMBLY
pavid F. Capolupo, Oakville, and James J. Donnelly, Wolcott,
both of Conn., assignors to Timex Corporation, Waterbury,
Conn.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,499
Int. a.3 G04B 37/00
U.S. Q. 368-314 2 Qaims
1. In a timepiece, the combination of:
a. a non-circular dial plate having a first plan dial plate
dimension and second plan dial plate dimension, and
b. a case for housing the dial plate, said case having a rear
surface with a projecting wall defining an access opening,
an inner wall defining an interior chamber in communica-
tion with the access opening and a front wall defining an
annular seat extending into the chamber and on which the
dial plate rests in the chamber, said access opening having
a first plan dimension larger than the corresponding first
plan dial plate dimension and a second plan dimension
smaller than the corresponding second plan dial plate
dimension such that the dial plate is oversized in the sec-
ond plan dimension, said case having an undercut portion
in the direction of the second plan dimension of said ac-
cess opening defining a maneuvering recess for the dial
plate, whereby the second plan dimension of said dial
plate can be inserted through the access opening by tilting
the dial plate relative to the access opening and inserting
a portion of the dial plate along the second plan dimension
in the maneuvering recess to thereby accommodate the
oversize in the second plan dimension and allow the re-
mainder of the dial plate along the second dimension to be
pivoted through the access opening.
1. A large format paper handling assembly for association
with a printing element movable in escapement and carriage
return directions comprising
a frame
platen support arms pivotably mounted on said frame,
a platen having its ends rotatably and translatably mounted
between said support arms,
frame mounted guide rollers and rearwardly spaced feed
rollers for rotatably supporting said platen,
paper feed release lever means pivotably mounted on the
axis of said guide rollers,
paper hold down rollers supported on said paper feed release
lever means for engaging said platen, and
means on said paper feed release lever means for rocking
said support arms incident to movement of said paper feed
release lever means to a release position to move said
platen support arms and said platen from engagement with
said guide and feed rollers.
4,379,646
PAPER FEED ROLL ROTATED BY PRINT HEAD
CARRIER MOVEMENT
Katsutoshi Maeda, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Daini Seikosha, Japan
Filed Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 133,144
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 26, 1979, 54-35378;
Sep. 4, 1979, 54-122082[U]
Int. Q.3 B41J 13/02
U.S. Q. 400-636 7 Qaims
1. A printer comprising: a platen; a print head positioned
opposite said platen; a print head driving shaft having a bidi-
rectional cam-groove and oriented parallel to said platen;
means on said print head for engaging said bidirectional cam-
groove to effectuate reciprocating movement of said print
head parallel to said platen in response to rotation of said
driving shaft; and paper feeding and positioning means for
feeding paper between said print head and said platen and for
positioning the paper to be printed on, said paper feeding and
positioning means comprising a paper feeding roller having a
middle portion and a pair of end portions, said print head and
said paper feeding roller middle portion together comprising
means for rotating said paper feeding roller through a prede-
termined angular interval each time said print head travels
from one end of said platen to another in one particular direc-
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
381
tion, a pair of paper receiving rollers each disposed opposite a
respective one of said paper feeding roller end portions, said
paper receiving rollers and corresponding ones of said paper
feeding roller end portions receiving therebetween, in use,
paper to be printed on and which is advanced up to said platen
by rotation of said paper feeding roller with the paper gripped
between said paper feeding roller end portions and said paper
receiving rollers, wherein said paper feeding roller end por-
tions have respective diameters larger than a diameter of said
-•■^
■je
about said nozzle over substantially the entire length of
said nozzle and said bore, for producing a pumping action
upon said cap being pushed along the length of said noz-
zle, for forcing said fluid marking medium into said con-
tainer, completely expelling said marking medium and
sealing said container, the volume of said socket being
greater than the volume of said central bore of said nozzle,
whereby said bore is completely evacuated when said
nozzle is fully inserted into said socket;
said elongated socket having a substantially uniform cross-
sectional area along its length.
4,379,648
FIXING STRUCTURE FOR RADIATOR GRILLE
Shinken Tanaka, Tokyo, and Takuo Yuda, Yokohama, both of
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Nifco Inc.,
both of Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,028
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 21, 1980, 55-4497[U]
Int. a.3 F16B 79/00
U.S. a. 403—24 4 Claims
paper feeding roller middle portion, and means comprising a
guide surface for guiding paper to advance between said paper
feeding roller and said paper receiving rollers, wherein said
means comprising a guide surface is comprised of a plate-like
member disposed between said paper feeding roller end por-
tions opposite said paper feeding roller middle portion and
spaced from said paper feeding roller middle portion a distance
less than the difference between the radius of said paper feed-
ing roller middle portion and said paper feeding roller end
portions.
4,379,647
OPTICAL COMPARATOR AND INSPECTION
APPARATUS
Paul S. Kempf, 703 Stratford Q., Apt. 7, Del Mar, Calif. 92104,
assignor to Paul S. Kempf, Solana Beach, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 117,230, Jan. 30, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 944,890, Sep. 22, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 706,675, Jul. 19,
1976, abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 568,866, Apr.
17, 1975, abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 190,187,
Oct. 18, 1971, Pat. No. 3,888,593. This application Aug. 27,
1981, Ser. No. 297,037
Int. Q\} B43K 9/00
U.S. a. 401—262 1 Claim
-T'
1. A marking pen comprising:
a resilient tubular container for a fluid marking medium;
an elongated nozzle having a central bore, said bore being
substantially coextensive with said nozzle;
said nozzle having a substantial uniform exterior and interior
cross-sectional area along substantially its entire length
and being connected directly to the body of said con-
tainer;
said bore communicating with the interior of said container;
cap means having an elongated socket for fitting closely
1. A fixing structure for fastening a radiator grille to the
fitting portion of an automobile body, comprising a fixture part
formed on the radiator grille and a plastic fastener composed of
a base plate, a first attaching member formed on one side of
said base plate and adapted for attachment to said fixture part
and a second attaching member formed on the other side of
said base plate and adapted for snapping engagement with a
fixing hole in the fitting portion of the automobile body part,
said fixture part being composed of a plate member incorporat-
ing therein a retaining step and lateral walls disposed one each
along the opposite edges of said plate member, and said first
attaching member being composed of a base plate, an engaging
arm extended from said bast plate and provided at the leading
end thereof with an engaging claw adapted for engagement
with said retaining step in said fixture part, and a pair of pinch-
ing members extended from said base plate parallel! y to both
sides of said engaging arm and adapted to squeeze the lateral
walls of said fixture part after completion of engagement be-
tween the fixture part and the plastic fastener.
4,379,649
CONNECTOR SYSTEM FOR GEODESIC DOME STRUTS
Martha E. Phillips, 3906 Ridgecroft Rd., Baltimore, Md. 21206
FUed Oct 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,377
Int. a? E04B //5»
U.S. a. 403—172 1 Claim
1. In a connector system for geodesic dome struts, said
connector being of the type having a hub with members radiat-
ing therefrom in the form of a plurality of peripherally-spaced
arms having connection in swept-back-angle relation to a plane
through the hub perpendicular to the axis of the hub, said struts
having structure forming attachment-apertures in respective
ends thereof, the improvement comprising: means permitting
connection of a said arm at any location around the hub includ-
ing each hub being a right-cylinder in configuration with each
arm swept-back angle being defmed by an angle of said arm at
the point of said connection to the hub, each arm being a
plate-like member in a plane generally parallel with the axis of
382
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said right cylinder, the diameter of each hub being sufficiently
greater across than the width of a said strut affixable thereto to
provide for abutting termination of said strut on the hub. the
i
V."
^
\
- -t ■
ratio of hub-diameter to strut width being substantially one and
three-quarters to one for a said connector with six arms uni-
formly spaced around the periphery of the hub, and said con-
nection being welded connection.
4,379,650
ANCHORING MEANS FOR WALL BRACES
David J. Frankenfield, Burlingame, Calif., assignor to The
Burke Company, San Mateo, Calif.
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,724
Int. a.3 F16B 35/04
U.S. a. 403—316 7 Qaims
1. In a bracing system for tilt-up wall slabs including a floor
slab-engaging foot plate to which a tilt-up brace is pivotally
attached, the combination with said foot plate of a cylindrical
bore formed in a floor slab and extending fully therethrough,
an aperture in said foot plate in registry with said bore, a
threaded anchor bolt having at least one side which is essen-
tially flat and unthreaded removably extending through said
aperture and fully through said bore, said bolt having an abbre-
viated foot portion extending laterally into underlying relation
to the floor slab, the horizontal dimension of said bolt taken
through said foot portion being somewhat less than the diame-
ter of said bore to enable emplacement of said bolt through said
bore and removal of said bolt therefrom, an anchor bolt-wedg-
ing spike removably extending fully through said bore and
against said essentially flat and unthreaded side of the bolt to
maintain said bolt to one side of said bore and to maintain said
foot portion in underlying relation to the floor slab, said spike
having a right-angled head portion at its upper end adapted to
engage the upper surface of the floor slab and to be disposed
within said aperture of said foot plate, and a nut bearing against
the foot plate in removably threaded engagement with said
anchor bolt and operable while in place to prevent the removal
of said spike from said aperture and said bore.
4,379,651
METHOD FOR RELEASABLY RIGIDLY FASTENING
TWO INTERSECTED OVERLAPPING METAL
PROFILES AND MEANS THEREFOR
Masaya Nagashima, 4-6, Takayanagi 3-chome, City of Kisarazu,
Cfaiba Prefecture, Japan
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,407
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 7, 1980. 55-91789
Int. aj B25G 3/36; E04G 7/00
U.S. a. 403—387 4 Qaims
1. A means for releasably rigidly fastening two metal beams
intersecting at an angle and lying one upon another, consisting
essentially of four L-shaped members each having two vertical
sides intersected at one end of each so as to make an angle
corresponding to the angle made at the respective corners of
said intersection of said metal beams, said sides of each of said
L-shaped members being formed on their outer faces with
grooves respectively adapted to receive therein the respective
edge portions of the lower and upper parts of said metal beams
at said respective comers of said intersection, and a number of
fastening means adapted to rigidly connect said sides of said
L-shaped members protruding above or below said lower and
upper parts of said metal beams so as to confront each other.
4,379,652
CLOSED ONE-PIECE ROLLER FRAME FOR VIBRATOR
ROLLERS
Heinz Buchmann; Bruno Mayer, both of Bochum, and Wolfgang
Szybowicz, Erkrath, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Thyssen Industrie AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 190,040
OaJms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 3,
1979, 2940048
Int. CIJ EOlC 19/38
U.S. a. 404—117 6 aaims
1. A vibrator roller assembly and frame comprising a vibra-
tor roller with a horizontal axis of rotation and an unbalance
generator, a closed angular one-piece vibrator roller frame
member having a pair of side portions, a pair of end portions
and four comer portions connected between said side portions
and said end portions respectively, said axis of said vibrator
roller connected between said end portions so that static and
dynamic forces are transferred from said vibrator roller to said
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
383
frame member, said four corner portions being internally and
externally rounded, said side portions having increasing widths
from a median axis of said frame extending perpendicularly to
said axis of rotation, said end portions having increasing widths
from said axis of rotation, and from the median and horizontal
axes to each corner portion, each side and end portion being
trapezoidal in shape.
means hmging the rods of each senes together in a cascade-
connection, means hinging the first rods of each series to each
other at one end, and to the wall, an elastically deformable
member hinged to the ends of the last rods of the senes, and at
4,379,653
ASPHALT PAVER WITH TELESCOPING SCREED
Robert L. Brown, Mattoon, III., assignor to White Consolidated
Industries, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,383
Int. a.3 EOlC 19/22
U.S. a. 404—118 17 Oaims
66-
1. A screed assembly for a floating screed asphalt paving
machine, which comprises
(a) first and second main screed units, each including a front
plate and a sole plate,
(b) screed extension units for each of said main screed units,
each including a front plate and a sole plate,
(c) means for mounting said screed extension units in front of
said main screed units, with the front plates of said exten-
sion units being positioned a substantial distance for-
wardly of the main screed units and the sole plates of said
screed extension units extending rearwardly substantially
to the front plates of said main screed units,
(d) said mounting means including, for each said extension
unit, a pair of spaced guide rods mounted on said screed
extension units and extending laterally substantially from
one end to the other thereof, and a pair of guide sleeves
slideably engaging said guide rods,
(e) said guide sleeves forming part of a support bracket
assembly mounted at the front of a main screed unit,
(0 means for effecting vertical adjustment of said support
bracket assembly relative to the main screed or screed
extension unit, whereby to effect vertical adjustment of
said screed extension unit with respect to the main screed
unit,
(g) controllable positioning means for effecting controlled
lateral extending and retracting movements of the screed
extensions, and
(h) clearing means for preventing the accumulation of exces-
sive amounts of paving materials between said screed
extensions during retracting movements while paving,
such that extending or retracting adjustments of said
screed extension units may be effected at any time.
least one rod intermediate said first and last rods hinged to the
immediately preceding rod at a point intermediate of its length
and hinged to the rod that follows in each series at its ends, and
resilient means for drawing apart the double series of rods.
4,379,655
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR LAYING A
SUBTERRANEAN HLM
Robert L. Brost, Independence, Kans., and Duane W. Gagle,
Bartlesville, Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum Company,
Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,098
Int. C\} E02F 5/70, F16L 1/02
U.S. a. 405—176 22 Qaims
4,379,654
DEVICE FOR KEEPING A LINING-LAYER IN CONTACT
WITH THE WALLS OF A aVIL-ENGINEERING WORKS
Giuseppe Rovelli, Turin, Italy, assignor to Industrie Pirelli
S.P.A., Milan, Italy
FUed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,218
Claims priority, application Italy, Mar. 12, 1980, 20513 A/80
Int. a.3 B65G 5/00: E21D 77/00
U.S. a. 405—53 9 Claims
1. A device for maintaining a flexible liner in contact with
the walls of an excavation in the earth comprising a plurality of
frames spaced one from the other and disposed in planes which
are substantially perpendicular to the larger dimension of the
excavation, said frames comprising a double series of rods,
119 l23t
1. Apparatus for laying a strip of film under the surface of
the soil comprising:
a hollow plow having a film inlet above the soil surface and
a film outlet adapted to be below the soil surface when the
plow is moving through the soil;
a source of film;
means for passing film from the source of film into the film
inlet, through the hollow plow, and out the film outlet
under the soil surface while the plow is moving through
the soil; and
first means adjacent the film outlet of the hollow plow for
supporting the film under the soil after passing the film out
of the film outlet under the soil.
4,379,656
BUOYANCY CONTROL VALVE FOR SCUBA DIVING
VESTS
PhiUip H. Darling, 15711 Williams #173, Tustin, CaUf. 92680
Continuation of Ser. No. 815,735, Jul. 14, 1977, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 691,658, Jun. 1, 1976,
abandoned. This application Dec. 11, 1978, Ser. No. 968,625
Int a.5 B63C 77/02
UJS. a. 405—186 33 Claian
23. A valve for use in combination with a buoyancy compen-
sation vest and breathing air tanks, both carried by a diver, for
controlling the buoyancy of said diver, comprising:
a housing fluidly connected to said vest, said housing bcmg
an open-«nded cylindrical member and said housing in-
cluding an exhaust port;
384
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
a valve closing said exhaust port, said valve being a cup- accumulators in fluid communication with an upper portion of
shaped member having a side opening said cup-shaped a corresponding oil accumulator; and a lower end of an oil
member telescoping over one end of said cylindrical hous-
ing;
means biasing said valve to a closed position against said
exhaust port, said means permitting automatic opening of
said valve in response to a predetermined pressure differ-
ential between the interior of said housing and its sur-
roundings to prevent overpressurization of said vest;
and
an actuator for manually opening said valve.
27. Apparatus for selectively forcing gas in two opposite
directions in a conduit, comprising:
a source of pressurized gas;
first means mounted in said conduit, connected to said
source of pressurized gas, admitting gas from said source
to said conduit in a first direction and utilizing the Coanda
effect for forcing gas in said first direction in said conduit;
and
accumulator in fluid communication with a corresponding pair
of said diametrically opposed cylinders at the rod end of said
piston.
second means, independent of said source of pressurized gas,
for selectively blocking flow in said first direction in said
conduit, said second means forcing said gas simulta-
neously admitted from said source to said conduit through
said first means to reverse and flow in a second direction
opposite said first direction.
28. A small, portable, hand-held respirator valve, compris-
ing:
a main fiow conduit;
means connecting said main flow conduit to a breathing
passage of an animal;
a valve connected to a source of high pressure gas, said
valve selectively admitting gas to said flow conduit in a
first direction away from said connecting means to entrain
air and exhaust the lungs of said animal; and
means independent of said gas source for selectively block-
ing the flow of gas simultaneously admitted from said
souce through said valve to reverse and flow in a second
direction toward said connecting means.
4^79,657
RISER TENSIONER
Karl J. Widiner, Carpinteria, Calif., and Riley G. Goldsmith,
Houston, Tex., assignors to Conoco Inc., Ponca City, Okla.
FUed Jun. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 161,235
Int. a.3 B63B 35/44
UJS. a. 405—195 2 Qainu
1. A portable modular riser tensioner for supporting risers
from a floating platform comprising: a mounting frame having
peripheral supports for supporting said frame from the plat-
form and a central opening; a riser tensioning ring having a
central opening and means for supporting a riser within said
central opening of said riser tensioning ring; at least two pairs
of cylinders, one of each of said pair of cylinders being diamet-
rically opposed to the other of said pair; a piston having a rod
end slideable in each of said cylinders; at least two oil accumu-
lators; at least two air accumulators; said cylinders, said oil
accumulators and said air accumulators all connected to one of
said mounting frame and said tensioning ring; said piston con-
nected to the other of said mounting frame and said tensioning
ring through said rod ends; an upper portion of each of said air
4,379,658
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONSTRUCTING
SLURRY WALLS
Fred C. Schmednecht, LaPorte, Ind., assignor to Thatcher Engi-
neering Corporation, Gary, Ind.
FUed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,691
Int. a.3 E02D 5/20
U.S. a. 405—267 10 Qaims
1. An apparatus for constructing a slurry wall in a trench
comprising, in combination:
a. a trencher including driving means and a trenching col-
umn, the trenching column having a digging chain to
excavate soil to form a trench as the trencher is advanced;
b. a slurry isolation means disposed immediately behind the
trenching column, the slurry isolation means adapted to
slidingly engage the opposite side walls of the trench from
the ground level to the bottom of the trench; and
c. trailing means towed by the driving means and including
(i) plow means extending rearwardly and outwardly with
respect to both sides of the trench from a point just behind
the digging chain in close proximity to the slurry isolation
means for displacing the excavated soil laterally away
from the formed trench and (ii) slurry injection means for
introducing slurry material into the trench behind the
slurry isolation means whereby a slurry wall may be con-
structed simultaneously with the excavation of the trench.
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
385
and the slurry isolation means prevent the slurry from
entering the area of influence of the digging chain.
4,379,659
BUILDING BLOCKS
Alfred Steiner, Andelfingen, Switzerland, assignor to Steiner
. SUidur A.G., Andelfingen, Switzerland
FUed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,217
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 5, 1980,
6698/80; Sep. 5, 1980, 6699/80
Int. a.3 E04C 2/04
U.S. a. 405— 284 11 Claims
1. A sha(>ed hollow building block comprising in combina-
tion, a base wall, side walls, and a face wall having the form of
a shield standing perpendicularly to the base wall, having on
both sides a margin projecting relative to the side walls and
having a height greater than that of the side walls, the side
walls and the base wall jointly forming an elongate trough in a
direction normal to the face wall, and a transverse wall extends
parallel to the face wall in the trough for dividing the inside of
said building block into compartments, one of which is open at
the rear of the building block opposite said face wall and at the
top of the building block opposite said base wall, and the other
of which is located between said one compartment and said
face wall and is also open at the top of the building block
opposite said base wall, with said side walls laterally delimiting
both said one compartment ojsen at the rear and said other
compartment between said one compartment and the face
wall.
successive strip is applied along a previously uncovered zone
of the roof bordering the last applied one of the previously
applied strips, and with the nearer edges of these two strips in
proximate relation to each other, the improvement comprising
a. sensing the lateral position of a previously applied one of
said strips,
b. controlling the lateral position of each newly applied
strip, as it is undergoing application, in accordance with
said sensed lateral position to establish the required proxi-
mate relation between the nearer edges of newly applied
strip and the last applied strip respectively,
and wherein
c. application of each of said newly applied strips of mat is
effected at a lateral position determined by the lateral
position of a transporter means on which a mat applying
means for applying the strips is carried, and which travels
longitudinally of the zone in which the newly applied strip
is required to be applied,
d. the position of the mat applying means is laterally adjusted
relatively to that of said transporter means in accordance
with the sensed lateral position of said previously applied
strip, and in a direction and by an amount such as to
compensate for lateral deviation of said transporter in
travelling along said rone and which would otherwise
cause said proximate edges to be spaced apart or to over-
lap by more than a predetermined amount.
4,379,660
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING MAT
TO THE ROOF OF A MINE WORKING
Karl M. Groetschel, Montsalvatstrasse la, D-8000 Miinchen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 183,825
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 7,
1979, 2936206
Int. a.5 E21D 79/00
U.S. a. 405—288 14 Claims
4,379,661
ADVANCE MECHANISM FOR A MINE ROOF SUPPORT
UNIT
Egon Wojaczek, Hamm-Bockum-HocTel; Mustafa Soliman,
Lwien, and Juergen Schulte, Hamm, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia,
Lunen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,638
Int. a.^ E21D 23/08
U.S. a. 405—299 13 Claims
y "
IB % K
» n 17
1. In a method of applying a succession of strips to the roof
of an underground mine working in a manner such that each
1. An advance mechanism for a roof support unit having a
pair of spaced floor girders (11), the advance mechanism com-
prising a hydraulic advance ram (22) and a pair of generally
parallel relay rods (18), one end of each of the relay rods being
connected to a head-piece (19) configured for attachment to a
longwall conveyor, the other end of each of the relay rods
being attached to a guide element (20) which is slidably guided
by guide rails (21) attached to the mutually-facing sides of the
floor girders, the hydraulic advance ram being pivotally at-
tached to the guide element and to the floor girders, alignment
means being provided for aligning the ends of the floor girders
remote from the head-piece when the hydraulic advance ram is
pressurised, wherein the guide rails are formed with inclined
guide surfaces (21c), and the guide element is provided with
abutment means (27) engageable with the guide surfaces, said
alignment means including the guide surfaces and the abutment
means, and the guide surfaces being positioned adjacent said
ends of the floor girders remote from the head-piece.
386
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,662
CONTROL DEVICE FOR AN ADVANCING SUPPORT IN
UNDERGROUND MINING
Siegmar Block, Es8«ii, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Thys-
sen Industrie AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,075
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 27,
1980, 3024116
Int. a.5 E21D 23/18
U.S. a. 405—302 8 Qaims
A-
/ p~i. t. _ iv! |v.
- !7
10
•J r.
1. An improved control device for an underground mining
workmg support unit arrangement having hydraulic supports
for supporting several load points, means for admitting a hy-
draulic working medium to the hydraulic supports, the admit-
ting means including an adjacent support unit arrangement
hydraulically connected to a working support unit arrange-
ment, a control block having control valves and control con-
duits connected to the adjacent support unit arrangement for
connecting the hydraulic supports for supporting the load
points with the control valves, and each of the conduits having
a nominal diameter which permits direct control of the hydrau-
lic supports for supporting the control points, the improved
control which comprises means for connecting the hydraulic
supports for supporting several load points successively over
the same control conduits to the control valves of the adjacent
support unit arrangement, said connecting means including
reversing valves connected to the hydraulic supports of the
working unit support arrangement and the conduits and over
which the hydraulic supports for supporting the load points
are connectable.
4,379,663
VACUUM SEQUENONG SYSTEM WITH WEIGHT
CONTROLLED MATERIAL DRAW CYCLE
Robert Allison, Sabetha, Kans., assignor to Mac Equipment,
Inc., Sabetha, Kans.
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,673
Int. a.^ B65G 53/66
U.S. a. 406—23 10 Qaims
1. In a vacuum sequencing system having first and second
storage containers for holding granular plastic material and the
like, a receiver for receiving the material from the containers
and discharging the material in batches through an outlet of the
receiver, first and second conduits extending from the respec-
tive first and second containers to the receiver to deliver the
material therebetween, vacuum means for applying a vacuum
to the receiver to draw the material through the conduits from
the containers to the receiver, a ratio valve for opening and
closing the first and second conduits to control the relative
amounts of material loaded into the receiver from the first and
second containers, and a dump valve operable when activated
to interrupt the vacuum to thereby interrupt the material flow
through the conduits and effect discharge of the material in the
receiver through the outlet thereof, the improvement compris-
ing,
a frame supporting the receiver in a manner permitting the
receiver to deflect generally downwardly when material
is loaded therein;
switch means for activating the dump valve when the down-
ward deflection of the receiver reaches a first predeter-
mined level, thereby effecting discharge of a batch of
material from the receiver when the weight of the batch is
sufficient to effect said first predetermined level of deflec-
tion of the receiver and
second switch means sensitive to downward deflection of
the receiver to a second predetermined level which is less
than the first predetermined level, said second switch
means being operable when deflection of the receiver is
less than said second level to maintain the ratio valve in a
first condition wherein the first conduit is open and the
second conduit is closed, and when deflection of the re-
ceiver exceeds said second level to maintain the ratio
valve in a second condition wherein the first conduit is
closed and the second conduit is open,
whereby material is loaded into the receiver from the first
container when the deflection of the receiver is less than
said second level and from the second container when the
deflection of the receiver is between said second level and
said first level.
4,379,664
SEED CUP ASSEMBLY
Merv V. Klein; Dan W. Kelm, and Salah U. Din, all of Winnipeg,
Canada, assignors to Prasco Super Seeder Ltd., Winnipeg,
Canada
Filed Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 189,565
Claims priority, application Canada, Jul. 11, 1980, 356042
Int. a.3 B65G 53/46
U.S. a. 406—68 1 Qaim
1. A seed cup assembly for use with a pneumatic seeding
system and adapted for attachment to the underside of a pres-
surized hopper, comprising in combination a discharge casing;
a conduit secured to and in communication with the lower end
of said casing and adapted for insertion into the pneumatic
system; a rotatable shaft extending transversely through said
casing; a metering component joumalled for rotation by said
shaft and communicating with said casing and providing pas-
sage for granular material between said hopper and said con-
duit; said metering component being adjustably positioned
within said casing for controlling the quantity of granular
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
387
material transferred from the hopper to the conduit; said me-
tering component comprising a cylindrical body having a
plurality of elongated flutes thereon, said flutes engaging mate-
rial within the hopper and depositing said material into the
conduit as the metering component rotates within the casing;
means sealing the fluted cylinder of the assembly with an
adjacent wall of the casing; means for moving the fluted meter-
ing component along said shaft to increase the exposure of the
fluted surface to the inside of the casing, said metering compo-
nent including an elongated portion of reduced diameter ex-
tending concentrically outwards from the cylindrical fluted
boday; and a cylindrical slider freely and coaxially mounted on
said elongated portion adjacent to said fluted cylinder and
providing sealing means with the adjacent wall of the casing;
means sealing the fluted cylinder comprising a cylindrical
housing of greater diameter than said fluted cylinder, one end
wall of said housing being secured to said rotatable shaft
whereby the cylindrical housing is coaxially positioned over
the portion of the fluted cylinder extending through the casing
wall; and a disc shaped member at the other end of said cylin-
drical housing and having a peripheral outer surface providing
the seal against the casing wall, and an inner surface profiled to
match the fluted surface of the metering cylinder.
4379,666
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURE OF JIGS
John A. Rose, Knaresborough, and Keith Dyer, Leeds, both of
England, assignors to AMF Incorporated, White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,291
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 19, 1979,
7932472
Int. a.5 B23C 1/16
U.S. a. 409—1 10 6 Qaims
4,379,665
INSULATION STRIPPER FOR COAXIAL CABLE
Homer Hendershot, Cogan Station, and Charles M. Storrs,
Williamsport, both of Pa., assignors to Lemco Tool Corpora-
tion, Cogan Station, Pa.
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,600
Int. CI.' B23B 51/04
U.S. a. 408—204 10 Qaims
10 -»
26
^ 5
^-^
/O
3
1. Apparatus for the manufacture of multiple plate jigs for
use in sewing, comprising
a top plate with a contoured outer periphery;
mounting means adapted to removably support in predeter-
mined spatial relationship a work piece of bottom plate
material and said top plate above and parallel to the work
piece;
forming means for contouring a work piece to form a bottom
plate with a contoured periphery and for forming a con-
toured slot thereby separating the bottom plate into inner
and outer portions:
a pair of feeler means each being arranged to move indepen-
dent of the other along the periphery of said top plate;
one of said feeler means being operatively connected to
guide said forming means when contouring the outer
periphery of a bottom plate; and
the other of said feeler means being operatively connected to
guide said forming means when forming a contoured slot
in a bottom plate.
4,379,667
CHUCK FOR MACHINE TOOLS
Hisanari Yoshimoto; Taka Tonomura, and Takuo Takamura, all
of Toyama, Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Fiyikoshi,
Toyama, Japan
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,813
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 8, 1979, 54-
154183[U]
Int. a.3 B23C 1/00: B23B 31/04
U.S. Q. 409— 234 9 Claims
1. An insulation stripping tool for coaxial cable having a
body with cable alignment means at one end and a stripping bit
at the other end axially aligned with the means, the bit includ-
ing a cutting end adjacent to the means with an insulation
cutting edge and a sleeve stop surface away from the means,
wherein the improvement comprises an axial bore extending
into the bit from the cutting end and an insulation carrying
flute on the surface of the bit extending longitudinally along
the bit from the cutting edge past the sleeve stop surface, the
cutting edge facing in the direction of stripping rotation of the
tool, said flute including a bottom surface extending from one
side of the bit past the bit axis and a side wall extending from
the bottom wall to the surface of the bit, the side wall including
a section extending longitudinally along the bit and a curved
section at the cutting end of the bit running from one end of the
longitudinal section to the cutting edge whereby upon strip-
ping rotation of the tool and feeding of the bit into an end of a
coaxial cable held by the means the cutting edge severs a strip
of insulation from between the central conductor and the
surrounding conductive sheath and the flute carries the strip
away from the cutting edge, axially along the bit and out-
wardly the cable without jamming while the central conductor
is fed into said bore.
1. A needle-roller type chuck for machine tools comprising:
a chuck body having a longitudinal axis and a leading end
pxjrtion;
a chuck barrel integral with the leading end portion of said
chuck body and extending axially therefrom, said chuck
barrel having a leading end portion, an outer peripheral
conically tapered surface and a plurality of holes circum-
ferentially distributed about said axis and extending from
the leading end of said chuck barrel toward said chuck
body;
388
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
a rotatable clamping ring positioned over said chuck barrel,
said clamping ring having an inner conical surface extend-
ing in the axial direction of said chuck body and parallel
with the outer peripheral surface of said chuck barrel;
a needle roller assembly having a predetermined axial
length, said assembly comprising a plurality of needle
rollers positioned between said chuck barrel and said
clamping ring in rotatable contact with the conically
tapered surface of said chuck barrel and conical surface of
said clamping ring; and
the axial length of each of the plurality of holes correspond-
ing substantially to the predetermined axial length of the
needle roller assembly.
4^79,669
TOBACX:0 HANDLING APPARATUS
Robert W. Wilson, Charlotte, N.C., assignor to Powell Manufac-
turing Company, Inc., Bennettsillle, S.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 949,407, Oct. 10, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 629,974, Nov. 7, 1975,
abandoned. This appUcation Not. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,288
Int. a.J AOID 45/16
U.S. a. 414—21 24 Claims
4,379,668
LOCKING DEVICE FOR SECURING CARGO IN A
VEHICLE
Robert Pelletier, Le Perreux, France, assignor to Pelletier Ex-
ploitation, Auberrilliers and Siren, Versailles, both of, France
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,700
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 26, 1980, 80 04242
Int. a.3 B60P 7/08
U.S. a. 410—77 14 Claims
zn> K
< » 5S 34 7 » SXa 2i\7aV ka \a
ing:
1. A locking device for securing cargo in a vehicle, compris-
a frame (7) comprising two first members (8) joined together
by two second cross members (9) and capable of being
fixed to the floor of the vehicle space intended to accom-
modate the cargo;
a first latch (10) and a second latch (11) hinged together at
one of their ends by a common transverse pivot pin (12),
said first latch (10) having at its non-hinged end a trans-
verse hinge pin (13) mounted in a fixed position between
said first members (8), and said second latch (11) having at
its non-hinged end a transverse hinge pin (14) guided in
translation in longitudinal slideways (15) in said first mem-
bers (8);
means for changing said first and second latches (10, 11)
from a cargo unlocking position, in which said latches are
retracted down into said frame and said transverse hinge
pins (13, 14) are separated to a cargo locking position, in
which said first and second latches (10, 11) project above
said frame (7) and said transverse hinge pins (13, 14) are
brought near to each other;
spring means for drawing said first and second latches (10,
11) from the cargo unlocking position to the cargo locking
position; and
first blocking means for blocking said first and second
latches (10, 11) in the cargo unlocking position and second
blocking means for blocking said first and second latches
(10, 11) in the cargo locking position, respectively.
1. Tobacco leaf handling apparatus for facilitating the load-
ing of tobacco leaves into successive bulk curing structures
each of which includes a plurality of parts movable with re-
spect to one another between a tobacco leaf receiving and
loading position and a tobacco leaf supporting and curing
position, said apparatus being operable to transfer harvested
tobacco leaves from a source into contained relation with
successive parts of successive tobacco curing structures posi-
tioned with an area having a substantial horizontal extent, said
apparatus comprising
conveyor means adapted to receive harvested tobacco
leaves from a source and arranged for discharging the
leaves from an end thereof with a force sufficient to propel
the leaves through the air along and to the end of a flow
path above said area having a greater horizontal extent
than the horizontal extent of said area,
means for supporting successive curing structure parts
within said area in a position below said flow path so that
discharged tobacco leaves flowing in said path are avail-
able to be moved downwardly out of said path into con-
tained relation with respect thereto,
tobacco leaf deflecting means mounted above said part sup-
fKjrting means within said flow path for generally horizon-
tal cyclical movements in the direction of extent of said
flow path,
means for effecting continuous cyclical movements of said
deflecting means,
said tobacco leaf deflecting means including leaf engaging
surface means open in a horizontal direction toward the
discharge end of said conveyor means operable during the
cyclical movement of said leaf deflecting means to inter-
cept by engagement therewith successively available
leaves propelled through the air along the flow path at
different horizontal positions determined by the position
of cyclic movement of said leaf deflecting means when
engagement occurs so as to effect a substantially uniform
distribution of the leaves in the direction of extent of the
flow path with respect to said part supporting means
therebelow.
4,379,670
LINEAR POCKET LETDOWN DEVICE
James G. Haanoosh, Sudbury; Andrew C. Harrey, Walthao;
John C. Harding, Sudbury, and Ram Chaodraaekhar, F^>
mingham, all of Mass., assignors to Foster-Miller Aasodatea,
Inc., Waltham, Mass.
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,151
Int a.J ClOJ 3/52
VS. a. 414—217 19 Clalma
1. A system for removing solid material from the bottom of
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
389
a pressure vessel and discharging the solids to ambient condi-
tions without reheving the vessel's pressure comprising a tube
having an inlet end and an outlet end and connected intermedi-
ate its ends to the bottom of the pressure vessel for receiving
the material from the vessel, a conveyor having a course which
travels through the tube, motor means connected to the con-
veyor for driving it along its course, pocket means defined by
consecutive pairs of pistons carried by the conveyor for con-
speed of said elevator means to bring said elevator means
back into synchronization with said transfer mechanism
whenever movement of said elevator means is out of
correlation with said transfer mechanism.
V
■-. »i i»^
•M.7 jr ^Ni^! ^iw-'««'^^l««^^ ^a>«'i*:-, ?aw /5_'CHf«fGi5t»L-^iQNt
,^^"-^^-(-^i;.v,br>»'j-r . , .y^.
-lit, , '' '•' < , I I i oV "
* — *^^)*T L:.
4 L'au<? tstwygj
<IMiiE-<jPi«aTEI>
4,379,672
COMBINATION HANDLING AND CONVEYING
APPARATUS
Roy D. Hunter, 2829 Texas Ave., Texas City, Tex. 77590
Filed May 12, 1980, Ser. No. 148,822
Int. C\? B65G 41/00. 65/04. 67/60
IJ.S. a. 414—565 12 Qaims
veying the material received in the tube from the vessel and
carrying the material to the outlet of the tube, labyrinth seals
formed by the pistons in the tube both upstream and down-
stream of the vessel for preventing vessel pressure loss through
the inlet and outlet ends of the tube, a small annular clearance
being formed between the pistons and the tube, and means for
introducing liquid into the pockets at the inlet end of the tube
upstream of the vessel, said liquid cooperating with the pistons
to form moving labyrinth seals upstream of said vessel.
4,379,671
SYNCHRONIZED BOTTLE UNLOADING SYSTEM
Donald D. Cochran, Bartlett, 111., assignor to National Can
Corporation, Chicago, 111.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 909,617, May 26, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jan. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 113,271
Int a.3 B65G 43/10
U.S. a. 414—331 5 Claims
1. In an article unloader system having a carrier for holding
articles arranged in a stack of shelves, each shelf containing
rows of articles, means for intermittently simultaneously un-
loading only the forwardmost rows of articles from said car-
rier, an elevator means having a plurality of flights respective
to receive the unloaded rows of articles for intermittently
transporting the unloaded rows of articles, a transfer mecha-
nism being driven in circular motion cycles for removing the
unloaded rows of articles a row at a time as each said flight
reaches a predetermined point of travel and passing each said
removed row of articles onto a conveyor means, a common
drive source, and corresponding drive transmission means
extending from said drive source for simultaneously intermit-
tently driving said elevator means and said transfer mecha-
nism, the improvement comprising:
a synchronization control means for regularly detecting the
rate of movement of said elevator means at least once
every cycle of said transfer mechanism and adjusting the
1. An apparatus for off-loading and handling loose materials
from a vessel, comprising
a base structure,
a generally inverted U-shaped chassis adapted for limited
lateral movement with respect to said base structure, said
chassis comprising
a pair of spaced beams mounted for horizontal sliding
movement with respect to said base structure,
engaging means cooperating with said base structure and
pair of spaced beams for engaging said base structure
and pair of spaced beams and permitting said horizontal
sliding movement of said pair of beams with respect to
said base structure, and
frame means attached to and spanning said pair of spaced
beams for forming an upper frame structure,
drive means for moving said chassis with respect to said base
structure,
a platform rotatably mounted on said upper frame structure
of said chassis,
means for horizontally rotating said platform with respect to
said upper frame & .ructure of said chassis,
an elongated articulated boom means mounted on said plat-
form for rotation therewith and for longitudinal extension
beyond said chassis, said boom means having a free ex-
tending end,
longitudinally extendable conveyor means suspended within
said
generally inverted U-shaped chassis below said platform and
adapted for limited arcuate vertical movement with re-
spect thereto, said conveyor means having a loading end
projecting from said chassis and movable to a position in
contact with the loose material for cooperating with said
free extending end of said boom means, and
material handling means disposed on said free extending end
of said boom means and cooperating with said conveyor
means loading end for loading the materials into said
conveyor means.
390
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,673
ARRANGEMENT FOR ATTACHING WORKING
IMPLEMENTS TO VEHICLE
Sadayuki Takahashi; Yorio Komeda; Matsuo Tachibana, and
KenkJchi Nosaka, all of Sakai, Japan, assignors to Kubota
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,796
Gaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 26, 1980, 55-
121694[U]
Int. a.' E02F i/72
L.S. CI. 414—686 7 Oaims
9 ?S
13 iS '?
1. An arrangement for attaching working implements to a
vehicle comprising a pair of side frames provided on the oppo-
site sides of the body of the vehicle and extending longitudi-
nally thereof, the side frames having mount portions for attach-
mg to the vehicle body a front loader with a pair of booms
liftable on the opposite sides of the vehicle body, each of the
side frames bemg provided at its front end with an upright
frame extendmg upward in front of the bonnet of the vehicle
and including a mount member at the base portion thereof and
an upright member removably attached to the mount member,
the side frames and the upright frames being provided with a
front three-point linkage for attaching a front working imple-
ment to the vehicle body and with lift cylinders for lifting or
lowering the front working implement by the front three-point
linkage.
4,379,674
LOAD SKIDDING VEHICLE HAVING A POSITIONALLY
BIASED GRAPPLE
Thomas C. Meisel, Jr., and Robert J. Price, both of Peoria, III.,
assignors to Caterpillar Tractor Co., Peoria, III.
PCT No. PCr/US81/00950, § 371 Date Jul. 13, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 13, 1981
per Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,099
Int. a.5 B66C i/n
U.S. a. 414—699 9 Qaims
connected to one of said tongs (56) and said grasping
cylinder (58A) being connected to said other long (56),
said grasping piston (S8a) dividing said grasping cylin-
der (586) into a third (58c) and a fourth (58cO fluid tight
portion;
means (32) for displacing said grasping means (28) to a pre-
determined position between a rearwardly extending
position and a forwardly extending position relative to
said chassis (12), said displacing means (32) including
a fluid equalizer ram (36) constituting a cylinder (366) and
a piston (36o) displaceably disposed in said cylinder
(366), said piston (36a) dividing said cylinder (366) into
a first (36c) and a second (36rf) fluid tight portion, said
piston being connected to said grasping means (28) and
said cylinder being joined to said chassis (12);
selectively actuatable first means (66,68,70,72,78,62',68') for
continually biasing said displacing means (32) with a pre-
determined biasing force toward a selected load skidding
position, said first biasing means (66,68,70,72,78,68') per-
mitting displacement of said grasping means (28) away
from said load skidding position in response to load-
induced forces greater than said biasing force, said first
biasing means (66,68,70,72,78,62',68') including
a fluid reservoir (66);
means (68,68') for supplying pressurized fluid at a dis-
charge pressure;
means (70,72,62') for providing fluid communication from
said pressurized fluid supply means (68,68') to said first
cylinder portion (36c) when said biasing force is desired;
and
means (78,62') for providing fluid communication be-
tween said second cylinder portion (36(/) and said reser-
voir (66) when said biasing force is desired; and
second means (74,96,64) for biasing said tongs (56) toward
said closed, minimum opening load grasping configuration
with a predetermined grasping force.
4,379,675
DAMPENED FULLY PIVOTAL HANGER FOR A
GRAPPLE
John R. Muntjanoff, Aurora, and Dennis M. Day, Hinckley,
both of III., assignors to Caterpillar Tractor Co., Peoria, 111.
PCT No. PCr/US80/01647, § 371 Date Dec. 4, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 4, 1980
per Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 270,533
Int. C1.3 B66C l/OO
U.S. a. 414—734 14 Claims
\| 1. A load skidding vehicle (10) comprising:
a vehicle chassis (12);
a boom (24) mounted on said chassis (10);
means (28) connected to said boom (24) for releasably grasp-
ing loads, said grasping means (28) being movable be-
tween an open, load releasing configuration and a closed,
minimum opening load grasping configuration, said grasp-
ing means (28) including
a pair of relatively movable tongs (56); and
a fluid grapple ram (58) having a grasping cylinder (586)
and a grasping piston (58a) displaceably disposed in said
grasping cylinder (586), said grasping piston (58a) being
1. A dampened pivotal hanger assembly (10) adapted to be
fixed to a supportive structure (14), comprising:
a main mounting member (24) attachable to the supportive
structure (14), said main mounting member (24) having
two support portions (28) a spaced distance apart;
mounting means (30) attached to each support portion (28);
a pair of first pivoting members (32), each of said first pivot-
ing members (32) being connected to a corresponding one
of said mounting means (30) and being pivotable with
respect to said support portions (28);
crossmember means (38) joining the first pivoting members
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
391
(32) one to the other, said crossmember means (38) sup-
porting two horizontally spaced pivot pins (44);
a pair of second pivoting members (48), each of said second
pivoting members (48) being attached to a corresponding
one of said second pivot pins (44) and being pivotable with
respect to said first pivoting members (32);
first extendable-retractable dampening means (60) con-
nected between said main mounting member (24) and at
least one of said first pivoting members (32) for resisting
pivoting of said first pivoting members (32); and
second dampening means (68) connected between said cross-
member means (38) and at least one of said second pivot-
ing members (48) for dampening .ffivoting of the second
pivoting members (48) relative to 4aid crossmember means
(38) wherein said main mounting^member (24), said first
pivoting members (32) and said second pivoting members
(48) define a central, substantially vertically extending
recess (71).
4,379,677
DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING THE CLEARANCE BETWEEN
MOVING TURBINE BLADES AND THE TURBINE RING
Oaude C. Hallinger, and Robert Kerristin, both of Le mee sur
Seine, France, assignors to Societe Nationale d' Etude et de
Construction de Moteurs d' Aviation, "S.N.E.CM.A.", Paris,
France
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194,890
Qaims priority, application France, Oct. 9, 1979, 79 25028
Int. a.'POlD 11/00. 11/08
U.S. a. 415—175 8 Claims
4,379,676
PIPE HANDLING SYSTEM
Robert Frias, Odessa, Tex., assignor to Ingram Corporation,
New Orleans, La.
Filed Feb. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 125,162
Int. C1.3 E21B 19/14
U.S. a. 414—748 25 Qaims
1. An apparatus for transferring lengths of pipe between a
pipe handling apparatus and a pipe rack located on one side of
the pipe handling apparatus comprising:
a first arm member having first and second ends, said first
end being pivotally connected to said one side for pivotal
movement about a first axis;
a second arm member having first and second ends, said first
end being pivotally connected to said one side for pivotal
movement about a second axis,
said first axis and said second axis being generally parallel
and positioned generally on the same horizontal plane,
a first lug means rotatably attached to said first arm member
generally at said second end and extending towards said
pipe rack,
a second lug means fixedly attoched to said second arm
member generally at said second end and extending
towards said pipe rack,
said first lug means and said second lug means being capable
of supporting a length of pipe, and
a pivoting means connected to said first arm member and to
said second arm member for pivoting said first arm mem-
ber about said first axis and said second arm member about
said second axis.
1. A device for adjustment of the clearance between the
blades and circumferentially continuous monoblock ring of a
turbine, comprising:
an inner sleeve having a seal gasket mounted thereto,
a perforated, cylindrical partition encompassing the sleeve
and fastened thereto;
a peripheral wall forming a distribution chamber for the air
which heats or cools the ring,
an opposite wall;
an enclosure formed by said inner sleeve which supports said
seal gasket, and said opposite wall; and
a plurality of tubular elements radially connecting said en-
closure to the distribution chamber and ensuring the pas-
sage of heating or cooling air from the distribution cham-
ber to the enclosure,
wherein said inner sleeve and partition are circumferentially
continuous and wherein said opposite wall has bore holes
for receiving one end of the tubular elements, further
comprising an exhaust pipe and tubular exhaust elements,
each of said exhaust elements further comprising an end
opening into the enclosure and including a nozzle opera-
tively associated with an opening provided in the perfo-
rated partition, each of said exhaust elements also includ-
ing an end opening to the outside of the distribution cham-
ber and means for connecting with said exhaust pipe.
4,379,678
INDIVIDUAL BLADE CONTROL
Gaylord W. Carlock, Joshua; Jimmy G. Gamer, Charles M.
Gatlin, both of Hurst; Kenneth F. Guinn, Fort Worth, and
Peter A. Reyes, WaUuga, all of Tex., assignors to Textron,
Inc., Providence, R.I.
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194,804
Int. a.3 B64C 27/74
U.S.a.41fr-98 . WCWms
1. Apparatus for individually controlling each blade of a
rotor that rotates with a mast which drives the rotor through
a rotating hub, the improvement comprising:
a plurality of blade actuators mounted to rotate with the hub
and individually coupled to a rotor blade for control
thereof;
a plurality of power packages mounted to route with the
routing hub, each power package individually actuated
1029O.G.— 16
392
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
by rotation of the hub to provide actuator power and
control signals; and
connecting means connecting said wall to said fluid directional
valve for allowing independent movement between said wall
control channels for connecting the actuator power and
control signals from each power package to each blade
actuator to control blade pitch.
4,379,679
SUPERSONIC/SUPERSONIC FLUID EJECTOR
Roy N. Guile, Wethersfield, Conn., assignor to United Technolo-
gies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,613
Int. a.3 F04F 5/46
U.S. a. 417-54 4 Qaims
1. In an ejector of the type for pumping a supersonic veloc-
ity, ejector driven medium to a higher pressure, the improve-
ment comprising:
means for generating a multiplicity of weak shock waves
extending into the driven medium at an acute angle to the
direction of flow for compressing the driven medium at
supersonic velocities including at least one first driving
medium nozzle capable of discharging an ejector driving
medium laterally of and parallel to the driven medium at
a supersonic velocity greater than the supersonic velocity
of the driven medium and at a static pressure above the
static pressure of the driven medium.
4,379,680
AMBIENT AIR TIMING DEVICE
William L. Barry, Houston, Tex., assignor to Vapor Corpora-
tion, Chicago, 111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 68,728, Aug. 22, 1979, Pat. No.
4,302,159. This application Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,787
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 24,
1998, has been disclaimed. '
Int. a.3 F04B 49/00
U.S. a. 417-46 4 Claims
1. A fluid timer for a reciprocating pump wherein said pump
includes a housing, a reciprocating piston mounted in said
housing and a piston rod secured to said piston, said timer
comprising a bellows, said bellows including a moveable wall
for varying the fluid volume in said bellows, control means for
controlling the rate of fluid flow into and out of said bellows,
a supply fluid directional control valve for directing fluid to
said pump housing on a selected side of said piston for recipro-
cating said piston, first lost ihotion connecting means for con-
necting said wall and said piston rod for allowing independent
movement between said wall and said piston rod during at least
a portion of a first stroke of said piston, and second lost motion
and said fluid directional valve during at least a portion of a
second stroke of said piston.
4,379,681
FLUID PUMP WITH DUAL DIAPHRAGM CHECK
VALVES
Paul R. Goudy, Jr., 8920 Hampton Ave., Milwaukee, Wis.
53225, assignor to Paul R. Goudy, Jr., Shorewood, Wis.;
Bruce J. Landis, Sunrise, Fla. and Kenneth J. Landis, Univer-
sity Heights, Ohio
Filed Jan. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 109,547
Int. aj F04B 21/02. 39/10. 43/04
U.S. a. 417-560 3 Qaims
1. A fluid pump comprising a fluid inlet and a fluid outlet; a
pumping chamber; an inlet check valve means for passing fluid
flow from said fluid inlet to said pumping chamber and for
blocking fluid flow from said pumping chamber to said fluid
inlet; an outlet check valve means for passing fluid flow from
said pumping chamber to said fluid outlet and for blocking
fluid flow from said fluid outlet to said pumping chamber;
pumping means for drawing fluid from said fluid inlet via said
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
393
inlet check valve into said pumping chamber and for pumping
fluid from said pumping chamber via said outlet check valve to
said fluid outlet; at least one of said inlet and outlet check valve
means comprising a self-sealing check valve assembly, includ-
ing a first relatively rigid member having a plate-like surface
and bounded by boundary portions of said surface; a second
relatively rigid member having a plate-like surface and a fluid
passage means opening at said plate-like surface of said second
relatively rigid member and bounded by boundai^ portions of
said plate-like surface of said second relatively rteid member;
flexible means positioned between said plate-like>urfaces for
cooperating with said boundary portions to provide>i5Ubstan-
tially fluid-tight seal therewith; and said flexible means includ-
ing movable means for moving upon flexure of said flexible
means in response to a pressure differential across said flexible
means, said movable means including means operative when
said flexible means moves substantially to opposite extreme
positions thereof to block fluid flow between said fluid passage
means and to permit such fluid flow, respectively; said flexible
means having plural flexible parts each having a resilient char-
acteristic, one of said parts having a surface area portion for
blocking fluid flow through at least one of said inlet check
valve means and outlet check valve means in response to one
directional pressure differential thereacross and being capable
of permitting fluid flow through said at least one check valve
means in response to an opposite direction pressure differential
thereacross, and the other of said parts having an opening
aligned with at least one of said fluid passage means and with
said surface area of the one of said parts, said opening being
adequately large to permit flexible deformation of said other
part into said opening.
4,379,682
REACTION APPARATUS FOR THE FORMATION OF
MICROSPHERES OR MICROCAPSULES
Peter J. Natale, Canton, and Igino Lombardo, Sharon, both of
Mass., assignors to Ortho Diagnostics, Inc., Raritan, N.J.
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,715
Int. a.3 B29C 2i/Q0
U.S. CI. 425—10
means to provide turbulence in the flow of said composite
liquid stream from said inlet end to said outlet end; and
(c) means for rotating said drum about said longitudinal axis.
- 4,379,683
CONCRETE FORMING APPARATUS
Stuart N. Rodgers, and Sidney J. Voycheshin, both of 7605 - 115
St., Delta, British Columbia, Canada (V4C 5M9)
Filed May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 149,726
Int. a. J EOlC 19/iS
U.S. a. 425—62 »♦ Claims
5 0aims
1. Microparticle formation apparatus for use in a system of
microparticle formation from a flowing stream of a core liquid
ejected from the exit of a vibrating nozzle concurrently and
coaxially into a flowing stream of a sheath liquid formmg a
composite liquid stream wherein droplets formed of said core
liquid within said sheath liquid are formed into microparticles,
said formation apparatus further comprising:
(a) a drum having a substantially horizontal longitudinal axis
therethrough, said drum defining an inlet end and an
outlet end and forming a cavity between said inlet and
outlet ends, and an internal spiral channel means extend-
ing between said inlet and outlet ends;
(b) mixing means intermittently spaced within said channel
1. Apparatus for forming, compacting and finishing the top
surface of concrete poured between a pair of removable longi-
tudinally extending parallel opposed forms, said apparatus
comprising:
(a) a frame having forward and rearward ends which extend
transversely between opposed first and second sides of
said frame, said ends and said sides substantially defining a
plane;
(b) a wooden concrete pre-finishing member disposed along
the forward end of said frame, said member having a
lower surface configured to vary in vertical distance from
said plane along the transverse axes of the forms, and said
member being relatively wide when measured in the di-
rection of longitudinal extension of the forms;
(c) vibrator means affixed to said frame for causing vibration
of said member;
(d) a finishing pan rigidly affixed beneath said frame to the
rear of and adjacent said member and extending between
said first and second sides of said frame and configured to
vary in vertical distance from said plane along the trans-
verse axes of the forms;
(e) transporting means on said first side of said frame and
transporting means on said second side of said frame for
engaging said frame on top of the forms and permitting
movement of the apparatus along the forms with said ends
extending transversely of the forms and with said member
extending transversely between the forms; and,
(0 propulsion means affwed to s«d frame for propelling the
apparatus along the tops of forms whereby poured con-
crete beneath the apparatus is formed, compacted and
finished to a depth which varies along transverse axes of
the forms;
said member having a portion of said lower surface shaped
to define a semi-conical recess in regions of relatively
abrupt change in said vertical distance, the apex of said
recess lying at the rearward edge of said lower surface
and the base of said recess lying along the forward edge
of said lower surface.
394
-^
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,684
PRESS FOR POWDER METALLURGY
Takeshi KaUgiri, Machida, and Takakazu Tsuchifuji, Tokyo,
both of Japan, assignors to Yoshizuka Seiki Co., Ltd., Kawa-
saki, Japan
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,679
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1980, 55-79853
Int. a.3 B30B 11/02
U.S. a. 425-78 3 Qaims
T
50
40
100
60
vU
90
100
no "
80
'40
;]
.{
r
. '<0
(50
1. A press for powder metallurgy comprising:
a frame;
a die holder mounted on said frame for movement with
respect to said frame;
an open-ended die mounted in said die holder;
a lower punch fixed with respect to said frame and forming
the bottom of said die;
an upper punch movable with respect to said frame and
insertable into said die to form the top thereof;
an upper ram for vertically moving said upper punch into
said die at a first rate of speed;
poke rods vertically movable by said upper ram;
levers pivotally connected to and extending inwardly from
said frame and having head portions positioned vertically
below said poke rods so that said head portions are con-
tacted and pivoted downwardly by said poke rods;
screw threaded rods carried by said die holder and spaced
above the upper surfaces thereof; and
receiving pieces translatable along said threaded rods by
rotation of said rods, said receiving pieces being posi-
tioned vertically below said levers so that said receiving
pieces are contacted by said levers when said levers are
pivoted downwardly by said poke rods whereby said die
is moved downwardly at a rate of speed determined by the
positions of said receiving pieces on said rods to thereby
subject material in the die to compressive forces simulta-
neously acting on both the top and bottom surfaces of
material in the die.
4,379,685
INJECTION MOLDING MACHINE
Tetsuya Tada, Tokyo, and Yutaka Morishita, Shiki, both of
Japan, assignors to Canyon Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,405
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 5, 1980, 55-12676
Int. a.3 B29F 1/00
U.S. a. 425-183 2 Qaims
1. An injection molding machine comprising:
a fixed die and a movable die defining cavities therebetween;
a die clamping mechanism coupled to said fixed and movable
dies for clamping and separating said fixed and movable
dies, said die clamping mechanism being movable in a
horizontal direction;
an injection mechanism for heating and melting molding
material and for injecting the molten material into said
cavities defined by said fixed die and said movable die;
a fixed platen provided near said injection mechanism and to
which said fixed die is attached;
a movable platen provided near said die clamping mecha-
nism and to which said movable die is attached;
a slider provided on said movable platen and which is recip-
rocably slideable in a horizontal direction different from
the horizontal direction in which said die clamping mech-
anism is movable;
said movable die and another movable die being attached to
said slider so as to alternately come into face-to-face rela-
tion with said fixed die as said slider reciprocates;
a pair of product collecting mechanisms respectively dis-
posed on both sides of said fixed die, and arranged to face
one of said movable dies which is not facing said fixed die,
each of said pair of product collecting mechanisms includ-
ing:
2e
r
U
V
.2! 20 r- i
' 30 -"
50 ,j
16
r
V
7
a product collecting main body having first and second body
portions, said first body portion being slideably mounted
to said second body portion;
a plurality of first hollow shafts rotatably mounted on said
first body portion, said first hollow shafts having respec-
tive center bores and being arranged such that a threaded
product in said movable die is inserted in a center bore of
each said first hollow shafts to be taken out of said mov-
able die; and
a plurality of second hollow shafts as many as said first
hollow shafts rotatably mounted to said second body
portion, each second hollow shaft having a center bore
through which said threaded product can pass;
said first and second hollow shafts having end faces which
face each other; and
a power source coupled to said second hollow shafts for
rotating each of said second hollow shafts so that facing
end faces of said first and second hollow shafts selectively
come into contact with each other to selectively friction-
ally transmit force therebetween.
4,379,686
APPARATUS FOR MOLDING A RECORDED DISC
Robert W. Chambers, Willingboro, N.J.; Michael L. McNeely,
and Leslie A. Torrington, both of Indianapolis, Ind., assignors
to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 187,161, Sep. 15, 1980, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 146,379, May 5, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 352,000
Int. a.3 B29D 77/00
U.S. a. 425—290 7 Oaims
1. In an apparatus for molding a recorded disc which in-
cludes a pair of mold plates adapted to form therebetween a
disc mold cavity, and a center hole forming pin movable in one
of the mold plates toward and away from the other mold plate
at the center of the mold cavity, the improvement comprising:
said center hole forming pin being larger in diameter than the
hole to be formed and having a cylindrical projection ex-
tending from its end surface which is of the diameter of the
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
395
hole to be formed, the projection being of a length such that 4,379,688
when the end of the projection mates with the other mold ORIENTED INJECTION BLOW MOLDED CONTAINER
PRODUCTION
Dennis J. Tate, Grand View, and Henry Treyino, Kansas Qty,
both of Mo., assignors to Ethyl Development Corporation,
Richmond, Va.
Filed Sep. U, 1981, Ser. No. 301,834
Int. a.' B29C 77/07
U.S. a. 425—526 H Claims
; I3i ■ 130 liMO I'
1^1 '' \n
\ lie n?2
plate to form the hole in the disc, the end surface of the pin
around the projection forms an extension of a surface of the
mold cavity.
4,379,687
MOLD APPARATUS
Robert E. Wilson, 6116 W. Karen Lee La., Glendale, Ariz.
85306, and Dan Mickelson, 2930 W. Orangewood, Phoenix,
Ariz. 85017
Continuation of Ser. No. 160,820, Jun. 18, 1980, abandoned.
This application Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,249
Int. a.' B29C 7 7/Oi
U.S. a. 425—388 8 Qaims
4. A mold apparatus including in combination, a base mem-
ber having first and second spaced surfaces, said base member
having at least one air duct extending between said first and
second spaced surface thereof, a mold member having first and
second spaced surfaces, said second surface of said mold mem-
ber being located adjacent said first surface of said base mem-
ber, said first surface of said mold member having at least one
mold configuration about which material is adapted to be
molded, said mold member having a die receiving opening in
said mold configuration extending therethrough to said second
surface of said mold member, a die member residing in said die
receiving opening, indicia means carried on said die member
and located within said mold configuration to reproduce said
indicia means on the material which is adapted to be molded
about the mold configuration, and air evacuation openings
extending between said first and second surfaces of said mold
member and being in fluid communication with said at least
one air duct to evacuate air from said mold configuration.
1. An apparatus for producing injection blow molded biaxi-
ally oriented plastic articles from plastic parisons comprising:
a. a frame member;
b. a transport table mounted to said frame member for rota-
tional movement about and reciprocally along the central
axis of said transport table;
c. a table power means associated with said transport table
for effecting said rotational and reciprocal movements;
d. at least one transversally extending hollow core rod
fixedly mounted on said table, said rod having a longitudi-
nally extending hollow portion and said rod having first
sealing means at its distal end;
e. an elongated stretch pin movably mounted in said hollow
portion and said stretch pin having,
i. at its distal end second sealing means for cooperation
with said first sealing means to achieve a seal between
said first and second sealing means,
ii. first locking means in mounted relationship with the
proximate end of said stretch pin, and
iii. first engagement moving means associated with said
stretch pin whereby movement of said first engagement
moving means causes movement of said stretch pin in
said hollow portion;
f a second locking means mounted to said transport Uble for
cooperation with said first locking means to lock said
stretch pin from movement when said stretch pin is in the
position within said hollow portion to achieve said seal
between the said first and second sealing means;
g. a second engagement moving means movably mounted to
said frame member for engagement with said first engage-
ment moving means when said transport table is in its
lowered position at the blow molding station of (h);
h. a power means for moving said second engagement mov-
ing means when it is in said engagement with said first
engagement moving means whereby said movement of
said stretch pin in said hollow portion is effected, said seal
is broken and the distal end of said stretch pin is moved a
distance sufficient to cause axial stretch of said plastic
parison carried by said core rod;
i. unlocking means mounted to said frame member for un-
locking said lock between said first and second locking
means when said transport table is in its lowered position
at the blow molding station of (h);
j. an injection molding station adjacent said transport Uble
for receipt of said hollow core rod so that said parison can
be injection formed on said hollow core rod; and
k. a blow molding station for blow forming said article from
396
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said injection formed parison while said parison is on s4id
hollow core rod, said blow molding station being located
adjacent said second engagement moving means and said
unlocking means.
4,379,689
DUAL FUEL BURNER
Charles W. Morck, Jr., Philadelphia, Pa., assignor to Selas
Corporation of America, Dresher, Pa.
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,357
Int. aj F23M 9/00
U.S. a. 431-284 10 Qaims
4,379,690
PHOTOFLASH SWITCHING ARRAY AND
FABRICATION UTILIZING SILVER-OXIDE COATED
SOLIDS
Michael R. Kling, White Deer, and Carl F. Kackenmeister,
Williamsport, both of Pa., assignors to GTE Products Corpo-
ration, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,372
Int. a.3 F21K 5/00
U.S. a. 431-359 24 Qaims
1. A multilamp photoflash sequential array having at least
one radiation-responsive switch including an admixture of a
filler material, a binder, silver-coated non-conductive particu-
late solids and characterized by the improvement wherein said
admixture includes silver-salt coated non-conductive particu-
late solids.
1. In a burner mountable in a passageway exiting into a
furnace, including:
a. a housing, received by said passageway, opening into said
furnace;
b. a first conduit within said housing;
c. a second conduit within said first conduit;
d. means for introducing first fluid between said first and
second conduits;
e. means for introducing second fluid into said second con-
duit;
f means for introducing third fluid between said housing and
said first conduit;
g. means proximate said housing opening, for inducing swirl-
ing motion to third fluid discharged from said housing into
said furnace;
h. means attached to said first conduit for discharging said
first and second fluids into said furnace through said hous-
ing opening;
the improvement comprising:
i. said housing opening extending into said furnace;
j. said discharge means being recessed within said housing;
k. said swirl-inducing means being recessed within said
housing from said discharge means outlet;
1. said discharge means including:
1. an outer member receiving said first fluid from said first
conduit, having an open end facing said housing open-
ing, said outer member about said open end tapering
away from said housing opening;
2. an inner member, interior of and spaced from said outer
member, receiving said second fluid from said second
conduit, including
i. a cavity therewithin communicating with said outer
member open end;
ii. passageways therethrough connecting said second
conduit with said cavity;
iii. channels therethrough connecting said cavity with
said space between said inner and outer members;
wherein associated channels and passageways communicate
with said cavity at a common location.
4,379,691
OLIVINE BEDDING MATERIAL FOR SOAKING PITS
Joseph E. Doninger, Lake Forest, 111., and George D. Hanson,
Audubon, Pa., assignors to International Minerals A Chemi-
cal Corp., Terre Haute, Ind.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,960
Int. a.3 F27D 1/16; C21B 7/04
US. a. 432-3 9 Qaims
6. In an improved method of operating a metal ingot soaking
pit having a horizontal bottom, sidewalls and top defining a
heating chamber, the improvement comprising covering the
bottom of said soaking pit with a layer of a particulate olivine
material having an iron oxide content less than about 11%
measured as FeO, and having a heat fusion point of at least
about 2600° P., said olivine material providing improved han-
dling, uniform thermal insulation and a substantially horizontal
uniform supporting bed for metal ingots being carried in said
soaking pit, whereby the ingots retain substantially vertical i
positions during treatment. /
4,379,692
METHOD OF DRYING AND PREHEATING MOIST FINE
MATERIAL AND APPARATUS FOR CARRYING OUT
THE METHOD
Heinrich Weber, Recklinghausen; Kurt Lorenz, Hattingen, and
Horst Dungs, Heme, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Firma Carl Still GmbH A Co. KG, Recklinghausen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,235
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 2,
1980, 3029398
- Int. a.3 F26B 9/12. 3/00. 17/12
U.S. a. 432f-18 15 Qaims
1. A method of drying and preheating moist fine material, in
particular bituminous and soft bituminous coal, peat, wood, oil
shale, ores or lime stone, in a system having a single open drier
chamber with heating means having heating surfaces extending
into the drier chamber for indirect heating of the fine material,
fine material supplied to a top of the drier chamber being able
to fall upon and past the heating surfaces from the top of the
drier chamber to a bottom of the drier chamber, the method
comprising:
APRIL 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
397
continuously feeding a first amount of moist fine material to
the top of the drier chamber above the heating means;
conveying a second amount of predried fine material from
the bottom of the drier chamber to the top of the drier
chamber;
mixing the second amount of predried fine material with the
first amount of moist material at the top of the drier cham-
ber and above the heating means to make a mixture of
predried and moist fine material which is fluid;
and which is laterally offset from said first further bore,
said second further bores having respective axes, said first
and second further bores being located on the same side of
said body member, all of said threaded bores and said first
and second further bores having axes which lie substan-
tially in a common plane, to permit subsuntially free
access to said elongated threaded member over at least
180°; and
a second elongated member coupled to both of said body
members and slideably engaged in said second further
bore of at least one of said body members and serving as
a second guide bar for said biassing device.
mm'- ■
4,379,694
DENTAL IMPLANT
Guido Riess, Garmisch-Partenkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Neodontics, Inc., Laguna Niguel, Calif.
Filed Nov. 9, 1978, Ser. No. 959,292
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 1,
1978, 2824118
Int. a.3 A61C 8/00
U.S. a. 433—201 « Claims
allowing the fluid mixture to slide down the drier chamber
onto and between the heating surfaces and to pile up to a
level in the drier chamber above the heating means; and
removing a third amount of predried fine material from a
bottom of the drier chamber below the heating means, the
third amount equaling the first amount of moist fine mate-
rial being fed to the top of the drier chamber.
4,379,693
ORTHODONTIC BIASSING DEVICE
Melvin Wallshein, 8645 Bay Pkwy., Brooklyn, N.Y. 11214
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 785,587, Apr. 7, 1979, Pat. No.
4,200,979. This application Dec. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 104,310
Int. C\? A61C 3/00
U.S. a. 433—7 51 Qaims
C/L OF
BORE //
1. In a dental implant including a gingiva-compatible metal
core member for mounting a dental superstructure in the form
of a tooth crown, a fastening element for dental bridges or the
like in which the member is connected with a tissue-compati-
ble, biostable polymer matrix having reabsorbable, bioreactive.
sintered calcium phosphate, the improvement comprising: said
core member being a flat metal plate (1, 11) conformed in shape
to said implant and being provided with through-apertures (2,
12) and the polymer matrix is a coating (4, 14) encompassing
the metal plate (1, 11) on all sides thereof, and said through-
apertures (2, 12) are filled with reabsorbable, sintered calcium
phosphate (6, 16).
1. An orthodontic biassing device comprising:
two body members adapted to engage one or more teeth and
to be spaced from each other, each of said body members
having a threaded bore therein, said threaded bores being
oppositely threaded;
an elongated threaded member having externally threaded
end portions which are oppositely threaded and which are
engageable in said threaded bores of said body members to
selectively expand or contract the spacing between said
body members;
each of said body members having a first further bore
therein which is laterally offset from said threaded bore,
said first further bores having respective axes which are
non-colinear with each other;
a first elongated member coupled to both of said body mem-
bers and slideably engaged in said first further bore of said
at least one body member and serving as a guide bar for
said biassing device;
each of said body members having a second further bore
therein which is laterally offset from said threaded bore
4,379,695
DENTAL MATERIAL COMPRISING
DIMETHYACRYLATE ADDUCTS OF GLYODYL
METHACRYLATE WITH DIESTERS OF
BIS(HYDROXYMETHYL) TRICYCLO[5.2.1.02 6]DECANE
AND DICARBOXYLIC AQDS
Jan A. Orlowski, Altadena; David V. Bntler, Wert CoTina, and
Patrick D. Kidd, San Dimaa, all of Calif., aadgnors to Scien-
tific Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Duarte, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 155,160, Jun. 2, 1980, Pat. No.
4^37,349. This application May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,609
Int. a? A61K 6/08
U.S. a. 433-217 13 Claims
1. A dental material comprising polymerizable unsaturated
material comprising at least about 10% by weight of a dimeth-
acrylate monomer
having the following chemical structure:
398
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
CH7=C-
I
H H
I I
-c— o— c— c-
H
I
■c— o
CH3 O H OR] H C=0
I
(CH2)„
c=o
I
o
I
H— C— H
CHi
CHi=C —
I
CH3
H H
I I
-c— o— c— c —
II I I
O H OR2
H— C-H
I
O
c=o
I
(CH2)„
I
c=o
H
■C— O
I
H
where
n represents a number of 2 to 8:
R] and Rt are the same or different and are hydrogen or one
or more groups of the formula:
O
II
— C— N— R,
I
where
Rj is an aliphatic group of 1-14 carbon atoms, aromatic
group of 6 to 14 carbon atoms or cycloaliphatic group
having 3 to 14 carbon atoms and at least one of Ri and R2
is
O
N
— C— N— R3
H
the remainder of said polymerizable material being at least
10% by weight of at least one acrylic or methacrylic
monomer acceptable for oral application associated with
dental treatment.
4,379,696
LATEX MYLAR CHIP
Stanley Lerner, Highland Park, HI.,' assignor to Color Communi-
cations, Inc., Chicago, III.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,843
Int. a.3 G09F 7/00: A44B 7/00
U.S. a. 434-98 12 Claims
1. A color sample display device capable of being produced
with an automated apparatus, said display device comprising a
plurality of color swatches consisting essentially of polyethyl-
ene terephthalate film having a thickness of from about i mil to
about 7 mils, a paint coating on the surface of said film;
an adhesive on said coating or unpainted surface of said film;
and
a base sheet with said color swatched adhesively affixed
thereto.
5. A color display product capable of being produced with
an automated apparatus said display product consisting essen-
tially of a polyethylene terephthalate film base with a thickness
of from about ^ mil to about 7 mils;
W'
• -
- 1'
1
z_
■ -
J:
/
j
1
_^
^J^
— 1^
a paint coating on one surface of said film base;
an adhesive coating; and
a mount base, said film base being adhesively affixed to said
mount base with said adhesive coating being on said
painted coating or on said unpainted surface of said film
base.
4,379,697
STIMULATOR ARRAY
John G. Linvill, Portola Valley, Calif., assignor to Stanford
University, Stanford, Calif.
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,094
Int. a.3 G09B 21/00
U.S. a. 434-114 7 Qaims
1. Tactile stimulator apparatus comprising:
a stack of planar sheets of a piezoelectric polymer material,
each sheet having two, opposed, broad, fiat faces and at
least one tactile surface at one longitudinal end,
separate electrodes covering portions of each flat face of the
sheets in predetermined patterns which are mirror images
of the corresponding electrode patterns of the next adja-
cent sheet face,
and wherein each of said sheets is polarized in the direction
of its tactile end such that upon application of a stimulat-
ing voltage of a predetermined magnitude and polarity
from an external source across the electrodes of that sheet,
the portion of the sheet between the electrodes will longi-
tudinally extend its tactile surface.
4,379,698
ASTROLOGY CHART APPARATUS
George M. Boyd, 1050 S. Beech, Wichita, Kans. 67207
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,389
Int. C1.3 G09B 29/00
U.S. a. 434—106 9 Claims
1. An astrology chart apparatus, comprising;
(a) a central base means having a base plate member with
central plate indicia means thereon;
(b) a first means pivotally connected to said central base
means;
APRIL 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
399
(c) said central base means extended beyond the outer edge
of said first means with said central plate indicia means
having house picture indicia on said extended portion to
identify respective houses of heaven;
(d) said central plate indicia means having house characteris-
tic indicia means underlying said first means, associated
with a respective one of said house picture indicia;
(e) said first means includes first indicia means and first
window means thereon;
(0 said first indicia means includes characteristic categoriz-
ing indicia to be associated with said house characteristic
indicia;
having a brightness substantially greater than that of the back-
ground on which the second line of lettering is provided.
4,379,700
MULTIPLICATION/DIVISION TUTORIAL GAME
Qyde Pollock, 42665 Roberts Ave., Fremont, Calif. 94538
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,467
Int. a.5 G09B 19/02; A63F 7/00
U.S. a. 434—208 10 Oaims
''•Mt
M rn*(iir ~
niivn
'ff.X'. ,
vritii
.iaUT^
*<tT*Wl ,
D*n
i. :i-i^ vr
nmxx*
Mou*^^
i,tM
njisn
iOJ>
■HH.n'
otrt
" tMl
(Uia*.T
•9U.
(g) said first window means having a characteristic window
adjacent said characteristic category indicia, said house
charateristic indicia, and said characteristic categorizing
indicia;
(h) a second means piviotally connected to said central base
means on a side opposite said connection of said first
means thereto;
(i) said second means includes second indicia means and
second window means;
(j) said central plate indicia means includes sign key word
indicia underlying said second means; and
(k) said second window means includes a second key words
window for aligning and viewing said sign key word
indicia therethrough.
4,379,699
METHOD OF AND MEANS FOR IMPROVED READING
EFTICIENCY OF PERSONS WITH SPECIHC DYSLEXIA
Eileen M. Nelson, 71 Cathryn Ct., Fox Lake, III. 60020
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,754
Int. CI.^G09B 77/00
U.S. a. 434— 184 15 Oaims
/'" /--
//
\ /
..-~i
COME
J
COME i
I3'---
* **Mi/r' ;**.f»
"'■'■" -^ t
IG
•rq IIJU
I? CtcowtM
|2
Z
6
1. A multiplication/division tutorial game comprising:
(a) a plurality of product pieces, each bearing at least one
occurrence of multiplication product number such that
each product piece represents a different multiplication
product, and such that said plurality of product pieces
represent a set of multiplication products
(b) a plurality of multiplier-multiplicand pieces, each bearing
at least one occurrence of a whole multiplier-multiplicand
number such that each multiplier-multiplicand piece rep-
resents only a single multiplier or multiplicand, said mul-
tiplier-multiplicand pieces comprising all possible multip-
lier-multiplicand number combinations of a given set of
whole numbers which can be multiplied to equal the set of
product numbers represented by said plurality of product
pieces.
4,379,701
BUOYANT APPARATUS PROPELLED BY A HUMAN
OPERATOR
Constant V. David, 4952 Field St., San Diego, Calif. 92110
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,227
Int. a.^ B63H 76/00
U.S. a. 440—21 9 Claims
COME HERE
COME HERE
COME HERE DAD
COME HERE DAP/
1. The method of increasing the reading efficiency of a
dyslexiac suffering from specific dyslexia, comprising provid-
ing to such dyslexiac reading material wherein the reading
matter comprises a first line of lettering having a brightness
substantially less than that of the background on which the
lettering is provided, and a second line of similar reading mat-
ter adjacent said first line and having a second line of lettering
1. A buoyant apparatus adapted to be propelled by a human
operator comprising:
a frame;
a pair of buoyant annular floats;
400
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
a pair of annular platforms, each mounted on the upper side
of a corresponding float;
a plurality of paddles mounted on the under sides of the
floats at circumferentially spaced locations thereon;
means for rotatably mounting the floats to the frame with
their rotational axes converging upwardly,
the convergence of the axes and the buoyancy of the floats
being such that a person can be buoyantly supported in the
water by the apparatus with the outboard portions of the
floats raised out of the water sufficiently to result in for-
ward propulsion of the apparatus when the person rotates
the adjacent inboard portions of the platforms rearwardly;
and
steering means for enabling the person to direct the appara-
tus through the water, including an elongate buoyant
pontoon, means for mounting the pontoon toHhe frame for
rotation about a substantially vertical axis, and a steering
linkage connected to the pontoon mounting means for
permitting the person to grasp and move the linkage to
turn the pontoon.
members interconnected to form an elongated slot for
receiving the base portion of said removable fin,
said fin box also having a flange member extending substan-
tially parallel to said floor member along the entrance to
said slot, and at least one aperture extending diagonally
into said slot extending through one of said end members
and through said fiange member and toward said floor
member for receiving fastening means for securing said
base portion within said slot.
4,379,702
INTAKE DUCT FOR AN OUTBOARD ENGINE
4,379,704
LEG BUOY FOR TRAINING SWIMMERS
vi-»TiJti- 1.IJ J v-.i. *c.u- 1 joL •• Thoraas P- Rademacher, Medina, Ohio, assignor to NcNeil
YukiinitsuTakada;HiroshiHarada,bothof Shizuoka, andShuji Corooration Akron Ohio
Taknbo Hamamatsu, all of Japan assignors to Yamaha Hat- pj,^ ^pr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,603
sudoki Kabushiki Kaisha, Iwata, Japan
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,559
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 10, 1980, 55-1527
Int. a.' B63H 21/26
Int. a.^ B63C 9/08
U.S. a. 441—88
10 Oaims
U.S. a. 440—77
6 Claims
1. An intake duct for an outboard engine, said engine having
a cowling atop it, said cowling having a recess in its rear top
portion above said engine, a right and left first side wall for said
recess, an Of)ening at the rear of said recess, and a back wall
opposed to said opening; and a cover plate covering and en-
closing the top of said recess, and completing, with said cowl-
ing, said rear opening, each of said first side walls defining an
intake port located along the top edge of said first side walls
and below said cover plate, each said intake port extending for
a substantial length at an upper elevation adjacent to said cover
plate, and opening into said cowling in a direction lateral to
said cowling; air flow into said recess flowing through said
rear opening and impinging on said back wall, and then divid-
ing to flow sidewardly, over said first side walls, and through
said intake ports in a direction lateral to said cowling.
1. A buoy for supplementing the buoyancy of a swimmer's
legs comprising, a unitary foam member adapted for engage-
ment with and selective retention by the legs of a swimmer,
said member having spaced cylindrical elements, said cylindri-
cal elements being of generally prolate circular cross section,
the circular cross section of one of said cylindrical elements
being substantially smaller than the circular cross section of the
other of said cylindrical elements in that engaging the buoy
with the cylindrical element of smaller cross-section sub-
merged provides lesser buoyant effect than with the other
cylindrical element submerged, shank means spacing and join-
ing said cylindrical elements, said shank means being substan-
^tially narrower than the circular cross section of either of said
cylindrical elements, and a flexible generally water impervious
skin encompassing the entirety of said unitary member.
4,379,703
APPARATUS. FOR SECURING HNS TO A SURFBOARD
James A. Mizell, Huntington Beach, Calif., assignor to Califor-
nia Fin Systems, Huntington Beach, Calif.
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,488
Int. C\? A63C 15/05
U.S. a. 441—79 3 Claims
3. A unitary fin box for a surfboard of the type that employs
at least one removable fin on the water-side surface thereof, the
fin box comprising:
an open elongated box-like member having a floor member,
a pair of opposing shorter end members, a pair of opp>osing
longer side members, said floor, end members and side
4379,705
UFEBELT
Hikoji Saotome, 1-12*10 Naka-Kokubo, Ichlkawa-shi, Chlba-
ken, Japan
FUed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294^59
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 22, 1980, 55-
118989[U]
Int. a.3 B63C 9/16
U.S. a. 441—94 4 Claims
4. An inflatable life belt comprising:
two sheet members each having a first middle portion and
second end portions in a symmetrical shape, said second
end portions being extended from said first middle portion
in an opposite direction and inclined at about 120*- 160*
April 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
401
relative to a longitudinal direction of said first middle
portion, said two sheet members being sealed together at
their circumferences to form as upper flange, lower flange
and two end flanges to thereby form a sealed gas chamber,
said sheet members sealed together being folded such that
said end flanges of the second portions are connected
together to thereby form an annular inflatable tubular
body.
between said members, said members having an axially aligned
position and being relatively movable to provide relatively
inclined positions of said members, and means supporting each
roller on its associated pod for axial slidable movement, for
universal pivotal movement and for rotation thereon so that
when the inner and outer members are inclined with respect to
one another the rollers are tilted and axially moved with re-
spect to their respective pods and remain axially aliased in said
grooves, said means including a universal pivoting mounting
slidably mounted on each said pod and a roller bearing inter-
posed between said roller and said universal pivotal mounting,
each said roller and its associated groove having contact sur-
faces of conforming shape, said pod having an outer cylindrical
surface, said roller having an inner cylindrical surface, said
roller bearing being engaged with the cylindrical surface of the
roller, said universal pivotal mounting comprising inner and
outer guide rings, said inner guide ring being engaged with the
cylindrical surface of the respective pod, said outer guide ring
being engaged with said roller bearing, said guide rings having
contact surfaces engaged with one another of spherical shape.
means for releasably fastening said tubular body around the
waist of a person who uses the life belt, 4,379,707
a capsule containing therein compressed gas for inflating SPLINED JOINTS
said life belt, and Leslie G. Fisher, Birmingham, England, assignor to BRD Com-
an actuator for releasing the gas into said life belt for infla- pany Limited, Aldridge, England
tion. Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,524
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 29, 1980,
8028008
4,379,706 Int. Q.' F16D i/06
SLIDABLE-TYPE CONSTANT VELOaTY UNIVERSAL U.S. CI. 464— 162 5 Claims
JOINT
Nobuyuki Otsuka, Kawagoe, and Seiichi Hirai, Sayama, both of
Japan, assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 958,820, Not. 8, 1978, abandoned. This
application Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,289
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 5, 1978, 53-39254
Int. a.3 F16D i/20
U.S. a. 464— 111 9 Claims
1. A slidable constant velocity universal joint comprising
inner and outer members having free ends which are interen-
gaged, said outer member having three axially extending
grooves disposed parallel to one another, said inner member
including three radially projecting pods, a roller slidably re-
ceived on each pod for movement axially thereof and roUably
engaged in a respective groove for transmitting rotatable drive
1. A slidable splined joint between roury members, compris-
ing a male member having a plurality of axially extending
radially outwardly projecting teeth spaced apart angularly
about its routional axis, a female member having a plurality of
inwardly projecting teeth which intetfit with the teeth of the
male member, and an annular, radially contractible support
bearing at the end of the female member engaging the male
member to support the latter relative to the female member,
wherein there is provided a retaining member by which the
support bearing is held in engagement with the female member
by way of a tapered surface for contracting the support bearing
onto the male member, and screw threaded means by which
the retaining member is engaged with the female member, said
screw threaded means incorporating a yieldable element so
that it cannot be overtightened to cause the support bearing to
bind on the male member.
CHEMICAL
4,379,708
PROCESS FOR TANNING HSH SKINS
Norberto O. S. Rego, 1145 NW. 42st St., Miami, Fla. 33127
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,729
- ^ Int. a.3 C14C 3/28. 3/04. 3/06
U.S. a. 8—94.12 17 Claims
1. A process for the production of tanned fish skins which
comprises:
(a) contacting dry fish skins with an aqueous solution of a
neutral salt said solution having a pH adjusted into the
range 1.5 to 3.5,
(b) subjecting said fish skins to a two step tanning operation
wherein after said first tanning step said skins are washed
at a temperature of not more than 35° C. and the second
tanning step is carried out using a more concentrated
solution than the first tanning step at a temperature of not
less than 35° C. and
(c) washing the tanned skins and treating them in an aqueous
aqueous bath with an anionic grease and then an oil and
then with an alkali metal salt of a weak organic acid fol-
lowed by an alkali to raise the pH to at least 6.
selected from the group consisting of acetic acid, propi-
onic acid, glycolic acid, 3-hydroxypropionic acid, lactic
acid, hydrochloric acid and hydrobromic acid;
(d) approximately 5 to approximately 25 percent of urea or
a glycol selected from the group consisting of ethylene
glycol, propylene glycol, diethylene glycol and diethyl-
ene glycol monoethyl ether; and
(e) the remainder being water.
4,379,711
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VISUALLY
MONITORING AN ION EXCHANGE FLUIDIZED BED
Donald P. Satchell, Jr., Qifton, Ariz., assignor to Phelps Dodge
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 110,839, Jan. 10, 1980, Pat. No. 4,298,466.
This application Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,293
Int. a.' BOID 35/14: BOIJ 8/20: GOIN 33/00
U.S. a. 436—82 6 Qaims
4,379,709
PROCESS FOR DISINFECTING AND PRESERVING
HIDES AND SKINS
Franz Margold, Seeheim-Jugenheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Riedel de Haen Aktiengesellschaft, Seelze, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,388
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 19,
1980, 3022849
Int. Cl.^ C14C 9/00
U.S. CI. 8—94.18 6 Qaims
1. A process for disinfecting and preserving one or more
hides or skins of any kind and provenance by treating it or
them with one or more substances having a disinfectant and
preservative action, which comprises contacting the one or
more hides or skins with up to 2 weight %, calculated on the
weight of said one or more hides or skins, of a mixture consist-
ing of an inorganic zinc salt and an acid amide, or said mixture
in combination with at least one further nitrogen-containing
organic preservative, and subsequently with 5 to 10 weight %,
calculated on the weight of said one or more hides or skins, of
common salt and 0 5 to 2.5 weight '^t . calculated on the weight
of said one or more hides and skins, of a mono- or dibasic
carboxylic acid of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
4,379,710
NOVEL COMPOSITIONS AND PROCESSES
Nathan N. Crounse, Myrtle Beach, S.C., assignor to Sterling
Drug Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Set. No. 44,238, May 31, 1979,
abandoned. This application Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,969
Int. a.' C09B 47/04
U.S. a. 8—527 7 Qaims
1. A storage-stable dye composition comprising a concen-
trated, free-flowing aqueous solution containing by weight of
the entire composition:
(a) as the dye constituent approximately 9 to approximately
40 percent of acid addition salts of a phthalocyanine of the
formula
CuPc
^-f-S02NHC2H4NHC2H4NH2]„
J-i-SOjHln
1
1. A method for visually monitoring the characteristics of an
ion exchanger fluidized bed, wherein the exchanger includes a
process solution for supply to the fluidized bed. the fluidized
bed including a preferentially absorbing resin and the solution,
the method comprising:
a. establishing a visually observable sample fluidized bed
displaced from the exchanger fluidized bed in fluid com-
munication with the exchanger fluidized bed such that
resin is transferred between the exchanger fluidized bed
and the sample fluidized bed;
b. diverting a quantity of solution from the exchanger to
form a solution sample;
c. passing the solution sample through an orifice to establish
a predetermined flow rate for the solution sample;
d. introducing the solution sample at a controlled flow rate
to the sample fluidized bed;
e. returning the solution sample to the exchanger above the
exchanger fluidized bed after the solution sample has
passed through the sample fluidized bed, whereby the
height of the sample fluidized bed is representative of the
height of the exchanger fluidized bed.
with a single acid or mixed acids wherein: Pc is phthalocy-
anine, m is a number from one to five, and n is a number
from zero to one;
(b) from zero to approximately 10 percent of a Ci to C2
alkanesulfonic acid selected from the group consisting of
methanesulfonic acid and ethanesulfonic acid;
(c) approximately 5 to approximately 30 percent of an acid
4,379,712
EVAPORATIVE COOLER
Charles J. Sperr, Jr., and Douglas C. Sperr, both of 8432 E.
Wilshire Dr., Scottsdale, Ariz. 85257
FUed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,638
Int. a.3 BOID 50/00
U.S. a. 55—257 R ♦ Claims
1. In an evaporative cooler including
a housing having an upright surface with an opening therein,
an air pervious, liquid absorbing evaporative pad spanning
said opening and having a discharge surface,
means for supplying liquid to said pad, and
blower with said housing means for drawing a stream of air
through said pad,
403
404
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said stream of air exiting said pad in a direction generally
normal to said discharge surface and having droplets of
said liquid entrained therein,
improvements therein for settling said droplets from said air
stream, said improvements comprising:
K^\
Jl"
baffle means downstream of said discharge surface for re-
ceiving said air stream thereagainst, said baffle means
being generally elongate and having a longitudinal edge
substantially parallel to the discharge surface of said pad
and being generally arcuate in cross-section such that the
direction of said air stream is altered to flow in a substan-
tially opposite direction.
4^79,714
METHOD FOR REGULATING THE GRANULOMETRIC
CHARACTERISTIC OF THE COMPONENTS IN
METALLURGICAL SLAGS
Stoycho M. Stoev; Shtelyana D. Dshendova; Kiril N. Stoyanov;
Raycho V. Dochev, all of Sofia, and Tzretan P. Krestev,
Vratza, all of Bulgaria, assignors to Vish-Minnogeoloshki
Institute, Sofia, Bulgaria
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 198,621, Oct. 20, 1980,
abandoned. This application Dec. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 332,255
Int. a.3 C03B 5/18
U.S. a. 65-19 3 ci^
1. A method for regulating the granulometric characteristics
of the components in metallurgical slags, comprising the step
of subjecting the slag, after the separation of the slag from a
metllurgical furnace and during its cooling, to an adjustable
vibration action having a frequency of from 12 to 100 Hz and
an amplitude from 0.2 to 5 mm or having an average vibra-
tional radius in circular vibration from 0.4 to 12 mm, whereby
rapidly to increase the particle size of the metallic inclusions in
the slag.
4,379,713
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING GLASS
nBERS
Arnold J. Eisenberg, Granville, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Corn-
ing Fiberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,446
Int. a. J C03D 37/025
^•S- CI. 65-1 ,2 cai^
4,379,715
GOB DISTRIBUTOR FOR GLASS OR OTHER MATERIAL
Eho M. Garza, Monterrey, Mexico, assignor to Investigacion
Fie Fideicomiso, Monterrey, Mexico
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,309
Qaims priority, application Mexico, Oct. 31, 1980, 184566
Int. Q\} C03B 5/30
U.S. a. 65—225
10 Qaims
//-^/ ^/ ^^
/^^
-i
1. A method of forming glass filaments comprising:
providing a feeder having an orificed wall having a substrate
having a plurality of orifices therethrough adapted to issue
attenuable streams of molten glass, said substrate and
molten material exhibiting a first contact wetting angle;
and a control layer joined to said substrate to form a recess
around the individual orifices having a network of chan-
nels interconnecting said recesses, said channels being
adapted to permit said molten glass to move therethrough
from one recess to another recess at predetermined times,
said channels and recesses having at least a portion of the
surface defining said channels and recesses comprised of
said substrate, said control layer and said molten glass
exhibiting a second contact wetting angle therebetween,
the first contact wetting angle being less than the second
contact wetting angle such that the molten glass has ten-
dency to prefer to move through said channels from an
orifice having a filament attenuation disruption to a non-
disrupted orifice;
issuing streams of molten glass from said orificed wall;
and attenuating the streams into filaments.
1. In a glass gob distributor of the type including plural
curved distributing scoops, each supported within a housing
for rotational movement about a vertical axis, a pinion carried
by each said scoop, and dual racks each meshed with each said
pinion at diametrically opposite sides thereof, said drive racks
simultaneously angularly indexing said scoops upon longitudi-
nal movement of said racks relatively to each other, the im-
provement comprising:
a further pinion independent of said scoop pinions, sup-
ported by said housing and interposed between and
meshed with both said racks, said further pinion translat-
ing movement of one said rack into an equal and opposite
movement of the other said rack;
means supporting said further pinion for movement towards
one of said racks;
adjustable guide means supporting the other of said racks
and movable towards the said one rack to move said other
rack and said other pinion towards said one rack to elimi-
nate clearance between the teeth of the respective and said
further pinion; and,
members supporting each said scoop on an upper face of
both said racks, said scoops extending downwardly with
clearance through apertures in a bottom wall of said hous-
ing, said racks providing the sole support and positioning
members for said scoops.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
405
4,379,716
COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING
HERBIODAL INJURY
David E. Schafer, and Albert J. Cziuko^ski* •»<>**> <»' ^re^e
Coeur, Mo., assignors to Monsanto Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 670,789, Mar. 26, 1976,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 10, 1978, Ser. No. 923,136
Int. a.3 AOIN 57/70, i7/00
U.S. a. 71—87 15 Claims
1. A method of reducing injury to grass crops by diallate and
triallate herbicides which comprises applying to the soil, crop
or crop seed an effective s^fening amount of a compound of the
formula
R— O— P— O— R^
O
wherein
R and R' independently represent hydrogen, C1-13 alkyl,
nitro lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl; R^ is equal to phenyl,
phenyl substituted by one to three Ci . 1 3 alkyl, lower alkyl,
halo, NO2, CN, CF3 and CH3S-moieties or para-amino
sulfonylphenyl; provided that phenyl cannot be substi-
tuted with NO2 and CF3 simultaneously.
4 379 717
METHOD OF CONTROLLING WEEDS IN CONIFERS
George Levitt, and Russell C. Weigel, Jr., both of Wilmington,
Del., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and Company,
Wilmington, Del.
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,236
Int. a.5 AOIN 43/54
U.S. a. 71—92 6 aaims
1. A method for controlling undesired vegetation in conifers
comprising: applying to the locus of said conifers an effective
amount of a compund of the formula:
apparatus containing a substantially cylindrical routing
filter element having inner and outer walls;
maintaining said byproduct at a temperature above the melt-
ing points of said salt;
providing a pressure differential across a portion of said
filter element walls to cause a substantial amount of said
molten salt to pass through said outer wall of said filter
element and form a filter cake comprising solid ash con-
stituents on said outer wall;
continuously removing said filter cake from said outer wall
by disposing a blade adjacent to the surface of said outer
wall; and
separately recovering from said filter apparatus a molten
filtrate passing through said filter element walls for recy-
cle to said meul recovery process, said filtrate comprising
the molten salt and having a substantially reduced ash
content.
^>.X^'^S02NHCN— / (y\ 2
Rl N — /
wherein
R is CO2R2 where R2 is C1-C4 alkyl;
Rl is H or CH3;
X is CH3. or OCH3;
Y is CH3 or OCH3; and
Z is CH; or
an agriculturally acceptable salt thereof.
4,379,718
PROCESS FOR SEPARATING SOUD PARTICULATES
FROM A MELT
LeRoy F. Grantham, Calahasaw, and James G. Johanson, Malibu
Lake, both of Calif., assignors to RockweU International
Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,496
Int a.5 C22B 21/00
UJS. CI. 75—24 ' Claims
1. In a metal recovery process wherein there is produced a
byproduct having solid ash constituents entrained in a melt
comprising a major amount of molten salt, the improvement
comprising;
introducing said byproduct into a high-temperature niter
4,379,719
ALUMINUM POWDER ALLOY PRODUCT FOR HIGH
TEMPERATURE APPLICATION
Gregory J. Hildeman, Murrysville, and Robert E. Sanders, Jr.,
New Kensington, both of Pa., assignors to AluminoB Com-
pany of America, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Not. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,181
Int. a.3 B22F 3/14; C22C 21/00
U.S. a. 419—60 30 Claims
20. A method of producing an improved aluminum article
having high strength at elevated temperatures, comprising the
steps: . .
(a) providing atomized aluminum alloy powder consistmg
essentially of 4 to 12% iron, 1 to 7% of at least one metal
from the group consisting of cerium and misch metal,
balance aluminum and impurities and incidental elements,
the weight ratio of iron to cerium plus misch metal rang-
ing between 1.2 and 4.4:1;
(b) vacuum compacting said powder at a pressure not ex-
ceeding 0. 1 torr and a temperature of 700* to 850* F. under
sufficient compaction to produce a compact at least 98%
of full density; and
(c) working said compact at a temperature of 550* to 850* F.
equivalent to a cross-sectional reduction of at least 25% to
produce said article characterized by a yield strength of at
least 35,000 psi and elongation of at least 5J% at a temper-
ature of 450* F.
406
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,720
NICKEL-AI.UMINUM-BORON POWDERS PREPARED
BY A RAPID SOLIDinCATION PROCESS
Ranjan Ray, Burlington, and Viswanathan Panchanathan, North
Bilkrica, both of Mass., assignors to Marko Materials, Inc.,
North Billerica, Mass.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,235
Int. a.' B22F 1/04
U.S. a. 75-251 3 aaims
1. A metallic alloy in powder form with particle size below
4 mesh (U.S. Standard), and having the composition described
by the formula:
Nl4O-58Al3a40Bi2.20
wherein Ni, Al, and B are nickel, aluminum, and boron respec-
tively and wherein the subscripts are in atom percent and the
total content of Ni, Al. and B is 100; wherein said alloy being
prepared by the method comprising the steps:
(a) forming a melt of said alloy
(b) depositing said melt against a rapidly moving quench
surface adapted to quench said melt at a rate in the range
of approximately lO' to 10^ °C./second and form thereby
a rapidly solidified brittle strip of said alloys characterized
by hardness values between 800 and 1 100 Kg/mm^
(c) comminuting said strip into powders.
HO
4,379,721
PRESSURE SENSITIVE RECORDING MATERIALS
Marion Qualitz, Hilden, and Viktor A. Krupp, Diisseldorf, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Spezial-Papiermas-
chinenfabrik August Alfred Krupp GmbH & Co., Hilden, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,523
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar 14
1980, 3009754; Mar. 14, 1980, 3009806 ' '
Int. a.3 C09D 11/00
U.S. a. 106-21 5, c,ai„,
1. Pressure-sensitive recording material having improved
storability, lightfastness and heat resistance, which comprises a
unit containing a dye precursor and a unit containing a dye
acceptor material, which is capable of color formation by
reaction with the dye precursor, characterized in that the dye
acceptor material is an intimate mixture comprising
(a) either
(aa) a 2-hydroxy-benzophenone of formula I
(1)
or
where Ri is a hydroxy-group, an unsubstituted alkoxy resi-
due with from 1 to 18 carbon atoms or an alkoxy residue
with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, carrying 1 or 2 hydroxy-
groups, an alkoxy residue with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
carrying 1 or 2 hydroxy groups and esterified with a
saturated or olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acid with
from 2 to 4 carbon atoms, R2 is hydrogen, a phenyl resi-
due, the sulphonic acid group — SO3H or the group
— SOsMe, Me being an alkali metal, R3 is hydrogen, the
hydroxy group, an alkyl group with from I to 12 carbon
atoms, an alkoxy goup with from 1 to 18 carbon atoms or
a phenyl residue, and R4 is hydrogen, the hydroxy group,
a phenyl residue, the carboxy-group — COOH or the
group — COOMe, Me being an alkali metal;
(bb) 3,5,7,3',4'-pentahydroxy-navone of formula II
(11)
OH
HO
and
(b) a substituted benzotriazole of formula III
(HI)
R2
where Ri is hydrogen or the tertiary butyl group, R2an alkyl
residue with from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an alkoxy residue
with from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the cyclohexyl residue,
the sulphonic acid group — SO3H or the group — SOsMe,
Me being an alkali metal, and R3 is hydrogen or chlorine.
18. For a pressure-sensitive recording material comprising a
unit containing a dye precursor or its solution and a unit con-
taining a dye acceptor material, which is capable of color
formation by reaction with the dye precursor, a sheet-like, dye
acceptor material containing unit consisting of a carrier mate-
rial which is in sheet or web form, coated on one side with the
dye acceptor material, characterized in that the dye acceptor
material is an intimate mixture comprising
(a) either
(aa) a 2-hydroxy-benzophenone of formula I
(I)
or
where R 1 is a hydroxy-group, an unsubstituted alkoxy resi-
due with from 1 to 18 carbon atoms or an alkoxy residue
with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, carrying 1 or 2 hydroxy-
groups, an alkoxy residue with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
carrying 1 or 2 hydroxy groups and esterified with a
saturated or olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acid with
from 2 to 4 carbon atoms, R2 is hydrogen, a phenyl resi-
due, the sulphonic acid group — SO3H or the group
— SO^Me, Me bemg an alkali metal, R3 is hydrogen, the
hydroxy group, an alkyl group with from 1 to 12 carbon
atoms, an alkoxy group with from 1 to 18 carbon atoms or
a phenyl residue, and R4 is hydrogen, the hydroxy group,
a phenyl residue, the carboxy-group —COOH or the
group —COOMe, Me being an alkali metal;
(bb) 3,5,7,3',4'-pentahydroxy-navone of formula II
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
407
HO
(11)
OH
HO
and
(b) a substituted benzotriazole of formula III
OH Ri
R2
4,379,724
METHOD FOR RECLAIMING WASTE
THERMOPLASTIC RESIN HLM
Hidehiro Kashiwagi, Tokushima, Japan, assignor to Taiyo
Denko Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokushima, Japan
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 293,420
Int. a.^ B08B 3/12
U.S. a. 134—1 7 Qaims
ii^'S
(III) .
^^
where Ri is hydrogen or the tertiary butyl group, Rzan alkyl
residue with from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an alkoxy residue
with from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the cyclohexyl residue,
the sulphonic acid group — SO3H or the group — SOsMe,
Me being an alkali metal, and R3 is hydrogen or chlorine.
4,379,722
PIPELINE GEL PLUG
Paul R. Scott, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil Company,
Houston, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 932,395, Aug. 9, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 836,876, Sep. 26, 1977,
abandoned. This application Jan. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 116,506
Int. a.3 BOIJ 13/00; C09K 3/00
U.S. CI. 106—287.17 2 Qaims
1. A non-thixotropic Bingham plastic composition for a gel
plug movable at a predetermined pressure in a pipeline and
capable of withstanding hydrostatic forces below said prede-
termined pressure, comprising about 20-90%w of a vacuum-
flashed residue from thermally cracked oils containing aromat-
ics and asphaltenes, about 10-30%w of a tetraalkyl ammonium
smectite, and about 0-60%w of a particulate filler.
4,379,723
METHOD OF REMOVING ELECTTROCATALYTICALLY
ACTIVE PROTECTIVE COATINGS FROM ELECTRODES
WITH METAL CORES, AND THE USE OF THE METHOD
Christine ZoUner geb. MoUer, Schwaig/b. Nuremberg, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignor to C. Conradty Numberg GmbH & Co.
KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,407
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 28,
1980, 3032480
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/30; C23G 7/00
U.S. a. 134—2 1* Claims
1. A method of removing an electroconductive coating from
a metal core electrode substrate comprising forming a non-
adhesive intermediate layer of a compound of the metal sub-
strate between the electroconductive coating and the substrate
by thermally treating said electrode in a gas atmosphere con-
taining at least a proportion of an oxygen carbon; nitrogen— or
hydrogen yielding component or a mixture thereof and there-
after removing the electroconductive coating.
1. A method of cleaning soiled, thermoplastic resin, waste
film, which comprises the steps of cutting a mass of said soiled,
thermoplastic resin, waste film to provide a mass of pieces of
said waste film, which pieces are deformed and contain soil
distributed thereon and adhering thereto; feeding said mass of
pieces onto one end of the upper surface of an elongated, mesh
conveyor which conveyor is disposed within a washing tank
filled with heated aqueous cleaning liquid and is moving sub-
stantially horizontally therein whereby said pieces are im-
mersed in said liquid, simultaneously supplying a first quantity
of said liquid from outside said tank into said tank adjacent to
said one end of said conveyor and forcibly directing said
heated aqueous cleaning liquid in said tank in a direction
lengthwise of said conveyor from said one end thereof toward
the opposite end thereof whereby said liquid assists said con-
veyor in moving said piecfcs toward the opposite end of said
conveyor, simultaneously directing into said tank jets of a
second quantity of said liquid supplied from outside said tank,
said jets being located above the upper surface of said con-
veyor close to but upstream of the opposite end of said con-
veyor, said jets being directed above the upper surface of said
conveyor in a direction lengthwise of and opposite to the
direction of movement of said conveyor, and simultaneously
applying ultrasonic energy to said liquid from positions located
longitudinally of said conveyor between said jets and said one
end of said conveyor, said positions being opposed to each
other and being located on opposite lateral sides of and above
the upper surface of said conveyor so that said ultrasonic
energy is directed laterally inwardly and across the upper
surface of said conveyor substantially at right angles to the
direction of movement thereof, said liquid being at a tempera-
ture sufficient to soften said pieces and to remove soil there-
from while said pieces are being subjected to said ultrasonic
energy so as to be beaten thereby, to smooth the deformations
thereof and to assist in removing soil therefrom; discharging
said pieces from said tank at the opposite end of said conveyor
and then washing said pieces with pressurized water.
4 179 725
PROCESS FOR HOT ISOSTATIC PRESSING OF A
METAL WORKPIECE
Willard E. Kemp, 1035 Dairy Ashford, Suite 146, Houston,
Tex. 77079
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,503
Int. a.' C21D 1/53. 1/78
U.S. a. 148—4 13 Claims
1. A process for treating a metal workpiece comprising the
steps of:
(a) subjecting the workpiece to a fluidized particulate bed at
408
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
a temperature of a first level until the workpiece through- high impurity concentration region and at least one low break-
out reaches substantially this temperature at the first level; down voltage semiconductor element in said second epitaxial
(b) terminating fiuidization of the bed;
(c) subjecting the workpiece to superatmospheric gas pres-
sure while leaving the workpiece in the bed at a relatively
hiom press
GiS SUPPLY
4,379,726
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICE UTILIZING OUTDIFFUSION AND EPITAXIAL
DEPOSITION
Kuniaki Kumamani, Chigasaki; Shunichi Hiraki, Yokohama,
and Toshio Yonezawa, Yokosuka, all of Japan, assignors to
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
FUed May 6, 1980, Ser. No. 147,334
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 17, 1979, 54-60673
Int. a.^ HOIL 21/74. 21/76
U.S. a. 148-175 1 Qaim
1. A method of manufacturing a semiconductor device com-
prising the steps of: selectively forming at least one high first
impurity concentration region of a conductivity type opposite
to the conductivity type of a semiconductor substrate and
having a desired depth in said substrate along the principal
surface thereof, depositing a first epitaxial layer of the same
conductivity type as said substrate on the entire principal
surface of said semiconductor substrate, selectively forming at
least one second high impurity concentration region of the
opposite conductivity type to said substrate in said first epitax-
ial layer along a surface portion thereof not corresponding to
said first high impurity concentration region, selectively form-
ing a low impurity concentration region of the opposite con-
ductivity type to said substrate in said first epitaxial layer along
a surface portion thereof corresponding to said first high impu-
rity concentration region, the diffusion rate of the low impurity
region being higher than that of the first and second high
impurity concentration regions, depositing a second epitaxial
layer on the entire surface of said first epitaxial layer, thermally
treating the resultant intermediate device to cause diffusion of
the impurities in the first and second high impurity concentra-
tion regions into the respective first and second epitaxial layers
and also causing diffusion of the impurity in the low impurity
concentration region into the entire portion of the first epitax-
ial layer corresponding to the first high impurity concentration
region, forming an element isolation region of the same con-
ductivity type as said first epitaxial layer in a portion of said
second epitaxial layer between said first and second high impu-
rity concentration regions such that said isolation layer reaches
the surface of said first epitaxial layer, and forming at least one
nigh breakdown voltage semiconductor element in said second
epitaxial layer in a portion thereof corresponding to said first
constant temperature of about the first level until pressure
and temperature dependent internal structural changes
have occurred in the workpiece; and
(d) removing the workpiece from the bed and superatmos-
pheric pressure for subsequent utilization.
*4
--^
IT
■ 4 —
5 —
1
)
P
~ h-^
2< 22 ^' ^' "■ * 20 ,9 e ,T
layer in a portion thereof corresponding to said second high
impurity concentration region.
4,379,727
METHOD OF LASER ANNEALING OF SUBSURFACE
ION IMPLANTED REGIONS
Howard H. Hansen, Underhill; Jerome B. Lasky, and Ronald R.
Silverman, both of Essex Junction, all of Vt., assignors to
International Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,267
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/263. 21/265
U.S. a. 148—1.5 9 Claims
cauiiwniooioK/ca'
10* e" «'"
Li 9 I «CKI> M
1. A method of annealing buried ion implanted regions in a
semiconductor body comprising;
ion implanting impurity ions into a crystalline semiconduc-
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
409
tor body to provide in the body a buried region having a
high concentration of said impurity ions at a predeter-
mined depth below the surface, and
annealing said buried region by exposure of the body to the
emission of a continuous wave laser having an emission
■frequency which is substantially absorbed by the buried
region and to which the remainder of the body is substan-
tially transparent to cause electrical activation of the
implanted ions in said buried region without substantial
thermal diffusion of the implanted species.
4,379,728
CYANOUREA COMPOUNDS OR POLYMERS THEREOF
AS EPOXY RESIN CURING AGENTS
Shiow C. Lin, Columbia, Md., assignor to W. R. Grace A Co.,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,948
Int. a.3 C08G 59/44
U.S. CI. 156—307.3 18 Qaims
1. A heat curable composition comprising an epoxy resin and
a cyanourea compound of the formula:
O
capable of bonding together on curing, the method comprising
the steps of:
depositing a first layer of a first of said curable compositions
onto a base member while said first composition is wet and
uncured and in a viscous state having adequate strength to
support a second layer but capable of flowing under the
influence of vibration;
depositing directly and immediately onto said wet first layer
a wet second layer of the second of said curable composi-
tions without any prior treatment of the wet first layer
other than levelling, the second composition being wet
and uncured and in a viscous state but capable of flowing
under the influence of vibration and the two layers meet-
ing at an interface;
temporarily creating a localised zone of fluidization extend-
ing through said wet second layer to the interface between
the wet first and second layers by the application of vibra-
tion to a small localised area of the surface of the wet
second layer to promote intimacy and subsequent bonding
of the first and second layers, the first and second compo-
sitions remaining viscous outside the said localised zone of
fluidisation;
and allowing the first and second compositions to cure to-
gether to form the composite product.
(NCNHCNH)„— R
wherein R is the organic moiety of a mono- or polyisocyanate
remaining after reaction of the isocyanate groups to form
cyanourea groups and n is 1 or more, the equivalent ratio of
epoxide:N-cyanourea being 1 to 30:2.
15. The process of adhering two substrates which comprises
applying to at least one of said substrates a heat curable compo-
sition comprising an epoxy resin and a cyanourea compound of
the formula:
(NCNHCNH)„— R
wherein R is the organic moiety of a mono- or polyisocyanate
remaining after reaction of the isocyanate groups to form
cyanourea groups and n is 1 or more, the equivalent ratio of
epoxide:N-cyanourea being 1 to 30:2 contacting the substrates
with the composition therebetween and heating the thus con-
tacted substrates at a temperature above 100° C.
4,379,729
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE PRODUCTION
OF COMPOSITE SHEET MATERIAL AND A SHEET
MATERIAL PRODUCED THEREBY
Sydney H. Cross, Newport, England, assignor to Tarmac Indus-
trial Holdings Limited, Wolverhampton, England
per No. PCr/GB80/00125, § 371 Date Apr. 3, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 3, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00375, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 19, 1981
per FUed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 253,845
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 9, 1979,
7927723; Aug. 9, 1979, 7927725
Int. a.3 B28B 1/08: B32B 31/16
U.S. a. 156—73.6 15 Claims
4,379,730
METHOD OF COATING AN OPEN WEAVE FABRIC
Larry C. Anderson, Wrightsrille; Robert C. Lausch, Ephrata,
and Peter J. Sydorko, Lancaster, all of Pa., assignors to
Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
FUed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,942
Int. a.3 B05D 1/28
U.S. a. 156—324 3 Claims
1. A method of making a composite product including dis-
tinct layers of two different water-based curable compositions
1. A method of coating an open weave fabric wherein the
coating apparatus has an applicator roll for applying the coat-
ing to the fabric, a metering roll for controlling the thickness of
material on the applicator roll and a pressure roll for holding
the fabric against the surface of the applicator roll and wherein
the fabric being coated is woven with an open weave having
approximately 10 by 10 strands per inch, the method compris-
ing the steps of:
a. applying a coating to the applicator roll,
b. passing the applicator roll by the metering roll which
controls the thickness of the coating on the applicator roll,
moving the metering roll with a tangential speed which is
10% to 15% of the tangential speed of the applicator roll
so as to provide a wiping action of the metering roll rela-
tive to the applicator roll, both said applicator roll and
metering roll moving in the same direction at the nip
between the two rolls,
c. moving the applicator roll into contact with the open
weave fabric to be coated with the applicator roll and
fabric moving at the same tangential speed,
d. pressing the fabric against the applicator roll with a pres-
sure roll at a pressure of about 1-15 pounds per lineal inch
to work the coating into the structure of the strands form-
ing the open weave fabric but not sufficient to force the
coating into and through the open area of the weave of the
fabric whereby the fabric is provided with a coating over
90% of the strands of the fabric with very little coating
being applied to the open area of the weave of the fabric
410
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
and no buildup of globs of coating material on the surface
of the fabric.
4,379,731
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING HOT
MELT ADHESIVE TO BASE CUPS
Geoffrey A. D. Long, Dunwoody, and Brian C. McPike, Doug-
lass, both of Ga., assignors to Sewell Plastics, Inc., Atlanta,
Ga.
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,835
Int. a.J B05B 1/20
U.S. a. 156—356 10 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for assembling containers into cup-shaped
bases, an applicator means for coating a contact surface of each
base with a bonding agent preparatorily to placement of a
corresponding container therein, the applicator means com-
prising.
(a) a support fixed to said apparatus adjacent the supply of
cup-shaped bases,
(b) pivot means rotationally supported by the support in
alignment with the open end of one of the cup-shaped
bases,
(c) nozzle means fixed to said pivot means and rotatable
therewith for ejecting a bonding agent into the cup-
shaped bases, ,
(d) rotating means connected to the support and to the pivot
means for rotating the nozzle with respect to the cup-
shaped bases, and
(e) control means connected to the nozzle means and to the
rotating means for causing the nozzle means to rotate and
eject a bonding agent simultaneously, the control means
comprising a cam fixed to rotate with the pivot means and
a switch means operated by the said cam.
4,379,732
BONDING APPLICATOR FOR PRODUONG FLEXIBLE
TUBING
Wayne K. Fairchild, 3623 W. Warner, Santa Ana, Calif. 92704
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,666
Int. a? B32B 31/00
U.S. a. 156-428 3 Qaims
1. A bonding-applicator device for producing flexible tubing
from a continuous, substantially flat, plastic ribbon, the device
comprising: -
a first valve means;
a second valve means connected to said first valve means,
wherein one of said valve means is an ON/OFF valve and
said other valve means is a flow-control valve;
a reservoir having a solvent fluid stored therein;
means connecting said reservoir to one of said valves,
wherein said connecting means comprises a hose intercon-
necting said reservoir with said ON/OFK valve means;
an applicator arm having one free end and an opposite end
connected to said ON/OFF valve means to cause said
ON/OFF valve means to operate between an "on" and an
"ofT' position; and
means disposed in said free end of said applicator arm
adapted to engage and apply solvent to the ribbon as the
flexible tubing is being formed, said means to apply said
solvent comprising:
(a) a bore formed in said free end of said applicator arm,
(b) a nipple secured in said bore,
(c) a hose connecting said nipple to said flow-control valve,
and
(d) an applicator pad communicating with said bore to re-
ceive said solvent therethrough in an amount regulated by
said flow-control valve;
said ON/OFF valve means including an extended valve
stem secured in said applicator arm, whereby said ON/-
OFF valve is placed in an "on" mode when said applica-
tor arm is moved downwardly to allow said applicator
pad to engage said ribbon, and is placed in an "ofT' mode
when said applicator arm is arranged in a substantially
vertical position;
said flow-control-valve means including means to regulate
the flow of solvent being dispensed proportionately to the
speed of the moving ribbon.
4,379,733
BICAMERAL MODE CRYSTAL GROWTH APPARATUS
AND PROCESS
Antonio C. Pastor, Santa Monica; Ricardo C. Pastor, Manhat-
tan Beach, and Kaneto Arita, Gardena, all of Calif., assignors
to Hughes Aircraft Company, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,986
Int. a.3 C30B 11/00
U.S. a. 156—616 R 9 Qaims
7. An improvement in the process of forming alkaline earth
halide, rare earth halide and alkali metal halide crystals from
the melt of selected reactants under a dynamic reactive atmo-
sphere where said improvement comprises the steps of forming
said melt, soaking said melt and cooling said melt by a Bridg-
man-type movement under said reactive atmosphere in a cap-
sule assembly that is positioned within a furnace chamber and
isolated from ambient gases by (1) an inert atmosphere created
within said chamber, said inert atmosphere being prevented
from communicating with said reactive atmosphere and (2) a
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
411
radial seal which includes a gas trap means for entrapping and bination with a conveying fabric with which it converges on a
removing any oxygen-conUining gaseous species that may be twin-wire paper making machine wherein a flat jet-stream of
pulp is injected between said conveying backing and convey-
ing fabrics for applying opposed pressure to said pulp for
removing water therefrom to form a sheet of paper, said single-
ply forming fabric having a plurality of monofilament poly-
meric warp strands extending in the longitudinal direction and
interwoven, with approximately 100% warp fill, with monofil-
ament polymeric weft strands extending in the lateral direc-
tion, said weft strands disposed in vertically aligned groups of
at least three to obtain greater stiffness in the lateral direction
whereby to substantially re-distribute pulp laterally when it is
sandwiched between said fabrics.
absorbed on said capsule assembly, together with sealing
means on each side of said gas trap means.
4,379,734
MULTISTAGE EVAPORATOR
Paul Franzen, Koblenz, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to FA.
Maschinenfabrik Buckau R. Wolf AG, Grevenbroich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,122
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 29,
1980, 3016406
Int. a.3 BOID 1/26
U.S. a. 159—17 R 30 Qaims
Ik 6
4,379,736
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INHIBITING THE
FORMATION OF POLYMERIZED VINYLAROMATIC
COMPOUNDS DURING DISTILLATIVE PURIHCATION
OF VINYLAROMATIC MONOMER
Debra L. Kendall; James M. Watson, and Danny P. Wright, all
of Big Spring, Tex., assignors to Cosden Technology, Inc.,
Dallas, Tex.
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,604
Int. C1.3 BOID i/n
U.S. a. 203—9 15 Claims
,26 27
V ) 2'
COWfHSdl
^} 'Ar^^
30' "^29 2'
IPIMTE l_J I t^
COWIIMTE
EXMHSOH
VESSE
1. A multistage evaporator comprising
an evaporator section including a plurality of evaporating
stages;
a vapor compressor connected to the evaporator section;
and
a heat pump connected to the evaporator section.
1. A method of inhibiting the formation of polymerized
vinylaromatic compounds during distillative purification of
vinylaromatic monomer from a crude feed comprising
vinylaromatic monomer admixed with lower and higher boil-
ing materials, said method comprising distilling said vinylaro-
matic monomer from said crude feed in a multitray distillation
column equipped with vapor liquid contact trays provided
with openings for upward passage of vapors therethrough and
downcomers for downward passage of liquid from tray to tray
wherein the downcomers and tray bottoms are coated with a
fluorocarbon polymer.
4,379,735
THREE-LAYER FORMING FABRIC
Donald G. MacBean, Ottawa, Canada, assignor to JWI Ltd.,
Kanata, Canada
FUed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,797
Int a.' D21F I/IO
U A a. 162—348 6 Claims
1. A single-ply forming fabric comprising an endless belt
having opposed side edges, said forming fabric having a lateral
direction extending between the side edges thereof and a longi-
tudinal direction extending perpendicular to said lateral direc-
tion, said forming fabric being a backing fabric for use in com-
4,379,737
METHOD TO MAKE A BUILT UP AREA ROTARY
PRINTING SCREEN
Stephen G. Mearig, Moaotrille, Pa., assignor to Armstroag
World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
FUed Not. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,456
Int a.3 C25D im
UA a. 204—11 » ClaiiB
1. A method of forming a rotary printing screen wherem the
screen is initially formed by coating a resist material on a
conventional plating mandrel, placing a film over the resist
412
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
material and exposing the resist material through the film to
form a mesh pattern in the resist material, then developing the
exposed resist material to result in a mesh pattern of hardened
resist material on the plating mandrel, then plating the mandrel
in a conventional manner so that plating material is not depos-
ited on the mandrel where a resist material exists, or overplated
over the resist, but is deposited in the areas where no resist
material exists, to form a plated surface with perforations
therein, the improvement comprising:
(a) coating the outside surface of the newly plated surface
with a second resist coating;
(b) placing a film over the second resist coating;
(c) exposing the film to collimated light to sensitize the
second resist material in selected regions beneath the
photographic film;
(d) developing the exposed resist to provide on the first
plated surface a pattern of second resist material existing
in some areas and no second resist material existing in
other areas, the second resist material existing on the
4 379 739
ELECTROLYTIC REDUCTION OF CEPHALOSPORIN
P-NITROBENZYL ESTERS
David A. Hall, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to Eli Lilly and
Company, Indianapolis, Ind.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 135,829, Mar. 31, 1980,
abandoned. This application Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,316
Int. a.3 C25B i/00
U.S. a. 204-72 25aaims
14. 30
to
16
1. A process for preparing a compound of the formula
plated surface only in those areas of the first plating that
has perforations therethrough, said second resist covering
plural perforations and said second resist material filling
said perforations and covering the areas surrounding the
perforations;
(e) plating the original plated surface with the second resist
pattern thereon to form a second plated surface which
becomes integral with the first plated surface in those
areas where no resist material exists, but with no second
plated surface being provided in those areas where the
second resist coating exists, the outside surface of the
second plated surface forming the exterior surface of the
printing screen;
(0 washing and cleaning the plated surface and removing the
plated surface from the plating mandrel to form a cylindri-
cal rotary printing screen with different areas of perfora-
tions in a pattern defining a mesh pattern formed by the
first resist with the areas of perforations (which is) spaced
from the exterior surface of the screen by a single large
open area formed by the second resist.
R2
(0)m
s
RHN-
O
*- N ^>_CH2— R'
Y
CO2X
wherein
X is hydrogen;
m is 0 or 1;
R2 is hydrogen or methoxy;
R is hydrogen or — COR^;
R^is hydrogen, Ci— Csalkyl, halomethyl, benzyloxy, 2,2,2-tri-
chloroethoxy, t-butoxy, R-*, R4_(0)„— CH2— , R-*— CH(R-
5)-, R6-CH2-, or
r«hn4^ Jlc-
N
NOR'
4,379,738
ELECTROPLATING ZINC
Paul A. Kohl, Chatham, N J., assignor to Bell Telephone Labo-
ratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 108,964, Dec. 31, 1979, Pat. No. 4,31032.
This appUcation Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,708
Int. a.3 C25D i/22
,S. a. 204-55 R 6 Claims
1. A process for electroplating metallic substances consisting
intially of zinc comprising the step of passing current
ough an anode, aqueous plating solution and cathode char-
iterized in that the plating bath comprises an heterocyclic
additive consisting essentially of phenolphthalein.
wherein R' is hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl and R* is hydrogen
or an amino-protecting group;
R* is cyclohexadienyl or phenyl, or cyclohexadienyl or phenyl
substituted with one or two halo, hydroxy, protected hy-
droxy, aminomethyl, protected aminomethyl, C1-C4 alkyl or
C1-C4 alkoxy groups;
n is 0 or 1;
R' is hydroxy, protected hydroxy, amino, protected amino,
carboxy or protected carboxy;
R* is 2-thienyl, 2-furyl, S-tetrazolyl or l-tetrazolyl;
R' is C1-C4 alkanoyloxy, benzoyloxy, fluoro, chloro, car-
bamoyloxy, C1-C4 alkylcarbamoyloxy, pyridinio, pyridinio
substituted with C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkanoyl, carbamoyl,
C|-C4alkylcarbamoyl, chloro, fluoro, hydroxy or trifluoro-
methyl, or the corresponding pyridinio chlorides or bro-
mides, or — S — R';
R9 is — CH2C02(Ci-C4 alkyl), carbamoyl, phenyl, phenyl
substituted with one or two chloro, fluoro, C1-C4 alkyl,
hydroxy, C1-C4 alkylsulfonamido or trifluoromethyl
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
413
groups; triazol-3-yl unsubstituted or substituted with one or
two groups independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl,
— C02(Ci-C4alkyl), — CONH2 and — CH2NHC)CO(benzyl
or C1-C4 alkyl);
a metal terminal supported by and partially embedded into
said sealing material element to electrically connect said
/
N
N
A
t:
N
I
CH3
tetrazol-1-yl or tetrazol-5-yl substituted with one or two
groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl and — CH-
2C02(Ci-C4 alkyl or hydrogen); 4-cyano-5-aminopyrimidin-
2-yl, or 5-methyl-l,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl;
provided that n is 0 when R* is cyclohexadienyl;
which process comprises electrolytically reducing a com-
pound of the above formula wherein X is p-nitrobenzyl in an
acidic liquid medium comprising from about 0 to about 50%
water, an acid having a pKa determined in water of 0 or below,
the amount of said acid being at least four moles per mole of
the compound to be reduced, and an organic solvent substan-
tially inert to electrolytic reduction, at the working electrode
of an electrolytic cell, said working electrode substantially
comprising carbon, mercury, tin, aluminum, silver, copper,
lead, chromium, zinc, nickel or cadmium, at a temperature
from about 0° C. to about 75° C, at a potential in a range from
about the potential of the initial onset of current flow of the
first reduction to about the potential of the initial onset of
current flow of the second reduction.
4,379,740
PHOTOASSISTED GENERATION OF HYDROGEN
FROM WATER
Adel I. Nazzal, San Jose, and Ulrich T. Mueller- Westerhoff, Los
Gatos, both of Calif., assignors to International Business
Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jim. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,085
Int. a.5 C25B 1/02. 11/04
U.S. a. 204—129 10 Qaims
1. A process for generating hydrogen from water containing
an acid by passing an electric current through the water using
a cathode which is a semiconductor exposed to light, said
process characterized in that a transition metal metalloceno-
phane compound is attached to the surface of the cathode by
means of a polymer.
first electrode with said terminal through said sealing
material element.
4,379,742
GAS-GENERATING METAL ELECTRODE FOR
ELECTROCHEMICAL PROCESSES
Hans-Carl Ratluen, and Konrad Kodol, both of Rotbenbach,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Conradty GmbH Co.
Metallelektroden KG, Rotbenbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,279
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 3,
1980, 3008116
Int. a.3 C25B 11/02. 11/04, 9/00
U.S. a. 204—286 10 Claims
4,379,741
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION SENSOR
Hiromi Sano, Nagoya, and Masatoshi Suzuki, Aajo, both of
Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,855
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 11, 1980, 55-95250
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/58
U.S. a. 204-424 5 Claims
1. An oxygen concentration sensor comprising:
a generally cup-shaped sensing element of a solid electrolyte
member having an open end and a closed end;
first and second electrodes provided on the inner and outer
surfaces of said sensing element;
a solid rod made of solid reference material having a refer-
ence oxygen partial pressure characteristic and disposed
on the closed end of said sensing element;
an electrically conductive sealing material element located
at the upper portion of said sensing element adjacent to
the open end of said sensing element, said sealing material
element being a melted and solidified mixture of metal
powder and glass powder; and
s-^
1. A gas-generating metal electrode for electroohemicJk|
processes, more particularly a coated titanium anode for amal-^
gam cells, comprising spaced-apart parallel rods arranged in a
horizontal plane, the surfaces of said rods having a cross sec-
tion whose height normal to said plane is greater than the
width parallel thereto, characterized in that the cross section of
each of said rods is comprised of a rectangle whose height is
normal to said plane and at least one chordal segment whose
chord corresponds to and coincides with the width of said
rectangle on one side thereof, said chord extending between
and interconnecting two other and opposite sides of said rect-
angle.
4,379,743
SPUTTERING APPARATUS COMPRISING CONTROL
MEANS FOR PREVENTING IMPURITY GASES FROM
ENTERING A SPUTTERING CHAMBER
Masashi Nakatsokasa, and Nobuynki Takahashi, both of Fnchn,
Japan, assignors to Anelfa Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jnl. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 2874>25
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 30, 1980, 55/104531
Int a.J C23C 15/00
U.S. a. 204-298 4 Claims
1. A sputtering apparatus comprising a main chamber defin-
ing a main hollow space, first means for holding a substrate in
said main hollow space, second means for sputtering a prede-
termined material onto the substrate held by said first means to
form a layer of said material, a preliminary chamber defining a
414
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
preliminary hollow space, third means for carrying out prelim-
inary processing of a substrate in said preliminary hollow
space, valve means for selectively isolating said main and said
preliminary hollow spaces from each other and making said
main and said preliminary hollow spaces communicate with
each other for transfer of the substrate from said third means to
said first means, first pressure controlling means coupled to
said mam hollow space for controlling a first pressure in said
main hollow space, second pressure controlling means coupled
to said preliminary hollow space for controlling a second
pressure in said preliminary hollow space, wherein the im-
provement comprises:
control means coupled to said valve means and at least to a
selected one of said first and said second pressure control-
ling means for controlling said selected pressure control-
ling means with reference to completion of said prelimi-
nary processing and for opening said valve means after
said second pressure becomes less than said first pressure.
their recrystallization temperature and their melting tem-
perature, in an atmosphere which is at least oxidizing with
respect to chromium.
4,379,744
COAL LIQUEFACTION PROCESS
Joel W. Rosenthal, El Cerrito, and Arthur J. Dahlberg, Rodeo,
both of Calif., assignors to Chevron Research Company, San
Francisco, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 194,730, Oct. 6, 1980, Pat. No.
4,330,393, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 12,185,
Feb. 14, 1979, Pat. No. 4,330,390, which is a continuation-in-part
of Ser. No. 754,198, Dec. 27, 1976, Pat. No. 4,330,389. This
application Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,917
Int. a.' ClOG 1/06. 1/08, 1/00
U.S. a. 208-10 42 Qaims
1. A process for liquefying coal which comprises:
(a) heating a slurry comprising a solvent, particulate coal,
and an externally supplied dispersed dissolution catalyst in
the presence of hydrogen in a first reaction zone to sub-
stantially dissolve the coal and provide a first effluent
slurry having a normally liquid portion comprising sol-
vent and dissolved coal and containing undissolved solids
and dissolution catalyst; and
(b) contacting at least a portion of said normally liquid por-
tion containing undissolved solids and dissolution catalyst
with hydrogen in a second reaction zone in the presence
of a second externally supplied hydrogenation catalyst
under hydrogenation conditions, including a temperature
lower than the temperature to which said slurry is heated
in step (a), to produce a second effluent slurry having a
normally liquid portion.
4 379 746
METHOD OF DESTRUCTION OF POLYCHLORINATED
BIPHENYLS
Oscar L. Norman, Wilmington, Del., and Laurence H. Handler,
Cherry Hill, N.J., assignors to Sun-Ohio, Inc., Canton, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 179,345, Aug. 18, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 99,341, Nov. 30, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,928
Int. a.3 ClOG 29/04
U.S. a. 208-262 11 aaims
-,j
X.
* -•**'-
I -J-7^
T>
4,379,745
CARBURIZATION RESISTANCE OF AUSTENITIC
STAINLESS STEEL TUBES
Richard S. Polizzotti, Milford, and Richard C. Knitenat, New
Providence, both of N.J., assignors to Exxon Research and
Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 208,986
Int. a.3 C22F 1/00. 1/11
U.S. a. 208—132 7 Claims
1. In the thermal cracking of hydrocarbons in contact with
cast austenitic stainless steel pyrolysis tubes to form products
including C2-C4 olefins and diolefins, wherein the composition
of said tubes comprises about 17 to 40 wt. % chromium, 15 to
50 wt. % nickel, and 0.6 to 4 wt. % silicon, the improvement
which comprises employing tubes which have been treated by
a method comprising:
(a) cold-working the inner surface of said tubes to deform
the surfaces to such a degree that upon the subsequent
heat treatment of step (b) below, dissolution of the M23C6
carbides in the deformed regions will result while main-
taining a refined recrystallized micrograin structure, in the
deformed surface regions, to a uniform minimum depth of
at least about 20 microns; and
(b) heating the cold-worked inner surfaces of said tubes, for
an effective amount of time, at a temperature between
1. A field method to remove at the point of use, halogenated
aromatic hydrocarbons from hydrocarbon transformer oils
contaminated with said halogenated aromatic hydrocarbons
which comprises removing said contaminated oil from the
transformer and circulating said oil through a decontamination
system at a flow rate of from about 5 to about 25 gallons per
minute to effect decontamination by mixing the contaminated
oil with a hydrocarbon dispersion of sodium wherein said
sodium has a particle size of from about one to about twenty
microns, reacting the mixture of oil and sodium dispersion at a
temperature above about 75° C. up to about 150° C, passing
the treated oil through separating means to remove particulate
and other contaminating material and returning the treated oil
essentially free of halogenated aromatic hydrocarbons back to
the transformer.
4,379,747
DEMETALATION OF HEAVY HYDROCARBON OILS
Tsoung Y. Yan, Philadelphia, Pa., assignor to Mobil Oil Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,752
Int. a.3 ClOG 31/00. 45/00
U.S. a. 208—251 H 17 Claims
1. A process for heavy hydrocarbon oil demetalation which
comprises (1) heating a heavy hydrocarbon oil in a first stage
visbreaking zone at a temperature between about 800"- 1000*
F. for a residence time between about 0. 1-2 hours; (2) admixing
the first stage visbroken eflluent with particulate coal and
heating the admixture in a second stage visbreaking zone at a
temperature between about 700"-850° F. for a residence time
between about 0.1-2 hours; and (3) recovering the second
stage visbroken effluent and fractionating it to provide liquid
and solid products.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
415
4,379,748
METHOD OF SEPARATING PAPER AND PLASTIC
PIECES
Arie Hoogendoorn, Nieuw-Vennep, Netherlands, assignor to
Esmil International B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,849
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 8, 1980,
8000791
Int. a.3 B07B 9/02. 11/06
U.S. a. 209—11 12 Qaims
block such that said second end portion is substantially
parallel to said skimmer, and such that an upper surface of
1. In a method of separating paper and plastics, in a wetted
mixture consisting substantially of paper and plastic sheeting
pieces, by use of an upwardly moving stream of gas moving
along a flow path into which said path said wetted mixture is
passed, said path having an upward end and a downward end,
the improvement comprising:
admitting a gas, for producing said upwardly moving stream
of gas, into said path at an elevated temperature which is
at least 60° C. but is not so high that the plastic sheeting
deforms through the action of heat, and
employing said gas to effect at least partial drying of said
plastic sheeting pieces such that separation will be im-
proved, by a downward movement of said paper in said
upwardly moving stream of gas and by upward movement
of said plastic sheeting pieces in said upwardly moving
stream of gas due to the enhanced differences in densities
of said paper and said plastic sheeting.
4,379,749
WATER DEFLECTOR ASSEMBLY FOR SWIMMING
POOL SKIMMERS
Daniel T. Roth, 17018 Aspen Way, Morgan Hill, Calif. 95037
Filed Jan. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,834
Int. a.3 E04H 3/16
U.S. a. 210—169 5 Qaims
1. A water deflector assembly for deflecting water towards
a skimmer provided in the wall of a swimming pool, the water
deflector comprising: 0
(a) an adaptor block;
(b) means coupling said adaptor block proximate to said
skimmer;
(c) an elongated water deflector having a substantially pla-
nar central portion, a first end portion angularly deflected
from said central portion, and a second end portion angu-
larly deflected from said central portion in a second direc-
tion substantially opposite said first direction, where said
first end portion and said second end portion are substan-
tially planar and parallel; and
(d) means attaching said first end portion to said adaptor
said deflector protrudes above the surface of the water
within said pool.
4,379,750
n.UID-SOLIDS CONTACT DEVICE AND IMPROVED
FLUID DISTRIBUTOR
Donald D. Tiggelbeck, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to Tigg Corpo-
ration, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,641
Int. a.' BOID 33/38
U.S. a. 210—232 16 Qaims
1. In a fluid-solids contact device comprising a tank contain-
ing particulate solids, a fluid inlet at the bottom of said tank and
a fluid outlet at the top of said tank, the improvement compris-
ing a fluid distributor device in the bottom of the said tank
secured to the said inlet and comprising a tube-defining helix
wire frame, secured at one end to said inlet, and a fabric sleeve
surrounding and supported by the said tube-defining-frame
whereby fluids entering the said tank pass from the said inlet
through the fabric openings in the said sleeve.
4,379,751
METHOD FOR THE CHROMATOGRAPHIC
SEPARATION OF SOLUBLE COMPONENTS IN FEED
SOLUTION
Kenzaburo Yoritomi; Tenio Kezuka, and Mitsumasa Moriya, all
of Chiba, Japan, assignors to Sanmatsu Kogyo Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 32,723, Apr. 23, 1979, Pat. No.
4,267,054, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 908,455, May
22, 1978. This application Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,930
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1977, 52-62023
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 12,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.5 BOIN 15/08
U.S. Q. 210—659 4 Qaims
1. A method for the chromatographic separation of each of
the soluble components of a feed solution containing as major
components (1) a component A which is relatively less ad-
sorbed by a solid adsorbent having ion-exchanging or molecu-
lar sieve action and (2) a component B which is more selec-
tively adsorbed by said solid adsorbent having ion-exchanging
or molecular sieve action, said solid adsorbent having its ad-
416
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
sorbency restored by displacing the selectively adsorbed com-
ponents, where the chromatographic separation is carried out
in a circulating system comprised of at least one column
packed with said solid adsorbent and wherein each column in
said system has at least one outlet for withdrawal of both a
major component A-rich fraction and a major component
B-rich fraction, through said outlet fractions other than the
major component fractions are recycled to said circulating
system, which method comprises the steps of:
(A) establishing within said circulating system a component
concentration distribution comprising, sequentially: a
major component A-rich fraction, fraction (a); a first
mixeo fraction containing component A and component
B, fraction (b); a major component B-rich fraction, frac-
tion (c); and a second mixed fraction containing compo-
nent A and component B, fraction (d), intermediate to
fraction (c) and fraction (a),
(B) withdrawing each major component fraction through
the outlet immediately dowstream in the circulating sys-
tem from the position of that major component fraction in
the component concentration distribution, and concur-
rently adding, while withdrawing each volume of said
major component A-rich fraction and said major compo-
nent B-rich fraction, at least one of the two liquids (1)
solvent for component A and component B and (2) feed
solution, said solvent being added at a position adjacent to
fraction (d) and said feed solution being added at a f)osi-
tion adjacent to fraction (b),
(C) directly recycling fractions (b) and (d) downstream in
the circulating system along with added solvent and/or
solution thereby re-establishing the component concentra-
tion distribution,
(D) repeating steps (B) and (C) in a cyclic manner with each
major component fraction being withdrawn through an
outlet downstream in the circulating system to the outlet
through which that major component fraction was last
withdrawn.
4^79,752
METHOD FOR DESTRUCTION OF
POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS
Oscar L. Norman, Wilmington, Del., assignor to Sun-Ohio, Inc.,
Canton, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 180,752, Aug. 25, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,047
Int. a.J BOID 21/00
U.S. a. 210—712 3 Claims
1. A continuous method for the destruction of polyhalogen-
ated biphenyls which comprises injecting said biphenyls into a
continuously circulating hydrocarbon oil to an initial concen-
tration of from about 1% to about 3% by weight and effecting
reaction in the oil circulating at about 5 to about 25 gallons per
minute at a temperature above about 75° up to about 150° C.
/»Oi.rM^aMff^twt.
■*«*ir L^
I'T^
^f^tC-Cit p-t.
•^^^^^
with a dispersion of sodium in a hydrocarbon oil wherein the
particle size of the sodium particles is from about one to about
ten microns, separating the particulate solids that are formed
and recycling said hydrocarbon oil.
4,379,753
HAIR CARE COMPOSITIONS
Raymond E. Bolich, Jr., Maineville, Ohio, assignor to The
Procter & Gamble Company, Oncinnati, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 119,347, Feb. 7, 1980, Pat. No. 4,345,080.
This application May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,988
Int. a.3 CUD i/4S
U.S. a. 252—106 8 Oaims
1. Hair care compositions which contain from about 0.2% to
about 4.0% of heavy metal, magnesium or aluminum pyridine-
thione salt crystals which are predominantly flat platelets
having a mean sphericity less than about 0.65 and a median
equivalent spherical diameter based on volume of at least about
2/1 but less than about 15;i. —
4,379,754
ALIPHATIC BRANCHED OLEFIN DIOXOLANES,
DITHIOLANES, AND OXATHIOLANES AND USES
THEREOF IN AUGMENTING OR ENHANONG THE
AROMA AND/OR TASTE OF CONSUMABLE
MATERIALS
Richard M. Boden, Monmouth Beach, N.J., assignor to Interna-
tional Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 212,993, Dec. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,315,952. This appUcation Nov. 19, 1981, S«c. No. 322,732
Int. a.3 CUD 3/50. 9/44
U.S. a. 252—174.11 5 Qaims
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
solid or liquid anionic, cationic, nonionic or zwitterionic deter-
gent comprising the step of adding to a solid or liquid anionic,
cationic, nonionic or zwitterionic detergent base, an aroma
augmenting or enhancing quantity of at least one dioxolane
compound defined according to the structure selected from the
group consisting of:
r
wherein one of the dashed lines represents a carbon-carbon
double bond and each of the other of the dashed lines represent
carbon-carbon single bonds.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
417
4,379,755
GELATINIZING AGENT COMPOSITION, AND GEL AND
AQUEOUS EMULSION PREPARED THEREFROM
Mikio Yamada, and Yigin Tabata, both of Tokyo, Japan, assign-
ors to Nihon Surfactant Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 63,748, Aug. 6, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,653
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 10, 1978, 53-97705
Int. a.' BOIF n/i4. 17/39: BOIJ 13/00
U.S. a. 252—312 47 Claims
1. An oil-free gelatinizing agent composition for gelatinizing
oil and comprising from 5 to 98 percent by weight of (a) hydro-
philic sucrose fatty-acid ester and from 95 to 2 percent by
weight of (b) hydrophilic liquid polyhydric alcohol.
8. A substantially water-free and homogeneous gel composi-
tion comprising oil incorporated in a gelatinizing composition
according to claim 1.
37. An aqueous emulsion which is an admixture of water
with a gel composition according to claim 8 or 9.
4,379,756
REACTIVATION OF SUPPORTED CATALYSTS WHICH
CONTAIN PALLADIUM, COPPER AND TELLURIUM
Hans-Martin Weitz, Bad Durkheim, and Rolf Fischer, Heidel-
berg, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Ak-
tiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,277
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 12,
1980, 3022043
Int. C\? BOIJ 37/00. 27/02
U.S. a. 252—411 R 10 Qaims
1. In a process for reactivating a supported catalyst which
contains palladium, copper and tellurium and which has been
used for the acyloxylation of unsubstituted or substituted buta-
diene to give butenediol esters, the improvement which com-
prises:
heating the used catalyst at from 200° to 900" C. under an
essentially inert gas atmosphere, free of a reducing agent,
for a period of time sufficient at said temperature to reacti-
vate the catalyst while free of contact with any reactive
gas.
catalyst composition capable of producing high density ethyl-
ene homopolymers and copolymers under a pressure of less
than 1000 psi with low accompanying ethylene hydrogenation,
said precursor composition having the formula
Mg;„Ti(OR)„Xy,[ED],
wherein
R is an aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon radical containing
from 1 to 14 carbon atoms, or COR' wherein R' is an
aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon radical containmg
from 1 to 14 carbon atoms,
X is selected from the group consisting of CI, Br, I, and
mixtures thereof,
ED is an organic electron donor compound selected from
the group consisting of alkyl esters of aliphatic and aro-
matic acids, aliphatic ethers, cyclic ethers and aliphatic
ketones,
m is O.S to 56,
n is 0, 1 or 2,
p is 2 to 116, and
q is 2 to 85,
said precursor composition being diluted with an inert car-
rier material and containing from 0.1 mol to 3.0 mols of
boron halide compound per mol of electron donor in said
precursor composition,
said boron halide compound having the formula
BRcX'3_f
wherein
R is an aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon radical contain-
ing from 1 to 14 carbon atoms or OR', wherein R' is an
aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon radical containing
from 1 to 14 carbon atoms,
X' is selected from the group consisting of CI, Br, and
mixtures thereof, and
c is 0 or 1 when R is an aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon
and 0, 1 or 2 when R is OR'.
4 379 757
TERTIARY AMINE CATALYST MIXTURES USEFUL IN
CELLULAR POLYURETHANE FORMATION
Feyyaz O. Baskent, Mahopac, and Michael R. Sandner, Chap-
paqua, both of N.Y., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,991
Int. a.J BOIJ 31/02
U.S. a. 252—426 2 Qaims
1. A catalyst mixture which comprises: (1) from about 5 to
about 10 percent by weight of 2-hydroxyethyl piperazine; (2)
from about 5 to about 10 percent by weight of l,4-di-(2-
hydroxyethyl) piperazine; and (3) from about 80 to about 90
percent by weight of 1,4-diazobicyclo [2.2.2] octane.
2. A catalyst mixture which comprises: (1) from about 10 to
about 20 percent by weight of 2-hydroxyethyl piperazine; (2)
from about 10 to about 20 percent by weight of l,4-di-(2-
hydroxyethyl) piperazine; and (3) from about 65 to about 75
percent by weight of N-ethyl morpholine.
4,379,758
CATALYST COMPOSITION FOR POLYMERIZING
ETHYLENE
Burkhard E. Wagner, Highland Park; George L. Goeke; Freder-
ick J. Karol, both of Belle Mead, all of N J., and Kathleen F.
George, Crosslanes, W. Va., assignors to Union Carbide Cor-
poration, Danbury, Conn.
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,877
Int a.' C08F 4/«
\3S. a. 252—429 B 22 Claims
1. A precursor composition suitable as a component of a
4,379,759
IMPREGNATED POLYMERIZATION CATALYST,
PROCESS FOR PREPARING, AND USE FOR ETHYLENE
COPOLYMERIZATION
George L. Goeke, Belle Mead; Burkhard E. Wagner, Highland
Park, and Frederick J. Karol, Belle Mead, all of N.J., assign-
ors to Union Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 12,720, Feb. 16, 1979, Pat. No. 4,302,565,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 892,322, Mar. 31,
1978, abandoned. This application May 15, 1981, Ser. No.
264,091
Int. a? C08F 4/64
U.S. Q. 252—429 B H Qaims
1. A catalyst composition comprising a precursor composi-
tion of the formula
MgmTiXOR),X;4EDl,
wherein
R is a Ci to Ci4 aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon radical,
or COR' wherein R' is a Ci to Cu aliphatic or aromatic
hydrocarbon radical,
X is selected from the group consisting of CI, Br, 1 or mix-
tures thereof,
ED is an electron donor compound,
mis ^0.5 to ^56,
n is 0, 1 or 2,
p is ^2 or ^116, and
qis ^2 to ^85,
said precursor composition being impregnated in a porous
support and being either unactivated, or
partially activated with >0 to S 10 mols of activator com-
418
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
pound per mol of Ti in said precursor composition or
completely activated with > 10 to ^400 mols of activator
compound per mol of Ti in said precursor composition,
said activator compound having the formula
AKR'VX'^H^
wherein X' is CI or OR", R" and R'" are the same or different,
and are Ci to C14 saturated hydrocarbon radicals, d is 0 to 1.5,
e is 1 or 0 and c + d + e = 3,
said electron donor compound being a liquid organic com-
pound in which said precursor composition is soluble and
which is selected from the group consisting of alkyl esters
of aliphatic and aromatic carboxylic acids, aliphatic
ethers, cyclic ethers and aliphatic ketones, and
said precursor composition being impregnated in said sup-
port in a weight ratio of 0.033:1 to 1:1.
4,379,760
HIGH EFFICIENCY CATALYST FOR POLYMERIZING
OLEHNS
Randall S. Shipley, Alvin, Tex.; Kirby Lowery, Jr., Baton
Rouge, La., and Ronald L. Gibbs, Midland, Mich., assignors
to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,650
Int. a.^ C08F 4/64
U.S. a. 252—429 B 7 Qaims
1. In a catalytic reaction product of (A) a tetravalent tita-
nium compound; (B) an organomagnesium component; and (C)
a halide source, however if either component (B) or (C) does
not contain sufficient quantities of aluminum, then (D) an
organoaluminum compound is also present, said catalytic reac-
tion product having atomic ratios of
Mg:Ti is from about 1:1 to about 200:1;
Al:Ti IS from about 0.1:1 to about 1000:1;
excess X:A1 is from about 0.0005:1 to about 5:1;
the improvement which comprises employing as the tetrava-
lent titanium compound, a mixture of (a) a tetrahydrocarbylox-
ytitanium compound and (b) a dihydrocarbyloxytitanium
oxide in a molar ratio of (a):(b) of from about 0.1:1 to about
10:1; and wherein excess X is the amount of excess halide
above that which would be theoretically required to convert
the magnesium compound to the dihalide.
4,379,761
CATALYST AND PROCESS FOR MAKING SAID
CATALYST
David H. Olson, Pennington, and Paul G. Rodewald, Rocky
Hill, both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,878
Int. a.3 BOIJ 27/14. 29/06
U.S. a. 252—435 25 Qaims
1. A catalyst composition comprising a porous crystalline
zeolite, havmg silica deposited thereon as a result of contact
with a silicone compound of a molecular size incapable of
entering the pores of the zeolite and subsequent heating in an
oxygen-containing atmosphere to a temperature in excess of
300° C. but below a temperature at which crystallinity of the
zeolite is adversely affected at a rate such that the silicone
compound does not volatilize prior to undergoing oxidation to
silica, said zeolite being characterized by an activity, in terms
of alpha value, of between about 2 and about 5000, a xylene
sorption capacity greater than 1 gram/ 100 grams of zeolite and
an ortho xylene sorption time for 30 percent of said capacity
greater than 10 minutes, said sorption capacity and sorption
time being measured at 120° C. and a pressure of 4.5 ±0.8 mm.
of mercury and modified by the addition thereto of phospho-
rus.
4,379,762
METHOD OF PRODUCING PICTURE TUBE COATING
COMPOSITIONS
Hironobu Chiyoda, Kokubunji; Hisayuki Yamazaki, Kashiwa,
and Reiichiro Takabe, Kamagaya, all of Japan, assignors to
Hitachi Powdered Metals Company, Ltd., Chiba, Japan
Filed Mar. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 133,952
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 14, 1979, 54-117381
Int. a.^ HOIB 1/06
U.S. a. 252—507 3 Qaims
1. A method of producing a graphite-based coating composi-
tion to be applied to the interior wall of a picture tube, which
comprises:
mixing graphite particles having a diameter of about 2 to 3
microns, titanium oxide with a particle diameter of about
0.5 to 1.0 micron and silicon oxide having a particle diam-
eter of about 0.007 to 0.008 microns, in water to prepare
an aqueous mixture of the electroconductive particles;
spray drying said aqueous mixture to form an electroconduc-
tive powder; and
mixing said electroconductive powder with an alkali metal
silicate and a dispersant in water and thoroughly agitating
the resulting mixture.
4,379,763
WASTE WATER TREATMENT BY
CHELATION-GELATION
Lawrence M. Clemens, and Alton J. Gasper, both of Minneapo-
lis, Minn., assignors to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing
Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,130
Int. a.^ G21F 9/16
U.S. CI. 252—628 12 Qaims
1. A treatment method comprising:
(1) mixing waste water containing a contaminant chemical
component with a chelating agent capable of forming a
complex with said component, said chelating agent being
selected from the group consisting of
(A) a polymer containing the ^S-hydroxyalkylene amine
moiety characterized by having an equivalent weight of
hydroxyalkylene amine of 87 to 10,000; and
(B) 2,5-oxolanylene polymer characterized by including
recurring 2,5-oxylanylene (or oxolene) units of the
formula
C C
\ /
HC — CH
R' R2
wherein at least 60% of the units are joined directly to
one another so as to provide segments containing at
least six units and wherein R', R2, r3 and R* are indi-
vidually hydrogen or alkyl groups containing up to 8
carbon atoms
(2) mixing the resultant mixture with a water soluble poly-
urethane prepolymer having terminal isocyanate groups
capable of being polymerized in the presence of water in
a sufficient quantity to form a self-supporting transport-
able gelled mass.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
419
4,379,764
PHENYLALANYLARGININE DERIVATIVES, PROCESS
FOR PRODUaNG SAME AND METHOD FOR
MEASURING ACTIVITY OF ENZYMES USING SAME
Setsuro Fi^ii, Toyonaka; Mamoru Sugimito, Sakura, and Taka-
shi Yaegashi, Funabashi, all of Japan, assignors to Torii & Co.
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,416
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-128270
Int. C1.3 C07C 103/52
U.S. a. 260—112.5 R 7 Qaims
1. A phenylalanylarginine derivative represented by the
formula,
(I)
NH
R2
CH2
Rl— NH^^^CO— NH
(CH2)3 NH-R3
^"^COORa
wherein Ri is hydrogen or lower alkyl; R3 is selected from
the group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl, C2 to C7
carboxylic acids, hydroxy C2 to C7 alkyl, C2 to C7 carbox-
ylic acid esters and amides and the group COR 1 1 wherein
Rl) is alkoxy, amino or mono-lower alkyl amino; R6 is
nitro or halo and Rj is hydrogen or halo
and the pharmaceutical! y acceptable salts thereof
wherein Ri represents hydrogen or an amino-protecting
group; R2 and R3 represent hydrogen or guanidino-protecting
groups; and R4 represents naphthyl.
4,379,766
SILYL ESTERS OF CARBOXYLIC AODS BY PHASE
TRANSFER CATALYSTS
Mark P. Mack, and Charles T. Berge, both of Ponca City, Okla.,
assignors to Conoco Inc., Ponca City, Okla.
Filed Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,388
Int. a.5 C07F 7/08
U.S. a. 260—413 9 Qaims
1. A method for the production of silyl esters of carboxylic
acids, said ester having the general formula
4,379,765
PYRAZOLOBENZAZEPINES
George F. Field, West Caldwell; Rodney I. Fryer, North Cald-
well; Eugene J. Trybulski, Parsippany, and Armin Walser,
West Caldwell, all of N.J., assignors to Hoffmann-La Roche
Inc., Nutley, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 175,552, Aug. 5, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,122
Int. a.3 A61K 31/55; C07D 487/04
U.S. a. 260—245.6 6 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
O
II
Rl— C— O— SiR2R3R4
comprising reacting a carboxylic acid salt with a silicon halide
in the presence of phase transfer catalysts selected from the
group consisting of quaternary ammonium salts, crown ethers,
and cryptates, wherein Ri, R2, R3 and R4 are, independently,
hydrogen, alkyl groups containing from 1 to 30 carbon atoms,
cycloalkyi groups, aralkyl groups, alkaryl groups, aryl groups,
and bicycloalkyl groups, all containing from 6 to 30 carbon
atoms.
wherein Riis hydrogen or lower alkyl; R2 is selected from
the group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl, C2 to C?
carboxylic acids, hydroxy C2 to C7 alkyl, C2 to C7 carbox-
ylic acid esters and amides and the group CORi 1 wherein
Rll is alkoxy, amino or mono-lower alkyl amino; K(, is
nitro or halo and R5 is hydrogen or halo
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
2. A compound of the formula
4,379,767
MANUFACTURE OF ISOCYANATES
Vazken A. Alexanian, Darien; Peter S. Forgione, Stamford, and
Laurence W. Chang, Orange, all of Conn., assignors to Ameri-
can Cyanamid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,825
Int. Q.3 C07C 118/00, 125/03
U.S. Q. 260—453 P 11 Claims
1. A process for the production of tertiary benzyl isocya-
nates which comprises reacting a vinyl aromatic compound of
the formula:
if'
C-R3
R2
in which:
Rl is an alkylidene group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms,
R2 is an alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and
R3 is a phenyl, biphenyl or naphthyl group or a substituted
phenyl, biphenyl or naphthyl group having substituents
selected from halogen atoms, methyl and methoxy groups
and substituents of the formula:
420
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
H
— c
I
R2
with a carbamoyl halide in a solvent for said aromatic
com|X)und, carbamoyl halide, isocyanic acid and reaction
products thereof to produce the corresponding aromatic
halide and reacting said aromatic halide in said solution
with isocyanic acid in sufficient excess to form the corre-
sponding aromatic isocyanate and carbamoyl halide.
4,379,768
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG PERFLUOROSUCONYL
FLUORIDE
Masaakj Yamabe, Machida; Segi Munekata; Seisaku Kumai,
both of Tokyo, and Isainu Kaneko, Yamato, all of Japan,
assignors to Asahi Glass Company, Ltd., Yamato, Japan
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,363
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 26, 1980, 55- 116401
Int. a.^ C07C 51/58
U.S. a. 260—544 F 4 Qaims
1. A process for producing perfluorosuccinyl fluoride which
comprises coupling accompanied by dehalogenation of a di-
fluorohaloacetyl fluoride having the formula
XCF2COF
wherein X represents I, Br or CI by reacting with a trapping
agent of a halogen at a temperature ranging from 100° to 500°
C.
4,379,769
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ARYLSULFONYL
ISOCYANATES BY PHOSGENATION OF
ARYLSULFONAMIDES
George Levitt, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E, I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 45,244, Jun. 4, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,707
Int. a.3 C07C 143/79
U.S. a. 260—545 R 14 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a 2-substituted aryl-1-sulfonyI
isocyanate where the 2-substituent is an electron-withdrawing
group in which an appropriately substituted arylsulfonamide is
phosgenated in the presence of a catalytic quantity of a hydro-
carbyl isocyanate, wherein the improvement comprises con-
ducting the reaction in the presence of a catalytic quantity of a
tertiary amine base.
4,379,770
CARBURETTORS FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINES
Valerio Bianchi, Neuss; Anwar Abidin, Meerbusch, and Dieter
Thonnessen, Viersen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Bosch A Pierburg System otaG, Neuss, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,736
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 7,
1981, 3113943
Int. a.3 F02M 15/04
U.S. Q. 261—142 18 Qaims
1. A constant pressure carburettor for an internal combus-
tion engine, said carburettor comprising a tubular wall defining
a main air flow path and a mixture chamber, fuel feeder means
at the upstream end of said chamber for supplying fuel in a
substantially uniform circumferential distribution onto said
tubular wall, a main throttle valve downstream of said mixture
chamber, means forming a heating wall in a part at least of said
tubular wall between said fuel feeder means and said main
throttle valve, a choke valve disposed upstream of said fuel
feeder means, a metering element which regulates the rate of
fuel flow from said fuel feeder means, means for opening said
choke valve in dependence upon the magnitude of the air flow
along said main air flow path and means operatively connect-
ing said choke valve and said metering element to actuate said
metering element in dependence upon the opening of said
choke valve, means defining an air flow stabilising conduit
extending between said choke valve and said fuel feeder
means, said stabilising conduit being operatively constructed to
damp out or decrease vortices generated in said air flow by
said choke valve before said air flow reaches said mixing cham-
ber.
4,379,771
METHODS OF AND APPARATUS FOR TERMINATING A
LIGHTGUIDE FIBER RIBBON
Donald Q. Snyder, Marietta, Ga., assignor to Western Electric
Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 153,104
Int. Q.3 B29C 6/00; B29D 11/00: G02B 5/14
U.S. Q. 264—1.5 22 Qaims
1. A method of terminating a plurality of lightguide fibers
which extend from a lightguide fiber ribbon, said method
comprising the steps of:
supporting opposite end portions of a first substrate in a nest
at an assembly station, the substrate having a plurality of
spaced parallel fiber-receiving grooves formed in at least
one side thereof with the grooves oriented upwardly;
spacing apart a plurality of lightguide fibers which extend
from a lightguide ribbon beyond one end of the substrate
with the ribbon extending beyond the opposite end of the
substrate;
moving the ribbon in a direction along its longitudinal axis so
that each of the individual fibers is pulled into and along
one of the fiber-receiving grooves of the substrate;
positioning a second substrate having a plurality of fiber-
receiving grooves in engagement with the fibers with the
grooves of the second substrate facing and being aligned
with the grooves of the first substrate to enclose each of
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
421
the fibers in a passageway formed between opposed
aligned grooves in the first and second substrates;
applying compressive forces to the assembly of the first and
second substrates and the plurality of lightguide fibers at
end portions of the assembly above the supported end
portions of the first substrate and substantially along a
longitudinal centej line of the substrates to hold together
the assembly; I
moving one jaw of a vise into juxtaposition with a lower
surface of the first ^bstrate and another jaw of the vise
into juxtaposition with an upper surface of the second
substrate;
securing together the assembly by causing the jaws to apply
predetermined compressive forces to the assembly bet-
weeen the end portions of the assembly;
discontinuing the application of the compressive forces to
the end portions of the assembly;
' disengaging the nest from supportive engagement of the
assembly; and
causing an encapsulating material to fill interstices between
the fibers and the substrates to hold together the assembly
of the fibers and the substrates.
8. An apparatus for terminating a plurality of lightguide
fibers which extend from a lightguide ribbon, said apparatus
comprising:
a nest for supporting a first substrate at opposite end portions
of the substrate, the substrate having a plurality of spaced
parallel grooves with the grooves being oriented up-
wardly;
means disposed adjacent one end of said nest and aligned
with said nest for receiving a longitudinal end portion of a
lightguide ribbon with the individual lightguide fibers
extending therefrom and past the other end of said nest;
means disposed adjacent the other end of said nest for separt-
ing the lightguide fibers by spacing apart said individual
lightguide fibers to facilitate the receipt of the fibers ex-
tending past said nest in the grooves formed in the first
substrate and in aligned grooves of a second substrate, the
first substrate having been positioned in said nest prior to
said fibers being extended through said nest, and the sec-
ond substrate being positioned in engagement with the
fibers to enclose each of the fibers in a passageway formed
between opposed aligned grooves;
means for applying compressive forces to the assembly of
said substrates and said lightguide fibers at opposite ends
of the assembly and along a longitudinal centerline thereof
above the supported end portions of the first substrate to
hold the assembly securely in said nest;
a vise which includes a lower jaw for engaging a lower
surface of the first substrate and an upper jaw for engaging
an upper surface of the second substrate, said vise includ-
ing means for causing relative motion between said jaws
to controUably apply compressive forces to the assembly;
and
means mounting said vise for movement along a path of
travel transverse of the fibers to facilitate said lower jaw
being moved beneath the first substrate between the sup-
ported end portions of the first substrate and said upper
jaw being moved above the second substrate.
discontinuously coated particles by shear blending at between
about 1 5' C. and 75* C. to form an intimate mix of carbon
particles having attenuated adherent polytetrafiuoroethylene
particles; chopping said intimate mix to yield a granular mix to
reduce any compression of the intimate mix during shear
blending and nonsinteringly forming said granular mix into a
sheet.
4^79,773
PROCESS FOR WET SPINNING NYLON 4
Mitchell Danzik, Pinole, Calif., and J. Ronald Carpenter, Mill-
ersTille, Md., assignors to Cbevron Research Company, San
Francisco, Calif.
Filed Jun. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 156,457
Int. CI.' DOIF 6/00
U.S. a. 264—184 18 Oainu
1. A wet spinning process, for wet spinning nylon 4 fila-
ments, which comprises the steps of:
(a) extrusion wet spinning a spinnable solution of nylon 4
dissolved in a solvent containing about from 60 to 100 wt
% formic acid and about from 40 to 0 wt ^c water into an
acidic aqueous coagulation bath containing a nylon 4
coagulation effective amount of alkali metal formate se-
lected from the group consisting of sodium formate, potas-
sium formate, lithium formate and mixtures thereof, and
about from 6 to 30 wt. ^. formic acid, fora sufficient time
to coagulate said spun nylon 4 solution into filaments and
wherein said coagulation bath is maintained at tempera-
tures in the range of about from 35° C up to the boiling
poini of said coagulation bath; and
(b) collecting said filaments.
4^79,772
METHOD FOR FORMING AN ELECTRODE ACHVE
LAYER OR SHEET
Frank Solomon, Great Neck, N.Y., and Charles Grun, Matawan,
N.J., assignors to Diamond Shamrock Corporation, Dallas,
Tex.
FUed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,576
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00; C25B 14/04. 11/12
U.S. a. 264—49 10 Claims
1. A process for forming active layer or sheet comprising
adding a dilute aqueous dispersion of polytetrafiuoroethylene
particles to an aqueous suspension of larger active carbon
particles to discontinuously coat said active carbon particles
with smaller polytetrafiuoroethylene particles; fibrillating said
4,379,774
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF BIAXIALLY
STRETCHED AND EMBOSSED nLM COMPOSED OF
VINYL CHLORIDE POLYMERS
Heinz-Erhardt Andersen, Burgkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany;
Jaek J. Brebels, Bocholt, Belgium; Klaus Matschke, and
Franz Scheier, both of Burgkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,775
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 26,
1980, 3036289
Int. a.3 B29C 77/02
U.S. a. 264—284 5 Claims
1. A process for the production of biaxially stretched and
embossed polyvinyl chloride film which comprises
(a) biaxially stretching a polyvinyl chloride film at a stretch-
ing temperature of 90* to 160* C. at a transverse stretching
ratio of 1.2:1 to 2.2:1 and a longitudinal stretching ratio of
1.7:1 to 2.5:1, the product of the transverse and longitudi-
nal stretching ratios not exceeding 3.8:1, and
422
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
(b) immediately after stretching, before the polyvinyl chlo-
ride film stretched according to step (a) has cooled appre-
ciably from the stretching temperature range of 90° to
160° C. utilized in step (a), embossing the film by means of
an embossing unit comprising an embossing roller back-up
cylinder, the temperature of the film as it comes on to the
embossing roller being substantially within said stretching
temperature range and the embossing roller having a
temperature of - 10° to -1-60° C. and the embossing pat-
tern of the embossing roller being embossed into the film
to a depth of embossing of 0.02 to 0.25 mm.
4,379,775
APPARATUS FOR THERMOCHEMICAL
QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS
Jiri Brandstetr; Josef Huleja, both of Brno, and Josef Kupec,
Kurim, all of Czechoslovakia, assignors to Vysoke udeni tech-
nicke, Brno, Czechoslovakia
Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,274
Int. a.3 GOIK 77/00, GOIN 25/20
U.S. a. 422—51 4 aaims
1. An apparatus for thermochemical quantitative analysis,
comprising a heat-insulated receptacle with a thermostatically
controlled liquid bath, a removable part and a hinged part, the
receptacle containing a Dewar vessel in which there is an
exchangable reaction vessel, the receptacle further containing
at least one stock bottle and at least one volumetric fiask which
are disposed below the hinged part of the lid and contain a
solution to be analyzed and a reagent solution, respectively, the
removable part of the lid which has the air-filled insulating
space being retained by gravity above said reaction vessel and
being provided with apertures for at least one liquid reagent
dose feeder and a dose feeder for a solid sample.
4,379,776
PROCESS FOR REDUCTNG ALUMINUM AND
FLUORINE IN PHOSPHORIC ACIDS
Gary L. Beer, Huntington Beach, and Elie Chemtob, Claremont,
both of Calif., assignors to Occidental Research Corporation,
Irvine, Calif.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,465
Int. a.^ COIB 25/16
U.S. a. 423—321 R 5 Qaims
1. A process for removing aluminum and fluorine from
impure aqueous wet process phosphoric acid analyzing, in
weight percent, no more than about 45% P2O5, in the range of
about 2 to about 4% AI2O3 and about 1 to about 2% F, said
process comprising:
(a) aging said impure aqueous phosphoric acid at an elevated
temperature of between 60°-80° C. for sufTicient time to
permit the formation of solid precipitate comprising an
aluminum fluorophosphate of AIFHPO4.2H2O; and,
(b) separating said solid precipitate from the aged phos-
phoric acid.
4,379,777
PURinCATION OF METALLURGICAL GRADE
SILICON
Maher I. Boulos, Sherbrooke, Canada, assignor to Universite de
Sherbrooke, Quebec, Canada
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,726
Qaims priority, application Canada, Oct. 15, 1980, 362410
Int. a.3 COIB 33/02
U.S. a. 423—348 5 Qaims
1. Process for preparing ultra pure silicon which comprises:
(a) continuously passing powdered and acid-leached metal-
lurgical grade silicon through an induction plasma to melt
the silicon;
(b) quenching said molten silicon particles whereby upon
solidification of the molten particles, a portion of the
impurities therein migrates to the surface of the granules
obtained;
(c) acid-leaching the surface impurities of the granules ob-
tained in step (b); and
(d) after drying the granules obtained, repeating steps (a),
(b), and (c) until a silicon of the desired purity is obtained.
4,379,778
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE SYNTHESIS
Augustine I. Dalton, Jr., and Ronald W. Skinner, both of Allen-
town, Pa., assignors to Air Products and Chemicals, Inc.,
Allentown, Pa.
Filed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 195,829
Int. a.3 COIB 15/02
U.S. a. 423-584 15 Qaims
[h2 02]
O '5% MOAc
C ^5% M«OH
a n% f BuOM
& 75% DMF
• 'S% DM50
I 3% ElOAc
O 5% D««
■ nx oMK
+ 50% HCNO
• 25% C2N40
1. In a process for producing hydrogen peroxide by contact-
ing a mixture of hydrogen and oxygen with a previously-
reduced palladium catalyst supported on a carbon base in the
presence of an aqueous liquid, containing an acid and a non-
acidic oxygen-containing organic compound, capable of inhib-
iting the decomposition of the thus-produced hydrogen perox-
ide, the improvement comprising pretreating the catalyst with
a ketone or aldehyde before contacting the thus-pretreated
catalyst with hydrogen and oxygen in the aqueous medium.
10. In a process for producing hydrogen peroxide with a
mixture of gases comprising hydrogen and oxygen with a
palladium catalyst supported on a carbon base in the presence
of an aqueous liquid, containing an acid and a non-acidic oxy-
gen-containing organic compound, capable of inhibiting the
decom]K>sition of thus-produced hydrogen peroxide, the im-
provement wherein the carbon base is non-graphitic and has a
surface area greater than 400 m^/g and wherein the palladium
catalyst is prepared by impregnating the carbon base with a
soluble palladium compound, drying the thus-impregnated
carbon base and reducing the palladium compound with which
the carbon base is impregnated to palladium with hydrogen at
40°- 140° C.
14. In a process for producing hydrogen peroxide by con-
tacting a mixture of gases comprising hydrogen and oxygen
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
423
with a previously-reduced palladium catalyst supported on a
carbon base in the presence of an aqueous liquid, containing an
acid and a non-acidic oxygen-containing organic compound,
capable of inhibiting the decomposition of the thus-produced
hydrogen peroxide, the improvement comprising pretreating
the catalyst with a dilute solution of HCl before contacting the
thus-pretreated catalyst with hydrogen and oxygen in the
aqueous medium.
4,379,779
EQUILIN HAPTEN AND ASSAY METHOD
Pemmaraju N. Rao; Robert H. Purdy, and Perry H. Moore, Jr.,
all of San Antonio, Tex., assignors to American Home Prod-
ucts Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,805
Int. CV GOIN 33/54. 33/56: C07G 7/00; C07J 13/00
U.S. CI. 436—543 10 Claims
4,379,781
ANTIBIOTIC COMPOSITIONS
Robert N. Hull, Greenwood, and Robert S. Gordee, Indianap-
olis, both of Ind., assignors to Eli Lilly and Company, Indian-
apolis, Ind.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 107,239, Dec. 26, 1979.
abandoned. This application Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,809
Int. a.5 A61K 35/00
U.S. CI. 424—1 14 3 Qaims
1. The synergistic antibiotic composition useful for mhibit-
ing the growth of resistant mycoplasma in mammalian tissue
cultures comprising the macrolide antibiotic tylosin or a phar-
maceutically acceptable salt thereof and the aminoglycoside
antibiotic tobramycin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt
thereof in a weight ratio of tylosin to tobramycin or the phar-
maceutically acceptable salts thereof of about 12:1 to about
0.5:12.
1. A compound of the formula
HO— OC— A— O
wherein A is an alkylene group of one to six carbon atoms.
4,379,782
LOW-CALORIE FOODS
Herbert W. Staub, Hightstown, N.J.; Larry M. Schanbacher,
Yorktown Heights, N.Y.; Jack D. Zencheck, Croton-on-Hud-
son, N.Y., and Cynthia L. Young, Irvington, N.Y., assignors to
General Foods Corporation, White Plains, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 135,597, Mar. 31, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,304,768. This application Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,536
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 8, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. CV A61K 31/70 31/725
U.S. a. 424—180 7 Qaims
1. A low-calorie foodstuff containing edible polysaccha-
rides, polyols or combinations thereof in excess of 10% by
weight of the foodstuff, dry basis, and an amount of a cellulose-
containing dietary fiber composition effective to reduce diar-
rhea induced by said polysaccharide, polyol. or combinations
thereof, said amount being from i to 2 times the combined
level of polysaccharides and polyols and said fiber composition
being derived from the group consisting of pineapple core,
sugar beet pulp and combinations thereof.
4,379,780
17 a-DIHYDROEQUILIN HAPTEN AND ASSAY
METHOD
Pemmaraju N. Rao, San Antonio, Tex., assignor to American
Home Products Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,807
Int. CV GOl^ 33/54. 33/56; C07G 7/00; C07J 13/00
U.S. a. 436—543 10 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
OH
4,379,783
TRIALKYLSILICON-CONTAINING
PHENYLCYCLOALKANE ANALGESICS
Lawrence S. Melvin, Jr., Ledyard, and Michael R. Johnson,
Gales Ferry, both of Conn., assignors to Pfizer Inc., New
York, N.Y.
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,591
Int. a.^ A61K 31/695: C07F 7/08
U.S. a. 424—184 11 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula
HO— OC— A— O
wherein A is an alkylene group of one to six carbon atoms.
3. An immunogen comprising the compound of claim 1
conjugated to an immunological carrier.
6. The antibody produced by injecting the immunogen of
claim 3 into a host animal.
8. In a radioimmunossay procedure of l,3,5(10),7-estratetr-
aene-3,17a-diol in a sample employing radiolabeled 1,3,5(10),7-
estratetraene-3,17a-diol and an antibody for binding
l,3,5(10),7-estratetraene-3,17a-diol and radiolabeled
l,3,5(10),7-estratetraene-3,17a-diol, the improvement which
comprises employing the antibody of claim 6 or claim 7 in said
radioimmunoassay procedure.
r
O— R
(CH2)„
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
G is hydroxymethylene or carbonyl;
R is hydrogen or alkanoyl having from one to seven carbon
atoms;
Ri and R2 are methyl or ethyl;
Rj is an alkyl of from five to seven carbon atoms;
m is 0 or 1; and
n is 1, 2 or 3.
10. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceu-
tically acceptable carrier or diluent and an analgesic, tranquil-
izer, sedative, antianxiety, anticonvulsant, antidiarrheal or
1029O.G.— 17
424
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
V
April 12, 1983
antiemetic effective amount of a compound of claim 1 or claim
2.
4 379 784
PYRIMIDINYL UREIDO PENIOLLINS
Roland Maier; Bernd Wetzel; Eberhard Woitun, all of Biberach;
Wolfgang Reuter, Laupertshausen; Uwe Lechner, Ummen-
dorf. and Hanns Goeth, Biberach, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Dr. Karl Tbomae Gesellschaft mit bes-
chrankter Haftung, Biberach an der Riss, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,383
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 5,
IMO, 3045908; Dec. 12, 1980, 3046839
Int. a.J A61K 31/505. 31/635: C07D 499/70
L.S. a. 424-229 g Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
Rl and Ri are each methylmercapto or amino;
Z' is oxygen, sulfur or =NR3;
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms or hydroxy-(al-
kyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms);
R4 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, hydroxymethyl or methyl;
n is 2, 3 or 4;
Y is -SO2NH-. —SO— or -SO2— ;
Z is straight or branched alkylene of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
X is hydroxyl, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, formylamino,
acetylamino, amino, methylsulfinyl, methylsulfonyl or
/
NH2
-CH ; or
\
COOH
or
Y-Z— X i
IS
A— CH— CONH-
l
NH
I
CO
I
NH
O'
OH
'- ^ — K.
CHj
CH3
COOH
— SO2— N(CH2— CH2— OH)2,
-SO2-NH-/ \-OH,
N N
T
R
A— CH— CONH-
■SO2-N N-CHO, -SO2-N N-COCH3,
/ — \
/ — \
or
— SO2— N
O, — SO2— N
SO,
NH
I
CO
I
NH
O'
')— N \„.
CH3
CH3
COOH
N
T
R
f
NH
O
wherein
A is phenyl, 4-hydroxy-phenyI, 2-thienyl or
3,4-dihydroxy-phenyl; and
R is
-SO2-N SO2, -SO2NH-CH2— CH-CH2— OH or
\ f OH
— SO— CH2— CH— CH2— OH;
OH
or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof
formed with an inorganic or organic base.
7. An antibacterial pharmaceutical composition consisting
essentially of an inert pharmaceutical carrier and an effective
antibiotic amount of a compound of claim 1.
-NH— ^ ^S02-N=C
Rl
\
-NH— ^ V-S02-N=C (C
(CH2)„ or
N-
R3
4^79,785
HETEROCYCLIC SUBSTITUTED SULFONYL UREAS,
AND THEIR USE
Rudi Weyer, Keikheim; Volker Hitzel, Hofheim am Taunus;
Karl Geisen, Frankfurt am Main, and Giinter Regitz, Bad
Soden am Taunus, ail of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Hoechst Aktiengeseiischaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,524
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19,
1979, 2951135
Int. Q\? A61K 31/40, 31/44; CD7D 207/38. 209/46
U.S. a. 424—244 6 Claims
1. A sulfonyl urea of the formula
_.„_y~\_v_
.r\
z— X.
where
X^N-CO-NH-Y— /oy-S02NH-CO-NH-R'
II ^ — '
or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof, wherein
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
425
X is alkylene or alkenylene having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms,
optionally substituted by up to 3 alkyl groups each having
from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or by phenyl;
or the group
.r\
.N—
is a bicyclic system of the formula
4^79,787
OXIMINO-SUBSnrUTED CEPHALOSPORIN
COMPOUNDS
William H. W. Lunn, and WiUiam J. Wheeler, both of Indianap-
olis, Ind., assignors to Eli Lilly and Company, Indianapolis,
Ind.
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,985
Int. a.5 C07D 501/40; A61K 3 J/545
U.S. a. 424—246 23 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
N— or
N— ;
and
Y is alkylene having 2 or 3 carbon atoms-
R' is alkyl having from 4 to 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl,
alkylcycloalkyl, dialkylcycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cy-
cloalkenyl, or alkylcycloalkenyl in each case having 4 to 9
carbon atoms, or is methylcyclopentylmethyl, cyclohex-
enylmethyl, chlorocyclohexyl, methoxycyclohexyl, bicy-
cloheptyl, bi-^ycloheptenyl, bicycloheptylmethyl, bicy-
cloheptenylmethyl, bicyclooctyl, nortricyclyl, adamantyl,
or benzyl.
5. A pharmaceutical composition for lowering the blood
sugar level, which comprises a hypoglycemically effective
amount of a sulfonyl urea or salt thereof as in claim 1 in combi-
nation with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier therefor.
■ler the
4,379,786
N-ARYL-N-(4,5,6,7-TETRAHYDRO-lH-l,3,
DIAZEPIN-2-YL)UREAS AS ANTIHYPERTENSIVES
Chris R. Rasmussen, Ambler, Pa., assignor to McNeilab, Inc.,
Fort Washington, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 159,987, Jun. 16, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,270
Int. a.3 A61K 31/55
U.S. a. 424—244 6 Qaims
1. A method of reducing arterial pressure in a hypertensive
animal which comprises administering to said hypertensive
animal, a therapeutically-effective antihypertensive amount of
a compound selected from the group consisting of
(a) an N-aryl-N'-(4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-lH-l,3,-diazepin-2-
yl)urea having the formula:
O
NH— C-NH
CH2®— Ri
COO©
wherein R is an amino-substituted heterocyclic of the formula
H2N " H2N
o
\
N
JL
H2N
Y
\
or
N
N
JL
R' is hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, a carboxy-substituted alkyl or a
carboxy-substituted cycloalkyl group of the formula
— C— (CH2)„— COR"
b
wherein a and b when taken separately are independently
hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl, and a and b when taken together
with the carbon atom to which they are bonded form a C3-C7
carbocyclic ring; n is 0-3; and R" is hydroxy, C1-C4 alkoxy,
amino OR°, wherein R° is a carboxy-protecting group, R' is a
carbamoyl group of the formula
O
II
— C— NHR
wherein R " is C1-C3 alkyl, phenyl, or C1-C3 alkyl substituted
by phenyl; ®Ri is an oximino-substituted pyridinium, quinolin-
ium, or isoquinolinium group represented by the formulas
wherein X is Br, CI, F, CH3, CF3 or OCH3; Y is H, Br, CI.
F, CH3, CF3 or OCH3; and Z is H or F; and
(b) a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof.
N— OR2
II
-C— R3
426
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
-continued
ing to said animal an effective hypotensive or antiarrhythmic
amount of a compound of claim 1.
N— O— R2
II
-C— R3
wherein R2 and R3 independently are hydrogen or C1-C3
alkyl; and the pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic salts
thereof
4,379,788
2-PHENYL-PYRIMIDONES
Joachim Heider, Warthausen; Volkhard Austel, Biberach; Wolf-
gang Eberlein, Biberach; Rudolf Kadatz, Biberach, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, and Christian Lillie, Vienna, Austria, as-
signors to Dr. Karl Thomae Gesellschaft mit beschrankter
Haftung, Biberach an der Riss, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,348
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 12,
1980. 3046871; Apr. 16, 1981, 3115447
Int. a.' A61K 31/505; C07D 239/91
U.S. a. 424-251 9 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
4,379,789
ANALGESIC COMPOSITION
Robert J. Capetola, Doylestown, Pa., and John L. McGuire,
Whitehouse Station, N.J., assignors to Ortho Pharmaceutical
Corporation, Raritan, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser, No. 104,495, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat. No.
4,315,936. This application May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 265,297
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 16,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61K 31/485
U.S. a. 424-260 6 Qaims
1. A method of controlling pain in mammals which com-
prises administering to a mammal an effective amount of a
composition comprising from about 10 to 600 mg of a-methyl-
4-[2-thienylcarbonyl)benzene acetic acid and from about 1 to
80 mg of a centrally-acting analgesic selected from codeine,
and butorphanol.
Ri^ ^A
R: "-B
O— D— N'
.R5
Rb
4 379 790
(EROLINYL)-N,N-DIETHYLUREA DERIVATIVES, AND
THEIR PREPARATION AND USE
Reinhard Horowski; Wolfgang Kehr; Gerhard Sauer; Ulrich
Eder, and Hans P. Lorenz, all of Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Schering Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 159,280, Jun. 13, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,355
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 13,
1979, 2924102; Apr. 28, 1980, 3016691
Int. a.3 A61K 31/475: C07D 457/12
U.S. a. 424-261 39 Qaims
1. An ergolinyl-N'.N'-diethyiurea of the formula
NH— Ca— N(C2H5)2
wherein
A and B, together with each other and the respective carbon
atoms to which they are attached, form a phenyl or pyri-
dine ring;
Rl is hydrogen, halogen, amino, nitro, alkyl or 1 to 3 carbon
atoms or alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R2 is hydrogen or alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
D is alkylene of 3 to 4 carbon atoms or hydroxy(alkylene of
3 to 4 carbon atoms);
R3 and R5, which may be identical to or different from each
other, are each hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R4 is hydrogen or alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms; and
R6 is straight or branched alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or
— E— R7;
where E is straight alkylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms or hy-
droxy-substituted straight alkylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
and
R7is
N— R,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
wherein
Rl is alkyl of 2-6 carbon atoms, alkyl of 2-6 carbon atoms
substituted by
COOR2or -CN. -(CH2)„-CH=CH2, -(CH2)„-C=CH.
(CH2)„
R8
-(J.-<1
where Rg and R9 are each hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon
atoms or alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms,
or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt
thereof
9. The method of lowering the blood pressure or alleviating
cardiac arrhythmia in a warm-blooded animal in need thereof,
which comprises perorally, parenterally or rectally administer-
-CH2-CCX)R2, -CH2-CN or -(CH2)m-CH
n is 1, or 2,
m is 0 or 1 ,
R2 is alkyl of 1-6 carbon atoms.
\
CH2
M
10
is a CC single bond or a CC double bond, and the 8-posi-
tioned urea residue can be in the a- or yS-position.
38. A method of treating Parkinsonism in a patient which
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
comprises administering to the patient an amount of a com-
pound of claim 1 effective to treat Parkinsonism.
39. A method of inhibiting lactation in a female patient
which comprises administering to the patient an amount of a
compound of claim 1 effective to inhibit lactation.
4,379,791
4-(SUBSTITUTED
THIAZOLYL)-3-HYDROXY-3-PYRROLINE-2,5-DIONE
INHIBITORS OF GLYCOLIC ACID OXIDASE
Edward J. Cragoe, Jr., Lansdale; Qarence S. Rooney,
Worcester, both of Pa., and Haydn W. R. Williams, Ormeaux,
Canada, assignors to Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 74,465, Sep. 11, 1979, Pat. No. 4,298,743.
This application Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,159
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 3, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07D 417/04; A61K 31/425
U.S. a. 424—270 2 Qaims
1. A pharmaceutical composition for treating persons af-
flicted with calcium oxalate renal lithiasis or preventing the
formation of calcium oxalate kidney or bladder stones compris-
ing a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective
amount of a compound of the formula:
(CH2),
S — y OH
N J N
O'
H
wherein
n is 0 to 2;
m is 0 to 3;
Ri, R2and R3are indeptendently hydrogen, halogen, lower-
alkyl containing 1 to 6 carbons, trifluoromethyl, and low-
eralkoxy containing 1 to 6 carbons or pharmaceutically
acceptable salts thereof, with the proviso that the substitu-
ents on the thiazolyl ring are not adjacent.
4,379,792
ANTI-INFLAMMATORY COMPOSITION
Edward H. Blaine, Chalfont, Pa., assignor to Merck & Co., Inc.,
Rahway, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 316,625, Oct. 30, 1980,
abandoned. This application Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,434
Int. a.3 A61K 31/40. 31/425
U.S. a. 424— 270 6 Qaims
1. A pharmaceutical composition useful for treating inflam-
mation containing (i) a renal vasodilator compound of the
formula
R'
(0);„
^ v^^(CH2)„-A-R
r3
\ /
If z-c
r2— O R*
f^N,
wherein
R is carboxy, a carboxy salt, a carboxy ester of the formula
COOR5 wherein R' is Cmo alkyl,, or CONHR^ wherein
R6 is amino or methylsulfonyl;
A is a p-phenylene or a m-phenylene or substituted pheny-
lene derivative in which one or two of the phenylene
hydrogens is replaced by a methyl or a halo substituent;
n is 3 or 4;
427
m is 0, 1, or 2;
R' is hydrogen, deuterium, or methyl;
Z is alkylene or unsaturated alkylene having from 2-3 car-
bon atoms;
R2 is hydrogen or lower alkanoyl;
R^ is hydrogen or straight chain C1.3 alkyl; and
R^ is lower straight chain or branched alkyl having from 3-7
carbon atoms, an unsaturated alkyl having from 3-7 car-
bon atoms, or a substituted lower alkyl selected from
polyfluoro alkyl of from 3-7 carbon atoms and lower
alkoxy methylene; or
R^ and R^ taken together with the carbon atom connectmg
R^ and R^ is a cyclic substituent selected from a bridged or
unbridged alicyclic ring of from 5-9 carbon atoms or a
heterocyclic ring containing sulfur or oxygen and from
5-7 ring-forming carbon atoms, and (ii) inclomethacin
wherein the weight ratio i:ii ranges from 1.7:1 to 1:26.
4,379,793
PROCESS FOR SYNTHESIS OF ESTERS OF
N-{4-HYDROXYPHENYL)ACET AMIDE WITH
DFRIVATIVES OF 5-BENZOIL-l-METHYL
PYRROLE-2-ACETIC ACIDS
Jose-Mar^^J[:al,£ada Badia; Antonio Boleda Vila; Jose Sabater
Sanmartin, and Maria J. Villazon Meneses, all of Barcelona,
Spain, assignors to Calzada y Cia, S.R.C., Barcelona, Spain
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,341
Claims priority, application Spain, Nov. 11, 1980, 497.136
Int. a.' A61K 31/40; C07D 207/09
U.S, a. 424—274 3 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
R-Q_Co4^ JLcH2-COO^Q-
NHCOCH3
N
I
CH3
wherein R is a C1-C4 alkyl group or a halogen atom and the
pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof
4,379,794
PROCESS FOR PREPARING COOKED BACON HAVING
REDUCED LEVELS OF N-NITROSAMINES
Richard F. Theller, Scottsdale, Ariz., assignor to Armour and
Company, Phoenix, Ariz.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 196,816, Oct. 14, 1980, Pat. No.
4,315,015. This application Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,040
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 9, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.' A23B 4/02
U.S. Q. 426—266 10 Claims
1. A process for preparing cured bacon which, when cooked
for consumption, contains substantially reduced levels of N-
nitrosamines, said process comprising the steps of nitrite-cur-
ing, heat processing and slicing bacon bellies and then applymg
to the resulting slices, before cooking, (a) a liquid smoke in
concentration to provide 5 to 400 ppm phenols and 10 to 2000
ppm carbonyl compounds based upon the weight of the sliced
bacon, and (b) from 1 50 to 10,000 ppm of reducing sugar, based
upon the weight of the sliced bacon.
428
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4 379 796
METHOD OF CONCENTRATING FRESH FRUITS
David R. Gross, Orrville, Ohio, assignor to The J. M. Smucker
Company, Orrville, Ohio
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,203
Int. a.' A23N 1/00: A23L 1/212
U.S. a. 426-486 g Qaims
4,379,795
METHOD FOR COATING A FOOD PRODUCT ON A
STICK
Glenn E. Walser, Lubbock, Tex., assignor to Automated Food
Systems, Inc., Lubbock, Tex.
Filed Apr. 3, 1978, Ser. No. 893,011
Int. a.3 A23L 1/00: A47J 37/12: A23G 3/24
U.S. a. 426-304 21 Qaims
1. In the method of preparing and cooking coated food
articles impaled upon a stick which includes the steps of:
dipping the food articles in batter, in order to coat said food
articles, thereafter immersing said coated food articles
within hot grease in a fry tank in order to fry said coating
and said food articles, thereafter removing the food arti-
cles from the fry tank;
the improvement comprising the steps of:
clasping a plurality of the sticks on which the food articles
are impaled with clamps, thereby suspending a plurality of
food articles impaled upon sticks from clamp means, then
performing said dipping step, thereafter revolving said
clamp means about its axis in order to
(i) remove the food articles from the location of said
coating substance,
(ii) distribute the coating on said food articles, and
(iii) place said food articles within the fry tank in order to
perform said immersing step, then again revolving said
clamp means about its axis in order to
(i) perform said removal of said food articles from a fry
tank, and
(ii) place said sticks and said food articles in a position
wherein said food articles and sticks are conveniently
disposed for unclasping, and finally
unclasping said sticks from said clamp means.
in the cells of the fruit to continuously migrate to and coat
the surfaces of the fruit and the inner walls of the cylinder
as the cylinder rotates and sufficiently above zero pressure
that the differential pressures between the inside and out-
side of the cells are insufficient to rupture the cell walls:
(a) the temperature of the cylinder walls being above the
boiling temperature of water at said vacuum pressure
whereby as the cylinder rotates, the water in the liquid
coating on the walls of the cylinder rapidly evaporates;
(b) the rate of rotation being low enough that the fruit is
not appreciably tumbled but slides in contact with the
walls of the cylinder but fast enough in relation to the
temperature of the cylinder walls that at least a major
portion of the walls of the cylinder are continuously
wetted by the liquid coating; and,
(C) continuing the last step until the desired amount of water
has been removed from the fruit.
4,379,797
AUTOMATICALLY EXPANDING POP-UP
DECORATION
Bernard M. Cole, 7 Park Dr. East, Old Westbury, N.Y. 11568
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 285,033, Jul. 20, 1981, Pat. No.
4,374,877. This application Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,207
Int. a.' G09F 1/00
U.S.a.428-9 10 Qaims
1. A method of concentrating fresh fruit comprising the
^teps of:
(A) subjecting a mass of fruit to a vacuum pressure suffi-
ciently below atmospheric to cause air and liquid in the
cells of the fruit to pass through the walls of the cells with
the rate of change from atmospheric to the vacuum pres-
sure being sufficiently low that the differential pressures
between the inside and outside of the cells are insufficient
to create forces to rupture the cell walls while maintaining
the temperature of the fruit below the boiling point of
water at the vacuum pressure maintained until a major
portion of the free air in the cells or dissolved in the cell
liquid has evolved through the walls of the cells as indi-
cated by a substantial reduction in foaming of the evolving
liquids due to the evolution of the air;
(B) then moving said deaerated fruit longitudinally through
a smooth-surfaced, routing, heated cylinder at a vacuum
pressure sufficiently below atmospheric as to cause liquid
1. An automatically expanding pop-up decoration for use in
gift-wrapping a package comprising:
(A) an ornament having a pair of opposed end members and
an expansible structure pivotally joining said end members
together, said end members beirtg capable of pivoting
between a substantially face-to-face relationship and a
substantially edge-to-edge relationship, said ornament
being substantially flat when said end members are in a
substantially face-to-face relationship and having a sub-
stantially upstanding portion when said end members are
in a substantially edge-to-edge relationship; and,
(B) an elasticized cord in the form of a continuous loop
operatively engaging said ornament end members so that
application of said cord about a package so as to tension
said cord automatically causes said ornament end mem-
bers to pivot into the substantially edge-to-edge relation-
ship.
4 379 798
INTEGRAL WOVEN REINFORCEMENT FOR
STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
Raymond J. Palmer, Newport Beach, Calif., and Dominique
Micheaux, Viliette d'Anthon, France, assignors to McDonnell
Douglas Corporation, Long Beach, Calif, and Brochier it. Fils,
Villeurbanne, France
FUed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,095
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 12, 1981, 81 00498
Int C\? B32B 7/00
U.S. a. 428—113 21 Claims
1. In a three-dimensional multilayer woven reinforcement
member for structural components having a thicker area and a
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
429
divided thinner area, in which the fibers are distributed in the
fabric in three different directions generally perpendicular to
each other and in which the layers of warp and fill fibers in two
directions form a layered assembly, the fibers of, which layers
do not cross the plane of adjacent layers, the upper layer and
the lower layer of the assembly being composed of fill fibers, at
least one tie yam passing in a third direction through the above
noted assembly of layers of warp and fill fibers, the tie yarns
4,379,800
CLEANING TAPE FOR MAGNETIC RECORDING
APPARATUS
Nobuhiro Sato, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to TDK Electronics Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 274,740, Jun. 18, 1981,
abandoned. This application May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,098
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 20, 1980, 55-83660
Int. a.5 B05D 5/12; D06N 7/04
U.S. a. 428—148 5 Claims
3P^-
» 30
passing back and forth over the fill fibers of the outside layers
so as to form therewith a fabric containing inner layers of warp
and fill fibers; the improvement comprising providing one area
of the assembly in which the layers of warp and fill fibers are
tied together throughout their entire thickness, and other areas
in which the above noted layers are separated into two individ-
ual groups, each group being tied in the manner set forth above
by said tie yarns.
I ? 3 < 5
1. A cleaning tape for a magnetic recording apparatus which
comprises a substrate coated with a cleaning layer comprising
magnetic iron oxide powder as a main component and non-
magnetic abrasive powder having Moh's scale of hardness of at
least 6 and a binder wherein said cleaning layer has a surface
roughness of 0.5 to 5 /xm and a ratio of said non-magnetic
abrasive powder to said magnetic iron oxide powder of 0.3 to
40 wt.% and especially 3 to 40 wt.% in the case of said surface
roughness of 0.5 to 1 fim; 0.5 to 20 wt.% in the case of said
surface roughness of 1 to 2 ^m; 0.3 to 10 wt.% in the case of
said surface roughness of 2 to 5 fim.
4,379,799
NONWOVEN FABRIC HAVING THE APPEARANCE OF
APERTURED, RIBBED TERRY CLOTH
Rory A. Holmes, Kendall Park, and Donald V. Skistimas, Mill-
town, both of N.J., assignors to Chicopee, New Brunswick,
N.J.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,401
Int. a.3 D04H 3/08; D06C 1/06
U.S. a. 428—131 3 Qaims
"¥"
1. A non woven fabric composed of staple fibers, and having
the appearance of apertured, ribbed terry cloth, said fabric
being characterized by a repeating pattern of spaced, parallel,
raised ribs of entangled staple fibers, which ribs extend in one
fabric direction, with the ribs being interconnected by spaced
bundles of straight unentangled, substantially parallel sUple
fiber segments, wherein said bundles are substantially parallel
to one another and substantially perpendicular to said ribs,
wherein adjacent bundles and the ribs which they interconnect
define apertures, and wherein said ribs are substantially wholly
entangled throughout and appear uniform and substantially
nonpattemed.
4,379,801
STAMPABLE REINFORCED THERMOPLASTIC
POLYESTER SHEETS
James C. Weaver, and Robert W. Seymour, both of Kingsport,
Tenn., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester,
N.Y.
Filed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,318
Int. C1.^B32B 75/00, 77/00
U.S. a. 428—220 12 Qaims
1. A stampable sheet of reinforced thermoplastic material
having on at least one surface of the sheet a smooth surface
suitable for use as exterior automotive panels and the like, said
sheet comprising:
a plurality of layers of polymeric material and a plurality of
layers of fibrous reinforcing material alternating with said
layers of polymeric material, all of said layers being inte-
grally formed together and the outer layers of said sheet
being of a crystallizable material selected from poly(cthy-
lene terephthalate), copolymers of poly(ethylene tere-
phthalate) and blends thereof, poly(l,4-cyclohex-
anedimethylene terephthalate), copolymers of poly(l,4-
cyclohexanedimethylene terephthalate) and blends
thereof having a minimum crystallization half-time upon
heating of one minute or less, the minimum crystallization
half-time being that as measured with respect to each
individual layer of said outer layers;
a layer of surfacing mat of fine stranded glass of continuous
filaments randomly patterned, having a weight of about
0. 1 to about 0.4 oz./sq. ft., and positioned contiguously
with respect to one of said outer layers of said sheet; and
a layer of polymeric material positioned contiguously with
the side of said surfacing layer opposite from said one of
said outer layers of said sheet; having a shrinkage of less
than about 2%, as determined in accordance with ASTM
Method D-955, and a minimum crystallization half-time of
one minute or less, and being selected from
a. copolymers of poly(l,4-cyclohexylenedimethylene 1,4-
430
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
cyclohexanedicarboxylate) with about 10 to about 30
mole percent dimer acid;
b. a polyetherester comprised of
1. a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 60 mole percent terephthalic acid, and
0 to 40 mole percent of an aliphatic or aromatic dicar-
boxylic acid having a molecular weight of less than
300, and
2. a diol component comprised of
A. a glycol comprised of 100 to 60 mole percent
tetramethylene glycol and 0 to 40 mole percent of
an aliphatic or aromatic glycol having a molecular
weight of less than 300, and
B. 10 to 60 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester. of a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol
having 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms in the repeating unit
and having a molecular weight in the range of 400
to 5000.
wherein the sum of the total mole percent amount of
aliphatic or aromatic dicarboxylic acid having a mo-
lecular weight of less than 300 in item b.l.B, the mole
percent amount of aliphatic or aromatic glycol hav-
ing a molecular weight of less than 300 in item b.2.A.,
and the weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of the poIy(alkylene oxide) glycol in
item b.2.B. equals at least 25 but does not exceed 80;
c. a polyetherester comprised of
1. a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 98 mole percent terephthalic acid, and
B. 0 to 2 mole percent of a trifunctional carboxylic
acid of molecular weight less than 300;
2. a diol component comprised of
A. a glycol comprised of 90 to 60 mole percent 1,4-
cyclohexanedimethanol and 10 to 40 mole percent
ethylene glycol or tetramethylene glycol, and
B. 10 to 50 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of a poly(alkyIene oxide) glycol
having 2 to 4 carbon atoms in the repeating unit
and having a molecular weight in the range of 400
to 2000;
d. a polyetherester comprised of
1 a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 98 mole percent 1,4-cycIohexanedicarboxy-
lic acid and
B. 0 to 2 mole percent of a trifunctional carboxylic
acid of molecular weight less than 300;
2. a diol component comprised of
A. 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol and
B. 10 to 60 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol
having 2 to 4 carbon atoms and a molecular weight
in the range of 400 to 2000.
4,379,802
STAMPABLE REINFORCED THERMOPLASTIC
POLYESTER SHEET WITH IMPROVED SURFACE
nNISH
Junes C. Weaver, and Robert W. Seymour, both of Kingsport,
Tenn., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester,
Filed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,319
Int. a.J B32B 15/00, 17/00
U.S. a. 428-220 14aaims
1. A stampable sheet of reinforced thermoplastic material
having on at least one surface of the sheet a smooth surface
suitable for use as exterior automotive panels and the like, said
sheet comprising:
a plurality of layers of polymeric material and a plurality of
layers of fibrous reinforcing material alternating with said
layers of polymeric material, all of said layers being inte-
grally formed together and the outer layers of said sheet
being of a crystallizable material selected from poly(ethy-
lene terephthalate), copolymers of poly(ethylene tere-
phthalate) and blends thereof, poly(l,4-cyclohex-
anedimethylene terephthalate), copolymers of poly(l,4-
cyclohexanedimethylene terephthalate) and blends
thereof having a minimum crystallization half-time upon
heating of one minute or less, the minimum crystallization
half-time being that as measured with respect to each
individual layer of said outer layers, wherein one of said
outer layers is designated as a first layer;
a second layer of surfacing mat of fine stranded glass having
a weight of about 0. 1 to about 0.4 oz./sq. ft., and posi-
tioned contiguously with respect to said first layer;
a third layer of polymeric material positioned contiguously
with the side of said second or surfacing layer opposite
from said first layer and selected from
a. poly(ethylene terephthalate);
b. copolymers of poly(ethylene terephthalate) and blends
thereof;
c. poly(l,4-cyclohexanedimethyIene terephthalate);
d. copolymers of poly(l,4-cyclohexanedimethylen'e tere-
phthalate) and blends thereof;
e. a polyetherester comprised of
1. a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 60 mole percent terephthalic acid, and
B. 0 to 40 mole percent of an aliphatic or aromatic
dicarboxylic acid having a molecular weight of less
than 300, and
2. a diol component comprised of
A. a glycol comprised of 100 to 60 mole percent
tetramethylene glycol and 0 to 40 mole percent of
an aliphatic or aromatic glycol having a molecular
weight of less than 300, and
B. 10 to 60 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol
having 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms in the repeating unit
and having a molecular weight in the range of 400
to 5000,
wherein the sum of the total mole percent amount of
aliphatic or aromatic dicarboxylic acid having a molec-
ular weight of less than 300 in item e.l.B. the mole
percent amount of aliphatic or aromatic glycol having a
molecular weight of less than 300 in item e.2.A., and the
weight percent, based on the weight of the polyether-
ester, of the poIy(alkylene oxide) glycol in item e.2.B.
equals at least 25 but does not exceed 80;
f a polyetherester comprised of
1. a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 98 mole percent terephthalic acid, and
B. 0 to 2 mole percent of a trifunctional carboxylic
acid of molecular weight less than 300;
2. a diol component comprised of
A. a glycol comprised of 90 to 60 mole percent 1,4-
cyclohexanedimethanol and 10 to 40 mole percent
ethylene glycol or tetramethylene glycol, and
B. 10 to 50 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol
having 2 to 4 carbon atoms in the repeating unit
and having a molecular weight in the range of 400
to 2000;
g. a polyetherester comprised of
1. a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 98 mole percent 1 ,4-cyclohexanedicarboxy-
lic acid and
B. 0 to 2 mole percent of a trifunctional carboxylic
acid of molecular weight less than 300;
2. a diol component comprised of
A. 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol and
B. 10 to 60 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol
having 2 to 4 carbon atoms and a molecular weight
in the range of 400 to 2000,
said items (a) through (g) having a minimum crystallization
half-time of one minute or less, the minimum crystallization
half-time being that as measured with respect to each individ-
ual layer;
said first and third layers each having about 5 to about 50
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
431
weight percent fillers selected from chopped strands of
fiber glass of lengths less than about 1.4 inch, milled glass,
glass spheres, novacite, talc, mica, calcium carbonate,
barium sulfate and kaolin;
a fourth layer comprising one of said layers of fibrous rein-
forcing material being positioned contiguously with the
side of third layer opposite from said second layer; and
a fifth layer of polymeric material positioned contiguously
with the side of said fourth layer opposite from said third
layer and being selected from
h. copolymers of poly(l,4-cyclohexylenedimethylene
1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylate) with about 10 to about
30 mole percent dimer acid;
i. a polyetherester comprised of
1. a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 60 mole percent terephthaUc acid, and
B. 0 to 40 mole percent of an aliphatic or aromatic
dicarboxylic acid having a molecular weight of less
than 300, and
2. a diol component comprised of
A. a glycol comprised of 100 to 60 mole percent
tetramethylene glycol and 0 to 40 mole percent of
an aliphatic or aromatic glycol having a molecular
weight of less than 300, and
B. 10 to 60 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol
having 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms in the repeating unit
and having a molecular weight in the range of 400
to 5000,
wherein the sum of the total mole percent amount of
aliphatic or aromatic dicarboxylic acid having a molec-
ular weight of less than 300 m item i.l.B., the mole
percent amount of aliphatic or aromatic glycol having a
molecular weight of less than 300 in item i.2.A., and the
weight percent, based on the weight of the polyether-
ester, of the poly(alkylene oxide) glycol in item i.2.B
equals at least 25 but does not exceed 80;
j. a polyetherester comprised of
1. a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 98 mole percent terephthalic acid, and
B. 0 to 2 mole percent of a trifunctional carboxylic
acid of molecular weight less than 300;
2. a diol component comprised of
A. a glycol comprised of 90 to 60 mole percent 1,4-
cyclohexanedimethanol and 10 to 40 mole percent
ethylene glycol or tetramethylene glycol, and
B. 10 to 50 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol
having 2 to 4 carbon atoms in the rep)eating unit
and having a molecular weight in the range of 400
to 2000;
k. a polyetherester comprised of
1. a dicarboxylic acid component comprised of
A. 100 to 98 mole percent 1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxy-
lic acid and
B. 0 to 2 mole percent of a trifunctional carboxylic
acid of molecular weight less than 300;
2. a diol component comprised of
A. 1,4-cycIohexanedimethanol and
B. 10 to 60 weight percent, based on the weight of the
polyetherester, of a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol
having 2 to 4 carbon atoms and a molecular weight
in the range of 400 to 2000,
said items (h) through (k) having a shrinkage of less than 2% as
determined in accordance with AST^ Method D-955, and a
minimum crystallization half-time of one minute or'less.
4,379,803
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Kiminori Tamai, and Masashi Hayama, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,664
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 7, 1980, 55/140192
Int. a.' GllB 5/70
U.S. a. 428—328 6 Qaims
I0"I
V.
ifHASul PMUCII
0 f"* _o_
05 »W •■•■
y 10"!
10
'2 4 5 6 8
amjci' Of inon PHOSPtix ( php i
1. A magnetic recording medium, comprising:
a substrate coated with a magnetic layer, said magnetic layer
comprising a synthetic binder, a magnetic powder and at
least one Group VIII metal phosphide with the amount of
said metal phosphide in said magnetic layer rangmg from
0.2 to 5.0 wt. % based on said magnetic powder.
4,379,804
LIQUID SORBENT MATERIALS
John F. Eisele, Lake Elmo, and Elizabeth A. Mercer, Wood-
bury, both of Minn., assignors to Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 28,347, Apr. 9, 1979, Pat. No.
4,225,652. This application Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,048
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 30,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' B32B 23/08. 27/08. 27/10, 27/36
U.S. a. 428—332 16 Qaims
5{'
3-
7
t9
//
1. A composite medium for sorbing liquids comprising, in
combination, a liquid-sorbent underlayer and, overlying said
underlayer, a liquid-permeable surface layer capable of retain-
ing its integrity in contact with said liquid and liquid applying
means, the liquid sorptivity of said underlayer being greater
than the liquid sorptivity of said surface layer whereby the
composite medium has a sorption time less than the sorption
time of said surface layer.
4,379,805
GRAPHICS-BEARING ELEMENT AND FLUID LINE
MARKING TAPE
Gerald T. Downing, Port Washington, and Michael D. Savagian,
Milwaukee, both of Wis., assignors to W. H. Brady Co.,
Milwaukee, Wis.
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,788
Int. C\? C09J 7/02; B32B 3/14
U.S. a. 428—346 10 Claims
1. A graphics-bearing marking element comprising an ink
432
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
graphics layer comprising a polyvinyl formal resin present in
10
12
^
16-
18
"7"
20
^ \
group consisting of polyundecaneamide, polydodecanea-
mide, and mixtures and copolymers thereof; and
an organic polymeric lubricant adjacent and exterior to said
outer layer, said lubricant comprising a saturated C2-C4
ether of ethylene oxide and 1,2-propylene oxide copoly-
mers, the ratio of ethylene oxide to propylene oxide being
an amount by weight in the range of 21% to 71% and having
an exposed portion and providing marking indicia.
S LUBRICANT
4,379,806
PRESSURE-SENSmVE ADHESIVE TAPE AND
PROCESS
Ralf Korpman, Somerset County, N.J., assignor to Johnson &
Johnson, New Brunswick, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 54,539, Jul. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,676
Int. a.3 C09J 7/02: B28B 3/20
U.S. a. 428-354 9 Qaims
about 1:1 to 3:1; said lubricant having a pour point below
about 15° F., a viscosity at 100° F. of about 100 to 400
SUS, and a molecular weight of about 200 to 800; said
lubricant wetting the outer layer, and being soluble in
monochlorodifluoromethane and dichlorodifluorometh-
ane.
S/S3
1. A pressure-sensitive adhesive tape comprising
(a) an adhesive layer of a normally tacky thermoplastic
pressure-sensitive rubber-resin and
(b) a backing layer of a normally non-tacky thermoplastic
film,
wherein said adhesive layer is joined substantially coexten-
sively to said backing layer through an intermediate inter-
locking layer containing both components in a laminar
relationship formed by coextruding an adhesive composi-
tion and a thermoplastic film-forming composition, each
having a torque value of between about 100 meter grams
and 1000 meter grams when worked at 75 r.p.m. at 420° F.
in a Brabender torque dynamometer,
wherein said adhesive composition comprises (i) an elasto-
meric component and (ii) a tackifier resin component in
which the tackifier resin component is present in an
amount of from about 20 to 30Q parts for each 100 parts by
weight of the elastomeric component, and
wherein the elastomeric component of the adhesive compo-
sition comprises a block copolymer selected from the
group consisting of A— B— A block copolymer. A— B
block copolymer and mixtures thereof.
4 379 808
SHEET TYPE FORMING BOARD AND FORMED BOARD
PRODUCTS
John N. Cole, Maineville, and David A. Hettel, Cincinnati, both
of Ohio, assignors to The Mead Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,454
Int. Q\? B32B 2i/00, 29/02
U.S. a. 428-438 12 Qaims
1. A forming board sheet for use in a heat forming process,
comprising at least a first layer consisting essentially of (a)
cellulose fibers, (b) a solid particulate polyolefin, and (c) an
inorganic filler and having a moisture content of between
approximately 4-12% by weight, whereby said forming board
is easily formable in a conventional hot press without the
requirement of pre-soaking and/or pre-steaming.
4 379 807
MAGNET WIRE FOR HERMETIC MOTORS
Harold R. Otis, and Charles E. Blake, both of Fort Wayne, Ind.,
assignors to Rea Magnet Wire Co., Inc., Fort Wayne, Ind.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,587
Int. a.3 B32B 27/00
<J.S. a. 428-383 7 Qaims
1. A magnet wire suitable for use in an hermetic motor
«!nvironment comprising
a conductor wire;
an insulating intermediate layer adjacent and exterior to said
conductor wire;
a polyamide outer layer adjacent and exterior to said inter-
mediate layer, said polyamide being selected from the
4,379,809
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Akihiro Matsufuji; Tadashi Ishiguro, and Nobuo Tsuji, all of
Odawara, Japan, assignors to Fiyi Photo Film Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,691
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 30, 1980, 55-136133
Int. Q.3 B32B 9/00
U.S. Q. 428—470 6 Qaims
1. A magnetic recording medium which comprises a non-
magnetic support having thereon a magnetic recording layer
comprising ferromagnetic particles dispersed in a binder, with
the surface of said ferromagnetic particles being treated with
an aluminum alcoholate of the formula (I):
Al(OR)3
(I)
wherein each R, which may be the same or different, repre-
sents a straight or branched chain alkyl group having 1 to 10
carbon atoms.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
433
4,379,810
WATER SOLUBLE PENTACHLOROPHENOL AND
TETRACHLOROPHENOL WOOD TREATING SYSTEMS
CONTAINING FATTY ACID AMINE OXIDES
Joseph Amundsen, Federal Way; Robert J. Goodwin, Puyallup,
and William H. Wetzel, Federal Way, all of Wash., assignors
to Reichhold Chemicals, Incorporated, White Plains, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 297,162, Aug. 28, 1981, Pat. No. 4,357,163,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 176,795, Aug. 11,
1980, Pat. No. 4,288,249, which is a continuation of Ser. No.
14,955, Feb. 26, 1979, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser.
No. 875,035, Dec. 2, 1977, abandoned. This application Aug. 18,
1982, Ser. No. 409,151
Int. a.3 B05D 1/18; B27K 3/00; C09D 5/16
U.S. a. 428—541 16 Qaims
1. A treated and preserved wooden object having a deposit
within the wood fibers of an essentially non-leachable chloro-
phenol formed therein by
I. forming a wood treating and preserving solution by blend-
ing (A) from about 0.1% to about 50% by weight of a
chlorophenol selected from a group consisting of penta-
chlorophenol and tetrachlorophenol and mixtures thereof,
(B) from about 1% to about 97% by weight of an aliphatic
alcohol having from one to six carbon atoms and mixtures
thereof, (C) from about 0.2% to about 35% by weight of
a fatty acid amine oxide having from about 10 to about 32
carbon atoms, (D) from about 1 % to about 97% by weight
water, and (E) from about 0.2% to about 35% by weight
of an amine selected from the group consisting of ammo-
nium hydroxide, triethylamine, trimethylamine, methyl
amine and methyldiethanol amine and mixtures thereof;
II. impregnating under heat and pressure the wooden object;
III. separating said wooden object from said solution; and
IV. drying said treated wooden object.
radius such that the thermal stresses of bonding said metal/-
ceramic composite to said substrate plate will cause said sub-
14
A
12
10
12
W
strate piate to assume a desired radius after said bonding, said
substrate plate having at least two integral axial ribs.
4,379,811
TUBULAR nLLER WIRE FOR FUSION WELDING
Manfred Puschner, Solingen, and Herbert Gerdau, Haan, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to ESAB Aktiebolag,
Sweden
Filed Apr. 27, 1978, Ser. No. 900,578
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 30,
1977, 2719357
Int. a.3 B23K 35/02. 35/04
U.S. a. 428—555 6 Claims
1. A composite filler rod or filler wire for fusion welding
comprising a core of particulate material, a tubular metal
sheath formed about said core from a strip of said metal so as
to include a seam therein, and a seamless metal tube enclosing
and firmly engaging said tubular sheath.
4,379,813
PROPELLERS AND WINDMILLS
John H. Newnham, 20 Village Ave., Doncaster, 3108 Victoria,
Australia
Filed Jun. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 155,936
Claims priority, application Australia, Jun. 6, 1979, PD 9079
Int. a.^ B64C 11/20
U.S. a. 428—587 22 Qaims
4,379,812
STRESS RELIEVED METAL/CERAMIC ABRADABLE
SEALS AND DEFORMABLE METAL SUBSTRATE
THEREFOR
Raymond V. Sara, North Olmstead, Ohio, assignor to Union
Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 973,553, Dec. 27, 1978, Pat. No. 4,243,169.
This appUcation Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,830
iBt a.3 B21H J/00; F03B ;//00,- P04D 29/0*
U^. a. 428—577 3 Claims
1. A deformable metal substrate plate adapted for bonding to
a multi-layer metal/ceramic abradable composite which com-
prises a metal plate curved in one plane to a predetermined
I. A propeller or windmill blank comprising a planar sheet
of material having markings defining a central region and two
blades extending in opposite directions along imaginary lines;
and wherein the blank has a marking or a line of preferential
folding or bending inclined to the imaginary lines which, when
the blank is folded or bent therealong, will result in pitch being
applied to the blades; a portion having a marking or line of
preferential folding or bending on each side of which marking
or line the portion is of generally triangular shape, and means
for subilizing a fold or bend on the first said marking or line
which will result in pitch being applied, a fold or bend on the
second said marking or hne and for securing said portion to
said central region such that said portion and said central
region when so secured together define a hub region of gener-
ally tetrahedral shape from edges of which said blades project.
II. A propeller or windmill formed from a blank comprising
a planar sheet of material having markings defining a central
region and two blades extending in opposite directions along
imaginary lines; and wherein the blank has a marking or line of
preferential folding or bending inclined to the imaginary lines
which, when the blank is folded or bent therealong, will result
in pitch being applied to the blades; a portion having a marking
or line of preferential folding or bending on each side of which
marking line the portion is of generally triangular shape, and
means for stabilizing a fold or bend on the first said marking or
line.
434
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,814
SHEET ELECTRODE FOR ELECTROCHEMICAL
SYSTEMS
Hsue C. Tsien, Chatham Township, Morris County; Kenneth R.
Newby, Berkeley Heights; Patrick G. Grimes, and Richard J.
Bellows, both of Westfield, all of N.J., assignors to Exxon
Research and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,674
Int. a.' HOIM 4/96
U.S. a. 429-42 25 Qaims
1 An extruded sheet electrode for use in an electrochemical
cell comprising a sheet composite of coextruded electrically
conductive and non-conductive plastic materials, said conduc-
tive plastic material comprising a mid-portion of said sheet, and
said non-conductive plastic material comprising coextruded
side portions of said sheet.
4 379 815
CELL HAVING MIXED SOLID CATHODE MATERIALS
FOR CONTROLLING CELL EXPANSION ON
DISCHARGE
Gerald F. Bubnick, Avon Lake, Ohio, assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,903
Int. a.' HOIM 4/52, 4/58
U.S. a. 429-66 7 Qaims
1. A cell comprising a consumable anode, a cathode that
expands during cell discharge, and an electrolyte, the improve-
ment wherein the cathode comprises a physical mixture of at
least two solid active cathode materials in which a first solid
active cathode material volumetrically expands more than the
volumetric contraction of the anode during cell discharge and
a second solid cathode material that volumetrically expands
less than the volumetric expansion of the first solid active
cathode material during cell discharge and wherein said solid
active cathode materials are selected such that the volumetric
expansion of the mixture of the solid active cathode materials
is substantially equal to the volumetric contraction of the
anode during cell discharge thereby providing a substantially
constant volume for the cathode/anode assembly during dis-
charge of the cell.
4,379,816
INDICATOR OF FULL CHARGE FOR SECONDARY
CELL OR BATTERY THEREOF
t'erdinand H. Mullersman, Gainesville, Fla., and Charles R.
Blake, North Redondo Beach, Calif., assignors to General
Electric Company, Gainesville, Fla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 189,337, Sep. 22, 1980. This application
Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,312
Int. a.3 HOIM 10/48
U.S. a. 429—91 6 Qaims
1. A full charge indicator for secondary sealed cells and the
ike, or battery thereof, for indicating attainment of full charge
(luring a charging operation, comprising heat sensitive means
iidapted to display a change in some perceivable characteristic
vhen subjected to heat, a first element of said heat sensitive
means being thermally coupled to the battery or cell so that
said element is maintained at substantially the same tempera-
ture as the battery or cell, and a second element of said heat
sensitive means being thermally isolated from the battery or
cell so that it remains substantially at ambient temperature,
such that once the battery or cell has reached essentially full
charge, further charging causes said first element to undergo a
change in said perceivable characteristic as a result of the
change in temperature of the battery or cell, while the second
element substantially does not undergo a change in said cha-
racterisitic, the relative difference in the perceivable character-
istic of the two elements being observable.
4 379 817
ORGANIC SOLVENT-TREATED MANGANESE
DIOXIDE-CONTAINING CATHODES
Akiya Kozawa, Middleburg Heights, Ohio, assignor to Union
Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 135,776, Mar. 31, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,441
Int. a.3 HOIM 4/02
U.S. a. 429-224 8 Qaims
1. A manganese dioxide for use as a cathode of a non-aque-
ous cell wherein at least the walls of the pores of the manga-
nese dioxide exposed on the cathode surface are substantially
coated with a vapor deposited organic solvent so as to reduce
the affinity of the manganese dioxide for absorbing moisture.
4,379,818
ARTWORK ALIGNMENT FOR DECORATING MACHINE
William E. Lock, Horseheads, and Edward A. Snyder, Lindley,
both of N.Y., assignors to Corning Glass Works, Corning,
N.Y.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,725
Int. aj G03F 9/00; B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
U.S. a. 430—5 5 Qaims
1. In a process for engraving the surface of a conical roll
with registerable color separated etched portions of a design
by photographic activation of surface portions of said roll
through a photomask, a method for producing said photomask
comprising the steps of: exposing a photomask forming film to
the color separated portion of the design to produce an image
on the photomask having relatively negative and positive
regions therein corresponding to said color separated portion
of the design; graphically representing a planar development of
the conical roll to be engraved into an outline having axial and
lateral margins; superimposing the image on the film and de-
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
435
velopment outline into a selected planar orientation to produce having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted phe-
a composite film; shearing the composite film at least along the noxy, or N-alkyl-substituted or N,N-dialkyl-substituted suifon-
lateral margins of the development outline; fabricating a fixture amido or carboxamido, in which each alkyl mojety has 1 to 6
for aligning the axial margins of the outline; the fixture formed carbon atoms and can be substituted, or Rj is substituted or
of a surface support member having a shape corresponding to unsubstituted alkylsulfone having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, subsli-
that of the conical roll along at least one of the lateral margins tuted or unsubstituted phenylsulfonic acid ester, cyano, nitro.
of the development outline; forming at least one aperture in the halogen, substituted or unsubstituted carbalkoxy having 1 to 16
surface support member of the fixture at a selected location and carbon atoms, or — P(0)(0T')2, in which T' is alkyl havmg 1
forming a removable pin securable in said aperture; forming at to 4 carbon atoms, R4 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted
least one aperture in the film in a position corresponding to the aj^y] having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted
selected location of the apertures in the fixture; wrapping the
film over the fixture; aligning at least the axial margins of the
film while wrapped on said fixture; aligning the respective
apertures in the film and fixture one over the other; inserting
alkoxy having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted
carbalkoxy having 2 to 16 carbon atoms or N-alkyl-substituted
or N,N-dialky!-substituted sulfonamide or carboxamido, in
which each alkyl moiety has 1 to 1 2 carbon atoms and can be
the pin through the aligned aperture to secure the film and substituted, or R4is — NQiCOTi, in which Q\ is hydrogen or
fixture in alignment; and securing the lateral margins together
in butting relation to form a conical shell corresponding to and
removably sleevable over the conical surface to be etched so as
to produce a photomask therefor.
4,379,819
COLOR-PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING MATERIAL
FOR THE SILVER DYE BLEACH PROCESS
John Lenoir; Gerald Jan, both of Fribourg, and Mario Fryberg,
Praroman-le-Mouret, all of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-
Geigy AG, Basel, Switzerland
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,263
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 30, 1980,
3342/80
Int. Cl.^ G03C 7/70
U.S. a. 430—17 17 Qaims
1. A colour-photographic recording material for the silver
dye bleach process which contains at least one diffusion-resist-
ant, bleachable and oil-soluble monoazo dye dissolved in a
high-boiling organic solvent in at least one silver halide emul-
sion layer or in a colloid layer adjoining the silver halide emul-
sion layer, and wherein the dye has the formula
(1)
in which Ri is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl
having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted
alkoxy having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubsti-
tuted alkenyl having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, substituted or unsub-
stituted aliphatic acyl having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, substituted
or unsubstituted benzoyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbalk-
oxy having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or — NViCOUi, in which Vi alkyl or alkoxy, each having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or halogen,
is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and Ui is
alkyl having 1 or 2 carbon atoms and Ti is substituted or unsub-
stituted alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or R4 is substituted or
unsubstituted alkylsulfone having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, substi-
tuted or unsubstituted arylsulfone hydroxyl, cyano, nitro or
halogen, R5 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl
having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or substituted or unsubstituted
carbalkoxy having 2 to 13 carbon atoms, Xi is hydrogen, sub-
stituted or unsubstituted alkyl or alkoxy having 1 to 6 carbon
atoms or — NLiCO— Mi, in which Li is hydrogen or substi-
tuted or unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and
Ml is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or alkoxy havmg 1 to
24 carbon atoms, or Xi is substituted or unsubstituted alkylsul-
fonylamino having 1 to 25 carbon atoms or hydroxyl, Yi is
hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 6
carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy having 1 to
12 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted carbalkoxy hav-
ing 2 to 5 carbon atoms or N-alkyl-substituted or N.N-dialkyl-
substituted amino, in which each alkyl moiety has 1 to 6 carbon
atoms and can be substituted, or Yi is substituted or unsubsti-
tuted arylsulfonylamino or — NEiCOGi, in which Ei is hydro-
gen or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 8 carbon
atoms and Gi is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl havmg 1 to
12 carbon atoms or substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy having
1 to 4 carbon atoms, or Yi is — NEiP(0)(0G')2, m which E|
is as defined above and G' is alkyl having I to 12 carbon atoms,
or Yi is halogen or hydroxy!, Zi is hydrogen, substituted or
unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, substituted or
unsubstituted alkoxy having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or — NAj.
CODi, in which Ai is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted
alkyl having 1 to 8 carbon atoms and Di is substituted or
unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, or Zi is substi-
tuted or unsubstituted acyl having 2 to 9 carbon atoms, substi-
tuted or unsubstituted carbalkoxy having 2 to 19 carbon atoms,
substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino having 1 to 6
carbon atoms, halogen or the atoms which together with Yi
form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-membered or 6-mem-
bered, saturated or unsaturated ring which can contain 1 or 2
hetero-atoms, and W] is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted
substituted or unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 12 carbon atoms
or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl having 2 to 4 carbon
atoms, or R] is N-alkyl-substituted or N,N-dialkyl-substituted
carboxamido or sulfonamide, in which each alkyl moiety has 1
to 12 carbon atoms and can be substituted further, or Ri is
substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfone having 1 to 12 carbon
atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfone, substituted or
unsubstituted aryloxy or substituted or unsubstituted arylsul-
fonic acid ester, or is hydroxyl, cyano, nitro or halogen, R2 is
hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 12
carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy having 1 to U.S. Q
4,379,820
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC PHOTOCONDUCTOR OF
HALOGEN-DOPED SE-TE ALLOY LAYERS
Hitoshi Nakamura; Hideyo Nishizima; Hideaki Ema; Makoto
Harigaya, and Satoshi Otomura, all of Numazu, Japan, as-
signors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,168
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1980, 55-52381
Int. a.' G03G 5/082
430—58 ♦ Claims
6 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted carbalkoxy having
2 to 5 carbon atoms or N-alkyl-substituted or N,N-dialkyl-sub-
stituted sulfonamide or carboxamido, in which each alkyl
moiety has 1 to 8 carbon atoms and can be substituted, or R2
is substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfone having 1 to 6 car-
bon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfone or substi-
tuted or unsubstituted aryloxy, or is cyano, nitro or halogen,
R3 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or alkoxy
1. A layered electrophotographic photoconductor compns-
mg:
an electrically conductive base;
a charge transporting layer, with a thickness ranging from 45
fim to 55 fim, formed on said electrically conductive base,
which charge transporting layer comprises a selenium-tel-
lurium alloy, the concentration of tellurium ranging from
1 to 10 weight percent of the total of the selenium-tel-
436
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
lunum, doped with halogen With a concentration equal to
10 to 500 ppm of the total of selenium and tellurium; and
a charge generating layer, with a thickness ranging from 3 to
10 ^lm, formed on said= charge transporting layer, which
charge generating layer comprises a selenium-tellurium-
arsenic alloy, doped with halogen, the concentration of
tellurium ranging from 6 to 10 weight percent of the total
of selenium and tellurium, the concentration of arsenic
ranging 0.5 to 10 weight percent with respect to the total
of selenium and tellurium, and the concentration of halo-
gen ranging from 10 ppm to 500 ppm with respect to the
total of selenium and tellurium.
[R'— N-R^'®] xe
A (4-A)
where
4,379 821
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING MATERIAL
WTTH AS2SE3_xTE;t CHARGE GENERATING LAYER
Manfred Lutz, and Bernd Reimer, both of Warstein, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH,
Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,941
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun 3
1980, 3020939
Int. a.3 G03G 5/04
U.S. a. 430-58 8 Claims
^^^
R' is a radical selected from the group consisting of
HOCH2CH2; H2C CHCH2-; and CH3CHCH2-;
R'^is lower alkyl having from one to three carbon atoms;
A is 1, 2, or 3; and
X is an anion selected from the group consisting of chlo-
ride, Huoride, bromide, sulfate, phosphate or acetate;
said barrier coat being substantially free of materials
which adversely affect water resistance.
4 379 823
COMPOSITION FOR FORMING PHOTOCONDUCTIVE
COATING CONTAINING A PHOTOCONDUCTIVE
DONOR AND AN ACCEPTOR-SENSTTIZER
James M. Halm, Lombard, III., assignor to A. B. Dick Company.
Niles, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 131,150, Mar. 17, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 897,719, Apr. 19,
1978, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. '
738,147, Oct. 29, 1976, abandoned. This application May 27
1980, Ser. No. 153,881
Int. a.J G03G 5/09. 5/04
U.S. a. 430-83 23 Qaims
1. A composition for the preparation of photoconductive
layers comprising the combination of an organic photoconduc-
tive donor and an acceptor-sensitizer compound having the
general formula
1. In an electrophotographic recording material including a
dual photoconductive layer containing selenium applied to an
electncally conductive substrate, the improvement wherein
the recording material contains only the substrate and the dual
photoconductive layer, and the dual photoconductive layer
consists of a layer of amorphous arsenic selenide as a charge
transporting layer disposed on said substrate, and a layer of a
compound of arsenic, selenium, and tellurium of the formula
As2Se3-xTe^. where 0< x <3, as a charge generating layer,
superposed on said layer of arsenic selenide.
4 379 822
CONDUCnVE BARRIER COAT FOR ELECTROSTATIC
MASTERS
Michael J. Shaw, Paw Paw, Mich., assignor to Allied Paper,
Incorporated, Kalamazoo, Mich.
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,602
Int. a.^ G03G 5/14, 5/04
U.S. a. 430-62 . 8 Claims
1. A printing master comprising
(a) a base;
(b) a water resistant barrier coat applied to said base;
(c) a photoconductive layer comprising a photoconductive
material and a binder applied to said barrier coat;
(d) said barrier coat comprising on a dry weight basis, in a
film-forming amount, about 50-95% of an organic hydro-
phobic and thermoplastic film-forming resin having labile
hydrogen-containing functional groups, and about 5-15%
of a conductive agent; said coat having a resistivity less
than about 10" ohms per square in said barrier coat, said
resm bemg applied to the base as either a latex or colloidal
dispersion;
(e) said conductive agent being a quaternary ammonium salt
having the formula;
■R2
in which M is a metal or metalloid selected from the group
consisting of aluminum, gallium, indium, thalium and boron, X
and Y are groups selected from the group consisting of sul-
phur, nitrogen, phosphorus, antimony, selenium and oxygen,
Z| and Z2 are selected from the group consisting of a halogen
and substituted and unsubstituted alkyl, alkaryl and heterocy-
clic groups selected from the groups consisting of furyl pyrryl
idoyl. pyrimidyl, pyridyl and furfuryl, R, and R2 are groups
selected from the group consisting of substituted and unsubsti-
tuted aryl, alkaryl. alkyl and alicyclic groups, n is a number of
1 or 2, in which the composition used to form the layer con-
tains the component in an amount within the range of 1-10%
by weight, when in solution and 2-25% by weight, when in
suspension.
4,379,824
DEVELOPER COMPOSmONS HAVING LAYER OF A
PIGMENT ON THE SURFACE THEREOF
Stanley B. Collins, White Bear Lake, Minn., assignor to Minne-
sota Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn
FUed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,294
Int a.J G03G 9/14. 13/09
US. a. 430-106.6 16 Claims
1. A dry composition capable of being attracted to electro-
static image areas on a dielectric surface, said composition
having a static electrical conductivity of at least 10"* ohm--
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
437
'centimeter-' wherein said composition comprises a plurality
of discrete spheroids each having an essentially smooth surface
and each comprising a thermoplastic organic resin with a
magnetically responsive material distributed therein, and from
about 1 to 12 Jig per square centimeter of surface area of said
spheroids of a coating of a first pigment on said smooth surface
wherein said first pigment comprises particles each having an
arithmetic mean particle size of at least 0.02 micron, a dibutyl
phthalate absorption value of at least 150 cubic centimeters per
100 grams of said pigment, and a static electrical conductivity
of at least 10"* ohm" 'centimeter- '.
4 379 825
POROUS ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC TONER AND
PREPARATION PROCESS OF MAKING
Yasuo Mitushashi, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,288
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 14, 1980, 55-16998;
Dec. 23, 1980, 55-183134; Dec. 23, 1980, 55-183135
Int. a.3 G03G 9/16
U.S. a. 430—111 12 Qaims
I. Porous toner which comprises a coloring matter and a
binder, said toner being formed by obtaining a powder through
a step of mixing and kneading under heat a toner preparing
material including a coloring matter, a binder and an elimina-
tion compound having a particle size from 0.01-20 microns
which neither softens nor melts at a temperature at which said
binder softens or melts, and by treating said powder with a
solvent to remove said elimination compound to thereby form
irregular shaped particles having voids or pores from 0.01 to 20
microns in diameter in the surface and interior thereof.
II. A process for preparing a porous toner which comprises
mixing and kneading under heat a toner preparing material
including a coloring matter, a binder and an elimination com-
pound which neither softens nor melts at a temperature at
which said binder softens or melts, then finely dividing the
mixture to form powder, and thereafter applying heat treat-
ment to the powder, followed by treating the powder with a
solvent to remove said elimination compound.
4,379,826
POSITIVE ELECTRON BEAM RESISTS OF ORTHO
CHLORO SUBSTTTITTED PHENOL OR CRESOL
CONDENSED WTTH FORMALDEHYDE
James Economy; Roy J. Critter, both of San Jose, and Hiroyuki
Hiraoka, Saratoga, all of Calif., assignors to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,138
Int. a.3 G03C 1/58. 5/22. 5/34. 5/00
U.S. a. 430—141 3 Cl*i«»
1. In a process for forming a positive electron beam resist by
the steps of imagewise exposing a resin sensitized by a naphtho-
quinone diazide to electron beam irradiation, and selectively
removing the exposed portion of the resin by treating it with a
solvent, the improvement characterized in that the resin is a
condensation product of formaldehyde with a phenol or a
cresol having a chloro substituent ortho to the hydroxyl group
on its aromatic ring.
4,379,827
IMAGING STRUCTURE WTTH TELLURIUM METAL
HLM AND ENERGY SENSTHVE MATERIAL THEREON
Robert W. Hallman, Orchard Lake, Mich., assignor to Energy
Conversion Devices, Inc., Troy, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 205,860, Dec. 8, 1971,
abandoned. This application Apr. 12, 1973, Ser. No. 350,372
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 12,
1996, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 G03C 1/54. 1/72. 1/94
U.S. a. 430—166 3 Qalms
1. A structure for producing images comprising a substrate,
a thin film of a metallic or metallic-like image formmg matenal
comprising tellurium or a tellurium conUining composition on
a surface of the substrate, said image forming matenal being
characterized in that it is opaque and is easily soluble m a
solvent consisting essentially of a dilute aqueous solution of an
alkali metal hypochlorite, and a thin film of an energy sensitive
material on the film of image forming material, said energy
sensitive material being characterized in that it is capable upon
the application of energy of changing between two states, one
of which is a state in which the energy sensitive material is
substantially soluble or permeable with respect to the afore-
mentioned solvent in which the image forming material is
easily soluble and the other being a state in which the energy
sensitive material is substantially insoluble or impermeable
with respect to said solvent, the film of energy sensitive mate-
rial and the film of image forming material and the thinnesses
thereof being such that the change in the sute of the energy
sensitive material upon the application of energy thereto and
the essentially simultaneous dissolution in said solvent of both
the energy sensitive material in those areas where it is in a
substantially soluble or permeable sUte and the image forming
material underlying said areas, can together, take place in
substantially less than one minute to provide an imaged prod-
uct.
4,379,828
IMAGE RECEPTOR ELEMENT FOR THE DYE
DIFFUSION TRANSFER PROCESS
Werner Liebe; Karl Lohmer, both of Leverkusen, and Wiilibald
Pelz, Cologne, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,584
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 16,
1980, 3018644
Int. a.3 G03C 7/00, 5/54. 5/48
U.S. a. 430—212 ♦ Clai""
1. An image receptor element for dye diffusion transfer
process with diffusible dye anions comprising
a support and
at least one image receiving layer containing as a mordant
for said dye anions, means for providing in the image
receiving layer a dye absorption capacity which is vari-
able normal to the plane of the layer in the direction of
diffusion of the dye anions into the image receiving layer
during processing from a light sensitive element which is
in alkali permeable contact with the image receiving layer,
said means comprising cationic groups reactable with the
diffusible dye anions and distributed in the image receiv-
ing layer so as to provide an increase in the dye absorption
capacity extending through the image receiving layer
normal to the plane of the layer and with increasing dis-
tance from the contact.
438
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4 379 829
PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIAL CONTAINING A
TEMPORARY BARRIER LAYER APPLIED FROM AN
ORGANIC SOLUTION
Werner Krafft, Leverkusen; Gunter Helling, Cologne; Guunther
Matschke, Leverkusen, and Immo Boie, Langenfeld, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,087
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Jan 4
1980,3000193 ' '
Int. a.' G03C 1/40. 5/54. 7/00
L.S. a. 430-215 5 Claims
1 In a color photographic material for a dye diffusion trans-
fer process, which contains color providing compounds hav-
mg at least one temporary barrier layer arranged between two
layers which are permeable to alkali, said barrier layer consist-
ing of a mixture of 40 to 95% by weight of a first polymer and
5 to 60% by weight of a second polymer applied from organic
solution of said mixture, said first polmer being a copolymer of
from 40 to 80% by weight of at least one comonomer 1 selected
from the group consisting of vinylidene chloride, dimethyl
butadiene and dichlorobutadiene; from 18 to 50% by weight of
at least one comonomer II selected from the group consisting
of (meth) acrylonitrile and alkyl (meth)-acrylate and from 2 to
10% by weight of at least one comonomer III selected from
the group consisting of olefinically unsaturated copolymerisa-
ble mono or dicarboxylic acids, sulfonic acids and phosphonic
acid, and wherein the improvement comprises the second
polymer in a homopolymer selected from the group consisting
of poly-(alkyl acrylate) poly-(hydroxy alkyl acrylate), polycar-
bonate, poIy-(N-alkyl acrylamide), poIy-(vinyl acetate) and
cellulose acetate, or of a copolymer of from 80 to 90% by
weight of alkyl acrylate or hydroxyalkyi acrylate and from 1 to
20% by weight of an olefinically unsaturated, copolymerisable
mono or dicarboxylic acid, sulfonic acid or phosphonic acid,
the temporary barrier layer being incorporated in a neutraliza-
tion system in proximity to the reception layer of the dye
diffusion materials.
converging from said objective onto said photoresist layer, and
thereafter removing exposed portions of said photoresist layer,
a method of suppressing the effects of minute dust particles
upon the projected image, comprising the steps of
(a) depositing on said photoresist layer a planar, solid and
light-transmitting coating of refractive index n corre-
sponding at least approximately to that of said photoresist
V-
d >
layer, said coating having a thickness d of at least several
microns substantially exceeding that of said layer and
sufficient to let an elemental beam strike the outer surface
of said coating on an area substantially greater than that of
a dust particle having a radius of one micron, said thick-
ness d lying in a range in which the resulting spherical
aberration given by
4,379,830
DEVELOPER FOR POSITIVE PHOTOLITHOGRAPHIC
ARTICLES
Albert S. Deutsch, Hartsdale; Christopher F. Lyons, Wappingers
Falls, and Robert Filler, White Plains, all of N.Y., assignors to
Polychrome Corporation, Yonkers, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 308,960
Int. CI.' G03C 5/30; CUD 3/04. 7/06
U.S. CI. 430-309 3 Oaims
1. An improved alkaline developer for photolithographic
articles comprising from 0.5 to 30% wt. sodium metasilicate,
wherein the improvement comprises addition of from 2 to 5%
wt. of sodium chloride, based on total weight of the developer.
4 379 831
PROCESS FOR TRANSFERRING A PATTERN ONTO A
SEMICONDUCTOR DISK
Ernst Lobach, Eschen, Liechtenstein, assignor to Censor Patent-
und Versuchs-Anstalt, Vaduz, Liechtenstein
PCT No. PCr/EP80/00101, § 371 Date May 21, 1981, § 102(e)
Date May 7, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00923, PCT Pub
Date Apr. 2, 1981
PCT Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 261,164
Qaims priority, application European Pat. Off., Sep. 21. 1979
79103567.8
Int. a.^ G03C 5/04. 5/00; G03B 27/32. 27/52
KJ.S. a. 430-311 6CI^„,
1. In a process for photolithographically transferring a pat-
;em from a mask onto a semiconductor wafer by covering a
iemiconductor substrate thereof with a photoresist layer, imag-
ing said pattern on said photoresist layer by means of a projec-
iion objective of predetermined numerical aperture NA = sin
< 'max where Omax is half the apex angle of an elemental beam
is less than the Rayleigh depth, and
(b) removing said coating not later than with the removal of
said exposed portions.
4 379 832
METHOD FOR MAKING LOW BARRIER SCHOTTKY
DEVICES OF THE ELECTRON BEAM EVAPORATION
OF REACTIVE METALS
Hormazdyar M. Dalai, and John J. Lowney, both of Wappingers
Falls, N.Y., assignors to International Business Machines
Corporation, Armonk, N.Y,
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,642
Int. a.3 G03C 5/00; B05D 3/06. 5/12. 1/32
U.S. CI. 430-315 ,0 Qaims
«. I a
1. An improved lift-off mask method for applying a reactive
metal layer to a major surface of a semiconductor substrate, the
method including forming a compound layer of photoresist
materials at the semiconductor surface; selectively exposing
the photoresist layer to radiation which the photoresist is
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
439
reactive to; removing portions of the photoresist layer to ex-
pose select regions of the substrate surface; depositing at least
a first layer of reactive metal at the selectively exposed sub-
strate surface and the photoresist by electron beam evapora-
tion of the reactive metal: and removing the photoresist and
reactive metal layer on the photoresist layer; the improvement
comprising irradiating the photoresist layer with x-rays gener-
ated by heating a charge of reactive metal from which the
metal to be deposited is supplied to a temperature below the
evaporation temperature of the metal while under vacuum
with an electron beam for a predetermined time before def)Osit-
ing the reactive metal.
4,379,833
SELF-ALIGNED PHOTORESIST PROCESS
Benjamin J. Canavello, Lillian, Ala., and Michael Hatzakis,
Chappaqua, N.Y., assignors to International Business Ma-
chines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,467
Int. CI.- H05K 3/06. 3/46
U.S. CI. 430—325 8 Claims
28
m
22 26
28
iiiui
V
11 26
28
I' '
-24
-20
acid, having 8 to 30 carbon atoms, the photoresist stencil
remaining unattacked during this cleaning step.
4,379,835
BLACK IMAGE FROM A THERMOGRAPHIC IMAGING
SYSTEM
Robert D. Lowrey, Saint Paul, Minn.; Howard D. Nelson, River
Falls. Wis., and George Van Dyke Tiers, Saint Paul. Minn..
assignors to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Com-
panv. Saint Paul, Minn.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,559
Int. CI.' G03C ]/72: B41M 5//«. 5/26
U.S. a. 430—338 19 Qaims
1. An article with a single imageable layer carried on a
substrate, said layer comprising a polymeric binder, a combina-
tion of at least two leuco dyes, an acidic material, and nitrate
salt, said leuci) dyes being colorless compounds which when
subjected to an oxidation reaction form colored products, said
acidic material being present in said layer in a molar concentra-
tion of at least 0.2 times that of the nitrate ion in said nitrate
salt, said nitrate salt having a cation which is nonreactive with
said leuco dyes and said nitrate salt capable of liberating an
oxidizing amount of HNO3 or oxides of nitrogen when heated
to a temperature of no more than 200° C. for 60 seconds, said
layer being capable of providing an at least dark, stable image
upon imagewise oxidation
1. A self-aligned photoresist process, comprising the steps of
depositing a layer of photoresist over a substrate surface,
said surface having a pattern of areas with substantially
higher reflectivity than surrounding areas in a wavelength
region in which said photoresist is sensitive:
flooding the. deposited photoresist layer with light in said
wavelength region, the greater reflection of light at the
pattern areas of higher reflectivity causing greater expo-
sure of the photoresist layer in regions overlying said
pattern areas of higher reflectivity; and
developing the flooded photoresist layer thereby producing
a resist pattern corresponding with the pattern areas of
higher reflectivity and aligned therewith.
4,379,836
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF DISPERSIONS
AND PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIAI^
Hildegard Schnoring, Wuppertal; Karl-Wilhelm Schranz. and
Giinther Koepke, both of Odenthal, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft, Leverku-
sen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,641
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 2,
1980, 3033000
Int. CI.' G03C ]/40
U.S. CI. 430— 377 11 Claims
4,379,834
PROCESS FOR CLEANING COPPER-CONTAINING ,
METAL SURFACES
Walter Herwig, Bad Soden; Kurt Kliipfel, Wiesbaden; Helga
Sikora, Wiesbaden, and Heide Sprengel, Wiesbaden, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 270,052, Jun. 3, 1981, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 93,114, Nov. 13, 1979, abandoned.
This application Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,084
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 17,
1978, 2849894
Int. a.5 G03C 5/24
U.S. CI. 430—329 9 Qaims
1. In the process for the production of a photoresist image, in
which a photopolymerizable photoresist layer is applied to a
support of copper or a copper alloy, is exposed imagewise and
is washed out of the unexposed areas by means of an aqueous-
alkaline developer solution,
the improvement which comprises treating the surface of the
support, after the development as a separate cleaning step,
with a solution which contains a water-soluble aliphatic
sulfonic acid, or a water-soluble salt of such a sulfonic
I . In the process for the production ofa dispersion ofat least
one liquid organic phase containing a hydrophobic, photo-
graphically-active substance.
and at least one aqueous phase containing a binder,
by combining the phases in a dispersion by introducing said
organic phase and said aqueous phase separately and
simultaneously into a dispersion unit,
and combining said phases in said unit at a temperature
maintained at \(^f C. or higher and under a pressure
maintained at least 1 bar so as to disperse the phases in the
dispersion unit.
440
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,837
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF SILVER
HALIDE EMULSIONS, PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIAI^
AND A PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCHON OF
PHOTOGRAPHIC IMAGES
Otto Lapp; Harald yon Rintelen; Franz Moll, all of Leverkusen-
Bayerwerk, and Lothar Endres, Bergisch Gladbacb, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesell-
schaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,535
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mav 23
1980,3019733
Int. aj G03C 1/02
U.S. a. 430-434 lOaaims
1. A process for the preparation of a silver halide emulsion in
which a fine-grained silver halide emulsion 1 is blended in the
presence of at least one silver halide solvent with a silver halide
emulsion II which is less soluble than said emulsion I and m
which the blend is held for a sufficient time to effect redissolv-
ing of emulsion 1 and precipitation on emulsion II wherein
emulsion I has been prepared by reaction of a soluble silver salt
and a soluble halide in the presence of at least one compound
inhibiting grain growth.
4 379 838
PHOTOSENSITIVE PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING
MATERIAL COMPRISING A DYED LAYER
Giinter Helling, Cologne; Hans Ohischlager, Bergisch-Glad-
bach; Wolfgang Himmelmann, Leverkusen, and Manfred
Beck, Odenthal, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 196,933, Oct. 14, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,521
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct 16
1979, 2941819
Int. CI.3 G03C 1/84
U.S. a. 430-518 5 aai„,
1. In a photographic recording element, comprising a layer
support, at least one layer comprised of photosensitive silver
halide emulsion supported on said layer support, and at least
one other supported layer as a dyed layer containing uniformly
distributed therein a polymeric mordant for acid dyes and at
least one acid dye,
the improvement according to which the mordant in said
dyed layer consists essentially of a polymer obtained by
addition polymerization and corresponding to the follow-
ing formula
R** represents hydrogen or methyl,
X© represents a photographically inert anion,
V represents the residue of a polymerized monomer poly-
merizable by addition polymerization containing at least
two polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated groups; and
corresponds to the following formula
R6
I
(CH2=C)„-R5
in which
n is an integer greater than 1,
R5 represents an organic radical with two or more bonds
which is made up of alkylene. arylene, aralkylene. cycloal-
kylenc groups, ester, sulphonyl ester, amide, sulphon-
amide groups, etheroxygen and thioethersulphur atoms
and also combinations of the above-mentioned groups and
atoms,
R^ is a hydrogen atom or a methyl radical,
M represents the residue of a polymerized monomer contain-
ing one polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group;
X, y and z represent the figures indicating the proportions of
the monomer in the polymer, such that
X stands for lU to 99 mole %,
y stands for 0 to 90 mole %,
z stands for 0 to 5 mole %.
4 379 839
METHOD FOR DETECnNG CANCER
Sol Spiegelman, New York, N.Y., assignor to The Trustees of
Columbia University in the City of New York, New York.
N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 872,855, Jan. 27, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 799,810, May 23,
1977, abandoned. This application Feb. 29, 1980, Ser. No.
126,166
Int. CI.^ C12Q 1/70; GOIN 33/54, 33/56. 33/60
U.S. a. 435—5 14 Claims
1. A method for the detection of breast cancer in a human
subject, which method comprises immunologically assaying a
sample from said subject for breast cancer specific viral related
protein, the assay utilizing the cross-reactivity of the protein
with antibodies to Mason-Pfizer Monkey Virus or murine
mammary tumor virus.
I
(-CH2-C-);, (-M-)^ (-V-)^
CO
I
O-CH2 Rl
I I
CH=CH— CH2— Q®— r2 X©
in which
Q is a nitrogen or phosphorus atom;
R'. R2 and R^ are the same or different and represent alkyl
radicals of 1 to 12 carbon atoms or carbocyclic radicals
selected from the group consisting of cycloalkyl, aralkyl
and aryl radicals containing from 5 to 12 carbon atoms,
which may be substituted with halogen, niiro, cyano,
alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio or alkoxy carbonyl in which the
aJkyl contains from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
or two of the substituents R', R2 and R3 together represent a
group necessary for completing a 5- or 6-membered heterocy-
clic ring selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine,
piperidine or morpholine rings;
4 379 840
QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS OF URIC ACID
Gunther Gorka, Wiesbaden-Auringen, and Klaus Stinshoff,
Munich, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to C. H.
Boehringer Sohn, Ingelheim am Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,677
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul, 3.
1980, 3025170
Int. a.' C12N 9/04, 9/96; C12Q 1/30, 1/32
U.S. a. 435-10 6aum
1. In a process for determining the uric acid content of
biological material by contacting the biological material with a
reagent composition conUining uricase, catalase, aldehyde
dehydrogenase, a lower alkanol, and nicotinamide adenine
dinucleotide or nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate,
the improvement which comprises contacting the biological
material with a reagent composition comprising:
(a) from about 25 to 500 lU/liter of uricase;
(b) from about 300 to 1000 klU/liter of catalase;
(c) from about 100 to 500 lU/liter of aldehyde dehydro-
genase;
(d) from about 0.5 to 2 mol/liter of ethanol;
(e) from about 0.2 to 1.5 mmol/liter of NAD+ or
NADP + ;
(0 from about 20 to 100 mmol/liter of buffer; and
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
441
(g) from about 0.0001 to 0.1 mol/liter of 2-mercaptosuc-
cinic acid.
4,379,841
ASSIMILATION TEST FOR IDENTIFYING YEASTS
Billy H. Cooper, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Abbott Laboratories
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 184,877, Sep. 8, 1980,
abandoned. This application Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 308,210
Int. aJ C12Q 1/04: C12N 1/16: C12R 1/645. 1/72
U.S. a. 435—34 12 Oaims
1. A method for identifying a clinically significant yeast
isolate which comprises inoculating culture media containing
as a sole carbon source 4-hydroxybenzoic acid. 3,4-dihydrox-
ybenzoic acid or a mixture of 4-hydroxybenzoic acid and
3,4-dihydroxybenzoic acid, with a yeast colony obtained from
a human specimen; and then observing the ability of the yeast
colony to assimilate the carbon source as an indication of a
specific yeast isolate.
4,379,842
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
la-HYDROXYDEHYDROEPIANDROSTERONE
Akiko Fujiwara, Kamakura; Chikara Miyamoto, Yokohama, and
Torn Okuda, Yakuoji, all of Japan, assignors to Hoffmann-La
Roche Inc., Nutley, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 121,120. Feb. 13, 1980. This application
Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,281
Int. aj C12P 33/06; C12R 1/80. 1/66
U.S. a. 435—58 9 Qaims
1. A process for producing 1-a-hydroxydehydroepiandros-
terone comprising adding dehydroepiandroslerone or 3-acyI-
dehydroepiiandrosterone as a substrate to microorganisms of
the species Penicillium oxalicum or Aspergillus terreus fer-
menting in a culture medium, the addition of substrate being
made at a time when the microoganisms are in a stationary
phase of growth and for a time sufficient for conversion of the
substrate.
consisting of about 20 to about 80% DM of the fungus and
the balance of unfermented cellulosic material, and
(b) separating the resulting solid mass from the fermentation
medium.
4,379,845
YEAST PROCESS AND PRODUCT
Michael S. Ripka, Huntington, Conn., assignor to Nabisco
Brands, Inc., Parsippany, N.J.
Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,111
Int. a.3 C12N 1/16. 1/18
U.S. a. 435—255 9 Qalms
1. An improved process for culturing yeast which com-
prises: purifying molasses by passing the molasses through an
ultrafiltration device effective to reject solids having molecu-
lar weights greater than about 30,000 daltons to produce a first
permeate, and passing the first permeate through at least one
additional filtration device having an average pore diameter of
from about 0.2 to about 1.2 microns to produce a yeast culture
medium, wherein the filtration devices are effective in combi-
nation to reduce the microorganism count to a level effective
to produce yeast suitable for food use; innoculating the yeast
culture medium with yeast; and subjecting the yeast and yeast
culture medium to conditions effective to propagate the yeast.
4,379,846
FERMENTATION APPARATUS
Alexandr N. Shkidchenko, Puschino, mikroraion "G", 30, kv.
51; Boris F. Nesterov, Puschino, mikroraion "V", 24, k?. 62;
Vyacheslav G. Sharov, Puschino, mikroraion "V", 22, kv. 45,
and Boris I. Smolin, Puschino, 25, kv. 5, all of Moskovskaya
oblast, U.S.S.R.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,598
Int. a.' C12M 1/02. 1/06. 1/14
U.S. a. 435—316 7 Oaims
4,379,843
IMMOBILIZATION OF POLYNUCLEOTIDES AND
POLYPEPTIDES WITH TRITYLATED
POLYSACCHARIDES
Peter Cashion, 821 Hanson St., Fredericton, New Brunswick,
, Canada (E3B 4A6)
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,258
Int. a.3 C12N 11/10: C12P 19/34: C12N 11/12. 11/06
U.S. a. 435—178 40 Oaims
1. A composition of matter, comprising a polynucleotide or
polypeptide attracted to a substantially hydrated polysaccha-
ride through a triphenylmethyl ether group bonded to said
polysaccharide.
4,379,844
BIOCONVERSION OF INDUSTRIAL CELLULOSIC
PULP MATERIALS TO PROTEIN ENRICHED PRODUCT
Murray M. Young, Waterloo, Canada, assignor to University of
Waterloo, Waterloo, Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 3,998, Jan. 17, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,329
Int. 0.3 C12N 1/24. 1/22
U.S. O. 435—251 5 Claims
1. A process for the formation of proteinaceous material,
which consists of:
(a) aerobically fermenting a sterile mixture of a cellulosic
wood product in divided form selected from the group
consisting of wood pulp and paper stock and a solution of
non-carbon nutrient supplement in a culture of the fungus,
Chaetomium cellulolyticum. at a pH of about 5 to about 7
and at a temperature of about 30° to about 45° C. for a time
sufficient to grow the fungus and provide a solid mass
1. A fermenUtion apparatus for use with liquid substrates
comprising:
a temperature-controlled jacket;
a housing defined by walls having an inner surface, the
housing being disposed inside said temperature-controlled
jacket and adapted to be filled with said liquid substrate;
an agitation means having a shaft with stirrers accommo-
dated in the interior of said housing, the shaft of the agitat-
ing means and the walls of said housing being made hol-
low and being made from a capillary-porous material;
a first group of elements intended for the cultivation of a
layer of microorganisms thereon disposed inside said
housing and acting to expand the useful interior surface of
the apparatus;
a second group of elements intended for the cultivation of a
layer of microorganisms thereon disposed inside said
housing and acting to expand the useful interior surface of
the apparatus;
a gap formed between said groups of elements; and
at least one said group of elements arranged to be capable of
442
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
movement relative to another said group of elements such
that during the movement the elements of this group act to
control the thickness of said layer of microorganisms
being cultivated in said gap.
4,379,849
METHOD AND MEANS FOR THE EXAMINATION OF
UNCOAGULATED BLOOD
Ken Heimreid, Brananveien 44 B, 3940 Heistad, Norway
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,818
Qaims priority, application Norway, Oct. 4, 1979, 793190
Int. a.' BOID 21/26: GOIN ii//6
U.S. a. 436-177 5 Qaims
4,379,847
SUSPENDING MEDIUM FOR IMMUNOLOGIC
REACTIONS
Mitchell J. Fruitstone, Miami, Fla.; Michele M. Tilly, Calgary,
Canada, and Betty G. Pixton, Miami, Fla., assignors to Amer-
ican Hospital Supply Corporation, Evanston, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 76,716, Sep. 19, 1979, Pat. No.
4,259,207. This application Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,098
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 31,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a,' GOIN 3i/54. 31/02: C09K 3/00: GOIN 33/50
U.S. CI. 436-8 28 Claims
1 A suspendmg medium for an immunologic reaction com-
prismg gelatin, having a Bloom rating from about 75 to about
300 at a concentration such that the Bloom rating times con-
centration in weight percent is from about 40 to about 150;
albumin, at a concentration of from about 3.0 wt, % to about
7.0 wt 9e: sufficient organic solute to provide an osmolality of
from about 150 mOsm/kg. H2O to about 450 mOsm/kg. HiQ;
sufficient salt of an alkali or alkaline earth metal to provide an
ionic strength equivalent to about a 0.01 molar to about a 0.10
molar solution of sodium chloride; and a pH from about 6.0 to
about 8.0.
0
1. A method for facilitating the examination of uncoagulated
blood comprising (1) filling the blood into a plastic test tube,
(2) placing in the upper layer of the blood one or more bodies
of glass or another suitable material with a surface whose
characteristics correspond to glass, (3) placing above said one
or more bodies an overlying layer of small beads or other
suitable particles whose specific gravity is such that the small
beads or other suitable particles become embedded as rein-
forcement in the fibrin layer following centrifugation and (4)
centrifuging the blood while said body or bodies is in friction
contact with the interior surface of the tube and pressing said
body or bodies through the blood during said centrifugation.
4,379 848
METHOD OF ANALYZING AN AQUEOUS LIQUID FOR
HEXACYANOFERRATES
David C. Yeaw, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,621
Int. a.3 GOIN 31/22
U.S. a. 436-84 ,6 Qaims
, -^ lit- *J
■/&•% ^mM I
(7)
i 1--!
.i,
1. A method for detecting hexacyanoferrates in an aqueous
liquid, the method comprising the steps of:
(a) forming an alkaline reaction system comprising the aque-
ous liquid and a cobaltic complex of tris-l.lO-phenanthro-
line or tris-2,2-bipyridyl;
(b) acidifying the reaction system to effect a detectable
change in the spectral density thereof indicative of the
presence of hexacyanoferrates in the aqueous liquid; and
(c) observing the detectable change indicative of the pres-
ence of hexacyanoferrates.
4,379,850
HEMOLYTIC METHOD FOR THE KINETIC
DETERMINATION OF ANTISTREPTOLYSIN O
ANTIBODIES IN BLOOD OR SERUM SAMPLES, USING
OXIDIZED STREPTOLYSIN O
Antonio Ricci, Monteriggioni, Italy, assignor to Diesse Diagnos-
tica Senese S.r.l., Milan, Italy
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,442
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jul. 3, 1980, 23215 A/80
Int. a J GOIN 33/54
U.S. a. 436-517 16 Qaims
1 A hemolytic method for the kinetic determination of
antistreptolysin O antibodies (ASO) in a whole blood sample,
consisting of:
reacting a first reagent containing a single dose of oxidized
streptolysin O (SO) with the specific antibodies which
may be present in the blood sample under examination;
allowing the necessary time to pass for the reaction between
the oxidized SO and said antibodies to take place;
returning the oxidized SO to its reduced state by adding a
second reagent;
measuring the rate of hemolysis; and
comparing said rate of hemolysis with the rate of hemolysis
shown graphically for samples of known ASO litre, thus
obtaining the kinetic determination of the ASO titre of the
blood sample under examination.
4,379,851
TINTED BOROSILICATE GLASSES
Paul S. Danielson, Coming; Ronald P. Mattison, Big Flats, and
Albert J. Werner, Horseheads, all of N.Y., assignors to Cor-
ning Glass Works, Coming, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 393,059
Int. a.3 C03C 3/08
U.S. a. 501-66 2 Qaims
1. A transparent glass which, after thermal tempering, exhib-
its a light gray-brown color and demonstrates such chromatic-
•ty (x, y) and luminous transmittance (Y) values that x ranges
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
443
between about 0.3440-0.3500, y ranges between about
0.3400-0.3525, and Y ranges between about 37-52, consists
essentially, expressed in terms of weight percent on the oxide
basis, of
Si02— 80-82
B2O3— 11.25-12
FOR C I.E. ILLUMINANT C
Na20— 5.25-6
AI2O3— 1.9-2.1
Mn02— 0.05-0.5
NiO— 0.01-0.07
Cr203— 0.005-0.03.
4,379,853
MAGNETIC DEVICE HAVING A MONOCRYSTALLINE
GARNET SUBSTRATE BEARING A MAGNETIC LAYER
Dieter Mateika, Ellerbek, and Rolf Laurien, Pinneberg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to V.S. Philips Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 168,227
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 12,
1979, 2928176; Mar. 7, 1980, 3008706
Int. a.' C04B 35/50
U.S. a. 501—135 4 Qaims
uitcP
1. A single crystal on the basis of rare earth metal gallium
garnet, characterized by the composition
3+ n2 + /-io-^ +
-;.B,
Ga
5-x-2y
CJ^D^XyOn,
4,379^852
BORIDE-BASED REFRACTORY MATERIALS
Tadahiko Watanabe, Saga, and Shinichi Kono, Ikoma, both of
Japan, assignors to Director-Generai of the Agency of Indus-
trial Science and Technology, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,235
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 26, 1980, 55-117362
Int. a.^ C04B 35/58
U.S. a. 501— 87 6 Qaims
1. A refractory sintered body composed essentially of
(a) at least 30% by weight of at least one metal boride se-
lected from the group consisting of MB2 type diborides of
titanium, vanadium, niobium, tantalum, chromium, mo-
lybdenum, mangane-.e, zirconium, hafnium, and aluminum
and M2B5 type borides of molybdenum and tungsten,
(b) from 0.01 to 50% by weight of at least one binder ingre-
dient selected from the group consisting of the borides of
nickel, iron, cobalt, manganese and titanium other than the
MB2 type diborides and alloys of nickel and phosphorus,
and
(c) from 0. 1 to 50% by weight of at least one additive ingre-
dient selected from the group consisting of WC, TiC,
TaC, NbC, VC, Zr02, TiN, ZrN, TaN, and VN, the
balance being substantially the metal boride of the compo-
nent (a), or
(d) the metal boride of the component (a) and up to 40% by
weight, based on the sintered body, of at least one MB
type boride of a metal selected from the group consisting
of tantalum, niobium, tungsten, zirconium, hafnium, mo-
lybdenum, and vanadium.
wherein
A = gadolinium and/or samarium and/or neodym and/or
yttrium
B = calcium and/or strontium
C = magnesium
D = zirconium and/or tin
and 0< X ^0.7;O<y^0.7 and x + y^O.8.
4,379,854
LOW TEMPERATURE HRING (1800°-2100° F.) OF
BARIUM TITAN ATE WITH FLUX (LEAD
TITANATE-BISMUTH TITANATE-ZINC OXIDE AND
BORON OXIDE)
Jakob C. K. Soong, State College, Pa., assignor to Erie Techno-
logical Products, Inc., Erie, Pa.
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,143
Int. a.5 C04B 35/46
U.S. a. 501—138 1 Cl»im
1. A method for making a dense ceramic dielectric body
possessing very high dielectric constant at 25' C. which con-
sists essentially of firing at between 1800° and 2100° F. a body
of mixed powders of ceramic and flux, said ceramic powders
consisting essentially of pwwders of barium titanate and pow-
ders of SrZrOs as cubic point shifter, and said flux powders
consisting essentially of 10 parts by weight/100 of the aforesaid
ceramic powders and said flux powders consisting essentially
of powders of lead titanate, powders of bismuth titanate, pow-
ders of metal oxide flux selected from the group consisting of
444
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
powders of ZnO and powders of B2O3, the weight of the
bismuth titanate and lead titanate powders being substantially
through said second resin particles with sufficient force to
prevent upward expansion of said bed; and
E. withdrawing said recycled regenerant solution from said
vessel essentially at said interface before it can pass into
said body of first resin particles.
twice the weight of the powders of ZnO and B2O3. and ZnO
being 24 to 40% and B2O3 0 to 12% by weight of the fiux.
4,379,855
METHOD OF ION EXCHANGE REGENERATION
Peter E. Down, Summit, and Walter J. Tomlinson, Jr., Harring-
ton Park, both of N.J., assignors to Ecodyne Corporation,
Chicago, III.
Filed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,525
Int. a.' BOIJ 49/00
U.S. a. 521-26 „ Claims
©-/^
,1/^.r^
-//
'1
"%'
4,379,856
POLYURETHANE FOAM MOLDING WITH ZONES OF
DIFFERENT INDENTATION HARDNESS AND A
PROCESS FOR ITS PRODUCTION
Reinhard Samaritter; Winfried Schoberth, and Robert Volland,
all of Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. o# Germany
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,595
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan 23
1981, 3102140 '
Int. Q\? C08G 18/14
U.S. a. 521-51 1, c,ai„«
1. A polyurethane molding having zones of different hard-
ness in which the polyurethane foam molding is a reaction
product of:
a a polyether polyol component containing at least two
hydroxyl groups and having a molecular weight of from
400 to 10,000 in which at least 10 wt. % of the hydroxyl
groups are primary hydroxyl groups; and
b a polyisocyanate component which is a mixture of di-
phenyl methane diisocyanates and oligomeric polyphenyl
polymethylene polyisocyanates which mixture conUins
from 60-90wt. '7r4.4idiphenyl methane diisocyanate and
from 3 to 30 wt. % 2.4'-diphenyl methane dissocyanate .
said reaction product having (i) zones of different hardness as
indicated by a difference between the indices of the reaction
mixture for those zones and (ii) transition zones between said
zones (i) which transition zones are free from any hardening.
4,379,857
INSULATION COMPOSITION
Douglas E. Hansen, Kansas City, Mo.; Steven D. Johnson,
Prairie Village, Kans., and Richard L. Motko, Kansas City,
Mo., assignors to Cook Paint and Varnish Company, Kansas
City, Mo.
Filed Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 316,041
Int. C\? C08J 9/22
U.S. a. 521-54 MQaims
1. An insulating composition comprising in combination a
liquid binder, a heat expanded polystyrene material in bead or
granular form and a reinforcing pigment, said liquid binder
comprising a 95:5 to 50:50 mixture, by weight of an acrylic or
vinyl polymer emulsion and an alkali metal silicate, said ex-
panded polystyrene being present in an amount ranging from 5
to 25 percent by weight of said composition.
1. A method of upflow regeneration of a spent stratified bed
of ion exchange resin particles in which one part of said bed is
a body of particles of a first resin occupying the lower part of
a vessel and another part of said bed is a body of particles of a
second resin deposited on top of said body of first resin parti-
cles, said method comprising the steps of:
A. passing a regenerant solution upwardly through said
body of first resin particles;
B. withdrawing from said vessel the regenerant solution that
has passed through said first resin particles essentially at
the interface between said first and second resins before
such regenerant solution can pass upwardly through said
second resin particles;
C. recycling at least some of such withdrawn regenerant
solution to said vessel above said second resin particles;
D. passing such recycled regenerant solution downwardly
4^79,858
FOAMED PLASTICS
Hirosuke Suzuki, 4-21-8 Kotesashi-cho, Tokorozawa, Japan
Filed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410^25
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 28, 1981, 56-134934
Int. a.3 CD8J 9/24
U.S. a. 521-54 1 ctain
8
1. A melt molded foamed plastic composition comprising a
tetrafluoroethylene-perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether copolymer
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
445
resin matrix and stretched porous resin fragments selected
from the group consisting of polytetrafluoroethylene,
polyethylene and polypropylene wherein said porous
fragments have a porosity of 40 to 90%.
4,379,859
PRE-FOAMED PARTICLES OF POLYPROPYLENE
RESIN AND PROCESS FOR PRODUCOON THEREOF
Kuninori Hirosawa, Isehara, and Sumio Shimada, Hiratsuka,
both of Japan, assignors to Japan Styrene Paper Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 322,917
Claims priority, application Japan, Not. 22, 1980, 55-164786
Int. a.3 C08J 9/18
U.S. a. 521—59 9 Qaims
1. Substantially non-crosslinked pre-foamed particles of a a
propylene copolymer resin selected from the group consisting
of an ethylene/propylene random copolymer or a mixture of
an ethylene/propylene random copolymer with low density
polyethylene and/or an ethylene/vinyl acetate copolymer as a
base resin, provided that the ethylene/propylene random co-
polymer has an ethylene contents of 1 to 20% by weight.
(a) represent a Ci-Ce-alkyl or Ce-Cio-cycloalkyl group or
(b) form a heterocyclic ring containing 4-7 C-atoms, which
heterocyclic ring may contain hetero groups in addition to
the N-atom and wherein the additional hetero groups may
be substituted by a C1-C3 alkyl, or
(c) together represent a group of the formula
4,379,861
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
POLYURETHANES USING MORPHOLINE
COMPOUNDS AS CATALYSTS
Peter Haas, Haan, and Hans-Albrecht Freitag, Bergisch-Glad-
bach, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Ak-
tiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,539
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 12,
1980, 3046905
Int. a.3 C08G 18/14
VJS. CI. 521—115 5 Qaims
1. A process for the production of polyurethanes by the
reaction of compounds with a molecular weight of 400 to
10000 having at least two isocyanate reactive hydrogen atoms
with polyisocyanates in the presence of catalysts having ter-
tiary amino groups and optionally in the presence of chain
lengthening agents of molecular weight 32 to 400, foam stabi-
lizers, water and/or organic blowing agents and other auxil-
iary agents and additives, the improvement whereby the cata-
lysts used are morpholine derivatives of the general formula
f-^
O N— (CH2)x— N— rL.
\ / L
D
wherein
X denotes an integer from 3 to 6, and
Rl and R^ are identical or different and
-(CH2)«
-(CH2)„
\
r
/
N-(CH2)3--N
in which n and m represent identical or different integers
from 2 to 4, preferably 2, or
(d) represent
4,379,860
POROUS, POWDERY POLYPROPYLENE
Walter Fickel, Erlenbach, and Gerhard Ries, Obemburg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Akzo NV, Amhem, Neth-
erlands
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,045 v
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jil. IS,
1980, 3026762 /
Int. a.3 C08J 9/26 /
U.S. a. 521— 61 II Qaims
1. Process for the production of porous, powdery polypro-
pylene, comprising slowly cooling down to approximate room
temperature, hot solutions of polypropylene in pentaerythrol
ester, thereby forming a solidified mass, and extracting the
solidified mass with an extractant in which pentaerythrol is
soluble.
-(CH2)3-N
O
4,379,862
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
POLYURETHANE RESINS USING LOW MOLECULAR
WEIGHT POLYHYDROXYL COMPOUNDS PREPARED
BY THE CONDENSATION OF FORMALDEHYDE
Kuno Wagner, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 122,931, Feb. 20, 1980, Pat. No. 4,301,310,
which is a division of Ser. No. 829,173, Aug. 30, 1977, Pat. No.
4,219,508. This application Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,219
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 11,
1977, 2721186
Int. Q.' C08G 18/14
U.S. Q. 521—158 1 Qalm
1. In a process for the preparation of cellular or non-cellular
polyurethane resins by the reaction of
(a) polyisocyanates with
(b) compounds with a molecular weight of between 32 and 400
having at least two active hydrogen atoms, and optionally
(c) compounds with a molecular weight of between 400 and
10,000 having at least two active hydrogen atoms, and op-
tionally
(d) blowing agents, catalysts and other known additives,
the improvement which comprises using as component (b)
products prepared by the condensation of formaldehyde in an
aqueous reaction medium in the presence of metal compounds
as catalysts and of compounds capable of enediol formation as
cocatalysts, by introducing synthesis gases containing formal-
dehyde continuously or discontinuously at temperatures of
between 10° and 150° C. into an absorption liquid comprising
(a) 5 to 99% by weight of water,
(b) 0. 1 to 90% by weight of compounds capable of enediol
formation as cocatalysts,
(c) 0 to 20% by weight of soluble or insoluble metal com-
pounds as catalysts optionally bound to high molecular
weight carriers, and
(d) 0 to 60% by weight of one or more monohydric or higher
hydric low molecular weight alcohols and/or higher molec-
ular weight polyhydroxyl compounds
and having a pH of 3 to 10, and the formaldehyde being con-
densed at the same time or, if the absorption solution contains
no catalyst, the formaldehyde being condensed by the addition
of catalyst, stopping the condensation of formaldehyde with
itself by cooling and/or by inactivation of the catalyst with
acids in known manner when the reaction mixture has a resid-
ual formaldehyde content of from 0 to 10% by weight; remov-
ing the catalyst in known manner; and reducing the aldehyde
and keto groups present in the reaction product to hydroxyl
groups.
446
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
4,379,863
COPOLYMER COMPOSITION AND DELIVERY
SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING A PROTECTIVE BARRIER
HLM FOR THE SKIN
Martin Snyder, North Plainfield, N.J., assignor to C. R, Bard,
Inc.. Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Jan. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 224,700
Int. a.'C08J 7/02
L.S. Cl. 523-105 19 Oaims
1. A film-former composition for application to the skin for
providing a generally water insoluble, breathable skin barrier
film for shielding peristomal skin, perineal skin and the like
which comprises on the basis of weight from about 59^ to
about I2.5Cf of an acrylic resin selected from the group com-
prising butyl methacrylate. n-butyl/iso-butyl methacrylate
copolymer dissolved in a physiologically acceptable relatively
volatile solvent selected from C.^-Cioalkanols and including a
and minor proportion of a physiologically acceptable plasti-
cizer
H O
I II
CH2=C— C— R9
April 12, 1983
(c)
where R"^ is hydroxyalkoxy having from 1 to about 6 carbon
atoms or vinyl acetate; and
(d) mixtures thereof: the total of the molar quantities of said
first and second monomers to the molar quantity of said
third monomer being in the range of 1:1 to 1:0.2,
which is substantially hydrated with water.
4,379,864
POLYMERIC COMPOSITIONS AND HYDROGELS
FOR.MED THEREFRO.M
Paul M. Gallop, Chestnut Hill, and Donald R. Korb, Boston,
both of Mass., assignors to Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc., Palo Alto,
Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 10,992, Feb. 9, 1979, Pat. No. 4,267,295.
This application Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,739
Int. CI.' C08F 220/20
U.S. CI. 523-106 33 Qaims
1. A hydrogel comprising of hydrophilic polymer compris-
ing the polymerization product of.
a first monomer comprising a dihydroxyalkyl acrylate or
dihydroxyalkyl methacrylate,
a second monomer comprising a substantially water insolu-
ble alkyl acrylate or alkyl methacrylate. the mole ratio of
said first monomer to said second monomer varying
within the range from about 13 to about 20:1;
a third monomer comprising a compound selected from the
group consisting of:
4,379,865
BINDER FOR CASTING SAND AND RESIN-COATED
GRAINS OF SAND
Kazuyuki Nishikawa, Toyohashi, and Katsumi Hirao, Akashi,
both of Japan, assignors to Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.,
Osaka and Shinto Kogio, Ltd., Nagoya, both of, Japan
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,875
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb, 1, 1980, 55-11322
'Int. Cl.' B22C ]/00, 11/22: C08G 12/00, 12/12
L.S. a. 523-139 7 atAm^
1. A composition consisting essentially of a mixture of ap-
proximately 43 to 60 wt. % of cellulose acetate which is solu-
ble in acetone, has an acetylation degree of from 48 to 57% and
has a limiting viscosity number of from 0.15 to 2.2 measured in
an acetone solution thereof at 25° C, from 17 to 20 wt. % of a
plasticizer for said cellulose acetate, and from 20 to 40 wt. %
of a thermosetting resin precondensate selected from the group
consisting of acetone-soluble alkylated methylolmelamines,
acetone-soluble alkylated methylolureas and mixtures thereof.
H
CH2=C— (CH2)n— R'
(a)
4,379,866
PLUGGING REFRACTORY MATERIAL HAVING RESIN
BINDER SYSTEM
Francis W. Henry, Jr., and Subrata Banerjee, both of Glen
Burnie, Md., assignors to General Refractories Company,
BaJa Cynwyd, Pa.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,760
Int. CI.' C08G 8/28
U.S. Cl. 523-140 28 Qaims
1 A plugging refractory comprising a refractory material
and a resin binder system, said resin binder system comprising
a phenol-formaldehyde or resorcinol polymer resin and a
formaldehyde-source, cross-linking agent, the formaldehyde-
source, cross-linking agent being tris (hydroxymethyl) nitro-
methane.
where R^ is hydroxyl. alkoxy having 1 to 6 carbon atoms,
a sulfonic acid moiety.
O
II
O
— CNR-^R? or — N— C— r5
wherein R* and R^ are independently selected from the
group consisting of hydrogen and an unsubstituted or
substituted alkyl group having from 1 to about 3 carbon
atoms, or R'' and R' may be combined to form a cyclic
group, and n is an integer from 0 to about 4, except that n
must be at least I when R^ is hydroxyl;
4,379,867
WRITING MEDIUM FOR BALL POINT WRITING <>
INSTRUMENT
Tsunoda Noriaki, No. 38, Shinmachi, Tanogun, Gunma-ken,
Japan
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No, 290,438
Int. CI.^ C08K 5/10
U.S. a. 523-161 12aalms
1. A writmg medium for a ball point writing instrument
comprising:
a pigment at least as a colorant,
a polynorbornane represented by the following formula in a
repetition unit, and
CHj O
CH2=C C-R6
(b)
[
]
..,i,^,» 9b .^ u A II 1. . , . ^ solvent solution for dissolving said polynorbornane and
NR 7R8 H ' p 7 ' H p? I '°. ^ r^" ''°'"' °' '^°"^'"*"g ^ '"- •>«'>'"g P°"" o^g-nic Llvent having a
vTh r.^ T. 1 ''' '"^^P^"^^"''y ^'^^'«d f^O'" boiling point of less than 180' C. a^d a high boiling point
hydrogen and lower alkyl groups havmg 1 to 4 carbon atoms; organic solvent having a boiling point of higher than WC.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
447
4,379,868
METHOD FOR PRODUCING HYDROPHILIC HLLERS
FOR PLASTICS AND RUBBERS
Frantisek Juracka, Pardubice, and Slavko Hudecek, Prague,
both of Czechoslovakia, assignors to Ceskoslovenska akade-
mie ved, Prague, Czechoslovakia
Continuation of Ser. No. 912,202, Jun. 6, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 691,705, Jun. 1, 1976,
abandoned. This application Jul. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 172,426
Int. a.5 C08L 47/00
U.S. a. 523—201 5 Claims
1. A procedure for preparation of hydrophilic fillers for
plastics and rubbers based on high-molecular weight com-
pounds, insoluble in water, obtained by the copolymerization
of unsaturated monomers insoluble in water and monomers
soluble in water, especially suitable for the manufacturing of
hygienic synthetic leathers, wherein a charge consisting of a
monomer or a mixture of monomers insoluble in water selected
from the group consisting of divinylbenzene, ethyleneglycol
dimethacrylate and ethyleneglycol diacrylate is first subjected
to emulsion polymerization until the conversion of the double
bonds thereof is 40 to 70% complete, after which an addition
consisting of a monomer or a mixture of monomers, soluble in
water, selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid,
methacrylic acid, and aminoesters and monoesters of polyhyd-
ric alcohols and amides thereof or their aqueous solution is
added to the polymerizing dispersion, wherein the mass ratio
of monomers insoluble and monomers soluble in water varies
from 2:1 to 1:3 whereafter on completion of the polymerization
the carboxylic groups, if desired, are neutralized in the latex-
dispersion thus obtained.
length, the height of the protrusions being not less than 0 1
mm.
4,379,869
CATIONIC LATICES AND THEIR
ELECTRODEPOSITION
Bahram Siadat, and Joseph W. Raksis, both of Columbia, Md.,
assignors to W. R. Grace & Co., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,337
Int. a.' C08K 9/00
U.S. a. 523—206 15 Qaims
5. Method according to claim 1 in which the latex is made by
copolymerizing diethyl amino ethyl methacrylate, butyl acry-
late, methyl methacrylate, and ethyl acrylate.
4,379,870
REINFORCING MATERIAL FOR HYDRAULIC
SUBSTANCES AND METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION
THEREOF
Hisashi Matsumoto, Iwakuni, Japan, assignor to Mitsui Petro-
chemical Industries, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 51,387, Jun. 25, 1979, Pat. No.
4,297,414. This application Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,235
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 7, 1978, 53-81917; Jul.
17, 1978, 53-86182; Dec. 20, 1978, 53-160804
Int. a.3 C08K 3/34: D02G 3/00
U.S. a. 523—221 8 Qaims
4,379,871
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF CARBON BLACK
CONTAINING PIGMENT-SYNTHETIC RESIN
CONCENTRATES
Peter Werle, Arnsberg; Hans Griif, Rodenbach, and Erwin Wal-
ter, Horstein, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Deut-
sche Gold- und Silber-Scheideanstalt Vormals Roessler,
Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 641,604, Dec. 17, 1975, abandoned.
This application Dec. 30, 1977, Ser. No. 865,968
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 9,
1975, 2500664
Int. CI.' C08J 3/20
U.S. Q. 523—331 40 Qaims
1. In a process for the production of a pigment-synthetic
resin concentrate containing an organic solvent soluble poly-
mer and carbon black having rapid distributability m organic
solvent media, the improvement consisting essentially of con-
tinuously homogenizing in a mixer (1) a carbon black contam-
ing pigment powder and (2) an organic solvent soluble syn-
thetic resin with (3) an organic solvent for said synthetic resin
as the sole solvent and in an amount sufficient to dissolve the
synthetic resin, dispersing the pigment in the mixture, remov-
ing the solvent from the dispersion by drying and comminuting
the resulting pigment-synthetic resin concentrate.
4,379,872
AMPHOTERIC AMINO SULFONATE DERIVATIVES OF
EPOXY RESINS
Shin-Ichi Ishikura, Kyoto; Kazunori Kanda, Yao, and Ryuzo
Mizuguchi, Yawata, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Paint
Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,077
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 22, 1980, 55-116292;
Aug. 22, 1980, 55-116293
Int. CI.' C08G 59/14: C08L 63/00
U.S. Q. 523—406 11 Claims
1. A water-dispersible modified epoxy resm composition
having at least one terminal amphoteric amino sulfonate group
of the formula:
Rl R: H
1. A formed product comprising a hydraulic substance con-
taining therein a reinforcing material consisting essentially of
an elongated, stretched product of a synthetic resin having a
thickness of 100 to 50,000 denier, having a length of 5 to 100
mm and having discontinuous protrusions over its entire
— CHi— C— CH— N— R4— SOi©
'I I
OH R3
wherein Ri and R2 are hydrogen or methyl, R3 is hydrogen or
Ci-C2oalkyl optionally substituted with higher alkylsulfinyl or
higher alkanoyloxy, and R4is Ci-Cbalkylene optionally substi-
tuted with 2-hydroxyethyl, said composition being a reaction
product of an epoxy resin having a plurality of terminal groups
of the formula:
V A'
— CH2— C CH
\ /
o
wherein Ri and R2 are as defined, with an amino sulfonate of
the formula:
R3— NH— R4— SO3M
wherein Rj and R4 are as defined, and M is a cation, with
removal of said cation.
448
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,873
PROCESS FOR SETTING A LATEX OF A FILM
FORMING POLYMER
Douglas Wilson, Weybridge, England, assignor to The British
Petroleum Company Limited, London, England
Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,189
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 1, 1980,
8025260
Int. a.^ C08K 3/34
U.S. a. 524-7 1 Qaim
1. A process for the delayed action setting of a composition
compnsing an anionic latex of polychloroprene or a styrene-
butadiene rubber by the addition of a delayed action setting
agent characterized in that the setting agent is a mixture of (1)
a compound containing a multivalent metal cation, which
metal cation compound has a solubility in the range of 0.1 g to
150 g per 100 C of water at 20° C. and which has a dissolution
time greater than one minute selected from the group consist-
ing of aluminum acetate, barium nitrate, cupric sulfate, lead
acetate, calcium sulphate, calcium sulfate dihydrate, calcium
sulfate hemihydrate, ferrous sulfate, cupric acetate, magnesium
acetate, and magnesium carbonate, and (2) and alkali metal
silico fluoride.
4,379,876
METHYL METHACRYLATE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE
IMPACT MODIHER POLYMERS, POLYVINYL
CHLORIDE, COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS
Richard R. Clikeman, Newtown, Pa.; Donald H. Jones, Vincen-
town, N.J.; Thomas J. Shortridge, Levittown, and Edward J.
Troy, Bristol, both of Pa., assignors to Rohm and Haas Com-
pany, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Jul. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 167,510
Int. a.3 C08K 5/05. 5/13; C08F 220/14
U.S. a. 524—109 7 Qaims
1. Impact modifier composition comprising a methyl metha-
crylate-butadiene-styrene polymer prepared in two or more
stages and containing about 50 to 90 parts polybutadiene or
compolymer of polybutadiene and about 0.01 to 5 percent by
weight of 1,1,3-tris (2-methyl-4-hydroxy-5-tert-butyl phenyl)
butane.
4,379,874
POLYMER COMPOSITION COMPRISING
POLYACRYLONITRILE POLYMER AND
MULTI-BLOCK COPOLYMER
Vladimir A. Stoy, 92 QoTer La., Princeton, N.J, 08540
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,032
Int. C\? C08L 53/00. 33/20
U.S. a. 524-27 10 Qaims
1. A novel polymer composition comprised of polyacryloni-
trile polymer and a multiblock copolymer with acrylonitrile
and non-crystalline polymer sequences with an average num-
ber of said sequences per multiblock copolymer being equal
and at least 2, said acrylonitrile sequence having a mean molec-
ular weight of at least 500, said non-crystalline polymer se-
quence being comprised of at least about 10 units and constitut-
ing one or more highly polar units selected from the group
consisting of acrylamide, N-substituted acrylamide, acrylic
acid, esters of acrylic acid, salts of acrylic acid, hydrazides of
acrylic acid and glutarimide.
4,379,877
HRE RETARDANT THERMOPLASTIC MOLDING
COMPOSITIONS
Usama E. Younes, West Chester, Pa., assignor to Atlantic Rich-
field Company, Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,648
Int. a. 3 C08K 5/52. 5/53: C08L 85/02
U.S. a. 524-123 3 Claims
1. A thermoplastic molding composition comprising a ho-
mogeneous mixture of a copolymer of a monovinyl aromatic
monomer and an alpha, beta-unsaturated cyclic anhydride and
an alternating copolymer having the formula:
r2
I
R2
-P-eO-CH-CH);S-(-Wtrf-CH-CH-0^7S-
R2 R2
R'
wherein R' represents a halogen, a (Ci to Cio) alkyl or haloge-
nated (Ci to Cio) alkyl group, hydroxy, a (C| to Cio) alkoxy or
halogenated (Ci to Cio) alkoxy group, an aryl or halogenated
aryl group, and an aryloxy or halogenated aryloxy group; X
may or may not be present and represents oxygen or sulfur; W
represents at least one monomer selected from the group con-
sisting of dienes, styrenes, vinylidene chloride, vinyl esters,
acrylic and methacrylic esters, and acrylonitrile; each R^ sepa-
rately represents hydrogen, a (Ci to C4) alkyl group, or an aryl
group; n represents an integer equal to or greater than 2; each
m separately represents an integer from 1 to 20, and b repre-
sents an integer from 2 to 1000.
4,379,875
COALESONG AID FOR HIGH NITRILE COPOLYMER
LATEX COATINGS
Kenneth E. Samuels, Twin Lakes, and Wayne T. Wiggins, Au-
rora, both of Ohio, assignors to The Standard Oil Company,
Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,751
Int. a.J C08K 5/34
U.S. a. 524—104 11 aaims
1. A coating composition comprising a blend of (1) a latex
produced by the polymerization of a major proportion of a
monounsaturated nitrile and a minor proportion of at least one
monovinyl monomer component copolymerizable therewith
optionally in the presence of a preformed diene rubber, and (2)
a coalescing agent which is (a) a solvent for (I), (b) has a
boiling point between 100° and 300* C, and (c) does not azeo-
trope with water.
4,379,878
FOOD-GRADE VINYL HALIDE POLYMER
COMPOSITIONS STABILIZED WITH MONOALKYLTIN
COMPOUNDS
William A. Larkin, Morristown, N.J., assignor to MAT Chemi-
cals Inc., Woodbridge, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 913,795, Jun. 8, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 707,702,
Jul. 22, 1976, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No.
343,648, Mar. 22, 1973, abandoned. This application Oct. 13,
1981, Ser. No. 310,954
Int. a.3 C08K 5/58
U.S. a. 524—181 25 Claims
1. A stabilized vinyl halide polymer composition suitable for
contact with food containing more than O.IS parts per 100
parts of polymer of monoalkyltin compounds of formula:
n— CgH i7Sn(SCH2COOR)3
where R is a linear or branched alkyl group of 8 carbon atoms.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
449
4,379,879
HEAT RESISTANT RESIN COMPOSITION AND
INSULATING WIRE USING THE SAME WHICH IS A
COMPOSITION OF AN ACTIVE HYDROGEN
COMPOUND AND THE REACTION PRODUCT OF A
POLYVALENT ISOCYANATE AND A POLYVALENT
CARBOXYLIC AOD ANHYDRIDE IN AN ORGANIC
SOLVENT
Yasunori Okada, and Shozo Kasai, both of Hitachi, Japan,
assignors to Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,110
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 2, 1980, 55-91180
Int. a.' C08L 79m
U.S. a. 524—186 18 Claims
1. A heat resistant resin composition comprising:
(A) a reaction product obtained by reacting
(a) a polyvalent isocyanate having two or more isocyanate
groups in the molecule,
(b) a polyvalent carboxylic acid having one or more acid
anhydride groups in the molecule or a functional deriv-
ative thereof, and, if necessary,
(c) A polyvalent carboxylic acid having two or more
carboxyl groups in the molecule or a functional deriva-
tive thereof,
in an organic solvent, and
(B) a compound having one or more active hydrogens in the
molecule except for a phenolic compound,
said composition being able to be heated or not heated;
and
from 0. 1 to 10% by weight of said compound (B), based
on the weight of the reaction product (A) being added
to reaction product (A) to form said composition.
4,379,880
VINYL HALIDE POLYMER OF ENHANCED
PLASTICIZER UPTAKE
William L. Schall, Grand Island, N.Y., assignor to Occidental
Chemical Corporation, Niagara Falls, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 193,560, Oct. 3, 1980, Pat. No.
4,342,845. This application Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,127
Int. a.3 C08F 2/02, 114/06; C08K 5/11
U.S. a. 524—297 16 Oaims
I. A process for preparing a vinyl chloride polymer which
comprises (a) polymerizing a reaction charge in bulk liquid
phase in the presence of a polymerization initiator and an inert
diluent consisting essentially of isobutane in an amount from
about 0. 1 to less than 50 weight percent of the reaction charge,
said charge comprising vinyl chloride as the sole polymeriz-
able monomer and (b) reducing the pressure on the resultant
polymerized reaction charge to separate polymer product
from diluent and unreacted monomer.
II. The polymer product of the process of claim 1.
12. The product of claim 11 containing a liquid organic
plasticizer for vinyl halide polymer.
4^79,881
ADHESIVE SUITABLE FOR APPLICATION TO SKIN
Roger F. Peck, Stansted Mountfitchet, England, assignor to
Smith and Nephew Associated Companies Limited, England
FUed M«r. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,987
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 5, 1980,
8007410
Int a.3 C08K 5/10
MS. a. 524—315 9 Claims
1. An adhesive linear polyacrylate which has a K value of 90
to 1 10 and consists of 34% to 62% of n-butyl acrylate residues
62% to 34% of 2-cthylhexyl acrylate residues and 4% to 8% of
acrylic acid residues.
4,379,882
HALOGEN-CONTAINING POLYOLEFIN
COMPOSITION, AND METHOD FOR INACTIVATING
HALOGENS THEREIN
Shigeo Miyata, Takamatsu, Japan, assignor to Kyowa Chemical
Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Not. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,116
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 12, 1980, 55-158152
Int. a.3 C08K 3/20: C08F 6/00
U.S. a. 524-436 6 Qaims
1. A polyolefln composition consisting essentially of
(a) 100 parts by weight of a polyolefm containing halogens
derived from a polymerization catalyst and/or attributed
to the after-halogenation of the polymer, and
(b) about 0.001 to about 10 parts by weight of an aluminum-
magnesium hydroxide represented by the following for-
mula
Mg,_;,AMOH)2 + :r.mH20
(I)
wherein x is a positive number represented by 0<x = 0.5
and m is a positive number represented by 0 = m<2, and
having a BET specific surface area of no more than about 40
m2/g.
4,379,883
CHEMICALLY-INITIATED INVERSE EMULSION
POLYMERIZATION WITH Na, Li/Cl, Br SALT
David C. Zecher, Frederick, Md., assignor to Hercules Incorpo-
rated, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation of Ser. No. 106,214, Dec. 21, 1979, abandoned.
This application Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,847
Int. a.' C08F 2/32
U.S. CI. 524—801 10 Claims
1. In a chemically initiated water-in-oil emulsion polymeri-
zation process for making water-soluble anionic copolymers
from at least two water-soluble, ethylenically unsaturated,
addition polymerizable monomers, at least one of which is
anionic, the improvement comprising: adding a salt selected
from the group consisting of NaCl, NaBr, LiCI and LiBr to the
aqueous phase of the water-in-oil emulsion prior to polymeri-
zation, and dispersing the aqueous phase and oil phase
whereby the droplet size of the aqueous phase in the resulting
emulsion is about S microns or less.
4,379,884
COPOLYMER BLEND OF IMPROVED IMPACT
RESISTANCE
Fay W. Bailey, BartlesriUe, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesrille, Okla.
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,771
Int. C\? C08L 53/02
U.S. a. 525—96 13 Claims
1. A composition comprising:
(a) resinous, non-elastomeric block copolymer of conjugated
diene and vinylarene and (b) copolymer of monovinyla-
rene and olefinically unsaturated nitrile having the struc-
ture
CH25=C— CN
R
wherein R is a member of the group consisting of hydro-
gen, an alkyl group having from 1 -6 carbon atoms and a
halogen; and wherein the amount of (b) in said composi-
tion ranges up to about 30 weight percent based upon the
total weight of (a) and (b).
450
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,885
FLUOROCARBON COATING COMPOSITIONS
John D. Miller, Springdale, Pa., and Valentine J, Grunewalder,
Bayville, N.J., assignors to PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh,
Pa.
-^ Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,679
Int. a.' C08L 63/00
U.S. a. 525-108 6 Qaims
1. A coating composition having a resin solids content of
from about 15% to about 35% and being especially useful as a
primer for substrates consisting essentially of, on a resins solids
basis:
(a) from about 10% to about 15% of a poiyepoxide resm;
(b) from about 30% to about 45% of a thermoplastic acrylic
resm; and
(c) from about 40% to about 55% of a fluorocarbon resin.
4,379,886
LIQUID COATING COMPOSITION HAVING A
REACTIVE CATALYST
Joseph E. McLaughlin, and George A, Strickland, both of Phila-
delphia, Pa., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and
Company, Wilmington, Del.
Division of Ser. No. 144,299, Apr. 28, 1980. This application Jul.
2, 1981, Ser. No. 280,132
Int. a.' C08L 61/28. 61/24
L'.S. CI. 525-162 5 Claims
1. A thermosetting coating composition comprising a binder
of a film forming acrylic polymer or polyester polymer having
reactive hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups or methylol groups
and a crosslinking agent selected from the group consisting of
melamine formaldehyde resin, alkylated melamine formalde-
hyde resin, urea formaldehyde resin or benzoguanamine form-
aldehyde resin and about 0.1-10% by weight, based on the
weight of the coating composition, of reactive catalyst which
IS a solid at 30° C. and comprises a structure selected from the
group of
H{X)C
COOR
COOH. HOOC
COOH
COOR
and mixtures thereof;
wherein R is the residue of neodecanol or 2-ethyl 1,3-hex-
anediol.
4,379,888
COMPOSITION FOR DRAWN RLM, COLD DRAWN
nLM MADE OF SAID COMPOSITION AND PROCESS
FOR MANUFACTURE OF SAID FILM
Isao Yoshimura, Fujisawa; Hideo Hata, and Takashi Kaneko,
both of Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Asahi-Dow
Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 949,253, Oct. 6, 1978, Pat. No. 4,277,578.
This application Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,459
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 11, 1977, 52/120917;
Nov. 22, 1977, 52/139431; May 30, 1978, 53/63870; May 30,
1978, 53/63872
Int. a.' C08L 23/06. 23/08. 23/12, 23/16. 23/20
U.S. a. 525-211 37 Oaims
1. A cold drawn film having a tensile strength of not less
than 5.0 kg/mm^and a haze of not more than 4.0%, which film
comprises a homogeneous blend of the specific combination of
components, namely the combination of (A) + (B)-t-(C),
wherein
(A) is at least one selected from the group consisting of
low-density polyethylene, and low-density polyethylene
admixed with copolymers of ethylene with vinyl ester
monomers, unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acids
and alkyl esters of said monocarboxylic acids which are all
copolymerizable with ethylene,
(B) is an elastomer having a density of not more than 0.91
g/cm-^ and made of an ethylene-a-olefin copolymer, and
(C) is at least one selected from the group consisting of
crystalline polypropylene, high-density polyethylene and
crystalline polybutene-1, wherein the components of the
composition are in amounts such as to satisfy
0.90 ^ B/( A + B) ^ 0.05 and 0.05 ^ C/(A + B) ^ 2.0 in terms
in weight ratio.
4 379 889
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING POLYBUTADIENE RUBBER
WITH ENHANCED MECHANICAL STRENGTH
Hidetomo Ashitaka; Kyohei Oizumi, both of Ichihara; Kazuya
Jinda, Kisarazu, and Kazutoshi Inaishi, Ichihara, all of Japan,
assignors to Ube Industries, Ltd., Chiba, Japan
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,869
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 20, 1979, 54-164773
Int. C\? C08F 4/12. 136/06
U.S. a. 525-247 17 Qaims
1. A process for producing a polybutadiene rubber with
enhanced mechanical strength, comprising the two successive
steps of:
(A) polymerizing a first polymerization mixture comprising
1,3-butadiene and a polymerization medium in the presence
of a cis-l,4-polymerization catalyst which comprises:
(1) a cobalt compound selected from the group consisting of
cobalt complexes with beta-diketones of the formula (II):
4,379,887
ADHESIVE COMPOSITION
Noel M. M. Overbergh, Bertem, Belgium, assignor to Raychem
Corporation, Menio Park, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 262,873, May 12, 1981, abandoned.
This application Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,087
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 12, 1980,
8015576
Int. Q.J C08L 77/07
U.S. Q. 525-184 3I Qaims
1. An adhesive composition produced by mixing a thermo-
plastic polyamide having reactive amine groups attached to the
polyamide molecule with a vinyl-terminated rubber.
R' (ID
R*— C— C— C— RJ
II I II
O R2 o
wherein R' and R^ represent an aliphatic hydrocarbon
radical having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, respectively, and R^
and R^ represent at least one member selected from the
group consisting of a hydrogen atom and an aliphatic
hydrocarbon radical having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, respec-
tively; a cobalt complex with /3-keto acid esters of formula
(III):
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
451
r! (HI)
r4— C— C— C— O— R^
II Li!
o r2 o
wherein R', R^, R-^ and R* are as defined above; cobalt
salts of an organic carboxylic acid having 6 or more car-
bon atoms; and a cobalt halide complex of the formula
(IV):
CoXnYm
(IV)
wherein X represents a halogen atom, n represents an
integer of 2 or 3, Y represents an organic ligand capable of
forming a complex in coordination with the cobalt halide
and m represents an integer of from 1 to 4, and
(2) a dialkyl aluminum halide of the formula (I):
AIR2X
(I)
wherein R represents an alky! radical having 2 to 8 carbon
atoms and X represents a halogen atom, to convert at least
a portion of the amount of said 1,3-butadiene to a cis-1,4-
polybutadiene; and
(B) polymerizing a second polymerization mixture comprising
the resultant cis-l,4-polybutadiene from Step (A), unreacted
1,3-butadiene and a polymerization medium in the presence
of a 1,2-polymerization catalyst which comprises:
1. said cobalt compound;
2. said dialkyl aluminum halide;
3. carbon disulfide; and
4. an electron donor organic compound selected
from the group consisting of an aliphatic polyether, an ali-
phatic carboxylic ester, an aliphatic ketone, an aliphatic
acetal, an aliphatic N,N-dialkyl amide, an aliphatic dialkyl
sulfoxide and a trialkyl phosphate, to convert said cis-1,4-
polybutadiene and said 1,3-butadiene to a polybutadiene
rubber, whereby the resultant polybutadiene rubber com-
prises 70% to 95% by weight of a boiling n-hexane-soluble
fraction thereof having an intrinsic viscosity of from 1 to 5
determined in toluene at a temperature of 30° C. and contain-
ing 95% or more of a cis-l,4-structure, and 5% to 30% by
weight of a boiling n-hexane-insoluble fraction having a
reduced viscosity of from 0.5 to 5, determined in tetrahydro-
naphthalene at a temperature of 135° C, and a melting point
of 180° C. or more, and containing 85% or more of a 1,2-
structure.
4,379,890
WATER-SOLUBLE POLYMERS CARRYING
QUATERNARY AMMONIUM GROUPS, THEIR
PREPARATION AND USE
Alfred Konietzny, and Wilfried Bartz, both of Marl, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Chemische Werke Huels, Aktiengesell-
schaft. Marl, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,796
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 11,
1980,3026300
Int. a.3 C08F s/n
U.S. a. 525—332.8 12 Qaims
1. A water-soluble polymer having quaternary ammonium
groups, prepared by reacting
(a) a low molecular weight alkylating agent with
(b) a corresponding polymer carrying tertiary, quatemizable
amino groups,
wherein
(a) is a low molecular weight oxirane of the formula
R*— CH— CH— R^
\ /
o
wherein R^ and R^ each independently is hydrogen or
alky) of 1 or 2 carbon atoms optionally substituted by
hydroxy or chloride or R** or R^ together represent a
1,3-propyIene or 1,4-butylene chain forming a five- or
six-membered ring with the carbon atoms of the oxirane;
(b) is a polymer which is prepared by epoxidizing up to a
content of titratable epoxy oxygen of 2-10 weight %, a
polymer of 1,3 butadiene monomer having a molecular
weight (M„) of 500-6,000, and prepared from at least 70
mole % of 1,3-butadiene and up to 30 mole % of another
copolymerizable 1,3-diolefin or an a-unsaturated mono-
olefin,
aminating the resultant epoxidation product with a primary-
tertiary or secondary-tertiary diamine of the formula
R' r2 R*
I I /
H-N-(C)„-N
wherein,
R' is hydrogen and
n is an integer of 2 to 6,
R2 and R^ each independently is hydrogen of alkyl of 1-4
carbon atoms,
I
-(C)-
represents the same or different chain members, and
R^ and R' each independently is straight chain alkyl of 1-4
carbon atoms optionally substituted by hydroxy or alkoxy
of 1-4 carbon atoms, excluding the a-position of the alkyl
residue as a point of substitution, or R* and R' together
can form a five- or six-membered ring together with the
tertiary nitrogen atom; or
R' is alkyl of 1 or 2 carbon atoms, optionally substituted by
hydroxy or alkoxy of 1 or 2 carbon atoms, excluding the
a-position of the alkyl residue,
n and R^ through R' are as defined above, and
when n is 2 and R^ and R^ each is hydrogen, then R' and R^
together with the two nitrogen atoms can also form a
six-membered ring,
up to a content of tertiary, quatemizable amino groups of
0.05-0.5 mole/100 g of the amination product, said groups
being located in the side chain and linked to a carbon atom
stemming either from the primary chain or from a vinyl
group of the polymer via 3-7 chain atoms, and
in the quatemization reaction, 0.05-0.5 mole of the tertiary
amino groups/ ICX) g of the amination product are quater-
nized.
4,379,891
MULTIFUNCTIONAL COUPLING AGENT
George R. Haynes, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil Com-
pany, Houston, Tex.
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 274,111
Int. Q\? C08F itm
U.S. a. 525—342 10 Claims
1. A process for the production of a polymer comprising
reacting a living lithium-terminated polymer having the for-
mula P-Li wherein P is selected from the group consisting of
polymer chains of one or more alkadienes having 4-12 carbon
atoms and copolymer chains of one or more alkadienes having
452
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4-12 carbon atoms and one or more monoalkenyl arenes of
8-18 carbon atoms, having the alkenyl radical attached to an
arene ring carbon atom, with a coupling agent of the general
formula
(Rl— 0)3— Si— R2— O— R2— Si-(-0— R|)3
wherein Ri is an alkyl group of 1 to 4 carbon atoms and R2 is
an alkylene group of 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
4^79,892
METHOD FOR PREVENTION OF LOSS OF
TRANSPARENCY OF POLYARYLENE ESTER BLENDS
Katsuzi Ueno, Hirakata; Takashi M aniyama, Toyonaka; Hanio
Suzuki, Ibaraki, and Tenio Saito, Takatsuki, all of Japan,
assignors to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited, Osaka,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 46,672, Jun. 8, 1979, abandoned, which
is a continuation of Ser. No. 847,911, Nov. 2, 1977, abandoned.
This application Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,071
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 2, 1976, 51-132041
Int. a.^ C08L 67/00, 69/00
U.S. a. 525—439 6 Qaims
1. A polyarylene ester blend consisting essentially of (a) a
polyarylene ester prepared by an interfacial polymerization
process comprising mixing an aqueous solution of a bisphenol
and an effective catalytic amount of sodium hydroxide with a
solution of an aromatic dicarboxylic acid chloride in an or-
ganic solvent and vigorously agitating the mixture and (b) a
thermoplastic polyester resin, said blend having present a
sodium content of less than 70 ppm and being capable of form-
ing a transparent shaped article which can be treated under
conditions of high temperature and high moisture without loss
of transparency.
4,379,894
AQUEOUS PROCESS FOR THE QUANTITATIVE
CONVERSION OF POLYEPICHLOROHYDRIN TO
GLYCTDYL AZIDE POLYMER
Milton B. Frankel, Tarzana; Edward F. Witucki, Van Nuys, and
Dean O. Woolery, II, Reseda, all of Calif., assignors to Rock-
well International Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,405
Int. a.3 C08G 65/24. 65/32
U.S. a. 525—403 21 Claims
1. An aqueous process for the quantitative conversion of
polyepichlorohydrin (PECH) to glycidyl azide polymer
(GAP), comprises the steps of:
combining said PECH and an ionic azide in a mixture of
water and a phase transfer catalyst capable of the quantita-
tive conversion of PECH to GAP;
reacting said PECH and said ionic azide in said aqueous
mixture while agitating said mixture at a temperature
between about 25° C. and about 100° C, and wherein said
aqueous mixture is maintained under a nitrogen purged
environment; and
recovering said GAP from said aqueous mixture by separat-
ing the aqueous layer from the product layer;
water-washing said product layer to remove any inor-
ganic salts remaining in the product layer;
alcohol-washing said water-washed product layer so as to
remove said phase transfer catalyst;
dissolving said alcohol-washed product layer in a low-
boiling, non-polar solvent;
purifying said dissolved product layer by passing it
through adsorbents capable of removing impurities; and
concentrating said purified product layer so as to remove
said low-boiling non-polar solvent.
4,379,893
SURFACE-TREATED SOFT CONTACT LENSES
Mary A. O'Malley, Oeveland Heights, and Nancy J. Drake,
Painesville, both of Ohio, assignors to Diamond Shamrock
Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,379
, Int. a.^ C08L 39/06
U.S. a. 525— 386 10 Qaims
1. A process for producing a soft contact lens resistant to the
diffusion and accumulation therein of substances which pro-
mote its clouding and discoloration in use, which process
comprises employing a hydrophilic polymer lens shape which
is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyethyl metha-
crylate-N-vinyl pyrrolidone copolymers, hydroxyethyl metha-
crylate-N-vinyl pyrrolidone-methyl methacrylate terpolymers,
and polymerized mixtures of hydroxyethyl methacrylate, amyl
methacrylate, vinyl acetate and vinyl propionate, and treating
said hydrophilic polymer lens shape with a modifying com-
pound which is a lower alkyl ester of an alkylene dicarboxylic
acid having the structural formula:
O
II
o
RO— C-fCH2)wC— OR
wherein R can be CH3 or C2H5; and m is an integer of 1-6,
inclusive, the treatment being conducted for a sufficient period
of time to structurally modify a portion of polymer molecules
in the outer surfaces of said hydrophilic polymer lens shape by
incorporating therein the modifying compound through its
functional groups.
4,379,895
AOD-CAPPED POLYESTER RESINS
Harlan W. Frerking, Jr., Alliance, and Mellis M. Kelley, Akron,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire A Rubber
Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,619
Int. a.3 C08F 283/00; C08G 63/76
U.S. a. 525—437 18 Qaims
1. A process for preparing an acid capped polyester resin,
suitable for use in powdered polyester resins, comprising the
steps of
reacting a diester with a diol, said diester selected from the
group consisting of an alkyl diester having from 4 to 50
carbon atoms, an alkyl substituted aryl diester having
from 10 to 24 carbon atoms, and combinations thereof
said diester optionally containing from about 0.01 percent
to about 30 mole percent of a diacid selected from the
group consisting of an alkyl dicarboxylic acid having from
2 to 16 carbon atoms, an aryl dicarboxylic acid having
from 8 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkyl substituted aryl dicar-
boxylic acid having from 9 to 16 carbon atoms, a dimer
acid having from 34 to 40 carbon atoms, and combinations
thereof; said diol having from 2 to 50 carbon atoms; the
mole ratio of said diol to said diester and diacid ranging
from about 1.20 to about 2.5, and forming the polyester
resin having hydroxyl groups thereon;
adding from about 0.01 to 1 mole of an acid for each hy-
droxyl equivalent in said |X)lyester resin, said acid selected
from the group consisting of an alkyl dicarboxylic acid
having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms; a dimer acid having
from 34 to 40 carbon atoms, an acid of Formula No. 1; an
acid of Formula No. 2; and combinations thereof;
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
453
FORMULA 1
HO O OH O
\ -^ 1^
c c
\ /
A
1
1
R
FORMULA 2
HO O O OH
\ ^ 11/
c c
\ /
A
I
where A is an aromatic compound having from 6 to 18
carbon atoms, where R is an alkyl having from 1 to 18
carbon atoms, or a carboxylic acid group, or hydrogen,
where Ri and R2 are an alkyl having from 1 to 18 carbon
atoms, and where R3 is an alkyl having from 1 to 1 8 car-
bon atoms, or an alkyl carboxylic acid group having from
1 to 18 carbon atoms, or hydrogen, and wherein Ri and
R2 can be the same or different;
heating and reacting said acid with said polyester resin at a
temperature of from about 180° C. to about 280° C. to acid
cap said polyester; and
carrying out said reaction until said polyester resin acid
number is from about 1 to about 100 and the amount of
remaining free acid is less than 20 percent of the added
amount.
10. An acid capped polyester resin suitable for use as a
powdered polyester resin, comprising:
an acid capped p)olyester resin, said acid capped polyester
resin having an acid number of from about 1 to about 100;
said acid capped polyester resin made by reacting an acid
with a polyester having hydroxyl groups thereon;
said acid capped polyester made by adding from about 0.01
to 1 mole of an acid for each hydroxyl equivalent in said
polyester resin, said acid selected from the group consist-
ing of an alkyl dicarboxylic acid having from 2 to 20
carbon atoms, a dimer acid having from 34 to 40 carbon
atoms, an acid of Formula No. 1, or an acid of Formula
No. 2
FORMULA 1
HO O OH O
\ ^ 1^
c c
\ /
A
I
R
FORMULA 2
HO O O OH
\ ^ 11/
c c
\ /
A
I
R3
16 carbon atoms, a dimer acid having from about 34 to
about 40 carbon atoms, and combinations thereof, said
diol having from 2 to 50 carbon atoms; the mole ratio of
said diol to said diester and diacid ranging from about 1.20
to about 2.5, and forming a polyester having hydroxyl
groups thereon.
4,379,896
KETO/POLYCARBOXY CONTAINING RESIN
Joseph G. Robinson, Winchcombe; David I. Barnes, Chelten-
ham, and Angela M. Carswell, Longhope, all of England,
assignors to Coal Industry (Patents) Limited, England
Division of Ser. No. 174,152, Jul. 31, 1980, Pat. No. 4,346^212.
This application Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,886
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 21, 1979,
7932778
Int. a.3 C08G 2/30
U.S. a. 525—472 1 Claim
1. A keto/polycarboxyl containing resin comprising an
acid-catalysed phenanthrene-formaldehyde reaction product
which has been oxidised to produce keto groups bridging the
phenanthrene moieties and carboxyl groups.
where A is an aromatic compound having from 6 to 18
carbon atoms, where R is an alkyl having from 1 to 18
carbon atoms, or a carboxylic acid group, or hydrogen,
wherein Ri and Raare an alkyl having from 1 to 18 carbon
atoms, and where R3 is an alkyl having from 1 to 18 car-
bon atoms, or an alkyl carboxylic acid group having from
1 to 1 8 carbon atoms, or hydrogen, wherein Ri and R2 can
be the same or different;
said reaction of said capping acid with said polyester having
hydroxyl groups being carried out at a temperature of
from about 180' C. to about 280° C. and to an extent such
that the amount of remaining free acid is less than 20
percent of the added amount;
said polyester resin made by reacting a diester with a diol,
said diester selected from the group consisting of an alkyl
diester having from 4 to 50 carbon atoms, an alkyl substi-
tuted aryl diester having from 10 to 24 carbon atoms, and
combinations thereof, said diester optionally containing
from about 0.01 percent to about 30 mole percent of a
diacid selected from the group consisting of an alkyl dicar-
boxylic acid having from 2 to 16 carbon atoms, an aryl
dicarboxylic acid having from 8 to 16 carbon atoms, an
alkyl substituted aryl dicarboxylic acid having from 9 to
4,379,897
COLOR-DEVELOPER FOR PRESSURE-SENSITIVE
SHEETS
Makoto Asano; Yoshimitu Tanabe, and Hisamichi Murakami,
all of Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Mitsui Toatsu Chemi-
cals, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,717
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 28, 1980, 55-3SH)98;
Mar. 31, 1980, 55-40395
Int. a.3 C08G 8/18. 8/24. 8/28
U.S. a. 525—506 14 Qaims
1. A color-developer for pressure-sensitive recording sheets,
said color-developer comprising a polyvalent metal salt of a
co-condensate obtained by co-condensing a reaction interme-
diate of at least one p-substituted phenol with at least one
trifunctional or higher phenol selected from phenol, 4,4'-iso-
propylidene-bisphenol, 4,4'-cyclohexylidene-biphenol and
4,4'-biphenol-sulfon under neutral or acidic conditions, said
reaction intermediate being obtained by reacting said p-sub-
stituted phenol under alkaline conditions with formaldehyde
or a substance capable of generating formaldehyde.
4,379,898
POLYMERIZATION CATALYSTS
Charles M. Selman, and Lawrence M. Fodor, both of Bartlcs-
ville, Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum Company, Bar-
tlesTiUe, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 55,426, Jul. 6, 1979, Pat. No. 4,276,192.
This application Feh. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,267
Int. Q.3 C08F 4/02. 10/00
U.S. Q. 526—124 H Qaims
1. A process comprising contacting at least one mono- 1 -ole-
fin having 2 to 8 carbon atoms per molecule under polymeriza-
tion conditions with a catalyst formed by contacting
(a) magnesium metal,
(b) an organic halide of the formula R'X or R"X2 where X
represents a halogen, R' is selected from alkynyl, alkenyl,
alkyl, aryl, cycloalkenyl or cycloalkyl radicals and combi-
nations thereof containing from 1 to 12 carbon atoms per
molecule and R" is a saturated divalent aliphatic hydro-
carbyl radical having from 2 to about 10 carbon atoms and
(c) a titanium tetrahalide and subjecting same to intensive
milling in the presence of
(d) a triaryl phosphite
(e) an anhydrous aluminum trihalide and
(0 magnesium oxide but in the absence of a complexing or
extraneous diluent
thereafter activating the thus produced titanium catalyst
component by contacting same with
454
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
(g) an activator comprising a trialkylaluminum compound, a
dialkylaluminum chloride, and a polar organic adjuvant
which is an electron donor, said adjuvant further being
characterized as a 1 to 4 carbon atom alkyl ester of a
substituted or unsubstituted benzoic acid.
4,379,899
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING POLYISOBUTENES
Christopher R. Marsh, Grangemouth, England, assignor to BP
Chemicals Limited, London, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 941,779, Sep. 13, 1978,
abandoned. This application Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 312,953
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 14, 1977,
38266/77
Int. a.3 C08F 4/64. 10/10
U.S. a. 526—144 1 aaim
1. A homogeneous polymerization process for producing
high molecular weight polyisobutenes of SSU viscosity above
1 ,000,000 at 2 10° F. by polymerizing a C4 feedstock comprising
isobutene at a temperature of from —5° to —25° C. in the
presence of a catalyst system comprising (i) an alkyl aluminum
dichloride or dibromide, (ii) tertiary butyl chloride or bromide,
and (iii) a metal halide selected from the group consisting of
SnCU. SnBr4, TiCU, and TiBr4, and said catalyst concentra-
tion based on said alkyl aluminum dichloride or dibromide
content thereof is from 20 to 2000 ppm based on the weight of
said C4 feedstock and said catalyst components are present in
equimolar proportions.
4,379,900
RAW POLYMER POWDER OF A MODIFIED
TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE POLYMER HAVING A
HIGH BULK DENSITY AND A GOOD POWDER FLOW
INDEX AND ALSO A PROCESS FOR THE
MANUFACTURE AND USE THEREOF
Reinhard A. Sulzbach, Burghausen/Salzach, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignor to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,489
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 6,
1980, 3021369; Mar. 17, 1981, 3110193
Int. a.^ C08F 14/18
U.S. CI. 526-247 18 Qaims
1. In a granular, free-flowing, non-melt-fabricable, non-pre-
sintered raw polymer powder of a tetrafluoroethylene poly-
mer, consisting essentially of from 0.004 to 0.075 mole percent
polymerized units of a perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether of the for-
mula
CF2=^F— O— R/
wherein R/ is C2F5, n-CjFy, or n-C4F9, and of polymerized
tetrafluoroethylene units having a specific surface of from 0.5
to 4.5 m^/g, the improvement residing in the fact that said
powder has an average particle diameter dso of from 450 to
1400 ^m, a bulk density of at least 570 g/l, a powder flow index
not higher than 5 seconds per 50 grams, and a grain stability
not higher than 5.5 seconds per 50 grams.
4,379,901
POLYFLUOROALLYL ETHERS AND THEIR
PRODUCTION AND USE
Yoshio Amimoto, Takatsuki, and Masayoshi Tatemoto, Ibaraki,
both of Japan, assignors to Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,352
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 30, 1980, 55-136932
Int. a.3 C07C 121/34: C08F 16/24
U.S. a. 526—247 21 Oaims
1. A polyfluoroallyi ether of the formula:
CFY2
CFX=CX— CF2— O— C— CFY2
CN .,
wherein each X, which is the same or different, is a chlorine
atom or a fluorine atom and wherein each Y, which is the same
or different, is a hydrogen atom, a chlorine atom or a fluorine
atom.
9. A polymer of a polyfluoroallyi ether comprising units of
the formula:
— CFX— CF—
I
CF2 CFY2
O C— CFY2
CN
wherein each X, which is the same or different, is a chlorine
atom or a fluorine atom and each Y, which is the same or
different, is a hydrogen atom, a chlorine atom or a fluorine
atom.
4,379,902
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING A LOW VISCOSITY
SILICONE RESIN
Duane F. Merrill, Ballston Spa, N.Y., assignor to General Elec-
tric, Waterford, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 126,062, Feb. 29, 1980, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 750,993, Dec. 15, 1976, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 630,848, Nov. 10, 1975, Pat.
No. 4,026,868. This application Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,226
Int. a.' C08G 77/06
U.S. CI. 528—18 12 Qaims
1. A process for providing a molding composition having a
low coefficient of thermal expansion duriiig cure, comprising
the steps of:
1. first providing a silicone resin having a viscosity which
does not exceed 100 centipoise at 140° by
A. adding with continuous agitation a mixture of acetone
and organohalosilanes over a period of at least 40 min-
utes to a heterogeneous hydrolysis mixture having a
water phase and an organic phase wherein said organic
phase is composed of water, acetone and a water-immis-
cible solvent where in the final heterogeneous hydroly-
sis mixture, per part by weight of organohalosilanes
there is present:
1. from at least 1.7 parts to about 10 parts of water;
2. from about 0.2 to about 5 parts of acetone;
3. from about 0.3 to about 5 parts of a water-immiscible
organic solvent, and
4. from 0 to about one mole of an aliphatic monohydric
alcohol having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms per mole of
halogen attached to the silicone atom of said or-
ganohalosilane;
maintaining the temperature of said heterogeneous
hydrolysis mixture below 45° C. during Step (A);
C. removing the water from said heterogeneous hydroly-
sis mixture and reducing the acid content of the organic
phase containing a formed silicone resin to below S
parts per million; and
D. stripping off the solvent at a temperature not to exceed
about 120° C. to yield ^ polyorganosiloxane having an
average ratio from about 1 to 1.8 organo radicals per
silicon atom;
said organohalosilanes in Step (A) are selected from the
class consisting of
a. a mixture of organotrihalosilane and dior-
ganodihalosilane,
b. a reaction product of an aliphatic monohydric alco-
B.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
455
hoi having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms and a mixture of
organotrihalosilane and diorganodihalosilane which
reaction product may have up to one alkoxy radical
substituted for eachhalogen radical in said organo-
trihalosilane and dflJi^nodihalosilane; and
c. a mixture of the rMCtion product of (b) and an or-
ganohalosilane sel^ted from organotrihalosilane and
diorganodihalosilane, and where the organo radicals
of said organohalosilanes are selected from the class
consisting of monovalent hydrocarbon radicals and
halogenated monovalent hydrocarbon radicals;
II. mixing said silicone resin with a filler and a catalyst
effective for providing a curable silicone molding compo-
sition having a low coefficient of thermal expansion dur-
ing such cure, wherein said silicone resin comprises 1 5 to
20 percent by weight of the total molding composition.
ethylene oxide content of about 10 to about 40 percent by
weight; and
(iii) mixtures of (i) and (ii).
4,379,903
PROPELLANT BINDERS CURE CATALYST
Russell Reed, Jr., and May L. Chan, both of Ridgecrest, Calif.,
assignors to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,773
Int. a.^ C08G 18/38
U.S. a. 528—55 14 Oaims
1. A process for the curing of a glycidyl-azide polymer
(GAP)/isocyanate binder system which comprises:
(a) adding a non-gassing catalyst to a mixture Comprising
glycidyl-azide polymer and isocyanate curative to form
said binder system; and
(b) curing said binder system to form a substantially void
free grain.
4,379,904
NOVEL POLYURETHANE PRODUCT
Benjamin S. Ehrlich, Cheshire, and Richard W. Oertel, III,
Guilford, both of Conn., assignors to The Upjohn Company,
Kalamazoo, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 348,324, Feb. 12, 1982,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 209,862, Nov. 24,
1980, abandoned. This application Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No.
371,534
Int. C1.3 C08G 18/48
U.S. a. 528—65 20 Qaims
1. In a thermoplastic polyurethane elastomer which is the
product of reaction of 4,4'-methylenebis(phenyl isocyanate),
difunctional extender and a polymeric diol selected from the
class consisting of (a) polyoxypropylene-polyoxyethylene
copolymers having a molecular weight of from about 1000 to
about 3000, and having a minimum content of ethylene oxide
(E.O.) residues by weight for any given molecular weight
(MW) corresponding to:
*EO.[(^S2-m)x3]x[^].
(b) polyester diols having a molecular weight of from about
1000 to about 4000, and mixtures of (a) and (b), the equivalent
proportions of polymeric diol to extender being within the
range of about 1:2 to about 1:20 and the ratio of equivalents of
said isocyanate to total hydroxyl equivalents being within the
range of about 0.99:1 to 1.06:1, the improvement which com
4,379,905
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
POLYISOCYANATES CONTAINING ISOCYANURATE
GROUPS AND THEIR USE IN THE PRODUCTION OF
POLYURETHANES
Ingo Stemmler; Hanns P. Miiller, both of Odenthal, and Kuno
Wagner, Leverkusen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,344
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 8,
1981, 3100263
Int. a.3 C08G 18/77
U.S. a. 528—73 12 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of polyisocyanates contain-
ing isocyanurate groups which comprises trimerizing a propor-
tion of the isocyanate groups of organic polyisocyanates or
mixtures of polyisocyanates and monoisocyanates in the pres-
ence of basic alkali metal compounds as catalysts and stopping
the trimerization reaction by the addition of a catalyst poison,
characterized in that the trimerization catalyst is a complex of
(i) a basic alkali metal compound and
(ii) an acyclic organic compound which
(a) has at least 6 alkylene oxide units of the formula — R— O.
wherein R represents C1-C4 alkylene, in the form of one
or more polyether chains with only those chains having at
least 3 alkylene oxide units being counted to reach the
total of at least 6 alkylene oxide units
(b) contains a total of at least about 40% by weight of alkyl-
ene oxide units, the alkylene oxide units of any chams
containing less than three of these units not being counted
as alkylene oxide units, and
(c) has a molecular weight of at lea.st 282.
I 4,379,906
HIGH SOLIDS URETHANE COATINGS PREPARED
FROM A POLYLISOCYANATE AND A POLYHYDROXY
OLIGMER
Mohinder S. Chattha, Livonia, Mich., assignor to Ford Motor
Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,802
Int. a.J C08G 18/42
U.S. a. 528—75 ^ 39 Qaims
1. A thermosetting coating composition adapted for low
temperature bake applications comprising:
(A) a polyhydroxy oligomer having a number average (M„)
molecular weight of between about 300-2000 and compris-
ing the reaction product of:
(i) an acid ester made by reacting:
(a) a C3-C 10 aliphatic branched diol, and
(b) an alkyl hexahydrophthalic anhydride,
wherein (a) and (b) are combined in the reaction mixture in
amounts sufficient to result in reaction in a molar ratio of
greater than 1:1 up to 1:2; and
(ii) a monoepoxide C2-C10 monomer, wherein said monomer
is included in an amount sufficient to provide reaction of
about 1 .0 epoxide group for each acid group of said acid
ester;
phS, replacing a. ,ea.. abou. ,5 pcrcn. b, weigh, of said («) ^-S'^^rgri'^rb^t'r.o;!';^,.. of ,A,, ,B,
polymeric diol by a replacement polyol selected from the class
consisting of:
(i) polyoxypropylene-polyoxyethylene glycols having a
molecular weight of about 3500 to about 45(X) and an
ethylene oxide content of about 10 to about 60 percent by
weight;
(ii) polyoxypropylene-polyoxyethylene triols having a mo-
lecular weight from about 5000 to about 7000 and an
and (C) of a hydroxy functional additive having a number
average molecular weight (Mn) of between about 1 50-6000,
said polyisocyanate crosslinking agent having two or more
reactive isocyanate groups per molecular weight and
being included in said composition in an amount sufficient
to provide between about 0.50 and about 1.6 reactive
isocyanate groups per hydroxyl group present in said
1029O.G.— 18
456
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
composition either on said polyhydroxy oligomer or as a
hydroxy! group of said hydroxy functional additive.
4,379.907
Patent Not Issued For This Number
4 379 908
RAPID CURING EPOXY-UNSATURATED MONOMER
COMPOSITIONS
Thomas F. Brownscombe, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil
Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,082
Int. aj C08G 59/68. 59/40. 65/02
U.S. a. 528-91 8 Qaims
1. A curable composition comprising (1) at least one epoxy
compound containing at least one vicinal epoxy group. (2) a
miscible amount of at least one ethylenically unsaturated mon-
omer and (3) a curing amount of at least one metal salt selected
from the group consisting of lithium and Group II metal salts
of a non-nucleophilic acid.
-continued
o=c I c=o
\^^^\
M H N
R6 R4
wherein
R], R2, R3. R4. R5, Reare H, Ci.galkyl or substituted alkyl,
the same or different, and A = H, Ci.galkyl, aryl or substi-
tuted alkyl/aryl; and further characterised in that there is
present not more than 10% by weight of the accelerator
based on the total weight of reactant solids.
4,379,910
FLAME RETARDANT AROMATIC POLYCARBONATE
COMPOSITIONS MADE FROM FLUORINATED
DIPHENOLS
Victor Mark, Evansville, and Charles V. Hedges, Mount Ver-
non, both of Ind., assignors to General Electric Co., Mt.
Vernon, Ind.
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,460
Int. a.3 C08G 63/62
U.S. a. 528-202 28 Qaims
1. A high-molecular weight aromatic polycarbonate having
improved flame-retardance, said polycarbonate having the
general formula:
4,379,909
COATING COMPOSITIONS
Hans R. Falkenburg, Haan; Siegfried Krause, Mettmann, and
Robert C. McGuiness, Erkrath, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Hermann Wiederhold GmbH Corp., Hilden, Fed.
Rep. of Germany and Imperial Chemical Industries PLC,
London, England
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,266
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 27, 1980,
8034533
Int. a.^ C08G 59/68, 59/42
U.S. a. 528-94 6 Qaims
1. A coating lacquer, which on heating (and with savings in
energy) yields a non-toxic cured coating on a metal substrate,
comprising the components:
(i) an epoxide resin
(ii) a curing agent selected from polycarboxylic acids or
polycarboxylic acid anhydrides
(iii) an organic solvent, and
(iv) an accelerator for the curing reaction between the epox-
ide resin and the curing agent characterised in that the
accelerator is selected from materials of chemical struc-
tures, or has moieties derived from chemical structures:
(I) Ri R2
N (II) A
A X
N N N N
Rj I I Rj R5 I I R3
"^M-^ -^N,/ "^v^ ^y
N N N N N N
R6 R4 R6 ,-^ R4
or (III)
""'^Z
^'^<^\
^^* 9
■0-^
yfm
'^ II
— o-c—
-
Y,'^
— / \ r
"Y3
wherein n is an integer from 5 to 1,(XX); R is a radical selected
from the group consisting of a fluorinated alkyl radical having
from three to about twenty-two carbon atoms and a fluori-
nated aryl radical; R' is selected from the group consisting of
fluorinated alkyl radical, fluorinated aryl radical, alkyl radical
and hydrogen; and Yj, Y2, Y3 and Y4 are each independently
selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl radical,
chlorine and bromine.
4,379,911
CROSSLINKING AGENTS FOR CATIONIC POLYMERS
Girish G. Parekh, Fairfield; Weraer J. Blank, Wilton, and Peter
J. Schirmann, Fairfield, all of Conn., assignors to American
Cyanamid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 232,454, Feb. 9, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 128,612, Mar. 10, 1980,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 32,982, Apr. 25, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 926,762,
Jul. 21, 1978, abandoned. This application Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No.
403,202
Int. a.3 C08G 12/32
U.S. a. 528—245 2 Claims
1. A cross-linking agent for compounds containing an aver-
age of at least two primary or secondary amine groups per
molecule, comprising a melamine compound, the amine groups
of which contain as substituents an average of at least two
glyoxylic acid ester groups per molecule.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
457
4^79,912
METHOD OF MAKING POLYESTER PREPOLYMERS
Chen-i La, Webster, N.Y^ assignor to Eastman Kodak Com-
pany, Rochester, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 407,401
Int. a.^ C08G 6i/22
U.S. a. 528—274 W Claims
1. In a method for preparing a prepolymer composed of
constituents of a dicarboxylic acid and a glycol, which method
comprises:
(a) reacting said dicarboxylic acid and said glycol in the
presence of a transesterification catalyst at a reaction
temperature and pressure effective to form a reaction
mixture containing condensation oligomers, reaction by-
products and residual dicarboxylic acid, glycol and cata-
lyst; and
(b) subjecting said reaction mixture to a temperature and
pressure effective to polycondense substantially all of said
oligomers to form a molten prepolymer,
the improvement which comprises purifying said reaction
mixture prior to said polycondensation step (b) to remove
substantially all of said reaction by-products and said
residual dicarboxylic acid, glycol and catalyst and to
crystallize said condensation oligomers, whereby said
prepolymer has increased reactivity when subjected to
polymerization.
4,379,915
LACTONE POLYMER
Shoji Watanabe; Takuya Miho, and TatsamI Fiyii, all of Ohtakc,
Japan, assignors to Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd., Sakai,
Japan
FUed Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 352,607
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1981, 56-28182
Int a.5 C08G 6i/}0
U.S. a. 528—357 2 C»«*™
1. A lactone polymer having a narrow molecular weight
distribution, which is characterized in that the ratio of the
weight average molecular weight to the number average mo-
lecular weight is in the range of from 1 . 1 to 20 and the molecu-
lar weight is 500 to 5,000.
2. A process for the preparation of lactone polymers, which
is characterized in that lactone is subjected to ring-opening
polymerization in the presence of 0.1 to 50 ppm of a stannous
halide such as stannous chloride, stannous bromide or stannous
iodide to form a lactone polymer in which the ratio of the
weight average molecular weight to the number average mo-
lecular weight is in the range of from 1 . 1 to 2.0 and the molecu-
lar weight is 500 to 5,000.
4379,913
COMPOSITIONS USEFUL AS INTERNAL ANTISTATIC
ADDITIVES FOR POLYMERIC STRUCTURES
Calvin J. Waitkus, Bridgewater, NJ., assignor to Diamond
Shamrock Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
FUed May 4, 1982, Ser. No. 374,670
Int. a.5 C08G 6im
U.S. a. 528—300 12 Claims
1. An internal antistatic additive composition for polymeric
structures which is a branched configuration polyol first alkox-
ylated with a mixture of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide
and then reacted with a difunctional reactant to produce a
chain extended random alkoxylated polyol.
9. A polymeric structure containing an effective amount of
the composition of claim 1 sufficient to improve antistatic
properties of the structure.
12. The polymeric structure of claim 9 wherein the structure
is a polyester.
4,379,916
METHOD FOR COPREaPTTATING WIRE COATING
ENAMEL COMPOSmON
Ralph G. Flowers, Pittsfield, Mass., assignor to General Electric
Company
FUed Jan. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,338
Int Cl.^ C08L 61/04; B32B 15/02: C08L 67/00
U.S. a. 528—494 12 Claims
1. Method for preparing a wire coating enamel consisting of
a homogeneous mixture of phenolaldehyde, polyvinyl acetal
and epoxy resins, said method comprising the steps of:
dissolving the resin mixture in a water soluble, organic sol-
vent to form a solution;
mixing said solution in a volume of water greater than the
volume of the solution to precipiutc out said resins as a
homogeneous mixture; and
separating said precipitated resin mixture from said water
and solvent mixture.
4,379,917
6"-(SUBSTTrUTED)-APRAMYCIN ANTIBIOTIC
DERIVATIVES AND INTERMEDIATES AND STARTING
MATERIALS THEREFOR
Herbert A. Kirtt, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to EU LUly and
Company, IndianapoUs, Ind.
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,409
Int a.' C07H n/22
U.S. a. 536-16.8 39 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
4,379,914
POLYCAPROLACTONE POLYMERS
Robert D. Lundberg, Bridgewater, N J., assignor to
Research and Engineering Co^ Florham Park, N J.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,813
Int a.3 C08G 6i/0«. 63/10
Exxon
UJS. a. 528—354
H2N
HO
NHCH3
OH
6Claim8
1. A polycaprolactone polymer having the formula:
"\ ^ ^ ?
N(C)m-NHC(CH2)s[OC(CH2)5]«OH
R2 Rs O
wherein Ri or R2 is an alkyl, cycloalkyl or aryl group, R3, R4
and Rs is a hydrogen or aUcyl, cycloalkyl. or aryl group, and m
equals 1 to 20 and n equals 1 to about SCO.
HO-*-
HO
NH2
458
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
wherein Ri is hydrogen, Ci to Cs-alkylsulfonyloxy. phenylsul-
fonyloxy, substituted phenylsulfonyloxy, tert-butyldimethyl-
silyloxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, iodo, azido, amino, Ci to C3-
alkylthio. phenylthio, cyano or aminomethyl;
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts
thereof.
4 379 918
PROCESS FOR PREPARING WATER-SOLUBLE
PHOSPHONOMETHYL ETHERS OF CELLULOSE
Lothar Brandt, and Arno Hoist, both of Wiesbaden, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengeseilschaft, Frankfurt
am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,350
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 23,
1980, 3039978
Int. a,3 C08B 11/00; C08L 1/26
U.S. a. 536—62 17 Qaims
1. A process for preparing water-soluble phosphonomethyl
ethers of cellulose, comprising the steps of:
reacting cellulose or a cellulose derivative wiith haloge-
nomethane phosphonic acid or a salt thereof or an acid
derivative thereof which provides halogenomethane
phosphonate ions, said reaction being carried out in an
aqueous alkaline medium containing hydroxide ions,
wherein
from about 2.1 to 15 moles of hydroxide ions, and
from about 0.4 to 3 moles of halogenomethane phosphonate
ions per mole of cellulose are reacted in about 3 to 50 parts
by weight, per part by weight of the cellulose, of a mixture
comprising an inert organic solvent and from about 2 to 60
percent by weight of water; and continuing the reaction
until the phosphonomethyl cellulose has a DS of at least
about 0.13.
4,379,920
CEPHALOSPORINS
David Brown, Hayes; Anthony F. Giles, Maidenhead; Howard
W, Cramer, Berkhamsted; H. Mary Noble, Bumham; Louis J.
Nisbet, Bourne End; Michael E. Bushell, Famham; Glenis
Weare, Tylers Green, and Ian Y. Caldwell, Uxbridge, all of
England, assignors to Glaxo Group Limited, England
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,525
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 31, 1979,
7937737; May 21, 1980, 8016798
Int. a.3 C07D 501/57; A61K 31/545
U.S. a. 542-427 3 a^^
1. A compound of the formula (I)
HOOC.CH(CH2)3CONH.
NH2
OCH3
(I)
4,379,919
STARCH SULFOMALEATE HALF-ESTERS, A METHOD
FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR USE TO
PREPARE STARCH DISULFOSUCCINATE
HALF-ESTERS
Martin M. Tessler, Edison; Otto B. Wurzburg, Whitehouse
Station, and Teresa A. Dirscherl, Netcong, all of N.J., assign-
ors to National Starch and Chemical Corporation, Bridge-
water, N.J.
Filed Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 364,376
Int. a.3 C08B 31/04, 31/16
U.S. a. 536-108 14 Oaims
1. A starch derivative, comprising a starch sulfomaleate of
the general structure:
O
n
St— O— C— CH=C(S03-XC00-) 2
o
N
St— O— C— C(S03-)=CH(C00-) 2
(f)''
(^)"
(i)
(ii)
or mixtures of (i) and (ii); wherein St— O— represents a starch
molecule or a modified starch molecule, M is a cation, and n is
the valence number of M.
S
COOH
OCH3
I
CH20.C0C=CH
wherein R' represents a hydroxy! or sulphooxy group R2
represents a sulphooxy group, or a salt, ester, N-protected
derivative or solvate thereof.
4,379,921
PRODUCTION OF TRIAZOLYL VINYL KETONES
Yuji Funaki, Toyonaka; Shizuya Tanaka, Minoo, and Noritada
Matsuo, Itami, all of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Chemical
Company, Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,631
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 21, 1980, 55-115682;
Aug. 21, 1980, 55-115683; Aug. 22, 1980, 55-116176; Aug. 25,
1980, 55-117184; Aug. 25, 1980, 55-117186
Int. 0.3 C07D 249/08
U.S. O. 542-458 2I Oaims
1. A process for producing a compound of the formula:
(I)
/ \^ O CH3
ci-/QVch=c-c-c-ch3
N f ^ N CH3
N'
IL
N
wherein X is a hydrogen or chlorine atom, which comprises
heating a compound of the formula:
N
(II)
/ N
J
°-(o)-4 f
CH3
\^-^/ \ II I
X f CH— C— C-CH3
I I
^N CH3
: ^
II N
wherein X is as deHned above.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
459
4^79,922
CEPHAM COMPOUNDS
Ikuo Ueda, Toyonaka; Takao Takaya, Kawanishi; Masakazu
Kobayashi, Ikeda; Takashi Masugi, Kitamachi; Hisashi
Takasugi, Kohamanishi; Hiromu Kochi, Sakai, and Tadashi
Kitaguchi, Kukuchinishimachi, all of Japan, assignors to
Fi^isawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 101,527, Dec. 10, 1979, Pat No. 4,298,529,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 73,565, Sep. 7, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,217
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 12, 1978, 53-112555;
United Kingdom, Sep. 12, 1978, 36564/78; Japan, Jan. 12, 1979,
54-3106; United Kingdom, Feb. 19, 1979, 7905791; European
Pat. Off, Sep. 11, 1979, 79103389.7; Japan, Sep. 11, 1979,
54-117166
Int. a.' C07D 501/14
U.S. a. 544—16 * Claims
1. A new compound of the formula:
X — CH2— Y — C— CONH
N— OR'
O
cephem-4-carboxylic acid- 1 -oxide derivative with a silylated
thiol of the formula
R-S— Si(CH3)3
wherein R is a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic group having at
least one nitrogen or sulfur atom as the heteroatoms to obtain
the corresponding 7-acylamino-3-(R-thiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-
carboxylic acid- 1 -oxide derivative.
4,379,924
CEPHALOSPORIN DERIVATIVES
Mitsuo Numata, Takatsuki; Isao Mimamida, Kyoto; Masayoshi
Yamaoka, Osaka; Mitsura Shiraishi, Suita, and Toshio
Miyawaki, Nishinomiya, all of Japan, assignors to Takeda
Chemical Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 534,782, Dec. 20, 1974, Pat. No. 4,080,498.
This appUcation Dec. 23, 1977, Ser. No. 863,719
Qaims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 25, 1973, 48-1521;
Feb. 20, 1974, 49-20752; Apr. 15, 1974, 49-42574; Jul. 17, 1974,
49-82623; Not. 13, 1974, 49-131381
Int. Cl.^ C07D 501/36; A61K 31/545
U.S. a. 544—27 ^ 20 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
wherein
Ri is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have suit-
able substituents,
r2 is carboxy or a protected carboxy group,
R6 is hydroxy, lower alkanoyloxy, lower alkoxycar-
bonyloxy, lower alkanesulfonyloxy, arenesulfonyloxy,
aroyloxy, ar(lower)alkanoyloxy, ar(lower)alkoxycar-
bonyloxy, or methylene,
X' is hydrogen or halogen, and
Y' is carbonyl or a protected carbonyl group,
or its salt.
2. A new compound of the formula: ^
X— CH2— Y— C— CONH-
S
H2N S
N •*-
R2
wherein
R' is lower alkyl,
r2 is carboxy,
R6 is hydroxy, lower alkanoyloxy or methylene,
X' is hydrogen or halogen, and
Y' is carbonyl, lower alkylenedioxymethylene, di(lower)al-
koxymethylene or lower alkoxycarbonylhy-
drazonomethylene,
or its salt.
■CH2CONH—
S
COOH
4,379,923
PREPARATION OF
7-ACYLAMINO-3-(THIO-SUBSTITUTED)-METHYL
3.CEPHEM-4-CARBOXYLIC AOD-l-OXIDE
DERIVATIVES
ComeUs A. Bruynes, Koudekerk, and Theodorus K. Jumens,
Delft, both of Netherlands, assignors to Gist-Brocades N.V.,
Delft, Netherlands
FUed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,214
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, Sep. 5, 1980,
8005041
Int a.J C07D 501/04
U.S. CI. 544—26 * Claims
1. A process for the preparation of 7-acylamino-3-(thiosub-
stituted>methyl-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid- 1 -oxide denva-
tives comprising reacting a 7-acylamino-3-bromomethyl-3-
wherein R represents hydrogen, a Cm2 alkyl, trinuoromethyl,
amino, mercapto, carboxymethyl, carbamoylmethyl. N-Ci-u
alkylcarbamoylmethyl, Ci-12 alkoxycarbonylmethyl. methyl-
thiomethyl, methylsulfonylmethyl, N-C1.12 alkylammo-Ci.12
alkyl, morpholinomethyl, sulfo-Ci.12 alkylamine. hydroxy-Ci.
12 alkylamino, C1.12 alky lamino-C 1.12 alkylamino, C1.12 alkox-
ycarbonylamino, 2-hydroxyethylthio, 2-C1.12 acyloxy-
ethylthio, carboxymethylthio, C1.12 alkoxycarbonylmeth-
ylthio, carbamoylmethylthio, N-C1.12 alkylcarbamoylmeth-
ylthio, acetylmethylthio, N-C1.12 alkylamino-Ci.i2-alkylthio,
morpholinocarbonylmethylthio or 2-sulfoethylthio, or a phar-
maceutically acceptable salt thereof.
4 379 925
LIQUID PHASE AMMOXIDATION OF
CYCLOHEXANONE AND/OR CYCLOHEXANOL
Robert K. GrasseUi, Chagrin FaUs; Dct D. Suresh, Macedonia,
both of Ohio, and Darid R. Bridgeman, WiUnington, Del.,
assignors to The Standard OU Co., QeTcland, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 918,975, Jun. 26, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,638
Int. a.3 C07D 265/38. 241/46. 319/24
U.S. a. 544—102 2 Claims
1. A liquid phase ammoxidation process compnsmg contact-
ing a reactant comprising a mononuclear cycloaliphatic ketone
or alcohol, the cycloaliphatic moiety of said ketone or alcohol
having the formula C„H2« wherein n is 5 or 6, said cycloali-
phatic ketone or alcohol being unsubstituted or substituted
with at least one member selected from the group consisting of
alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenyl, benzyl, tolyl, xylyl.
said reactant containing 5 to 18 carbon atoms, in the liquid
phase with molecular oxygen, ammonia and a molybdate cata-
lyst of the following, general formula:
AflBftCcBi<rfE]P,F/i4ogO,
460
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
wherein
A is alkali metal, Tl, Sm or mixtures thereof;
B is Ni, Co, Mn, Mg, other alkaline earths and Group IIB
elements:
C is Fe, Cr, Ce or mixtures thereof;
F is Ge, Sn, Al, Ag, Au, Pb, Group VIII elements other than
Ni, Co and Fe, V, Tl, In, Ta, rare earth metals or mixtures
thereof; and
wherein
a is 0-4;
b is 0-20;
c is 0-20;
d is greater than 0-20;
e is greater than 0-5;
f is 0-10;
g is 6 to 18; and
X is a number determined by the valence requirements of the
other elements present.
CF3; amino; or amino substituted by Ci.24-alkyl, C5.7
cycloalkyl, C7.i4-aralkyl or C6-14 aryl;
R2. independently, is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyi,
aryl, or a heterocyclic group, all as defined above for Ri;
or
Ri and R2 together are C4-7 alkylene forming a ring with
their connecting C-N bond; and
R3 is Ci-io-alkoxy, Cv-u-aralkoxy, amino, mono or di-CM-
alkylamino, pyrrolidino, piperidino, morpholino,
arylamino, heteroarylamino, or substituted arylamino or
substituted heteroarylamino, each of which is substituted
in the aryl portion as recited above for Rj;
comprising reacting a corresponding amidine or guanidine
of the formula
Ri— C
^
NH
\
4,379,926
l,4,5,6.TETRAHYDROPYRIMIDINE DERIVATIVES
Jean A. Gauthier, and Ivo Jirkovsky, both of Montreal, Canada,
assignors to Ayerst, McKenna & Harrison Ltd., Montreal,
Canada
Filed May 8, 1978, Ser. No. 904,124
Int. a.3 C07D 413/06. 239/06; A61K 31/505. 31/535
U.S. a. 544-122 12 aaims
1. A compound of formula I
N N^
^ ^R2
R^
(I)
NH
I
R2
or a reaction compatible acid addition salt thereof
wherein
Ri and R2 are as defined above with an acetoacetic acid
derivative of the formula
OR4
X— CH2— C=CH— COR3
wherein
R3 is as defined above and
X is fiuorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine, and
R4 is tri-CM-alkyl or tri-C7.io-aralkylsilyl, CM-alkyI, or
C7.io-aralkyl
in which R' and R2 are phenyl and R^ is lower alkyl, phenyl,
2-furyl, 3-pyridinyl, 2-thienyl, di(lower alkyl)amino or a radi-
cal of formula R^— A wherein A is lower alkylene and R'* is
1-piperidinyl or 4-morpholinyl; or a therapeutically acceptable
acid addition salt thereof.
4 379 927
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
IMIDAZOLEACETIC AOD DERIVATIVES
Helmut Vorbriiggen, and Norbert Schwarz, both of Berlin, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Schering Aktiengesellschaft,
Berlin and Bergkamen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,416
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 13.
1981, 3106150
Int. a.3 C07D 413/06, 233/64
U.S. a. 544-139 saaim?
1. A process for preparing an imidazoleacetic acid derivative
of the formula
4,379,928
SYNTHESIS OF AMIDES
Spyros Theodoropulos, Yorktown Heights, N.Y., assignor to
Union Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,327
Int. a.3 C07C 702/00, 102/04, 102/06
U.S. a. 544-176 19 Qaims
1. Method of preparing dialkyl amides which comprises
contacting an organic compound containing at least one car-
boxyl, carboxylic acid ester or carboxylic acid anhydride func-
tionality with an amide carbamic acid salt having the formula:
R|
-^ -|-CH2-COR3
I
R2
wherein
Rl is hydrogen; Ci.24-alkyl; C5.7-cycloalkyl; C7.i4-aralkyl;
C6-i4-aryl; a Ce-io-aromatic, mono- or bi-cyclic heterocy-
cle of 5-10 toUl ring atoms, 1-3 being O, N or S atoms, the
remainder being C-atoms; substituted Ce-u-aryl or said
aromatic heterocycle each substituted by 1-3 halogen
atoms, up to three CM-alkyl groups, a nitro group, up to
three CM-alkoxy groups, a CM-alkoxycarbonyl group or
O
II e e
R1R2N— C— O— N— R1R2
wherein each of Ri and R2 is a monovalent radical selected
from the group consisting of — H, alkyl having 1 to about 20
carbon atoms including linear, branched and cyclic alkyls,
aralkyi groups having the formula:
Ar4CH2)F
wherein n is an integer having values of 1 to about 5 inclusive,
Ar is an aromatic radical having up to about 15 carbons and
optionally 1 hetero atom and the grouping — NR1R2 is a mono-
valent radical selected from the class consisting of piperazine,
piperidine, morpholine, or pyrrole radicals, at a temperature of
about 25''-250' C. until an amide is formed.
19. Method claimed in claim 1 wherein the amine carbamic
acid salt is formed in situ by reacting carbon dioxide with
primary or secondary amine.
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
461
4 379 929
4(lH).OXOCINNOLINE.'3-CARBOXYLIC ACID "
DERIVATIVES
Robert A. Conrad, Indianapolis, and William A. White, Foun-
taintown, both of Ind., assignors to Eli Lilly and Company,
Indianapolis, Ind.
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,564
Int. C1.5 C07D 237/28, 491/04, 9/65: A61K 31/495
U.S. a. 544—234 >2 Qaims
1. Compound of the formula
O
II
X3SiQ
^
COR2
wherein
R represents methylenedioxy, or nitro;
m= 1;
R> represents C1-C3 alkyl, n-butyl, or allyl;
R2 represents hydroxy C2-C4 alkoXy, NHCH2CH2OH,
NHCH2CH2SH, NHCH2COOH, NHCH2CH2NH2,
O o
II H
NHCH2P(OH)2. or NHCHP(OH)2.
CH3
subject to the limitation that when R represents nitro, R^
represents NHCH2CH2SH;
and wherein the position of R on the cinnoline ring is as fol-
lows:
1. when R represents methylenedioxy, R is at the 6,7-posi-
tion of the cinnoline ring, or
2. when R represents nitro, R is at the 7-position of the
cinnoline ring.
(QS1X3V
wherein
X is an alkoxy radical containing 1-4 carbon atoms;
Q is a
i-CH2^ or -CH2CHCH2—
CH3
radical;
y has a value of 0 or 1;
R is hydrogen or an R'sSi— radical wherein R' is CH3— or
CH3CH2— .
4,379,932
PROCESS FOR PREPARING
SPIRO[INDOLINE-3,4'.PIPERIDINE]S
Helen H. Ong, Whippany, N.J., and James A. Profitt, Goshen,
Ind., assignors to American Hoechst Corporation, Bridge-
water, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 121,824, Feb. 15, 1980, Pat. No. 4,307,235,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 936,185, Aug. 23,
1978, Pat. No. 4,209,625, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 789,723, Apr. 21, 1977, abandoned. This application Dec. 18,
1981, Ser. No. 332,174
Int. a.3 C07D 471/10
U.S. a. 546—17 3 Qaims
1. A method for preparing a compound of the formula
4,379,930
PREPARATION OF
2-T-BUTYL-5-HYDROXYPYRIMIDINE
Richard G. Pews, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemi-
cal Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,686
Int. a.3 C07D 239/36
U.S. a. 544—298 * ^'""s
1. A method of making 2-t-butyl-5-hydroxypyrimidme
which comprises hydrolyzing a 2-t-butyl-5-halopyrimidine in
the presence of an alkali metal methoxide and a catalyst com-
prising 2-picoline-n-oxide, di-n-butyldisulfide or elemental
sulfur.
or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof in which
Vis
4,379,931
METAL EXTRACTION FROM SOLUTION AND NOVEL
COMPOUNDS USED THEREFOR
Edwin P. PIgeddemann, Midland, Mich., assignor to Dow Cor-
ning Corporation, Midland, Mich.
FUed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,388
Int. Cl.^ C07D 215/12: C07F 7/10
MS. a. 546—14 13 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
R» is hydrogen or loweralkyl; R^ and R^ are the same or
different and each can be hydrogen, halogen, trinuoro-
methyl, loweralkyl, lowcralkoxy, hydroxy, nitro, amino,
loweralkylamino, formamido, acetamido or lowcralkox-
ycarbonylamino; X is hydrogen, halogen, loweralkyl,
loweralkoxy or hydroxy, which comprises treating a
l'-methylspiro[indoline-3,4'-piperidine] of the formula
462
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
in which X and R' are as defined above with a nuoropyri- in which X and R" are as defined above with a nuorophenyl of
dme of the formula the formula
.J\.
N —f R^
R^' rZ
in which R2 and R^ are the same or different and each can
be hydrogen, halogen, trinuoromethyl, loweraikyi, lower- in which R2' and R^' are the same or different and each can be
alkoxy or nitro in the presence of a solvent and a base. hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, loweraikyi, loweralkoxy
or nitro in the presence of a solvent and a base.
4,379,933
PROCESS FOR PREPARING
SPIRO[INDOLINE-3,4 .PIPERIDINE]S
Helen H. Ong, Whippany, N.J., and James A. Profitt, Goshen,
Ind., assignors to American Hoechst Corporation, Bridge-
water, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 121,824, Feb. 15, 1980, Pat. No. 4,307,235,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 936,185, Aug. 23,
1978, Pat. No. 4,209,625, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 789,723, Apr. 21, 1977, abaifj^oned. This application Dec. 18,
1981, Ser. No. 332,175
Int. a.3 C07D 471/10
U.S. a. 546-17 3 Claims
1. A method for preparing a compound of the formula
4 379 934
PROCESS FOR TWO-DIMENSIONALLY
CONCENTRATING LIGHT, AND NOVEL
PERYLENE-3,4,9,10-TETRACARBOXYLICAaD
DIIMIDES
Fritz Graser, and Guenther Seyboid, both of Ludwigshafen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft,
Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep, of Germany
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,228
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 19,
1980, 3001857; Jan. 19, 1980, 3001858
Int. a.3 C07D 471/06; C09B 3/14
U.S. a. 546-37 3 ciiums
1. A perylene-3,4,9,10-tetracarboxylic acid diimide dye of
the formula
or a physiologically acceptable salt thereof in which Y is
(H3C)2CH
a2
^'-f^-N >=/ \=^
where A' and A^ are hydrogen or A' is isopropyl and A^ is
hydrogen or A^ is isopropyl and A ' is hydrogen.
R' is hydrogen or loweraikyi; R2 and R^ are the same or differ-
ent and each can be hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, low-
eraikyi, loweralkoxy, hydroxy, nitro, amino, formamido or
acetamido; X is hydrogen, halogen, loweraikyi, loweralkoxy
or hydroxy, which comprises treating a r-methylspiro[indo-
Iine-3,4'-piperidine] of the formula
4 379 935
PROCESS FOR THE SYNTHESIS OF VINCAMINE AND
RELATED INDOLE ALKALOIDS
Silvano Paracchini, Codogno Milano, Italy, and Paolo C. Mora,
Via Scalabrini 49, Piacenza, Italy, assignors to Paolo Com
Mora, Piacenza, Italy
FUed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,419
Oalms priority, application Italy, Aug. 4, 1980, 23904 A/80
Int. a.J C07D 461/00. 455/00
U.S. a. 546-51 6 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of vincamine and related
indole alkoloids of the formula (I)
April 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
463
4,379,936
NORTROPANE DERIVATIVES
Robert L. G. Clarke, Bethlehem, N.Y., assignor to Sterling Drug
(I) Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 240,179, Mar. 3, 1981, Pat. No. 4,341,895.
This application Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,545
Int. a.3 C07D 451/02
U.S. a. 546—91 3 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
wherein:
(a) R is —OH, R' is H, and R" is COOY wherein Y is se-
lected from the group consisting of — CH3 and
— CH2CH3;
(b) R is —OH, and both R' and R" are H; or
(c) R" is COOY. and R and R' together form a double bond,
said process comprising reacting a compound of the for-
mula (II)
(II)
R— N
R— N
wherein R is alkanoyl having from two to four carbon atoms.
with an alpha-halo-ester of the formula CH2X-R" wherein
X is selected from the group consisting of CI, Br, and I and
R" is COOY, in the presence of a base containing at least
one member selected from the group comprising alkaline
alcoholates and metal amides where, the metal is selected
from the group consisting of Na, K, or Li, according to
the Darzens reaction conditions, to give the correspond-
ing glycidic esters of the formula (111)
(HI)
and thereafter treating the glycidic ester with a Lewis acid in
an inert solvent and/or with a mineral acid in alcoholic solu-
tion to produce a compound of formula (I).
6. Glycidic esters represented by the formula (111):
4,379,937
SELECTIVE ACYLATION OF
HYDROXY-AMINO-ARYLSULFONIC AODS
Anthony J. Corso, Coventry; Kathleen M. Colavito, Warwick,
and Thomas S. Phillips, East Greenwich, all of R.I., assignors
to American Hoechst Corporation, Somerville, N J.
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,748
Int. a.3 C07D 215/16; C07C 143/42
U.S. a. 546—155 15 Qaims
1. In a method for makmg an N-acylated hydroxy-amino-
arylsulfonic acid which comprises dissolving said hydroxy-
amino-arylsulfonic acid in aqueous solution and reacting it
with an acylating agent, the improvement which comprises
forming a lithium salt of said sulfonic acid in aqueous solution
and conducting the acylation reaction at a pH of about 3 to 6.
4,379,938
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG
2,3,5-TRICHLOROPYRIDINE
Hansjakob Fiih, Ettingen, and Alfred Grieder, Biickten, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley,
N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 148,849, May 12, 1980, Pat. No. 4,287,347.
This application May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,263
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 1, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07D 213/02
U.S. a. 546-345 10 Oaims
1. A process for producing 2,3,5-trichloropyridine which
comprises allowing 3,5-dichloro-2-pyridone in an inert organic
solvent substantially free of water to react with at least about
a molar equivalent amount of phosgene at from about 30° to
about 50° C. in the presence of at least about 0.01 molar equiva-
lent amount of an N,N-disubstituted formamide of the formula
(111)
wherein R" is — COOCH3 or — COOCH2CH3.
H— C— N
/
i
\
Rt
R2
in which each of Ri and R2 is the same or different alkyl group
of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or Ri and R2 taken together, together
with the nitrogen atom to which they are atUched, are pyr-
rolidino, piperidino or morpholino, and neutralizing with base
any excess phosgene in the mixture at the completion of the
reaction.
464
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379 939
PREPARATION OF NITROGEN FERTILIZERS FROM
OXALATE ESTERS PREPARED BY THE OXIDATIVE
CARBONYLATION OF ALCOHOLS OVER NOBLE
METAL CATALYSTS UTILIZING REGENERABLE
2,5.CYCLOHEXADIENE-l,4-DIONE OXIDANTS
Robert J. Radel, and Jack M. Sullivan, both of Florence, Ala.,
assignors to Tennessee Valley Authority, Muscle Shoals, Ala,
Continuation of Ser. No. 137,204, Apr. 4, 1980, now Defensive
Publication No. T100,903. This application Jun. 30, 1980, Ser.
No. 164,418
Int. Cl.i C07C 69/36. 67/36
U.S. a. 560-193 20 Qaims
1. A process for the oxidative carbonylation of substituted or
unsubstituted alcohols having between 1 and 10 carbon atoms
to produce product oxalate esters eminently suitable for use as
fertilizer intermediates and byproduct hydroquinone, which
process comprises reacting in a reaction vessel under essen-
tially anhydrous conditions, at pressures in the range between
about 1000 psi and about 5000 psi and at temperatures in the
range between about 80° C. and about 200° C. a mixture of an
alcohol and carbon monoxide or a mixture of an alcohol, car-
bon monoxide and a co-solvent, said alcohol being either an
aromatic alcohol, a monohydric saturated aliphatic alcohol, or
a saturated alicyclic alcohol, and said co-solvent being nonre-
active to said carbon monoxide under said reaction conditions;
said reacting mixture in conUct with a platinum group metal
salt catalyst, or a complex thereof, and a substituted or unsub-
stituted quinone, wherein the molar ratio of said quinone:-
platinum group metal salt ranges between about 3160:1 and
about 100:1; subsequently filtering and recycling said catalyst;
distilling the resulting reaction product to separate the remain-
ing alcohol or alcohol and co-solvent from said esters; recover-
ing said esters as product; recycling said alcohol or alcohol and
solvent to said reaction vessel; and recovering hydroquinone
as byproduct.
acetic acid contaminant is removed from said vinyl acetate
monomer.
4 379 940
VINYL ACETATE PURIFICATION PROCESS
Richard C. Dickerson, Virginia Beach, Va., assignor to Ecolo-
chem. Inc., Norfolk, Va.
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,373
Int. a.^ C07C 67/00. 67/56
U.S. a. 560-248 13 Qaims
1. A process for removing acetic acid contaminant from
liquid vinyl acetate monomer comprising the following steps:
(a) providing a bed of a dehydrated anion exchange resin;
and
(b) passing said vinyl acetate monomer containing acetic
acid through said anion exchange resin bed whereby said
4,379,941
RESOLUTION OF RACEMIC AMINO AODS
David W. House, Arlington Heights, lU., assignor to UOP Inc.,
Des Plaines, 111.
Filed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,199
Int. a.3 C07B 79/00
U.S. a. 562-401 6 aaims
1. A method of preparing optically active amino acids com-
prising contacting a solution containing the diastereomeric
esters from a racemic amino acid and an optically active 2-iso-
propyl-5-methylcyclohexanol with a chromatographic support
selected from the group consisting of silica, alumina, modified
silicas, and the zeolites, eluting said support with a solvent
under chromatographic conditions, collecting at least one
effluent fraction containing a purified diastereomer, hydrolyz-
ing the purified diastereomer to liberate an optically active
amino acid, and recovering said optically active acid.
4 379 942
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING METHYL KETONES
BY OXIDATION OF TERMINAL OLEFINS
Hubert Mimoun, Rueil Malmaison; Robert Charpentier, Vil-
leneuve les Sablons, and Michel Roussel, Colombes, all of
France, assignors to Institut Francais du Petrole, Rueil-Mal-
maison, France
Continuation-in-part of Ser, No. 104,941, Dec. 18, 1979, Pat. No.
4,310,704. This application May 20, 1981, Ser, No, 265,488
Qaims priority, application France, Dec. 18, 1978, 78 35740;
Jan. 11, 1979, 79 00828; Nov. 13, 1979, 79 28154
Int. a.^ C07C 45/28
U.S. a. 568-385 19 aaitas
1. A process for producing a methyl ketone of the formula
O
II
CH3— C— R
from an olefin of the formula RCH=CH2, wherein R is C1.20
hydrocarbyl, said process comprising the step consisting essen-
tially of contacting said olefin in the liquid phase with a palla-
dium catalyst and a peroxide oxidizing agent:
wherein said palladium catalyst has the formula PdAA',
wherein A is fiuoborate, acetate or trifiuoroacetate; and
A' is OORi, wherein R| is C3.20 hydrocarbyl; and
wherein said oxidizing agent is hydrogen peroxide or an
organic hydroperoxide of the formula R2OOH, wherein
R2 is C4-20 tertiary alkyl, aralkyl or alkylaryl.
ELECTRICAL
4^79,943
CURRENT ENHANCED PHOTOVOLTAIC DEVICE
Chi C. Yang, Troy; Aran Madan, Birmingham; Stanford R.
Oyshinsky, Bloomfield Hills, all of Mich., and David Adler,
Lexington, Mass., assignors to Energy Conversion Devices,
Inc., Troy, Mich.
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,571
Int. a.3 HOIL 31/06. 31/18
U.S. a. 136—249 116 Qaims
98. A multiple cell photovoltaic device formed from multi-
ple layers of amorphous silicon alloys deposited on a substrate
which provides improved current generating capability, said
device comprising:
a plurality of single cell units arranged in series relation, each
said single cell unit comprising a first doped amorphous
silicon alloy layer deposited on said substrate by the glow
discharge decomposition of at least silane gas (SiH4) and
diborane; a first intrinsic amorphous silicon alloy layer de-
posited on said first doped layer by the glow discharge
decomposition of at least silane gas (SiH4); a second intrinsic
amorphous silicon alloy layer deposited on said first intrinsic
layer by the glow discharge decomposition of at least silicon
tetrafluoride (SiF4) and hydrogen and/or silane gas (SiH4);
and a further doped amorphous silicon alloy layer deposited
on said second intrinsic layer by the glow discharge decom-
position of at least silicon tetrafluoride (SiF4), phosphine
PH3, and hydrogen and/or silane gas (SiH4).
4,379,944
GROOVED SOLAR CELL FOR DEPLOYMENT AT SET
ANGLE
Peter G. Borden, Menio Park; Ronald L. Bell, Woodside, and
Syed B. Hyder, Los Altos Hills, all of Calif., assignors to
Varian Associates, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 232,062
Int. a.3 HOIL 31/06
U.S. a. 136—259 8 Qaims
1. A solar cell for deployment at a set angle with respect to
incoming radiation comprising:
a wafer of a semiconductor material having a series of
grooves formed on the front surface thereof, said grooves
forming first and second sets of sidewalls, all of the side-
walls of each set being oriented in generally the same
direction;
a network of metal contact lines formed on at least some of
the sidewalls of said first set, whereby the body of said cell
may be tilted to receive incoming radiation in a manner
such that substantial amounts of said incident radiation
impinges on said sidewalls of said second set and said
network of metal contact lines is substantially shadowed;
a pn junction formed in at least a portion of said sidewalls of
said grooves;
contact metallization formed on the back surface of said
wafer; and
apparatus for receiving and maintaining said solar cell at a
set angle with respect to incoming radiation.
4,379,945
ADJUSTABLE INSULATOR ATTACHMENT FOR
ISOLATED PHASE BUS SWITCH
Alexander Zwillich, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,462
Int. a.3 H02G 5/06
U.S. a. 174—99 B 7 Oaims
'M7
^TMiiiCMiij* r T "^^sn:
1. Apparatus for attaching an insulator to an electrical con-
ductor comprising:
a base member attached to the electrical conductor, said base
member including a mounting portion substantially tan-
gential to the surface of the conductor and means defining
a first circular aperture through said mounting portion;
a first circular positioning plate comprising means for sup-
porting said first positioning plate within said first aper-
ture and means defining a second circular aperture
through said first positioning plate and nonconcentric
therewith;
a second circular positioning plate comprising means for
supporting said second positioning plate within said sec-
ond aperture; an insulator attachment member; and means
for eccentrically supporting said attachment member
upon said second positioning plate;
means for fixedly attaching said attachment member to an
insulator; and
means operable between disengaged and engaged conditions
for permitting roUtion of said first and said second posi-
tioning plates when in the disengaged condition, and for
fixedly locating said first positioning plate, said second
positioning plate, and said attachment member relative to
the electrical conductor when in the engaged condition;
whereby roUtion of said first and second positioning plates
is operable to adjust the position of an insulator relative to
the electrical conductor within planes tangential to the
surface of the electrical conductor.
465
466
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,946
SIGNALLING SYSTEM AND SIGNAL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT FOR MULTI-ADDRESS CALLING
Toshiro Mizuno, and Kazuo Imai, both of Iruma, Japan, assign-
ors to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,484
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 5, 1980, 55-74930;
Feb. 27, 1981, 56-27930; Mar. 9, 1981, 56-34080
Int. a.' H04L 11/15
U.S. a. 178-3 9 Qaims
SYN
FUNCTION
CODE
1. A signalling system for multi-address calling for transmit-
tmg the same information from an originating terminal to a
plurality of destination terminals, in which a control signal
related to the plurality of destination terminals, which is trans-
mitted and received between the originating terminal and an
exchange, is composed of:
a synchronize signal for detecting the beginning of the con-
trol signal;
a function determination field for indicating that the control
signal is any one of at least a selection signal, a call accept-
ing state indication signal, and a data receiving state indi-
cation signal; and
a terminal appointing field in which respective one bit time
slots are assigned to each of the destination terminals in a
predetermined order so that the signal set in the function
determination field is allotted as a result of one bit appear-
ing in said respective time slot.
4,379,947
SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING DATA
SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH AUDIO
Paul Warner, Port Washington, N.Y., assignor to Teleprompter
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 2, 1979, Ser. No. 9,187
. Int. a.' He4H 5/00; H04J 1/14
U.S. a. 179-1 GD 23 Qaims
r
UA>N CHANNEL
3*''4 SO'JOCE
9AC«S»0uND
^
SUMMING
Circuit
SjBCARRiER
GENERATOR
(SCA 8AND1
TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER iJNlT
4,379,948
METHOD OF AND ARRANGEMENT FOR DERIVING
CHARACTERISTIC VALUES FROM A SOUND SIGNAL
Hermann Ney, and Michael H. Kuhn, both of Hamburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,156
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 27,
1979, 2939077
Int. Cl.^ GIOL 7/00
U.S. CI. 179-1 SC 2aaims
t>-
'n
T
jk.» f ^-1 I
iP
11. In a broadcasting system for transmitting a main program
on a channel carrier and an auxiliary audio program such as
background #usic on subcarriers of the channel carrier, data
transmission means for transmitting a data signal simulta-
neously with the auxiliary audio program on the same subcarri-
ers of the channel carrier without interruption of the transmis-
sion of either the data signal or the auxiliary audio program.
1. An arrangement for deriving characteristic values from a
sound signal having a transducer circuit, which circuit receives
the electrical signal derived from the sound signal and on
whose output short-time-spectrum signal values are available,
which values represent the energy of the electrical signal in
consecutive equal time intervals for each of a plurality of
adjacent frequency ranges, comprising:
a memory (9) having an address input; ^
a clock supplying a clock signal;
multiple parallel switch means (13) to connect said address
input of said memory to the output (8) of said transducer
circuit (3, 5, 7) under the control of said clock signal; said
multiple parallel switching means being a series of
switches connected in parallel, one of which connects said
memory address input to said transducer circuit output
when a sound signal is present on said output to receive
said short-time-spectrum signal values and the number of
the associated frequency ranges as addresses;
an address circuit (15, 17) which consecutively addresses the
memory location (19, 21) of said memory under the con-
trol of said clock signal via said switching means;
a data output (10) for said memory;
a data output of said memory (10) connected to said address
circuit;
said address circuit forming some of the contents of said
addressed memory locations of each frequency range;
an adder (11) connected to said data output of said memory
such that said adder increments the content of each ad-
dressed memory location by one unit and stores the result
at said location, thus storing the number of times that the
corresponding signal has appeared on said transducer
output;
a result memory (31);
a comparator circuit (33, 35) to compare the sum of the
contents of said addressed memory locations with multiples of
a quantile value which is derived from the total number of
short-time-spectrum signal values of each frequency range and,
when a multiple is exceeded to store the instantaneous address
of the address circit (15, 17) in said result memory connected
thereto;
said result memory containing the signal values representing
the desired characteristic values after all memory loca-
tions of said memory (9) have been addressed by the
address circuit. ^
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
467
4,379,949
METHOD OF AND MEANS FOR VARIABLE-RATE
CODING OF LPC PARAMETERS
Yeunung Chen, Richardson, Tex., and Michael J. McLaughlin,
Hoffman Estates, 111., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaum-
burg. 111.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,648
Int. a.3 GIOL 1/00
U.S. a. 179—15.55 R 17 Qaims
1. A method of minimizing an amount of digital information
sent to characterize a signal that has been divided into frames
of equal times and for which parameters of linear predictive
coding have been determined for each of a plurality of the
frames, the method comprising:
(a) storing parameter values of a predetermined number of
frames;
(b) determining interpolated values resulting from linear
interpolation between parameter values of a first frame
and a parameter value of a frame of the predetermined
number;
(c) comparing the interpolated values with the parameter
values at frames between the first frame and the frame of
the predetermined number to obtain compared values;
(d) testing the compared values against a predetermined
threshold; and
(e) transmitting the parameter value of the frame of the
predetermined number when no compared value exceeds
the threshold.
troller for accessing said last-mentioned memory in the group
of that controller from said system bus for transfer of data from
said bus to said memory, second address control means in said
group controller for accessing said last-mentioned memory for
the transfer of data to said last-mentioned memory from said
group and means responsive to first receipt of a signal indica-
tive of means accessing said last-mentioned memory for apply-
ing a wait signal to any other accessing means attempting to
access said memory and in which each group controller in-
cludes a direct path to its group processor by passing said
temporary storage memory whereby to reset the group proces-
sor on a signal from the system processor over said direct path.
4,379,951
ELECTRO-ACOUSTIC TRANSDUCER MEANS
Saad Z. M. Gabr, 81 Old Dover Rd., Canterbury, Kent, England
Division of Ser. No. 901,147, Apr. 28, 1978, Pat. No. 4,176,253.
This application Nov. 14, 1979, Ser. No. 94,082
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr, 20, 1977,
16500/77; Apr. 25, 1977, 17215/77; May 20, 1977, 21383/77;
Jun. 1, 1977, 23208/77; Jan. 23, 1978, 2629/78
Int. a.3 H04R 7/02, 9/02
U.S. a. 179—101 2 Qaims
4,379,950
DISTRIBUTED CONTROL MEMORY NETWORK
Fahim Ahmed, Guelph, Canada, assignor to International Tele-
phone and Telegraph Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 135,464
Claims priority, application Canada, Jul. 23, 1979, 332385
Int. a.3 H04M 3/00
U.S. a. 179—18 ES 3 Claims
i.^!
SwBitt ST*I CNS
TLST ftCCCtS lUS
'~J
' STATION
ICCWWOLltltj
I~ST»TtON I r ~T*OW ~
1. A distributed communications system including a com-
mon system controller including system processor and associ-
ated memory, said system controller operative to control a
plurality of groups of stations, with each group of stations
including a group controller comprised of a group processor
and associated memory, a system bus interacting between said
system controller and said group controllers for the transfer of
data in pulse code modulation from said system controller to
selected ones of said group controllers and from said group
controllers individually to said system controller, a common
random access memory in each group controller for providing
temporary storage for channeling control daU bidirectionally
between the system processor and the group processor of the
respective group, first address control means in a group con-
S3
-t
97
,,,,,,, I I •••''•'< I I I i"i-
1. An electro-acoustic transducer means comprising:
diaphragm means, said diaphragm means having an outer
periphery and an internal aperture bounded by an inner
periphery,
rigid chassis means, said chassis means having a first portion
extending around said diaphragm means outer periphery
and a second portion disposed within said diaphragm
means internal aperture and around which said diaphragm
means inner periphery extends,
first diaphragm suspension means, said first diaphragm sus-
pension means extending between said diaphragm means
outer periphery and said first portion of said chassis
means,
second diaphragm suspension means, said second diaphragm
suspension means extending inwardly from said dia-
phragm means inner periphery to said second portion of
said chassis means,
electro-mechanical transducer means acting between said
diaphragm means and said chassis means,
means mounting said electro-mechanical transducer means
within said chassis means second portion, and
connecting means extending outwardly from said electrome-
chanical transducer means to drivingly engage said dia-
phragm means.
4 379 952
MECHANICAL HLTERFOR AN ELECTRODYNAMIC
TRANSDUCER
Adrianus J. M. Kaizer, and Wlert Kopinga, both of Eindhoven,
Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
FUed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,772
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 11, 1979,
7908896 ^-^
Int. C\? H04R 7/00
U.S. Q. 179—115.5 PC 7 Qaims
1. An electrodynamic transducer comprising a vibratory
cone, a voice coil former on which a voice coil is arranged, and
a coupling element between the voice coil former and the cone
comprising a centering diaphragm which extends across the
468
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
voice coil former with the cone secured to a portion of the
centering diaphragm which is situated within the periphery of
the voice coil former and the portion of the centering dia-
said control shaft carrying a first actuating member;
said control level member carrying a second actuating mem-
ber and being pivotally movable relative to said lever
support member about a second axis;
said lever support member carrying a third actuating mem-
ber and being pivotally movable relative to said support
frame about a first axis;
a switching unit mounted on said support frame and having
a switch base having at a first surface thereof said control
lever member, said control shaft and said first, second and
third actuating members and carrying on said first surface
a plurality of switching elements to be selectively opened
and closed by operation of said first, second and third
actuating members;
phragm which constitutes the coupling element between the
voice coil former and the cone being operative to function as a
mechanical filter.
4 379 953
TELEPHONE SWITCH RETAINING APPARATUS
Leslie G. Huff, 11512 Tincup #208, Austin, Tex. 78750
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,558
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/22
U.S. a. 179-178 9 ci^„.
1. A telephone switch retaining apparatus comprising:
a first means includmg a generally fiat surface with securing
means for securing the first means to a telephone appara-
tus having a receiver, transmitter and a switch button;
a second means included with the first means for longitudi-
nal sliding movement and being positioned relative to the
first means such that longitudinal sliding movement of the
second means will selectively engage and depress the
switch button of said telephone apparatus as a result of the
sliding engagement and maintain the switch button de-
pressed.
first, second and third actuating pieces mounted on said first
surface of said switch base and operable by said first,
second and third actuating members, respectively, to open
and close respective of said switching elements;
an additional switching element mounted on a s«;ond sur-
face of said switch base, opposite to said first surface
thereof;
a fourth actuating piece having a bridging contact mounted
thereon and disposed on said second surface of said switch
base; and
said fourth actuating piece and one of said first, second and
third actuating pieces having portions mechanically cou-
pled through an aperture formed in said switch base, such
that motion of said one actuating piece in use is transmit-
ted to said fourth actuating piece to selectively open or
close said additional switching element.
4,379,955
SEALED ROTARY SWITCH
John Comerford, Glendale Heights, III., assignor to Oak Indus-
tries, Inc., Rancho Bernardo, Calif.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,831
Int. a.3 HOIH 19/64
U.S. a. 200-11 DA SQaims
4 379 954
LEVER OPERATED PLURAL SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Masayosi Iwata, Hashima; Harumi Douke, Komaki; Yoshikazu
Hayashi, Gifu; Tadashi Yokoyama, Kuwana, and Yukio
Mizuta, Nishi, all of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha
Tokai Rika Denki Seisakusho, Aichi, Japan
Filed Oct. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 199,214
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 24, 1979. 54-
147425[U]
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/00. 3/16
tJ.S. a. 200-* 8 Claims
1. A combination switching arrangement for use in a motor
vehicle and the like and comprising:
a support frame;
a lever support member pivotally mounted to said support
frame;
a control level member pivotally mounted to said lever
support member;
said control level member having a control shaft extending
axially therethrough and said control shaft being rotatable
about the longitudinal axis of said control level member;
//•
k
4i f
i^^i
V<^
1. A sealed rotary switch, comprising:
a stator having side walls with generally open ends;
first and second covers having aligned openings, one cover
being located near each end of the stator and in contact
with the side walls, the joints between the covers and the
side walls including a notch filled with adhesive sealant;
a rotor including a hub and a printed circuit board connected
to the hub, the rotor being mounted for rotation in the
cover openings with the printed circuit board located
between the covers, the covers each having a seat formed
around the opening, resilient seal members being disposed
in the seats to seal against the rotor hub; and
APRIL 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
469
electrical leads insert-molded in the stator and extending into
contact with the printed circuit board in the sealed inte-
rior of the stator.
and mechanically connecting said enclosure element to
another enclosure element; and
a second generally "Y"-shaped enclosure element having a
circuit breaker control means disposed therein for control-
4,379,956
BREAK-JAW CONSTRUCTION FOR A DISCONNECHNG
SWITCH STRUCTURE
Charles M. Qeaveland, North Huntingdon, and Peter M.Kowa-
lik, Trafford, both of Pa., assignors to aeaveland/Pnce En-
terprises, Inc., Trafford, Pa.
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,686
Int. a.3 HOIH 31/30, 1/42
U.S.a.200-48A ♦Claims
30-J
»J
ling the flow of current therethrough and a flanged open-
ing means attached to a leg of said second enclosure ele-
ment for electrically and mechanically atuchmg said
second enclosure element to first said enclosure element.
1 A high-voltage disconnecting switch comprising a swing-
ing movable disconnecting switchblade (10) making separable
opening and closing contacting engagement with a stationary
switch contact assembly (8). means pivotally mounting said
swinging movable disconnecting switchblade (10) about a
stationary pivot, said stationary switch contact assembly (8)
comprising a confronting pair of inwardly turned contact
fingers (30a) turned inwardly from their relatively stationary
outer contact supporting strap portions (30). said inwardly
turned contact fingers (30a) having apertures provided ajacent
their lower free ends (30c), a floating tie-bolt assembly (35)
extending through the two aforesaid apertures and constituting
an end limiting stop for the completely closed circuit position
of the swinging movable disconnecting switchblade when it is
fully closed, whereby lateral movement of the switchblade (10)
during the existence of heavy fault currents pushing one
contact fmger (30a) will cause the floating tie-bolt assembly
(35) to carry the other opposed contact finger (30a) along
therewith for good conUcting movement with the switch-
blade, said floating tie-bolt assembly (35) including a metallic
tube (37) having its outer ends interiorly threaded to accom-
modate mounting bolts (40), spring means (♦aj 4"^^^?°^^^
between the head (40a) of each mounting bol* /♦f ) ^"'^^'^^
outer face surface (30ft ) of each contact flnger (30*). and an
insulating bushing (41) encircling each mounting bolt (40) and
passing through the respective aperture in the contact finger
(30a) to prevent current flow from the switchblade into the
spring means (43).
4 379 957
MODULAR "V -TYPE ENCLOSURE ELEMENTS FOR
GAS INSULATED SUBSTATIONS
Ben J. Calvino, MonrocTiUe, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,872
Int. a.3 HOIN 33/14
U.S. a. 200-145 , " CUd»«
1. A compressed gas modular circuit control system, com-
'^Tffrst generally "Y"-shaped enclosure element having a
circuit control means disposed therein for controllmg the
flow of current therethrough and a flanged opening means
attached to a leg of said enclosure element for electrically
4,379,958
GAS-BLAST SWTTCH
Johann Blatter, Schonenwerd, and Walter Schaad, Oberent-
felden, both of Switzerland, assignors to Sprecher A !»cBun
AG, Aarau, Switzerland
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,430
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 22, 1979,
10413/79
Int. a.5 HOIN 33/88
U.S. a. 200-148 A ^ ^**™
1. A gas-blast switch comprising:
a thrust rod; . r a .u^..,
a movable contact element secured to one end of said thrust
rod;
a stationary contact element;
said movable contact element being capable of being
brought into and out of engagement with said stationary
contact element;
said movable contact element having a free end;
a blast nozzle secured to said thrust rod and surrounding said
free end of said movable contact element;
said blast nozzle having inlet means;
a cylinder containing a pump chamber surrounded by said
cylinder;
said pump chamber containing an extmguishing gas;
470
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said inlet means of said blast nozzle being in flow communi-
cation with said pump chamber;
said pump chamber during the course of a cut-off stroke of
said gas-blast switch being pressurized;
a first stationarily supported piston upon which there is
dispiaceably guided said cylinder;
a second piston situated opposite said first piston;
said blast nozzle being constructed to constitute fioor means
of said second piston;
said second piston being displaceable relative to said cylin-
der between two end positions;
means for moving the cylinder during a cut-off stroke of the
gas-blast switch in the same direction as the movable
contact element but through a smaller displacement path
than the path of movement of said movable contact ele-
ment;
said means for moving the cylinder comprising two stop
members arranged within said cylinder;
said stop members cooperating with said second piston for
defining the end positions of said cylinder with respect to
said second piston and forming with the latter a drag
connection between said thrust rod and said cylinder; and
at least one spring member for loadmg said cylinder in the
direction of the cut-off stroke of the gas-blast switch.
4,379,959
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR WIRE-CUTTING A
WORKPIECE BY ELECTROEROSION
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,668
aaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 4, 1979, 54-128621:
Nov. 21, 1979, 54-151274
Int. a.' B23P 1/12
U.S. a. 219-69 M ,7 claims
element constituting a slender guide element and being
straight at least along the length of said through-hole;
(c) securely holding said detached wire element on said
workpiece while leaving it inserted in said through-hole
agamst dropping out;
(d) positioning a wire electrode having a broken, free end
portion extending continuously from the supply means
through a first of said wire guide members disposed at an
inlet side of said workpiece to locate said broken, free end
portion ahead of said workpiece;
(e) positioning said workpiece to locate said broken, free end
portion projecting from said first wire guide member,
ahead of and coaxially with said through-hole;
(0 connecting an end of said detached wire element project-
ing from said through-hole at said inlet side with said
broken, free end portion of the wire electrode;
(g) withdrawing said detached wire element from said
through-hole through a second of said wire guide mem-
bers disposed at an outlet side of said workpiece and
continuingly displacing said element to advance said wire
electrode through said second wire guide member onto
said collection means; and subsequently
(h) proceeding to the wire-cutting of said workpiece by
electroerosion.
4,379,960
ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE MACHINING METHOD AND
APPARATUS USING ULTRASONIC WAVES AND
MAGNETIC ENERGY APPLIED CONCURRENTLY TO
THE MACHINING GAP
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 150,355, May 16, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,366,358. This application Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,417
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 22, 1980, 55-6632
Int. a.J B23P 1/08
U.S. a. 219-69 M 29 Qaims
1. In a method of wire-cutting a workpiece by electroerosion
wherein a continuous wire electrode is axially transported
from a supply means to a collection means along a predeter-
mined wire guiding path to traverse the workpiece linearly
between a pair of wire guide members disposed at opposite
iides of the workpiece in the path and adapted to position the
vire electrode therebetween in a machining relationship with
ihe workpiece; and an electrical machining current is passed
l>etween the wire electrode and the workpiece across a ma-
chining gap flooded with a machining medium to electroero-
" » displaced Umnsyi
1. A method of electroerosively machining a workpiece,
comprising the steps of:
positioning a tool electrode in a spaced juxtaposition with
said workpiece to define a machining gap therewith in a
machining liquid received in a worktank;
applying a succession of electrical machining pulses between
said tool electrode and said workpiece to produce electri-
cal discharges across said machining gap flooded with said
machining liquid, thereby removing material from said
workpiece and forming a recess therein;
relatively displacing said tool electrode and said workpiece
so ihal ihc successive ren^oval of material progressively
»dvaneg» \W \ott
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
471
4,379,961
METHOD OF MAKING AN APPARATUS CONTAINING
A DIAPHRAGM
Jorn M. Schmidt, Nordborg, Denmark, assignor to Danfoss A/S,
Nordborg, Denmark
Continuation of Ser. No. 48,845, Jun. 15, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 898,092, Apr. 20, 1978,
abandoned. This application Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,517
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 27,
1777, 2718609
Int. a.3 B23K 11/16
U.S. a. 219—78.01 1 Qaim
ture, comprising: a pair of upwardly opening receptacles
mounted on the frame in spaced relationship to each other at
respective locations elevated above and equidistant from the
torch nozzle; an elongate shield holder having downwardly
extending projections at its opposite ends; said projections
■being respectively releasably received in the pair of upwardly
opening receptacles; said shield holder being located approxi-
mately at the level of the receptacles and having an arcuate
portion extending at least 180° about the torch nozzle; and a
plasma arc shield secured to the shield holder in dependmg
relationship thereto and having a lower edge located no higher
than the bottom of the nozzle.
1. A method of making apparatus having a thin walled dia-
phragm unit, comprising the steps of, initially forming a thin
tube element of a ferrous compound and with a cylindrical
shape, providing a ring element of a ferrous compound having
an inside diameter larger than the diameter of said tube ele-
ment, forming an oblique rim on said tube element, applying a
layer of from 4 to 8 microns of an alloy of phosphorous and
nickel having a melting point of about 900° C. only on the ring
element, said alloy having a substantially higher electrical
resistance than said ferrous compounds, placing said ring ele-
ment in surrounding relation to said tube element in juxtaposi-
tion to said rim, said layer being between said ring element and
said rim, and pressing said rim into contact with said ring
element while passing an electric current through said rim and
said ring element to provide heat for joining said elements
together, said heat being concentrated in said layer of said
alloy which attains a substantially higher temperature than said
tube and ring elements by reason of said substantially higher
electrical resistance thereof
4,379,962
SUPPORT STRUCTURE FOR PLASMA ARC CUTTING
TORCH SHIELD
Richard W. Hirst, Hazel Green, Wis., assignor to Deere &
Company, Moline, 111.
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,128
Int. a.3 B23K 9/00
U.S. a. 219—121 P 10 aaims
4,379,963
WELDING APPARATUS DESIGNED PARTICULARLY
FOR USE WITHIN A CONHNED AREA
Gasparas Kazlauskas, 10219 Briarwood Dr., Los Angeles, Calif.
90024
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,704
Int. a.' B23K 9/225
U.S. a. 219—136 21 Qaims
1. A welding apparatus for producing a weld on a work-
piece, said welding apparatus comprising:
a main housing having a longitudinal center axis, said main
housing being tubular having an elongagted opening;
a shaft mounted within said elongated opening, said shaft
being longitudinally movable along said longitudinal cen-
ter axis and rotatable about said longitudinal center axis, a
welding electrode connected to one end of said shaft, said
welding electrode being spaced from said main housing,
said welding electrode being rotated by rotation of said
shaft;
securing means for longitudinally fixing said shaft relative to
said main housing at a particular established position, said
securing means being re\e«sable penniUing \onpludinal
movement of uid shaft reUtive to wid main hominf; and
/>
470
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said inlet means of said blast nozzle being in flow communi-
cation with said pump chamber;
said pump chamber during the course of a cut-off stroke of
said gas-blast switch being pressurized:
a first stationarily supported piston upon which there is
displaceably guided said cylinder;
a second piston situated opposite said first piston;
said blast nozzle being constructed to constitute floor means
of said second piston;
said second piston being displaceable relative to said cylin-
der between two end positions;
means for moving the cylinder during a cut-off stroke of the
gas-blast switch in the same direction as the movable
contact element but through a smaller displacement path
than the path of movement of said movable contact ele-
ment;
said means for moving the cylinder comprising two stop
members arranged within said cylinder;
said stop members cooperating with said second piston for
defining the end positions of said cylinder with respect to
said second piston and forming with the latter a drag
connection between said thrust rod and said cylinder; and
at least one spring member for loading said cylinder in the
direction of the cut-off stroke of the gas-blast switch.
element constituting a slender guide element and being
straight at least along the length of said through-hole;
(c) securely holding said detached wire element on said
workpiece while leaving it inserted in said through-hole
against dropping out;
(d) positioning a wire electrode having a broken, free end
portion extending continuously from the supply means
through a first of said wire guide members disposed at an
inlet side of said workpiece to locate said broken, free end
portion ahead of said workpiece;
(e) positioning said workpiece to locate said broken, free end
portion projecting from said first wire guide member,
ahead of and coaxially with said through-hole;
(0 connecting an end of said detached wire element project-
ing from said through-hole at said inlet side with said
broken, free end portion of the wire electrode;
(g) withdrawing said detached wire element from said
through-hole through a second of said wire guide mem-
bers disposed at an outlet side of said workpiece and
continuingly displacing said element to advance said wire
electrode through said second wire guide member onto
said collection means; and subsequently
(h) proceeding to the wire-cutting of said workpiece by
electroerosion.
4,379,959
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR WIRE-CUTTING A
WORKPIECE BY ELECTROEROSION
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,668
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 4, 1979, 54-128621-
Nov. 21, 1979. 54-151274
Int. a.' B23P 1/12
U.S. a. 219-69 .M 17 Claims
-^rmr>
4,379,960
ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE MACHINING METHOD AND
APPARATUS USING ULTRASONIC WAVES AND
MAGNETIC ENERGY APPLIED CONCURRENTLY TO
THE MACHINING GAP
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 150,355, May 16, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,366,358. This application Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,417
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 22, 1980, 55-6632
Int. a? B23P 1/08
U.S. a. 219-69 M 29 Qaims
1 In a method of wire-cutting a workpiece by electroerosion
wherein a continuous wire electrode is axially transported
from a supply means to a collection means along a predeter-
mined wire guiding path to traverse the workpiece linearly
between a pair of wire guide members disposed at opposite
sides of the workpiece in the path and adapted to position the
wire electrode therebetween in a machining relationship with
the workpiece; and an electrical machining current is passed
between the wire electrode and the workpiece across a ma-
chining gap flooded with a machining medium to electroero-
sively remove material from the workpiece while the work-
piece is displaced transversely and relative to the wire elec-
trode along a prescribed feed path to form a desired cut in the
workpiece, the improvement which comprises the preliminary
steps of:
(a) forming a straight through-hole in the workpiece at a
preselapted location thereof representing a surt point of
said prescribed feed path;
(b) inserting through said through-hole a detached wire
1. A method of electroerosively machining a workpiece,
comprising the steps of:
positioning a tool electrode in a spaced juxtaposition with
said workpiece to define a machining gap therewith in a
machining liquid received in a worktank;
applying a succession of electrical machining pulses between
said tool electrode and said workpiece to produce electri-
cal discharges across said machining gap flooded with said
machining liquid, thereby removing material from said
workpiece and forming a recess therein;
relatively displacing said tool electrode and said workpiece
so that the successive removal of material progressively
advances the formation of said recess in said workpiece;
applying a magnetic field of a magnitude not less than 100
Gauss to the region of said recess for a first time period;
applying ultrasonic waves of a frequency not less than 10
kHz through said machining liquid to the region of said
recess for a second time period; and
providing a third time period in which said first and second
time periods coincide with each other at least partly.
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
471
4,379,961
METHOD OF MAKING AN APPARATUS CONTAINING
A DIAPHRAGM
Jorn M. Schmidt, Nordborg, Denmark, assignor to Danfoss A/S,
Nordborg, Denmark
Continuation of Ser. No. 48,845, Jun. 15, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 898,092, Apr. 20, 1978,
abandoned. This application Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,517
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 27,
1777, 2718609
Int. a.' B23K 11/16
U.S. a. 219—78.01 1 Claim
ture, comprising: a pair of upwardly opening receptacles
mounted on the frame in spaced relationship to each other at
respective locations elevated above and equidistant from the
torch nozzle; an elongate shield holder having downwardly
extending projections at its opposite ends; said projections
being respectively releasably received in the pair of upwardly
opening receptacles; said shield holder being located approxi-
mately at the level of the receptacles and having an arcuate
portion extending at least 180° about the torch nozzle; and a
plasma arc shield secured to the shield holder in depending
relationship thereto and having a lower edge located no higher
than the bottom of the nozzle.
1. A method of making apparatus having a thin walled dia-
phragm unit, comprising the steps of, initially forming a thin
tube element of a ferrous compound and with a cylindrical
shape, providing a ring element of a ferrous compound having
an inside diameter hrger than the diameter of said tube ele-
ment, forming an oblique rim on said tube element, applying a
layer of from 4 to 8 microns of an alloy of phosphorous and
nickel having a melting point of about 900° C. only on the ring
element, said alloy having a substantially higher electrical
resistance than said ferrous compounds, placing said ring ele-
ment in surrounding relation to said tube element in juxtaposi-
tion to said rim, said layer being between said ring element and
said rim, and pressing said nm into contact with said ring
element while passing an electric current through said rim and
said ring element to provide heat for joining said elements
together, said heat being concentrated in said layer of said
alloy which attains a substantially higher temperature than said
tube and ring elements by reason of said substantially higher
electrical resistance thereof.
4,379,962
SUPPORT STRUCTURE FOR PLASMA ARC CUTTING
TORCH SHIELD
Richard W. Hirst, Hazel Green, Wis., assignor to Deere &
Company, Moline, III.
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,128
Int. C\? B23K 9/00
U.S. a. 219—121 P 10 Qaims
1. In a machine including a frame supporting a plasma arc
cutting torch having a downwardly projecting nozzle and a
shielding structure including a shield supported in surrounding
relationship to the nozzle, an improved shield support struc-
4.379,963
WELDING APPARATUS DESIGNED PARTICULARLY
FOR USE WITHIN A CONRNED AREA
Gasparas Kaziauskas, 10219 Briarwood Dr., Los Angeles, Calif.
90024
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,704
Int. a.' B23K 9/225
U.S. a. 219—136 21 Qaims
1. A welding apparatus for producing a weld on a work-
piece, said welding apparatus compnsing:
a main housing having a longitudinal center axis, said main
housing being tubular having an elongagted opening:
a shaft mounted within said elongated opening, said shaft
being longitudinally movable along said longitudinal cen-
ter axis and rotatable about said longitudinal center axis, a
welding electrode connected to one end of said shaft, said
welding electrode being spaced from said main housing,
said welding electrode being rotated by rotation of said
shaft;
securing means for longitudinally fixing said shaft relative to
said main housing at a particular established position, said
securing means being releasable permitting longitudinal
movement of said shaft relative to said main housing; and
handle means mounted upon said main housing, said handle
means being movable between an operable position and a
collapsed position, whereby said handle means is to be
located in said collapsed position and said welding appara-
tus then moved through a confining opening into an en-
larged internal chamber to be then utilized to weld with
said handle means being moved to said operable position.
472
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,379,964
METHOD OF FOOD HEATING CONTROL BY
DETECTING LIBERATED GAS OR VAPOR AND
TEMPERATURE OF FOOD
Takato Kanazawa; Keijiro Mori, both of Nara; Shigeni
Kusunokj, Yamatokoriyama; Kazunari Nishii,
Yamatokoriyama, and Tomotaka Nobue, Yamatokoriyama,
aJI of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 167,844
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 20, 1979, 54-93043;
Sep. 6, 1979, 54-114501
Int. aj H05B 1/02
U.S. a. 219-492 7 Oaims
1. Heating apparatus including an oven and means for gener-
ating heating power for cooking foodstuffs, comprising:
means for generating a temperature signal corresponding to
the surface temperature of said foodstuff;
means for amplifying said temperature signal and comparing
said signal with a predetermined temperature setting, said
means producing a temperature detection signal TEMP at
a time ti;
means for generating at least one of a humidity and gas
concentration signal corresponding to the humidity and
gas concentration within* said oven;
means for amplifying a selected one of said humidity and gas
concentration signals and producing a detection signal
HUM at a time t2 when said one of said humidity and gas
concentration begins to increase;
means for starting and stopping said means for generating
heating power;
means for receiving and storing said temperature signal and
one of said humidity and gas concentration signals; and
a microprocessor for storing said signals and storing and
executing a program for the sequence control of the oper-
ations of said respective means.
4,379,965
CONTACT LENS DISINFECTING APPARATUS
George H. Dounce, Rochester, and John A. Moore, Wyoming,
both of N.Y., assignors to Bausch A Lomb Incorporated,
Rochester, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,643
Int. a.3 A61L 2/J8: H05B 3/06
VS. a. 219—521 13 Qaims
1. Apparatus for disinfecting contact lenses contained within
a contact lens carrying case, comprising:
a housing defining a well for supporting a contact lens carry-
ing case, said well being defined by side walls, end walls
and bottom support means for supporting and conducting
heat to contact lenses contained within said carrying case;
a heat sink positioned in said housing to directly contact said
well bottom support means for conducting heat to said
bottom support means;
a PTC heater element for providing, and automatically
controlling, heat supplied to said heat sink, said PTC
heater element being electrically energizable and having
the characteristics to initially sharply rise in temperature
until a preset temperature is achieved and thereafter main-
tain that temperature until said PTC heater element is
de-energized;
a spring biasing member supporting said PTC heater element
and locating and biasing said PTC heater element against
said heat sink, including a central portion for receiving
and positioning said PTC heater element in close relation-
ship with said heat sink and a pair of extensions extending
outwardly from said central portion to form legs for en-
gagement with said housing for locating said PTC heater
element relative to said housing and said heat sink; and
locating means being defined in said housing so as to receive
and engage said legs of said spring biasing member in
order to cause said extensions to sufficiently flex to urge
and maintain said PTC heater element in close contact
with said heat sink.
4,379,966
RECEPTACLE FOR ELECT-RONIC INFORMATION KEY
William P. Flies, BumsYille, Minn., assignor to Datakey, Inc.,
Burnsville, Minn.
Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,362
Int. a.3 G06K 7/06
U.S. a. 235—443 H Qaims
1. A receptacle defining a key way for an insert portion of a
key-like device having an inserted and a "locked" position
within the receptacle, the key-like device further having a
plurality of spaced transverse grooves on said insert portion
and containing an electrical element embedded therein, the
element including a plurality of electrical leads each of which
is carried on the surface of one of each of said grooves, the
receptacle comprising:
a plurality of spaced electrically conductive contact heads
protruding into said keyway and positioned therein for
contacting a correspondingly spaced key lead upon inser-
tion of said key insert portion into the receptacle and
rotation of the key to the "locked" position;
finger spring cylinder means surrounding said keyway and
including a plurality of arcuate finger spring members so
as to form a cylinder-like structure of opposing finger
spring pairs, the ends of each finger spring pair being
positioned in supporting engagement with one each of
said contact heads and the contact heads being arranged in
the keyway such that the contact heads are displaced
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
473
outwardly and urge the supporting finger spring pairs
radially outwardly when the key is rotated to the
"locked" position; and,
electrical connection means for connecting said receptacle
to an operating electrical circuit.
4,379,967
HBER OPTIC MATRIX CODING METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR RADIATION IMAGE AMPLIHER
John A. Mclntyre, 2316 Bristol St., Bryan, Tex. 77801
Filed Aug. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 180,331
Int. a.J G02B 5/]4
U.S. a. 250—227 47 Qaims
i^.ee
1. An apparatus for analyzing a radiation image comprising:
input means for receiving radiation in the pattern of an
image to be reproduced and for converting said radiation
pattern into a light pattern;
first coding means for conducting said light pattern from the
input means and for coding portions of the light pattern in
combinations indicative of the relative positions of said
portions of the light pattern wherein said first coding
means comprises a plurality of light transmitting elements;
second coding means for conducting said light pattern from
the input means and for coding portions of the light pat-
tern in combinations indicative of the relative positions of
said portions of the light pattern wherein said second
coding means comprises a plurality of light transmitting
conduits;
output means for receiving said coded portions of the light
pattern from the first coding means and from the second
coding means and for converting said coded portions of
the light pattern into electrical signals; and
means for determining the relative positions of said portions
of said light pattern from the electrical signals provided by
the output means to locate the detected incident radiation
indicated by the light pattern.
T"^o"^o
slidably movable members arranged for movement within
respective ones of said apertures in said matnx,
each of said movable members having oppositely disposed
openings therein, said openings being arranged in vertical,
parallel, separated pairs,
light generating means,
light receiving means,
said light generating and light receiving means bemg axially
aligned and arranged so that light from the generating
means to the receiving means is uninterrupted by said
movable members in one position while m another posi-
tion of said movable members, said light is partially
blocked by said movable members, and
means for accurately varying the amount of light transmitted
from said light generating means to said light receiving
means, said means being disposed in separate ones of said
movable members such that a differing but predictable
percentage of total light is received by said light receiving
means upon the movement of said movable members from
a light unblocking position to a partial light blocking
position.
4,379,969
CORONA CHARGING APPARATUS
Harold W. Cobb, Acton, and Richard A. Fotland, HoUiston, both
of Mass., assignors to Dennison Manufacturing Company,
Framingham, Mass.
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,559
Int. a.3 HOIT 19/04
U.S. a. 250—324 27 Qaims
4,379,968
PHOTO-OPTICAL KEYBOARD HAVING LIGHT
ATTENUATING MEANS
Richard I. Ely, Orange Park, and Edward I. Nelson, Sunrise,
both of Fla., assignors to Burroughs Corp., Detroit, Mich.
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 220,130
Int. a.3 GOID 5/34
U.S. a. 250—229 12 Qaims
1. Apparatus for generating ions, comprising:
an elongate conductor;
a dielectric sheath for said elongate conductor;
an insulating support for the elongate conductor and dielec-
tric sheath;
a conductive grid contacting said dielectric sheath;
a varying potential applied between said elongate conductor
and said conductive grid in order to create a glow dis-
charge; and
means for extracting ions from said glow discharge.
1. Photo-optical apparatus comprising,
a matrix of rows and columns of apertures,
4,379,970
PYROELECTRIC DETECTOR ARRAYS
Archibald L. Fripp, Williamsburg; Janes B. Robertson, and
Roger A. Breckenridge, both of Yorktown, all of Va., assign-
ors to The United States of America as represented by the
Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration, Washington, D.C.
Division of Ser. No. 191,748, Sep. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4,341,012.
This appUcation May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,892
Int. a.3 GOIJ 1/00
VJS. a. 250—338 5 Claims
1. A pyroelecrric detector array comprising:
a semiconductor substrate;
an insulator layer on one side of said semiconductor sub-
strate;
a series of holes in said insulator layer;
a series of nontouching strips of soft metal on said insulator
layer with each strip being around a corresponding one of
474
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said senes of holes wherein each strip is the output termi- said building to enter said housing, a turbine on said housing
nal for a pyroelectric detector; ^aid turbine including a base through the top of said housing,
pyroelectric detector strip mounted over said series of and a rotatable spherical member thereupon rotated by said
holes in contact with said series of stnps; and rising hot air. a downward rotor shaft from said spherical
member providing electric generator driving means; a solar
heater system including a solar collector upon said roof con-
a metal layer on said pyroelectric detector strip to provide a
ground connection for the pyroelectric detectors.
f^Trrjffes
4,379,971
PYROELECTRIC SENSOR
Peter R. Smith, Littleton, and Charles Coleman, Lakewood, both
of Colo,, assignors to Statitrol, Inc., Denver, Colo.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,146
Int. a.' GOIJ 1/00
U,S. CI. 250—342
nected by water pipe to a hot water coil inside said housing and
around an upper portion of said rotor shaft; a fresh air entry
port around a side of said housing, said port being at an eleva-
tion that is lower than said water coil, and a rotatable collar
around said port having a sidewardly extending vane and a
22 Oaims funneled air intake opening on diametrically opposite sides of
said collar.
1. A selective radiation sensing device which is capable of
sensing radiated energy having a wavelength in a preselected
band, the sensing device comprising:
a body means formed from a thin flexible sheet of pyroelec-
tric material which will generate an electrical charge upon
being subjected to a change in temperature;
a first area of electrical conducting material forming a first
electrode and adhered to and substantially covering one
surface of said pyroelectric material;
one or more areas of electrical conducting material forming
at least a second electrode arranged on the opposite side of
the pyroelectric material of said body means from the first
electrode; and
a thin layer of material which is non-absorbing to all radia-
tion outside of said preselected band, said material being
positioned over and adhered to at least a portion of the
outer surface of one of said electrodes, said material being
capable of absorbing the radiated energy which is within
the preselected wavelength band and converting this
energy to heat whereby when this radiation is present the
generated heat will be conducted from the selective ab-
sorbing material to the body means by the metallic elec-
trode so that an electric signal change will be generated in
the pyroelectric body material and sensed at the elec-
trodes to indicate the presence of radiation within the
preselected wavelength band.
4,379,973
UNIVERSAL LOGIC SWITCH
W. Bard Turner, Lexington, and Thompson Shek, Brighton, both
of Mass., assignors to C & K Components, Inc., Newton,
Mass.
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,463
Int. a.3 H02B 1/24: HOIH 9/00
U.S. a. 307-112 22 Qaims
ycd-ievDc
4,379,972
TURBINE VENTILATOR
Thomas J. Sosa, San Leandro, Calif., and Daniel T. Sosa, 15576
Farnsworth St., San Leandro, Calif. 94579, assignors to Dan-
iel T. Sosa, San Leandro, Calif.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,663
Int. a.3 F03D 9/00
U.S. a. 290—44 1 Qain,
1. A turbine ventilator, comprising, in combination, a hollow
housing mounted on top of an exterior surface of a building
roof, opening means through said roof for rising hot air inside
OOM
22. A logic switch operable over a predetermined range of
input voltages, comprising:
a housing;
mechanical switching means having at least a pair of switch
contacts and a switch arm therebetween provided within
said housing, said switch arm adapted to be moved by
manual force momentarily from a rest position in contact
with one of said pair of switch contacts to a second operat-
ing position in contact with the other one of said switch
contacts, said switching means remaining in said second
operating position only so long as manual force is applied
thereto;
electronic switching means within said housing for produc-
ing an electrical switching function in a selected operating
mode from one state of actuation to another state in re-
sponse to movement of said arm of said mechanical
switching means from one of said rest and said second
contact positions to the other of said rest and said second
contact positions;
circuit means within said housing for initializing said elec-
tronic switching means in one of said states of acutation
upon interruption of power to said switch;
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
475
means provided within said housing for selecting the mode
of operation of said electronic switching means; and
output buffer circuit means within said housing for provid-
ing a complementary output voltase.
4,379,974
DELAY STAGE FOR A CLOCK GENERATOR
Robert S. Plachno, Lewisville, Tex., assignor to Mostek Corpo-
ration, Carrollton, Tex.
per No. PCTAJS80/01163, § 371 Date Sep. 10, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 10, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00930, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 18, 1982
PCT Filed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 261,121
Int. a.3 H03K 5/135. 3/295, 3/356. 17/284
U.S. a. 307—269 25 Qaims
terminal of said ninth transistor and said gate terminal of
said twelfth transistor connected to said gate termmal of
said tenth transistor.
4,379,975
REVERSE FLOW COOLED DYNAMOELECTRIC
MACHINE
Toshio Kitigima, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,233
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 26, 1980, 55-87162
Int. a.' H02K 9/00
U.S. a. 310—59 7 Qaims
18. A clock generator circuit for producing clocking signals
which receives an input signal at an input terminal, produces
an output signal at an output terminal and is powered through
first and second power terminals, comprising:
first, second and third transistors each having drain, source
and gate terminals and being connected in series between
the first power terminal and the second power terminal
and forming a first node between said first and second
transistors and a second node between said second and
third transistors;
a fourth transistor having drain, source and gate terminals
connected between the first power terminal and said sec-
- ond node, said gate terminal thereof connected to said first
node;
fifth and sixth transistors each having drain, source and gate
terminals and being connected in series between the first
power terminal and said second node, and forming a third
node therebetween, said gate terminal of said fifth transis-
tor connected to said first node;
said gate terminal of said second transistor, said gate termi-
nal of said third transistor and said gate terminal of said
sixth transistor being connected to the input terminal;
a seventh transistor having drain, source and gate terminals,
said drain terminal thereof connected to the input termi-
nal;
an eighth transistor having drain, source and gate terminals,
said drain terminal thereof connected to said gate terminal
of said seventh transistor, said gate terminal thereof con-
nected to the first power terminal and said source terminal
thereof connected to said third node;
ninth and tenth transistors each having drain, source and
gate terminals and being connected in series between the
first power terminal and the second power terminal and
forming a fourth node therebetween, said gate terminal of
said ninth transistor being connected to said source termi-
nal of said seventh transistor and said gate terminal of said
tenth transistor being connected to said source terminal of
said eighth transistor;
capacitor means connected between said source terminal of
said seventh transistor and said fourth node; and
eleventh and twelfth transistors each having drain, source
and gate terminals and being connected in series between
the first power terminal and the second power terminal
and forming the output terminal therebetween, said gate
terminal of said eleventh transistor connected to said gate
1 <o-^ '■' - J -
1. A reverse fiow cooled dynamoelectric machine compris-
ing:
a gas tight casing containing cooling gas;
a stator disposed within said casing and including a core of
stacked laminations having spaced radially extending
cooling passages disposed therein;
a rotor disposed within said stator and spaced therefrom by
a gap, said rotor including end turn regions and a gas
passage disposed in at least one said end turn region to
cool said at least one end turn region of said rotor;
cooling means disposed in said casing;
fan means mounted on said rotor for circulating said cooling
gas and including means for the reverse fiow circulation
of said cooling gas; and
baffle means disposed between said cooling passages of at
least one end turn region of said stator and said gas pas-
sage of said at least one end turn region of said rotor, said
baffie means disposed in said gap and spaced from said
laminations for forming a ventilation section so as to pre-
vent the impinging of gas from the cooling passages dis-
posed in said stator with gas from said end turn regions of
rotor, the size of said ventilation section gradually increas-
ing toward the axial ends of said machine.
4^79,976
PLANOCENTRIC GEAR DRIVE
Edward J. Pitchford, Glendora, and Edward M. Troup, Mount
Baldy, both of Calif., assignors to Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg.
Corp., Glendora, Calif.
FUed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,714
Int. a.' F16H 1/20
U.S. a. 310—83 53 Qaims
1. A planocentric gear drive, comprising:
a fixed stator gear and a roUtable output gear mounted
coaxially and having different numbers of teeth;
a toothed driving gear formed at least in part from a magnet-
ically permeable material and supported for eccentric
floating with respect to said common axis and for meshing
engagement with said stator and output gears on a com-
mon axial line of contact; and
electromagnetic means for orbiting said driving gear about
476
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said axis in meshing engagment with said stator and output
gears, whereby the teeth on said driving gear wedge
against the teeth on said output gear to rotate said output
gear with respect to said stator gear.
4,379,977
SPACEDISCHARGE ELECTRONIC DEVICE
PARTICULARLY USEFUL AS A FLASH X-RAY TUBE
Yuval Carmel, and Shmuel Eyion, both of Haifa, Israel, assign-
ors to Sute of Israel, Rafael Armament Development Author-
ity, Ministry of Defense, Haifa, Israel
Continuation of Ser. No. 62,476, Jul. 31, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 262,886
Int. a.i HOIJ 35/04
U.S. a. 378-136 7 Qaims
!■• lac ■■>
1. A space-discharge electronic tube including a cathode and
a target anode, characterized in that said cathode consists of a
single planar electrode formed with a circular opening there-
through, and that said target anode is of conical shape and has
a pointed tip at the end thereof facing said planar cathode
electrode, the longitudinal axis of the target anode being nor-
mal to the plane of said planar cathode electrode and the
pointed tip of the target anode being located in the plane of
said planar cathode electrode at the center of its circular open-
ing.
wardly extending, electrically conductive wire attached
thereto in close adjacency to said neck terminus, said tube
having a shallow base for accepting and enclosing said pins in
abuttmg relationship to said neck terminus, said base compris-
ing an insulative cylinder filled with an electrically insulative
adhesive, said base having a closed end and an open end facing
said terminus, said open end having a plurality of crenelations
4^79,978
MEANS AND METHOD FOR MAKING ELECTRICAL
CONNECnON TO CATHODE RAY TUBES
Richard L. Hockenbrock, Mundelein, 111., assignor to Zenith
Radio CorporatioD, Gleniiew, Hi.
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,796
Int. a.3 HOIJ 5/4S
U.S. a. 313—318 6 Claims
1. In a cathode ray picture tube having a narrow neck termi-
nated by a plurality of electrically conductive pins extending
axially from the neck terminus, said tube being characterized
by each pin being relatively short and having a radially out-
equal in number to said wires for receiving and passing said
wires, such that said wires are maximally electrically isolated
one from the others by their spacings, their radially outward
extension, and said insulative adhesive; said base is adhered to
said neck terminus by said adhesive; and the overall axial
length of said tube when connected for operation is reduced by
the shallowness of said base, the relative shortness of said pins,
and the radially outward extension of said wires.
4 379 979 *
CONTROLLED POROSITY SHEET FOR THERMIONIC
DISPENSER CATHODE AND METHOD OF
MANUFACTURE
Richard E. Thomas, Riverdale, and Richard F. Greene, Be-
thesda, both of Md., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington,
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,444
Int. a.3 HOIJ 1/J4, 19/06; HOIK J/04
U.S. a. 313-346 R ig Qaims
SMALL SCALE PORES
M MICRONS)
CONTROL DISPENSING
AND EVAPORATION
COMBINED STRUCTURE
-(TUNGSTEN OR OTHER
METAL)
LARSE PORES HO MICRONS)
^FILLED WITH mPREGNANT
ISO COMPOUNDS)
^BACKING PLUG
(MOLYBDENUM)
CATHODE CYLINDER
tMOLYBOENUM)
1. A method of making a controlled porosity surface sheet
useful in cathode structures comprising:
manufacturing a substrate of single crystal silicon which has
a predetermined array of microposts upstanding from the
substrate, said manufacturing including the step of etching
the substrate surface in a crystallographically orientation-
dependent etch;
applying a metal layer upon the silicon substrate to a desired
thickness including covering the microposts;
abrading the resultant structure in order to remove the
surface metal and expose tips of the microposts; and
etching away the silicon substrate including the microposts
with an anisotropic etching agent to leave a porous sheet.
15. In a thermionic dispenser type cathode having an emis-
sive member comprising a backing plug, active cathode mate-
rial adjacent the backing plug and a thin foil facing the backing
plug, the foil being formed from at least one refractory metal
with a set of uniformly sized and spaced holes therein to permit
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
477
the active cathode material to migrate through the holes and to
spread over the exjxjsed surface of the foil when the active
cathode material is heated to the proper temperature, the
improvement which comprises the holes having a pore width
of 1-25 microns on the side of the foil facing away from the
cathode material and a larger pore width of 25-100 microns on
the other side, pore spacings of from 5-100 microns, and foil
thickness from 25-100 microns, said active cathode material
substantially filling the portion of the pores having the larger
pore width.
weight ratio, and phosphor means formed in at least one layer
carried on said second layer.
4,379,980
QUICK OPERATING CATHODE
Yukio Takanashi, Hiratsuka; Tooru Yakabe, Yokohama, and
Shunji Asano, Kawasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,637
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 21, 1980, 55-51705
Int. a.5 HOIJ 1/22. 1/20. 29/04
II.S. CI. 313—446 6 Qaims
1. A fluorescent lamp comprising a vitreous envelope having
electrodes operatively disposed at opposite ends thereof, an
electrically conductive first layer carried on the inner surface
of said vitreous envelope, an electrically non-conductive sec-
ond layer carried on said electrically conductive first layer,
said electrically non-conductive second layer consisting essen-
tially of a mixture of very finely-divided aluminum oxide and
finely-divided titanium dioxide in predetermined relative
4,379,982
LOW ENERGY STARTING AID FOR HIGH INTENSITY
DISCHARGE LAMPS
Joseph M. Proud, Wellesley, Mass., assignor to GTE Laborato-
ries Incorporated, Waltham, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 193,786, Oct. 2, 1980, abandoned. This
application Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,866
Int. a.3 HOIJ 7/44, 17/34, 19/78. 29/96
U.S. a. 315—73 2 Qaims
4,379,981
FLUORESCENT LAMP HAVING IMPROVED BARRIER
LAYER
Larry P. Rusch, East Brunswick, N.J., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,472
Int. a.3 HOIJ 61/35. 61/42. 61/54
U.S. a. 313—489 5 Qaims
50
I 5.
AC
INPUT
7«i
5tf,
'--
SB
52
it
6C
P- ..-
/I
,66 ««'
^°
1. A quick operating type cathode having a cathode body
consisting of: a cathode sleeve and a metal substrate which is
mounted at the top opening part of the cathode sleeve and the
top surface of which is coated with an electron-emissive mate-
rial; and a double helical coil heater which is inserted within
the cathode sleeve and the surface of which is coated with an
insulating material, characterized in that said heater comprises
a coil part and a pair of leg parts connected to the end part of
said coil part, a dense pitch part is formed at the top portion of
said coil part, a sparse pitch part is formed in said coil part at
the side of the leg parts and the amount of said coated insulat-
ing material per unit length of the coil wire at said sparse pitch
part is larger than that at said dense pitch part.
1. A light source comprising:
a high pressure discharge lamp including a discharge tube
having first and second electrodes sealed therein at oppo-
site ends for receiving ac power and enclosing a fill mate-
rial which emits light during discharge;
pulse generating means operative to provide at an output
thereof a high voltage, short duration pulse of predeter-
mined energy; and
a conductor including a generally straight portion extending
from a region proximate to one of said electrodes towards
a region proximate to the other of said electrodes coupled
to said output of said pulse generating means and disposed
in close proximity to an outer surface of said discharge
tube for providing within said discharge tube an ionization
path between said electrodes when said conductor is
energized by said pulse generating means at which time
said first electrode is at a first voltage potential, said sec-
ond electrode is at a second voltage potential, and said
conductor is at a third voltage potential higher than said
first and second potential, wherein:
said high pressure discharge lamp is a high pressure sodium
discharge lamp;
said fill material contains approximately 200 torr xenon
pressure; and
said pulse generator means provides a pulse of approxi-
mately 25 kilovolts for a duration of approximately 10
nanoseconds of approximately 10 millijoules energy.
4,379,983
ELECTRIC FLASH DEVICE
Yoshiyuki Takematsu, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to FiOi Koeki
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,619
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1980, 55-69874
Int. Q.^ H05B 41/32
U.S. Q. 315—151 14 Claims
1. An electronic flash device comprising, in combination, a
flash unit having electric power supply means including a
direct current voltage power source, means for boosting volt-
age of said direct current power source and for storing electric
energy, flash light generating member including a flash tube
generating flash light, trigger signal generating means trigger-
ing said flash light generating member, and means for stopping
flash of said flash light generating member when flash light
quantity of said flash light attains to a predetermined value, and
a flash control unit having light receiving means for receiving
a reflecting light which is produced from said flash tube and is
reflected from an object to be photographed, flash light quan-
478
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
tity detecting means for detecting flash light quantity of said
flash light generated from the flash tube by means of compar-
ing an electric value obtained by integrating output of said
light receiving means with reference voltage, means for indi-
equal to that of one pole (35) of said d.c. current source
(33,35), and
means for applying said rotor position signal (24) of large
amplitude to the control electrodes of said transistors
(47,48) providing said first pair of adjacent bridge arms
through a resistance network (43;72) having a first resis-
tance (46,75) connected between the output of said semi-
conductor means (25;70) and the control electrode of a
first one (48) of said transistors of said first pair and a
second resistance (44,73) connected between said output
of said semiconductor means (25;70) and the control elec-
trode of the second one (47) of said transistors of said first
pair.
eating light exposure quantity in response to a plurality of
outputs of said flash light quantity detecting means, and flash
light quantity control means for controlling said flash light
quantity of said flash light.
4,379,984
BRUSHLESS DC MOTOR DRIVEN BY
COMPLEMENTARY TYPE TRANSISTORS
Rolf Miiller, St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Papst-Motoren GmbH & Co. KG, St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,011
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 19.
1980, 3022836
Int. a.3 H02K 29/00
U.S. a. 318-254 ,0 Qaims
1. A brushless d.c. motor having a rotor, a stationary motor
winding (20), a rotor position sensor (25) and means, including
a full bridge circuit, for providing to said winding from a d.c.
current source (33,35), under control of said sensor, two cur-
rent pulses per 360° el. of rotation of said rotor and further
comprising, in accordance with the invention:
two transistors (47,48) of opposite conductivity type con-
nected in series providing a first pair of adjacent arms of
said bridge circuit and having their emitters respectively
connected to opposite poles of said d.c. current source and
having their collectors connected together and to a first
terminal of said motor winding;
two transistors (61,62) of opposite conductivity type con-
nected in series providing a second pair of adjacent arms
of said bridge circuit, having their respective collectors
connected to said opposite poles of said d.c. current
source and having their emitters connected together and
to a second terminal of said motor winding;
means, constituted at least in part by said sensor (25) and
including semiconductor means, for producing a rotor
position signal of large amplitude, a potential being sup-
plied to said semiconductor means which is substantially
4 379 985
BIPOLAR DRIVER WITH ILLEGAL CODE DETECTOR
Vincent G. Coppola, Branford, Conn., assignor to Pitney Bowes
Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 260,465, May 4, 1981, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 49,241, Jun. 18, 1979. This application
May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,371
Int. a.3 H02P 1/22
U.S. a. 318-293 12 Qaims
a tie
C* .36
- V" • ®"
1. An interface for a processor, a reversible polarity load
having two terminals the first of which terminals being tied to
a substantially fixed reference level, and a pair of opposite
polarity power supplies, the processor selectively transmitting
one of several possible command signal codes to the interface,
the signal codes designating different modes of operation of the
load, the interface comprising:
a first power switch means, the first power switch means
selectively interconnecting the second of said terminals of
the load and the power supply of one polarity,
a sec9nd power switch means, the second switch means
selectively interconnecting the second of said terminals
and the power supply of opposite polarity,
means receiving each signal code and
(a) in response to a first signal code, forward biasing the
first power switch means to interconnect the second of
said terminals and the power supply of one polarity and
reverse biasing the second power switch means such
that the second of said terminals is not interconnected
with the power supply of the opposite polarity,
(b) in response to a second signal code, reversing the first
power switch means such that the second of said termi-
nals is not interconnected to the power supply of one
polarity and forward biasing the second power, switch
means to interconnect the second of said terminals and
the power supply of the opposite polarity, and
(c) in response to a third signal code, reverse biasing both
power switch means such that the second of said termi-
nals is not connected with either power supply,
the interface further comprising illegal signal code inhibit
means, the inhibit means including monitoring means
receiving the signal codes and in response to an invalid
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
479
signal code which would otherwise function to forward
bias both power switch means, inhibiting the operation of
both of said power switch means.
4^79,987
SPINDLE ROTATION CONTROL SYSTEM
Yoshinori Kohzai, and Yoshiki Fujioka, both of Hino, Japan,
assignors to Fujitsu Fanuc Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,659
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1979, 54-130153
Int. a.' G05B 13/00
U.S. a. 318—561 8 Qaims
4,379,986
STALL SENSING CIRCUIT FOR SHADED POLE
MOTORS
Donald J. Baxter, Simpsonville, and Hugh L. Childress, Jr.,
Gray Court, both of S.C., assignors to Marquette Metal Prod-
ucts Co., Fountain Inn, S.C.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,655
Int. a.3 H02H 7/085
U.S. CI. 318—434 9 Qaims
(
, 'MT»»tSTQii
n"l^
1. A motor control circuit for automatically uncoupling its
motor's power supply during a stall condition while maintain-
ing it coupled in its running condition comprising:
power supply coupling means;
motor connecting means;
signal sensing means for providing an output sensing signal,
the magnitude of which is a function of the condition of
the motor's load;
switching means having a conduction and non-conduction
state and having an output, input and control terminal, the
output and input terminals connected in series with said
power supply coupling means, motor connecting means
and signal sensing means, responsive to the magnitude of
a control signal applied to its control terminal to control
its state;
controlled oscillator means, having an input and output,
coupled at its input to said signal sensing means, for gener-
ating an output signal the frequency of which is a function
of the magnitude of the sensing signal;
counting means having an input, output and reset terminal,
for providing a control signal at its output in res|X)nse to
a predetermined count and for resetting said counting
means when a reset signal is applied to said reset terminal,
the input of said counting means being coupled to the
output of said controlled oscillator means;
resetting means, coupled to said counting means; reset termi-
nal, for providing a reset signal to said reset terminal prior
to and after said predetermined count in response to the
output signals generated during running condition and
stall condition respectively; and
coupling means, connected to the output of said counting
means and to the control terminal of said switching means,
for transmitting a control signal from said counting means
for changing said switching means' state.
1. A system for controlling the rotation of a spindle, com-
prising:
means for providing an orientation command signal;
a motor;
speed detecting means, operatively connected to said motor,
for detecting the speed of said motor and for generating a
signal representing the actual speed of said motor;
a speed control circuit, operatively connected to said speed
detecting means and said motor, for controlling said
motor so as to narrow to zero a deviation between the
actual speed thereof and a commanded speed;
a spindle driven by said motor; and
a position control circuit, operatively connected to said
spindle and said speed control circuit, for generating a
position deviation signal on the basis of a commanded
stopping position and the rotational position of said spin-
dle;
said spindle being rotated at a commanded speed by said
motor under the control of said speed control circuit, and
rotationally controlled by the orientation command signal
so as to make the position deviation signal zero;
said position control circuit including a proximity switch,
mounted on said spindle, for detecting the present rota-
tional position of said spindle, for generating a detection
signal having a value of zero volts when a predetermined
point on said spindle has reached a commanded stopping
position, and for generating either a positive or negative
value depending upon whether the specified point on said
spindle is immediately to the left or right of the com-
manded stopping position, said position control circuit
generating the position deviation signal in dependence
upon the detection signal.
4,379,988
MOLDED HEARING AID AND BATTERY CHARGER
Patricio MattataU, P.O. Box 910, Winter Park, Ha. 32789
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,212
Int. a.3 H02J 7/02; H04R 25/02
U.S. a. 320-4 6 ClaiBM
1. A self-contained hearing aid insertable in the ear of the
user and having a rechargeable battery, the battery charging
system comprising:
oscillator means for producing electrical oscillations;
a first inductor associated with said oscillator means for
producing an inductive magnetic field from said electrical
oscillations;
holding means for supporting said hearing aid for charging
said rechargeable battery;
a second inductor disposed within said hearing aid, said
holding means supporting said hearing aid in a manner to
480
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
inductively couple said first inductor and said second
inductor whereby an electromotive force is induced in
said second inductor; and
a light emitting diode disposed in said hearing aid and visible
externally thereto, said diode connected in series with said
second inductor, the series combination of said diode and
said second inductor connected in parallel with said bat-
tery, whereby said electromotive force induced in said
second inductor causing said diode to produce a pulsating
direct current flowing in the direction to charge said
battery and to emit a light external to said hearing aid to
indicate such flow of charging current, said hearing aid
position adjustable within said holding means by the user
to maximize the degree of inductive coupling between
said first and second inductors, said light emitting diode
functioning to indicate said degree of coupling by the
intensity of emitted light therefrom.
4,379,989
SYSTEM FOR PREVENTING DAMAGE TO A BATTERY
CHARGER DUE TO APPLICATION OF A BATTERY
WITH WRONG POLARITY
Wolfgang Kurz, Hemmingen, and Rainer Leunig, Gerlingen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 6, 1980, Ser. No. 147,300
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 11,
1979, 2919021; May 11, 1979, 2919022
Int. aj H02J 7/00
U.S. a. 320-26 12 Qaims
starter switch means independent of the polarity of said
battery,
apparatus for protecting said system from application of a
voltage having a polarity opposite the polarity of said
battery comprising
a control switch 81;
a protective diode (D3) conductive only when the polarity
of the DC voltage is of the predetermined polarity of said
battery,
switch means including a relay (CI, Kl) comprising a relay
coil (C) connected in series with said protective diode and
the control switch (SI) and a pair of relay contacts (Kl)
operative on the control of said relay coil and connected
in series with the terminals (A + , A-) of said battery;
the relay coil being connected to said system and to said
blocking diode for connection of DC voltage to, and
disconnection of DC from said system when said blocking
diode is, respectively, conductive or non-conductive with
respect to said polarity of the battery;
and further comprising an auxiliary relay (C7, K7) having a
coil connected between said positive exciter terminal
(D + ) and said reference potential (B-, A-),
and a pair of auxiliary relay contacts (K7) connected in
series with the relay coil (CI) of said first relay (CI, Kl).
4,379,990
FAULT DETECTION AND DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FOR
AUTOMOTIVE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMS
Kirk A. Sievers, Roselle, and Robert W. Mortonson, Addison,
both of III., assignors to Motorola Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Filed May 22, 1980, Ser. No. 152,225
Int. a.3 GOIR 31/02; G08B 21/00; H02J 7/24
U.S. a. 322-99 36 Qaims
1. In an automotive electrical system including
an alternator having an exciter winding, exciter diodes con-
nected to said exciter winding, a positive exciter terminal
(D-I-), a positive rectified alternator output terminal
(B-(-), and a negative rectified alternator terminal (B-),
connected to a reference potential,
a battery (B) having a negative terminal (A-) connected to
said reference potential and a positive terminal (A-I-);
a starter motor (M);
and surter switch means (S2, C2, K2) connected to said
battery so that said motor is started upon activation of said
1. An in situ self-diagnostic automotive alternator-battery
charging system comprising:
• a battery;
voltage regulator means sensing battery voltage and gener-
ating an excitation signal in response thereto;
alternator means coupled to said battery and said voltage
regulator means, driven by a vehicle engine, providing a
rectified electrical signal for charging said battery in re-
sponse to said excitation signal;
a plurality of electronic circuit status detectors, each of said
plurality maintaining a first logic state when a correspond-
ing electrical signal characteristic is within a predeter-
mined range and a second logic state when said electrical
signal characteristic is outside said predetermined range,
selected ones of said plurality being coupled to said bat-
tery, voltage regulator means and said alternator means
with at least one of said electronic circuit status detectors
including resettable timing means establishing time inter-
vals for the detection of repetitive occurrences of pulse
signals; and
logic means coupled to said plurality of circuit status detec-
tors and responsive to the logic output states of said circuit
status detectors, identifying predetermined sequences of
logic states thereby to identify the occurrence of faults in
said charging system.
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
481
4,379,991
APPARATUS FOR ACCURATELY MEASURING THE
VOLUME OF A METER PROVER
William W. Ho, and William F. Hall, both of Thousand Oaks,
Calif., assignors to Rockwell International Corporation, Pitts-
burgh, Pa.
Filed Mar. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 135,191
Int. a.3 GOIR 27/04; GOIF 77/00
U.S. a. 324—58.5 C 13 Qaims
{>'
&
■ W> —
R^O
1. Apparatus for measuring with a high degree of accuracy
the volume of a chamber of a meter prover, said chamber
having the regular geometry of a right circular cylinder, the
volume of said right circular cylinder being defined its diame-
ter and length, said measuring apparatus comprising;
(a) antenna means disposed for generating electromagnetic
energy into and for receiving electromagnetic energy
reflected from said chamber;
(b) generating means coupled to said antenna means for
generating first and second resonant modes of selected
electromagnetic energy fields, each of said first and sec-
ond modes having an electromagnetic energy field whose
electric and magnetic component fields are uniquely re-
lated to said diameter and said length of said right circular
cylinder;
(c) means coupled to said antenna means for detecting the
electromagnetic energy reflected from said right circular
cylinder;
(d) resonant condition detecting means coupled to said en-
ergy detecting means for providing first and second indi-
cations of the occurrences of the minimum levels of the
reflected electromagnetic energy corresponding to the
establishment of a standing wave resonant condition
within said right circular cylinder for each of said first and
second resonant modes; and
(e) means coupled to said generating means for detecting
first and second frequencies at which said standing wave
resonant conditions are established within said right circu-
lar cylinder, said first and second frequencies being a
function of the volume of said right circular cylinder
whereby said volume is defined with the high degree of
accuracy.
4,379,992
PRINTED ORCUIT BOARD ELECTRONIC TESTER
Donald J. Geisel, Madison, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Company, Utica, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 103,972, Dec. 17, 1979, abandoned.
This application Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,671
Int. Q\? GOIR n/02
U.S. a. 324—158 F 6 Qaims
1. An automated testing apparatus for performing shorts and
continuity tests on a printed circuit board or ceramic substrate
submerged in an ionic conducting solution comprising:
(a) a bath composed of an ionic conducting solution;
(b) an electrically insulated movable probe positioned within
said bath and having its tip in electrical contact with one
point on said printed circuit board;
(c) at least one reference electrode positioned within said
bath;
(d) an electrical measuring instrument capable of measuring
electrical characteristics, said instrument having a first
lead connected to said movable probe and a second lead
connected to one of said reference electrodes;
(e) a controlled table;
(0 a support means connected between said controlled table
and said movable probe;
(g) a central controlling device receiving values of electrical
characteristics measured by said electrical measuring
instrument and outputting control information to said
controlled table; and
(h) means responsive to record data generated by said cen-
tral controlling device.
4,379,993
PULSE FAILURE MONITOR CIRCUIT EMPLOYING
SELECTABLE FREQUENCY REFERENCE CLOCK AND
COUNTER PAIR TO VARY TIME PERIOD OF PULSE
FAILURE INDICATION
James R. Holden, Chicago, 111., assignor to GTE Automatic
Electric Labs Inc., Northlake, 111.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,932
Int. a.3H03K U/n, 17/296
U.S. a. 328—120 14 Qaims
1. A pulse monitor circuit for use in a switching system, said
pulse monitor circuit comprising:
a first source of pulses;
a second source of pulses;
input storage means connected to said first pulse source
operated in response to each of a first group of alternately
occurring pulses to generate a first clear signal, said input
storage means further operated in response to each of a
second group of alternately occurring pulses from said
first pulse source to generate a second clear signal;
a first counter circuit connected to said input storage means
and said second pulse source, operated in response to an
absence of said first clear signal to count pulses from said
second pulse source;
a second counter circuit connected to said input storage
means and said second pulse source, operated in response
to an absence of said second clear signal to count pulses
from said second pulse source;
output storage means connected to said first and second
counter circuits, operated in response to a predetermined
count from said first or second counter circuits to generate
a pulse failure signal; and
482
OFFICIAL GAZEtTE
April 12, 1983
third pulsing means connected to said output storage means,
operated in response to said pulse failure signal to generate
a toggle pulse; said output storage means further operated
in response to said toggle pulse to prevent generation of
said pulse failure signal.
4,379,994
FEED-FORWARD AMPLinER
Ronald M. Bauman, Washington, D.C., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,175
Int. a.' H03F 1/26
L'.S. CI. 330— 149 lOQaims
WAIN AMPLIFIES XANNl^ Ij
<kn^.
1. A feed-forward-compensated amplifier comprising:
a main amplifier channel including a main amplifier for
receiving an input signal and producing an amplified
signal therefrom;
a feed-forward channel including error means connected to
the input and the output of the main amplifier for produc-
ing an error signal which is a function of the error intro-
duced into the amplified input signal by the main ampli-
fier, and a subsidiary amplifier connected to the error
means for receiving the error signal and producing a
correction signal therefrom;
first coupling means for coupling a plurality of inputs to-
gether in algebraic summing relationship,
the output of the feed-forward channel and the output of the
main amplifier channel being connected as inputs to the
first coupling means so that the correction signal is
summed with the amplified signal to produce a feed-for-
ward-compensated output signal; and
feedback means connected to the output of the first coupling
means for returning a fraction of the output signal to the
input of the subsidiary amplifier,
whereby an output signal is obtained which is substantially
free of error caused by both the main and the subsidiary
amplifiers.
4,379,995
GAIN CONTROLLED AMPLinER
Hisashi Yamada, Yokohama, and Tsutomu Sugawara, Yoko-
suka, both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,490
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 21, 1979, 54-121865
Int. a.3 H03F 3/45; H03G 3/10
U.S. a. 330—254 11 Qaims
1. A gain controlled amplifier comprising:
(a) first means for separately providing a first current corre-
sponding to the positive component of an input signal and
a second current corresponding to the negative compo-
nent of said input signal;
(b) second means connected to said first means for providing
a first attenuated current corresponding to said first cur-
rent;
(c) third means connected to said first means for providing a
second attenuated current corresponding to said second
current;
(d) fourth means connected to said second and third means
for providing a control signal for changing magnitude of
said first and second attenuated currents;
(e) fifth means connected to said second and third means for
providing an output signal corresponding to said first and
second attenuated current;
(0 sixth means coupled to said first, second and third means,
said sixth means being responsive to a third current which
corresponds to a difference between said first current and
said first attenuated current, and said sixth means also
being responsive to a fourth current which corresponds to
a difference between said second current and said second
attenuated current, said sixth means providing said first
means with an input current corresponding to said input
signal.
4,379,996
ENHANCEMENT OF CLASS C OPERATION OF
BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR
Robert J. Weber, Marion, Iowa, assignor to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,132
Int. a.3 H03F 7/00
U.S. CI. 330—296 15 Qaims
1. A circuit comprising a class C biased BJT which is for
outputting RF bursts, and means for controlling the shape of
the envelope of said RF burst, said shape controlling means
comprising:
first means comprising a transformer having a primary wind-
ing with M^ turns and a secondary winding with Ms turns
where M^:Ms>l, said secondary winding being con-
nected in the BJT emitter current path,
pulse source second means, connected to the primary wind-
ing, for providing pulses having predetermined parame-
ters,
impedance third means connected to the primary winding,
said first, second, and third means cooperating to control the
BJT emitter current and cause the BJT emitter current
envelope to substantially conform to a predetermined
function of time I<i<t), where Ie(t) is a pulse waveform.
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
483
4^79,997
POWER AMPLinER
Minora Ooishi, Yokohamashi; Teraji Mochizuki, Fujisawashi,
and Yutaka Suzuki, Yokohamashi, all of Japan, assignors to
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,739
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 8, 1980, 55-14343
Int. a.3 H03F 3/04
U.S. a. 330—298 12 Oaims
1. A power amplifier comprising:
an input circuit means;
a power supply having first and second power source termi-
nals;
a preamplifying stage having at least one transistor with first,
second and third electrodes, said first electrode being
connected to said input circuit means;
a resistance load, said second electrode being connected to
said first power source terminal through said resistance
load, and said third electrode being connected to said
second power source terminal;
a power amplifying stage connected at its input to said sec-
ond electrode of said at least one transistor;
an electrode switch means connected between said third
electrode of said at least one transistor and said second
power source terminal, and having a control terminal;
resistance means connected between said third electrode of
said at least one transistor and said first power source
terminal, in parallel with said at least one transistor and
said resistance load; and
control circuit means connected to said control terminal of
said electronic switch means for applying a muting signal
to said electronic switch means in the event excessive
input signals are applied to the power amplifier or over-
loading occurs to prevent damage to the power amplifier.
4,379,998
ACOUSTIC DEGENERATE FOUR-WAVE MIXING
PHASE-CONJUGATE REFLECTOR
Richard C. Shockley, San Diego, Calif., assignor to The Stan-
dard Oil Company, Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,448
Int. C1.3 H03H 9/25. 9/42. 9/145
U.S. a. 333—150 11 aaims
1. An acoustic surface wave device comprising:
a piezoelectric substrate for propagating acoustic waves;
a first transducer disposed on said substrate for receiving a
modulated input signal having a carrier center frequency
fi and for converting said input signal to an input acoustic
wave;
a second transducer colinearly aligned with said first trans-
ducer;
a semiconductor material disposed over said piezoelectric
substrate and having a dimension L colinear with said first
and second transducers and defining a nonlinear acoustic
wave interaction region;
means for generating an acoustic standing wave having a
frequency fi in said nonlinear interaction region whereby
said input acoustic wave interacts with said standing wave
in said nonlinear interaction region to create an output
signal on said second transducer that is the phase conju-
gate of said modulated input signal.
4,379,999
ELECTROSTATIC SHIELD FOR A TRANSFORMER
Minora Kimura, Nishinomiya, and Terao Ina, Takarazuka, both
of Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,905
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 5, 1980,
55/158679[U]
Int. a.^ HOIF 15/04
U.S. a. 336—84 C 6 Qaims
j-
_i -
j •
1. An electrostatic field for an electrical transformer coil
comprising a substantially ring shaped inner insulator, a field
concentration relaxation conductor formed by winding a con-
ductive foil into a sheet forming a layer completely surround-
ing the inner insulator, and a multiple outer insulation layer
surrounding the field concentration relaxation conductor, said
multiple outer insulation layer comprising at least one layer of
polyethylene terephthalate film and at least one mica insulation
layer. .
4,380,000
COIL ARRANGEMENT, PARTICULARLY FOR RELAYS,
AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
Holger Nicolaisen, Nordborg, Denmark, assignor to Danfoss
A/S, Nordborg, Denmark
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,833
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 15,
1980, 3043148
Int. a.5 HOIF 15/10
U.S. a. 336—192 2 Claims
1. A coil assembly for a relay or the like, comprising, a base
plate having first and second sides, a cylindrically shaped coil
mounted on said first side of said base plate in normal relations
thereto, said coil having a coil wire end portion, said base plate
having a notch radially displaced from said coil forming with
said base plate second side a protruding portion and having an
484
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
obliquely extending face which intersects said base plate first
side to form a lip portion, a normally extending hole in said
protruding portion having a locus which intersects said
12
11
obliquely extending face, a terminal pin in said hole and bent
around said lip portion in the direction of said coil, and said
coil wire end portion being connected to said terminal pin.
4,380,001
ELECTRIC SAFETY DEVICE
Mikizo Kasamatsu, No. 22-7, Korikitano-cho, Neyagawa-shi,
Osaka-fu, Japan
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,244
Int. a.3 HOIH 85/00
U.S. a. 337-4 2 Qaims
13 5 4
16 15
>39 10 27 83 U B
1. An electrical safety device comprising:
a housing;
an electrically conducting wall member located within said
housing and dividing said housing into first and second
chambers;
a first electrical lead wire penetrating said housing, said first
electrical lead wire having an outer end outside of said
housing for connection in an electrical circuit and having
an inner end in said first chamber for connection to a first
fuse element;
a second electrical lead wire penetrating said housing, said
second electrical lead wire having an outer end outside of
said housing for connection in an electrical circuit, and
having an inner end in said second chamber for connec-
tion to a second fuse element;
a first fuse element adapted to break an electrical circuit on
passage of an overcurrent, said first fuse element being
provided in said first chamber and comprising an electri-
cally conducting element electrically connected in series
between said inner end of said first electrical lead wire and
said electrically conducting wall member; and
a second fuse element adapted to break an electrical circuit
on being heated above a predetermined temperature, said
second fuse element comprising an electrically conducting
solder metallic wire, the surface of which is coated with
pine resin, said solder wire being electrically connected in
series between said inner end of said second electrical lead
wire and said electrically conducting wall member.
4,380,002
SECONDARY BRAKE PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Daniel L. Neill, Belleiille, and Paul Weiner, Pinckney, both of
Mich., assignors to Kelsey-Hayes Co., Romulus, Mich.
Filed Nov. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 98,102
Int. a.3 HOIC 10/00
U.S. a. 338-153 6 Qaims
1. A brake pedal transducer assembly adapted for secure-
ment to a primary brake pedal to translate foot-applied pres-
sure necessary to achieve a given primary braking pressure for
a towing vehicle to an electric signal yieldative of a corre-
sponding electric brake force for a towed vehicle, said assem-
bly comprising:
(1) a base plate having a lower surface abutting the tread
surface of a primary brake pedal and being securable to
said primary brake pedal, said plate including an integral
ear portion extending downwardly behind said primary
brake pedal,
(2) a pedal member hingedly connected to said base plate,
said hinged connection allowing relative pivotal move-
ment as between said pedal member and said base plate,
said pedal member including a generally upper tread
surface for receiving foot-applied pressure and an integral
lever arm projecting downwardly with respect to said
tread surface,
(3) spring means situated between said base plate and pedal
member and serving to resist pivotal movement of said
pedal member toward said base plate and, in turn, a corre-
sponding movement of said lever arm,
(4) a housing mounted on said base plate ear portion and
extending rearwardly thereof, said housing being con-
structed and arranged to accommodate said lever arm and
(5) potentiometer means mounted within said housing, said
potentiometer including a plunger preselectively posi-
tioned for axial movement responsive to contacting de-
flection of said lever arm.
4380 003
RESISTOR DEVICE AND GENERATOR FOR CAR
CHARGER
Yoshiyuki Iwaki, and Hitoshi Goto, both of Himcji, Japan,
assignors to MitsubUhi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Sep. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 183,636
Qaims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 3, 1979, 54-113409:
Sep. 14, 1979, 54-127957
Int. a.3 HOIC 1/01
U.S. a. 338-315 6 Claims
1. A spacer type resistor device for mounting on a printed
circuit board and a fixing plate comprising:
at least one insulating substrate having a throughhole formed
therein;
a resistance layer formed on the outer surface of each of said
at least one insulating substrate;
first and second electrode layers positioned adjacent oppo-
site axial end surfaces of said at least one insulating sub-
strate and contacting said resistance layer; and
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
485
means disposed within said throughhole for securing said at
least one insulating substrate to said board and said plate
100 102
204
105 107 104
and contacting one of said first and second electrode
layers.
4,380,004
EMERGENCY SOUND DETECTOR DEVICE
Montgomery R. Coats, 2821 Blue Spruce Rd., and Gwen V.
Janssen, 1725 Kings Rd., both of Edmond, Okla. 73034
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,593
Int. a.^ G08G 1/00: GOIS 7/40
U.S. a. 340—34 27 Oaims
on said input and supplying a signal with a determined relation-
ship with respect to the input signal on its output, an improved
compensation circuit for continuously compensating for the
zero offset level introduced into the output signal by the de-
vice, comprising:
means for comparing the level of the output signal with the
offset zero level and supplying the sign of the output
signal with respect to the offset zero level, said sign being
positive if the output signal level exceeds that of the offset
zero level and negative if the output signal level is less
than the offset zero level;
a storing capacitor having a first terminal M and a second
terminal connected to ground;
charging means for applying a charge current -(- 1 to termi-
nal M when the sign of the output signal is negative;
WISH
C!»«tC'l»l '
CIICIIil 10
r*
r*
rIO
P/L 'f ?
KC'f/eg ■
r»
/'?
WIKIO
fitre-e
('
rii
^14
MicfOPHoue-
luoicAToe
THgeSNOLO
COUPAeATOR
1
_l
1. An apparatus for detecting a warning sound emitted by an
emergency vehicle or the like, comprising:
first monitor means for monitoring a first predetermined
range of frequencies including at least a portion of the
spectrum of frequencies of the emitted warning sound;
second monitor means for monitoring a second predeter-
mined range of frequencies, the frequencies of the second
- predetermined range of frequencies being lower than the
frequencies of the first predetermined range of frequen-
cies;
comparator means for comparing a first magnitude derived
from an electrical signal detected to have a frequency
within the first predetermined range of frequencies moni-
tored by said first monitor means with a second magnitude
derived from an electrical signal detected to have a fre-
quency within the second predetermined range of fre-
quencies monitored by said second monitoring means; and
indicator means, responsive to said comparator means, for
indicating when the first magnitude is greater than the
second magnitude.
4,380,005
DYNAMIC ZERO OFFSET COMPENSATING ORCUIT
FOR A/D CONVERTER
Pierre Debord, Vence, and Jean-Louis Marijon, Le Bar-sur-
Loup, both of France, assignors to International Business
Machines Corp., Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 912,123, Jun. 2, 1978, Pat. No.
4,251,803. This application Apr. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 139,329
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 30, 1977, 77 20730
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 17,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 H03K li/02
U.S. a. 340—347 AD 2 Qaims
1. In an analog device having at least one input and one
output and receiving an analog signal with a zero mean value
discharging means for applying a discharge current - 1 to
terminal M when the sign of the output signal is positive;
and
means for continuously adding the voltage generated at
terminal M in response to the charge and discharge of said
storing capacitor to the input signal;
and wherein said charging and discharging means include
two current sources for supplying currents having the
magnitude and sign, respectively, of 21 and — 1 and which
are series-connected between two positive and negative
voltage supplies, respectively, having their common point
connected to terminal M of said capacitor, said two
supplies being always switched on, and
steering means for steering 21 to ground when the sign of the
output signal is positive.
4,380,006
LINEAR INTERPOLATOR
Vladimir S. Borisov, ulitsa Lugovaya, 35/37, kv. 9, and Vyacbes-
lav V. Korovin, ulitsa Shekhurdina, 60, kv. 30, both of Saratov,
U.S.S.R.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,649
Int. C\? H03K li/02
U.S. a. 340—347 CC 1 Claim
penreoct voljax sowkc
1. A linear interpolator to provide for conversion of codes
representing X- and Y-axis increments obtainable from an
external data source to corresponding trains of pulses applied
to control circuits of first and second actuation means compris-
ing:
a code digital normalization unit; shift registers of said unit;
an input and an output of each of said shift register; said
inputs of said shift registers connected to said external data
source;
first and second digital-to-analog converters to convert
486
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
digital data to analog voltage each having a first input, a
second input, and an output, said second inputs being
joined together;
respective ones of said inputs of said digital-to-analog con-
verters connected to said outputs of said shift registers of
said code digital normalization unit;
an adjustable reference voltage source having an output;
first and spcond comparators to compare output voltages
from said digital-to-analog converters to a reference volt-
age each having a first input, a second input, and an out-
put;
said first inputs of said comparators joined together and
connected to said output of said adjustable reference
voltage source;
said second inputs of said comparators connected respec-
tively to said outputs of said digital-to-analog converters;
an OR gate having a first input, a second input and an out-
put, said first and second inputs being connected to said
second joined inputs of said digital-to-analog converters
producing reference voltages;
an X-axis voltage-to-frequency converter to convert analog
voltage to trains of output control pulses having an input
and an output which are connected respectively to the
output of said first digital-to-analog converter and the
control circuit of said first actuation means;
an Y-axis voltage-to-frequency converter having an input
and an output which are connected respectively to the
output of said second digital-to-analog converter and the
control circuit of said second actuation means.
4,380,007
PROXIMITY SWITCH
Walther Steinegger, Schaffhausen, Switzerland, assignor to
Playmont AG, Switzerland
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,819
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 27, 1980,
4106/80
Int. a.3 G08C 9/02
U.S. CI. 340—365 C 6 Claims
Finger
1. Proximity switch actuated by an alternating electrical
field comprising
a circuit-carrying base plate;
at least one capacitively actuatable sensor protruding from
said circuit-carrying base plate;
said sensor including
a metallic support having a surface facing away from said
base plate,
a layer of electrically conductive foamed material lining
said surface of said metallic support.
4,380,008
METHOD OF DRIVING A MATRIX TYPE PHASE
TRANSITION LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DEVICE TO
OBTAIN A HOLDING EFFECT AND IMPROVED
RESPONSE TIME FOR THE ERASING OPERATION
Hideaki Kawakami, Mito; Masaaki Kitazima, Hitachi; Naoyuki
Izaki, Hitachi, and Yoshihani Nagae, Hitachi, all of Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 80^01
OaijBs priority, applicatioii Ja^am, Se|>. 29, 1978, 53-119374;
Oct li, 1978, 53-127376
lot. a.' G09G 3/36
U.S. CI. 340—784 6 Qains
matrix type liquid crystal display device which includes a layer
of guest-host type phase transition liquid crystal sandwiched
between a pair of electrode groups including at least one trans-
parent electrode group and arranged in the form of a matrix,
intersecting portions of said electrode groups being employed
as display segments for displaying information by driving
column or row electrodes of said matrix electrode groups with
a one-line-at-a-time scanning system, wherein said phase transi-
tion liquid crystal exhibits a hysteresis characteristic in the
relative brightness thereof against root mean square values of
applied voltage, said amplitude selective multiplexing matrix
driving method comprising:
scanning said segments and applying across them a write-in
voltage when the segments are to be changed from an off
state to an on state, an erasing voltage when the segments
are to be changed from the on state to the off state, and a
holding voltage when a present on or off state of each of
the segments is to be maintained; and
Driving
>«IVEF0RM
Relative intensity
of transmitted
LIGHT
aEAR-
applying a holding voltage across each of segments other
than segments just subjected to scanning to maintain the
present on or off state of the segments,
wherein said write-in voltage has a root mean square value
sufficient for effecting such a phase transition of said phase
transition liquid crystal from a low brightness to a high
brightness condition thereby to turn on said display de-
vice, said holding voltage has a root mean square value
lower than said write-in voltage and not sufficient for
effecting the phase transition of said phase transition liquid
crystal thereby to hold the present brightness of said
display device at the level it is at at the moment the hold-
ing voltage is applied, and said erasing voltage has a root
mean square value lower than said holding voltage and
sufficient for effecting such a phase transition of said phase
transition liquid crystals from the high brightness to the
low brightness condition thereby to turn off said display
devices.
4,380,009
MESSAGE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Ernest L. Long, San Jose; William S. Duvall, Portola Valley,
and Donald P. Allen, Menlo Park, all of Calif., assignors to
Amtel Systems Corporation, Sunnyvale, Calif.
Filed Feb. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 125,844
Int. a.3 H04L 15/34; H04Q 9/00
U.S. a. 340—825.55 41 Qaims
r r
%
/
TT7S,
J
1
M ?<^
TEfWiNAL
i
I — J PRINTER
2
^ DISHETTE
1
14
I
ir^'S^
>U f"*
*•«
- IB
<^
-^
^^'--n
^
^
REMOTE
MESSAGE
PRINTERS
1. An amplitude selective multiplexing method of driving a comprising:
1. In an office complex, a message communication system
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
487
means for generating an analog carrier signal,
means for modulating said analog carrier signal with a digi-
tal message signal such that said digital message signal is
phase coherent with said analog carrier signal, said digital
message signal including information identifying a unique
address or set of unique addresses of one or more of the
plurality of remote locations,
means for transmitting said message signal from a first cen-
tral location over an office power line to a group of re-
mote locations, and
message display means each having one or more unique
destination address means corresponding to said specified
information and responsive to said transmitted message
signal for displaying said message.
4,380,010
PHASE DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA ARRAY AND
PHASED RING COMBINER FOR RADIO DIRECTION
HNDING
Zdzistaw A. A. Kr^ewski, Ajax, Canada, assignor to Bayly
Engineering Limited, Ajax, Canada
Filed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 186,016
Qaims priority, application Canada, Sep. 12, 1979, 335462
Int. CI.' GOIS 3/06
U.S. a. 343—113 R 9 Qaims
AUOO OUTPUT
J Phase'
DIPOLE ELEICMTT'
OUTPUTS
1. A radio direction finding system for determining the
relative bearing angle 6 of an incoming signal comprising a
circular array of an even number of vertical dipoles arranged
in diametrically opposed pairs equally spaced apart around the
array, each dipwle pair having an output feeding two branches,
one branch electrically advancing the phase of a signal from
each dipole pair by an amount equivalent to the angular dis-
placement in one direction of each dij)ole pair with respect to
a reference direction established by a reference dipole pair and
the other branch retarding the phase of a signal from each
dipole pair by an amount equivalent to said angular displace-
ment, means for combining all the phase advanced signals to
form a signal voltage \d which is retarded in phase by an angle
6 corresponding to said relative bearing, means for combining
all the phase retarded signals to form a signal voltage V^ which
is advanced in phase by said angle 6, and means for measuring
the phase difference (20) between \d and V, whereby 6 is
obtainable by dividing said phase difference by 2.
surface substantially horizontally disposed between said
side side surfaces;
a substantially horizontal loop formed of a band of electri-
cally conductive material having a gap defining first and
second feed terminals, which loop includes
a first portion of said band of electrically conductive mate-
rial affixed along said top surface between said side sur-
faces,
a second portion of said band of electrically conductive
material substantially horizontally affixed along said back
surface between said side surfaces,
a third band portion of said of electrically conductive mate-
rial affixed along one of said side surfaces for connectmg
one end of said first portion of said band to one end of said
second portion of said band,
a fourth portion of said band of electrically conductive
material affixed along the other of said side surfaces for
connecting an other end of said first portion of said band
to an other end of said second portion of said band, and
said second, third and fourth portions of said band each
having a respective width dimension greater than that of
said first portion of said band,
whereby the width dimension of said first portion of said
band lies in a substantially horizontal plane and the width
dimensions of said second, third and fourth portions of
said band lie in substantially vertical planes;
tuning circuitry coupled to said first and second feed termi-
nals for tuning said loop over at least a portion of said
frequency bands responsive to a control potential, said
tuning circuitry being affixed to said cabinet proximate
said first and second feed terminals; and
a transmission line for coupling said tuning circuitry to the
tuner of said television receiver.
4,380,012
RADOME FOR AIRCRAFT
David Bevan, Media, Pa.; James S. Yee, Seattle, Wash., and
Richard R. Pruyn, Valley Forge, Pa., assignors to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,029
Int. a.3 G09F 9/30
U.S. a. 343—705 20 Qaims
4,380,011
LOOP ANTENNA ARRANGEMENT FOR INCLUSION IN
A TELEVISION RECEIVER
Rafael Torres, Plainsboro, and Oakley M. Woodward, Prince-
ton, both of N.J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Nov. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,249
Int. C\? HOIQ 1/24
U.S. Q. 343—702 27 Claims
1. An antenna arrangement for inclusion within a television
receiver having a tuner, and responsive to signals in selected
frequency bands comprising:
a cabinet for said television receiver having at least two
opposing substantially vertical side surfaces and a substan-
tially vertical back surface therebetween, and having a top
10. In an aircraft radar system, the combination comprising;
a housing having a planform which approximates an equilat-
eral triangle in shape and including triangular top and
bottom walls joined by three side walls to define a housing
1029 O.G.— 19
488
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
enclosure therebetween, the three side walls being curved
outwardly between the top and bottom walls;
housing support means for mounting the housing to the
aircraft;
three identical, substantially planar radar antennas disposed
in a substantially triangular planform within the housing
and facmg outward respectively toward the three housing
side walls, each antenna including a phased array of an-
tenna elements.
mount, for matching the electromagnetic signal impe-
dance of the feed horn to the waveguide system; and
4,380,013
EXPANDABLE PANEL AND TRUSS
SYSTEM/ANTENNA/SOLAR PANEL
Paul Slysh, San Diego, Calif., assignor to General
Corp./Convair Division, San Diego, Calif.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,830
Int. a.5 HOIQ 1/28. 1/08
U.S. a. 343—753
Dynamics
41 Qaims
a waveguide transition section for coupling the conical
section to the impedance matching section and for con-
verting energy received from the conical section to signals
propagating in a waveguide mode.
)x
4,380,015
RECORDING SYSTEM FOR RECORDING
INFORMATION ON RECORD MEDIUM BY USING
ENERGY BEAM
Osamu Ito, Itami, and Isao Watanabe, Takatsuki, both of Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,063
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 28, 1980, 55-56526
Int. a.3 GOID 15/14
U.S. a. 346-108 ga^s
36
1. An expandable panel/truss system wherein a plurality of
panels are alternately folded in an accordian-like stack as panel
sets m a storage container for transporting into space for de-
ployment to form space structures, the improvement compris-
ing:
truss means in the form of a ring formed by deployed unfolded
panels emanating from said storage container which forms a
selected geometric configuration outlinmg a space;
said storage container forming part of said geometric configu-
ration; and
means folded in said storage containers and unfolded and
deployed with said truss means to fill the space outlined by
said geometric configuration
said panel sets are panel pairs which when deployed are circu-
lar in cross-section.
JST DC
"sensor
riPREAMP
¥■
30
LASER r MODUL
ia
38
photd oeif-se
h
ZtJDOC
'^NSOR
—r
62
64
• DIFF
- AMP
66
f:
2ND
- OP
MODU
? Iw"^ ^H
— 56
^ J
50 RE PROD
LASER
32
"t:
16
4,380,014
FEED HORN FOR REFLECTOR ANTENNAE
H. Taylor Howard, San Andreas, Calif., assignor to Chaparral
Communications, Inc., Los Altos, Calif.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,509
Int. a.3 HOIQ 13/00
U.S. a. 343-786 g claims
1. An electromagnetic feed horn for use with antenna reflec-
tors in a waveguide transmission system, said feed horn com-
prising:
an aperture for receiving electromagnetic waves, including a
plurality of protuberances symmetrically disposed radially
outward along the periphery thereof and orthogonal to
the direction of propagation of said waves;
a conical section coupled to the aperture for receiving elec-
tromagnetic signals therefrom;
a waveguide mount for mounting the feed horn to the wave-
guide transmission system;
an impedence matching section coupled to the waveguide
1. A recording system for recording information on a record
medium by using an energy beam, comprising an input termi-
nal which is supplied with an electrical recording signal, a
recording source of an energy beam for generating an energy
beam for recording information on said record medium, a
modulator means for modulating said energy beam with said
electrical recording signal, a recording means for recording
said information on said record medium with said modulated
energy beam, a reproducing mgans for reproducing informa-
tion recorded on said record medium substantially simulta-
neously with the recording of said information to produce a
reproduced signal converted to an electrical signal, a first duty
cycle sensor means connected to said reproducing means to
sense a duty cycle of said reproduced signal from said repro-
ducing means, a second duty cycle sensor means connected to
said input terminal to sense a duty cycle of said recording
signal, a differential amplifier means connected to said first and
second duty cycle sensor means to generate a difference be-'
tween output signals from said first and second duty cycle
sensor means to produce a differential signal, and a control
means connected to said differential amplifier means to control
the power of said energy beam entered into said modulator
means from said source of said energy beam in response to said
differential signal from said differential amplifier means.
APRIL 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
489
4,380,016
PROTECTED OPTICAL DISC
Jean-Claude Lehureau; Henriette Magna, and Michel Thiro-
uard, all of Paris, France, assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris,
France
Division of Ser. No. 78,728, Sep. 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4^8,545.
This application Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,233
Claims priority, application France, Sep. 29, 1978, 7827920
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 29,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 GOID 15/34
U.S. a. 346—135.1 8 Claims
1. A protected optical disc for the recording of information
comprising:
an optically transparent plate having a central hole and outer
and inner surfaces;
a layer of recording material deposited on said inner surface,
said layer being inscribable and optically legible by reflec-
tion by a radiation beam traversing said transparent plate
and being focused on said layer in a ring-shaped inscrip-
tion region thereof;
an intergral preshaped cover having a central hole of sub-
stantially the same diameter as the central hole of said
optically transparent plate, a central ring-shaped contact
surface immediately surrounding said central hole, and an
edge ring-shaped contact surface the two contact surfaces
being adapted to be in contact with said layer of preceding
material deposited on said inner surface of said transparent
plate with the central hole of the integral cover being
aligned with the central hole of the transparent plate, the
cover being shaped so as to include an inner annulus
forming said central ring-shaped contact surface in
contact with said inner surface of said transparent plate, an
intermediate annulus, concentric with said inner region,
not in contact with said inner surface of said transparent
plate and an outer annulus forming said edge ring-shaped
contact surface in contact with said inner surface of said
transparent plate, an annular chamber being formed by the
contact between said transparent plate and said preshaped
cover at said two contact surfaces.
opposite to said first direction, to print a second line on
said record receiving surface;
(d) providing relative movement between said record re-
ceiving surface and said at least one ink jet nozzle to align
said at least one ink jet nozzle in printing relationship to
said first line; and
(e) repeating step (a) at least once, and wherein printing of
said first line occurs only while said ink jet nozzle is mov-
ing in said first direction and wherein printing of said
second line occurs only while said ink jet nozzle is moving
in said second direction.
4^80,018
INK DROPLET PROJECONG DEVICE AND AN INK JET
PRINTER
Sadanari Andoh; Jui^i Maeda, both of Kyoto; Kiyoshi Fuku-
shima, Kobe; Hiroichi Yoneda, Neyagawa, and Naotomo
Jinushi, Hirakata, all of Japan, assignors to Sanyo Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,078
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-
103727[U]; Aug. 11, 1980, 55-114120[U]; Oct. 16, 1980,
55-145370; Feb. 18, 1981, 56-23445; Jun. 20, 1981, 56-84264;
Sep. 17, 1981, 56-132128[iri
Int. a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—140 R 19 Cl^™
4,380,017
METHOD FOR INK JET PRINTING
Donald L. Ort, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Xerox Corporation,
Stamford, Conn.
FUed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,674
Int a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—140 R ^ Claims
1. A method of bidirectional ink jet printing, which elimi-
nates the necessity for compensating for velocity imparted
droplet offset, which comprises:
(a) moving at least one ink jet nozzle of the drop-on-demand
type relative to a record receiving surface in a first direc-
tion to print a first line thereon;
(b) providing relative movement between said record re-
ceiving surface and said at least one ink jet nozzle to align
said nozzle with a second line in printing relationship
thereto;
(c) moving said at least one ink jet nozzle relative to said
record receiving surface in a second direction, which is
18. An ink jet printer including an ink droplet projecting
device comprising:
a pressure generating means which vibrates in response to an
electric signal;
a pressure cell, a part of the side wall thereof being com-
posed of said pressure generating means and a passive
vibrating means which has a smaller area than that of the
pressure generating means;
transmission medium filled in said pressure cell to transmit
the vibration of the pressure generating means to the
passive vibrating means; and
means for holding an ink layer on the passive vibrating
means on the exterior side of said pressure cell; ^/^
whereby the pressure generated by the vibratioiju^the
pressure generating means is concentrically given to the
passive vibrating means through the transmission medium,
the passive vibrating means vibrates thereby, and by this
vibration, the ink droplet is projected from the ink layer.
490
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,380,019
DEVICE FOR MONITORING THE SUPPLY OF
PRINTING FLUID IN INK PRINTING DEVICES
«^olfgang Steinberger, Greilsberg, and Gerhard Stempfl, Toeg-
ing, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens
Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297.368
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 10
1980, 3034067
Int. a.J GOID 15/16
U.S. a. 346-140 R saaims
J
contacting said first semiconductor layer for supplying
power to said device.
4,380,021
SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
Mitsuo Matsuyama; Ichiro Ohhinata, and Junjiro Kitano, all of
Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 131,931
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 22, 1979, 54-32285
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/48
U.S. a. 357-15 3 ci3i„.
^2
1. Apparatus for monitoring ink supply for an ink printing
device comprising a printing carriage means disposed for back
and forth movement on a lateral path along a guidance struc-
ture, a printer head means mounted on said printing carriage
means, an ink reservoir housing for containing an ink supply
mounted on said printing carriage means cooperatively con-
nected to said printer head means via a supply means, said
reservoir housing having a cover portion and a tappet member,
said tappet member having a base portion for resting on the
upper level of the ink supply and an upstanding stem portion
freely projecting through said cover portion for reciprocable
movement in accordance with the changing level of the ink
supply, and a monitoring means stationarily mounted at one
lateral end of said guidance structure disposed in the move-
ment path of said reservoir housing for sensing the degree of
projection of said stem portion over said cover portion to
detect the level of ink supply in said reservoir housing.
4,380,020
ACTIVE HIGH FREQUENCY SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICE WITH INTEGRAL WAVEGUIDE
Lloyd T. Yuan; Yu-Wen Chang, both of Rancho Palos Verdes,
and Thomas G. Mills, Carson, all of Calif., assignors to TRW
Inc., Redondo Beach, Calif.
Filed Jan. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 114,031
Int. a.3 HOIL 27/26
U.S. a. 357—3 14 Claims
1. A semiconductor integrated circuit comprising:
a semiconductor substrate of a first conductivity type;
at least one first diffusion layer with a low impurity concen-
tration of a second conductivity type opposite to the first
conductivity type formed within said substrate;
a second diffusion layer with a high impurity concentration
of the first conductivity type formed within said first
diffusion layer;
a third diffusion layer with a high impurity concentration of
the first conductivity type formed within said substrate;
wiring layers formed on the surfaces of said second and third
diffusion layers;
a metal layer directly contacting with said substrate; and
a fourth diffusion layer of the second conductivity type
shaped within said substrate like a frame under the periph-
eral portion of said metal layer and formed more shal-
lowly than said first and said second diffusion layer, in
which
a portion of said second diffusion layer overlaps a portion of
said first diffusion layer; said metal layer serves as an
external contact wiring layer for said first diffusion layer;
said substrate, said first diffusion layer and said second
diffusion layer are used as a'collector region, a base region
and an emitter region, respectively, thereby to form an
NPN transistor; said third diffusion region is used as an
ohmic contact for said collector region; and said substrate,
said metal layer and said fourth diffusion layer are used as
a cathode region, an anode region and a guard ring, re-
spectively, thereby to form a Schottky barrier diode.
1. A monolithic semiconductor device capable of operation
at extremely high frequencies, said device comprising:
a substrate that serves as a waveguide as well as a substrate;
a metallic layer on said substrate having a recess opening
toward said substrate and defining a cavity and a contact
portion extending across said recess;
an active high-frequency semiconductor device within said
cavity between and in contact with said substrate and said
contact portion including a first semiconductor layer on
said substrate extending across said cavity beyond said
conuct portion and a second semiconductor layer in
contact with said contact portion; and
conductor means on said substrate within said recess and
4,380,022
MONOLITHIC FULLY INTEGRATED CLASS B
PUSH-PULL MICROWAVE GaAs MESFET WITH
DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS WITH
REDUCED MILLER EFFECT
Max N. Yoder, Falls Church, Va., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,601
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/80
U.S. a. 357—22 4 Claims
1. An improved field effect transistor device of the type
having a body of semiconductor material, and a plurality of
drains, gates and sources operatively disposed on the body of
semiconductor material, said field effect transistor device
being connected in a differential input and output configura-
tion including a positive gate bus, a negative gate bus, a posi-
tive drain bus, a negative drain bus, and a common source bus,
wherein the improvement for a single one of a plurality of
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
491
alternate parallel connected operating units of said field effect
transistor device comprises:
a common source operatively connected to the common
source bus;
first and second drains juxtaposed on opposite sides of said
common source, said first drain being operatively con-
nected to the negative drain bus, and said second dram
being operatively connected to the positive drain bus;
first and second gates juxtaposed on opposite sides of said
first drain, said first and second gates being operatively
connected to the positive gate bus;
third and fourth gates juxtaposed on opposite sides of said
second drain, said third and fourth gates being operatively
connected to the negative gate bus; and
generally aligned, said second polarizing means being
located between said panels and oriented with its direction
25\8 15^
re
BALANCED
INPUT *^ —
SIGNAL a<V ^
27/«"
;to
7 Re R»
L» r-^q .;55 f BALANCED
V^'^
%,
OUTPUT
of polarization generally orthogonal to those of said first
and third light-polarizing means.
^33
\^
J,-^
2i G*T£ BUSS
#2 0^
4,380,024
AIRBORNE VEHICLE REFERENCED (OUTSIDE
WORLD) RECORDING DEVICE UTILIZING AN
ELECTRO-OPTICAL CAMERA AND AN ELECTRONIC
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Hasse E. O. Olofsson, 25 Namndemansbacken, Enskede, Swe-
den (S-122 36)
Filed NoY. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,282
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Nov. 19, 1979, 7909530
Int. a.3 H04N 7//«
U.S. a. 358—93 7 Oaims
MTE BOSS
positive feedback means including first, second, third and
fourth crossover capacitors, said first and second cross-
over capacitors being operatively connected between the
positive gate bus and the positive drain bus at said first
gate and said second gate, respectively, and said third and
fourth crossover capacitors being operatively connected
between the negative gate bus and the negative drain bus
at said third gate and said fourth gate, respectively, for
minimizing the negative feedback effect of the Miller
capacitance beween the positive gate bus and the positive
drain bus and said first and second gates and said first
drain, and for minimizing the negative feedback effect of
the Miller capacitance between the positive gate bus and
the positive drain bus and said first and second gates and
said second drain.
4,380,023
ELECTRONIC IMAGING APPARATUS WITH LIGHT
VALVE AREA ARRAYS
Jose M. Mir, Rochester; Jerry R. Varner, Fairport, and Qark
N. Kurtz, Rochester, all of N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 230,097 _
Int. Q\? H04N 1/46, 1/22
U.S. a. 358—75 '3 Oaims
1. An electronic imaging device comprising:
(a) first and second light-modulating panels each including
(i) a plurality of generally coplanar and parallel light valve
strips, formed of an electro-optic material of the type that
is transformable by an electric field from a non-polar,
isotropic state to a polar, birefringent state, and (ii) ad-
dressable means for selectively applying discrete electnc
fields transversely across respective strips, said panels
being generally parallel, with their respective strips op-
posing and in a generally orthogonal relation; and
(b) first, second and third light-polarizing means in optical
alignment with said panels, said first and third polarizing
means being located respectively on opposite sides of said
panels and oriented with their directions of polarization
32-'
1. Arrangement for electronic recording of outside world
and display symbol registration in airborne vehicles compns-
ing an electronic recording camera, a head up display and a
recorder characterized in that the camera is calibrated with
close tolerances to the same reference axes as the head up
display's display symbology, the output signals from said cam-
era and control signals of said display symbology being pro-
cessed and combined in an electronic unit for simultaneous
registration in the recorder.
4,380,025
AUXILIARY BLANKING AND AUXILIARY SIMULATED
VIDEO LINE GENERATOR UNTT FOR A VIDEO
INSPECTION SYSTEM
David W. Deane, Otterbein, Ind., assignor to Ball Corporation,
Muncie, Ind.
Filed Aug. 6, 1979, Ser. No. 63,927
Int. Ci? H04N 7/18
U.S. O. 358—106 »' Claims
1. In a video inspection system for the inspection of articles
of manufacture including a video camera for supplying a video
information signal and utilizing horizontal and vertical sync
signals, a blanking apparatus for producing within a predeter-
mined inspection window a blanking window within which
inspection is inhibited, said blanking apparatus comprising:
492
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
means for generating a horizontal lead signal having timing
adjustable with respect to said horizontal sync pulses;
means for generating a horizontal trail signal having timing
adjustable with respect to said horizontal sync pulses;
means for generating a vertical lead signal having timing
adjustable with respect to said vertical sync pulses;
iA^»rs«r.s2rr!u 1
a
kC^::
5I& ac/v.
i7
4i!S
-?7
^TMcee^ ^^£yti^ ^tct19lS
tt^.
PVLS£ G£Af.
■»0Z
means for generating a vertical trail signal having timing
adjustable with respect to said vertical sync pulses; and
means for combining said horizontal lead signal, horizontal
trail signal, vertical lead signal and vertical trail signal to
form a blanking window signal defining said blanking
window within which inspection is inhibited.
4,380,026
METHOD FOR FLASHING A STROBOSCOPE FOR USE
WITH JUDGING THE GOOD OR BAD OF AN OBJECT
TO BE INSPECTED
Yutaka Kubota, Odawara, Japan, assignor to Stanley Electric
Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 215,138
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 12, 1979, 54-161148
Int. a.' H04N 7/18
U.S. a. 358-106 , cai„
.&^
J^mIvmm
Si/»1
Drtt
ecttm I — — • n ,, ,
J'
ET
4,380,027
DATA ENCODING FOR TELEVISION
William Uventer, 62 Sutton PI., Lawrence, Long Island, N.Y.
11559, and Lawrence M. Shulman, 74 Mercury Ave East
Patchogue, N.Y. 11772
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 213,915
Int. a.3 H04N 7/08
U.S. a. 358-147 29 Qaims
<^
0^rj» e-vcaprf^^
, jr^nr.^ ji>.«w
I. A system for encoding data to be transmitted along with
an mcoming television video signal of a given field rate
wherem a predetermined number of scan lines compose each
field, comprising:
input interface means for receiving data from a number of
mput devices each of which provides data at a particular
information rate;
encoding processing means coupled to said input interface
means for accessing the data received by said input inter-
face means from the input devices and for arranging the
data into separately identifiable data groups, each of said
data groups corresponding to the input device which
originated the data in that group; and
inserting means coupled to said encoding processing means
and to the incoming video signal for accessing said data
groups from said encoding processing means and for
inserting said data groups into a selected scan line of the
video signal, said inserting means including timing means
for providing timing signals to define a number of data
channels over a portion of said selected scan line, said
inserting means operating to insert each of said data
groups into an associated data channel so that said data
channels on said selected scan line include data which
originates from the number of input devices, the amount
of data identifiable with a particular input device corre-
sponding directly to the particular information rate of the
input device.
^Uraka^ca^ ^^y
1. A method for flashing a stroboscope for use with judging
the good or bad of an object to be inspected comprising the
steps of:
(a) picking up an object by a television camera and produc-
ing a video signal thereof;
(b) providing a stroboscope for irradiation of said object
with light therefrom;
(c) separating a vertical synchronizing signal from said video
signal;
(d) detecting said object arriving at a predetermined detect-
ing position and producing a position detecting signal,
having an ON signal period longer than the period be-
tween adjacent vertical synchronizing signals;
(e) generating a signal for flashing said stroboscope when
both of said position detecting signal and said vertical
synchronizing signal exist,
whereby the video signal of said object is delivered from said
television camera at the beginning of the scanning thereof.
4,380,028
TELEVISION CAMERA EQUIPPED WITH AN
ANTI-BLOOMING DEVICE
Christian Pepin, and Jean P. Trahand, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Filed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,120
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 12, 1980, 80 03048
Int. Q\? H04N 5/34
U.S. a. 358-219 6 Claims
1. A television camera equipped with an anti-blooming
device intended more particularly for homing apparatus, com-
pnsing;
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
493
a camera tube for supplying a video signal and having an
electrode;
scanning circuits for providing horizontal and vertical de-
flection signals of a raster scan for said tube;
a first signal generator for producing electron-beam blank-
ing signals during the line and frame flyback periods;
a second signal generator for producing line and frame
synchronizing signals;
an anti-blooming device comprising:
threshold comparator means for comparing said video
signal to a threshold substantially equal to the camera
tube saturation level to detect video signal amplitudes
corresponding to a bright spot,
first means connected to the output of said comparator
means for generating deflection signals which corre-
spond to the horizontal and vertical coordinates of said
bright spot, and
second means connected to the output of said comparator
means for generating a signal unblanking the camera
tube during a portion of the flyback period to provide a
determined electron-beam intensity, said signal being
provided at a repetition rate at least equal to a line
period and the number of repeated occurrences thereof
being determined by the brightness of the bright spot;
first mixing means for providing the raster scan deflector
signals and, during flyback periods, said bright spot de-
flection signals; and
second mixing means for providing to the electrode of said
camera tube, electron-beam intensity modulating signals
comprising said unblanking signals during flyback periods
for producing a local modification of the tube sensitivity.
update the contents of said storing means as each data segment
is transmitted to said storage medium, means responsive to the
bits in a data segment for generating a CRC signal, means for
coupling the CRC signal to said transmitting means so that the
CRC signal is applied to the storage medium in association
with the data segment in response to which the CRC signal is
generated, and means for transmitting the content of said stor-
ing means to said storage medium for storage thereinafter the
nth data segment and the CRC signal associated therewith,
thereby to establish a check segment containing a data pattern
representative of the data stored in all said data segments.
4,380,030
MAGNETIC TAPE CASSETTE
Hanio Shiba, Saku, Japan, assignor to TDK Electronics Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Set. No. 79,194, Sep. 26, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 16, 1981, Set. No. 274,198
Qalms priority, application Japan, Nov. 20, 1978, 53-158695
Int. a.3 GllB 15/04. 23/06
U.S. a. 360—132 3 a«ims
4,380,029
DATA RECORDING FORMAT AND METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING SAME
Elwood J. Bode, Newark, Calif., assignor to BTI Computer
Systems, Sunnyvale, Calif.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,534
Int. a.3 GllB 5/09
U.S. a. 360—48 9 Qaims
2
2
©^'
1
I
0 // 0 3
nc\ J
1. Apparatus for recording data in the form of a sector of
serially occurring binary bits onto a storage medium compris-
ing means for sequentially grouping the bits into n data seg-
ments wherein n is a positive integer greater than one and each
data segment includes 1/n times the number of bits in said
sector, means coupled to said grouping means for transmitting
the bits in a data segment to said storage medium, means cou-
pled to said grouping means for temporarily storing a data
segment of bits, means coupled to said grouping means and said
storing means for combining in accordance with a prescribed
function the bits of the data segment in said storing means with
the bits in the immediately succeeding data segment thereby to
1. A magnetic tape cassette, comprisig:
a cassette casing having a first surface including a tape read-
ing aperture and a second surface opposite said first sur-
face;
at least one recess on said second surface, each said at least
one recess including opposing lateral walls, a bottom wall,
a projection centrally located on each of said lateral walls
and a slot extending in said bottom walls; and
an elastic fitting piece for each said at least one recess, each
said fitting piece forming a channel shape including two
legs and a connecting portion and being symmetnc about
a plane passing centrally through said legs and connecting
portion, each of said legs including a lug forming an en-
closing mating portion, each said lug being centrally lo-
cated on one of said legs and on said plane of symmetry,
said connecting portion including an extending portion
which extends beyond said legs;
wherein said fitting piece is adapted to fit into said recess in
either of two positions, a first position in which each said
enclosing mating portion of each said lug is matingly
engaged with one of said projections and said connecting
portion covers all of said recess except for a portion corre-
sponding to said slot, and a second position in which each
said enclosing mating portion of each said lug is matingly
engaged with one of said projections and said connecting
portion is perpendicular to said bottom wall to uncover
said recess, with said extending portion engagingly in-
serted in said slot to prevent lateral movement of said
fitting piece,
whereby said fitting piece maybe moved from one of said
two positions to the other of said two positions with said
plane of symmetry in either of two opposite angular orien-
tations.
494
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
4,380,031
CONTROL FOR BIDIRECTIONAL DRIVE RESPONSIVE
TO GAPS IN RECORDED SOUND
Stephane M. A. d'AIayer de Costemore d'Arc, Genappe, Bel-
gium, assignor to Staar S.A., Belgium
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,754
Claims priority, application Belgium, Mar. 14, 1980, 1/99789
Int. a.3 H04N 9/16
U.S. a. 360-74.1 ,5 cXtAms
with color marks thereon moves relative to the lamp
means,
(ii) at least one light sensor disposed with a viewing axis for
receiving light after impingement on the tape from the
source,
1. In a tape transport having a bi-directional drive for move-
ment of tape at playback speed and fast speed in either direc-
tion; a soundtrack pick-up head operatively positioned to en-
gage the tape, said head having two sets of head channels for
detecting recordingsj)n respective sets of recording tracks on
recording tape; switch means shiftable from one state to an-
other for enabling one set or the other of said sets of head
channels; signal detection circuit means for receiving audio
signals from the enabled set of head channels and for produc-
ing actuating signals in response to a silence interval of prede-
termined minimum duration in said audio signals indicating a
silence period between recordings on the corresponding set of
recording tracks; drive control means including a reversing
mechanism operable to reverse the drive for movement of tape
at playback speed or fast rewind speed; and a fast rewind
actuator; the improvements comprising:
means connecting said reversing mechanism for said bi-
directional drive to said switch means, including means
having two states representing the respective directions of
tape movement connected for shifting the state of said
switch means and switching the enabled sets of head
channels to accommodate the direction of tape movement
upon reversal of said drive;
means for disconnecting said connecting means from shifting
the state of said switch means upon reversal of said drive
for movement of the tape at fast rewind speed so as to
maintain the same state of said switch means and enabled
set of head channels; '•■
said connecting means being operable to shift the state of
said switch means upon reversal of said drive for move-
ment of the tape at playback speed; and
means for connecting said actuating signals from said silence
detection circuit means to operate said drive control
means and actuate said reversing mechanism during
movement of the tape by said drive at fast rewind speed.
(iii) feedback means connected to said light intensity detec-
tion means and to said lamp means for controlling the
intensity of illumination onto said tape path and directed
to the light sensors such that an approximately constant
level of illumination is set at the detectors defining the
tape background and the contrast ratio between the color
marks and the tape background exceeds a threshold level.
4,380,033
DISC-DRIVE HEAD POSITIONING SYSTEMS
Kantilal Bacrania, Stevenage, England, assignor to Burroughs
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,334
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 19, 1979,
7925197
Int. a.3 GllB 3/10. 5/58: G05B 15/02
U.S. a. 360-77 8 Qaims
4 igO 032
TAPE SYSTEM WITH OPTICALLY CONTRASTING
DATA MARKS
R. Fred Pfost, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to Newell Research
Corporation, Saratoga, Calif.
Filed Apr. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 143,785
Int. a.3 GllB 15/52
U.S. a. 360-74.6 14 Qaims
12. In a tape playing system wherein the tape moves in a tape
path and has color marks thereon indicative of data, the im-
provement comprising,
(i) lamp means for illuminating a tape path in which a tape
1. Apparatus for computing the mean value of a correction
position demand signal for a servo track on a moving medium,
said mean value to be used for error correction of the position
demand signal for other tracks, said position demand signals
being applied to a servomechanism to move a transducer to a
disposition over a track on said moving medium, said trans-
ducer recovering first and second position-indicating signal
components from said servo track, comprising:
a controller for communicating with said servomechanism;
control logic communicating with said controller; and
a demodulator including first and second amplitude decod-
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
495
ers and a comparator, said first and second amplitude
decoders communicating with said control logic, said first
and second amplitude decoders receiving and detecting
said first and second position indicating signals respec-
tively from said transducer, the outputs of said first and
second amplitude decoders being coupled to said compar-
ator which provides a nonparity output when said trans-
ducer is not proximately disposed over said servo track
and a parity output when said transducer is proximately
disposed over said servo track, said comparator output
coupled to said controller which provides a first correc-
tion position demand signal to said servomechanism to
move said transducer until said parity is reached in said
comparator, said control logic responding to said parity to
cause said first and second amplitude decoders to next
receive and detect said second and first position indicating
signals respectively, and provide outputs to said compara-
tor, said comparator providing an output to said control-
ler to provide a second correction position demand signal
to said servomechanism to move said transducer until
parity is reached in said comparator, said controller com-
puting the mean value of said first and second correction
position demand signals at parity, whereby, said mean
value is used to correct the positional demand signals for
all other tracks on the medium.
4,380,035
MAGNETIC TAPE CASSETTE
Hiroshi OU; Eiji Horigome, and Hitoshi Azegami, all of Tokyo,
Japan, assignors to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 184,063
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 6, 1979, 54-123156[U]
Int. a.' GllB 23/04
U.S. a. 360—130.33 - 5 Qaims
1. A magnetic tape cassette, which comprises: a resilient,
coated pad support member having a coat formed from an
organic solvent soluble rust inhibitor and an organic solvent
soluble synthetic resin, wherein said coated pad support mem-
ber produces a pad pressure substantially the same as the pres-
sure produced when said pad support member is uncoated.
4,380,034
TRACK CENTERING SERVO PULSE NOISE RLTER
Guss L. Krake, Richneld, Minn., assignor to Magnetic Peripher-
als Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,471
Int. a.5 GllB 21/10
U.S. a. 360—77 7 Qaims
4,380,036
CLIP-ON PROTECTOR
Gerald Coren, 18 WiUben U., Plainview, N.Y. 11803
Division of Ser. No. 74,885, Sep. 12, 1979, Pat. No. 4,317,153",
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 880,756, Feb. 24,
1978, Pat. No. 4,191,987. This application Aug. 12, 1981, Ser.
No. 292,232
Int. Q.' H02H 9/06
U.S. Q. 361—119 1 Claim
1. In a disk track centering servo system having even pulses
written on one servo track and odd pulses written on an adja-
cent servo track, a read head for reading information, includ-
ing said pulses, means for preamplifying said pulses, and means
for distinguishing between odd and even pulses, the improv-
ment comprising:
first and second pluralities of analog sample and hold cir-
cuits, each having an output;
means for inputting even pulses, one pulse per circuit, into
said first plurality of said circuits; said first circuits holding
the latest received N pulses, where N is a predetermined
number;
means for inputting odd pulses, one pulse per circuit, into
said second plurality of said circuits; said second circuits
holding the latest received N pulses, where N is a prede-
termined number;
means for analog summing the outputs of said first plurality
of circuits to tor.n a first sum;
means for analog summing the outputs of said second plural-
ity of circuits to form a second sum; and
means for deriving the difference between said first sum and
said second sum to form a position error signal.
1. A method of assuring multi-mode electrical protection for
telephone lines that employ a gas tube arrestor and wherein the
method is adapted for use with a device which clips onto the
gas tube arrestor by means of metallic fingers that are in ther-
mal and electrical contact with the respective electrodes of the
gas tube arrestor, comprising the steps of placing a heat coil
assembly in the device which is responsive to a sustained over-
current condition and is adapted to open-circuit upon same,
placing a common form of terminal means on the device, with
the terminal means extending from the periphery of the device,
positioning the heat coil assembly between a first one and a
second one of the terminal means, placing an over-voltage
arrestor in the device with the over-voltage arrestor in pres-
sure engagement with the heat coil assembly thus causing the
heat coil assembly to esublish electrical continuity with the
two terminal means between which it is positioned whereupon
removal of the over-voltage arrestor or heat coil assembly
from the device operates to break the electrical continuity
established between the two terminal means, placing a com-
mon form of connector on each incoming line, placing a com-
496
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
mon form of connector on each apparatus line, the common
form of connector that is placed on each incoming and appara-
tus line bemg adapted to mate with the common form of termi-
nal means on the device, connecting the common form of
connector on an incoming hne to one of the two terminal
means, and connecting the common form of connector on an
apparatus line to the other one of the two terminal means thus
establishing electrical continuity between associated incoming
and apparatus lines whereby if either incoming or apparatus
Ime IS disconnected from its respective terminal means, electri-
cal continuity between the associated incoming and apparatus
Imes is broken electrically isolating the same.
grounding said first terminal of said overvoltage protec-
tive element, and
detachable closing means abutting against said first terminal
of said overvoltage protective element and cooperating
with said grounding means to be guided along a transla-
tory and rotatory stroke;
said free end of one of said conducting strips being discon-
4,380,037
ELECTROSTATIC TREATMENT OF PAPER
William D. Harris, Greensboro, N.C., assignor to Burlington
Industries, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,697
Int. a.' H05F 3/00
U.S. CI. 361-214 7ciai„,
4-8 9
5--
'^^f^
'■• ' !.■:' =
/H
nected from said free end of the other conducting strip
and connected to said second terminal of said overvoltage
protective element when said closing means is at an inter-
mediate stationary position of said translatory and rota-
tory stroke, and being forced against said free end of said
other conducting strip by said second terminal of said
overvoltage protective element when said closing means
rotates at the end of said stroke.
1. A method of altering electrostatic charges of sheets of
dielectric material arranged in a stack, utilizing a plate com-
prised substantially of electVically conductive material inside
an enclosure having electrically conductive interior surfaces,
the plate being electrically insulated from the interior surfaces!
comprising the steps of:
(a) placing one sheet of the stack in operative association
with the plate, while maintaining the rest of the sheets of
the stack free from contact with any electrically conduc-
tive manner;
(b) electrically connecting the interior surfaces to a first
voltage; and
(c) electrically connecting the plate to a second voltage,
much greater than the first voltage, long enough to a'
the electrostatic charges.
4,380,039
GROUNDING TERMINAL FOR LIGHTNING DIVERTER
STRIP
Charles H. King, Kent, Wash., assignor to The Boeing Company.
Seattle, Wash,
per No. PCr/US81/01313, § 371 Date Sep. 28, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 28, 1981
per Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 310,242
Int. a.3 H05F 3/00
U.S. a. 361-218 2 Qaims
4 380 038
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIVE MODULE
Maurice Roudeau, Residence de la Commanderie Brelevenez,
Lannion, France (22300)
Filed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,807
Claims priority, application France, May 6, 1980, 80 10098
Int. a.J H02H 9/06
U.S. a. 361-119 ,7 a,i„«
1. An overvoltage protective module comprising:
a body of insulating material having a recess;
an overvolUge protective element having first and second
terminals and positioned in said recess;
two conducting strips held in the bottom of said recess and
having free and flexible ends which are located one above
the other below said second terminal of said overvolUge
protective element; and
means for guiding said overvolUge protective element, said
guiding means including:
means secured to a face of said body and having a hole
crossed by said overvolUge protective element for
2
i
:[---r-ikrV^n^
f,r" ©
u
1. A system for conducting lightning induced electrical
currents to a meUllic grounding structure in an aircraft, said
system comprising:
a lightning diverter strip for conducting lightning induced
electrical currents along an aircraft outer surface portion;
a grounding terminal having an end portion including a
truncated V-notch shaped end surface;
said lightning diverter strip coupled across said aircraft
outer surface portion and through the center region of
said truncated V-notch shaped end surface to said metallic
grounding structure.
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
497
4^80,040
CAPAaXIVE SYSTEMS FOR TOUCH CONTROL
SWITCHING
Robert Posset, Mont-sur-Marchienne, Belgium, assignor to
BFG Glassgroup, Paris, France
Filed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,029
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 28, 1979,
7933729
Int. a.' HOIG 7/00
U.S. a. 361—280 9 Claims
' ■ •p.t-^i-' '. ,.y.i';L<— — *
25 21 II.
E^
]
1. A capacitive system for touch control switching compris-
ing a dielectric sheet having a first electrode on one side
thereof said first electrode constituting a touch pad, and on the
other side thereof in capacitive relation with the first electrode,
second and third electrodes which are mutually spaced, cha-
racterised in that of said second and third electrodes, one
constitutes an inner electrode and the other constitutes an
outer electrode and is shaped to surround at least the major
part of the periphery of said inner electrode and in that the
ratio of the area of said inner electrode to the area of said outer
electrode is greater than 0.25 to 1.
flex and thereby alter electrical characteristics of said
transducer in response to pressure changes, and
a flange means attached to said base substrate means and
extending laterally with respect to and beyond said top
surface peripheral portion and said peripheral portion of
said diaphragm means, whereby said flange means forms a
mounting ledge by which said transducer can be mounted
without applying stress to said diaphragm means;
housing means for providing a substantially closed package
for housing said pressure transducer within said housing
means, said housing means having a wall to which said
pressure transducer is to be mounted;
annular sealing means mounted on said flange means and
positioned laterally beyond the perimeter of said dia-
phragm means; and
means mounting said annular sealing means and said pressure
transducer to said wall, said annular sealing means con-
tacting an interior surface of said wall and said flange
means and sealing and forming an external cavity between
said interior surface of said wall and said diaphragm
means, said annular sealing means determining the spacing
between said interior surface of said wall and said dia-
phragm means,
said wall having a hole therethrough extending into said
internal cavity through which pressures are applied exte-
rior to said interior cavity to cause said diaphragm means
to flex and thereby alter electrical characteristics of said
pressure transducer in response to pressure changes, said
hole being substantially smaller than the lateral dimen-
sions of said diaphragm means,
wherein said top surface peripheral portion of said base
substrate means is planar, and
wherein said flange means is located below said plane of said
peripheral portion of said base substrate means top surface
and between said top and bottom surfaces of said base
substrate means.
4,380,041
CAPAOTOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER WITH
HOUSING
Roland K. Ho, McHenry, 111., assignor to Motorola Inc.,
Schaumburg, 111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 133,237, Mar. 24, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 945,284, Sep. 25, 1978. This
application Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,811
Int. a.5 HOIG 7/O0
U.S. a. 361—283 12 Claims
jj 59^ 39 IS ^4! 34
43 >9 40 i* /ff •» M 39
j ^.li ^ •< i \ ji \ 'j \ ■^ \ J^ \'
i,^ I I i • i V ■/■ I I ill I
jM» 4/
vs
4,380,042
PRINTED ORCUrr LEAD CARRIER TAPE
Thomas L. Angelucci, Sr., 89 Charlan Cir., Cberry Hill, N J.
08003, and Joseph L. Angelucci, 1948 LitUe Dr., Deptford,
N.J. 08096
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 235,341
Int. a.' HOIL 23/48, 29/32
U.S. a. 361—421 10 Claims
1. A pressure transducer assembly comprising:
a pressure transducer including,
base substrate means having a top surface with a peripheral
poriion and a bottom surface,
flexible diaphram means having a planar central portion and
a surrounding peripheral portion along the perimeter of
the diaphragm means,
mounting means for mounting said peripheral portion of said
diaphragm means to said base substrate top surface periph-
eral portion, said mounting means, said diaphragm planar
central portion and said substrate top surface generally
forming an internal cavity, said diaphragm central portion
being displaceable with respect to said top surface in
response to pressure changes, wherein said internal cavity
maintains a reference pressure and pressures applied exte-
rior to said internal cavity cause said diaphragm means to
1. A continuous flexible lead carrier tape having a plurality
of sequential lead patterns thereon, the improvement compris-
mg:
a flexible dielectric carrier based tape,
a flexible foil conductive pattern on said base tape,
an aperture in said tope adapted to receive a semiconductor
device and to be connected to said foil pattern,
said foil pattern having a plurality of finger-shaped leads
converging towards said aperture and extending as canti-
levere<^ leads in a common plane from said base tope over
the edge portion of said aperture in said base tape to
provide a plurality of inner electrical leads adapted to be
connected to terminals on said semiconductor device,
a removable lead stobilizing connecting frame,
498
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said connecting frame being formed from said foil conduc-
tive pattern,
said frame being located juxtaposed the end portion of said
cantilevered leads,
lead tear links forming a conductive foil connection between
said frame and said end portions of said cantilevered leads,
a frame tear link in said stabilizing connecting frame for
initially severing one side of said frame, and
said stabilizing frame being adapted to be removed from said
cantilevered leads by first severing said frame tear link
after said cantilevered leads are connected to said termi-
nals on said semiconductor device and subsequentially
severing each lead tear link one after the other so that a
uniform severing force is applied to each lead tear link.
4,380,043
APPARATUS FOR ILLUMINATING INSTRUMENT
POINTERS
Mashiro Takamatsu, Toyota; Makoto Nakao, Yokohama, and
Isao Ogawa, Sagamihara, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kalsha, Toyota and Jeco Co., Ltd.,
Kawasaki, both of, Japan
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,466
Int. a.5 GOID 11/28
U.S. a. 362-26 6 a^ims
1. An apparatus for illuminating instrument pointers com-
prising:
a dial board having a shaft hole;
pointer shafts extending from a pointer shaft drive unit to
pass through said shaft hole to the front of said dial board;
a light conductive member made of a transparent material
and disposed behind said dial board, said member compris-
ing a light receiving section and a light transmission sec-
tion;
a plurality of instrument pointers each made of a transparent
material and comprising a collar section and a pointer
section, each of said instrument pointers being mounted on
said pointer shaft such that light beam emitted from said
light transmission section is introduced through said collar
section; and
a light emitting member opposing said light receiving sec-
tion, for emitting light beam being transmitted through
said light conductive member to said collar sections and to
said pointer sections so as to illuminate said instrument
pointers;
wherein said instrument pointers include an hour hand and a
minute hand, the back surface of the collar section of said
hour hand facing said light transmission section, and the
back surface of the collar section of said minute hand
facing the front surface of the collar section of said hour
hand; and
wherein the front end surface of the collar section of said
hour hand is formed with a slant plane, said light beam
being transmitted through said slant plane to said collar of
the minute hand.
4,380 044
D.C. TO D.C. CONVERTER WFTH PLURAL FEEDBACK
LOOPS
Andrew F. Parr, West Croydon, England, assignor to Imperial
Chemical Industries PLC, London, England
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,638
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 4. 1979
7934430
Int. a.3 H02M 3/335
U.S. a. 363-21 8 Claims
1. A d.c. to d.c. converter for deriving from a relatively low
voltage battery supply a relatively high voltage d.c. output,
comprising:
a step up transformer having means defining primary and
secondary windings;
oscillator means for producing an output which oscillates
between first and second states;
semiconductor switching means controlled by said oscillator
output to switch on and off in response to said first and
second states, respectively, said switching means being
arranged to switch current flowing through the trans-
former primary in such a manner that upon switching on
of the switching means the current builds up progressively
and upon switching off of said switching means the cur-
rent changes abruptly in a manner to induce a relatively
high voltage pulse in said secondary winding and such
that there is formed in said primary winding a relatively
low flyback voltage pulse of a magnitude which is a func-
tion of the magnitude of said high voltage pulse;
output means coupled to the secondary winding and ar-
ranged to derive said high voltage d.c. output from high
voltage pulses induced in the secondary winding;
first control means for controlling the frequency of oscilla-
tion of the oscillator in dependence upon the magnitude of
said low flyback voltage pulse formed in the primary
winding;
second control means including
sensing means for sensing the magnitude of the current
building up in the primary;
means for causing the oscillator output to change from said
first to said second state when the current level sensed by
said sensing means exceeds a given level; and
third control means for sensing an abnormal load condition
on said high voltage d.c. output and controlling the oscil-
lation frequency of said oscillator means in accordance
therewith.
4,380 045
THYRISTOR CONVERTOR FAILURE DETECnON
DEVICE
Toshiaki Ishii, Ichinomiya, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,698
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 8, 1980, 55-172815
Int. a.3 H02H 7/125
U.S. a. 363-54 4 ctainw
1. A failure detection device for a converter circuit which
converts alternating current into an output direct current
through a plurality of rectifying elements connected between
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
499
an alternating current voltage source and a direct current load,
said failure detection device comprising:
waveform detector means for detecting the waveform of
said output direct current of said converter, and for pro-
ducing a waveform signal corresponding to said wave-
form;
harmonic component detector means connected to said
waveform detector means and responsive to said wave-
form signal for detecting a harmonic component of said
■ ^ T .
»~2o *-2b it-2c
, I ^(— C^J ^ — CD
n-3<j rvse n-3f
J~?(i ^-2e I-2I
neighboring processing element, a subunit C including means
for storing, inputting and outputting dato, a subunit D includ-
ing additional memory means, and a bidirectional bus, all of
said subunits being connected to said bidirectional bus for
providing communication between said subunits.
4 380 047
INTERFACE APPARATUS EMPLOYING A VIDEO TAPE
DRIVE TO BACK-UP A DISC DRIVE AND INCLUDING
ERROR DETECTING AND CORRECHNG aRCUITRY
Bruce T. Eisenhard, Cupertino, and Mark C. Hahn, San Jose,
both of Calif., assignors to Corvus Systems, Inc., San Jose,
Calif.
Filed Noy. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,903
Int. a.' G06F 3/06: GllB 5/008. 5/012
U.S. a. 364—200 18 Claims
w
• 1?
^11
W\ v»
-4^??-^ ■ 1)1'
MM,;: ...-
{
I
t : '
waveform, and for producing a harmonic component
signal corresponding to said harmonic component, said
harmonic component being a harmonic component hav-
ing a frequency which is characteristic of an occurrence
of a failure within said converter; and
amplitude detector means connected to said detector means
and responsive to said harmonic component signal for
detecting the amplitude of said harmonic component and
for producing a failure signal when said amplitude of said
harmonic component exceeds a predetermined level.
4,380,046
MASSIVELY PARALLEL PROCESSOR COMPUTER
Robert A. Frosch, Administrator of the National Aeronautics
and Space Administration, with respect to an invention of,
Lai-Wo Fung, Morristown, N.J.
Filed May 21, 1979, Ser. No. 41,143
Int. C\? G06F 15/16, 15/347
U.S. a. 364—200 1* Claims
COnriBL
M MM MT* aMUaCMCMT
UtHT
*-t ]-
•NTCRTACI MMWLC
1. An apparatus for processing multidimensional, digital
serial-by-bit data characterized by an ordered array of parallel
data streams, comprising an ordered array of interconnected
parallel processing elements corresponding to all or part of the
data streams, and a control unit connected to said processing
elements for causing said processing elements to process the
data streams in response to a single set of instructions, each of
said processing elements comprising a subunit A including
means for arithmetic, shifting and memory operations, a sub-
unit B including means for storing data, performing logical
operations and sliding the stored data to a similar subunit in a
1. An interface apparatus between a video tape recorder
(VTR) having a magnetic tape and a disc drive having a mag-
netic storage medium and a controller, said VTR for providing
on said tape memory back-up to said disc drive, said tape for
recording a video signal including a sync portion and a data
portion, said controller for receiving a sync signal, an error
status signal, and for generating a read/write signal; said inter-
face apparatus comprising:
a data bus for transferring data between said controller and
said interface apparatus;
means for generating a clock signal;
first means responsive to the video signal and operative to
separate the sync and data portions and to develop said
sync signal and a data signal therefrom when said control-
ler is generating a read signal;
a control state machine responsive to the read/write signal,
and the clock signal and for generating a start bit, a dau
clock and a shift signal in a predetermined sequence;
a shift register coupled to said first means and said control
state machine and being responsive to the data signal, said
data clock and said shift signal and operative to transform
data from said data signal applied in a serial manner
thereto into a parallel stream of daU and to apply said
parallel stream onto said data bus for transfer to the mag-
netic storage medium of the disc drive, when said control-
ler is generating a read signal;
said shift register also being responsive to the data clock and
shift signal and operative to transform daU from said
controller applied on said daU bus in a parallel manner
thereto into a serial stream of daU, when said controller is
generating a write signal;
second means responsive to the data signal and said daU
clock and operative to selectively develop said error
status signal when said controller is generating a read
signal, said error status signal being indicative of an error
in the video signal recorded on said tape;
said second means also responsive to the serial stream of data
from said shift register and for generating an error check-
ing signal, when said controller is generating a write
signal; and
logic means for receiving said serial stream of daU from said
500
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
shift register, said error checking signal, said start bit and
said clock signal and for generating a video signal for
recording on said tape.
4380 048
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Norimasa Kishi, and Tadashi Suzuki, both of Yokosuka, Japan,
assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Mar. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 134,986
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 3, 1979, 54-39351
Int. a.3 B60K 41/08; G06F 15/20
U.S. a. 364-424.1 u Qaims
after initiation of a braking stroke, said elevator car being
powered to initiate and sustain motion, and being coupled to a
stopping brake for stopping the motion of said car, said method
for braking comprising the steps of: actuating said brake to
initiate its braking stroke at an appropriate point in time, for
causing said car in motion to stop at said predetermined posi-
tion, and controlling said point in time for actuating said brake
by and in direct relation to conditioning signals being sensed,
4
I
, ,
POOC l*rT
1^
^ ■
^
-t
■\
MOGRM
DATA
.mj
-\
WMtm
CLOC*
•^
— '
LU Dl2
1. In a shift control system for an automatic transmission of
the type having a plurality of predetermined shift characteris-
tics and of the type for use in an engine powered vehicle,
wherein said shift control system includes,
engine load sensor means for producing a signal correspond-
ing to an engine load of a vehicle;
vehicle speed sensor means for producing a signal corre-
sponding to a vehicle speed;
and means for providing a signal indicative of the presently
selected one of the shift characteristics of the transmission;
the improvement comprising:
deriving means responsive to the signal from said engine
load sensor means for deriving an averaged value of the
engine load during a predetermined time interval for each
of a succession of said predetermined time intervals-
and responsive to the signal from said vehicle speed sensor
means for deriving an averaged value of the vehicle speed
dunng said predetermined time interval for each time
interval and for deriving an actual acceleration during
each time interval;
means responsive to the signals from said deriving means
indicative of the average value of the engine load and the
average value of the vehicle speed and a signal from said
signal indicator meana indicative of the presently selected
shift characteristic of the automatic transmission for deter-
mining a programmed acceleration as a function of said
averaged engine load, said averaged vehicle speed, and
the presently selected shift characteristic;
and means responsive to said so-determined programmed
acceleration and said actual acceleration for comparing
them to each other and discriminating whether or not
another one of the transmission shift characteristics is to
be selected.
co-generated, accumulated, compared and stored prior to each
braking stroke; conditioning said signals through changes of
forces acting on velocity of an unbraked elevator car, includ-
ing loaded weight of said car, motive power changes, direction
of travel, and mechanical function; and changes of forces
acting on said stopping brake performance including: brake
temperature, wear, direction of braking, mechanical friction,
brake-spring tension, velocity and load weight of said car being
stopped.
4,380,050
AIRCRAFT LOCATION AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
Jesse H. Tanner, 361 Taylor Ave. Northwest, Renton, Wash.
98055
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,042
Int. a.^ GOIS 3/02
U.S. a. 364-461 33 q^^
4,380,049
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STOPPING AN
ELEVATOR
Heimo Miikinen, Hyvinkiiji, Finland, assignor to Elevator
GmbH, Zug, Switzerland
FUed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,286
Claims priority, application Finland, Oct. 18, 1979, 793228
Int. a.J B66B 1/30: G06F 15/50
U.S. a. 364-426 ^q^^
1. A method for causing an elevator car in motion to stop at
a pre-determined position along a guided hoist-way, without
using feedback or programmed signals to the travel of said car
TO cttIhtcnsity orid • — fpMe THAiSineiil,
?"3
232
1. A system enabling a parent aircraft to determine the loca-
tion of a target aircraft, comprising:
first means aboard a parent aircraft and a target aircraft, each
for generating a synthetic azimuth function which is a
time-expanded version of a periodic azimuth function
describing the aircraft's azimuth as a time-delay with
respect to the occurrence of an azimuth reference signal;
second means aboard the parent aircraft and target aircraft,
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
501
each for generating a time expanded synthetic range func-
tion, which function describes the aircraft's range as a
time-delay with respect to the occurrence of a range
reference signal;
means for providing the target aircraft with a signal repre-
sentative of its azimuth with respect to a reference posi-
tion and for providing the target aircraft with a signal
representative of its range with respect to the reference
position;
transmitter means aboard the target aircraft for transmitting
an output signal at a time when the target aircraft's repre-
sentative azimuth and range signals correspond, respec-
tively, to the synthetic azimuth and synthetic range func-
tions; and
means aboard the parent aircraft for comparing the transmit-
ted output signal from the target aircraft to the synthetic
azimuth function and to the synthetic range function
generated by the first and second means aboard the parent
aircraft and providing an output signal to the operator of
the parent aircraft indicative of the location of the target
aircraft.
4,380,052
SINGLE TRANSMISSION BUS DATA NETWORK
EMPLOYING A DAISY-CHAINED BUS DATA
ASSIGNMENT CONTROL LINE WHICH CAN BYPASS
NON-OPERATING STATIONS
George T. Shima, Kamakura, Japan, assignor to Burroughs
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,531
Int. a.5 H04Q 9/QO
U.S. a. 364—900 9 Qaims
4,380,051
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL DIVIDER HAVING
NORMALIZING CIRCUITRY
Bruce A. Fette, Mesa, Ariz., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, 111.
Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,009
Int. a.5 G06F 7/54
U.S. a. 364—766 7 Qaims
[?. I II " 1 1|?. II 1 1 1 St 1 1 1 1 1 1 JULt 1 1 1 1 1 y£. 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
1. A high speed digital, non-restoring divider circuit for
obtaining a quotient from a multi-bit divisor and a multi-bit
dividend, said divider circuit comprising:
(a) a first register including a plurality of stages connected to
have the dividend stored therein;
(b) a second register including a plurality of stages con-
nected to have the divisor stored therein;
(c) add/substract means connected to said first and second
registers and having a control signal input for selectively,
in response to a control signal, adding one of the divisor
and a 2's complement of the divisor to the dividend to
produce a multi-bit sum, said add/substract means having
a summation output at which the sum is provided;
(d) comparing means connected to said first and second
registers for comparing a most significant bit in each of
said registers and having an output connected to the con-
trol signal input of said add/substract means for supplying
a control signal thereto in response to a predetermined
comparison of the most significant bits; and
(e) connecting means connecting said add/substract means
to said first register so that the multi-bit sum replaces the
dividend in a shifted orientation.
1. A network of stations for data transmissions therebe-
tween, said network comprising:
a single transmission bus;
a plurality of stations coupled to said bus;
a bus assignment control line coupled to each of said stations
in a serial manner to transmit a bus assignment control
pulse;
a plurality of preceding station non-operating alert lines,
each coupled between a preceding station and a succeed-
ing sution to alert said a succeeding sution that said a
preceding station has received said bus assignment control
pulse;
each of said stations including detection means to detect
when its preceding sution has received but not transmit-
ted a bus assignment control pulse after a time duration
sufficient to allow said preceding sution to have been
assigned to said transmission bus and to have completed its
transmission;
a request counter means disposed for counting to a second
given count in response to a signal requesting access to
said transmission bus and, if said each station does not
request access to said bus, to signal said pulse receiving
and transmitting means to transmit said bus assignment
control pulse to said next succeeding sUtion; and
initiate circuit means disposed for initiating an assignment
control pulse to be transmitted to another sUtion after
each said sution has completed transmission, said request
counter means resets said initiate circuit means when a
particular count is reached which is greater than said
second given count.
4J80 053
MEMORY ADDRESSING SYSTEM FOR SEQUENTIALLY
ACCESSING ALL MEMORY ADDRESSES IN A
MEMORY AREA
Hiroshi Takahashi, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,219
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 17, 1979, 54-132826
Int. a.5 G06F i/02
U.S. a. 364—900 3 Claims
1. A memory addressing system comprising:
memory means having at least one memory area that in-
cludes a plurality of addressable locations;
a keyboard including input keys being operable to designate
different ones of said plurality of addressable memory
locations, a plurality of said keys capable of being oper-
ated in at least one specific sequence to designate one said
memory area;
detecting means for detecting operation of said plurality of
said keys in said one specific sequence to designate said
502
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
one memory area and including means for generating an
output signal indicative of said detection; and
DIP
special access means for sequentially accessing all of said
addressable memory locations in said one area in response
to said output signal.
4,380,055
STATIC RAM MEMORY CELL
David N. Larson, Carrollton, Tex., assignor to Mostek Corpora-
tion, Carrollton, Tex.
per No. PCr/US80/01725, § 371 Date Dec. 24, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 24, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/02277, PCT Pub
Date Jul. 8, 1982
PCT Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 278,907
Int. a.3 GllC 7/06
U.S. a. 365-154 9ci^„s
8iT ENABLE LINE
WRITE l/REAO
4,380,054
METHOD AND APPARATUS ASSOCIATED WITH A
MICROCOMPUTER SYSTEM FOR INDICATING
NEXTIN-TIME PARAMETERS, AND FOR
CONTROLLABLY GENERATING A POSITIONAL CODE
FOR A ROLLALONG SWITCH ASSOCIATED WITH A
SEISMIC SOURCE-DETECrOR ARRAY OF AN
EXPLORATION SYSTEM
H. T. Carruth, Jr., Anaheim, Calif., assignor to Chevron Re-
search Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Jul. 16, 1980, Ser, No. 170,313
Int. C\} G06F 15/20: GOIV 1/22
U.S. a. 364-900 9 a^j^.
^.
24
1. Method of controllably providing a next-in-time posi-
tional code for a rollalong switch of a digital field system of an
exploration system that includes a source-detector array posi-
tioned along a line of survey for generating and collecting
seismic data associated with earth formation underlying said
array, said rollalong switch being employed to efficiently
connect (and disconnect) different but contiguous sets of de-
tectors of said array from amid a plurality of detectors, along
said line of survey, said next-in-time positional code being
simultaneously generated along with additional next-in-time
array parameters associated with said exploration system, by a
microcomputer system that includes an MPU memory units
and display and switch means interconnected to each other and
to said digital field system via a system bus, comprising:
(a) on being commanded by a roll switch update signal,
esublishing in digital format said next-in-time positional
code for said rollalong switch;
(b) transmitting said code to said rollalong switch while
simultaneously indicating to a human operator via at least
one of audio and visual signals, that transmission of said
next-in-time code is occurring;
(c) terminating transmission of said code when a correct
rollalong switch position is attained.
5. A memory cell for storing data comprising:
a cell voltage supply source;
a data signal line for receiving control signals;
a bit signal line for receiving control signals;
first and second control lines for receiving control signals;
first transistor means having first and second terminals and a
control terminal, said first terminal connected to said data
signal line and said control terminal connected to said bit
signal line, such that said first transistor means is activated
by a first control signal received by said bit signal line;
second transistor means having first and second terminals
and a control terminal, said first terminal being connected
to said second terminal of said first transistor means and
said control terminal being connected to said first control
line, such that said second transistor means is activated by
a second control signal received by said first control line;
third transistor means having first and second terminals and
a control terminal, said first terminal being connected to
said second terminal of said first transistor means and said
control terminal being connected to said second control
line, such that said third transistor means is activated by a
third control signal received by said second control line;
first inverter means connected to said cell voltage supply
source and having input and output terminals, said input
terminal being connected to said second terminal of said
second transistor means to form a first node and said
output terminal being connected to said second terminal
of said third transistor means to form a second node;
second inverter means connected to said cell voltage supply
source and having input and output terminals, said input
terminal being connected to said second node and said
output terminal being connected to said first node; and
said first, second and third transistor means being operable,
such that data is stored in the memory cell by activation of
said first transistor means and one of said second or third
transistor means, and data is read from the memory cell by
activation of said first transistor means and said third
transistor means.
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
903
4,380,056
CHARGE COUPLED DEVICE FOCAL PLANE WITH
SERIAL REGISTER HAVING INTERDIGITATED
ELECTRODES
William J. Parrish, Santa Barbara, and Christopher L. Fletcher,
Cardiff, both of Calif., assignors to Hughes Aircraft Company,
Culver City, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 83,426, Oct. 10, 1981, abandoned. This
application Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,415
Int. a.' GllC 13/04, 11/42
U.S. a. 365—183 33 Qaims
4,380,057
ELECTRICALLY ALTERABLE DOUBLE DENSE
MEMORY
Harish N. Kotecha, Essex Junction; Wendell P. Noble, Jr.,
Milton, and Francis W. Wiedman, III, Stowe, all of Vt., as-
signors to International Business Machines Corporation,
Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,851
Int. C\? GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 365—185 15 Qaims
1. A storage system comprising;
a field effect transistor having first and second spaced apart
diffusion regions defining a channel region having first
and second ends and a control gate disposed over said
channel region and extending from said first diffusion
region to said second diffusion region,
first and second charge trapping regions disposed over the
first and second ends, respectively, of said channel region
and between iaid control gate and said first and second
diffusion regions,
means for applying control pulses to said control gate and to
said first and second diffusion regions for selectively con-
trolling charge on said first and second charge trapping
regions, and
means for sensing current fiow between said first and second
diffusion regions.
1. A charge coupled device (CCD) charge flow channel
formed on a semiconductive substrate comprising:
first and second electrodes overlying said channel extending
side-by-side in a first direction parallel to said channel and
separated from one anotlier by an insulating gap therebe-
tween;
a first plurality of channel stop means in said substrate ex-
tending in a second direction transverse to said first direc-
tion for blocking charge fiow in said first direction under
said first electrode at a first plurality of spaced apart loca-
tions offset in said first direction from one another;
a second plurality of channel stop means extending in said
second direction for blocking charge flow in said first
direction under said second electrode at a second plurality
of spaced apart locations offset in said first direction from
one another and spaced apart in said first direction from
said first plurality of spaced apart locations;
first electrode means for controlling charge transfer in said
channel spanning said insulating gap between alternate
pairs of adjacent ones of said first and second channel stop
means;
a first conductor connected to said first electrode means;
second electrode means for controlling charge transfer in
said channel spanning said insulating gap between the
remaining pairs of adjacent ones of said first and second
channel stop means;
a second conductor connected to to said second electrode
means; and
means for applying clock signals to said electrodes and
said conductors.
4,380,058
STAGE TRACER
Katsuro Wakai, Hadano, Japan, assignor to HiUchi, Ltd., To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,900
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 6, 1980, 55-12516
Int. a.3 GllC 7/00
U.S. a. 365—244 2 Qaims
26
2« I,
22_ jir^v
TRACING
?7 -|_
]-
'%
■^:=^A
29
COMMOh
-— COWBO. 30
1. A stage tracer comprising:
a plurality of tracing units which are physically independent
of one another, each tracing lyiit including a memory unit
having terminals for receiving signals to be observed and
a read/write control logic unit for controlling the writing
and reading of data into and out of said memory unit;
a common control unit provided physically independent of
504
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
said tracing units and connected electrically with said
tracing units through a signal line group, to supply the
control signal desired to said read/write control logic
units of said tracing units through said signal line group;
and
a data bus for connecting the outputs of said tracing units
with said common control unit, wherein said read/write
control logic units cause said signals to be observed to be
written in the corresponding memory units and also cause
the contents of said memory units to be sequentially read
onto said data bus through the output terminals of the
corresponding tracing units in response to said control
signals from said common control unit.
imaginary part with corresponding samples of the inverse
of said second imaginary part of the f-k array of said
second seismograms. and
0) transforming said filtered first real and first imaginary
parts into third seismograms representing an enhanced
representation of the earth's formation with suppressed
multiple reflections as a function of time and distance
along said line of exploration.
4,380,059
F-K FILTERING OF MULTIPLE REFLECTIONS FROM A
SEISMIC SECTION
William H. Ruehle, Duncanville, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N,Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 179,748, Aug. 20, 1980,
abandoned. This application Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,881
Int. CI.' GOIV 1/32. 1/36
U.S. CI. 367-46 2 Claims
4,380,060
DEVICE FOR PUSH-PULL TRANSMISSION
Wilhelm Wilhelm, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,235
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 27,
1979, 2939252; Oct. 3, 1979, 2940140
Int. CI.3 H04J 15/00
U.S. CI. 370—5 5 Qaims
1 vm
I (.
NMO WITH
SETS r
^^-
I
I
v-^
FK
1__ -
TMC
VANIAMT
TIME SMrFT
TRANSFORM TRANSFORM
'.RC**.. (IMAGINARY)
.^-^ ' — —r
lANSFOHM^^'" TRMISfODM
I I
mvCRSE
UlTE" I riLTEH
, ' — r-
r — J
1. A method of filtering multiple refiections from seismo-
grams representing the earth's formations comprising:
(a) generating first seismograms representing the amplitude
of seismic primary and multiple reflections as a function of
time and distance along a line of exploration;
(b) transforming said first seismograms into an f-k array of
first real and first imaginary parts representing amplitude
as a function of frequency and wave number;
(c) normal moveout correcting said first seismograms with
the apparent velocity of said multiple refiections to align
said multiple reflections;
(d) stacking said normal moveout corrected first seismo-
grams having aligned multiple reflections,
(e) inverse normal moveout correcting said stacked first
seismograms to produce second seismograms representing
multiple reflections,
(0 transforming said second seismograms with aligned multi-
ple reflections into an f-k array of second real and second
imaginary parts,
(g) determining the inverse of said second real and second
imaginary parts of the f-k array of said second seismo-
grams,
(h) filtering said first real part of the f-k array of said first
seismograms by weighting all samples of said first real part
with corresponding samples of the inverse of said second
real part of the f-k array of said second seismograms,
(i) filtering said first imaginary part of the f-k array of said
first seismograms by weighting all samples of said first
El of
E7
*B32 *g21
SCN3 :'■
1
DER ht'WOPK
1 A system for push-pull transmission of an item of binary
information, comprising: at least one line group having ng3
lines; s push-pull transHiitters and s push-pull receivers con-
nected to the lines; a t-ansmitting-end coder means for forming
from k input signals to he transmitted s^(n- 1) n/2 intermedi-
ate control signals for the control of the s push-pull transmit-
ters whose outputs are connected in s different combinations to
the n lines, where the number k of input signals is a maximum
integer <log2 (n?); inputs of the s push-pull receivers being
connected to the n lines; and a receiving-end coder means for
forming k output signals which are identical to the k input
signals from s iryermediate signals emitted from the s push-pull
receivers.
4,380,061
LOOP TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WITH IMPROVED
BYPASS ROUTING ARRANGEMENT
Kinji Mori, Sagamihara; Hirokazu Ibara, Macbida, and Hiroshi
Matsumaru, Katsuta, ail of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,782
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 11, 1980, 55-93924
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/00; H04J 3/14
U.S. a. 370-16 12 Claims
1. A loop transmission system comprising:
first and second loop-shaped transmission routes enabled to
transmit a message in first and second directions, respec-
tively;
a plurality of terminal units for communications through said
first and second transmission routes;
a plurality of first transmission control units connected be-
tween said first transmission route and corresponding termi-
nal units, respectively, for controlling the transmissions of
the message on said first transmission route;
a plurality of second transmission control units connected
between said second transmission route and corresponding
terminal units, wherein each of said second transmission
control units is coupled to mate with a corresponding one of
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
505
said first transmission control units and is connected with the
same corresponding terminal unit to which said correspond-
ing first transmission control unit is connected, said second
transmission control units controlling the transmission of the
message on said second transmission route; and
a plurality of bypass routes enabled to transmit the message in
two ways and respectively connecting said first and second
transmission control units mating with each other,
said message containing, in addition to data to be transferred, a
sending address, which is equal to the address of the trans-
mission control unit having transmitted said message, and a
bypass code capable of taking a first or second value,
—each of said first and second transmission control units includ-
ing: means for sending the message to said bypass routes;
means for receiving the message from said bypass routes;
and means for storing andjdetermining whether a minor loop
is operating abnormally, said minor loop being comprised of
said transmission control unit itself, a corresponding trans-
mission control unit mated to said transmission control unit
itself and located on a different transmission route, a bypass
route for connecting said transmission control unit itself and
the corresponding transmission control unit on a different
path, a transmission control unit adjacent to said transmis-
received on a two wire line in the same frequency band, the
central unit comprising:
means for transmitting a signal including means for modulat-
ing a carrier signal with an input signal to produce a
transmit signal in a given frequency band;
means for receiving a signal in the same frequency band as
the transmit signal, including means for demodulating the
received signal, the received signal being substantially in
quadrature with the transmit signal; and
MASTER
osautTOR I
S.nl%l»90°l
^^^^^IH^I
WISE I
jCCTtTIKXI
DCiKX-
UL«IO«
_V'irl;i-<-g«-»<r'
s.M«jt.:j.;».9o'''
sion control unit itself along the same transmission path, a
transmission control unit corresponding to said adjacent
transmission control unit and lying m the different transmis-
sion route, and a bypass route for connecting adjacent trans-
mission unit and its corresponding transmission control unit;
and
means for controlling the sending process of the message re-
ceived at each of said first and second transmission control
units so that, when said storing means indicates that said
minor loop is abnormal in a case where said message is
received from the corresponding loop-shaped transmission
route to which said transmission control unit itself is cou-
pled, said message having its bypass code corrected is fed
out of said control unit such that said message having its
bypass code corrected to the first value is fed out to the
corresponding loop-shaped transmission route if the sending
address of the message received is equal to the address of its
mating transmission control unit and if said bypass code
takes said second value, and such that said message is fed out
to the corresponding bypass route if the sending address of
the message received is equal to the address of its mating
transmission control unit and if said bypass code takes said
first value.
__ 4,380,062
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PROVIDING
SIMULTANEOUS T>\'0-WAY TRANSMISSION
Richard L. Stuart, Columbia, Md., and Fred C. Killmeyer, Palm
Bay, Fla., assignors to Rixon, Inc., Silver Spring, Md.
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,422
Int. a.3 H04B 1/56
U.S. a. 370—20 17 Qaims
6. A central transmit-receive unit for a communication sys-
tem which enables signals to be simultaneously transmitted and
means for automatically adjusting the phase of the received
signal to compensate for delays in the communication
system, the phase adjusting means including a variable
phase network connected to the transmitter and receiver
means, and means for comparing the phase of the received
signal with a reference signal to control the phase adjust-
ment of the variable phase network whereby the received
signal and transmit signal are maintained in quadrature.
4,380,063
FLOW CONTROL MECHANISM FOR BLOCK
SWITCHING NODES
Philippe A. Janson, Wiidensfril; Hans R. Miiller, Langnau, and
Ernst H. Rothauser, Reichenburg, all of Switzerland, assign-
ors to International Business Machines Corp., Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,143
Qaims priority, application European Pat. Off., Jun. 19, 1980,
80/103407.5
Int. C\? H04J 3/00: G06F 15/16
U.S. a. 370—60 8 Oaims
117 » i« J
1. In a communication network including a plurality of block
switching nodes interconnected by links (22, 26) with a receive
buffer (30) being provided for each incoming link in each node,
a flow control mechanism in each node characterized by:
means (42) for mainUining a token indication at the sending
end of each link, reflecting available buffer capacity in the
receive buffer at the receiving end of said link in the next
node,
means (28, 68) for updating said token indication when a data
block is transmitted over the respective link, and also when
a token updating signal is received from the next node,
means (46, 48, 56, 58, 60, 70, 72, 74) for looking ahead across
the node when a data block is to be dispatched from a re-
506
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
ceive buffer, to the token indication means of the appropri-
ate outgoing link, and means (38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 62, 66, 68, 77)
to cause transfer of said data block through the node and
over the Imk to the next node in response to the current state
of the token mdication, and
means (24, 34) for transmitting a token updating signal to the
token indication means at the respective link in the previous
node when a data block is dispatched from a receive buffer
(FIG 6).
4,380,064
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A
TIMEDIVISION SWITCHING SYSTEM
Hiroshi Ishikawa, Yokohama; Takuhito Kojima, Yamato, and
Fiji Minamitani, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu
Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,569
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 17, 1979, 54-134484
Int. CI.' H04Q 11/04
L.S. CI. 370-63 ,7 claims
said plurality of devices requests service by responding to
said receive or transmit channel number;
said polling means including:
counter/register means for generating a first sequence of
channel numbers during an initialization operation;
first multiplexer means in a first state coupled to said
counter/register means for receiving each of said first
sequence of channel numbers;
first in-first out (FIFO) means coupled for storing each of
said first sequence of channel numbers;
' M^ ';*iTr»
O'GifAi. PtD
SWITCH -f":..
SPICE ZH<'Cn
10 JMWOI
SPMB. OHWi
to ■ DMPXl
TCJ. ' ^. /
iwt :*iKM rs,,
SPMFtW
iMWm m TSim
I .--fMEMOPr
•t • •"•S' ■' "
-S , tii ' MSMi MSM
1 6T8' -V I ' '
SPMBrr
DPSm
'O.TSjm DMPKrr
\ I TSMm_jJHWom
'fll:
tOI*im
■r.ui>iv lOTf '!■"
iCOMIMiClIiOIS W(S'Srt« J
I I
CTR j- CMAWifi COUNTER
6. A signal control system comprising:
a tone signal generator for generating a continuous tone
signal;
a time-division speech network, having an input operatively
connected to said tone signal generator and having an
output, for connecting said tone signal generator to the
output of said time-division speech network;
attenuation means, operatively connected to the output of
said time division speech network, for varying the attenu-
ation of the continuous tone signal; and
a time switch, operatively connected to said attenuation
means, for storing the output of said attenuation means.
said FIFO means being coupled to said counter/register
means for recirculating said first sequence of channel
numbers during a polling operation, said plurality of
devices being coupled to said counter/register means
and responsive to said recirculating receive and trans-
mit channel numbers for generating said request signal
when one of said plurality of channel numbers request-
ing service receives a preassigned channel number of
said first sequence of channel numbers.
4,380,065
COMMUNICATION MULTIPLEXER VARIABLE
PRIORITY SCHEME
Allen C. Hirtle, and Gary J. Goss, both of Acton, Mass., assign-
ors to Honeywell Information Systems Inc., Waltham, Mass.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,629
Int. C\? H04J 3/02
U.S. a. 370-96 8 Qaims
1. A data processing system for transferring data bytes com-
prising:
a system bus;
a main memory coupled to said system bus for storing said
data bytes;
a communication multiplexer coupled to said system bus for
transferring said data bytes between said main memory
and a plurality of devices, each device being enabled for
operation in a receive and a transmit mode respectively in
response to receive and transmit channel numbers from
said communication multiplexer;
said communication multiplexer including polling means for
sending a predetermined sequence of said receive channel
numbers and said transmit channel numbers to said plural-
ity of devices and receiving a request signal when one of
4,380,066
DEFECT TOLERANT MEMORY
David H. Spencer, Lebanon; Marvin E. Steiner, East Brunswick,
both of N,J., and Donald H. Lang, FranklinSquare, N.Y.,
assignors to Burroughs Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 212,772
Int. a.J G06F 11/20: GllC 29/00
U.S. a. 371-10 12 Qaims
-,,
I
19
AOW'S...
10 '
V,'D»7,
BllLOIW.CIIWflllt
n«ABiE ' |i
irpoTiittJi
iMIA WlfUI
1. A defect tolerant memory including a multi-chip main
memory receiving data inputs and address commands to read
and write data, said defect tolerant memory further compris-
ing:
a redundant memory receiving said data inputs and address
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
507
commands in parallel with said main memory to read,
write and store data redundant to that contained in defec-
tive cells of said main memory, said redundant memory
having multiple memory levels with each memory level
having similar addresses, each similar address being repre-
sentative of a segment of main memory, each said segment
of main memory capable of containing multiple defects,
the redundant data for each of said several defects being
stored in a similar address of a different one of said mem-
ory levels, said redundant memory providing redundant
data to addressed defective data as an output;
a mask memory receiving said address commands in parallel
with said main memory and redundant memory for stor-
ing the sub-addresses of defective cells of said main mem-
ory, said mask memory made up of multiple bit-mask
memories each cooperating with a different one of said
redunant memory levels, each said bit-mask memory stor-
ing the sub-addresses of defective cells for a different
redundant memory level, each bit-mask memory provid-
ing an enabling signal to its respective redundant memory
level when a defective cell is addressed in the bit-mask
memory, each said bit-mask memory having multiple
sub-memory units, each said sub-memory unit having
addresses each representative of a segment of main mem-
ory, each said address storing a word indicative of the
location of a defective cell in the respective segment of
said main memory, said multiple sub-memory units storing
multiple addresses if multiple defects are found in a re-
spective segment of main memory, said mask memory
providing as an output an indication that a defective bit in
main memory has been addressed.
measuring the error rate of each path over a predetermined
number of path usages;
setting a threshold of error-rate acceptability for said paths
in accordance with said assigned criticalness, the greater
the criticalness, the greater the threshold;
comparing said measured error rates with said thresholds,
respectively, for said paths; and
when said measured error rate exceeds said threshold for a
given path, reconfiguring said network to eliminate said
path therefrom.
4,380,068
TEST UNIT FOR A HIGH-RATE MULTITRACK DIGITAL
RECORDER
Tristan de Couasnon, Paris, France, assignor to Thomson-CSF,
Paris, France
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,025
Qaims priority, application France, Jan. 22, 1980, 80 01326
Int. a.3 GOIR 31/28
U.S. a. 371—24 7 Qaims
4,380,067
ERROR CONTROL IN A HIERARCHICAL SYSTEM
Brent C. Beardsley, Tucson, and Allen C. Brailey, Pima, both of
Ariz., assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,356
Int. a. J G06F 11/20
U.S. a. 371—11 10 Qaims
--r^ ^
1. The method of operating a multilevel communication
network having first and second levels each with a plurality of
paths, a plurality of units selectively interconnecting said levels
such that one path in each level is coupled via a unit to create
a signal transfer path through said levels and a one of said units,
the machine-executed steps of:
assigning a criticalness for successful network operation to
each path in both said levels, said criticalness being differ-
ent in such levels;
Ci ^
1. A test unit for a high-rate multitrack digital recorder, said
unit having a multiple input and output and comprising:
a first generator for producing a sequence of binary numbers
and connected to said multiple output for transmitting
data to the recorder to be tested;
a data storage means connected to said multiple input of said
test unit for storing the data reproduced by the tested
recorder;
a second generator for producing the same sequence of
binary numbers;
means for comparing the reproduced sequence with the
emitted sequence, said comparing means being connected
to the output of the storage means to the output of the
second generator;
an error analysis means connected to the output of the com-
parison means for counting the errors introduced by the
recorder to be tested and detected by the comparing
means; and
said error analysis means including a first counter for count-
ing detected errors and means for locating detected errors,
said error locating means including a second counter for
counting reproduced binary numbers and delivering at
each instant the address of the binary number analyzed in
the sequence and a storage memory means connected to
said comparing means and to said second counter and
having a control input for causing storage of addresses of
binary numbers in which errors arc detected and the
position of the detected errors in each erroneous number.
4380 069
DIGITAL ERROR DETECTION USING BRACKETING
Glenn A. Reitmeier, 3 Metekiink Dr., Trenton, N.J. 08638, and
Frank J. Marlowe, 20 Academy St., Kingrton, N J. 08528
FUed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,796
Int. Q.' G06F 11/12
U.S. Q. 371—31 W CI**™
2. An apparatus for handling data code words, said appara-
tus comprising detecting means for detecting erroneous code
words, estimating means coupled to said detecting means for
508
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
estimating replacement ccxie words both for said detected
erroneous code words and for at least some code words within
a selected interval of said erroneous words, and replacing
means coupled to said detecting means and said estimating
.302 3W VIDEO
'^ S
,318
OECOOdI
^
'/ docmmI
.. WEO OUT
means for replacing said erroneous code word and said code
words within said selected interval by said estimated code
words respectively, whereby most undetected errors are thus
concealed.
4,380,071
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING
ERRORS IN PCM SIGNAL PROCESSING APPARATUS
Kentarou Odaka, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Sony Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,395
Int. a.3 G06F 11/10
U.S. a. 371-^ 21 Qaims
51
■W/i
SPi
5C
CIIICH.
.1/ U
/D
JIfi
iW
SKm
UciJU<K7f« —
'31
Jl
Jfl
tKMK
fOTm
33
"-rr
5/
F(
4,380,070
AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT IDENTinER
William G. Steiner, Marietta, Ga., assignor to Lockheed Corpo-
ration, Burbank, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 96,030, Nov. 20, 1979, Pat. No.
4,291,404. This application Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,686
Int. a.3 G06F 11/22
U.S. a. 371-20 5 Qaims
1. Apparatus for identifying a circuit having a known pin
configuration and an unknown transfer characteristic among
said pin configuration comprising:
a socket comprising a plurality of receptacles for holding said
pin configuration;
bidirectional port means electrically connected to said socket,
said bidirectional port means being selectively operable for
providing input drive, output loading, and power supply
conditions among said plurality of receptacles;
storage means for storing data corresponding to a plurality of
input and output parameters for a plurality of circuits of
known identity;
operating means connected to said storage means and respon-
sive to said data for operating said bidirectional port means
to provide said input drive, said output loading, and said
power supply conditions corresponding to said input and
output parameters sequentially for each of said plurality of
circuits of known identity; and
testing means to control said operating means and to provide
an identity signal in response to detection of said data corre-
sponding to said input and said output parameters for one of
said plurality of circuits of known identity.
1. A method of preventing errors in a PCM error-correction
decoder of the type supplied with successive transmission
blocks, each comprised of time-interleaved PCM, error-cor-
rection and error detection words, wherein said transmission
blocks are supplied from one data source and then from a
different data source to produce an error interval determined
by the transition period from said one source to said different
source, said method comprising the steps of detecting if a
supplied transmission block contains an error; identifying as
being erroneous each of the time-interleaved words included in
the supplied transmission block which has been detected as
containing an error, time de-interleaving each supplied trans-
mission block to recover a de-interleaved block comprised of
de-interleaved PCM and error-correction words; correcting an
erroneous PCM word in said de-interieaved block as a function
of the remaining non-erroneous PCM and error-correction
words in that de-interieaved block; and inhibiting the correc-
tion of a PCM word in a de-interieaved block if said block
contains at least one word derived from said one data source
and another word derived from said different data source.
4,380,072
XUV LASER AND METHOD
Stephen E. Harris, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to Stanford Uni-
versity, Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,781
Int. a.3 HOIS 3/094
U.S. a. 372—5 12 Qaims
ll?l^o*.'?,^
1. The method of generating XUV radiation which com-
prises exciting alkali metal atoms or ions of the isoelectronic
sequence to a storage level which is metastable against both
autoionization and radiation, pumping by irradiating with a
laser the excited atoms to a higher level which is metastable
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
509
against autoionization but is strongly radiatively allowed to
lase to a lower level other than ground and simultaneously
emptying said lower level, both radiatively and by photoion-
ization into the continua or to a level near enough to the con-
tinua, that electrons complete the emptying process.
4,380,073
INJECTION CONTROL OF AN ELECTRO-OPTICALLY
Q-SWITCHED CAVITY-DUMPED LASER
Robert J. Wayne, Glastonbury, Conn., assignor to United Tech-
nologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,812
Int. aj HOIS 3/10. 3/U
U.S. a. 372— 12 SOaims
r
HIGH VOLTAGE
PIJLSr
GENLRATOB
PLATt
COjMASTIP
OSCILLATOR
/.'
1. An apparatus for generating pulses of optical radiation
comprising:
an electrically pumped gaseous optical gain midium;
electrical pumping means for building a population inversion
within said gam medium;
a pair of reflective elements bracketing said gain medium
and defining an optical cavity having an optic axis there-
through;
a polarization coupling means positioned along said optic
axis intermediate said gain medium and one of said reflec-
tive elements and oriented at a predetermined angle with
respect to said optic axis, whereby said coupling means
couples out of said cavity radiation of a first linear polar-
ization and passes radiation of a second polarization or-
thogonal to said first polarization;
phase retardation means and electro-optical polarization
modulation means disposed intermediate said polarization
coupling means and said one of said reflective elements;
means for applying an electrical pulse of predetermined
voltage, rise time, duration and fall time to said polariza-
tion modulation means; and
continuous wave laser means for injecting a control beam of
optical radiation into said optical cavity, whereby said
cavity is Q switched by said polarization modulation
means to build up intracavity electromagnetic radiation
during said rise time and duration, which radiation is
coupled out of said cavity by said polarization coupling
means during said fall time.
4,380,074
INTEGRATED aRCUIT LASER AND
ELECTRO-OPTICAL AMPLIHER
Peter J. Wakh, 40 St. Joseph Dr., Stirling, N.J. 07980
Filed Oct. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 80,526
Int. a.' HOIS 3/19
U.S. a. 372—43 10 Claims
1. An opto-electronic device capable of being integrated on
a substrate capable of having electronic integrated circuits
fabricated thereon, said device being particularly suited for use
as a source of laser energy radiation, comprising:
a first electrically conductive sheet;
a film of amorphous semiconductor material mounted in
contact with said first electrically conductive sheet inter-
mediate said sheet and said substrate, said first electrically
conductive sheet and said substrate including means for
applying an electrical signal therebetween;
a second electrically conductive sheet mounted on said
substrate so that said film of amorphous semiconductor
material is sandwiched between said first and second
conductive sheets; and
i§_r7l
one of said electrically conductive sheets being made of a
material which partially reflects and is partially transpar-
ent to laser radiation, the other electrically conductive
sheet being made of a material which substantially entirely
reflects laser radiation, said radiation being emitted from
said device through said one conductive sheet upon the
application of an electrical signal between said conductive
sheets
4,380,075
MODE STABLE INJECTION LASER DIODE
Louis B. Allen, Jr., Florissant, and Herbert G. Koenig, Jr., St.
Charles, both of Mo., assignors to McDonnell Douglas Corpo-
ration, Long Beach, Calif.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,271
Int. CI.' HOIS 3/19
U.S. a. 372—44 10 Qaims
1. A semiconductor injection laser system comprising an
input injection laser diode optically connected to an output
injection laser diode wherein the central axes of the input diode
and the output diode are substantially parallel and the plane of
the junction of the input diode is rotated relative to the plane
of the junction of the output diode at an angle sufficient to
achieve mode stability in the laser output of the system.
4,380,076
APPARATUS FOR FOUR SIDE TRANSVERSE
IRRADIATION OF A REGION
Donald S. Betbune, Mt. Kisco, N.Y., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,599
Int. a.5 HOIS 3/091
U.S. a. 372—54 9 Qaiins
1. Apparatus for transversely irradiating a region equally
from four directions using a single incident beam of substan-
tially collimated radiation, comprising:
perpendicular reflective planes having a common edge and
defining a comer region therebetween, said comer region
being the region defined by all straight lines extending
from one of said reflective planes to the other; and
means defining an irradiated region entirely within said
comer region, said irradiated region being suitably posi-
510
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
tioned within said corner region such that said irradiated
region does not intercept any ray of incident radiation
from striking said common edge, said irradiated region
being directly irradiated from a first direction by incident
radiation, said irradiated region also being simultaneously
indirectly irradiated from a second direction by incident
radiation reflected from one of said planes, said irradiated
•N V ^
^H
4,380,077
SEGMENTED CERAMIC BORE LASER
William H. McMahan, Salt Lake City, Utah, assignor to Ameri-
can Laser Corporation, Salt Lake City, Utah
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,543
Int. a.3 HOIS 3/Oi
U.S. a. 372-62 1 Claim
21-) 11-7 12^ 13^ 14^ IS.
22n
1. A cylindrical-shaped laser tube formed of a plurality of
segments secured together and having a discharge bore and gas
bypass bores formed through the segments, comprising:
(a) a plurality of ceramic, cylindrical central segments with
opposed end surfaces, each segment having a central
aperture comprising a portion of the tube discharge bore
and other apertures parallel to said central aperture and
spaced radially outward therefrom and comprising por-
tions of the tube gas bypass bores, each end surface having
a first circular depression larger than, concentric with,
and extending to and communicating with one end of said
portion of said discharge bore and being defined by a
surrounding first annular boss, a second annular depres-
sion radially spaced from said first circular depression and
defined by said first annular boss and a second annular
boss extending inwardly from the outer peripheral surface
of said segment, one end of each said portion of said gas
bypass bores extending to and terminating in said second
annular depression with the width thereof being greater
than the diameter of said gas bypass bores;
(b) a pair of end segments each having opposed outer and
inner surfaces, a central aperture comprising a further
portion of the tube discharge bore and other apertures
parallel to said end segment central aperture and spaced
radially outward therefrom and comprising further por-
tions of the tube gas bypass bores, each said end segment
outer surface being flat and surrounding a tapered end
portion of said tube discharge bore and each said inner
surface of each said end segment having the same forma-
tion as and mating that of each said central segment end
surface; and
(c) metalizing means integrally joining the respective said
segment faces together in sealing relation with said central
segments being mated and disposed between said end
segments and with the respective said discharge bore and
gas bypass bore portions in the segments aligned, said tube
discharge bore being thereby sealed off from said bypass
gas bores and interrupted by first air gaps disposed at
intervals along its length established by said segment first
circular depressions and being effective to prevent the
establishment of a continuously electrically conductive
surface layer along the length of the said laser discharge
bore and said bypass gas bores being interrupted by sec-
ond air gaps spaced radially outward from said first air
gaps and disposed at intervals along their length estab-
lished by said second annular depressions.
region also being simultaneously indirectly irradiated
from a third direction opposite said second direction by
incident radiation reflected from the other one of said
planes, and said irradiated region being also simulta-
neously indirectly irradiated from a fourth direction oppo-
site said first direction by incident radiation reflected from
both of said planes.
4,380,078
SEGMENTED HOLLOW CATHODE LASER WITH SPLIT
ANODE
Shing C. Wang, Arcadia, and Randolph W. Hamerdinger, Glen-
dora, both of Calif., assignors to Xerox Corporation, Stam-
ford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 948,077, Oct. 2, 1978, Pat. No.
4,287,484. This application Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,314
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 10,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.' HOIS i/08
U.S. a. 372—62 10 Claims
1. A gas laser including an elongated envelope (11) contain-
ing a gaseous medium, hollow coaxial anode and cathode
means (16,18) for connection to a voltage supply to produce an
electrical discharge in the gaseous medium, and reflector
means (60, 62) at or near the ends of the envelope, character-
ized in that the cathode means (18) comprises at least two
separate cathodes and the anode means comprises at least two
short cylindrical anodes centrally located between said sepa-
rate cathodes.
4,380,079
GAS LASER PREIONIZATION DEVICE
David E. Cohn and Eugene E. Conley, Huntington Beach,
Calif., assignors to Northrop Corp., Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,663
Int. a.3 HOIS i/093
U.S. a. 372—87 20 Qaims
1. A gas laser including:
an elongated housing defining a resonant gas cavity through
the center of which an optical axis extends longitudinally;
a pair of opposed electrodes extending longitudinally and
disposed on opposite sides of said optical axis; and
means, disposed within said housing, for producing ultravio-
let radiation for preionizing gas in said laser comprising a
hollow dielectric tube extending parallel to said optical
axis, an inner wire conductor in said tube, outer conduc-
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
511
live means comprising one or more conductive strips
along the outer surface of said tube, and means for con-
necting a source of high voltage between said inner wire
and said outer conductive means.
4,380,080
TRI-LEVEL DIFFERENTIAL LINE RECEIVER
Glen D. Rattlingourd, Salt Lake City, Utah, assignor to Sperry
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,248
Int. a.3 H03K 5/13
U.S. CI. 375— 17 llQaims
a squarer converting an incoming carrier wave into a phase-
modulated square wave;
a generator of a reference square wave having a frequency
harmonically related to that of the incoming carrier wave;
phase-demodulation means with inputs connected to said
squarer and to said generator for emitting a binary se-
quence of a configuration determined by the relative
phasing of said phase-modulated square wave and said
reference square wave;
a source of timing pulses controlling the operation of said
generator, said timing pulses having a cadence equal to a
multiple of the frequency of said reference square wave;
a shift register connected to said phase-demodulation means
for receiving therefrom samples of said binary sequence
1. A receiver for receiving RZ tri-level bipolar signals,
which signals are transmitted as true and complement signals,
from a two-wire transmission line, comprising:
a first resistive network for shifting the bias level of said true
signal in a positive direction at a first output and in a
negative direction of equal magnitude at a second output;
a second resistive network symmetrical with said first resis-
tive network for shifting the bias level of said compele-
ment signal in a positive direction at a third output and in
a negative direction of equal magnitude at a fourth output;
a first comparator having a fifth output and responsive to
each change of polarity of the difference of the voltages at
said first and third outputs to change the state of said fifth
output and thus signal a first binary character; and
a second comparator having a sixth output and responsive to
each change of polarity of the difference of the voltages at
said second and fourth outputs to change the state of said
sixth output and thus signal a second binary character.
which are taken upon the occurrence of said timing pulses,
said shift register being stepped by said timing pulses and
having a multiplicity of stages accommodating a number
of said samples representing at least one full cycle of said
reference square wave;
logic circuitry connected to said source and to stage outputs
of said shift register for detecting characteristic bit group-
ings appearing in said stages, indicative of optimum in-
stants for reading the contents of said shift register, said
logic circuitry generating a reading command at said
optimum instants; and
decision means connected to said stage outputs and respon-
sive to said reading command for emitting a dibit decoded
from said contents.
4,380,082
DIGITAL SIGNAL RECEIVER WITH FM
INTERFERENCE ELIMINATION CAPABILITY
Juiyi Namiki, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,234
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1980, 55-67593;
May 21, 1980, 55-67594
Int. Cl.^ H04L 1/00
U.S. a. 375—102 9 Qaims
4,380,081
DIGITAL RECEIVER FOR FOUR-PHASE-MODULATED
CARRIER
Paolo Di Tria, Turin, Italy, assignor to Cselt - Centro Studi e
Laboratori Telecomunicazioni S.p.A., Turin, Italy
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,501
Oaims priority, appUcation Italy, Aug. 7, 1980, 68262 A/80
Int. a.3 H03D 3/22
U.S. a. 375—82 12 a«inis
1. A receiver of phase-modulated carrier waves arriving
over a signal path of a telecommunication system in any of four
possible phase positions representing dibits of transmitted data
words,
comprising:
ctirtsT ^k
[.-RACTOB lis
-S3>
DiSCR'MiNATOO
.'i? i|
2. A digital signal receiver comprising error detector means
for generating an error signal based upon detected differences
between discriminated transmission codes and received digital
512
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
baseband signals, synchronizing means responsive to said error
signal for synchronizing said error signal with a complex value
correcting signal, means for multiplying the output signal of
said synchronizing means with a predetermined coefficient
signal, subtracting means for extracting said multiplied correct-
ing signal from said digital signal, and control means respon-
sive to said subtracting means for adjusting said coefficient to
produce an interference free digital signal.
4,380,083
METHOD OF AND AN ARRANGEMENT IN A
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR REGULATING
THE PHASE POSITION OF A CONTROLLED SIGNAL IN
RELATION TO A REFERENCE SIGNAL
Karl A. I. Andersson, Ljustero, and Sture G. Roos, Bergshamra,
both of Sweden, assignors to Telefonaktiebolaget L M Erics-
son, Stockholm, Sweden
per No. PCr/SE79/00194, § 371 Date May 21, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 17, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00901, PCT Pub.
Date May 1, 1980
per Filed Sep. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 196,556
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Sep. 21, 1978, 7809934
Int. aj H03L 7/06
U.S. a. 375-120 2 Qaims
a
OeLAY
cmojn-
BBJtr
C0KUT
OLI
Fup-nop
FFl
a
'Dl
01
DL2
lO
02
LOOK
attcuiT
LC OKITAL TO
ANALOG
OA aicuocM
■fT2
FUP-FLOP
1. Apparatus for regulating the phase position of a controlled
signal with respect to a reference signal comprising a source of
the reference signal, a first delay means for delaying the refer-
ence signal by a given period of time, a second delay means for
delaying the controlled signal for said given period of time, a
first comparison means having a first input connected to said
first delay means to receive the reference signal delayed by
said given period of time and a second input to receive the
controlled signal for generating a first binary signal whose
value is in indication of the relative phases of the received
signals, a second comparison means having a first input con-
nected to said second delay means to receive the controlled
signal delayed by said period of time and a second input to
receive the reference signal for generating a second binary
signal whose value is an indication of the relative phases of the
received signals, a controllable variable frequency oscillator
means for generating the controlled signal, and control means
connected to said comparison means for controlling the fre-
quency of said variable frequency oscillator means in accor-
dance with the values of the first and second binary signals.
4^80 084
NUCLEAR BOILER WITH DISMOUNTABLE WATER
BOX
Gilles Aubert, Orsay, France, assignor to Commissariat a TEner-
gie Atomique, Paris, France
FUed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,412
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 24, 1979, 79 19053
Int. a.3 G21C 13/00
U.S. a. 376—204 8 Claims
1. A nuclear boiler comprising a vessel having a top closed
by a dismountable cover, a cage bearing the core of the reactor
and separating the vessel into an inner hot zone and an outer
cold zone, at least one steam generator disposed outside the
vessel and comprising a tight enclosure, a tube plate separating
the enclosure into a primary part, or water box, and a second-
ary part, and bearing U-shaped tubes whose ends open into
two concentric zones of the water box separated by kn internal
structure, at least one hot connecting pipe and one cold con-
necting pipe respectively connecting the hot zone and the cold
zone of the vessel to each of the concentric zones of the water
box, wherein the tube plate, the tubes and the secondary part of
i ■-■■---I
the enclosure of the steam generator define a sub-assembly
dismountable from the primary part of the enclosure, the hot
connecting pipe being dismountably mounted between the
cage and the internal structure of the water box, said internal
structure being dismountably mounted in the primary part of
the enclosure.
4,380,085
ANGLED GAS CONDUIT
Josef Schoening, Hambruecken; Hans-Georg Schwiers, Ketsch;
Qaus Elter, Bad Durkheim; Wilfried Stracke, Oftersheim,
and Reinhard Mauersberger, Juelich, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Hochtemperatur-Reaktorbau GmbH, Co-
logne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 136,271
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 4,
1979, 2913461; Apr. 4, 1979, 2913462
Int. a.3 G21C 3/56: F15D 1/04
U.S. a. 376-381 17 Qaims
1. An angled conduit comprising a first conduit part and a
second conduit part connected at an angle forming an area of
deflection for gas flowing within said conduit parts and means
for flowing gas under high pressure and at elevated tempera-
ture, said means including an apertured plate mounted at an
oblique angle within said conduit in said area of deflection, said
apertured plate having a plurality of circular passages for
directing the flow of gas in said conduit and being mounted on
at least three supporting bolts arranged in the wall of said gas
conduit wherein each supporting bolt carries a ball joint on its
end and protrudes into a recess open in the downward direc-
tion of the circumferential surface of said apertured plate.
April 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
513
4,380,086
RADIATION IMAGING SYSTEM WITH CYCLICALLY
SHIFTABLE GRID ASSEMBLY
Robert J. Vagi, Broadview Heights, Ohio, assignor to Picker
Corporation, Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,309
Int. a.3 A61B 6/QO
U.S. a. 378—155 13 Qaims
4,380,088
TESTER FOR COLLISION-DETECT ORCUITRY
Jesse B. Lipcon, Harvard, Mass., assignor to Digital Equipment
Corporation, Maynard, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 267,394, May 26, 1981. This
application Aug. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 292,003
Int. a.' H04B/ 7/00
U.S. a. 455—67 2 Qaims
r'
/" /'
.' -_-L ^ ^' \ IW '\
oe-or-
OCTBCTOH
' COu.l*W
^ MUJITOH
M »
5.
®
1. A method for producing a transparency image of an ob-
ject subjected to penetrative radiation comprising:
(a) positioning a generally planar image forming element at
a predetermined position relative to a source of penetra-
tive radiation;
(b) stationing a grid assembly at an exposure position be-
tween the radiation source and the image forming ele-
ment;
(c) directing penetrative radiation to said image forming
element for a predetermined time; and,
(d) oscillating the grid assembly in a direction generally
parallel to said plane at a first relatively constant fre-
quency and altering the extent of grid assembly displace-
ment from said exposure position during successive oscil-
lations by cyclically shifting said grid assembly at a second
substantially lower relatively constant frequency so that
the grid assembly displacement in one direction of motion
from the exposure position is not duplicated for a period
which is relatively large compared to said time.
4,380,087
X-RAY nLM CASSETTE
Tsuneo Tanaka, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 183,816
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 6, 1979, 54-114524
Int. C1.3 G03B 41/16
U.S. a. 378—186 6 Qaims
1. In a transceiver for connecting a host device to a multiple
access data communications network of the type employing
carrier-sense collision detection control techniques, and
wherein the transceiver includes a transmitter and a receiver,
the transmitter including a squelch circuit for providing a
squelch signal to control the enabling and disabling of the
transmitter output, and the receiver including means for de-
tecting collisions — i.e., multiple transmitters simultaneously
transmitting, the improvement comprising:
(a) end-of-transmission detector means responsive to the
squelch signal, for providing an end-of-transmission signal
at the conclusion of a transmission; and
(b) collision simulation means, responsive to the end-of-
transmission signal, for providing to the receiver a signal
simulating a collision,
whereby the means for detecting collision is tested automati-
cally at the end of every transmission.
4,380,089
BATTERY-POWERED TRANSMITTER INCLUDING
CURRENT CONTROL aRCUIT
Colin B. Weir, Franklin, Mass., assignor to GTE Products
Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,523
Int. Q,3 H04B 1/04: H03G 3/20
U.S. Q. 455—127 14 Qaims
•AiTfir
SMKE
.—J
in
lilt
/
s
cull
CM
CIK
1
V
HMMiK
rum
sou
ICf
din,
ik*)^
?15
TIHBBT/
IKfWf
sricii
IIHl
r~r
>
HIT
■K
K«
MK
1. An X-ray film cassette comprising:
a. a front cover including a front panel and a side wall inte-
gral with and surrounding said front panel, each of said
front panel and said side wall being formed of carbon fibei
reinforced plastics;
b. a bottom cover including a bottom panel and a side wall
surrounding said bottom panel;
c. hinge means swingably connecting said front cover and
said bottom cover; and
d. a platelike cushion member bonded to the inside of the
bottom panel of said bottom cover.
1. A transmitter powered by a dc voltage of a battery source
and arranged to amplify a rf signal over a range of variations in
the value of the voltage of the battery source, said transmitter
comprising:
amplifier means arranged to receive said rf signal and having
a control input;
control circuit means coupled to the battery source and to
the control input of the amplifier means and powered by
the battery source;
said control circuit means being operative to produce a
control voltage at the control input of the amplifier means
514
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
and said amplifier means being operative in response to
said control voltage to draw load current from the control
circuit means having a value related to the value of the
control voltage and to amplify the rf signal received
thereby in accordance with the value of the control volt-
age;
said control circuit means comprising:
sensing circuit means operative to sense the value of load
current drawn by the amplifier means and to produce a
voltage related thereto; and
control means operative to compare the voltage produced
by the sensing circuit means with a voltage varying
with variations in the voltage of the battery source and
to produce a control voltage related to the difference at
the control input of the amplifier means, said control
voltage having a value such that the load current drawn
by the amplifier means does not exceed a specified
maximum value, thereby conserving the battery source.
DESIGN PATENTS
GRANTED APR. 12, 1983
ERRATA
For
CLASS
D23-006
See
PATENT NO.
268,563
Mi
U.
K(
U,
DESIGNS
APRIL 12, 1983
268,539 268,541
POTATO PRODUCT SUSHI
Michael L. Hamann, Caldwell, Id., assignor to J. R. Simplot Koki Uno, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kyotani Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Company, Boise, Id. Japan
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,309 Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,163
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years ^
Int. a. DOl— 02 Int. Q. DOl— 0/
U.S. a. Di— 1 U.S. a. Di— 2
268,542
SWIMMING SUIT
Vicki L. A. Johnson, 1105 S. State St., Provo, Utah 84601
Filed Apr. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 142,792
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2— 02
U.S. CI. D2— 40
\/
^
268,540
SUSHI
Koki Uno, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kyotani Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,162
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DOl— o;
U.S. a. DI— 2
268,543
SHOE BASE
Walter Bretschneider, Heidekuppel 16, I>^91 Steinau-Neus-
tall. Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Not. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 203,961
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2— 04
U.S. CI. D2— 320
515
516
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,544 268 546
OUTSOLE FOR SPORTS SHOE BICYCLE COVER
Kevin J. Crowley, Newburyport, Mass., assignor to Converse Jean-Pierre Edery, 3630 Hancock St., Ste. D, San Diego, Calif.
Inc., Wilmington, Mass. 92110
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,522 Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,908
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2-04 - Int. a. D3-02
U.S. a. D2-320 U.S. a. D3-36
268,547
nSHING ROD CASE
Howard J. Ruckstuhl, 208 Oakview Dr., Kettering, Ohio 45429
Filed Aug. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 180,514
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3--02 "
U.S. a. D3— 38
268,545
CARRY CASE FOR SMALL ARTICLES
Robert Weinreb, 510 Broadway, New York, N.Y. 10012
Filed May 16, 1980, Ser. No. 150,428
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 02
U.S. a. D3— 33
268,548
HANDBAG
Otto K. Schimmel, Scottsdale, Ariz., assignor to Amba Market-
ing Systems, Inc., Tempe, Ariz.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,610
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— o;
U.S. a. D3— 48
April 12^ 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
517
268,549
COMBINED TABLE AND ROCKABLE CHAIR UNIT
Hsiung-Cheng Liu, No. 15-6, Lane 146, Wen Hua Rd., San Hsia
Cheng, Taipei Hsien, Taiwan
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,283
Qaims priority, application Taiwan, Apr. 16, 1980, 6930742
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. 06—06
U.S. a. D6— 6
268,551
COMBINED TABLE AND SEATING UNIT
William B. Raftery, Ann Arbor, and Ronald L. Whitwam, Cale-
donia, both of Mich., assignors to Steelcase Inc., Grand Rap-
ids, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 47,098, Jun. 11, 1979. This application Apr.
5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,353
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 05
U.S. a. D6— 46
268,552
COMBINED TABLE AND SEATING UNIT
William B. Raftery, Ann Arbor, and Ronald L. Whitwam, Cale-
donia, both of Mich., assignors to Steelcase Inc., Grand Rap-
ids, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 47,099, Jun. 11, 1979. This application Apr.
5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,354
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 05
U.S. a. D6— 46
268,550
SWIVEL CHAIR
J. Thayer Coggin, High Point, N.C., assignor to Thayer Coggin
Incorporated, High Point, N.C.
Filed Apr. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 28,489
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 07
U.S. a. D6— 26
268,553
KEY HANGER
Hanns W. Beier, 26 Qove Brook Rd., Valhalla, N.Y. 10595
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,269
Term of patent 7 years
Int. a. D6— 06, D3— 07. D8— 0«
U.S. a. D6— 113
49
I
1029 O.G.— 20
518
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,554
WALL MOUNTED COMBINED SHELF AND CABINET
UNIT
Karl Springer, 425 E. 58th St., New York, N.Y. 10022
Division of Ser. No. 9,773, Feb. 6, 1979, Pat. No. Des. 260,336.
This application Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,081
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 04
U.S. a. D6— 127
268,556
DISPLAY RACK FOR PACKAGED PRODUCE
Leo F. Wildgen, Minneapolis, Minn., assignor to General Mills,
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,574
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D06— 04
U.S. a. D6— 188
^£^
A /I A
268,555
TABLE
Leon Rosen, Scarsdale, N.Y., assignor to The Pace Collection,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 7, 1978, Ser. No. 875,918
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 03
U.S. a. D6— 146
£1 A.1 /:^A m Mi Mi mi
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
519
268,557 268,558
CASSEROLE DISH OR SIMILAR ARTICLE DRINK BAR
George B. Jensen, deceased, late of Syracuse, N.Y., and by Gary L. Young, 54 Best St., North Fitzroy, Victoria, Australia
Stanley F. Campion, executor, Fayetteville, N.Y., assignors to Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,122
Syracuse China Corporation, Syracuse, N.Y. Term of patent 14 years
Filed May 11, 1979, Ser. No. 38,245 Int. Q. D07— 0<5
Term of patent 14 years U.S. CI. D7— 71
Int. a. D07— 0/
U.S. a. D7— 20
•B^aSAuBl
^ ^
268,559
INSULATED CONTAINER
Jean Cornou, Verrieres le Buisson, France, assignor to AUibert
S.A., Grenoble, France
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 228,693
Claims priority, application Hague, Aug. 13, 1980, DM 000
307
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 99, DO9—04
U.S. a. D7— 77
520
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,560 268,562
BREAD STORAGE CONTAINER OR THE LIKE VEGETABLE CUTTER
Robert H. C. M. Daenen, Hekelgem, and Pieter K. J. De Coster, John E. Bright, 3621 W. Sunland Dr., Phoenix, Ariz. 85041
Aalst, both of Belgium, assignors to Dart Industries, Inc., Filed May 5, 1980, Ser. No. 146,626
Northbrook, 111. Term of patent 14 years
Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,409 Int. Q. 1)07—04
Term of patent 14 years U.S. Q. D7— 381
Int. a. D07— 07
U.S. a. D7— 82
.. ^
/
j
V
c. . ■ ^ \
-T- - 3-
'- ^
1 t ._ -1
j ' D
U^'^^— — =^
i'
268,561
BARBECUE COOKING TOOL
Bryce N. Risser, P.O. Box 506, Valley City, N. Dak. 58072
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,123
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 04
U.S. a. D7— 102
•^
uu
268,563
ADJUSTABLE AND FOLDABLE WOODEN LOG RACK
OR THE LIKE
Lawrence J. Gagner, 1 Neptune Park East, Ormand Beach, Fla.
32074
Filed Apr. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 141,681
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D7— 0*
U.S. a. D23— 138.5
/\
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
521
268,564 268,567
COMBINED WALL SWITCH AND ESCUTCHEON BOTTLE
THEREFOR Masao Koj..na, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Shimano Industrial
Sandra L. Mack, 3498 Yorltshire Rd., Pasadena, Calif. 91107 Company Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 161,131 Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 223,029
Term of patent 14 years Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 21, 1980, 55-34461
Int. a. D8— 09, D13— 03 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D8— 353 Int. Q. D9— 0/
U.S. a. D9— 372
268,568
268,565 MEAT PACKAGING TRAY OR THE LIKE
LUG NUT Morell J. Holden, Canandaigua, N.Y., assignor to Mobil Oil
Harold J. Mortus, Twinsburg, Ohio, assignor to Russell, Burd- Corporation, New York, N.Y.
sail & Ward Corporation, Qeveland, Ohio
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,884
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DS—08
Filed Not. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 207,588
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— Oi
U.S. a. D9— 425
U.S. a. D8— 397
j^fTm^i'^^'m^
t^:5;^:5^5:5!^5%5:5?i^^5f^^5^^
t>;
V
Iccccccco
268,566
REVERSIBLE LOCK WASHER
Bengt O. Frieberg, 869 Picaacho, La Habra Heights, Calif.
90631
Division of Ser. No. 180,410, Aug. 22, 1980, Pat. No. Des.
263,679. This application Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,928
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DS—08
U.S. a. D8— 399
268,569
JEWELRY PENDANT OR THE LIKE
Wayne C. Heatwole, 104 Leonard St., Dumfries, Va. 22026
Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,491
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dii— o;
U.S. a. Dll— 81
522
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,570
ROTATING RECTANGULAR-SHAPED PLAQUE
Aaron Wagman, 5 Dunn Rd., Monsey, N.Y. 10952
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,749
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— 02
U.S. a. Dll— 132
268,572
AUXILIARY SIDES FOR UTILITY TRAILER
David J. Johnson, 486 S. 200 West, Mt. Pleasant, Utah 84647
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,962
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 76
U.S. a. D12— 106
J
^ TIRE
Philippe Grenie, Chateaugay, France, assignor to Compagnie
Generate des Etablissements Michelin, Clermont-Ferrand,
France
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,210
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 23, 1981, 50
268,571 letm of patent 14 years
J^ABBIT Int Q D12— /5
Doreen N. Roberts, Gwynedd, Wales, assignor to Pendelfin ^ §_ q y)\2 147
Studios Limited, Lancashire, England
Filed Jan. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,686
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 3, 1981,
998721
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— 02
U.S. a. Dll— 158
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
523
268,574
COMBINED BALL HITCH AND VEHICLE CARRIER
FOR GOLF CLUB CARTS HAVING VERTICAL
MOUNTING COUPLING
Auborn R. Hampton, 1307 Garth Ave., Decatur, Ala. 35601
Filed Feb. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 124,231
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DU—16
U.S. a. D12— 157
^^Z
n
v/
>.
'3
'%.
/-7
"^"^J^
268,577
PADDLING CATAMARAN
Carl Gillberg, 1710 Decker Canyon Rd., Malibu, Calif. 90265
Filed Sep. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 72,687
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 06
U.S. a. D12— 304
268,575
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Bernard C. Sharp, White Plains, N.Y., assignor to Parker-Han-
nifin Corporation, Shelton, Conn.
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,152
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 76
U.S. CI. D12— 187
268,578
ADAPTER FOR CONVERTING RECORDED VIDEO
SIGNALS raOM ONE TO ANOTHER SIZE CASSETTE
Toshio Ohya, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Sony Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,642
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 14, 1980, 55-018898
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D14— 07
U.S. a. D14— 2
i
5
268,579
TELEPHONE
Eric J. Marshall, 5 Carlton Gardens, London SWl, England
268 576 Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,086
REAR VIEW MIRROR MOUNTING Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 5, 1980,
Bernard C. Sharp, White Plains, N.Y., assignor to Parker-Han- W3474
nifin Corporation, Shelton, Conn. Term of patent 14 years
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,123 Int. CI. D14— Oi
Term of patent 14 years ^S- CI. D14— 53
Int. a. D12— /!5
U.S. a. D12— 187
r
^
^
rl£
w.
524
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,580
FACSIMILE RECORDER AND TRANSCEIVER
Nobuki Matsumoto; Manzo Yoshihama, both of Yokohama, and
Fumiyo Kojima, Hiratsuka, all of Japan, assignors to Ricoh
Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,754
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 14, 1980, 55-028174
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 07
U.S. a. D14— 94
268,583
CONTROL CONSOLE
George S. Whaley, Eastlake, and Thomas L. Willmott, Russell,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Babock & Wilcox Company,
New Orleans, La.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,705
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 02
U.S. a. D14— 103
x^
268,581
FACSIMILE TRANSCEIVER OR THE LIKE
Nobuo Kikuchi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,759
Gaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 21, 1980, 55-34257
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 07, 03
U.S. a. D14— 94
268,582
FACSIMILE TRANSCEIVER OR THE LIKE
Nobuo Kikuchi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,665
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 21, 1980, 55-34258
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 07, 03
U.S. a. D14— 94
268,584
PERSONAL COMPUTER
Steven P. Jobs, Los Gatos; Jerrold C. Manock, Palo Alto; Dean
A. Hovey, Los Altos, and David M. Kelley, Palo Alto, all of
Calif., assignors to Apple Computer, Inc., Cupertino, Calif.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,502
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 02
U.S. a. D14— 106
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
525
268,585
WATER PUMP HOUSING
John Drakulic, Box 482, 1st St, Trafford, Pa. 15085
FUed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,512
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 02
U.S. a. D15— 5
268,587
INDUSTRIAL ROBOT
Michinaga Kono; Yoshio Matsomoto, both of Yokohama; Hiro-
suke Katsumi, Tokyo, and Fumio Fuknchi, Funabashi, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 137,492
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 5, 1979, 54^1673;
Feb. 12, 1980, 55-4391; Mar. 26, 1980, 55-11412
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 99
U.S. a. D15— 122
268,588
PORTABLE ORE SEPARATING BOWL
Wilbert H. Cubbison, and Flossie E. Cubbison, both of P.O. Box
322, Canyonville, Oreg. 97417
Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 176,066
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 99
U.S. a. D15— 147
268,586
MORTAR MIXER
Rolf Baum, Kirchzarten, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Mathis System-Technik GmbH, Merdingen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany 268 589
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,579 SLIDE VIEWER
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 5, pjui D. Miller, and Martin Thaler, both of New York, N.Y.,
1980, MR Bd.II N03Bs assignors to View-Master International Group, Portland,
Term of patent 14 years Oreg.
Int. a. mS—04 Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,869
U.S. a. D15— 19 Xerm of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— Oi
., U.S. a. D16— 17
1029 O.G.— 21
526
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,590 268,592
TABLETOP SLIDE VIEWER FOLDING TRANSPARENCY VIEWER
Paul D. Miller, and Martin Thaler, both of New York, N.Y., Paul D. MiUer, New York, N.Y., and Richard M. Joffe, North
assignors to View-Master International Group, Portland, Bergen, N.J., assignors to View-Master International Group,
Oreg. Portland, Oreg.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,094 Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,639
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— Oi Int. CI. D16— 03
U.S.a. D16-17 U.S.a. D16-18
268,593
HOOD FOR INSTRUMENT FLIGHT TRAINING
C. Cameron Harper, 3644 Nobscott Ct., Apt. lA, Indianapolis,
Ind. 46222
Filed §ep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,260
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2— i; D16— 06
U.S. a. D16— 123
268,591
TRANSPARENCY VIEWER
Paul D. Miller, New York, N.Y., and Richard M. Joffe, North
Bergen, N.J., assignors to View-Master International Group,
Portland, Oreg.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,095
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— Oi
U.S. a. D16— 17
268,594
LIGHT DISPERSING PRISM ATTACHABLE TO A
WINDOW, OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Ronald L. Chyba, 3770 Monroe St., Riverside, Calif. 92504
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,786
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— 06
U.S. a. D16— 137
^rsr
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
527
268,595 268,597
LABELING MACHINE DRAWING TEMPLATE
Eugene W. Beers, Lafayette, Calif., assignor to Esselte Penda- David Spence, Granada Hills, Calif., assignor to Berol Corpora-
flex Corp., Garden Qty, N.Y. tion, Danbury, Conn.
FUed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,698 Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,844
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D18— 99 Int. CI. D19-06
U.S. a. D18— 19 U.S. a. di9— 39
,/
z'-
'7'
O^
(it'<V'»W»="
I I ■ !l!,?/
/'
I I., f .\l '
ni?i*'.*»^e, «ilc:>F*s«o if-itn.««riv
t\ fi'-i'> -il^i '■"'}> 'f' - - K s"-r' r
268,598
FELT PEN
Takeshi Mizutani, Kuwana, and Makoto Mizuno, Nagoya, both
of Japan, assignors to Shachihata Industrial Co., Ltd., Aichi,
Japan
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,978
Claims priority, application Japan, May 15, 1980, 55-19092
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D19— 06
U.S. a. D19— 43
268,596
LABELING MACHINE
Eugene W. Beers, Lafayette, Calif., assignor to Esselte Penda-
flex Corp., Garden Oty, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,360
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D18— 99
U.S. a. D18— 19
268,599
PAPERWEIGHT
Michael F. Cox, 1311 Dixie Hwy., Pompano Beach, Fla. 33060
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,525
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D19— 02
U.S. a. D19— 96
528
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,600 268,603
ELECTRONIC MEMORY GAME HOUSING ELECTRONIC MEMORY GAME HOUSING
Lap Lee, Hong Hong, Hong Kong, assignor to Applied Industrial Lap Lee, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, assignor to Applied Industrial
Company Limited, Hong Kong, Hong Kong Company Limited, Hong Kong, Hong Kong
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,463 Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,466
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— O; Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 13 U.S. a. 021—13
268,601
ELECTRONIC MEMORY GAME HOUSING
Lap Lee, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, assignor to Applied Industrial
Company Limited, Hong Kong, Hong Kong
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,464
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D21— 0/
U.S. a. D21— 13
268,604
SPINNING TOY
Richard A. Chase, Baltimore; Lawrence B. Grubb, Monkton,
both of Md., and David M. Williams, New York, N.Y., assign-
ors to Johnson & Johnson Baby Products Company, New
Brunswick, N.J.
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,387
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 92
268,605
268,602 PULL TOY
ELECTRONIC MEMORY GAME HOUSING Ralph A. Randolph, Box 36, Bushnell, Nebr. 69128
Lap Lee, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, assignor to Applied Industrial ^^ Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,236
Company Limited, Hong Kong, Hong Kong I'd™ of patent 14 years
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,465 Int. CI. D21— 07
Term of patent 14 years ^-S- CI- D21— 165
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 13
^
■^e 0 e^ 1
"O
Q
r
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
529
268,606
STUFFED BEAR WITH SIMULATED PROSTHETIC
LIMB
Margaret K. Gibbons, 418 Walker St., Lowell, Mass. 01851
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,911
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 0/
U.S. a. D21— 159
268,609
SHOWER HEAD
Bruce R. Thompson, Tranmere, Australia, assignor to UPL
Group Limited, Brisbane, Australia
FUed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,530
Claims priority, application Australia, Dec. 18, 1980, 82,864
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 0/
U.S. CI. D23— 35
268,607
AQUARIUM HLTER
Richard J. Malik, 2721 Morin Grove, Erie, Mich. 48133
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,515
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 0/
U.S. a. D23— 4
iiiiiiiiiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiii iimiiiiiiii
iimniiiiii iiiiiniiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiii
/ V V \
268,608
FAUCET
Anthony C. WUcock, 75 E. Palm Ave., Burbank, Calif. 91502
FUed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 197,144
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 23
268,610
HAND SHOWER
Bruce R. Thompson, Tranmere, Australia, assignor to UPL
Group Limited, Brisbane, Australia
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,538
Oaims priority, appUcation Australia, Jan. 5, 1981, 82,979
Term of patent 14 years
Int.a. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 35
A
I
530
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,611
HAND SHOWER
Odo Hose, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Frie-
dnch Grohe Armaturenfabrik GmbH A Co., Hemer, Fed
Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,623
198l''MR'7i32*^' ''"'''"'*^°'' ^^- **"• °' Germany, Mar. 16,
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 0/
U.S. a. D23— 35
268,614
AIR FRESHENER OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Fntz von Philipp, Neuburg, and Georg Schimanski, Hagen, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Globol-Werk GmbH.
Neuburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,152
ioS*^,.T„?« "*^' "PP""*^"'' Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 24,
1980, MR435
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 04
U.S. a. D23— 150
268,612
SWIVEL CONNECTOR FOR HOSE OR THE LIKE
Grenyille G. Sutcliffe, Villa Ridge, Mo., assignor to Husky
Corporation, Pacific, Mo.
Filed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 160,088
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— o;
U.S. a. D23— 43
268,613
CONTAINER FOR AIR FRESHENER
Robert C. Beacham, Pleasanton, Calif., assignor to The Qorox
Company, Oakland, Calif.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,190
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 04
U.S. a. D23— 150
268,615
COMBINED DENTAL PIN AND CHUCK
Anthony J. Biggs, 9 Westdown, Great Brookham, Surrey. En-
gland
Filed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,653
Oauns priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 24, 1980,
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 02
U.S. a. D24— 10
EM
April 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
531
268,616 268,618
ELECTRIC SHAVER COMPACT
Roland UUmaiui, Offenbach-Rumpenheim, Fed. Rep. of Ger- Andrew Napolltmie, 350 E. 52nd St., New York^N.Y. 10022
many, assignor to Braun Aktiengesellschaft, Kronberg, Fed. Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,984
Rep. of Germany ^*T ♦"'.? n'i^^nT"
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,036 Int. Q. D28-0i
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 15, U.S. Q. D28— 78
1980, 73 MR 8917 -
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D28— Oi
U.S.a. D28— 49
" 268,617
ELECTRIC SHAVER
Florian Seiffert, Griienwald, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Noboni
Abe, Kadoma, Japan, assignors to MatsushiU Electric Works,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,689
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 7, 1980, 55-27247
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— Oi
U.S. a D28— 51
268,619
BIRD FEEDER
Morton L. Blasbalg, 26 Sandro Dr., Warwick, R.I. 02886
FUed Oct. 10, 1978, Ser. No. 949,813
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 12,
1995, has been disclaimed.
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D30— Oi
U.S. CI. D30— 15
532
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 12, 1983
268,620 2«l«22
Charle. P Sc^r^If '.^'^ ^T^Jt''^'' """^^^ MATERIAL HANDLING TOTE TRAY
FUed Dec 4 1980 slr BJn yifOAi ' ^"'^ **• ^^^^^ ^*'*' ""• ^"'«« P- Schreiner, Sauga-
U.S a D34--21 '"*' "■ "^^^"^^ ^""' '^*'=- *' ^'*0' ^^- No. 212,948
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9—03
V.S. a. D34— 40
268,621
CART FOR HOLDING REFUSE BAG
Louis G. Marini, and Thomas O. Marini, both of P.O. Box 6
Blackwood, N.J. 08012
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 171,018
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 02
U.S. a. D34— 26
268,623
CREMAIN VAULT
Gerald A. Dercks, and Michael J. Dercks, both of 4228 Park
Ave. S., Minneapolos, Minn. 55407
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 216,021
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D31— 00
U.S. a. D99— 5
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 12TH DAY OF APRIL, 1983
Note— Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
A. B. Dick Company: See—
Halm. James M., 4.379.823. CI. 430-83.000.
Abbott Laboratories: See— ,,,.,„«
Cooper. Billy H.. 4.379.841. CI. 435-34.000.
Abidin, Anwar: See— r^-t-,
Bianchi, Valerio; Abidin. Anwar; and Thonnessen, Uieler.
4,379,770, CI. 261-142.000.
ACF Industries. Incorporated: See—
Saka. Hamid J.. 4.379.557. CI. 277-59.000.
Acme General Corporation: See— . „„ ^, r-i in nnrwi
Johnson, John R.; and Brydolf. Robert. 4.379.603. CI. 312-320.000.
Adamoski. William; and Hotchkiss, Alan B.. to Pitney Boweslnc.
Inserter with improved ram mechanism. 4.379.383. CI. 53-26to.uUA.
Adell Robert, to U.S. Product Development Company. Umversal edge
guard. 4.379.376. CI. 49-462.000.
Adell Robert, to U.S. Product Development Company. Edge guard.
4.379.377. CI. 49-462.000.
Adler, David: 5«— ,. . ^ , .„ j aji-,
Yang. Chi C; Madan. Arun; Ovshinsky, SUnford R.; and Adler.
David. 4.379.943, CI. 136-249.000.
AG Industries International. Ltd.: See— ,,q ,.onnn
Thedford, Dale E.; and Wilson. Gil C. 4.379,440, CI. 119-159.000.
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Dedden, Hubert; and Pfingst. Jurgen, 4,379.632. CI. 355-68.000.
Helling, Gunter; Ohlschlager, Hans; Himmelmann, Wolfgang; and
Beck, Manfred, 4,379,838, CI. 430-518 000.
Krafft, Werner; Helling. Gunter; Matschke, Guunther; and Boie,
Immo, 4,379,829. CI. 430-215.000.
Lapp. Otto; von Rintelen. Harald; Moll, Franz; and Endres. Lo-
Lil^ wrr2«?L'i.U?!^«ifSid Pelz. Willibald. 4.379.828. CI.
Schnoring. Hildegard; Schranz. Karl-Wilhelm; and Koepke. Gun-
ther. 4,379.836, CI. 430-377.000.
Ahmed. Fahim. to International Telephone ""d Jelegraph Corporation.
Distributed control memory network. 4.379.950. CI. 179-1 8.0ES
Ahrens Paul W.. to Miracle Recreation Equipment Company. Play-
ground tube slide. 4,379.551, CI. 272-56. 50R.
Air Products and Chemicals, Inc.: See— ,. y^. . „„ iis r\
Dalton, Augustine I., Jr.; and Skinner, Ronald W., 4,379,778, CI.
423-584.000.
Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Toyoda. Minoru, 4,379,394, CI. 70-456.00R.
Ak7n NV- See^
Fickei, Walter; and Ries, Gerhard. 4.379.860. CI. 521-61.000^
Albo. Ronald T.; Carney. James E.. Jr.; and Rj«lW. Robert E_, to Cater-
pillar Tractor Co. Shuttle drive assembly. 4.379,527, CI. 242-4.9BE.
Alemanni, James C, to Gibson-Egan Company. Integrated circuit
carrier. 4,379,505, CI. 206-329.000.
Alex Friedmann KommanditgesellschaftjSw-
Tomsu, Peter, 4,379,520, CI. 236^9.000.
Alexander, Lee J.; Vanberg, Harold E.; and King, Clyde E. o Horti-
- cXral Printei^/Carscallen Nursery Label Company. Plant Ug.
AlSi^.^v2kCT A°; Forgione. Peter S., and Chang. Lf "";ce ^ to
American Cyanamid Company. Manufacture of isocyanates.
4,379.767, CI. 260-453.00P.
'^"'i:oS?"E™«t^rDuvall. William S.; and Allen. Donald P..
4,380,009, CI. 340-825.550.
'^"'Ta°~[*M?rriS'w.; Allen, George R.; and Strong, Terence.
Allen,ffl'";j?- «TkS2L Herbert G Jr., to McDonnell Doug-
las Corporation. Mode stoble injection laser diode. 4,380,075, CI.
372-44.000.
""''"ill^riiS^^^l^SlTci 430-62.000.
Allison. Robert, to Mac Equipment. Inc Vacuum sequencing system
with weight controlled matenal draw cycle. 4,379,663, ci.
406-23.000.
Aluminum Company of Amenc^ S«— a no 719 CI
Hildeman, Gregory J.; and Sanders, Robert E., Jr., 4,379.719. CI.
419-60.000.
ALZA Corporation: See— ^ ^ ^ v a i-io a<a
Campbell, Patricia S.; and Chandrasekaran. Santosh K., 4,37V,434.
CI. 604-897.000.
American Cyanamid Company: See—
Alwanian. Vazken A.^Forgione, Peter S.; and Chang. Laurence
W., 4,379,767, CI. 260-453.00P.
Parekh, Girish G.; Blank, Werner J.; and Schinnann, Peter J..
4.379,911, CI. 528-245.000.
546-17.000
546-17.000.
American Hoechst Corporation: Sec— , „,. „ -- c
Corso. Anthony J.; Colavito, Kathleen M ; and Phillips. Thomas S.
4,379.937.0.546-155.000.
Ong, Helen H.; and Profitt. James A.. 4.379,932, CI
Ong. Helen H.; and Profitt. James A., 4,379.933. CI
American Home Products Corporation: See— „ « ,
Rao Pemmaraju N ; Purdy. Robert H.; and Moore. Perry H., Jr..
4,379.779. CI. 436-543.000.
Rao. Pemmaraju N.. 4,379,780. CI. 436-543.000.
American Hospital Supply Corporation: See— o .. /-
Fruitstone. Mitchell J.; Tilly. Michele M.; and Pixton. Betty G..
4.379.847, CI. 436-8.000.
American Laser Corporation: See— ^^„^
McMahan. William H., 4,380,077, CI. 372-62.000.
American Sunroof Corporation See— r^ j r~
Kaltz. Milton C; Chojnowski. Edward M.; Garascia, David C;
Bauer. Barney J.; and George, Richard D.. 4,379,586, CI.
296-222.000.
^"^R^^'.^jS^aI a^Dyer. Keith. 4.379.666. CI. 409-1 lOOOO
Amimoto. Yoshio; and Tatemoto. Masayoshi, to Daikin Kogyo Co..
Ltd. Polyfluoroallyl ethers and their production and use. 4,379.901,
CI. 526-247.000.
AMP Incorporated: See— ..... ^ «, a p^.
Clark, Richard P.; Frantz. Robert H.; Hawk. Gary W.; and Root.
John A . 4.379,606. CI. 339-17.0CF.
Olsson. Billy E.; and Kam. Lit-Yan, 4,379,608. CI. 339-75.0MP.
Amtel Systems Corporation: See— r^ ,a o
Long. Ernest L.; Duvall, William S.; and Allen. Donald P..
4.380.009. CI. 340-825.550.
Amundsen. Joseph; Goodwin, Robert J.; and Wetzel. William H. to
Reichhold Chemicals. Incorporated. Water soluble pentachlorophe-
nol and tetrachlorophenol wood treating systems containing fatty
acidamineoxides. 4.379,810. CI. 428-541.000.
Andersen. Heinz-Erhardt; Brebels. Jaek J.; Matschke. Klaus; and
Scheier, Franz, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the pro-
duction of biaxially stretched and embossed film composed of vinyl
chloride polymers. 4,379,774, CI. 264-284.000.
Anderson, Lwry C; Lausch, Robert C; and Sydorko. Peter J , to
Armstrong Worid Industries. Inc. Method of coating an open weave
fabric. 4.379.730. CI. 156-324.000 ,. ^w„, ^ , m
Andersson. Karl A. I.; and Roos, Sture G.. to Telefonaktiebolaget L M
Ericsson. Method of and an an-angement m a telecommunication
system for regulating the phase position of a controlled signal in
relation to a reference signal. 4.380.083. CI. 375-1 20.000
Andoh, Sadanari; Maeda, Junji; Fukushima, Kiyoshi; Yoneda, Hiroichi;
and Jinushi, Naotomo, to Sanyo Denki K«»>ushiki Kaisha_^k droplet
projecting device and an ink jet pnnter. 4.380.018. C.346.140.00R
Andrews. Richard J., to Lucas Industries Limited. Fuel injection noz-
zles. 4.379.524. CI. 239-533.800.
Anelva Corporation: See— ^ . ^ u- vi w i.- aiioia-x n\
Nakatsukasa, Masashi; and Takahashi, Nobuyuki, 4,379,743. CI
204 298 000
Angelo. Eugene V.; and PraUp. Prem. to Elliott Turbomachinery
Qjmpany. Inc. Turbine trip valve mechanism. 4.379.544. CI
251-74.000.
''"^A^iuS^onu^tsr.; and Angelucci, Joseph L., 4.380.042.
CI. 361-421.000. ...»_: J .
Angelucci. Thomas L.. Sr.; and Angelucci. Joseph L. Pnnted circuit
1^ carrier upe. 4.380.042. CI. 36M2 1.000.
Anzai, Makoto, to Nissan Motor Company. Limited System for con-
trolling the air-fuel ratio in a combustion engine. 4,J7V,44i, s^i.
123-440.000.
"^"•^Skii? Alln S! Appelen, John T.; and Lind, Nils, 4.379.371. O
37-104.000.
^'^wSg^g-S^I^'^uthnot. Gerald R.; and Gervais. Michel.
4,379,435, CI. 118-643.000.
Arioli & C.S.r.l.: See— .„.««-
Centis, Sergio, 4,379.392, CI. 68-5.00C.
''"'pJS.**An1?nro C; Pastor. Ricardo C; and AriU. K«.eto.
4,379,733, Q. 156-«16.00R.
Annour and Company: See— .«,Aiinf«
Theiler, Richard F., 4,379,794, CI. 426-266.000.
Armstrong World Industries. Inc.: See— . ^ ^ j. o-.-, i
Andean. Larry C; Uuach. Robert C; and Sydorko. Peter J..
4,379,730, CI. 156-324.000.
Melirig. Stephen G.. 4,379,737, CV^UOOO-
Aracnault, Serge. Auxiliary ice skate bWe. 4,379,563, CI. 280-7.100.
PI I
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
Asahj-Dow Limited: See—
Yc^himura^o; Hau. Hideo; and Kaneko. Takashi, 4.379.888, CI.
Asahi Glass Company, Ltd.: See
Yamabe. Masaaki; MunekaU, Seiji; Kumai. Seisaku; and Kaneko
Isamu, 4,379,768. CI. 26O-544,00F.
Asano, Makoto; Tanabe, Yoshimitu; and Murakami. Hisamichi to
s'JS. I.T7r89S' c7*=5t5-m(So°.'"-'^^''°^^ ^°^ Pressure-sensifve
Asano. Shunji: See—
Takanashi, Yukio; Yakabe. Tooru; and Asano. Shunji. 4,379.980
CI 313-446.000. ' '
Asan. Akira; Noyon. Tatsuhiko; and Takehata. Tetsuro. to Kabushiki
4 379 39? cT 7?273 5^° ''""■'"'''' ^^^ '"'^''"'^ extrusion press.
Ashiuka. Hidetomo; Oizumi. Kyohei; Jinda. Kazuya; and Inaishi
Kazutoshi. to Ube Industries. Ltd. Process for producing polybuta-
dme rubber with enhanced mechanical strength. 4,379.889, CI
525-247.000.
Atlantic RichHeld Company: See—
Younes. Usama E.. 4.379,877, CI. 524-123.000.
Aubert, Gilles, to Commissariat a TEnergie Atomique. Nuclear boiler
with dismounuble water box. 4.380,084. CI. 376-204.000
Audi Nsu Auto Union Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Rion. Claude; and Ruckheim, Winfried. 4.379,539. CI 248-371 000
Austel. Volkhard: See—
Heider. Joachim; Austel, Volkhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang Kadatz
Rudolf; and Lillie. Christian, 4,379,788, CI. 424-251 000
Automated Food Systems, Inc.: See—
Walser, Glenn E.. 4.379.795, CI. 426-304.000.
Ayerst. McKenna & Harrison Ltd.: See—
Gauthier, Jean A.; and Jirkovsky, Ivo, 4,379,926, CI 544-122 000
Azegami. Hitoshi: See—
^li*!'i??^l' Mo"80'"e' E'ji; and Azegami. Hitoshi. 4.380,035, CI.
360-130.330.
B. F Goodnch Company, The: See—
Mahan. Richard S.; Tritt. Paul G.; and Ward, James H Jr
4.379,579, CI. 294-83.00R. ' '
Bacrania, Kantilal. to Burroughs Corporation. Disc-drive head Dosi-
tionmg systems. 4.380.033. CI. 360-77.000.
Baerst, Christian: See—
Woock, Jean P.; and Baerst. Christian, 4,379.419. CI. 83-875.000
Bailey. Fay W.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Copolymer blend of
improved impact resistance. 4.379,884, CI. 525-96 000
^tn';.^4'3i^62i: a^'il-'lS'o^"'"^'"* ophthalmological exam.na-
^^■f1',P2C?°" •' • '° ^^"^ Engineering. Turbine seal. 4,379,560, CI.
<J' '-236.000.
Balbinot. Renzo, to Nordica S.p.A. Device for adjusting the inclination
or the cuff or ankle covenng portion of a footwear article, in particu-
lar a ski boot. 4,379,370, CI. 36-121.000.
BaJdwin, Floyd G.; and Evans, Donald E., to McDonnell Douglas
Corporation. Pallet restrain system. 4,379.535. CI 244-137 OOR
Baldwin Piano &. Organ Company: See—
Munch. Walter; and Uetrecht. Dale M.. 4,379.422, CI. 84-1.190
Ball Corporation: See—
Deane. David W., 4,380,025, CI. 358-106.000.
BjUK Harold M.; and Beach, Robert G.. to Ramsey Winch Company.
Winch clutch. 4,379,502, CI. 192-71.000.
Bando, Hideharu: See—
"'i'^SV. CL 2^,S!g?*' ""™*"^ ""' ^*'°' "•^^'^""-
Banerjee. Subrau: See—
"o?',..^''^'* ^' •''• '^^ Banerjee. Subrata, 4,379,866. CI.
52J- 140.000.
Barlogis. Rene, to Societe Francaise d'Agrafage Industriel - Sofragraf
'^! IS« i'.'tP^J?,*'"* ^^^^ materials such as thermoplastic adhe-
sives. 4.379,516, CI. 222- 146.0HE.
Barnes, David I.: See—
'^t379!8"96,'a''52?47°2'oor' ^'^**' ' ' ""* ^^^^"' Angela M.,
Bamet, Barry M.: See—
''".'IV'. ,^JS!35" "• ■''- *"<* Bamet, Barry M.. 4.379.485, CI.
165-1 10.000.
^lT'4"3°M5l^Cl."6^T45ff '^"*' self-generating pressure assem-
^3^79^8o' CI 4i7*46'a»" ^"T^"*'"" Ambient air timing device.
Bartz. Wilfried: See—
nAcn°*'!*"^' '^'M= f"* ^^^' Wilfried. 4,379,890, CI. 525-332.800.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Graser Fritz; and Seybold. Guenther, 4.379,934, CI. 546-37.000
Weitz, Hans-Manin; and Fischer, Rolf, 4,379,756, CI. 252-41 1 OOR
Baskent, Feyyaz O ; and Sandner, Michael R., to Union Carbide Conx>
ration. Tertiary amme cataJyst mixtures useful in cellular polyure-
thane formation. 4,379,757, CI. 252-426.000.
Basterfield. Ernest P.; and Basterfield. Llewellyn P.. to Chem Develop-
Basterfield. Llewellyn P.: See—
ButerTield, Ernest P.; and Basterfield, Llewellyn P., 4,379,513, CI.
Bauer, Barney J.: See—
Kaltz, Milton C; Chojnowski, Edward M.; Garascia, David C •
?S^J-i^^^^ ^' *"** George. Richard D., 4.379.586, ci!
270-222.000.
Bauer, Siegfried; and Boebel, Manfred, to Richard Wolf GmbH Trocar
sleeves having a ball valve. 4,379,458, Cl. 604-264.000.
Bauman, Ronald M., to United States of America, Navy. Feed-forward
amplifier. 4,379,994, Cl. 330-149.000.
Baur, Robert P. Animal feeder. 4,379,439, Cl. 1 19-52.00B.
Bausch & Lomb Incorporated: See—
^""ce- George H.; and Moore, John A.. 4,379,965, Cl.
Baxter Donald J.; and Childress. Hugh L., Jr., to Marquette Metal
Products Co. Sull sensing circuit for shaded pole motors. 4,379,986,
Cl. 318-434.000.
Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc.: See-
Cunningham, Joel, 4,379,472, CI. 138-89.000
DeVries, James H., 4,379,452, Cl. 604-6.000.
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft: See—
"^1-11?000 '""^ ^^^^i' Hans-Albrecht, 4,379.861, Cl.
Samaritter. Reinhard; Schoberth, Winfried; and Volland, Robert
4,379,856, Cl. 521-51.000.
^'!I?"j!fo' '"8^ '^""^'■' """"s P : and Wagner, Kuno. 4,379,905,
1-1. 5^0-73.000.
Wagner, Kuno, 4,379,862, Cl. 521-158.000.
Bayensche Motoren Werke A.G.: See—
Hauslein, Siegfried; Steinberger. Hans; Heigl. Willibald; Scheichl,
Georg; and Kauderer, Erwin, 4,379,352, Cl. 5-471 000
Bayly Engineering Limited: See—
Krajewski, ZdzisUw A. A., 4,380,010, Cl. 343-1 13.00R
Beach, Robert G.: See—
Ball, Harold M.; and Beach, Robert G., 4,379,502, Cl. 192-71 000
Beardsley, Brent C; and Brailey, Allen C, to International Business
So K fi'^-n 000 ^"°' ''°"''°' '" " hierarchical system.
Beck, Manfred: See—
Helling, Gunter; Ohlschlager, Hans; Himmelmann, Wolfgang; and
Beck, Manfred. 4.379,838. Cl. 430-518.000.
Beckman Instruments. Inc.: See—
Harman. John N.. Ill, 4.379,402, Cl. 73-23.000.
Beer, Gary L; and Chemtob, Elie, to Occidental Research Corpora-
4°79 776 a 42302T0OR*'"'"'"'"" ""^ ""°""' '" phosphoric acids.
Bell & Howell, Company: See—
Hainsworth. Thomas E.; and Houskamp. Robert W., 4,379,497, Cl.
180-168.000.
Bell, Ronald L.: See—
^ C?73(^2?9 (So ^"' '^°""'*' ^ ' "** "^'*"' ^^^ ® • '♦•"'•^'
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See—
^VIT&J""^ ^- ■''■•= ""* Shiever, John W., 4,379,616, Cl.
350-96.340.
Kohl, Paul A., 4,379,738, Cl. 204-55.00R.
Bellows, Richard J.: See—
Tsien Hsue C; Newby, Kenneth R.; Grimes, Patrick G.; and
Bellows, Richard J., 4,379,814, Cl. 429-42.000.
Bendix Corporation, The: See-
Wood, Richard D., 4,379,412, Cl. 73-863.240.
Beneke, Wolfgang; and Jager, Walter, to Tnitzschiar GmbH & Co KG
Method and apparatus for separating waste from a fiber-and-waste
mixture. 4,379,357, Cl. 19-105.000.
Bennewitz, Matt C: See—
Bennewitz, Paul F.; and Bennewitz, Matt C, 4,379,406, Cl.
73-336.500.
Bennewitz, Paul F.; and Bennewitz, Matt C. Relative humidity detector
systems and method of increasing the calibration period of relative
humidity detector systems. 4,379,406, Cl. 73-336.500
Berge, Charles T.: See—
Mack, Mark P.; and Berge, Charles T., 4,379,766, Cl. 260-413.000.
Berry, Larry R., to Sun Studs, Inc. Veneer lathe log charger system
lil'^fi^*"*^*'' accuracy and rate of production. 4,379,476, Cl.
Bethune, Donald S., to International Business Machines Corporation
AppM-atus for four side transverse irradiation of a region. 4,380.076,
Cl. 372-54.000.
Bevan, David; Yee, James S.; and Pniyn. Richard R., to Boeing Com-
pany, The. Radome for aircraft. 4,380,012, Cl. 343-705.090.
BFG Glassgroup: See —
Posset, Robert, 4,380,040, Cl. 361-280.000.
Bianchi, Valerio; Abidin, Anwar; and Thonnessen, Dieter, to Bosch A
Pierburg System ohG. Carburettors for internal combustion eneines
4,379,770, Cl. 261-142.000. *^
Bickel, Wolf; Kaule, Walter; and Primbsch, Erik, to Krautkramer- Bran-
son, Inc. Apparatus for maintaining adjustment of coincidence and
relative phase relationship of light beams in an interferometer
4,379,633, Cl. 356-359.000.
Bickel, Wolf: See—
Primbsch, Erik; and Bickel. Wolf, 4,379,409, Cl. 73-643.000
Blame, Edward H., to Merck & Co., Inc. Anti-inflammatory comDosi-
Uon. 4,379,792, Cl. 424-270.000. '^
Blake, Charles E.: See—
Otis, Harold R.; and Blake, Charles E., 4,379,807, Cl. 428-383.000.
Blake, Charles R.: See—
Mullersman, Ferdinand H.; and Blake, Charles R., 4,379,816, Cl.
429-91.000.
Blank, Werner J.: See—
'T3'?9,9?rc1.?28.S?Sx)^*™" '■• ""' ^'•^"' ^^' '■•
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
Blatter. Johann; and Schaad. Walter, to Sprecher & Schuh AG. Gas-
blast switch. 4.379,958, CI. 200-148.00A. . , , a
Block, Siegmar. to Thyssen Industrie AG. a,ntroldev.<^for an ad-
vancing support in underground mining. 4,379,662. CI. 405-302.000.
Bloom, Arnold L.: See— . ij i a 17q 07 c\
Fischer, Dennis G.; and Bloom, Arnold L., 4,379,622, t-l.
350-394.000.
Bloomfield Manufacturing Co., Inc.; See—
Mcintosh, Thomas K.. 4,379,546, CI. 254- 11 LOOO.
Blough, LeVone A.; and Gregory, David L. Shdmg closure secunty
system. 4,379.576. CI. 292-205.000.
Bode. Elwood J., to BTI Computer Systems. Data recording format
and method and apparatus for producing same. 4,380,029. CI.
360-48.000. . ^ , Ai;
Boden, Richard M., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Ali-
phatic branched olefin dioxolanes, dithiolanes, and oxathiolanes and
uses thereof in augmenting or enhancing the aroma and/or taste ot
consumable materials. 4,379,754, CI. 252-174.110.
^ Bau«,"sSriS!7nd Boebel, Manfred, 4.379.458, CI. 604-264.000.
^°'K,X7d;?e^: jI^Is S.; and Pruyn, Richard R., 4,380,012, CI.
343-705.000. __
King. Charles H., 4,380,039. CI. 361-218.000. . „» ,^ p,
Bohle, Lorenz. High efficiency sorting apparatus. 4,379,509, Ci.
209 598 000
Bohman. Nils-Erik, to Forsheda Gummifabrik AB. Pipe sealing device.
4,379,559, CI. 277-207.00A.
^\ralTt,°Werner; Helling, Gunter; Matschke, Guunther; and Boie,
Immo, 4,379.829. CI. 430-215.000.
Boleda Vila, Antonio: See — . ^ . c
Calzada Badia. Jose-Maria; Boleda Vila. Antonio; Sabater Sanmar-
tin. Jose; and Villazon Meneses. Mana J., 4,379,793, CI.
424-274.000. , ^ ^ ^ -n.- H.ir
Bolich. Raymond E.. Jr., to Procter & GamWe Company, The. Hair
care compositions. 4,379,753, CI. 252-106X)00.
Borden Pe^r G.; Bell, Ronald L.; and Hyder, Syed B., to Vanan
Associates, Inc. Grooved solar cell for deployment at set angle.
4 379 944 CI 136-259.000.
Borisov, Vl'adimir S.; and Korovin, Vyacheslav V. Linear interpolator
BoS:%ifam'l!^ sYvSS^Frank M.; and Waltz Joseph M to Neu-
romed Inc. Multi-electrode catheter assembly for spinal cord stimu-
lation. 4,379,462. CI. 128-786.000.
Boruschweitz. Manfred: S«— .. , j j /- . -n,-..^,.,
Hamisch Hans J.; Boruschweitz, Manfred; and Gast, Theodor.
4.379,404. CI. 73-35.000.
Bosch & Pierburg System ohG: See—
Bianchi, Valerio; Abidin, Anwar; and Thonnessen. Dieter.
4,379.770. CI. 261-142.000. . ,, .
Boshoven. Billy, to Estel Hoogovens BV. E/J«f '/f »7,^'|'^^°^
use in the cast house of a blast furnace '*-379.548 Gl. 26^158^0(»^
Bottum, Edward W. Ice-making evaporator. 4.379 390, CI. «-354.uuu.
Boulos Maher I., to Universite de Sherbrooke. Punfication of metallur-
gical grade silicon. 4.379,777. CI. 423-348.000.
Bowden Wade R., Jr.. to Slater Electric Inc. Shuttered receptacle.
4,379.607, CI. 339-40.000.
Bowers, Donald P.: See— yA t> a \-iq i.\\ r\
Brammer, Michael A.; and Bowers, Donald P., 4,379,413, CI.
74-710.500. ^ , Ai70Aoa r\
Boyd, George M. Astrology chart apparatus. 4,379,698, CI.
434-106.000.
"" ^M\'Sthrir;^ertl.379,899, CI. 526-144.000.
^""B^r5;!S,''Br?m~C.; and Brailey, Allen C, 4,380,067. CI.
371-11.000.
Brain Dust Patents Esublishment: See—
Kuchler. Fritz. 4.379.416. CI. 83-23.000.
BramS Michael' A, arid Bowers, Donidd P., to Dana Corporation.
Annledriveunit. 4,379,413, CI. 74-710.500. ,, . j
Brandstetr Jiri; Hul^ja, Josef; and Kupec, Josef, to Vysoke udeni
tihSe Apparatus for thermochemicai quantiUtive analysis.
BrS'ShaJiSd HohJ! Amo, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Pro-
^fof preparing water-soluble phosphonomethyl ethers of cellu-
lose. 4.379.918. CI. 536-62.000.
BRD Company Limited: See —
Fisher.'^L«^lie G.. 4.379.707, CI. 464-162.000.
^'' AndiSn^HS^Erhardt; BrebelsJaekJ^ Matschke. Klaus; and
Scheier. Franz. 4.379,774, CI. 264-284.000.
^'%'S''Arc^Sd^L.''R'^bertson. James B.; and Breckenridge.
Roger A.. 4.379,970, CI. 250-338.000.
^"'K;ik?Rlt=n'i?"i'uresh, Dev D.; and Bridgeman, David R..
4.379.925. CI. 544-102.000.
British Petroleum Company Vl^Jif'iPf,^'"
Wilson. Douglas. 4.379.873. CI. 524-7.000. .„g4.q ci
Britz. Ame J. Fire hydrant cap with recessed valve. 4.379.469. ci
137-296.000.
^^'^Pafmer. Riymoiid J.; and Micheaux, Dominique. 4,379.798. CI.
428-113.000.
Brost. Robert L.; and Gagle. Duanc W.. to Phillips PeiroJeum Com-
pany. Process and apparatus for laying a subterranean nim. 4.379.033,
CI. 405-176.000. „ J «, XI Ki u
Brown, David; Giles, Anthony F.; Cramer, Howard W; Noble. R
Mary; Nisbet, Louis J.; Bushell, Michael E.; Weare, Glenis; and
Caldwell, Ian Y., to Glaxo Group Limited. Cephalosponns
4,379,920, CI. 542-427.000. .... * w ,.
Brown Robert L , to White Consolidated Industries, Inc. Asphalt
paver with telescoping screed. 4.379,653, CI. 404-118 000.
Brownscombe, Thomas F.. to Shell Oil Company. Rapid cunngepoxy-
unsaturated monomer compositions. 4.379.908. CI. 528-91 ww
^"^ RSk^l^ch^'ai;^ Brunner. Josef. 4.379.604. CI. 312-330.00R.
Bruynes. Cornells A.; and Jurnens. Theodorus K., to Gist-Brocades
N V Preparation of 7-acylamino-3-(thio-substituted)-methyl 3-ccph-
em-4-carboxylic acid- 1 -oxide derivatives. 4,379,923, CI. 544-26.000.
^''"john^tiohfRTand Brydolf, Robert, 4,379,603, CI. 312-320.000.
BTI Computer Systems: See-
Bode, Elwood J.. 4.380.029, CI. 36048.000. ^ „ ^ . .
Buhnick. Gerald F., to Union Carbide Corporation. Cell having mixed
solid cathode materials for controlling cell expansion on discharge.
4,379,815. CI. 429-66.000. . -rv .
Buchmann, Heinz; Mayer. Bruno; and Szybowicz, Wolfgang, to Thys-
sen Industrie AG. Closed one-piece roller frame for vibrator rollers.
4,379.652. CI. 404-117.000.
Burke Company, The: See— ^„, ,wn««
Frankenfield, David J., 4.379.650, CI. 403-316.000.
Buriington Industries. Inc.: See—
Harris, William D., 4,380,037, CI. 361-214.000.
Burroughs Corporation: See —
Bacrania, Kantilal, 4,380,033, CI. 360-77.000^ ,«vi7onnn
Ely Richard I.; and Nelson, Edward I.. 4,379.968, CI 250-229.000.
Schmulian, David E.. 4.379,428, CI. 101-91090.
Shima, George T., 4,380,052, CI. 364-900.000^ r^ ,. h
Spencer, David H.; Stciner, Marvin E.; and Lang, Donald H.,
4,380,066, CI. 371-10.000.
Bushell, Michael E.: See— ki/»w. h
Brown, David; Giles, Anthony F.; Cramer. Howard W.. Noble, R
Mary Nisbet, Louis J.; Bushell, Michael E.; Weare, Glenis; and
Caldwell, Ian Y., 4,379,920. CI. 542-427.000.
^"'ori^^rit'ian'""; Butler, David V.; and K.dd, Patrick D..
4,379,695, CI. 433-217.000.
'^ "GSSSn.hf^'L'S^sKofr. Kl.™, 4.37,.M0. CI «5.|0000
C. Hoegger & Cie, AG.: See—
Geisibuhler. Hans, 4,379,356. CI. 17-45.000.
C & K Components, Inc.: See— ini in nno
Turner, W. Bard; and Shek, Thompson. 4,379.973. CI. 307-1 12.0U0
C. R. Bard. Inc.; See—
Snyder. Martin. 4.379.863. CI. 523-105.000. ^^^ n^,
Caldwell Edward W.; and Smethers. Rollo G.. Jr.. to Lockheed Cor-
poration" ransport airplane. 4.379,533. CI. 244-118.100.
Caldwell, Ian Y.; See— vi^w. u
Brown, David; Giles, Anthony F.; Cramer Howard W., Noble, R
Mary Nisbet, Louis J.; Bushell. Michael E.; Weare. Glenis; and
Caldwell. Ian Y.. 4.379.920. CI. 542-427.000.
California Fin Systems: See—
Mizell. James A.. 4.379.703. CI. 441-79.000. . .
Calvino. Ben J., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Modular Y -type
enclosure elements for gas insulated subsutions 4.379,957, CI.
QdSd'a^BS, Jose-Mana; Boleda Vila, Antonio; Sabat" Sjnmarun^
Jose; and Villazon Meneses, Mana J., to Calzada y Cui, SK.C Pro-
cess for synthesis of esters of NK4-hydroxyphenyl)«:et*midc with
derivatives of 5-benzoil-l-methyl pyrTole-2-acetic acids. 4,379,793,
CI. 424-274.000.
"^^zL^SaSiJfoU^Srria; Boleda Vila, Antonio S-bater &«im.r-
tin, Jose; and Villazon Meneses, Mana J., 4,379,793. CI.
424-274.000.
Camp International, Inc.: See— . tia At.\ n\ n« anmr
Meier, Robert H.; and Farr, Evelyn, 4,379 463 CI. }^*-f^^
Campbell Patricia S.; and Chandrasekaran. Santosh K., to al^a
CoT^kt^n. Dosage for co«lministering dnjg «.d percutaneous
abs^tion enhancer. 4.379.454. CI. 604-897 000.
Ciuiavello Benjamin J.; and Hatzakis. Michael, to International Busi-
ng Machines Cohxjration. Self-aligned photore»«t process
4.379.833. CI. 430-325.000.
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha; See— ,„ , . -^^o
Kitamura. Takashi. 4.379.631. CI. 355-14.00R.
Matsuoka. Kazuhiko; and Minoura. Kaiuo. 4.379.612. Ci.
Mi^tSfaslS? Yasuo, 4.379.825 CI *301 ILOOa
Takahashi. Hiroshi. 4.380.053. CI. 364-900.000.
"^^lUi^Truyf^ifM-orishita, Yutaka, 4.379^5 CI 4^3.0^
CapetSr Robert i.; and McGuire. John ^^ to Onho Ph-mi^utical
Corporation. Analgesic composition. 4.379 789. CI. '♦2*-2««^
Cap^ISo. David F.;''and Donnelly J^" J;J° T"5S 3^%
Timepiece case/dial plate assembly. 4.379.644, CI. 368-3 14.WW
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
CI
ci
Carl Still GmbH & Co. KG. Firma: See—
^1^^\^^"^^' ^^*"2' '^""i a"<l Dungs, Horst, 4.379.692. CI.
Carle & Montanari S.p.A.: See—
Salicini, Sandro. 4,379.504, CI. 198-455 000
Carlock, Gaylord W.; Gamer, Jimmy G.; Gatlin, Charles M.; Guinn,
KennehF, and Reyes. Peter A., to Textron, Inc. Individual blade
control. 4,379.678, CI. 416-98.000.
Carmel Yuval; and Eylon, Shmuel, to State of Israel. Rafael Armament
Development Authonty, Ministry of Defense. Space-discharge elec-
'/■Po"','^, P*""^"'»'''y "seful as a Hash X-ray tube. 4,379,977, CI
378-136.000.
Carney, James E., Jr.: See—
Carpenter, J. Ronald: See—
Danzik, Mitchell; and Carpenter, J. Ronald, 4,379,773. Q.
*0^ I o4.UUU.
Camifh. H. T., Jr., to Chevron Research Company. Method and appa-
ratus associated with a microcomputer system for indicating next-in-
time parameters, and for controllably generating a positional code for
a rollalong switch associated with a seismic source-detector array of
an exploration system. 4,380.054. CI. 364-900 000
Cars well, Angela M.: See-
Robinson. Joseph G.; Barnes. David I.; and Carswell, Angela M
4.379.896. CI. 525-472.000. *
Cashion. Peter. Immobilization of polynucleotides and polypeptides
with tntylated polysaccharides. 4,379,843, CI. 435-178 000
Caterpillar Tractor Co.: See—
^4^79^°2T CI^42^4oBE ^*™" ^' ^'' """ '^"'*''" ^°^'^ ^'
Liesener. Kenneth P.. 4.379,389, CI. 60-428.000.
Meisel, Thomas C. Jr.; and Price, Robert J.. 4,379 674
414-699.000.
MuntjanofT. John R.; and Day. Dennis M.. 4,379 675
414-734.000. '
Roussin, Michael A.; Jones, Steven D.; and Woody. Albert L
4.379.595. CI. 299-37.000. ^ '
Censor Patent- und Versuchs-Ansult: See—
Lobach. Ernst. 4.379,831, CI. 430-311.000
Centis. Sergio to Arioli & C.S.r.l. Apparatus for steaming printed
fabncs. 4.379.392. CI. 68-5.0OC.
Ceskoslovenska akademie ved: See—
^%rl^m ^"^^^^'' *"'* Hudecek. Slavko. 4.379,868. CI.
Chabin Corporation: See —
Webster John L.; and Venaleck, John T., 4.379.361, CI. 29-857 000
Chambers Robert W.; McNeely. Michael L.; and Torrington. Leslie
^379^86^0. 4°2SS: ^'""''"^ ^°' """"'"^ ' ''^°''''^ '^^^^
Chan, May L.: See—
r^i. ^r^' ,'^"^"' J' ; and Chan. May L.. 4.379.903. CI. 528-55.000
Chandrasekaran. Santosh K.: See—
<^P^ P»'ricia S.; and Chandrasekaran. Santosh K.. 4,379.454,
Chandrasekhar, Ram: See—
Hannoosh, James G.; Harvey. Andrew C; Harding, John C; and
Chandrasekhar. Ram. 4.379.670. CI. 414-217.000
Chang, Laurence W.: See—
^ w""S97r7''c\i6o?5T(S)";' ''''" '■' '''' ^^-«' ^^"-"-
Chang. Yu-Wen: See—
^cT '3V7°-3 OOO' *^*"'"^' '*^"'^*'"' '""^ '^'"''' Thomas G., 4,380,020,
Chaparral Communications, Inc.: See—
Howard, H. Taylor, 4,380,014, CI. 343-786.000.
Charles Surk Draper Laboratory, Inc., The: See—
Whitney, Daniel E.. 4.379.363, CI. 33-169.00C
Charpentier, Robert: See—
'*iT79%2"c'r'?68-15t^"'"' ''°'""= ""'^ ''°"^'' ^*^''^''
Chattha, Mohinder S., to Ford Motor Company. High solids urethane
4?79"w6ra*528-75°00o'"'''"*°^''*"'''' ""^ ' polyhydroxy oligmer.
Chemische Werke Huels, Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Konietzny, Alfred; and Bartz, Wilfried, 4,379,890. CI. 525-332.800
Cnemtob. Elie: See —
Beer, Gary L.; and Chemtob. Elie. 4.379.776. CI. 423-32 l.OOR.
ChCT. Yeunung; and McUughlin. Michael J., to Motorola. Inc. Method
CI n9"?55R°'' ""^"'''■"•^ <^«*'"8 of LPC parameters. 4.379,949.
Chem Developments (Proprietary) Limited: See—
^"20O2?6(»"'*** ** ' ""* ^^*«'^'«'«1' Llewellyn P.. 4.379.513. CI.
Chevron Research Company: See—
Camith. H. T.. Jr.. 4.380.054, CI. 364-900.000.
^l^'''.*o,^*'*"' '"'* Carpenter. J. Ronald. 4.379.773. CI
204-184.000.
'^M8-*/oOOO°*' ^ ' ""* ^*''"'«'8' Arthur J.. 4.379.744. CI.
Chicopee: See-
Holmes, Rory A.; and Skistimas. Donald V.. 4,379.799, CI.
^Zo' 131 .Quo.
Childress, Hugh L., Jr.: See—
^[msJoS?** J ; »nd ChUdress. Hugh L.. Jr.. 4.379,986. CI.
Chiyoda Hironobu; Yamazaki. Hisayuki; and Takabe. Reiichiro, to
Hitachi Powdered Metals Company. Ltd. Method of producing
picture tube coating compositions. 4.379.762. CI. 252-507 000
Chojnowski. Edward M.: See—
Kaltz, Milton C; Chojnowski. Edward M.; Garascia, David C •
^n^%U-.^^^ •'• *"** George. Richard D., 4.379.586. ci!
296-222.000.
Chorosevic. Jerome J.: See—
^?^n^™*'^'^ ■' ' *"** Chorosevic, Jerome J., 4,379,596, CI. 301-
Ciba-Geigy AG: See—
^430-^i7a» ' ^*"' ^"^^^' *"'' Fryberg, Mario. 4,379.819. CI.
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See—
^. T'o '?*"^Jl''°^' *"** Grieder, Alfred. 4.379.938, CI. 546-345.000.
Clark, Richard P.; Frantz, Robert H.; Hawk, Gary W.; and Root, John
4J379J6O6 CI 339-'i7'Sf ^'^"'*«^ ^°^'^" ""* connector system.
''4"3S\9Ta. 54^1.^'^^^^^^ ''"'^ '"" ^""'"P-^ «*«"-'-«
Cleveland, Charles M.; and Kowalik, Peter M., to Cleaveland/Price
tnterpnses, Inc. Break-jaw construction for a disconnecting switch
structure. 4,379,956, CI. 2OO^8.0OA. =--onneciing switcn
Cleaveland/Price Enterprises. Inc.: See—
^'^^''Jr/i*^*'*^'" '^ • *"** Kowalik. Peter M.. 4,379,956, CI.
Clemens Lawrence M.; and Gasper. Alton J., to Minnesota Mining and
tS "IS" 76f. S'T2"6'28'S^'' ""•" '"''^'"^'" "^ chelation-gela-
*^'4!375,43^°?l'^J8'-m.5!^'^ Corporation. The. Shelving assembly.
Clikeman Richard R.; Jones. Donald H.; Shortridge, Thomas J.; and
Iroy. Edward J., to Rohm and Haas Company. Methyl methacry-
late-butadiene-styrene impact modifier polymers, polyvinyl chloride
compositions and methods. 4.379.876. CI. 524-109 000
Coal Industry (Patents) Limited: See—
Cobb. Harold W.; and Fotland. Richard A., to Dennison Manufacturing
company. Corona charging apparatus. 4,379,969. CI. 250-324 000
Cobum, John F.. to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Solar energy
collector. 4,379.613. CI. 350-96.100. ouiar energy
*^*Jl»f"' ?°".*''^ ^ ' '° National Can Corporation. Synchronized
bottle unloading system. 4.379.671. CI. 414-331.000
Cocks. Michael H; and Evans. Gary A., to Hobart Corporation.
177'f f¥¥? susceptibility to vibration. 4.379.495, CI.
Coherent, Inc.: See —
^^^1)^1',..^"^^ °' ^'^ ^'°°'"' Arnold L., 4,379,622, CI.
350-394.000.
*^4^"80%t'*a:'3^2-8%!o^' ^"**'"*' ^ °" '"^^ preionization device.
Colavito, Kathleen M.: See—
^°4'j79!937! CL S^fTsS OOo' ^'"'''"'" ^' """* ^'^"''^' '^°'"" ^■•
^4,379^^97! CI 428-9000°'"***''*''^ expanding pop-up decoration.
Cole, John N.; and Hettel, David A., to Mead Corporation, The. Sheet
i^B^io^"* ^^^^ *"*^ formed board products. 4,379,808, CI.
Coleman. Charles: See—
Smith Peter R.; and Coleman. Charles. 4.379,971, CI. 250-342.000
Coleman Company, Inc., The: Sec-
Farley, Scott R.. 4.379.483, CI. 165-2.000.
Collins. Stanley B.. to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company
!JerS.^.^37tT2TST3({:?r^^^" °' ' P'^"' °" '""^ ^"^-«
Color Communications. Inc.: See—
Lemer. Stanley, 4.379.696. CI. 434-98.000.
Columbia University in the City of New York. The Trustees of- See—
Spiegelman. Sol, 4,379,839. CI. 435-5.000.
^a"\7o'^« ;i?^"^^^°, ^ Industries, Inc. Sealed rotary switch.
4, J /v.VD J, CI. 200-1 l.ODA.
Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique: See
Aubert, Gilles, 4.380.084. CI. 376-204.000.
Compagnie Generale d'Automatisme CGA Alcatel: See—
Nael. Albert. 4.379,627. CI. 353-27.00A.
Conley. Eugene E.: See—
Cohn. David E.; and Conley. Eugene E.. 4,380,079, CI. 372-87.000.
Conoco Inc.: See —
Mack, Mark P.; and Berge, Charles T., 4,379,766, CI. 260-413.000.
IS.'P^.';;, JiSff ' ■'• *"** Goldsmith, Riley G., 4,379,657, CI.
405-195.000.
^\^ ^°^^ A.; and White, William A., to Eli Lilly and Company.
4(lH)-OxocinnoIine-3-carboxyIic acid derivatives. 4,379,929, CI.
544-234.000.
Conradty GmbH Co. Metal lelektroden KG: See—
Rathjen, Hans-Carl; and Koziol, Konrad, 4,379,742. Q.
204-286.000.
Contectrol Incorporated: See—
Lindley, Donald C, 4,379,374, CI. 43-61.000.
Cook Paint and Varnish Company: See—
Hansen, Douglas E.; Johnson, Steven D.; and Motko, Richard L .
4,379,857, CI. 521-54.000.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PIS
Cooper, Billy H., to Abbott Laboratories. Assimilation test for identify
ing yeasts. 4,379,841, CI. 435-34.000.
Coppola, Vincent G., to Pitney Bowes Inc. Bipolar dnver with illegal
code detector. 4,379,985, CI. 318-293.000.
Coq, Francois. Process for producing a filtering structure in particular
for cigarette filters. 4,379,465, CI. 131-332.000.
Corbacho, Carlos J., to Joyal Products, Inc. Indexing apparatus
4,379,562, CI. 279-5.000.
Cordier, Walter: See— , ,^_
Pieper, Paul; and Cordier, Walter, 4,379,417, CI. 83-27.000.
Coren, Gerald. Clip-on protector. 4,380,036, CI. 361-119.000.
Cornell, William D.; and Evans, Camot, to Sherwood Medical Com-
pany. Lancet injector. 4.379,456, CI. 128-314.000.
Coming Glass Works: See— » ,,. ,
Danielson, Paul S.; Mattison, Ronald P.; and Werner, Albert J.,
4,379,851, CI. 501-66.000.
Lock, William E.; and Snyder, Edward A., 4,379.818, CI. 430-5.000.
Corso, Anthony J.; Colavito, Kathleen M.; and Phillips. Thomas S.. to
American Hoechst Corporation. Selective acylation of hydroxy-
amino-arylsulfonic acids. 4,379,937, CI. 546-155.000.
Corvus Systems, Inc.: See— .,„„«.- ^,
Eisenhard, Bruce T.; and Hahn, Mark C, 4,380,047, CI.
364-200.000.
Cosden Technology, Inc.: See—
Kendall, Debra L.; Watson, James M.; and Wright, Danny P.,
4,379,736, CI. 203-9.000. „ ^ ,,,
Cragoe, Edward J., Jr.; Rooney, Clarence S.; and Williams, Haydn W.
R., to Merck & Co., Inc. 4-(Substituted thiazolyl)-3-hydroxy-3-pyrro-
line-2,5-dione inhibitors of glycolic acid oxidase. 4,379,791, CI.
424-270.000.
Cramer, Howard W: See—
Brown, David; Giles, Anthony F.; Cramer, Howard W.; Noble, H.
Mary Nisbet, Louis J.; Bushell, Michael E.; Weare, Glems; and
Caldwell, Ian Y., 4,379.920, CI. 542-427.000.
Creative Motion Industries, Inc.: See—
Titcomb, Steven E., 4.379,566, CI. 280-251.000. ,. , , ,
Cross, Sydney H., to Tarmac Industrial Holdings Limited. Method and
apparatus for the production of composite sheet material and a sheet
material produced thereby. 4,379,729. CI. 156-73.600.
Crounse, Nathan N., to Sterling Drug Inc. Novel compositions and
processes. 4,379,710, CI. 8-527.000. • c. . c
Cselt - Centro Studi e Laboratori Telecomunicaziom S.p.A.: See—
Di Tria, Paolo, 4,380,081, CI. 375-82.000. „ .
Cunningham, Joel, to Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Maintaining
the dimensional integrity of thermoplastic tubing ends for receiving a
luer. 4,379,472, CI. 138-89.000.
Czajkowski, Albert J: See— .,,„,,^ ^,
Schafer, David E.; and Czajkowski, Albert J., 4,379,716, CI.
71-87.000.
Dahlberg, Arthur J., 4,379,744, CI.
Dahlberg, Arthur J.: See—
Rosenthal, Joel W.; and
208-10.000.
Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See—
Nishikawa, Kazuyuki; and Hirao, Katsumi, 4,379,865. CI
523-139 000
Watanabe! Shoji; Miho, Takuya; and Fujii, Tatsumi, 4,379.915, CI
528-357.000.
Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
Amimoto, Yoshio;
526-247.000.
■.See—
and Tatemoto,
Masayoshi, 4,379,901, CI
Daitoku, Koichi, to Nippon Kogaku K.K. Apparatus for controlling
film advancement in a camera. 4,379,629, CI. 354-173.000.
Dalai, Hormazdyar M.; and Lowney, John J., to International Business
Machines Corporation. Method for making low barrier Schottky
devices of the electron beam evaporation of reactive meUls.
4,379,832, CI. 430-315.000. c * r^ . i
d'Alayer de Costemore d'Arc, Stephane M. A., to Staar S.A. Control
for bidirectional drive responsive to gaps in recorded sound.
4,380,031, CI. 360-74.100. . „ ,
Dalton, Augustine I., Jr.; and Skinner, Ronald W., to Air Products and
Chemicals, Inc. Hydrogen peroxide synthesis. 4,379,778, CI.
423-584.000.
Dana Corporation: See— ,j n ^ no^ii /-i
Brammer, Michael A.; and Bowers. Donald P.. 4,379,413, CI.
74-710.500.
Danfoss A/S: See—
Nicolaisen, Holger, 4,380,000, CI. 336-192.000.
Schmidt, Jom M., 4.379,961, CI. 219-78.010
Danielson, Paul S.; Mattison, Ronald P.; and Werner, Albert J
Coming Glass Works. Tinted borosilicate glasses. 4,379,851,
501-66.000. , ... .. J J
Dannatt, Hugh St. L., to Pitney Bowes Inc. High ratio speed reducer.
4,379,414.0.74-805.000. .. ^u o u
Danzik. Mitchell; and Carpenter. J. Ronald, to Chevron Research
Company. Process for wet spinning nylon 4. 4,379,773, ci.
264-184.000. . . , w J
Darling, Phillip H. Buoyancy control valve for scuba diving vests.
4.379,656, CI. 405-186.000.
Datakey, Inc.: See —
Flies, William P., 4,379,966. CI. 235-443.000.
David, Constant V. Buoyant apparatus propelled by a human operator.
DavSS Alan C. Catheter assembly. 4,379,506, CI. 206-364.000.
""'K'^o^tlJi/nrwitt, Ewan C, 4,379,396, CI. 72-13.000.
to
CI.
Day, Dennis M.: See —
Muntjanoff, John R.; and Day, Dennis M.. 4.379.675, CI
414-734.000.
Dayton-Walther Corporation: See—
Walther, William D., 4,379.597, CI. 301-12.00R.
Dean, Carl J. Puzzle-game. 4.379.555, CI 273-236.000
Deane, David W., to Ball Corporation. Auxiliary blanking and auxiliary
simulated video line generator unit for a video inspection system
4,380,025, CI. 358-106.000.
Deaton, David W. Medical recepUcle with disposable liner assembly.
4,379,455. CI. 604-320.000.
Deaton. Thomas: See—
Miller, Daniel R.; Deaton, Thomas; and Royer. Robert. 4.379,508,
CI. 206-507.000.
Debord, Pierre; and Marijon, Jean-Louis, to International Business
Machines Corp. Dynamic zero offset compensating circuit for A/D
converter. 4,380,005, CI. 340-347.0AD.
De Carlo, Alfred F.: See— , ^
Gravener, Roy D.; De Carlo, Alfred F.; and Noiles, Douglas G..
4,379,457, CI. 128-334.00R.
de Couasnon, TrisUn, to Thomson-CSF. Test unit for a high-rate
multitrack digiul recorder. 4,380,068, CI. 371-24.000
Dedden, Hubert; and Pfingst, Jurgen, to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesell-
schaft. Method and apparatus for previewing exposed photographic
films or the like. 4,379,632, CI. 355-68.000.
Deere & Company: See— ,,„,,, -,
Elliott. Marion D.; and Reece. Wendell D., 4,379,522, CI.
239-167.000.
Hirst, Richard W., 4,379,962, CI. 219-121.00P.
Riewerts, Paul R.; and Hillman, Stephen M., 4,379.491. CI
172-328.000.
del Fabro, Mario F., to Fiora del Fabro Y Cia. Ltda Device for draw-
ing liquids from containers. 4,379.511, CI. 215-I.OOA
Dennison Manufacturing Company: See—
Cobb, Harold W.; and Fotland, Richard A., 4,379,969, CI
250-324.000.
Deutsch, Albert S ; Lyons, Christopher F.; and Filler, Robert, to Poly-
chrome Corporation. Developer for positive photolithographic arti-
cles. 4,379,830, CI. 430-309.000.
Deutsch, Ralph, to Kawai Musical Instrument Mfg. Co., Ltd. Adaptive
strum keying for a keyboard electronic musical instrument. 4,379,420,
CI. 84-1.030. . „ . ^
Deutsche Gold- und Silber-ScheideansUlt Vormals Roessler: See—
Werle, Peter; Graf, Hans; and Walter, Erwin, 4.379,871, CI.
523-331.000. . . „ .. ^
DeVries, James H., to Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Prepackaged,
self-contained fluid circuit module. 4,379,452, CI. 6O4-6.000.
Diamond Shamrock Corporation; See—
O'Malley, Mary A.; and Drake, Nancy J., 4,379,893, CI.
525-386.000.
Solomon, Frank; and Grun, Charles, 4,379,772, CI. 264-49.000
Waitkus, Calvin J., 4,379,913, CI. 528-300.000.
Dickerson, Richard C, to Ecolochem, Inc Vinyl acetate punfication
process. 4,379,940, CI. 560-248.000
Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishizuka, YuUka, 4,379,425, CI. 92-71.000.
Diesse Diagnostica Senese S.r.l.; See —
Ricci, Antonio, 4,379,850, CI. 436-517.000.
Digital Equipment Corporation: See—
Lipcon, Jesse B., 4,380.088. CI. 455-67.000.
'"'Klein. Merv V~ Kclm. Dan W.; and Din. Salah U.. 4.379,664, CI.
406-68.000. .^ ^ ,
Director-General of the Agency of Industrial Science and Technology;
Watanabe, Tadahiko; and Kono, Shinichi, 4.379,852, CI.
501-87.000.
Dirscherl, Teresa A.: See— ^ ,^ u , t a
Tessler, Martin M.; Wurzburg, Otto B.; and Dirscheri, Teresa A.,
4,379,919, CI. 536-108.000.
Di Tria, Paolo, to Cselt - Centro Studi e Laboratori Telecomunicaziom
SpA. Digiul receiver for four-phase-modulated carrier. 4,380,081,
a. 375-82.000. , , ^ ,„ ,„
Dmitrowsky, Igor. Aircraft attachable to the body of a pilot. 4,379,532,
CI. 244-4.00A.
Dochev, Raycho v.; See— „ , kj
Stoev, Stoycho M.; Dshendova, Shtelyana D.; Stoyanov, Kinl N.;
Dochev, Raycho V.; and Krestev, Tzvetan P., 4,379,714, CI
65-19.000.
Dr. Karl Thomae Gesellschafl mit beschrankter HaftunR: See—
Heider, Joachim; Austel, Volkhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Kadatz,
Rudolf; and Lillie, Christian, 4,379,788, CI. 424-251.000.
Maier, Roland; WeUel, Bemd; Woitun, Eberhard; Reuter ^olf-
gang Lechner, Uwe; and Goeth, Hanns, 4,379,784, CI.
424-229.000. ^ ^ no «#. ri
Dodds, William E. Ore mill and metal separating device. 4,379,526. ci
241-79.100. . ,„ ,
Doninger. Joseph E.; and Hanson, George D., to Internationa^ Minerals
& Chemical Corp. Olivine bedding material for soaking pite.
4,379.691, CI. 432-3.000.
Donnelly, James J; See— , Aiiat.AA m
Capolupo, David F.; and Donnelly, James J., 4,37V,*44, u.
368-314.000.
Douke, Harumi; See— ....... », .
Iwata. Masayosi; Douke, Harumi; Hayashi, Yoshikazu; Yokoyama,
Tadashi; wid MizuU, Yukio. 4,379,954, CI. 20CM.000.
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
Dounce. George H,; and Moore. John A., to Bausch & Lomb Incorpo-
rated. Contact lens disinfecting apparatus. 4.379.965, CI 219-521 000
Dow Chemical Company. The; See—
Pews. Richard G., 4,379,930. CI. 544-298.000.
^''i'','^^;,!^^*"'^*" ^ • Lowery. Kirby. Jr.; and Gibbs. Ronald L.,
4,379.760. CI. 252-429.00B.
Dow Coming Corporation: See—
Plueddemann, Edwin P., 4,379.931. CI. 546-14 000
Down, Peter E.; and Tomlinson, Walter J., Jr., to Ecodyne Corpora-
tion. Method of ion exchange regeneration. 4,379,855. CI 521-26 000
Downing, Gerald T.; and Savagian, Michael D., to W. H. Brady Co
Graphics-beanng element and fluid line marking tape 4 379 805 CI
428-346 000 p^:. ■»,j/:,,ouj. ui.
Drake, Nancy J. See—
O'Malley, Mary A.; and Drake, Nancy J., 4 379 893 CI
525-386.000. . ■ . v,i.
Dresser Industries, Inc.: See —
Kerkman, Thomas W.. 4.379.568, CI. 280-400.000
Dshendova, Shtelyana D.: See—
Stoev, Stoycho M.; Dshendova, Shtelyana D.; Stoyanov, Kiril N
Dochev. Raycho V.; and Krestev. TzveUn P 4 379 714 Cl'
65-19.000. ' ■
Duncan. Leo D. Seat structure. 4,379,587, Cl. 297-192 000
Dungs, Horst: See-
Weber, Heinnch; Lorenz. Kurt; and Dungs. Horst, 4,379 692
432-18.000.
Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company: See-
Levitt, George; and Weigel, Russell C, Jr., 4,379 717
71-92.000.
Levitt, George, 4,379,769, Cl. 26O-545.0OR.
McLaughlin, Joseph E.; and Strickland, George A., 4,379.886, CI.
525-162.000.
Duvall, William S.: See—
'-°."?' ^""' ^- Duvall, William S.; and Allen, Donald P
4.380,009, Cl. 340-825.550.
Dyer, Keith: See-
Rose, John A.; and Dyer, Keith, 4,379,666, CI. 409-110000
Eastman Kodak Company: See—
Lu. Chen-i, 4,379,912, CI. 528-274.000.
^^hi^^' ^^"^"- ^"^y ^- 3"<1 Kurtz, Clark N., 4,380.023. Cl.
C, and Seymour, Robert W., 4,379,«0I, Cl.
Cl
Cl
4.379,811. CI.
101-35.000.
C; and Seymour, Robert W., 4,379,802, Cl.
Wolfgang; Kadatz,
Cl
Weaver, James
428-220.000.
Weaver, James
428-220.000.
Yeaw, David C, 4,379,848, Cl. 436-84,000
Ebauches, S.A.: See—
Meyrat, Clement, 4,379.642. CI. 368-188.000.
Eberlein. Wolfgang: See—
Heider. Joachim; Austel. Volkhard; Eberlein, ..^..ga..-
Rudolf; and Lillie. Christian. 4.379.788. CI 424-251 000
Ecodyne Corporation: See-
Down, Peter E.; and Tomlinson, Walter J.. Jr , 4,379.855.
521-26.000.
Ecolochem, Inc.: See—
Dickerson, Richard C, 4,379,940, CI. 560-248 000
Econorny, James; Gritter, Roy J.; and Hiraoka, Hiroyuki, to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation. Positive electron beam resists
of ortho chloro substituted phenol or cresol condensed with formal-
dehyde. 4,379,826, CI 430-141.000.
Eder, Ulrich: See—
Horowski, Reinhard; Kchr, Wolfgang; Sauer, Gerhaixi; Eder
Ulnch; and Lorenz, Hans P., 4,379,790, CI 424-261 000
Eggenstein, Friedrich; See-
Rosenberg, Harry; Plester, Karl-Heinz; Eggenstein, Friedrich and
Terhorst, Gunter, 4,379,424, CI. 92-13 410
^''-^''^v?*'"-'.*'"'? ^ ■ *"*^ ^'^^'' '^■'^'1"'' ^ • "'• »o Upjohn Company,
1 he. Novel polyurethane product. 4,379,904, Cl. 528-65 000
Eisele, John F.; and Mercer, Elizabeth A., to Minnesota Mining and
y;!",",, i^"8 Company. Liquid sorbent materials. 4,379,804, CI
428-332.000.
Eisenberg, Arnold J., to Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation.
vi,22. ^° "PP^atus for forming glass fibers. 4.379,713, Cl.
o5- 1.000.
Eisenberg, Steven K.; and Hancock, Mark W., to Whittaker Corpora-
♦'°" "yaropon'c growing system and method. 4,379,375. Cl.
Eisenhard. Bruce T.; and Hahn, Mark C, to Corvus Systems, Inc
Interface apparatus employing a video tape drive to back-up a disc
4.380,047^Cl."3KooOTO°' '^^'"=''"« """^ correcting circuitry
Elevator GmbH: See—
Makinen. Heimo, 4,380.049, Cl. 364-426.000.
Eli Lilly and Company: See-
Conrad, Robert A.; and White, William A., 4 379 929 Cl
544-234.000. -^.^'^.y^y, «-i.
Hall, David A.. 4,379,739, Cl. 204-72.000.
Hull, Robert N.; and Gordee, Robert S.. 4.379,781, Cl. 424-1 14 000
Kirst, Herbert A., 4.379,917, Cl. 536-16.800.
Lunn, William H. W.; and Wheeler, William J., 4 379 787 Cl
424-246.000. .^'y.'oi, ^i.
Elliott, Marion D.; and Reece. Wendell D.. to Deere & Company
Folding spray boom assembly. 4,379,522, Cl. 239-167.000.
Elliott Turbomachinery Company, Inc.: See
Angelo, Eugene V.; and Pratap, Prem, 4,379,544, Cl. 251-74.000.
Elter, Claus: See—
^|i°f"'."8' ^°^f' Schwiers, Hans-Georg; Elter, Claus; Stracke
Wilfried; and Mauersberger, Reinhard, 4,380,085, Cl!
376-381.000.
Ely, Richard I.; and Nelson, Edward I., to Burroughs Corp. Photo-opti-
^Z^^-vyVn^^^ ^""'"^ ''^'" attenuating means. 4,379,968, Cl.
Ema. Hideaki: See—
Nakamura. Hitoshi; Nishizima. Hideyo; Ema. Hideaki; Harieaya
Makoto; and Otomura, Satoshi, 4.379.820, Cl 430-58 000
Endres, Lothar: See —
Lapp, Otto; von Rintelen, Harald; Moll, Franz; and Endres, Lo-
thar, 4,379,837. Cl. 430-434.000.
Energy Conversion Devices. Inc.: See—
Hallman. Robert W., 4,379,827, Cl. 430-166.000.
Yang, Chi C; Madan, Arun; Ovshinsky, Stanford R.; and Adler
David, 4,379,943, Cl. 136-249.000. a '^aier,
Engeler, Paul; Sonderegger, Hans C; and Wolfer, Peter, to Kistler
Instrumente AG. Force transducer, particularly for ballistic pressure
measuring. 4,379,405, Cl. 73-167.000.
Enckson, Kent E., to Keuffel & Esser Company. Light modulator
employing electrooptic crystals. 4,379,620, CI. 350-387 000
Erie Technological Products, Inc.: See—
Soong, Jakob C. K., 4,379,854, CI. 501-138.000
ESAB Aktiebolag: See—
Puschner, Manfred; and Gerdau, Herbert,
428-555.000.
Esmil International B.V.: See—
Hoogendoom, Arie, 4,379,748, Cl. 209-11.000
Estel Hoogovens BV.: See—
Boshoven, Billy, 4,379,548, Cl. 266-158.000.
Middel, Jan; and Gorter, Cornelis A., 4,379,427, Cl
Ethyl Development Corporation: See—
Tate, Dennis J.; and Trevino, Henry. 4,379,688, Cl. 425-526.000.
Evans, Camot: See—
Cornell, William D.; and Evans. Camot, 4,379,456, CI. 128-314 000
tvans, L)ona1d E.: See —
Baldwin, Floyd G.; and Evans, Donald E., 4,379,535 CI 244-
137.00R. . v,!. .t-m
Evans, Gary A.: See—
t. jF'if!^*' ^'<^*'»e' H ; and Evans, Gary A., 4,379,495. CI. 177-1.000
Ex-Cell-O Corporation: See—
Leichtl, Ludwig, 4,379,574, CI. 285-211.000.
Exxon Research and Engineering Co.: See
Coburn, John F, 4,379,613, Cl. 350-96.100.
Lundberg, Robert D., 4,379,914. CI. 528-354000.
Pohzzotti. Richard S.; and Krutenat, Richard C., 4,379,745, Cl.
2uo- 1 32.000.
Tsien Hsue C; Newby, Kenneth R.; Grimes, Patrick G. and
Bellows, Richard J., 4,379,814, CI. 429-42.000
Eylon, Shmuel: See—
Carmel, Yuval; and Eylon, Shmuel, 4,379,977, Cl. 378-136 000
FA. Maschinenfabrik Buckau R. Wolf AG: See—
Franzen, Paul, 4,379,734, CI. 159-17.00R.
FAG Kugelfischer Georg Schafer & Co.: See—
Muller, Armin, 4,379,600, CI. 308-187.100.
Fah, Hansjakob; and Grieder, Alfred, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation
rl?^^J^^ producing 2,3,5-trichIoropyridine. 4,379.938, Cl
546-345.000.
^^i''?!?!'^',^*^"^ ^ Bonding applicator for producing flexible tubine
4,379,732, Cl. 156-428.000. *
Falkenburg, Hans R.; Krause, Siegfried; and McGuiness, Robert C . to
Hermann Wiederhold GmbH Corp.; and Imperial Chemical Indus-
tnes PLC. Coating compositions. 4,379,909, Cl. 528-94.000.
Farley, Scott R., to Coleman Company, Inc., The. Method of control-
ling heating and cooling sources. 4,379,483, CI. 165-2.000
Fan. Evelyn: See —
Meier, Robert H.; and Farr, Evelyn, 4,379,463, CI. 128-80 OOC
Fern Engineering: See—
Bakken, Gordon J., 4.379,560, Cl. 277-236.000.
Fette, Bruce A., to Motorola, Inc. High speed digital divider having
normalizing circuitry. 4,380,051, Cl. 364-766.000.
Fickel, Walter; and Ries, Gerhard, to Akzo NV. Porous, powdery
polypropylene. 4.379,860, Cl. 521-61.000. ^
Field, George F.; Fryer, Rodney I.; Trybulski, Eugene J.; and Walser,'
4l3™9,765,'ci mSrOB'" ^°^^^ '"*" Py''«°'°be"«»«Pin«.
Fiora del Fabro Y Cia. Ltda.: See-
del Fabro, Mario F., 4,379,511, C1. 215-1.00A.
Fischer, Dennis G.; and Bloom, Arnold L., to Coherent, Inc. Broad
band phase shift system. 4,379,622, Cl. 350-394.000
Fischer, Rolf: See—
Weitz. Hans-Martin; and Fischer, Rolf, 4,379,756, Cl. 252-41 l.OOR.
Fish, Ivan L. Artist's freehand sketching device. 4,379,364, Cl.
Fisher, Leslie G., to BRD Company Limited. Splined joints. 4,379,707.
Cl. 464-162.000.
Fisher, Warren H., Jr.; and Bamet, Barry M., to Foster Wheeler Energy
Corporation. Wet/dry steam condenser. 4,379,485, Cl. 165-110 000
Fleming, James W., Jr.; and Shiever, John W., to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated. Aluminum meUphosphate optical fibers
4,379,616, Cl. 350-96.340.
Fletcher, Christopher L.: See—
Parrish, William J.; and Fletcher, Christopher L., 4,380,056, Cl.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
Method for co-
4,379,916. CI.
4.379,898, CI.
Flies. William P., to Datakey. Inc. RecepUcle for electronic informa-
tion key. 4,379,966. CI. 235-443.000.
Flowers, Ralph G., to General Electric Company
precipitating wire coating enamel composition.
^ 528-494.000.
FMN Schuster GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Tschentscher, Alfred, 4,379,528, CI. 242-43.00R.
Fodor, Lawrence M,: See—
Selman, Charles M.; and Fodor, Lawrence M
526-124.000.
Foege, Ronald E.; and Kerek, Leslie L., to Hughes Aircraft Company.
Connector with low force socket conUct having an integral hood.
4,379.611, CI. 339-2 17.00S.
Fonderie & Ateliers des Sablons: See—
Godat, Jean; and Paget, Jean. 4.379.496. CI. 177-25.000.
Ford Motor Company; See—
Chattha. Mohinder S.. 4.379,906, CI. 528-75.000.
Simko, Aiadar O.. 4.379.442, CI. 123-458.000.
Forgione, Peter S.: See —
Alexanian, Vazken A.; Forgione, Peter S.; and Chang, Laurence
W., 4,379,767, CI. 26O-453.00P.
Forsheda Gummifabrik AB: See —
Bohman, Nils-Erik, 4,379,559, CI. 277-207.00A.
Foster-Miller Associates, Inc.: See—
Hannoosh, James G.; Harvey, Andrew C; Harding, John C; and
Chandrasekhar. Ram. 4.379.670, CI. 414-217.000.
Foster Wheeler Energy Corporation: Sec-
Fisher, Warren H., Jr.; and Bamet, Barry M., 4,379.485, CI.
165-110.000.
Fotieva, Ljudmila I.: See—
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty, Vladimir G.; Voromn, Pavel G.;
Gurov, Evgeny I.; Isaikin, Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov. Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Viuly S.; Tabakov, Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin, Boris A.; and Fotieva, Ljudmila I., 4,379,592, CI.
299-2.000.
Fotland, Richard A.: See—
Cobb. Harold W.; and Fotland, Richard A., 4.379,969, CI.
250-324.000. _ ^ „
Frankel, Milton B.; Witucki, Edward F.; and Woolery, Dean O.. II, to
Rockwell International Corporation. Aqueous process for the quanti-
tative conversion of polyepichlorohydrin to glycidyl azide polymer.
4,379,894. CI. 525-403.000.
Frankenfield. David J., to Burke Company, The. Anchonng means for
wall braces. 4,379,650, CI. 403-316.000.
Frantz, Robert H.: See-
Clark. Richard P.; Frantz, Robert H.; Hawk, Gary W.; and Root,
John A., 4,379.606. CI. 339-17.0CF.
Franzen, Paul, to FA. Maschinenfabrik Buckau R. Wolf AG. Multi-
stage evaporator. 4,379,734. CI. 159.17.00R.
Freedom Industries. Inc.: See—
Schoft. Roger A.; and Schott, Lawrence A
70-234.000.
Freitag, Hans-Albrecht: See-
Haas, Peter; and FreiUg, Hans-Albrecht,
521-115.000. ^ ^ .
French, Gordon B.; MUls, Eugene A,; and Miall, David E., to Occiden-
tal Oil Shale, Inc. Ventilation air and process air distribution for in
situ oil shale retorts. 4,379,590, CI. 299-2.000.
French, John A. W., to WIPAC Group Sales Limited. Adjustable
support devices for swivel chairs. 4.379.540. CI. 248-406.000.
Frerking, Harlan W.. Jr.; and Kelley. Mellis M.. to Goodyear Tire &
Rubber Company, The. Acid-capped polyester resins. 4,379,895, CI.
525-437.000.
Frias, Robert, to Ingram Corporation. Pipe handling system. 4,379,676,
CI. 414-748.000. „ . .. „
Fripp, Archibald L.; Robertson, James B.; and Breckenndge, Roger A.,
to United States of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration. Pyroelectric detector arrays. 4.379,970, CI. 250-338.000.
Fritts, David H.; and Leonard. John F., to United States of Amenca,
Air Force. Battery electrode fatigue simulator. 4,379,410, CI.
73-809.000. ^ ^ „ _ .
Fruitetone, Mitchell J.; Tilly, Michele M.; and Pixton, Betty G.. to
American HospiUl Supply Corporation. Suspending medium for
immunologic reactions. 4,379,847, CI. 436-8.000.
^ Lenoir,*John; Jan. Gerald; and Fryberg, Mario, 4,379,819, CI.
430-17.000.
Fryer. Rodney I.: See— , ^ ^ , . ■ t^ , a
Field. George F.; Fryer, Rodney 1.; Trybulski, Eugene J.; and
Walser, Armin, 4,379.765, CI. 260-245.600.
Fuii Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kurilara. Tetsuo. 4,379.486, CI. 165-153.000.
Fuii Koeki Corporation: See—
Takematsu, Yoshiyuki, 4,379,983, CI. 315-151.000.
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.: See— . ^ •• „ w ^ no ano
Matsufuji. Akihiro; Ishiguro, Tadashi; and Tsuji, Nobuo. 4.379,809,
CI. 428-470.000. ^ .. ^ .. u . -r *
Fujii, Setsuro; Sugimito, Mamoru; and Yaegashi, Takashi, to Toni «
Co Ltd Phenylalanylarginine derivatives, process for producing
same and method for measuring activity of enzymes using same.
4.379,764, CI. 260-1 12.50R.
Fujii, Tatsumi: See— .„..._ . .„oqi< /^i
Watanabe. Shoji; Miho. Takuya; and Fuju, Tatsumi, 4,379,915, CI.
528-357.000.
CI.
Eiji,
4.379.393, CI
4,379,861, CI
Fujioka, Yoshiki: See—
Kohzai, Yoshinori; and Fujioka, Yoshiki. 4.379,987, CI.
318-561.000.
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See—
Ueda. Ikuo; Takaya, Takao; Kobayashi, Masakazu; Masugi, Taka-
shi Takasugi, Hisashi; Kochi, Hiromu, and KiUguchi, Tadashi,
4,379,922, CI. 544-16.000.
Fujitsu Fanuc Limited: See—
Kohzai, Yoshinori; and Fujioka, Yoshiki, 4,379,987.
318-561.000.
Fujitsu Limited: See —
Ishikawa. Hiroshi; Kojima, Takuhito; and Minamitani,
4,380,064, CI. 370-63.000.
Fujiwara, Akiko; Miyamoto, Chikara; and Okuda, Torn, to Hoffmann-
La Roche Inc. Process for the manufacture of la-hydroxydehydro-
epiandrosterone. 4,379,842, CI. 435-58.000.
Fukushima, Kiyoshi: See— .. »/ j
Andoh, Sadanari; Maeda, Junji; JFukushima, Kiyoshi; Yoneda.
Hiroichi; and Jinushi. Naotomo. 4.380,018, CI. 346-140.OTR.
Funaki, Yuji; Tanaka, Shizuya; and Mauuo, Noritada, to Sumitomo
Chemical Company, Limited. Production of triazolylvinyl ketones
4.379.921, CI. 542-458.000.
Funakoshi, Yasutomo; and Wakahau, Tamoteu, to MaUushiU Electric
Industrial Company, Limited. Rear projection screen for a color
television projector. 4,379,617. CI. 350-126.000.
Fung, Lai- Wo: See-
United Sutes of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; and Fung, Ui-Wo. 4,380,046. CI. 364-200.000.
Furuya. Katusuke, to Laurel Bank Machine Co., Ltd. Counting device
for coin sorting and counting machine. 4,379,466, CI. 133-3.00C.
Gabr, Saad Z. M. Electro-acoustic transducer means. 4.379,951, CI.
179-101.000.
Gaele, Duane W.: See—
Brost, Robert L.; and Gagle. Duane W., 4,379,655, CI 4O5-I76.00O.
Gallop, Paul M.; and Korb, Donald R., to Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc Poly-
meric compositions and hydrogels formed therefrom. 4,379.864, CI.
523-106.000.
Garascia, David C: See—
Kaltz. Milton C; Chojnowski, Edward M.; Garascia, David C;
Bauer, Barney J.; and George, Richard D.. 4,379,586, CI.
296-222.000.
Garland Manufacturing Company: See— .,«,„«««
Kempel, John J.; and Otto, Ronald F., 4,379,480, CI. 160-232.000.
Gamer, Jimmy G.; See— _ ^ . ^.. , ».
Carlock, Gaylord W.; Gamer, Jimmy G.; Gatlin. Charles M.;
Guinn. Kenneth F.; and Reyes. Peter A., 4.379.678, CI
416-98.000. ^ . . .,.
Garza, Elio M., to Investigacion Fie Fideicomiso. Gob distnbutor for
glass or other material. 4,379.715. CI. 65-225.000
Gasper. Alton J.: See—
Clemens. Uwrence M.; and Gasper, Alton J.. 4.379.763, Q.
252-628.000.
Gast, Theodor: See— „ , , ^^ ^v •
Hamisch, Hans J.; Bonischweitz, Manfred; and Gast, Theodor.
4,379,404, CI. 73-35.000.
Gatlin, Charles M.: See— ^ ^ . r^ , »j
Carlock, Gaylord W.; Gamer, Jimmy G.; Gatlin, Charles M.;
Guinn, Kenneth F.; and Reyes, Peter A.. 4,379.678. CI
416-98.000. ^^ ^ ^ „ .
Gauthier. Jean A.; and Jirkovsky. Ivo. to Ayerst, McKeniia ft Hamion
Ltd. 1.4,5,6-Tetrahydropyrimidine derivatives. 4,379.926. CI.
544-122.000. ^ ^ .^ A
Geisel, Donald J., to General Electric Company. Pnnted circuit board
electronic tester. 4,379,992, CI. 324-158.00F.
Geisen, Karl: See— ^ „ . /- .
Weyer, Rudi; Hitzel. Volker; Geisen. Karl; and RegiU. Gunter,
4.379.785, CI. 424-244.000. ^ ., . . ^
Geissbuhler. Hans, to C. Hoegger ft Cie, AG. Methodand apparatus
for producing skinless sausages. 4,379,356, CI. 17-45.000.
General Dynamics Corp./Convair Division: See—
Slysh, Paul, 4.380,013, CI. 343-753.000.
General Electric: See—
Merrill, Duane F., 4.379.902. CI. 528-18.000.
General Electric Company: See-
Flowers. Ralph G., 4.379.916. CI. 528-494.000.
Geisel. Donald J.. 4.379.992, Q. 324-158.00F.
Kelly. Peter B.. 4.379.553. CI. 273-51.000.
Mark. Victor; ilnd Hedges. Charles V.. 4.379.910 Q 528-202.000.
Mullersman, Ferdinand H.; and Blake, Charte R., 4,379,816, CI.
429-91.000.
General Foods Corporation: See— ^ l i i. r»
Suub, Herbert W.; Schanbacher, Larry M.; Zencheck. Jack D.;
and Young. Cynthia L.. 4.379,782, Q. 424-180.000.
General Refractories Company: See— ^ ,*, .^x /-i
Henry. Francis W., Jr.; and Banerjee, Subrata, 4,379.866. CI.
523-140.000.
George. Kathleen F.: See— . ,. . l i j
Warner. Burkhard E.; Goeke. George L.; Karol, FredeiKk J.; and
George. Kathleen F.. 4,379.758, Q. 252-429.008. X
George, Richard D.: See— . .. ^ n. a n
iSlu. Milton C; Chojnowski, Edward }^rp^»^.^r^ ^■
Bauer, Barney J.; and George, Richard D., 4,379.586, CI.
296-222.000.
Gerdau, Herbert: See— , ^ ^ u.j.^ ^i-raaii n
Puschner, Manfred; and Gerdau. Herbert. 4,379,811, U.
428-555.000.
PI 8
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
Gervais, Michel: See —
Walling, Jong-Hein; Arbuthnot, Gerald R.; and Gervais. Michel
4.379,435, CI. 118-643.000.
Gctscher. Philip E. Intramedullary hip pin and cortical plate. 4.379,451,
Getts. Sidney A. Motion conversion mechanism. 4,379,362, CI.
Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia: Se?—
Rosenberg, Harry; Plester, Karl-Heinz; Eggenstein, Friedrich; and
Terhorst. Gunter, 4,379,424, CI. 92-13.410.
Wojaczek, Egon; Soliman, Musufa; and Schulte, Juereen
4,379.661, CI. 405-299.000. * '
Gibbs. Ronald L.: See-
Shipley, Randalls.; Lowery, Kirby, Jr.; and Gibbs. Ronald L ,
4,379,760. CI. 252-429.00B.
Gibson-Egan Company: See —
Alemanni. James C. 4,379.505. CI. 206-329.000.
Giles. Anthony F.: See-
Brown, David; Giles. Anthony F.; Cramer. Howard W.; Noble, H
Mary; Nisbet. Louis J.; Bushell, Michael E.; Weare, Glenis- and
Caldwell, Ian Y.. 4,379,920, CI. 542-427.000.
Gist-Brocades N.V.: See—
Bruynes, Comelis A.; and Jurricns. Theodorus K.. 4.379.923 CI
544-26.000.
Glaxo Group Limited: See —
Brown, David; Giles, Anthony F.; Cramer, Howard W.; Noble H
Mary; Nisbet, Louis J.; Bushell, Michael E.; Weare, Glenis and
Caldwell, Ian Y., 4,379,920, CI. 542-427.000.
Godat. Jean; and Paget. Jean, to Fonderie & Ateliers des Sablons.
Weight measuring balance. 4,379,496, CI. 177-25.000.
Goeke. George L.; Wagner, Burkhard E.; and Karol. Frederick J., to
Union Carbide Corporation. Impregnated polymerization caulyst,
process for preparing, and use for ethylene copolymerization
4.379.759, CI. 252-429.00B.
Goeke, George L.: See-
Wagner, Burkhard E.; Goeke, George L.; Karol, Frederick J. and
George. Kathleen F.. 4.379.758, CI. 252-429.00B.
Goeth, Hanns: See—
Maier, Roland; Wetzel, Bemd; Woitun, Eberhard; Reuter, Wolf-
gang; Lechner. Uwe; and Goeth, Hanns, 4.379.784, CI.
424-229.000.
Goldammer, Georg; and Schmitt, Ludwig, to Schubert & Salzer. Appa-
ratus for interrupting the sliver supply in open-end spinning appara-
tus. 4,379,386, CI. 57-405.000. ''''•' ►^ h k fj""-
Goldowsky, Michael P.. to North American Philips Corporation
Magnetic bearing. 4.379.598. CI. 308-10.000.
Goldsmith. Riley G.: See—
Widiner, Karl J.; and Goldsmith. Riley G.. 4.379,657, CI.
Goodwin, Robert J.: See-
Amundsen, Joseph; Goodwin, Robert J.; and Wetzel, William H
4,379,810, CI. 428-541.000.
Goodyear Tire &. Rubber Company. The: See—
Frerking, Harlan W.. Jr.; and Kelley. Mellis M., 4,379,895, CI
525-437.000.
Gordee, Robert S.: See—
Hull, Robert N.; and Gordee. Robert S., 4,379.781, CI. 424-1 14 000
Gorka. Gunther; and StinshofT. Klaus, to C. H. Boehringer Sohn
QuantiUtive analysis of uric acid. 4.379,840, CI. 435-10 000
Gorter, Comelis A.: See—
Middel, Jan; and Gorter, Comelis A., 4,379,427, CI. 101-35 000
Goss, Gary J.: See—
Hirtle, Allen C; and Goss, Gary J., 4.380.065, CI. 370-96.000.
Goto. Hitoshi: See—
Iwaki. Yoshiyuki; and Goto. Hitoshi, 4,380,003. CI. 338-315 000
Goto. Takeshi: See—
leinura. Takusuke; Goto. Takeshi; and Komaki. Hiroshi, 4,379,602.
CI. 312-268.000.
Goudy. Paul R.. Jr., to Goudy, Paul R., Jr.; Landis, Bruce J. and
L*ndis, Kenneth J. Fluid pump with dual diaphragm check valves.
Graef, John N., to Realist. Inc. Folding transparency (microfiche)
viewer. 4,379,628, CI. 353-73.000. r- ^ y
Graf. Hans: See—
^51l!'f', ^'^"' ^"^' "■"*; "i*! Walter. Erwin. 4.379.871, CI.
523-331.000.
Granger, Charles C. Intake manifold mounted air and fuel mixture
heater. 4.379,443, CI. 123-549.000.
Grantham, LeRoy F.; and Johanson, James G., to Rockwell Intema-
tional Corporation. Process for separating solid particulates from a
melt. 4,379,718, CI. 75-24.000.
GrMcr, Fritz; and Seybold. Guenther, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft.
Process for two-dimensionally concentrating light, and novel pery-
lene-3,4.9,IO-tetracarboxylic acid dihnides. 4,379,934, CI. 546-37.000.
Grasselli. Robert K.; Suresh, Dev D.; and Bridgeman, David R., to
Standard Oil Co.. The Liquid phase ammoxidation of cyclohexanone
and/or cyclohexanol. 4.379.925. CI. 544-102.000.
Gravener. Roy D.; De Carlo. Alfred F.; and Noiles. Douglas G., to
United Sutes Surgical Corporation. Indicator for surgical stapler
4.379,457. CI. 128-334.00R. ^ *^
Gray, James J.: See-
Gray, Joseph L.; and Gray, James J., 4,379,545, CI. 254-8.00B.
Gray, Joseph L.; and Gray, James J., to Gray Manufacturing Co. Inc
Side lift jack for unibody automobiles. 4,379,545, CI. 254-8.00B.
Gray Manufacturing Co. Inc.: See-
Gray. Joseph L.; and Gray. James J.. 4,379.545, CI. 254-8.00B.
Green. Bemard J.; and Chorosevic, Jerome J., to Speed Clip Manufac-
turing Corp. Superpositioned vehicle wheel balance weiehts and
method. 4,379,596, CI. 301-5.00B.
Greene, Richard F.: See-
Thomas. Richard E.; and Greene, Richard F., 4,379,979, CI. 313-
346.00R. . V, J.J
Gregory, David L.: See—
Blough, LeVone A.; and Gregory, David L., 4,379,576, CI.
^ -'fc" fcW J .\AA/.
Grieder, Alfred: See—
Fah, Hansjakob; and Grieder, Alfred. 4,379,938, CI. 546-345.000
Gnmes, Patrick G.: See—
Tsien, Hsue C; Newby, Kenneth R.; Grimes, Patrick G.; and
Bellows, Richard J., 4,379,814, CI. 429-42.000.
Gritter. Roy J.: See-
Economy. James; Gritter. Roy J.; and Hiraoka, Hiroyuki,
4.379.826, CI. 430-141.000.
Groetschel. Karl M. Method of and apparatus for applying mat to the
roof of a mine working. 4.379.660, CI. 405-288.000.
Gross, David R., to J. M. Smucker Company, The. Method of concen-
trating fresh fruits. 4,379,796, CI. 426-486.000.
Grossman, Robert D. Article display stand. 4,379,432, CI. 108-153 000
Grun, Charles: See-
Solomon, Frank; and Grun, Charles, 4,379,772, CI. 264-49 000
Grunewalder, Valentine J.: See-
Miller, John D.; and Grunewalder, Valentine J., 4,379,885. CI
525-108.000.
GTE Automatic Electric Labs Inc.: See—
Holden. James R.. 4.379,993. CI. 328-120.000.
GTE Laboratories Incorporated: See—
McColl. James R., 4,379,635, CI. 356-387.000.
Proud, Joseph M., 4,379,982, CI. 315-73.000.
GTE Products Corporation: See—
Kling, Michael R.; and Kackenmeister, Carl F., 4,379,690, CI
431-359.000.
Weir. Colin B.. 4,380,089, CI. 455-127.000.
Gubbe. Bemd; Krause, Klaus-Dieter; Neidhardt, Rudolf; and Schone-
mann. Otto, to Triumph-Adler A.G. Height and inclination adjust-
able support shelf. 4,379.429. CI. 108-5.000.
Guile. Roy N.. to United Technologies Corporation. Supersonic/super-
sonic fluid ejector. 4.379,679, CI. 417-54.000.
Guinn, Kenneth F.: See—
Carlock. Gaylord W.; Gamer, Jimmy G.; Gatlin, Charles M.;
Guinn, Kenneth F.; and Reyes. Peter A., 4,379,678, CI.
*T 1 o-Vo.UUO.
Gurov. Evgeny I.: See —
Vakhnin. Gennady I.; Verty. Vladimir G.; Voronin. Pavel G •
Gurov. Evgeny I.; Isaikin, Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov. Alexandr I.; Sukrushev. VitalyS.; Tabakov, Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin. Boris A.; and Fotieva, Ljudmila I.. 4.379.592, CI
299-2.000.
Haas, David J.: See—
Juner, Adolph; Haas, David J.; and Rudd, Chester D., 4,379,481,
Haas, Peter; and Freitag, Hans-Albrecht, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft.
Process for the production of polyurethanes using morpholine com-
pounds as caulysts. 4,379,861, CI. 521-115.000.
Hagiwara, Yutaka; Takada, Toshiaki; and Yamazaki, Tetu, to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd. Ventilated disk brake. 4,379,501, CI. 188-218 OXL
Hahn, Mark C: See—
Eisenhard, Bruce T.; and Hahn, Mark C, 4,380,047, CI.
364-200.000.
Hahn, Norbert; and Hipp, Steven J., to Rite-Hite Corporation. Releas-
able locking device. 4,379.354, CI. 14-71.300.
Hainsworth, Thomas E.; and Houskamp, Robert W., to Bell & Howell,
Company. Vehicle collision avoidance system. 4.379.497. CI
180-168.000.
Hajime Industries Ltd.: See—
Yoshida, Hajime, 4.379,636, CI. 356-407.000.
Halicho, James J., to Timex Corporation. Timepiece case/backcover
assembly. 4,379,643, CI. 368-309.000.
Hall, David A., to Eli Lilly and Company. Electrolytic reduction of
cephalosponn p-nitrobenzyl esters. 4,379,739, CI. 204-72.000
Hall, William F.: See—
Ho, William W.; and Hall, William F., 4,379,991, CI. 324-58.50C.
Hallmger, Claude C; and Kervistin, Robert, to Societe Nationale
d'Etude et de Construction de Moteurs d'Aviation, "S.N.E.C.M.A.".
Device for adjusting the clearance between moving turbine blades
and the turbine ring. 4,379,677, CI. 415-175.000.
Hallman, Robert W., to Energy Conversion Devices, Inc. Imaging
structure with tellurium metal film and energy sensitive material
thereon. 4,379,827, CI. 430-166.000.
Halm, James M., to A. B. Dick Company. Composition for forming
photoconductive coating containing a photoconductive donor and an
acceptor-sensitizer. 4,379,823, CI. 430-83.000.
Hamerdinger, Randolph W.: See-
Wang, Shing C; and Hamerdinger, Randolph W., 4,380,078, CI.
372-62.000.
Hamisch, Hans J.; Bonischweitz, Manfred; and Gast, Theodor, to
Robert Bosch GmbH. Piezoelectric engine-knock sensor. 4,379,404,
Hamm, Eddie J., to Otis Engineering Corporation. Latch for well tool.
4,379,488, CI. 166-217.000.
Hancock, Mark W.: See—
Eisenberg, Steven K.; and Hancock, Mark W., 4,379,375. CI.
47-65.000.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
Handler, Laurence H.: See —
Norman, Oscar L.; and Handler, Laurence H., 4,379,746, CI.
208-262.000.
Hannoosh, James G.; Harvey, Andrew C; Harding, John C; and
Chandrasekhar, Ram, to Foster-Miller Associates, Inc. Linear pocket
letdown device. 4,379,670, CI. 414-217.000.
Hansen. Douglas E.; Johnson, Steven D.; and Motko, Richard L., to
Cook Paint and Varnish Company. Insulation composition. 4,379,857,
CI. 521-54.000.
Hansen, Howard H.; Lasky, Jerome B.; and Silverman, Ronald R., to
International Business Machines Corporation. Method of laser an-
nealing of subsurface ion implanted regions. 4,379,727, CI. 148-1.500.
Hanson, George D.: See —
Doninger, Joseph E.; and Hanson, George D., 4,379,691, CI.
432-3.000.
Harada, Hiroshi: See —
Takada, Yukimitsu; Harada, Hiroshi; and Takubo, Shuji, 4,379,702,
CI. 440-77.000.
Hardesty, Edwin C, to Western Electric Company, Inc. Modular cord
coupler jack having a disconnection encumbrance. 4,379,609, CI.
339-9 l.OOR.
Harding, John C: See —
Hannoosh, James G.; Harvey, Andrew C; Harding, John C; and
Chandrasekhar, Ram, 4,379,670, CI. 414-217.000.
Harigaya, Makoto: See —
Nakamura, Hitoshi; Nishizima, Hideyo; Ema, Hideaki; Harigaya,
Makoto; and Otomura, Satoshi, 4,379,820, CI. 430-58.000.
Harkness, Donald M. Holder for a conUiner. 4,379,541, CI. 248-544.000.
Harman, John N., Ill, to Beckman Instruments, Inc. Gas analysis instru-
ment having flow rate compensation. 4,379,402, CI. 73-23.000.
Harris, Stephen E., to Stanford University. XUV Laser and method.
4,380,072, CI. 372-5.000.
Harris, William D., to Burlington Industries, Inc. Electrostatic treat-
ment of paper. 4,380,037, CI. 361-214.000.
Hartmann, Rudolf: See —
Pietzsch, Ludwig; and Hartmann, Rudolf, 4,379,542, CI.
248-561.000.
Harvey, Andrew C: See —
Hannoosh, James G.; Harvey, Andrew C; Harding, John C; and
Chandrasekhar, Ram, 4,379,670, CI. 414-217.000.
Harvey Hubbell Incorporated: See —
Hoffman, Ernest G., 4,379.605, CI. 339-14.00R.
Hashizume, Shin: See —
Miyakawa, Seii; Ikeda, Manabu; Hashizume, Shin; and lijima.
Kazunori, 4,379,517, CI. 226-189.000.
Hata, Hideo: See —
Yoshimura, Isao; Hata. Hideo; and Kaneko. Takashi, 4,379,888, CI.
525-211.000.
Hattori, Tadashi; Yamaguchi, Hiroaki; and Ootsuka, Yoshinori, to
Nippon Soken, Inc. Knock detecting apparatus for internal combus-
tion engines. 4,379,403, CI. 73-35.000.
Hatzakis, Michael: See —
Canavello, Benjamin J.; and Hatzakis, Michael, 4,379,833, CI.
430-325.000.
Hauser, William G., to Singer Company, The. Sewing machine cradle
safety interlock. 4,379.601, CI. 312-21.000.
Hauslein, Siegfried; Steinberger, Hans; Heigl, Willibald; Scheichl,
Georg; and Kauderer, Erwin, to Bayerische Motoren Werke A.G.
Motor vehicle seat and process relating thereto. 4,379,352, CI.
5-471.000.
Hawk, Gary W.: See-
Clark, Richard P.; Frantz, Robert H.; Hawk, Gary W.; and Root,
John A., 4.379,606. CI. 339-17.0CF.
Hayama, Masashi: See —
Tamai. Kiminori; and Hayama, Masashi, 4,379,803, CI. 428-328.000.
Hayashi, Yoshikazu: See—
Iwata, Masayosi; Douke, Harumi; Hayashi, Yoshikazu; Yokoyama,
Tadashi; and Mizuta, Yukio, 4.379,954, CI. 200-4.000.
Haynes, George R., to Shell Oil Company. Multifunctional coupling
agent. 4,379,891. CI. 525-342.000.
Hedenberg, William E. Universal air suspension system. 4,379,572, CI.
280-711.000.
Hedges, Charles V.: See-
Mark, Victor; and Hedges, Charles V., 4,379,910, CI. 528-202.000.
Heider, Joachim; Austel, Volkhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Kadatz,
Rudolf; and Lillie, Christian, to Dr. Karl Thomae Gesellschaft mit
beschrankter HaAung. 2-Phenyl-pyrimidones. 4,379.788, Q.
424-251.000.
Heigl. Willibald: See—
Hauslein, Siegfried; Steinberger, Hans; Heigl, Willibald; Scheichl,
Georg; and Kauderer, Erwin, 4,379,352, CI. 5-471.000.
Heimreid, Ken. Method and means for the examination of uncoagulated
blood. 4,379,849, CI. 436-177.000.
Helling, Gunter; Ohlschlager, Hans; Himmelmann, Wolfgang; and
Beck, Manfred, to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft. Photosensitive
photographic recording material comprising a dyed layer. 4,379,838,
CI. 430-S 18.000.
Helling, Gunter: See—
Krafft, Werner, Helling, Gunter; Matschke, Guunther; and Boie,
Immo. 4,379,829, CI. 430-215.000.
Hendershot, Homer; and Storrs, Charles M., to Lemco Tool Corpora-
tion. Insulation stripper for coaxial cable. 4,379,665, CI. 408-204.000.
Henry, Francis W., Jr.; and Banerjee, Subrata, to General Refractories
Company. Plugging refractory material having resin binder system.
4,379.866, CI. 523-140.000.
Hirao, Katsumi, 4,379,865, CI.
Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
impact wrench. 4,379,492.
Hercules Incorporated: See —
Zecher, David C, 4,379.883. CI. 524-801.000
Hermann Wiederhold GmbH Corp.: See—
Falkenburg, Hans R.; Krause, Siegfried; and McGuiness, Robert
C, 4,379.909, CI. 528-94.000.
Herwig, Walter; Klupfel, Kurt; Sikora, Helga; and Sprcngel, Heide. to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Process for cleaning copper<ontaining
meUl surfaces. 4,379.834, CI. 430-329.000.
Hcttel, David A.: See-
Cole, John N.; and Hettel, David A.. 4.379.808, CI 428-438.000.
Hewitt Ew&n Ct Sec •
Hope. Thomas; and Hewitt, Ewan C, 4.379.396, CI. 72-13 000.
Hildeman, Gregory J.; and Sanders, Robert E., Jr., to Aluminum Com-
pany of America. Aluminum powder alloy product for high tempera-
ture application. 4.379.719. CI. 419-60.000.
Hillman. Stephen M.: See —
Riewerts, Paul R.; and Hillman, Stephen M., 4,379,491, CI.
172-328.000.
Himmelmann, Wolfgang: See —
Helling, Gunter; Ohlschlager, Hans; Himmelmann, Wolfgang; and
Beck, Manfred, 4,379,838. CI. 430-518.000.
Hinsperger, Cornelius A. Debris trap for pool cover. 4,379,351, CI.
4-498.000.
Hipp, Steven J.: .See —
Hahn, Norbert; and Hipp, Steven J., 4.379,354, CI. 14-71.300.
Hirai, Seiichi: See —
Otsuka, Nobuyuki; and Hirai. Seiichi. 4,379.706. CI. 464-111.000.
Hiraki, Shunichi: See —
Kumamaru, Kuniaki; Hiraki, Shunichi; and Yonezawa, Toshio,
4,379,726, CI. 148-175.000.
Hirao, Katsumi: See —
Nishikawa, Kazuyuki; and
523-139.000.
Hiraoka, Hiroyuki: See-
Economy, James; Gritter, Roy J.; and Hiraoka, Hiroyub,
4,379,826, CI. 430-141.000.
Hiraoka. Masaaki, to Nippon Pneumatic
Torque control apparatus for pneumatic
CI. 173-12.000.
Hirosawa, Kuninori; and Shimada, Sumio, to Japan Styrene Paper
Corporation. Pre-foamed particles of polypropylene resin and pro-
cess for production thereof 4,379,859, CI. 521-59.000.
Hirst, Richard W., to Deere & Company. Support structure for plasma
arc cutting torch shield. 4,379,962, CI. 2 19- 12 1. OOP.
Hirtle, Allen C; and Goss, Gary J., to Honeywell Information Systems
Inc. Communication multiplexer variable priority scheme. 4,380,065,
CI. 370-96000.
Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.: See —
Okada, Yasunori; and Kasai, Shozo, 4,379,879, CI. 524-186.000.
Hiuchi, Ltd.: See—
Kawakami, Hideaki; Kitazima, Masaaki; Izaki, Naoyuki; and
Nagae, Yoshihani, 4,380,008, CI. 340-784.000.
Konishi, Seizi; Tashiro, Kazuyuki; Kamigane, Yoshihiro; Sakurai,
Takakazu; Tanifuji, Shinya; and Morooka, Yasuo. 4.379,395, CI.
72-8.000.
Matsuyama, Mitsuo; Ohhinata, Ichiro; and Kitano, Junjiro,
4,380,021, CI. 357-15.000.
Miyakawa, Seii; Ikeda, Manabu; Hashizume, Shin; and lijima,
Kazunori, 4,379,517, CI. 226-189.000.
Mori, Kinji; Ihara, Hirokazu; and Matsumaru, Hiroshi, 4,380,061.
CI. 370-16.000.
Wakai. Katsuro, 4,380,058, CI. 365-244.000.
Hitachi Powdered Metols Company. Ltd.: See —
Chiyoda, Hironobu; Yamazaki, Hisayuki; and Takabe, Reiichiro,
4,379,762, CI. 252-507.000.
Hitzel, Volker: See—
Weyer, Rudi; Hitzel, Volker; Geisen, Karl; and Regitz. Gunter,
4,379,785, CI. 424-244.000.
Ho, Roland K., to Motorola Inc. Capacitor pressure transducer with
housing. 4,380,041, CI. 361-283.000.
Ho, William W.; and Hall, William F.. to Rockwell International Cor-
poration. Apparatus for accurately measuring the volume of a meter
prover. 4.379.991. CI. 324-58.50C.
Hobart Corporation: See —
Cocks, Michael H.; and Evans, Gary A., 4,379,495, CI. 177-1.000.
Hochtemperatur-Reaktorbau GmbH: See—
Schoening, Josef; Schwiers, Hans-Georg; Elter. Claus; Stracke,
Wilfried; and Mauersberger. Reinhard, 4.380.085. CI.
376-381.000.
Hockenbrock. Richard L.. to Zenith Radio Corporation. Means and
method for making electrical connection to cathode ray tubes.
4.379,978, CI. 313-318.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See-
Andersen, Heinz-Erhardt; Brebels, Jack J.; Matichke, Klaus; and
Scheier. Franz, 4.379,774, CI. 264-284.000.
Brandt, Lothar; and HoUt, Amo, 4,379,918, Q. 536-62.000.
Herwig, Walter; Klupfel, Kurt; Sikora, Helga; and Sprengel, Heide.
4,379,834, CI. 430-329.000.
Sulzbach, Reinhard A., 4,379,900, CI. 526-247.000.
Weyer, Rudi; Hitzel, Volker; Geiaen, Karl; and Regitz. Gunter,
4,379,785, CI. 424-244.000.
Hoffman, Ernest G., to Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. Electrical recep-
tacle of molded body construction. 4,379,605, CI. 339-14.00R.
Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.: See-
Field, George F.; Fryer, Rodney I.; Trybulski. Eugene J.; and
Walser. Armin, 4,379.765. CI. 260-245.600.
1029 O.G.— 22
PI 10
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
Fujiwara, Akiko; Miyamoto, Chikara; and Okuda, Toru, 4 379 842
CI. 435-58.000. . . . .
Holcombe, J. L., to Mizell. Emerson H. Roof insulation system
4,379.381. CI. 52-404.000. '
Holden, James R., to GTE Automatic Electric Labs Inc. Pulse failure
monitor circuit employing selectable frequency reference clock and
counter pair to vary time period of pulse failure indication. 4,379,993
CI. 328-120.000.
Holderer, Horst; and Kutz, Johannes, to Kusters, Eduard. Continuous
method for bleaching with peroxide. 4,379,353, CI. 8-149.100.
Holmes, Rory A.; and Skistimas, Donald V., to Chicopee. Nonwoven
fabric having the appearance of apertured, ribbed terry cloth
4,379,799, CI. 428-131.000.
Hoist, Amo: See —
Brandt, Lothar; and Hoist, Amo, 4,379,918, CI. 536-62.000.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Otsuka, Nobuyuki; and Hirai. Seiichi, 4,379,706, CI. 464-111 000
Ribi, Valentino, 4,379,567, CI. 280-276.000.
Honeywell Information Systems Inc.: See —
Hirtle, Allen C; and Goss, Gary J., 4,380,065, CI. 370-96.000.
Hoogendoom, Arie, to Esmil International B.V. Method of separating
paper and plastic pieces. 4,379,748, CI. 209-11.000.
Hope, Thomas; and Hewitt, Ewan C, to Davy-Loewy Limited. Opera-
tion of a multi-sund hot rolling mill. 4,379,396, CI. 72-13.000.
Horigome, Eiji: See —
Ou, Hiroshi; Horigome, Eiji; and Azegami, Hitoshi, 4,380,035, CI.
360-130.330.
Homkohl, Owen T.: S^e—
Thompson, James L.; and Homkohl, Owen T., 4,379,426, CI
100-100.000.
Horowski, Reinhard; Kehr, Wolfgang; Sauer, Gerhard; Eder, Ulrich;
and Lorenz, Hans P., to Schering Aktiengesellschaft. (EroIinyl)-N,N-
diethylurea derivatives, and their preparation and use. 4,379,790, CI.
424-261.000.
Horticultural Printers/Carscallen Nursery Label Company. See-
Alexander, Lee J.; Vanberg, Harold E.; and King, Clyde E.,
4,379,372, CI. 40- lO.OOC.
Horton, Eugene B., Jr.: See—
Rundell. Herbert A.; and Horton, Eugene B., Jr., 4,379,556, CI
277-12.000.
Hoskinson, Gordon H. Incinerator. 4,379,433, CI. 110-214.000.
Hotchkiss, Alan B.: See—
Adamoski, William; and Hotchkiss, Alan B., 4,379,383, CI. 53-
266.00A.
House, David W., to UOP Inc. Resolution of racemic amino acids
4,379,941, CI. 562-401.000.
Houskamp, Robert W.: See—
Hainsworth, Thomas E.; and Houskamp, Robert W., 4,379,497 CI
180-168.000.
Howard, H. Taylor, to Chaparral Communications, Inc. Feed horn for
reflector antennae. 4,380,014, CI. 343-786.000.
Hudecek, Slavko: See—
Juracka, Frantisek; and Hudecek, Slavko, 4,379,868, CI
523-201.000.
HufT, Leslie G. Telephone switch reuining apparatus. 4,379,953, CI
179-178.000.
Hughes Aircraft Company: See—
Foege, Ronald E.; and Kerek, Leslie L., 4,379,61 1, CI. 339-217.00S.
Parrish, William J.; and Fletcher, Christopher L., 4,380,056, CI
365-183.000.
Pastor, Antonio C; Pastor, Ricardo C; and Arita, Kaneto,
4,379,733. CI. 156-6I6.00R.
Hukuba Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kobayashi, Kiyoshi; and Suga, Shuji, 4,379,355, CI. 15-101.000.
Huleja, Josef: See—
Brandstetr. Jiri; Huleja, Josef; and Kupec, Josef, 4.379,775, CI.
422-51,000.
Hull, Robert N.; and Gordee, Robert S., to Eli Lilly and Company.
Antibiotic compositions. 4,379,781, CI. 424-114.000.
Hunter, Roy D. Combination handling and conveying apparatus.
4.379.672. CI. 414-565.000. ' f yy
Hyder. Syed B.: See—
Borden, Peter G.; Bell, Ronald L.; and Hyder, Syed B., 4.379,944,
CI. 136-259.000.
lemura. Takusuke; Goto, Takeshi; and Komaki, Hiroshi, to Okamura
Corporation. RoUUble stock container closet. 4,379,602, CI.
312-268.000.
Ihara, Hirokazu: See-
Mori. Kinji; Ihara, Hirokazu; and Matsumaru, Hiroshi. 4,380,061,
CI. 370-16.000.
lijima, Kazunori: See—
Miyakawa. Seii; Ikeda, Manabu; Hashizume, Shin; and lijima,
Kazunori, 4,379,517, CI. 226-189.000.
lizuka, Haruhiko; and Sugasawa, Fukashi, to Nissan Motor Company,
Limited. Cylinder control system for multicylinder combustion
engine. 4,379.387. CI. 60-277.000.
Ikeda, Manabu: See—
Miyakawa, Seii; Ikeda. Manabu; Hashizume, Shin; and lijima,
Kazunori. 4,379.517. CI. 226-189.000.
Ikedo, Masaru; Watari, Masafumi; Yasuno, Yoshitake; and Yamashita,
Tadaoki, to MaUushiU Electric Industrial Company, Limited. Image
display device utilizing birefringence properties of ferroelectric
ceramic material. 4,379,621, CI. 350-392.000.
Ikegami, Hiroshi: See —
Shimbashi, Ichiro; Ikegami, Hiroshi; and Bando. Hidehani,
4.379,547, CI. 266-103.000.
Imai, Kazuo: See —
Mizuno, Toshiro; and Imai, Kazuo, 4,379,946, CI. 178-3.000.
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC: See—
Falkenburg, Hans R.; Krause, Siegfried; and McGuiness, Robert
C, 4,379,909, CI. 528-94.000.
Parr, Andrew F., 4,380,044, CI. 363-21.000.
Imperial Clevite Inc.: See—
Kowal, Leonard J., 4.379,399, CI. 72-388.000.
Schwarz, Albert J., 4.379,400, CI. 72-388.000.
Ina, Teruo: See —
Kimura, Minoru; and Ina, Teruo, 4,379,999, CI. 336-84.00C.
Inaishi, Kazutoshi: See —
Ashitaka, Hidetomo; Oizumi, Kyohei; Jinda, Kazuya; and Inaishi,
Kazutoshi, 4,379,889, CI. 525-247.000.
Industrie Pirelli S.p.A.: See—
Rovelli, Giuseppe, 4,379,654, CI. 405-53.000.
Ingram Corporation: See —
Frias. Robert, 4,379,676, CI. 414-748.000.
Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated: See —
Inoue, Kiyoshi, 4,379,959, CI. 219-69.00M.
Inoue, Kiyoshi, 4,379,960, CI. 219-69.00M.
Inoue, Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Method of and
apparatus for wire-cutting a workpiece by electroerosion. 4,379,959
CI. 219-69.00M. - . .
Inoue, Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Electrical
discharge machining method and apparatus using ultrasonic waves
and magnetic energy applied concurrently to the machining gap
4,379,960, CI. 219-69.00M. * * *^
Inoue, Tomohiro, to Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha. Timepieces having a
device of requesting and reciting time settings in the form of audible
sounds. 4,379,640, CI. 368-63.000.
Institut Francais du Petrole: See —
Mimoun, Hubert; Charpentier, Robert; and Roussel, Michel,
4,379,942, CI. 568-385.000.
Interactive Design Inc.: See —
Laviano, Edmund G.; and Lefebvre, Gerald S., 4,379,411. CI
73-86 1.780 •
Interieur Forma S.A.: See —
Marino, Mario H. S., 4,379.589, CI. 297-299.000.
International Business Machines Corporation: See —
Beardsley, Brent C; and Brailey, Allen C, 4,380,067, CI.
371-11.000.
Bethune. Donald S., 4,380,076, CI. 372-54.000.
Canavello, Benjamin J.; and Hatzakis, Michael, 4,379,833, CI.
430-325.000.
Dalai, Hormazdyar M.; and Lowney, John J., 4,379,832, CI.
430-315.000.
Debord, Pierre; and Marijon, Jean-Louis, 4,380,005. CI. 340-
347.0AD.
Economy, James; Gritter, Roy J.; and Hiraoka, Hiroyuki,
4,379,826, CI. 430-141.000.
Hansen, Howard H.; Lasky, Jerome B.; and Silverman. Ronald R..
4.379,727, CI. 148-1.500.
Janson, Philippe A.; Muller, Hans R.; and Rothauser, Ernst H..
4.380,063, CI. 370-60.000.
Kotecha, Harish N.; Noble, Wendell P., Jr.; and Wiedman, Francis
W.. Ill, 4.380.057, CI. 365-185.000.
Nazzal, Adel I.; and Mueller-Westerhoff, Ulrich T., 4,379,740, CI.
204-129.000.
Intemational Flavors & Fragrances Inc.: See —
Boden, Richard M., 4,379,754, CI. 252-174.110
Intemational Minerals & Chemical Corp.: See —
Doninger, Joseph E.; and Hanson, George D., 4,379,691, CI.
432-3.000.
Intemational Petroleum Engineering Corporation: See —
Sheshtawy, Adel, 4,379.494, CI. 175-325.000.
Intemational Telephone and Telegraph Corporation: See —
Ahmed, Fahim, 4,379,950. CI. 179-18.0ES.
Investigacion Fie Fideicomiso: See —
Garza. Elio M.. 4.379,715, CI. 65-225.000.
Isaikin, Vladimir G.: See—
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.;
Gurov, Evgeny I.; Isaikin, Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov. Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Viuly S.; Tabakov, Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin, Boris A.; and Fotieva. Ljudmila I., 4,379,592, CI.
299-2.000.
Ishiguro, Tadashi: See —
Matsufuji, Akihiro; Ishiguro, Tadashi; and Tsuji. Nobuo. 4.379.809.
CI. 428-470.000.
Ishii. Toshiaki. to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Thyristor con-
vertor failure detection device. 4,380,045, CI. 363-54.000.
Ishikawa, Hiroshi; Kojima, Takuhito; and Minamitani, Eiji, to Fujitsu
Limited. Digital audio signal control system for a timedivision
switching system. 4,380,064. CI. 370-63.000.
Ishikura. Shin-Ichi; Kanda. Kazunori; and Mizuguchi. Ryuzo. to Nip-
pon Paint Co., Ltd. Amphoteric amino sulfonate derivatives of epoxy
resins. 4.379.872. CI. 523-406.000.
Ishizuka. Yutaka, to Diesel Kiki Co.. Ltd. E>oubie-acting piston for
swash-plate type compressors. 4.379,425, CI. 92-71.000.
Ito, Osamu; and Watanabe, Isao. to MiUubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha.
Recording system for recording information on record medium by
using energy beam. 4,380,015, CI. 346-108.000.
ITW-ATECO GmbH: See—
Wibrow, Outer. 4,379,358, CI. 24-136.00R.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
Sumio, 4,379,859, CI.
Iwaki, Yoshiyuki; and Goto, Hitoshi, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha. Resistor device and generator for car charger. 4,380,003, CI.
338-315.000.
Iwata, Masayosi; Douke, Harumi; Hayashi, Yoshikazu; Yokoyama,
Tadashi; and Mizuta, Yukio, to Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika Denki
Seisakusho. Lever operated plural switch assembly. 4,379,954. CI.
200-4.000.
Izaki, Naoyuki: See —
Kawalcami, Hideaki; Kitazima, Masaaki; Izaki, Naoyuki; and
Nagae, Yoshiharu, 4,380,008, CI. 340-784.000.
J. M. Smucker Company, The: See-
Gross, David R., 4,379,796, CI. 426-486.000.
J. M. Voith GmbH: See—
Schiel, Christian, 4,379,369, CI. 34-110.000.
JafTee, Alan M.: See— _ ,,, ^.
Nowicki, Casimir W.; and JafTee, Alan M., 4,379,525, CI.
241-20.000.
Jager, Walter: See —
Beneke, Wolfgang; and Jager, Walter, 4,379,357, CI. 19-105.000.
Jan, Gerald: See—
Lenoir, John; Jan, Gerald; and Fryberg, Mano, 4,379,819, CI.
430-17.000.
Janson, Philippe A.; Muller, Hans R.; and Rothauser, Ernst H., to
International Business Machines Corp. Flow control mechanism for
block switching nodes. 4,380,063, CI. 370-60.000.
Janssen, Gwen V.: See-
Coats, Montgomery R.; and Janssen, Gwen V., 4,380,004, CI.
340-34.000.
Japan Styrene Paper Corporation: See—
Hirosawa, Kuninori; and Shimada,
521-59.000.
Jeco Co., Ltd.: See—
Takamatsu, Mashiro; Nakao, Makoto; and Ogawa, Isao, 4,380,043,
CI. 362-26.000.
Jeffris, Larry L.: See —
Miller, Samuel A.; and Jeffris, Urry L., 4,379.624, CI. 350-486.000.
Jenkins, Allan D.; Appelen, John T.; and Lind, Nils, to Railway Track-
Work Company. Track skeletonizer. 4,379,371, CI. 37-104.000.
Jinda, Kazuya: See— . , u
Ashitaka, Hidetomo; Oizumi, Kyohei; Jmda, Kazuya; and Inaishi,
Kazutoshi. 4,379,889, CI. 525-247.000.
Jinushi, Naotomo: See— . ^ .
Andoh, Sadanari; Maeda. Junji; Fukushima, Kiyoshi; Yoneda,
Hiroichi; and Jinushi, Naotomo, 4,380,018, CI. 346-140.00R.
Jirkovsky, Ivo: See — ^^
Gauthier, Jean A.; and Jirkovsky, Ivo, 4,379,926, CI. 544-122.000.
Joffe, Edward J., to Strauss, Howard, a part interest. Blade holder and
dispenser. 4,379,514, CI. 221-279.000.
Johanson, James G.: See— ..,-„,,o #^i
Grantham, LeRoy F.; and Johanson, James G., 4,379,718, CI.
75-24.000.
Johnson, John R.; and Brydolf, Robert, to Acme General Corporation.
Drawer with removable handle. 4,379,603, CI 312-320.000.
Johnson & Johnson: See—
Korpman, Ralf, 4,379,806, CI. 428-354.000
Johnson, Michael R.: See— .. ,,„ -.oi /-i
Melvin, Lawrence S., Jr.; and Johnson, Michael R., 4,379,783, CI.
424-184.000.
Johnson, Steven D: See— .... „ . j ,
Hansen, Douglas E.; Johnson, Steven D.; and Motko, Richard L.,
4,379,857, CI. 521-54.000.
Jones, Donald H.: See— . . . ,- ,
Clikeman, Richard R.; Jones, Donald H.; Shortndge, Thomas J.;
and Troy, Edward J., 4,379,876, CI. 524-109.000.
Jones, Steven D: See— »,. _ ,
Roussin, Michael A.; Jones, Steven D.; and Woody, Albert L.,
4,379,595, CI. 299-37.000.
Joyal Products, Inc.: See—
Corbacho. Carlos J., 4,379,562, CI. 279-5.000.
Judell, Neil H. K. Method and apparatus for removing cardiac artifact
in impedance plethysmographic respiration monitoring. 4,379,460,
CI. 128-671.000.
Julius Blum Ges.m.b.H.: See—
Rock. Erich; and Brunner, Josef, 4,379,604, CI. 312-33O.0OR.
Juner, Adolph; Haas, David J.; and Rudd, Chester D., to North Ameri-
can Philips Corporation. X-Ray apparatus and closure mechanism
therefor. 4,379,481. CI. 160-310.000. , ,. ^
Juracka, Frantisek; and Hudecek, Slavko, to Ceskoslovenska akademie
ved Method for producing hydrophilic fillers for plastics and rub-
bers. 4,379,868, CI. 523-201.000.
Jurriens, Theodorus K.: See— ^ ^ v A-tiaat^ r-i
Bniynes, Comelis A.; and Jumens, Theodorus K., A,iTf,f2i, CI.
544-26.000.
JWI Ltd ' See—
MacBean, Donald G.. 4.379.735, CI. 162-348.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha: See—
Maeda. Kateutoshi, 4,379.646. CI. 400-636.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Fujikoshi: See—
Yoshimoto. Hisanari; Tonomura. Taka; and Takamura, Takuo,
4.379,667, CI. 409-234.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho: See-
Asari, Akira; Noyori, Tatsuhiko; and Takehata, Tetsuro, 4,379,398,
CI. 72-273.500.
Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha: See— „ ,^ „««
Maezawa. Shuji; and MuraU, Masami, 4,379,641, CI. 368-74.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika Denki Seisakusho: See—
Iwata, Masayosi; Douke, Harumi; Hayashi, Yoshikazu; Yokoyama,
Tadashi; and Mizuta, Yukio, 4,379,954. CI 200-4.000
Kackenmeister. Carl F.: See—
Kling, Michael R.; and Kackenmeister, Carl F., 4,379,690. CI
431-359.000.
Kadatz, Rudolf: See—
Heider, Joachim; Austel, Volkhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Kadatz,
Rudolf; and Lillie, Christian, 4.379,788, CI. 424-251.000.
Kaizer. Adrianus J. M.; and Kopinga, Wiert, to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion. Mechanical filter for an electrodynamic transducer. 4,379,952,
CI. 179-1 15.5PC.
Kaltz, Milton C; Chojnowski, Edward M.; Garascia. David C; Bauer.
Barney J.; and George. Richard D., to American Sunroof Corpora-
tion. Sliding roof panel assembly. 4.379,586, CI. 296-222.000.
Kam, Lit-Yan: See—
Olsson, Billy E.; and Kam, Lit-Yan, 4,379,608. CI. 339-75.0MP.
Kamigane. Yoshihiro: See—
Konishi, Seizi; Tashiro. Kazuyuki; Kamigane. Yoshihiro; Sakurai.
Takakazu; Tanifuji. Shinya; and Morooka, Yasuo, 4,379,395. CI
72-8.000.
Kamino. Kyoichi. to Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd. Parking brake cable
adjusting device. 4.379,500. CI. 188-196.00B.
Kanazawa, Takato; Mori. Keijiro; Kusunoki. Shigeru; Nishii. Kazunan;
and Nobue, Tomotaka, to Matsushiu Electric Industrial Co., Ltd
Method of food heating control by detecting liberated gas or vapor
and temperature of food. 4,379,964, CI. 219-492.000
Kanda, Kazunori; See—
Ishikura, Shin-Ichi; Kanda, Kazunori; and Mizuguchi. Ryuzo,
4,379,872, CI. 523-406.000.
Kaneko, Isamu: See—
Yamabe, Masaaki; Munekata, Seiji; Kumai. Seisaku; and Kaneko.
Isamu, 4,379,768, CI. 26O-544.00F.
Kaneko, Takashi: See—
Yoshimura, Isao; Hata, Hideo; and Kaneko, Takashi, 4,379.888, CI
525-211.000.
Kapralis. Imants P.; and Krukle. Harry. Trigger to initiate crysulliza-
tion. 4.379.448. CI. 126-263.000.
Karol. Frederick J.: See—
Goeke, George L.; Wagner, Burkhard E.; and Karol. Frcdenck J.,
4,379,759, CI. 252-429.00B.
Wagner, Burkhard E.; Goeke, George L.; Karol, Fredenck J.; and
George, Kathleen F., 4,379.758, CI. 252-429.00B.
Kasai, Shozo: See —
Okada, Yasunori; and Kasai, Shozo, 4,379,879, CI. 524-186.000
Kasamatsu, Mikizo. Electric safety device. 4,380,001, CI 337-4.000
Kashiwagi, Hidehiro, to Taiyo Denko Kabushiki Kaisha. Method for
reclaiming waste thermoplastic resin film. 4,379,724, CI. 134-1.000
Katagiri, Takeshi; and Tsuchifuji, Takakazu, to Yoshizuka Sciki Co..
Ltd. Press for powder metallurgy. 4.379.684, CI. 425-78.000.
Kauderer, Erwin: See—
Hauslein, Siegfried; Steinberger, Hans; Heigl,
Georg; and Kauderer, Erwin, 4,379,352, CI.
Kaule, Walter: See— ^^„ ^,
Bickel, Wolf; Kaule, Walter; and Primbsch, Enk. 4,379.633, CI.
356-359.000.
Kawai Musical Instrument Mfg. Co., Ltd.: See—
Deutsch, Ralph, 4,379,420, CI. 84-1.030.
Kawakami, Hideaki; Kitazima, Masaaki; Izaki, Naoyuki; and Nagae.
Yoshiharu, to Hitachi, Ltd. Method of driving a matrix type phase
transition liquid crysul display device to obuin a holding effect and
improved response time for the erasing operation. 4,380,008, CI.
340-784.000. . , ,
Kazlauskas, Gasparas. Welding apparatus designed particularly for use
within a confined area. 4,379.963, CI. 219-136.000.
Kehr, Wolfgang: See- ^ .. ^ c^
Horowski, Reinhard; Kehr, Wolfgang; Sauer, Gerhard; Eder,
Ulrich; and Lorenz, Hans P., 4,379,790, CI. 424-261.000
Keller, A. Kent, to Whey Systems, Inc. Hot air drier. 4,379.368, CI.
34-57.00R.
Kelley, Mellis M.: See—
Frerking, Harlan W., Jr.; and Kelley, Mellis M., 4,379.895, CI.
525-437.000.
Kelly, Peter B., to General Electric Company. Bowling lane with fire
retardant decorative surface. 4,379,553, CI. 273-51.000.
Klein, Merv V.; Kelm, Dan W.; and Din, Salah U., 4.379,664, CI
406-68.000.
Kelsey-Hayes Co.: See —
Neill. Daniel L.; and Weiner, Paul, 4,380,002, CI. 338-153.000
Kemp, Willard E. Process for hot isosUtic pressing of a metal work-
piece. 4,379,725, CI. 148-4.000. ^ , . w r .
Kempel, John J.; and Otto, Ronald F., to Garland Manuf^tunng
Company. Energy efficient garage door construction and the like.
4,379,480, CI. 160-232.000.
Kempf, Paul S., to Kempf, Paul S. Optical comparator and inspection
apparatus. 4.379,647, CI. 401-262.000. ^ „ ^
Kendall, Debra L.; Watson. James M.; and Wnght, Danny P., to Cos-
den Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for inhibiting the forma-
tion of polymerized vinylaromatic compounds during distillative
purification of vinylaromatic monomer. 4,379,736, CI. 203-9.000.
"^^ F^"^ RonaldETand Kerek, Leslie L., 4.379,61 1, CI. 339-2I7.00S
Kerkman. Thomas W., to Dresper Industries. Inc. Articulated tractor
loader with side rear view mirrors. 4.379,568, CI. 280-400.000.
Willibald; Scheichl.
5-471.000.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
and Kervistin. Robert, 4,379,677. CI.
Kervtstin, Robert See—
Hallinger. Claude C
415-175.000.
Keuffel & Esser Company: See—
Enckson, Kent E., 4.379,620, CI. 350-387.000
Kezuka. Teruo: See—
Y°"'°™- '^enzaburo; Kezuka, Teruo; and Moriya, Mitsumasa,
Kidd. Patrick D : See—
Orlowski, Jan A.; Butler. David V; and Kidd Patrick D
4.379,695.0.433-217.000. '
Killmeyer. Fred C See—
Stuart. Richard L.; and Killmeyer. Fred C. 4,380.062, CI.
Kimura. Minoru; and Ina. Teruo, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kai-
sha Electrostatic shield for a transformer 4,379,999, CI. 336-84 OOC
King Charles H.. to Boemg Company, The. Grounding terminal for
lightning diverter strip. 4,380,039, CI. 361-218 000
King, Clyde E.: See-
Alexander, Lee J.; Vanberg, Harold E.; and King, Clyde E
4.379,372, CI, 40-lO.OOC.
Kirst. Herbert A., to Eli Lilly and Company. 6 "-(Substituted)-apramy-
cin antibiotic derivatives and intermediates and starting materials
therefor. 4,379.917, CI. 536-16.800.
Kishi, Nonmasa; and Suzuki, Tadashi, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Shift
control system for a vehicle automatic transmission. 4.380.048, CI
364-424.100.
Kissich. Amulf: See—
Zitz. Alfred; Schetina. Otto; Wrulich. Herwig; and Kissich Amulf
4.379.594. CI. 299-10.000.
Kistler Instrumente AG: See—
Engeler. Paul; Sonderegger. Hans C; and Wolfer, Peter, 4 379 405
CI 73-167.000.
Kitagawa. Katsuhisa: See—
Ohmi, Hidehiko; Kitagawa, Katsuhisa; Morimoto, Shoji; Kubo,
Tateo; Ohno. Misao; and Takahashi. Seitaro, 4,379 512 CI
215-327.000.
Kitaguchi. Tadashi: See-
Veda, Ikuo; Takaya, Takao; Kobayashi, Masakazu; Masugi, Taka-
shi; Takasugi, Hisashi; Kochi, Hiromu; and Kitaguchi, Tadashi
4,379,922, CI. 544-16.000.
Kitajima, Toshio. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Reverse
flow cooled dynamoelectric machine. 4,379,975, CI. 310-59 000
Kitamura. Akihiko: See—
Mizuno, Yoshiro; and Kitamura, Akihiko, 4,379,536, CI
248-73.000.
Kitamura, Takashi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Apparatus having a
copier function and a printer function. 4,379,631, CI. 355-14 OOR
Kitano, Junjiro: See —
'^imO^i; c"]* 357°i 5 S» '"'*'*' '''^"°' *"*^ ^'"'"°' ■'""^"°'
Kitazima, Masaaki: See —
Kawakami, Hideaki; Kitazima, Masaaki; Izaki. Naoyuki and
Nagae, Yoshiharu, 4,380.008, CI. 340-784.000.
Klancnik. Adolph V.; and Klancnik, Kenneth A., to Universal Auto-
matic Corporation. Automatic turret lathe. 4,379.415, CI 82-36 OOA
Klancnik, Kenneth A.: See—
Klancnik, Adolph V.; and Klancnik, Kenneth A., 4.379,415, CI.
82-36.0GA.
Klein. Merv V.; Kelm, Dan W.; and Din, Salah U., to Prasco Super
Seeder Ltd. Seed cup assembly. 4,379,664, CI. 406-68.000.
Kling, Michael R.; and Kackenmeister, Carl F., to GTE Products
Corporation. Photoflash switching array and fabrication utilizing
silver-oxide coated solids. 4,379,690. CI. 431-359 000
Klouda, John F : See-
Lorn. Duane L.; and Klouda. John F., 4,379,484, CI 165-16 000
Klupfel, Kurt. See—
""m8T4^Cl.'43a3?9'(»o""' ^"'°'"' "^'^^' ^"'^ ^'"'"^''' "'''^^•
Knowles, Albert H., to Rines. Robert H.; and Rines, Carol M , part
interest to each. Water-turbulence light-shielding method and appara-
tus for conHned-volume fish growth and the like 4 379 436 CI
119-3.000. ' '
Knowles, Albert H., to Rines, Robert H.; and Rines, Carol M , part
interest to each. Process and system for accelerated growth of salmo-
nids and the like in deep-water cages and similar water volumes
4,379,437, CI. 119-3.000.
Kobayashi, Kiyoshi; and Suga, Shuji, to Hukuba Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Washing machine for hollowwares. 4,379,355, CI. 15-101 000
Kobayashi, Masakazu: See —
Ueda, Ikuo; Takaya, Takao; Kobayashi, Masakazu; Masugi, Taka-
shi; Takasugi, Hisashi; Kochi, Hiromu; and Kiliguchi, Tadashi
4,379,922, CI. 544-16.000.
Kobayashi, Takehiro, to Ryobi Limited. Fishing reel. 4,379 530 CI
242-220.000. . . ^. v,i.
Koch, Richard L. Trailer hitch adaptor. 4,379,569, CI. 280^I5.00A.
Kochi, Hiromu: See —
Ueda, Ikuo; Takaya, Takao; Kobayashi, Masakazu; Masugi, Taka-
shi; Takasugi, Hisashi; Kochi. Hiromu; and Kiuguchi, Tadashi
4,379.922, CI. 544-16.000.
Koenig. Herbert G., Jr.: See —
Allen. Louis B., Jr.; and Koenig, Herbert G.. Jr.. 4.380.075 CI
372-44.000.
Koepke. Gunther: See —
Schnoring, Hildegard; Schranz, Karj-Wilhelm; and Koepke. Gun-
ther, 4.379.836. CI. 430-377.000.
CI.
Eiji,
Kohl, Paul A., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Electro-
plating zinc. 4,379,738, CI. 204-55.00R.
Kohzai, Yoshinori; and Fujioka, Yoshiki. to Fujitsu Fanuc Limited.
Spindle roUtion control system. 4,379.987. CI. 318-561.000.
Kojima Puresu Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Mizuno. Yoshiro; and KiUmura, Akihiko. 4,379,536,
248-73.000.
Kojima, Takuhito: See—
Ishikawa, Hiroshi; Kojima, Takuhito; and Minamitani,
4,380,064, CI. 370-63.000.
Komaki, Hiroshi: See —
lemura, Takusuke; Goto, Takeshi; and Komaki. Hiroshi. 4.379.602
CI. 312-268.000.
Komeda, Yorio: See —
Takahashi, Sadayuki; Komeda, Yorio; Tachibana, Matsuo; and
Nosaka, Kenkichi, 4,379,673, CI. 414-686.000.
Konietzny, Alfred; and Bartz, Wilfried, to Chemische Werke Huels,
Aktiengesellschaft. Water-soluble polymers carrying quaternary
ammonium groups, their preparation and use. 4,379,890 CI
525-332.800.
Konishi, Seizi; Tashiro, Kazuyuki; Kamigane, Yoshihiro; Sakurai.
Takakazu; Tanifuji, Shinya; and Morooka, Yasuo, to Hiuchi, Ltd.
Interstand tension control system and method for tandem rolling mill
4,379,395, CI. 72-8.000.
Kono. Shinichi: See —
Watanabe, Tadahiko;
501-87.000.
Kopinga, Wiert: See—
Kaizer, Adrianus J. M.; and Kopinga. Wiert, 4.379.952. CI. 179-
Korb, Donald R.: See-
Gallop, Paul M.; and Korb, Donald R., 4,379,864, CI. 523-106.000
Komylak, Andrew T., to Komylak Corporation. Gravity rollerwav
conveyor. 4,379,503, CI. 193-37.000.
Komylak Corporation: See —
Komylak, Andrew T., 4,379,503, CI. 193-37.000.
Korovin, Vyacheslav V.: See—
Borisov, Vladimir S.; and Korovin, Vyacheslav V.. 4.380.006, CI.
34O-347.0CC.
Korpman, Ralf, to Johnson & Johnson. Pressure-sensitive adhesive taoe
and process. 4,379,806, CI. 428-354.000.
Kotecha, Harish N.; Noble, Wendell P., Jr.; and Wiedman, Francis W .
III. to ijntemational Business Machines Corporation. Electrically
alterable double dense memory. 4.380,057, CI. 365-185.000
"^4^79 3w'"ri'' ' ' '° '""P*"^' Clevite Inc. Tube bender construction.
Kowalik, Peter M.: See—
Cleaveland, Charles M.
200-48.00A.
Kozawa, Akiya. to Union
and Kono. Shinichi, 4,379.852, CI.
and Kowalik. Peter M., 4.379,956, CI.
Carbide Corporation. Organic solvent-
and Koziol, Konrad. 4.379.742. CI.
CI.
and
treated manganese dioxide-containing " cathodes. 4,379,817 "ci
429-224.000. '
Koziol, Konrad: See —
Rathjen, Hans-Carl;
204-286.000.
Krafft, Werner; Helling, Gunter; Matschke, Guunther; and Boie, Immo,
to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft. Photographic material contain-
ing a temporary barrier layer applied from an organic solution
4.379.829, CI. 430-215.000.
Krajewski. ZdzisUw A. A., to Bayly Engineering Limited. Phase
directional antenna array and phased ring combiner for radio direc-
tion finding. 4.380,010, CI. 343-1 13.00R.
Krake, Guss L., to Magnetic Peripherals Inc. Track centering servo
pulse noise filter. 4,380.034. CI. 360-77.000.
Krakow. Kalman. Intermeshing passage manifold. 4,379.487,
165-165.000.
Krause, Klaus-Dieter: See—
Gubbe, Bemd; Krause, Klaus-Dieter; Neidhardt, Rudolf
Schonemann, Otto. 4.379.429. CI. 108-5.000.
Krause. Siegfried: See—
Falkenburg. Hans R.; Krause. Siegfried; and McGuiness, Robert
C, 4.379.909. CI. 528-94.000.
Krautkramer- Branson, Inc.: See —
Bickel, Wolf; Kaule, Walter; and Primbsch, Erik. 4,379.633, CI.
Primbsch. Erik; and Bickel. Wolf. 4,379,409, CI. 73-643.000
Krestev, Tzvetan P.: See—
Stoev, Stoycho M.; Dshendova, Shtelyana D.; Stoyanov, Kiril N •
EX)chev, Raycho V.; and Krestev, Tzvetan P., 4,379,714, Cl!
65-19.000.
Krukle, Harry: See —
Kapralis, Imants P.; and Krukle. Harry, 4.379.448. CI. 126-263.000.
Krupp. Viktor A.: See—
Qualitz. Marion; and Krupp. Viktor A.. 4.379,721. Cl. 106-21.000.
Knismark. Richard H. Safety device for ladders. 4,379,498, Cl
182-107.000. . . •
Knitenat, Richard C: See—
Polizzotti, Richard S.; and Knitenat. Richard C. 4.379.745. Cl
208-132.000. .....
Kubo, Tateo: See —
Ohmi, Hidehiko; Kitagawa, Katsuhisa; Morimoto, Shoji; Kubo,
Tateo; Ohno, Misao; and Takahashi, Seitaro, 4,379,512, Cl.
Kubou Ltd.: See—
Takahashi, Sadayuki; Komeda, Yorio; Tachibana, Matsuo; and
Nosaka, Kenkichi, 4,379,673, Cl. 414-686.000.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
Kubota, Yutaka, to Stanley Electric Co. Ltd. Method for flashing a
stroboscope for use with judging the good or bad of an object to be
inspected. 4,380,026. CI. 358-106.000.
Kuchler, Fritz, to Brain Dust Patents Establishment. Food-slicing
machine and method. 4,379.416. CI. 83-23.000.
Kuenzel, Rainer. Thread protector apparatus. 4,379,471, CI. 138-89.000.
Kuhn, Michael H.: See—
Ney, Hermann; and Kuhn, Michael H.. 4.379,948, CI. 179-l.OSC
Kumai, Seisaku. See —
Yamabe. Masaaki; Munekata. Seiji; Kumai. Seisaku; and Kaneko,
Isamu, 4,379,768, CI. 260-544.00F.
Kumamaru, Kuniaki; Hiraki, Shunichi; and Yonezawa, Toshio, to
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Method of manufacturing
semiconductor device utilizing outdifTusion and epitaxial deposition.
4.379,726, CI. 148-175.000.
Kuno, Akira; Matsumoto, Muneaki; and Numata, Koji, to Nippon
Soken, Inc. Direction fmding system. 4.379.366. CI. 33-361.000.
Kunze, Dieter, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Longitudinally divided
cable sleeve of a shrinkable material. 4,379.473. CI. 138-167.000.
Kupec, Josef: See—
Brandstetr. Jiri; Huleja, Josef; and Kupec, Josef, 4,379,775, CI.
422-51.000.
Kurihara, Tetsuo. to Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Heat exchanger
4,379,486. CI. 165-153.000.
Kurtz. Clark N.: See—
Mir. Jose M.; Vamer, Jerry R.; and Kurtz, Clark N., 4,380.023, CI.
358-75.000.
Kurz, Wolfgang; and Leunig, Rainer, to Robert Bosch GmbH. System
for preventing damage to a battery charger due to application of a
battery with wrong polarity. 4,379.989, CI. 320-26.000.
Kusters, Eduard: See —
Holderer, Horst; and Kutz, Johannes, 4,379.353, CI. 8-149.100
Kusunoki, Shigeru: See —
Kanazawa, Takato; Mori, Keijiro; Kusunoki, Shigeru; Nishii.
Kazunari; and Nobue, Tomotaka, 4,379,964, CI. 219-492.000.
Kutz, Johannes: See —
Holderer, Horst; and Kutz, Johannes, 4,379,353, CI. 8-149.100.
Kuwagaki, Hiroshi; Yano, Kohzo; and Takechi, Sadatoshi, to Sharp
Kabushiki Kaisha. Electro-chromic displays. 4,379.619. CI.
350-357.000.
Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.: See —
Miyata. Shigeo. 4.379.882. CI. 524-436.000.
Landis, Bruce J.: See —
Goudy, Paul R., Jr., 4,379,681, CI. 417-560.000.
Landis, Kenneth J.: See —
Goudy, Paul R., Jr., 4,379.681, CI. 417-560.000.
Lang, Donald H.: See —
Spencer, David H.; Steiner, Marvin E.; and Lang, Donald H.,
4,380,066, CI. 371-10.000.
Langr, Oldrich, to Sigma concern. Apparatus having shaping jaws for
manufacturing bodies of spindle-type shapes. 4,379,397, CI, 72-95.000.
Lapp, Otto; von Rintelen, Harald; Moll, Franz; and Endres, Lothar, to
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the preparation of
silver halide emulsions, photographic materials, and a process for the
production of photographic images. 4,379,837, CI. 430-434.000.
Larkin, William A., to MAT Chemicals Inc. Food-grade vinyl halide
p)olymer compositions stabilized with monoalkyltin compounds.
4.379.878. CI. 524-181.000.
Larson, Betty D. Sun-out face shield. 4,379,349, CI. 2-9.000.
Larson, David N., to Mostek Corporation. Static RAM memory cell.
4,380,055, CI. 365-154.000. ^
Lasky, Jerome B.: See — "^
Hansen, Howard H.; Lasky, Jerome B.; and Silverman, Ronald R.,
4,379,727, CI. 148-1.500.
Laurel Bank Machine Co., Ltd.: See —
Furuya, Katusuke, 4,379,466, CI. 133-3.00C.
Laurien, Rolf: See —
Mateika, Dieter; and Laurien, Rolf, 4,379,853, CI. 501-135.000.
Lausch, Robert C: See —
Anderson, Larry C; Lausch, Robert C; and Sydorko, Peter J.,
4,379,730, CI. 156-324.000.
Laviano, Edmund G.; and Lefebvre, Gerald S., to Interactive Design
Inc. now transducer. 4,379,411, CI. 73-861.780.
Lechner, Uwe: See —
Maier. Roland; Wetzel. Bemd; Woitun. Eberhard; Reuter, Wolf-
gang; Lechner, Uwe; and Goeth, Hanns, 4,379,784, CI.
424-229.000.
Lefebvre, Gerald S.: See —
Laviano, Edmund G.; and Lefebvre, Gerald S., 4,379.411, CI.
73-861.780.
Legris. Marcel. Electrically controlled level. 4,379.367, CI. 33-367.000.
Lehureau, Jean-Claude; Magna, Henriette; and Thirouard, Michel, to
Thomson-CSF. Protected optical disc. 4,380,016, CI. 346-135.100.
Leichti, Ludwig, to Ex-Cell-O Corporation. Radiator assembly (bayo-
net lock). 4,379,574, CI. 285-211.000.
Leineweber. Gunther; and Wamecke, Rolf, to Volkswagenwerk AG.
Hydraulic amplifier. 4,379,423, CI. 91-373.000.
Lemco Tool Corporation: See —
Hendershot, Homer; and Storrs. Charles M.. 4,379,665, CI.
408-204.000.
Lenoir. John; Jan, Gerald; and Fryberg, Mario, to Ciba-Geigy AG.
Color-photographic recording material for the silver dye bleach
process. 4,379,819, CI. 430-17.000.
Leonard, John F.: See —
Fritts, David H.; and Leonard, John F., 4,379,410, CI. 73-809.000
Lemer, Stanley, to Color Communications. Inc. Latex mylar chip
4,379.696. CI. 434-98.000.
Leunig, Rainer: See—
Kurz. Wolfgang; and Leumg. Rainer, 4,379,989, CI. 320-26.000.
Leventer. William; and Shulman, Lawrence M. Data encoding for
television. 4.380,027, CI. 358-147.000.
Levitt, George; and Weigel, Russell C, Jr., to Du Pont de Nemours, E.
I., and Company. Method of controlling weeds in conifers. 4.379.717,
CI. 71-92.000.
Levitt. George, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Process
for preparing arylsulfonyl isocyanates by phosgenation of arylsulfon-
amides. 4.379.769. CI. 260-545.00R.
Liberty Hardware Manufacturing Corp.: See —
Papsdorf, John, 4,379,360, CI. 29-11.000.
Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH: See —
Lutz, Manfred; and Reimer. Bemd, 4.379,821, CI. 430-58.000.
Lichy, Dale. Folding overhead doors. 4,379,478. CI. 160-35.000.
Liebe, Werner; Lohmer, Karl; and Pclz. Willibald, to Agfa-Gevaert
Aktiengesellschaft. Image receptor element for the dye diffusion
transfer process. 4,379,828, CI. 430-212.000
Liertz, Heinrich. to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Splice connection for a
pair of light waveguide cables with optical fibers in tubular sheaths
4,379.614, CI. 350-96.210.
Liesener, Kenneth P., to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Horsepower consump-
tion control for variable displacement pumps. 4,379.389, CI.
60-428.000.
Lillie, Christian: See —
Heider, Joachim; Austel, Volkhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Kadatz,
Rudolf; and Lillie, Christian, 4,379,788, CI. 424-251.000.
Lin, Shiow C, to W. R. Grace & Co. Cyanourea compounds or poly-
mers thereof as epoxy resin curing agents. 4,379,728, CI 156-307.300.
Lind, Nils: See —
Jenkins, Allan D.; Appelen, John T.; and Lind, Nils, 4,379,371. CI.
37-104.000.
Lindley, Donald C, to Contectrol Incorporated. Rodent trap.
4,379,374, CI. 43-61.000.
Linvill, John G., to Stanford University. Stimulator array. 4,379,697,
CI. 434-114.000. ^
Lipcon, Jesse B.. to Digital Equipment Corporation. Tester for colli-
sion-detect circuitry. 4,380,088, CI. 455-67.000.
Llabres, Raymond, to Thomson-CSF. Optical disk cassette 4.379.507.
CI. 206-444.000.
Lobach. Ernst, to Censor Patent- und Versuchs-Anstalt. Process for
transferring a pattern onto a semiconductor disk. 4,379,831, CI
430-311.000.
LoBiondo, Vincent. Rubber band rifle. 4,379.445. CI 124-19.000.
Lock, William E.; and Snyder, Edward A., to Coming Glass Works
Artwork alignment for decorating machine. 4.379.818, CI. 430-5.000
Lockheed Corporation: See —
Caldwell, Edward W.; and Smethers, Rollo G., Jr.. 4,379,533, CI
244-118.100 A*
Steiner, William G., 4,380,070, CI. 371-20.000.
Lohmer, Karl: See —
Liebe. Werner; Lohmer, Karl; and Pelz, Willibald, 4,379.828. CI.
430-212.000.
Lom.'^Duane L.; and Klouda. John F., to Trane Company, The Control
for a variable air volume temp>erature conditioning system-outdoor
air economizer. 4,379.484, CI. 165-16.000.
Lombardo, Igino: See —
Naule. i'eter J.; and Lombardo. Igmo, 4,379,682, CI. 425-10.000.
Lomeli, Ronald C; and Stewart, Gary E.. to Trade Printers, Inc
Business form with removable label and method for producing the
same. 4.379.573, CI. 428-42.000.
Long, Ernest L.; Duvall, William S.; and Allen, Donald P., to Amtel
Systems Corporation. Message communication system 4,380,009, CI.
340-825.550.
Long, Geoffrey A. D.; and McPike, Bnan C, to Sewell Plastics, Inc
Method and apparatus for applying hot mell adhesive to base cups
4,379.731, CI. 156-356.000.
Lorenz, Hans P.: See —
Horowski, Reinhard; Kehr. Wolfgang; Sauer, Gerhard; Eder.
Ulrich; and Lorenz, Hans P., 4,379.790, CI. 424-261.000
Lorenz, Kurt: See —
Weber. Heinrich; Lorenz, Kurt; and Dungs. Horst. 4.379,692. CI
432-18.000.
Lowery. Kirby, Jr.: See —
Shipley, Randall S.; Lowery, Kirby, Jr.; and Gibbs. Ronald L ,
4,379,760, CI. 252-429.00B.
Lowney, John J.: See —
Dalai, Hormazdyar M.; and Lowney, John J., 4,379,832, CI.
430-315.000.
Lowrey, Robert D.; Nelson, Howard D.; and Van Dyke Tiers, George,
to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Black image
from a thermographic imaging system. 4,379,835, CI. 430-338.000
Lu. Chen-i, to Eastman Kodak Company Method of making polyester
prepolymers. 4,379,912, CI. 528-274.000.
Lucas Industries Limited: See —
Andrews, Richard J., 4,379,524, CI 239-533.800
Lundberg, Robert D., to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Polyca-
prolactone polymers. 4,379,914, CI. 528-354.000.
Lunn, William H. W.; and Wheeler, William J., to Eli Lilly and Com
pany. Oximino-substituted cephalosporin compounds. 4.379,787, CI
424-246.000.
Lutz, Manfred; and Reimer, Bemd, to Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-
GmbH. Electrophotographic recording material with AsjSes-xTe^
charge generating layer 4,379,821, CI. 430-58.000.
PI 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
Lyons, Christopher F.: See —
Deutsch. Albert S.; Lyons, Christopher F.; and Filler, Robert,
4.379.830, CI. 430-309 000.
MAT Chemicals Inc.: See —
Larkin, William A.. 4.379,878, CI. 524-181.000.
Mac Equipment. Inc : See —
Allison. Robert. 4,379.663, CI. 406-23.000.
MacBean, Donald G., to JWI Ltd. Three-layer forming fabric
4,379.735. CI. 162-348.000.
Mack, Mark P.; and Berge, Charles T., to Conoco Inc. Silyl esters of
carboxylic acids by phase transfer catalysts. 4,379,766, CI.
260-413.000.
Madan, A run: See —
Yang. Chi C; Madan. Arun; Ovshinsky, Stanford R.; and Adier.
David, 4.379,943, CI. 136-249.000.
Maeda, Junji: See —
Andoh, Sadanari; Maeda, Junji; Fukushima, Kiyoshi; Yoneda,
Hiroichi; and Jinushi, Naotomo, 4,380,018, CI. 346-140.00R.
Maeda. Katsutoshi. to Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha. Paper feed roll
rotated by print head carrier movement. 4,379,646, CI. 400-636.000.
Maezawa. Shuji; and Murata, Masami, to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa
Seikosha. Multi-alarm electronic watch. 4,379,641, CI. 368-74.000.
Magna, Hennette: See —
Lehureau. Jean-Claude; Magna, Henriette; and Thirouard, Michel,
4,380.016, CI. 346-135.100.
Magnetic Peripherals Inc.: See —
Krake, Guss L . 4,380.034. CI. 360-77.000.
Mahan. Richard S.; Tritt, Paul G.; and Ward, James H., Jr., to B. F.
Goodrich Company. The. Automatic locking and ejecting hook
assembly. 4.379,579, CI. 294-83.00R.
Maier. Richard K.: See —
Schuyler. Andreas D.; and Maier. Richard K.. 4,379.554, CI. 273-
67.0OR.
Maier, Roland; Wetzel, Bernd; Woitun, Eberhard; Reuter, Wolfgang;
Lechner, Uwe; and Goeth, Hanns, to Dr. Karl Thomae Gesellschaft
mit beschrankter Haftung. Pyrimidinyl ureido penicillins. 4,379,784,
CI. 424-229.000.
Makinen, Heimo, to Elevator GmbH. Method and apparatus for stop-
ping an elevator. 4.380,049, CI. 364-426.000.
Mams, John R. Projectile. 4,379,531, CI. 244-3.230.
Margold, Franz, to Riedel de Haen Aktiengesellschaft. Process for
disinfecting and preserving hides and skins. 4,379,709, CI. 8-94.180.
Marijon, Jean-Louis: See —
Debord. Pierre; and Marijon. Jean-Louis, 4.380,005, CI. 340-
347.0AD.
Marino. Mario H. S.. to Interieur Forma S.A. Reclinable chair.
4.379.589, CI. 297-299.000.
Mark, Victor; and Hedges. Charles V., to General Electric Co. Flame
retardant aromatic polycarbonate compositions made from fluori-
nated diphenols. 4.379.910, CI. 528-202.000.
Marker-Patent verwertungsgesellschaft mbH.: See—
Sedlmair, Gerhard. 4,379,570, CI. 280-605.000.
Marko Materials, Inc.: See —
Ray, Ranjan; and Panchanathan, Viswanathan, 4,379,720, CI.
75-251.000.
Marlowe, Frank J.: See —
Reitmeier. Glenn A.; and Marlowe, Frank J., 4.380,069, CI
371-31.000.
Marquette Metal Products Co.: See —
Baxter, Donald J.; and Childress, Hugh L., Jr., 4,379,986, CI.
318-434.000.
Marsh, Christopher R.. to BP Chemicals Limited. Process for produc-
ing polyisobutenes. 4,379,899. CI. 526-144.000.
Martin, Charles L., to Raychem Corporation Composite coupling.
4.379,575, CI. 285-369.000.
Martin, Robert P., Jr. Safety boot for punch or the like. 4,379,418, CI.
83-544.000.
Maruyama, Takashi: See —
Ueno. Katsuzi; Maruyama, Takashi; Suzuki, Hanio; and Saito,
Teruo, 4,379,892. CI. 525-439.000.
Masse, Lucien; Medlin, William L.; and Sexton, James H., to Mobil Oil
Corporation. System for conducting resonance measurements of rock
materials under confining pressure. 4,379,407, CI. 73-579.000.
Masugi, Takashi: See —
Ueda, Ikuo; Takaya, Takao; Kobayashi, Masakazu; Masugi, Taka-
shi; Takasugi, Hisashi; Kochi, Hiromu; and KiUguchi, Tadashi,
4,379,922, CI. 544-16.000.
Mateika, Dieter; and Launen, Rolf, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Mag-
netic device having a monocrystalline garnet substrate bearing a
magnetic layer. 4,379,853, CI. 501-135.000.
Mathias Bauerle GmbH: See-
Purr, Horst, 4,379,467. CI. 134-111.000.
Matschke, Guunther: See—
KrafTt, Werner; Helling, Gunter; Matschke, Guunther; and Boie,
Immo, 4.379,829. CI. 430-215.000.
Matschke, Klaus: See-
Andersen, Heinz-Erhardt; Brebels, Jaek J.; Matschke, Klaus; and
Scheier, Franz, 4,379,774, CI. 264-284.000.
MaUufuji, Akihiro; Ishiguro, lipdashi; and Tsuji, Nobuo, to Fuji Photo
Film Co., Ltd. Magnetic recording medium. 4,379,809, CI.
428-470.000.
Matsumani, Hiroshi: See —
Mori, Kinji; Ihara. Hirokazu; and Matsumani, Hiroshi, 4,380,061,
CI. 370-16.000.
Matsumoto, Hisashi, to Mitsui Petrochemical Industries, Ltd. Reinforc-
ing material for hydraulic substances and method for the production
thereof 4.379,870, CI. 523-221.000.
Matsumoto, Muneaki: See —
Kuno, Akira; Matsumoto, Muneaki; and Numata, Koji, 4,379,366,
CI. 33-361.000.
Matsuo, Noritada: See —
Funaki, Yuji; Tanaka, Shizuyil; and Matsuo, Noritada, 4,379,921,
CI. 542-458.000.
Matsuoka, Kazuhiko; and Minoura, Kazuo, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Scanning optical system having a fall-down correcting function.
4,379,612, CI. 350-6.800.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Company, Limited: See —
Funakoshi, Yasutomo; and Wakahata, Tamotsu, 4,379,617, CI.
350-126.000.
Ikedo. Masaru; Wauri, Masafumi; Yasuno, Yoshiuke; and Yama-
shiu, Tadaoki, 4,379.621, CI. 350-392.000.
Kanazawa, Takato; Mori, Keijiro; Kusunoki, Shigeni; Nishii,
Kazunari; and Nobue, Tomouka, 4,379.964, jCl. 219-492.000.
Matsuyama, Mitsuo; Ohhinata, Ichiro; and Kitano, Junjiro, to Hitachi,
Ltd. Semiconductor integrated circuit. 4,380,021, CI. 357-15.000.
Mattaull, Patricio. Molded hearing aid and battery charger. 4,379,988,
CI. 320-4.000.
Mattison, Ronald P.: See—
Danielson, Paul S.; Mattison, Ronald P.; and Werner, Albert J.,
4,379,851. CI. 501-66.000.
Mauersberger, Reinhard: See —
Schoening, Josef; Schwiers, Hans-Georg; Elter, Claus; Stracke,
Wilfried; and Mauersberger. Reinhard, 4,380,085, CI.
376-381.000.
Mayer, Bruno: See —
Buchmann, Heinz; Mayer, Bruno; and Szybowicz, Wolfgane,
4,379,652, CI. 404-117.000.
McColl, James R., to GTE Laboratories Incorporated. Automatic
aperture size measurement apparatus and process. 4,379,635, CI.
356-387.000.
McDonnell Douglas Corporation: See —
Allen, Louis B., Jr.; and Koenig, Herbert G., Jr., 4,380,075, CI.
372-44.000.
Baldwin, Floyd G.; and Evans, Donald E., 4,379,535, CI. 244-
137.00R.
Palmer. Raymond J.; and Micheaux, Dominique, 4,379,798, CI.
428-113.000.
McGuiness, Robert C: See —
Falkenburg, Hans R.; Krause, Siegfried; and McGuiness, Robert
C, 4,379,909, CI. 528-94.000.
McGuire, John L.: See —
Capetola, Robert J.; and McGuire, John L., 4,379,789, CI.
424-260.000.
Mcintosh, Thomas K., to Bloomfield Manufacturing Co., Inc. Lifting
jack. 4,379,546, CI. 254-111.000.
Mclntyre, John A. Fiber optic matrix coding method and apparatus for
radiation image amplifier. 4,379,967, CI. 250-227.000.
McLaughlin, Joseph E.; and Strickland, George A., to Du Pont de
Nemours, E. I., and Company. Liquid coating composition having a
reactive catalyst. 4,379,886, CI. 525-162.000.
McLaughlin, Michael J.: See-
Chen, Yeunung; and McLaughlin, Michael J., 4,379,949, CI. 179-
15.55R.
McMahan, Norman C. Auditorium convertible floor. 4,379,378, CI.
52-9.000.
McMahan, William H., to American Laser Corporation. Segmented
ceramic bore laser. 4,380,077, CI. 372-62.000.
McNeely, Michael L.: See —
Chambers, Robert W.; McNeely, Michael L.; and Torrington,
Leslie A., 4,379,686, CI. 425-290.000.
McNeilab, Inc.: See —
Rasmussen, Chris R., 4,379,786, CI. 424-244.000.
McPike, Brian C: See-
Long, Geoffrey A. D.; and McPike, Brian C, 4,379,731, CI.
156-356.000.
Mead Corporation, The: See —
Clement, Joseph J., 4,379.431, CI. 108-1 1 1.000.
Cole, John N.; and Hettel. David A., 4,379,808, CI. 428-438.000.
Mearig, Stephen G., to Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Method to
make a built up area roury printing screen. 4,379,737, CI. 204-1 1.000.
Medlin, William L.: See—
Masse, Lucien; Medlin, William L.; and Sexton, James H.,
4,379,407, CI. 73-579.000.
Medtronic, Inc.: See —
Stein. Marc T., 4,379,459, CI. 128-419.0PG.
Meier, Robert H.; and Farr, Evelyn, to Camp International, Inc. Multi-
centric knee cage. 4,379,463, CI. 128-80.00C.
Meisel, Thomas C, Jr.; and Price, Robert J., to Caterpillar Tractor Co.
Load skidding vehicle having a positionally biased grapple. 4,379,674,
CI. 414-699.000.
Melvin, Lawrence S., Jr.; and Johnson, Michael R., to Pfizer Inc.
Trialkylsilicon-containing phenylcycloalkane analgesics. 4,379,783,
CI. 424-184.000.
Mercer, Elizabeth A.: See —
Eisele, John F.; and Mercer, Elizabeth A., 4,379,804, CI.
428-332.000.
Merck & Co., Inc.: See —
Blaine, Edward H.. 4,379,792, CI. 424-270.000.
Cragoe, Edward J., Jr.; Rooney, Clarence S.; and Williams, Haydn
W. R., 4,379,791, CI. 424-270.000.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 15
Merrill, Duane F., to General Electric. Process for producing a low
viscosity silicone resin. 4,379,902, CI. 528-18.000.
Meyrat, Clement, to Ebauches, S.A. Apparatus for the selection or
correction of data in an electronic watch. 4,379,642, CI. 368-188.000.
Miall, David E.: See-
French, Gordon B.; Mills, Eugene A.; and Miall, David E.,
4,379,590, CI. 299-2.000.
Micheaux, Dominique: See-
Palmer, Raymond J.; and Micheaux, Dominique, 4,379,798, CI.
428-113.000.
Mickelson, Dan: See —
Wilson, Robert E.; and Mickelson, Dan, 4,379,687, CI. 425-388.000.
Middel, Jan; and Gorter, Comelis A., to Estel Hoogovens B. V. Appara-
tus for applying marks to a product e.g. a coil of rolled steel.
4,379,427, CI. 101-35.000.
Miho, Takuya: See —
Watanabe, Shoji; Miho, Takuya; and Fujii, Tatsumi, 4,379,915, CI.
528-357.000.
Miller, Daniel R.; Deaton, Thomas; and Royer, Robert, to Nestier
Corporation. Nesting trav with sucking keyed interlock. 4,379,508,
CI. 206-507.000.
Miller, John D.; and Grunewalder, Valentine J., to PPG Industries, Inc.
Fluorocarbon coating compositions. 4,379,885, CI. 525-108.000.
Miller, Ralph A.; and White, Randall F.. to United States of America,
Navy. Cargo lift system. 4,379,534, CI. 244-137.00R.
Miller, Samuel A.; and Jeffris, Larry L., to United States of America,
Navy. Laser beam steering device. 4,379,624, CI. 350-486.000.
Mills, Eugene A.: See-
French, Gordon B.; Mills, Eugene A.; and Miall, David E..
4,379,590, CI. 299-2.000.
Mills, Thomas G.: See —
Yuan, Lloyd T.; Chang, Yu-Wen; and Mills, Thomas G., 4,380,020,
CI. 357-3.000.
Mimamida, Isao: See —
NumaU, Mitsuo; Mimamida, Isao; Yamaoka. Masayoshi; Shiraishi,
Mitsura; and Miyawaki, Toshio, 4,379,924, CI. 544-27.000.
Mimoun, Hubert; Charpentier, Robert; and Roussel, Michel, to Institut
Francais du Petrole. Process for manufacturing methyl ketones by
oxidation of terminal olefins. 4,379,942, CI. 568-385.000.
Minamitani, Eiji: See —
Ishikawa, Hiroshi; Kojima, Takuhito; and Minamitani, Eiji,
4,380,064, CI. 370-63.000.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See-
Clemens, Lawrence M.; and Gasper, Alton J., 4,379,763, CI.
252-628.000.
Collins, Stanley B., 4,379,824, CI. 430-106.600.
Eisele, John F.; and Mercer, Elizabeth A., 4,379,804, CI.
428-332.000.
Lowrey, Robert D.; Nelson, Howard D.; and Van Dyke Tiers,
George, 4,379,835, CI. 430-338.000.
Minoura, Kazuo: See—
Matsuoka, Kazuhiko; and Minoura, Kazuo, 4.379,612, CI.
350-6.800
Mir, Jose M.; Varner, Jerry R.; and Kurtz, Clark N.. to Eastman Kodak
Company. Electronic imaging apparatus with light valve area arrays.
4,380,023, CI. 358-75.000.
Miracle Recreation Equipment Company; See—
Ahrens, Paul W., 4,379,551, CI 272-56.50R.
Mishakov, Vladimir N.; See—
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.;
Gurov, Evgeny I.; Isaikin, Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Vitaly S.; Tabakov, Vladimir
P.- Tjunkin, Boris A.: and Fotieva, Ljudmila I., 4,379,592, CI.
299-2.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Ishii, Toshiaki, 4,380,045, CI. 363-54.000.
Ito, Osamu; and Watanabe, Isao. 4,380,015, CI. 346-108.000.
Iwaki, Yoshiyuki; and Goto, Hitoshi, 4,380,003, CI. 338-315.000.
Kimura, Minoru; and Ina, Teruo, 4,379,999, CI 336-84,OOC.
Mitsui Petrochemical Industries, Ltd.: See—
Matsumoto, Hisashi, 4.379,870, CI. 523-221.000.
Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals, Inc.: See —
Asano, Makoto; Tanabe, Yoshimitu; and Murakami, Hisamichi,
4,379,897, CI. 525-506.000.
Mitushashi, Yasuo, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Porous electrophoto-
graphic toner and preparation process of making. 4,379,825, CI.
430-111.000.
Miwa, Tsutomu. Device for improving aerodynamic and safety charac-
teristics of automotive vehicles. 4,379,582, CI. 296-l.OOS.
Miyakawa, Seii; Ikeda, Manabu; Hashizume, Shin; and lijima,
Kazunori, to Hitochi, Ltd. Magnetic tape running system. 4,379,517,
CI. 226-189.000.
Miyamoto, Chikara: See—
Fujiwara, Akiko; Miyamoto, Chikara; and Okuda, Toru, 4,379,842,
CI. 435-58.000.
Miyamura, Kou: See —
Suzuki, Hiroo; Yamamoto, Koichi: Ohno, Yasuhide; and
Miyamura. Kou, 4.379,482, CI. 164-485.000.
Miyata, Shigeo, to Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Halogen-con-
taining polyolefin composition, and method for inactivating halogens
therein. 4.379,882, CI. 524-436.000.
Miyawaki, Toshio: See—
NumaU. Mitsuo; Mimamida. Isao; Yamaoka. Masayoshi; Shiraishi,
Mitsurai and Miyawaki. Toshio, 4.379.924, CI. 544-27.000.
Mizell, Emerson H.; See —
Holcombe, J. L., 4,379,381, CI. 52-404.000
Mizell, James A., to California Fin Systems. Apparatus for securing fins
to a surfboard 4.379.703. CI. 441-79.000.
Mizuguchi, Ryuzo; See—
Ishikura, Shin-Ichi; Kanda, Kazunori; and Mizuguchi, Ryuzo.
•4,379.872, CI. 523-406.000
Mizuma. Kenichi. to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Sheet paper sucking appa-
ratus. 4.379,549. CI. 271-3.100.
Mizuno. Toshiro; and Imai. Kazuo, to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone
Public Corporation. Signalling system and signal control equipment
for multi-address calling. 4,379,946. CI. 178-3.000.
Mizuno. Yoshiro; and KiUmura, Akihiko. to Kojima Puresu Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha. Means for reuining a rod-shaped material.
4.379,536, CI. 248-73.000.
MizuU, Yukio: See—
Iwau. Masayosi; Douke, Harumi; Hayashi, Yoshikazu; Yokoyama.
Tadashi; and Mizuta. Yukio. 4.379.954. CI. 200-4.000
Mobil Oil Corporation: See—
Masse, Lucien; Medlin, William L.; and Sexton, James H.,
4,379,407. CI. 73-579.000.
Olson, David H.; and Rodewald. Paul G. 4,379,761, CI.
252-435.000.
Rollmann, Louis D., 4,379,489, CI. 166-266.000.
Ruehle, William H.. 4.380,059, CI. 367-46.000.
Yan, Tsoung Y.. 4,379.747, CI. 208-25 l.OOH.
Mochizuki, Teruji: See—
Ooishi, Minoru; Mochizuki, Teruji; and Suzuki, Yuuka. 4.379,997.
CI. 330-298.000.
Moehlenpah Industries, Inc.: See-
Thompson, James L.; and Hornkohl. Owen T., 4.379.426, CI
100-100.000.
Moll. Franz: See —
Lapp, Otto; von Rintelen. Harald; Moll. Franz; and Endres. Lo-
thar. 4,379,837, CI. 430-434.000.
Mono Pumps Limited: See-
Nelson, Hugh D., 4,379,561, CI. 277-237.00R.
Monsanto Company: See—
Schafer, David E.; and Czajkowski, Albert J., 4.379,716. CI.
71-87.000.
Moore, Damon E.: See —
Wiggins, John W.; and Moore. Damon E., 4.379,449. CI.
126-449.000.
Moore. John A.: See—
Dounce. George H.; and Moore, John A.. 4,379,965. CI.
219-521.000.
Moore, Perry H.. Jr.: See-
Rao. Pemmaraju N.; Purdy, Robert H.; and Moore, Perry H., Jr..
4,379,779, CI. 436-543.000.
Mora, Paolo C: See—
Paracchini, Silvano; and Mora, Paolo C. 4,179,935, CI. 546-51.000.
Mora. Paolo Corvi: See —
Paracchini. Silvano; and Mora, Paolo C. 4,379,935, CI. 546-51.000
Morck. Charles W.. Jr., to Selas Corporation of America. Dual fuel
burner. 4,379,689, CI. 431-284.000.
Morgan. Robert L.: See-
Webb, Ronald W.; and Morgan, Robert L., 4,379,552, CI.
272-67.000.
Mori, Keijiro: See—
Kanazawa, Takato; Mori, Keijiro; Kusunoki, Shigeru; Nishii,
Kazunari; and Nobue, TomoUka, 4,379,964. CI. 219-492.000.
Mori, Kinji; Ihara, Hirokazu; and Matsumaru. Hiroshi. to Hitachi, Ltd.
Loop transmission system with improved bypass routing arrange-
ment. 4,380,061, CI. 370-16.000.
Morimoto, Shoji: See —
Ohmi, Hidehiko; KiUgawa. Katsuhisa; Morimoto. Shoji; Kubo.
Tateo; Ohno, Misao; and Takahashi, SeiUro, 4,379,512, CI.
215-327.000.
MorishiU, Yutaka: See—
Tada, Tetsuya; and Morishita, YuUka, 4,379,685, CI. 425-183.000.
Moriya, Mitsumasa: See —
Yoritomi, Kenzaburo; Kezuka. Teruo; and Moriya, Mitsumasa,
4,379,751, CI. 210-659.000.
Morooka, Yasuo: See—
Konishi, Seizi; Tashiro. Kazuyuki; Kamigane. Yoshihiro; Sakurti,
Takakazu; Tanifuji, Shinya; and Morooka, Yasuo, 4,379,395. CI.
72-8.000.
Mortonson, Robert W.: See—
Sievers, Kirk A.; and Mortonson, Robert W.. 4.379,990, CI.
322-99.000.
Mostek Corporation: See-
Larson, David N., 4,380.055, CI. 365-154.000.
Plachno, Robert S.. 4,379,974, CI. 307-269.000.
Motko, Richard L.: See—
Hansen, Douglas E.; Johnson, Steven D.; and Motko. Richard L.,
4,379.857, CI. 521-54.000.
Motor Panels (Coventry) Limited: See—
Taylor, Merrick W.; Allen, George R.; and Strong, Terence,
4,379,583, CI. 296-l.OOS.
Motorola, Inc.: See— ,,„„..„ ^. ,,„
Chen, Yeunung; and McUughlin, Michael J., 4,379.949. CI. 179-
I5.55R.
Fette. Bruce A.. 4.380,051, CI. 364-766.000.
Ho. Roland K, 4,380,041. CI. 361-283.000. .„„^ ^,
Sievers, Kirk A.; and Mortonson, Robert W., 4.379.990. CI.
322-99.000.
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
, to Caterpillar Tractor Co.
a grapple. 4,379,675. CI.
Weber. Howard. 4,379,444, CI. 123-609 000.
Mueller, Otto, to Staeubli Ltd. Heddle frame actuating mechanism
located between a dobby and the heddle frames of a weavine ma-
chme. 4,379,474, CI. 139-21000
Mueller-Westerhoff, Ulrich T : See—
Nazzal, Adel L; and Mueller- WesterhofT, Ulrich T , 4 379 740 CI
204-129 000.
Muller, Armin. to FAG Kugelfischer Georg Schafer & Co. Journal
bearing with dust seal. 4,379,600. CI. 308-187 100
Muller, Hanns P : See—
Stemmler, Ingo; Muller, Hanns P.; and Wagner, Kuno, 4 379 905
CI. 528-73 000. . . .
Muller. Hans R.: See—
Janson. Philippe A Muller, Hans R.; and Rothauser, Ernst H
4,380,063, CI 370-60.000.
Muller, Rolf, to Papst-Motoren GmbH & Co. KG. Brushless DC motor
driven by complementary type transistors. 4,379,984, CI. 318-254 000
Mullersman. Ferdinand H.; and Blake, Charles R., to General Electric
Company. Indicator of full charge for secondary cell or batterv
thereof 4,379.816, CI. 429-91.000.
Multi Mineral Corporation: See—
Weichman. Bernard E., 4,379,593. CI. 299-2.000.
Muliikunst Legepladser I/S: See—
Petersen, Tom L., 4,379,550, CI 272-52.000.
Munch, Walter; and Uetrecht. Dale M.. to Baldwin Piano & Organ
Company Polyphonic electronic music system 4.379,422, CI.
84- 1 . 190.
Munekata, Seiji: See—
Yamabe. Masaaki; Munekata. Seiji; Kumai, Seisaku; and Kaneko
Isamu. 4.379.768. CI. 260-544.00F.
Munny. Gunter. Prosthetic joint for knee and above-knee amputees
4.379.350. CI. 3-22.000. ^
Muntjanoff. John R ; and Day. Dennis M
Dampened fully pivotal hanger for
414-734000
Murakami. Hisamichi: See—
Asano. .Makoto; Tanabe. Yoshimitu; and Murakami, Hisamichi
4,379.897. CI. 525-506.000.
Murata, Masami See—
Maezawa. Shuji; and Murata, Masami. 4.379.641. CI 368-74 000
Nabisco Brands. Inc.: See—
Ripka. Michael S.. 4.379.845. CI. 435-255.000.
Nael, Albert, to Compagnie Generale d'Automatisme CGA Alcatel
Tray for storing and classifying slides and a viewer for slides disposed
in such trays 4.379,627. CI. 353-27.0OA.
Nagae, Yoshiharu: See—
Kawakami, Hideaki; Kitazima. Masaaki; Izaki, Naoyuki and
Nagae. Yoshiharu. 4.380.008. CI. 340-784.000.
Nagashima. Masaya Method for releasably rigidly fastening two inter-
sected overlapping metal profiles and means therefor. 4,379,651, CI.
40 J - 3 o 7 . 000.
Nakamura* Hitoshi; Nishizima, Hideyo; Ema, Hideaki; Harigaya
Makoto; and Otomura. Satoshi. to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Elecfropho-
fmm a °43o"58lxX)°' °^ halogen-doped Se-Te alloy layers.
Nakao. Makoto: See—
Takamaisu. Mashiro; Nakao. Makoto; and Ogawa, Isao, 4.380,043,
CI. 362-26 000.
Nakatsukasa, Masashi; and Takahashi, Nobuyuki, to Anelva Corpora-
tion Sputtering apparatus compnsing control means for preventing
!.'J?P'i^iy;8ases from entering a sputtering chamber. 4,379.743, CI
204-298.000.
Namiki, Junji, to Nippon Electric Co.. Ltd. Digital signal receiver with
FM interference elimination capability. 4,380,082, CI 375-102 000
Natale, Peter J ; and Lombardo, Igino, to Ortho Diagnostics, Inc
Reaction apparatus for the formation of microspheres or microcap-
sules 4.379.682, CI. 425-10.000.
National Can Corporation: See—
Cochran, Donald D., 4,379,671. CI. 414-331.000
National Starch and Chemical Corporation: See—
Tessler, Martin M.; Wurzburg, Otto B.; and Dirscherl, Teresa A
4.379.919, CI. 536-108.000.
N^zal, Adel I.; and Mueller-Westerhoff, Ulrich T.. to International
Business Machines Corporation. Photoassisted generation of hydro-
gen from water. 4,379,740, CI. 204-129.000.
NcNeil Corporation: See —
Rademacher, Thomas P., 4,379,704, CI 441-88 000
Neidhardt, Rudolf: See—
Gubbe, Bemd; Krause, Klaus-Dieter; Neidhardt, Rudolf and
Schonemann, Otto, 4.379.429, CI. 108-5.000.
Neill, Daniel L.; and Weiner, Paul, to Kelsey-Hayes Co. Secondary
brake pedal assembly. 4,380.002, CI. 338-153.000.
Nelson, Edward I.: See-
Ely, Richard I.; and Nelson, Edward 1 , 4,379.968, CI. 250-229.000.
Nelson, Eileen M. Method of and means for improved reading effi-
ciency of persons with speciHc dyslexia. 4,379,699, CI. 434-184 000
Nelson, Howard D.: See—
Lowrey. Robert D.; Nelson, Howard D.; and Van Dyke Tiers
George, 4,379,835, CI. 430-338.000.
Nelson. Hugh D., to Mono Pumps Limited. Well packer 4,379,561, CI.
Neodontics, Inc.: See—
Riess, Guido, 4,379,694, CI. 433-201.000.
Nesterov, Boris F.: See—
Shkidchenko, Alexandr N.; Nesterov, Boris F,; Sharov Vyaches
lav G.; and Smolin. Boris I., 4,379,846, CI. 435-316.000.
Nestier Corporation: See-
Miller, Daniel R.; Deaton, Thomas; and Royer, Robert, 4,379,508
CI. 206-507.000.
Neuromed, Inc.: See —
Borkan, William N.; Savino, Frank M.; and Waltz, Joseph M .
4,379,462, CI. 128-786.000
Newby, Kenneth R.: See—
Tsien Hsue C Newby, Kenneth R.; Grimes, Patrick G.: and
Bellows, Richard J., 4,379,814, CI. 429-42.000.
Newell Research Corporation: See—
Pfost, R. Fred, 4,380,032, CI. 360-74.600.
Newnham, John H. Propellers and windmills. 4,379,813, CI
428-587.000.
Ney, Hermann; and Kuhn, Michael H., to U.S. Philips Corporation.
Method of and arrangement for deriving characteristic values from a
sound signal. 4,379,948, CI. 179-l.OSC.
Nicolaisen, Holger, to Danfoss A/S. Coil arrangement, particularly for
relays, and method of making same 4,380,000, CI. 336-192 000
Nielsen. Hans B Tube for yam bobbin. 4,379,529, CI 242-118 110
Nifco Inc.: See—
Tanaka. Shinken; and Yuda. Takuo, 4,379,648, CI. 403-24 000
Nihon Surfactant Industry Co., Ltd.: See—
Yamada, Mikio; and Tabata, Yujin, 4,379,755, CI. 252-312.000
Ni sson Erling S^and Zetterquist, Staffan G Thermographic appara-
tus. 4,379,461, CI. 128-736.000. ^^
Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Namiki, Junji, 4,380,082, CI. 375-102.000.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See—
Daitoku, Koichi, 4.379,629, CI. 354-173.000.
Nippon Paint Co., Ltd.; See-
Ishikura, Shin-Ichi, Kanda, Kazunori; and Mizueuchi, Rvuzo
4,379,872, CI. 523-406.000. e . > .
Nippon Pneumatic Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: See—
Hiraoka. Mas;iaki. 4,379,492, CI. 173-12.000
Nippon Soken, Inc. See—
^^y?^' Jf^^}^^' Yamaguchi, Hiroaki; and Ootsuka, Yoshinori,
4,379,403, CI. 73-35.000.
'^"i?°' ^Ij'"' Matsumoto, Muneaki; and Numata, Koji, 4,379,366.
CI. 33-361.000.
Koichi; Ohno, Yasuhide; and
Nippon Steel Corporation: See—
'';59"5^7. ct 266-.te'' "'"^''= ^"' ^''''°' "'''^'""-
Suzuki, Hiroo; Yamamoto, , „
Miyamura, Kou, 4,379,482, CI. 164-485.000.
Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation: See—
Mizuno, Toshiro; and Imai, Kazuo, 4,379,946, CI. 178-3 000
Nippondenso Co., Ltd.: See—
Sano, Hiromi; and Suzuki, Ma.satoshi. 4,379,741, CI 204-424 000
Ni«bet, Louis J.: See-
Brown, David; Giles, Anthony F.; Cramer, Howard W. Noble H
Mary; Nisbet, Louis J.; Bushell, Michael E.; Weare, Glenis and
Caldwell, Ian Y., 4,379,920, CI. 542-427.000.
Nishii, Kazunari: See —
Kanazawa, Takato; Mori, Keijiro; Kusunoki, Shigeru; Nishii,
Kazunari; and Nobue, Tomotaka, 4,379,964, CI. 219-492.000
Nishikawa, Kazuyuki; and Hirao, Katsumi, to Daicel Chemical Indus-
tries, Ltd.; and Shinto Kogio, Ltd. Binder for casting sand and resin-
coated grains of sand. 4,379,865, CI. 523-139.000.
Nishikawa, Masao, to Takatori Machinery Works Ltd. Method and
apparatus for automatically packaging stockings. 4,379,384, CI.
53-415.000.
Nishizima, Hideyo: See —
Nakamura, Hitoshi; Nishizima, Hideyo; Ema, Hideaki; Harigaya
Makoto; and Otomura, Satoshi, 4,379,820, CI. 430-58.000.
Nissan Motor Company, Liinited: See—
Anzai, Makoto, 4,379,441, CI. 123-440.000.
Hagiwara, Yutaka; Takada, Toshiaki; and Yamazaki, Tetu
4,379,501, CI. 188-2 18.0XL. '
lizuka, Haruhiko; and Sugasawa, Fukashi, 4,379,387, CI
60-277.000.
Kamiiio, Kyoichi, 4,379,500, CI. I88-196.00B.
Kishi, Norimasa; and Suzuki, Tadashi, 4,380,048, CI. 364-424 100
Tanaka, Shinken; and Yuda, Takuo, 4,379,648, CI 403-24 000
Noble, H. Mary: See-
Brown, David; Giles, Anthony P.; Cramer, Howard W.; Noble, H
Mary; Nisbct, Louis J.; Bushell, Michael E.; Weare, Glenis and
Caldwell, Ian Y.. 4,379,920, CI. 542-427.000.
Noble, Wendell P., Jr.: See—
Kotecha, Harish N.; Noble, Wendell P., Jr.; and Wiedman, Francis
W., Ill, 4,380,057, CI. 365-185.000.
Nobue, Tomotaka: See —
Kanazawa, Takato; Mori, Keijiro; Kusunoki, Shigeru; Nishii,
Kazunan; and Nobue, TomoUka, 4,379,964, CI. 219-492.000
Noiles, Douglas G.: See—
Gravener, Roy D.; De Carlo, Alfred F.; and Noiles, Douglas G.,
4,379,457, CI. 128-334.00R. *
Nokcs, Ronald W. Wedging apparatus useful for log splitting. 4,379,475,
CI. 144-I93.00C. ore
Nordica S.p.A.: See —
Balbinot, Renzo, 4,379,370, CI. 36-121.000.
Noriaki, Tsunoda. Writmg medium for ball point writing instrument
4,379,867, CI. 523-161.000.
Norman, Oscar L.; and Handler, Laurence H., to Sun-Ohio, Inc.
Method of destruction of polychlorinated biphenyls. 4,379,746. CI
2O8-262.Q0O.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 17
Norman, Oscar L., to Sun-Ohio, Inc Method for destruction of poly-
halogenated biphenyls. 4,379.752, CI. 210-712.000
North American Philips Corporation: See —
Goldowsky. Michael P., 4,379,598. CI. 308-10.000.
Juner, Adolph; Haas. David J.; and Rudd. Chester D., 4,379,481,
CI. 160-310.000.
Northern Telecom Limited: See—
Walling, Jong-Hein; Arbuthnot, Gerald R.; and Gervais. Michel,
4,379,435, CI. 118-643 000.
Nosalca,^enkichi: See —
Takahashi, Sadayuki; Komeda, Yorio; Tachibana. Matsuo; and
Nosaka, Kenkichi, 4.379,673. CI. 414-686.000.
Nowak. Frederick H . to Otis Elevator Company Emergency power
elevator recovery and service system. 4,379,499, CI. 187-29.00R.
Nowicki, Casimir W.; and JafFee, Alan M., lo Owens llhnois. Inc.
Process for recycling plastic container scrap. 4,379,525, CI.
241-20.000.
Noyori, Tatsuhiko: See —
Asari. Akira; Noyori, Tatsuhiko: and Takehata, Tetsuro, 4,379,398,
CI. 72-273.500.
Numata, Koji: See—
Kuno, Akira; Matsumofc, Muneaki; and Numata. Koji. 4.379,366.
CI. 33-361.000.
Numata, Mitsuo; Mimamida, Isao; Yamaoka, Masayoshi; Shiraishi,
Mitsura; and Miyawaki, Toshio, to Takeda Chemical Industries. Ltd.
Cephalosporin derivatives. 4,379,924, CI. 544-27.000.
Nunan, Kevin N. G. Electrical pickups. 4.379.421. CI. 84 1 150.
Oak Industries, Inc.: See—
Comerford, John, 4,379,955, CI 200-1 l.ODA.
Obrezkov, Alexandr I.: See—
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin. Pavel G.;
Gurov, Evgeny I.; Isaikin, Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Vitalv S.; Tabakov. Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin, Boris A.; and Fotieva, Ljudmila I., 4,.^79.592, CI.
299-2.000.
Occidental Chemical Corporation: See —
Schall. William L., 4,379,880. CI. 524-297.000
Occidental Oil Shale, Inc : See-
French, Gordon B.; Mills, Eugene A.; and Miail. David E..
4,379,590, CI. 299-2.000.
Tassoney. Joseph P., 4,379,591, CI. 299-2.000
Occidental Research Corporation: See —
Beer, Gary L.; and Chemtob, Elie, 4.379.776. CI 423-32 l.OOR.
Odaka, Kentarou, to Sony Corporation. Method and apparatus for
preventing errors in PCM signal processing appaialus. 4,380,071. CI.
371-40.000.
Oertel, Richard W., Ill: See—
Ehrlich, Benjamin S.; and Oertel, Richard W , III. 4.379.904, CI
528-65.000.
Ogawa, Isao: See —
Takamatsu, Mashiro; Nakao, Makoto; and Ogawa, Isao, 4.380,043,
CI. 362-26.000.
Ohhinata, Ichiro: See —
Matsuyama, Mitsuo; Ohhinata, Ichiro; and Kitano. Junjiro.
4,380,021, CI. 357-15.000.
Ohischlager, Hans; Sec-
Helling, Gunter; Ohischlager, Hans; Himmelmann, Wolfgang; and
Beck, Manfred, 4,379.838. CI 430-518.000.
Ohmi, Hidehiko; KiUgawa, Katsuhisa; Morimoto, Shoji; Kubo, Tateo;
Ohno, Misao; and Takahashi, Seitaro, to Toyo Seikan Kaisha, Ltd.
Closure having an improved liner. 4,379,512. CI. 215-327.000.
Ohno, Misao: See —
Ohmi, Hidehiko; KiUgawa, Katsuhisa; Morimoto, Shoji; Kubo,
Tateo; Ohno, Misao; and Takahashi, Seitaro. 4,379,512, CI.
215-327.000.
Ohno, Yasuhide: See —
Suzuki, Hiroo; Yamamoto, Koichi; Ohno, Yasuhide; and
Miyamura, Kou, 4,379,482. CI. 164-485.000.
Oizumi, Kyohei: See —
Ashitaka, Hidetomo; Oizumi, Kyohei; Jinda, Kazuya; and Inaishi,
Kazutoshi, 4,379,889, CI. 525-247.000.
Okada, Yasunori; and Kasai, Shozo, to Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd. Heat
resistant resin composition and insulating wire using the same which
is a composition of an active hydrogen compound and the reaction
product of a polyvalent isocyanate and a polyvalent carboxylic acid
anhydride in an organic solvent. 4,379,879, CI. 524-186.000.
Okamura Corporation: See—
lemura, Takusuke; Goto, Takeshi; and Komaki, Hiroshi, 4.379,602.
CI. 312-268.000.
Okuda, Toru: See—
Fujiwara, Akiko; Miyamoto, Chikara; and Okuda, Toru, 4,379,842,
CI. 435-58.000.
Olofsson, Hasse E. O. Airborne vehicle referenced (outside world)
recording device utilizing an electro-optical camera and an electronic
alignment procedure. 4,380,024, CI. 358-93.000.
Olson, David H.; and Rodewald, Paul G., to Mobil Oil Corporation.
CaUlyst and process for making said catalyst. 4,379,761, CI.
252-435.000.
Olsson, Billy E.; and Kam, Lit-Yan, to AMP Incorporated. Flat cable to
planar circuit connector. 4,379,608, CI. 339-75.0MP.
Olympus Optical Company Limited: See —
Suzuki, Yoshiro, 4,379,630, CI. 355-3.0TR.
O'Malley, Mary A.; and Drake, Nancy J., to Diamond Shamrock
Corporation. Surface-treated soft contact lenses. 4,379,893, CI.
525-386.000.
Ong, Helen H.; and Profitt. James A., to American Hoechsl Corpora-
tion. Process for preparing spiro[indoiine-3.4'-pipendineJs 4,379.932.
CI. 546-17.000.
Ong, Helen H ; and Profitt, James A., to Amencan Hocchst Corpora-
tion. Process for preparing spiro(indolmc-3,4'-pipendine)s. 4,379,933,
CI. 546-17 000.
Ooishi, Minoru; Mochizuki, Teruji; and Suzuki, Yutaka, to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Power amplifier. 4,379,997, C\
330-298.000.
Ootsuka, Yoshinori: See —
Hatton, Tadashi; Yamaguchi, Hiroaki; and Ootsuka. Yoshinori.
4,379,403. CI. 73-35.000.
Orlowski, Jan A.; Butler. David V.; and Kidd. Patnck D.. to Scientific
Pharmaceuticals. Inc. Denul material comprising dimethyacrylate
adducts of glycidyl methacrylate with diesters of bis(hydroxymethyl)
tricyclo(5 2. 1 0^'^]decane and dicarboxylic acids 4.379.695. CI
433-217.000.
Ort, Donald L., to Xerox Corporation Method for ink jet pnnting
4.380.017. C4. 346-140.00R
Ortho Diagnostics. Inc.: See —
Natale. Peter J.; and Lombardo. Igino. 4.379,682, CI 425-10.000
Ortho Pharmaceutical Corporation: See —
Capetola, Robert J.; and McGuire. John L., 4,379.789, CI.
424-260.000.
Ota. Hiroshi; Horigome, Eiji; and Azegami, Hitoshi. to TDK Electron-
ics Co., Ltd. Magnetic upe cassette. 4.380,035. CI. 360-130.330.
Otis Elevator Company: See—
Nowak. Frederick H.. 4,379,499, CI. 187-29.00R.
Otis Engineering Corporation: See —
Hamm. Eddie J., 4,379.488. CI. 166-217.000
Otis, Harold R., and Blake, Charles E.. to Rea Magnet Wire Co . Inc
Magnet wire for hermetic motors. 4.379,807. CI 428-383 000
Otomura, Satoshi: See—
Nakamura. Hitoshi; Nishizima, Hideyo; Ema. Hideaki; Harigaya,
Makoto; and Otomura. Satoshi. 4.379.820. CI 430-58.000
Otsuka. Nobuyuki; and Hirai. Seiichi. to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Slidable-type constant velocity universal joint
4.379.706, CI 464-111.000
Otto. Ronald F.: See—
Kempel. John J.; and Otto. Ronald F., 4.379,480. CI. 160-232 000.
Overbergh. Noel M M.. to Raychem Corporation. Adhesive composi-
tion. 4,379.887. CI 525-184.000.
Ovshinsky, Sunford R.: See-
Yang, Chi C; Madan, Arun; Ovshinsky, Sunford R.; and Adier,
David. 4,379.943, CI 136-249.000.
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation: See—
Eisenberg, Arnold J., 4,379,713. CI. 65-1.000.
Owens-Illinois, Inc.: See —
Nowicki, Casimir W.; and Jaffee. Alan M, 4,379.525. CI.
241-20.000.
Perry, Jack I., 4,379,581, CI. 294-115.000.
Taylor, Edwin C, Sr., 4,379,518. CI. 229-15.000.
Godat, Jean, and Paget, Jean. 4.379,496, CI. 177-25.000.
Palmer, Raymond J.; and Micheaux, Dominique, to McDonnell Doug-
las Corporation; and Brochier & Fils. Integral woven reinforcement
for structural components. 4.379,798. CI. 428-113.000.
Fanchanathan. Viswanathan: See-
Ray. Ranjan; and Panchanathan. Viswaiuthan. 4,379.720. CI
75-251.000.
Papsdorf, John, to Liberty Hardware Manufactunng Corp. Method of
making a hinge with an integral pintle. 4,379,360, CI. 29-1 1.000.
Papst-Motoren GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Muller. Rolf, 4,379,984, CI. 318-254.000.
Paracchini, Silvano; and Mora, Paolc C, to Mora, Paolo Corvi. Process
for the synthesis of vincamine and related indole alkaloids 4.379.935.
CI. 546-51.000.
Parekh. Girish G.; Blank, Werner J.; and Schirmann. Peter J . to Amen-
can Cyanamid Company. Cross-linking agents for cationic polymers.
4,379,911, CI. 528-245.000.
Parr, Andrew F., to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. DC, to d.c.
converter with plural feedback loops. 4,380.044, CI 363-21.000
Parrish, William J.; and Fletcher, Christopher L.. to Hughes Aircraft
Company. Charge coupled device focal plane with serial register
having interdigitated electrodes. 4,380,056, CI. 365-183.000.
Pastor, Antonio C; Pastor, Ricardo C; and Arita, Kaneto, to Hughes
Aircraft Company. Bicameral mode crystal growth apparatus and
process. 4,379,733, CI. 156-616.00R.
Pastor, Ricardo C: See-
Pastor, Antonio C; Pastor, Ricardo C; and Anta, Kaneto,
4,379.733, CI. 156-616.00R.
Peardon, Richard. Horse spa. 4,379,438, CI. 119-29.000
Peck, Roger F., to Smith and Nephew Associated Companies Limited.
Adhesive suitable for application to skin 4.379.881. CI 524-315.000
Peerless Electronics Research Corp.: See—
Schmid, Carl J., 4,379.637, CI. 356-411. 000.
Pelletier ExploiUtion: See—
Pelletier, Robert, 4,379,668, CI. 410-77.000.
Pelletier, Robert, to Pelletier ExploiUtion; and Siren Locking device
for securing cargo in a vehicle. 4,379,668, CI. 410-77.000.
Pelz, Willibald: See—
Liebe, Werner; Lohmer, Karl; and Pelz, Willibald, 4.379.828. CI.
430-212.000.
Pepin. Christian; and Trahand, Jean P., lo Thomson-CSF. Television
camera equipped with an anti-blooming device. 4,380,028, CI.
358-219.000.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
Alexander,
Alexander
. 131-275.000.
dome struts.
Perrault, Fredenck; and Perrault, Raymond E., to Whipple Patent
Management Corporation. Cable hanger. 4,379,537, CI. 248-74.00R
Perrault. Raymond E.: See —
Perrault, Frederick; and Perrault, Raymond E. 4 379 537 CI
248-74.00R. . , , v.i.
Perrot, Alexander: See—
Schanz, Friedrich; Schucker, Emil; and Perrot
4,379.523, CI. 239-222.000.
Perrot-Regnerbau GmbH & Co.. See—
Schanz, Friedrich; Schucker, Emil; and Perrot
4,379,523. CI. 239-222.000.
Perry, Jack I., to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Take-out tong assembly
4.379,581, CI. 294-115.000.
Petersen, Tom L., to Multikunst Legepladser I/S. Ground supported
playground device. 4,379,550, CI. 272-52.000.
Pews. Richard G., to Dow Chemical Company, TTie. Preparation of
2-t-butyI-5-hydroxypyrimidine. 4,379,930, CI. 544-298.000.
Pfingst, Jurgen: See —
Dedden, Hubert; and Pfmgst, Jurgen, 4,379,632, CI. 355-68.000
Pfizer Inc.: See—
Melvin, Lawrence S., Jr.; and Johnson, Michael R.. 4,379 783 CI
424-184.000. ' '
Pfost, R. Fred, to Newell Research Corporation. Tape system with
optically contrasting data marks. 4,380,032, CI. 360-74.600.
Phelps Dodge Corporation; See—
Satchell, Donald P., Jr., 4,379,711, CI. 436-82.000.
Philip Morris Incorporated: See—
Wu, D. Louise; and Swain, James W., 4.379,464, CI
Phillips, Martha E. Connector system for geodesic
4,379.649, CI. 403-172.000.
Phillips Petroleum Company: See—
Bailey, Fay W., 4.379,884, CI. 525-96.000.
Brost, Robert L.; and Gagle, Duane W., 4,379,655, CI. 405-176.000.
Selman, Charles M.; and Fodor, Lawrence M., 4.379.898 CI
526-124.000.
Phillips, Thomas S.: See—
Corso, Anthony J.; Colavito, Kathleen M.; and Phillips, Thomas S ,
4,379,937,0.546-155 000.
Picker Corporation: See —
Vagi, Robert J., 4,380,086, CI. 378-155.000.
Pieper, Paul; and Cordier, Walter, to Rolf Peddinghaus. Method of
cutting a workpiece. 4,379,417, CI. 83-27.000.
Pietzsch, Ludwig; and Hartmann, Rudolf, to Pietzsch, Ludwig. Suspen-
sion means for mounting an instrument susceptible to shock
4,379,542, CI. 248-561.000.
Piller, Robert: See—
Deutsch, Albert S.; Lyons, Christopher F.; and Piller Robert
4,379,830, CI. 430-309.000.
Pippert, Fred B., to Utex Industries, Inc. Anti-extrusion packine mem-
ber. 4,379,558, CI, 277-188.00A.
Pitchford, Edward J.; and Troup, Edward M., to Rain Bird Sprinkler
Mfg. Corp. Planocentric gear drive 4,379,976, CI. 310-83.000
Pitney Bowes Inc.: See—
Adamoski, William; and Hotchkiss, Alan B., 4,379.383, CI 53-
266.00A.
Coppola. Vincent G., 4,379,985, CI, 318-293.000.
Dannatt, Hugh St. L., 4,379,414, CI. 74-805.000
Pixton, Betty G.: See—
Fruitstone, Mitchell J.; Tilly, Michele M.; and Pixton. Betty G
4.379.847, CI. 436-8.000.
Plachno, Robert S,, to Mostek Corporation. Delay suge for a clock
generator. 4,379,974, CI. 307-269.000.
Playmont AG: See—
Steinegger, Walther, 4,380,007, CI. 340-365.00C
Plester, Karl-Heinz: See—
Rosenberg, Harry; Plester, Karl-Heinz; Eggenstein, Friedrich; and
Terhorst. Gunter, 4,379,424, CI. 92-13.410.
Plueddemann, Edwin P., to Dow Coming Corporation. Metal extrac-
tion from solution and novel compounds used therefor 4 379 931 CI
546-14.000.
Polizzotti, Richard S.; and Krutenat, Richard C. to Exxon Research
and Engineering Co. Carburization resistance of austenitic stainless
steel tubes. 4,379,745, CI. 208-132.000.
PoUock, Clyde. Multiplication/division tutorial game. 4,379,700. CI
434-208.000.
Polychrome Corporation: See—
Deutsch. Albert S.; Lyons, Christopher F.; and Piller, Robert,
4,379,830, CI. 430-309.000.
Porter, Donald G. Fan accessory for heater. 4,379,446, CI. 126-1 lO.OOB.
Posset, Robert, to BFG Glassgroup. Capacitive systems for touch
control switching. 4,380,040, CI. 361-280.000.
Powell Manufacturing Company, Inc.: See-
Wilson, Robert W.. 4,379,669, CI. 414-21.000.
PPG Industries, Inc.: See-
Miller, John D.; and Gnincwalder, Valentine J., 4,379.885, CI.
525-108.000.
Fraaco Super Seeder Ltd.: See—
Klein. Merv V.; Kelm. Dan W.; and Din, Salah U., 4,379,664, CI.
406-68.000.
PraUp, Prem: See—
Angelo, Eugene V.; and PraUp, Prem, 4,379,544, CI. 251-74.000.
Price, Robert J.: See—
Meisel, Thomas C, Jr.; and Price, Robert J., 4,379,674, CI.
414-699.000.
Primbsch, Erik; and Bickel, Wolf, to Krautkramer-Branson, Inc. Appa-
ratus for producing ultrasonic waves in a workpiece. 4,379.409 CI
73-643.000 . . , v,i.
Primbsch. Erik: See—
Bickel, Wolf; Kaule, Walter; and Primbsch. Erik, 4.379,633. CI
356-359.000.
Procter & Gamble Company, TTie: See—
Bolich, Raymond E., Jr., 4,379,753, CI. 252-106.000.
Profit!. James A.: See—
Ong, Helen H.; and Profitt. James A.. 4,379.932, CI. 546-17.000
Ong, Helen H.; and Profitt, James A., 4,379,933, CI. 546-17.000.
Proud, Joseph M., to GTE Laboratories Incorporated. Low energy
starting aid for high intensity discharge lamps. 4,379,982, CI.
Prudhon, Francois J.; and Scicluna, Augustin L., to Rhone-Poulenc
Industries. Device for putting into contact substances existing in at
least two different phases. 4,379,638, CI. 366-149 000
Pruyn, Richard R.: See-
Bevan, David: Yee, James S.; and Pruyn, Richard R., 4.380,012, CI.
343-705.000.
Purdy, Robert H : See-
Rao, Pemmaraju N.; Purdy, Robert H ; and Moore, Perry H . Jr
4,379,779, CI. 436-543.000. y • ■>
Purr. Horst, to Mathias Bauerle GmbH. Washing unit for an offset
duplicating machine. 4,379,467. CI. 134-111.000.
Puschner, Manfred; and Gerdau, Herbert, to ESAB Aktiebolag. Tubu-
lar filler wire for fusion welding. 4,379,811, CI. 428-555.000.
Qualitz, Marion; and Krupp. Viktor A., to Spezial-Papiermaschinenfab-
rik August Alfred Krupp GmbH & Co. Pressure sensitive recording
materials. 4.379.721. CI. 106-21.000.
Radel; Robert J.; and Sullivan. Jack M.. to Tennessee Valley Authority.
Preparation of nitrogen fertilizers from oxalate esters prepared by the
oxidative carbonylation of alcohols over noble metal caulysts utiliz-
ing regenerable 2,5-cyclohexadiene-l,4-dione oxidants. 4,379 939, CI
560-193.000.
Rademacher. Thomas P., to NcNeil Corporation. Leg buoy for trainine
swimmers. 4,379.704. CI. 441-88.000.
Railway Track-Work Company: See—
Jenkins, Allan D.; Appelen, John T.; and Lind, Nils, 4,379,371, CI
37-104.000.
Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.: See—
Pitchford, Edward J.; and Troup, Edward M., 4,379,976, CI
3I0-83.00C.
Raj Technology Partnership: See—
Sandhu, Jaswinder S., 4,379,408, CI. 73-603.000.
Raksis, Joseph W.: See —
Siadat, Bahram: and Raksis, Joseph W., 4,379,869, CI. 523-206.000.
Ralph McKay Limited: See-
Young, Hartley F.; Verhoef. Hendrikus M., deceased; and Remes,
Wally A., 4,379.521, CI. 238-349 000.
Ramsey Winch Company: See —
Ball. Harold .M.; and Beach, Robert G., 4,379,502, CI. 192-71.000.
Rao, Pemmaraju N ; Purdy, Robert H., and Moore, Perry H., Jr., to
American Home Products Corporation. Equilin hapten and assay
method. 4,379,779. CI. 436-543.000.
Rao, Pemmaraju N., ;o American Home Products Corporation. 17
a-Dihydroequilin hapten and assay method. 4,379,780, CI.
436-543.000.
Rasmussen, Chris R., to McNeilab, Inc. N-Aryl-N-(4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-
lH-1,3, diazepin-2-yl)ureas as antihypertensives. 4,379,786, CI.
424-244.000.
Rathjen, Hans-Carl; and Koziol, Konrad, to Conradty GmbH Co.
MeUlIelektroden KG. Gas-generating metal electrode for electro-
chemical processes. 4,379,742, CI. 204-286.000.
Rattlingourd, Glen D., to Sperry Corporation. Tri-level differential line
receiver. 4,380,080, CI. 375-17.000.
Ray, Ranjan; and Panchanathan, Viswanathan, to Marko Materials, Inc.
Nickel-aluminum-boron powders prepared by a rapid solidification
process. 4.379,720, CI. 75-251.000.
Raychem Corporation: See —
Martin, Charles L.. 4,379,575, CI. 285-369.000.
Overbergh, Noel M. M., 4,379,887, CI. 525-184.000.
RCA Corporation: See —
Chambers, Robert W.; McNeely, Michael L.; and Torrington,
Leslie A., 4,379,686, CI. 425-290.000
Torres, Rafael; and Woodward, Oakley M., 4,380,011, CI.
343-702.000.
Ziegel, Douglas H., 4,379,510, CI. 209-643.000.
Rea Magnet Wire Co., Inc.: See-
Otis, Harold R.; and Blake, Charles E., 4,379,807, CI. 428-383.000.
Realist, Inc.: See—
Graef. John N., 4,379,628, CI 353-73.000.
Reaves, V. Randon, to Valinco, Inc. Vane type valve actuator.
4,379.543, CI. 251-59.000.
Reece, Wendell D.: See-
Elliott, Marion D.; and Reece, Wendell D., 4,379,522, CI.
239-167 000.
Reed, Russell, Jr.; and Chan, May L., to United States of America,
Navy. Propellant binders cure catalyst. 4,379,903, CI. 528-55.000.
Regitz, Gunter: See —
Weyer, Rudi; Hitzel, Volker; Geisen, Karl; and Regitz, Gunter,
4,379,785, CI. 424-244.000.
Rego, Norberto O. S. Process for tanning fish skins. 4,379,708, CI.
8-94.120.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
Reichhold Chemicals, Incorporated: See-
Amundsen, Joseph; Goodwin, Robert J.; and Wetzel, Wilham H ,
4,379,810,0.428-541.000.
Reimer, Bemd: See— ^ ^^^
Lutz. Manfred; and Reimer, Bemd, 4,379.821, CI. 430-58.000.
Reinhall, Ulf. Compaction apparatus for use with lawn grooming equip-
ment. 4,379,385. CI. 56-16.600.
Reitmeier, Glenn A.; and Marlowe, Frank J. Digital error detection
using bracketing. 4,380,069, CI. 371-31.000.
Remes. Wally A.: See-
Young, Hartley F.; Verhoef, Hendrikus M., deceased; and Remes,
Wally A.. 4,379,521, CI. 238-349.000.
Reuter, Wolfgang: See— ^ . ^ „ ,., ir
Maier. Roland; Wetzel, Bemd; Woitun, Eberhard; Reuter, Wolf-
gang; Lechner, Uwe; and Goeth, Hanns, 4,379,784, CI.
424-229.000.
Reutter, Heinrich, to Reutter Metallwarenfabrik GmbH. Closing cap,
particularly for a motor vehicle radiator. 4,379,470, CI. 137-493.800.
Reutter MeUllwarenfabrik GmbH: See—
Reutter, Heinrich. 4,379,470, CI. 137-493.800.
Rexworks Inc.: See —
Riddle, Charles F., 4,379,565. CI. 280-160.000.
Reyes. Peter A.: See—
Carlock, Gaylord W.; Garner, Jimmy G.; Gatlm, Charles
M.;
CI.
Guinn, Kenneth F.; and Reyes. Peter A., 4,379,678
416-98.000.
Rhee, Jae W. Refrigerator. 4,379.391, CI. 62-408.000.
Rhone-Poulenc Industries: See— ^,,„.,o r^,
Prudhon, Francois J.; and Scicluna. Augustin L., 4,379,638, CI.
366-149.000. ^ ^
Ribi, Valentino, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Front
suspension system for a motorcycle. 4,379.567, CI. 280-276.000.
Ricci, Antonio, to Diesse Diagnostica Senese S.r.l. Hemolytic method
for the kinetic determination of antistreptolysin O antibodies in blood
or serum samples, using oxidized streptolysin O. 4,379,850, CI.
436-517.000.
Richard Wolf GmbH: See— „. ,. . ,^
Bauer, Siegfried; and Boebel, Manfred. 4,379.458, CI. 604-264.000.
Ricoh Company, Ltd.: See—
Mizuma.Kenichi. 4,379,549. CI. 271-3.100. .....
Nakamura. Hitoshi; Nishizima, Hideyo; Ema, Hideaki; Hangaya.
Makoto; and Otomura, Satoshi. 4,379,820, CI. 430-58.000.
Riddle, Charles F., to Rexworks Inc. Nonfouling wheel housing for
compaction vehicle. 4,379,565, CI. 280-160.000.
Riedel de Haen Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Margold, Franz, 4.379,709, CI. 8-94.180.
Riehl, Robert E.: See— „■ ^, „ ^
Albo, Ronald T.; Camey, James E., Jr.; and Riehl, Robert E.,
4,379,527, CI. 242-4.0BE.
Ries, Gerhard: See— ^^^
Fickel, Walter; and Ries. Gerhard, 4.379.860, CI. 521-61.000.
Riess, Guido, to Neodontics, Inc. Dental implant. 4,379,694. CI.
433-201.000. ^^, ^,^
Riethmuller, Heinz; Sindlinger, Rainer; and Schultz, Peter, to TELDIX
GmbH. Gyrocompass. 4,379,365. CI. 33-316.000.
Riewerts. Paul R.; and Hillman, Stephen M., to Deere & Company.
Leveling system for a wheeled implement. 4,379,491, CI. 172-328.000.
Rines, Carol M.: See—
Knowles, Albert H., 4.379.436, CI. 119-3.000.
Knowles, Albert H., 4.379,437, CI. 119-3.000.
Rines, Robert H.: See—
Knowles, Albert H.. 4.379.436. CI. 119-3.000.
Knowles, Albert H., 4,379,437, CI. 1 19-3.000.
Rion Claude; and Ruckheim, Winfried, to Audi Nsu Auto Union
Aktiengesellschaft. Power seat adjuster. 4,379,539, CI. 248-371.000.
Ripka, Michael S.. to Nabisco Brands, Inc. Yeast process and product.
4.379.845. CI. 435-255.000.
Rite-Hite Corporation: See—
Hahn. Norbert; and Hipp. Steven J., 4.379.354. CI. 14-71.300.
Rixon. Inc.: See — ^ lon/Y^i r^\
Stuart, Richard L.; and Killmeyer, Fred C, 4,380,062. CI.
370-20.000.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See— .. , , ^ ^ . -j^.^^,
Hamisch, Hans J.; Boruschweitz, Manfred; and Gast, Theodor,
4,379,404. CI. 73-35.000.
Kurz. Wolfgang; and Leunig. Rainer. 4,379,989, CI. 320-26 000.
Robertson. Gene V Latch bolt strike lock. 4.379,577. CI. 292-341.150.
Robertson. James B.: See— j n l j
Fripp, Archibald L.; Robertson. James B.; and Breckenndge,
Roger A., 4,379.970, CI. 250-338.000. „ . , w .
Robinson, Joseph G.; Barnes, David I.; and Carswell, Angela M., to
Coal Industry (Patents) Limited. Keto/polycarboxy contammg resin.
4,379,896, CI. 525-472.000.
Rock, Erich; and Brunner, Josef, to Julius Blum Ges.m.b.H. Drawer.
4,379,604. CI. 312-330.00R.
Rockwell International Corporation: See—
Frankel, Milton B.; Witucki. Edward F.; and Woolery. Dean O., II.
4,379,894, CI. 525-403.000.
Grantham, LeRoy F.; and Johanson, James G., 4,379.718, CI.
Ho, Wiiliam W.; and Hall. William F., 4,379,991. CI. 324-58.50C.
Weber. Robert J.. 4.379,996. CI. 330-296.000.
Rodewald, Paul G: See- .. „ . ^ Ai-jo-jsit ni
Olson. David H.; and Rodewald. Paul G., 4,379,761, CI.
252-435.000.
Rodgers, Stuart N.; and Voycheshin, Sidney J. Concrete forming
apparatus. 4,379.683. CI. 425-62.000.
Rohm and Haas Company: See—
Clikeman. Richard R.; Jones, Donald H.; Shortndge. Thomas J.;
and Troy. Edward J., 4,379,876, CI. 524-109.000.
Rolf Peddinghaus: See—
Pieper. Paul; and Cordier. Walter, 4.379.417, CI. 83-27.000.
Rollmann, Louis D., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Method for production
of heavy oil from tar sands. 4.379,489, CI. 166-266.000.
Rooney, Clarence S.: See—
Cragoe, Edward J., Jr.; Rooney, Clarence S.; and Williams, Haydn
W. R., 4,379,791. CI. 424-270.000.
Roos, Sture G: See— ,„„„„, ^,
Andersson, Karl A. I.; and Roos. Sture G., 4,380,083, CI
375-120.000.
Root, John A.: See-
Clark, Richard P.; Frantz, Robert H.; Hawk, Gary W.; and Root,
John A., 4.379.606. CI. 339-17.0CF.
Rose. John A.; and Dyer, Keith, to AMF Incorporated. Apparatus for
manufacture of jigs. 4,379,666, CI. 409-110.000.
Rosenberg, Harry; Plester. Karl-Heinz; Eggenstein. Friedrich; and
Tcrhorst. Gunter. to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia. Devices for
limiting the stroke of a hydraulic ram used in mining apparatus.
4,379,424. CI. 92-13.410.
Rosenthal, Joel W.; and Dahlberg, Arthur J., to Chevron Research
Company. Coal liquefaction process. 4,379,744, CI. 208-10.000.
Rosenthal. Moshe. Method and device for detecting birefringcnt sub-
stances in liquids. 4,379.634, CI. 356-365.000.
Rotator, Ltd.: See—
Webb, Ronald W.; and Morgan, Robert L.. 4.379.552. CI.
272-67.000.
Roth, Daniel T. Water deflector assembly for swimming pool skimmers.
4,379,749, CI. 210-169.000.
Rothauser, Emst H.: See—
Janson, Philippe A.; Muller. Hans R ; and Rothauser, Emst H..
4,380,063, CI. 370-60.000.
Roudeau, Maurice. OvervolUge protective module. 4.380.038. CI
361-119.000.
Roussel, Michel: See— ., . ,
Mimoun, Hubert; Charpentier, Robert; and Roussel. Michel.
4,379,942, CI. 568-385.000.
Roussin, Michael A ; Jones, Steven D.; and Woody. Albert L.. to
Caterpillar Tractor Co. Ripper with offset impacting means and
slotted shank. 4,379.595. CI. 299-37.000.
Rovelli. Giuseppe, to Industrie Pirelli S.p A. Device for keeping a
lining-layer in conuct with the walls of a civil-engineering works.
4,379,654, CI. 405-53.000.
Royer, Robert: See— ..■,.,„ .no
Miller, Daniel R.; Deaton, Thomas; and Royer, Robert, 4,379.508.
CI. 206-507.000.
Ruckheim, Winfried: See — ._. ,„^
Rion, Claude; and Ruckheim. Winfried. 4.379.539. CI. 248-371.000.
Rudd. Chester D.: See— ^ .,,„.».
Juner. Adolph; Haas, David J.; and Rudd, Chester D., 4.379.481.
CI. 160-310.000. , , ,
Ruehle, William H., to Mobil Oil Corporation. F-K Filtenng of multiple
reflections from a seismic section. 4,380,059, CI. 367-46 000.
Rundell, Herbert A.; and Horton, Eugene B.. Jr., to Texaco Inc. Strip-
ping gland for multicables with connector. 4,379,556. CI. 277-12.000.
Rusch Larry P., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Fluorescent lamp
having improved barrier layer. 4,379,981, CI. 313-489^Cm
Ruschitzka, Friedrich. Clamp-bolt shelving. 4,379,430. CI. 108-107 000
Rybicki Edward B., to Warner Lambert Technologies, Inc. 40x Micro-
scope objective. 4,379,623, CI. 350-414.000.
Ryobi Limited: See —
Kobayashi, Takehiro, 4,379.530, CI. 242-220.000.
Sabater Sanmartin, Jose: See—
Calzada Badia, Jose-Maria; Boleda Vila, Antonio;
tin, Jose; and Villazon Meneses, Maria J.
424-274.000.
Saito, Teruo: See— .... j c .
Ueno, Katsuzi; Maruyama, Takashi; Suzuki. Hanio; and Saito.
Teruo. 4.379,892. CI. 525-439.000.
Saka, Hamid J., to ACF Industries, Incorporated. Valve stem packing
structure. 4,379,557. CI. 277-59.000.
Sakamoto. Katsuji: See— .. .,„,,, -..
Toda. Yuichi; Yano, Kohji; and Sakamoto. Kauuji, 4.379,613, CI.
350-96.230.
Sakurai, Takakazu: See—
Konishi, Seizi; Tashiro, Kazuyuki; Kamigane, Yoshihiro; Sakurai,
Takakazu; Tanifuji, Shinya; and Morooka, Yasuo, 4,379,395, CI.
72-8.000. , c ^ ^ ■
Salicini, Sandro, to Carle & Montanari S.p.A. Article feedmg device
4,379,504, CI. 198-455.000. . . „ ,_
Samaritter, Reinhard; Schoberth, Winfried; and Volland, Robert, to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Polyurethane foam molding with zones ot
different indentation hardness and a process for lU production
4,379,856, CI. 521-51.000. ^ ^ ^ ^ r^, r-
Samuels, Kenneth E.; and Wiggins, Wayne T.. to Standard Oil Com-
pany, The. Coalescing aid for high nitrUe copolymer latex coatmgs
4,379,875, CI. 524-104.000.
Sanders, Robert E., Jr.: See— c i a i-»q -no r'\
HUdeman. Gregory J.; and Sanders, Robert E., Jr., 4,379,719, CI.
419-60.000. .. , ^ .1
Sandhu. Jaswinder S., to Raj Technology P«rt?5P^ ri%"iiS?SS
technique for examining internal structures. 4.379,408, CI. 73-Wi.ww
; Sabater Sanmar-
4.379,793, CI.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
Sandner. Michael R.. 4,379,757,
CI
Sandner, Michael R ; See—
Baskent, Feyyaz O; and
252-426000
Sanmatsu Kogyo Co., Ltd See—
''°4J7T75l''cr2'o-65S'''' """""^ '"' '^°"^^- '^'"'"'"^•
San Miguel, Anthony, to United Sutes of America, Army System for
measunng plate deformation produced by explosive shock waves
and motion-sensing accelerometer transducer used therein. 4.379.401,
Sano. Hiromi; and Suzuki. Masatoshi. to Nippondenso Co., Ltd Oxy-
gen concentration sensor. 4,379,741, CI 204-424 000
Sanyo Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Andoh. Sadanan; Maeda. Junji; Fukushima. Kiyoshi Yoneda
Hiroichi: and Jinushi. Naotomo, 4.380,018 CI 346-140 OOR
Saotome. Hikoji Life belt 4,379,705, CI 441-94 000
Sara, Raymond V., to Union Carbide Corporation. Stress relieved
metal/ceramic abradable seals and deformable metal substrate there
for 4,379,812, CI. 428-577.000.
Satchell, Donald P , Jr., to Phelps Dodge Corporation. Apparatus and
nS^l 1 CI ^36*82^000°"'*°""^ ^" '°" "''^^"8^ nuidized bed
Sato, Nobuhiro, to TDK Electronics Co , Ltd Cleaning tape for mag-
netic recording apparatus. 4,379,800, CI. 428-148.000
Sauder Industries, Inc.; See—
Sauder. Robert A , 4,379,382, CI. 52-506.000.
Sauder, Robert A , to Sauder Industries, Inc Method and apparatus for
insulating a furnace having a corrosive atmosphere. 4,379,382, CI
52-506.000
Sauer, Gerhard See —
Horowski, Reinhard; Kehr, Wolfgang; Sauer, Gerhard Eder
Ulnch. and Lorenz, Hans P , 4,379,790. CI 424-261 000
Savagian, Michael D : See—
Downing, Gerald T , and Savagian, Michael D , 4,379,805 CI
428-346.000 . , ,
Savino, Frank M : See—
Borkan, William N.; Savino, Frank M.. and Waltz Josenh M
4,379,462, CI 128-786000. ^ '
Schaad. Walter: See—
Blatter, Johann; and Schaad, Walter, 4,379,958, CI 200-148 OOA
Schafer. David E.; and Czajkowski. Albert J., to Monsanto Company
Compositions and methods for reducing herbicidal injury 4.379,716,
Schall, William L., to Occidental Chemical Corporation. Vinyl halide
polymer of enhanced plasticizer uptake. 4,379,880, CI 524-297 000
Schanbacher, Larry M : See
Suub, Herbert W ; Schanbacher, Larry M.; Zencheck, Jack D
ana Young, Cynthia L, 4,379.782, CI 424-180.000
Schanz, Fnedrich; Schucker. Emil; and Perrot, Alexander, to Perrot-
Kegnerbau GmbH & Co. Spnnkler 4,379,523 CI 239-222 000
ScheichI, Georg: See—
Hauslein, Siegfried; Steinberger, Hans; Heigl, Willibald; ScheichI,
Oeorg; and Kauderer, Erwin. 4,379,352, CI 5-471 000
Scheier, Franz See—
Andersen, Heinz-Erhardt; Brebels, Jaek J ; Matschke, Klaus and
Scheier, Franz, 4,379,774, CI. 264-284.000
Scheinpflug, Gunter, to Tnumph-Adler AG. fur Buro-und Informa-
tionstechnik Large formal paper handling assembly for typewriters
or like business machines. 4,379.645, CI 400-623 000
Schenng Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Horowski. Reinhard; Kehr. Wolfgang; Sauer, Gerhard; Eder
Ulnch; and Lorenz, Hans P., 4.379,790, CI. 424-261 000
Vorbruggen. Helmut; and Schwarz, Norbert, 4,379 927 CI
544-139.000. ' '
Schetina, Otto: See—
Schiel. Christian, to J M. Voith GmbH. Drying cylinder for machines
4°379!36^Cl'"3^Ilo"aX? '"*"''°^ ^°' '"'*'""* ""^ ''''""^ ''^^""^"
Schirmann. Peter J See
'T3''79.9?ra ?28-S5'Si0^^"'" '' ^"'^ ^''""^""- ''^'^ "' '
Schrnednecht. Fred C. to Thatcher Engineenng Corporation. Method
405 26T0O0"'"* constructing slurry walls. 4,379,658. CI.
Schmid. Carl J . to Peerless Electronics Research Corp. Radiation
measunng apparatus. 4.379,637, CI. 356-41 1.000
Schmidt, Jom M., to Danfoss A/S. Method of making an apparatus
containing a diaphragm. 4,379.961, CI 219-78 010
Schmitt. Ludwig: See—
Goldammer, Georg; and Schmitt, Ludwig, 4,379,386, CI
Schmulian, David E.. to Burroughs Corporation Hammer locating and
operational means. 4,379,428, CI. 101-93 090
Schnoring. Hildegard; Schranz, Karl-Wilhelm; and Koepke, Gunther
to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the production of
dispersions and photographic materials 4,379.836, CI 430-377 000
Schoberth, Winfried See—
^3*79 856 "ci "521^5 iroo"^'*''' ^*"^"*^' *"*^ ^""""*1' ^°^'^'
Schoening Josef; Schwiers, Hans-Georg; Elter. Claus; Stracke, Wil-
fried; and M.uersberger, Reinhard, to Hochtemperatur-Reaktorbau
GmbH Angled gas conduit. 4.380,085, CI. 376-381 000
APRIL 12, 1983
Ludwig, 4.379,386. CI.
4,379,578. CI. 294-31.200.
and Schulte, Juergen,
Schonemann, Otto: See —
Gubbe, Bemd; Krause, Klaus-Dieter; Neidhardt, Rudolf and
Schonemann, Otto, 4,379,429. CI 108-5 000
%^"ier^4T7a^ Cr?2^nT6cS"^^ ^ "'^^ '^^^^ ^°^ '■""-"""^
Schott. Lawrence A See—
^n^^\\A^" ^- ^"'^ ^^ou, Lawrence A.. 4.379.393. CI.
/U-234.000.
Schott. Roger A.; and Schott. Lawrence A., to Freedom Industries.
inc. Lock for open frame vehicles. 4.379.393 CI 70-234 000
Schott. Roger A.: See —
Schott, Lawrence A.; and Schott. Roger A 4 379 447 CI
126-117.000. * • ^••"^''^'' *-'•
Schranz. Karl-Wilhelm: See—
^tr4.!79%W4S'37T^*^^'-^'''^'"'^ ^"'^ '^°^'"'^- °""-
Schubert & Salzer: See—
Goldammer. Georg; and Schmitt.
57-405.000.
Schucker, Emil: See—
Schuler, Heriberto. Reusable bottle holder
Schulte, Juergen: See—
Wojaczek. Egon; Soliman, Musufa
4,379,661, CI. 405-299.000.
Schultz. Peter: See—
''t3'7T3&CM3-316'ciSo''"'"' """'""^ ""'^ ^''""^- '''='"'
'^^la£m^"eXaddte"'^^^^^^^^^^
'tT7"5oS.'cr/2:388S"^' ''''^'"' '"^ ^"^^ •""''" --'-^"-
Schwarz. Norbert: See—
^o'^ruggen. Helmut; and Schwarz, Norbert, 4,379,927, CI.
Schwiers, Hans-Georg: See—
^!l?tr'"!' ^°^^: ^^'^'^'^- Hans-Georg; Elter, Claus; Stracke.
v^i ,"0, A^^"'* Mauersberger, Reinhard, 4.380,085. CI.
Scicluna. Augustin L.: See—
^^^^^°J\\^^^°^^ •'• ^^^ Scicluna. Augustin L.. 4.379.638.
J06- 149.000.
Scientific Pharmaceuticals. Inc.: See—
°4:'3^9!'695'ci. ?33-2rS6. ""^^'^ "^ ^ ^"' '''"'' ^''^'^
^106-2^87 1 to' '° ^*'^" °'' *^'""P^">' ''■P^''"^ 8^' P'"8 4,379.722.
Sedlmair. Gerhard, to Marker-Patentverwertungsgesellschaft mbH Ski
stopper. 4,379.570. CI. 280-605.000.
Selas Corporation of America: See
Morck. Charles W.. Jr.. 4.379,689. CI. 431-284.000
Selman, Charles M.; and Fodor, Lawrence M., to Phillips Petroleum
Company. Polymenzation catalysts. 4,379,898, CI 526-124 000
Sengoku, Ikuo, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Device for
o '?oB ,tvi'^'"'^°* molding onto a windowpane. 4,379.379, CI.
Sewell Plastics, Inc : See-
Long, Geoffrey A. D.; and McPike, Brian C, 4,379,731,
Sexton. James H.See—
'*S9.i57:c^?'i?i.'''"""" "- ""' ^'"°"- '^^^
Seybold, Guenther: See—
Graser, Fritz, and Seybold. Guenther, 4.379,934. CI. 546-37 000
Seyipour. Robert W.: See—
C; and Seymour. Robert W., 4.379,801. CI.
CI.
D.,
CI.
CI.
H.
C; and Seymour, Robert W., 4,379,802, CI.
Weaver. James
428-220.000.
Weaver. James
428-220.000.
Sharov. Vyacheslav G.: See—
Shkidchenko. Alexandr N.; Nesterov. Boris F.; Sharov, Vyaches-
cu 'i5\° ; *"*^ Smolin. Boris I.. 4,379.846, CI. 435-316.000.
^narp Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Inoue. Tomohiro, 4.379.640. CI. 368-63.000
""XXkcvf&^A """'"^ ""' "■"""='"• '"'^'''°*''''
Sharp. Shelby P.. to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Method for
i^"i^\*^°L^P"*'•'^"^ depositions with amine-activated disulfide oil
4.379,490, CI. 166-304.000.
Shaw, Michael J., to Allied Paper, Incorporated. Conductive barrier
coat for electrosutic masters. 4.379,822, CI. 430-62.000.
Shek, Thompson: See —
..u J^^X' ^ ^"^' ""<^ ^^^^' Thompson, 4,379,973, CI. 307-1 12.000.
Shell Oil Company: See—
Brownscombe, Thomas F., 4.379,908, CI. 528-91 000
Haynes, George R., 4,379,891, CI. 525-342.000.
Scott, Paul R., 4,379.722. CI. 106-287.170.
Sherwood Medical Company: See—
Cornell, William D.; and Evans, Camot, 4,379,456. CI. 128-314 000
Sherwood, Tom W., to Unique Products Company, Inc. Paper ban
stiffener. 4,379,519, CI. 229-55.000. ^ *
Sheshtawy. Adel, to International Petroleum Engineering Corporation
Replaceable drill stabilizer sleeve. 4,379.494, CI. 175-325 000
Shiba, Haruo. to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd. Magnetic Upe cassette
4,380,030. CI. 360-132.000. ««:uc.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 21
Shiever, John W.: See -
Fleming, James W., Jr., and Shiever, John W., 4,37'),616, C\
350-96.340.
Shima, George T., to Burroughs Corporation. Smgle transmission bus
data network employing a daisy-chained bus data assignment control
line which can bypass non-operating stations. 4,380,052, CI.
364-900.000.
Shimada, Sumio: See —
Hirosawa, Kuninori; and Shimada, Suroto, 4,379,859, CI
521-59.000.
Shimbashi, Ichiro; Ikegami, Hiroshi; and Bando, Hideharu, to Nippon
Steel Corporation. Continuous cold rolling and annealing apparatus
for steel strip. 4,379,547, CI 266-103.000
Shinto Kogio, Ltd.: See—
Nishikawa, Kazuyuki; and Hirao, Katsumi, 4,379,865. CI
523-139.000.
Shipley, Randall S.; Lowery, Kirby, Jr ; and Gibbs, Ronald L., to Dow
Chemical Company. The. High efficiency catalyst for polymerizing
olefins. 4,379,760, CI. 252-429.00B.
Shiraishi, Mitsura: See —
Numata, Mitsuo; Mimamida, Isao; Yamaoka, Masayoshi; Shiraishi,
Mitsura; and Miyawaki, Toshio, 4,379,924, CI. 544-27.000.
Shkidchenko, Alexandr N.; Nesterov, Boris F.; Sharov, Vyacheslav O.;
and, Smolin, Boris I. Fermentation apparatus. 4,379,846, CI.
435-316.000.
Shockley, Richard C, to Standard Oil Company, The. Acoustic degen-
erate four-wave mixing phase-conjugate reflector. 4,379,998, CI.
333-150.000.
Shortridge, Tliomas J.; See —
Clikeman, Richard R.; Jones, Donald H., Shortridge, Thomas J.;
and Troy. Edward J., 4.379,876, CI. 524-109 000.
Shrum, Kenneth L., to Sun Studs, Inc. Veneer lathe log charger system
having enhanced accuracy and rate of production. 4,379,477. CI.
144-357.000.
Shulman, Lawrence M.: See —
Leventer, William; and Shulman, Lawrence M., 4,380,027. CI.
358-147.000.
Siadat, Bahram; and Raksis, Joseph W . to W. R. Grace & Co Cationic
latices and their electrodeposition. 4,379,869, CI. 523-206.000.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Kunze, Dieter. 4,379,473. CI. 138-167.000
Liertz, Heinrich, 4,379,614, CI. 350-96.210.
Steinberger, Wolfgang; and Stempfl, Gerhard, 4,380.019, CI. 346-
140 OOR
Wilhelm. Wilhelm. 4,380,060, CI. 370-5.000
Sievers, Kirk A.; and Mortonson. Robert W , to Motorola Inc. Fault
detection and diagnostic system for automotive battery charging
systems. 4,379,990, CI. 322-99.000.
Sigma concern: See —
Langr. Oldrich, 4.379.397, CI. 72-95.000.
Sikora. Helga: See —
Herwig, Walter; Klupfel. Kurt; Sikora. Helga; and Sprengel, Heide,
4.379.834, CI. 430-329.000.
Silverman. Ronald R.: See—
Hansen, Howard H.; Lasky, Jerome B.; and Silverman, Ronald R.,
4,379,727, CI. 148-1 500.
Simko. Aladar O., to Ford Motor Company Electromagnetically
controlled fuel injection pump. 4,379,442, CI. 123-458.000.
Simmons, Lovel R. Trailer with adjustable wheels. 4.379.571, CI.
280-656.000.
Sindlinger. Rainer: See —
Riethmuller. Heinz; Sindlinger, Rainer; and Schultz, Peter,
4,379,365, CI. 33-316.000.
Singer Company, The: See —
Hauser, William G., 4,379,601, CI. 312-21.000.
Siren: See —
Pelletier, Robert, 4,379,668. CI. 410-77.000.
Sjolinder. Per-Olof. Traction benches. 4.379,450, CI 128-74.000.
SKF Industries, Inc.: See —
Sundqvist, Yngve, 4,379,599, CI. 308-187.000.
Skinner, Ronald W.: See—
Dalton, Augustine I., Jr.; and Skinner, Ronald W., 4,379,778, CI.
423-584.000.
Skistimas, Donald V.: See-
Holmes, Rory A.; and Skistimas, Donald V., 4,379,799, CI
428-131.000.
Skymar Corporation: See—
Schuyler. Andreas D.; and Maier, Richard K., 4,379,554, CI. 273-
67.00R.
Slater Electric Inc.: See—
Bowden, Wade R., Jr., 4,379,607. CI. 339-40.000.
Slysh, Paul, to General Dynamics Corp./Convair Division. Expandable
panel and truss system/antenna/solar panel. 4,380,013, CI.
343-753.000.
Smethers, Rollo G., Jr.: See—
Caldwell, Edward W.; and Smethers, Rollo G., Jr., 4,379,533, CI.
.244-118.100.
Smith and Nephew Associated Companies Limited: See-
Peck. Roger F., 4,379,881. CI. 524-315.000.
Smith, Peter R.; and Coleman. Charles, to Statitrol, Inc. Pyroelectric
sensor. 4.379,971, CI. 250-342.000.
Smolin, Boris I.: See —
Shkidchenko, Alexandr N.; Nesterov, Boris F.; Sharov, Vyaches-
lav G.; and Smolin, Boris I., 4,379,846, CI. 435-316.000.
Snyder, Donald 0 , to Western Electric Company. Inc Methods uf and
apparatus for terminating a lightguide fiber ribbon. 4,379.771, CI.
264-1.500.
Snyder, Edward A : See—
Ixvk, William E ; and Snyder, Edward A , 4,379,8)8, CI 430-5.000
Snyder, Martin, to C R Bard, Inc Copolymer composition and deliv-
ery system for providing a protective barner film for the skin
4,379,863, CI. 523-105.000
Societe Francaisc d'Agrafage Induslriel • Sofragraf See--
Barlogis, Rene, 4,379,516, Ci. 222-1460HE
Societc Nationale d'Etude et dc Construction de Moteurs d'Aviation,
"S NEC M A " See—
Hallinger, Claude C; and Kervistin, Robert, 4,379,677, CI
415-175.000.
Soliman. Mustafa: See —
Wojaczek, Egon, Soliman, Mustafa; and Schulte. Jucrgen.
4,379,661. CI. 405-299.000
Solomon. Frank; and Grun, Charles, to Diamond Shamrock Corpora-
tion Methcxi for forming an electrode active layer or sheet.
4,379,772. CI. 264-49.000.
Sonderegger, Hans C: See—
F.ngeler, Paul; Sonderegger. Hans C; and Wolfer, Peter, 4.379,405,
CI. 73-167.000.
Sony Corporation: See —
Odaka, KenUrou, 4,380,071, CI. 371-40000.
Soong, Jakob C. K.. to Ene Technological Products, Inc Low temper-
ature firing (I800°-2100" F.) of banum titanate with flux (lead tita-
nate-bismuth titanate-zinc oxide and boron oxide) 4,379.854. CI.
501-138.000.
Sos2 ^^flnicl T * Sec
Sosa, Thomas J.; and Sosa, Daniel T , 4,379,972, CI. 290-44.000
Sosa, Thomas J.; and Sosa, Daniel T.. to Sosa, Daniel T. Turbine
ventilator 4,379,972, CI. 290-44.000.
Speed Clip Manufacturing Corp.: See —
Green, Bernard J.; and Chorosevic, Jerome J., 4,379,596, CI 301
5.00B.
Spcicc, Donald U, Revolving solar lounger 4.379,588. CI 297-217 000.
Spencer, David H.: Steiner, Marvin E., and Lang, Donald H , to Bur-
roughs Corporation. Defect tolerant memory 4,380,06t), CI
371-10.000.
Sperr, Charles J., Jr.. and Sperr, Douglas C. Evaporative cooler.
4,379.712. CI. 55-257.00R.
Sperr, Douglas C : See—
Sperr, Charles J., Jr.; and Sperr, Douglas C, 4,379,712, CI. 55-
257.0OR.
Sperry Corporation: See—
Rattlingourd. Glen D., 4,380,080, CI. 375-17.000
Spezial-Papiermaschinenfabrik August Alfred Krupp GmbH & Co..
See —
Qualitz, Marion; and Krupp, Viktor A., 4,379,721, CI 106-21 000
Spiegelman, Sol, to Columbia University in the City of New York, The
Trustees of Method for detecting cancer 4,379,839. CI 435-5.000
Sprecher & Schuh AG: See —
Blatter, Johann; and Schaad. Walter, 4,379,958, CI. 20O-148.00A.
Sprengel, Heide: See —
Herwig, Walter; Klupfel, Kurt; Sikora, Helga, and Sprengel, Heide,
4.379.834, CI. 430-329.000.
Staar S.A.: See —
d'Alayer de Costemore d'Arc, Stephane M. A., 4,380,031, CI.
360-74.100.
Staempfli, Jackie, to Valinor, S.A. Grapnel. 4.379.580, CI. 294-86.00R
Staeubli Ltd.: See-
Mueller, Otto, 4.379.474, CI. 139-21.000.
Standard Oil Co.. The: See—
Grasselli, Robert K.; Suresh, Dev D.; and Bridgeman, David R..
4,379,925, CI. 544-102.000.
Samuels. Kenneth E.; and Wiggins. Wayne T., 4,379,875, CI
524-104.000.
Shockley. Richard C, 4,379,998, CI. 333-150.000.
Standard Oil Company (Indiana): See-
Sharp, Shelby P., 4,379,490. CI. 166-304.000.
Stanford University: See-
Harris. Stephen E., 4,380,072. CI. 372-5.000.
Linvill. John G.. 4.379.697, CI. 434-1 14.000.
Stanley Electric Co. Ltd.: See—
Kubota, Yutaka, 4,380,026, CI. 358-106.000.
Sute of Israel, Rafael Armament Development Authority. Ministry of
Carmel. Yuval; and Eyion. Shmuel, 4,379,977, CI. 378-136.000.
Sutitrol. Inc.: See-
Smith. Peter R.; and Coleman, Charles. 4,379.971, CI. 250-342.000.
Staub, Herbert W.; Schanbacher, Larry M.; Zencheck, Jack D.; and
Young. Cynthia L.. to General Foods Corporation. Low-calorie
foods. 4.379.782, CI. 424-180.000.
Stein, Marc T. to Medtronic, Inc. Cardiac pacemaker sense amplifier.
4,379.459. CI. 128-419.0PG.
Steinberger. Hans: See—
Hauslein. Siegfried; Steinberger, Hans; Heigl, Willibald; Scheichl,
Georg; and Kauderer, Erwin, 4,379,352, CI. 5-471.000.
Steinberger, Wolfgang; and Stempfl, Gerhard, to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft. Device for monitoring the supply of printing fluid in ink
printing devices. 4,380,019, CI. 346-140.00R
Sleineggcr, Walther, to Playmont AG. Proximity switch 4,380,007, CI
340-365.00C.
Steiner, Alfred, to Steiner Silidur AG. Building blocks. 4,379,659, CI.
405-284.000.
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
Marvin E.; and Lang, Donald H.,
Automatic circuit
Claus: Stracke,
4.380,085. CI.
Steiner. Marvin E.: See —
Spencer, David H.; Sterner,
4,380.066. CI. 371-10000.
Steiner Silidur AG See—
Steiner. Alfred, 4,379,659, CI. 405-284 000.
Steiner, William G , to Lockheed Corporation.
identifier 4,380,070. CI 371-20.000.
Stemmler. Ingo; Muller. Hanns P.; and Wagner, Kuno, to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft Process for the preparation of polyisocyanates contain-
ing isocyanurate groups and their use in the production of polyure-
thanes. 4,379,905, CI. 528-73.000
Stempfl. Gerhard: See —
Steinberger, Wolfgang; and Stempfl. Gerhard, 4.380.019, CI. 346-
140 OOR.
Stephens, Eugene. Alarm watch with remote sonic amplifier. 4,379,639,
CI 368-12.000.
Sterling Drug Inc.; See —
Clarke, Robert L. G., 4,379,936, CI. 546-91.000.
Crounse. Nathan N.. 4,379,710, CI. 8-527.00C.
Stewart, Gary E : See —
Lomeli. Ronald C ; and Stewart, Gary E., 4,379,573, CI. 428-42.000.
Stinshoff, Klaus: See—
Gorka, Gunther, and Stinshoff, Klaus, 4,379,840, CI. 435-10.000.
Stoev, Stoycho M.; Dshendova, Shtelyana D.; Stoyanov, Kiril N.;
Dochev,' Raycho V.; and Krestev, Tzvefan P., to Vish-Min-
nogeoloshki Institute Method for regulating the granulometric char-
acteristic of the components in metallurgical slags. 4,379,714, CI.
65-19.000
Storrs. Charles M.: See —
Hendershot. Homer; and Storrs. Charles M., 4,379,665, CI.
408-204 000.
Stoy, Vladimir A. Po^ymer composition comprising polyacrylonitrile
polymer and multi-block copolymer. 4.379,874, CI. 524-27.000.
Stoyanov. Kiril N.: See —
Stoev. Stoycho M.; Dshendova, Shtelyana D., Stoyanov, Kiril N.;
Dochev, Raycho V.; and Krestev. Tzvetan P., 4,379,714, CI.
65-19000.
Stracke. Wilfried: See—
Schocning. Josef; Schwiers. Hans-Georg; Elter.
Wilfried; and Mauersberger. Reinhard.
376-381.000.
Strauss. Howard: See —
Joffe. Edward J., 4,379,514, CI. 221-279.000.
Strick. Leonard. External door for vehicles. 4,379,585, CI. 296-146.000
Strickland, George A.: See —
McLaughlin, Joseph E.; and Strickland, George A., 4,379,886, CI.
525-162.000.
Strong, Terence: See —
Taylor. Merrick W.; Allen. George R.; and Strong, Terence,
4.379,583, CI. 296-l.OOS.
Stuart, Richard L.; and Killmeyer, Fred C. to Rixon, Inc. Communica-
tion system providing simultaneous two-way transmission. 4,380,062,
CI. 370-20.000.
Suga, Shuji: See —
Kobayashi. Kiyoshi; and Suga, Shuji. 4.379,355, CI. 15-101.000.
Sugasawa, Fukashi: See —
lizuka, Haruhiko; and Sugasawa,
60-277 000.
Sugawara, Tsutomu: See —
Yamada, Hisashi; and Sugawara,
330-254.000.
Sugimito, Mamoru: See —
Fujii, Setsuro; Sugimito, Mamoru;
4,379,764, CI. 260-1 12.50R.
Sukrushev, Vitaly S.: See —
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin. Pavel G.;
Gurov, Evgeny I.; Isaikin, Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Vitaly S.; Tabakov, Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin, Boris A.; and Fotieva, Ljudmila I.. 4,379,592, CI.
i»-2.000.
Sullivan, Jack M.; See —
Radel, Robert J.; and Sullivan, Jack M., 4,379,939, CI. 560-193.000.
Sulzbach, Reinhard A., to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Raw polymer
powder of a modified tetrafluoroethylene polymer having a high bulk
density, and a good powder flow index and also a process for the
manufacture and use thereof. 4,379.900, CI. 526-247.000.
Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited: See —
Funaki, Yuji; Tanaka, Shizuya; and Matsuo, NoriUda. 4,379,921,
CI. 542-458.000.
Ueno, Katsuzi; Maruyama, Takashi; Suzuki, Haruo; and Saito,
Teruo, 4,379,892, CI. 525-439.000.
Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.: See—
Toda, Yuichi; Yano, Kohji; and Sakamoto, Katsuji, 4,379,615, CI.
350-96.230.
Sun-Ohio, Inc.: See —
Norman, Oscar L.; and Handler, Laurence H., 4,379,746, CI.
208-262.000.
Norman, Oscar L., 4,379.752. CI. 210-712.000.
Sun Studs, Inc.: See —
Berry, Larry R.. 4.379.476. CI. 144-357.000.
Shrum, Kenneth L., 4,379.477. CI. 144-357.000.
Sundqvist, Yngve, to SKF Industries, Inc. Bearing inner ring. 4,379,599,
CI. 308-187.000.
Suresh, Dev D.: See—
Grasselli. Robert K.; Suresh. Dev D.; and Bridgeman, David R.,
4.379.925, CI. 544-102.000.
Fukashi, 4,379,387, CI.
Tsutomu, 4,379,995, CI.
and Yaegashi, Takashi,
Suzuki, Haruo: See —
Ueno, Katsuzi; Maruyama, Takashi; Suzuki, Haruo; and Saito,
Teruo, 4,379,892, CI. 525-439.000.
Suzuki, Hiroo; Yamamoto, Koichi; Ohno, Yasuhide; and Miyamura,
Kou, to Nippon Steel Corporation. Prevention of cracking of contin-
uously cast steel slabs containing boron. 4.379,482, CI. 164-485.000.
Suzuki, Hirosuke. Foamed plastics. 4.379,858, CI. 521-54.000.
Suzuki, Masatoshi: See —
Sano, Hiromi; and Suzuki, Masatoshi, 4,379,741, CI. 204-424.000.
Suzuki, Tadashi: See —
Kishi, Norimasa; and Suzuki, Tadashi. 4.380,048. CI. 364-424.100.
Suzuki, Yoshiro, to Olympus Optical Company Limited. Transfer roller
for electrophotographic apparatus. 4,379,630, CI. 355-3.0TR.
Suzuki, Yutaka: See —
Ooishi, Minoru; Mochizuki, Teruji; and Suzuki, Yutaka. 4,379.997.
CI. 330-298.000.
Swain, James W.: See —
Wu, D. Louise; and Swain, James W., 4,379.464. CI. 131-275.000.
Sydorko, Peter J.: See —
Anderson, Larry C; Lausch. Robert C; and Sydorko, Peter J..
4,379,730, CI. 156-324.000.
Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc.: See-
Gallop, Paul M.; and Korb. Donald R.. 4.379,864, CI. 523-106.000.
Szukhent, Steve, Jr., to Tex-All Company, Inc. Ventilator apparatus for
a flexible sheet. 4,379,468, CI. 135-88.000.
Szybowicz, Wolfgang: See —
Buchmann, Heinz; Mayer, Bruno; and Szybowicz, Wolfgang,
4,379,652, CI. 404-117.000.
Tabakov, Vladimir P.: See —
Vakhnin, Gennady I., Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin. Pavel G.;
Gurov, Evgeny I.; Isaikin. Vladimir G.; Mishakov. Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Viuly S.; Tabakov. Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin, Boris A.; and Fotieva, Ljudmila I., 4,379,592, CI.
299-2.000.
Tabata, Yujin: See —
Yamada, Mikio; and Tabata, Yujin, 4,379,755, CI. 252-312.000.
Tachibana, Matsuo: See —
Takahashi, Sadayuki; Komeda. Yorio; Tachibana, Matsuo; and
Nosaka. Kenkichi, 4,379,673, CI. 414-686.000.
Tada, Tetsuya; and Morishita, Yutaka, to Canyon Corporation. Injec-
tion molding machine. 4.379,685, CI. 425-183.000.
Taiyo Denko Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kashiwagi. Hidehiro, 4,379,724. CI. 134-1.000.
Takabe, Reiichiro: See —
Chiyoda, Hironobu; Yamazaki, Hisayuki; and Takabe, Reiichiro.
4,379,762, CI. 252-507.000.
Takada, Toshiaki: See —
Hagiwara, Yutaka; Takada, Toshiaki; and Yamazaki, Tetu,
4,379.501, CI. 188-218.0XL.
Takada, Yukimitsu; Harada, Hiroshi; and Takubo, Shuji, to Yamaha
Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha. Intake duct for an outboard engine.
4,379,702, CI. 440-77.000.
Takahashi, Hiroshi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Memory addressing
system for sequentially accessing all memory addresses in a memory
area. 4,380,053, CI. 364-900.000.
Takahashi, Nobuyuki: See—
Nakatsukasa, Masashi; and Takahashi. Nobuyuki. 4.379,743, CI.
204-298.000.
Takahashi. Sadayuki; Komeda. Yorio; Tachibana, Matsuo; and Nosaka,
Kenkichi, to Kubota Ltd. Arrangement for attaching working imple-
ments to vehicle. 4,379,673, CI. 414-686.000.
Takahashi, Seitaro: See —
Ohmi, Hidehiko; Kiugawa, Katsuhisa; Morimoto, Shoji; Kubo,
Tateo; Ohno, Misao; and Takahashi. Seitaro, 4,379,512. CI.
215-327.000.
Takamatsu, Mashiro; Nakao, Makoto; and Ogawa, Isao, to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha; and Jeco Co., Ltd. Apparatus for
illuminating instrument pointers. 4.380.043. CI. 362-26.000.
Takamura. Takuo: See —
Yoshimoto. Hisanari; Tonomura. Taka; and Takamura, Takuo.
4.379.667, CI. 409-234.000.
Takanashi, Yukio; Yakabe, Tooru; and Asano. Shunji, to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Quick operating cathode.
4.379,980, CI. 313-446.000.
Takasugi, Hisashi: See —
Ueda, Ikuo; Takaya, Takao; Kobayashi. Masakazu; Masugi, Taka-
shi; Takasugi, Hisashi; Kochi, Hiromu; and Kitaguchi, Tadashi,
4,379,922, CI. 544-16.000.
Takatori Machinery Works Ltd.: See —
Nishikawa, Masao, 4.379,384, CI. 53-415.000.
Takaya, Takao: See —
Ueda, Ikuo; Takaya, Takao; Kobayashi. Masakazu; Masugi, Taka-
shi; Takasugi. Hisashi; Kochi. Hiromu; and Kitaguchi, Tadashi.
4.379,922, CI. 544-16.000.
Takechi, Sadatoshi: See —
Kuwagaki, Hiroshi; Yano, Kohzo; and Takechi, Sadatoshi,
4,379.619. CI. 350-357.000.
Takeda Chemical Industries. Ltd.: See —
Numata. Mitsuo; Minuunida, Isao; Yamaoka, Masayoshi; Shiraishi,
Mitsura; and Miyawaki. Toshio. 4,379,924. CI. 544-27.000.
Takehata, Tetsuro: See —
Asari. Akira; Noyori. Tatsuhiko; and Takehata, Tetsuro, 4,379,398,
CI. 72-273.500.
Takematsu, Yoshiyuki, to Fuji Koeki Corporation. Electric flash de-
vice. 4,379,983, CI. 3I5-I5I.OOO.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Takubo, Shuji: See—
Takada, Yukimitsu; Harada, Hiroshi; and Takubo, Shuji, 4,379,702,
CI. 440-77.000.
Tall, Marion A. Magnifier viewer and stand. 4,379,618, CI. 350-239.000.
Tamai, Kiminori; and Hayama, Masashi, to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd.
Magnetic recording medium. 4,379,803, CI. 428-328.000.
I'&n&bc yVkirfl' Sec
Uciiiumi, Yoshihisa; and Tanabe, Akira, 4,379,625, CI. 350-528.000.
Tanabe, Yoshimitu: See —
Asano, Makoto; Tanabe, Yoshimitu; and Murakami, Hisamichi,
4,379,897, CI. 525-506.000.
Tanaka, Shinken; and Yuda, Takuo, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.; and
Nifco Inc. Fixing structure for radiator grille. 4,379,648, CI
403-24.000.
Tanaka, Shizuya: See—
Funaki, Yuji; Tanaka, Shizuya; and Matsuo, NoriUda, 4.379,921,
CI. 542-458.000.
Tanaka, Tsuneo, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. X-ray
film cassette. 4,380,087, CI. 378-186.000.
Tanifuji, Shinya: See —
Konishi, Seizl; Tashiro, Kazuyuki; Kamigane, Yoshihiro; Sakurai,
Takakazu; Tanifuji. Shinya; and Morooka, Yasuo, 4,379,395, CI.
72-8.000.
Tanner, Jesse H. Aircraft location and collision avoidance system.
4,380,050, CI. 364-461.000.
Tarmac Industrial Holdings Limited: See-
Cross. Sydney H., 4.379,729, CI. 156-73.600.
Tashiro, Kazuyuki: See—
Konishi. Seizi; Tashiro. Kazuyuki; Kamigane, Yoshihiro; Sakurai,
Takakazu; Tanifuji, Shinya; and Morooka, Yasuo, 4.379,395, CI.
72-8.000.
Tassoney, Joseph P.. to Occidental Oil Shale. Inc. Two-stage oil shale
retorting process and disposal of spent oil shale. 4.379.591. CI.
299-2.000.
Tate, Dennis J.; and Trevino, Henry, to Ethyl Development Corpora-
tion. Oriented injection blow molded container production.
4,379,688, CI. 425-526.000.
Tatemoto. Masayoshi: See—
Amimoto. Yoshio; and Tatemoto. Masayoshi, 4,379,901, CI.
526-247.000.
Taylor, Edwin C. Sr., to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Three cell divider for
carton. 4,379,518, CI. 229-15.000.
Taylor, Merrick W.; Allen, George R.; and Strong, Terence, to Motor
Panels (Coventry) Limited. Vehicle cabs having airflow deflectors on
their roofs. 4,379,583, CI. 296-l.OOS.
TDK Electronics Co., Ltd : See-
Ota, Hiroshi; Horigome, Eiji; and Azegami. Hitoshi, 4,380,035, CI.
360-130.330.
Sato, Nobuhiro, 4,379,800, CI. 428-148.000.
Shiba, Haruo, 4,380,030, CI. 360-132.000.
Tamai. Kiminori; and Hayama. Masashi, 4,379,803, CI. 428-328.000.
TELDIX GmbH: See—
Riethmuller, Heinz; Sindlinger, Rainer; and Schultz, Peter,
4,379,365, CI. 33-316.000.
Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson: See—
Andersson, Karl A. I.; and Rous, Sture G., 4,380,083, CI.
375-120.000.
Teleprompter Corporation: See —
Warner, Paul, 4,379,947, CI. 179-l.OGD.
Tennessee Valley Authority; See—
Radel, Robert J.; and Sullivan, Jack M., 4,379,939, CI. 560-193.000.
Terhorst, Gunter: See—
Rosenberg, Harry; Plester, Karl-Heinz; Eggenstein, Friedrich; and
Terhorst, Gunter, 4,379.424, CI. 92-13.410.
Tessler, Martin M.; Wurzburg, Otto B.; and Dirscheri, Teresa A., to
National Storch and Chemical Corporation. Starch sulfomaleate
half-esters, a method for their preparation and their use to prepare
starch disulfosuccinate half-esters. 4.379,919. CI. 536-108.000.
Tex- All Company, Inc.: See—
Szukhent, Steve, Jr., 4,379,468, CI. 135-88.000.
Texaco Inc.: See—
Rundell, Herbert A.; and Horton, Eugene B., Jr., 4,379,556, CI.
277-12.000.
Textron, Inc.: See—
Carlock, Gaylord W.; Gamer, Jimmy G.; Gatlin, Charles M.;
Guinn, Kenneth F.; and Reyes, Peter A., 4,379,678, CI.
416-98.000.
Thatcher Engineering Corporation: See—
Schmednecht, Fred C, 4,379,658. CI. 405-267.000.
Thedford, Dale E.; and Wilson. Gil C, to AG Industries International,
Ltd. Livestock spray apparatus. 4,379,440, CI. 119-159.000.
Theiler, Richard F., to Armour and Company. Process for prepanng
cooked bacon having reduced levels of N-nitrosamines. 4,379,794, CI.
426-266.000. o .. r
Theodoropulos, Spyros, to Union Carbide Corporation. Synthesis of
amides. 4.379.928, CI. 544-176.000.
Thibodeaux, Gene. Method and apparatus for preventing wireline
kinking in a directional drilling system. 4,379,493, CI. 175-61.000.
Thirouard, Michel: See— _,..-.,
Lehureau, Jean-Claude; Magna, Henriette; and Thirouard, Michel,
4,380,016, CI. 346-135.100.
Thomas, Richard E.; and Greene, Richard F., to United States of
America, Navy. Controlled porosity sheet for thermionic dispenser
cathode and method of manufacture. 4,379,979, CI. 313-346.00R.
Thompson, James L.; and Homkohl, Owen T., to Moehlenpah Indus-
tries, Inc. Truss-fabricating machine. 4,379,426, CI. 100-100.000.
Thomson-CSF: See—
de Couasnon, Tristan, 4,380,068, CI. 371-24.000.
Lehureau, Jean-Claude; Magna, Henriette; and Thirouard, Michel,
4,380,016, CI. 346-135.100.
Llabres, Raymond, 4,379,507. CI. 206444,000.
Pepin. Christian; and Trahand. Jean P., 4,380,028, CI 358-219.000
Thonnessen, Dieter: See—
Bianchi. Valerio; Abidin, Anwar; and Thonnessen. Dieter,
4,379,770, CI. 261-142.000.
Thordarson, Petur. Liquid level sensor and alarm system. 4,379,434, CI.
116-228.000.
Thyssen Industrie AG: See —
Block, Siegmar, 4,379,662, CI. 405-302.000.
Buchmann, Heinz; Mayer, Bruno; and Szybowicz. Wolfgang,
4,379,652,0.404-117.000.
Tigg Corporation: See —
Tiggelbeck, Donald D., 4,379,750, CI. 210-232.000.
Tiggelbeck, Donald D., to Tigg Corporation. Fluid-solids contact
device and improved fluid distributor. 4,379,750, CI. 210-232.000.
Tilly, Michele M.: See—
Fruitstone. Mitchell J.; Tilly. Michele M.; and Pixton. Betty G..
4,379.847, CI. 436-8.000.
Timex Corporation: See —
Capolupo, David F.; and Donnelly. James J., 4,379,644, CI.
368-314.000.
Halicho, James J., 4,379,643, CI. 368-309.000.
Titcomb, Steven E., to Creative Motion Industries. Inc. Operator
powered vehicle. 4,379,566, CI. 280-251.000.
Tjunkin, Boris A.: See —
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty. Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.;
Gurov, Evgeny I.; Isaikin, Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Sukrushev. Vitaly S.; Tabakov, Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin, Boris A.; and Fotieva. Ljudmila I.. 4.379,592, CI.
299-2.000.
Toda, Yuichi; Yano, Kohji; and Sakamoto, Katsuji, to Sumitomo Elec-
tric Industries, Ltd. Device for transmitting energy through electric
wire or optical cable wound on drum. 4,379,615, CI. 350-96.230.
Tokyo Kogaku Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Uchiumi, Yoshihisa; and Tanabe. Akira, 4.379,625, CI. 350-528.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kitajima, Toshio. 4.379.975. CI. 310-59.000
Kumamaru. Kuniaki; Hiraki. Shunichi; and Yone»wa, Toshio.
4.379.726. CI. 148-175.000.
Ooishi, Minoni; Mochizuki, Teruji; and Suzuki. Yutaka. 4.379.997,
CI. 330-298.000.
Takanashi. Yukio; Yakabe. Tooru; and Asano, Shunji, 4,379,980,
CI. 313-446.000.
Tanaka, Tsuneo, 4,380,087. CI. 378-186.000.
Yamada. Hisashi; and Sugawara, Tsutomu.
330-254.000.
Tomlinson. Walter J.. Jr.: See-
Down, Peter E.; and Tomlinson, Walter J., Jr.,
521-26.000.
Tomsu. Peter, to Alex Friedmann Kommanditgesellschaft. Tempera-
ture regulating system for air conditioning or heating plants, prefera-
bly in railway vehicles. 4.379.520, CI. 236-49.000.
Tonomura, Taka: See—
Yoshimoto. Hisanari; Tonomura, Taka; and Takamura, Takuo,
4,379,667, CI. 409-234.000.
Torii & Co. Ltd.: See—
Fujii, Setsuro; Sugimito, Mamoru; and Yaegashi, Takashi,
4.379.764. CI. 260-11 2. 50R.
Torres. Rafael; and Woodward. Oakley M., to RCA Corporation. Loop
antenna arrangement for inclusion in a television receiver. 4,380,01 1,
CI. 343-702.000.
Torrington, Leslie A.: See-
Chambers, Robert W.; McNeely, Michael L.; and Tomngton,
Leslie A., 4,379,686, CI. 425-290.000.
Towsend, Marvin S. Automatic dispenser for rinse water additive.
4,379,515, CI. 222-52.000.
Toyo Seikan Kaisha. Ltd.: See—
Ohmi, Hidehiko; Kitagawa, Katsuhisa; Morimoto, Shoji; Kubo,
Tateo; Ohno, Misao; and Takahashi. Seiuro, 4.379.512. CI.
215-327.000.
Toyoda, Minoni, to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Key holder.
4,379,394, CI. 7O-456.00R.
Toyou Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Sengoku, Ikuo, 4,379,379, CI. 52-208.000.
Takamatsu, Mashiro; Nakao, Makoto; and Ogawa. Isao, 4,380,043.
CI. 362-26.000.
Trade Printers, Inc.: See— _, __ ^, ^^^
Lomeli, Ronald C; and Stewart, Gary E., 4.379,573. CI. 428-42.000.
Trahand, Jean P.: See —
Pepin, Christian; and Trahand, Jean P., 4,380,028, CI. 358-219.000.
Trane Company, The: See —
Lom, Duane L.; and Klouda. John F., 4,379,484. CI. 165-16.000.
Transport, Felix. Display device having a collapsible eaiel. 4,379,373,
CI. 40-152.100.
"^^ Tate, Dmlos J.; Mid Trevino, Henry. 4,379.688, Q. 425-526.000.
Tritt, Paul G.: See— ..... „ ,
Mahan, Richard S.; Tritt, Paul G.; and Ward, James H.. Jr.,
4,379,579, CI. 294-83.00R.
Triumph-Adler AG.: See— ^, .^^ ^ » ^ „ j
Gubbe, Bemd; Krause, Klaus-Dieter; Neidhardt. Rudolf; and
Schonemann, Otto, 4,379.429, CI. 108-5.000.
4,379.995. O.
4.379.855. CI.
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
CI
I llni
Tnumph-Adler AG. fur Buro-und Informationsiechnik: See
Schcmpflug, Gunter, 4.379.645, CI. 400-623.000.
Troup. Edward M.: See—
Pitchford. Edward J.; and Troup. Edward M.. 4.379 976
310-83.000.
Troy, Edward J.: See—
Clikeman, Richard R.; Jones, Donald H.; Shortridge. Thomas J
and Troy, Edward J , 4,379,876, CI. 524-109000
Trutzschlar GmbH 4^ Co. KG: See—
Beneke. Wolfgang; and Jager, Walter. 4,379,357, CI. 19-105.000
TRW Inc : See—
Yuan, Lloyd T.; Chang, Yu-Wen; and Mills. Thomas G.. 4,380.020
CI. 357-3.000.
Trybulski. Eugene J.: See-
Field. George F.; Fryer, Rodney I.; Trybulski, Eugene J. and
Walser, Armin, 4,379,765, CI. 260-245.600.
Tschentscher, Alfred, to FMN Schuster GmbH & Co. KG. Thread
reeling apparatus. 4,379,528, CI. 242-43.00R.
Tsien, Hsue C; Newby, Kenneth R., Grimes, Patrick G.; and Bellows,
Richard J , to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Sheet electrode
for electrochemical systems. 4.379,814, CI. 429-42.000.
Tsuchifuji, Takakazu: See—
Katagiri. Takeshi; and Tsuchifuji, Takakazu, 4,379,684, CI
425-78.000.
Tsuji, Nobuo: See —
Matsufuji, Akihiro; Ishiguro, Tadashi; and Tsuji. Nobuo. 4,379,809
CI. 428-470.000.
Turner, W Bard; and Shek, Thompson, to C & K Components, Inc
Universal logic switch. 4,379,973, CI. 307-112.000.
Ube Industnes. Ltd.: See—
Ashitaka, Hidetomo; Oizumi, Kyohei; Jinda. Kazuya; and Inaishi,
Kazutoshi, 4,379,889, CI. 525-247.000.
Uchiumi. Yoshihisa; and Tanabe, Akira. to Tokyo Kogaku Kikai Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Operation microscope. 4,379.625, CI. 350-528.000.
Ueda, Ikuo; Takaya, Takao; Kobayashi, Masakazu; Masugi, Takashi;
Takasugi, Hisashi; Kochi, Hiromu; and Kitaguchi. Tadashi. to
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co.. Ltd. Cepham compounds. 4.379.922
CI. 544-16.000.
Ueno. Katsuzi; Maruyama. Takashi; Suzuki, Haruo; and Saito, Teruo, to
Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited. Method for prevention of
loss of transparency of polyarylene ester blends. 4.379,892, CI.
Uetrecht. Dale M.: See-
Munch, Walter; and Uetrecht, Dale M., 4,379,422, CI. 84-1.190.
Union Carbide Corporation: See—
Baskent, Feyyaz O.; and Sandner, Michael R., 4,379,757, CI
252-426.000.
Bubnick, Gerald F., 4,379.815, CI. 429-66.000
Goeke, George L.; Wagner, Burkhard E.; and Karol, Frederick J .
4.379,759, CI. 252-429.00B.
Kozawa, Akiya. 4,379.817, CI. 429-224.000.
Sara. Raymond V.. 4,379,812, CI. 428-577.000.
Theodoropulos, Spyros. 4,379,928, CI. 544-176.000.
Wagner. Burkhard E.; Goeke, George L.; Karol. Frederick J.; and
George, Kathleen F., 4,379,758. CI. 252-429.00B.
Unique Products Company. Inc.: See-
Sherwood. Tom W.. 4.379,519, CI. 229-55.000.
United States of America
Air Force: See—
Fritts, David H.; and Leonard, John F., 4,379,410, CI. 73-809.000.
Army: See —
San Miguel, Anthony, 4,379.401, CI. 73-12.000.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration; administrator;
with respect to an invention of:
Fung, Lai-Wo. Massively parallel processor computer. 4,380 046
CI. 364-200.000. • . ■
National Aeronautics and Space Administration: See—
Fripp, Archibald L.; Robertson, James B.; and Breckenridue
Roger A.. 4.379,970. CI. 250-338.000. '
Navy: See —
Bauman, Ronald M., 4,379,994, CI. 330-149.000.
Miller, Ralph A.; and White, Randall F., 4,379,534, CI 244-
137.00R.
Miller, Samuel A.; and Jeffris, Larry L., 4,379,624 CI
35O-486.000.
Reed, Russell, Jr.; and Chan, May L., 4,379,903, CI. 528-55.000.
Thomas, Richard E.; and Greene, Richard F., 4,379 979 CI
313-346.00R.
Yoder. Max N., 4,380,022. CI. 357-22.000.
U.S. Philips Corporation: See—
Kaizer, Adrianus J. M.; and Kopinga, Wiert, 4,379.952. CI 179-
I15.5PC.
Mateika, Dieter; and Laurien, Rolf, 4,379,853. CI 501-135.000.
Ney, Hermann; and Kuhn, Michael H., 4,379.948. CI. 179-l.OSC.
U.S. Product Development Company: See—
Adell. Robert, 4,379,376, CI. 49-462.000.
- Adell. Robert, 4,379,377, 01. 49-462.000.
United Sutes Surgical Corporation: See—
Gravencr, Roy D.; De Carlo, Alfred F.; and Noiles, Douijlas G ,
4.379.457, CI. 128-334.00R. K vj ,
lited Technologies Corporation: See-
Guile, Roy N.. 4,379,679. CI. 417-54.000.
Wayne, Robert J.. 4,380,073, CI. 372-12.000.
Universal Automatic Corporation: See—
Klancnik. Adolph V.; and Klancnik. Kenneth A.. 4,379,415. CI
82-36.00A.
Universite de Sherbrooke: See—
Boulos, Maher I., 4,379,777, CI. 423-348.000.
University of Waterloo: See —
Young, Murray M., 4,379,844, CI. 435-251.000.
UOP Inc.: See-
House, David W., 4,379,941. CI. 562-401.000.
Upchurch, James E.. to Woods Wire Products, Inc. Electrical connec-
tor with polarity barrier. 4.379.610, CI. 339-184.00R.
Upjohn Company. The; See —
Ehrlich, Benjamin S.; and Oertel, Richard W., Ill, 4,379.904, CI
528-65.000.
Utex Industries, Inc.: See —
Pippert, Fred B., 4,379,558, CI. 277-188.00A.
Vagi, Robert J., to Picker Corporation. Radiation imaging system with
cyclically shiftable grid assembly. 4,380,086, CI. 378-155.000.
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin. Pavel G.; Gurov,
Evgeny I.; Isaikin. Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.; Obrezkov,
Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Viuly S.; Tabakov. Vladimir P.; Tjunkin,
Boris A.; and Fotieva. Ljudmila I. Method of mining an oil-bearing
bed with bottom water. 4.379.592, CI. 299-2.000.
Valinco, Inc.: See —
Reaves, V Randon, 4,379,543, CI. 251-59.000.
Valinor, S.A.: See—
Suempfli, Jackie, 4,379,580, CI. 294-86.00R.
Vanberg, Harold E.; See-
Alexander, Lee J.; Vanberg, Harold E.; and King, Clyde E..
4,3?9,372, CI. 40-IO.OOC.
Van Dyke Tiers, George: See—
Lowrey, Robert D.; Nelson. Howard D.; and Van Dyke Tiers.
George, 4,379,835, CI. 430-338.000.
Vapor Corporation: See —
Barry. William L.. 4.379.680. CI. 417-46.000.
Varian Associates, Inc.: See—
Borden, Peter G.; Bell. Ronald I .; and Hyder, Syed b., 4,379 944
CI. 136-259.000. j 7 . . .
Vamer, Jerry R.: See—
Mir, Jose M.; Vamcr, Jerry R.; and Kurtz, Clark N , 4.380,023, CI
358-75.000.
Venaleck, John T.: See-
Webster. John L.; and Venaleck, John T., 4,379,361, CI. 29-857.000.
Verhoef, Edmund M., executor: See-
Young, Hartley F.; Verhoef, Hendrikus M., deceased; and kemes.
Wally A., 4,379,521, CI. 238-349.000.
Verhoef, Hendrikus M., deceased: See-
Young, Hartley F.; Verhoef, Hendrikus M., deceased; and Remes,
Wally A., 4,379,521, CI. 238-349.000.
Verty, Vladimir G.: See—
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty. Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.;
Gurov. Evgeny I.; Isaikin. Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Vitaly S.; Tabakov, Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin, Boris A.; and Fotieva, Ljudmila I., 4,379,592, CI.
299-2.000.
Vetovitz, William H. Method of constructing angled brick panels
4,379.380, CI. 52-259.000.
Villazon Meneses, Maria J.: See—
Calzada Badia, Jose-Maria; Boleda Vila, Antonio; Sabater Sanmar-
tin, Jose; and Villazon Meneses, Maria J., 4,379,793, CI.
424-274.000.
Vish-Minnogeoloshki Institute: See —
Stoev, Stoycho M.; Dshendova, Shtelyana D.; Stoyanov, Kiril N.;
Dochev, Raycho V.; and Krestev, TzveUn P., 4.379,714, CI.
65-19.000.
Voest-AIpine Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Zitz, Alfred; Schetina. Otto; Wrulich, Herwig; and Kissich, Amulf.
4,379,594, CI. 299-10.000.
Volkswagenwerk AG: See—
Leineweber, Gunther; and Wamecke, Rolf, 4,379,423, CI.
91-373.000.
Volland, Robert: See—
Samantter, Reinhard; Schoberth, Winfried; and Volland, Robert,
4,379,856, CI. 521-51.000.
von Rintelen, Harald: See —
Lapp, Otto; von Rintelen, Harald; Moll, Franz; and Endres. Lo-
thar, 4,379,837, CI. 43(M34.000.
Vorbruggen, Helmut; and Schwarz, Norbert, to Schering Aktiengesell-
schaft. Process for the preparation of imidazoleacetic acid deriva-
tives. 4,379,927, CI. 544-139.000.
Voronin, Pavel G.: See—
Vakhnin, Gennady I.; Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.;
Gurov, Evgeny I.; Isaikin, Vladimir G.; Mishakov, Vladimir N.;
Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Sukrushev, Vitaly S.; Tabakov, Vladimir
P.; Tjunkin, Boris A.; and Fotieva. Ljudmila I., 4,379,592, CI.
299-2.000.
Voycheshin, Sidney J.: See—
Rodgers. Stuart N.; and Voycheshin, Sidney J., 4,379,683, CI.
425-62.000.
Vysoke udcni technicke: See—
Brandstetr, Jiri; Huleja. Josef; and Kupec, Josef, 4,379,775, CI.
422-51.000.
W. H. Brady Co.: See-
Downing, Gerald T.; and Savagian, Michael D., 4,379,805, CI.
428-346.000.
W. R. Grace A Co.: See-
Lin, Shiow C, 4,379,728. Q. 156-307.300.
Siadat, Bahram; and Raksis, Joseph W., 4,379,869, CI. 323-206.000.
April 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
Wagner, Burkhard E.; Goeke, George L.; Karol, Fredenck J.; and
Georse, Kathleen F., to Union Carbide Corporation. CaUiyst com-
position for polymerizing ethylene. 4,379.758. CI. 252-429.00B.
Wagner. Burkhard E.: See— , ^ ^ , ,
Goeke George L.; Wagner. Burkhard E.; and Karol, Fredenck J ,
4,379.759. CI. 252-429.008.
Wagner, Kuno. to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the prepara-
tion of polyurethane resins using low molecular weight polyhydroxyl
compounds prepared by the condensation of formaldehyde.
4,379,862, CI. 521-158.000.
Wagner, Kuno: See— „ >,,„,wm
Stemmler, Ingo; Muller, Hanns P.; and Wagner, Kuno. 4.379.905.
CI. 528-73.000.
Waitkus, Calvin J., to Diamond Shamrock Corporation. Compositions
useful as internal antisUtic additives for polymeric structures
4,379,913, CI. 528-300.000.
WakahaU, Tamotsu: Sec— ..,.,„^,, r>i
Funakoshi, Yasutomo; and Wakahata. Tamotsu, 4.379.617. CI.
Wakai, Katsuro, to Hitachi, Ltd. SUge tracer. 4.380.058. CI.
365-244.000. ^ ^ . », . , .
Walling. Jong-Hein; Arbuthnot, Gerald R.; and Gervais. Michel, to
Northern Telecom Limited. Drying oven for indefinite length mate-
rial. 4,379,435, CI. 118-643.000. .1,0 Mn ri
Wallshein, Melvin. Orthodontic biassing device. 4,379,693, CI.
433-7.000.
Walser, Armin; See— _.«...,- ■ a
Field George F.; Fryer, Rodney I.; TrybulSki, Eugene J . and
Walser, Armin, 4,379,765, CI. 260-245.600.
Walser Glenn E., to Automated Food Systems, Inc. Method for coat-
ing a food product on a stick. 4.379.795. CI. 426-304.000.
Walsh Peter J. Integrated circuit laser and electro-optical amplifier.
4,380,074, CI. 372-43.000.
Walter, Erwin: See— , ,., , t, ■ >.nQ«ni i-i
Werle, Peter; Graf, Hans; and Walter, Erwin, 4.379.871. CI
523-331.000. r-. ,
Walther. William D.. to Dayton-Walther Corporation. Edge lugged tire
carrying rims, wheels and fastening assemblies. 4.379.597. CI. 301-
12.00R.
Waltz, Joseph M.: See— j ,,, ,. , u w
Borkan, William N.; Savino, Frank M.; and Waltz, Joseph M..
4,379,462, CI. 128-786.000.
Wang, Shing C; and Hamerdinger, Randolph W., <o Xerox Corpora-
tion. Segmented hollow cathode laser with split anode. 4,380,078, CI.
372-62.000.
Venaleck, John T., to Chabin Corporation
molded electrical connector 4,379,361, Ci
Method for in
4.379,717, CI
Jr.,
Ward, James H, Jr.: See— ,,.,,, u
Mahan, Richard S.; Tritt, Paul G.; and Ward, James H.
4,379,579, CI. 294-83.00R.
'^"fiewe£:^S7nther; and Wan,ecke, Rolf, 4,379,423, CI
91-373.000.
Warner Lambert Technologies, Inc.: See—
Rybicki, Edward B, 4.379.623. CI. 350-414.000.
Warner Paul, to Teleprompter Corporation. System for transmitting
data simultoneously with audio. 4,379,947, CI. 179-l.OGD.
Watanabe, Isao: See— _, ,,, .„„„^
Ito, Osamu; and Watanabe, Isao, 4,380,015, CI. 346-108.000.
Watanabe, Shoji; Miho, Takuya; and F"J"' If/"51'' !°P,^f'S*"='"'"'
Industries, Ltd. Uctone polymer. 4,379,915, CI. 528-357.000.
Waunabe, Tadahiko; and Kono, Shinichi, to Director-General of the
Agency of Industrial Science and Technology. Bonde-based refrac-
tory materials. 4,379,852, CI. 501-87.000.
Watari, Masafumi: See— , . „ « v . l a v.™,
Ikedo, Masaru; Watori, Masafumi; Yasuno, YoshiUke; and Yama-
shiU, Tadaoki, 4,379,621, CI. 350-392.000.
Watson, James M.: See— . «, u. r».„„^ p
Kendall, Debra L.; Watson, James M.; and Wnght, Danny P.,
4.379.736. CI. 203-9.000. , .
Wayne. Robert J., to United Technologies Corporation. Injection
control of an electro-optically Q-switched cavity-dumped laser.
4,380,073, CI. 372-12.000.
Weare, Glenis: See — ki,j.i. u
Brown, David; Giles, Anthony F.; Cramer, Howard W.; Noble, R
Mary Nisbet, Louis J.; Bushell, Michael E.; Weare, Glenis; and
Caldwell. Ian Y.. 4.379,920. CI. 542-427.00). ^^ ^ _
Weaver, James C; and Seymour, Robert W., to Eastman Kodak Com-
pany. Stampable reinforced thermoplastic polyester sheets. 4,379,801,
CI. 428-220.000. „, ^ ., . . -,^„
Weaver, James C; and Seymour, Robert W.. to Eastman Kodak Com-
Danv Stampable reinforced thermoplastic polyester sheet with im-
• braved surface finish. 4,379.802. CI. 428-220 000.
Webb, Ronald W.; and Morgan, Robert L.. to RoUtor, Ltd. Exercising
device. 4.379.552. CI. 272-67.000. ^ „ _ , _ ... ^.„
Weber. Heinrich; Lorenz, Kurt; and Dungs, Horst, to Carl Still GmbH
ft Co. KG, Finna. Method of drying and P^heating inoist fine
material and apparatus for carrying out the method. 4,379,09^, ci
Weber Howard, to Motorola, Inc. Start-to-run circuit for an electronic
ignition system. 4,379.444. CI. 123-609.0)0.
Wrter. Robert J., to Rockwell International Corporation Enhance-
ment of class C operation of bipolar junction transistor. 4,J7V,yvt), »_i.
33O-2%.000.
Webster, John L.; and
Method for making
29-857.000.
Weichman, Bernard E., to Multi Mineral Corporation
situ shale oil recovery. 4,379,593, CI. 299-2.000
Weigel, Russell C, Jr.: See-
Levitt. George; and Weigel. Russell C. Jr.
71-92.000.
Weiner, Paul: See—
Neill, Daniel L.; and Weiner, Paul, 4,380,002. CI 338-153 000
Weir, Colin B., to GTE Products Corporation Battery-powered trans-
mitter including current control circuit 4,380,089, CI 455-127 000
Weitz, Hans-Martin; and Fischer, Rolf, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft
Reactivation of supported catalysts which conuin palladium, copper
and tellurium. 4,379.756, Ci. 252-41 l.OOR.
Welker, John J. Roller skate. 4,379,564, CI. 280-11.200.
Welles, Theodore W Article supporting device 4,379,538. CI
248-95.000. . ^ ,. ^
Werle, Peter; Graf, Hans, and Walter. Erwin. to Deutsche Gold- und
Silber-Scheideansult Vormals Roessler. Process for the production
of carbon black conuining pigment-synthetic resin concentrates
4.379.871. CI. 523-331.000.
Werner. Albert J: See—
Danielson. Paul S.; Mattison. Ronald P.; and Weriier, Albert J ,
4,379,851, CI. 501-66.000.
Western Electric Company, Inc.: See—
Hardesty, Edwin C, 4,379,609, CI. 339-91.00R.
Snyder, Donald Q., 4,379,771, CI. 264-1 500.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See—
Calvino, Ben J., 4,379.957. CI. 200-145 000.
Rusch, Larry P., 4,379,981, CI. 313-489 000
ZwiUich, Alexander, 4.379,945, CI 174-99.008.
Wetzel, Bemd: See—
Maier, Roland; Wetzel, Bemd; Woitun, Eberhard; Reuter, Wolf-
gang; Lechner, Uwe; and Goeth, Hanns, 4.379,784, CI
424-229.000.
Wetzel, William H.: See-
Amundsen, Joseph; Goodwin, Robert J.; and Wetzel, William H..
4,379,810, CI 428-541.000.
Weyer Rudi Hitzel, Volker; Geisen, Karl, and Regitz, Gunter, to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Heterocyclic substituted sulfonyl ureas,
and their use. 4,379,785. CI. 424-244.000.
Wheeler, William J.: See—
Lunn, William H. W ; and Wheeler, William J.
424-246.000.
Whey Systems, Inc.: See-
Keller, A. Kent, 4,379,368, CI. 34-57.0OR.
Whipple Patent Management Corporation: See—
Perrault, Frederick; and Perrault, Raymond
248-74.00R.
White Consolidated Industries, Inc.: See-
Brown, Robert L., 4,379,653, CI. 404-1 18.000.
White, Randall F : See-
Miller, Ralph A.; and White, Randall F.
137.00R.
White, William A.: See-
Conrad, Robert A.; and White, William
544-234 000
Whiting, Lauren C, to Whiting Roll-Up Door Mfg. Corp Roller
assembly. 4,379,479, CI. 160-201 000
Whiting Roll-Up Door Mfg. Corp.: See—
Whiting, Uuren C, 4,379,479, CI. 160-201.0)0.
Whitney, Darnel E., to Charles Surk Draper Uboratory, I nc The.
Damped remote center compliance device 4,379,363, CI. 33-16V.«a.
Whittoker Corporation: See— ...,., . „« „< /-,
Eisenberg, Steven K.; and Hancock, Mark W.. 4.379.375. CI
Wibrow, Guter. to ITW-ATECO GmbH. Cord adjusters. 4.379.358. CI
24-136.00R. ^ ^ , o .
Widiner, Karl J.; and Goldsmith. Riley G., to Conoco Inc. Riser ten-
sioner. 4.379.657, CI. 405-195.000.
Wiedman, Francis W., Ill: See—
Kotecha, Harish N.; Noble, Wendell P., Jr.; and Wiedman, Francis
W., Ill, 4,380,057, CI. 365-185.000
Wiggins, John W.; and Moore, Damon E Solar hot air system.
4,379,449, CI. 126-449.000.
Wiggins, Wayne T: See— . ,,« o,. /-i
Samuels, Kenneth E; and Wiggins, Wayne T.. 4.379,875, CI
524-104.000. . ^ ^ , w 11
Wilhelm, Wilhelm, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Device for push-pull
transmission. 4,380,060, CI. 370-5.000. ^ ^ ,^ ^ ,„ ,., ^,
Willey, Barry A. Motorcycle safety windshields. 4,37y.5»4, ci
296-78.100.
Williams, Haydn W. R.: See—
Cragoe Edward J.. Jr.; Rooney, Clarence S.; and Williams, Haydn
W. R., 4,379,791, CI. 424-270.000.
Williamson, Betty: See— ^.
Williamson. Byri L.; and WUliamson. Betty. 4.379.388, CI
60-398.000.
Williamson, ByrI L.; and Williamson, Betty. Ocean raft energy genera-
tor 4.379,388, CI. 60-398.000.
Wilson, Douglas, to British Petroleum Company L;?'"^V^,£^L°^
for setting a latex of a film forming polymer 4,379,873, CI 524-7.000
^""^'eSiird, iSe'E.; and Wilson, Gil C, 4,379,440. CI 1 19-159.0)0.
4.379,787, CI.
E., 4,379,537. CI.
4,379.534, CI. 244-
A, 4,379,929, CI
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 12, 1983
Wilson, Robert E.; and Mickelson, Dan. Mold apparatus 4 379 687 CI
425-388.000 • .
I Wilson, Robert W.. to Powell Manufactunng Company, Inc. Tobacco
handling apparatus. 4,379,669, CI. 414-21.000.
WIPAC Group Sales Limited. See-
French, John A W.. 4,379,540, CI. 248-406.000.
Witucki, Edward F : See—
Frankel. Milton B.. Witucki, Edward F.; and Woolery, Dean O II
4,379.894, CI. 525-403.000. ' '
Woitun, Eberhard: See—
Maier, Roland; Wetzel, Bernd; Woitun, Eberhard; Reuter, Wolf-
gang; Lechner. Uwe; and Goeth, Hanns. 4,379,784, CI
424-229.000.
Wojaczek, Egon; Soliman, Mustafa; and Schulte, Juergen, to Gewerk-
schaft Eisenhutte Westfalia. Advance mechanism for a mine roof
support unit. 4,379,661, CI. 405-299.000.
Wolfer, Peter: See—
Engeler, Paul; Sonderegger, Hans C; and Wolfer, Peter, 4,379 405
CI. 73-167.000. . . , ,
Woock. Jean P.; and Baerst, Christian. Panel grooving apparatus
4,379,419. CI. 83-875.000. ^^
Wood, Richard D., to Bcndix Corporation, The. Sampling probe for
stack gas monitoring system. 4.379,412. CI. 73-863.240.
Woods Wire Products, Inc.: See—
Upchurch, James E., 4.379,610. CI. 339-184.00R
Woodward, Oakley M.: See-
Torres, Rafael; and Woodward, Oakley M., 4,380,011, CI
343-702.000. . . . ■
Woody, Albert L.: See—
Roiissin, Michael A.; Jones. Steven D.; and Woody, Albert L
4.379,595, CI. 299-37.000.
Woolery, Dean O., II: See—
Frankel, Milton B.; Witucki, Edward F.; and Woolery, Dean O II
4.379,894. CI. 525-403.000. '
kV right, Danny P.: See-
Kendall, Debra L.; Watson. James M.; and Wright, Danny P
4,379,736. CI. 203-9.000. '
Wrulich. Herwig: See —
Zitz. Alfred; Schetina, Otto; Wrulich. Herwig; and Kissich. Arnulf
4,379,594. CI. 299-10.000.
Wu, D Louise; and Swain. James W., to Philip Morris Incorporated.
Cooked flavors for smoking products. 4,379,464, CI. 131-275 000
Wurzburg. Otto B.: See—
Tessler. Martin M.; Wurzburg, Otto B.; and Dirscherl. Teresa A
4.379.919. CI. 536-108.000.
Xerox Corporation: See—
Oft, Donald L.. 4.380.017. CI. 346-140.00R.
Wang, Shing C; and Hamerdinger, Randolph W., 4,380,078, CI
372-62.000.
Vaegashi. Takashi: See—
Fujii, Setsuro; Sugimito. Mamoru; and Yaeeashi. Takashi
4,379.764. CI. 260-1 12. 50R.
Yakabe. Tooru: See —
Takanashi, Yukio; Yakabe. Tooru; and Asano, Shunji, 4.379,980
CI. 313-446.000.
Vamabe, Masaaki; Munekau, Seiji; Kumai. Seisaku; and Kaneko.
Isamu. to Asahi Glass Company, Ltd. Process for producing per-
Jluorosuccinyl fluoride. 4,379.768, CI. 260-544.00F.
Vamada, Hisashi; and Sugawara. Tsutomu, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Gain controlled amplifier. 4 379 995 CI
330-254.000. , , .
Yamada, Mikio; and TabaU, Yujin, to Nihon Surfactant Industry Co.,
Ltd. Gelatinizing agent composition, and gel and aqueous emulsion
prepared therefrom. 4.379,755. CI. 252-312.000.
Yamaguchi, Hiroaki: See—
Hattori. Tadashi; Yamaguchi, Hiroaki; and Ootsuka, Yoshinori
4,379.403. CI. 73-35.000.
Yjunaha Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Takada. Yukimitsu; Harada, Hiroshi; and Takubo, Shuji, 4,379.702,
CI. 440-77.000.
Yjunamoto, Koichi: See-
Suzuki. Hiroo; Yamamoto, Koichi; Ohno, Yasuhide and
Miyamura, Kou, 4,379,482, CI. 164-485.000.
Y^aoka, Masayoshi: See—
Numau. Mitsuo; Mimamida, Isao; Yamaoka, Masayoshi; Shiraishi,
Mitsura; and Miyawaki, Toshio, 4,379,924, CI. 544-27 000
Y^ashita, Tadaoki: See—
Ikedo, Masaru; Watari, Masafumi; Yasuno. Yoshitake; and Yama-
shiu, Tadaoki, 4,379,621, CI. 350-392.000.
Yjunazaki, Hisayuki: See—
Chiyoda. Hironobu; Yamazaki, Hisayuki; and Takabe, Reiichiro
4,379,762, CI. 252-507.000.
Yjunazaki, Tetu: See—
Hagiwara. Yutaka; Takada, Toshiaki; and Yamazaki, Tetu
4.379.501, CI. 188-218.0XL.
Yan, Tsoung Y., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Demeulation of heavy
hydrocarbon oils. 4,379,747, CI. 208-25 l.OOH.
Yang Chi C; Madan, Arun; Ovshinsky, SUnford R.; and Adler, David
to Energy Conversion Devices, Inc. Current enhanced photovoltaic
device. 4,379,943, CI. 136-249.000.
Yano, Kohji: See —
T«la^Yuichi; Yano, Kohji; and Sakamoto, Katsuji, 4,379,615, CI.
Yano, Kohzo: See—
Yasuno, Yoshitake: See—
Ikedo, Masaru; Watari, Masafumi; Yasuno, Yoshitake; and Yama-
shita, Tadaoki, 4,379,621, CI. 350-392.000.
Yeaw, David C, to Eastman Kodak Company. Method of analyzing an
aqueous liquid for hexacyanoferrates. 4,379,848, CI. 436-84 000
Yee, James S.: See —
B«L^an. David; Yee, James S.; and Pruyn, Richard R., 4,380,012, CI.
Yoder, Max N., to United States of America, Navy. Monolithic fully
integrated class B push-pull microwave GaAs MESFET with differ-
ential inputs and outputs with reduced Miller effect. 4,380,022, CI.
Yokoyama, Tadashi: See—
Iwata Masayosi; Douke, Harumi; Hayashi, Yoshikazu; Yokoyama,
Tadashi; and Mizuta, Yukio, 4,379,954, CI. 200-4 000
Yoneda, Hiroichi: See —
Andoh, Sadanari; Maeda, Junji; Fukushima, Kiyoshi; Yoneda,
Hiroichi; and Jinushi, Naotomo, 4,380,018, CI. 346-140 OOR
Yonezawa, Toshio: See —
'^"."J^lT^^'i' ^.""'a'''; Hiraki, Shunichi; and Yonezawa. Toshio,
4,379,726, CI. 148-175.000.
Yoritomi, Kenzaburo; Kezuka, Teruo; and Moriya, Mitsumasa, to
banmatsu Kogyo Co., Ltd. Method for the chromatographic separa-
''°" o'^'uble components in feed solution. 4,379,751, CI.
''4!5%%36"^n56^7.S^''"^ '"'"•"" ^''- '"^P^^*"" ^-'--
Yoshimoto, Hisanari; Tonomura, Taka; and Takamura, Takuo, to Kabu-
^!llr',, ^^ Fujikoshi. Chuck for machine tools. 4,379,667, CI
409-234.000.
Yoshimura, Isao; Hata, Hideo; and Kaneko, Takashi, to Asahi-Dow
Limited. Composition for drawn film, cold drawn film made of said
composition and process for manufacture of said film. 4,379 888 CI
525-211.000.
Yoshizuka Seiki Co., Ltd.: See—
Katagiri, Takeshi; and Tsuchifuji, Takakazu, 4,379,684. CI
425-78.000.
Younes. Usama E.. to Atlantic Richfield Company. Fire retardant
thermoplastic molding compositions. 4.379.877. CI. 524-123 000
Young. Cynthia L.: See—
Staub, Herbert W.; Schanbacher, Larry M.; Zencheck, Jack D
and Young, Cynthia L., 4,379,782, CI. 424-180.000.
Young, Donald L. Positive lock hose clamp. 4,379,359, CI. 24-273 000
Young, Hartley F.; Verhoef, Hendrikus M., deceased (by Verhoef
Edmund M., executor); and Remes, Wally A., to Ralph McKay
Limited. Spnng rail fastening system. 4,379,521. CI. 238-349.000
Young, Murray M., to University of Waterloo. Bioconversion of indus-
trial cellulosic pulp materials to protein enriched product. 4.379 844
CI. 435-251.000. ' ' •
Yuan, Lloyd T.; Chang, Yu-Wen; and Mills, Thomas G., to TRW Inc.
Active high frequency semiconductor device with integral wave-
guide. 4,380,020, CI. 357-3.000.
Yuda, Takuo: See—
Tanaka, Shinken; and Yuda, Takuo, 4,379,648, CI. 403-24.000
Zecher, David C, to Hercules Incorporated. Chemically-initiated
inverse emulsion polymerization with Na, Li/CI, Br salt 4 379 883
CI. 524-801.000.
Zencheck, Jack D.: See—
Staub, Herbert W.; Schanbacher, Larry M.; Zencheck, Jack D
and Young, Cynthia L., 4,379,782, CI. 424-180.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See —
Hockenbrock, Richard L., 4,379,978, CI. 313-318.000
Zetterquist, Staffan G.: See—
Nilsson, Eriing S.; and Zetterquist, Staffan G., 4,379,461, CI.
1 28-736.000.
Ziegel, Douglas H., to RCA Corporation. Method and apparatus for
sorting stones. 4,379,510, CI. 209-643.000.
Zitz, Alfred; Schetina, Otto; Wrulich, Herwig; and Kissich, Amulf, to
Voest-Alpme Aktiengesellschaft. Process for sinking of shafts
4,379,594, CI. 299-10.000. *
Zollner geb. Moller, Christine, to C. Conradty Numberg GmbH & Co.
KG. Method of removing electrocatalytically active protective
coatings from electrodes with metal cores, and the use of the method
4,379,723, CI. 134-2.000.
Zwillich, Alexander, to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Adjustable insula-
tor attachment for isolated phase bus switch. 4,379,945. 01. 174-
99.00B. . , , V, .,-».
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 12th DAY OF APRIL, 1983
Note -Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Ahlgren, Nils H. Method of lowering and raising loads by means of a
jack assembly and lifting element. Re. 31,206, CI. 254-1.000.
Auburn Research Foundation: See— „ . j
Goodling. John S.; McDaniel, Gayner R.; and Steadham, Richard
A., Re. 31.202,0. 128-303.140.
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: See— ,,,„-, r^ i<rL
Tsunekawa, Tokuichi; and Taguchi, Tetsuya, Re. 31,207, Q. 250-
214.00R.
Cleamax Limited: See-
Jackson, John M., Re. 31,203, CI. 134-48.000,
Donn Products Incorporated: See—
Sauer, Gale E.. Re. 31.201, CI. 52-667.000. „. , ^ ,
Goodling, John S.; McDaniel, Gayner R.; and Steadham, R'chard A
to Auburn Research Foundation. Poultry beak remover. Re. 31,202,
CI. 128-303.140. , , A
Jackson. John M.. to Cleamax Limited. Apparatus for cleaning inside
and outside surfaces of containers. Re. 31.203. CI. 134-48.000.
Jalbert. Domina C. Aerial sled. Re. 31.205. CI. 244-145.000.
'''^''Gt3iiS7ohn\;^cDaniel. Gayner R.; «d Ste«ih.m. Richard
A..Re. 31.202. CI. 128-303.140, ,, ,fu ri
Sanner. George E. Sprinkler flow control systems. Re 31.204. U
137 78 300
Sauer! Gale E.. to Donn Products »ncoT»"t^ i^l^K connection
for supporting grid systems. Re. 31.201. CI. 52-667.000.
Steadham. Richard A: See— j c.-..<»..™ n.rh.rH
Goodling. John S.; McDaniel. Gayner R.; and Steadham. Richard
A.. Re. 31.202. CI. 128-303.140.
^**Tsunek?wa! Tokuichi; and Taguchi. TeUuya. Re. 31.207. CI. 250-
Tsunekawa, Tokuichi; and Taguchi. Tetsuya. 'o C«non Kabus^ki
Kaisha. Leak current suppressing pnnled circuit board. Re. 31,207.
CI. 250-2 14.00R.
Unimation. Inc.: See— ,. ,„„ _, ,,o taonrm
Watanabe.Takehiko. Re. 31.208. CI. 318-568.000 , ,
Watanabe. Takehiko. to Unimation. Inc. Signal modification device for
memory controlled manipulator apparatus Re. 31,208. t,i
318-568.000.
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Reinhold. Donald F.; and Sletzinger. Meyer, to Merqk & Co..
Inc Treatment of hypertension with L-alpha-methyl-3.4-dihy-
droxyphenylalanine. Bl 3.344.023. CI. 424-319.
Merck & Co.. Inc.: See— -.lAAnTi
Reinhold. Donald F.; and Sletzinger. Meyer. Bl 3.344.023.
CI. 424-319.
Dauser. Jr.. William C. to Lloyd A. Heneveld. trustee. Wire
connector. Bl 4.295.004, CI. 174/87.
Lloyd, A. Heneveld, trustee: See—
Dauser, Jr., William C. Bl 4,295,004. CI. 174-87.
Kato. Tetuo. to Tokico Ltd. Hydraulic damper. Bl 4.189.034. CI.
188—318.
Tokico Ltd.: See— /
Kato. Tetuo. Bl 4.189.034, CI. 188-318.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
''^'^mn^'lSSn; and Abe. Noboru. 268.617. CI. D28-51.000.
Allibert S.A.: See— ^, ,,«««
Comou, Jean. 268,559. CI. D7-77.000.
^"'Sr^Sard k^A-nderson William^^^^ Charles R.; and
Schreiner. Charles P.. 268.622, CI. D34-40.000.
^'"'^J^S^S^'pTmSU Jerrold C; Hovey. Dean A.; and Kelley.
David M.. 268.584, CI. D14-106.000.
Applied Industrial Company Limited: See-
Lee. Lap. 268.600. CI. D21-13.000.
S Lap. 268.601. CI. D21-13.000.
Lee. Up. 268.602. CI. D21-13.000.
Lee. Up. 268.603. CI. D21-13.000.
Babock & Wilcox Company. The: See— ,« «^ r\ D14-
Whaley. George S.; and Willmott. Thomas L.. 268.583. CI. D14-
Baum. RoiUo Mathis System-Technik GmbH. Mortar mixer. 268.586.
B^i^: SbS! C.' ??iorox Comp^iy. The. Container for air fresh-
^er. 268.613. 4-12-83. CI. D23-150.000.
Beers Eugene W.. to Esselte Pendattex Corp. Ubelmg machine.
B^ri.t^:i-'i%''^^^cn6.n.. Corp. Ubeling machme.
S^^S^i^^^^^S, .12-83. CI. D.113.CX)0.
^1^r^;vS.1^87597. CI. 019:39.000.
BiggslAnthony J. Combined dental pm and chuck. 268.615. 4-12-83. CI.
BlSJirSSton L. Bird feeder. 268.619. 4-12-83. CI. D30-15.000.
Braun Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Ullmann. Roland. 268.616. CI. D28^9.000_ 0,320000
Bretschneider. Walter. Shoe base. 26J.543. 4-2-83. C . D2-320.000.
Bright. John E. VegeUble cutter. 268.562. 4-12-83. CI. U7 jbi.uuu.
"^fi'^S^gf B^^eS^ai^d Campion. Stanley F.. executor.
268.557. CI. D7-20.000.
jShMon AJohniM. Baby Products Company. Spinning toy 268.604.
PI 27
PI 28
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
. : See —
C. M.; and De Coster, Pieter K J.
268,560, CI
Michael J. Cremain vault. 268,623
Clorox Company, The: See—
Beacham, Robert C, 268,613, CI. D2 3 150 000
^?6r5'50^?2X-CrD?&'^««'" '"-^-'«^ S-vel chair
Compagnie Generale des Eublissements Michelin See—
i Grcnie, Philippe. 268,573, CI. D 12- 147.000
von verse Inc See—
I Crowley, Kevin J , 268,544, CI. D2-320 000
I D7°7'7 OoT' '° '^"''*'' ^^ Insulated container. 268,559, 4-12-83. CI.
Cox, Michael F. Paperweight. 268,599, 4-12-83, CI. DI9-96 000
[:ubbison, Flossie E.: See—
^"l47a)0 ^''^" " • ^"'^ Cubbison, Flossie F.., 268,588, CI. D15-
>aenen Robert H. C. M., and De Coster. P.eter K. J., to Dart Indus-
r^rsil^ storage container or the like. 268,560. 4-12-83, CI.
L/7-82.000.
Dart Industries, Inc.: See —
^^A^^B^ ^^^ " ^ ^' ^"^ ^ *^'«^' P'eter K. J., 268,560. CI
De Coster. Pieter K. J
Daencn. Robert H
D7-82.000.
r>ercks. Gerald A.; and Dercks
4-12-83. CI. D99-5.00O
C»ercks, Michael J : See—
Dercks, Gerald A ; and Dercks, Michael J . 268.623, CI D99-5 000
LTakuhc. John. Water pump housing. 268,585, 4-12-83, CI DI5-5 000
tdery. Jean-Pierre. Bicycle cover 268,546, 4-12-81 CI D3-36 000
Esselte Pendaflex Corp.: See-
Beers. Eugene W., 268,595, CI. DI 8- 19 000
Beers. Eugene W. 268,596, CI. DI8-I9 0no
^"WOOO^^"^' ° '^^^"''^''^ ''^'' "^^"^^^ 268.566, 4-12-83. CI. D8-
F ledrich Grohe Armaturenfabrik GmbH & Co See—
Klose. Odo, 268,611, CI. D23-35 000.
Fiikuchi. Fumio: See—
G(;neral Mills, Inc.: See—
Wildgen. Leo F , 268,556, CI. Db- 188.000
'''?6^^.^4-T8rC^D'2M59S)^^ ""' ^"""'"^'^ "^"^'"^'^ -^
S&er" GmlS'le-'""^" ''''"'• '■''■''• ^'^ ^'2-304.000.
"Tso'ooo''^' ^'"^' *"*^ Schimanski, Georg, 268,614, CI. D23-
''^^!:!^-::iS^?^'^Si:7'S>''' Etablissements Michel.n.
Gribb. Lawrence B.: See—
^'^,-6^:0 Dly-?/SS' "-'"""" ^' '"' ^'"'^'"^' ^^^'^ ^ •
"te9,^T2-"3, ci: Di-].o5). '™^'" ^^"""^"^ ''°'^'° p^-^-'
Hampton. Aubom R Combined ball hitch and vehicle carrier for golf
pi2-"?000^'""^ """"' """""""S coupling. 268,574. 4-12-83, CI.
"$2-83^CI^d'iM23 ^ ^°' '"^rument flight training. 268,593.
" c'lTsf'oOO^^"^ ^ "'^'^'^''^ '^"'^*"* °' ""^ '■'"'■ 2**''^^' '*-'2-83. CI.
Hiuichi. Ltd : See—
"°J?i:i,r?S8.'£,'?.°,5:'c?D^°4K'S>°" "*" ■»'''■«■"« ""^ <"
Hovey, Dean A.: See—
Jobs, Steven P. Manock, Jerrold C; Hovey. Dean A.; and Kelley
David M., 268,584. CI. D14-106.000 "veiicy.
Husky Corporation: See—
Sutcliffe, Grenville G., 268.612, CI. D23-43.000.
J Rl Simplot Company: See —
Hamann. Michael L.. 268.539, CI. DM 000
bn, George B., deceased; and by Campion, Stanley F., executor, to
fer4-S8"3* S'^TcSo. "^^'^ ''''' °^ ^"""" ^^-i-
Steven P; Manock, Jerrold C; Hovey. Dean A.; and Kelley
Yoshio; Katsumi,
D 15- 122.000.
Hirosuke; and
; and Kelley,
r>.wiH HA .„ A 1 ^ .■• """"^J'' ^-^*»n f^; ana R.eney,
?i2-83.^i.Dlt^06'oa)°'"''"'"' ^""""""^ computer. 268.584,
Jo(T(. Richard M.: See—
I'!!"' o'"! R- *"'^ ■'°^^' Richard M.. 268.591. CI. D16-17 000
I K **'"«J; P""' D ; and JofTe. Richard M.. 268.592. CI. D16-18 000
rf'^lvP^'^ ■' -^"^'''ary sides for utility trailer. 268.572. 4-12-83 CI
U 2-106.000. '
Johnion A Johnson Baby Products Company See—
^''2S6S?cT D21-?2 too' ^*'^'"'*' ^ • '^ W'"i«ms, David M.,
John^n, Vickj L. A. Swimming suit. 268.542, 4-12-83, CI. D2-40.000.
Katsumi, Hirosuke 5ee—
Kono, Michinaga; Matsumoto,
Fukuchi, Fumio, 268.587, CI
Kelley, David M.: See-
Jobs. Steven P.; Manock. Jerrold C; Hovey, Dean A
David M., 268,584, CI. D 14- 106.000
Klose. Odo to Fnednch Grohe Armaturenfabrik GmbH & Co Hand
shower. 268,6 1 1 , 4- 1 2-83, CI. D23-35.000. " « »^o. nana
Kojima, Fumiyo; See —
''?6"T8rCl^Du':i4j^''''^'"^' "^^"^"^ ^' '^"J'-- f^-'yo-
''S567'!^2°b; Cl'D9-T7l(i;S"''^' ^""^"^ ^*'""'^''- »°"'-
Kono, Michinaga; Matsumoto. Yoshio, Katsumi, Hirosuke; and Fuku-
DI5-122"oob*" ^'^''*"' ^'*^ '"'lustnal robot. 268.587, 4-12-83, CI.
Kyotaru Co., Ltd.: See—
Uno. Koki. 268,540, CI. Dl-2.000
Uno, Koki, 268,541, CI. Dl-2.000
Lee, Lap to Applied Industrial Company Limited. Electronic memory
game housing. 268,600, 4-12-83, CI. D2 1- 13 000 memory
Lee, Lap to Applied Industrial Company Limited. Electronic memorv
game housing. 268,601, 4-12-83, CI D21-13 000 ^ "^"""^ memory
Lee. Lap to Applied Industrial Company Limited. Electronic memorv
game housing. 268,602, 4- 1 2-83, CI D2 1 - 1 3 000 °""^ memory
Lee, Lap to Applied Industrial Company Limited. Electronic memorv
game housing. 268,603. 4- 1 2-83, CI D2 1 - 1 3 000 """ '"^'"O'^y
^'4^12-83"cf tecS'"'''"^'^ '^^'^ ^"'^ '°^''^^'^ ''^^'' ""■' 2^^-549.
''268;5S.t^.h.^rDt3l3.^.' ^""^' ^"'^ ^'^""^^-" '"-^^^
Malik, Richard J. Aquarium filter. 268,607. 4-12-83, CI D23-4 000
Manock, Jerrold C: See— ' '-'"^■^^^-
Marini, Thomas O.: See—
Mann^ Louis G; and Marini, Thomas O., 268.621. CI. D34-26 000
Marshall. Enc J. Telephone. 268,579, 4-12-83. CI D14-53 000
Mathis System-Technik GmbH: See-
Baum, Rolf, 268,586, CI. D 1 5- 1 9 000
^RloTr' ^°^"'''i I°5f'*f'^'"a- Manzo; and Kojima, Fumiyo, to
^12 83 crD14:94Sx) '^''°''^" *"'^ transceiver. 268,580,
Matsumoto, Yoshio: See—
Kono Michinaga; Matsumoto, Yoshio; Katsumi, Hirosuke- and
Fukuchi, Fumio, 268,587, CI. D 1 5- 1 22 000
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.: See—
IX ..^^'^'^•. ^°"an; and Abe, Noboru, 268,617, CI. D28-5I 000
rronn%" H^' '"'^ '^-llfj^/io'^""'"' '° ^iew-Master International
..V!™"^ ^''*^^ viewer. 268,589, 4-12-83, CI. D16-17 000
Grnun Th?V *"^.,'^>'«^- Martin, to View-Master International
Vfmir & TaWetop slide viewer. 268,590, 4-12-83, CI. D 1 6- 1 7.000.
rrn-.n^T ' ^"'^ ■'°"^'' '^'^^^''^ '^ ' '° ^lew-Master International
Group. Transparency viewer. 268,591, 4-12-83, CI. D16-17.000
rro„o^"i?H^ and JofTe. Richard M., to View-Master International
iB^ Folding transparency viewer. 268,592, 4-12-83, CI. D16-
Mizuno, Makoto: See—
Mizutani Takeshi; and Mizuno, Makoto, 268,598, CI D19-43 000
I^Ti!• iy^"*'i'.t"^„„^'^""°' ^^°'0' 'o Shachihata Industrial Co'
^M^l^.I^^^ P*" 268,598, 4-12-83, CI. DI9-43.000.
Mobil Oil Corporation: See—
Holden, Morell J., 268,568, CI. D9-425.000.
Napohtane Andrew. Compact. 268.618. 4-12-83. CI. D28-78 000
Uhya. Toshio to Sony Corporation. Adapter for converting recorded
D14°2 000 °"^ '° another size cassette. 268,578. 4-12-83. CI.
Pace Collection. Inc.. The: See-
Rosen, Leon, 268.555, CI. D6-146.000.
Parker-Hannifin Corporation: See-
Sharp, Bernard C. 268,575. CI. DI2-187.000
Sharp. Bernard C. 268.576. CI. DI2-I87.000.
Pendelfin Studios Limited: See—
Roberts, Doreen N., 268,571, CI. Dl 1-158.000.
w"J!,' ^'"'^,B.; and Whitwam, Ronald L., to Steelcase Inc. Com-
bined table and seating unit. 268,551, 4-12-83. CI. D646.000.
K '^'.^'.""^.^ ' *"*^ Whitwam. Ronald L.. to Steelcase Inc. Com-
bined Uble and seatmg unit. 268,552. 4-12-83. CI. D6-46 000
Randolph. Ralph A. Pull toy. 268.605. 4-12-83. CI. D21-165o6o
Ricoh Company, Ltd.: See—
'^?6S°Cl''?."4S4.S''''''"'' "^^"^"^ '"' ''°J*'"^ '^"'"■y°'
^"rn'oS^*^ ^ Barbecue cooking tool. 268,561. 4-12-83. CI. 07-
'^tl?-83.^l'*D"l Miss 000*'"*^*'"" ^'"'*'°' ^■'""'^ ^^^'^ 2'•*•"'•
** D^hli^'" ^'^ Collection. Inc.. The. Table. 268,555. 4-12-83, CI.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 29
Ruckstuhl, Howard J. Fishing rod case. 268,547. 4-12-83, CI. D3-38.000.
Russell, Burdsall & Ward Corporation: See —
Mortus, Harold J., 268,565, CI. D8-397.000.
Schimanski, Georg: See—
von Philipp, Fritz; and Schimanski, Georg, 268,614, CI. D23-
150.000.
Schimmel, Otto K., to Amba Marketing Systems, Inc. Handbag.
268,548, 4-12-83, CI. D3-48.O0O.
Schreiner, Charles P., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Materials han-
dling cart. 268,620, 4-12-83, CI. D34-2 1.000.
Schreiner, Charles P.: See —
Wolters, Richard H.; Anderson, William C; Tyke, Charles R.; and
Schreiner, Charles P., 268,622, CI. D34-40.000.
Seiffert, Florian; and Abe, Noboru, to Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
Electric shaver. 268,617, 4-12-83, CI. D28-51.000.
Shachihata Industrial Co., Ltd.: See —
Mizutani, Takeshi; and Mizuno, Makoto. 268,598, CI. D19-43.000.
Sharp, Bernard C, to Parker-Hannifin Corporation. Rear view mirror.
268,575, 4-12-83, CI. D12-187.000.
Sharp, Bernard C, to Parker-Hannifin Corporation. Rear view mirror
mounting. 268.576, 4-12-83, CI. D 12- 187.000.
Shimano Industrial Company Limited: See —
Kojima, Masao, 268,567, CI. D9-372.000.
Sony Corporation: See —
Ohya. Toshio, 268,578, CI. DI4-2.000.
Spence, David, to Berol Corporation. Drawing template. 268,597,
4-12-83, CI. D19-39.000.
Springer, Karl. Wall mounted combined shelf and cabinet unit. 268,554,
4-12-83, CI. D6- 127.000.
Steelcase Inc.: See —
Raftery, William B.; and Whifwam, Ronald L., 268,551, CI D6-
46.000.
Raftery, William B.; and Whitwam, Ronald L., 268,552, CI. D6-
46.000.
SutclifTe, Grenville G., to Husky Corporation. Swivel connector for
hose or the like. 268,612, 4-12-83, CI. D23-43.000.
Syracuse China Corporation: See —
Jensen, George B., deceased; and Campion, Stanley F., executor,
268,557, CI. D7-20.000.
Thaler, Martin: See —
Miller. Paul D.; and Thaler, Martin, 268,589, CI. D16-17.000.
Miller, Paul D.; and Thaler, Martin, 268,590, CI D16-17 000.
Thayer Coggin Incorporated: See—
Coggin, J. Thayer, 268,550, CI. D6-26.000.
Thompson, Bruce R., to UPL Group Limited. Shower head. 268,609,
4-12-83, CI. D23-35.000.
Thompson, Bruce R., to UPL Group Limited. Hand shower. 268,610,
4-12-83, CI. D23-35.000.
Tyke, Charies R.: See—
Wolters, Richard H.; Anderson, William C; Tyke, Charles R.; and
Schreiner, Charles P . 268,622, CI D34-40.000.
Ullmann, Roland, to Braun Akticngesellschaft. Electric shaver 268,616.
4-12-83, CI. D28-49.000
Uno, Koki, to Kyotaru Co., Ltd Sushi. 268,540, 4-12-83, C! D 1-2.000
Uno, Koki, to Kyotaru Co., Ltd. Sushi. 268,541. 4-12-83. CI Dl-2.000
UPL Group Limited: See-
Thompson. Bruce R., 268.609, CI D23-35.000.
Thompson, Bruce R., 268,610, CI. D23-35 000.
View-Master International Group: See —
Miller, Paul D.; and Thaler. Martin. 268,589, CI. D16-17.000
Miller, Paul D.; and Thaler, Martin. 268,590, CI. D16-I7.000
Miller. Paul D ; and JofTe, Richard M., 268.591, CI D16-17.000
Miller, Paul D.; and JofTe, Richard M., 268,592. CI DI6- 18.000
von Philipp. Fritz; and Schimanski. Georg, to Globol-Werk GmbH Air
freshener or similar article. 268.614, 4-12-83, CI D23150.000
Wagman, Aaron. Rotating rectangular-shaped plaque 268.570, 4-12-83,
CI Dl 1-132.000.
Weinreb, Robert. Carry case for small articles. 268,545, 4-12-83, CI.
D3-33.000.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See—
Schreiner, Charles P., 268,620, CI. D34-2 1.000.
Wolters, Richard H.; Anderson, William C ; Tyke, Charles R., and
Schreiner, Charles P., 268,622, CI. D34-40.000
Whaley, George S.; and Willmott, Thomas L , to Babock & Wilcox
Company, The. Control console. 268,583, 4-12-83, CI D14-103.000
Whitwam, Ronald L.: See —
Raftery, William B.; and Whitwam, Ronald L., 268,551, CI. D6-
46.000.
Raftery, William B.; and Whitwam. Ronald L , 268,552, CI D6-
46.000.
Wilcock, Anthony C. Faucet. 268.608, 4-12-83. CI. D23-23.000.
Wildgen, Leo F., to General Mills, Inc. Display rack for packaged
produce. 268,556, 4-12-83, CI D6- 188.000
Williams, David M.: See —
Chase, Richard A.; Grubb. Lawrence B.; and Williams, David M.,
268,604, CI. D2 1-92.000.
Willmott, Thomas L.: See —
Whaley, George S.; and Willmott, Thomas L . 268,583. CI DI4-
103.000.
Wolters, Richard H.; Anderson, William C ; Tyke. Charies R.; and
Schreiner, Charles P., to Westinghouse Electnc Corp Matenal
handling tote tray. 268,622, 4-12-83, CI. D34-40.000
Yoshihama, Manzo: See —
Matsumoto, Nobuki; Yoshihama, Manzo; and Kojima, Fumiyo,
268,580, CI. D14-94.000.
Young, Gary L. Drink bar. 268,558, 4-12-83, CI. D7-71.000.
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
Armstrong Nurseries, Inc.: See —
Chnstensen, Jack E., 5,035, CI 8.000.
McGredy. Samuel, IV, 5,036, CI. 2.000.
Christensen, Jack E., to Armstrong Nurseries, Inc. Hybrid miniature
rose plant cv. Arorasp. 5,035, 4-12-83, CI. 8.000.
Conard-Pyle Company, The: See —
Meilland. Marie L., 5,038. CI. 10.000.
Handelskwekerij, B. V.: See —
van Staaveren, Maurits C, 5,030, CI. 71.000.
Jackson & Perkins Company: See —
Warriner, William A., 5,037, CI. 20.000.
Warriner, William A., 5,039, CI 7.000.
Ludick, Roberta J. Hibiscus plant. 5,034, 4-12-83, CI. 54.000.
McGredy, Samuel, IV, to Armstrong Nurseries, Inc. Hybrid shrub rose
cv. Macmigmou. 5,036, 4-12-83, CI. 2.000.
Meilland. Marie L.. to Conard-Pyle Company, The. Miniature rose
plant — Meiddanego vanety. 5,038. 4-12-83, CI. 10.000
Moore, Ralph S. Rose plant. 5,032, 4-12-83. CI. 9 000
Moore, Ralph S. Rose plant. 5.033. 4-12-83. CI 9 000.
Nor'East Miniature Roses. Inc.: See—
Saville, F. Harmon, 5,031, CI. 7,000,
Saville, F. Harmon, to Nor'East Miniature Roses, Inc. Rose plant.
5,031,4-12-83, CI. 7.000.
van Staaveren, M. C: See —
van Staaveren, Maurits C, 5,030, CI 71,000.
van Staaveren, Maurits C, to Handelskwekerij, B. V,; and van Staav-
eren, M. C. Carnation named Stacherry. 5,030, 4-12-83, CI. 71.000.
Warriner, William A., to Jackson & Perkins Company. Rose plant — 71-
4992. 5,037, 4-12-83, CI. 20.000.
Warriner, William A., to Jackson & Perkins Company Rose plant
78-5111— Petticoat. 5,039. 4-12-83. CI. 7.000.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED APRIL 12, 1983
Note —First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
CLASS2
9 4.379,349
CLASS3
22 4.379,350
CLASS4
498 4.379,351
CLASS 5
471 4,379,352
CLASS 8
94.12 4,379,708
94.18 4,379,709
149.1 4,379,353
527 4,379,710
CLASS 14
71.3 4,379.354
CLASS IS
101 4,379,355
CLASS 17
45 4,379,356
CLASS 19
105 4,379,357
CLASS 24
136 R 4,379.358
273 4.379.359
CLASS 29
1 1 4.379.360
857 4.379.361
CLASS 30
393 4.379.362
CLASS 33
169 C 4.379.363
277 4,379,364
316 4,379,365
361 4.379,366
367 4,379,367
CLASS 34
57 R 4,379,368
110 4,379,369
CLASS 36
121 4,379,370
CLASS 37
104 4,379,371
CLASS 40
10 C 4.379,372
152.1 4,379,373
CLASS 43
61 4.379.374
CLASS 47
65 4.379.375
CLASS 49
462 4.379.376
4.379,377
CLASS 52
9 4,379.378
208 4,379,379
259 4.379,380
404 4.379,381
506 4,379,382
667 Re. 3 1,201
CLASS 53
266 A 4,379,383
415 4,379,384
CLASS 55
257 R 4.379,712
CLASS 56
16.6 4,379.385
CLASS 57
405 4,379,386
CLASS 60
277 4,379.387
398 4.379.388
95 4,379,397
273.5 4,379,398
388 4,379,399
4,379,400
428
4,379,389
CLASS 118
CLASS 62
643
4,379.435
354
4,379,390
CLASS 119
408
4.379.391
3
4.379,436
CLASS 65
4,379,437
1
4,379,713
29
4,379,438
19
4,379,714
52 B 4.379.439
225
4,379,715
159
4,379,440
CLASS 68
CLASS 123
5C
4,379,392
440
458
4,379,441
4,379,442
CLASS 70
549
4,379,443
234
4,379,393
609
4,379,444
456 R
4,379,394
CLASS 124
CLASS 71
19
4,379,445
87
4,379,716
CLASS 126
92
4,379.717
1 10 B 4.379.446
CLASS 72
117
4.379.447
8
It
4.379.395
d 170 VUk
263
449
4,379,448
4,379,449
310
348
485
4,379,481
CLASS 162
4,379,735
CLASS 164
4,379.482
CLASS 73
12
23
35
167
336.5
579
603
643
809
861.78
863.24
4.379.401
4,379.402
4.379,403
4,379.404
4,379,405
4,379,406
4,379,407
4,379,408
4,379.409
4.379.410
4.379,41 1
4,379,412
CLASS 74
710.5 4.379.413
805
24
251
4.379,414
CLASS 75
4.379,718
4,379,720
CLASS
36 A
CLASS
23
27
544
875
CLASS
1.03
1.15
1.19
CLASS
373
CLASS
13.41
71
CLASS
100
CLASS
35
93.09
CLASS
21
287.17
5
107
111
153
214
228
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
82
4,379,415
83
4,379,416
4,379,417
4,379,418
4,379,419
84
4,379,420
4,379,421
4,379,422
91
4,379,423
92
4,379,424
4,379,425
100
4,379,426
101
4.379,427
4,379.428
106
4,379,721
4.379.722
108
4.379,429
4.379,430
4,379.431
4.379.432
110
4.379.433
116
4,379,434
CLASS 128
74 4.379,450
80 C 4,379,463
92 C A 4,379.451
303.14 Re. 3 1.202
314 4.379.456
334 R 4,379.457
419 PG 4.379,459
671 4,379,460
736 4,379,461
786 4.379,462
CLASS 131
275 4,379,464
332 4,379,465
CLASS 133
3 C 4,379,466
CLASS 134
1 4,379,724
2 4,379,723
48 Re31,203
1 1 1 4,379,467
CLASS 135
88 4.379,468
CLASS 136
249 4,379,943
259
4,379,944
CLASS 137
78.3 Re.3 1,204
296 4,379,469
493.8 4,379,470
CLASS 138
89 4,379,471
4,379,472
167 4,379,473
CLASS 139
21 4,379,474
CLASS 144
193 C 4.379.475
357 4.379.476
4.379.477
CLASS 148
1.5 4.379.727
4 4.379.725
175 4.379,726
CLASS 156
73.6 4.379.729
307.3
324
356
428
616 R
4.379.728
4.379.730
4.379.731
4,379,732
4,379,733
CLASS 159
17 R
4,379,734
CLASS 160
35
201
232
4,379,478
4,379.479
4.379.480
CLASS 165
2 4.379.483
16 4.379,484
1 10 4,379,485
153 4,379,486
165 4,379,487
CLASS 166
217 4.379.488
266 4.379.489
304 4.379.490
CLASS 172
328 4.379.491
CLASS 173
12 4.379.492
CLASS 174
87 Bl 4,295,004
99 B 4.379,945
CLASS 175
61 4,379,493
325 4,379,494
CLASS 177
4.379,495
4,379,496
CLASS 178
4,379,946
CLASS 179
1
25
1 GD
1 SC
15.55 R
18 ES
101
115.5 PC
178
4,379,947
4,379,948
4,379,949
4,379.950
4,379,951
4,379,952
4,379,953
CLASS 180
168 4,379,497
CLASS 182
107 4,379,498
CLASS 187
29 R 4,379,499
CLASS 188
318 Bl 4,189,034
196 B 4,379,500
218 XL 4.379.501
CLASS 192
71 4.379.502
CLASS 193
37 4.379.503
CLASS 198
455 4.379,504
CLASS 200
4 4,379,954
11 DA 4,379,955
48 A 4,379,956
145 4,379,957
148 A 4,379,958
CLASS 203
9 4,379,736
CLASS 204
11 4,379,737
55 R
72
129
286
298
424
4,379,738
4.379.739
4.379.740
4.379.742
4.379.743
4.379.741
CLASS 206
329 4.379.505
364 4.379.506
444 4,379,507
507 4.379.508
CLASS 208
10 4.379,744
132 4.379,745
251 H 4.379,747
262 4,379.746
CLASS 209
1 1 4.379.748
598
643
169
232
659
712
4,379.509
4.379.510
CLASS 210
4.379.749
4.379.750
4,379,751
4,379,752
CLASS 215
lA 4,379,511
327
4,379,512
CLASS 219
69 M 4,379,959
4,379,960
78.01 4,379,961
121 P 4.379,962
136 4,379,963
492 4.379.964
521 4.379,965
325
279
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
52
146 HE
189
15
55
443
49
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
220
4,379,513
221
4,379.514
222
4.379,515
4.379,516
226
4.379,517
229
4.379.518
4.379.519
235
4.379.966
236
4,379.520
CLASS 238
349 4.379,521
CLASS 239
167 4,379.522
222 4.379.523
533.8 4.379.524
CLASS 241
20 4,379,525
79 1 4,379,526
CLASS 242
4 BE 4,379,527
43 R 4,379,528
118.11 4,379,529
220 4,379,530
CLASS 244
3.23 4,379.531
4 A 4.379.532
118.1 4,379.533
137 R 4.379,534
4.379.535
145 Re. 3 1.205
CLASS 248
73 4.379.536
74 R
95
371
406
544
561
4.379.537
4.379.538
4.379.539
4.379.540
4.379.541
4.379.542
CLASS 250
214 R Re 31.207
227 4.379.967
229 4.379,968
324 4.379.969
338 4,379.970
342
59
74
4,379,971
CLASS 251
4,379,543
4.379.544
CLASS 252
106 4.379,753
17411 4.379,754
312 4,379,755
411 R 4,379,756
426 4,379,757
429 B 4,379,758
4,379,759
4,379.760
4.379,761
4.379.762
4.379,763
CLASS 254
1 Re 31.206
8 B 4,379,545
111 4,379,546
CLASS 260
112.5 R 4,379,764
245.6 4,379,765
413 4,379,766
453 P 4.379,767
544 F 4,379,768
545 R 4.379,769
CLASS 261
4.379,770
435
507
628
142
CLASS 264
15 4,379,771
49 4,379,772
184 4,379,773
284 4.379,774
CLASS 266
103 4,379,547
158 4,379,548
CLASS 271
3.1 4,379,549
CLASS 272
52 4,379,550
56 5 R 4.379.551
67 4.379.552
CLASS r3
51 4.379.553
67 R 4.379.554
236 4,379.555
CLASS 277
12
59
188 A
207 A
236
237 R
4.379.556
4,379.557
4.379.558
4.379.559
4.379.560
4,379.561
CLASS 279
5
4.379.562
CLASS 2M
7.1 4.379.563
11.2 4.379.564
160 4,379,565
251 4.379,566
276 4,379,567
400 4,379,568
415 A 4.379,569
605 4,379,570
656 4,379,571
711 4,379,572
CLASS 285
211 4,379,574
369 4,379,575
CLASS 290
44 4.379.972
CLASS 292
205 4.379.576
341 15 4.379.577
CLASS 294
312 4.379.578
83 R 4.379,579
PI 31
PI 3;
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
8ft R
115
4,n<»,580
4,37<),58l
CLASS 296
1 S 4,379,582
4.379.583
78 1 4.379.584
14* 4,379.585
222 4.379,586
CLASS 297
192 4.379.587
217 4,379,588
299 4,379.589
CLASS 299
2 4.379,590
4,379,591
4,379,592
4.379,593
10 4.379,594
37 4.379,595
CLASS 301
5 B 4,379,596
12 R 4,379,597
CLASS 307
112 4,379.973
269 4,379.974
CLASS 308
10 4,379,598
187 4,379,599
187 1 4,379,600
CLASS 310
59 4,379,975
83 4.379,976
CLASS 312
21 4,379,601
268 4,379,602
320 4,379,603
330 R 4,379,604
CLASS 313
318 4.379,978
346 R 4,379,979
446 4,379,980
489 4.379,981
CLASS 315
73 4,379,982
151 4.379,983
CLASS 318
254 4,379.984
93 4.379,985
M* 4.379,986
561 4,379.987
568 Re 31,208
CLASS 320
4 4,379,988
26 4,379,989
CLASS 322
99 4,379,990
CLASS 324
58 5 C 4,379.991
158 F 4,379,992
CLASS 328
1 20 4,379,993
CLASS 330
149 4,379.994
154 4,379,995
!96 4,379,996
!98 4,379,997
CLASS 333
150 4,379.998
CLASS 33«
84 C 4,379,999
92 4,380.000
CLASS 337
4 4,380,001
CLASS 338
53 4,380.002
15 4,380,003
CLASS 339
14 R 4,379,605
17 CF 4,379,606
40 4,379.607
75 MP 4,379.608
91 R 4.379,609
184R
217 S
4,379,610
4,379,611
CLASS 340
34
347 AD
347 CC
365 C
784
82555
4,380,004
4,380,005
4,380,006
4,380,007
4,380,008
4,380.009
CLASS 343
113 R 4.380.010
702 4,380,01 1
705 4,380,012
753 4,380,013
786 4,380,014
CLASS 346
108 4,380,015
135 1 4,380,016
140 R 4,380,017
4,380,018
4,380,019
CLASS 350
6.8
96 10
96.21
96.23
96 34
126
239
357
387
392
394
414
486
528
4,379,612
4,379,613
4,379,614
4,379,615
4,379,616
4.379,617
4,379,618
4,379,619
4,379,620
4,379,621
4,379,622
4,379,623
4,379,624
4,379,625
200
CLASS 351
4,379,626
CLASS 353
27 A 4,379,627
73 4,379,628
CLASS 354
173 4,379,629
CLASS 355
3 TR 4,379,630
4,379,631
14 R
68
4,379,632
CLASS 356
359
365
387
407
411
4,379,633
4,379,634
4,379,635
4,379,636
4,379,637
a.Ass 357
3 4,380,020
15 4,380,021
22 4,380,022
CLASS 358
4,380,023
4.380,024
4.380.025
4,380,026
4,380,027
4,380,028
75
93
106
147
219
CLASS 360
48
74.1
74.6
77
130.33
132
119
214
218
280
283
421
4,380,029
4,380,031
4,380,032
4.380,033
4,380,034
4,380,035
4,380.030
CLASS 361
4,380.036
4.380.038
4.380,037
4,380.039
4,380,040
4,380,041
4,380,042
CLASS 362
26 4,380,043
CLASS 363
21 4.380,044
54 4.380.045
CLASS 364
200 4,380,046
4,380,047
424. 1 4,380,048
426 4,380,049
461 4,380,050
766 4,380,051
900 4,380,052
4,380,053
4,380,054
CLASS 365
154 4,380,055
183 4,380,056
185 4,380,057
244 4,380,058
CLASS 366
149 4,379,638
CLASS 367
46 4,380,059
CLASS 368
12 4,379,639
63 4,379,640
74 4,379,641
188 4,379,642
309 4,379,643
314 4,379,644
CLASS 370
5 4,380,060
16 4,380,061
20 4,380,062
60 4,380,063
63 4,380,064
96 4,380,065
CLASS 371
10 4,380,066
1 1 4,380,067
20 4,380,070
24 4,380,068
31 4,380,069
40 4,380,071
CLASS 372
5 4,380,072
12 4,380,073
43 4,380,074
44 4,380,075
54 4,380,076
62 4,380,077
4,380,078
87 4,380,079
CLASS 375
17 4,380,080
82 4,380,081
102 4,380,082
120 4,380,083
CLASS 376
204 4,380,084
381 4,380,085
CLASS 378
136 4,379,977
155 4,380,086
186 4,380,087
CLASS 400
623 4,379,645-
636 4,379,646
CLASS 401
262 4,379,647
CLASS 403
24 4,379,648
172 4,379,649
316 4,379,650
387 4.379.651
CLASS 404
117 4,379,652
118 4,379,653
CLASS 405
53 4.379.654
176 4.379.655
186 4,379,656
195 4,379,657
267 4,379.658
284 4.379.659
288 4.379,660
299 4,379.661
302 4.379,662
CLASS 406
23 4.379.663
68
204
4,379,664
CLASS 408
4,379,665
CLASS 409
no 4,379,666
234 4,379,667
CLASS 410
77 4,379,668
CLASS 414
21 4,379,669
217 4,379,670
331 4.379,671
565 4,379,672
686 4,379,673
699 4,379,674
734 4,379,675
748 4,379,676
CLASS 415
4,379,677
CLASS 416
4,379,678
175
98
CLASS 417
46 4,379,680
54
560
4,379,679
4,379,681
CLASS 419
60
4,379,719
CLASS 422
51
4,379,775
CLASS 423
321 R 4,379,776
348
4,379,777
584
4,379,778
CLASS 424
319
Bl 3.344,023
114
4,379,781
180
4,379,782
184
4,379,783
229
4,379.784
244
4,379,785
4,379.786
246
4,379.787
251
4,379.788
260
4,379,789
261
4,379,790
270
4,379,791
274
10
62
78
183
290
388
526
266
304
486
4,379,792
4,379,793
CLASS 425
4,379,682
4,379,683
4,379,684
4,379.685
4.379.686
4,379,687
4,379,688
CLASS 426
4,379,794
4,379.795
4,379,796
CLASS 428
9 4,379,797
42 4,379.573
113 4,379,798
131 4,379,799
148 4,379,800
220 4,379.801
4.379,802
328 4,379.803
332 4.379,804
346 4,379,805
354 4,379,806
383 4,379.807
438 4.379.808
470 4,379,809
541 4,379.810
555 4.379,811
577 4.379.812
587 4.379,813
CLASS 429
42 4.379,814
66 4.379,815
91 4,379,816
224 4,379.817
CLASS 430
5 4,379,818
17 4.379,819
58
62
83
106.6
111
141
166
212
215
309
311
315
325
329
338
377
434
518
4,379.820
4.379.821
4,379,822
4,379,823
4.379,824
4,379,825
4,379,826
4,379,827
4,379,828
4,379,829
4,379,830
4,379,831
4,379,832
4,379,833
4,379,834
4,379,835
4,379,836
4,379,837
4,379.838
CLASS 431
284 4,379,689
359 4,379,690
CLASS 432
3 4,379,691
18 4,379,692
CLASS 433
7 4,379,693
201 4,379,694
217 4,379,695
CLASS 434
98
106
114
184
208
5
10
34
58
178
251
255
316
4,379,696
4,379,698
4,379,697
4,379,699
4,379,700
CLASS 435
4,379,839
4,379,840
4,379,841
4,379,842
4,379,843
4,379,844
4,379,845
4,379,846
CLASS 436
8
4,379,847
82
4,379,711
84
4,379,848
177
4,379,849
517
4.379,850
543
4,379,779
4,379,780
CLASS 440
21 4,379,701
77 4,379,702
CLASS 441
79 4,379,703
88 4,379.704
94 4,379,705
CLASS 455
67
127
111
162
66
87
135
138
26
51
54
59
61
115
158
105
106
139
140
161
201
206
221
4,380,088
4,380,089
CLASS 464
4.379,706
4,379,707
CLASS 501
4,379,851
4,379,852
4,379,853
4,379,854
CLASS 521
4.379.855
4.379.856
4,379.857
4,379,858
4,379,859
4.379,860
4,379.861
4,379,862
CLASS 523
4.379.863
4.379.864
4.379.865
4.379.866
4,379.867
4.379.868
4,379.869
4.379.870
331
406
7
27
104
109
123
181
186
297
315
436
801
4.379,871
4,379,872
CLASS 524
4,379,873
4,379,874
4,379,875
4,379,876
4.379.877
4,379,878
4.379.879
4.379,880
4,379,881
4,379,882
4,379,883
CLASS 525
96
108
162
184
211
247
332.8
342
386
403
437
439
472
506
4,379,884
4,379,885
4,379,886
4,379,887
4.379,888
4.379.889
4.379.890
4.379,89!
4,379.893
4,379,894
4,379.895
4.379.892
4.379,896
4,379,897
CLASS 526
124 4,379,898
144 4,379,899
247 4,379,900
4,379,901
CLASS 528
18
4,379,902
55
4,379,903
65
4,379,904
73
4,379,905
75
4,379,906
91
4,379,908
94
4,379,909
202
4,379,910
245
4,379,911
274
4,379,912
300
4,379,913
354
4,379,914
357
4,379,915
494
4,379,916
CLASS 536
16.8 4,379,917
62 4,379,918
108 4,379,919
CLASS 542
427 4,379,920
458 4,379,921
CLASS 544
4,379.922
4.379,923
4,379,924
4.379,925
4,379,926
4,379,927
4,379,928
4,379,929
4,379,930
CLASS 546
4,379,931
4,379.932
4.379,933
4,379,934
4,379,935
4,379,936
4,379.937
4.379.938
CLASS 560
4.379.939
4.379.940
CLASS S62
4.379,941
CLASS 568
4,379,942
CLASS 604
4,379,452
4,379.453
4,379,458
4,379,455
4.379.454
16
26
27
102
122
139
176
234
298
14
17
37
51
91
155
345
193
248
401
385
6
145
264
320
897
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
Dl—
D2-
D3-
D6-
1
2
40
320
33
36
38
48
6
26
46
113
268,539
268.540
268,541
268,542
268,543
268,544
268,545
268,546
268,547
268,548
268,549
268,550
268,551
268,552
268,553
D7-
D8-
D9-
127
268,554
146
268,555
188
268,556
20
268,557
71
268,558
77
268,559
82
268,560
102
268,561
381
268,562
353
268,564
397
268,565
399
268,566
372
268,567
425
268,568
DU-
D12-
DU
81
132
158
106
147
157
187
304
2
53
94
268,569
268.570
268,571
268,572
268.573
268.574
268,575
268,576
268,577
268.578
268.579
268.580
268.581
268.582
D15-
D16-
D18—
103
268.583
106
268,584
5
268,585
19
268,586
122
268,587
147
268,588
17
268,589
268,590
268,591
18
268,592
123
268,593
137
268,594
19
268,595
268,596
D19-
D21-
D23-
39
268,597
43
268,598
%
268,599
13
268,600
268,601
268.602
268,603
92
268.604
159
268,606
165
268.605
4
268,607
23
268.608
35
268,609
268.610
D24-
D28-
D30-
D3*-
D99-
43
138.5
150
10
49
51
78
15
21
26
, 40
5
PI 33
268.611
268,612
268,563
268,613
268.614
268,615
268,616
268,617
268.618
268.619
268,620
268.621
268.622
268.623
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
p.-^
5.036
5,031
5.039
5,035
5.032
5,033
10
20
5,038
5,037
54
5,034
71
5,030
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. Stales, Terrilories and Armed Forces, Ihe Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
Alabama i
\laska 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California 5
Canal Zone 7
• Colorado g
(^Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 11
lorida 12
eorgia 13
uam 14
awaii 15
aho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana ig
lavva 19
Kansas 20
as
Kentucky 2I
Louisiana 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota 27
Mississippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York 26
North Carolina 37
North Dakota 38
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
(First number in listing denotes location
to inventor name, location, etc.)
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 45
South Dakota 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 43
Utah 49
Vermont 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
West Virginia 54
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army 53
U.S. Navy 59
according to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the Official Gazette to obtain details
1)1
(12
C6
PATENTS
Re.3 1.202
4,379,«33
4,379,939
4,379,493
4,379,444
4.379,459
4,379,569
4,379,573
4,379,687
4,379,711
4,379,712
4,379,794
4,380,051
4.380,067
4,379,349
4,379.359
4,379,374
4,379,375
4,379,378
4,379,388
4,379,401
4.379,402
4,379,420
4,379,428
4,379,438
4,379,448
4,379,454
4,379,472
4.379,505
4,379,527
4,379,535
4,379,537
4,379.575
4,379,590
4,379.591
4,379,603
4.379,61 1
4,379,622
4,379.624
4,379,643
4,379.647
4,379.650
4.379.656
4.379,657
4,379.695
4,379,697
4,379.700
4.379.701
4,379,703
4,379.718
4,379,732
4,379.733
4,379.740
08
09
10
11
12
4,379,744
4,379,749
4,379.773
4,379,776
4,379,798
4.379,826
4,379,894
4,379,903
4,379,944
4,379,963
4,379.972
4,379.976
4.379,991
4,379.998
4,380.009
4,380,013
4,380,014
4,380,020
4.380,029
4,380.032
4,380,047
4,380,054
4,380.056
4,380,072
4,380,078
4,380,079
4,379.475
4,379,971
4,379,383
4,379,414
4.379,457
4,379,499
4,379,506
4,379,605
4.379,644
4,379.679
4,379,767
4,379,783
4,379,845
4,379.904
4,379,911
4,379,985
4,380,073
4,379.717
4,379,746
4,379.752
4,379,769
4,379,994
Re.3 1.205
4,379,431
4,379,432
4.379.462
4.379.578
13
17
18
19
20
4,379,708
4,379,816
4,379,847
4,379,968
4,379,988
4,379,533
4.379,731
4,379,771
4,380.070
4.379,362
4,379.389
4,379,399
4,379,400
4,379,408
4,379,415
4,379,452
4,379,491
4,379,572
4,379,576
4.379,584
4,379,595
4,379,653
4,379,671
4,379,674
4,379,675
4,379,691
4,379,696
4.379,699
4,379,823
4,379,941
4,379.955
4,379,978
4,379,990
4,379,993
4.380,041
4,379,413
4,379,510
4,379,546
4,379,610
4,379,658
4,379,739
4,379,781
4,379,787
4,379.807
4,379,910
4,379,917
4,379,929
4,380.025
4.379,522
4,379,551
4,379,9%
4.379,382
4,379.483
21
24
25
26
4,379,655
4,379,663
4,379,698
4,379,422
4,379,564
Re.3 1,204
4,379,515
4,379,609
4.379,649
4,379,728
4,379,866
4,379,869
4,379,883
4,379,979
4,380,062
4,379,363
4,379,555
4.379.560
4,379,566
4.379,635
4,379,670
4,379,682
4,379,720
4,379.864
4,379,916
4,379,969
4,379,973
4,379,982
4,380,065
4,380.088
4.380,089
4,379.360
4,379.376
4,379,377
4,379,390
4,379,393
4.379,439
4,379,442
4,379,447
4,379.449
4,379.463
4,379,468
4.379,480
4,379,497
4,379.574
4,379,586
4,379,639
4.379,822
4.379.827
4,379,906
4,379,930
4,379,931
4,379,943
27
28
29
32
33
34
4,380,002
4,379,368
4,379,371
4,379,498
4,379,763
4,379,804
4,379,824
4,379,835
4,379,966
4,380,034
4,379,571
4,379,426
4,379,456
4,379,545
4,379,688
4,379,716
4,379,857
4,380,075
4,379,451
4,379,519
4,379,436
4,379,437
4,379,485
4,379,489
4,379,514
4,379,531
4,379,534
4,379,554
4,379,562
4,379,601
4,379,613
4,379.616
4,379,620
4,379,686
4,379,738
4,379,745
4,379,754
4,379,758
4,379,759
4,379,761
4,379,765
4.379,782
4,379,799
4,379.806
4.379,814
4,379,855
4,379,863
4,379,874
4,379,878
4,379,913
4,379,914
4,379.919
4,379,932
35
36
37
39
4,379,933
4,379,981
4,380,01 1
4,380,042
4,380,046
4,380,066
4,380,069
4,380,074
4,379,364
4,379,406
Re.3 1,201
4,379,373
4,379,411
4,379,433
4.379,445
4,379,453
4,379,469
4,379,479
4,379,481
4,379,532
4,379.598
4,379,607
4.379,623
4,379,637
4,379,693
4,379,757
4,379,772
4,379,797
4,379,818
4,379,830
4,379.832
4.379,839
4,379.848
4,379,851
4,379,880
4,379.902
4,379,912
4,379,928
4,379.936
4.379,947
4,379,965
4,379,992
4,380,023
4,380,027
4,380,036
4.380,076
4,379.443
4,379,446
4.379,669
4,380,037
4,379,361
4,379,380
4,379,410
I 34
01
04
06
06
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS PI 35
4,379,418
4,379,495
4,379,503
4,379,508
4,379,518
4,379,525
4,379,538
4,379,579
4,379,581
4,379,597
4,379,704
4,379,713
4,379,753
4,379,796
4,379,808
4,379,812
4,379,815
4,379,817
4,379,875
4,379,893
4,379,895
4,379,925
5,032
5.033
40
41
42
4,380,086
4,379,440
4,379,490
4,379,494
4.379,502
4,379,766
4,379,884
4,379,898
4,380,004
4,379,476
4,379,477
4,379,626
4,379,478
4,379,544
4,379,577
4,379,585
4,379,606
4,379.608
4,379,618
4,379,665
4.379.689
4,379,690
268,574
268,596
268,548
268,597
268,562
268,608
268,546
268,613
268,564
12 .
268,563
268,566
268,599
268,577
16 :
268,539
268,584
18 :
268,593
268,594
24 :
268,604
268.595
25 :
268,544
5.035
44
4.379.719
4.379,730
4.379,737
4,379,747
4,379,750
4,379,778
4,379,786
4,379,789
4,379,791
4,379,792
4,379,854
4,379,876
4,379,877
4,379,885
4,379,886
4,379,945
4,379.956
4,379,957
4,380,012
4,379.460
4,379,588
45
47
48
4,379,937
4,379,710
4,379,986
4.379,596
4,379,801
4,379,802
4,379,372
4.379,381
4,379,407
4,379,455
4,379,471
4,379,488
4,379,543
4,379,553
4,379,556
4,379,557
4,379,558
4,379,593
4,379,672
4,379,676
4,379,678
DESIGN PATENTS
26
27
29
268,606
31
268,551
34
268,552
36
268,607
268,620
268,622
268,556
268,623
268,612
268,605
268,621
268,545
268,553
268,554
268.555
268.557
268.568
268.570
PLANT PATENTS
5,037
49
50
4,379,680
4,379,722
4,379,725
4,379,736
4,379,760
4,379,779
4,379,780
4,379,795
4,379,841
4,379,891
4,379.908
4,379,949
4,379.953
4,379,967
4,379,974
4,380,017
4,380,055
4,380,059
4,380,077
4,380,080
4,379,727
51
53
54
55
5,039 12 :
5,034 25
4,380,057
4,379,464
4,379,940
4,379,970
4,380,022
4,379,385
4,379,434
4,379,552
4,379,810
4,380,039
4,380,050
4,379.412
4,379,354
4,379,484
4,379,565
4,379,568
4,379,587
4,379,628
4.379,681
4.379,805
4,379,962
268,575
39
268.547
268,576
268,565
268,589
268,583
268,590
41 :
268,588
268,591
42 :
268,585
268,592
44 :
268,619
268,618
49 :
268,542
37 :
268,550
268,572
38 ;
268,561
51
268,569
5,031
US. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFHCE O— 198?
M
S
G
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
NAME— FIRST. LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
STATE
ZIP CODE
(or) COUNTRY
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20A02
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER F0R>1
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
@ %
Domestic; @ $
Foreign.
NAME— FIRST. LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
(or) COUNTRY
rj Remittance Enclosed (Make
checks payable to Superin-
tendent of Documents)
Q Charge to my Deposit
Account No
MAIL ORDER FORM TO:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC. 20402
^>^r-/fT^
'-y^^
<• (I
; *»,i> ^
■ T
"^^j*-
itf-j
'^^*
xr7.
r- 11
*f*
't
_
" ^,
'7; ^
, tj
rf Wt
•^ t
'H
^P;
-"1
u^si
-♦*
-CtvS
.•,H
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
April 19, 1983 Volume 1029 Number 3
CONTENTS
Page
Patent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1029 OG 20
Reissue Applications Filed 1029 OG 20
Request for Reexamination Filed 1029 OG 20
Notice of Availability for Licensing 1029 OG 20
Availability of Patent and Trademark Rules 1029 OG 22
Patent Certificates of Correction 1029 OG 23
Disclaimers 1029 OG 23
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries 1029 OG 24
Condition of Patent Applications 1029 OG 25
Reexaminations 1029 OG 27
Patent and Trademark Office Rules '029 OG 29
Reissue Patents Granted (31,209) 533
Plant Patents Granted (5,040) 537
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,380,090) 539
Chemical (4,380,451) 665
Electrical (4,380,686) 729
Design Patents Granted (268,624) 779
Index of Patentees PI '
Indices of Reissue, Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees PI 27
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations) P' 31
Designs and Plants PI 33
Geographical Index of Residence of Inygntdfs
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 34
Designs and Plants PI 35
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly.
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1.00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, $8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, D.C., 20231.
Printing authorized by Section ll(a)3 of Title 35, U.S. Code P.T.O.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the Oflicial Gazette
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13, 1982. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28, 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52.
Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased
as of Oct. 1, 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of
Jan. 1. 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22,
1983. The notice regarding the change in international
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27, on 28 Dec. 1982. The current
schedule of fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee $ 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases .^. 670.00
International Fees
Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00
Basic Supplemental Fee (for each
page over 30) 5.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 65.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
4,292,180, Re. S.N. 467,465, Filed Feb. 10, 1983, CI.
210/496, MILK FILTER SOCK, Kenneth R. Zylka, et
al.. Owner of Record: Meridian Industries, Inc., Milwau-
kee, Wis., Attorney or Agent: Elwin A. Andrus, et al.,
Ex. Gp.: 176
REISSUE APPLICATIONS HLED
Notice under 37 CFR l.n(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
4,065,070, Re. S.N. 470,701, Filed Feb. 28, 1983, CI.
242/107.004, DUAL SPOOL RETRACTOR, Regis V.
Pilarski, et al.. Owner of Record: The Firestone Tire and
Rubber Co., Akron, Ohio. Attorney or Agent: Jesse B.
Grove, Ex. Gp.: 245
4,246,484, Re. S.N. 459,254, Filed Jan. 19, 1983, CI.
250/455, MEDICAL RADIOGRAPHIC APPARA-
TUS, Richard W. Fetter, Owner of Record: EMI Medi-
cal, Inc., Northbrook, III, Attorney or Agent: Ivan S.
Kavrukov, et al., Ex. Gp.: 256
4,262,390, Re. S.N. 468,988, Filed Feb. 23, 1983, CI.
19/50, ROLLER GIN AND FEED SYSTEM INCOR-
PORATING THE SAME, Robert R. Einglett, et al.,
Owner of Record: Lummus Industries, Inc., Columbus,
Ga.. Attorney or Agent: Hugh P. Carter, et al., Ex. Gp.:
4,279,780, Re. S.N. 464,188, Filed Feb. 7, 1983, CI.
252/452, METHOD OF PREPARING CATALYST
SUPPORTS, Robert A. Dombro, Owner of Record:
Chemplex Co., Rolling Meadows, III, Attorney or Agent:
Ernest A. Wegner, et al., Ex. Gp.: 116
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(aK5)and 1.525(b)).
3,537,725, Reexam. No. 90/000,341, Requested: Mar.
10, 1983, CI. 308/187.2, TROUGH-LIKE SEAL FOR
ROLLER ASSEMBLY, Ruben E. Frost, Owner of
Record: C.L. Frost & Son, Inc., Grand Rapids, Mich., At-
torney or Agent: Price, Heneveld, et al., Ex. Gp.: 240,
Requester: Jervis B. Webb Co., Farmington Hills, Mich.
3,647,293, Reexam. No. 90/000,339, Requested: Mar.
9, 1983, CI. 355/15, COPYING SYSTEM FEATUR-
ING COMBINED DEVELOPING-CLEANING STA-
TION ALTERNATELY ACTIVATED, Carl A.
Queener, Owner of Record: International Business Ma-
chines Corp., Armonk, N. Y., Attorney or Agent: Charles
E. Rohrer, Ex. Gp.: 210, Requester: Owner
3,905,828, Reexam. No. 90/000,344, Requested: Mar.
15, 1983, CI. 429/218, ELECTROLYTIC PROCESSES
AND ELECTRODES THEREFOR, Anthony Clifford
Barber, Owner of Record: Imperial Metal Industries
(Kynoch), Ltd., Warwickshire, England, Attorney or
Agent: Cushman, Darby & Cushman, Ex. Gp.: 112, Re-
quester: Anomet Products, Inc., Natick, Mass.
4,193,247, Reexam. No. 90/000,346, Requested: Mar.
22, 1983, CI. 52/713, PANEL MOUNTING CLIP,
Robert E. Heckelsberg, Owner of Record: AMCA Inter-
national Corp., Hanover. N.H., Attorney or Agent: Har-
ness, Dickey & Pierce, Ex. Gp.: 354, Requester: Butler
Manufacturing Co., Grandview, Mo.
4,213,282, Reexam. No. 90/000,342, Requested: Mar.
16, 1983, CI. 52/404, METAL PANEL ROOFING
STRUCTURE, Robert E. Heckelsberg, Owner of Rec-
ord: AMCA International Corp.. Hanover, N.H., Attorney
or Agent: Harness, Dickey & Pierce, Ex. Gp.: 354, Re-
quester: Butler Manufacturing Co., Grandview, Mo.
4,263,819, Reexam. No. 90/000,347, Requested: Mar.
22, 1983, CI. 74/573, INERTIAL METHOD OF CEN-
TERING A CONSTANTLY CIRCULAR RIM ON
ITS HUB AND CORRESPONDING ROTARY DE-
VICE, Pierre Poubeau, Owner of Record: Societe
Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale, Paris, France, Attor-
ney or Agent: Karl W. Flocks, Assoc., Ex. Gp.: 350,
Requester: Owner
4,296,581, Reexam. No. 90/000,345, Requested: Mar.
18, 1983, CI. 52/520, ROOFING STRUCTURE, Robert
E. Heckelsberg, Owner of Record: AMCA International
Corp., Hanover. N.H., Attorney or Agent: Harness,
Dickey & Pierce, Ex. Gp.: 350, Requester: Butler Manu-
facturing Co., Grandview, Mo.
1029 OG— 20
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 CX5— 21
4,371,576, Reexam. No. 90/000,343, Requested: Mar.
17, 1983, CI. 428/92, HOT MELT ADHESIVE BOND-
ED PILE FABRICS, Greville Machell, Owner of Rec-
ord: Milliken Research Corp., Spartanburg, S.C., Attor-
ney or Agent: Terry T. Moyer, Ex. Gp.: 160, Requester:
Owner
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Government-Owned Inventions
Notice of Availability for Licensing
The inventions listed below are owned by agencies of
the U.S. Government and are available for licensing in
the U.S. in accordance with 3S U.S.C. 207 to achieve ex-
peditious commercialization of results of federally funded
research and development. Foreign patents are filed on
selected inventions to extend market coverage for U.S.
companies and may also be available for licensing.
Technical and licensing information on speciflc inven-
tions may be obtained by writing to:
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
U.S. Department of Commerce
P.O. Box 1423
Springfield, Va. 22151
Please cite the number and title of inventions of inter-
est.
Douglas J. Campion,
Program Coordinator,
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Department of Commerce.
U.S. Department of Agriculture
SN 6-337,045 (4,362,527). RADIATION-RESISTANT
FLUOROAROMATIC CELLULOSIC ETHERS.
SN 6-229,217 (4,365,464). APPARATUS TO UNI-
FORMLY CONTROL WRAPPING A FILA-
MENT AROUND THE SURFACE OF A SPUN
CORE YARN DURING RING SPINNING.
SN 6-270,676 (4,365,504). METHOD AND APPARA-
TUS FOR FIELD TESTING OF ANEMOME-
TERS.
SN 6-302,008 (4,365,966). PROCESS FOR MODIFY-
ING CELLULOSIC FABRICS FOR IMPROVED
HEAT TRANSFER PRINTING.
SN 6-326,996 (4,374,850). METHOD OF CONTROL-
LING PARASITIC TICKS.
SN 6-326,995 (4,374,851). METHOD OF CONTROL-
LING PARASITIC TICKS.
U.S. Department of the Air force
SN 6-310,689 (4,362,570). SOLVENT MIXTURE FOR
REMOVING POLYSULFIDE AND SILICONE
RUBBER COATINGS.
SN 6-304,126 (4,365,034). ACETYLENE-TERMINAT-
ED POLYIMIDE COMPOSITIONS.
SN 6-318,653 (4,365,109). COAXIAL CABLE DE-
SIGN.
SN 6-256,881 (4,365,173). PHASE SHIFTER AD-
JUSTMENT APPARATUS.
SN 6-343,000 (4,366,323). POLYMERIZATION OF
ARYLENE BIS-SILANOLS.
SN 6-274.697 (4,374,715). METHOD FOR THE PREP-
ARATION OF POLY (CARBONOYL FLUO-
RIDE) OLIGOMERS.
U.S. Department of the Army
SN 6-235,060 (4,360,954). METHOD OF MAKING
CAST-IN-PLACE SABOTS.
SN 6-300,533 (4,361,011). CRYOGENIC COOLING
SYSTEM.
SN 6-216,416 (4,361.040). INTEGRATING ANGU-
LAR ACCELEROMETER.
SN 6-213,522 (4,361,054). HOT-WIRE ANEMOME-
TER GYRO PICKOFF.
SN 6-189,980 (4,361,071). FIRE CONTROL MECHA-
NISM.
SN 6-163,542 (4,361,384). HIGH LUMINANCE MIN-
ATURE DISPLAY.
SN 6-272,859 (4,361,526). THERMOPLASTIC
COMPOSITE ROCKET PROPELLANT.
SN 6-201,678 (4,361,760). TWO-DEGREE-OF-FREE-
DOM GYRO WITH RADIANT ENERGY PICK-
OFFS.
SN 6-174,293 (4,361,886). SATELLITE COMMUNI-
CATION SYSTEM.
SN 6-266,025 (4,361,911). LASER RETROREFLEC-
TOR SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFICATION OF
FRIEND OR FOE.
SN 6-154,557 (4,362,085). FLIGHT CONTROL SYS-
TEM.
SN 6-142,548 (4,362,106). FLOW DEFLECTOR FOR
AIR DRIVEN POWER SUPPLY.
SN 6-230,922 (4,362,326). DISCONNECTABLE COU-
PLING.
SN 6-297,643 (4,362,588). METHOD OF FABRICAT-
ING A DUCTED BLANKET FOR A ROTOR
SPAR.
SN 6-206,913 (4,362,938). INFRARED VIEWING
SYSTEM.
SN 6-220,321 (4,362,965). COMPOSITE/LAMIN-
ATED WINDOW FOR ELECTRON BEAM
GUNS.
SN 6-136,124 (4,364,300). COMPOSITE CORED
COMBAT VEHICLE ARMOR.
SN 6-275,531 (4,364,775). AQUEOUS OXIDATIVE
SCRUBBER SYSTEMS FOR REMOVAL OF
MERCURY.
SN 6-289,438 (4,365,059). NITRATION OF CELLU-
LOSE.
SN 6-174,093 (4,365,149). MORTAR FIRE CONTROL
SYSTEM.
SN 6-196,508 (4,365,182). METHOD OF FABRICAT-
ING ACCELERATION RESISTANT CRYSTAL
RESONATORS AND ACCELERATION RESIS-
TANT CRYSTAL RESONATORS SO FORMED.
SN 6-196,957 (4,365,481). METHOD AND APPARA-
TUS FOR REMOVAL OF SODIUM CARBON-
ATE FROM CYANIDE PLATING BATHS.
SN 6-194,314 (4,365,556). METHOD AND SYSTEM
FOR PREVENTING BASE SEPARATION OF
CAST EXPLOSIVES IN PROJECTILES.
SN 6-335,925 (4,365,982). CRYOGENIC REFRIGER-
ATOR.
SN 6-318,766 (4,366,229). METHOD OF MAKING
COLD SHIELD FOR INFRARED DETECTOR
ARRAY.
U.S. Department of Commerce
SN 6-293,783 (4,361,630). ULTRA-BLACK COATING
DUE TO SURFACE MORPHOLOGY.
1029 OG 16
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
1029 OG— 22
U.S. Department of Health & Human Services
SN 6-329.590 (4.362,510). CEMENTITIOUS DENTAL
COMPOSITIONS WHICH DO NOT INHIBIT
POLYMERIZATION.
SN 6-341,572. RICIN AND MODECCIN RE-
AGENTS EFFECTIVE AS TUMOR SUPPRES-
SIVE CYTOTOXIC REAGENTS.
SN 6-343,026. HEAT TREATMENT OF A NON-A,
NON-B HEPATITIS AGENT TO PREPARE A
VACCINE.
SN 6-440,728. PROCESS AND DEVICE FOR X-
RAY SYSTEM QUALITY ASSURANCE.
SN 6-446,408. ULTRASONIC THERAPY APPLICA-
TOR THAT MEASURES DOSAGE.
SN 6-456,401. IMPROVED PROTOCOL FOR THE
TREATMENT OF GRAFT VERSUS HOST DIS-
EASE.
SN 6-458,312. MEDICATION COMPLIANCE MON-
ITORING DEVICE.
SN 6-459,251. ADAPTABLE BLOOD PRESSURE
CUFF FOR HUMANS AND ANIMALS.
SN 6-461,954. IMPROVED HELICAL COIL FOR
DIATHERMY APPARATUS.
U.S. Department of the Interior
SN 6-258,075 (4,362,557). PURIFYING TITANIUM-
BEARING SLAG BY PROMOTED SULFA-
TION.
SN 6-311,487 (4,362,615). FROTH FLOTATION OF
RUTILE.
Availability of Patent and Trademark Rules
The Office is publishing a consolidation of the patent rules presently in effect and a
revised index to assist patent practitioners.
Individual copies at $5.00 per copy can be obtained from the Superintendent of Docu-
ments, Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402 on or after April 19, 1983.
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for tlie Week of Apr. 19, 1983
D. 268,003
4,157,789
4,189,621
4,224,263
4,226,342
4,238,356
4,243,579
4,250,216
4,253,609
4,269,627
4,280,016
4,281,086
4,294,826
4,297,490
4,300,465
4,304,830
4,305,421
4,307,986
4,319,043
4,320,377
4,324,280
4,324,433
4,324,779
4,324,852
4,329,968
4,332,132
4,332,208
4,333,099
4,333,795
4,336,852
4,336,853
4,338,342
4,338,351
4,339,248
4,340,171
4,342,820
4,343,403
4,346,455
4,346,456
4,346,958
4,348,747
4,349,395
4,349,568
4,349,616
4,350,022
4,350,719
4,351,769
4,353,226
4,353,268
4,353,741
4,354,273
4,354,897
4,355,280
4,355,329
4,355,388
4,355,449
4,355,754
4,356,261
4,356,790
4,357,003
4,357,747
4,357,929
4,358,442
4,358,487
4,359,327
4,359,653
4,359,785
4,360,525
4,360,558
4,360,768
4,360,892
4,361,183
4,361,268
4,361,656
4,361,932
4,362,454
4,362,667
4,362,819
4,362,866
4,363,485
4,363,654
4,363,849
4,364,334
4,364,817
4,366,306
4,366,371
4,367,507
4,368,124
4,368,672
4,368,691
4,368,785
4,368,966
4,369,622
4,369,859
4,370,721
4,370,842
4,371,022
4,371,417
4,371,607
4,372,060
4,372,088
4,372,521
4,372,652
4,372,912
4,372,932
4,372,963
4,373,206
4,373,540
4,373.685
4,373,745
4,373,834
4,373,838
4,374,109
4,374,252
4,374,985
Disclaimers
Des. 247,744. — Marcel Duchamp, Chamalieres, France.
TIRE. Patent dated Apr. 18, 1978. Disclaimer filed
Feb. 4, 1983, by the assignee, Compagnie Generate
Des Etablissements Michel in.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to the sole claim of said
patent.
Des. 251,188. — Jean Pommier, Clermont-Ferrand,
France. TIRE. Patent dated Feb. 27, 1973. Disclaim-
er filed Feb. 4, 1983, by the assignee, Compagnie
Generate Des Etablissements Micfielin.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to the sole claim of said
patent.
Des. 256,802. — Jacobus E. Hazenbroek, Numansdorp,
Netherlands. EVISCERATOR TOOL. Patent dated
Sept. 9, 1980. Disclaimer filed Jan. 20, 1983, by the
assignee, Cagte's, Inc.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to the claim of said pa-
tent.
3,520,861. — John E. Thomson, and George E. Waptes, Jr.,
Lake Jackson, Tex. COPOLYMERS OF ETHYL-
ENE. Patent dated July 21, 1970. Disclaimer filed
Jan. 31, 1983, by the assignee, The Dow Chemical Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1 through 8
and 10 of said patent.
3,802,744.— CAflr/« E. Grawey, Peoria; Keith E. Koch,
Tremont; and Robert W. Untz, Hanna City, 111.
SPLIT RIM ASSEMBLY FOR EARTH-
WORKING VEHICLES. Patent dated Apr. 9, 1974.
Disclaimer filed Feb. 22, 1983, by the assignee, Cat-
erpillar Tractor Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1-4 of said pa-
tent.
4,010,146.— Z>av;V/ D. Russell. Atwater; and George
Shkapenko. Akron, Ohio. POLYOL BLENDS AND
POLYURETHANE PREPARED THEREFROM.
Patent dated Mar. 1, 1977. Disclaimer filed Sept. 27,
1982, by the assignee, Eaton Corp.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claim 3 of said patent.
4,238,896.— H^/VZ/am E. Lanz, Joliet and Visvaldis A.
Stepe. Willow Springs, 111. CUTTING EDGE AS-
SEMBLY FOR A LOADER BUCKET. Patent dat-
ed Dec. 16, 1980. Disclaimer filed Feb. 22, 1983, by
the assignee, Caterpillar Tractor Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
4,314,612. — David L. Thomas and Donald J. Hackman,
Columbus, Ohio. HYDRAULIC LINEAR IMPACT
TOOL. Patent dated Feb. 9, 1982. Disclaimer filed
Jan. 31, 1983, by the assignee, Battelle Development
Corp.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
1029 CXJ— 23
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
The libraries listed herein, designated as patent deposi- table following, the collections are organized in patent
tory libraries, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and number sequence.
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail-
of these collections vanes from library to library, rang- able in microfilm, in bound volumes of paper copies, or
ing from patents of only recent months or years in some in some combination of both. Facilities for making paper
libraries to all or most of the patents issued since 1870, copies from either microfilm in reader-printers or from
or earlier, in other libraries. the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are eeneral-
These patent collections are open to public use and ly provided for a fee.
each of the patent depository libraries, in addition, offers Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections
the publications of the patent classification system (e.g. among the patent depository libraries and in their hours
The Manual of Classification, Index to the U.S. Patent of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the
Classification. Classification Definitions, etc.) and pro- patents at a particular library is advised to contact that
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the library, in advance, about its collection and hours so as
public in gaining effective access to information con- to avert possible inconvenience,
tained in patents. With one exception, as noted in the
^^°^^ Name of Library Telephone Contact
Alabama Birmingham Public Library (205) 254-2555
Arizona Tempe: Science Library, Arizona State University (602) 965-7607
California Los Angeles Public Library (213) 626-7555 Ext. 273
Sacramento: California State Library (916) 322-4572
Sunnyvale; Patent Information Clearinghouse* (408) 738-5580
Colorado Denver Public Library (303) 571-2122
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware (302) 738-2238
Georgia Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of
,,,. . ^J.^^^^°}PH (404) 894-4508
Uhnois Chicago Public Library (312) 269-2865
Louisiana Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State
. . ^ „ University (504) 388-2570
Massachusetts Boston Public Library (617) 536-5400 Ext. 265
Michigan Detroit Public Library (313) 833-1450
Minnesota Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center (612) 372-6552
Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library (816) 363-4600
St. Louis Public Library (314) 241-2288 Ext. 214.
Nebraska Lincoln: University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Engineering Library . . (402) 472-341 1
New Hampshire Durham: University of New Hampshire Library (603) 862-1777
New Jersey Newark Public Library (201) 733-7814
New York Albany: New York State Library (518) 474-5125
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (716) 856-7525 Ext 267
New York Public Library (The Research Libraries) (212) 930-0850
North Carolina Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library, N.C. State University (919) 737-3280
Ohio Cincinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of (513) 369-6936
Cleveland Public Library (216) 623-2870
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries (614) 422-6286
_, , , Toledo/Lucas County Public Library (419) 255-7055 Ext. 212
Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library (405) 624-6546
Pennsylvania Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library (215) 448-1321**
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh (412) 622-3138
University Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University . . (814) 865-4861
Rhode Island Providence Public Library (401) 521-7722 Ext. 226
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina (803) 792-2372
Tennessee Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
^Center (901) 528-2957
lexas Dallas Public Library (214) 749-4176
Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University (713) 527-8101 Ext. 2587
Washington Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington (206) 543-0740
Wisconsin Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, University of
Wisconsin (608) 262-6845
Milwaukee Public Library (414) 278-3043
All of the above-listed libraries, except the Cleveland Public Library, offer CASSIS (Classification And Search
Support Information System), which provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data.
'Collection organized by subject matter.
••Call only between the hours of l(MX) a.m. and 5:00 p.m.
1029 OG— 24
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF February 19, 1983
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New Case
Awaiting
Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY. GROUP IIO-D. E TALBERT, Director 1-16-81
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Meulloid Chemistry; Meullurgy; Meul-
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP llO-C. E. VAN HORN, Director 1 1-20-81
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics;
Steroids; Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140— J. O. THOMAS, JR , Director 7-14-81
Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g.. Coating; Molding;
Ink; Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treating Compositions.
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160— S. N. ZAHARNA, Director 1-20-82
Coating: Processes, Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography.
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170-
R. F. WHITE, Director 11-12-81
Fertilizers; Foods; Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and SUrch; Paper Making; Glass Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid, Gas,
and Solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210-S W ENGLE, Director 4-7-81
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION. GROUP 220— KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 3-12-81
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications, Op-
tics; Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special, Fuel. Explosive and Thermic Composi-
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries. _ ..,,„„
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE, AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY, Director 11-24-80
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Data Processing, CompuUtion and Conversion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING, AND MEASURING, GROUP 240—
G. M. FORLENZA. Director '•<'7-8l
RecepUcles; Bearings; Joint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
Food Treating; AgiUting; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projectors;
Web Feeding; Winding and Reeling; Cable Hoists; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling;
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Ruid Motors.
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES. GROUP 250— S. S. MATTHEWS. Director 8-25-80
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring. , , , » ,
DESIGN, GROUP 290— KENNETH L. CAGE, Director I'S-Sl
Industrial Arts; Household, Personal and Fine Arts.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310— B. R. GRAY, Director 5-18-81
Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Fluid Sprin-
kling; Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; Boats;
Ships; Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment.
MATERIAL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURING, TOOLS, GROUP 320-M M. NEWMAN, Director 5-18-81
Manufacturing Processes, Assembling, Combined Machines, Special Article Making; Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
and Wire Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and
Tool Holders, Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Printed Matter.
AMUSEMENT, HUSBANDRY, PERSONAL TREATMENT, INFORMATION, GROUP 330-
R E AEGERTER Director 2-13-80
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Pnnting; Typewnters; Infor-
mation Dissemination. _ . , , , „«
HEAT, POWER, AND FLUID ENGINEERING, GROUP 340— D. J. STOCKING. Director 1117-80
Power Plante; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Geanng;
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS, TEXTILES, MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350-
A. L. SMITH. Director .•••■• U' ;. ' •.•■ ' w • ' ',
Building Structures; Racks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplings; Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineenng; Earth Dnlling; Mining;
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches.
Expiration of patents: The patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during February 1983, except those which
may have expired earlier due to shortened terms under the provisions of Public Law 690, 79th Congress, approved August 8. 1946
(60 Stat. 940) and Public Uw 619, 83rd Congress, approved August 23. 1954 (68 Stat. 764). or which may have had their terms cur-
tailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the range of numof" c $1*^ <,
low, may have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 151.
Pntrau Numbers 3,231,896 to 3,237,200, inclusive
Plant Patents '.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'. Numbers 2,591 to 2,605 inclusive
1029 00—25
REEXAMINATIONS
APRIL 19, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ J appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexamination specification; matter printed
in italics indicates additions made by reexamination.
Bl, 3,953,309 (74th)
POLYMERIZATION COMPOSITIONS AND PROC-
ESSES HAVING POLYMERIC BINDING AGENTS
Michael N. Gilano, Fullerton, Calif.; Richard E. Beaupre,
West Barrington, R.I.; Melvin A. Lipson, Fullerton,
Calif., assignors to Dynachem Corporation, Santa Fe
Springs, Calif.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,018, Jul. 2, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,953,309, issued
Apr. 27, 1976, Ser. No. 529,062, Dec. 3, 1974.
DiYision of Ser. No. 315,153, Dec. 14, 1972, Pat. No.
3,887,450, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 112,797,
Feb. 4, 1971, abandoned.
U.S. a. 204/159.16 Int. CI.' C08F 2/48. 2/46
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1, 7-10, 17, 21, 25, 30, 31, 34 and 37 are deter-
mined to be patentable as amended.
Claims 2-6, 11-15, 16, 18-20, 22-24, 26-29, 32, 33, 35,
36 and 38 dependent on amended claims, are determined
to be patentable.
New claims, 39-42 are added and determined to be
patentable.
1. A process for making a photoresist which comprises:
preparing a photopolymerizable layer characterized by
being used as a photoresist in the form of a storable sheet or roll
on a peelable film support [comprising] consisting essentiallx
of:
A. from 10 to 60 parts by weight of an addition polym-
erizable material consisting essentially of and being
solely one or more non-gaseous compounds, contain-
ing at least two terminal ethylenic groups, having a
boiling point above 100°C. and being selected from
the group consisting of an unsaturated ester of a
polyol, an unsaturated amide, and a vinyl ester;
B. from 0.001 to 10 parts by weight of a photoinitiated
free-radical generating addition polymerizing initiat-
ing system;
C. from 0.001 to 5 parts by weight of a thermal-
addition polymerization inhibitor; and
D. from 40 to 90 parts by weight of a preformed
macromolecular polymeric binding agent which is a
polymer of:
a first monomeric material which contains one or more
non-acidic vinyl compounds selected from the group
having the general formula:
H.
wherein R is hydrogen, and alkyl group having from 1
to 6 carbon atoms or a halo group; and a second
monomeric material which consists essentially of one
or more alphai,hetai-ethylenically unsaturated [car-
boxy 1 J carboxylic acid- or anhydride-containing mon-
omers having from 3 to 15 carbon atoms;
wherein the ratio of the first monomeric material to the sec-
ond monomeric material is sufficient to render substantially
all of the binding agent soluble in a dilute substantially wholly
aqueous solution containing [from 00.1 to 10 jjercent of a
water-soluble base] ; 2% sodium carbonate exposing a p>ortion
of said photopolymerizable layer to actinic light; and wash-
ing said layer with a dilute substantially wholly aqueous al-
kaline solution to dissolve the unexposed portion of the
photopolymerizable layer wherein the exposed portion of the
layer is unaffected by sequential contact first with said dilute
aqueous solution containing 2'7c sodium carbonate and sub-
sequently followed by a 45° Baume solution of ferric chloride and
further wherein the photopolymerized portion of the composition
is removable from a substrate by a heated solution containing 39c
sodium hydroxide.
Bl 3,902,606 (75th)
HANDLING APPARATUS
Ame Ingbert Ronbeck, Olofstrom, Sweden, assignor to AB
Volvo, Goteborg, Sweden
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,262, Sep. 28, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,902,606, issued
Sep. 2, 1975, Ser. No. 498,703, Aug. 19, 1974.
Claims priority, application Sweden, Aug. 23, 1973,
731/487
U.S. a. 414/733 Int. CI.' B23Q 7/04
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-8 is confirmed.
1. A handling apparatus for reciprocatingly moving a
working member (29) in a substantially rectilinear, rela-
tively long first movement path (BC) and in a substantial-
ly rectilinear, relatively short second movement path
(CD) which is connected to and is normal to said first
movement path, said apparatus being particularly intend-
ed as a feed apparatus arranged to effect a horizontal
feed movement and a vertical raising and lowering move-
ment, wherein said working member (29) is mounted on a
first end (E) of a rod (3), the other end (F) of which is
guided by guide means (13) mounted on a support to
follow a predetermined movement path (KJHJL) when
said rod is driven by a oscillatingly pivotable crank arm
(1) which is pivotally connected at one end to said rod
centrally between the ends thereof, the other end of the
crank arm being mounted on the support and character-
ized in that the geometric extension of the pivot axis (O)
of the crank arm (1) intersects the path (BC) travelled by
said first end (E) of said rod (3) during the movement of
said end along said first movement path, the length (a) of
1029 OG— 27
1029 OG— 28
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
said arm (1) being half the length (2a) of the rod (3); in
that the path travelled by said other (F) end of said rod
(3) during a portion of the movement of said first end (E)
along said first movement path (BC) is a straight line
(JFH) which extends normal to the movement path (BC)
of said first rod end (E) and the extension of which
intersects the axis (O) of the crank arm (1): and in that
the path (JL) travelled by said other end (F) of said rod
(3) during movement of said first rod end (E) along said
second movement path (CD) is substantially circle-arcu-
ate in shape, the centre of which circle lies on said
extension of said straight line (JH).
31 4,271,149 (76th;
GERMICIDAL IODINE COMPOSITIONS WITH
ENHANCED IODINE STABILITY
Murray W. Winicov, Woodside, N.Y.; Michael Oberlander,
Kansas City, Mo., assignors to West Agro-Chemical, Inc.,
Westwood, Kans.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,179, Mar. 26, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,271,149, issued
Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 77,787, Sep. 21, 1979.
U.S. a. 424/150 Int. Cl.^ AOIN 59/12; A61K 31/74
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-10 is confirmed.
1. A germicidal iodine composition comprising an
aqueous solution of elemental iodine in a germicidally
effective amount not exceeding about 1.0% and at least
one organic substance which slowly reacts with iodine
selected from the group consisting of iodine complexing
polymers, surface active agents, alcohols, polyols and
water soluble solvents, said organic substance constitut-
ing 1 to 50% by weight of said composition, wherein
iodine loss during extended storage due to such reaction
is controlled by providing in said composition balanced
sources of iodide ion in the range of about 0.025% to
0.5% and iodate ion in the range of about 0.005% to
0.2% while maintaining a pH within the range of pH 5-7.
Patent and Trademark Office Rules
The Office is publishing below a consolidation of the patent
rules presently in effect and a revised index to assist patent
practitioners.
Date
Gerald J. Mossinghoff
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks
1029 OG 29
CHAPTER l-PATENT AND TRADEMARK
OFFICE,
DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
Editorial Note: Chapter I— Patent and Trademark Office, Department of Commerce,
Subchapter A— General, contains patent and trademark regulations. Subchapter A has been
restructured to allow parts pertaining to patent regulations and trademark regulations to be
grouped separately.
SUBCHAPTER A— GENERAL
Part
1
3
5
PA TENTS
Rules of practice in patent cases
Forms for patent cases [Removed]
Secrecy of certain inventions and licenses to file
applications in foreign countries
Register of Government interests in patents
Index I — Rules relating to patents
SUBCHAPTER A— GENERAL
*Rule changed since July 1, 1982
PATENTS
PART 1— RULES OF PRACTICE IN
PATENT CASES
Subpart A— General Provisions
General Information and
Correspondence
Sec.
1.1 All communications to be addressed to
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks.
1.2 Business to be transacted in writing.
1.3 Business to be conducted with decorum
and courtesy.
• 1 .4 Nature of correspondence.
1.5 Identification of application, patent or
registration.
•1.6 Receipt of letters and papers.
*1.7 Times for taking action: Expiration on
Saturday, Sunday or federal holiday.
♦1.8 Certificate of mailing.
♦1.9 Definitions.
♦1.10 Filing of papers and fees by "Express
Mail" with certificate.
Records and Files of the
Patent and
Trademark Office
♦1.11 Files open to the public.
♦1.12 Assignment records open to public in-
spection.
1.13 Copies and certified copies.
♦1.14 Patent applications preserved m secre-
cy.
1.15 Requests for identifiable records.
Fees and Payment of Money
♦1.16 National application filing fees.
♦1.17 Patent application processing fees.
♦1.18 Patent issue fees.
♦1.19 Document supply fees.
♦1.20 Post-issuance fees.
♦1.21 Miscellaneous fees and charges.
♦1.22 Fees payable in advance.
♦1.23 Method of payment.
♦1.24 Coupons.
♦1.25 Deposit accounts.
♦1.26 Refunds.
♦1.27 Statement of status as small entity.
♦1.28 Effect on fees of failure to establish sta-
tus, or change status, as a small entity.
Subpart B— National Processing
Provisions
Prosecution of Application and
Appointment of Attorney or Agent
1.31 Applicants may be represented by an at-
torney or agent.
1.32 Prosecution by assignee.
1.33 Correspondence respecting patent appli-
cations, reexamination proceedings, and
other proceedings.
1029 OG 31
1029 OG 32
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
1.34 Recognition for representation.
1.36 Revocation of power of attorney or au-
thorization; withdrawal of attorney or
agent.
Who May Apply for a Patent
•1.41
*1.42
Applicant for patent.
When the inventor is dead.
•1.43 When the inventor is insane or legally
incapacitated.
1 .44 Proof of authority.
•1.45 Joint inventors.
• 1 .46 Assigned inventions and patents.
•1.47 Filing when an inventor refuses to sign
or cannot be reached.
•1.48
Correction of inventorship.
The Application
•1.51 General requisites of an application.
•1.52 Language, paper, writing, margins.
•1.53 Serial number, filing date, and comple-
tion of application.
•1.54 Parts of application to be filed together;
filing receipt.
•1.55 Claim for foreign priority.
•1.56 Duty of disclosure; fraud; striking or re-
jection of applications.
♦1.57 [Removed]
1.58 Chemical and mathematical formulas
and tables.
•1.59 Papers of application with filing date
not to be returned.
•1.60 Continuation or divisional application
for invention disclosed in a prior applica-
tion.
1.61 Filing of applications in the United
States of America at a Designated Office.
•1.62 File wrapper continuing procedure.
Models, Exhibits, Specimens
1.91 Models not generally required as part of
application or patent.
1 .92 Model or exhibit may be required.
1.93 Specimens.
1 .94 Return of models, exhibits or specimens.
1.95 Copies of exhibits.
1.96 Submission of computer program list-
ings.
Information Disclosure
Statement
•1.97 Filing of information disclosure state-
ment.
•1.98 Content of information disclosure
statement.
•1.99 Updating of information disclosure
statement.
Examination of Applications
•1.101
•1.102
•1.103
•1.104
tion
1.105
1.106
1.107
1.108
1.109
Order of examination.
Advancement of examination.
Suspension of action.
Nature of examination; examiner's ac-
Completeness of examiner's action.
Rejection of claims.
Citation of references.
Abandoned applications not cited.
Reasons for allowance.
Action by Applicant and
Further Consideration
1.111 Reply by applicant or patent owner.
1.112 Reconsideration.
1.113 Final rejection or action.
Oath or Declaration
•1.63
•1.64
•1.65
•1.66
•1.67
1.68
•1.69
Oath or declaration.
Person making oath or declaration.
[Removed]
Officers authorized to administer oaths.
Supplemental oath or declaration.
Declaration in lieu of oath.
Foreign language oaths and declara-
tions.
•1.70 Oath or declaration under 35 U.S.C.
371(c)(4).
Specification
1.71 Detailed description and specification
of the invention.
1.72 Title and abstract.
Summary of the invention.
Reference to drawings.
Claim(s).
Arrangement of application elements.
Cross-references to other applications.
Reservation clauses not permitted.
1.73
1.74
•1.75
•1.77
1.78
1.79
The Drawings
1.81 Drawings required.
1.83 Content of drawing.
1.84 Standards for drawings.
•1.85 Informal drawings.
•1.86 [Removed]
1.88 Use of old drawings.
Amendments
1.115 Amendment.
1.116 Amendments after final action.
1.117 Amendment and revision required.
•1.118 Amendment of disclosure.
1.119 Amendment of claims.
1.121 Manner of making amendments.
1.122 Entry and consideration of amend-
ments.
•1.123 Amendments to the drawing.
Amendment of amendments.
Substitute specification.
Numbering of claims.
Petition from refusal to admit amend-
1.124
•1.125
1.126
1.127
ment.
Affidavits Overcoming
Rejections
•1.131 Affidavit or declaration of prior inven-
tion to overcome cited patent or pub-
lication.
♦1.132 Affidavits or declarations traversing
grounds of rejection.
Interviews
1.133 Interviews.
Time for Response by Applicant;
Abandonment of Application
•1.134
action.
Time period for response to an Office
)n.
April 19, 1983
US. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 33
failure to respond
•1.135 Abandonment for
within time period.
•1.136 Filing of timely responses with peti-
tion and fee for extension of time and ex-
tensions of time for cause.
•1.137 Revival of abandoned application.
•1.138 Express abandonment.
1.139 Waiver of patent rights.
Joinder of Inventions in One
APPLICATION; Restriction
1.141 Different inventions in one application.
1.142 Requirement for restriction.
1.143 Reconsideration of requirement.
1.144 Petition from requirement for restric-
tion.
1.145 Subsequent presentation of claims for
different invention.
1.146 Election of species.
Interferences: Definition,
Preparation, Declaration
1.201 Definition; when declared.
1.202 Preparation for interference between
applications; preliminary inquiry of junior
applicant.
1.203 Preparation for interference between
applications; suggestion of claims for inter-
ference.
1.204 Interference with a patent; affidavit or
declaration by junior applicant.
1.205 Interference with a patent; copying
claims from patent.
1.206 Interference with a patent; claims im-
properly copied.
1.207 Preparation of interference papers and
declaration of interference.
1.208 Conflicting parties having same attor-
ney.
1.211 Jurisdiction of interference.
1.212 Suspension of ex parte prosecution.
Design Patents
1.151 Rules applicable.
1.152 Drawing.
•1.153 Title, description and claim, oath or
declaration.
• 1 . 1 54 Arrangement of specification.
•1.155 Issue and term of design patents.
Plant Patents
1.161
Rules applicable.
•1.162
Applicant, oath or declaration
•1.163
Specification.
1.164
Claim.
•1.165
Drawings.
1.166
Specimens.
1.167
Examination.
•1.171
•1.172
1.173
•1.174
•1.175
1.176
•1.177
1.178
1.179
•1.181
•1.182
for.
•1.183
1.184
Reissues
Application for reissue.
Applicants, assignees.
Specification.
Drawings.
Reissue oath or declaration.
Examination of reissue.
Reissue in divisions.
Original patent.
Notice of reissue application.
Petitions and Action by the
Commissioner
Petition to the Commissioner.
Questions not specifically provided
Suspension of rules.
Reconsideration of
cases decided by
former Commissioners.
•1.191
•1.192
1.193
•1.194
1.195
1.196
•1.197
1.198
Appeal to the Board of
Appeals
Appeal to Board of Appeals.
Appellant's brief.
Examiner's answer.
Oral hearing.
Affidavits or declarations after appeal.
Decision by the Board of Appeals.
Action following decision.
Reopening after decision.
Interferences: Preliminary
Statement
1.215 Preliminary statement required.
1.216 Contents of the preliminary statement.
1.217 Contents of the preliminary statement;
invention made abroad.
1.218 Time for filing preliminary statement.
1.219 Statements sealed before filing.
1.222 Correction of statement on motion.
1 . 223 Effect of statement .
1.224 Reliance on prior application.
1.225 Failure of junior party to file statements
or to overcome filing date of senior party.
1 .226 Access to applications.
1.227 Access to preliminary statements.
1.228 Summary judgment.
Interferences: Motion Period,
dissolution. Reformation
•1.231 Motions before the primary examiner.
1.237 Dissolution at the request of examiner.
1.238 Addition of new party by examiner.
Interferences: Miscellaneous
Provisions
1.242 Prosecution by assignee.
1.243 Motions before the Board of Patent
Interferences.
1.244 Petition to the Commissioner from de-
cisions on motions.
•1.245 Extension of time.
Late papers.
Service of papers.
Service of papers; manner of service;
•1.246
J. 247
1.248
proof of service.
Interferences: Trial
1.251 Assignment of times for discovery and
taking testimony.
1.252 Failure of junior party to take testimo-
ny.
•1.253 Copies of the testimony.
1.254 Briefs at final hearing.
1.255 Request for findings of fact and con-
clusions of law.
1.256 Final hearing.
1.257 Burden of proof.
1.258 Matters considered in determining
priority.
1.259 Recommendation by Board of Patent
Interferences.
1029 OG 34
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
INTERFERENCES: TERMINATION
1.261
1.262
•1.263
1.264
1.265
Termination of interference.
Disclaimer, concession, abandonment.
Statutory disclaimer by patentee.
Reissue filed by patentee.
Status of claims of defeated applicant
after interference.
1.266 Action after interference.
1.267 Second interference.
* 1.268 Filing of interference settlement agree-
ments.
Testimony in Interferences and
Other Contested Cases
1.271 Evidence must comply with rules.
1.272 Manner of taking testimony of
witnesses.
1 .273 Notice of examination of witnesses.
1.274 Persons before whom depositions may
be taken.
1.275 Examination of witnesses.
Certification and filing by officer.
Form of deposition.
Depositions must be filed.
Inspection of testimony.
Additional time for taking testimony.
Official records and printed publica-
tions.
1.283 Testimony taken in another interference
or action.
1.284 Testimony taken in foreign countries.
1.285 Effect of errors and irregularities in de-
positions.
1.286 Objections to admissibility.
1.287 Discovery.
1.288 Use of discovery.
1.276
1.277
1.278
1.279
1.281
1.282
Correction of Errors in
Patent
1.322 Certificate of correction of Office mis-
take.
1.323 Certificate of correction of applicant's
mistake.
* 1.324 Correction of inventorship in patent.
* 1.325 Other mistakes not corrected.
Assignments and Recording
•1.331
•1.332
1.333
•1.334
•1.335
•1.341
1.342
1.343
1.344
1.345
1.346
•1.347
1.348
Recording of assignments.
Receipt and recording.
Conditional assignments.
Issue of patent to assignee.
Filing of notice of arbitration awards.
Recognition of Attorneys
AND Agents
Registration of attorneys and agents.
Limited recognition.
Persons not registered or recognized.
Professional conduct.
Advertising.
Signature and certificate of attorney.
Removing names from registers.
Suspension or disbarment proceedings.
Amendment of Rules
1.351 Amendments to rules will be published.
1.352 Publication of notice of proposed
amendments.
Protests and Public Use
Proceedings
1.291 Protests by the public against pending
applications.
•1.292 Public use proceedings.
Review of Patent and
Trademark
Office Decisions by Court
•1.301 Appeal to U.S. Court of Appeals for
the Federal Circuit.
•1.302 Notice and reasons of appeal.
•1.303 Civil action under 35 U.S.C. 145, 146,
306.
•1.304 Time for appeal or civil action.
Allowance and Issue of Patent
•1.311
•1.312
•1.313
•1.314
1.315
•1.316
Notice of allowance.
Amendments after allowance.
Withdrawal from issue.
Issuance of patent.
Delivery of patent.
Application abandoned for failure to
pay issue fee.
•1.317 Lapsed patents; delayed payment of
balance of issue fee.
1.318 Notification of national publication of
a patent based on an international applica-
tion.
Disclaimer
•1.321 Statutory disclaimer.
Subpart C— International Processing
Provisions
General Information
1.401 Definitions of terms under the Patent
Cooperation Treaty.
1.412 The United States Receiving Office.
1.413 The United States International Search-
ing Authority.
1.414 The United States Designated Office.
1.415 The International Bureau.
Who May File an International
Application
1.421 Applicant for international application.
1.422 When the inventor is dead.
1.423 When the inventor is insane or legally
incapacitated.
1.424 Joint inventors.
1.425 Filing by other than inventor.
The International Application
1.431 International application require-
ments.
1.432 Designation of States and payment of
designation fees.
1.433 Physical requirements of international
application.
1.434 The request.
1.435 The description.
1.436 The claims.
1 .437 The drawings.
1.438 The abstract.
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 35
Fees
•1.445 International application filing and
processing fees.
•1.446 Refund of international application fil-
ing and processing fees.
Priority
•1.451 The priority claim and priority docu-
ment in an international application.
Representation
1.455 Representation in international applica-
tions.
Subpart D— Reexamination of Patents
Citation of Prior Art
1.501 Citation of prior art in patent files.
Request for Reexamination
•1.510 Request for reexamination.
1.515 Determination of the request for
reexamination.
1.520 Reexamination at the initiative of the
Commissioner.
Transmittal of Record Copy
1.461 Procedures for transmittal of record
copy to the International Bureau.
Timing
1.465 Timing of application processing based
on the priority date.
1.468 Delays in meeting time limits.
Amendments
1.471 Corrections and amendments during in-
ternational processing.
1.475 Changes in person, name, or address of
applicants and inventors.
Unity of Invention
1.481 Determination of unity of invention be-
fore the International Searching Authority.
1.482 Protest to lack of unity of invention.
Reexamination
1.525 Order to reexamine.
1.530 Statement and amendment by patent
owner.
1.535 Reply by requester.
1.540 Consideration of responses.
1.550 Conduct of reexamination proceedings.
1.552 Scope of reexamination in reexam-
ination proceedings.
1.555 Duty of disclosure in reexamination
proceedings.
1.560 Interviews in reexamination proceed-
ings.
1.565 Concurrent office proceedings.
Certificate
1.570 Issuance of reexamination certificate af-
ter reexamination proceedings.
Authority: 35 U.S.C. 6, unless otherwise
noted.
1029 OG 36
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
Subpart A— General Provisions
General Information and
Correspondence
§ 1.1 All communications to be addressed
to Commissioner of Patents and Trade-
marks.
(a) All letters and other communica-
tions intended for the Patent and Trade-
mark Office must be addressed to
"Commissioner of Patents and Trade-
marks," Washington, D.C 20231. When
appropriate, a letter should also be
marked for the attention of a particular
officer or individual.
(b) Letters and other communications
relating to international applications dur-
ing the international stage and prior to
the assignment of a national serial number
should be additionally marked "Box
PCT."
(c) Requests for reexamination should
be additionally marked "Box Reexam."
Note: Sections 1.1 to 1.26 are applicable to
trademark cases as well as to national and in-
ternational patent cases except for provisions
specifically directed to patent cases. See § 1.9
for definitions of "'national application" and
"international application."
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[46 FR 29181, May 29, 1981]
§ 1.2 Business to be transacted in writing.
All business with the Patent and Trade-
mark Office should be transacted in writ-
ing. The personal attendance of applicants
or their attorneys or agents at the Patent
and Trademark Office is unnecessary. The
action of the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice will be based exclusively on the writ-
ten record in the Office. No attention will
be paid to any alleged oral promise, stipu-
lation, or understanding in relation to
which there is disagreement or doubt.
§ 1.3 Business to be conducted with deco-
rum and courtesy.
Applicants and their attorneys or agents
are required to conduct their business
with the Patent and Trademark Office
with decorum and courtesy. Papers pres-
ented in violation of this requirement will
be submitted to the Commissioner and
will be returned by his direct order. Com-
plaints against examiners and other em-
ployees must be made in communications
separate from other papers.
§ 1.4 Nature of correspondence.
(a) Correspondence with the Patent and
Trademark Office comprises: (1) corre-
spondence relating to services and facili-
ties of the Office, such as general inqui-
ries, requests for publications supplied by
the Office, orders for printed copies of
patents or trademark registrations, orders
for copies of records, transmission of as-
signments for recording, and the like, and
(2) correspondence in and relating to a
particular application or other proceeding
in the Office. See particularly the rules re-
lating to the filing, processing, or other
proceedings of national applications in
Subpart B, §§ 1.31 to 1.352; of interna-
tional applications in Subpart C, §§ 1,401
to 1.482; of reexamination of patents in
Subpart D, §§ 1.501 to 1.570; and of
trademark applications, §§2.11 to 2.189.
(b) Since each application file should be
complete in itself, a separate copy of ev-
ery paper to be filed in an application
should be furnished for each application
to which the paper pertains, even though
the contents of the papers filed in two or
more applications may be identical.
(c) Since different matters may be con-
sidered by different branches or sections
of the Patent and Trademark Office, each
distinct subject, inquiry or order should
be contained in a separate letter to avoid
confusion and delay in answering letters
dealing with different subjects.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, as amended at 43
FR 20461, May 11, 1978; 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20,
1983; effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.5 Identification of application, patent
or registration.
(a) When a letter concerns an applica-
tion for patent, it should state the name of
the applicant, the title of the invention,
the serial number or international applica-
tion number of the application, the date of
filing the same, and, if known, the group
art unit and name of the examiner to
which it has been assigned (see § 1.55).
(b) When the letter concerns a patent,
it should state the number and date of is-
sue of the patent, the name of the paten-
tee, and the title of the invention.
(c) A letter relating to a trademark
application should identify it as such and
by the name of the applicant and the seri-
al number and filing date of the applica-
tion. A letter relating to a registered
trademark should identify it by the name
of the registrant and by the number and
date of the certificate.
(d) A letter relating to a reexamination
proceeding should identify it as such by
the number of the patent undergoing
reexamination, the reexamination request
control number assigned to such proceed-
ing and, if known, the group art unit and
name of the examiner to which it has
been assigned.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685; 35 U.S.C. 6)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, as amended at 34
FR 18857, Nov. 26, 1969; 43 FR 20461, May
11, 1978; 46 FR 29181, May 29, 1981]
§ 1.6 Receipt of letters and papers.
(a) Letters and other papers received in
the Patent and Trademark Office are
stamped with the date of receipt. No pa-
pers are received in the Patent and Trade-
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 37
mark Office on Saturdays, Sundays or
federal holidays within the District of Co-
lumbia.
(b) Mail placed in the Patent and
Trademark Office pouch up to midnight
on weekdays, excepting Saturdays and
federal holidays, by the post office at
Washington, D.C,, serving the Patent and
Trademark Office, is considered as having
been received in the Patent and Trade-
mark Office on the day it was so placed
in the pouch.
(c) In addition to being mailed or deliv-
ered by hand during office hours, letters
and other papers may be deposited up to
midnight in a box provided at the guard's
desk at the lobby of building 3 of the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office at Crystal Pla-
za, Arlington, Virginia and at the main
entrance (14th Street) of the Department
of Commerce Building, Washington, D.C,
on weekdays except Saturdays and federal
holidays, and all papers deposited therein
are considered as received in the Patent
and Trademark Office on the day of de-
posit.
(d) If interruptions or emergencies in
the United States Postal Service which
have been so designated by the Commis-
sioner occur, the Patent and Trademark
Office will consider as filed on a particu-
lar date in the Office any paper or fee
which is (1) promptly filed after the end-
ing of the designated interruption or
emergency and (2) accompanied by a
statement indicating that such paper or
fee would have been filed on that particu-
lar date if it were not for the designated
interruption or emergency in the United
States Postal Service. Such statement
must be a verified statement if made by a
person not registered to practice before
the Patent and Trademark Office.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, as amended at 34
FR 18857, Nov. 26, 1969; 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20,
1983; effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.7 Times for taking action: Expiration
on Saturday, Sunday or federal holi-
day.
Whenever periods of time are specified
in this part in days, calendar days are in-
tended. When the day, or the last day
fixed by statute or by or under this part
for taking any action or paying any fee in
the Patent and Trademark Office falls on
Saturday, Sunday, or on a federal holiday
within the District of Columbia, the ac-
tion may be taken, or the fee paid, on the
next succeeding day which is not a Satur-
day, Sunday, or a federal holiday. See §
1.304 for time for appeal or for commenc-
ing civil action.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983; effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.8 Certificate of mailing.
(a) Except in the cases enumerated be-
low, papers and fees required to be filed
in the Patent and Trademark Office with-
in a set period of time will be considered
as being timely filed if: (1) they are ad-
dressed to the Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks, Washington, D.C. 20231,
and deposited with the U.S. Postal Ser-
vice with sufficient postage as first class
mail prior to expiration of the set period,
and (2) they also include a certificate for
each paper or fee stating the date of de-
posit. The person signing the certificate
should have reasonable basis to expect
that the correspondence would be mailed
on or before the date indicated. The actu-
al date of receipt of the paper or fee will
be used for all other purposes. This pro-
cedure does not apply to the following:
(i) The filing of a national patent appli-
cation specification and drawing or other
papers for the purpose of obtaining an ap-
plication filing date;
(ii) The filing of trademark applications;
(ii') The filing of agreements between
parties to an interference under 35 U.S.C
135(c);
(iv) The filing of an affidavit showing
that a mark is still in use or containing an
excuse for nonuse under section 8 (a) or
(b) or section 12(c) of the Trademark
Act, 15 U.S.C. 1058(a), 1058(b), 1062(c);
(v) The filing of an application for re-
newal of a mark registration under section
9 of the Trademark Act, 15 U.S.C. 1059;
(vi) The filing of a petition lo cancel a
registration of a mark under section 14 (a)
or (b) of the Trademark Act, 15 U.S.C.
1064(a), 1064(b);
(vii) The filing of an affidavit under
section 15, subsection (3) of the Trade-
mark Act, 15 U.S.C. 1065;
(viii) The filing of a notice of election
to proceed by civil action in an inter par-
tes proceeding under 35 U.S.C. 141 or
section 21(a)(1) of the Trademark Act, 15
U.S.C. 1071(a)(1), in response to another
party's appeal to the Court of Appeals for
the Federal Circuit.
(ix) The filing of a notice and reasons
of appeal under 35 U.S.C. 142 or a notice
of appeal under section 21(a)(2) of the
Trademark Act, 15 U.S.C. 1071(a)(2);
(x) The filing of a statement under 42
U.S.C. 2182 or 42 U.S.C. 2457(c); and
(xi) The filing of international applica-
tions for patent and papers relating there-
to.
(b) In the event that correspondence or
fees are timely filed in accordance with
paragraph (a) of this section, but not re-
ceived in the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice, and the application is held to be
abandoned or the proceeding dismissed,
terminated, or decided with prejudice, the
correspondence or fee will be considered
timely if the party who forwarded such
correspondence or fee (1) informs the Of-
fice of the previous mailing of the corre-
spondence or fee promptly after becom-
ing aware of the Office action, (2)
supplies an additional copy of the previ-
ously mailed correspondence or fee and
certificate, and (3) includes a declaration
under § 1.68 or § 2.20 which attests on a
1029 CXj 38
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
personal knowledge basis or to the satis-
faction of the Commissioner to the previ-
ous timely mailing.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[41 FR 43721, Oct. 4. 1976, as amended at 43
FR 20461, May 11, 1978; 47 FR 47380, Oct.
26, 1982, paragraphs (aX2), and (aX2Kviii) re-
vised effective Oct. 26, 1982; 48 FR 2696, Jan.
20, 1983, paragraph (a)(i) revised effective Feb.
27, 1983]
§ 1.9 Definitions.
(a) A national application as used in
this chapter means a U.S. national appli-
cation for patent which was either filed in
the Office under 35 U.S.C. Ill or which
resulted from an international application
after compliance with 35 U.S.C. 371.
(b) An international application as used
in this chapter means an international ap-
plication for patent filed under the Patent
Cooperation Treaty prior to entering na-
tional processing at the Designated Office
stage.
(c) An independent inventor as used in
this chapter means any inventor who (1)
has not assigned, granted, conveyed, or li-
censed, and (2) is under no obligation un-
der contract or law to assign, grant,
convey, or license, any rights in the in-
vention to any person who could not like-
wise be classified as an independent
inventor if that person had made the in-
vention, or to any concern which would
not qualify as a small business concern or
a nonprofit organization under this sec-
tion.
(d) A small business concern as used in
this chapter means any business concern
as defined by the Small Business Adminis-
tration in 13 CFR 121.3-18, published on
September 30, 1982 at 47 FR 43273. For
the convenience of the users of these reg-
ulations, that definition states:
§ 121.3-18 Definition of small business
for paying reduced patent fees under Title
35. U.S. Code
(a) Pursuant to Pub. L. 97-247, a small
business concern for purposes of paying
reduced fees under 35 U.S. Code 41 (a)
and (b) to the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice means any business concern (1)
whose number of employees, including
those of its affiliates, does not exceed 500
persons and (2) which has not assigned,
granted, conveyed, or licensed, and is un-
der no obligation under contract or law
to assign, grant, convey or license, any
rights in the invention to any person who
could not be classified as an independent
inventor if that person had made the in-
vention, or to any concern which would
not qualify as a small business concern or
a nonprofit organization under this sec-
tion. For the purpose of this section con-
cerns are affiliates of each other when
either, directly or indirectly, one concern
controls or has the power to control the
other, or a third party or parties controls
or has the power to control both. The
number of employees of the business con-
cern is the average over the fiscal year of
the persons employed during each of the
pay periods of the fiscal year. Employees
are those persons employed on a full-time,
part-time or temporary basis during the
previous fiscal year of the concern.
(b) If the Patent and Trademark Office
determines that a concern is not eligible
as a small business concern within this
section, the concern shall have a right to
appeal that determination to the Small
Business Administration. The Patent and
Trademark Office shall transmit its writ-
ten decision and the pertinent size deter-
mination file to the SBA in the event of
such adverse determination and size ap-
peal. Such appeals by concerns should be
submitted to the SBA at 1441 L Street,
NW., Washington, D.C. 20416 (Attention:
SBA Office of General Counsel). The ap-
peal should state the basis upon which it
is claimed that the Patent and Trademark
Office initial size determination on the
concern was in error; and the facts and ar-
guments supporting the concern's claimed
status as a small business concern under
this section.
(e) A nonprofit organization as used in
this chapter means (1) a university or oth-
er institution of higher education located
in any country; (2) an organization of the
type described in section 501(c)(3) of the
Internal Revenue Code of 1954 (26
U.S.C. 501(c)(3)) and exempt from taxa-
tion under section 501(a) of the Internal
Revenue Code (26 U.S.C. 501(a)); (3) any
nonprofit scientific or educational organi-
zation qualified under a nonprofit organi-
zation statute of a state of this country (35
U.S.C. 201(i)); or (4) any nonprofit orga-
nization located in a foreign country
which would qualify as a nonprofit orga-
nization under paragraphs (e)(2) or (3) of
this section if it were located in this coun-
try.
(0 A small entity as used in this chapter
means an independent inventor, a small
business concern or a nonprofit organiza-
tion.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20461, May 11, 1978; 47 FR 40134,
Sept. 10, 1982; 47 FR 43272, Sept. 30, 1982; ef-
fective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.10 Filing of papers and fees by "Ex-
press Mail** with certificate.
(a) Any paper or fee to be filed in the
Patent and Trademark Office can be filed
utilizing the "Express Mail Post Office to
Addressee" service of the United States
Postal Service and be considered as hav-
ing been filed in the Office on the date
the paper or fee is shown to have been
deposited as "Express Mail" with the
United States Postal Service.
(b) Any paper or fee filed by "Express
Mail" must have the number of the "Ex-
press Mail" mailing label placed thereon
prior to mailing, be addressed to the
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks,
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 CXj 39
Washington, D.C. 20231, and any such
paper or fee must also include a certifi-
cate of mailing by "Express Mail" which
states the date of mailing by "Express
Mail" and is signed by the person mailing
the paper or fee.
(c) The Patent and Trademark Office
will accept the certificate of mailing by
"Express Mail" and accord the paper or
fee the certificate date under 35 U.S.C.
21(a) without further proof of the date on
which the mailing by "Express Mail" oc-
curred unless a question is present regard-
ing the date of mailing. If more than a
reasonable time has elapsed between the
certificate date and the Patent and Trade-
mark Office receipt date or if other ques-
tions regarding the date of mailing are
present, the person mailing the paper or
fee may be required to file a copy of the
"Express Mail" receipt showing the actu-
al date of mailing and a statement from
the person who mailed the paper or fee
averring to the fact that the mailing oc-
curred on the date certified. Such state-
ment must be a verified statement if made
by a person not registered to practice be-
fore the Patent and Trademark Office.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
Records and Files of the Patent
AND Trademark Office
§ 1.11 Files open to the public.
(a) After a patent has been issued, the
specification, drawings, and all papers re-
lating to the case in the file of the patent
are open to inspection by the general pub-
lic, and copies may be obtained upon pay-
ing the fee therefor. After an award of
priority by the Board of Patent Interfer-
ences as to all parties, of after termination
if no such award is made, the file of any
interference which involved a patent, or
an application on which a patent has is-
sued, is similarly open to public inspection
and procurement of copies. See § 2.27 for
trademark files.
(b) All reissue applications and all ap-
plications in which the Office has accept-
ed a request filed under § 1.139, and
related papers in the application file, are
open to inspection by the general public,
and copies may be furnished upon paying
the fee therefor. The filing of reissue ap-
plications will be announced in the Offi-
cial Gazette. The announcement shall
include at least the filing date, reissue ap-
plication and original patent numbers, ti-
tle, class and subclass, name of the
inventor, name of the owner of record,
name of the attorney or agent of record,
and examining group to which the reissue
application is assigned.
(c) All requests for reexamination for
which the fee under § 1.20(c) has been
paid, will be announced in the Official
Gazette. Any reexaminations at the initia-
tive of the Commissioner pursuant to
§ 1.520 will also be announced in the Offi-
cial Gazette. The announcement shall
include at least the date of the request, if
any, the reexamination request control
number or the Commissioner initiated or-
der control number, patent number, title,
class and subclass, name of the inventor,
name of the patent owner of record, and
the examining group to which the reex-
amination is assigned.
(d) All papers or copies thereof relating
to a reexamination proceeding which
have been entered of record in the patent
or reexamination file are open to inspec-
tion by the general public, and copies
may be furnished upon paying the fee
therefor.
[42 FR 5593, Jan. 28, 1977, as amended at 43
FR 28477, June 30, 1978; 46 FR 29181, May
29, 1981; 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective
Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.12 Assignment records open to public
inspection.
(a) The assignment records, relating to
original or reissue patents, including di-
gests and indexes, and assignment records
relating to pending or abandoned trade-
mark applications and to trademark regis-
trations, are open to public inspection and
copies of any instrument recorded may be
obtained upon request and payment of the
fee set forth in § 1.19(aX5).
(b) Assignment records, digests, and in-
dexes, relating to any pending or aban-
doned patent application are not available
to the public. Copies of any such assign-
ment records and information with re-
spect thereto shall be obtainable only
uf)on written authority of the applicant or
applicant's assignee or attorney or agent
or upon a showing that the person seek-
ing such information is a bona fide pro-
spective or actual purchaser, mortgagee,
or licensee of such application, unless it
shall be necessary to the proper conduct
of business before the Office or as provid-
ed by these rules.
(c) Any request by a member of the
public seeking copies of any assignment
records of any pending or abandoned pa-
tent application preserved in secrecy un-
der § 1.14, or any information with
respect thereto, must (1) be in the form of
a petition accompanied by the petition fee
set forth in § 1.1 7(i) or (2) include written
authority granting access to the member
of the public to the particular assignment
records from the applicant or applicant's
assignee or attorney or agent of record.
(d) An order for a copy of an assign-
ment should give the identification of the
record. If identified only by the name of
the patentee and number of the patent, or
in the case of a trademark registration by
the name of the registrant and number of
the registration, or by name of the appli-
cant and serial number or international
application number of the application, an
extra charge as set forth in § 1.21(0 >^>11
be made for the time consumed in making
a search for such assignment.
1029 OG 40
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982; effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.13 Copies and certified copies.
(a) Copies of patents and trademark
registrations and of any records, books,
papers, or drawings belonging to the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office and open to
the pubUc, will be furnished by the Patent
and Trademark Office to any person, and
copies of other records or papers will be
furnished to persons entitled thereto, upon
payment of the fee therefor.
(b) Such copies will be authenticated
by the seal of the Patent and Trademark
Office and certified by the Commissioner,
or in his name attested by an officer of
the Patent and Trademark Office autho-
rized by the Commissioner, upon payment
of the fee for the authentication certificate
in addition to the fee for the copies.
(35 U.S.C. 10)
§ 1.14 Patent applications preserved in se-
crecy.
(a) Except as provided in § 1.11(b)
pending patent applications are preserved
in secrecy. No information will be given
by the Office respecting the filing by any
particular person of an application for a
patent, the pendency of any particular
case before it, or the subject matter of
any particular application, nor will access
be given to or copies furnished of any
pending application or papers relating
thereto, without written authority in that
particular application from the applicant
or his assignee or attorney or agent of
record, unless the application has been
identified by serial number in a published
patent document or the United States of
America has been indicated as a Designat-
ed State in a published international appli-
cation, in which case status information
such as whether it is pending, abandoned
or patented may be supplied, or unless it
shall be necessary to the proper conduct
of business before the Office or as provid-
ed by this part. Where an application has
been patented, the patent number and is-
sue date may also be supplied.
(b) Except as provided in § 1.11(b)
abandoned applications are likewise not
open to public inspection, except that if
an application referred to in a U.S. patent,
or in an application which is open to in-
spection pursuant to § 1.139, is abandoned
and is available, it may be inspected or
copies obtained by any person on written
request, without notice to the applicant.
Abandoned applications may be de-
stroyed after 20 years from their filing
date, except those to which particular at-
tention has been called and which have
been marked for preservation. Abandoned
applications will not be returned.
(c) Applications for patents which dis-
close, or which appear to disclose, or
which purport to disclose, inventions or
discoveries relating to atomic energy are
reported to the Department of Energy,
which Department will be given access to
such applications, but such reporting does
not constitute a determination that the
subject matter of each application so re-
ported is in fact useful or an invention or
discovery or that such application in fact
discloses subject matter in categories
specified by sections IS 1(c) and 151(d) of
the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, 68 Stat.
919; 42 U.S.C. 2181 (c) and (d).
(d) Any decision of the Board of Ap-
peals or the Board of Patent Interfer-
ences, or any decision of the Commis-
sioner on petition, not otherwise open to
public inspection shall be published or
made available for public inspection if: (1)
The (Commissioner believes the decision
involves an interpretation of patent laws
or regulations that would be of important
precedent value; and (2) the applicant, or
any party involved in the interference,
does not within two months after being
notified of the intention to make the deci-
sion public, object in writing on the
ground that the decision discloses a trade
secret or other confidential information. If
a decision discloses such information, the
applicant or party shall identify the dele-
tions in the text of the decision considered
necessary to protect the information. If it
is considered the entire decision must be
withheld from the public to protect such
information, the applicant or party must
explain why. Applicants or parties will be
given time, not less than twenty days, to
request reconsideration and seek court re-
view before any portions of decisions are
made public over their objection. See
§ 2.27 for trademark applications.
(e) Any request by a member of the
public seeking access to, or copies of, any
pending or abandoned application pre-
served in secrecy pursuant to paragraphs
(a) and (b) of this section, or of any pa-
pers relating thereto, must (1) be in the
form of a petition and be accompanied by
the petition fee set forth in § 1.1 7(i) or (2)
include written authority granting access
to the member of the public in that partic-
ular application from the applicant or the
applicant's assignee or attorney or agent
of record.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, as amended at 42
FR 5593, Jan. 28, 1977; 43 FR 20462, May 11,
1978; 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective
Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.15 Requests for identifiable records.
(a) Requests for records not disclosed
to the public as part of the regular infor-
mational activity of the Patent and Trade-
mark Office and which are not otherwise
dealt with in the rules in this part may be
made by completing Form CD-244, "Ap-
plication to Inspect Department Rec-
ords," and submitting this form, in person
or by mail, to the Commissioner of Pa-
tents and Trademarks, Washington, D.C.
20231. A nonrefundable application fee of
$2 must accompany each application.
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 00 41
Copies of Form CD-244 are available in
the Central Reference and Records In-
spection Facility, Room 2122, Depart-
ment of Commerce Building, Washington,
D.C. 20230, the search room of the Pa-
tent Reference Branch of the Patent and
Trademark Office, the search room of the
Trademark Examining Operation, and in
many public information offices and field
offices of the Department of Commerce.
If the requested record is identifiable, the
request will be reviewed by the appropri-
ate official authorized to make an initial
determination of the availability of the
record. If it is determined that the materi-
al is not to be made available to the re-
questing person, said person shall be
notified in writing of that fact and the
reasons why the record will not be dis-
closed. If the record is to be made avail-
able, inspection will be permitted in the
appropriate Patent and Trademark Office
search room. Fees for copies of records
and for searches and related services are
payable in accordance with the schedule
of fees and charges established in § 4.8 of
Title 15, Code of Federal Regulations.
(b) Any person whose application to in-
spect a record has been refused may re-
quest a reconsideration of the initial
denial by completing and submitting the
appropriate section of the Form CD-244.
The request for reconsideration should be
made within 30 days of the date of the
original denial. In submitting such request
the party should include any written ar-
gument he desires to support his belief
that the record requested should be made
available. No personal appearance, oral
argument, or hearing shall be permitted.
The decision upon such request shall be
made by the Commissioner of Patents and
Trademarks and shall be based upon the
original request, the denial, and any writ-
ten argument submitted by the person
seeking access to the record. The decision
upon review shall be promptly made in
writing and communicated to the person
seeking access. If the decision is wholly
or partly in favor of availability, the re-
quested record to such extent shall be
made available for inspection as described
in paragraph (a) of this section. To the ex-
tent that the decision is adverse to the re-
quest, the reasons for the denial shall be
stated. A decision upon review completed
as provided herein shall constitute the fi-
nal decision and action of the Patent and
Trademark Office as to the availability of
a requested record, except as may be re-
quired by court proceedings initiated pur-
suant to 5 U.S.C. 552(a)(3). Reconsidera-
tions resulting in final decisions as
prescribed herein shall be indexed and
made available in the search room of the
Patent Reference Branch.
(c) Procedures applicable in the event
of a subpoena, order, or other compulsory
process or demand of a court or other au-
thority shall be those set forth in section 7
of Department Order 64 (32 FR 9734,
July 4, 1967).
(Sec. 1. 66 Stat. 793, 81 Stat. 54; 5 U.S.C. 552,
35 U.S.C. 6)
[32 FR 13812, Oct. 4, 1967, as amended at 34
FR 18857, Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.16 National application filing fees.
(a) Basic fee for filing each
application for an origi-
nal patent, except de-
sign or plant cases:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 150.00
By other than a small
entity $ 300.00
(b) In addition to the basic
filing fee in an original
application, for filing or
later presentation of
each independent claim
i^rfexcess of 3:
B>asmallentity(§ 1.9(0) $ 1500
By other than a small en-
tity $ 30.00
(c) In addition to the basic
filing fee in an original
application, for filing or
later presentation of
each claim (whether in-
dependent or depen-
dent) in excess of 20
(Note that § 1.75(c) in-
dicates how multiple
dependent claims are
considered for fee cal-
culation purposes.):
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 5.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 10.00
(d) In addition to the basic
filing fee in an original
-^ application, if the appli-
cation contains, or is
amended to contain, a
multiple dependent
claim(s), per applica-
tion:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 50.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 100.00
(If the additional fees
required by paragraphs
(b), (c) and (d) are not
paid on filing or on lat-
er presentation of the
claims for which the ad-
ditional fees are due,
they must be paid or
the claims cancelled by
amendment, prior to the
expiration of the time
period set for response
by the Office in any no-
tice of fee deficiency.)
(e) Surcharge for filing the
basic filing fee or oath _
or declaration on a date ~
later than the filing date
of the application:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 50.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 100.00
1029 OG42
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(0 For filing each design ap-
plication:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 62.50
By other than a small
entity $ 125.00
(g) Basic fee for filing each
plant application:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 100.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 200.00
(h) Basic fee for filing each
reissue application:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 150.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 300.00
(i) In addition to the basic
filing fee in a reissue ap-
plication, for filing or
later presentation for
each independent claim
which is in excess of the
number of independent
claims in the original
patent:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 15.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 30.00
(j) In addition to the basic
filing fee in a reissue ap-
plication, for filing or
later presentation of
each claim (whether in-
dependent or depen-
dent) in excess of 20
and also in excess of the
number of claims in the
original patent, (Note
that § 1.75(c) indicates
how multiple dependent
claims are considered
for fee purposes.):
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 5.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 10.00
(Note, see § 1.445 for in-
ternational application
filing and processing
fees.).
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.17 Patent application processing fees.
(a) Extension fee for response
within first month pur-
suant to § 1.136(a):
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 25.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 50.00
(b) Extension fee for response
within second month
pursuant to § 1.136(a):
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 75.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 150.00
(c) Extension fee for response
within third month pur-
^ suant to § 1.136(a):
^ By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 175.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 350.00
(d) Extension fee for response
within fourth month
pursuant to § 1.136(a):
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 275.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 550.00
(e) For filing a notice of ap-
peal from the examiner
to the Board of Ap-
peals:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 57.50
By other than a small en-
tity $ 115.00
(0 In addition to the fee for
filing a notice of appeal,
for
filing a brief in support
of an appeal:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 57.50
By other than a small en-
tity $ 115.00
(g) For filing a request for an
oral hearing before the
Board of Appeals:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 50.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 100.00
(h) For filing a petition to the
Commissioner under a
section of this part list-
ed below which refers
to this paragraph .... $ 120.00
— § 1.47 — for filing by
other than all the inven-
tors or a person not the
inventor
— § 1.48 — for correction
of inventorship
— § 1.182 — for decision
on questions not specifi-
cally provided for
— § 1.183 — to suspend
» the rules
— § 1.268— for late filing
of interference settle-
ment agreement
(i) For filing a petition to the
Commissioner under a
section of this part list-
ed below which refers
to this paragraph .... $ 60.00
— § 1.12 — for access to
an assignment record
— § 1.14 — for access to
an application
— § 1.55 — for entry of
late priority papers
— § 1.102 — to make ap-
plication special
— § 1.103 — to suspend
action in application
— § 1.177 — for divisional
reissues to issue sepa-
rately
— § 1.268 — for access to
interference settlement
agreement
— § 1.312 — for amend-
ment after payment of
issue fee
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 43
— § 1.313 — to withdraw
an application from is-
sue
— § 1.314 — to defer issu-
ance of a patent
— § 1.334 — for patent to
issue to assignee, assign-
ment recorded late
(j) For filing a petition to in-
stitute a public use pro-
ceeding under § 1.292 $ 750.00
(k) For processing an
application filed with a
specification in a non-
English language (§
1.52(d)) $ 20.00
(1) For filing a petition (1)
for the revival of an
abandoned application
under 35 U.S.C. 133, or
(2) for delayed payment
of the issue fee under 35
U.S.C. 151:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 25.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 50.00
(m) For filing a petition (1)
for revival of an unin-
tentionally abandoned
application or (2) for
the unintentionally de-
layed payment of the
fee for issuing a patent:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 250.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 500.00
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, paragraphs (a)-
(m) added effective Oct. 1, 1982; 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, paragraph (h) revised effective
Feb. 27, 1983]
. § 1.18 Patent issue fees.
(a) Issue fee for issuing each
original or reissue pa-
tent, except a design or
plant patent:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 250.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 500.00
(b) Issue fee for issuing a de-
sign patent:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 87.50
By other than a small
entity $ 175.00
(c) Issue fee for issuing a
plant patent:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 125.00
By other than a small en-
tity . $ 250.00
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. I.
1982]
§ 1.19 Document supply fees.
The Patent and Trademark Office will
supply copies of the following documents
upon payment of the fees indicated:
(a) Uncertified copies of Of-
fice documents: _
(1) Printed copy of a pa-
tent, including a design
patent, or defensive
publication document,
except color plant pa-
tent $ 1.00
(2) Printed copy of a
plant patent in color . $ g.OO
(3) Copy of patent appli-
cation as filed, each 50
pages or fraction there-
of $ 18.00
(4) Copy of patent file
wrapper and contents,
each 100 pages or frac-
tion thereof $ 30.00
(5) Copy of Office
records, except as pro-
vided in paragraphs (a)
(1) through (4) of this
section, per page .... $ 0.30
(6) Microfiche copy of
microfiche, per micro-
fiche $ 2.00
(b) Certified copies of Office
documents:
(1) For certifying Office
records, per certificate $ 3.50
(2) For a search of assign-
ment records, abstract
of title and certification,
per patent $ 12.00
(3) For comparing copies
not prepared by the Of-
fice with the original,
prior to certification of
the copies, per page . . $ 0.10
(c) Subscription services:
(1) Subscription orders for
printed copies of patents
as issued, annual service
charge for entry of or-
der and one subclass . $ 4.00
(2) For annual subscrip-
tion to each additional
subclass in addition to
the one covered by the
fee under paragraph (c)
(1) of this section, per
subclass $ 0.40
(d) Library service (35 U.S.C.
13):
For providing to libraries
copies of all patents is-
sued annually, per
annum $ 50.00
(e) Lists of patents in sub-
class:
(1) For list of all United
States patents in a sub-
class, per 100 patent
numbers or fraction
thereof $ 2.00
(2) For list of United
States patents in a sub-
class limited by date or
patent number, per 50
patent numbers or frac-
tion thereof $ 2.00
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
1029 OG 44
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
§ 1.20 Post-issuance fees.
(a) For providing a certifi-
cate of correction of ap-
plicant's mistake
(§ 1.323) $ 40.00
(b) Petition for correction of
inventorship in patent
(§ 1.324) $ 120.00
(c) For filing a request for
reexamination
(§ 1.510(a)) $1,500.00
(d) For filing each statutory
disclaimer (§ 1.321):
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 25.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 50.00
(e) For maintaining an origi-
nal or reissue patent,
except a design patent,
based on an application
filed on or after Decem-
ber 12, 1980 and before
August 27, 1982, in
force beyond 4 years;
the fee is due by three
years and six months af-
ter the original grant . $ 200.00
(0 For maintaining an origi-
nal or reissue patent,
except a design patent,
based on an application
filed on or after Decem-
ber 12, 1980 and before
August 27, 1982, in
force beyond 8 years;
the fee is due by seven
years and six months af-
ter the original grant . $ 400.00
(g) For maintaining an origi-
nal or reissue patent,
except a design patent,
based on an application
filed on or after Decem-
ber 12, 1980 and before
August 27, 1982, in
force beyond 12 years;
the fee is due by eleven
years and six months af-
ter the original grant . $ 600.00
(h) For maintaining an origi-
nal or reissue patent,
except a design or plant
patent, based on an ap-
plication filed on or af-
ter August 27, 1982, in
force beyond 4 years;
the fee is due by three
years and six months af-
ter the original grant:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 200.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 400.00
(i) For maintaining an origi-
nal or reissue patent,
except a design or plant
patent, based on an ap-
plication filed on or af-
ter August 27, 1982, in
force beyond 8 years;
the fee is due by seven
years and six months af-
ter the original grant:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 400.00
By other than a small en-
tity $ 800.00
(j) For maintaining an
original or reissue pa-
tent, except a design or
plant patent, based on
an application filed on
or after August 27,
1982, in force beyond
12 years; the fee is due
by eleven years and six
months after the origi-
nal grant:
By a small entity (§ 1.9(0) $ 600.00
By other than a small en-
tity $1,200.00
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.21 Miscellaneous fees and charges.
The Patent and Trademark Office has
established the following fees for the ser-
vices indicated:
(a) Registration of attorneys
and agents:
(1) For admission to ex-
amination for registra-
tion to practice, fee
payable upon applica-
tion $ 75.00
(2) On registration to
practice $ 50.00
(3) For reinstatement to
practice $ 25.00
(4) For certificate of good
standing as an attorney
or agent $ 10.00
(b) Deposit accounts:
(1) For establishing or re-
instating a deposit ac-
count $ 10.00
(2) Service charge for
each month when the
balance at the end of
the month is below , . $ 40.00
$ 2.00
(c) Disclosure document:
For filing a disclosure
document $ 10.00
(d) Delivery box:
Local delivery box rental,
per annum $ 24.00
(e) International-type search
reports:
For preparing an interna-
tional-type search re-
port of an international-
type search made at the
time of the first action
on the merits in a na-
tional patent application $ 25.00
(0 Search of Office records:
For searching Patent and
Trademark Office rec-
ords for purposes not
otherwise specified, per
one-half hour or frac-
tion thereof $ 10.00
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 45
(g) Copy machine tokens:
Token for copying ma-
chine, each $ 0.20
(h) Recording of documents:
(1) For recording each
assignment, agreement
or other paper relating
to the property in a pa-
tent or apphcation ... $ 20.00
(2) Where a document to
be recorded under para-
graph (h) (1) of this sec-
tion refers to more than
one patent or apphca-
tion, for each additional
patent or application . $ S.OO
(i) Publication in OJJicial Ga-
zette:
For publication in the Of-
ficial Gazette of a notice
of the availability of an
apphcation or a patent
for licensing or sale,
each application or pa-
tent $ 6.00
(j) For a duplicate or re-
placement of a perm-
anent Office user pass
(There is no charge for
the first permanent user
pass) $ 5.00
(k) For items and services,
that the Commissioner
finds may be supplied,
for which fees are not
specified by statute or
by this section, such
charges as may be deter-
mined by the Commis-
sioner with respect to
each such item or ser-
vice actual cost
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982; effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.22 Fees payable in advance.
(a) Patent and trademark fees and
charges payable to the Patent and Trade-
mark Office are required to be paid in ad-
vance, that is, at the time of requesting
any action by the Office for which a fee
or charge is payable with the exception
that under § 1.53 applications for patent
may be assigned a filing date without pay-
ment of the basic filing fee.
(b) All patent and trademark fees paid
to the Patent and Trademark Office
should be itemized in each individual ap-
plication, patent or other proceeding in
such a manner that it is clear for which
purpose the fees are paid.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685) [43 FR 20462,
May 11, 1978]; 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983; ef-
fective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.23 Method of payment.
All payments of money required for
Patent and Trademark Office fees, includ-
ing fees for the processing of international
applications (§ 1.445), should be made in
U.S. specie. Treasury notes, national bank
notes, post office money orders, or by
certified check. If sent in any other form,
the Office may delay or cancel the credit
until collection is made. Money orders
and checks must be made payable to the
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks.
Remittances from foreign countries must
be payable and immediately negotiable in
the United States for the full amount of
the fee required. Money sent by mail to
the Patent and Trademark Office will be
at the risk of the sender; letters containing
money should be registered.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43FR20462, May 11, 1978]
§ 1J24 Coupons.
Coupons in denominations of one dollar
are sold by the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice for the convenience of regular pur-
chasers of U.S. patents and trademark
registrations; these coupons may not be
used for any other purpose. The one dol-
lar coupons are sold individually and in
books of 50 with stubs for record for $50.
These coupons are good until used; they
may be transferred but cannot be re-
deemed.
[30 FR 12844. Oct. 8, 1965, as amended at 34
FR 18857, Nov. 26, 1969, 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982; 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.25 Deposit accounts.
(a) For the convenience of attorneys,
agents, and the general public in paying
any fees due, in ordering services offered
by the Office, copies of records, etc., de-
posit accounts may be established in the
Patent and Trademark Office upon pay-
ment of the fee for establishing a deposit
account (§ 1.21(bXl)). A minimum depos-
it of $50 or more, depending on the activ-
ity of the individual account, is required.
At the close of each month's business, a
statement will be rendered. A remittance
must be made promptly upon receipt of
the statement to cover the value of items
or services charged to the account and
thus restore the account to its established
normal deposit value. An amount suffi-
cient to cover all services, copies, etc., re-
quested must always be on deposit. A
service charge (§ 1.21(bX2)) will be
assessed for each month that the balance
at the end of the month is below $40.
(b) Filing, issue, appeal, international-
type search report, international applica-
tion processing, petition, and post-issuance
fees may be charged against these ac-
counts. A general authorization to charge
all fees, or only certain fees, set forth in
§§ 1.16 to 1.18 to a deposit account may
be filed in an individual application, either
for the entire pendency of the application
or with respect to a particular paper filed.
An authorization to charge to a deposit
account the fee for a request for reexam-
ination pursuant to § 1.510 and any other
1029 OG 46
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19; 1983
fees required in a reexamination proceed-
ing in a patent may also be filed with the
request for reexamination.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
(40 FR 57359, Dec. 9, 1975, 43 FR 20462, May
11, 1978; and 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, ef-
fective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.26 Refunds.
(a) Money paid by actual mistake or in
excess, such as a payment not required by
law, will be refunded, but a mere change
of purpose after the payment of money, as
when a party desires to withdraw an ap-
plication, an appeal, or a request for oral
hearing, will not entitle a party to de-
mand such a return. Amounts of one dol-
lar or less will not be returned unless
specifically demanded within a reasonable
time, nor will the payer be notified of
such amount; amounts over one dollar
may be returned by check or, if request-
ed, by credit to a deposit account.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) If the Commissioner decides not to
institute a reexamination proceeding, a re-
fund of $1,200.00 will be made to the re-
quester of the proceeding. Reexamination
requesters should indicate whether any
refund should be made by check or by
credit to a deposit account.
(35 U.S.C. 6 and 41)
[46 FR 24179. Apr. 30, 1981 and 47 FR 33086.
July 30. 1982, effective Oct. 1. 1982]
§ 1.27 Statement of status as small entity.
(a) Any person seeking to establish sta-
tus as a small entity (§ 1.9(0 of this part)
for purposes of paying fees in an applica-
tion or a patent must file a verified state-
ment in the application or patent prior to
or with the first fee paid as a small entity.
Such a verified statement need only be
filed once in an application or patent and
remains in effect until changed.
(b) Any verified statement filed pursu-
ant to paragraph (a) of this section on be-
half of an independent inventor must be
signed by the independent inventor except
as provided in §§ 1.42, 1.43, or 1.47 of
this part, and must aver that the inventor
qualifies as an independent inventor in ac-
cordance with § 1.9(c) of this part. Where
there are joint inventors in an application,
each inventor must file a verified state-
ment establishing status as an independent
inventor in order to qualify as a small en-
tity. Where any rights have been assigned,
granted, conveyed, or licensed, or there is
an obligation to assign, grant, convey, or
license, any rights to a small business con-
cern, a nonprofit organization, or any oth-
er individual, a verified statement must be
filed by the individual, the owner of the
small business concern, or an official of
the small business concern or nonprofit
organization empowered to act on behalf
of the small business concern or nonprofit
organization averring to their status.
(c) Any verified statement filed pursu-
ant to paragraph (a) of this section on be-
half of a small business concern must (1)
be signed by the owner or an official of
the small business concern empowered to
act on behalf of the concern; (2) aver that
the concern qualifies as a small business
concern as defined in § 1.9(d); and (3)
aver that exclusive rights to the invention
have been conveyed to and remain with
the small business concern, or if the rights
are not exclusive, that all other rights be-
long to small entities as defined in § 1.9.
Where the rights of the small business
concern as a small entity are not exclu-
sive, a verified statement must also be
filed by the other small entities having
rights averring to their status as such.
(d) Any verified statement filed pursu-
ant to paragraph (a) of this section on be-
half of a nonprofit organization must (1)
be signed by an official of the nonprofit
organization empowered to act on behalf
of the organization; (2) aver that the orga-
nization qualifies as a nonprofit organiza-
tion as defined in § 1.9(e) of this part
specifying under which one of § 1.9(e)(1),
(e)(2), (e)(3), or (e)(4) of this part the or-
ganization qualifies; and (3) aver that ex-
clusive rights to the invention have been
conveyed to and remain with the organi-
zation or if the rights are not exclusive,
that all other rights belong to small enti-
ties as defined in § 1.9 of this part. Where
the rights of the nonprofit organization as
a small entity are not exclusive, a verified
statement must also be filed by the other
small entities having rights averring to
their status as such.
[47 FR 40134, Sept. 10, 1982 and 47 FR 43272,
Sept. 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.28 Effect on fees of failure to estab-
lish status, or change status, as a small
entity.
(a) The failure to establish status as a
small entity (§§ 1.9(0 and 1.27 of this
part) in any application or patent prior to
paying, or at the time of paying, any fee
(1) precludes payment of the fee in the
amount established for small entities; and
(2) precludes a refund pursuant to § 1.26
of this part of any portions of fees paid
prior to establishing status as a small enti-
ty. Status as a small entity is waived for
any fee by the failure to establish the sta-
tus prior to paying, or at the time of pay-
ing the fee. Status as a small entity must
be specifically established by a verified
statement filed in each application or pa-
tent in which the status is available and
desired, except those applications filed un-
der § 1.60 of this part where the status as
a small entity has been established in a
parent application and is still proper.
Once status as a small entity has been es-
tablished in an application or patent, the
status remains in that application or pa-
tent without the filing of a further Veri-
fied statement pursuant to § 1.27 of this
part unless the Office is notified of a
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 47
change in status. Status as a small entity
in one application or patent does not af-
fect any other application or patent, in-
cluding applications or patents which are
directly or indirectly dependent upon the
application or patent in which the status
has been established, except those filed
under § 1.60 of this part. Applications
filed under § 1.60 of this part must in-
clude a reference to a verified statement
in a parent application if status as a small
entity is still proper and desired.
(b) Once status as a small entity has
been established in an application or pa-
tent, fees as a small entity may thereafter
be paid in that application or patent with-
out regard to a change in status until the
issue fee is due or any maintenance fee is
due. Notification of any change in status
resulting in loss of entitlement to small
entity status must be filed in the applica-
tion or patent prior to paying, or at the
time of paying, the earliest of the issue fee
or any maintenance fee due after the date
on which status as a small entity is no
longer appropriate pursuant to § 1.9 of
this part. The notification of change in
status may be signed by the applicant, any
person authorized to sign on behalf of the
assignee, or an attorney or agent of
record or acting in a representative ca-
pacity pursuant to § 1.34(a) of this part.
(c) If status as a small entity is estab-
lished in good faith, and fees as a small
entity are paid in good faith, in any appli-
cation or patent, and it is later discovered
that such status as a small entity was es-
tablished in error or that through error
the Office was not notified of a change in
status as required by paragraph (b) of this
section, the error will be excused (1) if
any deficiency between the amount paid
and the amount due is paid within three
months after the date the error occurred
or (2) if any deficiency between the
amount paid and the amount due is paid
more than three months after the date the
error occurred and the payment is accom-
panied by a verified statement explaining
how the error in good faith occurred and
how and when it was discovered.
(d)(1) Any attempt to fraudulently (i)
establish status as a small entity or (ii) pay
fees as a small entity shall be considered
as a fraud practiced or attempted on the
Office. (2) Improperly and through gross
negligence (i) establishing status as a small
entity or (ii) paying fees as a small entity
shall be considered as a fraud practiced or
attempted on the Office. See §§ 1.56(d)
and 1.555 of this part.
[47 FR 40134, Sept. 10, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
Subpart B— National Processing
Provisions
Prosecution of Application and
Appointment of Attorney or Agent
§ 1.31 Applicants may be represented by
an attorney or agent.
An applicant for patent may file and
prosecute his own case, or he may be rep-
resented by an attorney or agent autho-
rized to practice before the Patent and
Trademark Office in patent cases. The Pa-
tent and Trademark Office cannot aid in
the selection of an attorney or agent.
§ 1.32 Prosecution by assignee.
The assignee of record of the entire in-
terest in an application for patent is enti-
tled to conduct the prosecution of the
application to the exclusion of the inven-
tor.
§ 1.33 Correspondence respecting patent
applications, reexamination proceed-
ings, and other proceedings.
(a) The residence and post office ad-
dress of the applicant must appear in the
oath or declaration if not stated elsewhere
in the application. The applicant may also
specify and an attorney or agent of record
may specify a correspondence address to
which communications about the applica-
tion are to be directed. All notices, offi-
cial letters, and other communications in
the case will be directed to the correspon-
dence address or, if no such correspon-
dence address is specified, to an attorney
or agent of record (see § 1.34(b)), or, if
no attorney or agent is of record, to the
applicant, or to any assignee of record of
the entire interest if the applicant or such
assignee so requests, or to an assignee of
an undivided part if the applicant so re-
quests, at the post office address of which
the Office has been notified in the case.
Amendments and other papers filed in the
application must be signed: (1) By the ap-
plicant, or (2) if there is an assignee of
record of an undivided part interest, by
the applicant and such assignee, or (3) if
there is an assignee of record of the entire
interest, by such assignee, or (4) by an at-
torney or agent of record, or (5) by a reg-
istered attorney or agent not of record
who acts in a representative capacity un-
der the provisions of § 1.34(a). Double
correspondence with an applicant and his
attorney or agent, or with more than one
attorney or agent, will not be undertaken.
If more than one attorney or agent be
made of record and a correspondence ad-
dress has not been specified, correspon-
dence will be held with the one last made
of record.
(b) An applicant who has not made of
record a registered attorney or agent may
be required to state whether he received
assistance in the preparation or prosecu-
tion of his application, for which any
compensation or consideration was given
or charged, and if so, to disclose the name
or names of the person or persons provid-
ing such assistance. This includes the
preparation for the applicant of the speci-
fication and amendments or other papers
to be filed in the Patent and Trademark
Office, as well as other assistance in such
matters, but does not include merely mak-
1029 OG 48
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
ing drawings by draftsmen or stenograph-
ic services in typing papers.
(c) All notices, official letters, and
other communications for the patent own-
er or owners in a reexamination proceed-
ing will be directed to the attorney or
agent of record (see § 1.34(b)) in the pa-
tent file at the address listed on the regis-
ter of patent attorneys and agents main-
tained pursuant to §§ 1.341 and 1.347 or,
if no attorney or agent is of record, to the
patent owner or owners at the address or
addresses of record. Amendments and
other papers filed in a reexamination pro-
ceeding on behalf of the patent owner
must be signed by the patent owner, or if
there is more than one owner by all the
owners, or by an attorney or agent of
record in the patent file, or by a regis-
tered attorney or agent not of record who
acts in a representative capacity under the
provisions of § 1.34(a). Double correspon-
dence with the patent owner or owners
and the patent owner's attorney or agent,
or with more than one attorney or agent,
will not be undertaken. If more than one
attorney or agent is of record and a cor-
respondence address has not been speci-
fied, correspondence will be held with the
last attorney or agent made of record.
[36 FR 12617, July 2, 1971, as amended at 46
FR 29181, May 29, 1981]
§ 1.34 Recognition for representation.
(a) When a registered attorney or agent
acting in a representative capacity appears
in person or signs a paper in practice be-
fore the Patent and Trademark Office in a
patent case, his or her personal appear-
ance or signature shall constitute a repre-
sentation to the Patent and Trademark
Office that under the provisions of this
part and the law, he or she is authorized
to represent the particular party in whose
behalf he or she acts. In filing such a pa-
per, the attorney or agent should specify
his or her registration number with his or
her signature. Further proof of authority
to act in a representative capacity may be
required.
(b) When an attorney or agent shall
have filed his or her power of attorney,
or authorization, duly executed by the
person or persons entitled to prosecute an
application or a patent involved in a
reexamination proceeding, he or she is a
principal attorney of record in the case. A
principal attorney or agent, so appointed,
may appoint an associate attorney or
agent who shall also then be of record.
[46 FR 29181, May 29, 1981]
§ 1.36 Reyocation of power of attoraey or
authorization; withdrawal of attorney
or agent.
A power of attorney or authorization
of agent may be revoked at any stage in
the proceedings of a case, and an attorney
or agent may withdraw, upon application
to and approval by the Commissioner. An
attorney or agent, except an associate at-
torney or agent whose address is the same
as that of the principal attorney or agent,
will be notified of the revocation of his or
her power of attorney or authorization,
and the applicant or patent owner will be
notified of the withdrawal of the attorney
or agent. An assignment will not of itself
operate as a revocation of a power or au-
thorization previously given, but the as-
signee of the entire interest may revoke
previous powers and be represented by an
attorney or agent of his or her own selec-
tion.
[46 FR 29182, May 29, 1981]
Who May Apply for a Patent
Authority: Sees. 1.41 to 1.47 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. Ill, 116, 117, 118.
§ 1.41 Applicant for patent.
(a) A patent must be applied for in the
name of the actual inventor or inventors.
Full names must be stated, including the
family name and at least one given name
without abbreviation together with any
other given name or initial.
(b) Unless the contrary is indicated the
word "applicant" when used in these sec-
tions refers to the inventor or joint inven-
tors who are applying for a patent, or to
the person mentioned in §§ 1.42, 1.43, or
1.47 who is applying for a patent in place
of the inventor.
(c) Any person authorized by the appli-
cant may file an application for patent on
■behalf of the inventor or inventors, but an
oath or declaration for the application
(§ 1.63) can only be made in accordance
with § 1.64.
(d) A showing may be required from
the person filing the application that the
filing was authorized where such authori-
zation comes into question.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 36 FR 12690,
July 3, 1971; and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, ef-
fective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.42 When the inventor is dead.
In case of the death of the inventor, the
legal representative (executor, administra-
tor, etc.) of the deceased inventor may
make the necessary oath or declaration,
and apply for and obtain the patent.
Where the inventor dies during the time
intervening between the filing of the ap-
plication and the granting of a patent
thereon, the letters patent may be issued
to the legal representative upon proper in-
tervention.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959; 29 FR 18503,
Dec. 29, 1964 and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983,
effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.43 When the inventor is insane or le-
gally incapacitated.
In case an inventor is insane or other-
wise legally incapacitated, the legal repre-
sentative (guardian, conservator, etc.) of
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 CX3 49
such inventor may make the necessary
oath or declaration, and apply for and ob-
tain the patent.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22. 1959; 29 FR 18503,
Dec. 29, 1964; and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983,
effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.44 Proof of authority.
In the cases mentioned in §§ 1.42 and
1.43, proof of the power or authority of
the legal representative must be recorded
in the Patent and Trademark Office or
filed in the application before the grant of
a patent.
§ 1.45 Joint inventors.
Joint inventors must apply for a patent
jointly and each must make the required
oath or declaration: neither of them alone,
nor less than the entire number, can apply
for a patent for an invention invented by
them jointly, except as provided in § 1.47.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959; 29 FR 18503,
Dec. 29, 1964; 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982 and
48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983; efTective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.46 Assigned inventions and patents.
In case the whole or a part interest in
the invention or in the patent to be issued
is assigned, the application must still be
made or authorized to be made, and an
oath or declaration signed, by the inven-
tor or one of the persons mentioned in
§§ 1.42, 1.43, or 1.47. However, the pa-
tent may be issued to the assignee or
jointly to the inventor and the assignee as
provided in § 1.334.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983. efTective Feb. 27.
1983]
§ 1.47 Filing when an inventor refuses to
sign or cannot be reached.
(a) If a joint inventor refuses to join in
an application for patent or cannot be
found or reached after diligent effort, the
application may be made by the other in-
ventpr on behalf of himself or herself and
the omitted inventor. The oath or decla-
ration in such an application must be ac-
companied by a petition including proof
of the pertinent facts and by the required
fee (§ 1.17(h)) and must state the last
known address of the omitted inventor.
The Patent and Trademark Office shall
forward notice of the filing of the applica-
tion to the omitted inventor at said ad-
dress. Should such notice be returned to
the Office undelivered, or should the ad-
dress of the omitted inventor be un-
known, notice of the filing of the
application shall be published in the Offi-
cial Gazette. The omitted inventor may
subsequently join in the application on fil-
ing an oath or declaration of the charac-
ter required by § 1.63. A patent may be
granted to the inventor making the appli-
cation, upon a showing satisfactory to the
Commissioner, subject to the same rights
which the omitted inventor would have
had if he or she had been joined.
(b) Whenever an inventor refuses to ex-
ecute an application for patent, or cannot
be found or reached after diligent effort, a
person to whom the inventor has assigned
or agreed in writing to assign the inven-
tion or who otherwise shows sufficient
proprietary interest in the matter justify-
ing such action may make application for
patent on behalf of and as agent for the
inventor. The oath or declaration in such
an application must be accompanied by a
petition including proof of the pertinent
facts and a showing that such action is
necessary to preserve the rights of the
parties or to prevent irreparable damage,
and by the required fee (§ 1.17(h)) and
must state the last known address of the
inventor. The assignment, written agree-
ment to assign or other evidence of pro-
prietary interest, or a verified copy
thereof, must be filed in the Patent and
Trademark Office. The Office shall for-
vyard notice of the filing of the applica-
tion to the inventor at the address stated
in the application. Should such notice be
returned to the Office undelivered, or
should the address of the inventor be un-
known, notice of the filing of the applica-
tion shall be published in the Official
Gazette. The inventor may subsequently
join in the application on filing an oath or
declaration of the character required by §
1.63. A patent may be granted to the in-
ventor upon a showing satisfactory to the
Commissioner,
[24 FR 10332. Dec. 22, 1959; 29 FR 18503,
Dec. 29. 1964; 34 FR 18857. Nov. 26. 1969- 47
FR 33086. July 30. 1982; 48 FR 2696. Jan. 20,
1983. efTective Feb. 27. 1983]
§ 1.48 Correction of inventorship.
If the correct inventor or inventors are
not named in an application for patent
through error without any deceptive in-
tention on the part of the actual inventor
or inventors, the application may be
amended to name only the actual inventor
or inventors. Such amendment must be
diligently made and must be accompanied
by (1) a petition including a statement of
facts verified by the original named in-
ventor or inventors establishing when the
error without deceptive intention was dis-
covered and how it occurred; (2) an oath
or declaration by each actual inventor or
inventors as required by § 1.63; (3) the fee
set forth in § 1.17(h); and (4) the written
consent of any assignee.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983. effective Feb. 27.
1983]
The Application
§ 1.51 General requisites of an applica-
tion.
(a) Applications for patents must be
made to the Commissioner of Patents and
Trademarks. A complete application com-
prises:
1029 OG 50
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(1) A specification, including a claim or
claims, see §§ 1.71 to 1.77.
(2) An oath or declaration, see §§ 1.63
and 1.68.
(3) Drawings, when necessary, see §§
1.81 to 1.88.
(4) The prescribed filing fee, see § 1.16.
(b) Applicants are encouraged to file an
information disclosure statement. See §§
1.97 through 1.99.
(c) Applicants may desire and are per-
mitted to file with, or in, the application
an authorization to charge, at any time
during the pendency of the application,
any fees required under any of §§ 1.16 to
1.18 to a deposit account established and
maintained in accordance with § 1.25.
[42 FR 5593, Jan. 28, 1977; 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982, revised paragraph (a) (4) and added
paragraph (c) effective Oct. 1, 1982; 48 FR
2696, Jan. 20, 1983, revised paragraphs (a) (2)
and (b) effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.52 Language, paper, writing, margins.
(a) The application, any amendments or
corrections thereto, and the oath or decla-
ration must be in the English language ex-
cept as provided for . in § 1.69 and
paragraph (d) of this section, or be ac-
companied by a verified translation of the
application and a translation of any cor-
rections or amendments into the English
language. All papers which are to become
a part of the permanent records of the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office must be legi-
bly written, typed, or printed in perma-
nent ink or its equivalent in quality. All of
the application papers must be presented
in a form having sufficient clarity and
contrast between the paper and the writ-
ing, typing, or printing thereon to permit
the direct reproduction of readily legible
copies in any number by use of photo-
graphic, electrostatic, photo-offset, and
microfilming processes. If the papers are
not of the required quality, substitute
typewritten or printed papers of suitable
quality may be required.
(b) The application papers (specifica-
tion, including claims, abstract, oath or
declaration, and papers as provided for in
§§ 1.42, 1.43, 1.47, etc.) and also papers
subsequently filed, must be plainly written
on but one side of the paper. The size of
all sheets of paper should be 8 to 8'/2 by
10'/2 to 13 inches (20.3 to 21.6 cm. by
26.6 to 33.0 cm.). A margin of at least ap-
proximately one inch (2.5 cm.) must be
reserved on the left-hand of each page.
The top of each page of the application,
including claims must have a margin of at
least approximately V4 inch (2 cm.). The
lines of text must not be crowded too
closely together; typewritten lines should
be 1 '/2 or double spaced. The pages of the
application, including claims and abstract,
should be numbered consecutively, start-
ing with 1, the numbers being centrally
located above or preferably, below, the
text.
(c) Any interlineation, erasure, cancella-
tion or other alteration of the application
papers filed must be made before the sign-
ing of any accompanying oath or declara-
tion pursuant to § 1.63 referring to those
application papers and should be dated
and initialed or signed by the applicant on
the same sheet of paper. No such alter-
ations in the application papers are per-
missible after the signing of an oath or
declaration referring to those application
papers (§ l.S6(c)). After the signing of the
oath or declaration referring to the appli-
cation papers, amendments may only be
made in the manner provided by §§ 1.121
and 1.123-1.125.
(d) An application including a signed
oath or declaration may be filed in a lan-
guage other than English if it is accompa-
nied by the fee set forth in § 1.1 7(k). A
verified English translation of the non-
English language application is required
to be filed with the application or within
such time as may be set by the Office.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[37 FR 21994, Oct. 18, 1972; 43 FR 20462,
May 11, 1978; 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, re-
vised paragraph (a) and added paragraph (d),
effective Oct. 1, 1982; 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20,
1983, revised paragraph (c), effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.53 Serial number, filing date, and
completion of application.
(a) Any application for a patent re-
ceived in the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice will be assigned a serial number for
identification purposes.
(b) The filing date of an application for
patent is the date on which (1) a specifi-
cation containing a description pursuant
to § 1.71 and at least one claim pursuant
to § 1.75, and (2) any drawing required
by § 1.81(a), are filed in the Patent and
Trademark Office. No new matter may be
introduced into an application after its fil-
ing date (§ 1.118).
(c) If any application is filed without
the specification or drawing required by
paragraph (b) of this section, applicant
will be so notified and given a time peri-
od within which to submit the omitted
specification or drawing in order to ob-
tain a filing date as of the date of filing of
such submission. If the omission is not
corrected within the time period set, the
application will Le returned or otherwise
disposed of; the fee, if submitted, will be
refunded less a $50.00 handling fee.
(d) If an application which has been
accorded a filing date pursuant to para-
graph (b) of this section does not include
the appropriate filing fee or an oath or
declaration by the applicant, applicant
will be so notified and given a period of
time within which to file the fee, oath, or
declaration and to pay the surcharge as
set forth in § 1.16(e) in order to prevent
abandonment of the application. The noti-
fication pursuant to this paragraph may
be made simultaneously with any notifica-
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 51
tion pursuant to paragraph (c) of this sec-
tion.
(e) An application for a patent will not
be placed upon the files for examination
until all its required parts, complying with
the rules relating thereto, are received,
except that certain minor informalities
may be waived subject to subsequent cor-
rection whenever required.
(f) The filing date of an international
application designating the United States
of America shall be treated as the filing
date in the United States of America un-
der PCT Article 11(3), except as provided
in 35 U.S.C. 102(e).
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.54 Parts of application to be filed to-
gether; filing receipt.
(a) It is desirable that all parts of the
complete application be deposited in the
Office together; otherwise a letter must
accompany each part, accurately and
clearly connecting it with the other parts
of the application. See § 1.53 with regard
to completion of an application.
(b) Applicant will be informed of the
application serial number and filing date
by a filing receipt.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.55 Claim for foreign priority.
(a) An applicant may claim the benefit
of the filing date of a prior foreign applica-
tion under the conditions specified in 35
U.S.C. 119 and 172. The claim to priority
need be in no special form and may be
made by the attorney or agent if the for-
eign application is referred to in the oath
or declaration as required by § 1.63. The
claim for priority and the certified copy of
the foreign application specified in the sec-
ond paragraph of 35 U.S.C. 119 must be
filed in the case of interference (§ 1224);
when necessary to overcome the date of a
reference relied upon by the examiner; or
when specifically required by the examin-
er; and in all other cases they must be filed
not later than the date the issue fee is paid.
If the papers filed are not in the English
language, a translation need not be filed
except in the three particular instances
specified in the preceding sentence, in
which event a sworn translation or a trans-
lation certified as accurate by a sworn or
official translator must be filed. If the pri-
ority papers are submitted after the date
the issue fee is paid, they must be accom-
panied by a petition requesting their entry
and the fee set forth in § 1.1 7(i).
(b) An applicant may under certain cir-
cumstances claim priority on the basis of
an application for an inventor's certificate
in a country granting both inventor's cer-
tificates and patents. When an applicant
wishes to claim the right of priority as to
a claim or claims of the application on the
basis of an application for an inventor's
certificate in such a country under 35
U.S.C. 119, last paragraph (as amended
July 28, 1972), the applicant or his attor-
ney or agent, when submitting a claim for
such right as specified in paragraph (b) of
this section, shall include an affidavit or
declaration including a specific statement
that, upon an investigation, he or she has
satisfied himself or herself that to the best
of his or her knowledge the applicant,
when filing his or her application for the
inventor's certificate, had the option to
file an application either for a patent or
an inventor's certificate as to the subject
matter of the identified claim or claims
forming the basis for the claim of priority.
(35 U.S.C. 119; Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959; 34 FR 12629,
Aug. 2, 1969; 34 FR 18857, Nov. 26, 1969; 38
FR 9297, Apr. 13. 1973; 43 FR 20463, May 11,
1978; 47 FR 33086, July 30. 1982; 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.56 Duty of disclosure; fraud; striking
or rejection of applications.
(a) A duty of candor and good faith to-
ward the Patent and Trademark Office
rests on the inventor, on each attorney or
agent who prepares or prosecutes the ap-
plication and on every other individual
who is substantively involved in the prepa-
ration or prosecution of the application
and who is associated with the inventor,
with the assignee or with anyone to whom
there is an obligation to assign the applica-
tion. All such individuals have a duty to
disclose to the Office information they are
aware of which is material to the examina-
tion of the application. Such information is
material where there is substantial likeli-
hood that a reasonable examiner would
consider it important in deciding whether
to allow the application to issue as a pa-
tent. The duty is commensurate with the
degree of involvement in the preparation
or prosecution of the application.
(b) Disclosures pursuant to this section
may be made to the Office through an at-
torney or agent having responsibility for
the preparation or prosecution of the ap-
plication or through an inventor who is
acting in his own behalf Disclosure to
such an attorney, agent or inventor shall
satisfy the duty, with respect to the infor-
mation disclosed, of any other individual.
Such an attorney, agent or inventor has
no duty to transmit information which is
not material to the examination of the ap-
plication.
(c) Any application may be stricken
from the files if:
(1) An oath or declaration pursuant to
§ 1.63 is signed in blank;
(2) An oath or declaration pursuant to
§ 1.63 is signed without review thereof by
the j)erson making the oath or declara-
tion;
(3) An oath or declaration pursuant to
§ 1.63 is signed without review of the
specification, including the claims, as re-
quired by § 1.63(b);
or
1029 O.G.— 24
1029 OG r.2
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(4) The application papers filed in the
Office are altered after the signing of an
oath or declaration pursuant to § 1.63 re-
ferring to those application papers.
(d) No patent will be granted on an ap-
plication in connection with which fraud
on the Office was practiced or attempted
or the duty of disclosure was violated
through bad faith or gross negligence.
The claims in an application shall be re-
jected if upon examination pursuant to 35
U.S.C. 131 and 132, it is established by
clear and convincing evidence (1) that
any fraud was practiced or attempted on
the Office in connection with the applica-
tion, or in connection with any previous
application upon which the application
relies, or (2) that there was any violation
of the duty of disclosure through bad
faith or gross negligence in connection
with the application, or in connection
with any previous application upon which
the application relies.
(e) The examination of an application
for compliance with paragraph (d) of this
section will normally be delayed until
such time as (1) all other matters are re-
solved, or (2) appellant's reply brief pur-
suant to § 1.193(b) has been received and
the application is otherwise prepared for
consideration by the Board of Appeals, at
which time the appeal will be suspended
for examination pursuant to paragraph (d)
of this section. The prosecution of the ap-
plication will be reopened to the extent
necessary to conduct the examination pur-
suant to paragraph (d) of this section in-
cluding any appeal pursuant to § 1.191. If
an appeal has already been filed based on
a rejection on other grounds, any further
rejection under this section shall be treat-
ed in accordance with § 1.193(c).
(0 Any member of the public may seek
to have an application stricken from the
files pursuant to paragraph (c) of this sec-
tion by filing a timely petition to strike
the application from the files. Any such
timely petition and any accompanying pa-
pers will be entered in the application file
if the petition and accompanying papers
(1) specifically identify the application to
which the petition is directed, and (2) are
either served upon the applicant in accor-
dance with § 1.248, or filed with the Of-
fice in duplicate in the event service is
not possible. Any such petition filed by an
attorney or agent must be in compliance
with § 1.346.
(g) A petition to strike an application
from the files submitted in accordance
with the second sentence of paragraph (f)
of this section will be considered by the
Office. An acknowledgement of the entry
of such a petition in a reissue application
file will be sent to the member of the pub-
lic filing the petition. A member of the
public filing such a petition in an applica-
tion for an original patent will not receive
any communications from the Office re-
lating to the petition, other than the re-
turn of a self-addressed postcard which
the member of the public may include
with the petition in order to receive an
acknowledgement by the Office that the
petition has been received. The Office
will communicate with the applicant re-
garding any such petition entered in the
application file and may require the appli-
cant to respond to the Office on matters
raised by the petition. The active partici-
pation of the member of the public filing
a petition pursuant to paragraph (0 of this
section ends with the filing of the petition
and no further submission on behalf of the
petitioner will be acknowledged or con-
sidered unless such submission raises new
issues which could not have been earlier
presented, and thereby constitutes a new
petition.
(h) Any member of the public may seek
to have the claims in an application re-
jected pursuant to paragraph (d) of this
section by filing a timely protest in accor-
dance with § 1.291. Any such protest
filed by an attorney or agent must be in
compliance with § 1.346.
(i) The Office may require applicant to
supply information pursuant to paragraph
(a) of this section in order for the Office
to decide any issues relating to para-
graphs (c) and (d) of this section which
are raised by a petition or a protest, or
are otherwise discovered by the Office.
[42 FR 5593, Jan. 28, 1977; FR 21751, May 19,
1982; and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective
Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.57 [Removed]
(35 U.S.C. 6, Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20463, May 11. 1978; 48 FR 2696, Jan.
20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.58 Chemical and mathematical formu-
las and tables.
(a) The specification, including the
claims, may contain chemical and mathe-
matical formulas, but shall not contain
drawings or flow diagrams. The descrip-
tion portion of the specification may con-
tain tables; claims may contain tables
either if necessary to conform to 35
U.S.C. 1 12 or if otherwise found to be de-
sirable.
(b) All tables and chemical and mathe-
matical formulas in the specification,
including claims, and amendments there-
to, must be on paper which is flexible,
strong, white, smooth, nonshiny, and du-
rable in order to permit use as camera
copy when printing any patent which
may issue. A good grade of bond paper is
acceptable; watermarks should not be
prominent. India ink or its equivalent, or
solid black typewriter, should be used to
secure perfectly black solid lines.
(c) To facilitate camera copying when
printing, the width of formulas and tables
as presented should be limited normally
to 5 inches (12.7 cm.) so that it may ap-
pear as a single column in the printed pa-
tent. If it is not possible to limit the width
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 53
of a formula or table to 5 inches (12.7
cm.), it is permissible to present the for-
mula or table with a maximum width of
10% inches (27.3 cm.) and to place it
sideways on the sheet. Typewritten char-
acters used in such formulas and tables
must be from a block (nonscript) type
font or lettering style having capital let-
ters which are at least 0.08 inch (2. 1 mm.)
high (e.g., elite type). Hand lettering must
be neat, clean, and have a minimum char-
acter height of 0.08 inch (2.1 mm.). A
space at least Vi inch (6.4 mm.) high
should be provided between complex for-
mulas and tables and the text. Tables
should have the lines and columns of data
closely spaced to conserve space, consis-
tent with high degree of legibility.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20463, May 11. 1978]
§ 1.59 Papers of application with filing
date not to be returned.
Papers in an application which has re-
ceived a filing date pursuant to § 1.S3 will
not be returned for any purpose whatev-
er. If applicants have not preserved copies
of the papers, the Office will furnish cop-
ies at the usual cost.
[36 FR 9775, May 28, 1971; 48 FR 2696, Jan.
20, 1983. efTective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.60 Continuation or divisional applica-
tion for invention disclosed in a prior
application.
A continuation or divisional application
(filed under the conditions specified in 35
U.S.C. 120 or 121), which discloses and
claims only subject matter disclosed in a
prior application may be filed as a sepa-
rate application before the patenting or
abandonment of or termination of pro-
ceedings on the prior application. Signing
and execution of the application papers by
the applicant may be omitted provided
the copy is supplied by and accompanied
by a statement by, the applicant or his or
her attorney or agent that the application
papers comprise a true copy of the prior
application as filed. Such statement must
be a verified statement if made by a per-
son not registered to practice before the
Patent and Trademark Office. Only
amendments reducing the number of
claims or adding a reference to the prior
application (§ 1.78(a)) will be entered be-
fore calculating the filing fee and granting
the filing date.
[36 FR 12690, July 3, 1971 and 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, efTective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.61 Filing of applications in the United
States of America as a Designated Of-
fice.
(a) To maintain the benefit of the inter-
national filing date and obtain an
examination as to the patentability of the
invention in the United States, the appli-
cant shall furnish to the U.S. Patent and
Trademark Office not later than the expi-
ration of 20 months from the priority
date: (1) A copy of the international ap-
plication with any amendments, unless it
has been previously furnished by the In-
ternational Bureau or unless it was origi-
nally filed in the U.S. Patent and
Trademark Office; (2) a verified transla-
tion of the international application and a
translation of any amendments into the
English language, if originally filed else-
where in another language; (3) the nation-
al fee (see § 1.44S(aX4)); and (4) an oath
or declaration of the inventor (see § 1.70).
(b) Where an International Searching
Authority has made a declaration that no
international search report will be estab-
lished because the international applica-
tion relates to subject matter which it is
not required to search, or because the ap-
plication fails to comply with the pre-
scribed requirements to such an extent
that a meaningful search could not be car-
ried out, the time for performing the acts
referred to in paragraph (a) of this section
is 2 months from the mailing date of the
declaration to the applicant.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20463, May II. 1978]
§ 1.62 File wrapper continuing procedure.
(a) A continuation, continuation-in-part,
or divisional application, which uses the
specification and drawings from a prior
application to be abandoned, may be filed
before the payment of the issue fee, aban-
donment of, or termination of proceedings
on a prior application. The filing date of
an application filed under this section is
the date on which a request is filed for an
application under this section including
identification of the Serial Number, filing
date, and applicant's name of the prior ap-
plication.
(b) The filing fee for a continuation,
continuation-in-part, or divisional applica-
tion under this section is based on the
number of claims remaining in the appli-
cation after entry of any preliminary
amendment and entry of any amendments
under § 1.116 unentered in the prior ap-
plication which applicant has requested to
be entered in the continuing application.
(c) In the case of a continuation-in-part
application which adds and claims addi-
tional disclosure by amendment, an oath
or declaration as required by § 1.63 must
also be filed. In a continuation or divi-
sional application which discloses and
claims only subject matter disclosed in a
prior application, no additional oath or
declaration is required.
(d) If an application which has been
accorded a filing date pursuant to para-
graph (a) of this section does not include
the appropriate filing fee pursuant to
paragraph (b) of this section, or an oath
or declaration by the applicant in the case
of a continuation-in-part application pur-
suant to paragraph (c) of this section, ap-
1029 OG 54
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
plicant will be so notified and given a
period of time within which to file the
fee, oath, or declaration and to pay the
surcharge as set forth in § 1.16(e) in order
to prevent abandonment of the applica-
tion. The notification pursuant to this
paragraph may be made simultaneously
with any notification of a defect pursuant
to paragraph (a) of this section.
(e) An application filed under this sec-
tion will utilize the file wrapper and con-
tents of the prior application to constitute
the new continuation, continuation-in-
part, or divisional application but will be
assigned a new application serial number.
(0 The filing of an application under
this section will be construed to include a
waiver of secrecy by the applicant under
35 U.S.C. 122 to the extent that any mem-
ber of the public who is entitled under
the provisions of 37 CFR 1.14 to access
to, or information concerning either the
prior application or any continuing appli-
cation filed under the provisions of this
section may be given similar access to, or
similar information concerning, the other
application(s) in the file wrapper.
(g) The filing of a request for a con-
tinuing application under this section will
be considered to be a request to expressly
abandon the prior application as of the fil-
ing date granted the continuing applica-
tion.
(h) The applicant is urged to furnish
the following information relating to the
prior application to the best of his or her
ability:
(1) Title as originally filed and as last
amended;
(2) Name of applicant as originally filed
and as last amended;
(3) Current correspondence address of
y^ applicant;
(4) Identification of prior foreign appli-
cation and any priority claim under 35
U.S.C. 119.
(i) Envelopes containing only applica-
tion papers and fees for filing under this
section should be marked "Box FWC".
[47 FR 47242, Oct. 25, 1982 and 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.63 Oath or declaration.
(a) An oath or declaration filed under
§ 1.51(a) (2) as a part of an application
must:
(1) Be executed in accordance with ei-
ther § 1.66 or § 1.68;
(2) Identify the specification to which it
is directed;
(3) Identify each inventor and the resi-
dence and country of citizenship of each
inventor; and
(4) State whether the inventor is a sole
or joint inventor of the invention claimed.
(b) In addition to meeting the require-
ments of paragraph (a), the oath or decla-
ration must state that the person making
the oath or declaration:
(1) Has reviewed and understands the
contents of the specification, including the
claims, as amended by any amendment
specifically referred to in the oath or dec-
laration;
(2) Believes the named inventor or in-
ventors to be the original and first
inventor or inventors of the subject mat-
ter which is claimed and for which a pa-
tent is sought; and
(3) Acknowledges the duty to disclose
information which is material to the ex-
amination of the application in accor-
dance with § 1.56(a).
(c) In addition to meeting the require-
ments of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this
section, the oath or declaration in any ap-
plication in which a claim for foreign pri-
ority is made pursuant to § 1.55 must
identify the foreign application for patent
or inventor's certificate on which priority
is claimed, and any foreign application
having a filing date before that of the ap-
plication on which priority is claimed, by
specifying the application number, coun-
try, day, month and year of its filing.
(d) In any continuation-in-part applica-
tion filed under the conditions specified in
35 U.S.C. 120 which discloses and claims
subject matter in addition to that disclosed
in the prior copending application, the
oath or declaration must also state that the
person making the oath or declaration ac-
knowledges the duty to disclose material
information as defined in § 1.56(a) which
occurred between the filing date of the
prior application and the national or PCT
international filing date of the continua-
tion-in-part application.
[48 FR 2696. Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.64 Person making oath or declaration.
(a) The oath or declaration must be
made by all of the actual inventors except
as provided for in §§ 1.42, 1.43, or 1.47.
(b) If the person making the oath or
declaration is not the inventor (§§ 1,42,
1.43, or 1.47), the oath or declaration
shall state the relationship of the person
to the inventor and, upon information and
belief, the facts which the inventor is re-
quired to state.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.65 [Removed]
[29 FR 18503 Dec. 29, 1964, 34 FR 18857,
Nov. 26, 1969; 42 FR 5594, Jan. 28, 1977 and
48 FR 2696, Jan. 20. 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.66 Officers authorized to administer
oaths.
(a) The oath or affirmation may be
made before any person within the United
States authorized by law to administer
oaths. An oath made in a foreign country
may be made before any diplomatic or
consular officer of the United States au-
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 55
thorized to administer oaths, or before
any officer having an official seal and au-
thorized to administer oaths in the foreign
country in which the applicant may be,
whose authority shall be proved by a cer-
tificate of a diplomatic or consular officer
of the United States, or by an apostille of
an official designated by a foreign coun-
try which, by treaty or convention, ac-
cords like effect to apostilles of
designated officials in the United States.
The oath shall be attested in all cases in
this and other countries, by the proper of-
ficial seal of the officer before whom the
oath or affirmation is made. Such oath or
affirmation shall be valid as to execution
if it complies with the laws of the State
or country where made. When the person
before whom the oath or affirmation is
made in this country is not provided with
a seal, his official character shall be estab-
lished by competent evidence, as by a
certificate from a clerk of a court of
record or other proper officer having a
seal.
(b) When the oath is taken before an
officer in a country foreign to the United
States, any accompanying application pa-
pers, except the drawings, must be at-
tached together with the oath and a
ribbon passed one or more times through
all the sheets of the application, except
the drawings, and the ends of said ribbon
brought together under the seal before
the latter is affixed and impressed, or each
sheet must be impressed with the official
seal of the officer before whom the oath
is taken. If the papers as filed are not
properly ribboned or each sheet im-
pressed with the seal, the case will be ac-
cepted for examination, but before it is
allowed, duplicate papers, prepared in
compliance with the foregoing sentence,
must be filed.
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.67 Supplemental oath or declaration.
(a) A supplemental oath or declaration
meeting the requirements of § 1.63 may
be required to be filed to correct any defi-
ciencies or inaccuracies present in an ear-
lier filed oath or declaration.
(b) A supplemental oath or declaration
meeting the requirements of § 1.63 must be
filed (1) when a claim is presented for mat-
ter originally shown or described but not
substantially embraced in the statement of
invention or claims originally presented,
and (2) when an oath or declaration sub-
mitted in accordance with § 1.53(d) after
the filing of the specification and any re-
quired drawings specifically and improper-
ly refers to an amendment which includes
new matter. No new matter may be intro-
duced into an application after its filing
date even if a supplemental oath or decla-
ration is filed (§ 1.53(b); § 1.118). In proper
cases the oath or declaration here required
may be made on information and belief by
an applicant other than inventor.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 29 FR 18503,
Dec. 29, 1964; 40 FR 6339, Feb. 11, 1975 and
48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.68 Declaration in lieu of oath.
Any document to be filed in the Patent
and Trademark Office and which is re-
quired by any law, rule, or other regula-
tion to be under oath may be subscribed
to by a written declaration with the ex-
ception of testimony relating to interfer-
ences and other contested cases covered
by §§ 1.271 to 1.286. Such declaration
may be used in lieu of the oath otherwise
required, if, and only if, the declarant is
on the same document, warned that will-
ful false statements and the like are pun-
ishable by fine or imprisonment, or both
(18 U.S.C. 1001) and may jeopardize the
validity of the application or any patent
issuing thereon. The declarant must set
forth in the body of the declaration that
all statements made of his own knowledge
are true and that all statements made on
information and belief are believed to be
true.
[34 FR 14430. Sept. 16, 1969]
§ 1.69 Foreign language oaths and decla-
rations.
(a) Whenever an individual making an
oath or declaration cannot understand
English, the oath or declaration must be
in a language that such individual can un-
derstand and shall state that such individ-
ual understands the content of any
documents to which the oath or declara-
tion relates.
(b) Unless the text of any oath or decla-
ration in a language other than English is
a form provided or approved by the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office, it must be ac-
companied by a verified English trans-
lation, except that in the case of an oath
or declaration filed under § 1.63, the
translation may be filed in the Office no
later than two months from the date ap-
plicant is notified to file the translation.
[42 FR 5594, Jan. 28, 1977 and 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.70 Oath or declaration under 35
U.S.C. 371(c) (4).
(a) When an applicant of an internation-
al application, if the inventor, desires to
enter the national stage under 35 U.S.C.
371, he or she must file an oath or decla-
ration in accordance with § 1.63.
(b) If the international application was
made as provided in §§ 1.422, 1.423 or
1.425, the applicant shall state his or her
relationship to the inventor and, upon in-
formation and belief, the facts which the
inventor is required by this section to
state.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20463. May 11, 1978 and 48 FR 2696.
Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
1029 OG 56
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
Specification
AUTHORITY: Secs. 1.71 to 1.79 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 112.
§ 1.71 Detailed description and speciHca-
tion of the invention.
(a) The specification must include a
written description of the invention or
discovery and of the manner and process
of making and using the same, and is re-
quired to be in such full, clear, concise,
and exact terms as to enable any person
skilled in the art or science to which the
invention or discovery appertains, or with
which it is most nearly connected, to
make and use the same.
(b) The specification must set forth the
precise invention for which a patent is
solicited, in such manner as to distinguish
it from other inventions and from what is
old. It must describe completely a specific
embodiment of the process, machine,
manufacture, composition of matter or
improvement invented, and must explain
the mode of operation or principle when-
ever applicable. The best mode contem-
plated by the inventor of carrying out his
invention must be set forth.
(c) In the case of an improvement, the
specification must particularly point out
the part or parts of the process, machine,
manufacture, or composition of matter to
which the improvement relates, and the
description should be confined to the spe-
cific improvement and to such parts as
necessarily cooperate with it or as may be
necessary to a complete understanding or
description of it.
§ 1.72 Title and abstract.
(a) The title of the invention, which
should be as short and specific as possible,
should appear as a heading on the first
page of the specification, if it does not
otherwise appear at the beginning of the
application.
(b) A brief abstract of the technical dis-
closure in the specification must be set
forth on a separate sheet, preferably fol-
lowing the claims under the heading "Ab-
stract of the Disclosure." The purpose of
the abstract is to enable the Patent and
Trademark Office and the public general-
ly to determine quickly from a cursory in-
spection the nature and gist of the
technical disclosure. The abstract shall
not be used for interpreting the scope of
the claims.
(Pub. L. 94-131. 89 Stat. 685)
[31 FR 12922, Oct. 4, 1966. and 43 FR 20464,
May 11, 1978]
§ 1.73 Summary of the invention.
A brief summary of the invention indi-
cating its nature and substance, which
may include a statement of the object of
the invention, should precede the detailed
description. Such summary should, when
set forth, be commensurate with the in-
vention as claimed and any object recited
should be that of the invention as
claimed.
§ 1.74 Reference to drawings.
When there are drawings, there shall be
a brief description of the several views of
the drawings and the detailed description
of the invention shall refer to the different
views by specifying the numbers of the
figures and to the different parts by use of
reference letters or numerals (preferably
the latter).
§ 1.75 aaim(s).
(a) The specification must conclude
with a claim particularly pointing out and
distinctly claiming the subject matter
which the applicant regards as his inven-
tion or discovery.
(b) More than one claim may be pres-
ented provided they differ substantially
from each other and are not unduly multi-
plied.
(c) One or more claims may be present-
ed in dependent form, referring back to
and further limiting another claim or
claims in the same application. Any de-
pendent claim which refers to more than
one other claim ("multiple dependent
claim") shall refer to such other claims in
the alternative only. A multiple depen-
dent claim shall not serve as a basis for
any other multiple dependent claim. For
fee calculation purposes under § 1.16, a
multiple dependent claim will be consid-
ered to be that number of claims to which
direct reference is made therein. For fee
calculation purposes, also, any claim de-
pending from a multiple dependent claim
will be considered to be that number of
claims to which direct reference is made
in that multiple dependent claim. In addi-
tion to the other filing fees, any original
application which is filed with, or is
amended to include, multiple dependent
claims must have paid therein the fee set
forth in § 1.16(d). Claims in dependent
form shall be construed to include all the
limitations of the claim incorporated by
reference into the dependent claim. A
multiple dependent claim shall be con-
strued to incorporate by reference all the
limitations of each of the particular claims
in relation to which it is being considered.
(d)(1) The claim or claims must con-
form to the invention as set forth in the
remainder of the specification and the
terms and phrases used in the claims must
find clear support or antecedent basis in
the description so that the meaning of the
terms in the claims may be ascertainable
by reference to the description. (See
§ l-58(a).)
(2) See §§ 1.141 to 1.146 as to claiming
different inventions in one application.
(e) Where the nature of the case admits,
as in the case of an improvement, any in-
dependent claim should contain in the fol-
lowing order: (1) A preamble comprising
a general description of all the elements
or steps of the claimed combination
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 57
which are conventional or known, (2) a
phrase such as "wherein the improvement
comprises," and (3) those elements, steps
and/or relationships which constitute that
portion of the claimed combination which
the applicant considers as the new or im-
proved portion.
(0 If there are several claims, they shall
be numbered consecutively in Arabic nu-
merals.
(g) All dependent claims should be
grouped together with the claim or claims
to which they refer to the extent possible.
[31 FR 12922, Oct. 4. 1966, 36 FR 12690, July
3, 1971; 37 FR 21995, Oct. 18, 1972; 43 FR
4015, Jan. 31, 1978 and 47 FR 33086, July 30,
1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.77 Arrangement of application ele-
ments. "^^
The elements of the application should
appear in the following order:
(a) Title of the invention; or an intro-
ductory portion stating the name, citizen-
ship, and residence of the applicant, and
the title of the invention may be used.
(b) [Reserved]
. (c)(1) Cross-reference to related appli-
cations, if any.
(2) Reference to a "microfiche appen-
dix" if any. (See § 1.96(b)). The total
number of microfiche and total number of
frames should be specified.
(d) Brief summary of the invention.
(e) Brief description of the several
views of the drawing, if there are draw-
ings.
(0 Detailed description,
(g) Claim or claims,
(h) Abstract of the disclosure,
(i) Signed oath or declaration,
(j) Drawings.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685; 35 U.S.C. 6 and
41)
[43 FR 20464, May 11, 1978, 46 FR 2612, Jan.
12, 1981; 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective
Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.78 Cross-references to other applica-
tions.
(a) When an applicant files an applica-
tion claiming an invention disclosed in a
prior filed copending national application
or international application designating
the United States of America of the same
applicant, the second application must
contain or be amended to contain in the
first sentence of the specification follow-
ing the title a reference to such prior ap-
plication, identifying it by serial number
and filing date or international application
number and international filing date ^nd
indicating the relationship of the applica-
tions, if the benefit of the filing date of
such prior application is to be claimed.
Cross-references to other related applica-
tions may be made when appropriate.
(See§ 1.14(b)).
(b) Where two or more applications
filed by the same applicant contain con-
flicting claims, elimination of such claims
from all but one application may be re-
quired in the absence of good and suffi-
cient reason for their retention during
pendency in more than one application.
(c) Where two or more applications, or
an application and a patent naming differ-
ent inventors and owned by the same par-
ty contain conflicting claims, the assignee
may be called upon to state which named
inventor is the prior inventor. In addition
to making said statement, the assignee
may also explain why an interference
should be declared or that no conflict ex-
ists in fact.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[31 FR 12922, Oct. 4, 1966; 36 FR 7312, Apr.
17, 1971; 43 FR 20464, May 11, 1978]
§ 1.79 Reservation clauses not permitted.
A reservation for a future application
of subject matter disclosed but not
claimed in a pending application will not
be permitted in the pending application,
but an application disclosing unclaimed
subject matter may contain a reference to
a later filed application of the same appli-
cant or owned by a common assignee
disclosing and claiming that subject mat-
ter.
The Drawings
Authority: Sees. 1.81 to 1.88 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 113.
§ 1.81 Drawings required.
(a) The applicant for a patent is re-
quired to furnish a drawing of his inven-
tion where necessary for the under-
standing of the subject matter sought to
be patented; this drawing must be filed
with the application.
(b) Drawings may include illustrations
which facilitate an understanding of the
invention (for example, flow sheets in
cases of processes, and diagrammatic
views).
(c) Whenever the nature of the subject
matter sought to be patented admits of il-
lustration by a drawing without its being
necessary for the understanding of the
subject matter and the applicant has not
furnished such a drawing, the examiner
will require its submission within a time
period of not less than two months from
the date of the sending of a notice there-
of
(d) Drawings submitted after the filing
date of the application may not be used to
overcome any insufficiency of the specifi-
cation due to lack of an enabling disclo-
sure or otherwise inadequate disclosure
therein, or to supplement the original dis-
closure thereof for the purpose of inter-
pretation of the scope of any claim.
[43FR4015. Jan. 31, 1978]
§ 1.83 Content of drawing.
(a) The drawing must show every
1029 OG 58
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
feature of the invention specified in the
claims. However, conventional features
disclosed in the description and claims,
where their detailed illustration is not es-
sential for a proper understanding of the
invention, should be illustrated in the
drawing in the form of a graphical draw-
ing symbol or a labeled representation
(e.g. a labeled rectangular box).
(b) When the invention consists of an
improvement on an old machine the
drawing must when pojssible exhibit, in
one or more views, the improved portion
itself, disconnected from the old structure,
and also in another view, so much only of
the old structure as will suffice to show
the connection of the invention therewith.
(c) Where the drawings do not comply
with the requirements of paragraphs (a)
and (b) of this section, the examiner shall
require such additional illustration within
a time period of not less than two months
from the date of the sending of a notice
thereof. Such corrections are subject to
the requirements of § 1.81(d).
[31 FR 12923, Oct. 4, 1966 and 43 FR 4015,
Jan. 31, 1978]
§ 1^ Standards for drawings.
(a) Paper and ink. Drawings must be
made upon paper which is flexible,
strong, white, smooth, non-shiny and du-
rable. Two-ply or three-ply bristol board
is preferred. The surface of the paper
should be calendered and of a quality
which will permit erasure and correction
with India ink. India ink, or its equivalent
in quality, is preferred for pen drawings
to secure perfectly black solid lines. The
use of white pigment to cover lines is not
normally acceptable.
(b) Size of sheet and margins. The size
of the sheets on which drawings are made
may either be exactly SVi by 14 inches
(21.6 by 35.6 cm.) or exactly 21.0 by 29.7
cm. (DIN size A4). All drawing sheets in
a particular application must be the same
size. One of the shorter sides of the sheet
is regarded as its top.
(1) On %Vi by 14 inch drawing sheets,
the drawing must include a top margin of
2 inches (5.1 cm.) and bottom and side
margins of Va inch (6.4 mm.) from the
edges, thereby leaving a "sight" precisely
8 by IIH inches (20.3 by 29.8 cm.). Mar-
gin border lines are not permitted. All
work must be included within the "sight".
The sheets may be provided with two V4
inch (6.4 mm.) diameter holes having
their centerlines spaced "/i6 inch (17.5
mm.) below the top edge and IYa inches
(7.0 cm.) apart, said holes being equally
spaced from the respective side edges.
(2) On 21.0 by 29.7 cm. drawing sheets,
the drawing must include a top margin of
at least 2.5 cm., a left side margin of 2.5
cm., a right side margin of 1.5 cm., and a
bottom margin of 1.0 cm. Margin border
lines are not permitted. All work must be
'^contained within a sight size not to ex-
ceed 17 by 26.2 cm.
(c) Character of lines. All drawings
must be made with drafting instruments
or by a process which will give them sat-
isfactory reproduction characteristics. Ev-
ery line and letter must be durable, black,
sufficiently dense and dark, uniformly
thick and well defined; the weight of all
lines and letters must be heavy enough to
permit adequate reproduction. This direc-
tion applies to all lines however fine, to
shading, and to lines representing cut sur-
faces in sectional views. All lines must be
clean, sharp, and solid. Fine or crowded
lines should be avoided. Solid black
should not be used for sectional or sur-
face shading. Freehand work should be
avoided wherever it is possible to do so.
(d) Hatching and shading. (1) Hatching
should be made by oblique parallel lines
spaced sufficiently apart to enable the
lines to be distinguished without difficul-
ty-
(2) Heavy lines on the shade side of ob-
jects should preferably be used except
where they tend to thicken the work and
obscure reference characters. The light
should come from the upper left-hand
corner at an angle of 45°. Surface delinea-
tions should preferably be shown by
proper shading, which should be open.
(e) Scale. The scale to which a drawing
is made ought to be large enough to show
the mechanism without crowding when
the drawing is reduced in size to two-
thirds in reproduction, and views of por-
tions of the mechanism on a larger scale
should be used when necessary to show
details clearly; two or more sheets should
be used if one does not give sufficient
room to accomplish this end, but thfe
number of sheets should not be more than
is necessary.
(0 Reference characters. The different
views should be consecutively numbered
figures. Reference numerals (and letters,
but numerals are preferred) must be plain,
legible and carefully formed, and not be
encircled. They should, if possible, mea-
sure at least one-eighth of an inch (3.2
mm.) in height so that they may bear re-
duction to one twenty-fourth of an inch
(1.1 mm.); and they may be slightly larger
when there is sufficient room. They
should not be so placed in the close and
complex parts of the drawing as to inter-
fere with a thorough comprehension of
the same, and therefore should rarely
cross or mingle with the lines. When nec-
essarily grouped around a certain part,
they should be placed at a little distance,
at the closest point where there is avail-
able space, and connected by lines with
the parts to which they refer. They
should not be placed upon hatched or
shaded surfaces but when necessary, a
blank space may be left in the hatching or
shading where the character occurs so
that it shall appear perfectly distinct and
separate from the work. The same part of
an invention appearing in more than one
view of the drawing must always be des-
ignated by the same character, and the
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 59
same character must never be used to des-
ignate different parts. Reference signs not
mentioned in the description shall not ap-
pear in the drawing, and vice versa.
(g) Symbols, legends. Graphical drawing
symbols and other labeled representations
may be used for conventional elements
when appropriate, subject to approval by
the Office. The elements for which such
symbols and labeled representations are
used must be adequately identified in the
specification. While descriptive matter on
drawings is not permitted, suitable leg-
ends may be used, or may be required, in
proper cases, as in diagrammatic views
and flowsheets or to show materials or
where labeled representations are employ-
ed to illustrate conventional elements. Ar-
rows may be required, in proper cases, to
show direction of movement. The letter-
ing should be as large as, or larger than,
the reference characters.
(h) [Reserved]
(i) Views. The drawing must contain as
many flgures as may be necessary to
show the invention; the figures should be
consecutively numbered if possible in the
order in which they appear. The figures
may be plain, elevation, section, or per-
spective views, and detail views of por-
tions of elements, on a larger scale if nec-
essary, may also be used. Exploded views,
with the separated parts of the same fig-
ure embraced by a bracket, to show the
relationship or order of assembly of vari-
ous parts are permissible. When neces-
sary, a view of a large machine or device
in its entirety may be broken and extend-
ed over several sheets if there is no loss in
facility of understanding the view. Where
figures on two or more sheets form in ef-
fect a single complete figure, the figures
on the several sheets should be so ar-
ranged that the complete figure can be
understood by laying the drawing sheets
adjacent to one another. The arrangement
should be such that no part of any of the
figures appearing on the various sheets
are concealed and that the complete fig-
ure can be understood even though
spaces will occur in the complete figure
because of the margins on the drawing
sheets. The plane upon which a sectional
view is taken should be indicated on the
general view by a broken line, the ends of
which should be designated by numerals
corresponding to the figure number of the
sectional view and have arrows applied to
indicate the direction in which the view is
taken. A moved position may be shown
by a broken line superimposed upon a
suitable figure if this can be done without
crowding, otherwise a separate figure
must be used for this purpose. Modified
forms of construction can only be shown
in separate figures. Views should not be
connected by projection lines nor should
center lines be used.
(j) Arrangement of views. All views on
the same sheet should stand in the same
direction and, if possible, stand so that
they can be read with the sheet held in an
upright position. If views longer than the
width of the sheet are necessary for the
clearest illustration of the invention, the
sheet may be turned on its side so that the
top of the sheet with the appropriate top
margin is on the right-hand side. One fig-
ure must not be placed upon another or
within the outline of another.
(k) Figure for Official Gazette. Tlie
drawing should, as far as possible, be so
planned that one of the views will be suit-
able for publication in the Official Gazette
as the illustration of the invention.
(1) Extraneous matter. Identifying indi-
cia (such as the attorney's docket number,
inventor's name, number of sheets, etc.)
not to exceed 2% inches (7.0 cm.) in
width may be placed in a centered loca-
tion between the side edges within three-
fourths inch (19.1 mm.) of the top edge.
Authorized security markings may be
placed on the drawings provided they are
outside the illustrations and are removed
when the material is declassified. Other
extraneous matter will not be permitted
upon the face of a drawing.
(m) Transmission of drawings. Drawings
transmitted to the Office should be sent
flat, protected by a sheet of heavy bind-
er's board, or may be rolled for transmis-
sion in a suitable mailing tube; but must
never be folded. If received creased or
mutilated, new drawings will be required.
(See § 1.152 for design drawing, § 1.165 for
plant drawings, and § 1.174 for reissue draw-
ings.)
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959; 31 FR 12923,
Oct. 4, 1966; 36 FR 9775, May 28, 1971; 43 FR
20464, May 11, 1978; and 45 FR 73657, Nov. 6.
1980]
§ 1.85 Informal drawings.
The requirements of § 1.84 relating to
drawings will be strictly enforced. A
drawing not executed in conformity
thereto, if suitable for reproduction, may
be admitted but in such case the drawing
must be corrected or a new one furnish-
ed, as required.
[36 FR 9775, May 28, 1971 and 47 FR 33086,
July 30, 1982. effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.86 [Removed]
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.88 Use of old drawings.
If the drawings of a new application
are to be identical with the drawings of a
previous application of the applicant on
file in the Office, or with part of such
drawings, the old drawings or any sheets
thereof may be used if the prior applica-
tion is, or is about to be, abandoned, or if
the sheets to be used are cancelled in the
prior application. The new application
must be accompanied by a letter request-
ing the transfer of the drawings, which
should be completely identified.
1029 OG 60
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
Models, exhibits, Specimens
Authority: Sees. 1.91 to 1.95 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 1 14.
§ 1.91 Models not generally required as
part of application or patent.
Models were once required in all cases
admitting a model, as a part of the appli-
cation, and these models became a part of
the record of the patent. Such models are
no longer generally required (the descrip-
tion of the invention in the specification,
and the drawings, must be sufficiently full
and complete, and capable of being un-
derstood, to disclose the invention with-
out the aid of a model), and will not be
admitted unless speciflcally called for.
§ 1.92 Model or exhibit may be required.
A model, working model, or other
physical exhibit, may be required if
deemed necessary for any purpose on ex-
amination of the application.
§ 1.93 Specimens.
When the invention relates to a compo-
sition of matter, the applicant may be
required to furnish specimens of the com-
position, or of its ingredients or intermedi-
ates, for the purpose of inspection or
experiment.
§ 1.94 Return of models, exhibits or spec-
imens.
Models, exhibits, or specimens in appli-
cations which have become abandoned,
and also in other applications on conclu-
sion of the prosecution, may be returned
to the applicant upon demand and at his
expense, unless it be deemed necessary
that they be preserved in the Office. Such
physical exhibits in contested cases may
be returned to the parties at their expense.
If not claimed within a reasonable time,
they may be disposed of at the discretion
of the Commissioner.
§ 1.95 Copies of exhibits.
Copies of models or other physical ex-
hibits will not ordinarily be furnished by
the Office, and any model or exhibit in an
application or patent shall not be taken
from the Office except in the custody of
an employee of the Office specially autho-
rized by the Commissioner.
§ 1.96 Submission of computer program
listings.
Descriptions of the operation and gen-
eral content of computer program listings
should appear in the description portion
of the specification. A computer program
listing for the purpose of these rules is de-
fined as a print-out that lists in appropri-
ate sequence the instructions, routines,
and other contents of a program for a
computer. The program listing may be ei-
ther in machine or machine-independent
(object or source) language which will
cause a computer to perform a desired
procedure or task such as solve a prob-
lem, regulate the flow of work in a com-
puter, or control or monitor * events.
Computer program listings may be sub-
mitted in patent applications in the fol-
lowing forms:
(a) Material which will be printed in the
patent. If the computer program listing is
contained on 10 printout pages or less, it
must be submitted either as drawings or
as part of the specification.
(1) Drawings. The listing may be sub-
mitted in the manner and complying with
the requirements for drawings as provid-
ed in § 1.84. At least one figure numeral
is required on each sheet of drawing.
(2) Specification, (i) The listing may be
submitted as part of the specification in
accordance with the provisions of § 1.52,
at the end of the description but before
the claims.
(ii) The listing may be submitted as part
of the specification in the form of com-
puter printout sheets (commonly 14 by 11
inches in size) for use as "camera ready
copy" when a patent is subsequently
printed. Such computer printout sheets
must be original copies from the comput-
er with dark solid black letters not less
than 0.21 cm high, on white, unshaded
and unlined paper, the printing on each
sheet must be limited to an area 9 inches
high by 13 inches wide, and the sheets
should be submitted in a protective cover.
When printed in patents, such computer
printout sheets will appear at the end of
the description but before the claims and
will usually be reduced about Vi in size
with two printout sheets being printed as
one patent specification page. Any
amendments must be made by way of
submission of a substitute sheet if the
copy is to be used for camera ready copy.
(b) As an appendix which will not be
printed. If a computer program listing
printout is 11 or more pages long, appli-
cants may submit such listing in the form
of microfiche, referred to in the specifica-
tion (see § 1.77 (c)(2)). Such microfiche
filed with a patent application is to be re-
ferred to as a "microfiche appendix." The
"microfiche appendix" will not be part of
the printed patent. Reference in the appli-
cation to the "microfiche appendix"
should be made at the beginning of the
specification at the location indicated in
§ 1.77(c)(2). Any amendments thereto
must be made by way of revised micro-
fiche. All computer program listings sub-
mitted on paper will be printed as part of
the patent.
(1) Availability of appendix. Such com-
puter program listings on microfiche will
be available to the public for inspection,
and paper or microfiche copies thereof
will be separately available for purchase,
after a patent based on such an applica-
tion is granted or the application is other-
wise made publicly available.
(2) Submission requirements. Computer-
generated information submitted as an ap-
pendix to an application for patent shall
be in the form of microfiche in accor-
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 61
dance with the standards set forth in the
following American National (ANSI) or
National Micrographics Association
(NMA) Standards (Note: As new editions
of these standards are published, the latest
shall apply):
ANSI PH 1.28-1976— Specifications for
Photographic Film for Archival
Records, Silver-Gelatin Type, on Cellu-
lose Ester Base.
ANSI PH 1.41—1976 Specifications for
Photographic Film for Archival
Records, Silver-Gelatin Type, on Poly-
ester Bd.se
NMA-MSl (1971) Quality Standards for
Computer Output Microfilm.
ANSl/NMA MS2 (1978) Format and
Coding Standards for Computer Output
Microfilm.
NMA MS5 (ANSI PH 5.9-1975) Micro-
fiche of Documents.
ANSI PH 2.19 (1959)— Diffuse Transmis-
sion Density.
except as modified or clarified below:
(i) Either Computer-Output Microfilm
(COM) output or copies of photographed
paper copy may be submitted. In the for-
mer case, NMA standards MSI and MS2
apply; in the latter case, standard MS5
applies.
(ii) Film submitted shall be first genera-
tion (camera film) negative appearing mi-
crofiche (with emulsion on the back side
of the film when viewed with the images
right reading).
(iii) Reduction ratio of microfiche sub-
mitted should be 24:1 or a similar ratio
where variation from said ratio is required
in order to fit the documents into the im-
age area of the microfiche format used.
(iv) Film submitted shall have a thick-
ness of at least .005 inches (0. 1 3 mm) and
not more than .009 inches (0.23 mm) for
either cellulose acetate base or polyester
base type.
(v) Both microfiche formats Al (98
frames, 14 columns X 7 rows) and A3 (63
frames, 9 columns X 7 rows) which are
described in NMA standard MS2 (Al is
also described in MS5) are acceptable for
use in preparation of microfiche submit-
ted.
(vi) At least the left-most '/j (50 mm X
12 mm) of the header or title area of each
microfiche submitted shall be clear or
positive appearing so that the Patent and
Trademark Office can apply serial num-
ber and filing date thereto in an eye-read-
able form. The middle portion of the
header shall be used by applicant to apply
an eye-readable application identification
such as the title and/or the first inventor's
name. The attorney's docket number may
be included. The final right-hand portion
of the microfiche shall contain sequence
information for the microfiche, such as 1
of 4, 2 of 4, etc.
(vii) Additional requirements which ap-
ply specifically to microfiche of filmed
paper copy:
(A) The first frame of each microfiche
submitted shall contain a standard test tar-
get which contains five NBS Micro-copy
Resolution Test Charts (No. lOlOA), one
in the center and one in each comer. See
illustration on page 2 of NMA
Recommended Practice MS 104, Inspec-
tion and Quality Control of First Genera-
tion Silver Halide Microfilm. See also
paragraph 7 of NMA-MS5.
(B) The second frame of each micro-
fiche submitted must contain a fully de-
scriptive title and the inventor's name as
filed.
(C) The pages or lines appearing on the
microfiche frames should be consecutive-
ly numbered.
(D) Pagination of the microfiche frames
shall be from left to right and from top to
bottom.
(E) At a reduction of 24:1 resolution of
the original microfilm shall be at least 120
lines per mm (5.0 target) so that repro-
duction copies may be expected to com-
ply with provisions of paragraph 7.1.4 of
NMA Standard MS5.
(F) Background density of negative ap-
pearing camera master microfiche of
filmed paper documents shall be within
the range 0.9 to 1.2 and line density
should be no greater than 0.08. The densi-
ty shall be visual diffuse density as mea-
sured using the method described in
ANSI Standard PH 2.19.
(G) An index, when included, should
appear in the last frame (lower right hand
corner when data is right-reading) of each
microfiche. See NMA-MS5, paragraph
6.6.
(viii) Microfiche generated by Comput-
er Output Microfilm (COM).
(A) Background density of negative-ap-
pearing COM-generated camera master
microfiche shall be within the range of
1.5 to 2.0 and line density should be no
greater than 0.2. The density shall be vi-
sual diffuse density as described in ANSI
PH2.19.
(B) The first frame of each microfiche
submitted should contain a resolution test
frame in conformance with NMA stan-
dard MSI.
(C) The second frame of each micro-
fiche submitted must contain a fully
descriptive title and the inventor's name
as filed.
(D) The pages or lines appearing on the
microfiche frames should be consecutive-
ly numbered.
(E) It is preferred that pagination of the
microfiche frames be from left to right
and top to bottom but the alternative, i.e.,
from top to bottom and from left to right,
is also acceptable.
(^) An index, when included, should
appear on the last frame (lower right
hand comer when data is right reading)
of each microfiche.
(G) Amendment of microfiche must be
made by way of replacement microfiche.
(35 U.S.C. 6 and 41)
[46 FR 2612, Jan. 12, 1981]
1029 OG h2
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
Information Disclosure Statement
§ 1.97 Filing of information disclosure
statement.
(a) As a means of complying with the
duty of disclosure set forth in § 1.56, ap-
plicants are encouraged to file an informa-
tion disclosure statement at the time of
filing the application or within the later of
three months after the filing date of the
application or two months after applicant
receives the filing receipt. If filed sepa-
rately, the disclosure statement should, in
addition to the identification of the appli-
cation, include the Group Art Unit to
which the application is assigned as indi-
cated on the filing receipt. The disclosure
statement may either be separate from the
specification or may be incorporated
therein.
(b) A disclosure statement filed in ac-
cordance with paragraph (a) of this sec-
tion shall not be construed as a repre-
sentation that a search has been made or
that no other material information as de-
fined in § 1.56(a) exists.
[42 FR 5594, Jan. 28, 1977 and 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.98 Content of information disclosure
statement.
(a) Any disclosure statement filed under
§ 1.97 or § 1.99 shall include: (1) A listing
of patents, publications or other informa-
tion and (2) a concise explanation of the
relevance of each listed item. The disclo-
sure statement shall be accompanied by a
copy of each listed patent or publication
or other item of information in written
form or of at least the portions thereof
considered by the person filing the disclo-
sure statement to be pertinent. All United
States patents listed should be identified
by their patent numbers, patent dates and
names of the patentees. Each foreign
published application or patent should be
cited by identifying the country or office
which issued it, the document number
and publication date indicated on the doc-
ument. Each printed publication should
be identified by author (if any), title of
the publication, pages, date and place of
publication.
(b) When two or more patents or publi-
cations considered material are substan-
tially identical, a copy of a representative
one may be included in the statement and
others merely listed. A translation of the
pertinent portions of foreign language pa-
tents or publications considered material
should be transmitted if an existing trans-
lation is readily available to the applicant.
[42 FR 5594, Jan. 28, 1977 and 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, efTective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.99 Updating of information disclosure
statement.
If prior to issuance of a patent an appli-
cant, pursuant to his or her duty of dis-
closure under § 1.56, wishes to bring to
the attention of the Office additional pa-
tents, publications or other information
not previously submitted, the additional
information should be submitted to the
Office with reasonable promptness. It
may be included in a supplemental infor-
mation disclosure statement or may be in-
corporated into other communications to
be considered by the examiner. Any
transmittal of additional information shall
be accompanied by explanations of rele-
vance and by copies in accordance with
the requirements of § 1.98.
[42 FR 5594, Jan. 28, 1977 and 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
Examination of Applications
Authority: Sees. 1.101 to 1.108 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 131, 132.
§ 1.101 Order of examination.
(a) Applications filed in the Patent and
Trademark Office and accepted as com-
plete applications are assigned for exami-
nation to the respective examining groups
having the classes of inventions to which
the applications relate. Applications shall
be taken up for examination by the exam-
iner to whom they have been assigned in
the order in which they have been filed
except for those applications in which ex-
amination has been advanced pursuant to
§ 1.102 and those applications in which
the Office has accepted a request for
waiver of patent rights under § 1.139. In-
ternational applications which have com-
plied with the requirements of 35 U.S.C.
371(c) will be taken up for action based
on the date on which such requirements
were met. However, unless a request has
been filed under 35 U.S.C. 371(f), no ac-
tion may be taken prior to 21 months
from the priority date.
(b) Applications which have been acted
upon by the examiner, and which have
been placed by the applicant in condition
for further action by the examiner
(amended applications) shall be taken up
for action in such order as shall be deter-
mined by the Commissioner.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22. 1959; 29 FR 13470,
Sept. 30, 1964; 33 FR 5624, Apr. 11, 1968; 34
FR 18857, Nov. 26, 1969 and 48 FR 2696, Jan.
20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.102 Advancement of examination.
(a) Applications will not be advanced
out of turn for examination or for further
action except as provided by this part, or
upon order of the Commissioner to expe-
dite the business of the Office, or upon fil-
ing of a request under paragraph (b) of
this section or upon filing a petition under
paragraphs (c) or (d) of this section with
a verified showing which, in the opinion
of the Commissioner, will justify so ad-
vancing it.
(b) Applications wherein the inventions
are deemed of peculiar importance to
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG b}
some branch of the pubhc service and the
head of some department of the Govern-
ment requests immediate action for that
reason, may be advanced for examination.
(c) A petition to make an application
special may be filed without a fee if the
basis for the petition is the applicant's age
or health or that the invention will mate-
rially enhance the quality of the environ-
ment or materially contribute to the
development or conservation of energy
resources.
(d) A petition to make an application
special on grounds other than those re-
ferred to in paragraph (c) of this section
must be accompanied by the petition fee
set forth in § 1.1 7(i).
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.103 Suspension of action.
(a) Suspension of action by the Office
will be granted for good and sufficient
cause and for a reasonable time specified
upon petition by the applicant and, if such
cause is not the fault of the Office, the
payment of the fee set forth in § 1.1 7(i).
Action will not be suspended when a re-
sponse by the applicant to an Office ac-
tion is required.
(b) If action by the Office on an
application is suspended when not re-
quested by the applicant, the applicant
shall be notified of the reasons therefor.
(c) Action by the examiner may be sus-
pended by order of the Commissioner in
the case of applications owned by the
United States whenever publication of the
invention by the granting of a patent
thereon might be detrimental to the pub-
lic safety or defense, at the request of the
appropriate department or agency.
(d) Action on applications in which the
Office has accepted a request filed under
§ 1.139 will be suspended for the entire
pendency of these applications except for
purposes relating to proceedings under §
1.201(b).
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959; 33 FR 5624, Apr.
11, 1968 and 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effec-
tive Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.104 Nature of examination; examin-
er's action.
(a) On taking up an application for
examination or a patent in a reexamina-
tion proceeding, the examiner shall make
a thorough study thereof and shall make a
thorough investigation of the available
prior art relating to the subject matter of
the claimed invention. The examination
shall be complete with respect both to
compliance of the application or patent
under reexamination with the applicable
statutes and rules and to the patentability
of the invention as claimed, as well as
with respect to matters of form, unless
otherwise indicated.
(b) The applicant, or in the case of a
reexamination proceeding, both the patent
owner and the requester, will be notified
of the examiner's action. The reasons for
any adverse action or any objection or re-
quirement will be stated and such infor-
mation or references will be given as may
be useful in aiding the applicant, or in the
case of a reexamination proceeding the
patent owner, to judge the propriety of
continuing the prosecution.
(c) An international-type search will be
made in all national applications filed on
and after June 1, 1978.
(d) Any national application may also
have an international-type search report
prepared thereon at the time of the nation-
al examination on the merits, upon specific
written request therefor and payment of
the international-type search report fee.
See § 1.21(e) for amount of fee for prepa-
ration of international-type search report.
NOTE: The Patent and Trademark Of-
fice does not require that a formal report
of an international-type search be pre-
pared in order to obtain a search fee re-
fund in a later filed international appli-
cation.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685; 35 U.S.C. 6)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22. 1959; 43 FR 20465,
May 11, 1978; 46 FR 29182, May 29. 1981. 47
FR 33086, July 30. 1982. effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.105 Completeness of examiner's ac-
tion.
The examiner's action will be complete
as to all matters, except that in appropri-
ate circumstances, such as misjoinder of
invention, fundamental defects in the ap-
plication, and the like, the action of the
examiner may be limited to such matters
before further action is made. However,
matters of form need not be raised by the
examiner until a claim is found allowable.
§ 1.106 Rejection of claims.
(a) If the invention is not considered
patentable, or not considered patentable
as claimed, the claims, or those consid-
ered unpatentable will be rejected.
(b) In rejecting claims for want of nov-
elty or for obviousness, the examiner must
cite the best references at his command.
When a reference is complex or shows or
describes inventions other than that
claimed by the applicant, the particular
part relied on must be designated as near-
ly as practicable. The pertinence of each
reference, if not apparent, must be clearly
explained and each rejected claim speci-
fied.
(c) In rejecting claims the examiner
may rely upon admissions by the appli-
cant, or the patent owner in a reexamin-
ation proceeding, as to any matter affect-
ing patentability and, insofar as rejections
in applications are concerned, may also
rely upon facts within his or her knowl-
edge pursuant to § 1.107.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959; 34 FR 18857,
Nov. 26, 1969; 47 FR 21752, May 19, 1982]
1029 OG b4
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
§ 1.107 Citation of references.
(a) If domestic patents are cited by the
examiner, their numbers and dates, and
the names of the patentees, and the classes
of inventions must be stated. If foreign
pubHshed applications or patents are cit-
ed, their nationality or country, numbers
and dates, and the names of the patentees
must be stated, and such other data must
be furnished as may be necessary to en-
able the applicant, or in the case of a
reexamination proceeding, the patent
owner, to identify the published applica-
tions or patents cited. In citing foreign
published applications or patents, in case
only a part of the document is involved,
the particular pages and sheets containing
the parts relied upon must be identified. If
printed publications are cited, the author
(if any), title, date, pages or plates, and
place of publication, or place where copy
can be found, shall be given.
(b) When a rejection in an application
is based on facts within the personal
knowledge of an employee of the Office,
the data shall be as specific as possible,
and the reference must be supported,
when called for by the applicant, by the
affidavit of such employee, and such affi-
davit shall be subject to contradiction or
explanation by the affidavits of the appli-
cant and other persons.
[46 FR 29182, May 29. 1981]
§ 1.108 Abandoned applications not cited.
Abandoned applications as such will
not be cited as references except those
which have become abandoned as a result
of the filing and acceptance of a request
under § 1.139.
[33 FR 5624, Apr. 11, 1968]
§ 1.109 Reasons for allowance.
If the examiner believes that the record
of the prosecution as a whole does not
make clear his or her reasons for allowing
a claim or claims, the examiner may set
forth such reasoning. The reasons shall be
incorporated into an Office action reject-
ing other claims of the application or pa-
tent under reexamination or be the subject
of a separate communication to the appli-
cant or patent owner. The applicant or
patent owner may file a statement
commenting on the reasons for allowance
within such time as may be specified by
the examiner. Failure to file such a state-
ment shall not give fiseJto any implication
that the applicant or patent owner agrees
with or acquiesces in the reasoning of the
examiner.
[46 FR 29182. May 29, 1981]
Action by Applicant and Further
Consideration
AUTHORITY: Sccs. 1.111 to 1.113 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 132.
§ 1.111 Reply by applicant or patent own*
er.
(a) After the Office action, if adverse in
any respect, the applicant or patent own-
er, if he or she persists in his or her appli-
cation for a patent or reexamination
proceeding, must reply thereto and may
request reconsideration or further exami-
nation, with or without amendment.
(b) In order to be entitled to reconsid-
eration or further examination, the appli-
cant or patent owner must make request
therefor in writing. The reply by the ap-
plicant or patent owner must distinctly
and specifically point out the supposed er-
rors in the examiner's action and must re-
spond to every ground of objection and
rejection in the prior Office action. If the
reply is with respect to an application, a
request may be made that objections or
requirements as to form not necessary to
further consideration of the claims be
held in abeyance until allowable subject
matter is indicated. The applicant's or pa-
tent owner's reply must appear through-
out to be a bona fide attempt to advance
the case to final action. A general allega-
tion that the claims define a patentable in-
vention without specifically pointing out
how the language of the claims patentably
distinguishes them from the references
does not comply with the requirements of
this section.
(c) In amending in response to a rejec-
tion of claims in an application or patent
undergoing reexamination, the applicant
or patent owner must clearly point out
the patentable novelty which he or she
thinks the claims present in view of the
state of the art disclosed by the references
cited or the objections made. He or she
must also show how the amendments
avoid such references or objections. (See
§§ 1.135 and 1.136 for time for reply.)
[46 FR 29182, May 29, 1981]
§ 1.112 Reconsideration.
After response by applicant or patent
owner (§ 1.111), the application or patent
under reexamination will be reconsidered
and again examined. The applicant or pa-
tent owner will be notified if claims are
rejected, or objections or requirements
made, in the same manner as after the
first examination. Applicant or patent
owner may respond to such Office action
in the same manner provided in § 1.111,
with or without amendment. Any amend-
ments after the second Office action must
ordinarily be restricted to the rejection or
to the objections or requirements made.
The application or patent under reexam-
ination will be again considered, and so
on repeatedly, unless the examiner has in-
dicated that the action is final.
[46 FR 29182, May 29, 1981]
§ 1.113 Final rejection or action.
(a) On the second or any subsequent
examination or consideration the rejection
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 65
or other action may be made final, where-
upon applicant's or patent owner's re-
sponse is limited to appeal in the case of
rejection of any claim (§ 1.191), or to
amendment as specified in § 1.116. Peti-
tion may be taken to the Commissioner in
the case of objections or requirements not
involved in the rejection of any claim
(§ 1.181). Response to a final rejection or
action must include cancellation of, or ap-
peal from the rejection of, each rejected
claim. If any claim stands allowed, the re-
sponse to a final rejection or action must
comply with any requirements or objec-
tion as to form.
(b) In making such final rejection, the
examiner shall repeat or state all grounds
of rejection then considered applicable to
the claims in the case, clearly stating the
reasons therefor.
[24 FR 10332. Dec. 22, 1959 and 46 FR 29182,
May 29, 1981]
Amendments
Authority: Sees. 1.115 to 1.127 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 132.
§ 1.115 Amendment.
The applicant may amend before or af-
ter the first examination and action and
also after the second or subsequent exami-
nation or reconsideration as specified in
§ 1.112 or when and as specifically re-
quired by the examiner. The patent owner
may amend in accordance with §§ 1.510(e)
and 1.530(b) prior to reexamination, and
during reexamination proceedings in ac-
cordance with §§ 1.112 and 1.116.
[46 FR 29183, May 29, 1981]
§ 1.116 Amendments after final action.
(a) After final rejection or action
(§ 1.113) amendments may be made can-
celling claims or complying with any
requirement of form which has been
made. Amendments presenting rejected
claims in better form for consideration on
appeal may be admitted. The admission
of, or refusal to admit, any amendment af-
ter final rejection, and any proceedings
relative thereto, shall not operate to re-
lieve the application or patent under
reexamination from its condition as sub-
ject to appeal or to save the application
from abandonment under § 1.135.
(b) If amendments touching the merits
of the application or patent under reexam-
ination are presented after final rejection,
or after appeal has been taken, or when
such amendment might not otherwise be
proper, they may be admitted upon a
showing of good and sufficient reasons
why they are necessary and were not ear-
lier presented.
(c) No amendment can be made as a
matter of right in appealed cases. After
decision on appeal, amendments can only
be made as provided in § 1.198, or to car-
ry into effect a recommendation under
§ 1.196.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959 and 46 FR 29183,
May 29, 1981]
§ 1.117 Amendment and rension required.
The specification, claims and drawing
must be amended and revised when re-
quired, to correct inaccuracies of descrip-
tion and definition or unnecessary prolix-
ity, and to secure corresj)ondence between
the claims, the specification and the draw-
ing.
§ 1.118 Amendment of disclosure.
(a) No amendment shall introduce new
matter into the disclosure of an applica-
tion after the filing date of the application
(§ 1.53(b)). All amendments to the specifi-
cation, including the claims, and the
drawings filed after the filing date of the
application must conform to at least one
of them as it was at the time of the filing
of the application. Matter not found in ei-
ther, involving a departure from or an ad-
dition to the original disclosure, cannot be
added to the application after its filing
date even though supported by an oath or
declaration in accordance with § 1.63 or
§ 1.67 filed after the filing date of the ap-
plication.
(b) If it is determined that an amend-
ment filed after the filing date of the
application introduces new matter, claims
containing new matter will be rejected
and deletion of the new matter in the
specification and drawings will be re-
quired even if the amendment is accompa-
nied by an oath or declaration in accord-
ance with § 1.63 or § 1.67.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.119 Amendment of claims.
The claims may be amended by cancel-
ing particular claims, by presenting new
claims, or by rewriting particular claims
as indicated in § 1.121. The requirements
of § 1.111 must be complied with by
pointing out the specific distinctions be-
lieved to render the claims patentable
over the references in presenting argu-
ments in support of new claims and
amendments.
[32 FR 13583, Sept. 28, 1967]
§ 1.121 Manner of making amendments.
(a) Erasures, additions, insertions, or al-
terations of the Office file of papers and
records must not be physically entered by
the applicant. Amendments to the applica-
tion (excluding the claims) are made by
filing a paper (which should conform to
§ 1.52), directing or requesting that speci-
fied amendments be made. The exact
word or words to be stricken out or in-
serted by said amendment must be speci-
fied and the precise point indicated where
the deletion or insertion is to be made.
1029 OG 66
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
(b) Except as otherwise provided here-
in, a particular claim may be amended
only by directions to cancel or by rewrit-
ing such claim with underlining below the
word or words added and brackets
around the word or words deleted. The
rewriting of a claim in this form will be
construed as directing the cancellation of
the original claim; however, the original
claim number followed by the parentheti-
cal word "amended" must be used for the
rewritten claim. If a previously rewritten
claim is rewritten, underlining and brack-
eting will be applied in reference to the
previously rewritten claim with the par-
enthetical expression "twice amended,"
"three times amended," etc., following
the original claim number.
(c) A particular claim may be amended
in the manner indicated for the applica-
tion in paragraph (a) of this section to the
extent of corrections in spelling, punctua-
tion, and typographical errors. Additional
amendments in this manner will be admit-
ted provided the changes are limited to:
(1) Deletions and/or (2) the addition of
no more than five words in any one
claim. Any amendment submitted with in-
structions to amend particular claims but
failing to conform to the provisions of
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section may
be considered nonresponsive and treated
accordingly.
(d) Where underlining or brackets are
intended to appear in the printed patent
or are properly part of the claimed mate-
rial and not intended as symbolic of
changes in the particular claim, amend-
ment by rewriting in accordance with
paragraph (b) of this section shall be pro-
hibited.
(e) In reissue applications, both the de-
scriptive portion and the claims are to be
amended as specified in paragraph (a) of
this section.
(0 Proposed amendments presented in
patents involved in reexamination pro-
ceedings must be presented in the form of
a full copy of the text of: (1) Each claim
which is amended and (2) each paragraph
of the description which is amended. Mat-
ter deleted from the patent shall be placed
between brackets and matter added shall
be underlined. Copies of the printed
claims from the patent may be used with
any additions being indicated by carets
and deleted material being placed be-
tween brackets. Claims must not be re-
numbered and the numbering of the
claims added for reexamination must fol-
low the number of the highest numbered
patent claim. No amendment may enlarge
the scope of the claims of the patent. No
new matter may be introduced into the
patent.
[32 FR 13583, Sept. 28, 1967 and 46 FR 29183.
May 29, 1981]
§ 1.122 Entry and consideration of
amendments.
(a) Amendments are "entered" by the
Office by making the proposed deletions
by drawing a line in red ink through the
word or words cancelled, and by making
the proposed substitutions or insertions in
red ink, small insertions being written in
at the designated place and larger inser-
tions being indicated by reference.
(b) Ordinarily all amendments present-
ed in a paper filed while the application is
open to amendment are entered and con-
sidered, subsequent cancellation or cor-
rection being required of improper
amendments. Untimely amendatory pa-
pers may be refused entry and consider-
ation in whole or in part.
§ 1.123 Amendments to the drawing.
No change in the drawing may be
made except by permission of the Office.
Permissible changes in the construction
shown in any drawing may be made only
by bonded draftsmen, at applicant's ex-
pense, or by the submission of substitute
drawings by applicant. A sketch in per-
manent ink showing proposed changes, to
become part of the record, must be filed
for approval by the examiner. The paper
requesting amendments to the drawing
should be separate from other papers.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 36 FR 9775, May
28, 1971 and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effec-
tive Feb. 27. 1983]
§ 1.124 Amendment of amendments.
When an amendatory clause is to be
amended, it should be wholly rewritten
and the original insertion canceled, so
that no interlineations or deletions shall
appear in the clause as finally presented.
Matter canceled by amendment can be re-
instated only by a subsequent amendment
presenting the canceled matter as a new
insertion.
§ 1.125 Substitute specification.
If the number or nature of the amend-
ments shall render it difficult to consider
the case, or to arrange the papers for
printing or copying, the examiner may re-
quire the entire specification, including
the claims, or any part thereof, to be re-
written. A substitute specification may
not be accepted unless it has been re-
quired by the examiner or unless it is
clear to the examiner that acceptance of a
substitute specification would facilitate
processing of the application. Any substi-
tute specification filed must be accompa-
nied by a statement that the substitute
specification includes no new matter.
Such statement must be a verified state-
ment if made by a person not registered
to practice before the Office.
[48 FR 2696. Jan. 20. 1983. effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.126 Numbering of claims.
The original numbering of the claims
must be preserved throughout the prose-
cution. When claims are canceled, the re-
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 67
maining claims must not be renumbered.
When claims are added, except when
presented in accordance with § 1.121(b),
they must be numbered by the applicant
consecutively beginning with the number
next following the highest numbered
claim previously presented (whether en-
tered or not). When the application is
ready for allowance, the examiner, if nec-
essary, will renumber the claims consecu-
tively in the order in which they appear
or in such order as may have been re-
quested by applicant.
[32 FR 13583, Sept. 28, 1967]
§ 1.127 Petition from refusal to admit
amendment.
From the refusal of the primary exam-
iner to admit an amendment, in whole or
in part, a petition will lie to the Commis-
sioner under § 1.181.
§ 1.132 Affidavits or declarations travers-
ing grounds of rejection.
When any claim of an application or a
patent under reexamination is rejected on
reference to a domestic patent which sub-
stantially shows or describes but does not
claim the invention, or on reference to a
foreign patent, or to a printed publication,
or to facts within the personal knowledge
of an employee of the Office, or when re-
jected upon a mode or capability of oper-
ation attributed to a reference, or because
the alleged invention is held to be inoper-
ative or lacking in utility, or frivolous or
injurious to public health or morals, affi-
davits or declarations traversing these ref-
erences or objections may be received.
(35 U.S.C. 132)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959. 34 FR 18857.
Nov. 26. 1969 and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20. 1983.
efTective Feb. 27. 1983]
Affidavits Overcoming Rejections
§ 1.131 Affidavit or declaration of prior
invention to overcome cited patent or
publication.
(a) When any claim of an application or
a patent under reexamination is rejected
on reference to a domestic patent which
substantially shows or describes but does
not claim the rejected invention, or on
reference to a foreign patent or to a print-
ed publication, and the applicant or the
owner of the patent under reexamination
shall make oath or declaration as to facts
showing a completion of the invention in
this country before the filing date of the
application on which the domestic patent
issued, or before the date of the foreign
patent, or before the date of the printed
publication, then the patent or publication
cited shall not bar the grant of a patent to
the applicant or the confirmation of the
patentability of the claims of the patent,
unless the date of such patent or printed
publication is more than one year prior to
the date on which the applicant's or pa-
tent owner's application was filed in this
country.
(b) The showing of facts shall be such,
in character and weight, as to establish re-
duction to practice prior to the effective
date of the reference, or conception of
the invention prior to the effective date of
the reference coupled with due diligence
from said date to a subsequent reduction
to practice or to the filing of the applica-
tion. Original exhibits of drawings or
records, or photocopies thereof, must ac-
company and form part of the affidavit or
declaration or their absence satisfactorily
explained.
(35 U.S.C. 132)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959; 34 FR 18857.
Nov. 26, 1969 and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20. 1983.
effective Feb. 27, 1983]
Interviews
§ 1.133 Interviews.
(a) Interviews with examiners concern-
ing applications and other matters pend-
ing before the Office must be had in the
examiners' rooms at such times, within of-
fice hours, as the respective examiners
may designate. Interviews will not be per-
mitted at any other time or place without
the authority of the Commissioner. Inter-
views for the discussion of the patentabili-
ty of pending applications will not be had
before the first official action thereon. In-
terviews should be arranged for in ad-
vance.
(b) In every instance where reconsider-
ation is requested in view of an interview
with an examiner, a complete written
statement of the reasons presented at the
interview as warranting favorable action
must be filed by the applicant. An inter-
view does not remove the necessity for
response to Office actions as specified in
§§1.111,1.135.
Time for Response by Applicant;
Abanexdnment of Application
Authority: Sees. 1.135 to 1.138 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 133.
§ 1.134 Time period for response to an
Office action.
An Office action will notify the appli-
cant of any non-statutory or shortened
statutory time period set for response to
an Office action. Unless the applicant is
notified in writing that response is re-
quired in less than six months, a maximum
period of six months is allowed.
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, efTective Oct. 1.
1982]
§ 1.135 Abandonment for failure to re-
spond within time period.
(a) If an applicant of a patent applica-
1029 OG 68
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
tion fails to respond within the time peri-
od provided under §§ 1.134 and 1.136, the
application will become abandoned unless
an Office action indicates otherwise.
(b) Prosecution of an application to
save it from abandonment pursuant to
paragraph (a) of this section must include
such complete and proper action as the
condition of the case may require. The
admission of an amendment not respon-
sive to the last Office action, or refusal to
admit the same, and any proceedings rela-
tive thereto, shall not operate to save the
application from abandonment.
(c) When action by the applicant is a
bona fide attempt to respond and to ad-
vance the case to final action, and is sub-
stantially a complete response to the
Office action, but consideration of some
matter or compliance with some require-
ment has been inadvertently omitted, op-
portunity to explain and supply the
omission may be given before the ques-
tion of abandonment is considered.
(d) Prompt ratification or filing of a
correctly signed copy may be accepted in
case of an unsigned or improperly signed
paper. (See § 1.7.)
[47 FR 33086. July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.136 Filing of timely responses with pe-
tition and fee for extension of time and
extensions of time for cause.
(a) If an applicant is required to re-
spond within a non-statutory or shortened
statutory time period, applicant may re-
spond up to four months after the time
period set if a petition for an extension of
time and the fee set in § 1 . 1 7 are filed pri-
or to or with the response, unless (1) ap-
plicant is notified otherwise in an Office
action or (2) the application is involved in
an interference declared pursuant to
§ 1.207. The date on which the response,
the petition, and the fee have been filed is
the date of the response and also the date
for purposes of determining the period of
extension and the corresponding amount
of the fee. The expiration of the time peri-
od is determined by the amount of the fee
paid. In no case may an applicant respond
later than the maximum time period set
by statute, or be granted an extension of
time under paragraph (b) of this section
when the provisions of this paragraph are
available.
(b) When a response with petition and
fee for extension of time cannot be filed
pursujant to paragraph (a) of this section,
the time for response will be extended
only for sufficient cause, and for a reason-
able time specified. Any request for such
extension must be filed on or before the
day on which action by the applicant is
due, but in no case will the mere filing of
the request effect any extension. In no
case can any extension carry the date on
which response to an Office action is due
beyond the maximum time period set by
statute or be granted when the provisions
of paragraph (a) of this section are avail-
able. See § 1.245 for extension of time in
interference proceedings.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 41 FR 757, Jan.
5, 1976 and 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effec-
tive Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.137 Revival of abandoned application.
(a) An application abandoned for fail-
ure to prosecute may be revived as a
pending application if it is shown to the
satisfaction of the Commissioner that the
delay was unavoidable. A petition to re-
vive an abandoned application must be
promptly filed after the applicant is noti-
fied of, or otherwise becomes aware of,
the abandonment, and must be accompa-
nied by a showing of the causes of the de-
lay, by the proposed response unless it
has been previously filed, and by the peti-
tion fee set forth in § 1.17(1). Such show-
ing must be a verified showing if made by
a person not registered to practice before
the Patent and Trademark Office.
(b) An application unintentionally aban-
doned for failure to prosecute, except pur-
suant to § 1.53(d), may be revived as a
pending application if the delay was unin-
tentional. A petition to revive an uninten-
tionally abandoned application must be
filed within one year of the date on
which the application became abandoned
or be filed within three months of the
date of the first decision on a petition to
revive under paragraph (a) of this section
which was filed within one year of the
date of abandonment of the application. A
petition to revive an unintentionally aban-
doned application must be accompanied
by (1) a statement that the abandonment
was unintentional, (2) a proposed response
unless it has been previously filed, and (3)
a petition fee as set forth in § 1.1 7(m).
Such statement must be a verified state-
ment if made by a person not registered
to practice before the Patent and Trade-
mark Office. The Commissioner may re-
quire additional information where there
is a question whether the abandonment
was unintentional. The three month peri-
od set forth in this paragraph may be ex-
tended under the provisions of § 1.136(a),
but no further extensions under § 1.136(b)
will be granted. Petitions to the Commis-
sioner under § 1.183 to waive any time
periods for requesting revival of an unin-
tentionally abandoned application will not
be considered, but will be returned to the
applicant.
(c) Any petition pursuant to paragraph
(a) of this section not filed within six
months of the date of abandonment must
be accompanied by a terminal disclaimer
with fee under § 1.321 dedicating to the
public a terminal part of the term of any
patent granted thereon equivalent to the
period of abandonment of the application.
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982 and 48 FR 2696,
Jan. 20, 1983 revised paragraph (b) effective
Feb. 27, 1983]
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 69
§ 1.138 Express abandonment.
An application may be expressly aban-
doned by filing in the Patent and Trade-
mark Office a written declaration of
abandonment signed by the applicant him-
self or herself, and the assignee of record,
if any, identifying the application. Except
as provided in § 1.62 an application may
also be expressly abandoned by filing a
written declaration of abandonment
signed by the attorney or agent of record.
A registered attorney or agent acting un-
der the provision of § 1.34(a), or of
record, may also expressly abandon a pri-
or application as of the filing date granted
to a continuing application when filing
such a continuing application. Express
abandonment of the application may not
be recognized by the Office unless it is
actually received by appropriate officials
in time to act thereon before the date of
issue.
[34 FR 18857, Nov. 26, 1969 and 47 FR 47243,
Oct. 25, 1982, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.139 Waiver of patent rights.
An applicant may waive his rights to
an enforceable patent based on a pending
patent application by filing in the Patent
and Trademark Office a written waiver of
patent rights, a consent to the publication
of an abstract, and authorization to open
the complete application to inspection by
the general public, and a declaration of
abandonment signed by the applicant and
the assignee of record or by the attorney
or agent of record.
[33FR5624, Apr. 11, 1968]
Joinder of Inventions in One
Application; Restriction
Authority: Sees. 1.141 to 1.147 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 121.
§ 1.141 Different inventions in one appli-
cation.
(a) Two or more independent and dis-
tinct inventions, that is, inventions which
do not form a single general inventive
concept, may not be claimed in one appli-
cation, except that more than one species
of an invention, not to exceed a reason-
able number, may be specifically claimed
in different claims in one application, pro-
vided the application also includes an al-
lowable claim generic to all the claimed
species and all the claims to species in ex-
cess of one are written in dependent form
(§ 1.75) or otherwise include all the limi-
tations of the generic claim.
(b) A group of claims of different cate-
gories in an application so linked as to
form a single inventive concept are con-
sidered to be one invention. In particular
any of the following groupings of claims
of different categories may be included in
the same application:
(1) In addition to a claim for a given
product,
(i) A claim for one process specially
adapted for the manufacture of the said
product, as where the process of making
as claimed cannot be used to make other
and materially different products;
(ii) A claim for one use of the said
product, as where said use as claimed
cannot be practiced with another materi-
ally different product; or
(iii) Both (b)(l)(i) and (ii);
(2) In addition to a claim for a given
process, a claim for one apparatus or
means specifically designed for carrying
out of the said process, that is, it cannot
be used to practice another materially dif-
ferent process.
(c) If the situation of paragraph (b)(1)
of this section exists where claims to all
three categories, product, process and use,
are included, and the product claims are
not allowable, the use and process claims
are not so linked as to form a single gen-
eral inventive concept. Where the process
and use claims are not so joined by an al-
lowable linking product claim, the appli-
cant will be required to elect either the
use or the process for prosecution with
the product claim.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20465, May 11. 1978]
§ 1.142 Requirement for restriction.
(a) If two or more independent and dis-
tinct inventions are claimed in a single ap-
plication, the examiner in his action shall
require the applicant in his response to
that action to elect that invention to
which his claim shall be restricted, this
official action being called a requirement
for restriction (also known as a require-
ment for division). If the distinctness and
independence of the inventions be clear,
such requirement will be made before any
action on the merits; however, it may be
made at any time before final action in
the case at the discretion of the examiner.
(b) Claims to the invention or inven-
tions not elected, if not canceled, are nev-
ertheless withdrawn from further consid-
eration by the examiner by the election,
subject however to reinstatement in the
event the requirement for restriction is
withdrawn or overruled.
§ 1.143 Reconsideration of requirement.
If the applicant disagrees with the re-
quirement for restriction, he may request
reconsideration and withdrawal or modifi-
cation of the requirement, giving the rea-
sons therefor. (See § 1.111.) In requesting
reconsideration the applicant must indi-
cate a provisional election of one inven-
tion for prosecution, which invention
shall be the one elected in the event the
requirement becomes final. The require-
ment for restriction will be reconsidered
on such a request. If the requirement is
repeated and made final the examiner will
at the same time act on the claims to the
invention elected.
1029 OG 70
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
§ 1.144 Petition from requirement for re-
striction.
After a final requirement for restriction,
the applicant, in addition to making any
response due on the remainder of the ac-
tion, may petition the Commissioner to
review the requirement. Petition may be
deferred until after final action on or al-
lowance of claims to the invention
elected, but must be filed not later than
appeal. A petition will not be considered
if reconsideration of the requirement was
not requested. (See § 1.181.)
§ 1.145 Subsequent presentation of claims
for different invention.
If, after an office action on an applica-
tion, the applicant presents claims direct-
ed to an invention distinct from and
independent of the invention previously
claimed, the applicant will be required to
restrict the claims to the invention
previously claimed if the amendment is
entered, subject to reconsideration and re-
view as provided in §§ 1.143 and 1.144.
§ 1.146 Election of species.
In the first action on an application
containing a generic claim and claims re-
stricted separately to each of more than
one species embraced thereby, the exam-
iner may require the applicant in his re-
sponse to that action to elect that species
of his or her invention to which his or
her claim shall be restricted if no generic
claim is held allowable. However, if such
application contains claims directed to
more than a reasonable number of species,
the examiner may require restriction of
the claims to not more than a reasonable
number of species before taking further
action in the case.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20465. May 11. 1978]
Design Patents
§ 1.151 Rules applicable.
The rules relating to applications for
patents for other inventions or discoveries
are also applicable to applications for pa-
tents for designs except as otherwise pro-
vided. (35 U.S.C. 171)
§ 1.152 Drawing.
The design must be represented by a
drawing made in conformity with the
rules laid down for drawings of mechani-
cal inventions and must contain a suffi-
cient number of views to constitute a
complete disclosure of the appearance of
the article. Appropriate surface shading
must be used to show the character or
contour of the surfaces represented.
(35 U.S.C. 113, 171)
§ 1.153 Title, description and claim, oath
or declaration.
(a) The title of the design must desig-
nate the particular article. No description,
other than a reference to the drawing, is
ordinarily required. The claim shall l^ in
formal terms to the ornamental design for
the article (specifying name) as shown, or
as shown and described. More than one
claim is neither required nor permitted.
(b) The oath or declaration required of
the applicant must comply with § 1.63.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 29 FR 18503,
Dec. 29, 1964 and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983,
effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.154 Arrangement of specification.
The following order of arrangement
should be observed in framing design
specifications:
(a) Preamble, stating name of the appli-
cant and title of the design.
(b) Description of the figure or figures
of the drawing.
(c) Description, if any.
(d) Claim.
(e) Signed oath or declaration (See
§ 1.153(b)).
(35 U.S.C. 171)
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.155 Issue and term of design patents.
(a) If, on examination, it shall appear
that the applicant is entitled to a design
patent under the law, a notice of allow-
ance will be sent to the applicant, or ap-
plicant's attorney or agent, calling for the
payment of the issue fee (§ 1.18(b)). If this
issue fee is not paid within 3 months of
the date of the notice of allowance, the
application shall be regarded as aban-
doned.
(b) The Commissioner may accept the
payment of the issue fee later than three
months after the mailing of the notice of
allowance as though no abandonment had
ever occurred if upon petition the delay
in payment is shown to have been un-
avoidable. The petition to accept the
delayed payment must be promptly filed
after the applicant is notified of, or other-
wise becomes aware of, the abandonment,
and must be accompanied by (1) the issue
fee, unless it has been previously submit-
ted, (2) the fee for delayed payment
(§ 1.17(1)), and (3) a showing that the de-
lay was unavoidable. Such showing must
be a verified showing if made by a person
not registered to practice before the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office.
(c) The Commissioner may, upon peti-
tion, accept the payment of the issue fee
later than three months after the mailing
of the notice of allowance as though no
abandonment had ever occurred if the de-
lay in payment was unintentional. The pe-
tition to accept the delayed payment must
be filed within one year of the date on
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 CX} 71
which the appUcation became abandoned
or be filed within three months of the
date of the first decision on a petition un-
der paragraph (b) of this section which
was filed within one year of the date of
abandonment of the application. The peti-
tion to accept the delayed payment must
be accompanied by (1) the issue fee, un-
less it has been previously submitted, (2)
the fee for unintentionally delayed pay-
ment (§ 1.1 7(m)), and (3) a statement that
the delay was unintentional. Such state-
ment must be a verified statement if made
by a person not registered to practice be-
fore the Patent and Trademark Office.
The Commissioner may require additional
information where there is a question
whether the abandonment was uninten-
tional. The three-month period from the
date of the first decision referred to in
this paragraph may be extended under the
provisions of § 1.136(a), but no further ex-
tensions under § 1.136(b) will be granted.
Petitions to the Commissioner under
§ 1.183 to waive any time periods for re-
questing revival of an unintentionally
abandoned application will not be consid-
ered, but will be returned to the appli-
cant.
(d) Any petition pursuant to paragraph
(b) of this section not filed within six
months of the date of abandonment must
be accompanied by a terminal disclaimer
with fee under § 1.321 dedicating to the
public a terminal part of the term of any
patent granted thereon equivalent to the
period of abandonment of the application.
[40 FR 44813, Sept. 30, 1975 and 47 FR 33086,
July 30, 1982. effective Oct. 1. 1982]
Plant Patents
§ 1.161 Rules applicable.
The rules relating to applications for
patent for other inventions or discoveries
are also applicable to applications for pa-
tents for plants except as otherwise pro-
vided.
§ 1.162 Applicant, oath or declaration.
The applicant for a plant patent must
be the person who has invented or dis-
covered and asexually reproduced the
new and distinct variety of plant for
which a patent is sought (or as provided
in §§ 1.42, 1.43, and 1.47). The oath or
declaration required of the applicant, in
addition to the averments required by
§ 1.63, must state that he or she has asex-
ually reproduced the plant. Where the
plant is a newly found plant the oath or
declaration must also state that it was
found in a cultivated area.
(35 U.S.C. 161)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 29 FR 18503,
Dec. 29, 1964 and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983,
effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.163 Specification.
(a) The specification must contain as
full and complete a disclosure as possible
of the plant and the characteristics thereof
that distinguish the same over related
known varieties, and its antecedents, and
must particularly point out where and in
what manner the variety of plant has been
asexually reproduced. In the case of a
newly found plant, the specification must
particularly point out the location and
character of the area where the plant was
discovered.
(b) Two copies of the specification (in-
cluding the claim) must be submitted, but
only one signed oath or declaration is re-
quired. The second copy of the specifica-
tion may be a legible carbon copy of the
original.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.164 Qaim.
The claim shall be in formal terms to
the new and distinct variety of the speci-
fied plant as described and illustrated, and
may also recite the principal distinguish-
ing characteristics. More than one claim
is not permitted.
(35 U.S.C. 162)
§ 1.165 Drawings.
(a) Plant patent drawings are not me-
chanical drawings and should be artisti-
cally and competently executed. Figure
numbers and reference characters need
not be employed unless required by the
examiner. The drawing must disclose all
the distinctive characteristics of the plant
capable of visual representation.
(b) The drawing may be in color and
when color is a distinguishing characteris-
tic of the new variety, the drawing must
be in color. Two copies of color drawings
must be submitted. Color drawings may
be made either in permanent water color
or oil, or in lieu thereof may be photo-
graphs made by color photography or
properly colored on sensitized paper. Per-
manently mounted color photographs are
acceptable. The paper in any case must
correspond in size, weight and quality to
the paper required for other drawings.
See § 1.84.
(35 U.S.C. 113, 161)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 40 FR 57359.
Dec. 9, 1975 and 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982,
effective Oct 1, 1982]
§ 1.166 Specimens.
The applicant may be required to fur-
nish specimens of the plant, or its flower
or fruit, in a quantity and at a time in its
stage of growth as may be designated, for
study and inspection. Such specimens,
properly packed, must be forwarded in
conformity with instructions furnished to
the applicant. When it is not possible to
1029 OG 72
forward such specimens, plants must be
made available for official inspection
where grown.
(35 U.S.C. 114, 1611 ^
§ 1.167 Examination.
(a) Applications may be submitted by
the Patent and Trademark Office to the
Department of Agriculture for study and
report.
(b) Affidavits or declarations from qual-
ified agricultural or horticultural experts
regarding the novelty and distinctiveness
of the variety of plant may be received
when the need of such affidavits or decla-
rations is indicated.
(35 U.S.C. 161, 164; E.O. 5464, Oct. 17, 1930)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959 and 34 FR 18857,
Nov. 26, 1969]
Reissues
Authority: Sees. 1.171 to 1.179 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 251.
§ 1.171 Application for reissue.
An application for reissue must contain
the same parts required for an application
for an original patent, complying with all
the rules relating thereto except as other-
wise provided, and in addition, must com-
ply with the requirements of the rules
relating to reissue applications. The appli-
cation must be accompanied by a certified
copy of an abstract of title or an order for
a title report accompanied by the fee set
forth in § 1.19(b) (2), to be placed in the
file, and by an offer to surrender the orig-
inal patent (§ 1.178).
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, efTective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.172 Applicants, assignees.
(a) A reissue oath must be signed and
sworn to or declaration made by the in-
ventor or inventors except as otherwise
provided (see §§ 1.42, 1.43, 1.47), and
must be accompanied by the written as-
sent of all assignees, if any, owning an
undivided interest in the patent, but a re-
issue oath may be made and sworn to or
declaration made by the assignee of the
entire interest if the application does not
seek to enlarge the scope of the claims of
the original patent.
(b) A reissue will be granted to the
original patentee, his legal representatives
or assigns as the interest may appear.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 29 FR 10853,
Dec. 29, 1964 and 48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983,
effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.173 Speciflcation.
The specification of the reissue applica-
tion must include the entire specification
and claims of the patent, with the matter
to be omitted by reissue enclosed in
square brackets; and any additions made
by the reissue must be underlined, so that
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
the old and the new specifications and
claims may be readily compared. Claims
should not be renumbered and the num-
bering of claims added by reissue should
follow the number of the highest num-
bered patent claim. No new matter shall
be introduced into the specification.
§ 1.174 Drawings.
(a) The drawings upon which the origi-
nal patent was issued may be used in reis-
sue applications if no changes whatsoever
are to be made in the drawings. In such
cases, when the reissue application is
filed, the applicant must submit a tempo-
rary drawing which may consist of a
copy of the printed drawings of the pa-
tent or a photoprint of the original draw-
ings of the size required for original
drawing.
(b) Amendments which can be made in
a reissue drawing, that is, changes from
the drawing of the patent, are restricted.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983, efTective Feb. 27,
1983]
§ 1.175 Reissue oath or declaration.
(a) Applicants for reissue, in addition
to complying with the requirements of
§ 1.63, must also file with their applica-
tions a statement under oath or declara-
tion as follows:
(1) When the applicant verily believes
the original patent to be wholly or partly
inoperative or invalid, stating such belief
and the reasons why.
(2) When it is claimed that such patent
is so inoperative or invalid "by reason of
a defective specification or drawing," par-
ticularly specifying such defects.
(3) When it is claimed that such patent
is inoperative or invalid "by reason of the
patentee claiming more or less than he
had the right to claim in the patent," dis-
tinctly specifying the excess or insufficien-
cy in the claims.
(4) [Reserved]
(5) Particularly specifying the errors
relied upon, and how they arose or oc-
curred.
(6) Stating that said errors arose "with-
out any deceptive intention" on the part
of the applicant.
(7) Acknowledging a duty to disclose
information applicant is aware of which is
material to the examination of the applica-
tion.
(b) Corroborating affidavits or declara-
tions of others may be filed and the
examiner may, in any case, require addi-
tional information or affidavits or declara-
tions concerning the application for
reissue and its object.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 29 FR 18503,
Dec. 29, 1964; 34 FR 18857, Nov. 26, 1969; 47
FR 21752, May 19, 1982 and 48 FR 2696, Jan.
20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.176 Examination of reissue.
An original claim, if re-presented in the
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 73
reissue application, is subject to reexam-
ination, and the entire application will be
examined in the same manner as original
applications, subject to the rules relating
thereto, excepting that division will not
be required. Applications for reissue will
be acted on by the examiner in advance
of other applications, but not sooner than
two months after announcement of the fil-
ing of the reissue application has appeared
in the Official Gazette.
[42 FR 5595, Jan. 28, 1977]
§ 1.177 Reissue in diyisions.
The Commissioner may, in his or her
discretion, cause several patents to be is-
sued for distinct and separate parts of the
thing patented, upon demand of the appli-
cant, and upon payment of the required
fee for each division. Each division of a
reissue constitutes the subject of a sepa-
rate specification descriptive of the part
or parts of the invention claimed in such
division; and the drawing may represent
only such part or parts, subject to the
provisions of §§ 1.83 and 1.84. On filing
divisional reissue applications, they shall
be referred to the Commissioner. Unless
otherwise ordered by the Commissioner
upon petition and payment of the fee set
forth in § 1.1 7(i), all the divisions of a re-
issue will issue simultaneously; if there be
any controversy as to one division, the
others will be withheld from issue until
the controversy is ended, unless the Com-
missioner shall otherwise order.
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.178 Original patent.
The application for a reissue must be
accompanied by an offer to surrender the
original patent. The application should
also be accompanied by the original pa-
tent, or if the original is lost or inaccessi-
ble, by an affidavit or declaration to that
effect. The application may be accepted
for examination in the absence of the
original patent or the affidavit or declara-
tion, but one or the other must be sup-
plied before the case is allowed. If a
reissue be refused, the original patent will
be returned to applicant upon his request.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 34 FR 18857.
Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.179 Notice of reissue application.
When an application for a reissue is
filed, there will be placed in the file of the
original patent a notice stating that an ap-
plication for reissue has been filed. When
the reissue is granted or the reissue appli-
cation is otherwise terminated, the fact
will be added to the notice in the file of
the original patent.
Petitions and Action by the Commissioner
§ 1.181 Petition to the Commissioner.
(a) Petition may be taken to the Com-
missioner: (1) From any action or require-
ment of any examiner in the ex parte
prosecution of an application which is not
subject to appeal to the Board of Appeals
or to the court; (2) in cases in which a stat-
ute or the rules specify that the matter is
to be determined directly by or reviewed
by the Commissioner; and (3) to invoke
the supervisory authority of the Commis-
sioner in appropriate circumstances.
(b) Any such petition must contain a
statement of the facts involved and the
point or points to be reviewed and the ac-
tion requested. Briefs or memoranda, if
any, in support thereof should accompany
or be embodied in the petition; and where
facts are to be proven, the proof in the
form of affidavits or declarations (and ex-
hibits, if any) must accompany the peti-
tion.
(c) When a petition is taken from an
action or requirement of an examiner
in the ex parte prosecution of an applica-
tion, it may be required that there have
been a proper request for reconsideration
(§ 1.111) and a repeated action by the ex-
aminer. The examiner may be directed by
the Commissioner to furnish a written
statement, within a specified time, setting
forth the reasons for his decision upon the
matters averred in the petition, supplying
a copy thereof to the petitioner.
(d) Where a fee is required for a peti-
tion to the Commissioner the appropriate
section of this part will so indicate. If any
required fee does not accompany the peti-
tion, the petition will be dismissed.
(e) Oral hearing will not be granted ex-
cept when considered necessary by the
Commissioner.
(0 Except as otherwise provided in
these rules, any such petition not filed
within 2 months from the action com-
plained of, may be dismissed as untimely.
The mere filing of a petition will not stay
the period for reply to an Examiner's ac-
tion which may be running against an ap-
plication, nor act as a stay of other
proceedings.
(g) The Commissioner may delegate to
appropriate Patent and Trademark Office
officials the determination of petitions.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 34 FR 18857,
Nov. 26, 1969; 35 FR 4260, Mar. 7, 1970 and
47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.182 Questions not specifically provid-
ed for.
All cases not specifically provided for
in the regulations of this part will be de-
cided in accordance with the merits of
each case by or under the authority of the
Commissioner, and such decision will be
communicated to the interested parties in
writing. Any petition seeking a decision
under this section must be accompanied
by the petition fee set forth in § 1.1 7(h).
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1.
1982]
1029 OG 74
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
§ 1.183 Suspension of rules.
In an extraordinary situation, when jus-
tice requires, any requirement of the regu-
lations in this part which is not a
requirement of the statutes may be sus-
pended or waived by the Commissioner
or the Commissioner's designee, sua spon-
te, or on petition of the interested party,
subject to such other requirements as may
be imposed. Any petition under this sec-
tion must be accompanied by the petition
fee set forth in § 1.17(h).
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.184 Reconsideration of cases decided
by former Commissioners.
Cases which have been decided by one
Commissioner will not be reconsidered by
his successor except in accordance with
the principles which govern the granting
of new trials.
Appeal to the Board of Appeals
Authority: Sees. 1.191 to 1.198 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 134.
§ 1.191 Appeal to Board of Appeals.
(a) Every applicant for a patent or for
reissue of a patent, or every owner of a
patent under reexamination, any of the
claims of which have been twice rejected,
or who has been given a final rejection
(§ 1.113), may, upon the payment of the
fee set forth in § 1.17(e), appeal from the
decision of the examiner to the Board of
Appeals within the time allowed for re-
sponse.
(b) The appeal in an application must
identify the rejected claim or claims
appealed, and must be signed by the ap-
plicant or duly authorized attorney or
agent. An appeal in a reexamination pro-
ceeding must identify the rejected claim
or claims appealed, and must be signed by
the patent owner or duly authorized at-
torney or agent.
(c) Except as otherwise provided by
§ 1.206, an appeal when taken must be
taken from the rejection of all claims un-
der rejection which the applicant or pa-
tent owner proposes to contest. Questions
relating to matters not affecting the merits
of the invention may be required to be
settled before an appeal can be consid-
ered.
[46 FR 29183, May 29, 1981 and 47 FR 33086,
July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.192 Appellant's brief.
(a) The appellant shall, within 2 months
from the date of the notice of appeal un-
der § 1.191 in an application, reissue ap-
plication, or patent under reexamination,
or within the time allowed for response to
the action appealed from, if such time is
later, file a brief in triplicate. The brief
must be accompanied by the requisite fee
set forth in § 1.17(0 and must set forth
the authorities and arguments on which
the appellant will rely to maintain the ap-
peal. The brief must include a concise ex-
planation of the invention which should
refer to the drawing by reference charac-
ters, and a copy of the claims involved.
The time periods set forth herein are sub-
ject to the provisions of § 1.136.
(b) On failure to file the brief, accompa-
nied by the requisite fee, within the time
allowed, the appeal shall stand dismissed.
[36 FR 5850, Mar. 30, 1971, 46 FR 29183, May
29, 1981, 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective
Oct. 1, 1982]-
§ 1.193 Examiner's answer.
(a) The primary examiner may, within
such time as may be directed by the Com-
missioner, furnish a written statement in
answer to the appellant's brief including
such explanation of the invention claimed
and of the references and grounds of re-
jection as may be necessary, supplying a
copy to the appellant. If the primary ex-
aminer shall find that the appeal is not
regular in form or does not relate to an
appealable action, he shall so state and a
petition from such decision may be taken
to the Commissioner as provided in
§ 1.181.
(b) The appellant may file a reply brief
directed only to such new points of argu-
ment as may be raised in the examiner's
answer, within twenty days from the date
of such answer. However, if the examin-
er's answer states a new ground of rejec-
tion appellant may file a reply thereto
within two months from the date of such
answer; such reply may include any
amendment or material appropriate to the
new ground.
(c) Any decision pursuant to § 1.56(d)
rejecting claims in an application already
under appeal of a rejection based on other
grounds shall constitute a supplemental
examiner's answer introducing a new
ground of rejection and removing the sus-
pension of the appeal introduced pursuant
to § 1.56(e), in which case appellant may
file a reply thereto within two months
from the date of the supplemental examin-
er's answer. Such reply will be considered
and responded to as necessary. Appellant
may file a reply brief directed to any such
response within one month of the date of
the response or within such other time as
may be set in the response.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, as amended at 34
FR 18858, Nov. 26, 1969; 47 FR 21752, May
19, 1982]
§ 1.194 Oral hearing.
(a) An oral hearing should be requested
only in those circumstances in which the
appellant considers such a hearing neces-
sary or desirable for a proper presentation
of his appeal. An appeal decided without
an oral hearing will receive the same con-
sideration by the Board of Appeals as ap-
peals decided after ordl hearing.
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFRCE
1029 OG 75
(b) If appellant desires an oral hearing,
appellant must file a written request for
such hearing accompanied by the fee set
forth in § 1.17(g) within one month after
the date of the examiner's answer. If
appellant requests an oral hearing and
submits therewith the fee set forth in
§ 1.17(g), an oral argument may be pres-
ented by, or on behalf of, the primary ex-
aminer if considered desirable by either
the primary examiner or the Board.
(c) If no request and fee for oral hear-
ing have been timely filed by the appel-
lant, the appeal will be assigned for
consideration and decision. If the appel-
lant has requested an oral hearing and has
submitted the fee set forth in § 1.17(g), a
day of hearing will be set, and due notice
thereof given to the appellant and to the
primary examiner. Hearing will be held as
stated in the notice, and oral argument
will be limited to twenty minutes for the
appellant and fifteen minutes for the pri-
mary examiner unless otherwise ordered
before the hearing begins.
[42 FR 5595, Jan. 28, 1977 and 47 FR 33086,
July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.195 Affldavits or declarations after
appeal.
Affidavits, declarations, or exhibits sub-
mitted after the case has been appealed
will not be admitted without a showing of
good and sufficient reasons why they
were not earlier presented.
[34 FR 18858, Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.196 Decision by the Board of Appeals.
(a) The Board of Appeals, in its deci-
sion, may affirm or reverse the decision of
the primary examiner in whole or in part
on the grounds and on the claims speci-
fied by the examiner. The affirmance of
the rejection of a claim on any of the
grounds specified constitutes a general af-
firmance of the decision of the primary
examiner on that claim, except as to any
ground specifically reversed.
(b) Should the Board of Appeals have
knowledge of any grounds not involved
in the appeal for rejecting any appealed
claim, it may include in the decision a
statement to that effect with its reasons
for so holding, which statement shall con-
stitute a rejection of the claims. The ap-
pellant may submit an appropriate amend-
ment of the claims so rejected or a
showing of facts, or both, and have the
matter reconsidered by the primary exam-
iner. The statement shall be binding upon
the primary examiner unless an amend-
ment or showing of facts not previously
of record be made which, in the opinion
of the primary examiner, avoids the addi-
tional ground for rejection stated in the
decision. The appellant may waive such
reconsideration before the primary exam-
iner and have the case reconsidered by
the Board of Appeals upon the same
record before them. Where request for
such reconsideration is made the Board of
Appeals shall, if necessary, render a new
decision which shall include all grounds
upon which a patent is refused. The ap-
pellant may waive reconsideration by the
Board of Appeals and treat the decision,
including the added grounds for rejection
given by the Board of Appeals, as a final
decision in the case.
(c) Should the decision of the Board of
Appeals include an explicit statement that
a claim may be allowed in amended form,
appellant shall have the right to amend in
conformity with such statement; which
shall be binding on the primary examiner
in the absence of new references or
grounds of rejection.
(d) Although the Board of Appeals
normally will confine its decision to a re-
view of rejections made by the primary
examiner, should it have knowledge of
any grounds for rejecting any allowed
claim that it believes should be consid-
ered, it may include in its decision a state-
ment to that effect and remand the case
to the primary examiner for consideration
thereof. In such event, the Board shall set
a period, not less than one month, within
which the appellant may submit to the
primary examiner an appropriate amend-
ment, or a showing of facts or reasons, or
both, in order to avoid the grounds set
forth in the statement of the Board of Ap-
peals. If the primary examiner rejects the
previously allowed claim or claims on the
basis of such statement, the appellant may
appeal to the Board of Appeals from the
rejection. Whenever a decision of the
Board of Appeals includes a remand, that
decision shall not be considered as a final
decision in the case, but the Board of Ap-
peals shall, upon conclusion of the pro-
ceedings before the primary examiner on
remand, either adopt its decision as final
or render a new decision on all of the
claims on appeal, as it may deem appro-
priate.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, and 46 FR 29183,
May 29, 1981]
§ 1.197 Action following decision.
(a) After decision by the Board of Ap-
peals, the case shall be returned to the
primary examiner, subject to the appel-
lant's right of appeal or other review, for
such further action by the appellant or by
the primary examiner, as the condition of
the case may require, to carry into effect
the decision.
(b) A single request for rehearing or re-
consideration, or modification of the deci-
sion, may be made if filed within thirty
days from the date of the original deci-
sion, unless that decision is so modified as
to become, in effect, a new decision, and
the Board of Appeals so states. Such time
may be extended under the provisions of
§ 1.136.
(c) Proceedings are considered termi-
nated by the dismissal of an appeal or the
failure to timely file an appeal to the court
1029 OG 76
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
or a civil action (§ 1.304) except: (1)
Where claims stand allowed in an applica-
tion or (2) where the nature of the deci-
sion requires further action by the exam-
iner. In such cases, the date of termina-
tion of proceedings is the date on which
the appeal is dismissed or the date on
which the time for appeal to the court or
review by civil action (§ 1.304) expires. If
an appeal to the court or a civil action has
been filed, proceedings are similarly con-
sidered terminated when the appeal or
civil action is terminated.
[41 FR 757. Jan. 5. 1976, 44 FR 29184, May 29,
1981 and 47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective
Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.198 Reopening after decision.
Cases which have been decided by the
Board of Appeals will not be reopened or
reconsidered by the primary examiner ex-
cept under the provisions of § 1.196 with-
out the written authority of the
Commissioner, and then only for the con-
sideration of matters not already adjudi-
cated, sufficient cause being shown.
Interferences: Definition.
Preparation, Declaration
Authority: Sees. 1.201 to 1.212 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 135.
§ 1.201 Definition, when declared.
(a) An interference is a proceeding in-
stituted for the purpose of determining
the question of priority of invention be-
tween two or more parties claiming sub-
stantially the same patentable invention
and may be instituted as soon as it is de-
termined that common patentable subject
matter is claimed in a plurality of applica-
tions or in an application and a patent.
(b) An interference will be declared be-
tween pending applications for patent, or
for reissue, of different parties when such
applications contain claims for substantial-
ly the same invention, which are allow-
able in the application of each party, and
interferences will also be declared be-
tween pending applications for patent, or
for reissue, and unexpired original or reis-
sued patents, of different parties, when
such applications and patents contain
claims for substantially the same invention
which are allowable in all of the applica-
tions involved, in accordance with the
provisions of the regulations in this part.
(c) Interferences will not be declared
nor continued, between applications or
applications and patents owned by the
same party unless good cause is shown
therefor. The parties shall make known
any and all right, title, and interest affect-
ing the ownership of any application or
patent involved or essential to the pro-
ceedings, not recorded in the Patent and
Trademark Office, when an interference
is declared, and of changes in such right,
title, or interest, made after the declara-
tion of the interference and before the ex-
piration of the time prescribed for seeking
review of the decision in the interference.
§ 1.202 Preparation for interference be-
tween applications; preliminary inquiry
of junior applicant.
In order to ascertain whether any ques-
tion of priority arises between applica-
tions which appear to interfere and are
otherwise ready to be prepared for inter-
ference, any junior applicant may be
called upon to state in writing under oath
or declaration the date and the character
of the earliest fact or act, susceptible of
proof, which can be relied upon to estab-
lish conception of the invention under
consideration for the purpose of estab-
lishing priority of invention. The state-
ment filed in compliance with this section
will be retained by the Patent and Trade-
mark Office separate from the application
file and if an interference is declared will .
be opened simultaneously with the prelim-
inary statement of the party filing the
same. In case the junior applicant makes
no reply within the time specified, not
less than thirty days, or if the earliest date
alleged is subsequent to the filing date of
the senior party, the interference ordinari-
ly will not be declared.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, and 34 FR 18858,
Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.203 Preparation for interference be-
tween applications; suggestion of claims
for interference.
(a) Before the declaration of interfer-
ence it must be determined by the exam-
iner that there is common subject matter
in the cases of the respective parties, pat-
entable to each of the respective parties,
subject to the determination of the ques-
tion of priority. Claims in the same lan-
guage, to form the counts of the inter-
ference, must be present or be presented,
in each application; except that, in cases
where, owing to the nature of the disclo-
sures in the respective applications, it is
not possible for all applications to proper-
ly include a claim in identical phraseology
to define the common invention, an inter-
ference may be declared, with the ap-
proval of the Commissioner, using as a
count representing the interfering subject
matter a claim differing from the corre-
sponding claims of one or more of the in-
terfering applications, by an immaterial
limitation or variation.
(b) When the claims of two or more ap-
plications differ in phraseology, but relate
to substantially the same patentable sub-
ject matter, the examiner shall, if it has
been determined that an interference
should be declared, suggest to the parties
such claims as are necessary to cover the
common invention in the same language.
TTie parties to whom the claims are
suggested will be required to make those
claims (i.e., present the suggested claims
in their applications by amendment) with-
in a specified time, not less than 30 days,
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 77
in order that an interference may be de-
clared. The failure or refusal of any appli-
cant to make any claim suggested within
the time specified shall be taken without
further action as a disclaimer of the in-
vention covered by that claim unless the
time be extended.
(c) The suggestion of claims for pur-
pose of interference will not stay the peri-
od for response to an Office action which
may be running against an application,
unless the claims are made by the appli-
cant within the time specified for making
the claims.
(d) When an applicant presents a claim
in his application (not suggested by the
examiner as specified in this section)
which is copied from some other applica-
tion, either for purpose of interference or
otherwise, he must so state, at the time he
presents the claim and identify the other
application.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, and 30 FR 6645,
May 14, 1965]
§ 1.204 Interference with a patent; affida-
vit or declaration by junior applicant.
(a) The fact that one of the parties has
already obtained a patent will not prevent
an interference. Although the Commis-
sioner has no power to cancel a patent, he
may grant another patent for the same in-
vention to a person who, in the interfer-
ence, proves himself to be the prior
inventor.
(b) When the effective filing date of an
applicant is three months or less subse-
quent to the effective filing date of a pat-
entee, the applicant, before the interfer-
ence will be declared, shall file an affi-
davit or declaration that he made the in-
vention in controversy in this country
before the effective filing date of the pat-
entee, or that his acts in this country with
respect to the invention were sufficient to
establish priority of invention relative to
the effective filing date of the patentee.
(c) When the effective filing date of an
applicant is more than 3 months subse-
quent to the effective filing date of the
patentee, the applicant, before the inter-
ference will be declared, shall file two
copies of affidavits or declarations by
himself, if possible, and by one or more
corroborating witnesses, supported by
documentary evidence if available, each
setting out a factual description of acts
and circumstances performed or observed
by the affiant, which collectively would
prima facie entitle him to an award of pri-
ority with respect to the effective filing
date of the patent. This showing must be
accompanied by an explanation of the ba-
sis on which he believes that the facts set
forth would overcome the effective filing
date of the patent. Failure to satisfy the
provisions of this section may result in
summary judgment against the applicant
under § 1.228. Upon a showing of suffi-
cient cause, an affidavit or declaration on
information and belief as to the expected
testimony of a witness whose testimony is
necessary to overcome the filing date of
the patent may be accepted in lieu of an
affidavit or declaration by such witness. If
the examiner finds the case to be other-
wise in condition for the declaration of
an interference he will consider this mat-
erial only to the extent of determining
whether a date prior to the effective filing
date of the patent is alleged, and if so, the
interference will be declared. (See also
§ 1.228.)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22. 1959, 29 FR 15866,
Nov. 26, 1964; 34 FR 12629, Aug. 2, 1969; and
34 FR 18858, Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.205 Interference with a patent; copy-
ing claims from patent.
(a) Before an interference will be de-
clared with a patent, the applicant must
present in his application, copies of all of
the claims of the patent which also define
his invention and such claims must be pat-
entable in the application. However, an
interference may be declared after copy-
ing the claims excluding an immaterial
limitation or variation if such immaterial
limitation or variation is not clearly sup-
ported in the application or if the appli-
cant otherwise makes a statisfactory
showing in justification thereof
(b) Where an applicant presents a claim
copied or substantially copied from a pa-
tent, he must, at the time he presents the
claim, identify the patent, give the num-
ber of the patented claim, and specifically
apply the terms of the copied claim to his
own disclosure, unless the claim is copied
in response to a suggestion by the Office.
The examiner will call to the Commis-
sioner's attention any instance of the filing
of an application or the presentation of an
amendment copying or substantially copy-
ing claims from a patent without calling
attention to that fact and identifying the
patent.
(c) A notice that one or more claims of
a patent have been copied or substantially
copied by an applicant will be placed in
the file of the patent, and a copy of said
notice will be sent to the patentee. How-
ever, the identity of the applicant will not
be disclosed to the patentee unless an in-
terference is declared. If a final decision is
made not to declare an interference, a no-
tice to that effect will also be placed in
the file of the patent and sent to the pat-
entee.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 30 FR 6645, May
14, 1965; and 43 FR 28478, June 30, 1978]
§ 1.206 Interference with a patent; claims
improperly copied.
(a) Where claims are copied from a pa-
tent and the examiner is of the opinion
that the applicant can make only some of
the claims so copied, he shall notify the
applicant to that effect, state why he is of
the opinion the applicant cannot make the
other claims and state further that the in-
1029 OG 78
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
terference will be promptly declared. The
applicant may proceed under § 1.231 if he
desires to further contest his right to
make the claims not included in the decla-
ration of the interference.
(b) Where the examiner is of the opin-
ion that none of the claims can be made,
he shall reject the copied claims stating in
his action why the applicant cannot make
the claims and set a time limit, not less
than 30 days, for reply. If, after response
by the applicant, the rejection is made fi-
nal, a similar time limit shall be set for ap-
peal. Failure to respond or appeal, as the
case may be, within the time fixed will, in
the absence of a satisfactory showing, be
deemed a disclaimer of the invention
claimed.
[30 FR 6645, May 14, 1965]
§ 1.207 Preparation of interference papers
and declaration of interference.
(a) When an interference is found to ex-
ist and the applications are in condition
therefor, the primary examiner shall for-
ward the files to the Board of Patent In-
terferences together with a statement
indicating the claims of each applicant or
patentee which are to form the respective
counts of the interference and also indi-
cating whether any party is entitled to the
benefit of the filing date of any prior ap-
plication as to the subject matter in issue,
and, if so, identifying such application.
(b) A patent interference examiner will
institute and declare the interference by
forwarding notices to the several parties
to the proceeding. Each notice shall in-
clude the name and residence of each of
the other parties and those of his attorney
or agent, and of any assignee, and will
identify the application of each opposing
party by serial number and filing date, or
in the case of a patentee by the number
and date of the patent. The notices shall
also specify the issue of the interference,
which shall be clearly and concisely de-
fined in only as many counts as may be
necessary to define the interfering subject
matter (but in the case of an interference
with a patent all the claims of the patent
which can be made by the applicant
should constitute the counts), and shall in-
dicate the claim or claims of the respec-
tive cases corresponding to the count or
counts. If the primary examiner has indi-
cated that the patent or application of any
party included in the interference is enti-
tled to the benefit of the filing date of any
prior applications as to the subject matter
in issue, the notices shall so state and shall
specify such prior applications. Except as
noted in paragraph (e) of this section, the
notices shall also set a schedule of times
for taking various actions as follows:
(1) For filing the preliminary statements
required by § 1.215 and serving notice of
such filing, not less than 2 months from
the date of declaration.
(2) For each party who files a prelimi-
nary statement to serve a copy thereof
on each opposing party who also files a
preliminary statement as required by
§ 1.215(b), not less that 15 days after the
expiration of the time for filing prelimi-
nary statements.
(3) For filing motions under § 1.231,
not less than 4 months from declaration.
(c) The notices of interference shall be
forwarded by the patent interference ex-
aminer to all the parties, in care of their
attorneys or agents; a copy of the notices
will also be sent the patentees in person
and, if the patent in interference has been
assigned, to the assignees.
(d) When the notices sent in the interest
of a patent are returned to the Office
undelivered, or when one of the parties
resides abroad and his agent in the United
States is unknown, additional notice may
be given by publication in the Official Ga-
zette for such period of time as the Com-
missioner may direct.
(e) In a case where the showing
required by § 1.204(c) is deemed insuffi-
cient (§ 1.228) the notice of interference
will not set the time schedule specified in
paragraph (b) of this section but will be
accompanied by an order to show cause
by the Board of Patent Interferences as
provided by § 1.228.
[30 FR 6645, May 14, 1965, and 43 FR 28478,
June 30, 1978]
§ 1.208 Conflicting parties having same
attorney.
Whenever it shall be found that two or
more parties whose interests appear to be
in conflict are represented by the same at-
torney or agent, the examiner shall notify
each of said principal parties and the at-
torney or agent of this fact, and shall also
call the matter to the attention of the
Commissioner. If conflicting interests ex-
ist, the same attorney or agent or his asso-
ciates will not be recognized to represent
either of the parties whose interests are in
conflict without the consent of the other
party or in the absence of special circum-
stances requiring such representation, in
further proceedings before the Patent and
Trademark Office involving the matter or
application or patent in which the con-
flicting interests exist.
§ 1.211 Jurisdiction of interference.
(a) Upon the institution and declaration
of the interference, as provided in § 1.207,
the Board of Patent Interferences will
take jurisdiction of the same, which will
then become a contested case.
(b) The primary examiner will retain ju-
risdiction of the case until, the declaration
of interference is made.
[30 FR 6645, May 14, 1965]
§ 1.212 Suspension of ex parte prosecu-
tion.
On declaration of the interference, ex
parte prosecution of an application is sus-
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 79
pended, and amendments and other papers
received during the pendency of the inter-
ference will not be entered or considered
without the consent of the Commissioner,
except as provided by the regulations in
this part. Proposed amendments directed
toward the declaration of an interference
with another party will be considered to
the extent necessary. Ex parte prosecution
as to specified matters may be continued
concurrently with the interference, on or-
der from or with the consent of the Com-
missioner.
interferences: preliminary
Statement
Authority: Sees. 1.215 to 1.228 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 135.
§ 1.215 Preliminary statement required.
(a) Each party to the interference will
be required to file a concise preliminary
statement giving certain facts and dates,
. on or before a date fixed by the Office.
The preliminary statement must be signed
and sworn to or made in the form of a
declaration, by the inventor but in appro-
priate circumstances, as when the inven-
tor is dead or a showing is made of
inability to obtain a statement from the in-
ventor, the preliminary statement may be
made by the personal representative or as-
signee or by someone authorized or enti-
tled to make the statement and having
knowledge of the facts.
(b) A party who files a preliminary
statement shall at the same time notify all
opposing parties of that fact and by the
time set for that purpose he shall serve a
copy of his preliminary statement and all
attached documents on every opposing
party from whom he has received notifi-
cation of the filing of a statement.
(c) A party who fails to serve a copy of
his preliminary statement as required in
paragraph (b) of this section will be re-
stricted to his effective filing date. (See
§ 1.223(c).)
[30 FR 6645, May 14, 1965, 34 FR 12630, Aug.
2, 1969; and 34 FR 18858, Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.216 Contents of the preliminary state-
ment.
(a) The preliminary statement must
state that the party made the invention set
forth by each count of the interference,
and whether the invention was made in
the United States or abroad. When the in-
vention was made in the United States the
preliminary statement must set forth as to
the invention defined by each count the
following facts:
(1) The date upon which the first draw-
ing of the invention was made; if a draw-
ing of the invention has not been made
prior to the filing date of the application,
it must be so stated.
(2) The date upon which the first writ-
ten description of the invention was
made; if a written description of the in-
vention has not been made prior to the
filing date of the application, it must be so
stated.
(3) The date upon which the invention
was first disclosed to another person; if
the invention was not disclosed to another
person prior to the filing date of the ap-
plication, it must be so stated.
(4) The date of the first act or acts sus-
ceptible of proof (other than making a
drawing or written description or disclos-
ing the invention to another person)
which, if proven, would establish concep-
tion of the invention, and a brief descrip-
tion of such act or acts; if there have been
no such acts, it must be so stated.
(5) The date of the actual reduction to
practice of the invention; if the invention
has not been actually reduced to practice
before the filing date of the application, it
must be so stated.
(6) The date after conception of the in-
vention when active exercise of reason-
able diligence toward reducing the inven-
tion to practice began.
(b) When an allegation as to the first
drawing (paragraph (a)(1) of this section)
and/or as to the first written description
(paragraph (a)(2) of this section) is made,
a copy of such drawing and/or written
description must be attached to the state-
ment. (See § 1.223(c).)
(c) If a party intends to rely solely on a
prior application, domestic or foreign, and
on no other evidence, the preliminary
statement may so state and need not be
signed or sworn to or declaration made
by the inventor.
[30 FR 6646, May 14, 1965, 34 FR 12630, Aug.
2, 1969; and 34 FR 18858, Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.217 Contents of the preliminary state-
ment; invention made abroad.
When the invention was made abroad
the facts specified by § 1.216(a) (1) to (6)
are not required, and in lieu thereof there
should be stated:
(a) When the invention was introduced
into this country by or on behalf of the
party, giving the circumstances with the
dates connected therewith which are re-
lied upon to establish the fact and, when
appropriate, including allegations of activ-
ity in this country of the nature of that
represented by § 1.216(a) (1) to (6) and
documentary attachments if the allega-
tions relate to a drawing or written de-
scription. Such statement may be signed
and sworn to, or made in the form of a
declaration, either by the inventor or by
one authorized to make the statement and
having knowledge of the facts alleged
therein.
(b) If a party is entitled to the benefit of
the second sentence of 35 U.S.C. 104, he
must so state and his preliminary state-
ment must include allegations of activity
abroad corresponding to those required
by § 1.216(a) (1) to (6).
[43 FR 28478, June 30, 1978; and 43 FR 57886,
Dec. 11, 1978]
1029 CX} 80
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
§ 1.218 Time for filing preliminary state-
ment.
The time for filing the prehminary
statement is ordinarily specified in the no-
tices of interference mailed to the parties
(§ 1.207). (For extension of the time set
see § 1.245.)
[30 FR 6646, May 14, 1965]
§ 1.219 Statements sealed before filing.
The statement must be filed in a sealed
envelope bearing the name of the party
filing it and the number and title of the
interference. The envelope should contain
nothing but this statement and if mailed
should be enclosed in an outer envelope.
The statements may be opened only by an
examiner of interferences.
§ 1.222 Correction of statement on mo-
tion.
In case of material error arising
through inadvertence or mistake, the
statement or attachments may be correct-
ed or omitted attachments may be sup-
plied on motion (see § 1.243), upon a
satisfactory showing that such action is
essential to the ends of justice. The mo-
tion must be made, if possible, before the
taking of any testimony, and as soon as
practicable after the discovery of the er-
ror.
[34 FR 12630, Aug. 2, 1969]
§ 1.223 Effect of statement.
(a) The preliminary statement should be
carefully prepared, as a party will not be
allowed to amend his statement in any
way except by motion under § 1.222, and
any doubts as to definiteness or sufficien-
cy of any allegation or compliance with
formal requirements will be resolved
against the party concerned by restriction
to his effective filing date or to the latest
date of a period alleged as may be appro-
priate. Prior to final hearing a party will
not be notified of any defect in his state-
ment except that a junior party, subject to
restriction resulting from such a defect
and by virtue of that restriction being
subject to judgment under § 1.225, will be
notified of that defect and also notified
that judgment on the record will be en-
tered against him at the expiration of a
time set, not less than 30 days, unless
cause be shown why judgment should not
be entered. Each of the parties by whom
or on whose behalf a preliminary state-
ment is made will be strictly held in his
proofs to the dates set forth therein. This
includes joint applicants or patentees; a
new preliminary statement will not be re-
ceived in the event the application is
amended or the patent is corrected to re-
move the names of those not inventors,
nor will a preliminary statement alleging
different dates be received if an applica-
tion is amended or a patent is corrected
to include a joint inventor, except by mo-
tion under § 1.222.
(b) If a party proves any date earlier
than alleged in his preliminary statement,
such proof will be held to establish the
date so alleged and none earlier.
(c) If a party to an interference fails to
file a statement, testimony will not be re-
ceived subsequently from him to prove
that he made the invention at a date prior
to his effective filing date. If a party al-
leges in his statement a date of first draw-
ing or first written description but does
not attach a copy of such drawing or
written description as required by § 1.216
(b), he will be restricted to his effective
filing date as to that allegation unless such
copy is admitted by motion under § 1.222.
The content of a drawing or written de-
scription attached to the statement nor-
mally will not be considered by the
Office.
(d) The preliminary statement can in no
case be used as evidence in behalf of the
party making it.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 34 FR 12630,
Aug. 2, 1969; and 43 FR 28478, June 30, 1978]
§ 1.224 Reliance on prior application.
A party will not be permitted to rely
on any prior application to obtain the
benefit of its filing date unless the prior
application is specified in the notice of in-
terference (see § 1.226) or its benefit is
sought by a motion filed in accordance
with § 1.231. In the latter case, complete
copies of the contents of the application
file the benefit of which is sought, except
affidavits or declarations under §§ 1.131,
1.202, and 1.204, must be served on all
opposing parties with the motion, and in
the case of a foreign application the nec-
essary papers to prove a date of priority
under 35 U.S.C. 119 including a transla-
tion where required (§ 1.55), must be filed
and copies served on all opposing parties
with the motion except for such papers as
were of record in the involved applica-
tion when the interference was declared.
In either case proof of service required by
§ 1.247 must include reference to the pri-
or application as well as the motion or, in
the case of the stated exception, note that
the papers in question were of record
when the interference was declared.
[34 FR 12630, Aug. 2, 1969, and 34 FR 18858,
Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.225 Failure of junior party to file
statements or to overcome flling date
of senior party.
(a) If a junior party to an interference
fails to file a preliminary statement, or if
his statement fails to overcome the effec-
tive filing date of another party, judgment
on the record will be entered against that
junior party unless:
(1) Under the provisions of § 1.258(a),
he would be entitled to raise before the
Board of Patent Interferences a matter
which is ancillary to priority and which,
if decided in his favor, would remove the
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 81
basis for judgment on the record against
him, and
(2) Within a time set by the patent in-
terference examiner, not less than 30 days,
he requests that fmal hearing be set to re-
view such matter. If the matter was raised
in a motion which was dismissed for one
of the reasons specified in § 1.258(a)
(l)(iii), the request for final hearing must
be accompanied by a motion to take testi-
mony under paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) Such a junior party will not be per-
mitted to take testimony except on
granting of a motion accompanied by
showing of good cause, which should
normally include names of proposed
witnesses and affidavits or declarations by
them giving their expected testimony.
(c) If, as a result of a decision on mo-
tion, the original senior party is deprived
of the benefit of an earlier filed applica-
tion and is thereby made a junior party
and if in addition he relies solely on said
earlier filed application in his preliminary
statement, he stands in the same position
as a junior party whose statement fails to
overcome the effective filing date of the
senior party as in the first sentence of
§ 1.225(a).
[43 FR 28478, June 30, 1978, and 46 FR 52363,
Oct. 27, 1981]
§ 1.226 Access to applications.
After the mailing of the notices of in-
terference each party will be permitted to
see or obtain copies of each other's appli-
cations which are set out in the notices
except for copies of affidavits or declara-
tions filed under §§1.131, 1.202, and 1.204
which shall be and remain sealed until
preliminary statements are opened under
§ 1.227, except as provided in § 1.228 re-
garding affidavits or declarations under
§ 1.204(c).
[30 FR 6646, May 14, 1965, and 34 FR 18858,
Nov. 26, 1969]
§ 1.227 Access to preliminary statements.
(a) The preliminary statements shall be
open to the inspection of the senior party,
and of any junior party who himself filed
a statement, after the date set for the serv-
ing of preliminary statements (§ 1.207(b)
(2)), but shall not be open to inspection
prior to that time.
(b) A junior party who fails to file a
preliminary statement shall not have ac-
cess to the preliminary statement of any
other party.
(c) If the interference be terminated be-
fore the preliminary statements have been
opened to the inspection of the parties,
the preliminary statements will remain
sealed.
(d) After termination of an interference
any unopened statements will be removed
from the interference file and preserved
by the Office, and in no case will such
statements be open to the inspection of
anyone (including opposing parties) with-
out authority from the Commissioner.
[30 FR 6646, May 14, 1965]
§ 1.228 Summary judgment.
When an interference is declared on the
basis of a showing under § 1.204(c), such
showing will be examined by an Examin-
er of Interferences. If the Examiner con-
siders that the facts set out in the showing
provide sufficient basis for the interfer-
ence to proceed, the interference will pro-
ceed in the normal manner as provided by
the regulations in this part; otherwise an
order shall be entered concurrently with
the notice of interference pointing out
wherein the showing is insufficient and
notifying the applicant making such
showing that summary judgment will be
rendered against him because of such in-
sufficiency at the expiration of a period
specified in the notice, not less than 30
days, unless cause be shown why such ac-
tion should not.be taken. In the absence
of a showing of good and sufficient cause,
judgment shall be so rendered. Any re-
sponse made during the specified period
will be considered by a Board of Patent
Interferences without an oral hearing un-
less such hearing is requested by the ap-
plicant, but additional affidavits, declar-
ations or exhibits will not be considered
unless accompanied by a showing in ex-
cuse of their omission from the original
showing. If the applicant files a response
to the order to show cause, the patentee
will be furnished with one copy of the
showing under § 1.204(c) and will be
allowed not less than 30 days from its
mailing date within which to present his
views with respect thereto. He shall also
be entitled to be represented at any oral
hearing on the matter. Unless it shall be
otherwise ordered before the hearing be-
gins, oral arguments will be limited to not
more than 30 minutes for each party. The
Board will determine, on the basis of the
original showing and the response made,
whether the interference should be
allowed to proceed or summary judgment
should be entered against the junior appli-
cant.
[41 FR 27832, July 7, 1976]
interferences: motion period,
Dissolution, Reformation
Authority: Sees. 1.231 to 1.238 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 135.
§ 1.231 Motions before the primary ex-
aminer.
(a) Within the period set in the notice
of interference for filing motions any par-
ty to an interference may file a motion
seeking:
(1) To dissolve as to one or more
counts, except that such motion based on
facts sought to be established by affida-
1029 OG 82
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
vits, declarations or evidence outside of
official records and printed publications
will not normally be considered. A mo-
tion to dissolve an interference in which a
patentee is a party on the ground that the
claims corresponding to the counts are
unpatentable to the patentee over patents
or printed publications will be considered
through reexamination if it complies with
the requirements of § 1.510(b) and is ac-
companied by the fee for requesting
reexamination set in § 1.20(c). Otherwise,
a motion to dissolve an interference in
which a patentee is a party will not be
considered if it would necessarily result in
the conclusion that the claims of the pa-
tent which correspond to the counts are
unpatentable to the patentee on a ground
which is not ancillary to priority. Where
a motion to dissolve is based on prior art,
service on opposing parties must include
copies of such prior art. A motion to dis-
solve on the ground that there is no inter-
ference in fact will not be considered
unless the interference involves a design
or plant patent or application or unless it
relates to a count which differs from the
corresponding claim of an involved patent
or of one or more of the involved appli-
cations as provided in §§ 1.203(a) and
1.205(a).
(2) To amend the issue by addition or
substitution of new counts. Each such
motion must contain an explanation as to
why a count proposed to be added is nec-
essary or why a count proposed to be
substituted is preferable to the original
count, must demonstrate patentability of
the count to all parties and must apply
the proposed count to all involved appli-
cations except an application in which the
proposed count originated.
(3) To substitute any other application
owned by him as to the existing issue, or
to declare an additional interference to in-
clude any other application owned by
him as to any subject matter other than
the existing issue but disclosed in his ap-
plication or patent involved in the inter-
ference and in an opposing party's
application or patent in the interference
which should be made the basis of inter-
ference with such other party. Complete
copies of the contents of such other appli-
cation, except affidavits or declarations
under §§ 1.131, 1.202, and 1.204, must be
served on all other parties and the motion
must be accompanied by proof of such
service.
(4) To be accorded the benefit of an
earlier application or to attack the benefit
of an earlier application which has been
accorded to an opposing party in the no-
tice of declaration. See § 1.224.
(5) To amend an involved application
by adding or removing the names of one
or more inventors as provided in § 1.45.
(See par. (d) of this section.)
(b) Each motion must contain a full
statement of the grounds therefor and rea-
soning in support thereof Any opposition
to a motion must be filed within 20 days
of the expiration of the time set for filing
motions and the moving party may, if he
desires, file a reply to such opposition
within 15 days of the date the opposition
was filed. If a party files a timely motion
to dissolve, any other party may file a
motion to amend within 20 days of the
expiration of the time set for filing mo-
tions. Service on opposing parties of an
opposition to a motion to amend which is
based on prior art must include copies of
such prior art. In the case of action by
the primary examiner under § 1.237, such
motions may be made within 20 days
from the date of the primary examiner's
decision on motion wherein such action
was incorporated or the date of the com-
munication giving notice to the parties of
the proposed dissolution of the interfer-
ence.
(c) A motion to amend under para-
graph (a)(2) of this section or to substitute
another application or declare an addi-
tional interference under paragraph (a)(3)
of this section must be accompanied by an
amendment adding claims corresponding
to the proposed counts to the application
concerned if such claims are not already
in that application. The motion must also
request the benefit of a prior application
as provided for under paragraph (a)(4) of
this section if the party concerned expects
to be accorded such benefit.
(d) All proper motions as specified in
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, or
of a similar character, will be transmitted
to and considered by the primary examin-
er without oral argument, except that
consideration of a motion to dissolve on a
ground other than no interference in fact
will be deferred to final hearing before a
Board of Patent Interferences where the
motion raises a matter which would be
reviewable at final hearing under § 1.258(a)
and such matter is raised against a paten-
tee or has been ruled upon by the Board
of Appeals or by a court in ex parte pro-
ceedings. Also consideration of a motion
to add or remove the names of one or
more inventors may be deferred to final
hearing if such motion is filed after the
times for taking testimony have been set.
Requests for reconsideration will not be
entertained.
(e) In the determination of a motion to
dissolve an interference between an appli-
cation and a patent, the prior art of
record in the patent file may be referred
to for the purpose of construing the issue.
(0 Upon the granting of a motion to
amend the adoption of the claims by the
other parties within a time specified, or
upon the granting of a motion to substi-
tute another application, and after the ex-
piration of the time for filing any new
preliminary statements, a patent interfer-
ence examiner shall redeclare the inter-
ference or shall declare such other inter-
ferences as may be necessary to include
said claims. A preliminary statement as to
the added claims need not be filed if a
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 83
party states that he intends to rely on the
original statement and such a declaration
as to added claims need not be signed or
sworn to by the inventor in person. A
second time for filing motions will not be
set and subsequent motions with respect
to matters which have been once consid-
ered by the primary examiner will not be
considered.
[30 FR 6647, May 14. 1965, 34 FR 12630, Aug.
2, 1969; 34 FR 18858. Nov. 26, 1969; 38 FR
10005. Apr. 23. 1973; 40 FR 11873. Mar. 14.
1975; 46 FR 29184, May 29, 1981; 46 FR
52363. Oct. 27, 1981 and 47 FR 33086. July 30.
1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.237 Dissolution at the request of ex-
aminer.
If, during the pendency of an interfer-
ence, a reference or other reason be found
which, in the opinion of the primary ex-
aminer, renders all or part of the counts
unpatentable, the attention of the Board
of Patent Interferences shall be called
thereto. The interference may be suspend-
ed and referred to the primary examiner
for consideration of the matter, in which
case the parties will be notified of the rea-
son to be considered. Arguments of the
parties regarding the matter will be con-
sidered if filed within 20 days of the noti-
fication. The interference will be con-
tinued or dissolved in accordance with
the determination by the primary examin-
er. If such reference or reason be found
while the interference is before the prima-
ry examiner for determination of a mo-
tion, decision thereon may be incor-
porated in the decision on the motion, but
the parties shall be entitled to reconsidera-
tion if they have not submitted arguments
on the matter.
[30 FR 6647, May 14. 1965]
§ 1.238 Addition of new party by examin-
er.
If during the pendency of an interfer-
ence, another case appears, claiming
substantially the subject matter in issue,
the primary examiner should notify the
Board of Patent Interferences and request
addition of such case to the interference.
Such addition will be done as a matter of
course by a patent interference examiner,
if no testimony has been taken. If, howev-
er, any testimony may have been taken,
the patent interference examiner shall pre-
pare and mail a notice for the proposed
new party, disclosing the issue in interfer-
ence and the names and addresses of the
interferants and of their attorneys or
agents, and notices for the interferants
disclosing the name and address of the
said party and his attorney or agent, to
each of the parties, setting a time for stat-
ing any objections and at his discretion a
time of hearing on the question of the ad-
mission of the new party. If the patent in-
terference examiner be of the opinion that
the new party should be added, he shall
prescribe the conditions imposed upon the
proceedings, including a suspension if ap-
propriate.
[34 FR 12631, Aug. 2, 1969]
interferences: miscellaneous
Provisions
Authority: Sees. 1.242 to 1.248 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 135.
§ 1.242 Prosecution by assignee.
When on motion duly made and upon
satisfactory proof, it shall be shown that,
by reason of the inability or refusal of the
inventor to take suitable action in an in-
terference, or from other cause, the ends
of justice require that an assignee of an
undivided interest in the invention be per-
mitted to prosecute the same, it may be so
ordered.
§ 1.243 Motions before the Board of Pa-
tent Interferences.
(a) Motions relating to matters other
than those specified in § 1.231 will be de-
termined by a patent interference examin-
er or the Board of Patent Interferences, as
may be deemed appropriate. Such mo-
tions shall be made in writing and shall
contain a full statement of the action
sought and the grounds therefor, and sat-
isfactory proof of any facts required must
accompany the motion. Oral hearings will
not be held except on order of a patent
interference examiner or Board of Patent
Interferences. Briefs or memoranda in
support of such motions shall accompany
the motion. Any opposition to the mo-
tion, together with any brief or memoran-
dum in support thereof, shall be filed
within 20 days from the date of service of
the motion unless some other date is set
by the patent interference examiner.
(b) Typewritten briefs may be used in
connection with all motions. By stipula-
tion of the parties subject to approval or
by order of the tribunal before whom the
motion is ()ending, briefs may be received
if filed otherwise than as prescribed.
(c) In oral hearings on motions, the
moving parties shall have the right to
make the opening and closing arguments.
Unless otherwise ordered before the hear-
ing begins, oral arguments will be limited
to 30 minutes for each party.
(d) Any request for reconsideration or
modification of a decision or other action
by the Board of Patent Interferences or
patent interference examiner, must be
filed within 20 days after the date of the
decision, or other action and any reply
thereto must be filed within 20 days from
the date of service of the request. With
regard to requests for reconsideration of a
decision after final hearing, see § 1.2S6(b).
[41 FR 27832. July 7, 1976]
1029 O.G.-25
1029 OG 84
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
§ 1.244 Petition to the Commissioner
from decisions on motions.
There is no appeal from decisions ren-
dered on motions, but the Commissioner
may consider on petition any matter in-
volving abuse of discretion or the exercise
of his supervisory authority, or such other
matters as he may deem proper to consid-
er. Any such petition must comply with
§ 1.181 and, if not filed within 20 days
from the decision complained of, may be
dismissed as untimely. Any opposition
thereto must be filed within 20 days from
the date of service of the petition.
[41 FR 27832. July 7, 1976]
§ 1.245 Extension of time.
Extensions of time in any interference
proceeding not otherwise provided for
may be had by stipulation of the parties,
subject to approval, or on motion duly
brought, sufficient cause being shown for
such extension. The provisions of § 1.136
do not apply to time periods in interfer-
ences.
[43 FR 28478, June 30, 1978 and 47 FR 33086,
July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.246 Late papers.
A motion or other paper belatedly filed
will not normally be considered except
upon a showing, under oath or in the
form of a declaration (§ 1.68), of sufficient
cause as to why such motion or paper
was not timely presented. The provisions
of § 1.136 do not apply to time periods in
interferences.
[43 FR 28478, June 30, 1978 and 47 FR 33086,
July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.247 Service of papers.
(a) Every paper filed in the Patent and
Trademark Office in interference proceed-
ings must be served upon the other
parties in the manner provided in § 1.248,
except the following:
(1) Preliminary statements at the time
of filing but see § 1.215 (b) and (c).
(2) Documentary exhibits introduced at
the taking of a deposition.
(3) Certified transcripts of testimony
under § 1.276 (but copies of the record
must be served (§ 1.253(a)).
(4) Statutory disclaimers under 35
U.S.C. 253.
(b) The specification in certain sections
that a designated paper must be served
does not imply that other papers, not
excepted above need not be served. How-
ever, the requirement for service of desig-
nated papers may be waived under
particular circumstances and service may
be required of other designated papers
which need not ordinarily be served.
Proof of service must be made before the
paper will be considered in the interfer-
ence by the Office. A statement of the at-
torney, attached to or appearing in the
original paper when filed, clearly stating
the time and manner in which service was
made will be accepted as prima facie
proof of service.
[43 FR 28478, June 30, 1978]
§ 1.248 Service of papers; manner of ser-
vice; proof of service.
(a) Service of papers must be on the at-
torney or agent of the party if there be
such or on the party if there is no attor-
ney or agent, and may be made in any of
the following ways:
(1) By delivering a copy of the paper to
the person served;
(2) By leaving a copy at the usual place
of business of the person served with
someone in his employment;
(3) When the person served has no usu-
al place of business, by leaving a copy at
the person's residence, with some person
of suitable age and discretion who resides
there;
(4) Transmission by first class mail.
When service is by mail the date of mail-
ing will be regarded as the date of ser-
vice;
(5) Whenever it shall be satisfactorily
shown to the Commissioner that none of
the above modes of obtaining or serving
the paper is practicable, service may be
by notice published in the Official Gazette.
(b) Papers filed in the Patent and
Trademark Office which are required to
be served shall contain proof of service.
Proof of service may appear on or be af-
fixed to papers filed. Proof of service
shall include the date and manner of ser-
vice. In the case of personal service,
proof of service shall also include the
name of any person served, certified by
the person who made service. Proof of
service may be made by: (1) An acknowl-
edgement of service by or on behalf of
the person served or (2) a statement
signed by the attorney or agent contain-
ing the information required by this sec-
tion.
[46 FR 29184, May 29, 1981]
INTERFERENCES: TRIAL
Authority: Sees. 1.251 to 1.259 also issued
' under 35 U.S.C. 135.
§ 1.251 Assignment of times for discovery
and taking testimony.
(a) Subject to the exception provided in
paragraph (c) of this section, a period for
preparation for testimony will be set in
which all parties should complete discov-
ery and other preparatory activities, ex-
cept for service by the senior party
required by § 1.287(a)(1) which is gov-
erned by § 1.287(aX2)(iii).
(b) Subject to the exception provided in
paragraph (c) of this section, times will be
assigned in which the junior party shall
complete his testimony in chief, and in
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 CXj 85
which the other party shall complete the
testimony on his side, and a further time
in which the junior party may take rebut-
ting testimony, but he shall take no other
testimony. If there be more than two
parties to the interference, the times for
taking testimony will be so arranged that
each shall have an opportunity to prove
his case against prior parties and to rebut
their evidence, and also to meet the evi-
dence of junior parties. If a senior party
fails to file a preliminary statement, or ex-
pressly elects to rely solely on his effec-
tive filing date, he will be assigned only a
time for taking rebuttal testimony, and no
junior party will be assigned a time for
taking rebuttal testimony unless another
junior party senior to him is assigned a
time for t^ng testimony in chief. But,
subject to the conditions imposed upon
junior parties by § 1.225, such senior par-
ty may be assigned a period for taking
testimony concerning a matter raised by a
motion under § 1.231.
(c) Times for preparation of testimony,
for compliance with § 1.287(a) and for
taking of testimony will ordinarily be
assigned in notices sent to the parties after
motions under § 1.231 have been disposed
of or, if no such motions have been filed,
after the close of the motion period
(§ 1.231). Such times will not normally be
assigned for a junior party who fails to
file a preliminary statement or whose pre-
liminary statement fails to overcome the
effective filing date of the senior party.
(See § 1.225).
(d) Testimony Bhall be taken during the
times assigned in accordance with §§ 1.271
to 1.286.
(e) The date for final hearing will ordi-
narily be set in separate notices.
[36 FR 8733, May 12, 1971, 38 FR 10005, Apr.
23, 1973; and 40 FR 11873, Mar. 14, 1975]
§ 1.252 Failure of junior party to take
testimony.
Upon the filing of a motion for judg-
ment by any senior party to an interfer-
ence stating that the time for taking
testimony on behalf of any junior party
has expired and that no testimony has
been taken and no other evidence offered
by said junior party, an order shall be en-
tered that the junior party show cause
within a time set therein, not less than 10
days, why judgment should not be ren-
dered against him, and in the absence of a
showing of good and sufficient cause,
judgment shall be so rendered. In the ab-
sence of such a motion, if any junior par-
ty fails to file an evidentiary record by
the date set as provided in § 1.253(d), a
patent interference examiner shall enter
the order to show cause.
[34 FR 12631, Aug. 2, 1969]
§ 1.253 Copies of the testimony.
(a) In addition to the certified trans-
script of the testimony (§§ 1.275 to 1.278)
or executed copies of affidavits or stipu-
lated testimony or facts (§ 1.272), and the
exhibits, three true copies of the testimo-
ny of each party must be filed for the use
of the Office (a total of four copies), and
one true copy must be served upon each
of the opposing parties. Only one set of
exhibits need be filed in the Office.
(b) These copies of the testimony may
be submitted either in printed or in type-
written form.
(c) These copies, whether printed or
typewritten, must include the testimony
presented by the party filing the same, a
copy of the counts of the interference, an
index of the names of the witnesses, giv-
ing the pages where their examination and
cross-examination begin, and an index of
the exhibits, briefly describing their nature
and giving the pages at which they are in-
troduced and offered in evidence. The
pages must be serially numbered through-
out the entire record of testimony and the
names of the witnesses must appear at the
top of the pages over their testimony.
(d) The copies of the testimony for all
parties must be filed and served on the
opposing parties by the date specified in
the order setting times for taking testimo-
ny or such extensions as may be granted.
(e) When the copies of the testimony
are submitted in printed form, they may
be produced by standard typographic
printing or by any process capable of pro-
ducing a clear black permanent image.
All printed matter except on covers must
appear in at least 11 point type on
opaque, unglazed paper. Margins must be
justified. Footnotes may not be printed in
type smaller than 9 point. The page size
shall be %Vi by 11 inches (21.8 X 27.9
cm.) with type matter 6Vi by 9Vi inches
(16.5 X 24.1 cm.). The testimony shall be
bound to lie flat when open.
(f) When the copies of the testimony
are submitted in typewritten form, they
must be clearly legible on opaque,
unglazed, durable paper approximately 8
Vz by 11 inches (21.6 by 27.9 cm.) in size
(letter size) and one of the three copies
must be a ribbon copy, but need not be
executed by the certifying officer. (The
certified transcript may be a properly exe-
cuted carbon copy. See § 1.277.) The typ-
ing shall be on one side of the paper, in
not smaller than pica-type; and double-
spaced with a margin of IVi inches (3.8
cm.) on the left-hand side of the page.
The sheets shall be bound at their left
edges, in such manner to lie flat when
opened, in a volume or volumes of conve-
nient size (approximately 100 pages per
volume is suggested) provided with cov-
ers. Documentary exhibits should not be
included in bound volumes of testimony.
Multigraphed or otherwise reproduced
copies conforming to the standards speci-
fied will be accepted.
(g) The testimony of any party failing
to supply copies thereof as specified may
be refused consideration.
1029 OG 86
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
[40 FR 11873, Mar. 14, 1975, as amended at 46
FR 52363, Oct. 27, 1981; 47 FR 47380, Oct. 26,
1982; effective Oct. 26, 1982]
§ 1.254 Briefs at final hearing.
Briefs at final hearing before the Board
of Patent Interferences shall be submitted
in printed form, except that when not in
excess of 50 legal-size double-spaced type-
written pages, or the equivalent thereof,
and in any other case where satisfactory
reason therefor is shown they may be sub-
mitted in typewritten form. If submitted
in printed form, they shall be the same in
size and the same as to page and print as
is specified for printed copies of testimo-
ny. Typewritten briefs shall conform to
the requirements for typewritten copies of
testimony, except that legal-size paper
may be used and the binding and covers
specified are not required. Every brief of
more than IS pages shall contain a subject
index with page references, supplemented
by a list of all authorities referred to, to-
gether with references to pages thereof
Three copies of each brief must be filed.
The times for filing briefs will be set at an
appropriate stage in the proceeding prior
to final hearing. The brief for the junior
party shall present a full, fair statement of
the questions involved, including his posi-
tion with respect, to priority evidence on
behalf of other parties, and a clear state-
ment of the points of law or fact upon
which he relies. The main brief for each
party shall contain a copy of the counts in
interference. The board may refuse to ac-
cept any brief which has been printed,
typewritten, or bound otherwise than in
substantial conformity with this section.
[41 FR 27832, July 7, 1976, and 46 FR 52363,
Oct. 27, 1981]
§ 1.255 Request for findings of fact and
conclusions of law.
Either party may, in his brief, submit
concise proposed findings of fact, sup-
ported by specific references to and anal-
ysis of the record, and conclusions of law,
supported by citation of authorities. The
opposing party may, in his brief in reply
thereto, accept any such proposed find-
ings, or reject any proposed fmdings giv-
ing the reasons therefor, and may likewise
submit proposed findings. The Board of
Patent Interferences may, in its discretion,
adopt the proposed findings in whole or
in part.
§ 1.256 Final hearing.
(a) Final hearings will be held by the
Board of Patent Interferences on the day
appointed at the designated time. If either
party appears at the proper time, he will
be heard. After the day of hearing, the
case will not be taken up for oral argu-
ment except by consent of all parties. If
the Board of Patent Interferences be pre-
vented from hearing the case at the time
specified, a new assignment will be made,
or the case will be continued from day to
day until heard. Unless it shall be other-
wise ordered before the hearing begins,
oral arguments will be limited to not
more than one hour for each party. A ju-
nior party may reserve a portion of his
time for rebuttal purposes, but a full, fair
opening of his case must be made, includ-
ing his position with respect to the case
presented on behalf of other parties. After
a contested case has been argued nothing
further relating thereto will be heard un-
less upon request of the Board of Patent
Interferences.
(b) Any request for rehearing or recon-
sideration, or modification of the decision
after final hearing, must be filed within 30
days from the date of the original deci-
sion, unless that decision is so modified as
to become, in effect, a new decision, and
the Board of Patent Interferences so
states. Any reply thereto must be filed
within 15 days from the filing of the re-
quest. The times specified herein may be
extended by the Board of Patent Interfer-
ences upon a showing of sufficient cause.
(See § 1.304.)
[41 FR 27833, July 7, 1976]
§ 1.257 Burden of proof.
(a) The parties to an interference will
be presumed to have made their inven-
tions in the chronological order of the fil-
ing dates of their applications for patents
involved in the interference or the effec-
tive filing dates which such applications
have been accorded; and the burden of
proof will rest upon the party who shall
seek to establish a different state of facts.
(b) The termination of the interference
by dissolution under § 1.231 or § 1.237,
without an award of priority, or by an
award of priority based solely upon ancil-
lary matters, shall not disturb this pre-
sumption, and a party under these cir-
cumstances enjoying the status of a senior
party with respect to any subject matter
of his application shall not be deprived of
any claim to such subject matter solely on
the ground that such claim was not added
to the interference by amendment under
§ 1.231.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, and 31 FR 7285,
May 19, 1966]
§ 1.258 Matters considered^in determin-
ing priority. ;
(a) In determining priorit/of invention,
the Board of Patent Interferences will
consider only priority of invention on the
evidence submitted, and matters ancillary
thereto. A party shall be entitled to raise
a matter which is ancillary to priority
only if:
(1) The matter was raised by the party
in a motion under § 1.231(a), and:
(i) The motion was transmitted to and
decided by the primary examiner; or
(ii) Consideration of the motion was de-
ferred to final hearing; or
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 87
(iii) The motion was dismissed as being
based on facts sought to be established by
affidavits, declarations or evidence out-
side of official records and printed publi-
cations, or as being based on a ground
which would require the taking of testi-
mony; or
(2) The matter was raised by the party
in opposition to a motion under § 1.231(a)
(2), (3), (4) or (5) which was granted over
his opposition; or
(3) The party shows good reason why
the matter was not raised as specified in
paragraphs (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this section.
(b) To prevent manifest injustice the
Board of Patent Interferences may in its
discretion consider a matter which is an-
cillary to priority even though it would
not otherwise be entitled to consideration
under paragraph (a) of this section.
(c) At final hearing between an applica-
tion and a patent the prior art of record
in the patent file may be referred to for
the purpose of construing the issue.
[46 FR 52363, Oct. 27, 1981]
§ 1.259 Recommendation by Board of Pa-
tent Interferences.
The Board of Patent Interferences may,
either before or concurrently with their
decision on the question of priority, but
independently of such decision, direct the
attention of the Commissioner to any mat-
ter not relating to priority which may
have come to their notice, and which in
their opinion establishes the fact that no
interference exists, or that there has been
irregularity in declaring the same, or
which amounts to a bar to the grant of a
patent to either of the parties for the
claim or claims in interference. The Com-
missioner may suspend the interference
and remand the case to the primary exam-
iner for his consideration of the matters to
which attention has been directed if such
matters have not been considered before
by the examiner, or take other appropri-
ate action. If the case is not so remanded,
the primary examiner will, after judgment
on priority, consider such matters, unless
the same shall have been previously dis-
posed of by the Commissioner.
INTERFERENCES: TERMINATION
Authority: Sees. 1.261 to 1.267 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 135.
§ 1.261 Termination of interference.
An interference will be terminated by
judgment after final hearing (§§ 1.251 to
1.259), or by judgment on the record as
provided by § 1.225 or § 1.252, or by
summary judgment because of an insuffi-
cient showing under § 1.204(c) as provid-
ed by § 1.228, or by dissolution as provi-
ded by § 1.231 or § 1.237, or as otherwise
provided.
[30 FR 6648, May 14, 1965]
§ 1.262 Disclaimer, concession, abandon-
ment.
(a) An applicant or a patentee involved
in ar interference may, at any time, file a
written disclaimer or concession of priori-
ty, or abandonment of the invention,
signed by the inventor in person with the
written consent of the assignee when
there has been an assignment. Upon the
filing of such an instrument by any party,
judgment shall be rendered against him.
(b) An applicant, except an applicant
for reissue having a claim or cli^ms from
his patent in the interference, may at any
time prior to the taking of testimony, and
at any time thereafter with the consent of
all of the other parties involved, avoid the
continuance of the interference as to all
counts by filing a written abandonment of
the contest or of the application, signed
by the inventor in person with the written
consent of the assignee when there has
been an assignment. Upon the filing of
such abandonment of the contest or of the
application, the interference shall be dis-
solved as to that party, but such dissolu-
tion shall in subsequent proceedings have
the same effect with respect to the party
filing the same as an adverse award of
priority.
(c) Upon a showing of sufficient cause,
the disclaimer, or abandonment of the in-
vention, or abandonment of the contest or
of the application above referred to, may
be executed and filed by the assignee of
the entire interest. A concession of priori-
ty may not be made by an assignee.
(d) Such disclaimer, concession of pri-
ority, abandonment of the invention, or
abandonment of the contest shall operate
without further action as a direction to
cancel the claims involved from the appli-
cation of the party making the same on
termination of the interference on the ba-
sis thereof.
§ 1.263 Statutory disclaimer by patentee.
The disclaimer referred to in § 1.262,
when made by a patentee in interference
is not a disclaimer under 35 U.S.C. 253. If
a disclaimer under the statute and the fee
set forth in § 1.20(d) (see § 1.321) cancel-
ling claims involved in the interference
from the patent, is made by the patentee,
including all assignees as shown by the
records of the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice, the interference will be dissolved pro
forma as to such claims.
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982; effective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.264 Reissue filed by patentee.
If a patentee in interference files an ap-
plication for reissue during the interfer-
ence, omitting the claims involved (for
the purpose of avoiding the interference),
the application will be examined and such
examination will include the question of
patentability over the issue of the interfer-
ence and over the application of the other
1029 OG 88
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
party. The interference will not be termi-
nated unless a reissue is granted excluding
claims to the conflicting subject matter,
whereupon the interference will be dis-
solved. If a reissue application is filed for
other purposes, it may be held subject to
the outcome of the interference. An appli-
cation for reissue will not be included in
the interference on the basis of new
claims presented by the reissue unless a
motion to that effect is brought during
the motion period or any delay adequate-
ly explained.
§ 1.265 Status of claims of defeated appli-
cant after interference.
Whenever an award of priority has
been rendered in an interference proceed-
ing and the limit of appeal from such de-
cision has expired, the claim or claims
constituting the issue of the interference
in the application of the defeated or un-
successful applicant or applicants stand fi-
nally disposed of without further action
by the examiner and are not open to fur-
ther ex parte prosecution.
§ 1.266 Action after interference.
(a) After the termination of the interfer-
ence, the primary examiner will promptly
take such action in each of the applica-
tions involved as may be necessary.
Amendments presented during the inter-
ference shall not be entered except as oth-
erwise provided; amendments required to
accompany motions to amend shall be en-
tered only to the extent the motion was
granted (matter not entered may be subse-
quently presented by the applicant, sub-
ject to the sections relating to amend-
ments, provided the prosecution of the
application is not otherwise closed). The
examiner will act on any matter requiring
action and call for response to any exam-
iner's action unresponded to.
(b) After judgment of priority, the ap-
plication of any party may be held subject
to further examination, including interfer-
ence with other applications.
§ 1.267 Second interference.
A second interference between the
same parties will not be declared upon an-
other application for patent for the same
invention filed by either party.
§ 1.268 Filing of interference settlement
agreements.
(a) Any agreement or understanding be-
tween parties to an interference, including
any collateral agreements referred to
therein, made in connection with or in
contemplation of the termination of the
interference, must be in writing and a true
copy thereof filed in the Patent and
Trademark Office, directed to the Board
of Patent Interferences, before the termi-
nation of the interference as between the
said parties to the agreement or under-
standing.
(b) If any party filing the agreement or
understanding pursuant to paragraph (a)
of this section so requests, the copy will
be kept separate from the file of the inter-
ference, and made available only to Gov-
ernment agencies on written request, or
to any person upon petition accompanied
by the fee set forth in § 1.1 7(i) and on a
showing of good cause.
(c) Failure to file the copy of the agree-
ment or understanding pursuant to para-
graph (a) of this section, will render
permanently unenforceable such agree-
ment or understanding and any patent of
the parties involved in the interference or
any patent subsequently issued on any ap-
plication of the parties so involved. The
Commissioner may, however, upon peti-
tion accompanied by the fee set forth in
§ 1.17(h) and on a showing of good
cause for failure to file within the time
prescribed, permit the filing on the agree-
ment or understanding during the six-
month period subsequent to the termina-
tion of the interference as between the
parties to the agreement or understanding.
[47 FR 33086. July 30, 1982; effective Oct. 1,
1982]
Testimony in Interferences and
Other Contested Cases
Authority: Sees. 1.271 to 1.286 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 23, 135.
§ 1.271 Evidence must comply with rules.
Evidence touching the matter at issue
which shall not have been taken and filed
in compliance with this part will not be
considered in determining the interference
or other proceeding.
§ 1.272 Manner of taking testimony of
witnesses.
(a) The testimony of witnesses shall be
taken by depositions on oral examination
in accordance with the regulations in this
part.
(b) If the parties so stipulate in writing,
deposition may be taken before any per-
son authorized to administer oaths, at any
place, upon any notice, and in any man-
ner, and when so taken may be used like
other depositions. By agreement of the
parties, provided the Commissioner con-
sent, testimony may be taken before an
officer or officers of the Patent and
Trademark Office under such terms and
conditions as the Commissioner may pre-
scribe.
(c) By agreement of the parties, the tes-
timony of any witness or witnesses of any
party may be submitted in the form of an
affidavit by such witness or witnesses.
The parties may stipulate what a particu-
lar witness would testify to if called, or
the facts in the case of any party may be
stipulated. When evidence is submitted in
one of these forms, four copies of such af-
fidavit or stipulated testimony (§ 1.253
(a), (c), (0) are required.
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 89
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, and 38 FR 10005,
Apr. 23, 1973]
§ 1.273 Notice of examination of wit-
nesses.
(a) Before the depositions of witnesses
shall be taken by a party, due notice in
writing shall be given to the opposing
party or parties, as provided in § 1.248, of
the time when and place where the depo-
sitions will be taken, of the cause or mat-
ter in which they are to be used, and the
name and address of each witness to be
examined; if the name of a witness is not
known a general description sufficient to
identify him or the particular class or
group to which he belongs, together with
a satisfactory explanation, may be given
instead. The opposing party shall have
full opportunity, either in person or by at-
torney, to cross-examine the witnesses. If
the opposing party shall attend the exami-
nation of witnesses not named in the no-
tice, and shall either cross-examine such
witnesses or fail to object to their exami-
nation, he shall be deemed to have
waived his right to object to such exami-
nation for want of notice. Neither party
shall take testimony in more than one
place at the same time, nor so nearly at
the same time that reasonable opportunity
for travel from one place of examination
to the other cannot be had.
(b) The notice for taking testimony
must be served (unless otherwise stipulat-
ed in an instrument in writing filed in the
case) upon the attorney of record, if there
be one, or, if there be no attorney of
record, upon the adverse party. Reason-
able time must be given therein for such
adverse party to reach the place of exami-
nation. Such notice shall, with a statement
signed by the attorney as to the fact, time,
and mode of service thereof, be attached
to the deposition or depositions, whether
the opposing party shall have cross-exam-
ined or not.
§ 1.274 Persons before whom depositions
may be taken.
(a) Within the United States, or within
a territory or insular possession of the
United States, depositions shall be taken
before an officer authorized to administer
oaths by the laws of the United States or
of the place where the examination is
held.
(b) No such officer who is a relative or
employee of either of the parties, or of
their attorneys or agents, or interested, di-
rectly or indirectly, in the matter in con-
troversy, either as counsel, attorney,
agent or otherwise, shall be competent to
take depositions, unless with the written
consent of ail the parties.
§ 1.275 Examination of witnesses.
(a) Each witness before testifying shall
be duly sworn according to law by the
officer before whom his deposition is to
be taken.
(b) The testimony shall be taken in an-
swer to interrogatories, with the questions
and answers recorded in their regular or-
der by the officer, or by some other per-
son (who shall be subject to the pro-
visions of § 1.274(b)), in the presence of
the officer except when his presence is
waived on the record by agreement of the
parties. The testimony shall be taken
stenographically and transcribed, unless
the parties present agree otherwise.
(c) In the absence of all opposing
parties and their attorneys or agents, testi-
mony may be taken in longhand, type-
writing, or stenographically.
(d) All objections made at the time of
the examination to the qualifications of
the officer taking the deposition, or to the
manner of taking it, or to the evidence
presented, or to the conduct of any party
and any other objection to the proceed-
ings, shall be noted by the officer upon
the deposition. Evidence objected to shall
be taken subject to the objections.
(e) When the testimony has been tran-
scribed, the deposition shall be carefully
read over by the witness, or by the offi-
cer to him, and shall then be signed by
the witness in the presence of the officer
unless the reading and the signature be
waived on the record by agreement of all
parties.
§ 1.276 Certification and filing by officer.
The officer shall annex to the deposi-
tion his certificate showing: (a) Due ad-
ministration of the oath by the officer to
the witness before the commencement of
his testimony; (b) the name of the person
by whom the testimony was taken down,
and whether, if not taken down by the of-
ficer, it was taken down in his presence;
(c) the presence or absence of the adverse
party; (d) the place, day, and hour of
commencing and taking the deposition;
(e) that the deposition was read by or to
the witness before he signed the same,
and that he signed the same in the pres-
ence of the officer; and (0 the fact that
the officer was not disqualified as speci-
fied in § 1.274. If any of the foregoing re-
quirements are waived, the certificate
shall so state. The officer shall sign the
certificate and affix thereto his seal of of-
fice, if he have such seal. Unless waived
on the record by agreement, he shall
then, without delay, securely seal in an
envelope all the evidence, notices, and pa-
per exhibits, inscribe upon the envelope a
certificate giving the number and title of
the case, the name of each witness, and
the date of sealing, address the package,
and forward the same to the Commission-
er of Patents and Trademarks. If the
weight or bulk of an exhibit shall exclude
it from the envelope, it shall, unless
waived on the record by agreement of all
parties, be authenticated by the officer
and transmitted in a separate package,
marked and addressed as provided in this
section.
1029 OG 90
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
§ 1.277 Form of deposition.
(a) The testimony must be written on
letter size paper, with a wide margin on
the left-hand side of the page, and with
the writing on one side only of the sheet.
The pages must be serially numbered
throughout the entire record for each par-
ty (§ 1.253(c)) and the name of the wit-
ness must be plainly and conspicuously
written at the top of each page. The ques-
tions propounded to each witness must be
consecutively numbered, unless paper
with numbered lines is used, and each
question must be followed by its answer.
(b) In order to have a ribbon copy of
the testimony available as required by
§ 1.253(0, a carbon copy of the deposition
may be executed by the witnesses and the
officer and filed as required by § 1.276.
(c) Exhibits must be numbered or let-
tered consecutively and each must be
marked with the number and title of the
case and the name of the party offering
the exhibit. Entry and consideration may
be refused to improperly marked exhibits.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22. 1959, 38 FR 10005,
Apr. 23, 1973; and 40 FR 11874, Mar. 14, 1975]
§ 1.278 Depositions must be filed.
All depositions which are taken must
be duly filed in the Patent and Trademark
Office. On refusal to file, the Office at its
discretion will not further hear or consid-
er the contestant with whom the refusal
lies; and the Office may, at its discretion,
receive and consider a copy of the with-
held deposition, attested by such evidence
as is procurable.
§ 1.279 Inspection of testimony.
After testimony is filed in the Office, it
may be inspected by any party to the
case, but it cannot be withdrawn for the
purpose of printing. It may be printed by
someone specially designated by the Of-
fice for that purpose, under proper re-
strictions.
§ 1.281 Additional time for taking testi-
mony.
If either party has proceeded with the
taking of testimony on his behalf but is
unable to complete his case because of in-
ability to procure the testimony of a wit-
ness or witnesses within the time limited
and said time has expired, and he desires
additional time for such purpose, he must
file a motion, accompanied by a statement
under oath or in the form of a declaration
setting forth specifically the cause of such
inability, the name or names of the wit-
ness or witnesses, the facts expected to be
proved by such witness or witnesses, the
steps which have been taken to procure
such testimony, and the dates on which
efforts have been made to procure it. (See
§ 1.245 for extensions of time in other sit-
uations.)
[38 FR 10005, Apr. 23, 1973]
§ 1.282 Official records and printed publi-
cations.
(a) Official records and any special
matter contained in a printed publication,
if competent evidence and pertinent to
the issue, may be introduced in evidence
by filing in the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice a notice to that effect, before the
closing of the time for taking the testimo-
ny of the party (before the time for taking
the testimony in chief if such matters are
not in rebuttal), specifying the record or
the printed publication, the page or pages
thereof to be used, indicating generally its
relevancy, and accompanied by the rec-
ord or authenticated copy, or the printed
publication or a copy. The notice and
copies of the record or publication must
be served on each of the other parties.
(b) In the case of prior applications, the
filing date of which is claimed, compli-
ance with the requirements of §§ 1.224
and 1.231 is sufficient notice under this
section.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, and 30 FR 6648,
May 14, 1965]
§ 1.283 Testimony taken in another inter-
ference or action.
Upon motion, supported by a showing
demonstrating its relevance and materiali-
ty to the issue, duly made and granted,
testimony taken in another interference
proceeding or action, between the same
parties or those in interest, may be used in
an interference proceeding, subject, how-
ever, to the right of any contesting party
to recall or demand the recall of witness-
es whose testimony has been taken and
who are physically and mentally able to
testify, and to take other testimony in re-
buttal of the testimony.
[34 FR 12632, Aug. 2, 1969]
§ 1.284 Testimony taken in foreign coun-
tries.
Upon motion duly made and granted,
testimony may be taken in foreign coun-
tries, upon complying with the following
requirements:
(a) The motion must designate a place
for the examination of the witnesses at
which an officer duly qualified to take
testimony under the laws of the United
States in a foreign country shall reside
and it must be accompanied by a state-
ment under oath that the motion is made
in good faith, and not for the purposes of
delay or of vexing or harassing any party
to the case; it must also set forth the
names of the witnesses, the particular
facts to which it is expected each will tes-
tify, and the grounds on which is based
the belief that each will so testify.
(b) It must be demonstrated that the
testimony desired is material and compe-
tent, and that it cannot be taken in this
country at all, or cannot be taken here
without hardship and injury to the mov-
ing party greatly exceeding that to which
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 91
the opposite party will be exposed by the
taking of such testimony abroad.
(c) Upon the granting of such motion a
time will be set within which the moving
party shall file in duplicate the interroga-
tories to be propounded to each witness,
and serve a copy of the same upon each
adverse party, who may, within a desig-
nated time, file in duplicate cross-interro-
gatories. Objections to any of the interro-
gatories or cross-interrogatories may be
filed at any time before the depositions
are taken and such objections will be con-
sidered and determined upon the hearing
of the case.
(d) As soon as the interrogatories and
cross-interrogatories are decided to be in
proper form, the Commissioner will cause
them to be forwarded to the proper offi-
cer, with the request that, upon payment
of, or satisfactory security for, his official
fees, he notify the witnesses named to ap-
pear before him within a designated time
and make answer thereto under oath; and
that he reduce their answers to writing,
and transmit the same, under his official
seal and signature, to the Commissioner
of Patents and Trademarks with the cer-
tificate prescribed in § 1.276.
(e) By stipulation of the parties the re-
quirements of paragraph (c) of this
section as to written interrogatories and
cross-interrogatories may be dispensed
with, and the testimony may be taken be-
fore the proper officer upon oral interro-
gatories by the parties, their attorneys or
their agents.
(f) Unless false swearing in the giving
of such testimony before the officer tak-
ing it shall be punishable as perjury under
the laws of the foreign state in which it
shall be taken, it will not stand on the
same footing in the Patent and Trademark
Office as testimony duly taken in the
United States; but its weight in each case
will be determined by the tribunal having
jurisdiction of such case.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, and 34 FR 12632,
Aug. 2, 1969]
§ 1.285 Effect of errors and irregularities
in depositions.
Notice will not be taken of merely for-
mal or technical objections which shall
not appear to have wrought a substantial
injury to the party raising them; and in
case of such injury it must be made to ap-
pear that, as soon as the party became
aware of the ground of objection, he gave
notice thereof.
(a) As to notice. All errors and irregular-
ities in the notice for taking a deposition
are waived unless objection is promptly
made and served in writing upon the par-
ty giving the notice.
(b) As to disqualification of officer. Ob-
jection to taking a deposition because
of disqualification of the officer before
whom it is to be taken is waived unless
made before the taking of the deposition
begins or as soon thereafter as the dis-
qualification becomes known or could be
discovered with reasonable diligence.
(c) As to taking of deposition. (1) Objec-
tions to the competency of a witness or to
the competency, relevancy, or materiality
of testimony are not waived by failure to
make them before or during the taking of
the deposition, unless the ground of the
objection is one which might have been
obviated or removed if presented at that
time.
(2) Errors and irregularities occurring
at the oral examination in the manner of
taking the deposition, in the form of the
questions or answers, in the oath or affir-
mation, or in the conduct of the parties,
and errors of any kind which might be
obviated, removed, or cured if promptly
presented, are waived unless seasonable
objection thereto is made at the taking of
the deposition.
(d) As to completion and return of deposi-
tion. Errors and irregularities in the man-
ner in which the testimony is transcribed
or the deposition is prepared, signed, cer-
tified, sealed, indorsed, transmitted, filed,
or otherwise dealt with by the officer are
waived unless a motion to suppress the
deposition or some part thereof is made
with reasonable promptness after such de-
fect is, or with due diligence might have
been, ascertained.
§ 1.286 Objections to admissibility.
Subject to the provisions of § 1.285, ob-
jection may be made to receiving in evi-
dence any deposition or part thereof, or
any other evidence, for any reason which
would require the exclusion of the evi-
dence according to the established rules
of evidence, which will be applied strictly
by the Office.
§ 1.287 Discovery.
(a)(1) Each party who expects to take
testimony must serve on each opposing
party who requests service the following:
(i) A copy of each document in his pos-
session, custody, or control and upon
which he intends to rely,
(ii) A list of and a proffer of reasonable
access to things in his possession, custody,
or control and upon which he intends to
rely, and
(iii) A list giving the names and
addresses of all persons whom he intends
to call as witnesses and indicating the re-
lationship of each person to the invention
in issue.
(2) Dates for compliance with para-
graph (a)(1) of this section will be set in
accordance with the following:
(i) The date by which all parties may
request service shall be not less than 10
days from the date of the order setting
testimony times;
(ii) The date for service by all junior
parties shall be not less than 30 days from
the date of the order setting such times;
(iii) The date for service by the senior
party shall be not less than 10 days from
1029 OG 92
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
the date set for the close of testimony in
chief of all junior parties.
(3) Where more than two parties are in-
volved and one of the junior parties is not
entitled to take testimony as to a more se-
nior party, the requirements of paragraphs
(a) (1) and (2) of this section shall not be
applicable as between such parties.
(b) The provisions of paragraph (a) of
this section are without prejudice to the
right of a party, where appropriate, to ob-
tain production of documents or things
during cross-examination of an opponent's
witness or during his own period for re-
buttal testimony.
(c) Upon motion (§ 1.246) brought by a
party during the period for preparation
for testimony, or thereafter as authorized
under § 1.246, and upon a showing that
the interest of justice so requires, the
Board of Patent Interferences may order
additional discovery as to matters under
the control of a party within the scope of
the discovery rules of the Federal Rules
of Civil Procedure, specifying the terms
and conditions of such additional discov-
ery. An order by the Board granting or
denying a motion under this paragraph
shall not be subject to review prior to a
decision awarding priority.
(d)(1) A party will not be permitted to
rely on any document or thing in his pos-
session, custody, or control, or on any
witness, not listed and served by that par-
ty as required by paragraph (a) of this
section, except upon a promptly filed mo-
tion accompanied by the proposed addi-
tional documents or lists together with a
showing of sufficient cause as to why
they were not served by the date set pur-
suant to paragraph (a) of this section.
(2) Any failure to comply with an or-
der under the provisions of paragraph (c)
of this section may be considered by the
Board of Patent Interferences as basis for
applying appropriate restrictions against
the party failing to comply, for holding
certain facts to have been established, and
in an appropriate case for awarding prior-
ity against him, or for taking such other
action as may be deemed appropriate.
(e) The parties may by agreement
among themselves modify any of the fore-
going requirements consistent with the
schedule of times for taking testimony
and filing the record. In the absence of
such agreement, discovery will not be
permitted prior to the period set for the
preparation for testimony.
(36 FR 8733, May 12. 1971, and 43 FR 28479,
June 30, 1978]
§ 1.288 Use of discovery.
(a) If a party intends to rely upon an
admission or upon an answer to an inter-
rogatory, obtained by discovery, the ad-
mission or answer may be introduced into
evidence by filing, before the closing of
the time for taking the testimony of the
party (before the time for taking the testi-
mony in chief if such admission or answer
is not in rebuttal), a copy of the admission
and the request therefor and/or a copy of
the interrogatory and its answer, together
with a notice of reliance thereon.
(b) A party may not rely upon any oth-
er matter obtained by discovery unless it
is introduced into evidence pursuant to
§§ 1.271 to 1.286.
[46 FR 52363, Oct. 27, 1981]
Protests and Public Use
Proceedings
§ 1.291 Protests by the public against
pending applications.
(a) Protests by a member of the public
against pending applications will be re-
ferred to the examiner having charge of
the subject matter involved. A protest
specifically identifying the application to
which the protest is directed will be en-
tered in the application file if (1) the pro-
test is timely submitted; and (2) the
protest is either served upon the applicant
in accordance with § 1.248, or filed with
the Office in duplicate in the event ser-
vice is not possible.
(b) A protest submitted in accordance
with the second sentence of paragraph (a)
of this section will be considered by the
Office if it includes (1) a listing of the pa-
tents, publications or other information
relied upon; (2) a concise explanation of
the relevance of each listed item; (3) a
copy of each listed patent or publication
or other item of information in written
form or at least the pertinent portions
thereof; and (4) an English language
translation of all the necessary and perti-
nent parts of any non-English language
patent, publication, or other item of infor-
mation in written form relied upon.
(c) An acknowledgment of the entry of
a protest under paragraph (a) of this sec-
tion in a reissue application file will be
sent to the member of the public filing the
protest. A member of the public filing a
protest under paragraph (a) of this section
in an application for an original patent
will not receive any communications from
the Office relating to the protest, other
than the return of a self-addressed post-
card which the member of the public may
include with the protest in order to re-
ceive an acknowledgment by the Office
that the protest has been received. The
Office will communicate with the appli-
cant regarding any protest entered in the
application file and may require the appli-
cant to supply information pursuant to
paragraph (a) of § 1.56, including re-
sponses to specific questions raised by the
protest, in order for the Office to decide
any issues raised by the protest. The ac-
tive participation of the member of the
public filing a protest pursuant to para-
graph (a) of this section ends with the fil-
ing of the protest and no further sub-
mission on behalf of the protestor will be
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 93
acknowledged or considered unless such
submission raises new issues which could
not have been earlier presented, and
thereby constitutes a new protest.
[47 FR 21752, May 19, 1982]
§ 1.292 Public use proceedings.
(a) When a petition for the institution
of public use proceedings, supported by
affidavits or declarations and the fee set
forth in § 1.1 7(j) is filed by one having in-
formation of the pendency of an applica-
tion and is found, on reference to the
primary examiner, to make a prima facie
showing that the invention involved in an
interference or claimed in an application
believed to be on file had been in public
use or on sa\e one year before the filing
of the application, or before the date al-
leged by an interfering party in his or her
preliminary statement or the date of in-
vention established by such party, a hear-
ing may be had before the Commissioner
to determine whether a public use pro-
ceeding should be instituted. If institu-
ted, times may be set for taking testi-
mony, which shall be taken as provided
by §§ 1.271 to 1.286. The petitioner will
be heard in the proceedings but after de-
cision therein will not be heard further in
the prosecution of the application for pa-
tent.
(b) The petition and accompanying pa-
pers should either: (1) Reflect that a copy
of the same has been served upon the ap-
plicant or upon his attorney or agent of
record; or (2) be filed with the Office in
duplicate in the event service is not possi-
ble. The petition and accompanying pa-
pers, or a notice that such a petition has
been filed, shall be entered in the applica-
tion file.
[24 FR 10332; Dec. 22, 1959, 34 FR 18858,
Nov. 26, 1969; 42 FR 5595, Jan. 28, 1977; 47
FR 33086, July 30, 1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.301 Appeal to U.S. Court of Appeals
for the Federal Circuit.
Any applicant or any owner of a patent
involved in a reexamination proceeding
dissatisfied with the decision of the Board
of Appeals, and any party to an interfer-
ence dissatisfied with the decision of the
Board of Patent Interferences, may appeal
to the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Fed-
eral Circuit. The appellant must take the
following steps in such an appeal: (a) In
the Patent and Trademark Office give no-
tice to the Commissioner and file the rea-
sons of appeal (see §§ 1.302 and 1.304);
(b) in the court, file a copy of the notice
and reasons of appeal and pay the fee for
appeal, as provided by the rules pf the
court. The certified list required by the
rules of the Court will be transmitted to
the Court by the Patent and Trademark
Office.
[46 FR 29184, May 29, 1981; 47 FR 47380,
Oct. 26, 1982; effective Oct. 26, 1982]
§ 1.302 Notice and reasons of appeal.
(a) When an appeal is taken to the U.S.
Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit,
the appellant shall give notice thereof to
the Commissioner, and file in the Patent
and Trademark Office within the time
specified in § 1.304, his or her reasons of
appeal specifically set forth in writing.
(b) In interferences and other contested
cases, the notice and reasons must be
served as provided in § 1.248.
(35 U.S.C. 142)
[47 FR 47380. Oct. 26, 1982; effective Oct. 26,
1982]
§ 1.303 aril action under 35 U.S.C. 145,
146,306.
(a) Any applicant or any owner of a pa-
tent involved in a reexamination proceed-
ing dissatisfied with the decision of the
Board of Appeals, and any party dissatis-
fied with the decision of the Board of Pa-
tent Interferences, may, instead of appeal-
ing to the U.S. Court of Appeals for the
Federal Circuit (§ 1.301), have remedy by
civil action under 35 U.S.C. 145 or 146,
as appropriate. Such civil action must be
commenced within the time specified in
§ 1.304.
(b) If an applicant in an ex parte case
or an owner of a patent involved in a
reexamination proceeding has taken an
appeal to the U.S. Court of Appeals for
the Federal Circuit, he or she thereby
waives his or her right to proceed under
35 U.S.C. 145.
(c) If any adverse party to an appeal
taken to the U.S. Court of Appeals for
the Federal Circuit by a defeated party in
an interference proceeding files notice
with the Commissioner within twenty
days after the filing of the defeated
party's notice of appeal to the court
(§ 1.302), that he or she elects to have all
further proceedings conducted as provid-
ed in 35 U.S.C. 146, certified copies of
such notices will be transmitted to the
U.S. Court of Appeals for the Federal
Circuit for such action as may be neces-
sary. The notice of election must be
served as provided in § 1.248.
[46 FR 29184, May 29, 1981; 47 FR 47380,
Oct. 26, 1982; effective Oct. 26, 1982]
§ 1.304 Time for appeal or civil action.
(a) The time for filing the notice and
reasons of appeal to the U.S. Court of
Appeals for the Federal Circuit (§ 1.302)
or for commencing a civil action (§ 1.303)
_ is sixty days from the date of the decision
" of the Board of Appeals or the Board of
Patent Interferences. If a request for re-
hearing or reconsideration, or modifica-
tion of the decision, is filed within the
time provided pursuant to § 1.197(b) or
§ 1.256(b), the time for filing an appeal or
commencing a civil action shall expire at
the end of the sixty-day period or thirty
days after action on the request, whichev-
1029 OG 94
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
er is later. The time periods set forth
herein are subject to the provisions of
§ 1.136.
(b) The times specified herein are calen-
dar days. If the last day of the time speci-
fied for appeal or commencing a civil
action falls on a Saturday, Sunday or le-
gal holiday, the time is extended to the
next day which is neither a Saturday,
Sunday nor a holiday.
(c) If a defeated party to an interfer-
ence has taken an appeal to the U.S.
Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit
and an adverse party has filed notice un-
der 35 U.S.C. 141 that he or she elects to
have all further proceedings conducted
under 35 U.S.C. 146 (§ 1.303(c)), the time
for filing a civil action thereafter is speci-
fied in 35 U.S.C. 141.
[41 FR 758, Jan. 5, 1976; 47 FR 33086, July 30,
1982, revised paragraph (a) effective Oct. 1,
1982; and 47 FR 47380, Oct. 26, 1982 revised
paragraph (c) effective Oct. 26, 1982]
Allowance and Issue of Patent
§ 1.311 Notice of allowance.
(a) If, on examination, it shall appear
that the applicant is entitled to a patent
under the law, a notice of allowance will
be sent to apphcant at the correspondence
address indicated in § 1.33, calling for the
payment of a specified sum constituting
the issue fee (§ 1.18), which shall be paid
within 3 months from the date of the
mailing of the notice of allowance.
(b) An authorization to charge the issue
fee (§ 1.18) to a deposit account may be
filed in an individual application, either
before or after mailing of the notice of
allowance. Where an authorization to
charge the issue fee to a deposit account
has been filed before the mailing of the
notice of allowance, the issue fee will be
automatically charged to the deposit ac-
count at the time of mailing the notice of
allowance.
[30 FR 12844, Oct. 8, 1965; 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.312 Amendments after allowance.
(a) No amendment may be made as a
matter of right in an application after the
mailing of the notice of allowance. Any
amendment pursuant to this paragraph
filed before the payment of the issue tee
may be entered on the recommendation
of the primary examiner, approved by the
Commissioner, without withdrawing the
case from issue.
(b) Any amendment pursuant to para-
graph (a) of this section filed after the
date the issue fee is paid must be accom-
panied by a petition including the fee set
forth in § 1.1 7(i) and a showing of good
and sufficient reasons why the amend-
ment is necessary and was not earlier
presented.
[34 FR 6844, Apr. 24, 1969; 47 FR 33086. July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.313 Withdrawal from issue.
(a) Applications may be withdrawn
from issue for further action at the initia-
tive of the Office or upon petition by the
applicant. Any such petition by the appli-
cant must include a showing of good and
sufficient reasons why withdrawal of the
application is necessary and, if the reason
for the withdrawal is not the fault of the
Office, must be accompanied by the fee
set forth in § 1.1 7(i). If the application is
withdrawn from issue, a new notice of al-
lowance will be sent if the application is
again allowed. Any amendment accompa-
nying a petition to withdraw an applica-
tion from issue must comply with the
requirements of § 1.312.
(b) When the issue fee has been paid,
and the patent to be issued has received
its issue date and patent number, the ap-
plication will not be withdrawn from is-
sue for any reason except (1) mistake on
the part of the Office, (2) a violation of
§ 1.56 or illegality in the application, (3)
unpatentability of one or more claims, or
(4) for interference.
[30 FR 12844, Oct. 8, 1965, as amended at 34
FR 18858, Nov. 26, 1969; 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.314 Issuance of patent.
If payment of the issue fee is timely
made, the patent will issue in regular
course unless (a) the application is with-
drawn from issue (§ 1.313) or (b) issuance
of the patent is deferred. Any petition by
the applicant requesting deferral of the is-
suance of a patent must be accompanied
by the fee set forth in § 1.1 7(i) and must
include a showing of good and sufficient
reasons why it is necessary to defer issu-
ance of the patent.
[30 FR 12844, Oct. 8, 1965; 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.315 Delivery of patent.
The patent will be delivered or mailed
on the day of its date to the attorney or
agent of record, if there be one; or if the
attorney or agent so request, to the paten-
tee or assignee of an interest therein; or, if
there be no attorney or agent, to the pat-
entee or to the assignee of the entire in-
terest, if he so request.
(35 U.S.C. 151)
§ 1.316 Application abandoned for failure
to pay issue fee.
(a) If the issue fee is not paid within 3
months from the date of the notice of al-
lowance, the application will be regarded
as abandoned. Such an abandoned appli-
cation will not be considered as pending
before the Patent and Trademark Office.
(b) The Commissioner may accept the
payment of the issue fee later than three
months after the mailing of the notice of
allowance as though no abandonment had
ever occurred if upon petition the delay
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 95
in payment is shown to have been un-
avoidable. The petition to accept the
delayed payment must be promptly filed
after the applicant is notified of, or other-
wise becomes aware of, the abandonment,
and must be accompanied by (1) the issue
fee, unless it has been previously submit-
ted, (2) the fee for delayed payment
(§ 1.17(1)), and (3) a showing that the de-
lay was unavoidable. Such showing must
be a verified showing if made by a person
not registered to practice before the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office.
(c) The Commissioner may, upon peti-
tion, accept the payment of the issue fee
later than three months after the mailing
of the notice of allowance as though no
abandonment had ever occurred if the de-
lay in payment was unintentional. The pe-
tition to accept the delayed payment must
be filed within one year of the date on
which the application became abandoned
or be filed within three months of the
date of the first decision on a petition un-
der paragraph (b) of this section which
was filed within one year of the date of
abandonment of the application. The peti-
tion to accept the delayed payment must
be accompanied by (1) the issue fee, un-
less it has been previously submitted, (2)
the fee for unintentionally delayed pay-
ment (§ 1.1 7(m)), and (3) a statement that
the delay was unintentional. Such state-
ment must be a verified statement if made
by a person not registered to practice be-
fore the Patent and Trademark Office.
The Commissioner may require additional
information where there is a question
whether the abandonment was uninten-
tional. The three-month period from the
date of the first decision referred to in
this paragraph may be extended under the
provisions of § 1.136(a), but no further ex-
tensions under § 1.136(b) will be granted.
Petitions to the Commissioner under
§ 1.183 to waive any time periods for re-
questing revival of an unintentionally
abandoned application will not be consid-
ered, but will be returned to the appli-
cant.
(d) Any petition pursuant to paragraph
(b) of this section not filed within six
months of the date of abandonment must
be accompanied by a terminal disclaimer
with fee under § 1.321 dedicating to the
public a terminal part of the term of any
patent granted thereon equivalent to the
period of abandonment of the application.
[30 FR 12844, Oct. 8, 1965, as amended at 40
FR 44814, Sept. 30, 1975, 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.317 Lapsed patents; delayed payment
of balance of issue fee.
(a) If the issue fee was paid prior to
October 1, 1982, any remaining balance of
the issue fee is to be paid within three
months from the date of notice thereof
and, if not paid, the patent will lapse at
the termination of the three month period.
(b) The Commissioner may accept the
payment of the remaining balance of the
issue fee later than three months after the
mailing of the notice thereof as though no
lapse had ever occurred if upon petition
the delay in payment is shown to have
been unavoidable. The petition to accept
the delayed payment must be promptly
filed after the applicant is notified or, or
otherwise becomes aware of, the lapse,
and must be accompanied by (1) the re-
maining balance of the issue fee, unless it
has been previously submitted, (2) the fee
for delayed payment (§ 1.17(1)), and (3) a
showing that the delay was unavoidable.
Such showing must be a verified showing
if made by a person not registered to
practice before the Patent and Trademark
Office.
(c) The Commissioner may, upon peti-
tion, accept the payment of the remaining
balance of the fee later than three months
after the mailing of the notice thereof as
though no lapse had ever occurred if the
delay in payment was unintentional. The
petition to accept the delayed payment
must be filed within one year of the date
on which the patent lapsed or be filed
within three months of the date of the
first decision on a petition under para-
graph (b) of this section which was filed
within one year of the date of lapse of the
patent. The petition to accept the delayed
payment must be accompanied by (1) the
remaining balance of the issue fee, unless
it has been previously submitted, (2) the
fee for unintentionally delayed payment
(§ 1.1 7(m)), and (3) a statement that the
delay was unintentional. Such statement
must be a verified statement if made by a
person not registered to practice before
the Patent and Trademark Office. The
Commissioner may require additional in-
formation where there is a question
whether the delay in payment was unin-
tentional. The three-month period from
the date of the first decision referred to in
this paragraph may be extended under the
provisions of § 1. 136(a), but no further ex-
tensions under § 1.136(b) will be granted.
Petitions to the Commissioner under
§ 1.183 to waive any time periods for re-
questing acceptance of an unintentionally
delayed payment will not be considered,
but will be returned to the applicant.
(d) Any petition pursuant to paragraph
(b) of this section not filed within six
months of the date of lapse must be ac-
companied by a terminal disclaimer with
fee under § 1.321 dedicating to the public
a terminal part of the term of the patent
equivalent to the period of lapse of the
patent.
[40 FR 44814, Sept. 30. 1975; 47 FR 33086,
July 30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.318 Notification of national publica-
tion of a patent based on an interna-
tional application.
The Office will notify the International
Bureau when a patent is issued on an ap-
plication filed under 35 U.S.C. 371, and
r
1029 OG 96
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
there has been no previous international
publication.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20465, May 11, 1978]
Disclaimer
§ 1.321 SUtutory disclaimer.
(a) A disclaimer under 35 U.S.C. 253
must be accompanied by the fee set forth
in § 1.20(d) and identify the patent and
the claim or claims which are disclaimed,
and be signed by the person making the
disclaimer, who shall state therein the ex-
tent of his or her interest in the patent. A
disclaimer which is not a disclaimer of a
complete claim or claims may be refused
recordation. A notice of the disclaimer is
published in the Official Gazette and at-
tached to the printed copies of the specifi-
cation. In like manner any patentee or
applicant may disclaim or dedicate to the
public the entire term, or any terminal
part of the term, of the patent granted or
to be granted.
(b) A terminal disclaimer, when filed in
an application to obviate a double pat-
enting rejection, must be accompanied by
the fee set forth in § 1.20(d) and include a
provision that any patent granted on that
application shall be enforceable only for
and during such period that said patent is
commonly owned with the application or
patent which formed the basis for the re-
jection.
[36 FR 7312, Apr. 17, 1971; 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
Correction of Errors in Patent
§ 1.322 Certificate of correction of Office
mistake.
(a) A certificate of correction under 35
U.S.C. 254 may be issued at the request of
the patentee or his assignee. Such certifi-
cate will not be issued at the request or
suggestion of anyone not owning an inter-
est in the patent, nor on motion of the Of-
fice, without first notifying the patentee
(including any assignee of record) and af-
fording him an opportunity to be heard.
(b) If the nature of the mistake on the
part of the Office is such that a certificate
of correction is deemed inappropriate in
form, the Commissioner may issue a cor-
rected patent in lieu thereof as a more ap-
propriate form for certificate of correc-
tion, without expense to the patentee.
(35 U.S.C. 254)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22. 1959, and 34 FR 5550,
Mar. 22, 1969]
§ 1.323 Certificate of correction of appli-
cant's mistake
Whenever a mistake of a clerical or ty-
pographical nature or of minor character
which was not the fault of the Office, ap-
pears in a patent and a showing is made
that such mistake occurred in good faith,
the Commissioner may, upon payment of
the required fee, issue a certificate of cor-
rection, if the correction does not involve
such changes in the patent as would con-
stitute new - matter or would require
reexamination.
[34 FR 5550, Mar. 22, 1969]
§ 1.324 Correction of inventorship in pa-
tent.
Whenever a patent is issued and it ap-
pears that the correct inventor or in-
ventors were not named through error
without deceptive intention on the part of
the actual inventor or inventors, the Com-
missioner may, on petition of all the
parties and the assignees and satisfactory
proof of the facts and payment of the fee
set forth in § 1.20(b), or on order of a
court before which such matter is called
in question, issue a certificate naming only
the actual inventor or inventors.
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982; and 48 FR 2696
Jan. 20, 1983, effective Feb. 27, 1983]
§ 1.325 Other mistakes not corrected.
Mistakes other than those provided for
in §§ 1.322, 1.323, 1.324, and not afford-
ing legal grounds for reissue or for
reexamination, will not be corrected after
the date of the patent.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983; effective Feb. 27,
1983]
Assignments and Recording
§ 1.331 Recording of assignments.
(a) Assignments, including grants and
conveyances, of patents, national applica-
tions, or international applications which
designate the United States of America,
will be recorded in the Patent and Trade-
mark Office under 35 U.S.C. 261. Other
instruments affecting title to a patent, a
national application, or an international
application which designates the United
States of America, and licenses, even
though the recording thereof may not
serve as constructive notice under 35
U.S.C. 261, will be recorded as provided
in this section or at the discretion of the
Commissioner. Any instrument to be re-
corded, except those under Part 7 of this
title, must be accompanied by the fee set
forth in § 1.21(h).
(b) No instrument will be recorded
which is not in the English language and
which does not amount to an assignment,
grant, mortgage, lien, incumbrance, or li-
cense, or which does not affect the title of
the patent or invention to which it relates,
and which does not identify the patent or
application to which it relates, except as
ordered by the Commissioner.
(c) An instrument relating to a patent
should identify the patent by number and
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 97
date (the name of the inventor and title of
the invention as stated in the patent
should also be given); an instrument relat-
ing to a national application, or an inter-
national application which designates the
United States of America should identify
the application by serial number or inter-
national application number and date of
filing (the name of the inventor and title
of the invention as stated in the applica-
tion should also be given), but if an as-
signment is executed concurrently with or
subsequent to the execution of the appli-
cation but before the application is filed
or before its serial number or international
application number and filing date are
ascertained, it should adequately identify
the application, as by its date of execution
and name of the inventor and title of the
invention; so that there can be no mistake
as to the patent or application intended.
(35 U.S.C. 261; Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, as amended at 43
FR 20465, May 11, 1978; 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.332 Receipt and recording.
Assignments are recorded in regular or-
der as promptly as possible, and then
transmitted with the date and identifica-
tion of the record stamped thereon to the
persons entitled to them. The date of the
record is the date of the receipt of the as-
signment at the Office in proper form and
accompanied by the fee set forth in
§ 1.21(h).
(35 U.S.C. 261)
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, as amended at 34
FR 18858, Nov. 26, 1969; 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.333 Conditional assignments.
Assignments which are made condition-
al on the performance of certain acts or
events, as the payment of money or other
condition subsequent, if recorded in the
Office are regarded as absolute assign-
ments for Office purposes until cancelled
with the written consent of both parties
or by the decree of a competent court.
The Office has no means for determining
whether such conditions have been ful-
filled. .
(35 U.S.C. 261)
§ 1.334 Issue of patent to assignee.
(a) In case of an assignment of the en-
tire interest in the invention and appli-
cation, or of the entire interest in the pa-
tent to be granted, the patent will
normally issue to the assignee. If the as-
signee should hold an undivided part in-
terest, the patent will normally issue
jointly to the inventor and the assignee. If
it is desired that the patent so issue, the
assignment in either case must first have
been recorded, and at a day not later than
the date payment is made of the issue fee.
(b) At the time of payment of the issue
fee, a statement must be furnished indicat-
ing whether or not an assignment has
been filed with the Patent and Trademark
Office. In the event an assignment has
been filed, such statement must include
the name and address of the assignee and
indicate whether or not an acknowledge-
ment of a recorded assignment has been
received from the Patent and Trademark
Office.
(c) If the assignment is recorded after
the date of payment of the issue fee, the
assignee may petition that the patent issue
to the assignee as recorded. Any such pe-
tition must be accompanied by the fee set
forth in § 1.1 7(i).
[34 FR 17772, Nov. 4, 1969; and 47 FR 33086,
July 30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.335 Filing of notice of arbitration
awards.
(a) Written notice of any award by an
arbitrator pursuant to 35 U.S.C. 294 must
be filed in the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice by the patentee, or the patentee's as-
signee or licensee. If the award involves
more than one patent a separate notice
must be filed for placement in the file of
each patent. The notice must set forth the
patent number, the names of the inventor
and patent owner, and the names and
addresses of the parties to the arbitration.
The notice must also include a copy of
the award.
(b) If an award by an arbitrator pursu-
ant to 35 U.S.C. 294 is modified by a
court, the party requesting the modifica-
tion must file in the Patent and Trade-
mark Office, a notice of the modification
for placement in the file of each patent to
which the modification applies. The no-
tice must set forth the patent number, the
names of the inventor and patent owner,
and the names and addresses of the
parties to the arbitration. The notice must
also include a copy of the court's order
modifying the award.
(c) Any award by an arbitrator pursu-
ant to 35 U.S.C. 294 shall be unenforce-
able until any notices required by para-
graph (a) or (b) of this section are filed in
the Patent and Trademark Office. If any
required notice is not filed by the party
designated in paragraph (a) or (b) of this
section, any party to the arbitration pro-
ceeding may file such a notice.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983; effective Feb. 27,
1983]
Recognition of Attorneys and
Agents
Authority: Sees. 1.341 to 1.348 also issued
under 35 U.S.C. 31,32.
§ 1.341 Registration of attorneys and
agents.
A register of attorneys and a register of
agents are kept in the Patent and Trade-
mark Office on which are entered the
1029 OG 98
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
names of all persons recognized as enti-
tled to represent applicants before the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office in the prep-
aration and prosecution of applications for
patent. Registration in the Patent and
Trademark Office under the provisions of
the regulations in this part shall only enti-
tle the persons registered to practice be-
fore the Patent and Trademark Office.
(a) Attorneys at law. Any attorney at
law in good standing admitted to practice
before any United States Court or the
highest court of any State or Territory of
the United States who fulfills the require-
ments and complies with the provisions of
these rules may be admitted to practice
before the Patent and Trademark Office
and have his name entered on the register
of attorneys.
(b) Agents. Any citizen of the United
States not an attorney at law who fulfills
the requirements and complies with the
provisions of these rules may be admitted
to practice before the Patent and Trade-
mark Office and have his name entered
on the register of agents.
Note: All persons registered prior to No-
vember 15, 1938, were registered as attorneys,
whether they were attorneys at law or not, and
such registrations have not been changed.
(c) Requirements for registration. No
person will be admitted to practice and
registered unless he shall apply to the
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks
in writing on a prescribed form supplied
by the Commissioner and furnish all re-
quested information and material; and
shall establish to the satisfaction of the
Commissioner that he is of good moral
character and of good repute and pos-
sessed of the legal and scientific and tech-
nical qualifications necessary to enable
him to render applicants for patents valu-
able service, and is otherwise competent
to advise and assist them in the presenta-
tion and prosecution of their applications
before the Patent and Trademark Office.
In order that the Commissioner may de-
termine whether a person seeking to have
his name placed upon either of the regis-
ters has the qualifications specified, satis-
factory proof of good moral character
and repute, and of sufficient basic training
in scientific and technical matters must be
submitted and an examination which is
held from time to time must be taken and
passed. Each application for admission to
the examination for registration must be
accompanied by the prescribed fee (see
§ 1.21). The taking of an examination may
be waived in the case of any person who
has actively served for four years in the
examining corps of the Patent and Trade-
mark Office.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) Foreign patent attorneys and agents.
Any foreign patent attorney or agent not
a resident of the United States who shall
file proof to the satisfaction of the Com-
missioner that he is registered and in good
standing before the patent office of the
country in which he resides and practices,
and is possessed of the qualifications stat-
ed in paragraph (c) of this section, may be
registered on the register of agents as en-
titled to represent applicants located in
such country before the United States Pa-
teiit and Trademark Office in the presen-
tation and prosecution of applications:
Provided, That the patent office of such
country allows substantially reciprocal
privileges to those admitted to practice
before the United States Patent and
Trademark Office. Such registration shall
continue only during the period that the
conditions specified obtain.
(0 Government employees. Officers and
employees of the United States who are
disqualified by statute (18 U.S.C. 203,
205) from practicing as attorneys or
agents in proceedings or other matters be-
fore Government departments or agen-
cies, may not be registered, and if any
registered attorney or agent becomes such
an officer or employee, his name on the
register shall be endorsed as inactive dur-
ing the period of such employment, but
officers or employees whose official
duties require the preparation and prose-
cution of applications for patent may be
registered (on compliance with the regu-
lations in this part) or recognized to prac-
tice, to the extent necessary to carry out
their official duties.
(g) Former examiners. No person who
has served in the examining corps of the
Patent and Trademark Office will be reg-
istered after termination of his services,
nor, if registered before such service, be
reinstated, unless he undertakes: (1) Not
to prosecute or aid in any manner in the
prosecution of any application pending in
any examining group during his period of
service therein; and (2) not to prepare or
prosecute nor to assist in any manner in
the preparation or prosecution of any ap-
plication of another filed within 2 years
after the date he left such group, and
assigned to such group, without the spe-
cific authorization of the Commissioner.
Associated and related classes in other
groups may be required to be included in
the undertaking or designated classes may
be excluded. In case application for regis-
tration or reinstatement is made after res-
ignation from the Office, the applicant
will not be registered, or reinstated, if he
has prepared or prosecuted, or assisted in
the preparation or prosecution of any
such application as indicated in this para-
graph. (See further 18 U.S.C. 207.)
(h) Oath and registration fee. Before his
or her name may be entered on the regis-
ter of attorneys or on the register of
agents, every applicant for registration
must, after his or her application is ap-
proved, subscribe and swear to an oath or
make a declaration prescribed by the
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks
and pay the prescribed registration fee.
(See § 1.21(a)(2).)
(i) Committee on Enrollment. The Com-
missioner may establish a Committee on
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 99
Enrollment to receive and act upon appli-
cations for registration to practice before
the Patent and Trademark Office, to con-
duct and supervise the examinations pro-
vided for in paragraph (c) of this section,
to maintain the registers and to perform
such other duties in connection with en-
rollment and recognition of attorneys and
agents as may be necessary; or such func-
tions may be performed by designated of-
ficials of the Patent and Trademark
Office. Any action of such committee or
official may be reviewed by the Com-
missioner.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, 30 FR 6391, May
7, 1965; 34 FR 18858, Nov. 26, 1969; 36 FR
12617, July 2, 1971; 47 FR 33086, July 30,
1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
Note: See § 2.12 for practice in trademark
cases.
§ 1.342 Limited recognition.
Any person not registered and not enti-
tled to be recognized under § 1.341 as an
attorney or agent to represent applicants
generally may, upon a showing of cir-
cumstances which render it necessary or
justifiable, be recognized by the Commis-
sioner to prosecute as attorney or agent a
specified application or applications, but
this limited recognition shall not extend
further than the application or applica-
tions specified.
§ 1.343 Persons not registered or recog-
nized.
Only persons who are registered or
given limited recognition as provided in
§ 1.342 will be permitted to prosecute pa-
tent applications of others before the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office.
[36 FR 12617, July 2, 1971]
§ 1.344 Professional conduct.
Attorneys and agents appearing before
the Patent and Trademark Office must
conform to the standards of ethical and
professional conduct set forth in the Code
of Professional Responsibility of the
American Bar Association as amended
February 24, 1970, insofar as such code is
not inconsistent with this part. A copy of
the said code is available for inspection in
the Office of the Solicitor, U.S. Patent
and Trademark Office, Room 11C04,
Building 3, Crystal Plaza, 2021 Jefferson
Davis Highway, Arlington, VA. Copies
of the code are available upon request to
the American Bar Center, 1155 E. 60th
Street, Chicago, IL 60637.
[36 FR 12617, July 2, 1971]
§ 1.345 Advertising.
(a) The use of advertising, circulars, let-
ters, cards, and similar material to solicit
patent business, directly or indirectly, is
forbidden as unprofessional conduct, and
any person engaging in such solicitation,
or associated with or employed by others
who so solicit, shall be refused recogni-
tion to practice before the Patent and
Trademark Office or may be suspended,
excluded or disbarred from further prac-
tice.
(b) The use of simple professional letter-
heads, calling cards, or office signs, simple
announcements necessitated by opening an
office, change of association, or change of
address, distributed to clients and friends,
and insertion of listings in common form
(not display) in a classified telephone or
city directory, and listings and professional
cards with biographical data in standard
professional directories shall not be con-
sidered a violation of this rule.
(c) No agent shall, in any material spec-
ified in paragraph (b) of this section or in
papers filed in the Patent and Trademark
Office, represent himself to be an attor-
ney, solicitor or lawyer.
[23 FR 8622, Nov. 5, 1958]
§ 1.346 Signature and certificate of attor-
ney.
Every paper filed by an attorney or
agent representing an applicant or party
to a proceeding in the Patent and Trade-
mark Office must bear the signature of
such attorney or agent, except papers
which are required to be signed by the
applicant or party in person (such as the
application itself and affidavits or declara-
tions required of applicants). The signa-
ture of an attorney or agent to a paper
filed by him, or the filing or presentation
of any paper by him, constitutes a certifi-
cate that the paper has been read; that its
filing is authorized; that to the best of his
knowledge, information, and belief, there
is good ground to support it; including
any allegations of improper conduct con-
tained therein; and that it is not inter-
posed for delay.
[42 FR 5595, Jan. 28, 1977]
§ 1.347 Removing names from registers.
Attorneys and agents, registered to
practice before the Patent and Trademark
Office, should notify the Office of any
change of address for entry on the regis-
ter, by letter separate from any notice of
change of address filed in individual ap-
plications. The Office may address a letter
to any person on the registers, at the ad-
dress of which separate notice for the
register was last received, for the purpose
of ascertaining whether such person de-
sires to remain on the register. The name
of any person failing to reply and give the
information requested within a time limit
specified will be removed from the regis-
ter, and the names so removed published
in the Official Gazette. Any name so re-
moved may be reinstated, either on the
register of attorneys or the register of
agents, as may be appropriate. Any re-
quest for reinstatement must be accompa-
nied by the fee set forth in § 1.21(aX3).
1029 OG 100
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
[36 FR 12618, July 2. 1971; 47 FR 33086, July
30, 1982; effective Oct. 1, 1982]
§ 1.348 Suspension or disbarment pro-
ceedings.
Except as otherwise provided, proceed-
ings for suspension, disbarment, or ex-
clusion from practice are before a Com-
missioner.
(a) Investigating and prosecuting officer.
The duties of investigation, preparing
charges, collecting and presenting testi-
mony, and presenting a case for suspen-
sion, exclusion from practice or
disbarment shall be performed by the So-
licitor of the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice or, at his direction, by a designated
law examiner or other person, and neither
the Solicitor nor such law examiner or
other person shall participate in any man-
ner in the decision of the case. If, upon
investigation of a complaint or other in-
formation concerning an attorney or
agent, it shall appear to the Solicitor that
grounds for suspension, exclusion from
practice, or disbarment exist, he shall pre-
pare and forward the necessary notice
and statement.
(b) Notice of proceedings. Proceedings
for suspension or disbarment shall be in-
stituted by the Solicitor by mailing to, or
otherwise serving on, the respondent a
notice of such proceeding with a state-
ment of the charges against him, at the
same time forwarding a copy to the Com-
missioner. It shall be the duty of the re-
spondent to answer the charges as
s()eciried in paragraph (c) of this section.
(c) Answer. The respondent's answer
shall be filed in writing with the Commis-
sioner within one month from the time
the notice is served on the respondent, or
within such extension of time as may be
allowed by the Commissioner for good
cause shown. The answer shall be under
oath or declaration. Failure to answer
within the time allowed will be taken as
an admission of the charges. The respon-
dent in his answer should specifically ad-
mit or deny every material allegation of
fact in the statement of charges; every al-
legation not denied shall be deemed ad-
mitted, unless the respondent states that
he has no knowledge thereof sufficient to
form a belief, which statement shall be
considered a denial. Any special matters
of defense shall be stated affirmatively in
the answer. False statements in the an-
swer may be made the basis of supple-
mental charges.
(d) Hearing. (1) Unless the Commis-
sioner finds the answer sufficient to
dispose of the charges, he will set the
case for hearing before him, notifying the
respondent and the Solicitor of the place,
day and time of commencement of the
hearing. Evidence as to the matters in is-
sue may be submitted at the hearing, the
testimony of witnesses being presented
orally, under oath and reported.
(2) The hearing may be advanced and
continued by the Commissioner, as far as
may be deemed convenient and proper.
(3) Depositions for use at the hearing in
lieu of personal appearance of witnesses
may be taken by either the Solicitor or
the respondent on tipplication to and with
the written consent of the Commissioner
within such times and under such condi-
tions as the Commissioner may prescribe.
(e) Hearing officer. The Commissioner
may, in his discretion, delegate the con-
duct of the hearing to a hearing or trial
examiner who shall be the presiding offi-
cer and who shall make a recommended
decision.
(0 Administrative Procedure Act. Pro-
ceedings shall be governed, in matters not
specifically set forth herein, by the provi-
sions of the Administrative Procedure
Act, 60 Stat. 237; 5 U.S.C. lOOl-ipil,
which may be applicable.
[24 FR 10332, Dec. 22, 1959, and 34 FR 18858,
Nov. 26, 1969]
Amendment of Rules
§ 1.351 Amendments to rules will be
published.
All amendments to the regulations in
this part will be published in the Official
Gazette and in the FEDERAL REGIS-
TER.
§ 1.352 Publication of notice of proposed
andendments.
(a) Whenever required by law, and in
other cases whenever practicable, notice
of proposed amendments to the regula-
tions in this part will be published in the
Official Gazette and in the FEDERAL
REGISTER. If not published with the
notice, copies of the text will be furnished
to any person requesting the same. All
comments, suggestions, and briefs re-
ceived within a time specified in the no-
tice will be considered before adoption of
the proposed amendments which may be
modified in the light thereof.
(b) Oral hearings may be held at the
discretion of the Commissioner.
Subpart C— International Processing
Provisions
Authority: Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685.
Source: 43 FR 20466, May 11, 1978, unless
otherwise noted.
General Information
§ 1.401 Definitions of terms under the
Patent Cooperation Treaty.
(a) The abbreviation "PCT" and the
term "Treaty" mean the Patent Coopera-
tion Treaty.
(b) "International Bureau" means the
World Intellectual Property Organization
located in Geneva, Switzerland.
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 101
(c) "Administrative Instructions" means
that body of instructions for operating un-
der the Patent Cooperation Treaty re-
ferred to in PCT Rule 89.
(d) "Request", when capitaUzed, means
that element of the international applica-
tion described in PCT Rules 3 and 4.
(e) "International application", as used
in this subchapter is defined in § 1.9(b).
(0 "Priority date" for the purpose of
computing time limits under the Patent
Cooperation Treaty is defmed in PCT
Art. 2 (xi). Note also § 1.465.
(g) Other terms and expressions in this
Subpart C not defmed in this section are
to be taken in the sense indicated in PCT
Art. 2 and 35 U.S.C. 351.
§ 1.412 The United States Recemng Of-
fice.
(a) The United States Patent and
Trademark Office is a Receiving Office
only for applicants who are residents or
nationals of the United States of America.
(b) The Patent and Trademark Office,
when acting as a Receiving Office, will
be identified by the full title "United
States Receiving Office" or by the abbre- "
viation "ROAJS."
(c) The major functions of the Receiv-
ing Office include:
(1) According of international filing
dates to international applications meeting
the requirements of PCT Art. 11(1), and
PCT Rule 20;
(2) Assuring that international applica-
tions meet the standards for format and
content of PCT Art. 14(1), PCT Rule 9,
26, 29.1, 37, 38, 91, and portions of PCT
Rules 3 through 11;
(3) Collecting and, when required,
transmitting fees due for processing inter-
national applications (PCT Rule 14, 15,
16);
(4) Transmitting the record and search
copies to the International Bureau and In-
ternational Searching Authority, respec-
tively (PCT Rules 22 and 23); and
(5) Determining compliance with
applicable requirements of Part 5 of this
chapter.
§ 1.413 The United States International
Searching Authority.
(a) Pursuant to appointment by the As-
sembly, the United States Patent and
Trademark Office will act as an Interna-
tional Searching Authority for interna-
tional applications ffled in the United
States Receiving Office and in other Re-
ceiving Offices as may be agreed upon by
the Commissioner, in accordance with
agreement between the Patent and Trade-
mark Office and the International Bureau
(PCT Art. 16(3)(b)).
(b) The Patent and Trademark Office,
when acting as an International Searching
Authority, will be identified by the full ti-
tle "United States International Searching
Authority" or by the abbreviation "ISA/
US."
(c) The major functions of the Interna-
tional Searching Authority include:
(1) Approving or establishing the title
and abstract;
(2) Considering the matter of unity of
invention;
(3) Conducting international and inter-
national-type searches and preparing in-
ternational and international-type search
reports (PCT Art. 15, 17 and 18, and
PCT Rules 25, 33 to 45 and 47); and
(4) Transmitting the international
search report to the applicant and the In-
ternational Bureau.
§ 1.414 The United States Designated Of-
fice.
(a) The United States Patent and
Trademark Office will act as a Designat-
ed Office for international applications in
which the United States of America has
been designated as a State in which patent
protection is desired.
(b) The Patent and Trademark Office,
when acting as a Designated Office dur-
ing international processing will be identi-
fied by the full title "United States
Designated Office" or by the abbreviation
"DOAJS."
(c) The major functions of the United
States Designated Office in respect to in-
ternational applications in which the Unit-
ed States of America has been designated,
include:
(1) Receiving various notifications
throughout the international stage;
(2) Accepting for regular national pat-
entability examination international appli-
cations which satisfy the requirements of
35 U.S.C. 371; and
(3) Conducting reviews under PCT Ar-
ticle 25 for those international applica-
tions declared withdrawn.
§ 1.415 The International Bureau.
(a) The International Bureau is the
World Intellectual Property Organization
located at Geneva, Switzerland. It is the
international intergovernmental organiza-
tion which acts as the coordinating body
under the Treaty and the Regulations
(PCT Art. 2 (xix) and 35 U.S.C. 351 (h)).
(b) The major functions of the Interna-
tional Bureau include:
(1) Publishing of international applica-
tions and the International Gazette;
(2) Transmitting copies of international
applications to Designated Offices;
(3) Storing and maintaining record cop-
ies; and
(4) Transmitting information to authori-
ties pertinent to the processing of specific
international applications.
Who May File an International
Application
§ 1.421 Applicant for international appU-
cation.
(a) Only residents or nationals of the
1029 OG 102
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
United States of America may file inter-
national applications in the United States
Receiving Office.
(b) Although the United States Receiv-
ing Office will accept international appli-
cations filed by any resident or national of
the United States of America for interna-
tional processing, an international applica-
tion designating the United States of
America will be accepted by the Patent
and Trademark Office for the national
stage only if filed by the inventor or as
provided in §§ 1.422, 1.423 or 1.425.
(c) International applications which do
not designate the United States of Ameri-
ca may be filed by the assignee or owner.
(d) The attorney or agent of the appli-
cant may sign the international applica-
tion Request and file the international
application for the applicant if the inter-
national application when filed is accom-
panied by a separate power of attorney to
that attorney or agent from the applicant.
The separate power of attorney from the
applicant may be submitted after filing if
sufficient cause is shown for not submit-
ting it at the time of filing. Note that
paragraph (b) of this section requires that
the applicant be the inventor if the United
States of America is designated.
(e) Any indication of different appli-
cants for the purpose of different Desig-
nated Offices must be shown on the
Request portion of the international appli-
cation.
(f) Changes in the person, name, or ad-
dress of the applicant of an international
application shall be made in accordance
with PCT Rule 18.5.
§ 1.422 When the inventor is dead.
In case of the death of the inventor, the
legal representative (executor, administra-
tor, etc.) of the deceased inventor may
file an international application which
designates the United States of America.
§ 1.423 When the inventor is insane or le-
gally incapacitated.
In case an inventor is insane or other-
wise legally incapacitated, the legal rep-
resentative (guardian, conservator, etc.) of
such inventor may file an international ap-
plication which designates the United
States of America.
§ 1.424 Joint inventors.
Joint inventors must jointly file an in-
ternational application which designates
the United States of America; the signa-
ture of either of them alone, or less than
the entire number will be insufficient for
an invention invented by them jointly, ex-
cept as provided in § 1.425.
§ 1.425 Filing by other than inventor.
(a) If a joint inventor refuses to join in
an international application which desig-
nates the United States of America or
cannot be found or reached after diligent
effort, the international application which
designates the United States of America
may be filed by the other inventor on be-
half of himself or herself and the omitted
inventor. Such an international applica-
tion which designates the United States of
America must be accompanied by proof
of the pertinent facts and must state the
last known address of the omitted inven-
tor. The Patent and Trademark Office
shall forward notice of the filing of the
international application to the omitted in-
ventor at said address.
(b) Whenever an inventor refuses to ex-
ecute an international application which
designates the United States of America,
or cannot be found or reached after dili-
gent effort, a person to whom the inven-
tor has assigned or agreed in writing to
assign the invention or who otherwise
shows sufficient proprietary interest in the
matter justifying such action may file the
international application on behalf of and
as agent for the inventor. Such an interna-
tional application which designates the
United States of America, must be accom-
panied by proof of the pertinent facts and
a showing that such action is necessary to
preserve the rights of the parties or to
prevent irreparable damage, and must
$tate the last known address of the inven-
tor. The assignment, written agreement to
assign or other evidence of proprietary in-
terest, or a verified copy thereof, must be
filed in the Patent and Trademark Office.
The Office shall forward notice of the fil-
ing of the application to the inventor at
the address stated in the application.
The International Application
§ 1.431 International application require-
ments.
(a) An international application shall
contain, as specified in the Treaty and the
Regulations, a Request, a description, one
or more claims, an abstract, and one or
more drawings (where required). (PCT
Art. 3(2) and Section 207 of the Adminis-
trative Instructions.)
(b) An international filing date will be
accorded by the United States Receiving
Office, at the time of receipt of the inter-
national application, provided that:
(1) The applicant is a United States res-
ident or national (35 U.S.C. 361(a), PCT
Art. ll(l)(i)).
(2) The international application is in
the English language (35 U.S.C. 361(c),
PCT Art. ll(l)(ii)).
(3) The international application con-
tains at least the following elements (PCT
Art. ll(l)(iii)):
(i) An indication that it is intended as
an international application (PCT Rule
4.2);
(ii) The designation of at least one Con-
tracting State of the International Patent
Cooperation Union;
(iii) The name of the applicant, as pre-
scribed (note § 1.422);
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 103
(iv) A part which on the face of it ap-
pears to be a description; and
(v) A part which on the face of it
appears to be a claim.
(c) Payment of the basic portion of the
international fee (PCT Rule 15.2) and the
transmittal and search fees (§ 1.445) shall
be made in full at the time the internation-
al application papers required by para-
graph (b) of this section are deposited.
Failure to make full payment on the same
date as the deposit of the international ap-
plication papers required by subparagraph
(b) of this section will result in the inter-
national application being considered with-
drawn (PCT Art. 14(3Xa)).
§ 1.432 Designation of States and pay-
ment of designation fees.
(a) The names of Designated States
shall appear in the Request upon filing
and must be indicated as set forth in Sec-
tion 201 of the Administrative Instruc-
tions.
(b) The designation fees may be paid
upon filing of the international applica-
tion, but must be paid at the latest before
the expiration of one year from the priori-
ty date (PCT Rule 15.4(b)). Failure to
timely pay the designation fee for a par-
ticular Designated State will result in the
withdrawal of that designation (PCT Art.
14(3)(b)). Failure to timely pay at least
one designation fee will result in the with-
drawal of the international application
(PCT Art. 14(3)(a)).
§ 1.433 Physical requirements of interna-
tional application.
(a) The international application and
each of the documents that may be re-
ferred to in the check list of the Request
(PCT Rule 3.3(a)(ii)) shall be filed in one
copy only.
(b) All sheets of the international appli-
cation must be on A4 size paper (21.0 X
29.7 cm.).
(c) Other physical requirements for in-
ternational applications are set forth in
PCT Rule 11 and Sections 201-207 of the
Administrative Instructions.
§ 1.434 The request.
(a) The request shall be made on a
standardized printed form (PCT Rules 3
and 4). Copies of such printed Request
forms are available from the Patent and
Trademark Office. Letters requesting
such forms should be marked "Box
PCT."
(b) The Check List portion of the Re-
quest form should indicate each document
accompanying the international applica-
tion on filing.
(c) All information, for example,
addresses, names of States and dates, shall
be indicated in the Request as required by
PCT Rule 4 and Administrative Instruc-
tions 110 and 201.
(d) International applications which
designate the United States of America
shall include:
(1) The name, address and signature of
the inventor, except as provided by
§§ 1.421(d), 1.422, 1.423 and 1.425;
(2) A reference to any copending na-
tional application or international applica-
tion designating the United States of
America, if the benefit of the filing date
for the prior copending application is to
be claimed.
§ 1.435 The description.
(a) Requirements as to the content and
form of the description are set forth in
PCT Rules 5, 9, 10 and 1 1 and Adminis-
trative Instruction 204, and shall be ad-
hered to.
(b) In international applications desig-
nating the United States the description
must contain upon filing an indication of
the best mode contemplated by the inven-
tor for carrying out the claimed inven-
tion.
§ 1.436 The claims.
The requirements as to the content and
format of claims are set forth in PCT Art.
6 and PCT Rules 6, 9, 10 and 1 1 and shall
be adhered to. The number of the claims
shall be reasonable, considering the nature
of the invention claimed.
§ 1.437 The drawings.
(a) Subject to paragraph (b) of this sec-
tion, when drawings are necessary for the
understanding of the invention, or are
mentioned in the description, they must
be part of an international application as
originally filed in the United States Re-
ceiving Office in order to maintain the in-
ternational filing date during the national
stage (PCT Art. 7).
(b) Drawings missing from the applica-
tion upon filing will be accepted if such
drawings are received within 30 days of
the date of first receipt of the incomplete
papers. If the missing drawings are re-
ceived within the 30-day period, the inter-
national filing date shall be the date on
which such drawings are received. If
such drawings are not timely received, all
references to drawings in the international
application shall be considered non-exis-
tent (PCT Art. 14(2), Administrative In-
struction 310).
(c) The physical requirements for
drawings are set forth in PCT Rule 11
and shall be adhered to.
§ 1.438 The abstract.
(a) Requirements as to the content and
form of the abstract are set forth in PCT
Rule 8, and shall be adhered to.
(b) Lack of an abstract upon filing of
an international application will not affect
the granting of a filing date. However,
failure to furnish an abstract within one
month from the date of the notification
by the Receiving Office will result in the
1029 OG 104
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
international application being declared
withdrawn.
FEES
§1.445 International application filing and
processing fees.
(a) The following fees and charges are
established by the Patent and Trademark
Office under the authority of 35 U.S.C.
376:
$125.00
$500.00
250.00
$125.00
(1) A transmittal fee (see 35
U.S.C. 361(d) and
PCT Rule 14)
(2) A search fee (see 35
U.S.C. 361(d) and
PCT Rule 16) where:
(i) No correspond-
ing prior United States
national application
with fee has been filed
(ii) Corresponding
prior United States na-
tional application with
fee has been filed . . .
(3) A supplemental search
fee when required (see
PCT Art. 17(3)(a) and
PCT Rule 40.2) ....
(4) The national fee, that is,
the amount set forth as
the filing fee under §
1.16 (a) through (d)
credited by an amount
of $250 where an in-
ternational search fee
has been paid on the
corresponding interna-
tional application to
the United States as an
International Search-
ing Authority. Where
the amount of the
credit is in excess of
that required for the
national fee, a request
for a refund of the ex-
cess under § 1.446(b)
may be filed at the
time of paying the na-
tional fee. Only one
such credit is permit-
ted based on a single
international search
fee.
'Per additional invention.
(5) A special fee when required (see 35
U.S.C. 372(c))— $10 per claim.
(b) The basic fee and designation fee
portions of the international fee shall be
as prescribed in PCT Rule 15.
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982; efTective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.446 Refund of international applica-
tion filing and processing fees.
(a) Money paid for international appli-
cation fees, where paid by actual mistake
or in excess, such as a payment not re-
quired by law or Treaty and its Regula-
tions, will be refunded.
(b) Refund of a portion of the search
fee may be made to the extent set forth in
§ 1.445(a)(4) if requested at the time of
paying the national fee.
(c) Refund of the supplemental search
fees will be made if such refund is deter-
mined to be warranted by the Commis-
sioner or the Commissioner's designee
acting under PCT Rule 40.2(c).
(d) The international and search fees
will be refunded if no international filing
date is accorded (PCT Rules 15.6 and
16.2).
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982; effective Oct. 1,
1982]
Priority
§ 1.451 The priority claim and priority
document in an international applica-
tion.
(a) The claim for priority must be made
on the Request (PCT Rule 4.10) in a man-
ner complying with Section 110 and 201
of the Administrative Instructions.
(b) Whenever the priority of an earlier
United States national application is
claimed in an international application,
the applicant may request in a letter of
transmittal accompanying the internation-
al application upon filing with the United
States Receiving Office, that the Patent
and Trademark Office prepare a certified
copy of the national application for trans-
mittal to the International Bureau (PCT
Art. 8 and PCT Rule 17). The fee for
preparing a certified copy is stated in
§ 1.19(a)(3) and (b)(1).
(c) If a certified copy of the priority
document is not submitted together with
the international application on filing, or,
if the priority application was filed in the
United States and a request and appropri-
ate payment for preparation of such a cer-
tified copy do not accompany the
international application on filing, the cer-
tified copy of the priority document must
be transmitted directly by the applicant to
the International Bureau within the time
limit specified in PCT Rule 17.1(a).
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982 and 47 FR 40134,
Sept. 10, 1982, effective Oct. 1, 1982]
Representation
§ 1.455 Representation in international
applications.
(a) Applicants of international applica-
tions may be represented by attorneys or
agents licensed to practice before the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office or by a com-
mon representative (PCT Art. 49, Rules
4.8 and 90 and § 1.341).
(b) Appointment of an agent, attorney
or common representative (PCT Rule 4.8)
must be efTected either in the Request
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 105
form, signed by all applicants, or in a sep-
arate power of attorney submitted either
to the United States Receiving Office or
to the International Bureau.
(c) Powers of attorney and revocations
thereof should be submitted to the United
States Receiving Office until the issuance
of the international search report.
(d) The addressee for correspondence
will be as indicated in Section 108 of the
Administrative Instructions.
Transmittal of Record Copy
§ 1.461 Procedures for transmittal of rec-
ord copy to the Intematioiial Bureau.
(a) Transmittal of the record copy of
the international application to the Inter-
national Bureau shall be made, at the op-
tion of the applicant, either by the United
States Receiving Office or by the appli-
cant. Subject to paragraph (b) of this sec-
tion, any applicant who chooses to make
such transmittal personally shall notify
the United States Receiving Office to that
effect in writing, by way of a notice filed
together with the international applica-
tion. Such notice shall also state whether
the applicant wishes to collect the record
copy at the United States Receiving Of-
fice or to have the record copy mailed di-
rectly to him. The record copy of an
international application which was filed
without being accompanied by such no-
tice will be transmitted to the Internation-
al Bureau by the United States Receiving
Office (PTC Rule 22).
(b) An applicant may transmit the rec-
ord copy to the International Bureau as
provided in PCT Rule 22.2 only if the in-
ternational application is filed with the
United States Receiving Office before the
expiration of 11 months from the priority
date.
(c) No copy of an international applica-
tion may be transmitted to the Interna-
tional Bureau, a foreign Designated Of-
fice, or other foreign authority by the
United States Receiving Office or the ap-
plicant, unless the applicable requirements
of Part 5 of this chapter have been satis-
fied.
Timing
§ 1.465 Timing of application processing
based on the priority date.
(a) For the purpose of computing time
limits under the Treaty, the priority date
shall be defined as in PCT Art. 2(xi).
(b) When a claimed priority date is can-
celled under PCT Rule 4.10(d), or consid-
ered not to have been made under PCT
Rule 4.10(b), the priority date for the pur-
poses of computing time limits will be the
date of the earliest valid remaining priori-
ty claim of the international application,
or if none, the international filing date.
(c) When corrections under PCT Art.
11(2), Art. 14(2) or PCT Rule 20.2(a)(i)
or (iii) are timely submitted and the date
of receipt of such corrections falls later
than one year from the claimed priority
date or dates, the Receiving Office shall
proceed under PCT Rule 4.10(d).
§ 1.468 Delays in meeting time limits.
Delays in meeting time limits during in-
ternational processing of international ap-
plications may only be excused as
provided in PCT Rule 82. For delays in
meeting time limits in a national applica-
tion, see § 1.137.
Amendments
§ 1.471 Corrections and amendments dur-
ing international processing.
(a) All corrections submitted to the
United States Receiving Office must be in
the form of replacement sheets and be ac-
companied by a letter that draws atten-
tion to the differences between the
replaced sheets and the replacement
sheets, except that the deletion of lines of
text, the correction of simple typographi-
cal errors, and one addition or change of
not more than five words per sheet may
be stated in a letter and the United States
Receiving Office will make the deletion
or transfer the correction to the interna-
tional application, provided that such cor-
rections do not adversely affect the
clarity and direct reproducibility of the
application (PCT Rule 26.4).
(b) Amendments of claims submitted to
the International Bureau shall be as pre-
scribed by PCT Rule 46.
§ 1.475 Changes in person, name, or ad-
dress of applicants and inventors.
All requests for a change in person,
name or address of applicants and inven-
tor should be sent to the United States
Receiving Office until the time of issu-
ance of the international search report.
Thereafter requests for such changes
should be submitted to the International
Bureau.
Unity of Invention
§ 1.481 Determination of unity of inven-
tion before the International Searching
Authority.
(a) Before establishing the international
search report, the International Searching
Authority shall determine whether the in-
ternational application complies with the
requirement of unity of invention as set
forth in PCT Rule 13 and as set forth in
§§ 1.141 and 1.146 except as modified be-
low in this section.
(b) If the International Searching Au-
thority considers that the international
application does not comply with the re-
quirement of unity of invention, it shall
inform the applicant accordingly and in-
vite the payment of additional fees (note
§ 1.445 and PCT Art. 17(3)(a) and PCT
1029 OG 106
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
Rule 40). The applicant will be given a
time period in accordance with PCT Rule
40.3 to pay the additional fees due.
(c) In the case of non-compliance with
unity of invention and where no addition-
al fees are paid, the international search
will be performed on the invention first
mentioned ("main invention") in the
claims.
(d) Lack of unity of invention may be
directly evident before considering the
claims in relation to any prior art, or after
taking the prior art into consideration, as
where a document discovered during the
search shows the invention claimed in a
generic or linking claim lacks novelty or
is clearly obvious, leaving two or more
claims joined thereby without a common
inventive concept. In such a case the In-
ternational Searching Authority may raise
the objection of lack of unity of inven-
tion.
§ 1.482 Protest to lack of unity of inven-
tion.
(a) If the applicant disagrees with the
holding of lack of unity of invention by
the International Searching Authority, ad-
ditional fees may be paid under protest,
accompanied by a request for refund and
a statement setting forth reasons for dis-
agreement or why the required additional
fees are considered excessive, or both
(PCT Rule 40.2(c)).
(b) Protest under paragraph (c) of this
section will be examined by the Commis-
sioner or the Commissioner's designee. In
the event that the applicant's protest is
determined to be justified, the additional
fees or a portion thereof will be refunded.
(c) An applicant who desires that a
copy of the protest and the decision there-
on accompany the international search re-
port when forwarded to the Designated
Offices, may notify the International
Searching Authority to that effect any
time prior to the issuance of the interna-
tional search report. Thereafter, such no-
tification should be directed to the
International Bureau (PCT Rule 40.2(c)).
Subpart D— Reexamination of Patents
Source: 46 FR 29185, May 29, 1981, unless
otherwise noted.
Citation of Prior Art
§ 1.501 Citation of prior art in patent
files.
(a) At any time during the period of en-
forceability of a patent, any person may
cite to the Patent and Trademark Office
in writing prior art consisting of patents
or printed publications which that person
states to be pertinent and applicable to the
patent and believes to have a bearing on
the patentability of any claim of a particu-
lar patent. If the citation is made by the
patent owner, the explanation of pertinen-
cy and applicability may include an expla-
nation of how the claims differ from the
prior art. Citations by the patent owner
under § l.SSS and by a reexamination re-
quester under either § 1.510 or § 1.535
will be entered in the patent file during a
reexamination proceeding. The entry in
the patent file of citations submitted after
the date of an order to reexamine pursu-
ant to § 1.525 by persons other than the
patent owner, or a reexamination request-
er under either § 1.510 or § 1.535, will be
delayed until the reexamination proceed-
ings have been terminated.
(b) If the person making the citation
wishes his or her identity to be excluded
from the patent file and kept confidential,
the citation papers must be submitted
without any identification of the person
making the submission.
(c) Citation of patents or printed publi-
cations by the public in patent files should
either: (1) Reflect that a copy of the same
has been mailed to the patent owner at
the address as provided for in § 1.33(c);
or in the event service is not possible (2)
be filed with the Office in duplicate.
Request for Reexamination
§ 1.510 Request for reexamination.
(a) Any person may, at any time during
the period of enforceability of a patent,
file a request for reexamination by the Pa-
tent and Trademark Office of any claim
of the patent on the basis of prior art pa-
tents or printed publications cited under
§ 1.501. The request must be accompanied
by the fee for requesting reexamination
set in § 1.20(c).
(b) Any request for reexamination must
include the following parts:
(1) A statement pointing out each sub-
stantial new question of patentability
based on prior patents and printed publi-
cations.
(2) An identification of every claim for
which reexamination is requested, and a
detailed explanation of the pertinency and
manner of applying the cited prior art to
every claim for which reexamination is
requested. If appropriate the party re-
questing reexamination may also point out
how claims distinguish over cited prior
art.
(3) A copy of every patent or printed
publication relied upon or referred to in
paragraph (b) (1) and (2) of this section
accompanied by an English language
translation of all the necessary and perti-
nent parts of any non-English language
patent or printed publication.
(4) The entire specification (including
claims) and drawings of the patent for
which reexamination is requested must be
furnished in the form of cut-up copies of
the original patent with only a single col-
umn of the printed patent securely mount-
ed or reproduced in permanent form on
one side of a separate paper. A copy of
any disclaimer, certificate of correction,
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 107
or reexamination certificate issued in the
patent must also be included.
(5) A certification that a copy of the re-
quest filed by a person other than the pa-
tent owner has been served in its entirety
on the patent owner at the address as pro-
vided for in § 1.33(c). The name and ad-
dress of the party served must be
indicated. If service was not possible, a
duplicate copy must be supplied to the
Office.
(c) If the request does not include the
fee for requesting reexamination or all of
the parts required by paragraph (b) of this
section, the person identified as requesting
reexamination will be so notified and giv-
en an opportunity to complete the request
within a specified time. If the fee for re-
questing reexamination has been paid but
the defect in the request is not corrected
within the specified time, the determina-
tion whether or not to institute
reexamination will be made on the request
as it then exists. If the fee for requesting
reexamination has not been paid, no deter-
mination will be made and the request
will be placed in the patent file as a cita-
tion if it complies with the requirements
of § 1.501(a).
(d) The filing date of the request is: (1)
The date on which the request including
the entire fee for requesting reexamination
is received in the Patent and Trademark
Office; or (2) the date on which the last
portion of the fee for requesting re-
examination is received.
(e) A request filed by the patent owner,
may include a proposed amendment in ac-
cordance with § 1.121(f).
(0 If a request is filed by an attorney or
agent identifying another party on whose
behalf the request is being filed, the attor-
ney or agent must have a power of attor-
ney from that party or be acting in a
representative capacity pursuant to
§ 1.34(a).
[47 FR 33086, July 30, 1982; efFective Oct. 1,
1982]
§ 1.515 Determination of the request for
reexamination.
(a) Within three months following the
filing date of a request for reexamination,
an examiner will consider the request and
determine whether or not a substantial
new question of patentability affecting
any claim of the patent is raised by the re-
quest and the prior art cited therein, with
or without consideration of other patents
or printed publications. The examiner's
determination will be based on the claims
in effect at the time of the determination
and will become a part of the official file
of the patent and will be given or mailed
to the patent owner at the address as pro-
vided for in § 1.33(c) and to the person
requesting reexamination.
(b) Where no substantial new question
of patentability has been found, a refund
of a portion of the fee for requesting
reexamination will be made to the re-
quester in accordance with § 1.26(c).
(c) The requester may seek review by a
petition to the Commissioner under § 1.181
within one month of the mailing date of
the examiner's determination refusing
reexamination. Any such petition must
comply with § 1.181(b). If no petition is
timely filed or if the decision on petition
affirms that no substantial new question of
patentability has been raised, the determi-
nation shall be final and nonappealable.
§ 1.520 Reexamination at the initiatiTe of
the Commissioner.
The Commissioner, at any time during
the period of enforceability of a patent,
may determine whether or not a substan-
tial new question of patentability is raised
by patents or printed publications which
have been discovered by the Commission-
er or which have been brought to the
Commissioner's attention even though no
request for reexamination has been filed in
accordance with § 1.510. The Commis-
sioner may initiate reexamination without
a request for reexamination pursuant to
§ 1.510. Normally requests from outside
the Patent and Trademark Office that the
Commissioner undertake reexamination
on his own initiative will not be consid-
ered. Any determination to initiate re-
examination under this section will be-
come a part of the official file of the
patent and will be given or mailed to the
patent owner at the address as provided
for in § 1.33(c).
Reexamination
§ 1.525 Order to reexamine.
(a) If a substantial new question of pat-
entability is found pursuant to § 1.515 or
§ 1.520, the determination will include an
order for reexamination of the patent for
resolution of the question. If the order for
reexamination resulted from a petition
pursuant to § 1.515(c), the reexamination
will ordinarily be conducted by an exam-
iner other than the examiner responsi-
ble for the initial determination under
§ 1.515(a).
(b) If the order for reexamination of the
patent mailed to the patent owner at the
address as provided for in § 1.33(c) is re-
turned to the Office undelivered, the no-
tice published in the Official Gazette
under § 1.11(c) will be considered to be
constructive notice and reexamination
will proceed.
§ 1.530 Statement and amendment by pa*
tent owner.
(a) Except as provided in § 1.510(e), no
statement or other response by the patent
owner shall be filed prior to the determi-
nations made in accordance with §§ 1.5 IS
or 1.520. If a premature statement or oth-
er response is filed by the patent owner it
will not be acknowledged or considered
in making the determination.
1029 OG 108
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(b) The order for reexamination will set
a period of not less than two months from
the date of the order within which the pa-
tent owner may file a statement on the
new question of patentability including
any proposed amendments the patent
owner wishes to make.
(c) Any statement filed by the patent
owner shall clearly point out why the
subject matter as claimed is not anticipat-
ed or rendered obvious by the prior art
patents or printed publications, either
alone or in any reasonable combinations.
Any statement filed must be served upon
the reexamination requester in accordance
with § 1.248.
(d) Any proposed amendments to the
description and claims must be made in
accordance with § 1.121(0. No amend-
ment may enlarge the scope of the claims
of the patent or introduce new matter. No
amended or new claims may be proposed
for entry in an expired patent. Moreover,
no amended or new claims will be incor-
porated into the patent by certificate is-
sued after the expiration of the patent.
(e) Although the Office actions will
treat proposed amendments as though
they have been entered, the proposed
amendments will not be effective until the
reexamination certificate is issued.
§ 1.535 Reply by requester.
A reply to the patent owner's statement
under § 1.530 may be filed by the re-
examination requester within two months
from the date of service of the patent
owner's statement. Any reply by the re-
quester must be served upon the patent
owner in accordance with § 1.248. If the
patent owner does not file a statement un-
der § 1.S30, no reply or other submission
from the reexamination requester will be
considered.
§ 1.540 Consideration of responses.
The failure to timely file or serve the
documents set forth in § f.530 or in
§ 1.535 may result in their being refused
consideration. No submissions other than
the statement pursuant to § 1.530 and the
reply by the requester pursuant to § 1.535
will be considered prior to examination.
§ 1.550 Conduct of reexamination pro-
ceedings.
(a) All reexamination proceedings, in-
cluding any appeals to the Board of
Appeals, will t^ conducted with special
dispatch within the Office. After issuance
of the reexamination order and expiration
of the time for submitting any responses
thereto, the examination will be conduct-
ed in accordance with §§ 1.104-1.119 and
will result in the issuance of a reexam-
ination certificate under § 1.570.
(b) The patent owner will be given at
least 30 days to respond to any Office ac-
tion. Such response may include further
statements in response to any rejections
and/or proposed amendments or new
claims to place the patent in a condition
where all the claims, if amended as pro-
posed, would be patentable.
(c) The time for reply set in paragraph
(b) of this section will be extended only
for sufficient cause, and for a reasonable
time specified. Any request for such ex-
tension must be filed on or before the day
on which action by the patent owner is
due, but in no case will the mere filing of
the request effect any extension.
(d) If the patent owner fails to file a
timely and appropriate response to any
Office action, the reexamination proceed-
ing will be terminated and the Commis-
sioner will proceed to issue a certificate
under § 1.570 in accordance with the last
action of the Office.
(e) The reexamination requester will be
sent copies of Office actions issued during
the reexamination proceeding. Any docu-
ment filed by the patent owner must be
served on the requester in the manner
provided in § 1.248. The document must
reflect service or the document may be
refused consideration by the Office. The
active participation of the reexamination
requester ends with the reply pursuant to
§ 1.535, and no further submissions on be-
half of the reexamination requester will be
acknowledged or considered. Further, no
submissions on behalf of any third parties
will be acknowledged or considered un-
less such submissions are (1) in accor-
dance with § 1.510 or (2) entered in the
patent file prior to the date of the order
to reexamine pursuant to § 1.525. Submis-
sions by third parties, filed after the date
of the order to reexamine pursuant to
§ 1.525, must meet the requirements of
and will be treated in accordance with
§ 1.501(a).
§ 1.552 Scope of reexamination in
reexamination proceedings.
(a) Patent claims will be reexamined on
the basis of patents or printed publica-
tions.
(b) Amended or new claims presented
during a reexamination proceeding must
not enlarge the scope of the claims of the
patent and will be examined on the basis
of patents or printed publications and also
for compliance with the requirements of
35 U.S.C. 112 and the new matter prohi-
bition of 35 U.S.C. 132.
(c) Questions other than those indicated
in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section
will not be resolved in a reexamination
proceeding. If such questions are discov-
ered during a reexamination proceeding,
the existence of such questions will be
noted by the examiner in an Office action,
in which case the patent owner may de-
sire to consider the advisability of filing a
reissue application to have such questions
considered and resolved.
§1.555 Duty of disclosure in reexamina-
tion proceedings.
(a) A duty of candor and good faith to-
ward the Patent and Trademark Office
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 109
rests on the patent owner, on each attor-
ney or agent who represents the patent
owner, and on every other individual
who is substantively involved on behalf of
the patent owner in a reexamination pro-
ceeding. All such individuals who are
aware, or become aware, of patents or
printed publications material to the
reexamination which have not been
previously made of record in the patent
file must bring such patents or printed
publications to the attention of the Office.
A prior art statement, preferably in accor-
dance with § 1.98, should be filed within
two months of the date of the order for
reexamination, or as soon thereafter as
possible in order to bring such patents or
printed publications to the attention of the
Office.
(b) Disclosures pursuant to this section
may be made to the Office through an at-
torney or agent having responsibility on
behalf of the patent owner for the
reexamination proceeding or through a
patent owner acting in his or her own be-
half Disclosure to such an attorney, agent
or patent owner shall satisfy the duty of
any other individual. Such an attorney,
agent or patent owner has no duty to
transmit information which is not material
to the reexamination.
(c) The duties of candor, good faith,
and disclosure required in paragraph (a)
of this section have not been complied
with if any fraud was practiced or
attempted on the Office or there was any
violation of the duty of disclosure
through bad faith or gross negligence by,
or on behalf of, the patent owner in the
reexamination proceeding.
(d) The responsibility for compliance
with this section rests upon the individu-
als identified in paragraph (a) of this sec-
tion and no evaluation will be made in the
reexamination proceeding by the Office as
to compliance with this section. If ques-
tions of compliance with this section are
discovered during a reexamination pro-
ceeding, they will be noted as unresolved
questions in accordance with § 1.552(c).
[47 FR 21752, May 19, 1982]
§ 1.560 Interviews in reexamination pro-
ceedings.
(a) Interviews in reexamination pro-
ceedings pending before the Office
between examiners and the owners of
such patents or their attorneys or agents
of record must be had in the Office at
such times, within Office hours, as the re-
spective examiners may designate. Inter-
views will not be permitted at any other
time or place without the authority of the
Commissioner. Interviews for the discus-
sion of the patentability of claims in pa-
tents involved in reexamination pro-
ceedings will not be had prior to the first
official action thereon. Interviews should
be arranged for in advance. Requests that
reexamination requesters participate in in-
terviews with examiners will not be
granted.
(b) In every instance of an interview
with an examiner, a complete written
statement of the reasons presented at the
interview as warranting favorable action
must be filed by the patent owner. An in-
terview does not remove the necessity for
response to Office actions as specified in
§ 1.111.
§ 1.565 Concurrent office proceedings.
(a) In any reexamination proceeding be-
fore the Office, the patent owner shall
call the attention of the Office to any pri-
or or concurrent proceedings in which
the patent is or was involved such as in-
terferences, reissue, reexaminations, or lit-
igation and the results of such proceedings.
(b) If a patent in the process of
reexamination is or becomes involved in
interference proceedings or litigation, or a
reissue application for the patent is filed
or pending, the Commissioner shall deter-
mine whether or not to stay the reexamina-
tion, reissue or interference proceeding.
(c) If reexamination is ordered while a
prior reexamination proceeding is pend-
ing, the reexamination proceedings will be
consolidated and result in the issuance of
a single certificate under § 1.570.
(d) If a reissue application and a
reexamination proceeding on which an
order pursuant to § 1.525 has been mailed
are pending concurrently on a patent, a
decision will normally be made to merge
the two proceedings or to stay one of the
two proceedings. Where merger of a reis-
sue application and a reexamination pro-
ceeding is ordered, the merged exam-
ination will be conducted in accordance
with §§ 1.171 through 1.179 and the pa-
tent owner will be required to place and
maintain the same claims in the reissue
application and the reexamination pro-
ceeding during the pendency of the
merged proceeding. The examiner's ac-
tions and any responses by the patent
owner in a merged proceeding will apply
to both the reissue application and the
reexamination proceeding and be physi-
cally entered into both files. Any reexam-
ination proceeding merged with a reissue
application shall be terminated by the
grant of the reissued patent.
[46 FR 29185. May 29. 1981, and 47 FR 21753,
May 19, 1982]
Certificate
§ 1.570 Issuance of reexamination certifi-
cate after reexamination proceedings.
(a) Upon the conclusion of reexam-
ination proceedings, the Commissioner
will issue a certificate in accordance with
35 U.S.C. 307 setting forth the results of
the reexamination proceeding and the
content of the patent following the
reexamination proceeding.
(b) A certificate will be issued in each
1029 OG 1 10 ^
OFHCIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
patent in which a reexamination proceed-
ing has been ordered under § 1.525. Any
statutory disclaimer filed by the patent
owner will be made part of the certificate.
(c) The certificate will be mailed on the
day of its date to the patent owner at the
address as provided for in § 1.33(c). A
copy of the certificate will ako be mailed
to the requester of the reexamination pro-
ceeding.
(d) If a certificate has been issued
which cancels all of the claims of the pa-
tent, no further Office proceedings will be
conducted with regard to that patent or
any reissue applications or reexamination
requests relating thereto.
(e) If the reexamination proceeding is
terminated by the grant of a reissued pa-
tent as provided in § 1.565(d) the reissued
patent will constitute the reexamination
certificate required by this section and 35
U.S.C. 307.
(f ) A notice of the issuance of each cer-
tificate under this section will be pub-
lished in the Official Gazette on its date of
issuance.
[46 FR 29185, May 29, 1981, and 47 FR 21753,
May 19, 1982]
PART 3— FORMS FOR PATENT CASES
[REMOVED]
[47 FR 40134, Sept. 10, 1982; effective Oct. 1,
1982]
PART 5— SECRECY OF CERTAIN
INVENTIONS AND LICENSES TO FILE
APPLICATIONS IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
Secrecy Orders
Sec.
5.1 Defense inspection of certain applications.
5.2 Secrecy order.
5.3 Prosecution of application under secrecy
orders; withholding patent.
5.4 Petition for rescission of secrecy order.
5.5 Permit to disclose or modification of se-
crecy order.
5.6 General and group permits.
5.7 Compensation.
5.8 Appeal to Secretary.
5.11 License for filing application in foreign
country or for transmitting international
application.
5.12 Petition for license.
5.13 Petition for license; no corresponding ap-
plication.
5.14 Petition for license; corresponding U.S.
application.
5.15 Scope of license. "
5.16 Effect of secrecy order.
5.17 Who may use license.
5.18 Arms, ammunition, and implements of
war.
5.19 Export of technical data.
General
5.21 Effect of modification, rescission or li-
cense.
5.22 Papers in English language.
5.23 Correspondence.
Authority: 35 U.S.C. 6, 181-187, 188.
Source: 24 FR 10381, Dec. 22, 1959, unless
otherwise noted.
Secrecy Orders
§ 5.1 Defense inspection of certain appli-
cations.
(a) The provisions of this part shall ap-
ply to both national and international
applications filed in the Patent and Trade-
mark Office and, with respect to inven-
tions made in the United States, to
applications filed in any foreign country
or any international authority other than
the United States Receiving Office. The
(1) filing of a national or an international
application in a foreign country or with
an international authority other than the
United States Receiving Office, or (2)
transmittal of an international application
to a foreign agency or an international au-
thority other than the United States Re-
ceiving Office is considered to be a
foreign filing within the meaning of Chap-
ter 17 of Title 35, United States Code.
(b) In accordance with the provisions
of 35 U.S.C. 181, patent applications con-
taining subject matter the disclosure of
which might be detrimental to the nation-
al security are made available for inspec-
tion by defense agencies as specified in
said section. Only applications obviously
relating to national security, and applica-
tions within fields indicated to the Patent
and Trademark Office by the defense
agencies as so related, are made available.
The inspection will be made only by re-
sponsible representatives authorized by
the agency to review applications. Such
representatives are required to sign a dat-
ed acknowledgement of access accepting
the condition that information obtained
from the inspection will be used for no
purpose other than the administration of
35 U.S.C. 181-188. Copies of applications
may be made available to such representa-
tives for inspection outside the Patent and
Trademark Office under conditions assur-
ing that the confidentiality of the applica-
tions will be maintained, including the
conditions that: (1) All copies will be re-
turned to the Patent and Trademark Of-
fice promptly if no secrecy order is
imposed, or upon rescission of such order
if one is imposed, and (2) no additional
copies will be made by the defense agen-
cies. A record of the removal and return
of copies made available for defense in-
spection will be maintained by the Patent
and Trademark Office. Applications relat-
ing to atomic energy are made available
to the Department of Energy as specified
in § 1.14 of this chapter.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43FR20470, May 11, 1978]
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 (X3 II 1
§ 5.2 Secrecy order.
(a) When notified by the chief officer
of a defense agency that publication or
disclosure of the invention by the grant-
ing of a patent would be detrimental to
the national security, an order that the in-
vention be kept secret will be issued by
the Commissioner of Patents and Trade-
marks.
(b) The secrecy order is directed to the
applicant, his successors, any and all as-
signees, and their legal representatives;
hereinafter designated as principals.
(c) A copy of the secrecy order will be
forwarded to each principal of record in
the application and will be accompanied
by a receipt, identifying the particular
principal, to be signed and returned.
(d) The secrecy order is directed to the
subject matter of the application. Where
any other application in which a secrecy
order has not been issued discloses a sig-
nificant part of the subject matter of the
application under secrecy order, the other
application and the common subject mat-
ter should be called to the attention of the
Patent and Trademark Office. Such a no-
tice may include any material such as
would be urged in a petition to rescind
secrecy orders on either of the applica-
tions.
§ 5.3 Prosecution of application under se-
crecy orders; withholding patent.
Unless specifically ordered otherwise,
action on the application by the Office
and prosecution by the applicant will pro-
ceed during the time an application is un-
der secrecy order to the point indicated in
this section:
(a) National applications under secrecy
order which come to a final rejection
must be appealed or otherwise prosecuted
to avoid abandonment. Appeals in such
cases must be completed by the applicant
but unless otherwise specifically ordered
by the Commissioner will not be set for
hearing until the secrecy order is re-
moved.
(b) An interference will not be declared
involving national applications under se-
crecy order. However, if an applicant
whose application under secrecy order
copies claims from an issued patent, a no-
tice of that fact will be placed in the file
wrapper of the patent. (See § 1.205(c).
(c) When the national application is
found to be in condition for allowance ex-
cept for the secrecy order the applicant
and the agency which caused the secrecy
order to be issued will be notified. This
notice (which is not a notice of allowance
under § 1.311 of this chapter) does not re-
quire response by the applicant and places
the national application in a condition of
suspension until the secrecy order is re-
moved. When the secrecy order is re-
moved the Patent and Trademark Office
will issue a notice of allowance under
§ 1.311 of this chapter, or take such other
action as may then be warranted.
(d) International applications under se-
crecy order will not be mailed, delivered
or otherwise transmitted to the interna-
tional authorities or the applicant. Inter-
national applications under secrecy order
will be processed up to the point where,
if it were not for the secrecy order,
record and search copies would be trans-
mitted to the international authorities or
the applicant.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20470, May 11, 1978, and 43 FR 28479,
June 30, 1978]
§ 5.4 Petition for rescission of secrecy or-
der.
(a) A petition for rescission or removal
of a secrecy order may be filed by, or on
behalf of, any principal affected thereby.
Such petition may be in letter form, and it
must be in duplicate. The petition must be
accompanied by one copy of the applica-
tion or an order for the same, unless a
showing is made that such a copy has al-
ready been furnished to the department or
agency which caused the secrecy order to
be issued.
(b) The petition must recite any and all
facts that purport to render the order in-
effectual or futile if this is the basis of the
petition. When prior publications or pa-
tents are alleged the petition must give
complete data as to such publications or
patents and should be accompanied by
copies thereof.
(c) The petition must identify any con-
tract between the Government and any of
the principals, under which the subject
matter of the application or any signifi-
cant part thereof was developed, or to
which the subject matter is otherwise re-
lated. If there is no such contract, the pe-
tition must so state.
(d) Unless based upon facts of public
record, the petition must be verified.
§ 5.5 Permit to disclose or modification
of secrecy order.
(a) Consent to disclosure, or to the fil-
ing of an application abroad, as provided
in 35 U.S.C. 182, shall be made by a "per-
mit" or "modification" of the secrecy or-
der.
(b) Petitions for a permit or modifica-
tion must fully recite the reason or
purpose for the proposed disclosure.
Where any proposed disclosee is known
to be cleared by a defense agency to re-
ceive classified information, adequate ex-
planation of such clearance should be
made in the petition including the name
of the agency or department granting the
clearance and the date and degree there-
of. The petition must be filed in duplicate
and be accompanied by one copy of the
application or an order for the same, un-
less a showing is made that such a copy
has already been furnished to the depart-
ment or agency which caused the secrecy
order to be issued.
1029 OG 112
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(c) In a petition for modification of a
secrecy order to permit filing abroad, all
countries in which it is proposed to file
must be made known, as well as all attor-
neys, agents and others to whom the ma-
terial will be consigned prior to being
lodged in the foreign patent office. The
petition should include a statement vouch-
ing for the loyalty and integrity of the
proposed disclosees and where their
clearance status in this or the foreign
country is known all details should be
given.
(d) Consent to disclosure of subject
matter from one application under secre-
cy order may be deemed to be consent to
the disclosure of common subject matter
in other applications under secrecy order
so long as not taken out of context in a
manner disclosing material beyond the
modification granted in the first applica-
tion.
(e) The permit or modification may
contain conditions and limitations.
§ 5.6 General and group permits.
(a) Organizations requiring consent for
disclosure of applications under secrecy
order to persons or organizations in con-
nection with repeated routine operation
may petition for such consent in the form
of a general permit. To be successful such
petitions must ordinarily recite the securi-
ty clearance status of the disclosees as suf-
ficient for the highest classification of
materials that may be involved.
(b) Where identical disclosees and cir-
cumstances are involved, and consent is
desired for the disclosure of each of a
specific list of applications, the petitions
may be joined.
§ 5.7 Compensation.
Any request for compensation as pro-
vided in 35 U.S.C. 183 must not be made
to the Patent and Trademark Office but
should be made directly to the depart-
ment or agency which caused the secrecy
order to be issued. Upon written request
persons having a right to such informa-
tion will be informed as to the department
or agency which caused the secrecy order
to be issued.
§ 5.8 Appeal to Secretary.
Appeal to the Secretary of Commerce,
as provided by 35 U.S.C. 181, from a se-
crecy order cannot be taken until after a
petition for rescission of the secrecy order
has been made and denied. Appeal must
be taken within 60 days from the date of
the denial, and the party appealing, as
well as the department or agency which
caused the order to be issued will be noti-
fied of the time and place of hearing. The
appeal will be heard and decided by the
Secretary or such officer or officers as he
may designate.
Licenses for Foreign Filing
§ 5.11 License for filing application in
foreign country or for transmitting in-
ternational application.
(a) When no secrecy order has been is-
sued under § 5.2, a license from the
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks
under 35 U.S.C. 184 is required before fil-
ing any application for patent or for the
registration of a utility model, industrial
design, or model, in a foreign country, or
transmitting an international application
to any foreign patent agency or any inter-
national agency other than the United
States Receiving Office, or causing or au-
thorizing such filing or transmittal, with
respect to an invention made in the Unit-
ed States, if:
(1) The foreign application is to be filed
or its filing caused or authorized before a
national or international application for
patent is filed in the United States, or
(2) The foreign application is to be
filed, or its filing caused or authorized, or
the transmittal of the international appli-
cation is caused or authorized, prior to
the expiration of six months from the fil-
ing of the application in the United States.
(b) When there is no secrecy order in
effect, a license under 35 U.S.C. 184 is
not required if:
(1) The invention was not made in the
United States, or
(2) The foreign application is to be filed
or the international application is to be
transmitted, or its filing or transmittal
caused or authorized, after the expiration
of six months from the filing of the na-
tional application in the United States.
(c) When a secrecy order has been is-
sued under § 5.2, an application cannot be
filed in a foreign country, nor can an in-
ternational application be transmitted to
any agency other than the United States
Receiving Office except in accordance
with § 5.5.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20471, May 11, 1978]
§ 5.12 Petition for license.
(a) Filing of an application for patent
for inventions made in the United States
will be considered to include a petition
for license under 35 U.S.C. 184 for the
subject matter of the application. The fil-
ing receipt will indicate if a license is
granted. If the initial automatic petition is
not granted, a subsequent petition may be
filed under paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) Petitions for license under 35 U.S.C.
1 84 should be presented in letter form and
should include petitioner's address, and
full instructions for delivery of the re-
quested license when it is to be delivered
to other than the petitioner.
[48 FR 2696, Jan. 20, 1983; effective Feb. 27,
1983]
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 113
§ 5.13 Petition for license; no correspond-
ing application.
Where there is no corresponding na-
tional or international application, the
petition for license must be accompanied
by a legible copy of the material upon
which license is desired. This copy will
be retained as a measure of the license
granted. For assistance in the identifica-
tion of the subject matter of each license
so issued, it is suggested that the petition
or requesting letter be submitted in dupli-
cate and provide a title and other descrip-
tion of the material. The duplicate copy
of the petition will be returned with the
license or other action on the petition.
Where an international application is be-
ing filed in the United States Receiving
Omce, the petition may accompany the
international application.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43FR20471, May 11, 1978]
§ 5.14 Petition for license; corresponding
U.S. application.
(a) Where there is a corresponding
United States application on file the peti-
tion for license must identify this applica-
tion by serial number, filing date, inven-
tor, and title, and a copy of the material
upon which the license is desired is not
required. The subject matter licensed will
be measured by the disclosure of the
United States application. Where the title
is not descriptive, and the subject matter
is clearly of no interest from a security
standpoint, time may be saved by a short
statement in the petition as to the nature
of the invention.
(b) Two or more United States applica-
tions should not be referred to in the
same petition for license unless they are
to be combined in the foreign or interna-
tional application, in which event the pe-
tition should so state and the identific-
ation of each United States application
should be in separate paragraphs.
(c) Where the application to be filed or
transmitted abroad contains matter not
disclosed in the United States application
or applications, including the case where
the combining of two or more United
States applications introduces subject mat-
ter not disclosed in any of them, a copy
of the application as it is to be filed in the
foreign country or international applica-
tion which is to be transmitted to a for-
eign international or national agency as it
is to be filed in the Receiving Office must
be furnished with the petition. If, howev-
er, all new matter in the foreign or inter-
national application to be filed is readily
identifiable, the new matter may be sub-
mitted in detail and the remainder by ref-
erence to ^the pertinent United States
application or applications.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[24 FR 10381, Dec. 22, 1959, and 43 FR 20471,
May 11, 1978]
§ 5.15 Scope of license.
(a) A license to file an application in a
foreign country or transmit an interna-
tional application to any foreign or inter-
national agency other than the United
States Receiving Office, when granted, in-
cludes authority to forward all duplicate
and formal papers to the foreign country
or international agencies and to make
amendments and take any action in the
prosecution of the foreign or international
application, provided subject matter addi-
tional to that covered by the license is not
involved. In those cases in which no li-
cense is required to file the foreign appli-
cation or transmit the international appli-
cation, no license is required to file papers
in connection with the prosecution of the
foreign or international application not in-
volving the disclosure of additional sub-
ject matter. Any paper filed abroad or
with an international agency following
the filing of a foreign or international ap-
plication which involves the disclosure of
additional subject matter must be sepa-
rately licensed in the same manner as a
foreign or international application.
(b) Licenses separately granted in con-
nection with two or more United States
applications may be exercised by combin-
ing or dividing the disclosures, as desired,
provided additional subject matter is not
introduced.
(c) A license does not apply to acts
done before the license was granted un-
less the petition specifically requests and
describes the particular acts and the li-
cense is worded to apply to such acts.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[24 FR 10381, Dec. 22, 1959, and 43 FR 20471,
May 11, 1978]
§ 5.16 Effect of secrecy order.
Any license obtained under 35 U.S.C.
184 is ineffective if the subject matter is
under a secrecy order, and a secrecy or-
der prohibits the exercise of or any fur-
ther action under the license unless
separately specifically authorized by a
modification of the secrecy order in ac-
cordance with § S.S.
§ 5.17 Who may use license.
Licenses may be used by anyone inter-
ested in the foreign filing or international
transmittal for or on behalf of the inven-
tor or the inventor's assigns.
(Pub. L. 94-131, 89 Stat. 685)
[43 FR 20471, May 11, 1978]
§ 5.18 Arms, ammunition, and implements
of war.
(a) The exportation of technical data re-
lating to arms, ammunition, and imple-
ments of war generally is subject to the
International Traffic in Arms Regulations
of the Department of State (22 CFR Parts
121-128); the articles designated as arms,
ammunition, and implements of war are
1029 OG 114
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
enumerated in the U.S. Munitions List, 22
CRF 121.01. However, if a patent appli-
cant complies with regulations issued by
the Commissioner of Patents and Trade-
marks under 35 U.S.C. 184, no separate
approval from the Department of State is
required unless the applicant seeks to ex-
port technical data exceeding that used to
support a patent appUcation in a foreign
country. This exemption from Depart-
ment of State regulations is applicable re-
gardless of whether a license from the
Commissioner is required by the provi-
sions of §§ 5.11 and 5.15 (22 CFR
125.04(b), 125.20(b)).
(b) When a patent application contain-
ing subject matter on the Munitions List
(22 CFR 121.01) is subject to a secrecy
order under § 5.2 and a petition is made
under § 5.5 for a modification of the se-
crecy order to permit filing abroad, a sep-
arate request to the Department of State
for authority to export classified informa-
tion is not required (22 CFR 125.05(d)).
[35 FR 6430, Apr. 22, 1970]
§ 5.19 Export of technical data.
(a) Under regulations (15 CFR
370.10(j)) established by the U.S. Depart-
ment of Commerce, International Trade
Administration, Office of Export Admin-
istration, a validated export license is not
required in any case to file a patent appli-
cation or part thereof in a foreign country
if the foreign filing is in accordance with
the regulations (37 CFR 5.11-5.23) of the
Patent and Trademark Office.
(b) A validated export license is not
required for data contained in a patent ap-
plication prepared wholly from foreign-
origin technical data where such applica-
tion is being sent to the foreign inventor
to be executed and returned to the United
States for subsequent filing in the U.S. Pa-
tent and Trademark Office (15 CFR
379.3(c)).
(c) Inquiries concerning the export con-
trol regulations for the foreign filing of
technical data other than patent applica-
tions should be made to the Office of Ex-
port Administration, International Trade
Administration, Department of Com-
merce, Washington, D.C. 20230.
[45 FR 72654, Nov. 3. 1980]
General
§ 5.21 Effect of modification, rescission
or license.
Any consent, rescission or license under
the provisions of this part does not lessen
the responsibilities of the principals in re-
spect to any Government contract or the
requirements of any other Government
agency.
§ 5.22 Papers in English language.
All papers submitted in connection
with petitions must be in the English lan-
guage, or be accompanied by an English
translation and a translator's certificate as
to the true, faithful and exact character of
the translation.
§ 5.23 Correspondence.
All correspondence in connection with
this part, including petitions, should be
addressed to "Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks (Attention Patent Securi-
ty Division), Washington, D.C. 20231."
PART 7-REGISTER OF GOVERNMENT
INTERESTS IN PATENTS
Sec.
7. 1 Requirements.
7.2 Assignments.
7.3 Licenses.
7.4 Abbreviated copy.
7.5 Instruments already on record.
7.6 Access to register.
7.7 Secret register.
Authority: E.O. 9424, Feb. 18, 1944, 9 FR
1959; 3 CFR 1943-1948 Comp.
Source: 24 FR 10383, Dec. 22, 1959.
§ 7.1 Requirements.
Executive Order 9424 (3 CFR 1943-
1948 Comp.) requires the several de-
partments and other executive agencies of
the Government, including Government-
owned or Government-controlled corpo-
rations, to forward promptly to the Com-
missioner of Patents and Trademarks for
recording all licenses, assignments, or oth-
er interests of the Government in or un-
der patents or applications for patents.
§ 7.2 Assignments.
The original of an assignment or other
instrument which conveys to the Govern-
ment only the title to a patent or to an
application for patent shall be forwarded
to the Commissioner of Patents and
Trademarks. The instrument will be re-
corded, endorsed, and returned.
§ 7.3 Licenses.
A copy of any license or instrument
other than an assignment which conveys
to or gives the Government any interest
in or under a patent or an application for
patent shall be forwarded for recording.
The copy will be retained by the Patent
and Trademark Office but, when desired,
the original will be endorsed and re-
turned.
§ 7.4 Abbreviated copy.
If an instrument deals with matters in
addition to rights and interests in patents
or in applications for patents, or in inven-
tions disclosed therein, a copy of only
those portions of the instrument dealing
with such rights and interests need be
forwarded. In such case, a statement giv-
ing the general nature of the entire instru-
ment, the parties involved, the date of the
instrument, the place where it is usually
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 00 115
filed, and any docket or identifying num-
ber, must be attached to the copy.
§ 7.5 Instruments already on record.
Instruments which have been recorded
prior to the adoption of §§ 7.1 to 7.7 and
are on the general assignment records of
the Patent and Trademark Office need
not be forwarded again for recording.
§ 7.6 Access to register.
The register will not be open to public
inspection. It will be available for exami-
nation and inspection by duly authorized
representatives of the Government, sub-
ject to the provisions of § 7.7. Public ex-
amination will be restricted to those
§ 7.7 Secret register.
Any instrument to be recorded will be
placed on a secret record or register at
the request of the department or agency
submitting the same. No information will
be given concerning any instrument in
such record or register, and no examina-
tion or inspection thereof or of the index
thereto will be permitted, except on the
written authority of the head of the de-
partment or agency which submitted the
instrument and requested secrecy, and the
approval of such authority by the Com-
missioner of Patents and Trademarks. No
instrument or record other than the one
specified may be examined, and the exam-
ination must take place in the presence of
a designated official of the Patent and
Trademark Office. When the department
or agency which submitted an instrument
no longer requires secrecy with respect to
that instrument, it will be recorded or
registered anew in the appropriate part of
the register which is not secret.
1029 O.G.— 26
INDEX I— RULES RELATING TO PATENTS
A
Abandoned applications: . Section
Abandonment by failure to prosecute 1.135
Abandonment for failure to pay issue fee 1.316
Defensive publication 1.139
Destruction of 1,14
Express abandonment 1.138
Not cited 1.108
Referred to in issued patents 1.14
Revival of 1.137
When open to public 1.14
Abandonment of application. {See Abandoned applications.)
Abstract of the disclosure 1.72
Access, petition for 1.14
Action by applicant 1.111-1.138
Address of the Patent and Trademark Office 1.1
BoxPCT 1.1(b)
Box Reexam 11(c)
Administrative Procedure Act in suspension or disbarment proceedings 1.348(f)
Administrator or executor, May make application and receive patent 1.42
Proof of authority 1.44
Admission to practice. (See Attorneys and agents.)
Affidavit {see also Oath in patent application):
After appeal 1.195
Before declaration of interference 1.202, 1.204
In support of application for reissue 1.175
To overcome cited patent or publication 1.131
Traversing grounds of rejection 1.132
Agents. {See Attorneys and agents.)
Allowance and issue of patent:
Amendment after allowance 1.312
Delayed payment of issue fee 1.316, 1.317
Delivery of patent 1.315
Forfeited application 1.316
Issuance of patent 1.314
Notice of allowance 1.311, 1.313
Patent to issue upon payment of issue fee 1.311, 1.314
Patent to lapse if issue fee is not paid in full 1.317
Patent withheld for nonpayment of issue fee 1.316
Reasons for 1.109
Withdrawal from issue 1.313
Allowed claims statement of grounds for rejecting, by Board of Appeals 1.196
Amendment:
Adding or substituting claims 1.119
After appeal 1.116
After decision on appeal, based on new rejection of Board of Appeals 1.196
After final action 1.116
After notice of allowance 1.312
By patent owner 1.530
Copying claim of another application 1.203
Copying claim of issued patent 1.204-1.206
Entry and consideration of „ 1.122
Erasures and insertions 1.121
Involving a departure from original invention 1.118
Manner of making 1.121
May be required 1.117
Not covered by original oath 1.67
Numbering of claims 1.126
Of amendments 1.124
Of claims 1.119
Of disclosure 1.118
Of drawing 1.85, 1.123
Of specification 1.118
Paper and writing 1.52
1029 OG 117
1029 (X3 118 OFFICIAL GAZETTE April 19. 1983
Amendment— Continued Section
Petition from refusal to admit j 127
Proposed during interference j 212
j^'^^"^ ; .'z:zzzzz;:z:zz^^^
Requisites of. ,33^ 1 ,,1^ , ,,5_ , j,^^ , j2j^ 1 I23
Right to amend l,j,^ 1.115,1.116.1.127
signature to, when no attorney or agent 1 33
Substitute specification V ,.,c
Time for . ...
To accompany motion to amend interference 1 231
To applications in interference 1212 1 231
To correct inaccuracies of prolixity ' t',,-.
To correspond to original drawing or specification 1 jIg
To preliminary statement in interference 1 222
To reissues 1 171 1 174
To save from abandonment ' ,',35
Appeal to Board of Appeals:
Action following decision , .q.
Affidavits after appeal ,',q.
Brief ;""::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ii92
Decision by Board .' .q.
Examiner's answer /,q.
Fees
^'^^^ 1 17
Hearing of ^^^
New grounds for refusing a patent jjo^
Rehearing 'ZZZ'Z~ZZZ''Z^7. 1197
Reopening after decision ,',Qg
Reply brief —ZIZZZIIZZZIZ 1193
Requirements of .'.q.
Statement of grounds for rejecting, by Board of Appeals 1196
Appeal to Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit:
Fee provided by rules of court , 3QJ
From Board of Appeals ,\r..
From Board of Patent Interferences " ' * ' ] i^q.
Notice and reasons of appeal J3Q2
^^T^'^'f ■•"•••••"■•■■"••••••"^
Applicant for patent , J._. .^
Deceased or insane inventor 1^2 1 43
Executor or administrator ' 1 42
Informed of serial number of application I 54
Joint changed to sole ,\r.
Letters for, sent to attorney or agent i'33
May be represented by an attorney or agent 1 31
Personal attendance unnecessary ', ,
Required to conduct business with decorum and courtesy 1 3
Required to report assistance received V 33
Application for patent (see also Abandoned applications. Claims, Drawing,' Examination of applications
Reissues, Specification):
Accepted for examination only when complete 1 53
Access to ■
Acknowledgment of filing '. .',.
Alteration after execution forbidden 156
Alteration before execution " .'52
Arrangement "^^ ' _
Continuation or division, unsigned 1 60 1 62
Copies of, furnished to applicants ' " .'^q '
Cross-references of related applications " " 170
Deceased or insane inventor ."^3
Declaration .' _
Duty of disclosure .',,
Execution in blank forbidden j'56
File Wrapper Continuing application 1 62
Filed by other than inventor 1 42 1 43 147
Filing date > • > •
Foreign language oath or declaration "!!!!!"'""""!" 1 69
Formulas and tables .'50
General requisites .'5.
Identification required in letters concerning 1 5
Improper applications V j^
Incomplete papers not accepted for examination 1 53
Interlineations, etc., to be indicated 1 52
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 119
Application for patent (see also Abandoned applications, Claims, Drawing, Examination of applications,
Reissues, Specification) — Continued Section
Language, paper, writing, margins 1.52
Later filing of oath and filing fee 1.53
Must be made by actual inventor, with exceptions 1.41, 1.46
New, after abandonment, may use old drawings 1.88
Non-English language 1.52
Owned by Government 1.103
Papers of complete application not be returned 1.59
Parts filed separately 1.54
Parts of application desirably filed together 1.54
Parts of complete application 1.51
Patent open for inspection 1.11
Processing fees 1.17
Relating to atomic energy 1.14
Reservation for future application not permitted 1.79
Secrecy order 5.1-5.8
Secret while pending 1.14
Serial number and filing date 1,55
Stricken from the files for irregularities 1.56
Tables and formulas 1.58
To contain but one invention unless connected 1.141
To whom made 1.51
Two or more by same party with conflicting claims 1.78
Use of old drawing in new application 1.88
Arbitration award filing 1.335
Assignee:
Correspondence held with assignee of entire interest 1-33
If of entire interest, patent may issue to him 1.46, 1.334
If of undivided part interest, correspondence will be held with inventor 1.33
If of undivided part interest, must assent to application for reissue of patent 1.171, 1.172
If of undivided part interest, patent may issue jointly 1-46
May conduct prosecution of application 1-32
May take action in interference 1.242
Patent will issue to, if assignment is recorded before payment of issue fee 1.334
Assignments and recording:
Abstracts of title, fee for ; 1.21(h)
Conditional assignments 1-333
Date of receipt is date of record 1.332
Fees 1.21(h)
If recorded before payment of issue fee, patent will issue to assignee 1.334
Must be recorded in Patent and Trademark Office to issue patent to assignee 1334
Orders for copies of 112
Patent may issue to assignee 1.334
Receipt of, acknowledged 1.332
Recorded in regular order and returned 1.332
Recording of assignments 1-331
Records open to public inspection 112
Should identify patent or application 1 331
What will be accepted for recording 1-331
Atomic energy applications reported to Department of Energy 1 14
Attorneys and agents:
Acting in a representative capacity 1-33, 1.34
Advertising 1-345
Agents, registration of 1.341(b)
Assignment will not operate as a revocation of power 1-36
Associate 1-34
Attorneys at law, registration of 1.341(a)
Certificate of good standing 1.21(aX4)
Code of professional responsibility 1 344
Committee on Enrollment 1.341(i)
Fee on admission 1.21(aKl)
Foreign patent attorneys and agents, registration of 1.341(e)
Former examiners, registration of 1 -341(g)
General powers not recognized 1-34
Government officers and employees as 1.341(0
Limited recognition 1-342
May be refused recognition for misconduct 1-348
Oath and registration fee 1.341(h)
Offi(% cannot aid in selection of 1-31
1029 OG 120 OFFICIAL GAZETTE april 19. 1983
Attorneys and agents— Continued St
Personal interviews with examiners 1 I33
Persons not registered or recognized I.343
Power of attorney or authorization of agent I.34
Professional conduct V -^4.
Registration of attorneys and agents 1341
Removing names from registers 1 3^-7
Representing conflicting parties 1 208
Representative capacity V'VV '| ^a
Required to conduct business with decorum and courtesy 1 3
Requirements for registration j'3^1
Revocation of power !...."I!.."!!.... 1 35
Signature and certiflcate of attorney j 34^
Suspension or disbarment proceedings liAk
Who may act as 1 iai 1 ^^-j
Withdrawal of ^'"^^ZZZZZZZZZZ!!! 136
Authorization of agents. (See Attorneys and agents.)
Award in arbitration filing , ,,,
B
Basic filing fee ,' ,
Bill in equity. (See Civil action.)
Board of Appeals. (See Appeals to Board of Appeals.)
Box FWC , ,,
BoxPCT zzzzz; 'i'hS
BoxReexahi \\yl
Bnefs: : • ^■*(^>
At final hearing in interference • 254
In motions before the primary examiner 1 231
In motions heard by interference examiners .."".!!"..!!".. 1 243 1 244
In petitions to Commissioner ' /.o.
On appeal to Board of Appeals ^l...'"l"^'^^l."!I'"l."!.."."l."l.""." l 192
Business to be conducted with decorum and courtesy 1 3
Business to be transacted in writing , f
c
Certificate of correction , ,-„ , ,-,
Fees ^•^^^' VJ^
1 20
Mistakes not corrected V ^-5
Certificate of mailing ...Z..Z.Z.Z..Z 1 a
Express Mail " .'
Certificate, Reexamination V J.^
Certified copies of records, papers, etc ', .•,
Fee for certification i lorM
Chemical and mathematical formulas and tables 1 50
Citation of prior art in patent V J^,
Citation of references .'j^.
Civil action ■■■■■■■■—
Claims (5ee a/50 Examination of applications): '
Amendment of 1110
Conflicting, same applicant or owner 1 -jg
Dependent ."-^
May be in dependent form ."!!!!! 1 75
More than one permitted ,.,t
Multiple dependent .."!!„"!!! 1 75
Must conform to invention and specification j'^*
Notice of rejection of V .q.
Numbering of /.jg
Part of complete application .51
Plant patent V .'^
Rejection of .'.Qg
Required \ ^,
Twice or finally rejected before appeal !!!!!!"!!!!!!!!! 1 191
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks (See also Petition to Commissioner):
Address of . .
All communications to Patent and Trademark Office to be addressed to !!.".!!!!!.."m
Cases decided by Board of Appeals reopened only by ........Z/.........1 198
Conduct of disbarment proceedings 134S
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 CXj 121
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks — Continued Section
Initiates reexamination 1520
May disbar attorneys 1.348
Reconsideration of cases decided by former 1.184
Reissue in divisions referred to 1177
Return of papers in violation of rule 1-3
Complaints against examiners, how presented 13
Composition of matter and specimens of ingredients may be required 1.93
Computer program listings 1-96
Concurrent Office proceedings 1.565
Conduct of reexamination proceedings 1.550
Conflicting claims, same applicant or owner in two or more applications 1.78
Continuing application for invention disclosed and claimed in prior application 1.60
Copies of patents, records, etc Ml, 1.12, 1.13
Copies of records, fees 1- 19(a)
Correction, certificate of 1.322, 1.323
Correction of inventorship 1.48
Corresp>ondence:
All letters and communications to the Office to be addressed to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks ...1.1
Business with the Office to be transacted by 1.2
Discourteous communications returned 1.3
Double, with different parties in interest not allowed 1.33
Held with attorney or agent 1.33
Identification of application or patent in letter relating to 1.5
May be held exclusively with assignee of entire interest 1.32
Nature of 1.4
Patent owners in reexamination 1.33(c)
Receipt of letters and papers 1.6
Resumed with principal, if power or authorization is revoked 1.36
Rules for conducting in general 1.1-1.8
Separate letter for each subject of inquiry 1.4
When no attorney or agent 1.33
With attorney or agent after power or authorization is filed 1.33
Coupons sold by the Office 1.24
Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit, appeal to (See Appeal to Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit.)
D
Day for taking any action or paying any fee falling on Saturday, Sunday, or federal holiday 1.7
Death or insanity of inventor 1.42, 1.43
Decision by the Board of Appeals 1.196
Action following decision 1.197
Declaration. {See also Oath in patent application).
Foreign language 1-69
In lieu of oath 1.68
In patent application 1.68
Defensive publication 1.139
Definitions:
Independent inventor 1-9
National and international applications 1.9
Nonprofit organization 1.9
Small business concern 1-9
Small entity 1-9
Terms under Patent Cooperation Treaty 1-401
Delivery of patent 1-315
Deposit accounts 1-25
Fees l-21(b)
Deposit of computer program listings 1-96
Depositions (See also Testimony in interferences):
Certificate of officer to accompany 1276
Copies of 1.253
Foreign 1.284
Formalities to be observed in preparing 1.274-1.277
Officers before whom taken 1.274
Stenographically taken 1.275
To be sealed up, addressed, and forwarded to the Commissioner 1-276
When taken must be filed ., 1-278
Description of invention. (See Specification.)
Design Patents:
Arrangement of specification .* 1-154
1024 OG 122
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
Section
..1.153
Design Patents— Continued
Claim
Drawing ^ !!!"!!"!!!""!""!!! 1.152
Issue and term 1 155
oa'*' ~ZZZZZZZZZZZZu53
Rules applicable \ \5\
Title, description and claim 1 153
Determination of request for reexamination 1515
Disbarment of attorneys and agents 1 348
Disclaimer, statutory:
During interference I 253
^^^•" ; 1.2b(d)
Requirements of 1 321
Terminal {"HX
Disclosure, amendments to not permitted I Hg
Disclosure document 1 2Kc')
Discovery in interferences 1 287 1 288
Division. {See Restriction of application.)
Division of patent on reissue I ^-j-j
Document supply fees \ jo
Drawing:
Amendment of , ^. j jjg^ j J23
Arrangement of views 'l ^^■.\
Character of lines I g4(c)
Content of drawing I gj
Cost of copies of i in
Design application j J52
Extraneous matter I g4/j\
Figure for Official Gazette '!""."!".!!"". J!! 1 84(k)
Filed with application I gj
Hatching and shading 1 84(d)
If of an improvement, must show connection with old structure I.g3
Inferior or defective drawings will be rejected 1 g5
Informal drawings j g*
Location of names I 9A(\\
Must be described in and referred to specification .........1.74
Must show every feature of the invention j g3
Number of sheets 1 84(e)
Original may be used with application for reissue 1 174
Paper and ink ...ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 84(a)
Plant patent application j jgj
Printed and published by the Office when patented ...............................1.84
Reference characters j -74 j g^^v
Reissue \ ,-,a
Required by law when the nature of the case admits !..."!!!!. .1.81
^^^•f '. i.84(e)
Shading jg4^jjj
Size of sheet and margins I %^(w\
Specific rules relating to preparation of drawing will be enforced .........1.85
Standards for drawings I g^
Symbols, legends 1.84(g)
Transfer . gg
Transmission of drawings j g4(ni)
Use of old drawing in new application 1 gg
Views ZZZZZZZZZ'84(i), (j)
When necessary, part of complete application J 5I
Duty of disclosure 15^ 1.555
Election of species _ I j^g
Establishing small entity status 1 27 1.28
Evidence. (See Testimony in interferences.)
Examination of applications:
Abandoned and forfeited applications not cited in .77. 1.108
Advancement of examination 1.102
^^^o^orm ZZZZZx'm^ \.\Q5
Citation of references I \qi
Completeness of examiner's action 1.105
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 123
Examination of applications — Continued Section
Examiner's action 1.104
Intemational-type search 1.104
Nature of examination 1.104
Order of examination 1.101
Reasons for allowance 1.109
Reexamination after rejection if requested.... 1.111
Reexamination of original claims upon reissue 1.176
Reissue 1.176
Rejection of claims 1.106
Suspension of 1.103
Examination of papers by attorney or agent not permitted without authorization 1.34
Examiners:
Answers on appeal 1.193
Complaints against 1.3
Interviews with 1.133
Executors 1.42. 1.44
Exhibits. (See Models and exhibits.)
Export of technical data 5.19
Express abandonment 1.138
"Express Mail" certificate of mailing 1.10
Extension of time 1.136
Fees 1.17
F
Federal Register, publication of rules in 1.351, 1.352
Fees and payment of money:
Coupons I 24
Deposit accounts 1.25
Extension of time 1.136
Fee on appeal to the Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit provided by rules of court 1.301
Fees in case of petitions 1.17^ 1.181
Fees payable in advance 1.22
For intemational-type search report 1.21(e)
Method of payment 1 23
Money by mail at risk of sender 1.23
Money paid by mistake 1.26
Reexamination request 1.20(c)
Refunds 1 26
Relating to international applications I.445
Schedule of fees and charges 1.16-1.21
File wrapper continuing application procedure 1.62
Files and papers of abandoned applications, disposition 1.14
Files open to the public l.H
Filing date of application 1.51
Filing fee part of complete application I.57
Filing fees 1.16
Filing in Post Office 1.10
Filing of interference settlement agreements 1.268
Final rejection:
Appeal from 1.191
Response to 1.113, 1.1 16
When and how given 1.1 13
Foreign application I.55
License to file 5.11-5.17
Foreign country:
Taking oath in 1.66
Taking testimony in 1.284
Forfeited application, for nonpayment of issue fee 1.316
Not cited as reference 1.108
Formulas and tables in patent applications .^. 1.58
Fraud practiced or attempted on Office 1.56
Gazette. {See Official Gazette.)
General information and correspondence
.1.1-1.8
1029 OG 124 OFFICIAL GAZETTE April 19, 1983
Section
Government employees, as attorney or agent ...1.341(0
Government interest in patent, recording of 7.1-7.7
Guardian of insane person may apply for patent 1.43
H
Hearings:
By Board of Patent Interferences 1.256
By the Board of Appeals 1.194
Fee 1.17
In disbarment proceedings 1.348
Of motions in interferences 1.243
Holiday, time for action expiring on 1.6, 1.7
I
Identification of application, patent or registration 1.5
Independent inventor:
Deflnition .' ...1.9
Status statement 1.27
Information disclosure statement:
At time of filing application 1.51
Content of 1.9g
To comply with duty of disclosure 1.97
Upxiating prior to issuance of patent 1.99
Information, Public 1.15
Insane inventor, application by guardian of 1.43
Interferences {See also Depositions, Motions in interferences. Preliminary Statement in interferences):
Abandonment of the contest 1.262
Access to applicatons 1.226
Access to preliminary statement 1.227
Action by examiner after interference 1.266
Action if statutory bar appears 1.259
Addition of new party by examiner 1.283
Amendment during 1.212, 1.231
Appeal to the Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit 1.301, 1.302
Briefs at final hearing 1.254
Burden of proof 1.257
Civil action 1.303
Claims copied from patent 1.204-1.206, 1.228
Claims improperly copied 1.206
Claims of defeated parties stand finally disposed of 1.265
Concession of priority 1.262
Conflicting parties having same attorney 1.208
Copying claims from patent 1.204, 1.205
Declaration of interference 1.207
Definition 1.201
Discovery 1.287, 1.288
Dissolution of 1.231
Dissolution on motion of examiner 1.237
Extensions of time 1.245
Failure of junior party to take testimony 1.252
Failure to prepare for 1.203, 1.204
Final hearing 1.256
Final hearing briefs 1.254
In what cases declared 1.201
Inspection of cases of opposing parties 1.226
Interference with a patent 1.204-1.206
Junior party fails to overcome filing date of senior party 1.225
Jurisdiction of interference 1.211
Manner of service of papers 1.248
Matters considered in determining priority 1.258
Motions 1.231, 1.243
Nonpatentability argued at final hearing 1.258
Notice and access to applications of opposing parties 1.226
Notice to file civil action 1.303
Notices and stateinents 1.207
Notices to parties 1.207
Order to show cause, judgment on the record 1.223, 1.225
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 00 125
Interferences — (Continued Section
Order to show cause, summary judgment 1.228
Ownership of applications or patents involved 1.201
Preliminary inquiry of junior applicant 1.202
Preliminary statement contents 1.216, 1.217
Preparation for 1.203
Presumption as to order of invention 1.257
Prosecution by assignee 1.242
Recommendation by Board of Patent Interferences 1.259
Records of, when open to public 1.11
Reissue filed by patentee during 1.264
Requests for fmdings of fact and conclusions of law 1.255
Review of decision by civil action 1.303
Same party 1.201
Second interference between same parties ; 1.267
Service of papers 1.247, 1.248
Settlement agreement filing 1.268
Statement of, from examiner to examiner of interferences 1.207
Status of claims of defeated applicant after interference 1.265
Statutory disclaimer by patentee during 1.263
Suggestion of claims for interference 1.203
Summary judgement 1.228
Suspension of ex parte prosecution 1.212
Suspension of interference for addition of party 1.238
Suspension of interference for consideration of new references 1.237
Termination of interference 1.261
Testimony copies _ 1.253
Times for discovery and taking testimony 1.251
International application. {See Patent Cooperation Treaty.)
Interview summary 1.133
Interviews with examiner 1.133, 1.560
Inventor {see also Applicant for patent. Oath in patent application):
Death or insanity of 1.42, 1.43
Refuses to sign application 1.47
To make application 1.41
Unavailable , 1.47
Inventor's certificate mentioned in oath 1.63(c)
Inventor's certificate priority benefit 1.55
Issue fee 1.18
Issue of patent. {See Allowance and issue of patent.)
Joinder of inventions in one application y; 1.141
Joint inventors 1.45, 1.47, 1.324
Joint patent to inventor and assignee 1.46, 1.334
Jurisdiction:
After decision by Board of Appeals 1.197, 1.198
After notice of allowance 1.312
Of contested case 1.211
L
Lapsed patents „..". 1.317
Legal representative of deceased or incapacitated inventor 1.42, 1.43
Letters to the Office. {See Correspondence.)
Library service fee , 1.19(d)
License and assignment of government interest in patent 7.1-7.3
License for foreign filing 5.11-5.17
List of U.S. Patents classified in a subclass, cost of 1- 19(e)
Local delivery box rental 1-2 1(d)
M
Maintenance fees 1.20
Microfiche copy fee 1.19(a)
Microfiche deposit 1.96
1029 OG 126
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
......_. Section
Misjoinder of inventor 1 4g | 324
Mistake in patent, certificate thereof issued 1.322* 1.323
Models and exhibits:
Copies of I 55
If not claimed within reasonable time, may be disposed of by Commissioner I.94
If on examination model be found necessary request therefor will be made 1.91
In contested cases j 275
May be required ^ m
Model not generally required as part of application or patent 1.91
Not to be taken from the Office except in custody of sworn employee I.95
Return of I 54
Working model may be required 1 92
Money. {See Fees and payment of money.) i
Motions in interference: ^
Appeals in ; j 244
Before the Board of Patent Interferences ..........X.lAl
Before the primary examiner, requirements of 1 231
Determination of motions 1 231 1.243 1 244
For extensions of time ' ' | 245
Motion period 1 231
Notice of motion period 1 207
Petition to Commissioner 1 244
Rehearing "!!!!!!"""!!!"! L244
Relating to burden of proof I 231
Through reexamination 1 231
To amend interference I 231
To amend preliminary statement 1 222
To dissolve interference 1 231
To extend time for taking testimony 1 28I
To include another application 1 231
To take testimony in foreign countries 1 284
"" .. N
Name of applicant I 41
New matter inadmissible in application 1 Hg
New matter inadmissible in reexamination , 1.530(d) 1.552(b)
New matter inadmissible in reissue ' 1 173
Non-English language specification fee 1.17(h)
Nonprofit organization:
Definition 1 o
Status statement „ [ 27
Notice:
Of allowance of application 1 311
Of appeal to the Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit 1.301, 1.302
Of arbitration award ' 1 335
Of defective reexamination request l.SKYc)
Of defective statement in interference cases 1.223
Of exceptions to evidence 1.271 1.275
Of interference ' 1 207
Of oral hearings before Board of Appeals I.I94
Of papers filed in contested cases 1.247
Of rejection of an application 1.104
Of taking testimony 1 273
Of use of official records as evidence 1.282
To conflicting parties who have the same attorney or agent 1.208
To parties in interference cases 1.207
Oath in patent application:
Apostilles 1.56
Before whom taken in foreign countries 1.66
Before whom taken in the United States 1.66
By administrator or executor 1.42, 1.63
By guardian of insane person :..1.43, 1.63
Certificate of Officer administering 1.66
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 00 127
Oath in patent application — Continued Section
Continuation-in-part 1.63(d)
Foreign language 169
Inventor's Certificate 1.63
Made by inventor 1.63
New oath required if original too old 1.63
Officers authorized to administer oaths 1.66
Part of complete application 1.51
• Person making 1.64
Plant patent application 1.162
Requirements of 1.63
Ribboned to other papers 166
Sealed 1.66
Signature to 163
Supplemental oath for matter disclosed but not originally claimed 1.67
To acknowledge duty of disclosure 1.63
When taken abroad to seal all papers 166
Oath in reissue application 1.175
Oath or declaration
When international application enters national stage 1.70
Object of the invention 173
Office action time for response 1134
Office fees. (See Fees and payment of money.)
Officers and employees, Government, acting as attorneys or agents 1.341(0
Official action, based exclusively upon the written record 1.2
Official business, should be transacted in writing 1-2
Official Gazette: -.
Amendments to rules published in i ."• 1-351
One view of drawing published in 1-84
Service of notices in 1-248
Oral statements 1-2
Order of examination 1-101
Order to reexamine 1.525
Papers badly written, printing or typewriting required ^ 1.52
Patent application {See Application for patent.)
Patent attorneys and agents. (See Attorneys and agents.)
Patent Cooperation Treaty:
Amendments and corrections during international processing 1.471
Applicant for international application 1421
Changes in name and address, where filed cr\ 1.475
Definition of terms '^i,^ 1.401
Delays in meeting time limits 1.468
Designation of States 1-432
Fees:
Designation fees 1.432
Due on filing of international application 1.431(c)
Failure to pay results in withdrawal of application 1.431(c), 1.432
Filing and processing fees 1-445
Refunds - l-*46
Filing by other than inventor 1-425
International application requirements 1-431
Abstract ■ l-*38
Claims 1-436
Description - 1-^35
Drawings 1.437
Physical requirements 1-433
Request 1-434
International Bureau .- 1-415
Inventor deceased I All
Inventor insane or legally incapacitated 1-423
Inventors, joint 1.424
Oath or declaration at national stage 1-^0
Priority, claim for 1-451
Record copy to International Bureau, Transmittal procedures 1-461
Representation by attorney or agent 1-455
Time limits for processing applications 1.465, 1.468
•M'OG'28 OFFICIAL GAZETTE a™,. ,9. ,983
Patent Cooperation Treaty — Continued
United States as: ■^^'^'""'
Designated Office 1 61 1 414
International Searching Authority ' i 411
Receiving Office !..."!!..."!!! 1 412
Unity of invention:
Determination of • , ,0-
Protest to lack of ZZZZ""!ZZZ"Z 1482
Patentee notified of interference '"^^l."^^^l"!!I!!!!!!!!!!!!!I!!^!!!!!!!!l"!!!!!!! 1 201
Patents {See also Allowance and issue of Patents):
Available for license or sale, publication of notice ' 1 ^un
Certified copies of . J^
coF^ claim of ■^3zz::z:z:zz.zz::zzz:z:: 1:2^:1. 206
Correction of errors m , ,,, , ,,, , ,-.
Date, duration and form ZZ"ZIZZZZZi;ZZ"Z 1317
Dehvery of '
Disclaimer Z^"^Z"!Z!IZ"'"Z"Z 1321
Identification required in letters concerning , ^
Lapsed, for nonpayment of issue fee 1 317
Obtainable by civil action '......".. 1303
Price of copies ZZZZZZ. 1 19M
Records of, open to public
Reissuing of, when defective ............1.11
Payment of fees ZZ 1.171-1.179
Personal attendance unnecessary
Petition for reissue ^'^
Petition to Commissioner: '•^^^' '-^^^
Fees
For delayed payment of issue fee !I!!!!!"""I!!!! V V^
For the revival of an abandoned application '.}!
From formal objections or requirements 1 iiV 1 iai
From requirement for restriction ' °^
General requirements ' ^ ^
In interferences ^-'^^
In reexamination 1.244
On refusal of examiner to admit amendment ^^l^nl
Questions not specifically provided for j" ^^
Reconsideration of cases decided by former Commissioners 1"""!!! ' K
Suspension of rules ''"^
To exercise supervisory authority
To make special '-'^^
To strike applications *'®^
Upon objection that appeal is informal :\l^
Plant patents: '•'"
Applicant
Claim "^^^^III^^"""I""II!!!""II ^''^^
Declaration lAM
Description " " '-^^2
Drawings 1.162
Examination '-'^^
Fee for copies ''^^^
Filing fee ^•'^(a)
Issue fee l-16(g)
Oath ZZZZZZ ^•'^^'^^
Rules applicable "^'^^^^^^'Z'ZZZZZZZ. *'^^
Specification '-^^^
Specimens ' 1.163
Post issuance fees ^'^^
Post Office receipt as filing date l...".l.I"l...."!!""!......."l ^'^^
Postal emergency or interruption 1 L'^^
Power of attorney. {See Attorneys and agents.) ^^^^
Preliminary statement in interferences:
Access to
Contents of ""!""!'^''!". ''^^^
Contents of, invention made abroad \'^\^
Correction of statement on motion , ,„
Effect of statement \tZZ
Failure to file """"^ '-^^
How prepared, contents ZZZZZZZZZZZZ 1215 l m
In case of motion to amend interference 1 211
April 19. 1983 U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE 1029 OG 129
Preliminary statement in interferences— Continued Section
May be amended if defective 1.222
Not evidence 1.223
Reliance on prior application 1.224
Requirement for 1.215
Sealed before filing 1.219
Service on opposing parties 1.215
Subsequent testimony alleging prior dates excluded 1.223
Time for filing 1.218
When opened to inspection 1.227
Printing testimony 1.253, 1.279
Prior art citation in patent 1.501
Prior art may be made of record in patented file 1.291
Prior art statement:
Content of 1.98
In reexamination 1.555
To comply with duty of disclosure 1.97
Updating prior to issuance of patent 1.99
Priority of invention. {See Interferences.)
Priority, right of, under treaty or law 1.55
Protests to grant of patent 1.291
Public information 1.15
Public use proceedings 1.292
Fee 1.17(j)
Publication:
Defensive 1.139
Of patent based on international application 1.318
Of reexamination certificate 1.570(0
R
Reasons for allowance ,.1.109
Reconsideration of cases decided by a former Commissioner 1.184
Reconsideration of Office action 1.112
Recording of assignments. (See Assignments and recording.)
Records of the Patent and Trademark Office 1.11-1.15
Records used as evidence in interference 1.282
Reexamination:
Amendments, manner of making 1.121(0
Announced in O.G 11 1(c)
Appeal to Board of Appeals 1.191
Appeal to C.A.F.C 1.301
Certificate 1.570
Civil action 1.303
Concurrent office proceedings 1.565
Conduct of proceedings 1.550
Correspondence address 1.33(c)
Decision of request 1515
Duty of disclosure 1555
Examiner's action 1.104
Fee 1.20(c)
Feerefiind 1.26(c)
Identification in letter 1 5(d)
Initiated by Commissioner 1.520
Interference 1.231, 1.565
Interviews 1.560
Open to public 1.11(c)
Order 1.525
Reconsideration 1.112
Refiindof fee 1.26(c)
Reply by requester 1.535
Reply to action .^.... 1.111
Request Z 1.510
Response consideration 1 540
Scope 1 552
Service 1-248
Statement of patent owner 1.530
Reference characters in drawings 1.74, 1.84(0
References cited on examination 1.104, 1.106, 1.107
Refundment of money paid by mistake 1 26
Register of Government interest in patents 7. 1-7.7
'029 OG 130 OFFICIAL GAZETTE April 19. 1983
Rehearing:
Of decision on priority \jtl
Of motions in interference '!"!!!!!"!!!!! ]7/u
On appeal to Board of Appeals 1 jl!
Petition for, when time for appeal stayed Ji^Z
Reissues: " ^'^"^
Applicants, assignees .
Application for reissue "'"!'"""!!".......... i 171
Application made and sworn to by inventor, if living ,',7,
Declaration J|'^
Drawings ^^^
Examination of reissue " ' \ Jit
Filed during interference "".""!"!»!H!."!I!!I!!1""!"I! \7M
Filed during reexamination '^^
Filing fee 1ZZZ""Z
Filing of announced in Official Gazette !^!!!!"'".Z!!!!! Ill
Grounds for and requirements ri'4'r"i Vin
Issue fee Z!!"".ZZ" 1.171-1.179
Loss of original patent Z^ZZZ..... 1 1 7R
Notice of reissue application ,1,1
Oath "'ZZZ"Z
Open to public Z..!1Z1."1Z!Z.Z...Z... ^"/n
Original claims subject to reexamination V ,1!
Original patent surrendered ...".Z.......ZZ. 1 17a
Reissue in divisions !!!!Z!!!"!!" 1177
Speciflcation ]Zl
Take precedence in order of examination , tLi
To contain no new matter "^'" \ yn
What must accompany application VV-i\'W-,i
When in interference ^•'^'' It!}
Rejection: '•2"'
After two rejections appeal may be taken from examiner to Board of Appeals 1 191
Applicant will be notified of rejection with reasons and references i"lfU
Based on fraud or violation of duty of disclosure ', *7
ExMiiner may rely on admissions by applicant or patent owner, or facts withinexaminer's^k^^^
Formal objections ■"Z!!'ZZZZZ"Z!ZZZ!ZZ"Z 1 104 1 105
On account of invention shown by others but not claimed, how overcome I'm
References will be cited "l infi
Requisites of notice of !ZZZ^" I'iru' TV;^' 1 nS
Reply brief """ " " '•'°*' *'°^' ^-'^^
Reply by applicant or patent owner J!, ,
Reply by requester " "^ *'''
Representative capacity ZZZ... \\a/\
Request for reconsideration ZZZZZZ 1 in
Request for reexamination Z"."!!!Z"!''"""!!1""!^ i Jin
Reservation clauses not permitted !!"...." ,70
Response time to Office action ^^"Z"Z1Z"..Z!"! in?
Restriction of application ZZZZZZ... 1 Ul 1 iIa
Claims to nonelected invention withdrawn 1 ilo
Constructive election
Petition from requirements for .ll......".................Z lllf
Provisional election !
Reconsideration of requirement "!"..^!"..!!!!! \ ua
Requirement for
Subsequent presentation of claims for different invention "..!!^Z.""""""I'"".."! 'lUS
Return of papers of application "" 159
Revival of abandoned application .!"...!!!!^'""!.".'! 1 117
Unavoidable abandonment fee .Z.Z.......ZZ..Z..Z.Z.Z..Z............ i 17(1)
Unintentional abandonment fee ."............... 1 1 7c )
Revocation of power of attorney or authorization of agent l Ti
Rules of practice:
Amendments to rules will be published , 3*.
Publication of notice of proposed amendments j"352
s
Saturday, when last day falls on , -
Scope of reexamination proceedings V"«-
Secrecy order .!!!!!'"! < 1 < 0
3. 1~J.o
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG 131
Section
Serial number of application 1.53
Service of notices:
For taking testimony 1.273
In interference cases 1.207
Of appeal to the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit , 1.303
Service of papers:
Contested cases 1.247, 1.248
Protests and public use proceedings 1.291, 1.292
Reexamination 1.248
Shortened period for response 1.136
Signature:
Of attorney or agent 1.346
To amendments, etc., when no attorney 1.33
To concession of priority 1.262
To disclaimer in interference 1.262
To express abandonment 1.138
To oath 1.57, 1.63
To reissue oath or declaration 1.172
Small business concern:
Deflnition .' 1.9
Status statement 1.27
Small entity:
Defmition „ 1.9
Statement 1.27
Status establishment 1.27, 1.28
Status update 1.28
Species of invention claimed 1.141, 1.146
Specification (see also Application for patent. Claims):
Abstract 1.72
Amendments to 1.117, 1.118, 1.125
Arrangement of 1.77
Best mode 1.71
Claim 1.75
Contents of 1.71-1.75
Cross-references to other applications ^ 1.78
Description of the invention 1.71
Erasures and insertions must not be made by applicant 1.121
If defective, reissue to correct 1.171-1.179
Must conclude with specific and distinct claim 1.75
Must point out new improvements specifically 1.71
Must refer by figures to drawings 1.74
Must set forth the precise invention 1.71
Not returned after completion 1.59
Object of the invention 1.73
Order of arrangement in framing 1.77
Paper, writing, margins 1.52
Part of complete application 1.51
Reference to drawings 1.74
Requirements of 1.71-1.75
Reservation clauses not permitted 1.79
Substitute 1.125
Summary of the invention 1.73
Title of the invention 1.72
To be rewritten, if necessary 1.125
Specimens. (See Models and exhibits.)
Specimens of composition of matter to be furnished when required 1.93
Specimens of plants 1.166
Statement of status as small entity 1.27
Statutory disclaimer fee 1.20(d)
Subscription services fee 1.19(c)
Suit in equity. (See Civil action.)
Summary of invention 1.73
Sunday, when last day falls on 1.7
Supervisory authority, i)etition to Commissioner to exercise 1.181
Supplemental oath for amendment presenting claims for matter disclosed but not originally claimed 1-67
Surcharge for oath or basic filing fee filed after filing date 1.16(e), 1.53
Suspension of action 1.103
Suspension of ex parte prosecution during interference 1-212
Symbols for drawings 1.84(g)
1029 OG 132
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
T
April 19, 1983
Section
Tables in patent applications 1 5g
Term of design patent 1.155
Terminal disclaimer 1 32i
Testimony in interferences:
Additional time for taking 1 281
Assignment of times for taking 1 251
Certification and filing by officer 1.276
Copies of Z'ZZ'""Za253
Copies of testimony to be filed 1.253
Depositions must be filed 1.278
Discovery 1.287
Effect of errors and irregularities in deposition 1.285
Evidence must comply with rules 1.271
Examination of witnesses 1.275
Failure to take 1 252
Form of deposition 1.277
Formal objections to 1 235
Formalities in preparing depositions 1.274-1.277
In foreign countries 1 234
Inspection of testimony 1 279
Manner of taking testimony of witnesses 1.272
Motion to extend time for taking 1 281
Not considered if not taken and filed in compliance with rules 1.271
Notice of examination of witnesses 1 273
Notice of intent to use records 1 282
Notice of times for taking 1 251
Objections noted in depositions 1 275
Objections to admissibility 1 286
Objections to formal matters 1 283 1.285
Official records and printed publications 1.282
Officer's certificate 1 276
Persons before whom depositions may be taken 1 274
Printing of '.ZZZZ~l25l l.m
Rules of evidence applied 1.286
Service of notice 1.273
Stipulations or agreements concerning 1.272
Taken by depositions 1.272
Testimony taken in another interference or action, use of 1.283
Time for taking 1 251
To be inspected by parties to the case only 1.279
Time expiring on Saturday, Sunday, or federal holiday I.7
Time for payment of issue fee 1 3II
Time for response by applicant 1 I35 1 135
Time for response by patent owner 1.530
Time for response by requester 1.535
Time for response to Office action 1 I34
Time, periods of 17
Timely filing of correspondence 1 g
Title of invention 1 72
Title reports, fee for 1.19(b)
u
Unintentional abandonment 1.137
United States as:
Designated Office ...1.61, 1.414
International Searching Authority 1.413
Receiving Office 1.412
Unsigned continuation or divisional application 1.60
Use of file of parent application 1.62
Verified statement of small entity status 1.27
April 19. 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 00 133
w
Waiver of patent rights j j^^
Withdrawal from issue 1313
Withdrawal of attorney or agent j 35
REISSUES
APRIL 19, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ J appears in the original patent but fomis no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in italics
indicates additions made by reissue.
Re. 31,209
AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENT WITH FOLDABLE
TOOL SUPPORTING FRAME
Charles W. Anderson, 327 E. Prospect St., Kewanee, III. 61443
Original No. 4,023,623, dated May 17, 1977, Ser. No. 652,490,
Jan. 26, 1976. Application for reissue May 14, 1979, Ser. No.
38 508
Int. a.5 AOIB 7i/00
U.S. a. 172—311 1 Qaim
21. An agricultural implement comprising a tool supporting
mainframe and at least one tool supporting wing frame, a hinge
link rigidly connected to the wing frame and hingedly connected to
the main frame to swing on a hinge axis, an operating link pivot-
ally connected to the hinge link, a piston cylinder disposed over the
main frame and containing an extendible and retractable piston,
one of said piston and cylinder being pivotally connected to the
main frame inboard of said hinge axis and the other pivotally
connected to the operating link, the wing frame being swingable on
said hinge axis between a storage position over the mainframe and
generally horizontal working position to one side of the mainframe
in response to force exerted on the operating link by retraction and
extension of the piston within the cylinder, one of said links having
an abutment positioned to be engaged by the other link when force
is exerted on the operating link by the piston to swing the wing
frame between near vertical and its generally horizontal working
position, said abutment being out of engagement with the other
link when the piston is in its fully extended position so that the
wing frame is free to swing through a limited angle about the hinge
axis when in its working position in order to follow field contour
and slope, and guide means on the main frame which receive and
confine the pivotal connection of the operating link to said other of
the piston and cylinder so as to resist raising of said pivotal connec-
tion off said guide means when the wing frame is swung through
substantially its full range of movement between said near vertical
and storage position, wherein the operating link is pivotally con-
nected to the hinge link intermediate the letter's rigicl and hinged
connections to the wing frame and main frame respectively, and
wherein the abutment is fixed to the hinge link with the hinged
connection of the hinge link to the main frame disposed between
the abutment and the fixed connection of the hinge link to the
wing frame.
processing machine for aligning web portions in tandem
relationship for splicing:
(b) turn bar means for changing the direction of web travel from
a path determined by splicing to successive paths toward and
within said intake recess of said processing machine and
thereafter in a path through said intake aperture: and
(c) driving and tension control means for controllably driving
said web from said alignment and splicing means to a position
adjacent said intake aperture, which driving and tension
control means, in turn, comprises
(/■) a driven roll for contacting said web. said driven roll
having a surface capable of engaging said web with suffi-
cient force to substantially assist in pulling said web from
said alignment and splicing means to a position adjacent
said intake aperture with the remainder of the force re-
quired for web movement being supplied by an internal web
moving means located within said processing machine: and
(it) drive means for driving said driven roll.
Re. 31,211
MAGNETICALLY CODED IDENTIHCATION CARD
Edwin N. Whitehead, 6208 TaUy Ho La., Alexandria, Va. 22307
Original No. 4,253,017, dated Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 911,588,
May 31, 1978. Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 601,778, Aug.
4, 1975, and Ser. No. 487,757, Jul. 11, 1974, which is a con-
tinuation-in-part of Ser. No. 431,803, Jan. 8, 1974, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 223,649, Feb. 4,
1972, abandoned. Application for reissue Feb. 17, 1982, Ser.
No. 349 444
Int. a.3 G06K 7/08: GllB 5/S8: B42D 15/00
U.S. a. 235—449 12 Qainu
Re. 31,210
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FEEDING AND
COLLECTING CONTINUOUS WEB MATERIAL
James F. Lapp, Richmond, Va., and Thomas F. McGrath, Tinley
Park, III., assignors to Acme Visible Records, Inc., Crozet,
Va.
Original No. 4,256,248, dated Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 90,585,
Nov. 2, 1979. Application for reissue Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No.
329 944
Int. a.3 B65H 19/42. 23/32. 19/18
VS. a. 226—119 12 Claims
7. An apparatus for continuously feeding a series of web portions
to a high speed web processing machine having a web intake
aperture located in a recessed area of said processing machine,
comprising
(a) web portion alignment and splicing means exterior of said
7. Apparatus for reading an identification card having a core
capable of being permanently magnetized to provide multiplicity of
bits of information, said bits being arranged in at least one row.
which core has a spot for each bit of information with each spot
being magnetized along its length to provide spaced opposing
magnetic poles comprising:
533
534
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
reading means for reading said bits of information simulta-
neously,
said reading means having for a plurality of the bits to be read:
(a) magnetic means having first and second ends adjacent
said opposing poles respectively so that magnetic flux passes
through said magnetic means.
(b) flux responsive means, cooperating with said magnetic
means, responsive to the direction that magnetic flux is
passing through said magnetic means, and
(c) means for selectively applying magnetic flux to said mag-
netic means to effect predetermined magnetization of the
portion of the core on which the bit of information is re-
corded.
Re. 31,212
VEHICLE SUSPENSION DEVICE
Charles J. Smith, Fairview, Mich., assignor to Monroe Auto
Equipment Company, Monroe, Mich.
Original No. 3,346,272, dated Oct. 10, 1967, Ser. No. 496,045,
Oct. 14, 1965. Continuation of Ser. No. 735,809, Oct. 26,
1976, abandoned. Application for reissue Sep. 21, 1978, Ser
No. 944,544
Int. C\? B60G 11/14
U.S. a. 280-668 38 Qaims
1. In an independent wheel suspension device for an automo-
tive vehicle, said suspension device comprising a hydraulic
tubular shock absorber having a pair of relatively movable
telescopic parts, detachable means on one of said telescopic
parts connectable to a body portion of said vehicle, a tube
removably supporting the other of said telescopic parts, said .
tube being connectable to a wheel spindle and having a remov-
able end portion whereby said shock absorber is removable
and replaceable through the end of said tube having said re-
movable end portion upon detaching said detachable means.
Re. 31,213
POLYOLEnN COMPOSITION HAVING HIGH IMPACT
RESISTANCE AND HIGH TEMPERATURE FLOW
RESISTANCE
Annand E. Brachman, Emmaus, Pa., assignor to Bethlehem
Steel Corporation, Bethlehem, Pa.
Origmal No. 4,229,504, dated Oct. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 929,611,
Jul. 31, 1978. Application for reissue Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No.
229,050
Int. CV B32B 15/08
MS. a. 428—462 14 claims
14. A metal-plastic laminate containing a core material [of
the composition of matter of claim 1] sandwiched between two
metal sheets, the core material being characterized by a high level
of impact resistance and high temperature flow resistance and
being a resin blend of a polyoleftn and an elastomer to which a
filler is added consisting essentially of:
(a) about 30 to 90 weight percent of a resin containing
(i) greater than 50 to less than 75 weight percent of at least
one polyolefin selected from the group consisting ofisotac-
tic crystalline polypropylene, high density crystalline poly-
ethylene, low density polyethylene and propylene-ethylene
copolymer in which propylene is present in 85-95% by
weight and which has a tensile yield elongation greater
than 20%, and
(if) greater than 25 to less than 50 weight percent of elastomer
and
(b) about 10 to 70 weight percent of an inorganic filler.
Re. 31,214
COLLOIDAL SOL ANTIMONY PENTAOXIDE
FLAMEPROOHNG COMPOSITIONS
Henry G. Petrow, 32 Garfield St., Watertown, Mass. 02172, and
Robert J. Allen, 130 Adams Ave., Saugus, Mass. 01906
Original No. 3,960,989, dated Jun. 1, 1976, Ser. No. 526,058,
Nov. 21, 1974. Division of Ser. No. 212,375, Dec. 27, 1971,
Pat. No. 3,860,523. Application for reissue Feb. 23, 1981, Ser
No. 236,748
Int. aj C08K 3/22; C09K 3/28
U.S. a. 524-411 6aaims
1. A flame retardant comprising [a] an aqueous colloidal
sol of Sb205 having colloidal particle size ranging from sub-
stantially 20 Angstroms to 1/10 micron and in which an effec-
tive amount of a halogen is added.
Re. 31,215
SMOKELESS GAS FLARE WITH SPEOnC GRAVITY
GAS ANALYZER FOR REDUCTION OF NOISE
John J. Stranahan, Peru, Ind., and John C. L. Hoilier, Neder-
land, Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Original No. 3,771,940, dated Nov. 13, 1973, Ser. No. 266,794,
Jun. 27, 1972. Application for reissue Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No.
239,293
Int. a.3 F23D 13/20
U.S. a. 431-4 11 Qaims
1. A method for smokelessly burning gas with less noise in a
steam aspirating flare having means for controlling the amount
of steam to the flare for controlling the amount of air drawn in
for mixing with the gas for burning, comprising the steps of,
a. determining the speciflc gravity of the gas being burned
with a torque type specific gravity analyzer, and
b. varying the amount of steam to the flare relative to the
specific gravity of the gas to be burned by means including
a ratio station means receiving a signal from said torque type
specific gravity analyzer for providing a conditioned smoke-
less air-to-gas burning mixture in the flare with less steam
usage and reduced noise.
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
535
Re. 31,216
CONTROLLER FOR DC ARC WELDING GENERATORS
Nelson Hairgrove, Sr., Houston, Tex., assignor to Central Weld-
ing Supply Co., Inc., Houston, Tex.
Original No. 4,093,845, dated Jun. 6, 1978, Ser. No. 761,580,
Jan. 24, 1977. Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 588,200, Jun.
19, 1975, abandoned. Application for reissue Dec. 20, 1979,
Ser. No. 105,570
Int. aj B23K 9/W
U.S. a. 219—132 17 Qaims
11. In an arc welding system including a DC generator for
providing welding current to a welding rod, and an internal com-
bustion engine for powering the DC generator, the engine having a
starter and an ignition, the improvement comprising apparatus for
controlling the starting and stopping of the engine, which control
apparatus comprises:
{a) circuitry for: (0 automatically energizing the ignition and
starter of the internal combustion engine, responsive to
contact between the welding rod and the material to be
welded; (ii) automatically de-energizing the starter responsive
to the operation of the engine; and (Hi) providing welding
current to the welding rod from the DC generator; and
(b) a timer which operates to automatically de-energize the
ignition of said engine, when welding has been interrupted for
a predetermined period of time, said ignition remaining
de-energized until the welding rod again contacts material to
be welded.
Will
Pi
U.S.
1.
clas!
ized
upri]
lighl
Oifl
O
U.S.
1.
here
nov<
(a
(b
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED APRIL 19, 1983
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,040
ROSE PLANT 74-1489-2
William A. Warriner, Tustin, Calif., assignor to Jackson A
Perkins Company, Medford, Oreg.
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,969
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 11 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of rose plant of the hybrid tea
class, substantially as herein shown and described, character-
ized particularly as to novelty by the unique combination of its
upright plant habit, glossy foliage, red tipped yellow buds, and
lighter yellow open flowers.
5,041
JUNIPER PLANT - CORCORCOR VARIETY
Oifford D. Corliss, Ipswich, Mass., assignor to The Conard-Pyle
Company, West Grove, Pa.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,063
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/12
U.S. CI. Ph.— 50 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of Juniperus, substantially as
herein shown and described, characterized particularly as to
novelty by the unique combination of:
(a) an upright evergreen conifer which assumes a columnar
configuration which is more dense than the Juniperus
virginiana parent and substantially similar to that of
Juniperus virginiana Hiliii,
(b) an extremely hardy, vigorous and disease resistant shrub
which can be readily sheared within predetermined limits,
and which is substantially more vigorous than both
Juniperus virginiana and Juniperus virginiana Hiliii and is
usually larger than Juniperus virginiana and is larger than
Juniperus virginiana Hiliii,
(c) a plant which from a distance is similar in color and shape
to the Juniperus virginiana parent, but which is much
quicker growing and which retains its older foliage for a
longer period, giving the new variety a substantially
denser appearance,
(d) a facility for propagation which represents a marked
improvement over the Juniperus virginiana parent, thus
making the new variety of particular interest to commer-
cial nurserymen,
(e) mature (e.g., two year old) foliage which is considerably
darker in coloration and slightly glossier than that of the
Juniperus virginiana parent and when compared to Junipe-
rus virginiana Hiliii is more emerald green rather than the
glaucous green coloration of Juniperus virginiana Hiliii,
(0 young foliage which is a truer and deeper emerald green
than Juniperus virginiana Hiliii and than the slightly
grayed-green foliage commonly exhibited by the Junipe-
rus virginiana parent,
(g) a much more free-branching character than the Juniperus
virginiana parent with at least twice the number of shoots
on side branches arising from a lateral branch on a main
limb than the parent giving the new variety a much denser
aspect, and
(h) main, lateral and side branches which are perceptively
thicker and more robust than those of the Juniperus virgini-
ana parent.
537
PATENTS
GRANTED APR. 19, 1983
ERRATA
For See
CLASS PATENT NO.
604-180 : 4.380.234
604-251 4.380,235
604-1 5 1 4.380.236
604-028 4.380.239
384-123 4.380.355
384-133 : 4.380.356
604-386 4.380.450
419-011 4.380.47 1
419-009 4.380.472
419-041 4.380.473
525-370 4.380.599
382-068 4.380.755
PATENTS
GRANTED APRIL 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4,380,090
HIP PROSTHESIS
Pedro A. Ramos, 1960 SW. 27th Ave., Miami, Fla.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 286,532, Jul. 24, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 177,791,
Aug. 13, 1980, abandoned. This application Mar. 10, 1982, Ser.
No. 356,881
Int. a.3 A61F 1/24. 1/00
U.S. a. 3—1.912 6 Claims
1. An artificial hip joint comprising an artificial hip socket
having a first cavity and an opening in a surface of the socket
communicating with the first cavity, an annular groove formed
in the first cavity adjacent said opening, a sectionalized bearing
insert registerably positioned in the first cavity inwardly of said
groove, said bearing insert having a second cavity of spherical
configuration greater in scope than hemispherical, a femoral
component having a ball extending from a neck of reduced
diameter, said neck extending through said socket opening
positioning said ball in operative, retained engagement in said
second cavity, said bearing insert having inner and outer sec-
tions, each section being formed with a complementary com-
ponent of said second cavity, the cavity component of said
inner section being approximately hemispherical, said outer
section being annular in shape and having an outer surface
portion opposite the cavity component thereof adapted to
align with said annular groove when said outer section is in
operative position in said first cavity, and an open annular
spring locking ring having opposite ends formed with tool
engaging openings, said locking ring being removably engaged
in said annular groove in abutment with said outer surface
portion of the bearing insert outer section, said locking ring,
when in said groove engagement, being visibly exposed and
removably retaining said annular outer section in said first
cavity in operative engagement with the inner section whereby
said ball is retained in said second cavity, said annular outer
section being formed to expand over said ball when the latter
is removed from said first cavity.
4,380,091
CONTROL CTRCUITRY FOR WATER LEVEL CONTROL
OF POOLS
OUn A. Uvely, 11821 Welch Rd., DaUas, Tex. 75234
Continuation of Ser. No. 960,585, Nov. 13, 1978, abandoned.
This application Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,322
Int. a.3 E04H 3/16. 3/18
JJ JS. a. 4—508 22 Claims
1. A system for controlling the level of water in a swimming
pool, said system being adapted to control a fill valve to add
water to the pool as required, and comprising, in combination:
first water level sensing means positioned in said pool for
producing a first output signal indicative of the presence
or absence of water at a predetermined latch level within
the pool;
second water level sensing means positioned in said pool for
producing a second output signal indicative of the pres-
ence or absence of water at a predetermined normal level
within the pool above said latch level;
19 10
control circuit means for opening said fill valve in response
to said output signal from said first water level sensing
means indicating said water level falling below said latch
level, and for closing said fill valve in response to said
output signal from said second water level sensing means
indicating said water level rising to said normal level; and
monitor circuit means responsive to said first and second
output signals for disabling operation of said fill valve
upon the occurrence of sensing water at said normal level
without also sensing water at said latch level.
4,380,092
ACCESSORY FOR USING STEEL WOOL OR OTHER
ABRADING MATERIALS
Woodrow W. Brothers, 220 N. Elmhurtt Ave., Mt. Prospect, III.
60056
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,223
Int. a.^ A47L 13/34
U.S. a. 15—209 C 5 Qaims
1. For use with a power sander having a platen that can be
oscillated under power, an improved accessory comprising the
combination of a sheet of flexible material adapted to extend
the entire length of the accessory and moreover be removably
secured to the platen, said sheet of flexible material being sized
larger than the exposed face of the platen so as to provide an
intermediate section that can overlie the platen face and end
sections that can be wrapped around the platen ends and be
539
540
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
gripped thereat op)erable to secure the sheet of flexible material 4,380,094
relative to the platen, and a mat area sized approximately the CRAB PROCESSING MACHINE
same as the platen face and secured flush against the sheet of Calvert B. ToUey, and Andrew T. ToUey, both of Wingate, Md.,
flexible material at the intermediate section thereof, the mat assignors to Sea Savory Inc., Cambridge, Md.
area bemg in the form of the hook portion only of a Velcro- ™«' ^^' ^^^^;^%^,^\^^^'^^
type hook and loop fastener, whereby when the flexible sheet "*• ^- ^^^ ^^^^^
U.S. a. 17—71
1 aaim
0 ^^,- c
.<vjl!>
t}
TTX
C^
>
is secured to the platen said mat area is virtually coextensive of
and entirely backed by the platen and is rigidly held relative to
the platen and the hooks of the Velcro-type hook fastener are
exposed and projected away from the platen, whereby an
abrading element such as a pad of steel wool can be pressed
against and adhered to the mat area operable thereby to allow
use of the power sander for powered steel wooling.
4;380,093
BICYCLE HANDLEBAR GRIP
Oyde R. Morgan, Box 302, Coeur d'Alene, Id. 83814
Filed Not. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,297
Int. a.3 B62K 21/26
U.S. a. 16—110 R 8 Qaims
^s .'' 40
1. A machine for processing whole, cooked, hard crabs,
comprising an elongated supporting frame, a plurality of work
stations spaced along the length of the machine, an endless belt
supported on vertical rotating support and driving wheels at
the loading and delivery ends of the frame and having elon-
gated section thereof extending adjacent the work stations, a
plurality of crab holders mounted on said belt and spaced along
the length thereof, means at each work station for performing
an operation on the crab carried by each holder, each of said
crab holders comprising two parts the configurations of which
are such that they cooperate to snugly support and hold a crab,
the parts being separately connected to the belt and spaced
apart in the direction of movement of the belt whereby the
parts separate to discharge the crab body therefrom as the
holder passes about the belt support and driving wheel at the
discharge end of the machine, the means at the First work
station reached by each crab holder comprising means for
holding the crab body in position on its holder and sawing
through the carapace and the ends of the crab body longitudi-
nally of the crab body and then cleaning the visceral cavity,
the means at the second work station reached by each crab
holder comprising means for holding the crab body in position
on its holder and cleaning and water spraying the crab body
including the visceral cavity, said holding means comprising
an elongated rod having an elongated opening therethrough
through which water spray passes to the visceral cavity.
1. A handlebar grip for the crossover and tum-of-bar portion
of a racing bicycle handlebar in which such portion is substan-
tially tubular about a central axis and includes (1) a substan-
tially straight section extending laterally outward from a cen-
tral portion of the handlebar, and (2) tum-of-bar section ex-
tending from the straight section forward terminating at a drop
portion having a brake lower attachment location, comprising:
a flexible "L" shaped body mountable on the crossover and
tum-of-bar poriion with a complementary annular bore
extending from one end to an opposite end to receive the
crossover and tum-of-bar portion therein;
said "L" shaped body having (1) a crossover segment ex-
tending from the one end along the substantially straight
section and (2) a tum-of-bar segment extending from the
crossover segment forward to the drop portion terminat-
ing at the brake lever attachment location;
said tum-of-bar segment having an elbow projection formed
integrally therewith that projects outward from the cen-
tral axis to enlarge the tum-of-bar segment and provide
support for the heel portion of the biker's hand indepen-
dently of whether the biker grips the crossover segment in
an overhand grip or grips the tum-of-bar section in a side
underhand grip.
4,380,095
AUTOMATIC FIBER BLENDER
Jesse P. Walker, and William H. Robertson, both of Union, S.C.,
assignors to Milliken Research Corporation, Spartanburg,
S.C.
FUed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,471
Int. Q\? DOIG 7/06
U.S. a. 19—80 R 7 Claims
X I, '1°. -
Oi
■s<
1. Apparatus to automatically pluck fibers from a plurality of
bales comprising: a conveyor system including a plurality of
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
541
conveyors, means to drive adjacent conveyors in directions
opposite to one another, a first means holding a weighted
member above said conveyor system in an inoperative position
and a second means operably associated with the last convey-
ors of said conveyor system to sense the height of a bale of
fibers in said conveyor, said first means including a means to
automatically lower said weighted member from its inopera-
tive position onto the top of a bale on said conveyor when said
second means detects that the height of the bale is below a
predetermined minimum.
4,380,097
PRODUCT MONITORING DEVICE
Terry A. Keifer, Pottstown, Pa., assignor to Check Mate Sys-
tems, Inc., King of Prussia, Pa.
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,277
Int. a.' G08B 13/14
U.S. a. 24—160 8 Claims
4,380,096
HOSE CLAMP
Haruki Nishida, Ishibashi, and Nobuya Shinozaki, Mooka, both
of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Kato Hat-
sigo Kaisha., Ltd., botli of Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,067
Int. a.3 B65D 63/02: F16L 33/02
U.S. CI. 24—20 R 1 Qaim
1. In a cylindrical hose clamp having: a central annular
clamping portion formed by bending a resilient flat plate mate-
rial;
with a first gripping end portion and a pair of flat parallel
second gripping end portions, said second end portions
defining a travel track therebetween, said first end portion
having a tongue so designed as to engage and travel along
said track so as to expand the diameter of said hose clamp;
the improvement therein wherein said clamping portion is
formed in an expanded shape such that the width of the
clamping portion where the maximum stress is applied is
at a maximum so that the forces causing stress are at
predetermined locations of said clamping portion, said
width B of said clamping portion being obtained accord-
ing to the following mathematical formula:
B
a-'\rt \ »f Ir ^ t J
+
N
<r'\i
or
B =
M
tr'irt
i^' ic Ir-t)^ (r'2t
1. A releasable locking device adapted to be secured to a
product, comprising:
a pair of relatively moveable members;
a locking element movable between a locking position in
which said members are locked together and a release
position in which said members are unlocked from each
other to permit relative motion thereof;
means for operatively controlling actuation of said locking
element to control the locking and unlocking of said mem-
bers;
said members including a pair of arms, one of said arms
mounting at its terminal end at least one pin member
engagable in at least one socket in the terminal end of the
other arm;
said terminal ends being adapted for movement to mating
contacted positions as said members are moved to the
locked positions thereof;
one of said ends having a groove therein;
the other of said ends having a projection thereon;
said projection being operatively engaged within said
groove as said members are moved to the said locked
position thereof and when so engaged constituting means
opposing relative twisting of one moveable member with
respect to the other and deterring disengagement of said
ends by a relative twisting movement therebetween.
4,380,098
SLIDE FASTENER STRINGER
Takeo Fukuroi, Uozu, Japan, assignor to Yoshida Kogyo K. K.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 215,059
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1979, 54-
185262[U]
Int. a.5 A44B 19/04
U.S. a. 24—205.16 R 2 Qaims
where d\' and 62' represent reference stresses like allowable
stresses and
M: bending moment acting on the calculated clamp cross
section
N: axial force acting on the calculated clamp cross section
r: radius of curvature of the neutral axis of a bending beam
under the condition that said hose clamp is regarded as a
bending beam
t: thickness of said clamping portion
k: constant.
1. A slide fastener stringer comprising:
(a) a tape made essentially of thermoplastic fibers having a
longitudinal edge portion including a bead extending
longitudinally therodong, there being a series of openings
formed in and along said longitudinal edge portion, each
542
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
of said openings being located closely adjacent to said
bead and each opening being defined by a rigid marginal
edge constituted by fused tape fibers;
(b) a series of discrete coupling scoops made of a synthetic
resin and mounted on and along said longitudinal edge
portion, each in registration with only one of said open-
ings, each of said scoops having a coupling head, an upper
leg and a lower leg, said upper and lower legs being dis-
[)Osed astride the opposite surfaces of said longitudinal
edge portion, each said opening extending closely along
and between marginal edges of each pair of scoop legs;
(c) said bead having a width in the range of one-third to
two-fifths of the length of said scoop legs; and
(d) a series of separate connecting strips individually accom-
modated in one of said openings and respectively inter-
connecting said upper and lower legs.
4,380,100
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE
Terrence S. Crisp, Haasrode, Belgiiun, assignor to Klippan S.A.,
Haasrode, Belgium
Continuation of Ser. No. 953,241, Oct. 20, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 781,918, Mar. 28, 1977,
abandoned. This application Jan. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 114,811
Oainis priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 9,
1976, 2651115
Int. a.3 A44B 11/26
U.S. a. 24—230 AL 4 Claims
4,380,099
ATTACHMENT DEVICE FOR COMPONENTS
MOUNTED IN RECESSES IN VEHICLE BODYWORK
Heinz Dick, Odenthal, and Hans Lux, Cologne, both of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Ford Motor Company, Dear-
bom, Mich.
Filed Jul. 29. 1981, Ser. No. 287,847
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 25,
1980,3044313
Int. a.3 A44B 21/00
U.S. a. 24—211 P 6 Qaims
1. Attachment device for a component mounted in a recess
in a vehicle bodywork with clamps, supports and holders that
are operatively disposed between the component and the walls
of the recess and which interact with apertures formed in the
walls of the recess in order to hold the component in an easily
detachable fashion in the bodywork;
the attachment comprising:
a holder on the component in the form of a swivel pin inter-
acting with a recess wall aperture;
a substantially V-shaped clamp interacting with a comple-
mentarily formed aperture in the wall of the recess in such
a way that when the component is in its normal position a
head of the clamp engages in the aperture;
an S-shaped flexible support interposed between the compo-
nent and the recess wall exerting an outward biasing force
on the component when in said normal position; and in the
event of an inwards movement of the component beyond
the normal position against the biasing force of the sup-
port the head being released from the aperture by a bevel
on the clamp;
the clamp then interacting with the aperture and being held
in a loose position by means of a catch on one edge of a
detent fixed on the component.
1. A seat belt buckle comprising:
an inlet slot for receiving a tongue;
a latch movable between lock and unlock positions, said
latch including a latching surface for engagement with
said tongue when said latch is in its lock position whereby
said tongue is retained in said buckle, said latch including
a lock bar receiving surface, said latch normally being
disposed in its unlock position;
a push button slidably disposed in said buckle;
a push button spring biasing said push button to a forward
position, said push button being movable against the bias
of said spring to a rearward position at which said latch is
moved to its unlock position to release said tongue;
a lock bar slidably movable with said push button, said lock
bar normally being spaced from said lock bar receiving
surface of said latch, said lock bar being movable into
engagement with said lock bar receiving surface of said
latch upon insertion of said tongue into said buckle and
movement of said latch to its lock position to retain said
latch in said lock position, said lock bar being movable out
of engagement with said lock bar receiving surface upon
movement of said push button to its rearward position to
release said latch from its lock position; and
an ejection bar for ejecting said tongue from said buckle
when said push button is moved to its rearward position;
said latch comprising cam means engagable by said lock
bar, said cam means comprising an upstanding element
having a curved underside surface adjacent a slot, said slot
defining said lock bar receiving surface, said lock bar
being movable along said underside surface to move said
latch into its lock position, and said lock bar being further
movable along said underside surface into said slot,
whereby said latch is retained in its lock position.
4,380,101
TIE HOOK, PARTICULARLY RUBBER SPRING HOOK
Antoine Joubert; Thierry Joubert; Bernard Bichard, and Jean
Joubert, all of Ambert, France, assignors to Joubert S.A.,
Ambert, France
FUed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,045
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 15, 1980, 80 15612
Int. a.3 A44B 13/02
U.S. a. 24—237 9 Claims
1. A hook for hitching a tie, said hook comprising:
an anchorage block having a through passage to receive the
tie;
a recess formed in the anchorage block; and
an open hooking loop having two arms substantially sym-
metrical with reference to the through passage, a base
spaced from the anchorage block and serving to join said
arms to form the loop, said loop being substantially coaxial
with said through passage, one arm of the loop being
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
543
integral with the anchorage block and the other arm of the
loop being free and being movable laterally away from or
towards the block and having a nose directed towards the
base of the loop and adapted to enter the recess of the
turn moves said hasp and base means object-receiving
surfaces closer together; and
said hasp means being so constructed that as said hasp means
first end curved surface means is engaged by said conical
screw means a bending of said first end takes place as said
object-receiving surface means is straightened, effectmg
tightly clamping of an object received thereby.
4,380,103
BALLOON CLIP
John E. McGrath, 456 Glen Mar Rd., Glen Bumie, Md. 21061,
and Earl Wilson, 2922 N. Seminary Ave., Chicago, III. 60657
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,586
Int. C1.5 A63H 3/06: A44B 21/00
U.S. a. 24—255 SL 8 Claims
block for engagement with the block to close the loop,
said nose being pointed and the recess having a corre-
sponding but hollow shape to cause self-centering of the
nose in the recess.
4,380,102
CLASPING DEVICE
Erik G. Hansson, Stughemmet, S-56242, Sandhem, Sweden
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,233
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 2, 1980, 8004095
Int. CI.' A44B 24/00
U.S. CI. 24—248 SA 14 Claims
1. A clasping device for releasably tightly clasping an object,
comprising:
base means;
hasp means; and
conical screw means;
said base means having: means defining an exterior surface
thereof for receiving an object thereon; a first end and a
second end disposed on opposite sides of said surface, said
first end having: means defining an opening therein having
an area substantially larger than at least the smallest cross-
sectional area of said conical screw means; and edge
means having a thickness for engaging within the grooves
of said conical screw means and allowing longitudinal
displacement of said conical screw means upon rotation
thereof when in engagement with said edge means; and
said hasp means having: means defining an exterior surface
thereof for receiving an object thereon; a first end and a
second end of said hasp means disposed on opposite sides
of said surface, said hasp means second end operatively
pivotally mounted to said base means second end; said
hasp means first end having curved surface means for
engaging said conical screw means so that as said conical
screw means passes through said base means first end
opening, with said base and hasp means second ends in
operative engagement, it engages said edge means and said
hasp means first end curved surface, and as it is rotated it
moves longitudinally of said edge means and moves said
edge means and curved surface further apart, which in
5. A clip device of unitary construction for sealmg an object
such as the valve of a balloon, fiexible tubing and the like
comprising first and second arms connected by an integral
hinge which hinge defines an interior clamping area, said first
and second arms having interior and exterior surfaces and
coacting locking means on the extended ends thereof,
said locking means on said first arm comprising a first C-
shaped flange opening toward said exterior surface of said
first arm,
said locking means on said second arni comprising a second
C-shaped fiange, being slightly larger than said first C-
shaped flange and adapted to overlie and substantially
conform to said first C-shaped flange when said clip de-
vice is in a closed position, said second C-shaped fiange
further comprising a flat lip formed at the terminus of said
second C-shaped fiange extending laterally across said
second arm and directed toward said interior clamping
area,
said first and second arms being urged toward each other
into said closed position after the object to be sealed is
inserted into said interior clamping area so that when said
first C-shaped fiange abuts said inwardly directed lip said
second C-shaped fiange is deflected until said first C-
shaped fiange is within said second C-shaped fiange, said
inwardly directed lip thereby locking said first C-shaped
fiange within said second C-shaped fiange thereby to
retain said object within said interior clamping area.
4,380,104
APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING THE HLAMENT
BUNDLE OF HBROUS MATERIAL
Seiichi Kamioka, 390-5, Shimonogo-cho, Moriyama-shi, Shiga-
ken; Masahiko Manabe, B3-22,10, Sonoyama 2-chome, and
Rokuro Sakai, 4-25-1, Sonoyama 2-chome, both of Ohtsu-shi,
Shiga-ken, all of Japan
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,740
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 18, 1980, 55-3599
Int. a.' DOID 11/02
U.S. a. 28—282 11 Oaims
1. An apparatus for separating filaments in a filament bundle,
which comprises a nozzle for ejecting the filament bundle,
means for ejecting said filament bundle from said nozzle, an
impingement plate having a surface composed of a matenal
1029 O.G.— 27
544
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
that negatively electrically charges the surfaces of the fila-
ments of the fiber bundle upon impact, said plate being posi-
tioned adjacent said nozzle so that the filament bundle is pro-
jected agamst said surface of said impingement plate.
1. A method for shaping, forming, and assembling a cyclone
separator (32) comprising the steps of,
(a) assembhng an intermediate partly tapered portion (58,64)
from a conical portion (58) and a barrel section dust bowl
(33), the dust bowl including an upper cylindrical barrel
section (64) joined to a lower conical section (66) and
having a solids entrance (62) of a particular and precise
diameter,
(b) interconnecting a cylindrical portion (56) and a lower
dipleg (34) with the intermediate partly tapered portion
(58,64) having a solids outlet (70) for forming a cyclone
separator housing (32),
(c) mounting an inlet means (54) having an inlet area (I) in
the upper portion of said cyclone separator cylindrical
housing portion (56) and shaped for receiving gases with
entrained solids therein at a velocity in the range of 52 feet
per second to 80 feet per second,
(d) attaching a gas outlet tube (35) defining a solids-free-gas
outlet (74) having an area (O) to the upper portion of the
separator cylindrical housing portion (56) and shaped for
receiving solids-free-gas at a velocity in the range of 52
feet per second to 200 feet per second,
(e) shaping the solids-free-gas outlet area (O) to the separator
inlet area (I) proportional to the range of substantially
0/1 = 0.4/1 to 1.0/1.0, and
(0 shaping the dust bowl solids entrance diameter relative to
the diameter D of the cyclone separator cylindrical hous-
ing portion (56) in the range of substantially 0.05 D to 0.2
D and disposing the junction of the barrel section (64) and
the conical section (66) of the dust bowl so as to lie in a
plane which passes through the apex (68) of the projection
of the conical portion (58).
(g) forming the solids outlet (70) on the housing by a dis-
tance (L) from the gas outlet (74) proportional to the
diameter (D) of the cyclone separator cylindrical portion
(56) in an amount so that L/D=AA9 -1.09 {O/L) for
providing maximum efficiency with minimum erosion of
both the cyclone separator internal wall surface and of the
separated solids.
4,380,105
METHOD FOR SHAPING, FORMING AND
ASSEMBLING A HIGHLY EFHCIENT CYCLONE
SEPARATOR
John P. MacLean, StafTord; J. Edward Cantwell, Houston; John
D. BroHH, The Woodlands, and Harold D. Hoy, Bridge City,
all of Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No, 38,757, May 14, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 865,051,
Dec. 27. 1977, abandoned. This application Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No.
166,714
Int. a.' B23P 15/00: BOID 45/12
U.S. Ck 29-157 R 1 Claim
4,380,106
ASSEMBLY APPARATUS
Karl G. Jonason, Vasteras, Sweden, assignor to Granges Metall-
verken Aktiebolag, Vasteras, Sweden
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,419
Claims priority, application Sweden, Nov. 2, 1979, 7909122
Int. Cl.^ B23P 15/26
U.S. CI. 29-157.3 A n Qaims
1. An apparatus for assembling a heat exchanger core com-
prising tubes and associated fin elements in thermal contact
with the tubes said apparatus comprising a means for receiving
the tubes and the fin elements and delivering these elements in
an alternate relationship to a transportation path, means ar-
ranged adjacent the transportation path for interconnecting the
adjacent tubes and fin elements, an ejecting device for expel-
ling the tubes and the fin elements from the receiving means to
the transportation path in the direction of transportation of
tubes and fin elements along the transportation path, and ad-
vancing means which cooperate with said removing or eject-
ing device to advance the tubes and the fin elements along the
transportation path, wherein the said ejecting device has oper-
ating means which cause the removing or ejecting device,
during each expelling cycle of operation, firstly to move in the
forward direction to expel a tube and fin element from said
receiving means at first speed, and secondly to move in the
forward direction at a second speed, slower than said first
speed, to advance the tubes and fin elements along said trans-
portation path, said second speed being substantially equal
with the advancing speed of the advancing means, the arrange-
ment being such that the tube and the fin elements are brought
into abutment against each other and are then moved continu-
ously and with a substantially even speed along the transporta-
tion path past the means for interconnecting the adjacent tubes
and the fin elements.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
545
4,380,107
CONNECTOR PIN HANDLING DEVICE
Dennis I. Andress, Two Rivers, Wis., assignor to The Manitowoc
Company, Inc., Mantiwoc, Wis.
Filed Feb. 15, 1978, Ser. No. 877,903
Int. a.3 B23F 19/04
U.S. CI. 29—252 3 Qaims
means for applying restoring torques to said inertially
sensitive elements; and
1. A device for handling connector pins comprising, in
combination, a pair of frame plates having alined notches to fit
over structural members with holes to receive connector pins,
said plates being connected with a butt plate and a bed plate
defining a jack receiving trough, a hydraulic jack with a piston
in a cylinder rested in said trough, said plates and trough being
sufficiently long to receive a pin between said notches and said
jack when said piston is in said cylinder and the jack is adjacent
said butt plate so that hydraulically extending the piston will
force the pin transversely of the notches and into holes in
members in said notches, said frame plates having a pin receiv-
ing tray on the side of said notches opposite said jack for
receiving the pin when the jack is used to force a pin from
members in said notches, and a pin carrying tool having a
handle and a pin embracing portion, and a pair of auxiliary
push pins for extending the reach of said jack by being inserted
between said jack and a connector pin, and said side frames
having sockets for storing said push pins and books for storing
said tool.
(c) mounting said assembled first assembly and said second
assembly into a unitary, single compartment interior,
substantially air-tight from an outside environment.
-^ 4380,109
METHOD FOR APPLYING BELT FASTENERS TO A
BELT
Winston C. Pray, Lombard, III., assignor to Flexible Steel Lac>
ing Company, Downers Grove, 111.
Division of Ser. No. 948,971, Oct. 5, 1978, Pat. No. 4,258,461.
This application Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,300
Int. a.3 B23Q 3/00: B21D 39/00; B23P 11/02
LI.S. a. 29—466 7 Qaims
if'iw^o:
4,380,108
UNIVERSAL JOINT FLEXURE HINGE SUSPENSION
SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING THIS
SYSTEM
Robert J. G. Craig, Malibu, Calif., assignor to Incosym, Inc.,
Westlake Village, CaUf.
Division of Ser. No. 822,384, Aug. 5, 1977, abandoned. This
application May 19, 1980, Ser. No. 150,743
Int. a,3 GOIC 19/04
U.S. a. 29—434 9 Qaims
1. A method for making a tuned inertial instrument compris-
ing the steps:
(a) assembling together in a first assembly, a rotor shaft and
an inertially sensitive element gimballed thereto with at
least one axis of rotational freedom substantially orthogo-
nal to said rotor shaft;
(b) rotatably mounting said rotor shaft in a second assembly
including motor means for rotating said rotor shaft, said
second assembly further including electro-magnetic
1. A method of fastening ends of a belt together with upper
and lower belt fasteners secured to the belt by rivets upset by
an anvil means, said method comprising the steps of:
securing lower plate fasteners in an aligned position over the
anvil means with rivet receiving openings in the lower
plate fasteners aligned with rivet upsetting portions of the
anvil means;
aligning the belt ends over the centers of the lower plate
fasteners; holding a plurality of sets of aligned upper plate
fasteners on the upper side of an elongated bar and invert-
ing the bar and placing the bar with the upper plate fasten-
ers held thereon over the belt ends longitudinally along
the belt ends;
securing said sets of upper plate fasteners while held on said
bar in an aligned position over the belt ends with nvet
receiving openings in the upper plate fasteners aligned
with rivet receiving openings of the lower plate fasteners
and with the rivet upsetting portions of the anvil; and
driving the rivet fasteners through the upper plate fasteners
while held on said bar, the belt ends and the lower plate
fasteners into the anvil means and upsetting the lower ends
of the rivets against said lower plate fasteners.
546
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,110
METHOD OF FORMING A MITERED JOINT
Robert G. Harig, Paragould, Ark., assignor to Darling Store
Fixtures, Paragould, Ark.
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,909
Int. C\J B23P 19/02
U.S. a. 29—525 3 Oaims
1. A method for forming a mitered joint between ends of two
tubular members, said joint connecting said members at a
predetermined angle, comprising the steps of:
(1) shaping the end of each member to extend at an angle of
one half of the predetermined angle;
(2) connecting one leg of an insert having two legs extending
at said predetermined angle to the interior of one of said
members with the other insert leg extending from said end
of said one member said other insert leg having at least one
projection extending from the side of said other leg, said
projection disposed for engaging the interior of the other
of said members;
(3) trimming said projection on said other insert leg to align
said other insert leg for forming said joint and to insure an
interference fit between said other insert leg and said other
member;
(4) pressing said end of the other of said members onto said
other insert leg until said member ends abut and said
members form a joint extending at the predetermined
angle, said other insert leg creating an interference fit with
said other member to maintain said other member in posi-
tion for forming said mitered joint, said abutting ends
defining a line extending around said members and includ-
ing inner and outer portions; and
(5) welding said members ends together only along the inner
portion of the line between said abutting ends.
4,380,111
CUTTING, STRIPPING AND WRAPPING BIT
Qifford L. Galloup; Roger M. Bula, both of Reed City; Robert
W. Klemm, Hersey, and Ralph E. Westerburg, Jr., Reed City,
all of Mich., assignors to Cooper Industries, Inc., Houston,
Tex.
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 184,763
Int. a.^ HOIR 43/04; B21F 15/04
U.S. a. 29—564.4 14 Qaims
-L-~.
tor wire and wrapping said wire on a terminal in a series of
helical convolutions:
a rotatable wrapping bit having an elongated cylindrical
body and including groove means forming a longitudinal
conductor wire receiving groove disposed along the pe-
riphery of said bit and radially displaced from the axis of
rotation from said bit;
an elongated cylindrical tubular sleeve, said sleeve including
guide surface means forming a guide surface extending
generally axially from one end of said sleeve and posi-
tioned to be in alignment with said groove means in a
starting position of said bit with respect to said sleeve to
provide for inserting an insulated conductor wire into said
groove means; said guide surface having a substantially
fiat surface portion, and,
insulation cutting means interposed in said groove means,
said insulation cutting means including a first substantially
straight cutting edge portion, oriented relative to said
guide surface means such that, at the point of contact of
said cutting edge portion with the flexible conductor
insulation, said cutting edge portion is essentially parallel
to said substantially fiat surface portion of said guide
surface means for forcibly engaging said insulated conduc-
tor wire between said first cutting edge portion and said
substantially fiat surface portion upon initial rotation of
said bit to commence cutting said insulation.
4,380,112
FRONT SURFACE METALLIZATION AND
ENCAPSULATION OF SOLAR CELLS
Roger G. Little, Bedford, Mass., assignor to Spire Corporation,
Bedford, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 181,106, Aug. 25, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,480
Int. a.3 HOIL 31/18
U.S. a. 29—572 4 Qaims
1. In a device for stripping insulation from a flexible conduc-
1. A method of front surface metallization and encapsulation
for solar cells comprising:
(a) providing a transparent plate having inner and outer
surfaces;
(b) heating said plate so as to soften its said inner surface;
(c) pressing a mesh of wires fed from spools into said soft-
ened plate inner surface;
(d) providing a semiconductor wafer having front and rear
semiconductor strata; and
(e) bonding said plate inner surface, together with said mesh
of wires embedded therein, to said semiconductor wafer.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
547
4,380,113
PROCESS FOR FABRICATING A HIGH CAPAOTY
MEMORY CELL
Manohar L. Malwah, Sunnyvale, Calif., assignor to Signetics
Corporation, Sunnyvale, Calif.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,275
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/7%
U.S. a. 29—577 C 9 Qaims
p '34 28>
zzzzz
Y
3G7
24
^;7N
t
K)
1. A method of fabricating a high capacity memory cell,
comprising:
(a) forming isolation regions in a surface of a semiconductor
substrate patterned to produce a multiplicity of cell areas;
(b) forming an insulating layer over the entire surface of said
cell areas;
(c) introducing ions having majority carriers of first conduc-
tivity type throughout the entire area of said insulating
layer;
(d) introducing ions having majority carriers of second
conductivity type opposite said first conductivity type
throughout the entire area of the semiconductor surface.
(e) forming a first pattern of conductive material over said
insulating layer to form a storage gate and to define a
storage region beneath said storage gate extending to an
isolation region and to define a transfer region spaced
from said isolation region by said storage region;
(0 removing said insulating layer from the portion lying
above said transfer region and from other active areas to
selectively remove ions having majority carriers of said
first conductivity type;
(g) removing ions having majority carriers of said second
conductivity type from said transfer region and other
active areas by forming an oxide layer on the semiconduc-
tor surface where said insulating layer is removed;
(h) diffusing ions having majority carriers of said first con-
ductivity type from said insulating layer to said storage
region to produce in said storage region a shallow ion
layer having majority carriers of said first conductivity
type and beneath said shallow ion layer a deep ion layer
having majority carriers of said second conductivity type;
and
(i) forming a second pattern of conductive material over said
transfer region to define a bit line region spaced from said
storage region by a portion of said transfer region and to
produce a transfer gate overlying said transfer region
portion and also insulated from and partially overlying
said storage gate.
4,380,114
METHOD OF MAKING A SEMICONDUCTOR
SWITCHING DEVICE
Monty F. Webb, Richardson, Tex., assignor to Teccor Electron-
ics, Inc., Irving, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 29,263, Apr. 11, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,258
Int. C1.5 HOIL 21 /(/Oi. 21 m, 21/302. 21/56
U.S. a. 29—588 * Clwrns
1. A method of making a semiconductor switching device
comprising:
providing a semiconductor wafer having a plurality of de-
fined zones arranged in a two-dimensional array, each
zone having a plurality of regions of alternate conductiv-
ity type constructed and arranged to permit one of said
semiconductor switching devices to be formed from the
semiconductor chip defined by one of said zones once
separated from the wafer;
applying molten solder to said wafer;
applying a copper foil having a thickness of approximately 1
to 5 mils over the solder covering at least one major face
of the wafer;
uniformly pressing the copper foil and wafer together with
sufficient force to cause the molten solder to fiow laterally
and then harden to a uniform thickness, said solder thick-
ness being several times thinner than the thickness of said
copper foil;
selectively etching away portions of said copper foil and
underlying solder along the boundaries of said zones and
in gate regions defined in each zone;
bonding a trigger element to the gate region within each
zone;
breaking said wafer along the boundaries between zones to
provide separate semiconductor chips;
bonding one of said chips onto a terminal;
bonding a cathode lead to a portion of said copper foil atop
said chip;
bonding a gate lead atop said trigger element; and
encapsulating said chip, trigger element, terminal and leads.
4,380,115
METHOD OF MAKING A SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE
WITH A SEAL
Louis N. Pomante, Lansdale, Pa., assignor to Solid SUte Scien-
tific, Inc., Montgomeryville, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 100,905, Dec. 6, 1979, abandoned. This
application Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,200
Int. a.' HOIL 23/02
U.S. a. 29—588 11 Cl*»"»
2
1. A method of fabricating a semiconductor device compris-
ing the steps of:
(a) forming a layer of metal overlying a major surface of a
semiconductor body, and removing parts of said metal
layer to leave a pattern thereof overlying said semi-con-
ductor surface,
(b) forming an insulating passivating layer of silicon dioxide
overlying and contacting said patterned metal layer,
(c) forming a passive sealing silicon layer overiying and
contacting the insulating layer by placing said semi-con-
ductor device with said patterned metal layer and insulat-
ing layer formed thereon in a chamber containing an
atmosphere including a gas which decomposes and depos-
its silicon at a temperature below 525' C. for a time dura
tion sufficient to form a deposit of silicon in the range of
500 to 3000 A thidc approximately, and
(d) etching windows in the sealing silicon layer and insulat-
548
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
ing layer to provide openings to receive terminal connec-
tions to said metal layer.
4,380,116
RADIANT ELECTRICAL HEATER, AS WELL AS
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE
THEREOF
Gerhard Gossler, Oberderdingen, and Eugen Wilde, Knittlingen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to E.G.O. Elektro-
Gerate Blanc u. Fischer, Oberderdingen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 212,802
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 14,
1979. 2950302
Int. a.3 H05B 3/00
U.S. a. 29-611 9 Claims
1 A method for manufacturing a radiant electrical heater,
wherem a support is made from an electrically and thermally
insulatmg material and slots are formed therein for receiving
helical heating resistor coils, comprising the further step of
deforming at least one of the support and the heater coils,
while the support is in a prehardened condition, whereby
portions of the support will at least partially surround portions
of the healer coils for securing the heater coils in the slots.
4,380,117
ELECTRICAL HARNESS FABRICATING APPARATUS
Joseph E. Brandewie, Dunedin, and Granville S. Hart, Clearwa-
ter, both of Fla., assignors to AMP Incorporated, Harrisburg,
Pa.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,104
Int. C1.5 HOIR 43/04
U.S. CI. 29-742 4 Claims
i=t.
rn-in.
V.i
i. '»'
"^>i
^J^i \
..M
r
cavities in a connector housing, said apparatus being of the
type having an operating zone having a terminating station
therein, an insertion station where terminated ends are inserted
into a connector housing, and a reciprocable wire delivery
shuttle having telescoping wire guide tubes and releasable wire
gripping means thereon, characterized in that
said shuttle is reciprocable on a first path from said operating
zone to a point remote therefrom, said shuttle being recip-
rocable on a second path from said insertion station to said
point remote from said operating zone, said first path and
said second path being colinear along part of their lengths
proximate to said remote point, said paths diverging
obliquely as they approach the respective stations,
whereby,
said shuttle positions said leading ends for terminating at said
terminating station, retreats therefrom along said first path
without passing through said insertion station, and advances
along said second path to insert the terminated ends into said
cavities in said connector housing.
4,380,118
TERMINAL INSERTION TOOL
Donald E. Driver, Shermanstown, and John W. Kaufman, Her-
shey, both of Pa., assignors to AMP Incorporated, Harris-
burg, Pa.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,564
Int. CI.^ HOIR 43/00
U.S. a. 29-747 4aaims
r:.,7::.Fl;l
'~\
iii.,
1 Improved apparatus for terminating the leading ends of a
plurality of wires to a like plurality of terminals in a linear
array and inserting the terminated leads into a linear array of
1. A hand tool for inserting individual replacement terminals
into a housing of an electrical connector pre-mounted on a
circuit board, each said terminal having an active portion
forming electrical and mechanical contact with a respective
conductive hole in said board, an intermediate shoulder for
receiving an axial thrust, and a free end profiled to be pre-
loaded in said housing, said tool having a handle with an inser-
tion head secured to one end thereof, characterized in that said
insertion head has a trident configuration, the arms of which
secure a free end of the replacement terminal in a pre-loaded
condition, engage an intermediate shoulder of the terminal to
apply an insertion force thereagainst, and engage said housing
to guide the movement of the tool with respect thereto
whereby said replacement terminal is inserted into the housing
in a pre-loaded condition.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
549
4,380,119
METHOD OF MAKING AN ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY
Richard W. Normann, Otego, and LeRoy W. Fairbairn, Sidney,
both of N.Y., assignors to The Bendix Corporation, South-
field, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 116,055, Jan. 28, 1980. This application
Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,200
Int. a.3 HOIR 43/00
U.S. a. 29—884 8 Qaims
1. A method of making an electrical connector assembly
including a body of dielectric material having a plurality of
passages extending therethrough from a front face to a rear
face and further including a plurality of electrical contacts,
each electrical contact being adapted to mount within one
respective passage and each having a body portion at one end
thereof and a termination portion extending from the body
portion, the steps of method comprising:
molding the body to form the passages, each of said passages
forming on each respective face an array of spaced-apart
openings disposed in straight line rows, the front face
array of openings describing a grid comprising four
spaced-apart rows and the rear face array of openings
describing a grid comprising two spaced-apart rows,
inserting the contacts into their respective passages so that
the termination portions extend beyond the rear face of
the body and the body portions of the contacts are adja-
cent the front face, and
bending the termination portions of the contacts so that the
ends of the termination portions extending beyond the
rear face form two rows.
means being moved relative to said stationary plate means by a
pivoted lever means, said nail clipping retainer means includes:
a "U"-shaped elongated channel means; a central web means of
said channel means; parallel side wall means integrally formed
with said central web means and said wall means projecting
normally from central web means; said side wall means of a
height that forms a compartment for retaining clipped toe and
finger nails after being clipped by said cutting edges; the termi-
nating upper surface of said side walls bemg parallel to said
stationary plate means of at least one half the length of said
elongated "U"-shaped channel means; the said termmating
upper surface of said side walls being not parallel to the mov-
able plate means along the one half of the length of said elon-
gated "U"-shaped channel means so that when the movable
plate means is in its opened position there will be a tapered
opening between said movable plate means and the termmating
upper surfaces of said side walls which are parallel to said
stationary means for at least half the length of the elongated
"U"-shaped channel means in order that clippings may be
disposed from the interior of the clipper by use of the opening
existing between the parallel side walls and the movable plate
means; said second half of said upper surface bemg parallel to
said movable plate means and extending to the end of said
"U"-shaped elongated channel means which is at the end of
said elongated channel means nearest said pomt of joining
together of said movable and stationary plate means; and re-
taining means located on said side walls for removably retam-
ing said "U"-shaped elongated channel means to said station-
ary plate means.
4,380,120
NAIL CLIPPING RETAINER
William B. Hannon, P.O. Box 187, Kihei, Hi.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,503
Int. a.^ A45D 29/02
U.S. a. 30—28
1. A nail clipping retainer means to be removably attached
to a nail clipping device of the class which includes a stationary
plate means cooperating with a movable plate means which in
turn are joined together at one end and have at the opposite
ends of said stationary and movable plate means cutting edges
of the type that cut toe and finger nails, said movable plate
4,380,121
ELECTRIC SHAVER
Gundolf Naimer, and Kurt Hauer, both of Graz, Austria, assign-
ors to Payer-Lux Elektroprodukte Gesellschaft m.b.H., Graz,
Austria
Filed Apr. 1, 1981. Ser. No. 249,971
Oaims priority, application Austria, .Apr. 3, 1980, 1838/80
Int. a.^ B26B 19/i8
U.S. a. 30—42 4 Qaims
2 Claims
1. In an electric shaver having a casing, a shear head, a
driving motor for the knife, and an on-ofT switch provided in
the motor circuit, the improvement compnsing an electronic
sensor switch (5) which is electrically connected to a contact
plate (K2) on the outside of the casing (1) with the gripping
zone and to the shear face (Kl) of the shear head (2) and shear
foil, the terminals (53, 54)) of the sensor switch (5) being con-
nected to the control circuit of an actuating means (RL) for
opening and closing the motor circuit.
550
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,122
CUTLERY IMPROVEMENTS FOR AIDING EFFECTIVE
AND CORRECT USE THEREOF
Peter C. Jagger, Cuckfield, England, assignor to Little People
Limited, Hong Kong, Hong Kong
Filed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,722
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 17, 1979,
32098/79
Int. a.3 B25G 3/00
U.S. a. 30—343 17 Qaims
/?--
1. A piece of cutlery having a longitudinal center line, said
cutlery piece comprising
a handle having an upper surface and a front end,
an operative portion joined to said handle's front end,
a recess positioned adjacent the joint between said operative
portion and said handle's front end, said recess being
provided in said handle's upper surface and being centered
on said longitudinal center line, and said recess being of a
size to accommodate and locate the tip of the index finger
of a user's hand when the user's hand grips said handle;
and
a rim defining the peripheral edge of said recess, said rim
having a front wall adjacent said operative portion and
opposed side walls extending from said front wall toward
said handle's rear end. the depth of said recess defined by
said front and opposed side walls of said rim being suffi-
cient to prevent accidental longitudinal displacement of
the tip of the index finger of a user's hand out of said recess
toward said operative portion, and being sufficient to
prevent accidental lateral displacement of the index finger
of a user's hand out of said recess in a sideways fashion,
when the user's hand is holding said handle during normal
usage of said piece of cutlery.
4,380,123
TOOL FOR OPENING A CAN OR THE LIKE
Ayzik Blyakharov, 31-77 32 St., Astoria, N.Y. 11106
Filed Jun. 7, 1979, Ser. No. 46,565
Int. Cl.^ B67B 7/30
U.S. a. 30-409 10 Claims
1. A tool for opening a can or the like, comprising a body
part formed as an integral member and including a first portion
extending in a first plane and a second portion extending in a
second plane which is substantially transverse to said first
plane, said first portion being elongated in a first direction and
having a wall which bounds two cutouts spaced from one
another in the direction of elongation and each having an
outlet which opens at said second plane, each of said cutouts
being bounded by a first wall section and a second wall section
formed in said wall and spaced from one another in the direc-
tion of elongation, said second portion being also elongated in
said first direction and having two pointed tips and two cutting
edges which are located in said second plane, spaced from one
another in the direction of elongation and face in opposite
directions so that they can be utilized for opening by a left-
handed person and a right-handed person, respectively, said
second portion having two further wall sections which par-
tially overlap and laterally limit the respective outlets of said
cutouts of said first portion, so that when the body part is
placed onto a bead of a can or the like and the bead is received
in one of said cutouts, the first portion of said body part is
supported on the bead from above by a respective one of said
first wall sections, whereas a wall of the can or the like is firmly
clamped between a respective one of said second wall sections
of said first portion and a respective one of said further wall
sections of said second portion of said body part, and when the
second portion is forced into a cover of the can or the like said
one second wall section of said first portion abuts against the
bead from below.
4,380,124
DRAWING BOARD
Joseph Smith, Auckland, New Zealand, assignor to Colin Ward
Rogers, Auckland, New Zealand, a part interest
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 217,183
Claims priority, application New Zealand, Jan. 22, 1980,
192655
Int. a.' B43L 13/14
U.S. a. 33-433 9 Claims
1. A drawing board having a drawing surface and guide
means for drawing instruments which guide means do not
protrude above the plane of the drawing surface, said guide
means including a pair of arcuate guide means of opposite
curvature situated on one side of the board each arcuate guide
means defining a different vanishing point with said vanishing
points disposed on opposite sides of the center of the drawing
surface, and a recess between the arcuate guide means to en-
able a drawing instrument positioned partly within said recess
to be moved from one arcuate guide means to the other to
enable lines to be drawn towards the different vanishing points
on opposite sides of the center of the drawing surface, said
arcuate guide means that is closest to the adjacent edge of the
board being of larger radius, and being longer than the other
said arcuate guide means.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
551
4,380,125 junction of said intake conduit and said exhaust pipe; the other
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR DRYING AND of said conduit ends being connected to said hot air chamber,
PREHEATING COKING COAL IN A FLIGHT STREAM
TUBE
Diethard Habermehl; Wolfgang Rohde; Werner Kucharzyk, and
Werner Siebert, all of Essen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Bergwerksverband GmbH and Didier Engineerin GmbH,
both of Essen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,953
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 24,
1979, 2942878
Int. a.5 F26B i/yo. 17/10
U.S. a. 34—10 12 Qaims
1. Method of drying and preheating coking coal fines com-
posed of mixed particle fractions in an upright flight stream
tube, comprising the steps of advancing a stream composed of
hot gas and mixed fractions of moist coal particles upwardly
through a flight stream tube in a primary path; temporarily
splitting said stream into a larger main stream containing the
smaller particle fractions and a smaller secondary stream con-
taining the coarser particle fractions; thereupon admitting the
coarser particle fractions into the main stream with the smaller
particle fractions in a directions generally opposite to the
advancement of the main stream; and varying the volumetric
quantity of said secondary stream to thereby vary the size
composition of the coarser particle fractions contained therein.
thereby providing recycled exhaust air to said hot air chamber
without excessive lint accumulation.
4,380,127
DEHYDRATOR APPARATUS WITH UNIDIRECTIONAL
AIR FLOW CONTROL MEANS
Elliott D. Roberts, 105 W. Shore Dr., Richardson, Tex. 75080
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 77,900, Sep. 24, 1978. This
application Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,848
Int. a.3 F26B 9/00
U.S. a. 34—197 17 Qaims
^>-«*
4,380,126
HEAT RECYCLING APPARATUS
Horton C. Kinder, 2524 Springfield Ave., Fort Wayne, Ind.
46805
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,726
Int. C1.3 F26B 11/04
U.S. CI. 34—86 8 Claims
1. A heat recycling apparatus operatively connected to a hot
air chamber having an exhaust pipe, said apparatus comprising:
an intake conduit having opposite ends, one of said conduit
ends having an opening surrounded by a peripheral edge, said
exhaust pipe having an aperture therein, said one intake con-
duit end extending into said exhaust pipe through said aperture,
said opening having an area of between approximately 30%
and approximately 65% of the cross-sectional area of said
exhaust pipe, said peripheral edge being disposed tangent to
said exhaust pipe and in a plane perpendicular to the longitudi-
nal axis of said exhaust pipe passing through the most upstream
point of said aperture thereby minimizing dead air space at the
1. Dehydrator apparatus for drying food comprising:
a housing including a vertical sidewall portion and a trans-
verse base wall joined to said sidewall portion and form-
ing an enclosure;
air intake means in said housing comprising a plurality of
spaced apart recesses formed by respective wall portions
of said housing projecting inwardly from said sidewall
portion adjacent said base wall and forming air inlet flow
channels into said housing through openings in respective
walls of said recesses;
at least one food supporting tray member disposed across an
open top part of said housing, said tray member having a
foraminous food supporting portion forming a generally
flat shelf;
a fan mounted in said housing generally above said openings
and disposed for inducting a flow of air into said housing
through said air intake means and then through said shelf;
and
a motor mounted in said housing below and drivably con-
552
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
nected to said fan, said motor being mounted adjacent said
openmgs in said recesses whereby air is drawn through
said channels into said housing by said fan and flows
generally over said motor before flowing through said
shelf.
a closure engaging portion for engaging closure means for
said can; and
cz:
J I
.J
-/ .2.
4,380,128
GREETING CARD WIIH OPEN WORK ENGRAVING
THEREON
Junju Ichikawa, Mikageishi, Japan, assignor to Kagawa & Co..
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194.884
Gaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 12, 1979, 54-
142033[U]
Int. a.' G09F 1/00
U.S. a. 40—158 R
3 Claims
an integral removable portion comprising at least a surface
adaptcu lo (iisplay indicia.
4,380,130
DISPLAY P\NELS FOR VENDING MACHINES
G. Merle Bachmann, Stone Mountain; Charles L. Davis, and
Annis R. Morgan, Jr., both of Atlanta, all of Ga„ assignors to
The Coca-Cola Company, Atlanta, Ga.
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,818
Int. Cl.^ G09F 7/00
U.S. CI. 40—584 1 Claim
1. A greeting card comprising
a front sheet having a front face and a back sheet containing
an inner face,
an aperture disposed in the front face.
a front flap portion attached to the inner surface iii the front
sheet, across said aperture, said front flap portion combin-
ing with the inside surface of the front sheet to form a
pocket, and
a decorative element made of a metallic or synthetic material
and having a specific see-through design, removably dis-
posed in said pocket, whereby a desired background can
be seen through said decorative, see-through design.
r,:^f<
4,380,129
PROOF-OFPURCHASE FOR SELF-OPENING CANS
Marshall J. Barrash, Atlanta, Ga., assignor to The (^oca-Cola
Company, Atlanta, Ga.
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,554
Int. Q\? G09F 3/00
U.S. a. 40—307 16 Qaims
1. A pull ring opening device for a self-opening can lid
comprising:
a finger engaging portion; '
1. Display means for an obverse face of a vending machine
comprising:
a plurality of panel means defining a like plurality of display
fields within a defined display area:
selected ones of said panel means being of contrasting sur-
face characteristics to the remaining said panel means in
the provision of selected display configurations in said
display area;
one of said selected ones of said panel means including logo
means definitive of a primary product to be dispensed by
said vending machine; and
the remaining said selected ones of said panel means being so
configured, in conjunction with said one of said selected
panel means, as to suggest the representation by said dis-
play panel means of an alphanumeric character represen-
tative of the said primary product in addition to said logo
APRIL 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
553
means, said alphanumeric character being an abbreviation
for said primary product.
an electromagnetic transducer mounted wilhm said cavity
and coupled to said weight;
a power source; and
42 44 40
4,380,131
nSH LINE HOOK SETTING ATTACHMENT
Frank Lazan, Jr., Box 311, Cassville, W. Va. 26527
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,849
Int. a.3 AOIK 97/12
U.S. a. 43—15 7 Claims
an oscillator circuit supplied by said power source and oper-
able to drive said transducer at a predetermined fre-
quency.
1. In combination with a fishing line assembly including a
flexible base end portion for support from a support structure
such as a fishing rod, a flexible free end portion from one end
of which a hook assembly may be supported and an elongated
intermediate portion extending between and connecting said
end portions, said intermediate portion including means func-
tioning to rigidify said intermediate portion, the opposite ends
of said intermediate portion including oppositely inclined
transverse water vane portions supported therefrom against
rotation relative to said intermediate portion, whereby a down-
ward pull on the free end portion of the fishing line assembly
by a fish biting on the attached hook assembly sufficient to
cause lengthwise downward displacement of the fishing line
assembly against light buoyancy applied thereto by an associ-
ated bobber will cause said intermediate portion to be inclined
relative to the direction of the pull and thus resist said pull at
the free end portion of said fishing line assembly to thereby
render the effect of an almost immediate pull on the free end
portion of the fishing line assembly in a direction substantially
opposite to the direction of the pull effected thereon by a fish.
4,380,133
FLAT PATTERN FOR THREE-DIMENSIONAL RIGID
STRLICTLRE
Bennett R. Arnstein, 3049 W. 8th St., Apt. 435, Los Angeles,
Calif. 90005
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,012
Int. a.' A63H ii/QO
L .S. CI. 46—1 L 5 Claims
r\ ,r
IS
a' O I P
4,380,132
nSHING LURE WITH VIBRATION PRODUCING
MEANS
James K. Atkinson, 504 Harrison St., Dardanelle, Ark. 72834
Filed Jun. 23, 1978, Ser. No. 918,405
Int. aJ AOIK 85/01
U.S. a. 43—26.2 4 Oaims
2. A fishing lure comprising:
a body member having walls defining a water-tight cavity;
a weight located within said cavity;
1. A fiat pattern laid out on a thin flexible sheet of material
that can be written or printed or painted or marked upon and
that can be folded and creased to form a three-dimensional
structure, consisting of twelve regular pentagons connected to
form a flat pattern for a simple dodecahedron, each pentagon
having diagonals bisecting the corner angles of said pentagons,
crease lines lying along said diagonals, up-facing creases being
directed toward the side edges of said pentagons, down-facing
creases being directed toward the corners of said penUgons,
whereby a great dodecahedron is formed when the side edges
of said pentagons are joined.
554
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,134
MOLDED SQUEEZE TOY INCLUDING WHISTLE
Anthony P. Taluba, Box 245, R.D. 3, Lebanon, N.J. 08833, and
Paul A. TaJuba, 319A Rte. 1, Monisville, N.Y. 12962
Continuation of Ser. No. 727,473, Sep. 28, 1976, abandoned. This
application Jul. 10, 1978, Ser. No. 923,447
Int. a.3 A63H S/00
U.S. a. 46-117 , 11 Qaims
1. An air-filled squeeze toy of unvulcanized thermoplastic
rubber material comprising in combination a whistle having a
site comprising a whistle cavity integrally formed with the
body of said toy in a blow molding process in which a parison
extruded from a source for plasticizing said thermoplastic
rubber is clamped in an unheated mold including precisely
engineered apertured insert means in fixed relation to the
interior of said mold,
said whistle cavity including a closure forming a substan-
tially closed chamber resonant to a preselected sound
frequency,
said whistle cavity and said closure each having a small
central opening, said openings being substantially aligned
in axial relation to said chamber, wherein at least the
central opening in said whistle cavity as formed by said
insert means is positioned to accommodate the excursions
of a cylindrical blow pin of uniform cross-section,
whereby it serves as a blow hole during said blow molding
process, and wherein as a result thereof said opening in
said whistle cavity is precisely controlled to have a uni-
form reproducible diameter precisely equalling the mini-
mum diameter of the opening in said closure.
4,380,135
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TOY
John R. Wildman, North Riverside, and Howard J. Morrison,
Deerfield, both of 111., assignors to Marvin Glass &, Associ-
ates, Chicago, III.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,420
Int. a.3 A63H 17/04
U.S. a. 46-219 3 Qaims
outwardly of the housing than the other pair, one pair of
track means overlapping the other pair to provide a short-
ened profile for said vehicle, each of said track means
defining an elongated central recess;
a symmetrical drive means for driving each of said pairs of
track means at the same velocity;
follower means carried by said housing and driven by said
drive means for movement along the recess of each of said
track means at the same velocity, in proximity to said run
portions and said end portions whereby the track means
forms a base on which the follower means moves, said
follower means including cooperating means providing
for pivoting movement of said track means about said
follower means as the latter reaches one of said end por-
tions, said follower means further including gears driven
by said drive means for rotation about a horizontal axis
and adapted to roll about the interior of each recess;
a pair of axles arranged to transmit rotary motion from said
drive means to said track means, said axles mounting said
follower means, said axles spaced apart by a distance
slightly greater than the length of the elongated run por-
tions of said track means, one of said axles being shorter
than the other; and
means for making the interior of said track means visible
from the outside, said means for making the interior of the
track means visible including a first flange for each track
means, attached to each gear and engaging the exterior
side of said track means for relative sliding movement
along said track means as said follower means moves
relative to said track means, said means for making the
interior of said track means visible further including a set
^ of second flanges, each second flange attached to an axle
between said first fiange and said vehicle housing, said
second fiange engaging the interior side of said track
means for relative shding movement along said track
means as said follower means moves relative to said track
means, each of said track means further including a radi-
ally inwardly directed fiange arranged to abut with said
second fiange and to be sandwiched between said follower
means and said second fiange so as to securely and safely
retain said track means on said follower means.
1. A four-wheel drive toy vehicle comprising:
a vehicle housing having a front and rear end;
two pairs of identical elongated movable track means for
forwarding the vehicle housing over a surface, a first pair
of track means near the front end on opposite sides of the
housing and a second pair of track means near the rear end
on opposite sides of the housing, each track means
mounted for independent pivoting movement about a
horizontal axis through a full 360°, each of said track
means including a member having a pair of generally
parallel spaced elongated run portions and end portions,
one of said pair of track means being mounted further
4,380,136
ASSEMBLY KIT FOR A HOLDER FOR GROWTH
SUPPORTING MEDIUM
Ladislav S. Karpisek, 86 Woodfield Boulevarde, Caringbah,
n.s.w, Australia
Filed Jul. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 167,725
Int. a.^ AOIG 9/02
U.S. a. 47-83 5 Qaims
I. A kit to assemble into at least one holder for a growth
supporting medium such as soil, said kit comprismg a backing
member and two posts to be erected in vertical parallel spaced
relationship against said backing member, first coupling means
on each post spaced apart at regular intervals along the posts,
at least one contoured front panel having an upper edge and a
lower edge which is shorter than the upper edge, said front
panel having a central portion disposed between two end
portions, second coupling means on each of said end portions
to respectively releasably engage with the first coupling means
on the posts to position said end portions in planes at right
angles to the plane of the backing member fixed to the cooper-
ating post and to space said central portion from the backing
member, said central portion and end portions of the front
panel and the backing member providing encircling walls for a
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
555
soil zone which is open top and bottom and has a smaller and to a third and parts-ejection position, said positions being
cross-sectional area adjacent the front panel lower edge than it separate and independent positions and means for rotating said
housing to each of said difTerent positions for Media separation
at said record portion and for parts — ejection at said separate
third position.
has adjacent the front panel upper edge and a bottom panel to
close off the bottom of a selected soil zone.
4,380,137
SELF-SEPARATING nNISHING MACHINE HAVING
VARIABLE DEGREES OF ROTATION AND VIBRATION,
AND METHOD
Gunther W. Balz, Kalamazoo, Mich., assignor to Roto-Finish
Company, Inc., Kalamazoo, Mich.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,399
Int. a.5 B24B 31/00
U.S. a. 51—163.1 28 Qaims
^'K ^^C^-,*'" fi/^ ^'■
4,380,138
ABRASIVE LIQUID JET CUTTING
Peter H. Hofer, Barrington, lU., assignor to International Har-
vester Co., Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,440
Int. a.3 B24B 7/00
U.S. CI. 51—321
31 Claims
1. In a process of cutting a workpiece using a relatively thin,
high velocity liquid jet directed through a nozzle opening, the
improvement comprising the steps of interposing a plurality of
stationary positionally supported abrasive particles between
said nozzle opening and said workpiece, directing said liquid
jet in an airborne stream toward said particles, intercepting
said particles with said liquid jet, and driving said liquid jet and
said particles into said workpiece.
4,380,139
ANCHORING APPARATUS
Ronald Mitchell, 4600 W. Second St., Roswell, N. Mex. 88201
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,433
Int. a.' E02D 5/74
U.S. a. 52—162 14 Qaims
1. A finishing machine for finishing the surface of unfinished
parts with finishing media comprising a housing which is rotat-
able about a substantially horizontal axis, a finishing chamber
in said housing for receiving unfinished parts and finishing
media and for finishing of parts when said housing is in a first
and finishing position, a storage chamber in said housing
adapted to receive finishing media from said finishing chamber
when said housing is rotated to a position difTerent from said
first position, a foraminous member disposed \n said housing
for separating finishing media from parts, parts exit means
adjacent said foraminous member for exit of finished parts
from said machine when said housing is rotated to a position
different from said first position, means for routing said hous-
ing about a substantially horizontal axis from one position to
another, and means for transfer of finishing media from said
storage chamber to said finishing chamber upon return of said
housing to said finishing position, characterized in that said
housing is rotatable to a second and media-separation position
1. An anchoring apparatus comprising a pair of fiuke mem-
bers, each fluke member comprising a planar top plate and at
least two support arms secured in a substantially perpendicular
orientation to said top plate and extending longitudinally away
from said top plate with their top sides being subsUntially
parallel to said planar top, each said support arm defining a
slot, pin means positioned in each said support arm slot, each
said support arm being adapted to slide and route on said pin
means so that the portion of the support arm extending away
from the top plate abuts against the bottom of the top plate of
the other fluke member, said pin means defining an eyelet with
a threaded bore therethrough and tension means threadedly
engaging said threaded eyelet adapted to keep said fluke mem-
ber locked into abutting position.
556
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,140
THERMAL BARRIER FOR WINDOWS
Joseph L. Abbott, Columbia, S.C.
Filed Sep. 25, 1980. Ser. No. 190,796
Int. CV E04B 3/26
L.S. a. 52-202 10 Qaims
« 68 66
lifted herbage prior to its deposition on the ground,
wherein said drum is hollow, and
1 A thermal barrier for a window in a window opening
including means providmg spaced apart pairs of horizontal and
vertical surfaces extending about the window opening com-
prising, a channel member mountable on each said surface and
having a bottom wall transverse to said window and a pair of
spaced apart side walls extending inwardly from said bottom
wall parallel to said window, a sheet of rigid plastic film mate-
rial having opposite sides and spaced apart pairs of planar
horizontal and vertical edges each received in a corresponding
one of said channel members between said side walls thereof
and parallel to said window, the upper one of said pair of
horizontally extending edges including rigid flange means
extending at an angle with respect to one of said opposite sides
of said sheet, a retaining member removably received in each
channel member and including a leg frictionally engaging the
corresponding edge of said sheet against one of the side walls
of the corresponding channel member and in the direction
tovsard the bottom wall of the channel member, said lower one
of said pair of horizontally extending edges and said pair of
vertical edges each terminating adjacent the juncture between
said one side wall and the bottom wall of said corresponding
channel member, said leg of the retaining member in the chan-
nel member receiving said upper one of said pair of horizon-
tally extending edges of said sheet engaging said flange means
in the direction toward the bottom wall of the corresponding
channel member
a mounting support situated within said hollow drum, and
wherein said tedding means includes impelling means
affixed to said mounting support.
4,380,143
DEVICE FOR WITHDRAWING ROTOR OF
SPINDLELFSS SPINNING MACHINE TO INOPERATIVE
POSITION
Abdurakhim Abduganiev. Chilanzar, kvartal 20, 33. kv. 7; Valen-
tin N. Tikhonov, ulitsa Sh. Rustaveli, 55, kv. 28; Gennady N.
Shiykov, Chilanzar, kvartal 19, 31, kv. 3; Vitaly I. Zhestkov,
Chilanzar, kvartal 19, 26, kv. 41, all of Tashkent; Timur P.
Krjuk, prospekt MIra, 90, kv. 11, Moscow; Viktor M. Muk-
hin, ulitsa Bogdana Khmelnitskogo, 69, korpus 2, kv. 31,
Tashkent, and Jury N. Tikhonov, ulitsa Mukimi, 1, kv. 62,
Tashkent, all of U.S.S.R.
per No. PCT/SU79/00011, § 371 Date Oct. 27, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 22, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01815, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 4, 1980
PCT Filed Feb. 27, 1979. Ser. No. 197,996
Int. Cl.^ DOIH 7/22. 1/12
U.S. CI. 57-89 g Claims
4,380,142
AGRICULTURAL MACHINE FOR THE TEDDING OR
CONDITIONING OF FODDER
Albert Wattron. Schwenheim, and Michel Quirin, Allenwiller,
both of France, assignors to Belrecolt S.A., Marmoutier,
France
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,854
Qaims priority, application France, Dec. 20, 1979, 79 31888
Int. a.' AOID 49/00
U.S. a. 56-370 4 Qaims
1. In a machine for handling cut herbage during forward
movement of the machine on the ground,
in combination:
a support,
at least one drum mounted on said support for rotation about
an axis which is inclined upwardly and forwardly in re-
spect of the direction of movement of the machine,
driving means operable for rotating said drum about said
axis,
a flexible deformable skirt mounted on the lower portion of
said drum for joint rotation therewith and operative for
lifting the cut herbage and moving it rearwardly,
tedding means cooperating with said skirt for tedding the
1 Apparatus for withdrawing a rotor of a spindleless spin-
ning machine to an inoperative position and for braking the
rotation of the rotor, comprising:
a housing in which a rotor is mounted and bearings for
rotation about an axis of rotation,
cylindrical pivot means for pivotally mounting said housing
to a framework of ;he spinning machine such that said
housing is pivotable about an axis which is substantially
parallel to the axis of rotation of said rotor between a first
position wherein said rotor mounted in said housing is in
an operative position and a second position wherein said
rotor is m an inoperative position; and
a slide member mounted on said housing for translatory
reciprocating movement thereon in a direction substan-
tially normal to the axis of rotation of said rotor, said slide
member having at least one brake shoe secured thereto
adapted lo selectively interact with said rotor at a point
within the sliding travel of said slide member on said
housing, and Istch means provided on said slide member
adapted to releasably engage the framework of the spin-
ning machine when said housing is in said first position;
whereby in order to withdraw said rotor to the inoperative
position and brake its rotation, said latch is slidably moved
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
557
to a position such that it is disengaged from the framework
of the spinning machine, such movement being traiismit-
ted to said slide member which translates on said housing
whereupon said brake shoe comes into contact with said
rotor to terminate its rotation.
4,380,144
BELT FALSE TVMSTING SYSTEM
William J. Henry, Spartanburti, S.C, assignor to Milliken Re-
search Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,163
Int. Ci.i D02G 1/02; DOIH / i/30
U.S. a. 57—286 2 Claims
ly-shaped groove having an upper arcuate portion matmg
with said link and supporting the link at spaced points at
least for initial movement to the formmg tool and a lower
arcuate portion, the juncture of said portions defining
spaced link contacting points whereby, when an open end
curved Hnk having a concave inner surface is moved into
the path of said slideway and engaged by said upper arcu-
ate spaced points of said slide tool and moved toward said
center forming tool, its inner surface will first engage said
center forming tool and further movement in the same
direction of said slide tool with both arcuate portions will
cause said spaced link contacting points to bend the link
on either side of the center thereof about said center form-
ing tool moving the link out of said upper arcuate portion
and without interruption of bending into the lower arcu-
att portion to close the open ends of the link.
.0. I
r-
■•1 '
3f ."
J'
■.<0 \^
1. A false twist crimping machine comprising, a primary
heater, means to supply a yarn to said primary heater, a cooling
bath, means to guide the yam from said primary heater to said
cooling bath, a belt false twisting mechanism, means to supply
the yarn to said false t\^'isting mechanism, means to take-up the
yarn false twisted from said mechanism, means to supply a
cooling liquid to said cooling bath and means operably associ-
ated with said cooling bath to purify and recirculate cooling
water from said cooling bath to said mean'- to supply a cooling
liquid.
4,380,146
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACCELERATING AND
SEQUENCING INDUSTRIAL GAS TURBINE
APPARAT S AND GAS TURBINE ELECTRIC POWER
PLANTS PREFERABLY WITH A DIGITAL COMPUTER
CONTROL SYSTEM
Robert A. Yannone, .\idan, and Roy W. Kiscaden, Springfield,
both of Pa., assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pitts-
burgh, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 758,532, Jan. 12, 1977, abandoned.
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 252,131, May 10, 1972,
abandoned. This application Nov. 16, 1979, Ser. No. 95,174
Int. CV F02C 7/26
U.S. CI. 60—39.141 12 Claims
4,380,145
WIRE LINK-FORMING ANC LINKING DEVICE
Robert A. Morin, 49 Mulberry Cir., Johnston, R.I. 02919
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 65,941, Aug. 13, 1979,
abandoned. This application Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,620
Int. a.3 B21L 1/04
U.S. a. 59—27 6 Claims
\. A machine for closing open end links comprising a maga-
zine having means for guiding the open end links; a slideway
intersecting the path of said link guiding means;
a fixed semi-circularly shaped hnk center forming tool
across said slideway on one side of the path of said link
guiding means;
a single one-piece slide tool in said shdeway on the other side
of the path of said link guiding means having an irregular-
%" iof ..■.•«-TT_
ice U% _ ^ _ . ..,iT 'J*~^.^^T1
9^r, :
i 7«;m t'
tA»l
'mVCllWOl/SI
H —
'■!■'■■■' I
1. A gas turbine electric power plant comprising a gas tur-
bine having compressor combustion and turbine elements, a
generator coupled to said gas turbine for drive power, a fuel
system for .supplying fuel to said gas turbine combustion ele-
ment, means for operating said fuel system to energize said
turbine, electronic means for controlling said fuel system oper-
ating means including electronic means for generating a speed
reference, and electronic means for controlling said operating
means to control the fuel flow in response to the speed refer-
ence and actual turbine speed normally to accelerate said
turbine to operating speed from a predetermined lower speed
in a substantially fixed period of time irrespectively of the
existing ambient temperature over an ambient temperature
range at least from - 40° P. to 120° F.
558
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,147
STEAM POWER PLANT CONTAINING
PRESSURE-HRED STEAM GENERATOR WITH
FLUIDIZED BED HRING
Tadeusz Zaba, Ennetbaden, Switzerland, assignor to BBC
Brown, Boveri A Co. Ltd., Baden, Switzerland
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,075
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Apr. 16,
1980, 80200338.4
Int. aj F02C 6/18
U.S. a. 60—39.182 1 Qaim
33
location leading from a primary air line of said charging
set.
OEFO
O
:6
27^
1. In a steam power plant containing a pressure-fired steam
generator equipped with fluidized bed firing, a charging set
composed of a gas turbine and a compressor, the charging set
being driven by the fiue gases of the steam generator and
conveying the compressed combustion air beneath the fiuid-
ized bed in order to form thereat a vortex layer, devices for the
separation, filtering and withdrawal of the dust-like contami-
nants contained in the fiue gas and for controlling and regulat-
ing the steam output for a steam turbo-generator set, the im-
provement which comprises:
said steam generator containing boiler heating surfaces;
all of said boiler heating surfaces being arranged externally
of the vortex layer of the fluidized bed;
said devices for the control and regulation of the steam
output comprising:
by-pass fiow regulatmg valve means for the flue gas;
said by-pass flow regulating valve means being arranged
in said steam generator;
a fiue gas withdrawal line provided for said steam genera-
tor;
a flue gas by-pass line means branching-off said flue gas
withdrawal line;
said flue gas by-pass line means containing a flue gas
by-pass valve means, a flue gas cooler means and a
ventilator means;
said flue gas by-pass line means opening into the steam
generator below the fluidized bed;
a secondary flue gas by-pass line for flow communicating a
location of the flue gas by-pass line means forwardly of
the flue gas by-pass valve means with a location of the flue
gas by-pass line means following the flue gas cooler
means;
a secondary flue gas by-pass valve means provided for said
secondary flue gas by-pass line;
an mjector for blowing in solid non-combusted constituents
separated out of the flue gas withdrawal line into the
fluidized bed;
a flue gas branch means leading frm the flue gas by-pass line
means following the ventilator into said injector;
a flue gas/air mixer provided for the flue gas by-pass line
means forwardly of a location where it opens below the
fluidized bed of the steam generator; and
said flue gas/air mixer flow communicating with a branched
4,380,148
DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING GAS TURBINE ENGINE WEL
CONTROL SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH ENGINE
PARAMETER
Robert G. Burrage, and Michael J. Joby, both of Solihull, En-
gland, assignors to Lucas Industries Limited, Birmingham,
England
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,727
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 21, 1979.
7932878
Int. a.' F02C 9/28
U.S. a. 60—39.281 4 Qgims
-i!:
ffr,4.' U' _ . ! _
r:.^
swTjj-n
y
Z--
^i.€l SYSTtV- - - - --J
— SPEED
II
Tl
I =•.;£.. TO CNOiNE
1. A fuel control system for a gas turbine engine of the kind
including a hydromechanical speed governor fuel control in
which a fuel valve is movable under the influence of a control
input element, operable for example by the pilot of an aircraft
in which the engine is installed, and speed sensing means, the
effect of said control input element on said fuel valve being
variable through the intermediary of an electromechanical
trim device controlled by an electronic control circuit sensitive
to at least one engine parameter, wherein said electronic con-
trol circuit includes error signal generating means for produc-
ing an error signal representing the difference between the
desired and actual values of said engine parameter, a propor-
tional-plus-integral controller circuit for producing the output
signal which is applied to said electromechanical trim device,
means for generating a trim datum signal dependent on the
control input and means for setting the integrator included in
the proportional-plus-integral control circuit to a value corre-
sponding to the difference between the trim datum signal and
the output of the proportional part of the proportional-plus-
integral control circuit when the magnitude of a function of the
error signal exceeds a predetermined value.
4,380,149
METHOD AND MEANS FOR DIESEL EXHAUST
PARTICULATE EMISSION CONTROL
Otto A. Ludecke, Rochester, Mich., assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,320
Int. a.3 FOIN 3/18
U.S. a. 60-274 5 Qaims
1. A process for limiting emissions of combustible particu-
lates with the exhaust gases from a compression ignition engine
of the type wherein excess air is present in the combustion
chambers and exhaust gases, at least under conditions other
than high load, and in which pressurized fuel-air mixtures are
burned and the cylinder gases are expanded to a predetermined
cylinder volume which develops substantial mechanical work
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
559
prior to venting the cylinder gases to exhaust, said process
comprising the steps of
filtering the exhaust gases to collect combustible particulates
in a niter capable of withstanding temperatures adequate
to incinerate the collected particulates in the excess air
containing exhaust gases, and
occasionally, at extended intervals of engine operation,
igniting and burning particulates collected in the filter by
selectively venting burning pressurized mixture from at
least one cylinder directly to said filter prior to the com-
pletion of burning and expansion in the cylinder to said
predetermined volume, the mass of said burning mixture
which is selectively vented being sufficient to raise to their
combustion temperature the particulates in at least a se-
lected portion of said filter,
whereby there results ignition and burning of the collected
particulates supported by the excess air containing engine
exhaust gases passed through the filter.
4,380,150
PUMP JACK ASSEMBLY FOR WELLS
John C. Carlson, General Delivery, Salmon Arm, British Colum-
bia, Canada (VOE 2T0)
Filed Feb. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 119,378
Claims priority, application Canada, Feb. 22, 1979, 322062
Int. a.5 F15B 1/02, li/02
U.S. a. 60—372 12 Qaims
1. In a pump Jack assembly for wells which include a polish
rod operating a pump within the well and a source of hydraulic
fiuid under pressure including a fluid reservoir; the improve-
ment comprising in combination a separate pump actuating
assembly having a lift stroke and a return stroke and including
at least one fluid operator operatively connected to the polish
rod, and a separate counter balance assembly including at least
one fiuid operator, also operatively connected to the polish
rod, said fluid operators including a lift side and a return side,
means operatively connecting the source of hydraulic fluid
under pressure, to the lift side of said fluid operator of said
pump actuating assembly when said pump actuating assembly
is on the lift stroke, and to the return side of said fluid operators
of said pump actuating assembly and said counter balance
assembly when said pump actuating assembly is on the return
stroke, said connecting means being responsive to the position
of said pump actuating assembly to effect a cycling operation
of said pump jack assembly, and a fluid source having means to
adjust the pressure thereof and being operatively connected to
the lift side of the fluid operator of said counter balance assem-
bly, said fiuid source having adjustable pressure including an
accumulator having a liquid in the lower portion thereof and
gas under pressure in the upper portion thereof, said liquid
being operatively connected to the lift side of the fluid opera-
tor of said counter balance assembly, a source of high pressure
gas, a one-way high-to-low pressure regulator valve between
said source and the upper portion of said last mentioned accu-
mulator, and adjustable means operatively connected to the
hydraulic pressure acting on the lift side of the fiuid operator of
said pump actuating assembly and said regulating valve for
operating said regulating valve.
4,380,151
BUOYANCY GENERATOR DEVICE AND METHODS OF
MAKING AND USING THE SAME
Thomas C. Miller, 216 Antire Rd., High Ridge, Mo. 63049
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,293
Int. a.' F03C 00/00
U.S. a. 60—496 1 Qaim
■.3
11 11 1 li
—
\^,A ^ -r
,y iJ
id
c
Ll^
M-
)
0
1. A buoyancy generator comprising an energy conversion
device for converting stored liquids and potential energy into
rotational and kinetic energy comprising,
wheel means, rotatably mounted and submerged m a body of
liquid.
closed rigid storage chambers operably mounted m said
wheel means and disposed about the periphery thereof.
downward motion assistance means comprising fluid inser-
tion means operably mounted proximate the uppermost
part of said wheel means and adapted to fill each chamber
with fluid as it reaches its highest point of travel,
upward motion assistance means comprising fluid extracting
and air injection means operably mounted proximate the
lowermost part of said wheel means and adapted to empty
each chamber of fluid as it reaches its lowest point of
travel and thereby increase each chamber's buoyancy.
4,380,152
DIAPHRAGM DISPLACER STIRLING ENGINE
POWERED ALTERNATOR-COMPRESSOR
Lawrence R. Folsom, Schenectady, N.Y.; John J. Dineen, Dur-
ham, N.H.; Nicholas G. ViUle, SchenecUdy, N.Y.. and
Charles B. Balas, Jr., Denville, N.J., assignors to Mechanical
Technology Incorporated, Latham, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 172,373
Int. a.3 P02G 1/04
U.S. a. 60—520 19 Qaims
1. A Stirling engine having a vessel containing a working
fluid and having a hot chamber; a cold chamber; a displacer
having a hot end facing said hot chamber and a cold end facing
560
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
said cold chamber, said displacer arranged for oscillation be-
tween the hot and cold chambers; and a fluid actuated work
output member; wherein the improvement comprises:
unitary means contained entirely within said vessel and
coupled between said displacer and stationary structure
fixed within said vessel for reducing the effective area of
v'.
'" -fc ^r- 4v- -"<*# -->,' '-
- • 1 FfmP
4,380,154
CLEAN COAL POWER SYSTEM
George Y. Eastman, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to Thermacore,
Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,655
Int. aj F02C 1/10
U.S. a. 60—682 13 Oaims
26 « &4SCS
i"^
•ill - ' - « (.OMtrtTQW
pmcmiTurtm ■■ ... fi ion-tn
said displacer cold face relative to the effective area of
said displacer hot face, and for storing energy upon move-
ment of said displacer toward one end to drive said dis-
placer back toward the other end, and
wherein said unitary means includes a diaphragm having an
inner portion connected to said stationary structure, and
an outer portion connected to said displacer.
4,380,153
TOTAL ENERGY HEATING UNIT
Henry G. Lrsillo, 306 Ipswich Rd., Boxford, Mass. 01921
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,155
Int. a.' FOIK 17/00
L'.S. a. 60—648 21 Oaims
1. An apparatus for the production of mechanical power
comprising:
a fluidized bed combustor into which air, coal and limestone
are introduced and in which the coal is burned to create
heat and the limestone chemically combines with any
sulphur in the coal to produce solid compounds;
means attached to the combustor to remove the solid com-
pounds produced by combination of the limestone and
sulphur;
a closed cycle gas turbine using hot gas furnished to its input
to create mechanical energy; and
a heat exchanger, a first part of which is connected to the
fluidized bed combustor and a second part of which is
attached to the gas turbine input, heating the turbine gas
prior to entry into the turbine, comprising multiple heat
pipes constructed with casings with a coating of a continu-
ous impermeable layer of oxide of approximately one
micron thickness and a second ceramic coating of between
0.010 and 0.125 inch thickness, covering at least that por-
tion of the heat pipes immersed in the fluidized bed.
4,380,155
TEMPERATURE SENSING CIRCUIT WITH HIGH NOISE
IMMUNITY
Stephen W. Paddock, Evansville, and Andrew T. Tershak, Cen-
tre Township, Vanderburgh County, both of Ind., assignors to
Whirlpool Corporation, Benton Harbor, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 68,473, Aug. 20, 1979, Pat. No. 4,297,851.
This application Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,521
Int. a.3 F25B 1/00; GOIK 7/02
U.S. a. 62—229 5 Qaims
1. Process for providing hot air for heating, hot water, and
electricity from a single source of fuel comprising the follow-
ing steps;
(a) burning a suitable fuel within a closed system for the
generation of heat; >
(b) providing forging air as needed to generate and to main-
tain said heat;
(c) introducing water under pressure into a closed tank
healed by said heat generated, for the generation of steam;
(d) operating a steam turbine operatively connected to an
electrical generator, by the steam generated;
(e) passing air around saidx:losed system whereby said air is
heated and subsequently forced into a distribution system;
and
(0 circulating water around a portion of said closed system
whereby the heat from the system generated is addition-
ally used to heat the water.
c/-*
1. In a refrigerator system having refrigeration apparatus for
cooling a refrigerated compartment, a temperature sensing
circuit with improved immunity to noise occurring in the
refrigerator system, comprising:
a circuit board for the temperature sensing circuit located
within the refrigerated compartment;
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
56 1
an analog temperature sensing device mounted in the refrig-
erated compartment and connected to the circuit board
for coupHng a low level analog sensing signal to the tem-
perature sensing circuit; and
a trigger circuit on the circuit board for generating a digital
output as the temperature sensed by the analog device
varies above or below a set point including an adjustable
potentiometer mounted on the circuit board for manual
adjustment of a set point, the potentiometer being con-
nected in a voltage divider network with the analog tem-
perature sensing device, and wherein the trigger circuit
further includes a pair of cascaded comparator stages with
the first stage coupled to the voltage divider network and
having substantially no hysteresis in its response and the
second comparision stage having substantial hysteresis in
its response to produce the digital output.
4,380,156
MULTIPLE SOURCE HEAT PUMP
Amir L. Ecker, Duncanville, Tex., assignor to Atlantic Richfield
. Company, Los Angeles, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 125,503, Feb. 28, 1980,
abandoned, Ser. No. 50,548, Jun. 21, 1979, and Ser. No. 45,392,
Jun. 4, 1979. This application Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 330,005
Int. a.3 F25B 29/00
U.S. a. 62—235.1 9 Qaims
1. Apparatus for conditioning a fluid temperaturewise com-
prising:
a. a fluid handler and fluid path means for circulating said
fluid in a path in heat exchange relationship with a refrig-
erant fluid;
b. at least three refrigerant heat exchangers; a first of the heat
exchangers having parallel-connected and alternatively
operable first throttling means for throttling refrigerant
flow and a first by-pass therefor, said first heat exchanger
being disposed in the path of the fluid such that the fluid
is passed in heat exchange relationship with said first heat
exchanger when said fluid handler is operative, a second
of the refrigerant heat exchangers having a liquid level
controller controlling a throttling means upstream of said
heat exchanger to prevent flooding thereof and being
disposed in a heat exchange fluid circuit for circulating the
refrigerant in heat exchange relationship with a heat ex-
change fluid, and a third of the heat exchangers having
parallel-connected and alternatively operable second
throttling means for throttling the refrigerant flow and
second by-pass therefor, said third heat exchanger being
disposed in a path of ambient air for circulating said refrig-
erant in heat exchange relationship with the ambient air;
c. a compressor connected into a refrigerant circuit for
efficiently compressing the refrigerant from its inlet pres-
sure to its discharge pressure under conditions of opera-
tion of the refrigerant circuit;
d. ambient air blower for circulating said ambient air in heat
exchange relationship with the refrigerant in said third
heat exchanger;
e. a refrigerant circuit serially connecting said at least three
heat exchangers and said compressor and defining a flow
path for said refrigerant;
r means including a reversing valve for selecting the heat
exchangers and direction of flow of refngerant there-
through for selecting a particular mode of operation of the
apparatus:
g. refrigerant disposed in said refrigerant circuit and adapted
to be circulated in a selected flow path for transfernng
heat at a coefficient of performance greater than one;
h. a source of heat exchange fluid;
i. heat exchange fluid circulating means for circulating said
heat exchange fluid in a heat exchange circuit and in heat
exchange relationship with said refrigerant;
j. a heat exchange circuit serially connecting said heat ex-
change fluid source, circulating means and second heat
exchanger;
k. control means for controlling respective modes of opera-
tion;
the element a-j being connected together in respective circuits
and with said control means so as to be operable in at least the
following modes, one operational cycle being indicated in each
mode interconnection:
1. air to fluid heating in which said elements are connected
serially compressor to reversing valve to first heat ex-
changer, with said first by-pass operative and with said
fluid handler operative, to second throttling means to
third heat exchanger, with said second throttling means
controlling the liquid level in said third heat exchanger
and with said ambient air blower operative, to second heat
exchanger back to compressor;
m. heat exchange fluid to fluid heating in which said ele-
ments are connected serially compressor to reversmg
valve to first heat exchanger, with said first by-pass opera-
tive and with said fluid handler operative, to second throt-
tling means to third heat exchanger, operating in flooded
condition with said ambient air blower deenergized to
second heat exchanger, with said liquid level controlling
said second throttling means and with said heat exchange
fluid circulating means operative to circulate said heat
exchange fluid through said second heat exchanger and
effect a low compression pressure ratio across said com-
pressor, back to said compressor;
n. air and heat exchange fluid to fluid heating in which said
elements are connected serially compressor to reversing
valve to first heat exchanger with said first by-pass opera-
tive and with said fluid handler operative, to second throt-
tling means to third heat exchanger, with said second
throttling means controlling the liquid level of refrigerant
therein and with said ambient air blower operative, to
second heat exchanger with said heat exchange fluid
circulating means operative to circulate said heat ex-
change fluid through said second heat exchanger and
effect a low compression pressure ratio across said com-
pressor and with said liquid level control imposing safety
control on said second throttling means to prevent flood-
ing of said second heat exchanger, back to said compres-
sor; and
o. air to fluid cooling in which said elements are connected
compressor to reversing valve to third heat exchanger,
with second by-pass operative, to first throttling means to
first heat exchanger, with first throttling means operative
to control liquid level in said first heat exchanger and with
fluid handler operative, to second heat exchanger back to
compressor.
562
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,157
SELF-CHILLING DISPENSER FOR DRINKING FLUIDS
Peter Christiani, 333 First St., Apt. D-303, Seal Beach, Calif.
90740
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,366
Int. CIJ F28C 7/00
U.S. a. 62—315 1 aaim
1. A self-chilling dispensing container for potable fluids
comprising:
a wall of porous material, said wall having an interior wall
surface defining a cavity and an upper mouth opening for
receiving a potable liquid, and an exterior wall surface
immersible in a coolant fluid such that said coolant fluid is
absorbed and retained within said wall and thereafter may
be allowed to evaporate to thus chill said potable liquid,
there being a lip surface connecting said interior wall
surface and said exterior wall surface to define a rim about
said mouth, and a nonporous layer substantially insoluble
in either fluid fully lining said interior wall surface and
integral therewith forming an impermeable boundary
between said potable liquid and said coolant fiuid
whereby the former is not contaminated by the latter, said
nonporous layer extending uninterruptedly from said
inner surface outwardly over said lip surface to further
prevent said potable liquid from intermixing with said
coolant fiuid during decanting of said potable fiuid from
said container.
4,380,158
DEVICE FOR SPACE-DYEING TEXTILE RLAMENTS
Karl Bous, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Hacoba Textilmaschinen GmbH & Co. KG, Wuppertal, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194,896
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 8,
1979, 2940774
Int. a.3 D06B 1/02
U.S. a. 68—205 R 10 Qaims
i » 1
(6
6^"
1. A device for intermittently dyeing filamentary material,
comprising:
a spray nozzle connected to a supply of liquid dyestuff under
pressure;
transport means for continuously conveying a filament along
a predetermined path past said nozzle; and
shutter means interposed between said nozzle and said path
for chopping a jet of dyestuff trained upon the latter by
said nozzle, said shutter means including a dished wheel
with radially projecting, peripherally spaced sectoral
vanes mounted on a shaft for rotation about an axis
thereof, said wheel having a concave side partly surround-
ing said nozzle.
4,380,159
LEATHER SPLITTING MACHINE
John Michalik, 619 Mountain View, La Habra, Calif. 90631
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,474
Int. C1.3 C14B 1/14
U.S. a. 69—12 1 aaim
1. An adjustable leather splitting machine that incorporates
in combination:
a base attached to to metal plates at a 90° angle to the base to
which is attached:
a support roller, and
a guide roller with ball bearings on either end, running in
channels for preselected adjustment of the thickness of
leather to be split;
a knife adjustable for wear and lubrication;
a adjustable guide rod to assist in holding the leather against
the roller;
at one side of the metal plates is an adjustment arm that
controls the opening between the roller and knife edge
according to premarked numbers on an articulate guide
for the thickness of leather desired;
a scale along the side of the machine next to the arm;
two cams on the support roller which are rotated by the arm
and engage two fiat connecting rods that raise and lower
the roller as directed by the arm;
the two cams are adjustable by set screws on top of each cam
for perfect parallelism between roller and knife;
the arm is resettable by set screws to zero on the scale after
wear of long use or repair;
the guide rod is adjustable for the distance between the knife
edge on to of the two plates and the pressure against the
roller by the plate on the opposite side of the arm; and
the thickness selector stop uses the same arms and cams as
the roller and a support rod to center the axis to avoid
wabbling.
4,380,160
TRAILER TOW LOCKING DEVICE
William F. Hoffman, 17 Brook Dr., Hope VaUey, R.I. 02832
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,067
Int. a.3 E05B 73/00. 67/38
U.S. a. 70—14 5 Claims
1. Apparatus for deterring theft of trailers which utilize a
tow ring having a central opening and upper and lower annular
surfaces comprising:
a base plate having an upper surface;
an upstanding tongue integral with said base plate and in-
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
563
eluding a free end distant from said base plate, said tongue
adapted for reception through the central opening of the
tow ring when said upper surface of said base plate is
positioned proximate to the lower annular surface of the
tow ring;
a top plate having upper and lower surfaces and an aperture
therethrough for slideably receiving said tongue when
said lower surface of said top plate is positioned proximate
to the upper annular surface of the tow ring;
said apparatus being in the operational position when said
upper surface of said base plate is positioned proximate to
the lower annular surface of the tow ring and said lower
surface of said top plate is positioned proximate to the
upper annular surface of the tow ring and said tongue
extends through the aperture in said top plate; and
a cover member having spaced apart flanges fixed to said
upper surface of said top plate and upstanding therefrom
and a web portion integral with said flanges and spaced
from said upper surface of said top plate; said tongue
having a hole therethrough at a location intermediate said
free end and said upper surface of said top plate adapted to
receive the shank of a locking device when said apparatus
assumes the operational position.
4,380,161
PLUG WITH A SAFETY LOCK FOR nLLERS OF FUEL
RESERVOIRS OF AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
Alberto Bassi, Turin, Italy, assignor to ITW Fastex Italia S.p.A.,
Turin, Italy
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,453
Qaims priority, application Italy, Dec. 18, 1979, 28098 A/79
Int. a.3 B65D 55/14; E05B 9/08
U.S. a. 70—168 5 Qaims
end of said bore engaged by and movable in response to rota-
tive movement of said shank means said locking means includ-
ing a key actuatable lock, a depending portion having a locking
groove means therein, and an axially extending drive means,
cooperating means within said bore adapted to engage said
groove means and thereby secure said locking means within
said bore, said shank means further including complimentary
means for engagement by said drive means; whereby said plug
means is insertable in a filler neck and secured therein by a tool,
and said locking means may thereafter be inserted into the bore
and non-removably secured therein thereby rendenng said
closure plug operable and lockable.
4380,162
MAGNETIC LOCK
Joseph W. Woolfson, 10 MonUque Ter., Brooklyn, N.Y. 11201
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 539,285, Jan. 8, 1975,
abandoned. This application Dec. 5, 1975, Ser. No. 637,%1
Int. a.' E05B 47/00. 19/26
U.S. CI. 70—276 36 Qaims
fc
'^vTrnxBTonjc^;
,3$S5S
%
■l\\\M\
^
1. A magnetic lock for operation by a key having a plurality
of spaced apart magnets of different field strengths, said lock
comprising:
a stator and a movable part, said stator havmg two spaced
apart portions on opposite sides of said movable part to
define two spaced apart shear planes, said movable part
being movable to and from a locked position;
both stator portions having a like plurality of recesses in
their respective surfaces that confront said movable part,
said recesses being in alignment and being alignable with
the key magnets;
said movable part having a like plurality of spaced apart
through holes in alignment with said cavities when said
movable part is in said locked position for rendering said
through holes alignable with said key magnets;
a like plurality of pin tumbler magnets slidably disposed in
said through holes, said pin tumbler magnets being of no
greater longitudinal extent than said through holes; and
a like plurality of means, one for each pin tumbler magnet,
for biasing each of said pin tumbler magnets toward one of
said stator portions, at least two of said pin tumbler biasing
means exerting different biasing forces on said pin tumbler
magnets, whereby when said key is juxtaposed adjacent to
said one stator portion and said key magnets are registered
with said pin tumbler magnets and of effective field
strength and polarity to repel said pin tumbler magnets
with a force equal to the different biasing forces on said
pin tumbler magnets, said pin tumbler magnets will be out
of both said shear planes to unlock said lock.
1. A closure plug for closing the end of a filler tube for a
container comprising a plug means and a locking means, said
plug means including cap means having a peripheral seal for
engaging and sealing within the filler tube, a centrally disposed
bore in said cap means, a rotatably received shank means
received within and extending from the bottom end of said
bore, latch means circumferentially disposed relative to the
4,380,163
TAMPER-RESISTANT LOCK
Kenneth J. Reder, 1837 Midland Rd., Bay City, Mich. 48706
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,323
Int. Q.' E05B 15/14. 27/06. 63/00
U.S. Q. 70—364 A 2 Claims
1. A tamper-resistant lock comprising an outer cylinder
adapted to be mounted in an entrance barrier; an inner cylinder
rotatably mounted in said outer cylinder; a plurality of top pins
564
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
disposed in chambers in said outer cylinder; said top pins being
urged toward said inner cylinder; a plurality of bottom pins
disposed in chambers in said inner cylinder; said chambers in
the inner and outer cylinders being in alignment when the lock
is locked; at least one wafer disposed between said top pins and
said bottom pins in at least one of the chambers when the lock
'<.
22
3'-'
^■o
is locked; at least one of said wafers having a hole herein; at
least one bottom pin having a hole therein; a plurality of trap
pins mounted in trap pin chambers in the outer cylinder; said
trap pins being urged toward the inner cylinder; said trap pins
additionally havmg an extension thereon adapted to engage the
hole in said wafer or said bottom pin when a wafer or a bottom
pm having a hole herein passes a trap pin chamber.
during the passing of the stepped portion of said strip past
such associated wrapper roll.
4,380,165
SQUEEZER FLANGER
Willem P. Post, Diepenveen, Netherlands, assignor to
Thomassen & Drijver-Verblifa N.V., Deryenter, Netherlands
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,280
Int. a.3 B21D 22/00
U.S. a. 72—355 11 Qaims
^Elgl®
4,380,164
WINDING MACHINE
Hiroaki Kuwano, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Ishikawajima-
Harima Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,225
Int. a.5 B21C 47/04
U.S. a. 72—21
1. A method of manufacturing a sleeve body having an
outwardly directed circumferential flange arranged at the side
of an open end and a circular constriction adjoining the same
by pressing a substantially cylindrical sleeve body near one
opening thereof along the entire circumference with the aid of
2 Claims ^ plurality of radially inwardly and outwardly movable outer
segments, the form of the inner surface of which corresponds
with the form to be imparted to the constriction, at the same
time on all sides inwardly against an inner support, the diame-
ter of which can be reduced, characterized in that the inner
support, the form of the outer surface of which at least partly
matches that of the inner surface of the desired constriction, is
loaded by a spring force having a radial, outwardly directed
component, which exceeds the force required for the radial
narrowing of the sleeve body, but which is smaller than the
radially directed force by which the outer segments are pushed
inwardly.
1. In a winding machine of the type in which a strip is
wrapped around a mandrel so as to establish stepped portions
comprising the leadmg edge and trailing portions of the strip
overlying said leading edge, and a plurality of wrapper rolls
disposed around the mandrel are forced by individually con-
trolled hydraulic cylinders associated therewith to press the
strip against the mandrel, in combination:
(a) sensor means associated with at least one of said wrapper
rolls and adapted to respond to displacement of the latter
with respect to the mandrel and to generate a signal repre-
sentative of said displacement;
(b) a first pulse generator operatively coupled to said man-
drel and adapted to generate a pulse signal representative
of an angle of rotation thereof;
(c) an arithmetic circuit connected to receive the signals
from said sensor means and first pulse generator and gen-
erate for each respective wrapper roll a retraction signal
correspondmg for each respective wrapper roll to the
time the stepped portion of said strip will pass each said
respective wrapper roll; and
(d) means responsive to said reaction signals and operatively
coupled to said hydraulic cylinders operative to cause
each said hydraulic cylinder to be energized to retract the
wrapper roll associated therewith away from said mandrel
4,380,166
TESTING APPARATUS FOR A DUAL PRESSURE
INDICATOR AND CONTROL UNIT FOR
PASTEURIZATION EQUIPMENT
Robert A. Crombie, 521 Cowles Ave., Joliet, 111. 60435
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 237,687, Feb. 23, 1981,
abandoned. This application Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,188
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/00
U.S. a. 73— 4R _ lOOaims
J
,1-
r? —
Sl"t-J . t-- UK
^
^L
.'7b'
IZiu
ir '
1. Testing apparatus for a dual pressure indicator and control
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
565
unit oFthe kind used to monitor and control pasteurizing equip-
ment, said unit having two pressure ports with indicating
means associated therewith, said unit also having a control
switch operable in response to a predetermined pressure differ-
ential between said ports, said ports being connected in use to
pressure sensors at a pasteurized product outlet and a raw
product inlet respectively in such pasteurizing equipment, said
testing apparatus comprising:
valve means;
an input line at the input side of said valve means and
adapted to be connected to a fluid pressure source;
two output lines at the output side of said valve means and
adapted to be connected respectively to the two pressure
ports of a pasteurizing system dual pressure indicator and
control unit;
two pressure regulators;
a pressure gauge on the output side of each pressure regula-
tor;
means for selectively placing said valve means either in a
tracking test mode or a differential test mode;
said valve means in said tracking test mode connecting both
of said output lines to said input line through a single one
of said pressure regulators to thereby apply identical
pressures determined by said one pressure regulator to
said output lines; and
said valve means in said differential test mode connecting
said output lines to said input line through respective ones
of said two pressure regulators to thereby apply pressures
determined by said respective pressure regulators to said
output lines.
4^80,167
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A
FRACTION OF A GAS
Richard L. Longini, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to Energy Con-
trols, Inc., Denver, Colo.
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,108
Int. a.3 COIN 29/02
U.S. a. 73—24 5 Oaims
34
Vo--^ Output
Thrittiold
Dtttctor
J2-^Amplifi«r 1 i S\
rf
20
ClJ'
2S ,
Fiil«r
PhOM
Control
1. An apparatus for detecting a fraction of a gas in a carrier
gas when water vapor is present comprising:
(a) whistle means which has a resonant frequency and
through which the gas and the carrier gas are passed, the
resonant frequency changes as a function of the fraction of
the gas, a temperature of the gas, and the water vapor and
produces a whistle means output signal which is a function
of the resonant frequency;
(b) correction means which senses the water vapor and the
temperature and produces a correction means output
signal which is a function of the water vapor and the
temperature; and
(c) receiving means receiving the whistle means output
signal and the correction means output signal and produc-
ing an output signal which is only a function of the frac-
tion of the gas, the receiving means having:
(i) a timer means which produces a timer means output
signal for a preset time; and
(ii) a counter means receiving the whistle means output
signal, correction means output signal and the timer
means output signal and producing an output signal
which is only a function of the fraction of the gas.
4,380,168
SODIUM LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEM AND
METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME
Hidefumi Ibe, Katsuta, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,029
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 12, 1979, 54-87499
Int. a.3 GOIM 3/18
U.S. a. 73—40.5 R 11 Claims
■~^.
I-"
'\'
orTCTTN
1. A sodium leakage detection system comprising:
at least one sodium flow path;
a plurality of first sampling tubes for sampling surrounding
gas at various F>oints along said at least one sodium flow
path and for conducting gas samples obtained at said
various points away from said flow path;
a selector valve located at the gas exit ends of said plurality
of first sampling tubes for selectively connecting one of
said gas exit ends of said first sampling tubes with a second
sampling tube;
said second sampling tube being connected to said selector
valve for leading a sample gas passed through the selected
one of the first sampling tubes to a sodium leakage detec-
tor section;
said sodium leakage detection section including means for
detecting sodium leaked from the sodium fiow path and
contained in the sample gas in the vapor phase, said means
including a pressure difference detector for detecting a
difference between gas pressures before and after a filter
disposed in a gas sample flow path within said detection
section and a sodium ionization detector, disposed in
parallel with said pressure difference detector with re-
spect to said gas sample fiow path, for determining the
content of sodium ion contained in the sample gas; and
a fiushing section for Hushing inner walls of said selector
valve and said second sampling tube each time the con-
nection between one of said sampling tubes and said selec-
tor valve is changed over.
4,380,169
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING
MOISTURE TENSION IN LEAVES OF GROWING
PLANTS
Ellis R. Graham, Columbia, Mo., assignor to The Curators of the
University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo.
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,765
Int. a.' GOIN 27/00
U.S. a. 73—73 2 Claims
1. A method for measuring moisture tension in a leaf of a
growing plant by means of an instrument having a pair of
separable jaws with a standard light source mounted on one
jaw and a photoelectric detector mounted on the other jaw,
with both connected to a digital panel meter, the steps com-
prising:
initially squeezing the jaws together, without a leaf present,
to bring the light source into coincidence with the detec-
566
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
tor to establish an initial intensitjf of light transmitted to
the detector and display on the meter;
placing a leaf between the jaws and squeezing said jaws
together to measure the light intensity transmitted
through said leaf and displayed on said meter; and
comparing the measurements made with some predeter-
mined standard measurements for the particular plant leaf
of interest.
4,380,170
PROCESS FOR THE CHEMICAL PLOTTING OF
BOUNDARY LAYER FLOWS, AND CHEMIGRAPHY
MATERIALS FOR THE PRACTICE THEREOF
Richard Dotzer, Nuremberg, and Winfried Plundrich, Kal-
chreuth, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens
Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 168,245
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 16,
1979, 2928690
Int. a.' GOIM 10/00
U.S. CI. 73—147 11 Claims
surface of a circuit board received in the connector, said device
comprising:
a housing having two mating rigid metallic members defin-
ing a cavity therebetween, said members together having
an outer profile enabling insertion of the device into said
connector, one of said members having at least one pair of
elongated slots defining therebetween at least one beam
supported at both ends and disposed over said cavity, each
said at least one beam being profiled to accommodate a
terminal, and
a pair of strain gauges applied to each end of each said beam,
means interconnecting said strain gauges of each beam in
a respective balanced bridge configuration whereby when
the device is inserted into the connector a respective
terminal contacts and applies force normal to the surface
of and intermediate the ends of a beam causing a differ-
ence in voltage output from said strain gauges in said pairs
of strain gauges which difference is summed to give an
indication of the force applied by said terminal in a direc-
tion normal to said beam.
l^A process for the chemical plotting of boundary layer
flows of liquids over a surface, comprising:
(a) providing said surface with a colorless, uncompacted or
partially compacted anodically oxidizied aluminum layer
thereon;
(b) adding to said liquid a visible dye includable and adsorb-
able in said aluminum layer; and
(c) exposing said surface to the flow of said liquid such that
the dye contained therein is adsorbed in said aluminum
layer to a degree characteristic of the flow of liquid there-
over.
4,380,171
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING
NORMAL CONTACT FORCES IN ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
Terry J. Smith, Ephrata, Pa., assignor to AMP Incorporated,
Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,926
Int. a.J GOIL 1/22. 5/00
U.S. a. 73—161 4 Qaims
1. A device for measuring the force of an electrical terminal
mounted in an edge board connector and applied normal to the
4,380,172
ON-LINE ROTOR CRACK DETECTION
Imdad Imam, Schenectady, and Leslie H. Bemd, Altamont, both
of N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company, Schenectady,
N.Y.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,007
Int. C\? GOIH 1/00; GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 73—659 11 Qaims
1. For a motive fluid powered turbine, a method for detect-
mg incipient cracks in the turbine rotor while the turbine is
under load at substantially normal operating speed, comprising
the steps of:
(a) obtaining from at least one vibration sensor, adapted to
sense vibrations in said rotor, a signal representation of
such vibrations;
(b) determining the s[>ectral distribution of said vibration
signal;
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
567
(c) causing a transient perturbation of said rotor to establish
a transient vibratory response therein by changing the
temperature of the turbine motive fluid;
(d) determining the spectral distribution of said vibration
signal resulting during said transient vibratory response,
and
(e) comparing the spectral distribution obtained in step (b)
with the spectral distribution obtained in step (d), the
change in spectral distribution between that of step (b) and
that of step (d) being indicative of the presence and size of
cracks in said rotor.
4,380,173
ROLL-UP TYPE U-TUBE MANOMETER
David A. Wozniak, Michigan City, Ind., assignor to Dwyer
Instruments, Inc., Michigan City, Ind.
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,215
Int. a.3 GOIL 7/18
U.S. a. 73—747 5 Qaims
.-» 1.
the respective flanges, whereby said scale member is fric-
tionally retained in selected zero adjust positions within
said scale slideway,
said scale indicia including at the midlength portion of said
scale a datum zero marker means on each of said scale side
portions and aligned transversely of said scale,
means for connecting said body tubes at the lower end of
said body,
means for connecting said tubes at the upper end of said
body to locales of fluid pressure to be measured manome-
ter style,
said tubes being substantially half filled with fluid pressure
measuring liquid manometer style whereby when said
manometer is vertically disposed in rectilinear relation
and said means for connecting said tubes to the fluid
pressure locales is vented for both tubes, the levels of said
liquid in said tubes are horizontally aligned,
and a knob fixed to said scale member adjacent to said datum
zero marker means and projecting forwardly from said
scale member forwardly projecting side through and
between said flange edge portions,
whereby when said levels of said liquid in tubes are horizon-
tally aligned under said vented conditions, said scale mem-
ber may be moved longitudinally of said slideway by the
user of said manometer grasping said knob with one hand
and eye leveling said scale member datum zero marker
means with said horizontally aligned tubes liquid levels to
zero set said manometer free of finger pressure application
to said scale member at the ends of same.
4,380,174
APPARATUS FOR SHEAR TESTING WELDS
Joseph M. Tanenbaum, 4 Dewboume Ave., Toronto, Ontario,
Canada (MSP 1Z2)
Division of Ser. No. 179,634, Aug. 20, 1980. This application Jul.
21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,535
Claims priority, application Canada, Aug. 15, 1980, 358388
Int. C\? COIN 3/24
U.S. CI. 73—842 5 Claims
1. A flexible U-tube manometer of the roll-up type compris-
ing, in combination:
an elongate flexible body formed from a transparent flexible
plastic material and defining a pair of spaced apart tubes
extending longitudinally of said body and joined together
by a web integrally connecting same that ektends substan-
tially the length of said tubes,
said web defining a forward facing side surface on the front
side of said body and a rearwardly facing side surface on
the back side of said body,
said body along its front side and adjacent the juncture of the
respective tubes and said web defining a pair of continu-
ous flanges,
one of said flanges being disposed along one of said tubes and
the other of said flanges extehding along the other of said
tubes,
said flanges being in overlying, closely spaced relation rela-
tive to said web and each defining a continuous projecting
edge portion that parallels said body,
with said flange projecting edge portions being spaced apart
transversely of said body,
said flanges and said web defining therebetween a scale
slideway that is open between said flange edge portions,
an elongate flexible scale member mounted in said slideway
for sliding movement therealong,
said scale member comprising a length of spring steel of film
thickness dimensions that is arced forwardly of said body
web along the length of said scale member,
said scale member bearing manometer scale indicia on its
forward facing side and defining side edge portions there-
along on either side of same that extend longitudinally of
said body and that are respectively slidably engaged by
1. A device for non-destructively simultaneously testing the
shear strength of at least four welded joints presented by a
metallic truss having two spaced substantially parallel chord
members joined together by a substantially coplanar web mem-
ber bent into a substantially uniform undulating configuration
between said chord members so as to present a series of alter-
nate opposite apices at said bends welded to said spaced chord
members respectively along regularly spaced intervals longitu-
dinally of said chord members, said device including;
(a) means for simultaneously clamping said chord members
in at least four positions adjacent said welded joints, in-
cluding means for eliminating the twisting of said welded
joints from said plane defined by said web member during
said simultaneous clamping,
(b) and means for simultaneously applying a substantially
perpendicular force relative said plane defined by said
web member, for a selected timed interval, to at least four
of said apices defined by said bent web member, adapted
to test the shear strength of at least four of said welded
joints.
568
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,175 per (19) wifh joint (18) for receiving a neck of the sample
COMPENSATED LOAD CELL drawing recipient; the distributor-head including a common
Neil C.Griffen, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to Reliance Electric inner chamber (25) for said evacuation means including an
Company, Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,928
Int. a.3 GOIL 1/22. 25/00
U.S. a. 73—862.67 7 Qaims
4,380,176
ISOBAROMETRIC AND SELF-CONTAINED
APPARATLIS FOR SAMPLING PURPOSE ON GASEOUS
DRINKS
Gilbert Bauer, Mutzig, and Michel Maurer, Strasbourg, both of
France, assignors to Brasseries Kronenbourg, Strasbourg,
France
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,511
Oaims priority, application France, Feb. 5, 1980, 80 02743
Int. a.J GOIN 1/10
U.S. CI. 73—863.86 11 Qaims
1. A self-contained constant pressure apparatus for sampling
gaseous beverages, comprising a frame composed of a tripod
and a central inclined stand surmounted by an upper bloclc
provided with a handle, with the central stand comprising a
first support for a sample drawing recipient (20) and another
support for an mert gas bottle (7), and the upper block compris-
ing a distributor-head (16) including two taps (23,24) for admis-
sion and regulation of gas and liquid, an exit leading into a tap
(35) for pressurising said exit, a regulation valve (38) acting
upon distributor-head evacuation means and monitored by the
tap (35); the distributor-head at its lower face having an stop-
evacuation circuit (40), said apparatus including tightening
means (43) for applying said neck of the sample drawing recipi-
ent against the stopper (19)
2. A force measuring load cell arrangement comprising two
elongated beams having substantially parallel longitudinal
axes, means for rigidly connecting one end of the beams to-
gether, support means for rigidly connecting the other ends of
the beams together and to a force receiver, means for mounting
strain gages on the beams, at least one strain gage on one of the
beams being displaced toward one side of the beam in a direc-
tion transverse to the longitudinal axes of the beams, at least
one strain gage on the other beam being displaced toward the
other side of said other beam in a direction transverse to the
longitudinal axes of the beams, means for connecting the strain
gages m a bridge arrangement, means for connecting a resistor
to at least one of the strain gages on at least one of the beams
to cause the output of the bridge arrangement to accurately
represent the magnitude of a force applied to the force receiver
independent of any offset of the force relative to the beams in
at least the transverse direction.
7. A method of compensating a force measuring load cell
arrangement including two beams having substantially parallel
longitudinal axes and supporting a force receiving member, the
method comprising the steps of (1) placing at least one strain
gage toward one side of one of the beams in a direction trans-
verse to the longitudinal axes of the beams, (2) placing at least
one strain gage toward the opposite side of the other beam in
a direction transverse to the longitudinal axes of the beams, and
(3) connecting a compensating resistor to at least one strain
gage mounted on at least one of the beams to cause the re-
sponse of the load cell arrangement to be independent of the
location in at least the transverse direction of the force applied
to the force receiving member.
4,380,177
GEAR SHIFT CONTROL MECHANISM FOR
SERVO-DRIVEN TRANSMISSION
Erich Reinecke, Burgdorf, and Alfred Klatt, Wathlingen, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to WABCO Fahrzeug-
bremsen G.m.b.H., Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,524
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 1,
1980, 3007953
Int. Cl.^ G05G 5/04: F16H 57/06
U.S. CI. 74—475 6 Oaims
1. A gear shift mechanism for indirectly shifting the gears in
a gear unit via intermediate gear drive means comprising:
(a) a manually operable gear shift lever having first, second,
and third positions, said intermediate gear drive means
being operative to effect a change of gearing of said gear
unit in response to movement of said gear shift lever from
said first position to said second position;
(b) locking means manually engageable with said gear shift
lever in said second position thereof for preventing move-
ment of said gear shift lever to said third position; and
(c) gear change sensing means for operating said locking
means in response to completion of said gear change to
accordingly effect disengagement of said locking means
and thereby permit further movement of said gear shift
lever from said second position to said third position, by
which movement an operator of said gear shift lever is
apprised of completion of said gear change.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
569
4,380,178
REMOTE CONTROL ASSEMBLY (SWIVEL INSERT)
William G. Bennett, Troy, and Arthur L. Spease, Livonia, both
of Mich., assignors to Teleflex Incorporated, Limerick, Pa.
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,888
Int. a.3 F16C 1/10
U.S. a. 74—501 P 6 Qaims
1. A motion transmitting remote control assembly (10) of the
type for transmitting motion in a curved path by a flexible
motion transmitting core element (12), said assembly (10) com-
prising a flexible motion transmitting core element (12) having
a terminal portion, a conduit (14) for supporting said core
element (12), said conduit having an end portion, an end fitting
(16) disposed about said end portion of said conduit, (14) a rod
(24) attached to said terminal portion of said core element, (12)
a swivel tube (32) having a bore (34) therethrough for swivel-
ling movement relative to said end fitting (16) and movably
supporting said rod (24), said swivel tube (32) connected to
said end fitting (16) at a swivel joint (36) and having a front end
face (40) and characterized by said swivel joint (36) including
a male swivel portion (38) having a partially convex spherical
surface extending from its intersection with the exterior of said
swivel tube (32) to said front end face (40) of said swivel tube
(32) and including a cup-shaped insert (42) engaging said con-
vex spherical surface at least beyond said front end face (40),
said end fitting (16) encapsulating said end portion of said
conduit (14) and said insert (42) and the remainder of said
convex spherical surface on said swivel tube (32).
4,380,179
ENGAGEMENT DEVICE IN AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Seitoku Kubo, Toyota; Koujiro Kuramocfai, Okazaki, and Tatsuo
Kyushima, Toyota, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 190,034
Claims priority, application Japan, May 6, 1980, 55-58734
Int. C\? F16H 57/10. 37/08: F16D 65/78
U.S. a. 74—762 4 Claims
1. In an automatic transmission including a housing, a sun
gear, a ring gear and a carrier rotatably supporting a pinion on
a pinion shaft, said pinion meshing with said sun and ring gears,
the improvement comprising:
a hub secured to said carrier and extending radially outside
of and axially overlapping said ring gear, said hub having
a small diameter portion constituting an inner race and
having an axially adjacent large diameter portion having
external spline-teeth on the outer peripheral wall thereof.
the outer peripheral wall of said small diameter portion
• having a friction surface thereon;
a cylindrical outer race fitted on internal spline-teeth of said
housing and disposed radially outward of and axially
aligned with said inner race;
a friction element disposed radially between said inner and
outer races for engaging said friction surface on the outer
peripheral wall of said small diameter portion and said
outer race, said small diameter portion having a radially
running hole for conducting lubricating oil into said fric-
tion element;
a first brake axially adjacent said outer race, said first brake
including a plurality of said first friction plates axially
slidably fitted on the external spline-teeth of said large
diameter portion and a plurality of second friction plates
axially slidably fitted on the internal spline-teeth of said
housing, said first and second friction plates being inter-
leaved; and
a second brake axially adjacent said outer race opposite said
first brake, said second brake including a plurality of third
friction plates, and a plurality of fourth friction plates
axially slidably fitted on the inner spline-teeth of said
housing, said third and fourth friction plates being inter-
leaved.
4,380,180
ENERGY STORAGE FOR INDEXING MECHANISM
James C. Foote, and Dennis R. Zander, both of 1669 Lake Ave.,
Rochester, N.Y. 14650
Filed Jun. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 155,689
Int. a.^B23Q 77/00
U.S. a. 74—821 1 Qaim
1. Indexing apparatus comprising:
a platform;
a work member movable relative to said platform along a-
plurality of spaced dwell positions;
drive means for intermittently moving said work member
between the dwell positions;
a plurality of first magnets on said work member and mov-
able therewith; and
a plurality of second magnets positioned on said platform
such that poles of said first magnets align with like poles of
said second magnets when said work member is in each of
the dwell positions, whereby the kinetic energy of said
work member approaching a dwell position is converted
to stored energy by said first and second magnets and the
stored energy is applied back to said work member as said
work member moves away from a dwell position.
570
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,181
STUD MANIPULATING DEVICE
Thomas W. Bunyan, London, England, assignor to Pilgrim Engi-
neering Derelopments Limited, Essex, England
per No. PCr/GB79/00161, § 371 Date Jun. 3, 1980, § 102(e)
Date May 14, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00672, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 17, 1980
per Filed Oct. 3, 1979, Ser. No. 193,189
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 3, 1978,
39129/78
Int. a.J B25B 29/02
U.S. a. 81—57.38 6 Qaims
1. A stud manipulating device for inserting a stud into a bore
in a workpiece. tensioning the stud, tightening a working nut
on the stud, or for slackening the nut on the stud and removing
the stud from the workpiece, the device comprising means for
engaging the working nut and interlocking with the nut against
relative rotational movement, first drive means coupled to the
working-nut engaging means and operable in use to rotate the
working nut, a top nut for securing onto the end of the stud,
second drive means operable to rotate the top nut, means for
raising and lowering the top nut, a hydraulic pressure member
located between the top nut and the workpiece and operable to
tension the stud by means of the top nut, stud engaging means
engagable with the stud to interlock with the stud against
relative rotational movement, means for raising and lowering
the stud-engaging means, and clutch means operable between
the second drive means and the stud engaging means and
which IS engaged when the top nut is in a raised position and
the stud-engaging means is in a lowered position, to couple the
stud engaging means in rotation with the second drive means.
4,380,182
ARRANGEMENT FOR REPLACEABLY HOLDING A
STRIPPER OF A TOOL HOLDER OF THE TOOL, AND A
REPLACING TOOL FOR REPLACING THE STRIPPER
Walter Bredow, and Gerhard Otto, both of Alfeld, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to C. Behrens AG, Alfeld, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,966
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 15,
1980, 3005613
Int. a.J B21D 45/00
U.S. a. 83—140 21 Oaims
1. A stripper arrangement for a working tool having an axis,
such as a revolving tool of a revolving cutting press, compris-
ing a stnpper; a stripper shoe arranged to be mounted on a
lower side of a tool holder of a tool and having an inner open-
ing for receiving said stripper and a wall which bounds said
opening and includes an abutment wall portion, said opening
being arranged so that said stripper can be inserted into the
same by movement in a plane transverse to the axis of the tool
and abut against said abutment wall portion in inserted condi-
tion; means for retaining said stripper in said opening of said
stripper shoe and including a retaining member which is de-
flectable in direction from the tool to an operative position in
which said retaining member engages with said stripf)er in-
serted in said opening of said stripper shoe so as to retain said
stripper in said opening, and displaceable to an inoperative
position in which said retaining member does not engage said
stripper inserted in said opening, so that said stripper can be
withdrawn from said opening to be replaced by a new stripper;
and means for urging said retaining member so as to deflect the
same from the tool to said operative position.
4,380,183
PLASTICS TRIM PRESS SHEET FEEDING
MECHANISMS
Fred L. Greynolds, Beaverton; Robert C. Whiteside, Harrison,
and Doyle D. Durkee, Beaverton, all of Mich., assignors to
Leesona Corporation, Beaverton, Mich.
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,572
Int. CI.' B26F 1/40; B65H 17 /i6. 17/40
U.S. CI. 83—244 21 Claims
1. In a trim press for trimming articles integrally formed in
uniformly spaced succession in a sheet of thermoplastic mate-
rial from said sheet, said press comprising a frame, cyclically
actuated die means for trimming said articles from said sheet,
said sheel having uniformly spaced feed tabs thereon, and
cyclically operable feed means engageable with said tabs for
feeding said sheet in step-by-step movement to said die means
in synchronism with the actuation of said die means; the im-
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
571
provement wherein said feed means comprises treadle means
mounted adjacent its upper end upon said frame for pivotal
movement about a first horizontal axis, slide means mounted
on said treadle means adjacent the lower end thereof for recip-
rocation along a first path normal to said first axis, feed finger
means mounted on said slide means, a first rotary member,
mounting means mounting said first rotary member on said
frame for rotation about a second axis parallel to said first axis,
first link means pivotally connected at one end to said first
rotary member at a location offset from said second axis and
pivotally connected at its opposite end to said slide means to
cyclically reciprocate said slide means along said first path in
response to rotation of said first rotary member, a second
rotary member mounted on said frame for rotation about a
third axis parallel to said first axis, second link means pivotally
connected at one end to said second rotary member at a loca-
tion offset from said third axis and pivotally connected at its
opposite end to said treadle means adjacent the lower end
thereof for pivotally oscillating said treadle means about said
first axis upon rotation of said second rotary member, and first
drive means for driving said first and second rotary members in
continuous rotation synchronized with the actuation of said die
means.
4,380,184
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
Tetsuhiko Kaneaki, Ashiya; Kazuhiko Murase, and Junnosuke
Shigeta, both of Hirakata, all of Japan, assignors to Matsu-
shita Electrical Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,152
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 17, 1980, 55-51216;
Apr. 18, 1980, 55-52035
Int. a.3 GIOH 5/06
U.S. a. 84—1.01 7 Claims
J
It ■
1. An electronic musical instrument comprising; a generator
assigner which outputs assignment signals composed of note
data representing the name of the particular note whose tone
signal has been designated by a particular key stroke, and
octave data representing the octave number of the selected
tone; and at least one tone generator which has at least one
pitch signal generating means and at least one octave control-
ling means, wherein said pitch signal generating means is con-
trolled by said note data and generates the highest frequency
pitch signal corresponding to the note name of the tone se-
lected, and wherein at least one of said at least one tone genera-
tors produces plural signals by dividing said highest frequency
pitch signal, and wherein said octave controlling means is
controlled by said octave data and selects pitch signals from
said plural signals, and said pitch signals have octave numbers
corresponding to the tone selected, and said octave controlling
means contains means for modifying the octave number of the
pitch signals in accordance with said note data.
4380,185
TALKING METRONOME
Gayle Holcomb, Frankfort, Ky., assignor to V-T Rhythms, Inc..
Frankfort, Ky.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,627
Int. Q\? GIOF l/OO
U.S. a. 84—1.03 12 Qaims
J I t 1 1 1 J j_/
.-S'
ir '— ^ / i *"
H i
:^J<^-
1. A metronome comprising:
(a) means for selecting a tempo at which human voice pat-
terns will be reproduced, the selected tempo being van-
able between a minimum and a maximum frequency;
(b) means for selecting a combination of time signature beat
pattern at which the human voice patterns will be pro-
duced; and
(c) means responsive to the means for selecting a tempo and
the means for selecting a combination of time signature
and beat pattern for producing a human voice pattern
comprised of a sequence of successive numbers enunci-
ated at the selected tempo and time signature and beat
pattern, the frequency of enunciation of the successive
numbers per measure of the selected time signature and
beat pattern being equal to the selected tempo and the
successive numbers enunciated per measure being a func-
tion of the selected time signature.
4,380,186
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FABRICATING
PIPELESS EXPLOSIVE AND PROPELLANT CHARGES
Richard Biihrer, Than, Switzerland, assignor to Schweizeriscbe
Eidgenossenschaft, represented by Eidg. Munitionsfabrik
Than der Gruppe fiir Riistungsdienste, Thun, Switzerland
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,629
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 15, 1980,
6889/80
Int. a.' F42B 1/00
U.S. Q. 86—20 D 13 Claims
1. An apparatus for fabricating pipeless explosive charges
and propellant charges of a predetermined spatial configura-
tion and composition by molding, wherein the solidification
phenomenon within the melt is performed with increasing
delay from the bottom towards the top, comprising:
an insulation sleeve arranged externally of a mold intended
to receive the charge;
said insulation sleeve being structured to possess a radial
thermal conductivity which in any horizontal plane is at
least approximately equal to the radially outflowing quan-
tity of heat in the cross-section of the same horizontal
plane; and
said quantity of heat being released during the solidification
of the melt.
572
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
11. A method for fabricating pipeless explosive charges and
propel lant charges comprising the steps of:
heating an insulation sleeve containing a heat carrier for at
least one hour to at least the melting temperature of a heat
storage;
casting the charge into a casting mold; and
cooling the casting mold during at least two temperature
steps.
4,380,187
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING
LIFE-SUSTAINING AIR TO PERSONS ENTRAPPED
WITHIN A BURNING BUILDING
Edward A. Wicks, 93 Long Ridge Rd., Danbury, Conn. 06810
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,903
Int. a.J F24F 7/06
U.S. a. 98—39 21 Qaims
21. A system for providing pressurized air to preselected
rooms in a building for sustaining the life of occupants trapped
therein by a fire, said system utilizing at least one of the water
feed pipes supplying water to the rooms of the building for
supplying air to said rooms, said system comprising:
a source of pressurized air adapted to be selectively coupled
in fluid flow relationship to at least one of the water feed
pipes that supplies water to said preselected rooms, the
pressure of said air frof^^d source being greater than the
normal water pressure ]^ithin said at least one water feed
pipe to which said source is selectively coupled, and
means for feeding s^a pressurized air from said source
through said at least one of the water feed pipes for pro-
viding said air from said source to said preselected rooms
in the event of a fire,
whereby life sustaining air from said source can be provided
to said preselected rooms through said at least one water
supply feed pipe.
4,380,188
HEAT-RETARDING AIR DISTRIBUTION UNIT
Richard K. Nichols, Huntsvilie, Ala., assignor to Barber-Colman
Company, Rockford, III.
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,300
Int. Q\? F24F li/08
U.S. a. 98— 40D 13aaiiiis
1. A heat-retarding air distribution unit comprising a down-
wardly opening box made of sheet metal, said box having a
generally rectangular and horizontal top wall and having side
walls depending from said top wall, an air inlet opening in said
top wall, a damper disposed adjacent said opening and nor-
mally located in an open position, means for causing said
damper to close said opening automatically when the tempera-
ture therein exceeds a predetermined value, a grille secured to
the lower end of said box adjacent the lower margins of said
side walls and operable to diffuse air flowing downwardly
through said box from said inlet opening, a relatively rigid top
panel of heat insulating material lining the upper side of said
top wall, relatively rigid side panels of heat insulating material
lining the outer sides of said side walls, an outwardly project-
ing lip formed intergrally with the lower margin of each of said
side walls, the lower edges of said side panels resting on said
lips, and means for securing said panels to said walls, said
securing means comprising a rectangular array of inverted
L-shaped bars, said bars having horizontal flanges overlying
said top panel and having vertical flanges lying alongside the
outer sides of said side panels, and screws extending through
the horizontal flanges of said bars, through said top panel and
threaded into the top wall of said box.
4,380,189
INDUSTRIAL CHIMNEYS WITH FORCED DRAUGHT
Jean-Francois Vicard, Lyons, France, assignor to Societe Lab,
Lyons, France
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,442
Claims priority, application France, May 9, 1980, 80 10971
Int. Q\? F23L 17/02
U.S. Q. 98—58 1 Claim
1. A forced-draught chimney for the discharge of gaseous
products from a source into the atmosphere, comprising:
a substantially vertical column having a l<^er end and an
upper end, and the column defining an inner space having
a first inner diameter at its upper end;
a substantially vertical discharge nozzle extending coaxially
upwardly from said column, the nozzle having a lower
portion joining the upper end of the column and having an
opening therethrough communicating with the inner
space of the column, the lower portion of the nozzle
opening being rounded to decrease upwardly from a
lower inner diameter of the nozzle equal to said first diam-
eter of the column to a second inner diameter of the upper
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
573
portion of the nozzle which is smaller than said first diam-
eter;
an outer wall surrounding and enclosing the upper end of the
column and defining with the column an intermediate
annular space which is closed at the top of the column;
the upper end of the column having around its entire periph-
ery centripetally directed apertures extending there-
through immediately below the rounded lower portion of
the nozzle, and communicating from the intermediate
space mto the inner space of the column where it joins the
nozzle;
3X)
&V^
13
means operative to force gaseous products under pressure
into the inner space of the column; and
means operative to force an auxiliary gas under pressure into
the intermediate space, the auxiliary gas pressure being
slightly greater than the pressure of the gaseous products
in the column to cause said auxiliary gas to flow centripe-
tally through said apertures and thereafter to surround
said gaseous products with a continuous thermally-insulat-
ing sleeve and to rise with said gaseous products upwardly
through the decreased diameter nozzle which transforms
static gas pressures into upward kinetic energy.
4,380,190
COOKING CONE
Robert J. Adamis, 3425 Monterrey St., San Mateo, Calif. 94403
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,878
Int. a.5 A47J 37/04
U.S. a. 99—345 4 Qaims
1. A cooking cone comprising:
a hollow frustro-conical body open at its larger bottom and
at its top to permit the rising of heated air through the
inside thereof;
an annular dish around the bottom of said cone to accommo-
date portions of food to be basted by juices dripping from
the food along the exterior of said conical body;
said dish being formed on an annular bottom plate integral
with and extending outwardly from the lower edge of said
cone;
a plurality of skewers;
a hook on each of said skewers for hooking over the edge of
the open top of said cone for hanging food around the
exterior body of said cone whereby said food is exposed
simultaneously to external and internal heat,
a source of heat applied to the bottom of said cone and said
dish.
4,380,191
DOUGH FORMING AND COOKING APPARATUS
Rafael C. Gallegos, 1018 E. 21st St., Santa Ana, Calif. 92706;
Antonio Gallegos, 9411 Brewer Way, Villa Park, Calif. 92667;
Robert M. Gallegos, 17961 Darmel PL, Santa Ana, Calif.
92705; Jess E. Gallegos, deceased, late of Santa Ana, Calif.,
and by Adeline Gallegos, legal representative, 1707 W. Flora,
Santa Ana, Calif. 92704
Filed Mar. 25, 1977, Ser. No. 781,434
Int. a.' A47J 37/12
U.S. CI. 99-404 15 Qaims
■::.^ ^
13. Apparatus for forming and cooking articles made from
material of dough-like consistency, comprising:
(a) means adapted to contain a fluid cooking medium at at an
elevated temperature;
(b) an endless belt means adapted for continuous operation,
(c) a plurality of convex porous mold members arranged on
a surface of said belt means;
(d) a web-like articulated continuous conveyor means
adapted to receive finite quantities of amorphous dough-
like material; said web-like conveyor means comprising an
endless belt of chain mesh, a continuous chain member
attached to and contiguous with each of the two lateral
edges of said chain mesh belt, and a plurality of bar mem-
bers arranged transversely across said chain mesh belt to
form a plurality of junctions between parallel portions of
said two chain members through said bar members;
(e) means for intermittently positioning consecutive portions
of said web-like conveyor means into operative engage-
ment with consecutive mold members arranged on said
continuous belt means to shape each of said quantities of
material of amorphous, dough-like consistency into arti-
cles of desired configuration, said engaged portions of said
conveyor and belt means thereafter moving into said fluid
cooking medium containment means;
(0 guide means arranged interiorly and exteriorly of said
fluid cooking medium containment means and adapted to
direct the transportation of said operatively engaged arti-
cle-containing portion of said conveyor and belt means
through said fluid cooking medium containment means in
a submerged position and to thereafter facilitate their
separation as they emerge from said cooking medium
containment means, said articles being removed on said
conveyor means in an attitudinal orientation promoting
optimal drainage and return of entrained fluid cooking
medium to the cooking medium containment means, said
guide means comprising continuous parallel rail members
arranged on opposite lateral sides of said apparatus, a
portion of each rail member being arranged within the
fluid cooking medium containment means, and the re-
mainder of each rail member being arranged exteriorly of
574
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
said containment means, and wherein said guide means
include a downwardly convergent, upwardly divergent
portion beginning in the vicinity where said operatively
engaged article-containing portions of said conveyor and
belt means begin their separation as they emerge from said
fluid cookmg medium containment means.
4,380,192
HOT DOG BROILER AND METHOD FOR MAKING
SAME
Mark N. Doren, Grand Rapids, Mich., assignor to Markson
Manufacturing Company, Grand Rapids, Mich.
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,740
Int. CI.^ A47J 43/18
U,S. a. 99—441 9 Qaims
8. An apparatus for broiling hot dogs and the like over an
open fire, comprising:
an elongate, rigid, rod having a handle attached to one end
thereof, and threads formed on the other end of said rod;
a plurality of baskets shaped to retain hot dogs therein; each
of said baskets including a closed end, and an open end
through which the hot dogs are inserted into said baskets;
said baskets having an identical shape, whereby the same
are interchangeable; each of said baskets having a support
wire extending laterally from the closed end and the open
end thereof for connecting said baskets to said rod; each
support wire having a bent over free end which forms an
eyelet shaped to receive said rod closely therethrough;
each wire support eyelet disposed at the open end of said
baskets being threaded over said threads, onto the other
end of said rod for non-fixedly connecting the open ends
of said baskets with said rod; and each wire support eyelet
disposed at the closed end of said baskets being positioned
on said threads in a side-by-side relationship; and
a pair of threaded nuts connected with the threaded end of
said rod on opposite sides of the closed end eyelets assem-
bled thereon, and being tightened thereagainst, whereby
said closed end eyelets are securely locked in place against
each other in a sandwiched fashion between said nuts,
thereby fixedly connecting the closed ends of said baskets
with said rod.
4,380,193
DEVICE FOR PREPARING CHOCOLATE
Jan C. Tadema, Bergen, Netherlands, assignor to Wiener St Co.
B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands
Continuation of Ser. No. 91,000, Nov. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,014
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Nov. 24, 1978,
7811567
Int. Q.^ A23G 1/04, 1/10
U.S. G. 99—452 9 Qaims
1. A device for batch treatment of ingredients for the manu-
facture of chocolate, which comprises the combination of:
milling means for gnnding a quantity of the ingredients and
mixing means for mixing the ground ingredients, first
means for continuously circulating the ingredients from
said milling means to said mixing means and second means
for continuously circulating said ingredients back to said
milling means from^ said mixing means whereby to form a
closed recirculating system in which the viscosity of the
ingredients tends to rise incidental to the milling and
mixing thereof during each cycle of circulation; and
dosing means for introducing a predetermined small amount
of viscosity reducing agent other than cocoa butter into
the circulating ingredients only when the viscosity of the
ingredients exceeds a selectable threshold value. '
4,380,194
APPARATUS FOR PRINTING INDICIA ON OBJECTS
Ned C. Carter, Chino, and Jerry W. Cramer, Upland, both of
Calif., assignors to Sunkist Growers, Inc., Sherman Oaks,
Calif.
Filed Oct. 12, 1978, Ser. No. 950,784
Int. Q.' B41F 17/34
U.S. CI. 101—35 6 Claims
3 H
2 -I
'..r
f-F^f'fCi'^ ~^']
hh/'^r^:
5
2 -*
1. In apparatus for printing indicia on objects in which a
conveyor successively transports the individual objects to a
printing station and a die roll in the printing station is synchro-
nously rotatable to successively move printing dies arranged
upon its periphery from an inking roll into printing engage-
ment with the objects as they are delivered to the printing
station, the improvement comprising:
a plurality of inking rolls each supported upon a drive shaft
and being adapted to be charged with inks having differ-
ent characteristics, said drive shafts being journalied on a
turret mounted on a manually rotatable supporting shaft
and in fixed circumferentially and radially spaced relation;
means for releasably locking said turret in positions of rota-
tion wherein a selected inking roll is in operative engage-
ment with the die roll;
means for establishing a driving connection with the drive
shaft of the selected inking roll in its operative position for
driving it in synchronized relation to the die roll; and
said locking means including adjustment means for circum-
ferentially varying the radial angular locked position of
the turret within predetermined limits in order to adjust
the engagement pressure between the selected inking roll
and the die roll.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
575
4,380,195
TYPE SETTING DEVICE FOR PRINTERS
Fumihisa Hon, Tamayama, and Mikio Miyiyima, Nishine, both
of Japan, assignors to Alps Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 155,147
Claims priority, application Japan, May 31, 1979, 54-
73643[U]
Int. aj B41J 1/24
V.S. a. 101—93.17 10 Qaims
of triiron tetroxide, 10 to 150 parts by weight of a binder, and
1 to 20 parts by weight of carbon black, said developer parti-
cles consisting essentially of nuclear particles composed of said
triiron tetroxide, said binder and a part of carbon black and the
remainder of carbon black crumbed on the nuclear particles,
and passing the water-resistant layer having the image of the
developer particles thereon between a pair of rollers whereby
the magnetic developer particles are tightly embedded in the
water-resistant coating layer and the water-resistant coating
layer is smoothened and rendered compact in said hydrophilic
ink-repelling portion.
1. A device for positioning a selected one of a plurality of
type elements carried on the circumference of a type wheel in
a printing position along a line to be printed, including a
ratchet gear connected for rotation with said type wheel, a
motor adapted to be driven continuously in one direction
during printing along said line, a drive gear connected for
rotation continuously with said motor, clutch means including
a first spring element connected to said ratchet gear for con-
necting the torque of said motor to said ratchet gear in a man-
ner normally rotating said ratchet gear in a first direction
during rotation of said drive gear by said motor to continu-
ously rotate said type wheel in said first direction but allowing
the torque of said motor to be disconnected from said ratchet
gear to enable the rotation of said ratchet gear to be stopped,
means operated electromagnetically for disconnecting the
torque of said motor from said ratchet gear and stopping rota-
tion of said ratchet gear when a selected type element is in a
printing position along said line, and means including a second
spring element engaged with said ratchet gear for allowing
free rotation of said ratchet gear in said first direction but
preventing rotation of said ratchet gear in a direction opposite
that of said first direction during operation of said stopping
means.
4.380,196
PLATE FOR LITHOGRAPHY OR OFFSET PRINTING
Yoshiaki Kato, Neyagawa; Akira Fushida, SuiU; Yasuo L'eda,
Kobe; Yasusuke Tohi, Sakai, and Tatsuo Aizawa, Osaka, all of
Japan, assignors to Mita Industrial Company Limited, Osaka,
Japan
Filed Apr. 15, 1977, Ser. No. 788,088
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 26, 1976, 51-46515
Int. a.3 B41N 1/14
U.S. CI. 101—453 5 Qaims
1. A plate for lithography or offset printing comprising a
flexible substrate and a water-resistant coating layer formed on
said flexible substrate, said water-resistant coating layer being
composed of a water-insoluble resin binder comprising 5 to
45% by weight of a wax and 55 to 95% by weight of a water-
insoluble resin, and dispersed in said binder, an inorganic pig-
ment capable of being rendered hydrophilic by an etching
treatment, said water-resistant coating layer including an oleo-
philic ink-supporting portion and an etched hydrophilic ink-
repelling portion, wherein said oleophilic ink-supporting por-
tion is formed by applying to said water-resistant coating layer
magnetic developer particles comprising 100 parts by weight
4,380,197
SAFETY AND ARMING DEVICE/CONTACT FUZE
Jefferson O. Eaton, Ridgecrest, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed May 26, 1978, Ser. No. 915,030
Int. a.' F42C 5/00. 15/00
U.S. a. 102—228 8 Oaims
-Jd- -t^-
1. A pneumatically operated safe and arm device for use in
an ordnance item in a fluid environment, comprising:
a housing having an interior chamljer;
a piston sealingly retained within said housing and dividing
said chamber into first and second volumes, said piston
including a rigidly attached output rod having a free end,
said piston and output rod being movable linearly between
first and second positions and resiliently urged toward
said first position;
a disk mounted to said housing and rotatable about an axis
between safe and armed positions, said disk including at
least two explosive paths, each path having at least two
exposed ends, and said disk being resiliently urged toward
said safe position;
resilient force transmission means linking said rod and said
disk for converting linear rod motion to rotational disk
motion;
dynamic pressure means communicating between said fluid
environment and said interior chamber for supplying fluid
dynamic pressure to said first volume;
static pressure means communicating between said fluid
environment and said interior chamber for supplying fluid
static pressure to said second volume;
first interlock means releasably engaging said rod in a lock-
ing position for preventing said linear rod motion, said
first interlock means being movable between said locking
position and a releasing position, and resiliently urged
toward said releasing position;
second interlock means releasably engaging said disk in a
jamming position for preventing rotation of said disk, said
second interlock means being movable between said jam-
ming position and a freeing position;
a roury solenoid attached to said housing, having a shaft
configured for rotation between preventing and enabling
positions, and being resiliently urged toward said prevent-
ing position, said shaft having first and second camming
1029 O.G.— 28
576
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
lobes contacting and operating said first and second inter-
lock means respectively in response to rotation of said
shaft,
disk latching means pivotally attached to said housing and
releasably engaging said disk in a storing position, said
disk latching means being pivotal between said storing
position and a tripping position, and resiliently urged
toward said storing position, for releasing said disk in
response to said output rod moving from said first position
to said second position;
instantaneous detonation means attached to said housing and
positioned in alignment with one end of one of said explo-
sive paths in said disk in said armed position for instanta-
neously detonating said one explosive path in response to
a first signal;
delay detonation means attached to said housing and posi-
tioned in alignment with one end of the other of said
explosive paths in said disk in said armed position for
delayably detonating said other explosive path in response
to a second signal: and
detonation output means attached to said housing and posi-
tioned in alignment with said other ends of said explosive
paths in said disk in said armed position for directing
detonation energy from detonation of at least one of said
explosive paths to the exterior of said housing; whereby
relative movement of said ordnance item in said fluid
environment results in fluid static and dynamic pressures
being applied to said piston, said relative movement at
velocities greater than a preselected minimum causing said
piston, enabled by release of said first interlock means, to
load said resilient force transmission means and trigger
rotation of said disk, thereby aligning an explosive train.
4,380 199
RAILROAD VEHICLE PEDESTAL WEAR LINER
George A. Thomson, and Robert Haynes, both of Burlington,
Canada, assignors to Thomson-Gordon Limited, Burlington,
Canada
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,833
Oaims priority, application Canada, Sep. 18, 1980, 360679
Int. aj B61F 5/32; F16C 27/02. 33/20
U.S. a. 105-225 3 Qaims
4 380 198
VEHICLE HAVING IMPROVED COUPLING SYSTEM
AND SYSTEM FOR ABSORPTION OF SHOCK ON
COUPLING
Eugene B. White, Jr., Park Forest, III., assignor to White Ma-
chinery Corporation, Joliet, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 40,855, May 21, 1979, Pat. No.
4,355,584. This application Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,053
Int. a.J B60F 1/04
U.S. a. 105-26 R 12 Qaims
1. A railcar moving vehicle comprising, in combination, first
frame means having mounted thereon a plurality of road and
rail wheels, engine and drive components, and an operator's
cab, second frame means having a pair of couplers mounted
thereon, one adjacent each end thereof for coupling with a
railcar to be moved, said second frame means being carried on
said first frame means and being vertically movable relative to
said first frame means, whereby upon elevating said second
frame nieans said coupler means may be raised beneath the
coupler of a railcar to be moved thereby transferring a portion
of the weight of such railcar to said second frame means, and
means for raising and lowering said second frame means rela-
tive to said first frame means.
1. A railroad vehicle pedestal wear liner for attachment to
the pedestal leg of a truck of a railroad vehicle which includes
a journal box having a journal box wear plate facing said
pedestal leg, said pedestal wear liner comprising a unitary
metallic support structure generally U-shaped in cross section
with a central web portion and a pair of mounting legs for
mounting the pedestal wear liner on a pedestal leg; said central
web portion having a pair of fiat portions adjacent said mount-
ing legs and a central fiat portion outwardly offset from said
pair of flat portions, means in each of said mounting legs for
receiving fastening elements for securing said legs to the sides
of a pedestal leg and a solid, hard, elastomeric urethane po-
lomer forming a synthetic elastomer layer bonded to the outer
face of said metallic support structure, said elastomer layer
forming an outer fiat wear surface across the entire central web
of the metallic support and extending continuously over at
least part of said mounting legs and filling openings in said legs
to provide a mechanical interlock between the elastomer and
the metallic support.
4,380,200
CANDLELAMP-TABLE
James D. Reninger, 115 Fiesole St., Venice, Fla. 33595
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,203
Int. a.3 A47B 35/00
U.S. a. 108—23
9 Claims
1. A candlelamp-table comprising:
(a) a horizontal top;
(b) means for supporting said top above a supporting surface;
(c) a reservoir carried by and beneath said top and adapted
for holding liquid combustible fuel, said reservoir includ-
ing an outer shell and a liner adapted for holding said fuel;
and
(d) a candlelamp removably supported on said top and hav-
ing a wick extending upwardly and downwardly into said
reservoir.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
577
4,380^1
BANK CONSTRUCTION
Exsior Dion, 547 River Rd., Lincoln, R.I. 02865
FUed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,288
Int. a.3 E06B 9/04; E05G 5/02; G08B 13/00
U.S. a. 109—17
6 Oaims
82
I POLICE I
re
79.
(ESSj
■C^58
DO
I BUSINESS I 54
LIGHT
•OFF
NEXT TELLER
OOO)
ClOKD
■0 T~T
SHOT V5J
ABSORBER
4380,203
DEVICES GENERATING SYNCHRONIZING SIGNALS IN
SEWING MACHINES
Nereo Bianchi, Pavia, luly, assignor to NECCHI S.p.A., Paria,
Italy
FUed May 2, 1980, Ser. No. 146,126
Qainu priority, application Italy, May 3, 1979, 42906 A/79
Int. a.' D05B i/02
U.S. a. 112—158 E 41 Qaims
52
1. A constructional assembly for conducting improved bank-
41. In a sewing machine having a needle bar means capable
of transverse oscillation thereof relative to the direction of
fabric feed in said sewing machine, feed means for adjusting
ing transactions compnsmg a structure haymg a first area the length and direction of said fabric feed, first actuator means
generally accessible to customers and a teller s work area, said j.^^ adjusting the transverse position of said needle bar means in
areas separated from each other by a security wall, a plurality response to control signals provided thereto, second actuator
of separate, generally fully enclosed customer booths posi- ^^^^^ ^^^ adjusting the positional displacement of said feed
tioned along said security wall, each of said booths having ^^^^ -j, response to control signals provided thereto, roUt-
access thereto by a door opening into said first area, said door ^^^ ^^j^ sj,aft means operatively connected to said needle bar
closable and lockable from said teller's work area, signal means means for enabling said transverse oscillation thereof, and main
responsive to the closing of said door to signal a teller as to jrive motor means drivingly connected to said main shaft
readiness to transact business, communication means between means and said feed means for enabling sewing by said sewing
said teller and said customer, a portion of the security wall of machine; the improvement comprising means for generating a
said booth having a transaction passage therethrough, said stop control synchronizing signal to said main drive motor
passage mutually opening into said booth and said teller's area means, said generating means comprising a first magnetic
whereby business between the teller and the customer may be sensor means associated with said main drive motor means for
transacted, and means operable from the teller's area to close providing said stop control synchronizing signal thereto, and a
said passage, including teller operational control means for first magnet means disposed for synchronous roution with said
signalling a normal operational sequence including that the main shaft means for interacting with said first magnetic sensor
booth is available, that a customer is in the booth, that the means for a sufficient angular interval of rotation to enable
booth door is closable. that the booth door is closed and locked stopping of said main shaft means in a predetermined arc of
rotation of said main shaft means, wherein said generating
and for opening said door and initiating another sequence.
^ 4380,202
MIXER FOR DUAL REGISTER BURNER
Albert D. LaRue, Uniontown, Ohio, and John J. Wolf, Haver-
town, Pa., assignors to The Babcock A Wilcox Company, New
Orleans, La.
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,985
Int a.3 F23D 7/00
means further comprises a soft iron loop substantially sur-
rounding the area of interaction of said first magnet means and
said first magnetic sensor means for facilitating closure of the
magnetic path formed in said area and increasing the associated
fiux density within said area.
U.S. a. 110—263
4380,204
NEEDLE AND FEED CAM ARRANGEMENT FOR A ZIG
7 Qj^j^ ZAG SEWING MACHINE
Susumu Hanyu, Hachioji, and Akio Koide, Kokubuigi, both of
Japan, assignors to Janome Sewing Machine Co. Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,136
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 20, 1980, 55-19737[U]
Int. a.3 D05B i/02
U.S. a. 112—158 A 8 Claims
1. A sewing machine comprising a machine housing; a main
drive shaft (1) rotatably mounted in said housing for vertically
reciprocating a needle penetrating a fabric to produce stitches
therein; a shaft (4) extending transverse to the main drive shaft
and rotatably mounted in said housing; means (3) between said
main drive shaft and the transverse shaft for routing the latter
at a speed smaller than the routional speed of said main shaft;
a plurality of pattern cams (5) and a plurality of feed control
1. An improved fuel burner having a tubular nozzle with an ggms (6) mounted on said transverse shaft for roution there-
end plate attached thereto and a means for reducing the pres- vvith; first transmission means (19) operatively connected to
sure loss though the nozzle and inhibiting the formation of said needle and having a first follower (19a) adapted to cooper-
nitric oxides, the means comprising; a deflector located down- ate with a selected one of said plurality of pattern cams for
stream fuel flow-wise of the end plate and; controlling lateral swinging movement of the needle; fabric
a diffuser disposed within said nozzle having a shroud and a feed regulator means (55) tilubly mounted in said housing for
plug located downstream fuel flow-wise of the deflector, regulating the amount of movement of the fabric to be stitched
578
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
in forward and rearward direction; second transmission means
(42, Aid. 42e) for controlling tilting of said feed regulator
means, said second transmission means being operatively con-
nected to said feed regulator means and including a second
follower (39) adapted to cooperate with a selected one of said
plurality of feed control cams; and manually adjustable select-
?a 13 34
13a
, ?7 ?* i?33 41 31
11 .'I 12a •»0
>7 I I
. ^V^'
w
variable-speed drive unit and a working table that permits
overedge stitching said guidance apparatus comprising:
a shaft rotatably connected to said variable-speed drive unit
at one end thereof;
a driving pulley connected to the other end of said shaft;
an L-shaped member pivotally connected to said shaft;
said L-shaped member being pivotable laterally and verti-
cally relative to a plane of the working table of the sewing
machine,
pulley means rotatably connected to one end of said L-
shaped member,
a first means for locking the lateral movement of said L-
shaped member,
a second means for locking the vertical movement of said
L-shaped member, said second means being positioned
higher relative to the axis of said driving pulley when said
second means and said pulley are in their positions of
intended use, and
endless belt means operatively connecting said driving pul-
ley with said pulley means.
mg means (8, 7, 12, 13, 14) cooperating with said first and said
second transmission means for moving said follower of said
first transmission into cooperative engagement with a selected
one of said pattern cams (5) and for moving said follower (39)
of said second transmission means into cooperative engage-
ment with a selected one of said feed control cams (6).
4,380,205
GUIDANCE APPARATUS FOR A SEWING MACHINE
Masatoshi Nagane, Gotenba, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kai-
sha Fujimi Hoseisho, Sunto, Japan
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,303
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 23, 1980, 55-100910
Int. CI.' DOSE 27/00. 27/12
U.S. CI. 112-304 6 Claims
4,380,206
SHIP ROLL STABILIZATION SYSTEM
A. Erich Baitis, Stafford, Va., and Dennis A. Woolaver, Rock-
ville, Md., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,484
Int. CI.' B63B i9/06
U.S. CI. 114-122 7 Claims
hut uW
COMMA
*^ -riMST
,AfT JA!(,N r** COMMAW
-xf- |fi^
I **Vj.-_. '*.M U*
1 A guidance apparatus for a sewing machine having a
2. A ship stabilization system which utilizes the rudders to
compensate for wave and wind induced roll motions, com-
prises:
a hydraulic control means connected to the rudders for
controlling the position of the rudders;
flow control means connected to the hydraulic control
means for controlling the flow of hydraulic fluid in the
hydraulic control means to produce a predetermined
rudder movement;
a roll rate sensor for producing roll rate signals (a'); and
a roll reduction actuation means having a first input for
receiving said roll rate signal and a second input for re-
ceiving helm steering command signals and being con-
nected to the flow control means for forming a roll reduc-
tion control signal from said roll rate signal translating
said helm steering command signals and said roll reduc-
tion control signals into a control impulse for the flow
control means.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
579
4,380,207 opposite the securing means of the associated side edge por-
ANCHORING APPARATUS tion, said flexible element interconnecting each side edge por-
Edwin B. Nolt, New Holland, Pa., assignor to Sperry Corpora- tion and its associated suspension means being slidably
tion, New Holland, Pa. threaded through each said secunng means of each said side
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,697 edge portion and its associated suspension means for varying
Int. a.' B63B 21/24
10 Oaims
1. In an anchoring apparatus having a housing; a support
extending through said housing; a fluke movably mounted on
said support for movement relative to said housing between a
sea bed engaging position and a release position, the improve-
ment comprising:
a cam assembly movably mounted on said support for move-
ment between a first position and a second position, said
cam assembly having a first portion extending through
said housing and being movable relative to said fiuke;
a cam roller resiliently mounted with said housing for move-
ment toward and away from said cam assembly, said cam
roller being engageable with said first portion of said cam
assembly;
spring means connected to said roller to bias said roller into
engagement with said first portion and for releasably
holding said cam assembly in said first position;
actuating means connected to said cam roller and being
selectively operable to effect movement of said cam roller
away from said cam assembly to permit said cam assembly
to move to said second position, the release of the opera-
tion of said actuating means to permit said spring means to
urge said cam roller against the first portion of said cam
assembly effecting the return of said cam assembly to said
first position; and
limit means for limiting movement of said fiuke relative to
said cam assembly, said limit means being operable to
permit said fiuke to move to said release position when
said cam assembly moves to said second position and to
effect a movement of said fiuke to said sea engaging posi-
tion when said cam assembly moves from said second
position to said first position.
r.^;;:
so a
the distance between said side edge portion and its associated
suspension means, and adjustable means engaging the end
portions of said fiexible elements to limit reverse passage of
said fiexible elements through said securing means and thereby
adjustably fix the distance between each side edge portion and
its associated suspension.
4,380,209
WORKPIECE MOISTENING APPARATUS
Robert R. Reid, Stamford, Conn.; Edward Winkler, Armonk,
N.Y., and Stephen E. Girard, Milford, Conn., assignors to
Pitney Bowes Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,626
Int. a.' B05C 1/06
U.S. CI. 118—253 »2 Claims
4,380,208 ^
PORTABLE SEAT
Dean L. Goserud, 1981 Princeton Ave., St. Paul, Minn. 55105
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 281,233
Int. CI.3B63B 17/00
U.S. CI. 114—363 1* Claims
5. A portable seat for suspension between spaced supports
comprising a seating member having elongated rigid side edge
portions, suspension means associated with and spaced out-
wardly from each said side edge portion, and a flexible element
interconnecting each said suspension means with its associated
side edge portion, each said rigid side edge portion having
securing means on each end portion thereof and each said
suspension means including securing means longitudinally
spaced from one another, each said suspension means securing
means having an element secured thereto for suspending the
seat from a support, each said attached element being generally
1. Apparatus for applying moisture to a workpiece. said
apparatus comprising;
a. a brush including a base and a moisture carrier extending
therefrom, said moisture carrier having a free end for
contacting a workpiece to apply moisture thereto, said
base including a plurality of teeth; and
b. brush holding means including a plurality of teeth, said
brush teeth and said brush holding means teeth respec-
tively constructed and arranged for separable engagement
with each other for removably attaching said brush to said
brush holding means in one of at least two positions.
4,380,210
WORKPIECE MOISTENING SYSTEM
David R. Auerbach, Georgetown, Conn., assignor to Pitney
Bowes Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,627
Int. a.' B05C 1/06
U.S. a. 118—253 8 Cl"™«
1. In a machine including framework and means for dispens-
ing a moistenable workpiece, improved workpiece moistening
means comprising:
a. a source of supply of moistening fiuid, said supply having
580
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
an upper end and a lower end, means for pivotably attach-
ing the lower end of said supply source to said framework;
means for moving the upper end of said supply source
between a first position wherein said supply source is
inaccessibly disposed and a second position wherein said
supply source i» accessibly disposed;
J^-;;;^
c. applicator means removably mountable in said supply
source; and ^
d. means for disabling said moving means until said work-
piece dispensing means is disabled.
4,380,211
VACUUM EVAPORATION SYSTEM FOR DEPOSITION
OF THIN nLMS
Koichi Shinohara, Kobe, Japan, assignor to Matsushita Electric
Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,188
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1980, 55-129737
Int. a.' C23C 13/10
U.S. a. 118-718 4a.i™s
)1
4 -&J]
OUST
4380^12
ARRANGEMENT FOR UNIFORMLY COATING
SURFACES OF REVOLUTION BY VAPOR DEPOSITION
IN A HIGH VACUUM
Thaddiius Kraus, Triesen, Austria, assignor to Balzers AktJen-
gesellschaft, Liechtenstein
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,061
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 26. 1980
7216/80
Int. Q\? C23C 13/08
U.S. a. 118-720 17 Qaims
c' :5
\s
O'
• V '•7 .
O
1. An apparatus for uniformly coating a number of substrates
with surfaces of revolution by vapor deposition in a high-
vacuum container by means of at least one evaporative source
for producing a vapor stream comprising a structure for sup-
porting all the substrates to be coated which is rotatable about
a fixed axis, and at least one corrective mask for intercepting
the vapor stream and which also is rotatable about a fixed axis,
wherein the apparatus is structured so that:
(a) all substrate axes (Ai, A2) intersect at a single point (S);
(b) all substrate poles (?], P2) are equidistantly spaced from
the point of intersection (S) of the substrate axes;
(c) an axis of rotation (Ao) of the structure supporting the
substrates passes through the point of intersection (S) of
the substrate axes;
(d) an axis of rotation of the at least one corrective mask
coincides with the axis of rotation (Aq) of the structure
supporting the substrate, which structure rotates in oppo-
site direction;
(e) the distance between the evaporative source and the
point of intersection (S) of the substrate axes corresponds
to less than 15% of the distance between the point of
intersection (S) of the substrate axes and the substrate
poles (Pi, P2);
(0 the distance between the corrective mask and the sub-
strates corresponds to less than 15% of the distance (R„)
between the point of intersection (S) of the substrate axes
and the substrate poles (P|, P2); and
(g) the contour of the at least one corrective mask is deter-
mined empirically from the distribution of the vapor radi-
ation in the container space, to the effect that on a spheri-
cal surface on which all the substrate poles are located, an
even coating is produced.
1. A vacuum evaporation system for the deposition of thin
films comprising:
a blower and dust collector in communication through valve
means with an evacuated process chamber in which are
disposed at least one set of a film substrate holder and an
evaporation source whereby the gases in the evacuated
process chamber can be filtered while the vacuum is main-
tained.
4,380,213
ROTATABLE nSH CAGE
Albert Blair, and Patrick T. Grant, both of Aberdeen, Scotland,
assignors to National Research Development Corporation,
London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 122,490, Feb. 19, 1980, Pat. No.
4,351,268. This application Jan. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 342,802
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 21, 1979.
7906044
Int. a.J AOIK <5//00
U.S.a. 119-3 6 Qaims
1. A fish cage comprising perforated walls for the flow into
or out of the cage of ambient water in which the cage will be
located in use, said cage being substantially coincident with an
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
581
imaginary rectangular box having four long corner edges, a
plurality of water-tight control devices disposed along the said
four long comer edges which are coincident with the perfo-
rated walls of said cage and secured relative to said walls with
at least one said control device l)eing wholly immersed in the
tab detents both indicates the level setting of said feed
gate, and interconnects said plate with said housing.
4,380^15
LIQUID FUEL-HRED WATER HEATING TANK
Walton L. Mendelson, 3161 Yorkshire, Qeveland Heights, Ohio
44118
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,064
Int. a.' F22B 5/00
U.S. a. 122—13 R
2 Claims
VZ-O ^X ',gD
ambient water at any given moment, each said control device
having inlet and outlet valve means for allowing ingress and
egress of air and/or water to provide in situ control of the
overall buoyancy and/or the flotation attitude of the cage
thereby to allow buoyancy-controlled rotation of the cage.
4,380,214
FEED GATE FOR POULTRY CONVEYOR FEEDERS AND
THE LIKE
William R. Williams, Roswell, Ga., assignor to U.S. Industries,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,414
Int. C\? AOIK 39/01
U.S. a. 119—51 CF 12 Qaims
1. In a feeder unit for automated poultry systems and the like
of the type having at least one feed conveyor with a moving
feed carrier; said feeder unit comprising a housing through
which said feed carrier translates, means for adding feed to a
return area of said feed carrier, and an outlet trough disposed
downstream of said feed addmg means, the improvement of an
adjustable feed gate comprising:
a valve plate having means for slidably mounting the same in
said outlet trough for translation along a generally vertical
plane; said valve plate having a lower, free edge disposed
a preselected distance from the feed carrier in said output
trough for metering the flow of feed from said feed adding
means onto said feed carrier;
an adjustment tab attached to and moving with said valve
plate; said adjustment tab extending laterally from said
valve plate, and overlying an exterior surface of said
feeder unit housing;
means for detachably anchoring said adjustment tab to said
housing at selected vertical positions for varying the con-
veyor feed level from the exterior of said feeder unit; said
anchoring means comprising:
a plurality of detents spaced along a side edge of said
adjustment tab; and
a stop fixedly attached to said housing and having a por-
tion thereof shaped for mating reception in said detents,
whereby said stop in conjunction with said adjustment
1. A liquid fuel-fired water heating tank comprising housing
means including an upwardly extending annular housing wall,
an annular water receptacle in said housing means, said recep-
tacle including radially spaced apart coaxial inner and outer
side walls having corresponding upper and lower ends, said
outer side wall being spaced inwardly from said housing wall,
said receptacle further including annular upper and lower end
walls, said upper end wall being between said upper ends of
said side walls, said lower end of said outer side wall being
spaced axially below said lowe^jend of said inner side wall, said
lower end wall of said receptacle being between said lower end
of said inner side wall and said outer side wall at a location
providing an axial portion of said outer side wall below said
lower end wall, a planar bottom wall spaced below said lower
end wall, said bottom wall extending transverse to the axis of
said outer side wall and closing said lower end thereof, said
lower end wall of said receptacle together with said planar
bottom wall and said axial portion of said outer side wall defin-
ing a plenum chamber, said inner side wall opening down-
wardly into said plenum chamber and providing the only inlet
passageway thereinto, combustion chamber means extending
downwardly into said inner side wall of said receptacle from
said upper end thereof, liquid fuel-fired burner means including
burner tube means, means supporting said burner means above
said upper ends of said inner and outer receptacle side walls
with said burner tube means extending downwardly into said
combustion chamber means, whereby combustion gases from
combustion of fuel in said combustion chamber means dunng
operation of said burner means flow downwardly from said
combustion chamber means and through said inner side wall
means of said receptacle therebelow into said plenum chamber,
exhaust flue means including circumferentially spaced apart
fiue side walls extending upwardly along the outer surface of
said outer side wall of said recepUcle and an outer flue wall
between said flue side walls and spaced radially outwardly
from said outer surface of said outer side wall of said recepta-
cle, said exhaust flue means having a circumferentially narrow
inlet end opening radially into said plenum chamber through
said axial portion of said outer side wall of said recepUclc and
582
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
an outlet end adjacent said upper end of said outer side wall of
said receptacle and opening radially outwardly through said
housing wall, said exhaust flue means providing the only ex-
haust passageway for combustion gases from said plenum
chamber and said inlet end of said exhaust flue means restrict-
mg flow of said combustion gases from said plenum chamber
into said exhaust flue, removable baffle means including a
support member having a lower end resting on said planar
bottom wall of said plenum chamber, said support member
extending upwardly into said inner side wall of said receptacle,
a plurality of baffle plates axially spaced apart on said support
member along the length thereof, axially adjacent ones of said
bafRe plates being on opposite sides of said support member,
said bafTle plates being inclined downwardly and radially
inwardly of said inner side wall of said receptacle, the lower-
most one of said baffle plates being inclined downwardly and '
radially inwardly in the direction away from said inlet end of
said exhaust flue, said means supporting said burner means
including means removably mounting said burner means and
said combustion chamber means on said water receptacle, and
said combustion chamber means including coaxial first and
second tubular portions of refractory material, said first por-
tion surrounding said burner tube means and said second por-
tion extending downwardly into said passageway from said
first portion.
4,380,217
BREAKER POINT SYSTEM
Anthony E. Wasmer, and Stephen L. Koenigs, both of New
Holstein, Wis., assignors to Tecumseh Products Company,
Tecumseh, Mich. %
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,976
Int. a.^ F02P 17/00. I/OO
U.S. a. 123-146.5 A 25 Qaims
4,380,216
ECONOMICAL ENGINE CONSTRUCTION
William C. Kandler, New Holstein, Wis., assignor to Tecumseh
Products Company, Tecumseh, Mich.
Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,135
Int. a.^ FOIL 3/10
U.S. a. 123-90.65 20 Claims
1. In an internal combustion engine ignition system, an im-
proved contact point assembly for following a rotating cam
member and periodically interrupting ignition coil primary
winding current fiow inducing a high voltage ignition spark
producing surge in a secondary ignition coil winding compris-
ing:
an electrically insulating housing; '^
a fulcrum within the housing;
a lever arm within the housing having an electrical contact
near one end thereof and with the other end extending
beyond the housing to engage the cam member;
a threaded member passing into the housing and comprising
an adjustable stationary contact; and
a spring for urging the lever arm into engagement with the
fulcrum, the lever arm contact toward the stationary
contact, and the lever arm other end into engagement
with the cam member.
4,380,218
STARTING AID FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINES
Malcolm W. Munro, London, England, assignor to Lucas Indus-
tries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,474 -
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 2. 1980
8021633
Int. CI.' F02N 77/00
U.S. a. 123-179 H 9aaims
^
-\.^
~i I r -^n^ . . l^J*^■
. jt-
xz
n
1 In an internal combustion engine having a valve train
including a pair of stems and valves connected to each of the
stems for controlling intake and exhaust ports respectively of
the engine, cams for imparting reciprocating opening motion
to each valve by way of the valve train, and a spring for biasing
the valves closed and the valve train into tracking relation with
the cams, the improvement wherein the spring comprises a
coiled wire spring having an anchored central bight portion
and outwardly extending legs, each engaging one of the pair of
stems to urge the respective valves toward a closed position,
the cams for imparting reciprocating motion comprising a pair
of non-metallic radial cam surfaces shaft driven by a like pair of
non-meullic spur gears, the cams being driven by a common
spur gear fixed to the crankshaft of the engine which gear
meshes with each of the like pair of gears.
rt'^*A'.,<4it - .L^ . ^ jl^ 27 32
1. A starting aid for assisting the starting of an internal
combustion engine and of the kind which is located in the air
inlet manifold of the engine and to which liquid fuel is sup-
plied, the fuel being vapourised and ignited so that a flame is
produced which heats the air flowing to the engine, the aid
comprising a tubular body which is closed at one end, a fuel
inlet to the other end of the body, a stack of electrically insulat-
ing rings mounted about the body defining narrow gaps there-
between, said rings being formed from a material which can
withstand high temperature, an electrical heating element
wound about said rings, an aperture in the wall of said body
O
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
583
and through which fuel can flow to the peripheral surfaces of
said rings by way of the gaps therebetween, said element acting
to vapourise the fuel and means for igniting the vapourised
fuel.
4,380,219
VALVE DISABLING MECHANISM
Michael M. Walsh, Northville, Mich., assignor to Eaton Corpo-
ration, Cleveland, Ohio
Filed May 16, 1975, Ser. No. 578,295
Int. a.^ I-X»2D li/06
U.S. CI. 123—198 F 36 Claims
periphery thereof, a movable wall member disposed m
said opening, and means mountmg said movable wall
member for movement in said openmg;
(d) portions of at least certam of movable wall member,
inner body, and housing cooperatively definmg a fluid
intake and compression chamber, a variable-volume
power chamber, and a variable-volume fluid exhaust
chamber in said compartment during at least a portion of
orbital movement of said inner body,
(e) intake port means and exhaust porX means in said housing
communicating with said compartment,
(0 passageway means comprising:
»^.
1. A device for changing the fulcrum of an engine valve
rocker arm to selectively disable and enable the valve, said
device comprising:
support means adapted for attachment to the engine;
fulcrum means slideably mounted on said support means,
said fulcrum means defining a pivot surface adapted to
contact said valve rocker arm;
first means mounted for sliding movement with said fulcrum
means and retained against rotation relative to said sup-
port means, said first means defining a first abutting sur-
face;
second means rotatably mounted on said support member
and retained against sliding movement relative to said
support means, said second means defining a second abut-
ting surface for contacting said first abutting surface and
adapted to react engine valve drive tram forces which
effect normal opening of the engine valve; and
actuation means selectively operative to apply a force tn
rotate said second means to a valve enabling position
drivingly connecting said abutting surfaces for effecting
normal valve opening and closing in response to engine
valve train driving forces and selectively operative to
apply a force to rotate said second means to a valve dis-
abling position drivingly disconnecting said abutting sur-
faces for effecting disablement of said valve by allowing
movement of said surfaces relative to each other in re-
sponse to the valve train driving forces.
4,380,220
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
James R. Gurley, Rte. 5, Box 42, Rutherfordton, N.C. 28139
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 5,964, Jan. 24, 1979, Pat. No.
4,277,506. This application Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,309
Int. a.' F02B 53/00
U.S. CI. 123—226 17 Oaims
1. An internal combustion engine comprising:
(a) a housing defining an internal compartment having at
least one peripheral lobe;
(b) an inner body having at least one peripheral lobe thereon,
means mounting said inner body in said compartment for
non-rotational, orbital movement with said inner body
lobe disposed for movement within said housing lobe
during at least a portion of orbital movement;
(c) an opening located in said inner body inwardly of the
1
r
( 1 ) said intake and compression chambei with said intake
port means;
(2) said intake and compression chamber with said power
chamber; and
(3) said exhaust chamber with said exhaust port means
during at least some portions or orbital movement of said inner
body; and
(g; a power output shaft, and means operativeiy connecting
said inner body with said power output shaft to impart
rotational movement thereto during orbital movement of
said inner body
4,380,221
REGULATING DEVICE FOR A FUEL INJECTION PUMP
Franz Eheim, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,654
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 5,
1980, 3004035
Int. a.' F02M 59/20
U.S. a. 123—343 17 Qaims
fez —
6 5
1. A regulating device for the supply amount of a fuel injec-
tion pump for internal combustion engines including a housing,
a fuel injection pump suction chamber in said housing, a pump
piston, a pump operation chamber, a relief channel m said
pump piston which extends to said pump operation chamber,
584
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
an annular slide operative on said piston for opening and clos-
ing said relief channel in said piston, a quantity control element
fastening to said pump housing and including a rotary magnet
having an axis and further including means connecting said axis
to said annular slide to move said annular slide axially on said
pump piston to regulate fuel supply onset or end thereof by
opening or closing said relief channel of said pump operation
chamber, and an adjustment means positioned relative to said
quantity control element for moving said quantity control
element for adjustment of its position relative to said annular
slide while said engine is running.
4.380,222
FUEL INJECTION PUMP FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Anton Pischinger, Graz, Austria, assignor to Friedmann &
MaJer Aktiengesellschaft, Hallein, Austria
Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,240
Claims priority, application Austria, Oct. 15, 1979, 6716/79
Int. a.3 F02D 31/00
U.S. a. 123— 365 SQaims
u
1. Fuel injection pump for internal combustion engines oper-
ated with fuel injection in particular Diesel engines, of the type
in which fuel injection pump and fuel injection nozzles are
integrated to a constructional unit associated to one engine
cylinder, the pump having a housing and an internal pump
piston rotatable via a regulating member by a drive member for
adjusting the amount of fuel injected and being loaded by a
return spring acting on the pump piston against the action of a
piston drive member with interposition of a spring washer, the
regulating member being formed of a crank having a crank pin
parallely extending relative to the piston axis and being rigidly
connected to the piston or manufactured for forming with the
piston one single piece, the crank being arranged at the driven
end of the piston between drive member and spring washer,
and a control rod acting on the crank pin, characterized in that
the crank pin protrudes through an aperture in the front end of
the housing at the area of the driven end of the piston, said
aperture facing parallel to the direction of the axis of the pis-
ton, said crank pin being engaged by the control rod arranged
outside of the constructional unit formed of fuel injection
pump and fuel injection nozzle.
4,380,223
LIQUID FUEL INJECTION PUMPING APPARATUS
John R. Jefferson, Rainham, and Robert T. J. Skinner, High
Wycombe, both of England, assignors to Lucas Industries
Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,270
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 14, 1980,
8004951
Int. a.' F02M 59/30
U.S. a. 123—383 4 Qaims
1. A liquid fuel injection pumping apparatus for supplying
fuel to a turbo supercharged compression ignition engine and
of the kind comprising a housing, a rotary distributor member
located in the housing and adapted, in use, to be driven in time
relationship with an associated engine, a reciprocable pump
plunger located in a bore in the distributor member, a cam
located in the housing for imparting inward movement to the
plunger as the distributor member rotates, means for feeding
fuel to the bore to effect outward movement of the plunger,
passage means for con^'eying fuel from the bore to an outlet
during inward movement of the plunger, a movable member
operable, in use, to determine the maximum outward move-
ment of the plunger, means responsive to the pressure of air
delivered to the associated engine, in use, for determining the
setting of said movable member, said pressure responsive
means comprising a piston housed within a cylinder, means
coupling said piston to said movable member, a source of liquid
under pressure, a conduit connecting said source to said cylin-
der, and valve means operable to control the liquid pressure in
said cylinder and, in use, being responsive to the pressure of air
supplied to the associated engme, a restrictor in said conduit,
said conduit being connected to said cylinder downstream of
said restrictor, said valve means acting to control the flow of
liquid from downstream of said restrictor to a drain and com-
prising a seating, a valve member, resilient means acting on
said valve member to urge the valve member into contact with
said seating against the action of the pressure downstream of
said restrictor, and pressure responsive means subjected, in use,
to the pressure of air supplied to the engine, the force exerted
on said pressure responsive means by the air pressure acting to
assist the action of said resilient means.
4,380,224
IGNITION SYSTEM FOR AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Howard E. Van Siclen, Jr., Unadilla, N.Y., assignor to The
Bendix Corporation, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,720
Int. a.3 F02P 5/04
U.S. a. 123—602 9 Qaims
1. In combination with a internal combustion engine ignition
system having at least one spark plug, means for firing the
spark plug including a first solid state electronic switching
device, and a triggering circuit for switching the first elec-
tronic switching device for firing the spark plug comprising: a
second solid state electronic switching device, pulse generat-
ing means for generating a succession of electrical trigger
pulses in timed relation to the speed of the engine crankshaft to
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
585
trigger the second switching device electrically conductive
which switches the first switching device conductive, means
for biasing the second switching device, and means for auto-
matically controlling the voltage of the bias means, the im-
provement wherein the means for controlling the bias means
comprises:
\"
4,380,226
WINGED ARROW REST
Charles A. Saunders, Columbus, Nebr., assignor to Saunders
Archery Company, Columbus, Nebr.
FUed May 29, 1981, Scr. No. 268,629
Int. a.3 F41B J/00
U.S. a. 124—41 A 8 Claims
1 - "
! so
f
t
fMnne
#
a transistor connected in parallel with said voltage biasing
means; and
means for operating said transistor in the active region of its
ojjerating characteristics wherein its resistance varies.
4,380,225
VEHICLE ENGINE IGNITION SYSTEM UTILIZING
LIGHT GUIDES FOR PROTECOON AGAINST
INTERFERENCE
Jurgen Wesemeyer, Nuremberg; Georg Haubner, Berg, and
Werner Meier, Rednitzhembacb, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,566
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 3,
1980,3008066
Int. a.3 F02P 7/00. 7/00, 5/04. 5/06
U.S. a. 123—613 8 Qaims
■r "
1. An arrow rest for use in an archery bow having a rigid
mid-section including a sidewall,
said arrow rest comprising
substantially planar vertically extending panel means for
attachably securing said arrow rest to the bow,
bonding means for fastening said panel means continguously
to the bow on a sidewall thereof,
winged means for supporting an arrow shaft resting thereon,
said winged means having a top bearing edge for supporting
an arrow shaft thereon, said edge projecting laterally
outwardly and rearwardly from said panel means,
hinge means pivotally and resiliently securing said wing
means to said panel means at a generally vertically extend-
ing juncture of said wing means with said panel,
said hinge means defining a hinge line angled upwardly and
forwardly from a base of the juncture of said winged
means with said panel means,
said bearing edge of said winged means adapted to support
the arrow shaft of an arrow riding thereon and stressing
downwardly thereagainst,
weight and frictional forces applied to said winged means by
an arrow shaft riding forwardly therealong on said bear-
ing edge thereof causing said winged means to pivot
yieldingly and resiliently forwardly on said hinge means,
pivotal forward movement of said winged means about said
upwardly and forwardly projecting hinge line of said
hinge means, due to frictional drag of an arrow being
projected, effecting a simultaneous downward displace-
ment of said arrow-shaft-supporting bearing edge of said
winged means away from a general center line of an in-
place arrow to reduce frictional drag against an arrow
shaft riding on said bearing edge and facilitating and pro-
moting true flight of the arrow upon propulsion thereof
from the bow.
1. In a motor vehicle ignition system having an ignition coil
(16) an ignition system comprising:
light responsive switch means (18, 19, 20) in the vicinity of
said ignition coil connected to said ignition coil for inter-
rupting flow therethrough in response to a light signal;
control circuit means (11) in a vehicle location remote from
said switch means for generating a light signal at desired
ignition time instants;
and light guiding photoconductor means (24) for leading
light of said light signal generated in said control circuit
means over a path provided by said photoconductor
means to said light responsive switch means, whereby
signal transmission from said control circuit means to said
switch means is immune to electromagnetic and electrical
interference active in the space between said control cir-
cuit means and the vicinity of said ignition coil.
4,380,227
GRINDING WHEEL DRESSING APPARATUS
Nils Hoglund, #408B, 100 E. Linton BUd., Debay Beach, Fla.
33444
FUed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,081
Int. a.3 B24B 53/08
U.S. a. 125—11 PT 1 Claim
1. In an apparatus for forming contours on a grinding wheel
having a support, a housing pivotally mounted on said support,
two slides mounted in said housing movable parallel to each
other, a tool pivotally mounted on one of said slides, a follower
pivotally mounted on the other of said slides, a pivot member
mounted on each of said slides and said housing, a first link
mechanism connected to said pivot member for pivotally con-
necting said slides and said housing to determine relative linear
movement of said slides, a template mounted on said support,
S86
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
-_ April 19, 1983
said follower being adapted to contact said template, the pivot
axis of said housing, said tool and said follower lying in the
same plane, a second link mechanism connecting said follower
and said tool for controlling pivotal movement of said tool, the
improvement in said first link mechanism comprising:
a first Hnk pivotally connected at one end to said pivot
member mounted on said follower carrying slide;
r^4
J" '~
-^ — p
the secondary air from the first level and smoke products
from the second level whereby said porous or fiber-like
material may be maintained at a sufficient temperature by
contact and combustion of secondary air and smoke prod-
ucts which diffuse into the porous or fiber-like material for
sustaining ignition and secondary combustion of smoke
products in the second level in the vicinity of the porous
or fiber-like material, and for producing high temperature
products of secondary combustion in the second level at
the secondary combustion zone and downstream in the
exhaust outlet direction.
4,380,229
SOLAR RECEIVER PROTECTION MEANS AND
METHOD FOR LOSS OF COOLANT FLOW
Lyie E. Glasgow, Westlake Village, Calif., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the United States
Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,921
Int. CI.' F24J 3/02
U.S. CI. 126-418 9 Qaims
second link pivotally connected to said pivot member
mounted on said housing and the other end of said first
hnk: and
third link pivotally connected to said pivot member
mounted on said tool-carrying slide and the mid-portion
of said second link.
4,380,228
SUSTAINED IGNITION SECONDARY COMBUSTION
UNIT
Leslie B. Crowley, 3 Hamor PI., Bar Harbor, Me. 04609
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,036
Int. CI.' F24B 5/00
U.S. a. 126-76 32 Claims
L^ ^-J '0
340 33 34
j^:ja:^lz'.^r."ir.:'.fe'.f.:''.'.:-^.-/...'.-.-...r.-.rrv..v.-.?j^.. -r^-'A-rj
i ,37 i
*?iisu<^.m3tcj. ii^^i^T T"'-' ■ r-". ""iTy? ^'jTt^^^
\r
LTT^.k
n2::^Z3ErrtfeCT f^-^'wyjy-*
li
;:
,2S
» ^- al4.- J -
" !i S--3S
w.
>A' ■■■•
1. A sustained ignition secondary combustion unit for the
secondary combustion of smoke products from primary fuel
burning, either as a built in or retrofitted component of a fur-
nace or stove or as a self contained separate unit comprising:
first level means for conducting secondary air comprising a
secondary air inlet and channel;
second level means for conducting smoke products from
primary fuel burning comprising a smoke products inlet
and channel, secondary combustion zone, and exhaust
outlet, said outlet defining the direction of flow of second-
ary combustion products;
partition means separating the levels comprising a high
temperature material, said partition formed with openings
communicating between the levels in the area of the sec-
ondary combustion zone;
said openings between the levels being substantially sur-
rounded or bounded by a high temperature porous or
fiber-like material having surface area portions contacting
3. In a solar energy collection system having at least one
solar receiver for coupling reflected solar energy to a fluid
passing through said solar receiver, a reflecting means for
reflecting said solar energy to said solar receiver, a heat trans-
fer means for removing thermal energy from said fluid after
having passed through said solar receiver, a conduit means for
transporting said fiuid between said solar receiver, said heat
transfer means, and back to said solar receiver, and a pump
means for causing said fluid to flow through said condujt
means, a protection means for preventing said solar receiver
from overheating said fiuid should said pump means become
inoperative comprising:
a first fiuid storage means in fiuid communication with said
conduit means for storing a portion of said fluid prior, to its
passing through said solar receiver;
a second fiuid storage means in fiuid communication with
said conduit means for storing a portion of said fluid
subsequent to its passing through said solar receiver; and
means for maintaining a pressure differential between fluid
stored in said first storage means and said second storage
means whereby fiuid will fiow from said first storage
means, through said solar receiver, and into said second
storage means for a predetermined time after said pump
means become inoperative.
4,380,230
SCALP MASSAGING APPARATUS
Arden Williams, 3993 Plumcrest Cir., Smyrna, Ga. 30080
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,090
Int. Q\? A61H 7/00
U.S. a. 128—49 5 aaims
1. A scalp massaging apparatus comprising a pair of separate
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
587
complementary relatively movable helmet sections having
sponge-like inner surfaces and arranged to receive the head of
the user, yieldable biasing means arranged to bias said helmet
sections toward each other and toward the head of the user,
vibratory driving means mounted on a couch-like structure
arranged to support the body of the user in a reclined position
during use of the apparatus and including a pair of reciproca-
tory driving rods respectively interconnected with said helmet
sections and effective to impart reciprocatory movement
thereto thereby to massage the scalp of the user, an eccentric
4,380,232
WHISTLE ATTACHMENT FOR A SNORKEL, AND
SNORKEL-WHISTLE UNIT
James J. Doyle, 699 NE. 164th St., Miami, Ha. 33162
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,4%
Int. a.J A62B 7/00
U.S. a. 128—201.11 6 Qaims
driving element mounted on said couch-like structure and
interconnected with each of said driving rods near one end
thereof, each of said driving rods being pivotally connected at
the other end thereof to a support link pivotally mounted on a
support block mounted on a part of said couch-like support
structure, said support blocks are movably mounted on said
couch-like support structure, and an adjusting crank thread-
edly related with said support blocks so as to impart adjusting
movement thereto thereby to accommodate different head
sizes.
4,380,231
FOOT EXERCISER
Frank Rocha, c/o George Spector, 3615 Woolworth BIdg., 233
Broadway, and George Spector, 3615 Woolworth BIdg., 233
Broadway, both of New York, N.Y. 10007
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,764
Int. C\? A63B 23/04
U.S. a. 128—57 1 Claim
II ^
1 On a snorkel having a generally J-shaped lube with a
return bend at lis lower end and a mouthpiece at the extremity
of said return bend, said tube defining a passage extending
continuously from said mouthpiece to its upper end. the im-
provement which comprises:
means forming a side opening in said tube near its upper end
communicating with said passage;
a breath actuated whistle mounted on one side of said tube
near its upper end and having an inlet opening registering
with said side opening and thereby communicating with
said passage through said tube:
said tube terminating at its upper end in an unobstructed
opening leading up from its passage and extending across
substantially the full width of said passage to permit the
user to expel water which accumulates in the lower end of
the snorkel by flowing into the mouthpiece, and said
opening being closable by the user's hand to direct the
user's breath into the whistle when the user blows into the
mouthpiece.
4,380,233
CONTROL DEVICE FOR AN ARTIRCIAL RESPIRATOR
Luc Caillot, Paris, France, assignor to Synthelabo. Paris, France
Filed Dec. 30. 1980, Ser. No. 221,469
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 4, 1980, 80 000%
Int. a.' A61H n/00
U.S. CI. 128—204.21 ♦ Qaims
' 1. A foot exerciser, comprising in combination, a stand and
a roller supported rotatably free on said stand, and means
whereby said roller is eccentrically adjustable respective to a
rotational axis thereof wherein said stand is comprised of a pair
of inverted generally U-shaped legs each of which has a foot at
each end for standing on a floor, and a pair of cross bars be-
tween said legs; said roller being supported between said legs,
wherein a pair of axially aligned screws supported rotatably in
said legs are each screw engaged on a rectangular block in an
angularly inclined hole in said roller.
1. Control device for an artificial respirator, comprising: a
solenoid-controlled valve for air and a solenoid-controlled
valve for oxygen, both of said valves being of the vanable fiow
type as a function of the plunger travel, and discharging into a
manifold; a timebase circuit for fixing both the respiratory
frequency and the ratio I/E of the inhalation time to the exha-
588
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
lation time dunng each period; a mixer for fixing both the through which drops fall and in which drops accummulate a
overall respiratory fiow and the proportion of oxygen in the discharee device counled tmhl hotlrl^?^ !. u !L
gas supplied by the regulator: and two sianal ..Jrtt^r. ..^v. ^^^"^^ ''^^"^e '^""P'ed to the bottom of the drop chamber
gas supplied by the regulator; and two signal generators each
linked to and controlling the opening of an associated solenoid-
controlled valve; the timebase circuit output being connected
to inputs of said generators in order that they may control the
opening of the valves during the inhalation time, the genera-
tors being further connected to respective outputs of the mixer
for receiving signals corresponding to the extent of opening of
the valves during the inhalation period, the mixer being con-
nected to the timebase circuit for receiving a signal therefrom
corresponding to the ratio I/E to correspondingly adjust sig-
nals proportional to respiratory flow and oxygen proportion,
whereby the valves are opened to an extent such that during
the inhalation period, each valve allows a quantity of gas to
pass which corresponds to the mean flow rate during the
period.
4 380 234
INFUSION NEEDLE ATTACHMENT
Dean Kamen, Hooksett, N.H., assignor to Baxter Travenol
Laboratories, Inc., Deerfield, 111.
Filed Aug, 16, 1979, Ser. No. 67,058
Int. CIJ A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 60+-I80 4 aaims
for conveying the liquid to a utilization means, a metering
means associated with the drop chamber for determining the
drop rate, and drop rate control means to vary the drop rate,
the improvement in the drop forming means comprising:
a pair of coplanar and spaced apart plate members having
substantially parallel, planar facing end walls.
1. In combination with an infusion needle for achieving
subcutaneous placement thereof incident to the dispensing
therethrough of a medicament to a patient, an infusion needle
attachment comprising a disk-like body of a selected size ade-
quate for delineating an operative area for making provision
for the handling and for the positioning of said infusion needle,
a hollow tubular member bounding a compartment for receiv-
ing said infusion needle disposed in a peripheral location in said
operative area and at an angular orientation in relation thereto
so as to cause an infusion needle seated in said compartment to
project at said angular orientation in depending relation from
beneath said body, and an upstanding flap of a foldable con-
struction material foldably attached to said body along a line
coincident with the center of said body and in aligned relation
to said projecting infusion needle, said fiap being in a medial
location of said operative area and extending in spanning rela-
tion from said tubular member to a point adjacent a peripheral
edge of said body so as to effectively serve as a finger grip
during said subcutaneous placement of said infusion needle,
whereby said aligning orientations of said flap and infusion
needle contributes to the proper guiding of said infusion needle
into said required subcutaneous position thereof with said body
in covering relation thereover masking the presence of said
position needle.
4,380,236
FLUID PUMP
William W. Norton, Lincolnshire, 111., assignor to Baxter Trave-
nol Laboratories, Inc., Deerfield, III.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,677
Int. aj A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604-151 34 aaims
4,380,235
METERED DROP DISPENSERS
Hal C. Danby, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to Anatros Corpora-
tion, Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,436
Int. a.5 A61M 5/00: B65D 47/18
U.S. a. 604-251 7 ci^^
1. In a metered drop dispenser device which includes a
liquid reservoir, a drop forming means connected to the reser-
voir having an orifice at which drops of the liquid can be
formed, a drop chamber coupled to the drop forming means
1. Apparatus for the administration of solution at a precisely
controlled rate, which comprises a length of flexible, collaps-
ible tubing filled with said solution and connectable at one end
to a conduit communicating with the vascular system of a
patient, roller means for gripping and squeezing said tubing,
means for rotating said roller means to advance the tubing
therethrough, to expel said solution through said one end at a
rate proportional to the rate of advancement of the tubing
through the roller means, said means for rotating the roller
means comprising a shaft carrying a roller of the roller means,
an arm extending normally of said shaft and carried thereby to
rotate said shaft and roller means as the arm is moved in one
direction, clutch means to prevent back rotation of said shaft as
the arm is moved in a direction opposite to the one direction,
a motor, and cam means rotatable by said motor and positioned
to engage said arm, to movingly reciprocate said arm back and
forth in said one and opposite directions.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
589
4380,237
APPARATUS FOR MAKING CARDIAC OUTPUT
CONDUCTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
Ronald S. Newbower, Acton, Mass., assignor to Massachusetts
General Hospital, Boston, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 99,710, Dec. 3, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,198
Int. a.3 A61B 5/02
U.S. a. 128—693 12 aaims
of said tubal occlusion clip from a disengaged mode to an
engaged mode with regard to the hook portion, the guid-
ing lever including, in a substantially linearly attached
manner, a loop handle, a guiding lever arm, and a guide
arm containing a depression at the end thereof for lightly
gripping the projection portion of the tubal occlusion clip
and guiding the projection portion from a uniform open
position to a closed position;
hinge means connecting the grasping lever and the guiding
lever and providing a mutual fulcrum for the levers; and
restrictor means interposed between the grasping lever and
the guiding lever for limiting both the maximum and
minimum separation of the hook portion and said projec-
tion portion of the tubal occlusion clip held therebetween.
1. Apparatus for measuring the conductivity of vascular
fluids within a vessel comprising:
a catheter having a predetermined diameter to fit within said
vessel;
conductivity sensing means comprising at least two pairs of
electrodes disposed on said catheter for contacting vascu-
lar fluids;
said electrodes comprising elongated conductive elements
spaced apart by a predetermined distance which is both
smaller than the diameter of the catheter and sufficiently
small to reduce measurement fluctuations due to the fluid
boundaries at the vascular walls, said conductive elements
further having a length which is both larger than said
predetermined distance and sufficiently large to reduce
measurement fluctuations due to red blood cell density
fluctuations;
means for supplying a known AC current between the elec-
trodes of a first pair of electrodes; and
means for measuring the voltage between the electrodes of
the second pair in order to provide a measure of the con-
ductivity of nearby vascular fluids.
4,380,239
INTUBATION OF LACRIMAL DUCTS
John S. Crawford, and Roy Wainman, both of Toronto, Canada,
assignors to The Hospital For Sick Children, Toronto, Canada
Continuation of Ser. No. 104,793, Dec. 20, 1979, abandoned.
This application Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,527
Int. a.3 A61M 27/00
U.S. a. 604—28 8 Claims
4380 238
DISPOSABLE APPLICATORFOR MINI-LAPAROTOMY
USING A CLIP METHOD
Bartholomew A. Colucci, Half Moon Bay, Calif., and Pierre
Comte, Waldenburg, Switzerland, assignors to Institute Strau-
nann, Waldenburg, Switzerland
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,915
Int. a.' A61B 77/00
U.S. a. 128—346 1 Claims
1. A probe set for use in the canaliculus intubation of the
lacrimal duct, the probe set comprising:
a probe of a light wire which can be readily deflected
through an angle of at least 90 degrees to permit the probe
to pass from the nasolacrimal duct to the nasal inferior
meatus, the probe having an enlarged end portion which is
rounded to limit the possibility of damage to tissue when
the probe is inserted; and
a very flexible tube of minimal rigidity having a first end
containing an end of the probe remote from the end por-
tion and having an outside diameter comparable to that of
the end portion so that in use as the probe is inserted the
enlarged end portion minimises damage to tissue and can
be used to pull this end from the nasal passage to thereby
draw the tube into the lacrimal duct.
1. A disposable applicator for surgical tubal occlusion clips
comprising:
a grasping lever for holding a hook portion of a Bleier tubal
occlusion clip firmly in position, said grasping lever in-
cluding in a substantially linearly attached manner, a loop
handle, a grasping lever arm, a hinge area, a jaw arm, and
a grasping jaw means, said grasping jaw means being
formed in a shape to slidably receive the hook portion of
a tubal occlusion clip and to restrict the motion of the
hook portion received therein except along the slide axis;
a guiding lever for guiding and forcing a projection portion
4,380,240
APPARATUS FOR MONITORING METABOLISM IN
BODY ORGANS
Frans F. Jbbsis; Johannes H, Keizer, and Ronald F. Oreraker,
all of Durham, N.C., assignors to Duke UniTersity, Inc., Dur-
ham, N.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 188,578, Sep. 18, 1980, Pat. No.
4,321,930, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 810,777,
Jun. 28, 1977, Pat. No. 4,281,645, and Ser. No. 17,727. Mar. 5,
1979, Pat. No. 4,223,680, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 810,777, Jun. 28, 1977, Pat. No. 4,281,645. This application
Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,413
Int. a.5 A61B 5/00
U.S. a. 128—633 5 Qaims
1. In a spectrophotometric reflectance apparatus for measur-
ing in situ, in vivo, non-invasively, atraumatically, harmlessly,
rapidly and continuously a local metabolic oxygen dependent
590
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
activity of a selected portion of the body where such activity
bears a measurable relation to an oxygen dependent absorption
characteristic of the selected portion for a particular wave-
length of light transmitted therethrough having:
(a) circuitry means including:
(i) a plurality of near-infrared light sources located exter-
nal of the body and having light emissions of different
wavelengths in the 700-1300 nanometer spectral range
and of an intensity below the level damaging to the
body and said selected portion but sufTicient to be de-
tectable by a light sensor after transmission through any
skin, bone and tissue included in an optical transmission-
reflectance path including said selected portion thereof
and extending for several centimeters between selected
points of light entry and exit laterally spaced several
centimeters apart and located on contiguous skin sur-
face areas of the body and after scattering in and deep
reflectance from said selected portion along said path,
said emissions including at least one measuring wave-
length and at least one reference wavelength within said
spectral range, each said measuring wavelength being
selected such that said selected portion exhibits a se-
lected absorption therefore, the extent of which is de-
pendent upon a specific state of a local metabolic, oxy-
gen dependent activity of said selected portion; and
(ii) means operatively associated with said light sources to
produce emissions representing at least one said measur-
ing wavelength and at least one said reference wave-
length within said spectral range for transmission along
!>'--:
(
•> ^
r
associated with said circuitry, coupling and processing
means comprising:
(i) a flexible, elongated support member adapted to be
releasably secured to the body proximate a said selected
portion of the body having a selected set of said light
entry and exit points, said support member being
adapted to provide ambient light shielding over said
light entry and exit points and to conform to the curva-
ture and shape of the body at the location thereof;
(ii) a mounting structure secured to said support member
and adapted to deform in shape in correspondence with
the curvature assumed by said support member when
secured to the body;
(iii) a first preformed optical module mounted in said
structure and providing a hollow housing enclosing first
right angled light guide means formed by a bundle of
optical fibers optically coupled to said first optical cable
means and having an optical face centered in a slightly
tapered outer face of said housing and adapted to be
mated in a substantially pressed fit relation with said
selected point of light entry utilizing selected fibers of
said bundle for entry of light in said wavelengths to be
transmitted, deeply refiected and scattered along said
path and to said selected portion and other selected
fibers for receiving deeply penetrating light emissions
reflected directly back from any skin, bone and tissue at
or within a few millimeters of said selected point of light
entry;
(iv) a second preformed optical module mounted in said
mounting structure and providing a second hollow
housing enclosing second right angled light guide
means formed by a bundle of optical fibers optically
coupled to said second optical cable means and having
a second optical face centered in a slightly tapered outer
face of said second housing and spaced several centime-
ters away from said first optical face and adapted to be
mated in a substantially pressed fit relation with said
selected point of light exit for receiving deeply pene-
trating light emissions reflected and scattered to said
selected point of light exit from said selected portion of
said body.
said path to said selected portion and at levels of inten-
sity below that which would be damaging to the body
and said selected portion;
(b) first optical cable means providing a bundle of optical
fibers with selected fibers connected for receiving, trans-
mitting and directing the output light emissions of said
light sources at said measuring and reference wavelengths
to a selected light entry point proximate said body and
other selected fibers connected for receiving deeply pene-
trating light emissions reflected directly back from any
skin, bone and tissue at or within a few millimeters of said
selected point of light entry and coupling such emissions
to a processing means;
(c) second optical cable means providing a bundle of optical
fibers adapted for receiving deeply penetrating light emis-
sions reflected and scattered to said selected point of light
exit from said selected portion of said body and coupling
such exiting light emissions to a processing means; and
(d) processing means operatively associated with said cir-
cuitry means adapted to produce from the outputs of said
first and second optical cable means an electrical output
signal corrected for changes in blood volume of said skin,
bone and tissue during the measuring cycle and represent-
ing the difference in absorption of said measuring and
reference wavelengths by said selected body portion as a
function of the state of said local metabolic oxygen depen-
dent activity and further adapted to convert said electrical
output signal to a signal providing a substantially continu-
ous and rapid measure of said activity;
(e) an improved detachable, body mountable apparatus
4,380,241
SMOKING ARTICLES
Henry G. Horsewell, Totton, England, assignor to British-
American Tobacco Company Limited, London, England
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,091
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 1, 1980.
8014455
Int. a.' A24D 3/04. 3/18
U.S. CI. 131-336 „ aaims
4^.
1 A smoking article comprising a smoking-material rod and,
to one end thereof, a flow-impedance device comprising a
rod-like element of foam or fibrous material impervious to the
flow of smoke therethrough and at least one open-ended
smoke-flow passage means extending from one end to the other
of the element, the pressure drop of the said passage means,
determined at a flow rate through the device of 17.5 cm^ per
second, being in the range from 40 to 200 mm water gauge and
said device being enclosed in a wrapping permitting inward
flow of ambient air therethrough into the device, the said
device having air-conducting means whereby air flowing in-
wardly through the said wrapping can be conducted to and
outwardly from the mouth end of the said device, which de-
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
591
vice is effective to remove not more than 25% of the total
particulate matter of the smoke passing through the device
when the smoking article is smoked.
4,3R0^2
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOP DISTKIBLTING
NATURAL GAS
Don A. Bresie; Donald W. Fowler, and Jack M. Rums, all of
Austin, Tex., assignors to Texas Gas Transport Company,
Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 88,516, Oct 26, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 26'',998
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 22,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. Cl.-^ F17C 5/02
U.S. a. 137—113 10 Qaims
-"^lof^'-^Vi
'#^ .^
'JU'\ I !i
^■;. , ,^
I ill
i^i>hmm^^fi
}— ^:
1. A system for continuously distributing natural gas from a
supply terminal to a user terminal in an amount adequate to
assure the maintenance of a preselected, preferred rate of
supply to said user terminal, including;
at least two separate pressure vessel means, at least one of
which is movable between said supply terminal and said
user terminal, and both of which are capable of containmg
a discrete batch of natural gas under a pressure in excess of
about 800 psi, the specific number of separate pressure
vessel means being chosen in accordance with a distribu-
tion plan that takes into account the preferred rate of
natural gas production from said supply terminal and the
selected rate of supply of natural gas to said uset terminal,
and being adequate to assure the maintenance of said
selected rate of supply said separate pressure vessel means
being initially filled with natural gas at said supply termi-
nal; and
an off-loading manifold system connected with said user
terminal, and including:
at least two ofT-loading stations, for simultaneously receiving
said separate pressure vessel means;
at least two supply conduit means, one for each of said
off-loading stations, said supply conduit means being con-
nectable with said separate pressure vessel means;
a one-way check valve in each of said supply conduit means,
arranged to prevent a backfiow of natural gas there-
through;
an off-loading manifold connected with said two supply
conduits downstream of said check valves;
^ feed conduit connected with said off-loading manifold
between said two supply conduit means;
distributor conduit means connected with said feed conduit,
and with said user terminal;
means connected in said distributor conduit means for regu-
lating the flow of natural gas therethrough;
valve means for controlling the flow of natural gas from said
supply conduit means to said user terminal; and
means located downstream of said check valves arranged
and operable to switch natural gas flow from a first sepa-
rate pressure vessel means connected with a first one of
said supply conduit means, to natural gas flow from a
second separate pressure vessel means connected with the
other of said supply conduit means, with no significant
interruption of natural gas flow to said user terminal to
assure the maintenance of said selected rate of supply.
4,380,243
OVERFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
Charles A. Braley, 5602 Palos Verdes Blvd., Torrance, Calif.
90505
Filed Jan. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 112,641
Int. a.' HOIH 35/18. 29/06
U.S. a. 137—312 1 Claim
1. In an appliance adapted to be powered from an electrical
outlet and conformed to receive from a water supply predeter-
mined amounts of water at automated first intervals and to
drain into a drainage system said amounts of water at auto-
mated second intervals, the improvement comprising:
a tubular stand pipe interposed between said drainage system
and said appliance aligned in a substantially vertical align-
ment above said drainage system for receiving in a portion
of the upper opening thereof a drain hose from said appli-
ance conveying said amounts of water therethrough and
for venting to the atmosphere through the remaining
portion of said upper opening;
level sensing means received in said upper opening and
conformed to produce a switching signal indicative of the
collection of water in said stand pipe above a preselected
level, said level sensing means including a tube segment
open at both ends conformed for insertion into said re-
maining portion of said upper opening of said standpipe
and for suspended engagement thereat, a weighted rod
received in said tube segment, a spring loaded switch
assembly deployed to support the upper end of said
weighted rod, said switch having a spring coefficient
selected for switching thereof to produce said switching
signal upon a partial immersion of said rod in said collec-
tion of water; and
interrupting leakage means interposed between said appli-
ance and said electrical outlet and connected to receive
said switching signal for disrupting the receipt of electri-
cal power upon the occurrence of said switching signal.
4380,244
HOSE CONTROL SYSTEM
Stanley D. Caudill, and Frederick R. Goode, both of Lexiagtoa,
Ky., assignors to FMC Corporation, Oiicago, 111.
Filed Mar. S, 1981, Ser. No. 240,726
Int. a.J F16L 33/00
U.S. a. 137—355.16 2 Claimi
1. In a boom structure wherein a first boom section is
mounted for movement relative to a second boom section and
a freely rotatable guide wheel is positioned between adjapent
walls of said sections; the improvement which comprises:
a flexible resilient conduit disposed around said wheel;
means anchoring one portion of said conduit to said first
section and another portion to said second section;
non-resilient connecting means resisting a pull of sufficient
592
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
APRIL 19, 1983
force on said wheel in a direction to stretch said resilient
conduit a sufficient amount to provide a conduit tension-
ing force sufficient to maintain said conduit taut on said
wheel during relative movement of said boom sections;
said first and second boom sections each including a lower
wall, which walls are spaced from each other, and
wherein;
said guide wheel, said resilient flexible conduit and said
means resisting a pull on said wheel are all disposed be-
tween said lower walls.
4,380,245
ANTIFREEZE COVER ASSEMBLY FOR EXTERNAL
FAUCETS
Irving V. Hefner, 1429 Huron Ave., New Orleans, La. 70005
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,629
Int. a.' F16K 49/00
U.S. a. 137—375 4 Oaims
1. An antifreeze cover assembly for protecting external
water faucet and riser pipe assemblies adjacent building walls
comprising:
a. a cover, said cover providing an internal space normally
occupied during operation by an exterior faucet and a riser
pipe on a home, said cover providing a back flange por-
tion which during operation contacts the flat wall surface
of the building, and a lowermost portion which communi-
cates with the earth and continuously covering the riser
pipe;
b. a cap member having internal threads and being connect-
able during operation to the external threads of the faucet
to be protected;
c. a connector affixed at one end portion to said cap, said
connector extending to said cover removably attaching
thereto, securing said cover to the building wall; and
d. detachable locking means carried by said cover for re-
movably securing said connector to said cover.
4,380,246
BUTTERFLY VALVE AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
Thomas M. Casale, Arlington Heights; Frederick J. Schmitz,
Jr., Chicago, and Victor Fauperas, Oak Lawn, ail of 111.,
assignors to Dayco Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,844
Int a.3 F16K 1/22
U.S. a. 137—375 3 Claims
1. In a butterfly vaJve for controlling flow therethrough of a
high temperature fluid, said valve comprising
an outer metal housing, a ceramic lining carried by said
housing and defining a substantially right circular cylin-
drical fluid flow passage through said valve, a valve clo-
sure member which is a disc of substantially circular out-
line, a rotatable metal shaft embedded on a diametrical line
of said disc, and means rotatably supporting said shaft on
said housing to enable rotation of said member within said
flow passage from an open to a closed position to open and
close said flow passage, said member being made of a
ceramic material and said shaft being embedded substan-
tially centrally between opposed surfaces of said member,
said member having a roughly cylindrical diametrical open-
ing therethrough defining a corresponding cylindrical
inside surface and further comprising a tubular metal
sleeve disposed concentrically around said shaft, a key
connecting said sleeve and shaft and preventing relative
rotation therebetween, and a refractory material disposed
between said sleeve and said inside surface fixing said
member to said sleeve and shaft,
said member having a plurality of angularly spaced rectilin-
ear grooves extending radially from its inside surface and
said refractory material having integral portions thereof
disposed within said rectilinear grooves which help hold
said member and refractory material together as a unitary
structure,
said lining being initially made independently of said housing
and having an outside surface, a plurality of axially spaced
grooves in said lining extending inwardly from said out-
side surface, and further comprising a thickness of refrac-
tory material disposed against said outside surface with
portions thereof received within said axially spaced
'^ ,xi /"*
grooves, said portions of refractory material in said axially
spaced grooves helping to hold said lining and refractory
material together as a unitary structure ,
a thermal insulating material disposed between said thick-
ness of refractory material and said metal housing,
two sets of aligned openings in said metal housing, thermal
insulating material, refractory material, and ceramic lining
at diametrically opposed positions on said valve; said shaft
having opposite end portions with each end portion ex-
tending through an associated set of aligned openings and
outwardly of said metal housing; and a suppori and seal
assembly for each of said end portions of said shaft, each
assembly serving to support its shaft end portion while
preventing leakage out of said valve of fluid flowing in
said flow passage, and
a tubular flange structure fixed at its inner end in sealed
relation to said housing and having a planar outermost
surface which is disposed perpendicular to a central longi-
tudinal axis of said shaft, an annular groove in each of said
shaft end portions, a snap ring disposed in each groove
and having an outside diameter which is greater than the
outside diameter of its shaft end portion thereby defining
a corresponding annular portion thereof, each groove and
snap ring having associated outer surfaces disposed sub-
stantially coplanar with said planar surface, a high temper-
ature gasket covering said planar surface and said annular
portion of said snap ring, said gasket having a central bore
defining a right circular cylindrical surface disposed in
sealed relation against the outside surface of its associated
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
593
shaft end portion, an annular plate structure disposed floats in said ffoat chamber to control said feeding means and
axially outwardly of said gasket along its shaft end portion
and having a gasket engaging surface sandwiching same
against said planar surface, high temperature packing ring
means disposed in sealed relation concentrically around
and against the outside surface of its associated shaft end
portion, and a spring assembly yieldingly urging said
packing ring means in sealed relation against said annular
plate structure.
4,380,247
SAFETY GUARD FOR VALVE
Fred O. Douglas, Columbus, Ga., assignor to W. C. Bradley Co.,
Columbus, Ga.
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,203
Int. a.3 F16K 35/00
U.S. a. 137—382 3 Qalms
,. n
tapping means, and means for counting and recording as evap-
oration said first plurality of quantities of water of predeter-
KD"^-HiM
ikp=i-k>|.
mined volume and for counting and recording as precipitation
said second plurality of quantities of water of predetermmed
volume and providing a continuous measurement.
4,380,249
STEERING CLUTCH AND BRAKE CONTROL VALVE
Wilbur D. Behlmer, and John J. Kass, both of Dubuque, Iowa,
assignors to Deere A Company, Moline, III.
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,935
Int. a.5 F15B 13/07
U.S. a. 137—596.2 1 Claim
1. A two part separable safety guard for a valve comprising
a substantially U-shaped body portion having spaced top and
bottom walls which are disposed horizontally in use and a
connecting vertical wall, the opposite ends of the body portion
being open, the bottom wall of the body portion having a
central slot opening through its leading end to receive the base
of a valve to which the guard is applied, the leading edges of
the top and bottom walls of the body portion being in vertical
alignment, locking elements on the leading edges of the top
and bottom walls of the body portion, and a substantially flat
locking plate adapted to be placed against the leading edges in
spaced substantially parallel relationship to the connecting
vertical wall, and said locking plate having apertures formed
therethrough receiving said locking elements of the top and
bottom walls lockingiy.
4,380,248
EQUIPMENT FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF
EVAPORATION AND/OR PRECIPITATION
Valeria Ambrus, and Henrik Karsai, both of Budapest, Hungary,
assignors to Ganz Muszer Muvek, Budapest, Hungary
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 171,641
Claims priority, application Hungary, Jul. 21, 1979, KA 1532
Int. CV F16K 31/32
U.S. a. 137—428 2 Qaims
1. Apparatus for the measurement of evaporation and pre-
cipitation, comprising an open-topped pan for a quantity of
water, said pan fluidly connected to feeding and tapping means
for detecting a predetermined water level in the pan, means
responsive to a fall in the water level in the pan below said
predetermined level to feed a first plurality of quantities of
water of predetermined volume to the pan until said predeter-
mined water level is restored, means responsive to a rise in
water level in the pan above said predetermined level to tap
from the pan a second plurality of quantities of water of prede-
termined volume until said predetermined water level is re-
stored, a float chamber connected in fluid communication with
said pan through a tube of relatively small cross section dis-
posed below said predetermined level, a float in said float
chamber, means responsive to the height at which said float
«>
M ft ■■''', y/^'^//-/
V ', '
^'\.»*\r
„.,_.. -^
;-;^^" v"^ ' "^F^*" :^*'^
fO'
?0'
1. A hydraulic control valve for effecting the sequential
actuation of pressure-released steering brakes and pressure-
engaged steering clutches, comprising: a valve body having a
valve bore therein; said valve bore forming, at axially spaced
locations thereof, a brake service recess, a first pressure recess,
a first sump recess, a clutch service recess, a second pressure
recess, a second sump recess, a third pressure recess and an
abutment surface facing in the direction of the recesses ar-
ranged in serial order proceeding from a first toward a second
end of the bore; a spool valve means reciprocably mounted in
the bore and comprised of three separate sections including a
valve operating plunger extending through the first end of the
bore, a brake spool located next to the plunger for selectively
connecting the brake service recess with one or the other of
the first pressure and sump recesses, and a clutch spool located
next to the brake spool for selectively connecting the clutch
service recess to one or the other of the second pressure recess
and sump recess; first, second, and third coil compression
springs located in the bore with the first spring having opposite
ends engaged with the plunger and brake control spool, with
the second spring having opposite ends engaged with the brake
spool and the clutch control spool and with the third spring
X
594
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
having one end engaged with the clutch spool and another end
engaged with the abutment surface presented by the bore.
4,380,250
CHOKE UNIT
Kurt Stoll, Lenzhalde 72, 73 Esslingen/N., Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,022
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 28,
1980, 3012059
Int. a.3 F16K 3/34
U.S. a. 137—599 12 Qaims
1. In a choke apparatus for gases having a housing, an inlet
duct in said housing and an adjustment system for changing the
choking effect, said system communicating with an outlet
opening, the improvement comprising wherein said adjustment
system includes:
(a) a rotatable adjustment plate, a shaft able to be turned
from without said housing and having said plate keyed
thereon,
(b) means defining an outlet duct in communication with
said outlet opening, one side of said adjustment plate
facing said outlet duct and having formed therein a
groove extending less than 360° around the axis of rotation
of said plate, said groove having a cross-section which
changes in area along its length, and
(c) a fixed cover plate covering said side of said adjustment
plate with said groove, said cover plate having an outlet
hole which is aligned with said groove and communicates
with said outlet duct, said plate with said groove being
able to be rotated from a starting position with the lowest
choking effect to a position with the largest choking ef-
fect, the end of said groove with the largest cross-section
communicating with an inlet opening in said adjustment
plate which by way of an inlet space in said housing com-
municates with said inlet duct.
4,380,251
VALVE CONSTRUCnON HAVING MULTIPLE PISTON
MEANS AND METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME
Marvin P. Weaver, Knoxville, Tenn., assignor to Robertshaw
Controls Company, Richmond, Va.
Continuation of Ser. No. 126,836, Mar. 3, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 911,403, Jun. 1, 1978,
Pat. No. 4,228,817. This application Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No.
328,934
Int. a.3 F16K 15/18
U.S. a. 137—877 ' 6 Oaims
1. In a self-contained temperature responsive valve construc-
tion having a housing means provided with a pair of ports
separated by a first valve seat means that is opened and closed
by a valve member means in response to temperature sensed by
a piston and cylinder type temperature responsive device
carried by said housing means and being operatively associated
with said valve member means to control the same through
axial movement thereof, the improvement wherein said hous-
ing means has a by-pass passage means therein separate from
said valve member means and adapted to interconnect said pair
of ports together independently of said first valve seat means
when said first valve seat means is closed by said valve member
means, and a one-way check valve means carried by said hous-
ing means and being separate from said valve member means
for controlling said by-pass passage means to permit fiuid flow
between said ports through said check valve means in only one
direction, one of said ports being disposed intermediate said
KG, .«G
,- B?G . lOG
first valve seat means and said one-way check valve means,
said housing means having a second valve seat means disposed
intermediate said one of said ports and said one-way check
valve means to be controlled by said valve member means.
4,380,252
WIRE REINFORCED HOSE AND METHOD
Herbert W. Gray, Lawson, and Roger A. Payne, Excelsior
Springs, both of Mo., assignors to The Gates Rubber Com-
pany, Denver, Colo.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,516
Int. a.3 F16I. 11/08: B32B 5/20
U.S. a. 138—125 20 Claims
\^ 15 14' 21
1. A hose comprismg an inner polymeric tube, a substantially
tightly packed stranded wire reinforcement telescoped there-
over, and an expanded polymeric cushion matrix at least par-
tially encapsulating strands of the reinforcement and filling at
least a portion of interspaces between adjacent strands and
filling at least a portion of interspaces between the reinforce-
ment and the polymeric tube.
4,380,253
HEAT-INSULATED HOSE FOR LIQUEFIED GASES
Howard B. Mead, Tarporley. and Graham L. Williams, Whitby,
both of England, assignors to Shell Research Limited, London,
England
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,977
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 3, 1980,
8011210
Int. CI.' F16L 9/16
U.S. a. 138—149 15 Claims
1. A heat-insulated hose for liquefied gases, comprising:
an inner hose which maintains its strength and flexibility at
cryogenic temperatures;
a plurality of successive layers of heat-insulating material
arranged around the inner hose;
said layers of heat-insulating material comprising helically
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S9S
wound backing strips of fibre material upon which a mo- gear means connecting said tension roller means with said
siac of blocks of heat-insulating material is melted; and motor means, said second motor being connected to any but
the first stage of said plural stage reduction gear means, with
an outer protective sheath arranged around the outermost
layer of heat-insulating material.
WEFT GUIDANCE TUBE FOR LOOMS
James H. Bonasch, East Greenwich, R.I., and William J. Bou-
chard, Jr., Fall River, Mass., assignors to Leesona Corpora-
tion, Warwick, R.I.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,848
Int. a.J D03D 47/30
U.S. a. 139—435 11 Claims
said first motor being connected via a first stage to said plural
stage reduction gear means and with one of said first and
second motors being connected by means of a compensating
clutch to said plural stage reduction gear means.
4,380,256
CABLE SLITTING AND SPREADING TOOL
Joseph Peterpaul, West Orange, NJ., assignor to Thomas A
Betts Corporation, Raritan, N.J.
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,392
Int. a.3 B21F 7/00
U.S. a. 140—106 20 Qaims
20-
■M^ S8^ '50^58
1. A weft guidance tube for a fluid weft insertion system
comprising, an elongated member having a longitudinal chan-
nel therein, a plurality of segments juxtaposed in said channel,
each said segment including a base and an upper end, said
upper end having an aperture therethrough and an exit slot
extending from said aperture, connecting means on each seg-
ment for connecting each segment to an adjacent segment with
the apertures and exit slots of said segments being in alignment,
the base of each said segment being wider in cross-section than
the upper end thereof to thereby space said upper ends from
each other when said segments are juxtaposed, and means for
securing said plurality of segments in said channel.
4,380,255
HOOPER APPARATUS
Peter Fronun, Uitikon, Switzerland, assignor to Fromm AG,
Spreitenbach, Switzerland
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,216
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 5, 1980,
6681/80
Int. Q\} B21F 9/02
U.S. a. 140—93.2 10 Qaims
1. Hooper apparatus for connecting steel bands having a
band tensioning mechanism comprising tension roller means
for engaging said bands, motor means including a first motor
for driving said tension roller means with low speed at high
torque and a second motor for driving said tension roller means
with high speed at low torque, said tension roller means being
prestressed toward a base support, and plural stage reduction
1. A tool for slitting and spreading an insulating jacket sur-
rounding an electrical conductor in an elongate electrical
cable, comprising:
support means for supporting a longitudinal extent of said
cable in a fixed plane thereon;
movable cutting means adjacent said support means for
piercing at a point the insulating jacket of an electrical
cable disposed on said support means upon movement of
said cutting means toward such cable and for progres-
sively slicing upon continued movement said insulating
jacket longitudinally unidirectionally from said point; and
means for progressively longitudinally unidirectionally en-
tering said sliced insulating jacket and laterally spreading
portions thereof
4,380,257
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING FLUID
MATERIALS
Gary W. Howell, Newark, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,386
Int. a.J B65B 3/04; B67C 5/37
U.S. Q. 141—1 21 Claims
1. A method of switching the flow of a fluid from a first to
second and third unconnected flow paths using a flexible,
generally planar and horizontally disposed member deflning a
receptacle for removably positioning a first flow path, and flrst
596
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
rack means positioned below the member for removably posi-
tioning second and third flow paths comprising the steps of:
removably mounting said first flow path in said flexure
member with the inlet and outlet of the first flow path
located on opposite faces of the member,
flow alignm
flexing said m
flow path fr
third flow
positioning said^bqond and third flow paths in the first rack
means in sida by side relation vertically below said first
flow path wnh one of the second and third flow paths in
with said first flow path, and
iber to switch the flow alignment of said first
the one to the other of said second and
4,380,258
LOG SPLITTER
Paul E. Hanser, Wilton, Iowa, assignor to HWH Corporation,
Moscow, Iowa
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,652
Int. a.3 B27L 7/O0
U.S. a. 144—193 A 8 Qaims
\ n
T6
1
1
4
B
\
0
I
\
/
-
i-
'
^
>0
- --' ~ ^*- ■
,-"
~-:,
-"£'
1. A log splitter, comprising: a base structure, a two-way
hydraulic splitter motor having a cylinder, piston and piston
rod and disposed adjacent to the base structure with the
lengthwise axis of the cylinder generally horizontal and the
piston rod projecting away from the base structure, a first arm
having a lower end adjacent to the base structure and rising to
an upper end at an elevation above that of the base structure,
pivot means connecting the first arm lower end to the cylinder
on a generally horizontal axis transverse to the cylinder axis, a
second arm having an upper end adjacent to the first arm upper
end and a lower end generally horizontally alined with the first
arm lower end, means pivotally interconnecting the upper ends
of the arms on an axis parallel to that of the aforesaid pivot
means, means mounting the cylinder on the base structure and
fixing it against movement along its axis, said means including
clamp means selectively releasable and lockable to enable
angular positioning of the cylinder and arms as a unit about the
cylinder axis and relative to the base structure, stop means at
the lower end of the first arm and facing the lower end of the
second arm, a splitter blade on the lower end of the second arm
and directed toward the stop means, means connecting the free
end of the piston rod to the second arm, and fluid line means
connected to the cylinder for extending the piston to space the
splitter blade away from the stop means and for retracting the
piston to move the blade toward the stop means for splitting a
log received between the blade and stop means while the
piston is extended.
4,380,259
VENEER LATHE APPARATUS AND METHOD USING
INDEPENDENTLY ADJUSTABLE POWERED BACK-UP
ROLL
Byron B. Brookhyser, Milton; Robert H. Lichlen waiter,
Tacoma, both of Wash.; Arthur L. McGee, Lake Oswego,
Oreg., and Darrell E. Pierson, Federal Way, Wash., assign-
ors to The Coe Manufacturing Company, Painesville, Ohio
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,081
Int. a.3 B27L 5/02
U.S. a. 144—357 27 Chdms
■ 7 «6 _ 1 I
1. Veneer lathe apparatus, comprising:
lathe spindle means for engaging the opposite ends of a log
to rotate said log;
lathe knife means for peeling a thin sheet of veneer from said
log as it rotates;
first roll means for engaging the log;
powered second roll means for engaging said log between
said first roll means and said knife means to assist in the
rotation of said log; and
automatic control means for independently adjusting the
positions of said first roll means and said powered roll
means with respect to the axis of said lathe spindle means
and for adjusting the spacing between the two roll means
in response to reductions in the diameter of said log as it is
peeled.
4,380,260
FOLDING CLOSURE WITH A SWEEPER
Henri M. R. Labelle, 50 Westmoorehmd Ave., Cornwall, Ont.,
Canada
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295^29
Int. a.3 E06B 3/12
U.S. a. 160—235 9 Claims
Jt^^
1. A folding closure having a plurality of panels arranged
one after the other; a hinge located between each pair of adja-
cent panels, the hinge joining the adjacent panels together
along their adjacent side edges while spacing the adjacent
panels slightly apart to provide a gap between them; a carrier
member on, and extending across, the bottom of each panel;
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
597
one or more sweeper strips slidably mounted on the carrier
members to provide a sweeper extending across the bottom of
the closure, each sweeper strip traversing at least several con-
secutive panels and passing unbroken and unsupported from
one carrier member to the next across each gap between adja-
cent panels.
ward during said third and fourth steps by the effect of
said greater pressure applied by said squeeze plunger.
4,380^61
DIE-CASTING METHOD
Hanio Suzuki, Harufaimura, and Shigeyoshi Hashimoto, Aigo,
both of Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 118,806, Feb. 14, 1979, as
PCT/JP79/00035. published as WO80/01658, § 102(e) Date
Apr. 24, 1979, abandoned.
Int. a.3 B22D 18/02
U.S: a. 164—120 13 Qaims
4,380^62
APPARATUS FOR DOUBLE ROLLER CHILL CASTING
OF CONTINUOUS METAL FOIL
Ralph P. I. Adler, Wellesley; Thomas J. Gortuch, Westwood;
Yellapu V. Murty, Acton, and Alexander R. Woronicki,
Stoneham, all of Mass., assignors to GTE Laboratories Incor-
porated, Waltham, Mass.
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200361
Int. a.5 B22D 11/00. 11/06. 11/124
U.S. a. 164—423 6 Claims
1. A die-casting method comprising:
a first step of relatively moving dies into close contact so as
to form therebetween a die cavity for casting a product, a
runner through which molten metal is injected into said
die cavity, and a substantially non-narrowing squeeze
passage connected directly to said die cavity at a point
other than the point of connection between said die cavity
and said runner;
a second step of injecting, by forwardly moving an injection
plunger to effect a predetermined injection pressure, the
molten metal from said runner via a gate into said die
cavity and said squeeze passage to fill said die cavity and
said squeeze passage with the molten metal;
a third step of starting a squeezing displacement of the mol-
ten metal in said non-narrowing squeezt passage by mov-
ing a squeeze plunger through said squeeze passage from
a position therein remote from said die cavity toward said
die cavity and at a predetermined squeezing pressure
greater than said injection pressure and at a time before
said gate is blocked by solidified molten metal;
a fourth step of continuing the squeezing on said molten
metal by said squeeze plunger in said passage at said pre-
determined squeezing pressure until said cavity is filled
voidlessly and, during said continued squeezing, forcing
molten metal out of said die cavity through said gate into
said runner by the molten metal displaced out of said
squeeze passage by said squeeze plunger and until the
molten metal is completely solidified at least in said die
cavity while retaining said squeeze plunger substantially
fully inside said passage to produce a solidified voidless
die-cast product;
a fifth step of retracting said squeeze plunger to remove said
squeezing pressure from said squeeze passage after the
molten metal is solidified in said die cavity;
a sixth step of relatively moving said dies away from one
another for the removal of said die-cast product which has
been solidified in said die cavity; and
preventing said injection plunger from being moved back-
1. An apparatus for double roller chill casting of continuous
metal foil comprising:
a plurality of substantially parallel mounting members;
first and second bearing members slideably mounted on said
mounting members;
first rotary chill roller member rotatably mounted on said
first and second bearing members;
third and fourth bearing members fixedly mounted on said
mounting members;
second rotary chill roller member rotatably mounted on said
third and fourth bearing members;
a yoke member fixedly mounted at each end thereof to said
mounting members;
a bar member disix)sed laterally adjacent to and spaced apart
from said first roller member, said bar member attached at
the ends thereof to said first and said second bearing
members;
positioning and restoring means disposed between said bar
member and said yoke member for urging said bar mem-
ber away from said yoke member and toward said second
roller member and for maintaining said first roller spaced
apart from said second roller member by a selectably
variable minimum spacing;
means for synchronously contrarotating said first and said
second roller members; and
means for delivering molten metal between said first and said
second roller members;
whereby when molten metal is delivered between the contra-
rotating roller members and material between said roller mem-
bers exerts a displacing force to move said first roller member
away from its position of minimum spacing from said second
roller member, said restoring means exerts a force on said bar
member to slideably urge said first and said second bearing
members and said first roller member toward said second roller
member to establish a dynamic steady sute spacing between
said first and said second roller members to produce continu-
ous metal foil of substantially uniform thickness equal to said
dynamic steady state spacing.
598
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4380,263
HEAT EXCHANGER TUBE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
William E. Wright, East Syracuse, N.Y., assignor to Carrier
Corporation, Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 202,984
Int. a.^ F28F 9/00
U.S. a. 165—76 5 Claims
longitudinal alignment with said bore of said housinf; and
adapted to i}old a portion of said survey instrument, and
1. A heat exchange unit having a base pan for supporting the
unit, and a fan assembly and a subassembly which comprises:
a heat exchanger formed from a plurality of runs of wound
Hn tubing:
a support member having a vertically extending portion
extending the height of the heat exchanger and having a
top lateral portion and a bottom lateral portion both ex-
tending across the runs of wound fin tubing, each lateral
portion defming an opening therein;
a tubular support means extending through the openings in
the lateral portions of the support member securing the
runs of wound fin tubing between the tubular support
means and the support member; and
means for securing the tubular support means to the base pan
and to the structural assembly for incorporating the subas-
sembly as an integral part ^the heat exchange unit.
4,380,264
SURVEY TOOL STRING
William C. Lyons, and Scot L. Scurlock, both of Sante Fe, N.
Mex., assignors to Drilling Development, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,922
Int. a.3 E21B 41/00, 47/00
U.S. a. 166—169 14 Claims
1. A tool for holding a magnetic directional survey instru-
ment comprising:
a tubular, non-magnetic housing having a central bore for
holding a major portion of said survey instrument;
closure means for enclosing one end of said tubular housing,
said closure means having sealing means coacting with
said tubular housing to prevent fluids from entering said
tubular housing and having a recess in longitudinal align-
ment with said bore of said housing and adapted to hold a
portion of said survey instrument;
connector means connected to the other end of said tubular
housing for joining said tubular housing to means for
lowering said tool into a short radius curve of a deviated
well;
said connector means having a passageway for conducting
fluids from the interior of said tool lowering means to the
exterior of said tubular housing and having a recess in
■'-H
said connector means and said tubular housing having means
to prevent fluids from entering said tubular housing.
4,380,265
METHOD OF TREATING A HYDROCARBON
PRODUCING WELL
Henry H. Mohaupt, 1151 Estrella Dr., Santa Barbara, Calif.
93110
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,538
Int. a.' E21B 43/24, 43/26. 47/00
U.S. a. 166—250 12 Qaims
1. A method of treating a hydrocarbon producing well of the
type having a casing string and a tubing string inside the casing
string, both strings extending from the surface to adjacent a
hydrocarbon bearing formation and being in fluid transmitting
relation, comprising
injecting into a first of the strings, at the surface, a combusti-
ble mixture including a gaseous phase material in a quan-
tity larger than the volumetric capacity of the first string;
monitoring the other of the strings, at the surface, to detect
the presence of the combustible mixture;
igniting the combustible mixture after detecting the presence
of the combustible mixture at the surface;
valving the string closed and thereby preventing backflow
of gaseous phase materials from the strings toward the
surface during combustion of the mixture; and
moving hot combustion products from the string into the
formation.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
599
9. A method of stimulating a hydrocarbon producing well of
the type having a casing string extending from the surface to
adjacent a hydrocarbon bearing formation and a tubing string,
inside the casing string and communicating therewith, extend-
ing from the surface toward the hydrocarbon bearing forma-
tion, the method comprising
steps for periodically injecting hot combustion products into
the formation including
(a) injecting into the tubing string, at the surface, a com-
bustible mixture including a gaseous phase material in a
quantity sufficient to substantially fill the tubing string
and at least part of the annulus between the tubing and
casing strings;
(b) injecting into the annulus at the surface, an accumula-
tor gas in a quantity sufficient to fill only part of the
annulus;
(c) preventing flow of the combustible mixture toward the
surface;
(d) igniting the combustible mixture;
(e) combusting the mixture in the well and increasing the
pressure in the well;
(0 moving hot combustion products from the well into the
formation and thereby decreasing the pressure in the
well; and then
(g) repeatmg steps (a), (c). (d), (e) and (I).
4,380,266
RESERVOIR-TAILORED CO2-AIDED OIL RECOVERY
PROCESS
Scott L. Wellington, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil Com-
pany, Houston, Tex.
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,164
Int. Cl.^ E21B 43/22, 47/06
U.S. CI. 166—252 2 Claims
\
\
\
- e .V - cn2 - fl V -
B'fiseneonoi.
Ou 06 08 Id 12
CUUuLAllV£ POK VOLUME Of HUIU INJECTION
nai'^f \i itoft .
BW'vf \f:[\.
f L^.O '\jECnut, - -.
fiuid for displacing oil within an oil and brine-containing sub-
terranean reservoir comprising:
determining the reservoir temperature and properties of the
oil and brine contained within the reservoir:
selecting a surfactant which both consists essentially of at
least one polyalkoxyalcoholic surfactant and is capable of
inducing the formation of substantially homogeneous
dispersions of each of the specified types when said surfac-
tant is mixed with the specified fluids at the reservoir
temperature and a pressure of at least about 2000 psi at
which CO2 is substantially liquid at the reservoir tempera-
ture;
said types of dispersions being ( 1 ) CO2 dispersed in a solution
of surfactant dissolved in brine having a salinity substan-
tially equivalent to that of the brine in the reservoir, when
the volumes of the CO2 and aqueous liquid are substan-
tially equal and the mixture is substantially free of oil, (2)
CO2 and oil having properties at least substantially equiva-
lent to those of the reservoir oil dispersed in a solution of
the same surfactant in brine where the volume of oil is
smaller than the total volume of CO2 and brine, and (3)
CO2 and a solution of the same surfactant in brine dis-
persed in the same oil where the volume of oil exceeds the
total volume of CO2 and brine; and
injecting into the reservoir, at a pressure greater than about
2000 psi at which the CO2 is substantially liquid at the
reservoir temperature,^^, the selected surfactant, and a
brine having a salinity aHeast substantially equivalent to
that of the brine in the reservoir, in a sequence and propor-
tion such that before, or soon after, entering the reservoir
(a) the CO2 is initially dispersed in a solution of the surfac-
tant in brine, (b) advancing portions of the initial disper-
sion are converted to a dispersion of CO2 and the reservoir
oil in the solution of surfactant in brine, and (c) advancing
portions of the latter dispersion are converted to a disper-
sion of CO2 and a solution of surfactant in brine in the
reservoir oil.
1. A process for formulating and injecting a C02-containing
4.380,267
DOWNHOLE STEAM GENERATOR HAVING A
DOWNHOLE OXIDANT COMPRESSOR
Ronald L. Fox, Albuquerque. N. Mex., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the United States Depart-
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 222,854
Int. CI.' E21B 43/24: F22D ///* F23D 15/04
U.S. CI. 166—303 14 Claims
1. An apparatus for generation of steam in a borehole for
penetration into an earth formation, comprising:
a housing adaptable for insertion into the borehole;
an oxidant supply means;
a fuel supply means for supplying fuel;
a combustor assembly having a combustion chamber con-
tained in said housing for receiving, mixing and combust-
ing said oxidant and fuel for generating hot combustion
gases;
an Igniter means for igniting the fuel and oxidant mixture m
said chamber;
a water supply means for injecting water into said combus-
tion chamber to be converted to steam by the heat of
combustion;
oxidant compressor means contained in said housing for
compressing the oxidant prior to injection into said cham-
ber;
means for driving said compressor means by said hot com-
bustion gases; and
steam outlet means for ejecting the hot combustion gases and
steam for penetration into the earth formation
14. In operation of a downhole steam generation for inject-
ing steam into an earth formation, a method comprising the
steps of
compressing oxidant downhole to a relatively high pressure
by compressor means;
600
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
injecting the high pressure oxidant into a combustion cham-
ber;
injecting fuel into the combustion chamber to produce a fuel
and oxidant mixture;
igniting the fuel and oxidant mixture thereby producing high
pressure expanding combustion gases;
driving a turbine employing the driving force of the expand-
ing combustion gases;
(d) discontinuing pumping of the well; and
(e) repumping the well.
..'f-j;;
4,380^69
QUICK RELEASE HRE HOSE CABINET
John B. PeUway, 2021 Brooks Dr., Suitland, Md. 20746, and
Otis C. Gabriel, Abrahms Hall Box 1448, Walter Reed Army
Hospital Center, Washington, D.C. 20012
Division of Ser. No. 157,444, Jun. 9, 1980, abandoned. This
application Not. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 319,043
Int. a.3 A62C 35/00
U.S. CI. 169—51 2 Claims
T'
powering the compressor means by the turbine;
transferring the hot combustion gases downstream of the
turbine to a steam generation zone;
injecting water into the steam generation zone to produce
steam; and
injecting the steam into the earth formation.
1. A fire fighting device for installation in spaces having a
pressurized water supply comprising:
a storage cabinet having a plurality of means therein and
thereon for attaching said cabinet to a supporting struc-
ture in an upright position;
said cabinet being formed by a storage compartment with a
tightly fitting cover therefor hingedly attached along the
lower side of said compartment;
the compartment further having water inlet and control
means therein for connection to said water supply; and
said cabinet having therein quick release means for storing a
length of flexible plastic hose, one end of which is con-
nected to said water inlet and control means, the other end
having a nozzle thereon, wherein said quick release and
storage means comprises a support plate pivotally at-
tached to the upper portion of the back wall of the in-
stalled cabinet, a plurality of upwardly sloping pegs to
support an equal plurality of loops of said hose, and catch
means pivotally mounted above said support plate and a
catch actuating rod attached to the upper portion of the
inner surface of said cover whereby when said cover is
closed, said actuating rod will release said catch from said
sup[>ort plate to allow said plate to pivot forward until
said pegs come in contact with the inner surface of said
closed cover thereby retaining said hose on said pegs until
such time as said cover is opened when said support plate
will pivot forward to discharge said loops of hose from
said cabinet.
4380,268
PETROLEUM AND GAS WELL ENHANCEMENT AGENT
Keith R. Martin, West Chester, Pa., assignor to Uniflo Re-
sources, Inc., Springfield, N J.
FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,718
Int. a.3 E21B 37/06. 43/00
U.S. a. 166—304 2 Claiffls
1. A process for removal of paraffm from gas and petroleum
wells comprising the steps of:
(a) adding to a well a mixture of 10 weight percent polymer
of a primary alcohol and ethylene oxide, 2 weight percent
sodium silicate and 88 weight percent water;
(b) adding water to the well;
(c) pumping the mixture up the well;
4,380,270
TOOL DEVICE
Darid Ludwig, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to Allan Air Products,
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
FUed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,754
Int. a.3 P03B 13/00
U.S. a. 173—163 1 Claim
1. A tool device comprising:
(a) a body defining a bore having a first barrier wall end and
second open end;
(b) a tool holder and motor assembly joined to said body and
extending into said bore, said assembly including (i) means
for joining a tool to said assembly, said tool joining means
extending out of ^id open end of said bore, (ii) elongated
rotary motor means having first and second ends, said
motor means joined to said tool joining means for rotating
said tool joining means, said motor means further having
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
601
a plurality of radially disposed movable vane members,
and (iii) first and second end plates disposed on said motor
means at each end thereof, said first end plate located
adjacent said barrier wall end of said bore and having inlet
openings for directing a fluid into said motor means and
said second end plate located adjacent said open end of
said bore and having outlet openings for directing fluid
out of said motor means and toward said open end of said
bore;
(c) means in said body for directing a fluid to said motor
means adjacent said barrier wall and through said first end
plate; and
(d) means a ring member circumfereotially disposed about
said tool joining means and securing said assembly in said
body, said ring member joined to said body adjacent said
open end of said bore and having a plurality of openings in
flow communication with and adjacent to said outlet
openings on said second end plate,
whereby fluid is directed from said barrier wall end of said
bore, through said motor means, and out said open end of
said bore.
ing pockets for engagement with the body portion of the
cutting teeth and extending to a position for contact with
^SMl
31 ^7 31 47
the leading edge of said flight structure to provide back
supports for cutting teeth.
4,380,272
OIL RESERVOIR PARTICULARLY FOR HYDRAULIC
STEERING SYSTEM
Johann Merz, Bopfingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen AG, Friedrichshafen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed May 1, 1980, Ser. No. 145,796
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 19,
1979, 2920321
Int. a.3 B62D 5/06
U.S. a. 180—132 8 Oaims
4,380,271
EARTH AUGER WITH REMOVABLE CUTTING TOOTH
SUPPORT STRUCTURE
Donald R. Baken Thomas R. Barr, and Paul C. Smith, Jr., all of
Denison, Tex., assignors to Blue Streak Industries, Inc., Deni-
son, Tex.
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,129
Int. a.3 E21B 10/44
U.S. a. 175—391 6 Qaims
1. An earth drilling tool for use with cutting teeth each
having a shank portion and an enlarged body portion with
cutting edges and integral with one end of the shank portion
comprising:
an upstanding axial stem having a bottom pilot bit attached
to the bottom of said stem,
a downwardly spiraling flight structure affixed to said axial
stem and having a leading edge terminating in the vicinity
of said pilot bit, and
cutting teeth holder structure removably secured to said
leading edge of said flight structure and extending from a
position adjacent said stem above said pilot bit to a posi-
tion approximate to the perimeter of said flight structure,
said holder structure having a plurality of spaced apart
pockets extending through said structure for receiving
shank portions of cutting teeth whereby the shank por-
tions will pass through the pockets from one side of the
structure to the other side,
said holder structure including reinforcing webs having
raised ends proximate to each of the cutting tooth receiv-
1. In an automotive vehicle having an engine compartment
enclosing a fluid powered mechanism (10) to which pressur-
ized fluid is supplied by a vehicle engine driven pump (1)
having an intake fitting (3), and a fluid reservoir enclosing a
required storage volume from which the fluid is exclusively
withdrawn by the pump, the improvement residing in said fluid
reservoir being formed by an elongated flexible hose (4) having
opposite open ends between which said required storage vol-
ume of the fluid is confined, clamp means (5) connecting one of
said ends of the hose to the intake fitting of the pump, means (9)
fixedly anchoring the hose adjacent the other end thereof at an
accessible location (11) above the pump within the engine
602
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
compartment, and a removable cap (6) closing said other end
of the hose adjacent said accessible location.
4,380,273
SPUR RACK HYDROSTEERING
Wolfgang Walter, Schwabisch Gmund, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen, AG., Friedrich-
shafen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,555
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 1,
1979, 2931184
Int. CI.' B62D 5/008; F16J 9/002
U.S. a. 180—132 1 Qaim
preventing the carrier from turning relative to the shaft having
an internal spline gearing near one end, comprising:
a sleeve being secured to or integral with said planet gear
carrier, the carrier resembling a flange at the sleeve, the
sleeve being provided with an external spline, there being
an annular recess between the spline and the carrier;
said shaft having an end portion provided with an internal
spline, for coupling with the external spline of said sleeve;
and
W-^-"
'^^rz
1. In a hydrosteering device having a housing (1). a rack (3)
and a double-acting piston assembly (8) mounted on the rack,
and means for sealmg pressure spaces within the housing from
each other on opposite axial sides of the piston assembly, the
improvement comprising a stop surface (14) formed on the
rack, a relatively rigid piston ring (11) exposed to pressures in
both of said pressure spaces, mounting means (15,16) assem-
bled on the rack for floating support of the piston ring with
axial clearance (20) relative to said stop surface, and relatively
flexible means (12) mounted on the piston ring for engagement
with the housing in response to radially outward displacement
of the piston ring by said pressures exerted thereon, said
mounting means comprising a reduced diameter end portion
on the rack extending axially from the stop surface, a mounting
ring (15) having a stop portion (21) axially spaced from the
stop surface, elastic support means (16) on the end portion of
the rack axially between the stop surface and the stop portion
for floating support of the piston ring, and fastening means (17)
on the end portion of the rack for holding the mounting ring in
axial abutment with the stop surface.
4,380,274
HOLDING A PLANETARY GEAR CARRIER RELATIVE
TO AN AXLE
Uwe Abraham, Mittelstr. 18, 4350 Recklinghausen; Karl-Heinz
Jakubowski, Tilsiter Str. 22, 4620 Castrop-Rauxel, and Wil-
helm Koster, Hagemer Kircbweg 11, 4354 Datteln, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,677
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 22,
1980, 3015818
Int. a,3 B60K 7/00
U.S. a. 180—308 4 Qaims
1. Connection of a hollow shaft to a planet gear carrier for
'1 .. f
^^3ii*i '
M
J I*
s Li
mi'.
a gear disk having internal teeth and being disposed so that
the teeth extend into the recess, the teeth being aligned
with ridges of said external spline, the disk being releas-
ably secured to said shaft, an axial length of the recess
being larger than the thickness of said disk, so that the
carrier can axially move relative to the shaft and the disk
over a limited range.
4,380,275
APPARATUS FOR INTERFACING WEIGHING DATA
WITH A LIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Matti Kahkipuro, HyvinkMM, Finland, assignor to Elevator
GmbH, Baar, Switzerland
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 277,021
Int. a.3 B66B 1/44
U.S a. 187—29 R 1 Claim
R3
9 R7 Ra
KIA ,•
Kl ^
K2
Rl CI
C2 Rb
■ CJ • W ■
• li ^
2
-i , * <
R5
VS
,] ■^S
R4
0
1. Apparatus for interfacing weighing data with a lift control
system that has been carried out with an operator amplifier
circuit comprising a speed controller amplifier (NS) of which
the plus terminal has been connected to ground and at the
minus terminal enter the speed set-point value and the current
speed value and further from the minus terminal has been
connected to the output of the speed controller amplifier a
stabilizing resistor (Rl), a stabilizing capacitor (CI), a start
switch (Kl) which short-circuits the stabilizing resistor (Rl),
and an auxiliary start switch (KIA) which connects the junc-
ture of the stabilizing resistor (Rl) and capacitor (CI) to the
terminals of the weighing data resistors (R7) and (R8), the
other end of the latter weighing datum resistor (R8) being
connected to the output of the speed controller amplifier (NS)
and to the other end of the foremost weighing datum resistor
(R7) being connected the external weighing datum.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
603
4,380,276
SLACK ADJUSTER FOR VEHICLE BRAKES
Roger Sweet, Fowlervilie, and Leonard T. Tribe, Ann Arbor,
both of Mich., assignors to Kelsey-Hayes Co., Romulus,
Mich.
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 167,308
Int. a.' F16D 65/56
U.S. CI. 188—79.5 K 4 Claims
1. A slack adjuster for connecting an air actuated piston rod
to rotate a cam shaft in a vehicle brake system comprising a
housing, a worm gear mounted to rotate in said housing, means
for connecting said worm gear to the cam shaft, said worm
gear and said cam shaft rotating together about a first axis, a
shaft mounted in said housing to rotate about a second axis
perpendicular to said first axis, said shafi having first and sec-
ond ends and defining a worm intermediate said ends engaged
with said worm gear, a drive and a coupling each mounted
coaxially to rotate on said shaft, ratchet means interconnecting
said drive and said coupling for allowing said drive to rotate
about said shaft axis relative to said coupling in only one direc-
tion, slip means interconnecting the coupling and said shafi,
said slip means slipping when a predetermined rotational force
is exerted between said coupling and said shaft, clevis means
connecting said housmg to the piston rod at a predetermined
point spaced from said first axis, a link connected to said clevis
means at a point spaced from the connection between said
clevis means and said housing, and means interconnecting said
link and said drive for rotating said drive and said coupling as
the vehicle brakes are applied.
4,380,277
AUTOMATIC SLACK ADJUSTERS FOR VEHICLE
SHOE-DRUM BRAKES
Brian Ingram, Warwickshire; David A. Harries, and Michael J.
England, both of West Midlands,, England, assignors to Lucas
Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,428
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 10, 1979,
7935130; Dec. 13, 1979, 7943037
Int. CI.' F16D 51/00
U.S. a. 188—329 8 Qaims
4^
V- }7
torque plate and carrying friction linings for engagement with
said rotatable drum, an actuating cam disposed between adja-
cent ends of said shoes, a cam shaft carrying said cam and
which is journalled in said torque plate for rotation about a
fixed axis to enable said cam to separate said adjacent ends of
said shoes, and a slack adjuster, said slack adjuster comprising
a housing mounted on said torque plate and fixed relative to
said shoes, a pair of thrust assemblies guided to slide axially in
bores in said housing, each said thrust assembly being adapted
to act between said cam and said end of a respective one of said
shoes, and each said thrust assembly comprising first and sec-
ond interengaged screw-threaded members which are rela-
tively rotatable to increase the effective length of said thrust
assembly to compensate for wear of said friction lining of said
respective one shoe, a rigid strut interposed between said cam
and each said second member and through which said cam acts
on said thrust assemblies to separate said adjacent ends of said
shoes in response to rotation of said cam shaft, complementary
recesses of part-spherical outline in said cam and in said second
members and in which opposite ends of said struts have rock-
ing engagements, means for holding each said first member
against rotation with respect to said end of said respective
shoe, and gear teeth provided on each said second member, a
drive mechanism in constant meshing engagement with said
gear teeth of both said second members so that both said sec-
ond members are adapted to rotate together whereby the
effective lengths of both said assemblies are increased by
equivalent amounts, and means for rotating at least one of said
second members when adjustment to compensate for wear is
required.
4,380,278
MULTIPLE CLUTCH CONTROL SYSTEM EMPLOYING
CLUTCH STATUS MONITOR
Richard D. Lasken, Bartlett, III., assignor to International Har-
vester Co., Chicago, III.
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,264
Int. CI.' B60K 41/22: F16D 25/10
U.S. CI. 192—3.58 18 Claims
1. A vehicle shoe-drum brake of the one-leading, one-trailing
shoe-drum simplex type comprising a rotatable drum, a rela-
tively stationary torque-plate, brake shoes mounted on said
1. In a rotary power transmission of the type having a plural-
ity of gears and first and second clutches cooperating with said
gears for shifting the transmission from a first gear ratio to a
second gear ratio by engaging the first clutch and disengaging
the second clutch after a transitory operational period of
clutch overlap, the improvement comprising means responsive
to the engagement of said first and second clutches for prevent-
ing said first and second clutches from being simultaneously
engaged for more than a predetermined time interval, said
simultaneous engagement preventing means having monitor
means (48,84,87,80 pin 5) effective to afford operation thereof
and connected to continuously monitor the second clutch,
throughout said predetermined time interval, for failure to m
fact disengage therewithin, whereupon the monitor means is
effective so as to afford the desired operation of the simulta-
neous engagement preventing means.
604
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380^79
VISCOUS FLUID COUPLING DEVICE
Hiroto Masai, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 213,024
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1979, 54-
180878[U]
Int. a.3 F16D 35/00. 43/25
U.S. a. 192—58 B 3 Oaims
1. A viscous fluid coupling comprising:
a drive member;
a casing member rotatably mounted on said drive member
and provided with a fluid working chamber and a fluid
reservoir wherein said casing member has an insert de-
pression formed therein;
a rotor fixed to said drive member and located in said fluid
working chamber and rotatable relative to said casing
member;
a shaft rotatably and sealingly mounted on said casing mem-
ber;
a valve plate fixed to an inner end of said shaft and operable
to control fluid communication between said fluid work-
ing chamber and said reservoir;
a helically wound bimetal element located on an exterior
portion of said casing member, said bimetal element hav-
ing an inner end portion connected to an outer end of said
shaft and an outer end portion of said bimetal element
being connected to a portion of said casing member; and
a resilient member having a rigidity less than the rigidity of
said bimetal element and made of leaf spring steel and
located between said outer end portion of said bimetal
element and said casing member, wherein said resilient
member further comprises a hair-pin shaped member
having a round head and being fixed to said outer end
portion by means of a rivet and located in said insert
depression formed on the casing at said round head of said
resilient member.
4,380,280
CAM OPERATED FRICHON CLUTCH
John D. Walters, Rte. 1, Box 244H, New Orleans, La. 70129
Filed Jan. 2, 1979, Ser. No. 107
Int. C\? F16D 13/14. 13/75
U.S. a. 192—78 10 Qaims
1. An improved externally engagable clutch having cam
actuated expandable clutch shoe means for frictional coupling
to clutch drum means, wherein the improvement comprises:
multiple face cam means wherein each cam face contact
surface is oriented essentially parallel to the axis of rota-
tion of the clutch and each cam face contact surface is
positioned axially adjacent to each other; and
cam follower means rotatably mounted in a plane essentially
perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the clutch and
operably connected to the expandable clutch shoe means
for expanding it into contact with the clutch drum means,
said cam follower means and said multiple face cam means
being laterally displaceable relative to each other and the
axis of rotation of the clutch.
4,380,281
ASSOOATED RUNNING GEAR AND PILER
IMPROVEMENTS IN A TWO ROW HARVESTER AND
PILER
Richard A. Duncan, Thibodaux, La., assignor to Cane Harvest
Inc., Thibodaux, La.
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,999
Int. a.3 B65G 41/00. 65/06
U.S. a. 198—304 3 Oaims
^. ^ ^ .'''?
1. In a two row harvester and piler, associated running gear
and pilers comprising:
(a) tricycle running gear, having two fixed front wheels and
a smaller centered and steerable rear wheel, fixed as a
movable supporting part of said harvester and piler for
moving it from plact to place;
(b) similar front wheel hydraulic motor means for driving
said front wheels;
(c) rear wheel hydraulic motor means, smaller than said
front wheel motor means, for driving said rear wheel;
(d) variable volume, two way hydraulic pump means con-
nected to said front and rear wheel hydraulic motor means
in closed loop and parallel hydraulic systems for supply-
ing said wheel motor means with pressure fluid in volumes
to rotate said wheels to move said harvester at common
linear speeds, and at pressures in combination with rela-
tive difference in sizes of front and rear wheel motor
means to rotate said front wheels with greater torque than
said rear wheel; *
(e) piler means pivotally mounted on said tricycle running
gear behind and inboard of said fixed front wheels to
extend on each side of said centered rear wheel and rear
wardly therebeyond for piling cut cane behind and to
respective sides of said tricycle running gear.
(0 cane fall directing means pivotally mounted on each of
the free ends of said piler means for defining therebetween
movable cut cane exit terminals and directing fall of cane
therefrom; and
(g) auxiliary hydraulic power means mounted on said tricy-
cle running gear for pivoting said piler means to respec-
tive positions for piling behind and to the sides of said
harvester and for conforming cane fall directiing means to
said piling positions.
April 19. 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
605
4,380^2
CABLE SUSPENDED CONVEYOR
Hans de Bnign, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to Aggregates Equip-
ment, Inc., Leola, Pa.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,459
Int. a.3 B65G 21/10
U.S. a. 198—318 10 Qaims
1. In a stacker for moving aggregate material to and from
piles of varying heights wherein a mast located between the
ends of a conveyor supports the conveyor at varying angles to
the horizontal, the conveyor is anchored at its lower end by a
conveyor pivot point, the conveyor is supported from the mast
and raised and lowered by cables, and the lower end of the
mast is restrained to prevent radial movement relative to the
conveyor pivot point, the improvement comprising:
the mast oriented at an angle to the vertical with its top end
leaning in toward the conveyor pivot point and the mast
anchored at its lower end at a mast pivot to permit varia-
tions in its angle to the vertical;
the conveyor suspended from the mast by cables of non-
varying length, with the vectors of the forces on all the
cables converging at a single point and the cables attached
to a cable anchor means;
a cable anchor means located on and movably attached to
the mast to permit raising and lowering of the cable an-
chor means on the mast;
a motor means attached to the cable anchor means and
capable of raising and lowering the cable anchor means on
the mast; and
a radial force means attached near the lower end of the mast
to maintain an inward force on the lower end of the mast.
become separated from each other, said device comprising:
two discs arranged parallel to and in spaced relationship to
each other and one on top of the other, said discs being rotat-
able about axes of rotation extending perpendicular to their
centers, said axes being disposed in a substantially vertical
plane extending in spaced relationship parallel to said con-
veyor and said axes being offset with respect to each other in
said vertical plane, a plurality of first pins situated at equal
distances from each other and pivotally secured in the upper
one of said two discs at equal distances from the center of said
upper disc and relatively near the circumference of said upper
disc, a plurality of second pins corresponding in number to said
plurality of first pins and being pivotally secured in the lower
one of said two discs relatively near its circumference and at
the same radial distances from its center as the first pins are
from the center of the upper disc, a plurality of connecting
members respectively connecting the lower ends of the plural-
ity of first pins with the upper ends of the plurality of second
pins, said second pins extending through said lower disc, a
plurality of push plates respectively connected to the lower
ends of said second pins, each of said push plates forming one
leg of a rectangularly bent plate, the other leg of said bent plate
being directed transverse to said conveyor, each of said push
plates having a length not exceeding the length 1 of the objects
to be pushed off. the distances in a straight line between the
center lines of the second pins equaling said length 1 of the
objects, said discs overlapping said conveyor to such an extent
that when the discs are rotating the push plates will brush over
the conveyor over a distance at least equal to said width b of
the objects, the radial distance between each pin and the center
of the disc to which it is connected exceeding (4^-|- l2)/8ft.
4,380,283
DEVICE FOR PUSHING OBJECTS OFF A CONVEYOR
Johannes D. van Maanen, Berkel, Netherlands, assignor to
Tevopharni-Schiedam B.V., Schiedam, Netherlands
Continuation of Ser. No. 60,002, Jul. 24, 1979, abandoned, which
is a continuation of Ser. No. 821,945, Aug. 4, 1977, abandoned.
This application Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,027
Int. a.^ B65G 47/31
U.S. a. 198—456 3 Oaims
4380,284
CHIP CONVEYER
Takeshi Ito, Tama; Shuzo Ishizuka; Keiichi Goto, both of
Sagamihara, and Keiki Saito, Yokohama, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Caterpillar Mitsubishi Ltd., Japan
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,297
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 28, 1979, 54-
135582[U]
Int. C\? B65G 45/00
U.S. a. 198—494 9 Claims
1}
1. A device for pushing objects having a length 1 and a
width b and lying end to end on a conveyor, essentially hori-
zontally off from said conveyor one at a time so that they
1. A chip conveyor for receiving metal chip material at a
multitude of feed openings and transmitting said chip material
to a discharge gate comprising,
a cylindrical, lengthy trough substantially closed continu-
ously along its length and having a discharge gate at one
end and a plurality of hoppers for receiving said chip
material disposed between both ends of said trough,
a plurality of endless chains running within the lower part of
said trough in its loaded run and running outside of said
trough in its return run,
means for tensioning said chains disposed at one end of said
trough,
a driving means for driving said chains,' and
a cam means for giving vibration to said chains disposed
outside of said trough and powered by said driving means.
606
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,285
APPARATUS FOR ALIGNING CHIPS DURING THE
MANUFACTURE OF CHIPBOARDS
Wolfgant Biirkner, and Franz-Josef Ebert. both of Darmstadt,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Carl Schenck A.G.. Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 28, 1981. Ser. No. 229,102
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 16,
1980. 3018683
Int. CI.' B65G 47/18
U.S. a. 198—533 10 Oaims
portion connected upperiy to said exit, characterized in that
said channel also comprises a substantially U-shaped curved
portion with its concavity facing upwards, of which a first end
communicates with said inlet and the second end communi-
cates with the lower end of said vertical portion; and said feed
means comprise a first conveyor belt defining an outer curved
wall of said curved portion and a first wall of said vertical
portion, a second conveyor belt mobile at the same speed as
said first conveyor belt and defining, at least partly, a second
wall of said vertical portion facing said first wall, and a rotat-
ablc drum constituting a support for said first conveyor belt
along said curved portion and rotatable by said first conveyor
belt; said drum defining an inner curved wall of said curved
portion which faces and is parallel to said outer curved wall,
and is m bar-shaped article delivery communication with said
second wall.
//d
/
i; k, ,•■/
//
1 An apparatus for aligning particles in a preferred longitu-
dinal direction on a moving substrate comprising a housing
having an inlet and an outlet, the outlet being disposed above
the moving substrate, a set of parallel substantially vertical
aligning plates spaced from each other being mounted immedi-
atel> within the outlet, sets of solid discs Hanked by spiked
discs being rotatably mounted above the set of aligning plates
and substantially parallel to the preferred longitudinal direc-
tion and the sets o{ discs being spaced from each other and
disposed at least in part above and over the aligning plates,
whereby the particles are fed to the aligning plates in a substan-
tially aligned manner which is maintained by the aligning
plates.
4,380,286
CONVEYOR SYSTEM FOR BAR-SHAPED ARTICLES,
PARTICULARLY CIGARETTES
Enzo Seragnoli, Bologna, Italy, assignor to G. D. Societa' per
Azioni, Bologna, Italy
Filed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,344
Claims priority, application Italy, Nov. 14, 1979, 3542 .A/79
Int. CI. B65G 15/14
U.S. CI. 198—605 12 Claims
In t
■ i :.
■
. :a t
vf 4
L
•g
1 A conveyor system for bar-shaped articles, particularly
cigarettes, compnsing at least one inlet, an exit, a channel
connecting said inlet to said exit, and ffed means disposed
along said channel to move said articles along it from said inlet
to said exit, said channel comprising a substantially vertical
4,380,287
OSCILLATING-ACCUMULATING CONVEYOR SYSTEM
William L. Smock, 5831 S. Meridian St.. Indianapolis, Ind.
46217
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 213,796
Int. a.' B65G 37/00
U.S. CI. 198—648 17 Claims
I'iiW^i:^^::
m' ^4
1. In a conveyor system including a horizontally elongated
conveyor unit having a plurality of parallel spaced-apart
freely-rotatable conveyor rolls, driving means for cyclically
reciprocating the conveyor unit back and forth in the elon-
gated direction thereof through a predetermined stroke, and a
skid adapted to be conveyed by said conveyor unit, said skid
including a base rollingly supported on said conveyor rolls, the
improvement comprising:
elongated stationary reaction means positioned adjacent said
conveyor unit and extending longitudinally therealong;
one-way holding means mounted on said skid and coacting
with said reaction means for permitting said skid to be
moved forwardly during the forward stroke of said con-
veyor unit while preventing rearward movement of the
skid during the rearward stroke of said conveyor unit,
whereby the skid is intermittently advanced in a steplike
manner along the conveyor unit due to the cyclic recipro-
cation thereof; and
means mounting said one-way holding means on said skid for
permitting said holding means to be selectively moved
between first and second positions relative to said skid
when the latter is supported on said conveyor unit, said
holding means when in said first position coacting with
said reaction means for causing the skid to be unidirection-
ally stepped in one direction along the conveyor unit in
response to the cyclic reciprocation thereof, and said
holding means when in said second position coacting with
said reaction means for causing the skid to be unidirection-
ally stepped in the opposite direction along the conveyor
unit in response to the cyclic reciprocation thereof.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
607
4,380,288
CONVEYOR
Theodore B. Bodbner; Joseph S. David, both of Franklin, and
Alexander W. Calder, Pittsburgh, all of Pa., assignors to Joy
Manufacturing Company, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 701,770, Jul. 2, 1976, abandoned. This
appUcation Dec. 19, 1977, Ser. No. 862,254
Int a.3 B65G 15/08
U.S. a. 198— 820 5 Claims
1. A conveying apparatus comprising: an elongated frame
including an elongated, endless guide means; a conveying
means coextensive with said guide means and including an
endless, troughed conveying element and a support means; said
conveying means being orbitally movable with respect to said
guide means through an elongated endless path located later-
ally adjacent said guide means in such a manner that seriatim
portions of said conveying element traverse, in sequence, at
least a first elongated portion of said endless path, a discharge
portion of said endless path and a second elongated portion of
said endless path, wherein a major extent of said first and
second elongated portions of said endless path extend longitu-
dinally adjacent the respective laterally opposite sides of said
frame, said support means being cooperable with said guide
means and said conveying element for cantilever support of
said conveying element with respect to said guide means at
least during movement of said conveying means through said
first elongated portion of said endless path; and said support
means including a portion thereof cooperable with said guide
means and said conveying element to provide support for said
seriatim portions of said conveying element with respect to
said guide means during traverse thereby of said elongated and
said discharge portions of said endless path and to effect move-
ment of said seriatim portions of said conveying element from
a first orientation thereof to a second orientation thereof for
discharge of material from said seriatim portions during tra-
verse thereby of said discharge portion of said endless path.
4,380,289
PAPERBOARD DISPENSER PACKAGE WITH
REMOVABLE SCOOP PANEL
Stanley K. Bigelow, St Joseph, Mo., assignor to Champion
International Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Not. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 322,773
Int a.3 B65D 77/00
VS. a. 206—216 16 Claims
1. A rectangular-shaped paperboard dispenser package com-
prising:
an inner compartment formed from first and second opposed
pairs of substantially rectangular, upstanding inner side
panels that are alternatively foldably connected, each of
said inner side panels including a horizontally disposed,
substantially rectangular inner bottom flap foldably con-
nected to the bottom edge thereof, said inner bottom flaps
being folded to form the bottom surface of said inner
compartment; and
an outer compartment formed from first and second opposed
pairs of substantially rectangular, upstanding outer side
panels that are alternatively, foldably connected, each
outer side panel including a horizontally disposed, sub-
stantially rectangular outer bottom flap foldably con-
nected to the bottom edge thereof, said outer bottom flaps
being folded to form the bottom of said outer compart-
ment each outer side panel further including a horizon-
tally disposed substantially rectangular outer top flap
foldably connected to the top edge thereof and folded to
form the top of said outer compartment, one outer side
panel including a removable scoop p>anel for forming a
scoop, said scoop panel comprising a substantially rectan-
gular bottom surface, a first side wall foldably connected
to a first edge of said bottom surface, a second side wall
having substantially the same configuration as said first
side wall and being foldably connected to a second edge of
said bottom surface, wherein the second edge of the bot-
tom surface is opposite the first edge thereof, first and
second substantially rectangular end flaps foldably con-
nected to said first and second side walls, respectively,
said foldable connection between said side walls and said
end flaps being substantially perpendicular to said foldable
connection between said side walls and said bottom sur-
face, a substantially rectangular exterior end wall foldably
connected to a third edge of said bottom surface and
disposed between said end flaps, a substantially rectangu-
lar interior end wall foldably connected to the edge of said
exterior end wall opposite said bottom surface, said end
walls being adapted to foldably engage said end flaps to
secure said end flaps in perpendicular disposition to both
said bottom surface and said side walls for forming said
scoop panel into a scoop.
4,380,290
SHIPPING AND STORAGE CONTAINER
RandaU A. Lnebke, 311 5th St, Huntington Beach, Calif. 92648
FUed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,384
Int a.3 B65D 25/04
VS. a. 206—315 R 6 Claims
1. A shipping, storing and carrying container comprising:
an elongated, monolithic, tubular housing having oppositely
disposed open ends;
a pair of cap members adapted to be removably mounted to
said housing, to cover each of said open ends thereof;
a releasable locking means positioned between said cap
1029 O.G.— 29
608
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
members and said housing, to lock said cap members to
said housing;
a slidably adjustable partition positioned within said hous-
ing;
a first and second chamber in said housing defined by said
partition;
means for adjusting said partition to a selected position
within said tubular housing;
means for securing said partition in said selected position;
each of said cap members comprising:
a closure wall having an outwardly projecting peripheral
flange member;
a peripheral rib formed in said closure wall adjacent said
peripheral-flange member, thereby defining a peripheral
groove adapted to receive said open end of said housing
therein; and
a slot disposed in said closure wall, to allow said adjusting
means of said partition to extend outwardly from said
housing;
wherein said adjustable means of said partition comprises an
elongated longitudinal strap member attached to said
partition, wherein the ends of said strap member are
passed through said slots in said cap members, and are
adapted to be secured to each other on the outer surface of
said housing, after said partition is arranged in a selected
position, and wherein said securing means is mounted to
said strap member.
4,380,291
BATTERY TERMINAL CONNECTOR AND METHOD
John K. Shannon, 200 S. Vincennes Cr., Racine, Wis. 53402
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,705
Int. a.3 B65D 85/28
U.S. a. 206—343 18 Qaims
12^11
S
DISPLAY BOAR
(&^^I^$5!WdiSrd^^
kio^
1. A battery terminal having a reinforcement strip for a
plurality of terminals which assists in orienting the strip for
casting metal thereabout to form a plurality of severable termi-
nals comprising, in combination,
an interior reinforcement strip for a plurality of terminals
formed of a conductive metal defining a terminal aperture
at a mid-portion,
said reinforcement being formed with a plurality of units
terminating in a cable connector portion remote from the
terminal aperture,
each cable connector portion being substantially rectangular
and having connector holes,
each of said terminals being separated from the adjacent
terminals by a line of weakness along an edge portion of
the adjacent reinforcement portions formed in said rein-
forcement strip,
said connector and holes serving to orient the reinforcement
in a plurality of mold cavities,
a connector body material formed to encase each of the
plurality of members, the size and proportion of which
defines the completed terminal connector,
each of said terminals being readily severable from the adja-
cent unit by breaking along the line of weakness.
4,380,292
PAIOINTERAL NEEDLE RECEPTACLE
Kathleen J. Qramer, 4240 Crooked Tree Apt. #7, Wyoming,
Mich. 49509
FUed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,345
Int. a.J B65D 85/24; B65F 7/00; A61C 17/02; B65D 81/00
U.S. a. 206—366 17 Claims
1. A parenteral needle receptacle comprising:
a base;
a case releasably mounted on said base, said case having
walls defining a first open end adjacent said base and also
having a second open end opposite to and smaller than
said first open end;
means operatively connected to at least one of said base and
said case for mounting said receptacle on a supporting
object; and
a disposable needle receiving block positioned within and
substantially filling said case, said block being sufficiently
small to be inserted into said case through said first open
end and being larger than said second open end whereby
it is retained thereadjacent.
4,380,293
SOCKET WRENCH DISPLAY PACKAGE
Donald G. Wilcox, Seymour, and Nobile Zambrano, Branford,
both of Conn., assignors to Sbow-Pak, Incorporated, New
Haven, Conn.
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,327
Int. a.3 B65D 73/02
U.S. a. 206—563 5 Claims
1. A display package and case comprising a blow molded
plastic base having spaced upper and lower walls and a periph-
eral wall extending therebetween; said upper wall having a
first set of a plurality of frustro-conical depressions formed
therein open at the upper wall and having bases sealed to said
lower wall of the base to provide reinforcement for said walls
to rigidify said blow molded base, said upper wall having a
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
609
second set of depressions formed therein of predetermined
shape defining flat wall portions of said upper wall therebe-
tween all lying on the same plane, said second set of depres-
sions being dimensioned with respect to objects to be received
therein such that the outermost surfaces of objects in the de-
pressions lie in said plane, and a transparent cover panel se-
cured to said upper wall and supported on said flat wall por-
tions thereof to hold said objects in said depressions; at least
one of said frustroconical depressions having a key hole shaped
knock-out formed therein.
4,380,294
APPARATUS FOR ASSORTING ARTICXES ACXX)RDING
TO SIZE
Billy J. Morris, Visalia, Calif., assignor to Industrial Manufac-
turers of Orosi, Orosi, Calif.
FUed Feb. S, 1981, Ser. No. 231,661
Int. a.' B07B 13/05
U.S. a. 209—540 23 Claims
flute length station means and said sorting station means
for controlling:
(1) the loading of drills into said automatic drill deburhng
and sorting machine by said loading station means;
(2) the measurement of the overall length and diameter of
drills by said measuring station means;
1. In an apparatus for assorting articles according to size
having means for conveying such articles along a predeter-
mined path from a receiving station through a plurality of
successive assorting stations, and means at the assorting sta-
tions for removing articles from the conveyor of predeter-
mined respective sizes decreasing in the direction of article
conveyance; the conveying means comprising:
A. a pair of transversely substantially planar elongated end-
less belts;
B. means mounting the belts with substantially horizontal
edgewardly adjacent upper runs transversely angularly
related to form an upwardly disposed article transporting
trough therebetween; and
C. drive means for causing the upper runs of the belts to
travel longitudinally to transport the articles from the
receiving station to the assorting stations.
(3) the deburring of drills and the determination of the
point on said drills where the flute ends by said debur-
ring and flute length station means; and,
(4) the directing of drills into receptacles by said sorting
station means.
4,380,296
YARN HOLDER AND METHOD OF SEPARATING YARN
BY COLOR
James F. Murray, and Genera A. Murray, both of 4808 Sipple
Ave., Baltimore, Md. 21206
FUed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,732
Int. aj B07C 7/04: B65D 85/00
VJS. a. 209—704 7 Claims
4,380,295
AUTOMATIC DRILL DEBURRING AND SORTING
MACHINE
Mark S. Soderberg, Seattle; Albert L. Hametner, West Seattle;
Herman F. Leppink, Renton, and David E. Strand, Seattle, all
of Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle, Wash.
FUed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,190
Int a.J B07C 5/00; B21H 3/10
U.S. a. 209—558 45 Claims
1. An automatic drill deburring and sorting machine com-
prising:
(A) loading station means for loading drills into said auto-
matic drill deburring and sorting machine;
(B) measuring station means for receiving drills from said
loading station means and measuring the overall length
and diameter of said drills;
(C) deburring and flute length station means for receiving
drills from said measuring station means, deburring the
margins of said drills and determining the point on the
drill drills where said flutes end;
(D) sorting station means for receiving drills from said de-
burring and flute length station means and directing said
drills into receptacles; and,
(E) control station means connected to said loading station
means, said measuring station means, said deburring and
l7 T
1. A yam holder comprising:
(a) a substantially circular disc,
(b) a plurality of substantially circular holes formed in said
disc, each of said holes being located substantially on a
radius and being substantially equidistant from each other,
(c) a plurality of substantially radial tabs, equal in number to
the holes located substantially on radii adjacent to respec-
tive holes, and
(d) a plurality of elongated posts having one end thereof
secured to the bottom of said disc, and a base secured to
the other ends of said posts.
4,380,297
PIPE STORAGE SYSTEM
Robert Frias, Odessa, Tex., assignor to Ingram CorporatioB,
New Orleans, La.
FUed Feb. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 125,159
Int a.3 B65G 1/10; E21B 19/14
VS. a. 211—60 S 28 Claims
1. A storage apparatus for holding lengths of pipe or the lUte
comprising:
610
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
a pair of vertical stanchions secured in place in spaced rela-
tion,
a plurality of pairs of horizontal rails for supporting a plural-
ity of rows of pipe, each said rail having first and second
ends,
each said pair of rails being adapted to be coupled to said
pair of stanchions respectively such that each pair of rails
is at a different level and said plurality of pairs of rails
from two vertical rows of rails,
each said vertical rows of rails being coupled at said first end
to one of said stanchions.
each said pair of rails being adapted to support a row of pipe
and to be supported by a lower row of pipe, and
each said stanchion comprising structure which acts as a
guide to allow said rails coupled thereto to be moved
upward or downward to different levels, and
each said stanchion comprising two parallel upright mem-
bers providing a vertical slot for slidingly receiving said
first end of said rails, and a guide means for preventing
horizontal movement of said rails beyond said guide
means.
,«Ti' ii-uii
opening having a predetermined width and a predetermined
depth, an improved joint for attaching said base to said frame
comprising a rigid elongated flat strap having two sides and
two ends, means attaching one of said strap ends to said base
with said strap extending longitudinally upwardly from said
base, said strap having a width slightly less than said predeter-
mined width for telescoping from the open bottom into the
upright opening with one of said strap sides abutting an interior
side of said upright, two clips extending from the other of said
strap sides with one of said clips located at the end of said strap
spaced from said base and the other of said clips located near
said base, each of said clips and said strap having a combined
maximum depth slightly greater than said predetermined depth
for an interference fit within the upright opening, whereby,
when said strap is telescoped into the upright opening, said
strap and the attached clips frictionally engage said upright.
4,380,299
TAMPER PROOF CLOSURE
Santos A. A. Alejandro Llera, Rio Piedras, P.R., assignor to
Precision Plastic Products Corporation, Toa B^ja, P.R.
FUed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 185,889
Int. a.3 B65D 43/14
U.S. a. 215—252 26 Claims
4,380,298
KNOCK DOWN STORE DISPLAY nXTURE
Robert G. Harig, Paragould, Ark., assignor to Darling Store
Fixtures, Paragould, Ark.
FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,451
Int a.3 A47F 5/00
U.S. a. 211—189 8 Claims
1. In a display flxture having a frame and at least one base,
said frame including at least one hollow upright having a
rectangular cross-section and an open bottom, such upright
1. A tamper proof closure for use in combination with a
container with a neck finish having a threaded ^rtion and a
retaining means therebelow having a bottom surface, said
closure comprising:
a body having a substantially straight side wall having an
inner surface with an internally threaded portion located
on said inner surface and a breakaway portion therebelo^;
a frangible portion connecting said breakaway portion to
said side wall;
said breakaway portion adapted to slide over said retaining
means as the closure is threaded onto the container and
having a ring adapted to be disposed below of and adja-
cent to said retaining means when said closure is fully
threaded onto the container;
said ring having located thereon at least one locking means
adapted to engage the bottom surface of the retaining
means to secure the closure in place when the closure is
fully threaded onto the container;
whereby when the closure is unthreaded from the container,
the breakaway portion will be severed from the body at
the frangible portion by the retaining means acting on the
ring leaving said breakaway portion on said container as
an indication of tampering.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
611
4,380,300
AIR CARGO CONTAINER
Elton E. Moontz, Morgantown, and Paul H. Martin, East Earl,
both of Pa^ assignors to Morgan Trailer Mfg. Co., Morgan-
town, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 122,139, Feb. 19, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,407
Int a.3 B65D 25/00
VJS. a. 220—1.5 5 Claims
notch formed in the outer edge of the reinforcing strip, the ub
being staked and engaging the notch in the outer edge of the
strip, and a staked segment of the side wall engaging an inner
edge of the strip to secure the strip to the flange.
4,380,302
CONTAINER CLOSURE
DaTid Broad, Crawley, Eaglaad, assignor to FIsons Lindted,
Ea^and
FUed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,939
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 19, 1980,
8012969
Int a.3 B65D 53/00
UAQ. 220— 235 ^ 5 Claims
1. In an air cargo container having a plurality of enclosing
walls including a bottom wall with fork lift receiving openings
on at least one side, the improvement which comprises
protective means for said openings having fork lift tongue
impact resistant upright outer wall portions extending
outwardly from said openings to protect said container,
said protective means comprises a lower casting through
which one of said openings extends,
said lower casting is fixedly mounted on said container, and
an upper casting is mounted above said lower casting and is
detachably secured to a portion of the container.
4,380,301
STAKED REINFORCED STRIPS
Norman L. Eisman, Columbus, Ind., assignor to Anrin Indus-
tries, Inc., Columbus, Ind.
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,978
Int a.3 B65D 6/36; F16N 31/00
U.S.a.220— 73 15 Claims
IS 18
10. In an oil pan having a side wall, a flange extending out-
wardly from the side wall for mounting the pan, the flange
having a substantially flat, upper planar sealing surface and a
substantially flat, lower planar surface opposed to the sealing
surface, a reinforcing strip on the surface opposed to the seal-
ing suiface, and a mechanical connection for securing the
reinforcing strip to the flange, the mechanical connection
comprising a tab formed on the outer edge of the flange, and a
notch formed in the outer edge of the reinforcing strip and
aligned with the tab, the notch defming an opening through the
strip, the tab being staked and engaging the notch to secure the
strip to the flange.
12. In an oil pan having a side wall, a flange extending out-
wardly from the side waU for mounting the pan, a reinforcing
strip on the flange, and a mechanical connection for securing
the reinforcing strip to the flange, the mechanical connection
comprising a tab formed on the outer edge of the flange, a
1. A closure cap having an aperture therethrough and
adapted to be mounted in sealing engagement upon the open
end of a tubular container, said closure cap comprising an
outer member having a dependant annular skirt; a dependant
central portion which together with the skirt defmes an annu-
lar recess adapted to receive the open end of the container, the
central portion having a substantially central longitudinal bore
therethrough; a transverse member mounted substantially
co-axially within the outer member and having a longitudinal
stem located within the bore in the central portion and axially
movable relative to the central portion; the longitudinal stem
having a longitudinal bore therethrough which is the aperture
of the closure cap, and wherein the aperture has a narrower
diameter portion thereof extending for from 5 to 25% of the
length of the aperture.
4,380,303
MOLDED CONTAINER AND OPENING MEANS
THEREFORE
Darid O. AUen, WUmington, and Harry A. E. Wombold, Day-
ton, both of Ohio, assignors to Buckeye Molding Company,
New Vienna, Ohio
FUed No?. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,429
Int a.» B65D 17/40
VS. a. 220—276 21 Claims
11. A molded one-piece plastic container blank comprising a
612
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
tubular body open at one end thereof and having integrally 4,380,305
formed closure means closing the opposite end thereof, said MANUALLY REMOVABLE SEAL FOR BUCKETS AND
body including a chime surrounding said opposite end, said CANS
closure means including a closure panel spaced inwardly of ^o^ ^- Von Holdt, 7430 N. Croname Rd., Niles, 111. 60648
said container from said chime and a relatively thin and
thereby weakened first web bridging the space between said
chime and said closure panel and having uninterruptedly con-
tinuous junctures with each of said chime and said closure
panel, said closure panel having an integrally formed side wall
which is inwardly convergent from said web, said side wall
having an outer surface notched to define a second web spaced
from and extending parallel to said first web, said side wall
having a groove defining a third web therein extending from
said first web to said second web, and pull open means one-
piece with said side wall disposed adjacent said third web and
manually puUable for rupturing said first, second and third
webs.
U.S,
FUed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,258
Int. a.3 B65D 41/16. 41/18
a. 220— 306
8aaini8
CONTAINER HAVING AN INTEGRAL HANDLE AN A
CLOSURE
George C. Anderson, 212 Coyentry PL, Mt. Prospect, 111. 60056
FUed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,200
Int. a.3 B65D 41/16, 41/18
U.S. a. 220—306 32 Claims
xxxx-
1. A container including a molded resilient plastic vessel
having one end open, and a molded resilient plastic cover for
removably and sealingly mounting on the open end of the
vessel to close the vessel for retaining within the vessel mate-
rial including liquids wherein: the molded plastic vessel in-
cludes; a circular cylindrical wall; a bottom formed integral
with one end of the cylindrical wall and the opposite end of the
cylindrical wall being the open end; a handle assembly having
a portion formed integral with the outer surface of the cylindri-
cal wall adjacent to the open end, said handle assembly includ-
ing a handle having its opposite ends formed integral with the
cylindrical wall, and a top seal formed integral with the cylin-
drical wall defining the open end of the cylindrical wall, said
top seal including, a bead formed integral with the cylindrical
wall, a top surface formed integral with the bead, a side defin-
ing the outer periphery of the bead, and a lower locking face
formed integral with the bead, and said cover including; a
circular top; and a cover seal formed integral with the top; said
cover seal including; a ring wall formed integral with the outer
periphery of the top, an annular inner seal formed integral with
the interior surface of the top and being engageable with the
top seal of the vessel to form a seal therebetween, an annular
peripheral seal formed integral with the interior surface of the
ring wall and being engageable with the side of the top seal of
the vessel to form a seal therebetween, and an annular lock
formed integral with the ring wall and engageable with the
lower locking face of the top seal to hold the cover in engage-
ment with the vessel.
1. A bucket lid made of flexible plastic, said lid defining an
annular, peripheral gripping channel for receiving and holding
the lip of a bucket, said gripping channel defining an outer and
inner wall, said bucket lid also defining an annular inner chan-
nel defined by the wall of the lid and projecting outwardly
therefrom relative to an attached bucket, said inner channel
being positioned radially inside of and adjacent said gripping
channel, whereby manual depression of a point of said inner
channel causes a portion of the outer wall of the gripping
channel to disengage a bucket lip retained in said gripping
channel, permitting the lid to be peeled off of the bucket for
opening.
4,380,306
SMALL BEER CONTAINER
Klara Knopf, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Karl
Horst Knopf, Solingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 234,097
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 4,
1980, 3021057
Int. a.3 B65D 83/00; F37L 37/18
U.S. a. 222—89 5 Claims
1. A beer container device for use with a tap fitting having
opposingly projecting fastening stirrups and a descending pipe,
said device comprising:
(a) a container of plastic material having a narrow neck at
the top thereof,
(b) a cover mounted in gas-tight relationship on said neck,
(c) a rubber stopper being positioned in said cover and ex-
tending into said neck, said stopper being adapted to be
pierced by said descending pipe,
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
613
(d) said cover having a pair of opposingly projecting arms
for receiving said opposingly projecting fastening stirrups
of said tap fitting.
4,380,307
DISPENSING DEVICES
Scott H. Stillinger, Los Gates, Calif., assignor to Dart Industries
Inc., Northbrook, lU.
Continuation of Ser. No. 964,715, Not. 29, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,216
Int. a.3 B65D Bim
U.S. a. 222—142.9 19 Qaims
conduit, and for purging said conduit of adhesive material
when said container is replaced or refilled, comprising:
means for providing compressed air under pressure,
first and second air lines each having one end secured to said
compressed air means,
pressure regulator means communicating with the opposite
end of said first air line,
a normally closed solenoid valve means communicating
with the opposite end of said second air line,
said container having a lid defining first and second open-
ings,
dip tube means extending downwardly from said second
opening,
a third air line having one end in communication with said
pressure regulator means and an opposite end secured to
said first opening in said lid for providing pressurized air
to said container,
said flexible conduit having one end secured to said second
opening for receiving adhesive from said container,
means for dispensing said adhesive, said dispensing means
having an open end,
said flexible conduit having an opposite end secured to said
adhesive dispensing means,
first valve means for opening and closing said flexible con-
duit,
1. A closure device for a container provided with at least
three compartments open at the top of the container and angu-
larly offset from one another around the container axis, said
device comprising:
cover means mounted on top of said container, and rotatable
about its axis, said cover means overlying all of said com-
partments and presenting first and second dispensing
openings having respectively different configurations and
spaced apart from one another about the container axis,
said cover means presenting a compartment sealing region
between said openings;
cap means covering the top of said container, enclosing said
cover means and provided with an outlet opening, said
cap means being mounted for rotation about the axis of
said container to bring said outlet opening into alignment
with any selected one of said compartments; and
linkage means connected between said cover means and said
cap means for permitting said cap means to rotate relative
to said cover means through an angular path over which
said cap means outlet opening moves between said first
and second dispensing openings of said cover means and
for causing said cap means and cover means to rotate as a
unit when said cap means outlet opening is aligned with
one of said dispensing openings and said cap means is
rotating in the direction away from the other said dispens-
ing opening with respect to the angular path.
4380J06
SELF-CLEANING ADHESIVE DISPENSING APPARATUS
David L. Gfeenwood, 3118 Sandy La., Glenview, 111. 60025
FUed Dec. 23, 1960, Ser. No. 220,247
Int CL^ B67D im
U.S. a. 222— 148 5CI«inis
1. A self-cleaning apparatus for dispensing adhesive materi-
als from a sealed container of adhesive through a flexible
a fourth air line extending between and communicating with
said solenoid valve means and said first valve means,
means for actuating said solenoid valve means for providing
pressurized air to travel through said solenoid and said
fourth air line to said first valve means,
a fifth air line having one end communicating with said
second air line between said compressed air means and
said solenoid valve means,
nozzle means secured to the opposite end of said fifth air
line, said nozzle means being adapted to provide an air
tight connection with said open end of said dispensing
means,
second valve means for opening and closing said fifth air
line,
whereby said dispensing means, said flexible conduit and
said dip tube means may be purged of said adhesive when
desired by connecting said open end of said dispensing
means to said nozzle means, closing said pressure regula-
tor means, and opening said first and second valve means,
whereupon said compressed air travels from said means
for providing compressed air, through said second air line,
said fifth air line, said nozzle means, said dispensing means,
said flexible conduit, said dip tube means, and into said
container, thereby flushing said adhesive into said con-
tainer from said dispensing means, said flexible conduit
and said dip tube means.
614
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,309
DEVELOPER SUPPLY DEVICE
\uH Takahashj, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,342
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 21, 1980, 55-5424
Int. a.3 GOIF I J/28
U.S. a. 222-450 15 Claims
1. A developer supply device for supplying a developing
device with developer consisting of a mixture of toner and
carrier, said developer supply device having:
toner supply means for supplying toner;
carrier supply means having a supply port for supplying
carrier;
magnetic field forming means provided near the carrier
supply port of said carrier supply means and including an
electromagnet and a permanent magnet disposed in op-
posed relation therewith; and
means for controlling the intensity of a magnetic field im-
parted to the supply port of said carrier supply means by
said magnetic field forming means, the intensity of the
magnetic field being varied by said control means so that
the passage of the carrier through said carrier supply port
and prevention of said passage are selectively effected.
4J80310
FLEXIBLE CONTAINER WITH DISPLACEABLE
FnriNG AND PROBE COUPLER APPARATUS
John W. Schneiter, Arlington Heights; Ronald J. Reiss, Hoff-
man Estates, and Albert G. Enskat, Barrington, all of 111.,
assignors to Container Technologies, Inc., Barrington, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 285,937, Jul. 23, 1981, which is
a continuation of Ser. No. 142,154, Apr. 21, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,392
Int. aj B65D 25/44
U.S. a. 222-501 15 Claims
between positions to open and close said first aperture
means;
said probe connector providing means for connecting said
closure fitment to a delivery tube for conveying fluid from
said container to a point of use; said probe connector
comprising probe means, probe adapter means, and a
second aperture means; said probe adapter means being
detachably connectible to said closure fitment to place
said second aperture means in communication with said
first aperture means; said probe means having a tubular
body slidably joumaled in said adapter means for axial
movement between positions to open and close said sec-
ond aperture means;
a manually rotatable probe actuating member connected to
said probe means and threadedly engaged with said
adapter means to move said probe means in an axial direc-
tion in response to rotation of said probe actuating mem-
ber relative to said adapter means;
whereby forward flow of fluid is enabled from the container
to the point of use by opening the first and second aperture
means when the probe connector is connected to the
closure fitment; and whereby further, back flow of fluid
from the delivery tube is prevented by closing the second
aperture means when the probe connector is disconnected
from the closure fitment.
4,380,311
DEVICE FOR GUIDING A KNTTTED OR WOVEN
FABRIC
Soichi Torii, Kyoto, Japan, assignor to Torri Winding Machine
Co., Ltd., Kyoto, Japan
per No. PCr/JP79/00190, § 371 Date Jul. 29, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 23, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01158, PCT Pub.
Date Jun. 12, 1980
PCT FUed Jul. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 204,375
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Not. 29, 1978, 53-165440
Int. a.3 B65H 17/20
U.S. a. 226-190 9 Claims
1. The combination of a closure fitment, a seal plug, and a
probe connector for use with a disposable container;
said closure fitment comprising a hollow body having a
portion attachable to a wall of Ae container and having a
passageway providing communication between the exte-
rior and the interior of the contaner;
said seal plug preventing external contaminants from enter-
ing the container and controlling flow of fluid from the
container through a first aperture means, said seal plug
comprising a body which is movable within said fitment
1. A device for guiding a knitted or woven fabric flattened
or folded into a half width, to form a fabric having an inside
half and an outside half, conveyed by means of a taking-up
mechanism which comprises: a plurality of fabric guiding
surfaces extending parallel to and arranged equidistant radially
around an axis, said axis being perpendicular to the conveying
direction of the fabric and parallel to the surface of the flat-
tened or folded fabric, said fabric guiding surfaces being rotat-
able about said axis, for transverse contact with the inside half
of the guided fabric on which inside half is superposed the
outside half, and a plurality of spaces for receiving a longitudi-
nal part of the inside half of the fabric, said spaces being formed
between adjacent fabric guiding surfaces.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
615
4,380^12
STAPLING TOOL
Edward L. Landrus, Coon Rapids, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
FUed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,796
Int. a.J B25C 1/04. 1/06. 3/00
U.S. a. 227—116 19 Qaims
piston and guided in said driving barrel, first valve means for
controlling the flow of air under pressure to said cylinder to
move said working piston from a driving to a driven position,
valve regulated means for returning the working piston from
the driven position to the driving position, said valve regulated
means comprising a pilot cylinder, a piston oi>erated assembly
including a pilot piston disposed in said pilot cylinder and
1. A tool for applying fasteners to fasten an article to a
workpiece, comprising:
a flxed guide for holding a plurality of said fasteners therein,
one of said plurality of fasteners being held in a drive
position;
a compressible foot operatively coupled to said fixed guide
defining a drive groove, said compressible foot adapted to
contact said workpiece and be compressed into said fixed
guide, said drive groove engaging the fastener located in
said drive position and providing support for said fastener
during a driving operation;
said compressible foot and said fixed guide cooperating with
each other and with said article and said workpiece to
allow said compressible foot to be compressed into said
fixed guide a distance dependent upon the thickness of
said article;
a plunger operatively coupled to said fixed guide for driving
the fastener located in said driving position from said fixed
guide through said drive groove of said compressible foot
and into said workpiece; and
a drive limiting means coupled to said plunger for prevent-
ing said plunger from driving beyond a fixed predeter-
mined position relative to said fixed guide;
whereby said fastener located in said drive position may be
driven into said workpiece a distance relative to said fixed
guide and into said workpiece a distance dependent upon
said thickness of said article.
constructed and arranged to control movement of movable
means to contact said working piston to return it to the driving
position and second valve means for regulating the flow of
high pressure air to and from said pilot cylinder, whereby the
movable means will be out of contact with said driving piston
during its driving action and will be moved into contact with
the driving piston after it has been driven to return it to the
driving position.
4,380,314
BOX TYPE CARTON WITH HINGED LID AND ONE
PIECE REINFORCED INSERT
Joseph Langston, Jr., Jacksonville, Fla., and Robert J. Murray,
Norcross, Ga., assignors to Federal Paper Board Co., Inc.,
Montrale, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 270,594, Jun. 4, 1981. This
application Jul. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 401,242
Int. a.3 B65D 5/64. 5/56
U.S. a. 229—33 5 Claims
4,380,313
AIR-POWERED DRIVING TOOL, HAVING A PILOT
PISTON AND CYLINDER
Arthur Klaus, Frankfurt am Main, and Horst Tacke, Bad Vilbel,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Signode Corpora-
tion, Glenview, 111.
FUed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,388
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 16,
1979,2946387
Int a.5 B25C 1/04
U.S. a. 227—130 7 Claims
1. An air-powered driving tool, s;>ecially for long fixing
parts, such as fasteners, comprising a housing including a driv-
ing barrel and defining a chamber containing air under pres-
sure, a first cylinder in said housing, a working piston disposed
within said first cylinder, a driver blade joined to said working
516
I. A box in the form of a tray with a hinged lid which is
adapted for the packaging of cigars or similar articles, said box
being formed from a single cut and scored blank of relatively
lightweight paperboard, said box having a body portion com-
prising a rectangular bottom wall, front and back sidewalls and
end walls which are upstanding from the peripheral edges of
the bottom wall, and a planar lid hinged along one edge thereof
to the top edge of the back wall, the front, back and end walls
having outer and inner panels, the inner panels on the front and
end walls each being folded downwardly from a top edge of
the wall which top edge has substantial width and said inner
panels being secured on the inside of said upstanding walls, the
616
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
front and back wall forming outer panels having hinged corner
connecting panels secured between the inner and outer panels
of the end walls, and a reinforcing panel insert formed from a
single cut and scored paperboard blank of substantial thickness
secured between the inner and outer panels of said front and
end walls, said reinforcing panel comprising a rectangular
bottom reinforcing wall, front and back reinforcing sidewalls
and reinforcing end walls which are supported from said rect-
angular bottom reinforcing wall, said hinged lid comprises an
outer and inner panel of substantially the same size, and rein-
forcing panels hinged to the opposite end edges of one of said
outer and inner panels and adhesively secured between said
outer and inner panels so as to form a substantially rigid rein-
forced, planar lid structure.
4,380^15
MAILER
Donald J. Steidinger, Barrington, 111., assignor to Wallace Com-
puter Senrices, Inc., Hillside, 111.
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,926
Int. a.3 B65D 27/10
U.S. a. 229—69 22 Qaims
contained therein, the improvement in an electronic interlock
comprising:
(a) means for generating a coded electronic signal having a
predetermined code;
(b) means physically separate from said generating means for
decodng said coded electronic signal, said decoding
means responsive only to said coded electronic signal
having said predetermined code;
(c) separable means for coupling said signal from the gener-
ating means to the decoding means; and
(d) means, responsive to said decoding means detecting said
coded electronic signal having said predetermined code,
for opening said door.
4,380,317
FURNACE CONTROL
Lawrence A. Ryan, Bartlesrille, Okla., assignor to Phillips
Petroleum Company, Bartlesvllle, Okla.
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,145
Int. Q\? F23N 7/00; G06F 15/46
U.S. a. 236—15 BF 40 Claims
10. A connected series of multi-ply mailer units separable
into individual units each capable of being transversely folded
into a size approximating a No. 10 envelope so as to avoid
postal damage, each unit including an envelope-forming ply
having a control margin along at least one longitudinal side
edge and an information ply approximately as long as said
envelope-forming ply and connected thereto along the top
edge to prevent interference during computer printout, and
tear-off means along one edge for removal of the folded infor-
mation ply from the folded, sealed envelope forming ply, each
unit being equipped with at least one line of potential folding
extending transversely of said control margin to permit said
unit to be folded into at least two parts with said information
ply being present in both of said two parts whereby a large
message-bearing ply is provided in an envelope which ^ ap-
proximately one-half the size of said message-bearing ply when
said unit is folded into two parts.
4,380,316
ELECTRONIC INTERLOCK FOR A CASH COLLECnON
RECEPTACLE
John S. Glinka, Elk GroTe Villas and Larry E. Zack, Cary,
both of Dl., assignors to Qonaar Corporation, Elk Grove
Village, lU.
FUed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,228
Int a.^ G05F 9/06
U.S. a. 232—16 17 Claims
15. In a coUection receptacle for receiving cash, said recep-
tacle of the type including a compartment for receiving a
removable cash box having a door for restricting access to cash
'ta, ^
6. -^»-^ tt
1. Apparatus comprising:
a furnace having at least first and second coils;
means for spliting a first fluid stream into at least second and
third fluid streams, for passing said second fluid stream
through said first coil of said furnace and for passing said
third fluid stream through said second coil of said furnace;
means for establishing a first signal representative of the
actual pressure of said first fluid stream;
means for establishing a second signal representative of the
desired pressure of said first fluid stream;
means for comparing said first signal and said second signal
and for establishing a third signal which is responsive to
the difTerence between said first signal and said second
signal, wherein said third signal is scaled so as to be repre-
sentative of any change in the flow rate of said second and
third fluid streams required to maintain said first signal
substantially equal to said second signal;
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
617
means for establishing a fourth signal representative of the
actual temperature of said second fluid stream after said
second fluid stream has passed through said furnace;
means for establishing a flfth signal representative of the
desired temperature of both said second fluid stream after
said second fluid stream has passed through said furnace
and said third fluid stream after said third fluid stream has
passed through said furnace;
means for comparing said fourth signal and said flfth signal
and for establishing a sixth signal which is responsive to
the difference between said fourth signal and said flfth
signal, wherein said sixth signal is scaled so as to be repre-
sentative of the flow rate of said second fluid stream re-
quired to maintain said fourth signal substantially equal to
said flfth signal;
means for combining said third signal and said sixth signal to
establish a seventh signal;
means for manipulating the flow rate of said second fluid
stream in response to said seventh signal;
means for establishing an eighth signal representative of the
actual temperature of said third fluid stream after said
third fluid stream has passed through said furnace;
means for comparing said eighth signal and said flfth signal
and for establishing a ninth signal which is responsive to
the difference between said eighth signal and said flfth
signal, wherein said ninth signal is scaled so as to be repre-
sentative of the flow rate of said third fluid stream re-
quired to maintain said eighth signal substantially equal to
said flfth signal;
means for combining said third signal and said ninth signal to
establish a tenth signal; and
means for manipulating the flow rate of said third fluid
stream in response to said tenth signal.
4,380,319
LIQUID SPRAY NOZZLE
Leo J. Shigut, Torrance, Calif., assignor to Edward A. Sokolski,
Torrance, Calif., a part interest
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 801^0, Jan. 16, 1978,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 172,288, Jul. 25, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 801,390,. This
appUcation Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 357,786
Int. a.5 B05B J/32
U.S. a. 239—540 8 Claims
4,380,318
VARIABLE PRESSURE, CONSTANT FLOW DRIP
EMITTER SYSTEM AND HEAD
Byron V. Curry, 1150 Oriole Rd., Santa Barbara, Calif. 93108
FUed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,035
Int. a.3 B05B 1/30
U.S. a. 239— 533.13 11 Oaims
1. A drip emitter system including a line through which
water may pass, the line having at least one opening, and; a
drip emitter head received in the opening in the line, the head
including a bulbous end received within, and larger than, the
opening in the line, a flared top external of the line, and a shank
portion connecting the end and the top, at least a portion of the
shank tapering inwardly from the bulbous end gradually
towards the top, whereby an increase in water pressure within
the line forces the head more flrmly into the opening, and the
tapering shank gradually moves upwardly in the line to efliect
a throttling action to constrict the water flow past the bulbous
head in proportion to the increase in water pressure to propor-
tionally offset any increase in water flow that would be caused
by such pressure increase.
SOtf-
1. A nozzle for dispensing liquid comprising
tubular channel means for receiving a liquid stream at one
end thereof and outletting said liquid stream at the other
end thereof,
a first inner orificed member having a wall portion which
forms a wall for said other end of the tubular channel
means, said wall portion having a larger centrally located
circular orifice and a pair of smaller circular orifices
formed therein, said smaller orifices being symmetrically
arranged on opposite sides of the larger orifice, the center
of all of said orifices being along a common transverse
axis,
a second outer orificed plate member having a generally
biconvex shaped orifice formed substantially in the center
thereof, said biconvex shaped orifice having major and
minor axes, the minor axis of said biconvex shaped orifice
being equal in length to the diameter of said centrally
located circular orifice, the major axis of said biconvex
shaped orifice being equal in length to the distance be-
tween the centers of said smaller orifices, and
means for supporting said second outer orificed member
with the biconvex shaped orifice thereof axially aligned
with the centrally located orifice of said first inner orificed
member,
said supporting means for said second outer orifice member
being attached to said tubular channel means for rotatable
movement between the supporting and tubular channel
means,
a flat fan-shaped liquid spray being produced when said
inner and outer orificed members are relatively positioned
in a first position whereat the comers of the elliptically
shaped orifice are opposite the smaller orifices, and a
narrow cylindrical liquid stream being produced when the
inner and outer orificed members are relatively positioned
in a second position whereat a non-orificed portion of said
outer orificed member is positioned opposite the smaller
orifices of the inner orificed member.
618
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,320
ELECTROSTATIC POWDER SPRAY GUN NOZZLE
Thomas E. Hoilstein, Amherst, and Ronald J. Hartle, Lorain,
both of Ohio, assignors to Nordson Corporation, Amherst,
Ohio
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,115
Int. a.' B05B 5/04
U.S. a. 239—697 6 Qaims
1. Apparatus for the coating of an object with a powder
spray comprising:
a gas conduit adapted to be connected to a source of pressur-
ized gas to provide a central stream of pressurized gas
emitted from said gas conduit,
a nozzle surrounding said gas conduit and defining therewith
a powder coating material passageway encircling said
central stream of pressurized gas, said nozzle being
adapted to communicate with a source of fluidized pow-
der coating material under pressure for emitting powder
coating material therefrom through said passageway, and
deflecting means mounted centrally of said nozzle for de-
flecting said central stream of pressurized gas to form an
outwardly moving stream of pressurized gas, the outer
dimension of said deflecting means being no greater than
the inner dimension of said coating material passageway
where said powder coating material is emitted from said
nozzle and said deflecting means being so located with
respect to said nozzle that said outwardly moving stream
of pressurized gas impacts said powder coating material
within the confines of said nozzle to produce a conical
spray pattern of said powder coating material issuing from
said nozzle.
and said outlet when said inlet is connected through the line
with a supply of coating material of one color, so that coating
material of the one color flows through the line and said pas-
sage to said nozzle means for being directed against said spray
head, and to interrupt the path through said passage between
said inlet and said nozzle means and to establish a path through
said passage between said inlet with said outlet when said inlet
is connected through the line with the supply of flush, so that
flush flows through the line and from said inlet to said outlet
through said passage to cleanse the same in preparation for
connecting said inlet with a supply of coating material of
another color, wherein said passage has a first enlarged cham-
ber separating said passage into a first passage section between
said inlet and said first chamber and a second passage section
between said first chamber and said nozzle means, said second
passage section forming a first valve seat whereat it communi-
cates with said nozzle means, and a second enlarged chamber
separating said passage into a third passage section between
said first and second chambers and a fourth passage section
between said second chamber and said outlet, said fourth pas-
sage section forming a second valve seat whereat it communi-
cates with said outlet, said valve means comprising a material
valve for controlling a path through said passage between said
inlet and said nozzle means and a dump valve for controlling a
path through said passage between said inlet and said outlet,
said material valve including an elongate rod extending
^3 /^' i^^'^
4,380,321
COLOR CHANGE VALVE STRUCTURE FOR ROTARY
HEAD ELECTROSTATIC SPRAY COATING SYSTEMS
Samuel W. Culbertson, Arvada; Charles W. McCuUoch, West-
minster, and Keith G. Williams, Boulder, all of Colo., assign-
ors to Binks Manufacturing Company, Franklin Park, III.
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,365
Int. C\? B05B 5/00
U.S. a. 239—700 3 Qaims
1. In combination, rotary head electrostatic spray coating
apparatus comprising a generally cylindrical body, a rotary
spray head at a forward end of said body, means for imparting
a rapid roution to said spray head, nozzle means for directing
a jet of coating material against said head for discharge from a
peripheral edge thereof in a spray, an inlet to said body for
connection through a line with either a supply of coating
material of a selected color or a supply of flush for the coating
material, an outlet from said body, a passage in said body
between said inlet, said outlet and said nozzle means, and a
color change valve structure comprising valve means con-
tained entirely in said body and in said passage substantially
immediately behind said spray head for controlling paths
through said passage and for connecting and disconnecting
said inlet with and from said outlet and said nozzle means, and
means for operating said valve means to establish a path
through said passage between said inlet and said nozzle means
and to interrupt a path through said passage between said inlet
through said first chamber and reciprocable therein, one end of
said rod forming a valve for movement against and away from
said first valve seat upon reciprocation of said rod, said dump
valve including an elongate rod extending through said second
chamber and reciprocable therein, one end of said rod forming
a valve for movement against and away from said second valve
seat upon reciprocation of said rod, said valve operating
means, when said inlet is connected with a supply of coating
material through the line, operating said material and dump
valves to move said material valve rod away from said first
valve seat and to move said dump valve rod against said sec-
ond valve seat, whereby coating material flows through the
line to said inlet and from said inlet through said first passage
section, said first chamber and said second passage section to
said nozzle means for being directed against said spray nead,
but does not flow through said third passage section, said
second chamber and said fourth passage section to said outlet,
and so that when said inlet is connected through the line with
the supply of flush said valve operating means operates said
material and dump valves to move said material valve rod
against said first valve seat and said dump valve rod away from
said second valve seat, whereby flush flows through the line to
said inlet and from said inlet through said first passage section,
said first chamber, said third passage section, said second
chamber and said fourth passage section to said outlet *o
cleanse the same of coating material, but does not flow through
said second passage section to said nozzle means.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
619
4,380,322
TAPE REWINDING APPARATUS FOR VIDEO
CASSETTE
Chun T. Yeh, No. 6, Lane 308, Bao San Rd., Hsin Chu, Taiwan
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,190
Int. a.3 G03B 1/04; GllB 15/32
U.S. a. 242—198 2 Oaims
S3 SI
5 7 9
M 1
2. A tape rewinding apparatus for a video cassette having a
cassette compartment lid, the apparatus comprising a tape-end
detecting member which sends an electric signal as the end of
a tape appears, and means for ejecting the cassette on receipt of
the electric signal; characterized in that
said ejecting means comprises a catch for locking the cas-
sette compartment lid at closed position, and a solenoid
for releasing said catch to open the lid upon receipt of said
electric signal; and wherein
said tape end detecting member is a centrifuge-type actuator,
said apparatus further comprising a motor driving a wind-
ing spindle by means of a transmission belt, said actuator
being rotatably driven, and, said apparatus further com-
prising a switch in circuit with said solenoid; and said
centrifuge-type actuator is driven to rotate by the trans-
mission belt, whereby the centrifuge-tyjje actuator can
activate or inactivate said switch through the the centrifu-
gal force acting on said actuator.
4,380,323
MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE TRAIN FOR AN AIRCRAFT
Jean Masclet, Paris, and Andre Turiot, Morsang sur Orge, both
of France, assignors to Messier-Hispano-Bugatti, Montrouge,
France
Continuation of Ser. No. 969,173, Dec. 13, 1978, abandoned.
This application Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,174
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 2, 1978, 78 00016
Int. C\? B64C 25/00, 25/10
U.S. a. 244—102 R 15 Oaims
with its position relative to a longitudinal plane of symmetry of
the aircraft, each said undercarriage comprising:
a leg which supports a wheel carrying member carrying at
least one wheel, a pivot mounting each of said undercar-
riage legs on the aircraft, each of said legs being symmetri-
cally inclined along a pivot axis passing through said pivot
mounting with respect to said longitudinal plane, and each
said wheel carrying member having a wheel support
internal bore;
damping means and alignment means associated with each
said wheel carrying member for keeping the plane of said
at least one wheel parallel to the longitudinal plane of
symmetry of the aircraft in the "undercarriage down"
position with said leg, said damping means and said wheel-
carrying member on each of said undercarriages being
identical with each other;
each said undercarriage leg having a plane of symmetry
which passes through the pivot axis of said pivot mount-
ing on the aircraft;
each said undercarriage including a bush having an external
cylindrical surface portion for retaining said bush in either
of two determined positions in said wheel support bore in
said wheel-carrying member, said bush having an internal
bush bore with the axis of said internal bush bore being
perpendicular to said plane of symmetry of said undercar-
riage leg; and,
a shaft passing through said internal bush bore, said align-
ment means being pivoted on said shaft, the axis of said
internal bush bore being off-set with respect to the axis of
said wheel support bore in which said bush is retained,
thereby to compensate from the angular displacement
between the longitudinal plane of symmetry of the aircraft
and the inclined pivot mounting axis of said undercarriage
leg, one of said two determined positions in which said
bush is retained in said wheel support bore being displaced
through a certain angle from the other of said two deter-
mined positions and the other of said two determined
positions being obtained from the one of the positions by
rotating said bush through said certain angle about the axis
of said internal bush bore, whereby to provide for the
interchangeability of said left-hand and right-hand under-
carriages.
4,380,324
SUPPORT MEMBER FOR AN EXHAUST PIPE OF A
MOTOR VEHICLE
Ehrenfried Woesler, Rosrath, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Ford Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
FUed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,472
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 9,
1980, 3034370
Int. a.' F16M 13/00
U.S. O. 248—610 5 Claims
1. A main undercarriage train for an aircraft, comprising two
undercarriages composed of a left-hand and a right-hand un-
dercarriage each of which are retractable substantially from an
"undercarriage down" to an "undercarriage up" position later-
ally and which are disposed symmetrically on respective sides
of said aircraft, said left-hand and said right-hand undercar-
riages being interchangeable and designated in accordance
1. A suspension device for an exhaust pipe of a motor vehicle
comprising a one-piece flexible mounting support member
having a loop type body portion with a central opening,
an elastic tether portion depending in a cantilever manner
from the body portion into the central opening for a
swinging movement with respect to the body portion.
620
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
the body portion having a hole therein at one end adapted to
receive a vehicle support member therethrough, and
the tether portion having a hole therein adapted to receive
therethrough a portion of the exhaust pipe to provide an
elastically soft suspension of the exhaust pipe from the
vehicle, the tether portion being freely swingible through
the central opening in either direction, and including a
protuberance extending from one end a distance sufficient
to overlap the body portion during swinging movement of
the tether portion in one direction to thereby engage the
tether portion against the body portion to resist further
swinging movement of the tether portion in the one direc-
tion.
4,380^25
GAS OPERATED VALVE ACTUATOR
Thomas W. Palmer, 2907 Del Monte Crt., Missouri Qty, Fort
Bend County, Tex. 77459
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,461
int. a.' F16K 3 J/14. 31/50. 31/52
U.S. a. 251—14 5 Qaims
cXt^X)
1. A gas-operated valve actuator for rotating the input shaft
of a valve, the actuator comprising:
a body,
selector valve means mounted to the body for selecting and
permitting gas flow through either a forward motor line
connected between a gas source and a motor means or a
reverse motor line connected between the gas source and
the motor means,
limit valve means mounted to the body in communication
with each motor line for controlling the flow of gas in the
respective line,
motor means mounted to the body and operable by the gas
from the gas source flowing through the selected motor-
line, the motor means connected to the input shaft for
rotating it, and
quick shutoff means for the limit valve means, the quick
shutofT means mounted to the body and comprising:
cam screw means mounted to the body in movable coaction
with the input shaft via intermediate gears there between,
said cam screw means having a fine pitched threaded
portion and a course pitched threaded portion and a neu-
tral area disposed between the threaded portions,
major cam means movably mounted on the cam screw
means, the major cam means provided with threads for
coacting with the threaded portions of the cam screw
means,
tripping cam means movably mounted on the cam screw
means, the tripping cam means provided with threads for
coacting with the threaded portions of the cam screw
means and disposed so that the major cam means moving
on the fine pitched threaded portion moves to contact and
urge the tripping cam means onto the course pitched
threaded portion toward limit valve support means,
limit valve support means pivotally connected to the body
and supporting the limit valve means in open position, said
limit vaJve support means disposed so that upon contact
by the tripping cam means, the limit valve support means
pivots thereby shutting off the limit valve means,
control means for alternately shutting off the flow in the
selected motor line when the input shaft reaches its travel
limit.
1
4,380,326
BELT TIGHTENING TOOL
Ermanno A. Marzorati, 845 Rim Crest Cir., and Murrel A.
Mathis, 849 Rim Crest Cir., both of Westlake Village, Calif.
91361
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 161,749, Jun. 23, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,937
Int a.3 B66F 3/00
U.S. a. 254—131 4 Claims
.n
^w
1. In combination with an engine, a power generating appa-
ratus mounted on said engine by a pivot bracket assembly, said
power generating apparatus being spaced from said engine and
being pivotable in respect thereto, a belt connecting said en-
gine and said power generating apparatus, a tool to facilitate
tightening of said belt, said tool comprising:
an elongated member terminating in a fore end and an aft
end, said elongated member having a main body section
located substantially in a first plane, a cross plate forming
a second plane, said cross plate being secured to said
elongated member, said fore end terminating in a hook,
said hook being located within said first plane, a cut-out
section formed within said said fore end adjacent said
hook, said cut-out section terminating in an inner edge and
an outer edge, said cross plate forming said inner edge of
said cut-out section with said hook forming said outer
edge, the ends of said cross plate forming first and second
fulcrum points, whereby said hook is to engage with said
power generating apparatus and one of said fulcrum
points is to be placed against the exterior of said power
generating apparatus and by exerting force against said
main body section the said power generating apparatus is
caused to pivot about said pivot bracket assembly thereby
tightening said belt; and
said second plane being inclined in respect to said first plane
so that the spacing between said first fulcrum point and
said hook being less than the spacing between said second
fulcrum point and said hook.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
621
4,380,327
SAFETY BARRIER
Robert E. Fish, 454 S. Dixie Hwy., Pompano Beacli, Fla. 33060
FUcd May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,777
Int. a.3 E04N 17/ 16
U.S. a. 256—24 4 Claims
zone where a reduction ratio greater than 50% occurs,
defined by the formula:
SEOUCTiCH ZCM
-r
ojSTiE flow Fcw aumNG REOucma ats
1. A lightweight, waterproof safety barrier comprising:
a plurality of spaced apart, rigid vertical support members;
at least one mesh, flexible, waterproof restraining panel;
means for connecting said panel to each of said vertical
support members; and
a flexible line connected to the top of said panel;
each said vertical supj)ort means includes an aluminum
mounting bracket and at least one stainless steel screw
mounted to a respective said vertical support member,
holding said restraining panel therebetween;
each said vertical support member being constructed of
aluminum. _.
US=-
^■^.■
Rgl20exp. (8.6-0.009T),
wherein R is the hydraulic radius and T is the temperature
(°C.) of the reducing gas.
4,380,329
FOOTING JIG FOR POSITIONING FASTENERS
Louis E. M. Nunno, P.O. Box 1785, Paso Robles, Calif. 93446
FUed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,628
Int. a.3 B25B 1/20
U.S. a. 269—41 6 Cl*i«»«
4,380,328
SHAFT FURNACE FOR REDUCING ORES
Hiroyuki Kohama, Daito; Masaru Tamiya, Kobe; Sunichi
Mizukami, Kobe; Dentaro Kaneko, Kobe, and Yoshio Kimura,
Akashi, all of Japan, assignors to Kobe Steel, Ltd., Kobe,
Japan
FUed Jan. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 116,458
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 29, 1979, 54-9596;
Feb. 23, 1979, 54-21712
Int a.3 F27B 9/20
VJS. CL 266—177 1 Claim
1. A shaft furnace for reducing ores with a gas comprising:
a reduction zone formed along a predetermined height of
said furnace;
a plug flow zone formed in an upper portion of said reduc-
tion zone of said furnace during reduction operation;
a shear flow zone formed in a portion of said reduction zone
of said furnace downstream of said plug flow zone; and
means operatively connected to said furnace in said reduc-
tion zone for shifting said shear flow zone to a position
upstream of a portion of said reduction zone where a
reduction ratio of 50 to 70% occurs, wherein said means
for shifting comprises a hydraulic radius in the reduction
ru^
1. A system for the placement of the footing fasteners within
a given footing of a structure in the proper location with re-
spect ot the footing fasteners in adjacent footings of said struc-
ture wherein said structure includes a support element extend-
ing between the footing fasteners of adjacent footings, com-
prising:
a first device for positioning footing fasteners, with said
device including a body having an elongated opening
therethrough for receiving a reference member, said body
including locking means for locking said device to said
reference member at a predetermined position, and a
plurality of support members fixed to said body, each said
support member having an opening for receiving and
4,380,330
CATCHERLESS CLOTH SPREADING MACHINE
Hoyt L. Smith, Nashville, Tenn.; Cecil S. Frederick, deceased,
late of Murfreesboro, Tenn., by Wallace Frederick, ad-
ministrator, Readyville, Tenn., assignors to Cutters Exchange,
Inc., Nashville, Tenn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 45,181, Jun. 4, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,594
Int. a.i B65H 29/46
iJ.S. a. 270—31 5 Claims
622
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
thereby positioning a respective fastener, wherein the
support members are designed to receive a first end of a
support element of the structure, and
a second device for positioning footing fasteners, with said
device including a body having an elongated opening
therethrough for receiving a reference member, said body
including locking means for locking said device to said
reference member at a predetermind position, and a plu-
rality of support members fixed to said central member,
each said support member having an opening for receiv-
ing and thereby positioning a respective fastener, wherein
the support members are designed to receive the second
end of a support element of the structure, thereby aligning
said footing fasteners with respect to the support element
and the adjacent footing.
4. In a cloth spreading machine having cloth supply means
ind a spreader frame including a vertically movable spreader
clement, said spreader frame having longitudinal and trans-
verse dimensions and being movable longitudinally forwardly
iind rearwardly over a cloth supporting surface for carrying a
cloth from the cloth supply means to said spreader element for
spreading the cloth longitudinally in layers upon the support-
ing surface, a wind break device comprising:
(a) a wind curtain of flexible sheet material having an upper
end portion, and a lower end portion,
(b) a curtain roller attached to said upper end portion for
winding and unwinding said curtain,
(c) means mounting said curtain roller for rotary movement
transversely on said spreader frame above said spreader
element,
(d) means biasing the rotary movement of said curtain roller
to wind said curtain about said curtain roller, and
(e) means attaching the lower end portion of said curtain to
said spreader element for vertical movement therewith.
4,380,331
SHEET FEEDING AND ALIGNING APPARATUS FOR
ROTARY PRINTING MACHINE
Hermann Fischer, Augsburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
M.A.N.-ROLAND Dnickmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft, Of-
fenbach am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,160
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 6,
1980, 3004314
Int. a.J B65H 5/08
U.S. a. 271—11 10 aaims
1. Sheet feeding and aligning apparatus to pick up a sheet
(20) of a printing substrate, particularly paper, for transfer to a
moving sheet transport mechanism and having
a make-ready table (20);
a vacuum suction pick-up and sheet transport element (3)
including
a tubular housing (11);
a suction tube (4) movably guided in said housing for tele-
scopic movement with respect thereto;
bias means (16) for biassing the suction tube (4) towards a
sheet (20) to be gripped;
and pull-in means (6) for pulling the suction tube inwardly
within the tubular housing upon adhesion of a sheet
thereto under vacuum applied to the interior of said tubu-
lar housing (11), so that the pick-up element (3) will be of
variable length,
the pick-up element being positioned for engagement with
the leading edge of the sheet (20) located on the make-
ready table in aligned position and supported for pivoting
movement for transporting a sheet after being picked up;
and comprising
a locking element (2^ selectively positionable in said hous-
ing (11) to contain telescoping pull-in motion of the suc-
tion tube within the tubular housing to a limited distance,
and permit, after repositioning, continued telescoping
movement of the suction tube within the tubular housing;
and
means for controlling the pick-up motion of the pick-up
element (3) in steps
(a) for pick-up of the leading edge of the sheet and lifting the
sheet off the make-ready table (2) by the limited distance
(R-1 mm) defined by the locking means by foreshortening
said length by pulling in said suction tube for said limited
distance; and then
(b) for lifting the leading edge of the sheet for the remaining
distance (R-r) and further foreshortening the pick-up
element by further pulling in said suction tube upon repo-
sitioning of said locking means and pivotally moving said
pick-up element to a position required for engagement
with the transport mechanism and accelerating the sheet
by moving the leading edge of the sheet in a rotary path as
the element foreshortens to feed the sheet to said moving
transport mechanism.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
623
4,380,332
SNUBBING DEVICE FOR BLANK CONVEYOR
APPARATUS
Dwight M. Davis, Waukegan, III., assignor to Stone Container
Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,357
Int. a.J B65H 31/26
U.S. a. 271—224 3 Qaims
ning non-driven axle which is transverse to the path of travel
of the film sheet, the pairs of wheels being mounted in sets of
two in staggered relationship, the rims of both wheels of a pair
having a high-friction surface, the film sheet passing through
the chute by gravitational attraction.
1. In combination with means for conveying a series of
blanks, said conveying means having a release section at which
blanks leave the conveying means; and means for receiving and
stacking a plurality of blanks from the conveying means; the
improvement comprising:
a frame member having a first strap attachment section;
a base member having a second strap attachment section;
means for pivotably coupling the frame member and the base
member such that pivotal movement of the frame member
with respect to the base member alters the separation of
the first and second strap attachment points;
a flexible strap having a first end positioned at the first at-
tachment section and a second end positioned at the sec-
ond attachment section such that the strap is mounted
between the frame member and the base member; and
means for resilient! y biasing the frame member away from
the base member to maintain the strap under tension while
allowing the strap to deflect and rebound when struck by
a moving blank;
said frame and base members positioned such that blanks
leaving the release section of the conveying means strike
the strap, and such that the strap serves to decelerate the
blanks without damage to the blanks and then to rebound,
thereby causing the blanks to move into the receiving and
^stacking means.
4,380,333
SHEET MATERIAL GUIDING MEANS
George F. A. M. Turner, Ingatestone, England, assignor to
Ciba-Geigy AG, Basel, Switzerland
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,714
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 12, 1980,
8008364
Int. a.3 B65H 5/02
U.S. a. 271—272 5 Claims
1. In an apparatus for receiving a plurality of sheet films
from flim cassettes and presenting them in seriatim to an associ-
ated film processor, the apparatus comprising a light-tight
enclosure having a film cassette introduction port being
adapted to receive a film sheet from a cassette which is opened
when its openable end is introduced therein, a film exit port
located in light-tight operational contact with an associated
film processor, and means for guiding the film from said intro-
duction port to said exit port, the improvement wherein said
guide means comprises an enclosed gravity-feed entry chute
below the film cassette introduction port wherein the film
sheet is brought into frictional contact with at least two pairs of
wheels of equal circumference mounted fixedly on a free-run-
4,380,334
ELECTRONIC CARD GAME SIMULATOR
Michael D. MinkofT, and Raymond W. Kaestner, both of Tor-
rance, Calif., assignors to Mattel, Inc., Hawthorne, Calif.
Filed Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 132,755
Int. a.^ A63F 7/00
U.S. a. 273—1 E 6 Claims
1. A portable machine for simulating the play of a hand of
gin rummy in accordance with the rules thereof including a
housing; a display mounted by the housing; an electronic data
processor mounted in the housing; means for causing the pro-
cessor to deal two hands and a face up card at random and to
control the display to show one of the hands and the face up
card; means for causing the processor to take the face up card
or draw another card at random for the hand shown on the
display; means for causing the processor to discard a selected
card from the hand shown on the display; means for signalling
that the hand shown on the display has gin or knock; means for
drawing cards at random or taking a discard from the hand
shown on the display for the other of the two hands; means for
discarding e selected card from the other of the two hands to
enhance the hand value in accordance with the rules of gin
rummy; and means for causing the play of the other of the two
hands to be at first of second skill levels, including means for
discarding cards in the other of the two hands based on the
value of the cards to the hand shown on the display.
624
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
send a goal signal thereto each time the ball passes behind
said flipper means and into one of said goal area.
4,380,335
PINBALL GAME APPARATUS
Jagdish C. Chaudhry, and Lorena F. Chaudhry, both of Los
Altos, Calif., assignors to Michael Wichinsky, Las Vegas,
NeT. 4,380,336
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 933,069, Aug. 11, 1978, BIRD HOUSE AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
abandoned. This appUcation Dec. 26, 1978, Ser. No. 972,954 Charles D. Pratt, Matinicus Island, Me. 04851
Int. a.} A63F 7/02 FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,088
U.S. a. 273— 121 A . WQaims Int. Q.^ A63F 9/72
U.S. a. 273—157 R
6Clainis
V COKTROl -T-n r
1. Pinball game apparatus comprising:
means defining a horizontally disposed domed playing field
surface having a center and a generally oval-shaped pe-
rimeter with at least two goal areas provided on opposite
sides thereof, such playing field surface being formed so
that all areas thereof slope continuously from said center
and toward an associated one of said goal areas, a curva-
ture of said surface transverse of said goal areas being less
than a curvature of said surface between the goal area;
a ball disposed to roll upon said playing field surface, the
curvatures of said playing field surface insuring that said
ball always rolls toward one or the other of said goal
areas;
plural ball restraining barrier means disposed around the
perimeter of said playing field surface, each barrier means
forming a continuous, curved barrier against which said
ball can roll and arranged extending between adjacent
sides of said goal area;
score accumulating and display means;
a plurality of ball sensing devices disposed along said barrier
and coupled to said score accumulating and display means
so as to send a scoring signal thereto each time the pres-
ence of said ball is detected by one of said devices;
flipper means disposed in front of each said goal area for
allowing a player to strike the ball and drive it away from
his goal area in a tangential direction relative to said bar-
rier for rolling the ball under centrifugal force along said
barrier and around the perimeter of said playing field; and
ball sensing means disposed within each goal area and cou-
pled to said score accumulating and display means so as to
1. A method forming a bird house from a solid generally
cylindrical log comprising the steps of dividing the said log
into a plurality of separated nesting sections by a plurality of
generally straight cuts, forming a separate house roof section,
end wall sections, and a combined side and bottom wall sec-
tion, and combining the sections to form the bird house.
4,380,337
GOLF BALL POSITION MARKING DEVICE
Rocco J. DiMatteo, 3 Brow St., Barrington, R.I. 02806
FUed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,222
Int. a.3 A63B 53/14
U.S. a. 273—162 D 2 Claims
28 32
^
1. A device for marking the location of a golf ball on a green
when such ball is removed for putting, said device adapted for
use with a golf putter club of the type having a frictional
handle grip of yieldable material covering the upper club end
and terminating in a generally solid end cap, said end cap
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
625
including an end wall having a centrally disposed air vent bore
projecting therethrough, said device comprising a substantially
rigid, nonyieldable first member having a substantially planar
top portion, a shaft portion downwardly extending therefrom
and terminating in an enlarged lower portion of an overall
conical shape and terminating at its upper end in a generally
flat ledge spaced from the lower surface of said top portion a
distance equal to or slightly larger than the extent of said end
cap air vent bore, said shaft adapted for direct frictional receipt
in said bore with said upper ledge surface of said lower portion
engaging the lower surface of said end wall and the lower
surface of said top portion engaging the upper surface of said
end cap end wall so as to positively secure said first member to
said golf club grip, said bore adapted to temporarily expand to
receive said enlarged lower portion, and a second substantially
rigid, disc-shaped member comprising a marker and adapted
for removable attachment to said first member, the upper
surface of said first member top portion and the marker coop-
eratively forming attachment means whereby said marker may
be secured thereto as in normal play with said club and alterna-
tively detached therefrom when it is desired to utilize the
second member as a putting green ball marker said attachment
means being of post and pocket construction, said post down-
wardly extending from the lower surface of said marker and
said pocket disposed on the upper surface of said first member
top portion whereby said marker is detachably frictionally
snap engaged to said first member top portion with a force
substantially less than that with which said first member is
engaged to said golf club handle grip.
4,380,338
GOLF GAME
Jesse H. Lacy, P.O. Box 109, Moss Point, Miss. 39563
FUed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,360
Int. a.3 A63F i/OO
U.S. a. 273—245 6 Claims
II. M e2 . 'fjo '.^ /.» 'f '.■^ /^^ '^
Piu^S
TEE SHOTS
APPROACH SHOTS
TKAP SHOTS
10 FOOT
20 FOOT
30 FOOT
7
WU Of Diet
w
w
r
rr
f
rr
44
7Z
SO
64
1. A golf game comprising:
a playing board carrying a pictorial configuration of a multi-
hole course having associated with the holes tees, fair-
ways, hazards, greens and pins on said greens;
at least one card having dispcMed thereon first indicia repre-
senting distinct areas on each hole on said playing board
and second indicia corresponding to shots which advance
a ball on each hole;
said first and second indicia being displayed in at least two
charts respectively corresjxjnding to at least two catego-
ries of said holes, said first indicia corresponding to each
of said areas and said second indicia being correlated to
said first indicia and corresponding to two or more differ-
ent ones of said areas;
said at least one card having a plurality of sets of third indicia
marked thereon, each set of third indicia corresponding to
a different one of said holes, and to one or more of said
second indicia, and a plurality of fourth indicia correlated
to said third indicia and coreesponding to separate ones of
at least two of said areas; and
chance means for selecting one of said plurality of second
and third indicia so as to advance said ball from one of said
areas corresponding to one of said plurality of first indicia
to another area corresponding to said one of said plurality
of second and third indicia.
4,380,339
GAME DEVICE
Andrew Jones, Jr., 608 Easton Ave., NW., Washington, D.C.
20019
FUed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,608
Int. a.3 A63F 9/02: F41J 7/00
U.S. a. 273—384 15 Claims
1. A game device comprising:
an elongated trunk element;
a plurality of elongated limb elements;
trunk means defining an elongated trunk cavity for axially
positioning said elongated trunk element for reciprocal
movement therein, said trunk means including a plurality
of limb means each defming a limb cavity for axially
positioning at least one of said limb elements therein;
means for hingedly connecting said plurality of limb ele-
ments to said trunk element;
platform means transversely mounted to said trunk element
for supporting weighted objects thereon; and
biasing means for biasing said trunk element in an upward
direction so that said trunk element will be yieldably
depressed in said trunk cavity in response to successive
weighted objects coming to rest upon said platform
means.
4,380,340
BLEEDER ATTACHMENT FOR ARROWS
MiradaT A. Simo, 370 N. Delaplaine Rd., Rivertidc 01. 60546
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 301,027
iBt a.J F41B 5/02
U.S. a. 273—416 9 CiMimM
1. A bleeder attachment for fitting over the shaft portion of
an arrow having a detachable arrowhead portion, said bleeder
attachment comprising:
a body element of generally tubular shape having a bulbous
626
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
outer surface, a forward and a rearward end and having a
cylindrical through opening centered about its long axis,
the forward end of said cylindrical through opening hav-
ing an inwardly extending lip; and
a plurality of barbs secured to said outer surface extending
outwardly and disposed toward said forward end.
4,380^1
LABYRINTH SEAL FOR SLIP RING SWITCH FOR
STEERING WHEELS OF MOTOR VEHICLES
Heinz Waldschiitz, Ostfildern; Franz Raiiner, Stuttgart, and
Helmut Patzelt, Fellbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Daimler-Benz A.G., Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 354,919
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 7,
1981, 3108757
Int. a.3 F16J J5/44; HOIH 9/04
U.S. a. 277—56 8 Oaims
containing a fluid at a first pressure, and a second area contain-
ing a fluid at a second, lower pressure, comprising:
(a) an elastomeric sealing device which is in communication
with said first area and which is substantially trapezoidal
in cross-section contained within a recess in one of said
mating surfaces with the shorter base thereof contacting
the other of said mating surfaces, the elastomeric having a
shorter leg disposed toward said flrst area and a diago-
nally extending, longer leg; and
(b) a resilient, pliable, anti-extrusion device which is more
rigid than said elastomeric device and which is also sub-
stantially trapezoidal in cross-section contained within
said recess, the anti-extrusion device having a diagonal leg
mating with and being of equal length with the diagonal,
longer leg of said elastomeric device, the longer base
thereof also contacting said other of said mating surfaces,
the fluid in said first area comprising means exerting force
upon the shorter base of said elastomeric device for urging
the elastomeric device toward said diagonal leg of said
anti-extrusion device, said elastomeric device comprising
means for transferring said force directly to the diagonal
leg of the anti-extrusion device and for acting as a wedge
against the longer base of the anti-extrusion device to urge
said anti-extrusion device against said other mating sur-
face for preventing extrusion of the elastomeric device
between the anti-extrusion device and said other mating
surface.
1. A slip ring arrangement for a steering wheel of a motor
vehicle, the arrangement including at least one slip ring,
spring-mounted mating contact means cooperable with the at
least one slip ring for enabling a transmitting of an electrical
current to components of the motor vehicle, characterized in
that a labyrinth seal means is provided for sealing the slip ring
arrangement with respect to a passenger compartment of the
motor vehicle.
4,380,342
FLUID SEALING DEVICES
George K. Fling, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Vought Corporation,
Dallas, Tex.
FUed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,548
Int. a.J F16J 15/09
VJS. a. 277—188 A 9 Claims
20 26 ^33
20 ^34
1. Apparatus for forming a fluid seal between mating sur-
faces of flrst and second members mpvable with respect to
each other wherein said second member separates a flrst area.
4,380,343
FOLDING SCISSOR FRAME WHEEL CHAIR
Walter Lovell, 348 Mountain Rd., and Richard Lawrence, 39
Manchonis Rd., both of Wilbraham, Mass. 01608
FUed Apr. 24, 1978, Ser. No. 898,902
Int. a.3 B62M 1/14
U.S. a. 280—242 WC 8 Qaims
1. A wheel chair comprising a pair of generally parallel
spaced vertical scissor frames extending fore and aft of the
chair, a seat frame, a back rest frame, means for detachably
connecting a portion of one of the scissor frames with respect
to the seat frame to hold the scissor frames and the chair erect,
said means being releasable to allow the scissor frames to fold
into general parallelism with and in close association to the seat
frame, and means pivotally mounting the back rest frame with
respect to the seat frame to allow it to move into parallel
relationship therewith,
hand wheels rotatably mounted on the scissor frames adja-
cent the point of pivotal connections of said scissor
frames,
driving wheels rotatably mounted on one of said scissor
frames, a chain connecting the wheels so that the hand
wheels drive the driving wheels, the driving wheels being
located at the rear of the chair and the hand wheel being
intermediate of the ends of the frames and means to adjust
the tension of the chain.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
627
4,380,344
TRAILER HITCH CYCLE RACK
Frederick H. Abbott, Main St., East Princeton, Mass. 01517
Division of Ser. No. 84,606, Oct. 15, 1979, Pat. No. 4,301,953.
This application Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,996
Int. a.3 B60R 9/10
U.S. a. 280— 402 2 Claims
S-
^-^-
^^gi-**
^^
1. In combination with a trailer hitch for securing a power
vehicle with respect to a trailer, said trailer hitch including a
plate on the vehicle and a ball on the plate, that improvement
which includes a support for a cycle rack located on said trailer
hitch and leaving the hitch free of impediments so it can be
used in the normal way,
said improvement comprising means forming a socket,
means to connect the same with respect to one part of the
trailer hitch, said socket being spaced from the operative
parts of the hitch,
a cycle rack, a depending column supporting said cycle rack,
and means for securing said column at the lower end
thereof with respect to said socket in upright condition of
said column, said socket being horizontal and said column
including a foot extending at an angle thereto for recep-
tion in said horizontal socket,
means to attach the ball to the plate on the vehicle, and the
socket forming means including a plate secured between
the ball and the plate to which the ball is secured by the
ball attaching means.
4,380,345
SKI BRAKE
Heinz Wittmann, Vienna, Austria, assignor to TMC Corpora-
tion, Baar, Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 46,553, Jun. 7, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,076
Qaims priority, application Austria, Jun. 22, 1978, 4533/78
Int. a.J A63C 7/10
U.S. a. 280—605 3 Claims
1. A ski brake for use on a ski, comprising:
a base plate adapted to be mounted on said ski;
first and second bearing means on said base plate;
a pair of laterally spaced brake arms pivotally and laterally
slidably mounted on said first bearing means, each of said
brake arms having a brake leg portion and a pedal portion,
said brake arms each being pivotal between (1) a braking
position wherein said brake leg portions project beneath
the running surface of said ski and said pedal portion
extends upwardly inclined to the upper surface of said ski
and (2) a retracted position wherein said brake leg por-
tions and said pedal portion extend above said upper
surface of said ski;
a control part and pivotal securement means pivotally secur-
ing said control part to said second bearing means, said
pivotal securement means effecting, upon a pivotal move-
ment of said control part relative to said pedal portions
between an initial position wherein said brake arms are
positioned in their laterally outermost position and a final
position wherein said brake arms are positioned in their
laterally innermost position, a laterally inward movement
of said brake arms;
resilient means effecting an erection of said brake arms to
said braking position and an urging of said control part to
said initial position thereof to urge said brake arms to their
said initial position thereof;
said pedal portions being integrally connected to each other
so that said brake legs and said pedal generally define a
U-shap>e, said first bearing means including separate axle
segments on said brake legs extending inwardly toward a
central longitudinal axis of said ski; and
said pivotal securement means including a hollow sleeve
rotatably supported on said base plate by said second
bearing means and about an axis extending perpendicular
to said longitudinal axis of said ski, said hollow sleeve
receiving said separate axle segments in opposite ends
thereof to thereby define said first bearing means, said
control part including an operating bar fixedljj secured to
said hollow sleeve and movable therewith.
4,380,346
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR SPEEDING THE
RESPONSE OF AN AIR BAG INFLATOR AT LOW
TEMPERATURES
Leland E. Daris, Brigham Oty; David P. Dahle, Logan; Fred E.
Schneiter, North Ogden, and George F. KirchofT, Brigham
City, all of Utah, assignors to Thiokol Corporation, Newtown,
Pa.
FUed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,285
Int a.' B60R 21/0%
U.S. a. 280—736 ♦ Claims
10
n "
2. In an inflator for an air bag comprising housing means
having wall means that define a combustion chamber, said wall
means having gas discharge perforations formed therein and
including rupturable means for normally sealing said perfora-
tions,
a combustible gas generant composition disposed in said
combustion chamber, said composition being operable
upon ignitition to produce gas and combustion products,
the generation of gas within said housing being character-
ized in that the rise in pressure to a peak value tends to be
slowed when the ambient temperature is low, said ruptur-
able means of said wall means of said housing rupturing
upon the attainment of a certain threshold value that is less
than said peak value,
means for filtering the generated gas, and
means for discharging the filtered gas to an air bag,
the improvement comprising
means buttressing said rupturable means to delay the rupture
628
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
thereof unitl the pressure of the generated gas therein
reaches a predetermined value that is higher than the
certain threshold value thereby to shorten the time for
attaining the peak gas pressure value within the combus-
tion chamber, and resulting in faster, more satisfactory
generation of gas and inflation of the air bag when the
ambient temperature is low and the rate of gas generation
tends to be slowed,
said means for buttressing said rupturable means comprising
a layer of foil, said layer of foil buttressing said rupturable
means with respect to some only of said perforations.
4,380^7
WELL TOOL
Donald E. Sable, 4413 Windsor Pkwy., Dallas, Tex. 75234
FUed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,795
Int. a.3 F16L 57/00
U.S. a. 285—45 1 Qaim
1. A well tool including: a tool joint comprising a pin half on
one section of an elongate tubular member having a reduced
threaded end portion, and a box half on another elongate
tubular member having a threaded bore in which said reduced
threaded end portion is disposed, one of said tool joint halves
having an externally reduced end portion providing an annular
external shoulder, the other of said joint halves having an
external annular shoulder, said shoulders facing one another;
and a protector longitudinally and rotatably disposed on said
reduced end portion of said one of said joint halves, said pro-
tector comprising a tubular mandrel having an internal diame-
ter greater than that of said reduced end portion of said one of
said joint halves and an external diameter greater than that of
said annular shoulder whereby longitudinal movement of said
mandrel relative to said joint halves is limited by said shoul-
ders; and a plurality of longitudinally extending resilient com-
pression members circumferentially spaced in said mandrel and
secured thereto, said compression members being compressed
between said mandrel and said reduced end portion of said one
of said joint halves, said compression members permitting
rotation of said mandrel relative to said tool joint.
4,380,348
PIPE CLAMPING ASSEMBLY
Frederick R. Swartz, Needham Heights, Mass., assignor to
Clamp-All Corp., BUlerica, Mass.
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,531
Int. a.3 F16L 21/06
U.S. a. 285—236 4 Claims
1. In a clamping assembly for joining two pipes in end to end
relationship in a clamping position and having a flexible, corro-
sion resistant sheet metal clamping band of defined circumfer-
ential length having a first encircling end and a second encir-
cling end axially spaced from the first encircling end, with a
preformed raised central section extending generally the de-
fined circumferential length of the clamping band,
and band strap retaining areas extending on both sides of said
central section, with tension bands mounted in said retain-
ing areas on both sides of said central section adjacent said
ends, said clamping band enclosing an underlying elasto-
meric compressible, circumferential sealing gasket having
first and second gasket end surfaces and partially mounted
against movement by said central section,
the improvement comprising said first and second encircling
ends extending from said retaining areas with said ends
each carrying an upwardly and reversely extending sec-
tion defining an inwardly directed substantially continu-
ous, integral, bent over sheet metal flange having the
thickness of said sheet metal facing said pipe positioned to
extend toward an underlying pipe to grip said pipe and to
prevent unwanted movement of said sealing gasket under
operating conditions of said assembly with each said sub-
stantially continuous flange providing a stop against out-
ward flow of said gasket beyond said flange by engaging
substantially the entire end surface of said gasket so that
said flange prevents cold flow beyond the flange.
4,380,349
COUPLERS FOR LATCHING TYPE PLUGS
John Bray, Sheffield, England, assignor to Staeng Ltd., Com-
wall, England
FUed May 22, 1980, Ser. No. 152,360
Oaims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, May 23, 1979,
7918001
Int. a.^ F16L 21/00
U.S. a. 285—417 3 Qaims
1. A plug connector to enable the coupling of first and
second plugs attached to fibre optic cables and to maintain
substantial abutment between the ends of the first and second
plugs, said plug connector comprising:
a first annular member having an internal diameter fraction-
ally larger than the diameters of the two plugs;
a second annular member containing said first annular mem-
ber and having a first section with an internal diameter
equal to the internal diameter of the first annular member,
a second section having an internal diameter fractionally
larger than the external diameter of the first annular mem-
ber, a shoulder defined by the intersection of said first and
second sections, and a third section having a recess;
a resUient member located within said recess and protruding
therefrom, said first member having shoulder means
thereon to abut said resilient member, the arrangement
being such that the first annular member has limited slide-
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
629
able movement within the second section of the second
annular member;
a first recess provided in the first annular member at the end
where it abuts against the shoulder, said first recess being
provided to receive latching means of said second plug
which is slideable into said second annular member;
a second recess provided in said first annular member, dis-
tant from said first recess for receiving latching means
provided on said first plug which is slideable into said first
annular member;
whereby said first and second plugs, first and second annular
members and resilient member are so constructed and
arranged that when said plugs are inserted into the cou-
pling member said shoulder means on said first member
abuts and compresses said resilient members causing said
first and second member to bias and maintain said plugs in
contact, with one another.
4,380,351
SUNROOF AIR DEFLECTOR
Norman L. Sorensen, Detroit, and Lothar Pohl, SterliBg
Heights, both of Mich., assignors to Wisco Corporation, Fern-
dale, Mich.
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236^95
Int a.3 B60J 7/22
U.S. a. 296—217 6 Claims
4,380,350
TRUCK BOX TARPAULIN ASSEMBLY
Gordon Block, Box 265, Leroy, Saskatchewan, Canada (SOK
2PO)
FUed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,900
Int a.3 BOOJ 77/00
U.S. a. 296-98 ♦ Claims
36A
1. A tarpaulin cover assembly for the open upper side of a
truck box which includes a pair of side wjdls, a rear end wall,
and a front end 'vall; said tarpaulin cover assembly comprising
in combination a substantially rectangular tarpaulin adapted to
cover the open upper side of the truck box when in the fully
extended position, means to fasten one longitudinal edge of the
tarpaulin to one side wall, longitudinally extending roller
means secured to the other longitudinal edge of said tarpaulin
and means to rotate said roller means, said roller means being
supported for transverse rolling motion upon the upper edges
of the front and back end walls of the truck body, and means
operatively extending between said roller means and said truck
body to tension said tarpaulin transversely at all times, said
means operatively extending between said roller means and
said truck body to tension said tarpaulin transverely at all times
including a cable and spring assembly secured upon each of the
end walls of said truck box, said roller assembly including a
cable drum at each end thereof to receive the cable of said
cable and spring assembly and means to secure said cables one
to each of said cable drums, said means to rotate said roller
means including a handle secured to said roller means at least
at one end thereof, a crank pin extending from said handle
adjacent the distal end thereof, an elongated actuating member
pivotally secured by one end thereof to said crank pin for
rotating said handle of said crank pin and means detachably
securing said distal end of said handle to said end wall to secure
said tarpaulin in the desired position against pressure of said
springs.
4. In a motor vehicle having an opening formed in a roof
thereof, a frame around the perimeter of the opening defining
longitudinally extending edges and front and rear transverse
edges, a slidable roof panel movable between a closed position
closing the opening and an open position opening the opening,
the improvement comprising:
an air deflector having an upper edge and a lower edge
extending across the front transverse edge, said air deflec-
tor being movable from a deployed position above the
roof to a retracted position;
the frame including a recessed front inward extending trans-
verse ledge and a pair of opposed longitudinal inward
extending ledges to support the panel flush with the roof;
the frame further including a transverse channel formed in
said front inward extending ledge, said air deflector being
nestingly engageable with said transverse channel;
said air deflector being supported by a hinge, said hinge
being hingedly attached at a lower end to said front in-
ward extending ledge, and at an upper end to said air
deflector upper end;
means for biasing said air deflector in the deployed position
above the panel when the panel is in the open position;
said biasing means including:
a spring retaining notch formed along said lower edge;
a wire spring engaging said spring retaining notch compris-
ing a central horizontal portion positioned above the
notch, a pair of opposed loops formed at the ends of the
central horizontal portion extending downward then
curving forward then upward to snugly embrace the
notch at the inside comers thereof, said opposed loops
then curving arcuately outward then extending down-
ward linearly to defme a pair of opposed legs, said op-
posed legs extending moderately forward and outward
terminating at an outward curved end; and
said outward curved ends biased against a forward comer of
said transverse channel causing an outward spreading of
said opposed legs and an upward and forward biasing of
said air deflector toward the deployed position;
a hinge support secured to the front inward extending ledge;
said hinge support hinged to said hinge lower end;
a lower stop formed on said hinge lower end, said lower stop
selectively abutting said hinge support Umiting the up-
ward movement of said hinge upper end;
a pair of transversely aligned apertures formed in said hinge
upper end;
a hinge notch formed in said upper edge to slidingly re-
ceived said hinge upper end;
630
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
a hinge notch formed in said upper edge to slidingly receive
said hinge upper end;
a hinge pin slidingly supported by said transversely aligned
apertures with a pair of pin opposed ends projecting trans-
versely from said aligned apertures;
a pin receiving groove formed along said upper edge to
securely receive said pin opposed ends hingedly securing
said upper edge to said hinge upper end;
said hinge upper end including an upper stop formed inte-
grally therewith selectively abutting an edge of said hinge
notch limiting the forward movement of said deflector
lower edge; and
whereby said lower stop limiting the upward movement of
said hinge upper end and said upper stop limiting the
forward movement of said deflector lower edge defines
the air deflector deployed position; and
means for automatically retracting said air deflector to the
retracted position when the panel is moved to the closed
position.
4,380,352
RECLINING CHAIR
Niels Diffnent, New York, N.Y., assignor to Knoll Interna-
tional, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 47,120, Jun. 11, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,377
Int. a.3 A47C 1/02
U.S. a. 297—61 16 Qaims
1. An articulated chair or the like, comprising:
(a) a base;
(b) a seat element, supported on the base, having a forward
portion and a rearward portion tiltable about a first, hori-
zontal axis relative to the forward portion;
(c) a backrest element, supported on the seat, having a lower
portion tiluble relative to the base about said first axis and
an upper portion tiltable relative to the lower portion
about a second axis parallel to the first axis; and
(d) a pair of unitary rigid armrests respectively disposed on
opposite sides of said seat;
wherein the improvement comprises:
(e) each of said armrests having a forward end portion con-
nected to said base for pivotal movement relative thereto
about a third axis spaced from and parallel to said first axis
and a rearward end connected to said upper backrest
portion for pivotal movement relative thereto about a
fourth axis spaced from and parallel to the second axis,
such that said armrests constitute a linkage for tilting the
backrest upper portion forwardly relative to the backrest
lower portion upon rearward tilting movement of the
backrest lower portion relative to the base, and
(0 the seat and backrest elements each comprising
(i) a peripheral frame divided, along the axis of tilting of
one portion of the element relative to the other portion
of the element, into two rigid frame parts pivotable
relative to each other about the last-mentioned axis and
cooperatively surrounding a central area of the element
extending through the locality of the last-mentioned
axis;
(ii) a flexible load-bearing diaphragm extending substan-
tially entirely over said area and fastened to said frame,
such that when the one portion of the element is tilted
relative to the other, the central portion of the dia-
phragm assumes a compound curved configuration
comfortably supporting the user; and
(iii) an upholstery body extending over and supported by
the diaphragm and the frame.
4,380,353
DUST CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD OF
OPERATION
John A. L. Campbell, Mascoutah; Daniel J. Moynlhan; William
D. Roper, both of Belleville, and Earl C. Willis, Benton all of
III., assignors to Peabody Coal Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Continuation of Ser. No. 20,280, Mar. 14, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,430
Int. a.3 E21C 7/08: BOID 47/06
U.S. a. 299-12 23 Claims
1. A machine comprising a vehicle having at one end consti-
tuting its forward end a boom pivoted for up and down swing-
ing movement about an axis extending transversely of the
vehicle and extending forward from the vehicle, a cutter head
carried by the boom, and means for carrying away material cut
by the cutter head comprising a conveyor extending longitudi-
nally of the vehicle for conveying the material back toward the
rearward end of the vehicle, said cutter head when operated to
cut causing dust to be present in the air at the forward end of
the vehicle, which dust may include particles in the size range
below 5 microns, and a dust control system for said machine
comprising:
a fan mounted on the vehicle adjacent one side of the vehicle
alongside the conveyor toward the rearward end of the
vehicle, said fan comprising a housing having an inlet and
an outlet and means in the housing for causing a flow of air
from the inlet to and out through the outlet;
a system of ductwork forming a passage for induced flow of
air from the vicinity of the forward end of the vehicle to
the inlet of the fan housing, said ductwork system com-
prising an air intake section associated with the boom and
swingable up and down with the boom, said air intake
section having bottom inlet openings for upward flow of
dust-laden air from below the boom into said air intake
section, and having an air outlet at its rear at said one side
of the vehicle, said ductwork system further comprising a
telescoping duct section and a fixed duct section extending
longitudinally of the vehicle alongside said conveyor
adjacent said one side of the vehicle from said air outlet of
said air intake section to the inlet of said fan housing, said
telescoping section being hinged at its forward end to said
air outiet of said air intake section and hinged at its rear-
ward end to the forward end of said fixed duct section;
a flooded bed scrubber in said fixed duct section for effecting
entrainment in droplets of water of dust, including respira-
ble dust in said range, which is in the air flowing through
said fixed duct section as a result of the cutting of the
material, said flooded bed scrubber comprising a bed of
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
631
fibers extending across said fixed duct section through
which the air may flow, and means for maintaining the
fibers of said bed wetted with water, for entrainment in
droplets of water of dust including respirable dust in said
range by inertial impaction of the dust on the wetted fibers
of the bed on drawing air through the bed at a sufficiently
high velocity for said inertial impaction, the fan having
the capacity for drawing the air through the bed at such
velocity, the dust-laden droplets passing through the bed
and downstream from the bed in the air flowing through
said fixed duct section;
means in the fixed duct section between the bed and the inlet
of the fan housing for separating the dust-laden droplets of
water from the air flowing through the fixed duct section
before the droplets reach the fan, said separating means
being constructed and arranged for downward flow of the
dust-laden droplets;
said fixed duct section having a bottom exit at the separating
means for drainage of the dust-laden water therefrom;
a sump on the vehicle below said exit for receiving the
dust-laden water; and
means for pumping to a place of disposal the dust-laden
water collecting in the sump.
11. A method of controlling dust generated by operation of
equipment in an entry of a coal mine wherein the equipment is
operated at the working face of the entry and its operation
generates dust which may include respirable dust in the size
range below S microns at said face, comprising:
passing dust-laden air from said face through a dust control
system comprising a passage and a fan, the flow being
from the face through the passage to the fan, and being
induced by operation of the fan to draw the dust-laden air
through the passage,
scrubbing dust from the air as it flows through said passage
by entraining the dust, including said respirable dust in the
size range below S microns, in droplets of water, the
dust-laden droplets of water flowing downstream through
said passage in the air flowing through said passage,
separating the dust-laden droplets of water from the air
flowing through said passage before the droplets reach the
fan, whereby the fan operates in relatively droplet-free
and dust-free air,
and collecting and disposing of the dust-laden droplets.
4,380,354
MINING MACHINE LOADING BIN MOUNTED ON
BOOM STRUCTURE AND METHOD
Maurice K. UBegne, ArgilUte, Ky., assigaor to National Mine
Scnrice Company, Pittaburgh, Pa.
FUed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,832
Int. CI.J E21C 27/24
U.S. a. 299—18 19 Claims
16. A method of dislodging solid material from a mine face
comprising the steps of,
rotatably supporting a material dislodging device on a boom
member at the front end of a mining machine,
positioning the material dislodging device opposite a mine
face,
sumping the material dislodging device into contact with the
mine face,
pivoting the boom member to move the material dislodging
device through an arcuate path between the mine roof and
floor to dislodge solid material from the mine face,
carrying a material receiving bin on the boom member rear-
wardly of the material dislodging device for movement
with the material dislodging device as a single unit,
rotating the material dislodging device in a direction to
convey the dislodged material over the material dislodg-
ing device and rearwardly into the material receiving bin,
feeding the dislodged material rearwardly through the mate-
rial receiving bin and onto a conveyor extending rear-
wardly of the material dislodging device, and
transporting the dislodged material on the conveyor rear-
wardly on the mining machine.
4,380355
GAS-LUBRICATED BEARINGS
Geoffrey Beardmore, 20 Oak Manor Dr., Cheltenham, Gloucca-
terahire, England
FUed Not. 24, 1980, Scr. No. 210,072
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Not. 22, 1979,
7940407
Int a.5 F16C i2/06
U.S. a. 384—123 7 Claims
/O /P /3
fo /J? :? /2>
1. A gas-lubricated bearing of the kind comprising first and
second bearing members having first and second respective
opposed surfaces, the first surface being smooth and uninter-
rupted, and the second surface being provided with a region of
spiral grooves separated by lands arranged such that relative
movement between the first and second members causes en-
trainment of gas along said grooves and generation of a gas
film between the members, the improvement wherein said
lands each have an upper surface of convex profile, the region
of the lands closest the surface of said first member being
located intermediate the edges of the upper surface of the lands
thereby forming substantially wedge-shaped cross-sectional
regions between said first and second members on opposite
sides of the region of the lands closest the surface of said first
member.
4,380,356
GENERATOR ROTOR, ESPECIALLY
TURBO-GENERATOR ROTOR WITH
SUPERCONDUCTING FIELD WINDING
Erich Weghaapt, Miilbeim, Fed. Rep. of Gcrmaay, aasigaor to
Kraftwerk Union AktiengwcllsHiaft, MMlkeim, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,650
Claims priority, apirikatioB Fed. Rep. of Genuuy, May 23,
1960, 3019664
lat CL^ F16C 33/74
U.S. a. 384—133 8 Claims
1. Generator rotor, comprising an inner and an outer con-
centric rotor part having a non-drive side and enclosing a
high-vacuum space, a first and a second bearing disposed on
said non-drive side, a hollow shaft end of said outer r'>tor part
being supported in said first bearing, a journal of said inner
rotor part being extended through said hoUow shaft end and
separately supported in said second bearing, a high-vacuum
contactless liquid seal disposed between said hoUow shaft end
632
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
and said journal and having a sealing gap formed therebe-
tween, a co-rotating sealing-liquid reservoir connected to said
liquid seal, and magnetic field means for holding magnetic
sealing liquid in said sealing gap.
LAMP SOCKET
Larry F. Trafford, Owen Sound, Canada, assignor to General
Signal Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,294
Int. a.J HOIR 9/12
U.S. a. 339—17 D
18 Claims
156
4,380,357
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFECTING ELECTRICAL
INTERCONNECTIONS USING A FLEXIBLE MEDIA
WITH RADIALLY EXTENDING ELECTRICAL
CONDUCTORS
Doyle R. Evans, and Ricliard E. Tuthill, both of Lubbock, Tex.,
assignors to Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Nor. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,020
Int. a.J HOIR 9/09
U.S. a. 339—17 CF 25 Qaims
33-
34
23
^^
I
amn
ma
r23
32
^^I^QF^T
22
31
1. A device for electrically interconnecting first and second
sets of electrical components, said first set of electrical compo-
nents disposed at first equal angular intervals about a first
circle and said second set of electrical components disposed at
said equal first angular intervals about a second circle, said
second circle having a greater radius than and concentric with
said first circle, said device comprising:
(a) a flexible media having first and second opposite major
surfaces;
(b) a plurality of electrical conductors extending radially
outward from a central portion of said first major surface
with insulative material interposed between said conduc-
tors, said electrical conductors disposed at equal second
angular intervals, said second angular intervals less than
said first angular intervals, said electrical conductors
further having equal width at any given radial distance
from said central portion and having increasing width in a
direction radially outward from said central portion;
(c) radially inward portions of selected ones of said conduc-
tors for being positioned in contact with respective ones of
said first set of electrical components and radially outward
portions of said selected ones of said conductors for being
positioned in contact with respective ones of said second
set of electrical components, thereby electrically intercon-
necting said first and second sets of components.
1. A lamp socket for accommodating a lamp and comprising
in combination:
(a) a non-conducting housing having a side wall and a base
and adapted to accommodate a lamp;
(b) a first contact member captured by cooperative coaction
with said side wall of said housing and in a predetermined
relationship with respect theteto and including:
(1) a first portion projecting inward from said side wall for
contacting the base of a lamp inserted into said housing;
and
(2) a second portion projecting through a first opening in
said base of said housing for accommodating an external
electrical connection;
(c) a second contact member captured by cooperative coac-
tion with said housing and including:
(1) a first section comprising a spring projecting longitudi-
nally upward from said base of said housing for contact-
ing the base contact of a lamp inserted in said housing;
and
(2) a second section projecting through a second opening
in said base of said housing for accommodating an
external electrical connection; and wherein
(d) at least one of said second portion and said second sec-
tion, comprises a non-linear yielding member for coacting
with a printed circuit board, when said lamp socket is
placed in cooperative engagement therewith by placing
said second portion and said second section through coop-
erating openings of the printed circuit board, each open-
ing of which is larger in cross section than the associated
second portion or second section, respectively, whereby
to secure said lamp socket to the printed circuit board
prior to soldering by the coaction of the yielding member
with a portion of the perimeter of the associated opening.
4,380,359
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR FOR AN INSTRUMENT
PANEL
Robert P. Hoffinan, Grand Blanc, and Lavem E. Chandler,
Davison, both of Mich., assignors to General Motors Corpora-
tion, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,460
Int a.3 HOIR 9/07, 31/08
U.S. a. 339—17 F 3 Claima
1. In a vehicle instrument panel, means for electrically con-
necting an instrument to a circuit comprising
an instrument panel housing formed of insulating material
having an integral substantially rigid pin projecting from a
surface of the housing,
the circuit including a printed circuit carried by the housing
on said surface, an exposed conductor in the printed cir*
cuit adjacent and spaced from the pin,
an instrument positioned adjacent the housing and having a
conductive portion facing the printed circuit, and
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
633
an elongated resilient conducting clip having free ends and a
contact portion at each end, the contact portions electri-
cally seating in flexed-down spring engagement against
the said conductive portion of the instrument and the
4,380^1
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR COVER KIT
John C. Asick, Harrisburg; Donald A. Berry, Eaizabethtown,
and John E. Ludus, Enola, ail of Pa., avignon to AMP
Incorporated, Harrisborg, Pa.
FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,809
Int a.i HOIR 13/514
UJS. a. 339—91 R 5 Claima
expbsed conductor on the printed circuit, respectively, for
electrically connecting the printed circuit and the instru-
ment, the clip further having means intermediate the
contact portions for gripping the pin to hold the clip in
bridging position.
4,380,360
CARTRIDGE, HOLDER AND CONNECTOR SYSTEM
Kenneth R. Parmer, Harrisburg, and Wiliiam J. Stape, Lewis-
berry, both of Pa., assignors to AMP Incorporatnl, Harris-
burg, Pa.
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,939
Int. a.3 HOIR 23/70
U.S. a. 339—17 CF 8 Claims
1. A cover kit for an electrical connector said kit comprising:
a first cover and a plurality of second covers each having a
profile different from the others of said second covers,
said first cover having a forward edge with means to engage
a first side of a housing of an electrical connector and a
plurality of parallel spaced latching legs at an opposite
rear edge enclosing and extending across a rear portion of
said housing,
said second cover having a forward edge with means to
engage the opposite side of said housing and an opposite
rear edge profiled to define a plurality of apertures for
intermating engagement with said latching legs of first
cover to be detachably latched thereto enclosing said
housing.
4,380,362
DIRECTLY COOLED BOLTED SERIES CONNECnON
OF GENERATOR STATOR COILS
Roger L. Swensmd, Plum Borough; Dennis PavUk, Mnrrysriile,
and John J. DeLuca, Pittsburgh, all of Pa., assignors to Wes-
tinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,634
Int aj HOIR 13/00
U.S. a. 339—112 L 8 Claims
1. A cartridge receiving holder and connector system com-
prising:
a holder housing defining therein a cartridge receiving cav-
ity, a front face defining a profiled opened entry to one
end of said cavity, and connector means at the opposite
end of said cavity directed therein and connected to cir-
cuits of external circuit means; and
a cartridge having a housing with an outer profile receivable
in said holder housing cavity and defming a cavity therein,
a circuit board assembly received in said cartridge housing
cavity and including a circuit board with components
mounted thereon, one end of said circuit board being
accessible through an open end of said cartridge housing
cavity,
whereby said cartridge is received in said holder cavity with
the contacts of said holder engaging said circuit board
through the open end of said cartridge cavity.
1. A fluid cooled electrical connection apparatus, compris-
ing:
a conductive first member, said first member having a tubu-
lar hole therethrough, said tubular hole having a first and
a second terminus;
a nozzle, said nozzle having a first and a second terminus,
said first nozzle terminus being connected to said fu^t
terminus of said tubular hole, said nozzle being in fluid
communication with said tubular hole;
a second member, said second member being connectable to
said first member, said second member being generally
L-shaped;
a first conductor, said first conductor having one terminus
disposed between said fuit and second member;
means for causing said first and second members to be pulled
634
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
together and to secure said flrst conductor between said
first and second member;
a second conductor, said second conductor having fluid
channels therethrough said second conductor being con-
nected to said flrst member, said fluid channels of said
second conductor being in fluid communication with said
second terminus of said tubular hole, whereby said fluid
channels of said second conductor are in fluid communi-
cation with said nozzle; and
whereby said second conductor is in electrical communica-
tion with said flrst conductor.
TABLE-continued
Lens
Thickness
Element
Radius
and Spacing
Material
u
r? = 0.907 ± 0.001
U = 0.100 ± 0.002
Si
rg = 1.289 ± 0.002
d4 = 0.200 ± 0.030
Air
Ls
r9 = 00
rio = 00
t5 = 0.040 ± 0.005
SA
given the equivalent focal length T as equal to 1.43 and ri,
n, r3, T4, rs, r6, n, rg being positive.
4,380,363 4380,364
FOUR ELEMENT INFRARED OBJECTIVE LENS VELOCITY MISMATCHED GATE
Thomas P. FJeldsted, West CotIm, CiOlf., assignor to RockweU Enrique A. J. Marcatili, Rumsoii, N J., assignor to BeU Tele-
Intemational Corporation, El Segundo, Calif. phone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray HUi, N J.
FUed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 251,026 pUed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 174,831
Int. a.^ G02B 7/00 I„t. q.^ G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 350— 1.3 2 Claims U.S. Q. 350— 96.14 8 Claims
,.»«''
-y.:
'a
1
1
1 ""
_•
_-i
■K.
1
1
■
1. An infrared lens system comprising:
a forward assemblage and a rearward assemblage,
said forward assemblage including a lens LI composed of
silicon and a lens L2 composed of germanium,
said rearward assemblage including a lens L3 composed of
germanium, a lens L4 composed of silicon and a window
L5 of sapphire,
said lens LI having forward and rearward radii rl and r2,
respectively,
said lens L2 having forward and rearward radii r3 and r4,
respectively,
said lens L3 having forward and rearward radii rS and r6,
respectively,
said lens L4 having forward and rearward radii r7 and r8,
respectively,
said window L5 having forward and rearward radii t9 and
rlO, respectively,
the thickness of said lens LI, L2, L3, L4, and window L5
being designated by tl, t2, t3, t4, and tS, respectively,
the distances between said lens LI and L2 being designated
dl,
the distance between said lens L2 and L3 being designated
d2,
the distance between said lens L3 and L4 being designated
d3,
the distance between said lens L4 and window L5 being
designated by d4,
the relationship among said lenses being as set forth in the
table following: «
TABLE
Lens
Thickness
Element
Radius
and Spacing
Material
Li
ri = 1.838 ± 0.002
t| = 0.125 ± 0.004
Si
rz = 2.674 ± 0.TO5
dl = 0.125 ± 0.006
Air
L2
r3 = 121.0 ± 2.4
t2 = 0.125 ± 0.010
Ge
r4 = 14.882 ± 0.031
d2 = 1.217 ± 0.020
Air
Lj
rs = 0.587 ± 0.001
t3 = 0.100 ±0.002
Ge
T6 = 0.504 ± 0.001
d3 = 0.129 ± 0.004
Air
1. In combination:
a pair of coupled wavepaths (61, 62) and;
traveling wave means (63) for producing a standing wave
for locally modulating the difference in the phase con-
stants of said coupled wavepaths (61, 62);
characterized in that
said traveling wave means (63) is disposed along said cou-
pled wavepaths so as to have flrst, longitudinally disposed
regions (a, b, c . . . ) which interact with said coupled
wavepaths, separated by second, longitudinally disposed
regions (m, p . . . ) along which there is no interaction with
said coupled wavepaths.
4,380,365
OPTICAL nBER, HAVING ON AT LEAST ONE OF ITS
FRONTAL EXTREMITIES A PLANO<X)NVEX
MICROLENS JOINED WITH ITS PLANE FACE TO SAID
FRONTAL EXTREMITY
Daniel Gross, Carouge, Switzerland, assignor to Battelle Memo-
rial Institute, Carouge, Switzerland
PCT No. PCT/CH79/00074, § 371 Date Jan. 23, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 17, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO79/01106, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 13, 1979
PCT FUed May 23, 1979, Ser. No. 193,529
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 23, 1978,
5574/78
Int a.3 G02B 5/172
VJS. a. 350—96.18 7 Claims
1. In combination, a virtual point source of divergent rays
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
635
and an optical fiber having an extremity confronting said
source for irradiation thereby, said fiber having an axis in line
with said source and an end face at said extremity perpendicu-
lar to said axis adjoining a flat side of a plano-convex microlens
of transparent thermoplastic material with a spherically curved
outer surface, said fiber having a core whose cross-sectional
area at said end face is completely overlaid by said flat side of
said microlens,
said microlens having an apex on said axis separated from
said source by a distance s related to the radius of curva-
ture r of said outer surface by a ratio s/r approximately
corresponding to the geometric mean of a first limiting
value (s/r)p=l/(n'— 1) and a second limiting value
(s/r)/= l/{cos[arcsin (l/n')]-l}, n' being the refractive
index of said thermoplastic material and being at least
equal to the refractive index of said core.
4,380,366
DETACHABLE CONNECTOR FOR OPTICAL nBRES
Adrianus J. J. Franken; Franciscus M. Coolen; Giok D. Khoe;
Jacob Langerhont, and Henricua W. W. Smuldera, all of
EindhoTen, Netherlands, assignors to U^. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed May 4, 1979, Ser. No. 35,979
Claims priority, application Netherlands, May 5, 1978,
7804825
Int. a.J G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350—96.21 13 Claims
87 9S
between the axes of the recesses and the central axis being
a small amount less than the radii of the recesses; and
three substantially circular-cylindrical centering elements,
one centering element provided in each recess, each cen-
tering element having a flat side disposed toward the
central axis, the centering elements forming a channel
having a triangular cross-section around the central axis.
12. A connector for coupling optical fibers comprising two
connector portions, each connector portion comprising:
a housing, with means for detachably connecting the hous-
ing to another housing, said housing having an inner wall,
a central axis and a reference face oriented perpendicular
to the central axis, said reference face contacting the
reference face of another housing when the connector
portions are connected, said housing also having an edge
having a toothed profile for engaging a toothed edge of
another housing when the connector portions are con-
nected, each of the toothed edges having faces along
which the housings contact each other, said faces being
along lines which radiate from the central axis, the central
axes of the connected housings being coaxial; and
centering means, arranged in the housing, for disengageably
centering a fiber end with respect to a fiber end in the
other connector portion, said centering means comprising
at least one centering element having a first side arranged
to abut against at least one side of the fiber end and having
a second side arranged to abut against the inner wall of the
housing;
characterized in that;
the inner wall of the housing has as many symmetry planes
as there are centering elements, the central axis being
situated in each symmetry plane;
the toothed edge is arranged to be resUient with respect to
the reference face in a direction parallel to the central axis;
and
the centering means further comprises:
a holder having three circular-cylindrical recesses each
having a radius of a first length and each having an axis of
a second length, the axes of the recesses being parallel to
the central axis and equidistant therefrom, the distance
4,380,367
COATING MATERIAL FOR OPTICAL
COMMUNICATION GLASS FIBERS
Toshio Suzuki, Ichihara, Japan, assignor to Toray Silicone Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
per No. PCr/JP80/00050, § 371 Date Not. 3, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Not. 3, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02078, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 2, 1980
PCT FUed Mar. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 212,712
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 28, 1979, 54-37259
Int a.5 G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 350—96.34 6 Claims
1. A coating material for optical communication glass fibers,
comprising the following components (a), (b) and (c):
(a) a vinyl group terminated methylphenylpolysiloxane
having a viscosity at 25* C. of 100 to 15,000 cP and with
a methyl/phenyl molar ratio in the range of 1/1 to 10/1,
the amount of the component (a) being 100 parts by
weight,
(b) at least one organohydrogenpolysiloxane selected from
the group consisting of a methylhydrogenpolysiloxane
having a viscosity at 25* C. of 0.7 to 5,000 cP and contain-
ing at least three silicon atom bonded hydrogen atoms in
one molecule, and a methylphenylhydrogenpolysiloxane
having a viscosity at 25* C. of 0.7 to 5,000 cP. containing
at least three silicon atom bonded hydrogen atoms in one
molecule and with a methyl/phenyl molar ratio not
smaller than 1/1, the amount of the component (b) being
an amount by weight required to provide a molar ratio of
the silicon atom bonded hydrogen atoms in the compo-
nent (b) to the silicon atom bonded vinyl groups in the
component (a) of 0.8/1 to 10/1, and
(c) platinum Or a platinum compound, the amount by weight
of the component (c) being 0.5 to 1,000 ppm in terms of
platinum metal based on the total amount of the compo-
nents (a) and (b).
4,380,368
PROJECnON SCREEN
Ken Ohmata, 69-15, Minami Iwakoni-cho 2-cbome, Iwaknai-shi,
Yamagnchi-ken; Hideya Aoki, Mitsui SeUyn Kagakn Yushu
Nishi Shataku C18-102, 5, Ynshndai Nishi 2-clioae, Ichihara-
shi, Chlba-ken, and Naoyuki Tamnra, 3-27, Misono-cho 1-
chome, Otake-shi, Hiroshima-ken, all of Japan
FUed Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,645
Claims priority, appUcatioo Japu, Aug. 21, 1979, 54/106861
Int a.J G03B 21/60
U.S. a. 350—117 12 Claims
1. A projection screen having a surface formed by a metal
636
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
plate member having a plurality of raised ridges which are
substantially unidirectional with a ridge density of about 1(P to
10^ ridges per cm^, said ridges each being formed by two side
surfaces sloping towards one another and having a maximum
width of about O.S to SO microns; said ridges each having a
length of approximately 100 microns or less, said projection
screen further including a plurality of surface irregularities
formed by crater patterns; said projection screen further in-
cluding an outer coating of the oxide of the metal forming the
plate member.
4,380,370
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR FOR MOTOR
VEHICLES
Bemhard Mittelhauser, No. 57, D-3002 Wedemark 2, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,052
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 6,
1980, 3017228
Int. a.3 G02B 7/18
U.S. a. 350—307 5 Claims
4,380,369
ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM FOR CYCLE MIRROR
Barry M. Schacht, Boulder, Colo., assignor to Mirryde Corpo-
ration, Boulder, Colo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 95,480, Nov. 19, 1979,
abandoned, Ser. No. 120,975, Feb. 13, 1980, abandoned, and Ser.
No. 120,977, Feb. 13, 1980, abandoned. This application Jan. 8,
1981, Ser. No. 223,412
Int. a.' G02B 7/75
U.S. a. 350—307 17 Qaims
1. An adjustable support system for a cycle mirror which
support system is designed for mounting on a standard cycle
brake lever bracket assembly in a manner which will not inter-
fer with the use or operation of said brake lever bracket assem-
bly, wherein said brake lever bracket assembly defmes at least
one through hole and includes a lever bracket, a lever, and a
lever pivot wherein the improvement comprises:
a base member having a first and a second end, wherein
substantially adjacent said first end is included means
designed for mechanical attachment or abutment of said
base member at at least one of said through holes defined
by said standard brake lever bracket assembly;
an arm, said arm having a first and second end said first end
of said arm pivotally secured to said base substantially
adjacent to said second end of said base and at an angle to
said base, and
a mounting member for supporting a mirror, said mounting
member pivotally connected substantially adjacent to said
second end of said arm; whereby such attachment or
abutment of said support system to said standard brake
lever bracket assembly is in a manner which will not
interfer with the use or operation of said brake lever
bracket assembly, and whereby further, by adjustment of
said base member, said arm and said mounting member for
supporting a mirror can be adjusted to substantially any
direction of rear view and then retained in that direction
with a substantial amount of stability.
1. An external rear view mirror for motor vehicles, compris-
mg:
a mounting support connected to said vehicle;
a housing open on one side;
a mirror body arranged in said housing;
a rotating shaft interposed between said mounting support
and said housing, said housing being connected with said
mounting support by said rotating shaft in such a way that
said housing is pivotable about two essentially vertical
axes arranged one behind the other when viewed in the
longitudinal direction of said vehicle; and
at least two arresting means for releasably holding said
housing, said arresting means being respectively located at
different distances from said mounting support.
4,380,371
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DEVICE
Gene A. Frantz, Irving, Tex., assignor to Texas Instruments
Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 799,808, May 23, 1977, abandoned.
This application Mar. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 130,780
Int a.5 G02F 1/13
UJS. a. 350—336 4 Claims
3l 9g St at
I 3t I 9K / 9, I St I
7t3 n^\-^
9»' / 9ll'j 9l ' 91,
9n' 91,'
1. A liquid crystal display device comprising:
first and second substrates;
liquid crystal material sealed between the subtrates;
a plurality of segment electrodes disposed on a major surface
of the first substrate;
a plurality of segment electrodes disposed on a major surface
of the second substrate in registration with the segment
electrodes on the first substrate;
the segment electrodes being arranged to provide a row of
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
637
eight selectively displayable characters including an end
character and seven other characters, each character
being deflned by a pattern of at least seven segment elec-
trodes on each substrate disposed in separately actuable
electrode pairs, each seven-segment character pattern
being arranged in a figure-eight configuration;
the segment electrodes on the first substrate which define
the seven other characters being devided into first, sec-
ond, and third groups, each group including from one to
three segment electrodes per character, each group being
restricted to segment electrodes in the same relative posi-
tions of each figure-eight configuration;
a first drive conductor interconnecting the segment elec-
trodes of the first group;
a second drive conductor interconnecting the segment elec-
trodes of the second group;
a third drive conductor interconnecting the segment elec-
trodes of the third group;
the segment electrodes on the second substrate which define
the seven other characters being divided into first, second
and third sets, each set including from one to three seg-
ment electrodes per character, each set being restricted to
segment electrodes in the same relative positions of each
figure-eight configuration;
a plurality of segment conductors including first, second,
and third segment conductors per character respectively
connected at each character to the segment electrodes of
the first, second and third sets, thereby providing twenty-
one segment conductors connected to twenty-one sepa-
rate subsets of segment electrodes on the second substrate;
each of the segment electrodes on the first substrate which
define the end character being connected to one of the
drive conductors;
the plurality of segment conductors further including at least
three additional segment conductors each of which is
connected to at least one of the segment electrodes on the
second substrate which define the end character, one or
more of the three additional segment conductors being
connected in common with one or more of the twenty-one
segment conductors of the seven other characters;
such that the total number of electrically separate segment
conductors plus the number of drive conductors is less
than or equal to twenty-six, and the segment conductors
and drive conductors are connected to the segment elec-
trodes of the eight characters in such manner that each
segment electrode pair is actuable by a unique combina-
tion of one of the drive conductors and one of the segment
conductors.
mixture having a thermally esUblished psuedo-focal-conic
state in which the liquid crystal mixture exhibits in the absence
of an electric field a light-scattering characteristic effective for
use as the display background; and means including electrodes
arranged to define a pattern of picture elements against the
display background and coacting with the liquid crystal mix-
ture for selectively applying electric fields to the liquid crystal
mixture to display selected picture elements, said means com-
prising means for applying a relatively strong electric field to
the liquid crystal mixture in the regions of selected picture
elements to transform the selected picture element regions to a
homeotropic light-transmitting stote and for applying a rela-
tively weak electric field to the liquid crystal mixture in the
regions of non-selected picture elements to transform the non-
selected picture element regions to a focal-conic light-scatter-
ing state; whereby the light-scattering sUtes of the display
background and the non-selected picture element regions ex-
hibit a generally similar appearance which contrasts with that
of the light-transmitting stote of the selected picture clement
regions.
4,380^73
CONFORMABLE PROXIMITY CXJUPLED
ELECTRO-OPTIC DEVICES
Robert A. Sprague, Saratoga, Calif., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
tion, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Oct 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,525
Int a.i G02F 1/03
U.S. a. 350—356 8 Oaiais
4,380,372
PHASE TRANSITION MODE LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY DEVICE
Masaaki Taguchi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Daini Seikosha, Japan
FUed Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,815
Int a.3 G02F 1/13
VJS. a. 350—346 26 Claims
/Jn ee
15. A phase transition mode liquid crystal display device
comprising: a liquid crystal mixture comprised of a nematic
liquid crystal mixed with at least one of a cholesteric liquid
crystal and a chiral nematic liquid crystal, the liquid crystal
1. In an electro-optic device including
an electro-optic element,
a flexible member, and
a plurality of electrodes supported in spaced apart relation-
ship on said flexible member, said electrodes facing a
surface of said electro-optic element and being intimately
coupled thereto to proximity couple electric fields into
said electro-optic element;
the improvement comprising
a rigid base plate, and
resilient means compressed between said flexible member
and said base plate for applying a distributed bias to said
flexible member, said bias urging said flexible member
toward said surface, thereby causing said electrodes to
generally conform to said surface.
4J80J74
VARIABLE FOCAL LENGTH PROJECnON LENS FOR
USE ON OVERHEAD PROJECTORS
Dennis F. Vanderwerf, Cottage Gro?c, Minn., assignor to Min-
nesota Mining A Manufectnring Company, St Paal, Minn.
FUed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,947
Int CL' G02B 9/58. 15/14
\}s. a. 350—423 ♦ a«|«
1. A lens assembly for use in an overhead projector having
a variable focal length to afford changes in magnification with
fixed object-to-image distances as between the suge and the
638
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
screen, said lens assembly comprising a flrst negative meniscus 4,380,376
lens airspaced from a positive meniscus lens which is airspaced ZOOM OBJECTIVE
from a second positive double convex lens which is airspaced Shigeyuki Suda, OhasU, and Kazuo Tanaka, Tokyo, both of
from a movable lens element which is a negative double con- Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,492
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 18, 1979, 54-76528
4 Int a.3 G02B 15/18
U.S. a. 350—427
cave lens aflbrding a range of movement to change the focal
length between about 276 mm to 356 mm and afford a change
in the magnification by a factor of between 1.4x and 1.5 x,
and a mirror positioned between said positive lenses to fold the
light path.
4,380,375
WIDE ANGLE ZOOM LENS OF TWO-GROUP
CONSTRUCnON
Satoshi Mogami, Kodaira, Japan, assignor to Nippon Kogaku K.
K., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,788
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 8, 1979, 54-71112
Int. a.3 G02B 15/14
U.S. a. 350—426 4 Qaims
Li L2 L3
L4 L5 L6 L7 L8
3Clainis
1. A zoom objective comprising:
a first lens group, a second lens group and a third lens group
arranged in the order mentioned from an objective end to
an image end;
said first lens group having a positive refractive power and
being axially movable forward and then rearward when
zooming from a wide angle to a telephoto setting;
said second lens group having a negative refractive power
aqd being axially movable from the objective end to the
image end when zooming from the wide angle to the
telephoto setting; and
said third lens group having a positive refractive power and
being axially movable forward and then rearward when
zooming from the wide angle to the telephoto setting.
4380J77
COMPACT ZOOM LENS
Yasuhisa Sato, Kawasaki, and Sadahiko Tsi^i, Yokohama, both
of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,707
Oaims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 17, 1979, 54-119053
Int. a.3 G02B 9/64. 15/18
U.S. a. 350—427 2 Claims
1. In a wide angle zoom lens system which comprises, in
succession from the object side, a divergent lens group and a
convergent lens group and in which magnification change is
effected by relative movement of said two groups and the
absolute value of the focal length of said divergent lens group
is greater than 1.12 times the longest total focal length of the
entire system, the improvement residing in
that said divergent lens group includes, in succession from
the object side, at least two negative meniscus lenses
having their convex surfaces facing the object side and
only one positive meniscus lens having its convex surface
facing the object side, and
that said lens system satisfies the following conditions:
<0.1
n -^ J- ^ 2.5
(D
ai)
where D is the air space between said positive meniscus lens
and the negative meniscus lens immediately before said posi-
tive meniscus lens, f i is the focal length of said divergent lens
group, and R is the curvature radius of the surface of said
convergent lens group which is most adjacent to the image
side.
riraqm
nfjrjnrs
1. A compact zoom lens comprising:
a first group having a positive refractive power, including a
cemented positive lens of a negative lens and a positive
lens, and a positive lens, and movable for focusing;
a second group having a negative refractive power, compris-
ing a negative lens and a cemented negative lens of a
negative lens and a positive lens, and movable for varia-
tion of magnification;
a third group having a positive refractive power, comprising
a cemented positive lens of a positive lens and a negative
lens, and movable for compensation along with the second
group; and
an image forming lens having a positive refractive power,
positioned to the rear of the third group on an optical axis,
and consisting of fourth and fifth groups,
said fourth group including, from front to rear, at least one
positive lens with its front surface coyex toward the front,
and a negative lens; and
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
639
said fifth group consisting of, from front to rear, a negative
meniscus lens of rearward convexity, and a positive lens,
said zoom lens satisfying the following conditions:
0.7 <4»4.5/<j)4< 0.85 (1)
1.5<4>4s/«M.5<2.2
N4n>N4p
1.76<N5n<1.85
30<v5p<45
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
where
<|>4 is the refractive power of said fourth group;
4>4,S is the overall refractive power of said fourth and fifth
groups;
(f>4s is the refractive power of the first surface of the
positive lens of said fourth group;
N4p is the refractive index of the positive lens in said
fourth group (when the positive lens is plural in number,
the average value thereof);
N4n is the refractive index of the negative lens in said
fourth group;
NSn is the refractive index of the negative lens in said fifth
group; and
vSp is the Abbe number of the positive lens of said fifth
group.
4 380,378
CONTROL MECHANISM FOR A ZOOM LENS
Tetsuo Tamura, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 20, 1980, Ser. No. 151,757
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1979, 54-74314
Int. a.J G02B 7/10
U.S. a. 350—429 8 Claims
m19 5 7 5iU| 15ii 16 9 1713
9Q ISi S Bi
1. A control system for a zoom lens comprising:
(a) a cam. member fitted on a tubular body having defined
therein a linear guide slot and arranged to be rotatable
about an optical axis of said lens by actuation from outside
of said lens, said cam member having a first camming slot
for providing a primary camming surface and a second
camming slot for providing a supplementary camming
surface;
(b) lens holding means for containing a lens component
which contributes to effect the functions of change of
focal length and image shift compensation of said zoom
lens, said lens holding means having engagement means
extending through said linear guide slot to said first cam-
ming slot; and
(c) resilient means fixed to said lens holding means and
having an engaging member extending through said linear
guide slot of said tubular body and engaging with said
supplementary camming surface to exert a spring force
acting between said lens holding means and said supple-
mentary camming surface through said engagement mem-
ber to continuously urge said engagement means against
said primary camming surface.
4,380,379
OFTOMETRIC DEVICE
John Ahem, Barrington; Wayne Fanner, Lincoln, both of R.L;
Darid Hawes, Fairhaven, and Heri>ert J. McEfoy, Jr., North
Attleboro, both of Mass., assignors to Fairfield Optical Com-
pany, Inc., Mansfield, Mass.
FUed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,452
Int. a.3 G02C 1/04, 5/00
U.S. a. 351—106 10 Claims
1. An optometric device comprising:
a semi-rimless plastic two lens frame having two rim sur-
faces;
two lenses for mounting in the frame each having a circum-
ferential groove therearound; and
means for mounting the lenses in the frame comprising for
each lens means forming a rib projecting from the rim
surface and integral therewith and configured to engage
with a portion of the lens groove to axially fix the lens and
means connected to the frame for releasably engaging a
remaining portion of the groove of the lens to radially fix
the lens, wherein the releasably engaging means comprises
a flexible line, means connecting the line is extendable
along a portion of the remaining lens groove and receiv-
able therein and winding means mounting in the frame and
connected to the other end of the line for maintaining the
line in a taut state, the winding means comprising means
forming an unthreaded bore in the frame and a threaded
rod having means disposed at one end for engaging said
other end of the line and configured to tightly fit in the
bore when the line is wrapped in the threads thereof and
having means disposed at the other end effecting the
turning thereof to simultaneously wrap the line there-
around and insert the rod in the bore until the line is taut.
4380,380
EPISCOFIC PROJECTOR
Frank G. Back, 5596 Solcdad Mt Rd^ U JoUa, Calif. 92037
FUed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,506
Int. a.3 G03B 21/06
U.S. a. 353—66 9 Claims
1. An episcopic projector comprising an opaque hollow
lamp housing having a top member, a bottom, a front, a back
and opposed sides, a window in the top member, a field flatten-
ing lens in the top member window to receive an image source
thereon, an opening in the front of the lamp housing, a lens
housing having a rear and a front opening secured to the lamp
housing with the opening at the rear of said housing in commu-
nication with the interior of the lamp housing, a light source
carried within the lamp housing and directed at the field flat-
tening lens, a Fresnel lens carried in the lens housing front
opening to receive light reflected from the image source
1029 O.G.— 30
640
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
through the field flattening lens, an angularlary disposed mir-
ror in the light path between the said lens and the Fresnel lens
to receive the reflected light and direct it through the Fresnel
lens and means to move the Fresnel lens along the optical axis
of the projector to focus the Fresnel lens.
case substantially equal in length to the strip of film and a
cassette opening which extends perpendicularly of the length
of the case and which is provided with light-sealing means,
characterised in that the case comprises a top part and a bottom
part, the top part and the bottom part being fixedly intercon-
4,380,381
CAMERA WITH MOTOR DRIVEN WINDING-UP
DEVICE
Nobuo Tezuka, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,584
Claims priority, application Japan, No?. 7, 1980, 55-156847;
Nov. 7, 1980, 55-156849; Not. 7, 1980, 55-156850; Nov. 7, 1980,
55-156851
Int. a.3 G03B 17/38. 17/42
U.S. a. 354—173 10 Qaims
nected solely in the vicinity of the cassette opening and the top
part being surrounded by the bottom part and arranged for
displacement therein in such a way that light-proof labyrinths
are formed at the three edges of the bottom part and top part
which are displaceable relative to one another and, even if the
case is bent, the strip of film retains its freedom of movement.
4380,383
COPYING METHOD AND APPARATUS
Joseph W. Daintrey, London; John Rushton, Wickford, and
Michael Willis, London, all of England, assignors to Gestetner
Manufacturing Limited, London, England
FUed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,904
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 16, 1979,
7939698
Int. a.J G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—3 R 19 Claims
1. A motor driven winding-up device for a camera with a
shutter including:
(a) an electric motor;
(b) a spool arranged to be driven by said motor for winding
up film in the camera;
(c) clutch means for transmitting driving torque of said
motor to said spool so that said spool is driven to rotate
when said clutch means is actuated, said clutch means
being placed in a non-actuated state when a film is wound
up by a length of one frame;
(d) switching means for controlling a supply of current to
said motor when said switching means is actuated, said
switching means being placed in a non-actuated state
corresponding to completion of energizing the shutter;
(e) an actuating member for selectively actuating said clutch
means and said switching means by shifting in a prescribed
direction; and
(0 a latch member engageable with said actuating member,
and arranged to be disengaged from said actuating mem-
ber when operation of the shutter is completed, for initiat-
ing shifting of said actuating member.
4,380,382
nLM CASSETTE FOR A PHOTOSENSITIVE ¥IIM
STRIP
Dieter Engelsniann, Unterhaching; Franz Hoffacker, Langen-
feld; Gnldo Kovacic, Unkel; Peter Lennann, Naring; Hermann
LiUtrig, Leverkusen, and Karl Wagner, Munich, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesell-
schaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,555
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 25,
1980, 3023819
Int a. J G03B 17/26
U.S. a. 354—275 7 Claims
1. A film cassette for a photosensitive film strip suitable for
taking several pictures, consisting of a light-proof, flat flexible
J^
..-^■•■:^::
I ^qU 33)Q UJ
1. A copying system comprising in combination a first, mem-
ory, photoconductive surface, means to form and develop an
electrostatic image of an original on said first, memory, photo-
conductive surface, a second photoconductive surfaccv^^i-
tioned adjacent said first photoconductive surface means re-
peatedly forming on said second photoconductive surface
second electrostatic images of the developed image on the first
surface by Ulumination of the first surface, said second electro-
static images being identical with each other and correspond-
ing to the first electrostatic image, means to transfer the second
images from the second surface to copy material, and means to
develop said second images.
4,380,384
CHARGING DEVICE FOR ELECTRONIC COPIER
TsuyoshI Ueno, Fi^lsawa, and Hideo Mukal, Yokohama, both of
Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shlbaura DenkI Kahnahtiri Kaisha,
Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,779
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 25, 1980, 55-7511;
Jan. 25, 1980, 55-7512; Jan. 25, 1980, 55-7513; Jan. 25, 1980,
55-7824[U]; Jan. 25, 1980, 55-7825[U]
Int. a.J G03G 15/02
U.S. a. 355—3 CH 9 Claims
4. An electronic copier comprising:
(a) a photosensitive medium;
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
Ml
(b) endless charging belt means, provided in contact with
said photosensitive medium and having a characteristic
resistance ranging from about 10* to about 10'^ ll.cm, for
charging said photosensitive medium;
(c) drive mechanism means for driving said charging belt at
a peripheral speed different from that of said photosensi-
tive medium;
(d) power supply means for applying a voltage to said charg-
ing belt means such as to produce a potential gradient
therein;
FROM 6
2*20
(e) exposure device means for forming an electrostatic latent
image on said photosensitive medium;
(f) developing device means for developing the electrostatic
latent image formed on said photosensitive medium to
obtain a visible image;
(g) transfer device means for transferring the visible image
formed on said photosensitive medium onto a recording
sheet; and
(h) Fixing device means for fixing the visible image trans-
ferred onto said recording sheet.
4,380,386
METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PREFATIGUING
ILLUMINATION OF A PHOTOSENSITIVE MEMBER
Kazoo Yasoda; Akihiko Tamura, and Yoahimitiii Nakamnra, all
of Hachioji, Japan, aaiignors to Koniihiroku Photo Industry
Co., Ltd., Hlno, Japan
Filed JoL 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,811
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 29, 1980, 55-104025
Int a.3 G03G 21/00
U.S. a. 355—3 R 4 Claims
1. In a copying machine which includes a photosensitive
member for receiving a latent image in the course of a copying
operation during which a reproduction is produced by the
machine, and an auxiliary light source operable to illuminate
the photosensitive member and thereby prefatigue the member
prior to a copying operation during which a latent image is
received thereon, the improvement comprising a method of
controlling the operation of the auxiUary light source, compris-
ing:
measuring the time interval between the completion of each
copying operation and initiation of the next succeeding
copying operation; and
controlling the operation of the auxiliary light source at the
initiation of each copying operation in accordance with
the latest measured time interval such that the amount of
prefatiguing illumination on the photosensitive member is
varied in substantially direct relation to the length of the
measured time interval, whereby the photosensitive mem-
ber is appropriately prefatigued in accordance with the
measured time interval between successive copying oper-
ations.
4,380,385
METHOD OF TRANSFERRING TONER POWDER
IMAGE BY PRESSURE AND APPARATUS THEREFOR
YoshiUro Ozaki, Isebara; Shuichiro Kaneko, Mitaka; Masayukl
Knniyoshi, Sagamitaara; Shoji Kondo, Tokyo, and Yasukoni
Omata, Hachioji, all of Japan, assignors to Minolta Camera
Kahnshiki Kai^ Osaka, Japan
FUed Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 228,806
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 18, 1980, 55-18875
Int a.3 G03G 15/16
US. CL 355—3 TR 8 Claims
^:
X Y
4^
>i3'
le
K)
OO)
4,380,387
COMPOSITE INFORMATION RECORDING
APPARATUS
Tatsuo Yi^ima, Hino, Japan, assignor to Konishiroku Photo
Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Jap^n
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 50,616, Jun. 21, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Oct 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,709
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 26, 1978, 53-77258
Int a.J G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—3 R 4 Claims
ly-**
14'
18 /I7 / 16
nv"
^2
1. A method of transferring a toner powder image formed on
a rotatable drum to an image receiving member by pressure,
which comprises pressing a pressure roller against said rotat-
able drum under a pressure of at least about 20 kg/cm^ and
disposing said pressure roller to intersect its rotating axis with
the rotating axis of said drum at an angle of about O.S* to 2* for
producing sliding between said rotatable drum and said image
receiving member as said image receiving member is trans-
ported between said drum and said pressure roller.
1. A composite information recording apparatus having an
optical system for projecting an image of an original supported
on a copy board onto a light sensitive medium, means for
reproducing an electrical information signal as an electrostatic
latent image on said medium, and means for producing a visible
recording by developing either image on the light sensitive
642
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
medium, the improvement comprising a second optical system,
an optical switching mirror for transferring the image on said
copy board to said second optical system, a photoelectric
converter located at the imaging portion of said second optical
system, external signal transmitting apparatus, and means
switching the input of said signal reproducing means to the
output of photoelectric converter or to the output of said
external signal transmitting apparatus.
periphery of said feed roll cooperating with said viewing
window to form a nip through which a document to be
scanned passes;
(e) bias means for releasably biasing said viewing window
and said document feed roll periphery into contact; and
(0 drive means for rotating said document feed roll to trans-
port the document to be scanned along said surface form-
4380 J88
CYCLIC ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC COPYING
PROCESS
Roland Moraw, and Giinther Schadlich, both of Wiesbaden, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Kalle, Niederlassung der Ho-
echst AG, Wiesbaden, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,423
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 17,
1979, 2950769
Int. a.3 G03G 21/00
U.S. a. 355-15 16 Oaims
1. An electrophotographic copying process comprising the
steps of:
performing a cleaning operation on a recording element by
carrying out at least one rinsing operation of the element
utilizing a first quantity of a developer liquid;
performing a series of copying cycles comprising charging,
exposing, developing with a liquid developer, transferring
and fixing; and
after at least one copying cycle, performing additional clean-
ing operations by rinsing the element with a second quan-
tity of developer liquid which is between "0" and "a"
wherein "a" is an amount less than said first quantity and
"0" means a completely omitted rinsing of developer
liquid; the supply of developer liquid for rinsing said
element being at least partially interrupted during said
series of copying cycles.
4^80389
DOCUMENT TRANSPORT FOR RASTER SCANNERS
WilUam Kingsley, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
tion, Stamford, Calif.
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,726
Int. Q\? G03B 27/48, 27/50
U.S. a. 355-50 3 Claims
1. In a raster input scanner having at least one array for
scanning documents line by line, the combination of;
(a) means forming a surface for supporting a document to be
scanned, said surface forming means having a slit-like
scanning aperture therein through which said array scans
said document, the longitudinal axis of said aperture being
substantially parallel to the direction of scan by said array;
(b) transport means for moving a document to be scanned
along said surface forming means and across said scanning
aperture in a direction substantially perpendicular to the
direction of scan by said array;
(c) means forming a transparent viewing window in said
scanning aperture;
(d) said transport means including a document feed roll, the
ing means and across said viewing window for scanning
by said array, tangential contact of said document feed
roll with said viewing window imparting constant veloc-
ity to said document while said bias means permits said nip
to expand to accommodate passage of said document
therethrough while minimizing velocity variations of said
document as said document enters and leaves said nip.
4,380390
EXPOSURE CORRECTING DEVICE
Masamichi Tateoka, Tokyo, and Kazuo Minoura, Yokohama,
both of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,505
Oaims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct. 29, 1979, 54-140044;
Sep. 24, 1980, 55-133202
Int. a.3 G03B 27/72
U.S. a. 355-71 4 Claims
1. An exposure correcting device comprising:
a light source for illuminating an original plane with light of
longitudinally uniform intensity;
a lens for projecting a predetermined illuminated zone of
said original plane onto a predetermined zone of an image
plane; and
a light-shield plate having a surface contour defined by an
arc of a circle of predetermined radius, said light-shield
plate being disposed in a plane approximately perpendicu-
lar to the optical axis of said lens in such a manner that the
center of the circle is positioned at a predetermined axial
distance from said lens and at a predetermined perpendic-
ular distance from the optical axis of said lens, to thereby
produce a substantially uniform exposure on said image
plane;
wherein said light-shield plate is positioned between said
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
643
original plane and said lens in such a manner that the
radius R of said circle, the axial distance L of the center of
said circle from the front face of said lens and the perpen-
dicular distance H of said center from the optical axis are
selected so as to satisfy the following relations represented
in centimeters:
being pulsed by said train of circularly polarized laser
pulses.
13.5
32
and H-R<0.2.
l2-
1
5.3
<H <
29
32
L2-i
4,380^91
SHORT PULSE CO2 LASER FOR RANGING AND
TARGET IDENTinCATION
Rudolph G. Buser, Wall, N J.; Robert S. Rohde, Springfield, and
Neal T. Nomiyama, Reston, both of Va., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,275
Int. a? GOIC 3/08: G02B 5//<JI01S 3/00: G06K 9/00
U.S. a. 356—5 10 Claims
4,380,392
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALIBRATION OF
INSTRUMENTS SERVING TO COUNT AND TO
DETERMINE THE SIZE OF PARTICLES SUSPENDED IN
DISPERSION MEDIUM
MikhaU A. Karabegov, ulitsa MardzhanishTili, 35; Aram G.
Oraoesian, ulitsa Sundukiana, 22; Eduard A. Mesropiao,
prospekt Plekhanova, 151; Georgy T. Metreveli, Gldansky
massiv, 7 mikroraion, 10 korpiu« kv. 153; Anatoly A. Karpeev,
Kakhetinskoeshosse, 38; Boris K. Khoshtaria, uUtsa Dadiani,
8, and Tatyana I. Gfentsadze, ulitsa Kamo, 79/81, kr. 19, all
of Tbilisi, U.S.S.R.
FUed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,122
Int. a.3 GOIB 11/10
U.S. a. 356—243 11 Claims
'^eM'^'
1. A high precision pulsed CO2 laser rangefmder and target
identifier device comprised of:
a linearly polarized CO2 TEA laser triggered by firing logic
to produce a train of laser beani gain switched spikes
therefrom;
an electrooptics Pockels Cell modulator in optical alignment
with said train of laser beam gain switched spikes;
means for activating said electrooptics Pockels Cell modula-
tor in synchronism with each spike of said train of laser
beam gain switched spikes to chop each of said spikes into
a train of short evenly spaced linearly polarized laser
pulses at the output therefrom;
a circularly polarizing quarter wave plate in optical align-
ment with the output of said electrooptics Pockels Cell
modulator for transforming said train of linearly polarized
laser pulses into a train of circularly polarized lasei pulses;
common transmitter and receiver optics means for transmit-
ting said train of circularly polarized laser pulses there-
from to a target scene and for receiving target return
signals representing time broadened reflected signals that
indicate the fmite depth of the target and unique signature
therethrough wherein said target return signals are con-
verted back to linearly polarized light pulses by passing
back through said quarter wave plate;
a wide bandwidth receiving means diat is range gated by
said firing logic in synchronism with the triggering of said
linearly polarized CO2 TEA laser, said receiving means
receiving said target return signals resolving into range
resolved cross sections to gather target signatures from
different zones in the target plane and signal processing
said target signatures; and
a pattern recognition means having known target signatures
stored therein for comparison with target signatures ob-
tained from said target return signals to identify the target
1. A method for calibrating an optical sensing apparatus
which counts particles suspended in a fluid by (i) passing said
fluid through a measuring tube having a transparent portion,
and (ii) passing a transverse plane of light through said trans-
parent portion of said tube to impinge upon a photodetector, so
that particles in said fluid intercept said light and vary the
output of the photodetector, said method comprising the steps
of:
providing a vertically oriented calibration tube having a
transparent portion aligned with said light plane, said
calibration tube having closed upper and lower ends and
containing a certified particle; and
vibrating said lower end of said calibration tube to cause said
particle to repetitively intercept said light plane at a pre-
determined frequency, to cause the output of said photo-
detector to vary in accordance therewith.
4,380,393
GRAZING INODENCE SPECTROMETER
Hiroshi Nagata, Tokyo; Kazuo Sano; Jiro Morimoto, both of
Kawasaki, and Makoto Shiho, Tokaimura, all of Japan, as-
signors to Nippon Kogaku K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,757
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55-40295
Int a? GOIJ 3/38
MS. a. 356—328 6 Claims
r'.
1. In a grazing incidence spectrometer provided with an
644
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
entrance slit and a difTraction grating for difTracting the light
rays incident thereon from said entrance slit and for imaging
said light rays as a plurality of spectral lines, the improvement
residing in that
said diffraction grating is a curved diffraction grating having
a predetermined principal radius of curvature and the
groove patterns thereof are formed at unequal intervals so
as to make the image plane thereof substantially planar,
said entrance slit is disposed on a line segment 1 at a position
satisfying a relation:
O.7^r/Rcosa^0.9,
where R is said principal radius, a is angle of incidence of
the principal ray incident from said entrance slit onto said
curved diffraction grating, 1 is the line segment connecting
between the center of said curved diffraction grating and
a point on a Rowland circle of the curved diffraction
grating, said point being distant from the center of said
curved diffraction grating by R cos a, and r is a distance
on the line segment 1 between said entrance slit and the
center of said curved diffraction grating,
the ray incident through said entrance slit being diffracted
by said curved diffraction grating and imaging on said
image plane within said Rowland circle.
ported to said second end of said second fiber optic wave-
guide, and
an optical energy absorber fixedly attached to said first end
of said second fiber optic waveguide to prevent internal
back reflection within said second fiber optic waveguide.
4380395
REDUCTION PROJECTION ALIGNER SYSTEM
Shiiui Kuniyoshi, Tokyo; Akihiro Takanashi, aod Toshiei
Korosaki, both of Kokubn^Ji, aU of Japan, assignors to Hita-
chi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 152,844
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1979, 54-69771
Int. a.3 GOIB 77/27
U.S. a. 356-401 sCMna
HBER OPTIC INTERFEROMETER
Darid W. Stowe, Buffalo Grove, 111., assignor to Gould Inc.,
Rolling Meadows, 111.
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,773
Int. a.3 GOIB 9/02
U.S. a. 356-358 2 Qaims
24
1 . An inteferometer for measuring displacements of a surface
10 be measured, said interferometer comprising:
an optical energy source;
a first fiber optic waveguide having a finite length with a
first end and a second end, light from said optical energy
source entering said first end of said first fiber optic wave-
guide and, being transported to said second end of said first
fiber optic waveguide, said second end internally reflect-
ing at least a portion of the light back towards said first
end of said first fiber optic and projecting the remainder of
said light; and
a second fiber optic waveguide having a finite length with a
first end and a second end;
said first and said second fiber optic waveguide being in
juxtaposition such that evanescent wave coupling occurs
between their respective cores over a predetermined
length;
said second end of said first fiber optic being in such spatial
relationship with said surface to be measured that said
projected light strikes said surface and reflects therefrom
with at least a portion of said reflected light from said
surface entering said second end of said first fiber optic
and combining with said internally reflected light within
said first fiber optic waveguide thus defining an optical
information wave, said optical information wave being
evanesccntly coupled to said second fiber optic wave-
guide such that said optical information wave is trans-
1. In a reduction projection aligner system wherein a pattern
on a reticle is formed directly on a wafer by reducing and
projecting the pattern on the wafer through a reduction pro-
jection lens; the improvement comprising means to optically
magnify and project and then focus a positioning pattern pro-
vided on the wafer onto a focal plane, means to scan the focal
plane with a slit, an origin sensor provided with a mechanical
origin on a body of said system for determining the initial
position of said slit, means to measure the distance from the
mechanical origin to said positioning pattern provided on said
wafer on the basis of the extent of movement of said slit neces-
sary to align said slit with said positioning pattern to thereby
determine the position of said wafer relative to the body of said
system, and means to relatively move and position the reticle
so as to cause it to coincide with the position of said wafer on
the basis of the measurement by said distance measuring means.
4,380,396
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING THE
OPACITY OF SHEET MATERIAL
William A. Amdt; Wayne A. Damran, and Donald J. Gonderson,
all of Wisconsin Rapids, Wis., assignors to Consolidated Pa-
pers, Inc., Wisconsin Rapids, Wis.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,432
Int a.3 GOIN 21/01
U.S. a. 356—432 4 claims
1. A method of measuring the opacity of sheet material, such
as a sheet of paper, comprising the steps of directing a beam of
light onto an area of the material on one side thereof; sensing
on an opposite side of the material the intensity of any light
transmitted through the material; and generating an indication,
in accordance with the sensed intensity of light, of the opacity
of the area, wherein a plurality of measurements of the opaci-
ties of different areas of the sheet material are made, including
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
645
the further steps of counting the number of opacity measure-
ments made; averaging the values of the measured opacities
4,380,398
DISPERSION MIXER
BasU A. Burgess, 163 Bcdbrook Ave^ Montred West, Qnebec
H4X 1R7, Canada
FUed Sep. 16, 1980, Scr. No. 187,709
Int. a.J BOIF 7/26
U.S. a. 366—261 4 Clidms
and, upon occurrence of a selected count, generating an indica-
tion of the average opacity of the areas.
4,380,397
DUPLEX TYPE CONTINUOUS MIXER
ShiAji Hashiznme, and Shinichi Faknmiza, both of Kobe, Japan,
assignors to Kobe Sted, Ltd., Kobe, Japan
FUed Jan. 16, 1981, Scr. No. 225,774
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 16, 1980, 55^27;
Jan. 20, 1980, 55-10612[U]
Int a.5 B28C 7/16
U.S. a. 366—77 3 Claims
1. A dispersion mixer for operating in a container the mixer
comprising
a first rotor shaft extending downwards into the container at
the container's approximate center,
a second rotor shaft, substantially parallel to the first rotor
shaft, spaced from the fu^t rotor shaft and extending
downwards into the container,
at least one mixing rotor disc mounted on the first rotor
shaft, and at least one mixing rotor disc mounted on the
second rotor shaft,
fust drive means including fu^t motor means for rotating the
first rotor shaft about its own axis, and the second rotor
shaft about its own axis, and
second drive means including second motor means indepen-
dent of said first drive means for moving the second rotor
shaft in a circumferential path about the first rotor shaft,
the first rotor shaft routing at substantially the same roU-
tional speed as the second rotor shaft, and in the same
direction whereby the first drive means rotates the rotor
shafts at high speed to develop maximum shear and the
second drive means orbits the second rotor shaft about the
first rotor shaft at a low speed.
43 44
43' '3 44
1. A duplex type continuous mixer, comprising:
a casing having an inlet and an outlet at opposite ends
thereof and defining a pair of parallel cavities extending
between said inlet and outlet;
a pair of mixing shafts rotatably received in said cavities and
each having a feed portion, a mixing portion, a discharge
portion and an annular groove separating said mixing and
discharge portions; and
a weir member projected upwardly from the bottom walls of
said cavities at a position corresponding to said annular
groove of said mixing shafts so as to prevent the short-
passes of unmelted materials, wherein the cross sectional
profile of the top surface of said weir member is identical
to the cross-sectional profile of said bottom walls of said
cavities.
4J80J99
MIXER FOR HOMOGENIZING A MIXTURE OF
PRODUCTS CONTAINED IN A VESSEL
Jean Godat, Olivet; Daniel Parmenon, Orleans la Source; Alain
Krzywdziak, Saint Denis en Val, and Daniel Bondin, Orleans,
all of France, assignors to Fonderic et Ateliers des Sablons,
Orleans, France
FUed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,717
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 7, 1980, 80 00199;
Dec. 9, 1980, 80 26095
Int. a.' BOIF 7/24
U.S. CL 366—289 » Claims
1. A mixer for homogenizing a mixture of products in a
vessel having a detachable Ud, comprising, a mixer shaft
mounting a helical blade, having mounted at iu base a scraping
device for scraping the inside walls of the vessel comprising a
spring exerting an essentially constant pressure on the bottom
and side walls of the vessel, said helical blade being routively
mounted at its top about a substantially vertical axis by a bear-
ing disposed in the Ud of the vessel, said mixer ftirther compris-
ing means for vertically moving said helical blade with a vibra-
tory movement having a relatively small vertical amplitude,
said moving means comprising a tubular coupling sleeve dis-
posed in said bearing whose lower lip forms a notched crown
646
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
presenting a sinusoidal cam configuration bearing upon at least
one stop integral with said shaft, said at least one stop being
second control means to control the pressure of said com-
bustible gas at said output of said second control means,
combustion means connected to an output of said mixing
means for producing a combustion of a mixture of said air
and said combustible gas from said mixing means,
detector means for detecting the oxygen content of combus-
tion products from the combustion of said air and said
combustible gas by said combustion means,
control means responsive to said detector means for produc-
ing a control signal for controlling said valving operation
of said valve means to achieve a preselected oxygen con-
tent of said combustion products,
circuit means for applying said control signal to said valve
motor to effect a corresponding motion of said valve stem,
valve stem movement monitoring means connected to said
valve stem for producing a signal representative of the
position of said valve stem and
display means for displaying said signal from said monitor-
ing means as an indication of the calorific content of said
combustible gas.
maintained in contact with said notched crown by said spring
of the scraping device. 4,380,401
BEARING SUPPORT
Seiim A. Chacour, and John R. Degnan, both of York, Pa.,
4,380,400 assignors to Allis-Chalmers Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
COMBUSTIBLE GAS ANALYZER ^^^ ^^V 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,218
John L. Searle, Camden, N.J., assignor to Honeywell Inc., Min- '"*• ^-^ ^^^ ^^^02
neapolis, Minn. ^-S- CI. 384—438 4 Qaims
FUed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,538
Int. C1.3 GOIN 25/22
U.S. CI. 374-37 6 Claims
,'»
rJLn
fUEL
BECORDEB
OlSPLir
1. A combustible gas analyser comprising
first pressure control means for supplying combustion air at
a predetermined flow rate,
second pressure control means for supplying a combustible
gas to be analyzed at a controlled flow rate, said second
control means having an input, an output and a pressure
feedback,
gas mixing meajis for mixing air from said first pressure
control means and a combustible gas to be analyzed,
valve means located at said output of said second control
means for performing a valving operation on a flow of a
combustible gas to be analyzed from said second control
means, said valve means including a valve stem and a
valve stem drive motor,
feedback pressure means connected between an output of
said valve means and said feedback of said second control
means for providing a feedback pressure signal to said
1. A bearing support for the rotatable drive shaft of a hy-
draulic turbine machine having a head cover structure which is
grounded to a turbine supporting structure through which the
drive shaft extends;
a circular bearing surrounding the shaft;
a circular bearing support means in which said bearing is
carried in position for close clearance with the drive shaft
said circular bearing support comprising a cylindrical
frustrum of a cone, the axis of which is concentric with
respect to the axis of the drive shaft, said conic frustrum
being operably connected to receive a lateral load from
the bearing and transfer the load as shear to the grounded
head cover;
operable means between said bearing and said bearing sup-
port means to transfer bearing load to said bearing support
means comprising first and second radial rib members,
said first rib member being in a horizontal plane and said
second rib member being inclined at an angle, both of said
ribs interconnecting in a common plane with the top
portion of said cylindrical conic frustrum; and,
the base of said cylindrical conic frustrum is provided with
a radial flange which is constructed and arranged to en-
gage with the head cover surface; and,
there is provided bolt means operably disposed to secure
said cylindrical conic frustrum to the grounded head
cover, in a manner to permit said cylindrical conic frus-
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
647
trum to follow a radial defection of the head cover where
said fnistrum is rigidly connected to the head cover;
whereby an indirect relatively stiff connection is provided
between the bearing and the grounded head cover while
the radial movement of the head cover is effectively sepa-
rated from the bearing.
4,380,403
CLOSURE CAP FOR A WRITING INSTRUMENT
Bernhard Endres, Winkelhaid, and Klaus Glombitza, Nurem-
berg, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aarignors to J. S. Staed*
tier K.G., Numburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,930
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 19,
1980, 8001322
Int. a.3 B43K 9/00
U.S. a. 401—213 9 Claims
4,380,402
LIPSnCK-TYPE COSMETIC CASE WITH DISPLAY
POSITION
Alfred G. Andrews, Wolcott, and Charles L. Sorensen, Bristol,
both of Conn., assignors to Lake Eyelet Manufacturing Com-
pany, Inc., Southington, Conn.
FUed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,900
Int. a.3 A45D 40/12, 40/06
U.S. a. 401—74 4 Qaims
1. In a lipstick type cosmetic case having a generally cylin-
drical sleeve assembly with inner and outer, manually rela-
tively rotatable, generally cylindrical sleeves and a cosmetic
carrier axially reciprocable within the sleeve assembly be-
tween retracted and extended axial positions thereof, the car-
rier having a radially outwardly projecting cam follower and
the two sleeves having respectively generally axially and heli-
cally extending cooperating cam track slots receiving the cam
follower for manually reciprocating the carrier between its
retracted and extended axial positions by manual relative rota-
tion of the inner and outer sleeves, the generally helically
extending cam track slot having helically extending cam track
slot sections and an intermediate cam track slot section there-
between for selectively positioning the carrier intermediate its
retracted and extended positions, the improvement wherein
the intermediate cam track slot section is a circumferentially
extending section having a cam track slot width greater than
the width of the cam follower along the entire circumferential
length of said intermediate section to permit the cam follower
to freely follow therealong between said helically extending
cam track slot sections and comprises a pair of axially oppo-
sitely facing generally concave cam track edges, each having a
central recessed track edge portion with a circumferential
length greater than the width of the cam follower and rounded
convex end lobe track edge portions at the circumferential
ends thereof, to form an intermediate cam track slot pocket
with a pair of axially opposed end lobe track edge portions at
each circumferentisd end thereof to retain the cam follower
against inadvertent displacement from the pocket in axially
upright and inverted positions of the cosmetic case and yet to
permit the cam follower to move freely along the intermediate
cam track slot section between said helically extending cam
track slot sections upon manual relative rotation of the two
sleeves.
1. A closure cap for a writing instrument comprising an
outer cap housing, a sealing sleeve of a soft resilient durable
material fitted within said cap housing, a tubular open ended
slide sleeve of hard rigid material retained against axial move-
ment within said sealing sleeve, a closure member of a soft
resilient durable material confined within and axially displace-
able within said slide sleeve and having an end engageable with
a tip of a writing instrument inserted into said cap housing, said
slide sleeve disposed between said sealing sleeve and said
closure member, and spring means within said slide sleeve
having one end abutting said sealing sleeve and another acting
against said closure member toward said tip.
4,380,404
CLEVIS THIMBLE CONNECTOR
Gaddis G. HaU, P.O. Box 6699, Birmingham, Ala. 35210
FUed Not. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,161
Int. a.3 F16C 11/00: F16D 1/12
U.S. a. 403—79 1 Claim
1. A clevis thimble assembly for connecting a tensioning
device and a conductor to a supporting structure for sagging in
a conductor on a power transmission line which comprises:
(a) an elongated body member having a clevis at one end
thereof for pivotally connecting said body member to a
supporting structure,
648
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19. 1983
(b) a thimble carried by the other end of said body member
and having a convexly curved retainer groove facing said
clevis with said retainer groove deflning a bearing surface,
(c) a cable-like conductor member passing around said re-
tainer groove and secured in its position in said retainer
groove,
(d) at least one laterally projecting member carried by said
other end of said elongated body member at a distal point
from said clevis and extending perpendicular to said re-
tainer groove with there being an opening in said laterally
projecting member in laterally spaced relation to said
retainer groove and said cable-like conductor member
passing around said retainer groove, and
(e) a hook-like connector element carried by said tensioning
device and extending through said opening in said later-
ally projecting member with said hook-like connector
element extending in the same direction as said cable-like
conductor for tensioning said cable-like conductor to
permit sagging in of a conductor on a power transmission
line.
4,380,405
HEAD FLANGE MOUNTING DEVICE FOR
TURBO-MACHINE
Tadashi Kaneki, Tsuchiura, and Kazuo Takeda, Shimoinayoshi,
both of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,457
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 7, 1980, 55-150; Jan.
21, 1980, 55-4595; Jan. 21, 1980, 55-4596
InL a.3 B25G 3/00; F16D 7/00. F16G 3/18
U.S. a. 403—318
13 Oaims
1. A head flange mounting device for a turbo-machine com-
prising a casing, a head flange, a shear key for mounting the
head flange on the inner circumferential surface of an end
portion of the casing, a rotary shaft supported by a bearing on
said head flange, and a labyrinth seal supported by said casing
to seal a gap between said rotary shaft and said casing, such
head flange mounting device comprising:
at least two pairs of slide keyways formed circumferentially
spaced apari from one another, one slide keyway of each
pair being formed on the inner surface of said casing at a
right angle thereto inwardly of said shear key and the
other slide keyway being formed on the outer circumfer-
ential surface of said head flange at a right angle thereto so
that the two slide keyways are juxtaposed against each
other; and
a slide key held in each pair of slide keyways in a manner
preventing the relative movement of the head flange
radially with respect to the casing.
4,380,406
JACKUP PLATFORM TRAILER
Ray R. Ayers, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil Company,
Houston, Tex.
FUed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,855
Int. a.3 B63B 35/02
U.S. a. 405—206 25 Qaims
X ^^f '5 .^ •■ 1/ -^ — 3rii "
1. A jackup platform trailer comprising a deck structure
supported by submersible flotation means, means for extending
the flotation means downwardly beneath the deck structure,
means for pivoting the flotation means and deck structure, and
connecting means extending between the deck structure and
the pivoting means.
4,380,407
DUAL THRUST ANCHOR SHELL ASSEMBLY
Darid C. Donan, Jr., Manitou, Ky., assignor to Waiamea Com-
pany, Inc., Manitou, Ky.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,523
Int a.' E21D 11/00
U,S. a. 405—259 9 Oaims
1. An anchor shell assembly for anchoring a bolt in a roof
bolt hole, said bolt having a longitudinal axis, a lower head for
forcing a roof plate against a portion of a mine roof surround-
ing the mouth of said roof bolt hole, and a shaft with an upper
threaded portion said anchor shell assembly comprising in
combination:
(a) a first upper expansion member disposed pivotally rela-
tive to said axis, said first upper expansion member includ-
ing an upper portion having first and second upper cam-
ming surfaces that are sloped relative to said axis, and an
elongated lower portion, said elongated lower portion
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
649
having a lower camming surface that is sloped relative to
said axis;
(b) a second upper expansion member disposed pivotally
relative to said axis and adjacent to said first upper expan-
sion member, said second upper expansion member having
an elongated lower portion disposed on an opposite side of
said shaft from said lower elongated portion of said first
upper expansion member, said lower elongated portion of
said second upper expansion member having a lower
camming surface that is sloped relative to said axis;
(c) a first lower expansion member disposed pivotally rela-
tive to said axis, said first lower expansion member having
a lower portion having first and second lower camming
surfaces that are sloped relative to said axis, and an elon-
gated upper portion having an upper camming surface
that is sloped relative to said axis;
(d) a second lower expansion member disposed, pivotally
relative to said axis and adjacent to said first lower expan-
sion member, said second lower expansion member having
an elongated upper portion disposed on the opposite side
of said shaft from said elongated upper portion of said first
lower expansion member, said upper portion of said sec-
ond lower expansion member having an upper camming
surface that is sloped relative to said axis;
(e) threaded nut means disposed on said threaded portion of
said shaft for forcing said first and second upper expansion
members toward said first and second lower expansion
members in response to tightening of said bolt; and
(f) retaining means for retaining said first and second lower
expansion members in fixed longitudinal relationship to
said bolt during tightening of said bolt,
said lower camming surfaces of said first and second upper
expansion members engaging said first and second lower
camming surfaces of said first and second lower expansion
members during said tightening of said bolt, forcing said
lower portions of said first and second upper expansion
members outward into roof strata surrounding the portion
of said bolt adjacent to said anchor shell assembly to
prevent further downward movement of said first and
second upper expansion members in said roof bolt hole, an
initial distance between said lower camming surfaces of
said first upper expansion member and one of said first and
second lower expansion members being substantially less
than a corresponding initial distance between said upper
camming surfaces of said first upper expansion member
and one of said first and second lower expansion members,
whereby further tightening of said bolt forces said roof
plate tightly upward against the portion of the mine roof
surrounding the mouth of said roof bolt hole before said
upper camming surface of one of said first and second
upper expansion members engages said upper camming
surface of one of said first and second lower expansion
members, respectively.
4,380,408
STABILIZING CLAY SOIL WITH DRY
HYDROXY-ALUMINUM
Tor Loken, and Odd R. Bryhn, both of Oilo, Norway, MdgBora
to CbevroB Research Company, San Fraadtco, QJif.
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Scr. No. 281,751
lot a.3 C09K n/00: E02D 3/12
MS. a. 405—263 9 Claim
1. A method of stabilizing clay soil comprising admixing the
clay soil with an effective amount of dry hydroxy-aluminum.
4,380,409
CRIB BLOCK FOR ERECTING BIN WALLS
Raymond J. O'Neill, 3 Garmony PI., Yonken, N.Y. 10710
FUed Ang. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,165
lot QV E02D 5/00
U.S. a. 405—273 4 Claima
1. A cribbing unit for use in erecting bin wall structures of
the type wherein horizontal courses of aligned ones of such
units are laid on top of another to establish the structure and
enclose bins therein,
said unit comprising as a unitary precast component of sub-
stantially uniform vertical thickness,
a pair of spaced side walls of equal longitudinal expanse and
each having an outer vertical wall surface and transvqie ^^
parallel arranged edge surfaces with the edge surfaces bif
one wall being in planar alignment with those of the other ^
wall, and
a centra] connector arm extending between said side walls,
the juncture of said connector arm with each side wall
being characterized by merger segment side edges extend-
ing from the connector arm to the side walls which follow
laterally widening, at least in part curvilinear courses to
joinder thereof with the inner ends of the transverse edge
surfaces of the respective side walls, the said merger seg-
ment side edges traversing courses of identical geometry
whereby each side wall and associated merger segment is
identically shaped but disposed in facing relation to the
other thereby to provide such unit with identical charac-
teristics of resistance to loading at both sides of said wall,
with the transverse thickness of the side walls and merger
segments from the longitudinal extremities thereof in-
creasing toward the transverse centerline of the unit to
correspondingly increase the resistance thereof to trans*
verse bending loads applied thereto.
650
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,410
MINE-ROOF SUPPORT
Hans Biill; Gerhard Ewich, both of Wuppertal; Giinther
Koschke, Castrop-Rauei; Alfred Maykemper, and Josef
Welzel, both of Wuppertal, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Hermann Hemacheidt Maschinenfsbrik GmbH A
Co., Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,432
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 15,
1980, 3010082; Jul. 26, 1980, 3028394
Int dJ E21D 23/04
U.S. a. 405—299 7 Claims
1. A self-advancing mine-roof support assembly for use in
longwall mining comprising: three roof-support elements ar-
ranged side-by-side but spaced apart a predetermined lateral
distance from each other measured at right angles to the direc-
tion of advance, a floor runner on each of ^d elements to
permit movement of each element over the floor of a mine,
double-acting drive means supported on each runner to move
said respective runners, a rigid beam connected to the drive
means of the middle one of said roof-support elements and
arranged to be generally in alignment with the direction of
advance of the assembly, pivot means connecting an end por-
tion of said beam directly to an intermediate portion of an
elongate abutment adapted to lie adjacent to and generally
parallel to the mine work face, a first side boom connected to
the drive means of an outer one of said roof-support elements,
a first pair of arms pivotally connecting said side boom to an
outer portion of said abutment, a second side boom connected
to the drive means of the other outer one of said roof-support
elements, a second pair of arms pivotally connecting said sec-
ond side boom to an opposite outer portion of said abutment,
said two pairs of arms being substantially equidistant from said
pivot means for said beam and said abutment, whereby slanting
of said abutment with respect to the direction of advance of the
assembly, which slanting causes said roof-support elements to
become staggered relative to each other, causes no change in
the "between centres" distance between the roof-support ele-
ments.
4380411
SHAVINGCUTTER
Masato Ainoura, 1253 Eguchi, Kita-Shigeyasu-cho, Miyaki-gun,
Saga-ken, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 39,237, May 15, 1979, Pat No. 4,280,773.
This appUcation Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,250
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 31, 1978, 53-65360;
Mar. 20, 1979, 54-32469
Int. a.^ B26D 1/J2
VJS. a. 407—27 4 Claims
1. A shaver cutter for finishing gear teeth comprising, a
rotational shaft, a helical thread integrally formed at a constant
pitch on an outer periphery of said shaft to radially outwardly
extend to a predetermined constant height, a plurality of cut-
ting grooves formed on two flanks of said helical thread, the
cutting grooves on each of the flanks being symmetrical rela-
tive to the cutting grooves on the other flank, each groove
having a predetermined constant depth extending from and
perpendicular to an outer surface of said flank to thereby
define a central portion of reduced thickness between the two
grooves provided on both flanks of the thread, said cutting
grooves extending from an inner end adjacent to the shaft
toward an outer end radially outwardly away from the shaft so
that the cutting grooves are respectively inclined at angles
between 15° and 90° relative to lines extending radially out-
wardly from the shaft in the direction opposite to the rotational
direction of the shaft, a plurality of lands having flat outer
surfaces, said lands being located on the flanks of said thread
between each adjacent two cutting grooves and having ap-
proximately the same width as that of the grooves at the inner
end adjacent to the shaft, and straight cutting edges formed at
front margins of said lands so that when the shaft is rotated for
cutting, fluctuation due to changes in cutting resistance is
eliminated.
4,380,412
LAP SHAPING MACHINE WITH OSOLLATABLE
POINT CUTTER AND SELECTIVELY ROTATABLE OR
OSOLLATABLE LAP
Thomas A. Walsh, Santa Ana, Calif., assignor to R. Howard
Strasbaugh, Inc., Huntington Beach, Calif.
FUed Aug. 2, 1979, Ser. No. 63,036
Int a.5 B23D 7/10
U.S. a. 409—314 9 Qaims
1. A lap surfacing machine useful for forming laps such as
employed in the production of ophthalmic lenses, comprising a
support base having a pair of individually adjustable position-
ing units adapted, in operation, to dispose a rotatable lap and a
unidirectionally operable cutter in intermittent functional en-
gagement, the first of said positioning units comprising a gener-
ally upstanding spindle, means for selectively attaching a lap o-
cutter to said spindle in position of selected radial displacemen
for rotation in unison therewith,
the second of said positioning units comprising an elongated
arm, arcuately swingable on a pivot axis disposed gener-
ally transverse to said spindle, and distally having attach-
ment means for selectively carrying either a cutter or a
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
6S1
lap, drive means for pivotal oscillation of said ann on its
pivot axis whereby said distally carried cutter or lap may
functionally engage the moving lap or cutter of the first
positioning unit, and
drive means for said first positioning unit including shift
means for selectively continuously rotating said spindle
and for oscillating the spindle synchronously with oscilla-
tion of said arm.
4,380,413
LOAD-DISTRIBUTIVE WASHER FOR USE WITH
COMPRESSIBLE MATERIAL
George G. Dewey, Prospect Heights, ni^ assignor to lUinois
Tool Works Inc., Chicago, 111.
FUed Not. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 202,960
Int a.3 F16B 21/07
U.S. a. 411—161 7 Claims
.24 M 32^r^4
body to a retaining position extending transversely to the
central axis of said body, said second retainer finger being
resiliently deflectable away from said first retainer finger from
an initial position extending axially outwardly from said body
to a retaining position extending transversely to the central axis
of said body, each of said retainer fmgers having a base portion
connected with the body and a free end portion spaced from
the body, said free end portions of said first and second retainer
fingers being spaced apart by a first distance when said first
and second retainer fmgers are in their initial positions and
being spaced apart by a second distance which is greater than
said first distance when said first and second retainer fingers
are in their retaining positions, said free end portions of said
first and second retainer fmgers including means for penetrat-
ing the member at a pair of spaced apart locations, said first
retainer finger including first cam surface means for cooperat-
ing with the member to deflect said first retainer fmger from its
3fa
f>&>
1. A resilient load-distributive washer useful in conjunction
with a headed mechanical fastener to secure a first compress-
ible material to a second base member, said washer comprising
an axially extending projection which has a length that extends
into but is less than the thickness of the compressible material
to be fastened; a load-distributing flange extending laterally
outwardly from one end of the projection, the other end of the
projection being free; a throughbore positioned along the
central axis of the washer and extending through the projec-
tion and the flange, at least a portion of said throughbore
having a first internal lateral dimension exceeding the maxi-
mum lateral dimension of the head and a length that is at least
equal to the height of the fastener head; a portion of the
throughbore nearest the free end of the projection having a
second smaller internal lateral dimension forming a bearing
surface for the fastener head; an integral flexible and resilient
ring positioned above said portion of the throughbore said ring
having an inner lateral dimension less than the maximum lat-
eral dimension of said fastener head and sufficient flexibility
and resilience to permit passage of the fastener head while
delimiting the relative axial movement between the washer and
the fastener.
4,380,414
FASTENER
Terry D. Capuano, Hinckley, Ohio, assignor to The Lamson A
Sessions Co., Qefeland, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 26,889, Apr. 4, 1979, Pat No. 4,289,181.
This application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,284
Int a? F16B 39/282
U5. a. 411—187 3 Claims
1. A fastener element for use in applying a force against a
member, said fastener element comprising a body having a
longitu(Unally extending central axis, thread means connected
with said body for engaging a mating thread to urge said body
toward the member to thereby increase the force applied
against the member, and retainer means connected wiUi said
body for retarding aidal movement of said body away from the
member and for retarding rotational movement of the body
relative to the member, said retainer means including first and
second spring retainer fingers, said first retainer finger being
resiliently deflectable away from said second retainer fmger
from an initial position extending axially outwardly from said
initial position to its retaining position under the influence of
forces applied against said first retainer finger by the member
as said first retainer finger penetrates the member, said first
cam surface means including an arcuate surface which extends
from the base to the free end portion of said first retainer fmger
and curves away from said second retainer fmger, said second
retainer finger including second cam surface means for cooper-
ating with the member to deflect said second retainer finger
from its initial position to its retaining position under the influ-
ence of forces applied against said second retainer finger by the
member as said second retainer fmger penetrates the member,
said second cam surface means including an arcuate surface
which extends from the base to the free end portion of said
second retainer fmger and curves away from said first retainer
finger each of said fu^t and second retainer fmgers being sub-
stantially divided by a single imaginary circle which is concen-
tric with the central axis of said body.
4,380,415
LATCH MECHANISM FOR WALK RAMPS
Roy C. Higginson, Honeybrook, and Paul L. Whitemaii, Mor-
gantown, botii of Pa., assigiiors to Morgan Trailer MFG. Co.,
Morgantown, Pa.
FUed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,502
lat a.J B60P 7/00
U.S. a. 414—537 4 Oaiins
1. Latch mechanism for a walk ramp having side rails for
truck bodies and the like having longitudinal body side rails
652
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
and a floor thereabove for storage below the floor of the truck
body and for movement outwardly of the walk ramp with
respect to the body, which comprises
a plurality of handle members pivotally carried by the side
rails of the walk ramp on vertical pivots,
said truck body side rails have spaced brackets with latch
plate openings therein,
each of said handle members having a latch tongue, and
resilient means for urging said handle members to position
said latch tongues in said latch plate openings.
axis to provide each vane with the same average angular
velocity as the platform including a second platform rotat-
able in the unison with the said platform and supporting
means coupling the second platform to respective vanes,
4,380,416
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Jean Menager, Lnxemboorg, Luxembourg, assignor to Societe
Internationale de Mecanique IndustrieUe SA.., Luxembourg,
Luxembourg
Continuation of Ser. No. 72,617, Sep. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,307
Claims priority, application France, Sep. 25, 1978, 78 27389
Int. a.3 FOID 11/08: P03B 11/00
U.S. a. 415-170 A 9 Qaims
«T V^'
the angular velocity of each vane about its axis exceeding
the angular velocity of the platform during half of each
platform revolution and being less than the platform angu-
lar velocity during the other half of each platform revolu-
tion.
1. A centrifugal pump, of the type comprising a body, a shaft
rotatably mounted in the body via a bearing, an impeller fixed
on the shaft and, between the impeller and the bearing, a me-
chanical seal assembly comprising a pair of engaging slide
rings and an inner sleeve made of elastomeric material fitted on
the shaft, said sleeve comprising a portion at the end adjacent
the impeller on which is fixed one of the slide rings and, at the
other end adjacent the bearing, a radial flare for holding the
seal assembly in the assembled state prior to its mounting and
after mounting functioning as a flinger to radially throw off
any liquid on its surface during operation of the pump, an axial
extension on said sleeve between said radial flare and said
bearing, a seal member at the bearing end of said axial exten-
sion comprising a lip member integral with said sleeve and
having an axially facing portion which in use sealingly engages
a part of said bearing to prevent bearing lubricant from leaking
into said seal assembly, and a radially extending opening
through said pump body substantially aligned with said radial
flare.
4380418
VACUUM PRESSURE SELECTION AND GENERATION
DEVICE
Daniel A. Crawford, Fenton, and Wayne A. Leir^oki, Clio, both
of Mich., assignors to General Motors Corporation, Detroit,
Mich.
FUed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,141
Int. a.3 F04F 5/54
U.S. a. 417-87 3 Claims
*>1 /M
4380 417
INSTALLATION OPERATED WITH WIND OR WATER
POWER
Werner Fork, Heidenheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to J.
M. Voith GmbH, Heidenheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 165,274
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 11.
1979, 2927956
Int a.J PD3D 7/06
VS. a. 416-108 9 Claims
1. A device for harnessing the energy of a fluid stream com-
prising:
a platform rotatably supported on a central axis;
a plurality of vanes supported on the platform for rotation
about respective vane axes generally parallel to and dis-
placed from the central axis;
means for synchronizing vane rotation about the respective
vane axes relative to platform rotation about the central
1. A venturi aspirator assembly for selectively generating a
vacuum air pressure by use of positive air pressure to provide
a sufficient vacuum air pressure output when insufficient vac-
uum air pressure to provide a sufficient vacuum air pressure
output is generated by another source such as an engine intake
manifold, said assembly comprising:
a venturi aspirator;
aspirator control valve means sensitive to vacuum air pres-
sure generated by the other source and acting to condition
said venturi aspirator to generate vacuum air pressure by
positive air pressure flow therethrough only when the
sensed vacuum air pressure generated by the other source
is insufficient;
and check valve means sensitive to the sufficient vacuum air
pressure output and the vacuum air pressure from the
other source and the vacuum and positive air pressures
from said aspirator and acting in response thereto to select
the higher generated vacuum air pressure from which the
sufficient vacuum air pressure output is then provided.
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
6S3
4,380,419
ENERGY COLLECTION AND STORAGE SYSTEM
Paul H. Morton, 180 Berkeley St, SateUite Beach, Fla. 32937
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,503
Int. a.5 F04B 35/00
\JJS. a. 417—334 10 aaims
control means including a rotary disk coupled for joint rotation
to said shaft and forming a lateral boundary wall for said cham-
bers, said rotary disk having a plurality of first control open-
ings each of said openings continuously communicating with
interstices between the teeth of said outer gear in any position
of the outer gear relative to the inner gear, and a sutionary
control plate adjoining said rotary disk and being formed with
a plurality of second control openings cooperating with said
first control openings, a part of said second control openings
communicating with said intake port and another part of said
second control openings communicating with said discharge
port.
Institut
-^ 4,380,421
DIE FOR COMPACTION OF POWDER
David G. Morris, Lauaanne, Switaeriand, aasignor to
Cerac S.A., Ecublens, Switzerland
FUed Not. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,599
aaims priority, application Sweden, Not. 10, 1980, 8007874
Int. a.3 B29C 7/00; B30B 11/02; B22F 3/00
U.S. a. 425—78 3 Claims
1. An energy collection and storage system, comprising:
a compressed air source;
an energy storage means for storing energy as an hydraulic
pressure head; ^
a pneumatic water pump;
a compressed air manifold means for coupling compressed
air from said compressed air source to said pneumatic
water pump;
water manifold means for delivering water from said pneu-
matic water pump to said energy storage means; and
an hydraulic air compressor means controlled by liquid from
said energy storage means fol- providing a supply of com-
pressed air to said compressed air manifold.
4,380,420
INTERNAL GEAR MACHINE WITH ROTARY VALVE
DISK
Peter Wiisthof, Lohr, and Johann Schneider, Lohr-Wombach,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Rexroth GmbH,
Lohr, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 84,114, Oct. 12, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,395
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 14,
1978 2844844
int. a.3 FOIC 1/113. 21/12; F03C 2/22; F04C 2/113
U.S. a. 418—61 B 11 Claims
" jy 21 22
5 33 10 jj^^j^.y if.i ;<i
1. An internal gear machine, comprising a housing defining
an intake port and a discharge port; a fluid displacement unit
arranged in said housing and including a rotary shaft defining
a center axis; an outer gear coupled for joint rotation to said
shaft; an inner gear in sliding engagement with said outer gear
and supported for performing a wobbling movement in said
housing about said center axis, said inner and outer gears defm-
ing a plurality of variable chambers therebetween; and flow
1. A die for compaction of powder by passing a shock wave,
created by the impact of a punch, through the powder, charac-
terized thereby that the density of the die before compaction of
the powder is substantially equal to the density of the powder
to be compacted and that the increase in the density caused by
the passing shock wave in the powder and in the die are sub-
stantial equal.
4,380,422
LONGrrUDINALLY EXPANSIBLE AND
CONTRACTIBLE HYDROSTATIC MOLD GATE
John W. Von Holdt, 7430 N. Cronane Rd., Niles, III. 60648
FUed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,973
Int. a.5 B29F 1/05
U.S. a. 425—146 15 Claims
1. A gate for a mold which comprises a molding compound
inlet conduit defining an outer end for communication with a
source of molding compound and an inner end for communica-
tion with the mold cavity, and a plunger member mounted in
said molding compound inlet conduit and adapted to prevent
flow through said conduit in a first longitudinal position and to
permit flow through said conduit in second longitudinal posi-
tions, said plunger deflning a transversely enlarged sealing end
proportioned to prevent said flow through the conduit in the
first position, said transversely enlarged sealing end defining a
mold cavity-facing surface which is of larger cross sectional
area than the surface of the plunger opposed to said mold
cavity and subject to contact with pressurized molding com-
pound in the conduit, said plunger member comprising a sealed
metal tubular wall, at least a portion of said tubular wall defin-
ing annular convolution means to provide a longitudinally
expansible and contractible characteristic to said plunger mem-
654
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
ber, said tubular wall being immovably secured adjacent one
end thereof, whereby pressurized molding compound in the
conduit, relative to pressure in the mold cavity, causes said
enlarged sealing end to longitudinally expand to spontaneously
advance into a second longitudinal position by the action of
4,380,424
PELLET DIE
Leroy V. Skoch, Glencoe, and Keith E. Pike, Washington, both
of Mo., assignors to Ralston Purina Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,036
Int. a.3 AOIN 35/00
U.S. CI. 425—331 33 Qaims
1. A pellet mill die comprising a compression side, a dis-
charge side and at least one die hold extending through said
die, having a countersink on the compression side, said die hole
pressure on said opposed surface to open said gate, and relative J^"'"^ ^ ^^"'''''"^ section for pellet formation, said section
equalization of elevated pressures in the mold cavity and the tZ^ fv, T'f ,? 1^^'"" P*''«» '^^ ^^ a length that
conduit causes said enlarged sealing end to longLdinally ? ' ! r J '*"'*'"!'' ^°' '^' ^'^ *'°'"' ^''^ ^^ ^°^^
contract to spontaneously close to its first longhud nal ^i' wSi: IV t'"^':^ th.ckness to countersink diameter
tion. ^""^" '^ ^* '^^^ ^'^"* 1.8 to 1 and a countersink diameter
which is between about 1 37% to 1 59% of the working section
diameter.
4,380,423
DEVICE FOR CUTTING SPRUE OF PARISON WITH
BOTTOM
Katashi Aoki, 6037 Ohazaminamljo, Sakakimachi, Hanishina-
gun, Nagano-ken, Japan
FUed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,558
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 19, 1979, 54-134936
Int. a.3 B29C 17/12; B26D 1/09, 7/10
U.S. a. 425-289 5 claims
4,380,425
CAULKING SPOUT
David J. Edelman, 142 Flanders-Netcong Rd., Flanders, N.J.
07836
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 46,561, Jun. 7, 1979,
abandoned. This application Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,597
Int. a.3 B29F 3/04
U.S. a 425-458 Zaaima
w— ■
Mw=ii^flcXfr
1..3 I-.4 1*5 L-.6
1. An applicator for sealing compounds comprising a tubular
spout having an inlet opening and an outlet orifice, an applica-
tor tip formed integrally with said applicator extending from
inside said spout inwardly of said outlet orifice to a point
outwardly of said outlet orifice and being angled inwardly of
said spout, the outer end of said tip converging inwardly and
having a substantially oval cross-section in the vicinity of said
outlet orifice to form a finger-like projection and forming a
crescent-shaped opening at said outlet orifice.
1. Apparatus comprising means defining a heating furnace
having a closed cylindrical side wall and a bottom wall, said
heating furnace having an open top dimensioned to receive an
injection molded parison having a sprue at its lower end and
said bottom wall containing a centrally positioned opening for
receiving said sprue when the parison is positioned within the
furnace, a pair of shears positiond adjacent the bottom opening
movable transversely of the bottom opening in parallel relation
thereto, said shears comprising face-to-face flat plates contain-
ing orifices which, when aligned, are concentric with the
bottom opening and wherein the orifices are of a diameter to
receive said sprue and define opposite cutting edges movable
in shearing relation to each other by reciprocation and power
operable means for effecting reciprocation of the blades.
4,380,426
INJECnON MOLDING VALVE PIN DIRECT
PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
WiUiam J. WUes, R.R. 1, Cedar Valley, East Gwillinbury, On-
tario, Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 353,014, Mar. 1, 1982. This
appUcatJon Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,730
Claims priority, application Canada, Feb. 24, 1982, 396997
Int a.3 B29F 1/05
VJS. a. 425-566 9 claims
1. In a valve gated center entry injection molding system
comprising a heater cast seated in a cooled cavity plate, a gate
through the cavity plate leading to a cavity, an elongated valve
pin which reciprocates in a bore in the heater cast between
open and closed positions, the valve pin having a driven end
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
655
and a tip end which seats in the gate in the closed position,
valve pin actuating mechanism, and a melt passage which
receives pressurized melt from a molding machine at a center
entry and extends through the heater cast to the gate, the
improvement wherein;
the valve pin actuating mechanism comprises a pneumati-
cally operated piston which reciprocates in a cylinder
generally in alignment with the valve pin and engages the
driven end of the valve pin, the melt passage from the
center entry to the gate disc exterding through the piston
cylinder.
7. In a valve gated center entry injection molding system
comprising a heater cast seated between a back plate and a
cooled cavity plate, a gate through the cavity plate leading to
a cavity, a melt passage which receives pressurized melt from
•1 ji j; 7?
\^/ X'^
.:i^
^■^^
^xxx;
H - "'
■•^s
'->-i.
/ /
l^ \ Vt ' ^ / / ' / -•■ y' / / / /
^x^^
WVO
.V
C-'Ui-i
..^i..ir^
a molding machine and extends from a center entry in the back
plate through an offset portion of the back plate and the heater
cast to the gate, an elongated valve pin which reciprocates in
a bore in the heater cast with a central longitudinal axis in
alignment with the gate and the center entry, the valve pin
having a driven end and a tip end which seats in the gate in the
closed position and valve pin actuating mechanism, the im-
provement wherein;
the valve pin actuating mechanism comprises a pneumati-
cally operated double acting piston which reciprocates in
a cylinder, the piston having an outer collar portion and a
tongue portion, the outer collar portion encircling the
back plate and sealingly received between the back plate
and the cylinder, the tongue portion extending inwardly
from the collar portion to operatively engage the driven
end of the valve pin.
4,380,427
COMPACT HYDRAULIC DRIVE FOR DIE CLOSING
UNIT OF INJECnON MOLDING MACHINE
Karl Hehl, Arthur-Hehl-Strasse 32, 7298 Lossburg 1, Fed. Rep.
of GermRny
FUed Not. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,625
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 24,
1980, 3044137
Int. a.3 B29F 1/06
U.S. a. 425—590
12 Claims
S] 3a 7i (1
a die closing unit of an injection molding machine as a rapid-
travel opening and closing drive as well as a source of elevated
die closing pressure, which die closing unit includes a station-
ary cylinder head plate and a movable die carrier member
guided for die opening and closing travel along the center axis
of the die closing unit, its die closing travel being a movement
away from the stationary cylinder head plate in an axially
forward direction, said hydraulic actuator assembly compris-
ing in combination:
a power cylinder extendmg rearwardly from the cylinder
head plate, m alignment with the center axis of the die
closing unit, the power cylinder having a cylinder bore
cooperating with a power piston on a piston rod which
extends sealingly through the cylinder head plate and is
connected to the movable die carrier member;
a cover on the rearward extremity of the power cylinder
defming a high-pressure space between it and the power
piston;
a closable power piston bypass in the form of at least one
bypass channel connecting the high-pressure sfwce of the
power cylinder with a low-pressure space of the power
cylinder defmed between the power piston and the cylin-
der head plate, the effective area of the high-pressure
space being larger than the effective area of the low-pres-
sure space so that, when the power piston moves rear-
wardly with its piston bypass open, a volume of excess
fluid corresponding to the difference between the two
pressure space areas is displaced out of the power cylin-
der;
a travel cylinder arranged parallel to the power cylinder and
extending likewise rearwardly from the cylinder head
plate, the travel cylinder having a cylinder bore cooperat-
ing with a travel piston on a piston rod which extends
seahngly through the cylinder head plate and is likewise
connected to the movable die carrier member, for move-
ments in unison with the power piston;
a travel cylinder pressure space defined between the travel
piston and the cylinder head plate, the effective area of the
travel cylinder pressure space being larger than said dif-
ference between the two pressure space areas of the
power cylinder by a predetermined, relatively small net
opening travel area:
a flow connection between the low-pressure space of the
power cylinder and the travel cylinder pressure space so
arranged that, when the pistons move rearwardly as afore-
said, said excess fluid is displaced from the low-pressure
space of the power cylinder into the pressure space of the
travel cylinder, and the additional entry into one of said
connected pressure spaces of a pressurized fluid volume
corresponding to the net opening travel area creates the
rearward movements of the pistons, whereby an opening
travel of the movable die carrier member is produced with
a relatively small volume of pressurized fluid;
means for hydraulically closing the power piston bypass;
and
means for supply pressurized fluid to the high-pressure space
of the power piston, so as to create an elevated die closing
pressure against the movable die carrier member in the
closed position of the die closing unit, when the power
piston bypass is closed.
IB 2« 51 " "
1. A compact hydraulic actuator assembly adapted for use in
4,380,428
SAFETY TIP-OVER DEVICE FOR PORTABLE
GAS-nRED INFRARED RADIANT HEATER
Mario Rozzi, St Clair Shores, Mich., aadgoor to Detroit Radi-
ant Products Company, Detroit, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 846,025, Oct 27, 1977, abandoned.
This appUcation Aug. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 412,011
Int a.J F23N 5 '24
U.S. a. 431—88 2 OaiiM
1. A safety tip-over device for a portable gas-fired radiant
heater including a container for burnable gas under pressure
having a burner mounted thereon, said device comprising an
656
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
orifice structure mounted on the container for emitting bum-
able gas into the burner, said orifice structure including a
passageway having a first portion of relatively large diameter
and terminating in a restricted portion having an orifice
through which said burnable gas is emitted, a foraminous wall
in said passageway upstream from said restricted portion, a
freely movable valve element in said passageway downstream
from said foraminous wall, said valve element being of lesser
size than the diameter of said first portion of the passageway to
permit free passage of burnable gas when the passageway is
angled substantially upwardly, said foraminous wall permitting
free passage of burnable gas but preventing said valve element
from passing thereby, said valve element being of greater size
than said orifice and reactive to the pressure of burnable gas
fiowing through the orifice structure to move into blocking
position with respect to said orifice when the passageway is
angled horizontally or slightly upwardly.
4,380,429
REaRCULATING BURNER
Paul G. LaHaye, and John W. Bjerklie, both of Cape Elizabeth,
Me., assignors to Hague International, Portland, Me.
FUed Nov. 2, 1979, Ser. No. 90,731
Int. a.3 F23L 7/00
U.S. a. 431-115 19 Qains
1. A burner capable of operating with combustion air deliv-
ered to the burner at temperatures of from 600° F. to 2400° F.
and higher, said burner comprising,
a center tube defining a forwardly extending ceramic high
temperature resistant tube portion having a flame holder
at a forward end of said burner,
an encircling ceramic high temperature resistant burner
barrel extending about said ceramic tube,
an encircling recirculating ceramic high temperature resis-
tant sleeve extending about said ceramic tube between
said tube and said barrel and defining a recirculating gas
passageway such that furnace gases can be carried from a
forward end of said burner between said sleeve to a rear-
ward area of said burner and then forwardly between said
tube and sleeve completely surrounding said tube and then
out of said forward end,
said rearward area encircling said center tube,
and combustion air means for providing a combustion air
flow axially of said center tube between said center tube
and said sleeve,
said combustion air means comprising a ceramic high tem-
perature resistant lined chamber and a ceramic high tem-
perature resistant annular chamber plug,
means forming an annular outlet from said chamber to said
rearward area,
means for mounting said plug for movement in a direction
axially of said center tube to adjust the size of said outlet
and thus adjust the passage of combustion air to the rear-
ward area between the center tube and the sleeve,
and fuel injector means positioned within said center tube
and positioned to inject fuel at the forward end thereof.
4380 430
CENTRAL HEATING APPARATUS
Constant Vuissoz, deceased, late of Grone, Switzerland (by
Marie Vuissoz-de Preux, heir); by Cesarine Mosoni- Vuissoz,
heir. Granges, and by Suzanne Voide- Vuissoz, heir, Rechy,
both of Switzerland, assignors to Limtel, Ltd., Great Britain
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,526
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 11. 1980.
1877/80
Int. a.3 F23D 13/12
U.S. a. 431-347 7aaims
1. In a central heating apparatus comprising a boiler having
walls defining a combustion chamber, a burner nozzle project-
ing a flame into the combustion chamber toward an opposite
wall thereof, and a flame-permeable structure interposed be-
tween the nozzle and said opposite wall, the improvement that
said flame-permeable structure comprises at least one flame-
resistant sheet metal plate disposed in a plane approximately
perpendicular to the direction of projection of said flame and
having therein a multiplicity of small perforations formed by a
piercing tool without removal of material to provide around
the edge of each perforation protruding burs directed toward
said nozzle, said burs being heated white-hot by the flame in
order to improve fuel combustion and thereby reduce the
release of smoke and soot deposits in the combustion chamber.
4,380 431
TECHNIQUE FOR ELEVATING THE TEMPERATURE
OF A FLUID
Roy C. Carlson, Jr., Boxford Township, Essex County, Mass.,
and Edward J. March, Lower Makefield Township, Bucks
County, Pa., assignors to Western Electric Company, Inc.,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,152
Int a.3 F26B 3/00: F22D 1/28
U.S. a. 432—29 2 Claims
1. A method of elevating the temperature of a low tempera-
ture liquid, comprising the steps of:
directing the low temperature liquid through coUs mounted
in the upper portion of an enclosed chamber;
passing the liquid from the coils to a reservoir in the lower
part of the chamber;
heating the liquid, in the reservoir, to the elevated tempera-
ture, proximate its boiling point, which forms a vapor
thereof in the upper portion of the chamber; and
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
657
"K,
condensing the vapor on the coils to transfer the latent heat
of vaporization thereof to the coils to preheat the liquid
'28
73
pensing and mounting said threaded pins, said dispenser com-
prising an elongated substantially tubular handle having a
hollow interior portion for receiving the continuous strip of
threaded pins and at one handle end a nozzle having an exiting
orifice leading to the interior, said exiting orifice being sized
and adapted to provide a snug fit with the continuous strip of
pins and yet allow passage of the strip from the handle interior
to the outside, said nozzle being adapted to ?llow a dentist
holding the dispenser handle to manipulate a pin at the strip
while simultaneously lowering the pressure within the
chamber; and
discharging the heated liquid from the chamber.
4,380,432
METHOD FOR ADHERING STRUCTURES TO TEETH
Jan A. Orlowski, Altadena, and David V. Butler, West Coyina,
both of Calif., assignors to Scientific Pharmaceuticals,
Duarte, Calif, and Sankin Industries, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 183,743
Int. a.^ A61K 6m
U.S. a. 433—9 19 Qaims
1. A method for adhesively mounting in the mouth a dental
article which is a pontic or a fixed bridge of one or more pontic
teeth by securing bonding surfaces on the article to be mounted
in the mouth to support surfaces respectively of abutment teeth
that are adjacent the mounting location of the article but at
opposite sides of it respectively, comprising the steps of:
(i) etching said support surfaces of said abutment teeth with
a suitable chemical etchant;
(ii) applying a curable dental adhesive to said bonding sur-
faces on said article and to said etched support surfaces of
said abutment teeth; and
(iii) contacting said bonding surfaces with said support sur-
faces, each surface containing said applied dental adhesive
of step (ii), whereby said adhesive hardens to bond the
dental article in place,
wherein said dental adhesive is a methacrylate based dental
adhesive comprising from about 2.5% to about 30% by weight
of an elastomer or a mixture of two or more of said elastomers,
said elastomer or elastomers being selected from the group
consisting of homopolymers and copolymers of at least one
conjugated diene monomer containing 4 to 10 carbon atoms.
end and which pin end protrudes from the nozzle for inserting
the pin end into a predrilled hole in tooth dentin and for break-
ing off the pin from the strip at a notch after cementing the pin
in the tooth hole, said elongated length of continuous strip of
threaded pins extending lengthwise within the handle interior
and aligned with the nozzle orifice, and means on the handle
and connected to said strip for gripping and sliding said strip
from the interior through the nozzle orifice to the outside
under control of the dentist.
4,380,434
DETENT DEVICE FOR A REMOVABLE DENTAL
PROSTHESIS
Bernard Weissman, 225 E. 48th St, New York, N.Y. 10017
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,867
Int. a.5 A61C n/22
U.S. a. 433—177 13 Ciainn
66 76
^82
4,380,433
DENTAL WIRE DISPENSER AND MOUNTING TOOL
Alan G. EUman, 1 Auerbach La., Lawrence, N.Y. 11516, and Jon
C. Garito, 22 Deering U., East Rockaway, N.Y. 11558
ContiBaation of Ser. No. 61^76, Jul. 27, 1979, abandoned, which
is a conttniiation-in-part of Ser. No. 917,533, Jun. 21, 1978,
abandoned. This appUcation May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,007
Int a.3 A61C I/IO. 1/12. 17/02: B25G 3/28
MS. a. 433—87 13 Claims
1. In combination with an elongated continuous strip of
threaded straight dental pins of predetermined diameter
notched at periodic intervals, a dental pin dispenser for dis-
72^^64
1. A detent device for a removable dental prosthesis, said
device comprising:
a tubular member, said tubular member being externally
threaded;
a spring loaded plunger movably disposed in said tubular
member with an end portion of said plunger projecting
outwardly from said tubular member;
stop means within said tubular member for limiting longitu-
dinal movement of said plunger end portion;
a spring member enclosable in the dental prosthesis when the
dental prosthesis is being formed, said spring member
determining location of said tubular member in the dental
prosthesis and retaining said tubular member in the dental
prosthesis;
said spring member having helical loops;
said tubular member being inserted through said loops with
said loops engaging the external threads of said tubular
member; and
said spring member including securing means for providing
a fixed securement of said spring member in the dental
prosthesis.
658
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,435
PERMANENT ONE VISIT BONDED BRIDGE NO
DRILLING, AND KIT THEREFOR
Arthur Raeder, and Celia R. Raeder, both of 615 Eastern Pkwy.,
Brooyyn, N.Y. 11216
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 938,423, Aug. 31, 1978,
abandoned. This application Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,321
Int. a.3 A61C 13/22
U.S. a. 433—180 29 Qaims
1. A kit for making and inserting a dental bridge in a gap
between natural teeth in a human mouth, said kit comprising:
a generally arch-shaped piece of a rigid material having
approximately the shape of a geometric curve defined by
the central fossae of the posterior teeth and the lingual
surfaces of the anterior teeth of one jaw of a human
mouth; said piece being adapted to have at least one arti-
ficial tooth mounted thereon and having such a cross-sec-
tional shape that a length of said piece can be secured to at
least one natural tooth to each side of said gap by means of
being received in a groove formed in the surface of each
of said natural teeth, and
a sufficient quantity of copolymer usable for forming an
ultraviolet light transmissive matrix for aligning said at
least one artificial tooth.
4,380,436
SUPPORT FOR A REMOVABLE DENTAL PROSTHESIS
Manfred Kipp, Sande, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Dental
Keramik Sande GmbH, Sande, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,392
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28,
1980, 3107690
Int. C\? A61C 13/22
U.S. a. 433—182 2 Qaims
other and, in an end position thereof, mutual interengage-
ment therebetween, said male support element comprising
a vertically-disposed, generally conical pin having a re-
cess, and said female support element comprising a verti-
cally-disposed, generally conical bushing configured to
encompass said pin which bushing is provided with an
inwardly-protruding spring element removably mounted
thereon which is disposed for bias engagement with said
recess of said pin when said bushing is fully received on
said pin.
4,380,437
SMALL WEAPONS SIMULATOR
G. Wirth Yarborough, Jr., 1150 Dauphin St., Mobile, Ala. 36604
FUed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,335
Int. C\? F41F 27/00
U.S. CI. 434—18 2 Claims
-la
1. A small weapons simulator for marksmanship training,
said simulator comprising:
a gun body having an external buttstock, action housing,
forestock and muzzle configuration resembling a weapon
to be simulated;
a transmitter supported within said body for transmitting a
light beam forwardly along the barrel axis of said body;
recoil means supported within said body to develop a rear-
wardly directed force impulse when actuated, said recoil
means comprising a pneumatic piston-cylinder module; ^
muzzle rise simulating means for developing a force upon
actuation to lift the forward portion of said body; and
means for simultaneously actuating said transmitter, said
recoil means and said muzzle rise means, said actuating
means comprising means defining a supply of compressed
air to said gun body and trigger actuated valve means for
actuating said piston-cylinder module.
1. A support for a removable dental prosthesis on the re-
mainder of the natural teeth, comprising:
a male support element and a female support element, said
male support element being securable to the base of a
crown of a capped tooth of one's remaining natural teeth,
and said female support member being securable to a
dental prosthesis, said male support element and said
female support element being configured for positive
locking and telescopic displacement relative to one an-
4,380,438
AUTOMATED STUDY VOICE
RECORD/REPRODUCTION SYSTEM
Ikuko Okamoto, Tokyo, Japan, as^gnor to Yugen Kaisha
Batora Konsaniteingu, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,216
Int. a.' G09B 5/04
U.S. a. 434—157 9 Claims
1. A study voice record/reproduction system comprising a
master study materials reproduction section including a first
recording medium for recording thereon master study voice
signals and identification signals each inserted between blocks
in said master voice signals to distinguish one block from
another, first medium driving means for driving said first re-
cording medium, and a reproduction unit for reproducing
signals recorded on the first recording medium when the first
recording medium is driven forward by said first driving
means; a practice record/reproduction section including a
second recording medium for recording thereon signals from
said master reproduction section or voice signals from a micro-
phone, second medium driving means for driving said second
recording medium forward and backward, and a reproduction
unit for reproducing on the second recording medium said
signals from the master reproduction section or said signals
from said microphone when said second medium driving
means drives the second recording medium forward; a pro-
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
659
gram reproduction section including a third recording medium
for recording thereon instruction voice signals, command
program signals and identification signals for distinguishing
between said instruction voice signals and said command pro-
gram signals, third medium driving means for driving said
third recording medium forward and backward, and a repro-
duction unit for reproducing signals recorded on the third
4,380,440
DROPPABLE AIRBORNE BUOY
Vito Suppa, Paris, France, assignor to Tbomson-CSF, Paris,
France
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 57,422, Jul. 13, 1979, Pat. No.
4,279,025. This application Aug. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 181,650
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 28, 1979, 79 21562
Int. a.' B63B 21/52
U.S. CI. 441—30 3 Claims
20 90
recording medium at the time of driving the third recording
medium; and a control section for storing the contents of
program signals read from said program reproduction means
thereby to control each driving of the master study materials
reproduction section, said practice record/reproduction sec-
tion and the program reproduction section in accordance with
said program signals.
1. A buoy capable of being dropped onto water from an
aircraft, comprising: an inflatable balloon attached to a con-
tainer; said balloon being inflated during its descent by a forced
intake of air at the base thereof; said buoy having adjusuble
openings in the form of scoops; said forced intake of air taking
place through the opening of these scoops; each of said scoops
comprising a window covered inside by a flexible cloth; said
cloth being inflated when the scoops lift up during the drop of
said buoy; said cloth actuating a freeing mechanism for releas-
ing a protecting hood cappinf^said balloon.
4,380,439 4J80 441
NECK VENOUS AND ARTERIAL EXAMINATION FLOTATION VEST
. ^ . J^^^^^ ^^^^^^ r.m 02122 Robert G. Harr, Whittier, and Gaylord T. Soli, San Marino,
Arthur Kreitenberg, 5860 Crazens St., San Dicgo, Calif. 92122 ^^ ^^ ^ ^^ Americas Cup, Inc., Qty of Indus-
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,840 ^^
Int. a.3 G09B 23/32 ' ' py^ j^^^^ j, 1981, Ser. No. 239,460
U.S. a. 434-268 6 Claims j^^ ^^ 3 g^ g^^g
U.S. a. 441— 112 16 Claims
1. A neck venous and arterial examination teaching instru-
ment comprising:
a base member,
a cover attachable to the base member and having a first
surface and an adjacent second surface,
sensing means mountable in the cover for producing human
sensible fluctuations in simulated blood circulatory sys-
tems in response to at least one heart beat cycle,
interchangeable cam means having undulating contours
simulating normal and abnormal heart pulse wave forms
' for activating the sensing means,
motor means for operating the cam means, and
wherein the motor means and cam means are mountable on
the base and enclosed within the cover to produce a self-
contained hand portable instrument.
1. A flotation vest having an outer shell including a back
section and left and right front sections joined to the back
section at the top and at the sides to form arm holes, and
internal buoyancy means carried by the shell and including
front portions formed by at least four pieces of buoyancy
material which when properly fitted edgewise together form
rectangular pieces such that there is no waste material in cut-
ting the pieces from rectangular sheets, the front buoyancy
portions include a lower body piece and a shoulder piece
carried by each of the left and right front sections, each of said
body pieces having a lower edge, a central edge, a side edge,
and an upper edge, each shoulder piece including a lower edge,
an arm hole edge, a neck hole edge, and an upper edge, the
shoulder piece lower edge being positiooed to engage the body
piece upper edge with said engaging edges being formed to
660
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
engage at an angle such that the arm hole edge and the neck
hole edge of the shoulder piece slope at an angle upwardly and
outwardly away from the body piece central edge, the width
of a shoulder piece between the arm hole and neck hole edges
being considerably less than the width of a body piece between
its side and central edges so that with the shoulder piece lower
edge being positioned close to the body piece central edge, a
portion of the body piece upper edge forms an arm hole with
the arm hole edge of a shoulder piece.
4,380,443
nBER-REINFORCED DRIVE SHAFT
Helmut Federmann, Berg. Gladbach, and Joachim Bausch, Diir-
scbeid, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Felten A
Guilleaume Carlswerk AktiengesellschiBft, Cologne, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 203,669, Not. 3, 1980. This
appUcation Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,844
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, No?. 17,
1979, 2946530; Jul. 19, 1980, 3027432
Int. C1.3 F16C i/00
U.S. a. 464—^81 17 Qaims
,'2>M'L''3 I ' ",sVn?
4,380,442
FLEXIBLE COUPLING
Friedrich-Wiihelm Amsel, Gorxheimertal, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignor to Firma Carl Freudenberg, Weinheim, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,183
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 15,
1980, 3010127
Int. a.5 F16D 2/00, 3/58
U.S. a. 464—93 8 Qaims
1. In a rotary flexible coupling having first and second sets of
driver blocks, the blocks of each set being spaced equally apart
around the axis of rotation, the blocks of the first set being
interleaved between the blocks of the second set, each of the
blocks having radial end faces and having inner and outer
circumferential surfaces, a first set of fastening elements to
connect the first set of blocks to an input flange to receive
torque therefrom, and a second set of fastening elements to
connect the second set of blocks to an output flange to transmit
torque thereto, the invention comprising:
a first tire of inelastic material spaced radially inwardly from
the inner circumferential surfaces of the blocks;
a second tire of inelastic material spaced radially outwardly
from the outer circumferential surfaces of the blocks;
an inner layer of elastomeric material comprising cylindrical
segments joining the inner circumferential surface of each
of the blocks with the first tire; and
an outer layer of elastomeric material comprising cylindrical
segments joining the outer circumferential surface of each
of the blocks with the second tire.
1. A drive shaft, particularly for motor vehicles, comprising
a tubular shaft part having an axis and two axially spaced end
portions and being composed of a fiber-reinforced synthetic
plastic material; two end pieces each associated with a respec-
tive one of said end portions of said shaft and having a sleeve-
shaped section extending into and surrounded by a respective
one of said end portions of said shaft part, and a ring-shaped
section extending axially outwardly from said sleeve-shaped
section and having an inner end face which forms a stop and a
protective end abutment for a respective one of said end por-
tions of said shaft part, said end pieces being constituted of
metal; and means for connecting said end pieces with said shaft
part, said connecting means including a plurality of anchoring
members provided in each of said end pieces, said anchoring
members being arranged on said sleeve-shaped section so that
they extend substantially radially outwardly at a plurality of
circumferentially spaced locations in the vicinity of a transition
between said sleeve-shaped section and said ring-shaped sec-
tion of each of said end pieces.
4,380,444
VARIABLE RATIO BELT DRIVE
John Dolza, 810 State Rd., Fenton, Mich. 48430
FUed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,526
Int. a.3 F16H 55/56
U.S. a. 474—21
29 Claims
1. A variable ratio pulley for a belt drive comprising: a pair
of disk-shaped flanges supported coaxially of each other for
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
661
rotation as a unit and for movement axially relative to each
other, said flanges having conical surfaces converging relative
to each other radially inwardly and adapted to receive a trans-
mission belt therebetween extending around and tangentially
toward and away from said flanges, ratio control means for
moving said flanges axially to selected positions relative to
each other to change the pitch radius at which said belt en-
gages said opposed conical surfaces, and means urging said
flanges axially toward each other with a force substantially
proportional to the net tangential force between said flanges
and said belt in all of said selected positions of said belt relative
to said flanges, said means urging said flanges toward each
other including control members having opposed control
surfaces, said control members being rotatable relative to each
other, one of said members being connected to one of said
flanges of said pulley for movement therewith and another of
said members being connected to a rotary input member, roller
assemblies each including a plurality of rolling elements rotat-
able independently of each other on radially extending axes
intersecting the axis of said pulley and disposed between and in
engagement with said surfaces to move said members axially
apart on relative rotation of said members to move said flanges
of said pulley axially relative to each other and against said belt
with a force substantially proportional to the tangential force
of said belt.
other and the outer of said plate segments having an annular
shajje, and strip-like plate portions providing connector means
joining the respective plate segments, as a continuing part
thereof, to rigidly maintain said plate segments in their respec-
tive offset substantially parallel planes.
4,380,446
SIDE SEALING MECHANISM FOR A PACKAGING
MACHINE
J. Douglas Dickson; J. David Sweeney, and Ronald K. Coleman,
all of Columbus, Ohio, assignors to Rexham Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,697
Int. a.J B31B 1/10. 1/64
MS. a. 493—11 6 Qaims
/» jy -tr, z «-j»«, -^ ^
4,380,445
TRANSMISSION FOR A BICYCLE
Keizo Shimano, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Shimano Industrial
Company Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 4, 1975, Ser. No. 601,652
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 16, 1974, 49-94477;
Aug. 16, 1974, 49-94478
Int. C1.3 F16P l/OO
U.S. a. 474—144 13 Claims
5 rn II
20 rlZffag
1. Mechanism for sealing together two face-to- face strips of
heat-sealable material at longitudinally spaced positions along
the strips as the latter are advanced with continuous motion
along a predetermined path, one of said strips having urgets
spaced longitudinally therealong with the spacing between
successive targets being approximately equal, said mechanism
comprising a frame, a drum mounted on said frame to rotate
about a predetermined axis, a plurality of heat sealing bars
carried by and spaced circumferentially around said drum, one
of said strips engaging said sealing bars as said strips are ad-
vanced along said path, means mounting said sealing bars on
said drum to move radially inwardly and outwardly relative to
the drum to thereby enable the radial position and the circum-
ferential spacing of said sealing bars to be changed, an actuator
connected to said sealing bars and routable with said drum,
said actuator also being rotatable relative to said drum and
being operable when so rotated to move said sealing bars
radially inwardly or outwardly relative to said drum, means
for detecting said targets and for producing command signals
indicative of the spacing between said Urgets, means for de-
tecting said sealing bars and for producing feedback signals
indicative of the circumferential spacing of said sealing bars,
means for comparing said command and feedback signals, and
power-operated means responsive to said comparing means
and operable to rotate said actuator relative to said drum when
the spacing between said sealing bars differs from the spacing
between said targets.
1. A compound sprocket structure particularly advanta-
geous for use in a bicycle or other vehicle comprising a single
plate structure including at least two plate segments each of
which has a peripheral edge formed to include a set of teeth,
one of said plate segments being offset from the other to pro-
vide that said plate segments are arranged thereby to lie in
adjacent substantially parallel planes, one of said plate seg-
ments being rimmed by and lying within the boundary of the
4380,447
METHOD OF CLOSING AN OPEN END OF A TUBE OR
TUBULAR CONTAINER
Thomas VanderLugt, Jr., Kalamazoo, Mich., assignor to James
River Corporation of Virginia, Richmond, Va.
Division of Ser. No. 71,242, Aug. 30, 1979, Pat. No. 4,291,829.
This appUcation Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,416
Int. a.' B31B 77/00
U.S. a. 493—102 9 Claims
1. A method of closing an open end of a tube or tubular
container, having upstanding walls, the end edges of which
walls are folded-over and adhered to said walls to form a
folded-over, reinforced portion of double thickness at that end
of the tube or tubular container, the inner exposed surface of
said folded-over, edge-reinforced portions of the upstanding
walls having areas of low resistance defmed therein for facili-
662
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
tating the removable securement of a closure member thereto,
comprising the steps of placing a container closure member!
comprising an upstandmg tubular inner wall conforming to the
inner surfaces of the walls of the tube or tubular container to be
closed by said closure member, and
a downstanding tubular outer wall connected thereto by a
bight and conforming to the outer surfaces of the walls of
the tube or tubular container to be closed by said closure
member,
thereby forming a tubular channel in which said upstanding
walls can be seated in frictional engagement, and
a centrally located upwardly-elevated dome portion, defined
by an upstanding dome-forming wall which is inwardly
spaced from the said upstanding tubular inner wall of said
closure member, the said two upstanding walls of said
closure member defining a tubular valley therebetween,
onto the reinforced end of said tube or tubular container,
and forcing lugs in the upstanding tubular inner wall of
said closure member into complementary areas of low
resistance in the inner exposed surface of the walls of the
said tube or tubular container.
4 380 448
PAPER STOP ADJUSTMENT MECHANISM FOR
CONTINUOUS FORM STATIONERY FOLDING
MACHINE
Earnest B. Bunch, Jr., Peoria, Ariz., assignor to B. Bunch Com-
pany, Inc., Phoenix, Ariz.
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,787
Int. a.3 B65H 45/00. 45/20
U.S. a. 493-410 2 Qaims
a pair of spaced adjacent parallelably disposed paper
distribution rollers, each of said rollers having
a generally constant diameter along the length thereof,
and
a longitudinal axis about which said rollers rotate, said
longitudinal axes being generally horizontally dis-
posed; and,
belts trained around said distribution rollers;
means carried on said frame for directing said continuous
strip of paper between said distribution rollers and into
contact with at least some of said belts for said lateral
distribution in said substantially opposite directions, said
lateral distribution directions being generally perpendicu-
lar to said longitudinal axes of said distribution rollers;
a support surface for receiving paper distributed by said
endless belt means;
a pair of opposed assemblies carried by said frame and posi-
tioned
above said support surface, and
laterally from said distribution rollers
for periodically tamping said paper dispensed from said
paper distribution rollers of said endless belt means to
assist in folding and positioning said paper on said support
surface, each of said tamping assemblies
being spaced apart from the other, and
located on an opposite side of an imaginary midline lying
between and generally parallel to the longitudinal axes
of said adjacent distribution rollers;
a pair of opposed paper stop assemblies carried for move-
ment independently of said distribution rollers and op-
posed assemblies on said frame and positioned
above said support surface, and
laterally from said distribution rollers and said imaginary
midline,
each of said paper stop assemblies being
spaced apart from the other, and
located on an opposite side of said imaginary midline, and
having at least one upstanding face for stopping said lateral
travel of creased edges of paper distributed away from
said midline by said endless belt means;
wherein the improvement comprises means for mounting said
upstanding faces of said paper stop assemblies for movement
between at least two operative positions,
(a) a first operative position with each of said faces of said
paper stop assemblies positioned beneath and laterally
adjacent one of said distribution rollers, and
(b) a second operative position with said faces moved later-
ally from said first position adjacent said distribution
rollers in a direction of travel away from said imaginary
midline,
such that said continuous form stationery folding apparatus
can fold paper in lengths generally equal to or less than the sum
of said diameters of said adjacent rollers, said tamping assem-
blies being positioned laterally out from underneath said distri-
bution rollers whea said paper stop assemblies are in said first •
operative positions.
1. In combination with apparatus for producing continuous
form stationery by folding a strip of paper along transverse
lines of weakening formed therein, said apparatus including,
a frame;
generally horizontally disposed endless belt means mounted
on said frame for alternately distributing said successive
lines of weakening in said paper in substantially opposite
lateral directions of travel to form creased edges in said
paper along said lines of weakening, said belt means in-
cluding
4,380,449
VARIABLE SIZE FOLDER CYLINDER
Horst B. Michalik, Hochberg, Fed- Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Koenig & Bauer AG, Wurzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jon. 26, 19il, Ser. No. 277,538
Clains priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 26.
1980, 3028468
Int. a.' B65H 45/16
U.S. a. 493-424 5 Qaims
1. A clutch assembly is combination with a folder cylinder
of a folder for use in a web-fed rotary printing machine the
folder cylinder having an inner pair of supporting wheels and
an outer pair of supporting wheels, said inner and outer pairs of
supporting wheels being axially spaced from each other on an
axial support shaft and being capable of being rotatably dis-
placed with respect to each other about said axial support shaft
April 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
663
to permit variations in the spacing of devices carried by said
inner and outer supporting wheels at the periphery of the
folder cylinder, said clutch assembly being positioned between
and acting on said outer and inner supporting wheels, said
clutch assembly comprising:
An axially displaceable ring shaped piston positioned in a
recess in a face portion of at least one of the inner support-
ing wheels;
a coupling ring secured on said ring shaped piston;
a return membrane ring clamped between said ring-shaped
piston and said coupling ring, said return membrane ring
projecting over said recess in said face portion of said
inner supporting wheel, said return membrane ring having
an outer rim and an inner rim to seal said recess for said
P_,p_
.. i! I—
*"
EMEiHtoa^^
^rJ ^
/^ =
t
A'-
^z
. ^,
*^k
fir
4
itj
1
.V ^
1
'j
-^
ring-shaped piston, said outer rim and said inner rim of
said return membrane ring being secured to said face of
said inner supporting wheel;
a plurality of guide holes formed in said recess for said
ring-shaped piston;
a plurality of guide bolts on a side of said ring-shaped piston
facing said recess for said ring-shaped pistom, said guide
bolts engaging said guide holes;
means for supplying a pressurized fluid to said recess for said
ring shaped piston; and
a thrust collar carried by said outer supporting wheel and
co-acting with said coupling ring whereby application of
fluid pressure causes said coupling ring to engage said
thrust collar to join said outer and inner supporting wheels
together.
4380 450
SANITARY NAPKIn'wITH DISPOSAL MEANS
Jack W. Reich, Neenah, Wis., assignor to Kimberly-Clark Cor-
poration, Neenah, Wis.
Filed Jan. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,917
Int. a.3 A61F 13/16
U.S. a. 604-386 2 Claims
1. A sanitary napkin with a body facing side and a garment
facing side comprising a fluid impermeable baffle, an absorbent
layer and a fluid pervious wrap positioned between the wearer
and the absorbent layer, said wrap and said baffle extending
beyond the longitudinal ends of the absorbent layer to form the
flexible longitudinal ends of the napkin at least one of said
napkin ends containing a discrete adhesive area on the body
facing side and having garment attachment adhesive means on
the garment facing side.
CHEMICAL
4,380,451
CONTINUOUS DYEING AND SIMULTANEOUS
FINISHING OF TEXTILE MATERIALS USING
DEFOAMING AGENT OF POLYOXYALKYLENE .
POLYSILOXANE COPOLYMER AND HYDROPHOBIC
SILICA
Helmut Steinberger, Leverkusen; Wilfried Kortnuum, Hagen,
and Jiirgen Tuschen, Much, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,660
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 15,
1980,3038984
Int a.3 D06P 1/61: D06M 13/00; BOID 19/04
U.S. a. 8—477 4 Claims
1. A de-foaming agent comprising by weight about
(a) 80 to 100 parts of a polyoxyalkylenepolysiloxane copoly-
. mer of the formula:
[R«Si(OSiR2)„]mZm- !(OR2)m + 2.
X
where K is the radical of a coupling component of the pyri-
done series,
one of the radicals X, Y and Z is a carboxylic acia ester
group of a total of 2 to 19 carbon atoms; and,
the remaining substituents X, Y and Z are hydrogen, methyl,
chlorine, bromine or nitro, with the proviso that the num-
ber of carbon atoms of the N-substituent in the pyridone
moiety plus that of the carboxylic ester group is equal to
or above 14.
in which
R represents an optionally halogen-substituted
group with up to 4 carbon atoms,
R' represents the substituent R or a phenyl radical,
R^ represents a group of the composition
alkyl
CH.
R3(OCH2CH2);,(OCH2CH)y— ,
Z represents the difunctional unit — O — or
R* 1
I
-O— C—
o-
p
and
R^ denotes a hydrocarbon radical with up to 6 carbon
atoms;
R* denotes independently from one another hydrogen or
R3,
n denotes a number between 3 and 40,
m denotes a number between 1 and IS,
X denotes a number between 0 and 68.
y denotes a number between 0 and 52,
x-l-y denotes a number between 1 and 68 and
p denotes a number between 2 and 12,
and (b) 0.S to 20 parts of a hydrophobic silicon dioxide.
4,380,453
EXTRANEOUS DYE OR COLORANT SCAVENGING
SYSTEM IN LAUNDRY
J. Lyle Claiborne, Hixson, Tenn., assignor to Dixie Yams, Inc.,
Chattanooga, Tenn.
Division of Ser. No. 119,154, Feb. 6, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Not. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,277
Int a.3 B08B 3/00
U.S. a. 8—606 13 Oaims
1. A method of controlling undesirable random dye or color-
ant in a liquid bath containing sources of undesirable random
dye or colorant and textile material of color other than the
color of said undesirable dye or colorant, comprising placing in
said bath a dye scavenger member comprising a cellulosic
substrate material bearing a dye scavenger material, said dye
scavenger material comprising a compound from the group
consisting of:
a N-trisubstituted ammonium-2-hydroxy-3-halopropyl com-
pound having the general formula
4,380,452
DYEING AND PRINTING OF
CELLULOSE-CONTAINING TEXTILE MATERIAL
Hermann LoefHer, Speyer; Werner Jnenemann, Bad Durkheim,
and Guntber Lamm, Hasslocb, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigsbafen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 164,005, Jnn. 30, 1980, Pat No.
4,305,718. This appUcation Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,209
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 23,
1979, 2929763
The portion of tbe term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 15,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 O09B 29/36; D06P 3/60
U.S. CL 8—532 2 Claims
1. A process for dyeing and printing water-swellable cellu-
losic materials and blends thereof with synthetic materials in
the presence of water and a solvent that is capable of maintain-
ing cellulose in the swollen state, wherein the dye used is a
compound of the general formula I:
X— CH2— CHOH— CH2— N— R— Y©
®\
R
or a salt of epoxy propyl ammonium having the general
formula
CH2 CH— CH2— N— R— Y©
O R
wherein X is a halogen radical, Y is chloride, bromide,
sulfate or sulfonate, and the R's are methyl, ethyl, butyl or
benzyl groups or an hydroxyl substituted derivative
thereof and then using said liquid bath for its intended
purpose, wherein said undesirable random dye or colorant
becomes associated with said dye scavenger member.
665
666
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,454
COKING QUALITY OF COALS WITH INSUFTICTENT
COKING PROPERTIES
Jiirgen StadeUiofer, Dortmund; Heinz-Gerhard Franck, Bad
Soden-Neuenhain; Karl H. Koch, and Rolf Marrett, both of
Castrop-Rauxel, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Riitgerswerke Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Not. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 209,343
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19,
1979, 2951116
Int. a.3 ClOL 9/10, 5/16
U.S. a. 44—1 B 5 Oaims
1. In a process for upgrading the coke quality of coals with
insufficient coking properties, the improvement comprising
mixing with said coal a coking coal improvement medium
which is a pitch-like product with a softening point (Kramer-
Samow method) of 90°- 160° C, and is obtained from the
highly aromatic carbonaceous material produced by the disin-
tegration of comminuted coal and/or similar coal-like raw
materials with a combination of hydrocarbon mixtures as the
solvent which are aromatic residues from the steam pyrolysis
of petroleum fractions in combination with coal-derived aro-
matic mixtures with an average boiling point above 350° as
complementary solvent, with the use of elevated temperature
and pressure conditions, and by distilling off 2 to 20% of light-
boiling components.
5. An additive for the improvement of the coke quality of
coals with insufficient coking properties, comprising the pitch-
like product with a softening point (Kramer-Samow method)
of 90°- 160° C. which is obtained from the highly aromatic
carbonaceous material obtained by the disintegration of com-
minuted coal and/or similar coal-like raw materials with a
combination of hydrocarbon mixtures as the solvent, which are
aromatic residues from the steam pyrolysis of petroleum frac-
tions in combination with coal-derived aromatic mixtures with
an average boiling point above 350° as complementary solvent,
with the use of elevated temperature and pressure conditions,
and wherein from 2 to 20% of light-boiling components are
distilled ofT.
prising a hydrocarbon or a halogenated aliphatic hydro-
carbon, or a mixture thereof, as a major component.
4,380,455
DIALKYL CARBONATES AS PHASE SEPARATION
INHIBITORS IN LIQUID HYDROCARBON FUEL AND
ETHANOL MIXTURES
Harry A. Smith, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,691
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/18
U.S. a. 44—56 15 Claims
1. A method for preventing a mixture of hydrous ethanol
and a liquid hydrocarbon fuel from separating into two phases
comprising adding to the mixture an effective amount of a
phase separation inhibitor wherein the inhibitor is selected
from the group of dialkyl carbonates.
4,380,456
GASOLINE FUEL ADDITIVE COMPOSITION
William H. Taylor, 2311 Marca PI., Carlesbad, Calif. 92008
FUed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,600
Int a.3 ClOL 1/18. 1/30
U.S. a. 44—68 9 Claims
1. An engine fuel composition comprising gasoline and from
0.01 to about 0.1 percent by weight of a composition compris-
ing, in solution:
about 10 to about 35 percent by volume of a zirconium salt
of an organic acid;
about 10 to 35 percent by volume of a plasticizer boiling
above 300* C. and comprising as a part of its structure an
acid derived ester group or an aromatic group, or both;
from 0 to about 6 percent by volume of an organic acid
capable of forming a salt with zirconium; and
a solvent for said zirconium salt and said plasticizer, com-
4,380,457
SEPARATION OF AIR
Brian A. Rathbome, Northbridge, and Bruce R. Ryan,
Woronora, both of Australia, assignors to BOC Limited,
Brentford, England
FUed Jun. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 44,826
Qaims priority, application Australia, May 25, 1978, PD4508
Int a.3 BOID 53/04; F25J 3/04
U.S. a. 55—33 4 Qaims
^1 "V
•"■^ J
M
J
L .
1 .!»;■ ^
*i
1. An air separation process comprising:
(1) passing an air supply under pressure through a passage of
a reversing heat exchanger to cool said air to a tempera-
ture of about 180° to 230° K. and deposit water in the form
of ice in said passage and to form cooled dried air;
(2) contacting said cooled dried air with at least one bed
containing an adsorbent material to remove at least a
carbon dioxide component therefrom and to form a resi-
due of cooled dried air and component adsorbed material;
(3) further cooling said residue of cooled dried air in a heat
exchanger to form cooled rectifiable air;
(4) rectifying said cooled rectifiable air to form separate
fractions of product gaseous nitrogen, product gaseous
oxygen and waste nitrogen;
(5) treating said component adsorbed material with said
waste nitrogen fraction at a pressure less than the pressure
of said cooled dried air to regenerate said adsorbent mate-
rial and to form a residual waste nitrogen fraction; and
(6) passing said residual waste nitrogen fraction through said
passage of said reversing heat exchanger in reverse direc-
tion to the passing of said air supply to purge said water
from said exchanger.
4380,458
NOVEL DESICCANT
Clayton D. Callihan, Baton Rouge, La., assignor to Louisiana
State University, Baton Rouge, La.
FUed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,535
Int a.3 BOID 53/02
U.S. a. 55—33 10 Claims
1. A process for the dehydration of a fluid stream with a
desiccant, and regeneration of said desiccant which comprises
contacting said fluid stream with a desiccant at a temperature
below its syneresis temperature, the syneresis temperature of
said desiccant ranging from about 100* F. to about 195* P., said
desiccant being characterized as solid methyl cellulose
wherein from about 0.6 to about 1.8 of the available hydroxyl
groups of the anhydroglucose units constituting the basic
cellulose entity have been replaced by methyl and other hy-
droxy alkyl or carboxy alkyl groups containing from 2 to about
4 carbon atoms where at least one-half of the substituting
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
667
groups are methyl, and heating said desiccant above the syner-
esis temperature, said solid methyl cellulose desiccant having
*"^.
the capacity to lose its affmity for water, and to release water
when heated above its syneresis temperature.
4,380,459
METHOD FOR REDUaNG THE AMOUNT OF COAL
DUST IN THE ENVIRONMENT SURROUNDING COAL
MINING
David I. Netting, Springfield, Pa., assignor to Atlantic Richfield
Company, Los Angeles, Calif.
FUed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,222
Int. a.3 BOID 47/04: E21C 7/06
U.S. a. 55—87 3 Oaims
1. In a method of reducing the amount of coal dust in the
environment surrounding coal mining, cutting and handling
operations by applying a layer of foam developed from an
aqueous solution containing a foam generating agent to the
surface of the coal, the improvement comprising using as the
foam generating agent a ihixture comprised of a surfactant and
a high molecular weight synthetic gum, said synthetic gum
being present in said mixture at a concentration of about IS to
45 percent based on the total weight of surfactant and said
foam generating agent being present in the aqueous solution at
a concentration of about 0.01 to about 1 percent based on the
total weight of the aqueous solution.
4,380,460
GAS SEPARATION APPARATUS
Roger S. Otstot, and Charles J. Runkle, both of Raleigh, N.C.,
assignors to Monsanto Company, St. Louis, Mo.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,912
Int. C1.3 BOID 53/22
U.S. a. 55—158 11 Qaims
1. Apparatus for separating one gas from a mixture of gases,
comprising
a. a cylindrical shell having an inlet for admitting a gas
mixture into the shell and an outlet for discharge of unper-
meated gases from the shell,
b. a bundle of hollow fiber membranes positioned in the
shell, said membranes being more permeable to one of the
gases of the mixture than the others,
c. a tube sheet positioned in the shell at one end of the bundle
of hollow fibers, said fibers extending through the tube
sheet, and
d. a resilient sheet having the form of a slit tube positioned in
the shell in a position surrounding the bundle of fibers, one
end of said slit tube being secured to the tube sheet, the
remainder of said slit tube being free of restraint and
expanded into contact with the inner surface of the shell.
4,380,461
RECOVERY OF HYDROGEN FROM AMMONIA
SYNTHESIS PURGE GAS
Alan A. Haslam, Stockport; Wieslaw H. Isalski, Sale, and Ter-
ence R. Tomlinson, Stockport, all of England, assignors to
Petrocarbon Developments Ltd., Manchester, England
Filed Not. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 208,940
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 10, 1979,
7916187
Int. a.3 F25J i/OO
U.S. a. 62—11 6 Claims
'ii
(^
~I2
13-
'^ i
t^
5^
<?r
^
J I
-^
1. In a process for the recovery of hydrogen from purge gas
withdrawn from a recycling gas stream of an ammonia synthe-
sis, which process comprises
at superatmospheric pressure cooling the purge gas to sub-
ambient temperature to form a condensate comprising
components having a boiling point above that of hydro-
gen and uncondensed gas rich in hydrogen and separating
said uncondensed gas from said condensate;
providing refrigeration for said cooling by expanding con-
densate and passing said expanded condensate and said
uncondensed gas separately in indirect countercurrent
heat exchange relationship with said purge gas, with evap-
oration of said expanded condensate; and
lowering the pariial pressure of said expanded condensate by
withdrawing a bleed stream from said uncondensed gas
prior to said heat exchange, expanding said bleed stream
and injecting it into said expanded condensate prior to said
heat exchange; the improvement wherein the bleed stream
contains less than 10% impurities and the minimum tem-
perature of said bleed stream after said expansion thereof
is prevented from falling below 77" K.
4,380,462
GLASS nSER APPARATUS AND METHOD
Hiroaki Shono; Toshio Noji, and Shinzo Ishikawa, all of Fuku-
shima, Japan, assignors to Nitto Boseki Co., Ltd., Fukushima,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 35,447, May 3, 1979, abandoned. This
application Not. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,577
Claims priority, appUcatioa Japan, May 8, 1978, 53-54192;
May 9, 1978, 53-54801
Int CV C03B 37/025
UJS. a. 65—1 12 Claims
1. A method of forming glass fibers which comprises draw-
ing streams of molten glass through an orifice plate having a
large number of orifices arranged in Hooding relationship, each
of said orifices being provided on a separate projection extend-
668
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
ing downwardly from said orifice plate; and directing air up-
wardly to the undersurface of said orifice plate to cool the
15^^
ooooo
cones of glass formed at each projection, said air impinging
upon said orifice plate.
4,380,463
METHOD OF MELTING GLASS MAKING
INGREDIENTS
Joseph M. Matesa, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to PPG Industries,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,302
Int. a.J C03B 18/02
U.S. a. 65—99.2 8 Qaims
\
1. A method of melting glassmaking ingredients in a glass
melting chamber, said glass melting chamber including refrac-
tory sidewalls and endwalls forming a container for containing
a pool of molten metal therein, comprising the steps of:
feeding a coherent thin sheet of glass batch materials having
a width less than the width of said molten metal pool
progressively into said glass melting chamber onto the
surface of said pool of molten metal;
advancing said coherent thin sheet along said pool of molten
metal while maintaining the coherency thereof, and while
maintaining the coherent thin sheet in non-contacting
relation to the refractory sidewalls;
melting said coherent thin sheet into a layer of molten glass
while practicing said advancing step; and
withdrawing said layer of molten glass from said glass melt-
ing chamber.
wherein
R/is lower perfluoroalkyl;
R2 and R3 each independently is
(1) a hydrocarbon group selected from alkyl; alkenyl;
cycloalkyl; phenyl; and phenyl substituted by up to 3
groups selected from alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, mono- or
dialkylamino, and halo wherein each alkyl moiety has 1
to 4 carbon atoms;
(2) haloalkyl;
(3) alkoxy; and
(4) a heterocyclic group which can contain only carbon,
hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, but which must
contain at least one ring atom selected from oxygen,
nitrogen, and sulfur;
R4 and R5 each independently is hydrogen, alkyl, or halo;
and
Re is hydrogen, alkoxycarbonyl, (alky]thio)carbonyl, (ha-
loalkylthio)carbonyl, haloalkoxycarbonyl, or phenox-
ycarbonyl;
and agriculturally acceptable salts of the acid form com-
pounds; provided that
R/contains not more than four carbon atoms,
R2 and R3 individually contain not more than nine carbon
atoms,
R4 and Rs individually contain not more than four carbon
atoms, and
R6 contains not more than twelve carbon atoms.
22. A herbicidal composition which comprises a compound
according to claim 1 dispersed in an agriculturally acceptable
extending medium.
4,380,465
5-ARYL-4-ISOTHIAZOLECARBOXYLIC AODS AND
DERIVATIVES
Robert K. Howe, Bridgeton, and Len F. Lee, St. Charles, both of
Mo., assignors to Monsanto Company, St. Lonis, Mo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 33,779, Apr. 27, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Oct 17, 1980, Ser. No. 197,833
Int a.3 AOIN 43/02. 37/18
U.S. a. 71—90 9 Claims
1. A method of safening rice plants against the herbicidal
action of butachlor herbicide which comprises treating the rice
plant locus with an effective amount of a compound having the
formula
4,380,464
N,N.DIACYLAMINOPERFLUOROALKANESUL-
FONANIUDES AND DERIVATIVES THEREOF
Ezzat A. Mikhail, New Brighton, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 188,535, Sep. 18, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,738
Int a.J C07C 143/83. 143/75; AOIN 41/06
VS. CI. 71—88 23 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
X— C— C— COOR
N
Yn
wherein X is hydrogen or chlorine, R is hydrogen, or agricul-
turally acceptable cations, Y is chlorine or CF3 and n is 0, 1 or
2.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
669
4,380,466
HEXAHYDROISOINDOLE DERIVATIVES, AND THEIR
PRODUCTION AND USE
Yasuo Ishida, Suits, Japan, assignor to Takeda Chemical Indus*
tries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,410
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1980, 55-70478
Int. a.' AOIN 43/38; C07D 209/46
VJS. a. 71—96 10 Claims
1. A compound represented by the formula
wherein R is halogen.
4. A herbicidal composition comprising a herbicidally effec-
tive amount of at least one compound of claim 1 in combina-
tion with an inert carrier.
4,380,467
AMINE OXANILIC AOD SALTS AS HERBIODE
EXTENDERS
Rayman Y. Wong, Richmond, Calif., assignor to Stauffer Chemi*
cal Company, Westport, Conn.
FUed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,008
Int. a.5 AOIN 37/00. 37/10
U.S. a. 71—100 14 Qaims
1. An herbicidal composition of extended soil life consisting
essentially of
(a) an herbicidally effective amount of a thiolcarbamate
having the formula
R'— S— C— N
/
i
\
R2
(a) an herbicidally effective amount
having the formula
of a thiolcarbamate
R'— S— C— N
/
i
\
R2
RJ
in which
R', R2, and R^ are independently C2-C4 alkyl; and
(b) an amount of a substituted phenyl isonitrile sufficient to
extend the soil life of said thiolcarbamate, said isonitrile
having the formula
:)^
NC
in which
R^ is selected from the group consisting of C|-C6 alkyl,
Ci-Ce alkoxy, Cj-Ce alkylthio, phenyl, halogen, benzyl-
thio, and p-chlorobenzylthio, and
R' is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ci-Q
alkyl, Ci-Ce alkoxy, and halogen.
4,380,469
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTINUOUSLY
REDUaNG AND MELTING METAL OXIDES AND/OR
PRE-REDUCED METALLIC MATERIALS
Horst Sulzbacher, Dimbockweg, Austria, assignor to Voest-
Alpine Aktiengesellschaft, Vienna, Austria
PCT No. PCT/AT80/00036, § 371 Date Aug. 12, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 12, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01715, PCT Pub.
Date Jun. 25, 1981
PCT FUed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 293,209
Claims priority, appUcation Austria, Dec. 18, 1979, 7981/79
Int a.3 C21C 7/00
UJS. a. 75—38 9 Claims
R3
in which R', R^, and R^ are independently C2-C4 alkyl;
and
(b) an amount of an amine oxanilic acid salt sufficient to
extend the soil life of said thiolcarbamate, said salt having
the formula
00
NHCCO©(R*)aNHft
O
II
NHCN(CH3)2
in which R* is selected from the group consisting of
Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, phenyl, and benzyl, and a and
b are both integers from zero to four such that the sum of
a and b is four.
4,380,468
ISONTTRILES AS HERBICIDE EXTENDERS
Raymond A. Felix, Riduiond, Calif., assignor to Stanffer Chem-
ical Company, Westport, Conn.
Dirision of Ser. No. 196,226, Oct 14, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Oct 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307^^22
Int a.3 AOIN 37/00
VS. a. 71—100 20 Claims
1. An herbicidal composition comprising
1. A process for continuously reducing and melting solid
materials containing metal oxides comprising: continuously
supplying a charge of the material to a melting receptacle;
heating the supplied charge to a temperature above its melting
temperature in the melting receptacle by means of a burner
which effects combustion within the receptacle of a fuel which
upon combustion produces eflluent gas containing essentially
carbon dioxide and water vapor at a temperature sufficiently
high that the effluent gas can react with carbon; supplying
carbon in particulate form to the hot effluent gas thereby
forming carbon monoxide and hydrogen by reaction of the
carbon with the carbon dioxide and with the water vapor;
passing the product gas resulting from the reaction at a temper-
ature exceeding 800* C. in countercurrent flow with the charge
of material being supplied to the melting receptacle in a man-
ner to heat the charge of material and to cool the product gas
to a temperature exceeding 100* C.
670
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,470
DUCTILE TRANSPLUTONIUM METAL ALLOYS
William V. Conner, Boulder, Colo., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the United States Depart-
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,248
Int. a.3 C22C 28/00. 43/00
U.S. a. 75—122.7 14 Qaims
1 . An alloy consisting essentially of 1 to 99 wt. % of Ce and
99 to 1 wt. % of Am, Cm. Bk or Cf.
4,380,471
POLYCRYSTALLINE DIAMOND AND CEMENTED
CARBIDE SUBSTRATE AND SYNTHESIZING PROCESS
THEREFOR
Minyoung Lee, Schenectady; Lawrence E. Szala, Scotia, and
Roy E. Tuft, Guilderland Center, all of N.Y., assignors to
General Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,812
Int. a.3 B22F 3/14. 7/00: C04B 31/16
U.S. a. 419—11 11 Qaims
1^:^$^-^
1. A process for simultaneously cementing diamond particles
together and affixing the cemented diamond particles to a
substrate comprising the steps of:
(a) disposing within a refractory metal container a mass of
silicon atom-containing metal, a quantity of diamond
powder, a cemented carbide body and a layer made of a
barrier material selected from the group consisting of
tantalum, vanadium, molybdenum, zirconium, tungsten
and alloys thereof, said layer of barrier material being
disposed between said cemented carbide and at least a
portion of said quantity of diamond powder and said
quantity of diamond pxswder being disposed between said
silicon atom-containing metal and said cemented carbide
body to form an assembly, and
(b) simultaneously applying heat and pressure to said assem-
bly to melt said silicon atom-containing metal and cause
said molten metal to infiltrate the diamond powder adja-
cent thereto and make contact with said layer of barrier
material.
4380,472
METHOD FOR PRODUONG PRESSURE PLATES USED
IN HYDRAULIC PUMPS
Minoni Kawabata; Susumu Honaga, both of Aichi, and Keigi
Takahashi, Kariya, all of Japan, assignors to Toyoda Koki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
FUed Not. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,719
Claims priority, application Japan, Not. 13, 1979, 54/147352
Int. a? B22F 7/00
U.S. a. 419—9 5 Claims
1. A method for producing a pressure plate used in a hydrau-
lic pump by fluid-tightly connecting first and second plate
sections together, utilizing a ring member having a hole
formed therein wherein said first plate section has at least one
bore formed therein and said second plate section has at least
one port formed therein, which comprises:
pressing metal powders so as to form said first and second
plate sections and said ring member into predetermined
configurations;
setting said first and second plate sections in place and inseri-
ing said ring member in said at least one bore formed in
said first plate section so as to provide a fluid port in
cooperation with said at least one port formed in said
second plate section;
placing brazing metal along an upper side diameter of said at
least one bore; and
heating said first and second plate sections and said ring
member so as to be fluid-tightly connected together by
said brazing metal and simultaneously sintering the same.
4,380,473
APPARATUS FOR THE CONTINUOUS EXTRUSION OF
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCOVE GRANULATED
MATERIALS, PREFERABLY POWDER METALLURGY
MATERIALS
Klaus Lichtinghagen, Kirchhain, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Glacier GmbH-DEVA Werke, Stadtallendorf, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 115,082
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 30,
1979, 2903510
Int. a.3 B22F 3/00
U.S. a. 419-^1 11 Qaims
1. A process for the continuous extrusion of electrically
conductive granulated material, preferably powder metallurgy
material, into a strand utilizing a die having a die passage duct,
a nozzle, and a punch, which comprises:
introducing said material into said die;
compressing said material with a plurality of compression
strokes of said punch in said die passage duct against a
frictional resistance which is built up by successive strokes
of said punch to form a precompressed section of said
strand;
introducing an additional quantity of said material into said
die between each of said plurality of compression strokes;
advancing said material by the pressure of said plurality of
compression strokes in said duct;
extruding said material through said nozzle;
sintering said material by means of a current directed
through the longitudinal direction of said strand to heat all
said material situated in said die passage duct between said
punch and said nozzle; and
applying a voltage from 2 to S volts exclusively to said
material with said nozzle and said punch so as to produce
said current directed through said strand situated in said
die passage duct.
4,380,474
POLYISOCYANATE REACHON PRODUCTS
Gheorghe Cioca, CoatesTille, Pa., and Paul A. Fertell, Wilming-
ton, N J., assignors to Seton Company, Newark, N J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 211,636, Dec. 1, 1980,
abandoned. This application Not. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,171
Int. a.3 C08L 89/06
U.S. a. 106—155 11 Claims
1. An article of manufacture comprising: a homogeneous
admixture of chrome shavings and a polyisocyanate binder
formed into a sheet.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
671
4,380,475
PROCESS FOR PREPARING AQUEOUS DISPERSION
OF ROSIN-BASE MATERIALS
Kimio Kawatani, Saita; Shigenori Tsi^imoto, Hashimoto, and
Ryoji K^ji, Kawachinagano, all of Japan, assignors to Ara-
kawa Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
FUed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,156
Claims priority, application Japan, Aag. 6, 1980, 55-108625
Int. a.3 C08L 93/04
U.S. a. 106—238 5 aaims
1. A process for preparing an aqueous disf>ersion of a rosin-
base material by mixing together a melt of the rosin-base mate-
rial, a dispersant and water to obtain a dispersion comprising a
continuous phase of the rosin-base material and a dispersed
phase of the water, and adding water to the dispersion to invert
the dispersion to the contemplated aqueous dispersion com-
prising a dispersed phase of the rosin-base material and a con-
tinuous phase of the water, the process being characterized in
that the dispersant is at least one of compounds represented by
the formula
(I)
0(C2H40)„CCHCHCOM
X Y
wherein R is hydrogen atom or lower alkyl group, A is
straight-chain or branched-chain alkylene group having 2 or 3
carbon atoms, n is an integer of 4 to 25, one of X and Y is
— SO3M and the other thereof is hydrogen atom, and M is a
monovalent cation, and is present in an amount of about 0.5 to
about 10% by weight of the rosin-base material.
4,380,476
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
4,l',6'-TRICHLORO-4,l',6'-TRIDEOXYGALACrOSU-
CROSE (TGS)
Khizar S. Mufti, Reading, and Riaz A. Khan, Sonning, both of
England, assignors to Talres Development (N.A.) N.V., Neth-
erlands Antilles
FUed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,593
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 8, 1980,
8022320
Int. Q.3 C07H 5/02. 1/06
U.S. a. 127—46.3 14 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of 4,r,6'-trichloro-4,r,6'-
trideoxygalactosucrose (TGS) comprising the steps of:
(a) reacting sucrose with an acylating reagent under condi-
tions to provide a mixture of acylated sucrose derivatives
containing a major proportion of 6-monoacylated mate-
rial;
(b) reacting the monoacylated sucrose derivative with a
chlorinating reagent capable of chlorinating at positions
r,4 and 6' of a sucrose 6-acylate; and
(c) deacylating and separating the 4,r,6'-trichloro-4,r,6'-
trideoxygalactosucrose material formed.
form, the axis of said cone being substantially coincident
with that of said pipe;
said nozzle comprising a chamber formed about a First axis
and including tangential inlet means for directing high-
pressure liquid into tangential contact with an interior
surface of said chamber, said surface being of a configura-
tion to cause said liquid to swirl within said chamber, and
an axially-facing outlet nozzle through which said liquid is
discharged from said chamber as a first jet of liquid in
sheet form and in the form of a hollow cone;
'i-/
s
I, Q 6
?7
7-^
generating a second jet containing abrasive particles, said
second jet being of generated form coaxial with said first
jet;
causing said first and second jets to intersect to form a resul-
tant jet, containing both liquid and abrasive particles and
of substantially conical form, also coaxial with said pipe;
causing said resultant jet both to strike the inner wall of said
pipe around its entire periphery and to move axially
within said pipe, whereby to clean said inner wall of said
pipe.
4,380,478
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CLEANING PAINT
ROLLER COVERS
James J. Cooney, 763 Sapphire St, San Diego, Calif. 92109
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,369
Int. a.3 B08B 3/04
U.S. a. 134—38 20 Claims
4,380,477
CLEANING PIPES USING MIXTURES OF UQUID AND
ABRASIVE PARTICLES
Darid H. Saunders, Cranfieid, England, assignor to National
Research Deyelopment Corporation, London, England
FUed Not. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,720
Claims priority, q>pUcation United Kingdom, Nov. 9, 1979,
7938982
InL a.3 B08B 9/02
VJS. a. 134—7 13 Claims
10. A method of cleaning pipes comprising:
using a first vortex-generating nozzle to produce a high-
pressure first jet of liquid in substantially conical sheet
15. The method of cleaning a cylindrical paint roller cover
of the type having a surrounding outer annular layer of absor-
bent material and an axial tubular passage, which comprises the
steps of:
longitudinally confining the roller cover between outer and
1029O.G.— 31
672
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
inner walls of an annular open ended longitudinally ex-
tending passage formed in a piston-like member;
substantially filling a cylindrical container member having
an open end with a cleaning liquid;
inserting an end of the piston-like member into sealing pis-
ton-cylinder relation with the open end of the container;
and
thereafter manually axially moving one of said piston-like
member and said container relative to the other in a direc-
tion to force cleaning liquid in the container through the
annular layer of the cover.
4^80,479
FOILS OF BRITTLE ALLOYS
Brian C. Coad, San Francisco, Calif., assignor to GTE Products
Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,430
Int. a.3 B22F 7/04
U.S. a. 148—11.5 P 5 Qaims
1. A process for making a nickel-base brazing foil containing
nickel and other elements in a predetermined metallurgical
content said process comprising
(a) forming a relatively uniform powder blend containing
nickel and said other elements,
(b) depositing said blend relatively uniformly on a nickel
strip, and
(c) passing said blend and said strip through the rolls of a
rolling mill to achieve at least about 3% elongation of the
nickel strip to form a foil of said predetermined metallur-
gical context.
4,380,480
METHOD OF MAKING ONE-PIECE TUBULAR AXLE
BLANKS AND THE PRODUCED AXLE BLANKS
Jean-Jacques Delfino, Montmorency, and Maurice Prevot,
Avesnes S/Elpe, both of France, assignors to Vallourec, Paris,
France
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,375
Oaims priority, application France, Jan. 20, 1981, 81 00976
Int. a.J C21D 9m
U.S. a. 148—12.4 _ 12 Qaims
kinds of materials including an anti-oxidation substance
and an oxide on a semiconductor surface region of low
impurity density in the form of an island;
forming a first selective oxidation film on the surface of said
low impurity density region by using at least one layer of
said multi-insulation layer as a mask;
defining a first window with a width determined by at least
one side face of said multi-layer which has been subjected
to side etching and an end portion of said first selective
oxidation film and forming a first region of high impurity
density in said semiconductor surface along the periphery
^
<'.;-.<<r.i^^r~f^
.~/3
'^1 7
-jSii=!%jIj-— -^
^^:^3.
of said island-like multi-insulation layer by selectively
diffusing an impurity;
forming the anti-oxidation insulation layer of said multi-insu-
lation layer so as to reduce the size thereof after an insula-
tion layer which is not a most upper layer and which is at
least one layer of said multi-insulation layer is subjected to
a second side etching and carrying out selective oxidation;
and
forming a second region of high impurity density in the
inside of said first region after removing said multi-insula-
tion layer and defining a window.
1. Method of making one-piece tubular wheel axle blanks
composed of a center portion having journals at both ends,
wherein a preheated steel tube is subjected to quenching par-
ticularly in water over its whole length followed by tempering,
the tube ends being then swaged while the transition area
between the center portion and the journal is, moreover, thick-
ened by upsetting, whereupon both ends of the axle blank are
locally heat treated by annealing.
4,380,481
METHOD FOR FABRICATING SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICES
Masafumi Shimbo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Daini Seikosha, Japan
FUed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,793
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1980, 55/394d3
Int. C\? HOIL 21/273
U.S. a. 148—187 7 Claims
1. A method for fabricating a semiconductor device, com-
prising the steps of:
forming a multi-insulation layer composed of at least two
4,380,482
STABILIZATION OF WATER-BEARING EXPLOSIVES
HAVING A THICKENED CONTINUOUS AQUEOUS
PHASE
Lionel S. Sandell, Hagerstown, Md., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,725
Int. a.3 C06B 45/02
U.S. a. 149—21 26 Claims
1. A method of stabilizing the thickened or gelled structure
of a water-bearing explosive comprising oxidizer, fuel, and
sensitizer components in a thickened or gelled continuous
aqueous phase, said method comprising incorporating in the
explosive a thermally stabilizing amount of iodide ion, iodate
ion, or a combination of iodide and iodate ions.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
673
4,380,483
PROCESS FOR FORMING IMPROVED CARBON HBER
REINFORCED COMPOSITE COIL SPRING
Howard S. Kliger, Edison, N J., assignor to Celanese Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 3,671, Jan. 15, 1979, Pat. No. 4,260,143.
This appUcation Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,339
Int. a.3 B65H 81/00; F16F 1/04
U.S. a. 156—169 12 Claims
a cooling means thermally coupled to said tool element to
establish selective forced cooling of the tool element.
1. A method for forming a carbon fiber reinforced composite
coil spring comprising:
(a) impregnating a carbon fiber braid wherein said carbon
fibers are oriented at an angle in the range of approxi-
mately plus or minus 30° to plus or minus 60° to the braid
axis and wherein there is incorporated into said braid a
quantity of longitudinal reinforcing fibers which are ori-
ented longitudinally to the braid axis so as to minimize
change in said angle of said carbon fibers within said braid
-^ when placed under tension with a quantity of non-solidi-
fied resin to serve as a substantially continuous matrix
material;
(b) winding said impregnated braid in multiple layers while
under longitudinal tension within a groove which extends
helically along the surface of a cylindrical mandrel to
provide the coil configuration of said carbon fiber rein-
forced composite coil spring;
(c) solidifying the resinuous matrix material of the composite
spring while maintaining said longitudinal tension; and
(d) removing said solid spring from said mandrel.
4,380,485
METHOD OF MAKING BREATHABLE RECEPTACLES
Samuel J. Schuster, 617 VaUombrosa, Pasadena, Calif. 91107
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 55,160, Jul. 6, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 955,221, Oct. 27, 1978,
abandoned. This application Oct 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,824
Int. a.' B32B 31/00. 3/00; B26F 15/28
U.S. a. 156—254 6 Claims
50/48
4,380,484
INDUCTIVELY HEATED TOOLING AND METHOD FOR
WORKING PLASTIC MEMBERS
Qyde P. Repik, and Alfred F. Leatherman, both of Columbus,
Ohio, assignors to William C. Heller, Jr., MUwaukee, Wis.
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 234,517
Int. a.3 B32B 31/18
U.S. a. 156—251 30 Qaims
1. An inductively heated apparatus for working plastic mate-
rial, comprising
a tool unit having a tool element formed of a material re-
sponsive to a selected energy field to generate heat in the
tool element,
a heat source coupling unit mounted adjacent the tool ele-
ment and generating said energy field coupled to said tool
element to create heat within the tool element and thereby
raise the temperature of said tool element to the fusion
temperature of the plastic, and
3B ^36
1. A method of making a breathable receptacle for storing an
article in sterile condition, the receptacle being constructed of
a laminate comprising a layer of paper or the like impermeable
to microorganisms but highly permeable to sterilizing vapor
and a layer of thermpolastic, polymeric material, the strength
of a heat seal bond between layers of the polymeric material
being initially greater than the delamination resistance of the
laminate, the method including the steps of:
superimposing first and second sheets of said laminate with
the polymeric layers in confronting relation;
heat sealing the polymeric layers of said sheets together at a
plurality of small areas;
separating the sheets thereby rupturing the polymeric layer
of at least one of the sheets at the positions of the small
areas; and
joining the sheets together to define the receptacle.
674
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,486 boxes so as to permit them to move together transversely to the
MACHINE INSTALLATION FOR THE PRODUCTION OF direction in which labels are stacked in the boxes, and means
THICK-WALLED INSULATING PIPES OF FOAM
SYNTHETIC RESIN SHEETS
Johann Fortsch, Goldbach; Cosmas Lorry, Niederkassel, and
GustaT Schweiger, Kleinostheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft, Troisdorf,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,756
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 1,
1980, 8002596[U]
Int. a.5 B32B 31/22
U.S. a. 156—359 8 Claims
permitting retracting and advancing in label stacking direction
of that label box which is in active position.
1. A machine installation for the manufacture of a thick-
walled insulating pipe of elastic, laminatable foamed synthetic
resin sheet material, which comprises an apparatus for the
lamination of the foamed synthetic resin sheet material during
winding of the sheet material on a mandrel to form a multilayer
insulating pipe having a length corresponding to the sheet
width of the sheet of foam material, said apparatus comprising
an expandable and rotatable mandrel equipped with a pneu-
matic tensioning means and an infmitely variable drive mecha-
nism for rotating the mandrel to wrap the sheet material
thereon, and a pressure roller which can be urged against the
mandrel, this roller being movable pneumatically by means of
a telescopic holder, the mandrel being associated with a pivot-
ably mounted burner means for flame laminating the wraps of
the sheet of foam material together to form a laminated sheet
pipe product and a cutter for separating the pipe product from
the non-laminated sheet material, and a means for fmishing the
initially formed pipe product comprising a shaft rotatable in
timed segments with clamping jaws being capable of receiving
an unfinished insulating pipe product and being opened and
closed pneumatically, wherein one holding arm is associated
with a band cutter for trimming the end faces of the insulating
pipe product, and a further holding arm is associated with a
blade for slitting the insulating pipe along its length.
4,380,487
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANGING THE
LABEL MAGAZINE BOXES OF LABELING MACHINES
Rudolf Zodrow, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Jagenberg Werlce, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,551
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 23,
1980, 3002250
Int a.3 B65C 9/10. 9/16
U.S. a. 156—568 9 dainis
1. In a labelling machine having means for feeding articles to
be labelled, a label supply, label pick up means for picking up
a label from the supply, means for applying the the machine,
and means for replacing the label supply when exhausted, the
improvement wherein said label supply comprises at least three
label boxes disposed alongside one another at the pickup point
so as to be successively displaceable in one direction, the label
boxes being releasably joined to one another by a dovetailed
joint formed along their side walls, and the means for replacing
the label supply when exhausted comprises guide means for the
4,380,488
PROCESS AND GAS MIXTURE FOR ETCHING
ALUMINUM
Richard F. Reichelderfer, Castro Valley; Diane C. Vogel, Union
Gty, and Marian C. Tang, Hercules, all of Calif., assignors to
Branson International Plasma Corporation, Hayward, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 196,616, Oct. 14, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,582
Int a.3 C23F 1/02
U.S. a. 156—643 11 Claims
^
:i.
■,<:^X%^<\'...i^
-r'rr-7—r-
^■^ ' ' y-T^^r^
"T
A.
;zr
RF
GENERATOR
DC
SUPPLY
ETCHING
GAS
SECONOART
GAS
EXHAUST
PUMP
1. In a process for etching aluminum in a reactor having a
chamber and a pair of spaced apart generally planar electrodes,
the steps of: positioning the aluminium between the electrodes
in the reactor chamber, admitting a primary etching gas mix-
ture selected from the group consisting of BCI3 and chlorine,
CCI4 and chlorine, and combinations thereof to the chamber at
a pressure on the order of 140-450 microns, admitting a sec-
ondary gas selected from the group consisting of SiCU, CHCI3,
CCI4 and combinations thereof to the chamber at a pressure on
the order of 190-300 microns to control the anisotropic charac-
ter of the etch, said primary gas mixture and the secondary gas
being present in the chamber at the same time, and energizing
the electrodes to ionize the gas and form active species be-
tween the electrodes.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
675
4,380,489
METHOD OF PRODUCING POLYSIUCON STRUCTURE
IN THE 1 pM RANGE ON SUBSTRATES CONTAINING
INTEGRATED SEMICONDUCTOR CIRCUITS BY
PLASMA ETCHING
Willy BeinTOgl, Munich, and Barbara Hasler, Stockdorf, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesell*
schaft, Berlin ± Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,485
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 30,
1981, 3103177
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/306
U.S. a. 156—643 6 Claims
4,380,491
SPRAY NOZZLE ASSEMBLY FOR SPRAY DRYER
Ira L. Joy, Alabaster, and Neal B. Humphreys, OdcnTille, both
of Ala., assignors to Combustion Engineering, Inc^ Windsor,
Conn.
FUed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,384
Int a.3 BOID 1/16
U.S.a. 159— 4B 5 Claims
ATOMIZING Alfl ^ — ••-
T6 ^44 ATOMIZING
SPRAY HEAD
HOUSING
1. In a method of producing polysilicon structures down to
a 1 ftm range on substrates containing integrated semiconduc-
tor circuits by plasma etching in a plate reactor with a reactive
gas mixture composed of SFe and an inert gas wherein a sub-
strate to be etched is provided with a 3-layered structure de-
fmed by a layer of silicon dioxide positioned directly on said
substrate, a layer of polysilicon positioned on said silicon diox-
ide layer and a resist mask positioned on said polysilicon layer,
and said substrate is positioned on a grounded electrode, the
improvement comprising:
adjusting the high frequency power for the plate reactor to
values smaller than 0. 1 watts/cm^;
adjusting the gas pressure of the reactive gas mixture in the
reactor to values in the range from 60 through 120 Pa;
adjusting the temperature of the electrode in the plate reac-
tor to values in the range from 20* through 60° C; and
etching said substrate while maintaining the above condi-
tions for a period of time sufficient to attain desired
polysilicon structures.
4,380,490
METHOD OF PREPARING SEMICONDUCTOR
SURFACES
David E. Aspnes, Watchung, and Ambrose A. Studna, Raritan,
^ both of N J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incor-
porated, Murray Hill, NJ.
FUed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,549
Int a.3 C03C 15/00; HOIL 21/306: C03C 25/06
VJS. a. 156-662 9 Claims
1. A method of treating a semiconductor surface comprising
the steps pretreating said surface, said semiconductor being
selected from the group consisting of Si, Ge, Ga-Group V
compounds, and In-Group V compounds, chemomechanically
(wlishing said surface with a mixture of a halogen and an
organic solvent, said mixture consists essentially of bromine
and methanol, said polishing step comprises dUuting said bro-
mine-methanol mixture from 0.05 volume percent bromine to
pure methanol, and stripping residual layers.
1. In a spray dryer apparatus having a housing defming a
spray drying chamber wherein a slurry is dried by contact with
a hot drying gas, a drying gas supply duct having an outlet in
flow communication with said drying chamber through a gas
inlet opening in the roof of said housing, and a spray head
assembly of the type having an annular swirler vane assembly
disposed about the gas inlet in the roof of said spray dryer
housing intermediate the outlet of the drying gas supply duct
and the top of said spray dryer housing thereby defming an
annular flow passageway through which the drying gas passes
from the outlet of the drying gas supply duct into the spray
drying chamber, an atomizing spray head housing disposed
coaxially within the center of said annular swirler vane assem-
bly, said atomizing spray head housing having a floor with a
central opening therein and a flange at its upper end, and an
atomizing spray head disposed at the central opening in the
floor of said atomizing spray head housing and having tip
means extending through the central opening for introducing
the slurry to be dried into said drying chamber; an improved
means for releasably supporting the spray head within said
housing in sealed relationship therewith comprising:
a. an elongated guide tube having a conical outwardly-flared
flange at its lower end adapted to mate with the flange of
said atomizing spray head housing and extending up-
wardly through the drying gas supply duct to terminate in
a capped upper end disposed externally of the drying gas
supply duct;
b. an elongated seal sleeve mounted to and extending down-
ward from said guide tube at the point near where the
lower end of said guide tube flares outwardly, said seal
sleeve forming an extension of the tubular portion of said
guide tube into the interior space of the outwardly-flared
flange thereof;
c. a support tube extending upwardly from said atomizing
spray head into said seal sleeve, said support tube being
slidably translatable within said seal sleeve and said guide
tube so as to permit said support tube and the atomizing
spray head attached thereto to be withdrawn upwardly
through the guide tube to a location exterior of the drying
gas supply duct;
d. means passing through said guide tube for supplying
slurry to said spray head;
e. first seal means disposed between said support tube and
said seal sleeve for providing a gas tight seal between the
interior of said guide tube and the interior of said atomiz-
ing spray head housing; and
f second seal means disposed at the lower end of said spray
676
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
head for providing a gas tight seal between the interior of
said atomizing spray head housing and said spray drying
chamber.
4,380,492
METHOD OF USING A CHISEL FOR A CRUST
BREAKING FAOLITY
Edwin Gut, Steg; Erwin Arnold, Venthone, and Hans Friedli,
Steg, all of Switzerland, assignors to Swiss Aluminium Ltd.,
Chippis, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 184,343, Sep. 5, 1980, Pat. No.
4,317,595. This application Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 323,021
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 10, 1979,
8151/79
Int. aj C25C 3/06. 3/14. 15/08
U.S. a. 204—67 11 Qaims
1. Process for breaking the solidified crust on an electrolytic
cell by operating a crust breaker fitted with a chisel which
comprises providing a chisel having a cross-sectional dimen-
sion and having a vertical sidewall with at least one small,
substantially horizontally extending projection in the lower
region of the vertical sidewall, wherein all surfaces of said
projections extend outwardly substantially less than said cross-
sectional dimension, penetrating the crust with said chisel,
lowering said chisel further at least until the lowest projection
or projections reaches the lower half of the crust to enable
continuous operation without jamming, without projection
deformation and with reduced force.
4,380,493
ANODE
John P. A. Wortiey, Brookwell, and John Woolner, Sutton
Coldfield, both of England, assignors to IM I Kynoch Limited,
Birmingham, England
FUed Not. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,121
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 21, 1980,
8037450
Int a.3 C25C 1/10: C25B 11/04. 11/10
U.S. a. 204—105 M 11 Qaims
4,380,494
VIBRATING SCREEN WITH SELF-SUPPORTING
SCREEN CLOTH
Albert Wilson, Columbia, S.C, assignor to Litton Systems, Inc.,
Columbia, S.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 139,804, Apr. 14, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,545
Int. a.3 B07B 1/48
U.S. a. 209—319 29 Claims
1. A screen panel for use in a vibrating screen; comprising:
(a) screen cloth means formed from a plurality of rod-like
members woven together to form a screen with openings
of predetermined size and configuration; and
(b) truss-like support means arranged beneath and secured to
the underside of said screen cloth means;
(c) said truss-like support means including at least one truss-
like support assembly disposed beneath and secured to
said under surface of said screen cloth means; said truss-
like support assembly; comprising:
(i) a support rod having a major portion thereof spaced
from said under surface of said screen cloth means, and
further having ends directed towards said screen cloth
means, so that extremities of said ends lie in a common
plane with and proximate to ends of said rod-like mem-
bers forming said screen cloth means;
(ii) means securing said extremities of said ends of said
support rod to said ends of said rod-like members;
(iii) support wire means formed into a substantially sinu-
soidal configuration with tips thereof spaced to fill the
space between said under surface of said screen cloth
means and a predetermined surface of said support rod;
and
(iv) means securing said support wire means in said space
between said screen cloth means and said support rod.
1 . An anode for an electrowinning cell comprising a plural-
ity of lead or lead alloy rods, characterised in that the rods are
reinforced with a core of titanium or of a plastics material
inert to the conditions surrounding, in use. the anode, and
having a greater tensile strength than the lead or lead alloy of
the rods.
4,380,495
METHOD OF TREATING SPRAY PAINT COLLECnON
WATER IN PAINT SPRAY BOOTHS AND
COMPOSITION THEREFOR
Donald R. Maher, 130 Nortfadale Dr., Toledo, OUo 43612
FUed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,185
Int a.3 C08L 5/00: C02F 1/56
U.S. Q. 210—728 10 Claims
9. The method of removing paint overspray particles from a
circulating water system employed in paint spray booths, that
method comprising the addition to the water system of an
aqueous concentrate of Kaolin clay, liquid gimi Karaya and
water; said clay and water being in the form of a slurry concen-
trate added to the water system; said concentrate converting
paint particles to a spongy filterable mass.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
677
4,380,496
MECHANICAL DEWATERING PROCESS UTILIZING A
NONUNIFORM SCREW CONVEYOR
Vere MafTet, West Chester, Pa., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, lU.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 22,910, Mar. 22, 1979, Pat. No.
4,237,618, Ser. No. 22,914, Mar. 22, 1979, Pat. No. 4,214,377,
Ser. No. 75,575, Sep. 14, 1979, abandoned, and Ser. No. 92,381,
Not. 8, 1979, abandoned, said Ser. No. 22,910, and Ser. No.
22,914, each is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 891,437, Mar.
29, 1978, Pat. No. 4,160,732, and Ser. No. 909,587, May 25,
1978, Pat. No. 4,193,206, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 777,673, Mar. 8, 1977, Pat. No. 4,128,946, Ser. No. 813,577,
Jul. 7, 1977, Pat No. 4,098,006, Ser. No. 813,578, Jul. 7, 1977,
Pat No. 4,099,336, Ser. No. 844,097, Oct. 20, 1977, Pat No.
4,121,349, Ser. No. 858,879, Dec. 8, 1977, Pat. No. 4,161,825,
and Ser. No. 891,437, , which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 813,577, , said Ser. No. 858,879, is a continuation-in-part of
Ser. No. 813,577, , and Ser. No. 813,578, , said Ser. No. 844,097,
is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 813,578, , said Ser. No.
813,577, and Ser. No. 813,578, each is a continuation-in-part of
Ser. No. 777,673,. This appUcation May 23, 1980, Ser. No.
152 944
Int a.3 d)2F 11/12
U.S. a. 210—780 6 Qaims
.., -+^
4,380,497
AMINES OF ALKOXYDIPHENYL ESTHERS AS
ANTIOXIDANTS AND LUBRICATING OILS AND
GREASES CONTAINING SAME
John T. Roberts, Arlington Heights, 111., assignor to UOP Inc.,
Des Plaines, lU.
FUed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 263,376
Int a.' ClOM 1/38
U.S. a. 252—47.5 20 Claims
1. A method of inhibiting oxidation in lubricating oils and
greases comprising adding thereto an oxidation inhibiting
amount of a material with the structure
— (o)-°-(@r
NHCHzA
where — NHCH2A is at the 2'- or 4'-position, A is a monova-
lent radical whose parent is selected from the group consisting
of unsubstituted and ring-substituted aromatic and heteroaro-
matic rings, and X is an alkyl group containing up to about 18
carbon atoms.
12. A composition comprising a major amount of a lubricat-
ing oil or grease and a minor amount from about 0.05% to
about 5% by weight of a material with the structure,
^^
NHCH2A
1. A mechanical dewatering process which comprises the
steps of:
(a) passing a feed stream which comprises sewage sludge or
peat and which comprises 50 wt.% water into a first end
of a mechanical dewatering zone which comprises a first
screw conveyor which is at least partially^ contained
within a cylindrical porous wall concentric with the first
screw conveyor, with the cylindrical porous wall having
an inner surface and uniformly distributed openings hav-
ing a minimum cross-sectional distance between about
0.00125 cm. and about 0.025 cm., and with the first screw
conveyor comprising a helical blade mounted on a central
shaft, the helical blade having an outer edge which is
separated from the inner surface of the cylindrical porous
wall by a distance of from about 0.08 cm. to about 5.0 cm.,
and with the central shaft having at least two built-up
sections within the cylindrical porous wall along which
the flight depth of the first screw conveyor gradually
decreases due to an increase in the diameter of the central
shaft to provide a compression ratio above 2.5:1.0 along
each built-up section, with the flight depth of the first
screw conveyor increasing by at least a factor of 2.0 at the
termination of the built-up section of the central shaft,
which termination is closer to a second end of the mechan-
ical dewatering zone than to the first end of the mechani-
cal dewatering zone;
(b) pressurizing the feed stream within the cylindrical po-
rous wall to a superatmospheric pressure by routing the
first screw conveyor;
(c) withdrawing water radially outward through the cylin-
drical porous wall;
(d) transporting solids derived from the feed stream which
are located in the grooves of the helical blade of the first
screw conveyor to a second end of the first screw con-
veyor; and,
(e) withdrawing a dewatering zone solids stream which
comprises at least 35 wt.% solids from the second end of
the mechanical dewatering zone.
where — NHCH2A is at the 2- or 4'-position, A is a monova-
lent radical whose parent is selected from the group consisting
of unsubstituted and ring-substituted aromatic and heteroaro-
matic rings, and X is an alkyl group containing up to about 18
carbon atoms.
4,380,498
SULFURIZED, TRANSESTERIFIED OIL ADDITIVES
AND THEIR USE IN A LUBRICATING OIL AND A FUEL
Karl P. Kammann, Jr., Crown Point Ind.; Marvin J. Den
Herder, Olympia Fields, and Terrence L. Wagner, Crete
Township, Will County, both of III., assignors to Ferro Corpo-
ration, Cleveland, Ohio
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,544
Int a.5 ClOM 1/20. 1/38; ClOL 1/18. 1/24
U.S. a. 252-48.6 ♦! Claims
1. A sulfurized, triglyceride additive composition compris-
ing a sulfurized, transesterified triglyceride wherein the total
acid component of the triglyceride includes from about 5 to
about 50 mole % polybasic carboxylic acids.
4380499
SULFURIZED FATTY OIL ADDITIVES AND THEIR USE
IN A LUBRICATING OIL AND A FUEL
Karl P. KamiMWH, Jr., Crown Point Ind.* OBd Marvin J. Den
Herder, Olympia Fields, HI., aMignors to Ferro Corporation,
Qeveland, Ohio
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,545
Int a.J ClOM 1/20. 1/38: ClOL 1/18. 1/24
U.S. a. 252—48.6 35 Claims
1. A sulfurized. triglyceride additive composition, compris-
ing a sulfurized, transesterified triglyceride wherein the total
acid component of the triglyceride comprises no less than
about 35 mole % saturated aliphatic acids and no more than
about 65 mole % unsaturated fatty acids, said total acid compo-
nent being further characterized as comprising:
(a) more than about 20 mole % of mono-unsaturated acids;
678
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(b) less than about 15 mole % of poly-unsaturated fatty
acids;
(c) more than about 20 mole % saturated aliphatic acids
having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, including more than about 10
mole % saturated aliphatic acids having 6 to 14 carbon
atoms; and
(d) less than about 15 mole % saturated aliphatic acids hav-
ing 1 8 or more carbon atoms.
4,380,500
BRANCHED CHAIN OLEFINIC ALCOHOLS, THIOLS,
ESTERS AND ETHERS, ORGANOLEPTIC USES
THEREOF, PROCESSES FOR PREPARING SAME AND
INTERMEDIATES THEREOF
Richard M. Boden, Monmouth Beach, N.J., assignor to Interna-
tional Flavors A Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 212,887, Dec. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,318,934. This appUcation Not. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 322,731
Int. a.3 CUD 3/50. 9/44
U.S. a. 252—174.11 6 Claims
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
solid or liquid anionic, cationic, nonionic or zwitterionic deter-
gent comprising the step of adding to a solid or liquid anionic,
cationic, nonionic or zwitterionic detergent base an aroma
augmenting or enhancing quantity of at least one branched
chain olefinic chalcogen derivative having a structure selected
from the group consisting of:
OH
OH
^-t^"WI^
wherein one of dashed lines represents a carbon-carbon double
bond and each of the other of the dashed lines represent car-
bon-carbon single bonds.
4,380,502
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF POLYETHER
POLYOLS
Hanns P. Miiller, Odenthal, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Claus-Dieter
Sommerfeld, Pittsburgh, Pa., and Gemot Becker, Dormagen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer AktiengeseUschaft,
Bayerwerk, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,247
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 28,
1980, 3012001
Int a.3 C07H 3/04: C09K 3/00
U.S. a. 252—182 6 Claims
1. A process for the production of polyether polyols having
an average hydroxyl functionality of at least 3 and a hydroxy!
number of from 28 to 1000 by alkoxylating a mixture compris-
ing:
(a) from 20 to 80% by weight of sucrose (based on the sum
of (a) and (b)), and
(b) from 80 to 20% by weight of formitol having an average
hydroxyl functionality of at least 3 (based on the sum of (a)
and (b)).
4,380,503
PROCESS FOR PREPARING OIL-IN-WATER
EMULSION
Gotz Koemer, Essen; Gerd Sanger, Heiligenhaus-Isenbiigel;
Hans-Ferdi Fink, and Friedhelm Grassmann, both of Essen,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Th. Goldschmidt
AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,844
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 1,
1980, 3024870
Int. a.5 BOIJ 13/00
U.S. a. 252—314 3 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of flne-particulate, stable
emulsions of the oil-in-water type, which comprises
(a) distributing the quantity of emulsifier required to achieve
a stable emulsion in about 0.5 to 3 times the amount of
water by weight, based upon the emulsifier weight,
(b) introducing the oleic phase to be emulsified into the
foregoing dispersion and homogenizing it under the effect
of high shear stresses until a uniform gel is formed,
(c) forcing the gel so obtained through a slotted disk, pro-
vided with a plurality of holes less than 10 mm in diame-
ter, into the remaining amount of water, and stirring the
emulsion so obtained while avoiding high shear stresses
until the gel particles are completely dissolved.
4,380,501
GAS SCAVENGER AGENTS FOR CONTAINERS OF
SOUD CHLOROISOCYANURATES
John A. Wojtowicz, Cheshire, and Andree M. B. Gergo, East
HaTeo, both of Conn., assignors to Olin Corporation, New
Haven, Conn.
FUed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,574
Int a? CUD 3/48. 3/24. 3/395
MS. a. 252— 186J4 14 Claims
1. In a container of a solid chloroisocyanurate composition,
the improvement which comprises enclosing therein a gas
scavenging agent consisting essentially of a mixture of an
alkaline earth metal sulfate, an alkali metal bicarbonate, and
carbon.
4,380,504
Vi-EMULSANS
David L. Gutnick, Ramat Aviv; Eugene Rosenberg, Raanana;
Igal Belsky, Ramat Aviv, and Zosim Zinaida, Kefar Sava, aU
of Israel, assignors to Petroleum Fermentations N.V., Nether-
lands AntUles
Division of Ser. No. 124^1, Feb. 22, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 146,053
Int C\? BOIF 17/30. 17/34. 17/52
U.S. a. 252—356 3 Claims
1. The O-deacylated extracellular protein-associated micro-
bial polysaccharides (herein collectively called "i/f-emulsans")
obtained from the emulsans produced by Acinetobacter Sp.
ATCC 31012 and its mutants, the protein-free components of
such i/f-emulsans being completely N-acylated heteropolysac-
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
679
charides made up of major amounts of D-galactosamine and an
aminouronic acid and containing from 0 to 1 percent by weight
10 IS !0
UMTS ptr ml
of fatty acid esters in which, when present, the fatty acids
contain from about 10 to about 18 carbon atoms.
4,380,505
APPARATUS FOR PRODUaNG AEROSOL PRODUCT
Augustinus J. M. Wittenhorst, Westerburg, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignor to von Treu AG, Zug, Switzerland
PCX No. PCr/DE79/00136, § 371 Date Jul. 11, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 10, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00973, PCT Pub.
Date May 15, 1980
PCT Filed Nov. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 202,448
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 11,
1978 2849074
Int. a.3 BOIF 5/00: BOIJ 13/00
U.S. a. 252—359 R 3 Qaims
4,380,506
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING PRESERVAHVES
Yukichi Kimura, Narashino, and Takeshi Kanamori, Chiba, both
of Japan, assignors to Lion Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,249
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 8, 1980, 55-45824
Int. a.3 C09K 15/34
U.S. a. 252—398 8 Claims
1. A process for producing a preservative, comprising the
steps of:
preparing a starting material selected from the group con-
sisting of herb family spices, residues obtained after the
recovery of essential oils from herb family spices, oleores-
ins extracted from herb family spices with a polar solvent,
and oleoresins extracted from herb family spices with a
non-polar solvent and associated residues, said herb family
spices being selected from the group consisting of sage,
rosemary, majooram, thyme, oregano and basil;
subjecting the starting material to extraction with a solvent
mixture of a polar solvent compatible with water and a
non-polar solvent selected from the group consisting of
n-hexane, petroleum ether, ligroin, cyclohexane, carbon
tetrachloride, chloroform, dichloromethane, 1,2-
dichloroethane, toluene, benzene and mixtures thereof,
the ratio by volume of the polar solvent to the non-polar
solvent ranging from 2:98 to 50:50;
adding an adsorbent to said extractive in an amount of
1-20% by weight based upon the weight of the starting
material;
adding water to the extractive after said adsorbent is sepa-
rated;
allowing the polar solvent to migrate into the water;
separating the mixture into a water/polar solvent phase and
a non-polar solvent phase having a highly oil-soluble
active fraction dissolved and a substantially oil-insoluble
active fraction precipitated; and
recovering the non-polar solvent phase as a preservative.
1. Apparatus suitable for the production of an aerosol prod-
uct consisting of active substance, propellant and solvent
wherein the propellant consists exclusively of a noble gas
which is helium, neon, argon, krypton or mixtures thereof by a
process comprising bringing together the active substance and
the solvent under pressure, charging overhead to a pressure
vessel and seeping therein, while at the same time introducing
into the pressure vessel a compressed noble gas and adding the
noble gas by doses to the active substance-solvent mixture and
subsequently collecting the newly developed mixture and
feeding it to a bottling plant, said apparatus comprising a mix-
ing vessel (1, 2) for the storage of active substance, a mixing
vessel (3) for the storage of solvent, whereby the mixing ves-
sels (1, 2; 3) have feed lines (4, 5; 6) separated from one another
and are provided with discharge lines (7, 8; 9) which converge
to a common conveying line (10), furthermore characterized
by a pressure tank (12) with an inlet connection (11) overhead,
which is connected to the common conveying line (10), an
additional inlet connection (13) overhead, to which a compres-
sion tank (12a) for noble gas has been connected as well as a
discharge connection (14) which is disposed at a distance from
the bottom of the pressure vessel (12).
4,380,507
CATALYSTS FOR POLYMERIZING ETHYLENE
Luciano Noristi, and Giovanni Banizzi, both of Ferrara, Italy,
assignors to Montedison S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 802^67, Jun. 2, 1977, abandoned. This
appUcation Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,419
Oaims priority, application Italy, Jun. 3, 1976, 23903 A/76
Int 0.3 C08F 4/02. 10/02
U.S. O. 252—429 B 4 Claims
1. The process for preparing components of catalysts for
polymerizing ethylene or mixtures thereof with minor amounts
of alpha-olefms of formula CH2=CHR, in which R is an alkyl
radical containing from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, said components
comprising the product obtained by reacting a solid haloge-
nated Ti compound selected from the group consisting of
TiCb and Ti halogen-alcoholates with a Grignard compound
having the formula RMgX, in which R is an alkyl, cycloalkyl
or aryl radical containing from 2 to 16 carbon atoms, and X is
CI or Br, in an aliphatic hydrocarbon, at a temperature be-
tween 35* and 40* C. and a Grignard compound/titanium
compound molar ratio equal to at least 7, isolating the solid
reaction product, and reacting it with a halogenating agent at
a temperature between 0* and 150* C. and a halogenating
agent/Grignard compound molar ratio higher than 0.5, said
halogenating agent being selected from the group consisting of
TiCU, SiCU and PCI3.
680
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
ULTRA HIGH EmOENCY CATALYST FOR
POLYMERIZING OLEHNS
Randall S. Shipley, Alvia, and Donald F. Birkelbach, Angleton,
both of Tex., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Mid-
land, Mich.
Filed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,903
Int. a.3 C08F 4/64
U.S. a. 252—431 C 17 Qaims
1. A reaction product or complex formed from an admixture
of
(a) a reaction product or complex formed from a mixture of
(i) at least one transition metal compound represented by
the empirical formulae Tm(OR)»pX;t->N TmOXji_2 or
Tm(0R);t_20 wherein Tm is a transition metal selected
from groups IVB, VB or VIB; each R is independently
a hydrocarbyl group having from 1 to about 20 carbon
atoms; each X is independently a halogen; x has a value
equal to the valence of Tm and y has a value from 1 to
the valence of Tm; and
(ii) at least one non^metallic oxygen-containing compound
selected from the group consisting of molecular oxy-
gen, air, alcohols, ketones, aldehydes, carboxylic acids,
esters of carboxylic acids, peroxides, water and mix-
tures thereof; and wherein said mixture of (i) and (ii) is
subjected to a temperature of from about — 50° C. to
about 110° C. for a time sufficient to effect a color
change; and
(b) a reducing alkylating agent represented by the empirical
formula M'Kg-b^b wherein M' is a metal selected from
the group consisting of Al, Li, Mg or B; X is a halogen,
preferably chlorine or bromine; each R is independently
an alkyl group having from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms; a
has a value equal to the valence of the metal M' and b has
a value of from zero up to the valence of the metal M'
minus 1; and wherein components (a) and (b) are mixed in
proportions such that the atomic ratio of M':Tm is from
about 0.1:1 to about 5:1 and the atomic ratio of 0:Tm is
from about 0.1:1 to about 4:1.
4,380,510
METHOD OF MAKING LAYERED CATALYSTS
Michael J. D'Aniello, Jr., Rochester, Mich., assignor to General
Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Not. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 318,132
Int. C1.3 BOIJ 21/04. 23/38
U.S. a. 252—466 PT 4 Oainis
1. A method of selectively placing noble metal catalyst
material on a thin layer of a porous, high surface area alumina
or base metal-containing alumina carrier particle where the
layer may either be at the apparent outer surface of the particle
or, if desired, submerged below the outer surface, comprising
saturating the pores of said particle with liquid Ci to C3
dialkyl ketone,
if necessary, blocking absorbent pore surface sites in said
particle outwardly of the desired position of said layer by
applying thereto an acid blocking agent,
contacting said particle with a solution of a noble metal
catalyst material in a substantially water- free Ci to C3
dialkyl ketone whereby the catalyst material is strongly
absorbed on said particle on a layer beginning with the
outermost unblocked sites and extending inwardly into
said particle a depth determined by the amount of noble
metal material in said solution, and
calcining said particle to remove said blocking agent, if
present, and to fix said noble metal catalyst.
4,380,509
METHOD FOR PRODUCING A CATALYST FOR THE
HYDRATION OF OLEHNS
August Sommen Wilhelm Heitmann, both of Heme, and Rainer
Briicker, Castrop-Rauxel, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Chemische Werke Huls AG, Marl, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,257
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 26,
1980, 3011610
Int. a.3 BOIJ 37/02. 21/12
U.S. a. 252—453 14 Qaims
1. A method for producing a carrier for a catalyst compris-
ing the steps of:
mixing a first solution containing a soluble salt of aluminum
and a second solution containing a soluble salt of silicic
acid in a ratio that gives a precipitate comprising alumi-
num silicate having a weight ratio of Al203:Si02 of 1:5 to
1:7;
forming said precipitate into a carrier body;
consolidating said carrier body by heating; and
treating said carrier body with an acid, wherein the AI2O3
content of said carrier body is reduced to 1-5% by weight.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein 5-15% of at least one
oxide of the Group VI metals is added to said precipitate prior
to forming said carrier body.
13. The method of claim 1, wherein said acid is hydrochloric
acid.
14. The method of claim 1, wherein said soluble salt of
aluminum is aluminum sulfate and said soluble salt of silicic
acid is sodium silicate.
4380,511
PURinCATION OF BOVINE THROMBIN
Frank J. Mannuzza, Peotone, and Joseph G. Montalto, Bradley,
both of 111., assignors to Miles Laboratories, Inc., Elkhart,
Ind.
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,236
Int. a.3 C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 260—112 B 6 Qaims
1. A method for removing pyrogenic material from pyro-
gen-containing bovine thrombin which comprises the steps of
forming a complex of a dye having the structure:
O NH2
where R 1 and R2 are hydrogen or SO3H, and R3 is CI or O; and
a dextran which has been cross-linked with epichlorohydrin to
produce a three-dimensional network of polysaccharides,
equilibrating the complex with a low ionic strength salt solu-
tion, contacting said complex with said pyrogen-containing
bovine thrombin, washing said thrombin with a low ionic
strength salt solution to remove said pyrogens, and recovering
pyrogen-free bovine thrombin.
4,380,512
2/3-CHLOROMETHYL-2a-METHYLPENAM-3a-CAR-
BOXYLIC AOD SULFONE AND SALTS AND ESTERS
THEREOF
William J. Gottstein, Fayetteville, N.Y., assignor to Bristol-
Myers Company, New York, N.Y.
Continiiation-in-part of Ser. No. 214,831, Dec. 11, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 113,894,
Jan. 21, 1980, abandoned. This application Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No.
271,744
Int a.3 C07D 499/00: A61K 31/425
U.S. a. 260— 245 J R 17 Claims
1. The acid having the formula
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
o o
\^
1 11MCH3
^ ^ VOOH
0
r y-cH2P(o-
or of the general formula lib
681
lu
alkyl)2
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of said acid or an ester of
said acid having the formula
X
(I y-CH2P(0-aIkyl)2
lib
CCXDR
wherein R is phenacyl, acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl,
o-acetoxyethyl, a-acetoxybenzyl, a-pivaloyloxyethyl, 3-
phthalidyl, 5-indanyl, methoxymethyl, benzoyloxymethyl,
a-ethylbutyryloxymethyl, propionyloxymethyl, valerylox-
ymethyl, isobutyryloxymethyl, 6-[(R)-2-amino-2-
phenylacetamido]-3 , 3-dimethy l-7-oxo-4-thia- 1 -azabicy-
clo[3.2.01heptane-2-carbonyloxymethyl or 6-[(R)-2-amino-2-p-
hydroxyphenylacetamido]-3,3-dimethyl-7-oxo-4-thia- 1 -
azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptane-2-carbonyloxymethyl.
where X and Y have the above meanings in the presence of an
alkali, in a solvent from which the monocondensation product
of terephthaldehyde and the phosphonate compound precipi-
tates to form a first reaction product containing the monocon-
densation product and thereafter completing the reaction to
prepare a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula (I)
by reacting the first reaction product in the presence of alkali
and said solvent with a different phosphonate compound of
formula Ila or lib, with the proviso that at least one compound
of formula Ila and a compound of formula lib are reacted
successively in the process.
4,380,513
INERT ROSIN ESTERS AND PRCXJESS FOR
PREPARING THE SAME
Erwin R. Ruckel, Wilton, and Martin Epstein, Norwalk, both of
Conn., assignors to Arizona Chemical Company, Fairlawn,
N.J.
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,700
Int. a.3 C09F 7/QO, 1/00
U.S. a. 260—104 10 Qaims
1. A modified rosin ester of a primary polyhydric alcohol,
said ester having 50 to 95 percent of the hydroxyl groups of the
polyhydric alcohol esterified with rosin and the remaining
hydroxyl groups esterified with lower aliphatic monocarbox-
ylic acid or acid chloride or acid anhydride and no more than
negligible residual hydroxyl content.
4,380,515
N-SUBSTTTUTED
6-AMINO-DIBENZ[C,E][l,2]OXAPHOSPHORINES
Michael Rasberger, and Samuel Evans, both of Rieben, Switzer-
land, assi£ ors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y,
Continuation of Ser. No. 104,335, Dec. 17, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 27,336, Apr. 5, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,807
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 14, 1978,
4026/78
Int. a.5 C07F 9/46. 9/65
U.S. CI. 260—936 2 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
4,380,514
PREPARATION OF OPTICAL BRIGHTENERS
Guenther Seybold, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,227
Int. a.3 C07C 121/64, 64/767; D06L 3/12; CUD 3/42
U.S. a. 260-465 H ^ Claims
1. A process for the preparation of an unsymetrically substi-
tuted optical brightener compound of the general formula
P-N(R3)R4
Y Y^^
/H-c„=c„-Q-c„=c„^
where X and Y independently of one another are hydrogen,
fluorine, chlorine, cyano, Ci-Cio-alkoxycarbonyl, unsubsti-
tuted or substituted carbamyl or sulfamyl, a sulfonic acid aryl
ester group, Ci-Cio-alkylsulfonyl or phenyl-sulfonyl, and at
least one of X and Y is not hydrogen, and of mixtures of such
optical brighteners free of p,p'-substituted compounds, which
comprises reacting in a first step terephthaladehyde with a
phosphonate compound of the general formula I la
wherein
I R3 is hydrogen, C1-C12 alkyl, cyclohexyl or the group Q,
where Q is
P-,
R4 is C1-C12 alkyl, cyclohexyl or a group of the formula
682
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
— Rs— N— R3
temperature of the air, and consequently the temperature of the
water cooled inside the cooler, resumes a sufficiently high
where
R3 and Q have the meanings given above,
R5 is C2-C6 alkylene,
R3 and R4 together with the N atom to which they are
attached form a piperidine or morpholine ring, or
R3 and R4 together are the radical — CH2CH2— N(-
Q)— CH2CH2— wherein Q has the meaning given above.
2. 6-(N,N-Di-isopropyl-amino)-dibenz[c,e][l,2]oxaphospho-
rine, according to claim 1.
4,380,516
CARBURETOR
Hiroshi Matsuzaka, Hanuunatsu, assignor to Yamaha Hat- temperature to avoid formation of ice inside the cooler, melt-
sudoki Kabushiki Kaisha, Iwata, Japan '"S the said curtains of ice.
Filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,270
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 30, 1980, 55-136521 . -on >«o
4,380,518
U.S. a. 261—23 A
Int. a.3 F02M 9/06
METHOD OF FRODUaNG SOLDER SPHERES
""* Richard A. Wydro, Sr., Hamilton Township, Mercer County,
N.J., assignor to Western Electric Company, Inc., New York,
N.Y.
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 337,049
Int. a.3 BOIJ 2/06
U.S. a. 264—13 14 Qaims
[Fa
1. In an induction system for an internal combustion engine
having two intake passage^ serving the same chamber and a
two-barrel carburetor having each of its barrels disposed gen-
erally horizontally and communicating with and serving a
respective one of said intake passages, each of said carburetor
barrels having a respective fuel discharge circuit, the improve-
ment comprising said carburetor having a single fuel bowl
positioned adjacent and extending beneath both of said barrels,
a fuel well depending centrally into said fuel bowl and having
a main jet positioned at its lower end, said fuel well serving
both of said carburetor barrel fuel discharge circuits.
4,380,517
ICE PREVENTING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR
GAS AND LIQUID CONTACT MEANS OF AN
ATMOSPHERIC COOLING TOWER
Jacques G. P. E. Bosne, Viroflay, France, assignor to Hamon-
Sobelco, S.A., Brussels, Belgium
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,752
Int. C\? BOIF 3/04
U.S. a. 261—142 9 Claims
1. A process for avoiding, in a cold period, the formation of
ice inside a cooler having lower air inlet apertures and which
employs atmospheric air and a freezable liquid stream, charac-
terized in that said process comprises providing said air inlet
apertures with vertical trellises which extend in a part of said
apertures from the top of said apertures downwardly, causing,
in a cold period, cold water to stream along said trellises so as
to form under controlled conditions along said trellises cur-
tains of ice which partly close said apertures and, when the
1. A method of making metal spheres having non-oxidized
surfaces, comprising:
introducing a metal having a low melting temperature into a
liquid flux comprising an activator and antioxidant, the
flux being maintained at a temperature so as to cause metal
spheres to form, the state of the metal and the respective
temperature of the metal and flux being such that spheres
of the metal are formed when the metal is introduced into
the flux.
4,380,519
PROCESS FOR EMBOSSING POLYMERIC SUBSTRATES
BY USING A COMPOSITE STRUCTURE OF AN
AROMATIC POLY AMIDE FABRIC COATED WITH A
FLUOROSILICONE RUBBER
Richard H. Carlson, Clinton, Conn., and Gerald L. Gatcomb,
Wilmington, Del., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and
Company, Wilmington, Del.
Division of Ser. No. 249,225, Mar. 30, 1981, Pat. No. 4,346,140.
This appUcation Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,472
Int a.5 B29C 17/00
U.S. a. 264—26 7 Claims
1. A process for embossing flexible polymeric substrates in a
dielectric heating press having a platen and a design fixture by
placing a composite sheet structure between the substrate
being embossed and the platen of the press and embossing the
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
683
substrate wherein the composite sheet structure comprises a
layer about 2-30 mils thick of a fluorosilicone rubber firmly
adhered to both side of an aromatic polyamide fabric and
m^jfjWA^.
having a dielectric constant of about 4-8 and a dissipation
factor of about 0.015-003 where the dielectric constant and
dissipation factor are determined at one megahertz frequency
according to ASTMD-1531.
4,380,520
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG HOLLOW HBRES
HAVING A UNIFORM WALL THICKNESS AND A
NON-UNIFORM CROSS-SECnONAL AREA
John A. Taylor, Furlong, Pa., assignor to Extracorporeal Medi-
cal Specialties, Inc., King of Prussia, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 19,972, Mar. 12, 1979, Pat. No. 4,291,096.
This application Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 167,900
Int. a.3 DOID 5/20
U.S. a. 264— 40.3 HQaims
4380,521
METHOD TO PRODUCE A
POLYTETRA-FLUOROETHYLENE DIAPHRAGM
Carlos M. Moreno; Robert D. Bridges, and Andre J. Uzee, all of
Baton Rouge, La., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company,
Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 877,060, Feb. 13, 1978, Pat. No.
4,224,130, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 777,868, Mar. 15,
1977, abandoned. This application Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No.
189,977
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264-49 15 Qaims
1. A method to form an electrolyte permeable diaphragm for
an electrolytic cell for producing chlorine and an alliali metal
hydroxide comprising:
(a) combining about 1 to about 50 parts by weight polytetra-
fluoroethylene powder having an average particle size of
about 100 to about 1,000 microns diameter with about 50
to about 98 parts by weight of a solid pore-forming pow-
der having an average particle size of about 0. 1 to about
100 microns diameter, and about 10 to about 1,000 parts by
weight of a nonaqueous liquid capable of wetting the
polytetrafluoroethylene and incapable of dissolving sub-
stantial amounts of the pore-forming powder;
(b) mixing the combination with a shearing means suffi-
ciently to reduce the average particle sizes of the polytet-
rafluoroethylene to leas than about 50 microns diameter;
(c) removing a portion of the liquid from the mixture of step
(b) until the mixture has a liquid to solid weight ratio of
about 0.05 to about 1;
(d) rolling the compressed mixture a plurality of times to
form a sheet;
(e) heating the sheet sufficiently to sinter the sheet material;
and
(0 removing at least a portion of the solid pore-forming
powder from the sintered sheet by contacting the sheet
with a liquid medium to produce a porous polytetrafluoro-
ethylene sheet with a thickness of from about 5 to about
100 mils, an average pore size of from about 0. 1 to about
100 microns, a gas f>ermeability of from about 1 to about
100 seconds, a liquid permeability factor of from about 1
to about 60, and a tensile strength of from about 100 to
about 1000 pounds per square inch.
1. A method for producing a hollow fiber having a hollow
core extending continuously throughout the length thereof,
said fiber having a uniform wall thickness and a non-uniform
cross-sectional area, said method comprising
(a) providing a tube-in-orifice spinneret comprising a hous-
ing having a chamber communicating with an outer sur-
face thereof and a hollow tube having a continuous lumen
extending the length thereof secured within said chamber,
the walls of said chamber and the outer surface of said
tube defining an annular space through which a fiber
forming material may be extruded;
(b) supplying a fiber forming material to said chamber at a
constant mean flow rate while simultaneously varying the
pressure on said supplied fiber forming material;
(c) extruding said fiber forming material through said annu-
lar space to form a hollow core extrudate;
(d) supplying a fluid at a constant mean flow rate to the
lumen of said hollow tube while simultaneously varying
the pressure on said supplied fluid, the pressure variations
on said supplied fluid being synchronized with the pres-
sure variations on said supplied fiber forming material;
(e) removing from the exit of said spinneret said extrudate
with said fluid contained in the hollow core thereof;
(0 converting said fiber forming material to fiber form.
4,380,522
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES
FROM COMPOSITION COMPRISING MODIHED
POLYOLEHNES AND CELLULOSIC HBRES
Pierre Georlette, Hamme-Mille, and Rene Bouteille, Braioe-
TAllend, botii of Belgium, assignors to Solvay A Cie., Brus-
sels, Belgium
Continuation of Ser. No. 65,881, Aug. 13, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,556
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 11, 1978, 78 23947
Int a.3 B29D 7/14
VJS. a. 264—175 7 ClalflM
1. Process for manufacture of a shaped article from a po-
lyolefine composition comprising between 30 and 70% by
weight of a polyolefine which is a high density polyethylene
modified by means of a polar monomer and between 30 and
70% by weight of cellulosic fibres, comprising: subjecting the
polyolefine composition to a malaxating operation carried out
at a temperature which is at least 40* C. above the melting
point of the polyolefine, before the composition is moulded.
684
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,523
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A COMPOSITE
MATERIAL
DsTJd J. Lind, Breadsall, and Joyce Richards, Ambergate, both
of England, assignors to Rolls-Royce Limited, London, En-
gland
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,976
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 10, 1980,
8029268
Int. Q.3 B29D 3/02; B29F 5/00
U.S. a. 264—257 6 Oaims
1. A methcxl of manufacturing a substantially completely
void free composite material comprising the steps of
(a) applying a first high temperature resistant thermoplastic
^ polymer to at least one layer of reinforcing filaments in an
amount sufficient to increase the weight of said filaments
by up to about 5% and to lightly bind said carbon fila-
ments together and to retain the configuration of said
filaments,
(b) forming a structure of said at least one layer of the thus
bound filaments and sheets of a second high temperature
resistant polymer so that one layer of said bound filaments
is interposed between sheets of said second thermoplastic
polymer and to retain the configuration of said filaments,
wherein the first thermoplastic polymer is a polycarbon-
ate, a polysulphone, a polyethersulphone or a polyimide
and the second thermoplastic polymer is an aromatic
polyetherether ketone,
(c) compressing said structure at a temperature at which said
first thermoplastic polymer does not thermally decompose
and at which said second thermoplastic polymer is suffi-
ciently mobile to impregnate said layer of reinforcing
filaments, said temf)erature being insufficient to soften said
filaments,
(d) maintaining said compression at said temperature for at
least one hour to cause said second thermoplastic polymer
to impregnate said at least one layer of bound filaments
and for at least a major portion of said first thermoplastic
polymer to diffuse into said second thermoplastic poly-
mer,
(e) cooling the thus formed composite under compression in
order to avoid any distortion thereof, and subsequently
(0 discontinuing said compression thereby producing a
composite material that is substantially completely void
free.
4,380 524
CEMENT APPLYING MACHINE AND METHOD
Sinville Runions, BooneTiile, Miss., assignor to International
Shoe Machine Corporation, Nashua, N.H.
FUed Apr. 6, 1979, Ser. No. 27,561
Int. a.3 B05C 3/02
U.S. a. 264-263 ^ 3 Qaims
1. A machine, operable on a shoe assembly formed of a last
having an insole located on its bottom and an upper having a
margin mounted thereon with a portion of the upper margin
being wiped against and secured to the insole and with an
unwiped portion of the upper margin having a boundary with
said wiped margin portion, extending rearwardly of said wiped
margin portion, projecting away from the insole periphery so
as to form a comer between said unwiped margin portion and
the corresponding portion of the insole periphery and with a
segment of the upper margin at said boundary overhanging the
insole, for applying cement in said comer comprising: a shoe
assembly support for supporting the shoe assembly bottom-up
with said wiped margin portion being forward of said unwiped
margin portion; a heightwise extending nozzle, located above
the shoe assembly, having a laterally projecting tip through
which cement may be extruded; nozzle mounting means
mounting the nozzle for swinging movement about its height-
wise extending axis; forward-rearward moving means for
effecting forward-rearward movements of the nozzle between
a rearward nozzle position that is rearward of said boundary
and a forward nozzle position that is located at said boundary;
heightwise moving means for effecting heightwise movements
of the nozzle between an upper nozzle position wherein the
nozzle is spaced above the bottom of the shoe assembly and a
lower nozzle position wherein the nozzle is in engagement
with the bottom of the shoe assembly; means for initially caus-
ing the forward-rearward moving means and the heightwise
moving means to locate the nozzle in said rearward and lower
nozzle positions; means for thereafter causing the forward-
rearward moving means to move the nozzle to the forward
nozzle position in a cement applying stroke; means for so
constraining the nozzle during the cement applying stroke that
the nozzle tip is in said comer with the nozzle tip projecting
outwardly of the nozzle and being beneath said margin seg-
ment at the end of the cement applying stroke; means effective
during the cement applying stroke to extrude cement through
the nozzle tip into said comer; means, effective subsequent to
the completion of the cement applying stroke, to so swing the
nozzle about said axis as to move the nozzle tip rearwardly and
inwardly and thus move the nozzle tip out from under said
margin segment; and means for thereafter causing the height-
wise moving means to raise the nozzle to the upper nozzle
position.
4,380,525
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF A BLANK FOR
SUBSEQUENT SHAPING BY BLOW-MOLDING
Kjell M. Jakobsen, Hokviigen, and Oaes T. Nilsson, Pramviigen,
both of Sweden, assignors to PLM Aktiebolag, Malmo, Swe-
den
FUed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 154,888
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 11, 1979, 7905043
Int. a.3B29C; 7/07
U.S. a. 264—521 10 Claims
30b 2CD 13« 30a
1. A process for the manufacture of a tubular pre-moulding
from a thermoplastic material comprising the steps of axially
stretching a tube of the thermoplastic material to a substan-
tially reduced material thickness in at least a central zone of a
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
68S
tube while substantially maintaining the diameter of the tube in
the axially stretched section in said central zone, the reduction
being by a factor sufficient to cause yielding and orienting of
the material substantially in the axial direction of the future
pre-moulding, the axial stretching of the tube being effected at
a temperature not greater than the glass transition temperature
of the thermoplastic material, heating the material in one of the
oriented zones to a temperature above the glass transition
temperature and expanding said material in the radial direction
of the tube until it makes contact with mould walls to form a
mouth part with adjacent neck sections of the pre-moulding,
cooling the material to a temperature below the glass transition
temperature, heating the material in at least one end of the tube
to a temperature above the glass transition temperature, and
reshaping said end to form the closure of the pre-moulding.
4,380,526
FORMING NON-CYLINDRICAL ARTICLES FROM
PREFORMS OF POLYALKYLENE TEREPHTHALATE
Punishottam D. Agrawal, South Windsor, Conn., assignor to
Monsanto Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 971,398, Dec. 20, 1978, Pat. No.
4,254,079. This appUcation Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,474
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 3,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B29C 77/07
U.S. a. 264—537 9 Qaims
24
(5a
ze>
20b
20(X.
1. In the method of forming a molecularly oriented hollow
article having a non-round cross section of substantially oval
or substantially triangular or like cross section from a preform
of thermoplastic material, which includes distending the pre-
form in a mold while at molecular orientation temperature,
the improvements wherein the thermoplastic material is
moldable polyalkylene terephthalate having an inherent
viscosity of at least about O.SS, said preform region form-
ing said cross section is not treated before said distending
for the purpose of establishing a circumferential tempera-
ture difference therein, and the distending comprises, in
combination, the steps of:
expanding first portions of said region against mold wall
portions at the end of a minor axis of a cavity conforming
to said non-round cross section to form relatively thick
sections thereat while expanding other portions a greater
extent than said first portions toward wall portions at the
end of a major axis of said cavity thereby establishing a
strain hardened pattern in the material wherein such ex-
panded other portions are strain hardened greater than
said thick sections; and
drawing material out of said thick sections as such expanded
other portions of greater strain hardened level continue to
expand toward the mold wall portions at the end of the
major axis;
limiting the comer definition ratio to between about 3 to
about 9 and the circular deviation ratio to no greater than
about 2.4 at the cross section during said distending;
and controlling said distending according to the relations:
% average axial stretch (A) =
-continued
[article length minus preform length] times 100
preform length minus preform neck fmish length
% maximum radial stretch (B) =
[maximum planar distance to mold from preform axis
times two] minus [preform outside diameter]
times 100
preform outside diameter
wherein:
A is between about IS to about 100; and
B is no greater than about 334;
thereby forming said article having reduced wall thickness
variability at the non-round cross section in comparison
with an article having the same cross section formed of
thermoplastic material which does not strain harden dur-
ing distension.
4,380,527
STANDARD nSSION PRODUCT EMISSION DEVICE
FOR DETECTING FAILED FUEL ELEMENTS IN A
NUCLEAR REACTOR
Jean Graftieaux, Chatenay Malabry, and Rene Donguy, Ver-
rieres le Buisson, both of France, assignors to Commissariat a
I'Energie Atomique, Paris, France
FUed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,291
Qaims priority, application France, Aug. 28, 1979, 79 21543
Int. a.3 G21C 77/00
U.S. a. 376—245 3 Claims
1. In a standard fission product emission device, for detect-
ing failed fuel elements in a nuclear reactor of the type cooled
by pressurised water, said reactor comprising a pressure-resist-
ant vessel and a core constituted by fuel element assemblies,
a hollow rod is provided, adapted to be inserted into said
vessel and defining a chamber divided into a first chamber
and a second chamber located at the end of the rod by a
constriction creating a first drop in pressure, said second
chamber comprising on its wall a deposit or a metal plate
of radioactive material and communicating with the vessel
of the reactor, when said device is in position, by a nozzle
creating a second drop in pressure greater than the one
created by said constriction, first tube disposed in said rod
and opening out at the end of the first chamber remote
from the second chamber, said first tube being adapted to
be connected to a source of pressurised water at a pressure
greater than that of the cooling water of said reactor, and
a second tube also opening out at the end of the first
chamber remote from the second chamber and adapted to
collect the fission products emitted by said deposit when
no pressure is applied at the inlet of said tube.
686
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4380,528
SILVER-BASED ALLOY
Jury F. Shevakiii, Telegrafny pereulok, 11/16, kv. 53; Efim S.
Shpichinetsky, ulitsa Donskaya, 6, kv. 93; Valentina P. Fedo-
renko, Teply Stan, 7 mikroraion, 108, kv. 107; Boris N.
Efremov, ulitsa Veemaya, 26, korpus 1, kv. 17; Maria N.
Klevcbenkova, ulitsa F. Poletaeva, 8, korpus 4, kv. 59; Ivan A.
Andrjuschenko, Molodezfanaya ulitsa, 4, kv. 321; losif A.
Krasnoselsky, ulitsa Profsojuznaya, 102/47, kv. 6; Evgeny F.
Anikeev, ulitsa Butlerova, 14, korpus 1, kv. 29; Evgeny A.
Ivanov, Universitetsky prospekt, 4, kv. 228; Anatoly P. Kho-
myachkov, ulitsa Miklukho-Maklaya, 45, kv. 59, all of Mos-
cow; Naum A. Shvarts, prospekt K. Mana, 80, kv. 38; Ljud-
mila V. Kozhevnikova, prospekt Metallistov, 84, kv. 51, both
of Leningrad; Roza M. Romanova, Profsojuznaya ulitsa, 79,
korpus 2, kv. 10, and Alexandr D. Zhivotchenko, ulitsa Zoi
Kosmodemyanskoi, 34" A", kv. 39, both of Moscow, all of
U.S.S.R.
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,861
Int. a.3 C22C 5/06
U.S. a. 420—505 1 Oaim
1. A silver-based alloy incorporating palladium, magnesium
and aluminium in the following proportions of the compo-
nents, percent by weight:
palladium
5 to 30
magnesium
0.1 to 0.5
aluminium
0.01 to 0.5
silver
the balance.
4,380,529
HYDROPROCESSING REACTOR WITH EXTENDED
OPERATING LIFE
Ramesh Gupta, Chatham Township, Morris County, N.J., as-
signor to Exxon Research and Engineering Co., Florhani
Park, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 212,755, Dec. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,330,505. This application May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,985
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 18,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 ClOG 23/02
U.S. a. 422—220 8 Qaims
1. A vessel, such as a reactor or absorption tower including
means to introduce both liquid and gas into said vessel and
means to remove both liquid and gas from said vessel;
a flow distributor tray disposed adjacent the liquid and gas
introduction means;
at least one main bed of solids disposed in said vessel; and
an auxiliary bed disposed above said main bed below said
flow distributor tray having at least one gas bypass means
for passing gas therethrough when said auxiliary bed
•jecomes fouled, said gas bypass means comprising a hol-
low unobstructed open tube extending through said auxil-
iary bed and flow distributor tray to terminate at its upper-
most end above the normal liquid level on said flow dis-
tributor tray, said unobstructed open tube having a gas
flow resistance sufllcient to act as a substantial gas seal
against the passage of gas through said bypass means
when said auxiliary bed is not fouled and to provide a low
pressure drop bypass for said gas flowing to said main bed
when said auxiliary bed becomes fouled, and at least one
liquid bypass means for passing liquid through said auxil-
iary bed when said bed becomes fouled, said liquid bypass
means comprising a hollow unobstructed open tube ex-
tending through said auxiliary bed and attached at its
upper end to said flow distributor tray in fluid communi-
cation with liquid on said distributor tray, said liquid
bypass means open tube having a liquid flow resistance
sufficient to act as a substantial liquid seal against the
passage of liquid through said liquid bypass means when
said auxiliary bed is not fouled and to provide a low pres-
sure drop bypass for said liquid flowing to said main bed
when said auxiliary bed becomes fouled.
4380 530
STERILIZER WITH INFLATABLE ARTICLE HOLDER
Saul Kaye, Evanston, 111., assignor to Ben Venue Laboratories,
Inc., Bedford, Ohio
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 213,036
Int. a.3 A61L 2/20
U.S. a. 422—300 7 Qaims
1. A device for holding medical instruments during steriliza-
tion comprising in combination a gas-tight sterilizing apparatus
and an inflatable holder, said holder comprising sealed inflat-
able means maintained in a rigid holder within said sterilizing
apparatus, said inflatable means being in a relaxed, non-rigid
state at ambient pressure within said sterilizing apparatus
thereby permitting the surfaces of said instruments to be con-
tacted by a sterilizing medium and in an inflated state, for
securely holding said instruments, under conditions of reduced
pressure within said sterilizing apparatus.
4380,531
PROCESS FOR PREPARING PHOSPHORUS AOD
FROM INDUSTRIAL WASTE MATERIALS
Joseph S. Wisnouskas, Grand Island, N.Y., and Roland Ho,
Wayne, Pa., assignors to Occidental Chemical Corporation,
Niagara Falls, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,416
Int a.J COIB 25/16
U.S. a. 423—316 21 Claims
1. A process which is capable of producing highly purified
phosphorus acid from a slurry of calcium phosphite-containing
industrial waste material, said process comprising:
(a) reacting said slurry with at least one salt or hydroxide of
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
687
sodium or potassium to form a purified solution compris-
ing a phosphite of sodium or potassium and a calcium
precipitate,
(b) separating said precipitate from the purified phosphite
solution, and
(c) passing the purified phosphite solution from step (b)
through a cationic ion exchange resin to produce a solu-
tion of highly purified phosphorus acid.
mixture, said slurry having a solids content of from about 10 to
about 90 percent by weight of said hypochlorite salt, evolving
chlorine gas from said reaction mixture, the molar ratio of
magnesium ion to the hypochlorite ion being from about 0.4:1
to about 2.0:1.0 and recovering said dibasic magnesium hypo-
chlorite therefrom.
4,380,532
PROCESS FOR nNE PURinCATION OF SULPHUR
HEXAFLUORIDE FROM IMPURITIES
Igor M. Mazurin, Zeleny prospekt, 2/19, korpiis 2, kv. 1; Mik-
hail L. Netupsky, ploschad Pobedy, 2, korpus 1, kv. 70; Alex-
andr V. Shevtsov, ulitsa Marshala Novikova, 16, ky. 37; Vik-
tor t. Gladky, Chertanovskaya ulitsa, 51, korpus 2, kv. 123,
all of Moscow; Nikolai A. Dmitriev, ulitsa Jubileinaya, 7, kv.
25, Zheleznodorozhny, Moskovskaya oblast; Andrei G. Lya-
pin, ulitsa Golubinskaya, 25, korpus 2, kv. 24, Moscow; Alex-
andr V. Polyakov, ulitsa Ussuriiskaya, 14, korpus 1, kv. 21,
Moscow; Mikhail A. Myshev, ulitsa Deguninskaya, 13, kor-
pus 1, kv. 149, Moscow, and Vladimir V. Panov, Sredne-
Kupavninsky proezd, 26, kv. 143, Moscow, all of U.S.S.R.
Filed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,484
Int. a.3C01B 77/45
U.S. a. 423—469 6 Claims
JO
ill
IS
,
J' n
-
c
w
/}
'■
.~.
1
I'i
,11
-•<
,7
S
.-n
-n
R
„
,
1
~A-
}
— sr,
rS
9
— ^'i
4,380,534
SOLID DRUG PREPARATIONS
Muneo Fukui, Urawa; Yutaka Konno, Omiya; Yukio Kubota,
Tokyo; Masayoshi Aruga, Ageo, and Hiroitsu Kawata,
Kawagoe, all of Japan, assignors to YamanoucU Pharmaceuti-
cal Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,886
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 7, 1980, 55-46002
Int. a.3 A61K 9/42
U.S. a. 424—38 14 Claims
1. In a solid pharmaceutical composition containing less than
5 mg/dosage unit of a powdered microdose drug subject to
changes in crystal form stability selected from the group con-
sisting of gidoxin, digitoxin, /3-methyl-digoxin, formoterol
fumarate, procathelol, dexamethasone, /3-methasone, nitro-
glycerin, reserpine, folic acid, cobamide, ethynylestradiol,
hexoprenaline, polythiazide, diethylstilbcstrol, cortisone, er-
gotamine, and ergometrine, the improvement comprising said
powdered microdose drug being coated with a hydrophobic
wax by the method comprising uniformly dispersing a powder
of a microdose drug directly in molten wax and forming a
powder or granule of the dispersion, or dispersing a powder of
a microdose drug in a hydrophobic wax dissolved in a solvent,
removing the solvent and forming a powder or granule of the
residue, whereby said powdered microdose drug is stabilized
against changes in crystallinity and against losses due to elec-
trostatic charge or stickiness.
1. A process for a fine purification of sulphur hexafluoride
from impurities comprising purification of sulphur hexafluo-
ride by crystallization at a speed of displacement of the inter-
phase boundary of from 1 to 50 mm/hr.
5. A process according to claim 1, wherein for the purifica-
tion of sulphur hexafluoride containing, as impurities, lower
sulphur fluorides and HF, the gas is preliminary pdrified by
sorption on KOH, a portion of impurities is subjected to a
catalytical decomposition at a temperature of from 548° to 598°
K., a repeated sorption on KOH, sorption on AI2O3 and drying
on zeolites of NaX type.
4,380,535
ENKEPHALIN DEGRADING ENZYME INHIBITORS
Dimitrios Sarantakis, West Chester, and WUliam Dvonch, Rad-
nor, both of Pa., assignors to American Home Products Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,731
Int a.3 A61K il/QO; C07C 103/52
U.S. CI. 424—177 2 Claims
1. A method for inhibiting brain enzyme degradation of
enkephalins which comprises administering to a mammal an
amount sufficient to inhibit the brain enzyme degradation of
said enkephalins of a comjwund of the formula:
4,380,533
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF DIBASIC
MAGNESIUM HYPOCHLORITE
John A. Wojtowicz, Cheshire, Conn., assignor to Olin Corpora-
tion, New Haven, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 129,812, Mar. 12, 1980,
abandoned, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 968,605, Dec.
11, 1978, abandoned. This application Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No.
281,534
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 31,
1995, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 COIB 77/06
U.S. a. 423—473 1* CI«in»
1. A process for the production of dibasic magnesium hypo-
chlorite which comprises reacting a magnesium salt, an aque-
ous slurry of a crystalline hypochlorite salt selected from the
group consisting of alkali metal hypochlorites and calcium
hypochlorite, and a chloride ion source to form a reaction
CH2
Rl— NHCHCO— D-Cys— NH2R2
wherein Ri is hydrogen or lower alkyl; X is hydrogen, hy-
droxy, halo, nitro, amino or lower alkoxy; R2 is hydrogen or
Gly— NPhe— R4— NH2.
I
R3
wherein R3 is lower alkyl and R4 is L- or D-Thz or Pro and the
pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
688
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,536
pharmaceutical composition containing
para-amino-beNzoic aod-n-d-mannoside as
an active ingredient
Chikao Yoshikuini, Kuiutachi; Yosiiio Ohmura, Funabashi;
Fumjo Hirose, Tokyo; Masanori Ikuzawa, Tachikawa; Keni-
chi Matsimaga, Tokyo; Takayoshi Fiyii, Tokyo; Minora Oh-
hara, Tokyo, and Takao Ando, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors
to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 81,190, Oct. 2, 1979, Pat. No.
4,322,409, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 24,095,
Mar. 26, 1979, abandoned. This application Aug. 5, 1980, Ser.
No. 175,827
Int. a.3 A61K il/70
U.S. a. 424-180 3 Claims
1. A pharmaceutical composition in dosage unit form, which
comprises a dosage amount effective for the treatment of hy-
pertension of a compound represented by the formula:
N
H
N
CH2R2
in which
R is alkyl with 1 to 5 carbon atoms,
R' is alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio or alkylamino each with 1 to 5
carbon atoms, or phenyl,
R2 is alkoxy or alkylthio with 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and
X is oxygen or sulphur.
R'
-NH— ^ \-COOH
(1)
wherein R' denotes the residual group formed by removing
from mannose the OH at the 1 -position thereof, or a pharma-
ceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a carrier or diluent
therefor.
4,380,537
STABILIZED INSECHODE FORMULATIONS
Roger F. Monroe, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemi-
cal Company, Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 935,421, Aug. 21, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 853,779,
Nov. 21, 1977, abandoned. This application Oct. 24, 1978, Ser.
No. 954,258
Int. a.3 AOIN 57/00. 57/26
U.S. a. 424-200 10 Claims
1. In a solid stabilized insecticidal composition mixture
which comprises from about 2 to about 40 percent by weight of
an organophosphorous insecticide, a solid granular clay carrier
therefor, which carrier causes deterioration of said organo-
phosphorous insecticide mixed therewith, and a stabilizing
amount of a stabilizer for said mixture, the improvement in said
composition which comprises using as the stabilizer, from
about 0.5 to about 10% by weight of the ultimate composition
of a lactone selected from the group consisting of butyrolac-
tone, 5-valerolactone, y-valerolactone, y-octanoiclactone,
€-caprolactone and 2-acetyl-'y-butyrolactone.
4,380,538
COMBATING ARTHROPODS WITH
0-ALKYL-0-(2-CYCLOPROPYL-6-SUBSTITUTED-
METHYL-PYRIMIDIN-4-YL)-(THIONO)(THIOL)
PHOSPHORIC (PHOSPHONIO AOD ESTERS AND
ESTER-AMIDES
Fritz Manren Rolf Schroder, both of Wuppertal; Ingeborg Ham-
mann, Cologne, and Wilhelm Stendel, Wuppertal, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft,
Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 15, 1979, Ser. No. 48,857
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 13,
1978, 2830766
Int a.3 AOIN 57/16, 57/24. 57/32: C07F 9/65
U.S. a. 424—200 9 Claims
1. An 0-alkyl-0-<2-cyclopropyl-6-substituted-methyl-
pyrimidin-4-yl)-<thiono) (thiol)-phosphoric (phosphonic) acid
ester or ester-amide of the formula
4,380 539
NEMATOODAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING
0,0-DIETHYL
0-(5-PHENYLISOXAZOL-3-YL)PHOSPHOROTHIOATE
AND AN ETHANIMIDOTHIOATE
Max J. Fielding, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,583
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/80; C07D 261/12
U.S. a. 424-200 4 Qaims
1. A method of protecting plants from parasitic nematodes
comprising applying to the locus of nematode infesUtion a
plant protective amount of a mixture consisting essentially of:
A. 0,0-diethyl 0-(5-phenylisoxazol-3-yl)-phosphorothioate,
and
B. at least one of:
(1) methyl N-[[(methylamino)carbonyl]oxy]ethanimido-
thioate, and
(2) methyl 2-(dimethylamino)-N-[[(methylamino)car-
bonyl]oxy]-2-oxoethanimidothioate;
the weight ratio of A to B being in the range of about 1:10 to
about 10:1.
TABLETS
Robert H. Poyser, Old Harlow, and David H. Turner, London,
both of England, assignors to Beecham Group Limited, En-
gland
Division of Ser. No. 94,503, Nov. 15, 1979, Pat. No. 4,325,971.
This appUcation Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,041
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 14, 1978,
44842/78
Int. a.3 A61K 31/615. 31/625
U.S. a. 424—233 4 Claims
1. An analgesic tablet, which comprises an effective amount
of acetylsalicyclic acid in combination with metoclopramide
or an acid addition salt thereof, the weight ratio of acetylsali-
cyclic acid to metoclopramide or acid addition salt thereof
being from 80:1 to 120:1, respectively.
4,380,541
CEPHALOSPORIN DERIVATIVES
Michihiko Ochiai, Snita, and Akira Morimoto, Ikeda, both of
Japan, assignors to Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
FUed Feb. 14, 1978, Ser. No. 877,760
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 18, 1977, 52-17501
Int a.5 C07D 501/20: A61K 31/545
U.S. a. 424—246 10 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
689
r'nh s
N Lc—
CONH-
N
OCH3
r^ 1
COOR
wherein R' is hydrogen; R^ is chloro, methoxy or methylthio
and R is hydrogen or pivaloyloxymethyl and pharmacologi-
cally and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
4,380,542
9-HYDROXYOCTAHYDROBENZO[c]QUINOLINES
AND THEIR PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND
METHOD OF USE
Michael R. Johnson, Gales Ferry, Conn., assignor to Pfizer,
New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 193,822, Oct. 3, 1980, Pat. No. 4,340,737,
which is a division of Ser. No. 42,773, May 29, 1979, Pat. No.
4,260,764, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 777,928,
Mar. 15, 1977, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 753,619, Dec. 22, 1976, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 687,332, May 17, 1976,
abandoned. This application Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 328,846
Int. a.3 C07D 221/12: A61K 31/47
U.S. CI. 424—248.55 8 Claims
1. A compound having the formula:
z— w
wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy;
alkanoyloxy having from one to five carbon atoms; hydroxy-
methyl; 0x0, methylene and alkylenedioxy having from two to
four carbon atoms;
Rl is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, ben-
zyl, benzoyl, alkanoyl having from one to five carbon
atoms and — CO — (CH2)p — NR2R3 wherein p is 0 or an
integer from 1 to 4; each of R2 and R3 when taken individ-
ually is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen
and alkyl having from one to four carbon atoms; R2 and
R3 when taken together with the nitrogen to which they
are attached form a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic ring
selected from the group consisting of piperidino, pyrrolo,
pyrrolidino, morpholino and N-alkylpiperazino having
from one to four carbon atoms in the alkyl group;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms and — (CH2)/ — CeHj
wherein z is an integer from 1 to 4;
Z is selected from the group consisting of
(a) alkylene having from one to nine carbon atoms;
(b) - (alki)m-X-(alk2)»i— wherein each of (alki) and (alk2) is
alkylene having from one to nine carbon atoms, with the
proviso that the summation of carbon atoms in (alki) plus
(alk2) is not greater than nine; each of m and n is 0 or 1 ; X
is selected from the group consisting of O, S, SO and SO2;
and
W is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
methyl, pyridyl, piperidyl,
oV*.
wherein Wj is selected from the group consisting of hy-
drogen, fluoro and chloro; and
— CH CH— W2
^(CH2)i ^
wherein W2 is selected from the group consisting of hy-
drogen and
-(d)--'
a is an integer from 1 to 5 b is 0 or an integer from I to 5;
with the proviso that the sum of a and b is not greater than
5.
7. A process for producing analgesia in a mammal which
comprises administering to the mammal an analgesic produc-
ing quantity of a compound selected from the group consisting
of those having the formula
z— w
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts
thereof, --
wherein
Rl is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, ben-
zoyl, alkanoyl having from one to five carbon atoms and
— CO— (Ch2);r-NR2R3 wherein p is 0 or an integer from
1 to 4; each of R2 and R3 when taken individually is se-
lected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl
having from one to four carbon atoms; R2 and R3 when
taken together with the nitrogen to which they are at-
tached form a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic ring selected
from the group consisting of piperidino, pyrrolo, pyr-
rolidino, morpholino and N-alkylpiperazino having from
one to four carbon atoms in the alkyl group;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms and — (CH2)z — C^Hs
wherein z is an integer from 1 to 4;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl
and ethyl;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
— (CH2)>r— carbalkoxy having from one to four carbon
atoms in the alkoxy group and wherein y is 0 or an integer
from 1 to 4, carbobenzyloxy, formyl, alkanoyl having
from two to five carbon atoms, alkyl having from one to
six carbon atoms and — (CH2)r— C6H5 wherein x is an
integer from 1 to 4; and CO(CH2)jt-i— C6H5;
Z is selected from the group consisting of
(a) alkylene having from one to nine carbon atoms;
(b) —(alki)m—X—(alk2)«— wherein each of (alki) and (alk2)
is alkylene having from one to nine carbon atoms, with the
I
690
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
proviso that the summation of carbon atoms in (alki) plus
(aJk2) is not greater than nine; each of m and n is 0 or 1; X
is selected from the group consisting of O, S, SO and SO2;
and
W is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
methyl, pyridyl, piperidyl,
^0)-w.
4,380 544
1,3-DIOXOLANE COMPOUNDS AND THEIR USE AS
FUNGIODES
Franz Dora, Dielsdorf, Switzerland, assignor to Honinann-La
Roche Inc., Nutley, N J.
Filed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,682
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 30, 1981,
2142/81; Feb. 11, 1982, 855/82
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/40; C07D 405/06
U.S. a. 424—263 9 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula "
wherein W| is selected from the group consisting of hy-
drogen, fluoro and chloro; and
r
— CH
(CH2),
(CH2)6
CH— W2
wherein W2 is selected from the group consisting of hy-
drogen and
a is an integer from 1 to 5 and b is 0 or an integer from 1
to 5; with the proviso that the sum of a and b is not greater
than S; and
R' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, al-
kanoyloxy having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, hydroxymethyl,
0x0, alkylene dioxy having from 2 to 4 carbon atoms and
methylene.
4,380,543
ANTIMICROBIAL
8-CYANO-6,7.DIHYDR0.5-METHYL-l-OXO-lH,5H-BEN-
ZO[g]QUINOLIZINE-2-CARBOXYLIC ACIDS
Richard M. Stera, Cottage Grove, Minn., assignor to Riker
Laboratories, Inc., St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,928
Int. a.3 A61K 31/47; C07D 455/04
U.S. a. 424—258 5 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
CH3
wherein X is hydrogen or fluorine, or a pharmaceutical! y
acceptable carboxylate salt thereof, an alkyl or alkylaminoal-
kyl ester thereof where the alkyl group contains 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, an alkylaminoalkyl ester salt thereof where the alkyl
group contains 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an acyl chloride thereof,
or an amide thereof having the formula — NR1R2 where Ri
and R2 are independently hydrogen or an alkyl group contain-
ing 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
5. A composition for inhibiting the growth of /nicroorgan-
isms comprising an effective amount of the compound accord-
ing to claim 1 formulated in a pharmaceutically-acceptable
vehicle.
°-(Q)-^"^^^
N
CI
H2C CH2
wherein R is hydrogen or CM-alkyl,
or an acid addition salt thereof
4. A fungicidal composition comprising a compatible carrier
material and, as the active ingredient, an amount which is
effective as a fungicide of a compound of the formula
N
^Cl "2C-
SJ
o
-CH2
wherein R is hydrogen or Ci^-alkyl,
or an acid addition salt thereof
4,380,545
COMBATING FUNGI WITH
TRIAZOLYL-BENZYLOXY-KETONES ANIMTARBINOLS
Udo Kraatz; Gerhard Jiiger, both of Leverkusen; Karl H.
Biichel, Burscheid, and Paul-Ernst Frohberger, Leverkusen,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesell-
schaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,288
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 2,
1980, 3012824
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/64, 55/00; C07D 249/08
U.S. a. 424—269 6 Claims
1. A triazolyl-benzyloxy-ketone or carbinol of the formula
°-<oh
— 0-
-CH-
1
-A-
-C(CH3)3
r
V
'N
N -
Jl
CI
in which A is a keto group or a CH(OH) group,
or an addition product thereof with a physiologically accept-
able acid or metal salt.
5. A method of fungi comprising applying to the fungi or to
a habitat thereof a fungicidally effective amount of a com-
pound according to claim 1.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
691
4,380,546
AZOLE COMPOUNDS, THEIR PREPARATION, THEIR
USE FOR CROP TREATMENT, AND AGENTS FOR THIS
PURPOSE
Hubert Sauter, Mannheim; Eberhard Anunennann, Ludwigsha-
fen; Costin Rentzea, Heidelberg; Bemd Zeeh, Ludwigshafen;
Johann Jung, and Emst-Heinricb Ponuner, both of Limbur-
gerhof, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Ak*
tiengesellschaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,789
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 19,
1980, 3019049
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/50, 43/64; C07D 233/60. 249/08
U.S. a. 424—269 9 Qaims
1. An azole compound of the formula
(D
Q y-0-(CH2)„-CH-Y-C(CH3)3
4,380,547
DIHYDROPYRIDINE COMPOUNDS WHICH ARE
SUBSTITUTED IN THE 4-POSmON BY IMIDAZOLYL
OR THIAZOLYL AND THEIR MEDIONAL USE
Carsten Mateme, Bonn, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,416
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 12,
1980 3022030
Int. C1.3 A61K 31/425: C07D 41 7/00
U.S. a. 424—270 11 Claims
1. A compound which is a 1,4-dihydropyridine of the for-
mula
blooded animals which comprises administering to the animals
an amount effective for vasodilating, of a compound according
to claim 1 either alone or in admixture with an inert pharma-
ceutical carrier or in the form of a medicament.
N
N
where X is hydrogen, halogen, Ci-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy,
trifluoromethyl or phenyl and m is an integer from 1 to 5, and,
if m is greater than 1, the X's can be identical or different, n is
an integer from 2 to 5, Z is N or CH and Y is CO or CR'OR^,
where R' is hydrogen or Ci-C4-alkyI and R^ is hydrogen,
Ci-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, as well as its
addition salts with acids.
2. A plant treatment agent having fungicidal and growth
regulating properties comprising a solid or liquid carrier and
an effective amount of a compound of the formula I as de-
scribed in claim 1.
4. A process for treating fungus diseases in plants which
comprises: applying to the plants a fungicidally effective
amount of a compound of the formula I as described in claim
1.
4,380,548
N-(2,6.DIMETHYLPHENYL)-4,5-DIHYDRO-4,4.DIAL-
KYL-^METHYLTHIO-lH•IMIDAZOLE-l-CARBOXA•
MIDES, ANTICONVULSIVE COMPOSITION AND
METHOD
Robert W. Fleming, Ann Arbor, Mich., assignor to Warner-Lam-
bert Company, Morris Plains, N J.
FUed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,764
Int. a.3 A61K 31/415; C07D 233/42
U.S. a. 424—273 R 5 Claims
1. A compound having the structural formula
SCH3
Cc„. ^-
wherein R is hydrogen or methyl, and the pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salts thereof.
4,380,549
TOPICAL TREATMENT OF DRY SKIN
Eugene J. Van Scott, 1138 Sewell U., Rydal, Pa. 19046, and
Ruey J. Yu, 4 Undenwold Ave., Ambler, Pa. 19002
Continuation of Ser. No. 60,460, Jul. 25, 1979, abandoned, which
is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 870,114, Jan. 17, 1978, Pat
No. 4,197,316, which is a division of Ser. No. 720^35, Sep. 7,
1976, Pat. No. 4,105,783, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 598,224, Jul. 23, 1975, Pat. No. 4,021,572. This appUcation
Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,364
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 22,
1992, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61K i7//9
U.S. a. 424—317 12 Claims
1. A method for alleviating the symptoms of dry skin in
humans comprising topically applying to involved areas of the
human body an effective amount of at least one member se-
lected from the group consisting of:
R202C
(I)
CO2R'
in which
R^ represents imidazolyl or thiazolyl which is optionally
substituted by alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms or phenyl
R^ represents in both instances methyl, ethyl, phenyl or
benzyl,
R' and R^ are identic- jU or different and represent a straight-
chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon radical which
has up to 6 carbon atoms and is optionally interrupted in
their chain by an oxygen atom and/or is optionally substi-
tuted by fluorine or chlorine.
9. A method of combating circulatory illnesses in warm-
Glycolic Acid
Glucuronic Acid
Galacturonic Acid
Gluconic Acid
Glucoheptonic Acid
a-Hydroxybutyric Acid
a-Hydroxyisobutyric Acid
a-Hydroxyisocaproic Acid
a-Hydroxyisovaleric Acid
/3-Hydroxybutyric Acid
[Lactic Acid]
^-Phenllactic Acid
Atrolactic Acid
Mandelic Acid
Galactonic Acid
Pantoic Acid
Glyceric Acid
Malic Acid
Mucic Acid
Citric Acid
Saccharic Acid
Tartaric Acid
Tartronic Acid
Isocitric Acid
Dihydroxymaleic Acid
Dihydroxytartaric Acid
Dihydroxyfumaric Acid
or a salt thereof with an organic or inorganic alkali, in a phar-
maceutically acceptable vehicle.
692
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,550
GUANFAONE IN TREATING OPIATE ADDICTION
Horst Kleinlogel, Hinterluippeleii, and Carl Theohar, Basel, both
of Switzerland, assignors to Sandoz Ltd., Basel, Switzerland
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 383,080
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 1, 1981,
8116751
Int. a.3 A61K 31/165
U.S. a. 424-324 5 Qaims
1. A method of treating symptoms arising on withdrawal of
opiate administration from an opiate addict which method
comprises administering to said subject an effective amount of
Guanfacine of the formula 1:
CI
NH
\
NH2
in free base form or in pharmaceutically acceptable acid addi-
tion salt form.
4,380,551
METHODS OF PRODUONG FOODSTUFF BY MALTING
SEEDS
Stanislaw Frontczak, Lodz, Poland, assignor to Jacek Dlugo-
lecki, Poland, a part interest
Filed Aug. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 181,816
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 31, 1980,
8025083
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 30,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. aj A23K 7/00, 1/14
U.S. a. 426-28 18 Qaims
1. A method of producing a foodstuff for human or animal
consumption, comprising the steps of:
forming a layer of peat having a thickness in the range of
about 40 to about 200 millimeters on a surface substan-
tially impermeable to plant roots;
sowing into the peat layer seeds of at least one quick germi-
nating plant of a type such as to produce strong root
systems at a rate of at least about 900 kilograms of seeds
per hectare; and
vegetating the seeds for a period in the range of from 10 to
21 days;
whereby the layer of peat with germinated seeds in usable as
a foostuff.
4,380 553
METHOD OF IMPARTING A REDDISH COLOR TO
SEASONING SALTS
Thomas R. Schmidt, Niles, Mich., assignor to Miles Laborato-
ries, Inc., Elkhart, Ind.
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299492
Int. a. J A23L 1/237
U.S. a. 426-250 6 Qaims
1. A method of treating granulated seasoning salt to impart
a reddish hue thereto which method involves the steps of:
(a) providing a basic, aqueous solution of annatto;
(b) adding a food grade acid to the basic solution to lower
the pH thereof to a point sufficient to precipitate the
annatto and form an aqueous slurry thereof;
(c) combining the annatto slurry with the granulated season-
ing salt and blending the resultant combination to thereby
plate the salt with the precipitated annatto; and
(d) allowing the plated salt to dry.
4,380,554
POLYMERIC MONOHYDROXYBENZENOID
HYDROQUINOID ANTIOXIDANTS
Carl Serres, Jr., Naperrille, III., assignor to Standard Oil Com-
pany (Indiana), Chicago, 111.
Division of Ser. No. 51,450, Jun. 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4,310,657.
This application Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,602
Int. a.3 CUB 5/00
U.S. a. 426-545 13 Qginw
1. A composition comprising a monohydroxybenzenoid
hydroquinoid polymer and an oxidizable organic material
normally subject to adverse effects by oxygen selected from
the group consisting of edible lipids including animal and
vegetable fats and oils, wherein the said oxidizable organic
material is stabilized against oxidative degradation by a stabi-
lizing amount of said monohydroxybenzenoid hydroquinoid
polymer which is of the formula
/
R'
I
•CH2RCH2— Ar(OH)R"-
R'"
/
OH
\ \
■CH2RCH
P"" I D'""
•* oh'*
/y Jh
4 igg 552
METHOD OF DEAODIFYING WINE AND
COMPOSITION THEREFOR
Stina M. Gestrelius, Lund, Sweden, and Jijrgen H. Kjaer, Co-
penhagen, Denmark, assignors to Novo Industri A/S, Bagsva-
erd, Denmark
FUed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,227
Int. Q\? C12P 7/56: C12N 11/10. 1/36; C12G 1/00
U.S. a. 426-52 6 Claims
1. A process for deacidifying wine with alginate gel particles
containing living cells of Leuconostoc oenos immobilized herein,
and said alginate gel particles being immersed in an aqueous
sterile resting medium for maintaining viability of the microor-
ganism which process comprises:
i. preparing a bed of said alginate gel particles, then
ii. displacing gradually said resting medium in the alginate
gel particles with wine thereby conditioning the living
cells to wine and thereafter
iii. passing wine through said bed to deacidify the wine by
the malolactic activity of the microorganism cells.
wherein R is a benzenoid ring group selected from the group
consisting of benzene, naphthalene, biphenyl, diphenylmeth-
ane, thiophene, benzothiophene and dibenzothiophene moi-
eties, wherein Ar is a benzenoid ring group selected from the
group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, anthranyl and phenan-
thranyl groups, and wherein R' is an alkyl group of 9 to 18
carbon atoms, and R", R'", R"" and R'"" are independently
selected from a group consisting of hydrogen, alkyls of one to
26 carbon atoms and aralkyls of from 7 to 26 carbon atoms, x
and y are of the ratio of from 1:1 to 1:3 and n is an integer of
from one to 20.
4,380,555
SUCROGLYCERIDE ON A SUPPORT
Jean-Claude Campagne; Jean Chollet, and Pierre Redien, all of
Melle, France, assignors to Rhone Poulenc Industries, Paris,
France
FUed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,443
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 24, 1980, 80 06463
Int a.3 A21D 2/00: A23D 5/00
UJS. a. 426—549 22 Claims
1. A powder preparation, comprising 20 to 40% of a sucro-
glyceride on a support, said support comprising 10 to 50% of
an edible salt of casein, and 20 to 60% of a maltodextrin.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
693
4,380^56
VAPOR DEPOSITION OF HARDENED NIOBIUM
John M. Blocher, Jr.; NeU D. Veigel, and Richard B. Landrigan,
all of Columbus, Ohio, assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the United States Department of
Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jan. 3, 1964, Ser. No. 335,696
Int. a.3 G21C im; B05D 7/0O; B05C 79/02
U.S. a. 427—6 10 Oaims
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING A PROTECTIVE
POLYSILICATE LAYER OF A RECORD MEMBER BY A
LASER BEAM AND A MAGNETIC RECORD MEMBER
SUITABLY MANUFACTURED THEREBY
Masahiro Yanagisawa, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Elec-
tric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,566
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 2, 1979, 54-127626;
Dec. 20, 1979, 54-165933; Dec. 20, 1979, 54-165934; Dec. 24,
1979, 54-167848
Int. a.3 B05D im
UJS. a. 427—53.1 13 Claims
1. A method of coating particles of Zr02-U02 mixtures with
hardened niobium, comprising placing the particles in a fluid-
ized bed, maintaining the temperatures of the bed at from about
800° C. to about 900* C, leading niobium penUchloride vapor
and carbon tetrachloride vapor into the bed, whereby niobium
metal is deposited as a coating on the particles and carbon is
deposited interstitially within the niobium.
4,380,557
METHOD OF PRODUCTION OF IMAGE PICKUP
DEVICE
Sachio Ishioka, Tokyo; Yasuharu Shimomoto, Hinodemachi;
Yoshinori Imamura, Hachioji; Saburo Ataka, Hinodemachi;
Yasuo Tanaka, Kokubuiui; Hirokazu Matsubara, Hamurama-
chi; Yukio Takasaki, Hachioji, and Eiichi Maruyama,
Kodaira, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,554
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 28, 1980, 55-102529
Int. Q\? B05D i/02, 3/04
U.S. a. 427—38 6 Qaims
2500 2000 1500 1000
waVE NUMBER (cm')
500
1. A method of producing an image pickup device, which
comprises the steps of forming a hydrogen-containing amor-
phous silicon layer on a predetermined substrate and heating
the amorphous silicon layer at a temperature of from 100° to
300' C, said hydrogen-containing amorphous silicon contain-
ing hydrogen in an amount of 5 to 30 atomic % and having an
optical forbidden band gap of from 1.30 eV to 1.95 eV, and in
the infrared absorption spectrum of the hydrogen-containing
amorphous silicon, the component of a wave number of about
2000 cm- ' being larger than the component of a wave number
of about 2100 cm-'.
1. In a process for manufacturing a magnetic record member
comprising the steps of preparing a substrate of at least one
non-magnetic metal material, forming a film of a magnetic
material on said substrate in direct contact therewith, forming
a layer of a solution of tetrahydroxysilane on said film, and
treating said layer of solution into a layer of polysilicate, said
magnetic material being capable of retaining magnetization as
records of electrical signals in said film for reproduction of said
electrical signals, the improvement wherein said treating step
comprises the steps of:
pre-baking said layer of solution at a temperature in the
range of 100 to 300 degrees centigrade to provide a pre-
baked layer in a manner such that the magnetic properties
of said substrate and said film are not varied to adversely
affect the recording and the reproducing characteristics of
said film; and
irradiating said pre-baked layer with a carbon dioxide laser
beam to provide said polysilicate layer, said laser beam
having a wavelength between 4 microns and 50 microns.
4,380,559
METHOD FOR PRODUONG BOUNDARY LAYER
SEMICONDUCTOR CERAMIC CAPACITORS
Haruhumi Mandai, Nagaokakyo; Kunitaro Nishimura, Youkai-
chi; Yoshiaki Kohno, Uji, and Masami Yamaguchi, Nagaoka-
kyo, all of Japan, assignors to Murata Manufacturing Co.,
Ltd., Japan
FUed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,711
Int. a.3 HOIG 4/10. 4/12
U.S. a. 427—80 10 Claims
1. A method for producing boundary layer semiconductor
ceramic capacitors, comprising the steps of:
firing shaped bodies of a semiconductor ceramic material in
a neutral or reducing atmosphere;
heat-treating the resultant semiconductor ceramic bodies to
insulatorize crystal grain boundaries of the semiconductor
ceramics; and
providing opjxwite electrodes on surfaces of the heat-treated
semiconductor ceramic bodies;
characterized in that said heat-treating is carried out by
heating the semiconductor ceramic bodies together with
powder of the insulatorizing agent with stirring in a neu-
tral or oxidizing atmosphere.
694
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,560
PROCESS FOR TREATMENT OF BLACK PLATE
CONTAINERS
Peter F. King, Farmiiigton Hills, Micli., assignor to Occidental
Chemical Corporation, Warren, Mich.
FUed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,487
Int. a.J B05D 1/18. 1/38. 7/22. 7/26
U.S. a. 427-239 20 Qaims
1. A process for treating black plate containers to improve
corrosion resistance and lacquer adherence which comprises
the steps of providing a formed black plate container body,
cleaning the surfaces of the body to remove conuminants
therefrom, contacting the clean body surfaces with an aqueous
acidic solution containing stannous ions in an amount of about
0.01% up to saturation at a temperature of about room temper-
ature to about 200* F. for a period of time to deposit tin on the
body surfaces in an amount up to about 5 mg/ft^ without
visually changing the shiny grey surface appearance thereof,
water rinsing and drying the treated body, and thereafter
applying an organic lacquer coating to the dry, treated body
surfaces.
4J80 561
TREATMENT OF WOOD USING BRANCHED-CHAIN
ALIPHATIC CARBOXYLIC AQDS
Carl-Erik Sundman, Nacka, and Bengt G. Hiigglund, Sodertalje,
both of Sweden, assignors to KenoGard A.B., Stockholm,
Sweden
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,658
Claims priority, application Sweden, Apr. 28, 1980, 8003219
Int. a.3 C09D 5/14
U.S. a. 427-421 3 Qaims
1. A method for treating wood and woodbased materials
such as particle board and board, for protection against attack
of sapstain and mould fungi by means of dipping, spraying or
brushing wherein said materials are treated with a composition
which consists of water and, as its active ingredient, a
branched-chain aliphatic carboxylic acid, or its alkali- or am-
monium salt, which acid contains totally 6 to 20 carbon atoms,
wherein the acid is an isoacid or a 2- position mono-branched
acid.
4,380,562
KINETIC WAVEFORM DEVICE
William A. Bream, 600 W. Aycock St., Raleigh, N.C. 27608
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,681
Int. a.3 A47G 33/04
U.S. a. 428—8
9aaims
waveform device; attaching means for securing said slats to
said axis threads such that said slats are suspended along said
axis threads in generally uniform vertically spaced apart rela-
tionship and are free to twist about said axis threads such that
the shape of said waveform device can vary throughout its
vertical distance and continue to vary throughout its vertical
distance in order that the kinetic waveform device may contin-
uously produce different waveform shapes; anchoring means
secured to at least one end of said axis threads for vertically
anchoring said waveform device; and wherein said openings in
said respective slats are formed such that at least one opening
lies on each side of the midpoint of each slat and wherein said
openings are spaced relatively close together relative to the
length of the respective slats such that the slats may tend to
generally revolve about an axis that would extend between
said pair of threads.
4,380,563
ADHESIVE DEVICE OF FELT SUBSTRATE, RELEASE
SHEET AND ADHESIVE AND METHOD
Gordon R. Ayotte, Marshall, Mich., assignor to Trim Parts Inc.,
Marshall, Mich.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,430
Int. a.3 B32B 7/14; D04H 1/08
U.S. a. 428-40 20aaims
7. An adhesive device for use in providing sound deadening,
insulation, or the like comprising a plurality of laminates, each
of which comprises:
(a) a felt substrate,
(b) release paper attached to one side of said felt substrate to
form a sheet having a felt side exposed and a release side
of said release paper exposed, said sheet being divided into
sections by a cut extending through all but at least one
connecting tab between adjacent sections on said sheet,
and
(c) adhesive applied to all but a peripheral edge portion of
the other side of said felt substrate on each of said sections,
wherein said laminates are stacked so that the adhesive on
one laminate is adjacent the exposed release side of said
release paper on another laminate.
1. A kinetic waveform device adapted to be vertically ori-
ented and capable of providing various and continually vary-
ing waveform shapes and as vertically oriented, comprising: a
plurality of vertically spaced and generally elongated slats
extending through a substantial vertical distance with said slats
being generally uniformly vertically shaped; at least two trans-
versely spaced, vertical openings formed through each slat
intermediately between opposite ends and wherein said verti-
cal openings are equidistance from the midpoint of each slat; a
pair of axis threads extending vertically through said trans-
versely spaced vertical openings within said slats forming said
4,380,564
CROSS-TEARABLE DECORATIVE SHEET MATERIAL
Leopoldo V. Cancio, and Pai-Chuan Wu, both of Cincinnati,
Ohio, assignors to Clopay Corporation, Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 57,792, Jul. 16, 1979, Pat. No.
4,298,647. This appUcation Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,354
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 3, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 B32B 3/30. 27/20
U.S. a. 428—167 20 Claims
1. A method of producing a plastic film which may be torn
by hand along one or more hand-tear lines without the use of
cutting tools comprising the steps of:
providing a polymeric material,
introducing into said polymeric material a material forming
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
695
a dispersed second phase in a matrix of said polymeric
material,
forming said polymeric material containing said dispersed
second phase into a film, and
embossing said film to form one or more substantially con-
tinuous, imperforate hand-tear lines of reduced film thick-
ness therein,
said material forming said dispersed second phase being
present in said film in an amount effective to initiate and
propagate tear along said hand-tear lines by hand-tearing
without the use of cutting tools.
pounds per thousand square feet of said intermediate layer
and (B) a nonionic surfactant of the poly(oxypropylene)-
poly(oxyethylene) block copolymer type in an amount of
between about 0.01 S and about 0.18 pounds per thousand
square feet of said intermediate layer; and (2) an outer
layer of wax.
7. A process for preparing an improved wax-coated cellu-
losic product which comprises the stejM of: (1) providing a
paper or paperboard substrate: (2) coating the substrate with a
mixture consisting essentially of (A) a fluorinated organic
phosphate having the formula
(RyL)3.yi
wherein
R/is R2(CF2)fl where R2 is F or H and a is an integer from
1 to 20, (CF3)2CR3(CF2)6 where R3 is F or H when b is O
and R3 is F when b 4s an integer from 1 to 18, or R4(c-
CfcFio) where R4 is F or C/,F2n+ 1 in which n is an integer
from 1 to 4 and c-designates an alicyclic structure,
L is
14. A hand-tearable plastic film which may be torn by hand
along one or more hand-tear lines without the use of cutting
tools comprising an embossed polymeric film having one or
more substantially continuous imperforate hand-tear lines of
reduced film thickness, said film being formed of a polymeric
matrix containing a dispersed second phase in an amount effec-
tive to initiate and propagate tear along said hand-tear lines
such that said film may be torn by hand without the use of
cutting tools.
4,380,565
COLOR PRESERVATION OF WAX-COATED
PAPERBOARD
Paul L. Krankkala, Woodbury, Minn., assignor to Champion
International Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,020
Int a.3 B32B 3/28. 29/00
U.S. a. 428—182 12 Claims
1. An improved wax-coated cellulosic product which com-
prises a paper or paperboard substrate bearing in order: (1) an
intermediate layer consisting essentially of a mixture of (A) a
fluorinated organic phosphate compound of the formula
(R/L)3-yZ
wherein
R/is R2(CF2)a where R2 is F or H and a is an integer from
1 to 20, (CF3)2CR3(CF2)t where R3 is F or H when b is O
and R3 is F when b is an integer from 1 to 18, or R4(c-
CeFio) where R4 is F or CnF2n+ 1 in which n is an integer
from 1 to 4 and c-designates an alicyclic structure,
L is
— SO2N— (CH2)20—
where R5 is an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon
atoms, or the group
-(CH2);,0-
where n is a integer 1 or 2,
y is an integer 1 or 2. and Z is P(OXOM)x where x is the
integer 1 or 2, and M is a water-solubilizing cation selected
from the group consisting of alkali metal, ammonium and
substituted ammonium when x is 1, and each M is indepen-
denUy selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
alkali metal, ammonium and substituted anunonium when
X is 2, in an amount of between about 0.01 to about 0.12
— SO2N— (CH2)20—
where Rj is an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon
atoms, or the group ''
-{CH2)„0-
where n is an integer 1 or 2, y is an integer 1 or 1 , and
Z is P(OXOM)x where x is the integer 1 or 2, and M is a
water-solubilizing cation selected from the group consist-
ing of alkali metal, ammonium and substituted ammonium
when X is 1, and each M is independently selected from the
group consisting of hydrogen, alkali metal, ammonium
and substituted ammonium when x is 2, in an amount of
between about 0.01 and about 0.2 pounds, per thousand
square feet, and (B) a poly(oxypropylene)poly(oxe-
thylene)block copolymer surfactant in an amount of be-
tween about 0.0 IS and about 0.18 pounds per thousand
square feet of said intermediate layer and drying the re-
sulting coated substrate; and (3) coating said coated sub-
strate with molten wax.
4,380,566
RADIATION PROTECnON FOR INTEGRATED
CIRCUITS UTILIZING TAPE AUTOMATED BONDING
William S. Phy, Lo« Altos Hills, Calif., assignor to FaircliUd
Camera A Instnunent Corp., Moontain View, Calif.
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,569
Int a.3 B32B 23/02. 15/08
U.S. a. 428—192 8 Claims
20
tgg
iilUv\m.K^ ^,m. km. I. K
12
25 II
1. A composite structure for use in fabricating electrical
connections to an integrated circuit comprising:
an insulating substrate having a central portion adapted to be
disposed in proximity to the surface of the integrated
circuit and having a peripheral portion disposed about at
least part of the central portion, the peripheral portion
being separated from the central portion at selected loca-
tions; and
696
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
r^.
a pattern of electrically conductive material disposed on at
least the peripheral portion of the insulating substrate
whereby the pattern of electrically conductive material is
adapted to be connected to the integrated circuit where
the peripheral portion is separated from the central por-
tion, and the central portion of the insulating substrate is
disposed in proximity to the integrated circuit.
FLAME RETARDANT HEAT INSULATING
COMPOSITION AND METHOD FOR PREPARING THE
SAME
Shuji Mflsuda, Tokushima, and Keisuke Ueno, Kawasaki, both
of Japan, assignors to Oiugai Boyeki Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,411
Int. a.3 Bd2B 7/00
U.S. a. 428—276 6 Qalms
1. A flame-retardant heat insulating composition essentially
consisting of fibrous cellulose particles, wherein the ratio of
cellulose fibers to cellulose particles is in the range of 90:10 to
30:70 by weight in the absolute dry state, bonded only with 5
to 20 wt. percent of condensed phosphate as binder into fiberfil
form.
4,380,569
LIGHTWEIGHT PREFORMED STABLE GEL
STRUCTURES AND METHOD OF FORMING
Robert E. Shaw, Waco, Tex., assignor to Spenco Medical Corpo-
ration, Waco, Tex.
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,223
Int. a.J B32B 5/16
U.S. a. 428—283 35 Claims
1. The method of forming a lightweight stable gel compris-
ing the steps of:
(a) preparing at low temperature a gel mixture by admixing;
(i) methyl polysiloxane containing silicon-bonded vinyl
groups, with
(ii) methyl polysiloxane containing SiH groups, and
(iii) a platinum catalyst;
(b) mixing glass microspheres into said gel mixture;
(c) pouring the resulting mixture into a mold of desired
shape; and
(d) allowing the resulting mixture to react until a stable
silicon gel structure is formed.
4,380,567
ETHYLENIC COMPOSITE nLM STRUCTURE
Hiromi Shigemoto, Iwakuni, Japan, assignor to Mitsui Petro-
chemical Industries, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,206
Gaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1980, 55/140488
Int. CI.3 B32B 27/00
U.S. a. 428— 213 7aaims
1. A composite film structure composed of a layer (A) of
high density polyethylene having an intrinsic viscosity [17] as
measured in decalin at 135* C. of 1.3-2.9 dl/g, a melt index
(MU) of 0.3-7.0 g/10 min. and a density of 0.950-0.970 g/cm^,
in which up to 2 mole % of an alpha-olefin may be contained;
and layers (B) of an ethylene/Cj-Cio alpha-olefin random
copolymer having an intrinsic viscosity [tj] as measured in
decalin at 135* C. of 1.0-2.4 dl/g, a melt index (MIfl) of 0.5-20
g/10 min., a density of 0.910-0.940 g/cm^, and a melting point
of 115°-130' C, with the proviso that the MI^/MIs ratio is
0. 1 5-4.0, said layers (B) being in direct contact with the two
sides of said layer (A) and laminated thereto.
4,380,570
APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR MELT-BLOWING A
nBERFORMING THERMOPLASTIC POLYMER AND
PRODUCT PRODUCED THEREBY
Eckhard C. A. Sctawarz, 115 N. Park Ave., Neenah, Wis. 54956
Filed Apr. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 138,860
Int. a.^ D04H J/04
U.S. a. 428—296 15 Claims
1. In a process for producing melt blown fibers from a mol-
ten fiberforming thermoplastic polymer and wherein said mol-
ten fiberforming thermoplastic polymer is further heated and
extruded through orifices of heated nozzles into a stream of hot
gas to attenuate said molten polymer into fibers forming a fiber
stream and wherein said fiber stream is collected on a receiver
surface in the path of said fiber stream to form a non-woven
mat, the improvement, which comprises:
(a) passing said molten polymer through an elongated chan-
nel and thence through a plurality of sub-channels to a
molten polymer feed chamber, said molten polymer hav-
ing a resident time through said channels of less than 30
seconds;
(b) heating said molten polymer during step (a) to a tempera-
ture whereby
all/Q is smaller than 0.1,
wherein;
a is the thermal diffusivity of said molten polymer,
1 is the length of each polymer channel, and
Q is the polymer flow rate in each polymer channel;
(c) passing said thus heated molten polymer from said feed
chamber through a plurality of heated nozzles to form said
melt blown fibers, said molten polymer having a residence
time in said heated nozzles of less than 2 seconds; and
(d) further heating said thus heated molten polymer, during
step (c) to a temperature whereby
all/Q is greater than 0.07,
wherein;
a is the thermal diffusivity of said molten polymer,
1 is the length of each polymer chaimel, and
Q is the polymer flow rate in each polymer channel;
said molten polymer forming said melt blown fibers exhibiting
an apparent melt viscosity of less than 45 poise, said molten
polymer introduced into said elongated chamber being at a
temperature of at least 40* F. lower than the temperature of
said melt blown fibers.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
697
4,380,571
nRE RETARDANT EPOXY RESINS CONTAINING
3-HYDROXYALKYLPHOSPHINE OXIDES
Edward R. Fretz, Jr., East Windsor, and Joseph Green, East
Brunswick, both of N.J., assignors to FMC Corporation,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 264,256, May 18, 1981, Pat. No. 4^45,059.
This appUcation Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,786
Int. a.3B32B/ 7/;0
U.S. a. 428—415 2 Claims
1. A fire retardant laminate comprising adjacent layers of a
substrate coated on both sides with a mixture of epoxy resin
and a 3-hydroxypropylphosphine oxide having the formula:
R3 R2 Ri O
III II
(HOCHCHCH)3-„P(R4)n
wherein Ri may be the same or a different radical selected
from the group consisting of hydrogen, phenyl, hydroxy-
methyl and alkyl radicals of 1-4 carbon atoms, R2 may be the
same or a different radical selected from the group consisting
of hydrogen, hydroxymethyl, and alkyl radicals of 1-4 carbon
atoms, R3 may be the same or a different radical selected from
the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl radicals, R4 is an
alkyl radical of 2-8 carbon atoms and n is either 1 or 2; and a
hardener, said adjacent layers being bound together into each
other by said epoxy resin mixture to form a unitary structure.
4,380,573
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR BENDING
SECTION-SHEET, PLATE, STRIP AND LIKE MATERIAL
Gustav Niislund, Alvsbjn, Sweden, assignor to Korstriisk Meka-
niska, G. Niislund, Alvsbyn, Sweden
Division of Ser. No. 807,651, Jun. 17, 1977, Pat. No. 4,220,031.
This appUcation Jan. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 116,748
Int. a.5 B21D li/00, 13/10
U.S. a. 428—595 7 Qaiou
4380 572
PATTERNED HELICAL NIETALLIC RIBBON FOR
CONTINUOUS EDGE WINDING APPLICATIONS
Howard H. Liebermann, Schenectady; Peter G. Frischmann,
Scotia, both of N.Y., and George M. Rosenberry, Jr., Hender-
sonville, Tenn., assignors to The United SUtes of America as
represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
Division of Ser. No. 972,239, Dec. 22, 1978, Pat. No. 4,341,845.
This application May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,939
Int. a.3 B22D 11/00
U.S. a. 428—592 8 Claims
1. A method of bending a section-sheet comprising alternat-
ing longitudinal ridges and valleys, the side portions of which
valleys also constitute side portions of the ridges, perpendicu-
larly to the longitudinal directions of the ridges and valleys,
characterized in that the lower surface of the valley bottoms is
impressed from below on its entire width along a straight line
in parallel with the valley bottoms, which line extends perpen-
dicularly relative to said longitudinal direction, that the im-
pression is made in radial direction relative to a shaft in parallel
with and located on the same side of the sheet as said line
between holding-up members positioned in relatively small
spaced relationship, which members prior to the beginning of
the impressing operation are tightened only to the upper sur-
face of the valley bottoms to permit the sides of the lateral
portions of the valleys forming a part of the lower surface of
the sheet to bulge outward when the impression is being made,
and after such an impression the relative position between the
holding-up members and the sheet is changed for carrying out
a second impression in parallel with the first one, whereafter
this operation is repeated until the desired bending angle has
been obtained.
4. A sheet having a transverse contour comprising corruga-
tions forming a series of mutually parallel ridges and valleys
with common side walls, said sheet having a bend formed by at
least one straight line of impressions extending transversely
across said valleys upwardly into the valleys and adjacent
portions of said side walls and at the ends of said impressions
said side walls having indents extending outwardly away from
the impressions.
1. A continuous length of cast edge-wound patterned metal-
lic ribbon having a permanent cast-in helical shape with a
substantially glassy microstructure, a pair of substantially par-
allel opposed major surfaces, an inner peripheral edge, an outer
peripheral edge, and a predetermined pattern of cut-outs.
4,380,574
HIGH-DAMPING COMPOSITE MATERIAL
Gemot Gessinger, Birmcnstorf, and Olivier Merder, Ennct-
baden, both of Switzerland, assignors to BBC Brown, Boveri
A Company, Ltd., Baden, Switxerland
Division of Ser. No. 882,227, Feb. 28, 1978, abandoned. This
appUcation May 21, 1979, Ser. No. 40,532
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, May 9, 1977,
5756/77
Int a? B32B 15/01: C25D 5/26
U.S. a. 428—686 8 OaiaM
1. A procedure for manufacture of machine components
which are highly stressed mechanically and thermally, com-
prising:
forming said machine components from a metal or metal
alloy base material having poor damping properties which
determines the strength and shape of said component; and
698
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
subsequently coating all the surfaces of the resulting compo- cathode which is in contact with the electrolyte beyond said
nent with a metal or metal alloy having high damping current collecting grid being lower than a concentration of the
2 8 lH2 2 1
binder in an area of said air cathode which is in contact with
characteristics suflicient to improve the lifetime of said the air.
machine component.
4,380,575
METHOD FOR CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY
TO ELECTRIC ENERGY
Osamu Nakamura, Ikeda; Isao Ogino, Minoo, and Teruo
Kodama, Ikeda, all of Japan, assignors to Agency of Industrial
Science and Technology and Ministry of International Trade
and Industry, both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Not. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,429
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 14, 1980, 55/161149
Int. a.3 HOIM 8/00
U.S. a. 429—13 1 Oaim
Tank A
Humidity
Control
Device C
Tank B
Humidity
Control
Device D
Fuel
Cell
_J
1. A method for the conversion of chemical energy into
electric energy by the continuous electrochemical reaction of
an anodic reactant held in contact with an anode and remaining
in a gaseous state at room temperature with a cathodic reactant
held in contact with a cathode and remaining in a gaseous state
at room temperature through the medium of a heteropoly acid
solid electrolyte, which method is characterized by incorporat-
ing a step of passing said anodic reactant and cathodic reactant
through pools of a saturated aqueous solution of a selected salt
each bordering on a closed empty space and retained within a
fixed temperature range and releasing said anodic reactant and
cathodic reactant into successive closed empty spaces thereby
enabling said reactants to acquire fixed relative humidities
prior to the contact thereof with the anode and cathode.
4,380,577
STAGGERED TEETH COVER
James S. Hardigg, Conway, Mass., assignor to Hardigg Indus-
tries, Inc., South Deerfield, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 135,117, Mar. 28, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,538
Int. a.3 HOIM 2/08
U.S. a. 429—175 23 Oaims
J"
1. A cover for a thermoplastic battery jar having relatively
thin side walls which have a tendency to bow inwardly, said
cover being comprised of a thermoplastic plate member having
a predetermined thickness, top and bottom surfaces and four
edges, a plurality of means defining openings extending
through said plate member, and guide means, positioned at
predetermined locations solely around the periphery of said
plate member and extending downwardly away from said
bottom surface, for interacting with the interior of said thin
side walls of said battery jar and for aligning the cover there-
with, said guide means being spaced inwardly a predetermined
distance from said edges, said guide means having a length that
varies from a first predetermined length at the comers of said
cover to a second shorter predetermined length adjacent the
central portion of each edge.
4,380,576
AIR CELL
Kazumasa Yoshida, and Michio Watabe, both of Yokohama,
Japan, assignors to Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,459
Int. a.3 HOIM 4/00
U.S. a. 429—27 5 Claims
1. An air cell comprising an air cathode, one surface of
which is in contact with an electrolyte and the other surface of
which is in contact with air; said air cathode having a current
collecting grid, a carbon powder, a binder and a metal chelate,
said current collecting grid being located at a center of said air
cathode, and a concentration of the binder in an area of said air
4,380,578
ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL WTTH GELLED ANODE
William S. Bahary, Pearl River, N.Y., assignor to Duracell Inc.,
Tarrytown, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,664
Int a.' HOIM 4/02, 6/04
U.S. a. 429—206 13 Claims
1. A gelled anode for an electrochemical cell comprising a
powdered anode active metal, an aqueous alkaline electrolyte
and a gelling agent characterized in that said gelling agent is
comprised of an anionic rigid ordered polysaccharide.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
699
4,380,579
ELECTROSTATIC COPYING PROCESS AND
APPARATUS
Shoji Matsiunoto, 3-7, Koya-cho, Neyagawa-shi, Osaka-fii; To-
shikazu Matsui, 1-23, 3-chome, Kamori-cho, Kishiwada-shi,
Osaka-Ai; Toshimitsu Ikeda, 6-5, 7-chome, Yoshida, Higashi-
osaka-shi, Osaka-fu; Nobutaiko Kozuka, 26-21, Showa-ctao,
Suita-shi, Osaka-fu; Hitoshi Nishihama, 58-2, Minamihoriike,
Ogura-cho, UJi-shi, Kyoto-fu, and Tatsuo Aizawa, 6-34,
Kuwazu-cho, Higashisumiyoshi-ku, Osaka, all of Japan
DiTision of Ser. No. 895,465, Apr. 11, 1978, Pat. No. 4,254,202.
This application Oct. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 88,655
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 19, 1977, 52-44162
Int. a.3 G03G 13/00, 21/00
U.S. a. 430—126 1 Claim
1. An electrostatic copying process which comprises
(1) the step of forming an electrostatic latent image on the
surface of a photosensitive member having a photocon-
ductive layer by (a) applying an electrostatic charge to the
surface of the photosensitive member by energizing a
corona discharge device disposed along the path of the
photosensitive member and (b) projecting the image of an
original onto the charged surface of the photosensitive
member by an optical system including an exposure lamp
for illuminating the original in an original image exposing
area located along the moving path of the surface of the
photosensitive member downstream of the corona dis-
charge device, thereby to form an electrostatic latent
image on the surface of the photosensitive member, and at
the completion of the image forming step, deenergizing
the corona discharge device,
(2) the step of developing the electrostatic latent image by
applying a fine powdery developer to the electrostatic
latent image formed on the surface of the photosensitive
member by a developing device provided along the mov-
ing path of the surface of the photosensitive member and
downstream of the image exposing area, thereby to form a
toner image on the surface of the photosensitive member,
(3) the step of transferring the toner image formed on the
surface of the photosensitive member to a receptor sheet
in a transfer station provided downstream of the develop-
ing device along the moving path of the surface of the
photosensitive member; and
beginning irradiation of the surface of the photosensitive
member with light from a lamp taken from the group
consisting of a separate lamp and said exposure lamp in an
area downstream of the corona discharge device for
charging and upstream of the developing device along the
moving path of the surface of the photosensitive member
only in response to the deenergizing of the corona dis-
charge device for charging at the completion of the elec-
trostatic latent image-forming step (1) and continuing the
irradiation for a specified period of time at least substan-
tially equal to the time required for that part of the photo-
sensitive member which is situated in the charging zone to
pass the original-image projecting zone during the moving
of the photosensitive member.
HETEROGENOUS CHEMILUMINESCENT SPEOnC
BINDING ASSAY
Robert C. Boguslaski, Elkhart; Robert J. Carrico, Bremen, both
of Ind., and James E. Christner, Ann Arbor, Mich., assignors
to Miles Laboratories, Inc., Elkliart, Ind.
Dirision of Ser. No. 894,838, Apr. 10, 1978, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 6674*82, Mar. 18, 1976, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 572,008, Apr. 28,
1975, abandoned. This application Jun. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 50,681
Int a.3 GOIN 33/54. 33/58. 21/76
U.S. a. 435—7 56 Claims
1. In a heterogeneous specific binding assay method for
determining a ligand in a liquid medium, which method com-
prises the steps of:
(a) contacting said liquid medium with reagent means in-
cluding a labeled conjugate comprising a specific binding
substance coupled to a labeling substance, said reagent
means and the ligand forming a binding reaction system
producing a bound-phase and a free-phase of the labeled
conjugate;
(b) separating said bound-phase and said free-phase; and
(c) determining said labeling substance in said bound-phase
or said free-phase as a function of said ligand in said liquid
medium,
the improvement wherein said labeling substance is a chemilu-
minescent reactant and wherein said chemiluminescent label is
determined in said bound-phase or said free-phase by forming
the chemiluminescent reaction therein and measuring the light
produced.
4,380,581
ISTAMYCINS AND STREPTOMYCES CULTURE FOR
THE PRODUCnON THEREOF
Hamao Umezawa; Yoshiro Okami, both of Tokyo, and Shinichi
Kondo, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Zaidan Hojin
Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenky Kai, lokyo, Japan
Dirision of Ser. No. 141,492, Apr. 18, 1980, Pat. No. 4,296,106.
This application Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,640
Int. a.3 C12P 19/48: C12N 7/20; C12R 1/465
U.S. a. 435—80 10 Qaims
1. The process for the production of the antibiotic, istamycin
complex, which comprises cultivating a microorganism having
the identifying characteristics of Streptomyces tenjimariensis
SS-939, identified as FERM-P 4932 or ATCC 31603, under
aerobic conditions in a culture medium containing assimilable
sources of carbon and nitrogen until a substantial amount of
istamycin is produced and accumulated in the culture medium.
4,380,582
PREPARATION OF DRY VARIOLA VIRUS
Michael D. Orlando, and Jean M. Riley, both of Frederick, Md.,
assignors to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
FUcd Jul. 9, 1965, Ser. No. 471,791
Int. a.3 C12N 5/00
U.S. a. 435—239 1 Claim
1. In a process for the preparation of a variola virus which
comprises the steps of: chorioallantoic inoculation of the em-
bryos of fertile chicken eggs, incubating the eggs for a period
of time sufficient to cultivate the virus, separating the embryos
from the rest of the eggs, stabilizing the embryos, homogeniz-
ing, differential centrifuging the resultant slurry, freezing the
slurry into pellets and drying the pellets under a vacuum; the
improvement wherein the stabilizing comprises the addition of:
2.5% lactose, 2.5% raflinose, 1.5% lysine, 1.5% sodium gluta-
mate, 1.5% dextrin, 0.5% isoniazid, and 0.5% thiourea, per
volume of embryos.
4,380,583
METHOD OF PREPARING SEEDING MATERIAL FOR
PRODUCnON OF CITRIC AOD
Roman Y. Karklin, ulitsa Veidenbauma, 45, kv. 13; Alou A.
Rumba, ulitsa Putses, 12, k?. 3, and Via K. Azanda, ulitsa
Unina, 237, kv. 1, aU of Riga, U.SJS.R.
FUed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,040
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., Apr. 19, 1980, 2932440
Int CV C12N 3/00
U.S. a. 435—242 3 Claims
1. A method of preparing a seeding material for the produc-
tion of citric acid comprising cultivating the fungus Aspergillus
niger R-3 strain TsMPMF 132 on a nutrient medium containing
a carbon source selected from the group consisting of malt
extract and beer must, a nitrogen source, and at least one
mineral salt to form spores and separating said spores in an
amount in excess of 1.3 g/dm from the nutrient medium.
700
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,584
FERMENTATION APPARATUS
Donald O. Hitzman, Bartlesrille, Okla., assignor to Phillips
Petroleum Company, Bartlesrille, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 139,371, Apr. 11, 1980, Pat. No. 4340,677.
This appUcation Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,774
Int. a.3 C12M 1/08. 1/06. 1/04. 1/02
U.S. a. 435—313 11 Claims
1. In a fermentation apparatus comprising
(a) a housing
(b) at least one feed conduit for the introduction of materials
into said housing,
(c) at least one product conduit for the removal of product
from said housing,
(d) a foam breaker in the upper portion of said housing
(e) a gas outlet operatively connected to said foam breaker
for allowing the removal of gas from said fermenter,
the improvement comprising
(0 a fluid collector operatively associated with respect to
said foam breaker and at a small distance from said foam
breaker, allowing the collection of at least a portion of the
fluid leaving said foam breaker and
(g) conduit means operatively associated with said collecting
unit allowing the withdrawal of at least a portion of the
fluid so collected from said housing.
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PHOTOMETRICALLY
MONITORING LOW LEVEL CONCENTRATION OF
HYDROGEN SULFIDE IN ALKANOL AMINE
Robert S. Saltzman, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 211,582, Dec. 1, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,451
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/75
U.S. a. 436—121 26 Qaims
1. A method for photometrically analyzing the hydrogen
sulfide concentration in a stream containing at least a first
predetermined concentration of bonded hydrogen sulfide-
amines and ultraviolet radiation-absorbing impurities compris-
ing the sequential steps of:
(a) removing the hydrogen sulfide from a first, reference,
sample of the stream until a second predetermined con-
centration remains therein;
(b) photometrically analyzing the first, reference, sample to
generate a reference signal representative of the ultravio-
let radiation-absorbing characteristics of the remaining
hydrogen sulfide and of the impurities in the first, refer-
ence, sample; and
(c) photometrically analyzing a second sample of the stream
in a manner which takes into account the reference signal
to generate a signal representative of the concentration of
hydrogen sulfide therein.
4,380,587
nLM BADGE FOR DETERMINING CARBONYL
COMPOUNDS
Martin Koocher, Lexington, Mass., assignor to Arthur D. Little,
Inc., Cambridge, Mass.
FUed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,584
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/75. 31/00
U.S. a. 436—128 10 Claims
4,380,585
STABILIZATION OF BENZIDINE-TYPE INDICATORS
WITH VARIOUS ENHANCERS
Thomas A. Magers, South Bend, and David L. Tabb, Elkhart,
both of Ind., assignors to Miles Laboratories, Inc., Elkhart,
Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 93,431, Nov. 13, 1979, Pat No. 4,290,773.
This appUcation Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 285,930
Int a.3 GOIN 33/52
U.S. a. 436—66 2 CUdms
1. In a composition for detecting the presence of a constitu-
ent in a test sample, the composition comprising a benzidine-
type indicator, the improvement wherein said composition
additionally comprises, as an enhancer compound, a normal,
branched or cyclic hexanol.
4?-
«-
44-
'40
7. A method for determining a fluidic-contained carbonyl
compound comprising
a. contacting a chemically inert substrate having adhered to
the surface thereof a substantially monodisperse system of
particles of a derivatizing agent for the carbonyl com-
f)ound with the fluidic-contained carbonyl compound to
form nucleating sites;
b. treating said nucleating sites with a metastable supersatu-
rated solution in which said nucleating sites can grow;
c. growing said nucleating sites to form an optically measur-
able film of crystals; and
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
701
d. optically measuring said film of crystals to determine the tional groups per monomer unit, the cation exchange func-
concentration of fluidic contained carbonyl comfxjund. tional groups being selected from the group consisting of
4,380,588
GLASS FOR INFRARED RAY-TRANSMITTING OPTICAL
nBERS AND OPTICAL FIBERS FORMED FROM SAID
GLASS
Seiko Mitachi; Shuichi Shibata; Terutoshi Kanamori; Toyotaka
Manabe, ail of Mito, and Mitsuho Yasu, Katsuta, all of Japan,
assignors to Nippon Telegraph A Telephone Public Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 226,716, Jan. 21, 1981, Pat. No. 4,343,638.
This application Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,057
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 4, 1980, 55-11531
Int. a.J C03C 3/18, 3/30
U.S. a. 501—37 8 Oaims
(LoFj)
BaFj -MOL %
1. An infrared ray-transmitting glass composition for optical
flbers consisting essentially of 28 mol% to 38 mol% of BaF2, 2
mol% to 7 mol% of GdPa and 58 mol% to 69 mol% of ZrF4.
4,380,589
NOVEL nSCHER-TROPSCH CATALYSTS
Craig B. Murchison, Midland, Mich., and Dewey A. Murdick,
Tulsa, Okla., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Mid-
land, Mich.
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,117
Int. a.3 C07C 1/04
U.S. a. 518— 714 13 Oaims
1. A Fischer-Tropsch process for producing hydrocarbons
with improved selectivity to C2-C4 olefins comprising contact-
ing hydrogen and carbon monoxide in the presence of a cata-
lyst comprising:
(1) molybdenum in free or combined form;
(2) a promoter comprising an alkali or alkaline earth metal in
a free or combined form; and
(3) a binder comprising an iron-containing calcium alumi-
nate cement.
4,380,590
EMULSION COPOLYMER CATION EXCHANGE RESINS
Bemi P. Chong, North Wales, Pa., assignor to Rohm and Haas
Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed Sep. 19, 1978, Ser. No. 943,889
Int CL^ C08F 39/20. 6/22. 8/36
UJS. a. 521—33 16 Claims
1. A liquid cation exchange material comprising an emulsion
of submicroscopic, approximately spherical beads of previ-
ously isolated, crosslinked emulsion copolymer having diame-
ters within the range from about 0.01 to about l.S micrometers,
and bearing from about 0.7 to about l.S cation exchange func-
strongly acidic functional groups and the free acid form of
weakly acidic functional groups.
4,380,591
NOVEL AMINO CATALYST MIXTURE FOR
STABILIZATION OF POLYURETHANE FOAM
Feyyaz O. Baskent, Mahopac, and Michael R. Sandner, Chap-
paqua, both of N.Y., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
Filed Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,393
Int. CL? C08G 18/14, 18/42, 18/18 18/20
U.S. a. 521—115 13 Oaims
1. A method for producing a cellular urethane polymer
which comprises reacting (a) an organic polyisocyanate and
(b) a polyester polyol containing at least two active hydrogen
atoms, in the presence of a blowing agent and an amino catalyst
mixture and foaming the product, wherein the amino catalyst
mixture comprises from about 10 to 9S percent by weight of
2-diisopropylamino ethanol and from 5 to 90 weight percent of
an amine or a mixture of amines selected from the group con-
sisting of 2-(2-dimethylaminoethoxy) ethanol; bis-(2-dime-
thylamino) ethyl ether; and l,4-diazo-bicyclo[2.2.2]octane.
4,380,592
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF POLYHYDROXY
LIGNIN-CELLULOSE SILICATE POLYMER
David H. Blount, 5450 Lea St., San Diego, Calif. 92105
Division of Ser. No. 372,298, Apr. 27, 1982, wUch U a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 306,184, Sep. 28, 1981, Pat. No.
4,367326, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 257,126,
Apr. 24, 1981, Pat No. 4,313,857, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 203,730, Nov. 3, 1980, Pat No.
4,281,110, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 112,290,
Jan. 15, 1980, Pat No. 4,243,757, which is a continuation-in-part
of Ser. No. 29,282, Apr. 12, 1979, Pat No. 4,220,757. This
application Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 4134^5
Int 0.3 C08H 5/00
U.S. O. 521—151 lA Claims
1. The process for the production of foamed polyurethane
silicate products by the following steps:
(a) mixing and reacting the following components, thereby
producing a polyhydroxy lignin-cellulose polymer;
(i) a broken-down alkali metal plant silicate polymer pro-
duced by heating a mixture of 3 parts by weight of a
cellulose-containing plant and 1 to 2 parts by weight of
an oxidated silicon compound with 3 to 5 parts by
weight of a melted alkali metal hydroxide to between
ISO* C. and 220* C. while agiuting for 5 to 60 minutes;
in an amount of 100 parts by weight;
702
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(ii) an epoxide compound, in an amount of 1 to 3 parts by
weight;
(iii) a Lewis acid, in an amount wherein the pH of the
mixture of components (i), (ii) and (iii) is 5 to 6:
(b) mixing and reacting 100 parts by weight of the polyhy-
droxy lignin-cellulose silicate polymer as produced in step
(a), 1 to 600 parts by weight of a compound containing at
least two isocyanate groups up to 50% by weight of an
inert blowing agent, percentage based on the weight of
the reaction mixture.
uous cavities of substantially uniform size and containing from
0.1% to 1% by weight of a disubstituted polysiloxane finely
distributed in the polymer, and a cavity content of 5 to 50 vol.
%, based on the total volume of the filament.
4,380,593
INTUMESCENT COMPOSITIONS
Wulf Ton Bonin, Leverkusen, and Gottfried Zaby, Dormagen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,687
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 12,
1981, 3109352
Int. a.3 C08G 18/14
U.S. a. 521—163 9 Qaims
1. Intumescent compositions obtained by reacting
(a) polyisocyanates,
(b) phosphorous-containing condensation products having
at least two hydroxyl groups, which are obtained by
condensing primary or secondary, aliphatic, cycloali-
phatic, aromatic, araliphatic or heterocyclic monoamines
and/or polyamines optionally containing OH-groups,
carbonyl compounds and dialkyl phosphites,
(c) polyethers of average functionality greater than two and
having average OH-numbers of from 150 to 500 which
have been obtained by the addition of alkylene oxides, of
which from 50 to 100% by weight consist of ethylene
oxide, with low molecular weight starters,
(d) cyanuric acid and/or cyanuric acid derivatives, and
(e) optionally, water and/or other organic compounds con-
taining isocyanate-reactive hydrogen atoms.
nLAMENTS AND HBERS HAVING DISCONTINUOUS
CAVITIES
Erhard Siggel, Lutzelbach; Gerhard Wick, Obemburg; Heinz
Linhart, Erienbach, and Erich Kessler, Hochst, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Akzona Incorporated, Ashe-
rille, N.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 952,190, Oct. 16, 1978, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 738,985, Nov. 4, 1976, Pat. No.
4,164,603. This application Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,336
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 7,
1975, 2550080
Int. a.3 C08G 63/00
U.S. a. 521—182 5 Qaims
4,380,595
ENCAPSULATING SEALANT COMPOSITIONS FOR
FRIABLE INSULATION MATERIALS
John Arpin, Ocean, N.J., assignor to Arpin Products, Inc., South
Belmar, N.J.
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,571
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 31,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 C08K 3/34
U.S. Q. 524—5 3 Qaims
1. A penetrating sealant composition useful for encapsulat-
ing a friable material comprising a blend of:
Part 1 an aqueous silicate solution component comprising:
(a) 20 to 40 weight percent of an aqueous alkali metal
silicate selected from potassium silicate or a mixture of
potassium silicate and sodium silicate;
(b) 0.01 to 10 weight percent of a cationic or nonionic
surfactant;
(c) 60 to 80 weight percent water; and
Part II an acrylic polymer dispersion component compris-
ing:
(a) 45 to 65 weight percent of an acrylic polymer latex
having a solids content of 40 to 65 weight percent, said
acrylic polymer selected from the group consisting of
homopolymers and copolymers of lower alkyl esters of
acrylic acid or lower alkyl esters of an alpha-lower
alkyl acid or mixtures thereof;
(b) 0.01 to 10 weight percent of a reagent that reacts with
said alkali silicate; said reagent being selected from the
group consisting of the borate, halide, nitrate and phos-
phate salts of aluminum, antimony, barium, beryllium,
cadmium, calcium, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead,
magnesium, mercury, silver and zinc, and
(c) 35 to 55 weight percent water, wherein the ratio of
Part I to Part 11 provides a blended composition having
a solids content between 20 and 65 weight percent.
4,380,596
PRIMER OR SOLVENT RESISTANT PROTECTIVE
COATING
George R. Watchko, Reading, Mass., assignor to General Elec«
trie Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,441
Int. Q.5 C08L 75/04
U.S. Q. 524—86 8 Qaims
1. An aqueous composition which comprises:
(a) an aqueous colloidal dispersion of an aliphatic urethane
derived from the reaction of a diisocyanate of the formula
OCN — R'NCO and water, wherein R is a divalent organic
radical;
(b) an anionic surfactant; and
(c) a carbon containing pigment.
1. A filament or fiber of thermoplastic, synthetic fiber-form-
ing polymer having a plurality of adjacent, separate, discontin-
4,380,597
THERMOPLASTIC COMPOSITIONS BASED ON VINYL
CHLORIDE POLYMERS STABILIZED WITH
POLYHYDROXYL COMPOUNDS
Werner Envied, Langenfeld, and Bemd Wegemund, Haan, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Henkel Kommandit*
gesellschaft aiif Aktien, Dusseldorf-Holthausen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,281
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep, of Germany, Nov. 6,
1980, 3041887
Int. Q.J C08K 5/05. 5/09. 5/13; C08L 27/06
UJS. Q. 524—109 26 Qaims
1. A stabilized thermoplastic composition comprised of
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
703
polyvinyl chloride or mixed polymers containing mainly vinyl
chloride units and a stabilizer additive composition of:
(1) heat stabilizers selected from the group consisting of
metallic soaps, metallic phenolates and naphthenates and
organotin compounds, and
(2) other conventional additives employed in thermoplastic
compositions,
wherein said heat stabilizers include from 0.02 to 5 parts by
weight, per 100 parts by weight of polymer, of at least one
aliphatic compound selected from the group consisting of
gluconic acid, glucuronic acid, ketogluconic acid, ascorbic
acid, alkali metal salts of said acids, alkaline earth metal salts of
said acids, and mixtures thereof
derived from said monomer components (a), said aqueous
solution containing 3 to 150 parts by weight of said water-solu-
ble polymer (b) per 100 parts by weight of water, the amount
of said monomer components (a) being 10 to 150 parts by
weight per 100 parts by weight of said water, the weight ratio
of (a):(b) being within the range of from 1 :5 to 5: 1 , said aqueous
dispersion of water-soluble polymers being (i) a dispersion in
water of a loose water-containing complex composed of said
polymer or copolymer derived from said monomer compo-
nents (a) and said water-soluble pwlymer (b), or (ii) a dispersion
of said polymer or copolymer derived from said monomer
components (a) in said aqueous solution of said water-soluble
polymer (b).
4,380,598
FLAME RETARDANT POLYARYLATE COMPOSITIONS
Lloyd M. Robeson, Whitehouse Station, and Markus Matzner,
Edison, both of N.J., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
FUed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,693
Int. G1.3 C08K 5/42
U.S. a. 524—163 55 Qaims
1. A flame retardant molding composition comprising a
blend of:
(a) a polyarylate derived from a dihydric phenol and an
aromatic dicarboxylic acid, and
(b) a flame retarding amount of an alkali or alkaline earth
metal salt of an aromatic sulfonic acid.
4,380,599
ORGANOTIN POLYMERS METHOD OF MAKING
THEM AND PAINTS CONTAINING THEM
David H. Tooke-Kirby, Hornchurch; Richard E. Perry, Bil-
lericay, and Kenneth H. Arbuckle, Chigwell, all of England,
assignors to Berger, Jenson and Nicholson Ltd., London,
England
Filed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,811
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 6, 1981,
8103674
Int. a.5 C08C 79/00
U.S. a. 525—370 10 Qaims
1. An organotin polymer suitable for use in marine anti-foul-
ing paints, derived from a hydroxyl-containing polymer hav-
ing a hydroxyl value of from 50 to 400, containing pendent
groups having the following general formula:
— O.CO.R'CO.OSnRs
where R is Ci to Cjoalkyl, aryl, aralkyl or alkaryl and R* is
a saturated or unsaturated aliphatic or aromatic C2 to Cjo
group.
4,380,601
THERMOSETONG CATONIC ACRYLIC LATICES AND
THEIR USE IN COATING COMPOSITIONS
David A. Welsh, Monroeville; Rostyslaw Dowbcnko, Gibsonia;
Suryya K. Das, Pittsburgh; Charles M. Kania, Tarentum, and
Roger M. Christenson, Gibsonia, all of Pa^ assignors to PPG
Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,585
Int. C\? C08L 75/12, 33/12
U.S. a. 524—555 5 Claims
1. A stable thermosetting cationic acrylic latex composition,
comprising a blocked isocyanate curing agent and a cationic
acrylic latex; the cationic acrylic latex being prepared by a
process which comprises copolymerizing ethylenically unsatu-
rated monomers, at least one of which contains an active hy-
drogen group, in an acidic medium in the presence of water, a
polymerization initiator and a cationic surfactant which has a
gegen-ion derived from an acid selected from the group con-
sisting of phosphoric acid, phosphorous acid, hypophospho-
rous and alkyl or aryl hydrogen phosphate.
4,380,600
AQUEOUS DISPERSION OF WATER-SOLUBLE
POLYMER COMPOSITION
Yoshikazu Hosoda; Shigenobu Ishihara, and Shoichi Kobayashi,
all of Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Shows Denko K.K.,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 49,054, Jan. 15, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,921
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 19, 1978, 53-73232
Int. a.5 C08F 261/04
U.S. a. 524—458 17 Qaims
1. A process for producing an aqueous dispersion, having
good stability and fluidity, of water-soluble polymers, which
comprises polymerizing or copolymerizing (a) the monomer
components of a composition containing at least one water-sol-
uble ethylenically unsaturated monomer, all of said monomer
components in said composition being capable of being poly-
merized or copolymerized with each other to form only a
water-soluble polymer or copolymer, said polymerization
being carried out in an aqueous solution of (b) at least one
water-soluble polymer which is different from the polymer
4,380,602
WATER-SOLUBLE THERMOSETTABLE RESINOUS
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING
DICYANDIAMIDE-FORMALDEHYDE CONDENSATES
MODinED WITH EPIHALOHYDRIN AND PROCESS
FOR PREPARING THE SAME
David H. Dumas, Wilmington, Del., assignor to Hercules Incor-
porated, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,751
Int. a.5 C08L 61/22
U.S. a. 524—598 8 Claims
1. A process for preparing improved water-soluble thermo-
settable resinous compositions containing dicyandiamidefor-
maldehyde condensates which process comprises (1) forming a
precondensate solution by refluxing for about 1 to about 4
hours an aqueous mixture of (a) a base reaction product of 1
mole of dicyandiamide, 0.75 mole to 1.5 moles of formalde-
hyde and an acid salt of a water-soluble polyaminopolyamidc
in an amount sufficient to provide from about 0.125 to about
0.5 equivalent of basic nitrogen and (b) an ammonium salt in an
amount such that there will be from 0.7 equivalent to about 1.2
equivalents of basic nitrogen derived from the salt of the
polyaminopolyamidc and the ammonium salt in the aqueous
medium, (2) adding to the precondensate solution from 0.30 to
0.45 mole of epihalohydrin per equivalent of basic nitrogen
derived from the salt of the polyaminopolyamidc and the
ammonium salt, and heating the aqueous mixture at about 50*
to about 80* C. for about 15 to about 45 minutes until a solution
of modified precondensate is formed, (3) adding from about
1.25 to about 3.75 moles of formaldehyde to the aqueous solu-
tion of modified precondensate and (4) heating the resulting
mixture at about 60* to about 100* C. until the viscosity of an
aqueous solution of the resulting reaction product at a solids
content of 50% is from about U to Z on the Gardner-Holdt
scale.
1029 O.G.— 32
704
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,603
EPIHALOHYDRIN MODIFIED
DICYANDIAMIDE-FORMALDEHYDE CONDENSATES
AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME
Ralph A. Bankert, New Castle, Del., assignor to Hercules Incor-
porated, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,754
Int. aj C08L 61/22
U.S. a. 524—598 13 Claims
1. A process for preparing improved water-soluble thermo-
settable resinous compositions containing dicyandiamide-for-
maldehyde condensates which process comprises (1) forming a
precondensate solution by refluxing for about 1 to about 4
hours an aqueous mixture of (a) a base reaction product of 1
mole of dicyandiamide, 0.75 mole to 1.5 moles of formalde-
hyde and an acid salt of a water-soluble polyaminopolyamide
in an ammount sufficient to provide from about 0.125 to about
0.5 equivalent of basic nitrogen and (b) an ammonium salt in an
amount such that there will be from 0.7 equivalent to about 1.2
equivalents of basic nitrogen derived from the salt of the
polyaminopolyamide and the ammonium salt in the aqueous
medium, (2) adding to the precondensate solution from 0.30 to
0.45 mole of epihalohydrin per equivalent of basic nitrogen
derived from the salt of the polyaminopolyamide and the
ammonium salt' and heating the aqueous mixture at about 50°
to about 80° C. for about 15 to about 45 minutes until a solution
of modified precondensate is formed, (3) adding from about
1.25 to about 3.75 moles of formaldehyde to the aqueous solu-
tion of modified precondensate and heating the resulting mix-
ture at about 60° to about 100° C. until the viscosity of an
aqueous solution of the resulting reaction product at a solids
content of 50% is from about U to Z on the Gardner-Holdt
scale, (4) diluting the solution of step (3), if necessary, to a
solids content less than 35% and (5) adding to the solution of
step (4) from 0.03 to 0.75 mole, per mole of formaldehyde
added in step (3), of epihalohydrin or a nitrogen-containing
compound of the formula NHRR' where R and R' are indepen-
dently hydrogen, alkyl or hydroxyalkyl and, where R is hydro-
gen, R' also is aminoalkyl or an amido group, and heating the
resulting mixture at about 45° to about 70° C. for about 0.5
hour to about 2 hours.
4,380,605
ROOM TEMPERATURE CROSSLINKING
UNSATURATED POLYESTER RESINS
Ronald B. Gallagher, Lancaster, and Michael F. Novits, Boffolo,
both of N.Y., assignors to Pennwalt Corporation, Philadel-
phia, Pa.
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,136
Int. a.3 CD8G 63/76
U.S. a. 525-14 10 Claims
1. A process of crosslinking an unsaturated polyester resin
comprising admixing to said unsaturated resin
(a) an initiating amount of at least one peroxyester,
(b) mercaptobenzothiazole, and
(c) an inorganic metal salt wherein the metal is selected from
the group consisting of iron, copper and a mixture of the
metal salt, and crosslinking the admixture at room temper-
ature.
4380,606
ACRYLIC COPOLYMER
RUBBER/POLYVINYLCHLORIDE
Aubert Y. Coran, and Raman Patel, both of Akron, Ohio, assign-
ors to Monsanto Company, St. Louis, Mo.
FUed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,316
Int. a.3 C08L 33/02. 23/08. 27/06
U.S. a. 525-196 13 claims
1. A thermoplastic composition comprising a blend of about
20 to 98 parts by weight of at least 10% partially neutralized
acid containing acrylic-olefin copolymer rubber, and about 80
to 2 parts by weight of polyvinylchloride (PVC) per 100 parts
by weight of said rubber and PVC combined.
4380 604
RADIATION-HARDENABLE ACRYLIC ACID ESTERS
CONTAINING URETHANE GROUPS AND THEIR USE
Karl-Friedrich Neuhaus; Hermann Perrey; Karl Fuhr; Hans-
Joachim Freier, and Otto Bendszus, aU of Krefeld, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Bayer AktiengeseUschaft, Leverku-
sen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Not. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,813
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 4,
1980, 3045788
Int. aj C08G 18/00. 18/32. 18/62
U.S. a. 524-873 10 Claims
1. A radiation-hardenable binder comprising a reaction
product ester containing hydroxyl groups and hydroxyalkyl
acrylates, which comprises:
(A) 1 NCO gram equivalent of a polyisocyanate containing
from 2 to 3 isocyanate groups per molecule;
(B) from 0.4 to 1.2 OH gram equivalents of an ethylenically-
unsaturated partial ester having an OH number of from 80
to 150 of an alkoxylated trimethylol propane having a
degree of alkoxylation of 3 to 4.5 and acrylic acid or
methacrylic acid or a mixture thereof; and
(C) from 0 to 0.6 OH gram equivalents of a hydroxy alkyl
acrylate or hydroxy alkyl methacrylate or a mixture
thereof containing from 2 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl
group,
wherein the sum total of the OH-gram equivalents of B and C
is between 1 and 1.2.
4380 607
RUBBER COMPOSITION HAVING HIGH MODULUS OF
ELASTICITY AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING SAME
Hiroharu Ikeda, Machida; Kohei Goto, Fukuoka, and Yasuyuki
Shimozato, Yokohama, aU of Japan, assignors to Japan Syn-
thetic Rubber Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,921
Oaims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 28, 1980, 55/55450;
May 27, 1980, 55/69570
Int. a.3 C08L 9/00
VJS. a. 525—232 10 Claims
1. A rubber composition having a high modulus of elasticity
consisting essentially of a dispersion in which fine particles of
a high-melting isotactic poly-a-olefin having a melting point of
at least 150' C. are uniformly dispersed in a rubber matrix, said
fine particles having an average particle size of not more than
200fi.
4,380 608
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG PROPYLENE-ETHYLENE
BLOCK COPOLYMER
Masayoshi Hasno, Yokohama; Yoshinori Suga, Machida; Hisa-
shi Kitada, Yokohama; Yasuo Maruyama, Yokohama, and
Jnnichi Gotoh, Yokohama, aU of Japan, assignors to Mit-
subishi Chemical Industries, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,425
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 6, 1981, 56-32216;
Apr. 21, 1981, 56-60226
Int. a.3 C08F 297/08
U.S. a. 525—247 7 Claims
1. In a continuous process for producing a propylene-ethy-
lene block copolymer in the presence of a catalyst comprising
as main components, a solid titanium-containing catalyst com-
ponent and an organoaluminum compound having the formula
AlR^>Cl3-m
(R' represents a C1.20 hydrocarbon moiety; and m is
3^m>1.5) by producing a homopolymer of propylene or a
propylene-ethylene copolymer by polymerizing propylene or
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
705
both propylene and ethylene at a vapor phase propylene con-
centration of 90 mol % or higher based on the sum of propy-
lene and ethylene in a first step and producing a propylene-
ethylene block copolymer by copolymerizing propylene and
ethylene at a vapor phase propylene concentration of less than
90 mol % based on the sum of propylene and ethylene in the
presence of the polymer resulting from the first step and the
catalyst in a second step, an improvement characterized by
newly adding an aluminum compound having the formula
AlR„2X3-„
(R2 represents a C1.20 hydrocarbon moiety; X represents a
halogen atom and n is 1.5^ n^O) to the components for the
copolymerization in the second step.
-continued
I II r II r ^v
ii— c— c— o-j— c— c— o-f-c—
L H
(^)
H
I
H
4,380,609
PREVULCANIZATION INHIBITORS OF
THIO-TRIAZINE-AMINES FOR RUBBER
Eiichi Morita, Copley, Ohio, assignor to Monsanto Company,
St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,572
Int. a.3 C08C 19/22. 19/20
U.S. CI. 525—348 10 Claims
1. A vulcanizable rubber composition comprising sulfur-vul-
canizable diene rubber, sulfur-vulcanizing agent, organic vul-
canization accelerating agent and, in an amount effective to
inhibit premature vulcanization, a compound of the formula
X
X
RS N N SR
/ N \
R' R'
in which R' is hydrogen or — SR, X is hydrogen, chloro,
alkoxy of 1-5 carbon atoms, alkylthio of 1-5 carbon atoms,
NHR", N(R")2 where R" is R or allyl, NHSR, N(SR)2 or R,
and R is alkyl of 1-12 carbon atoms or alkyl substituted by
cyano, acetoxy, or alkoxycarbonyl of 2-5 carbon atoms, aral-
kyl of 7-10 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 5-8 carbon atoms,
phenyl, or phenyl substituted by chloro, alkyl of 1-5 carbon
atoms, of alkoxy of 1-5 carbon atoms.
O
R2— C— C— O-
4,380,610
POLYACETAL COMB POLYMERS
Jeff T. Fenton, and Mark P. Mack, both of Ponca City, Okla.,
assignors to Conoco Inc., Ponca City, Okla.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,416
Int a.3 C08G 6/00: C08L 61/02
U JS. a. 525—400 1* Claims
1. Comb polymers having a carbon-to-carbon backbone
linkage and pendant polymer chains wherein the polymer
contains at least one structure selected from the group consist-
ing of
t
(a)
R|— C-C-O-^CHz-O-hr—
I
R2— C-C— 0-tCH2— Oijj(—
^?
H
H H
-o-h— c— c— o-
H HP
H H H
-C— C— O-f-C— o-h— c— C— O-
III II
H H H H H
H H H
I I I
-f-c— oijr— c— c— o —
H
H
I
I I
H H
H H
t
-f-C— O-tr— C— C— O
I II
H H H .
(c)
O
Rl— C-C-0-f-CH2-0^jH^
I II
R2— C— C— O-f-CHz— O-Jtf—
R3— C— R4
Rj— C— R*
+■
(d)
Rl— C— C— O-
H H
H
I
H H
-c— c— o-f-c— oif— c— c— o-
II I II
H H H H H
H
H H
r H H .. - -
II I I I 11^
Rz-c-c-oH-c-c-o-ec-ob— C-C-O-
III I ' '
H
H H
rfi
R3-C-R4
R5— C— R6
+
706
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
-continued
-continued
H
I
H
H H
I I
■c— c— o-
I I
H H
H H H
I I I
-fC— O-Jjr-C— C— O-
H
H H
wherein Ri, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6are, independently, hydro-
gen, cycloalicyl groups containing from 6 to 24 carbon atoms,
alkyl groups containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted
alkyl groups containing from 1 to 30 carbon atoms, aryl groups
containing from 6 to 20 carbon atoms or halogen, and wherein
x + 7>100, a and bare >25, m>l and n>l.
3. A method for preparing pwlymers having a carbon-to-car-
bon backbone and having polymeric pendant chains attached
thereto, comprising copolymerizing trioxane and at least one
material selected from the group consisting of polymeric acid
anhydrides, copolymers of olefins and anhydrides, or mixtures
of these, wherein the copolymerization is carried out in the
presence of an inorganic fluoride catalyst at temperatures of
from about 0° C. to about 200° C.
o
■-0
Y3(p)
O
II
O— C
Y4(,)
-II
O
II
C--
X(n)
wherein X is independently selected from the group consisting
of hydrogen, halogen and alkyl radical; Y, Y2, Y3 and Y4 are
the same or different and is an alkyl radical; m, o, p and q are
the same or different and is 0, 1 or 2; n is an integer from 1 to
4; r is an integer from 2 to about 20.
4,380,611
ETHERinED METHYLOL POLYAMIDE
CROSSLINKING AGENT, PROCESS FOR PRODUONG
THE SAME AND RESINS CROSSLINKED THEREWITH
Howard J. Wright, Kansas Qty, Mo., and Joseph H. Scherrer,
Shawnee Mission, Kans., assignors to Cook Paint and Varnish
Company, Kansas City, Mo.
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,439
Int. a.3 C08F 8/00; C08G 8/32. 12/40
U.S. a. 525—418 10 Qaims
1. A cross-linking agent comprising a reaction product pro-
duced by (1) reacting a diester of a di- or poly-carbcxylic acid
with a molar excess of ammonium hydroxide to form a di- or
polyamide, (2) methylolating said di- or polyamide and (3)
etherifying the resulting methylolated di- or polyamide with an
alkanol.
4,380,613
GASKETING AND SEALING COMPOSITION
Larry A. NatiW, Rocky Hill, Conn., assignor to Loctite Corpora-
tion, Newington, Conn.
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,905
Int. a.3 C08L 75/06
U.S. a. 525-440 9 Qaims
1. An adhesive composition, especially useful for gasketing,
comprising
(i) at least one polyester-urethane-methacrylate compound
comprising the reaction product of
(a) toluene diisocyanate; and
(b) the reaction product of a diol adipate having 3 to 6
carbons, with neopentyl glycol, said reactants (a) and
(b) to be reacted in the molor ratio of about 1.7 to 1.9 of
(a) to about 1.0 of (b), and
(ii) a free-radical catalyst system.
\.
1,380,612
HIGH HEAT DISTORTION RESISTANT SEGMENT
ESTER POLYCARBONATES
Victor Mark, Evansville, Ind.; Frederick F. Holub, Schenectady,
N.Y., and Charles V, Hedges, Mt. Vernon, Ind., assignors to
General Electric, Mt. Vernon, Ind.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,863
Int. a.3 C08G 63/64
U.S. a. 525-439 16 Qaims
1. A high molecular weight segment-ester polycartxjnate
composition comprising aromatic carbonate units and aromatic
diester units, said units derived from cyclic bisphenols and said
units having the general formulae 1 and II respectively, the
molar ratio of said aromatic carbonate units to aromatic diester
units being from about 1:9 to about 9:1, and mixtures thereof:
4,380,614
SUSPENSION POLYMERIZATION OF
HALOETHYLENE COMPOUND
Kunizoh Kidoh, and Hideki Wakamori, both of Iwaki, Japan,
assignors to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushlki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 222,924
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1980, 55/29950
Int. C\? C08F 2/20. 114/06
U.S. a. 526-62 4 cudms
1. In a suspension polymerization of a haloethylene com-
pound or a mixture of a haloethylene compound and a como-
nomer thereof in a aqueous medium containing a suspending
agent and an oil soluble catalyst in a reactor, an improvement
characterized by coating a water soluble or organic solvent
soluble lignin derivative on an inner surface of said reactor or
a surface of equipment contained within said reactor or by
incorporating said lignin derivative in said aqueous medium at
a concentration of 1 to 100 ppm based on said haloethylene
compound.
a
Yl(in)
o— c-
Y2(o)
4,380,615
DIAMINE RECOVERY PROCESS
Robert D. Sauerbrunn, Seaford, Del., assignor to E. I. Do Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,914
Int. C\? C08G 69/26
U.S. a. 526-65 8 Claims
1. An improved process for recovering unreacted diamine
vapor in the form of a diamine dicarboxylic acid salt from
water vapor continuously being separated from a reaction zone
in which an aqueous solution of a polyamide-forming salt
prepared from at least one diamine and at least one dicarbox-
ylic acid is being heated and partially reacted to form water
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
707
vapor containing a vapor of said diamine and a polyamide
prepolymer, said process consisting essentially of one in which
a portion of the water vapor is continuously separated from the
reaction zone through a rectifying zone having an upper por-
tion and a lower portion and in which rectifying zone the
water vapor is partially condensed as reflux water containing
unreacted diamine which diamine is recovered by returning
the reflux water from said lower portion to the reaction zone,
wherein the improvement comprises continuously adding a
pre-determined amount of said dicarboxylic acid or acids to the
reflux water in an upper portion of said rectifying zone to form
a water-soluble polyamide-forming salt with unreacted di-
amine contained therein.
least one copolymerizable fluorinated ethylenically unsatu-
rated comonomer of the formula
R|
\
(
/
CI
H
C=CF2.
\
(
/
C=CF2 or
\
R2
/
C=CH2
4,380,616
POLYMERIZATION OF OLEFINS IN THE PRESENCE
OF CHROMIUM-CONTAINING CATALYSTS
Fred L. Vance, Jr.; Rafael E. Guerra, and Christopher P. Chris-
tenson, all of Lake Jackson, Tex., assignors to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,647
Int. a.' C08F 4/02. 4/62
U.S. a. 526—101 1* Claims
1. In a process for polymerizing one or more a-olefins in the
presence of an inorganic oxide supported chromium-contain-
ing catalyst wherein said catalyst has been prepared by con-
tacting said inorganic oxide support with a chromium-contam-
ing compound followed by activation of an oxidizing atmo-
sphere at an elevated temperature for a time sufficient to acti-
vate the catalyst; the improvement which comprises employ-
ing as catalyst one prepared by contacting said inorganic oxide
support with a metallic composition containing zero valent
chromium in the vapor state instead of compounds of such
metals and wherein the polymerization is also conducted m the
presence of a metal alkyl compound.
4,380,617
PREPARATION OF POLYMERS FROM CYCLOOLEHNS
Robert J. Minchak, Parma Heights; Timothy J. Kettering,
Qeveland, and William J. Kroenke, Brecksville, all of Ohio,
assignors to The B. F. Goodrich Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,921
Int. a.s C08F 4/78
U.S. a. 526-161 lOQaims
1. Process for preparing a polymer by ring openmg polymer-
ization comprising polymerizing a norbomene-type monomer,
or a mixture thereof, in presence of an effective amount of at
least one organoammonium catalyst and at least one alkylalu-
minum halide cocatalyst, said norbomene-type monomer is
characterized by the presence of the norbomene group defined
as follows:
wherein Ri is -R/, -R/X. — O-R/. or -O-R/X in which
R/is a perfluoroalkyl radical of 1-5 carbon atoms. — R/ is a
linear perfluoroalkylenediradical of 1-5 carbon atoms in which
the attaching valences are at each end of the linear chain, and
X is H or CI; and R2 is — R/or R/X, by polymerizing tetraflu-
oroethylene alone or with at least one said comonomer present
in an amount sufficient to produce a comonomer unit content
in the copolymer of between 0.005 mole percent and 20 mole
percent, in an aqueous polymerization medium containing a
free-radical initiator and 0.01-0.5 percent dispersing agent,
based on weight of aqueous medium, the improvement which
comprises employing as the dispersing agent 1) a mixture of
compounds of the formula
F-fCF2-CF2)jrCH2-CH2-S03M
wherein n is a cardinal number of between 2-8 and the average
value of n is between 3-6, or 2) a compound of said formula
wherein n is a cardinal number selected from 2-6, and M is a
cation having a valence of 1.
4,380,619
OXY- AND THIOARYL-PHENYLATED AROMATIC
HETEROCYCLIC POLYMERS
Bruce A. Reinhardt, New Carlisle, and Fred E. Arnold, Center-
▼ille, both of Ohio, assignors to The United Stotes of America
as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 366,744
Int. a.3 C08G 2/26. 12/00
U.S. a. 526—259 ^^ Qaims
1. A polymer consisting essentially of recurnng units having
the following formula:
Or
wherein Ar is a monovalent aromatic group containing an oxy
or thio linkage, Ar' is a divalent aromatic group, R is a mono-
valent aromatic group, and Z is a divalent heterocyclic radical
selected from the group consisting of
and said organoammonium catalyst is selected from organoam-
monium molybdates and organoammonium tungstates that are
soluble in said monomer or said monomer mixture.
4,380,618
BATCH POLYMERIZATION PROCESS
Ausat A. Khan, Newark, Del., and Richard A. Morgan, Vienna,
W. Va., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and Company,
Wihnington, Del.
FUed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,019
Int a? C08F 2/00. 14/18
U.S. a. 526-206 ^ 11 Claims
1. In the batch process for preparing tetrafluoroethylene
homopolymer or copolymers of tetraHuoroethylene and at
O
and
708
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
-continued
y CF3 o
and wherein n is an integer having a value such that the poly-
mer has an intrinsic viscosity in the approximate range of 0.25
to 0.75 as measured in N,N-dimethylacetamide at 30° C.
4,380,620
PROCESS FOR PREPARING POLYOXYMETHYLENES
Kazohiko Matsuzaki; Miaoni Hamada, and Hisaya Sakurai, all
of Kurashiki, Japan, assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabu-
shikj Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
per No. PCr/JP80/00307, § 371 Date Aug. 12, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 12, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01712, PCT Pub.
Date Jun. 25, 1981
per Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 293,213
Int. a.3 C08G 2/08
U.S. a. 528-232 20 Qaims
1. A process for preparing polyoxymethylene having a de-
sired molecular weight and improved melt fluidity and pro-
cessability, which comprises: polymerizing formaldehyde in
the presence of an anionic polymerization catalyst and in the
presence of a polyhydric alcohol having at least three alco-
holic hydroxyl groups in the molecule.
4,380,622
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING AUPHATIC
COPOLYESTERAMIDE, AN ALIPHATIC
COPOLYESTERAMIDE AND TUBING MOLDED
THEREFROM
Kazumasa Chiba; Kazuhiko Kobayashi, and Toshio Muraki, all
of Nagoya, Japan, assignors to Toray Industries, Inc., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,334
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 15, 1981, 56-90855:
Jan. 22, 1982, 57-7497
Int. a.3 C08G 63/44. 69/00. 69/44
U.S. CI. 528-288 jg a,,^
1. A process for producing an aliphatic copolyesteramide
which comprises heating a mixture comprising substantially
(A) from about 5 to 80 parts by weight of ester-forming
components comprising
(a) aliphatic diols having 2 to 6 carbon atoms and
(3) aliphatic dicarboxylic acids having 9 to 12 carbon
atoms and
(B) from about 95 to 20 parts by weight of amide-forming
components comprising at least one component selected
from the group consisting of
(a) aliphatic co-aminocarboxylic acids having 11 to 12
carbon atoms and
(b) equimolar salt of
(a) aliphatic diamines having 6 to 12 carbon atoms and
(fi) aliphatic dicarboxylic acids having 9 to 12 carbon
atoms,
at temperatures of about 150* to 260° C, substantially under an
atmospheric pressure, in the presence of catalysts and in the
substantially absence of water, whereby catalytic esterification
is carried out and subsequently heating the resulting esterified
product at temperatures of about 200" to 300° C. under a re-
duced pressure, whereby polycondensation is carried out.
22. An aliphatic copolyesteramide comprising substantially
(A) from about 5 to 50 percent by weight of ester unit repre-
sented by the following general formula (I)
-f-0(CH2)A— O-C— (CH2)r-Ci-
(I)
4 igg ^21
FAST CRYSTALLIZING POLYESTER COMPOSITIONS
Eric Nield, Watton-at-Stone; Darid E. Higgins, Wheathamp-
stead, and Mark "W. Young, Barbican, all of England, assign-
ors to Imperial Chemical Industries Limited, London, England
FUed Not. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 210,754
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 12, 1979,
7942872; Mar. 12, 1980, 8008298
Int. a.J C08G 63/16. 63/20
U.S. a. 528-287 9 cUdnM
1 A fast crystallizing polyester wherein the polyester has an
intrinsic viscosity of greater than 0.3 as measured on a 1%
solution of the polyester in OHihlorophenol at 25' C. and at
least 90 mole % of the repeating units of the polyester are
selected from ethylene terephthalate or tetramethylene tere-
phthalate units in which at least some of the acid end groups of
the polyester have the formula — Y-M+ where M is an alka-
line metal ion and Y is a carboxylate anion, which ionised end
groups have been produced during polymerization of the poly-
ester by
reaction of an alkaline metal salt or corresponding base with
acid end groups of the polyester produced during the
polymerization,
the concentration of groups of formula Y-M+ in the polyester
being sufficient to reduce the crystallization peak temperature
on heating (Tn) by at least 5' C. in comparison with the same
polyester in the absence of the ionic groups.
wherein k denotes an integer of 2 to 6 and 1 denotes an integer
of 7 to 10, and
(B) from about 95 to 50 percent by weight of at least one
amide unit selected from the group consisting of (a) the
unit represented by the following general formula (II),
-f-HN-(CH2)m-Ci-
II
O
(II)
wherein m denotes an integer of 10 to 11, and (b) the unit
represented by the following general formula (III)
-f-HN-(CH2)„-NH-C-(CH2);,-C-h
O O
(III)
wherein n denotes an integer of 6 to 12 and p denotes an integer
of 7 to 10, said aliphatic copolyesteramide having a relative
viscosity of from about 1.4 to 4.0 and a glass transition temper-
ature below about room temperature.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
709
4,380,623
PREPARATION OF POLYAMmE FROM DINTTRILE,
DIAMINE, WATER, AND CO2 CATALYST
Janice L. Greene, Chagrin Falls, and Roman Loza, Solon, both
of Ohio, assignors to Standard OU Company, Qeveland, Ohio
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,797
Int a.5 C08G 69/00
U.S. a. 528—335 6 Claims
1. A process for preparing a solid polyamide comprising
contacting a diamine with water, a dinitrile and a catalytic
amount of carbon dioxide.
4,380,625
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF PURIFIED
AMINOGLYCOSIDE ANTIBIOTICS
Peter Stadler, Hann; Wolfgang Koebemick, Wuppertal; Samir
Samaan, Wnppertal, and Wolfgang Gan, Wuppertal, aU of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengeaellschaft,
Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,640
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 11,
1980^ 3000841
Int a.3 C07H 15/22
U.S. a. 536—13.9 16 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a pure aminoglycoside
antibiotic, which comprises acylating or arylsulphenylating
(a) a pre-purified compound of the formula
4380 624
NOVEL ISOMERS OF BUFALIN AND RESIBUFOGENIN
AND THEIR PREPARATION
Karel Wiesner, and Thomas Y. R. Tsai, both of Fredericton,
Canada, assignors to Advance Biofactures Corp., Lynbrook,
N.Y.
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,763
Int. a.3 A61K il/705, 31/58
U.S. a. 536—5 14 Claims
1. A compound having the general formula
X— O
(I)
W O— Y
wherein
X denotes a radical of the formulae
HO
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of
% °
U "^ O-o.
2. A compound having the general formula
R
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of
O,
H
I
6 CH2— NH2 CH2NCH3 CH2NH2
O }— O }— O
NH2
H
I
NCH3
NH2
I I
H3C— CH H3C— CH
HO
H3C
o-a.
and wherein S is selected from the group consisting of sug-
ars.
HO
NH2 NH2 NH2
Y denotes a radical of the formulae
OH
OH
R denotes a hydrogen atom or an ethyl group,
Rl denotes a Ci to Q alkyl group, and one of the radicals Z
or W denotes hydrogen and the other radical Z or W
denotes hydrogen or hydroxyl,
to give a compound of the formula
710
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(11)
x— o
W O— Y'
wherein
X' represents a radical of the formulae
* CH2— NHR2 CH2NCH3 CH2NHR2
O J— O ^- O
4,380,627
CATIONIC COMPOUNDS
Willy Stingelin, Reinach, and Peter Loew, Miinchensteiii, both
of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Anisley,
N.Y.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,421
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 10, 1980,
2757/80
Int. a.3 C07D 251/70. 417/12. 417/04, 401/14
U.S. a. 542-423 14 Qaims
1. A cationic compound of the formula
NHR2
3e
N
Y Y
N N
Y
I An
e
wherein
Z groups independently of one another are each a radical of
the formula
NHR2 NHR2
Y' represents a radical of the formulae
-\Q
^^CH=CH— NH— <^ I ^
A— Y—
B is identical to Z or is a cationic radical different from Z
selected from the group of
OH
OH
the radicals R2 are identical or different and represent a
hydrogen atom or an acyl or arylsulphenyl protective
group, with the proviso that at most two of the radicals
R2 represent hydrogen atoms, and
R, R|, Z and W have the abovementioned meaning,
(b) subjecting the compound of the formula (II) from step (a)
to liquid/liquid extraction in a two-phase aqueous/organic
solvent system and isolating said compound of the For-
mula (II) from the extracts, and
(c) then splitting off the protective group(s).
-N
H
— N H >
-N
H
H
O
or
— N
H
H
N
rqj2
— N' ^CH2— N
[-NH(CH2);,-N(Ri)3]®, [-NH(CH2)p-NH(R02]®,
4,380,626
HORMONAL PLANT GROWTH REGULATOR
Jozscf Szejtli; Zsnzsanna Budai; Magda Tetenyi nee Erdosi, and
Gabriella Pap nee Imrenyi, all of Budapest, Hungary, assign-
ors to Chinoin Gyogyszer es Vegyeszeti Tennekek Gyara
R.Tn Budapest, Hungary
FUed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,206
Claims priority, application Hungary, Dec. 28, 1979, CI 2000
lat C\? C08B 37/16
UJS. CL 536—103 10 Claims
1. An inclusion complex of 2-chloroethylphosphonic acid
formed with a-, ;8- and/or y-cyclodextrin.
[-N(R,)3]® or
-NH-/^^
N(R)3 H
®
wherein the radicals R and R| are as defmed below and p
is 2 or 3;
R groups independently of one another are each (1) hydro-
gen, (2) unsubstituted or substituted Ci-C4-alkyl wherein
the substituent is Ci-C4-alkoxy, CN, halogen, phenyl,
CONH2, CONHCi-C4-alkyl or CON(Ci-C4-alkyl)2, (3)
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
711
unsubstituted or substituted Ci-C4-alkoxy wherein the
substituent is phenyl, (4) NO2, (5) unsubstituted or substi-
tuted benzoylamino or acetylamino wherein the substitu-
ent is halogen, NH2, NHCi-C4-alkyl or N(Ci-C4-alkyl)2,
(6) halogen or (7) CN;
Rl groups independently of one another are each (1) unsub-
stituted or substituted Ci-C4-alkyl wherein the substituent
is Ci-C4-aIkoxy, CN, halogen, phenyl, Ci-C4-alkyl substi-
tuted phenyl, halophenyl or CONH2 or (2) C3-C4-alkenyl;
X is a sulfur atom or the group
\ /
C
/ \
Rl
Rl
wherein Ri is as defined above or in which both Ri radi-
cals can be linked with each other to form a carbocyclic S-
or 6-membered ring;
A is the direct bond, — NH-alkylene (C1-C4), — O-alkylene
(C1-C4), alkylene (C1-C4), phenylene, — O-phenylene or
— NH-phenylene;
Y is — NH— , — NRi— , — O— or — S— ; and
An is an anion.
4,380,628
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
AZOLYL-VINYL KETONES
Hans-Ludwig Elbe, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Set. No. 219,154
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 10,
1980, 3000643
Int. a.3 C07D 2iim, 249/08
U.S. a. 542—429 15 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of an azolyl-vinyl ketone of
the formula
R'— CO— C=CH— r2
I
II ^
r
N
in which
R' represents straight-chain or branched alkyl with 1 to 6
carbon atoms, straight-chain or branched halogenoalkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 to 5 identical or different
halogen atoms, or aryl which has 6 to 10 carbon atoms and
optionally carries one or more substituents selected inde-
pendently from halogen, straight-chain or branched alkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon 'atoms, alkoxy and alkylthio with in
either case 1 to 2 carbon atoms, halogenoalkyl with up to
2 carbon atoms and up to 5 identical or different halogen
atoms, cyano, nitro, optionally halogen-substituted phenyl
and optionally halogen-substituted phenoxy,
R2 represents straight-chain or branched alkyl with 1 to 12
carbon atoms; straight-chain or branched halogenoalkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 to S identical or different
halogen atoms; aryl which has 6 to 10 carbon atoms and
optionally carries one or more substituents selected inde-
pendently from halogen, straight-chain or branched alkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, halogenoalkyl with up to 2
carbons atoms and up to S identical or different halogen
atoms, cyano, nitro, optionally halogen-substituted phenyl
and optionally halogen-substituted phenoxy; cycloalkyl
with 3 to 7 carbon atoms or cycloalkenyl with S to 7
carbon atoms, in either case optionally substituted by alkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; cycloalkylalkyl which has 3 to
7 carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl part and 1 to 4 carbon
atoms in the straight-chain or branched alkyl part and is
optionally substituted by alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
cycloalkenylalkyl which has 5 to 7 carbon atoms in the
cycloalkenyl part and 1 to 4 carbon atoms in the straight-
chain or branched alkyl part and is optionally substituted
by alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; furyl or thiophenyl
which in either case is optionally substituted by halogen or
straight-chain or branched alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
alkoxyalkyl or alkylmercaptoalkyl with in either case 1 to
4 carbon atoms in each alkyl part; optionally substituted
straight-chain or branched alkenyl, alkynyl or alkenynyl
with in each case up to 6 carbon atoms, the substituents
being selected from hydroxyl, alkoxy with 1 to 4 carbon
atoms and phenyl which is optionally substituted by halo-
gen; indenyl or fluorenyl which in either case is optionally
substituted by halogen, alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms or
alkoxy with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; diphenyl- or triphenyl-
methyl, wherein each phenyl optionally carries one or
more substitutents selected independently from halogen,
straight-chain or branched alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
alkoxy and alkylthio with in either case 1 to 2 carbon
atoms, halogenoalkyl with up. to 2 carbon atoms and up to
5 identical or different halogen atoms, cyano, nitro, op-
tionally halogen-substituted phenyl and optionally halo-
gen-substituted phenoxy; or the grouping
RJ
■CH— R* or
R5
X —I
— c
.R*
R^ represents hydrogen, cyano, straight-chain or branched
alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, akenyl or alkynyl with in
either case 2 to 4 carbon atoms, or the grouping — CO2R*,
— CONR'RS, — S02NR'R8 or — SO3H,
R^ represents aryl which has 6 to 10 carbon atoms and op-
tionally carries one or more substituents selected indepen-
dently from halogen, straight-chain or branched alkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy and alkylthio with in
either case 1 to 2 carbon atoms, halogenoalkyl with up to
2 carbon atoms and up to S identical or different halogen
atoms, cyano, nitro, optionally halogen-substituted phenyl
and optionally halogen-substituted phenoxy; furyl or thio-
phenyl which in either case is optionally substituted by
halogen or alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; dioxolanyl or
dithiolanyl which in either case is optionally substituted
by alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxyalkyl with 1 to 4
carbon atoms in each alkyl part or benzyl; cyano, or the
grouping — C02R^ or — SO2R',
R' represents hydrogen; straight-chain or branched alkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; cycloalkyl which has 5 to 7
carbon atoms and is optionally substituted by alkyl with 1
to 2 carbon atoms; aryl which has 6 to 10 carbon atoms
and optionally carries one or more substitutents selected
independently from halogen, straight-chain or branched
alky] with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy and alkylthio with
in either case 1 to 2 carbon atoms, halogenoalkyl with up
to 2 carbon atoms and up to S identical or different halo-
gen atoms, cyano, nitro, optionally halogen-substituted
phenyl and optionally halogen-substituted phenoxy;
R^ represents hydrogen; straight-chain or branched alkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; alkoxyalkyl with 1 to 4 carbon
atoms in each alkyl part; or benzyl which optionally
carries on the phenyl part one or more substitutents se-
lected independently from halogen, straight-chain or
branched alkyl with I to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy and
alkylthio with in either case I to 2 carbon atoms, halogen-
oalkyl with up to 2 carbon atoms and up to 5 identical or
different halogen atoms, cyano, nitro, optionally halogen-
substituted phenyl and optionally halogen-substituted
phenoxy,
R' and R' are identical or different and each represent
straight-chain or branched alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
712
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
R' represents straight-chain or branched alkyl with 1 to 4
carbon atoms; or phenyl which optionally carries one or
more substitutents selected independently from halogen,
straight chain or branched alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
alkoxy and alkylthio with in either case 1 to 2 carbon
atoms, halogenoalkyl with up to 2 carbon atoms and up to
4 identical or different halogen atoms, cyano, nitro, op-
tionally halogen-substituted phenyl and optionally halo-
gen-substituted phenoxy, comprising reacting a keto-ena-
mine of the formula
R'— CO— C=CH— N
I
^ I
N II
/
\
RlO
R'>
ROnS
m
... which R represents an alkyl or phenyl group, Ri and R2
independently represent a lower alkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl
group, or an alkoxyalkyl group, R3 represents hydrogen, an
alkyl group, a halogen, a nitrile group, an aromatic group or a
phenoxy group, Y represents O or S, Z represents an alkylene
radical or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, with or without alkyl sub-
stituent(s), necessary for forming a ring structure together with
in which
R'° and R" are identical or different and each
represent alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, with an organo-
metallic compound of the formula
Z— r2
in which
Z represents the group Hal-Mg or an alkali metal or the
grouping LiCuR^, and
Hal represents halogen,
in the presence of a solvent.
14. A keto-enamine of the formula
Rio
/
R'— CO— C=CH— N
' \ n
N^ Rll
N
in which
R' represents, straight-chain or branched alkyl with 1 to 6
carbon atoms, straight-chain or branched halogenoalkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 to 5 identical or different
halogen atoms or aryl which has 6 to 10 carbon atoms and
optionally carries one or more substituents selected inde-
pendently from halogen, straight-chain or branched alkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy and alkylthio with in
either case 1 to 2 carbon atoms, halogenoalkyl with up to
2 carbon atoms and up to 5 identical or different halogen
atoms, cyano, nitro, optionally halogen-substituted phenyl
and optionally halogen-substituted phenoxy,
Y is nitrogen or the CH group, and
R'Oand R" each independently is alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon
atoms.
4,380,629
STYRYL-LIKE COMPOUNDS SHOWING A
COLOR-DEVELOPING AND BLEACHING BEHAVIOR
WITH IMPROVED STABILITY AND PROLONGED
LIFETIME
Akio Yanuuhita, Machida, and Masaakj Hayami, Okayama,
both of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial
Company, l.imitfii, Osaka, Japan
FUed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,374
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 21, 1980, 55-53268
Int a.3 C07D 498/04
US. a. 542—455 9 Claims
1. A styryl-like compound showing a color-developing and
bleaching behavior with improved stability and prolonged
lifetime and represented by the general formula
— N— C— Y— ,
A represents a residue of an aromatic aldehyde, selected from
the group consisting of benzaldehyde, p-acetaminobenzalde-
hyde, p-bromobenzaldehyde, m-bromobenzaldehyde, o-
bromobenzaldehyde, p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde, p-die-
thylaminobenzaldehyde, p-dibutylaminobenzaldehyde, o-
chlorobenzaldehyde, p-chlorobenzaldehyde, p-anisaldehyde,
o-anisaldehyde, p-tolualdehyde, m-tolualdehyde, o-tolualde-
hyde, o-ethoxybenzaldehyde, p-ethoxybenzaldehyde, p-
fluorobenzaldehyde, o-fluorobenzaldehyde, p-nitrobenzalde-
hyde, m-nitrobenzaldehyde, o-nitrobenzaldehyde, p-
cyanobenzaldehyde, o-cyanobenzaldehyde, 2,4-dichloroben-
zaldehyde, 2,6-dichlorobenzaldehyde, 3,4-dichlorobenzalde-
hyde, 3,5-dichlorobenzaldehyde, 2,4-dimethoxybenzaldehyde,
2,5-dimethoxybenzaldehyde, 3,4-dimethoxybenzaldehyde,
3,5-dimethoxybenzaldehyde, 2,4-dimethylbenzaldehyde, 2,5-
dimethylbenzaldehyde, 3,4-dimethylbenzaldehyde, 3,5-dime-
thylbenzaldehyde, veratraldehyde(3,4-dimethoxybenzalde-
hyde), 4-isopropylbenzaldehyde, o-(2-chloroethyl)benzalde-
hyde, 2,4,6-trimethylbenzaldehyde(mesitylaldehyde), 2,4,6-
triethoxybenzaldehyde, 3,4-dimethyl-p-anisaldehyde, 2,5-
dimethyl-p-anisaldehyde, 2-chloro-5-nitrobenzaldehyde, 2-
chloro-6-nitrobenzaldehyde, 2-chloro-3-nitrobenzaldehyde,
5-chloro-2-nitrobenzaldehyde, vanilin, o-vanilin, iso-vanilin,
5-bromo-vanilin, 2-chloro-4-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde, 2-
chloro-6-fluorobenzaldehyde, 5-bromo-veratraldehyde, 6-
bromo-veratraldehyde, 5-bromo-2-methoxybenzaldehyde,
1-naphthaladhyde, 2-naphthaladehyde, p-dimethylaminocin-
namaldehyde, p-diethylcinnamaldehyde, p-nitrocinnamalde-
hyde, o-nitrocinnamaldehyde, 2-chlorocinnamaldehyde, 9-
anthraldehyde, lO-chloro-9-anthraldehyde, 9-phenan-
threnecarboxaldehyde and fluorencarboxaldehyde; a heterocy-
clic aldehyde, selected from the group consisting of furfural,
5-methylfurfural, 5-bromofurfural, 4-isopropylfurfural, 2-thio-
phenecarboxaldehyde, 5-methylthiophenecarboxaldehyde,
9-methoxythiophene-2-carboxaldehyde, 2-pyridinecarboxalde-
hyde, 3-pyridinecarboxaldehyde, 4-pyridinecarboxaldehyde,
1 -ethylindole-3-carboxaldehyde, 1 -methylindoIe-3-carboxalde-
hyde, l-methyl-2-phenylindole-3-carboxaldehyde, N-methyl-
carbazole-2-carboxaldehyde, N-ethyl-7-bromocarbazole-2-car-
boxaldehyde, N-(n-octyl)-7-nitrocarbazole-2-carboxaldehyde,
benzofuran-2-carboxaldehyde, dibenzofuran-2-carboxalde-
hyde, pyrrole-2-aldehyde, N-methylpyrrole-2-aldehyde, N-
phenylpyrrole-2-aldehyde, 3-methylpyrrole-2-aldehyde, 2-
ethylpyrTole-5-aldehyde, benzothiazole-2-aldehyde, 6-methyl-
benzothiazole-2-aldehyde, 6-chlorobenzothiazole-2-aldehyde,
5-chlorobenzothiazole-2-aldehyde, 6-methoxybenzothiazole-2-
aldehyde, S,6-dichlorobenzothiaz(ole-2-aldehyde, ben-
zoselenazole-2-aldehyde, 6-methoxybenzoselenazole-2-alde-
hyde, 2,4-dimethylpyrrole-2-aldehyde, 4,6-dichloropyruni-
dine-5-carboxaldehyde, 2-formyl-4,6-dtmethylpyrimidine,
quinoline-2-aldehyde, acridine-10-aldehyde, 2,4-diphenyl-
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
713
5,6,7-hexahydrobenzopyran-8-carboxaldehyde, and 2,4-diphe-
nyl-6-methyl-5,6,7-pentahydrobenzopyran-8-carboxaldehyde;
an aromatic nitroso compound selected from the group consist-
ing of p-dimethylaminonitrosobenzene, p-diethylaminonitroso-
benzene, p-methylnitroxobenzene (p-nitrosotoluene), p-
nitronitrosobenzene, o-nitronitrosobenzene, and 3-nitroso-2-
nitrotoluene; or a heterocyclic nitroso compound selected
from the group consisting of 3-nitrosoindoIe, 2-methyl-3-
nitrosoindole (3-nitrosomethyl-ketol), 3-nitroso-2-phenyIin-
dole and the like, and n is an integer of 2 or 3.
4,380,630
N-CARBOXY CEFADROXIL SODIUM SALT
Marco Faldani, and Renato Broggi, both of Milan, Italy, assign-
ors to Dobfar S.p.A., MUan, Italy
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,311
Oaims priority, application Italy, Apr. 1, 1980, 21096 A/80
Int. a.3 C07D 501/22
U.S. a. 544—30 1 Qaim
1. The N-carboxy cefadroxil disodium salt having formula
"°^^
CH— CO— NH-
I
NH
CCX)Na
O*
t^ 1
COONa
alkyl substituents having a nitrogen, oxygen sulfur or SO2
moiety in the chain or in a cyclic arrangement;
R' = hydrogen, aryl, alkyl, alkenyl or haloalkyl; A, B. D, E,
represent nitrogen or carbon atoms with up to 3 of said A,
B, and D, representing nitrogen and the balance represent-
ing carbon atoms;
n is an integer from 0 to 4 which comprises saponifying a
compound of the formula
(R),
^E II I
'-H^i)
01)
wherein
R, E, D, B, A, and R' have the previously assigned signifi-
cance by contacting the same with at least a stoichiomet-
ric amount of water in the presence of an acid catalyst in
an amount of O.OS to 3 weight percent under a pressure of
4 to 8 bars distilling out the alkanol, neutralizing the acid,
and thereafter decarboxylating the so-saponifled com-
pound without isolating the product of saponification.
4,380,631
PREPARATION OF CAFFEINE
Kaspar Bott, Wachenheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,839
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 7,
1981, 3113880
Int. a.3 C07D 473/12
U.S. a. 544—275 2 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of caffeine which comprises
reacting methanol and carbon monoxide with an alkali metal
salt of theophylline at a temperature of from 120' to 170° C.
and under a carbon monoxide pressure of from 25 to 100 bar.
4,380,632
METHOD OF PREPARING QUINOLINES,
NAPHTHYRIDINES AND OTHER NITROGEN
BI-HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
Klaus-Dieter Steffen, Hennef, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft, Troisdorf, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,432
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 28,
1980, 3028520
Int a.3 C07D 471/00. 487/00. 215/16. 215/20
U.S. a. 544—279 21 Claims
1. A method for preparing a nitrogen heterocyclic of the
formula
(R);
R'
wherein
R= hydrogen, halogen, nitro, amino, keto, alkyl, alkenyl,
substituted aryl, unsubstituted aryl, haloalkyl or aryl or
4,380,633
METHINE DYES FROM TETRAHYDROQUINOLINE
COMPOUNDS CONTAINING N-THIOETHER
SUBSTITUENTS
Clarence A. Coates, Jr., and Max A. Wearer, both of Kingsport,
Tenn., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester,
N.Y.
Di?ision of Ser. No. 26,846, Apr. 4, 1979, lat No. 4,260,742,
which is a division of Ser. No. 802,090, May 31, 1977, Pat No.
4,161,601. This appUcation Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 212,049
Int. a.3 C07D 401/12. 413/12. 417/12
U.S. a. 544—316 9 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
NC
\
<
C=HC
(D
wherein X is selected from cyano, carbamoyl, lower alkylcar-
bamoyl, lower alkoxycarbonyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, and
phenylsulfonyl; R, R', and R^are independently selected from
hydrogen and lower alkyl; R^ is selected from hydrogen, lower
alkyl, lower alkoxy, fluorine, chlorine, and bromine; R^ is
lower alkylene; and R' is selected from hydroxyethyl, acetoxy-
ethyl, cyclohexyl, methylcyclohexyl, p-chlorophenylethyl,
pyridyl, quinolyl, pyhmidinyl, thiadiazolyl, pyrazyl, and ox-
diazolyl radicals.
714
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,634
METHOD OF PREPARING
2-KETO-4,6,8,8-TETRAMETHYL-8,9-DIHYDRO-2H-
PYRANO.(3,2-G) QUINOLINE, A BLUE-GREEN LASER
DYE
Ronald L. Atkins, Ridgecrest, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No, 951,907, Oct. 16, 1978,
abandoned. This application Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,014
Int. Cl.^ C07D 471/04
U.S. a. 546—89 2 Qaims
1. A method for preparing 2-keto-4,6,8,8-tetramethyl-8,9-
dihydro-2H-pyrano{3,2-g) quinoline consisting of:
mixing m-aminophenol and ethyl acetoacetate in the molar
ratio of approximately 1 :2 to form a mixture in the absence
of a catalyst, or solvent;
heating said mixture at 150° C; and
filtering 2-keto-4,6,8,8-tetramethyl-8,9-dihydro-2H-
pyrano(3,2-g) quinoline.
4,380,635
SYNTHESIS OF ACYLATED BENZOTHIOPHENES
Mary K. Peters, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to Eli Lilly and
Company, Indianapolis, Ind.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 246,333, Apr. 3, 1981,
abandoned. This application Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,046
Int. a.3 C07D 333/64
U.S. a. 546—202 13 Oaims
1. A process for preparing a compound of the formula
HO
^^OCH2CH2N
/
\
R'
R2
wherein R' and R2 are independently C1-C4 alkyl, or combine
to form C4-C6 polymethylene, — CH2CH(CH3)CH2CH2— or
— (CH2)20(CH2)2— ; which process comprises acylating a
compound of the formula
H3CO
OCH3
in the presence of aluminum chloride or aluminum bromide
with an acylating agent of the formula
-?o
OCH2CH2N
\
R'
R2
wherein R* is chloro or bromo; and adding to the reaction
mixture a sulfur compound chosen from the group consisting
of methionine and compounds of the formula
X-S— Y
wherein X is hydrogen or unbranched C1-C4 alkyl, and Y is
C1-C4 alkyl or phenyl.
4,380,636
PROCESS FOR FORMING ESTERS (II)
James M. Renga, and Pen-Chung Wang, both of Midland,
Mich., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 295,429, Aug. 24, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,587
Int C\? C07D 211/78. 333/24; C07C 79/46. 69/76
U.S. CI. 546—326 14 Qaims
1. A process for preparing an ester or polyester correspond-
ing to the formula:
o o 00
II It II II
R-(-CORi% . Ri'-(-CR);„ or i-R^OC-)-^RCO-)
wherein
m and n are one or two;
R is an aromatic or aliphatic moiety of up to 20 carbons
having valence n selected from the group consisting of
carbocyclic or nitrogen-, sulfur- or oxygen-containing
heterocyclic aromatic groups, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkylene
or cycloalkylene groups and derivatives thereof contain-
ing noninterfering substituents;
Ri' is Ri or a group of up to about 20 carbons having valence
m selected from the group consisting of primary alkyl,
substituted primary alkyl, primary alkylene, substituted
primary alkylene and substituted aryl wherein the ring
substituent or substituents are electron-withdrawing
groups located in the ortho- or para-position; and
Rl is a moiety of up to about 6 carbons having valence m
selected from the group consisting of primary alkyl, pri-
mary alkylene, cycloalkyl, and primary alkenyl,
provided that in at least one occurrence Ri' is not Ri,
comprising contacting a carboxylic acid of the formula R— (-
COOH)„ wherein R and n are as previously defined with an
organic ester of trichloroacetic acid corresponding to the
formula
O
II
Rl-tOCCCl3)m
wherein Ri and m are as previously defined in the presence of
a catalytic amount of an initiator at a temperature from about
100° C. to about 180° C. in the presence of an electrophilic
halide esterifying agent of up to about 20 carbons selected from
the group consisting of primary alkyl halides, substituted pri-
mary alkyl halides, primary alkylene dihalides, substituted
primary alkylene dihalides and ring-substituted aromatic ha-
lides wherein the ring substituent or substituents are strongly
electron-withdrawing groups located in the ortho- or para-
position and subsequently recovering the ester or polyester
formed.
4,380,637
IMIDAZOLINE PHOSPHOBETAINES
Martin K. O. Lindemann, Bridgewater; Raymond L. Mayhew,
Summit; Anthony J. O'Lenick, Jr., Fairlawn, and Robert J.
Verdicchio, Succasunna, all of N J., assignors to Johnson A
Johnson/Mona Industries, Inc., New Brunswick, N J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 95,182, Not. 16, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 965,461, Nov. 30, 1978, Pat. No.
4,215,064. This appUcation Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,728
Int a.3 C07F 9/65
U.S. a. 548— 112 6 Claims
1. Phosphobetaine compound of the formula
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
715
R®— Y— O— P— B
I
A J
x.e
wherein
A is selected from O©, OM and — O— Y— R®;
B is selected from O© and OM';
X© is an anion;
z is an integer from 0 to 2; with the proviso that only one of
A and B can be O© and z is of a value necessary for charge
balance;
Y is — CH2— CH— CHz— ;
OH
M is selected from hydrogen and a salt radical selected from
alkali metals alkaline earth metals and mono, di- or trietha-
nolamine;
M' is an organic radical selected from alkyl, hydroxyalkyl or
polyhydroxyalkyl of up to 6 carbon atoms; and
R is a 2-alkyl-l-hydroxyethyl imidazoline of the formula
CH2 CH2
N N— CH2CH2OH
C
I
R'
wherein
R' is alkyl of from 5 to 21 carbon atoms.
4,380,638
CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS
Ronnie R. Crenshaw, Dewitt, and Aldo A. Algieri, Fayetteviile,
both of N.Y., assignors to Bristol-Myers Company, New
York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 240,034, Mar. 3, 1981, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 163,831, Jul. 7, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 117,182,
Jan. 31, 1980, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 72,517, Sep. 4, 1979, abandoned. This application Jun. 23,
1981, Ser. No. 276,602
Int. a.3 C07D 285/10
U.S. a. 548—135 23 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
(0)p
R>2 R^
wherein p is 1 or 2;
R' is a leaving group selected from halogen, (lower)alkoxy,
Oower)alkylthio, phenoxy, phenylthio, substituted phe-
noxy and substituted phenylthio wherein the phenyl ring
may contain 1 or 2 substituents selected from halogen,
(lower)alkyl, (lower)alkoxy and nitro; and
Rl2 is A(CH2)mZ(CH2)„NH- R2r3N- or
HS(CH2)nNH— ; in which R2 and R^ each are indepen-
dently hydrogen, (lower)alkyl, Oower)alkenyl, Oower-
)alkynyl, cycloOower)alkylGower)alkyl, hydroxyOower-
)alkyl, Oower)alkoxy(lower)alkyl, Oower)alkylthioOow-
er)alkyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl or cyanoOow-
er)alkyl, or, when R2 is hydrogen, R^ may also be cyclo(-
lower)alkyl, aminoOower)alkyl, (lower)alkylaminoOow-
er)alkyl, di(lower)alkylamino(lower)alkyl, pyrTolidino(-
lower)alkyl, piperidino(lower)alkyl, piperazinoOower)al-
kyl, substituted pyridylOower)alkyl wherein the pyridyl
ring may contain one substituent selected from (lowcr)al-
kyl, (lower)alkoxy, hydroxy, amino and halogen, ammo.
(lower)alkylamino, di(lower)alkylamino, hydroxy,
(lower)alkoxy, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl, cyano, amidino,
(lower)alkylamidino, phenyl, phenylOower)alkyl, substi-
tuted phenyl or substituted phenyl(lower)alkyl, wherein
the phenyl ring may contain one or two substituents inde-
pendently selected from Oower)alkyl, hydroxy, (lower)al-
koxy and halogen or one substituent selected from methyi-
enedioxy, trifluoromethyl and di(lower)alkylamino; or R^
and R^ taken together, may be — CH2CH2X(CH2);— ;
r is an integer of from 1 to 3, inclusive;
X is methylene, sulfur, oxygen or N— R^, provided that,
when p is 2 and R^ is methoxy, R^ and R^ taken together
with the nitrogen to which they are attached, may not be
morpholino, and that, when r is 1, X is methylene;
R* is hydrogen, (lower)alkyl, (lower)alkenyl, (lower)alky-
nyl, (lower)alkanoyl or benzoyl;
m is an integer of from zero to 2, inclusive;
n is an integer of from 2 to 4, inclusive;
Z is sulfur, oxygen or methylene;
A is phenyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxazolyl,
isoxazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, furyl, thi-
enyl or pyridyl; provided that A may contain one or two
substituents, the first substituent being selected from (low-
er)alkyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, halogen, amino, hy-
droxymethyl, (lower)alkoxy,
-(CH2VN=C
/
\
NHR
14
and — (CH2)flNR5R6
NHR"
and the second substituent being selected from (lower)al-
kyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, halogen, amino, hydroxy-
methyl and (lower)alkoxy;
q is an integer of from 0 to 6, inclusive;
R'4 and R'' independently are hydrogen or (lower)alkyl, or
if R'* is hydrogen, R" also may be (lower)alkanoyl or
benzoyl, or R'* and R*', taken together, may be ethylene;
and
R5 and R^ each are independently hydrogen, (lower)alkyl.
(lower)alkenyl, (lower)alkynyl, (lower)alkoxy(lower)al-
kyl, cyclo{lower)alkyl or phenyl, provided that R' and R*
may not both be cyclo{lower)alkyl or phenyl; or R' and
R6, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they
are attached, may be pyrrolidino, methylpyrrolidino,
dimethylpyrrolidino, piperidino, methylpiperidino, dime-
thylpiperidino, hydroxypiperidino, homopiperidino, hep-
tamethyleneimino or octamethyleneimino;
or a salt, hydrate, solvate or N-oxide thereof.
4,380,639
SUBSTITUTED 1,2,5-THIADIAZOLE DERIVATIVES
Ronnie R. Crenshaw, Dewitt, and Aldo A. Algieri, FayettCTille,
both of N.Y., assignors to Bristol-Myers Company, New
York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 240,034, Mar. 3, 1981, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 163,831, Jul. 7, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 117,182,
Jan. 31, 1980, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 72,517, Sep. 4, 1979, abandoned. This application Jun. 23,
1981, Ser. No. 276,606
Int a.3 C07D 285/10
VS. a. 548—135 5 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
716
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(0)p
HS(CH2)„NH NR2r3
wherein
p is 1 or 2;
n is an integer of from 2 to 4, inclusive;
R2 and R3 each are independently hydrogen, (lower)alkyl,
Gower)alkenyl, (lower)alkynyl, cyclo(lower)alkyl(lower-
)alkyl, hydroxy(lower)alkyl, (lower)alkoxy(lower)alkyl,
(lower)alkylthio(lower)alkyl, 2-nuoroethyl, 2,2,2-tri-
fluoroethyl or cyano(lower)alkyl, or, when R2 is hydro-
gen, R3 may also be cycloOower)alkyl, amino(lower)al-
kyl, (lower)alkylamino(lower)alkyl, di(Iower)al-
kylaniino(lower)alkyl, pyrrolidino(lower)alkyl, piperidi-
noOower)alkyl, morpholino(lower)alkyI, piperazino(low-
er)alkyl, pyridyl(lower)alkyl, substituted pyridyl(lower-
)alkyl wherein the pyridyl ring may contain one substitu-
ent selected from Gower)alkyl, (lower)alkoxy, hydroxy,
amino and halogen, amino, (lower)alkylamino, di(lower-
)alkylamino, hydroxy, (lower)alkoxy, 2,3-dihydroxypro-
pyl, cyano, amidino, (lower)alkylamidino,
A— (CH2)m'Z'(CH2)rt — , phenyl, phenyl(lower)alkyl,
substituted phenyl or substituted phenyl(lower)alkyl,
wherein the phenyl ring may contain one or two substitu-
ents independently selected from (lower)alkyl, hydroxy,
(lower)alkoxy and halogen or one substituent selected
from methylenedioxy, trifluoromethyl and di(lower)al-
kylamino; or R2 and R\ taken together, may be
-CH2CH2X(CH2)^;
r is an integer of from 1 to 3, inclusive;
X is methylene, sulfur, oxygen or N-R^ provided that, when
r is 1, X is methylene;
R* is hydrogen, (lower)alkyl, (lower)alkenyl, (lower)alky-
nyl, (lower)alkanoyl or benzoyl;
m' is an integer of from zero to 2, inclusive;
n' is an integer of from 2 to 4, inclusive;
Z' is sulfur, oxygen or methylene;
A' is phenyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxazolyl,
isoxazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, furyl, thi-
enyl or pyridyl; provided that A' may contain one or two
substituents, the first substituent being selected from (low-
er)alkyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, halogen, amino, hy-
droxymethyl, (lower)alkoxy.
octamethyleneimino; or a salt, hydrate, solvate or N-oxide
thereof.
4380640
NOVEL BENZTHIAZOLYLUREA DERIVATIVES
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM AND THEIR USE
AS HERBICIDES
Hans-Georg Bninner, Lausen, and Werner Fdry, Basel, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley,
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,583
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jan. 21. 1980
464/80 '
Int. a.3 C07D 277/82. 417/12
U.S. a. 548-163 10 Qaims
1. A benzthiazolylurea of the formula
\'
N— CO— N— R
wherein
Ri is hydrogen or C1-C4 alkyl,
R2 is C1-C6 alkyl or methoxy,
or
Ri and R2 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached form a piperidino or pyrrolidino group which
can be substituted by C1-C3 alkyl, and
each of R6, R7, Rs and R9 is hydrogen or non-sterically
hindering C1-C4 alkyl.
-(CH2),N=C
\
NHR'*
and — (CH2),NR5r6
NHR'5
and the second substituent being selected from (lower)al-
kyl, hydroxy, triHuoromethyl, halogen, amino, hydroxy-
methyl and (lower)alkoxy;
q is an integer of from 0 to 6, inclusive;
R'* and R'5 independently are hydrogen or (lower)alkyl, or,
if R'* is hydrogen, R'5 also may be Oower)alkanoyl or
benzoyl, or R'*and R", taken together, may be ethylene;
and
R' and R* each are independently hydrogen, (lower)alkyl,
Gower)alkenyl, (lower)alkynyl, Gower)alkoxyOower)al-
kyl, cycloGower)alkyl, phenyl or phenyIGower)aIkyl,
provided that R' and R* may not both be cycloGower)al-
kyl or phenyl; or R' and R^, taken together with the
nitrogen atom to which they are attached, may be pyr-
rolidino, methylpyrrolidino, dimethylpyrrolidino, mor-
pholino, thiomorpholino, piperidino, methylpiperidino,
dimethylpiperidino, hydroxypiperidino, N-methyl-
piperazino, homopiperidino, heptamethyleneimino or
4,380 641
INSECnaDAL OXAZOLYL UREAS
Emily J. Canada, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to Eli Lilly and
Company, Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,130
Int. C1.3 C07D 263/34: AOIN 43/28
U.S. a. 548-233 10 Clainu
1. A compound of the formula:
O
^R' C-O-R*
\^ >-C-NH-C-NH-l(5 ^\
R2
wherein:
R' is halogen or methoxy;
R2 is hydrogen or halogen;
R3 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl;
R* is C1-C4 alkyl;
with the provisos that when R* is ethyl and one of R> and
R2 is chlorine, the other of R' and R2 must be other than
chlorine; and when R2 is hydrogen and R* is ethyl, R' is
other than chlorine.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
717
4,380,642
SIMULTANEOUS PREPARATION OF PYRAZOLE AND
TRIAZOLES
Norbert Rieber, Rolf Platz, both of Mannheim, and Werner
Fuchs, Ludwigshafen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,398
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 20,
1980, 3031347
Int. a.5 C07D 249/04. 249/06, 231/12
U.S. a. 548— 255 8 Qaims
1. A process for the simultaneous preparation of pyrazole
and triazoles of the formula
4,380,644
2-OXOIMIDAZOLIDINE DERIVATIVES
Naoto Yoneda, Suita; Jyoji Kato, Yawata, and Keizo Kinashi,
Yao, all of Japan, assignors to Tanabe Siyaku Co., Ltd., Japan
FUed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,105
Qaims priority, application Japan, Not. 21, 1980, 55-164829
Int a.5 C07D 233/26
U.S. O. 548—321 2 Qaims
1. A 2-oxoimidazolidine derivative of the formula:
-C— H
N—
N II
N C— H
\ /
N
.N
T
N.
■COOH
^CX)— CH— CH2SCO— r2
CHj
wherein R' is methyl, ethyl or benzyl and R^ is phenyl, or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
where
RMs:
hydrogen; or
alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 5 to 8 carbon
atoms, aralkyl or alkylaryl of 7 to 12 carbon atoms; or
phenyl or naphthyl which are unsubstituted or substituted
by from 1 to 5 bromine atoms, fluorine atoms, chlorine
atoms, iodine atoms, nitro groups, dialkylamino groups of
1 to 4 carbon atoms per alkyl group and/or alkoxy groups
of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and where R' may be additionally
substituted by halogen, nitro or alkyl or alkoxy each of 1
to 4 carbon atoms, which process comprises a first step of
reacting a triazoline compound of the formula
N-
H H
-C— C N— COOR2
II
CH2
I
N C— C
\ /! I
N H H
N— COOR2
where R' has the above meaning and R^ is hydrogen, alkyl
of 1 to 18 carbon atoms or said alkyl additionally substi-
tuted by halogen, nitro or alkyl or alkoxy each of 1 to 4
carbon atoms, with a basic compound and, thereafter, a
second step of oxidizing the product of said first step with
hydrogen peroxide.
4,380,643
BENZOTRIAZOLE COMPOUND AND HOMOPOLYMER
OR COPOLYMERS THEREOF
Shohei Yoshida, Kanagawa, Japan, and Otto VogI, Amherst,
Mass., assignors to Asahi Glass Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,545
Int a.3 C07D 249/20
U.S. Q. 548—260 3 Claims
1. A benzotriazole compound of the formula:
OA
R«2
wherein A is hydrogen or acetyl; R^ is a C1-C4 alkyl group and
n is 1 or 2.
4380,645
PROCESS FOR PREPARING BENZOXEPINO- OR
BENZTHIAPINO[4,3-B]PYRROLE-2-ACETIC ACTDS
Bruce E. Witzel, Rahway; Paul E. Finke, Metuchen, and Debra
L. Allison, Scotch Plains, all of N J., assignors to Merck A
Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,842
Int. Q.5 C07D 491/044. 495/04
U.S. Q. 548—430 10 Claims
1. A process for preparing a compound of formula (11)
(R)«
(II)
COOH
wherein:
Y is 0 or S;
n is an integer from 1 to 4;
R is
(a) hydrogen;
(b) lower alkyl;
(c) halo-loweralkyl;
(d) hydroxy or loweralkoxy;
(e) — OCH2O— when n is 2 and the two Rs join together
to form the methylenedioxy group;
(0 halo;
(g) lower alkylthio;
(h) lower alkylsulfinyl;
(i) lower alkylsulfonyl; or
(j) lower alkenyl;
R'is
(a) hydrogen;
(b) lower alkyl;
(c) lower alkenyl;
(d) aralkyl; and
R2is
(a) hydrogen;
(b) lower alkyl;
(c) halo; or
(d) loweralkoxy;
comprising:
(1) Halogenating a compound of formula (III)
718
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
CH3.
R^OOC
N
C(X)R3
wherein:
R' is as previously defined; and
R^ is lower alkyl;
(2) Treating the resultant 4-halomethyl derivative from
Step (1) with a compound of formula
(R)n
YM
wherein R, n, and Y are as previously defined; and M is
an alkali metal cation;
(3) Hydrolyzing the resultant 4— (R)„C6H5_„— Y-CH2-
derivative from Step (2) to a diacid of formula (V)
(R),
(HI) o
II
RlC— NH—
acylated 3,4-di-hydroxyphenyl alanine or a naturally occurring
aminocarboxylic acid, which comprises the step of contacting
its alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salt with a lower alkyl
carboxylic acid ester of the formula
R1-CO-O-R2.
wherein Ri represents hydrogen or a straight-chain or
branched or cyclic hydrocarbon moiety of 1 to 30 carbon
atoms, and wherein R2 represents a straight-chain, branched or
cyclic hydrocarbon moiety of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, in the
presence of an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal alcoholate.
4,380,647
2-AMINOPYRROLIN 5-ONES AND
AMINOCYCXOPROPYL ISOCYANATES THEREFROM
Tad H. Koch, and Barry J. Swanson, both of Boulder, Colo.,
assignors to University Patents, Inc., Norwalk, Conn.
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,043
Int. a.3 C07D 207/26; C07C 118/00. 119/045
U.S. a. 548-519 14aaims
1. Bis-(2-aminopyrrolin-5-ones) characterized by the struc-
ture
(V)
HCXJt'
N COOH
I'
(4) Inducing intramolecular ring closure of the diacid (V)
by treatment with a condensing agent to form a tricyclic
carboxylic acid of formula (VI)
(VI)
// I I
^ N— X— N
where R and R' are hydrocarbyl substituents containing from
1 to about 12 carbon atoms and are selected from the class
consisting of alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, and aralkyl groups, and X is a
substantially rigid bridging unit selected from the group con-
sisting of 1,4-substituted butyne-2, 1,4-substituted trans-butene-
2, bis-methyl substituted m-xylene, bis-methyl substituted p-
xylene, and said hydrocarbyl substituted derivatives thereof
7. Bis-(aminocyclopropyl isocyanates) characterized by the
structure
(5) Extending the carboxylic acid side chain of the tricy-
clic compound (VI) by the Amdt Eistert procedure
which further comprises:
(a) converting the tricyclic carboxylic acid (VI) to its
corresponding acid chloride;
(b) treating the acid chloride with a diazoalkane to form
the corresponding diazoketone of compound (VI);
(c) causing the diazoketone to rearrange to a homolo-
gous acid of formula (II) in the presence of a metal
salt and a solvent.
0=C=N-
-N— X— N
I I
R R'
N=C=0
where R and R' are hydrocarbyl substituents containing from
1 to about 12 carbon atoms and are selected from the class
consisting of alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, and aralkyl groups, and X is a
substantially rigid bridging unit selected from the group con-
sisting of 1,4-substituted butyne-2, 1,4-substituted trans-butene-
2, bis-methyl substituted m-xylene, bis-methyl substituted p-
xylene, and said hydrocarbyl substituted derivatives thereof
4,380,646
METHOD FOR THE N-ACYLATION OF
AMINOCARBOXYLIC ACIDS
Giaellier Fnuumann, Witten, Fed. Rep. of Gemumy, assignor to
Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft, Troisdorf, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,433
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 2,
1980,3003898
Int a.3 C07D 209/20: C07C 103/34. 103/76
U.S. CL 548-502 \% claims
1. A process for the preparation of an
4,380 648
OXIDATION OF BUTANE TO MALEIC ANHYDRIDE
Carl A. Udovich, Joliet, and Bernard L. Meyers, Wheaton, both
of lU., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana), Chicago,
Division of Ser. No. 149,842, May 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,283,288.
This appUcation Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,361
Int C\? C07D 307/60
U.S. a. 549-259 3 claims
1. A process for the preparation of maleic anhydride which
comprises contacting a feedstock consisting of n-butane and a
gas containing molecular oxygen in the vapor phase in the
presence of a phosphorus-vanadium mixed oxide catalyst the
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
719
atomic ratio of vanadium to phosphorus being in the range of
0.5:1 to 1.25:1 wherein the catalyst has a characteristic powder
X-ray diffraction pattern using copper K alpha radiation as
follows:
-continued
Line Position
d angstrom
2.0 degrees
Intensity
15.6
67
19.7
47
24.3
36
27.1
53
3.1
28.8
26
2.9
30.5
100
2.8
32.2
17
2.7
33.7
20
4,380,649
ISOPHORONE DERIVATIVES
Joseph E. Dunbar, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemi-
cal Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed No?. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,193
Int. a.3 C07D 309/38. 311/18
U.S, a. 549—285 7 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
CHj
(I)
4 )=0
H3C R2
wherein
the dotted line represents a double bond in the 1-2 or the 2-3
ring position;
when Ri represents
OH
OH
H3C
O—
H3C-
CH3
and the double bond is in the 2-3 ring position.
O
4380,650
LACTONE PROCESS
James P. Coleman; Richard C. Hallcher, both of Maryland
Heights, and Dudley E. McMackins, St Charles, all of Mo.,
assignors to Monsanto Company, StLouis, Mo.
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,199
Int. a.3 C07D 307/32
U.S. a. 549—326 22 Claims
1. The process of converting acyloxyhexenoic acids selected
from 6-acyloxy-4-hexenoic acid, 4-acyloxy-5-hexenoic acid
and mixtures of same, to y-vinyl-y-butyrolactone which com-
prises reacting such acids under conditions suitable for elimina-
tion of the acyloxy moiety for a time sufficient to effect such
conversion.
CH3
then R2 is hydrogen and the double bond is in the 1-2 ring
position; otherwise Ri represents hydrogen, and
R2 represents
(III)
4380,651
PROCESS FOR PREPARING
6'-METHYLSPECnNOMYaN AND ANALOGS
THEREOF
David R. White, Kalamazoo, Mich., assignor to The Upjohn
Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,164
Int. a.3 C07D 319/20. 327/06
U.S. a. 549—361 4 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a compound having the formula
R2,
R3'
ai)
CH3
0
1'
t>CH2
5'
^y J
4'
H II
0
which comprises reducing a compound having the formula
R'2^ B III
R3'
with hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst selected from the
group consisting of palladium, barium sulfate, palladium hy-
droxide, and palladium/barium sulfate; wherein R is hydrogen
or alkyl and Ri through R9 are selected from the group consist-
ing of hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl and lower alkynyl
with the proviso that one of R2 and R3 is always hydrogen and
one of lOs and R7 is always hydrogen, and B and Bj arc the
same or different and are selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, o-lower alkenyl, thio, thio-lower
alkyl and thio-lower alkenyl; and A is selected from the group
consisting of oxygen and sulfur; R'2, R'3. R'e and R'7 are se-
720
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
lected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkenyl,
lower alkynyl, and a blocking group selected from the group
consisting of aralkoxycarbonyl, halogenated-alkoxycarbonyl,
with the proviso that one of R'2 and R'3 is always a blocking
group and one of R'6 and R'7 is always a blocking group; and
Riois acyl.
4,380,652
ENAMINES OF 6'-METHYLSPECnNOMYaN AND
PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME
David R. White, Kalamazoo, Mich., assignor to The upjot
Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
FUed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,165
Int. a.5 C07D 319/20. 327/06
U.S. a. 549—361 6 Oaims
1. A compound having the formula
CH3
CH3
wherein R is hydrogen or alkyl and Ri, R4. R5, Rg. and R9 are
selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl,
lower alkenyl, and lower alkylyl; B and Bi are the same or
different and are selected from the group consisting of hydro-
gen, hydroxy, alkoxy, o-lower alkenyl, thio, thio-lower alkyl
and thio-lower alkenyl; A is selected from the group consisting
of oxygen and sulfur; R'2, R'3, R'6 and R'7 are selected from the
group consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl,
and a blocking group selected from the group consisting of
aralkoxycarbonyl, halogenated-alkoxycarbonyl and alkoxycar-
bonyl; with the proviso that one of R'2 and R'3 is always a
blocking group, and that one of R'6 and R'7 is always a block-
ing group; and Rio is acyl.
4. A process for preparing a compound having the formula
080 ^^^ y
CH3
R9 '^ oR,o II ^
CH3
o
which comprises reacting a compound having the formula
VI
with, in an excess of an acetal of dimethylformamide wherein
R is hydrogen or alkyl and Ri, R4, Rs, Rg, and R9 are selected
from the group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower
alltrnyl. and lower alkynyl; B and Bi are the same or different
and are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hy-
droxy, alkoxy, o-lower alkenyl, thio, thio lower alkyl and
thio-lower alkenyl; A is selected from the group consisting of
oxygen and sulfur; R'2, R'3. R'6 and R'7 are selected from the
grqup consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl,
a blocking group selected from the group consisting of
^alkoxycarbonyl, halogenated-alkoxycarbonyl and alkoxycar-
»nyl; with the proviso that one of R'2 and R'3 is always a
•locking group, and that one of R'6 and R'7 is always a block-
ing group; and R|o is acyl.
4,380,653
l,5-BIS-(l,4-BENZODIOXIN.2-YL)-3-AZAPENTANE-l,5.
DIOLS
Charles F. Huebner, Chatham, and Heinz W. Gschwend, New
Providence, both of N.J., assignors to Ciba'Geigy Corpora-
tion, Ardsley, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 196,503, Oct. 14, 1980, Pat. No.
4,3134>55. This application Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,261
Int. a.3 A61K 31/335
U.S. a. 549—366 2 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
S R
OCT
CH— CH2—N— CH2— CH
I
OH
I
■^n
(V)
wherein R is benzyl, an isomeric mixture of the erythro series
containing said compound, or an acid addition salt thereof.
4,380,654
PROCESS FOR PREPARA-nON OF
2,3-DIHYDR0.2,2-DIMETHYL-7-HYDROXYBENZOFU-
RAN
Borivoj R. Franko-Filipasic, Morrisville, Pa., and Philip B.
Hobson, Trenton, N.J., assignors to FMC Corporation, Phila-
delphia, Pa.
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,804
Int. C1.3 C07P 307/86
U.S. a. 549—462 7 Qalms
1. A process for thermally rearranging and cyclizing 2-
methallyloxyphenol in the presence of a solvent to form 2,3-
dihydro-2,2-dimethyl-7-hydroxybenzofuran which comprises
heating 2-methallyloxyphenol in a pressurizable reactor at a
temperature in the range of 150° C.-250* C. in the presence of
a catalytic amount of Lewis acid catalyst selected from the
group consisting of aluminum chloride, zinc chloride, mercu-
ric chloride, hydrogen chloride, ferrous chloride, rhodium
chloride, stannic chloride, magnesium chloride and ferric
chloride, under an autogenous pressure in the range of 20 to 60
psig.
4,380,655
NOVEL SULFUR-CONTAINING FLAVORING AGENTS
Steven van den Bosch, Woudenberg; Dirk K. Kettenes, Putten;
Kris Bart de Roos, Hoevelaken; Gerben Sipma, Hoevelaken,
and Jan Stoffelsma, Hoevelaken, all of Netherlands, assignors
to P.F.W. Beheer B.V., Amersfoort, Netherlands
Division of Ser. No. 762,534, Jan. 26, 1977, Pat No. 4,119,737,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 531,274, Dec. 10, 1974,
abandoned. This application May 22, 1978, Ser. No. 908,492
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 13, 1973,
57908/73
Int. C\? C07D 307/38; A23L 2/26
U.S. a. 549—472 1 Claim
1. 2-Methyl-3-(2'-methyI-2'-tetrahydrofurythio)-tetrahy-
drofuran.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
721
4,380,656
- 2.VINYL- AND ^ETHYLCYCLOPROPANE
CARBOXYLATES
Richard G. Fayter, Jr., Fairfield, Ohio, assignor to Emery
dustries, Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,395
Int. a.3 C07D 69n4i, 69/747
U.S. a. 549—473 7 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
H H
^ /VrC^-/^
and then reacting the said mixture of di-isoamylenes with a
peracid in order to form a mixture of epoxides having the
structures:
H. / \ ^CORi
R' "tOR2
O
wherein R is an ethyl or vinyl group, Ri and R2 are hydrocar-
bon radicals containing from 1 to 30 carbon atoms and selected
from the group consisting of aliphatic, cycloaliphatic and
aromatic radicals, with the proviso that Ri and R2 cannot both
be aliphatic hydrocarbon radicals.
4380,657
CONVERSION OF ALKANOLS TO ETHERS
Lynn H. Slaugh, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil Company,
Houston, Tex.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 219,279, Dec. 22, 1980, Pat. No.
4,335,022, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 61,205,
Jul. 27, 1979, abandoned. This application Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No.
355,011
Int. a.3 C07D 307/08
U.S. a. 549—509 14 Qaims
1. A process for converting alkanols to ethers which com-
prises contacting the alcohols at about ISO* C. to about 550° C.
with a catalyst prepared by a process which comprises impreg-
nating a substantially dehydrated amorphorous silica gel with
aluminum hydride dissolved in an anhydrous, nonhydroxyl
containing organic solvent, drying the impregnated silica to
remove the solvent and subsequently heating the impregnated
silica at a temperature of about 300° to about 900° C. in a
non-oxidizing atmosphere.
and
4,380,659
OLEnN OXIDATION WITH METHYL FORMATE
SOLVENT
Paul W. Solomon, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Jan. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 3,064
Int. C1.3 C07D 301/06
U.S. a. 549—532 3 Claims
1. A method for oxidizing an olefln containing from 3 up to
about 18 carbon atoms per molecule which is represented by
the formula
Rl— C=C— R4
wherein each Ri, R2, R3, and R4 is independently selected
from a group consisting of hydrogen, alkyi, and cycloalkyl
radicals and wherein there is at least one hydrogen attached to
a carbon atom adjacent to the oleflnic group said method
comprising contacting said olefm with molecular oxygen in a
liquid reaction medium consisting essentially of said olefin and
methyl formate said methyl formate present in the reaction
medium in a minimum amount of about 80 weight percent.
4,380,658
MIXTURE OF ALIPHATIC Cio-BRANCHED OLEFIN
EPOXIDES AND USE THEREOF IN AUGMENTING OR
ENHANONG THE AROMA OF PERFUMES AND/OR
ARTICLES
Richard M. Boden, Monmouth Beach; Lambert Dekker, Wyck-
off; Frederick L. Schmitt, Holmdel, all of N.J., and Augus-
tinus G. Van Loveren, Rye, N.Y., assignors to International
Flavors A Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 195,630, Oct. 9, 1980, Pat No. 4,335,009,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 160,788, Jun. 19,
1980, Pat No. 4,287,084. This appUcation Feb. 18, 1982, Ser.
No. 350,093
Int a.3 C07D 301/14. 303/04
U.S. a. 549—525 1 Claim
1. A product produced according to the process comprising
the steps of reacting isoamylene having the structure:
/~\
with a Lewis acid or a mineral acid to form a mixture of di-
isoamylenes having the structures:
4,380,660
PRODUONG ALKOXYSILANES AND
ALKOXY-OXIMINOSILANES
Chempolil T. Mathew, Randolph, and Harry E. Ulmer, Morris-
town, both of SJ., assignors to Allied Corporation, Morris
Township, Morris County, N J.
FUed Jul. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 394,353
Int a.3 C07F 7/10. 7/18
U.S. a. 556—422 20 Claims
1. A method for the production of an alkoxysilane which
comprises:
(a) reacting a silicon halide of the formula R4-i,SiXn.
wherein n is an integer between 1 and 4, inclusive, and R
is alkyl of 1-6 carbons, alkenyl of 2-6 carbons, cycloalkyl
of 4-8 carbons, aryl, alkyl-substituted aryl, aralkyl or
halosubstituted forms of any of these with an alcohol of
the formula R'OH, with R' being alkyl of 1-24 carbons or
aralkyl, in the presence of an oxime compound of the
formula R"R "C=NOH, with R" and R" each being
hydrogen or alkyl of 1-6 carbons or forming an unsubsti-
tuted, halosubstituted or alkylsubstituted cycloalkyl ring
of 4-8 carbons, and X is CI, Br or I;
the molar ratio of alcohol to silicon halide being at least n:l
722
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
and the molar ratio of oxime to silicon halide being at least
n:l; and
(b) recovering the alkoxysilane of the formula R4_„.
Si(OR')„ as major product and the hydrohalide of said
oxime as byproduct.
4,380,661
2-[4-(4-SUBSTmJTED
PHENOXY)PHENOXY]PROPANOIC AODS AND
ESTERS
Milos Suchy, Pfaffhausen, Switzerland, assignor to Hofftnann-
La Roche Inc., Nutley, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 89,791, Oct. 31, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 962,087, Nov. 20, 1978, Pat. No.
4,200,587. This application Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,196
Qaims priority, application Luxembourg, Nov. 28, 1977,
78591; Switzerland, Sep. 15, 1978, 9667/78
Int. a.3 C07C 69/712, 59/68
U.S. a. 560—62 5 Qaims
1. An optically active compound of the D-configuration
having the formula
Rs
■>=^3)^°h(o)^o
CCK)R
R4
wherein R is hydrogen or alkyl of from 1 to 6 carbons, R'3 is
bromine or trifluoromethyl and R4 and R5 are hydrogen with
the proviso that R is alkyl of from 1 to 6 carbons when R'3 is
trifluoromethyl.
4,380,662
PROCESS FOR THE PURinCATION OF
TEREPHTHALIC AOD
Jacques D. V. Hanotier, Lasne Chapelle St. Lambert, and
Jacques F. Dauby, Groot-Bygaarden, both of Belgium, assign-
ors to Laboflna, S.A., Brussels, Belgium
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,703
Int. aj C07C 51/42
VS. a. 562—486 U Qaims
1. A process for the purification to fiber-grade quality of a
crude terephthalic acid product contaminated with up to 10%
by weight of partially oxidized impurities including p-toluic
acid and an amount of 4-carboxybenzaldehyde which is higher
than the amount permissible for fiber grade terephthalic acid,
comprising the steps of:
(a) dissolving the crude product in water by heating up to a
temperature at least about 5° C. higher than necessary for
having the resulting solution saturated with terephthalic
acid;
(b) cooling the resulting solution down to a temperature
greater than 185° C. to precipitate purified crystals;
(c) recovering the purified crystals by solid-liquid separation
at a temperature not lower than that used for the precipita-
tion of the purified crystals; and
(d) washing the recovered crystals by contacting with water
at a temperature which is at least as high as the tempera-
ture of the recovery step.
4,380,663
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF PRACTICALLY
FORMIC AOD-FREE ACETIC ACID
Giinter Roscher, Kelkheim; Helmut Schaum, Bad Soden am
Taunus, and Heinz Schmitz, Frankfurt am Main, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft,
Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 670,412, Mar. 25, 1976, abandoned.
This appUcation Oct. 20, 1977, Ser. No. 844,048
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 27,
1975, 2513678; Dec. 18, 1975, 2557004
Int. Q.3 C07C 51/235. 53/08
U.S. Q. 562—536 7 Qaims
1. In a process for the preparation of acetic acid substantially
free of formic acid by oxidation of acetaldehyde with oxygen
in the liquid phase in the presence of a catalyst at a temperature
of from 40° C. to 120° C, the improvement which comprises
oxidizing liquid acetaldehyde in the presence of a catalytic
mixture of cobalt, nickel, and manganese compounds, one of
said compounds being present in an amount up to five times the
sum of the amounts of the other compounds.
4,380,664
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG UNSATURATED
ALDEHYDES, AND UNSATURATED FATTY AODS
Hiromichi Ishii; Hideo Matsuzawa; Masao Kobayashi, all of
Ohtake, and Kantaro Yamada, Yokohama, all of Japan, as-
signors to Mitsubishi Rayon Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 667,371, Mar. 16, 1976, Pat. No. 4,111,984,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 474,218, May 29,
1974, Pat. No. 3,972,920. This application Mar. 29, 1978, Ser.
No. 891,222
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 11, 1973, 48-65563;
Aug. 28, 1973, 48-96345; Dec. 18, 1973, 48-142118; Dec. 26,
1973, 49-144000
Int. Q.3 C07C 45/35. 47/22, 51/25. 57/05
U.S. Q. 562—546 9 Claims
1. In a process for the gas phase catalytic oxidation of at least
one olefinic hydrocarbon of 3 to 4 carbon atoms in the pres-
ence of molecular oxygen at 200° to 450' C. to produce mix-
tures of the corresponding aldehyde and acid, the improve-
ment comprising: oxidizing said compound over a calcined
catalyst consisting essentially of MoaSbftBicFe^/NieSn/XgYAO/
wherein X is at least one alkali metal selected from the group
consisting of potassium, rubidium and cesium; Y is at least one
metal selected from the group consisting of cobalt, uranium,
germanium, tungsten and titanium; a to h are atomic ratios
wherein a= 12, b=0.2 to 20, c=0.2 to 12, d=0.2 to 12, e=0.2
to 12, f=:0 to 20, g= 0.01 to 4 and h=0 to 6; and i is determined
according to the oxidation states of the metal atoms in the
catalyst.
4,380,665
METHYL ISOCYANATE EMISSION CONTROL
John W. Ager, Princeton, N.J., assignor to FMC Corporation,
Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,892
Int. Q.3 C07C 127/15
U.S. Q. 564—61 2 Claims
1. A process for removing methyl isocyanate from a gaseous
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
723
eflluent stream comprising contacting the gaseous effluent sents the phenyl group, and pharmaceutical ly acceptable acid
stream with alumina for a period sufficient to hydrolyze the addition salts thereof,
methyl isocyanate to 1,3-dimethylurea.
4,380,666
CX)LOR-FORMING SULFONAMIDODIPHENYLAMINE
DYE PRECURSOR THAT PRODUCES PHENAZINE DYE
Rolf S. Gabrielsen, Webster, Patricia A. Graham, Williamson,
and James E. KUjanowicz, Pittsford, all of N.Y., assignors to
Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,628
Int. a.3 C07C 143/75
U.S. a. 564—82 9 Qaims
1. A color-forming para-sulfonamidodiphenylamine dye
precursor having one or two sulfonamido groups in positions
ortho to the amine — NH — moiety separating the two phenyl
rings of the para-sulfonamidodiphenylamine, the remaining
two or three ortho positions of the sulfonamidodiphenylamine
being unsubstituted, and wherein the parasulfonamidodi-
phenylamine, in oxidized form, intramolecularly reacts to
produce a sulfonamido substituted phenazine dye.
4,380,667
2.(ORTHOCHLOROBENZOYL)-4'-CHLORO-
GLYCYLANILIDES, COMPOSITIONS THEREOF, AND
USE AS MEDICAMENTS
Gilbert Mouzin; Henri Cousse, and Antoine Stenger, all of
Castres, France, assignors to Pierre Fabre S.A., Paris, France
Filed Sep. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 76,841
Qaims priority, application France, Sep. 25, 1978, 78 27401
Int. C\? O07C 103/50
U.S. a. 564—195 3 Qaims
1. 2'-(ortho-chlorobenzoyl)-4'-chloroglycylanilides selected
from compounds having the formula 1:
(I)
in which:
R represents hydrogen or lower-alkyl;
Rl and R2 are lower-hydroxyalkyl,
and pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acid
addition salts thereof.
4,380,668
DECAPRENYLAMINE DERIVATIVES
Yoshiyiiki Tahara, Ohi; Hiroyasu Koyama, Ageo; Yasuhiro
Komatsu, Niiza; Reiko Kubota, Tokyo, and Toshihiro Takaha-
shi, Ohi, all of Japan, assignors to Nisshin Flour Milling Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,324
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 30,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07C 87/28; A61K 31/13; C07D 213/06; A61K 31/44
MS. a. 564—391 3 Oaims
1.
CH3 R]
I I
H-eCH2— C=CH— CH2-^nrNi-CH2^R2
wherein n represents an integer of 0-2, Ri represents hydrogen
atom, a lower alkyl group or decaprenyl group, and R2 repre-
4380,669
PROCESS FOR SYNTHESIZING ANIUNE
Clarence D. Chang, Princeton, and William H. Lang, Penning-
ton, both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,487
Int. C1.3 C07C 85/06
U.S. Q. 564—402 8 Claims
1. A process for converting phenol or phenolic type com-
pounds to aniline or substituted anilines comprising contacting
said phenol or phenolic compound with ammonia or a suitable
amine under conversion conditions in the presence of a crystal-
line alumino silicate zeolite having a constraint index within
the approximate range of 1-12 and a silica to alumina ratio of
at least 12.
4,380,670
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING 1,3,5-TRIAMINOBENZENE
Ryuzo Nishiyama, Takatsuki; Kanichi Fi^ikawa, Moriyama;
Isao Yokomichi, Moriyama; Itaru Shigehara, Moriyama, and
Mikio Miy^i, Shiga, all of Japan, assignors to Ishihara San*
gyo Kaisha Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,552
Int. C\? cone 85/04
U.S. a. 564-407 7 Claims
1. A process for producing an aminobenzene comprising
reacting ammonia at substantially higher than atmospheric
pressure with 3,5-diaminochlorobenzene to produce 1,3,5-
triaminobenzene at a temperature of ISO* to 250° C. at a molar
ratio of ammonia to 3,S-diaminochlorobenzene of 2 to 10 in the
presence of a copper compound catalyst selected from the
group consisting of copper salt, copper oxide, and copper
hydroxide.
4,380,671
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
2,2'-BIS(4-SUBSTITUTED PHENODSULHDES
Akihiro Yamaguchi, Kamakura; Tadashi Kobayashi, Yokohama;
Keizaburo Yamaguchi, Kawasaki, and Hisaimichi Murakami,
Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsui Toatsu Chemi-
cals, Incorporated, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 75,263, Sep. 13, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,428
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 14, 1978, 53/112270;
Aug. 2, 1979, 54/98054
Int. Q.3 C07C 149/36
U.S. Q. 568—48 14 Qaims
1. Process for the preparation of 2,2'-bis(4-substituted phe-
nol)suirides of purity of the order of 93.5-98.5% and of the
general formula
OH
OH
where R is an alkyl radical having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms,
a cycloalkyl radical having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms, or an
aralkyl radical having from 7 to 1 1 carbon atoms, which com-
prises the step of reacting a 4-substituted phenol of the general
formula
724
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
OH
where R is the same as above, with sulfur dichloride in a molar
ratio of 2 moles of phenol per 0.8-1.5 moles of sulfur dichloride
in a hydrocarbon solvent or a halogenated hydrocarbon sol-
vent at a temperature of from — 10° to 40° C. and in the pres-
ence of a Lewis acid catalyst.
4,380,672
CONVERSION OF 2-PHENYL PROPANAL TO
2-INDANONE
Louis J. Velenyi, Lyndhurst, and Andrew S. Knipa, Twinsburg,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Standard Oil Company, Geve-
land, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 182,282, Aug. 28, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,329,506. This application Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 345,264
Int. a.3 C07C 45/67
U.S. a. 568—310 5 Qaims
1. A process of converting 2-phenyI propanal to 2-indanone,
the process comprising contacting at conversion conditions
2-phenyl propanal with a catalyst of the formula
M012CU0.1.10V0.1-5W0.1.3M0-3OX
(I)
where
M is at least one of tin, lead, chromium, gold, silver, sele-
nium, antimony, bismuth, phosphorus, arsenic, cerium,
tellurium, thorium, uranium and a Group lA, IIA, JIB,
IVB or VIII element, and
X is the number of oxygen atoms determined by the valence
requirements of the other elements present.
4,380,673
CATALYST AND PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING A
KETONE BY DEHYDROGENATION OF A SECONDARY
ALCOHOL
Jean-Paul Boumonvilie, Chatou; Roger Snappe, Sevres; Jean
Miquel, Paris, and Germain Martino, Poissy, all of France,
assignors to Institut Francais Du Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison,
France
FUed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,581
Gaims priority, application France, Jun. 26, 1980, 80 14290;
Jan. 19, 1981, 81 01018
Int. a.3 C07C 45/00
U.S. a. 568—361 17 Claims
1. In a process comprising contacting a secondary alcohol, in
the liquid phase and in the presence of a solvent, with a dehy-
drogenation catalyst, and recovering the resultant ketone,
the improvement wherein said catalyst consists essentially of
a Raney nickel catalyst and 0. 1-10% by weight, expressed
as elemental metal and with respect to the Raney nickel,
of at least one additional metal, said additional metal being
copper, silver, gold, tin, lead, zinc, cadmium, indium or
germanium; wherein the reaction is effected at a tempera-
ture of about 170°-230" C; and wherein said solvent is a
C 12-20 parafrm.c hydrocarbon or hydrocarbon cut having
a content of aromatic hydrocarbons and aromatic hydro-
carbon generators, expressed as benzene, lower than 1,000
ppm and a sulfur content lower than 500 ppm; whereby
hydrogenolysis to produce degradation products is re-
duced and the selectivity of the dehydrogenation is in-
creased.
4,380,674
BRANCHED KETONES, ORGANOLEPTIC USES
THEREOF AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING SAME
Richard M. Boden, Monmouth Beach, N.J., assignor to Interna-
tional Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 184,132, Sep. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,321,255. This appUcation Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,428
The portion of the term of this patent sulMequent to Aug. 24,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07C 49/203
U.S. a. 568-417 13 Qaims
1. An unsaturated branched-chain ketone deflned according
to the structure:
wherein R4' represents C1-C4 lower alkyl, and one of the
dashed lines represents a carbon-carbon double bond and the
other of the dashed lines represent carbon-carbon single bonds.
4,380,675
2,4-DIALKYL.2,6-HEPTADIENAL DERIVATIVES, A
PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION, AND
FRAGRANT AND FLAVORING PRODUCTS MADE
THEREWTTH
Helmut Gebauer, Munich, and Walter Hafher, Furth, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Consortium fur Elektro-
chemische Industrie GmbH, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,778
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 9,
1980, 3013672
Int. a.3 C07C 47/21
U.S. a. 568—448 3 Qaims
1. A compound selected from the group consisting 2,4-
dimethyl-2,6-heptadienal; 2,4-diethyl-2,6-heptadienal; 2,4-di-n-
propyl-2,6-heptadienal; 2,4-di-iso-propyl-2,6-heptadienal; 2,4-
dimethyl-2,6-heptadienol; and 2,4-diethyl-heptanol.
4,380,676
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF
2,2'-DIHYDROXY-BIPHENYLS
Michael Rasberger, Riehen, Switzerland, assignor to Oba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,467'
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 29, 1980,
1625/80
Int. a.3 C07C 39/12. 39/15
U.S. a. 568—730 11 Claims
1. A process for the production of a 2,2'-dihydroxybiphenyl
of the formula 1
(I)
R3 R2
R2 R3
wherein each of Ri and R2 independently is hydrogen, Ci-Cj.
Salkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, or C5-C7cycloalkyl, phenyl or C7-C9.
phenylalkyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted by
one to three Ci -Chalky 1 radicals, or Ri and R3 together are a
butadi-l,3-enyl-l,4-ene radical-which is bonded to the benzene
ring in the 3.4 and 3', 4'-positions, and R2 is also a — (CH2)-
nCOOR4 group, wherein R4 is C|-Cigalkyl and n is 0, 1 or 2,
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
725
and R3 is hydrogen or Ct-Cigalkyl, with the proviso that when
Rl is hydrogen, R2 and R3 are a 1,1,3,3-tetramethylpropylene
radical which is bonded to the benzene ring in the 4,5- and
4',S'-positions, which process comprises oxidatively couphng,
at elevated temperatures, a phenol of the formula II
(ID
R3 R2
wherein Ri, R2 and R3 are as deflned above, with hydrogen
peroxide in the presence of a strong inorganic base.
4,380,677
PREPARATION OF
2,6-DI-TERT-BUTYL-4-ALKYLPHENOLS
Paul R. Kurek, Schaumburg, III., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, 111.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,366
Int. a? C07C 39/06. 37/11
U.S. a. 568—788 7 Qaims
1. A method of preparing a 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-alkylphenol
comprising reacting a 4-alkylphenol with from about 3 to
about 10 molar proportions of 2-methylpropene at a tempera-
ture from about 50' to about 125° C. in the presence of a mac-
roreticular cation exchange resin bearing sulfonic acid groups,
said resin having an internal surface area from about 200 to
about 600 m^/g with an average pore diameter from about 30
to about 120 Angstroms, and recovering the 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-
alkylphenol produced thereby.
4,380,678
MULTI-STAGE ALDOSES TO POLYOLS PROCESS
Amalesh K. Sirkar, Lawrenceville, N.J., assignor to Hydrocar-
bon Research, Inc., Lawrenceville, N.J.
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 226,998
Int. a.5 C07C 31/18. 31/20. 31/22. 31/26
U.S. a. S68— 863 10 Claims
1. A process for catalytic conversion of monosaccharides to
produce polyols, comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a feedstream containing at least about 20 W %
monosaccharide solution and having pH of 7 to 14;
(b) preheating the feed and hydrogen gas to at least about
100* C, and passing the heated feedstream mixture
through a first stage Fixed bed catalytic reaction zone
containing a stabilized high activity nickel on silica-
alumina support containing 50-60 W % porous nickel and
having 0.060-0.250 inch diameter particle size and surface
area of 140-180 MVgm;
(c) maintaining said first reaction zone at conditions of
130*- 180* C. temperature, 500-2000 psig partial pressure
of hydrogen, and 0.5-3.5 V.HrA' space velocity, for
achieving at least about 90 W % conversion of the feed to
alditols;
(d) withdrawing product containing alditol solution and
passing it with a promotor material and hydrogen gas to a
second-stage fixed-bed reaction zone containing a particu-
late high activity stabilized metal catalyst which catalyst
comprises 50-65 W % porous nickel on an inert support,
has 4-12 mesh (0.187-0.66 inch) particle size (U.S. Sieve
Series), and a catalyst age of 8-2(X) hours before regenera-
tion to maintan its activity;
(e) maintaining said second reaction zone conditions within
the range of 430*-490° F. temperature, 1200-2000 psig
hydrogen partial pressure, and 1.5-3.0 liquid hourly space
velocity (LHSV) for achieving at least about 30 W %
conversion of the alditol to products;
(0 withdrawing from the second reaction zone a product
stream in which the alditol is converted between aboui 30
to 80 W % to yield glycerol and glycol products, and
passing the polyol-containing stream to a recovery step
from which mainly glycerol product is withdrawn;
(g) recycling a heavy purge stream containing aldose and
alditols diluted with alcohol and/or water to the first stage
reaction zone for further conversion to alditols and glyc-
erols, respectively.
4,380,679
HYDROGENATION OF SACCHARIDES
Blaise J. Arena, Des Plaines, 111., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,494
Int. a.' C07C 31/26
U.S. a. 568—863 13 Oaims
1. A process for the hydrogenation of a saccharide which
comprises treating said saccharide with hydrogen at hydroge-
nation conditions in the presence of a catalyst comprising a
metal of Group Vlll of the Periodic Table composited on a
support comprising a carbonaceous pyropolymer possessing
recurring units containing at least carbon and hydrogen atoms,
and recovering the resultant hydrogenated saccharide.
4,380,680
METHOD FOR HYDROGENATING AQUEOUS
SOLUTIONS OF CARBOHYDRATES
Blaise J. Arena, Des Plaines, III., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
FUed May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,809
Int. a.3 C07C 31/26. 31/24. 31/18
U.S. a. 568—863 11 Claims
1. A method for the hydrogenation of a carbohydrate to its
polyol(s) comprising contacting at hydrogenating conditions
an aqueous solution of the carbohydrate with hydrogen and a
catalyst consisting essentially of a zerovalent Group Vlll
metal selected from the group consisting of osmium, ruthe-
nium, palladium and platinum dispersed on alpha-alumina, and
recovering the formed polyol(s).
726
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,681
HYDROCARBONYLATION OF METHANOL TO
ETHANOL IN THE PRESENCE OF ADDED
COMPOUNDS
John L. Barclay, Tadworth, and Brian R. Gane, Weybridge, both
of England, assignors to The British Petroleum Company
Limited, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 52,006, Jun. 25, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 908,060, May 22, 1978,
abandoned. This application Not. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 210,547
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 27, 1977,
22490/77
Int. a.^ C07C 29/00
U.S. a, 568—902 23 Qaims
tuiam II utiium I'um m mtmui uiik uib
mu mm mnmm mmt tcrin tuciiritim.
HALIUII! uim Ult
fi ii M n II
mil % uirm icrnii ajarum mum
1. A process for the production of ethanol which process
comprises contacting a mixture of methanol and synthesis gas
at elevated temperature and pressure with a cobalt-containing
catalyst in the presence of an additive which is deliberately
added to the reaction system, said additive being selected from
the group consisting of monocarboxylic acids and derivatives
thereof having the formula
R— C
^
(D
\
wherein the substituent R is selected from hydrocarbyl groups
and oxygen-containing hydrocarbyl groups and the substituent
X is selected from the groups —OR' and — O— CO— R^ in
which R' is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen
atom, a hydrocarbyl group and an oxygen-containing hydro-
carbyl group and R^ is selected from the group consisting of a
hydrocarbyl group and an oxygen-containing hydrocarbyl
group, said additive of formula I being added in an amount
such that the molar ratio of additive to free methanol contacted
with the catalyst is in the range of from 0.1:1 to 1.5:1, provided
that when R and R' are both methyl then the molar ratio of
additive to free methanol contacted with the catalyst is in the
range of from about 0.1:1 to 0.7:1.
4,380,682
BALANCED CHLORINATION PROCESS
Frederick C. Leitert, North Madison, and Carl G. Vinson, Jr.,
Mentor, both of Ohio, assignors to Diamond Shamrock Corpo-
ration, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 782,974, Mar. 30, 1977, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 734,249, Oct. 20, 1976, Pat. No.
4,124,534. This application Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,219
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 7, 1995,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' C07C 77/752
U.S. CI. 570—219 6 Qaims
1 A process of halogenating aliphatic hydrocarbons which
compnses the steps of:
(a) non-selectively oxyhalogenating an aliphatic hydrocar-
bon to a partially halogenated intermediate product hav-
ing an overall average empirical formula using as the
halogen source a member from the group consisting of
chlorine, hydrogen cloride, and mixtures of chlorine and
hydrogen chloride, the atomic ratio of halogen to carbon
in said empirical formula being greater than 1:1, said ox-
yhalogenation being carried out in a fluid bed reactor
containing a catalyst consisting essentially of cupric chlo-
ride modified with a modifying metal chloride selected
from the group consisting of potassium chloride, calcium
chloride and barium chloride and impregnated onto an
alumina support, said alumina support having an alumina
content of from about 98% to about 99.5% by weight, a
sodium oxide content of from about 0.5% to about 1%, a
silica content less than 0.5%, an average particle size of
from about 90 to about 120 microns, and an average sur-
face area from about 2 to about 5 mVgm; the total loading
of catalyst salts being in the range of from about 5% to
about 8% by weight and the atomic ratio of the metal of
said modifying metal chloride to copper being in the range
of from about 0.5:1 to about 1.2:1 and the reaction condi-
tions in said reactor including a temperature of from about
340° C. to about 450° C, a pressure of 0 to about 200 psi
gauge, and a contact time of from about 1 to about 30
seconds;
(b) adjusting said reaction conditions to control the halogen
to carbon ratio of said empirical formula of said intermedi-
ate product;
(c) further halogenating said intermediate product by react-
ing it with halogen gas in the absence of oxygen at 400° C.
to 500° C, and in the presence of silica-alimina catalyst to
form an end-product having an atomic ratio of carbon to
hydrogen of at least 2:1; and
(d) adjusting the halogen to carbon ratio of said empirical
formula of said intermediate product so as to control the
quantity of hydrogen halide by-product formed in said
further halogenation reaction.
4380,683
HYDROALKYLATION OF BENZENE AND ANALOGS
Serge R. Dolhyj, Parma, and Louis J. Velenyi, Lyndhurst, both
of Ohio, assignors to The Standard Oil Company, Oeveland,
Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 916,683, Jun. 19, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 752,038, Dec. 20, 1976,
abandoned. This application Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,351
Int. a.3 C07C 15/00
U.S. a. 585—268 14 Claims
1. A process for the hydroalkylation of mononuclear aro-
matic hydrocarbons comprising contacting a mononuclear
aromatic hydrocarbon and hydrogen with a catalyst compris-
ing a rare earth-exchange Y-type zeolite support carrying a
promoter comprising at least one of ruthenium, iridium, rho-
dium and palladium, said catalyst having been calcined in a
molecular oxygen-containing atmosphere at a temperature of
about 250° to 600° C. prior to use.
April 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
727
4,380,684
LINEAR ALPHA OLEFIN PRODUCTION USING A TANK
GROWTH REACT'OR
Allan E. Fowler, Gordon E. White, both of Lake Jackson, and
Steve A. Sims, Angleton, all of Tex., assignors to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 269,119, Jun. 1, 1981,
abandoned. This application Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,458
Int. a.J C07C 2/88. 3/10
U.S. a. 585—328 14 Qaims
1. In a process for making C4-C10 a-olefins wherein an
a-olefin having 2-4 carbon atoms or mixtures thereof and low
molecular weight trialkyl aluminum are reacted in a growth
reaction zone under growth promoting conditions to provide
higher molecular weight trialkyl aluminum and reacting an
a-olefm having 2-4 carbon atoms or mixtures thereof with said
higher trialkyl aluminum in a displacement reactor zone under
displacement conditions to provide a mixture of C4-Cioa-ole-
flns, the improvement which comprises providing a growth
reaction zone by reacting 2 to 6 moles of a-olefin per mole of
trialkyl aluminum in a tank reaction zone and having a recircu-
lation rate through an external heat transfer zone such that the
reaction zone contents are completely recirculated in a period
of time sufficient to remove the heat of said reaction zone so as
to maintain a substantially constant temperature therein.
4380,685
SHAPE SELECTIVE REACTIONS WITH ZEOLITE
CATALYSTS MODIHED WITH IRON AND/OR COBALT
Chin-Chiun Chu, North Brunswick, N J., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 150,868, May 19, 1980,
abandoned. This application Not. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 318,238
Int a.i C07C 2/68
U.S. a. 585—466 12 Qaims
1. A process for para-selective alkylation, transalkylation or
disproportionation of a substituted aromatic compound to
form a dialkylbenzene compound mixture rich in the 1,4-dial-
kylbenzene isomer, said process comprising contacting said
aromatic compound with a crystalline zeolite catalyst compo-
sition at a temperature of between about 250* C. and about 750*
C. and a pressure within the approximate range of lO* N/m^ to
10' N/m^, said catalyst comprising a zeolite characterized by a
silica to alumina mole ratio of at least 1 2 and a constraint index
within the approximate range of 1 to 12, said catalyst having
incorporated thereon at least about 0.25 percent by weight of
a metal selected from iron, cobalt and combinations thereof,
and at least about 0.25 weight percent of the element phospho-
rus, said metal and said phorphorus both being present in said
catalyst in the form of their oxides.
7
t
Mr
W
hi
si
in
ol
Pi
P<
es
in
Ji
U
su
an
th
sc
pr
CG
SO
ba
ELECTRICAL
4,380,686
CABLE SLEEVE LINER
Marc F. L. Moisson, Strombeek, Belginm, assignor to N.V.
Raychem SA., KesseMo, Belgimn
PUed Not. 16, 1979, Ser. No. 94,815
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 11, 1979,
7931402
Int. a.3 HOIR 4/70; H02G 15/18
U.S. a. 174—84 R 9 Qaims
1. A cable splice case comprising a cable sleeve liner
wrapped around a cable splice and a sleeve surrounding the
wrapped liner, said cable sleeve liner comprising a laminate
having at least one layer of a flbrous non-woven cellulosic
sheet material between a metal layer which is substantially
impermeable to moisture vapour, said metal layer having one
of its major surfaces facing away from all fibrous sheet layers
present in the liner, and a microperforated first layer of flexible
polyester film material which is vapour-permeable to permit
escape of gases or vapours generated within the laminate dur-
ing recovery of the sleeve.
4,380,687
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL aRCUIT FOR
SUBSCRIBER CARRIER TELEPHONE SYSTEM
James A. Stewart, Redwood City, Calif., assignor to GTE Auto-
matic Electric Laboratories, Inc., Northlake, 111.
FUed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,129
Int. a.3 H04M 19/06
U.S. a. 179—2 BC 9 Oaims
i-IH
3
5
U^.
BAiR 14
TOCC EO
■48
33
lO
I?
fl6
"1""
JT-
WTTERy
CHARGER
18
1
|«3
02
r
m
1
P^
34
H7
fh
r*.o
A,
Ql .
e +-
°l1 —
> Rl4
\
'dp
-J
3 «ii -
41
;«
oLK j
1. Apparatus responsive to prescribed voltage conditions,
such as a high voltage that is greater than a first threshold level
and a low voltage that is less than a second threshold level, on
the pair of wires of a cable pair for rendering a carrier sub-
scriber local battery charging circuit inoperative for at least a
prescribed time interval, operation of the charging circuit
connecting it through the cable pair to a central office power
source from which it draws current for charging the local
battery, said apparatus comprising:
first and second lines adapted for electrical connection to
one and other of the cable pair wires;
a storage capacitor having one and other terminals electri-
cally connected to said first and second lines, respectively,
said storage capacitor being charged with line current on
the cable pair that is drawn from the central office power
source;
a timing capacitor having a first terminal electrically con-
nectol to said first line and having an other terminal;
programmable unijunction transistor (PUT) means having
cathode, gate and anode electrodes, said cathode being
electrically connected to the other terminal of said timing
capacitor;
first bipolar transistor means having its primary conduction
path electrically connected between the other terminal of
said storage capacitor and the charging circuit for selec-
tively providing startup current for an active element of
the latter and having a base electrode electrically con-
nected to said PUT means anode, non-conduction of said
first transistor means making said startup current available
for charging said storage capacitor;
first means responsive to both high voltage and low voltage
conditions on the cable pair that exceed and fall below the
first and second threshold levels for producing a voltage
change on said PUT means gate that makes it sufficiently
negative with respect to the voltage on said PUT means
anode to cause said PUT means to conduct and discharge
said storage capacitor into said timing capacitor; and
second means responsive to a charge voltage on said timing
capacitor for holding the charging circuit inoperative for
at least the prescribed time interval during discharge of
said timing capacitor following conduction of said PUT
means.
4,380,688
TELEPHONE RINGING RANGE EXTENDER
Frank L. Simokat, Broken Arrow, Okla^ assignor to Til Indus-
tries Inc., Copiague, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,114
Int a.3 H04M 79/00
U.S. a. 179—84 R 11 Claims
■ : "rrif<Si- 1.
1. A ringing range extender for single party telephone ser-
vice on long rural line loops wherein the ringer and a blocking
capacitor of a subscriber's telephone instrument has been con-
nected across the tip and ring electrical conductors of said loop
comprising, in combination:
(a) first and second terminals adapted to be OC coupled to
said tip and ring conductors of said subscriber's line con-
necting said subscriber's telephone instrument to a central
office to provide for the application of the central office
battery and AC ringing signal voltages across said termi-
nals;
(b) semiconductor, breakover means;
(c) capacitor means, connected in parallel with said semicon-
ductor breakover means, one end of said capacitor means
being connected to one of said subscriber loop conduc-
tors;
(d) switching means, said switching means being connected
between a ground reference and the other end of said
capacitor means for providing a relatively low impedance
DC series current path from said one of the subscriber
loop conductors through said semiconductor breakover
means to said ground reference upon activation of said
729
730
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
switching means, said switching means providing a rela-
tively high impedance when de-activated; and
(e) circuit means responsive to the application of a ringing
signal voltage from the other of said subscriber loop con-
ductors to said reference ground for providing an activat-
ing voltage to said switching means.
&:Li3^SB
1. An electroacoustic transducer comprising:
(a) a main support having a hollow cylindrical body defining
a bore, and a central op>ening communicating with said
bore;
(b) a body defining a central bore and attached to said main
support such that said central bore is disposed about said
cylindrical body;
(c) a closure disc attached to said cylindrical body across
said bore;
(d) an annular, flat permanent magnet located on said closure
disc within said bore;
(e) a magnetizable core attached to, and aligned with said
permanent magnet;
(0 an electrical winding or coil disposed around said magne-
tizable core and located between said core and said cylin-
drical body, said winding or coil being electrically con-
nected to an electroacoustic amplifying circuit;
(g) a vibrating disc;
(h) means attaching said vibrating disc across said central
opening in the main support such that it is in close proxim-
ity to an end of said magnetizable core; and
(i) means to adjustably modify the magnetic flux of said
annular, fiat i)ermanent magnet.
4,380,690
HYBRID aRCXJIT
Teruo Matsufiyi, Koganei; Akira Hirato, Ebina, and Yoshihiro
Kawada, Hitaka, all of Japan, assignors to Iwasaki Tsushinki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,459
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-99386
Int. a.3 H04B 1/58
U.S. a. 179—170 NC 1 Claim
1. A hybrid circuit comprising:
a series-connection composed of a variable impedance cir-
cuit and the primary winding of a transformer connected
to the two-wire port of the hybrid circuit;
an amplifier of the four-wire receive port of the hybrid
circuit having a differential output of low impedance
connected across said series-connection; and
an amplifier of the four-wire transmit port of the hybrid
circuit having a high input impedance connected to the
node connection of the variable impedance circuit and the
primary winding of the transformer, the impedances of the
variable imf>edance circuit and the primary winding of the
transformer being in a state of mutual equilibrium, and the
AMPUFIER
4,380,689
ELECTROACOUSTIC TRANSDUCER FOR HEARING
AIDS
Vittorio Giannetti, Via di Vigna Murata 202, 00143 Roma, Italy
FUed Jul. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 169,096
Claims priority, application Italy, Aug. 1, 1979, 49930 A/79
Int. a.3 H04R 11/00
UJS. a. 179—114 R 12 Qaims
VV 19 » 38 M W '5 SI 3C ?) 38 3S 36 W
AMPLIFIER
neutral point potential of the amplifier of the four-wire
receive port being applied to an input to the amplifier of
the four-wire transmit port.
4,380,691
MAIN SWITCH FOR TAPE RECORDER
Masanobu Sato, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 301,224
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 19, 1981, 55-
133178[U]
Int. C1.J HOIR 33/30
U.S. a. 200—51 R 3 Qaims
1. In a tape recorder provided with a power jack, into which
a cylindrical plug including a first conductive member
mounted on the inner periphery of the plug, an insulating
member mounted on the top end portion of the outer periph-
eral surface of the plug, and a second conductive member
mounted on the intermediate portion of the outer peripheral
surface of the plug and constituting a part of the outer periph-
eral surface and being insulated from the first conductive
member, is inserted, and which includes a rod-like conductive
member adapted to snugly fit in the inner periphery of the plug
and be electrically connected to the first conductive member,
a relay conductive member insulated with respect to the first
and second conductive members of the plug, and an elastic
conductive member having elasticity and capable of assuming
a first position, at which the elastic conductive member is in
contact with and electrically connected to the second conduc-
tive member of the plug inserted and is separated from the
relay conductive member, and a second position, which results
from the removal of the plug from the jack and at which the
elastic conductive member is in contact with and electrically
connected to the relay conductive member,
a main switch for the tape recorder comprising a cylindrical
rotary member having an inner periphery, an outer pe-
riphery and a recess formed in said outer periphery and
adapted to snugly fit on said rod-like conductive member
of the power jack when inserted thereinto, said rotary
member being rotatable on and about said rod-like con-
ductive member between a first position, at which said
outer periphery and said elastic conductive member are in
contact with each other and said elastic conductive mem-
ber and said relay conductive member are separated and
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
731
insulated from each other, and a second position, at which
said recess corresponds to and faces said elastic conduc-
tive member and said elastic conductive member and said
relay conductive member are in contact with and electri-
cally connected to each other.
.12
^^
1. A sensor comprising, in combination, a housing including
a pair of spaced planar bearing portions, a pair of flexible bands
of planar spring material disposed between the bearing por-
tions and forced thereby into generally elongate shape, the
adjacent portions of the bands abutting each other and the
remote portions of the bands each abutting a respective bearing
portion,
means securing the abutting portions to each other,
means securing the remote portion of each band to a respec-
tive bearing portion whereby each band is divided into
respective first and second end loops intermediate the
adjacent and remote portions thereof,
means limiting movement of the bands in one direction to
establish a preload position of the bands,
a velocity change of predetermined extent applied to the
bands causing said bands to concurrently roll relative to
each other along a respective bearing portion and trans-
late from the preload position in an opposite directon to
actuated position,
means actuated upon movement of the bands to the actuated
position to indicate the occurrence of such a velocity
change of predetermined extent,
like end loops of each band having a reduced effective width
symmetrical section contiguous like portions of each such
band to provide complementary integral preload forces
biasing the bands in the one direction to the preload posi-
tion and resisting movement of the bands in the opposite
direction to actuated position by applied velocity changes.
4,380,693
SWITCHING DEVICE
Gerhard Kuhlnuum, Stuttgart; Erwin Wolf, Weissach i T., and
Giinter Wahl, Lemfelden-Echterdingen, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,343
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep.' of Germany, Jun. 25,
1980, 3023691
Int a.3 HOIH 15/24. 9/24
MS. a. 200—330 17 Claims
1. A switching device, comprising a switch; an actuating
member displaceable in a switching-on direction so as to
switch on said switch and also displaceable under the action of
a spring force in a switching-ofT direction so as to switch off
said switch, said actuating member being also tiltable, upon
displacement in the switching-on direction, to an engaging
position for arresting said actuating member and to a disengag-
ing position for releasing said actuating member, so that when
said actuating member is displaced in said switching-on direc-
tion and to said engaging position it switches on said switch
4,380,692
ROLLER BAND SENSOR
Houston F. Blanchard, Santa Barbara, and Lawrence D.
Tuchscherer, Goleta, both of Calif., assignors to General
Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 266,081
Int. a.3 HOIH 35/14
U.S. a. 200—61.45 R 5 Claims
and is arrested and when said actuating member is tilted to said
disengaging position and displaced in said switching-ofT direc-
tion it is released and switches off said switch; means for spring
biasing said actuating member in said switching-off direction;
means for holding said actuating member in said engaging
position; and means for mounting said actuating member
for displacement and tilting.
4,380,694
LASER CinriNG APPARATUS
David J. Dyson, Dundee, Scotland, assignor to Ferranti Limited,
Cheadle, England
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,504
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 26, 1980,
8006423
Int. a.3 B23K 27/00
U.S. a. 219—121 LG 7 Claims
(t
!' ^20
27 ^2J
^K^'^
> -2?'
1. Laser cutting apparatus for cutting a workpiece along a
predetermined line comprising a laser producing a continuous
output beam while in operation, means for producing circular
polarization of the laser output beam, and means for directing
the circularly polarized laser output beam onto the workpiece
whereby a cut of uniform section is produced in the workpiece
in any direction of cut.
4,380,695
CONTROL OF TORCH POSITION AND TRAVEL IN
AUTOMATIC WELDING
Jerome W. Nelson, Houston, Tex., assignor to Cnitcher Re-
sources Corporation, Houston, Tex.
FUed Jul. 6, 1976, Ser. No. 702,865
Int a.3 B23K 9/12
U.S. a. 219—125.12 6 Claims
1. In welding where an electric arc welding torch moves in
an undulating path along a gap having spaced opposed side-
walls to deposit metal in said gap for joining said walls into a
unitary structure and where a continuous signal having various
frequency comf>onents is generated at the torch and in which
the torch is caused to weave laterally across said gap, the steps
of:
(a) imposing a periodic extreme lateral position-indicating
amplitude-modulated carrier signal on said continuous
signal, said imposed signal being of frequency different
from components contained in said continuous signal to
obtain a composite signal having periodic values varying
732
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
in amplitude corresponding to consecutive extreme lateral
positions and containing other signal components which
tend to conceal said periodic values;
(b) removing said concealing signal components from said
composite signals by filtering to isolate said periodic val-
ues;
TT7 > TTT
ait
ST0«1 1
i^— J , tSuW'g'i add; I
weld path in accordance with said stored manipulator arm
position data during a first repeat phase with respect to a
second subsequent workpiece;
means for sensing said predetermined projected light pattern
on said second subsequent workpiece as said manipulator
arm moves along said taught weld path during said first
repeat phase;
image processing means responsive to said sensing means for
generating deviation data representing the deviation be-
tween the actual weld path of said second workpiece and
said path described by said manipulator arm during said
first repeat phase;
means responsive to said generated deviation data for gener-
ating corrected weld path data representing said actual
weld path on said second workpiece; and
means responsive to said corrected weld path data for mov-
ing said manipulator arm and controlling said manipulator
welding apparatus to weld said second workpiece along
said actual weld path during a second repeat phase.
(c) taking discrete samples of said periodic values;
(d) summing the signal amplitude values occurring at said
opposed sidewalls to produce a sum signal;
(e) comparing said sum signal to a reference value; and
(0 using the result of such comparision to control the width
of said weaving path of said arc between said sidewalls.
4,380,696
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANIPULATOR
WELDING APPARATUS WITH VISION CORRECTION
FOR WORKPIECE SENSING
Ichiro Masaki, Brookfield, Conn., assignor to Unimation, Inc.,
Danbury, Conn.
Filed Not. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,279
Int. a.5 B23K 9/12
U.S. a. 219—124.34 47 Oaims
4,380,697
INTERNAL TUBE WELDING APPARATUS
Gasparas Kazlauskas, Sun Valley, Calif., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 222,704, Jan. 5, 1981. This
appUcation Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,785
Int. a.3 B23K 9/225
U.S. a. 219—136 7 Oaims
- ^— li
I J """ ly
1. Control apparatus for manipulator welding apparatus, the
manipulator apparatus having a manipulator arm controllable
in one or more axes and arranged to perform a weld path on a
workpiece at a workpiece station, the control apparatus com-
prising:
means for storing manipulator arm position data during an
initial teach phase representing a desired taught weld path
with respect to a reference workpiece at a predetermined
location at the workpiece station;
means for projecting a predetermined light pattern on the
workpiece at said workpiece station;
means for storing a reference image of said projected prede-
termined light pattern during said teach phase;
means for moving said manipulator arm along said taught
1. An apparatus for welding the inside of a circular opening,
comprising:
a housing;
an electrode shaft member rotatably mounted within said
housing;
jaw means coupled to said housing and movable about said
electrode shaft member for releasably gripping the inside
of the circular opening;
handle means pivotally coupled to said housing for actuating
said jaw means, said handle means being rotatable to
permit folding thereof;
a collet disposed about said electrode shaft member and
having an expanded outer surface at the forward end
thereof;
a plurality of radially-projecting jaw segments movable over
and in sliding contact with the expanded outer surface of
said collet;
said collet is fixed about said electrode shaft member; and
said jaw segments are mounted to move axially over said
collet.
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
733
4,380,698
MULTIPROCESSOR CONTROL BUS
Oirille R. Butts, West Laftiyette, Ind., assignor to Roper Corpo-
ration, Kankakee, lU.
FUed Jul. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 172,408
Int. a.3 H05B 1/02
U.S. a. 219—492 12 Claims
circuit, said electronic circuit being supported by a carrier
sheet composed of electrically insulating synthetic resin mate-
rial and extending in a cavity which is provided in a main
support sheet composed of electrically insulating thermoplas-
tic material and said main support sheet, said carrier sheet
being provided with holes which are located on opposite sides
of said cavity and through which parts of the first cover sheet
and the main support sheet are laminated together.
4,380,700
IMAGE BLANKING aRCUIT FOR UNE FOLLOWER
George H. Kailen, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
FUed Jon. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,137
Int. a.3 G05B 1/00
U.S. a. 250—202 17 Claims
1. A cooking appliance having a plurality of cooking func-
tions performed within a single appliance cabinet including a
distributed control arrangement comprising:
(a) a plurality of microprocessor-based control circuits each
associated with a different portion of the appliance con-
trol, and each physically located within the appliance
cabinet but physically located on different printed circuit
boards;
(b) a multi-line bus arrangement coupling the control circuits
to one another, each said control circuit including means
for exchanging control information with another said
control circuit via the bus, each said control circuit also
including means for preventing exchange of invalid data
resulting from noise on the bus; and
(c) a user-control system interface physically connected to
and in close proximity with the appliance cabinet for
manual entry of cooking control data by the user, said
interface being the sole source of user-supplied cooking
control information,
in which each microprocessor-based control circuit is associ-
ated with a different one of the plurality of cooking func-
tions of the cooking appliance, and
in which one of the microprocessor-based control circuits is
a master circuit with the remainder of the circuits being
slave circuits, the slave circuits being operable to transfer
information onto the bus only in response to data placed
on the bus by the master circuit.
4,380,699
PORTABLE, IDENTIFYING ELEMENT CONSTRUCTED
AS A LAMINATION OF SHEETS
Michel J. Monnier, Montgeron; Marc A. Monneraye, St Maur,
Claude Foucher, Palaiseau, and Pierre Le Marchant, Clamart,
all of France, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,144
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jul. 9, 1980, 80 15303
Int. a.3 G06K 19/06
U.S. a. 235—492 4 Claims
1. A portable identifying element comprising a lamination of
sheets composed of electrically insulating synthetic resin mate-
rial, in which is included at least one integrated solid state
electronic circuit for data processing, said element being pro-
vided with external access ports for the solid state electronic
30-
1. In a curve follower circular scanning apparatus, a gating
circuit for setting a sector window comprising:
first means for timing the duration of a scan of a first sector;
second means, triggered by said first timing means, for tim-
ing the duration of a scan of a second sector;
means for signaling the presence of a subject within said
window, said window being bounded by the sum of said
first and said second sectors; and
means responsive to said signaling means for resetting said
first and said second timing means upon the detection of
said subject.
4,380,701
NUCLEAR WELL LOGGING WITH NEUTRON SOURCE
AND SEPARATE SPACED RADIATION DETECTORS TO
DETERMINE SILICON/OXYGEN RATIO
Harry D. Smith, Jr., and Ward E. Schultz, both of Houston,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 192,967
Int. a.3 GOIV 5/00
U.S. a. 250—266 20 Claims
1. A well logging apparatus for simultaneously obtaining a
measuring of the relative presence of the elements silicon and
oxygen in earth formations in the vicinity of a fluid-filled well
borehole, comprising:
(a) sonde means for moving through the well borehole past
formations of interest;
(b) source means mounted in said sonde means for bombard-
ing the formation with high energy neutrons;
(c) first detector means mounted in said sonde spaced a first
distance from said source means for detecting gamma
radiation from neutron activation of oxygen;
(d) second detector means mounted in said sonde spaced a '
second distance from said source means for detecting
gamma radiation from neutron activation of silicon;
(e) said second distance being such that when said second
734
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
detector is moved to a formation of interest substantially
all oxygen activation gamma radiation has dissipated; and
and Er, and x and y are numbers satisfying the conditions of
0^x^0.6 and O^y^O.2.
(0 sonde circuit means for forming electrical signals repre-
senting gamma radiation detected by said first and second
detectors.
4,380,702
RADIATION IMAGE STORAGE PANEL
Kenji Takahashi, and Jwtji Miyahara, both of Minami-ashigara,
Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa,
Japan
Filed Jul. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 168,801
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 11, 1979, 54-87813
Int. a.3 G03C 5/16
U.S. a. 250—327.2 56 Qaims
14
u^^m Doa
12
13
18
15 16 17
1. A radiation image storage panel having a fluorescent layer
comprising a binder and a stimulable phosphor dispersed
therein upon stimulation by rays having a wavelength ranging
from 500 to 800 nm, wherein said phosphor is characterized in
that said panel has a light-reflecting white pigment layer on
one side thereof with respect to the fluorescent layer opposite
to the side exposed to the stimulating rays for said stimulable
phosphor and that said phosphor is represented by the follow-
ing general formula (I) or (II);
LnOX:aA
(Bai_,M'^JFXi:yA,
4,380,703
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE REGULATION OF A
MAGNETIC DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Reinhold Schmitt, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Sep. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 183,946
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 12,
1979, 2936911
Int. C1.3 HOIJ 3/20
U.S. a. 250—396 ML 5 Qaims
(I)
(M)
Dfflfction
Currffit
Control
3,
'i
Uiqnelic
Df^lection
System
*or Cled-on
II
"T
J*
7
-L
>
Bum Wntfr
b dB/oi 1
'3
i
(
Wiqrftx
De^'fctton
fifid
Uejsjrrnq
Mjjos
1- 1
1
s ^^
Ou
' 1
1 — ^__j L^.J
n
^^
j-diy*. i
—-
-J^
1. A method for regulating a magnetic deflection system for
a particle radiation optical device, particularly an electron
beam writer, in which the current flowing through deflection
coil means is measured and a control signal is generated in a
first control loop for readjusting the deflection magnetic field
produced by said deflection coil means by means of compari-
son with a command value, characterized in that given changes
in the command value supplied to the first control loop, a
second control loop is superimposed for supplementing the
control action of said first control loop in that a signal propor-
tional to the magnetic field rate of change (dB/dt) is generated
and is compared in the second control loop to a value propor-
tional to the command value rate of change (dx/dt); and in that
the comparison output of the second control loop serves as an
additional control signal for controlling the deflection mag-
netic field.
4,380,704
ELECTRICAL SWITCH
Michael S. Wisda, 1142 Sheila Ct., Upland, Calif. 91786
FUed Apr. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 144,442
Int. a.3 HOIH 19/00
U.S. a. 307—116 12 Claims
y_
wherein Ln represents an element selected from the group of
La, Y, Gd and Lu, X represents an element selected from the
group of CI and Br, A represents an element selected from the
group of Ce and TB, and X is a number satisfying the condition
of0<X<0.1;
stuitce SO
wherein M^' represents at least one divalent metal selected
from the group consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, Zn and Cd, Xi repre-
sents at least one halogen selected from the group consisting of
CI, Br and I, Ai represents at least one element selected from
the group consisting of Eu, Tb, Ce, Tm, Dy, Pr, Ho, Nd, Yb
1. An electrical switch for use in explosive environments,
under water, and the like, comprising
a printed circuit board having an electrical circuit pattern
deposited thereon, at least a single magnetic reed switch
mounted on said board and connected in electrical series
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
735
circuit relationship with the electrical circuit pattern on
said board, the reed switch having switch contacts in a
normally open circuit condition,
an electrical cable having a plurality of electrical conductors
arranged therein in an insulatively spaced relationship,
said cable being constructed of an electrical insulative
material, and being adapted to have one end of each of the
electrical connectors connected to an electrical power
source,
means for electrically connecting the remaining ends of the
individual electrical conductors of the cable in circuit
relationship with the electrical circuit pattern of the
printed circuit board to provide an electrical circuit path
on the printed circuit board through the reed switch to
thereby electrically switch the power through the electri-
cal cable in accordance with the electrical circuit condi-
tion of the reed switch,
means for completely encapsulating the printed circuit
board including the circuit pattern thereon and the con-
nected reed switch and a portion of the electrical cable
beyond said cable conductor connecting means in an
electrical insulative medium to form a solid unit without
any voids in the insulative medium to thereby eliminate
any exposed electrical contacts externally of the insulative
encapsulated medium whereby the encapsulated elements
may be completely immersed in an explosive or corrosive
environment, under water or the like,
said encapsulating medium including an aperture spaced
adjacent the reed switch while being spaced from the
circuit pattern on the printed circuit pattern and extending
through the printed circuit board to permit mounting a
control shaft therethrough,
a control shaft mounted in said aperture for rotation therein,
one end of the control shaft mounting a permanent magnet
rotatable with the control shaft to operate the encapsu-
lated reed switch in accordance with the positions of the
magnetic poles of the magnet to thereby provide an elec-
trical circuit path through the cable, printed circuit pat-
tern on said board and the closed contacts of the reed
switch when the contacts are magnetically operated by
said permanent magnet to a closed circuit position.
4,380,705
DIGITAL SEMICONDUCTOR ORCUIT
Helmut Rosier, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 29, 1980, Ser. No. 154,576
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 5,
1979, 333863
Int. a.3 H03K 17/56, 19/20
U.S. a. 307—247 R 8 Oaims
circuit disposed between the control switches and the bistable
flip-flops and being connectible by n signal inputs thereof via
the control switches, respectively, to a level of a logical "1",
said common logic circuit having 2 n signal outputs pairwise
combined, respective pairs of said signal outputs being dis-
posed for controlling respective ones of said bistable flip-flops,
each of said bistable flip-flops having a respective signal output
for controlling a respective one of the circuit parts activatable
by the respective control switches, said bistable flip-flops being
initially in a flrst operating state wherein the circuit parts to be
activated are in rest condition immediately subsequent to
switching on of the digital semiconductor circuit, said common
logic circuit having means responsive to sole actuation of a
respective control switch for effecting a transition of the re-
spectively associated bistable flip-flop from said flrst to said
second operating state thereof only and for automatically
resetting to said flrst operating state, with said transition, any
nonselected bistable flip-flop which may yet be in said second
operating state when the respective control switch is actuated,
whereby the circuit part is associated with the respective
control switch is activated, the circuit including respective
inverters connected to respective ones of said n signal inputs of
said common logic circuit addressable by respective ones of
the control switches for controlling respective NOR gates
having two inputs, one of the inputs of a respective NOR gate
being connected to one of said inverters, respectively, and the
other of the inputs of the NOR gates being connected in com-
mon to another part of said common logic circuit from which
a blocking signal is deliverable to all of said NOR gates, the
respective NOR gates having an output forming a respective
first signal output of said common logic circuit, and including
a respective second signal output of said common logic circuit
formed by an output of a respective OR gate having (n— 1)
signal inputs respectively controllable by one of the signal
inputs to said common logic circuit which is associated with
the others of the control switches, the circuit further including
respective AND gates and (n — 1) of a total of n additional OR
gates having respective inputs connected to the signal inputs of
said common logic circuit and controllable thereby, each of
said AND gates being associated respectively with one of said
(n — 1) additional OR gates, said (n-1) additional OR gates
having a respective output connected to another input of the
respective AND gates associated therewith, said other part of
said common logic circuit from which the blocking signal is
deliverable comprising yet a further OR gate having respective
inputs connected to respective outputs of said AND gates and
controllable thereby.
4,380,706
VOLTAGE REFERENCE ORCUIT
Robert S. Wrathall, Tempe, Ariz., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,797
Int. a.i H03K 3/26. 3/01
U.S. a. 307—297 6 Qaims
1. Digital semiconductor circuit with a plurality of circuit
parts selectively activauble by manual actuation of respective 1. A voltage reference circuit having a differential amplifler
control switches comprising a respective bistable flip-flop with a first and a second input and an output, the voluge
associated with each of the control switches, a common logic reference circuit comprising: a first transistor having a base
1029 O.G.— 33
736
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
coupled to the output of the differential amplifier and having a
first electrode coupled to a first power terminal and having a
second electrode; a second transistor having a base coupled to
the second electrode of the first transistor, the second transis-
tor also having a first electrode coupled to the first power
terminal and having a second electrode; a first resistor coupled
between the second electrode of the second transistor and a
second power terminal; a third transistor having a base coupled
to the second electrode of the second transistor and having a
first electrode coupled to the first power terminal and having
a second electrode; a second and a third resistor coupled in
series between the second electrode of the third transistor and
the second power terminal and forming a node between the
second and third resistor, the node being coupled to the first
input of the differential amplifier; a fourth transistor having a
base coupled to the base of the third transistor and having a
first electrode coupled to the first power terminal and having
a second electrode; and a fourth resistor coupled between the
second electrode of the fourth transistor and the second power
terminal, and the second electrode of the fourth transistor also
being coupled to the second input of the differential amplifier.
4,380,708
i2l with polysilicon diodes and
interconnects
Coraelis M. Hart, Sunnyrale, Calif., assignor to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 50,004, Jim. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,233
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 29, 1978,
7806989
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/04. 27/04; H03K 19/091, 19/092
U.S. a. 307—457 2 Qaims
42 S8^2 56 43 50 44 47 49 49^ 48 45 47 51 46 57 58 53
4,380,707
TRANSIS'i OR-TRANSISTOR LOGIC INPUT BUFFER
CIRCUIT VITH POWER SUPPLY/TEMPERATURE
EFFECTS COMPENSATION aRCUIT
Richard D. Crisp, Austin, Tex., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, 111.
Filed May 16, 1980, Ser. No. 150,536
Int. Cl.^ G05F 1/56; H03K 17/687, 19/003. 19/094
U.S. a. 307—443 2 Qaims
^DD
6]
i
4, 32 ->1
DD
Q
Vdd
32-^1,34 38
30 ^
I P
I • 42
36-^
TO
. SUBSEQUENT
STAGES
1. An MOS input buffer circuit with compensation for pro-
cess, supply voltage, and temperature variations, comprising:
a first amplifying stage coupled to a source of supply voltage
and having a first input and a first output, said first input
for receiving an input signal representative of high and
low logic levels;
at least one additional amplifying stage coupled to said
source and having a second input coupled to said first
output and having a second output;
said first amplifying stage and said second amplifying stage
comprising inverters each having at least two enhance-
ment type semiconductor devices with substantially equal
channel lengths to provide operating stability over tem-
perature and process variations;
means coupled to said source and to said first amplifying
stage comprising a field effect transistor having a channel
width substantially equal to the channel width of a first
semiconductor device of said first amplifying stage such
that the conductivity of the field effect transistor tracks
that of said first semiconductor device, for altering the
gain of said first amplifying stage in response to fluctua-
tions in said supply voltage; and
wherein said field effect transistor has a gate electrode coupled
to said source, a source electrode coupled to ground and a
drain electrode coupled to the output of said first inverter.
1. An integrated circuit having a plurality of gate circuits,
which comprises:
a semiconductor body having a major surface;
at least first, second and third bipolar transistors, each hav-
ing an emitter zone, a base zone forming a signal input and
a collector zone located successively in a direction trans-
verse to said major surface, at least the base and collector
zones of said transistors adjoining said major surface;
means for supplying surrent connected to each signal input;
a plurality of diodes connected to each collector zone to
form a plurality of signal outputs from each transistor;
an insulating layer on at least a portion of said major surface;
a system of signal connections for connecting at least the
collector zone of said first transistor to the base zones of
said second and third transistors, said system of signal
connections comprising a plurality of paths of conductive
materia] on said insulating layer and locally extending
down to said major surface through apertures in said
insulating layer to contact at least the collector zone of
said first transistor and the base zones of said second and
third transistors, said paths of conductive material com-
prising a polycrystalline semiconductor track and at least
first and second diode junctions for coupling the collector
zone of said first transistor respectively to the base zones
of said second and third transistors, said first and second
diode junctions comprising p-n junctions each adjoining
and formed from said polycrystalline semiconductor track
on at least one side of each junction, each junction being
spaced apart from the collector zone of said first transistor
and the base zones of said second and third transistors, the
distance between the collector zone of the first transistor
and the first diode junction measured along the signal
connection being larger than the distance between the first
diode junction and the base zone of the second transistor
measured along the signal connection, and the first and
second diode junctions being situated closer to the second
and third transistors, respectively, than to the first transis-
tor; and
fourth, fifth and sixth bipolar transistors and third and fourth
p-n junctions, the collector zones of said fourth and fifth
transistor being connected to the base of said sixth transis-
tor by, respectively, said third and fourth p-n junctions,
said third p-n junction being closer to said fourth transis-
tor than said sixth, and said fourth p-n junction being
closer to said fifth transistor than said sixth.
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
737
4,380,709
SWITCHED-SUPPLY THREE-STATE aRCUTT
Kenneth K. Au, Round Rock, Tex., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaiimburg, 111.
Filed May 15, 1980, Ser. No. 150,019
Int. a.3 H03K 19/094. 19/20
MS. a. 307—473
with the reference terminal being the input for the con-
trolling leg and said P channel device being in a first
9Clauns
SyvDD
, — 0/P
1. A switched-supply three-state circuit capable of assuming
first, second and third conditions, comprising:
first means for receiving an enabling signal and a source of
supply voltage;
second means for receiving an input signal;
third means coupled to said first and second means and
having an output for generating true and complement
signal representations of said input signal when the source
voltage is supplied to said third means, said output being
disabled when said source voltage is blocked from said
third means; and
fourth means coupled between said first means and said third
means for supplying the source voltage to said third means
when said enabling signal is in a first predetermined state,
comprising:
first inverter means having a first MOS inverter coupled
between ground and said source voltage and having an
input coupled to said enabling signal and having an out-
put;
a first field-effect transistor having a drain coupled to said
source voltage, a gate coupled to the output of said first
MOS inverter and having a source coupled to said third
means for supplying voltage thereto; and
a second field-effect transistor having a source coupled to
ground, a gate coupled to said enabling signal and a drain
coupled to the source of said first field-effect transistor.
4,380,710
TTL TO CMOS INTERFACE QRCUIT
Paul B. Cohen, New Qty, N.Y.; William R. Young, Indialantic,
and W. Dalie Edwards. Indian Harbour Beach, both of Fla.,
assignors to Harris Corporation, Melbourne, Fla.
FUed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,671
Int. a.J H03K 19/092. 19/094. 19/20 17/04
VJS. a. 307—475 10 Qaims
1. An interface circuit having a signal input terminal, a
reference terminal and a signal output terminal comprising:
a complementary field effect transistor inverter having an N
and P channel device connected between a pair of supply
terminals with the input terminal of the circuit being the
input of said inverter and the output terminal of said
circuit being the output of said inverter;
a first complementary field effect transistor current mirror
means connected between said pair of supply terminals
with the reference terminal being the input for the con-
trolling leg and said N channel device being in a first
portion of the controlled leg; and said signal input being
an input to a second portion of the controlled leg; and
a second complementary field effect transistor current mir-
ror means connected between said pair of supply terminals
<?
_t
1 1
HC" HC'^ "Ot • C-*
portion of the controlled leg and said input signal being an
input to a second portion of the controlled leg.
4,380,711
LINEARIZATION aRCUIT
Vernon R. Cunningham, Melissa, Tex., assignor to Rockwell
International Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,398
Int. a.3 H03K 4/00
U.S. a. 307-491 3 Claims
6T2
3. Variable impedance circuit element means for use as a
variable curvature compensation load in an amplifier circuit to
minimize nonlinearities in a signal introduced by AGC cir-
cuitry upstream in a signal path comprising, in combination:
a first parallel circuit branch comprising resistors Rl and R2;
a second parallel circuit branch comprising R3, a transistor
Ql and a resistor R4 where R4 is a common emitter impe-
dance for Ql, R3 is a collector load impedance for Ql and
the base of Ql is connected to a point in said first circuit
branch between Rl and R2; and
a third parallel circuit branch comprising a collector-emitter
path of a transistor Q2 having its base connected to the
collector of Ql and wherein,
the curvature is varied in accordance with changes in the
value of resistance in resistors R2 and R3.
4,380,712
ARRANGEMENT FOR COOLING A
SUPERCONDUCTING MAGNET WINDING
Lutz Intichar, Christoph Schnapper, both of Eriaagen, and Erich
Weghaupt, Miilheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,612
CUims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 23,
1980, 3015682
Int a.^ H02K 9/00
U.S. a. 310—52 8 Claims
1. In an arrangement for cooling a superconducting magnet
winding, especially the superconducting field winding in the
rotor of an electric machine, said arrangement including; at
least one coolant chamber which, in the operating condition,
contains a gaseous phase and a liquid phase of a coolant; at least
one feed line for feeding coolant to said chamber; coolant paths
through the magnet winding connecting to a liquid space in the
738
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
chamber occupied by the liquid phase; and at least one coolant
discharge line with a predetermined high flow resistance con-
nected to a vapor space in the chamber occupied by the gase-
ous phase, the improvement comprising:
,5 .1. .6
hiMIIIIIII
1-^ ■
S=±=L=__^11
-r .. I , .. D "C
rjrjiO.
^^
(a) a buffer tank; and
(b) a connecting path having a relatively low flow resistance
connecting said buffer tank to the vapor space occupied
by the gaseous phase.
4,380,713
DOVETAILED TEETH FOR USE IN A SYSTEM FOR
nXING STATOR WINDING BARS IN A ROTATING
ELECTRIC MACHINE
Gillet Roger, and Nithart Henri, both of Belfort, France, assign-
ors to Alsthom-Atlantique and Electricite de France, both of
Paris, France
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,449
Qaims priority, application France, Aug. 7, 1980, 80 17444
Int. a.3 H02K 3/48
U.S. CI. 310—214 6 Claims
1. Dovetailed teeth for use in fixing stator winding bars of an
electric rotating machine having a rotor that rotates about a
longitudinal axis inside a stator, the stator having a magnetic
circuit with a cylindrical inner surface disposed around the
rotor and carrying angularly spaced winding bars that extend
longitudinally and fixed against said cylindrical inner surface
by means of said dovetailed teeth which are fixed to said mag-
netic circuit, said teeth protruding radially inwards and being
spaced out angularly, each of said teeth being generally pris-
matic with longitudinal generatrices and comprising: a foot
defining a trapezium in cross-section having a large base and a
small base both disposed in the tangential direction with the
small base nearest the inside of the machine, two flanks con-
necting said bases together; and a body which extends in the
radial direction from the small base of said trapezium and
terminating in a head; the teeth being fixed by engaging their
feet in longitudinal slots of a trapezoidal cross-section which
corresponds to that of said feet, said slots being formed in the
inner surface of said stator magnetic circuit; the winding bars
being fixed to the stator magnetic circuit by means of the
bodies of these teeth which extend radially inwards from the
inner surface of the stator magnetic circuit; the improvement
wherein each of said dovetailed teeth includes:
a core which extends along the whole length of the tooth
with parts within the foot, body and head thereof, a cover-
ing for said core parts of said core being disposed inside
said foot of said tooth having a base surface which is
parallel to and which faces a middle portion of the large
base of the foot and two flank surfaces which extend
towards the body of the tooth from the side edges of said
base surface and coming progressively closer to each
other; and
said covering being applied to said core, the thickness of said
covering being substantially constant, said covering being
constituted by superposed layers of a sheathing fabric
disposed parallel to the longitudinal direction completely
wrapped about said core foot, body and head following
the side surfaces of the tooth, said layers being impreg-
nated with a hard resin so that the covering runs along the
foot, body and head in order to transmit radial traction
forces from said body and head to said foot; whereby the
foot has high resistance to radial inward traction forces.
4,380,714
HIGH-PRESSURE DISCHARGE LAMP
Anton J. Bouman, and Eise B. Geertsema, both of Eindhoven,
Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,106
Oaims priority, application Netherlands, Jan. 15, 1980,
8000228
Int. a.3 HOIJ 19/68
U.S. a. 313—549 1 Qaim
1. A high-pressure discharge lamp having a vacuum-tight
glass outer envelope in which a vacuum-tight, light-transmit-
ting discharge vessel is situated in a non-oxidizing medium and
is provided with a pair of electrodes and an ionizable filling, in
which lamp current conductors extend through the wall of the
outer envelope and the wall of the discharge vessel to said pair
of electrodes and in which an oxidation-sensitive element is
situated between the said two walls, electrically in series with
said current conductors, characterized in that the oxidation-
sensitive element consists of an electric insulator on which two
spaced conductors are provided and are interconnected elec-
trically by a layer of an oxygen gettering metallic evaporable
getter vapour-deposited on said insulator.
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
739
4,380,715
COLOR TELEVISION DISPLAY TUBE WITH RESISTOR
FOR INTERFERENCE RADIATION REDUCnON
Gosse J. Postma, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 191,042
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Oct. 15, 1979,
7907596
Int. a.3 HOIJ 29/96. 29/88, 29/81
U.S. a. 315—3 3 Qairas
4,380,717
MAGNETRONS
Alan H. Pickering, Chelmsford, England, assignor to English
Electric Valve Company Limited, Chelmsford, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 71,714, Aug. 31, 1979. This application
Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,815
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 2, 1978,
35425/78
Int. a.5 HOIJ 25/50
U.S. a. 315—39.51 13 Claims
1. A color television display tube comprising an envelope
having a neck, a cone and a window, an electron beam produc-
ing means located in said neck, a display screen provided on
the internal surface of said window and covered with an elec-
trically conductive layer, a shadow mask situated at a short
distance from the display screen, and means for electrically
connecting the shadow mask to the conductive layer, said
electrical connection means having a resistance of approxi-
mately 5 kOhms to 100 kOhms.
4,380,716
EXTERNAL MAGNETIC HELD COMPENSATOR FOR A
CRT
Arthur L. Romeo; Robert T. Bonelli, both of Greenlawn, and
Harvey E. Fishman, Brooklyn, all of N.Y., assignors to Hazel-
tine Corporation, Greenlawn, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,947
Int. a.3 HOIJ 29/06
U.S. a. 315—8 21 Oaims
1. Apparatus for compensating for an external magnetic field
affecting a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, said apparatus
comprising:
(a) means for generating a reference display of a given color
in a predetermined area on the face of said C^T;
(b) means for sensing an optical characteristic of the refer-
ence display and generating an output signal representa-
tive thereof;
(c) means for generating a compensating magnetic field
about said CRT; and
(d) means for controlling the strength of said compensating
magnetic field in response to said output signal.
niftr^t:^
7^*TMrnMMBr-
1. A magnetron including a cathode in which a cylindrical
support of good electrical conductivity material carries elec-
tron emissive material located in recesses formed in the outer
cylindrical surface to provide an electron emissive surface area
of a predetermined area having interruptions formed by walls
of the exposed outer, cylindrical surface, the recesses having
substantially constant cross sectional area in the direction of
their depth so that as the volume of electron emissive material
decreases during operation of the magnetron, said electron
emissive surface area remains substantially unreduced.
13. A magnetron including a cathode in which a cylindrical
support of good electrical conductivity material carries elec-
tron emissive material located in recesses formed in the outer
cylindrical surface, the lateral dimensions of each recess in at
least one given direction being small compared with the over-
all dimension of the cathode in the same direction whereby a
plurality of areas of electron emissive material which are sepa-
rated by intervening raised portions of said cylindrical support
are positioned along said direction, and the area of the outer
cylindrical surface which is occupied by said electron emissive
material is large as compared to the rest of said outer cylindri-
cal surface, and wherein the recesses have substantially con-
stant cross sectional areas in the direction of their depth so that
as the volume of electron emissive material decreases during
operation of the magnetron, the electron emissive surface area
remains substantially unreduced.
4,380,718
TRAILER MARKER LIGHT SUBSTITUTION ORCUIT
Roger L. Miller, Ann Arbor, Mich., assignor to Kelsey-Hayes
Co., Romulus, Mich.
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 267,218
Int. a? H05B 39/10: B60Q 1/26
U.S. a. 315—93 7 Claims
1. A dual polarity alarm circuit for applying power from two
power terminals to a second load in response to failure of a first
load comprising a PNP transistor and an NPN transistor each
having a base, an emitter and a collector, means connecting
said emitters to one of said power terminals, means connecting
said first load between the other of said power terminals and
said bases of said transistors whereby current normally flows
through said first load and the base to emitter junctions of one
of said transistors, a bidirectional switch having main terminals
and gate means for triggering said switch into conduction,
means connecting said switch main terminals and said second
load in series between said power terminals, means connecting
said gate means to said transistor collectors, and resistor means
connected between said gate means and said other power
740
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
terminal for causing said gate means to trigger said switch switching state at the beginning of each alternate half cycle of
when a conducting one of said transistors ceases to conduct the a.c. voltage.
1. An electronic device for the starting and a.c. voltage
operation of at least one electric discharge lamp provided with
electrodes, the device comprising, at least two input terminals
one of which is intended for connection to an electrode of the
discharge lamp and the other of which is intended for connec-
tion to another lamp electrode, said two input terminals being
interconnected by a circuit branch comprising a first con-
trolled semiconductor switching element provided with a
control circuit, the control circuit being operative such that, in
the fully operating condition of the lamp with an a.c. voltage
applied to said two terminals, the semiconductor switching
element is made conductive for a period in every half cycle of
the applied a.c. voltage, the control of the semiconductor
switching element depending on the magnitude of the voltage
between the said two input terminals, a second controlled
semiconductor switching element having two switching states
and connected to the first switching element so that only in a
first switching stote of the second switching element is the
current through the first switching element blocked, means
connecting a control electrode of the second switching ele-
ment to a second control circuit arranged in parallel with a
portion of the circuit branch which interconnects the said two
input terminals and comprises at least the first switching ele-
ment, and wherein the second control circuit includes a recti-
fier and has such a small time constant that, at least immedi-
ately after switch-on of the device, the second control circuit
causes the second switching element to switch to its first
4,380,720
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING A DIRECTED FLOW OF
A GASEOUS MEDIUM UTILIZING THE ELECTRIC
WIND PRINOPLE
Carl M. Fleck, Schelleingasse 14, 1040 Wien, Austria
FUed No?. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,417
Oaims priority, application Austria, Nov. 20, 1979, 7384/79;
May 6, 1980, 2397/80; May 6, 1980, 2398/80; Jul. 23, 1980,
3806/80; Jul. 23, 1980, 3808/80
Int. a.3 HOIJ 7/24
U.S. a. 315-111.91 16 Qaims
due to failure of said first load whereby said second load is
energized.
4,380,719
ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR THE STARTING AND A.C.
VOLTAGE OPERATION OF A GAS AND/OR VAPOR
DISCHARGE LAMP
Adrianus M. J. De Byl, and Hubertus M. J. Chermin, both of
Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,321
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 19, 1979,
7909128
Int. a.3 H05B 41/16
U.S. a. 315—101 16 Qaims
m mmmaa
1. In an apparatus wherein charged particles are generated
by a discharge electrode and are collected on a plurality of
spaced-apart collector plates at a potential different from that
of said discharge electrode, the improvement which comprises
intermediate collector plates not connected to any voltage
source and disposed between but insulated from the first-men-
tioned collector plates and positioned in the electric field be-
tween said first collector plates and said discharge electrode to
have induced on said intermediate collector plates potentials
between those of said first collector plates and said discharge
electrode.
4,380,721
PROXIMTTY SWTTCH
John W. Bullock, 67 Margarita, CamariUo, CaUf. 93010, and
Lawrence T. Miranda, 91-564 Pupu St., Ewa Beach, Hi. 96706
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 221,085
Int. a.3 H05B 37/02; HOIK 7/00
U.S. a. 315—362 1 Qaim
:0
11
A"-. It
r-lf^A
1
1
. — .
FIlDBACfc
n
1
c,aco•^
L. -
06CRLATOC
7h
1
it-z
COMPA
».Ofe
OATOB
•
J7
lb
_1_
_
So
f
POWEe ijtJ
\:-^.. 1
OuTPoT
f 'f
--
OU.^EO
.!
'',
3*
1
'MDOCTiWE
\L 1
COWP
M£AT
3C
_J
1. A proximity switch for sensing the presence of an object
or agent comprising the combination of:
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
741
an antenna;
an oscillator coupled to said antenna and adapted to modify
oscillations in response to the presence of an object or
agent in close proximity to said antenna;
a voltage comparator operably coupled to said oscillator for
initiating a trigger signal in response to modification of
oscillations from said oscillator;
a voltage setting circuit producing a threshold voltage level;
a bistable circuit operatively coupled to said voltage setting
circuit and responsive to said trigger signal in the presence
of said threshold voltage level to provide an output volt-
age level;
a load operably connected to said bistable circuit for receiv-
ing said output voltage level and being actuated thereby;
a feedback circuit connected between said antenna and said
oscillator;
an amplifier circuit interconnecting said oscillator circuit
with said feedback circuit for rectifying its output;
an output driver network including a light emitting diode
circuit operably coupled between said load and said bista-
ble circuit;
said voltage setting circuit is a first flip-flop circuit and said
bistable circuit is a gate circuit having a second flip-flop
circuit;
an inductive load compensator network coupled to said
load;
said voltage comparator is coupled to said oscillator circuit
via said amplifier circuit for sensing a dip in voltage there-
from resulting from the inference with an electromagnetic
field surrounding said antenna; and
said electromagnetic field is established by said oscillator.
4380,723
DIGITAL VELOCITY SERVO
Michael D. Leis, Framlnghani, and Robert C. Rose, Hudson,
both of Mass., assignors to Digital Equipment Corporation,
Maynard, Mass.
FUed Jun. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 46,130
Int. a.5 H02F 5/16
U.S. CI. 318—314 6 Claims
4,380,722
ACCOMMODATION aRCUIT FOR A STEP MOTOR
Norman E. Oltendorf, Algonquin, 111., assignor to Bodine Elec-
tric Company, Chicago, 111.
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,126
Int. a.5 H02K 29/00
U.S. a. 318—696 16 Claims
/^
~^
loe/c
S£QU£n/C£R
■ 7-
^2
'-\j4CCOMOO'<r/OA/
c//Ku/r
jir
14-
ST/iTO/f -
/o
—T.
'/a
1. An accommodation circuit for use in conjunction with a
step motor of the type controlled by a clock, a logic sequencer
and a series of power drivers, said logic sequencer providing a
series of energization signals, defining an energization pattern,
to said power drivers in response to said clock, comprising, in
combination:
conversion means, responsive to said clock, for providing a
series of override signals to said power drivers for combi-
nation with said energization signals to convert said ener-
gization pattern to a predetermined alternate pattern;
initialization means for initializing said conversion means;
and
sequence-matching means for sequentially matching said
conversion means to said logic sequencer whereby said
override signals are properly coordinated with respect to
said energization signals.
1. An electric motor servo control system for controlling the
speed of an electric motor comprising:
A. speed signal means for producing a speed signal consist-
ing essentially of pulses whose time period of repitition is
proportional to the rotational period of the motor,
B. delay means for receiving the speed signal from said speed
signal means and producing a delayed speed signal con-
sisting essentially of pulses delayed from the pulses of the
speed signal by a predetermined time interval that is less
than the duration of the pulses of the speed signal when-
ever the speed of the motor is within an intended speed
range,
C. logical-combination means for receiving said speed signal
and said delayed speed signal and for generating a se-
quence of constant-width, variable-frequency motor-con-
trol pulses wherein the pulse width is substantially equal
to said predetermined time interval and the pulse fre-
quency is proportional to the repetition frequency of the
speed signal, the duty cycle of the motor-control pulses
thereby varying in response to variations of the rotational
speed of the motor, and
D. means for receiving the motor-control pulses from said
logical-combination means and adapted for coupling to
the motor to drive the motor in accordance with the duty
cycle of said motor-control pulses.
4,380,724
SHUNT HELD CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD
James H. Franz, Jr., MurrysTille, and Stanley W. Jones, Mc-
Murray, both of Pa., assignors to Westinghoose Electric
Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Not. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,762
Int a.3 H02P 7/06
U.S. a. 318—353 5 Claims
1. In shunt field control apparatus for a motor operative with
a voltage supply and having a shunt field and a series con-
nected armature and main field, the combination of
chopper means coupled between the voluge supply and the
series connected armature and main field, said chopper
means having successive ON and OFF operations to
determine the average voltoge across the series connected
armature and main field and providing a predetermined
polarity voluge across the main field during each of said
OFF operations,
switch means coupled with the shunt field and conductive
for connecting the shunt field across the main field, and
means connected across the shunt field for providing a cur-
742
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
rent path around the shunt field in relation to voltage
across the shunt field and providing said predetermined
i?J 04T^
polarity voltage across the switch means to turn OFF the
conduction of the switch means.
4,380,725
GENERATOR-BATTERY DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Moshe Sherman, Ristaon le Zion, Israel, assignor to Israel Air-
craft Industries, Ltd., Led, Israel
FUed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,950
Claims priority, application Israel, Apr. 4, 1980, 59777
Int. a.^ H02J 7/14. 7/J6; H02P 9/00
U.S. a. 320-35 10 Qaims
9n
t-
x,71— ^ 'i
I ^at ~ ^ T ^J* . . ♦
-^
battery, said life time datum being associated with the
datum stored in said storage means;
comparison means for comparing the voltage level detected
by said detecting means with the datum stored in said
storage means; and
REGULATOR
B . 1 C
D
\
1 \
^
DETECTOR
--^
OPERATION
UNIT
. Display
UNIT
■
^ ^BT
means for reading out the life time datum stored in said life
time memory when said comparison means produces a
coincidence of the output voltage level of said battery
with the datum stored in said storage means.
4380,727
VOLTAGE REGULATOR SYSTEM FOR MOTORCYCLES
AND THE LIKE
Roger Gray, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to Thomas H. Rudd,
Wayzata, Minn.
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,515
Int. a.3 H02P 9/30
U.S. a. 322-28 26 Claims
«■ ; i »-.
-J
1. A power supply system comprising a plurality of sub-sys-
tems; each sub-system including a generator producing a DC
output voltage, a battery supplying the power in case of failure
or termination of operation of the generator, and generator
regulating means regulating the output voltage of its respective
generator; circuit means connecting the batteries of all said
sub-systems in parallel; each of said generator regulating means
including a temperature sensor sensing the temperature of its
respective battery; comparator means for comparing the out-
put of said temperature sensors and for determining the battery
at the highest temperature; and control means effective to
control the generator regulating means of all the generators of
said sub-systems to decrease their output voltages in response
to an increase in the temperature of the battery in the sub-sys-
tem having the highest temperature, to thereby prevent over-
heating of any of the batteries by over-charging them.
/4 _! O.oil
2d
1 1
4380,726
BATTERY SERVICE LIFE INDICATOR
Ichiro Sado, and Toahiaki Ozawa, both of Tokyo, Japan, assign-
ors to Canon Kabushild Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 18, 1978, Ser. No. 925,748
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 18, 1977, 52-85843
Int. a.5 HOIM 70/^5
VS. a. 320—48 16 Claims
1. An electronic apparatus comprising:
detecting means for detecting a variable output voltage level
of a battery;
storage means for previously storing datum corresponding
to a predetermined output voltage level of said battery;
life time memory means for storing life time datum of said
1. In a motor vehicle electrical charging system for produc-
ing a relatively low regulated DC output voltage of the type
having generator means for producing a generator output
voltage comprising a DC generator having a pair of armature
contacts and a field winding having one terminal connected to
one of said contacts, and load means connected to said regu-
lated output voltage comprising a storage battery and a vari-
able load, the improvement in combination therewith compris-
ing means for regulating said generator output voltage to a
relatively constant value including field winding control
means for regulating the flow of current through said field
winding, sensing means connected between said control means
and said regulated output voltage operating to cause increased
current flow through said field winding when said regulated
output voltage is less than a first predetermined value and to
cause decreased current to flow through said field winding
when said regulated output voltage is greater than a predeter-
mined value, and output voltage control means comprising
switch means connected between said first mejitioned field
winding terminal and said regulated output volta|e and second
sensing means for enabling said switch means for permitting
current flow to said load from said generator means only when
the value of regulated output voltage is less than a second
predetermined value.
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
743
4,380,728
CIRCUIT FOR GENERATING A TEMPERATURE
STABILIZED OUTPUT SIGNAL
Mark B. Kearney, Kokomo, Ind., assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,205
Int. a.3 G05F 1/58
VJS. CI. 323—281 5 Claims
* y>
-vvw — - 1 — <- >ww t ' r
<
22.
?
2¥ ^
w
L
1. A circuit for providing a voltage that is substantially
independent of temperature variations, comprising in combina-
tion:
first and second transistors;
a first resistor coupled between the bases of the first and
second transistors;
a second resistor coupled between the base and emitter of
the first transistor;
a load impedance coupled between the emitters of the first
and second transistors; and
supply means effective to bias the first and second transistors
conductive so that the emitter current density of the first
transistor is greater than the emitter current density of the
second transistor to produce a difference in the base-emit-
ter voltages of the first and second transistors having a
positive temperature coefficient, the voltage across the
first resistor being proportional to the base-emitter voltage
of the first transistor and having a negative temperature
coefficient, whereby a substantially temperature indef>en-
dent voltage is provided across the load impedance that is
the sum of the voltage across the first resistor having a
negative temperature coefficient and the difference in the
base to emitter voltages of the first and second transistors
having a positive temperature coefficient.
4,380,729
SWITCHING REGULATOR
Masaro Kaku, Ebina; Yasumasa Sawaki, and Kunio Ando, both
of Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,256
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 19, 1980, 55-82165
Int. a.3 G05F 1/46
U.S. a. 323—285 6 Claims
(a) a D.C. input terminal across which and a common termi-
nal an unstabilized D.C. voltage is applied,
(b) a switching element having a control input terminal, an
output terminal and an input terminal connected to said
D.C. terminal,
(c) a D.C. output terminal across which and said common
terminal a stabilized D.C. voltage is produced,
(d) a rectifying filter circuit having an input terminal con-
nected to said output terminal of said switching element
and an output terminal connected to said D.C. output
terminal for rectifying a voltage chopped by said switch-
ing element,
(e) a control circuit having an input terminal across which
and said common terminal a switching pulse is applied, a
control input terminal coupled to said DC. output termi-
nal and an output terminal for providing a control output
signal, for varying a pulse width of said switching pulse in
accordance with a change in the voltage at said D.C.
output terminal to produce said control output signal,
(0 an exciting transistor having a base electrode coupled to
said output terminal of said control circuit, a collector
electrode coupled to said control input terminal of said
switching element and an emitter electrode coupled to
said common terminal, and
(g) a voltage feedback circuit connected between said D.C.
output terminal and said base electrode of said exciting
transistor, said voltage feedback circuit comprising a
series circuit of a capacitive element, a resistive element
and a reactive element connected in series between the
D.C. output terminal and the exciting transistor base elec-
trode.
4,380,730
ELECTRICAL POWER REGULATING APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Henry H. Morton, Jr., 100 Covington St., Wadesboro, N.C.
28170
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,259
Int. a.5 G05F 5/00
U.S. a. 323—300 12 Claims
1. A switching regulator comprising:
1. Apparatus for regulating alternating current electrical
power conducted to an electrical load and comprising:
conductor means for operative connection with an alternat-
ing current electrical power source and an electrical load
and for conducting power from the source to the load,
a gate controlled bidirectional semiconductor switch electri-
cally interposed in said conductor means and operable in
conductive and nonconductive states for controlling con-
ductance of alternating current electrical power from the
source to the load, and
sensing circuit means electrically coupled to said semicon-
ductor switch for gating said switch into conductive state
and electrically coupled to said conductor means for
sensing fluctuation in voltage supplied from the source
and fluctuation in voltage delivered to the load caused by
load current changes and line resistance, said sensing
circuit means comprising setpoint means for establishing a
predetermined average voltage for conductance through
744
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
said semiconductor switch and feedback means for re-
sponding to voltage and current fluctuation by maintain-
ing said predel«rmined average voltage.
4,380,731
SYSTEM FOR MONITORING THE OPERATION OF
INDIVIDUAL CONNECTORS IN A MULTIPATH
COUPLING NETWORK
Dietrich E. Aiker, Eningen U.A., Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Wandel U. Goltermann GmbH A Co., Reutlingen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 127,311
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 9,
1979, 2909268
Int. aj GOIR 3 J/02. 15/12
U.S. a. 324—51 7 Claims
, -w
4,380,732
SIGNAL SPECTRUM DISPLAY APPARATUS
Yoshiaki Tanaka, Tokyo, and Mamoni Inami, Yokohama, both
of Japan, assignors to Victor Company of Japan, Ltd., Yoko-
hama, Japan
Filed Aug. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 180,502
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 24, 1979, 54-107768
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 22,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 GOIR 23/16
U.S. a. 324—77 D 8 Qaims
1. In a signal-processing system, in combination:
a coupling network comprising a plurality of connectors
which ae selectively activable, one at a time, for estab-
lishing one of a plurality of signal paths through said
network, each of said connectors including an alternation
of shunt and series switches, each series switch being
closed and each shunt switch being open in an active state
to facilitate the transmission of a pilot signal therethrough
in series with an outlying terminal of the respective con-
nector, each series switch being open and each shunt
switch being closed in an inactive state to decouple said
outlying terminal of the connector from the remainder of
said network;
selector means operable to emit commands deactivating an
active connector and activating an inactive connector for
a switchover from one signal path to another;
a source of test signals;
switching means responsive to operation of said selector
means for connecting said source via a common section of
the signal paths of said network to a hitherto active con-
nector involved in said switchover before decoupling
same from said common section and for overriding the
commands of said selector means with successive reversal
of all shunt and series switches of said hitherto active
connector in a sequence causing the impedance thereof to
alternate between low and high levels until the opposite
state is reached, said hitherto active connector remaining
coupled to said common section throughout said se-
quence; and
evaluating means between said source and said common
section for comparing the responses of said test signal to
said low and high levels with predetermined values and
generating a malfunction indication upon detection of a
significant deviation from said predetermined values.
1. A signal spectrum display apparatus comprising:
a plurality of band-pass filters respectively having filtering
bands of different center frequencies and operating to
filter an input signal thereby to band-divide the input
signal fed through an input terminal;
a plurality of rectification and charging circuits connected
respectively to said band-pass Alters, each of said rectifica-
tion and charging circuits comprising a rectifying element,
and a capacitor which is charged and discharged by being
supplied with voltage rectified by said rectifying element;
a display section having displaying means including the same
number of display systems as band-pass filters each of said
systems respectively corresponding to a band-pass filter;
means for supplying the output signals of rectification and
charging circuits to the displaying means and causing
level displaying by the displaying means of those systems
corresponding respectively to the output signal levels of
said band-pass filters; and
switching means connected between a point between said
rectification and charging circuit and said display section,
and the ground,
said capacitor charging and discharging when said switch-
ing means is closed, whereby the input signal level is
displayed in real-time in said display section, and said
capacitor stopping charging and discharging when said
switching means is opened, whereby the maximum input
signal level is successively displayed in said display sec-
tion in response to the output voltage held in response to
successive higher input signal voltage.
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
745
4,380,733
FREQUENCY AND SPEED DISPLAY DEVICE
Hiroshi Yano, Higashiyaniato; Teruo Kawasaki, Yokohama;
Hiroynki Nomura, Fiyisawa, and Mikio Takeuchi, Yoko-
hama, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company,
Limited, Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,956
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 24, 1979, 54-107181
Int. a.3 GOIP 3/48. 3/54
U.S. a. 324—166 11 aaims
dent of the speed of the relative motion and is faithful in
amplitude and position to the poles in the strip.
.^^^-(TTJ. , J^
4M
1. A speed display device comprising:
means for sensing the magnitude of the rate of change of a
speed to be displayed, and
means for controlling the time interval for updating the
speed displayed according to the sensed magnitude.
4,380,734
MEASURING MAGNETIC INTENSITY INDEPENDENT
OF SPEED IN A SUCCESSION OF MOVING MAGNETIC
STRIPS
George L. Allerton, Orefleld, Pa., assignor to Western Electric
Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,376
Int. a.3 GOIR 33/12; GOIN 27/72; G06K 9/00
U.S. a. 324—225 12 Qaims
4,380,735
COMPENSATING FEEDBACK SYSTEM FOR
MULTI-SENSOR MAGNETOMETERS
Malcolm E. Bell, Medicine Hat, Canada, assignor to Her Miu*
esty the Queen in right of Canada, as represented by the
Minister of National Defence, Ottawa, Canada
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,938
Claims priority, application Canada, Feb. 29, 1980, 345355
Int. a.' GOIR 33/025
U.S. a. 324—244 4 Qaims
1. A method of measuring magnetic intensity in each of a
succession of magnetic strips in an article, comprising:
producing relative motion between the article and a mag-
netic sensing head to produce a succession of first voltage
waveforms, each having a shape substantially character-
ized by the positions of the poles in a respective strip and
wherein each incremental portion of the shape has an
amplitude proportional to the magnetic intensity sensed
along the surface of the strip and to the instantaneous
speed of the relative motion between the sensing head and
such surface;
producing a second voltage waveform having a shape for
each strip wherein each incremental portion has an ampli-
tude proportional to an instantaneous speed equivalent to
the speed producing the first voltage waveform for the
respective strip; and
simultaneously feeding the first waveform for each strip into
the numerator input and the second waveform into the
denominator input of a dividing circuit having a process-
ing speed sufficient to produce a third voltage waveform
of a shape wherein each incremental portion is indepen-
1. A magnetometer having first and second sensor feedback
systems each comprising:
sensor means for sensing a magnetic field;
feedback coil means associated with said sensor means for
providing a feedback field at the latter;
feedback circuit means for energizing said feedback coil
means in response to sensing of the magnetic field by said
sensor means and thereby producing at said sensor means
a feedback field for cancelling the sensed field at said
sensor means;
means for deriving from said feedback circuit means a first
electrical signal proportional to the feedback field at said
sensor means; and
means for converting said first electrical signal to a second
electrical signal proportional to said feedback field of said
feedback coil at the sensor means of the other one of said
sensor feedback systems; and
means for combining the first electrical signal of each of said
systems with the second electrical signal of the other of
said systems to provide two output signals corresponding,
respectively, to the sensed magnetic fields ..t said sensor
means.
4,380,736
PERIPHERAL INTERFACE ADAPTER ORCUIT FOR
COUNTER SYNCHRONIZATION
William Pfaff, Round Rock, Tex., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, 111.
FUed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,520
Int. Q.5 H03K 77/00, 5/13; H03L 7/00
U.S. Q. 328—73 7 Claims
10
22,
24'
'^T
16
-1
1 /
SYNCHRONIZING
CIRCUIT
COUNTER
_f\ SHIFT
-V REGISTER
26
1'
• ' " ^>
^ MICROCOMPUTER DATA BUS ]
1. An interface circuit for providing in synchronization with
746
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
a synchronizing signal, an output signal in response to an input
signal, the interface circuit comprising:
first storage means for receiving the input signal and the
output signal, the first storage means assuming a first logic
state in response to the input signal and a second logic
state in response to the output signal, and providing a
transfer signal indicative of the logic state thereof;
second storage means for receiving the transfer signal, the
synchronizing signal and a first reset signal, the second
storage means assuming the logic state of the first storage
means as indicated by the transfer signal in response to the
synchronizing signal and the second logic state in re-
sponse to the first reset signal, and providing the output
signal indicative of the logic state thereof;
first reset logic means for receiving the synchronizing signal
and the output signal, and for providing the first reset
signal in response to the absence of the synchronizing
signal, but only when the second storage means are in the
first logic state as indicated by the output signal;
third storage means for receiving the output signal and a
second reset signal, the third storage means assuming the
first logic state in response to the second storage means
assuming the second logic state as indicated by the output
signal and the second logic state in response to the second
reset signal, and providing an enable signal indicative of
the logic state thereof; and
second reset logic means for receiving the synchronizing
signal and the enable signal, and providing the second
reset signal in response to the presence of the synchroniz-
ing signal, but only when the third storage means are in
the first logic state as indicated by the enable signal.
4,380,737
FAST AGC SLEW aRCUIT
David E. Sanders, Kenneth City, Fla., assignor to E-Systems,
Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,073
Int. a.3 H03G 3/20
U.S. a. 330—134 10 Qaims
If ,/"
\ 'vMiASLE y
J»im.iTUOC L
DCTtCTO* r
.2__ OUTPUT
r
-H t^-X
n
LOOP i^ J *fiC I
40 L4;
_J J^
L.
1. An automatic gain control circuit comprising:
a variable gain amplifier having input thereto a received
signal and having the gain thereof responsive to a gain
control signal;
an amplitude detector connected to receive from said ampli-
fier the received signal transmitted therethrough, said
amplitude detector generating an amplitude signal corre-
sponding to the amplitude of the received signal input to
said amplitude detector;
means for generating a first drive signal when said amplitude
signal exceeds a first threshold signal;
means for generating a second drive signal when said ampli-
tude signal is less than a second threshold signal; and
means for generating a first gain control signal varying as a
function of said amplitude signal when said amplitude
signal is between the amplitudes of said threshold signals,
generating a second gain control signal varying as a func-
tion of said first drive signal when said amplitude signal
exceeds the amplitude of said first threshold signal and
generating a third gain control signal varying as a function
of said second drive signal when said amplitude signal is
less than the amplitude of said second threshold signal.
4,380,738
RF AMPLIHER APPARATUS
Robert S. Wagner, Quincy, 111., assignor to Harris Corporation,
Melbourne, Fla.
FUed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,059
Int. a.3 H03F 3/189
U.S. CI. 330—151 12 Claims
9PF
C^ r
^x
<1
r>»
SRX
RJZ, 1'
''O 38-^
-q:
K
_<:aKBiMW I
1. Apparatus for interconnecting two high gain, low input
impedance amplifiers to amplify an RF signal, comprising:
means for providing said RF signal to the input of a first one
of said amplifiers such that said first amplifier provides a
first amplified signal;
coupling means responsive to said first amplified signal for
passively coupling said signal to the input of the second
one of said amplifiers such that said second amplifier
provides a second amplified signal, and to a combining
means; and
combining means for combining the first amplified signal
provided thereto by said coupling means and the second
amplified signal provided thereto by said second amplifier
means to provide a combined amplified signal;
wherein said coupling means divides the power of said first
amplified signal between the signals provided to said
combining means and to said second amplifier means such
that the signal provided to said second amplifier means has
a first power level for providing a selected signal drive to
said second amplifier means and substantially all of the
residual power of said first amplified signal over and
above said first power level is fed forward to the combin-
ing means, and wherein said coupling means has an input
impedance which matches the output impedance of said
first amplifier means.
4,380,739
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL CONTROLLER
Henri J. Velo, Hilversiun, Netherlands, assignor to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,097
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Nov. 19, 1979,
7908411
Int. a.3 H03F 3/45: H03G 3/30
U.S. a. 330—254 11 Claims
1. An electronic differential controller comprising first and
second transistors coupled together to form a differential am-
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
747
plifler with each transistor having an emitter connected to a
point of constant voltage via an input signal current source,
means for deriving an output signal from the collector circuit
of one of said transistors, means coupling base electrodes of the
first and second transistors to a control circuit for adjusting the
currents in said transistors, said control circuit comprising first
and second resistors having a first terminal connected to the
base electrodes of the first and second transistors, respectively,
and means for connecting a second terminal of said resistors
together, and wherein the collector circuits of the first and
second transistors include means for injecting currents into
said resistors that are proportional to the collector currents
flowing through the first and second transistors.
4,380,741
PHOTOCURRENT COMPENSATION FOR ELECTRONIC
aRCUTTRY EXPOSED TO IONIZING RADIATION
James D. Mazgy, Paraippany, N J., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed Not. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,341
Int. a.3 H03F 3/08: H03K 17/00; H03F 17/00
VJS. a. 330—308 17 Claims
4,380,740
CURRENT AMPLinER
Leonard A. Kaplan, Fords, N.J., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,485
Int. a.3 H03F 3/18
UJS. a. 330—288
10 Claims
!4-»»tt
_ _ CM I ^ _ _ t"« i_ ,
^ --' ■ --\d«i<_ ,
1. A current amplifier having input and output terminals
comprising:
a first current mirror amplifier having input and output
electrodes, the input electrode thereof being connected to
said input terminal;
a second current mirror amplifier having respective input
and output electrodes, the output electrode thereof being
connected to said output terminal;
means for connecting the output electrode of said first cur-
rent mirror amplifier to the input electrode of said second
current mirror amplifier;
one of said first and second current mirror amplifiers com-
prising first and second transistors of like conductivity
type having respective emitter, base and collector elec-
trodes, means for connecting said collector electrode of
said first transistor to said input electrode of said first
current mirror amplifier; and means for connecting said
first and second transistors as a current mirror amplifier
wherein the current gain thereof decreases as the respec-
tive beta of said first and second transistors decrease; and
the other of said first and second current mirror amplifiers
comprising third and fourth transistors of like conductiv-
ity type having respective emitter, base, and collector
electrodes, means for connecting said collector electrode
of said third transistor to said input electrode of said sec-
ond current mirror amplifier; and means for connecting
said third and fourth transistors as a current mirror ampli-
fier wherein the current gain thereof increases as the
respective beta of said third and fourth transistors de-
creases.
n ^i«
v-fj, 0,;^^,,
1. In combination:
supply means for receiving an operating potential;
a transistor having base, emitter and collector electrodes,
and having a semiconductor junction between its collec-
tor and base electrodes;
means including load means for coupling the base, emitter
and collector electrodes of said transistor to said supply
means to condition said transistor for conduction; and
compensating means for conducting a current substantially
equal to a photocurrent induced in the semiconductor
junction of said transistor by ionizing radiation incident
thereon including:
a plurality of serially connected semiconductor junctions
poled for conduction in like direction and responsive to
said ionizing radiation for generating a compensating
photocurrent substantially equal to said induced photo-
current;
means coupling said supply means to one end of said plural-
ity of serially connected semiconductor junctions to re-
verse bias said plurality of serially connected semiconduc-
tor junctions; and
means for coupling the other end of said plurality of serially
connected semiconductor junctions to one of the collector
and base electrodes of the semiconductor junction of said
transistor to make said compensating photocurrent flow
with polarity sense opposite to that of said induced photo-
current.
4,380,742
FREQUENCY/PHASE LOCKED LOOP aRCUIT USING
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED OSOLLATOR
Patrick J. Hart, Johnson City, Tenn., assignor to Texas Instru-
ments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,170
Int. aj H03L 7/14
VJS. a. 331—1 A 9 Claims
U -^-i m\
I !'»• L
'II
^-1
1. A circuit for synchronizing the frequency and/or phase of
an output signal to a reference frequency signal comprising:
a digitally controlled oscillator for producing said output
signal which can be varied dependent upon a digital signal
748
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
which can be varied and applied to the input of the oscilla-
tor,
comparator means coupled to said output signal from said
oscillator and to said reference frequency signal for deter-
mining which of said signals occurs first and generating at
least one said digital signal to be applied to the input of the
oscillator indicating whether the frequency of said output
signal should be increased or decreased, the comparator
means including a compare means, up/down counter
means whose input is coupled to the compare means and
whose output is coupled to said oscillator,
an additional counter means whose input is coupled to said
output signal and whose output is coupled to said compare
means for dividing down the frequency of said output
signal, and
means responsive to the occurrence of a rising edge in said
reference frequency signal waveform for clearing the
additional counter and resetting the up/down counter
means.
4,380,743
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER OF THE PHASE LOCK
LOOP TYPE
Michael J. Underbill, and Nigel J. Walters, both of Horsham,
England, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,326
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 21, 1980,
8001889
Int. a.' H03L 7/18
U.S. a. 331—1 A 8 Qaims
the frequency control signal in response to the correction
signal to compensate for any variation in the frequency
control signal caused by jitter in the pulse rate of the
reduced frequency signal;
characterized in that the means for producing a correction
signal further includes a feedback loop responsive to any
residual ripple on the frequency control signal to eliminate
said ripple.
4,380,744
STABILIZED OSOLLATOR FOR MICROWAVES WITH
FREQUENCY CONVERSION AND ITS SOLID STATE
CONSTRUCnON
Gerard Kantorowicz, Paris, France, assignor to Thomson - CSF,
Paris, France
Filed Jun. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 158,864
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 15, 1979, 79 15452
Int. a.3 H03B 9/14
U.S. a. 331—107 R 7 Oaims
^i-^
jfD-ra^^
fTITT
n -Tsigrv
VAf>**a4.£
FWOUCNCY
p»oorammable
BATE
:iVtDER
Phase c:)MPftRATOfi
T
- ppr
£.2
s
■f SfCCESStVE AOOlTlON
I RA^'t MUL'^'P'. lEfl
.ANAlvG MULT;PLi£R
AhALOG I
MULTipLiEfi t-
€1 -El
)CS
tHALOC
SUMMING
KVICC
1. A phase lock loop type frequency synthesizer for produc-
ing a synthesized frequency signal comprising:
(a) a variable frequency oscillator for providing the synthe-
sized frequency signal in response to a frequency control
signal;
(b) a clock pulse generator for producing a reference fre-
quency signal;
(c) a phase comparator for comparing the phases of first and
second signals applied to first and second inputs thereof,
thereby effecting production of the frequency control
signal;
(d) first and second means for coupling the variable fre-
quency oscillator output and the clock pulse generator
output to the first and second inputs of the phase compara-
tor, respectively, one of said means digitally reducing the
frequency of the respective frequency signal and applying
the reduced frequency signal to the respective input of the
phase comparator;
(e) a successive addition rate multiplier, including an accu-
mulator, for adding a predetermined increment Y to any
accumulated values stored in the accumulator in response
to each pulse of the reduced frequency signal, said multi-
plier producing an overflow pulse each time the capacity
C (where C^Y) of the accumulator is exceeded while
leaving the excess as residue in the accumulator;
(0 means for producing a correction signal in response to
said residue; and
(g) means coupled to the phase comparator for correcting
1. A stabilized microwave oscillator with frequency conver-
sion for producing a wave of frequency f^ comprising: a non-
linear reactance; three parallel branches coupled to said non-
linear reactance; said non-linear reactance's value being depen-
dent on the voltage applied to it; the first of said three branches
having a resonant circuit at frequency f;; the second of said
three branches having a resonant circuit at frequency f^; and
the third of said three branches having a negative resistance
dipole for providing a pump wave at frequency f^; said fre-
quency fp substantially exceeding said frequency fj, and fre-
quency fo= frequency f;,— frequency fj; means for inputting
power in the third branch; and means for extracting power at
frequency fo from the second branch; stabilization in said sec-
ond branch at frequency fo being achieved by adjusting the first
branch at frequency fj.
4,380,745
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATED OSOLLATOR SYSTEM
Michael L. Barlow, Silverdale, and Alan L. Lindstnun, Bain-
bridge Island, both of Wash., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Nary, Wash-
ington, D.C.
FUed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 205,027
Int. a.3 H03L 1/02
U.S. a. 331—176 3 Claims
1. A temperature-compensated oscillator system for produc-
ing a system output signal of a constant frequency, which
comprises:
(a) an oscillator having a known output frequency versus
temperature characteristic;
(b) a temperature sensor for producing a first output signal
proportional to the temperature at which the oscillator is
operating;
(c) a temperature-controlled timer coupled to receive the
first output signal, said temperature controlled timer pro-
ducing a second output signal having a duration which is
related to the temperature sensed by said temperature
sensor;
(d) means for converting said second output signal to a first
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
749
binary number representing the temperature sensed by
said temperature sensor;
(e) a programmable memory coupled to receive said first
binary number on its address input, the memory address
identified by said first binary number containing a second
binary number representing an error frequency to adjust
the frequency of the output signal from the oscillator;
STROK
2I(D mPUT •' V
QUUTITT
1ST KPUT
OMNnTT
'-''O Tq^
4^:^
diately enabling said energy storage means to be charged
by said first input quantity,
and output means providing a pulse in response to each
occurrence of the predetermined relationship between the
compared quantities.
4,380,747
TUNABLE ULTRA-HIGH FREQUENCY nLTER WITH
VARIABLE CAPAOTANCE TUNING DEVICES
Jean C. Curtinot; Xa^ier Delestre, and Jean FouiUet, all of
Paris, France, assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,997
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 4, 1980, 80 04833
Int. a.3 HOIP 7/207, 7/00
U.S. CI. 333—202 9 Qaims
(0 means for generating a signal having said error frequency
in response to said second binary number, said means for
generating coupled to receive said addressed second bi-
nary number; and
(g) means for combining said signal at said error frequency
with the output signal from said oscillator to produce said
temperature-compensated system output signal.
4,380,746
PULSE MODULATOR USING CAPAOTOR CHARGING
AND DISCHARGING aRCUITS
Shan C. Sun, Bell, Pa., and Larry L. Church, Jefferson, Ohio,
assignors to Westing^ouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 239,917
Int. a.3 H03K 7/06
U.S. a. 332—9 R 7 Qaims
1. A pulse modulator for providing pulses having a predeter-
mined parameter proportional to at least one input quantity,
comprising:
a first input quantity,
energy storage means,
said energy storage means being charged by said first input
quantity to provide a changing quantity,
a second input quantity,
first means comparing said second input quantity and said
changing quantity, said first means providing a predeter-
mined signal when the compared quantities have a prede-
termined relationship,
second means responsive to the predetermined signal being
provided by said first means for providing a first discharge
signal,
third means responsive to the predetermined signal being
provided by said first means for providing a second dis-
charge signal,
fourth means for discharging said energy storage means in
response to either of the discharge signals, and for imme-
1. A tunable ultra-high frequency filter comprising at least
one variable capacitance tuning device incorporating first and
second coaxial fingers fitted up in the filter, the first finger
being a hollow cylindrical body having an external diameter
with an end face at least partly fiat, and the second finger
comprising a cylindrical body having the same external diame-
ter with an end face at least partly fiat, extended with a plunger
having a diameter much smaller than the external diameter of
the cylindrical bodies which is displaceable re'ative to the first
finger between a minimum and a maximum |>enetration posi-
tions where the plunger and the hollow body of the first finger
have minimum and maximum facing surfaces for determining a
first capacitance variation, said two cylindrical bodies being
displaceable relative to one another, the variable distance
between the corresponding fiat faces determining a second
capacitance variation.
4,380,748
BOBBINS FOR ELECTRICAL COILS
John Hill, 8 Westleigh Dr., Bickley, Kent, and Royston W.
Bannister, 11 Foalhurst Qose, Tonbridge, Kent, both of En-
gland
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,751
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 21, 1979,
7944088
Int Q.' HOIH 7/66
U.S. Q. 335—151 9 Claims
1. A reed relay assembly, comprising:
a bobbin having a hollow interior;
first and second spaced apart flanges integrally formed on
said bobbin for defining therebetween a first main winding
space, at least one of said flanges having at least one slot
for defining a wire passageway;
third and fourth flanges integrally formed on said bobbin and
axially spaced from said first and said second flanges for
750
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
defining a second and a third annular termination winding
space;
a selected length of electrical wire wrapped a preselected
number of turns around said first winding space to provide
a main coil and wrapped a preselected number of turns
around said second and said third annular termination
winding spaces to provide termination windings the indi-
vidual turns of which are electrically joined together to
provide first and second electrical terminals for said main
coil; and
a reed switch disposed through said hollow interior and
within said main coil.
4,380,751
WARNING SYSTEM FOR PASSIVE VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT BELTS
Juichiro Takada, 3-12-1, Shimnachi, Setagayaku, Takyoto,
Japan
FUed Nov. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,152
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 30, 1979, 54-
164948[U]
Int. a.3 B60R 21/02, 21/10
U.S. a. 340—52 E 7 Claims
4,380,749
ONE-TIME ELECTRICALLY-ACnVATED SWITCH
Charles W. Elchelberger, Schenectady, and Robert J. Woj-
narowski, Clifton Park, both of N.Y., assignors to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,343
Int. a.3 HOIC 13/00
U.S. a. 338—215 14 Qainis
1. A one-time electrically-activated switch, comprising: a
polymeric binder containing an agglomeration of particles of a
conductive material, essentially all of said particles having a
surface normally coated with a layer of an oxide compound of
the conductive material, said conductive material being pres-
ent in an amount sufficient to establish particle-to-particle
contact throughout the binder, the oxide surface and the thick-
ness of said binder being sufficient to resist the flow of electric-
ity before a given threshold voltage of between about 8 volts
and about 1 5 volts is applied thereto.
4,380,750
INDIUM OXIDE RESISTOR INKS
Ashok N. Prabhu, Plainsboro, and Kennetii W. Hang, Princeton
Junction, both of NJ., assignors to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,934
Int. a.3 HOIC 1/012: B05D 5/72; HOIB 1/08: C09D 11/00
U.S. a. 338-308 10 Claims
1. A resistor ink suitable for forming a resistor film on a
circuit board comprising:
(a) from about 25 to about 80 percent by weight of indium
oxide;
(b) from about 1 to about 20 percent by weight of magne-
sium oxide;
(c) from about 5 to about 60 percent by weight of a barium
calcium borosilicate glass frit; and
(d) from about 10 to about 35 percent by weight of a suitable
organic vehicle.
^6^^ U
1. A passive vehicle occupant seat belt system comprising a
shoulder belt extending upwardly and outwardly across the
vehicle seat from adjacent the inboard lower rear portion of
the seat, a guide rail affixed to the edge of the vehicle roof
generally above the door, a movable anchor received by the
guide rail for movement between a restraint location adjacent
the rear end of the guide rail and a release location adjacent the
front end of the guide rail, means for moving the movable
anchor between the release and restraint locations in response
to closing and opening of the vehicle door, emergency release
buckle means for releasably connecting the outboard end of
the shoulder belt to the movable anchor, a fixed anchor adja-
cent the restraint location of the movable anchor and including
a locking pawl adapted to lock the movable anchor at the
restraint location, means for detecting the presence of the
movable anchor at the restraint location and for producing a
warning signal when the movable anchor is not at the restraint
location, means for detecting when the pawl is disengaged
from the movable anchor and for producing a warning signal
thereof only when the movable anchor is at the restraining
location, and means for detecting when the buckle is not fas-
tened and for producing a warning signal indicative thereof
only when the movable anchor is at the restraining location.
4,380,752
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER
LOCK
Carlton J. Reynolds, R.D. 1, Coal HiU Rd., North Bansor,
N.Y. 12966
Filed«Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,453
Int. a.3 G08B 21/00
U.S. a. 340—52 D 12 Claims
-so 54
9. Apparatus for releasably locking a transmission selector
lever in the "park" position and for signaling to indicate that
the lever is not in the "park" position in response to a predeter-
mined vehicular condition, said apparatus comprising, in com-
bination:
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
751
(a) an electrical power source;
(b) a first electrical switch which is closed in response to
movement of a first vehicle part;
(c) a locking device having two elements respectively
mounted on second and third vehicle parts which are
moved relative to one another in response to movement of
the transmission selector lever;
(d) said two elements being constructed and arranged for
movement into locking engagement to prevent further
relative movement of said second and third vehicle parts,
and thereby of said selector lever, upon movement of the
latter to the "park" position;
(e) said two elements having electrically conducting por-
tions which remain in contact when said selector lever is
in other than the "park" position and which are removed
from contact when said lever is placed in the "park"
position;
(0 said electrically conducting portions forming a second
electrical switch wired in series with said first switch; and
(g) an electrically actuated signaling device connected to
said first and second switches and to said power source for
actuation only when both of said switches are closed.
4,380,753
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD SIGNAL CONTROL
ORCUIT
LeRoy A. Gant, 521 Jasmine La., Santa Maria, Calif. 93454
Division of Ser. No. 95,549, Nov. 19, 1979, Pat. No. 4,302,748.
This application Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,544
Int. C1.3 B60Q 1/00, 1/40. 1/46
U.S..C1. 340—66 2 Qaims
\1
•«TT»»-=-
1
orr/
MUMD
SWTCH
/ C
.^
"?5» \,
-CB
-cr
1. An electronic control circuit for controlling left and right
turn signal lamps of a vehicle, comprising:
(a) an ignition switch having an off position, an ignition
position and a park position;
(b) means for supplying electrical power through said igni-
tion switch when said switch is in said ignition position or
said park position;
(c) means for flashing the left turn signal lamp and the right
turn signal lamp on and off simultaneously in response to
the electrical power; and
(d) two-state hazard switch means, connected to said igni-
tion position of said ignition switch, for activating said
flashing means when said ignition switch is in said ignition
position dependent on the state of said hazard switch
means and for automatically activating said flashing
means when said ignition switch is in said park position
independent of the state of said hazard switch means.
4,380,754
ELECTRIC INDICATOR UTILIZING AN OSCILLATION
SOURCE OF A CRYSTAL CLOCK FOR AUTOMOBILES
Akio Simizu, Tonemachi, Japan, assignor to NUes Parts Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 19, 1978, Ser. No. 870,805
Int a.3 B60Q 1/34
U.S. a. 340—73 7 Claims
5 4 4
1. An electronic turn indicator for automobiles utilizing an
oscillation of a crystal clock comprising:
an oscillation source of a crystal clock providing a continu-
ously alternating output signal, a selectively operable
amplification circuit operable when enabled to amplify the
output signal from said oscillation source of said crystal
clock to thereby provide an amplified power signal to an
output of said amplification circuit, said amplification
circuit including enable logic means including an AND
GATE having a signal input connected to receive the
output signal from said oscillation source and an enable
input for receiving an enable signal and having a plurality
of resettable cascaded frequency divider means for divid-
ing the output of said oscillation source, said amplification
circuit disabled from amplification and said plural fre-
quency divider means each held in a reset state in the
absence of an enable signal, said amplification circuit,
when enabled by an enable signal applied to said enable
input, releasing simultaneously said plural frequency di-
vider means from their reset state to effect frequency
division of the output of said oscillation source and pro-
viding the so-divided amplified power signal to the output
of said amplification circuit, the alternations of the fre-
quency divided amplified power signal synchronized to
the output of said oscillation source, a turn indication
lamp, a turn indicator switch for selectively connecting
the output of said amplification circuit to said turn indica-
tion lamp to energize said lamp intermittently, and circuit
means for applying an enable signal to said enable input of
said logic means to enable said amplification circuit and to
release simultaneously said plural frequency divider
means from said reset state only when said turn indicator
switch connects the output of said amplification circuit to
said indication lamp so that said turn indication lamp is
energized within one cycle of the output of said oscillation
source after actuation of said turn indicator switch.
4,380,755
MONOLITHICALLY INTEGRATED
TWO-DIMENSIONAL IMAGE SENSOR WITH A
DIFFERENCE FORMING STAGE
Frank Endlicber, Munich, and Rudolf Koch, Germcriiig, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaiignorB to Siemens AktiengeseU-
schaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jnn. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,300
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 28,
1979, 2939490
Int a.J H04N 5/30
MS. a. 382—68 8 Claims
1. A monolithically integrated two-dimensional image sen-
sor having a difference-forming stage, said image sensor hav-
752
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
ing a plurality of sensor elements disposed in rows and columns
on a doped semiconductor body, with all sensor elements in a
column being connected to a common column line selectively
connectable to a reference potential, and with all sensor ele-
ments in a row being connected to a common row line con-
nected to a means for selectively energizing all sensor elements
in a row for collection of radiation incident on said sensor
elements, said difference-forming stage comprising:
a plurality of first oppositely doped regions in said semicon-
ductor body respectively connected to said column lines
for generating a charge packet corresponding to respec-
tive voltages on said column lines;
a plurality of storage capacitors formed by respective elec-
trodes disposed above an insulating layer on said semicon-
ductor body, each column line having a storage capacitor
associated therewith;
a first transfer gate having a clock pulse voltage connected
thereto disposed on said insulating layer on said semicon-
ductor body between said first oppositely doped regions
and said storage capacitors;
a second oppositely doped region in said semiconductor
body connected to a supply voltage;
a second transfer gate disposed on said insulating layer on
said semiconductor body between said storage capacitors
^»\n ouini
OI«l
i»ni 16
6 "
IV I 13 2
/Q
to*
^ — C-— ,ii.(vm
and said second oppositely doped region, said second
transfer gate connected to a clock pulse voltage;
a reset means for resetting said electrodes of said storage
capacitors to a reference potential after a readout opera-
tion; and
a serial output device having a plurality of inputs respec-
tively connected to said electrodes of said storage capaci-
tors for sequentially reading out signals from said elec-
trodes,
whereby first charge packets are generated in said first oppo-
sitely doped regions during a first readout of said sensor ele-
ments and said first charge packets are transferred by said first
transfer gate into said storage capacitors while the electrodes
of these are at said reference potential, the storage capacitors
being subsequently disconnected from the reference potential
and the first charge packets being transferred then into said
second oppositely doped region by said second transfer gate,
and whereby second charge packets are generated in said
oppositely doped regions by a second readout of said sensor
elements and are transferred into said storage capacitors and
the voltage of said electrodes of said capacitors corresponding
to the difference between said first and second charge packets
is subsequently output by said serial output device and said
second charge packets are subsequently transferred into said
second oppositely doped region by said second transfer gate.
4^80,756
CHARGE REDISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT HAVING
REDUCED AREA
Adrian D. Worsman, Swindon, England, assignor to Mitel Cor-
poration, Kanata, Canada
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,110
Claims priority, application Canada, Aug. 27, 1980, 359106
Int. a.i H03K 13/02
U.S. a. 340—347 AD 9 Claims
^^•T-
rri?
««,-X ' ^a, Ut, Ut' leu, W
i 4,21 *^?i L'2l v^ ^* if^' V^
Jttci icr kici, in, In, lc», i cr, io. l^- „
\ v« \2« \» '.a \!» .\a .'t» l_
i^ iJ p r- 1
»T1 ^■':^'l-
1. A charge redistribution circuit for translation of an input
signal comprising:
(a) a first plurality of capacitors, one terminal of each capaci-
tor being connected together,
(b) means for switching said one terminal to a first reference
voltage,
(c) means for selectively switching the other terminal of
each capacitor between a first lead and a second lead,
(d) means for selectively switching the first lead between a
source of said input signal, said first reference voltage, and
a high impedance,
(e) a second plurality of capacitors, one terminal of each
capacitor being connected together,
(0 a buffer having its input connected to said one terminal of
the second plurality of capacitors, and its output con-
nected to said second lead,
(g) means for switching the input of the buffer to said first
reference voltage,
(h) means for selectively switching the other terminal of
each of the second plurality of capacitors to a third or a
fourth lead,
(i) means for switching the third and fourth leads inter-
changeably to the first reference voltage and to a second
reference voltage having a single polarity with respect to
said first reference voltage,
whereby upon switching of sequences of said other terminal
of capacitors of the first plurality of capacitors between
the first and second leads, a distribution of charge is ef-
fected therebetween, and upon switching of sequences of
said other terminal of capacitors of the second plurality of
capacitors between the third and fourth leads a distribu-
tion of charge is effected therebetween, and
(j) output means for carrying an output signal from said one
terminal of the first plurality of capacitors, resulting from
the distribution of charge between the first capacitors and
the distribution of charge between the second capacitors.
4,380,757
DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM AND ANALOG TO
DIGITAL CONVERTER THEREFOR
Gyorgy I. Vancsa, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to Westingtaouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 116,053, Jan. 28, 1980, Pat No. 4,349,821.
This appUcation Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 328,888
Int a.3 H03K 13/02
liJS. a. 340—347 CC 2 Claims
1. A method of deriving through a channel of communica-
tion including an anlog-to-digital (A/D) converter, a corrected
value C^capplicable to any count Cjfderived from said (A/D)
converter through said channel of communication in relation
to an analog input signal of magnitude V;r applied from at least
one measuring point, comprising the steps of:
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
753
(1) applying a bias voltage V^at the input of said channel of
communication and deriving a count Cb at the output of
said A/D converter;
(2) applying a known voltage reference Vref at the input of
said channel of communication and deriving a count
C/j£Fat the output of said A/D converter;
Ml"!-
connecting plate is reciprocally moved along its axis
through said eccentric pin upon rotation of said motor
drive shaft;
(0 a rigid lever pivotally mounted on said base intermediate
opposite ends thereof, said lever being fixedly secured at
one end thereof generally perpendicularly to the other
end of said connecting plate for swinging movement in
parallel spaced relation to said base; and
(g) a hammer means having a hammer element for striking
against the inner wall of said gong, said hammer means
having a leaf spring fixedly secured at one end thereof to
the other end of said lever and extending therefrom along
the axis of said lever, and said leaf spring carrying said
hammer element at the other end thereof
(3) applying the analog input signal of magnitude Vx of the
measuring point and deriving a count C^* at the output of
said A/D converter;
(4) computing Cxc with the formula:
Cxc
■[
RES r (^g ~ ^REF)
Range I (Cb - Cref)
X (Cx - Cb)
]-^
where "RES" is the Resolution C/jfs of measurement and
"Range" is the spread of the input signal Vjf in magnitude;
the deriving steps (1) and (2) of counts Cb and C^£/r being
refreshed from applied voltages V^ and ^ref from time
to time before deriving counts Cx and computing Cxc
under steps (3) and (4).
4,380,758
MOTOR ACTUATED BELL
Tadashi Ishii, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kobishi Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 168,405
Int. a.3 G08B 3/10; GIOK 1/064
U.S. a. 340—396 1 Claim
1. A motor actuated bell which comprises:
(a) a gong;
(b) a base mounted with said gong;
(c) a motor mounted on said base and having a rotatable
drive shaft;
(d) a crank member fixedly secured to said motor drive shaft
for rotation therewith, said crank member having an ec-
centric pin extending away from said motor in eccentric
relation to the axis of said motor drive shaft;
(e) a rectangular connecting plate disposed generally in
parallel relation to said base and lying in a plane generally
perpendicular to the axis of said eccentric pin, said con-
necting plate having a slot formed therethrough at one
end thereof and extending perpendicular to the longitudi-
nal axis thereof, and said eccentric pin being received in
said slot for sliding movement therealong, whereby said
4,380,759
APPARATUS TO ALERT A DEAF PERSON
Jerome Suikoskl, 7258 Bell Rd., Harborcreek, Pa. 16511, and
Richard D. Bnigger, 5433 Qinton Dr., Erie, Pa. 16509
Filed Not. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,089
Int. C\? H04B 1/08; G08B 21/00
U.S. a. 340—407 7 Qaims
J ^HECtiVfB JNIT
IHTERfAOE
ClBCUIT
V22
0SC1LL»T0R
OKCUIT
^20
-^ »w,
STEP JP 26]
TRANSFOBIO
FULL BHlOOt
DiOOt 27
\
y
PIEZO-ELEC
TWC RtEO ij
1. Apparatus to aleri a deaf [>erson of an emergency situation
comprising:
a vibration sensor for sensing an audible alarm,
a radio receiver,
a radio transmitter having a vibration pickup adapted to
sense the vibration of a smoke alarm,
said radio receiver having means to receive transmissions
from said transmitter,
a tactile stimulator connected to said receiver,
said tactile stimulator being adapted to be disposed in en-
gagement with the skin of a person whereby said person is
alerted by a transmission from said transmitter to said
receiver and to said tactile stimulator when said smoke
alarm is operating,
said tactile stimulator being a piezoelectric reed connected
to a skin engaging member terminating in an end that is
substantially a conical member having a point adapted to
vibrate at a frequency in the range of 160 HZ,
said piezoelectric reed comprises a conductor member sand-
wiched between two relatively thin non-conductor mem-
bers supported in fixed position at a fu^t end and having
said point member supported on its distal end, and adapted
to vibrate in contact with said skin in response to a signal
received by said receiver from said transmitter.
754
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
4,380,760
SMOKE DETECTOR WITH DELAYED ALARM AFTER
CHANGE TO STAND-BY POWER
Morris J. Komblit, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to General Electric
Company, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 123,274, Feb. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,878
Int. a.3 G08B 17/10. 1/08
U.S. a. 340—628 11 Claims
m-^
CENTRAL
PANEL
i;-^i i
■i L
the frequency of a predetermined clock signal having a
rate exceeding the frequency of said bitcells,
means coupled to the output of said synchronizing means for
developing a pair of output signals respectively indicative
of a transitional change of a binary state of said received
data,
means coupled to said developing means for generating a
decode signal representative of one of several conditions
due to a transitional change, said conditions being indica-
tive of either a data transition from a low state to a high
state or a data transition from a high state to a low state or
an illegal transition treated as a data collision,
means for counting the number of clock intervals of said
predetermined clock signal under the control of said gen-
erating means,
said generating means monitoring said counter means to
ascertain relative to each bitcell period where a transi-
tional change has occurred in relation therewith, the point
of occurrence indicative of one of said several conditions.
1. A smoke detector apparatus including:
means for receiving energizing power from a first power
source,
a stand-by power source automatically operable to supply
power to said apparatus upon failure of said first power
source,
a first switching means connected to said means for receiv-
ing energizing power and op)erable upon failure of the first
power source,
a time delay means connected to be triggered on by said first
switching means upon failure of said first power source,
a second switching means connected to be triggered on by
said time delay means at the end of the time delay period,
a signal means connected for energization by said second
switching means at the end of the time delay period, and
reset means connected to said means for receiving energiz-
ing power and operable upon reestablishment of power
from the first power source prior to the timing out of said
time delay means to reset said time delay means to prevent
the energization of said signal means.
4,380,761
DIGITAL PHASE DECODER WITH COLLISION
DETECTION
Darid R. Boggs, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
tion, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Feb. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 118,262
Int. a.5 H04Q 9/00
U.S. a. 340—825.5 8 Qaims
4,380,762
POLYFUNCnON PROGRAMMABLE DATA RECEIVER
Gaetano Capasso, Ottaviano, Napu, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 117,317, Jan. 31, 1980, abandoned. This
application Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,367
Int. C1.3 G08C 19/22
U.S. a. 340—825.63 9 Qaims
1. A programmable polyfunction data receiver comprising
means for receiving a sequence of serial data signals followed
by a control signal; pulse length analyzer means for detecting
said signals; mode selection circuit means for controlling oper-
ation of said receiver in an input data validation mode or in a
serial/parallel data conversion mode; bidirectional bus means
for setting up a digital word to be identified or for providing in
parallel the data of said sequence according to the state of said
1. A digital phase decoder for receiving and decoding phase ^°^^ selection circuit; means for providing an output signal if
encoded dau transmitted as a plurality of bitcells, each of jr-t*»C»coniparison validates said serial sequence and said set up
predetermined time period, with a predetermined number of digital word when the receiver operates as identifier, and for
said bitcells representing a packet comprising providing an enabling signal when the receiver operates as a
means for synchronizing received phase encoded data with series/parallel converter.
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
755
4,380,763
CORROSION MONITORING SYSTEM
Leland L. Peart, Sedona, Ariz., and John Farrar, Santa Ana,
Calif., asaignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 222,845
Int. a.3 COIN 27/46: G08G 19/16
U.S. a. 340—870.16 6 Claims
r't.Ares
. A corrosion monitoring system, comprising:
means for sensing galvanic corrosion, with said means
disposed in an environment where galvanic corrosion of
preselected metals is to be monitored, whereby when
galvanic corrosion is sensed an amount of galvanic current
flows from said means, wherein said means includes a
sensor head device which further includes a galvanic
couple made of metals identical to said preselected metals
to be monitored for galvanic conversion, with said couple
coiled in the shape of a spiral and potted in a housing made
of electrically insulating material; and
. means, in electrical connection with said galvanic corro-
sion sensing means, for amplifying, integrating, and stor-
ing in a non-volatile memory for recalling and displaying
said amount of galvanic current that is flowing and has
flowed from said galvanic corrosion sensing means,
wherein said amplifying, integrating, and storing means
includes:
(1) amplifler means in electrical connection with said
galvanic corrosion sensing means;
(1) integrator means in electrical connection with said
amplifler means;
(3) non-volatile memory means in electrical connection
with said integrator means, wherein this means includes
a bubble memory component; and
(4) digital display means in electrical connection with said
non-volatile memory means.
4,380,764
DATA ACQUISITION APPARATUS
Stephen A. Connors, Tewksbury, Mass., assignor to Data Trans-
lation, Inc., Marlboro, Mass.
FUed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,840
Int. a.3 H04J i/02i H04Q 7/00: GOIR U/52
U.S. Q. 340—870.37 14 Qaims
'>5Sgj1
iA-JM
<_?*
L '11' '^rr t
-i
?n !J0 22* li,
I SOu*«f
cW
Ws'
1. Data acquisition apparatus for transferring signals pro-
duced by a sensinp element to input circuitry while maintain-
ing electrical isolar )n between said sensing element and said
input circuitry, sa.a data acquisition apparatus comprising:
flrst means for t&iaporarily storing said signals.
second means for temporarily storing said signals,
flrst means operable to transfer signals from said sensing
element to said flrst storage means,
second means operable to transfer signals from said flrst
storage means to second storage means,
means for alternately operating said flrst transferring means
and said second transferring means in a continuous se-
quence and,
third means responsive to control signals produced by said
input circuitry for selectively transferring signals stored in
said second storage means to said input circuitry.
4,380,765
RADAR SYSTEMS
Michael F. Godfrey, St. Albans, and David Lynam, Bushey, both
of England, assignors to The Marconi Company, Ltd., Qielms-
ford, England
Filed May 3, 1978, Ser. No. 903,702
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 4, 1977,
18751/77
Int. a.3 GOIS 13/44
U.S. a. 343—16 M 9 Claims
2 3
20 J'
1. A radar system comprising a multi-channel transmit/-
receiver aerial system, comparator means for providing sum
and difference channels for target detection, a low power radar
transmitter, means for coupling said radar transmitter into the
sum channel, a radar receiver, means for coupling said sum and
difference channels to the radar receiver, amplifying means
individual to each of the aerial channels, said amplifying means
being controllable to provide high gain in the transmitting
direction and negligible loss in the receiving direction, and
control means for switching said amplifying means, said means
for coupling said transmitter, and said means for coupHng said
receiver, in accordance with pulsed operation of the radar
system.
4,380,766
MULTI-CHANNEL AMPLIHER APPARATUS
Rolf Biichtiger, Oberwill, Switzerland, assignor to Siemens-
Albis AG, Zurich, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 97^18, Not. 26, 1979, abandoned. This
application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,501
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 15, 1978,
12778/78; Aug. 24, 1979, 7708/79
Int a? GOIS 7/02: H03K 17/00
U.S. a. 343—5 SW 7 Claims
1. A multi-channel amplifler apparatus for oscillation pack-
ets, comprising:
an amplifler having an input and an output;
input a' 1 output delay line means;
input switches and output switches;
the input delay line means being formed by at least one
primary electro-acoustical multiple delay line having a
receiver transducer and a plurality of transmitter trans-
ducers;
said transducers being contained on a crystal substrate;
756
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
said amplifier further being connected at its input with the
receiver transducer of the primary multiple delay line;
a plurality of input channels connected with a respective
transmitter transducer of the primary multiple delay line;
each of said input channels being capable of being connected
via a related input switch with correlated outputs of a
radar front-end simultaneously delivering sporadic oscil-
lation packets to be transmitted over the multi-channel
amplifier apparatus;
said input switches insuring that said electro-acoustical
transmitter transducers are always collectively short-cir-
cuited with a reference potential or earth when the oscilla-
tion packets are not present;
the output delay line means being formed by at least one
secondary electro-acoustical multiple delay line having a
transmitter transducer and a plurality of receiver trans-
ducers;
said transducers being contained on a crystal substrate;
said amplifier further being connected at its output with the
transmitter transducer of the secondary multiple delay
line;
a plurality of output channels connected with a respective
receiver transducer of the secondary multiple delay line;
each of said output channels being capable of being con-
nected via a related output switch with correlated inputs
of a signal processor receiving the sporadic oscillation
packets simultaneously transmitted over the multi-channel
amplifier apparatus; and
said output switches insuring that said electro-acoustical
receiver transducers are collectively always short-cir-
cuited with a reference potential or earth when the oscilla-
tion packets are not present.
4,380,767
CONTROLLED ANTENNA TUNER
Kenneth Goldstein, and Qaude A. Sharpe, both of Piano, Tex.,
assignors to Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
FUed Oct 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,833
Int. a.3 H04B 77/00
U.S. a. 343— 745 10 Claims
1. An antenna tuner comprising:
a transceiver and an antenna
an antenna coupler circuit interconnecting the antenna to
the transceiver said circuit including a
capacitance and inductance network means for selectively
loading the antenna;
phase bridge means for comparing the transmitter power
and antenna power for producing selectively an inductive
and capacitive antenna indicating signal;
. magnitude impedance bridge means for comparing the
transmitter power and antenna power for producing selec-
tively a signal indicative of a load resistance greater than
and less than the characteristic impedance of the antenna;
and
computer controller means connected to the means for
a.
b.
c.
determining whether an antenna is inductive or capaci-
tive, and to the means for determining whether the load
resistance is greater than or less than the characteristic
impedance of the antenna and to the capacitance and
inductance means for tuning the antenna by selectively
!-%-
rrit*t(S«iiT~ ~1
i|S»lTCM,Jfll .
l^
T I 1
"T"
T
H
1
T
I j mr tWTTcTow J6 ,i FiwDtoOi
ANTCNN* UNIT, ^
"T"
' !wOLT*6E '
I COM^ARJITOR
6 _ ,
.J
coupling capacitance and inductance into the antenna
coupler circuit responsive to inductive or capacitive indi-
cating signals and load resistance greater than or less than
the characteristic impedance of the antenna indicating
signals.
4,380,768
MAGNETIC PRINTER AND PRINTHEAD
Gaston Palombo, Agoura, and Stephen M. Fortescue,
Northridge, both of Calif., assignors to Dataproducts Corpora-
tion, Woodland Hills, Calif.
Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 174,815
Int. a.3 GOID 15/12
U.S. a. 346—74.5 14 Qaims
1. A printhead module for perpendicular magnetic printing
comprising:
a magnetizable base having a matrix of a plurality of columns
and a plurality of rows of protrusions extending upward
from the base;
a plurality of first conductors, each extending between adja-
cent columns of said matrix; and a plurality of second
conductors, each extending between adjacent rows of said
matrix, whereby each protrusion within the interior of
said matrix is surrounded by two of said first conductors
and two of said second conductors, wherein in recording
a selected one of the protrusions functions as a recording
pole and protrusions surrounding the selected protrusion
together function as a flux closing pole.
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
757
4,380,769
ELEMENT FOR RECORDING BY THERMAL
DEFORMATION
Harold T. Thomas, and Joseph J. Wrobel, both of Rochester,
N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 23,434, Mar. 23, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 862,069, Dec. 19,
1977, abandoned. This application Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,554
Int. a.J GOID 15/34
U.S. a. 346—135.1 30 Claims
ink tank means for containing ink for printing;
a reservoir having an inlet and an outlet each said pressure
chamber being connected by a channel to said reservoir
for receiving ink from said reservoir, said ink reservoir
having a low hydraulic resistance to fluid flow from said
inlet to said outlet relative to the hydraulic flow resistance
through said pressure chambers, channels and nozzles;
flrst tube means for connecting said ink tank means to said
printer head inlet;
second tube means for connecting said printer head outlet to
said ink tank means, ink flowing from said ink tank means
passing through said ink reservoir from said inlet to said
outlet to expel gas bubbles and return to said ink tank
means without loss of ink.
1. A recording element comprising a support having thereon
a recording layer of an amorphous material having a signal-to-
noise ratio of at least 40 decibels and comprising a mixture of
a dye and a binder wherein:
(a) said amorphous material has an absorption factor of at
least about 20 at a first wavelength and is substantially
transparent at a second wavelength wherein the absorp-
tion factor is a product of the weight fraction of dye
included in the amorphous material and the molar extinc-
tion coefficient of the dye at the wavelength of a record-
ing beam of choice (ex), divided by the molecular weight
of the dye (MW), and having the units of liter per gm-cm;
(b) said amorphous material is capable of being thermally
deformed by a beam of high energy-density radiation of
said first wavelength to form a deformation comprising a
hole or depression surrounded by a sharply defined ridge,
wherein the width of the ridge is less than or equal to the
breadth of the hole or depression, as measured in the plane
of the undeformed outer surface of the layer and in the
direction of the relative motion, if any, between the re-
cording beam and the layer, which deformation represents
encoded information capable of being detected by a beam
of high energy-density radiation of said second wave-
length.
4,380,770
INK JET PRINTER
Mitsuaki Maruyama, Shiojiri, Japan, assignor to Epson Corpo-
ration and Kabttshiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha, both of, Japan
FUed Not. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,743
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 22, 1979, 54-151823
Int a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346-140 R 18 Claims
r'^' '"
p^
1 1
!8^
W\
<y ' —
If
r9
t
f7
/
1. An ink jet printer comprising:
a printer head including a substrate, a vibration plate, at least
one pressure chamber and nozzle formed by providing a
gap between said substrate and said vibration plate, each
said pressure chamber being connected to one of said ink
nozzles;
4,380,771
INK JET RECORDING PROCESS AND AN APPARATUS
THEREFOR
Yasushi Takatori, Sagamihara, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,673
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 27, 1980, 55-87461;
Jun. 27, 1980, 55-87462; Jun. 27, 1980, 55-87464; Jun. 27, 1980,
55-87465; Jun. 27, 1980, 55-87466; Jun. 27, 1980, 55-87469
Int. a.3 GOID 75/75
U.S. a. 346—140 R 8 Qaims
1. An ink jet recording process carrying out color printing
by using plural inks of various colors and an ink jet recording
head which comprises: plural orifices for each of color inks;
common liquid chambers, each chamber being common to said
orifices for the same color ink; and a plurality of long and thin
liquid chambers communicative with said orifices, said each
common chamber corresponding to the plural orifices possess-
ing means for forming flying ink droplets, length of the liquid
chamber varying for different color inks, characterized in that
printing is carried out by using plural color inks, each having
an adjusted viscosity so that the loss of head in-friction inside
the liquid chamber is substantially equal with regard to each of
color inks.
4,380,772
LOW INK INDICATION FOR INK JET PRINl^HEAD
Victor J. Italiano, Ithaca, N.Y., assignor to NCR Corporation,
Dayton, Ohio
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,106
Int a.? GOID 75/00
U.S. a. 346—140 R 16 Claims
1. Means for indicating low ink supply comprising:
means containing a supply of ink.
758
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
means operably associated with said ink supply means for
ejecting ink in droplet form onto record media, and a
the base layer and a metal layer lying on the contact layer, the
emitter and base contact structures being spaced from each
other, wherein the improvement comprises:
forming a semi-insulative region in the collector layer under-
lying the base contact structure, so that the region
unu
(P»«1G«
(N«) GaAs
^,20
le
14
28
'^30
liquid placed on the surface of said supply of ink and differ-
ent in color therefrom and visually observed on said re-
cord media when said ink supply is exhausted.
through which charge carriers travel from the emitter
structure through the base layer into the collector layer is
restricted substantially to the center region of the base
layer underlying the tunnel barrier layer of the emitter
structure.
4,380,775
SFI F AI iPMFn Ai irii??i'?M Pni vrovcTAi I iMr SEMICONDUCTOR UNIT WITH CONNECONG WIRES
SELF ALIGNED ALUMINUN^ A,brecht Bischoff, Bruchkobel, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
A, • xj, n.^ dIj * Ki , V^ . n^* ^ assignor to W. C. Heraeus GmbH, Hanau, Fed. Rep. of
Alvin M. Goodman, Princeton, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpora- Germany
tion, New York, N.Y. i7<i j ¥ ■ «« «non o ».t ,^b ,■%.
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,345 n.im, nrio^^ .l!„liV.«n!. ,J^ R * f^' , . ,i
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/78. 23/52. 21/285. 29/04 19^ S^T "'*''''""*•"" ^^- "'"• °' ^™""''' "'"'• ^*'
U.S. a. 357-23 liaaims ' Int. a.^ HOIL 23/48. 29/46, 29/62
U.S. a. 357—67 8 Qainis
12^ 13 II 13' 12'
■ 1(^^ J4'
1. In a semiconductor device having a pair of active regions
(bf a first conductivity type embedded in a body of semiconduc-
tor material of a second conductivity type at the surface of the
iKxjy; a channel region in the semiconductor body, at the
s urface thereof, separating the active regions; a gate member
aligned with the channel region and separated from the semi-
conductor body by a layer of insulating material and contact
means in ohmic contact with each of the active regions and the
i;ate member respectively, the gate member comprising:
a conductive layer of oxygen doped polycrystalline silicon.
*^I0
1. A semiconductor unit comprising
a semiconductor chip (11);
a connecting frame (15, 15');
and means connecting selected zones of the semiconductor
chip to the frame comprising, in accordance with the
invention,
connecting lead wires consisting of a homogeneous alumi-
num-copper alloy, having a thickness of between about
0.01 mm to 0.06 mm, and in which the aluminum alloy
consists essentially of 3 to 5% copper, the balance alumi-
num, by weight.
4,380,774
HIGH-PERFORMANCE BIPOLAR MICROWAVE
TRANSISTOR
l^ax N. Yoder, Falls Church, Va., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 217,977
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/161. 29/72. 29/12
\JS. a. 357—34 4 Oaims
1. An improved bipolar transistor of the type having a col-
llector layer lying on one side of a substrate and an ohmic
c:ontact lying on the other side thereof, a base layer lying on
the collector layer, an emitter structure including a tunnel
Itarrier layer lying on a center region of the base layer, an
emitter layer lying on the tunnel barrier layer and another
ohmic contact lying on the emitter layer, and a base contact
structure including a contact layer lying on outer regions of
4,380,776
IMAGE POSITIONING APPARATUS
David L. Smith, and Gerald E. O'Brien, both of Atlanta, Ga.,
assignors to Computer Microfilm International Corporation,
Atlanta, Ga.
Continuation of Ser. No. 895,154, Apr. 10, 1978. This application
Feb. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 118,443
Int. a.3 H04N 7/18
U.S. a. 358—102 10 Claims
1. Automatic film positioning and scanning apparatus, re-
sponsive to supplied address signals representative of the loca-
tion of an information image on a film, including a plurality of
image frames each having a marker image, at least one of said
frames comprising a reference frame and having only said
marker image, comprising:
image illuminating and detecting means, responsive to sup-
plied horizontal and vertical deflection signals, for gener-
ating a video signal representative of an image in an opera-
tive position with respect to said detecting means;
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
759
mechanical positioning means, responsive to position con-
trol signals, for moving portions of said film into said
operating position;
a deflection signal generator, responsive to supplied deflec-
tion timing signals and raster position signals for generat-
ing said horizontal and vertical deflection signals;
means for generating said deflection timing signals;
an analog to digital converter for digitizing said video signal
to form a digitized video signal;
means, responsive to said deflection timing signals and said
digitized video signals, for generating marker position
signals representative of the timing of marker representa-
tive portions of said digitized video signals with respect to
said deflection timing signals;
and data processing means, including a control program, for:
(a) generating first position control signals to cause said
positioning means to position said reference frame in said
operative position;
response to an output of said processing circuit, said processing
circuit comprising means for setting an attenuation level of said
^
CURRENT
CONTROL
17
CURRENT
CONTSix
CURRENT
;C0NTROl.
ELECTRONIC SWITCH
20-1
20-2
20-^
PROCESSING SEC TON \
^>-
'9^tki1&
LVE
COMP t-
T
attenuator in a plurality of successive steps in accordance with
said synchronizing signal level.
M-
HPUTCK I 1 i
so
coNBOLt jsr* X-—
MC TioMort^
MiCI*0^l*0CESSO<i
0^
1*?
rff
ff^
1 ri °"c
IITMC MC
1lLMKtM«
HICK
^
(b) generating second position control signals, in accordance
with said address signals, to position a selected frame in
said operative position;
(c) generating nominal raster position signals;
(d) generating first raster position signals in response to said
marker position signals when said reference frame is in
said operative position and said nominal raster position
signals are supplied to said deflection signal generator;
(e) generating second raster position signals in response to
said marker position signals when said selected frame is in
said operative position and said first raster position signals
are supplied to said deflection signal generator;
said first and second raster position signals being computed
from the deviation of said marker position signals from
ideal marker position signals;
whereby said deflection signal generator can generate hori-
zontal and vertical deflection signals using said second
raster position signals and cause said image detecting
means to generate a video signal representative of an
image frame corresponding to said address signals.
4,380,777
KEYED AGC aRCUIT FOR VIDEO DATA
TRANSMimNG DEVICE
Fiimio Miyao, Kanagawa, and Kazumi Tsukioka, Nagano, both
of Japan, assignors to Fi^i Xerox Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,703
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 18, 1979, 54/163593
Int. a.J H04N 5/52
U.S. a. 358—178 5 Claims
1. A keyed AGC circuit for a video data transmitting device
comprising: a process circuit for carrying out a digital process
to determine whether a synchronizing signal level at an output
terminal thereof is higher than or lower than a reference level;
and a multi-stage digital attenuator coupled to be controlled in
4,380,778
CONTROL ASSEMBLY FOR REMOTE SWITCHING
Manohar A. Singh, and Manohar Mudhar, both of 162 Spadina
Rd., #201, Toronto, Ontario, Canada (M5R 2T8)
Filed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,712
Int. a.3 H04N 5/44: H03J 9/04
U.S. a. 358—194.1 8 Claims
1. For use with an appliance having an operating shaft with
a non-circular end section, a control assembly comprising:
a drive means having a low-sp>eed, high-torque output shaft,
a coupling member having a first opening complementary to
said non-circular end section and adapted to receive the
operating shaft, and having a second opening aligned with
the first, the second opening and said output shaft being
engagable to provide a lost-motion connection that allows
the output shaft to engage the second opening over an
angular range while still allowing the output shaft to
engage and drive the coupling member,
mounting means for mounting the drive means non-rota-
tively on the appliance,
said output shaft being cylindrical with two diametrally
opposed longitudinal splines projecting therefrom, the
said second opening being circular in section with a diam-
eter greater than the distance between said tops of the
splines, and having two inwardly projecting longitudinal
ribs sized so as to have mechanical interference with said
splines when the output shaft is rotated within said second
opening sufficiently far to bring the ribs into contact with
the splines.
4,380,779
METHOD FOR RECORDING MULTIPLEXED SIGNALS
ON METAL EVAPORATED TAPE
Sadafumi Kitamora, Neyagawa, and Hinwhi Tanignchi,
Hiraluta, both of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric
Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,317
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 25, 1980, 55-38447
Int a.J H04N 9/491; H03F 1/00; H03G 3/20, 5/16
\JJS. a. 358—330 6 Claims
1. A magnetic recording method for recording a multiplex
760
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
signal comprising two principal signals, comprising the steps
of:
using a magnetic recording medium having a magnetic layer
with the thickness which is smaller than a recorded wave-
length of each of said two principal signals;
recording oiie of said principal signals having a higher fre-
quency than that of the other signal at a current which is
« 20 32 46
RECORDING LEVEL OF fy (mAp.pl
more than 2 dB greater than the lower limit of the record-
ing current with which a reproduced output level is satu-
rated, and which is smaller than a current with which the
reproduced output level is reduced by 1 dB beyond said
saturated condition; and
recording said other principal signal of a lower frequency at
a current which i^ smaller than one half of that of said
signal of a higher frequency.
4,380,780
DISC-SHAPED RECORDING MEDIUM REPRODUaNG
APPARATUS
Atsumi Hirata, Figisawa; Osamu Ti^ima, Ayase; Isami Kaneda,
Yokohama; Hiroyuki Sugiyama, Isehara; Takashi Saito, Yo-
kohama, and Masafiimi Mochiziiki, Yamato, all of Japan,
assignors to Victor Company of Japan, Ltd., Yokohama,
Japan
FUed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,438
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 14, 1980, 55/32542
Int. a.3 GllB 5/012. 5/016. 23/02. 5/52
U.S. a. 360—97 7 Claims
1. A reproducing apparatus for reproducing a disc-shaped
recording medium which is accomodated within a case, said
case comprising a jacket which has a space for accomodating
said disc-shaped recording medium and an opening for allow-
ing said disc-shaped recording medium to go in and out of said
jacket, and a lid member inserted through said opening of said
jacket for closing said opening of said jacket, said reproducing
apparatus comprising:
an inserting opening through which said case is inserted;
a turntable for rotating said disc-shaped recording medium;
clamping means for clamping at least one of said disc-shaped
recording medium or said lid member provided at the
innermost part on the opposite side from said inserting
opening with respect to said turntable;
detecting means for detecting whether said disc-shaped
recording medium is loaded within said reproducing appa-
ratus; and
arresting means provided at the vicinity of said inserting
opening, for arresting the insertion of a jacket having said
lid member into said reproducing apparatus and allowing
the insertion of a jacket not having said lid member into
said reproducing apparatus, by displacing according to
the detecting operation of said detecting means,
said arresting means allowing the inseriion of the jacket
having or not having said lid member into said repro-
ducing apparatus in a state where said detecting means
is not performing a detecting operation.
4,380,781
DISC-SHAPED RECORDING MEDIUM REPRODUCING
APPARATUS
Atsumi Hirata, Fi^isawa, Japan, assignor to Victor Company of
Japan, Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,058
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 17, 1980, 55/32718
Int. a.3 GllB 5/012. 5/016. 23/02, 5/52
U.S. a. 360—97 5 Claims
1. A reproducing apparatus for reproducing a disc-shaped
recording medium which is accommodated within a case, said
case comprising a jacket which has a space for accommodating
said disc-shaped recording medium and an opening for allow-
ing said disc-shaped recording medium to go in and out of said
jacket, and a lid member inserted through said opening of said
jacket for closing said opening of said jacket, said lid member
having cutouts and ride-over parts,
said reproducing apparatus comprising:
an inserting opening through which said case is inseried;
a turntable for rotating said disc-shaped recording medium;
clamping means for clamping at least one of said disc-shaped
recording medium and said lid member provided at an
innermost part on the opposite side from said inserting
opening with respect to said turntable;
detecting means for detecting whether said disc-shaped
recording medium is loaded within said reproducing appa-
ratus;
a reproducing transducer for reproducing the disc-shaped •
recording medium placed on said turntable;
reproducing operation means for moving said reproducing
transducer from a waiting position to a reproducing posi-
tion with respect to the disc-shaped recording medium to
perform a reproducing operation; and
operating means connected to said detecting means and said
reproducing operation means and operated upon starting
of the reproducing operation, for operating said reproduc-
ing operation means only when operated in a state where
said detecting means is detecting whether a disc-shaped
recording medium is loaded within said reproducing appa-
ratus.
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
761
4,380,782
DRIVE APPARATUS FOR FLEXIBLE MAGNETIC DISCS
Yasuyoki Hirose; Motohiro Shimaoka; Shoichiro Saito, and
Torn Kowaguchi, all of Funikawa, Japan, assignors to Alps
Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 107,067
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 28, 1978, 53-162525
Int. a.3 GllB 5/016. 17/02. 21/12
U.S. a. 360—99 11 Qaims
e 31 12 16 2S
1. A disc drive apparatus for bringing a magnetic head into
engagement with a flexible magnetic disc; capable of storing
information, comprising
means for rotating a flexible magnetic disc, said rotating
means including a rotatable spindle adapted to engage one
side of said disc and a clamping member movable into
engagement with the other side of said disc to hold said
disc to said spindle; .
means including a pivotal arm member connected to said
clamping member for moving said clamping member into
and out of engagement with said disc;
a magnetic head assembly including at least one magnetic
head;
a solenoid having a movable plunger;
positioning means connected to said movable plunger of said
solenoid for moving each said magnetic head into and out
of engagement with said disc, said positioning means
serving to move each said magnetic head into a first posi-
tion where said magnetic head is away from the path of
movement of said disc, a second position near said disc
upon movement of said arm member to move said clamp-
ing member relative said disc and into a third position
engaging said disc upon movement of said plunger into
said solenoid, said solenoid including a bore slidably re-
ceiving said plunger, said bore being sealed against said
plunger to allow air within said bore to be compressed by
said plunger as it moves inwardly of said solenoid so to
bring each said head into gentle engagement with said
disc.
4,380,783
FLEXIBLE DISK DRIVE
Manfred Adamek, Kirchen-Freusburg, and Klaus Rinneburger,
Wilnsdorf, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,583
Int a.3 GllB 17/02. 5/82
VJS. O. 360—99 10 Claims
central portion of the disc is accessible for driving engagement
during operation, the apparatus comprising:
a frame having an entrance opening adapted for receiving an
enveloped disc inserted therethrough;
a pivoted cover having a front and a rear side, and arranged
on the frame for movement between an open position and
a closed position at which the opening is covered, the
cover having a projection extending from the rear side;
means, associated with the frame, for driving the disc, the
driving means including a turntable rotatable about an axis
of rotation and a rotatable clamping member coaxially
spaced from the turntable;
a guide spindle mounted in the frame and extending toward
the turntable, the clamping member being movably
mounted on the spindle for axial movement therealong;
and
linking means, arranged between the cover and the clamping
member, for moving the clamping member toward and
away from the turntable to cause a received disc to be
clamped between the clamping member and the turntable,
and to be driven thereby, when the cover, after inserting
the enveloped disk through the opening, is in the closed
position, and to be undamped, when the cover is moved
into the open position;
characterized in that the linking means includes an engaging
surface provided on the projection, and a lever, the lever
being pivotally mounted to the frame about a pivoting axis
and having means for engaging the clamping member to
move it axially along the spindle, and the lever also having
a surface for contact by the engaging surface at a point
spaced a leverage distance from the pivoting axis, and the
cover, the projection and the lever being arranged such
that the leverage distance increases from a minimum to a
maximum as the cover moves from the open position to
the closed position.
4,380,784
MAGNETIC TRANSDUCER FOR READING AND/OR
RECORDING OF DATA CONTAINED ON A MAGNETIC
CARRIER
Jacques Desserre, Rambooillet; Michel Helle, Marcq, and Jean-
Pierre Lazzari, Montfort rAmanry, all of France, assignors to
Compagnie Internationale pour rinformatique CII-Hoaeywell
Bull (Societe Aaonyme), Paris, France
FUed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,923
Claims priority, appUcation France, Apr. 2, 1980, 80 07454
Int a.5 GllB 5/22. 5/20
U.S. a. 360—126 5 Claims
1. A drive apparatus for a flexible magnetic disc enveloped
in a flat envelope having a central opening through which a
1. A magnetic transducer adapted to perform read and/or
write functions on a magnetic data carrier which travels before
the same, the data being contained within a plurality of tracks
on the carrier comprising:
a magnetic circuit formed by two pole pieces separated by a
gap parallel to the carrier, the gap having a larger dimen-
762
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
sion perpendicular to the direction of travel of the data of
a track as it passes in front of said gap, said larger dimen-
sion being defined thin superimposed magnetic layers
having a constricted width at one end formed by lateral
cutouts at opposite sides of the layers,
winding coupled magnetically to the magnetic circuit, and
means disposed on said lateral cutouts at either side of the
gap as seen, in the direction of its larger dimension and
operatively associated with the pole pieces for channelling
magnetic flux emitted by the immediate surroundings of
the track of the record carrier to be read by the transducer
in such manner that said flux does not pass through said
winding.
4,380,786
ELECTROSTATIC ATOMIZING DEVICE
Arnold J. Kelly, Princeton Junction, N J., assignor to Exxon
Research and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 853,499, Nov. 21, 1977, Pat. No.
4,255,777. This application Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,207
Int. a.^ B05B 5/00
U.S. a. 361—228 10 Claims
4,380,785
SOLID STATE TRIP UNIT FOR AN ELECTRICAL
aRCUTT BREAKER
Pierre Demeyer, Uriage, and Paul Qaudin, Grenoble, both of
France, assignors to Merlin Gerin, Grenoble, France
FUed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,691
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 31, 1980, 80 07284
Int. a.3 H02H i/092, 3/10
U.S. Q. 361—96 6 Qaims
n S r N
1. An electronic trip device for initiating automatic tripping
of an electric circuit breaker in response to an abnormal circuit
condition in a protected electrical distribution circuit compris-
ing:
a detector including current transformers, said detector
operating to deliver a current signal having a predeter-
mined relationship to the current flowing in said distribu-
tion circuit;
a series circuit connected to said detector and including a
metering resistor for generating a voltage signal propor-
tional to said current signal, a trip coil for initiating said
automatic tripping when it is energized, and means form-
ing a power supply, said metering resistor, trip coil and
power supply means being electrically connected in series;
electronic trip circuits responsive to said' voltage signal for
generating a tripping signal in response to said abnormal
circuit conditions, said electronic trip circuits being pow-
ered by said power supply means;
a shunt circuit electrically connected in parallel to said trip
coil and including a switch responsive to said tripping
signal and being either in an ON-state to shunt the trip coil
or in an OFF-state after the generation of said tripping
signal for energization of said trip coil.
1. A hand held aerosol generator device which comprises:
(a) a cylindrically shaped housing of an L-shaped configura-
tion having a short leg and a longer leg and a chamber
therein, the open end of said longer leg being internally
threaded, the closed end of said shori leg having an open-
ing therethrough;
(b) a liquid pump means disposed within said chamber of said
housing of said L-shaped conflguration;
(c) a bottle having an externally threaded neck adapted to
threadably engage into said internally threaded end of said
longer leg of said housing of said L-shaped configuration,
said bottle adapted to receive a liquid therein;
(d) a conduit joined in serial communication with said liquid
pump means and extending into said liquid in such bottle;
(e) means for activating said liquid pump means; and
(0 an electrostatic atomizing device disposed within said
chamber of said housing of said L-shaped configuration,
said electrostatic atomizing device comprising:
(1) a housing having a chamber therein, said fluid being
disposed within said chamber, said chamber of such
housing being joined in serial communication with said
liquid pump means;
(2) means for generating an electrical charge and passing
an electrical charge through said fluid in said chamber
thereby generating a free excess charge in said fluid
within said chamber; wherein said generating means for
said electrical charge includes at least a flrst and a sec-
ond electrode, said flrst and said second electrodes
being in liquid contact with said fluid within said cham-
ber;
(3) a ground electrode disposed externally to said housing,
said ground electrode forming an electrostatic field; and
(4) means for issuing said fluid from said chamber in the
form of said charged droplets, said charged droplets
passing through said electrostatic field, said means for
issuing said fluid extending outwardly through such
opening in said closed end of said shorter leg of said
L-shaped conflguration.
4,380,787
CLAMP FOR BOUNCE-FLASH APPARATUS
Kenneth Stone, P.O. Box G, Boulder Creek, Calif. 95006
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,861
Int. a? G03B 15/02
U.S. a. 362—16 3 Claims
1. A clamp and reflector combination for a bounce-flash unit
wherein a flash gun is employed having a generally rectangular
end surrounding a light emitting surface, comprising in combi-
nation:
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
763
(a) a band at least partially surrounding said rectangular end
in releasably gripping relationship,
(b) said band carrying at least one slot member, and
(c) a reflector having a tongue whereby said tongue can be
placed in said slot and retained in a fixed relationship with
said light emitting surface.
CfMf OK
1. In a receiver aircraft utilized for in flight refueling having
a fuselage, a vertically extending stabilizer and a refuel recepta-
cle, the improvement therein being in the form of an aerial
refuel floodlight mounted upon the leading edge of the top
portion of said vertical stabilizer, said aerial refuel floodlight
comprising an elongated fixture having a projectile-like config-
uration, a lamp, means situated within said fixture for mounting
said lamp in position therein, means surrounding said lamp for
reflecting light emanating from said lamp in a predetermined
direction, a lens situated adjacent said lamp along an axis being
at an angle with respect to the axis of said lamp, means situated
adjacent said lens for directing light passing through said lens
in a predetermined direction, and an opening situated within
said fixture juxtaposed said light directing means and said lens
for allowing said directed light as well as light passing through
said lens to pass therethrough thereby illuminating a portion of
said fuselage adjacent and including said refuel receptacle.
sides of the longitudinal axis of said body, a headlamp assembly
including a housing located in each of said pair of openings and
having a headlamp mounted therein; means connecting said
housing to said body for rotation between a first position
wherein said housing conceals the associated opening and a
second position wherein said headlamp in said housing is ex-
posed to project a beam of light forwardly of said body; an
actuator for rotating said headlamp assembly from said first
position to said second position; the improvement wherein said
actuator comprises a motor connected to an output shaft, a
crank rigidly mounted on said output shaft for rotation there-
with, said crank having an eccentric shaft and a cam formed
therewith; a first link having an intermediate fwrtion thereof
rotatably mounted on said eccentric shaft and having a first
end portion and a second end portion; a second link, a first
pivotal connection connecting one end of said second link to
said first end portion of said first link, a second pivotal connec-
tion connecting the other end of said second link to said head-
lamp assembly; the arrangement of said first link, said second
AERIAL REFUEL FLOODLIGHT
Victor E. Koraki, Fort Worth, Tex., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Air
Force, Washington, D.C.
FUed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,656
Int. a.3 B64D 39/00. 47/02
U.S. a. 362—62 8 Qaims
4,380,789
ACTUATOR FOR A CX>NCEALABLE HEADLAMP
ASSEMBLY
Gale M. Craig, Anderson, Ind., assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed No?. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,375
Int a.3 B60Q 1/06
U.S. a. 362—65 2 Claims
1. In combination with a vehicle having a body, a pair of
openings formed in the forward end of said body on opposite
link and said crank being such that when the headlamp assem-
bly is in said first position the center of said eccentric shaft and
the center of said output shaft are located substantially in
alignment with and between the centers of said first and said
second pivotal connections and said cam is positioned between
the center of said eccentric shaft and the center of said second
pivotal connection in contact with said second end portion of
said first link so when said housing of said headlamp resists
opening movement, rotation of said crank approximately 180*
in one direction causes corresponding rotation of said eccentric
shaft resulting in translational movement of said first and sec-
ond links along the longitudinal axes thereof towards said
housing to provide an increased force which moves said head-
lamp assembly to an intermediate position between said first
and second positions, after which continued rotation of said
crank in said one direction causes said cam to contact said first
end portion of said first link and rotate said first link about said
center of said output shaft to allow said first link and said
second link to complete the movement of said headlamp assem-
bly to said second position.
4,380,790
MULTI-FUNCnON UGHT DEVICE
Al Saferstein, and Gilbert Spector, both of Greenwich, Conn.,
assignors to Innomed Corporation, Greenwich, Conn.
FUed Not. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,528
Int. a.3 F21V 9/00
U.S. a. 362—231 9 Claims
1. A multi-function light device comprising: a base having
two opposed main surfaces and an aperture extending through
the main surfaces; a first magnifying lens mounted on the base
and aligned with the aperture to enable magnified viewing
through the base from one main surface to the other main
surface; an energizable source of blacklight blue light and an
energizable source of white light; means mounting the light
sources on the other main surface about the first magnifying
764
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
lens; and means for connecting the light sources to an energy 4,380,792
source wherein the one main surface of the base has a substan- PIVOT MOUNTING
- Christopher Terrell, London, England, assignor to Chloride
Group Limited, London, England
FUed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,829
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 3, 1980,
8011389; Jul. 30, 1980, 8024974
Int. a.3 F21V 21/14
U.S. a. 362— 250 ISQaims
tially planar portion forming the top thereof and at least one
indentation for receiving an object.
4,380,791
ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED ADDITIVE LAMP
HOUSING FOR OPTICAL PRINTING
Masayuki Nishizawa, Koshigaya, Japan, assignor to Hoei San-
gyo Kabushiki Kalsha, Japan
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,413
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 3, 1980, 55-75137
Int. a,3 F21V 9/08, 7/04. 5/04. 13/12
U.S. a. 362—231 9 Claims
1. A pivot mounting for an object, comprising:
a pair of journal bearings having a common journal axis and
being relatively movable along said axis, each said bearing
comprising a journal component and a housing compo-
nent, one of said components including an object gripping
surface, wherein said object is gripped between said jour-
nal bearings by said gripping surfaces; and
spring means urging said journal bearings towards one an-
other along said journal axis,
wherein said components are held together and said object is
held between said gripping surfaces solely by the biasing
of said spring means along said axis.
4,380,793
SUBMERSIBLE VEHICULAR LAMP ASSEMBLY
Virgil W. Potts, Cass County, Mo., assignor to Peterson Manu-
facturing Co., Grandview, Mo.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,078
Int. a.3 F21V 29/00
U.S. a. 362—267 6 Oaims
6'd
21 22 23
9'^^' 92 „ 93 „
^'62V^2^^6^ 63^^53
6 s- a=ii^ -0=31 i^ 33
^'62"^ ri82^^63H] 63 ;
100
1. An electrically controlled additive lamp housing for opti-
cal printing, said lamp housing comprising
First, second and third light sources;
first, second and third dichroic filters positioned at corre-
sponding ones of the first, second and third light sources
for deriving red, green and blue beams, respectively, from
said light sources;
a beam guide member having first, second and third
branched bundles and a main bundle composed of said
first, second and third branched bundles, each branched
bundle having an end surface at which a corresponding
one of said beams derived from said dichroic filters is
provided, and said main bundle having an end surface for
emitting said beams; and
a light quantity control circuit for controlling the quantities
of light of said light sources.
1. A submersible lamp assembly comprising:
(a) a lens body having a face and surrounding wall members
defining a cavity therein, said lens body wall members
terminating in a continuous lip;
(b) a substantially planar elastomeric lens base having illumi-
nation means mounted thereon, said illumination means
being operably received in said cavity, said lens base
having a continuous groove extending inwarding thereof,
said groove receiving said lens lip when said lens base is
placed in covering relationship with said lens cavity, said
lip engaging said groove in a watertight, scalable relation-
ship, and
(c) whereby said lens lip and lens base groove cooperate as
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
765
an alignment means assuring that said lens base is posi-
tioned in proper covering relation relative to said cavity
when said lip is received within said groove.
4,380,794
SURGICAL LAMP CHARACTERIZED BY HAVING AN
IMPROVED REFLECTOR
Alfred C. Lawson, Fairport, N.Y^ assignor to Sybron Corpora-
tion, Rochester, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 274,055
Int. a.3 F21V 7/00
U.S. a. ^Ir-lH^ 1 Oaim
10. , 28
1. An improved surgical lamp of the type having a broad
spectrum light source which emits ultraviolet, visible and
infrared light and a reflector, wherein the improvement is
comprised of:
(a) a reflector blank molded from polyetherimide resin; and
(b) a dichroic coating deposited directly upon the front
surface of said reflector blank for reflecting visible light
while passing infrared light.
4,380,795
BASE DRIVE ORCUTT FOR A FOUR-TERMINAL
POWER DARLINGTON
Fred C. Lee, Blacksburg, and Roy A. Carter, Salem, both of Va.,
assignors to The United States of America as represented by
the United States Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 246,975
Int a.3 H02M 7/537
U.S. a. 363—131 6 Claims
reverse current applying means includes a current trans-
former.
4,380,796
PORTABLE CONTROL BOX FOR COMPUTER
NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED MACHINE TOOLS
Lyie D. Ostby, Brookfleld, Wis., assignor to Kearney A Trecker
Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,203
Int a.' G06F 15/46
U.S. a. 364—171 14 Claims
fMtfi»/M. » ^ 'i^* -•«? iir. My S^f-mG 3
1 s .^ Tt»»
23
'-©
JL^- f-
ffMffrr
^4 '4
Tveu
7. A computer numerically controlled machine tool system
comprising:
a numerically controlled machine tool;
a machine tool control system coupled to said machine tool
for controlling machine tool operation in accordance with
radio frequency signals supplied thereto and for transmit-
ting radio frequency signals indicative of machine tool
operating conditions;
a remote control unit including computer means responsive
to operator commands for transmitting radio frequency
signals to said machine tool control system for controlling
machine tool operation and for displaying machine tool
operating conditions to the operator in accordance with
radio frequency signals received from said machine tool
control system; and
a radio frequency link coupled between said machine tool
control system and said remote control unit for carrying
radio frequency signals therebetween.
1. An electrical power switching device, comprising:
a. a four-termind power Darlington including a fu^t driver
transistor stage having a flrst base and a second power
transistor stage having a second base coupled to the emit-
ter of said first transistor stage; and
b. means for respectively applying first and second indepen-
dent reverse currents to the emitter-base junctions of said
first and second transistor stages so as to independently
sweep the minority carriers out of said emitter-base junc-
tions, thereby turning off said driver stage and said power
stage at their own respective sweep-out rates wherein said
4,380,797
TWO LEVEL STORE WTTH MANY-TO-ONE MAPPING
SCHEME
Peter L. Desyllas, Wilmslow; Barry G. Radley; Alasdair Rawst-
home, both of Glossop; John R. Eaton, and John E. Mnrray,
both of Salford, all of En^and, assignors to International
Computers Ltd., London, England
FUed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 165,854
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jul. 4, 1979,
7923329
Int. a.' G06F U/OO
U.S. a. 364—200 4 Claims
1. In a data processing system having a main store connected
to a smaller, faster slave store into which data items are copied
from the main store on demand, the data items in the main store
being mapped on to the locations of the slave store according
to a many-to-one mapping scheme, the improvement compris-
ing:
(a) a further store connected in tandem with the slave store,
the further store being of smaller size than the slave store
and having an access speed comparable to that of the slave
store;
(b) means connected to the slave store for producing a con-
trol signal when an attempt is made to access from the
slave store two different data items which map on to the
same location of the slave store, and
766
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(c) means connected to the slave store and further store, and
responsive to said control signal, for suspending address-
signal provided by said output means to said second pro-
cessor to said first state to indicate that said resource is
unavailable, in response to simultaneously receiving said
first control signals from both of said processors.
4,380,799
SPEED CONTROL FOR AN AUTOMOBILE
Pierre- Yves Allard, Rueil, and Gilles Leconte, Paris, both of
France, assignors to Regie Nationale des Usines Renault,
Boulogne-Billancourt, France
FUed Jun. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 159,342
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 29, 1979, 79 16879
Int. a.3 B60K n/OO: P02D 1/08: G05D 13/62
U.S. a. 364—426 12 Qaims
ing of the slave store and addressing the further store
instead when the control signal is present.
4,380,798
SEMAPHORE REGISTER INCLUDING OWNERSHIP
BITS
Paul D. Shannon, and William C. Bruce, Jr., both of Austin,
Tex., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg, 111.
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,259
Int. Q\? G06F 15/16
U.S. CI. 364—200 3 Qaims
1. A semaphore register for use in a data processing system
to indicate the status of a resource shared by first and second
processors, comprising:
master latch means for providing a semaphore signal in a
first state in response to a set signal and in a second state
in response to a reset signal, said first state indicating
unavailability of said resource and said second state indi-
cating availability of said resource;
first slave latch means coupled to said master latch means,
for latching the state of said semaphore signal during a
first clock interval;
set logic means coupled to said master and first slave latch
means and to said first and second processors, for provid-
ing said set signal to said master latch means if, during a
second clock interval following said first clock interval,
said semaphore signal is in said second state and a first
control signal is received from either of said processors;
reset logic means coupled to said master and first slave latch
means and to said first and second processors, for provid-
ing said reset signal to said master latch means if, during
said second clock interval, said semaphore signal is in said
first state and a second control signal is received from
either of said processors;
output means coupled to said first slave latch means and to
said first and second processors, for providing to said first
and second processors a respective output signal corre-
sponding in state to said latched semaphore signal in re-
sponse to receiving said first control signal respectively
therefrom during said second clock interval; and
arbitration logic means coupled to said output means and to
said first and second processors, for forcing the output
1. In a speed control for an engine of an automobile having
an accelerator pedal, a speed sensor, and a butterfly valve,
which is capable of serving as a driving aid, the improvement
comprising:
a depressible return means for opposing, with a limited force
equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the depres-
sion force exerted by the driver against the accelerator
pedal as soon as the latter exceeds, in its position, a prede-
termined value; an electronic computer connected to
means for selecting a reference speed and to means for
display of said preselected reference speed; a potentiome-
ter the movable part of which is dependent upon said
accelerator pedal, and the output of which is connected to
the electronic computer, the outputs of which are in turn
connected to an electric motor which directly controls the
angular displacements of the butterfly valve, in which the
depressive force of said accelerator pedal corresponds to a
first value over a given length of travel of said pedal, and
to a second value, higher than the first, over the remaining
travel of said accelerator pedal, creating a friction point at
a given point in the travel of said accelerator pedal, corre-
sponding to passage from a first depressive force to a
second higher than the first, in which the displacements of
said accelerator pedal are graduated in speed; a mechani-
cal connection between said accelerator pedal and said
butterfly valve, incorporating a control block, controlled
by the electronic computer, wherein said control block
includes an epicyclic train controlled by a motorized
reduction gear, a recopy potentiometer, and a blade turn-
ing about the axis of symmetry of said epicyclic train.
4,380,800
DIGITAL ROUGHNESS SENSOR
John R. Wilkinson, Dearborn, Mich., assignor to The Bendix
Corporation, Southfield, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 904,132, May 8, 1978, abandoned. This
appUcation Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,803
Int. a.3 F02D 5/02: FD2M 51/00: F02B 3/08
U.S. Q. 364—431.08 27 Claims
1. A roughness sensor for generating roughness signals in-
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
767
dicative of the variation in the magnitude of the torque im-
pulses imparted to a rotating element, the sensor comprising:
means detecting the rotational position of the rotating ele-
ment for generating first interval signals indicative of a
first angular interval of the rotating element's rotation for
each torque impulse, and for generating second interval
signals indicative of a subsequent angular interval of the
rotating element's rotation, wherein the rotating member
has a maximum rotational velocity in response to each
torque impulse in said subsequent angular interval;
a plunger coupling for interconnecting the plunger rod and
the piston rod,
the improvement in which the plunger coupling is provided
with two projections with a recess formed therebetween, and
which comprises:
a magnetic proximity switch for detecting said projection
while the plunger coupling moves along the axis of the
plunger rod and producing an output in accordance with
the result of the detection, and
a means for computing in accordance with the output of said
magnetic proximity switch, the speed of the plunger cou-
pling, said computing means comprising means for pro-
ducing pulses at a predetermined interval (Tji/), a gate
circuit responsive to the output of said proximity switch
for passing said pulses during the time interval after an
edge of a first projection has passed said proximity switch
and before a corresponding edge of a second projection
passes said proximity switch, a pulse counter responsive to
said output of said gate circuit for counting the number of
pulses from said gate circuit, and a computing circuit
responsive to the output of said pulse counter for comput-
ing the speed (V), in accordance with the number (N) of
pulses counted by said pulse counter, the interval (Jm)<
and the distance (Sm) between said edge of said first pro-
jection and said edges of said second projection.
means response to said first and second interval signals for
generating a normalized signal having a value propor-
tional to the magnitude of the torque impulse determined
by the time required by the rotating element to rotate
through said subsequent angular interval and inversely
proportional to engine speed determined by the time
- required for the rotating element to rotate through said
first annular interval; and
means for generating a roughness signal from at least two
sequentially generated normalized signals, said roughness
signal having a value equal to the difference between said
sequentially generated normalized signals.
4,380,801
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INJECTION SPEED IN
INJECTION MOLDING MACHINES
Noriyuki Motomura, and Hiroyuki Tsuboi, both of Zama, Ja-
pan, assignors to Toshiba Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 117,844, Feb. 4, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,728
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 7, 1979, 54-14670
Int. a.3 GOIP 3m; G06F 15/46
U.S. a. 364—565 2 Claims
19'
17
-18 B. '°*'^^3g ; ^5D
- 8 8o - y\ '«^5F
8
iJ^^^^JC
9 3 X ^y^ <
1. An apparatus for measuring an injection speed in an injec-
tion molding machine having:
a piston rod reciprocated by an injection cylinder of the
injection molding machine,
a plunger rod having, at one end thereof, a plunger tip slid-
' ably received in a plunger sleeve connected to a die, and
4,380,802
ELECTRONIC CALORIE COUNTER
Richard B. Segar, Annapolis, Md., and Lewis C. Marascalco,
Pittsburgh, Pa., assignors to GPD Inc., Mitchellrille, Md.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 907^38, May 18, 1978, Pat.
No. 4,212,079. This appUcation Jul. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 165,268
Int. a.3 G06F 15/42
U.S. a. 364—900 13 Claims
ceaTiei ciicmT
cuini III! > euHii iiTii
uni -IMHUt
ici Minii
CM
■EMT
H
J \
I
till
I taniHL
paEcn
^TCp
Hi'Sni
niici
IITl
StlKI
' M
I mi I H-i"
tl NIICI
CMIHL Cli(Mtl~
1. A calorie monitoring device for calculating the calories
burned by a person, the calories consumed by the person and
the net difference therebetween, said device comprising:
(a) calculator means for performing arithmetic calculations,
said calculator means having a a plurality of memory
means for storing alpha-numeric data therein, a keyboard
means for entering data into said calculator means and
display means for displaying data therein;
(b) program memory means for storing a plurality of control
programs for said calculator means;
(c) interface means coupling said program memory means to
said calculator means;
(d) program sequencer means, coupled to said program
memory means, for controlling the sequence of program
steps read from said program memory means;
(e) timer means coupled to said program sequencer means
for intiating the operation of said program sequencer
means at predetermined time intervals for calculating the
calories burned; and
(0 switch means for initiating the operation of said device
and for selecting one of said plurality of control programs,
wherein said switch means includes set-reset logic means
coupled between said timer means, said program se-
quencer means and said program memory means, said
1029 O.G.— 34
768
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
set-reset logic means receiving an input from said timer
means at the beginning of said predetermined time inter-
vals for the calculation of calories burned and producing
an output in response thereto to initiate the operation of
said program sequencer means and for receiving an output
from said program memory means upon completion of a
program therein and producing an output in response
thereto for stopping operation of said program sequence
means.
4,380,803
READ-ONLY/READ-WRITE MEMORY
Hsiflg T. Tnan, Poway, Calif., assignor to Burroughs Corpora-
tion, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,066
Int. a.3 GllC 7/00
U.S. a. 365—183 6 Claims
1. An improved read-only/read-write semiconductor mem-
ory comprising a semiconductor substrate having a body con-
taining dopant atoms of a first conductivity type, a pair of
spaced-apart charge storage regions at the surface of said
substrate, a bit line at the surface of said substrate spaced apart
from said pair of charge storage regions, respective MOSFET
transistor gate regions at the surface of said substrate between
said bit line and said charge storage regions, and a conductor
over said storage regions; the? improvement comprising:
dopant atoms of a second conductivity type in one of said
storage regions, and dopant atoms of said first conductiv-
ity type in the other of said storage regions having a
greater doping concentration than is in the body of said
substrate; and
means for applying a read-write mode voltage to said con-
ductor to permit charge to be stored in both of said stor-
age regions, and for applying a read-only mode voltage to
said conductor to permit charge to be stored in said one
storage region and simultaneously prevent charge from
being stored in said other storage region by producing a
potential barrier in said other storage region.
cally coupled to said first address line, a first conductive
path electrode, electrically coupled to said second address
line, and a first conductive path virtual node;
a second field effect transistor, having a gate electrode,
electrically coupled to said read line, a first conductive
path electrode, electrically coupled to said third line, and
a first conductive path virtual node;
memory means, having a gate electrode, electrically coupled
to said memory line, first and second conductive path
virtual nodes respectively coupled to said first conductive
path virtual nodes of said first and second field effect
transistors, and a threshold voltage level responsive to a
voltage pulse on said memory line in time coincidence
with the formation of a conductive path through said first
field effect transistor between said second address line and
said first conductive path virtual node, for forming a
conductive path between said first and second conductive
path virtual nodes of said memory means in response to
the relative mangitude between a voltage on said memory
line and an alterable threshold voltage in said memory
means;
means for generating voltages, coupled to the lines of said
memory means, said first field effect transistor and said
second field effect transistor, characterized in its provision
of voltage sequences, including;
a first sequence, suitable to program said cell to a first
binary state, comprising, a coupling of voltages to said
first address line and said memory line in substantial
time synchronism with substantially zero voltages on
said second address line and on said read line;
a second sequence, suitable to program said cell to an
alternate, second binary state, comprising, a coupling of
voltages to said memory line and to said first and second
address electrodes, suitable to electrically decouple said
second address line from said first conductive path
virtual node of said first field effect transistor, in sub-
stantial time synchronism with a substantially zero
voltage on said read line; and
a third sequence, suitable to read the binary state pro-
grammed into said cell, comprising, a coupling of volt-
ages to said first address line and to said read line in
substantial time synchronism with a substantially zero
voltage on said memory line; and
means for sensing the conductivity between said second
address line and said third line.
4,380,804
EAROM CELL MATRIX AND LOGIC ARRAYS WITH
COMMON MEMORY GATE
George C. Lockwood, Dayton, and Mnmy L. Tnidel, Center-
▼ille, both of Ohio, assignors to NCR Corporation, Dayton,
Ohio
rUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,644
Int a.J GllC 11/40. 7/00
U.S. a. 365—184 8 Claims
sw
J'
0| N, O2 Nj O3
1. A three element programmable memory cell capable of
being erased, programmed and read using a first address line, a
Isecond address line, a memory line, a read line and a third line,
pomprising:
a first field effect transistor, having a gate electrode, electri-
4,380,805
TAPE BURN-IN CTRCUTT
Robert J. Proebsting, Piano, Tex., assignor to Mostek Corpora-
tion, CarroUton, Tex.
PCT No. PCr/US80/01149, § 371 Date Sep. 8, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 8, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00917, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 18, 1982
per FUed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 277,652
Int. a.3 GllC 29/00
U.S. a. 365—201 4 Chdms
1. A circuit for buming-in and an integrated semiconductor
memory which has a plurality of memory cells that are ac-
cessed in response to an address which is provided to row and
column decoders, and to row and column clock signals, the
memory having a sense amplifier for each of a plurality of digit
lines which are connectable to the memory cells, the memory
further having pullup circuits for driving digit lines to a high
voltage state and a refresh counter responsive t6 an externally
supplied refresh signal for generating addresses for the row
and column decoders, the bum-in circuit comprising circuit
elements integral with the memory including:
a bum-in terminal connected to receive an externally sup-
plied bum-in command having first and second voltage
states for buming-in the memory;
means connected to said bum-in terminal for disconnecting
the sense amplifiers when said bum-in command is at said
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
7«9
first state to write a high voltage state into the memory
cells by operation of the pullup circuits;
means for receiving a repetitive refresh signal to cycle the
refresh counter and supply a sequence of row and column
addresses to the row and column decoders;
means for generating the row clock signals when said bum-
in command is at said first state or said second state and
the refresh signal is received; and
means for generating the column clock signals when said
bum-in command is at said first state or said second state
and the refresh signal is received.
quency and duration for energization of each of said shear
wave transmitters;
recording means receiving signal output from each of said
shear wave receivers;
correlator means correlating the control signal with each
respective signal output from the recording means to
provide output indication of shear wave travel time over
the selected vertical distance; and
hydraulic actuation means controllable to actuate said trans-
mitters and receivers simultaneously to enable selected
progressive positioning of said frame means along said
borehole.
4,380,807
ECHO RECOGNITION SYSTEM
John M. Reynard, Framingham, Mass., assignor to Polaroid
Corporation, Cambridge, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 81,357, Oct. 3, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,901
Int. a.^ GOIS 7/66. 15/04
U.S. a. 367—97 10 Claims
4,380,806
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHEAR WAVE
LOGGING
Kenneth H. Waters, Oakland, Calif.; John R. Ho|ridns, and
Charles E. Payton, both of Houston, Tex., assignors to
Conoco Inc., Ponca City, Okla.
Filed Mar. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 131,814
Int. a.3 GOIV 1/40. 1/36
U.S. a. 367—27 3 Qaims
1. Apparatus for shear wave logging of a borehole formed in
the earth surface, comprising:
frame means for controlled suspension down said borehole;
four quadrature arrayed shear wave transmitters carried by
said frame means at a first position along said frame means
and actuatable between a retracted position and firm
contact with the borehole wall;
four quadrature arrayed shear wave receivers carried by said
frame means at a second position spaced by a selected
vertical distance from said first position and actuatable
between a retracted position and firm contact with the
borehole wall and providing a receiver signal output;
control mtasa generating a control signal of selected fre-
(ST»(«T)
1. A method of detecting a previously transmitted signal of
energy returning from a selected target in the presence of
energy signals from the source of other than the target, com-
prising the steps of:
continuously sampling said retuming target signal for a
number of consecutive time intervals that arc of very
short time duration relative to the total time duration of
said target signal;
establishing that the sampled target signal magnitude in-
creases between consecutive sampling intervals;
establishing that the rate of increase of target signal magni-
tude between consecutive sampling intervals is greater
than or equal to a predetermined rate of increase; and
establishing that said signal magnitude increase and said rate
of signal magnitude increase between consecutive sam-
pling intervals is continuous for at least a predetermined
portion of the total time duration of said retuming target
signal.
4,380308
THINNED ARRAY TRANSDUCER FOR SONAR
Eugene E. Hill; Manrin S. Scrimshaw, and Edward W. Sbowal-
ter, all of Cornwall, Canada, assignors to Canadian Patents A
Development Limited, Ottawa, CamMla
FUed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,314
Int. a.J H04R 1/40
U.S. a. 367— 153 " 4 Claims
1. A sonar transducer for operation in a particular medium at
a predetermined frequency fo, comprising: an array of sonar
elements mounted in rows and columns on a structure to form
a checkerboard pattern wherein the spacing between the cen-
ters of adjacent elements in the direction of the rows and
columns is M Xm and wherein the diagonal spacing between
770
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
the centers of adjacent elements in the adjacent rows and
columns is 0.707 M \„, where J ^M^ 1 and where Xm, is the
wavelength of the signal of frequency f<, transmitted in the
medium.
4,380,809
AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Tadashi Sato, Toda, Japan, assignor to Clarion Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,455
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 6, 1979, 54-
107644[U]
Int. a.3 GllB 31/00
U.S. a. 369—6 2 Qaims
••V
uiiSi^n oetK BOX —
1^
6 *
o.-*c"crM«-
-^
1. In a power supply apparatus for electrically connecting an
electric power supply to a plurality of boxes, including at least
a cassette deck box, a stereo box and an audio box, which
apparatus includes:
an electric power supply line connected to an electric power
supply;
a cassette responsive selector switch connected to said elec-
tric power supply line, said switch being located in said
cassette deck box and being switched by loading of a
cassette into said cassette deck box and by unloading of
the cassette from said cassette deck box;
an automatic electric power supply circuit located within
said cassette deck box, said circuit being connected to said
cassette responsive switch and supplied thereby with
electric power, depending on the state of said cassette
responsive switch;
a relay located within said audio box and connected by a
control line to said automatic supply circuit, which circuit
energizes said relay and thereby causes said relay to pro-
vide electric power from said power supply line to a
circuit within said audio box in response to said cassette
responsive switch being switched so as to provide power
to said automatic supply circuit; and
a first manually operable switch located within said stereo
box and connected between said automatic supply circuit
and a circuit within said stereo box;
said automatic supply circuit including at least one transistor
and a flrst diode, said first diode being coupled to said
cassette responsive switch and to said transistor, said
transistor being turned on and providing electric power to
said relay and to a circuit within said cassette box when
said automatic supply circuit is actuated by a forward
voltage across said first diode; and
said cassette responsive switch being switchable between a
tape operating terminal and a stereo box operating termi-
nal, said first manually operable switch in said stereo box
being connected to said stereo box operating terminal of
said cassette responsive switch through said first diode,
closure of said first manually operable switch in said ste-
reo box and switching of said cassette responsive switch to
said stereo box operating terminal both being required to
produce a forward voltage across said first diode and turn
on said transistor and thereby provide electrical power to
said relay and said circuit within said cassette deck box,
the last-mentioned circuit being a control amplifier, a
second diode being connected between said tape operat-
ing terminal of said cassette responsive switch and a point
at which said transistor applies said electric power to said
control amplifier, said second diode being oriented to
positively block electric current flow from said point back
toward said tape operating terminal of said cassette re-
sponsive switch, said cassette deck box further including a
tape pre-amp connected between said tape operating ter-
minal of said cassette responsive switch and said second
diode, said tape pre-amp receiving electric power only
when said cassette responsive switch is switched to said
tape operating terminal,
the improvement comprising a tuner box and a junction
cable for connecting said tuner box to said power supply
line and said control line, said tuner box including a sec-
ond manually operable switch, a tuner, a tuner amplifier
connected to said tuner and a third diode, said second
manually operable switch being connected between said
tuner amplifier and said power supply line through said
cable, and said third diode being connected from the
junction between said second switch and said tuner ampli-
fier to said control line through said cable, whereby elec-
tric power is provided to operate said tuner amplifier and
to energize said relay when said second manually operable
switch is closed.
4,380,810
LOOPBACK TEST
Ronald J. Canniff, Naperrille, III., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N J.
FUed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,619
Int. a.J H04J 3/14
U.S. a. 370—15 12 Claims
1. A method of real time testing of a transmission path
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
771
through a digital concentrator system comprising a central
office concentrator terminal (110), a remote concentrator
terminal (112), and a digital line (108) Characterized by the
steps of
disabling the stord:ge of encoded signals from subscriber lines
(1,2,3 ... 48) to be connected to concentrator trunks,
storing a looping test code word in place of the encoded
signals from said subscriber lines,
transmitting said looping test code word as part of a multi-
plexed stream to said remote concentrator terminal (112)
over said concentrator trunks, and
returning said looping test code word from said remote
concentrator terminal (112) over said concentrator trunks,
said concentrator trunks being part of said digital line.
4,380,812
REFRESH AND ERROR DETECTION AND
CORRECTION TECHNIQUE FOR A DATA FRCKISSING
SYSTEM
Michael L. Ziegler, II, WhitiiiSTille; Miduwl B. Drake, Chelms-
ford, both of Mass.; John R. Van Roekel, Ann Arbor, Mich.,
and Ward Baxter, II, Carlisle, Mass., assignors to Data C^-
eral Corpoi^tion, Westboro, Mass.
FUed Apr. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 143,675
Int. a.3 G06F 11/10: GllC 29/00
U,S. a. 371—38 6 Claims
4,380,811
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC ARRAY WITH SELF
CORRECTION OF FAULTS
Volkmar Cidtze, Grafenau, and Dieter Schiitt, Munich, both of
Fed. Rep. of C^rmany, assignors to International Business
Machines Corp., Annonk, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,027
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Cvennany, Apr. 25,
1980, 3015992
Int. a.3 GOIR 31/28; GllC 29/00
U.S. a. 371—10 14 Claims
gm A ^'^^ **
1. In a data processing system having a memory in which
binary words, each comprising a plurality of bits, are stored:
refresh means connected to said memory for periodically
refreshing the bits of one or more stored words at a se-
lected refresh time interval;
error detection means connected to said memory for detect-
ing an error which may exist in at least one binary bit of
one of said one or more stored words the detection thereof
being performed at substantially the same time as the
refreshing of said one or more stored words;
a single error correcting means connected to said error
detection means and responsive to the detection of an
error in said one of said one or more stored words for
correcting said error when said error has been detected
during said refresh operation; and
means connected to said error correcting means and to said
memory for writing said corrected word back into said
memory.
4,380,813
ERROR CHECKING OF MUTUALLY-EXCLUSIVE
CONTROL SIGNALS
Leonard L. Fogell, Hyde Park; Samuel R. LeTine, and Arnold
Weinberger, both of Poughkeepsie, all of N.Y., assignors to
International Business Machines Corp.« Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249^08
Int a? CaS¥ 11/12
U.S. a. 371—52 5 Claims
1. A programming logic array (PLA) having an AND array
and an OR array with input lines to the AND array, output
lines from the OR array, and product term lines interconnect-
ing the two arrays, the PLA having storage flip-flops at the
cross points of the arrays, wherein the improvement com-
prises,
means connecting the flip-flops along individual product
term lines of the AND array and along individual output
lines of the OR array to form shift registers,
means for sequentially loading data for a test sequence into
the shift registers of the PLA,
whereby the array can be tested to locate faults, and
dummy lines in the array connectable to replace a line in
which a fault is detected.
— I MOl'"' !'!•<■ "
!M 0' VMUSOl' V
n i: tj <* I TM'
111 n IS ui iw«
10'
1. In apparatus for checking a set of control signals Fl to FN
generated from a set of variables a to y for invalid conditions
772
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
by applying said set of control signals to a detector means
which determines when none or more than one of the set of
control signals are on, the improvement comprising:
means for generating an additional control signal X = F1F2-
. . . -F^ from the set of variables a to y,
means in said detector means responsive to the additional
control signal X to said detector means along with the set
of control signals Fl to FN to determine if more than one
or none of said control signals Fl to FN and X are on so
that said apparatus does not indicate as invalid any valid
conditions where none of the control signals Fl to FN are
on.
cause the polarities of said outputs from said flrst and
second unipolar/bipolar conversion means to be coinci-
dent; and
means for switching between the outputs of said first and
second unipolar/bipolar conversion means.
4J80 814
BASEBAND DATA SWITCHING APPARATUS FOR
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Saburo Shinmyo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,686
Qaiffls priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1979, 54-130133
Int. aj H04B 7/08
U.S. a. 375—40 8 Qaims
BWASf
COHMMIQC
- -?mJ*-i;o'.
-4^
CUKUtT
7 ' " i^i
1. A baseband daU switching apparatus for alternately
switching between first and second channels, each channel
having means for receiving baseband unipolar data and clock
recovering means for recovering a clock from said baseband
unipolar data, said switching apparatus comprising:
first and second data phase adjusting means (301-303, 305)
connected to the outputs of said receiving means and of
said clock recovering means in said first and second chan-
nels, respectively, for adjusting the phase of said baseband
unipolar data in each channel in a timed relationship with
the respective recovered clocks;
first and second clock phase adjusting means (304) respec-
tively connected to the output of said clock recovering
means in said first and second channels for respectively
adjusting the phases of said recovered clocks;
first (106) and second (206) unipolar/bipolar conversion
means respectively connected to said first and second
phase adjusting means and to said first and second clock
phase adjusting means for respectively converting the
phase-adjusted baseband unipolar data into bipolar data in
response to a first control signal and to a second control
signal, respectively;
first (104) and second (204) frequency divider means respec-
tively connected to said first and second clock phase
adjusting means for respectively dividing the frequencies
of the phase adjusted recovered clocks;
first (105) and second (205) control signal supply means for
respectively and selectively reversing the polarities of the
outputs of said first and second frequency divider means in
response to respective third and fourth control signals to
provide said first and second control signals;
coincidence detecting means for detecting coincidence or
non-coincidence between the outputs from said first and
second unipolar/bipolar conversion means, said third and
fourth control signals being produced in response to an
output from said coincidence detecting means such that
said third and fourth control signals have polarities which
4,380,815
SIMPLinED NRZ DATA PHASE DETECTOR WITH
EXPANDED MEASURING INTERVAL
Steven J. Qendening, Piano, Tex., assignor to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation, El Sequndo, Calif.
FUed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,176
Int. a.3 H03K 1/17. 5/156
U.S. a. 375-80 17 Claims
1. An NRZ data phase detector comprising:
phase error means responsive to a data transition for initiat-
ing a measuring interval and responsive to a clock transi-
tion for terminating said measuring interval, and including
means for generating a variable length subinterval be-
tween said data transition and a given polarity clock tran-
sition and for generating a fixed length subinterval be-
tween designated common polarity clock transitions such
that said fixed subinterval has a duration of one full clock
cycle, the duration difference between said variable subin-
terval and said fixed subinterval providing phase indica-
tion.
4,380,816
APPARATUS FOR RECYCLING COMPLETE CYCLES OF
A STORED PERIODIC SIGNAL
Robin P. NichoUs, Santa Barbara, Calif., assignor to Raytheon
Company, Lexington, Mass.
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,301
Int a.3 H04B 1/16: GllC 9/00
U.S. CI. 375—94 3 Claims
1. Apparatus for storing a periodic signal and for recycling
complete cycle portions of such stored periodic signal com-
prising:
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
773
means for producing first control signals indicating the start
of each cycle of the periodic signal;
storage means;
means for commencing storage of the periodic signal in
response to one of the first control signals;
means for producing a second control signal indicating that
a predetermined portion of the storage means has stored
therein a first portion of the periodic signal;
means responsive to both the second control signal and one
of the first control signals produced subsequent to the
production of the second control signal, for producing a
signal indicating the portion of the memory means having
stored therein complete cycles of the stored signal; and
means, responsive to the indicating signal, for recycling
complete cycles of the stored signal through the storage
means.
4,380^18
X-RAY DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM COMPRISING A
RADIOGRAPHY UNIT WITH AN X-RAY TUBE WHICH
EMITS A FAN-SHAPED RADIATION BEAM
Manfred Pfeiler, Erlangen, Fed. Rep. of Gcmaay, aasi^or to
Siemens AktiengeseUscluift, Berlin A Mnnich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,664
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jnn. 23,
1980 3023401
Int. a.3 A61B 6/00; GOIJ 1/29; HOIJ 31/49; H05G 1/64
U.S. a. 378—099 8 Claims
4,380,817
METHOD FOR EXAMINING A BODY WITH
PENETRATING RADIATION
Geoffrey Harding, Rellingen, and Wolfgang Wagner, Hamburg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to U.S. Philips Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 185,845
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 27,
1979, 2939146
Int. a.3 GOIN 23/20
U.S. a. 378—87 4 Claims
VIDEO UNIT
X-RAY IMAGE;
INTENSIRER
1. A diagnostic radiology system comprising a radiographic
unit having a support for a radiography subject, having an
X-ray tube, which emits a fan-shaped radiation beam, having a
radiation detector for receiving the radiation emerging from
the radiography subject, which radiation detector delivers
electric output signals corresponding to the received radiation
profile, having means for generating relative movement be-
tween the support for the radiography subject and the radia-
tion beam over an excursion range, and having a measurand
converter which, from the detector output signals, determines
the X-ray shadow image corresponding to the excursion range
and provides an output for effecting display of such image,
characterized in that the radiation detector (5, 6) is of the
electrostatic memory type for electrostatically storing signals
in accordance with the received radiation, and that a canceling
device is present which cancels the stored signals in the mem-
ory area which, in the direction of movement of the line image
formed by the X-ray beam (3), are disposed before the line
image.
1. In a device for examining a body using penetrating radia-
tion which comprises: source means which generate a primary
beam of said radiation, detector array means for measuring,
and for generating output signals representing, scattered radia-
tion generated in the body along the primary beam, diaphragm
means disposed between the detector array means and the
primary beam which define a slit shaped aperture having a
longitudinal direction which is oriented at right angles to the
primary beam; and a large plurality of lamellae of radiation-
absorbing material disposed between the aperture and the
detector array means which lamellae are disposed at least
approximately in planes which intersect colinearly in and
along the primary beam whereby the detector array means
measure radiation which is both singly and multiply scattered
in the body; the improvement which comprises:
means for generating a relative displacement between the
primary beam and the diaphragm means, the detector
array means, and the lamellae so that, during a portion of
the examination, the planes of the lamellae intersect out-
side of the primary beam whereby the detector array
means only measure radiation which is multiply scattered
in the body; and
means which subtract output signals from the detectors
which represent only said multiply scattered radiation
from respective output signals which represent both sin-
gly and multiply scattered radiation to produce signals
which represent only singly scattered radiation.
4,380,819
SPOTnLMING APPARATUS
Dennis Everett, Garfield Heights, and VJekodaT Jnkic, Cleve-
land, both of Ohio, assignors to Picker Corporation, Qcve-
land,Ohio
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,739
Int a.5 G21F 5/04
VJS. a. 378—114 12 Claims
1. A masking apparatus for an X-ray spot-fdmer, comprising:
(a) a first pair of shutter-like members constructed of radia-
tion absorptive materials;
(b) guide means for slidably supporting said members for
motion in a first direction;
(c) drive means operatively connected to said members for
imparting reciprocating motion towards and away from
each other;
(d) a second pair of shutter-like members constructed of
radiation absorptive material, each member including first
and second relatively movable elements;
(e) guide means for slidably supporting said second pair of
members for motion in a direction substantially transverse
to the direction of motion of said first pair of members;
(0 drive means operatively connected to said second pair of
members for imparting reciprocating motion towards and
away from each other, said drive means actuating said first
and second elements at first and second speeds, respec-
tively.
6. An X-ray spotfUming apparatus, comprising:
(a) an X-ray source;
774
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
(b) a spotfilmer housing including a means for clamping and
conveying a film cassette between exposure and retracted
positions within said housing;
(c) a palpitator cone assembly mounted for movement along
a surface of said spotfilmer housing and movable between
retracted and operative positions and disposed intermedi-
ate the X-ray source and the cassette clamping and con-
veying means;
(d) cone drive means operatively attached to said palpitator
cone for driving said cone between the retracted and
operative positions;
surface with an edge portion thereof defining a different
peripheral portion of an aperture, the surfaces of the first
pair of shutter elements being adapted to rotate within a
space disposed between the surfaces of the second pair of
shutter elements and the surfaces of the second pair of
shutter elements being adapted to rotate within a space
disposed between the surfaces of the first pair of shutter
elements.
74»
i
7o* l7«« 1 702, -;,o 708'
7«rb
iuC" 7J0
/^m
(e) cone lock means for locking the position of said cone
when said cone is driven to its operative position by said
drive means;
(0 said cone drive means including a means for releasing said
lock means when said drive means is energized to retract
said cone and further including a drive belt driven by a
reversible motor and limit switches mounted in the path of
movement of said cone lock means, said switches being
operated by said lock means when said cone travels to
predetermined jxjsitions.
4,380,820
COMPACT X-RAY COLLIMATOR
James W. Cutter, HoUister, Calif., assignor to The Machlett
Laboratories, Incorporated, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Jun. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 161,108
Int. a.3 A61B 6/06
U.S. a. 378-153 17 Qaims
1. A radiation collimator, comprising:
(a) a housing;
(b) a first and a second pair of shutter elements disposed
within the housing and rotatably mounted with respect to
the housing, each one of such shutter elements having a
4,380,821
TRAFFIC BROADCASTING SYSTEM
Gert Eckhardt, Backnang, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Licentia Patent- Verwaltungs-G.m.b.H., Frankfiirt am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,792
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 27,
1979, 2930509
Int. C\? H04B 3/60. 7/155
U.S. a. 455—33 9 Qaims
"Y, 'X ^
I I I i
J> t-
I-*— I-
BECiivEii [;.^^;~^Moon>Ta4
'-] BtCEIVEB [ [_)DtMO0UL>TI
]tMO0UL>T[4 T-^^
ifH^
iM
OPfB«TING
DEVICE
n^
1. A method of transmitting information from a central
ground station to a plurality of mobile auxiliary ground stations
via at least one base station, each of said auxiliary ground
stations being located within the transmitting range of at least
one of said base stations and being provided with a receiving
device having a control unit and a memory, said method com-
prising the steps of:
transmitting from said central ground station a block of
messages cyclically repeated within a time frame, each
message including an address code corresponding to the
area code of the region adjacent a corresponding base
station, said block of messages being transmitted on a
single frequency;
receiving said block of messages at each of said base stations;
transmitting from each of said base stations said received
block of messages, said block of messages being transmit-
ted on a single frequency;
receiving said block of messages at the receiving device of
said auxiliary ground stations;
recording in said memory those received messages having a
selected area code and controlling said memory with said
control unit to effect said recording;
converting said recorded messages to an information signal;
recording changed messages having said selected area code
and a changed signal associated therewith; and
converting said recorded changed messages to an informa-
tion signal and controlling said memory with said control
unit to effect said converting of said recorded changed
messages to said information signal.
April- 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
775
4,380,822
TRANSMIT-RECEIVE SWITCHING aRCUTT FOR
RADIO FREQUENCY ORCULATORS
Robert M. Broton, Palatine, III., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, 111.
FUed Not. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,707
Int. a.5 H04B 1/48
U.S. a. 455—80 2 Claims
,..r^5P
T
-+-
400 . iM
I t
"X
:/.' •*
supplying a voltage from a power supply line through an
inductive element to one of said terminals; and
means in said integrated circuit chip and coupled to said one
terminal for shifting said functions between said different
frequency bands in response to said voltage.
4,380,824
RECEIVING REPRODUCING SYSTEM
Takao Inoue, Kodaira, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,869
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 18, 1980, 5S-50381
Int. a.3 H04B 1/10: H03G 3/24
U.S. a. 455—143
L±___J
1. Apparatus for switching a receiver and a transmitter to a
common antenna comprising:
combining means, electrically coupled to said receiver and
said transmitter, for providing signals from said transmit-
ter to a common .signal path and for providing signals
from said common path to said receiver in a manner main-
taining isolation between said receiver and said transmit-
ter;
a circulator exhibiting a predetermined characteristic impe-
dance and including first, second and third ports, said first
and second ports being electrically coupled to said com-
mon signal path and said common antenna, respectively,
and
selectively actuable impedance means, electrically coupled
to said third port, for exhibiting an impedance approxi-
mately equal to the characteristic impedance of said circu-
lator when said transmitter is transmitting and exhibiting
an impedance substantially less than said characteristic
impedance when said transmitter ceases transmitting.
5 Claims
4,380,823
MULTICHANNEL SIGNAL PROCESSING CTRCUIT
FORMED IN A SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED
CIRCUIT
Naotoshi Higashiyama, and Kazuyuki Doi, both of Tokyo, Ja*
pan, assignors to ^Appon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 57,370
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 14, 1978, 53-86337
Int. a.' H04B 1/16
U.S. a. 455—143 16 Qaims
13. A system comprising:
an integrated circuit chip having a plurality of terminals;
means in said integrated circuit chip for providing signal
processing functions in different frequency bands;
means external to said integrated circuit chip for selectively
L
RF
ORCUIT
[^^^K^N^cu^ThriHr]
lJ levelU control I
"0£T PJCWCUIT I
SueTRACT10N>jEWEL0Pt
oRcurr ^-'^ orr
JiNTEGRflnON
lORCulT
4. A receiving reproducing system comprising:
an AM tuner for obtaining an AM detected output signal
from an AM radio-frequency signal;
an FM front end for obtaining an FM intermediate-fre-
quency signal from an FM radio-frequency signal;
an FM intermediate-frequency signal processing circuit for
obtaining an FM detected output signal from said FM
intermediate-frequency signal;
an FM stereo demodulator for obtaining a left-channel de-
modulated output signal and a right-channel demodulated
output signal from said FM detected output signal;
a first terminal which can be supplied by way of a selection
means with a selected one of said AM detected output
signal and said left-channel demodulated output signal;
a second terminal which can be supplied by way of said
selection means with a selected one of said AM detected
output signal and said right-channel demodulated output
signal;
a first voltage-controlled attenuator having an input termi-
nal, a control terminal and an output terminal, the signal
transmission from said input terminal to said output termi-
nal being controllable by a control voltage impressed
upon said control terminal and said input terminal being
connected to said first terminal;
a second voltage-controlled attenuator having an input ter-
minal, a control terminal and an output terminal, the signal
transmission from said input terminal to said output termi-
nal being controllable by a control voltage impressed
upon said control terminal and said input terminaJ being
connected to said second terminal;
a first power amplifier the input terminal of which is con-
nected with said output terminal of said first voltage-con-
trolled attenuator;
a second power amplifier the input terminal of which is
connected with said output terminal of said second volt-
age-controlled attenuator;
a first speaker which is driven by the output signal of said
first power amplifier;
a second speaker which is driven by the output signal of said
second power amplifier;
noise detector means for detecting the surrounding noise
level of a sound field;
received level detector means for detecting an AM level
which is dependent upon said AM radio-frequency signal
as well as an FM level which is dependent upon said FM
radio-frequency signal, and
control means responsive to an output signal of said received
776
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
level detector means and connected between the output
terminal of said noise detector means and both of said
control terminals of said first and second voltage con-
trolled attenuator, said control means including means for
transmitting the detected output of said noise detector
means to both of said control terminals of said first and
said second voltage controlled attenuator in case the out-
put signal of said received level detector means is higher
than a preset value so as to control said output signals of
said first and second power amplifier proportionally in
accordance with said surrounding noise level of said
sound field and said control means forcibly lowering the
level of said output signals of said first and second power
ampUfier in case said output signal of said received level
detector means is lower than said preset value, thereby
disabling sound field effects on said power amplifier out-
put signals.
said count down signal, until the tuning frequency of said
electronic tuner is an optimum frequency.
4,380,825
AUTOMATIC SWEEP DIGITAL TUNING aRCUIT
Hideharu Takebe, and Hiroshi Kobayashi, both of Itami, Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,502
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 9, 1980, 55-125611;
Sep. 9, 1980, 55-125612
Int. a.3 H04B 1/26
U.S. Q. 455—164 8 Oaims
1. An automatic sweep digital tuning circuit operatively
connected to receive a switching signal, comprising:
an automatic sweep control circuit for receiving the switch-
ing signal and for generating a pulse signal and a fine
control start signal;
an up-down counter, ojjeratively connected to said auto-
matic sweep control circuit, for receiving said pulse signal
and for performing a count-up operation to generate a
digital output signal;
a digital-to-analog converter, operatively connected to said
up-down counter, for converting the digital output signal
into an analog signal;
an electronic tuner, operatively connected to said digital-to-
analog converter and said automatic sweep control cir-
cuit, for receiving said analog signal and for providing a
tuning frequency, said automatic sweep control circuit
stopping the count-up operation of said up-down counter
when the tuning frequency of said electronic tuner ap-
proaches a predetermined frequency;
an automatic frequency fine control circuit, operatively
connected to said electronic tuner, said automatic sweep
control circuit and said up-down counter, for finely con-
trolling the timing frequency of said electronic tuner in
dependence upon said fine control start signal, so that the
tuning frequency of said electronic tuner becomes coinci-
dent with the predetermined frequency; and
count down means, operatively connected to said automatic
frequency fine control circuit and said automatic sweep
control circuit, for providing a count down signal to said
automatic frequency fine control circuit in dependence
upon said fine control start signal, said automatic fre-
quency fine control circuit causing said up-down counter
to perform a count down operation, in dependence upon
4,380,826
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR CHANNEL SELECnON
Kikuo Usugi, Toda, Japan, assignor to Clarion Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,509
Int a.3 H04B 1/26; H03L 7/18
U.S. a. 455—165
SCIaims
-H-O
OUTc
CUT
r»j-- « r @T [fll
i^
^ i
6 sH
1. A control system for channel selection in a frequency
synthesized radio receiver which comprises:
a frequency synthesizer coupled to a receiver front end
portion;
a memory means provided for storing data signals respec-
tively corresponding to broadcasting waves having the
same broadcasting content;
a clock generating means for producing clock pulses;
a first counter means counting the clock pulses for produc-
ing an address signal of the memory means and supplying
said signal to the memory means;
a channel-selecting means for selecting a data signal output-
ted from said memory means in response to the address
signal and for applying said data signal to said frequency
synthesizer to control it so that said front end portion
receives a broadcasting wave signal having a desired
frequency corresponding to said data signal;
a reference level setting means;
a means for comparing a level of the received broadcasting
wave signal outputted from said front end portion and a
reference level set by said reference level setting means;
and
a first gate means coupled to said means for comparing for
selectively supplying clock pulses to said first counter
means from said clock generating means, said channel-
selecting means being comprised of selecting switches
corresponding to respective channels, pulse generating
circuits connected to said switches, respectively, flip-flop
circuits each adapted to be set by a pulse supplied from the
respective pulse generating circuit through the respective
selecting switch, and a second gate means for selecting the
data signal from said memory means in response to an
output from one of said flip-flop circuits.
4,380,827
OSCILLATOR FOR TELEVISION TUNER
Frederick H. Moon, Mt Prospect, Dl., assignor to Zenith Radio
Corporation, Glenview, Dl.
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304^1
Int a? H04B 1/26
U.S. a. 455—179 5 Claims
1. In a television receiver having a tuner which is tunable in
response to a tuning voltage and in which an oscillator pro-
vides signal injection to a mixer, an improved oscillator, com-
prising:
April 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
777
a tuning network continuously tunable in response to said
tuning voltage;
transistor means coupled to the tuning network for establish-
ing oscillations therein;
a biasing network for establishing a given operating current
in said transistor means; and
6-) 22-N +IJV
4,380,829
SIMPLIFIED DOUBLE BALANCED FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
David M. SteTcnaon, Topsfield, Man^ and Gale L. Flaaden,
Dover-Foxcroft, Me^ assignors to Varian Associates, Inc^
Palo Alto, Calif.
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,499
Int a.' H04B 1/26; H03H 7/42
UJS. a. 455—327 17 ClaioH
LO/HIGH HISH/SUP V,
BAND BAND
SWITCH SWITCH
circuit means coupled to the biasing network and responsive
to the tuning voltage for changing the operating current in
said transistor means so as to increase the oscillator's signal
injection level to the mixer at values of tuning voltage
which correspond to relatively low channel numbers.
4,380,828
UHF MOSFET MIXER
Frederick H. Moon, Mount Prospect, 111., assignor to Zenith
Radio Corporation, Glenview, 111.
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,136
Int. a.3 H04B 1/26
U.S. a. 455—319 8 Oaims
y^M
r{^XO
1. In a UHF television receiver tuner, the improvement
comprising:
a tuned circuit including a varactor diode;
a mixer field effect transistor having an input gate electrode
characterized by an input parasitic capacitance;
capacitance means coupled in series between said input gate
electrode and said tuned circuit;
inductance means coupled in shunt between said input gate
electrode and a point of reference potential and having a
value of inductance for providing, in association with said
capacitance means and with the input parasitic capaci-
tance of said field effect transistor a resonant frequency
below the lowest channel frequency in the UHF fre-
quency band; and
means developing and coupling a local oscillator signal to
the input gate electrode of said mixer field effect transistor
via said inductance means.
INPUT^.
IF
OUTPUT
la JF^F-16
INPUT
8. Compact, simplified assembly for microwave frequency
converter, comprising:
a generally flat dielectric substrate having first and second
faces;
a diode bridge defining first and second opposite comer
pairs and mounted on said first face;
a first pair of flat conductors on said first face, each extend-
ing in a first path outwardly from a respective comer of
said first opposite comer pair of said bridge;
a second pair of flat conductors on said first face, each and
extending in a second path outwardly from a respective
comer of said second opposite comer of said bridge;
a third flat conductor on said second face extending along
said first path, so as to be opposed to said first pair of
conductors on said first face;
a fourth generally flat conductor on said second face extend-
ing along said second path so as to be opposed to said
second pair of conductors on said first face;
said third and fourth conductors on said second face being in
electrical isolation from each other;
and a pair of fifth flat conductors on one of said faces electri-
cally isolated from conductors extending along said first
and second paths each of said fifth conductors extending
from a respective comer of one of said bridge opposite
comer pairs along said one face to a respective location
spaced from said bridge, each of said fifth conductors
passing through at a corresponding one of said locations
and extending over the other of said faces to join in a
junction, wherefrom a heterodyned output signal is ob-
tained when a radio frequency signal and a local oscillator
signal are supplied to the conductors, respectively, at ends
of said first and second paths distal said bridge.
4,380330
MICROWAVE UP-CONVERTER
Maurice Marchaiid, and Christian PetUcan, both of Coiombes,
France, asstgnors to IJV1.T. Radio ProfessioneUc, Coiombes,
France
FUed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,724
Claims priority, appUcatioa France, Jul. 18, 1980, 80 15906
lat a.J H04B 1/26
VS. a. 455—327 6 Claims
1. An up converter for mixing a first radio-frequency wave
with a second ultrahigh-frequency wave and for obtaining a
third ultrahigh-frequency wave, which comprises:
a mixer diode bridge;
a coil for feeding the first wave to the mixer diode bridge;
a microstrip ring;
778
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
a first microstrip waveguide for feeding the second wave to
this ring;
a second and a third microstrip waveguide for connecting
the diode bridge to the ring;
^..r
of said substrate, said bottomside sections having spaced
ends proximate the spaced ends of said first and second
pairs of secondary conductors and said bottomside sec-
tions extending oppositely away therefrom; and
a diode mixer having first and second separate, isolated
sections, said first section comprising a first diode pair
interconnecting the first and second conductors of said
first secondary conductor pair and the bottomside section
of said fifth conductor at coplanar connection points on
the bottomside of said substrate for heterodyne modula-
tion product signal generation, said second section com-
prising a second diode pair interconnecting the third and
fourth conductors of said second secondary conductor
pair and the bottomside section of said sixth conductor at
coplanar connection points on the bottomside of said
substrate for heterodyne modulation product signal gener-
ation.
a fourth microstrip waveguide for extracting the third wave
from the ring.
4^0,831
SYMMETRIC MICROWAVE MIXER WITH IMPROVED
ISOLATION
Ben R. Hallford, Wylie, Tex., assignor to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,405
Int. a.J H04B 1/26; H03H 7/42
U.S. a. 455-327 n Qaims
1. Balun coupled microwave circuit layout and structure
comprising:
a dielectric substrate;
ground plane means on a bottomside of said substrate;
a first balun secondary conductor pair having first and sec-
ond conductors and a second balun secondary conductor
pair having third and fourth conductors, each conductor
pair being on the bottomside of said substrate with the
respective conductors of each of said first and second
pairs extending from said ground plane means towards
each other and terminating in respective spaced ends
facing each other at a separation gap therebetween;
a transmission line on the topside of said substrate juxtaposed
said first and second pairs of secondary conductors for
interacting therewith to dual balun couple a field balanced
between the first secondary conductor pair across said gap
and a field balanced between the second secondary con-
ductor pair across said gap;
fifth and sixth conductors having topside coplanar sections
on the topside of said substrate and having respective
linking sections extending down through said substrate to
respective bottomside coplanar sections on the bottomside
4,380,832
PORTABLE RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE
HAVING SIGNAL PROCESSING ORCUIT WITH
PRESETTING FUNCTION
Koichi Nagata, and Shiqjiro Umetsu, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,448
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 31, 1980, 55-
108571[U]
Int. a.3 H04B 1/16
U.S. a. 455—343 7 Qaims
iUUl
\ :i>cuii
JI%
«
J ,
SISUK
C.OCi 05C
— J —
f -
1
K CC
IL
1. A pwrtable radio communication device comprising:
(a) battery means;
(b) voltage converter means connected to said battery means
for converting the voltage of said battery means to an-
other voltage;
(c) processing circuit means, having a presetting terminal
and a power supply terminal to which said other voltage
is supplied, for detecting and processing received signals;
(d) presetting circuit means provided between the output of
said volage converter means and said presetting terminal
for setting said processing circuit means in an initial state
in response to said other voltage; said presetting circuit
having at least one element which is chargeable and dis-
chargeable; and
(e) power supply switch means having a first terminal con-
nected to said battery means, a second terminal connected
to a reference potential point, a third terminal connected
to the input of said presetting circuit either directly or by
way of a low impedance means and a connecting means
for selectively connecting pairs of said terminals; the
voltage of said battery means being supplied in response to
a connection of said first and second terminals, and the
voltage supply from said battery means being stopped and
a discharge time of said element in said presetting circuit
being set at a sufficiently low value so that said processing
means is securely maintained in said initial ftate when
battery voltage is supplied initially or after prior battery
voltage stoppage in response to a connection of said sec-
ond and third terminals.
DESIGNS
APRIL 19, 1983
268,624
VETERINARIAN VEST
Gary B. Taylor, 1404 Hereford Hwy., Canyon, Tex. 79015
FUed Feh. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,748
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2—02
U.S. a. D2— 190
268,626
COMBINED SKI AND BOOT CARRIER
Joseph A. Spollino, 1453 N. Qeveland Ave., Orange, Calif.
92667, and Ronald A. Spollino, 4255 S. Tamanis St #109, Las
Vegas, Nev. 89109
Filed Not. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,262
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 99
U.S. CI. D3— 36
268,625
COWBOY BOOT 268,627
Harry Vise, Nashville, Tcnn., assignor to Texas Boot Company, LUGGAGE
Qncinnati, Ohio Ted Stark, Jersey City, N J., assignor to M A M Luggage Co.,
FUed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,890 Inc., Jersey City, N J.
Term of patent 14 years Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,424
Int. a. D2— 04 Term of patent 14 years
U.S.a. D2— 273 Inta. D3— 0/
U.S. a. D3— 71
780
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
268,628 268 <i3i
T-<i c*. I, f r^*. J^y^^^^^ _ ROCKABLE INFANT SEAT
t„f iLltTL S'', ' ■*"*"**' to M A M Luggage Co., Edward M. Johnson, Jr., Mattcson, lU., assignor to Kolcraft
inc., Jersey uty, N J. Products, Inc., Chicago, lU.
FJed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,002 pUed Feb. 26, 1981. Ser. No. 238,457
U^ CI D3_71 I"*- ^- '^^^^
U.i. CI. U3— 71 US Q D6_10
268,629
I.UGGAGE 2^ -3
"^tnc^^^r^y oiv^N j'"''' ""'*"" *" ^ * ^ '^"'*^' '^' ^'^^^'^ "^'^G CHAIR OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
^•' ''"^'rnXfX 1981, Ser. No. 251,094 ""'^^ ^^ ^S jT2?l'9JrL^'o'^27t'^^^^^ ''"'
LJ.S.U. D3-71 U.S.a. D6-11
^pBBatiHauuBaB^piiHiiiiiiBtiitt^^^^
268,630 2^ ^,-
PORTABLE BOOSTER SEAT unnn^rTvAiu
''^Srr^Zrm"^"'^"'''"^*""*^'^^^^'^^^ ^^ «*• «-^' PO^nS.'iif^ugUs M. Lane, P.O.
ration, "^^W, Dl. Box 657, both of DunneUon, Fla. 32630
^Tnn of rt^it^l v^ '^' ™^'*- "'^'- ^•»- "'°^2' *'«'»• 21. 1^79. Tlds application Dec.
Into ^1^7 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,236
U.S. a. D6-9 Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 0/
U.S. a. D6— 49
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
781
268,634 268,637
MOUNTABLE RECORD DISPLAY DEVICE CO^a)IMENT MILL
Dennis J. Fontana, 18 Davison PL, Rockviile Centre, N.Y. David A. Cowan, London, England, assignor to Cole A Mason,
11570 USA, Ltd^ Great Neck, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 192,985 FUed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,845
Term of patent 14 years Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 31, 1980,
Int. a. D6— 06; DU—02 993381
U.S. a. D6— 114 Term of patent 14 years
Inta. D07— 06
U.S. a. D'— 53
268,635
DISPOSABLE DLAPER RACK
Mary A. Redwine, P.O. Box 17399, EucUd, Ohio
FUed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,954
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. 1)6—04
U.S. a. D6— 130
268,638
NUTMEG GRATER
William E. Bounds, 3737 W. 240th St., Torrance, Calif. 90505
FUed Oct 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,938
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D07— 06
U.S. a. D7— 53
268,636
CHAIR PANEL
James W. HuU, Huntington Beach, CaUf., assignor to H. W.
HuU ft Sons, Inc., Gardena, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 166,377, Jul. 7, 1980. This appUcation Jan.
29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,965
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D6— 99
U.S. a. D6— 193
■"^^
I\
?
782
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
268,639 268,642
r^ .J „ , PUMPKIN CARVING KNIFE COMBINED POWER SUPPLY, TOOL HOLDER AND
Donald K. Jobaiuiseii, 26110 Michigan Ave., Inluter, Mich. SUPPORT THEREFOR
**^** v'i^ A 1 i<K>. c ,»c ,o« .« ''*" ^' ^'*'*""' ^^"^^ ^P™** '^«*' "ss'gnor to Pace Incorpo-
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,535 rated. Laurel, Md.
Term of patent 14 years FOed May 5, 1980, Ser. No. 146,287
Ii«nn7 1^1 Int. a. mj-03 Term of patent 14 years
U.S.a.D7-143 Int.aD8-99
U.S. a. D8— 71
T^-B
268,640 268 643
TRIM BLADE FOR LAWNS AND THE LIKE COMBINED CHECK RAIL LOCK AND KEEPER
Anthony G. Bonforte, P.O. Box 1844, Rancho Santa Fe, Calif. Donald L. Anderson, Owatonna, Minn., assignor to Truth Incor-
'^""' porated, Owatonna, Minn.
FUed Aug. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 178,023 FUed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 220,297
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D8— 08 U.S. a. d8— 337
268,644
COMBINATION LOCK FENCE LEVER WITH
ECCENTRIC ROLLER NOSE
268,641 Harry C. Miller, Nicfaolasyille, Ky., assignor to Sargent A
TRIM BLADE FOR LAWNS AND THE LIKE Greenleaf, Inc., Nicholasrille, Ky.
Anthony G. Bonforte, P.O. Box 1844, Rancho Santa Fe, Calif. FUed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,258
'2069 Term of patent 14 years
FUed Aug. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 178,376 Int. Q. D8— 07
Term of patent 14 years U.S. O. D8— 343
Int a. D8— <3i, DIS— 03
U.S. a. D8— 08
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
783
268,645 268,648
PACKAGING CONTAINER FOR FOOD PACKAGING CONTAINER
WyattL. Phillips, and Ronald D. Schooler, both of Tulsa, Okla., Sven O. S. Stark, Rydsgird, Sweden, assignor to Tetra Pak
assignors to QuikTrip Corporation, Tulsa, Okla. International AB, Lund, Sweden
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,086 FUed Apr. 11, 1979, Ser. No. 28,995
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int.a. D9— 05 Int.a. D9— Oi
U.S. a. D9— 341 U.S. a. D9— 416
268,646
PACKAGING TRAY OR THE LIKE
Isaac J. Hudson, Jr., Bayboro, Pamlico County, N.C. 28515
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,365
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9—03
U.S. a. D9— 347
268,649
PACKAGING CONTAINER
Gerhard Adamson, West M ilford, and Walter F. Rousseau, Glen
Rock, both of N.J., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
FUed Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,814
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9—03
U.S. a. D9— 416
268,650 ^
268,647 DISPENSER CAP
COSMETIC CONTAINER I>«le J. Kirstine, San Juan Capistrano, Calif., assignor to Kir-
Ted I. Kinraford, Memphis, Tenn., assignor to Plough, Inc., stine/Hendricks, Irrine, Calif.
Memphisfxenn. F"«> Fe»». 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,698
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,700 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years !"*• ^1- D*— ^7
Inta.D9-0; UJS.a.D9-450
U.S.a. D9— 389
784
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
268,651 268,653
rvfFANT THERMOMETER ORNAMENT
Barbara Doyle, 8585 Burton Way, Suite 310, Los Angeles, Calif. George C. Sun, 530 Rhode Island Ave., Cherry HiU, N J. 08002
90048 FUed Not. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,571
FUed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,503 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int CI. Dll— 05
Int. a. DIO— 0^ U.S. a. Dll— 121
U.S. a. DIO— 57
268,654
PLAQUE WITH MINNOW
Charles H. AUgood, II, 3886 Healy Rd., Memphis, Tenn. 38111
FUed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,823
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— 02
U.S. a. Dll— 134
268,652
MEDAL
Emlle Rousseau, Paris, France, assignor to Helior S.A., Geneva,
Switzerland
FUed Not. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 209,117
Claims priority, appUcation Hague, May 23, 1980, DM/000
202
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— Oi
U.S. a. Dll— 102
268,655
STAG-BEETLE HGURE
Tatsuya Kodaka, 25-6 Wakamiya 1-chome, Nakano-ku, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,841
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— 02
U.S. a. Dll— 162
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
785
268,656
BEETLE nCURE
Tatsoya Kodaks, 25^ Wakamiya l-chomc, Nakano-ka, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,842
Term of patent 14 yean
Int a. Dll— 02
U.S. a. Dll— 162
268,658
AUTOMOBILE
Moriey L. Smith, Jr., Beaconsfleld, Canada, avignor to Guilloa,
Smitii, Marqoart A Anocks Ltee, Montreal, Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 38,869, May 14, 1979, Pat No.
Des. 260,627. This appUcation May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,401
Claims priority, appUcation Canada, May 2, 1979, 02-OS-79-1
Term of patent 14 yean
Int a. D12— 0*
U.S. a. D12— 91
268,659
AUTOMOBILE
Merlin F. Rename, New York, N.Y., assignor to Standard Mo-
tors, Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,849
Term of patent 14 yean
Int. a. Dll— 08
U.S. a. D12— 92
268,657
BUTTERFLY FIGURE
Tatsuya Kodaka, 25-6, Wakamiya 1-chome, Nakano-ka, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,976
Term of patent 14 yean
Int a. Dll— 02
U.S. a. Dll— 162
268,660
MOTORTRICYCLE
Yasahiro Ohba, Kamifaknoka, Japan, assignor to Honda GUcen
Kogyo Kahnshiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jal. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,402
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 24, 1980, 55-1841
Term of patent 14 yean
Int a. D12— 77
U.S. a. D12— 110
786
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
268,661 268,663
STROLLER TIRE FOR A VEHICLE WHEEL
Philip D. Bart, 9864 NW. 13th O., Coral Springs, Fla. 33065 Brian S. Bennett, Barton-Under-Needwood, England, assignor
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,642 to Dunlop Limited, London, England
Term of patent 14 years FUed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 185,958
Int. a. D12— 72 Qaims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Mar. 22, 1980,
U.S. a. D12— 129 994168
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 75
U.S. a. D12— 145
268,662
TIRE FOR A VEHICLE WHEEL
Hisashi Shirashoji, Kobe, Japan, assignor to Dunlop Limited,
London, England
FUed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,001
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 19, 1980, 55-001121
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 75 268,664
U.S. a. D12— 140 MOTORIZED REAR VIEW MIRROR
Bernard C. Sharp, White Plains, N.Y., assignor to Parker-Han-
nifin Corporation, Shelton, Conn.
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,960
/ .«!e=:^\ \ ^®'™ ®' P«tent 14 years
/ / /\ \\ \ Int. a. D12— 76
/ / / \ \\\ \ - ^ U.S. a. D12— 187
APRIL 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
787
268,665 26S,66S
MOTORIZED TRUCK MIRROR CONTROL PANEL FOR ELEVATOR SYSTEMS
Bernard C. Sharp, White Plains, N.Y., assignor to Parker-Han- Ernest M. Bevilaqua, WUton; Allan L. McCroskery, Weston,
nifin Corporation, Shelton, Conn. both of Conn., and Theodore N. Knerr, New York, N.Y.,
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,961 assignors to Otis Elevator Company, Farmington, Conn.
Term of patent 14 years FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,841
Int CI. D12— 76 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D12-187 Int. a. D13-0i, DlO-06
U.S. a. D13— 35
268,666
HEAT SINK OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Marvin F. Moore, Carrollton, Tex., assignor to Thermalloy
Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,935
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 23
cac
zna
za
in '" ".'".v:.
rrnr
im
268,667
HEAT SINK OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
William D. Jordan, Dallas, and Marvin F. Moore, CarroUton,
both of Tex., assignors to ThermaUoy Incorporated, Dallas,
Tex.
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 264,936
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 23
268,669
COMBINED SWITCH HOUSING AND INTEGRAL
MOUNTING BRACKET
Thomas J. Hoice, Portland, and Charles M. Huckins, Tigard,
both of Oreg., assignors to Sentrol, Inc., Portland, Oreg.
FUed Aug. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 177,521
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 38
r— r
lEX:
-TTTf
V-rm:
JSJJL
788
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
268,670 268 672
M.« I y^^'^^SUAL SHEET PLAYER ADAPTER MOUNT TOR MICROPHONES AND THE
Maaao Iwaoka; Yousuke Igeta, and Fumio Kobayashi, aU of UKE
S!r: ri*r"H "f T"u*1 ?^*" ,^' ^*^ ^-h"*"**! Mathew A. McPherson, 5817 OUnger Rd., Edioa, Minn. 55436
iSS; ^ r;Si c'"'''^ ''"r FaedJul.3,1980,Sei:No.i«S5
FUed Oct 6, 1980, Ser. No. 193,893 Term of patent 14 yean
Term of patent 14 years Int, q D14— 99
IT e ^ .. . J°«- CI. D14-0/ U.S. a. D14-13
U.S. a. D14— 1
268,673
LOUDSPEAKER
Takekazu Igima, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Pioneer Kahuahilfj
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,130
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 2, 1980, 55-21912
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 07
U.S. a. D14— 34
268,671
VIDEO TAPE CASSETTE
Toshio Ohya, Tokyo, and Masaharu Kobayashi, Ohmiya, both of
Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,640
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 23, 1980, 55-25018
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 07
U.S. a. D14— 11
f
I. "1 -^
c
I:
268,674
DECORATIVE SHELL COVER FOR TELEPHONES
John S. Jordan, RosweU, Ga., assignor to Jordan Concepts, Inc.
RosweU, Ga.
FUed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,908
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D14— Oi
UJS. a. D14— 60
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
789
-^ 268,675
RADIO RECEIVER
WUliam J. Hass, 3707 Russett La., Northbrook, lU. 60062
FUed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,342
Term of patent 14 yean
Int. a. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 68
268,677
ELECTRONIC COMPUTER
Yoshihisa Ohie; Aldra Esaki; Nfasi^i Sawada, and Tsutomn
Yamasaki, all of Osaka, Japan, assignors to Sharp Corpora-
tion, Osaka, Japan
FUed Jnl. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 166,896
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D14— 02
U.S. a. D14— 103
268,676 268,678
VIDEO CAMERA WITH VIDEO TAPE RECORDER BALER
Toshio Ohya, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Sony Corporation, Edward L. Swenson, Hesston; AUen K. Rotii, Whitewater, Larry
Tokyo, Japan B. Jones, Antiiony, and Richard J. Robbias, Derby, all of
FUed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,307 Kans., assignors to Hesston Corporation, Hesston, Kans.
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 12, 1980, 55-023426 FUed Oct 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,354
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int.a.D14-0i Inta.D15-<?i
U.S.a.D14-78 U.S.a.D15-27
790
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
268,679
HOUSING FOR A PORTABLE BAG CLOSING SEWING
MACHINE
David B. Johnson, and Verdell H. Schroeder, both of Minneapo-
lis, Minn., assignors to Bliss A Laughlin Industries Incorpo-
rated, Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Feb. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 120,549
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 06
U.S. a. D15— 76
268,682
SORTER FOR ELECTROSTATIC COPIER
Kenichi Nakade, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Company,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,275
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 11, 1980, 55-9351
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— 03
U.S. a. D16— 32
^-/ :^
268,683
PAIR OF SAFETY SPECTACLES
268,680
MIRROR STEREOSCOPE
Francesco Smargiassi, 21 Greenshields St., Albany, Western
Australia, Australia I^^e £• Tenny, Vernon, Conn., assignor to American Optical
Filed Jun. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 161,283 Corporation, Southbridge, Mass.
Term of patent 14 years F'led Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,278
Int. CI. D16— 99 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D16— 12
U.S. a. D16— 102
Int. a. D16— 06
c»ir»^'^^ 268,684
SLIDE VIEWER PAIR OF SPECTACLES
Rudolph Hanke, Monheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to David P. Chuboff, North Barrington; Francis J. Greb, Palatine,
Hama Hamaphot KG, Monheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany and Tom Takeuchi, Mount Prospect, aU of lU., assignors to
FUed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,432 Bausch A Lomb Incorporated, Rochester, N.Y.
Term of patent 14 years piled Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 221,079
U.S.a.D16-17 Int.a.D16-06
U.S. a. D16— 102
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
791
268,685 268,688
GUITAR HEAD GAME BOARD OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Makoto Seshimoto, Hamamatsu, Japan, assignor to Tokai Robert L. Johnson, 3655 Pruneridge #261, Santa Clara, Calif.
Gakki Company, Ltd., Hamamatsu, Japan 95051
FUed Jan. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,679 Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,326
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D17— Oi Int. Q. D21— 07
U.S. a. D17— 20 U.S. CI. D21— 34
268,686
CHILDREN'S CLOCK
Dieter Wolf, Hattersheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
VDO Adolf Schindling AG, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,544
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D19— 07
U.S. a. D19— 64
1
s
i
SqS
p
oimn
ff
i
r^
.Sr i~iN^ i ^r
o
wO%
•
j-->T^^lrSj^^
o»o
WOi^
dibwawni
268,687
STIRRUP FOR SUSPENDING BOOKS, PAPERS AND
THE LIKE ON THE FACE OF AN INCLINED DRAWING
BOARD
James C. Rogers, 144 Main St., Lakeville, Mass. 02346
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,827
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D19— 99
U.S. a. D19— 91
268,689
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT FOR ELECTRONIC GAME
Roy M. Nishi, San Jose, Calif., assignor to Atari, Inc., Sunny-
vale, Calif.
FUed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,651
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21~48
r
W'
k(J '(J
792
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
268,690
TOY DIVING BOARD
WUliam G. Bennett, P.O. Box 393, SUdell, La. 70458
FUed Jon. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 156,053
Term of patent 14 years
Int CL D21—0J
U.S. a. D21— 109
268,692
STUFFED DRAGON-UKE ANIMAL
Barbara A. D. Thomdike, Meredith, N.H., assignor to Annalee
Mobilitee Dolls, Inc., Meredith, N.H.
FUed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,046
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 148
268,693
OUTDOOR RECREATIONAL DEVICE
Michael L. Works, 7814 N. Blvd., Tampa, Fla. 33604
FUed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 154,766
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D21--0i
U.S. a. D21— 244
268,691
GOLF CLUB
Christopher K. CoUins, 61 HUton St., Manchester, Ml 2EJ,
Rnglanrf
FUed Not. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,755
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, May 3, 1980,
994766
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D21— 02
U.S. a. D21— 217
268,694
KNIFE
Lasse Liukko, Lahti, and Pentti Maonu, Rovaniemi, both of
Finland, assignors to J. Marttiinin Pnukkotehdas Oy,
Rovaniemi, Finland
FUed Apr. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 28,711
Claims priority, application Finland, Oct 11, 1978, 63078
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D8— 05
U.S. a. D22— 1
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
793
268,695
DEER SCENT DISPENSER
John W. Kolf, Rolling Meadows, lU^ assignor to K. G. M.
Corporation, Palatine, 111.
Filed Not. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,382
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 99
U.S. a. D22— 99
268,697
GUM-CLEANING IMPLEMENT
Michelene F. Bukowski, Los Angeles, Calif., assignor to Mark
F. Bukowski, Salt Lake Oty, Utah
FUed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,412
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D2S— 02
U.S. a. D24— 36
268,698
IV SPIKE AND DROP FORMER HOUSING
Wallace L. Knute, San Diego, Calif., assignor to Ivac Corpora-
tion, San Diego, Calif.
FUed Not. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204,774
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D24— o;
U.S. a. D24— 52
268,696
SCALP HYPOTHERMIA CAP
Mark Bowen, 919 Chantilly Rd., Los Angeles, Calif. 90024
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,034
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24-^2
U.S. a. D24— 34
Pierre M,
France
268,699
HERNLAL BELT
Sailhen, Lyons, France, assignor to Ormihl, Lyons,
FUed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,363
Term of patent 14 years
Int CI D24— M. 99
US. a. D24— 64
794
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 19, 1983
268,700 268,703
HERNIAL BELT COMBINED SOFFIT AND FASOA PANEL
Pierre M. Sailhen, Lyons, France, assignor to Ormihl, Lyons, Robert Lloyd-Jones, RedcUffe, Australia, assignor to Salkhad
France Pty. Ltd., Brisbane, Australia
FUed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,362 Filed Nov. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,264
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2A~-04. 99 Int. Q. D2S—02
U.S. a. D24— 64 U.S. Q. D25— 55
268,704
268,701 REFLECTOR
HERNIAL BELT Harry E. James, Jr., 75 Forbes Rd., Bedford, Ohio 44146
Pierre M. Sailhen, Lyons, France, assignor to Ormihl, Lyons, F»l«l J«l- 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,313
Prance Term of patent 14 years
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,364 Int. CI. D26— 05, 02
Term of patent 14 years U.S. CI. D26— 118
Int. a. D24— O/. 99 '
U.S. a. D24— 64
- V
c
'1--
268,702 * 268,705
PORTABLE GARAGE COMBINED AQUARIUM AND COVER
Harry L. Todd, 11233 Tierrasanta Blvd., San Diego, Calif. 92124 Jessie R. Clayton, P.O. Box 782, Mabank, Tex. 75147
FUed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 176,845 Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 193,969
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D25— Oi Int.a. D30— 2
U.S. a. D25— 22 U.S. Q. D30— 6
April 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
795
268,706 268,707
SHOE SOLE CLEANING MACHINE nLTER FOR AUTOMATIC WASHER AGITATOR OR
Max MuUer, 10920 W. 100 Terr., Overland Park, Kans. 66214, SIMILAR ARTICLE
and Junes F. Com, 5032 Clark Dr., Roeland Park, Kans. William Ohmann, and Edward E. Wiessner, both of St. Joseph,
66205 Mich., assignors to Whirlpool Corporation, Benton Harbor,
FUed Not. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,871 Mich.
Term of patent 14 years FUed Jul. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 165,133
Int. a. DIS— 05 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D32— 01 Int. Q. DIS— 05
U.S. a. D32— 26
268,708
WALL COVERING
Florence J. Marganne, Paris, France, assignor to Peinture Co-
rona S.A., Valenciennes, France
FUed Not. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,644
Oaims priority, appUcation France, May 9, 1980, 801,516
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DOS— 06
U.S. a. D92— 25
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 19TH DAY OF APRIL, 1983
Note. — Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Abbott, Frederick H. Trailer hitch cycle rack. 4,380,344, CI.
28(M02.000.
Abbott, Joseph L. Thermal barrier for windows. 4,380,140, CI.
52-202.000.
Abduganiev, Abdurakhim; Tikhonov, Valentin N.; Shlykov, Gennady
N.; Zhestkov, Vitaly I.; Krjuk, Timur P.; Mukhin, Viktor M.; and
Tikhonov, Jury N. Device for withdrawing rotor of spindleless
spinning machine to inoperative position. 4,380,143, CI. 57-89.000.
Abraham, Uwe; Jakubowski, Karl-Heinz; and Koster, Wilhelm. Hold-
ing a planetary gear carrier relative to an axle. 4,380,274, CI.
180-308.000.
Adamek, Manfred; and Rinneburger, Klaus, to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion. Flexible disk drive. 4,380,783, CI. 360-99.000.
Adamis, Robert J. Cooking cone. 4,380,190, CI. 99-345.000.
Adler, Ralph P. I.; Gorsuch, Thomas J.; Murty, Yellapu V.; and Woro-
nicki, Alexander R., to GTE Laboratories Incorporated. Apparatus
for double roller chill casting of continuous metal foil. 4,380,262, CI.
164-423.000.
Advance Biofactures Corp.: See —
Wiesner, Karel; and Tsai, Thomas Y. R., 4,380,624, CI. 536-5.000.
Agency of Industrial Science and Technology: See —
Nakamura, Osamu; Ogino, Isao; and Kodama, Tenio, 4,380,575, CI.
429-13.000.
Ager, John W., to FMC Corporation. Methyl isocyanate emission
control. 4,380,665, CI. 564-61.000.
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Engelsmann, Dieter; HofTacker, Franz; Kovacic, Guido; Lermann,
Peter; Luhrig, Hermann; and Wagner, Karl, 4,380,382, CI.
354-275.000.
Aggregates Equipment, Inc.: See —
de Bniijn, Hans, 4,380,282, CI. 198-318.000.
Agrawal, Purushottam D., to Monsanto Company. Forming non-cylin-
drical articles from preforms of polyalkylene terephthalate. 4,380,526,
CI. 264-537.000.
Ahem, John; Farmer, Wayne; Hawes, David; and McEvoy, Herbert J.,
Jr., to Fairfield Optical Company, Inc. Optometric device. 4,380,379,
CI. 351-106.000.
Ainoura, Masato. Shaving cutter. 4,380,411, CI. 407-27.000.
Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Masai, Hiroto, 4,380,279, CI. 192-58.00B.
Aizawa, Tatsuo: See —
Kato, Yoshiaki; Fushida, Akira; Ueda, Yasuo; Tohi, Yasusuke; and
Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4,380,196, CI. 101-453.000.
Matsumoto, Shoji; Matsui, Toshikazu; Ikeda, Toshimitsu; Kozuka,
Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi; and Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4,380,579,
CI. 430-126.000.
Akzona Incorporated: See —
Siggel, Erhard; Wick, Gerhard; Linhart, Heinz; and Kessler, Erich,
4,380,594, CI. 521-182.000.
Alejandro Llera, Santos A. A., to Precision Plastic Products Corpora-
tion. Tamper proof closure. 4,380,299, CI. 215-252.000.
Algieri, Aldo A.: See —
Crenshaw, Ronnie R.; and Algieri, Aldo A., 4,380,638, CI.
548-135.000.
Crenshaw, Ronnie R.; and Algieri, Aldo A., 4,380,639, CI.
548-135.000.
Alker, Dietrich E., to Wandel U. Goltermann GmbH &. Co. System for
monitoring the operation of individual connectors in a multipath
coupling network. 4,380,731, CI. 324-51.000.
Allan Air Products, Inc.: See —
Ludwig, David, 4,380,270, CI. 173-163.000.
Allard, Pierre- Yves; and Leconte, Gilles, to Regie Nationale des Usines
Renault. Speed control for an automobile. 4,380,799, CI. 364-426.000.
Allen, David O.; and Wombold, Harry A. E., to Buckeye Molding
Company. Molded container and opening means therefore. 4,380,303,
CI. 220-276.000.
Allerton, George L., to Western Electric Company, Inc. Measuring
magnetic intensity independent of speed in a succession of moving
magnetic strips. 4,380,734, CI. 324-225.000.
Allied Corporation: See—
Mathew, Cbempolil T.; and Ulmer, Harry E., 4,380,660, CI.
556422.000.
Allis-Chalmers Corporation: See—
Chacour, SeUm A.; and Degnan, John R., 4,380,401, CI.
384-438.000.
Allison, Dd>ra L.: See—
Witzel, Bruce E.; Finke, Paul E.; and Allison, Debra L., 4,380,645,
CI. 548^30.000.
Alps Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Hiroee, Yasuyuki; Shimaoka, Motohiro; Saito, Shoichiro; and
Kowaguchi, Tom. 4.380,782, CI. 360-99.000.
Hon. Fumihisa; and Miyajima. Mikio, 4,380,195, CI. 101-93.170.
Alsthom-Atlantique: 5m —
Roger, Gillet; and Henri. Nithart, 4,380,713, CI. 3 10-2 14.000.
Ambrus, Valeria; and Karsai, Henrik, to Ganz Muszer Muvek. Equip-
ment for the measurement of evaporation and/or precipitation.
4,380,248, CI. 137-428.000.
American Home Products Corporation: See —
Sarantakis, Dimitrios; and Dvonch, William, 4,380,535, Q.
424-177.000.
America's Cup, Inc.: See —
Harr, Robert G.; and Soli, Gaylord T., 4,380,441, CI. 441-112.000.
Ammermann, Eberhard: See —
Sauter, Hubert; Ammermann, Eberhard; Rentzea, Costin; Zeeh,
Bemd; Jung, Johann; and Pommer, Emst-Heinrich, 4,380,546.
CI. 424-269.000.
AMP Incorporated: See —
Asick, John C; Berry, Donald A.; and Lucius, John E., 4,380,361,
CI. 339-9 l.OOR.
Brandewie, Joseph E.; and Hart, Granville S., 4,380.117, CI.
29-742.000.
Driver. Donald E.; and Kaufman, John W.. 4,380.118, CI.
29-747.000.
Parmer, Kenneth R.; and Supe, William J., 4,380,360. CI. 339-
17.0CF.
Smith. Terry J.. 4,380,171, CI. 73-161.000.
Amsel, Friedrich- Wilhelm, to Carl Freudenberg, Firma. Flexible cou-
pling. 4,380,442. CI. 464-93.000.
Anatros Corporation: See —
Danby. Hal C. 4,380,235, CI. 604-251.000.
Anderson. George C. Container having an integral handle an a closure.
4,380.304. CI. 220-306.000.
Ando, Kunio: See —
Kaku, Masaro; Sawaki, Yasumasa; and Ando, Kunio, 4,380,729, CI.
323-285.000.
Ando, Takao: See —
Yoshikumi, Chikao; Ohmura, Yoshio; Hirose, Fumio; Ikuzawa,
Masanori; Matsunaga, Kenichi; Fujii, Takayoshi; Ohhara,
Minom; and Ando, Takao, 4.380.536. CI. 424-180.000.
Andress. Dennis I., to Manitowoc Company. Inc.. The. Connector pin
handling device. 4.380,107. CI. 29-252.000.
Andrews, Alfred G.; and Sorensen, Charles L.. to Lake Eyelet Manu-
facturing Company, Inc. Lipstick-type cosmetic case with display
position. 4.380.402. CI. 401-74.000.
Andrjuschenko. Ivan A.: See —
Shevakin. Jury F.; Shpichinetsky. Efim S.; Fedorenko. Valentina
P.; Efremov. Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky, losif A.; Anikecv, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov. Anatoly P.; ShvarU, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko. Alexandr D., 4.380,528, CI. 42O-505.000.
Anikecv. Evgeny F.: See —
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky. Efmi S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov. Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko.
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky. losif A.; Anikecv, Evgeny F.; Ivanov.
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528. CI. 420-505.000.
Aoki. Hideya: See —
Ohmata, Ken; Aoki. Hideya; and Tamura, Naoyuki, 4,380,368, CI.
350-117.000.
Aoki, Katashi. Device for cutting sprue of pariaon with bottom.
4,380,423, CI. 425-289.000.
Anikawa Ka^u Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kawatam, Kimio; Tsujimoto, Shigenori; and Kaji, Ryoji, 4,380,475,
CI. 106238.000.
Arbuckle, Kenneth H.: See —
Tooke-Kirby, David H.; Perry. Richard E.; and Arbuckle, Kenneth
H., 4,380,599, CI. 525-370.000.
Arena, Blaise J., to UOP Inc. Hydrogenation of saccharides. 4,380,679,
CI. 568-863.000.
Arena, Blaise J., to UOP Inc. Method for hydrogenating aqueous
solutions of carbohydrates. 4,380,680, CI. 568-863.000.
Arizona Chemical Company: See —
Ruckel, Erwin R.; and Epstein, Martin, 4,380,513, Q. 260-104.000.
Amdt, William A.; Damrau. Wayne A.; and Gundenoo, Donald J., to
ConsoUdated Papers, Inc. Method and apparatus for measuring the
opacity of sheet material. 4,380,396, CI. 356432.000.
Arnold, Erwin: See —
Gut, Edwin; Arnold, Erwin; and FriedU, Hans, 4,380,492, Q.
204-67.000.
Arnold, Fred E.: See—
Reinhaidt. Brace A.; and Arnold, Fred E.. 4,380,619. CI.
526-2S9.000.
PI 1
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19. 1983
Amstein, Bennett R. Flat pattern for three-dimensional rigid structure.
4,380.133, CI. 46-l.OOL.
Arpin, John, to Arpin Products, Inc. Encapsulating sealant composi-
tions for friable insulation materials. 4,380,595, CI. 524-5.000.
Arpin Products, Inc.: See —
Arpin, John, 4,380,595, CI. 524-5.000.
Arthur D. Little, Inc.: See—
Koocher, Martin, 4,380,587, CI. 436-128.000.
Aruga, Masayoshi: See —
Fukui, Muneo: Konno, Yutaka; Kubota, Yukio; Aruga, Masayoshi;
and Kawata. Hiroitsu, 4,380,534. CI. 424-38.000.
Arvin Industries, Inc.: See —
Eisman, Norman L., 4,380,301, CI. 220-73.000.
Asahi Glass Company, Ltd.: See —
Yoshida, Shohei; and Vogl, Otto. 4.380.643. CI. 548-260.000.
Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Matsuzaki, Kazuhiko; Hamada, Minoru; and Sakurai, Hisaya,
4,380,620, CI. 528-232.000.
Asick, John C; Berry, Donald A.; and Lucius, John E., to AMP Incor-
porated. Electrical connector cover kit. 4,380,361, CI. 339-91.00R.
Aspnes, David E.; and Studna, Ambrose A., to Bell Telephone Labora-
tories, Incorporated. Method of preparing semiconductor surfaces.
4,380,490, CI. 156-662.000.
Ataka, Saburo: See —
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuhani; Imamura, Yoshinori;
Ataka, Saburo; Tanaka, Yasuo; Matsubara, Hirokazu; Takasaki.
Yukio; and Maruyama, Eiichi, 4,380,557, CI. 427-38.000.
Atkins, Ronald L., to United States of America, Navy. Method of
preparing 2-keto-4,6,8,8-tetramethyl-8,9-dihydro-2H-pyrano-(3.2-g)
quinoline. a blue-green laser dye. 4,380,634, CI. 546-89.000.
Atkinson, James K. Fishing lure with vibration producing means.
4,380,132, CI. 43-26.200.
Atlantic Richfield Company: See —
Ecker, Amir L., 4,380,156, CI. 62-235.100.
Netting, David I., 4,380,459, CI. 55-87.000.
Au, Kenneth K., to Motorola, Inc. Switched-supply three-state circuit.
4,380,709, CI. 307-473.000.
Auerbach, David R., to Pitney Bowes Inc. Workpiece moistening
system. 4,380,210. CI. 118-253.000.
Ayers, Ray R., to Shell Oil Company. Jackup platform trailer.
4,380,406. CI. 405-206.000.
Ayotte, Gordon R., to Trim Parts Inc. Adhesive device of felt substrate,
release sheet and adhesive and method. 4,380,563. CI. 428-40.000.
Azanda, Via K.: See —
Karklin, Roman Y.; Rumba, Alma A.; and Azanda, Via K.,
4.380,583, CI. 435-242.000.
Bunch Company, Inc.: See —
Bunch, Earnest B., Jr., 4,380,448, CI. 493-410.000.
F. Goodrich Company, The: See —
Minchak. Robert J.; Kettering. Timothy J.; and Kroenke. William
J., 4,380,617. CI. 526-161.000.
Babcock & Wilcox Company, The: See —
URue, Albert D.; and Wolf, John J., 4,380.202. CI. 110-263.000.
Bachmann, G. Merle; Davis, Charles L.; and Morgan, Annis R., Jr., to
Coca-Cola Company, The. Display panels for vending machines.
4,380,130, CI. 40-584.000.
Bachtiger, Rolf, to Siemens-Albis AG. Multi-channel amplifler appara-
tus. 4,380,766, CI. 343-5.0SW.
Back, Frank G. Episcopic projector. 4,380,380, CI. 353-66.000.
Bahary. William S., to Duracell Inc. Electrochemical cell with gelled
anode. 4,380,578, CI. 429-206.000.
Baitis, A. Erich; and Woolaver, Dennis A., to United States of America,
Navy. Ship roll subilization system. 4,380,206. CI. 114-122.000.
Baker. Donald R.; Barr. Thomas R.; and Smith. Paul C. Jr.. to Blue
Streak Industries, Inc. Earth auger with removable cutting tooth
support structure. 4,380,271, CI. 175-391.000.
Balas, Charles B., Jr.: See—
Folsom, Lawrence R.; Dineen, John J.; Vitale, Nicholas G.; and
Balas, Charles B., Jr., 4,380,152, CI. 60-520.000.
Balz, Gunther W., to Roto-Finish Company, Inc. Self-separating flnish-
ing machine having variable degrees of rotation and vibration, and
method. 4,380,137, CI. 51-163.100.
Balzers Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Kraus, Thaddaus, 4,380,212. CI. 118-720.000.
Bankert, Ralph A., to Hercules Incorporated. Epihalohydrin modified
dicyandiamide-formaldehyde condensates and process for preparing
the same. 4,380,603. CI. 524-598.000.
Bannister, Royston W.: Sec-
Hill, John; and Bannister, Royston W., 4,380,748, CI. 335-151.000.
Barber-Colman Company: See —
Nichols. Richard K., 4,380.188, CI. 98-4O.00D.
Barclay, John L.; and Gane. Brian R.. to British Petroleum Company
Limited, The. Hydrocarbonylation of methanol to ethanol in the
presence of added compounds. 4.380,681, CI. 568-902.000.
Bairlow, Michael L.; and Lindstrum, Alan L., to United States of Amer-
ica, Navy. Digitally controlled temperature compensated oscillator
system. 4,380,745, CI. 331-176.000.
Barr, Thomas R.: See —
Baker, Donald R.; Barr, Thomas R.; and Smith, Paul C, Jr..
4.380.271. CI. 175-391.000.
Barrash, Marshall J., to Coca-Cola Company, The. Proof-of-purchase
for self-opening cans. 4,380,129, CI. 40-307.000.
Bart de Roos, Kns: See —
van den Bosch, Steven; Kettenes, Dirk K.; Bart de Roos, Kris;
Sipma, Gerben; and Stoffelsma, Jan, 4.380.655, CI. 549-472.000.
B
B
Baruzzi, Giovanni: See —
Noristi, Luciano; and Baruzzi. Giovanni, 4,380,507, CI. 2S2-
429.00B.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Bott, Kaspar, 4,380,631, CI. 544-275.000.
Loeffler, Hermann; Juenemann, Werner; and Lamm, Gunther,
4,380,452, CI. 8-532.000.
Rieber, Norbert; Platz, Rolf; and Fuchs, Werner, 4,380,642, CI.
548-255.000.
Sauter, Hubert; Ammermann, Eberhard; Rentzea, Costin; Zeeh,
Bemd; Jung, Johann; and Pommer, Emst-Heinrich, 4,380,546,
CI. 424-269.000.
Seybold, Guenther, 4,380,514, CI. 260-465.00H.
Baskent, Feyyaz O.; and Sandner, Michael R., to Union Carbide Corpo-
ration. Novel amino catalyst mixture for stabilization of polyurethane
foam. 4,380,591, CI. 521-115.000.
Bassi, Alberto, to ITW Fastex Italia S.p.A. Plug with a safety lock for
fillers of fuel reservoirs of automotive vehicles. 4,380,161, CI.
70-168.000.
Battelle Memorial Institute: See —
Gross, Daniel, 4,380,365, CI. 350-96.180.
Bauer, Gilbert; and Maurer, Michel, to Brasseries Kronenbourg. Isoba-
rometric and self-contained apparatus for sampling purpose on gase-
ous drinks. 4,380,176, CI. 73-863.860.
Bausch, Joachim: See —
Federmann, Helmut; and Bausch, Joachim, 4,380,443, CI.
464-181.000.
Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Kamen, Dean, 4,380,234, CI. 604-180.000.
Norton, William W., 4,380,236, CI. 604-151.000.
Baxter, Ward. II: See—
Ziegler. Michael L.. II; Druke. Michael B.; Van Roekel, John R.;
and Baxter, Ward, II, 4,380,812, CI. 371-38.000.
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Elbe, Hans-Ludwig, 4,380,628, CI. 542-429.000.
Kraatz, Udo; Jager, Gerhard; Buchel, Karl H.; and Frohberger,
Paul-Ernst, 4,380,545, CI. 424-269.000.
Mateme, Carsten, 4,380,547, CI. 424-270.000.
Maurer, Fritz; Schroder, Rolf; Hammann, Ingeborg; and Stendel,
Wilhelm, 4,380,538, CI. 424-200.000.
Muller, Hanns P.; Sommerfeld, Claus-Dieter; and Becker, Gemot,
4,380,502, CI. 252-182.000.
Neuhaus, Karl-Friedrich; Perrey. Hermann; Fuhr, Karl; Freier,
Hans-Joachim; and Bendszus, Otto, 4,380,604, CI. 524-873.000.
Stadler, Peter; Koebemick, Wolfgang; Samaan, Samir; and Gau,
Wolfgang, 4,380,625, CI. 536-13.900.
Steinberger, Helmut; Kortmann, Wilfried; and Tuschen, Jurgen,
4,380,451, CI. 8-477.000.
von Bonin, Wulf; and Zaby, Gottfried, 4,380,593, CI. 521-163.000.
BBC Brown, Boveri & Company, Ltd.: See —
Gessinger, Gemot; and Mercier, Olivier, 4,380,574, CI.
428-686.000.
Zaba, Tadeusz, 4,380,147, CI. 60-39.182.
Beardmore, Geoffrey. Gas-lubricated bearings. 4,380,355, CI.
384-123.000.
Becker, Gemot: See —
Muller, Hanns P.; Sommerfeld, Claus-Dieter; and Becker, Gemot,
4,380,502, CI. 252-182.000.
Beecham Group Limited: See —
Poyser, Robert H.; and Tumer, David H., 4,380,540, CI.
424-233.000.
Behlmer, Wilbur D.; and Kass, John J., to Deere & Company. Steering
clutch and brake control valve. 4,380,249, CI. 137-596.200.
BeinvogI, Willy; and Hasler, Barbara, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
Method of producing polysilicon stmcture in the 1 ^m range on
substrates containing integrated semiconductor circuits by plasma
etching. 4,380,489, CI. 156-643.000.
Bell, Malcolm E., to Canada, Her Majesty the Queen in right of, as
represented by the Minister of National Defence. Compensating
feedback system for multi-sensor magnetometers. 4,380,735, CI.
324-244.000.
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See —
Aspnes, David E.; and Studna, Ambrose A., 4,380,490, CI.
156-662.000.
Canniff, Ronald J., 4,380,810, CI. 370-15.000.
MarcatUi, Enrique A. J., 4,380,364, CI. 350-96.140.
Bclrecolt S.A.: Sce^
Wattron, Albert; and Quirin, Michel, 4,380,142, CI. 56-370.000.
Belsky, Igal: See—
Gutnick, David L.; Rosenberg, Eugene; Belsky, Igal; and Zinaida,
Zosim, 4.380,504, CI. 252-356.000.
Ben Venue Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Kaye, Saul, 4,380,530, CI. 422-300.000.
Bendix Corporation, The: See —
Normann, Richard W.; and Fairbaim, LeRoy W., 4,380,119, Q.
29-884 000.
Van Siclen, Howard E., Jr., 4,380,224, CI. 123-602.000.
Wilkinson, John R., 4,380,800, CI. 364-431.080.
Bendszus, Otto: See —
Neuhaus, Karl-Friedrich; Perrey, Hermann; Fuhr, Karl; Freier,
Hans-Joachim; and Bendszus, Otto, 4,380,604, CI. 524-873.000.
Bennett, William G.; and Spease, Arthur L., to Teleflex Incorporated.
Remote control assembly (swivel insert). 4,380,178. CI. 74-SOI.OOP.
Berger, Jenson and Nicholson Ltd.: See —
Tooke-Kirby, David H.; Perry, Richard E.; and Arbuckle, Kenneth
H., 4.380,599, CI. 525-370.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
Bergwerksverband GmbH: See —
Habermehl, Diethard; Rohde, Wolfgang; Kucharzyk, Werner; and
Siebert. Werner, 4,380,125, CI. 34-10.000.
Bemd, Leslie H.: See-
Imam, Imdad; and Bemd, Leslie H., 4.380,172, CI. 73-659.000.
Berry, Donald A.: See—
Asick, John C; Berry, Donald A.; and Lucius, John E., 4,380,361,
CI. 339-9 l.OOR.
Bianchi, Nereo, to NECCHI S.p.A. Devices generating synchronizing
signals in sewing machines. 4,380,203, CI. 1 12-158.00E.
Bichard, Bernard: See —
Joubert, Antoine; Joubert, Thierry; Bichard, Bernard; and Joubert,
Jean, 4,380,101, CI. 24-237.000.
Bigelow, Stanley K., to Champion International Corporation. Paper-
board dispenser package with removable scoop panel. 4,380,289, CI.
206-216.000.
Binks Manufacturing Company: See —
Culbertson, Samuel W.; McCulloch, Charles W.; and Williams,
Keith G., 4,380,321, CI. 239-700.000.
Birkelbach, Donald F.: See-
Shipley, Randall S.; and Birkelbach, Donald F., 4,380,508, CI.
252-43 l.OOC.
Bischoff, Albrecht, to W. C. Heraeus GmbH. Semiconductor unit with
connecting wires. 4,380,775, CI. 357-67.000.
Bjerklie, John W.: See—
LaHaye, Paul G.; and Bjerklie, John W., 4,380,429, CI. 431-1 15.000.
Blair, Albert; and Grant, Patrick T., to National Research Development
Corporation. RoUUble fish cage. 4,380,213, CI. 119-3.000.
Blanchard, Houston P.; and Tuchscherer, Lawrence D., to General
Motors Corporation. Roller band sensor. 4,380,692, CI. 200-61. 45R.
Blocher, John M., Jr.; Veigel, Neil D.; and Landrigan, Richard B., to
United Sutes of America, Energy. Vapor deposition of hardened
niobium. 4,380,556, CI. 427-6.000.
Block, Gordon. Truck box Urpaulin assembly. 4,380,350, CI.
296-98.000.
Blount, David H. Process for the production of polyhydroxy lignin-cel-
lulose silicate polymer. 4,380,592. CI. 521-151.000.
Blue Streak Industries, Inc.: See-
Baker, Donald R.; Barr, Thomas R.; and Smith, Paul C, Jr.,
4,380,271, CI. 175-391.000.
Blyakharov, Ayzik. Tool for opening a can or the like. 4,380,123, CI.
. 30-409.000.
BOC Limited: See—
Rathbome, Brian A.; and Ryan, Bruce R., 4,380,457, CI. 55-33.000.
Boden, Richard M., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.
Branched chain oleflnic alcohols, thiols, esters and ethers, organolep-
tic uses thereof, processes for preparing same and intermediates
thereof. 4,380,500, CI. 252-174.110.
Boden, Richard M.; Dekker, Lambert; Schmitt, Frederick L.; and Van
Loveren, Augustinus G., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.
Mixture of aliphatic Cjp-branched olefin epoxides and use thereof in
augmenting or enhancing the aroma of perfumes and/or articles.
4,380,658. CI. 549-525.000.
Boden, Richard M., to International Flavors ft Fragrances Inc.
Branched ketones, organoleptic uses thereof and process for prepar-
ing same. 4.380,674, CI. 568-417.000.
Bodimer, Theodore B.; David, Joseph S.; and Calder, Alexander W., to
Joy Manufacturing Company. Conveyor. 4,380.288, CI. 198-820.000.
Bodine Electric Company: See—
Oltendorf, Norman E., 4,380,722, CI. 318-696.000.
Boeing Company, The: See—
Soderberg, Mark S.; Hametner, Albert L.; Leppink, Herman F.;
and Strand, David E., 4.380.295, CI. 209-558.000.
Boggs, David R., to Xerox Corporation. Digital phase decoder with
collision detection. 4,380,761, CI. 340-825.500.
Boguslaski, Robert C; Carrico, Robert J.; and Christner, James E., to
Miles Laboratories, Inc. Heterogenous chemiluminescent specific
binding assay. 4.380,580. CI. 435-7.000.
Bonasch. James H.; and Bouchard, William J., Jr., to Leesona Corpora-
tion. Weft guidance tube for looms. 4,380,254, CI. 139-435.000.
Bonelli, Robert T.: See-
Romeo, Arthur L.; Bonelli. Robert T.; and Fishman. Harvey E.,
4,380,716. CI. 315-8.000.
Bosne. Jacques G. P. E., to Hamon-Sobelco, S.A. Ice preventing appa-
ratus and method for gas and liquid contact means of an atmospheric
cooling tower. 4.380,517, CI. 261-142.000.
Bott, Kaspar, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Preparation of cafTcine.
4,380.631. CI. 544-275.000.
Bouchard. William J.. Jr.: See—
Bonasch, James H.; and Bouchard, WUliam J., Jr., 4,380.254. Q.
139-435.000.
Boudin. Daniel: See—
Godat, Jean; Parmenon, Daniel; Krzywdziak, Alain; and Boudin,
Daniel, 4,380,399, CI. 366-289.000.
Bouman, Anton J.; and Geertsema, Eise B.. to U.S. Philips Corporation.
High-pressuie discharge lamp. 4,380,714. d. 313-349.000.
Boumonville, Jean-Paul; Snappe, Roger; Miquel, Jean; and Martino,
Germain, to Institut Francais Du Petrole. Catalyst and process for
manufacturing a ketone by dehydrogenation of a secondary alcohol.
4,380.673. a. 568-361.000.
Sous, Karl, to Hacoba Textilmaschinen GmbH ft Co. KG. Device for
space-dyeing textile filaments. 4.380,158, CI. 68-2OS.00R.
Bouteille, Rene: See—
Georlette, Pierre; and BouteUle, Rene, 4.380,522, CI. 264-175.000.
Braley, Charles A. Overflow control system. 4.380.243, C\. 137-312.000.
Edward; Brown.
29-157.00R.
John D.; and
Brandewie, Joseph E.; and Hart, Granville S., to AMP Incorporated.
Electrical harness fabricating apparatus. 4,380,117, CI. 29-742.000.
Branson International Plasma Corporation: See —
Reichelderfer, Richard P.; Vogel, Diane C; and Tang, Marian C,
4,380,488, CI. lS6-643.00a
Brasseries Kronenbourg: See —
Bauer, Gilbert; and Maurer, Michel, 4.380,176, CI. 73-863.860.
Bray, John, to Staeng Ltd. Couplers for latching type plugs. 4,380,349.
CI. 285-417.000.
Bream, William A. Kinetic waveform device 4.380.562. CI. 428-8.000
Bredow, Walter; and Otto, Gerhard, to C. Behrens AG. Arrangement
for replaceably holding a stripper of a tool holder of the tool, and a
replacing tool for replacing the stripper. 4,380,182, CI. 83-140.000.
Bresie, Don A.; Fowler, Donald W.; and Bums, Jack M., to Texas Gas
Transport Company. Method and system for distributing natural gas.
4.380.242, CI. 137-113.000.
Bridges, Robert D.: See-
Moreno, Carlos M.; Bridges, Robert D.; and Uzec, Andre J.,
4,380,521, CI. 264-49.000.
Bristol-Myers Company: See —
Crenshaw, Ronnie R.; and Algieri, Aldo A., 4.380,638, CI
548-135.000.
Crenshaw, Ronnie R.; and Algieri, Aldo A., 4.380.639, CI.
548-135.000.
Gottstein, William J.. 4,380,512. CI. 260-24S.20R.
British-American Tobacco Company Limited: See—
Horsewell, Henry G., 4,380,241, CI. 131-336.000.
British Petroleum Company Limited, The: See —
Barclay, John L.; and Gane, Brian R., 4,380,681, CI 568-902 000.
Broad, David, to Fisons Limited. Container closure. 4,380,302, CI.
220-235.000.
Broggi, Renato: See —
Falciani, Marco; and Broggi. Renato, 4,380,630, CI. 544-30.000.
Brookhyser, Byron B.; Lictenwalter, Robert H.; McOee, Arthur L.;
and Pierson, Darrell E., to Coe Manufacturing Company, The.
Veneer lathe apparatus and method using independently adjustable
powered back-up roll. 4,380.259, CI. 144-357.000.
Brothers, Woodrow W. Accessory for using kteel wool or other abrad-
ing materials. 4.380.092, CI. I5-209.00C.
Broton. Robert M.. to Motorola, Inc. Transmit-receive switching cir-
cuit for radio frequency circulators. 4,380.822. Q. 455-80.000.
Brown, John D.: See —
MacLean, John P.; Cantwell, J.
Hoy, Harold D., 4,380,105. CI.
Bruce. William C. Jr.: See-
Shannon, Paul D.; and Bruce, William C, Jr., 4,380,798, CI.
364-200.000.
Brucker, Rainer: See —
Sommer, August; Heitmann, Wilhelm; and Brucker, Rainer,
4,380,509, CI. 252-453.000.
Brugger. Richard D.: See —
Sulkoski. Jerome; and Brugger, Richard D., 4,380.759, Q.
340-407.000.
Brunner, Hans-Georg; and Fory, Wemer, to Ciba-Gcigy Corporation
Novel benzthiazolylurea derivatives, compositions containing them
and their use as herbicides. 4,380,640, CI. 548-163.000.
Bryhn, Odd R.: See—
Loken, Tor; and Bryhn, Odd R., 4,380,408, CI. 405-263.000.
Buchel, Karl H.: See—
Kraatz, Udo; Jager, Gerhard; Buchel, Karl H.; and Frohberger,
Paul-Ernst, 4,380,545, CI. 424-269.000.
Buckeye Molding Company: See-
Allen. David O.; and Wombold, Harry A. E.. 4,380,303, CI
220-276.000.
Budai, Zsuzsanna: See —
Szejtli, Jozsef; Budai, Zsuzsanna; Tetenyi nee Erdosi, Magda; and
Pap nee Imrenyi, Gabriella, 4,380,626, CI. 536-103.000.
Buhrer, Richard, to Schweizerische Eidgenossenschaft, represented by
Eidg. Munitionsfabrik Thun der Gruppe fur Rustungsdienste.
Method and apparatus for fabricating pipeless explosive and propel-
lant charges. 4,380,186, CI. 86-20.00D.
Bula, Roger M.: See—
Galloup, Clifford L.; Bula, Roger M.; Klemm. Robert W.; and
Westerburg. Ralph E.. Jr., 4,380,111, CI. 29-564.400.
Bull, Hans; Ewich, Gerhard; Kuschke, Gunther; Maykemper, Alfred;
and Welzel. Josef, to Hermann Hemscheidt Maachinenfabrik GmbH
ft Co. Mine-roof support. 4,380,410, CI. 405-299.000.
Bullock, John W.; and Miranda, Lawrence T. Proximity switch.
4,380,721, CI. 315-362.000.
Bunch, Eamest B., Jr., to B. Bunch Company, Inc. Paper stop adjust-
ment mechanism for continuous form sutionery folding machine.
4.380,448, CI. 493-410.000.
Bunyan, Thomas W., to Pilgrim Engineering DevelopmenU Limited.
Stud manipulating device. 4,380,181, Q. 81-57.380.
Burgess, Basil A. Dispersion mixer. 4,380,398, CI. 366-261.000.
Burkner, Wolfgant; and Ebert, Franz-Joaef, to Carl Schenck AG.
Apparatus for aligning chips during the manufacture of chipboards.
4,380,285, CI. 198-533.000.
Burns, Jack M.: See—
Bresie, Don A.; Fowler, Donald W.; and Bums, Jack M., 4.38a242.
CI. 137-113.000.
Burrage, Robert G.; and Joby, Michael J., to Lucas Industries Limited.
Ctevice for adjusting gas turbine engine fuel control system in accor-
dance with engine parameter. 4.380.148. CI. 60-39.281.
Burroughs Corporation: See —
Tuan. Hsing T.. 4.380,803. CI. 365-183.000.
1029 O.G.— 35
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Buser. Rudolph G.; Rohde. Robert S.; and Nomiyama. Neal T., to
United States of America, Army. Short pulse CO^ laser for ranging
and Urget identiHcation 4.380.391. CI. 3S6-S.000.
Butler. David V : See—
Orlowski. Jan A.; and Butler. David V.. 4.380,432. CI. 433-9.000.
Butts, Orville R.. to Roper Corporation. Multiprocessor control bus.
4.380.698, CI. 219-492.000.
C Behrens AG: See—
Bredow, Walter; and Otto, Gerhard, 4,380,182, CI. 83-140.000.
Caillot. Luc. to Synthelabo. Control device for an artificial respirator.
4.380,233, CI. 128-204.210.
Calder. Alexander W.: See—
Bodimer, Theodore B.; David, Joseph S.; and Calder, Alexander
W,, 4,380,288. CI. 198-820.000.
Callihan. Clayton D., to Louisiana State University. Novel desiccant.
4,380,458, CI. 55-33.000.
Campagne, Jean-Claude; Chollet, Jean; and Redien, Pierre, to Rhone
Poulenc Industries. Sucroglyceride on a support. 4,380,555, CI.
426-549.000.
Campbell, John A. L.; Moynihan, Daniel J.; Roper, William D.; and
Willis, Earl C. to Peabody Coal Company. Dust control system and
method of operation. 4.380,353, CI. 299-12.000.
Canada, Emily J., to Eli Lilly and Company. Insecticidal oxazolyl
ureas. 4,380,641, CI. 548-233.000.
Canada, Her Majesty the Queen in right of, as represented by the
Minister of National Defence: See —
Bell. Malcolm E., 4,380,735, CI. 324-244.000.
Canadian Patents & Development Limited: See —
Hill, Eugene E.; Scrimshaw, Marvin S.; and Showalter, Edward
W,, 4.380,808, CI. 367-153.000.
Cancio. Leopoldo V.; and Wu. Pai-Chuan, to Clopay Corporation.
Cross-tearable decorative sheet material. 4,380,564. CI. 428-167.000.
Cane Harvest Inc.: See—
Duncan, Richard A., 4,380,281, CI. 198-304.000.
Cannifr, Ronald J., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Loopback test. 4,380.810, CI. 370-15.000.
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Sado. Ichiro; and Ozawa, Toshiaki, 4,380,726, CI. 320-48.000.
Sato, Yasuhisa; and Tsuji, Sadahiko, 4,380,377, CI. 350-427.000.
Suda, Shigeyuki; and Tanaka, Kazuo, 4,380,376. CI. 350-427.000.
Takahashi, Yuji, 4,380,309, CI. 222-450.000.
Takatori, Yasushi. 4.380.771, CI. 346-140.00R.
Tamura, Tetsuo. 4.380,378, CI. 350-429.000.
Tateoka, Masamichi; and Minoura, Kazuo, 4,380,390, CI.
355-71.000.
Tezuka. Nobuo, 4,380,381, CI. 354-173.000.
Cantwell, J. Edward: See —
MacLean, John P.; Cantwell, J. Edward; Brown, John D.; and
Hoy, Harold D., 4,380,105. CI. 29-157.00R.
Capasso, GaeUno. Polyfunction programmable data receiver.
4,380.762, CI. 340-825.630.
Capuano, Terry D., to Lamson & Sessions Co., The. Fastener.
4,380.414. CI. 411-187.000.
Carl Freudenberg, Firma: See —
Amsel. Friedrich-Wilhelm. 4,380,442, CI. 464-93.000.
Carl Schenck AG.: See—
Burkner, Wolfgant; and Ebert, Franz-Josef, 4,380,285, CI.
198-533.000.
Carlson, John C. Pump jack assembly for wells. 4,380,150, CI.
60-372.000.
Carlson, Richard H.; and Gatcomb, Gerald L., to Du Pont de Nemours,
E. I., and Company. Process for embossing polymeric substrates by
using a composite structure of an aromatic polyamide fabric coated
with a Huorosilicone rubber. 4,380,519. CI. 264-26.000.
Carlson, Roy C, Jr.; and March, Edward J., to Western Electric Com-
pany, Inc. Technique for elevating the temperature of a fluid.
4,380,431, CI. 432-29.000.
Carrico, Robert J.: See—
Boguslaski, Robert C; Carrico, Robert J.; and Christner, James E.,
4,380,580, CI. 435-7.000.
Carrier Corporation: See-
Wright, William E., 4.380.263, CI. 165-76.000.
Carter, Ned C; and Cramer, Jerry W., to Sunkist Growers, Inc. Appa-
ratus for printing indicia on objects. 4.380,194, CI. 101-35.000.
Carter, Roy A.: See-
Lee, Fred C; and Carter, Roy A.. 4,380,795, CI. 363-131.000.
Casale, Thomas M.; Schmitz, Frederick J., Jr.; and Pauperas, Victor, to
Dayco Corporation. Butterfly valve and method of making same.
4,380,246, CI. 137-375.000.
Caterpillar Mitsubishi Ltd.: See—
I to, Takeshi; Ishizuka, Shuzo; Goto, Keiichi; and Saito, Keiki,
4,380,284, CI. 198-494.000.
Caudill, Stanley D.; and Goode, Frederick R., to FMC Corporation.
Hose control system. 4,380,244, CI. 137-355.160.
Celanese Corporation: See —
Kliger, Howard S., 4,380,483, CI. 156-169.000.
Chacour, Selim A.; and Degnan, John R., to Allis-Chalmers Corpora-
tion. Bearing support. 4,380,401, CI. 384-438.000.
Champion International Corporation: See —
Bigelow, Stanley K., 4,380,289, CI. 206-216.000.
Krankkala, Paul L., 4,380,565, CI. 428-182.000.
Chandler, Lavem E.: See —
Hoffman, Robert P.; and Chandler, Uvem E., 4,380,359, CI. 339-
17.00F.
Chang, Garence D.; and Lan^, William H., to Mobil Oil Corporation.
Process for synthesizing aniline. 4,380,669, CI. 564-402.000.
Chaudhry, Jagdish C; and Chaudhry, Lorena F., to Wichinsky, Mi-
chael. Pinball game apparatus. 4,380,335, CI. 273-121.00A.
Chaudhry, Lorena F.: See —
Chaudhry, Jagdish C; and Chaudhry, Lorena F., 4,380,335, CI.
273-121.00A.
Check Mate Systems, Inc.: See —
Keifer, Terry A., 4,380,097, CI. 24-160.000.
Chemische Werke Huls AG: See—
Sommer, August; Heitmann, Wilhelm; and Brucker, Rainer,
4,380,509, CI. 252-453.000.
Chermin, Hubertus M. J.: See —
De BijI, Adrianus M. J.; and Chermin, Hubertus M. J., 4,380,719,
CI. 315-101.000.
Chevron Research Company: See —
Loken, Tor; and Bryhn, Odd R., 4,380,408, CI. 405-263.000.
Chiba, Kazumasa; Kobayashi, Kazuhiko; and Muraki, Toshio, to Toray
Industries, Inc. Process for producing aliphatic copolyesteramide, an
aliphatic copolyesteramide and tubing molded therefrom. 4,380,622,
CI. 528-288.000.
Chinoin Gyogyszer es Vegyeszeti Termekek Gyara R.T.: See—
Szejtii, Jozsef; Budai, Zsuzsanna; Tetenyi nee Erdosi, Magda; and
Pap nee Imrenyi, Gabriella, 4,380,626, CI. 536-103.000.
Chloride Group Limited: See —
Terrell, Christopher, 4,380,792, CI. 362-250.000.
Chollet, Jean: See—
Campagne, Jean-Claude; Chollet, Jean; and Redien, Pierre,
4,380,555, CI. 426-549.000.
Chong, Bemi P., to Rohm and Haas Company. Emulsion copolymer
cation exchange resins. 4,380,590, CI. 521-33.000.
Christenson, Christopher P.: See —
Vance, Fred L., Jr.; Guerra, Rafael E.; and Christenson, Christo-
pher P., 4,380,616, CI. 526-101.000.
Christenson, Roger M.: See —
Welsh, David A.; Dowbenko, Rostyslaw; Das, Suryya K.; Kania,
Charles M.; and Christenson, Roger M., 4,380,601, CI.
524-555.000.
Christiani, Peter. Self-chilling dispenser for drinking fluids. 4,380,157,
CI. 62-v3 15.000.
Christner, James E.: See —
Boguslaski, Robert C; Carrico, Robert J.; and Christner, James E.,
4,380,580, CI. 435-7.000.
Chu, Chin-Chiun, to Mobil Oil Corporation. Shape selective reactions
with zeolite caulysts modiHed with iron and/or cobalt. 4,380,685, CI.
585-466.000.
Chugai Boyeki Co., Ltd.: See—
Masuda, Shuji; and Ueno, Keisuke, 4,380,568, CI. 428-276.000.
Church, Larry L.: See —
Sun, Shan C; and Church, Larry L., 4,380,746, CI. 332-9.00R.
Ciba-Gcigy AG: See-
Turner, George F. A. M., 4,380,333, CI. 271-272.000.
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See —
Brunner, Hans-Georg; and Fory, Werner, 4,380,640, CI.
548-163.000.
Huebner, Charles F.; and Gschwend, Heinz W., 4,380,653, CI.
549-366.000.
Rasberger, Michael; and Evans, Samuel, 4,380,515, CI. 260-936.000.
Rasberger, Michael, 4,380,676. CI. 568-730.000.
Stingelin, Willy; and Loew, Peter, 4,380,627, CI. 542-423.000.
Cioca, Gheorghe; and Fertell, Paul A., to Seton Company. Polyisocya-
nate reaction products. 4,380,474, CI. 106-155.000.
Claiborne, J. Lyle, to Dixie Yams, Inc. Extraneous dye or colorant
scavenging system in laundry. 4,380,453, CI. 8-606.000.
Clamp- All Corp.: See—
Swartz, Frederick R., 4,380,348, CI. 285-236.000.
Clarion Co., Ltd.: See-
Sato, Tadashi. 4,380,809, CI. 369-6.000.
Usugi, Kikuo, 4,380,826, CI. 455-165.000.
Claudin, Paul: See —
Demeyer, Pierre; and Claudin, Paul, 4,380,785, CI. 361-96.000.
Clendening, Steven J., to Rockwell International Corporation. Simpli-
fled NRZ data phase detector with expanded measuring interval.
4,380,815, CI. 375-80.000.
Clopay Corporation: See —
Cancio, Leopoldo V.; and Wu. Pai-Chuan, 4,380,564, CI.
428-167.000.
Coad, Brian C, to GTE Products Corporation. Foils of brittle alloys.
4,380,479, CI. 148-1 1.50P.
Coates, Clarence A., Jr.; and Weaver, Max A., to Eastman Kodak
Company. Methine dyes from tetrahydroquinoline compounds con-
taining N-thioether substituents. 4,380,633, CI. 544-316.000.
Coca-Cola Company, The: .See —
Bachmann, G. Merle; Davis, Charles L.; and Morgan. Annis R., Jr.,
4,380,130, CI. 40-584.000.
Barrash, Marshall J., 4,380,129, CI. 40-307.000.
Coe Manufacturing Company, The: See —
Brookhyser, Byron B.; Lictenwalter, Robert H.; McGee, Arthur
L.; and Pierson, Darrell E., 4,380,259, CI. 144-357.000.
Cohen, Paul B.; Young, William R.; and Edwards. W. Dale, to Harris
Corporation. TTL to CMOS Interface circuit. 4,380,710, CI.
307-475.000.
Coleman, James P.; Hallcher, Richard C; and McMackins. Dudley E.,
to Monsanto Company. Lactone process. 4,380,650, CI. 349-326.000.
Coleman, Ronald K.: See —
Dickson, J. Douglas; Sweeney, J. David; and Coleman, Ronald K.,
4,380,446. CI. 493-11.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PIS
Colucci, Bartholomew A.; and Comte, Pierre, to Institute Straunann.
Disposable applicator for mini-laparotomy using a clip method.
4,380,238. CI. 128-346.000.
Combustion Engineering, Inc.: See —
Joy, Ira L.; and Humphreys, Neal B.. 4,380,491, CI. 159-4.00B.
Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique: See —
Graftieaux, Jean; and Donguy, Rene, 4,380,527, CI. 376-245.000.
Compagnie Internationale pour I'lnformatique CII-Honeywell Bull
(Societe Anonyme): See —
Desserre, Jacques; Helle, Michel; and Lazzari, Jean-Pierre,
4,380,784, CI. 360-126.000.
Computer Microfilm International Corporation: See —
Smith, David L.; and O'Brien, Gerald £., 4,380,776, CI.
358-102.000.
Comte, Pierre: See —
Colucci, Bartholomew A.; and Comte, Pierre, 4,380,238, CI.
128-346.000.
Conner, William V., to United States of America, Energy. Ductile
transplutonium metal alloys. 4,380,470, CI. 75-122.700.
Connors, Stephen A., to Data Translation, Inc. Data acquisition appara-
tus. 4,380,764, CI. 340-870.370.
Conoco Inc.: See —
Fenton, JeffT.; and Mack, Mark P., 4,380,610, CI. 525-400.000.
Waters, Kenneth H.; Hopkins, John R.; and Payton, Charles E.,
4,380.806, CI. 367-27.000.
Consolidated Papers, Inc.: See—
Amdt. William A.; Damrau. Wayne A.; and Gunderson. Donald J..
4,380.396. CI. 356-432.000.
Consortium fur Elektrochemische Industrie GmbH: See—
Gebauer. Helmut; and Hafner, Walter, 4,380,675, CI. 568-448.000.
Container Technologies, Inc.: See—
Schneiter, John W.; Reiss, Ronald J.; and Enskat, Albert G.,
4,380.310. CI. 222-501.000.
Cook Paint and Varnish Company: See —
Wright, Howard J.; and Scherrer, Joseph H., 4,380,611, CI.
525-418.000.
Coolen, Franciscus M.: See^,
Franken. Adrianus J. J.; Coolen. Franciscus M.; Khoe. Giok D.;
Langerhorst, Jacob; and Smulders. Henricus W. W., 4,380,366,
CI. 350-96.210.
Cooney, James J. Apparatus and method for cleaning paint roller
covers. 4.380.478. CI. 134-38.000.
Cooper Industries, Inc.: See —
Galloup. Clifford L.; Bula, Roger M.; Klemm, Robert W.; and
Westerburg, Ralph E., Jr., 4,380,111, CI. 29-564.400.
Coran, Aubert Y.; and Patel. Raman, to Monsanto Company. Acrylic
copolymer rubber/polyvinylchloride. 4,380,606, CI. 525-196.000.
Cousse, Henri: See —
Mouzin, Gilbert; Cousse, Henri; and Stenger, Antoine. 4,380,667,
CI. 564-195.000.
Craig, Gale M.. to General Motors Corporation. Actuator for a con-
cealable headlamp assembly. 4.380.789. CI. 362-65.000.
Craig. Robert J. G., to Incosym. Inc. Universal joint flexure hinge
suspension system, and method for manufacturing this system.
4,380,108, CI. 29-434.000.
Cramer, Jerry W.: See —
Carter, Ned C; and Cramer, Jerry W., 4,380,194, CI. 101-35.000.
Cramer, Kathleen J. Parenteral needle receptacle. 4,380,292, CI.
206-366.000.
Crawford, Daniel A.; and Levijoki, Wayne A., to General Motors
Corporation. Vacuum pressure selection and generation device.
4,380,418, CI. 417-87.000.
Crawford, John S.; and Wainman, Roy, to Hospital For Sick Children,
The. Intubation of lacrimal ducts. 4,380,239. CI. 604-28.000.
Crenshaw, Ronnie R.; and Algieri, Aldo A., to Bristol-Myers Company.
Chemical compounds. 4,380,638, CI. 548-135.000.
Crenshaw, Ronnie R.; and Algieri, Aldo A., to Bristol-Myers Company.
Substituted l,2,S-thiadiazole derivatives. 4,380,639. CI. 548-135.000.
Crisp, Richard D., to Motorola, Inc. Transistor-transistor logic input
bufTer circuit with power supply/temperature effects compensation
circuit. 4,380,707, CI. 307-443.000.
Crisp, Terrence S., to Klippan S.A. Safety belt buckle. 4,380,100, CI.
24-230.0AL.
Crombie, Robert A. Testing apparatus for a dual pressure indicator and
control unit for pasteurization equipment. 4,380,166, CI. 73-4.00R.
Crowley, Leslie B. Sustained ignition secondary combustion unit.
4,380,228, CI. 126-76.000.
Crutcher Resources Corporation: See —
Nelson, Jerome W., 4,380,695, CI. 219-125.120.
Culbertson, Samuel W.; McCulloch, Charles W.; and WUliams, Keith
G., to Binks Manufacturing Company. Color change valve structure
for rotary head electrosUtic spray coating systems. 4,380,321, CI.
239-700.000.
Cunningham, Vernon R., to Rockwell International Corporation. Lin-
earization circuit. 4,380,711, CI. 307-491.000.
Curry, Byron V. Variable pressure, constant flow drip emitter system
and head. 4,380.318, CI. 239-533.130.
Curtinot, Jean C; Delestre, Xavier; and Fouillet, Jean, to Thomson-
CSF. Tunable ultra-high frequency filter with variable capacitance
tuning devices. 4,380,747, CI. 333-202.000.
Cutter, James W., to Machlett Laboratories, Incorporated, The. Com-
pact X-ray collimator. 4,380,820, CI. 378-1S3.000.
Cutters Exchange, Inc.: See—
Smith, Hoyt L.; Frederick, Cecil S., deceased; and Frederick,
WalhK^e, administrator, 4,380,330, Q. 270-31.000.
Dahle, David P.: See—
Davis, Leland E.; Dahle, David P.; Schneiter, Fred E.; and Kirch-
off, George F., 4,380,346, CI. 280-736.000.
Daimler-Benz A.G.: See —
Waldschutz, Heinz; Rauner, Franz; and Patzelt, Helmut, 4,380,341.
CI. 277-56.000.
Daintrey. Joseph W.; Rushton. John; and Willis, Michael, to Gestetner
Manufacturing Limited. Copying method and apparatus. 4.380.383.
CI. 355-3.00R.
Damrau. Wayne A.: See —
Amdt. William A.; Damrau, Wayne A.; and Gundenon, Donald J.,
4,380,396. CI. 356-432.000.
Danby, Hal C. to Anatros Corporation. Metered drop dispensers.
4.380.235. CI. 604-251.000.
D'Anieilo. Michael J.. Jr., to General Motors Corporation. Method of
making layered catalysts. 4,380,510, CI. 2S2-466.0PT.
Darling Store Fixtures: .See —
Harig, Robert G., 4,380.110. CI. 29-525.000.
Harig. Robert G.. 4.380,298, CI. 21 1-189.000.
Dart Industries Inc.: See —
Stillinger. Scott H., 4,380,307, CI. 222-142.900.
Das, Suryya K.: See —
Welsh, David A.; Dowbenko, Rostyslaw; Das, Suryya K.; Kania,
Charles M.; and Christenson. Roger M.. 4,380,601, CI.
524-555.000.
Data General Corporation: See—
Ziegler, Michael L., II; Druke, Michael B.; Van Roekel, John R.;
and Baxter. Ward, II, 4,380,812, CI. 371-38.000.
Data Translation, Inc.: See —
Connors, Stephen A., 4,380,764, CI. 340-870.370.
Dataproducts Corporation: See—
Palombo, Gaston; and Fortescue, Stephen M., 4,380,768, CI.
346-74.500.
Dauby, Jacques F.: See —
Hanotier, Jacques D. V.; and Dauby, Jacques F., 4,380,662, CI.
562-486.000.
David, Joseph S.: See —
Bodimer, Theodore B.; David, Joseph S.; and Calder. Alexander
W., 4.380,288, CI. 198-820.000.
Davis, Charles L.: See —
Bachmann, G. Merle; Davis, Charles L.; and Morgan, Annis R., Jr.,
4,380,130, CI. 40-584.000.
Davis, Dwight M., to Stone Container Corporation. Snubbing device
for blank conveyor apparatus. 4,380,332, CI. 271-224.000.
Davis, Leland E.; Dahle, David P.; Schneiter, Fred E.; and KirchofT,
George F., to Thiokol Corporation. Method of and apparatus for
speeding the response of an air bag inflator at low temperatures.
4,380,346. CI. 280-736.000.
Day CO Corporation: See —
Casale, Thomas M.; Schmitz. Frederick J., Jr.; and Pauperas,
Victor, 4.380.246, CI. 137-375.000.
De BijI, Adrianus M. J.; and Chermin, Hubertus M. J., to U.S. Philips
Corporation. Electronic device for the surting and a.c. voltage
operation of a gas and/or vapor discharge lamp. 4,380,719, CI.
315-101.000.
de Bruijn, Hans, to Aggregates Equipment, Inc. Cable suspended
conveyor. 4,380.282, CI. 198-318.000.
Deere & Company: See —
Behlmer, Wilbur D.; and Kass, John J., 4,380,249, CI. 137-396.200.
Degium, John R.: See —
Chacour, Selim A.; and Degnan, John R., 4,380,401, CI.
384438.000.
Dekker, Lambert: See—
Boden, Richard M.; Dekker, Lambert; Schmitt, Frederick L.; and
Van Loveren, Augustinus G., 4,380,658, CI. 549-525.000.
Delestre, Xavier: See —
Curtinot, Jean C; Delestre, Xavier; and Fouillet, Jean, 4,380.747,
CI. 333-202.000.
Delfino, Jean-Jacques; and Prevot, Maurice, to Vallourec. Method of
making one-piece tubular axle blanks and the produced axle blanks.
4,380,480, CI. 148-12.400.
DeLuca, John J.: See —
Swensrud, Roger L.; Pavlik, Dennis; and DeLuca, John J.,
4.380,362, CI. 339-1 12.00L.
Demeyer, Pierre; and Claudin, Paul, to Gerin, Merlin. Solid sUte trip
unit for an electrical circuit breaker. 4,380,785, CI. 361-%.000.
Den Herder, Marvin J.: See —
Kammann, Karl P., Jr.; Den Herder, Marvin J.; and Wagner,
Terrence L., 4,380,498, CI. 252-48.600.
Kammann, Karl P., Jr.; and Den Herder, Marvin J., 4,380.499. Q.
252-48.600.
Dental Keramik Sande GmbH: See—
Kipp, Manfred, 4,380,436, Q. 433-182.000.
Desserre, Jacques; Helle, Michel; and Lazzari, Jean-Pierre, to Compag-
nie Internationale pour I'lnformatique CII-Honeywell Bull (Societe
Anonyme). Magnetic transducer for reading and/or recording of daU
contained on a magnetic carrier. 4,380,784, CI. 360- 1 26.000.
Desyllas, Peter L.; Radley, Barry G.; Rawsthome, Alawlair; Eaton,
John R.; and Murray, John E., to Internationa] Computers Ltd. Two
level store with many-to-ooe mapping scheme. 4,380,797, CI.
364-200.000.
Detroit Radiant Products Company: See—
Rozzi, Mario, 4,380.428, CI. 431-88.000.
Dewey, George G., to niinois Tool Work* Inc. Load-distnbutive
washer for use with compressible material. 4,380,413. Q. 41 1-161.000.
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Diamond Shamrock Corporation: See—
Leitert. Frederick C; and Vinson. Carl G., Jr., 4,380,682, CI.
570-219.000.
Dick, Heinz; and Lux, Hans, to Ford Motor Company. Attachment
device for components mounted in recesses in vehicle bodywork.
4,380,099. CI. 24-21 LOOP.
Dickson, J. Douglas; Sweeney. J. David; and Coleman. Ronald K.. to
Rexham Corporation. Side sealing mechanism for a packaging ma-
chine. 4,380.446. CI. 493-11.000.
Didier Engineerin GmbH: See —
Habermehl, EMethard; Rohde, Wolfgang; Kucharzyk, Werner; and
Siebert, Werner, 4,380.125. CI. 34-10.000.
DifTrient. Niels, to Knoll International, Inc. Reclining chair. 4,380,352,
CI. 297-61.000.
Digital Equipment Corporation: See —
Leis, Michael D.; and Rose, Robert C, 4,380,723. CI. 318-314.000.
DiMatteo. Rocco J. Golf ball position marking device. 4,380,337, CI.
273-162.00D.
Dineen, John J.: See —
Folsom, Lawrence R.; Dineen, John J.; Vitale, Nicholas G.; and
Balas, Charles B., Jr.. 4.380,152. CI. 60-520.000.
Dion, Exsior. Bank construction. 4,380,20i, CI. 109-17.000.
Dixie Yams, Inc.: See —
Claiborne, J. Lyle, 4,380,453, CI. 8-606.000.
Dlugolecki, Jacek: See—
Frontciak, Stanislaw, 4,380,551. CI. 426-28.000.
Dmitriev, Nikolai A.: See —
Mazurin. Igor M.; Netupsky. Mikhail L.; Shevtsov, Alexandr V.;
Gladky. Viktor T.; Dmitriev. Nikolai A.; Lyapin. Andrei G.;
Polyakov. Alexandr V.; Myshev. Mikhail A.; and Panov. Vladi-
mir v.. 4.380.532. CI. 423-469.000.
Dobfar S.p.A.: See—
Falciani. Marco; and Broggi. Renato. 4.380.630. CI. 544-30.000.
Doi, Kazuyuki: See —
Higashiyama, Naotoshi; and Doi, Kazuyuki, 4,380,823, CI.
455-143.000.
Dolhyj, Serge R.; and Velenyi, Louis J., to Standard Oil Company,
The. Hydroalkylation of benzene and analogs. 4,380,683, CI.
585-268.000.
Dolza, John. Variable ratio belt drive. 4,380,444, CI. 474-21.000.
Donan, David C, Jr., to Waiamea Company, Inc. Dual thrust anchor
shell assembly. 4,380,407, CI. 405-259.000.
Donguy, Rene: See —
Graftieaux, Jean; and Donguy, Rene, 4,380,527, CI. 376-245.000.
Doren, Mark N., to Markson Manufacturing Company. Hot dog broiler
and method for making same. 4,380,192, CI. 99-441.000.
Dom, Franz, to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. 1.3-Dioxolane compounds
and their use as fungicides. 4,380.544. Q. 424-263.000.
Dotzer. Richard; and Plundrich, Winfried, to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft. Process for the chemical plotting of boundary layer flows, and
chemigraphy materials for the practice thereof. 4.380,170, CI.
73-147.000.
Douglas, Fred O., to W. C. Bradley Co. Safety guard for valve.
4,380,247. CI. 137-382.000.
Dow Chemical Company, The: See —
Dunbar, Joseph E., 4,380,649, CI. 549-285.000.
Fowler, Allan E.; White, Gordon E.; and Sims, Steve A.. 4,380,684,
CI. 585-328.000.
Monroe, Roger F., 4,380,537, CI. 424-200.000.
Moreno. Carlos M.; Bridges, Robert D.; and Uzee. Andre J..
4.380.521. CI. 26449.000.
Murchison. Craig B.; and Murdick. Dewey A.. 4,380,589, CI.
518-714.000.
Renga, James M.; and Wang, Pen-Chung, 4,380.636, Q.
546-326.000.
Shipley, Randall S.; and Birkelbach, Donald F., 4,380,508, CI.
252-43 l.OOC.
Smith. Harry A., 4,380,455, CI. 44-56.000.
Vance, Fred L., Jr.; Guerra, Rafael E.; and Christenson, Christo-
pher P.. 4,380.616, CI. 526-101.000.
Dowbenko, Rostyslaw: See —
Welsh, David A.; Dowbenko, Rostyslaw; Das, Suryya K.; Kania,
Charles M.; and Christenson, Roger M., 4,380,601, CI.
524-555.000.
Doyle, James J. Whistle attachment for a snorkel, and snorkel-whistle
unit 4,380.232, Q. 128-201.110.
Drilling Development, Inc.: See-
Lyons. William C; and Scurlock, Scot L., 4.380,264. CI.
166-169.000.
Driver. Donald E.; and Kaufman. John W., to AMP Incorporated.
Terminal insertion tool. 4,380,118, Q. 29-747.000.
E>ruke, Michael B.: See—
Ziegler, Michael L., 11; Dnike. Michael B.; Van Roekel, John R.;
and Baxter. Ward. II. 4.380.812. Q. 371-38.000.
Duke University. Inc.: See—
Jobais, Frans F.; Keizer. Johannes H.; and Overaker, Ronald F..
4.380,240. a. 128-633.000.
Dumas. David H., to Hercules Incorporated. Water-soluble thermoset-
table resinous compositions containing dicyandiamide-formaldehyde
condensates modified with epihalohydrin and process for preparing
the same. 4,380,602, CI. 524-598.000.
Dunbar, Joseph E., to Dow Chemical Company. The. Isophorone
derivatives. 4,380.649. CI. 349-28S.000.
Duncan, Richard A., to Cane Harvest Inc. Associated runmng gear and
oiler improvements in a two row harvester and piler. 4.380,281, CI.
198-304.000.
Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company: See—
Carlson. Richard H.; and Gatcomb, Gerald L.. 4.380,519, C\.
264-26.000.
Fielding, Max J., 4,380,539. CI. 424-200.000.
Howell. Gary W., 4.380.257. CI. 141-1.000.
Khan. Ausat A.; and Morgan. Richard A., 4.380,618, G.
526-206.000.
Saltzman. Robert S.. 4,380,586, CI. 436-121.000.
Sandell, Lionel S., 4,380,482, CI. 149-21.000.
Sauerbninn, Robert D., 4,380.615. Q. 526-65.000.
Duracell Inc.: See —
Bahary. WUIiam S.. 4.380.578, CI. 429-206.000.
Durkee, Doyle D.: See—
Greynolds, Fred L.; Whiteside, Robert C; and Durkee, Doyle D.,
4,380,183, a. 83-244.000.
Dvonch, William: See —
Sarantakis, Dimitrios; and Dvonch, William, 4,380,535, Q.
424-177.000.
Dwyer Instruments, Inc.: See —
Wozniak, David A., 4,380,173, CI. 73-747.000.
Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Fortsch, Johann; Lorry, Cosmas; and Schweiger, Gustav,
4,380,486, CI. 156-359.000.
Franzmann, Giselher, 4,380,646, CI. 548-502.000.
Steffen, Klaus-Dieter, 4,380,632, CI. 544-279.000.
Dyson, David J., to Ferranti Limited. Laser cutting apparatus.
4.380,694, CI. 219-121.0LG.
E.G.O. Elektro-Gerate Blanc u. Fischer: 5m—
Gossler, Gerhard; and WUde, Eugen, 4,380,116, CI. 29-611.000.
E-Systems, Inc.: See —
Sanders, David E., 4,380,737, CI. 330-134.000.
Eastman, George Y., to Thermacore, Inc. Clean coal power system.
4,380,154, CI. 60-682.000.
Eastman Kodak Company: See —
Coates, Clarence A., Jr.; and Weaver, Max A., 4,380,633, CI.
544-316.000.
Gabrielsen, Rolf S.; Graham, Patricia A.; and Klijanbwicz, James
E., 4,380,666, CI. 564-82.000.
Thomas, Harold T.; and Wrobel, Joseph J., 4,380,769, CI.
346-135.100.
Eaton Corporation: See —
Walsh, Michael M., 4,380,219, CI. 123-198.0OF.
Eaton, Jefferson O., to United Sutes of America, Navy. Safety and
arming device/contact fuze. 4,380,197, CI. 102-228.000.
Eaton, John R.: See —
Desyllas, Peter L.; Radley, Barry G.; Rawsthome, Alasdair; Eaton,
John R.; and Murray, John E., 4,380,797, CI. 364-200.000.
Ebert, Franz- Josef: See—
Burkner, Wolfgant; and Ebert, Franz-Josef, 4,380,285, CI.
198-533.000.
Ecker, Amir L., to Atlantic Richfleld Company. Multiple source heat
pump. 4,380,156, CI. 62-235.100.
Eckhardt, Gert, to Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-G.m.b.H. TrafTic
broadcasting system. 4,380,821, CI. 455-33.000.
Edelman, David J. Caulking spout. 4,380,425, CI. 425-458.000.
Edwards, W. Dale: See-
Cohen, Paul B.; Young, William R.; and Edwards, W. Dale,
4,380,710, CI. 307-475.000.
Efremov. Boris N.: See —
Shevakin. Jury F.; ShpichineUky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Eheim, Franz, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Regulating device for a fuel
injection pump. 4,380,221, CI. 123-343.000.
Eichelberger, Charles W.; and Wojnarowski, Robert J., to General
Electric Company. One-time electrically-activated switch. 4,380,749,
CI. 338-215.000.
Eisnuui, Norman L., to Arvin Industries, Inc. Staked reinforced strips.
4,380,301, CI. 220-73.000.
Elbe, Hans-Ludwig, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the prepa-
ration of azolyl-vinyl ketones. 4,380.628, CI. 542-429.000.
Electricite de France: See-
Roger, GUlet; and Henri. Nithart, 4,380,713, CI. 310-214.000.
Elevator GmbH: See—
Kahkipuro, Matti, 4,380,275, CI. 187-29.00R.
Eli Lilly and Company: See—
Canada. Emily J., 4,380,641, Q. 548-233.000.
Peters, Mary K., 4,380,635, Q. 546-202.000.
EUman, Alan G.; and Garito, Jon C. Dental wire dispenser and mount-
ing tool. 4,380,433, Q. 433-87.000.
Emery Industries, Inc.: See—
Fayter, Richard G., Jr., 4,380.656, CI. 549-473.000.
Endlicher, Frank; and Koch. Rudolf, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
Monolithically integrated two-dimensional image sensor with a
difference forming stage. 4,380,755, Q. 382-68.000.
Endres, Bemhard; and Glombitza, Klaus, to J. S. Staedtler K.G. Clo-
sure cap for a writing instrument. 4,380,403, CI. 401-213.000.
Energy Controls, Inc.: See—
Longini. Richard L., 4,380,167, CI. 73-24.000.
Engelsmann. Dieter, Hoffacker, Franz; Kovacic, Guido; Lermann,
Peter; Luhrig, Hermann; and Wagner, Karl, to Acfa-Gevaert Aktien-
geaellachalt. Film cassette for a photosensitive nlm strip. 4,380,382.
CI. 354-275.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
England, Michael J.: See—
Ingram, Brian; Harries, David A.; and England, Michael J.,
4,380,277, CI. 188-329.000.
English Electric Valve Company Limited: See —
Pickering. Alan H., 4,380,717, CI. 315-39.510.
Enskat, Albert G.: See—
Schneiter, John W.; Reiss, Ronald J.; and Enskat, Albert C,
4,380,310, CI. 222-501.000.
Epson Corporation: See —
Maniyama, Mitsuaki, 4,380,770, CI. 346-140.00R.
Epstein, Martin: See —
Ruckel, Erwin R.; and Epstein, Martin, 4,380,513, CI. 260-104.000.
Erwied, Werner; and Wegemund, Bemd, to Henkel Kommanditgesell-
schaft auf Aktien. Thermoplastic compositions based on vinyl chlo-
ride polymers stabilized with polyhydroxyl compounds. 4,380,597,
a. 524-109.000.
Evans, Doyle R.; and Tuthill, Richard E., to Texas Instruments Incor-
porated. System and method for effecting electrical interconnections
using a flexible media with radially extending electrical conductors.
4,380.357. CI. 339-17.0CF.
Evans, Samueh See —
Rasberger, Michael; and Evans, Samuel, 4,380,515, CI. 260-936.000.
Everett, Dennis; and Jukic, Vjekoslav, to Picker Corporation. Spotfllm-
ing apparatus. 4,380,819, CI. 378-114.000.
Ewich, Gerhard: See-
Bull, Hans; Ewich. Gerhard; Kuschke, Gunther; Maykemper,
Alfred; and Welzel. Josef, 4.380.410. CI. 405-299.000.
Extracorporeal Medical Specialties. Inc.: See—
Taylor. John A.. 4.380.520. CI. 264-40.300.
Exxon Research and Engineering Co.: See-
Gupta, Ramesh, 4.380.529. CI. 422-220.000.
Kelly, Arnold J.. 4.380.786, CI. 361-228.000.
Fairbaim, LeRoy W.: See—
Normann. Richard W.; and Fairbaim. LeRoy W.. 4.380.119, CI.
29-884.000.
Fairchild Camera & Instrument Corp.: See—
Phy. William S.. 4,380,566, CI. 428-192.000.
Fairfield Optical Company, Inc.: See—
Ahem, John; Farmer, Wayne; Hawes. David; and McEvoy, Her-
bert J., Jr.. 4,380,379, CI. 351-106.000.
Falciani, Marco; and Broggi, Renato. to Dobfar S.p.A. N-Carboxy
cefadroxil sodium salt. 4,380,630, CI. 544-30.000.
Farmer. Wayne: See —
Ahem. John; Farmer. Wayne; Hawes, David; and McEvoy, Her-
bert J.. Jr.. 4,380,379, CI. 351-106.000.
Farrar, John: See —
Peart, Leland L.; and Farrar, John, 4,380,763, CI. 340-870.160.
Fayter. Richard G.. Jr.. to Emery Industries, Inc. 2-Vinyl- and 2-ethyl-
cyclopropane carboxylates. 4.380,656, CI. 549-473.000.
Federal Paper Board Co., Inc.: See —
Langston, Joseph, Jr.; and Murray, Robert J., 4,380,314, CI.
229-33.000.
Federmann, Helmut; and Bausch, Joachim, to Felten & Guilleaume
Carlswerk Aktiengesellschaft. Fiber-reinforced drive shaft.
4,380,443, CI. 464-181.000.
Fedorenko. Valentina P.: See —
Shevakin. Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Felix, Raymond A., to Stauffer Chemical Company. Isonitriles as
herbicide extenders. 4,380,468, CI. 71-100.000.
Felten k Guilleaume Carlswerk Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Federmann, Helmut; and Bausch, Joachim, 4,380,443, CI.
464-181.000.
Fenton, Jeff T.; and Muvk, Mark P.. to Conoco Inc. Polyacetal comb
polymers. 4,380,610, CI. 525-400.000.
Ferranti Limited: See —
Dyson, David J., 4,380,694, CI. 219-121.0LG.
Ferro Corporation: See —
Kammann, Karl P., Jr.; Den Herder, Marvin J.; and Wagner,
Terrence L., 4,380,498, CI. 252-48.600.
Kammann. Karl P., Jr.; and Den Herder, Marvin J., 4,380,499, CI.
252-48.600.
Fertell, Paul A.: See—
Cioca, Gheorghe; and Fertell, Paul A., 4,380.474, CI. 106-155.000.
Fielding, Max J., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Nemato-
cidal composition containing 0,0-diethyl 0-{5-phenylisoxazol-3-
yOphosphorothioate and an ethanimidothioate. 4,380,539, CI.
424-200.000.
Fink, Hans-Ferdi: See—
Koemer, GoU; Sanger, Gerd; Fink, Hans-Ferdi; and Grassmann,
Friedhelm, 4,380,503, CI. 252-314.000.
Finke, Paul E.: See—
Witzel, Bruce E.; Finke, Paul E.; and Allison, Debra L., 4,380,645,
CI. 548-430.000.
Fischer, Hermann, to M.A.N.-ROLAND Druckmaschinen Aktien-
gesellschaft. Sheet feeding and aligning apparatus for rotary printing
machine. 4,380,331, CI. 271-11.000.
Fish, Robert E. Safety barrier. 4,380,327, CI. 256-24.000.
Fishman, Harvey E.: See —
Romeo, Arthur L.; Bonelli, Robert T.; and Fishman, Harvey E.,
4,380,716, CI. 315-8.000.
Fisons Limited: See —
Broad, David, 4,380,302, CI. 220-235.000.
Fjeldsted, Thomas P., to Rockwell International Corporation. Four
eleinent infrared objective lens. 4,380,363, CI. 350-1.300.
Flanders, Gale L.: See —
Stevenson, David M.; and Flanders, Gale L., 4,380,829, CI.
455-327.000.
Fleck, Carl M. Apparatus for producing a directed flow of a gaseous
medium utilizing the electric wind principle. 4,380,720, CI.
315-111.910.
Fleming, Robert W., to Wamer-Lambert Company. N-(2,6-Dimethyl-
phenyl)-4,5-dihydro-4,4-dialkyl-2-methylthio- 1 H-imidazole- 1 -car-
boxamides, anticonvulsive composition and method. 4,380,548, CI.
424-273.00R.
Flexible Steel Lacing Company: See —
Pray, Winston C, 4,380,109, CI. 29-466.000.
Fling, George K., to Vought Corporation. Ruid sealing devices.
4,380,342, CI. 277-188.00A.
FMC Corporation: See —
Ager, John W., 4,380,665, CI. 564-61.000.
CaudUl, Stanley D.; and Goode, Frederick R., 4.380.244. CI.
137-355.160.
Franko-Filipasic. Borivoj R.; and Hobson, Philip B., 4,380,654, CI
549-462.000.
Fretz, Edward R., Jr.; and Green, Joseph, 4.380.571. CI.
428-415.000.
Fogell, Leonard L.; Levinc, Samuel R.; and Weinberger, Arnold, to
International Business Machines Corp. Error checking of mutually-
exclusive control signals. 4,380,813, CI. 371-52.000.
Folsom, Lawrence R.; Dineen, John J.; Vitale. Nicholas G.; and Balas,
Charles B., Jr., to Mechanical Technology Incorporated. Diaphragm
displacer Stirling engine powered alternator-compressor. 4,380,152,
CI. 60-520.000.
Fonderie et Ateliers des Sablons: See —
Godat, Jean; Parmenon, Daniel; Krzywdziak, Alain; and Boudin.
Daniel, 4,380,399, CI. 366-289.000.
Foote, James C; and Zander, [>ennis R. Energy storage for indexing
mechanism. 4,380,180, CI. 74-821.000.
Ford Motor Company: See —
Dick, Heinz; and Lux, Hans, 4,380,099, CI. 24-21 LOOP.
Woesler, Ehrenfried, 4,380,324, CI. 248-610.000.
Fork, Werner, to J. M. Voith GmbH. Installation operated with wind or
water power. 4,380,417, CI. 416-108,000.
Fortescue, Stephen M.: See —
Palombo, Gaston; and Fortescue, Stephen M., 4,380.768, CI
346-74.500.
Fortsch, Johann; Lorry, Cosmas; and Schweiger, Gustav, to Dynamit
Nobel Aktiengesellschaft. Machine installation for the production of
thick-walled insulating pipes of foam synthetic resm sheets. 4,380,486,
CI. 156-359.000.
Fory, Werner: See —
Brunner, Hans-Georg; and Fory. Werner. 4.380.640. CI.
548-163.000.
Foucher, Claude: See —
Monnier. Michel J.; Monneraye. Marc A.; Foucher, Claude; and Le
Marchant. Pierre, 4,380,699, CI. 235-492.000
Fouillet, Jean: See —
Curtinot, Jean C; Delestre, Xavier; and Fouillet, Jean. 4,380.747,
CI. 333-202.000.
Fowler, Allan E.; White, Gordon E.; and Sims, Steve A., to Dow
Chemical Company, The. Linear alpha olefin production using a tank
growth reactor. 4,380,684, CI. 585-328.000.
Fowler, Donald W.: See—
Bresie, Don A.; Fowler, Donald W.; and Bums, Jack M., 4,380,242.
CI. 137-113.000.
Fox, Ronald L., to United States of America. Energy. Downholc steam
generator having a downhole oxidant compressor. 4,380,267, CI.
166-303.000.
Franck, Heinz-Gerhard: See—
Stadelhofer, Jurgen; Franck, Heinz-Gerhard; Koch, Karl H.; and
Marrett, Rolf, 4,380,454. CI. 44-l.OOB.
Franken, Adrianus J. J.; Coolen, Franciscus M.; Khoe, Giok D.; Lan-
gerhorst, Jacob; and Smulders, Henricus W. W., to U.S. Philips
Corporation. Detachable connector for optical fibres. 4,380.366, CI.
350-96.210.
Franko-Filipasic, Borivoj R.; and Hobson, Philip B., to FMC Corpora-
tion. Process for preparation of 2,3-dihydro-2,2-dimethyl-7-hydrox-
ybenzofuran. 4,380,654, CI. 549-462.000.
Frantz, Gene A., to Texas Instmments Incorporated. Liquid crystal
display device. 4,380,371, CI. 350-336.000.
Franz, James H., Jr.; and Jones, Stanley W., to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. Shunt field control apparatus and method. 4,380,724, CI.
318-353.000.
Franzmann, Giselher, to Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft. Method
for the N-acylation of aminocarboxylic acids. 4,380,646, CI.
548-502.000.
Frederick, Cecil S., deceased: S«—
Smith, Hoyt L.; Frederick, Cecil S., deceased; and Frederick,
Wallace, administrator, 4,380,330, CI. 270-31.000.
Frederick, Wallace, administrator: S«—
Smith, Hoyt L.; Frederick, Cecil S., deceased; and Frederick,
Wallace, administrator, 4,380,330, CI. 270-31.000.
Freier, Hans- Joachim: See —
Nenhaus, Karl-Friedrich; Perrey, Hermann; Fuhr, Karl; Freier,
Hans-Joachim; and Bendszus, Otto, 4,380,604, CI. 524-873.000.
PIS
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
and Frohberger,
4,380.255, CI.
Karl; Freier,
524-873.000.
Frctz. Edward R., Jr.; and Green. Joseph, to FMC Corporation. Fire
reurdant epoxy resins containing 3-hydroxyalkylphosphine oxides.
4,380.571, CI. 428-415.000.
Fnas, Robert, to Ingram Corporation. Pipe storage system. 4.380,297.
CI. 2II-60.00S.
Friedii, Hans. See —
Gut. Edwm; Arnold, Erwin; and Fnedli. Hans. 4,380,492, CI.
204-67.000.
Fnedmann ft Maier Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Pischinger. Anton, 4,380.222, CI. 123-365.000.
Fruchmann, Peter G.: See —
Liebermann. Howard H.; Fhschmann. Peter G.; and Roscnberry,
George M., Jr., 4.380.572. CI. 428-592.000.
Frohberger. Paul-Ernst: See—
Kraatz, Udo; Jager, Gerhard; Buchel, Karl H.
Paul-Ernst, 4,380.545, CI. 424-269.000.
Fromm AG: See —
Fromm, Peter. 4,380.255, CI. 140-93.200.
Fromm, Peter, to Fromm AG. Hooper apparatus.
140-93.200.
Frontczak, Sunislaw. to DIugolecki, Jacek. a part interest. Methods of
producing foodstufTby malting seeds. 4.380.551. CI. 426-28.000.
Fuchs. Werner: See —
Rieber. Norbcrt; Platz. Rolf; and Fuchs, Werner, 4.380,642, CI.
548-255.000.
Fuhr. Karl: See —
Neuhaus, Karl-Friedrich; Perrey, Hermann; Fuhr,
Hans- Joachim; and Bendszus, Otto. 4.380.604. CI.
Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd.: See—
Takahashi. Kenji; and Miyahara, Junji, 4.380.702. CI. 250-327.200.
Fuji Xerox Co.. Ltd.: See—
Miyao, Fumio; and Tsukioka, Kazumi, 4,380,777, CI. 358-178.000.
Fujii. Takayoshi: See—
Yoshikumi, Chikao; Ohmura. Yoshio; Hirose. Fumio; Ikuzawa.
Masanoh; Matsunaga. Kenichi; Fujii. Takayoshi; Ohhara.
Minoru; and Ando. Takao, 4,380.536. CI. 424-180.000.
Fujikawa. Kanichi: See —
Nishiyama, Ryuzo; Fujikawa, Kanichi; Yokomichi, Isao;
Shigehara. Itaru; and Miyaji, Mikio, 4,380,670, CI. 564-407.000.
Fukui, Muneo; Konno. Yutaka; Kubota. Yukio; Aruga, Masayoshi; and
Kawau, Hiroitsu, to Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Solid
drug preparations. 4.380.534. CI. 424-38.000.
Fukumizu, Shinichi: See —
Hashizume. Shinji; and Fukumizu, Shinichi. 4,380.397. CI.
366-77.000.
Fukuroi. Takco. to Yoshida Kogyo K. K. Slide fastener stringer.
4,380,098, CI. 24-205. 16R.
Fushida, Akira: See —
Kato, Yoshiaki; Fushida, Akira; Ueda, Yasuo; Tohi. Yasusuke; and
Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4.380,196. CI. 101-453.000.
G. D. Societa' per Azioni: See —
Seragnoli. Enzo, 4.380,286, CI. 198-605.000.
Gabriel, Otis C : See—
Petaway, John B.; and Gabriel. Otis C, 4,380.269. CI. 169-51.000.
Gabrielsen, Rolf S.; Graham, Patricia A.; and Klijanowicz, James E., to
Eastman Kodak Company. Color-forming sulfonamidodiphenyla-
mine dye precursor that produces phenazine dye. 4,380,666. CI.
564-82.000.
Gallagher. Ronald B.; and Novits. Michael F., to Pennwalt Corpora-
tion. Room temperature crosslinking unsaturated polyester resins.
4,380,605, CI. 525-14.000.
Gallegos, Adeline, legal representative: See —
Gallegos, Rafael C; Gallegos, Antonio; Gallegos. Robert M.;
Gallegos, Jess E., deceased; and Gallegos, Adeline, legal repre-
senutive, 4,380,191. CI. 99-404.000.
Gallegos, Antonio: See—
Gallegos, Rafael C; Gallegos. Antonio; Gallegos. Robert M.;
Gallegos, Jess E., deceased; and Gallegos, Adeline, legal repre-
sentative. 4.380.191, CI. 99-404.000.
Gallegos, Jess E., deceased: See—
Gallegos, Rafael C; Gallegos, Antonio; Gallegos, Robert M.;
Gallegos, Jess E . deceased; and Gallegos, Adeline, legal repre-
senutive, 4.380.191. CI. 99-404.000.
Gallegos. Rafael C; Gallegos, Antonio; Gallegos, Robert M.; Gallegos,
Jess E., deceased; and by Gallegos, Adeline, legal representative.
Dough forming and cooking apparatus. 4,380,191, CI. 99-404.000.
Gallegos, Robert M.: See—
Gallegos, Rafael C; Gallegos, Antonio; Gallegos, Robert M.;
Gallegos, Jess E.. deceased; and Gallegos. Adeline, legal repre-
sentative. 4,380,191, CI. 99-404.000.
Galloup, Clifford L.; Bula, Roger M.; Klemm, Robert W.; and Wester-
burg, Ralph E., Jr., to Cooper Industries, Inc. Cutting, stripping and
wrapping bit. 4,380,111, CI. 29-564.400.
Gane, Brian R.: See—
Barclay, John L.; and Gane, Brian R., 4,380,681, CI. 568-902.000.
Gant, LeRoy A. Turn signal and hazard signal control circuit.
4,380,753. CI. 340-66.000.
Ganz Muszer Muvek: See —
Ambrus, Valeria; and Karsai, Henrik, 4,380,248, CI. 137-428.000.
Garito, Jon C: See—
Ellman, Alan G.; and Garito. Jon C, 4,380.433. CI. 433-87.000.
Gatcomb, Gerald L.: See —
Carlson, Richard H.; and Gatcomb, Gerald L., 4,380,519, CI.
264-26.000.
Gates Rubber Company, The: See—
Gray, Herbert W.; and Payne. Roger A., 4,380.232, CI. 138-125.000.
Gau. Wolfgang: See —
Stadler. Peter; Koebemick. Wolfgang; Samaan. Samir; and Gau.
Wolfgang. 4,380.625, CI. 536-13.900.
Gebauer, Helmut; and Hafner, Walter, to Consortium fur Elektro-
chemische Industrie GmbH. 2.4-Dialkyl-2,6-heptadienal derivatives,
a process for their preparation, and fragrant and flavoring products
made therewith. 4.380.675, CI. 568-448.000.
Geertsema, Eise B.: See —
Bouman. Anton J.; and Geertsema, Eise B., 4,380,714, CI.
313-549.000.
General Electric: See—
Mark, Victor; Holub, Frederick F.; and Hedges, Charles V.,
4,380.612, CI. 525-439.000.
General Electric Company: See —
Eichelberger, Charles W.; and Wojnarowski, Robert J., 4,380,749,
CI. 338-215.000.
Imam, Imdad; and Bcmd, Leslie H., 4.380,172, CI. 73-659.000.
Kornblit, Morris J., 4,380,760, CI. 340-628.000.
Lee. Minyoung; Szala, Lawrence E.; and Tuft. Roy E.. 4,380,471,
CI. 419-11.000.
Watchko, George R., 4,380,596. CI. 524-86.000.
General Motors Corporation: See —
Blanchard, Houston F.; and Tuchscherer, Lawrence D., 4.380,692,
CI. 200-61. 45R.
Craig, Gale M., 4,380,789, CI. 362-65.000.
Crawford, Daniel A.; and Levijoki, Wayne A., 4,380,418, CI.
417-87.000.
D'Aniello, Michael J., Jr., 4,380,510, CI. 252-466.0PT.
Hoffman, Robert P.; and Chandler, Lavem E., 4,380.359. CI. 339-
17.00F.
Kearney, Mark B., 4,380,728, CI. 323-281.000.
Ludecke, Otto A., 4.380,149, CI. 60-274.000.
General Signal Corporation: See —
Trafford, Larry F., 4,380,358, CI. 339-17.00D.
Georlette, Pierre; and Bouteille, Rene, to Solvay & Cie. Process for the
manufacture of articles from composition comprising modified poly-
olefines and cellulosic fibres. 4.380,522, CI. 264-175.000.
Gergo, Andree M. B.: See —
Wojtowicz, John A.; and Gergo, Andree M. B., 4,380,501, CI.
252-186.240.
Gerin, Merlin: See —
Demeyer, Pierre; and Claudin, Paul. 4,380,785, CI. 361-96.000.
Gessinger, Gemot; and Mercier, Olivier, to BBC Brown, Boveri ft
Company, Ltd. High-damping composite material. 4,380,574, CI.
428-686.000.
Gestetner Manufacturing Limited: See —
Daintrey, Joseph W.; Rushton. John; and Willis, Michael,
4.380.383, CI. 355-3.00R.
Gestrelius, Stina M.; and Kjaer, Jorgen H., to Novo Industri A/S.
Method of deacidifying wine and composition therefor. 4,380,552, CI.
426-52.000.
Giannetti, Vittorio. Electroacoustic transducer for hearing aids.
4,380.689. CI. 179-1 I4.00R.
Girard. Stephen E.: See —
Reid. Robert R.; Winkler. Edward; and Girard, Stephen £.,
4,380.209. CI. 118-253.000.
Glacier GmbH-DEVA Werke: See—
Lichtinghagen, Klaus, 4,380,473, CI. 419-41.000.
Gladky, Viktor T.: See—
Mazurin, Igor M.; Netupsky, Mikhail L.; Shevtsov, Alexandr V.;
Gladky, Viktor T.; Dmitriev, Nikolai A.; Lyapin, Andrei G.;
Polyakov, Alexandr V.; Myshev, Mikhail A.; and Panov, Vladi-
mir v., 4,380,532, CI. 423-469.000.
Glasgow, Lyle E., to United States of America, Energy. Solar receiver
protection means and method for loss of coolant flow. 4,380,229, CI.
126-418.000.
Glinka, John S.; and Zack, Larry E., to Qonaar Corporation. Electronic
interlock for a cash collection receptacle. 4,380,316, CI. 232-16.000.
Glombitza, Klaus: See —
Endres, Bemhard; and Glombitza, Klaus, 4,380,403, CI.
401-213.000.
Godat, Jean; Parmenon, Daniel; Krzywdziak. Alain; and Boudin, Dan-
iel, to Fonderie et Ateliers des Sablons. Mixer for homogenizing a
mixture of products contained in a vessel. 4,380,399, CI. 366-289.000.
Godfrey, Michael F.; and Lynam, David, to Marconi Company, Ltd.,
The. Radar systems. 4.380,765, CI. 343-16.00M.
Goldstein, Kenneth; and Sharpe, Claude A., to Texas Instruments
Incorporated. Controlled antenna tuner. 4.380,767, CI. 343-745.000.
Goode, Frederick R.: See—
Caudill, Stanley D.; and Goode, Frederick R., 4,380,244, CI.
137-355.160.
Goodman, Alvin M., to RCA Corporation. Self aligned aluminum
polycrystalline silicon contact. 4,380,773, CI. 357-23.000.
Gorsuch, Thomas J.: See —
Adier, Ralph P. I.; Gorsuch, Thomas J.; Murty, Yellapu V.; and
Woronicki, Alexander R., 4,380,262, CI. 164-423.000.
Goserud, Dean L. Portable seat. 4,380,208, CI. 1 14-363.000.
Gossler, Gerhard; and Wilde, Eugen, to E.G.O. Elektro-Gerate Blanc
u. Fischer. Radiant electrical heater, as well as method and apparatus
for the manufacture thereof. 4,380,116, CI. 29-611.000.
Goto, Keiichi: See —
Ito, Takeshi; Ishizuka, Shuzo; Goto, Keiichi; and Saito, Keiki,
4.380,284, CI. 198-494.000.
Goto, Kohei: See—
Ikeda, Hiroharu; Goto. Kohei; and Shimozato, Yasuyuki. 4,380.607,
CI. 525-232.000.
APRIL 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
Gotoh, Junichi: See —
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Kitada, Hisashi; Maruyama.
Yasuo; and Gotoh. Junichi, 4,380,608, CI. 525-247.000.
Gottstein, Wilham J., to Bristol-Myers Company. 2^-Chloromethyl-2a-
methylpenain-3a-carboxylic acid sulfone and salts and esters thereof.
4,380.512. CI. 260-245.20R.
Gotze, Volkmar; and Schutt, Dieter, to International Business Machines
Corp. Programmable logic array with self correction of faults.
4,380.811, CI. 371-10.000.
Gould Inc.: See —
Stowe, David W., 4,380,394, CI. 356-358.000.
GPD Inc.: See—
Segar. Richard B.; and Marascalco, Lewis C, 4,380,802, CI.
364-900.000.
Graftieaux, Jean; and Donguy, Rene, to Commissariat a I'Energie
Atomique. Sundard fission product emission device for detecting
failed fuel elements in a nuclear reactor. 4,380,527, CI. 376-245.000.
Graham, Ellis R., to University of Missouri, The Curators of the.
Method and apparatus for measuring moisture tension in leaves of
growing plants. 4,380,169, CI. 73-73.000.
Graham, Patricia A.: See —
Gabrielsen. Rolf S.; Graham. Patricia A.; and Klijanowicz. James
E., 4.380.666. CI. 564-82.000.
Granges Metallverken Aktiebolag: See—
Jonason, Karl G., 4.380.106. CI. 29-157.30A.
Grant. Patrick T.: See—
Blair, Albert; and Grant, Patrick T., 4,380,213, CI. 119-3.000.
Grassmann, Friedhelm: See —
Koemer, Gotz; Sanger. Gerd; Fink, Hans-Ferdi; and Grassmann,
Friedhelm, 4,380,503, CI. 252-314.000.
Gray, Herbert W.; and Payne. Roger A., to Gates Rubber Company,
The. Wire reinforced hose and method. 4,380.252. CI. 138-125.000.
Gray, Roger, to Rudd, Thomas H. Voltage regulator system for motor-
cycles and the like. 4,380,727, CI. 322-28.000.
Green, Joseph: See —
Fretz, Edward R.. Jr.; and Green. Joseph. 4,380,571, CI.
428-415.000.
Greene, Janice L.; and Loza, Roman, to Standard Oil Company. Prepa-
ration of polyamide from dinitrile, diamine, water, and CO2 catalyst.
4,380,623. CI. 528-335.000.
Greenwood. David L. Self-cleaning adhesive dispensing apparatus.
4,380,308. CI. 222-148.000. , ^
Greynolds, Fred L.; Whiteside, Robert C; and Durkee, Doyle D., to
Leesona Corporation. Plastics trim press sheet feeding mechanisms.
4,380.183. CI. 83-244.000.
Griffin. Neil C. to Reliance Electric Company. Compensated load cell.
4.380.175. CI. 73-862.670.
Gross. Daniel, to Battelle Memorial Institute. Optical fiber, having on at
least one of its fronUl extremities a plano-convex microlens joined
with its plane face to said frontol extremity. 4.380.365. CI. 350-96.180.
Gschwend. Heinz W.: See—
Huebner. Charles F.; and Gschwend, Heinz W., 4,380,653, CI.
549-366.000.
GTE Automatic Electric Laboratories, Inc.: See-
Stewart, James A., 4.380.687. CI. 179-2.0BC.
GTE Laboratories Incorporated: See—
Adler. Ralph P. I.; Gorsuch. Thomas J.; Murty. Yellapu V.; and
Woronicki. Alexander R., 4,380,262. CI. 164-423.000.
GTE Products Corporation: See—
Coad, Brian C. 4.380,479, CI. 148-1 1.50P.
Guerra, Rafael E.: See— .
Vance, Fred L., Jr.; Guerra, Rafael E.; and Christenson, Chnsto-
pher P.. 4,380.616, CI. 526-101.000.
Gunderson, Donald J.: See—
Amdt. William A.; Damrau. Wayne A.; and Gunderson. Donald J.,
4,380,396, CI. 356-432.000.
GupU, Ramesh, to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Hydroproc-
essing reactor with extended operating life. 4,380,529, CI.
422-220.000.
Gurley, James R. Internal combustion engine. 4.380.220. CI.
123-226.000. , . .
Gut. Edwin; Arnold. Erwin; and Friedli. Hans, to Swiss Aluminium
Ltd. Method of using a chisel for a crust breaking facility. 4,380,492.
CI. 204-67.000. , , , ,. .,
Gutnick, David L.; Rosenberg, Eugene; Bclsky. Igal; and Zinaida,
Zosim, to Petroleum FermenUtions N.V. »|<-Emulsans. 4,380,504, CI.
252-356.000.
Gventsadze, Tatyana I.: S«—
Karabegov, Mikhail A.; Ovanesian, Aram G.; Mesropian, Eduard
A.; Metreveli, Georgy T.; Karpeev. Anatoly A.; KhoshUna,
Boris K.; and Gventsadze, Tatyana I., 4,380,392, CI. 356-243.000.
Habermehl, Diethard; Rohde, Wolfgang; Kucharzyk, Werner; and
Siebert, Werner, to Bergwerksverband GmbH; and Didier Engi-
neerin GmbH. Method of and apparatus for drying and preheating
coking coal in a flight stream tube. 4.380,125, CI. 34-10.000.
Hacoba TextilnMSchinen GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Bous, Karl, 4,380,158. CI. 68-205.00R.
Hafner Walter* See—
Gebauer. Helmut; and Hafner, Walter, 4,380,675. CI. 568-448.000.
Haulund, Bengt G.: See— ^,
Sandman. Carl-Erik; and Hagglund, Bengt G., 4,380,561. CI.
427-421.000:
HaKue International: See —
LaHaye. Patil G.; and Bjerklie. John W.. 4,380,429, CI. 431-1 15.000.
Hall, Gaddis G. Clevis thimble connector. 4,380.404, CI. 403-79.000.
Hallcher. Richard C : See—
Coleman, James P.; Hallcher, Richard C; and McMackins, Dudley
E.. 4,380.650. CI. 549-326.000.
Hallford, Ben R., to Rockwell International Corporation Symmetnc
microwave mixer with improved isolation. 4,380,831, CI.
455-327.000.
Hamada. Minoru: See —
Matsuzaki, Kazuhiko; Hamada, Minoru; and Sakurai, Hisaya.
4.380,620, CI. 528-232.000.
Hametner, Albert L.: See—
Soderberg, Mark S.; Hametner. Albert L ; Leppink, Herman F.;
and Strand. David £.. 4,380,295, CI. 209-558.000.
Hammann, Ingeborg: See—
Maurer, Fritz; Schroder, Rolf; Hammann. Ingeborg; and Stendel,
Wilhelm, 4,380,538, CI. 424-200.000.
Hamon-Sobelco. S.A.: See —
Bosne. Jacques G. P. E.. 4,380,517, CI. 261-142.000.
Hang, Kenneth W.: See—
Prabhu, Ashok N.; and Hang. Kenneth W., 4,380,750. CI.
338-308.000.
Hannon, William B. Nail clipping retainer. 4,380.120. CI 30-28.000
Hanotier, Jacques D. V.; and Dauby, Jacques F., to Labofina. S.A.
Process for the purification of terephthalic acid. 4.380.662, CI.
562-486.000.
Hanser, Paul E.. to HWH Corporation. Log splitter. 4.380.258, CI.
144-193.00A.
Hansson. Erik G. Clasping device. 4,380,102, CI. 24-248.0SA.
Hanyu, Susumu; and Koide, Akio, to Janome Sewing Machine Co. Ltd.
Needle and feed cam arrangement for a zig zag sewing machine.
4,380,204, CI. 112-158.0OA.
Hardigg Industries, Inc.: See —
Hardigg, James S., 4,380,577. CI. 429-175.000.
Hardigg, James S., to Hardigg Industries, Inc. Suggered teeth cover.
4,380.577, CI. 429-175.000.
Harding, Geoffrey; and Wagner, Wolfgang, to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion. Method for examining a body with penetrating radiation.
4,380,817, CI. 378-87.000.
Harig, Robert G., to Darling Store Fixtures. Method of farming a
mitered joint. 4,380,110, CI. 29-525.000.
Harig, Robert G, to Dariing Store Fixtures. Knock down store display
fixture. 4,380,298, CI. 211-189.000.
Harr, Robert G.; and Soli, Gaylord T., to America's Cup, Inc. FloUtion
vest. 4,380,441, CI. 441-112.000.
Harries, David A.: See—
Ingram, Brian; Harries, David A.; and England, Michael J.,
4,380,277, CI. 188-329.000.
Harris Corporation: See—
Cohen, Paul B.; Young, William R.; and Edwards. W. Dale.
4.380.710. CI. 307-475.000.
Wagner. Robert S.. 4,380.738. CI. 330-151.000
Hart. Comelis M.. to U.S. Philips Corporation. I^L With polysilicon
diodes and interconnects. 4.380.708. CI. 307-457.000.
Hart. Granville S.: See— „ , ^,
Brandewie. Joseph E.; and Hart. Granville S.. 4,380,117. CI.
29-742.000.
Hart. Patrick J., to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Frequency/phase
locked loop circuit using digiully controlled oscillator. 4.380.742. CI.
331-l.OOA.
Hartle, Ronald J.: See—
HoUstein. Thomas E.; and Hartle.
239-697.000.
Hashimoto. Shigeyoshi: See— .,o„,^. ^,
Suzuki. Haruo; and Hashimoto. Shigeyoshi. 4,380.261, CI.
164-120.000. ^ ,
Hashizume, Shinji; and Fukumizu, Shinichi, to Kobe Steel. Ltd. Duplex
type continuous mixer. 4,380,397, CI. 366-77.000.
Haslam, Alan A.; Isalski, Wieslaw H.; and Tomlinson, Terence R., to
Petrocarbon Developments Ltd. Recovery of hydrogen from ammo-
nia synthesi-^ purge gas. 4,380,461, CI. 62-11.000.
Hasler, Barbara: See — ,
Beinvogl, Willy; and Hasler, Barbara. 4.380.489, CI. 156-643.000.
Hasuo. Masayoshi; Suga. Yoshinori; Kitada, Hisashi; Maruyama. Yasuo;
and Gotoh, Junichi, to Miteubishi Chemical Industries, Ltd. Process
for producing propylene-ethylene block copolymer. 4,380.608, CI.
525-247.000.
Haubner, Georg: See—
Wesemeyer, Jurgen; Haubner, Georg; and Meier, Werner,
4.380.225. CI. 123-613.000.
""Nkimer. Gundolf; and Hauer. Kurt. 4.380,121, CI. 3042.000.
Hawes, David: See— ^ ^. ^ „
Ahem, John; Farmer, Wayne; Hawes, David; and McEvoy, Her-
bert J., Jr., 4.380,379. CI. 351-106.000.
"^YMiashita, Akio; liid Hayami, Masaaki. 4.380,629, CI. 542-455.000.
Haynes. Robert: See—
Thomson. George A.; and Haynes. Robert. 4.380,199. CI.
105-225.000.
Hazeltine Corporation: See— ^ ^ ^^ « c
Romeo. Arthur L.; Bonelli, Robert T.; and Fishman. Harvey E.,
4.380.716. CI. 315-8.000.
Hedges, Charles V.: See— , ,,
Mark. Victor; Holub. Frederick F.; and Hedges, Charles V.,
4,380,612, CI. 525-439.000. , , _^
Hefner, Irving V. Antifreeze cover assembly for external fauceU.
4.380,245. CI. 137-375.000.
Ronald J., 4,380,320, CI.
PI 10
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
and Lazzari, Jean-Pierre,
Hehl, Karl Compact hydraulic drive for die closing unit of injection
molding machine 4,380,427, CI. 425-590.000.
Hcitmann, Wilhelm: See—
Sommer. August; Heitmann, Wilhelm; and Brucker. Rainer
4.380,509. CI. 252-453.000.
Helle, Michel: See—
Desserre, Jacques; Helle, Michel;
4,380,784. CI. 360-126.000.
Heller, William C. Jr.: See—
Rcpik. Clyde P.; and Leatherman, Alfred F.. 4,380,484, CI
156-251.000.
Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft auf Aktien: See—
Erwied, Werner; and Wegemund, Bemd, 4,380,597, CI
524-109.000.
Henri, Nithart: See-
Roger, Gillet; and Henri, Nithart, 4,380,713, CI. 310-214.000.
Henry. William J , to Milliken Research Corporation. Belt false twisting
system. 4,380.144, CI. 57-286.000.
Hercules Incorporated: See—
Bankert, Ralph A., 4,380,603, CI. 524-598.000.
Dumas, David H., 4,380.602, CI. 524-598.000.
Hermann Hemscheidt Maschinenfabrik GmbH & Co.: See-
Bull. Hans; Ewich, Gerhard; Kuschke, Gunther; Maykemper,
Alfred; and Welzel. Josef, 4,380,410, CI. 405-299.000.
Higashiyama. Naotoshi; and Doi, Kazuyuki, to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd. Multi-channel signal processing circuit formed in a semiconduc-
tor integrated circuit. 4,380,823, CI. 455-143.000.
Higgins, David E.: See—
Nield, Eric; Higgins, David E.; and Young, Mark W., 4,380,621, CI
528-287.000.
Higginson, Roy C; and Whiteman, Paul L., to Morgan Trailer MFG.
Co. Latch mechanism for walk ramps. 4,380,415, CI. 414-537.000.
Hill, Eugene E.; Scnmshaw, Marvin S.; and Showalter, Edward W., to
Canadian Patents & Development Limited. Thinned array transducer
for sonar. 4,380,808, CI. 367-153.000.
Hill, John; and Bannister, Royston W. Bobbins for electrical coils
4.380,748, CI. 335-151.000.
Hirau, Atsumi; Tajima, Osamu; Kaneda, Isami; Sugiyama. Hiroyuki;
Saito, Takashi; and Mochizuki, Masafumi, to Victor Company of
Japan, Ltd. Disc-shaped recording medium reproducine apparatus
4,380,780. CI. 360-97.000.
Hirata, Atsumi, to Victor Company of Japan, Ltd. Disc-shaped record-
ing medium reproducing apparatus. 4,380,781. CI. 360-97.000.
Hirato. Akira: See—
Matsufuji, Teruo; Hirato, Akira; and Kawada, Yoshihiro, 4,380.690.
CI. 179-170.0NC.
Hirose, Fumio: See—
Yoshikumi, Chikao; Ohmura, Yoshio; Hirose, Fumio; Ikuzawa,
Masanori; Matsunaga, Kenichi; Fujii, Takayoshi; Ohhara,
Minoru; and Ando, Takao, 4,380,536, CI. 424-180.000.
Hirose, Yasuyuki; Shimaoka, Motohiro; Saito, Shoichiro; and Kowagu-
chi, Toru, to Alps Electric Co., Ltd. Drive apparatus for flexible
magnetic discs. 4.380,782, CI. 360-99.000.
Hiuchi, Ltd.: See—
Ibe, Hidefumi, 4,380,168, CI. 73-40.50R.
Inoue, Takao, 4,380,824, CI. 455-143.000.
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuharu; Imamura, Yoshinori;
Auka, Saburo; Tanaka, Yasuo; Matsubara, Hirokazu; Takasaki!
Yukio; and Maruyama, Eiichi, 4,380,557, CI. 427-38.000.
Kaku, Masaro; Sawaki, Yasumasa; and Ando, Kunio, 4,380,729. CI
323-285.000.
Kaneki, Tadashi; and Takeda, Kazuo, 4.380.405, CI. 403-318.000.
Kuniyoshi, Shinji; Takanashi, Akihiro; and Kurosaki. Toshiei,
4,380,395, CI. 356-401.000.
Hitzman, Donald O., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Fermentation
apparatus. 4,380,584, CI. 435-313.000.
Ho. Roland: See—
Wisnouskas. Joseph S.; and Ho, Roland, 4,380.531. CI. 423-316 000
Hobson, Philip B.: See—
Franko-Filipasic, Borivoj R.; and Hobson, Philip B., 4,380.654, CI.
549-462.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Roscher, Gunter; Schaum, Helmut; and Schmitz. Heinz, 4,380.663,
CI. 562-536.000.
Hoei Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Nishizawa, Masayuki, 4,380,791. CI. 362-231.000.
Hofer, Peter H., to International Harvester Co. Abrasive liquid iet
cutting. 4.380.138. CI. 51-321.000.
Hoffacker, Franz: See—
Engelsmann, Dieter; Hoffacker, Franz; Kovacic. Guido; Lermann.
Peter; Luhrig, Hermann; and Wagner, Karl, 4,380,382, CI.
354-275.000.
Hoffman, Robert P.; and Chandler. Lavem E.. to General Motors
Corporation. Electrical connector for an instrument panel. 4,380.359,
CI. 339-I7.00F. K- . . .
Hoffman. William F. Trailer tow locking device. 4,380.160. CI.
Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.: See—
Dom. Franz. 4,380.544. CI. 424-263.000.
Suchy. Milos, 4.380.661. CI. 560-62.000,
Hoglund. Nils. Grinding wheel dressing apparatus. 4,380,227, CI. 125-
Holcomb, Gayle, to V-T Rhythms. Inc. Talking metronome. 4,380.185.
CI. 84-1.030.
Holbtein, Thomas E.; and Hartle, Ronald J., to Nordson Corporation.
Electrosutic powder spray gun nozzle. 4,380.320, CI. 239-697.000.
F.; and Hedges, Charles V.,
Holub, Frederick F.: See-
Mark, Victor; Holub, Frederick
4,380,612, CI. 525-439.000.
Honaga, Susumu: See —
Kawabata, Minoru; Honaga, Susumu; and Takahashi. Kenii.
4.380.472. CI. 419-9.000.
Honeywell Inc.: See —
Searle, John L., 4,380,400, CI. 374-37.000.
Hopkins, John R.: See-
Waters, Kenneth H.; Hopkins, John R.; and Payton, Charles E..
4,380,806, CI. 367-27.000.
Hori, Fumihisa; and Miyajima. Mikio. to Alps Electric Co., Ltd. Type
setting device for printers. 4,380,195, CI. 101-93.170.
Horsewell, Henry G., to British-American Tobacco Company Limited
Smoking articles. 4,380,241. CI. 131-336.000.
Hosoda, Yoshikazu; Ishihara. Shigenobu; and Kobayashi. Shoichi, to
Showa Denko K.K. Aqueous dispersion of water-soluble polymer
composition. 4.380,600, CI. 524-458.000.
Hospital For Sick Children, The: See-
Crawford, John S.; and Wainman, Roy, 4,380.239, CI. 604-28.000.
Howe, Robert K.; and Lee, Len F., to Monsanto Company. 5-Aryl-4-
isothiazolecarboxylic acids and derivatives. 4,380,465. CI. 71-90.000
Howell, Gary W., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Method and apparatus for processing fluid materials. 4,380,257. CI
141-1.000.
Hoy, Harold D.: See—
MacLean, John P.; Cantwell, J. Edward; Brown, John D.- and
Hoy, Harold D., 4,380,105, CI. 29-157.00R.
Huebner, Charles F.; and Gschwend, Heinz W.. to Ciba-Geigy Corpo-
ration. 1 ,5-Bis-( 1 ,4-benzodioxin-2-yl)-3-azapenUne- 1,5-diols.
4,380,653, CI. 549-366.000.
Humphreys, Neal B.: See-
Joy, Ira L.; and Humphreys, Neal B., 4,380,491, CI. 1S9-4.00B.
HWH Corporation: See—
Hanser, Paul E., 4,380,258, CI. 144-193.00A.
Hydrocarbon Research, Inc.: See—
Sirkar, Amalesh K., 4,380,678, CI. 568-863.000.
Ibe, Hidefumi, to Hitachi, Ltd. Sodium leakage detection system and
method of controlling the same. 4,380,168, CI. 73-40.50R.
Ichikawa, Junju, to Kagawa & Co., Ltd. Greeting card with open work
engraving thereon. 4,380,128, CI. 40-158.00R.
Ikeda, Hiroharu; Goto, Kohei; and Shimozato, Yasuyuki, to Japan
Synthetic Rubber Co.. Ltd. Rubber composition having high modu-
lus of elasticity and process for preparing same. 4,380.607. CI
525-232.000. f »~ e
Ikeda, Toshimitsu: See —
Matsumoto, Shoji; Matsui, Toshikazu; Ikeda, Toshimitsu; Kozuka,
Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi; and Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4,380.579.
CI. 430-126.000.
Ikuzawa, Masanori: See—
Yoshikumi. Chikao; Ohmura. Yoshio; Hirose. Fumio;
Masanori; Matsunaga, Kenichi; Fujii, Takayoshi;
Minoru; and Ando, Takao, 4,380,536, CI. 424-180.000.
Illinois Tool Works Inc.: See—
Dewey, George G., 4,380.413, CI. 411-161.000.
Imam, Imdad; and Bemd, Leslie H., to General Electric Company.
On-line rotor crack detection. 4,380,172, CI. 73-659.000.
Imamura, Yoshinori: See —
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuharu; Imamura, Yoshinori;
Ataka, Saburo; Tanaka, Yasuo; Matsubara, Hirokazu; Takasaki,
Yukio; and Maruyama, Eiichi, 4,380,557, CI. 427-38.000.
IMI Kynoch Limited: See—
Wortley, John P. A.; and Woolner, John. 4.380.493, CI. 204-
105.00M.
Imperial Chemical Industries Limited: See —
Nield. Eric; Higgins, David E.; and Young, Mark W., 4,380,621, CI.
528-287.000.
Inami. Mamoru: See —
Tanaka. Yoshiaki; and Inami, Mamoru, 4,380,732, CI. 324-77.00D.
Incosym, Inc.: .See —
Craig, Robert J. G., 4.380,108. CI. 29-434.000.
Industrial Manufacturers of Orosi: See —
Morris. Billy J.. 4,380,294, CI. 209-540.000.
Ingram, Brian; Harries, David A.; and England, Michael J., to Lucas
Industries Limited. Automatic slack adjusters for vehicle shoe-drum
brakes. 4,380,277, CI. 188-329.000.
Ingram Corporation: See —
Frias, Robert, 4.380,297, CI. 211-60.00S.
Innomed Corporation: See —
Saferstein, Al; and Spector, Gilbert, 4,380,790, CI. 362-231.000.
Inoue, Takao, to Hitachi, Ltd. Receiving reproducing system.
4,380,824, CI. 455-143.000.
Institut Cerac S.A.: See-
Morris, David G., 4,380,421, CI. 425-78.000.
Institut Francais Du Petrole: See—
Boumonville, Jean-Paul; Snappe, Roger; Miquel, Jean; and Mar-
tino, Germain, 4.380.673, CI. 568-361.000.
Institute Straunann: See —
Colucci, Bartholomew A.; and Comte, Pierre, 4.380,238, CI.
128-346.000.
International Business Machines Corp.: See —
Fogell, Leonard L.; Levine. Samuel R.; and Weinberger, Arnold,
4,380,813, CI. 371-52.000.
Gotze, VoUunar; and Schutt, Dieter, 4,380.811. CI. 371-10.000.
Ikuzawa,
Ohhara,
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
International Computers Ltd.: See—
Desyllas, Peter L.; Radley. Barry G.; Rawsthome, Alasdair; Eaton,
John R.; and Murray, John E., 4,380,797, CI. 364-200.000.
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.: See —
Boden, Richard M., 4,380,500. CI. 252-174.110.
Boden, Richard M.; Oekker, Lambert; Schmitt, Frederick L.; and
Van Loveren, Augustinus G., 4,380,658, CI. 549-525.000.
Boden, Richard M.. 4,380,674. CI. 568-417.000.
International Harvester Co.: See—
Hofer, Peter H.. 4.380.138, CI. 51-321.000.
Lasken, Richard D., 4.380,278, CI. 192-3.580.
International Shoe Machine Corporation: See—
Runions, Sinville, 4,380,524, CI. 264-263.000.
Intichar, Lutz; Schnapper. Christoph; and Weghaupt, Erich, to Siemens
Aktiengesellschaft. Arrangement for cooling a superconducting
magnet winding. 4,380,712, CI. 310-52.000.
Isalski, Wieslaw H.: See—
Haslam, Alan A.; Isalski, Wieslaw H.; and Tomlinson, Terence R.,
4,380,461, CI. 62-11.000.
Ishida, Yasuo. to Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Hexahydroisoindole
derivatives, and their production and use. 4,380,466, CI. 71-96.000.
Ishihara Sangyo Kaisha Ltd.: See—
Nishiyama. Ryuzo; Fujikawa. Kanichi; Yokomichi, Isao;
Shigehara, lUru; and Miyaji. Mikio. 4.380.670. CI. 564-407.000.
Ishihara, Shigenobu: See—
Hosoda, Yoshikazu; Ishihara, Shigenobu; and Kobayashi, Shoichi,
4,380,600, CI. 524-458.000.
Ishii, Hiromichi; Matsuzawa, Hideo; Kobayashi, Masao; and Yamada,
Kantaro, to Mitsubishi Rayon Company, Ltd. Process for producing
unsaturated aldehydes, and unsaturated fatty acids. 4,380,664, CI.
562-546.000.
Ishii, Tadashi, to Kobishi Electric Co., Ltd. Motor actuated bell.
4,380,758, CI. 340-396.000.
Ishikawa, Shinzo: See —
Shono, Hiroaki; Noji, Toshio; and Ishikawa, Shinzo, 4,380,462, CI.
65-1.000.
Ishikawajima-Harima Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kuwano, Hiroaki, 4,380,164, CI. 72-21.000.
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuharu; Imamura. Yoshinori; Ataka,
Saburo; Tanaka. Yasuo; Matsubara. Hirokazu; Takasaki. Yukio; and
Maniyama, Eiichi. to Hitachi. Ltd. Method of production of image
pickup device. 4.380.557. CI. 427-38.000.
Ishizuka, Shuzo: See—
Ito. Takeshi; Ishizuka, Shuzo; Goto, Keiichi; and Saito, Keiki,
4,380,284, CI. 198-494.000.
Israel Aircraft Industries, Ltd.: See-
Sherman, Moshe, 4,380,725, CI. 320-35.000.
Italiano, Victor J., to NCR Corporation. Low ink indication for ink jet
print head. 4,380,772, CI. 346-140.00R.
Ito, Takeshi; Ishizuka, Shuzo; Goto, Keiichi; and Saito, Keiki. to Cater-
pillar Mitsubishi Ltd. Chip conveyer. 4,380,284. CI. 198-494.000.
ITW Fastex Italia S.p.A.: See—
Bassi. Alberto, 4.380,161. CI. 70-168.000.
Ivanov. Ev^eny A.: See—
Shevakm. Jury F.; Shpichinetsky. Efim S.; Fedorenko. Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Iwasaki Tsushinki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Matsufuji. Teruo; Hirato. Akira; and Kawada. Yoshihiro. 4,380,690,
CI. 179-170.0NC.
J. M. Voith GmbH: See-
Fork, Werner, 4,380,417, CI. 416-108.000.
J. S. Staedtler K.G.: See—
Endres. Bemhard; and Glombitza, Klaus, 4,380,403, CI.
401-213.000.
Jagenberg Werke: See—
Zodrow, Rudolf, 4,380.487, CI. 156-568.000.
Jager, Gerhard: See—
Kraatz, Udo; Jager, Gerhard; Buchel, Karl H.; and Frohberger,
Paul-Ernst, 4,380.545. CI. 424-269.000.
Jagger. Peter C, to Little People Limited. Cutlery improvements for
aiding effective and correct use thereof. 4,380,122, CI. 30-343.000.
Jakobsen, Kjell M.; and Nilsson, Claes T., to PLM Aktiebolag. Process
for the production of a blank for subseiquent shaping by blow-mold-
ing. 4,380,525, CI. 264-521.000.
Jakubowski, Karl-Heinz: See-
Abraham, Uwe; Jakubowski, Karl-Heinz; and Koster, Wilhelm,
4,380,274, CI. 180-308.000.
James River Corporation of Virginia: See—
VanderLugt, Thomas, Jr.. 4,380.447. CI. 493-102.000.
Janome Sewing Machine Co. Ltd.: See—
Hanyu, Susumu; and Koide, Akio, 4,380,204, CI. 112-1S8.00A.
Japan Synthetic Rubber Co., Ltd.: See—
Ikeda, Hiroharu; Goto, Kohei; and Shimozato, Yasuyuki, 4,380.607.
CI. 525-232.000.
Jefferson, John R.; and Skinner, Robert T. J., to Lucas Industries
Limited. Liquid fuel injection pumping apparatus. 4,380,223, CI.
123-383.000.
Jobsis, Frans F.; Keizer, Johannes H.; and Overaker, Ronald F., to
Duke University, Inc. Apparatus for monitoring metabolism in body
organs. 4.380.240, O. 128-633.000.
Joby, Michael J.: See —
Bunage, Robert G.; and Joby, Michael J., 4.380,148, Q. 60-39.281.
Johnson & Johnson/Mona Industries, Inc.: See—
Lindemann, Martin K. O.; Mayhew, Raymond L.; O'Lenick.
Anthony J.. Jr.; and Verdicchio. Robert J.. 4,380.637. Q.
548-112.000.
Johnson, Michael R., to Pfizer. 9-Hydroxyoctahydrobenzo(c)quinohnes
and their pharmaceutical compositions and method of use. 4.380.542.
CI. 424-248.550.
Jonason. Karl G.. to Granges Metallverken Aktiebolag. AiaemUy
apparatus. 4.380.106. CI. 29-1 57.30A;
Jones. Andrew. Jr. Game device. 4.380,339. Q. 273-384.000.
Jones. Stanley W.: See-
Franz. James H.. Jr.; and Jones. Stanley W., 4.380,724, CI.
318-353.000.
Joubert, Antoine; Joubert, Thierry; Bichard, Bernard; and Joubert,
Jean, to Joubert S.A. Tie hook, particularly rubber spring hook.
4,380,101,0.24-237.000.
Joubert, Jean: See—
Joubert, Antoine; Joubert, Thierry; Bichard, Bernard; and Joubert
Jean, 4.380,101. CI. 24-237.000.
Joubert S.A.: See—
Joubert. Antoine; Joubert. Thierry; Bichard, Bernard; and Joubert.
Jean. 4.380,101. CI. 24-237.000.
Joubert, Thierry: See—
Joubert, Antoine; Joubert, Thierry; Bichard, Bernard; and Joubert,
Jean, 4,380,101, CI. 24-237.000.
Joy, Ira L.; and Humphreys, Neal B.. to Combustion Engineering. Inc.
Spray nozzle assembly for spray dryer. 4,380,491. CI. 159-4.00B.
Joy Manufacturing Company: See —
Bodimer, Theodore B.; David, Joseph S.; and Calder, Alexander
W., 4,380.288. CI. 198-820.000.
Juenemann. Werner: See—
LoeOler. Hermann; Juenemann. Werner; and Lamm. Gunther.
4,380.452. CI. 8-532.000.
Jukic, Vjekoslav: See-
Everett, Dennis; and Jukic, Vjekoslav, 4,380.819, CI. 378-114.000.
Jung, Johann: See—
Sauter, Hubert; Ammermann. Eberhard; Rentzea, Costin; Zeeh.
Bemd; Jung. Johann; and Pommer. Emst-Heinrich. 4,380,546,
CI. 424-269.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha: See—
Shimbo. Masafumi. 4.380.481, CI. 148-187.000.
Taguchi. Masaaki. 4.380.372. CI. 350-346.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Fujimi Hoseisho: See—
Nagane. Masatoshi. 4.380.205. CI. 112-304.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha: See—
Maniyama, Mitsuaki. 4.380.770. CI. 346-140.00R.
Kaestner, Raymond W.: See—
MinkofT, Michael D.; and Kaestner, Raymond W.. 4.380,334. CI.
273-l.OOE.
Kagawa & Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ichikawa, Junju, 4,380,128, CI. 4O-158.00R.
Kahkipuro, Matti, to Elevator GmbH. Apparatus for interfacing weigh-
ing dau with a lift control system. 4,380,275, CI. 187-29.00R.
Kaji, Ryoji: See—
Kawatani, Kimio; Tsujimoto, Shigenori; and Kaji, Ryoji. 4,380.475,
CI. 106-238.000.
Kaku, Masaro; Sawaki, Yasumasa; and Ando. Kunio, to Hitachi, Ltd.
Switching regulator. 4,380.729, CI. 323-285.000.
Kalle. Niederlassung der Hoechst AG: See—
Moraw. Roland; and Schadlich. Gunther, 4.380.388, CI. 355-15.000.
Kallen. George H.. to Union Carbide Corporation. Image blanking
circuit for line follower. 4.380,700. CI. 250-202.000.
Kamen. Dean, to Baxter Travenol Laboratories. Inc. Infusion needle
attachment. 4,380,234. CI. 604-180.000.
Kamioka, Seiichi; Manabe, Masahiko; and Sakai, Rokuro. Apparatus for
separating the filament bundle of fibrous material. 4,380,104, CI.
28-282.000.
Kammann, Karl P., Jr.; Den Herder, Marvin J.; and Wagner, Terrence
L., to Ferro Corporation. Sulfurizied, transesterified oil additives and
their use in a lubricating oil and a fuel. 4,380,498. CI. 252-48.600.
Kammann, Karl P., Jr.; and Den Herder, Marvin J., to Ferro Corpora-
tion. Sulfurized fatty oil additives and their use in a lubricating oil and
a fuel. 4.380.499. CI. 252-48.600.
Kanamori. Takeshi: See—
Kimura. Yukichi; and Kanamori, Takeshi, 4,380,506, CI.
252-398.000.
Kanamori, Tenitoshi: See —
Mitachi, Seiko; Shibata, Shuichi; Kanamori, Tenitoshi; Manabe,
Toyotaka; and Yasu, Mitsuho, 4,380,588, CI. 501-37.000.
Kandler, William C, to Tecumaeh Products Company. Economical
engine construction. 4,380,216, CI. 123-90.650.
Kaneaki, Tetsuhiko; Murase, KJazuhiko; and Shigeta, Junnosuke, to
Matsushita Electrical Industrial Co., Ltd. Electronic musical initni-
ment. 4,380,184, CI. 84-1.010.
Kaneda, Isami: See —
Hirata, Atsumi; Tajima, Osamu; Kaneda, Isami; Sugiyama,
Hiroyuki; Saito, Takashi; and Mochizuki, Maaafiuni, 4,380,780,
CI. 360-97.000.
Kaneki, Tadashi; and Takeda, Kazuo, to Hitachi, Ltd. Head flange
mounting device for turbo-machine. 4,380.405, CI. 403-318.000.
Kaneko, Dentaro: See —
Kohama, Hiroyuki; Tamiya, Maaani; Mizukami, Sunichi; Kaneko,
Dentaro; and Kimura, Yoahio, 4,380,328, Q. 266-177.000.
Kaneko, Shuichiro: See—
Ozaki, Yoshihiro; Kandto, Shuichiro; Kuniyoahi, Maiayuki;
Kondo, Sboji; and Omata, Yasukuni, 4,380,385, Q. 3S5-3.0TR.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Kania, Charles M.: See—
Welsh, David A.; Dowbenko, Rostyslaw; Das. Suryya K.; Kama,
Charles M.; and Christcnson, Roger M., 4,380,601, CI.
524-555.000.
Kantorowicz, Gerard, to Thomson - CSF. Stabilized oscillator for
microwaves with frequency conversion and its solid sute construc-
tion. 4,380,744, CI. 331-1O7.0OR.
Kaplan, Leonard A., to RCA Corporation. Current amplifier.
4,380.740, CI. 330-288.000.
Karabegov, Mikhail A.; Ovanesian, Aram G.; Mesropian, Eduard A.;
Metreveli, Georgy T.; Karpeev, Anatoly A.; Khoshtaria, Boris K.;
and Gventsadze, Tatyana I. Method and apparatus for calibration of
instruments serving to count and to determine the size of particles
suspended in dispersion medium. 4,380,392. CI. 356-243.000.
Karkfin. Roman Y.; Rumba, Alma A.; and Azanda, Via K. Method of
preparing seeding material for production of citric acid. 4,380,583, CI.
435-242.000.
Karpeev, Anatoly A.: See —
Karabegov, Mikhail A.; Ovanesian, Aram G.; Mesropian, Eduard
A. Metreveli, Georgy T.; Karpeev, Anatoly A.; Khoshtaria,
Boris K.; and Gventsadze, Tatyana I., 4,380,392, CI. 356-243.000.
Karpisek, Ladislav S. Assembly kit for a holder for growth supporting
medium. 4.380,136, CI. 47-83.000.
Karsai, Henrik: See —
Ambrus, Valeria; and Karsai, Henrik, 4,380,248, CI. 137-428.000.
Kass, John J.: See —
Behlmer. Wilbur D.; and Kass, John J., 4,380,249, CI. 137-596.200.
Kato Hatsujo Kaisha., Ltd.: See—
Nishida, Haniki; and Shinozaki, Nobuya. 4,380,096, CI. 24-20.00R.
Kato, Jyoji: See—
Yoneda. Naoto; Kato. Jyoji; and Kinashi, Keizo, 4,380,644, CI.
548-321.000.
Kato. Yoshiaki; Fushida. Akira; Ueda, Yasuo; Tohi, Yasusuke; and
Aizawa, Tatsuo, to Mita Industrial Company Limited. Plate for
lithography or offset printing. 4,380,196, CI. 101-453.000.
Kaufman, John W.: See—
Driver, Donald E.; and Kaufman, John W., 4,380,118, CI.
29-747.000.
Kawabau. Minoru; Honaga, Susumu; and Takahashi, Kenji, to Toyoda
Koki Kabushiki Kaisha. Method for producing pressure plates used in
hydraulic pumps. 4,380,472, CI. 419-9.000.
Kawada, Yoshihiro: See—
Matsufuji, Teruo; Hirato, Akira; and Kawada, Yoshihiro, 4,380,690,
CI. 179-170.0NC.
Kawasaki, Teruo: See —
Yano, Hiroshi; Kawasaki, Teruo; Nomura, Hiroyuki; and Takeu-
chi, Mikio, 4,380,733, CI. 324-166.000.
Kawata, Hiroitsu: See —
Fukui, Muneo; Konno, Yutaka; Kubota, Yukio; Aruga, Masayoshi;
and Kawata, Hiroitsu, 4,380,534, CI. 424-38.000.
Kawatani. Kimio; Tsujimoto, Shigenori; and Kaji, Ryoji, to Arakawa
Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Process for preparing aqueous
dispersion of rosin-base materials. 4,380,475, CI. 106-238.000.
Kayc, Saul, to Ben Venue Laboratories, Inc. Sterilizer with inflatable
article holder. 4.380.530, CI. 422-300.000.
Kazlaukas, Gasparas. to United States of America, Navy. Internal tube
welding apparatus. 4.380,697, CI. 219-136.000.
Kearney, Mark B., to General Motors Corporation. Circuit for generat-
ing a temperature stabilized output signal. 4,380,728, CI. 323-281.000.
Kearney & Trecker Corporation: See—
Ostby, Lyle D., 4.380.796, CI. 364-171.000.
Keifer, Terry A., to Check Mate Systems, Inc. Product monitoring
device. 4,380,097, CI. 24-160.000.
Keizer, Johannes H.: See —
Jobsis, Frans F.; Keizer, Johannes H.; and Overaker, Ronald F.,
4,380,240, CI. 128-633.000.
Kelly, Arnold J., to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Electrosutic
atomizing device. 4,380,786, CI. 361-228.000.
Kelsey-Hayes Co.: See-
Miller, Roger L., 4,380,718, CI. 315-93.000.
Sweet, Roger; and Tribe, Leonard T., 4.380,276, CI. I88-79.50K.
KenoGard A.B.: See—
Sundman, Carl-Erik; and Hagglund, Bengt G.. 4.380,561, CI.
427-421.000.
Kessler, Erich: See—
Siggel, Erhard; Wick, Gerhard; Linhart, Heinz; and Kessler, Ench,
4,380,594. CI. 521-182.000.
Kettenes, Dirk K.: See—
van den Bosch, Steven; Kettenes, Dirk K.; Bart de Roos, Kns;
Sipma, Gerben; and StofTelsma, Jan, 4,380,655, CI. 549-472.000.
Kettering, Timothy J.: See—
Minchak. Robert J.; Kettering, Timothy J.; and Kroenke, William
J. 4,380,617, CI. 526-161.000.
Khan, Ausat A.; and Morgan, Richard A., to Du Pont de Nemours, E.
I., and Company. Batch polymerization process. 4,380,618, CI.
526-206.000.
Khan, Riaz A.: See— ,^
Mufti, Khizar S.; and Khan, Riaz A.. 4.380,476, CI. 127-46.300.
Khoe, Giok D.: See— „^ ^ , „
Frinken. Adrianus J. J.; Coolen, Franciscus M.; Khoe, Giok D.;
Langerhorst, Jacob; and Smulders, Henricus W. W., 4,380,366,
CI. 350-96.210.
Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.: See—
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentma
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; KJevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuachenko,
Ivan A.; KrasnoKlsky, loaif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov.
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko. Alexandr D., 4.380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Khoshtaria, Boris K.: See —
Karabegov, Mikhail A.; Ovanesian, Aram G.; Mesropian, Eduard
A.; Metreveli, Georgy T.; Karpeev, Anatoly A.; Khoshtaria,
Boris K.; and Gventsadze, Tatyana I., 4,380,392, CI. 356-243.000.
Kidoh, Kunizoh; and Wakamori, Hideki, to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha. Suspension polymerization of haloethylene com-
pound. 4,380,614, CI. 526-62.000.
Kimberly-Clark Corporation: See-
Reich, Jack W., 4.380,450, CI. 604-386.000.
Kimura, Yoshio: See —
Kohama, Hiroyuki; Tamiya, Masaru; Mizukami, Sunichi; Kaneko,
Dentaro; and Kimura, Yoshio, 4,380,328, CI. 266-177.000.
Kimura, Yukichi; and Kanamori, Takeshi, to Lion Corporation. Process
for producing preservatives. 4,380,506, CI. 252-398.000.
Kinashi, Keizo: See —
Yoneda, Naoto; Kato, Jyoji; and Kinashi, Keizo, 4,380,644, CI.
548-321.000.
Kinder, Horton C. Heat recycling apparatus. 4,380,126, CI. 34-86.000.
King, Peter F., to Occidental Chemical Corporation. Process for treat-
ment of black plate containers. 4,380,560, CI. 427-239.000.
Kingsley, William, to Xerox Corporation. Document transport for
raster scanners. 4,380,389, CI. 355-50.000.
Kipp, Manfred, to Dental Keramik Sande GmbH. Support for a remov-
able dental prosthesis. 4.380.436. CI. 433-182.000.
Kirchoff. George F.: See-
Davis. Leland E.; Dahle, David P.; Schneiter, Fred E.; and Kirch-
off, George F., 4,380,346, CI. 280-736.000.
Kiscaden, Roy W.: See—
Yannone, Robert A.; and Kiscaden, Roy W., 4,380,146, CI.
60-39.141.
Kitada, Hisashi: See —
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Kitada, Hisashi; Maruyama,
Yasuo; and Gotoh, Junichi, 4,380,608, CI. 525-247.000.
Kiumura, Sadafumi; and Taniguchi, Hiroshi, to Matsushita Electric
Industrial Co., Ltd. Method for recording multiplexed signals on
metal evaporated tape. 4,380,779, CI. 358-330.000.
Kjaer, Jorgcn H.: See —
Gestrelius, Stina M.; and Kjaer, Jorgen H., 4,380,552, CI.
426-52.000.
Klatt, Alfred: See—
Reinecke, Erich; and Klatt, Alfred, 4,380,177, CI. 74-475.000.
Klaus, Arthur; and Tacke, Horst, to Signode Corporation. Air-powered
driving tool, having a pilot piston and cylinder. 4,380,313, CI.
227-130.000.
Kleinlogel, Horst; and Theohar, Carl, to Sandoz Ltd. Guanfacine in
treating opiate addiction. 4,380,550, CI. 424-324.000.
Klemm. Robert W.: See—
Galloup, Clifford L.; Bula. Roger M.; Klemm. Robert W.; and
Westerburg. Ralph E.. Jr.. 4,380.111. CI. 29-564.400.
Klevchenkova, Maria N.: See—
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova. Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528. CI. 420-505.000.
Kliger, Howard S., to Celanese Corporation. Process for forming
improved carbon fiber reinforced composite coil spring. 4,380,483,
CI. 156-169.000.
Klijanowicz, James E.: See —
Gabrielsen, Rolf S.; Graham, Patricia A.; and Klijanowicz. James
E., 4,380,666, CI. 564-82.000.
Klippan S.A.: See —
Crisp, Terrence S., 4,380,100, CI. 24-230.0AL.
Knoll International, Inc.: See —
Diffrient, Niels, 4,380,352, CI. 297-61.000.
Knopf, Karl Horst: See-
Knopf, Klara, 4,380,306, CI. 222-89.000.
Knopf, Klara, to Knopf, Karl Horst. Small beer container. 4,380,306,
CI. 222-89.000.
Kobayashi, Hiroshi: See —
Takebe, Hidehani; and Kobayashi, Hiroshi, 4,380,825, CI.
455-164.000.
Kobayashi, Kazuhiko: See —
Chiba, Kazumasa; Kobayashi, Kazuhiko; and Muraki, Toshio,
4,380,622, CI. 528-288.000.
Kobayashi, Masao: See—
Ishii, Hiromichi; Matsuzawa, Hideo; Kobayashi, Masao; and
Yamada, Kantaro, 4,380,664, CI. 562-546.000.
Kobayashi, Shoichi: See— .
Hosoda, Yoshikazu; Ishihara, Shigenobu; and Kobayashi, Shoichi,
4,380,600, CI. 524-458.000.
Kobayashi. Tadashi: See— . . „ . ,.
Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Kobayashi, Tadashi; Yamaguchi, Keizaburo;
and Murakami, Hisamichi, 4,380,671, CI. 568-48.000.
Kobe Steel. Ltd.: See— .
Hashizume, Shinji; and Fukumizu, Shuuchi, 4,380,397, CI.
366-77.000. ^ „ ,
Kohama, Hiroytiki; Tamiya, Masaru; Mizukami, Suuchi; Kaneko,
Dentaro; and Kimura. Yoshio, 4,380,328, Q. 266-177.000.
Kobishi Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishii, Tadashi, 4,380,758, Q. 340-396.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
Koch, Karl H.: See—
Stadelhofer, Jurgen; Franck, Heinz-Gerhard; Kcx:h, Karl H.; and
Marrett, Rolf, 4,380,454, CI. 44-l.OOB.
Koch, Rudolf: See—
Endlicher, Frank; and Koch, Rudolf, 4,380,755, CI. 382-68.000.
Koch, Tad H.; and Swanson, Barry J., to University Patents, Inc.
2-Aminopyrrolin 5-ones and aminocyclopropyl isocyanates there-
from. 4,380,647, CI. 548-519.000.
Kodama, Teruo: See —
Nakamura, Osamu; Ogino, Isao; and Kodama, Tenio, 4,380,575, CI.
429-13.000.
Koebernick, Wolfgang: See—
Stadler, Peter; Koebernick, Wolfgang; Samaan, Samir; and Gau,
Wolfgang, 4,380,625, CI. 536-13.900.
Koenig & Bauer AG: See —
Michalik, Horst B., 4,380,449, CI. 493-424.000.
Koenigs, Stephen L.: See —
Wasmer, Anthony E.; and Koenigs, Stephen L., 4,380,217, CI.
123-146.50A.
Koerner, Gotz; Sanger, Gerd; Fink, Hans-Ferdi; and Grassmann, Fried-
helm, to Th. Goldschmidt AG. Process for preparing oil-in-water
emulsion. 4,380,503, CI. 252-314.000.
Kohama, Hiroyuki; Tamiya, Masaru; Mizukami, Sunichi; Kaneko,
Dentaro; and Kimura, Yoshio, to Kobe Steel, Ltd. Shaft furnace for
reducing ores. 4,380,328, CI. 266-177.000.
Kohno, Yoshiaki: See —
Mandai, Haruhumi; Nishimura, Kunitaro; Kohno, Yoshiaki; and
Yamaguchi, Masami, 4,380,559, CI. 427-80.000.
Koide, Akio: See —
Hanyu, Susumu; and Koide, Akio, 4,380,204, CI. 112-158.00A.
Komatsu, Yasuhiro: See —
Tahara, Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro;
Kubota, Reiko; and Takahashi, Toshihiro, 4,380,668, CI.
564-391.000.
Kondo, Shinichi: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Okami, Yoshiro; and Kondo, Shinichi,
4,380,581, CI. 435-80.000.
Kondo, Shoji: See —
Ozaki, Yoshihiro; Kaneko, Shuichiro; Kuniyoshi, Masayuki;
Kondo, Shoji; and Omata, Yasukuni, 4,380,385. CI. 355-3.0TR.
Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd.: See —
Yajima, Tatsuo, 4,380,387, CI. 355-3.00R.
Yasuda, Kazuo; Tamura, Akihiko; and Nakamura, Yoshimitsu,
4,380,386, CI. 355-3.00R.
Konno, Yutaka: See —
Fukui, Muneo; Konno, Yutaka; Kubota, Yukio; Aruga, Masayoshi;
and Kawato, Hiroitsu, 4,380,534, CI. 424-38.000.
Koocher, Martin, to Arthur D. Little, Inc. Film badge for determining
carbonyl compounds. 4,380,587, CI. 436-128.000.
Komblit, Morris J., to General Electric Company. Smoke detector with
delayed alarm after change to stand-by power. 4,380,760, CI.
340-628.000.
Korski, Victor E., to United States of America, Air Force. Aerial refuel
floodlight. 4,380,788, CI. 362-62.000.
Korstrask Mekaniska, G. Naslund: See —
Naslund, GusUv, 4,380,573, CI. 428-595.000.
Kortmann, Wilfried: See —
Steinberger, Helmut; Kortmann, Wilfried; and Tuschen, Jurgen,
4,380,451, CI. 8-477.000.
Koster, Wilhelm: See-
Abraham, Uwe; Jakubowski, Karl-Heinz; and Koster, Wilhelm,
4,380,274, CI. 180-308.000.
Kovacic, Guido: See —
Engelsmann, Dieter; Hoffacker, Franz; Kovacic, Guido; Lermann,
Peter; Luhrig, Hermann; and Wagner, Karl, 4,380,382, CI.
354-275.000.
Kowa^uchi, Tom: See —
Hirose, Yasuyuki; Shimaoka, Motohiro; Saito, Shoichiro; and
Kowaguchi, Torn, 4,380,782, CI. 360-99.000.
Koyama, Hiroyasu: See —
Tahara, Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro;
Kubota, Reiko; and Takahashi, Toshihiro, 4,380,668, CI.
564-391.000.
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.: See —
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Kozuka, Nobuhiko: See —
Matsumoto, Shoji; Matsui, Toshikazu; Ikeda, Toshimitsu; Kozuka,
Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi; and Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4,380,579,
CI. 430-126.000.
Kraatz, Udo; Jager, Gerhard; Buchel, Karl H.; and Frohberger, Paul-
Ernst, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Combating fungi with triazolyl-
benzyloxy-ketones and-caibinols. 4,380,545, CI. 424-269.000.
Kiaftwerk Union Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Weghaupt, Erich, 4,380,356, CI. 384-133.000.
Krankkala, Paul L., to Champion International Corporation. Color
preservation of wax-coated paperboard. 4,380,565, CI. 428-182.000.
Knsnoselsky, losif A.: See—
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoaelaky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny P.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V ; Romanova, Roza M ; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4.380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Kraus. Thaddaus, to Balzers Aktiengesellschaft. Arrangement for
uniformly coating surfaces of revolution by vapor deposition in a
high vacuum. 4,380.212. CI. 118-720.000.
Kreitenberg. Arthur. Neck venous and arterial examination teaching
instrument. 4.380.439, CI. 434-268.000
Krjuk. Timur P.; See —
Abduganiev. Abdurakhim; Tikhonov, Valentin N.; Shiykov. Gen-
nady N.; Zhestkov, Viialy I.; Krjuk, Timur P- Mukhin. Viktor
M.; and Tikhonov, Jury N.. 4,380.143. CI. 57-89 000
Kroenke. William J.: See —
Minchak, Robert J.; Kettering. Timothy J.; and Kroenke. William
J. 4.380,617. CI, 526-161.000.
Krupa. Andrew S.r See—
Velenyi, Louis J.; and Krupa. Andrew S.. 4,380.672. CI.
568-310.000.
Krzywdziak. Alain: See—
Godat. Jean; Parmenon. Daniel; Krzywdziak, Alain; and Boudin,
Daniel, 4,380,399, CI. 366-289,000.
Kubo, Seitoku; Kuramochi, Koujiro; and Kyushima, Tatsuo, to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Engagement device in automatic
transmission, 4,380,179, CI. 74-762,000.
Kubota, Reiko: See—
Tahara, Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro;
Kubota, Reiko; and Takahashi, Toshihiro, 4.380,668, CI.
564-391.000.
Kubota. Yukio: See—
Fukui, Muneo; Konno, Yutaka; Kubota. Yukio; Aruga, Masayoshi;
and Kawata, Hiroitsu. 4,380.534, CI. 424-38.000.
Kucharzyk, Werner: See —
Habenmehl, Diethard; Rohde, Wolfgang; Kucharzyk, Werner; and
Siebert. Werner, 4,380,125, CI. 34-10,000.
Kuhlmann, Gerhard; Wolf, Erwin; and Wahi, Gunter, to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Switching device, 4.380,693. CI, 200-330.000
Kuniyoshi. Masayuki: See—
Ozaki. Yoshihiro; Kaneko. Shuichiro; Kuniyoshi. Masayuki;
Kondo, Shoji; and Omau. Yasukuni, 4,380,385. CI, 355-3 OTR
Kuniyoshi. Shinji; Takanashi, Akihiro; and Kurosaki, Toshiei, to Hita-
chi. Ltd. Reduction projection aligner system, 4,380.395, CI
356-401.000.
Kuramochi, Koujiro: See—
Kubo, Seitoku; Kuramochi, Koujiro; and Kyushima, Tatsuo,
4,380,179, CI. 74-762,000,
Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kidoh, Kunizoh; and Wakamon, Hideki. 4,380.614, CI 526-62.000,
Yoshikumi, Chikao; Ohmura, Yoshio; Hirose, Fumio; Ikuzawa,
Masanori; Matsunaga, Kenichi; Fujii, Takayoshi; Ohhara,
Minoru; and Ando, Takao, 4,380,536, CI, 424-180.000.
Kurek, Paul R., to UOP Inc. Preparation of 2,6-di-lert-butyl-4-alkyl-
phenols. 4,380,677, CI. 568-788.000.
Kurosaki, Toshiei: See —
Kuniyoshi, Shinji; Takanashi, Akihiro; and Kurosaki, Toshiei,
4,380,395, CI. 356-401.000.
Kuschke, Gunther: See —
Bull, Hans; Ewich. Gerhard; Kuschke. Gunther; Maykemper,
Alfred; and Welzel, Josef. 4.380.410. CI 405-299.000.
Kuwano. Hiroaki. to Ishikawajima-Harima Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Winding machine. 4.380.164, CI. 72-21.000.
Kyushima, Tatsuo: See —
Kubo, Seitoku; Kuramochi, Koujiro; and Kyushima, Tatsuo,
4,380,179, CI. 74-762.000.
L.M.T. Radio Professionelle: See —
Marchand, Maurice; and Petijean, Christian, 4,380,830, CI,
455-327.000.
Labelle, Henri M. R. Folding closure with a sweeper. 4,380,260, CI.
I6O-235.0O0.
Labofma, S.A.: See —
Hanotier, Jacques D. V.; and Dauby, Jacques F., 4,380,662, CI,
562-486.000.
Lacy. Jesse H. Golf game. 4,380,338, CI. 273-245,000
LaHaye, Paul G.; and Bjerklie, John W., to Hague International. Recir-
culating burner. 4.380.429, CI. 431-115.000.
Lake Eyelet Manufacturing Company, Inc.: See —
Andrews, Alfred G.; and Sorensen, Charles L., 4,380,402, CI
401-74.000.
Lamm, Gunther: See—
Loefller, Hermann; Juenemann. Werner; and Lamm. Gunther,
4,380,452, CI. 8-532.000.
Lamson & Sessions Co., The: See —
Capuano, Ten^ D., 4,380,414, CI. 411-187.000.
Landrigan, Richard B.: See —
Blocher, John M., Jr.; Veigel, Neil D.; and Landrigan, Richard B.,
4,380,556, CI. 427-6.000.
Landrus, Edward L., to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Com-
pany. Supling tool. 4,380,312, CI. 227-116.000.
Lang, William H.: See-
Chang. Clarence D.; and Lang, William H., 4,380,669, CI.
564-402.000.
Langerhorst, Jacob: See —
Franken, Adrianus J. J.; Coolen, Franciicus M.; Khoe, Giok D.;
Langerhorst, Jacob; and Smulders, Henricus W. W., 4,380,366,
CI. 350-96.210.
Langston, Joseph, Jr.; and Murray, Robert J., to Federal Paper Board
Co., Inc. Box type carton with hinged lid and one piece reinforced
insert. 4,380,314, CI. 229-33.000.
PI 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Harvester Co. Multiple clutch
status monitor. 4,380.278, CI
Richard, 4,380,343. CI. 280-
LaRue, Albert D ; and Wolf, John J., to Babcock & Wilcox Company
The Mixer for dual register burner 4.380.202, CI 1 10-263.000
Lasken. Richard D., to International
control system employing clutch
192-3580
Lawrence, Richard: See —
Lovell, Walter; and Lawrence,
242.0WC.
Lawson, Alfred C, to Sybron Corporation. Surgical lamp character-
ized by havmg an improved reflector. 4,380.794, CI. 362-296.000.
Lazan, Frank. Jr. Fish line hook setting attachment. 4,380.131, CI.
43-15.000.
Lazzan, Jean-Pierre: See —
Desserre, Jacques; Helle, Michel; and Lazzari. Jean-Pierre,
4.380.784, CI. 360-126.000.
Leatherman, Alfred F.: See —
Repik, Clyde P; and Leatherman. Alfred F.. 4.380.484. CI
156-251.000.
LeBegue. Maurice K.. to National Mine Service Company. Mining
machine loading bin mounted on boom structure and method.
4.380.354. CI. 299-18.000.
Leconte, Gilles: See —
Allard. Pierre-Yves; and Leconte. Gilles. 4,380,799, CI.
364-426.000.
Lee. Fred C; and Carter, Roy A., to United States of America. Energy.
Base drive circuit for a four-terminal power Darlington. 4.380.795.
CI 363-131.000.
Lee, Len F.: See —
Howe. Robert K.; and Lee, Len F., 4,380.465, CI. 71-90.000.
Lee, Minyoung; Szala, Lawrence E.; and Tuft, Roy E., to General
Electric Company. Polycrystalline diamond and cemented carbide
substrate and synthesizing process therefor. 4.380,471, CI. 419-1 1.000.
Leesona Corporation: See —
Bonasch, James H.; and Bouchard, William J., Jr., 4.380.254. CI.
139-435 000.
Greynolds. Fred L.; Whiteside. Robert C; and Durkee, Doyle D..
4,380.183. CI. 83-244.000.
Leis, Michael D.; and Rose, Robert C. to Digital Equipment Corpora-
tion. Digital velocity servo. 4.380,723. CI. 318-314.000.
Leitert. Fredenck C; and Vinson. Carl G.. Jr.. to Diamond Shamrock
Corporation. Balanced chlorination process. 4.380.682, CI.
570-219.000.
Le Marchant, Pierre: See —
Monnier. Michel J.; Monneraye. Marc A.; Foucher, Claude; and Le
Marchant. Pierre. 4.380,699, CI. 235-492.000.
Leppink. Herman F.: See —
Sodcrberg. Mark S.; Hametner, Albert L.; Leppink. Herman F.;
and Strand, David E., 4.380,295. CI. 209-558.000.
Lermann, Peter: See —
Engelsmann, Dieter; Hoffacker. Franz; Kovacic. Guido; Lermann,
Peter; Luhrig. Hermann; and Wagner. Karl, 4,380.382. CI.
354-275.000.
Levijoki. Wayne A.: See —
Crawford. Daniel A.; and Levijoki. Wayne A.. 4.380.418, CI.
417-87.000.
Levine, Samuel R.: See —
Fogell, Leonard L.; Levine. Samuel R.; and Weinberger, Arnold,
4.380.813. CI. 371-52.000.
Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-G.m.b.H.: See—
Eckhardt, Gert. 4,380.821, CI. 455-33.000.
Lichtinghagen. Klaus, to Glacier GmbH-DEVA Werke. Apparatus for
the continuous extrusion of electrically conductive granulated mate-
rials, preferably powder metallurgy materials. 4,380,473, CI.
419-41.000.
Licten waiter. Robert H.: See —
Brookhyser, Byron B.; Lictenwalter, Robert H.; McGee, Arthur
L.; and Pierson. Darrell E.. 4.380,259, CI. 144-357.000.
Liebermann, Howard H.; Frischmann, Peter G.; and Rosenberry,
George M.. Jr.. to United Sutes of America. Energy. Helical metallic
ribbon for continuous edge winding applications. 4,380,572, CI.
428-592.000.
Limtel. Ltd.: See—
Vuissoz, Constant, deceased; Mosoni-Vuissoz, Cesarine, heir; and
Voide-Vuissoz, Suzanne, heir, 4,380,430, CI. 431-347.000.
Lind, David J.; and Richards, Joyce, to Rolls-Royce Limited. Method
of manufacturing a composite material. 4,380,523, CI. 264-257.000.
Lindemann, Martin K. O.; Mayhew, Raymond L.; O'Lenick, Anthony
J., Jr.; and Verdicchio, Robert J., to Johnson & Johnson/Mona
Industries, Inc. Imidazoline phosphobetaines. 4,380,637, CI.
548-112.000.
Lindstrum, Alan L.: See —
Barlow, Michael L.; and Lindstrum, Alan L., 4,380,745, CI.
331-176.000.
Linhart, Heinz: See —
Siggel, Erhard; Wick, Gerhard; Linhart, Heinz; and Kessler, Erich,
4,380,594. CI. 521-182.000.
Lion Corporation: See —
Kimura, Yukichi; and Kanamori, Takeshi, 4,380,506, CI.
252-398.000.
Little People Limited: See—
Jagger, Peter C, 4,380,122, CI. 30-343.000.
Little, Roger G., to Spire Corporation. Front surface metallization and
encapsulation of solar cells. 4,380,112, CI. 29-572.000.
Litton Systems, Inc.: See —
Wilson, Albert, 4,380,494. CI. 209-319.000.
Lively, Olin A. Control circuitry for water level control of pools.
4.380.091. CI. 4-508.000.
Lockwood, George C; and Trudel, Murray L., to NCR Corporation.
Earom cell matrix and logic arrays with common memory gate.
4.380.804. CI. 365-184.000.
Loctite Corporation: See —
Nativi. Larry A.. 4.380,613, CI. 525-440.000.
Loeffler, Hermann; Juenemann, Werner; and Lamm, Gunther, to
BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Dyeing and printing of cellulose-contain-
ing textile material. 4.380.452. CI. 8-532.000.
Loew. Peter: See —
Stingelin. Willy; and Loew. Peter. 4,380,627, CI. 542-423.000.
Loken, Tor; and Bryhn, Odd R., to Chevron Research Company.
Stabilizing clay soil with dry hydroxy-aluminum. 4,380,408, CI.
405-263.000.
Longini. Richard L., to Energy Controls, Inc. Apparatus and method
for detecting a fraction of a gas. 4,380,167, CI. 73-24.000.
Lorry, Cosmas: See —
Fortsch, Johann; Lorry, Cosmas; and Schweiger, Gustav,
4,380,486, CI. 156-359.000.
Louisiana State University: See —
Callihan, Clayton D., 4,380.458, CI. 55-33.000.
Lovell, Walter; and Lawrence, Richard. Folding scissor frame wheel
chair. 4.380.343. CI. 280-242.0WC.
Loza. Roman: See —
Greene, Janice L.; and Loza, Roman, 4.380,623, CI. 528-335.000.
Lucas Industries Limited: See —
Burrage. Robert G.; and Joby, Michael J., 4,380,148, CI. 60-39.281.
Ingram, Brian; Harries, David A.; and England, Michael J.,
4,380,277, CI. 188-329.000.
Jefferson, John R.; and Skinner, Robert T. J., 4,380,223, CI.
123-383.000.
Munro, Malcolm W., 4,380,218, CI. I23-179.00H.
Lucius, John E.: See —
Asick, John C; Berry, Donald A.; and Lucius, John E., 4,380,361,
CI. 339-91. OOR.
Ludecke, Otto A., to General Motors Corporation. Method and means
for diesel exhaust particulate emission control. 4,380,149, CI.
60-274.000.
Ludwig, David, to Allan Air Products, Inc. Tool device. 4,380,270, CI.
173-163.000.
Luebke, Randall A. Shipping and storage container. 4,380,290, CI.
206-3 15.00R.
Luhrig, Hermann: See —
Engelsmann, Dieter; Hoffacker, Franz; Kovacic, Guido; Lermann,
Peter; Luhrig, Hermann; and Wagner, Karl, 4,380,382, CI.
354-275.000.
Lux, Hans: See —
Dick. Heinz; and Lux, Hans, 4,380,099, CI. 24-21 LOOP.
Lyapin, Andrei G.: See —
Mazurin, Igor M.; Netupsky, Mikhail L.; Shevtsov, Alexandr V.;
Gladky, Viktor T.; Dmitriev, Nikolai A.; Lyapin, Andrei G.;
Polyakov, Alexandr V.; Myshev, Mikhail A.; and Panov, Vladi-
mir v., 4,380,532, CI. 423-469.000.
Lynam, David: See —
Godfrey, Michael F.; and Lynam, David, 4,380,765, CI. 343-
I6.00M.
Lyons, William C; and Scurlock, Scot L., to Drilling Development,
Inc. Survey tool string, 4,380,264, CI. 166-169.000.
M.A.N.-ROLAND Druckmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Fischer, Hermann, 4,380,331, CI. 271-11.000.
Machlett Laboratories, Incorporated, The: See —
Cutter. James W.. 4,380,820, CI. 378-153.000.
Mack, Mark P.: See—
Fenton, Jeff T.; and Mack, Mark P., 4,380,610, CI. 525-400.000.
MacLean, John P.; Cantwell, J. Edward; Brown, John D.; and Hoy,
Harold D., to Texaco Inc. Method for shaping, forming and assem-
bling a highly efficient cyclone separator. 4,380,105, CI. 29-157.00R.
MafTet, Vere, to UOP Inc. Mechanical dewatering process utilizing a
nonuniform screw conveyor. 4,380,496, CI. 210-780.000.
Magers, Thomas A.; and Tabb, David L., to Miles Laboratories, Inc.
Stabilization of benzidine-type indicators with various enhancers.
4,380,585, CI. 436-66.000.
Maher, Donald R. Method of treating spray paint collection water in
paint spray booths and composition therefor. 4,380,495, CI.
210-728.000.
Malwah, Manohar L., to Signetics Corporation. Process for fabricating
a high capacity memory cell. 4,380,113, CI. 29-577.00C.
Manabe, Masahiko: .See —
Kamioka, Seiichi; Manabe, Masahiko; and Sakai, Rokuro,
4,380,104. a. 28-282.000.
Manabe, Toyotaka: See —
Mitachi, Seiko; Shibata, Shuichi; Kanamori, Tenitoshi; Manabe,
Toyotaka; and Yasu, MiUuho, 4,380,588, CI. SOI-37.000.
Mandai, Hanihumi; Nishimura, Kunitaro; Kohno, Yoshiaki; and
Yamaguchi, Masami, to Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Method for
producing boundary layer semiconductor ceramic capacitors.
4,380,559, CI. 427-80.000.
Manitowoc Company, Inc., The: See —
Andress, Dennis I., 4,380,107, CI. 29-252.000.
Mannuzza, Frank J.; and Montalto, Joseph G., to Miles Laboratories,
Inc. Puriflcation of bovine thrombin. 4,380,511, CI. 260-1 I2.00B.
Marascalco, Lewis C: See —
Segar, Richard B.; and Marascalco, Lewis C, 4,380,802, CI.
364-900.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 15
Marcatili, Enrique A. J., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Velocity mismatched gate. 4.380.364, CI. 350-96.140.
March, Edward J.: Set-
Carlson, Roy C, Jr.; and March, Edward J., 4,380,431. CI.
432-29.000.
Marchand, Maurice; and Petijean, Christian, to L.M.T. Radio Profes-
sionelle. Microwave up-converter. 4,380,830, CI. 455-327.000.
Marconi Company, Ltd., The: See-
Godfrey. Michael F.; and Lynam. David. 4.380.765, CI. 343-
16.00M.
Mark, Victor; Holub, Frederick F.; and Hedges, Charles V.. to General
Electric. High heat distortion resistant segment ester polycarbonates.
4.380.612. CI. 525-439.000.
Markson Manufacturing Company: See —
Doren. Mark N., 4.380.192, CI. 99-441.000.
Marrett, Rolf: See—
Sudelhofer, Jurgen; Franck, Heinz-Gerhard; Koch. Karl H.; and
Marrett. Rolf, 4,380,454, CI. 44-l.OOB.
Martin, Keith R.. to Uniflo Resources. Inc. Petroleum and gas well
enhancement agent. 4.380.268. CI. 166-304.000.
Martin. Paul H.: See—
Mountz, Elton E.; and Martin, Paul H., 4,380.300, CI. 220-1.500.
Martino, Germain: See —
Bournonville, Jean-Paul; Snappe, Roger; Miquel. Jean; and Mar-
tino, Germain, 4,380,673, CI. 568-361.000.
Maruyama, Eiichi: See—
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuharu; Imamura, Yoshinori;
Ataka, Saburo; Tanaka. Yasuo; Matsubara, Hirokazu; Takasaki,
Yukio; and Maruyama. Eiichi. 4,380,557, CI. 427-38.000.
Maruyama. Mitsuaki. to Epson Corporation; and Kabushiki Kaisha
Suwa Seikosha. Inkjet printer. 4,380,770, CI. 346-I40.00R.
Maruyama, Yasuo: See —
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Kitada, Hisashi; Maruyama,
Yasuo; and Gotoh, Junichi. 4,380,608, CI. 525-247.000.
Marvin Glass & Associates: See —
Wildman, John R.; and Morrison, Howard J., 4,380,135, CI.
46-219.000.
Marzorati, Ermanno A.; and Mathis, Murrel A. Belt tightening tool.
4,380,326, CI. 254-131.000.
Masai. Hiroto. to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Viscous fluid coupling
device. 4,380,279. CI. 192-58.00B.
Masaki. Ichiro, to Unimation. Inc. Method and apparatus for manipula-
tor welding apparatus with vision correction for workpiece sensing.
4.380.696, CI. 219-124.340.
Masclet. Jean; and Turiot. Andre, to Messier-Hispano-Bugatti. Main
undercarriage train for an aircraft. 4,380.323. CI. 244-102.00R.
Massachusetts General Hospital: See —
Newbower, Ronald S., 4,380,237, CI. 128-693.000.
Masuda, Shuji; and Ueno, Keisuke, to Chugai Boyeki Co., Ltd. Rame
retardant heat insulating composition and method for preparing the
same. 4,380,568, CI. 428-276.000.
Mateme, Carsten, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Dihydropyridine com-
pounds which are substituted in the 4-position by imidazolyl or
thiazolyl and their medicinal use. 4,380,547, CI. 424-270.000.
Matesa, Joseph M., to PPG Industries, Inc. Method of melting glass
making ingredients. 4,380,463, CI. 65-99.200.
Mathew, Chempolil T.; and Ulmer, Harry E., to Allied Corporation.
Producing alkoxysilanes and alkoxy-oximinosilanes. 4,380,660, CI.
556-422.000.
Mathis, Murrel A.: See—
Marzorati, Ermanno A.; and Mathis, Murrel A., 4,380,326, CI.
254-131.000.
Matsubara, Hirokazu: See —
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuharu; Imamura, Yoshinori;
Ataka, Saburo; Tanaka, Yasuo; Matsubara, Hirokazu; Takasaki,
Yukio; and Maruyama, Eiichi, 4,380,557, CI. 427-38.000.
MaUufuji, Teruo; Hirato, Akira; and Kawada, Yoshihiro, to Iwasaki
Tsushinki Kabushiki Kaisha. Hybrid circuit. 4,380,690, CI. 179-
170.0NC.
Matsui, Toshikazu: See —
Matsumoto, Shoji; Matsui, Toshikazu; Ikeda, Toshimitsu; Kozuka,
Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi; and Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4,380,579,
CI. 430-126.000.
Matsumoto, Shoji; Matsui, Toshikazu; Ikeda, Toshimitsu; Kozuka,
Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi; and Aizawa. Tatsuo. Electrostatic
copying process and apparatus. 4.380.579. CI. 430-126.000.
Matsunaga, Kenichi: See —
Yoshikumi, Chikao; Ohmura. Yoshio; Hirose, Fumio;
Masanori; Matsunaga. Kenichi; Fujii, Takayoshi;
Minoru; and Ando, Takao, 4,380,536, CI. 424-180.000.
MaUushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Kitamura. Sadafumi; and Taniguchi, Hiroshi, 4,380,779,
358-330.000.
Shinohara, Koichi. 4,380,211, CI. 118-718.000.
Yamashita, Akio; and Hayami, Masaaki, 4.380.629, CI. S42-4SS.000.
MaUushiU Electrical Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Kaneaki, Tetsuhiko; Murase, Kazuhiko; and Shigeta, Junnosuke,
4,380,184, CI. 84-1.010.
Matsuzaka. Hiroshi, to Yamaha Hateudoki Kabushiki Kaisha. Carbure-
tor. 4,380,516, CI. 261-23.00A.
Matsuzaki, Kazuhiko; Hamada, Minoru; and Sakurai, Hisaya. to Asahi
Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Process for preparing polyoxymeth-
ylenes. 4,380,620, CI. 528-232.000.
Matsuzawa, Hideo: See—
Ishii, Hiromichi; Matsuzawa, Hideo; Kobayashi, Masao; and
Yamada. Kantaro, 4,380,664, CI. S62-S46.000.
and Matzner. Markus. 4,380,598, CI.
Ikuzawa,
Ohhara,
CI.
L.; O'Lcnick,
4.380,637, CI.
Mattel, Inc.: See—
MinkofT, Michael D.; and Kaestner. Raymond W., 4,380,334, CI.
273-l.OOE.
Matzner, Markus: See—
Robeson, Lloyd M
524-163.000.
Maurer, Fritz; Schroder, Rolf; Hammann, Ingeborg; and Stendel,
Wilhelm, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Combating arthropods with
0-alkyl-0-(2-cyclopropyl-6-substituted-methyI-pynmidin-4-yl)-
(thionoXthiol) phosphoric (phosphonic) acid esters and ester-amides.
4,380,538. CI. 424-200.000.
Maurer, Michel: See-
Bauer, Gilbert; and Maurer, Michel, 4.380,176. CI. 73-863.860.
Mayhew, Raymond L.: See —
Lindemann, Martin K. O.; Mayhew, Raymond
Anthony J., Jr.; and Verdicchio, Robert J.,
548-112.000.
Maykemper, Alfred: See —
Bull, Hans; Ewich, Gerhard; Kuschke, Gunther; Maykemper,
Alfred; and Welzel, Josef, 4.380,410. CI. 405-299.000.
Mazgy. James D., to RCA Corporation. Photocurrent compensation
for electronic circuitry exposed to ionizing radiation. 4,380,741. CI.
330-308.000.
Mazurin, Igor M.; Netupsky, Mikhail L.; Shevtsov, Alexandr V.;
Gladky, Viktor T.; Dmitriev, Nikolai A.; Lyapin, Andrei G.; Polya-
kov, Alexandr V.; Myshev, Mikhail A.; and Panov, Vladimir V
Process for fine purification of sulphur hexafluoride from impurities.
4,380,532, CI. 423-469.000.
McCulloch, Charles W.: See—
Culbertson, Samuel W.; McCulloch, Charles W.; and Williams,
Keith G.. 4.380.321, CI. 239-700.000.
McEvoy, Herbert J., Jr.: See—
Ahem, John; Farmer. Wayne; Hawes, David; and McEvoy, Her-
bert J.. Jr.. 4,380,379. CI. 351-106.000.
McGee. Arthur L.: See —
Brookhyser. Byron B.; Lictenwalter, Robert H.; McGee, Arthur
L.; and Pierson, Darrell E., 4,380,259, CI. 144-357.000.
McGrath, John E.; and Wilson, Earl. Balloon clip. 4.380,103, CI. 24-
255.0SL.
McMackins, Dudley E.: See —
Coleman. James P.; Hallcher. Richard C; and McMackins, Dudley
E., 4,380,650, CI. 549-326.000.
Mead, Howard B.; and Williams, Graham L., to Shell Research Lim-
ited. Heat-insulated hose for liquefied gases. 4,380,253, CI.
138-149.000.
Mechanical Technology Incorporated: See—
Folsom, Lawrence R.; Dineen, John J.; Viule, Nicholas G.; and
Balas, Charles B., Jr., 4,380,152, CI. 60-520.000.
Meier, Werner: See—
Wesemeyer, Jurgen; Haubner, Georg; and Meier, Werner,
4,380,225, CI. 123-613.000.
Menager, Jean, to Societe Internationale de Mecanique Industrielle
S.A. Centrifugal pumps. 4,380.416. CI. 415-170.00A.
Mendelson. Walton L. Liquid fuel-fired water heating tank. 4,380.215,
CI. 122-13.00R.
Mercier, Olivier: See —
Gessinger, Gemot; and Mercier, Olivier, 4,380,574. CI.
428-686.000.
Merck A Co.. Inc.: See—
Witzel. Bruce E.; Finke. Paul E.; and Allison. Debra L.. 4.380,645,
CI. 548-430.000.
Merz, Johann, to Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen AG. Oil reservoir
particulaHy for hydraulic steering system. 4,380,272, CI. 180-132.000.
Mesropian, Eduard A.: See—
Karabegov, Mikhail A.; Ovanesian, Aram G.; Mesropian, Eduard
A.; Metreveli, Georgy T.; Karpeev, Anatoly A.; Khoshtaria,
Boris K.; and Gventsadze, Tatyana I., 4,380,392. CI. 356-243.000.
Messier-Hispano-Bugatti: See —
Masclet. Jean; and Turiot. Andre. 4.380,323, CI. 244-102.00R.
Metreveli, Georgy T.: See—
Karabegov, Mikhail A.; Ovanesian, Aram G.; Mesropian, Eduard
A.; Metreveli, Georgy T.; Karpeev, Anatoly A.; Khoshtaria,
Boris K.; and Gventsadze, Tatyana I., 4,380,392, CI. 356-243.000.
Meyers, Bemard L.: See —
Udovich, Cari A.; and Meyers, Bemard L.. 4,380,648, CI.
549-259.000.
Michalik. Horst B.. to Koenig & Bauer AG. Variable size folder cylin-
der. 4.380,449. CI. 493-424.000.
Michalik. John. Leather splitting machine. 4.380.159. CI. 69-12.000.
Mikhail. Ezzat A., to MinnesoU Mining and Manufacturing Company.
N.N-Diacylaminoperfluoroalkanesulionanilides and derivatives
thereof. 4,380.464. CI. 71-88.000.
Miles Laboratories. Inc.: See—
Boguslaski. Robert C; Carrico, Robert J.; and Christner, James £.,
4 380 580 CI 435-7.000.
Magers! Thomas A.; and f abb. David L.. 4,380.585. CI. 436-66.000.
Mannuzza, Frank J.; and Montalto, Joseph G., 4,380,511, Q. 260-
112.00B.
Schmidt, Thomas R., 4.380,553. CI. 426-250.000.
Miller, Roger L., to Kelsey-Hayes Co. Trailer marker Ught substitution
circuit. 4,380,718, CI. 315-93.000.
Miller, Thoaias C. Buoyancy generator device and method* of makmg
and using the same. 4,380,151, CI. 6O-4%.000.
Milliken Research Corporation: See-
Henry. William J.. 4.380,144. CI. 57-286.000.
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Walker. Jesse P.; and Robertson, William H., 4,380,095. CI. 19-
80.00R.
Minchak. Robert J.; Kettering. Timothy J.; and Kroenke, William J., to
B. F. Goodrich Company. The. Preparation of polymers from cyclo-
olefms. 4.380.617, CI. 526-161.000.
Ministry of International Trade and Industry: See —
Nakamura, Osamu; Ogino, Isao; and Kodama, Teruo, 4,380,575. CI.
429-13.000.
Minkoff. Michael D.; and Kaestner. Raymond W., to Mattel, Inc.
Electronic card game simulator. 4,380,334, CI. 273-l.OOE.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See —
Landrus. Edward L., 4,380,312, CI. 227-116.000.
Mikhail, Ezzat A., 4,380.464, CI. 71-88.000.
Vanderwerf, Dennis F., 4,380,374, CI. 350423.000.
Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Ozaki, Yoshihiro; Kaneko, Shuichiro; Kuniyoshi, Masayuki;
Kondo. Shoji; and Omata, Yasukuni. 4,380,385, CI. 355-3.0TR.
Minoura, Kazuo: See —
Tateoka, Masamichi; and Minoura, Kazuo. 4,380.390. CI.
355-71.000.
Miquel, Jean: See —
Boumonville. Jean-Paul; Snappe. Roger; Miquel. Jean; and Mar-
tino. Germain, 4,380,673. CI. 568-361.000.
Miranda, Lawrence T.: See —
Bullock. John W.; and Miranda, Lawrence T.. 4,380,721. CI.
315-362.000.
Mirrycle Corporation: See —
Schacht. Barry M., 4.380.369, CI. 350-307.000.
Mita Industrial Company Limited: See —
Kato, Yoshiaki; Fushida, Akira; Ueda, Yasuo; Tohi, Yasusuke; and
Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4,380,196. CI. 101-453.000.
Mitachi. Seiko; Shibata, Shuichi; Kanamori, Terutoshi; Manabe,
Toyotaka; and Yasu, Mitsuho, to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone
Public Corporation. Glass for infrared ray-transmitting optical fibers
and optical fibers formed from said glass. 4.380.588, CI. 501-37.000.
Mitchell. Ronald. Anchoring apparatus. 4.380.139, CI. 52-162.000.
Mitel Corporation: See —
Worsman, Adrian D., 4,380.756. CI. 340-347.0AD.
Mitsubishi Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See —
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Kitada, Hisashi; Maniyama,
Yasuo; and Gotoh. Junichi. 4.380.608. CI. 525-247.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Takebe. Hideharu; and Kobayashi, Hiroshi, 4,380,825, CI.
455-164.000.
Mitsubishi Rayon Company, Ltd.: See —
Ishii, Hiromichi; Matsuzawa, Hideo; Kobayashi. Masao; and
Yamada. Kantaro. 4,380,664, CI. 562-546.000.
Mitsui Petrochemical Industries. Ltd.: See —
Shigemoto. Hiromi. 4.380.567. CI. 428-213.000.
Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals, Incorporated: See —
Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Kobayashi, Tadashi; Yamaguchi, Keizaburo;
and Murakami. Hisamichi. 4,380,671, CI. 568-48.000.
Mittelhauser, Bemhard. Outside rear view mirror for motor vehicles.
4,380,370, CI. 350-307.000.
Miyahara, Junji: See —
Takahashi, Kenji; and Miyahara. Junji, 4,380,702, CI. 250-327.200.
Miyaji, Mikio: See—
Nishiyama, Ryuzo; Fujikawa, Kanichi; Yokomichi, Isao;
Shigehara, luru; and Miyaji, Mikio, 4.380.670. CI. 564-407.000.
Miyajima, Mikio: See —
Hori, Fumihisa; and Miyajima, Mikio, 4,380,195, CI. 101-93.170.
Miyao, Fumio; and Tsukioka, Kazumi, to Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Keyed
AGC circuit for video dau transmitting device. 4,380,777, CI.
358-178.000.
Mizukami, Sunichi: See —
Kohama, Hiroyuki; Tamiya, Masaru; Mizukami. Sunichi; Kaneko,
Dentaro; and Kimura, Yoshio, 4,380,328, CI. 266-177.000.
Mobil Oil Corporation: See-
Chang, Clarence D.; and Lang, William H., 4,380,669, CI.
564-402.000.
Chu, Chin-Chiun, 4,380,685. CI. 585-466.000.
Mochizuki, Masafumi: See —
Hirata. Atsumi; Tajima, Osamu; Kaneda, Isami; Sugiyama,
Hiroyuki; Saito, Takashi; and Mochizuki, Masafumi. 4,380,780,
CI. 360-97.000.
Mogami, Satoshi, to Nippon Kogaku K. K. Wide angle zoom lens of
two-group construction. 4,380,375. CI. 350-426.000.
Mohaupt. Henry H. Method of treating a hydrocarbon producing well.
4,380.265. CI. 166-250.000.
Moisson, Marc F. L.. to N.V. Raychem S.A. Cable sleeve liner.
4,380,686, CI. 174-84.00R.
Monneraye, Marc A.: See—
Monnier, Michel J.; Monneraye, Marc A.; Foucher, Claude; and Le
Marchant, Pierre, 4,380,699, CI. 235-492.000.
Monnier, Michel J.; Monneraye, Marc A.; Foucher, Claude; and Le
Marchant, Pierre, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Portable, identifying
element constructed as a lamination of sheets. 4,380,699, CI.
235-492.000.
Monroe, Roger F., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Stabilized insecti-
cide formulations. 4,380,537, CI. 424-200.000.
Monsanto Company: See —
Agrawal, Punishottam D., 4,380.526, Q. 264-537.000.
Coleman, James P.; Hallcher, Richard C; and McMackins, Dudley
E.. 4.380,650, CI. 549-326.000.
Coran. Aubert Y.; and Patel. Raman. 4.380.606. CI. 525-196.000.
Howe, Robert K.; and Lee, Len F., 4.380.465, CI. 71-90.000.
Morita, Euchi, 4,380,609, CI. 525-348.000.
Otstot, Roger S.; and Runkle. Charles J., 4.380,460. CI. 55-158.000.
Montalto, Joseph G.: See —
Mannuzza, Frank J.; and Montalto, Joseph G.. 4,380.511, CI. 260-
112.00B.
Montedison S.p.A.: See —
Noristi. Luciano; and Banizzi. Giovanni. 4,380,507. CI. 252-
429.00B.
Moon, Frederick H., to Zenith Radio Corporation. Oscillator for televi-
sion tuner. 4,380,827, CI. 455-179.000.
Moon, Frederick H., to Zenith Radio Corporation. UHF MOSFET
Mixer. 4,380.828. CI. 455-319.000.
Moraw, Roland; and Schadlich, Gunther, to Kalie, Niederlassung der
Hoechst AG. Cyclic electrophotographic copying process. 4.380,388,
CI. 355-15.000.
Moreno, Carlos M.; Bridges, Robert D.; and Uzee. Andre J., to Dow
Chemical Company. The. Method to produce a polytetra-fluoroethy-
lene diaphragm. 4.380,521, CI. 264-49.000.
Morgan, Annis R., Jr.: See —
Bachmann. G. Merle; Davis, Charles L.; and Morgan, Annis R., Jr.,
4,380,130, CI. 40-584.000.
Morgan, Clyde R. Bicycle handlebar grip. 4.380.093, CI. 16-llO.OOR.
Morgan, Richard A.: See —
Khan, Ausat A.; and Morgan, Richard A.. 4,380,618. CI.
526-206.000.
Morgan Trailer MFG. Co.: See —
Higginson, Roy C; and Whiteman, Paul L., 4.380.415. CI.
414-537.000.
Mountz. Elton E.; and Martin, Paul H., 4,380.300. CI. 220-1.500.
Morimoto, Akira: See —
Ochiai, Michihiko; and Morimoto, Akira, 4,380,541. CI.
424-246.000.
Morimoto, Jiro: See —
Nagata, Hiroshi; Sano, Kazuo; Morimoto, Jiro; and Shiho, Makoto.
4,380,393, CI. 356-328.000.
Morin, Robert A. Wire link-forming and linking device. 4,380.145, CI.
59-27.000.
Morita, Eiichi, to Monsanto Company. Prevulcanization inhibitors of
thio-triazine-amines for rubber. 4.380,609, CI. 525-348.000.
Morris, Billy J., to Industrial Manufacturers of Orosi. Apparatus for
assorting articles according to size. 4,380,294, CI. 209-540.000.
Morris, David G., to Institut Cerac S.A. Die for compaction of powder.
4,380,421. CI. 425-78.000.
Morrison. Howard J.: See —
Wildman, John R.; and Morrison, Howard J., 4,380,135, CI.
46-219.000.
Morton, Henry H., Jr. Electrical power regulating apparatus and
method. 4,380,730, CI. 323-300.000.
Morton, Paul H. Energy collection and storage system. 4,380,419, CI.
417-334.000.
Mosoni-Vuissoz, Cesarine, heir: See —
Vuissoz, Constant, deceased; Mosoni-Vuissoz. Cesarine, heir; and
Voide-Vuissoz, Suzanne, heir. 4,380.430, CI. 431-347.000.
Mostek Corporation: See —
Procbsting, Robert J., 4,380,805, CI. 365-201.000.
Motomura, Noriyuki; and Tsuboi, Hiroyuki, to Toshiba Kikai Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Apparatus for measuring injection speed in injection
molding machines. 4,380,801, CI. 364-565.000.
Motorola, Inc.: See —
Au, Kenneth K., 4,380,709, CI. 307-473.000.
Broton. Robert M., 4,380,822, CI. 455-80.000.
Crisp. Richard D.. 4.380,707. CI. 307-443.000.
Pfaff, William. 4,380,736. CI. 328-73.000.
Shannon. Paul D.; and Bruce, William C, Jr., 4.380.798. CI.
364-200.000.
Wrathall, Robert S., 4,380,706, CI. 307-297.000.
Mountz, Elton E.; and Martin, Paul H., to Morgan Trailer Mfg. Co. Air
cargo container. 4,380,300, CI. 220-1.500.
Mouzin, Gilbert; Cousse. Henri; and Stenger. Antoine, to Pierre Fabre
S.A. 2'-(Orthochlorobenzoyl)-4'-chloroglycylani]ides, compositions
thereof, and use as medicaments. 4,380,667, CI. 564-195.000.
Moynihan, Daniel J.: See —
Campbell, John A. L.; Moynihan, Daniel J.; Roper, William D.;
and WUlis, Earl C, 4,380,353, CI. 299-12.000.
Mudhar, Manohar: See —
Singh, Manohar A.; and Mudhar, Manohar, 4,380,778, CI.
358-194.100.
Mufti, Khizar S.; and Khan, Riaz A., to Talres Development (N.A.)
N.V. Process for the preparation of 4,^,6'-trichloro-4,^,6'-trideox•
ygalactosucrose (TGS). 4,380,476, CI. 127-46.300.
Mukai, Hideo: See —
Ueno, Tsuyoshi; and Mukai, Hideo, 4,380,384, CI. 3SS-3.0CH.
Mukhin, Viktor M.: See—
Abduganiev, Abdurakhim; Tikhonov, Valentin N.; Shlykov, Gen-
nady N.; Zhestkov, Vitaly I.; Krjuk, Timur P.; Mukhin, Viktor
M.; and Tikhonov, Jury N., 4,380,143, Q. 57-89.000.
Muller, Hanns P.; Sommerfeld, Claus-Dieter; and Becker, Gemot, to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the production of polyedier
polyols. 4,380,502, Q. 252-182.000.
Munro, Malcolm W., to Lucas Industries Limited. Starting aid for
internal combustion engines. 4,380,218, Q. 123-I79.00H.
Murakami, Hisamichi: See —
Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Kobayashi, Tadashi; Yamaguchi, Keizaburo;
and Murakami, Hisamichi, 4,380,671, CI. 368-48.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 17
Munki, Toshio: See—
Chiba, Kazunuua; Kobayashi, Kazuhiko; and Muraki, Toshio,
4,380,622, CI. 528-288.000.
Muraae, Kazuhiko: See—
Kaneaki, Tetsuhiko; Murase, Kazuhiko; and Shigeta, Junnosuke,
4,380,184, CI. 84-1.010.
Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: See—
Mandai, Haruhumi; Nishimura, Kunitaro; Kohno, Yoshiaki; and
Yamaguchi, Masami, 4,380,559, CI. 427-80.000.
Murchison, Craig B.; and Murdick, Dewey A., to Dow Chemical
Company, The. Novel Fischer-Tropsch catalysts. 4,380,589. CI.
518-714.000.
Murdick, Dewey A.: See—
Murchison, Craig B.; and Murdick, Dewey A., 4,380,589, CI.
518-714.000.
Murray, Geneva A.: Set-
Murray, James F.; and Murray, Geneva A., 4,380,296, CI.
209-704.000.
Murray, James F.; and Murray, Geneva A. Yam holder and method of
separating yam by color. 4,380,296, CI. 209-704.000.
Murray, John E.: See—
Desyllas, Peter L.; Radley, Barry G.; Rawsfhome, Alasdair; Eaton,
John R.; and Murray, John E., 4,380,797, CI. 364-200.000.
Murray, Robert J.: See—
Langston, Joseph, Jr.; and Murray, Robert J., 4,380,314, CI.
229-33.000.
Murty, Yellapu V.: See—
Adler, Ralph P. I.; Gorsuch, Thomas J.; Murty, Yellapu V.; and
Woronicki, Alexander R., 4,380,262, CI. 164-423.000.
Myshev, Mikhail A.: See—
Mazurin, Igor M.; Netupsky, Mikhail L.; Shevtsov, Alexandr V.;
Gladky, Viktor T.; Dmitriev, Nikolai A.; Lyapin, Andrei G.;
Polyakov, Alexandr V.; Myshev, Mikhail A.; and Panov, Vladi-
mir v., 4,380,532, CI. 423-469.000.
Nagane, Masatoshi, to Kabushiki Kaisha Fujimi Hoseisho. Guidance
apparatus for a sewing machine. 4,380,205, CI. 1 12-304.000.
Nagata, Hiroshi; Sano, Kazuo; Morimoto, Jiro; and Shiho, Makoto, to
Nippon Kogaku K.K. Grazing incidence spectrometer. 4,380,393, CI.
356-328.000.
Nagata, Koichi; and Umetsu, Shinjiro, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.
Portable radio communication device having signal processing cir-
cuit with presetting function. 4,380,832, CI. 455-343.000.
Naimer, Gundolf; and Hauer, Kurt, to Payer-Lux Elektroprodukte
Gesellschaft m.b.H. Electric shaver. 4,380,121, CI. 30^2.000.
Nakamura, Osamu; Ogino, Isao; and Kodama, Teruo, to Agency of
Industrial Science and Technology; and Ministry of International
Trade and Industry. Method for conversion of chemical energy to
electric energy. 4,380,575, CI. 429-13.000.
Nakamura, Yoshimitsu: See—
Yasuda, Kazuo; Tamura, Akihiko; and Nakamura, Yoshimitsu,
4,380,386, CI. 355-3.00R.
Naslund, Gusuv, to Korstrask Mekaniska, G. Naslund. Method and
device for bending section-sheet, plate, strip and like material.
4,380,573, CI. 428-595.000.
National Mine Service Company: See—
UBegue, Maurice K., 4,380,354. CI. 299-18.000.
National Research Development Corporation: See—
Blair, Albert; and Grant, Patrick T., 4,380,213, CI. 119-3.000.
Saunders, David H., 4,380,477, CI. 134-7.000.
Nativi, Larry A., to Loctite Corporation. Gasketing and sealing compo-
sition. 4,380,613, CI. 525-440.000.
NCR Corporation: See—
Italiano, Victor J., 4,380,772, CI. 346-14O.00R.
Lockwood, George C; and Trudel. Murray L., 4,380,804, CI.
365-184.000.
NECCHI S.p.A.: See—
Bianchi, Nereo, 4,380,203, CI. 112-158.00E.
Nelson, Jerome W., to Cratcher Resources Corporation. Method for
controlling torch position and travel in automatic welding. 4,380,695,
CI. 219-125.120.
Netting, David I., to Atlantic Richfield Company. Method for reducing
the amount of coal dust in the environment surrounding coal mining.
4,380,459, CI. 55-87.000.
Netupsky, Mikhail L.: See—
Mazurin, Igor M.; Netupsky, Mikhail L.; Shevtsov, Alexandr V.;
Gladky, Viktor T.; Dmitriev, Nikolai A.; Lyapin, Andrei G.;
Polyakov, Alexandr V.; Myshev, Mikhail A.; and Panov, Vladi-
mir v., 4,380,532, CI. 423-469.000.
Neuhaus, Karl-Friedrich; Perrey, Hermann; Fuhr, Karl; Freier, Hans-
Joachim; and Bendszus, Otto, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Radiation-
hardenable acrylic acid esters containing urethane groups and their
use. 4,380,604, CI. 524-873.000.
Newbower, Ronald S., to Massachusetts General Hospital. Apparatus
for making cardiac output conductivity measurements. 4,380,237, CI.
128-693.000.
NichoUs, Robin P., to Raytheon Company. Apparatus for recyclmg
complete cycles of a stored periodic signal. 4,380,816, CI. 375-94.000.
Nichols, Richard K., to Barber-Cohnan Company. Heat-retarding air
distribution unit. 4,380,188, CI. 98-40.00D.
Nield, Eric; Higgins, David E.; and Young, Mark W., to Imperial
Chemical Industries Limited. Fast crystallizing polyester coinposi-
tions. 4,380,621, CI. 528-287.000.
Niles Parts Co., Ltd.: See—
Simizu, Akio, 4,380.754. CI. 340-73.000.
Nilsson, Claes T.: See—
Jakobien. Kjell M.; and Nilsaon, Claes T., 4,380,525, Q.
264-521.000.
Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Higashiyama, Naotoshi; and E>oi, Kazuyuki, 4,380,823, CI.
455-143.000.
Nagata. Koichi; and UmeUu, Shinjiro, 4,380,832, Q. 455-343.000.
Shinmyo, Saburo, 4,380.814, CI. 375-40.000.
Yanagisawa, Masahiro, 4,380,558. CI. 427-53.100.
Nippon Kogaku K. K.: See —
Mogami, Satoshi, 4,380,375, CI. 3SO-426.000.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See—
Nagata, Hiroshi; Sano, Kazuo; Morimoto, Jiro; and Shiho, Makoto.
4.380.393, CI. 356-328.000.
Nippon Telegraph ft Telephone Public Corporation: See—
Mitachi, Seiko; Shibata. Shuichi; Kanamori, Terutoshi; Manabe,
Toyotaka; and Yasu, Mitsuho, 4,380,588, CI. 501-37.000.
Nippondenso Co., Ltd.: See-
Suzuki. Haruo; and Hashimoto, Shigeyothi, 4,380,261, G.
164-120.000.
Nishida, Haniki; and Shinozaki, Nobuya, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.;
and Kato Hatsujo Kaisha., Ltd. Hose clamp. 4,380,096, CI. 24-20.00R.
Nishihama. Hitoshi: See—
Mateumoto, Shoji; Matsui, Toshikazu; Ikeda. Toshimittu; Kozuka,
Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi; and Aizawa, TaUuo. 4.380.579,
CI. 430-126.000.
Nishimura, Kunitaro: See —
Mandai. Hamhumi; Nishimura, Kunitaro; Kohno, Yoshiaki; and
Yamaguchi, Masami. 4.380.559, CI. 427-80.000.
Nishiyama, Ryuzo; Fujikawa, Kanichi; Yokomichi, Isao; Shigehara,
Itaru; and Miyaji. Mikio. to Ishihara Sangyo Kaisha Ltd. Process for
producing 1.3,5-triaminobenzene. 4.380.670. CI. 564-407.000.
Nishizawa, Masayuki. to Hoei Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Electrically
controlled additive lamp housing for optical printing. 4,380.791. CI.
362-231.000.
Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.: See—
Nishida, Haruki; and Shinozaki, Nobuya, 4,380,096, CI 24-20.00R.
Yano, Hiroshi; Kawasaki. Teruo; Nomura, Hiroyuki; and Takeu-
chi, Mikio, 4.380,733, CI. 324-166.000.
Nisshin Flour Milling Co., Ltd.: See—
Tahara, Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; KomaUu. Yasuhiro;
Kubota, Reiko; and Takahashi. Toshihiro. 4.380.668. CI
564-391.000.
Nitto Boseki Co., Ltd.: See—
Shono. Hiroaki; Noji. Toshio; and Ishikawa, Shinzo. 4,380.462, CI.
65-1.000.
Noji, Toshio: See—
Shono, Hiroaki; Noji, Toshio; and Ishikawa, Shinzo, 4,380.462. CI.
65-1.000.
Nolt, Edwin B., to Sperry Corporation. Anchoring apparatus.
4,380,207, CI. 114-298.000.
Nomiyama, Neal T.: See —
Buser, Rudolph G.; Rohde, Robert S.; and Nomiyama, Neal T.,
4,380,391. CI. 356-5.000.
Nomura. Hiroyuki: See —
Yano, Hiroshi; Kawasaki. Teruo; Nomura, Hiroyuki; and Takeu-
chi, Mikio, 4.380.733. CI. 324-166.000.
Nordson Corporation: See—
Hollstein, Thomas E.; and Hartle, Ronald J.. 4.380.320. CI.
239-697.000.
Noristi. Luciano; and Baruzzi. Giovanni, to Montedison S.p.A. Cata-
lysts for polymerizing ethylene. 4,380.507. CI. 252-429.00B.
Normann, Richard W.; and Fairbaim. LeRoy W.. to Bendix Corpora-
tion, The. Method of making an electrical connector assembly.
4.380.119, CI. 29-884.000.
Norton, William W., to Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Fluid pump.
4,380,236, CI. 604-151.000.
Novits, Michael F.: See-
Gallagher, Ronald B.; and Novite, Michael F., 4.380.605, Q.
525-14.000.
Novo Industri A/S: See—
Gestrelius, Stina M.; and Kjaer, Jorgen H., 4,380,552, Q.
426-52.000.
Nunno, Louis E. M. Footing jig for positioning fasteners. 4,380,329, CI.
269-41.000.
N.V. Raychem S.A.: See—
Moisson, Marc F. L., 4,380.686, CI. 174-84.00R.
O'Brien, Gerald E.: See— __ ^
Smith, David L.; and O'Brien, Gerald E., 4.380,776, Q.
358-102.000.
Occidental Chemical Corporation: See—
King, Peter F., 4,380,560, CI. 427-239.000.
Wisnouskas, Joseph S.; and Ho, Roland, 4,380,531. CI. 423-316.000.
Ochiai, Michihiko; and Morimoto, Akira, to Takeda Chemical Indus-
tries, Ltd. Cephalosporin derivatives. 4,380,541, CI. 424-246.000.
Ogino, Isao: See—
Nakamura, Osamu; Ogino, Isao; and Kodama, Tenio, 4.380.573. CI.
429-13.000.
Ohhara, Minoni: See— .„ . ..
Yoshikumi, Chikao; Ohmura. Yoshio; Hirose, Fumio; Ikuzawa.
Masanori; Mattunaga, Kenichi; Fujii, Takayoshi; Ohhara.
Minora; and Ando, Takao, 4,380,536, CI. 424-180.000.
Ohmata, Ken; Aoki, Hideya; and Tamura, Naoyuki. Projection icreeo.
4,380,368, CI. 350-117.000.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Ikuzawa,
Ohhara,
Shinichi,
L.; O'Lenick,
4.380,637. CI.
4.380.501, CI.
Ohmura, Yoshio: See —
Yoshikumi. Chikao; Ohmura, Yoshio; Hirose, Fumio:
Masanori; Matsunaga, Kenichi; Fujii, Takayoshi;
Minoru; and Ando, Takao, 4,380,536, CI. 424-180.000.
Okami, Yoshiro: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Okami, Yoshiro; and Kendo,
4,380.581. CI. 435-80.000.
Okamoto. Ikuko, to Yugen Kaisha Batora Konsaruteingu. Automated
study voice record/reproduction system. 4.380.438. CI. 434-157.000.
O'Lenick. Anthony J.. Jr.: See —
Lindemann. Martin K. O.; Mayhew. Raymond
Anthony J., Jr.; and Verdicchio, Robert J.,
548-112.000.
Olin Corporation: See —
Wojtowicz, John A.; and Gergo. Andree M. B.,
252-186.240.
Wojtowicz. John A., 4.380.533, CI. 423-473.000.
Oltendorf, Norman E.. to Bodine Electric Company. Accommodation
circuit for a step motor. 4.380.722. CI 318-696.000.
Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd.: See —
Sato. Masanobu. 4.380.691. CI. 200-5 l.OOR.
Omata, Yasukuni: See —
Ozaki. Yoshihiro; Kaneko, Shuichiro; Kuniyoshi. Masayuki;
Kondo. Shoji; and Omata. Yasukuni. 4,380,385, CI. 355-3.0TR.
O'Neill, Raymond J. Crib block for erecting bin walls. 4,380,409, CI.
405-273.000.
Orlando, Michael D.; and Riley, Jean M., to United States of America,
Army. Preparation of dry variola virus. 4,380,582, CI. 435-239.000.
Orlowski, Jan A.; and Butler, David V.. to ScientiHc Pharmaceuticals;
and Sankin Industries. Ltd. Method for adhering structures to teeth.
4,380.432. CI. 433-9.000.
Ostby. Lyle D.. to Kearney & Trecker Corporation. Portable control
box for computer numerically controlled machine tools. 4.380,796.
CI. 364-171.000.
Otstot, Roger S.; and Runkle, Charles J., to Monsanto Company. Gas
separation apparatus. 4.380.460, CI. 55-158.000.
Otto, Gerhard: See—
Bredow, Walter; and Otto, Gerhard, 4,380,182, CI. 83-140.000.
Ovanesian, Aram G.: See —
Karabegov, Mikhail A.; Ovanesian, Aram G.; Mesropian. Eduard
A.; Metreveli. Georgy T.; Karpeev. Anatoly A.; Khoshtaria.
Boris K.; and Gventsadze. Tatyana I.. 4,380,392, CI. 356-243.000.
Overaker, Ronald F.: See —
Jobsis, Frans F.; Keizer, Johannes H.; and Overaker. Ronald F..
4.380,240. CI. 128-633.000.
Ozaki, Yoshihiro; Kaneko. Shuichiro; Kuniyoshi, Masayuki; Kondo,
Shoji; and Omata. Yasukuni. to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha.
Method of transferring toner powder image by pressure and appara-
tus therefor. 4,380.385. CI. 355-3.0TR.
Ozawa, Toshiaki: See —
Sado. Ichiro; and Ozawa, Toshiaki. 4.380.726, CI. 320-48.000.
P.FW Behecr B.V.: See-
van den Bosch, Steven; Kettenes, Dirk K.; Bart de Roos, Kris;
Sipma, Gerben; and Stoffelsma, Jan. 4.380,655, CI. 549-472.000.
Paddock, Stephen W.; and Tershak, Andrew T., to Whirlpool Corpora-
tion. Temperature sensing circuit with high noise immunity.
4,380,155. CI. 62-229.000.
Palmer, Thomas W. Gas operated valve actuator. 4,380,325, CI.
251-14.000.
Palombo, Gaston; and Fortescue, Stephen M., to Dataproducts Corpo-
ration. Magnetic printer and printhead. 4.380,768, CI. 346-74.500.
Panov, Vladimir V.: See —
Mazurin, Igor M.; Netupsky, Mikhail L.; Shevtsov. Alexandr V.;
Gladky. Viktor T.; Dmitriev, Nikolai A.; Lyapin. Andrei G.;
Polyakov. Alexandr V.; Myshev. Mikhail A.; and Panov, Vladi-
mir v., 4.380,532. CI. 423-469.000.
Ftp nee Imrenyi. Gabriella: See —
Szejtli, Jozsef; Budai, Zsuzsanna; Tetenyi nee Erdosi, Magda; and
Pap nee Imrenyi, Gabriella, 4,380.626, CI. 536-103.000.
Parmenon. Daniel: See —
Godat, Jean; Parmenon. Daniel; Krzywdziak. Alain; and Boudin.
Daniel, 4.380.399. CI. 366-289.000.
Parmer. Kenneth R.; and Stape. William J., to AMP Incorporated.
Cartridge, holder and connector system. 4,380,360. CI. 339-17.0CF.
Patel. Raman: See—
Coran, Aubert Y.; and Patel, Raman. 4,380,606, CI. 525-196.000.
Patzelt, Helmut: See—
Waldschutz, Heinz; Rauner. Franz; and Patzelt, Helmut, 4,380,341,
CI. 277-56.000.
Pauperas, Victor: See —
CasaJe, Thomas M.; Schmiu, Frederick J., Jr.; and Pauperas,
Victor, 4,380,246. CI. 137-375.000.
Pavlik, Dennis: See —
Swensnid, Roger L.; Pavlik, Dennis; and DeLuca, John J.,
4,380,362, CI. 339-1 12.00L.
Payer-Lux Elektroprodukte Gesellschaft m.b.H.: See —
Naimer, Gundolf; and Hauer, Kurt, 4,380,121, CI. 30-42.000.
Payne, Roger A.: See —
Gray, Herbert W.; and Payne, Roger A., 4,380,252, CI. 138-125.000.
Payton, Charles E.: See-
Waters, Kenneth H.; Hopkins, John R.; and Payton. Charles E.,
4.380.806, CI. 367-27.000.
Peabody Coal Company: See-
Campbell, John A. L.; Moynihan, Daniel J.; Roper, William D.;
and WUIis. Earl C, 4,380,353, CI. 299-12.000.
Peart. Leland L.; and Farrar. John, to United States of America. Air
Force. Corrosion monitoring system. 4,380,763, CI. 340-870.160.
Pennwalt Corporation: See —
Gallagher, Ronald B.; and Novits, Michael F., 4,380,605, CI.
525-14.000.
Perrey, Hermann: See —
Neuhaus, Karl-Friedrich; Perrey, Hermann; Fuhr, Karl; Freier,
Hans-Joachim; and Bendszus, Otto, 4,380,604, CI. 524-873.000.
Perry, Richard E.: See —
Tooke-Kirby, David H.; Perry, Richard E.; and Arbuckle, Kenneth
H., 4,380,599, CI. 525-370.000.
Petaway, John B.; and Gabriel, Otis C. Quick release fire hose cabinet.
4,380,269, CI. 169-51.000.
Peterpaul, Joseph, to Thomas & Betts Corporation. Cable slitting and
spreading tool. 4,380,256, CI. 140-106.000.
Peters, Mary K., to Eli Lilly and Company. Synthesis of acylated
benzothiophenes. 4,380,635, CI. 546-202.000.
Peterson Manufacturing Co.: See —
Potts, Virgil W., 4,380,793, CI. 362-267.000.
Petijean, Christian: See —
Marchand, Maurice; and Petijean, Christian, 4,380,830, CI.
455-327.000.
Petrocarbon Developments Ltd.: See —
Haslam, Alan A.; Isalski, Wieslaw H.; and Tomlinson, Terence R.,
4,380.461. CI. 62-11.000.
Petroleum Fermentations N.V.: See —
Gutnick, David L.; Rosenberg, Eugene; Belsky, Igal; and Zinaida,
Zosim, 4,380,504, CI. 252-356.000.
Pfaff, William, to Motorola, Inc. Peripheral interface adapter circuit for
counter synchronization. 4,380,736, CI. 328-73.000.
Pfeiler, Manfred, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. X-Ray diagnostic
system comprising a radiography unit with an X-ray tube which emits
a fan-shaped radiation beam. 4,380,818, CI. 378-099.000.
Pfizer: See-
Johnson, Michael R., 4,380,542, CI. 424-248.550.
Phillips Petroleum Company: See —
Hitzman, Donald O., 4,380,584, CI. 435-313.000.
Ryan, Lawrence A., 4,380,317, CI. 236-15.0BF.
Solomon, Paul W., 4,380,659, CI. 549-532.000.
Phy, William S., to Fairchild Camera & Instrument Corp. Radiation
protection for integrated circuits utilizing tape automated bonding.
4,380,566, CI. 428-192.000.
Picker Corporation: See —
Everett, Dennis; and Jukic, Vjekoslav, 4,380,819, CI. 378-114.000.
Pickering, Alan H., to English Electric Valve Company Limited.
Magnetrons. 4,380,717, CI. 315-39.510.
Pierre Fabre S.A.: See —
Mouzin, Gilbert; Cousse, Henri; and Stenger, Antoine, 4,380,667,
CI. 564-195.000.
Pierson, Darrell E.: See —
Brookhyser, Byron B.; Lictenwalter, Robert H.; McGee, Arthur
L.; and Pierson, Darrell E., 4,380,259, CI. 144-357.000.
Pike, Keith E.: See—
Skoch, Leroy V.; and Pike, Keith E., 4,380,424, CI. 425-331.000.
Pilgrim Engineering Developments Limited: See —
Bunyan, Thomas W., 4,380,181, CI. 81-57.380.
Pischinger, Anton, to Friedmann & Maier Aktiengesellschaft. Fuel
injection pump for internal combustion engines. 4,380,222, CI.
123-365.000.
Pitney Bowes Inc.: See —
Auerbach, David R., 4,380,210, CI. 118-253.000.
Reid, Robert R.; Winkler, Edward; and Girard, Stephen E.,
4,380,209, CI. 118-253.000.
Platz, Rolf: See—
Rieber, Norbert; Platz, Rolf; and Fuchs, Werner, 4,380,642, CI.
548-255.000.
PLM Aktiebolag: See—
Jakobsen, Kjell M.; and Nilsson, Claes T., 4,380,525, CI.
264-521.000.
Plundrich, Winfried: See —
Dotzer, Richard; and Plundrich, Winfried, 4,380,170, CI.
73-147.000.
Pohl, Lothar: See—
Sorensen, Norman L.; and Pohl, Lothar, 4,380,351, CI. 296-217.000.
Polaroid Corporation: See —
Reynard, John M., 4,380,807, CI. 367-97.000.
Polyakov, Alexandr V.: See —
Mazurin, Igor M.; Netupsky, Mikhail L.; Shevtsov, Alexandr V.;
Gladky, Viktor T.; Dmitriev, Nikolai A.; Lyapin, Andrei G.;
Polyakov, Alexandr V.; Myshev. Mikhail A.; and Panov, Vladi-
mir v., 4,380,532, CI. 423-469.000.
Pomante, Louis N., to Solid State Scientific, Inc. Method of making a
semiconductor device with a seal. 4,380,115, CI. 29-588.000.
Pommer, Emst-Heinrich: See —
Sauter, Hubert; Ammermann, Eberhard; Rentzea, Costin; Zeeh,
Bemd; Jung, Johann; and Pommer, Emst-Heinrich, 4,380,546,
CI. 424-269.000. ,
Post, Willem P., to Thomassen &. Drijver-Verblifa *iI.V. Squeezer
Hanger. 4,380,165, CI. 72-355.000.
Postma, Gosse J., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Color television display
tube with resistor for interference radiation reduction. 4,380,715, CI.
315-3.000.
Potts, Virgil W., to Peterson Manufacturing Co. Submersible vehicular
lamp assembly. 4,380,793, CI. 362-267.000.
Poyser, Robert H.; and Turner, David H., to Beecham Group Limited.
Tablets. 4.380,540, CI. 424-233.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
; and
CI.
PPG Industries, Inc.: See—
Matesa, Joseph M.. 4.380,463, CI. 65-99.200.
Welsh, David A.; Dowbenko, Rostyslaw; Das, Suryya K.; Kama,
Charles M.; and Christenson, Roger M., 4,380,601, CI.
524-555.000.
Prabhu, Ashok N.; and Hang, Kenneth W., to RCA Corporation.
Indium oxide resistor inks. 4,380,750, CI. 338-308.000.
Pratt, Charles D. Bird house and method of making same. 4,380,336, CI.
273-157.00R. .. . . r
Pray, Winston C, to Flexible Steel Lacing Company. Method for
applying belt fasteners to a belt. 4,380,109, CI. 29-466.000.
Precision Plastic Products Corporation: See-
Alejandro Llera, Santos A. A., 4,380,299, CI. 215-252.000.
Preux, Marie Vuissoz-de, heir: See—
Vuissoz, Constant, deceased; Mosoni-Vuissoz, Cesarine, heir;
Voide-Vuissoz, Suzanne, heir, 4,380,430, CI. 431-347.000.
Prevot, Maurice: See —
Delfino, Jean-Jacques; and Prevot, Maurice, 4,380,480,
148-12.400.
Proebsting, Robert J., to Mostek Corporation. Tape bum-in circuit.
4,380,805, CI. 365-201.000.
Oonaar Corporation: See —
GHnka. John S.; and Zack, Larry E., 4,380.316, CI. 232-16.000.
Quirin, Michel: See —
Wattron, Albert; and Quirin, Michel, 4,380,142, CI. 56-370.000.
R. ftoward Strasbaugh, Inc.: See-
Walsh, Thomas A., 4,380,412, CI. 409-314.000.
Radley, Barry G.: See— .
Desyllas, Peter L.; Radley, Barry G.; Rawsthorne. Alasdair; Eaton.
John R.; and Murray. John E.. 4,380,797, CI. 364-200.000.
Raeder, Arthur; and Raeder, Celia R. Permanent one visit bonded
bridge no drilling, and kit therefor. 4,380,435, CI. 433-180.000.
Raeder, Celia R.: See— _„
Raeder, Arthur; and Raeder, Celia R., 4,380,435, CI. 433-180.000.
Ralston Purina Company: See—
Skoch, Leroy V.; and Pike, Keith E., 4,380,424, CI. 425-331.000.
Ramos, Pedro A. Hip prosthesis. 4,380.090. CI. 3-1.912.
Rasberger. Michael; and Evans, Samuel, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation.
N-Substituted 6-amino-dibenz[c,e][l,2]oxaphosphorines. 4,380,515,
CI. 260-936.000.
Rasberger, Michael, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Process for the pro-
duction of 2,2'-dihydroxy-biphenyls. 4,380,676, CI. 568-730.000.
Rathbome, Brian A.; and Ryan, Bruce R., to BOC Limited. Separation
of air. 4,380,457, CI. 55-33.000.
Rauner, Franz: See— ,d/m^i
Waldschutz, Heinz; Rauner, Franz; and Patzelt, Helmut, 4,380,341,
CI. 277-56.000.
Rawsthorne, Alasdair: See—
Desyllas, Peter L.; Radley, Barry G.; Rawsthorne, Alasdair; Eaton,
John R.; and Murray, John E., 4,380,797, CI. 364-200.000.
Raytheon Company: See—
Nicholls, Robin P., 4,380,816, CI. 375-94.000.
RCA Corporation: See-
Goodman. Alvin M., 4,380,773. CI. 357-23.000.
Kaplan, Leonard A.. 4,380.740, CI. 330-288.000.
Mazgy, James D., 4,380,741, CI. 330-308.000.
Prabhu, Ashok N.; and Hang, Kenneth W., 4,380,750, CI.
338-308.000.
Reder, Kenneth J. Tamper-resistant lock. 4.380,163, CI. 70-364.00A.
Redien, Pierre: See—
Campagne, Jean-Claude; ChoUet, Jean; and Redien, Pierre.
4,380,555. CI. 426-549.000.
Regie Nationale des Usines Renault: See—
Allard, Pierre-Yves; and Leconte, Gilles, 4,380.799, CI.
364-426.000. , . . ^
Reich, Jack W., to Kimberly-Clark Corporation. Sanitary napkin with
disposal means. 4,380,450, Q. 604-386.000.
Reichelderfer, Richard F.; Vogel, Diane C; and Tang, Manan C, to
Branson International Plasma Corporation. Process and gas mixture
for etching aluminum. 4,380,488, CI. 156-643.000.
Reid, Robert R.; Winkler, Edward; and Girard, Stephen E.. to Pitney
Bowes Inc. Workpiecc moistening apparatus. 4,380,209, CI.
118-253.000.
Reinecke, Erich; and Klatt, Alfred, to WABCO Fahrzeugbremsen
GmbH. Gear shift control mechanism for servo-driven transmis-
sion. 4,380.177, CI. 74-475.000.
Reinhardt, Bruce A.; and Arnold, Fred E., to United Sutes of Amenca,
Air Force. Oxy- and thioaryl-phenylated aromatic heterocyclic
polymers. 4.380,619, CI. 526-259.000.
Reiss, Ronald J: See—
Schneiter, John W.; Reiss, Ronald J.; and Enskat, Albert G.,
4,380,310. CI. 222-501.000.
Reliance Electric Company: See—
GrifTm, Neil C, 4,380,175, CI. 73-862.670.
Renea, James M.; and Wang, Pen-Chung, to Dow Chemical Company,
The. Process for forming esters (II). 4,380,636, CI. 546-326.000.
Reninger. James D. Candlelamp-Uble. 4,380,200, CI. 108-23.000.
Rentzea, Costin: See— ^ -y u
Sauter, Hubert; Ammermann, Eberhard; Rentzea, Costin; Z«eh,
Bemd; Jung, Johann; and Pommer, Emst-Heinrich, 4,380,546,
CI. 424-269.000. . ^ ,
Repik, Clyde P.; and Leatherman, Alfred F., to Heller, William C, Jr.
Inductively heated tooling and method for working plastic members.
4.380.484. CI. 156-251.000.
David; and Coleman. Ronald K.
4,380,420, CI 4I8-6I.00B.
Echo recognition system.
Rexham Corporation: See—
Dickson, J. Douglas; Sweeney, J
4,380,446, CI. 493-11.000.
Rexroth GmbH: See—
Wusthof, Peter; and Schneider, Johann,
Reynard, John M., to Polaroid Corporation.
4,380,807, CI. 367-97.000.
Reynolds, Carlton J. Automatic transmission selector lever lock.
4,380,752, CI. 34O-52.00D.
Rhone Poulenc Industries: See—
Campagne, Jean-Claude; Chollet, Jean; and Redien, Pierre,
4,380,555. CI. 426-549.000.
Richards, Joyce: See—
Lind, David J.; and Richards. Joyce, 4,380,523, CI 264-257 000.
Rieber, Norbert; Platz, Rolf; and Fuchs, Werner, to BASF Aktien-
gesellschaft. Simultaneous preparation of pyrazolc and triazoles.
4.380,642, CI. 548-255.000.
Riker Laboratories, Inc.: See-
Stem, Richard M., 4,380.543, CI. 424-258.000.
Riley, Jean M.: See—
Orlando, Michael D.; and Riley, Jean M., 4,380.582, CI.
435-239.000.
Rinneburger, Klaus: See—
Adamek, Manfred; and Rinneburger, Klaus, 4,380.783, CI.
360-99.000.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See—
Eheim, Franz, 4,380,221, CI. 123-343.000.
Kuhlmann, Gerhard; Wolf, Erwin; and Wahl, Gunter, 4,380,693,
CI. 200-330.000.
Wesemeyer, Jurgen; Haubner. Georg; and Meier, Wemer.
4.380,225. CI. 123-613.000.
Roberts. Elliott D. Dehydrator apparatus with unidirectional air flow
control means. 4.380,127, CI. 34-197.000.
Roberts, John T., to UOP Inc. Amines of alkoxydiphenyl esthers as
antioxidants and lubricating oils and greases containing same
4,380,497, CI. 252-47.500.
Robertshaw Controls Company: See-
Weaver, Marvin P., 4,380,251, CI. 137-877.000.
Robertson, William H.: See-
Walker, Jesse P.; and Robertson, William H.. 4,380,095, CI. 19-
80.00R.
Robeson, Lloyd M.; and Matzner, Markus. to Union Carbide Corpora-
tion. Flame retardant polyarylate compositions. 4,380,598, CI.
524-163.000.
Rocha, Frank; and Spector, George. Foot exerciser. 4,380,231, CI.
128-57.000.
Rockwell Intemational Corporation: See—
Clendening, Steven J., 4,380,815, CI. 375-80.000.
Cunningham, Vemon R., 4,380,711, CI. 307-491.000.
Fjeldsted, Thomas P., 4,380,363, CI. 350-1.300.
Hallford, Ben R., 4.380,831, CI. 455-327.000.
Roger, Gillet; and Henri, Nithart, to Alsthom-Atlantique; and Electn-
cite de France. Dovetailed teeth for use in a system for fixing sutor
winding bars in a routing electric machine. 4.380.713. CI.
310-214.000.
Rogers. Colin Ward: See-
Smith. Joseph. 4.380,124, CI. 33-433.000.
Rohde, Robert S.: See— , v, v, i -r
Buser, Rudolph G.; Rohde, Robert S.; and Nomiyama, Neal T.,
4,380,391, CI. 356-5.000.
Rohde, Wolfgang: See— . , ..,
Habermehl, Diethard; Rohde, Wolfgang; Kucharzyk. Werner; and
Siebert, Wemer, 4,380,125, CI. 34-10.000.
Rohm and Haas Company: See—
Chong, Bemi P., 4,380,590, CI. 521-33.000.
Rolls-Royce Limited: See— ,,, ,„,w^
Lind, David J.; and Richards, Joyce, 4,380.523. CI. 264-257.000
Romanova, Roza M.: See—
Shevakin. Jury F.; Shpichinetsky. Efim S.; Fedorenko. Valentina
P Efremov. Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko.
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky. losif A.; Anikeev. Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova. Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Romeo, Arthur L.; Bonelli, Robert T.; and Fishman, Harvey E., to
Hazeltine Corporation. External magnetic field compensator for a
CRT. 4,380,716, CI. 315-8.000.
Roper Corporation: See—
Butte, Orvillc R., 4,380,698, CI. 2 19-492.000.
Roper, William D.: See— ^ . . „ „, .. r»
Campbell. John A. L.; Moynihan. Daniel J.; Roper. William D.;
and Willis. Earl C. 4.380.353. CI. 299-12.000.
Roscher. Gunter; Schaum. Helmut; and Schmitz. Heinz, to Hoechst
Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the preparation of practically formic
acid-free acetic acid. 4.380.663. CI. 562-536.000.
°*Lei^ Michael D.r"id Rose. Robert C. 4.380.723, CI. 318-314.000.
Rosenberg, Eugene: See— „ , ^ . i a -r a.
Gutnick, David L.; Rosenberg. Eugene; Belsky. Igal; and Zinaida.
Zosim. 4.380,504. CI. 252-356.000.
Rosenbcrry. George M.. Jr.: See—
Liebermann. Howard H.; Frischmann. Peter G.; and Rosenbcrry.
George M.. Jr., 4,380,572. CI. 428-592.000.
Rosier. Helmut, to Siemens Aktiengesellschafl. Digital semiconductor
circuit. 4.380,705. CI. 307-247 OOR.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Roio-Finish Company, Inc.: See—
Balz. Gunther W . 4,380,137, CI. 51-163.100.
Rozzi, Mario, to Detroit Radiant Products Company Safety tip-over
device for portable gas-fired infrared radiant heater. 4,380,428, CI
431-88.000.
Ruckel, Erwin R,; and Epstein, Martin, to Arizona Chemical Company.
Inert rosm esters and process for prepanng the same. 4,380,513, CI
260-104.000
Rudd, Thomas H.: See-
Gray. Roger, 4,380,727, CI. 322-28.000.
Rumba, Alma A.: See —
Karklin, Roman Y.; Rumba, Alma A.; and Azanda Via K
4,380,583, CI 435-242.000.
Runions, Sinville, to International Shoe Machine Corporation. Cement
applymg machine and method. 4,380,524, CI. 264-263.000
Runkle, Charles J.: See—
Otstot. Roger S.; and Runkle, Charles J., 4,380,460, CI. 55-158.000.
Rush ton, John: See—
Daintrey, Joseph W.; Rushton, John; and Willis, Michael
4,380,383, CI. 355-3.0OR.
Rutgerswerke Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Stadelhofer, Jurgen; Franck, Heinz-Gerhard; Koch, Karl H. and
Marrett. Rolf, 4,380,454. CI. 44-l.OOB.
Ryan, Bruce R.: See—
Rathbome, Brian A.; and Ryan, Bruce R., 4,380,457, CI. 55-33.000.
Ryan. Lawrence A., to Phillips Petroleum Company, Furnace control
4,380,317, CI. 236-15 OBF.
Sable, Donald E. Well tool. 4,380,347, CI. 285-45.000.
Sado, Ichiro; and Ozawa, Toshiaki, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Battery
service life indicator. 4,380,726, CI. 320-48.000.
Saferstein. Al; and Spector. Gilbert, to Innomed Corporation. Multi-
function light device. 4.380.790. CI. 362-231.000.
Saito, Keiki: See—
Ito, Takeshi; Ishizuka. Shuzo; Goto, Keiichi; and Saito, Keiki
4,380.284. CI. 198-494.000.
Saito, Shoichiro: See —
Hirose, Yasuyuki; Shimaoka. Motohiro; Saito, Shoichiro and
Kowaguchi. Toru. 4.380,782. CI. 360-99.000.
Saito, Takashi: See —
Hirata, Atsumi; Tajima. Osamu; Kaneda. Isami; Sugiyama.
Hiroyuki; Saito. Takashi; and Mochizuki. Masafumi, 4,380,780.
CI. 360-97,000.
Sakai. Rokuro: See —
Kamioka. Seiichi; Manabe. Masahiko; and Sakai, Rokuro
4,380,104, CI. 28-282.000.
Sakurai, Hisaya: See —
Matsuzaki. Kazuhiko; Hamada, Minoru; and Sakurai. Hisaya
4.380,620, CI. 528-232.000.
Saltzman. Robert S.. to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company,
Method and apparatus for photometrically monitoring low level
concentration of hydrogen sulfide in alkanol amine. 4.380,586. CI
436-121.000.
Samaan, Samir: See —
Stadler. Peter; Koebemick, Wolfgang; Samaan. Samir; and Gau.
Wolfgang. 4.380.625, CI. 536-13.900.
Sandell, Lionel S., to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company. Stabili-
zation of water-beanng explosives having a thickened continuous
aqueous phase. 4.380,482. CI. 149-21.000.
Sanders. David E.. to E-Systems. Inc. Fast AGC slew circuit. 4,380.737
CI. 330-134 000.
Sandner, Michael R.: See—
Baskent. Feyyaz O.; and Sandner. Michael R.. 4.380.591. CI
521-115.000.
Sandoz Ltd.: See—
Kleinlogel. Horst; and Theohar. Carl. 4.380.550, CI. 424-324.000
Sanger, Gerd: See—
Kocmer. Gotz; Sanger, Gerd; Fink. Hans-Ferdi; and Grassmann.
Fnedhelm. 4.380.503. CI. 252-314.000.
Sankin Industries, Ltd.: See —
Orlowski, Jan A.; and Butler, David V., 4,380.432, CI. 433-9.000.
Sano, Kazuo: See —
NagaU, Hiroshi; Sano, Kazuo; Morimoto, Jiro; and Shiho, Makoto.
4,380,393. CI. 356-328.000.
Sarantakis, Dimitrios; and Dvonch. William, to American Home Prod-
ucts Corporation. Enkephalin degrading enzyme inhibitors.
4.380.535, CI. 424-177.000.
Sato. Masanobu. to Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd. Main switch for tape
recorder. 4.380,691, CI. 200-5 1. OOR.
Sato. Tadashi, to Clarion Co.. Ltd. Automatic power supply system
4.380,809, CI. 369-6.000. kh y y
Sato, Yasuhisa; and Tsuji. Sadahiko. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Com-
pact zoom lens. 4,380.377. CI. 350-427.000.
Sauerbrunn, Robert D., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company
Diamine recovery process. 4.380,615. CI. 526-65.000.
Saunders Archery Company: See —
Saunders, Charles A., 4,380,226, CI. I24-41.00A.
Saunders, Charles A., to Saunders Archery Company. Winged arrow
rest. 4,380,226, CI. 1 24-41. OOA.
Saunders, David H., to National Research Development Corporation.
Cleaning pipes using nvxtures of liquid and abrasive particles.
4,380,477, CI. 134-7.000.
Sauter, Hubert; Ammermann, Eberhard; Rentzea, Costin; Zeeh, Bemd;
Jung, Johann; and Pominer, Emst-Heinrich, to BASF Aktiengesell-
schaft. Azole compounds, their preparation, their use for crop treat-
ment, and agents for this purpose. 4,380.346, CI. 424-269.000.
Sawaki. Yasumasa: See —
Kaku, Masaro; Sawaki. Yasumasa; and Ando, Kunio, 4,380,729, CI.
323-285.000.
Schacht. Barry M., to Mirrycle Corporation. Adjustable support system
for cycle mirror. 4.380.369. CI. 350-307.000.
Schadlich, Gunther: See —
Moraw. Roland; and Schadlich. Gunther, 4,380,388, CI. 355-15.000.
Schaum, Helmut: See —
Roscher, Gunter; Schaum, Helmut; and Schmitz, Heinz, 4,380,663.
CI. 562-536.000.
Scherrer. Joseph H.: See —
Wright, Howard J.; and Scherrer, Joseph H., 4,380,611, 01.
525-418.000.
Schmidt, Thomas R.. to Miles Laboratories, Inc. Method of imparting
a reddish color to seasoning salts. 4,380,553, CI. 426-250.000.
Schmitt, Frederick L.: See—
Boden, Richard M.; Dekker, Lambert; Schmitt, Frederick L.- and
Van Loveren, Augustinus G., 4.380,658, CI. 549-525.000.
Schmitt. Reinhold. to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Method and device
for the regulation of a magnetic deflection system. 4,380,703. CI.
Schmitz. Frederick J.. Jr.: See—
Casale, Thomas M.; Schmitz, Frederick J., Jr.; and Pauperas,
Victor, 4,380,246, CI. 137-375.000.
Schmitz, Heinz: See—
Roscher, Gunter; Schaum, Helmut; and Schmitz, Heinz, 4,380,663.
CI. 562-536.000.
Schnapper, Christoph: See—
Intichar, Lutz; Schnapper, Christoph; and Weghaupt, Erich.
4.380.712. CI. 310-52.000. *^
Schneider, Johann: See —
Wusthof, Peter; and Schneider, Johann, 4,380,420, CI. 418-61 OOB
Schneiter. Fred E.: See—
Davis. Leland E.; Dahle. David P.; Schneiter, Fred E.; and Kirch-
off. George F.. 4.380.346. CI. 280-736.000.
Schneiter. John W.; Reiss, Ronald J.; and Enskat, Albert G., to Con-
tainer Technologies, Inc. Flexible container with displaceable fitting
and probe coupler apparatus. 4,380,310, CI. 222-501.000.
Schroder, Rolf: See—
Maurer. Fritz; Schroder, Rolf; Hammann. Ingeborg; and Stendel
Wilhelm, 4.380,538, CI. 424-200.000.
Schultz, Ward E.: See—
Smith, Harry D., Jr.; and Schultz, Ward E., 4,380,701, CI
250-266.000.
Schuster, Samuel J. Method of making breathable receptacles
4,380.485,0.156-254.000.
Schutt, Dieter: See—
Gotze, Volkmar; and Schutt, Dieter, 4,380,811, CI. 371-10.000.
Schwarz, Eckhard C. A. Apparatus and process for melt-blowing a
fiberforming thermoplastic polymer and product produced thereby
4.380,570. CI. 428-296.000. . *^ '
Schweiger. Gustav: See —
Fortsch. Johann; Lorry. Cosmas; and Schweiger, Gustav.
4,380,486, CI. 156-359.000.
Schweizerische Eidgenossenschaft, represented by Eidg. Munitionsfab-
rik Thun der Gruppe fur Rustungsdienste: See—
Buhrer, Richard. 4,380,186, CI. 86-20.00D.
Scientific Pharmaceuticals: See —
Orlowski, Jan A.; and Butler. David V., 4,380,432, CI. 433-9.000.
Scrimshaw, Marvin S.: See —
Hill, Eugene E.; Scrimshaw, Marvin S.; and Showalter, Edward
W., 4,380,808, CI. 367-153.000.
Scurlock, Scot L.: See—
Lyons, William C; and Scurlock, Scot L., 4,380,264, Q.
166-169.000.
Sea Savory Inc.: See —
Tolley, Calvert B.; and Tolley, Andrew T., 4,380,094, CI.
17-71.000.
Searle, John L., to Honeywell Inc. Combustible gas analyzer. 4,380.400.
CI. 374-37.000.
Segar, Richard B.; and Marascalco, Lewis C, to GPD Inc. Electronic
calorie counter. 4,380,802, CI. 364-900.000.
Seragnoli, Enzo, to G. D. Societa' per Azioni. Conveyor system for
bar-shaped articles, particularly cigarettes. 4,380,286, CI. 198-6OS.00O.
Serres, Carl, Jr., to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Polymeric
monohydroxybenzenoid hydroquinoid antioxidants. 4,380.554. CI.
426-545.000.
Seton Company: See—
Cioca, Gheorghe; and Fertell, Paul A., 4,380.474, CI. 106-lSS.OOO.
Seybold, Guenther, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Preparation of optical
brighteners. 4,380,514, CI. 260-465.00H.
Shannon, John K. Battery terminal connector and method. 4,380,291.
CI. 206-343.000.
Shannon, Paul D.; and Bruce, William C, Jr., to Motorola, Inc. Sema-
phore register including ownership bits. 4,380,798, CI. 364-200.000.
Sharpe, Claude A.: See-
Goldstein, Kenneth; and Sharpe, Claude A., 4,380.767, CI.
343-745.000.
Shaw. Robert E.. to Spenco Medical Corporation. Lightweight pre-
formed Stable gel structures and method of forming. 4.380.569. CI.
428-283.000.
Shell Oil Company: See—
Ayers. Ray R.. 4.380.406. CI. 405-206.000.
Slaugh, Lynn H.. 4,380,657. CI. 549-509.000.
Wellington, Scott L., 4,380,266, CI. 166-252.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 21
Shell Research Limited: See-
Mead, Howard B.; and Williams, Graham L., 4,380,253, CI.
138-149.000.
Sherman, Moshe, to Israel Aircraft Industries, Ltd. Generator-battery
DC power supply system. 4,380,725, CI. 320-35.000.
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina P.;
Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko, Ivan
A.; Krasnosclsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov, Evgeny A.;
Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.; Kozhevnikova, Ljud-
mila v.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhivotchenko, Alexandr D. Sil-
ver-based alloy. 4,380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Shevtsov, Alexandr V.: See —
Mazurin, Igor M.; Netupsky, Mikhail L.; Shevtsov, Alexandr V.;
Gladky, Viktor T.; Dmitriev, Nikolai A.; Lyapin, Andrei G.;
Polyakov, Alexandr V.; Myshev, Mikhail A.; and Panov, Vladi-
mir v., 4,380,532, CI. 423-469.000.
Shibata, Shuichi: See—
MiUchi, Seiko; Shibata, Shuichi; Kanamori, Terutoshi; Manabe,
Toyotaka; and Yasu, Mitsuho, 4,380,588, CI. 501-37.000.
Shigehara, Itaru: See —
Nishiyama, Ryuzo; Fujikawa, Kanichi; Yokomichi, Isao;
Shigehara, Itaru; and Miyaji, Mikio. 4,380,670, CI. 564-407.000.
Shigemoto, Hiromi, to Mitsui Petrochemical Industries, Ltd. Ethylenic
composite film structure. 4,380,567, CI. 428-213.000.
Shigeta, Junnosuke: See —
Kaneaki, Tetsuhiko; Murase, Kazuhiko; and ShigeU, Junnosuke,
4,380,184, CI. 84-1.010.
Shigut, Leo J., to Sokolski, Edward A., a part interest. Liquid spray
nozzle. 4,380,319, CI. 239-540.000.
Shiho, Makoto: See—
Nagata, Hiroshi; Sano, Kazuo; Morimoto, Jiro; and Shiho, Makoto,
4,380,393, CI. 356-328.000.
Shimano Industrial Company Limited: See—
Shimano, Keizo, 4,380,445, CI. 474-144.000.
Shimano, Keizo, to Shimano Industrial Company Limited. Transmis-
sion for a bicycle. 4,380,445, CI. 474-144.000.
Shimaoka, Motohiro: See—
Hirose, Yasuyuki; Shimaoka, Motohiro; Saito, Shoichiro; and
Kowaguchi, Tom, 4,380,782, CI. 360-99.000.
Shimbo, Masafumi, to Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha. Method for
fabricating semiconductor devices. 4,380,481, CI. 148-187.000.
Shimomoto, Yasuharu: See—
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuharu; Imamura, Yoshinon;
Ataka, Saburo; Tanaka, Yasuo; Matsubara, Hirokazu; Takasaki,
Yukio; and Maruyama, Eiichi, 4,380,557, CI. 427-38.000.
Shimozato, Yasuyuki: See—
Ikeda, Hirohani; Goto, Kohei; and Shimozato, Yasuyuki, 4,380,607,
CI. 525-232.000.
Shinmyo, Saburo, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Baseband data switch-
ing apparatus for digital communications system. 4,380,814, CI.
375-40.000.
Shinohara, Koichi, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Ca, Ltd. Vacuum
evaporation system for deposition of thin films. 4,380,211, CI.
118-718.000.
Shinozaki, Nobuya: See—
Nishida, Haniki; and Shinozaki, Nobuya, 4,380,096, CI. 24-20.00R.
Shipley, Randall S.; and Birkelbach, Donald F., to Dow Chemical
Company, The. Ultra high efficiency catalyst for polymerizing ole-
fins. 4,380,508, CI. 252-43 l.OOC.
Shlykov, Gennady N.: See—
Abduganiev, Abdurakhim; Tikhonov, Valentin N.; Shlykov, Gen-
nady N.; Zhestkov, Vitaly I.; Krjuk, Timur P.; Mukhin, Viktor
M.; and Tikhonov, Jury N., 4.380,143, CI. 57-89.000.
Shono, Hiroaki; Noji, Toshio; and Ishikawa, Shinzo, to Nitto Boseki
Co., Ltd. Glass fiber apparatus and method. 4,380,462, CI. 65-1.000.
Show-Pak, Incorporated: See—
Wilcox, Donald G.; and Zambrano, Nobile, 4,380,293, CI.
206-563.000.
Showa Denko K.K.: See—
Hosoda, Yoshikazu; Ishihara, Shigenobu; and Kobayashi, Shoichi,
4,380,600, CI. 524-458.000.
Showalter, Edward W.: See-
Hill, Eugene E.; Scrimshaw, Marvin S.; and Showalter, Edward
W., 4,380,808, CI. 367-153.000.
Shpichinetsky, Efim S.: See—
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnosclsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Shvarts, Naum A.: See—
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov, Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D.. 4,380,528, CI. 420-505.000.
Siebert, Werner: See—
Habermehl, Diethard; Rohde, Wolfgang; Kucharzyk, Werner; and
Siebert, Werner, 4,380,125, CI. 34-10.000.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See— ,,.^.,„^
Beinvogl, Willy; and Hasler, Barbara, 4,380,489, CI. 156-643.000.
Dotzer, Richard; and Plundrich, Winfried, 4,380,170, CI.
73-147.000.
Endlicher, Frank; and Koch, Rudolf, 4,380,755, CI. 382-68.000.
Intichar, LuU; Schnapper, Christoph; and Weghaupt, Erich,
4,380,712, CI. 310-52.000.
Pfeiler, Manfred, 4,380,818, CI. 378-099.000
Rosier, Helmut, 4,380.705. CI. 307-247.00R
Schmitt. Rcinhold, 4,380,703, CI. 250-396.0ML.
Siemens- Albis AG: See —
Bachtiger, Rolf, 4,380,766, CI. 343-5.0SW.
Siggel, Erhard; Wick, Gerhard; Linhart, Heinz; and Kessler, Ench, to
Akzona Incorporated. Filaments and fibers having discontinuous
cavities. 4,380,594, CI. 521-182.000.
Signetics Corporation: See—
Malwah, Manohar L., 4,380,113, CI. 29-577.00C.
Signode Corporation: See —
Klaus, Arthur; and Tacke, Horst, 4,380,313, CI 227-130.000.
Simizu, Akio, to Niles Parts Co., Ltd. Electric indicator utilizing an
oscillation source of a crystal clock for automobiles. 4,380,754, CI.
340-73.000.
Simo, Miroslav A. Bleeder attachment for arrows. 4,380.340, CI.
273-416.000.
Simokat, Frank L.. to Til Industries Inc. Telephone ringing range
extender. 4.380.688. CI. 179-84.00R.
Sims, Steve A.: See-
Fowler, Allan E.; White. Gordon E.; and Sims, Steve A.. 4.380.684,
CI. 585-328.000.
Singh, Manohar A.; and Mudhar, Manohar. Control assembly for
remote switching. 4,380,778, CI. 358-194.100.
Sipma, Gerben: See-
van den Bosch, Steven; Kettenes. Dirk K.; Bart dc Roos, Kris;
Sipma. Gerben; and Stoffelsma, Jan. 4.380,655. CI. 549-472.000
Sirkar. Amalesh K.. to Hydrocarbon Research. Inc. Multi-suge aldoses
to polyols process. 4.380.678. CI. 568-863.000.
Skinner. Robert T. J.; See-
Jefferson, John R.; and Skinner, Robert T. J.. 4,380,223, CI.
123-383.000.
Skoch, Leroy V.; and Pike, Keith E., to Ralston Purina Company.
Pellet die. 4.380.424. CI. 425-331.000.
Slaugh. Lynn H.. to Shell Oil Company. Conversion of alkanols to
ethers. 4,380.657. CI. 549-509.000.
Smith, David L.; and O'Brien, Gerald E.. to Computer Microfilm
International Corporation. Image positioning apparatus 4.380,776,
CI. 358-102.000.
Smith. Harry A., to Dow Chemical Company. The. Dialkyl carbonates
as phase separation inhibitors in liquid hydrocarbon fuel and cthanol
mixtures. 4.380.455, CI. 44-56.000.
Smith. Harry D.. Jr.; and Schultz, Ward E., to Texaco Inc. Nuclear well
logging with neutron source and separate spaced radiation detectors
to determine silicon/oxygen ratio. 4,380.701. CI. 250-266.000.
Smith. Hoyt L.; Frederick. Cecil S.. deceased; and by Frederick,
Wallace, administrator, to Cutters Exchange. Inc. Catcherless cloth
spreading machine. 4,380,330, CI. 270-31.000.
Smith, Joseph, to Rogers. Colin Ward, a part interest. Drawing board.
4.380,124. CI. 33-433.000.
Smith, Paul C, Jr.: See-
Baker, Donald R.; Barr, Thomas R.; and Smith. Paul C. Jr.,
4,380,271, CI. 175-391.000.
Smith, Terry J., to AMP Incorporated. Method and apparatus for
measuring normal contact forces in electrical connector. 4,380.171.
CI. 73-161.000.
Smock. William L. Oscillating-accumulating conveyor system.
4.380,287, CI. 198-648.000.
Smulders, Henricus WW.; See—
Franken, Adrianus J. J.; Coolen, Franciscus M.; Khoe, Giok D.;
Langerhorst, Jacob; and Smulders, Henricus W. W.. 4.380,366,
CI. 350-96.210.
Snappe, Roger: See—
Boumonville, Jean-Paul; Snappe, Roger; Miquel, Jean; and Mar-
tino, Germain, 4,380,673, CI. 568-361.000.
Societe Internationale dc Mccanique Industrielle S.A.: See—
Menager, Jean, 4,380,416, CI. 415-170.00A.
Societe Lab: See—
Vicard, Jean-Francois, 4,380,189, CI. 98-58.000.
Soderberg, Mark S.; Hametner, Albert L.; Leppink, Herman F ; and
Strand, David E., to Boeing Company, TTic. Automatic drill debur-
ring and sorting machine. 4,380,295, CI. 209-558.000.
Sokolski, Edward A.: See—
Shigut, Leo J., 4,380,319, CI. 239-540.000.
Soli, Gaylord T.: See—
Harr, Robert G.; and Soli, Gaylord T., 4,380,441, CI. 441-1 12000.
Solid SUte Scientific, Inc.: See—
Pomante, Louis N., 4,380,115, CI. 29-588.000.
Solomon, Paul W., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Olefin oxidation
with methyl formate solvent. 4,380,659, CI. 549-532.000.
Solvay ft Cie.: See —
Georlette, Pierre; and Bouteille, Rene, 4,380,522, CI. 264-175.000.
Sommer, August; Heitmann, WUhelm; and Brucker. Rainer. to Chemis-
che Werke Huls AG. Method for producing a catalyst for the hydra-
tion of olefins. 4,380,509, CI. 252-453.000.
Sommerfeld, Claus-Dieter: See—
Muller, Hanns P.; Sommerfeld, Claus-Dieter; and Becker, Gemot.
4,380,502. CI. 252-182.000.
Sorenaen, Charles L.: See— . ,«« «« «
Andrews, Alfred G.; and Sorensen, Charles L., 4,380,402, a
401-74.000.
Sorensen, Norman L.; and Pohl, Lothar, to Wisco Corporation. Sun-
roof air deflector. 4,380,351, CI. 296-217.000.
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
4,380.178, CI. 74-
71-100.000.
71-100.000.
Spease. Arthur L.: See-
Bennett. William G.; and Spease. Arthur L
501. OOP. ^^
Spector. George: See—
Rocha, Frank; and Spector, George, 4,380,231, CI. 128-57.000
Spector, Gilbert. See—
Saferstein, Al; and Spector, Gilbert, 4,380,790, CI. 362-231 000
Spenco Medical Corporation: See —
Shaw, Robert E., 4,380,569, CI. 428-283.000.
Sperry Corporation: See—
Nolt, Edwin B., 4,380,207, CI. 1 14-298.000.
Spire Corporation: See-
Little, Roger G., 4,380.112, CI. 29-572.000.
Sprague, Robert A., to Xerox Corporation. Confonnable proximity
coupled electro-optic devices. 4,380,373, CI. 350-356 000
Stadelhofer. Jurgen; Franck, Heinz-Gerhard; Koch, Karl H.; and Mar-
rett. Rolf, to Rutgerswerke Aktiengesellschaft. Coking quality of
coals with insufficient coking properties. 4.380.454, CI 44-1 OOB
Stadler. Peter; Koebemick, Wolfgang; Samaan, Samir; and Gau Wolf-
gang, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the preparation of
punned aminoglycoside antibiotics. 4,380,625, CI 536-13 900
Sueng Ltd.: See-
Bray, John, 4,380,349, CI. 285-417.000.
Standard Oil Company. The: See—
Dolhyj. Serge R.; and Velenyi. Louis J.. 4.380.683. CI. 585-268 000
Greene. Janice L.; and Loza, Roman, 4,380,623, CI. 528-335 000
Velenyi. Louis J.; and Krupa. Andrew S., 4.380,672, CI.
568-310.000.
Sundard Oil Company (Indiana): See
Serres. Carl, Jr.. 4.380,554, CI. 426-545.000.
Udovich, Carl A.; and Meyers, Bernard L.. 4.380 648 CI
549-259.000. '
Stape. William J.: See—
Parmer. Kenneth R.; and Stape. William J.. 4,380.360. CI 339-
17.0CF.
Stauffer Chemical Company: See —
Felix. Raymond A.. 4.380.468, CI
Wong. Rayman Y., 4.380,467, CI. , . . „^.
Steffen. Klaus-Dieter, to Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft. Method of
prepanng quinolines, naphthyridines and other nitrogen bi-heterocv-
clic compounds. 4,380.632. CI. 544-279 000
^'4!j8a3lV cTS-MoS)^''"^" Computer Services. Inc. Mailer.
Stejnberger. Helmut; Kortmann, Wilfried; and Tuschen, Jurgen to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Continuous dyeing and simultaneous 'fin-
ishing of textile matenals using defoaming agent of polyoxyalkylene
8^77'ayr"^ copolymer and hydrophobic silica. 4.380.451. CI.
Stendel. Wilhelm: See—
Maurer, Fritz; Schroder
Wilhelm. 4.380.538. CI
Stenger. Antoine: See—
Mouzin, Gilbert; Cousse.
CI. 564-195.000.
Stern. Richard M.. to Riker Laboratories. Inc. Antimicrobial 8-cyano-
Stevenson, David M.; and Flanders. Gale L.. to Varian Associates. Inc.
45T327 Win balanced frequency converter. 4.380.829, CI.
$tewart. James A., to GTE Automatic Electric Laboratories. Inc
4.380 687''ci^ n9-2 OBC^"" ^°' '"'^"*^^ """^^ telephone system.
^tingelin. Willy; and Loew. Peter, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Cationic
I compounds. 4,380,627, CI. 542-423.000. "' ^
$tofrelsma. Jan: See —
van den Bosch. Steven; Kettenes. Dirk K.; Bart de Roos. Kris
bipma. Gerben; and Stoffelsma, Jan. 4,380.655. CI. 549-472 000 '
Moll. Kurt. Choke unit. 4.380,250, CI. 137-599.000.
Sitone Container Corporation: See —
Davis, Dwight M., 4,380,332, CI. 271-224.000.
^'i^^.iSSiil'^"' Clamp for bounce-fiash apparatus. 4.380,787. CI
J62- 16.000.
t°'f*^:,9V.'o ^' '° ^°"'** '"*= ^'^' °P»'c interferometer. 4,380.394,
L.I. 336-358.000.
$trand. David E.: See—
Soderlxrg. Mark S.; Hametner. Albert L.; Uppink, Hennan F
and Strand. David E.. 4.380.295. CI. 209-558 000
Sftudna, Ambrose A.: See—
'^T<"/l'>c,^'** ^' ""** Studna. Ambrose A., 4,380,490, CI.
1 36-662.000.
Suchy Milo^ to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. 2-(4-(4-Substituted phenox-
y)phenoxy]propanoic acids and esters. 4,380,661. CI. 560-62 000
Suda, Shigeyuki; and Tanaka, Kazuo, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
Zoom objective. 4,380,376, CI. 350-427.000.
S^ga, Yoshinori: See—
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga. Yoshinori; Kitada, Hisashi; Maniyama.
Yasuo; and Gotoh, Junichi, 4.380,608, CI. 525-247 000
S^jgiyama, Hiroyuki: See—
Hirata, Atsumi; Tajima, Osamu; Kaneda, Isami; Sugiyama,
Hiroyuki; Saito, Takashi; and Mochizuki, Masafumi, 4,380 780
CI. 360-97.000. ....
Silkoski, Jerome; and Brugger, Richard D. Apparatus to alert a deaf
person. 4,380,759, CI. 34<MO7.000.
Rolf; Hammann.
424-200.000.
Ingeborg; and Stendel,
Henri; and Stenger. Antoine, 4,380,667
Sulzbacher, Horst, to Voest-AIpine Aktiengesellschaft. Process and
apparatus for continuously reducing and melting metal oxides and/or
pre-reduced metallic materials. 4,380,469, CI. 75-38 000
Sun. Shan C; and Church, Lan^ L., to Westinghouse Electric Corp.
S80 74?^Cr332^00R'^'^**°' charging and discharging circuite.
Sundman, Carl-Erik; and Hagglund, Bengt G., to KenoGard A.B.
4 380 56T'ci 42742Toc»'''"*"*'*'*^"*'*''"" "^P^^"^ carboxylic acids.
Sunkist Growers, Inc.: See—
Carter, NedC.; and Cramer, Jerry W., 4,380,194, CI. 101-35.000
IPi"\n ^'° Thomson-CSF. Droppable airborne buoy. 4.380,440, a.
Suzuki, Hanio; and Hashimoto, Shigeyoshi, to Nippondenso Co , Ltd
Die-casting method. 4,380,261, CI. 164-120.000
Suzuki, Toshio, to Toray Silicone Co., Ltd. Coating material for optical
communication glass fibers. 4,380,367, CI. 350-96.340
Swanson, Barry J.: See—
Koch. Tad H.; and Swanson, Barry J., 4,380,647, CI. 548-519.000
Sweeney, J. David: See—
°4.m446. a^fen'S"*'''' ^ °"^''^' '^'^ ^''"""'* '^°"*'*' ^•'
Sweet, Roger; and Tribe, Leonard T., to Kelsey-Hayes Co. Slack
adjuster for vehicle brakes. 4,380,276, CI. 188-79 50K
Swensnid Roger L.; Pavlik, Dennis; and DeLuca, John J., to Westing-
house Electnc Corp. Directly cooled bolted series connection of
generator stator coils. 4,380,362, CI. 339-1 12.00L.
Swiss Aluminium Ltd.: See
*^"|rEdwin; Arnold, Erwin; and Friedii, Hans, 4,380,492, CI.
Sybron Corporation: See —
Lawson, Alfred C, 4,380,794, CI. 362-296.000.
Synthelabo: See —
Caillot, Luc, 4,380,233, CI. 128-204.210.
Szala, Lawrence E.: See —
^ri "^io^TJl^^"'^ Lawrence E.; and Tuft, Roy E., 4,380,471,
Szejtii, Jozsef; Budai, Zsuzsanna; Tetenyi nee Erdosi, Magda- and Pap
"^L 'P'!^"y'' Gabnella, to Chinoin Gyogyszer es Vegyeszeti Ter-
T^^^^PJI^^ ^^ Hormonal plant growth regulator. 4,380,626, CI
3 3t>- 103.000.
Tabb, David L.: See—
Magers, Thomas A.; and Tabb, David L., 4,380,585, CI. 436-66.000
I acke, Horst: See —
Klaus, Arthur; and Tacke, Horst, 4,380.313, CI. 227-130 000
tmAlT CI i°9^rm^ ^° ^ '^ ^''^*" ^°' P'"'*""« chocolate.
Taguchi Masaaki, to Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha. Phase transition
mode liquid crystal display device. 4,380,372, CI. 350-346 000
Tahara, Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro; Kubota,
Reiko; and Takahashi, Toshihiro, to Nisshin Flour Milling Co Ltd
Decaprenylamine derivatives. 4,380,668, CI. 564-391 000
Tajima, Osamu: See —
HiraU, Atsumi; Tajima, Osamu; Kaneda. Isami; Sugiyama,
J?,"'^^^oi,5^'°' Takashi; and Mochizuki, Masafumi, 4,380,780,
CI. 360-97.000.
Takada, Juichiro. Warning system for passive vehicle occupant restraint
belts. 4,380.751. CI. 34O-52.00E.
Takahashi. Kenji; and Miyahara, Junji, to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd
Radiation image storage panel. 4,380,702, CI. 250-327 200
Takahashi, Kenji: See—
'^4!38a472,ci"4 19-9 00)"^*^ ^"'"'""' '^'^ takahashi. Kenji.
Takahashi, Toshihiro: See —
rahara. Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro-
J^.H ,.^'^^'''°' ^^ Takahashi, Toshihiro, 4,380,668. Cl'
564-391.000.
Takahashi, Yuji, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Developer supply device
4.380,309. Cl. 222-450.000. ^ ' "cvii^.
Takanashi. Akihiro: See —
•^""iyoshi. Shinji; Takanashi, Akihiro; and Kurosaki, Toshiei,
T^kasaki, Yukio: See—
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuharu; Imamura, Yoshinori-
Ataka, Saburo; Tanaka, Yasuo; Matsubara, Hirokazu; Takasaki'
Yukio; and Maruyama, Eiichi, 4,380,557, Cl. 427-38.000.
Takaton, Yasushi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Ink jet recording pro-
cess and an apparatus therefor. 4,380,771, Cl. 346-140.00R
i'^'^be,Hideharu; and Kobayashi, Hiroshi, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Automatic sweep digital tuning circuit. 4,380,825, Cl
455-164.000.
Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See—
Ishida, Yasuo, 4,380,466, Cl. 71-96.000.
Ochiai, Michihiko; and Morimoto, Akira, 4,380,541, Cl.
Takeda, Kazuo: See —
Kaneki, Tadashi; and Takeda, Kazuo, 4,380,405, Cl. 403-318 000
Takeuchi, Mikio: See —
Yano, Hiroshi; Kawasaki, Teruo; Nomura, Hiroyuki: and Takeu-
chi, Mikio, 4,380,733, Cl. 324-166.000.
Talres Development (N.A.) N.V.: See—
Mufti, Khizar S.; and Khan, Riaz A., 4,380,476, Cl. 127-46.300.
Taluba. Anthony P.; and Taluba, Paul A. Molded squeeze toy includine
whistle. 4,380,134, CI. 46-117.000. "• ' e
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Taluba, Paul A.: See—
Taluba, Anthony P.; and Taluba, Paul A.. 4,380.134, CI. 46-1 17.000.
Tamiya, Masani: See—
Kohama, Hiroyuki; Tamiya, Masani; Mizukami, Sunichi; Kaneko,
Denuro; and Kimura, Yoshio, 4,380,328, CI. 266-177.000.
Tamura, Akihiko: See —
Yasuda, Kazuo; Tamura, Akihiko; and Nakamura, Yoshimitsu,
4,380,386, CI. 355-3.0OR.
Tamura, Naoyuki: See —
Ohmata, Ken; Aoki, Hideya; and Tamura, Naoyuki, 4,380,368, CI.
350-117.000.
Tamura, Tetsuo, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Control mechanism for a
zoom lens. 4,380,378, CI. 350-429.000.
Tanabe Siyaku Co., Ltd.: See—
Yoneda, Naoto; Kato, Jyoji; and Kinashi, Keizo, 4,380,644, CI.
548-321.000.
' I 9 n Ak 9 iCftZllO* Sec
Suda, Shigeyuki; and Tanaka, Kazuo, 4,380,376, CI. 350-427.000.
Tanaka, Yasuo: See —
Ishioka, Sachio; Shimomoto, Yasuharu; Imamura, Yoshinori;
Ataka, Saburo; Tanaka, Yasuo; Matsubara, Hirokazu; Takasaki,
Yukio; and Maruyama, Eiichi, 4,380,557, CI. 427-38.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiaki; and Inami, Mamoru, to Victor Company of Japan,
Ltd. Signal spectrum display apparatus. 4,380,732, CI. 324-77.00D.
Tanenbaum, Joseph M. Apparatus for shear testing welds. 4,380,174, CI.
73-842.000.
Tang, Marian C: See —
Reichelderfer, Richard F.; Vogel, Diane C; and Tang, Marian C,
4,380,488, Ci. 156-643.000.
Taniguchi, Hiroshi: See —
Kitamura, Sadafumi; and Taniguchi, Hiroshi, 4,380,779, CI.
358-330.000.
Tateoka, Masamichi; and Minoura, Kazuo, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Exposure correcting device. 4,380,390, CI. 355-71.000.
Taylor, John A., to Extracorporeal Medical Specialties, Inc. Process for
producing hollow fibres having a uniform wall thickness and a non-
uniform cross-sectional area. 4,380,520, CI. 264-40.300.
Taylor, William H. Gasoline fuel additive composition. 4,380,456, CI.
44-6&.000.
Teccor Electronics, Inc.: See —
Webb, Monty F., 4,380,114, CI, 29-588.000.
Tecumseh Products Company: See —
Kandler, William C, 4,380,216, CI. 123-90.650.
Wasmer, Anthony E.; and Koenigs, Stephen L., 4,380,217, CI.
123-146.50A.
Teleflex Incorporated: See —
Bennett, William G.; and Spease, Arthur L., 4,380,178, CI. 74-
501. OOP.
Terrell, Christopher, to Chloride Group Limited. Pivot mounting.
4,380,792, CI. 362-250.000.
Tershak, Andrew T.: See-
Paddock, Stephen W.; and Tershak, Andrew T., 4,380,155, CI.
62-229.000.
Tetenyi nee Erdosi, Magda: See —
Szejtli, Jozsef; Budai, Zsuzsanna; Tetenyi nee Erdosi, Magda; and
Pap nee Imrenyi, Gabriella, 4,380,626, CI. 536-103.000.
Tevopharm-Schiedam B.V.: Sec-
van Maanen, Johannes D., 4,380.283, CI. 198-456.000.
Texaco Inc.: See —
MacLean, John P.; Cantwell, J. Edward; Brown, John D.; and
Hoy, Harold D., 4,380,105, CI. 29-157.00R.
Smith. Harry D., Jr.; and Schultz, Ward E., 4,380,701, CI.
250-266.000.
Texas Gas Transport Company: See—
Bresie, Don A.; Fowler, Donald W.; and Bums, Jack M., 4,380,242,
CI. 137-113.000.
Texas Instruments Incorporated: See —
Evans, Doyle R.; and Tuthill, Richard E., 4,380,357, CI. 339-
17.0CF.
Frantz, Gene A., 4,380,371, CI. 350-336.000.
Goldstein, Kenneth; and Sharpe, Claude A., 4,380,767, CI.
343-745.000.
Hart. Patrick J.. 4.380.742. CI. 331-l.OOA.
Tezuka, Nobuo, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Camera with motor driven
winding-up device. 4,380,381, CI. 354-173.000.
Th. Goldschmidt AG: See—
Koemer, Gotz; Sanger, Gerd; Fink. Hans-Ferdi; and Grassmann.
Friedhelm, 4,380,503, CI. 252-314.000.
Theohar, Carl: See—
Kleinlogel, Horst; and Theohar, Carl, 4,380,550, CI. 424-324.000.
Thermacore, Inc.: See —
Eastman, George Y., 4,380,154, CI. 60-682.000.
Thiokol Corporation: See-
Davis, Leiand E.; Dahle, David P.; Schneiter, Fred E.; and Kirch-
off, George F., 4,380,346, CI. 280-736.000.
Thomas &. Setts Corporation: See—
Peterpaul. Joseph, 4,380,256, CI. 140-106.000.
Thomas, Harold T.; and Wrobel, Joseph J., to Eastman Kodak Com-
pany. Element for recording by thermal deformation. 4,380,769, CI.
346-135.100.
Thomassen A. Drijver-Verblifa N.V.: See —
Post. Willem P.. 4.380,165, CI. 72-355.000.
Thomson-CSF: See—
Curtinot, Jean C; Delestrc, Xavier; and Fouillet, Jean, 4,380,747,
CI. 333-202.000.
Kantorowicz, Gerard, 4,380.744, CI. 331-107.00R.
Suppa, Vito, 4,380,440. CI. 441-30.000
Thomson, George A.; and Haynes. Robert, to Thomson -Gordon Lim-
ited. Railroad vehicle pedestal wear liner. 4,380,199. CI 105-225 000
Thomson-Gordon Limited: See-
Thomson, George A.; and Haynes, Robert,
105-225.000.
Til Industries Inc.; See—
Simokat. Frank L., 4,380,688. Ci. 179-8400R.
Tikhonov. Jury N.: See —
Abduganiev, Abdurakhim; Tikhonov. Valentin N
nady N.; Zhestkov. Vitaly I.; Krjuk. Timur P
4.380,199. Ci
; Shlykov. Gen-
Mukhin. Viktor
M.; and Tikhonov, Jury N., 4,380,143, CI. 57-89 000
Tikhonov, Valentin N.: See —
Abduganiev. Abdurakhim; Tikhonov. Valentin N ; Shlykov. Gen-
nady N.; Zhestkov. Vitaly I.; Krjuk. Timur P ; Mukhtn. Viktor
M.; and Tikhonov, Jury N.. 4.380.143. CI. 57-89 000.
TMC Corporation: See —
Wittmann, Heinz, 4,380,345, CI 280-605.000.
Tohi, Yasusuke: See —
Kato, Yoshiaki; Fushida, Akira; Ueda, Yasuo; Tohi, Yasusuke: and
Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4,380.196, CI. 101-453.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Ueno, Tsuyoshi; and Mukai. Hideo. 4,380.384, CI. 355-3.0CH.
Tolley. Andrew T.: See —
Tolley, Calvert B.; and Tolley, Andrew T,. 4.380.094. CI
17-71.000.
Tolley, Calvert B.; and Tolley, Andrew T.. to Sea Savory Inc. Crab
processing machine. 4.380,094, CI. 17-71.000.
Tomlinson. Terence R.: See—
Haslam. Alan A.; Isalski. Wieslaw H.; and Tomlinson, Terence R..
4,380,461. CI. 62-11.000.
Tooke-Kirby, David H.; Perry, Richard E.; and Arbuckle, Kenneth H .
to Berger, Jenson and Nicholson Ltd. Organotin polymers method of
making them and paints containing them. 4.380.599. CI 525-370.000.
Toray Industries, Inc.: See —
Chiba, Kazumasa; Kobayashi. Kazuhiko; and Muraki. Toshio,
4.380,622, CI. 528-288.000.
Toray Silicone Co., Ltd.: See-
Suzuki, Toshio, 4,380,367. CI. 350-96.340
Torii. Soichi, to Torri Winding Machine Co.. Ltd Device for-guiding
a knitted or woven fabric. 4.380.311. CI. 226-190.000.
Torri Winding Machine Co., Ltd.: See —
Torii, Soichi, 4,380,311. CI. 226-190.000.
Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd.: See—
Yoshida, Kazumasa; and Watabe. Michio. 4.380.576. CI. 429-27.000
Toshiba Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Motomura, Noriyuki; and Tsuboi. Hiroyuki. 4.380,801, CI
364-565.000.
Toyoda Koki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kawabata, Minoru; Honaga, Susumu; and Takahashi, Kenji,
4.380,472, CI. 419-9.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kubo, Seitoku; Kuramochi. Koujiro; and
4,380,179, CI. 74-762.000.
Trafford. Larry F.. to General Signal Corporation
4,380,358, CI. 339-I7.00D.
Tribe, Leonard T.: See —
Sweet. Roger; and Tribe, Leonard T.. 4.380.276. Ci. 188-79.50K.
Trim Parts Inc.; .See —
Ayotte, Gordon R., 4,380,563. CI. 428-40.000.
Trudel, Murray L.: See —
Lockwood, George C; and Trudel, Murray L., 4,380.804, CI.
365-184.000.
Tsai, Thomas Y. R.; See—
Wiesner, Karel; and Tsai, Thomas Y R.. 4.380.624. CI 536-5.000.
Tsuboi, Hiroyuki: See —
Motomura, Noriyuki; and Tsuboi, Hiroyuki,
364-565.000.
Tsuji, Sadahiko; See —
Sato, Yasuhisa; and Tsuji, Sadahiko, 4,380.377, CI. 350-427.000.
Tsujimoto. Shigenori: See —
KawaUni, Kimio; Tsujimoto, Shigenori; and Kaji. Ryoji. 4,380,475.
CI. 106-238.000.
Tsukioka, Kazumi: See —
Miyao, Fumio; and Tsukioka, Kazumi, 4,380,777. CI. 358-178.000.
Tuan, Hsing T., to Burroughs Corporation. Read-only/read-write
memory. 4,380,803, CI. 365-183.000.
Tuchscherer. Lawrence D.: See —
Blanchard, Houston F.; and Tuchscherer, Lawrence D., 4,380,692.
CI. 200-61, 45R.
Tuft. Roy E.: See-
Lee, Minyoung; Szala, Lawrence E.; and Tuft, Roy E., 4,380,471.
CI. 419-11.000.
Turiot. Andre: See —
Masclet. Jean; and Turiot. Andre, 4.380,323, CI. 244-I02.00R.
Turner, David H.: See—
Poyser, Robert H.; and Turner, David H., 4,380,540, CI.
424-233.000.
Turner, George F. A. M., to Ciba-Gcigy AG. Sheet material guiding
means. 4,380,333, CI. 271-272.000.
Tuschen, Jurgen: See —
Steinberger, Helmut; Kortmann, Wilfried; and Tuachen. Jurgen.
4,380,451, CI. 8-477.000.
Tuthill, Richard E.: See-
Evans, Doyle R.; and Tuthill, Richard E.. 4.380.357. CI. 339-
I7.0CF.
Kyushima. Tatsuo,
Lamp socket.
4,380.801. CI.
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Udovich, Carl A.; and Meyers, Bernard L., to Standard Oil Company
(Indiana) Oxidation of butane to maleic anhydride. 4,380,648, CI.
549-259.000.
Ueda. Yasuo: See —
Kato, Yoshiaki; Fushida, Akira; Ueda, Yasuo; Tohi, Yasusuke; and
Aizawa, Tatsuo, 4,380,196, CI 101-453.000.
Ueno, Ketsuke: See —
Masuda, Shuji; and Ueno, Keisuke, 4,380,568, CI. 428-276.000.
Ueno, Tsuyoshi; and Mukai, Hideo, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Charging device for electronic copier. 4,380,384, CI.
355-30CH.
Ulmer, Harry E.: See—
Mathew, Chetnpolil T.; and Ulmer, Harry E., 4,380,660, CI.
556-422.000.
Umetsu, Shinjiro. See —
Nagata, Koichi; and Umetsu, Shinjiro, 4,380,832, CI. 455-343.000.
Umezawa, Hamao; Okami, Yoshiro; and Kondo, Shinichi, to Zaidan
Hojin Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenyku Kai. Istamycins and streptomyces
culture for the production thereof. 4,380,581, CI. 435-80.000.
Underhill, Michael J.; and Walters, Nigel J., to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion. Frequency synthesizer of the phase lock loop type. 4,380,743,
CI. 331-l.OOA.
Uniflo Resources, Inc.: See —
Martin, Keith R., 4,380,268, CI. 166-304.000.
Unimation, Inc.: See —
Masaki, Ichiro, 4,380,696, CI. 219-124.340.
Union Carbide Corporation: See —
Baskent, Feyyaz O.; and Sandner. Michael R., •♦,380,591, CI.
521-115.000.
Kallen, George H., 4.380,700, CI. 250-202.000.
Robeson, Lloyd M.; and Matzner, Markus, 4,380,598, CI.
524-163.000.
U.S. Industries, Inc.: See —
Williams, William R., 4,380.214, CI. 119-51.0CF.
United States of America
Air Force: See—
Korski, Victor E.. 4,380,788, CI. 362-62.000
Peart, Leiand L.; and Farrar, John, 4,380,763, CI. 340-870.160.
Reinhardt, Bruce A.; and Arnold, Fred E., 4,380,619, CI.
526-259.000.
Army: See —
Buser. Rudolph G.; Rohde. Robert S.; and Nomiyama, Neal T.,
4,380,391, CI. 356-5.000.
Orlando, Michael D.; and Riley, Jean M., 4,380,582, CI.
435-239.000.
Energy: See —
Blocher, John M., Jr.; Veigel, Neil D.; and Landrigan, Richard
B., 4,380,556, CI. 427-6.000.
Conner, William V., 4,380,470, CI. 75-122.700.
Fox, Ronald L., 4,380,267, CI. 166-303.000.
Glasgow, Lyle E., 4.380,229, CI. 126-418.000.
Lee, Fred C; and Carter, Roy A., 4,380.795, CI. 363-131.000.
Liebermann, Howard H.; Frischmann, Peter G.; and Rosenberry,
George M.. Jr., 4,380,572, CI. 428-592.000.
Navy: See —
Atkins, Ronald L., 4,380,634, CI. 546-89.000.
Baitis, A. Erich; and Woolaver, Dennis A., 4,380.206, CI.
114-122.000.
Barlow. Michael L.; and Lindstrum. Alan L.. 4,380,745, CI.
"331-176.000.
Eaton, Jefferson O., 4,380,197, CI. 102-228.000.
Kazlaukas, Gasparas, 4,380.697, CI. 219-136.000.
Yoder. Nax N., 4.380,774, CI. 357-34.000.
U.S. Philips Corporation: See —
Adamek, Manfred; and Rinneburger. Klaus, 4,380,783, CI.
360-99.000.
Bouman, Anton J.; and Geertsema, Eise B., 4,380,714, CI.
313-549.000.
De Bijl. Adrianus M. J.; and Chermin, Hubertus M. J., 4,380,719,
CI. 315-101.000.
Franken, Adrianus J. J.; Coolen, Franciscus M.; Khoe, Giok D.;
Langerhorst, Jacob; and Smulders, Henricus W. W., 4,380,366,
CI. 350-96.210.
Harding, GeofTrey; and Wagner, Wolfgang. 4,380,817, CI.
378-87.000.
Hart, Comelis M.. 4.380,708, CI. 307-457.000.
Monnier, Michel J.; Monneraye, Marc A.; Foucher, Claude; and Le
Marchant, Pierre, 4,380,699, CI. 235-492.000.
Postma, Gosse J., 4,380,715. CI. 315-3.000.
Underhill, Michael J.; and Walters, Nigel J., 4,380,743, CI. 331-
l.OOA.
Velo. Henri J., 4.380,739, CI. 330-254.000.
University of Missouri. The Curators of the: See —
Graham. Ellis R.. 4.380,169, CI. 73-73.000.
University Patents, Inc.: See —
Koch, Tad H.; and Swanson. Barry J.. 4,380,647, CI. 548-519.000.
UOP Inc.: See—
Arena, Blaise J., 4,380,679, CI. 568-863.000.
Arena, Blaise J.. 4,380,680. CI. 568-863.000.
Kurek, Paul R.. 4.380.677, CI. 568-788.000.
MafTet, Vcre, 4,380.496, CI. 210-780.000.
Roberts. John T., 4.380.497. CI. 252-47.500.
Upjohn Company, The: See —
White, David R.. 4,380.651, CI. 549-361.000.
White, David R.. 4.380,652. CI. 549-361.000.
Ursillo. Henry G. Total energy heating unit. 4.380.153, CI. 60-648.000.
Usugi, Kikuo, to Clarion Co., Ltd. Control system for channel selection.
4,380,826, CI. 455-165.000.
Uzee, Andre J.: See —
Moreno, Carlos M.; Bridges, Robert D.; and Uzee, Andre J.,
4,380,521, CI. 264-49.000.
V-T Rhythms, Inc.: See—
Holcomb, Gayle, 4,380,185, CI. 84-1.030.
Vallourec: See —
Delfino, Jean-Jacques; and Prevot, Maurice, 4,380,480, CI.
148-12.400.
Vance, Fred L., Jr.; Guerra, Rafael E.; and Christenson, Christopher P.,
to Dow Chemical Company, The. Polymerization of oleHns in the
presence of chromium-containing catalysts. 4,380,616, CI.
526-101.000.
Vancsa, Gyorgy I., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Data acquisition
system and analog to digital converter therefor. 4,380,757, CI. 340-
347.0CC.
van den Bosch, Steven; Kettenes, Dirk K.; Bart de Rocs, Kris; Sipma,
Gerben; and Stoffelsma, Jan, to P.F.W. Beheer B.V. Novel sulfur-
containing flavoring agents. 4,380,655, CI. 549-472.000.
VanderLugt, Thomas, Jr., to James River Corporation of Virginia.
Method of closing an open end of a tube or tubular container.
4,380,447, CI. 493-102.000.
Vanderwerf, Dennis F.. to Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Com-
pany. Variable focal length projection lens for use on overhead
projectors. 4.380,374, CI. 350-423.000.
Van Loveren, Augustinus G.: See —
Boden, Richard M.; Dekker. Lambert; Schmitt, Frederick L.; and
Van Loveren, Augustinus G., 4,380,658, CI. 549-525.000.
van Maanen, Johannes D., to Tevopharm-Schiedam B.V. Device for
pushing objects off a conveyor. 4,380,283, CI. 198-456.000.
Van Roekel, John R. See—
Ziegler, Michael L., II; Druke, Michael B.; Van Roekel, John R.;
and Baxter, Ward, II, 4,380,812, CI. 371-38.000.
Van Scott, Eugene J.; and Yu, Ruey J. Topical treatment of dry skin.
4,380,549, CI. 424-317.000.
Van Siclen, Howard E., Jr., to Bendix Corporation, The. Ignition
system for an internal combustion engine. 4,380,224, CI. 123-602.000.
Varian Associates, Inc.: See —
Stevenson, David M.; and Flanders, Gale L., 4,380,829, CI.
455-327.000.
Veigel, Neil D.: See—
Blocher, John M., Jr.; Veigel, Neil D.; and Landrigan, Richard B.,
4,380.556, CI. 427-6.000.
Velenyi, Louis J.; and Knipa, Andrew S., to Standard Oil Company,
The. Conversion of 2-phenyl propanal to 2-indanone. 4,380,672, CI.
568-310.000.
Velenyi, Louis J.: See —
Dolhyj, Serge R.; and Velenyi, Louis J., 4,380,683, CI. 585-268.000.
Velo, Henri J., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Electronic differential
controller. 4,380,739, CI. 330-254.000.
Verdicchio, Robert J.: See —
Lindemann, Martin K. O.; Mayhew, Raymond L.; O'Lenick,
Anthony J., Jr.; and Verdicchio, Robert J., 4,380,637. CI.
548-112.000.
Vicard, Jean-Francois, to Societe Lab. Industrial chimneys with forced
draught. 4,380,189, CI. 98-58.000.
Victor Company of Japan, Ltd.: See —
Hirata, Atsumi; Tajima, Osamu; Kaneda, Isami; Sugiyama,
Hiroyuki; Saito, Takashi; and Mochizuki, Masafumi. 4,380,780,
CI. 360-97.000.
Hirau, Atsumi, 4,380,781, CI. 360-97.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiaki; and Inami, Mamoru, 4,380,732, CI. 324-77.00D.
Vinson, Carl G., Jr.: See—
Leitert, Frederick C; and Vinson, Carl G., Jr., 4.380,682, CI.
570-219.000.
Vitale, Nicholas G.: See —
Folsom, Lawrence R.; Dineen, John J.; Vitale, Nicholas G.; and
Balas, Charles B., Jr., 4,380,152, CI. 60-520.000.
Voest-Alpine Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Sulzbacher, Horst, 4,380,469, CI. 75-38.000.
Vogel, Diane C: See—
Reichelderfer, Richard F.; Vogel, Diane C; and Tang, Marian C,
4,380,488, CI. 156-643.000.
Vogl, Otto: See—
Yoshida, Shohei; and Vogl, Otto, 4.380.643, CI. 548-260.000.
Voide-Vuissoz. Suzanne, heir: See —
Vuissoz, Constant, deceased; Mosoni-Vuissoz, Cesarine, heir; and
Voide-Vuissoz, Suzanne, heir. 4,380,430. CI. 431-347.000.
von Treu AG: See —
Wittenhorst. Augustinus J. M.. 4.380.505, CI. 252-359.00R.
von Bonin. Wulf; and Zaby. Gottfried, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft.
Intumescent compositions. 4.380.593, CI. 521-163.000.
Von Holdt, John W. Manually removable seal for buckets and cans.
4,380,305, CI. 220-306.000.
Von Holdt, John W. Longitudinally expansible and contractible hydro-
static mold gate. 4,380.422, CI. 425-146.000.
Vought Corporation: See —
Fling. George K.. 4,380,342, CI. 277-188.00A.
Vuissoz, Constant, deceased (by Preux, Marie Vuissoz-de, heir); by
Mosoni-Vuissoz, Cesarine. heir; and by Voide-Vuissoz, Suzanne,
heir, to Limtel. Ltd. Central heating apparatus. 4,380,430, CI.
431-347.000.
W. C. Bradley Co.: See—
Douglas, Fred O., 4.380,247, CI. 137-382.000.
April 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
W. C. Heraeus GmbH: See—
Bischofr, Albrecht. 4,380,775, CI. 357-67.000.
WABCO Fahrzeugbremsen G.m.b.H.: See—
Reinecke. Erich; and Klatt. Alfred, 4.380,177, CI. 74-475.000.
Wagner, Karl: See —
Engeismann, Dieter; HofTacker, Franz; Kovacic, Guido; Lermann,
Peter; Luhrig, Hermann; and Wagner, Karl, 4,380,382, CI.
354-275.000.
Wagner, Robert S., to Harris Corporation. RF Amplifier apparatus.
4,380,738, CI. 330-151.000.
Wagner, Terrence L.: See —
Kammann, Karl P., Jr.; Den Herder, Marvin J.; and Wagner,
Terrence L., 4,380,498, CI. 252-48.600.
Wagner, Wolfgang: See —
Harding, Geoffrey; and Wagner. Wolfgang, 4,380,817, CI.
378-87.000.
Wahl, Gunter: See—
Kuhlmann, Gerhard; Wolf, Erwin; and Wahl. Gunter, 4.380.693.
CI. 200-330.000.
Waiamea Company. Inc.: See —
Donan, David C, Jr.. 4.380.407, CI. 405-259.000.
Wainman. Roy: See —
Crawford. John S.; and Wainman. Roy. 4.380.239. CI. 604-28.000.
Wakamori. Hideki: See —
Kidoh, Kunizoh; and Wakamori, Hideki. 4.380.614. CI. 526-62.000.
Waldschutz, Heinz; Rauner. Franz; and Patzelt, Helmut, to Daimler-
Benz A.G. Labyrinth seal for slip ring switch for steering wheels of
motor vehicles. 4.380.341. CI. 277-56.000.
Walker. Jesse P.; and Robertson. William H.. to Milliken Research
Corporation. Automatic fiber blender. 4,380,095. CI. 19-80.00R.
Wallace Computer Services, Inc.: See —
Steidinger, Donald J., 4.380.315. CI. 229-69.000.
Walsh. Michael M.. to Eaton Corporation. Valve disabling mechanism.
4,380,219, CI. 123-198.00F.
Walsh, Thomas A., to R. Howard Strasbaugh, Inc. Lap shaping ma-
chine with oscillatable point cutter and selectively rotatable or oscil-
latable lap. 4,380,412. CI. 409-314.000.
Walter. Wolfgang, to Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen, AG. Spur rack
hydrosteering. 4,380.273, CI. 180-132.000.
Walters, John D. Cam operated friction clutch. 4,380,280, CI.
192-78.000.
Walters, Nigel J.: See—
Underbill, Michael J.; and Walters. Nigel J.. 4.380.743. CI. 331-
l.OOA.
Wandel U. Goltermann GmbH & Co.: See—
Alker, Dietrich E.. 4.380.731, CI. 324-51.000.
Wang. Pen-Chung: See —
Renga, James M.; and Wang, Pen-Chung, 4,380.636. CI.
546-326.000.
Warner-Lambert Company: See —
Fleming. Robert W.. 4.380,548, CI. 424-273.00R.
Wasmer, Anthony E.; and Koenigs, Stephen L., to Tecumseh Products
Company. Breaker point system. 4,380,217, CI. 123-146.50A.
v^ataWA IVfichio* Sec
Yoshida, Kazumasa; and WaUbe, Michio, 4,380,576, CI. 429-27.000.
Watchko, George R., to General Electric Company. Primer or solvent
resistant protective coating. 4,380,596, CI. 524-86.000.
Waters, Kenneth H.; Hopkins, John R.; and Payton, Charles E., to
Conoco Inc. Method and apparatus for shear wave logging.
4,380,806. CI. 367-27.000.
Wattron, Albert; and Quirin, Michel, to Belrecolt S.A. Agricultural
machine for the tedding or conditioning of fodder. 4,380,142, CI.
56-370.000.
Weaver, Marvin P., to Robertshaw Controls Company. Valve con-
struction having multiple piston means and method of making the
same. 4,380,251, CI. 137-877.000.
Weaver, Max A.: See —
Coates, Clarence A., Jr.; and Weaver, Max A., 4,380,633, CI.
544-316.000.
Webb, Monty F., to Teccor Electronics, Inc. Method of making a
semiconductor switching device. 4,380,114, CI. 29-588.000.
Wegemund, Bemd: See —
Erwied, Werner; and Wegemund, Bemd, 4,380,597, CI.
524-109.000.
Weghaupt, Erich, to Kraftwerk Union Aktiengesellschaft. Generator
rotor, especially turbo-generator rotor with superconducting field
winding. 4,380,356, CI. 384-133.000.
Weghaupt, Erich: See—
Intichar, Lutz; Schnapper, Christoph; and Weghaupt, Erich,
4,380,712, CI. 310-52.000.
Weinberger, Arnold: See—
Fogell, Leonard L.; Levine, Samuel R.; and Weinberger, Arnold,
4,380,813, CI. 371-52.000.
Weissman, Bernard. Detent device for a removable dental prosthesis.
4,380,434, CI. 433-177.000.
Wellington, Scott L., to Shell Oil Company. Reservoir-tailored CO2-
aided oil recovery process. 4,380,266, CI. 166-2S2.000.
Welsh, David A.; Dowbenko, Rostyslaw; Das, Suryya K.; Kania,
Charles M.; and Christenson, Roger M., to PPG Industries, Inc.
Thermosetting catonic acrylic latices and their use in coating compo-
sitions. 4,380,601, CI. S24-SSS.000.
Welzel Josef: Sec
Bull, Hans; Ewich, Gerhard; Kuschke, Gunther; Maykemper,
Alfred; and Welzel. Josef, 4,380,410, CI. 405-299.000.
Wesemeyer, Jurgen; Haubner, Georg; and Meier. Werner, to Robert
Bosch GmbH. Vehicle engine ignition system utilizing light guides
for protection against interference. 4,380,225, CI. 123-613.000.
Westerburg, Ralph E., Jr.: See—
Galloup, Clifford L.; Bula, Roger M.; Klemm. Robert W.; and
Westerburg. Ralph E., Jr., 4,380,111, CI. 29-564.400.
Western Electric Company, Inc.: See —
Allerton, George L.. 4.380,734, CI. 324-225.000.
Carlson, Roy C, Jr.; and March, Edward J., 4,380,431, CI.
432-29.000.
Wydro, Richard A., Sr., 4.380,518, CI. 264-13.000.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See—
Franz, James H., Jr.; and Jones, Stanley W,, 4,380,724, CI.
318-353.000.
Sun, Shan C; and Church, Larry L., 4,380,746. CI. 332-9.00R.
Swensrud. Roger L.; Pavlik. Dennis; and DeLuca, John J..
4.380.362. CI. 339-1 12.00L.
Vancsa, Gyorgy I.. 4.380,757, CI. 340-347.0CC.
Yannone, Robert A.; and Kiscaden, Roy W., 4.380,146. CI.
60-39.141.
Whirlpool Corporation: See —
Paddock, Stephen W.; and Tershak, Andrew T., 4,380,155. CI.
62-229.000.
White, David R., to Upjohn Company, The. Process for preparing
6'-methylspectinomycin and analogs thereof. 4,380,651, CI.
549-361.000.
White, David R., to Upjohn Company, The. Enamines of 6'-methyl-
spectinomycin and process for preparing the same. 4,380,652, CI.
549-361.000.
White, Eugene B., Jr., to White Machinery Corporation. Vehicle hav-
ing improved coupling system and system for absorption of shock on
coupling. 4,380,198, CI. 105-26.00R.
White, Gordon E.; See-
Fowler, Allan E.; White, Gordon E.; and Sims, Steve A., 4,380,684,
CI. 585-328.000.
White Machinery Corporation: See—
White. Eugene B., Jr., 4,380,198, CI. 105-26.00R.
Whiteman, Paul L.: See —
Higginson, Roy C; and Whiteman, Paul L., 4,380.415, CI.
414-537.000.
Whiteside, Robert C: See—
Greynolds, Fred L.; Whiteside, Robert C; and Durkee, Doyle D.,
4,380,183, CI. 83-244.000.
Wichinsky, Michael: See —
Chaudhry, Jagdish C; and Chaudhry, Lorena F.. 4,380,335, CI.
273-121.00A.
Wick, Gerhard: See—
Siggel, Erhard; Wick, Gerhard; Linhart, Heinz; and Kessler, Erich,
4,380,594, CI. 521-182.000.
Wicks, Edward A. Method and system for providing life-sustaining air
to persons entrapped within a burning building. 4,380,187, Q.
98-39.000.
Wiener & Co. B.V.: See—
Tadema, Jan C, 4,380,193, CI. 99-452.000.
Wiesner, Karel; and Tsai, Thomas Y. R., to Advance Biofactures Corp.
Novel isomers of bufalin and resibufogenin and their preparation.
4.380.624. CI. 536-5.000.
Wilcox, Donald G.; and Zambrano, Nobile, to ShDw-Pak, Incorpo-
rated. Socket wrench display package. 4.380,293, CI. 206-563.000.
Wilde, Eugen: See —
Gossler, Gerhard; and Wilde, Eugen, 4,380,116. CI. 29-611.000.
Wildman, John R.; and Morrison, Howard J., to Marvin Glass ft Asso-
ciates. Four wheel drive toy. 4,380,135. CI. 46-219.000.
Wiles. William J. Injection molding valve pin direct pneumatic actua-
tor. 4,380.426. CI. 425-566.000.
Wilkinson. John R., to Bendix Corporation, The. Digital roughness
sensor. 4,380,800, CI. 364-431.080.
Williams, Arden. Scalp massaging apparatus. 4,380,230, CI. 128-49.000.
Williams, Graham L.: See —
Mead, Howard B.; and Williams. Graham L., 4,380.253, CI.
138-149.000.
Williams. Keith G.: See—
Culbertson Samuel W.; McCulloch. Charles W.; and Williams,
Keith G., 4,380,321. CI. 239-700.000.
Williams, William R.. to U.S. Industries, Inc. Feed gate for poultry
conveyor feeders and the like. 4,380,214, CI. 119-51.0CF.
Willis, Earl C: See-
Campbell, John A. L.; Moynihan, Daniel J.; Roper, William D.;
and Willis. Earl C, 4.380,353, CI. 299-12.000.
Willis. Michael: See—
Daintrey, Joseph W.; Rushton. John; and Willis, Michael,
4,380,383, CI. 355-3.00R.
Wilson, Albert, to Litton Systems, Inc. Vibrating screen with self-sup-
porting screen cloth. 4,380,494, CI. 209-319.000.
Wilson, Earl: See—
McGrath, John E.; and WUson. Earl. 4.380.103, CI. 24-255.0SL.
Winkler, Edward: See—
Reid, Robert R.; Winkler. Edward; and Girard, Stephen E.,
4,380,209, CI. 118-253.000.
Wisco Corporation: See —
Sorensen, Norman L.; and Pohl. Lothar. 4,380,351, CI. 296-217.000.
Wisda, Michael S. Electncal switch. 4,380,704. Q. 307-116.000.
Wisnouskas, Joseph S.; and Ho, Roland, to Occidental Chemical Corpo-
ration. Process for preparing phosphorus acid from industrial waste
materials. 4,380.531, Cf. 423-316.000.
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 19, 1983
Wittcnhorst, Augustinus J. M., to von Treu AG. Apparatus for produc-
ing aerosol product. 4.380,505, CI. 252-359.00R.
Wittmann, Heinz, to TMC Corporation. Ski brake. 4.380.345, CI.
280-605.000.
Witzel, Bruce E.; Finke. Paul E.; and Allison. Debra L., to Merck &
Co., Inc. Process for preparing Benzoxepino- or Benzthiapino[4,3-
b]pyrrole-2-acctic acids. 4,380,645, CI. 548-430.000.
Woesler, Ehrenfried, to Ford Motor Company. Support member for an
exhaust pipe of a motor vehicle. 4.380,324. CI. 248-610.000.
Wojnarowski, Robert J.: See—
Eichelberger, Charles W.; and Wojnarowski, Robert J., 4,380,749.
CI. 338-215.000.
Wojtowicz. John A.; and Gergo, Andree M. B., to Olin Corporation.
Gas scavenger agents for containers of solid chloroisocyan urates.
4.380,501. CI. 252-186.240.
Wojtowicz. John A., to Olin Corporation. Process for the production of
dibasic magnesium hypochlorite. 4,380.533. CI. 423-473.000.
Wolf, Erwin: See—
Kuhlmann. Gerhard; Wolf, Erwin; and Wahl, Gunter. 4.380.693,
CI. 200-330.000.
Wolf, John J,: See—
LaRue. Albert D.; and Wolf, John J.. 4,380,202, CI. 110-263.000.
Wombold, Harry A. E.: See-
Allen. David O.; and Wombold, Harry A. E., 4,380,303. CI.
220-276.000.
Wong, Rayman Y., to Stauffer Chemical Company. Amine oxanilic acid
saitt as herbicide extenders. 4,380,467, CI. 71-100.000.
Woolaver. Dennis A.: See —
Baitis, A. Erich; and Woolaver. Dennis A., 4,380,206. CI.
114-122.000.
Woolfson, Joseph W. Magnetic lock. 4,380.162, CI. 70-276.000.
Woolner, John: See —
Wortley, John P. A.; and Woolner, John, 4,380,493. CI. 204-
105.00M.
Woronicki, Alexander R.: See—
Adler, Ralph P. I.; Gorsuch, Thomas J.; Murty, Yellapu V.; and
Woronicki, Alexander R., 4.380,262. CI. 164-423.000.
Worsman. Adrian D., to Mitel Corporation. Charge redistribution
circuit having a reduced area. 4,380,756, CI. 340-347.0AD.
Wortley, John P. A.; and Woolner, John, to IMI Kynoch Limited.
Anode. 4,380,493. CI. 204-105.00M.
Wozniak, David A., to Dwyer Instruments, Inc. Roll-up type U-tube
manometer. 4,380,173, CI. 73-747.000.
Wrathall, Robert S., to Motorola, Inc. Voltage reference circuit
4,380,706, CI. 307-297.000.
Wnght, Howard J.; and Scherrer. Joseph H., to Cook Paint and Var-
nish Company. Etherified methylol polyamide crosslinking agent,
process for producing the same and resins crosslinked therewith.
4.380,611, CI. 525-418.000.
kVright, William E.. to Carrier Corporation. Heat exchanger tube
support assembly. 4,380,263, CI. 165-76.000.
Wrobel. Joseph J.-. See-
Thomas. Harold T.; and Wrobel, Joseph J., 4,380,769. CI.
346-135.100.
Wu. Pai-Chuan: See—
Cancio. Leopoldo V.; and Wu. Pai-Chuan. 4.380,564, CI.
428-167.000.
'^'usthof, Peter; and Schneider, Johann, to Rexroth GmbH. Internal
gear machine with rotary valve disk. 4,380,420, CI. 418-61.00B.
)Vydro, Richard A., Sr., to Western Electric Company. Inc. Method of
producing solder spheres. 4.380.518, CI. 264-13.000.
^erox Corporation: See —
Boggs, David R.. 4.380.761. CI. 340-825.500.
Kingsley, William. 4,380,389, CI. 355-50.000.
Sprague, Robert A., 4.380.373. CI. 350-356.000.
Yajima. Tatsuo, to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co.. Ltd. Composite
information recording apparatus. 4,380,387. CI. 355-3.00R.
yamada. Kantaro: See —
Ishii. Hiromichi; Matsuzawa, Hideo; Kobayashi. Masao and
Yamada, Kantaro, 4,380.664. CI. 562-546.000.
yamaguchi. Akihiro; Kobayashi. Tadashi; Yamaguchi. Keizaburo; and
Murakami, Hisamichi. to Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals. Incorporated.
Process for the preparation of 2,2 -bis(4-substituted phenol)suirides.
4.380.671. CI. 568-48.000.
Yamaguchi, Keizaburo: See —
Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Kobayashi, Tadashi; Yamaguchi. Keizaburo;
and Murakami. Hisamichi. 4.380.671, CI. 568-48.000.
Yamaguchi. Masami: See —
Mandai, Hanihumi; Nishimura, Kunitaro; Kohno, Yoshiaki; and
Yamaguchi. Masami. 4.380.559. CI. 427-80.000.
Yunaha Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Matsuzaka. Hiroshi, 4,380,516, CI. 261-23.00A.
Yunanouchi Pharmaceutical Co.. Ltd.: See—
Fukui, Muneo; Konno, Yutaka; Kubota, Yukio; Aruga, Masayoshi;
and Kawata. Hiroitsu, 4.380,534, CI. 424-38.000.
Yamashita, Akio; and Hayami, Masaaki, to MatsushiU Electric Indus-
trial Company, Limited. Styryl-like compounds showing a color-
developing and bleaching behavior with improved subility and
prolonged lifetime. 4,380,629, CI. 542-455.000.
Yanagisawa, Masahiro, to Nippon Electric Co.. Ltd. Process for manu-
facturing a protective polysilicate layer of a record member by a laser
beam and a magnetic record member suitably manufactured thereby.
4.380,558, CI. 427-53.100.
Yannone. Robert A.; and Kiscaden. Roy W., to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. System and method for accelerating and sequencing industrial
gas turbine apparatus and gas turbine electric power plants preferably
with a digital computer control system. 4,380,146, CI. 60-39.141.
Yano. Hiroshi; Kawasaki, Tenio; Nomura. Hiroyuki; and Takeuchi,
Mikio. to Nissan Motor Company, Limited. Frequency and speed
display device. 4,380,733, CI. 324-166.000.
Yarborough, G. Wirth, Jr. Small weapons simulator. 4,380,437, CI.
434-18.000.
Yasu, Mitsuho: See —
Mitachi, Seiko; Shibata, Shuichi; Kanamori, Terutoshi; Manabe,
Toyotaka; and Yasu, Mitsuho, 4.380.588, CI. 501-37.000.
Yasuda, Kazuo; Tamura, Akihiko; and Nakamura, Yoshimitsu, to Koni-
shiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd. Method for controlling prefatiguing
illumination of a photosensitive member. 4,380,386, CI. 355-3.00R.
Yeh, Chun T. Tape rewinding apparatus for video cassette. 4,380,322,
CI. 242-198.000.
Yoder, Nax N., to United States of America, Navy. High-performance
bipolar microwave transistor. 4,380,774. CI. 357-34.000.
Yokomichi. Isao: See —
Nishiyama, Ryuzo; Fujikawa, Kanichi; Yokomichi, Isao;
Shigehara, Itaru; and Miyaji, Mikio, 4,380,670, CI. 564-407.000.
Yoneda, Naoto; Kato, Jyoji; and Kinashi, Keizo, to Tanabe Siyaku Co.,
Ltd. 2-Oxoimidazolidine derivatives. 4,380,644, CI. 548-321.000.
Yoshida, Kazumasa; and Watobe, Michio, to Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd.
Air cell. 4.380,576, CI. 429-27.000.
Yoshida Kogyo K. K.: See—
Fukuroi, Takeo, 4,380,098, CI. 24-205. 16R.
Yoshida, Shohei; and Vogl, Otto, to Asahi Glass Company, Ltd. Benzo-
triazole compound and homopolymer or copolymers thereof.
4.380.643. CI. 548-260.000.
Yoshikumi, Chikao; Ohmura, Yoshio; Hirose, Fumio; Ikuzawa,
Masanori; Matsunaga, Kenichi; Fujii. Takayoshi; Ohhara, Minoru;
and Ando, Takao. to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha.
Pharmaceutical compo>sition containing para-amino-benzoic acid-N-
D-mannoside as an active ingredient. 4.380.536, CI. 424-180.000.
Young. Mark W.: See—
Nield, Eric; Higgins, David E.; and Young, Mark W., 4,380,621, CI.
528-287.000.
Young, William R.: See-
Cohen, Paul B.; Young, William R.; and Edwards, W. Dale,
4,380,710, CI. 307-475.000.
Yu, Ruey J.: See-
Van Scott, Eugene J.; and Yu, Ruey J., 4,380,549, CI. 424-317.000.
Yugen Kaisha Batora Konsaruteingu: See —
Okamoto, Ikuko, 4,380,438, CI. 434-157.000.
Zaba, Tadeusz, to BBC Brown, Boveri & Co. Ltd. Steam power plant
conuining pressure-fired steam generator with fluidized bed firing.
4.380,147, CI. 60-39.182.
Zaby. Gottfried: See—
von Bonin. Wulf; and 2^by, Gottfried, 4,380,593, CI. 521-163.000.
Zack, Larry E.: See —
Glinka, John S.; and Zack, Larry E.. 4.380.316, CI. 232-16.000.
Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen AG: See—
Merz, Johann, 4,380,272, CI. 180-132.000.
Walter, Wolfgang, 4,380,273, CI. 180-132.000.
Zaidan Hojin Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenyku Kai: See—
Umezawa, Hamao; Okami, Yoshiro; and Kondo, Shinichi,
4,380,581, CI. 435-80.000.
Zambrano, Nobile: See —
Wilcox, Donald G.; and Zambrano, Nobile, 4,380,293, CI.
206-563.000.
Zander, Dennis R.: See —
Foote, James C; and Zander, Dennis R., 4,380,180, CI. 74-821.000.
Zeeh, Bemd: See —
Sauter, Hubert; Ammermann, Eberhard; Rentzea, Costin; Zeeh,
Bemd; Jung, Johann; and Pommer, Emst-Heinrich. 4,380,546,
CI. 424-269.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See —
Moon, Frederick H., 4,380,827, CI. 455-179.000.
Moon, Frederick H., 4,380,828, CI. 455-319.000.
Zhestkov, Vital y I.: See—
Abduganiev, Abdurakhim; Tikhonov, Valentin N.; Shlykov, Gen-
nady N.; Zhestkov, Vitaly I.; Krjuk, Timur P.; Mukhin, Viktor
M.; and Tikhonov, Jury N., 4,380,143. CI. 57-89.000.
Zhivotchenko, Alexandr D.: See —
Shevakin, Jury F.; Shpichinetsky, Efim S.; Fedorenko, Valentina
P.; Efremov, Boris N.; Klevchenkova, Maria N.; Andrjuschenko,
Ivan A.; Krasnoselsky, losif A.; Anikeev, Evgeny F.; Ivanov,
Evgeny A.; Khomyachkov. Anatoly P.; Shvarts, Naum A.;
Kozhevnikova, Ljudmila V.; Romanova, Roza M.; and Zhi-
votchenko, Alexandr D., 4,380,528, CI. 420-SOS.OOO.
Ziegler. Michael L.. II; Dnike, Michael B.; Van Roekel, John R.; and
Baxter, Ward, II, to DaU General Corporation. Refresh and error
detection and correction technique for a data processing system.
4,380,812, CI. 371-38.000.
Zinaida, Zosim: See —
Gutnick, David L.; Rosenberg, Eugene; Belsky, Igal; and Zinaida,
Zosim. 4,380,504, CI. 252-356.000.
Zodrow, Rudolf, to Jagenberg Werke. Method and apparatus for
changing the label magazine boxes of labeling machines. 4,380,487,
CI. 156-568.000.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 19TH DAY OF APRIL, 1983
Note — Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Acme Visible Records, Inc.: See —
Lapp, James F.; and McGrath. Thomas F., Re. 31,210, CI.
226-119.000.
Allen, Robert J.: See—
Petrow, Henry G.; and Allen, Robert J., Re. 31,214, CI.
524-411.000.
Anderson, Charles W. Agricultural implement with foldable tool sup-
porting frame. Re. 31,209, CI. 172-311.000.
Bethlehem Steel Corporation: See —
Brachman, Armand E., Re. 31,213, CI. 428-462.000.
Brachman, Armand E., to Bethlehem Steel Corporation. Polyolefin
composition having high impact resistance and high temperature
flow resistance. Re. 31,213, CI. 428-462.000.
Central Welding Supply Co., Inc.: See—
Hairgrove, Nelson, Sr., Re. 31,216, CI. 219-132.000.
Hairgrove, Nelson, Sr., to Central Welding Supply Co., Inc. Controller
for DC arc welding generators. Re. 31,216, CI. 219-132.000.
Hollier, John C. L.: See—
Stranahan, John J.; and Hollier, John C. L., Re. 31,215. CI.
431-4.000.
Lapp, James F.; and McGrath, Thomas F., to Acme Visible Records,
Inc. Apparatus and method for feeding and collecting continuous
web material. Re. 31,210, CI. 226-119.000.
McGrath, Thomas F.: See —
Lapp, James F.; and McGrath, Thomas F., Re. 31,210, CI.
226-119.000.
Monroe Auto Equipment Company: See —
Smith, Charles J., Re. 31,212, CI. 280-668.000.
Petrow, Henry G.; and Allen, Robert J. Colloidal sol antimony pen-
taoxide flameproofmg compositions. Re. 31,214, CI. 524-411.000.
Smith, Charles J., to Monroe Auto Equipment Company. Vehicle
suspension device. Re. 31,212, CI. 280-668.000.
Stranahan, John J.; and Hollier, John C. L., to Texaco Inc. Smokeless
gas flare with specific gravity gas analyzer for reduction of noise.
Re. 31,215, CI. 431-4.000.
Texaco Inc.: See —
Stranahan, John J.; and Hollier, John C. L., Re. 31.215, CI.
431-4.000.
Whitehead, Edwin N. Magnetically coded identification card
Re. 31,211, CI. 235-449.000.
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Winicov, Murray W.; and Oberlander, Michael, to West Agro-
Chemical, Inc., Germicidal iodine compositions with enhanced
iodine stability. Bl 4,271,149, CI. 424—150.
West Agro-Chemical, Inc.: See —
Winicov, Murray W.; and Oberlander, Michael. Bl
4,271,149. CI. 424—150.
Ronbeck, Ame Ingbert, to AB Volvo. Handling apparatus. Bl
3,902,606, CI. 414—733.
AB Volvo: See—
Ronbeck. Ame Ingbert. Bl 3,902.606, CI. 414—733.
Gilano, Michael N.; Beaupre. Richard E.; and Lipson. Melvin A.,
to Dyiiachem Corporation. Polymerization composition and
process having polymeric binding agents. Bl 3.953,309. CI.
204—159.16.
Dynachem Corporation: See —
Gilano. Michael N.; Beaupre. Richard E.; and Lipson.
Melvin A. Bl 3,953.309. CI. 204—159.16.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Adamson, Gerhard; and Rousseau, Walter F., to Union Carbide Corpo-
ration. Packaging container. 268,649, 4-19-83, CI. D9-416.000.
Allgood, Charles H., II. Plaque with minnow. 268,654, 4-19-83, CI.
Dl 1-134.000.
American Optical Corporation: See —
Tenny, Dale E., 268,683, CI. D16-I02.000.
Anderson, Donald L., to Truth Incorporated. Combined check rail lock
and keeper. 268,643, 4-19-83, CI. D8-337.000.
Annalee Mobilitee Dolls, Inc.: See —
Thomdike, Barbara A. D., 268,692, CI. D21-148.000.
yVtAri Inc * Sec
Nishi, Roy M., 268,689, CI. D2 1-48.000.
Bart, Philip D. Stroller. 268,661, 4-19-83, CI. D 12- 129.000.
Bausch & Lomb Incorporated: See —
ChubofT, David P.; Greb, Francis J.; and Takeuchi, Tom, 268,684,
CI. DI6-102.000.
Bennett, Brian S., to Dunlop Limited. Tire for a vehicle wheel. 268,663,
4-19-83, CI. D 12- 145.000.
Bennett, William G. Toy diving board 268,690, 4-19-83, CI D21-
109.000.
Bevilaqua, Ernest M.; McCroskery, Allan L.; and Knerr. Theodore N..
to Otis Elevator Company. Control panel for elevator systems.
268,668, 4-19-83, CI. D 1 3-35.000.
Bliss & Laughlin Industries Incorporated: See —
Johnson, David B.; and Schroeder. Verdell H., 268,679, CI. D15-
76.000.
Bonforte, Anthony G. Trim blade for lawns and the like. 268,640,
4-19-83, CI. D8-08.000.
Bonforte, Anthony G. Trim blade for lawns and the like. 268,641,
4-19-83, CI. D8-08.000.
Bounds, William E. Nutmeg grater. 268,638, 4-19-83, CI. D7-53.000.
Bowen, Mark. Scalp hypothermia cap. 268,696, 4-19-83, CI. D24-34.000.
Bukowski, Mark F.: See—
Bukowski, Michelene F., 268,697, CI. D24-36.000.
Bukowski, Michelene F., to Bukowski, Mark F. Gum-cleaning imple-
ment. 268,697, 4-19-83. CI. D24-36.000.
PI 27
PI 28
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Tom, to Bausch &
4-19-83, CI. D16-
Chuboff, David P.; Greb, Francis J.; and Takeuchi,
Lomb Incorporated. Pair of specUcles. 268,684,
102.000
Clayton, Jessie R. Combined aquanum and cover. 268,705, 4-19-83, CI
D30-6.00O.
Cole & Mason, USA, Ltd.: See-
Cowan, David A., 268,637, CI. D7-53.000.
Collins, Christopher K. Golf club. 268,691, 4-19-83, CI. D21-217.000.
Com. James F : See —
Muller, Max; and Com, James F., 268,706, CI. D32-01.000.
Cowan, David A., to Cole & Mason, USA, Ltd. Condiment mill.
268.637. 4-19-83, CI. D7-53.000.
Doyle, Barbara. Infant thermometer. 268,651, 4-19-83, CI. DlO-57.000.
Dunlop Limited: See —
Bennett, Brian S., 268,663, CI. D12-145.000.
Shirashoji, Hisashi, 268,662, CI. D 12- 140.000.
Esaki, Akira: See —
Ohie, Yoshihisa; Esaki, Akira; Sawada, Masaji; and Yamasaki,
Tsutomu, 268.677, CI. D14-103.000.
Fielder, Jean C, to Pace Incorporated. Combined power supply, tool
holder and support therefor. 268,642, 4-19-83, CI. D8-71.000.
Fontana, Dennis J. Mountable record display device. 268,634, 4-19-83,
CI. D6- 114.000.
Gakken Co.. Ltd. (Kabushiki Kaisha Gakushu Kenkyusha): See—
Iwaoka, Masao; IgeU, Yousuke; and Kobayashi, Fumio, 268,670,
CI. D14-1.000.
Gentry, Robert E. Child's rocking chair or similar article. 268,632,
4-19-83, CI. D6-1 1.000.
Greb, Francis J.: See—
Chuboff, David P.; Greb, Francis J.; and Takeuchi, Tom, 268,684,
CI. D16-102.000.
Guillon, Smith, Marquart & Associes Ltee: See —
Smith. Morley L.. Jr.. 268.658, CI. D12-91.000.
H. W Hull & Sons, Inc.: See-
Hull, James W . 268,636, CI. D6-193.000.
Hama Hamaphot KG: See—
Hanke, Rudolph, 268,681, CI. D16-17.000.
Hanke, Rudolph, to Hama Hamaphot KG. Slide viewer. 268.681,
4-19-83. CI. D16-17.000.
Hass. William J. Radio receiver. 268.675, 4-19-83. CI. D14-68.000.
Helior S.A: See-
Rousseau. Emile, 268,652. CI. Dl 1-102.000.
Hesston Corporation: See —
Swenson. Edward L.; Roth. Allen K.; Jones. Larry B.; and Rob-
bins. Richard J.. 268,678, CI. D 1 5-27.000.
Holce, Thomas J.; and Huckins, Charles M.. to Sentrol, Inc. Combined
switch housing and integral mounting bracket. 268.669. 4-19-83. CI.
D 13-38.000.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Ohba, Yasuhiro, 268,660. CI. D12-1 10.000.
Huckins, Charles M.: See—
Holce, Thomas J.; and Huckins, Charles M., 268,669, CI. D13-
38.000.
Hudson, Isaac J., Jr. Packaging tray or the like. 268,646, 4-19-83. CI.
D9-347.000.
Hull, James W., to H. W. Hull & Sons. Inc. Chair panel. 268,636,
4-19-83, CI. D6-193.000.
IgeU, Yousuke: See—
Iwaoka, Masao; Igeta, Yousuke; and Kobayashi, Fumio, 268,670,
CI. D14-1.000.
Iijima, Takekazu, to Pioneer Kabushiki Kaisha. Loudspeaker. 268,673,
4-19-83, CI. D14- 34.000.
Ivac Corporation: See —
Knute, Wallace L., 268.698, CI. D24-52.000.
Iwaoka, Masao; Igeta, Yousuke; and Kobayashi, Fumio, to Gakken Co.,
Ltd. (Kabushiki Kaisha Gakushu Kenkyusha). Audio-visual sheet
player 268,670. 4-19-83, CI. D14-1.000.
J. Marttiinin Puukkotehdas Oy: See —
Liukko, Lasse; and Maunu, Pentti. 268.694. CI. D22- 1.000.
James, Harry E , Jr Reflector. 268.704, 4-19-83, CI. D26-1 18.000.
Johannsen, Donald R Pumpkin carving knife. 268.639, 4-19-83, CI.
D7- 143.000
Johnson, David B.; and Schroeder, Verdell H., to Bliss & Laughlin
Industries Incorporated. Housing for a portable bag closing sewing
machine. 268,679, 4-19-83, CI. D 15-76.000.
Johnson, Edward M., Jr., to Kolcraft Products, Inc. Rockable infant
scat. 268,631, 4-19-83, CI. D6- 10.000.
Johnson, Robert L. Game board or similar article. 268,688, 4-19-83, CI.
D2 1-34.000.
Jones, Larry B.: See —
Swenson, Edward L.; Roth, Allen K.; Jones, Larry B.; and Rob-
bins, Richard J., 268,678, CI. D15-27.000.
Jordan Concepts, Inc.: See —
Jordan, John S., 268,674, CI. D 14-60.000.
Jordan, John S., to Jordan Concepts, Inc. Decorative shell cover for
telephones. 268,674. 4-19-83, CI. D14-60.000.
ordan, William D.; and Moore, Marvin F., to Thermalloy Incorpo-
rated. Heat sink or similar article. 268,667, 4-19-83, CI. D 13-23.000.
K. G. M. Corporation: See —
Kolf, John W., 268,695, CI. D22-99.000.
Kingsford, Ted I., to Plough, Inc. Cosmetic container. 268,647, 4-19-83,
CI. D9-389.000.
Kirstine, Dale J, to Kirstine/Hendricks. Dispenser cap. 268,650,
4-19-83. CI. D9-450.000.
Kirstine/Hendricks: See —
Kirstine, Dale J., 268,650, CI. D9-450.000.
Knerr, Theodore N.: See —
Bevilaqua, Ernest M.; McCroskery, Allan L.; and Knerr, Theodore
N., 268,668, CI. D 13-35.000.
Knute, Wallace L., to Ivac Corporation. IV Spike and drop former
housing. 268,698, 4-19-83, CI. D24-52.000.
Kobayashi, Fumio: See —
Iwaoka, Masao; Igeta, Yousuke; and Kobayashi, Fumio, 268,670.
CI. D14-1.000.
Kobayashi, Masaharu: See —
Ohya, Toshio; and Kobayashi, Masaharu, 268,671, CI. D 14- 11.000.
Kodaka, Tatsuya. Stag-beetle figure. 268,655, 4-19-83, CI. Dl 1-162.000.
Kodaka, Tatsuya. Beetle figure. 268,656, 4-19-83. CI. Dl 1-162.000.
Kodaka, Tatsuya. Butterfly figure. 268,657, 4-19-83, CI. Dl 1-162.000.
Kolcraft Products, Inc.: See —
Johnson, Edward M., Jr., 268,631, CI. D6- 10.000.
Kolf, John W., to K. G. M. Corporation. Deer scent dispenser. 268,695,
4-19-83, CI. D22-99.000.
Lane, Douglas M.: See —
Sauls, Thomas P.; and Lane, Douglas M., 268,633, CI. D6-49.000.
Liukko, Lasse; and Maunu, Pentti, to J. Marttiinin Puukkotehdas Oy.
Knife. 268,694, 4-19-83, CI. D22- 1.000.
Lloyd-Jones, Robert, to Salkhad Pty. Ltd. Combined sofTit and fascia
panel. 268,703, 4-19-83, CI. D25-55.000.
M & M Luggage Co., Inc.: See-
Stark, Ted, 268,627, CI. D3-7 1.000.
SUrk, Ted, 268,628, CI. D3-7 1.000.
Stark, Ted, 268,629, CI. D3-7 1.000.
Marganne, Florence J., to Peinture Corona S.A. Wall covering.
268,708, 4-19-83, CI. D92-25.000.
Maunu, Pentti: See —
Liukko, Lasse; and Maunu, Pentti, 268,694, CI. D22- 1.000.
McCroskery, Allan L.: See—
Bevilaqua, Ernest M.; McCroskery, Allan L.; and Knerr, Theodore
N., 268,668, CI. D 13-35.000.
McPherson, Mathew A. Adapter mount for microphones and the like.
268,672, 4-19-83, CI. D14-13.000.
Miller, Harry C, to Sargent & Greenleaf, Inc. Combination lock fence
lever with eccentric roller nose. 268,644, 4-19-83, CI. D8-343.000.
Moore, Marvin F., to Thermalloy Incorporated. Heat sink or similar
article. 268,666, 4-19-83, CI. D 13-23.000.
Moore, Marvin F.: See —
Jordan, William D.; and Moore, Marvin F., 268,667, CI. D13-
23.000.
Muller, Max; and Com, James F. Shoe sole cleaning machine. 268.706,
4-19-83, CI. D32-01.000.
Nakade, Kenichi, to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Sorter for electrostatic
copier. 268,682, 4-19-83, CI. D16-32.<XX).
Nishi, Roy M., to Atari, Inc. Remote control unit for electronic game
268,689, 4- 1 9-83, CI. D2 1 -48.000.
Ohba, Yasuhiro, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Motortricy-
cle. 268,660, 4-19-83, CI. D12-1 10.000.
Ohie, Yoshihisa; Esaki, Akira; Sawada, Masaji; and Yamasaki, Tsutomu,
to Sharp Corporation. Electronic computer. 268,677, 4-19-83. CI
D14-103.000.
Ohmann. William; and Wiessner, Edward E., to Whirlpool Corpora-
tion. Filter for automatic washer agiutor or similar article. 268,707,
4-19-83, CI. D32-26.000.
Ohya, Toshio; and Kobayashi, Masaharu, to Sony Corporation. Video
tape cassette. 268,671, 4-19-83, CI. DI4-1 1.000.
Ohya, Toshio, to Sony Corporation. Video camera with video tape
recorder. 268,676, 4-19-83, CI. D14-78.000.
Ormihl: See —
Sailhen, Pierre M., 268,699, CI. D24-64.000.
Sailhen, Pierre M., 268,700, CI. D24-64.000.
Sailhen, Pierre M., 268,701, CI. D24-64.000.
Otis Elevator Company: See —
Bevilaqua, Ernest M.; McCroskery, Allan L.; and Knerr, Theodore
N., 268,668, CI. D 13-35.000.
Pace Incorporated: See —
Fielder, Jean C, 268,642, CI. D8-7 1.000.
Parker- Hannifin Corporation: See —
Sharp, Bernard C, 268,664, CI. D 12- 187.000.
Sharp, Bernard C, 268,665, CI. D12-187.000.
Peinture Corona S.A.: See —
Marganne, Rorence J., 268,708, CI. D92-25.000.
Phillips, Wyatt L.; and Schooler, Ronald D., to QuikTrip Corporation.
Packaging container for food. 268,645, 4-19-83, CI. D9- 34 1.000.
Pioneer Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Iijima, Takekazu, 268,673, CI. D14-34.000.
Plough, Inc.: See —
Kingsford, Ted I., 268,647, CI. D9-389.000.
QuikTrip Corporation: See —
Phillips, Wyatt L.; and Schooler, Ronald D., 268,645, CI. D9-
341.000.
Reaume, Merlin F., to Standard Motors, Inc. Automobile. 268,659,
4-19-83, CI. D 12-92.000.
Redwine, Mary A. Disposable diaper rack. 268,635, 4-19-83, CI. D6-
130.000.
Ricoh Company, Ltd.: See —
Nakade, Kenichi, 268,682, CI. D16-32.000.
Robbins, Richard J.: See —
Swenson, Edward L.; Roth, Allen K.; Jones, Larry B.; and Rob-
bins. Richard J.. 268.678. CI. Dl 5-27.000.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 29
Rogers, James C. Stirrup for suspending books, papers and the like on
the face of an inclined drawing board. 268,687, 4-19-83, CI. D19-
91.000.
Roth, Allen K.: See—
Swenson, Edward L.; Roth, Allen K.; Jones, Larry B.; and Rob-
bins, Richard J., 268,678, CI. Dl 5-27.000.
Rousseau, Emile, to Helior S.A. Medal. 268,652, 4-19-83, CI. Dll-
102.000.
Rousseau, Walter F.: See —
Adamson, Gerhard; and Rousseau, Walter F., 268,649, CI. D9-
416.000.
Sailhen, Pierre M., to Ormihl. Hernial belt. 268,699, 4-19-83. CI. D24-
64.000.
Sailhen, Pierre M., to Ormihl. Hernial belt. 268.700, 4-19-83, CI. D24-
64.000.
Sailhen, Pierre M., to Ormihl. Hernial belt. 268,701, 4-19-83, CI. D24-
64.000.
Salkhad Pty. Ltd.: See—
Lloyd-Jones, Robert, 268,703, CI. D25-55.000.
Sargent & Greenleaf, Inc.: See —
Miller, Harry C, 268,644, CI. D8-343.000.
Sauls, Thomas P.; and Lane, Douglas M. Rocking chair. 268,633,
4-19-83, CI. D6-49.000.
Sawada, Masaji: See —
Ohie, Yoshihisa; Esaki, Akira; Sawada, Masaji; and Yamasaki,
Tsutomu, 268,677, CI. D14-103.000.
Schooler, Ronald D.: Se«—
Phillips, Wyatt L.; and Schooler, Ronald D., 268,645, CI. D9-
341.000.
Schroeder, Verdell H.: S^e—
Johnson, David B.; and Schroeder, Verdell H., 268,679. CI. D15-
76.000.
Sentrol. Inc.: See—
Holce. Thomas J.; and Huckins, Charles M., 268,669, CI. D13-
38.000.
Seshimoto, Makoto, to Tokai Gakki Company, Ltd. GuiUr head.
268,685, 4-19-83, CI. D17-20.000.
Sharp, Bernard C, to Parker-Hannifin Corporation. Motorized rear
view mirror. 268,664, 4-19-83, CI. D12-187.000.
Sharp, Bernard C, to Parker-Hannifin Corporation. Motorized truck
mirror. 268,665, 4-19-83, CI. D12-187.000.
Sharp Corporation: See —
Ohie, Yoshihisa; Esaki, Akira; Sawada, Masaji; and Yamasaki,
Tsutomu, 268,677, CI. D14-103.000.
Shirashoji, Hisashi, to Dunlop Limited. Tire for a vehicle wheel.
268,662, 4-19-83, CI. D12-t40.000.
Smargiassi, Francesco. Mirror stereoscope. 268,680, 4-19-83, CI. D16-
12.000.
Smith, Morley L., Jr., to Guillon, Smith, Marquart & Associes Ltee.
Automobile. 268,658, 4-19-83, CI. D12-91.000.
Sony Corporation: See —
Ohya, Toshio; and Kobayashi, Masaharu, 268,671, CI. D14-1 1.000.
Ohya, Toshio, 268,676, CI. D14-78.000.
Spollino, Joseph A.; and SpoHino, Ronald A. Combined ski and boot
carrier. 268,626, 4-19-83, CI. D3-36.000.
Spollino, Ronald A.: See—
Spollino, Joseph A.; and Spollino, Ronald A., 268,626, CI. D3-
36.000.
Standard Motors, Inc.: See—
Reaume, Merlin F.. 268,659, CI. D12-92.000.
Stark. Sven O. S.. to Tetra Pak International AB. Packaging container.
268,648, 4-19-83, CI. D9-416.000.
Surk, Ted, to M & M Luggage Co., Inc. Luggage. 268,627, 4-19-83, CI.
D3-7 1.000.
Surk, Ted, to M & M Luggage Co., Inc. Luggage. 268,628, 4-19-83, CI.
D3-71.000.
Stark, Ted, to M & M Luggage Co., Inc. Luggage. 268,629, 4-19-83, CI.
D3-7 1.000.
Sun, George C. Ornament. 268,653, 4-19-83, CI. Dl 1-121.000.
Swenson, Edward L.; Roth, Allen K.; Jones, Larry B.; and Robbins,
Richard J., to Hesston Corporation. Baler. 268,678, 4-19-83, CI.
D 15-27.000.
Takeuchi, Tom: See —
ChubofF, David P.; Greb, Francis J.; and Takeuchi, Tom, 268.684.
CI. D16-102.000.
Taylor. Gary B. Veterinarian vest. 268,624, 4-19-83, CI. D2-190.000.
Tenny, Dale E., to American Optical Corporation. Pair of safety specU-
cles. 268,683, 4-19-83, CI. D16-102.000.
Tetra Pak International AB: See-
Stark. Sven O. S.. 268,648, CI. D9-416.000.
Texas Boot Company: See —
Vise, Harry, 268,625. CI. D2-273.000.
Thermalloy Incorporated: See-
Jordan, William D.; and Moore, Marvin F., 268,667. CI. D13-
23.000.
Moore. Marvin F., 268.666, CI. D 13-23.000.
Thomdike, Barbara A. D., to Annalee Mobilitee Dolls, Inc. Stuffed
dragon-like animal. 268,692, 4-19-83, CI. D21-148.000.
Todd, Harry L. PorUble garage. 268.702, 4-19-83. CI. D25-22.000.
Tokai Gakki Company, Ltd.: See—
Seshimoto, Makoto, 268,685, CI. D 17-20.000.
Truth Incorporated: See —
Anderson, Donald L., 268.643, CI. D8-337.O0O.
Tyke Corporation. The: See —
Wilson. Michael C, 268,630, CI. D6-9.000.
Union Carbide Corporation: See—
Adamson, Gerhard; and Rousseau, Walter F., 268,649, CI. D9-
416.000.
VDO Adolf Schindling AG: See-
Wolf, Dieter, 268,686, CI. D19-64.000.
Vise, Harry, to Texas Boot Company. Cowboy boot. 268,625, 4-19-83,
CI. D2-273.000.
Whirlpool Corporation: See —
Ohmann, William; and Wiessner, Edward E., 268,707. CI D32-
26.000.
Wiessner, Edward E.: See—
Ohmann, William; and Wiessner. Edward E.. 268,707, CI. D32-
26.000.
Wilson, Michael C, to Tyke Corporation, The. Portable booster seat.
268,630. 4-19-83, CI. D6-9.000.
Wolf, Dieter, to VDO Adolf Schindling AG. Children's clock 268.686.
4-19-83. CI. D 19-64.000.
Works. Michael L. Outdoor recreational device. 268,693, 4-19-83, CI.
D2 1-244.000.
Yamasaki, Tsutomu: See —
Ohie, Yoshihisa; Esaki, Akira; Sawada, Masaji; and Yamasaki,
Tsutomu, 268,677. CI. D14-103.000.
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
Conard-Pyle Company, The: See- Jackson & Perkins Company^e-
Corliss, Clifford D., 5,041, CI. 50.000. Warnner. William A. 5.040. CI. ITOOO. „ , .
Corliss, Clifford D., to Conard-Pyle Company, The. Juniper plant - Warriner, William A., to Jackson & Perkins Company. Rose plant
corcorcor variety. 5,041. 4-19-83. CI. 50.000. 74-1489-2. 5,040. 4-19-83, CI. 1 1.000.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED APRIL 19, 1983
Note. — First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
CLASS3
1.912 4.380.090
CLASS4
508 4.380,091
CLASS 8
477 4.380.451
532 4,380.452
606 4.380,453
CLASS 15
209 C 4,380.092
CLASS 16
110 R 4,380.093
CLASS 17
71 4,380.094
CLASS 19
80 R 4,380,095
CLASS 24
20 R 4,380,096
160
205.16 R
211 P
230 AL
237
248 SA
255 SL
282
4,380,097
4,380,098
4,380,099
4,380,100
4.380.101
4,380,102
4.380,103
CLASS 28
4.380.104
CLASS 29
157 R 4,380.105
157.3 A 4.380,106
252 4,380.107
434 4,380,108
466 4,380,109
525 4,380,110
564.4 4.380,111
572 4,380,112
577 C 4,380,113
588 4,380,114
4,380,115
611 4,380,116
742 4,380,117
747 4,380,118
884 4,380,119
CLASS 30
28 4.380,120
42 4,380,121
343 4,380,122
409 4.380,123
CLASS 33
4.380.124
CLASS 34
4.380,125
4,380.126
4.380,127
CLASS 40
158 R 4.380.128
307 4,380.129
584 4.380.130
CLASS 43
IS 4,380,131
26.2 4,380.132
CLASS 44
1 B 4,380.454
56 4.380,455
68 4,380,456
CLASS 46
1 L 4,380,133
117 4,380,134
219 4,380,135
CLASS 47
83 4.380,136
CLASS 51
163.1 4.380.137
321 4,380,138
CLASS 52
162 4,380.139
433
10
86
197
202
4.380,140
CLASS 55
33 4,380,457
4,380,458
87 4,380,459
158 4,380,460
CLASS 56
370 4,380,142
CLASS 57
4,380,143
4.380,144
CLASS 59
4,380,145
89
286
27
CLASS 60
39.141
4,380,146
39.182
4,380,147
39.281
4,380,148
274
4,380,149
372
4,380,150
496
4,380,151
520
4,380,152
648
4,380,153
682
4,380,154
CLASS 62
11
4.380.461
229
4,380,155
235.1
4,380,156
315
4,380,157
CLASS 65
1
99.2
4,380.462
4,380,463
CLASS 68
205 R 4.380,158
CLASS 69
12 4,380,159
CLASS 70
14 4,380,160
168 4,380,161
276 4,380,162
364 A 4,380,163
CLASS 71
88 4,380,464
90
96
100
21
355
4,380,465
4,380,466
4,380,467
4,380,468
CLASS 72
4,380.164
4,380,165
CLASS 73
4R 4,380.166
24 4,380,167
40.5 R 4,380,168
73 4,380.169
147 4.380,170
161 4,380.171
659 4,380,172
747 4.380.173
842 4,380.174
862.67 4,380,175
863.86 4,380,176
CLASS 74
475 4,380,177
SOI P 4,380,178
762 4,380,179
821 4,380,180
CLASS 75
38 4.380.469
122.7 4.380,470
CLASS 81
57.38 4,380.181
CLASS 83
140 4,380,182
244 4.380,183
CLASS 84
1.01 4,380,184
1.03 4,380.185
CLASS 86
20 D 4,380,186
CLASS 98
39 4,380,187
40 D 4,380,188
58 4.380,189
CLASS 99
345 4,380,190
404 4,380.191
441 4,380,192
452 4,380,193
CLASS 101
35 4,380.194
93.17 4,380 195
453 4,380,196
CLASS 102
228 4,380,197
CLASS 105
26 R 4,380.198
225 4,380,199
CLASS 106
155 4,380,474
238 4.380,475
CLASS 108
23 4,380.200
CLASS 109
17 4,380,201
CLASS 110
263 4,380,202
CLASS 112
158 A 4,380,204
158 E 4,380,203
304 4,380,205
CLASS 114
122 4,380,206
298 4,380,207
363 4.380.208
CLASS 118
253 4.380,209
4,380,210
718 4,380,211
720 4,380,212
CLASS 119
3 4,380,213
51 CF
4,380,214
CLASS 122
13 R 4,380.215
CLASS 123
90.65 4,380,216
146.5 A 4,380.217
179 H 4.380.218
198 F 4.380,219
226 4,380,220
343 4,380,221
365 4,380,222
383 4.380.223
602 4.380.224
613 4.380.225
CLASS 124
41 A 4,380.226
CLASS 125
11 PT 4,380.227
CLASS 126
4.380.228
4.380.229
76
418
CLASS 127
46.3 4.380.476
CLASS 128
49 4.380,230
57 4,380.231
201.11 4.380.232
204.21 4.380.233
346 4.380.238
633 4.380.240
693 . 4.380,237
336
CLASS 131
4,380,241
CLASS 134
7 4,380,477
38 4,380,478
CLASS 137
113 4,380,242
312
355.16
375
382
428
5962
599
877
4,380,243
4,380,244
4.380,245
4,380,246
4,380,247
4,380,248
4,380,249
4,380,250
4,380,251
CLASS 138
125 4,380,252
149 4,380.253
CLASS 139
435 4,380,254
CLASS 140
93.2 4,380,255
106 4.380,256
CLASS 141
1 4,380,257
CLASS 144
193 A 4.380,258
357 4.380.259
CLASS 148
11.5 P 4,380,479
12.4 4,380,480
187 4,380,481
CLASS 149
4,380,482
21
CLASS 156
169 4,380,483
251 4,380,484
254 4,380,485
359 4,380,486
568 4,380,487
643 4,380,488
4,380.489
662 4.380,490
CLASS 159
4 B 4,380,491
235
120
423
76
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
169
250
252
303
304
CLASS
51
CLASS
311
CLASS
163
CLASS
84R
CLASS
391
CLASS
2BC
84R
114 R
170 NC
160
4,380,260
164
4.380,261
4.380,262
165
4,380,263
166
4,380,264
4,380,265
4.380.266
4.380.267
4.380.268
169
4.380.269
172
Re.31.209
173
4.380.270
174
4.380.686
175
4.380.271
179
4.380.687
4.380,688
4,380,689
4.380.690
CLASS 180
132 4,380,272
4.380,273
308 4,380,274
CLASS 187
29 R 4.380,275
CLASS 188
79.5 K 4.380.276
329 4,380,277
CLASS 192
3.58 4,380,278
58 B 4,380,279
78 4,380,280
CLASS 198
304 4.380,281
318 4.380,282
456 4.380,283
494 4,380,284
533 4,380,285
605 4.380.286
648 4.380.287
820 4.380.288
CLASS 200
51 R 4.380,691
61.45 R 4.380.692
330 4.380.693
CLASS 204
|S9 Ih Bl ^.95.V3(W
67 4,380,492
105 M 4,380.493
CLASS 206
216 4.380,289
315 R 4,380,290
343 4,380,291
366 4,380,292
563 4.380,293
CLASS 209
319 4,380,494
540 4,380,294
558 4,380,295
704 4,380,296
CLASS 210
4,380,495
4.380,496
728
780
CLASS 211
60 S 4.380.297
189 4.380.298
CLASS 215
252 4.380.299
CLASS 219
121 LG
124.34
125.12
132
136
492
4.380.694
4.380.696
4.380.695
Re.31.216
4.380.697
4.380.698
1.5
73
235
276
306
89
142.9
148
450
501
CLASS 220
4.380.300
4,380.301
4.380.302
4.380.303
4.380.304
4.380.305
CLASS 222
4.380.306
4.380.307
4.380.308
4.380.309
4.380.310
CLASS 226
119 Re.31.210
190 4.380.311
CLASS 227
116 4.380.312
130 4.380.313
CLASS 229
33 4.380.314
69 4.380.315
CLASS 232
16 4.380.316
CLASS 235
449 Re3l.2n
492 4,380,699
CLASS 236
15 BF 4.380.317
CLASS 239
53313 4,380,318
540
697
700
4,380,319
4,380,320
4,380,321
CLASS 242
198 4.380,322
CLASS 244
102 R 4.380,323
CLASS 248
610 4.380.324
CLASS 250
202 4,380.700
266 4,380,701
3272 4,380.702
396 ML 4.380.703
CLASS 251
14 4,380.325
CLASS 252
47.5
486
174 11
182
18624
314
356
359 R
398
429 B
431 C
453
466 PT
4,380.497
4.380,498
4.380.499
4.380,500
4.380,502
4.380.501
4.380.503
4,380,504
4.380,505
4,380,506
4,380,507
4,380,508
4,380,509
4,380,510
CLASS 254
131 4.380,326
CLASS 256
24 4,380.327
CLASS 260
104 4,380,513
112 B 4,380,511
245.2 R 4,380,512
465 H 4,380,514
936 4.380,515
CLASS 261
23 A 4,380,516
142
4,380,517
CLASS 264
13 4,380,518
26
403
49
175
257
263
521
537
4,380,519
4,380,520
4,380,521
4,380.522
4,380,523
4,380,524
4,380,525
4,380,526
CLASS 266
177 4,380,328
CLASS 269
41 4,380,329
CLASS 270
31 4,380,330
CLASS ri
11 4.380.331
224
272
4.380.332
4.380.333
CLASS 773
1 E 4.380.334
121 A 4.380.335
PI 31
PI 3:
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
157 R
162 D
245
384
416
4.380.336
4.380,337
4.380.338
4.380.339
4,380,340
CLASS 277
56 4,380.341
188 A 4,380.342
CLASS 280
242 WC 4,380.343
402 4,380.344
605 4,380.345
668 Re.31.212
736 4,380,346
CLASS 285
45 4.380.347
236 4.380,348
417 4,380.349
CLASS 296
98 4.380.350
217 4.380.351
CLASS 297
61 4,380,352
CLASS 299
12 4,380.353
18 4.380,354
CLASS 307
116 4,380,704
247 R 4.380,705
297 4.380.706
♦43 4.380.707
457 4.380.708
473 4.380.709
475 4.380.710
491 4.380.71 1
CLASS 310
52 4.380.712
214 4.380.713
CLASS 313
4.380.714
549
CLASS 315
3 4,380,715
8 4,380,716
3951 4,380,717
93 4.380,718
101 4,380.719
11191 4.380,720
362 4,380,721
CLASS 318
4.380.723
4.380,724
4,380,722
CLASS 320
4,380,725
4,380.726
314
353
696
35
48
CLASS 322
28 4,380.727
CLASS 323
281 4.380,728
285 4.380,729
300 4.380.730
CLASS 324
51 4.380.731
77 D 4,380.732
166 4,380,733
225 4.380.734
244 4.380.735
CLASS 328
4.380.736
73
CLASS 330
134 4.380.737
151 4.380,738
254 4,380,739
288 4,380.740
308 4.380.741
CLASS 331
1 A 4.380.742
4,380.743
107 R 4.380,744
176 4.380,745
CLASS 332
9 R 4.380.746
CLASS 333
202 4.380,747
ISl
215
308
CLASS 335
4.380.748
CLASS 338
4.380.749
4.380.750
CLASS 339
17 CF 4.380.357
4.380.360
17 D 4.380,358
17 F 4,380,359
91 R 4,380,361
112 L 4.380,362
CLASS 340
52 D
52 E
66
73
347 AD
347 CC
396
407
628
825.5
825.63
870.16
870.37
4,380,752
4.380,751
4,380,753
4,380,754
4,380,756
4,380,757
4,380,758
4,380.759
4.380.760
4.380.761
4.380.762
4.380.763
4,380.764
CLASS 343
5 SW
16 M
745
4.380.766
4.380,765
4,380,767
CLASS 34«
74.5 4,380,768
135.1 4,380,769
140 R 4.380.770
4.380.771
4.380.772
CLASS 350
1.3
96 14
96.18
96.21
96 34
117
307
336
346
356
423
426
427
429
106
66
173
275
4.380.363
4.380.364
4.380,365
4.380,366
4,380,367
4,380,368
4,380,369
4,380.370
4.380.371
4.380.372
4.380.373
4.380.374
4.380.375
4.380.376
4.380.377
4.380.378
CLASS 351
4.380.379
CLASS 353
4.380,380
CLASS 354
4,380,381
4,380,382
CLASS 355
3 CH 4,380,384
3 R 4,380,383
4,380,386
4,380,387
3 TR 4,380,385
15 4,380,388
50 4,380.389
71 4.380.390
CLASS 356
5 4.380.391
243 4,380,392
328 4,380,393
358 4,380,394
401 4,380,395
432 4,380,396
CLASS 357
23 4,380,773
34 4,380,774
67 4,380,775
CLASS 358
102 4,380,776
178 4.380,777
194.1 4,380.778
330 4,380,779
CLASS 360
97 4.380.780
4.380,781
99 4.380,782
126
96
228
4.380,783
4,380,784
CLASS 361
4,380,785
4,380,786
CLASS 362
16 4,380,787
62 4,380.788
65 4.380,789
231 4,380,790
4,380,791
250 4,380,792
267 4,380,793
296 4,380,794
CLASS 363
131 4,380,795
CLASS 364
171 4,380,796
200 4,380,797
4,380,798
426 4,380,799
431.08 4,380,800
565 4,380,801
900 4,380,802
CLASS 365
183 4,380,803
184 4,380,804
201 4,380,805
CLASS 366
77 4,380,397
261 4,380,398
289 4.380,399
CLASS 367
27 4.380.806
97 4,380,807
153 4,380,808
CLASS 369
6 4,380,809
CLASS 370
15 4,380,810
CLASS 371
10 4,380,811
38 4.380,812
52 4.380,813
CLASS 374
37 4,380,400
CLASS 375
4,380,814
4,380.815
4.380,816
CLASS 376
4,380,527
40
80
94
245
CLASS 378
87 4,380,817
099 4,380,818
114 4,380,819
153 4,380,820
CLASS 382
68 4,380,755
CLASS 384
123 4,380,355
133 4,380,356
438 4,380,401
CLASS 401
74 4,380,402
213 4,380,403
CLASS 403
79 4,380.404
318 4,380,405
CLASS 405
206 4,380,406
259 4,380,407
263 4,380,408
273 4,380,409
299 4,380,410
CLASS 407
27 4,380.411
CLASS 409
314 4,380,412
CLASS 411
161 4,380,413
187 4.380,414
CLASS 414
733 Bl 3,902,606
537 4,380,415
CLASS 415
170 A 4,380,416
CLASS 416
108 4,380,417
CLASS 417
87 4,380,418
334 4,380,419
CLASS 418
61 B 4,380.420
CLASS 419
4,380.472
4.380.471
4.380.473
CLASS 420
4.380.528
9
II
41
505
CLASS 422
220 4.380.529
300 4.380,530
CLASS 423
4,380.531
4,380,532
4,380,533
316
469
473
150
38
177
180
200
233
246
248.55
258
263
269
270
273 R
317
324
CLASS 424
Bl 4.271,149
4,380,534
4,380,535
4,380,536
4,380,537
4,380,538
4,380,539
4,380,540
4,380,541
4,380,542
4,380,543
4,380,544
4,380,545
4,380,546
4,380,547
4,380,548
4,380,549
4,380,550
CLASS 425
78 4,380,421
146 4,380.422
289 4.380.423
331 4,380,424
458 4,380,425
566 4,380,426
590 4,380,427
CLASS 426
28
52
250
545
549
6
38
53.1
80
239
421
8
40
167
182
192
213
276
283
296
415
462
592
595
686
4,380,551
4,380,552
4,380,553
4,380,554
4,380,555
CLASS 427
4,380,556
4,380,557
4,380,558
4.380,559
4,380,560
4,380,561
CLASS 428
4,380,562
4,380,563
4,380,564
4,380,565
4,380.566
4,380,567
4.380.568
4,380,569
4,380,570
4,380,571
Re.31,213
4,380.572
4,380.573
4,380,574
CLASS 429
13 4,380,575
27 4,380.576
175 4.380,577
206 4,380,578
CLASS 430
126
4,380.579
CLASS 431
4 Re.31.215
88
IIS
347
29
112
33
80
143
164
165
179
319
327
343
181
21
144
4,380,428
4,380.429
4.380,430
CLASS 432
4.380.431
CLASS 433
9 4.380.432
87 4.380.433
177 4.380.434
180 4.380,435
182 4.380.436
CLASS 434
18 4.380,437
157 4,380,438
268 4,380,439
CLASS 435
7 4,380,580
80 4,380,581
239 4,380.582
242 4,380,583
313 4,380,584
CLASS 436
66 4,380,585
121 4,380,586
128 4,380,587
CLASS 441
30 4,380,440
4,380,441
CLASS 455
4,380,821
4.380,822
4,380,823
4,380,824
4,380.825
4,380,826
4,380.827
4.380.828
4.380,829
4,380,830
4,380,831
4,380,832
CLASS 464
93 4,380,442
4,380,443
CLASS 474
4,380,444
4.380,445
CLASS 493
1 1 4,380.446
102 4.380.447
410 4,380,448
424 4,380,449
CLASS 501
37 4,380,588
CLASS 518
714 4,380,589
CLASS 521
33 4,380,590
115 4,380,591
151 4,380,592
163 4,380,593
182 4,380,594
CLASS 524
5 4,380,595
86 4,380,596
109 4,380,597
163 4,380,598
411 Re.31,214
458 4,380,600
555 4.380,601
598 4.380.602
4,380.603
873 4,380,604
CLASS 525
14 4.380,605
196 4.380,606
232 4.380.607
247 4.380.608
348 4.380,609
370 4,380,599
400 4,380.610
418 4,380.611
439 4.380,612
440 4.380.613
CLASS 526
62 4,380.614
65 4,380.615
101 4.380,616
161
206
259
4,380,617
4,380.618
4.380,619
CLASS 528
232 4,380,620
287 4,380,621
288 4,380,622
335 4,380,623
CLASS 536
5 4,380,624
13.9 4,380.625
103 4.380.626
CLASS 542
423 4,380,627
429 4,380.628
455 4.380.629
CLASS 544
30 4.380.630
275 4,380.631
279 4,380.632
316 4,380,633
CLASS 546
89 4,380,634
202 4,380.635
326 4.380.636
CLASS 548
112 4.380.637
135 4.380,638
4,380,639
163 4,380,640
233 4,380.641
255 4.380.642
260 4,380,643
321 4,380,644
430 4,380.645
502 4,380,646
519 4,380,647
259
285
326
361
366
462
472
473
509
525
532
536
546
82
195
391
402
407
328
466
CLASS 549
4,380,648
4,380,649
4.380,650
4,380,651
4,380,652
4,380.653
4,380,654
4,380,655
4,380,656
4,380,657
4,380,658
4,380,659
CLASS 556
422 4,380,660
CLASS 560
62 4,380.661
CLASS 562
486 4.380.662
4,380,663
4,380,664
CLASS 564
61 4,380,665
4,380,666
4,380,667
4.380,668
4,380,669
4,380,670
CLASS 568
48 4,380,671
310 4,380,672
361 4.380.673
417 4.380,674
448 4,380,675
730 4,380.676
788 4,380,677
863 4,380,678
4.380,679
4,380,680
902 4,380.681
CLASS 570
219 4.380.682
CLASS 585
268 4.380.683
4,380.684
4.380.685
CLASS 604
28 4,380.239
151 4,380.236
180 4,380.234
251 4,380,235
386 4,380,450
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
PI 33
D2—
D3-
D6—
D7—
190
273
36
71
9
10
11
49
114
130
193
53
268.624
268,625
268,626
268,627
268,628
268,629
268,630
268,631
268,632
268,633
268,634
268,635
268,636
268,637
268,638
D8-
D9—
DIO—
Dll—
143
08
71
337
343
341
347
389
416
450
57
102
268,639
268,640
268,641
268,642
268,643
268.644
268.645
268.646
268.647
268.648
268.649
268.650
268,651
268,652
D12-
D13-
121
134
162
91
92
110
129
140
145
187
23
268,653
268,654
268,655
268,656
268,657
268,658
268,659
268,660
268,661
268,662
268,663
268,664
268,665
268,666
DM
D15-
D16-
35
38
1
11
13
34
60
68
78
103
27
76
12
268,667
268,668
268,669
268,670
268,671
268,672
268,673
268,674
268,675
268.676
268.677
268.678
268,679
268,680
D17-
D19-
D21-
D22-
17
32
102
20
64
91
34
48
109
148
217
244
1
268,681
268,682
268,683
268,684
268.685
268.686
268.687
268.688
268.689
268.690
268.692
268.691
268.693
268.694
D24
D25-
D26—
D30—
D32-
D92—
99
34
36
52
64
22
55
118
6
01
26
25
268,695
268,6%
268,697
268.698
268,699
268,700
268,701
268.702
268,703
268.704
268,705
268,706
268,707
268.708
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
p-
11
5,040
50
5,041
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. States. Territories and Armed Forces, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
Alabama
Alaska
American Samoa
Arizona
1
2
3
4
Arkansas 5
California 6
Canal Zone 7
Colorado 8
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 11
Florida 12
Georgia 13
Guam 14
Hawaii 15
Idaho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana ig
Iowa 19
Kansas 20
(First number in listing denotes location
as to inventor name, location, etc.)
Kentucky 2I
Louisiana 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota 27
Mississippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York 35
North Carolina 37
North Dakota 38
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 45
South Dakota 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 48
Utah 49
Vermont 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
West Virginia 54
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army 58
U.S. Navy 59
according to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the Official Gazette to obtain deUils
PATENTS
04
05
06
4,380,188
4,380,437
4,380,491
4,380,448
4,380,706
4,380,763
4,380,110
4,380,132
4,380,298
4,380,108
4,380,113
4,380,133
4.380,157
4,380,159
4,380,190
4,380,191
4.380,194
4,380,197
4.380.229
4.380,231
4.380.235
4.380,238
4.380.243
4,380,265
4,380,290
4,380,294
4,380,307
4.380,318
4,380,319
4,380,326
4,380.329
4.380,334
4.380,335
4,380.363
4,380,373
4,380.380
4.380,412
4,380.432
4,380,439
4.380.441
4.380.456
4.380.467
4,380.468
4.380,478
4,380,479
4.380,485
4.380.488
4,380,366
4.380.592
4,380.613
4.380.634
4,380.6«7
4,380,692
08
09
10
II
12
13
4,380,697
4,380,704
4,380,708
4.380,721
4,380,753
4,380,761
4,380,768
4,380,787
4,380,803
4,380,806
4,380,816
4,380,820
4,380,321
4,380,369
4,380,470
4,380,647
4,380,187
4,380,209
4,380,210
4,380.293
4,380,402
4,380,501
4,380,513
4,380,519
4,380,526
4,380,533
4,380,542
4,380,696
4,380,790
4,380,257
4.380.539
4.380,586
4,380,602
4,380,603
4,380,615
4.380.618
4,380.339
4.380.090
4,380,117
4.380,200
4,380.227
4,380,232
4.380,314
4,380,327
4.380.404
4.380.419
4,380,737
4,380.129
4,380,130
4.380.214
4.380.230
4,380,247
4.380,776
15
16
17
18
4,380,120
4,380,093
Re.3 1,209
4,380,092
4.380,109
4,380,135
4,380,138
4,380,166
4,380,198
4,380,236
4,380,246
4,380,278
4,380,304
4,380,305
4,380,308
4,380,310
4,380,315
4,380,316
4,380,332
4,380,340
4,380,353
4,380.394
4.380.413
4,380,422
4,380.497
4,380.511
4.380,530
4,380.554
4.380.648
4.380,677
4,380,679
4.380,680
4,380.722
4.380.738
4,380,810
4,380,822
4.380.827
4,380.828
Re.31.215
4,380,126
4,380,155
4,380,173
4.380.287
4,380.301
4.380.498
4.380.499
4.380.580
4.380.585
4,380,612
4,380,635
4,380,641
4,380,698
4,380,700
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
4,380,728
4,380,789
4,380,249
4,380,258
4,380,185
4,380,244
4,380,354
4.380,407
4,380,245
4,380,280
4,380,281
4,380,458
4,380,521
4,380,228
4,380,336
4,380.429
4,380,094
4,380.103
4,380,269
4.380.296
4,380,482
4.380.582
4.380.802
Re.3I,2l4
4.380.112
4.380.153
4,380.237
4.380.262
4,380,343
4,380,344
4,380,348
4,380,431
4,380,577
4,380,587
4,380,596
4,380,723
4,380,764
4,380,807
4.380.812
4.380,829
Re.31,2I2
4,380,111
4,380,137
4,380,149
4,380,163
4,380.178
4.380,183
4.380,192
4.380,219
4,380,276
4,380,292
4.380,351
4,380.359
27
28
29
31
33
34
4,380,418
4,380,428
4,380,444
4,380,447
4,380,455
4,380,510
4,380,537
4,380,548
4,380,553
4,380,560
4,380,563
4,380,589
4,380,636
4,380,649
4,380,651
4,380,652
4,380,718
4,380,800
4,380,208
4,380,312
4,380,374
4,380,464
4,380,543
4,380,565
4,380,338
4.380.524
4,380.151
4.380.169
4,380,252
4.380,270
4.380,289
4,380,424
4,380,465
4,380.61 1
4.380.650
4.380.793
4,380.226
4.380,234
4.380.134
4,380,256
4,380,364
4,380,391
4,380,400
4,380,425
4,380,483
4.380,490
4,380,500
4,380,518
4,380,529
4,380.571
4,380,595
4,380,598
4.380.637
35
36
37
4,380,645
4,380,653
4.380.658
4,380,660
4.380.665
4,380,669
4,380,674
4,380,678
4,380,685
4,380,740
4,380,741
4,380,750
4,380,773
4.380,786
4,380,139
4,380,264
4,380,267
4,380,119
4,380,123
4.380,152
4.380.162
4.380,172
4.380.180
4.380,224
4,380,263
4,380,352
4,380,389
4,380,409
4,380,433
4,380,434
4,380,435
4,380,471
4,380,512
4,380,531
4,380,572
4,380,578
4,380,591
4,380,605
4,380,638
4,380,639
4,380,666
4,380,710
4,380,716
4,380,749
4.380,752
4,380,769
4.380.772
4,380,794
4,380,813
4,380,220
4,380,240
4,380,4«0
4,380,362
PI 34
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
PI 35
4.380,730
4,380.804
4,380.362
4.380,201
4,380,297
4.380.805
39 :
4.380,175
4,380.819
4,380.401
4.380,254
4,380,325
4.380.815
4.380.202
40 : 4,380.317
4,380.415
4,380,337
4,380.342
4.380.831
4.380.215
4,380.584
4,380,459
4.380.379
4.380.347
49 4.380,346
4.380.303
4,380.610
4,380.463
45 : 4.380.095
4.380.357
51 Re 31,210
4.380.320
4,380.659
4.380,474
4,380,140
4 380 371
Re.31.211
4,380.206
4,380.774
4.380,795
4,380.414
4,380.688
4,380,496
4,380.144
4.380.406
4.380.508
4.380.569
4,380.446
42 : Re.31,213
4,380,520
4.380,494
4,380,484
4,380,097
4,380,535
47 : 4,380,251
4.380,495
4,380,115
4.380.549
4,380,330
4.380.556
4,380,118
4,380.590
4,380,453
4.380.616
53 4,380,259
4,380,564
4,380,146
4,380,601
4,380,633
4.380.657
4.380.295
4,380,606
4,380,154
4,380,654
4,380,742
4.380.684
4,380,745
4,380,609
4,380,167
4,380,724
48 : Re.31,216
4.380.695
54 : 4,380,131
4.380.617
4.380,171
4,380,734
4,380,091
4.380.701
55 4,380,107
4,380.619
4,380,207
4,380,746
4,380,105
4,380,707
4.380.216
4.380.623
4,380,268
4,380,757
4,380,114
4,380,709
4.380.217
4,380,656
4,380,282
4,380,759
4,380,127
4.380.711
4,380.291
4,380.672
4,380,288
4,380.760
4,380,156
4.380.736
4,380.396
4.380,682
4,380.300
43 ; 4,380.299
4,380,242
4.380.767
4,380,450
4,380,683
4,380,360
44 : 4,380,145
4,380,266
4.380.788
4,380,570
4,380,727
4.380,361
4.380.160
4,380,271
4.380.798
4,380,7%
DESIGN PATENTS
06 :
268,626
268,697
268,631
26 :
268.639
268.653
40
268 645
268,636
268,638
268,698
268,702
268,675
268.684
27 :
268,707
268,643
36 :
268.634
41 ;
268.669
268,640
09 :
268,668
268.695
268,672
268.659
268,625
^
268,641
268,683
20 :
268.678
268.679
268.664
268,647
268,650
12 :
268,633
268,706
33 :
268.692
268.665
268,654
268,651
268,661
21 :
268.644
34 :
268.627
37 :
268.632
48
268,624
268,688
268.693
22 :
268.690
268.628
268.646
268,666
268,689
13 :
268,674
24 :
268,642
268.629
39 :
268.635
268,667
268,696
17 :
268,630
25 :
268.687
268.649
268.704
268.705
06
5.040
25
PLANT PATENTS
5.041
US GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE O^ 1983
Si
G<
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
NAME— FIRST. LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
STATE
ZIP CODE
(or) COUNTRY
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20A02
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
Domestic; @ %
Foreign.
NAME— FIRST, LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
J
STATE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
(or) COUNTRY
ZIP CODE
Q Rtmittanc* Enclosed (Maka
checKs payabia to Suparin-
tandant of Documants)
Q Charge to my Oapotit
Account No.
MAIL ORDER FORM TO;
Superintandant of Documantt
Govarnmant Printing Office
Washington. DC. 20402
!%■
^
% -J
vi-jv j^:.i^,3C. -,^s^^^
'•>'■" c
«.* --. ^' ?.^'
N;j:rrh"» •♦
OFHCIAL
j<*
IIWTEO STATES PA'^'ll^T AND TRAfihMARK W
■ ''ism^ym^m:?^^:^-^^:.-.:
•.€W3.1
Ki'^i
'^>^.::^r--.v-r
.. . . ^ :--■.■-- .'?;. .
v"-;^^^^/:.
ii«^
^.<i5r^ -■^^*': r
V*
: .'; • A.
■ !^> • - ' A. •
.Jt'
■. y .-;
f;^^
^ ■ ^'
s-#^i
.*■
■^•Ax/
'^.''
■ ■■->
^^■
• ^. ' ■
^k
^-
:'^:
- ■
,. . -j; ,^
M
i-v
*
- •\ .
^t::^
■*•.
• ■>?^*'
Cmm
Ac
.% « "r"' *^< "■'■>»■
■.■*\* ^fel&-^ * "^ ?Il'«
if-
•■••T,^
,1..,"* a''
■^
■•^
^^^
■■*4:^l<^
IW^^
fV*-,!^A-,;
.;-^i ■■'
t!S£<f
'^.' <•-'-■-
^ ' -■' ■, »■
^#^pi^^E6KLY BY AUTHORITY O^ €0
mMM
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
April 26, 1983 Volume 1029 Number 4
CONTENTS
Patent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information
Reissue Applications Filed
Request for Reexamination Filed
Unlawful Removal of Security Labels
PTO Status
Patent Certificates of Correction
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
Condition of Patent Applications
Reexaminations
Reissue Patents Granted (31,217)
Plant Patents Granted (5.042)
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,380.833)
Chemical (4,381,185)
Electrical (4,381,420)
Design Patents Granted (268.709)
Index of Patentees
Indices of Reissue. Reexamination. Desien and Plant I'alentees . .
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations)
Designs and Plants
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues)
Designs and Plants
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form
Page
()(.
IV)
()(i
1 v>
()(.
1 v>
(Hi
\M^
()(i
^^s
()(>
1 >')
(Ki
I4(»
(k;
141
()(i
14^
797
SOI
K()3
y2.s
VK9
KM^
Hack
^1
\2
a 120
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 20402. to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1 00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, $8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, DC, 20231.
Printing authorized by Section ll(a)3 of Title 35, US Code PTO
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13. 1982. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28. 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52.
Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased
as of Oct. 1. 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of
Jan. 1, 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22,
1983. The notice regarding the change in international
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27, on 28 Dec. 1982. The current
schedule of fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee . . .^ $ 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
■ All cases 670.00
International Fees
Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00
Basic Supplemental Fee (for each
page over 30) 5.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 65.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPLICATIONS HLED
Notice under 37 CFR I.I 1(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
4,072,146, Re. S.N. 444,710, Filed Jan. 19. 1983, CI.
128/674, VENOUS CATHETER DEVICE, Randolph
M. Howes, Owner of Record: Gerald W. Berg, Steven-
son, Md., Attorney or Agent: Joseph R. Slotnik, Ex.
Gp.: 335
4,164,408, Re. S.N. 469,5^5. Filed Feb. 23, 1983. CI.
71/98, SALTS OF SUBSTITUTED PHENOXY-
BENZOIC ACIDS, COMPOSITIONS OF THE
SAME AND HERBICIDAL USE THEREOF, Robert
J. Theissen, Owner of Record: Rhone-Poulenc
Agrochemie. Lyo, France, Attorney or Agent: Alfred P
Ewert, Ex. Gp.: 121
4,193,993, Re. S.N. 357,225, Filed Mar. 11, 1982. CI
424/141. COMPOSITION CONTAINING PRESER-
VATIVE METALS AND THEIR USE FOR THE
PRESERVATION OF WOOD AND LIKE MATERI-
ALS AND AS FUNGICIDES, Edward A. Hilditch,
Owner of Record: Cuprinol Ltd.. Somerset, England. At-
torney or Agent: James F. Woods, Ex. Gp.: 125
4^213,189, Re. S.N. 398,719. Filed July 15, 1982, CI.
364/900, REACTIVE COMPUTER SYSTEM ADAP-
TIVE TO A PLURALITY OF PROGRAM INPUTS,
1029 OG— 136
David J. Mueller, et al.. Owner of Record: Admiral
Corp.. Schaumburg, III.. Attorney or Agent: Daniel R
McGlynn, et al., Ex. Gp.: 237
4,216,402, Re. S.N. 308.979, Filed Feb. 18. 1982. CI
310/320, SEALED PIEZOELECTRIC RESONATOR
WITH INTEGRAL MOUNTING FRAME. Jean
Engdahl. Owner of Record: Societe Suisse pour
rinduslrie Horlogere Management Services, S.A., Bienne
Switzerland. Attorney or Agent: B. Franklin Griffith, Jr'
et al., Ex. Gp.: 212
4,232,661, Re. S.N. 440,181, Filed Nov. 8, 1982, CI
128/33, BODY MASSAGE APPARATUS, Earl A.
Christensen. Owner of Record: Andrew Electronics
Northern Calif.. Inc.. San Carlos. Calif. Attorney or
Agent: C. Michael Zimmerman, et al., Ex. Gp.: 335
4,256,898, Re. S.N. 470.743. Filed Feb. 28. 1983. CI
548/240. A(SUBSTITUTED) AMINO-3-SUBSTI-
TUTED-2-ISOXAZOLINE-5-ACETIC ACIDS (ES-
TERS). Robert C. Kelly, et al.. Owner of Record: Up-
john Co.. Kalamazoo. Mich., Attorney or Agent: Sidney
B. Williams, Ex. Gp.: 122
4,317,581, Re. S.N. 465,481, Filed Feb. 10, 1983, CI
280/644, BABY CARRIAGE, Kenzou Kassai, Owner
of Record: Kassai Kabushikikaisha. Osaka, Japan, Attor-
ney or Agent: W. G. Fasse, Ex. Gp.: 316
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION WILED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(a)(5) and 1.525(b)).
4,083,229, Reexam. No. 90/000,348, Requested: Mar
23, 1983, CI. 73/40.5A, METHOD AND APPARA-
TUS FOR DETECTING AND LOCATING FLUID
LEAKS, Allen R. Anway, Owner of Record: Flaunt &
Anderson Co., Inc., West Duluth, Minn., Attorney or
Agent: Strauch, Nolan, et al., Ex. Gp.: 244, Requester-
Stanley B. Green, et al., Washington, D.C.
4,305,296, Reexam. No. 90/000,350, Requested: Mar.
24, 1983. CI. 73/626, ULTRASONIC IMAGING
METHOD AND APPARATUS WITH ELECTRON-
IC BEAM FOCUSING AND SCANNING, Philip S.
Green, et al., Owner of Record: Requester, Attorney or
Agent: Victor R. Beckman, Ex. Gp.: 244, Requester-
SRI International, Menio Park, Calif.
Unlawful Removal of Labels
We have found a large number of security labels, torn
from Search Room patent copies, in stack areas of the
Public Search Room. We remind persons removing se-
curity labels or otherwise mutilating Search Room pa-
tent copies, or removing Search Room patent copies
from the Search Room without authorization, that such
acts are criminal offenses punishable by fine, imprison-
ment or both.
You should be aware that engaging in such acts vio-
lates the prohibition against "the willful destruction of
or damage to property; the theft of property." 41 Code
April 26, 1983
US PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1029 OG— 137
of Federal Regulations §101-20.303. Violations are pun-
ishable by "a fine of not more than $50 or imprisonment
of not more than 30 days, or both." 41 Code of Federal
Regulations §101-20.315.
You should also be aware that engaging in such acts
subjects you to punishment under the following criminal
provision in Title 18 U.S. Code, §2071;
(a) Whoever willfully and unlawfully conceals,
removes, mutilates, obliterates, or destroys, or at-
tempts to do so, or, with intent to do so takes and
carries away any record, proceeding, map, book,
paper, document or other thing • • • shall be
fined not more than $2,000 or imprisoned not
more than three years, or both.
(b) Whoever, having custody of any such
record, proceeding, map, book, document, paper,
or other thing, willfully and unlawfully conceals,
removes, mutilates, obliterates, falsifies, or de-
stroys the same, shall be fined not more than
$2,000 or imprisoned not more than three years,
or both; and shall forfeit his office and be
disqualified from holding any office under the
United States.
UNLESS THE REMOVAL OF SECURITY LA-
BELS FROM SEARCH ROOM PATENT COPIES
CEASES, THE OFFICE WILL TAKE APPROPRI-
ATE ACTION, SUCH AS EXERCISING ITS AU-
THORITY UNDER 41 CODE OF FEDERAL REG-
ULATIONS §101-20.301 TO INSPECT PACKAGES,
BRIEFCASES AND OTHER CONTAINERS
BROUGHT INTO, WHILE ON, OR BEING RE-
MOVED FROM THE SEARCH ROOM
Mar. 28, 1983.
GERALD J MOSSINGHOFF,
Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
1029 OG— 138
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
Status of PTO Services
The following is an update of the status of PTO services as of Feb. 28, 1983:
Service Item
Filing Receipts:
Patents
Trademarks
Patent Copies:
Window Coupons
Mail Coupons*
Letter Orders*
Certified Copies:
Trademark Registrations
Applications-As-Filed
File-Wrapper/Contents
Walk-up Certification
Trademark Search Library:
FY 1983
Performance Goal
(Calendar Days)
22
30
29
34
30
20
N/A
1
Actual
32
87
81% within 5 days
100% within 22 days
100% within 22 days
10
92% within 10 days
94% within 20 days
99% within 1 day
Comment
Reduced by 34 days
in the past month.
Encountering problems
with photocopying
exhaust system.
Fihng Drawings
Filing Reg. Certificates
21
3
35
9
Reduced by 84 days in
the past month.
Reduced by 1 day in
the past month.
Assignments:
Patents
25
32
Reduced by 4 days
since last month.
Trademarks
25
19
Reduced by 18 days
since last month.
Patent Official Gazette:
In Bookstore
Mailed
Issue Date
Issue Date
On Schedule
Avg. 1 day late
Patent Grants Mailed
Issue Date
On schedule
Patent Copies Available
Issue Date
99%
99% available by day
after Issue Date.
Trademark Official Gazette:
In Bookstore
Mailed
Issue Date
Issue Date
On Schedule
Avg. 2 days late
Trademark Regs. Mailed
Issue Date
1 day late
*Goal now includes mail processing and delivery time.
IMPROVEMENTS TO SERVICES
• Trademark Assignment Processing — We have re-
duced the time to process trademark assignment doc-
uments from a high of 113 calendar days in Jan. to
19 calendar days. This is the lowest processing time
for recording trademark assignments in the past de-
cade.
• Photocopy Services — TS Infosystems, Inc., the con-
tractor for providing photocopying maintenance ser-
vices, replaced twenty-three copiers with new Pitney
Bowes model 9600 copiers in the Patent and Trade-
mark Search Rooms, the Board of Patent Interfer-
ences, and the Trademark Trial and Appeal Board.
As a result, the quality of copies has improved signif-
icantly.
• Record Room — The Record Room extended its
closing time from 5:00 p.m. to 8:00 p.m., coinciding
with the closing of the Patent Public Search Room.
This allows users of the Search Room to deposit file
requests, return and pick up files, or obtain other
Record services any time they are in the Search
Room.
Apr. 1, 1983.
THERESA A. BRELSFORD,
Assistant Commissioner
for Administration.
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of Apr. 26, 1983
D. 267,344
4,214,733
4,215,192
4,225,522
4,243,844
4,252,878
4,253,513
4,269,921
4,273,966
4,304,073
4,307,101
4,316,737
4,317,347
4,324,584
4,324,605
4,328,863
4,331,555
4,332,345
4,332,850
4,337,785
4,338,339
4,338,428
4,339,264
4,339,493
4,339,584
4,340,581
4,341,340
4,343,811
4,344,676
4,344,796
4,344,950
4,345,315
4,346,675
4,347,855
4,348,033
4,348,138
4,348,709
4,350,327
4,351,473
4,351,896
4,352,727
4,353,744
4,354,118
4,354,289
4,355,130
4,355,207
4,356,534
4,356,684
4,356,810
4,357,263
4,357,538
4,357,604
4,358,964
4,359,061
4,359,096
4,361.520
4,361,556
4,361,993
4,362,074
4,362,152
4,362,950
4,362,985
4,363,040
4,363,310
4,363,595
4,363,775
4,363,833
4,363,949
4,364,396
4,364,532
4,364,581
4,364,612
4,365,129
4,365,532
4,365,840
4,365,915
4,365.925
4,366,123
4,366,126
4,366,209
4,366,313
4,366,552
4,366,866
4,367,125
4,367,437
4,367,886
4,368,482
4,368,727
4,368,770
4,368.816
4,370,243
4,370,406
4,370,423
4,370,437
4,370,723
4,370,877
4,371,111
4,371,921
4,371,950
4,372,027
4,372.386
4,372,503
4,372,581
4,372.795
4,372,871
4,373,138
4.373,237
4,373,458
4.373,792
4,374,000
4,374,021
4,374,154
4,374,274
4,374,452
4,374,626
4.374,752
4,374,864
4.375,110
4,375,609
4,376,303
1029 OG— 139
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
,oPf J'*"*"^' ''"'^'^ ^^'■^'"' ^«s'8"«ted as patent deposi- table following, the collections are organized in patent
tory hbranes, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and number sequence B-ni^cu in paieni
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail-
^nVfro^ n°i '"°"f ^Y'" '^'^'^ ^'^'V '° ^'^'^'^' ""S" ^^"^ '" micrSfilm. in bound volumes of pa^?^co^ies or
l^r/rSf rill ""^^ r^l^"' '"°"'^' °' y/^" •" ^'"^ •" ^^""^ combination of both. Facilities for making paper
hbranes to all or most of the patents issued since 1870. copies from either microfilm in reader-printers or from
or earlier, m other ibranes. the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are general
These patent collections are open to public use and ly provided for a fee
fhf ^ K^^^''^*^"^''fuP ""'"'y libraries, in addition, offers Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections
Ore publications of the patent classification system (e.g. among the patent depository libraries and in the r hours
The Manual of Classification Index to the U.S. Patent of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the
viH^f ;^fhn"' ,^'f f '^^'.•°" Definitions, etc.) and pro- patents at a particular library is advised to Ion acfthat
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the library, in advance, about its collection and hours so a
public m gaining effective access to information con- to avert possible inconvenience
tamed in patents. With one exception, as noted in the
State Name 0/ Library Telephone Contact
Alabama Birmingham Public Library (205) 254-2555
Arizona Tempe: Science Library. Arizona State University ...!'!!! (602) 965-7607
California ^os Angeles Public Library ; ; 213 626-7??5 Ext. 273
Sacramento: California State Library (916) 322-4572
^ . Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* .... r408> 718.SS8n
Colorado Denver Public Library (Tr.i 57? ^T„
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware (302) 738 2238
Georgia Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of
Illinois r J^''*'"d°!,^ t-u (^) 894-4508
"""O'S Chicago Public Library dll) 2M iSftS
Louisiana Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State
University /5fvi\ loo 1*70
Massachusetts Boston Public Library ^nJ ^^r^inX p,. -,^c
Michigan Detroit Public Library \f^]] g^fl^
Mmnesota Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center ... (612) 372-6552
Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library :,::::: ;8,6! 363-4600
St. Louis Public Library (3,4) 241-2288 Ext. 214,
Nebraska Lincoln: University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Engineering Library . . (402)472-3411
New Hampshire Durham: University of New Hampshire Library . . (603) 862-1777
New Jersey Newark Public Library . ^ 5oi 73^ 78 U
New York Albany: New York State Library ....;;;;;.' Jsig) 47t5i25
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (716) 856-7525 Ext. 267
XI wu /- , « .^ . '■'' ^"^'"^ Library (The Research Libraries) (212) 930-0850
North Carolina Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library, N.C. State University (919) 737-3280
""'° Cincinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of (513) 369-6936
Cleveland Public Library (2i6) 623-2870
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries (614) 422-6286
^, , . Toledo/Lucas County Public Library (419) 255-7055 Fxt 21?
Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library .... (405 624-6546
Pennsylvania Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library (215) 448-1321**
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh (412) 622-3138
D. . , , J Umversity Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University . . (814) 865-4861
Rhode Island Providence Public Library (40 n 521-7722 Ext 226
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina (803) 792-2372
Tennessee Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
T^„, r^9f"^n u,- ■ I u (901) 528-2957
Texas Dallas Public Library (2i4) 749.4176
^ Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University (713) 527-8101 Ext 2587
Washington Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington (206) 543-0740
Wisconsin Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library. University of
Wisconsin . ^ (6O8) 262-6845
Milwaukee Public Library (414) 278-3043
All of the above-listed libraries, except the Cleveland Public Library, offer CASSIS (Classification And Search
Support Information System), which provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data.
'Collection organized by subject matter.
••Call only between the hours of 10:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m
1029 OG— 140
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF February 19, 1983
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New Case
Awaiting
Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY, GROUP 110-D. E. TALBERT. Director 1-16-81
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chemistry; Metallurgy; Metal-
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. GROUP 120— C. E. VAN HORN, Director 11-20-81
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics;
Steroids; Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140— J O. THOMAS. JR , Director 7-14-81
Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g., Coatmg; Molding;
Ink; Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treating Compositions.
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160-S. N. ZAHARNA, Director 1-20-82
Coating: Processes. Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography.
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170-
R. F. WHITE, Director • • 11-12-81
Fertilizers; Foods; FermenUtion; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making; Glass Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid. Gas,
and Solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210-S. W ENGLE. Director 4-7-81
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION, GROUP 220-KENNETH L. CAGE, Director ■_ 3-12-81
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics. Communications, Op-
tics; Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special, Fuel, Explosive and Thermic Composi-
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries. ^.„ ^ .. ,^ o,^
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE, AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY, Director 11-24-80
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Data Processing. CompuUtion and Conversion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING, AND MEASURING, GROUP 240-
G. M. FORLENZA, Director •:•.,:„••.• '■"^*''
Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
Food Treating; Agitating; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projectors;
Web Feeding; Winding and Reeling; Cable Hoists; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling;
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors. .. ^ ,^ » -,c o«
ELECTRONICCOMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S S. MATTHEWS, Director 8-25-80
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring. , ,, oi
DESIGN. GROUP 290— KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 1-13-81
Industrial Arts; Household. Personal and Fine Arts.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA. GROUP 310— B. R. GRAY. Director 5-18-81
Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Fluid Spnn-
kling; Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; Boats;
Ships; Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment. , ,„ „.
MATERIAL SHAPING. ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS. GROUP 320-M. M. NEWMAN. Director 5-18-81
Manufacturing Processes. Assembling, Combined Machines. Special Article Making; Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
and Wire Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and
Tool Holders, Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Pnnted Matter.
AMUSEMENT. HUSBANDRY, PERSONAL TREATMENT, INFORMATION, GROUP 330-
R E AEGERTER Director 2-13-80
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Pnnting; Typewnters; Infor-
mation Dissemination. ,..,„ ^. II II an
HEAT. POWER, AND FLUID ENGINEERING, GROUP 340-D. J. STOCKING, Director 11-17-80
Power Plante- Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Geanng;
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication. „_..„ ,,„
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS. TEXTILES, MINING AND GEARING, GROUP 350-
A L SMITH Director v-iZ-oO
Building Structures; Racks! Cabinets! Closures; Supporte; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Coupling JoinU; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineenng; Earth Drilling; Mining;
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches.
Expiratton of patents: The patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during February 1983, except those which
may have expired earlier due to shortened terms under the provisions of Public Law 690, 79th Congress, approved August 8, 1946
(60 Sut 940) and Public Uw 619, 83rd Congress, approved August 23, 1954 (68 Stat. 764). or which may have had their terms cur-
tailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the range of numbers indicated be-
low, may have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provKions of 35 US^: 151.
P-, ' ,, ' Numbers 3,231.896 to 3.237,200. inclusive
pS Patents ::::::::::::::::::::::::::: Numbers 2,591 to 2,605 inclusive
1029 OG— 141
REEXAMINATIONS
APRIL 26, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ J appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexamination specification matter printed
in italics indicates additions made by reexamination
Bl 4,162,149 (77th)
GRAVEL AND DUST SEPARATOR AND
CONTAINER FOR VACUUM CLEANING SYSTEMS
Clayton G. Mekelburg, Englewood, Colo., assignor to
Rent-A-Vac International Ltd., Denver, Colo.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,172, Mar. 1, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,162,149, issued
Jul. 24, 1979, Ser. No. 866,809, Jan. 3, 1978.
U.S. CI. 55/315 Int. Cl.^ BOID !>(l(H).
45/l2.45/(X):K0lH I OH
Bl 4,129,509 (78th)
METALWORKING FLUID COMPOSITIONS AND
METHODS OF STABILIZING SAME
Sudhir K. Shringarpurey, Cincinnati; Gerald L. Maurer,
Fairfield, both of Ohio, assignor to National Research
Laboratories, Cincinnati, Ohio.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 597,756, Jul. 21, 1975,
Pat. No. 4,055,655.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,098. Nov. 2, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,129,509, issued
Dec. 12, 1978, Ser. No. 719,813, Sep. 1, 1976.
U.S. a. 252/49.5 Int. CI.H lOM / 'M
AS A RESULT OF EXAMINATION. IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-7 is confirmed
1. A container and separator assembly for a vacuum
cleaning system constructed and arranged for releasable
connection to a separable airpump and drive and releas-
able connection to flexible vacuum tubes, comprismg:
(a) an enclosed container constructed and arranged for
handling by conventional trash handling means, and
having a lower door for removal of content by tilt-
ing the container including airtight seal means for
said lower door, and having inlet means for releas-
able connection to flexible vacuum tubes, and an
outlet;
(b) at least two series connected cyclone separators for
cleaning air passing out of said container outlet
mounted on said container;
(c) passage means from said container outlet to the
upstream one of said at least two series connected
cyclone separators for passing air;
(d) storage means including separate containers for
each of said at least two cyclone separators for accu-
mulating solid matter removed by said at least two
cyclone separators;
(e) means for emptying said storage means; and
(f) air outlet means from the downstream one of said at
least two cyclone separators, and said air outlet
means has means for releasable attachment to air-
pump means.
18
16
^
---
- --
*
*
*
/
/
IZ
,
»
/
v
pM
10
;
•
/
*
1
/
4
^^
/■
y
y
f —
! X
1
! \
1
i
'
• 1
5--i
1
rH
AS A RESULT OF EXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-24 is confirmed.
1. A stabilized metalworking fluid composition com-
prising:
an oil and water disperson,
an emulsifyine agent selected from the group of anionic
and nonionic agents, and mixtures thereof, which
imparts an electronegativity to the oil phase of the
dispersion and, as a stabilizer therefor in an effective
stabilizing amount,
a multivalent metal ion bonded to said electronegative
oil phase to impart stability to the dispersion.
1029 OG— 143
1029 OG— 144
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
APRrL 26. 1983
Bl 4,200,932 (79th)
MEANS FOR THE CONTROL AND REGULATION OF
THE PRINTING PROCESS ON PRINTING PRESSES
Peter Schramm, Kahl am Main; Siegfried Schuhmann, Of-
fenbach am Main; Edgar F. Schoneberger, Seligenstadt;
Alfred Dom; Bert Cappel, both of Miihlheim, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Roland OfTsetmaschinen-
fabrik Faber & Schleichel AG., Fed. Rep. of Germany.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,157, Feb. 11, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,200,932, issued
Apr. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 913,800, Jun. 8, 1978.
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun.
25, 1977, 2,728,738.
U.S. a. 364/519 Int. Q. ' B41J JJ/(X)
T 1 ^zj.*.i r
T ^2j.*.s muijirp
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-4 is confirmed.
1. An ink feed control for a printing machine compris-
ing:
means for closing the ink feed to a printing plate of the
printing machine including a plurality of ink closing
elements disposed generally laterally relative to the
direction of movement of material being printed;
controlled adjustment means for individually adjusting
the positions of the ink dosing elements and for
producing current position values for the elements;
an ink density measuring device remote from the print-
mg machine operable to scan a plurality of control
fields on the printed material after a printing oper-
ation, the control fields being disposed generally lat-
erally relative to the direction of movement of mate-
nal being printed, to produce actual density values
for the control fields;
comparator means for comparing the actual ink density
values with desired ink density values;
first microcomputer means for controlling the scanning
of the ink density measuring device and for collect-
mg the actual density values from the ink density
measuring device and coupling said actual values to
the comparator means, the comparator means further
including means for calculating position adjusting
values for the ink dosing elements based upon cur-
rent position values of the ink dosing elements and
upon the comparisons of actual ink density values
with desired ink density values; and
second microcomputer means receiving the position
adjustmg values from the comparator means, for
controlling the adjustment means and for coupling
the subsequent current position values of the ink
dosmg elements from the adjustment means to the
comparator means, the comparator means further in-
cludmg means for relating the current position
values with the position adjusting values to indicate
nonconformities.
REISSUES
APRIL 26, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets I J appears in the original patent but forms no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in italics
indicates additions made by reissue.
Re. 31,217
BLUFF BODY FLOWMETER
Alan E. Rodely, Atlanta, Ga., assignor to Neptune Eastech, Inc.,
Edison, N J.
Original No. 3,572,117, dated Mar. 23, 1971, Ser. No. 732,238,
May 27, 1968. Application for reissue Nov. 17, 1977, Ser. No.
852,581
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/32
VJS. a. 73—861.22 17 Qaims
ftmcDic. LOW TuftBULEna:
FLOW ZONE
SENSOR
7IS
a fuel additive tank;
a normally closed, solenoid operated valve;
a fluid metering orifice;
Pty*iCK
pwitir
K
TIME
DEl/tY
IPELAY
1_
i7
— V-
ruEL
PVMP
zttrsEL
CfJGIHE
su^nr
I
'iriiTER
•j/j
-t.
97
OKIFIce
ff *o
17
•-iO
TO
1. In combination,
a conduit having means defining a hollow inner chamber
containing a flowing fluid,
said chamber having a longitudinal axis and an inner diame-
ter dimension in a plane normal to said longitudinal axis,
and a stotionary bluff" body positioned within said chamber
and spanning said inner diameter transverse to said longitu-
dinal axis thereof, said body having a first surface facing
upstream in said flowing fluid and second surfaces extend-
ing from said first surface downstream in said flow
through said chamber, said first surface having a predeter-
mined height dimension with respect to said inner diameter
dimension of said chamber and a prescribed axial dimen-
sion £with respect to dimensions! of said second sur-
faces, the ratio of said height dimension to said diameter
dimension being between the limits of 0.15 and 0.4 and the
ratio of said axial dimension to said height dimension being
between the limits of 1 and 2, said first surface having upper
and lower edges each of which is contiguous to an individual
corresponding one of said second surfaces to define a fixed
line along which said fluid flow past said body separates, and
said first and second surfaces by interacting with said
flowing fluid producing in said chamber an oscillating
fluid flow free of intermittency and of a frequency corre-
sponding to said flowrate.
Re. 31,218
FUEL ADDITIVE INJECTION SYSTEM FOR DIESEL
ENGINES
George E. Hicks; John W. Utherland, both of Peoria; Arlan G.
Martin, Morton, and Lawrence Williams, Peoria Heights, all
of m., assignors to Caterpillar Tractor Co., Peoria, 111.
Original No. 4,161,160, dated Jul. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 847,530,
Oct. 31, 1977. AppUcation for reissue Jan. 21, 1980, Ser. No.
113,950
Int a.J F02M 43/00
UJS. a. 123—1 A 6 C>«in>«
5. A diesel fuel supply system for use with diesel engines
comprising:
a fuel pump adapted to be connected to a diesel engine
to supply fuel thereto;
a first conduit connected to said fuel pump;
a tee connected to said first conduit;
a fuel tank;
a second conduit interconnecting said tee and said fuel
tank;
a third conduit connecting said additive tank, said valve
and said orifice in series to said tee; and
an electrical control circuit for said valve.
Re. 31,219
AUTOMATIC FOCUSING CAMERA
Edwin K. Shenk, Westford, Mass., assignor to Polaroid Corpora-
tion, Cambridge, Mass.
Original No. 4,199,244, dated Apr. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 916,114,
Jun. 16, 1978. Continuation of Ser. No. 729,289, Oct 4, 1976,
abandoned. Application for reissue Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No.
300,994
Int. a.3 G03B i/00
U.S. a. 354—195 25 Claims
POSD
SHUTTER I '^?S?5r JC
' DRIVE
*■ ME4NS
1. In a camera having variable means for focusing image
forming rays from a subject on the camera focal plane, the
specific variation of said focusing means at which a subject is
in focus being a predetermined nonlinear function of subject
distance, and having range finding means for generating a
range parameter representative of subject distance, said range
parameter being a timed duration thereby establishing a rela-
tionship between subject distance and time, the improvement
comprising:
means responsive to said range parameter for generating a
train of pulses whose number is representative of the
specific variation of said focusing means at which said
subject will be in focus, said pulse generating means in-
cluding a counter for accumulating said pulses of said
pulse train and a pulse generator with a preprogrammed
time-variable pulse repetition rate, said preprogrammed
repetition rate of said pulse generator being such that the
contents of said counter, at the end of said range pulse, is
797
798
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
representative of the specific variation of said focusing
means at which said subject will be in focus; and
means for varying said focusing means in accordance with
the total number of pulses in said train of pulses, said focus
ranging means including means responsive to said end of
said timed duration for varying said focusing means in
accordance with the contents of said counter.
Re. 31,220
ELECTROMIGRATION METHOD FOR MAKING
STAINED GLASS PHOTOMASKS
Fred M. Emsberger, Fox Chapel Borough, Pa., assignor to PPG
Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Original No. 4,155,735, dated May 22, 1979, Ser. No. 856,054,
Nov. 30, 1977. Application for reissue May 18, 1981. Ser. No.
264,771
Int. a.' C03C 15/00. 17/00
U.S. a. 65-30.13 44aaims
Re. 31,221
COLD ROLLED, DUCHLE, HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
STRIP AND SHEET AND METHOD THEREFOR
James A. Elias, deceased, late of Middletown, Ohio (by June G.
Elias, executrix); John R. Newby, and Marrin B. Pierson,
both of Middletown, Ohio, assignors to Armco Inc., Middle-
town, Ohio
Original No. 3,963,531, dated Jun. 15, 1976, Ser. No. 554,158,
Feb. 28, 1975. Application for reissue May 6, 1981, Ser. No
260,906
Int. a.3 C22C 38/06, 38/12
U.S. a. 148-31 MQaims
i-i
H a H
1 4
,1 iSflif
"OC- rJDO HBCI
iNNBA, fit. TtMPt.»i'ij«p
14. A method for making a stained glass photomask having
improved resolution comprising:
applying onto a first surface of a glass substrate a layer of
organic photoresist;
placing a master mask over the organic photoresist layer,
exposing patterned areas of the photoresist to actinic
radiation through the master mask, and photographically
developing the exposed photoresist, thereby producing a
pattern of apertures through the organic photoresist layer;
applying onto said apertured organic photoresist layer and
into the apertures therein, a layer of a source of stain-pro-
ducing cations;
applying an electrode layer onto the glass surface on the
opposite side of the glass substrate from said first surface;
connecting said electrode layer to the cathode side of a
source of electrical potential and said cation source layer
to the anode side of a source of electrical potential and
simultaneously heating the coated composite consisting
essentially of the glass substrate, the source layer of stain-
producing cations, the apertured organic photoresist
layer, and the electrode layer to at least 100° C. while
applying a direct current electric field between said cation
source layer and the electrode layer, so that electric
charge passes through the apertures in the organic photo-
resist and induces migration of stain-producing cations
from the cation source layer into portions of the glass
underlying said apertures, and passage of electric charge is
blocked by the organic photoresist layer so that the areas
of the glass underlying the organic photoresist remain
substantially free from migrated stain-producing cations;
[removing said electrode layer, organic photoresist layer,
and cation source layer from the glass substrate;] and
heating the glass, in the presence of a reducing agent so as to
reduce and agglomerate the migrated stain-producing
cations within the glass, thereby producing a stained pat-
tern within the surface of the glass.
45. The method of claim 14 wherein, prior to the reducing and
agglomerating step and subsequent to the cation migration step,
the electrode layer, photoresist layer, and cation source layer are
removed from the glass substrate.
1. Cold reduced and annealed low carbon steel strip and
steel stock in substantially unrecrystallized form after annealing
having a 0.2% yield strength of £45 to 65 ksi or oQ at least 90
ksi, with an elongation in 2 inches of greater than 10% [for at
least 90 ksi yield strength and greater than 25% for 45 to 65 ksi
yield strength], consisting essentially of, by weight percent,
from 0.02% to about 0.10% carbon, about 0.1% to about 0.9%
manganese, 0.02% to about 0.18% columbium, residual phos-
phorus, sulfur, silicon, oxygen and nitrogen, about 0.01% to
about 0.08% aluminum, and balance essentially iron except for
incidental impurities, with the columbium being substantially
completely combined.
Re. 31,222
MICROPROCESSOR COMPUTERIZED
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE/TIME [DOWN-HOLE]
RECORDER
Oliver W. McCracken, Pauls Valley, Okla., assignor to Otis
Engineering Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Original No. 4,161,782, dated Jul. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 863,678,
Dec. 23, 1977. Application for reissue Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No.
284,086
Int. C\? E21B 47/06; G06F 15/20
U.S. a. 364-571 35 claims
Hrl t=rJ '' -"'1^ 1 ■- i !''^""1 ^""-"1 T'-Si"' 1 1 "^"" 1
Uj-i xi^s^iniiiii ly littn Bfiii
35. The method of storing data versus time from a self<on-
tained tool comprising parameter sensing transducer means, a
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
799
poy/er source, and an associated microprocessor computer: com-
prising the steps of:
(7) initiating via said microprocessor, an analog read-out sample
of said transducer means,
(2) converting each said analog output sample to a digital for-
mat and storing same in a register of said microprocessor,
(i) determining the differential between each instant stored
sample and the next preceding sample and storing those
instant samples effecting a differential with absolute value
exceeding a least count value in RAM storage means,
(4) storing a time tag associated with each sample stored in step
(5) computing the data rate of change from said samples,
(<J) adjusting the rate of taking said samples as a direct function
of said data rate of change: and
(7) repeating steps (7) through (6), above.
Re. 31,223
TRACK SKIPPER FOR VIDEO DISC PLAYER
John C. Bleazey, Waretown, N.J., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Original No. 4,262,174, dated Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 39,359,
May 15, 1979. Application for reissue Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No.
286,901
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 16, 1978,
44739/78
Int. a.3 GllB 27/00
U.S. a. 369—221 2 Claims
1. In a system for recovering prerecorded information from
a disc record having a spiral information track by a track-fol-
lowing stylus when stylus/record relative velocity is estab-
lished; wherein normal operation of said system involves sens-
ing of said prerecorded information along successive convolu-
tions of said spiral track in a regular progression toward one
extremity; an apparatus comprising:
(A) a carriage subject to translatory motion in correlation
with radial motion of said track-following stylus during
playback; said carriage having an opening in a bottom
wall thereof;
(B) a stylus arm having a longitudinal axis, and carrying said
track-following stylus at one end thereof;
(C) means for yieldably securing the end of said stylus arm
remote from said one end to said carriage; said yieldable
securing means permitting said track-following stylus to
protrude through said opening when said stylus arm is
lowered during playback;
(D) a permanent magnetic element secured to said stylus arm
near said one end thereof and disposed above said stylus
arm relative to said record during playback;
(E) an electromagnet for providing a controllable magnetic
field of a desired polarity when energized;
(F) means for mounting said electromagnet to said carriage
in the vicinity of said permanent magnetic element; and
(G) means for selectively energizing said electromagnet to
cause a shift in the radial location of said track-following
stylus in a substantially radial direction, said radial direc-
tion depending upon the polarity of said controllable
magnetic field.
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED APRIL 26, 1983
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,042
ROSE PLANT— MEIROBIDOR VARIETY
Marie L. Meilland, Antibes, France, assignor to The Conard-
Pyle Company, West Grove, Pa.
FUed Not. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,761
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Nov. 3, 1980, ROO
1041
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 15 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct variety of Hybrid Tea rose plant
which is particularly suited for forcing in greenhouses, sub-
stantially as illustrated and described, characterized by an erect
growth habit, the abundant formation of attractive long lasting
and relatively non-fading yellow flowers in a rapid flower
cycle, the ability of the cut buds to open consistently and
uniformly, and above-average resistance to diseases which
commonly afflict yellow-flowering roses.
5,043
CHRYSANTHEMUM NAMED TWILIGHT
Leonard H. Sboesmidi, Westfleld- Woking, England, aasignof to
Pan American Plant Company, Parrish, Fla.
Filed Oct 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,933
Int a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 74 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct chrysanthemum cultivar, substantially
as herein shown and described, characterized by its profuse
production of distinct pink daisy-type flowers of medium size
and good substance, and its adaptability for year round pot
plant production.
801
PATENTS
GRANTED APR. 26, 1983
ERRATA
For See
CLASS - PATENT NO.
604-1 52 „. 4,381 ,005
604-265 4,38 1 ,008
494-010 4,38 1 ,072
384-1 14 4,38 1.1 26
384-1 5 1 4,38 1 . 1 27
384-1 54 4,38 1 , 1 28
419-024 4.381,197
376-105 4,38 1 ,280
376-1 72 4.38 1 .28 1
376-292 4,38 1 ,282
376-327 4,38 1 ,283
376-364 4,381 ,284
382-064 4,38 1 ,494
PATENTS
GRANTED APRIL 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4,380,833
DOLL DRESS AND CRENELLE
Sherry Peters, R.R. 3, Box 425, Chesterton, Ind. 46304
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,778
Int. a.3 A41D 1/22
U.S. a. 2—105
6aaims
1. A doll dress comprising:
a full length skirt portion;
a strip gathered on a cord stitched along a longitudinal side
of said strip, said strip being sewn on said skirt portion
around the hem portion thereof,
said strip having a width of approximately J the length of
said skirt;
said strip having a longitudinal length approximately 30
times the circumferential length of said skirt along the
hem thereof, and gathered on said cord to equal the
circumferential length of said skirt at the hem portion
thereof
axial displacement of the plunger relative to the waste
drain pipe for opening and closing the waste drain pipe,
said shank portion having guide means projecting into
close proximity to said waste drain pipe to guide said
plunger for axial displacement therein, said guide means
providing at least one drain passage past said plunger
affording communication from said seat to a drain through
said waste drain pipe; and
hollow cylindrical foramenous rigid sleeve member
mounted removably on said guide means to cover said
drain passage adjacent the head portion and to fill the
space between said guide means and the inner surface of
said waste drain pipe adjacent said seat, the openings of
said formanenous sleeve member affording flow of waste
liquid therethrough but blocking the passage of discrete
articles therethrough, said support portion further includ-
ing annular shoulder means spaced from said head portion
a distance corresponding to the axial length of said sleeve
member for engaging and retaining the sleeve member
captive between said head and said shoulder means against
axial displacement, said support portion being separable
from said head portion to afford said releasable mounting
of said cylindrical sleeve member between said head por-
tion and said annular shoulder means.
4,380,834
POP-UP PLUNGER
Frederick E. Wentz, 647 North Street, Emmaus, Pa. 18049
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 163,345, Jan. 26, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,195
Int. C1.5 A47K 1/14: E03C 1/26
U.S. a. 4—287 6 Qaims
4,380,835
ELECTRIC FLUSH TANK
Li-Ho Yao, No. 6, Alley 65, Ta-teh Lane, Chung Ching Rd.,
Taichung, Taiwan
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,961
Int. Q\? E03D 5/10
U.S. a. 4—406 8 Qaims
J^~-^
B
^f .
l>^
■ J5
n^
^-^
^^
^<i
^^J
iO
"^
r ^
JO
•
K ^
t
1 J,
\ - - -
1. A pop-up plunger for selectively closing a generally cylin-
drical waste drain pipe having a seat at one end and closure
actuator means remote from said one end comprising:
a head portion including sealing means for engaging the seat
of said waste drain pipe for closure thereof;
a support portion extending axially of said seat from one side
of the head portion into the waste drain pipe and adapted
for engagement with the closure actuator means to effect
1. An electrically operated toilet flushing device comprising:
a flush tank, having a hole in its bottom;
a lid covering the hole in said tank;
a solenoid mounted within said tank;
a first lever pivotally mounted within said tank, one end of
said first lever secured to said lid and the other end of said
first lever attached to said solenoid;
a means for energizing said solenoid, said solenoid when
achieving its energized state causing rotation of said lever;
a first switch means to maintain said solenoid in iu energized
state when said energizing means is released;
a second lever pivotally mounted within said tank;
a float mounted on one end of said second lever;
a water supply valve connected to a source of water and
located in said tank, said valve being opened when said
float is intermediate its lowermost and uppermost posi-
tions;
803
804
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
a second switch means for electrically de-energizing said
solenoid when said float is in its lowermost position.
4,380,836
COLLAPSIBLE TOILET SHELTER
Earl J. Braxton, 46731 Shelby Rd., Utica, Mich. 48087
Filed Mar. 26. 1981, Ser. No. 247,699
Int. a.' A47K 11/03. 11/02
U.S. a. 4—460 7 Qaims
4,380,837
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
FLOW IN SWIMMING POOL GUTTERS
John F. Coma, Columbus, and Marcel H. Blais, Westerville,
both of Ohio, assignors to Statewide Pools, Inc., Columbus,
Ohio
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,747
Int. a.3 E04H 3/16, 3/18
U.S. a. 4—510 4 Qaims
I 40 E
50
:E'*or£S S" MMEWS
,!7
24 ,.
GRADIENT HIGH POl"(T
. 22
I
I
^ 20
I
I
; 86
I
II
,, 96
J. 90
1. A collapsible portable toilet shelter comprising:
a plurality of upstanding planar wall panels connected along
adjacent vertical sides by continuous hinge members such
that said wall panels may be adjustably positioned to form
a foldably collapsible rectangular enclosure, said rectan-
gular enclosure including a front wall, a back wall, and
two side walls, said side walls each including a forward
panel and a rearward panel, the forward panels connected
to the rearward panels by continuous hinge members
enabling the forward and rearward panels to be main-
tained in an opened position co-planar to each other, or in
a collapsed position parallel to each other and parallel to
said front wall and said back wall;
one of said wall panels having a door opening and a door
adapted to be moveably disposed over said door opening;
a removeable roof panel adapted to be mounted on top
marginal portions of the wall panels;
means disposed on the roof panel for retaining said top
marginal portions of each wall panel in fixed relation to
each other; and
a removeable base member adapted to retain bottom mar-
ginal portions of each wall panel in fixed relation to each
other, said base member including:
a rectangular frame member disposed in a horizontal plane
and having the same number of sides as the shelter,
a commode member mounted on said frame member in
spaced relationship from the wall panel having said
door opening, and
a fioor extending across the top portion of said frame
member not covered by said commode member,
whereby said shelter may be erected for use as a porta-
ble toilet shelter or disassembled to a collapsed state for
shipment.
1. A gutter flow controller for a swimming pool of the tyjje
that includes a gutter extending around the perimeter of the
pool and an inner gutter wall provided with wall openings at
spaced intervals around said perimeter for delivering flows of
water from the pool to the gutter, said gutter flow controller
comprising, in combination, a controller frame extended
through one of said wall openings and forming a control pas-
sage that extends downwardly from the wall opening to a
control passage outlet in the lower regions of the gutter; and a
hydrostatic gate moveably mounted on the controller frame in
overlying relationship with said control passage outlet for
controlling the flow through said outlet.
4,380,838
CONFORMABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM FOR FURNITURE
Milton Lutchansky, 47 Lake Shore Dr., Randolph, N.J. 07869
FUed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,179
Int. a.3 A61G 7/00
U.S. a. 5—66 9 Gaims
1. An article of furniture for supporting the human body in
sitting and reclining positions with a preselected support force
distribution which adapts itself to body contours comprising,
in combination:
a rigid base;
a frame for supporting a mattress or the like divided longitu-
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
805
dinally into a plurality of segments, at least one of which
is independent of other segments;
cross bracing members for intermediate segments of said
frame;
ued manual reciprocating of the golf iron results in a
washing of the golf iron head.
a membrane resiliently stretched transversely of each of said
segments; and
at least one balance lever intermediately pivoted to said base
and endwise attached to adjacent segments of said frame
on each long side thereof to support said segments.
•1
^ *
■4
' JJ
1. A golf iron washer characterized in that it includes:
(a) a rectangular housing including a horizontal bottom end
wall, a pair of integral front and rear vertical walls, and a
pair of integral side vertical walls, and being open at the
upper end thereof;
(b) mounting means on the outer lower face of the bottom
wall for mounting the housing on a support means;
(c) cleaning member support means in said housing for re-
leasably supporting a pair of rectangularly shaped clean-
ing members disposed on their sides, with their cleaning
elements extended toward each other in opposing rela-
tionship, and with their longitudinal axes disposed length-
wise of the front and rear vertical walls;
(d) a cover member releasably mounted on the upper open
end of said housing and having an opening formed there-
through for the passage therethrough of a golf iron;
(e) a predetermined level of cleaning fluid in said housing;
and,
(0 said cover member being provided with inwardly ex-
tended integral front, rear and a pair of side guide walls
which are integrally attached at their upper end to the
cover member, and which have their lower ends in abut-
ting engagement with the upper longitudinal sides of the
cleaning members for releasably retaining them in said
cleaning member support means', whereby when a golf
iron is manually inserted head first through the opening in
said cover member, the golf iron head is guided by the
guide walls between said cleaning members, and contin-
4,380,840
BOTTLE CLEANING DEVICE
Ivan L. Rieckenberg, Rte. 1, Box 148E, Steeleiille, III. 62288
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,725
Int. a.5 A47G 19/30
U.S. a. 15—105 10 Qainu
4,380,839
GOLF IRON WASHER
Charles Caradonna, 260 Woodside Ct., Apt. 228, Rochester,
Mich. 48063
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,211
Int. a.3 A63B 57/00
U.S. a. 15—104.92 8 Oaims
1. A bottle cleaning device, formed of durable, flexible,
resilient molded resin material, comprising:
an elongated shaft;
and a thin, relatively flat primary scraper blade mounted on
one end of the shaft,
the blade extending transversely of the end of the shaft at an
acute angle to the longitudinal axis of the shaft,
the scraf>er blade having an external peripheral configura-
tion affording an elongated essentially linear edge effec-
tive for scraping flat interior side surfaces in a bottle, and
further having a curved edge effective for scraping
curved interior side surfaces and corners in a bottle,
the juncture between the blade and the shaft being located
centrally of the blade.
4,380,841
OIL DIP STICK WIPER UNIT
Robert R. Thomas, Hartford, Kans., assignor to Hopkins Manu-
facturing Corporation, Emporia, Kans.
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,862
Int. C1.3 PDIM 11/12
U.S. a. 15—210 B 4 Qaims
1. An oil dip stick wiping device comprising:
means for wiping said dip stick, comprising:
a first wiping block having a first inside wiping face por-
tion,
a second wiping block having a second inside wiping face
806
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
portion, in opposing relation to said first wiping face
portion
means for hingedly connecting said first and said second
wiping blocks whereby said first and second wiping
blocks may be urged together after said dip stick has been
inserted between so that said dip stick may be wiped by
said first and second wiping face portions as said dip stick
is drawn between them and
first and second outside gripping means on said first and
second wiping blocks, respectively, for gripping said
wiping means and urging said wiping blocks together and
for inserting said wiping means into a means for storing
said wiping means, and
means for storing said wiping means when said wiping
means is not in use, comprising:
walls defining a receptacle with an open end for telescop-
ingly insertably receiving said wiping means including
a wall extending from said open end defining a slot extend-
ing in the direction of insertion of said wiping means,
said first and second outside gripping means being opera-
ble by hand to prevent separation of said wiping blocks
during removal from said means for storing said wiping
means and to manipulate said wiping means free from
hand contact with said first and second inside wiping
face portions, at least one of said outside gripping means
being engageable through said slot for removal of said
wiping means.
4,380,842
TOOL SUPPORT APPARATUS
John W. Thomas, McDonald, Pa., assignor to Shenango Incor-
porated, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,272
Int. a.^ B08B im
U.S. a. 15—304 13 Claims
1. Tool support apparatus comprising a frame, a vertical ram
tube adapted to carry tools at its lower end, means supporting
said ram tube on said frame, said means supporting said ram
tube on said frame including a first means for moving said ram
tube in a first linear direction, a second means for moving the
lower end of said ram tube in a first arcuate direction, a third
means for moving the lower end of said ram tube in a second
arcuate direction, a fourth means for vertically moving said
ram tube, whereby the lower end of said ram tube may be
moved linearly, arcuately and vertically to position the lower
end of said ram tube.
4,380,843
DROOP CORRECTION STRUCTURE AND
CONDENSATE CONTROL IN SOOTBLOWERS
Robert P. Sullivan, Chattanooga, and Clyde L. Jacobs, Signal
Mountain, both of Tenn., assignors to Combustion Engineer-
ing, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
FUed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 213,990
Int. a.3 F23J 3/00
U.S. a. 15—316 R 6 Claims
1. A long-stroke sootblower, including,
a track extending at a slope up to the entrance into a furnace
space,
a carriage mounted to follow the track,
an outer casing mounted by one end to the carriage and
extending to and through the furnace entrance,
a support for the casing at the entrance of the furnace which
maintains the supported casing in alignment with the
furnace opening,
a feed tube telescoped within the carriage end of the casing,
a seal between the feed tube and the casing,
a supply of steam for the feed tube,
a valve connecting the steam supply to the feed tube,
a check valve mounted at the steam valve through which
condensate within the feed tube drains to a point external
of the blower,
and a valve connected to the carriage end of the casing
through which condensate within the casing drains to a
point external of the blower.
4,380,844
AUTOMATIC FLOOR CLEANING MACHINE
Steven A. Waldhauser, Lewiston, and Dennis J. Cornell,
Youngstown, both of N.Y., assignors to Wetrok, Inc., Niagara
Falls, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,420
Int. a.3 A47L 11/30. 11/292
U.S. a. 15—320 ^ 40 Qaims
1. An automatic, self contained and self propelled walk
behind floor cleaning machine comprising a unitary, power
driven body means having mounted thereon
a propulsion means for supporting said body means and for
dry tracking on the floor surface to be cleaned,
scrubber means for wetting and cleaning the surface, said
scrubber means including vertically movable brush means
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
ao7
carried in cantilever fashion on said body means behind
said propulsion means, and
vacuum means for drying of the cleaned surface, said vac-
uum means including articulated squeegee means carried
in cantilevered fashion on said body means behind said
brush means for proper tracking, said squeegee means
being capable of vertical movement independent of said
brush means; and
control means operatively associated with said propulsion
means, said scrubber means and said vacuum means for
controlling actuation of said machine, said control means
including controls located to the rear of the body means
and engagable by a walk behind operator.
NOZZLE FOR HAND-HELD VACUUM
Jonathan O. Miller, Howarth, NJ.; Kerry E. Strouse, Mill Hall,
and Richard M. Fegan, Montoursrille, both of Pa., assignors
to Shop- Vac Corporation, WiUiamsport, Pa.
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,892
Int. a.3 A47L 5/24
U.S. a. 15—344 12 Claims
1. A vacuum cleaner comprising:
a main housing;
a suction fan mounted in said housing for drawing air into
said housing; an air exhaust passage from said housing
communicating with said suction fan; a motor in said
housing for driving said fan;
said housing having a forward end; a nozzle extending rig-
idly from said forward end of said housing; an air inlet
port at the end of said nozzle remote from said housing;
said nozzle including a pair of sections extending longitu-
dinally of said nozzle and defining an air passage between
them from said air inlet port to said suction fan; a first one
of said nozzle sections being secured to said housing; the
second of said nozzle sections being releasably secured to
said housing and to said first section;
a filter member housed within said nozzle for filtering the air
passing through said nozzle and trapping particulate mat-
ter in said air;
said second section of said nozzle being openable to make
said filter member in said housing accessible for insertion,
removal and replacement;
a sleeve member at the forward end of said nozzle away
from said housing; said sleeve member extending into said
air passage; said sleeve member securing said nozzle sec-
tions together and preventing release of said second hous-
ing section from said first housing section;
said inlet port further comprising an end nozzle including a
sleeve projecting into said sleeve member for positioning
said end nozzle; said end nozzle including a support and
positioning portion thereof around the periphery thereof
for being lodged against said main housing to position said
end nozzle.
4,380,846
IDLER PULLEY BELT DRIVE ARRANGEMENT FOR
SUCTION CLEANER
Edgar A. Maurer, Canton, Ohio, aaaignor to The Hoover Com-
pany, North Canton, Ohio
FUed Feb. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 238,546
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Not. 28, 1980,
8038291
Int a.3 A47L 5/SO
U.S. a. 15—391 8 Claims
1. An overload arrangement for a cleaner bottom including;
(a) an elastomeric stretchable belt extending to a pivoted idler
pulley structure,
(b) a relatively unstretchable belt extending to said idler pulley
structure,
(c) one of said stretchable belt and said relatively unstretchable
belt being trained over a driving motor shaft,
(d) the other of said stretchable belts and unstretchable belt
being trained over said agitator whereby a stalled condition
at said agitator causes said unstretchable belt to slip on said
idler pulley structure to prevent a stall conditioq to said
motor shaft, and
(e) a pivot for said pivoted idler pulley structure being resil-
iently mounted relative to said cleaner bottom.
4,380,847
DEVICE FOR MOUNTING GAS SPRING FOR OPENING
AUTOMOBILE HATCH DOOR
Yasuari T^jima, Gyoda, Japan, assignor to Shown MannftKtar-
ing Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,308
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 3, 1980, 55-92938[U]
Int a.5 E05F 5/08; F16D 3/00
U.S. a. 16—85 5 Claims
I •
1. In combination a gas spring for opening and closing a
door; a base .member, and a device for mounting to said gas
spring and to said base member, said gas spring having means
for mounting said mounting device to said spring and said
mounting device comprising a single elastic wire wound in a
helical shape and including a first wound portion which is
rotatably fitted to said base member, and second and third
wound portions having their axes at a right angle with respect
to the axis of the first wound portion, the first and third wound
portions being wound with Uie same pitch as the diameter of
said wire, whereas said second wound portion is wound with a
808
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
slightly larger pitch than the diameter of said wire thereby
providing a flexible portion in said mounting device, and said
third wound portion being mounted onto one end of said gas
spring.
4,380,849
APPARATUS FOR REMOVING MEAT FROM POULTRY
DRUMSTICKS
Frank L. Adkison, West Liberty, and Jack L. Kress, Wilton,
both of Iowa, assignors to Oscar Mayer Foods Corporation,
Madison, Wis.
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,735
Int. a.' A22C/7/(W
U.S. a. 17—11
20 Oaims
4,380,848
STOP DEVICE FOR A PIVOTAL DOOR, IN PARTICULAR
FOR AN AUTOMOBILE VEHICLE DOOR
Paul Guionie, Larche, and Rene Roudier, Brive, both of France,
assignors to Paumellerie Electrique, France
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 84,071, Oct. 12, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,720
Oaims priority, application France, Oct. 19, 1978, 78 29777;
Mar. 17, 1980, 80 05870
Int. a.' E05F 5/06
U.S. a. 16—85 18 Claims
1. In a stop device for combination with two parts which
consist of a door post and a door mounted on the post to pivot
about a pivot axis, the device comprising an arm for mounting
on one of said parts to pivot about an axis parallel to said pivot
axis and having two opposed edges, a bracket member for
fixing to the other of said parts and comprising two parallel
branches, two rollers mounted between the parallel branches
of the bracket member, one of the rollers being fixed in transla-
tion relative to the bracket member and the other roller being
movable in translation relative to the bracket member, a
rocker, a pin pivotally mounting the rocker between the
branches of the bracket member, the movable roller being
mounted on the rocker, elastically yieldable means for subject-
ing the rocker to an elastic torque which creates a pressure of
contact between each of the two rollers and the opposed edges
of the arm, the arm defining a stop recess for receiving and
retaining the fixed roller in the open position of the door: the
improvement wherein the branches of the bracket member are
part of a U-section centre portion of the bracket member and
two large wing portions extend symmetrically from each side
of the centre portion in a direction perpendicular to the
branches, said pin having two portions extending beyond the
branches in the region of the wing portions, said elastically
yieldable means comprising two helical windings which form
a torsion spring and are respectively mounted on each of said
two pin portions and have a first portion which bears against
the corresponding wing portion which includes an abutment
for said first portion, and a second portion which bears against
the rocker, the U-section centre portion comprising a trans-
verse portion which is located adjacent an edge of the wing
portions and is substantially perpendicular to the wing portions
so that the pivotal arm engaged between the two rollers can
move while remaining spaced away from said transverse por-
tion of the U-section centre portion.
1. An apparatus for removing meat from a poultry drum-
stick, wherein the apparatus comprises:
support means;
a jaw assembly mounted onto the support means and having
a pivoting, tong-like action;
jaw assembly operation means in operative interengagement
with the jaw assembly for selectively closing the jaw
assembly onto meat overlying a drumstick bone or open-
ing the jaw assembly, said jaw assembly operation means
includes a linkage member pivotally mounted to said jaw
assembly;
said linkage member being pivotally mounted at one end
thereof to said jaw assembly, said linkage member being
pivotally mounted at its other end to a movable carriage
assembly, said carriage assembly including means for
moving the carriage assembly either toward or away from
said jaw assembly, whereby movement of said movable
carriage assembly toward said jaw assembly closes said
jaw assembly and movement of said movable carriage
assembly away from said jaw assembly opens said jaw
assembly;
a grasping member for holding one end of the drumstick
bone; and
means for selectively driving the grasping member either
toward or away from the jaw assembly to remove the
meat from the drumstick bone.
4,380,850
HAND OPERATED STEAK TENDERIZER AND CUBER
Edwin H. Coburn, 17141 Frankfort Rd., Brooksville, Fla. 33512
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,951
Int. a.3 A22C 9/00
U.S. a. 17—29 2 Qaims
2 ^^
1. A hand-operated meat tenderizer comprising a handle
portion, a cylinder rotatably supported by said handle portion,
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
809
and a plurality of cutting blades disposed along the curved
surface of said cylinder in predetermined and varying angular
relationship to the axis of rotation thereof, whereby when said
cylinder is pressably and rotatably passed over the planar
surfaces of a cut of meat said surfaces are cuttably pierced in
such manner as to effect tenderization of the meat, said cutting
blades being truncated triangular in configuration and ar-
ranged along the curved surface of said cylinder in rows nor-
mally oriented relative to the axis of rotation thereof, said
cutting blades within each row bearing a predetermined com-
mon angular relationship to said axis of rotation of said cylin-
der, said predetermined common angular relationship of said
cutting blades within a given row differing from the predeter-
mined angular relationship of the cutting blades within adja-
cent rows, said cutting blades within alternating rows being
arranged in perpendicular relationship to said axis of rotation
of said cylinder, and said cutting blades within the rows adjoin-
ing said alternating rows being acutely angled relative to said
axis of rotation, with alternating rows of said adjoining rows
having their cutting blades oppositely angled relative to the
cutting blades of their alternately adjoining acutely angled
rows.
4,380,851
ROLLER BURNISHING TOOL
Lawrence C. Dickinson, 2255 Eva Adams, Reno, Nev. 89504
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 183,664, Sep. 2, 1980. This
application Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 205,026
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 11,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J B24B 39/00. 39/02
U.S. CI. 29—90 R 11 Claims
reduced to draw the roller cage rearwardly so that the
rollers move radially inward and the tool can be with-
drawn from the workpiece.
4,380,852
MILL ROLL
Leonid K. Leschinsky, Zhdanov, prospekt Lenina, 76"B", kv. 60;
Sergei V. Gulakov, Zhdanov, ulitsa, M. Mazaya, 41, kv. 2;
Xenofont X. Stepnov, Zhdanov, ulitsa Dalnevostochnaya, 50,
kv. 4; Boris I. Nosovsky, Zhdanov, ulitsa Kuprina, 23"A", kv.
30; Valery G. Bendrik, Zhdanov, ulitsa Ilicha, 55, kv. 2; Boris
E. Dubinsky, Zhdanov, ulitsa Krasnogvardeiskaya, 19, kv. 2;
Dmitry I. Isirov, Zhdanov, prospekt Lenina, 74, kv. 51, and
Viktor E. Zelensky, Zhdanov, bulvar Shevchenko, 93, kv. 7,
all of Donetskaya oblast, U.S.S.R.
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,395
Oaims priority, application LI.S.S.R., Jul. 17, 1978, 2643439
Int. a.^ B21B 27/00
U.S. CI. 29—121.2 1 Qaim
''- t V .. *> *■
1. A roller burnishing tool for Hnishing the internal surface
of a cylindrical hole by passing said tool through said hole,
comprising:
an elongate drive shaft having a central axis defining a for-
ward and a rearward direction;
a roller race having a central axis coincident with that of the
shaft and a frustoconical outer surface tapering radially
outward in the axially forward direction;
a plurality of frustoconically tapered rollers each having a
large end and a small end and being arranged about said
outer surface with the small ends of said rollers facing
forward so that the surface portion of each roller furthest
from the central axis of the roller race is generally parallel
to said central axis;
a roller cage having a plurality of slots, said roller cage
circumscribing and being spaced apart from the roller
race so that said slots and said roller race together define
a plurality of cavities for receiving individual rollers;
a roller pusher having (1) a forward extension for directly
engaging the rear surfaces of individual rollers when the
pusher is moved forwardly relative to the roller race to
push the rollers forward and cause the rollers to translate
radially outward along the tapered surface of the roller
race within the cavities defined by the roller cage, and (2)
a lip for directly engaging the roller cage when the pusher
is moved rearwardly relative to the roller race to draw the
rollers rearward and allow the rollers to translate radially
inward;
means for biasing said roller pusher in said forward direction
with a chosen force so that the force exerted upon said
internal surface of said hole remains constant over a range
of sizes of said hole; and
means for retracting the roller pusher when the axial force is
1. A mill roll comprising a barrel and a working layer depos-
ited on said barrel and having alternate portions of at least two
materials of a different wear resistance each correspondingly
along both the circumference and the generating line of said
barrel, each portion of said working layer, on a developed
surface of said barrel, being a figure symmetrical about both
the circumference of said barrel and the generating line
thereof, and extending along the circumference of said barrel
for 0.001 to 0.1 of contact arc length and, in a plane of the roll
cross-section, the angle between the axis of symmetry of each
portion of said working layer and the radius of the same roll is
from +5° to +75°.
4,380,853
TOOL MOUNT ASSEMBLY METHOD
Nicholas Hamm, Vineland, Canada, assignor to Deere A Com-
pany, Moline, III.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,292
Int. a.3 B21H 7/00; B21K 79/00
U.S. a. 29—148.3 3 Qaims
x::l_
Wku
ft
r
1. A method of making an agricultural implement assembly
having a support and a tool mounting member pivotally sus-
pended from the support and having an abutment member
fixed thereto, the method comprising the steps of:
coupling a resilient member between the support and the
mounting member;
pivoting the mounting member with respect to the support to
810
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
establish at least a predetermined preload in the resilient the shell through the hole while the plug is located on the shell
meinber; and over the hole, heating the vessel, thereby melting the plug to
after the resilient member is preloaded, fixing a stop member to seal the hole to form a barrier against the escape of the gas
'^l^'l^^ll "^ . H ' K '^ ""T*^' ^T^"^ '*'' '*'"""'"' f^o'" 'he shell thereby providing a gas-filled shell, removing
member, the stop and abutment members cooperating to ■> r o o > e
limit downward pivoting of the mounting member relative
to the support and to maintain at least the predetermined '"'^
preload in the resilient member; and
after the resilient member is preloaded, forming attaching -: Vc'T /J^l^V...
means on an end of the support for attaching the supp>ort to '^J-rT-ziii^^zy-T-f^^- ylO
an adjacent support, the attaching means being oriented at a
predetermined angular position with respect to the mount-
ing member.
4,380,854
ASSEMBLY APPARATUS
Karl G. Jonason, Vasteras, Sweden, assignor to Granges Metall-
verken Aktiebolag, Viisteras, Sweden
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Set. No. 202,421
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Nov. 2, 1979, 7909121
Int. a.3 B23P 15/26
U.S. a. 29—157.3 A 10 Claims
1. An apparatus for assembling a heat exchanger core com-
prising tubes and associated fin elements in thermal contact
with the tubes, said apparatus comprising a first means for
feeding the tubes to an assembly point and a second means for
feeding the fin elements to said assembly point; a rotatable
drum provided at its j)eriphery with means defining a plurality
of grooves which run in the direction of the axis of the drum
and which are dimensioned to contain simultaneously one tube
and one fin element, said grooves comprising said assembly
point, an ejecting means for ejecting a tube and fin element
from each groove and a transportation path for an assembly
comprising the tubes and the fin elements coming from the
ejecting means in an alternate relationship and means arranged
adjacent the transportation path for interconnecting the adja-
cent tubes and fin elements, each groove of the drum during
the rotation of the drum around its axis passing first the first
and second means at which a tube and a fin element, respec-
tively, are fed into the groove, and then the ejecting means at
which the tube and the fin element are ejected together to
follow said transportation path.
4,380,855
METHOD FOR HLLING HOLLOW SHELLS WITH GAS
FOR USE AS LASER FUSION TARGETS
Harry W. Deckman, Fanwood; Gerald M. Halpem, Bridge-
water, and John G. Dunsmuir, Madison, ail of N J., assignors
to University of Rochester, Rochester, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 113,146
Int. a.3 G21C 21/00
UJS. a. 29—407 16 Claims
1. The method of filling a laser target having a hollow shell
with gas which comprises the steps of drilling a hole through
the wall of the shell, locating a plug having a melting tempera-
ture lower than that of the shell over the hole, placing the
drilled shell with the plug in a vessel, introducing the gas into
said gas-filled shell from said vessel, and mounting said shell
upon a stalk with the top of the stalk and the melted plug in
contact with each other to provide an assembly for use in a
laser fusion target chamber.
4,380,856
SEGMENTED SEAL
Joseph E. Wallace, Calabasas, Calif., assignor to Parker-Hanni-
fin Corporation, Oeveland, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 124,391, Feb. 25, 1980, Pat. No. 4,293,135.
This application May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,479
Int. a.3 B23P 77/00
U.S. a. 29— 412 1 Claim
12 r^J/19
S.
^
A
•J M lO is.
M 19
M 13
•-mm-i
1. A method of sealing comprising the steps of forming two
elongated junction members each having two recesses with
each recess having parallel laterally inwardly facing sealing
surfaces spaced a predetermined distance apart, forming an
elongated extension strip having parallel laterally outwardly
facing sealing surfaces spaced a predetermined distance apart
greater than said first predetermined distance and extending
continuously and without interruption along the entire axial
extent of said strip, severing said strip laterally into at least two
pieces to form an extension member having identical opposite
end portions defined by said sealing surfaces of said severed
strip, inserting said identical opposite end portions into said
recesses to sealingly coimect said sealing surfaces of said exten-
sion member with said sealing surfaces of said recesses, and
compressing and deforming said junction members and said
extension member in a direction prependicular to the lateral
and longitudinal axes of said members.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
811
4,380,857
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING SHUTTER SCREEN
BLADES
Michio Senmna, Tokyo, and Jon Shibuya, Chichibu, both of
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo and
Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha, Saitama, both of, Japan
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,933
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 7, 1980, 55-92892
Int. a.3 B23P 77/00; 821 J 77/00
U.S. CL 29—417 1 Claim
J7
Ih ^~^ T-y "^-^ '— M ^^-M '^^ ' ^V 20i
21 22 23 22 24 22 25 22 28 22 27 22
22 23 22 24 22 25 22 28 22 27 22
1. A process for manufacturing shutter screen blades com-
prising the steps of:
providing a continuous longitudinal strip of plastic sheet
material and feeding said sheet material in the longitudinal
direction thereof;
performing a first punching operation on said sheet material
in a press apparatus to form in said sheet material partially
cutout portions with an outline in the form of shutter
screen blades having a longer dimension and a shorter
dimension, said cutout portions being formed with said
longer dimension extending transversely to said longitudi-
nal direction of said plastic strip and with parts of each
outline retained connected with said strip material at
]X>ints proximate both ends of said longer dimension;
coating said plastic strip including said cutout portions with
a metal layer by passing said strip through a metal plating
operation;
drying said metal coating by passing said sheet material
through drying apparatus, said sheet material being held
under a longitudinal tension during said drying step; and
performing a second punching operation to separate said
shutter screen blades from said strip by severing said parts
of said outlines which were retained connected with said
strip material after said first punching operation thereby to
separate said shutter screen blades from said strip.
METHOD OF MAKING A COMPOSITE PROHLE
Hans Gudbrandsen, Gjovik, Norway, assignor to A/S Raufoss
Ammunisjonsfabrikker, Raufoss, Norway
per No. PCr/NO80/00005, § 371 Date Not. 16, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Nof . 7, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01929, PCF Pub.
Date Sep. 18, 1980
PCT FUed Mar. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 212,711
Claims priority, application Norway, Mar. 16, 1979, 790897
Int. a.3 B23P 77/00/ B21D 39/00
U.S. a. 29—418 4 Qaims
metal members, each of the metal members including a pair of
inner flanges and a pair of outer flanges, the pairs of inner and
outer flanges of one metal member at least initially extending
toward the corresponding pairs of inner and outer flanges of
the second metal member, and a separate deformable bridging
element extending between the corresponding inner flanges of
the two metal members so as to form an enclosed hollow space
therebetween, the method comprising
(a) inserting two insulating bars between the two metal mem-
bers so that the respective ends of each insulating bar will flt
in the groove defined between the corresponding inner and
outer flanges of each metal member,
(b) bending each of the inner flanges of each metal member
toward the associated outer flanges of the metal member
such that they will contact the end of the insulating bar
therebetween and clamp it in position,
(c) at the same time deforming each of the deformable bridging
elements away from the hollow space which it helps form
and at least partially separating the deformable bridging
elements from connection with the associated inner flanges,
and
(d) removing the bridging elements from between the two
metal members.
4,380,859
METHOD FOR TIGHTENING FASTENER ON AXIALLY
CONNECTED ROD-LIKE MEMBERS
Akira Yamazaki, Kawanishi, Japan, assignor to Sumitomo
Metal Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Dirision of Ser. No. 36,730, May 7, 1979, Pat. No. 4,261,231.
This application Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,058
Int. a.3 B23P 79/00
U.S. a. 29—428 1 Qaim
1. A method of making a composite profile by clamping at
least two insulating bars so asjo fixedly extend between two
1. A method of tightening nuts on axially connected rod-like
members utilizing a tightening apparatus of the type wherein a
first spanner member to fit a nut to be rotated in a flrst direction
is rotatably fixed relative to a main body member; a second
spanner member to flt another nut to be rotated in a direction
opposite to said first nut is rotatably mounted relative to said
main body member; and, a driving apparatus rotates the second
spanner member; the method comprising the steps of:
driving said driving apparatus to turn said second spanner
member in said opposite direction relative to said main
body utilizing a ratchet device, returning said driving
apparatus to an original state;
repeating said driving and said returning operations;
returning said driving apparatus to an original operating
position after the tightening operation has begun; and
further repeating said driving and returning operations of
said driving apparatus until said nuts are tightened.
812
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,380,860
METHOD OF ASSEMBLING BEARING AND LEVER
William C. Riester, Williamsyille, and Dionysios D. Papadatos,
Kenmore, both of N.Y., assignors to Trico Products Corpora-
tion, Buffalo, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 30,113, Apr. 16, 1979, Pat. No. 4,266,883.
This application Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,279
Int. a.3 B23P 11/02
U.S. a. 29—453 3 Oaims
1. A method of assembling a unitary, semi-rigid, yieldable
bearing member having 4 circumferential external groove in
secure interengagement with a flat linkage member of a thick-
ness less than the width of said groove comprising the steps of
forming an aperture in the linkage member, deforming the
periphery of the aperture out of the original surface plane
thereof but parallel to said plane while maintaining a constant
aperture diameter to increase the effective thickness of the
periphery of the aperture of the linkage member to approxi-
mate the width of the groove while the circumferential surface
of the aperture remains facing radially into the aperture, insert-
ing the resilient bearing member into the aperture; applying a
force to the resilient bearing member in a direction through the
aperture until the groove in the bearing member snap-fits into
and engages the periphery of the aperture.
4,380,861
METHOD OF MAKING A SEMICONDUCTOR LASER BY
LIQUID PHASE EPITAXIAL GROWTHS
Takashi Sugino, Takatsuki, and Kunio Itoh, Uji, both of Japan,
assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma,
Japan
Division of Ser. No. 40,182, May 18, 1979, Pat. No. 4,296,387.
This application May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 266,134
Claims priority, application Japan, May 22, 1978, 53-61205;
Jun. 7, 1978, 53-69362; Jun. 7, 1978, 53-69363; Jun. 7, 1978,
53-69364; Jun. 8, 1978, 53-69572; Dec. 18, 1978, 53-156621
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/208
U.S. a. 29—569 L 4 Oaims
1. A method of making a semiconductor laser by liquid
phase epitaxial growths comprising the steps of
forming a terrace part with a specifled step on a principal
face of a semiconductor substrate,
growing a first clad layer on said semiconductor substrate in
a manner to have a thick part of the foot of said specified
step,
growing an active layer having an oblique part disposed on
the part of the foot of said step, in a manner to have a pair
of parallel bent parts between said oblique part and upper
and lower horizontal parts,
growing a second clad layer having the opposite conductiv-
ity type to that of said first clad layer on said active layer,
growing an electrode contacting layer,
forming a current limiting layer having an opening for limit-
ing injection current to the region of said oblique part, and
diffusing an impurity for ohmic contact into the exposed
surface of said electrode contacting layer through said
opening at most as far as the bottom of said second clad
layer.
4,380,862
METHOD FOR SUPPLYING A LOW RESISTIVITY
ELECTRICAL CONTACT TO A SEMICONDUCTOR
LASER DEVICE
Paul Nyul, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 322,007
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/28, 21/302. 21/58; HOIS 3/19
U.S. a. 29—569 L 7 Oaims
1. In a method of fabricating a semiconductor laser compris-
ing the steps of forming a wafer of semiconductor material
having regions of opposite conductivity type therein with a p-n
junction therebetween; metallizing a pair of surfaces of the
wafer, each surface adjacent to a region of a different conduc-
tivity type; cleaving the wafer to form a strip of semiconductor
material having a pair of opposed cleavage faces perpendicular
to said metallized surfaces; separating the strip in a direction
perpendicular to said cleavage faces to form a laser chip of the
semiconductor material; bonding a first metallized surface of
the chip to an electrically conducting surface of a support; and
contacting an electrically conducting lead to a second metal-
lized surface of said chip;
the improvement comprising the steps of bonding an electri-
cally conducting sheet to the second metallized surface of
said strip prior to the separating step and contacting the
electrically conducting lead to the electrically conducting
sheet.
4,380,863
METHOD OF MAKING DOUBLE LEVEL POLYSILICON
SERIES TRANSISTOR DEVICES
G. R. Mohan Rao, Houston, Tex., assignor to Texas Instruments
Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 102^1, Dec. 10, 1979, Pat. No. 4,319,263,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 907,234, May 18,
1978, Pat. No. 4,213,139. This appUcation Jan. 26, 1982, Ser.
No. 342,953
Int. 0.i HOIL 21/22
U.S. O. 29—571 9 Claims
1. A method of making a pair of adjacent semiconductor
devices comprising the steps of applying a first layer on a face
of a semiconductor body then patterning it to define an elec-
trode of one of the devices, applying a second layer on said
face and patterning it to define an electrode of the other of the
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
813
semiconductor devices, the second layer partially overlapping 4,380,865
the first layer, then introducing impurity material into the face METHOD OF FORMING DIELECTRICALLY ISOLATED
SILICON SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS UTILIZING
POROUS SILICON FORMATION
Robert C. Frye, Piscataway, and Harry J. Leamy, Summit, both
of N,J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorpo-
rated, Murray Hill, N,J.
Filed Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,263
Int. a.J HOIL 21/76. 21/20
U.S. a. 29—576 W 11 Qaims
using the first and second layers as a mask to create regions of
the semiconductor devices.
^SeSiFj^TS^^^^f
4,380,864
METHOD FOR PROVIDING IN-SITU
NON-DESTRUCTIVE MONITORING OF
SEMICONDUCTORS DURING LASER ANNEALING
PROCESS
Pank^j K. Das, Cohoes, N.Y., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,821
Int. C\? HOIL 21/268. 21/263; G06G 7/195
U.S. a. 29—574 7 Qaims
o^rOt
X
.... _-.. ^T '
13 16 ,,
\ \ I
X^S ^0
ILLUf>ilN«TfOl>/, 1*
1. A method for providing in-situ non-destructive monitor-
ing of semiconductors during annealing process comprising the
steps of
affixing an electrical contact to the top surface of a semicon-
ductor to be annealed,
positioning a surface acoustic wave device having input and
output transducers adjacent to said semiconductor, the
surface acoustic wave propagating surface of said surface
acoustic wave device being in close juxtaposed proximity
to the bottom surface of said semiconductor,
applying an r.f. input to said surface acoustic wave device
input terminal,
illuminating the bottom surface of said semiconductor
through said surface acoustic wave device with radiant
energy to effect annealing thereof, and
measuring the transverse acoustoelectric voltage on said
electrical contact, said transverse acoustoelectric voltage
being a function of said semiconductor conductivity.
1. A process for producing a vertically isolated region of
single crystal silicon comprising the steps of (I) forming a
region of porous silicon that is larger in area than said region of
single crystal silicon, (2) forming said region of single crystal
silicon within the boundaries of said region of porous silicon
such that said region of single crystal silicon overlies a section
of said region of porous silicon and (3) subjecting said section
to oxidation to produce said vertical isolation wherein said
section has a density which varies less than 10 percent over its
area and to a depth of at least 1000 A.
4,380,866
METHOD OF PROGRAMMING ROM BY OFFSET
MASKING OF SELECTED GATES
Roger S. Countryman, Jr., and Paul T. Lin, both of Austin, Tex.,
assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,493
Int. a.' HOIL 21/26i; GllC 11/40: HOIL 7/44
U.S. a. 29—577 C 8 Qaims
1. A process for making a MOS ROM array having a plural-
ity of devices programmed to first or second memory states
which comprises the steps of: providing a silicon wafer of first
conductivity type having a surface; selectively forming a field
oxide on said surface to surround at said surface a plurality of
active device locations; forming a thin gate oxide on said
surface in said active device locations; selectively forming
polycrystalline silicon gate electrodes overlying portions of
said thin gate oxide; forming a programming mask at selected
ones of said active device locations, at said selected locations
said mask overlying a portion of said r>olycrystalline silicon
gate electrode and a portion of said thin gate oxide adjacent but
not overlaid by said electrode; introducing dopant to said
814
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
wafer to form source and drain regions of second conductivity
type at locations not overlaid by said progratnming mask,
programming devices to said first memory state in locations
where source and drain regions are formed adjacent a gate
electrode and programming devices to said second memory
state in locations where one of said source and drain regions is
not formed adjacent said gate electrode.
4,380,867
METHOD FOR MAKING ELECTRICALLY
CONDUCTIVE PENETRATIONS INTO THIN FILMS
Jorma O. Antson, Espoo, Finland, assignor to Oy LohJa AB,
Virkkala, Finland
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,668
Oaims priority, application Finland, Aug. 1, 1980, 802420
Int. a.^ HOIL 27/14
U.S. a. 29—590 11 Oaims
table in said increments, single opposing power cylinders
mounted on said table, said cylinders projecting respective
aligned extensible and retractable guide and push rods there-
from, means for movably supporting a holding fixture interme-
diately of said rods and independently of said table for move-
ment in a second sense substantially at right angles to table
movements and in increments each corresponding to the dis-
tance between adjacent rows of perforations, whereby said
rods may be aligned with successive perforations of a row of
perforations by a movement of said table incrementally in said
first sense and with successive rows by a movement of said
fixture incrementally in said second sense, tube support means
intermediately of said push rod and said fixture providing a
resting place for a tube to align with said rods, and means for
delivering tubes one at a time to said support means.
4,380,869
ELECTRIC SHAVER OF RECIPROCATING DRIVE TYPE
HAVING TRIMMER BLADE
Kenzo Shirakawa; Masao Matsumoto, and Shinsaku Yasunaka,
all of Hikone, Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Works,
Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,278
Claims priority, application Japan, May 15, 1980, 55-64930
Int. a.3 B26B 19/10
U.S. a. 30—34.1 10 Oaims
1. A method for making electrically conductive penetrations
into an interior layer of thin films, particularly from the outside
surface of thin films grown by means of deposition as layers at
a temperature of 200° to 700° C, comprising placing a metallic
substance on said interior layer within each desired penetration
area before the preparation of the following layer, wherein
such a metallic substance is used whose melting point is lower
and boiling point higher than said growing temperature of the
layers, and growing at least one additional layer on said inte-
rior layer, whereby the metallic substance, which is molten at
said growing temperature prevents the formation of layers
above itself and, when hardening, forms the desired electri-
cally conductive penetrations.
4,380,868
TUBE LOADING APPARATUS
Robert E. Hall, Dayton, Ohio, assignor to United Aircraft Prod-
ucts, Inc., Dayton, Ohio
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,717
Int. a.J B23P 19/04. 15/26
U.S. a. 29—726 8 Claims
1. Apparatus for loading tubes one at a time into header and
baffle members formed with rows of perforations and assem-
bled in a holding fixture to complete a tubular core of a heat
exchanger or the like, including a table movable in a first sense
in increments corresponding to the distance between adjacent
perforations of a row of perforations, means for moving said
1. An electric shaver, comprising:
a housing,
an outer blade frame mounted to the upper end of said hous-
ing,
an outer blade holding means for detachably holding said
outer blade frame,
an outer blade mounted to said outer blade frame,
inner blade means disposed inside said outer blade frame for
cooperating with said outer blade,
a motor being housed within said housing,
a power supply for supplying an electric power to said
motor,
first coupling means for coupling said motor and said inner
blade means for imparting a reciprocating movement to
said inner blade means,
trimmer blade means supported by said housing and pro-
vided to selectively assume a first state thereof being
retracted toward said housing or a second state thereof
being protruded outward of said housing,
displacement means coupled to said trimmer blade means in
said housing and to be displaceable to a first position for
placing said trimmer blade means to said first state or a
second position for placing said trimmer blade means to
said second state,
second coupling means for coupling said motor and said
trimmer blade means for impariing a reciprocating move-
ment to said trimmer blade means on the occasion of said
second state of said trimmer blade means,
first operation means provided to be operable from outside
said housing to be capable of selectively assuming a first,
second and third positions,
switching means associated with said first operation means
for supplying an electric power from said power supply to
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
813
said motor only at said second and third positions of said
first operation means,
first acting means associated with said switching means for
acting upon said displacement means in association with
displacement of said first operation means to said third
position for displacing said displacement means to said
second position, and
second operation means provided independently of said first
operation means to be operable from outside said housing
for acting upon said displacement means for displacing
said displacement means to said second (Ktsition indepen-
dently of said first acting means.
stud secured to said screw and conjointly moveable therewith,
said draw stud having a threaded end receiving the punch to
4,380,870
VACUUM HAIR CUTTING DEVICE
Gary D. Otto, Tahlequah, Okla., assignor to Feather Quick P"" *"^ P""*^" '"^"8^ '^e sheet matenal while eliminating
Companies, Inc., Tahlequah, Okla. fnctional thread drag between the punch and the draw stud.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,668
Int. C1.3 B26B 19/44 4 380 872
U.S. a. 30—133 4 Claims p,p£ nTTER'S COMBINATION INSTRUMENT
^.
/
/
1. An improved hair cutting apparatus used in conjunction
with a vacuum suction source comprising a hollow cylindrical
main housing connectible at an upper end to a vacuum hose
and having a lower end disposable at a predetermined fixed
distance away from the head of a person whose hair is to be
cut, a supporting means extending from one side of said main
housing for securing a pair of scissors in a constant transversely
oriented position, a stabilizing means extending from a side
opposite said one side of said main housing for supporting the
cutting tips of said pair of scissors, and a member having a slot
therein mounted in said main housing beneath and parallel to
said pair of scissors; and whereby placing the lower end of said
main housing at said predetermined distance away from said
head and activating said vacuum suction source draws a por-
tion of hair into said main housing and through said slot to be
cut by said pair of scissors.
4,380,871
MECHANICAL PUNCH DRIVER
Larry G. Adlenuui, Rockford, 111., assignor to Ex-Cell-O Corpo-
ration, Troy, Mich.
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,451
Int. a.3 B26F 1/32
VS. a. 30—360 6 Claims
1. A mechanical operator for driving a punch through sheet
material to remove a slug therefrom so as to form a clearance
hole in the sheet material comprising a thrust housing, a recir-
culating ball screw unit having a screw and a rotatable nut,
means for supporting said rotatable nut within said thrust
housing for rotation with respect thereto, input drive means
including a pair of relatively rotatable operating handles for
producing a rotative input force on said rotatable nut to cause
non-rotative axiaUy linear movement of said screw, a draw
Qaude D. Moran, R.D. #1, Butler, Fa. 16001
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 212,131
Int. a.3 GOIB 3/38
U.S. a. 33—174 N
17 Claims
1. An adjustable instrument adapted for use by a pipefitter
for positioning and weld joining pipe lengths with a variation
of respectively different common fittings, comprising:
a rigid squaring tool having an elongated major bar portion
with coextensive first and second straight edges and with
a fixed leg portion extending from an end of the bar por-
tion and at a right angle to the first straight edge of the
major bar portion and in coplanar orientation to the bar
portion,
a carriage means slidably secured to the bar portion,
a rigid adjustable leg slidably secured to the carriage means
in a first position of extension thereon such that the adjust-
able leg extends transversely from the first straight edge of
the bar portion and coextensive and parallel to the fixed
leg portion,
the carriage means including inwardly-contained manually-
releasable locking means permitting the adjustable leg to
be selectively slid along the bar portion to adjust the
distance between it and the fixed leg portion,
the carriage means being adapted to permit selective re-
moval and reinstallation of the adjustable leg on the bar
portion, from the first position of extension to a second
position of extension wherein the adjustable leg extends
from the second straight edge of the bar portion which is
opposite to the first straight edge from which it projected
in the first position of extension,
a spacer block section integral to the carriage means and
extending, when the rigid adjusuble leg is in its first posi-
tion of extension, from the second straight edge of the bar
portion a distance of not less than the difference between
the radius of any typical pipe length and the radius taken
816
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
at the widest point of the widest standard fitting for such
typical pipe length, and
the spacer block section having an outer end unemcumbered
face which is parallel to the straight edge of the major bar
portion, said end face engaging the pipe length when the
rigid adjustable leg is in its second position of extension.
4,380,873
RESET aRCUIT FOR ZERO FORCE TOUCH PROBE
John W. Ayres, and Harold S. James, both of Lynchburg, Va.,
assignors to The Babcock A Wilcox Company, New Orleans,
La.
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,865
Int. a.5 GOIB 7/28
U.S. a. 33—174 P 1 Qaim
:.[3 .•- [f]
q;
to an edge of said sign blank by affixing said sheet to said
carnage with indicia defining a First reference line on said sheet
registered with indicia defining a second reference line having
a predetermined position in said first direction with respect to
ifi
'^---^-^\
a third reference line, and determining the position in said first
direction of said sign blank by registering said edge of said sign
blank with said third reference line, whereby the positions in
said first direction of said rows of characters relative to said
edge of said sign blank may be predetermined.
1. An automatically resetable co-ordinate measuring system
for determining the relative dimensions of an object compris-
ing movable means for measuring the relative dimensions of
the surfaces defining said object as said movable measuring
means is moved along said object, means for displaying said
relative dimensions determined by said measuring means,
means for indicating when contact with a surface of said object
has been made by said measuring means, said indicating means
being actuated at the instant said measuring means makes
contact with a said surface and remaining actuated until said
measuring means makes contact with another of said surfaces
being measured, means for comparing said relative dimensions
displayed on said displaying means with the relative location of
said measuring means, memory means for storing a series of
measured dimensions, and said comparing means actuating said
memory means to accept the measured dimension from said
measuring means and causing said displaying means to be reset
when the difference between said relative dimensions and said
relative location exceeds a predetermined value.
4,380,874
SIGN-MAKING METHOD
Gregory R. Waldron, West Oneonta, N.Y., assignor to Scott
Machine Development Corporation, Walton, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 905,748, May 15, 1978, abandoned. This
application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,657
Int. a.3 B41B 7/00, B32B 31/16; G09F 7/76
U.S. a. 33—184.5 6 Oaims
1. A method of forming one or more rows of characters on
a sign blank by transfer of successive characters from a carrier
sheet, which includes steps of moving a carriage carrying said
carrier sheet in a first direction through discrete distances,
each of which is an integral multiple of a predetermined dis-
tance to locate successive characters to be transferred along
the row of characters being formed, characterized by predeter-
mining the position in said first direction of said sheet relative
4,380,875
WHEEL ALIGNMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD
Lowell H. Erickson, 1495 S. Steele St., Denver, Colo. 80210;
Marcellus S. Merrill, 678 Lafayette, Denver, Colo. 80218, and
David Chrisp, 7705 Walker Dr., Littleton, Colo. 80123
Continuation of Ser. No. 172,988, Jul. 28, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jul. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 396,422
Int. Q\} GOIB 5/255
U.S. a. 33—203.13 11 Qaims
1. A wheel aligning apparatus for determining dynamically
the toe and camber angles of a wheel while a pair of rolls are
rotating and using these angles in the alignment of the wheel
but while the rolls no longer rotate, the apparatus comprising:
first means for determining the dynamic toe angle and dy-
namic camber angle of the wheel while the rolls are rotat-
ing;
second means responsive to said first means for determining
the change in the toe angle and the change in the camber
angle due to alignment of the wheel while the rolls are not
rotating, said second means including means for providing
a conversion factor for use in outputting a signal corre-
sponding to the change in camber angle; and
third means responsive to said first means and said second
means for combining the dynamically determined toe
angle and the change in toe angle and for combining the
dynamically determined camber angle and the change in
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
817
camber angle to provide the toe angle and camber angle
during alignment of the wheel.
4,380,876
RETICLE AND METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME
Ronald A. Strassburg, Ruidoso, N. Mex., assignor to W. R.
Weaver Co., EI Paso, Tex.
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 205,028
Int. a.3 F41G 1/38; G02B 27/32
U.S. a. 33—297 4 Claims
1. A reticle comprising a pair of relatively identical planar
members, each planar member being formed from a unitary
sheet of stock material and having an arcuate peripheral part
surrounding two generally semi-circular hollow areas and an
integral cross hair part extending between opposing sides of
said arcuate peripheral part and separating said two generally
semi-circular hollow areas, said members being permanently
fixed in abutting relationship, said cross hair part on one mem-
ber being substantially perpendicular and in fixed relative
position to said cross hair part on the other member.
leaving along an exit direction that is at least 45* different
from the incident direction,
and wherein the fiuid flow i:> substantially uniform over its
entire cross-section at a distance from the grating,
said inlet fluid flow deflection grating being in the shape of
a panel constituted by at least one thin, corrugated, perfo-
rated sheet, each corrugation being in the form of at least
two substantially plane flank strips, said plane flank strips
and said corrugations formed thereby extending length-
wise in a direction perpendicular to both the fluid flow
incident and exit directions, said plane flank strips being
spaced from each other and being joined by a bottom strip
to define with said plane flank strips a valley opening to
the fluid flow incident direction, at least some of the
perforations in said sheet being through said bottom strips,
and wherein said perforations extend over at least fifty
percent of the surface area of said bottom strips.
4,380,878
OUTSOLE
Joseph J. Skaja, Newburyport, Mass., assignor to Keds Corpora-
tion, Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,265
Int. a.' A43C 15/00: A43B 5/00
U.S. a. 36—67 D 16 Claims
^.
28-^
4,380,877
FLUID aRCULATION APPARATUS USING FLUID
FLOW DEFLECTION GRATING
Jacques Poux, Grenoble, France, assignor to AIsthom-Atlan-
tique, Paris, France
Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,397
Qaims priority, application France, Jul. 23, 1980, 80 16221
Int. a.3 F26B 21/02
U.S. a. 34—225 5 Qaims
1^
11, 25 10
1. An outsole for an athletic shoe comprising:
a flexible integrally molded sole unit,
said sole unit having multiplicity of outwardly extending
receptacles integrally molded at the ball and heel portions
of said sole unit, said receptacles having integral wall
portions,
plugs demountably held by said receptacles, said plugs hav-
ing surfaces in contact with and held by said wall p)ortions,
said sole unit having an outwardly extending bar unit around
the perimeter thereof, and
said perimeter bar being discontinuous and tapered in height
in the region adjacent the toe of said shoe.
1. A low head loss fluid circulation apparatus, said apparatus
comprising:
duct means defining a circulation fluid flow path,
a drying chamber or the like within said flow path formed by
an upstream inlet grating spanning said flow path and
spaced from a downstream outlet grating which also spans
said flow path and with said gratings extending generally
parallel to each other and perpendicular to the flow path,
and wherein said flow path duct means include at least an
oblique flow path portion upstream of said inlet grating
and leading thereto,
and wherein said inlet grating comprises a fluid flow deflec-
tion grating for receiving an incident flow of fluid arriving
along an incident direction defined by said first oblique
flow path portion and for forming an exit flow of fluid
4,380,879
MATRIX DISPLAY
Lloyd Seibert, Coenr d'AIene, Id., assignor to American Sign A
Indicator Corporation, Spokane, Wash.
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,359
Int. a.3 G09F 3/04; G08B 5/00; G09F 3/18; G08B 23/00
U.S. a. 40—447 9 Qaims
1. A movable display assembly adapted for use in a spatial
1029 O.G.— 38
818
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
arrangement that includes a plurality of individually controlled
assemblies, said display assembly comprising:
an upright frame surrounding an open window;
bearing means at opposite sides of the window on said frame
along a transverse bearing axis;
an armature pivotally mounted by said bearing means for
angular movement relative to said frame about the bearing
axis;
a thin disk fixed to said armature, said disk having visually
contracting outer surfaces at opposite sides thereof;
and meags on said frame and armature for pivoting the
armature and disk about the bearing axis between two or
more alternate angular positions relative to the frame;
said disk being removably mounted on said armature to one
side of said armature axis by a pair of opposed slotted tabs
releasably engaging opposite side edges of the disk, said
tabs being in alignment with one another to one side of
said armature axis;
one tab being wider than the other;
said disk having notches along opposed side edges thereof
complementary in width to the respective tabs, whereby
the disk is properly indexed on the armature by matching
of the respective notches and tabs.
lever including a notch therein for engaging first and second
cocking pins, respectively, which retain said firing pin in said
cocked position until said cocking pin is lifted from said notch;
a firing mechanism frame mounted in a fixed relationship to the
body of said firearm; said first and second cockingpins being
fixedly mounted to first and second cocking pin levers rotat-
ably mounted to said frame to remove said cocking pin from
said notch in response to upward rotation thereof; a trigger
attached to a trigger plate mounted for upward and downward
movement in response to selective operation of said trigger; an
improvement to said firing mechanism comprising in combina-
tion:
a control lever slidably mounted on said frame for move-
ment in a direction substantially parallel to the longitudi-
nal axis of said first and second firing pins;
bias means connected to said control lever for urging said
control lever forward and downward onto to said trigger
plate;
a stop member mounted on said control lever;
a blocking member mounted on said frame;
means at the rear end of said firing pin lever for engaging
said control lever to prevent forward movement thereof
4,380,880
ILLUMINATED SIGN ASSEMBLY
James Gandy, Mississauga, Canada, assignor to Signtech Inc.,
Mississauga, Canada
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,491
Int. a.J G09F 13/04
U.S. a. 40-564 2 Claims
10—
1. An illuminated sign assembly comprising a casing having
a top, a wall extending downwardly from the top, the top
having a substantially horizontal shelf and a downwardly
extending lip below the shelf, the wall having a Hange with a
free end portion resting on the shelf, a hinge member having a
generally U-shaped section with upwardly extending spaced
arms connected by a bight, the bight being located below the
downwardly extending lip of the top with one arm extending
upwardly on one side of the lip below the fiange, means de-
tachably securing the fiange to said one arm of the hinge mem-
ber, and the other arm of the hinge member extending up-
wardly on the opposite side of the lip to the said one arm to
retain the wall in assembly with the top while permitting lim-
ited upward pivotal movement of the wall relative to the top
by pivoting of the free end of the fiange on the shelf.
4,380,881
HIGH SPEED HRING MECHANISM FOR
SINGLE-TRIGGER DOUBLE-BARRELED HREARM
Osborne Klavestad, Sliakopee, Minn., assignor to The Olde
Savannah Arms Company, Savannah, Ga.
Division of Ser. No. 114,839, Jan. 24, 1980, Pat. No. 4,328,635,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 900,155, Apr. 26, 1978,
abandoned. This application Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,074
Int. a.3 F41C 19/00
MS. a. 42—42 R 1 Qaim
1. In a double-barreled, single-trigger firearm, including a
firing mechanism comprising a cocking plate for urging a first
firing pin and a second firing pin into a cocked position, each
of said first and second firing pins being attached to a firing pin
by said biasing means when said first firing pin is in said
cocked position;
said control lever including a first actuator portion for en-
gaging said first cocking pin lever and for providing up-
ward rotation thereof in response to upward movement of
said trigger plate;
said first actuator portion being mounted on said control
lever in a spaced-apart relationship relative to said stop
member so that said stop member travels a sufficient dis-
tance to engage said blocking member in response to said
first actuator portion moving said first cocking pin lever a
predetermined distance to disengage said first cocking pin
from said first notch;
said stop member being responsive to subsequent downward
movement of said trigger plate to move under said block-
ing member; and
said control lever being responsive to said downward move-
ment of said trigger plate to be moved forwardly by said
bias means to engage said second actuator portion of said
control lever with said second cocking pin lever, so that
subsequent upward movement of said trigger plate causes
said second firing pin to be released.
4,380,882
LONG LIFE PURSE SEINE RING
Dominick J. Flammini, 7946 Laurelridge Rd., San Diego, Calif.
92120
FUed Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,613
Int. a.3 AOIK 73/12
U.S. a. 43—14 5 Qaims
1. The combination in a seine net assembly, comprising:
(a) a seine net having ring ties attached thereto;
(b) a pursing cable;
(c) a seine ring, in plurality, mounted on said pursing cable;
(d) each said seine ring being an internally recticylindrical
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
819
annuius slidably mounted on said pursing cable, each
annulus having radially outwardly extending portions
having a plurality of means for connection therein selec-
tively connected to one ring tie at points in said radially
extending portions spaced circumferentially of said seine
ring, so that cable wear on said annulus is distributed
when said ring tie is connected to said means for connec-
tion at said points successively during use of the seine net
assembly.
4,380,883
FISHING SIGNAL APPARATUS
Edward Greaux, 390 New Brunswick Ave., Perth Amboy, N.J.
08861
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,349
Int. CI.' AOIK 97/12
U.S. CI. 43—17 10 Qaims
substantially transversely across the rear portion of said
cavity;
(b) a streamer element which is received in said cavity and
extends through said ring-like locking portion;
(c) a wire bail having at least one end which is attached to
said body in a manner which allows pivotal movement of
said bail relative to said body, said bail being positioned on
said body so that it is detachably receivable in said locking
A-
N^
_J2
[T
7 \\
/
K
7
^
Tl !
?6 r
lil
-20
-28
portion with a portion of said bail extending across said
cavity to retain said streamer element therein, whereby
said bail and said body including said locking portion
thereof cooperate to define a clasp on said lure for detach-
ably receiving and retaining said streamer element in said
cavity;
(d) means attached to said body for the connection thereof to
a pulling means; and
(e) hook means attached to said body.
V".
^"
4,380,885
HOOP TOY
Tadashi Komagata, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tsukuda Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223.929
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 18, 1980, 55-
11S962[U]
Int. C\? A63H 33/02, 1/32; B25G 3/00
U.S. a. 46—220 1 Qaim
1. A fishing signal apparatus comprises a block, means to
clampingly releasably and slideably engage said block to se-
lected portions of the length of a fishing rod adjacent its distal
most end, said means to engage said block including said block
having a slot therein, said slot having a longitudinal axis, said
longitudinal axis of said slot being configured to be coaxially
aligned with the longitudinal axis of said fishing rod when said
block is installed at any location along the length of said fishing
rod, a spring wire, one end of said spring wire fixedly secured
to said block, said spring wire having a bend, said bend being
located intermediate said block and the free end of said spring
wire, whereby said free end of said spring wire is disposed
upwardly and outwardly from said longitudinal axis of said
slot, whereby said spring wire resides in a plane, said longitudi-
nal axis of said slot passing through said plane, a bell, means to
clampingly slidingly engage said bell to selected portions of the
length of said spring wire.
4,380,884
nSHING LURE
Robert B. Pond, P.O. Box 45, South Attleboro, Mass. 02703
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,175
Int. a.3 AOIK 85/00
U.S. a. 43—42.09 3 Qaims
1. An artificial fishing lure having a detachable streamer
comprising:
(a) a weighted body having the locking portion of a clasp
formed therein and having a recessed cavity formed
therein adjacent to said locking portion, said locking
portion being of ring-like configuration and extending
1. A hoop toy which is easily disassemblable comprising a
plurality of members in the form of arc segments and integral
fastening means for removably connecting said members to
each other; said fastening means comprising a projection inte-
grally formed in one end of each member and a socket inte-
grally formed in the other end of each member, said projec-
tions and sockets being flexible and elastic such that a larger
diameter portion of the projection can, with momentary distor-
tion of either or both of the projection and socket, be forcibly
inserted through a smaller diameter portion of the socket, with
said projection and socket thereafter returning to their original
shapes; said socket being corrugated to form a plurality of
circumferential ribs along its entire length and having an in-
wardly directed guide ridge extending longitudinally out-
wardly from the end of said socket proximal to said member
along only a part of the length of said socket; said projection
being corrugated from the end proximal to said member to
form a plurality of circumferential ribs along a part of its length
corresponding to the length of said socket and thereafter being
820
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
tapered to its distal end, and having a guide groove along its
entire length adapted to cooperate with said guide ridge; and
wherein the interior surface portion of said socket and the
exterior surface portion of said projection corresponding
thereto closely conform as to dimensions and shape.
4,380,886
METHOD OF PROMOTING WATER TRANSPORT
THROUGH SOIL
Evan E. Koslow, Westport, Conn., and J. Samuel Batcheider,
Pasadena, Calif., assignors to Koslow Technologies, Inc.,
Westport, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 147,911, May 8, 1980. This application Jan.
30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,938
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 7, 1996,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' C09K 77/00
U.S.a.47-58 16aaims
said faces, said interior web extending the full height of
the block from the cross-wise web to the one face,
,♦-'-^0
r ^.^/^ ^£>^^ f
said webs adjacent the ends of said block each formed with-
al least one horizontal slot extending through the web,
and,
horizontal slots in the cross-wise web adjacent the end webs.
1. A method of promoting and controllmg the transport of
water through medium and coarse grained soils comprising the
step of applying to medium or coarse grained soil a soil amend-
ment composition at a level of at least 0.05 but less than 20
parts per million parts by weight of dry soil, said composition
comprising a substantially linear, substantially water-soluble
hydrophilic polymer of ethylene oxide having a molecular
weight greater than 50,000, said polymer having one or more
functional groups disposed along the polymer chain, said poly-
mer chain comprising one or more segments characterized by
an absence of said functional group therein and a minimum
length, said minimum length of the polymer chain segment
being at least 0. 1 micrometer when said polymer cham segment
is secured to none of said functional groups at either end
thereof or to one of said functional groups only at one end
thereof and at least 0.2 micrometer when said polymer chain
segment is secured to a respective one of said functional groups
at each end thereof, said functional group or groups being
more capable of attaching said polymer to a solid soil phase
than is said polymer chain segment and said polymer chain
segment being adapted to extend into an aqueous soil phase.
4,380,887
INSULATED STRUCTURAL BLOCK
Kenneth S. Lee, 1711 PaJomar, Ann Arbor, Mich. 48103
FUed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,018
Int. a.3 E04C 1/40; E04B 2/00
U.S. a. 52-405 23 Qaims
1. In a structural block having a plurality of holes extending
therethrough defined by webs and faces of the block,
one of said webs comprising a cross-wise web extending
substantially parallel to the faces of the block,
two of said webs substantially adjacent the ends of the block,
extending between the faces of the block and joining the
cross-wise web to said faces,
at least one interior web joining the cross-wise web to one of
4,380,888
MOUTHPLATE FOR HORSES OR THE LIKE
Dennie C. Lanham, Southern Pines, N.C., assignor to Raymond
M. Williams, Southern Pines, N.C.
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,990
Int. a.3 B68B 7/00; A61D 5/00
U.S. a. 54-8 3 Qaims
1. A mouthplate for insertion into the mouth of a horse or
the like for use during such time as the horse wears a bridle
having a bit, said mouthplate to prevent the interior cheeks of
the horse from being cut or abraded by contacting rough edges
of the teeth as pressure is applied to the bit, the mouthplate
comprising: a support means, said support means including an
inverted u-shaped portion, said u-shaped portion fitting against
the roof of the mouth, said support means for positioning
between certain teeth of the horse, a flange member, said
flange member joined to said support means, a securing means,
said securing means comprising a at least one substantially
circular flexible finger member, said at least one finger member
forming an opening through which a bridle bit can be releas-
ably attached, said securing means being positioned below a
portion of said support means and said support means extend-
ing forward of said flange member and forward of said secur-
ing means whereby said support means is positioned between
the canine teeth and the molars of the horse.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
821
4,380,889
CUTTER BAR FOR RICE COMBINES
Benny Isbell, P.O. Box 195, Humnoke, Ark. 72072
FUed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,718
Int. CI,3 AOID 55/02
U.S. a. 56—296
12aaims
bath, means to guide the yam from said primary heater to said
cooling bath, a belt false twisting mechanism, means to supply
the yam to said false twisting mechanism, means to take-up the
yam false twisted in said mechanism, means to supply a cooling
liquid to said cooling bath and means operably associated with
said cooling bath to purify and recirculate cooling water from
said cooling bath to said means to supply a cooling liquid, said
means to purify and recirculate the cooling liquid including a
1. In a grain reaper for a rice combine or the like having a
reel, a cutter mounting bar mounted below said reel, and a
reciprocating driver arm for a cutter blade bar, an improved
cpciprocating cutter assembly comprising,
a stationary cutter element having a length not substantially
less than the width of said reel,
said stationary cutter element including a plurality of fixed
bars having mounting holes near the rear edge thereof to
accept fasteners for mounting to the under side of said
cutter mounting bar, holes near the forward edge thereof
for the attachment of cutting blades and further having a
width sufficient to extend forward of the front edge of said
cutter mounting bar,
a plurality of fixed cutting elements with triangular blades
secured along the top of said bars with a predetermined
fixed blade pitch of two inches, each of said elements
having a pair of holes therein and being secured by rivets
passmg through said pair of holes and corresponding holes
in said fixed bars,
a moving cutter bar at least substantially as long as said
stationary cutter element with means for coupling one end
thereof to said reciprocating driver arm,
a plurality of generally triangular moving cutting blades
secured along the bottom of said moving cutter bar with a
predetermined moving blade pitch of three inches, said
blades being secured by removable fasteners,
each said moving blade having two sharpened serrated
cutting edges,
said moving cutter bar being mounted above said fixed bars
just forward of said cutter mounting bar with the rear of
the fixed cutting blades and the rear of said moving cut-
ting blades approximately in alignment,
a plurality of hold-down clips being secured at their rear
ends to said cutter mounting bar, having an arch extending
over said moving cutter bar, and having a foot at the front
end in sliding contact with the upper surface of said mov-
ing cutting blades.
! n —
ii2 .14
r-|— y«4
■^ —^- , III Ji ••
.po
TO • fi^'l
-^
H'
(o) J
L_ -
- >■
>j
'■U,44
sump connected to said cooling bath, a reservoir operably
associated with said sump and located above said cooling bath,
pump means connected to said sump and said reservoir to
pump liquid from said sump to said reservoir and filter means
mounted between said pump means and said reservoir to filter
particles of matter from said cooling liquid, said means to
purify including a metering pump to periodically supply chlo-
rinated liquid to said sump.
4,380,891
DEVICE FOR FEEDING A LIQUID THREAD-TREATING
MEDIUM TO THE THREAD IN A DOUBLE THREAD
TWISTING MACHINE
Gerhard Wehrmeister, Kempten, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Saurer-Allma GmbH, Kempten, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,619
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 16,
1980, 8019080[U]
Int. a.' DOIH 13/30. 7/86
U.S. a. 57—296 9 Qaims
4,380,890
BELT FALSE TWISTING APPARATUS
William H. Stewart, Jr., Campobello, S.C, assignor to Milliken
Research Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
FUed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,518
Int. a.3 D02G 1/02; DOIH 13/30
VJS. a. 57—286 1 Claim
1. A false twist crimping machine comprising: a primary
heater, means to supply a yam to said primary heater, a cooling
1. In a device for feeding a liquid thread-treating medium to
the thread in a double thread twisting machine, including a
wiping head of a wear-resistant material which extends from
below into an annular recess of an overflow plate and into a
thread running plane, which is arranged in a housing, which
has an opening therein which extends substantially parallel to
822
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
the spindle axis and which has an insert in the opening inducing
a capillary action which transports thread-treating medium
from a supply pipeline to the upper port of the opening, the
improvement comprising wherein the insert is a pin made of a
rigid material and having a noncylindrical cross section so that
between the outer surface of the pin and the inner surface of
the opening small gaps are formed which produce the capillary
action.
4,380,892
FRICTION SPINNING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR
CLEANING
Alan Parker, 7 Darvel Close, Breightmet, Bolton, Lancashire;
Peter J. Dickinson, 30 Narcissus Ave., Helmshore, Rossen-
dale, Lancashire; Douglas O. Qough, 26 Parkwood Dr., Raw-
tenstall, Rossendale, Lancashire, and William M. Famhill,
Burnley, all of England
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,917
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 8, 1980,
8032418
Int. a J DOIH 7/885
U.S. a. 57—401 13 Qaims
:^ ./S
1. Apparatus for open end spinning of yarn, comprising two
bodies of rotation each defining a surface and arranged such
that in an operating position the surfaces are closely adjacent at
a line of closest approach so as to define between them at that
line a yarn formation area, a fibre feed duct for feeding fibres
into the yarn formation area which feed duct terminates in the
operating position closely adjacent the surfaces, means mount-
ing the two bodies and the feed duct such that relative move-
ment is provided between the feed duct and one of the bodies
away from and back to the operating position in a direction
transverse to the line and to increase and decrease respectively
the spacing therebetween and means for defining the operating
position such that the return to the operating position is made
without the need for resetting.
4 380 893
COMPRESSOR BLEEDAIR CONTROL APPARATUS
AND METHOD
Richard F. Stokes, Phoenix; James D. Timm, Tempe; Stephen R.
LaCroix, Scottsdale, and Milton R. Adams, Tempe, all of
Ariz., assignors to The Garrett Corporation, Los Angeles,
Calif.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,794
Int. a.3 F04D 27/02
U.S. a. 60-39.07 23 Qaims
1. A system for supplying gas discharged from a compressor
or the like to gas-operated apparatus having a variable gas fiow
rate demand, the compressor having an inlet opening and
means for variably adjusting the area of such inlet opening,
said system comprising:
(a) duct means for flowing to the gas-operated apparatus gas
discharged from the compressor;
(b) means defining a surge outlet passage from said duct
means;
(c) surge flow regulating means operable to variably restrict
gas flow outwardly through said surge outlet passage;
(d) means for sensing the value of a predetermined flow-
related parameter within said duct means and generating
an error signal having a magnitude indicative of the devia-
tion between the sensed value of said parameter and a
desired value thereof, said sensing and generating means
including comparator means for comparing the sensed
value of said parameter to a set point value thereof and
responsively generating said error signal;
(e) control means for utilizing said error signal to operate
\ ^ ^ ^ 4C
WIT.
'<-' 5<' 56 50
said surge fiow regulating means in a manner providing an
essentially constant minimum gas fiow rate through said duct
means despite fluctuations in the flow rate of gas received by
the gas-operated apparatus; and
(0 means associated with said comparator means for varying
said set point value of said parameter in response to varia-
tion in the area of the compressor inlet opening.
4 380 894
FUEL SUPPLY CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A TURBINE
ENGINE
Toshimi Abo, Yokohama, and Hideo Iwatsu, Yokosuka, both of
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited,
Yokohoma, Japan
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 184,902
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1979, 54-115969
Int. a.3 F02C 9/28
U.S. a. 60—39.161 7 Qaims
1. A fuel supply control system for a gas turbine engine
comprising:
a turbine output shaft;
a compressor shaft;
a fuel control valve varying the ratio of an energized period
and a deenergized period depending on the engine operat-
ing condition;
first means for generating a first signal indicative of said
compressor shaft revolution speed;
second means for determining a target turbine output shaft
revolution speed based on said first signal value and gener-
ating a reference signal having a value indicative of said
target turbine output shaft revolution speed, said second
means increasing said target turbine output shaft revolu-
tion speed when said first signal value is below a predeter-
mined value;
third means for determining an actual turbine output shaft
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
823
revolution speed and generating a second signal indicative
of the determined actual turbine output shaft revolution
speed; and
fourth means for comparing said second signal value with
said reference signal value in order to determine the differ-
ence between the actual turbine output shaft revolution
speed and target speed and for determining a duty cycle of
a pulse signal based on the determined difference to con-
trol the ratio of the energized period and the deenergized
period of said fuel control valve to reduce the difference
in order to drive the engine at a constant speed.
4,380,896
ANNULAR COMBUSTOR HAVING CERAMIC LINER
David J. Wiebe, Palm Beach Gardens, Fla., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,536
Int. a.' F02C 7/20
U.S. a. 60—39.32 8 Qaims
4,380,895
COMBUSTION CHAMBER FOR A GAS TURBINE
ENGINE HAVING A VARIABLE RATE DIFFUSER
UPSTREAM OF AIR INLET MEANS
Richard C. Adkins, Milton Keynes, England, assignor to Rolls-
Royce Limited, London, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 122,272, Feb. 19, 1980,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 62,418, Jul. 31, 1979, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 827,109, Aug. 23, 1977,
abandoned. This application Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 274,285
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 9, 1976,
37326/76; Feb. 20, 1979, 7906034
Int. C1.3 F02C 7/04, 9/14
U.S. a. 60—39.23 4 Claims
2>2>
1. A combustion chamber apparatus comprising a chamber
having first and second air inlet means and a variable rate
diffuser upstream of both of said first and second air inlet
means, said first air inlet means comprising a first annular duct
defined by part of the wall of the combustion chamber and an
intermediate casing, said combustion chamber having inlets for
the flow of primary, secondary and dilution air from the first
annular duct, said second air inlet meSns comprising a second
annular duct, said second annular duct including a part of the
wall of said combustion chamber having air inlets for fiow of
bypass air, said variable rate diffuser comprising a primary
duct arranged to receive a supply of compressed air and having
a downstream facing outlet, said primary duct being located in
a secondary duct, a fence in said'secondary duct downstream
of the outlet of said primary duct and downstream of a bleed
duct having a variable rate bleed, said bleed duct being in said
secondary duct upstream of said fence and capable of being
controlled to low and zero bleed conditions, said outlet of said
primary duct being smaller in diameter than the diameter of the
first air inlet means of the combustion chamber whereby flow
of fluid in said second annular duct is reversed and drawn from
said combustion chamber and is discharged from said second
duct into said first air inlet means and then into said combustion
chamber when said variable rate bleed duct is controlled to
low and zero bleed conditions.
1. An annular combustor for use in a turbme engme, com-
prising
an annular metal shell having a generally rectangular cross-
section and including an outer perimetrical wall, an inner
perimetrical wall, an aft wall, and a forward wall, the shell
having
an axially-projecting aft outlet at the intersection of the aft wall
and inner perimetrical wall,
inwardly-projecting spacer means mounted on the inner side of
the shell,
retaining clip means on the inner side of the shell adjacent to
the aft outlet, and
a plurality of heat-insulating liner segments on the inner side of
the metal shell, spaced therefrom by the spacer means, the
plurality of liner segments including
outer perimetrical endwall liner segments, curved to extend
along the outer perimetrical wall of the metal shell, each
endwall segment having, at each of its forward and aft sides,
a radially-inward-extending fiange whose edge ends in radi-
ally-inward-extending inwardly-offset tab means,
aft wall liner segments of planar arcuate shape, extending along
the aft wall of the metal shell, each having radially-inward-
extending outwardly-offset tab means at its radially inner
edge matable with the retaining clip means, and having
radially-outward-extending outwardly-offset tab means at its
radially outer edge matable with the tab means of the end-
wall segments, and further including
forward wall liner segments of generally planar arcuate shape,
each extending along the forward wall of the metal shell to
end in a radially-outward-extending edge having radially-
outward-extending outwardly-offset tab means matable with
the tab means of the endwall segments, and each of the
forward wall liner segments having an inward fiange at its
radially inner end extending along the inner perimetrical
wall ending in an aft-extending edge having aft-extending
outwardly-offset tab means matable with the retaining clip
means.
4,380,897
GAS TURBINE CONTAINING AN ADDITIONAL
COMBUSTION GAS COMPRESSOR
Tadeusz Zaba, Ennetbaden, Switzerland, assignor to BBC
Brown, Boveri A Company Limited, Baden, Switzerland
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,383
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 14, 1979,
10148/79
Int. a.5 F02C i/22. 7/36
U.S. a. 60—39.33 2 Claims
1. A gas turbine installation comprising:
a gas turbine;
824
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
a combustible gas compressor;
a gearing drive containing gears;
a coupling and an axial bearing for rotatably connecting the
gearing drive with the gas turbine;
a further coupling for rotatably connecting said gearing
drive with the combustible gas compressor;
a generator;
a power take-off shaft for driving said generator by means of
said geanng drive;
said gears of said gearing drive containing helical teeth;
said gears of said gearing drive including a drive gear;
pressure plates provided for said drive gear of said gearing
drive for thrust compensation; and
the helical teeth of the gears of said gearing drive possessing
helix angles selected such that a force acting upon the
pressure plates and resulting from a thrust applied by the
combustible gas compressor is reduced by axial compo-
nents of the helical teeth.
4,380,898
FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A GAS TURBINE
ENGINE
Hugh F. Cantwell, Littleover, England, assignor to Rolls-Royce
Limited, London, England
Filed Nov. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,816
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 21, 1979,
7944133
Int. a.J F02C 9/28
U.S. CI. 60-243 10 Claims
1. A fuel system for a gas turbine engine of the type having
a high pressure spool, means for producing signals propor-
tional to the rotational speed of the high pressure spool, engine
inlet pressure and at least one other parameter uniquely related
to the thrust produced by the engine, a thottle lever for select-
ing a desired value of engine thrust and a main fuel control unit
for adjusting the fuel flow to the engine in accordance with the
throttle lever angle and the measured rotational speed of the
high pressure spool so as approximately to produce the desired
thrust, and a trimmer for determining from the throttle lever
angle and said engine inlet pressure the desired value of said
other parameter, comparing the computed value with the
measured value, and applying a trimming input to the main fuel
control unit to trim this unit in accordance with the input to
provide a fuel flow to the engine which causes the engine to
produce the desired engine thrust.
4,380,899
REHEAT SYSTEMS FOR GAS TURBINE ENGINES
David O. Davies, Duffleld, and Michael Sherwood, Kegworth,
both of England, assignors to Rolls-Royce Limited, London,
England
Filed Jan. 19, 1978, Ser. No. 874,123
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 21, 1977,
2479/77
Int. a.' F02K i/m
U.S. CI. 60-261 13 aaims
X 29 "^ 50 -^
1. A reheat system for a gas turbine engine having a jet pipe,
said reheat system comprising:
a plurality of gutters, said gutters being annular in shape and
being coaxially arranged in the jet pipe of said engine;
fuel injection means, said fuel injection means being operable
for injecting fuel into said jet pipe upstream of said plural-
ity of gutters, the radially outermost gutter having an
outer wall and an inner wall to define a substantially
channel shaped cross-section, said outer wall being lo-
cated adjacent to the wall of said jet pipe and extending
along the length of said jet pipe for a substantially further
distance than said inner wall, and said outer wall compris-
ing an upstream portion and a downstream portion, said
upstream portion being arranged at a small acute angle to
the axis of said jet pipe, and said downstream portion
being arranged substantially parallel to the axis of said jet
pipe.
4,380,900
APPARATUS FOR REMOVING SOLID COMPONENTS
FROM THE EXHAUST GAS OF INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES, IN PARTICULAR SOOT
COMPONENTS
Ernst Linder, Miihiacker; Rudolf Babitzka, Kirchberg; Johan-
nes Brettschneider, Ludwigsburg; Wilhelm Polach, Moglin-
gen; Wolf Wessel, Oberriexingen, and Gerhard Stumpp, Stutt-
gart, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,322
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 24,
1980, 3019991
Int. C\? FOIM 3/00
U.S. a. 60—275 4 Qaims
1. An apparatus for the removal of solid components from an
exhaust gas system of an internal combustion engine, compris-
ing an intake system, a spiral housing, a connecting line con-
necting said exhaust gas system with said spiral housing
to provide an inlet for said apparatus, a tubular housing
having an axial center, a circumferential wall and end portions,
said tubular housing being connected to said spiral housing, a
first electrode extending longitudinally along said axial center
of said housing and insulated therefrom, a perforated second
electrode surrounding said first electrode, a first annular cham-
ber between said wall and said second electrode within said
tubular housing, at least one exhaust recirculation line extend-
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
82S
ing from said first annular chamber to said intake system of said
engine to provide one outlet, a second annular chamber dis-
posed between said electrodes, said second annular chamber
being connected with said spiral housing to receive exhaust
gases discharged from said exhaust gas system, said spiral
housing discharging tangentially into said second annular
chamber, and a discharge line leading tangentially from said
second annular chamber back to said exhaust system to pro-
vide a second outlet.
1. An improved hydraulic percussion machine, comprising:
a body; a piston within said body; hydraulic passages including
a high pressure line and a valve associated with said body to
define an hydraulic operating circuit; an hydraulic pressure
accumulator disposed in axial alignment with and above said
piston; said accumulator having a separate gas-filled chamber
and a liquid-filled chamber, said accumulator being in commu-
nication with said piston for storing piston stroke energy
which accelerates said piston for striking against a tool dis-
posed at the working end of said machine; wherein the im-
provement comprises: providing said machine with a separate
stroke standardizing circuit for maintaining accumulator pres-
sure independent of pressure within said hydraulic operating
circuit; said standardizing circuit being provided by pressure
monitoring means disposed within hydraulic passages connect-
ing said operational circuit and said accumulator; said monitor-
ing means serving to monitor pressure in said accumulator
responsive to piston stroke; and said standardizing circuit being
self-regulating during machine operation to permit said piston
stroke to be independent of liquid pressure and volumetric
fiow in said high pressure line supplying said operating circuit.
4,380,902
SEALED OIL-BACKED DISPLACER SUSPENSION
DIAPHRAGM
Nicholas G. Vitale, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to Mechanical
Technology Incorporated, Latham, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,892
Int. a.3 F02G 1/04
U.S. a. 60—520 4 Qaims
4,380,901
HYDRAULIC PERCUSSION MACHINE
Pertti V. Rautimo, Lahti; Raimo Pelto-Huikko, Hki, and Esko
A. G. Ahlman, Kartano, all of Finland, assignors to Kone Oy,
Helsinki, Finland
Filed Jun. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 163,794
Claims priority, application Finland, Jun. 29, 1979, 792066
Int. a.3 FOIB 25/04; FOIL 25/04
U.S. CI. 60—418 6 Qaims
2S 27 28 2 5
li* M
1. A displacer suspension system for a free piston Stirling
engine having a hermetic vessel enclosing a working space
adapted to contain a working gas and in which oscillates a
displacer for displacing working gas back and forth between an
expansion space in said working space serially through a
heater, a regenerator, a cooler, and into a compression space in
said working space, and then back again; said suspension sys-
tem comprising:
a first diaphragm fixed at its center and outer edge to said
vessel and said displacer so that said diaphragm Hexes
between concave and convex shapes when said displacer
oscillates;
a rigid wall fastened to said displacer and extending gener-
ally parallel to said diaphragm; said rigid wall and said
diaphragm bounding two sides of a first cavity adapted to
be filled with an incompressible liquid;
a piston mounted in said vessel and axially fixed with respect
thereto;
a cylinder formed in said rigid wall and receiving said piston
for relative axial movement therewith;
a second diaphragm sealed at its outer peripheral edge to
said vessel and having one face defining with said rigid
wall a second cavity adapted to be filled with said incom-
pressible liquid, said cylinder communicating between
said cavities and being substantially sealed by said piston,
said second diaphragm flexing when said displacer moves
from its center position and storing energy in so flexing
that is returned to said displacer to restore said displacer
from an extreme axial position toward said center position;
whereby axial oscillation of said displacer causes said cylin-
der to reciprocate relative to said piston and causes said
first diaphragm to flex between said concave and convex
826
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
shapes, thereby displacing liquid in said first cavity, which
hquid displacement is accommodated by movement of
said piston in said cylinder, and leakage between said
cylinder and said piston being contained by and returned
from said second cavity.
4,380,903
ENTHALPY RESTORATION IN GEOTHERMAL
ENERGY PROCESSING SYSTEM
Hugh B. Matthews, Boylston, Mass., assignor to Sperry Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,434
Int. a.3 F03G 7/00
U.S. Q. 60—641.4 9 Claims
gasoline is connected thereto and operate in response to com-
pressed fluid when compressed fluid is connected thereto, and
whereby the means for regulating gasoline and compressed
iti7iH
fluid operates to regulate gasoline supplied to said cylinders
when gasoline is connected to said means for regulating and
operates to regulate compressed fluid supplied thereto when
compressed fluid is connected to said means for regulating.
1. An improved Rankine cycle machine of the type having a
turbine-motor means driven by a working fluid and having a
condenser for sub-cooling the working fluid, wherein the
improvement comprises
means for restoring enthalpy derived from superheated
exhaust vapor from said turbine-motor to said sub-cooled
working fluid, further comprising:
(a) coupling means for supplying said working fluid in said
superheated expanded exhaust form from said turbine-
motor means to working fluid transfer means,
(b) said transfer means further providing direct-contact
nonturbulent flow means for passively transferring
superheat and latent heat from said expanded exhaust to
said sub-cooled working fluid,
(c) means for condensing said working fluid from desuper-
heated vapor form in a pressurized environment to
create said sub-cooled working fluid in liquid form, said
condensing means having a coolant supply operating in
an ambient pressure environment independent of and
isolated from said working fluid, and
(d) coupling means for receiving said sub-cooled working
fluid from said condensing means and for supplying said
sub-cooled working fluid to said transfer means, while
restoring a pressure head to said sub-cooled working
fluid.
4,380,904
AIR FUEL ENGINE
Anthony T. Zappia, 12374 Brompton Rd., Carmel, Ind. 46032
Filed May 19, 1980, Ser. No. 151,137
Int. C\? FOIB 29/04
U.S. a. 60—712 6 Oaims
1. An engine comprising in combination:
a plurality of gasoline-fired cylinders operably responsive to
gasoline and compressed fluid;
means for regulating gasoline and compressed fluid supplied
to said cylinders, said means being connected to said
cylinders and;
valving means for connecting either gasoline or compressed
fluid to said means for regulating gasoline and compressed
fluid, said valve being regulated by the speed of said
engine and the pressure of the fluid,
whereby said cylinders operate in response to gasoline when
4,380,905
GAS TURBINE ENGINE COMBUSTION CHAMBERS
Richard B. Smart, Mickleover, and Sidney E. Slattery, Foston,
both of England, assignors to Rolls-Royce Limited, London,
England
Continuation of Ser. No. 127,546, Mar. 6, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,454
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 22, 1979,
791057
Int. a.3 P02G 1/055
U.S. a. 60—756 10 Claims
1. A gas turbine engine combustion chamber comprising:
an upstream wall member including an upstream wall por-
tion and a spaced downstream wall portion having a
downstream face, said upstream wall portion and said
spaced downstream wall portion deflning a chamber
therebetween arranged to receive a flow of cooling air
and to discharge the flow of cooling air therefrom, at least
one air spray fuel burner extending through said upstream
wall member for discharging in a downstream direction
into the combustion chamber a cone-shaped spray of fuel
and air mixture, at least a pair of facets on said down-
stream wall portion, said facets being set at an angle to the
downstream face of said downstream wall portion, one of
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
827
said p^ir of facets being positioned on one side of and
spaced from said air spray fuel burner and the other of said
pair of facets being positioned on the other side of and
spaced from said air spray fuel burner, each of said pair of
facets having a plurality of apertures for the flow of cool-
ing air from said chamber to said downstream wall, said
apertures in each facet being aligned to direct a flow of
cooling air across a width of the downstream face of said
downstream wall portion in a direction generally parallel
to a part of the downstream wall portion adjacent the
respective facet and in a direction toward said air spray
fuel burner to cause the cooling air to directly interact
with the spray of fuel and air mixture therefrom whereby
combustion in a primary zone of the combustion chamber
is improved.
4,380,906
COMBUSTION LINER COOLING SCHEME
James A. Dierberger, Hebron, Conn., assignor to United Tech-
nologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,317
Int. C[J F02C 7/12. 1/00
U.S. a. 60—757 5 Qaims
1. For a combustor having a louvered liner formed by a
plurality of louvers defming a combustion zone, the outer face
of said liner exposed to cooler air and the inner face of said
liner exposed to hot gases of combustion, said cooler air flow-
ing from an upstream to a downstream direction relative to the
flow of the hot gases in the combustion process, a radially
outward extending annular flange on one end of one of said
louvers of said liner spaced from an end of one of said louvers,
the next adjacent louver having an over-lying end abutting said
flange and defming therewith an outer annular cavity sur-
rounding said end of said louver, a radially outward extending
fin on said one end of said louver spaced intermediate the end
of said louver and said flange and spaced from said over-lying
end defining a pair of annular subchambers, the end of said
louver adjacent said fin having a lip and the next adjacent
louver being spaced from said lip to define an annular slot
communicating with said subchambers, an inlet opening facing
the flow of cooler air for admitting cooler air into said annular
chamber to impinge on said fin, change direction and flow
from one of said subchambers to the other of said subchambers
and through said slot into said combustion zone whereby the
cooling air in said subchambers coalesce into a film and dis-
charge as a film through said slot to adhere adjacent the inner
face of said liner as it flows downstream in said combustion
zone.
4,380,907
METHOD OF BOILING LIQUEHED GAS
Robert S. Barnes, Woking, and Raymond Harper, Harlow, both
of England, assignors to Cryoplants, Ltd., Edmonton, England
FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,737
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 14, 1980,
8022934
Int. a.3 F17C 7/02
U.S. a. 62—52 5 Claims
1. A method of boiling a liquefied gas in a heat exchanger
having cavities formed in heat exchange surfaces comprising
the steps of:
(a) passing another fluid into said heat exchanger in indirect
heat exchange relation with said liquefied gas to thereby
supply thermal energy to said liquefied gas;
(b) introducing bubbles of a seeding gas into the liquefied gas
in the heat exchanger;
(c) trapping at least some of said bubbles of seeding gas in
said cavities; and
HeiT CXCHAHCl
SrSTtM
HCAT excuANGe
SYSTEM
S'ST"
(d) retaining said trapped bubbles in said cavities until said
bubbles increase to a size such that said bubbles break
away from said cavities while leaving a sufficient residue
of vapors of the liquefied gas in the cavities to enable
further bubbles to form therein by boiling of said liquefied
gas.
4,380,908
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHILLING PRODUCE
Richard V. Crabb, Jr., Aromas, Calif., assignor to Growers Ice
Company, Salinas, Calif.
Filed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,503
Int. a.^F25D/ 7/02
U.S. a. 62—64 8 Qaims
0 . 0
1. The method of injecting a cooling solution into a produce
carton wherein the produce carton has openings on one pair of
opposing end walls, said method comprising the steps of:
providing a pair of plates having passages therein through
which a cooling solution can be pumped,
clamping said plates on the opposing end walls of the pro-
duce carton with sufficient force to form a seal between
the carton and plate,
pumping a cooling solution through said plate passages and
through the carton openings into the produce carton until
sufficient cooling solution is deposited in the carton to
cool the produce therein, and
removing the plates from the produce carton.
828
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26. 1983
4,380,909
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CO-GENERATION OF
ELECTRICAL POWER AND ABSORPTION-TYPE HEAT
PUMP AIR CONDITIONING
Harry M. Sung, Moraga, Calif,, assignor to Chevron Research
Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Scr. No. 284,379
Int. C\J F25B 7/00
U.S. a. 62—79 ^ 8 Qaims
S5, r
lively cooled by said second air stream, passing said first air
stream through a second heat exchanger in heat exchange
relationship but out of contact with a recirculating second
body of water that is evaporatively cooled downstream by said
1. Method of simultaneously supplying electrical power and
thermal energy to local energy conversion units which com-
prises operating an internal combustion engine to mechanically
drive an electrical generator, said generator being electrically
connected to a system adapted to modulate said load to hold
the temperature of the engine exhaust gas within a range of
from about 500° F. to about 1200° F., flowing said exhaust gas
from said engine through a vapor generator of an absorption-
type refrigeration system to heat and increase the pressure of
vapor from the refrigerant component of the operating fluid in
said system, selectively extracting the heat from said vapor by
condensing it at substantially constant pressure to a substan-
tially liquid state by selectively flowing said vapor either
through a heat exchanger exposed to outside air for ambient air
cooling of said vapor or to a heat exchanger exposed to air
flow in a local air heating system, simultaneously flowing the
resultant condensed refrigerant liquid from the selected heat
exchanger through an expansion valve to the other of said heat
exchangers for reduction of the pressure of said liquid flowing
therethrough to absorb heat from air flow over said other heat
exchanger, and returning the expanded resultant refrigerant
vapor at such reduced pressure to said vajKsr generator
through an absorber for solution in the carrier liquid with-
drawn from said vapor generator after said refrigerant vapor is
extracted, and compressing by heat the evaporated refrigerant
by passing said exhaust gas from said internal combustion
engine through said vapor generator.
4,380,910
MULTI-STAGE INDIRECT-DIRECT EVAPORATIVE
COOLING PROCESS AND APPARATUS
Larry M. Hood, Albuquerque, and Doy M. West, TUeras, both
of N. Mex., assignors to Aztech International, Ltd., Albuquer-
que, N. Mex.
FUed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,367
Int. a.3 F25D 77/06
U.S. a. 62—91 12 Qalms
1. The process of cooling a first air stream, comprising the
steps of: passing the air stream through a first heat exchanger
in heat exchange relationship with a second air stream passing
through a recirculating first body of water that is evapora-
first air stream, and passing said first air stream in direct
contact heat exchange relationship with a third heat exchanger
which includes said second body of evaporatively cooled
water.
4,380,911
REFRIGERATION CONTROL APPARATUS
William A. Zumbiel, 85 Dudley Rd., Ft. Mitchell, Ky. 41017
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,364
Int. Cl.^ F25B 49/00
U.S. CI. 62—228 6 Qaims
1. A refrigeration cooling system which comprises a motor
driven compressor for increasing the pressure of a refrigerant
material in said system; a condenser for removing heat to cool
said pressurized refrigerant material after it exits from said
compressor; an expansion valve; an evaporator through which
said cooled pressurized refrigerant passes to extract heat from
the area surrounding said evaporator before being returned to
the inlet side of said compressor; and a control unit for control-
ling the operation of said compressor, said control unit com-
prising a pressure actuated switch to control operation of said
compressor and a capillary tube connecting said switch with
the flow path of said refrigerant, the improvement in combina-
tion therewith which comprises: a bi-directional check valve
positioned between said pressure actuated switch and the flow
path of said refrigerant, said valve permitting refrigerant pres-
sure changes to be transmitted directly through said capillary
tube to said pressure actuated switch so long as said capillary
line remains unbroken, said check valve further functioning to
seal off the flow path of said refrigerant in the event a break
occurs in said tube.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
V29
4,380,912
DOUBLE WALL TUBE ASSEMBLY FOR USE IN HEAT
EXCHANGERS
Ray C. Edwards, Kinnelon, N.J., assignor to Edwards Engineer-
ing Corp., Pompton Plains, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 17,243, Mar. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,860
Int. a.' F25B 39/04; F25D 7/10
U.S. a. 62—506 4 Qaims
second wall means adjacent the surface of operative direct
heat conductive contact of said second wall means with
the first wall means of the first tubular member, and
h. means for maintaining said first and second tubular mem-
bers in interfitting contact one with the other along the
radial extent thereof
4,380,913
WEFT THREAD LAYING APPARATUS WITH COMBING
ELEMENT
Christian Wilkens, Heusenstamm, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Karl Mayer Testilmaschinenfabrik GmbH, Obert-
shausen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,773
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 6,
1980, 3017255
Int. CI.' D04B 23/06
U.S. CI. 66—84 A 9 Qaims
1. A dual wall tube to tube assembly for wound heat ex-
changers comprising,
a. a first tubular member made from standard stock tubing
from the group of copper and steel alloys having a sub-
stantially constant outer diameter along the length
thereof,
b. said first tubular member having first heat conductive wall
means defining a first fiuid fiow passage therethrough, a
first inlet for a first heated fiuid, and a first outlet for said
heated fiuid,
c. a second tubular member also made from standard stock
tubing from the group of copper and steel alloys,
d. said second tubular member having second heat conduc-
tive wall means defining a second fluid flow passage there-
through, a second inlet for a second fiuid to be heated, and
a second outlet for said second fiuid,
e. said second tubular member having a first indented section
parallel to the axis of the longitudinal length of said sec-
ond wall means uniformly shaped and sized on the outer
face thereof with a curvature substantially equal to that of
the outer diameter of said first tubular member to permit
the first wall means of said first tubular member to be
formed and forced into matching and direct physical
mating engagement with the first indented section in the
second wall means of said second tubular member, so as to
minimize any air gaps between said first wall means and
said first indented section,
f. said second tubular member having at least a second in-
dented section parallel to the axis of the length of said
second wall means spaced a predetermined circumferen-
tial distance from said first indented section and also uni-
formly shaped and sized on the outer face thereof with a
curvature substantially equal to that of the outer diameter
of said first tubular member to permit the first wall means
of said first tubular member to also be formed and forced
into matching and direct physical mating engagement
with the second indented section in the second wall means
of said second tubular member so as to further minimize
air gaps between said first wall means and said first in-
dented section and the first wall means and the second
indented section whereby said first tubular member and
said second tubular member provide intimate, efTicient
and operative direct heat conductive contact on each of
said respective indented faces,
g. said uniformly shaped and sized first and second indented
sections on the second wall means forming along the
longitudinal length of the second fluid flow passage in said
second tubular member a uniformly restricted portion
along the inner wall defining the second fluid flow passage
to increase the velocity of the fluid flowing through said
second fluid flow passage along the inner wall of said
1. A weft thread magazine for a warp knitting machine
having a needle bed, said magazine comprising, in combina-
tion:
(a) a pair of endless transfer chain means each having hold-
ing means for retaining weft threads in parallel and for
presenting them to said needle bed;
(b) a thread laying arrangement for transporting wefi
threads from one of said pair of transfer means to the
other, said arrangement including a carriage means having
at least one thread guide for guiding at least one of the
appropriate weft threads into a position parallel to an
already laid weft thread; and
(c) a combing element mounted on said carriage means and
having at least one combing peg and being operable to
introduce said peg between weft threads proximate one of
said pair of transfer chain means, to move said peg parallel
to the weft threads and to remove said f>eg proximate the
other transfer chain means.
4,380,914
TWIST KEY HOLDER
Hanns W. Beier, Valhalla, N.Y., assignor to Magic Novelty Co.,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Not. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,237
Int. a.' A47G 29/70
U.S. a. 70-^156 R 6 Qaims
1. A twist key holder for removably coupling a key to a ring,
said twist key holder including:
a twist key body,
a hook formed of a stiff but pliant material attached to the
body, the hook including a stem portion, a mid-portion
and a tip portion which follow a spiraling path terminating
in the tip portion, the stem, the mid-portion and the tip
encircling to define a generally circular opening, the tip
portion terminating in close spaced relation to the mid-
portion, the tip portion being adapted for twisting and
flexing movement out of the plane of the hook,
a passageway of narrowing width formed in the hook, said
passageway leading into the opening, said passageway
being relatively wide adjacent the exterior of the twist key
holder for receiving the key ring and narrow adjacent the
opening to block passage of the key ring from within the
830
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
opening, the tip flexing out of the plane of the hook by
application of a sideways force to permit passage and
entry of the key ring through the passageway into the
opening, the tip flexing into the plane of hook upon entry
of the key ring in the opening to lock the key ring in
engagement with the twist key holder while enabling
ready disengagement of the key ring by flexing the tip for
passage of the key ring to the exterior of the key holder,
4,380,915
LATCH HAVING A REMOVABLE LOCK
Herbert Kincaid, Libertyville, and Michael L. Wray, Wheeling,
both of III., assignors to The Eastern Company, Naugatuck,
Conn.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,155
Int. a.5 E05B 9/04. 9/08. 13/10. 33/00
U.S. a. 70—224 13 Qaims
"?"S Jd
("i")
6. A lock with a removable lock mechanism, comprising;
a housing with a cylindrical bore;
a lock mechanism disposed within said bore, said entire lock
mechanism being selectively axially and rotationally mov-
able therein, the mechanism having a stop engaging finger
fixed on its end and a laterally extending bolt which en-
gages a shoulder in the bore to retain the mechanism
therein, said bolt being partially retracted by actuation of
the lock mechanism for limited axial movement of the
mechanism in the housing bore; and
a peripheral cam surface in said cylindrical bore for engage-
ment with said bolt upon rotation of said mechanism in the
bore, to affect complete retraction of the bolt for removal
of the mechanism from the housing.
12. An improved lock for a latch of the type operable by
rotation of a handle, the improvement comprising:
a lock receptacle on said handle having a bore therethrough;
a removable lock disposed within said bore, said entire lock
being selectively axially and rotationally movable within
said bore, said lock having a stop engaging finger fixed on
its end and a retractable bolt on its side; and
a plurality of bolt engaging surfaces within said bore to hold
the lock, while locked, within said bore with said finger
engaging the stop, to hold the lock within said bore, while
unlocked, with said finger disengaged from said stop, and
to retract said bolt upon rotation of said lock within said
bore for removal of said lock from said bore.
4,380,916
ROLLING APPARATUS FOR SEQUENTIAL ROLLING
Teruaki Tanaka, Aichi, Japan, assignor to Daidotokushuko
Kabushikikaisha, Japan
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,875
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 28, 1980, 55-118969;
Jul. 20, 1981, 56-113148
Int. a.3 B21B 31/18
U.S. a. 72—7 4 Oaims
an attaching button including an enlarged head, a stem at-
tached to the head, and an enlarged flange at the end of
the stem, and
means for attaching the button to the body, said means
including a stud configured to accept the attaching button,
the stud being shaped to pass through the aperture of a key
of standard configuration.
1. A rolling apparatus comprising first and second convey-
ance systems spaced apart from each other along a conveyance
line for reciprocating a material to be rolled along said convey-
ance line and a rolling mechanism so disposed that said con-
veyance line extends therethrough for rolling the material
during reciprocation thereof, said rolling mechanism includ-
ing:
a. a rolling unit having a frame adapted to move in the direc-
tion perpendicular to said conveyance line, a pair of rotat-
able rolls each provided with a plurality of shape grooves at
the circumference thereof and disposed so that said convey-
ance line continuously extends therebetween, a plurality of
shape apertures provided between said rolls by said shape
grooves for rolling the material;
b. a drive system connected to said rolling unit for rotating said
rolls;
c. a shift system connected to said rolling unit for moving said
rolling unit in the direction perpendicular to said convey-
ance line so as to selectively locate said shape apertures on
said conveyance line;
d. a system connected to rolling unit for detecting the position
of said rolling unit relative to said conveyance line and
providing a signal to indicate said position; and
e. a system connected to said shift system for controlling said
shift system and including (I) a unit for setting the order of
locating said shape apertures on said conveyance line, (2) a
unit for selecting said shape apertures set in said setting unit
in said order and providing a signal to indicate the particular
shape apertures to be located on said conveyance line, (3) a
unit for computing the difference between the value of signal
from said detecting system and that of signal from said se-
lecting unit and providing a signal to indicate said difference,
(4) a unit for generating signals to indicate the speed of
moving of said rolling unit by receiving the differential
signal from said computing unit so that said generating unit
provides a signal to move said rolling unit at a higher speed
when the value of said differential signal is larger than a first
marginal value, a signal to move said rolling unit at a lower
speed when said value is smaller than said first marginal
value but larger than a second marginal value, and a signal to
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
831
stop said rolling unit from moving when said value is smaller
than said second marginal value, and (S) a section for con-
trolling said shift system in accordance with the signals from
said generating unit.
4^0,917
TUBE-BENDING MACHINE
Fumihiko Uchida, Koganei; Kazuo Sato, and Soji Takahashi,
both of Hachioji, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,922
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 22, 1980, 55-20521
Int. aj B21D 9/05
U.S. a. 72—8 9 Qaims
direction of rack movement, the mandrel having a tooth pitch
circle that is tangent to the forming rack pitch lines, and the
mandrel having teeth that project outwardly from the pitch
circle thereof the same extent the teeth of the racks project
inwardly of the mandrel pitch circle upon meshing with the
mandrel with the sleeve therebetween whereby one half of the
formed splines are radially inward of the mandrel pitch circle
and one half of the formed splines are radially outward of the
mandrel pitch circle.
FORCE
30 3f 26
29
3? " '«
",
- b 30
4?
30 ^
2*
4? i
1
i?
2B
36 ^6 32
12
\ !
45 ;•? «6 ■
4,380,919
COIL WINDING MACHINE
Giuseppe Camardella, Saronno, Italy, assignor to Tekma Kino-
mat S.p.A., Caronno Pertusella, Italy
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,311
Claims priority, application Italy, Jan. 22, 1980, 19355 A/80
Int. a.3 B21F 3/04
U.S. a. 72—132 36 Qaims
1. A tube-bending machine comprising:
a mandrel,
bending means to bend a tube with said mandrel inserted in
said tube, and
force detection means for detecting a force acting on said
mandrel in an axial direction of said mandrel during bend-
' ing of the tube by said bending means, so as to sense a
bending condition of said tube.
4,380,918
THIN-WALL SPLINE FORMING MACHINE
James T. Klllop, Warren, Mich., assignor to Anderson-Cook
Inc., Eraser, Mich.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,266
Int. a.3 B21D 9/14, 17/00. 53/28
U.S. a. 72—88 5 Qalms
1. In apparatus for forming splines in a thin-wall sleeve of a
power transmission member, said apparatus including a
toothed mandrel on which the sleeve is mounted in preparation
for splining and also including a pair of toothed forming racks
that are driven in a parallel relationship to each other in oppo-
site directions on opposite sides of the mandrel such that mesh-
ing of the forming racks and the mandrel with the sleeve there-
between forms splines in the sleeve, the improvement compris-
ing: the forming racks having associated teeth that are spaced
from the toothed mandrel during meshing thereof with the
thin-wall sleeve located therebetween, said teeth of the racks
having associated tooth pitch lines extending parallel to the
1. A coil winding machine for winding unsupported wire
coils, comprising
a main driving shaft adapted to be driven in rotation by a
motor,
a set of control cams on said main shaft,
a rotary spindle on which the coil is formed when the spin-
dle rotates,
means for rotating the spindle, comprising a sector gear and
a toothed gearing comprising at least one pinion on the
spindle shaft, and a main gearwheel, said sector gear being
oscillated by a first cam of said set of cams,
means mounting said pinion and said spindle shaft for move-
ment parallel to themselves, along an arc concentric with
the rotation axis of said main gearwheel,
a wireguide for feeding and distributing the wire being
wound, said wireguide being also adapted to move for-
ward and position the leading end of the wire in respect of
the spindle, at the start of the winding, the forward move-
ment of the wireguide being controlled by a second cam
of said set of cams and the leading end of the wire being
dragged by the wireguide by releasable wire gripping
means on said wireguide,
power means for actuating said wire gripping means,
shears for cutting the wire at the end of the winding, con-
trolled by a third cam of said set of cams and the position
of which can be adjusted in respect of the spindle and of
the wireguide through end adjustment means allowing to
determine the length of the terminals at the start and at the
end of the winding, and
means for predetermining the distribution of the turns in the
coil to be formed.
832
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,380,920
ADJUSTABLE WIPER DIE FOR BENDING TUBULAR
MEMBERS
Jeffrey W. Coop, Sr., and Jeffrey W. Coop, Jr., both of 12924-30
Lakeland Rd., Santa Fe Springs, Calif. 90670
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,361
Int. a.3 B21D 7/04
U.S. a. 72—158 8 Qaims
a rod means connected to said bracket means adjacent said
stop means and extending away from said stop means; and
a piston-cylinder means, mounted on said frame and con-
nected to said rod means, for moving said rod means and
said bracket means away from said stop means by pivoting
movement around the pivotal connection of said fourth
end of said bracket means to said connecting shaft means.
4,380,922
TUBE BENDER CONSTRUCHON
Leonard J. Kowal, Prospect Heights, III., assignor to Imperial
Clevite Inc., Rolling Meadows, III.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,865
Int. Q\} B21D 7/02
U.S. a. 72—388 19 Oaims
1. An adjustable wiper die for bending tubular members,
comprising:
a carriage member defining a fixed die block having a longi-
tudinal channel formed therein;
an adjustable wiper blade adapted to be received in said
channel of said carriage member;
an adjustable gauge means for selectively positioning said
wiper blade in said carriage; and
means for securing said wiper blade in a selected position
relative to said carriage.
\^-i /■/
4,380,921
ROLL LEVELLER
Makoto Matsui, Shiroyama, Japan, assignor to Aida Engineer-
ing Ltd., Sagamihara, Japan
Filed Nov. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 203,886
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 22, 1979, 54-150596;
May 6, 1980, 55-60681[U]
Int. Q\} B21D 1/02. 3/02
U.S. a. 72—165 8 Qaims
1. A roll leveller comprising:
a frame having a first and a second end;
a plurality of parallel lower rolls rotatably mounted on said
frame and positioned side by side in the direction in which
a material to be levelled is fed by said roll leveller, said
lower rolls being adapted to be driven;
a plurality of parallel upper rolls;
a bracket means having third and fourth ends respectively
corresponding to said first and second ends of said frame,
said plurality of parallel upper rolls being rotatably
mounted thereon in spaced opposed relationship to said
lower rolls;
a stop means mounted on said first end of said frame for
movement toward and away from said bracket means and
engaged by said third end of said bracket means;
a connecting shaft means pivotally connected to said fourth
end of said bracket means and mounted on said second end
of said frame for movement toward and away from said
frame so as to effect changes in spacing between said
upper rolls and said lower rolls;
1. In a tube bender having a mandrel defining a bending
groove extending arcuately about a bend axis in a first direc-
tion from a bend start position which may vary with the type
of tube to be bent, the diameter thereof, wear of the tube
bender parts, and the like, means for holding the tube at a
holding position adjacent the bend start position in a second
direction opposite said first direction, and forming means
swingable about said bend axis for urging a tube to be bent
progressively into the bending groove, the improvement com-
prising:
cooperating first and second indicia means associated respec-
tively with said mandrel and said forming means for indicat-
ing the angular extent of a bend provided in the tube as a
result of movement of the forming means from the bend start
position; and
adjusting means for angularly adjusting at least one of said first
and second indicia means to provide accurate correlation
therebetween of the tube to be bent with the bend start
position in accurately indicating said angular extent at least
one of said indicia means including a bend start indicator
portion including a plurality of angularly spaced bend start
position indications.
4380,923
VIBRATION DAMPED RIVET BUCKING TOOL
Wolfgang Emmerich, Munkhagen, Finland, assignor to Atlas
Copco Aktiebolag, Nacka, Sweden
FUed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,305
Claims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 1, 1980, 8006875
Int. a.3 B21J 15/40
U.S. a. 72—482 ^ Claims
1. A vibration damped rivet bucking tool compriising a hous-
ing (11) subjectable to a manual bucking force, a cylinder bore
(12) in said housing, abutment means (20) at one end of said
cylinder bore, a piston (13) sealingly and reciprocally disposed
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
833
in said cylinder bore and defining a damping chamber (42) at
the other end thereof, a rivet bucking die (23) connected to said
piston (13) at said one end of said cylinder bore to form an
assembly with said piston and applicable by said manual force
against a rivet to be bucked, and passage means (39) for supply-
ing compressed air to said damping chamber to cooperate with
said piston for transmitting said manual force thereto and to
said die during rivet bucking, characterized by said damping
chamber (42) of said cylinder bore (12) having a volume ex-
>
ceeding the displacement volume of said piston (13) under
recoil during rivet bucking sufficiently to isolate said housing
(11) from undesirable vibration, and pressure reduction valve
means (28) on said housing (11) connected to said passage
means (39) for selectively adjusting the air pressure in said
damping chamber (42) so as to bias said piston and die assembly
(13, 23) onto said abutment means (20) by an elastic force
approximately equal to the optimal manual force required for
proper rivet heading and bucking in the riveting work at hand.
22
PA
Si
s?X
23
is^^r
24
FPAFPA 29
26
27 28
CORR.
CALC.
• DIAG.
coils to thereby determine the presence or absence of
voids.
4,380,925
DEVICE FOR BALANCING DISKS
Michael S. Martino, South Windsor, Conn., assignor to United
Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,930
Int. aJ GOIM I/OO: G06C 7/00
U.S. a. 73—66 7 Qaims
4,380,924
METHOD FOR MONITORING FLOW CONDITION OF
LIQUID METAL
Koichiro Nakamoto; Kiyokazu Ishii, and Nobumi Ohyama, all of
Mito, Japan, assignors to Doryokuro Kakunenryo Kaihatsu
Jigyodan, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,664
Claims priority, application Japan, May 2, 1980, 55-59002
Int. a.J GOIF 1/58; GOIN 27/74
U.S. CI. 73—19 5 Qaims
3. A method for monitoring flow condition of a liquid metal
comprising:
disposing in the flowing direction of the liquid metal a detec-
tor consisting of an excitation coil applied with an a.c.
current and at least two detection coils disposed on both
sides of said excitation coil; and
detecting the polarity of a peak point of the cross-correlation
function of fluctuation signals occurring in said detection
.:-r-T/7/
f » t --
• ' ' ' ///
/ J
'^
■«■■
1. A device for determining the angularity of unbalance of
several disks with respect to one another in assembling the
disks into a rotor construction the device including:
a base member having a linear scale of disk unbalance and an
angular scale for disk positioning both said scales having
the same zero point;
a linear scale member pivoted at the zero point of the scale
on the base member and having a linear scale of disk
unbalance beginning at the pivot point; and
an angular scale member pivoted to said linear scale member
and having both an angular scale and a linear unbalance
scale thereon.
4,380,926
BATTERY ELECTRODE HARDNESS TESTER
David H. Fritts, Dayton, and John F. Leonard, Xenia, both of
Ohio, assignors to The United SUtes of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,564
Int. CI.' GOIN i/44
US. CI. 73—83 3 Qaims
1. A method of testing relative hardness of a specimen of an
electrode plaque which is of a thickness of approximately 0.75
mm and which is made of a non-homogenous, sintered material
in order to establish electrode performance, said method com-
prising the steps of
a. positioning said specimen on a suppori in contact with a
means for applying, in sequence, a first preselected com-
pression load and a second preselected compression load,
834
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
with said second preselected load being greater than said
first preselected load,
b. applying said first preselected compression load to said
specimen, whereby a first indentation is formed thereby in
said specimen;
c measuring the depth of said first indentation;
d. applying said second preselected greater compression
load to said specimen, whereby a second indentation is
formed thereby in said specimen, with said second inden-
tation located in a superimposed positioned on said first
indentation; and
e. measuring the depth of said second indentation;
(0 determining a difference in said depths;
(g) determining the relative hardness of said specimen by
analyzing said differences in said depths, said relative
hardness being inversely related to said difference in said
depths, in that said specimen is relatively hard if said
difference in said depths is relatively small, whereas said
specimen is relatively less hard if said difference in said
depths is relatively great, and
(h) determining electrode performance by directly relating
said relative hardness to better electrode performance.
4,380,927
RIM MECHANISM FOR TIRE INSPECTION
ARRANGEMENT
Ryoichi Oda, Himeji, and Munenori luchi, Shirakawa, both of
Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Rubber Industries, Ltd.,
Hyogo, Japan
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,504
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-
104011[U]
Int. CI.'GOIM 17/02
U.S. CI. 73—146 3 Qaims
axially extending through said lower rim having a hollow
cylindrical portion to be fitted into said reduced diameter
portion of said upper rim, for vertically moving said lower rim
with respect to said upper rim and also rotating said lower rim
through a predetermined angle with respect to said upper rim
by driving means, and lower engaging stepped portions to be
stopped by said stopper members so as to set the lower rim at
a position for defining a predetermined rim width with respect
to said upper rim and upper engaging stepped portions to be
stopped by said stopper members so as to set the lower rim at
another position for defining a rim width slightly broader than
said predetermined rim width with respect to said upper rim,
said lower and upper engaging stepped portions being respec-
tively provided on the hollow cylindrical portion of said lower
rim in positions of displacement in the direction of rotation of
said lower rim, said stopper members being displaced by the
rotation of said support shaft for changing over of the engaging
positions thereof between the lower engaging stepped portions
and the upper engaging stepped portions.
4,380,928
ROTATIONAL ANGLE SENSOR
Shinichiro Iwasaki, Auburn Heights, Mich., assignor to Aisin
Seiki Company, Limited, Kariya, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 182,703, Aug. 29, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,188
Int. a.3 GOIB 7/30
U.S. CI. 73—518 11 Claims
'100
OUT
1. In a tire inspection arrangement which includes a rim
mechanism having an upper rim mechanism rotatably support-
ing an upper rim and a lower rim mechanism also rotatably
supporting a lower rim for vertical movement with respect to
said upper rim for inspecting a tire fitted between said upper
and lower rims, the improvement of said rim mechanism which
comprises stopper members movably provided in a reduced
diameter portion of said upper rim so as to be selectively pro-
jected radially outwardly from and retracted radially inwardly
into said reduced diameter portion, a central shaft axially
extending through said upper rim and coupled thereto for
vertical movement and simultaneous rotation in one unit with
respect to said upper rim by driving means, cam means pro-
vided at the lower end portion of said central shaft for said
selective projection and retraction of said stopper members
from and into said reduced diameter portion in association with
the vertical movement of said central shaft, a support shaft
1. A rotational angle sensor device, comprising:
a casing;
a movable body rotatably supported by said casing, the
position of said movable body being responsive to an
angular displacement caused by an external object;
permanent magnet means rigidly secured to said movable
body in said casing for providing a magnetic field;
core means disposed adjacent to a range of movement of said
permanent magnet means, said core means including mag-
netically soft material;
electrical coil means including at least one coil wound about
said core means;
means for detecting the rotational position of said movable
body, comprising,
means for applying a pulse voltage to a first terminal of said
coil to saturate magnetically said core means, and
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
835
means coupled to a second terminal of said coil for produc-
ing a rotational angle output signal indicative of the rota-
tional position of said magnet means and therefore of said
movable body based on the time between application of
said pulse voltage and saturation of said core means.
(c) means for isolating said ultrasonic energy transducing
means from the conHning pressure condition on said cell
4,380,929
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ULTRASONIC
DETECTION OF NEAR-SURFACE DISCONTINUITIES
Bruce J. Taszarek, Mt. Lebanon, and Warren R. Junker, Mon-
roeville, both of Pa., assignors to Westinghouse Electric
- Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,504
Int. aJ GOIN 29/04
U.S. a. 73—579 9 Claims
1. A method of determining near-surface discontinuities in a
workpiece comprising the steps of:
(A) positioning an ultransonic projector above an area of
said workpiece;
(B) energizing said projector to project a pulse of acoustic
energy toward said area;
(C) receiving acoustic energy reflected as a result of said
projection;
(D) determining, from said received acoustic energy, the
fundamental frequency of acoustic energy resonating in a
section of workpiece material between a near-surface
discontinuity and the surface of said workpiece;
(E) determining from said frequency the average thickness
of said section, and therefore the average depth of said
discontinuity.
;', ■OK. '
/.• i»«STi6»'ri> 1
such that said ultrasonic energy transducing means oper-
ates at ambient pressure conditions.
4,380,931
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR QUANTITATIVE
NONDESTRUCTIVE WIRE TESTING
Harold M. Frost; James H. Prout, and Robert W. Reed, all of
State College, Pa., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,750
Int. a.3 GOIN 29/04
U.S. CI. 73—643 12 Qaims
4,380,930
SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING ULTRASONIC ENERGY
THROUGH CORE SAMPLES
Julius Podhrasky, Dallas, and Eve S. Sprunt, Richardson, both
of Tex., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,773
Int. a.3 GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 73—594 8 Qaims
1. A system for transmitting ultrasonic energy through a
material sample comprising:
(a) ultrasonic energy transducing means in contact with said
material sample for transmitting ultrasonic energy into
said sample and for receiving the energy after it has trav-
eled through said sample,
(b) a pressure cell for housing said sample under a conflning
pressure simulating subterranean pressure conditions, and
1. An apparatus for nondestructive testing (NDT) an electri-
cally conductive and elongated test material having a longitu-
dinal axis using noncontacting electromagnetic ultrasound
transducers (EMT'S) which comprises:
a magnet with pole pieces forming a gap and with the direc-
tion of magnetization thereof being generally perpendicu-
lar to the longitudinal axis of the test material;
at least one noncontacting electromagnetic ultrasound trans-
ducer (EMT) as a transmitter-transducer having the coil
thereof adjusubly positioned along the longitudinal axis
of the test material to have electrical pulses passing there-
through in a direction parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the test material and thus generating torsional ultrasound
waves in the test material traveling along the longitudinal
axis thereof; and
at least one more noncontacting electromagnetic ultrasound
transducer (EMT) as a receiver-transducer having the coil
thereof adjustably positioned colinear with said transmit-
ter-transducer and receiving the torsional ultrasound
836
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
waves traveling along the longitudinal axis of the test
material.
4,380,932
CAPACITANCE MANOMETER DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE SENSOR
Richard C. Mott, Harwood Heights, and Thomas A. Stamm,
Chicago, both of HI., assignors to Honeywell Inc., Minneapo-
lis, Minn.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,808
Int. a.3 GOIL 9/12
U.S. a. 73—749 7 Oaims
1. A transducer for providing an output signal having a
value determined by an input, pressure differential comprising:
capacitance manometer means having a first input for re-
ceiving a first input pressure and a second input for receiv-
ing a second input pressure, said capacitance manometer
means having a capacitance determined by the difference
between said first and second input pressures, said capaci-
tance manometer means having an outer electrode and an
inner electrode, and a reservoir of dielectric fluid, said
inner electrode located within said outer electrode and
said inner and outer electrodes and said dielectric fluid
reservoir all being concentric with one another such that
the differential pressure between the first and second input
pressures determines the level of dielectric fluid between
said inner and outer electrodes; and,
output means connected to said capacitance manometer
means for providing an output signal having a value de-
pendent upon said capacitance.
4,380,933
ELECTRICAL CONTROL MERCURY MONOMETER
William A. Irvin, 2384 Corbett St., Jacksonville, Fla. 32204
Division of Ser. No. 91,102, Nov. 5, 1979, Pat. No. 4,297,081.
This application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,319
Int. a.' GOIL 9/00
U.S. a. 73—749 7 Qaims
(i) a mercury well having a first channel communicating
with a pressure input connection,
(ii) an essentially rectangular mercury column channel
having an upper pressure outlet connection, said chan-
nel formed by a broad, flat rear face and a pair of nar-
row side walls,
(iii) a second channel communicating between said well
and said mercury column channel,
(iv) a continuous O-ring groove bounding said mercury
well, said first channel, said mercury column channel,
and said second channel, and
(v) a plurality of conductive contacts embedded in a verti-
cal array in said rear face of said mercury column chan-
nel forming said electrical control contacts, said
contacts extending through said block to form rear
external electrical connections;
(b) an O-ring gasket formed from resilient material and
disposed in said O-ring groove;
(c) a transparent face plate attached to said front surface of
said body block and adapted to compress said O-ring
gasket to form a pressure tight seal between said face plate
and said mercury well, said first channel, said mercury
column channel, and said second channel thereby forming
a mercury well for holding mercury and said vertical
mercury column; and
(d) mercury disposed in said well and said column, whereby
pressure applied to said pressure input connection causes
said mercury column to rise and sequentially form electri-
cal connections between said common contact and others
of said plurality of electrical control contacts.
4,380,934
GASEOUS FLUID FLOW METER UTILIZING KARMAN
VORTEX STREET
Kuniteru Okuda; Teruki Fukami, both of Tokyo; Yoshiaki
Asayama, Himeji; Shunichi Wada, Himeji, and Masami
Kabuto, Himeji, all of Japan, assignors to Oval Engineering
Co., Ltd. and Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, both of
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 956,599, Oct. 30, 1978,
abandoned. This application Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,743
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 4, 1977, 52-148024;
Jun. 12, 1978, 53-80067; Sep. 7, 1978, 53-123314; Sep. 20, 1978,
53-129325 /
Int. a.J GOIF 1/32
U.S. a. 73—861.23 5 Qaims
, _-20
^„ ^ JJLTRASOJCT
»^ - L - •( f
'2 ; ■• -16
^
"' -^ t^LCEPTOR
ft: T
l:^
1. A gaseous fluid flow meter utilizing a Karman vortex
street and comprising a conduit having opposed flat walls and
through which a gaseous fluid to be measured flows, a vortex
generating member disposed perpendicularly to the direction
of flow of the fluid to generate the Karman vortex street down-
stream thereof, a vortex detector disposed on the conduit and
having means in one flat wall for transmitting a continuous
ultrasonic wave across the Karman vortex street and means in
the other flat wall positioned opposite said ultrasonic wave
transmitting means in a direction perpendicular to the direction
1. A mercury manometer indicating a differential pressure of the flow of the gaseous fluid through said conduit for receiv-
and for providmg a closed electrical circuit at preselected ing the continuous ultrasonic wave to detect the changes in
pressure readings comprising: phase of the ultrasonic wave indicating the number of vortices
(a) a body formed from a block of electrically nonconduc- of the Karman vortex street generated in a unit time, a sound
tive material, said body having formed in its front surface absorbing material on only the portion of the inner surfaces of
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
837
the flat walls of said conduit around said transmitting means
and around said receiving means and extending sufTiciently far
along said walls from said means for preventing the generation
of standing waves in front of said walls due to the reflection of
the said ultrasonic wave, and said conduit having a straight
section extending downstream of said vortex detector and an
expanded section connected to said straight section and having
a larger inside diameter than said straight section, said straight
section having a length no greater than twice the inside dimen-
sion of said conduit.
4,380,935
EXTERNAL SENSING VORTEX FLOWMETER
George E. Sgourakes, Millis, Mass., and Paul J. Lefebvre, Little
Compton, R.L, assignors to The Foxboro Company, Foxboro,
Mass.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,416
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/32
US. a. 73—861.24 18 Qaims
<m4J
§■'
11
h
3
" "f
jj
n
?i
41
t
w.
■~vl
D
4
M
=
\ —
—I
a
^^
^^
)7 .,J5 -»t
1. Apparatus for measuring the flow rate of a fluid stream,
comprising in combination:
a conduit for carrying said fluid stream;
an elongate vortex-shedding body in said conduit and posi-
tioned with its longitudinal axis transverse to the direction
of fluid flow to shed vortices alternately from opposite
sides thereof, to apply an alternating torque to said body
about said longitudinal axis;
support shaft means secured to said body and aligned with
said longitudinal axis, said support shaft means being
rotatably mounted to said conduit for rotation about said
axis, and having one end extending out through an open-
ing in said conduit, beyond the wall thereof;
a relatively thin flexible tube surrounding a portion of said
support shaft means adjacent said one end and coaxial
therewith, the outer end of said tube being sealingly se-
cured to the wall of said conduit, and the inner end of said
tube being sealingly secured to said support shaft means,
to prevent fluid leakage through said opening; and
sensing means external to said conduit and coupled to said
support shaft means, for developing a signal representa-
tive of the flow rate of said fluid stream.
4,380,936
TUBE MOUNTING FOR ORIFICE METER
Davis A. Van Scoy, Simonton, Tex., assignor to GroTe ValTC and
Regulator Company, Oakland, Calif.
FUed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,638
Int a.5 GOIF 1/42
U.S. a. 73—861.62 5 Claims
1. An oriflce meter comprising:
a housing with a pair of opposing body plates having aligned
circular openings therethrough; and
an orifice plate positioned in said housing in alignment with
said openings;
characterized in that it includes:
an upstream flow tube of standard pipeline outer diameter
and a selected inner diameter;
a mounting plate welded around said upstream flow tube
closely spaced from one end thereof;
bolt means securing said mounting plate to one of said body
plates with said one end of said flow tube extending into
the circular openings therein;
'« "*.
means for sealing between said upstream flow tube and said
one body plate;
means forming a tap port through said upstream flow tube at
a predetermined distance from said orifice plate;
pressure tap ducts bored laterally through said one body
plate; and
an enlarged recess in the outer wall of said flow tube includ-
ing said tap port to ensure communication with said pres-
sure tap duct.
4,380,937
SAMPLER FOR A HOT LIQUID
William J. Collins, 7005 Madison St., MerrillTille, Ind. 46410
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,543
Int. a.3 GOIN 1/12
U.S. a. 73—864.56 38 Claims
1. A section of a device for obtaining a sample of hot liquid
from a supply thereof, said section comprising a relatively
thick ring shaped wall structure having a pair of outer substan-
tially planar bearing surfaces and providing a relatively large
opening defined by internal surfaces which intersect said bear-
ing surfaces, at least one of said bearing surfaces serving to be
engaged by a substantially planar surface of a complementary
section whereby the latter in combination with said opening
defines a chamber for receiving a sample of such a liquid, said
wall structure being provided with an entrance through which
the sample enters such a chamber, and said wall structure also
being provided with an integral formation extending out-
wardly from said entrance for accommodating an inner ex-
838
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
tremity of a tubular means for receiving a sample for flow into
such a chamber.
4,380,938
COMBINATION TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTOR
VALVE FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
Paul E. Olson, Lexington, Ky., assignor to American Standard
Inc., Lexington, Ky.
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,156
Int. a.J d05G 9/00
U.S. a. 74—473 R 6 Qaims
1. A transmission gear selector valve device for automotive
vehicle transmissions having a gear shift lever having a free
end by which the lever may be manually operated to a plural-
ity of positions for selecting one of a plurality of forward speed
ratios or reverse speed ratios of the transmission of said gear
selector valve device comprising:
(a) a housing including an upper portion and a base portion
secured together to form a single housing unit removably
carried on said free end to act as a knob for the gear shift
lever;
(b) a valve means reciprocably operable in said housing
between a low range position, to adjust the transmission to
a low gear ratio disposition, and a high range position, to
adjust the transmission to a high gear ratio disposition; and
(c) a manually operable lever connected to said valve ele-
ment for effecting selective operation thereof to either its
said low range or high range positions.
4,380,939
ROTARY INDEXING TABLE
Richard E. Gardner, Houston, Tex., assignor to Cameron Iron
Works, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Jul. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 165,101
Int. a.3B23Q 17/00
U.S. a. 74—813 L 4 Qaims
Ji 2i U 56 !S
-kAj^
^M^^^^D-Cfc^i^' : , ■
'0 26 10 5' fi^ 5* .5 12
1. A rotary indexing table comprising
a base plate,
a top plate,
bearing means for rotatably mounting said top plate from
said base plate,
hydraulically actuated clamping means for preventing rota-
tion of said top plate, and
means for locating preselected positions of said top plate,
said clamping means including,
a plurality of actuators,
a wedge block connected to and moved by each of said
actuators, and
a tapered surface rotating with said top plate,
said wedge blocks engaging said tapered surface upon actua-
tion of said actuators to clamp said top plate against rota-
tion.
4,380,940
NO TORQUE TOOL
Ronald E. Morgan, Biggleswade, and Thomas Pearce, Becken-
ham, both of England, assignors to British Gas Corporation,
London, England
Filed Apr, 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,770
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 11, 1980,
8036117
Int. CUB25B 17/00
U.S. a. 81—57.16 5 Qaims
1. A device for coupling a first component to a second
component by means of a screw thread or decoupling a first
such component from a second such component, said device
comprising restraining means, first demountable clamping
means, rigidly attached to said restraining means, for clamping
said first component, and second demountable clamping means
rigidly attached to said restraining means, said second de-
mountable clamping means comprising retaining means and
gripping means for gripping said second component compris-
ing a split gripping member mounted within said restraining
means and rotatable with respect to said retaining means, said
gripping member including a toothed portion located on the
outer periphery thereof and said gripping means further com-
prising a worm for, when rotated, driving said toothed portion
of the gripping member so as to apply a torque to said second
component.
4,380,941
DETACHABLE JAW-LOCKING DEVICE FOR AN
ADJUSTABLE PIPE WRENCH
Hyrum D. Petersen, 438 E. Barnard, Centerville, Utah 84014
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,964
Int. Q.^ B25B U/58
U.S. Q. 81—180 R 2 Qaims
1. A device adapted for attachment to an adjustable wrench
for enclosing the open end thereof, comprising:
an extendable locking member having an attachment end
and an enlarged locking end and being adapted with
means to permit releasable fixation of said extendable
locking member at different positions on said adjustable
wrench in a closed position across the open end of said
adjustable wrench;
means for attaching said attachment end to said adjustable
wrench;
means for securing said locking end to said adjustable
wrench and permitting subsequent detachment of said
locking end therefrom, said securing means comprising a
U-shaped catch having a slot narrower than the enlarged
locking end, said catch being adapted for slideable fixation
at various positions along said adjustable wrench, said
catch being capable of receiving said enlarged locking end
in seated configuration with the extendable locking mem-
April 26. 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
839
ber in a closed position with respect to the jaws of the
adjustable wrench; and
said respective attaching and securing means being adapted
for attachment to the wrench on opposing sides of its open
end so as to allow extension and locking of said extendable
locking member across the open end, despite changes in
jaw opening "Size.
4,380,942
TORQUE-TRANSMITTING TOOL ASSEMBLY
John W. Fenton, 1258 Aalapapa Dr., Kailua, Hi. 96734
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,068
Int. a.3 B25B 15/00
U.S. a. 81—436 10 Qaims
axis than the riser surface of the adjacent tier element
nearer the shank element; and
a driven member, rotatable about a member axis and
having a plurality of member walls defming a recess,
the tool member receivable therein, the recess char-
acterized as having member walls drivingly engaga-
ble with each of the first and second side surfaces of
the first and second torque sections of a selected tier
element.
4,380,943
AUTOMATED CUT-TO-MARK CONTROL FOR CUTOFF
MACHINE
Donald J. Evans, Cherry Hill, N.J., assignor to Molins Machine
Company, Inc., Cherry Hill, N.J.
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,509
Int. a.5 B26D 5/34. 5/36: G05B 19/29
U.S. a. 83—38 11 Qalms
9. A drive assembly for transmission of an externally applied
torque, comprising:
a tool member, comprising:
a shank element longitudinally rotatable about a tool axis,
for receiving an externally applied torque;
a plurality of tier elements having invariant cross-section
along the tool axis, each tier element comprising:
a first torque section comprising:
first and second side surfaces extending radially with
respect to the tool axis and spaced therefrom, the
first and second side surfaces coplanar with the
first and second side surfaces of the first torque
section of each other tier element;
a riser surface; and
a step surface; and
a second torque section comprising:
first and second side surfaces extending radially with
respect to the tool axis and spaced therefrom, the
first and second side surfaces coplanar with the
first and second side surfaces of the second torque
section of each other tier element;
a riser surface; and
a step surface;
wherein each tier element supports the adjacent tier ele-
ment more distant from the shank element, and wherein
the riser surface of each tier element is nearer to the tool
1. A method of automatically controlling a cut-off machine
having knives operable in a cut-to-mark mode wherein the
knives cut a moving web divisible into a leader having a first
set of registration marks and a trailer having a second set of
registration marks, there being a transition between the first
and second sets of marks, comprising:
(a) applying a target to the trailer adjacent a preselected
registration mark of the second set;
(b) tracking the target electronically to a shear upstream of
the cut-off machine;
(c) automatically severing the web transversely at the shear
into a leader and trailer when the target is tracked to the
shear;
(d) tracking the target electronically from said shear to a
position intermediate the shear and said cut-off machine;
(e) causing the kinves to cut the trailer automatically at the
preselected registration mark of the second set; and
(0 causing the knives to cut the trailer automatically in the
cut-to-mark mode at the registration marks of the second
set which follow said preselected registration mark.
4,380,944
METHOD FOR CUTTING SHEET MATERIAL WITH
VARIABLE GAIN CLOSED LOOP
H. Joseph Gerber, and Leonard G. Rich, both of West Hartford,
Conn., assignors to Gerber Garment Technology, Inc., South
Windsor, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 73,871, Sep. 10, 1979, Pat. No. 4^1,051.
This application Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,760
Int. a.3 D06H 7/00; B26D 1/10
U.S. a. 83—49 8 Claims
1. A method of cutting limp sheet material with a cutting
blade comprising:
advancing the cutting blade and sheet material relative to
one another in cutting engagement and generally tangent
to a desired cutting path;
sensing lateral loads applied to the blade by the sheet mate-
rial as the blade is advanced;
840
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
orienting the blade slightly out of a position tangent to the
cutting path as the blade is advanced to oppose the lateral
loads applied to the blade; and
regulating the amount by which the blade is oriented out of
the tangent position in accordance with the sensed lateral
load on the blade and an adjustable gain factor influencing
the effect of lateral load on blade orientation; and
adjusting the gain factor as the blade advances in accordance
with the rate at which the blade and material are advanced
relative to one another.
4,380,945
PREADJUSTABLE WEB SLITTER AND
NON-DEFLECTING MOUNTING THEREFOR
Gerald A. Guild, Dalton, and Kenneth G. Frye, South Egremont,
both of Mass., assignors to Beloit Corporation, Beloit, Wis.
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,261
Int. a.' B23D 19/06
U.S. a. 83—482 23 Claims
1. In a slitter comprising a lower blade carried rotatably by
a lower blade head and an upper blade carried rotatably by an
upper blade head, said blades being cooperative to slit a run-
ning web:
a supporting frame having generally vertically spaced lower
and upper rigid parallel beams located, respectively, to
underlie and overlie the web transversely in substantially
spaced relation to the web, and each of said beams having
a respective face which is directed toward the web; said
lower beam having means on its said face for supporting
said lower blade head under the web for selective adjust-
ment longitudinally along the beam and transversely rela-
tive to said web;
said upper beam having means on its said face for supporting
said upper blade head for selective adjustment longitudi-
nally along said upper beam and transversely relative to
the web;
at least one of said beams having a bed plate fixed to its said
face and extending therealong for a distance substantially
as long as the width of said web, and having a lip along its
length projecting horizontally from one side of said one
beam;
a rail fixed on said bed plate and projecting toward the web
and extending throughout substantially the length of said
bed plate;
the blade head supported by said one beam having means
thereon engaging said rail for longitudinal adjustment
movement along the rail; and
said one beam blade head having a surface thereon engaging
one side of said lip, a clamping element engaging the
opposite side of said lip, and means for releasably drawing
said clamping element and said one beam head toward one
another and thereby effecting a clamping engagement of
said lip between said head surface and said clamping
element for maintaining said one beam blade head in se-
lected adjusted position along said rail and said one beam
and relative to the other of said blade heads.
4,380,946
HLM PUNCH REGISTRATION
Donald Mayston, St. Albans, England, assignor to Protocol
Engineering Limited, St. Albans, England
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 178,736
Claims priority, application United Kingdonff, Aug. 24, 1979,
7929647; Jul. 4, 1980, 8021991
Int. a.J B26D 7/01
U.S. a. 83—521 14 Qaims
1. Apparatus for punching a plurality of exposed films to
obtain punch registration, said apparatus comprising a plat-
form for supporting the films to be registered and punched, a
plurality of punches for punching the films, two projection
screens, optical means for magnifying two images of respective
areas of film, means for projecting the two magnified images
onto the two screens respectively, the screens, the optical
means and the projection means for the two images respec-
tively being carried by two projection units each of which is
independently movable with respect to the platform, means for
producing a cushion of air under each projection unit on which
the latter can be moved and means for connecting each projec-
tion unit alternately to a source of air pressure to produce the
cushion of air and a source of vacuum to hold the projection
unit in an in-register position.
4,380,947
PORTABLE ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
HAVING SEPARABLE CONTROLLING PANEL AND
KEYBOARD
Tetsuo Nishimoto, Hamamatsu, Japan, assignor to Nippon
Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,334
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 20, 1980, 55-
87357[U]; Jul. 2, 1980, 55-93269[U]; Jul. 11, 1980, 55-97631[U];
Jul. 12, 1980, 55-98555[U]
Int. a.3 GIOC 3/02
U.S. a. 84—176 13 Claims
1. A portable electronic musical instrument divided into two
half units which jointly constitutes said instrument, compris-
ing:
a first unit provided with a keyboard including a plurality of
keys; and
a second unit detachable from said first unit and provided
with a controlling panel for setting parameters of a tone to
be produced and side walls on both sides of said control-
ling panel;
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
841
said first and second units having such contours that when
they are combined for portage they form a box hke struc-
ture;
m 34>"
said first unit comprising a front wall and two side walls, the
upper edge of each side wall decreasing its height toward
said front wall so as not to interfere with a hand of a
performer playing said musical instrument.
4,380,948
LOADING OF WELLBORES WITH EXPLOSIVES
Frank A. Loving, Jr., Hagerstown, Md., and Walter J. Simmons,
Martinsburg, W. Va., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours
and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 272,079, Jun. 10, 1981,
abandoned. This application Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,329
Int. a.3 C06D 1/08; F42B 3/00
U.S. a. 86—20 C 9 Qaims
^^^
said cable to secure said cord when said cable is placed
under tension by the weight of the suspended tube, and to
release said cord when the tension on said cable is relaxed,
said tubing being releasably secured longitudinally to the
inside wall of said positioning tube;
(d) dropping additional bags of explosive into said position-
ing tube;
(e) lowering the bag-laden tube to the bottom of the well-
bore by paying out the tube-suspending cable, whereby
relaxation of tension on the cable causes said cord to be
released from said tube; and
(0 applying tension to the cable and thereby raising said
positioning tube to the top of the wellbore whereby the
released bag-supporting cord and the bags of explosive
remain in the wellbore.
7. Apparatus for loading bags of explosive into a wellbore
comprising:
(a) a rigid tube for positioning the bags in the wellbore, said
tube having an open bag-releasing end and an opposite
bag-receiving end adapted to receive a tube-suspending
cable having one of its ends attached inside said tube and
the other to an external tube-supporting fixture for sus-
pending said tube in a wellbore, a portion of the wall of
said tube near said bag-receiving end being removed to
provide an access port for the introduction of bags of
explosive;
(b) a bag-supporting cord threaded through a length of
tubing and having one exposed end provided with a loop
and the other expxjsed end adapted to be attached to a bag
of explosive, said tubing being releasably secured longitu-
dinally to the inside wall of said positioning tube; and
(c) a cord-securing/releasing means affixed to an inside
surface of said positioning tube adjacent its bag-receiving
end, said cord-securing/releasing means acting in cooper-
ation with said cable to secure the looped end of said cord
when said cable is placed under tension, and to release said
cord when the tension on said cable is relaxed.
4,380,949
BRAIDED STRANDED ROPE FORMING MACHINE
Walter Betta, Bergamo, Italy, assignor to Wabing S.r.l., Ber-
gamo, Italy
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,492
Qaims priority, application Italy, Oct. 26, 1979, 2934 A/79
Int. a.' D04C 3/40. 3/42
U.S. a. 87—48 5 Qaims
1. A method of loading bags of explosive into a wellbore
comprising:
(a) suspending in the wellbore a rigid bag-positioning tube
having its open bottom end within the wellbore and its top
end outside the wellbore, said top end being adapted to
receive a tube-suspending cable having one of its ends
attached inside said positioning tube and the other to an
external tube-supporting fixture;
(b) threading a length of cord through a length of plastic
tubing, one exposed end of said length of cord being
provided with a loop and the other attached to a bag of
explosive;
- (c) introducing said bag of explosive into said positioning
tube through an access port therein above the top of the
wellbore, lowering said bag to the bottom of said tube,
and attaching the loop on the end of said length of cord to
a cord-securing/releasing means affixed to an inside sur-
face of said positioning tube adjacent its top end, said
cord-securing/releasing means acting in cooperation with
1. A rotary braider comprising:
a stationary frame;
a circular guideway fixed to said frame;
a series of carriages movably mounted on said guideway,
each of said carriages carrying a bobbin;
drive means for driving said series of carriages in a circular
path defined by said guideway;
842
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
ipttiVality of spools disposed at fixed locations with respect
to said frame;
a guide for collecting threads exiting said bobbins and said
spools;
a plurality of thread guide devices for reciprocating the
thread from said spools inside and outside said circular
path and between adjacent ones of said carriages moving
in said circular path, said thread guide devices each in-
cluding a rotating element;
a central rotating member;
a gear ring affixed to said central rotating member;
a plurality of shafts operatively coupled to said gear ring,
said shafts being disposed radially with respect to the axis
of the central rotating member;
gears disposed at the ends of said shafts distal from said
central rotating member; and
gear means affixed to each of said carriages for engaging at
least two of the gears at the distal ends of said shafts at any
given time.
4,380,951
MUD PUMP PISTON ASSEMBLY
OifTord C. Bottoms, Rte. 2, McKinney, Tex. 75069
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 126,339, Mar. 3, 1980, Pat. No.
4,317,409. This application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,449
Int. a.3 F16J 9/00
U.S. a. 92—244 2 Qaims
4,380,950
LOADING APPARATUS FOR A MEDIUM CALIBER
WEAPON
Lucien H. Renoux, Le Havre-Graville, France, assignor to His-
pano-Suiza, Saint-Cloud, France
Filed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 157,304
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 15, 1979, 79 15878
Int. a.3 F41F 9/06
U.S. a. 89—33 BA 7 Qaims
1. In a turret assembly comprising a turret and a manually
loaded medium caliber weapon supported by the turret and
having a cartridge chamber into which each round of ammuni-
tion is manually inserted by forward movement of the round
into the chamber, a loading apparatus comprising:
a stationary casing fixed to said turret behind said cartridge
chamber and having an ammunition outlet aperture lo-
cated rearwardly of said cartridge chamber at a distance
thereof slightly in excess of the length of an individual said
round, and offset to the side of the centerline of the cham-
ber to provide a spacing rearwardly of the cartridge
which is unobstructed to permit manual transport of a
round of ammunition from the outlet aperture of the cas-
ing and also manual loading of a round of ammunition
from a location other than the loading apparatus,
a barrel mounted in said casing for rotation about a substan-
tially horizontal axis offset laterally relative to the car-
tridge chamber centerline, formed with a plurality of
ammunition receiving locations distributed at equal angu-
lar intervals about said axis, said casing and barrel having
cooperating means for individually retaining each said
round at a receiving location when not in a registry with
said ammunition outlet aperture,
manually actuatable means for rotating said barrel by angu-
lar steps selected to bring each location in turn into regis-
try with said aperture, whereby the round of ammunition
in the registering location may be manually withdrawn
forwardly through said aperture and slightly laterally into
the cartridge chamber.
1. A mud pump assembly comprising:
a piston rod having an end portion with a pair of cylindrical
member-mounting surfaces and a projecting cylindrical
fiange between them;
a pair of wear rings mounted at opposite sides of said flange;
a pair of piston members mounted on said member-mounting
surfaces on either side of said wear rings; and
retainer means mounted on said piston rod for retaining said
piston members;
each of said wear rings having a cross-section substantially
in the form of a rectangle with a rectangular cut-out in one
comer that closely receives one end of said flange, the
sum of the axial lengths of said cut-outs being slightly less
than the axial length of said flange so that the ends of the
wear rings are slightly separated, said cylindrical member-
mounting surfaces extending to said cylindrical flange and
forming 90° angles at their intersection with said flange,
and the radially innermost surfaces of said wear ring sub-
stantially resting on one of said cylindrical member-
mounting surfaces, to allow the wear rings to slide axially
along said cylindrical surfaces during removal;
said wear rings formed of material at least about as stiff as
steel, and the width of each wear ring minus the width of
the cut-out, being more than one-fourth the height of the
cut-out therein, whereby to avoid substantial bending of
the wear rings when they are separated by forcing their
slightly separated ends apart.
4,380,952
COVER ASSEMBLY FOR VERTICAL EXHAUST PIPES
W. Richard Jones, North Barrington, and Earl Conrad, Lake in
the Hills, both of 111., assignors to Mercury Metal Products,
Schaumburg, 111.
FUed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,189
Int. a.3F23L; 7/02
U.S. O. 98—59 6 Claims
1. A gravity actuated protective cover device adapted to be
secured upon an upstanding exhaust stack of an internal com-
bustion engine to prevent entry of extraneous matter therein
during the inoperative condition of the engine and comprising:
A. a support member adapted to be secured to the exhaust
stack and having a pivot structure mounted thereon, the
support member having a clamping formation to straddle
and be clamped to the exhaust stack which includes ad-
justable fastening means, said support member being
formed of a pair of metal straps of generally mirror con-
struction connected face to face, the pivot structure and
fastening means being generally aligned horizontally
when the support member is installed on a stack,
B. a balance arm mounted on said pivot structure for rocking
movement about said pivot structure in a vertical plane,
the balance arm having a cover member connected to the
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
843
front end thereof and a counter-weight vane, the vane and
cover member being on respective opposite sides of the
pivot structure, the balance arm being adapted for said
rocking movement between two positions, one of which is
with the cover member disposed over the end of the
exhaust stack but without touching the same, the other
position being with the cover member substantially ro-
tated away from the stack,
C. the balance arm being heavier on the cover member side
of the pivot than on the vane of the pivot so that the
normal condition of the balance arm is with the cover
member in the first of said positions when the engine is not
operating,
D. said straps having ear portions thereof spaced apart to
provide a bifurcated portion in which the pivot structure
is mounted with said balance arm straddled by said ear
portions, and wherein said pivot structure comprises
(1) a pair of aligned annular flanges with axial passage-
ways therethrough laterally formed on said balance
arm, and
(2) a pair of generally cylindrical plastic sleeve bearings
pivotally mounted in axial alignment on a pivot shaft
member passing through said ear portions so that each
of said bearings is fitted within a respective one of said
passageways to seat said respective annular flange
thereon, wherein at least one of said sleeve bearings
comprises a generally cylindrical body having an annu-
lar collar flange formed on one end of said body and
positioned so that said collar flange engages a respective
one of said ear portions in order to limit axial movement
of said sleeve bearing on said pivot shaft.
4,380,953
TRANSFER MECHANISM IN A PEACH FITTER
David M. Anderson, Lafayette, Calif., and John C. Erb, Carson
Oty, Nev., assignors to Filper Corporation, Reno, Nev.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 940,917, Sep. 11, 1978, Fat. No.
4,254,701. This application Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,240
Int. a.3 A23N 4/04. 4/22
U.S. a. 99—549 8 Qaims
aligner to peach bisecting blades having pit gnpping means
thereon adjacent to the pitting axis at a pitting station spaced
from the aligner while maintaining the suture plane of such
peach in the central plane of said blades, the improvement
comprising:
(a) A pair of opposed, spaced claws each supported on one
side of said central plane and being formed with oppo-
sitely inwardly facing peach-engaging surfaces diverging
oppositely outwardly from and surrounding a central
depression intersecting said pitting axis when said claws
are at said pitting station for centering a peach earned by
said claws about said pitting axis;
(b) Supporting means supporting said claws for movement
toward and away from each other;
(c) Connecting means connecting said claws for movement
together from said aligner to said pitting station and for
removing said claws toward and away from each other;
(d) Drive means for moving said claws through a cycle of
operation toward and away from said aligner and said
pitting station and yieldably urging said connecting means
to bias said claws toward each other during movement
toward said pitting station for transferring the peach
thereto and away from each other during movement
toward said aligner for releasing said peach.
4,380,954
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
PRESSURE EXERTED ON A MATERIAL WEB IN THE
ROLLER NIP OF A ROLLING MILL
Eugen Edele, Reutlingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kleinewefers GmbH, Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,944
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28,
1980, 3007452
Int. Q\? B30B li/00. 3/04
U.S. a. 100—35 12 Qaims
1. In a transfer mechanism which transfers a peach from an
1. A method for controlling the pressure exerted on a mate-
rial web in the nip between two cooperating rollers of a rolling
mill having a roller loading device, particularly a calender
having a plurality of vertically stacked rollers, the lowermost
of which is supported on at least one working cylinder which
can be rapidly bled, comprising the steps of:
a. measuring the support force supplied by said working
cylinder;
b. determining the actual value of the pressure exerted in the
nip on the web, while taking into consideration the weight
of said roller supported by said working cylinder; and
c. eliminating the deviation between said actual value and a
desired set point value by changing the force produced by
the loading device.
844
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,380,955 4,380,956
ROTARY TYPE TAPERED PART TRICHROMATIC MOUNTING OF FLEXIBLE PRINTING PLATES
PRINTER Graham J. Eiworthy, Leighton Buzzard, England, assignor to
Tsunehiko Okura, 3692, Oaza Koori, Konan-shi, Aichi-ken, Protocol Engineering Limited, Hertfordshire, England
Japan Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,359
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,315 Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 9, 1980,
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1980, 55-183933 8029111
Int. CI.' B41F 17/28 Int. Q.' B41C 1/02; B41F 27/00
U.S. CI. 101—38 A 2 Qaims U.S. a. 101—401.1 16 Qaims
/N
1. A rotary type tapered part trichromatic printer apparatus,
comprising:
(a) a pair of rotary tables having a predetermined distance
therebetween and being operatively arranged for synchro-
nous intermittent rotation about a substantially horizontal
core;
(b) clamping means circumferentially and operatively ar-
ranged in relation to the horizontal axial core for clamping
materials for printing;
(c) first and second screen printers respectively located to
define first and second printing stop stations within sub-
stantially the same horizontal plane above said horizontal
axial core of said rotary tables;
(d) a third screen printer located to define a third printing
stop station for printing materials in substantially the same
horizontal plane as said horizontal axial core, said third
screen printer including a screen and a squeegee;
(e) a pivotal member secured to a machine frame of the
apparatus, said pivotal member carrying the screen and
the squeegee and being pivotable to move the screen and
the squeegee in a front to back direction, a left to right
direction, a vertical direction and along the direction of a
tapered part of said materials to be printed;
(0 a screen carnage support frame operatively connected to
the pivotal member with connecting rod means and being
movable to pivot said pivotal member in a direction caus-
ing the screen to move into and out of a printing position;
(g) a linkage mechanism operatively connected to the piv-
otal member for moving the squeegee of the third screen
printer relative to the pivotal member in cooperating with
first and second squeegees respectively located within the
first and second screen members; and
(h) a transverse movable member operatively connected to
pivot the third screen in coop>eration with the pivotal
member, causing synchronous rotation of the first and
second screens.
1. A method of mounting fiexible printing plates in at least
one of a rotary printing press and mounter-proofer, said
method comprising the steps of:
(a) producing a set of exposed films each having an image
and two registration holes formed therein at the same set
distance from the film image and with the same hole size
and centre distance,
(b) providing a set of unexposed fiexographic printing plates,
at least one for each of said films,
(c) drilling with a hollow drill two registration holes in the
unexposed fiexographic printing plates with a hole size
and centre distance to match those of the registration
holes of said exposed films,
(d) passing register pins through the drilled registration
holes in said unexposed fiexographic printing plates and
the registration holes in said exposed films, at least one
film for each said unexposed fiexographic printing plate,
(e) exposing and processing said unexposed fiexographic
printing plates thereby to produce a set of exposed and
processed fiexographic printing plates each having its
image in register to the said drilled registration holes
therein,
(0 providing at least one flexible carrier sheet for said ex-
posed and processed fiexographic printing plates,
(g) forming first registration holes adjacent an edge of said at
least one flexible carrier sheet,
(h) forming second registration holes having the same hole
size and centre distance as the drilled registration holes in
said exposed and processed flexographic printing plates, in
said at least one carrier sheet whereby said second regis-
tration holes in said at least one carrier sheet match said
drilled registration holes in said exposed and processed
flexographic printing plates and whereby a final position
for each of said exposed and processed fiexographic print-
ing plates is obtained relative to its image in at least one of
the printing press and mounter-proofer,
(i) applying pressure-sensitive adhesive to one face of each
of said exposed and processed flexographic printing
plates,
(j) passing register pins through said matching registration
holes in at least one of said exposed and processed flexo-
graphic printing plates and said at least one carrier sheet
thereby to locate said at least one exposed and processed
flexographic printing plate on said at least one carrier
sheet in an in-register position,
(k) securing said at least one exposed and processed flexo-
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
845
graphic printing plate to said at least one carrier sheet in
the in-register position by means of the adhesive,
(1) removing the said register pins from the said matching
registration holes in said at least one exposed and pro-
cessed flexographic printing plate and said at least one
carrier sheet,
(m) locating said at least one exposed and processed flexo-
graphic printing plate in an in-register position in at least
one of the printing press and mounter-proofer with the aid
of said at least one carrier sheet,
(n) and locating the remaining ones of said exposed and
processed flexographic printing plates in turn in the same
in-register position with the aid of said at least one carrier
sheet.
to said match, said coating means comprising an electrically
conductive medium encompassing said match.
4,380,957
FLARE WITH IMPROVED STARTER CAP
Jesse K. Makainai, Jr., 45-042 Kaneohe Bay Dr., Kaneohe, Hi.
96744
Filed Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 189,749
Int. a.^ F42B 3/18
U.S. a. 102—202.1 9 Qaims
1. A fusee including a tubular housing containing a pyro-
technic mixture, one end of said housing including a match
head deflning an outwardly opening central cavity therein, a
cover sleeve having a central partition therein and including
opposing end recesses on opposite sides of said central parti-
tion, a scratch head mix central projection supported within
one of said recesses on the corresponding side of said partition,
said cover sleeve being removably telescoped over said one
end with said one end telescopes into the other of said recesses
and being alternately telescopingly engageable over said one
end with the latter telescoped into said one recess in position
for frictional telescopic engagement of said projection within
said cavity to effect ignition of said head when an axial force is
applied to increase the telescopic engagement of said one
housing end and the end of said sleeve defming said recess.
4,380,958
ELECTROSTATIC SAFE ELECTRIC MATCH
Robert E. Betts, Huntsville, Ala., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,349
Int. a.3 F42B 3/18
U.S. a. 102— 202 J 6 Qalms
4,380,959
SPEED CONTROL FOR GRAVFTY OPERATED
TROLLEYS
John H. Brems, Birmingham, and James T. Graham, Rochester,
both of Mich., assignors to F. Jos. Lamb Company, Warren,
Mich., a part interest
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 908,941, May 24, 1978,
abandoned. This application Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 174,812
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 23,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. OJ B61B 3/00
U.S. a. 104—93 12 Qaims
1. A gravity conveyor comprising downwardly inclined
track means, a trolley adapted to support a workpiece and
supported on said track means for travel thereon in response to
the gravitational force on the trolley, said trolley being sup-
ported on said track means by a pair of separate track-engaging
wheels, said trolley and, track means being designed so that one
of said wheels engages' the track means when the trolley is
empty and the other wheel engages the track means when the
trolley is loaded with a workpiece, a first means for applying a
retarding torque to said one wheel and separate second means
for applying a retarding torque to the second wheel, whereby
each of said wheels is prevented from rolling freely on the
track means to thereby control the velocity of the trolley when
empty and when loaded, the diameters of the two wheels and
the two means for applying torque thereto being selected such
that one wheel and the torque applying means for said wheel
produces a greater retarding torque than the other wheel and
the means for applying torque thereto, even when the trolley is
subjected to the same loading, the wheel and torque applying
means which produces the greater torque being utilized when
the trolley is loaded and the wheel and torque applying means
which produces the lesser torque being utilized when the
trolley is empty.
1. A safe electroexplosive device comprising: an electric
match, coating means covering the surface of said match for
providing a restrictive shield to electrical discharges external
4,380,960
POLLUTION-FREE LOW TEMPERATURE SLURRY
COMBUSTION PROCESS UTILIZING THE
SUPER-CRITICAL STATE
Norman L. Dickinson, 16230 Greenwood LA., Monte Sereno,
Calif. 95030
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 948,682, Oct. 5, 1978, Pat. No.
4,292,953. This application May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,143
Int. a.^ F23D 7/00
U.S. O. 110—347 16 Claims
1. A continuous pressurized combustion process comprising
the steps of:
preparing an aqueous slurry of fuel particles containing
alkali in an amount at least the chemical equivalent of the
sulfur in the fuel as alkali sulfate;
pressurizing the fuel slurry;
preheating the fuel slurry;
pressurizing an oxygen-containing gas;
preheating the oxygen-containing gas;
mixing the preheated fuel slurry and the preheated oxygen-
846
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
containing gas at the entrance to an inlet zone of an elon-
gated combustion reactor, forming a gaseous phase com-
prising the oxygen-containing gas and water vapor in
which the fuel and alkali particles are entrained;
providing a water vapor pressure of at least 3 atmospheres in
the gaseous phase, as measured at the outlet of the reactor:
permitting the fuel particles to bum at a temperature not
exceeding 1600° F. as the gaseous phase flows from the
t^
"T-^
-IX:
'1
inlet zone to the reactor outlet, forming gaseous and en-
trained solid combustion products;
cooling the combustion products at essentially combustion
pressure, by extracting useful heat therefrom, to a temper-
ature below their dewpoint; and
separating from uncondensed gaseous products an aqueous
condensate containing suspended and dissolved solid
products.
4,380,961
VARIABLY CONTROLLABLE BOBBIN THREAD
PULL-OFF MECHANISM
Gerhard Reinert, Bayside, N.Y., and Donald R. Davidson,
Berkeley Heights, N.J., assignors to The Singer Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,564
Int. a.3 D05B 57/14. 57/26
U.S. a. 112—231 9 aaims
i3« 134 28^'*
160 : ' 66 soi
,68 150 Se '58 '
48
1. In a sewing machine, a vertical axis looptaker including a
drive shaft therefor, a non-rotatable bobbin case in the loop-
taker, a disc housed within the looptaker, a drive shaft for the
disc concentric with the drive shaft for the looptaker, a thread
carrying bobbin supported on the bobbin case for free rotation
above the disc, means operably connected with the looptaker
shaft for rotating the looptaker, means operably connected
with the disc shaft and responsive to control input signals for
causing the disc to be oscillated, between a fixed and a variably
controllable position through an angle dependent upon the said
signals, the disc being adapted to engage and pull thread from
the bobbin according to said angle when the disc is moved in
one direction, and to release the thread for use in the formation
of a stitch when the disc is moved in the opposite direction.
4,380,962
NEEDLE POSITIONING DEVICE FOR SEWING
MACHINES
Jean P. Touret, Chatillon sur Bagneux, France, assignor to
Rockwell Interaational Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,614
Claims priority, application Italy, Feb. 5, 1980, 19698 A/80
Int. a.3 D05B 69/22
U.S. a. 112—274 7 Qaims
1 3 7
9 8 18 22 20 28 17 29
36
19
1. A needle positioning device for sewing machines of the
type having a clutch brake type operating motor, a control
shaft operatively connected to the needle and to the moior by
transmission drive members with an operatively associated
control apparatus for selectively operating and braking the
control shaft through said operating motor, said needle posi-
tioning device comprising:
(a) a selective positioning means (18) including:
(i) a cylindrical member (22) mounted on and for rotation
with the control shaft;
(ii) a reference pin (23) fixed in and extending radially
from the periphery of said cylindrical member;
(b) an auxiliary actuator (19) operatively associated with the
control shaft for effecting selective rotation thereof upon
stopping the sewing machine including:
(i) a pulley (29) operatively connected to the control shaft;
(ii) a pneumatic cylinder (33) connected to the control
apparatus;
(iii) flexible means defining a cable (36) interconnecting
the piston of said pneumatic cylinder (33) with said
pulley 29;
(iv) return means defining a spring (39) connected to said
cable (36) for returning the piston and said pulley (29) to
their initial positions upon completion of selective loca-
tion of the needle;
(c) release means (64) operatively connected to the control
apparatus and said operating motor for temporarily dis-
connecting the control shaft from the motor during selec-
tive rotation of the control shaft by said auxiliary actuator;
(d) a unidirectional clutching device (20) mounted on the
control shaft intermediate said cylindrical member (22)
and auxiliary actuator (19) for transmitting the motion
provided to the control shaft and said cylindrical member;
and
(e) locating means for moving a stud into the pathway of
travel of said reference pin (23) to effect stopping the
needle in a preselected position.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
847
4,380,963
MOVABLE LIMIT MARKERS FOR VIEWING GLASS OF
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
Jean Beraey, Les Bioux, Switzerland, assignor to Les Fabriques
d'Assortiments Reunies, Le Locle, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,859
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 14, 1979,
11076/79
Int. a.3 G09F 9/i7
U.S. a. 116—324 10 Qaims
1. Apparatus for marking limits of a measurement in which
a movable display means displays a measured value,
said apparatus comprising a viewing glass having a front
surface and through which said display means is observed,
said viewing glass comprising an open arcuate groove ex-
tending parallel to the movement of said display means, at
least a first displaceable marker located in said open
groove being accessible to be manually displaced in said
open groove to denote said marking limits, said groove in
cross-section having a first portion which narrows in-
wardly towards the front surface to retain said first
marker and a second portion which widens outwardly
from the first portion to the front surface, said at least first
displaceable marker comprising a cylindrical member
freely slideable along said open groove, said open groove
being of such size to permit said displaceable marker to be
moved by finger pressure directly applied to the displace-
able marker with the displaceable marker being slid in the
groove by an operator to denote the measurement limit.
4,380,964
HOLDING SPINDLE FOR PRINTING AND COATING
CYLINDRICAL CONTAINERS
Katsuo Abe; Masahiro Nishio, and Akira Matsubara, all of
Ishioka, Japan, assignors to Toyo Seikan Kaisha, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,438
Int. a.3 B05C li/00
U.S. a. 118—50 1 Claim
U 32i sib »e a ;e ^
1. A holding spindle mountable on a spindle shaft and uti-
lized for printing and coating cylindrical containers compris-
ing an outer sleeve means for receiving a cylindrical container,
said outer sleeve means having an inner diameter less than the
diameter of the cylindrical container to thereby provide a
clearance between said outer sleeve means and the cylindrical
container disposed thereon, bearing means rotatably mounting
said outer sleeve means on said spindle shaft, bottom receiving
pad means, said bottom receiving pad means having a seating
surface, said seating surface having a curvature corresponding
to the curvature of the bottom surface of said cylindrical con-
tainer, aspirating means applying a vacuum to said seating
surface, said aspirating means comprising an opening in said
seating surface leading to a source of vacuum and providing a
vacuum to effect seating and mating of the common curvature
of said seating surface and the inside bottom surface of said
cylindrical container to thereby enhance the stability of the
cylindrical container on the holding spindle, and mounting
means detachably mounting said bottom receiving pad means
to provide for readily replacing and changing said bottom
receiving pad means to accommodate cylindrical containers
having bottom surfaces of differing curvature, said mounting
means comprising a bearing between said spindle shaft and said
bottom receiving pad means to rotatably suppori said bottom
receiving pad means on said spindle shaft independently of said
outer sleeve means.
4,380,965
ELECTRODE FOR A FLUIDIZABLE BED COATING
APPARATUS
Jorg-Hein Walling, Beaconsfield; Andre Dumoulin, Montagnes,
and Gerald R. Arbuthnot, Chateauguay, all of Canada, assign-
ors to Northern Telecom Limited, Montreal, Canada
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,650
Int. a.^F26B 77/00
U.S. a. 118—621 6 Qaims
1. A fluidizable bed coating apparatus comprising a porous
support member having an upper surface to support a bed of
fluidizable coating powder, an electrode disposed completely
beneath the upper surface of the support member, the elec-
trode comprising a plurality of electrically conductive tubes
and a gas impervious carrier for the tubes, and means to con-
nect a source of electric current to the electrode, the tubes
extending from the carrier and having free ends at each of
which there is a concentration in intensity of an electric field
when the electrode is connected to the source of electric cur-
rent, the tubes providing channelling for a Huidizing gas pass-
ing from one side of the carrier to the other to ensure that the
gas passes through the concentrations in intensity of the elec-
tric field.
4,380,966
DEVELOPMENT APPARATUS
Kazuo Isaka; Kimio Nakataata, both of Kawasaki; Masaaki
Sakiirai, Hanno; Tsuyoahi Watanabe, Kawasaki; Fumitaka
Kan, Tokyo, and Keigi Takeda, Kawasaki, all of Japan, as-
signors to Caoon Kabnshiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309^83
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct 11, 1980, 55/142204;
Sep. 30, 1981, 56/155225; Sep. 30, 1981, 56/155226; Sep. 30,
1981, 56/155227
Int a.3 G03G 15/09
U.S. a. 118—651 38 Claims
36. An apparatus for developing latent images on latent-
848
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
image carrying means by the application of developer, com-
prising:
a movable sleeve of non-magnetic material for carrying one-
component magnetic toner on its surface;
a magnet roller fixedly disposed within said sleeve;
means for supplying said one-component magnetic toner to
said surface of said sleeve;
a magnetic doctor blade for controlling the thickness of the
magnetic toner layer formed on said sleeve, said doctor
blade being disposed opposed to the magnetic pole of said
magnet roller to form a magnetic field between said mag-
netic blade and said magnet roller by which said magnetic
toner layer will be controlled into a uniform thickness less
than the gap between said sleeve and said latent-image carry-
ing means; and
means for applying an electric alternating field to the gap
between said sleeve and said latent-image carrying means;
the surface of said sleeve being subjected to anodized alumi-
num treatment and thereafter roughened by sand blast treat-
ment with irregularly shaped particles.
produce a delay signal after a delay time corresponding to
a predetermined distance of travel by a sensed object on
the path;
a duration timer responsive to the delay signal to produce a
duration signal for a duration time corresponding to a
predetermined distance of travel by a sensed object on the
path, the delay timer and the duration timer being opera-
ble to function simultaneously; and
driver means for coupling a control signal to the coating
material discharging means in response to the duration
signal from the duration timer.
4,380,968
ART OF EXHIBITING FISH
Arthur B. Renny, 11688 Wayburn, Detroit, Mich. 48224
Filed Feb. 17, 1978, Ser. No. 878,706
Int. CV AOIK 64/00
U.S. CI. 119—5 6 Claims
4,380,967
SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY COATING OBJECTS
WITH A PLURALITY OF QUANTITIES OF A COATING
MATERIAL USING A SINGLE DISCHARGE APPARATUS
Timothy S. Matt, Bay Village, Ohio, assignor to Nordson Corpo-
ration, Amherst, Ohio
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,520
Int. a.5 B05C 11/00: H03K 17/26
U.S. a. 118—669 5 Claims
.xif
] *-^ 'j , ' } -M
<>i=— i^ nX
£9-
Oii ■:«
7.
/j^ U U UO O O OTTTT
O OO 0 UU O O O
1. A system for automatically coating objects with a plural-
ity of quantities of a coating material comprising:
a discharge device coupled to a source of coating material;
means for discharging the coating material from the dis-
charge device in response to a control signal;
means for moving the objects relative to the discharge de-
vice in a path past the discharge device;
a first sensor positioned along said path and operative to
generate a first sensor signal in response to the presence of
an object at a first point on said path upstream of said
discharge device;
a second sensor positioned along said path and operative to
generate a second sensor signal in response to the presence
of an object at a second point on said path downstream of
the first point and upstream of said discharge device;
a delay timer responsive to either of the sensor signals to
1. Improvement in the art of exhibiting fish comprising a
vertical aquarium consisting of a transparent fish tank and a
metal cowl, said aquarium requiring the usual accoutrements
for proper operation thereof, said fish tank standing vertically
and having a height greater than its width or depth, said cowl
standing vertically and having a height, width, and depth
greater than that of said fish tank, said cowl covering said
accoutrements and silencing in part the noise from the opera-
tion thereof, said cowl having a cutaway portion in the front
and side walls thereof so as to expose said fish tank to view, and
said fish tank having radiused front corners and no seams
therealong so as to present from the front and sides thereof a
full and unobstructed view thereof, said cowl having vertically
extending sheet metal stnachions at the rear comers of said fish
tank, said cutaway portion extending continuously around the
sides and front of said cowl from one rear corner stanchion
thereof to the other, whereby said cowl is wholly devoid of
any front corner stanchions resulting in the aforesaid full and
unobstructed view of said fish tank.
4,380,969
APPARATUS FOR UNLOADING POULTRY
Doverd E. Thomas, 2319 Fairway Cir., SE., Decatur, Ala. 35601
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,737
Int. a.5 AOIK 31/07
U.S. a. 119—82 15 Qaims
1. Apparatus for unloading poultry from a cage having an
opening in the side thereof, comprising:
a. movable means for supporting and moving the cage to an
inclined position, and
b. a chute carried by the supporting means for movement
with the cage as said cage is moved to said inclined posi-
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
849
tion, said chute being spaced from the opening in the cage
and so positioned relative to the cage that when the cage
4,380,971
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE HAVING A
RETARDER
Paul Tholen, Bergisch Gladbach; Leo Lichtblau, Cologne;
Friedemann Albers, St. Augustin, and Dieter Esche, Cologne,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Klockner-Humboldt-
Deutz Aktiengesellschaft, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 290,014
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 16,
1980, 3031059
Int. a.' POIP 1/06
U.S. CI. 123—41.31
supporting means moves the cage to said inclined position
the poultry slides out of the cage onto the chute.
SQaims
4,380,970
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Roy A. Davis, 43 Glendower St., Perth, Australia (6000)
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 75,003, Sep. 12, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,499
Claims priority, application Australia, Aug. 1, 1979, PD9818
Int. a.3 F02B 43/08: F02D 19/00; P02M 25/00
U.S. a. 123—3 10 aaims
IK <28
1. An internal combustion engine comprising inlet means, a
combustion chamber and exhaust means, a dissociation cham-
ber in heat communication with the exhaust means, inlet means
for the dissociation chamber and outlet means for the dissocia-
tion chamber, means for introducing water to the dissociation
chamber through the inlet means thereof, and means for intro-
ducing gases into the inlet means of the combustion chamber
from the dissociation chamber from the outlet means thereof,
wherein said dissociation chamber is in the form of a transition
tube located at least in part within the exhaust means and said
transition tube contains a spirally wound ribbon along at least
part of its length located within the exhaust means, whereby in
use, water in the transition tube is urged outwardly into
contact with walls of the transition tube and hydrogen and
oxygen so produced is introduced into the combustion cham-
ber through the inlet means thereof.
1. An arrangement for an internal combustion engine having
an exhaust conduit, a retarder, and a heat exchanger connected
to said retarder for re-cooling retarder oil, cooling air being
supplied to said heat exchanger during a braking operation of
said internal combustion engine, the improvement in combma-
tion therewith comprising a blocking device arranged in said
exhaust conduit for at least partially closing off said exhaust
conduit during a braking operation and thus retaining gas
flowing from said internal combustion engine, said retained gas
flow being utilized for effecting said supplying of cooling air to
said heat exchanger, by-pass means provided as to said block-
ing device arranged in said exhaust conduit, and means for
generating a cooling air flow being provided in said by-pass
means, said means for generating a cooling air flow being
driven by exhaust gas flowing through said by-pass means.
4,380,972
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Malcolm F. Parkins, Elm Tree Cottage, South End, Ogboume
St. George, near Marlborough, Wiltshire, England
Filed Jul. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 166,824
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 9, 1979,
7934966; Jul. 10, 1979, 7924037
Int. C\? F02B 75/04
U.S. a. 123—78 F 2 Qaims
Pu -li
1. A four stroke internal combustion engine having at least
1029 O.G.— 39
850
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
one cylinder; a single reciprocating piston within the cylinder;
valve controlled exhaust porting at the upper end of the cylin-
der; means for causing the piston to partake of a power stroke
which is longer in length than the induction stroke of the
piston, wherein the piston reaches essentially the same height
within the cylinder at the end of the compression stroke as it
does at the end of the exhaust stroke, said means comprising; a
primary crank shaft and a secondary crank shaft, said crank
shafts being drivingly coupled to rotate in opposite directions
and said secondary crank shaft rotating at half the rotational
speed of the primary crank shaft; a linkage connecting the
piston to the said crank shafts; said linkage comprising a float-
ing link, primary and secondary connecting rods pivoted to the
ends of the floating link and to the primary and secondary
crank shafts respectively, and a connecting rod connecting the
piston to an intermediate point of the floating link nearer the
end thereof to which the primary connecting rod is pivoted;
and a tracking arm pivoted by one end and having its opposite
end swinging in a shallow arc, said opposite end being pivoted
on the floating link at said intermediate point; additional ex-
haust porting at the bottom of the cylinder and positioned to be
uncovered by the piston at the end of the power stroke but
remain covered at the end of the induction stroke, and wherein
the opening and closing of said additional exhaust porting is
controlled solely by the piston.
4,380,973
GLOW PLUG FOR DIESEL ENGLNES
Leo Steinke, WN-Hegnach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,598
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 9,
1980, 3038124
Int. a. J F02P 79/00
U.S. a. 123—145 A 3 Qaims
1. Glow plug for an mternal combustion engine having
a housing (11);
a glow element (13) seated within the housing;
a connecting bolt (19) retained within the housing and insu-
lated therefrom, extending into the glow element (13),
said glow element (13) comprising a metal sleeve (23) closed
at the bottom,
a resistance wire element (24) positioned within the sleeve
and secured to the bottom (23) of the glow element and
connected to the connecting bolt at the other end of the
glow element,
a filler of a good heat conductive insulating material within
the sleeve of the glow element retaining the resistance
wire in position,
and wherein the sleeve is reduced in diameter after assembly
of the wire and the filler to compact the filler therein,
wherein, in accordance with the invention,
the resistance wire (24) comprises n twisted wire elements or
stands (24/1, 24/2),
the pitch (27) of the twist of the wire, before reduction of
diameter of the glow plug element (13), being greater than
n-times the diameter (28) of any one of the strands or wire
elements (24/1, 24/2).
4,380,974
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM FOR AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Carlo Grosso, Turin, Italy, assignor to Fiat Auto S.p.A., Turin,
Italy
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,031
Qaims priority, application Italy, Mar. 24, 1980, 67447 A/80
Int. a.3 F02N 17/00
U.S. CI. 123-179 G 2 Qaims
1. A fuel supply system for an internal combustion engine
comprising:
a carburetor including an air passage, a float chamber, and a
fuel spray nozzle disposed within said air passage and
connected to said float chamber,
an alcohol-containing main fuel tank connected to said float
chamber,
a fuel pump in the connection of said main fuel tank to said
float chamber, and
a gasoline-containing auxiliary fuel tank,
a choke valve within the air passage of the carburetor, up-
stream of said fuel spray nozzle,
a gasoline supply diaphragm device, including a hollow
casing and a diaphragm member within said hollow cas-
ing, which defines a first chamber vented to the atmo-
sphere, and a second chamber,
a first conduit connecting said second chamber to said auxil-
iary fuel tank,
a second conduit connecting said second chamber to said
float chamber,
first and second one-way valves interposed in said first and
second conduits respectively, preventing flow of fuel
from the second chamber to the auxiliary fuel tank and
from the float chamber to the second chamber,
a choke valve actuating mechanism including mechanical
connecting means extending between said choke valve
and said diaphragm member of the gasoline supply device;
whereby said mechanical connecting means causes dis-
placement of said diaphragm member towards a position
in which said second chamber has a minimum volume,
when said choke valve is displaced towards its operating
position during starting and warming up of the engine.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
851
4,380,975
COLD STARTING SYSTEM FOR ALCOHOL FUELED
ENGINE
Thomas M. Powell, Rochester, Mich., assignor to General Mo-
tors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,487
Int. a.'F02N 77/00
U.S. a. 123—179 H 2 Claims
1. A cold starting system for an Engine having means for
mixing liquid alcohol with air to form an air-fuel mixture and
having an induction manifold for conducting said mixture to
the engine, said system comprising:
an alcohol heating chamber,
an alcohol burner chamber in heat exchange relation with
said heating chamber,
an igniter in said burner chamber,
means effective prior to stopping the engine for supplying a
quantity of liquid alcohol to said heating chamber,
means effective prior to starting the engine at engine temper-
ature below a selected value for energizing said igniter
and for delivering a stream of liquid alcohol from said
heating chamber to said igniter, thereby burning the
stream of alcohol to create a supply of hot gases in said
burner chamber effective to vaporize liquid alcohol re-
maining in said heating chamber,
and means for conducting alcohol vapor from said heating
chamber to said induction manifold to thereby provide
sufficient alcohol vapor to start the engine.
4,380,976
FUEL FLOW ARRESfOR
Peter Bottiglieri, Box 85, Coal Harbour, B.C., Canada (VON
IKO)
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,710
Int. a.^F02D 77/02
U.S. CI. 123—198 DB 13 Claims
1. A fuel flow arrester for an internal combustion engine,
said engine including a pump for pumping fuel to an engine
fuel distribution means, said arrestor comprising:
(a) a first valve normally open to enable fuel flow to a com-
bustion chamber of said engine and cioseable to stop fuel
flow to said combustion chamber;
(b) a second normally closed valve for opening to connect an
inlet port of said pump to an inlet port of said engme fuel
distribution means;
(c) a third valve normally open to enable fuel flow from a
fuel tank to said pump and cioseable to stop fuel flow from
said fuel tank to said pump;
(d) a fourth normally closed valve for openmg to divert fuel
flow from an outlet port of said pump to said fuel tank;
and,
(e) a fifth valve normally open to enable fuel return from said
engine fuel distribution means to said fuel tank and close-
able to stop fuel return from said engine fuel distribution
means to said fuel tank.
4,380,977
DEVICE FOR SELECTIVELY CONTROLLING THE
NUMBER OF OPERATIVE CYLINDERS IN
MULTI-CYLINDER ENGINES
Edward Holstein, 284 Rouge Rd., Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada
(R2W 1V7)
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,965
Int. CI.' F02D 17/02
U.S. CI. 123—198 F 26 Claims
'■•■-" c
> -I-' — ^^
=' '\^^-
I. A device for selectively controlling the number of opera-
tive cylinders in a multi-cylinder internal combustion engine
which includes a multi-barrel carburettor and an attaching
flange therefor, with one half of the barrels be.ng operatively
connected to one half of the cylinders and the other half of the
barrels being operatively connected to the other half of the
cylinders, intake manifolds operatively connected between the
barrels and the cylinders operatively connected thereto; com-
prising in combination a valve assembly operatively connected
between the one half of the barrels of the carburettor and the
manifold operatively connected thereto, said valve assembly
being movable from a barrel shut off position to a barrel open
position and vice versa, means to move the valve assembly
from one position to the other position and relief air intake
means between atmosphere and said manifold, said air intake
means being operatively connected to said manifold when said
valve assembly is in the barrel shut off position and discon-
nected from said manifold when said valve assembly is in the
barrel open position, said device including an apertured
mounting plate operatively secured between the carburettor
flange and the intake manifolds, said mounting plate including
a communication aperture between said one half of said barrels
and the corresponding intake manifold and a further communi-
cation aperture between said other half of said barrels and said
other intake manifold, said valve assembly being situated
within one of said apertures, said valve assembly including a
valve seat surrounding the upper end of the communication
aperture in which the valve assembly is situated, a valve hav-
ing a valve head and a stem depending therefrom, said head
being operatively engageable with said seat, a piston and cylin-
der, said cylinder extending from adjacent said seat into the
manifold connected to said one of said communication aper-
852
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
lures, said piston being operatively connected to said valve
stem for movement therewith and means operatively connect-
mg said relief air intake means to the interior of said piston
when said valve is in the barrel shut off position.
4,380.978
ELECTROSTATIC DIESEL FUEL INJECTOR
Bruce W. Maynard. Jr., Woodland Hills, and William T. Web-
ber, Agoura, both of Calif., assignors to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Apr. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 140,080
Int. CI.' F02B 3/00
U.S. CI. 123—275 8 Claims
-;r^|,i,H
1. A precombustor for use in diesel engines comprises:
a precombustion chamber comprising:
an injector port for housing an electrostatic injector;
an ignitor port for housing an ignition means; and
a flow passage substantially opposite said injector port for
conveying air into said precombustion chamber and
combusted gases from said precombustor to a diesel
cylinder; and
an electrostatic fuel injector, comprising:
an electroconductive injector body having at least one
fuel inlet and at least one fuel outlet;
means for electrically insulating said injector body from
said diesel engine; and
means for charging said injector body to more than about
10,000 volts;
wherein the interior of said precombustion chamber further
comprises electrical insulation; and
wherein said precombustion chamber has at least one elec-
trode located along the interior walls for attracting or
repelling the fuel droplets.
4,380,979
IDLING REVOLUTION CONTROL DEVICE FOR AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Sadao Takase, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 100,568, Dec. 5, 1979,
abandoned. This application Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,545
Qajms priority, application Japan, Dec. 6, 1978, 53-149927
Int. a.3 F02D J/04
U.S. a. 123—339 4 Qaims
1. An idling rpm control device for an internal combustion
engine for controlling idling rpm thereof depending upon
operating parameters thereof, comprising:
(a) a revolution sensor for producing signals indicative of
engine revolutions;
(b) rpm range detecting means for detecting a range of
variations in idling rpm of the engine, said range detecting
means comprising a range detecting circuit for receiving
said signals from said revolution sensor and generating a
signal corresponding to a range of variations in rpm of the
engine; and
(c) fuel control means for changing a fuel-air ratio of mixture
to decrease said range of variations in idling rpm, said fuel
control means comprising a change control circuit for
generating signals for changing the fuel-air ratio of mix-
ture when said signal from said range detecting circuit is
more than a determined value, and a fuel control circuit
Memory
fO
Driving
OfOiir ' '
C»nt9f Aritn/rmtic Cirojir
9
MKro CofniMttr
7
fnfiut and Oof put Circuit
18
\^morionPonip9 '''^"" ■ 1 — . *
DetKfing Circuit • -^ — I
fuet Control Circuit
/nfa/ir AirFiom Sensor
Revokition Sensor
Tempemture Sensor
tateSton
2
Engine
for changing the fuel-air ratio of mixture in response to the
signal from said change control circuit and receiving
signals corresponding to parameters from a temperature
sensor for detecting temperature of the engine, said revo-
lution sensor for detecting revolutions of the engine and
an intake air flow sensor for detecting intake air flow rate
to generate driving pulses for actuating a fuel injection
valve.
4,380,980
IGNITION SPARK TIMING CIRCUIT
Rupin J. Javeri, Elk Grove, III., assignor to Motorola Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,029
Int. Q\} F02P 7/00
U.S. CI. 123—414 8 Qaims
1. An ignition spark timing circuit comprising:
first circuit means for providing first and second control
signals, each in response to engine crankshaft rotation;
second circuit means for providing a spark enabling signal;
third circuit means for providing a switching signal having
two values in response to crankshaft velocity being above
or below a predetermined velocity;
fourth circuit means including latching means coupled to be
set by the spark enabling signal and reset by the first
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
853
control signal delayed, and providing a spark detect out-
put signal;
fifth circuit means for providing a dwell control signal; and
sixth circuit means for providing a dwell enabling signal, the
sixth circuit means controlled by the switching signal to
enable dwell in response to the first control signal and to
disenable dwell in response to the second control signal at
engine velocities below the predetermined velocity, and
to enable dwell in response to the dwell control signal and
disenable dwell in response to the spark detect signal at
velocities higher than the predetermined velocity.
4,380,981
KNOCKING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR USE WITH SPARK
IGNITION INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Toshio Enoshima, Fujisawa; Shoji Furuhashi, and Hideyuki
Tamura, both of Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan
Motor Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 234,007
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 18, 1980, 55-17811
Int. CI.' F02P 5/04. 5/14
U.S. CI. 123—415 14 Claims
KNOCKING
SENSING
CIRCUIT
120
SPARK TIMING
ADJUSTING
CIRCUIT
134
IGNITION
CONTROLLER
SK2
1 S«i
— 1
SECOND ENGINE
SPEED
DETERMMNG
CIRCUIT
FIRST ENGINE
SPEED
DETERMINING
CIRCUIT
SPARK
PLUGS
nil.
IGNITION
COIL
1. A knocking control system for a spark ignition internal
combustion engine, comprising:
(a) a reference spark timing determining means for determin-
ing a reference spark timing for the engine according to
the engine speed and load;
(b) a knocking sensing means for sensing engine knocking to
produce a knocking signal representing the presence of
the knocking;
(c) an engine operational state determining means for sensing
one of engine speed and load to produce a drive signal
when said one of engine speed and load is in a predeter-
mined range;
(d) a spark timing adjusting means responsive to the knock-
ing signal for setting an amount of retardation of the
timing from the reference spark timing and;
(e) a range change means responsive to the drive signal for
determining an allowable maximum amount of spark tim-
ing retardation from the reference spark timing such that
outside a predetermined range of one of engine speed and
load, the allowable maximum amount of spark timing
decreases.
spark advance angle which represents an optimum igni-
tion timing at the value of said detected parameter,
wherein the improvement comprises:
selecting one reference crank angle position from a plurality
of different reference crank angle positions for each cylin-
der, said selected reference crank angle position depend-
ing on the value of said calculated spark advance angle;
calculating the difference angle between said selected refer-
ence crank angle position and the crank angle position
corresponding to the calculated spark advance angle;
INPUT I /Ne
<
READ
AiNe I. BtNr
«D
- B -iO
1
•o
- » .»■
^^-
sensing when the crankshaft rotates through the selected
reference crank angle position;
calculating an ignition control value which represents a
period of time required by the crankshaft to rotate
through said calculated difference angle; and
producing an ignition spark in response to said ignition
control value when said period of time has elapsed after
the crankshaft rotates past said sensed selected reference
crank angle position.
4,380,983
IGNITION TIMING CONTROL APPARATUS
Mamoru Kobashi, Aichi, and Hideo Miyagi, Okazaki, both of
Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 164,546, Jul. 2, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jun. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 388,727
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 6, 1979, 54-92457
Int. a.' F02P 5/04
U.S. CI. 123—424 6 Qaims
^'pS
4,380,982
IGNITION TIMING CONTROL METHOD
Mamoru Kobashi, Aichi, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha
Kabushiki Kaisha, ToyoU, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 163,066, Jun. 26, 1980, abandoned.
This application May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 383,308
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 2, 1979, 54-82570
Int. a.J F02P 5/04. 5/08; F02B 3/00; F02D 5/00
U.S. a. 123—416 5 Qaims
1. An ignition timing control method for an internal combus-
tion engine having at least one cylinder and a crankshaft,
comprising the steps of:
detecting a parameter which affects the ignition timing of
the operating engine;
generating at least one electrical signal which indicates the
value of the detected parameter; and
calculating, in response to said generated electrical signal, a
I ^pamI
' ~HcONT f- ll?6^ -T
S, . - — '' ' ' ' ' —
:0 --
1. An electronic ignition control apparatus for a spark-igni-
tion internal combustion engine having a crankshaft, a plurality
of cylinders, and an equal plurality of pistons slidably mounted
in respective cylinders and operatively connected to the crank-
shaft, said apparatus comprising:
854
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
means for generating at least one condition signal which
indicates the operating condition of the engine when the
engine is running;
means for generating a starting signal when the engine is in
the starting condition;
a crankshaft position sensor having a single pickup for de-
tecting a plurality of angularly spaced predetermined
crankshaft positions including at least a fixed firing pxjsi-
tion for each cylinder;
means responsive to said single pickup for generating a
crankshaft position signal when the crankshaft passes each
predetermined position;
means responsive to said at least one condition signal for
calculating an optimum ignition timing value for said
operating condition of the engine;
means for selecting one of said crankshaft position signals
from said single pickup occurring prior to the fixed firing
position signal for each cylinder;
means responsive to said calculated optimum ignition timing
value and to the selected one of said crankshaft position
signals occurring prior to the fixed firing position signal
for each cylinder for producing a calculated ignition tim-
ing signal for each cylinder when the crankshaft passes
through a position corresponding to the calculated opti-
mum ignition value for the respective cylinder;
means for selecting said calculated ignition timing signals for
timing the sparks applied to the cylinders when the start-
ing signal is absent and for selecting said fixed firing sig-
nals for timing the sparks applied to the cylinders when
said starting signal is present.
4,380,984
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED CARBURETOR
Tadashi Nagai, Yokosuka; Ken Nakamura, Kawasaki, and
Yasuo Nakajima, Yokosuka, ail of Japan, assignors to Nissan
Motor Company, Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,396
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 1, 1980, 55-89872
Int. aj F02B 33/00; F02M 23/04; F02B 3/00; F02M 7/14
U.S. a. 123-440 14 Qaims
1. An electronic controlled carburetor for an internal com-
bustion engine, comprising:
(a) an induction passage for supplying a combustible mix-
ture to said engine;
(b) a source of fuel;
(c) fuel metering means communicating between said source
of fuel and said induction passage, said fuel metering
means communicated with the atmosphere through a main
air bleed passage and also through an auxiliary air bleed
passage;
(d) first and second solenoid valves provided in said main
and auxiliary air bleed passages for varying the rates of air
flow to said fuel metering means, respectively;
(e) engine exhaust gas analyzing means effective for sensing
selected constituents of the exhaust gases of said engine
and producing in response thereto an output signal; and
(0 a control circuit responsive to the output signal of said
engine exhaust gas analyzing means for operating said first
and second solenoid valves, said control circuit compris-
ing a first comparator for providing the difference be-
tween the output of said engine exhaust gas analyzing
means and a predetermined reference value, an amplifier
for providing a first signal proportional to the difference,
a first integrator for providing a second signal resulting
from integrating the difference, an adder for providing a
third signal resulting from adding the first and second
signals, a first pulse generator for providing a first drive
pulse signal having a duty ratio dependent upon the third
signal to said first solenoid valve, a second comparator for
providing the deviation between the second signal and a
predetermined reference value, a second integrator for
providing a fourth signal resulting from integrating the
deviation, and a second pulse generator for providing a
second drive pulse signal having a duty ratio dependent
upon the fourth signal to said second solenoid valve.
4,380,985
FLOW RATE CONTROL SYSTEM FOR FLUID BEING
SUPPLIED TO AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE,
HAVING INITIAL POSITION SETTING FUNCTION FOR
FLOW RATE CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR
Kazuo Otsuka, Higashikurume; Shin Narasaka, Yono, and
Shumpei Hasegawa, Niiza, all of Japan, assignors to Honda
Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,118
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 12, 1980, 55-095512
Int. a.3 F02M 7/]8
U.S. a. 123-440 12 Qaims
1 M 99
K -
^n- — -J , J
1 1 TlOi A-
^
i|£ll
1. A flow rate control system for controlling the fiow rate of
a fluid being supplied to an internal combustion engine, which
comprises: valve means for varying the flow rate of one of air
and fuel, forming said fluid, to thereby control the air/fuel
ratio of an air/fuel mixture being supplied to said engine; a
pulse motor for driving said valve means; position detecting
means for detecting the valve position of said valve means with
respect to a reference position to produce two different levels
of output depending upon a detected valve position; and an
electrical circuit connected to said pulse motor, said position
detecting means and a power switch, said electrical circuit
being arranged for operation such that: (a) when said position
detecting means produces one level of output upon turning on
said power switch, said electrical circuit drives said pulse
motor in the direction of said reference position until said
position detecting means produces the other level of output;
(b) when said position detecting means produces said other
level of output upon turning on said power switch or when
said position detecting means has come to produce said other
level of output as a result of said driving of said pulse motor in
said paragraph (a), said electrical circuit drives said pulse
motor in the direction of said reference position until sad posi-
tion detecting means produces said one level of output: and (c)
said electrical circuit is responsive to occurrence of said one
level of output during said driving of said pulse motor in said
paragraph (b), to stop said pulse motor.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
855
4^0,986
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CLOSED-LOOP
CONTROL OF THE AIR NUMBER IN A SELF-IGNITING
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Reinhard Latsch, Vaihingen; Heinz Schober, Bietigheim-Bissin-
gen; Gerhard Miiller, Asperg, and Valerio Bianchi, Neuss, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH,
Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,136
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Not. 7,
1979, 2944834
Int. a.3 F02B 3/00
U.S. a. 123—489 15 Qaims
tion temperature, pump means for delivering fuel to said
heat exchanger means, a heat source carried by the engine
and operably connected to the heat exchanger means for
raising the temperature of said fuel, a fuel flow controller
operably connected between the heat exchanger means
and the carburetor, return control means operably con-
nected between the fuel flow controller and the pump
means for routing a first portion of unused fuel back to
said pump means and a vapor capture means operably
connected between the carburetor and the pump means
for routing a second portion of unused fuel back to the
pump means.
4,380,988
AIR/FUEL RATIO CONTROL SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES, HAVING EXHAUST GAS
REORCULATION CONTROL FUNCTION
Kazuo Otsuka, Higashikurume; Shin Narasaka, Yono, and
Shumpei Hasegawa, Niiza, all of Japan, assignors to Honda
Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,750
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 28, 1980, 55-119114
Int. a.' F02M 25/06
U.S. a. 123—571 2 Qaims
1. A method for the closed-loop control of the air number X
of the operating mixture for combustion in a self-igniting inter-
nal combustion engine, comprising the steps of:
detecting the ion current associated with a permissible soot
number of the exhaust gas exhausted from the engine with at
least one ion current sensor located in the immediate vicinity
of an outlet valve of the engine;
generating a set-point value of the ion current which corre-
sponds to the value of the ion current in the range of
\= 1.0-1.5, said ion current increasing sharply in this air
number range;
comparing the detected ion current with the set-point value in
a closed-loop control device and establishing a deviation of
the detected ion current from the set-point value; and
adjusting the composition of the operating mixture and conse-
quently the air number X as a function of the deviation,
whereby the set-point valve of the ion current is maintained
and the permissible soot number of the exhaust gas is not
exceeded.
4,380,987
CIRCULATING FUEL HEATING SYSTEM FOR
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Theron H. Grain, Rte. 7, Box 164-B, Muskogee, Okla. 74401
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,585
Int. a.3 F02M 31/00
U.S. a. 123—558 16 Claims
1. A circulating fuel heating system for internal combustion
engines having a carburetor, said system comprising
heat exchanger means for raising fuel to beyond its vaporiza-
1. An air/fuel ratio control system for performing feedback
control of the air/fuel ratio of an air/fuel mixture being sup-
plied to an internal combustion engine having an intake system,
an exhaust system and a throttle valve arranged within said
intake system, said air/fuel ratio control system comprising in
combination: means for detecting the concentration of an
exhaust gas ingredient emitted from said engine; fuel quantity
adjusting means for producing said mixture being supplied to
said engine; and an electrical circuit operatively connecting
said concentration detecting means with said fuel quantity
adjusting means in a manner effecting feedback control opera-
tion to control the air/fuel ratio of said mixture to a predeter-
mined value in response to an output signal produced by said
concentration detecting means; an exhaust gas recirculation
passage communicating said intake system with said exhaust
system; an exhaust gas recirculation valve arranged across said
exhaust gas recirculation passage and having means actuatable
by negative pressure to open said valve; a port opening in said
intake system at a location slightly upstream of said throttle
valve in idle position thereof; a negative pressure passage
communicating said port with said exhaust gas recirculation
valve; a solenoid valve arranged to close said negative pressure
passage; an absolute pressure sensor adapted to produce an
output signal continuously variable with a change in absolute
pressure present in said intake system; an engine temperature
sensor adapted to produce an output signal continuously vari-
able with a change in engine coolant temperature; and a circuit
provided within said electrical circuit for detecting an operat-
ing condition of said engine and electrically connected to said
solenoid valve; said electrical circuit being operable on output
signals produced by said absolute pressure sensor and said
engine temperature sensor to carry out control of the air/fuel
856
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
ratio of said mixture, said output signals of said absolute pres-
sure sensor and said engine temperature sensors being supplied
to said engine operating condition detecting circuit; said elec-
trical circuit being also operable on said output signals of said
two last-mentioned sensors to cause said solenoid valve to
close said negative pressure passage and simultaneously allow
atmospheric air to be introduced into said negative pressure-
actuatable means of said exhaust gas recirculation valve when
said output signal of said absolute pressure sensor has a value
lower than a first predetermined value or when said output
signal of said engine temperature sensor has a value lower than
a second predetermined value.
4,380,990
PORTABLE CORE DRILL CUTTER FOR HARD BRITTLE
SHEETS
Dante S. Giardini, Dearborn Heights, Mich., assignor to Ford
Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Jul. 28, 1977, Ser. No. 819,904
Int. CI.' B23B 35/00. 41/00; B28D 1/02
U.S. CI. 125-20 14 Claims
4,380,989
IGNITION SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Iwao Takaki, Chiryu, Japan, assignor to Nippondenso Co., Ltd.,
Kariya, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,346
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 27, 1979, 54-
164698[U]: Dec. 18, 1979, 54-165316
Int. CI.' F02P 11/00. 1/00: H02M 3/22; F02P 1/08
U.S. CI. 123-644 16 Claims
i2^
'26
i;ri t},27 l23^ . 1 ? ?
1. An ignition system for an internal combustion engine
comprising an ignition signal generator generating an ignition
signal in synchronism with the rotation of the engine, a power
transistor unit turned on-off in response to the ignition signal
generated from said ignition signal generator, an ignition coil
including a primary winding and a secondary winding electri-
cally isolated from each other, the primary winding being
connected to said power transistor unit turned on-off to inter-
rupt the primary current supplied to the primary winding of
said ignition coil, a spark plug connected to one end of the
secondary winding of said ignition coil, a secondary current
detecting resistor connected between the other end of the
secondary winding of said ignition coil and an earth potential
point for detecting the secondary current flowing through the
secondary winding of said ignition coil, a calculating circuit
receiving both of the secondary current detected by said sec-
ondary current detecting resistor and the primary voltage
detected by a primary voltage resistor connected to a
grounded side end of the primary winding of said ignition coil
as its input signals for calculating, on the basis of these input
signals, an ignition control value representing the characteris-
tics of the secondary electrical circuit of said ignition coil, and
means responsive to the output signal from said calculating
circuit for controlling the high voltage applied across said
spark plug.
'^..,
J.i J^ s^ (
1. A portable, lightweight drill assembly for enlarging a hole
or opening in a piece of plate glass or the like, comprising, in
combination, means for detachably mounting a drill motor on
one side of the glass, the motor having a drill shaft extending
through the glass from one side to the other through a hole of
a diameter accommodating the shaft and coaxial with the
opening to be enlarged, a pair of core drills facing one another
one each on opposite sides of the glass and having cutter faces
of a larger diameter than the hole in the glass, means opera-
tively securing the core drills to the drill shaft for simultaneous
rotation therewith, the faces of the core drills being contiguous
to opposite glass surfaces, means mounting at least one of the
core drills on the shaft for axial movement relative to the shaft,
and spring means biasing the cutter faces of the core drills
against the contiguous glass surfaces whereby operation of the
drill motor effects a simultaneous rotational cutting by the pair
of core drills into opposite surfaces of the glass by the simulta-
neous axial movement of the drills in opposite directions
towards one another to provide the desired enlarged hole, and
a fluid passage connected at one end to a source of fluid under
pressure, the passage at its other end opening adjacent the hole
in the glass to be enlarged and internal of the cutter faces for
discharge from the passage radially outwardly under pressure
past the cutter faces of the core drills to continuously flush
grinding swarf away from the cutters and thereby minimize
loading of the drills.
4,380,991
DRILLING DEVICE
Martin Richter, Freising, and Wolfgang Erdt, Munich, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hiiti Aktiengesellschaft,
Schaan, Liechtenstein
Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,374
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 30,
1979, 2930856
Int. a.3 B23B 41/00; B28D 1/14
U.S. a. 125—20 3 Gaims
1. Device for drilling rock, concrete, reinforced concrete
and similar materials comprising a housing, a spindle located
within said housing and rotatable about an axis therein, a re-
placeable drilling tool connectably mounted on said spindle for
rotation therewith, a driving pinion located in said housing
laterally of said spindle, an intermediate gear positionable in
meshed engagement with said driving pinion, a gear wheel
driven by said driving pinion via said intermediate gear and
said gear wheel arranged to transfer rotational movement to
said drilling tool, wherein the improvement comprises that said
gear wheel is mounted on said drilling tool, the spacing be-
tween said intermediate gear and said spindle being adjustable
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
857
with the spacing between said interinediate gear and said driv-
ing pinion being maintained the same, the diameter of the
rolling circle of said gear wheel corresponds essentially to the
outside diameter of said drilling tool, and said drilling tool
comprising a plurality of drilling tools each of a different
diameter and selectively individually replaceably connected to
said spindle and the relation between the diameter of said gear
wheel and of the outside diameter of said drilling tools affords
the correct constant cutting speed for a specific material.
2. A burner for a small portable stove, especially for a flambe
stove, comprising:
a burner lower portion equipped with a fuel container for a
fuel which is to be combusted;
a burner upper portion having a flame opening and cooper-
ating with said burner lower portion;
means for regulatably lifting said burner upper portion with
respect to said burner lower portion for forming an air
inlet gap extending at least partially about said burner;
said means for regulatably lifting said burner upper portion
comprising at least three run-on inclined elements be-
tween the burner upper portion and said burner lower
portion, so that by moving the burner upper portion in
relation to the burner lower portion it is possible to alter
the height of said air inlet gap;
said run-on inclined elements are provided at an underside of
said burner upper portion; and said lifting means further
including means coacting with said run-on inclined ele-
ments provided at the burner lower portion;
said coacting means at said burner lower portion comprising
fixed tongues; and
said burner upper portion being lengthwise displaceable
with respect to the burner lower portion for adjusting the
air inlet gap.
4,380,992
BURNER, ESPECIALLY FOR A FLAMBE PORTABLE
STOVE OR THE LIKE
Markus Spring, Sirnach, Switzerland, assignor to Spring AG,
Metallwarenfabrik, Eschlikon, Switzerland
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 182,973
Claims priority, application Fed, Rep. of Germany, Sep. 11,
1979, 2936595
Int. CI.' F24C 5/00
U.S. CI. 126—43 2 Claims
■":.l\
=t\.'
^
nA..
l- /
JL^JX^^Ai
rr^
-)0
w
4,380,993
COMBINED SOLAR COLLECTOR AND STORAGE POND
Hermann J. Spitzer, 8004 Arcade St. (Fairfax County), Lorton,
Va. 22079
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,901
Int. CI.' F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—415 14 Qaims
1. A burner for a small portable stove, especially for a flambe
stove, comprising:
a burner lower portion equipped with a fuel container for a
fuel which is to be combusted;
a burner upper portion having a flame opening and cooper-
ating with said burner lower portion;
means for regulatably lifting said burner upper portion with
respect to said burner lower portion for forming an air
inlet gap extending at least partially about said burner;
said means for regulatably lifting said burner upper portion
comprising at least three run-on inclined elements be-
tween the burner upper portion and said burner lower
portion, so that by moving the burner upper portion in
relation to the burner lower portion it is ppssible to alter
the height of said air inlet gap;
said run-on inclined elements are provided at an underside of
said burner upper portion; and said lifting means further
including means coacting with said run-on inclined ele-
ments provided at the burner lower portion;
said coacting means at said burner lower portion comprising
fixed tongues; and
said burner upper portion being rotatable relative to said
burner lower portion for adjusting the air inlet gap.
Vj^-!\VVv^'
/■■^cy.rv:-!
10. A combined solar energy collector and solar energy
storage pond assembly comprising: A storage pond comprising
a large flexible plastic bag supported in the lower portion of a
containment structure and occupying most of the volume of
said containment, said large plastic bag being filled or nearly
filled with black radiation absorbing fluid; said energy collec-
tor comprising a smaller absorber bag or compartment of clear,
flexible plastic adapted to be filled with said black radiation
absorbing fluid; a first pump/valve mounted in a hole in the top
surface of said large bag or compartment and the bottom sur-
face of said absorber bag or compartment, said pump/valve
being adapted to pump heated radiation absorbing fluid from
said absorber bag or compartment to said storage pond; and a
second pump/valve adapted to pump cool radiation absorbing
fluid from the bottom of said storage pond to the absorber bag
or compartment after said absorber bag or compartment has
been emptied by said first pump/valve.
858
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,380,994
ALL SEASON WINDOW
Robert A. Seemann, 89 Earl Ave., Hamden, Conn. 06514
Division of Ser. No. 52,770, Jun. 28, 1979, Pat. No. 4,347,835.
This application May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,663
Int. CI.' F24J 3/02: E06B 7/12. 7/14
L.S. CI. 126—431 4 Claims
1. An all season window comprising:
a peripherally extending pane mounting frame mounting said
window in an exterior wall of a structure having an inte-
rior space;
first, second and third panes of essentially rigid transparent
sheet material mounted sealingly and fixedly within said
frame in spaced parallel relationship each to the other,
said second pane being interposed between said first and
third panes, said second pane comprising solar heat ray
absorbent material;
a discrete amount of heat absorbent liquid maintained either
at a first location between said first and second panes to
minimize transfer of heat from absorbed solar energy to
said interior space or at a second location between said
second and third panes to provide said heat to said inte-
rior, said discrete amount being sufficient to substantially
fill only one of said locations at a time;
and means for selectively moving said heat absorbent liquid
between said first and second locations.
4,380,995
SOLAR ENERGY CONVERTERS AND ABSORBERS
THEREFOR
Alastair Robertson, Glentramman Manor House, Lezayre, nr.
Ramse> . Isle of Man, England
Filed -May 7, 1979, Ser. No. 36,765
Int. C1.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—438 ' 12 Oaims
.14
1. A solar energy converter comprising a reflector and an
absorber, said reflector being adapted for direct exposure to
solar radiation and having a concavely curved reflecting sur-
face for collecting and reflecting solar radiation onto said
absorber, and said absorber comprising a convexly curved wall
and a concavely curved wall joined together to define an
internal chamber of generally crescent-shaped cross-section,
said absorber being arranged with respect to the reflector so
that solar radiation directed by the reflector onto the absorber
falls substantially perpendicularly onto substantially the whole
of the convexly curved wall thereof, said internal chamber
being in the form of a narrow conduit for the passage of heat
exchange fluid in a turbulent flow manner so as to remove heat
from said convexly curved wall of the absorber, and including
thermal insulation on said concavely curved wall of said ab-
sorber to minimize heat losses therefrom.
4,380,996
ROOF CONSTRUCTION FOR BUILDINGS
Max Mengeringhausen, Wurzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to MERO-Raumstruktur GmbH & Co., Wurzburg,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 28,356, Apr. 9, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,141
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 8,
1978, 2815268
Int. CI.' F24J 3/02: F28F 9/00
U.S. CI. 126—450 9 Qaims
17 18 16 17 36
/ V
1. In a roof construction for buildings, particularly buildings
which do not have a north-south alignment, comprising a
space framework formed by rods and knot elements, with first
rods in a top chord and second rods in a bottom chord and
diagonal rods connecting said first and second rods, whereby
the diagonal rods are arranged in groups in a plurality of inter-
secting planes, running oblique to the horizontal, and the inter-
secting planes including the diagonal rods are arranged in
groups that are parallel to each other,
the improvement characterized in that:
a section of planes, which include groups of diagonal rods of
the space framework (33, 35, 36) is aligned independent of
the alignment of the building (5. 30. 31, 41) in the direc-
ti4)n i>f the highest position of the sun. and
solar collectors (18) are arranged in said planes and mounted
on the diagonal rods wherein the framework (33,35,36) is
deformed on condition that for sets of rods (15,150) point-
ing in the direction of the highest elevation of the sun and
with parallel upper chord axes, the junctions (14) of the
lower chord form a grid with grid lines (34) parallel to the
building contours and presenting essentially uniform spac-
ings (L„,L/,) along each axis.
4,380,997
EMBRYO TRANSFER METHOD AND APPARATUS
Stanley P. Leibo, San Antonio, Tex., assignor to Rio Vista
International, Inc., San Antonio, Tex.
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,%9
Int. a.3 A61D 7/00. 7/02
U.S. a. 128—1 R 23 Gaims
1. A method for thawing and transferring frozen embryos to
recipients comprising:
(a) thawing a volume of frozen cryoprotective agent con-
taining the embryo;
(b) combining said thawed volume with an effective volu-
metric amount of a diluent solution for diluting the cryo-
protective agent, said diluent solution having a concentra-
tion of a nontoxic, nonpermeating diluent sufficient to
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
859
result in a dilution mixture which is substantially isosmo-
lal; and
wall whereby the tip can be maneuvered in the ear with-
out breaking the seal.
4,380,999
STEPPED SURGICAL RETRACTOR
Keelin E. Healy, 3402 Treehouse Pkwy., Norcross, Ga. 30093
Filed Jul. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 169,022
Int. a.' A61B 17/02
IJ.S. a. 128—20 7 aaims
(c) transferring said dilution mixture and embryo directly
into a recipient where washing of said dilution mixture
from said embryo occurs.
4,380,998
SOFT TIP SPECULUM
Joseph D. Kieffer, III, Camillus; John Cecil, Jr., and Harden A.
Conroe, both of Skaneateles, all of N.Y., assignors to Welch
Allyn, Inc., Skaneateles Falls, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,281
Int. CI.' A61B 1/22
U.S. CI. 128—9 7 Oaims
''-*
1
K^
^
4?
- ja
JO'L-
'"
-?6-
4 7
<>#
43
3,^
X
^
^ a
/S —
-J
- i4
/5 —
f-
aKTy
1. A removable speculum for use in conjunction with an
instrument that is inserted into the ear canal and includes
a general frusto-conical body formed of a rigid material
having an extended section disposed outwardly from the
smaller end wall of the body and having a reduced diame-
ter with respect to the smaller end wall, so as to form a
radially extended shoulder therewith, the extended sec-
tion terminating in a front end face, said body and said
reduced diameter extended section having an unob-
structed access opening passing therethrough,
a locking means for removably securing the body to the
instrument,
a hollow cylindrical tip mounted upon said extended section
that is formed of a soft flexible material that conforms
against the wall of the ear canal to establish a positive seal
thereagainst, said tip having a rear wall that is seated
against said shoulder and a front wall that passes over and
abuts against the front end face of the extended section,
whereby the tip is prevented from moving axially on the
extended section and collapsing into said opening as it is
inserted and maneuvered in the ear canal, and
said tip further having a raised midsection that overlies the
extended section and tapers downwardly toward each
1. In a surgical retractor for retracting and lifting a body
organ:
an elongated retractor member means for mounting on a sur-
face such as on one side of an operating table for longitudinal
adjustment upwardly or downwardly and transversely of
the mounting surface to change the efTective length thereof,
said retractor member having opposite ends and a plurality
of retaining members at spaced positions thereon.
a curved retracting end means of said retractor member means
defining a slope portion in which at least part of the body
organ is supported for lifting,
a support member means extending vertically upwardly to the
mounting surface for adjustably supportmg said retractor
member above the organ on the mounting surface, whereby
the height of the end of the retractor member means oppo-
site from the slope portion may be adjusted in vertical height
by moving same selectively upwardly or downwardly and
substantially through said support member means to change
the effective length of the elongated retractor member
means, said support member means comprising a plurality of
individual support members spaced from one another up-
wardly above the mounting surface from each other,
said retractor member means being selectively movable from
one position on said support means upwardly or down-
wardly and selectively inwardly or outwardly relative to the
mounting surface to engage a selected retaining member
with one selected support member thereby to determine the
height and effective length of the retractor member,
thereby to change the angle of the retractor member with
respect to the transverse line of the operating table whereby
the height, angle and effective length of said retractor mem-
ber may be adjusted and set.
4,381,000
DEVICE FOR USE IN HUMAN COPULATION
Lee G. Duncan, 898 N. Highland Ave., NE., Atlanta, Ga. 30306
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,248
Int. a.' A61F 5/00
U.S. a. 128—79 12 Claims
1. A device to be worn by the human male during the act of
sexual intercourse comprising sheath means for encircling and
shielding the shaft of the p)enis from a point directly behind the
glans to the base portion thereof to retract and reuin the skin
of the shaft therewithin, and harness means adapted to be worn
about the lower portion of the male body for supportably
860
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
positioning said sheath means to prevent its longitudinal move-
ment along the penis and relative movement of the skin along
the shaft of the penis during intercourse, said harness means
comprising an elongate relatively rigid section having a base
portion at one end thereof for location on the central lower
abdomen of the body of the male above the penis and in juxta-
position to the pubic bone, and a semi-rigid flexible elongate
member attached to and extending from said base portion
4,381,002
FLUIDIC-CONTROLLED OXYGEN INTERMITTENT
DEMAND FLOW DEVICE
George Mon, Silver Spring, Md., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,881
Int. a.3 A61M 16/00
U.S. a. 128—204.24 6 Oaims
. .i'
passing between the legs of the male body and having an end
portion to be positioned adjacent the lower vertebra of the
spinal column of the body, and flexible strap means for inter-
connecting said base portion and said end portion of said semi-
rigid elongate member about the hips of the body to draw the
base portion and the end portion of the elongate member into
firm engagement with the pubic bone and lower vertebra of
the spine of the male body, respectively.
4,381,001
lUD ARRANGEMENT
Seth T. Shaw, Jr., 30036 Via Borica, Rancho Palos Verdes,
Calif. 90274
Division of Ser. No. 55,900, Jul. 9, 1979, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 928,093, Jul. 26, 1978, Pat. No,
4,233,968, Ser. No. 927,765, Jul. 25, 1978, and Ser. No. 928,106,
Jul. 26, 1978, abandoned. This application Jul. 1, 1980, Ser. No.
165,187
Int. C\? A61F 5/46
U.S. a. 128—130 17 Qaims
1. A medicated intrauterine device of the type insertable into
the uterus for retention therein for a predetermined time period
and comprising, in combination, a uterus insertable body mem-
ber comprising a polymer matrix havmg an external surface
contacting the uterus, a coating on a first portion of said exter-
nal surface of said body member comprising a drug, and said
drug compromising at least a guanidine in one of a non-biode-
gradable monomer, non-biodegradable dimer, non-biodegrada-
ble oligomer and non-biodegradable, cross-linked polymer
form and said drug chemically bonded to said surface of said
polymer matrix.
1. An apparatus for providing intermittent flow of respira-
tory fluid to an individual, comprising:
a supply of respiratory fluid;
fluid application means for applying said respiratory fluid to
a respiratory orifice of the individual;
respiratory fluid communication means for providing a flow
of said respiratory fluid from said respiratory fluid supply
to said fluid application means;
valve means, placed in said respiratory fluid communication
means for interrupting said flow of respiratory fluid;
a laminar bi-stable amplifier for controlling the operation of
said valve means, including an inlet, a first outlet, a second
outlet, a first control port, and an opposite second control
port;
an atmospherically biased laminar proportional amplifier for
controlling the operation of said laminar bi-stable ampli-
fier, including an inlet, a first outlet, a second outlet, a first
control port, and an opposite second control port;
a source of low pressure power fluid;
power fluid supplying means for providing a flow of said
power fluid from said power fluid source into the inlets of
the laminar proportional amplifier and the laminar bi-sta-
ble amplifier, respectively;
pressure sensing means for sensing a pressure at said respira-
tory orifice of the individual;
pressure communication means for communicating said
sensed pressure to the first control port of said laminar
proportional amplifier;
fluid communication bias means for atmospherically biasing
said laminar proportional amplifier by communicating an
atmospheric pressure flow to the second control port of
said laminar proportional amplifier,
wherein whenever said sensed pressure falls to an inhala-
tion pressure indicating the initiation of an inspiration
cycle by said individual, said sensed inhalation pressure
communicated to said first control port of the laminar
proportional amplifier and said atmospheric pressure
communicated to said second control port of the lami-
nar proportional amplifier comprise a first difference
signal which causes said power fluid to flow from the
inlet to the first output of said laminar proportional
amplifier, and
whenever said sensed pressure rises to an exhalation pres-
sure indicating the initiation of an expiration cycle by
said individual, said sensed exhalation pressure commu-
nicated to said first control port of said laminar propor-
tional amplifier and said atmospheric pressure commu-
nicated to said second control port of the laminar pro-
portional amplifier comprise a second difference signal
which causes said power fluid to flow from the inlet to
APRIL 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
861
the second output of said laminar proportional ampli-
fier;
amplifier control fluid communication means for connect-
ing the first and second control ports of the laminar
bi-stable amplifier to the first and second outputs of the
laminar proportional amplifier, respectively, so that
switching of the power fluid between the two outputs
of the laminar proportional amplifier in response to said
first and second difference signals causes corresponding
switching of the power fiuid between the two outputs
of the laminar bi-stable amplifier; and
valve control fluid communication means for connecting at
least one output of the laminar bi-stable amplifier in fluid
communication with said valve means, wherein said valve
means is controlled by the laminar bi-stable amplifier to
open whenever said sensed pressure falls to said inhalation
pressure and to close whenever said sensed pressure rises
to said exhalation pressure.
before said downstream branch is completely filled with
dialysing solution being pumped to said peritoneal cavity.
4,381,004
EXTRACORPOREAL SYSTEM FOR TREATMENT OF
INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES
Albert L. Babb, Seattle, Wash., assignor to Biomedics, Inc.,
Arlington Heights, III.
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225.309
Int. CI.' A61M 1/03
U.S. CI. 128—214 R 17 Qaims
4,381,003
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE AUTOMATIC
SEMICONTINUOUS PERITONEAL DIALYSIS
Vincenzo Buoncristiani, Via Marco Polo, 4, Foligno (Perugia),
Italy
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,425
Qaims priority, application Italy, Oct. 26, 1979, 43514 A/79
Int. CI.^ A61M 5/00
U.S. CI. 128—213 A 7 Claims
riKM
HTIENT
"^
1 C«LCIUI.
"~\ CHLOUlM
34
% 1
r
1
V
\
KiirusiON or
' «D blooo CtuS
^^^ 19
^9
f§ — '
09^
SOCIUH
CITMIl
Cr
U"
K
1. The method of treating or preventing a disease caused by
microorganisms in the bloodstream comprismg withdrawmg
blood from a bloodstream, treating at least a fraction of the
withdrawn blood extracorporealiy with a microorganism mac-
tivator, and thereafter introducing at least a fraction of said
blood, having a reduced microorganism level, into a blood-
stream, said introduced blood or blood fraction being substan-
tially free of said microorganism inactivator.
4,381,005
INTRAVENOUS PUMP CHAMBER
Albert F. Bujan, Waukegan, III., assignor to Abbott Laborato-
ries, North Chicago, III.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,546
Int. CI.' A61M 5/00; F09B 21/02
U.S. CI. 604—152 10 Claims
I. In an apparatus for conducting automatic semicontinuous
peritoneal dialysis, including a supply of dialysing solution, an
inlet catheter for insertion into the peritoneal cavity of a pa-
tient undergoing treatment, and a pumping means for pumping
dialysing solution in a pumping direction either to or from said
suply of dialysing solution and said peritoneal cavity, the im-
provement comprising:
(a) control means connected to said pumping means for auto-
matically actuating said pumping means to change said
pumping direction; and
(b) safety means connected to said control means for prevent-
ing unwanted pressure build-up in said peritoneal cavity,
said safety means including a shunt circuit connected to said
pumping means, said shunt circuit comprising an upstream
branch connected upstream of said pumping means and in
communication with said supply of dialysing solution, and a
downstream branch connected downstream of said pumping
means and in communication with said inlet catheter, said
control means actuating said pumping means upon detection
by said safety means of unwanted pressure build-up in said
downstream branch, said control means being set for actuat-
ing said pumping means to change said pumping direction
1. An intravenous pump chamber for pumping intravenous
liquids including blood by means of an intravenous pump
having driver means and mechanization to move the driver
means in an up and down manner, said pump chamber com-
prising:
a chamber defined by a housing member presentmg a cavity
portion;
inlet and outlet passage means in fluid communication with
said cavity;
one way valve means operatively associated with said inlet
passage means;
862
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
a diaphragm means positioned over said cavity and spaced
from said outlet passage means;
a plunger member operatively positioned and guided to
contact said diaphragm member at one end and said driver
means at the other;
said outlet passage means defined by a valve seat;
an outlet vaKe member, said outlet valve member presenting
a downwardly and outwardly extending lateral wall sur-
face constructed and arranged to direct said liquid down-
wardly and away from said biasing means in a uniform
manner as said liquid passes through said outlet passage
means; and
biasing means operatively associated with said valve mem-
ber to bias said valve member against said valve seat in an
axial manner.
abutment surface will be forced in opposing directions to
thereby move said plunger sealing member toward said
noz/le portion to expel said fluid material from said barrel
member and out through said tubing at a slow steady rate.
4,381,007
MLITIPOI.AR CORNEAI -SHAPING KI.KCTRODE
WITH FI.KXIBLK REMOVABLK SKIRT
James I). Doss, Los Alamos, N. Mex., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the United States Depart-
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 258,970
Int. CI.' A61B 17/36
U.S. CI. 128-303.1 20 Claims
4,381,006
CONTINl Ol S low FLOW RATE FLUID DISPENSER
Joseph N. Genese, Waukegan, III., assignor to Abbott Laborato-
ries, North Chicago, III.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980. Ser. No. 205,825
Int. CI.' A61M 5/00
U.S. CI. 128—218 A 8 Claims
rK.
["V"-
■f
1. A syringe device for delivery of the contents thereof at a
slow, uniform rate comprising:
a syringe including:
a barrel member defining a substantially tubular chamber
having an internal wall portion and a nozzle portion;
a plunger member having a sealing member secured thereto
at one end and an engagement portion at the other, said
sealing member in slidable engagement with said internal
wall portion and said plunger member positioned for
reciprocal movement in and out of said barrel member;
engagement surfaces extending from said barrel member;
a syringe earner member including:
an abutment member for contact with said engagement
portion of said plunger member;
a driver member constructed and arranged for contact with
said engagement surfaces of said barrel member opposite
said abutment member;
two oppositely positioned guide means slidably associated
with said driver member and extending longitudinally of
said barrel member;
two oppositely positioned negator biasing means operatively
extending between said driver member and said carrier
abutment member;
control means of the fluid passage type defined by a variable
restrictor operatively associated with said nozzle portion;
and
a length of tubing extending from said control means oppo-
site said nozzle portion;
whereby upon placement of a portion of said plunger mem-
ber out of said syringe barrel and movement of said carrier
abutment member away from said driver member said
biasing means will be placed under tension; placement of
said syringe in said syringe carrier member and upon
closing of said control means, said fluid material will be
retained in said syringe barrel, and upon opening of said
control means, said carrier driver member and said carrier
1. An apparatus utilizing radio-frequency electrical energy
without a remote electrode for reshaping a cornea comprising:
a plurality of electrode means having tips;
housing means disposed about said plurality of electrode
means;
insulating means disposed within said housing means be-
tween said electrode means;
means for positioning said tips of said electrode means adja-
cent but spaced from a cornea to be reshaped;
means for producing an alternative voltage in the radio-fre-
quency range;
means for applying said radio-frequency voltage to said tips
of said electrode means and thereby radio-frequency en-
ergy in a preselected pattern to the cornea to be reshaped;
means for flowing an electrically conductive liquid coolant
in the vicinity of one said tip, over the cornea, and from
the cornea in the vicinity of another tip; and
flexible skirt means removably secured to said housing
means for efTectively damming said coolant over the
cornea so that it does not run off
4,381,008
METHODS OF IMPROVING SURFACE
CHARACTERISTICS OF EXTRUDED THERMOPLASTIC
TUBING AND PRODUCTS PRODUCED THEREBY
Joseph J. Thomas, Bridgewater, and Martin Sobel, Flemington,
both of N.J., assignors to Johnson & Johnson, New Bruns-
wick, N.J.
Filed Sep. 8, 1978, Ser. No. 940,548
Int. a.3 A61M 25/00
U.S. a. 604—265 2 Qaims
// ^
1. An intravenous catheter comprising a hub and a section of
hollow, extruded, thermoplastic tubing made of a single un-
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
863
coated material connected to said hub and extending substan-
tially axially therefrom, said tubing having:
a nonstretched portion extending a short distance from one
end of said tubing, relative to the entire length of said
tubing, and having a first outside diameter, a first inside
diameter and a first surface lubricity;
a stretched portion extending for the remainder of the length
of said tubing and having a reduced outside diameter less
than the outside diameter of said nonstretched portion and
having a reduced inside diameter less than the inside diam-
eter of the nonstretched portion and having a increased
surface lubricity greater than the surface lubricity of the
nonstretched portion so that said stretched portion of
tubing may slide more freely and with less friction during
intravenous insertion.
4,381,009
HANDHELD DEVICE FOR THE LOCAL
HEAT-TREATMENT OF THE SKIN
Franco Del Bon, 139 Feldstrasse, 4663 Aarburg, Switzerland
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 228,937
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jan. 28, 1980,
654/80-8
Int. CI.' A61F 7/00
U.S. CI. 128—399 4 Claims
m^
9b 14 15 13 9
trie circuit means and filling the space between said cool-
ing vane and said heat sensor unit.
4,381,010
HEART PACEMAKER WITH INTEGRATED INJECTION
LOGIC ENERGY SAVING CIRCUITRY
David L. Thompson, Fridley, Minn., and Donald W. Zobel,
Tempc, Ariz., assignors to Medtronic, Inc., Minneapolis,
Minn.
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,640
Int. a.' A61N 1/36
U.S. CI. 128—419 PG 12 Qaims
r
J4
CLOCK ^
JO
R»Tf COUNTtHl
f
programmer
"dccoder
-f
1 ^SELECT
RATE
■ f
1 SELECT
"width
„ DECODE
SlS'
Xf PULSE WIDTH LOGIC /
PJ/V , |»-1sw.TCh| :gUTPUT|^^
WIDTH
45 CLOCK
1 '
1
WIDTH
7 COUNTER
ecooeI
WIDTH ^
CLOCK
EMABLE
44'
H
PRESET
\
7t^
1 In a digitally controlled implantable heart pacemaker, a
plurality of logic circuits interconnected to perform pace-
maker control functions, first bias means for supplying bias
current to a first group of said logic circuits, a second bias
means for providing a switchable bias current to a second
group of said logic circuits, and control means for controlling
said second bias means and operative to increase bias current to
said second group of logic circuits at selected intervals to
increase the switching speed thereof during said selected inter-
vals.
1, A hand-held device for the local heat treatment of a
patient's skin which device comprises:
(a) a casing having a bottom wall the outer face of which
contains a treatment face;
(b) a handle part which is connected to the casing at a part
thereof spaced from the bottom wall of the latter; as well
as
(c) an electric heating unit in the interior of the casing which
unit comprises
(i) a power transistor, a cooling vane and a heat sensor unit
adapted for measuring the temperature of the treatment
face;
said power transistor comprising an encapsulating hull being
of heat-conductive material and being integral with said
cooling vane, and
said cooling vane being of a flat configuration and in planar
contact with the inner surface of said bottom wall;
and the heat sensor unit being arranged spaced from said
cooling vane on the inner surface of the bottom wall of the
casing in direct physical contact with said bottom wall;
and
(ii) an electric circuit means disposed in the interior of the
casing which circuit means is adapted for controlling
electinc current flow in the power transistor in response to
any temperature variations of the treatment face of the
bottom wall detected by said heat sensor unit, said electric
circuit means being connected with the power transistor
and the heat sensor unit, and comprising connecting
means adapted for connecting said circuit means with a
source of low voltage direct current, and a poured-in
synthetic resin filling in the lower part of said casing,
embedding said power transistor, cooling vane and elec-
4,381,011
ENTERAL FEEDING APPARATUS AND METHOD
Lewis S. Somers, 3rd, 516 E. Gravers La., Wyndmoor, Pa. 19118
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,332
Int. CI.' A61B 5/00
U.S. a. 128—635 15 Qaims
1. A system for introducing fluid material into a preselected
area of the gastro-intestinal tract of a patient, and characterized
by:
an elongated flexible tube, said tube having a substantially
axial lumen through which fluid can flow, a proximal end
and a distal end, and having perforations therethrough
along a preselected portion of the distal end of said tube,
said perforations communicating from said lumen to the
outside of said tube;
means for introducing said fluid into said elongated flexible
tube;
pH measuring means positioned on said tube proximate to
said disUl end, for generating a signal represenUtive of the
pH of the body fluid adjacent to said distal end; and
position means operatively connected to said pH measuring
means for monitoring said adjacent pH signed and for
determining the position of said distal end as a function of
said monitored pH.
864
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4^81,012
ELECTRODE PLACEMENT DEVICE
Allen S. Russek, Medford, N.Y., assignor to Wallant Interaa-
tional Trade, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,242
Int. a.^ A61B 5/04
4J.S. a. 128—644 33 Qaims
1. A device for continuously fixed automatic anatomically
correct placement of at least one electrode means against one
or more predetermined portions of a body, said at least one
electrode means being adapted to transmit electrical signals,
said device comprising:
a substantially non-stretchable first portion adapted to be
placed against a body portion of a wearer, said first por-
tion having at least one electrode means at at least one
electrode receiving position thereon;
means for electrically connecting said at least one electrode
means to an electrical signal generating and/or signal
receiving device;
touch-type locating means on said first portion and being
cooperable with a given body portion of a wearer, said
given body portion of the wearer having touch locatable
characteristics, for positively automatically locating said
device relative to said given body portion of the wearer,
said at least one electrode means being a corresponding
substantially fixed distance from said locating means so as
to be adjacent said one or more predetermined body por-
tions of the wearer each and every time the device is
mounted to the body of the wearer, said one or more
predetermined body portions being substantially fixed
distances from said given body portion which last men-
tioned fixed distances are substantially the same as respec-
tive first mentioned fixed distances; and
means for removably securing said first portion to the body
of the wearer with said touch-type locating means adja-
cent said given body portion of the wearer and with said
at least one electrode means adjacent to said one or more
predetermined body portions of the wearer.
4,381,013
"J" STYLET WIRE
Robert G. Dutcher, Columbia Heights, Minn., assignor to Med-
tronic, Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 244,933
Int. a.5 A61N 1/36
U.S. CI. 128—785 19 Claims
1. A body implantable lead comprising:
a conductor having a proximal end and a distal end and
having a lumen extending from said proximal end to said
distal end;
an insulating sheath covering said conductor;
fixation means for securing said distal end of said conductor
to body tissue; electrical connector attached to said proxi-
mal end of said conductor for electrically coupling said
conductor to an electrical generator;
stylet means removably located within said lumen of said
conductor for imparting a curve to a portion of the distal
end of the conductor for guiding placement of said distal
end of said conductor; and
flexible means, having a proximal end, rotatably and remov-
ably located within said lumen of said conductor coaxial
to said stylet means for transferring torque induced at said
proximal end of said flexible means to said fixation means
while said stylet means imparts a curve to the distal end
portion of said conductor.
4,381,014
RING ELECTRODE FOR PACING LEAD AND METHOD
OF MAKING SAME
Richard D. Sandstrom, Scandia; Robert G. Dutcher, Columbia
Heights, and Keith A. Ufford, Maple Grove, all of Minn.,
assignors to Medtronic, Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 195,987
Int. a.3 A61N 1/04
U.S. a. 128—786 17 Qaims
1. An electrode for an implantable lead comprising:
an electrical conductor;
a continuous insulating sheath;
conductor means
means for attaching said conductor means to said electrical
conductor; and
conductive ring of material substantially impervious to body
fiuids frictionally attached to said conductor means and
said continuous insulating sheath.
4,381,015
HAIR CUTTING GUIDE
Rickie Harvath, P.O. Box 132, Blaine, Me. 04734
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,636
Int. a.3 A45D 24/00
U.S. CI. 132—45 R
1 Gaim
1. A hair cutting guide comprising a base portion and first
and second side walls, the first and second side walls extending
upwardly from the base portion in right angle relation thereto
and in spaced relation to each other defining a bearing end and
a free end and providing a trough like configuration and the
guide including an inner sleeve, the inner sleeve having a base
and side walls, the side walls extending upwardly from the base
in spaced relation to each other, the inner sleeve positioned
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
865
between the first and second side walls with the base in super-
posed relation to the base portion and the inner sleeve move-
able longitudinally in relation to the base portion.
4,381,016
CLEANING FLUID DISTRIBUTION HEAD
Robin S. Douglas, 28381 Mount Stephen Ave., Canyon Country,
Calif. 91351, and John M. Sweeney, 43050 Lemonwood Dr.,
Lancaster, Calif. 93534
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,073
Int. a.3 B08B 3/02, 9/02
U.S. a. 134—170 21 Qaims
which are tilted down during supersonic operation, so that a
variable, convergent-divergent air inlet geometry is produced
in the air inlet, the improvement comprising at least one flow
guide fence (12) arranged in the zone of the air inlet channel (9)
in which, due to flight conditions particularly angles of attack
of the aircraft used in flight, a separation flow (Sal) occurs,
said flow guide fence (12) reaching substantially radially into
said air inlet channel to an extent just sufficient to avoid disad-
vantages of said separation fiow, said fiow guide fence follow-
ing particularly the longitudinal central plane (M) of the air
inlet channel, said flow guide fence having an upstream end
located in the area of the beginning of the channel curvature
and a downstream end extending at least to the end of the
channel curvature, said downstream end extending, in case of
a doubly bent, air inlet channel (9 or 10, 11) at least to the
turning point (W) in the curvature.
1. Cleaning fluid distribution head for cleaning elongated
tubes, comprising structure adapted for endwise reception in a
tube to be cleaned, said structure defining a series of fiow
passages communicating respective sets of inlet and outlet
ports for separate delivery of different fluids to the tube for
tube cleaning, said outlet ports being of a number and position
to direct said fluids generally axially of the tube without
contact of the fiuid with adjacent tube inner wall, and means
carried by said structure within said tube adapted and arranged
to rotate responsive to impingement of cleaning fluids thereon
from any of said outlets and thereby to redirect a first portion
of outlet port delivered fluids centrifugally laterally outward
onto the adjacent tube inner wall for sheet flow thereon, and to
pass a second portion of said delivered fluids axially of said
tube for mergence beyond said means with said redirected fluid
portion on the tube inner wall, whereby the entire tube inner
wall is subjected to cleaning fluids.
4,381,017
AIR INLET, ESPECIALLY A TWO-DIMENSIONAL AIR
INLET SET AT AN ANGLE ON ONE SIDE FOR GAS
TURBINE JET PROPULSION PLANTS FOR DRIVING
AIRPLANES
Norbert Bissinger, Siegertsbrunn, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit
beschraenkter Haftung, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,107
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 5,
1980, 3013265; Feb. 25, 1981, 3107002
Int. a.3 F15B 27/02
U.S. a. 137—15.1 5 Qaims
1. In an air inlet for a gas turbine, especially a two-dimen-
sional air inlet set at an angle on one side for gas turbine jet
propulsion plants for driving airplanes, having an air inlet
channel curved in space, especially double curved, and leading
to the compressor of the propulsion plant, and further having,
especially one, inlet cross-section for the supersonic operation
controllable by means of adjustable ramps arranged overhead
which are in the raised position during subsonic operation and
4,381,018
FLUIDIZATION UNIT
Alain Gemez, St. Jean de la Ruelle, France, assignor to Compag-
nie Europeenne pour I'Equipement Menager "CEPEM",
Paris, France
Filed Jan. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 115,176
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 25, 1979, 79 01969
Int. a.' B05C 19/02
U.S. a. 137—592 3 Qaims
1. A fluidisation unit comprising: at least one fluidiser and a
chamber for containing a granular, powdery or like substance
to be fluidised, said chamber having a non-porous bottom wall,
and said at least one fluidiser comprising an integral, remov-
able assembly, said assembly comprising a non-porous base
sheet member, a porous sheet member sized to and overlymg
said base sheet member, and holding means including a periph-
eral sealing member interposed between said sheet members
about the edges thereof and holding the sheet members apart in
a fixed relationship, and wherein said at least one fluidiser is
removably installed in said chamber underlying said granular
substance with its non-porous sheet member overlymg and
resting against said non-porous bottom wall of the chamber,
and wherein each fluidiser assembly is a held together by clips.
4,381,019
PRESSURE RESPONSIVE VALVE
Herbert E. Lindtveit, Centerport, N.Y., assignor to Sid Harvey,
Inc., Valley Stream, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,893
Int. C\? F16K 15/14
U.S. a. 137—843 7 Qaims
1. A drip preventing valve adapted for installation in a con-
duit (2,5) between a pump discharge outlet and a nozzle (3),
comprising:
a. a first pipe fitting (6,14) having an open end and an oppo-
site end adapted for connection to said conduit;
b. a second pipe fitting (10) extending within said open end
of the first fitting and cooperating with said first fitting to
define a chamber, said second fitting having an inner end
with a valve port (10a) encircled by a valve seat (106), and
an outer end attachable to said conduit for fluid communi-
cation therewith;
c. closed, flexible-walled, gas-filled cell means (11,15) within
866
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
the chamber, said cell means being a single cell (11)
formed of a section of flexible tubing flattened and sealed
at its ends; and
means in the chamber opposite the seat and limiting the
movement of the cell means in a direction away from the
seat, said cell means having an unstressed dimension in
said direction greater than the distance between the seat
and said movement limiting means, so that when the pres-
sure within the cell means is at least equal to the pressure
in the chamber, the cell means engages the seat and closes
the valve port, said cell means being compressed when the
pressure in the chamber is greater than the pressure in the
cell means to decrease said dimension of the ceil means
and open the valve port.
4,381,020
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE SECTION PIPE REPAIR OR
SERVICE CLAMPS
Joseph L. Daghe, Decatur; William L. Hauffe, Warrensburg,
and Garrett D. Terrill, Oakley, all of III., assignors to Mueller
Co., Decatur, III.
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,325
Int. CI.' F16L 55/16
U.S. CI. 138—99 11 Claims
1. A low profile pipe clamp for encircling a pipe, said pipe
clamp comprising:
a split flexible band means having at least one pair of op-
posed spaced apart looped ends extending fully widthwise
of the band means and in a lengthwise direction of the pipe
when the band means encircles the pipe, each of said
looped ends of said band means having at least one slot
therein, the slot of one of said looped ends opposing the
slot of the other of said looped ends and each slot having
a portion thereof with an enlarged width and extending in
a longitudinal direction of the band means and positioned
away from a terminus of the respective looped ends;
means for drawing said looped ends toward one another to
tighten said band means about the pipe, said last-men-
tioned means distributing a load to said looped ends uni-
formly across the width of said looped ends and including
a first tubular trunnion means freely rotatable in one of
said looped ends and having an aperture extending trans-
versely therethrough, said first tubular trunnion means
having an axial length substantially equal to the width of
the one of said looped ends, a second tubular trunnion
means in the other of said looped ends and at least capable
of rotation therein when the looped ends are drawn to-
gether, said second tubular trunnion means having an axial
length substantially equal to the width of the other of said
looped ends and having an open slot therein with a portion
at one end widened in a direction parallel to the axis of the
second tubular trunnion means, a T-bolt having a threaded
shank and a T-head, said T-bolt being positioned through
the aperture in said first tubular trunnion means and hav-
ing a nut threaded onto its shank prior to assembly of the
clamp on the pipe, said T-bolt and said first tubular trun-
nion means being pivotable to a position where the T-head
of said T-bolt can fit through the widened portion of the
slot of said second tubular trunnion means and bear
against the interior thereof when the clamp is being assem-
bled on the pipe, and
means to hold said second tubular trunnion means temporar-
ily against rotation and axial movement in the other of said
looped ends prior to assembly of the clamp on the pipe,
said last-mentioned means permitting rotation of said
second trunnion means in the other of said looped ends
when said looped ends are drawn toward one another.
4,381,021
HANDTOOL FOR THREADING YARNS IN
YARN-PROCESSING APPARATUS
Paul Gunneman, Mierlo, Netherlands, assignor to Ruti-Te
Strake B.V., Deurne, Netherlands
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,643
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 26, 1980,
8001162
Int. CI.' D03J 3/00: G03B 1/56
U.S. CI. 139—380 6 Claims
1. Handtool for threading a yarn into a difficult-to-reach
path in a yarn processing apparatus, comprising a handle, a
conduit which has an inlet for connection to a source of pres-
surized fiuid and which extends from said handle and has a
discharge orifice adjacent to its free end, a yarn support ar-
ranged to hold the leading end of the yarn in position to be
entrained by a jet of fluid discharged from said orifice, and a
valve for shutting off the fiow of pressurized fiuid through said
conduit, whereby said conduit serves as a probe for placing the
leading end of the yarn in position to be inserted into said path
by a jet of fiuid discharged through said orifice.
4,381,022
HOLY WATER FONT
Joseph M. Medynski, 183 E. Main St., Ramsey, N.J. 07446
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,393
Int. aj B65B 3/04
U.S. a. 141—86 4 Qaims
1. An improved holy water font comprising;
a stand including an upright, hollow member having an
opening permitting the user to place his hand therein;
photoelectric exciter and receiving means disposed verti-
cally on respective sides of said opening for generating a
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
867
light path through a part of the volume accessible through
the opening;
water dispensing means, positioned above said opening
' whereby water is dispensed in response to a control elec-
trical signal;
a transparent protective shield means disposed (wer the one
of said exciter or receiving means disposed below said
opening for protecting same from dispensed water; and.
w
n
in
z
/^'
A
means for generating said control electrical signal in re-
sponse to the interruption of the said light path by the
hand of the user,
whereby water is dispensed by said water dispensing means
onto the hand of the user when said light path is inter-
rupted.
4,381,023
AUXILIARY TORQUE BACK-UP ROLL
Frank J. Fronczak, and John F. Hunt, both of Madison, Wis.,
assignors to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of Agriculture, Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,401
Int. CV B25C 1/00; B27L 5/00
U.S. CI. 144—365 10 Claims
8. A method for applying supplemental torque to a log
axially mounted on a rotary veneer lathe, the method compris-
ing the steps of:
applying a rotational force to the outer periphery of a log
utilizing a drive roller;
controlling the normal force between the roller and the log;
determining when slippage exists between the log and and
the roller; and
increasing the normal force between the log and roller until
the slippage is eliminated.
4,381,024
HACK SAW
Raymond C. Dreier, 1115 Industrial Ave., Escondido, Calif.
92025
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,646
Int. CI.' B27B2//02
U.S. CI. 145—33 R 2 Claims
1. An improved hack saw of the type having a frame consist-
ing of a longitudinal, normally horizontal, member having
downwardly extending members at each end supporting a saw
blade between their lower extremities, one end member being
the saw handle, means for applying tension to the saw blade
between the two members wherein the improvement com-
prises:
a. a compression tube positioned between the upper portion
of the downwardly extending members;
b. a first rod adjustable in tension between the downwardly
extending members positioned above the compression
tube; and
c. a second rod adjustable in tension between the down-
wardly extending members positioned inside the compres-
sion tube;
4,381,025
COVER FOR INSTANT HOT OR COLD PACK
Constanee E. Schooley, 10443 SW. 120th St., Miami, Ha. 33176
Continuation of Ser. No. 260, Jan. 2, 1979, abandoned. This
application Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,254
Int. CI.' A61F 7/06; B65D 33/16
U.S. a. 150—2.4 7 Claims
1. A flexible pack which can be positioned and held in place
on a selected portion of the body, said pack including an open
pouch having a flap which includes a first fastener and winds
over and closes the opening of the pouch and an end portion
having a separate second fastening means to removably attach
said flap to the back surface of said pouch and forming a space
between said pouch and said flap for receiving said portion of
said body and to provide proper pressure thereon, said pouch
being capable of receiving a cold-producing packet actuable
by external pressure.
4,381,026
TIRE COOLING STRUCTURE
Frank O. Skidmore, 2513 Third St., Cuyahoga Falls, Ohio 44221
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,374
Int. a.5 B60C 19/06
U.S. a. 152—153 11 Claims
1. In combination,
a standard one-piece drop center rim, said rim having a
closed substantially flat well and substantially honzontal
868
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
bead receiving flanges extending laterally from the well
and integral therewith.
tire bead retaining flanges extending substantially vertically
from the edges of the bead receiving flanges and integral
therewith.
a radially inwardly projecting wheel secured to the well of
the rim.
a pneumatic tire having a tread and sidewalls mounted in
fluid tight relation on the rim and secured by the tire bead
retaining flanges, and
a plurality of circumferentially spaced radially directed
inverted T-shaped paddles mounted substantially perpen-
dicular to the torus of the rim but across a substantial
portion of the width thereof within the fluid tight cavity
defined by the tire and the rim and spaced at a distance
apart to effectively agitate the fluid providing pressure in
the tire during rotational operation thereof in fluid streams
directed from the rim towards the tread of the tire to
transfer heat generated at the tread to the rim.
8. In combination,
a standard one-piece drop center rim, said rim having a
closed substantially flat well and substantially horizontal
bead receiving flanges extending laterally from the well
and integral therewith,
tire bead retaining flanges extending substantially vertically
from the edges of the bead receiving flanges and integral
therewith,
a radially inwardly projecting wheel secured to the well of
the rim,
a pneumatic tire having a tread and sidewalls mounted in
fluid tight relation on the rim and secured by the tire bead
retaining flanges, and the improvement which consists
essentially of
a plurality of circumferentially spaced and circumferentially
narrow radially directed paddles mounted substantially
perpendicular to the surface of the flat wall of the rim but
extending across a substantial portion of the width thereof
within the fluid tight cavity defined by the tire and the rim
and spaced at a distance apart to effectively agitate the
fluid providing pressure in the tire during rotational oper-
ation thereof in fluid streams directed from the rim
towards the tread of the tire to transfer heat generated at
the tread to the rim and to other portions of the tire, said
cavity being otherwise clear for fluid flow therein.
4,381,027
TIRE INFLATION SAFETY CAGE
James O. Molen, 189 Conners Ave., Chico, Calif. 95926, and
Stephen C. Molen, 1215 East St., Orland, Calif. 95963
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,207
Int. a.3 B60C 25/00
U.S. a. 157—1 20 Oaims
1. A tire inflation safety cage for a tire on a wheel having a
lock ring and a tire valve comprising, in combination,
a base plate,
a framework mounted on said base plate having at least one
open end and deflning an enclosure having an interior for
accommodating a wheel having a tire to be inflated, said
framework including a plurality of longitudinally extend-
ing side members on each side of said framework and
means for supporting said side members in spaced-apart,
substantially parallel relationship with an open area above
said side members for exposing an upper circumferential
portion of a tire disposed within said enclosure interior,
means adapted to extend through said open area for connect-
ing said tire valve with an associated source of pressurized
(?
air, said side members having a spaced-apart relationship
for permitting selected portions of said lock ring to be
struck for positive seating by a hammer swung laterally by
an operator and means on said base plate for supportingly
engaging a bottom peripheral portion of said tire within
said enclosure interior for manual rotation of said tire into
selected rotary position.
4,381,028
APPARATUS FOR REMOVING A TIRE FROM OR
FITTING A TIRE TO A WHEEL-RIM
Louison Patry, 393 8th St. West, Thetford Mines Quebec, Can-
ada
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,796
Int. a.3 B60C 25/08
U.S. CI. 157—1.24 13 Qaims
^'
1. An apparatus for removing a tire from, or fitting a tire to,
a rim, the apparatus comprising:
(a) a stand;
(b) a supporting element secured vertically and rigidly to
said stand;
(c) first locking means mounted upon said supporting ele-
ment and adapted to hold said rim firmly thereto;
(d) a release-rod adapted to pivot in relation to said sup-
porting element and carrying, at one end, a head adapted
to be inserted between the tire and the rim;
(e) force reducing means mounted rotatably upon said sup-
porting element and carrying said release-rod; said reduc-
ing means comprising a lever-arm, a torque-element with
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
869
one end connected to said lever-arm and the other to said
release-rod; successive partial rotation of said lever-arm
permitting corresponding movements, of lesser magni-
tude, of said head between the tire and the rim;
(0 second locking means for maintaining said torque-ele-
ment stationary in relation to said supporting element
while the release-rod is being moved between the tire and
the rim.
4,381,029
TRAVERSE ROD FOR A VERTICAL BLIND
James A. Ford, and Steven R. Haarer, both of Sherman Town-
ship, St. Joseph County, Mich., assignors to Cooper Indus-
tries, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,552
Int. C1.3 A47H 5/032
U.S. a. 160—172 9 Qaims
having a second part slidably disposed in said rear channel
and a third part connected to said first part and projecting
rearwardly for connection to said second part; and
elongated flexible propelling means housed within and ex-
tending in a lengthwise direction of said rear channel, said
propelling means being operatively connected to said
master carrier means for controlling the slidable move-
ment thereof along said rod.
4,381,030
DUMMY BAR HEAD FOR A STEEL CONTINUOUS
CASTING INSTALLATION CONTAINING AN
OPEN-ENDED MOLD
Bernhard Knell, Thalwil, Switzerland, assignor to Concast AG,
Ziirich, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,506
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jan. 25, 1980,
605/80
Int. a.' B22D 11/08
U.S. a. 164-^146 10 Qaims
1. A traverse rod assembly for a blind having plural verti-
cally extending slats, comprising:
a horizontally elongated hollow traverse rod having front,
top, bottom and rear walls, said traverse rod having an
~ intermediate wall depending from said top wall between
and substantially parallel to said front and rear walls for
dividing the interior of said traverse rod into front and
rear elongated channels, said bottom wall having a first
lengthwise slot formed therein and opening upwardly in
direct communication with said front channel, said rod
also having a second lengthwise slot formed therein and
opening inwardly in direct communication with said rear
channel;
elongated rotatable shaft means positioned within and ex-
tending lengthwise through said front channel, said shaft
means being disposed with its axis substantially parallel to
the lengthwise direction of said front channel;
a plurality of hanger means individually and independently
slidably supported in said front channel and extending
downwardly through said first slot, each said hanger
means including a housing means which is slidably sup-
ported within said first channel and is slidable along said
rotatable shaft means, said hanger means also including
first means pivotally supported on said housing means for
pivotal movement about a substantially vertical axis and
projecting downwardly therefrom through said first slot
and having second means adjacent the lower end thereof
for engaging the top of one of said slats, said hanger means
further including third means rotatably supported on said
housing means and rotatably drivingly connecting said
first means to said shaft means for effecting rotation of said
first means in response to rotation of said shaft means;
elongated and flexible means pxjsitioned within said front
channel and connected between adjacent hanjger means
for limiting the maximum spacing between adjacent said
hanger means;
master carrier means slidably supported on said rod and
operatively connected with one of said hanger means for
effecting movement thereof along said front channel in
response to slidable displacement of said master carrier
means;
said master carrier means having a first carrier part slidably
disposed in said front channel and operatively cooperating
with said one hanger means, said master carrier means also
1. A dummy bar head for use with a continuous casting
installation equipped with an open-ended mold for casting
therein a strand withdrawn in a predetermined strand with-
drawal direction, comprising:
a main body portion having a boundary surface arranged in
the strand withdrawal direction;
a substantially dovetail-shaped coupling portion mtegral
with said main body portion;
said coupling portion having surfaces adapted to form a
connection with the cast strand in the strand withdrawal
direction;
said connection of said coupling portion being capable of
being decoupled from the cast strand by carrying out a
relative movement between the dummy bar head and the
cast strand which extends approximately transversely
with respect to the strand withdrawal direction;
said dovetail-shaped coupling portion comprising a raised
body member having a boundary surface in alignment
with said boundary surface of said main body portion;
said raised body member having three additional boundary
surfaces;
at least two of said additional boundary surfaces being lo-
cated opposite one another;
said oppositely located boundary surfaces being provided
with undercut portions;
said raised body member having a dovetail shape in cross-
section taken along a plane parallel to the boundary sur-
face; and
said raised body member having a substantially trapezoidal
surface area bounded by the boundary surface and the
three additional boundary surfaces.
870
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,031
SPA-DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEAT EXCHANGER
Larry D. Wliitaker, 3560 Ingraham Ave., San Diego, Calif.
92109, and Donald M. Herriott, 3234 Wellesley Ave., San
Diego, Calif. 92122
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,947
Int. a.3 F24H 3/00
U,S. a. 165—39 9 Qaims
30 i //.'^^\''^\ [20
2a
so
m^
1. A heat exchanger system for installation adjacent a source
of hot water and for transfer of heat to a quantity of water
remote from said source of hot water, said heat exchanger
system comprising:
a first heat exchange loop comprising a water passage and a
heat exchange surface.
a second heat exchange surface,
a second heat exchange loop adapted to be connected to
receive water circulated from the quantity of water re-
mote from the source of hot water and comprising a water
passage surrounding a substantial portion of the length of
said first heat exchange surface,
circulation means connected to said first heat exchange loop
for drawing water from and returning water to the source
of hot water,
thermostat means in thermal communication with said sec-
ond heat exchange loop at a portion thereof that sur-
rounds said first heat exchange loop for detecting the
temperature of the water in said second heat exchange
loop and turning off said circulation means when a pre-set
temperature is reached, and for detecting the temperature
m said first heat exchange loop in the absence of circula-
tion m said second heat exchange loop, and shutting off
said circulation means.
4,381,032
APPARATUS FOR COOLING HIGH-DENSITY
INTEGRATED ORCUIT PACKAGES
John M. Cutchaw, 7333 E. Virginia Ave., Scottsdale, Ariz.
85257
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,841
Int. a J F24D 19/02
LJ.S. a. 165—46 14 Qaims
1. An apparatus for cooling a high-density integrated circuit
package of the type having a substrate with a plurality of
discrete integrated circuits arranged thereon in a predeter-
mined geometric array, said apparatus comprising:
(a) a housing defining an open coolant chamber which is
sized so that its opening substantially matches the surface
area of the substrate of the integrated circuit package, said
housing for positioning in overlaying relationship with
respect to the integrated circuit package;
(b) a diaphragm of thin-wall pliable heat conductive material
with its peripheral edges fixedly attached to said housing
so as to sealingly enclose the coolant chamber thereof,
said diaphragm being in contiguous engagement with each
of the discrete integrated circuits of the integrated circuit
package when said housing is in overlaying relationship
therewith;
(c) said housing having an inlet port and an outlet port by
which fiuid coolant is passable through the coolant cham-
ber of said housing;
(d) partition means fixed in the coolant chamber of said
housing for presenting a tortuous flow path for the fluid
coolant which is passable therethrough; and
(e) biasing means mounted on said partition means within the
coolant chamber of said housing for applying biasing
forces on said diaphragm at each location thereof which is
in contiguous engagement with the discrete integrated
circuits of the integrated circuit package when said hous-
ing is in overlaying relationship therewith.
4,381,033
HEADER CONSTRUCTION
Ivan D. Woodhull, Jr., Flat Rock, and Thomas H. Liedel, May-
bee, both of Mich., assignors to Karmazin Products Corpora-
tion, Wyandotte, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 884,368, Mar. 7, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 789,411, Apr. 21,
1977, abandoned. This application Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,541
Int. CI.' F28F 9/02
U.S. a. 165—175 11 Qaims
J J' --
1. In a heat exchanger of the fin and tube type, a header
construction comprising:
a base member having first and second substantially parallel
fiange portions spaced apart a predetermined distance and
an interconnecting portion;
said interconnecting portion having a plurality of integrally
formed spaced smoothly tapered tubular projections
adapted to telescopically nest with respective conduits of
said heat exchanger, said tubular projections being ar-
ranged in a plurality of rows, each row containing a plu-
rality of said tubular projections, said tapered tubular
projections being operative to prevent the terminal end of
said fluid conduit from projecting beyond the plane de-
fined by said interconnecting portion, each of said tubular
projections having a smoothly rounded shoulder portion
at its juncture with said interconnecting member;
a cover member having first and second substantially paral-
lel flange portions spaced apart a distance less than said
predetermined distance and an interconnecting portion;
said first and second fiange portions of said cover member
being disposed and secured at a plurality of spaced loca-
tions in at least partially overlapping relationship with
respective of said first and second flange portions of said
base member;
a third fiange portion;
a channel member;
means directly securing one of said third flange portion and
said channel member to said interconnecting portion of
said base member at a plurality of spaced apart locations
between said tubular projections,
means securing the other of said third flange portion and said
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
871
channel member to said cover member, said third flange
portion being received and sealingly secured within said
channel; and
sealing means securing adjacent portions of said first flange
portions and adjacent portions of said second flange por-
tions in fluid-tight relationship.
2. A heat exchanger comprising:
a heat exchanging core member having a plurality of fluid
conducting conduit members surrounded by heat radiat-
ing fin members;
a pair of header members disposed at opposite ends of said
fluid conduits, each of said header members including:
a base member having first and second generally parallel
spaced flange portions, and an interconnecting portion
extending generally perpendicularly therebetween, and
a cover member having first and second generally parallel
spaced fiange portions and an interconnecting portion
extending generally perpendicularly therebetween,
said first and second fiange portions of said base member
being positioned in at least partially overlapping rela-
tionship to respective of said first and second fiange
portions of said cover members to hereby define a sub-
stantially enclosed chamber, a plurality of longitudi-
nally spaced spot welds retaining said overlapping
fiange portions in close proximate relationship along the
length thereof and securing means disposed between
said overlapping flange portions and securing said over-
lapping fiange portions in fiuid-tight sealing relation-
ship,
one of said base members further including a plurality of
outwardly extending divergingly tapered tubular pro-
jections integrally formed thereon, respective ones of
said diverging tubular projections receiving one end of
resp)ective ones of said fiuid conduits in telescopic rela-
tionship and being sealingly secured thereto,
the other of said base members including a plurality of
outwardly extending convergingly tapered tubular
projections integrally formed thereon, respective ones
of said converging tubular projections being telescopi-
cally received in the other end of respective ones of said
fluid conduits and being sealingly secured thereto,
each of said converging and diverging tubular projections
having a smoothly radiused juncture with said base
members and the converging and diverging taper of
said tubular projections being operative to prevent said
fluid conduits from projecting into the interior of said
pair of header members so as to promote relatively
smooth fluid flow into and out of respective of said
header members.
4,381,034
ZERO FREE WATER CEMENT COMPOSITION AND
METHOD
Rudolf J. Novotny, Arlington, and Richard G. Gandy, Grand
Prairie, both of Tex., assignors to BJ-Hughes Inc., Houston,
Tex.
Filed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,460
Int. a.3 E21B 33/14
U.S. O. 166—292 3 Qaims
1. A method of cementing well bores, comprising the steps
of:
preparing a fluid, pumpable cement slurry, said slurry com-
prising hydraulic cement, mixing water in the range of 30
to ISO weight percent based on the dry weight of cement,
and aluminum hydroxychloride in the range of 0.1 to 4.5
weight percent based on the dry weight of cement;
pumping said slurry to the desired location in the well bore;
and
allowing said slurry to set.
4,381,035
SIMULTANEOUS RECOVERY OF THERMAL VALUES
AND ORGANIC MATERIALS FROM SOLID
CARBONACEOUS FUEI^ AND WASTE DISPOSAL
PROCESS
Joseph R. Hradel, 6482 S. Mission Rd., Mount Pleasant, Mich.
48858
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 123,940, Feb. 25, 1980, Pat. No.
4,273,191. This application Apr. 27, 1981. Ser. No. 257,962
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 16,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.' E21B 43/26. 43/27
U.S. a. 166—307 7 Claims
1. A process for recovering thermal values and producmg
organic materials from a solid carbonaceous fuel wherem said
fuel is a bituminous coal or a lignite which comprises treating
said solid carbonaceous fuel with a black liquor thereby effect-
ing release of said thermal value organic materials from said
fuel.
4,381,036
PLANTER HEIGHT AND MARKER CONTROL SYSTEM
Randolph G. Fardal, Chicago; Edward L. Robinson, Jr., Naper-
ville, and William C. Swanson, Clarendon Hills, all of III.,
assignors to International Harvester Co., Chicago, III.
Filed Jun. 5, 1980. Ser. No. 156.538
Int. CI.' AOIB 63/J08
U.S. CI. 172—2 14 Claims
^^
r'i>i*,(M t»(
4
C^'
'v :.1°>-
•
* 1 * ;
-re- 4 ; '*• ■«• r— i i I
_J
1. For use with an agricultural planter assembly which in-
cludes a frame, a plurality of equally spaced planter units
mounted to the frame, and at least two wheel assemblies (16,
18) on each side of the planter assembly supporting same, each
wheel assembly being pivotally mounted to the frame and
including a piston and cylinder mechanism which, when the
piston rod thereof is extended on a forward stroke, pivots the
wheel assembly downwardly to effect raising of the frame and
planter units, electrical-hydraulic control means for parallel
coupling (40, 42) the piston and cylinder mechanisms of the at
least two wheel assemblies on each side of the planter assem-
bly, and for limiting the retraction of each piston rod of each
piston and cylinder mechanism to a predetermined limit less
than the full return stroke of the piston rod on the lowering of
872
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
the planter units thereby t(i ccintrol the height of the planter
frame above the ground and thereby to provide limited relative
movement of the piston rods of the piston and cylinder mecha-
nisms for the at least two wheel assemblies as the planter as-
sembly traverses uneven ground, said electrical-hydraulic
control means including means for sensing the extent of lower-
ing of the wheel assembly, as the piston rod of each piston and
cylinder mechanism associated with each assembly is extended
to less than the lull forward stroke thereof to raise the planter
assembly a limited distance above the ground, means con-
nected to the sensing means for storing an actual signal of
equivalent extent to the actual extent for the just said extension
of the piston rods to less than the full forward stroke thereof,
means for generating a signal of desired equivalent extent to
the desired extent of retraction of the piston rods of each of the
parallel coupled piston and cylinder mechanisms for the wheel
assemblies on one side of the planter assembly, means (140, 154,
142, 234, 236, 216) for comparing the desired signal with the
stored signal, and interruption means (220. 114) connected to
the comparing means operative for causing the electrical-
hydraulic control means to automatically interrupt and stop
retraction of the piston rods when the desired signal equals the
stored signal.
4,381,037
PORTABLK ELECTRIC TOOL
Giuseppe Cuneo, Calolziocorte, Italy, assignor to Black &
Decker Inc., Newark, Del.
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,553
Claims priority, application Italy, Oct. 29, 1979, 22984/79[U]
Int. CI.' B23D 45/00; B25D 17/00
L'.S. CI. 173—170 7 Claims
--y-*'
J
-■^c^;^^-^^^
4»
1. In a portable electric drill, hammer drill or hammer hav-
ing a housing, a first handle arranged on the housing, an elec-
tric switch for energizing the drill, a second elongated handle
detachably mounted to the housing, and an arrangement for
actuating the switch, the arrangement comprising;
a first lever mounted in said first handle to act on said switch,
said first lever having a first portion directly engaging said
switch and being pivotally mounted on the first handle for
movement between first and second positions correspond-
ing to the off and on conditions of the switch;
a second lever mounted on said second elongated handle
transversely to said first lever, said second lever having an
engaging portion positioned to directly engage said first
lever;
said first lever having a second portion to engage said engag-
ing portion of said second lever, said first and second
portions of said first lever being spaced from each other
with the fulcrum of said first lever therebetween;
said second lever being pivotally mounted witfiin said sec-
ond elongated handle whereby said engaging portion acts
upon said first lever to cause the latter to move from said
first position to said second position in response to a piv-
otal movement of said second lever;
said elongate handle having an opening therein through
which an end portion of said second lever projects when
said second lever is in its disengaged position for actuation
by the hand of an operator;
a hand grip slidably supported on said projecting end por-
tion for operation of said second lever by the operator;
biasing means for biasing said hand grip in an extended
position; and
said hand grip and said elongated handle having cooperating
detent means when said hand grip is in its extended posi-
tion for precluding accidental actuation of said second
lever, said hand grip being slidable relative to said second
lever in opposition to the actuation of said biasing means
for freeing said detent means from engagement with each
other whereby said second lever may be actuated.
4.381,038
RAISE BIT WITH CUTTERS STEPPED IN A SPIRAL AND
FLYWHEEL
David B. Sugden, Tasmania, Australia, assignor to The Robbins
Company, Kent, Wash.
Filed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 208,999
Int. CI.' E21B 10/10, 10/12
U.S. CI. 175—344 48 Claims
1. A rotary drill bit for producing a raise hole by disintegrat-
ing the earth formation surrounding a preformed pilot hole,
such bit being connectable to a rotary powered drill stem
extending through the pilot hole, and comprising:
a cutter carrier frame structure detachably connected to the
drill stem to rotate therewith;
central cutter means mounted on said frame structure at a
location disposed adjacent the drill stem; and
a plurality of intermediate roller cutters:
each having peripheral cutting portions projecting upwardly
of said frame structure to sweep concentric circles about
the longitudinal axis of the drill stem upon rotation of said
frame structure; and
being mounted on said frame structure at locations out-
wardly of said center cutter means in specific angular
relationship to each other to define a cutting profile with
the concentric circles swept by the peripheral portions of
said intermediate roller cutters in the form of a segment of
a spiral extending radially outwardly and downwardly
from the center cutter means in a decreasing curvature,
said cutting profile being established by angularly orien-
tating said intermediate roller cutters relative to each
other to decrease progressively the angle separating the
two adjacent chords corresponding to a set of any three
adjacent cutting profile circles of any three radially adja-
cent intermediate roller cutters as the radial location of
said intermediate roller cutters from the longitudinal axis
of the drill stem increases.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
873
4,381,039
HLTER BAG WEIGHTED HOLDER
Andrew R. Becker, Ellicott City, Md., assignor to Koppers
Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 175,376, Aug. 6, 1980. This application Mar.
26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,397
Int. CI.' GOIG 19/00: BOID 46/06
U.S. a. 177—160 2 Qaims
support means positioned adjacent the weighing beam with its
ends being coupled to the turning means so that the support
means moves less responsively than the center of the beam to
weight variations, and a capacitor transducer having at least
one relatively movable plate coupled to a mid-portion of the
weighing beam and one relatively fixed plate coupled to the
capacitor plate support means adjacent the movable plate
whereby capacitance variations are weight responsive.
4,381,041
ELECTRIC POWER GENERATING SYSTEM
Aristotel Butoi, 689 Seneca Ave., Ridgewood, N.Y. 11385
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 208,699
Int. a.3 B60L 11/18
U.S. CI. 180—65 D 14 Claims
1. A weight for use on a filter bag tensioning device in a bag
house in which an elongated lever is pivotally supported inter-
mediate its ends by a pivot affixed within the upper reaches of
said bag house and said lever is provided with filter bag sup-
port means adjacent one end and weight securement means
adjacent its other end comprising, a body member constructed
and arranged to be attached to said weight securement means
such that, in a horizontal position of said lever, the center of
gravity of said weight means is below said weight securement
means and, wherein, in positions of the weight securement end
of said lever below horizontal, the distance from said center of
gravity to said pivot varies from position to position and, in
positions of the weight securement end of said lever above
horizontal, the distance from said center of gravity to said
pivot remains substantially constant.
4,381,040
WEIGHING SCALE WITH CAPACITOR TRANSDUCER
Frans Brouwer, Glencoe, III., assignor to Pelouze Scale Co.,
Evanston, III.
Filed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,188
Int. a.3 GOIG 3/14
U.S. a. 177—210 C 10 Qaims
1. In a weighing scale, the improvement comprising: an
elongated weighing beam, turning means attached to the ends
of the beam to flex the center portion of the beam responsively
to weight variations on the scale, elongated capacitor plate
1. An electric power generating system adapted for use in a
vehicle including at least one electric generator and one bat-
tery, comprising at least one energy converter for receivmg
superfluous movement of the vehicle and producing pressure
fluid flow from such movement, and power transmitting means
for receiving and changing the fluid flow into rotational
power, and transmitting rotational power to the electric gener-
ator when stored rotational power reaches a predetermined
level, said power transmitting means comprising two power
cylinders, each power cylinder having a power piston therein
and a power piston rod extending outwardly from the power
cylinder, said power piston being actuated by the pressure fluid
flow transferred from the energy converter, coupling means
engaged with said power piston rod of the power cylinder for
changing reciprocal movement of the power piston into rota-
tional movement, a speed converter disposed between said
coupling means and said electric generator, and a two way
valve for selectively transmitting said pressure fluid flow into
one of said two power cylinders to alternately operate said
power cylinders for continuously rotating said speed con-
verter, whereby the generator is operated by superfluous
movement of the vehicle to generate electricity.
4381,042
EXCESSIVE IDLE TERMINATION SYSTEM
John J. Perry, Huntsville, Ala., assignor to Chrysler Corpora-
tion, Highland Park, Mich.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,417
Int. a.^ B60K 15/00
U.S. a. 180—272 1 Claim
1. An excess idle termination system for shutting down the
engine of a vehicle by interrupting its ignition circuit upon the
elapse of a predetermined time period deemed to constitute
excess idle comprising:
a multiplicity of switch means associated with conditions
indicative of idle and operable in response to occurrence
of said condition;
a source of clock pulses;
a binary counter circuit comprising a plurality of input and
output terminals, one input terminal being a clock terminal
for receiving clock pulses, another input terminal being a
control terminal which controls the counting of clock
pulses by the counter circuit, two output terminals corre-
874
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
sponding to selected binary digits of the count in the count
circuit;
said binary counter circuit in communication with said
source of clock pulses whereby said clock pulses are
counted in response to operation of said switch means;
a logic network in communication with the binary digits
output of said binary counter circuit whereby the output
of said logic network generates a signal in response to a
predetermined status of binary digits at selected output
termmals of said binary counter, depending on the value
of the monitored input condition;
said logic network further conditioned to respond to the
attainment of said predetermined status of two binary
■Atftrrf
•Jklttr,
liMr^n
digits and still further conditioned to generate a warning
signal in response to the concurrent attainment of a prede-
termined status of only one of said two binary digits and a
selected status of a third binary digit of the count in said
bmary counter circuit, which third binary digit is of lesser
significance than that of said first two binary digits;
a warning device;
means coupling said logic network with said warning device
to energize said warning device with said warning signal
whereby the warning device is intermittently activated at
the frequency of the warning signal;
and means coupling the output of said logic network with
the ignition circuit for interrupting the ignition circuit, in
response to conditioning of said logic network output.
4,381,043
ENGINE MOUNTING STRUCTURE
Muao Fukushjma, Fuchu, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,206
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 1, 1980, 55-11787
Int. a.^ B60K 5/012: F16F 15/002
U.S. CI. 180—300 8 aaims
1. An engine mounting structure for mounting an automo-
tive engine on the body structure of an automotive vehicle,
comprising:
a first bracket member to be connected to the body structure
of the engine,
a second bracket member to be connected to the body struc-
ture of the vehicle and spaced apart from the first bracket
member,
a shock and vibration insulating unit structurally intervening
between the First and second bracket members and includ-
ing at least one resilient block, and
vibration cancelling device comprising rigid first and
second elongated members, the first elongated member
having one end portion pivotally connected to said first
bracket member and the second elongated member having
an end portion pivotally connected to said second bracket
member, said first elongated member having a longitudi-
nally intermediate portion pivotally connected to the
second elongated member, and a mass member connected
to another end portion of said first elongated member.
4,381,044
MULTIPLE CHAMBERED GAS POWERED SEISMIC
SOURCE
Robert A. Kirby, Houston, Tex., assignor to Exxon Production
Research Co., Houston, Tex.
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,487
Int. a.' GOIV 1/137, 1/38
U.S. a. 181—118 19 Qaims
11. Pneumatic apparatus suitable for producing a shock
wave in a liquid, comprising:
a shuttle movable through a stroke having a central shuttle
shaft with an axis;
first and second outer sealing pistons mounted axially on
the shaft proximate to its opposite ends and each of the
first and second outer sealing pistons having an inner
face; and
first and second inner sealing pistons mounted axially on
the shuttle shaft respectively adjacent and interior to
the first and second outer sealing pistons and each of the
first and second inner sealing pistons having an outer
face; and
first and second control pistons mounted axially on the
shaft, respectively adjacent and interior to the first and
second inner sealing pistons, each of the first and second
control pistons having an outer face, being an equal
distance from the midpoint of the shuttle shaft, substan-
tially round and of the same diameter, and
the pistons being spaced on the shuttle shaft such that the
distance between the inner face of the first outer sealing
piston and the outer face of the first inner sealing piston,
the inner face of the second outer sealing piston and the
outer face of the second inner sealing piston, and the
outer face of the first control piston and the outer face
of the second control piston are all essentially the same
stroke length, and
a gas passage running the axial length of the shuttle shaft,
and
a passage located in the shaft between first and second
control pistons connecting the outside of the shuttle
shaft with the gas passage; and
a first gas storage means mounted about the axis formed by
the shuttle shaft at the first end of a control chamber
means and disposed about the first outer sealing piston and
the first inner sealing piston and having a first gas chamber
with walls, an outer end, terminated at an inner end by a
first shoulder, and disposed about the first outer sealing
piston, and
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
875
a first shoulder having an outer seaUng face adapted to
substantially seal against the inner face of the First outer
sealing piston, an inner sealing face adapted to substan-
tially seal against the outer face of the first inner sealing
piston, and an opening about the axis of the shuttle shaft
larger than the shuttle shaft, and
first exhaust port means located between the first shoulder
and the first end of a control chamber;
a second gas storage means mounted about the axis formed
by the shuttle shaft at the second end of the control cham-
ber means and disposed about the second outer sealing
piston and the second inner sealing piston having
a second gas chamber with walls, an outer end, terminated
at an inner end by a second shoulder, and disposed
about the second outer sealing piston, and
a second shoulder having an outer sealing face adapted to
substantially seal against the inner face of the second
outer sealing piston, an inner sealing face adapted to
substantially seal against the outer face of the second
inner sealing piston, and an opening about the axis of the
shuttle shaft larger than the shuttle shaft, and
second exhaust port means located between the second
shoulder and the second end of the control chamber;
a control chamber having
an interior wall substantially circular, parallel to the axis
of the shuttle shaft, adapted to fit the first and second
control pistons, and having a gas charge inlet in a mid
portion of the wall, and
a first end having openly terminated therein a first control
gas line, a hole adapted for the axial passage of the
shuttle shaft between first control piston and first inner
sealing piston, gas sealing means in said hole substan-
tially preventing the passage of gas through the hole,
and
a second end having openly terminated therein a second
control gas line, a hole adapted for the axial passage of
the shuttle shaft between second control piston and
second inner sealing piston, gas sealing means in said
hold substantially preventing the passage of gas through
the hole, and
control valve means capable of alternately directing a pres-
surized gas through the first control gas line while simulta-
neously venting gas from the second control gas line or
directing a pressurized gas through the second control gas
line which simultaneously venting gas from the first con-
trol gas line.
4,381,045
EXHAUST GAS SILENCER FOR A HEAT ENGINE
Jean-Pierre Buchwalder, Seloncourt, France, assignor to Cycles
Peugeot, Valentigney, France
Filed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,121
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 2, 1981, 81 01940
Int. a.3 FOIN 1/08
U.S. a. 181—265 5 Qaims
1. An exhaust gas silencer for a heat engine, the silencer
comprising an outer cylindrical case, a first end wall of the
case, a second end wall of the case and a substantially planar
intermediate wall of the case, and gas guiding tubes which are
supported by said intermediate wall and are put into communi-
cation with each other by at least one end chamber which is
defined within the case by said intermediate wall and said first
end wall, said first end wall comprising in the region of two
successive tubes of said tubes, a rounded and hollow boss
which projects outwardly of the silencer and has an apex
which is spaced from said intermediate wall by a distance
which is slightly greater than the radius of the tubes, while the
depth of the chamber around said boss is less than the diameter
of said tubes so that the boss guides a change in direction of the
gas fiow between said successive tubes.
4,381,046
nRE ESCAPE LADDER STORAGE AND DEPLOYMENT
DEVICE
Roy H. Landem, Vernon Hills, III., assignor to Ridge Products,
Inc., Harrington, III.
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,653
Int. a.^ E06C 9/14. 1/56
U.S. Q. 182—70 3 Galms
37
tr
J
P
)
1. A method of affording emergency escape from an ele-
vated enclosure to a lower level, comprising the steps:
providing a cabinet having a compartment formed by a top
cover portion and a lower base portion therein beneath a
window or door opening in an exterior wall of said enclo-
sure;
storing a compact escape device such as a collapsible ladder
in said compartment; and
in an emergency, opening the cabinet to expose said ladder
and to facilitate deployment thereof and. to form first,
second, and third stair treads, using said portions of the
cabinet, leading from the floor of the enclosure through
the exterior wall opening.
4381,047
PISTON ANTI-KNOCK BACK ASSEMBLIES
Gabriel Gregoire, Asnieres sur Oise; Vincent Robles, Saint
Denis, and Pedro Alvarez, MoiMclIca, all of France, assignors
to General Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,359
Int. a.^ F16D 55/02
VJS. a. 188—71.8 6 Clains
1. In a disc bralce assembly having a brake actuator compris-
ing a piston slidably mounted within a cylinder bore having a
side wall and an end wall, said actuator being operable to urge
a friction surface into contact with a rotary disc surface upon
supply of hydraulic fluid under pressure to said cylinder bore,
said cylinder bore having an enlarged stepped section therein
adjacent the end wall of the cylinder bore, a piston anti-knock
back assembly comprising:
876
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April. 26, 1983
said piston having a conical frustum formed head facing the
cyhnder bore end wall and an annular groove adjacent
said head;
an expanded resilient split ring in frictional contact with a
main portion of the cylinder bore side wall, and loosely
axially located in said annular groove by expanding said
ring over said conical frustum piston head until said ring
snaps into position in said annular groove;
said ring, when unexpanded, being a sliding fit within the
main portion of the cylinder bore and having abutment
f7^ tb
n ?o
spacer means on one side of the ring which, when the
unexpanded ring is inserted in the cylinder bore as far as
said stepped section of the bore, contacts said cylinder end
wall and maintains the plane of the ring far enough from
the cylinder end wall to allow said conical frustum piston
head to be thrust through the ring to locate the ring in
position in said annular groove, said ring frictional contact
with the main portion of the cylinder side wall acting so
that said ring may be movable by said piston during piston
actuated movement but not during piston retractive
movement.
4,381,048
ELECTRIC MOTOR WITH AUTOMATICALLY ACTING
BRAKE
Hans Haverkamp, Oerlinghaus«n, and Walter Wistinghausen,
Detmoid, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hanning
Elektro-Werke GmbH & Co., Bielefeld, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,192
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 25,
1980, 3036091
Int. CI.^ B60T li/04
U.S. a. 188—171 5 Claims
1. Electric motor with automatically acting brake and rotor
shaft, which possesses a brake element comprising: an armature
plate displaceable on the rotor shaft against first spring means,
and released by the magnetic field of the rotor, a disc having
guide grooves and located between said element and the arma-
ture plate, said disc being axially guided by said element, in-
clined planes comprised of annular segments facing towards
the rotor and extending around the rotor shaft and being dis-
posed axially symmetrically on said disc, said planes being
pressed by second spring means bearing against the brake
element onto a starting pin inserted into the rotor shaft, said
brake element being formed as a pot seating said second spring
means and being closed towards the rotor by said armature
plate, said armature plate having recesses for the passage of the
starting pin of the rotor shaft, said brake element having on its
internal surface guide noses for engagemem into the guide
grooves of said disc, said disc being provided with the inclined
planes and being movable on the rotor shaft independently of
said armature plate, said inclined planes being arranged a.scend-
ing in both directions of rotation of the rotor shaft; said second
spring means comprising a centrally located spring in said
brake element for amplifying the braking force.
4,381,049
ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED AIRCRAFT BRAKES
Richard L. Grossman, Tallmadge, Ohio, assignor to Goodyear
Aerospace Corporation, Akron, Ohio
Filed Jul. 30, 1979, Ser. No. 62,199
Int. CI.' F16D 55/08. 55/16: B60L 7/00
U.S. CI. 188—72.7 7 Claims
6. A brake control assembly for reciprocating movement of
a pressure plate, comprising:
a housing;
a torque motor received within said housing;
a ball screw connected to the pressure plate for effectuating
movement thereof; and
drive means interconnected between said torque motor and
ball screw for driving said ball screw, said ball screw
being maintained upon roller means for preventing rota-
tional movement of said ball screw, said roller means
comprising a ball maintained between an axial groove in
said ball screw and a channel in said housing.
4,381,050
VACUUM MODULATOR ARRANGEMENT FOR AN
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Yoshio Sunohara; Kunio Ohtsuka, both of Yokohama, and Keni-
chi Sakamoto, Fujisawa, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 195,207
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 8, 1979, 54-128954
Int. aj B60K 41/20. 41/04
U.S. a. 192—1 7 Claims
1. A vacuum modulator arrangement, comprising:
a vehicular automatic transmission;
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
877
a fuel-injection pump;
a vacuum source;
a brake booster;
a vacuum modulator;
a throttle modulator for controlling said automatic transmis-
sion;
connecting means for operatively interconnecting said vac-
uum source, said brake booster, said vacuum modulator
and said throttle modulator, said connecting means includ-
ing a branch portion with a common passage; an orifice
removably positioned in said common passage, said orifice
having a predetermined effective area;
14
first and second conduits respectively connecting said vac-
uum source and said brake booster to said common pas-
sage on one side of said orifice;
third and fourth conduits respectively connecting said vac-
uum modulator and said throttle modulator to said com-
mon passage on the opposite side of said orifice
whereby said vacuum modulator operates to control the
communication between said vacuum source and the
atmosphere so that the pressure applied to said throttle
modulator can be changed in response to the controlling
conditions of said vacuum modulator.
4,381,051
TEMPERATURE-SENSITIVE FLUID CX)UPLER
Yasubee Kikuchi, Shizuoka, Japan, assignor to Usui Kokusai
Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Shizuoka, Japan
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,677
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 11, 1980, 55-30674
Int. CV F16D 43/25, 35/00
U.S. CI. 192—82 T 11 Oaims
1. A temperature-sensitive fluid coupler comprising: a reser-
voir defined by one side of a partition and a cover; a first
torque transmitting chamber defined by the other side of the
partition and an inner casing; a second torque transmitting
chamber defined by the inner casing and an outer casing; first
and second rotors fixed to a drive shaft and rotatable within the
first and second torque transmitting chambers, respectively;
first and second fluid inlet ports formed in the partition for
providing communication between the reservoir and the first
torque transmitting chamber and between the reservoir and the
second torque transmitting chamber, respectively; at least one
temperature-sensitive element mounted on the outer side of the
cover; a valve for each of the inlet ports; and means connecting
the two valves to the temperature-sensitive element for consec-
utively opening and closing the valves m response to changes
in temperature.
4,381,052
CLUTCH DISK ASSEMBLY
Paul Maucher, Sasbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to LuK
Lamellen und Kupplungsbau GmbH, Biihl, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,376
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 27,
1974, 2436288
Int. a.' F16D 43/24
U.S. CI. 192—106.2 20 Oaims
im.m.nt.ni)TT
(li.m.Tti.fnin
iru.TH.TSc.n^m
K
nim.m.m.nt)
ffim.m.n.m)
1. A clutch plate, particularly for use in the clutches of
automotive vehicles, comprising a first component including a
hub and a pair of axially spaced disk-shaped members non-rota-
tably secured to said hub; a second component rotatable with
reference to said first component and including a clutch disk
disposed between said disk-shaped members; and means for
yieldably opposing rotation of said second component from a
neutral position with reference to said first component, includ-
ing a load friction device interposed between said disk-shaped
members and arranged to oppose a second stage of rotation of
said second component following a first stage of rotation from
said neutral position, said load friction device comprising at
least one load friction member and friction means effective
during said second stage, said rotation opposing means further
comprising a least one energy storing element interposed be-
tween said load friction member and said clutch disk on the
one hand and at least one of said disk -shaped members on the
other hand to be engaged by said clutch disk during said sec-
ond stage of rotation of said second component, said clutch
disk, said load friction member and said one disk-shaped mem-
ber having window means for said energy storing element.
4^1,053
CABLE-TYPE CLUTCH RELEASE DEVICE FOR
USUALLY CONTACTING-TYPE CLUTCH
Youichi Hyodo, Okazaki, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,148
Claims pribrity, application Japan, Oct. 26, 1979, 54-
147630[U]; Nov. 26, 1979, 54-162736[U]; Jul. 16, 1980, 55-
99326[U]
Int. Q\? F16D 13/75
U.S. a. 192—111 A 11 Claims
1. In a cable-type clutch release device for a usually contact-
ing-type clutch, which includes; a clutch disc disposed be-
tween a fly wheel and a pressure plate; a diaphragm spring for
urging the clutch disc against the fly wheel through the me-
dium of the pressure plate; a release bearing normally contact-
ing the diaphragm spring; a release fork for adjusting an axial
position of the release bearing; and a cable connected at one
end thereof to the release fork; the improvements comprising:
878
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
a first clutch pedal member pivotally supported and having
a pedal pad at the lower end thereof;
a second clutch pedal member supported pivotally about the
axis of rotation of said first clutch pedal member;
a first sprmg for biasing said first clutch pedal member in a
direction of a return movement thereof;
a second spring for biasing said second clutch pedal member
in a direction of the return movement thereof;
a stopper for limiting the return movements of said first and
second clutch pedal members;
a ratchet member having ratchet teeth and supported pivot-
"^i^v,
67
■5^
ally movably about the axis of rotation of said first clutch
pedal member, said ratchet member being connected to
one end of the cable;
a pawl member having at one end thereof a pawl engageable
with one of said ratchet teeth and pivotally supported on
said second clutch pedal member;
a third spring for biasing said pawl member in a direction to
disengage the pawl from the ratchet tooth of said ratchet
teeth of said ratchet member; and
an engaging member provided on said first clutch pedal
member and engageable with the other end of said pawl
member.
4,381,054
MULTIDIRECTIONAL BOARD SUPPORT
Donald D. Rumpel, Kellogg, Id., assignor to Henwebcor, Incor-
porated, Colfax, Wash.
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,936
Int. CI.' B65G 13/00
U.S. CI. 193^35 MD 9 Qaims
1. A multi-directional board support comprising:
an elongated base;
intersecting upright libs on the base, having semicircular
indentations centered at the points of intersection of the
libs, forming semi-spherical cradles;
cleanout holes formed through the base at the points of
intersection of the ribs;
a spherical roller for each of the semi-spherical cradles,
releasably receivable in said cradle for free rotation
therein about its center;
a cover releasably received over the base and rollers, having
circular openings formed therein corresponding with the
respective cradles with each opening having a circular
periphery with a diameter less than that of the rollers;
means for releasably mounting the cover to the base with a
portion of each roller projecting through a corresponding
circular cover opening without the periphery of the open-
ing engaging the roller, to enable the roller to freely rotate
about its center; and
spacer means between the cover and base for positioning the
cover relative to the base to space the openings over the
rollers and cover the ribs, with the opening peripheries
spaced clear of the rollers and with the rollers projecting
through the openings beyond the cover.
4,381,055
POLYVALENT SUSPENSION BALANCE FOR
ASSEMBLY LINES FOR MANUFACTURED GOODS,
ESPECIALLY MOTOR VEHICLES
Emile Picaud, Plaisir, France, assignor to Regie Nationale des
Usines Renault, Boulogne-Billancourt, France
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,673
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 2, 1980, 80 07463
Int. CV B65G 49/00
U.S. CI. 198—653 2 Qaims
1. A polyvalent suspension structure for the assembly lines
of manufactured goods, comprising:
an overhead support means supported and driven by a con-
veyor and having two ends;
a vertically oriented curved arm, having one end thereof
pivotally connected about a vertical axis at each said end
of said coupling means, said arms and coupling means
forming a C shape; and
an anchoring member pivoted to the other end of each said
arm, about said respective vertical axis of each said arm,
said anchoring members being adapted for securement to
the article to be manufactured, whereby each of said arms
can pivot about said respective vertical axis to provide
access to said article to be manufactured.
4,381,056
CONVEYOR APPARATUS, ESPEQALLY FOR PRINTED
PRODUCTS
Jiirg Eberle, Hinwil, Switzerland, assignor to Ferag AG, Hinwil,
Switzerland
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,420
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 8, 1980,
1020/80
Int. a.3 B65G 47/86
U.S. a. 198—696 12 Oaims
1. An article conveyor apparatus, especially for printed
products, comprising:
a revolvingly driven traction element;
a plurality of gripper clamps anchored in spaced relationship
and supported by said revolvingly driven traction ele-
ment;
each of said gripper clamps having a movable clamp portion
and a further clamp portion coacting therewith;
a stationary control device provided for said gripper clamps;
actuation means coacting with the stationary control device
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
879
for bringing the movable clamp portion into a closed
position;
a releasable locking device for fixedly retaining the movable
clamp portion in such closed position;
said locking device comprising a latching device having a
deflned latching position;
said latching device having a latchable element;
said actuation means being coupled with the latchable ele-
ment of the latching device; and
a spring element which is tensioned when the related gripper
clamp is closed and which is operatively connected with
the actuation means and with the movable clamp portion
of such gripper clamp.
1. A carrier for retaining at least one pair of articles to be
inserted therein, the articles each including two opposing end
portions, where at least one of the articles' end portions is at
least partially cylindrical, said carrier being formed of a flexi-
ble material and comprising:
top and bottom walls;
a pair of side walls, each side wall being hingedly attached to
each of said top and bottom walls to form a carrier sleeve;
holding means joined to said top panel for holding one of the
end portions of articles to be inserted into said carrier;
at least one flap extending from said bottom wall and folded
to a position within said carrier proximate said bottom
wall, each tlap having at least one opening therein for
receiving and engaging an at least partially cylindrical end
portion of an article to be inserted into said carrier; and
a reinforcing wall disposed within said carrier opposed to
said side walls and hingedly attached to said top and
bottom walls, said reinforcing wall including receiving
means proximate said bottom wall for receiving each said
flap and further including foldable support means proxi-
mate and hingedly attached to said bottom wall for sup-
porting said flap within said carrier, each said flap includ-
ing on a transverse edge a notch straddling said reinforc-
ing wall,
said foldable support means collapsing when said carrier is
collapsed to a relatively flat form by hinging operation of
said hinged attachments of said walls, said foldable sup-
port means folding away from supporting each said flap
and each said notch being conflgured to allow passage of
said reinforcing wall before, during and after collapsmg of
said carrier.
4^1,058
MATERIALS FOR FORMING COMPOSITE PACKAGES
AND METHOD OF PRODUONG SUCH PACKAGES
Jean Chaussadas, Deols; Gisele Coudoin, Chateauroux; Qaude
Martin, Deols, and Andre Milliens, Etrechet, all of France,
assignors to The Mead Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 127,096, Mar. 4, 1980, abandoned. This
application Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,285
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 9, 1979,
7908469; Nov. 20, 1979, 7940128
Int. a.3 B65D 71/08. 65/10
U.S. a. 206—497 4 Qaims
4,381,057
DISPLAY CARRIERS FOR ARTICLES
Robert G. Carver, Ashland, Ohio, assignor to Don Cobum, Inc.,
Ashland, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 220,752, Dec. 29, 1980, abandoned. This
application Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 372,968
Int. C1.3 B65D 5/04, 85/62
U.S. CI. 206—434 6 Qaims
1. A reclosable package of composite material comprising in
combination a top section (12) of paperboard and a bag (11) of
heat shrinkable film material extending from said top section
and adapted to accommodate a product, said top section com-
prising a tubular structure formed from angularly related walls
and having a top closure and being open at the lower end
thereof, said bag being of a length substantially greater than
that of said top section from said lower end to said top closure
so as to provide a major poriion of said package, said top
closure being formed from panels (15, 15, 16) hinged to the top
edges of said walls and arranged to provide a reclosable open-
ing, said bag being attached to the lower portion of said top
section whereby the mouth of the bag overlaps adjacent out-
side poriions of said walls so that the bag is held open by the
top section which thereby provides access to said bag for
filling or for removal of the content, said top section being
provided with notches (19) at the junction between said walls
and overlapping poriions of said bag being locally deformed by
heat shrinking to cooperate in tension with said notches so as to
hold the bag and the top section connected together.
4,381,059
PUZZLE-LOCKING CONTAINER AND METHOD FOR
STORING AND DISPENSING ARTICLES
Edwin A. Schurman, Arlington, Tex., assignor to Charles E.
Schunnan, Fort Worth, Tex.
FUed Oct. 31, 1979, Ser. No. 89,765
Int aJ B65D 83/04
U.S. a. 206—533 31 Claiois
1. A cannular article storing and dispensing container having
means for preventing access to the container contents by very
young children through obscuring the mode of opening it
comprising:
A. an elongated tubular shell having closed opposite ends
and
880
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
aperture means opening through the shell side wall for
loading of articles into the container and dispensing
them therethrough;
B. closure means adapted to cover said aperture means, said
closure means comprising slider means slideable axially of
said container shell;
C. locking means operative at least at one end of said shell
for preventing or permitting movement of said slideable
fm^ M • , i" ■ — '^ — *" — -^ — -^ —
., A.
< k l\
means so as to permit the closure means to block the
aperture means closed when said slideable means is pre-
vented from sliding or to permit opening of the aperture
means when said slideable means is released for sliding
action; and
D. said locking means comprises flange means turnable
circumferentially about the longitudinal axis of said tubu-
lar shell around substantially the entire perimeter thereof.
4,381,060
RING SUPPORTED MOBILE TOWER CRANE
James G. Morrow, St., and Michael C. Anderson, both of Mani-
towoc, Wis., assignors to The Manitowoc Company, Inc.,
Manitowoc, Wis.
Filed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,054
Int. a.3 B66C 23/00
U.S. a. 212—195 8 Claims
1. A ring supported mobile lift crane comprising in combina-
tion, lower works including a supporting frame and self-
propelled transport means, a ring deflning track mounted on
said frame and transport means, upper works mounted above
said frame for rotation with respect thereto, a load carrier
extending from said upper works in riding contact on said ring,
a counterweight carrier extending oppositely from said upper
works in riding contact with said ring, a tower mounted on
said load carrier for pivotal movement between generally
horizontal and vertical positions, a boom pivoted to the outer
end of said tower, a rearwardly inclined mast mounted on said
load carrier and connected to said upper works and said coun-
terweight carrier by rigging means, a tower backstay con-
nected to the top of said tower and through tower hoist rigging
to the top of said mast, a flxed boom strut connected at one end
to the top of said tower and at the other end to a first fixed
pendant secured to said load carrier so that said tower, said
fixed boom strut and said first fixed pendant form a first fixed
triangle, a movable boom strut connected at one end to the top
of said tower and at the other end to a second fixed pendant
secured to the outer end of said boom so that said boom, said
movable boom strut and said second fixed pendant form a
second fixed triangle, means including a boom hoist line inter-
connecting the outer ends of said fixed and movable boom
struts for raising and lowering said boom, and means for
changing the length of said tower hoist rigging for raising and
lowering said tower, boom, boom struts and tower backstay as
a unit.
4,381,061
NON-PANELING CONTAINER
Daryl D. Cemy, Greenville, Ohio, and Edwin J. Diebolt, Mun-
cie, Ind., assignors to Ball Corporation, Muncie, Ind.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,783
Int. a.3 B65D 23/00
U.S. a. 215—1 C 15 Oaims
1. A thermoplastic container capable of being filled and
sealed having a yieldable bottom endwall comprising a con-
tainer having an opening at the upper extremity thereof for
receiving a closure, a cylindrical sidewall and a bottom end-
wall integrally formed with the sidewall at the lower extremity
thereof, said bottom endwall being displaceable inwardly, in
preference to the sidewall, upon a relative reduction of pres-
sure in the container, said bottom endwall comprising a frusto-
conical surface extending downwardly and inwardly from said
sidewall toward the longitudinal axis of the container at an
angle less than about 30°, a curvilinear base integrally con-
nected with and extending downwardly from said frustoconi-
cal surface and providing a base for said container while rest-
ing on a supporting surface, said base defined by an outer
curved portion having a major radius of curvature and an inner
curved portion having a minor radius of curvature, the centers
of said radii falling on a common line parallel to the longitudi-
nal axis of the container and the radii intersecting one another
tangentially, the ratio of said major to minor radii being about
2:1, an annular member extending downwardly and inwardly
from said inner curved portion to the axis of the container, a
hinge element interconnecting with said inner curved portion
and said annular member, said hinge element defining a hinge
radius substantially less than the minor radius, said hinge radius
being tangent to the minor radius at a point falling on a hori-
zontal line extending from the center of the minor radius, said
hinge element being thinner than the sidewpll, the wall thick-
ness of hinge element being about 80 percent or less of the
sidewall thickness, the height of said inner curved portion
being less than one-half the height of said frustoconical surface,
and a central panel connected to said annular member and
being slightly above the supporting surface.
4,381,062
CONTAINER
Jean-Pierre Taquoi, Soissons, France, assignor to B.S.L. (Big-
nier Schmid-Laurent), France
FUed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,503
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 30, 1980, 80 09816
Int aJ B65D 7/42. 87/00
U.S. a. 220—71 4 Claims
1. A container comprising a vessel having cylindrical side
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
881
walls and curved end walls each of which is, respectively,
secured to the interior surface of the vessel near its ends to
thereby close the interior of the vessel, the ends of the cylindri-
cal side walls of the vessel extending beyond the region of
contact of each of said curved end walls with the interior
surfaces of the vessel, a supporting frame at each end of said
vessel, and means connecting said vessel to said frame to form
a unitary structure, said connecting means comprising a con-
necting plate positioned in a plane substantially transverse to
said cylindrical side walls and having a first face and a second
face opposite to said first face, said first face being in abutment
against said supporting frame and welded thereto, said ends of
the cylinder side walls being in abutment against the said sec-
ond face and welded thereto.
4,381,063
WEATHERPROOF COVER ASSEMBLY FOR
ELECTRICAL WIRING DEVICES
Henry Leong, Kendall Park, N.J., assignor to GTE Products
Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 241,795, Mar. 9, 1981, abandoned. This
application Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,487
Int. a.' H02G 3/14
U.S. a. 220—242 26 Claims
between said inner and outer walls when said cover is
closed; and
means for pivotally attaching said cover means to said side
outer walls, so that said cover means pivots about an axis
of rotation,
whereby, when said cover means is closed, said outer walls,
said inner walls, said Hanges, and said cover means to-
gether inhibit entry of moisture and dust into said cham-
ber.
4,381,064
COATED SHEET MATERIAL AND CONTAINER
THEREFROM
Narayan Das, Westmont, and Surya K. Misra, Naperville, both
of III., assignors to National Can Corporation, Chicago, III.
Division of Ser. No. 11,169, Feb. 12, 1979, Pat. No. 4,285,223.
This application Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,326
Int. CI.' B32B 5/00: B65D 90/04
U.S. a. 220—458 8 Qaims
1. A weatherproof cover assembly for an electrical wiring
device comprising:
a housing including
a base having at least one aperture therethrough for access
to said wiring device,
a plurality of interconnected outer walls extending front-
wardly from said base and including a top outer wall
and opposing side outer walls, each of said side outer
walls having a front surface,
a plurality of interconnected inner walls, extending front-
wardly from said base, each having a front surface, said
inner walls and said base defining a chamber;
cover means pivotally attached to said side outer walls for
enclosing said chamber when said cover means is closed
and for providing access to said wiring device when cover
means is open, said cover means including
a plurality of interconnected flanges extending rearwardly
from said cover means, said flanges being disposed
1. A stock material suitable for use in making a drawn and
ironed container comprising a black plate base having a phos-
phate layer on at least one surface thereof and chemically
bonded to said surface, the grain size in said phosphate layer
being in the range of about 400 to about 2500 angstroms, said
phosphate layer having a thickness equivalent to about 20-100
milligrams per square foot, said phosphate layer being applied
to both surfaces of said black plate base and said phosphate
layers each having the aforesaid range of thicknesses and said
phosphate layers being substantially equal in thickness, and a
layer of an organic ester lubricant on each of said phosphate
layers but unreacted therewith so that a drawn and ironed
container can be formed from said stock material.
3. A stock material suitable for use in making a drawn and
ironed container comprising a black plate base having a phos-
phate layer on at least one surface thereof and chemically
bonded to said surface, the grain size in said phosphate layer
being in the range of about 400 to about 2500 angstroms, said
phosphate layer having a thickness equivalent to about 20-100
milligrams per square foot, and a layer of an organic ester
lubricant on the phosphate layer but unreacted therewith so
that a drawn and ironed container can be formed from said
stock material.
5. A seamless drawn and ironed container consisting of a
black plate base material having an integral layer of insoluble
crystalline phosphate chemically bonded to an outside surface
of the side wall thereof which produces a corrosion-resisUnt
layer for said surface of said black plate base material, said
layer being totally reacted and having a thickness equivalent to
less than about 50 milligrams per square foot, the inside surface
of said container having an integral layer of water insoluble
crystalline phosphate chemically bonded thereto and toully
reacted and having a thickness equivalent to less than about 50
milligrams per square foot, each layer of said phosphate having
a grain size in the range of about 400 to about 2500 angstroms.
1029 O.G.— 40
882
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,065
CONTINLOL'S DISCHARGE AEROSOL ACTUATOR
Thomas Hayes, Westport, Conn., assignor to Precision Valve
Corporation, Yonkers, N.Y.
4,381,067
FEEDING DEVICE FOR PRE-STERILIZED OBJECTS
CONTAINED IN INTERNALLY STERILE
RECEPTACLES, FOR STERILE PACKING PLANTS
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,262
Int. CI.' B65D 83/14
U.S. CI. 222—153
Camillo Cateili, Parma, Italy, assignor to Ing, Rossi & Catelli di
Catelli & C. S.n.C, Parma, Italy
3 Claims Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,740
Claims priority, application Italy, Feb. 29, 1980, 40014 A/80
Int. CV GOIF 11/28
U.S. CI. 222—450 8 Claims
1. A one-piece integrally molded actuator for a pressurized
aerosol dispenser comprising a generally cylindrical cap body
having a generally horizontal surface portion which includes a
central aperture through which the valve stem of the dispenser
protrudes, an actuator tab integral with said horizontal surface
portion and connected thereto at the inner end of the tab by a
flexible hmge portion, said tab being detachably connected to
the cap body near the outer end of the tab by a frangible web,
a first side of said tab including a valve stem receiving socket
for fitment upon the dispenser valve stem when the tab has
been inverted by rotation about said hinge portion, said valve
stem receiving socket being in communication with a dis-
charge orifice located on the other side said tab, the first side of
said tab also including detent means cooperative with detent
means located on the horizontal surface portion of said cap
body to retain the tab in the inverted position for latching the
container valve open.
4,381,066
POLYMERIC FOAM CAULKING COMPOSITIONS
Edward H. Page, 1021 Hillcrest Rd., Ridgewood, N.J. 07450,
and Frank Scotti, 450 Indian Rd., Wayne, N.J. 07470
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,570
Int. a.^ B65D 83/00
U.S. a. 222—394 33 Qaims
1. A composition suitable for preparing a stable, cellular
foam adapted to be dispensed from an aerosol container and
maintained under pressure in a container having a value mem-
ber associated with the container adaptable for continuous
dispensing of the contents of the container, the composition
comprising an aqueous emulsion of one or more foamable
polymers, filler, a propellent amount of dimethyl ether and a
volatile organic liquid compound selected from the group
consisting of a volatile hydrocarbon, a volatile halogenated
hydrocarbon, and mixtures thereof, wherein the foamable
polymers have glass transition temperatures of less than about
15' C. and wherein the foamable polymers are emulsified by a
nonionic surfactant having an HLB value of greater than about
15; wherein the ratio of the weight percent of the dimethyl
ether to the organic liquid compound is about 9-90:1, and
wherein the foam is self-leveling, water resistant, and the vol-
ume of the foam is not greater than about six times the volume
of said composition.
1. Feeding device for pre-sterilized objects contained in
internally sterile receptacles, for sterile packing plants, com-
prising: a chamber (1) provided with two apertures, the first
aperture (2) of which, connects, through an opening and clos-
ing mechanism operated from outside said chamber, the cham-
ber itself with a sterile environment (5), and the second aper-
ture (3) of which, is shaped in such a way that the mouth (106)
of a receptacle (10) containing the pre-sterilized objects enters
it, blocking it completely; a first means for creating a sterile gas
atmosphere within the chamber at a pressure slightly higher
than atmospheric pressure; a locking means for securing said
receptacle in the position in which its mouth occupies said
second aperture; a second means operated from outside said
chamber, for removing a lid (106) of said receptacle when the
latter is locked by said locking means; a diaphragm inserted
between said first and second aperture, for greatly reducing the
sectional area of flow of the gas contained in the chamber
towards the outside, when said second aperture is free.
4,381,068
CONTINUOUS METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAKING A
SLEEVE WITH A TURNED BACK EDGE
Jean-Pierre Raisin, Troyes, and Jacques Pion, Saint Julien les
Villas, both of France, assignors to Institut Textile de France
and Agence Nationale de Valorisation la Recherche, both of
Paris, France
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 233,039
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 8, 1980, 80 02806
Int. a.3 A41H 43/02
U.S. a. 223—2 7 Oaims
1. Device for obtaining from a long length of tubular knitted
element a sleeve with a turned back edge of predetermined
length of the type comprising a tubular guide which defines an
inner surface and an outer surface one of which is used to guide
the tubular knitted element, means for turning back a part of
the tubular knitted element which projects from the front end
of the tubular guide, means for pulling forward the whole
knitted element, and means for cutting across said knitted
element, wherein the inner surface of the tubular guide is
provided for guiding the tubular knitted element and in that the
means for turning back a part of the said tubular knitted ele-
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
883
ment are adapted to turn the said part over the outer surface of 4,381,070
the tubular guide wherein at least one nozzle producing a jet of DEVICE FOR SECURING SURFBOARDS OR THE LIKE
ON THE ROOF CARRIERS OF AUTOMOTIVE
VEHICLES
Josef Langbauer, Grabenstatt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Heinrich Wunder GmbH A Co. KG, Dachau, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,926
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 19,
1979, 2937850; Nov. 10, 1979, 2945479
Int. a.' B60R 9/08
;?7 ^ '10
iieip'ooi ?^^
U.S. CI. 224—321
17 Claims
X^-1
air is provided, which nozzle cooperates with the means for
turning back the part of the knitted element which projects
from the front end of the tubular guide.
^-^^ > » 9i^9i ^i_J^
/
r-J
<
4,381,069
OUTBOARD MOTOR CARRIER FOR MOTOR VEHICLE
Steven C. Kreck, 709 N. Phillips, Carson City, Nev. 89701
Continuation of Ser. No. 189,516, Sep. 22, 1980, abandoned. This
application May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,745
Int. CV B60R 9/08
U.S. a. 224—42.44 3 Claims
V"
1. A mounting structure for transporting an outboard motor
on a motor vehicle comprising:
a bracket means adapted to be securely attached to an exter-
nal structure on a motor vehicle;
a rigid metal channel extending upwardly at an angle from
said bracket means;
an elongated supporting arm mounted at its lower end to
said channel with a lower portion above said lower end
receivable into an upper opening in said channel to be
supported in an upright position at said angle and a flat
plate extending outwardly from its upper end to be en-
gaged with the mounting clamps of an outboard motor;
and,
locking means for securing said lower portion of said sup-
porting arm in its upright position within said channel,
said supporting arm having said upper end angled ob-
tusely to said supporting arm so that the outboard motor
clamped to said plate is held vertically with its center of
gravity above the bracket means when said supporting
arm is in said upright position, said flat plate extending in
a plane at the same obtuse angle to said supporting arm as
said upper end.
1. A device for securing at least one component of a water-
craft, such as a surfboard, which has an opening, on the roof of
an automotive vehicle, comprising a roof carrier on the roof of
the vehicle, said roof carrier including an arm having an aper-
ture; a locking bar having an externally threaded upper portion
and a lower portion, said locking bar being arranged to extend
through the opening of the component when the latter is
placed onto said roof carrier and through the aperture of said
arm so that said lower portion of said locking bar is located at
a level below said aperture, said locking bar being turnable
between a first position in which said lower portion thereof
engages with and a second position in which said lower por-
tion thereof can be disengaged from said roof carrier; a
threaded member movable into mesh with said upper portion
while said locking bar extends through the opening of the
component on said roof carrier to urge the component against
the roof carrier; a tensioning member disposed between the
commodity through which said locking bar extends and said
threaded member, said tensioning member having a portion
non-rotatably receivable in the opening of the component on
said roof carrier and a portion extending into the aperture of
said arm to hold said tensioning member against rotation rela-
tive to said arm; and means for releasably locking said threaded
member in a position in which said threaded member holds said
lower portion of said locking bar in engagement with said roof
carrier in the first position of said locking bar.
4,381,071
FOLDABLE BLANK BOX
Vern O. Vergiels, Temperance, Mich,, assignor to Tecumseh
Corrugated Box Company, Tecumseh, Mich.
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,733
Int. a.5 B65D 5/66. 5/18
U.S. a. 229—16 R 9 Claims
56 30 48
1. A container formed of sheet material comprising:
a. top, bottom, side and end panel means hingedly connected
884
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
c.
together defining a hollow body portion closed at one end
and open at the opposite end;
auxiliary panel means lying adjacent a portion of the inner
surface said bottom panel and having marginal edges
aligned adjacent the open end of the said hollow body
portion;
closure means extending from the end of bottom panel
means for closing the open end of said hollow body por-
tion; and
locking means struck from said closure means and said
bottom panel means for engaging said aligned marginal
edges of said hollow body portion when said closure
means is bent away from said body portion whereby said
body portion is held in an erected, open position by said
locking means and supported in an inclined position by
said closure means for permitting an article to be inserted
into said container vithout grasping the outer surfaces of
the sides thereof
4,381,072
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SEPARATELY
COLLECTING COMPONENTS OF A LIQUID BY MEANS
OF A CENTRIFUGAL ROTOR
Tetsuo Matsumoto, Hyogo, and Akira Okumura, Takarazuka,
both of Japan, assignors to Atto Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,417
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 11, 1980, 55-48287
Int. a.3 B04B 7/00, 15/08
U.S. a. 494—10 9 Qaims
1. A device for separately collecting components of a liquid,
comprising:
a rotor;
a first aspirator mounted on said rotor for rotation therewith,
having a radially extending smaller diameter pipe, a radi-
ally extending larger diameter pipe disposed radially out-
wardly from the smaller diameter pipe, and first connect-
ing means for connecting the smaller diameter pipe and
the larger diameter pipe;
a first container mounted on said rotor for rotation there-
with;
a first pipe communicating between said first container and
said first connecting means, wherein fiuid introduced into
said first aspirator is subjected to increasing centrifugal
force as it flows radially outwardly for creating suction at
said connecting means and thereby in said first pipe; and
means for independently introducing liquids into said first
aspirator and into said first container, wherein liquid may
be selectively introduced into said first container for cen-
trifuging, and wherein liquid in said first container may be
selectively withdrawn through said first pipe by introduc-
ing liquid into said first aspirator.
4,381,073
THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED COLD AND HOT
WATER MIXER
Roland Gloor, Gerbergasse, CH-5726 Unterkulm, Svntzerland
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,960
Int. a.3 G05D 23/13
U.S. a. 236—12 A 7 Qaims
1. An improved thermostatically controlled mixer of cold
and hot water comprising an elongated housing with an elon-
gated mixing chamber for mixing the cold and hot water, a
cold water inlet for passing cold water to the chamber, a hot
water inlet for passing hot water to the chamber, a mixed water
outlet connected to the chamber for passing a fiow of the
mixed cold and hot water from the chamber, a first control
cartridge mounted to the housing for regulating the fiow of
cold water into the mixed chamber and for regulating the flow
of mixed water from the mixing chamber, wherein said first
cartridge comprises a first pair of ceramic discs rotatably
mounted relative to and sealingly against each other, each disc
of said first pair of ceramic discs having a port extending
therethrough to establish fluid communication from the cold
water inlet to the mixing chamber upon alignment thereof, said
first cartridge further including a second pair of ceramic discs
rotatably mounted relative to and sealingly against each other,
said second pair of ceramic discs being mounted between the
mixing chamber and the mixed water outlet, each disc of said
second pair of ceramic discs having a port extending there-
through to establish fluid communication from the mixing
chamber to said mixed water outlet upon alignment thereof,
and a second cartridge mounted to the housing including a
thermally responsive element mounted in the mixing chamber
and a slide valve connected to said thermally responsive ele-
ment and slidably mounted in said second cartridge for regulat-
ing the flow of hot water from the hot water inlet to the mixing
chamber responsive to the operation of said thermal element.
4,381,074
AIR-CONDITIONING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN
AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE
Tetsuya lijima, Yamato, and Seiichi Takahashi, Tokyo, both of
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited, Yoko-
hama, Japan
Filed Nov. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,865
Claims priority, application Japan, Not. 4, 1980, 55-153718
Int. a.3 G05D 23/00: B60H 3/00
U.S. a. 236—13 12 Qaims
1. An air conditioning method for an automotive vehicle
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
885
air-conditioning system in which the passenger compartment
air temperature is maintained at a comfortable temperature
according to the outside air temperature, which comprises the
following steps of:
(a) detecting air temperature at a plurality of locations,
including at least outside air temperature T^ and passen-
ger compartment air temperature Tp,
(b) determining a desired passenger compartment air tem-
perature To preset by a passenger compartment air tem-
perature preset device;
(c) calculating a comfortable passenger compartment air
temperature To according to the outside air temperature
Tyt in accordance with a predetermined relationship be-
tween comfortable passenger compartment air tempera-
ture To and detected outside-air temperature T^;
(d) calculating a basic outlet duct air temperature Taco by
substituting the current values of outside air temperature
Ta, passenger compartment air temperature T/>, and com-
fortable passenger compartment air temperature To' into
a predetermined first equation and solving the equation
arithmetically for Taco\
(e) calculating an outlet duct air temperature correction AT
by substituting the current values of outside air tempera-
ture Ta and comfortable passenger compartment air tem-
perature To into a second predetermined equation and
solving the equation arithmetically for AT;
(0 adding the calculated basic outlet duct air temperature
Taco and the calculated outlet duct air temperature cor-
rection AT to obtain a required target outlet duct air
temperature Tag,
(g) detecting whether air introduced into the air conditioner
is from outside the vehicle or from within the passenger
compartment, these two possibilities being referred to as
air introduction modes;
(h) calculating an air mix door opening percentage X re-
quired to produce outlet duct air at the target temperature
Tag by comparing the current calculated value of target
outlet duct air temperature Tag, and the current detected
value of passenger compartment temperature T/>, with
stored characteristic curves of the predetermined relation-
ships of outlet duct air temperature Tag air introduction
mode and passenger compartment air temperature Tp to
air mix door opening percentage X; and
(i) positioning the air mix door in accordance with the calcu-
lated value of X.
changer having a combustion side and a fluid side in which a
fluid is heated, a gas or oil fired fuel burner coupled to said
combustion side for heating said fluid when said fuel is ignited,
heat radiating means coupled to said heat exchanger, circulat-
ing means for transporting said fluid between said heat ex-
changer and said heat rediating means, adjustable thermostat
means for establishing a desired temperature within said build-
ing, first sensor means for providing a signal indicative of heat
exchanger fluid side temperature, second sensor means for
providing a signal indicative of outdoor temperature, said
device comprising, limit control means for establishing high
and low temperature limits for said system, lockout means for
selectively disabling said burner and said circulating means in
response to a lockout signal, temperature sensing means re-
sponsive to said first and second sensor means for providing
control signals indicative of outdoor temperature and fluid side
temperature and for providing control signals indicative of a
failure of said first sensor means, microprocessor means re-
sponsive to said temperature sensing means, said thermostat
means and said limit control means for providing said lockout
signal in response to said control signal indicative of a failure of
said first sensor means and for providing signals to said burner
and said circulating means for controlling the operation
thereof, whereupon said fluid side temperature is modulated by
the operation of said burner as a function of said fluid side
temperature and outdoor temf>erature and said circulating
means is enabled to operate whether or not said burner is
ignited as a function of said fluid side temperature and outdoor
temperature to attain the indoor temperature as established by
said thermostatic means, said microprocessor being responsive
to said limit control means for disabling said burner to prevent
fuel ignition if said fluid side temperature would exceed said
high temperature limit and for enabling burner ignition when
called upon to do so if the fluid side temperature drops below
said low temperature limit.
4,381,076
DROPPED RAILROAD TIE FOR RAILWAY WITHOUT
BALLAST
Rene Munier, Choisy Au Bac, France, assignor to Regie Na-
tionale des Usines Renault, Boulogne-Billancourt, France
Filed Jun. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 159,341
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 15, 1979, 79 15391
Int. a.3 EOIB 3/40
U.S. a. 238—115 1 Claim
4,381,075
MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROLLER FOR
HEATING SYSTEM
N. Allen Cargill, Warminister, and Theodore M. Bunten, Fort
Washington, both of Pa., assignors to Thennonic Corp., Fort
Washington, Pa.
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,722
Int. a.^ F24D 3/00
U.S. a. 237—8 R 14 Qaims
*y
Ma
ISO-
,M
fUCL
SUPPLY
[/3e
3Z
\SlMMER/WmTeP
I OOMCSTK MOT
\»iT£P SrSTFM
flAO
yl5Z
^..
46
CONTPOLL€P
I60-
,S4
OPTIONAL
MOT MkTCP
rmtp
TMEPMOSTar
rse
HOT WAT^It
H OV£0 - ^ID€
BUTTON
^138
^IjL
"5s
^.
our POO ft
TMefMisrcm
'-so
CtPCUL A TOP
24
/
X
BASS BOARD HfATEP
1. An integrated primary, safety and limit control device for
a building heating system, said system including a heat ex-
.'^
3
»-t J
«Wf
\[\\a
'At
■ ,* - w-
J^J-
ir-4
1. A dropped railroad tie comprising:
a concrete tie block having an upper surface; and
a metal saddle in said block, said metal saddle including a
tie-plate covering a support area of said upper surface and
adapted to receive the foot and fastenings of a rail in said
support area, and a plurality of ribs transversely fixed to
886
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
said tie plate and forming a first truss, said ribs extending
into said tie block and being sealed in the concrete of said
tie block,
wherein at least some of said ribs extend parallel to the
length of said tie and decrease in height from said support
area toward the ends of said ribs, whereby said saddle
approximates an equal stress resistance beam,
whereby said saddle absorbs flexure stresses and transmits
compressive stresses to said tie block,
wherein said saddle is formed of a cut steel plate shaped in a
U section, the fianges of which form said ribs and wherein
the outer frame of a round bar flat grill second truss wedg-
ingly encloses said flanges within said tie,
whereby said outer frame of said second truss reinforces said
saddle against bending stresses.
only toward the end of its stroke from the first to the
second position.
1. A nozzle assembly for the injection of premixed fuel and
air into a diesel engine cylinder, comprising:
(a) a nozzle body;
(b) a piston reciprocably mounted in the nozzle body and
- defining a premixing chamber in combination therewith,
the premixing chamber having a fuel inlet port and an air
inlet port which are opened by the piston when the latter
is in a first position, where the capacity of the premixing
chamber is maximized, and which are closed by the piston
upon its movement toward a second position where the
capacity of the premixing chamber is reduced to a mini-
mum, so that the piston compresses the fuel-air mixture
trapped in the premixing chamber on its stroke from the
first to the second position;
(c) a plunger also mounted in the nozzle body for reciproca-
tion between a third and a fourth position, the plunger
having a spray hole formed in one end which is retracted
in the nozzle body for closing the premixing chamber
against the diesel engine cylinder when the plunger is in
the third position and which projects out of the nozzle
body for spraying the compressed fuel-air mixture into the
diesel engine cylinder from the premixing chamber when
the plunger is in the fourth position, the plunger being
operatively engaged with the piston in such a way that the
piston when in the first position holds the plunger in the
third position and moves the plunger to the fourth position
4,381,078
AGRICULTURAL SPRAY NOZZLE WITH FLUID
OPERATED ORIFICE CLEANING MEMBER
John B. Vessels, Rl Box 69, Webster, Ky. 40176
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,501
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 3, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' B05B 15/02
U.S. a. 239-118 3 Claims
4,381,077
DIESEL FUEL INJECTION NOZZLE
Yuzo Tsumura, and Masatoshi Iwata, both of Oyama, Japan,
assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,539
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 12, 1980, 55-80983[U]
Int. a.' F02M 61/08
U.S. a. 239— 89 5 Claims
1. In an agricultural spray device having an upper pressure
chamber and a lower pressure chamber, said chambers being
divided by a diaphragm, said lower pressure chamber includ-
ing a nozzle having an outlet orifice; a source of spray material;
a first conduit means connecting said source with said cham-
bers; valve means in said first conduit means for controlling the
now of material to either the upper or the lower chamber; a
second conduit means connecting said upper chamber with
said source for allowing material to flow out of said upper
chamber to said source when said valve means is directing
spray material to said lower chamber; and a punch affixed to
said diaphragm, said punch having a diameter slightly smaller
than said orifice and being movable in and out of said orifice so
as to punch out any dirt or foreign material tending to clog said
orifice, said punch also minimizing dripping when in said
orifice said punch being movable into the orifice when said
valve means allows material to How to said upper chamber,
said punch being movable out of said orifice when said valve
means allows flow of material to said lower chamber; the
improvement comprising: a third conduit means connecting
said lower chamber with said source of spray material for
allowing said spray material to fiow out of said lower chamber
to said source of spray material when said valve means is
directing spray material to the upper chamber.
4,381,079
ATOMIZING DEVICE MOTOR
Harold T. Allen, Brownsburg, Ind., assignor to Ransburg Corpo-
ration, Indianapolis, Ind.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,519
Int. C\? B05B 3/04. 3/10
U.S. a. 239—214.13 11 Qaims
1. In a gas turbine motor for driving a rotating atomizing
device, the motor having a shaft, an atomizing device side from
which the shaft projects for mounting the atomizing device, an
interior divided into an inlet side and an exhaust side, a parti-
tion separating the inlet side from the exhaust side, the partition
providing at least one gas-directing nozzle, a turbine wheel
mounted on the shaft adjacent the partition and including
means against which the gas impinges as it passes through the
nozzle to spin the turbine wheel and shaft, the shaft including
means providing a passageway extending longitudinally there-
through, means providing access to the passageway from a
Aprii 2f). 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
887
point remote from the atomizing device mounting end of the 4,381,081
shaft, and means providing an exhaust from the passageway at NOZZLE ASSEMBLY FOR SPRAY COATING SYSTEMS
^ Donald R. Hastings, Elyria, Ohio, assignor to Nordson Corpora-
tion, Amherst, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 971,514, Dec. 20, 1978, Pat. No.
4,273,293. This application Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,487
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 16,
1998, has been disclaimed,
int. a.' B05B 5/02
U.S. CI. 239—707 9 Claims
the atomizing device-mounting end for exhausting motor driv-
ing gas therethrough.
4,381,080
SPREADING DEVICE FOR EFFECTING A UNIFORM
DISTRIBUTION OF MATERIAL SUCH AS FERTILIZER
Ary van der Lely, Maasland, and Cornelis J. G. Bom, Rozen-
burg, both of Netherlands, assignors to C. Van der Lely N.V.,
Maasland, Netherlands
Filed Feb. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 14,643
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 24, 1978,
7802074
Int. CI.' AOIC / 7/00
U.S. CI. 239—666 33 Claims
1. A device for spreading material comprising material eject-
ing means which includes at least one distribution member
adapted to rotate about a substantially vertical axis, material
feeding means of such character that through which, during
the operation of the device, material to be spread by said eject-
ing means is supplied substantially 360° around said axis to said
distribution member and material is ejected substantially uni-
formly substantially 360° outwardly from said distribution
member, and material deflector means which is substantially
straight as seen in plan and located outwardly of the circumfer-
ence of said distribution member, said deflector means being
entirely spaced from a plane passing through said axis and
being disposed at substantially a right angle to the intended
direction of operative travel of the device and otherwise being
so constructed and arranged that material from said ejecting
means impinges on said deflector means and is received on the
underlying surface in a substantially uniform density.
1. In a system for the coating the articles with a liquid coat-
ing material supplied from a pressurized bulk coating source
wherein said liquid coating material is emitted from a coatmg
material spray device in the form of an atomized spray pro-
duced by impacting a central stream of liquid coating material
under pressure with a pressurized gas stream encircling said
central liquid stream and wherein the articles to be coated are
spaced from said spray device, the combination comprising:
a source of liquid coating material under pressure;
a source of pressurized atomizing gas;
a material spray device having a liquid conduit with flow
control means therein adapted to be connected to said
source of pressurized liquid coating material for providing'
relatively low liquid coating material flow rates in the
approximate range of 1^-6 fluid ounces of material per
minute, and having a gas conduit therein adapted to be
connected to said source of pressurized atomizing gas; and
a spray coating nozzle assembly made which is substantially
constructed of non-conductive plastic material comprising
a liquid tip communicating with said liquid conduit and
having a nozzle portion through which said liquid coating
material is emitted in a central stream at said relatively
low flow rate, and an air cap communicating with said
atomizing gas conduit through which gas is ejected for
impinging and atomizing said central stream of liquid
coating material emitted from said nozzle portion of said
liquid tip, said air cap being positionably supported by said
spray device only in the rear region of said air cap to
effectively leave the forward region thereof positionably
unsupported by said spray device, said air cap having a
metal insert in the center thereof, said insert having a
central bore and a plurality of uniformly dimensioned and
circumferentially spaced axial gas flow passages with
spaced, radially inwardly extending ribs therebetween,
said ribs engaging the outside surface of said liquid coating
tip nozzle portion to positively align the center axis of said
liquid coating nozzle portion on said axis of said central
bore to provide uniform atomizing gas flow around said
liquid coating tip nozzle portion for producing at rela-
tively low flow rate a finely atomized uniform spray pat-
tern of said coating material emitted from said liquid tip.
888
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,082
PARTICULATE MATERIAL HANDLING MEANS
Donald Elliott, Trainer; Charles A. Gahres, Aston, and Dorsey
C. Nelson, Springfield, all of Pa., assignors to FMC Corpora-
tion, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,334
Int. CI.' B02C U/286
U.S. a. 241-186 A 2 Claims
edge of said base plate, said second side plate being metal-
lic and having a shaft-engaging recess provided therein;
and,
a nonremovable paper roll-supporting shaft, said shaft hav-
ing a first end connected to said first side plate, said shaft
also having a second end with a magnet provided thereon,
said second end of said shaft being adapted (1) to fit into
said shaft-engaging recess of said second side plate when
said second side plate is positioned for engagement with
said shaft and (2) to extend from said first side plate in
cantilever fashion when said second side plate is rotated
away from said shaft so that paper rolls may be exchanged
without moving said shaft.
4,381,084
RE-TIGHTENER WITH PYROTECHNIC PROPELLANT
CHARGE FOR SAFETY BELT AUTOMATIC WIND-UP
DEVICES
Artur Fbhl, Schorndorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
REPA Feinstanzwerk GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 834,794, Sep. 19, 1977, abandoned. This
application Mar. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 127,494
Int. CI.3 A62B 35/00: B65H 75/48
U.S. CI. 242-107 16 Claims
1. Apparatus for liberating particulate material from a bale
thereof and feeding same to a processing apparatus comprising
guide means for directing a bale into engagement with a plural-
ity of rotatable shafts, said shafts having tines extending gener-
ally radially therefrom for engaging the bale and liberating the
particulate material therefrom, means for rotating adjacent
ones of said shafts in opposite directions, a horizontally extend-
ing screw conveyor for feeding the liberated particulate mate-
rial to a processing apparatus, said screw conveyor comprising
a screw rotatable within a cover member, said cover member
having an opening in the upper portion therefor for admitting
particulate material to enter into engagement with said screw,
a guide section for directing the liberated material from the
rotatable shafts to the opening in said cover member, compact-
ing means for compacting the particulate material against the
screw, said compacting means comprising a pair of counter
rotatable shafts extending through said guide section parallel to
said screw conveyor, and said shafts having longitudinally
extending vanes whereby rotation of said shafts causes said
vanes to force the liberated particulate material through the
opening in the cover of said, screw conveyor and into compact
engagement with the screw.
4,381,083
TOILET PAPER HOLDER
Takaaki Tsunetsugu, 2-5, Tatsumi Kita, 4-chome, Ikuno-ku,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,067
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 9, 1980, 55-80776
Int. a.3 B65H 79/00
U.S. a. 242—55.2 5 Qaims
J "
1. A toilet paper holder comprising:
a base plate mountable on a support surface;
a first side plate connected to a first edge of said base plate;
a second side plate rotatably mounted about an opposite
1. In a safety belt retractor system in which a shaft is
mounted in a bearing block, a safety belt is wound about the
shaft, a re-tightening element is connected to the shaft, and a
pyrotechnic propellant charge is provided which when acti-
vated by firing the charge generates an explosive pressure on
the re-tightening element to tighten the safety belt around the
body of a motor vehicle passenger to be protected, the im-
provement comprising a liquid medium and a propulsion piston
disposed intermediate the re-tightening element and the pyro-
technic propellant charge with the propulsion pistos disposed
between the liquid medium and the pyrotechnic propellant
charge so that the explosive pressure of the charge is applied
against the piston and drives the liquid medium against the
re-tightening element to tighten the safety belt around the
body of the motor vehicle passenger.
4,381,085
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR WITH REDUCED SPOOLING
Robert L. Stephenson, Utica, and John W. Frankila, Sterling
Heights, both of Mich., assignors to Allied Corporation, Mor-
ris Township, Morris County, N.J.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,614
Int. a.3 A62B 35/02; B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 242—107.3 6 Qaims
1. A seat belt retractor comprising:
a housing;
a spool rotatably mounted in said housing;
seat belt webbing wrapped about said spool in the form of a
roll of webbing and adapted to be extended therefrom and
retracted thereon;
locking means in said housing actuatable to prevent rotation
of said spool;
clamp means movably disposed in said housing, said clamp
means having at least one clamp surface adapted to
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
889
contact said roll of webbing on said spool to limit with-
drawal of said webbing from said spool, said clamp means
being movable towards said roll of webbing, said webbing
extending from said roll of webbing on said spool about
said clamp means and then out of said housing, forces
acting on said webbing when said locking means is actu-
ated resulting in movement of said clamp means towards
said roll of webbing whereby said clamp surface comes
i!
shaft is substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle,
said mounting means having an area of less structural rigid-
ity than said frame so that when crash forces which are
generally parallel to the axis of rotation of said shaft are
transmitted along said restraining means to said frame,
said mounting means distorts and permits said frame to
align itself toward the crash forces, whereby the structural
integrity of said frame is maintained for higher crash
forces.
4^1,087
ADJUSTABLE WIRE REEL
Loren J. Williams, 1951 Hurst Ave., San Jose, Calif. 95125
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,607
Int. a.' B65H 75/24
U.S. a. 242—110 9 Qaims
into contact with said roll of webbing; and means for
maintaining said clamp surface of said clamp means in
close proximity to said roll of webbing on said spool
regardless of the amount of webbing extended from said
spool, said maintaining means comprising at least one
contact member extending from said clamp surface and
biased toward said roll of webbing, said contact member
being in contact with said roll of webbing.
4,381,086
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR STRUCTURE
Robert C. Pfeiffer, Sterling Heights, Mich., assignor to Allied
Corporation, Morris Township, Morris County, N.J.
Filed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,784
Int. a.^ A62B 35/00: B65H 75/48
U.S. a. lAl—VSlA R 3 Qaims
1. An adjustable wire r?el comprising:
a tubular hub; and
a plurality of arm assemblies evenly spaced around said hub
and radially extending therefrom, each arm assembly
including
a first arm member attached to said hub.
a second arm member telescopically engaged with said first
arm member,
an elongated rim means attached to said second member,
a first fiange member engaged with a first end of said rim
means,
a second fiange member engaged with a second end of said
rim means, and
spring means for biasing said second fiange member towards
said second end of said rim means.
4,381,088
BOBBIN CORE
Randy E. Bryant, Alliance, Nebr., assignor to Dayco Corpora-
tion, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,752
Int. a.' B65H 75/14
U.S. a. 242—118.7 13 Qaims
V-
1. A seat belt retractor for installation in a vehicle having a
longitudinally extending axis, comprising:
a substantially rigid frame;
winding means supported for movement in said frame in
winding and unwinding directions and including a rotat-
able shaft;
locking means supported in said frame for locking said wind-
ing means against movement in said unwinding direction;
a retraint element connected to said winding means and
movable towards and away from said frame as said wind-
ing means moves in its winding and unwinding directions,
respectively; and
mounting means connected to said frame for mounting said
frame to the vehicle, so that the axis of rotation of said
7. In a tubular core for carrying yam wound therearound to
define a bobbin for a textile machine wherein said core has a
load-carrying structure and an inside portion which is adapted
to be engaged by a carrier shaft to provide substantially fac-
tional holding of said core and bobbin on said shaft, the im-
890
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
provement wherein said inside portion comprises a sleeve
made of a yieldable resilient polymeric material which is
adapted to be yieldingly compressed between said structure
and at least parts of said shaft to provide said frictional holding
of said core in an improved manner, and said yieldable resilient
material of said sleeve enables said core and bobbin to be
driven on said shaft while keeping said core substantially intact
as well as enabling damage-free removal thereof to thereby
define a reusable core, said structure bein^; made of paper, said
paper bemg a wound paper strip having a plurality of turns,
said paper strip having a first turn fastened to said sleeve and
adhesive means fastening adjoining turns thereof.
4,381,089
WOUND-TAPE RADIUS DETECTION SYSTEM FOR A
TAPE RECORDER
Shigeyuki Kondo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric
Industries, Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,155
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 27, 1979, 54-153296
Int. a.' B65H 59/38: G03B 1/02: GllB 15/32
U.S. a. 242—191 6 Claims
around two orthogonal axes; connecting means between said
target detecting means and a logic means; and control means
"i^.
K
X
^
'K
'J'
J' -
•■■J
24
■-'-J
■■'J
50
"■J ^
for said steering surfaces, said control means connected to said
logic means.
PUCH
S±.
1 L
GfNfnjTOft
-CCKl'ARjrCR
1. A wound-tape radius detection system for a tape appara-
tus, said apparatus of the type comprising a supply reel having
a tape wound thereon, a take-up reel arranged to wind up said
tape as passed thereto from said supply reel, a transducer
provided on a tape transport path between said supply and
take-up reels, and transporting means for transporting said
tape, said detection system comprising:
means coupled with one of said supply and take-up reels for
producing a first detection signal representing the speed of
the rotation of said one reel;
freely rotatable roller means for rotating in response to
transport of said tape;
means coupled with said freely rotatable roller means for
producing a second detection signal representing the
speed of transport of said tape; and
detecting means resp)onsive to said first and second detection
signals for detecting the radius of the tape wound on said
one reel.
4,381,091
CONTROL-EFFECT ENHANCEMENT OF TILTABLE
AIRCRAFT STABILIZING MEMBER
Barry V. Pegram, Kingston-upon-Tbames, England, assignor to
British Aerospace Public Limited Company, Weybridge, En-
gland
Filed Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,413
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 8, 1979,
7927579
Int. a.^ B64C 5/16. 23/00
U.S. CI. 244—87 2 Qaims
4,381,090
MISSILE STEERING SYSTEM USING A SEGMENTED
TARGET DETECTOR AND STEERING BY ROLL AND
PITCH MANEUVERS
William G. Garner, Grant, Ala., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Nov. 27, 1967, Ser. No. 687,924
Int. aj F41G 7/22: F42B 15/02
U.S. a. 244—3.16 3 Oaims
1. A guidance system for a missile having deflectable steer-
ing surfaces including: segmented target detecting means com-
prising first and second roll segments, and first and second
pitch segments; wherein said roll segments subtend small angu-
lar displacements with respect to said pitch segments, and said
roll segments and said pitch segments are respectively centered
1. An aircraft including:
a fixed body;
a tail plane having a leading edge region, mounted on said
body for tilting, control-effecting movement about a gen-
erally spanwise axis spaced from said leading edge region;
a control-enhancing member, having a trailing edge region,
fixedly extending from said body ahead of said tail plane
and having a span less than that of said tail plane, said
trailing edge region of said control-enhancing member
being shaped to match only a root portion of said tail plane
leading edge region, said regions being positioned to lie in
substantially continuous closely matching relationship
only in a predetermined tilted position of said tail plane in
which enhancement of the control effect of said tail plane
is desired, said member having substantially no effect on
either lift or drag in positions of said tail plane, e.g., in
cruise flight, other than said pre-determined tilted position
in which control enhancement is desired.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
891
4,381,092
MAGNETIC DOCKING PROBE FOR SOFT DOCKING OF
SPACE VEHICLES
Walter F. Barker, Denver, Colo., assignor to Martin Marietta
Corporation, Bethesda, Md.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,777
Int. a.^ B64G J/64
U.S. a. 244—161 13 Claims
1. An improved magnetic soft docking probe for impact free
docking of a docking space vehicle to a captive space vehicle,
said captive space vehicle comprising:
a magnetic target member fixedly carried by captive space
vehicle,
guide means surrounding said magnetic target member;
said docking space vehicle comprising:
a magnetic probe, said probe including;
an electromagnet,
an extendable and retractable boom, and
spring biased gimbals carried at respective ends of said boom
and connected to said electromagnet and said docking
space vehicle, respectively,
such that said spring biased gimbals function to uncage said
probe yet act to guide the magnetic probe into contact
with the magnetic target by magnetic attraction between
said members, and to axially align said electromagnet, said
boom and said docking space vehicle to provide proper
pitch and yaw alignment between the docking space vehi-
cle and the captive space vehicle, subsequent to said elec-
tromagnet contacting said magnetic target member.
4,381,093
FLAP ASSEMBLY FOR AIRCRAFT WING
Peter K. C. Rudolph, Seattle, Wash., assignor to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194,769
Int. a.^ B64C 3/50
U.S. a. 244—216 6 Qaims
and a transverse axis, said flap assembly comprismg a mouni
ing structure located at a first lower location at the rearward
end of the airfoil; a fiap member havmg a stowed first position
above said mounting structure at the rearward end of said
airfoil and movable rearwardly to a fully extended second
position; a first link mounting means having a lower first pivot
connecting means attached to said mounting structure at a first
connecting location and an upper second pivot connecting
means mounted to said fiap member at an upper second con-
necting location; a track mounting means comprising track
means and a third connecting means connected to said flap
member and also operatively connected to said track means at
a third connecting location positioned forwardly of said sec-
ond connecting location; said track mounting means being
characterized in that relative forward and rearward movement
of said third connecting means is constrained to be along said
track means on a forward and rearward first path of travel
having a substantial longitudinal path component, said firsi link
mounting means being characterized in thai with said fiap
member in its stowed first position, initial rearward movement
of said flap member causes said second pivot connecting means
to move in a rearward path having a substantial longitudinal
path component so as to provide substantial Fowler motion fur
said flap member, and further movement of said flap member
to its fully extended position causes said fiap member to defied
to a substantially downwardly and rearwardly extending posi-
tion; a second fiap having a third stowed position adjacent said
fiap member and movable rearwardly to a fourth fully de-
ployed position, where said second Hap is spaced from said flap
member; said second flap being pivotally connected to said
first link mounting means by fourth connecting means at a
fourth connecting location, whereby rearward movement of
said link mounting means moves said second flap toward its
fourth position; and said fourth connecting location being
spaced from said first connecting location at a distance greater
than a distance which said second connecting location is
spaced from said first connecting location, whereby rearward
movement of said link mounting means moves said second fiap
rearwardly a greater distance than said flap member is moved.
4,381,094
APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE SIGNAL TERM
TO BE TRANSMITTED TO A RAILROAD TRACTION
VEHICLE
Horst-Guenter Gnest, Lehrte; Wolfgang-Dieter Granzow; Hans-
Otto Hartkopf, both of Brunswick, and Adalbert Zillmer,
Wolfenbuettel, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,271
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 16,
1980, 3001440
Int. a.' B61L 3/18
U.S. a. 246—182 R 4 Claims
A
»>
W3
W2
W1
LO
60
80
60
A^
"^(.
7'U
u
u
ah
s6fl
1 — ^ — '
S60
/
EGS
EGW3 EGW2 EGW1 SL EGZ
1. A flap assembly for an airfoil having upper and lower
surfaces, a forward end and a rearward end, a longitudinal axis
1. Apparatus for determining a signal term, representing the
admissible speed, to be transmitted to a railroad traction vehi-
cle which is to travel over a prescribed route which includes a
start element, a destination element and at least one intermedi-
ate element, the destination and intermediate elements having
maximum speeds assigned thereto, comprising:
892
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
respective storage means at the destination element and at
each intermediate element storing the respective maxi-
mum speed;
destination element transmission means for transmitting a
message mcluding the assigned maximum speed back
along the route to the next intermediate element;
4,381,096
SEAT POSITIONER
Daniel W. Roper, Rochester, Mich., assignor to Rockwell Inter-
national Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,487
Int. CI.' F16M 13/00
comparison means at each respective intermediate element ^•^- ^'* ^** — *2'
for comparing its respective assigned maximum speed
with the maximum speed of an incoming message and
devaluing the message in response to a message maximum
speed which is greater than the respective assigned maxi-
mum speed;
intermediate element transmission means at each respective
intermediate element for relaying the message, devalued
as required, towards the start element; and
conversion means at the start element for receiving, convert-
ing and transmitting the received message as a signal term.
5 Claims
-30
4,381,095
APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING A WORK SURFACE
Victor J. Kritske, Sheboygan, Wis,, assignor to Mayline Co.,
Inc., Sheboygan, Wis.
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,746
Int. CI.' F16M 11/00
U.S. CI. 248—161 8 Claims
1. Apparatus for supporting a work surface, said apparatus
comprising:
telescoping inner and outer column members,
each said column member having a top and bottom and
including a plurality of planar side members that meet to
form edges therebetween,
said inner column member having external cross-sectional
dimensions sufficiently smaller than the internal cross-sec-
tional dimension on said outer column member to thereby
make it possible for said inner column member to freely fit
and slide inside said outer column member;
each said column member having a generally uniform rect-
angular cross-section;
said inner column member being extendable by telescoping
movement with respect to said outer column member;
a plurality of bearing block assemblies;
a stabilizer wheel rotatably attached to each said bearing
block assembly to allow said wheel to rotate freely with
respect to said bearing block assembly;
said inner column member having a plurality of angled slots
formed in said planar side members;
said block assemblies being constrained to move along said
angled slots,
said angled slots being positioned such that said wheels
associated with said bearing block assemblies can be urged
in and out of contact with said outer column by moving
said block assemblies along said angled slots, whereby said
bearing blocks enable said vertical extension by means of
a sliding relationship with a minimum amount of horizon-
tal movement while minimizing the force required for
such telescoping extension.
1. A mechanism for adjusting the relative position of two
components comprising:
a first member having a pair of flat converging surfaces of
substantial length defining a path of movement between
said components;
at least one locking member including a groove having
converging side walls complementary with said flat con-
verging surfaces of said first member and movable toward
and away from said flat converging surfaces of said first
member, means biasing said locking member toward said
flat converging surfaces to wedge said fiat converging
surfaces of said first member into said groove to permit
relative movement between said first member and said
locking member;
means for moving said locking element away from said flat
converging surfaces to permit movement of said compo-
nents along said path; and
said groove having converging side walls complementary
with said fiat converging surfaces of said first member,
there being two locking members, each of said locking
members being movable toward and away from said flat
converging surfaces of said first member and including a
camming surface converging toward said path of move-
ment, the slope of the camming surface of one of said
locking members being opposite to the slope of the'cam-
ming surface of the other said locking member, each of
said camming surfaces being movable along a complemen-
tary surface converging toward said flat converging sur-
faces of said first member whereby the relative position of
said two components may be adjusted in opposite direc-
tions along said path of movement.
4,381,097
APPARATUS FOR AND METHOD OF SUSPENDING A
LOAD
Daniel A. Moraca, 2020 N. 32 St. Apt. 209, Phoenix, Ariz. 85008
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,003
Int. CI.3 F16M 13/00
U.S. a. 248—546 12 Oaims
1. A wall attachment apparatus, comprising: backing means
having an elongated rod member for contacting a first face of
said wall; hook means for contacting a second face of said wall
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
893
and further for permitting support of a load; tension means
connected to said elongated rod member at a place spaced
from the ends thereof for biasing said wall between said back-
ing means and said hook means; and said tension means com-
prising a convoluted cord member; said cord having at least a
pivotally flexible coupling to said rod member; and said hook
means having means for engaging a particular one of said
convolutions.
4,381,098
CERAMIC BELT BUCKLE AND THE METHOD OF
MAKING
Nicholas A. Delfino, 2403 Antigua Cir., Coconut Creek, Fla.
33066
Filed Nov. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 207,967
Int. a.' B29C 6/00
U.S. CI. 249—94 2 Claims
9^ 16, U 3^ .1? J? lO,
1. A mold for forming a belt buckle having a ceramic bisque
body in any desired shape and for integrally molding therein a
metal harness connector and a metal belt buckle hook firmly
embedded therein, said molding comprising:
a base mold segment having a cavity therein;
a plurality of upper mold segments forming the top half of
the mold which fit together to form the upper half of the
mold, said segments having abutting wall portions that
include cavities for supporting said metal connectors and
said metal hook, said upper mold wall segments being
shaped relative to each other for sequential removal to
prevent damage to said ceramic greenware formed
therein.
4,381,099
FAUCET FOR FROZEN CARBONATED BEVERAGE
MACHINE
Omar S. Knedlik, Coffeyville, Kans., assignor to The Penmont
Company, Baton Rouge, La.
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,290
Int. C1.3 F16K il/l4i, 31/122
U.S. a. 251—14 7 Claims
1. A faucet for a frozen carbonated beverage machine which
has an outlet conduit communicated in use to a supply of
frozen carbonated beverage at an elevated, superatmospheric
pressure,
said faucet comprising:
a barrel having means providing a longitudinal bore extending
between two opposite ends thereof;
means providing an inlet port for said bore, communicating
laterally through said barrel intermediate the ends thereof
between the exterior of the barrel and said longitudinal bore;
means provided on said barrel and associated with said inlet
port for connecting said inlet port to a said frozen carbon-
ated beverage machine outlet conduit;
a piston/core assembly slidingly received in said longitudinal
bore;
means providing an outlet port passageway in said piston/core
assembly, including a laterally opening entrance disposed
intermediate the axial extent of said assembly and an outlet
spout located at one end of said piston/core assembly and
communicating outwardly through one end of said barrel
longitudinal bore;
means at the opposite end of said piston/core assembly defin-
ing a piston portion thereof;
keying means provided between the piston/core assembly and
the barrel for maintaining the piston/core assembly so angu-
larly oriented relative to the barrel that by axial movement
of the piston/core assembly relative to the barrel, the outlet
port passageway entrance may be brought into and out of
communication with said inlet port in order to dispense and
terminate dispensing of frozen carbonated beverage from the
frozen carbonated beverage machine through the spout;
discrete means annularly slidingly sealing between the piston
portion and the cylindrical cavity means of the barrel longi-
tudinal bore, between the piston/core assembly and the
barrel longitudinal bore while the outlet port passageway
entrance is out of communication with the inlet port, at three
levels: a first between the outlet port passageway entrance
and said keying means, a second between said outlet port
passageway entrance and said inlet port and a third between
said inlet port and said one end of said barrel;
said keying means being further constructed and arranged to
limit said axial movement in both directions between two
extremes, at one of which said outlet port passageway en-
trance is communicated to said inlet port and at the other of
which said outlet port passageway entrance is out of com-
munication with said inlet port;
a cap removably closing the opposite end of said barrel longi-
tudinal bore;
surface means in said barrel longitudinal bore adjacent said cap
defining a cylinder cavity in the barrel;
said piston portion of said piston/core assembly being slidingly
disposed in said cylinder;
said piston portion dividing said cylinder cavity into two
chambers on axially opposite sides of said piston portion;
compression coil spring means effectively disposed axially
between the barrel and the piston in one of said chambers for
tending to axially move the piston/core assembly in a sense
to bring the outlet port passageway entrance out of commu-
nication with the inlet port;
fluid pressure source conduit means communicated to the
other one of said chambers, so that fluid pressure may be
admitted to that chamber for axially moving the piston/core
assembly in a sense to bring the outlet port passageway
entrance into communication with the inlet port;
a valve interposed in said fluid pressure source conduit means,
said valve including an exhaust port for venting pressure
from said other chamber and being movable between two
positions for selectively either communicating said other
chamber to fluid pressure in one of said positions or venting
said other chamber in the other of said positions;
said piston/core assembly including means for axially adjust-
ably positioning said piston portion along the piston/core
assembly correspondingly varying the volume of said other
chamber and thus the amount that the piston/core assembly
must be axially moved in order to bring the outlet port
894
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
passageway entrance into and out of communication with
said inlet port.
4,381,100
VALVE AND VALVING APPARATUS
John Schoenberg, Redondo Beach, Calif., assignor to Fairchild
Industries, Inc., Germantown, Md.
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,147
Int. a.' F16K 3/00. 25/00
U.S. a. 251—368 3 Qaims
Sb OSStfci POS t.or-
I
end thereof movably secured to the rectangular frame
means and movably secured to one of the plurality of
first lower arm means;
a plurality of first upper arm means, each having one end
thereof movably secured to the other end of one of the
plurality of second lower arm means;
a plurality of second upper arm means, each having one
end thereof movably secured to the other end of one of
the plurality of the first lower arm means;
table means having frame means and top means having a
plurality of apertures therein, each of the plurality of
second upper arms means having the other end thereof
movably secured to the frame means of the table means
and each of the plurality of the first upper arm means
having the other end thereof movably secured to the
rectangular frame means of the table means;
hydraulic cylinder means having one end thereof secured
to the plurality of first lower arm means and the other
end thereof secured to the plurality of first upper arm
means;
pump means mounted on the rectangular frame means for
supplying fiuid under pressure to the hydraulic cylinder
means;
1. Apparatus for valving comprising a valve seat member
having a circular valve seat having a generally circular fiat
bottom wall and a generally cylindrical side wall located im-
mediately adjacent to the bottom wall, a valve closure member
having a generally circular outer portion, and a noble metal
coating covering at least a portion of the circular outer portion
of said vjfve closure member, said generally circular outer
portion having means for trapping a portion of said noble metal
coating so that said trapped noble metal is plastically deformed
to form a seal and is substantially void free as said valve closure
member is moved to its seated position comprising two circular
projections located on the generally circular outer portion of
said valve closure member and a substantially smooth surface
located between said circular projections, one of said projec-
tions being located to contact the side wall of said valve seat
and the other projection being located to contact the bottom
wall of said valve seat in order that said portion of the noble
metal coating is plastically deformed and trapped between said
projections and the side and bottom wall of said valve seat
when said valve closure member is in its seated position, said
generally circular outer portion of said valve closure member
having an outer surface located at substantially a right angle to
the smooth surface located between said circular projections
and locatable adjacent to the bottom wall of said valve seat
when said valve closure member is in its seated position.
4,381,101
DRAFT GEAR REMOVAL APPARATUS
Sam W. Herrin, Arlington, Tex., assignor to Halliburton Com-
pany, Duncan, Okla.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,947
Int. a.' B60P 1/48
U.S. a. 254—9 R 11 Qaims
1. A draft gear removal apparatus for the removal of draft
gear from the center sill of a railcar, wherem the draft gear
removal apparatus comprises:
lifting apparatus means comprising:
rectangular frame means;
wheel means secured to the rectangular frame means
about the periphery thereof and having a portion
thereof extending above the rectangular frame means;
a plurality of first lower arm means, each having one end
thereof movably secured to the rectangular frame
means;
a plurality of second lower arm means, each having one
:,^-^^ .
I i ) loe
^W"~^
•■• ». ^/ J, ■■■
motor means mounted on the rectangular frame means for
driving the pump means;
handle means movably secured to the rectangular frame
means;
flow control means to control the How of fiuid to the
hydraulic cylinder means from the pump means; and
over-center valve means disposed between the pump
means and hydraulic cylinder means; and
draft gear compression apparatus comprising:
U-shaped frame means having a center portion, first arm
portion connected to one end of the center portion,
second arm portion connected to the other end of the
center portion having aperture means therein and a
plurality of feet means secured to the center portion,
each having a pin means projecting therefrom which
mates with an aperture of the plurality of apertures in
the top of the table means;
draft gear compression cylinder means detachably se-
cured to the second arm portion of the U-shaped frame
means; and
hinged center sill press means movable on the center
portion of the U-shaped frame means and having hy-
draulic cylinder means mounted thereon.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
895
4,381,102
SHROUD SUPPORT AND METHOD FOR SHROUD
ENGAGEMENT WITH TEEMING VALVE
Patrick D. King, Rantoul, III., assignor to Flo-Con Systems, Inc.,
Giampaign, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 89,577, Oct. 29, 1979, Pat. No.
4,313,596. This application Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,429
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 2, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' C21C 7/10: B22D 37/00
U.S. a. 266—44 V 5 Qaims
4,381,103
STRAIGHT EDGE GUIDE
Irwin J. Ferdinand, Glencoe; Richard Sylvan, Glenriew, and
Michael Peterson, Evanston, all of III., assignors to Hirsh
Company, Skokie, III.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,981
Int. a.' B27B 9/04
U.S. a. 269—1 1 Oaim
' ^
1. A shroud support for use with a bottom pour vessel hav-
ing a sliding gate valve and pour nozzle comprising, in combi-
nation:
a fixed boom,
means for pivotally securing the fixed boom to a boom
support assembly,
a trolley for sliding engagement along the fixed boom,
a secondary boom secured to said trolley,
a collar at the unsupported end of the secondary boom for
the mounting of the shroud,
means for pivotally securing the mounted shroud at the end
of the trolley boom with selective fixed non-pivotal align-
ment coaxial with the teeming opening in the vessel which
the shroud engages,
a boom support for said fixed boom,
means for pivotally mounting the fixed boom for rotation
about the support, and mounting means for the same
permitting raising and lowering of the fixed boom,
dead weight means provided in the boom support for con-
stantly urging the entire fixed boom, trolley and second-
ary boom assembly along with the shroud upwardly at a
predetermined load,
means for opposing the dead weight raising of the boom to
thereby lower the same,
and means for pivotally moving the shroud from its normal
coaxially aligned relationship with the nozzle of the pour
vessel for removal or replacement of the shroud.
5. The method of fixing a shroud in pouring relationship
with the lower portion of a gate valve comprising the steps of:
securing the shroud by means of a cantilever support for
positioning underneath the vessel,
securing mounting the shroud in a non-pivotal relationship
with the end of the cantilever support and locking the
same in coaxial pouring relationship with the valve,
urging the shroud upper portion against the teeming valve
by means of dead weights which are empirically deter-
mined to exert, above and beyond the tare weight of the
shroud, a predetermined interfacial force between the
shroud and the valve,
moving the mounted shroud in and out of engagement with
the pouring valve for translation along an X axis, Y axis,
and Z axis,
and telescoping said cantilever support between a fixed
element and a movable element slidable on said fixed
element.
1. An assembly presenting a straight edge with means for
being secured to a work piece, the assembly comprising:
(a) a rail defining a straight edge and a clamping channel
with a pair of opposed lips extending inwardly over the
channel and defining therebetween a slot, the rail adapted
to be positioned on a workpiece with the channel opening
toward the workpiece and extending on either end of the
rail beyond the workpiece;
(b) a clamp body adapted to be positioned at each end of the
workpiece and mounted on the rail, each clamp body
having a main body portion and a cantilevered body
portion at one end of the main body portion extending
laterally from the main body portion, the cantilevered
body portion defining a first retaining cage for receiving
and retaining a first nut therein, said clamp main body
portion defining a second retaining cage for receiving and
retaining a second nut therein:
(c) connector means for attaching the clamp body to the rail,
the connector means having a threaded stem earned by
the main body portion and a cross member attached to the
stem, the cross member being received in the channel and
extending across the slot for being retained by the lips of
the channel with the stem extending through the slot;
(d) a first nut retained against rotation in the first retaining
cage in the cantilevered body portion;
(e) a second nut retained against rotation in the second
retaining cage and threadingly engaged with said connec-
tor means stem; and
(0 a clamp adjuster means for engaging the workpiece, the
adjuster means including a threaded rod having a first end
and a second end, said rod being threadingly engaged with
the first nut within the first retaining cage and extending
therefrom in the opposite direction at said second end
whereby the threaded rod may be rotated relative to the
first nut to cause the threaded rod first end to move
toward the rail to thereby clamp the workpiece between
the rod first end and the rail.
4,381,104
STRINGER CLAMP
Arnold Nelsen, Kirkland, Wash., assignor to The Boeing Com-
pany, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,349
Int. a.^ B25B 1/20
U.S. a. 269—43 4 Claims
1. In an airplane wing panel jig including a plurality of
headers, an improved clamp for clamping stringers to said
headers comprising:
a clamp base and means for mounting said base to a header,
locator means having a rotational axis, a first clamping sur-
S'Jp
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
/ April 26. 1983
face oriented substantially parallel to said rotational axis
thereof, and a second convexly arcuate clamping surface,
said second clamping surface being a locus of lines gener-
ally perpendicular to said first clamping surface,
mounting means for mounting said locator means on said
clamp base for rotational movement about said rotational
axis, and
a J-shaped member having a shank terminating in a first end
and having a curved portion terminating in a second end,
said shank being mounted in said clamp base for rotational
and sliding movement about the longitudinal axis of said
shank, said J-shaped member being mounted and con-
structed so that said second end is selectively positionable
adjacent the intersection of said first and second clamping
surfaces.
4,381,105
CLAMP
Otis W. Goff, Kalamazoo, and Melvin J. Goff, Wyoming, both of
Mich., assignors to Gordon W. Hueschen, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Filed May 8, 1980, Ser. No. 147,931
Int. CI.' B25B 1/02
U.S. a. 269—210 2 Claims
:4^-^
'4S<i -3«a
34^ V^<
m-i
^48
1. In a clamp in which a clamping arm which has a clamping
face on one side thereof is slidable on a fiat bar having wide
parallel sides and narrow parallel edges, the combination for
releasably affixing said arm to said bar, in which said arm
comprises parallel plates spaced apart sufficiently to closely
but slidably engage the sides of said bar with the ends thereof
extending beyond the bottom edge of said bar and having
a first transverse spacing pin adjacent one side of said arm
adapted to rest on one narrow edge of said bar;
a second transverse spacing pin adjacent the other side of
said arm and adapted to engage said other narrow edge of
said bar;
cam lock means adapted to engage said other narrow edge of.
said bar directly opposite said first transverse spacing pin;
and,
actuating means for actuating said cam lock means to and
from locking position, in which locking position said bar is
jammed between said first transverse spacing pin and said
cam lock means independently of said clamping face, in
which at least the other of said narrow edges has serried
detents therein which are complementary to the second
transverse pin adapted to engage that edge and in which
said cam lock means comprises a flat surface adapted to
abut said other narrow edge and having a longitudinal
span greater than that of any of said serried detents.
4,381,106
COLLECT CYLINDER FOR A ROTARY FOLDER
Michael H. Loebach, Red Lion, Pa., assignor to Motter Printing
Press Co.. York, Pa.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,407
Int. CI.' B42C 1/04
U.S. CI. 270-47 6 Claims
1. In a folder collect cylinder having a multiplicity of gripper
mechanisms spaced equidistant apart circumferentially and
each having a multiplicity of gripper fingers actuated by a
gripper cam follower to open and close selectively to grip
products delivered to the cylinder, a non-rotating gripper cam
having arcuate holding surfaces of a radius "R" adapted to
engage the gripper cam followers and maintain the gripper
mechanisms in product-holding positions except at a taking
zone and a releasing zone and having a taking surface adapted
to control through the gripper cam followers the movements
of the gripper mechanisms to open positions to take products at
the taking zone and a releasing surface adapted to control
through the gripper cam followers the movements of the grip-
per mechanisms to open positions to release gripped products
at the releasing zone, a number of tucking mechanisms equal to
the number of gripper mechanisms spaced equidistant apart
circumferentially each having a tucker blade actuated by a
tucker cam follower and adapted to tuck products selectively
into jaws on a jaw cylinder at a selected tucking location, a
non-rotating tucking cam having a retracting surface of a
radius "X" adapted to maintan through the tucker cam follow-
ers the tucking mechanisms in a retracted mode except at the
tucking location and having a tucking surface adapted to con-
trol through the tucker cam followers the extension of the
tucker mechanisms to tuck products into jaws of the jaw cylin-
der at the tucking location, and a multiplicity of tapes wrap-
ping a zone of the cylinder path traversed by the surface of the
cylinder between the location where the products first meet
the cylinder and a location proximate to the tucking position
and adapted to hold the products on the collect cylinder be-
tween said locations, the improvement comprising a gripper
masking cam mounted for rotation about an axis coincident
with the axis of rotation of the collect cylinder and having a
multiplicity of circumferentially spaced-apart arcuate masking
surfaces of the same radius "R" as the holdinbg cam surfaces of
the non-rotating gripper cam that are selectively engageable
with a second gripper cam follower on each gripper mecha-
nism, drive means for rotating the masking cam at a speed that
is different from but is a function of the speed of rotation of the
collect cylinder such that the second gripper cam followers of
selected gripper mechanisms may selectively traverse one of
the masking surfaces and remain radially stationary throughout
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
897
the releasing zone and thereby carry products past the tucking
location and means for setting the circumferential position of
the masking cam at a predetermined location relative to the
circumferential positions of the gripper mechanisms and
thereby establish a predetermined selected relationship be-
tween the masking cam phase and the gripper cam phase with
reference to the gripper mechanisms for selection of at least
non-collect and multiple collect without ever maskmg the
taking surface of the non-rotating gripper cam during a takmg
phase of any gripper mechanism.
4,381,107
CUTTING AND COLLATING METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR TICKETS
John W. Armiger, 4110 W. Puget Ave., Phoenix, Ariz. 85021,
assignor to John W. Armiger, Phoenix, Ariz.
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,019
Int. CI.' B65H 39/06
U.S. CI. 270—58 23 Claims
1. Apparatus for cutting parts from a preprinted strip of
paper stock and collating the parts in a specific sequential
order comprising:
a track for guiding the strip of paper stock preprinted with a
sequence of pairs of specifically identified parts arranged
two abreast along a given path,
means for moving the strip along said path at a given speed,
cutter means for simultaneously separating each pair of the
parts from the strip when the strip reaches a given area on
said track,
a camming surface for receiving the separated two abreast
parts of each pair of the two abreast parts,
a collecting means for receiving the parts, and
means for sequentially moving a common one of each pair of
the separated two abreast parts laterally of said path along
said camming surface in a substantially vertical orientation
to said collecting means,
said camming surface guiding the other part of each pair of
said two abreast parts downstream of the laterally dis-
placed one of the parts of each pair to said collecting
means in a properly sequenced stacked configuration.
16. A method of cutting tickets from a strip of paper stock
and collating the tickets in a specific order comprising the steps
of:
feeding a strip of preprinted ticket paper stock having pairs
of tickets printed in two abreast arrangements laterally
across the strip through a cutting means,
feeding the separated two abreast pairs of tickets to a cam-
ming surface,
sequentially moving a common one of each pair of said two
abreast tickets laterally along said camming surface in a
substantially vertical orientation to a collecting means,
guiding the other of each pair of said two abreast tickets
over said camming surface downstream of the laterally
displaced one of said tickets of each pair to said collecting
means in a specific stacked configuration.
4,381,108
DEVICE FOR ALIGNING SIGNATURES FED IN
SHINGLED RELATION
John R. Newsome, R.R. #1, Box 58A, Shumway, III. 62461
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,403
Int. CI.' B65H 29/66. 31/38
U.S. CI. 271—198 27 Qaims
jC-^
'&l^-^
i^-'i^i
O.^,
... ,.':;.latnj .i°t:
> 1-' ' ^ u —
^,1^ /V-'i, . ^_
yTri'
\-^ Sr- ^
27. In a device for aligning signatures fed in shingled relation
prior to stacking them, which includes a frame, a horizontal
delivery belt supported on the frame and carrying a stream of
signatures in shingled relation, driving means for driving the
belt for transportion of the signatures, a pair of upstanding
guide members straddling the delivery belt and presenting
opposed faces thereto, at least one of the guide members being
in the form of a guide belt, the guide belt having an upstream
sheave and a downstream sheave mounted in the frame on
vertical shafts and coupled to the driving means for driving of
the guide belt at the same speed as the delivery belt, the guide
belt being convergently arranged with the downstream sheave
thereof defining a discharge opening having the desired width
of the stream in the aligned state, the upstream sheave being
offset laterally with respect to the downstream sheave to de-
fine a funnel-like entryway adequate to accommodate entry of
the stream in non-aligned condition with individual signatures
irregularly displaced from the stream, and pulsating shifter
means behind the presented face of the belt and coupled to thd
driving means for repetitively moving said face from a substan-
tially planar reference position to a thrown position in which
the belt is angularly bowed toward the stream thereby dividing
the face into a convergent upstream portion and a downstream
portion, the throw of the shifter means being such that the
downstream portion in its thrown position is substantially
parallel to the direction of movement of the stream for jogging
the presented edge of the stream to insure a condition of align-
ment as the stream moves through the discharge opening
4,381,109
CONDUCTIVE BALL
Henry Von Kohorn, 22 Perkins Rd., Greenwich, Conn. 06830
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,219
Int. a.3 A63B 61/00
U.S. a. 273—61 R 16 Qaims
15. A ball for use in ball game indicating systems comprising
spaced electric ground leads forming part of a circuit intended
to be closed by an impacting ball have electrically conductive
surface means, such ball having requisite electric conductivity
and high visibility in flight, wherein
a. at least 75% of the playing surface of the ball is light-col-
ored, and
b. electrically conductive means forming spaced electric
leads have been provided on not more than 25% of the
playing surface of the ball, said electric means
i. comprising dark-colored, electrically conductive mate-
rial,
898
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
II. having a denned shape and a width of at least 2 millime-
ters,
Ml extending on essentially only the playing surface of the
ball.
IV. not being electrically connected substantially below
the playmg surface of the ball.
V being spaced so that on the playing surface of the ball
no lead is separated from the ne.xt nearest lead by more
than 20 millimeters, and
VI the electrically conductive means forming said leads
having overall dimensions so that any one of said means
on the playing surface of the ball will connect two
ground leads upon contact of the partially flattened ball
with the ground.
lower horizontal flexible net attached to and extending
across the space between the two lower horizontal legs,
a vertical flexible net for each rectangular section attached
to and extending across the space defined by the two
horizontal legs and the two vertical legs of each rectangu-
lar section.
a vertical flexible fabric sheet fixed to the upper and lower
nets and to the two vertical side nets, said fabric sheet
being located intermediately between the front and rear
legs of the rectangular sections so as to present an impact
area for a driven golf ball, and
means defining a removable connection for said means defin-
ing rods whereby said means defining rods are removably
attached to said horizontal legs permitting the frame to be
folded with the two rectangular sections disposed adja-
cent each other.
4,381,111
GOLF SWING SIMULATOR DEVICE
Ralph H. A. Richards, 20 Homestead Gardens, Frenchay, Bris-
tol, BS16 IPH, England
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,174
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 6, 1980,
8025584
Int. CI.' A63B 69/36
U.S. CI. 273—191 R 7 Claims
4,381,110
GOLF TRAINER DEVICE
Anton Baiaz, Altmiinster, Austria, assignor to Plaspack Kunstst-
off GmbH & Co., KG, Schwanenstadt, Austria
Filed Sep. 29. 1981, Ser. No. 306,657
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 26,
1981, 8124914[U]
Int. CI.' A63B 69/36
U.S. CI. 273—182 R 5 Claims
1. A golf trainer device comprising
a frame having first and second generally rectangular sec-
tions made of tubing,
each rectangular section having front and rear spaced verti-
cal legs and upper and lower spaced horizontal legs,
means defining plugs interposed between adjacent ends of
each vertical leg and each horizontal leg permitting each
rectangular section to be folded relative to each other,
means defining transverse pins connecting the rear vertical
legs in close proximity to each other,
means defining rods attaching the upper horizontal legs to
each other and the lower horizontal legs to each other at
a horizontal distance greater than the rear vertical legs are
to each other whereby the frame defines a generally
wedge configuration,
an upper horizontal flexible net attached to and extending
across the space between the two upper horizontal legs, a
1. An improved golf swing simulator device of the kind
which comprises a handle or mounting for a handle represent-
ing that of a golf club, attachment means for mounting the
device to a stationary support, and a linkage connecting the
handle with the attachment means, the linkage comprising an
arm pivotally mounted at one end to the attachment means
about a first axis, the arm extending away from said axis so that
on pivoting the other end of the arm describes a circle about
said first pivot axis, a crank one end of which is connected with
said other end of the arm through a pivotal connection having
a second axis of rotation spaced from said first axis, and the
other end of which is rotatably mounted to the handle about
the longitudinal axis of the handle so that the handle projecting
from the crank is spaced from said pivotal connection in line
with said second axis, means for adjusting the efl'ective length
of the arm, means for adjustment of the angle that said first
pivot axis makes with the horizontal, and means whereby the
angle between said first and second axes can be adjusted;
wherein the improvement is characterised in that the means
whereby the angle between said first and second axes can be
adjusted is adapted to act about a centre which is in the region
of the handle.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
899
4,381,112
GAME APPARATUS
Stanley T. Dupuy, 79 Marie Dr., Gretna, La. 70053
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,439
Int. a.3 A63F 3/00: G09F 9/00
U.S. a. 273—239 11 Qaims
7. Game apparatus for playing a game comprising:
a game board wh-'-Vi includes a first game playing face on
one side and a second game playing face on an opposite
side of said game board;
each of said first and second game playing faces having a
plurality of windows arranged in a designed array accord-
ing to which the game is played;
a plurality of game playing pieces;
individualized compartment means formed between said
first and second faces of said game board for maintaining
a pair of said playing pieces in captive form and retaining
said pieces during playing in either a concealed or an
exposed window position before one of said windows;
said pair of playing pieces being both concealed on a com-
mon side of said compartment means in said first position;
stop means carried by and separating adjacent compartment
means for limiting the position of each said playing piece
in each said compartment means between first and second
limit positions therein;
said playing pieces being exposed before one of said win-
dows in said second position and being normally con-
cealed when in said first position;
said playing pieces including a first playing piece having a
first color code and a second playing piece having a sec-
ond color code different from said first color code, said
pair consisting of one each of said playing pieces carried in
each said compartment means;
means for manually moving said first and second pieces
between said first and second positions from outside said
compartment means and playing faces to fill a preselected
window so as to establish a desired pattern of color coded
windows in said design array to accomplish a winning
pattern on said playing faces.
4,381,113
GAMEBOARD AND CARRYING CASE
Charles R. Simons, 307 Kensington, Ferndale, Mich. 48220
Continuation of Ser. No. 952,311, Oct. 18, 1978, Pat. No.
4,252,324, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 674,986,
Apr. 8, 1976, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 748,820, Dec. 9, 1976, abandoned. This application Feb. 23,
1981, Ser. No. 236,720
Int. a.3 A63F 3/02
U.S. a. 273—286 6 Qaims
1. In combination, a carrying case, a gameboard, a pair of die
tossing cups, play pieces and a game pack for storing the play
pieces,
said gameboard comprising a sheet of pliable material of
uniform thickness having a first and a second pair of
opposed right-angularly arranged margin edges spaced
from one another a first and a second predetermined
distance respectively, and each edge being of said uniform
thickness, said gameboard being rolled into a roll and
defining a bore of generally circular cross section through
its length, said length being of a length equal to said first
predetermined distance;
said pair of die tossing cups comprising a first and second
end cap, said first end cap and said second end cap each
having an open end and including a closed circular end
wall and a cylindrical axially extending side wall of circu-
lar cross section of a predetermined inner diameter sub-
stantially equal to the diameter of said gameboard when
rolled and each of said end caps including said side walls
and end walls being of a common predetermined outer
diameter, and each of said end caps being positioned on
the ends of said rolled gameboard with the end wall of
each cap being in abutting engagement with one of the
margins of said gameboard along said second pair of op-
posed edges and captivated within said end caps and
within said axially extending side walls of said end caps,
each of said end caps being of an axial length substantially
less than one-half the distance between said second pair of
opposed edges; and
said carrying case comprising a longitudinally-extending
tubular container of circular cross-section of an inner
diameter substantially equal to but slightly greater than
the outer diameter of the cylindrical side walls and end
-Ei^.
i-^
^':(lL
walls of the end caps, said case having a closed end and an
open end, and said gameboard and end caps being in said
container, said container snugly jacketing said gameboard
and end caps, said container being of an axial length sub-
stantially equal to but slightly greater than the first prede-
termined length of said gameboard and the thickness of
the end walls of said first and second end caps and said
container having an outer uniform diameter said container
being comprised of a formed sheet of pliable material of
uniform thickness;
cap means for said open end of said tubular container, said
cap means comprising a cup-shaped member of a diameter
substantially equal to said outer diameter of said container
and having an axially extending skirt sired to and snugly
jacketing said container adjacent said open end and clos-
ing said open end of said container; and
said game pack comprising tubular container means being a
rigid plastic sleeve of a generally uniform diameter and
being of circular configuration throughout its axial length
and, said game pack being sized, configured and nested
within said bore and said game pack being of an overall
axial length less than the axial length of said bore, and all
of said play pieces being of non-interlocking configuration
sized such that clearance exists between the nested game
pieces and the tubular container thereby allowing said
game pieces to move axially within said tubular container,
the game pieces not being placed over a central mandrel
and nested within said container means. —
900
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,114
PACKOFF AND SEAL RING ASSEMBLY WITH
INJECTED PLASTIC PACKING
Delbert E. Vanderford, Jr., Houston, Tex., assignor to Cameron
Iron Works, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,125
Int. a.^ F16J 15/46; F16L 17/02
U.S. a. 277—34.6 28 Qaims
/^, ' <j '«
tec!
1. A packoff for sealing an annulus around a tubular member
comprising
an outer member having an annular recess on its inner sur-
face,
a seal ring assembly in the recess including a resilient ring
having inner and outer surfaces and end surfaces and a
pair of metal seal rings on said end surfaces with flanges
extending on said inner surface, and
means on the outer member for injecting plastic packing into
said recess,
said injecting means pressurizing the seal ring assembly in
said recess sufficiently to ensure sealing engagement of
said metal seal rings with said tubular member.
4,381,115
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
Yoshimasa Ko, Hiroshima, Japan, assignor to Nishikawa Rub-
ber Co., Ltd., Hiroshima, Japan
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,152
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980,
55/43733[U]; Nov. 27, 1980, 55/171781[U]
Int. aj E06B 7/23
U.S. a. 277—207 R 3 Qaims
1. A weather-strip for an automobile door comjrosed of an
elastic rubber-like material and of a uniform cross sectional
shape throughout its length and adapted to be mounted on an
edge of the door and closely contact with a body of the auto-
mobile when the door is closed, said body having a first section
parallel to the plane of the door opening and a second section
generally perpendicular to said first section, said weather-strip
comprising:
a base section adapted to be mounted on the edge of the
door; and
a hollow seal section integrally formed with said base sec-
tion;
said hollow seal section comprising:
a first wall projecting from said base section and having a
sealing surface formed thereon;
a protrusion continually and integrally formed with said first
wall, said protrusion having a sealing surface formed
thereon;
a second wall projecting from said base section; and
a mountain-shaped top wall integrally formed with said first
and second walls, said top wall having a ridge formed
therein, said hollow seal section having first, second and
third bends between said first wall and said top wall, said
second wall and said top wall, and at the ridge of said top
wall, respectively; wherein said seal section is adapted to
collapse when the door is closed in such a way that the
sealing surfaces of said first wall and said protrusion are
brought into a press contact with the first section of said
body and the ridge of said top wall is brought into a press
contact with the second section of said body.
4,381,116
FUTTER CHUCK
Friedrich P. Futter, 8250 Via Paseo del Norte, Apt. D-206,
Scottsdale, Ariz. 85258
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 36,501, May 7, 1979, Pat. No.
4,284,285. This application Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,304
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 8, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ B23B 31/08. 31/19
U.S. a. 279-62 1 Qaim
1. In a chuck for releasably holding an object such as a tool
or work piece, including
circumferentially spaced jaws for grasping said object which
are
movable radially outwardly to an open position to permit
insertion of said object therebetween, and
adapted to move radially inwardly to an object-grasping
position,
and
means for adjusting the radial position of said jaws to grasp
objects of varying size,
the improvements comprising:
(a) inclined key threads on said jaws;
(b) a rotatable jaw-positioning collar around said jaws, in-
cluding inclined, inwardly extending, circumferentially
spaced key threads adapted to cooperatively engage and
disengage the key threads on said jaws, which collar
(i) urges said jaws axially outwardly and radially inwardly
to said object-grasping position when said collar is
rotated to engage said key threads, and
(ii) permits free axial and radial movement of said jaws to
said open position when said collar is rotated to disen-
gage said key threads;
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
901
(c) collar rotating means positioned around said collar for
engaging and rotating said collar to engage and disengage
said key threads; and
(d) means for normally yieldably urging said jaws axially
outwardly and radially inwardly when said key threads
are disengaged.
4,381,117
BICYCLE TOTE CART
David J. French, and Wayne L. Hirsch, both of Loveland, Colo.,
assignors to French-Hirsch, Inc., Loveland, Colo.
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 177,082
int. CI.' B60D 1/06
U.S. a. 280—204 1 Claim
second towing means adapted for connection to a second
wheeled farm implement provided with a tongue portion; said
first towing means including a forwardly extending tongue
portion pivotally mounted at its rearward end to a frame por-
tion of said first farm implement and havmg a hitching means
on its front portion pivotally connected to a hitch member on
said towing vehicle, said forwardly extendmg tongue portion
being movable between at least a first and second releasably
locked towing position; said second towing means mounted to
a rear portion of said first implement and including a tow bar
pivotally connected at one end to a support frame means
mounted on said first implement and provided with a hitching
means connected at its opposite end to the tongue portion
1. In combination, with a towing bicycle having a frame, a
seat thereon, and a pivot ball with a reduced neck secured
rearwardly from the frame or the seat post thereof, and a
towed plural wheeled vehicle cart having a tow bar tongue,
the combination therewith of a connector device, for attach-
ment connection to and between said bicycle pivot ball and
said tow bar of the towed cart, comprising, a shaft having a
socket formed on the periphery and inwardly radially thereof
adapted to receive said bicycle pivot ball therein for permitting
said socket and ball to pivot with relation to each other, a
sleeve member slidably on said shaft and having a notch
formed at one of its peripheral ends and adapted to fit over the
neck of the pivot ball for holding the ball pivotally in the shaft
socket when the ball is inserted in the socket and when said
sleeve is then slidably so positioned on the shaft with its notch
over the ball neck, a peripheral groove formed externally on
the shaft remote from the socket, a cotter spring tension ring
member means removably positioned in the said shaft groove
for a holding of the sleeve slidably over the shaft in pivot ball
neck holding position, the shaft having an internally screw
threaded opening formed at one of its ends longitudinally
centrally thereof, an elongated stud headed screw bolt adapted
to be screw inserted and held within the shaft threaded open-
ing in longitudinal extension thereof, a slidable collar on said
stud screw bolt, a spiral normally expandable tension spring on
the stud screw bolt and positioned thereon and extending
between said slidable collar on the bolt and the bolt head for
normally spring tension resisting any sliding movement of the
collar on that bolt toward said bolt head, said slidable collar on
said bolt being slidably abutting the end of the shaft to which
the bolt is secured and having a radial peripheral internal screw
threaded opening formed therein, and bolt screw securement
means on the tongue adapted for cooperating with said radial
threaded opening of the collar for thereby removably securing
the tongue to the slidable collar on the bolt.
provided on said second farm implement, said tow bar and said
support frame means being pivotally movable between a first
and second releasably locked towing position responsive to the
towing position of said tongue portion of said first towing
means; said first towing position defining a single file relation-
ship between the towed farm implements and said second
towing position defining an offset relationship between said
towed farm implements, the position of said hitch connection
between said tongue portion of said first towing means and said
towing vehicle being disposed substantially equidistant be-
tween the opposing outermost wheel of said first and second
farm implement in either said first or second towing position to
provide a substantially equal draft force upon said towed farm
implements.
4,381,119
MULTIPART CONTINUOUS FORM
Lawrence J. Vosh, Glen Falls, N.Y., and Kenneth R. D'Angeio,
Ellington, Conn., assignors to Burroughs Corporation, De-
troit, Mich.
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,295
Int. aj B41L J/20. 1/32
U.S. a. 282—11.5 A 5 Oaims
4,381,118
MULTI-HITCH APPARATUS FOR TANDEM TOWING
OF FARM IMPLEMENTS
Harry D. Weeks, 7225 Kile Rd., Plain City, Ohio 43064
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,983
Int. a.3 B60D 7/000
U.S. a. 280—412 6 Qaims
1. A multi-hitch arrangement for connecting a plurality of
wheeled farm implements in a plurality of predetermined posi-
tions behind a towing vehicle comprising, in combination, a
first wheeled farm implement provided with a first towing
means adapted for connection to said towing vehicle and a
M
.20
^&=:
rP^22
24
1. A multilayer continuous form comprising:
a first outer ply formed from a continuous web;
a plurality of inner plies consisting of continuous webs all
located in vertical alignment with said first outer ply;
a second outer ply formed from a continuous web and lo-
^02
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
cait-d in vertical alignment with said inner plies and oppo-
Mtfly placed from said first outer ply;
a plurality of locking tabs cut near the edge of each of said
inner plies, located such that said locking tabs run in a row
and are in vertical alignment, and such that said locking
tabs can be flapped open exposing an opening of like
dimension;
an adhesive strip running along the inner side of said first
outer ply and in alignment with said locking tabs; and,
a plurality of connecting tabs cut near the edge of said sec-
ond outer ply. being like dimensioned and vertically
aligned with said locking tabs and oriented such that the
forward edges of said connecting tabs point in the oppo-
site direction to the forward edges of said locking tabs,
said connecting tabs inserted through said locking tab
openings, the ends of said locking tabs locking said con-
necting tabs in place, each said locking tab coplanar with
Us respective inner ply. the end of each said connecting
tab being bent to be coplanar with said first outer ply and
being affixed to the bottom of said first outer ply by means
of said adhesive strip, assuring that said first oute.- ply.
second outer ply. and inner plies are held in secure align-
ment
4,381,121
HUMAN REPRODUCTION INDEXING DEVICE
John P. Hanley, 625 Ivy Ct., Kenilworth, III, 60043
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,698
Int. CK' B42D 15/02
U.S. CI. 283-1 A 3 Claims
f ^
X^MK QowQwr Qjuir O^s. Qocr Qofc.
^"V
:-^SaS3SJiS:JSi^.J!»3y3a3ijCia
/s-Qapk QMmQscpr.Qtiov
iB-QrcB.
zo
at
to
1. An indexing device for maximizing the probability of
conception comprises a member having indicia representing
the calendar dates for the days of the months positioned in
three separate calendar columns on the member and indicator-
index columns aligned with and positioned adjacent each of
said calendar columns, said indicator-index columns indicating
the calendar dates for an eight day cycle starting ten days after
the predetermined index date to provide the time interval
during which the probability of conception is maximized.
4,381,120
DESENSITIZATION SYSTEM FOR CARBONLESS COPY
PAPER
Ronald Golden. Mt. Prospect, III., assignor to Champion Inter-
national Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 810,384, Jun. 27, 1977, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 627,060, Oct. 30, 1975,
abandoned. This application Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,509
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 22,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.' 341 M 5/14. 5/16. 5/22
U.S. CI. 282-27.5 14 Claims
1. A manifold record system comprising a first substrate and
4,381,122
SAFETY ATTACHMENT FOR A FRONT VEHICLE
BUMPER
a second substrate, said first substrate having a CB coating James M. Kite, Rockford, III., assignor to Auburn Manufactur-
comprising an encapsulated substantially colorless, chromo-
genic material, said second substrate having a CF coating
comprising an electron-accepting material, said first substrate
being superposed over said second substrate with said CB
coating adjacent said CF coating, said CF coating being par-
tially desensitized over local areas thereof with a desensitizing
agent comprising, in combination, two separate components,
the first component being polyethylene glycol end capped by
alkoxy groups containing from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and the
second component having the formula
A ~C
\ /
N— X— N
/ \
B D
'wherein X is an alkylene radical of the formula — CH2CH2—
|or — CH2CH2CH2— , and A, B, C, and D are selected from the
group consisting of:
hydrogen,
an aliphatic group,
a cycloaliphatic group,
CH2COOH, and
-CH2COOM
where M is the alkali metal ion, sodium, potassium or lith-
ium,
in amounts between about 10 and about 0.5 parts by weight
of said first component per part by weight of said second
component.
ing Co., Inc., Rockford, III.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,621
Int. C\? B60R 19/02
U.S. CI. 293—125
11 Claims
7. A vehicle having first and second laterally spaced and
steerable front wheels and having a front bumper spaced for-
wardly from and extending laterally in front of said wheels, the
improvement in said vehicle comprising, first and second pairs
of substantially vertically spaced rollers located in front of and
spaced forwardly from said first and second wheels, respec-
tively, and means mounting said rollers on the rear side of said
bumper for rotation about generally horizontal axes whereby
the rollers will make rolling contact with said wheels if said
vehicle is involved in a moving collision and said bumper is
shoved rearwardly toward said wheels.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
903
4,381,123
PICKUP TRUCK BED SIDEWALL ADAPTOR FOR A
STAKE-FRAME ASSEMBLY
Byron D. Anderson, 9395 Harritt Rd., Sp. 246, lakeside, Calif.
92040
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,828
Int. a.' BMP 7/0(,
U.S, CI. 296—43 8 Claims
1. A pickup truck bed sidewall adapter for a stake-frame
assembly comprising:
a pickup truck sidewall coupling member having a top wall
portion that in its operational position matingly rests on
the horizontal top wall portion of a pickup truck bed
sidewall, said top wall portion having a downwardly
extending inside wall portion that matingly contacts the
inside surface of the upper region of a pickup truck bed
sidewall, said top wall portion also having a downwardly
extending flange portion that matingly contacts the out-
side surface of a flange extending downwardly from the
outer edge of the horizontal top wall portion of a pickup
truck bed sidewall, said downwardly extending flange
having an inwardly extending lip portion connected to its
lower end that functions to grip the bottom edge of the
downwardly extending outside flange of a pickup truck
bed sidewall; and
a substantially vertically oriented telescoping member ex-
tending upwardly from the top surface of said top wall
portion.
providing inlet galleries each in the bed between two recov-
ery galleries near the faces of said recovery wells;
drilling inlet wells from said inlet galleries toward said re-
covery wells such that said mlet and recovery wells alter-
nate m the oil-beanng portions between said mlet and said
recovery galleries to form a uniform network of wells
envelopmg said oil-bearing bed;
delivering a heat-carrier to said bed through said inlet wells,
thereby heating said bed sufficiently to fluidize said oil
therein and displace said oil towards said recovery wells;
and
extractmg said oil from said recovery wells to said recovery
galleries.
4,381,125
HYDRAULICALLY-OPERATED ANTI-SKID VEHICLE
BRAKING SYSTEM WITH PUMP
Alexander J. Wilson, Sutton Coldfield, England, assignor to
Lucas Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,393
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 7, 1980,
8004161
Int. CI.' B60T H/02
U.S. CI. 303— 116 11 Qaims
a, f
4,381,124
METHOD OF MINING AND OIL DEPOSIT
Vladimir G. Verty, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Kosmonavtov, 4, kv.
29; Pavel G. Voronin, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Mira, 4, kv. 6;
Evgeny I. Gurov, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Mira, 2, kv. 3; Vitaly
S. Zubkov, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Mira, 3, kv. 4; Alexandr I.
Obrezkov, poselok Yarega, ulitsa Neftyanikov, 1, kv. 14, all
of, Komi ASSR, Ukhta; Vladimir P. Tabakov, ulitsa Sofii
Kovalevskoi, 4-A, kv. 125, Moscow; Boris B. Khvoschinsky,
poselok Yarega, ulitsa Kosmonavtov, 5, kv. 17, Komi ASSR,
Ukhta, and Vladimir N. Judin, ulitsa Opiesnina, 30, kv. 35,
Komi ASSR, Ukhta, all of U.S.S.R.
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,896
Int. a.3 E21C 41/10
U.S. a. 299—2 12 Claims
m\.
6 I,
1. A method of oil recovery by thermal mining from an oil
deposit wherein a plurality of underground workings and
recovery galleries are provided, comprising:
drilling rows of recovery wells from said recovery galleries;
1. An hydraulically-operated anti-skid braking system for a
vehicle comprising a brake for braking the wheel of the vehi-
cle, a reservoir for hydraulic fluid, a pump for providing a
supply of hydraulic fluid under pressure from said reservoir,
first control means through which hydraulic fluid is delivered
by said pump, an outlet port, said first control means including
a first orifice through which fluid from said pump is passed to
provide a pressure in response to which said brake is adapted
to be applied by means of hydraulic fluid being delivered
through said outlet port, an inlet port, second control means,
and a master cylinder by means of which hydraulic fluid pres-
sure is applied to said second control means through said inlet
port, said second control means controlling operation of said
pump in response to hydraulic fluid pressure applied to said
second control means, wherein said pump is rotatable with
rotation of said wheel to be braked whereby said wheel is
automatically prevented from locking, and wherein said pump
has substantially constant output flow at least throughout a
wheelspeed range above a predetermined minimum.
4,381,126
HYDROSTATIC BEARING WITH ROTATING SLEEVE
Michel P. Drevet, Lyons, France, and Jean Trouillet, Fontaine-
Valmont, Belgium, assignors to Jeumont Schneider Corpora-
tion, Puteaux, France
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,632
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 7, 1980, 80 15046
Int. a.J F16C 32/06
U.S. a. 384—114 6 CUima
1. Hydrostatic bearing with fluid under pressure for a shaft
904
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
rotating at high speed in a fixed bed, unique in that a sleeve is 4,381,128
arranged coaxially to the said shaft in a chamber created for VIBRATION DAMPING TILTING PAD JOURNAL
this purpose between the said bed and the said shaft, with BEARING
John H. Vohr, Schenectady, N.Y„ assignor to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N,Y.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,008
Int. a.^Fl6C 17/03
U.S. a. 384—154 3 Qaims
afjertures supplied with fluid being disposed respectively in the
said shaft and in the said bed. opposite the said sleeve on one
side and the other, in such a way that a movement in rotation
around its axis can be imparted to the said sleeve.
4,381,127
SEALED BEARING
Teunis Visser, Sliedrecht, Netherlands, assignor to IHC Holland
N.V., Papendrecht, Netherlands
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,984
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 18, 1980,
8002280
Int. C[? F16C 33/74
U.S. a. 384—151 8 Qaims
1. A sealed bearing utilizing elastomeric materials such that
at the location of the seal the shaft is provided with a helical
groove cooperating with a stationary cylindrical elastomeric
sleeve having a L-shaped cross section characterized in that
the radial bearing is comprised of a stationary elastomeric bush
and that at the location of the bearing the shaft is provided
with a helical groove the direction of conveyance of which is
the same as or opposite to the direction of conveyance of the
groove in the shaft at the location of the seal and the propulsive
flank of which is at a very small angle with the axis of the shaft
■ind with the tangent to the circumference of the shaft, said
searing being supplied with liquid lubricant.
1.
ing:
A vibration-damping, tilting pad journal bearing compris-
a bearing casing including means for receiving hydraulic
fluid under pressure;
a plurality of tilting pads retained within the casing in an
encompassing relationship to an associated journal, at
least one of said pads being positioned to carry a lesser
load from the joumaal than the other pads of said plurality
of pads, said one pad having a radially outer surface adja-
cent said casing which is in substantial geometrical confor-
mance with said casing to define an interstice between said
outer surface and said casing;
a hydraulic fluid receiving chamber being defined by an
opening in said outer surface and by a hardened bushing
mounted within said opening;
an anti-rotation pin having one end affixed to the casing and
the other end projecting into said bushing to prevent
circumferential dislocation of said one pad, said other*end
further defining an annular space between said bushing
and said pin, and said pin having an axial orifice there-
through which provides for fluid communication between
said receiving means and said chamber; and
said one pad being preloaded against said journal by hydrau-
lic fluid supplied under pressure through said receiving
means and said axial orifice to said chamber and the dis-
charge of said fiuid from said chamber through said annu-
lar space into said interstice, and said interstice limiting a
rapid outflow of hydraulic fluid therefrom to prevent
rapid movement of said one pad such that said journal is
substantially restrained from vibrating.
4,381,129
GROUNDED, MULTI-PIN CONNECTOR FOR
SHIELDED FLAT CABLE
Horst M. Krenz, St. Joseph, Mich., assignor to Zenith Radio
Corporation, Glenview, III.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,634
Int. a.3 HOIR 4/66
U.S. a. 339—14 R 16 Qaims
1. A grounded multi-pin connector mounted in an aperture
in a grounded panel and electrically coupling first and second
sections of a multi-conductor, flat cable wherein said second
section is enclosed in a conductive shield, said connector com-
prising:
a first housing connected to said first cable section, said first
housing including a recessed poriion wherein are located
a plurality of conductive pins in a fixed planar array;
a second housing with a slot therein and having a plurality of
conductive receptacles connected to said second cable
section and arranged in a fixed planar array such that
when said second housing is inserted in the recessed por-
#
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
905
tion of said first housing, electrical connection between
said first and second cable sections is established;
first conductive means having first and second sections;
means for mounting said first conductive means between
said first housing and said panel such that the first section
of said first conductive means is electrically grounded,
. with the second section thereof extending through said
aperture adjacent said first housing; and
second conductive means adapted to be positioned in said
slot and in electrical contact with said shield, said second
conductive means extending in a generally parallel direc-
tion to said second housing and in close proximity thereto
for contacting the second section of said first conductive
means when said first and second housings are mated
thereby grounding said shield.
4,381,130
ZERO INSERTION FORCE CONNECTOR FOR
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT PACKAGES
George J. Sprenkle, Phoenixville, Pa., assignor to Burroughs
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,429
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/62
U.S. CI. 339—74 R
tively toward said tapered walls, causing the finger exten-
sions to move toward each other and to restrict said pin-
receiving area,
at least one contact release plate having a plurality of cam-
like ap)ertures, means for slidably mounting said contact
release plate within said base, said cam-like apertures
encompassing respectively said plurality of electrical
contacts, the movement of said contact release plate to an
"open" position causing the opposite surfaces at one ex-
tremity of each of said cam-like apertures to contact the
respective beam-type members of a contact and to squeeze
them toward each other, thereby causing said finger ex-
tensions to move apart, said finger extensions substantially
encompassing an interface pin inserted within said pin-
receiving area, movement of said contact release plate to
a "closed" |x>sition permitting said beam-type members to
move away from each other without contacting the oppo-
site surfaces at the other extremity of each of said cam-like
apertures, thereby causing said finger extensions to move
toward each other and to grip the surface of said interface
pin,
a cover member disposed over said contact release plate and
affixed to said base in a manner to prevent its movement
relative thereto, said cover member having a plurality of
apertures homologously positioned with respect to the
longitudinal center lines of the pin-receiving area of said
contacts, the dimensions of each of said apertures provid-
ing an exact fit with respect to the cross sectional dimen-
sions of said interface pin, said last mentioned apertures
directing each of said interface pins to enter the central
portion of said pin-receiving area when said integrated
circuit package is mounted in said connector.
4,381,131
LEVERED SYSTEM CONNECTOR FOR AN
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT PACKAGE
Eugene F. Demnianiuk, San Diego, Calif., assignor to Burroughs
10 Qaims Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,268
Int. a.3 HOIR 23/72
U.S. a. 339—75 M 6 Qaims
1. A zero insertion force connector for receiving the inter-
face pins of an integrated circuit package comprising:
a plurality of electrical contacts, each of said contacts being
comprised of a pair of opposing cantilever beam-type
members joined at one end to form a common extremity,
each of said last mentioned members having at least one
finger extension contoured to engage the surface of an
interface pin during operation of the integrated circuit
package, the finger extensions of the respective beam-type
members defining a pin-receiving area therebetween,
a base having a plurality of cavities for receiving respec-
tively said plurality of electrical contacts, said cavities
having a pair of opposing tapered walls, said electrical
contacts being formed such that upon installation in said
cavities, said beam-type members tend to move respec-
1. A double-pivot levered system connector for use with an
integrated circuit package, said system connector comprising:
a frame containing a plurality of electrical conductors and a
pair of grooved tracks;
said frame being adapted to receive said integrated circuit
package with said electrical conductors being aligned
with corresponding electrical conductors in said inte-
grated circuit package;
a lid which lies on the electrical conductors of said inte-
grated circuit package while they are in alignment with
the electrical conductors in said frame;
a pivotal member having ends that respectively fit into said
tracks on said frame;
said pivotal member having a central portion that moves to
contact said lid when said central portion is pivoted in one
direction about said ends while said ends stay at a first
position in said tracks;
906
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26. 1983
said tracks being shaped such that when said ends are piv-
oted about said central portion in another direction oppo-
site to said one direction while said central portion is on
said lid at the point where said contact is made, said ends
move in said tracks away from said first position to pull
said lid and frame together with said aligned conductors
lying therebetween;
said pivotal member further including a lever portion that
pivots said ends about said central portion in said another
direction with a mechanical advantage.
4,381,133
VARIABLE CENTER DISTANCE TERMINAL STRIP AND
METHOD OF MAKING SAME
Rodger T. Lovrenich, Santa Teresa, N. Mex., assignor to Cooper
Industries, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,295
Int. CI.' HOIR 9/10
U.S. CI. 339—198 R 7 Qaims
4,381,132
FLAT CABLE CONNECTOR
Gilles F. A. Tournier, Leguevin, France, assignor to ITT, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 185,793
Int. a.' HOIR 13/38
U.S. a. 339—99 R 3 Claims
'i-C'CCCCGC
\ ccccccc
^ ^ — — i-
/■'
1. Variable center distance electrical terminal strip means,
comprising:
a substantially flat ribbon of flexible electrical insulating
material folded at intervals on fold areas thereon for pro-
viding upwardly extending barrier means; and
a plurality of electrical terminal means for connection to said
ribbon between said barrier means and having connection
means above said ribbon for making a first connection,
and pin means extending below said ribbon for making a
second connection;
said ribbon being adjustable lengthwise for establishing the
center distance between said terminal means.
1. A flat cable connector comprising:
a connector housing containing a row of contact cavities,
each cavity receiving a terminal having an insulation
piercing fork;
the center-to-center spacing of said terminals differing from
the spacing of the conductors of the flat cable to be con-
nected;
the plane of the slot (14) between the tines of the fork of each
terminal being offset from the center axis (16) of said
terminal and from the coincident central axis of its corre-
sponding contact cavity;
all of the forks of the terminals in said row of cavities being
offset to the same side of the said coincident central axes;
said forks being oriented so that the planes passing through
the slots between the tines of said forks are disposed at a
predetermined angle (a) with respect to the lateral plane
(15) passing through the vertical axis of the connector
housing;
said angle being such that conductors of the fiat cable to be
connected will be aligned with the slots between said tines
of the forks of said terminals when the cable is disposed at
said angle with respect to the connector;
a cable clamp for effecting simultaneously the insulation
piercing and the connection of all of the conductors of the
cable, said clamp having a cover for relieving the connec-
tions from stresses due to pulling exercised on the cable;
said cable clamp being traversed by guide channels corre-
sponding in number, diameter and spacing to the condiip-
tors of the flat cable;
said guide channels being parallel to eaclv other and situated
in a plane perpendicular to the cutting edges of said fork
tines;
the longitudinal axes of said guide channels extending at an
angle with respect to said lateral plane of said connector
housing the same as said predetermined angle, whereby
the flat cable will exit from the housing at a slant;
the side of said cable clamp opposite to said connector hous-
ing having a roughly "U"-shaped cutout of a width corre-
sponding to the width of the flat cable to be connected;
and
a pyramid type ramp in said cutout having a base merging
with one side of said cutout with its apex extending to the
opposite side of said cutout.
4,381,134
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR FOR FLATED-THROUGH
HOLES
Donald R. Anselmo, Glen Ellyn, III., and Thomas G. Grau,
Mendham Township, Morris County, N.J., assignors to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,439
Int. CI.' HOIR 4/10
U.S. CI. 339—220 R 9 Qaims
1. An electrical connector (20) adapted for engagement with
an inner surface of a plated-through hole (13) in an electrical
circuit board (10) comprising:
first and second means (21,22) for receiving electrically
conductive elements;
means (23,24,25,26), intermediate said first and second
means, for providing an interference coupling between
said connector and said plated-through hole characterized
in that said connector further includes
means (30), juxtaposed said interference coupling means and
intermediate said first means and said interference cou-
pling means, for conditioning a particular portion of the
inner surface of said plated-through hole prior to engage-
ment of said interference coupling means with the same
particular portion of the inner surface of said plated-
through hole.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
907
4,381,135
SOCKET TYPE CONTACT ASSEMBLY
Valentine J. Hemmer, and R. Amelia Piscitelli, both of Sidney,
N.Y., assignors to The Bendix Corporation, Southfleld, Mich.
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,493
Int. CI.' HOIR 4/10
U.S. CI. 339—258 R 4 Claims
1. In combination with a contact of the type having: a one-
piece inner sleeve having a forward mating portion, a rear wire
receiving portion having a plurality of elongated slots therein
and a middle portion; a rear sleeve telescopically mounted to
the rear portion of the inner sleeve; and a forward sleeve
telescopically mounted to the forward portion of said inner
sleeve, the improvement comprising;
a groove in the rear wire receiving portion of said inner
sleeve with said elongated slots located in said groove;
and
a ferrule located in said groove.
4,381,136
METHOD FOR COVERING ULTRAVIOLET SOURCES
Ludwig Hosch, Darmstadt, and Guenther Ittmann, Gross-
Umstadt, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Rohm
GmbH, Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 239,910
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 5,
1980, 3008364
Int. CI.3 G02B 5/22
U.S. a. 350—1.1 15 Claims
^^=^
'*ii
^
N
\
JrM
^
■
^^
V 7^
\
\
/
[_ J /
\
- -.
- 1
/
^
r
a-
MO ZOO 3oe
5ZC
3SC
A
400
4A0 sao tse
6oe
S5C
1. A method for covering a source emitting ultraviolet radia-
tion which comprises covering said source with an acrylic
glass colored with a coloring agent which absorbs in the visible
region of the spectrum between 400 nanometers and 550 nano-
meters and exhibits an absorption of at least 2 percent for a
wavelength within this region, and which agent concurrently
has an average degree of transmission in the A- and B-region of
the ultraviolet spectrum which is not below 55 percent and is
not less than 10 percent at any wavelength in this region, said
agent being present at a concentration equivalent to 0.0005 to
0.3 percent by weight in a layer, one millimeter thick,
radiation absorbing matrix.
4,381,137
OPTICAL FIBER MODE SEPARATION SYSTEMS
David M. Berg, and Kenneth J. Teegarden, both of Rochester,
N.Y., assignors to Hydroacoustics Inc., Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,634
Int. CI.' G02B 5/14
U.S. CI. 350—96.18 23 Claims
3^3
:'"T
-< \r-C
i h ', — I
r ^^
^
r ,,,
19. An optical system comprising an input optical fiber, a
pair of output fibers, means for deforming said input fiber to
change the modes of transmission of light in said input fiber,
and optical means for separating groups of modes transmitted
in said input fiber and directing light propagating in said input
fiber in one of said groups including lower order modes to one
of said output fibers and another of said groups including
higher order modes to the other of said output fibers, said
optical means comprising means for providing a spatial Fourier
transform of light in the path between said input and output
fibers, and a spatial filter in said plane.
4,381,138
ELECTROOPTIC DEVICES
Lawrence L. Buhl, New Monmouth, N.J., assignor to Bell Tele-
phone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J. .^
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,148
Int. a.' G02B 5/14
U.S. CI. 350—96.14 6 Claims
1. An electrooptic device (30, 60)
at least one optical waveguiding region (11, 50) embedded in a
substrate (12, 52) of electrooptic material of lower refractive
index;
means for providing periodic regions of electric field within
said substrate longitudinally distributed along the length of
said waveguiding region including:
a pair of comb electrodes (13-14, 53-54) having fingers (13-1,
13-2 . . . 14-1, 14-2 53-1, 53-2 . 54-1. 54-2) whose
ends are disposed opposite each other along said length;
CHARACTERIZED IN THAT
portions (1, 2, 3) of the substrate between adjacent fingers are
removed so as to minimize fringing of the electric field
between pairs of opposing fingers (13-1, 14-1; 13-2, 14-2 . . .
; 53-1, 54-1; 53-2. 54-2 ... ).
908
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,139
VELOCITY MISMATCHED MODULATOR
Rodney C. Alferness, Holmdel, N.J., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,432
Int. CI.' G02B 5/14
U.S. CI. 350—96.14 9 Claims
1. A modulator (10) comprising:
a pair of substantially identical optical waveguides (11, 12)
embedded in a substrate (13) of electrooptic material of
lower refractive index;
said optical waveguides being in coupling relationship over
a distance L;
and modulating means (14, 15), supportive of a traveling
wave, for locally changing the propagation constants iP\,
(il) of at least one of said waveguide (11, 12) at longitudi-
nally spaced intervals (14-1, 15-1; 14-2, 15-2; . . . 14-n; 15-n)
therealong.
4,381,141
INFRARED OPTICAL nSER AND METHOD FOR
MANUFACTURE THEREOF
Shiro Sakuragi, and Haruo Kotani, both of Kisshoinmiya-no-
Higashimachi, Japan, assignors to Agency of Industrial Sci-
ence & Technology and Ministry of International Trade &
Industry, both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,743
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 22, 1980, 55/5315
Int. a.' G02B 5/14
U.S. CI. 350— 96.34 12 Qaims
1. An infrared optical fiber, comprising a core made of an
infrared transmitting substance, a clad around said core made
of a infrared transmitting substance having a lower index of
refraction then said core, a layer of lubricant on the oute;
surface of said clad, and a metal pipe enveloping said layer of
lubricant.
4,381,142
REAR VIEW MIRROR ATTACHMENT
Christopher McColgan, P.O. Box 249, Quyon, Quebec, Canada
(JOX 2V0)
4,381,140 f^''*** ^°'- *2, 1980, Ser. No. 206,079
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE Claims priority, application Canada, Oct. 14, 1980, 362106
Willem yan der Hoek, and Hermanus N. Tuin, both of Eindho- ^"*- *^' ^^^ ^/^
ven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New ^•^- ^'- 350—304 13 Qaims
York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,195
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Oct. 8, 1979,
7907433
Int. C\? G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 350—96.23 11 Qaims
1. An optical fiber cable comprising:
a longitudinally extending cylindrical body having an outer
surface with a helical groove therein;
an optical fiber in the helical groove; and
means for fixing the fiber in the groove at periodically
spaced locations, said means preventing the fiber from
moving in the groove along the length of the cable.
1. A vehicle supported apparatus for providing a rear view
comprising a flat mirror device having a front and back mirror
surface, a hinge member extending along one edge of said
mirror device, means for pivotably mounting said mirror de-
vice on said hinge member whereby said mirror device can be
pivoted from a first position where said front mirror surface is
viewed to a second position where said back mirror surface is
viewed, means for connecting said hinge member to said vehi-
cle including a clamping mechanism adapted to clamp onto a
rearview mirror in said vehicle, and an opaque panel member
rigidly connected to said hinge member and covering said back
surface when said mirror device is in said first position.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
909
4,381,143
OPHTHALMIC TEST LENS HOLDER
Paul F. Bommarito, 10684 Martinwood Way, Cupertino, Calif.
95014
Continuation of Ser. No. 6,340, Jan. 25, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,807
Int. C1.3 A61B 3/04
U.S. a. 351—230 11 Qaims
1. An ophthalmic test lens holder for use with spectacle
frames comprising,
an elongated first clamping member defining a first aperture
therein,
an elongated second clamping member, generally the same
size as the first clamping member and defining a second
aperture therein, said second clamping member facing said
first clamping member and spaced therefrom a distance
accommodating a spectacle frame therebetween, with said
first aperture and said second aperture aligned to transmit
light therethrough, said first and second clamping mem-
bers being elongated and having an extended tip with a
clamping member length substantially greater than a lens
socket in the spectacle frame intended to be placed be-
tween said clamping members such that the clamping
members may adjustably be disposed across and contact
opposed sides of a lens socket of said spectacle frame,
spanning the dimension of the socket, the first of said
clamping members having a plurality of parallel lateral
rulings thereon, for referencing an aperture relative to the
socket, the number and extent of lateral rulings being
sufficient to reference the position of a test lens held over
an aperture with respect to said socket,
spring means connected to said first and second clamping
members for resiliently biasing said first clamping member
toward said second clamping member, and
bracket means attached to one of said clamping members for
removably holding a test lens over said second aperture.
4,381,144
UNDERWATER CAMERA ENCLOSURE INCLUDING
SONAR RANGE nNDING DEVICE
Lloyd Breslau, 23 Bobwhite Trail, Gales Ferry, Conn. 06335
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,557
Int. a.3 G03B 17/08; GOIS 15/08
U.S. a. 354—64 20 Qaims
13. A transponder to operate distance controlled apparatus
designed for operation in a first medium, in a second medium
and to provide a distance-related signal to adjust said distance
controlled apparatus according to a distance between said
controlled apparatus and a selected subject in said second
medium, said transponder comprising:
a second medium range determining device including a
sonar device providing a first signal relating a distance
between said transponder and said selected subject;
a conversion means to relate said first signal to said distance
controlled apparatus as a converted distance signal,
wherein said second medium sonar device receives an initi-
ate signal in response to said distance controlled apparatus
and produces said first signal thereafter, said conversion
means further comprising:
a timing circuit to measure the elapsed time between said
initiate signal and said first signal to produce a second
medium delay signal; and
a time scaler to adjust the second medium delay signal ac-
cording to a differing rate of propagation of an acoustic
signal through the first medium and the propagation of an
acoustic signal through said second medium producing a
simulated air-echo electrical signal.
4,381,145
SINGLE LENS REFLEX CAMERA
Kikuo Momiyama, Yokohama, and Kenichi Kumazawa, Ma-
chida, both of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 97,833, Nov. 26, 1979, Pat. No.
4,295,723. This application Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,345
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 24, 1978, 53-145114
Int. a.3G03B 17/20. 19/12
U.S. a. 354—155 1 Claim
,1 7
k
Jin
*»'
Z >
J 5
1. A single lens reflex camera, comprising:
a focusing plate;
an objective lens for forming an image of an object on the
focusing plate and on a plane at which a photosensitive
surface is to be placed;
a viewfinder system for viewing the object image formed on
the focusing plate and photographic data indicated on
parts of the single lens refiex camera;
said viewfinder system including a pentagonal roof prism
having a non-reflecting front surface, an eyepiece, a sub-
prism having at least two reflecting surfaces, and a vari-
able reflecting member having at least one reflecting
surface;
said sub-prism being arranged between the pentagonal roof
prism and the eyepiece;
said pentagonal roof prism being arranged so that when light
from photographic data is introduced at the non-reflecting
surface of the pentagonal roof prism into the inside
thereof, the light is reflected by one of the reflecting
surfaces of the sub-prism, projected to the exterior toward
the reflecting member, reflected by the reflecting surface
of the reflecting member so as to be introduced into the
910
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
inside of the sub-prism, reflected by the outer reflecting
surface of the sub-prism toward the eyepiece;
said viewfmder system further including a view field frame,
said light reflected by the other reflecting surface of the
sub-prism being directed toward the eyepiece to indicate
the photographic data around the photographic view field
frame;
the photographic data indicated around the frame being
extinguishable or reproducible by varying the reflecting
member.
4,381,146
PIEZOELECTRIC APERTURE SIZE CONTROL DEVICE
Tsunemi Yoshino, Ibaraki, and Hiroshi Iwata, Nara, both of
Japan, assignors to West Electric Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,167
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 17, 1980, 55-82650
Int. CI.' G03B 9/02
U.S. a. 354—271 4 Qaims
a latent image bearing member;
means for forming a latent image on said latent image bear-
ing member;
means for forming images on other members by means of
said latent image formed on said latent image bearing
member; and
,7
(
.^
X
." n^„/<
( %
\/^ C/ 8
01 6
,v yy\^
=-^
~X1
--- %
^-
means for measuring a period of interruption of the forma-
tion of plural images on said other members; and means
for controlling the remaining image formations, after said
interruption, to be conducted with or without reformation
of a new latent image on said latent image bearing member
depending respectively on whether or not the p>eriod
measured by said period measuring means exceeds a pre-
determined time limit of duration of said latent image.
1. A piezoelectric aperture size control device responsive to
control signals comprising:
(a) first support means having an opening which defines a
maximum aperture size,
(b) movable aperture-setting means on said first support
means and movable relative thereto so as to close the
opening thereof, thereby setting a desired aperture size,
(c) control means in proximity to said movable aperture-set-
ting means for controlling the movements thereof,
(d) second support means for supporting said first support
means and aperture-setting means including the said con-
trol means,
(e) first driving means slidably disposed between said first
and second support means and adapted to respond to a
first control signal so as to become arrested therebetween,
(0 second driving means connected to said control means
and slidably disposed between said first and second sup-
port means and adapted to respond to a second control
signal so as to become arrested therebetween,
(g) connection-and-expansion driving means interconnect-
ing said first and second driving means and adapted to
respond to a third control signal to expand and contract in
response thereto to move the said first and second driving
means when neither is arrested,
the said control signals being time related to cause the said
driving means to move in a pre-determined direction so
as to control the aperture size accordingly.
4^1,147
APPARATUS FOR FORMING PLURAL IMAGES FROM A
LATENT IMAGE
Toshirou Kasamura, c/o Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, 30-2, 3-
chome, Shimomaruko, Ohta-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,002
Int. CI.3 G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—14 R 5 Claims
1. An image forming apparatus for foiTning plural images
from a single latent image formed on a latent image bearing
member, comprising:
4,381,148
POWER METER FOR HIGH ENERGY LASERS
Peter B. Ulrich, Oxon Hill, Md.; Gary L. Trusty, and Daniel H.
Leslie, both of Alexandria, Va., assignors to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,350
Int. a.3 GOIJ 1/04. 1/42; GOIK 17/00
U.S. a. 356—213 10 Claims
INLET
MEANS
[Fo
CONTINUOUS
WAVE
LAStR
50U»»CE
V
, abs0r9eb concentration
*mooolating means
'^
21
OUTLET-' .- __
I LASER
-1 BEAM
—I UTILIZATION
DEVICE
3^
uw j
1. A power meter for non-destructively measuring the
power of a beam from a high energy laser source, the power
meter comprising:
a cell adapted to be aligned with respect to the laser source
to pass the beam and including inlet means for transport-
ing a gas containing laser radiation-absorbing species into
the cell, means for detecting repeated thermal expansions
and contractions of the gas in the cell caused by a modu-
lated absorption of laser power, and outlet means for
withdrawing the gas from the cell; and
means for modulating the concentration of the radiation-
absorbing species in the gas.
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
911
4,381,149
RANGE RESPONSIVE APPARATUS
Thomas Hair, Chelmsford, and Ivor R. Baxter, Brentwood, both
of England, assignors to The Marconi Co. Ltd., Chelmsford,
England
Filed Feb. 13, 1975, Ser. No. 548,727
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 19, 1974,
7557/74
Int. a.3 GOIC 3/08
U.S. a. 356—4 22 Qaims
1. A range responsive apparatus comprising energy sensitive
means arranged to receive electro-magnetic energy from a
target simultaneously from different spaced portions of a field
of view and being capable of producing an electrical output,
and means for rotating said field of view about an axis of
rotation to cause said field of view to sweep across a target,
lines bounding the different portions of the field converging
toward a point located remote from said target, and said axis of
rotation being between said target and said point whereby, in
operation, the electrical output of said energy sensitive means
includes a frequency component which is dependent upon the
range of said target.
4,381,150
LASER BEAM POINTING AID
Richard A. Curtis, Huntsville, Ala., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Scretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,376
Int. C1.3 GOIB 11/27
U.S. a. 356—247 3 Claims
1. A device for pointing a laser beam to a remote target
comprising an elongated housing having an adjustable iris as an
input aperture at one end and an qutput aperture at an opposite
end, a center line axis through said housing and said input and
output apertures, an unobstructed path through said housing
along said center line axis of said housing for passing a laser
beam therethrough, a telescope, means mounting said tele-
scope relative to said housing, a center line axis through said
telescope, and said means mounting said telescope being such
to allow one to boresight said telescope and align the center
line axis of the telescope with the center line axis of said hous-
ing.
4,381,151
HAND-HOLDABLE CONTAMINATION TESTER
Tennyson Smith, Thousand Oaks, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Air
Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,225
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/21
U.S. a. 356—369 2 Qaims
1. A hand-holdable contamination tester, comprising:
a. means for emitting a beam of light, wherein this means
includes: a source of electrical power; a light bulb m
electrical connection with said source of electrical power,
with said bulb emitting light; and means for collimatmg
said emitted light, such that a beam of light is formed,
wherein this means includes a concave reflector disposed
physically rearward of said light bulb;
b. means for plane polarizing said beam of light, wherein this
means is disposed in optical alignment with and physically
forward of said light beam emitting means, and wherein
this means includes a Glan-Thompson prism;
c. means, in optical alignment with said emitted beam of
light and physically disposed between said means for
emitting a beam of light and said means for plane polariz-
ing said beam of light, for shortening the geometric dis-
tance of an optical path between said light emitting means
and said plane polarizing means, wherein this means for
shortening said geometric distance includes a first mirror
and a second mirror physically disposed between said
light emitting means and said plane polarizing means, such
that said emitted light beam impinges upon said first mir-
ror, is reflected therefrom to said second mirror, and is
further refiected therefrom to said polarizing means.
d. compensator means disposed in optical alignment with
and physically forward of said means for plane polarizing
said beam of light, wherein said compensator means in-
cludes a quarter-wave plate;
e. means for causing said plane polarized, compensated,
emitted beam of light to impinge at a predetermined angle
of incidence upon a light-refiective surface which is being
tested for contamination, with this means disposed in
optical alignment with and physically forward of said
compensator means;
f analyzer means disposed in optical alignment with and
physically rearward of said light impingement causing
means, wherein said analyzer means includes a Glan-
Thompson prism;
g. means for permitting transmission of only a preselected
constituent wavelength of said beam of light, with the
light transmitted having an intensity, wherein this means
includes a monochromatic filter, and wherein this means is
912
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
disposed in optical alignment with and physically rear-
ward of said analyzer means;
h. means, in optical alignment with said analyzer means and
physically disposed between said analyzer means and said
means for permitting transmission of only a preselected
constituent wavelength of said emitted beam of light, for
shortening the geometric distance of an optical path be-
tween said analyzer means and said light transmitting
means, wherein this means for shortening said geometric
distance includes a third mirror physically disposed be-
tween said analyzer means and said light transmission
means, such that light transmitted by said analyzer means
impinges upon said third mirror and is reflected therefrom
to said light transmission means;
i. means for detecting the light and the intensity of the light
transmitted by said means for permitting transmission of
only a preselected constituent wavelength of said beam of
light, wherein said light and light intensity detecting
means includes a photodetector and is disposed in optical
alignment with and physically rearward of said means for
permitting transmission of only a preselected constituent
wavelength of said beam of light;
j. means for indicating if said intensity of said detected light
exceeds a predetermined threshold of intensity of light,
wherein this means includes a visual indicating means, and
wherein this means is operatively associated with said
means for detecting said light and said intensity of said
light;
k. a container common to, and housing, all of said foregoing
components, wherein said container has a forward end in
which is located an opening; and
1. means, external of and connected to said container, for
abutting said light-reflective surface and for permitting a
spaced-apart relationship between said forward end of
said container and said light-reflective surface, wherein
this means includes at least two spaced-apart feet members
connected to said forward end of said container, with at
least one said foot member on one side Oi" said container
opening, and with at least another foot member on the
other side of said container opening;
whereby, if said intensity of said detected light does exceed
said predetermined threshold, then said light-reflective sur-
face, which is being tested, is contaminated.
4,381,152
DIMENSION MEASURING APPARATUS
Volker Riech, and Dietrich Sorgenicht, both of Leverkusen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Daystrom Limited, Gloucester,
England
Filed May 20, 1980, Ser. No. 152,008
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 21,
1979, 2920530; May 21, 1979, 2920531
Int. a.3 GOIB 11/10
U.S. a. 356—385 4 Qaims
1. Apparatus for measuring the distance between two oppo-
site edges of a luminous object, the apparatus comprising first
and second cameras arranged to be disposed, in use, on oppo-
site sides of the object with their optical axes substantially
aligned and substantially perpendicular to the distance to be
measured, each camera containing a respective row of photo-
sensitive devices on which the camera produces, in use, an
image of a respective one of said edges, the rows of devices
being symmetrically dispxjsed on each side of the common
optical axis, and each row of devices being associated with
scanning means capable of scanning the devices from the end
of the row remote from the common optical axis to the end of
the row nearer to the common optical axis, to determine the
position therealong of said image and thereby determine the
position of the corresponding edge of the object.
4,381,153
OPAaTY MONITOR
Thomas L. Bohl, Madison; George R. Hall, Jr., Euclid, and
Sharon L. Zimmerlin, Chagrin Falls, all of Ohio, assignors to
The Babcock & Wilcox Company, New Orleans, La.
Filed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,203
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/01
U.S. a. 356—437 5 Qaims
1. In an opacity monitoring system comprising a light source
mounted on one side of a duct, a detector mounted on the
opposite side of the duct, and means defining an open light path
across said duct between said light source and said detector, a
calibration tube extending across said duct and closed to the
interior of said duct, means mounting said light source for
rotation about a first axis substantially perpendicular to the
direction of flow through said duct, means mounting said
detector for rotation about a second axis substantially perpen-
dicular to the direction of flow through said duct, means for
rotating said light source about said first axis from a first posi-
tion aligned with said calibration tube, means for rotating said
detector about said second axis from a first position aligned
with said light path to a second position aligned with said
calibration tube, first motor means for rotating said light
source about said first axis, second motor means for rotating
said detector about said second axis, and control means electri-
cally connected to said first and second motor means and
operable to energize said first and second motor means to
rotate said light source and said detector in unison.
4,381,154
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR
NONDESTRUCTIVELY DETERMINING THE
COMPOSITION OF AN UNKNOWN MATERIAL
SAMPLE
Ogden H. Hammond, III, Winchester, Mass., assignor to The
Hetni Corporation, Newport, R.I.
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,087
Int. Q.3 GOIN 25/00
U.S. Q. 374-43 23 Qaims
1. In a system for determining the thermal characteristics of
a sample and for comparing them to the corresponding thermal
characteristics of a standard, said system including a heater for
applying a heat pulse of finite duration to said sample or said
standard and a sensor for measuring the temperature response
of said sample or said standard at a plurality of successive
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
913
instants of time, U, following the application of said heat pulse,
that improvement comprising:
initial temperature compensation means for determining a
compensation factor, Comp, representative of the differ-
ence, if any, between the temperature of said standard at the
time of applying said heat pulse thereto and the temperature
of said sample at the time of applying said heat pulse thereto,
and means for determining the difference, Diff. (t/), between
said responses according to the formula
TAOi) - Tgdi) - Comp = Di/fU,)
where T^(t,) is the sensed temperature of the standard at a
time t| seconds after said heat pulse is applied thereto and
Tfl(t,) is the sensed temperature of the sample t, seconds after
said heat pulse is applied thereto.
Itoh
4,381,155
INKED RIBBON ADVANCE AND REVERSE
MECHANISM
Nicholas Kondur, Jr., Westminster, Colo., assignor to C.
Electronics, Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 199,115
Int. a.3 B41J 33/48. 33/40
U.S. a. 400—220.1 3 Claims
rotate together, said first ratchet wheel being rotatably
journaled in said frame adjacent to said first side plate;
c. a second ribbon spool from which an inked ribbon is
unwound;
d. a second ratchet wheel the axis of which is parallelly
disposed to said base of said frame and which is axially
aligned and fixedly coupled to said second ribbon spool so
that said second ribbon spool and said second ratchet
wheel rotate together, said second ratchet wheel being
rotatably journaled in said frame adjacent to said first side
plate and being disposed orthogonally adjacent, but
spaced, to said first ratchet wheel;
e. a sliding member which is a first elongated member hav-
ing a first flange and a second flange and which is slidably
coupled to said frame so that said sliding member slides
bi-directionally toward said first and second side plates
along said base of said frame;
r an elongated pawl member having a first end and a second
end and which is fixedly coupled at said first end to said
second Hange with said pawl member and said sliding
member being disposed parallel to each other, a pawl
element at said second end and having a first tooth which
may engage one of said teeth of said first ratchet wheel
and a second tooth being disposed orthogonally adjacent,
but contiguous to said first tooth which may engage one of
said teeth of said second ratchet wheel;
a mounting member which is fixedly coupled to said
movable carrier;
h. a pivot pin which is fixedly coupled to said mounting
member;
i. a lever arm, which is an elongated member having a first
end and a second end and a first groove and a second
groove which are spaced apart from the center of said
elongated member so that one of said first and second
grooves may be pivotally coupled to said pivot pin in
order that one of said first and second ends of said lever
arm may push against one or the other of said first and
second flanges of said sliding member, respectively caus-
ing said first and second ratchet wheels to rotate, respec-
tively;
resiliently coupling means for resiliently coupling said
lever arm to said mounting member; and
a spring which resiliently couples said first side plate to
said pawl member in order to resiliently bias said sliding
member so that said sliding member is biased toward a
substantially mid position of its entire movable distance.
g
J
4,381,156
TAB SETTING DEVICE OF TYPEWRITER
Gian P. Barozzi, and Giancarlo Horeschi, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Tokyo Juki Industrial Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,032
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 11, 1980, 55-94938
Int. a.3 B41J 21/04
US. a. 400—296.1 3 Qaims
1. An improved inked ribbon advance and reverse mecha-
nism for use in a multiple print station printing apparatus,
which includes a frame having a base, a first side plate and a
second side plate, which are parallelly and oppositely disposed,
a drive shaft horizontally disposed between said first and sec-
ond side plates and rotatably journaled in said sides plates, a
movable carrier mechanically coupled to said drive shaft, a
print head pivotally coupled to said movable carrier and a pair
of platens which are disposed parallel to said drive shaft and
each having a print surface of which is in a plane which is
substantially orthogonal to the other plane, comprising:
a. a first ribbon spool onto which an inked ribbon is wound;
b. a first ratchet wheel the axis of which is orthogonally
disposed to said base of said frame and which is axially
aligned and fixedly coupled to said first ribbon spool so
that said first ribbon spool and said first ratchet wheel
1. A tab setting device of a typewriter, wherein a plurality of
tab pins are oriented transversely to and slidably inserted into
a tab bracket and a tab pin at each position where a carriage is
to be stopped is projected into a carriage moving path to stop
the carriage, characterized in that a hole shaped such that the
tab bracket can rock in the hole is formed in a typewriter
frame, said hole having a bottom surface, the tab bracket being
supported by a pair of projections formed on said bottom
1029 O.G
914
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
surface, and one of said pair of the projections serving as a
fulcrum for rocking of the tab bracket when a tab pin is pro-
jected, and the other of said pair of projections serving as a
fulcrum for rocking of the tab bracket when a projected tab pin
is retracted.
4,381,157
RUG CLEANER
Robert S. Brown, Spartanburg, S.C, assignor to Milliken Re-
search Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
Filed Oct. 30, 1978, Ser. No. 956,028
Int. a.^ B05C n/02: A47L 11 /i2
U.S. a. 401—21 3 Claims
surfaces thereof, and a rearwardly tapered rigid driver member
rigidly connected to said cartridge and located adjacent to said
actuating member in alignment with said openings, the rear-
ward tapers of the inner surfaces of said arms corresponding to
the tapered configuration of said driver member, wherein an
inward pressure on said actuating member by a force directed
thereto through said openings causes relative sliding move-
ment between said actuating member and said driver member
with the inner surfaces of said actuating member traveling
along the outer surface of said driver member as a result of the
tapered configurations thereof to thereby cause said actuating
member in cooperation with said operating means to exert a
longitudinal force on said driver member to move said driver
1. A device for applying a substantially dry cleaning powder
on a surface to be cleaned, such as a carpet comprising; a
hollow container having a first section and a second section at
an angle to said first section, a cylindrical powder transfer
element rotatably mounted in said hollow container, said first
section having a wall member which is substantially perpendic-
ular to the surface to be cleaned when such surface is contacted
by said cylindrical powder transfer element, a brush member
mounted on said wall member having the bristles thereof sub-
stantially perpendicular thereto, means mounting a disposable
powder container in said second section in communication
with said cylindrical powder transfer element to supply clean-
ing powder thereto and a handle means connected to the out-
side of said hollow container to aid in moving said hollow
container over the surface to be cleaned.
4,381,158
WRITING INSTRUMENT
Richard S. Garganese, North Kingston, R.I., assignor to Dino L.
Garganese
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,988
Int. a.3 B43K 24/04
U.S. a. 401—111 4 Qaims
1. A writing instrument, comprising a rigid barrel defined by
a rigid tubular lower barrel portion having an open lower end
and a rigid tubular upper barrel portion removably mounted on
said lower barrel portion and having a closed upper end, a rigid
elongated ink cartridge located in said barrel and having a
writing point that is extendible through the open lower end of
said lower barrel portion, operating means located in said
barrel for alternately urging said cartridge downwardly and
upwardly to propel the writing point through the open end of
said lower barrel portion to an exposed writing position
thereof and to retract said cartridge for moving the writing
point to an inactive position thereof, wherein said writing point
is withdrawn within the open lower end of said lower barrel
portion, a pair of openings formed in said lower barrel portion
in opposed relation, said operating means including an actuat-
ing member located in said lower barrel portion and underly-
ing said openings therein, said actuating member having a pair
of opposed arms which are rearwardly tapered on the inner
member and said cartridge with which it is interengaged in a
longitudinal direction to cause direct positive movement of the
writing point of said instrument through the open end of said
lower barrel portion to the exposed writing position thereof, or
to retract the writing point to the inactive position thereof, said
actuating member having an upper tubular portion to which
are joined said downwardly extending opposed arms on the
outer surfaces of which pads are located, said arms being free
at the lower ends thereof and having flexing movement rela-
tive to said upper tubular portion, and said pads being received
in the openings in said lower barrel portion, wherein an inward
force on said pads causes said arms to fiex inwardly against said
tapered driver member to force the driver member in the
longitudinal direction thereof.
4,381,159
MAGNETIC nNGERPRINT DUSTING BRUSH
John M. Payne, Maxey, England, assignor to Sirchie Finger-
print Laboratories, Inc., Raleigh, N.C.
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,304
Int. a.3 A61B 5/10
U.S. a. 401—118 7 Qaims
m
Ih-
1. A magnetic fingerprint dusting brush comprising:
(a) a handle which incorporates a magnet portion projecting
at one end thereof;
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
915
(b) a non-magnetic shroud adapted to be assembled with the
handle closely to shroud the projecting magnet portion;
(c) said shroud including an inner blind sleeve for closely
shrouding the magnet portion and an outer sleeve to
which a cover is adapted to be detachably secured;
(d) said inner sleeve having a first portion of greater cross-
section for assembly with the handle and a coaxial second
portion of lesser cross-section connected to the first por-
tion through a shoulder for closely shrouding the magnet
portion;
(e) a cover detachably securable to the handle/shroud as-
sembly to form in its secured position an enclosed powder
reservoir around the shrouded magnet portion;
(0 said shroud and cover constituting a powder cartridge for
assembly with the handle; and
(g) a mixture of ferrous and dusting powder in the reservoir.
4,381,160
POST SUPPORT BRACKET ASSEMBLY
William G. Grimm, 29974 Paint Brush Dr., Evergreen, Colo.
80439, and Ronald W. Pott, 730 Crescent La., Lakewood,
Colo. 80215
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,493
Int. a.3 B25G 3/00; F16B 7/08. 9/00
U.S. a. 403—230 14 Qaims
location to said vertical axis through a pivotal coupler to
said material input means;
(0 slurry removal means having an output, said slurry re-
moval means mounted to said support between said side-
wall and said sump vertical axis and mounted to said
support means on the opposite side from said material
input means;
(g) slurry transportation pipe means connected from said
slurry removal means output through a pivotal coupler to
a remote location; and
(h) means for rotating said support means about the vertical
axis of said sump.
4,381,162
DRILL HAVING CUTTING EDGES WITH THE
GREATEST CURVATURE AT THE CENTRAL PORTION
THEREOF
Ryosuke Hosoi, 5-9-10, Kami-minami, Hirano-ku, Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 961,810, Nov. 17, 1978, Pat. No. 4,222,690.
This application Feb. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 123,615
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 3, 1977, 52-145587;
Dec. 3, 1977, 52-145588; Dec. 3, 1977, 52-145589; Jan. 31, 1978,
53-10136
Int. a.' B23B 51/02
U.S. a. 408—1 R 5 Qaims
1. A corner bracket adapted for anchoring one member in
flush abutting relation to another member comprising:
a pair of upstanding plates joined in mutually perpendicular
relation to one another, oppositely directed, horizontal
flanges disposed for extension from lower edges of said
plates, and fastener means for fastening said flanges to the
other member.
4,381,161
SLURRY RECOVERY FROM A ORCULAR SUMP
Richard E. Doerr, Morgantown, W. Va.; Hilbert D. Dahl, Mc-
Murray, Pa., and Ronald W. Umphrey, Fairmont, W. Va.,
assignors to Conoco Inc., Ponca City, Okla.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,550
Int. C\? B65G 53/40
U.S. Q. 406—109 6 Qaims
1. A slurry recovery sump apparatus comprising:
(a) a substantially vertical sidewall and a substantially circu-
lar horizontal cross-section defining a vertical axis;
(b) a bottom means;
(c) support means extending diametrically across said sump
and above said sump;
(d) material input means mounted between the sidewall and
the vertical axis of said sump and mounted to and distrib-
uted along said support means;
(e) pipe communication means connected from a remote
1. A method of drilling a bore utilizing a drill having helical
grooves and a pair of cutting edges having a rake face, com-
prising the steps of providing a projection on said rake face
where said rake face joins said helical groove, utilizing said
projection to define a curling portion, curling the leading edge
of said chip on said curling portion and thereby formmg lead-
ing rounded edges on said chip, engaging said leading rounded
edges of said chip with the bore defining surface without fusing
nor damage to said bore defining surface, breaking said chip by
said engagement thereby producing relatively small frag-
mented chips with rounded edges, and removing said rela-
tively small fragmented chips with rounded edges in succes-
sion through said helical grooves.
4,381,163
SELF-LOCKING NUT
Erwin C. Witte, Placentia, and William D. Myers, Fullerton,
both of Calif., assignors to Microdot Inc., Darien, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 959,520, Nov. 13, 1978, abandoned.
This application Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,136
Int. Q.5 F16B 39/30
U.S. Q. 411—311 1 Claim
1. A nut of the prevailing torque type comprising a body
having a through aperture and an outer wrenching periphery
coaxial with the aperture, said body having a top at one end of
the aperture and a bottom at the other end of the aperture
including a bearing surface, said aperiure including a uniform
right circular cylindrical internal wall portion extending from
said bearing surface to an intermediate axial level of said body
and a tapered internal wall portion extending from the uniform
portion toward the top of said body, said tapered portion
having internal diameters decreasing in the direction away
from said bearing surface in substantially uniform relation to
916
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
distance from said bearing surface, said body being internally
threaded along the length of both the uniform and tapered
portions of said aperture with wedge ramp root type threads,
the wedge ramp roots of the threads in said aperture converg-
ing toward the bearing surface of said body, said wedge ramp
roots in said uniform portion extending at angles of about 30°
with respect to the axis of the aperture and in said tapered
on an article to be lifted such that the article is raised by the
upper support plate by way of the fastener and the article
extends through one of said holes in said lower guide plate.
portion extending at angles less than 30° with respect to said
axis, the crests of the external threads on said male member
being initially engageable with the wedge ramps on the tapered
portion of said aperture at the top of said nut so as to place
substantially the entire portion of said male member within the
aperture of said nut in tension when a load is placed on the
bearing surface thereof
4,381,164
AMMUNITION TRANSFER SLING AND METHOD OF
USING
Richard A. Koster, and James S. Hoffman, both of York, Pa.,
assignors to Harsco Corporation, Del.
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,581
Int. a.3 B66C 1/16
U.S. a. 414—416 18 Qaims
1. A hoist for lifting a plurality of like articles comprising:
(a) an upper support plate having an upper surface and a
lower surface,
(b) a lower guide plate,
(c) a first connector securing said lower guide plate to said
upper support plate, said first connector allowing move-
ment of said lower guide plate relative to said upper sup-
port plate in a direction normal to said lower guide plate,
(d) a plurality of holes extending through said lower guide
plate adapted to accommodate articles to be lifted, and
(e) a plurality of fasteners mounted on the lower surface of
said upper support plate, each fastener adapted to be
secured to a catch on articles to be lifted,
whereby each one of said fasteners may be secured to a catch
4,381,165
CLUTCH FOR BELT DRIVE WITH MEANS FOR
LIMITING START-UP TORQUE
Mark C. James, and Ronald G. Borushaski, both of Indepen-
dence, Mo., assignors to Aliis-Chalmers Corporation, Milwau-
kee, Wis.
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 212,020
Int. C1.3 F16H 7/12
U.S. a. 414—526 2 Qaims
1. In a combine having a grain storage bin, the combination
comprising:
an unloading mechanism for unloading the grain from said
bin including an auger,
a belt drive for driving said auger including drive and driven
pulleys rotatably mounted on said combine on spaced
parallel axes and a belt reeved about said pulleys,
an idler arm pivotally mounted on said combine for swing-
ing movement toward and away from the plane defined by
said parallel axes between drive establishing and drive
disestablishing positions,
a clutching idler pulley operatively engaging said belt at a
location between said drive and driven pulleys,
a shaft rotatably mounting said idler pulley on said idler arm,
spring means operatively interposed between said combine
and idler arm urging the latter toward its drive establish-
ing position,
control means connected to said idler arm selectively opera-
ble to shift said idler arm from its drive establishing posi-
tion to its drive disestablishing position; and
a linear acting dampener having one end connected to said
combine and its other end connected to said shaft, said
dampener being operative to retard movement of said
idler arm from its drive disestablishing position to its drive
establishing position whereby the start-up torque deliv-
ered to said driven pulley is effectively limited.
4,381,166
FORK UNIT HAVING ADJUSTABLE FORKS
Robert L. Smart, 11670 Fields Rd., New Carlisle, Oiiio 45344
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,961
Int. a.3 B60P 1/50: B66F 9/14
U.S. a. 414—685 3 Claims
1. A lift unit for support by a tractor or the like provided
with movable support arms, comprising an elongate carriage
attachable to the arms for movement thereby, the carriage
being adapted to be positioned at the front portion of the
tractor and extending substantially the width of the tractor, the
carriage being provided with back support members, a pair of
spaced-apart end frame members, front frame members, and an
intermediate frame member, the intermediate frame member
being attached to the back frame members between the front
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
917
and back frame members and between the pair of spaced-apart
end frame members, a pair of elongate threaded parallel rods
rotatably supported by the end frame members and extending
therebetween, a pair of sprocket wheels, there being a sprocket
wheel secured to each of the threaded rods adjacent the inter-
mediate frame member, a rotary motor supported by the inter-
mediate frame member, a drive shaft extending from the rotary
motor, a drive sprocket wheel attached to the drive shaft for
rotation therewith, a chain encompassing the drive sprocket
wheel and the spocket wheels which are secured to the
threaded rods and in meshed relationship therewith, a plurality
of nuts, there being two nuts threadedly attached to each of the
second end of the first link and to an end of the actuator, a third
link having its opposite ends pivotally connected to a second
end of the second link and to the dipper stick at a location
spaced from the first axis; and a fourth link having opposite
ends respectively pivotally connected to the third link and the
bucket.
4^1,168
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING A
LAYER OF FLEXIBLE MATERIAL FROM A SURFACE
Wayne S. Johnson, La Habra, and Vincent C. Tangherlini, Costa
Mesa, both of Calif., assignors to Beckman Instruments, Inc.,
FuUerton, Calif.
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,830
Int. a.' B65H 29/08; B29C 7/00
U.S. a. 414—737 2 Claims
threaded rods, with a nut being between the intermediate
frame member and each of the end frame members, so that a
pair of nuts is positioned between each end frame member and
the intermediate frame member, a pair of carriers, there being
a carrier supported by each pair of nuts and retaining the nuts
against rotation, so that rotative movement of the threaded
rods causes axial movement of the nuts and the carriers along
the threaded rods, a pair of forks, means joining each fork to
one of the carriers for movement therewith, operation of the
rotary motor thus moving the forks with respect to the car-
riage for lifting an object with movement of the carriage by
positioning the forks under the object or on opposite portions
of the object.
4,381,167
EXCAVATOR BUCKET LINKAGE
Mark A. Baty, Dubuque, Iowa, assignor to Deere A Company,
Moline, 111.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,100
Int. a.5 E02F 3/58
U.S. a. 414— 697 IQaim
1. A device for separating a layer of flexible material from a
substantially flat surface comprising:
a removal head mounted adjacent said surface for relative
movement with respect thereto;
said removal head including a curvilinear face on at least a
portion of said removal head;
a vacuum manifold rotatably mounted on said removal head
adjacent to said curvilinear face;
means for moving said curved removal head and said flexible
material away from said surface;
and whereby, when said removal head is moved away from
said surface and said vacuum head is rotated, said layer is
separated from said removal head.
4,381,169
MANIPULATOR
Richard Muhr, Attendom, and Karl Steinhoff, Lennenstadt,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Muhr und Bender,
Attendom, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Not. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 208,499
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Not. 17,
1979 2946469
Int. a.' B25J 15/00: B66F 9/00
VJS. a. 414-753 10 CMau
1. In an excavator dipper stick and bucket assembly wherein
the bucket is pivotally connected to one end of the dipper stick
for movement about a first axis, a bucket linkage connected
between the dipper stick and the bucket, and an extensible and
retractable hydraulic actuator connected between the dipper
stick and the linkage for effecting pivotal movement of the
bucket upon extension or retraction of the actuator, the im-
provement residing in the linkage and comprising: a first link
having an end pivotally connected to the bucket for movement
about a second axis which is parallel to and spaced from the
first axis; a second link having an end pivotally connected to a
1. A manipulator for heavy objects, said manipulator com-
prising:
a support carriage;
918
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
a manipulator body fixed on and displaceable with said
carriage;
an upper jaw and a lower jaw pivotal on said body about
respective superposed upper and lower parallel axes, said
upper jaw being formed with a downwardly directed
actuation face and said lower jaw being formed with a
generally upwardly directed and flat actuation face; and
actuator means including an actuator head having an arcuate
and generally upwardly directed operating face engage-
able with said downwardly directed face of said upper jaw
and a generally downwardly directed and flat actuation
face flatly engageable with said upwardly directed face of
said lower jaw for displacing same between an open posi-
tion in which said jaws are pivoted apart from each other
and a closed position in which said jaws are pivoted to-
gether, the faces being so spaced and oriented that on
displacement from said Of)en to said closed position said
lower jaw is pivoted up into said closed position before
said upper jaw is pivoted down into said closed position.
4^1,170
REVERSING DEVICE FOR PRESS WORKED GOODS
Masaru Orii, Machida, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Orii Jidoki Seisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,183
U.S. CI. 414—758
Int. a.' B65G 47/24
1 Claim
15
10 9
,13
16
17-^
,3
distance and not as a function of arc degrees, and a peripheral
wall extending between said side walls in a direction parallel to
the axis of said turbine wheel, said peripheral wall coextensive
with said axisymmetrical side walls around at least 360 arc
degrees of said axis, the radial distance of said peripheral wall
from said turbine wheel axis being defmed by the path pre-
scribed by the direction of said fluid flow in a free vortex
concentric with said turbine wheel axis and constrained by said
axisymmetrical side walls, the angle between a tangent to said
peripheral wall at a given location and a radial line from the
wheel axis to said location, measured in a plane perpendicular
to the wheel axis of rotation, varying as a function of the radial
and tangential components of the fluid velocity at that loca-
tion, whereby there are no resolved wall pressure components,
except for the effects of friction, which interact with the fluid
tangential velocity as said fluid moves inwards from said inlet
to said outlet.
1. A reversing device for press worked goods, comprising in
combination a.slide base having sliding guides along the feed
direction of press worked goods, a slider attached to said slide
base movably guided by said sliding guides, a reversing plate
provided on the front end of said slider and rotatably sup-
ported around a central axis of rotation at right angle to the
feed direction of press worked goods, a reversing drive means
for reciprocatively rotating said reversing plate by 180°, and a
straightway drive means for reciprocative movement of said
slider along said sliding guides by a distance necessary for
restoring the position of press worked goods changed by the
reversing due to said reversing plate. ^
4,381,171
CASTING FOR A TURBINE WHEEL
Paul M. Chappie, Columbus, Ind., assignor to Cummins Engine
Company, Inc., Columbus, Ind.
Continuation of Ser. No. 953,101, Oct. 20, 1978, abandoned.
This application Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 228,163
Int. a.3 POID 1/08. 25/24
U.S. a. 415-204 9 Oaims
1. A nozzleless centered vortex fixed geometry turbine hous-
ing surrounding the periphery of a turbine wheel having an
axis of rotation, said housing including at least one elongated
substantially spiral compressible fluid passageway having an
external inlet and an internal outlet for encompassing said
wheel periphery, the said passageway being defined by a pair
of opposed axisymmetrical side walls extending circumferen-
tially around at least 360 arc degrees of said axis and having
inner diameters proximate the periphery of said turbine wheel,
said axisymmetry resulting in a predetermined constant dis-
tance between said opposing side walls at a given radius from
said turbine wheel axis, said distance measured parallel to said
turbine wheel axis and varying only as a function of radial
4,381,172
CENTRIPETAL FLOW GAS TURBINE
Mason K. Yu, Birmingham, Mich., assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,746
Int. a.3 FOID 9/02
U.S. a. 415—205 3 Qaims
1. In a nozzleless centripetal flow turbine assembly including
a housing defining a rotor cavity, a turbine rotor disposed in
said cavity and supported on said housing for rotation about a
first axis thereof, a volute chamber disposed in a plane gener-
ally perpendicular to said first axis having an inlet for motive
fluid at one end and extending substantially 360° around said
rotor cavity, and a nozzleless circular orifice between said
volute chamber and said rotor cavity for directing motive fluid
against said turbine rotor at a stator exit angle, the improve-
ment comprising, means defining a manifold chamber gener-
ally coextensive with said volute chamber and having a closed
end and an open end adapted to receive said motive fluid, and
louver means connecting said manifold chamber and said vo-
lute chamber operative to effect injection of at least one stream
of motive fluid from said manifold chamber into the flow of
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
919
motive fluid in said volute chamber thereby to alter said stator
exit angle of said motive fluid for improvement of overall
turbine efficiency.
4,381,173
COOLABLE ROTOR BLADE ASSEMBLY FOR AN AXIAL
FLOW ROTARY MACHINE
Melvin Freling, West Hartford, Conn., assignor to United Tech-
nologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,031
Int. a.3 POID 5/18
U.S. a. 416—96 A 3 Claims
means and said prime mover being pivoted about an axis
(14/90);
means (54/102) coupling said fixed pulley means (52/98) to
said variable pulley means (50/82. 84);
a base member (12) supporting said prime mover (10), piv-
oted about said axis;
means including a fluid damper motor (26. 28) having a
pivotally mounted pneumatic motor and an air operated
piston (36. 38) connected to an extensible and a retractable
rod member (36, 38) coupled to said base member, opera-
ble to impart an arcuate motion to both said prime mover
and said variable pulley means in response to a fluid con-
trol signal coupled to said fluid motor means (26, 28)
whereby the ratio of the pitch diameters of said fixed and
variable pulley means are varied to impart a speed varia-
tion to said rotary device (58);
fluid circuit means (68) operable in response to fluid input
signals corresponding to the desired and actual speed of
said rotary device (58) to provide a fluid feedback control
signal; and
means (74) coupling said fiuid control signal to said fluid
motor means (26. 28).
1. For a gas turbine engine, a coolable rotor blade assembly
of the type formed of a hollow rotor blade having an inwardly
facing wall and having a base which is adapted by an opening
in the base surrounded by an inwardly facing seat to receive an
impingement tube, the impingement tube being adapted by a
face to conform to the seat, being spaced from the blade to
form a cavity therebetween, and in fiuid communication at a
second pressure with a source for cooling fluid at a first pres-
sure and with the wall of the blade through a plurality of holes
and the cavity at a third pressure, the improvement which
comprises:
a fiber metal seal disposed between the seat of the blade and
the face of the tube wherein the seal blocks the leakage of
the cooling fluid between the tube and the blade to main-
tain the requisite pressure gradient across the tube to the
wall for impingement cooling.
4,381,175
JET ELECTRIC PUMP
John W. Erickson, Huntington Beach, Calif., assignor to Kobe,
Inc., Huntington Park, Calif.
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 185,824
Int. a.3 F04B 23/08
U.S. CI. 417—80 3 aaims
- 1'
rOWCM I
SUP^t I
♦ •
'
")
•''Y\
: mijsy<«
4381 174
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
Henry D. Obler, Lanham, Md., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Administrator of the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,786
Int. a.3 P04B 49/00
U.S. CI. 417—15 15 aaims
1. A variable speed drive for a rotary device (58) powered
from a prime mover (10), comprising:
fixed pulley means (52/98) located on the shaft (56) of said
rotary device;
variable pulley means (50/82. 84) located on and dnven by
the shaft (48) of said prime mover (10), said variable pulley
1. An electrically controlled jet pump assembly adapted for
downhole residence in a well comprising: an electric motor;
electrical conduits extending from a wellhead to said electric
motor; a centrifugal pump driven by said electric motor and
having an outlet directed to a production string and an inlet; a
jet pump having an inlet for aspirated fluid, an inlet for power
fluid, and an outlet for the combined output of the aspirated
and power fluids; means for providing well fluid to said jet
pump inlet for aspirated fluid; means connecting said outlet of
said jet pump to said inlet of said centrifugal pump; means
providing a recirculation path for a portion of the output of
said centrifugal pump to said inlet for power fluid of said jet
pump; variable flow valve means in said recirculation path,
whereby the amount of recirculation fluid can be controlled;
and electrical means including said electrical conduits for
controlling said variable flow valve means from the well head.
4,381,176
DESTROKING START VALVE FOR VARIABLE
DISPLACEMENT PUMP
Herbert H. Kouns, CamariUo, and Richard A. Clark, Oxnard,
both of Calif., astignors to Abex Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,461
Int a.5 P04B 1/26
U.S. a. 417—222 3 Claims
1. A control for a variable displacement pump driven by a
prime mover comprising a thrust plate, means for pivotally
mounting the thrust plate such that it is movable between a
position of minimum fluid displacement and a position of maxi-
mum fluid displacement, a fluid inlet and a fluid outlet, means
920
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
for biasing the thrust plate towards the maximum fluid dis-
placement position, a stroke control piston, means for guiding
the stroke control piston to engage the thrust plate, first valve
means alternatively movable between an open position in
which pressure fluid from the fluid outlet is supplied to the
stroke control piston to move the thrust plate towards the
minimum fiuid displacement position and a closed position in
which the supply of outlet pressure fluid to the stroke control
piston is interrupted, means in the first valve means for setting
the maximum allowable pressure of the fluid in the outlet,
wherein the first valve means is moved to the open position if
the pressure of the fluid in the outlet exceeds the set maximum
fluid pressure, second valve means alternatively movable be-
tween an open position in which pressure fluid from the fluid
outlet is supplied to the stroke control piston to move the
thrust plate towards the minimum fluid displacement position,
and a closed position in which the supply of outlet pressure
fluid to the stroke control piston is interrupted, means in the
second valve means for setting a minimum fluid pressure in the
fluid outlet to which the second valve means responds and
means for moving the second valve means from the open
position to the closed position to disable the second valve
means when the pressure of the fluid in the fiuid outlet reaches
the set minimum, wherein the second valve means is in the
open position when the prime mover is started to thereby
reduce the load on the prime mover and is moved to the closed
position after the prime mover has reached its rated operating
sp)eed.
4,381,177
SONIC PRESSURE WAVE SURFACE OPERATED PUMP
Arthur P. Bentley, P.O. Box 1952, Roswell, N. Mex. 88201
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 160,934, Jun. 19, 1980, Pat. No.
4,341,505, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 958,552,
Nov. 8, 1978, Pat. No. 4,259,799. This application Apr. 13, 1981,
Ser. No. 253,317
Int. a.3 P04F 7/00
U.S. a. 417—240 19 Oaims
1. A sonic pressure wave surface operated single tube pump
for pumping liquid from an underground level to a ground
level, said pump containing a column of liquid and comprising:
(a) a sonic pressure wave generator at the ground surface and
including,
I. a cylinder having a bore and a liquid delivery port extend-
ing radially from said bore,
II. a piston reciprocal in said cylinder and movable to open
and close said delivery port, said piston having an end face
with a central recess therein for reciprocally impacting
the column of liquid to produce sonic pressure waves
which move through the column of liquid adjacent the
periphery thereof;
(b) a sonic pressure wave swirl chamber defining a bore and
having a tangential port opening into that bore adjacent one
end thereof, said tangential port being in communication
with the bore of said cylinder for receiving the sonic pres-
sure waves therefrom and directing them into the bore of
said swirl chamber;
(c) an elongated metallic tube connected to said swirl chamber
so that its bore is in communication with the other end of the
bore of said swirl chamber for receiving the sonic pressure
waves therefrom, said tube having its longitudinal axis dis-
posed in angular relationship with respect to the longitudinal
axis of said cylinder, said tube extending through the ground
formation to the underground level;
(d) said bore of said swirl chamber being of oblique cylindrical
configuration for angularly altering the movement path of
the sonic pressure waves from being coaxial with said cylin-
der to being coaxial with said tube; and
(e) pumping mechanism means connected to the extending end
of said tube and in communication with the underground
liquid to be pumped, said pumping mechanism means includ-
ing a reciprocally op>erable plunger for impingingly receiv-
ing the sonic pressure waves from said tube and reflecting
them into a centrally and upwardly moving column which
carries the liquid to be pumped to the ground surface.
4,381,178
SWASH-PLATE TYPE COMPRESSOR
Shozo Nakayama; Kimio Kato, both of Kariya; Nobuyuki Araki,
Nagoya, and Kenji Takenaka, Kariya, all of Japan, assignors
to Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda Jidoshokki Seisakusho, Aichi,
Japan
Filed Jul. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 171,045
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 6, 1979, 54-99995
Int. Q\? F04B 1/16, 1/18
U.S. a. 417—269 8 Claims
1. A swash-plate type compressor comprising:
a rotary shaft;
a swash-plate secured to said rotary shaft;
a cylinder block rotatabiy supporting said rotary shaft, and
consisting of two halves each having a plurality of circum-
ferentially spaced cylinder bores which extend axially of
said rotary shaft and have the centers on a circle whose
center is located on the axis of said rotary shaft, said two
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
921
halves being assembled in abutment with each other such
that said cylinder bores in said respective two halves are in
alignment with each other, said cylinder block having a
swash-plate chamber rotatably accommodating said
swash-plate and constituting a passage for sucked refriger-
ant gas; and
a plurality of pistons slidably received in said cylinder bores
and each having an engaging recess engaging said swash-
plate,
said cylinder block further having
an inlet passage through which a stream of refrigerant gas is
sucked therein,
a continuously annular passage communicated with said
inlet passage, concentric with said circle and open to said
swash-plate chamber, said annular passage being formed
« circumferentially in a radially inward portion of the cylin-
drical wall of said cylinder block, having a diameter larger
than that of a common circumcircle of said cylinder bores,
and functioning as a by-pass for said sucked refrigerant gas
flowing through said swash-plate chamber, and
a plurality of circumferentially spaced, axially extending,
holes communicated with said swash-plate chamber, said
annular passage and said cylinder bores, and accommodat-
ing fixing bolts for clamping said two halves, said holes
having a diameter larger than that of said fixing bolts so
that an annular space formed between the inner surface of
said holes and the outer surface of said bolts serves as a
communicating passage to said cylinder bores, said diame-
ter of said holes increasing with an angular distance of said
holes as measured from a junction of said inlet passage and
said annular passage, whereby the sucked refrigerant gas
is evenly delivered to said plurality of pistons and a por-
tion of each of said pistons adjacent to said engaging
recess is cooled evenly on both radially inward and out-
ward sides thereof.
mined radius formed through said thickness dimension at
a location displaced inwardly of an end edge of said con-
necting rod means by a distance less than said predeter-
mined radius to define an arcuate recess in said end edge;
(b) a generally cylindrical wrist pin means having an outside
diameter slightly less than two times said predetermined
radius and a flattened lateral surface such that said wrist
pin is insertable in and rotatably held in said second bore;
and
(c) means for attaching said plunger means to said flattened
surface of said wrist pin.
4381,180
DOUBLE DIAPHRAGM PUMP WITH CONTROLLING
SLIDE VALVE AND ADJUSTABLE STROKE
John R. SeU, 1633 Marconi Rd., WaU, N J. 07719
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,933
Int. a.3P04B7 7/00
U.S. a. 417—393 22 Claiim
4,381,179
PUMPS WITH FLOATING WRIST PINS
Ramon Pareja, Edina, Minn., assignor to Lear Siegler, Inc.,
Santa Monica, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 202,463, Oct. 31, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,989
Int. a.3 F04B 9/04; F16H 21/08: F16J 1/10; P04B 1/04
U.S. a. 417—273 16 Chums
1. In a fluid handling pump of the type having a crankshaft
with at least one portion thereof eccentrically offset from the
axis of rotation of said crankshaft and plunger means disposed
in a cylinder bore for reciprocatory movement therein, the
improvement comprising:
(a) single piece connecting rod means of a predetermined
thickness dimension having a first bore passing through
said thickness dimension for encompassing said one por-
tion of said crankshaft and a second bore of a predeter-
1. A double-acting, pressurized fluid-actuated double dia-
phragm pump for fluids and the like, said pump including:
(a) a main pump housing support adapted for mounting to a
support means;
(b) a first pump housing means attachable to said main pump
housing support, the first housing means including inner
and outer diaphragm housing members with the outer
members having inlet and outlet valve means providing
one-way flow control of the pumped fluid;
(c) a first diaphragm interposed between said inner and outer
housing members and means for securing the diaphragm
at its outer periphery in a fluid tight manner;
(d) a second pump housing means attachable to said main
pump housing support, said second housing means includ-
ing inner and outer diaphragm housing members with the
outer member having inlet and outlet valve means provid-
ing one-way flow control of the pumped fluid;
(e) a second diaphragm interposed between the inner and
outer diaphragm housing members and means for securing
said second diaphragm at its outer periphery in a fluid
tight manner;
(0 a reciprocable rod connecting the central portion of the
first and second diaphragms and as one diaphragm is
moved outwardly to provide an expelling actuation the
other diaphragm is moved inwardly to provide an intake
actuation, said rod secured at its ends to central portions
of the diaphragms and with the rod carried in and by
■ bearing means provided in the main pump housing;
(g) a pressurized fluid inlet connecting means adapted to
receive the pressurized fluid from an external source and
deliver said fluid to a control system including conduit
means;
(h) a sUde valve associated with the main pump housing and
including a housing and a spindle reciprocable to two
limits of movement in a finished bore of regular diameter
922
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
formed in said housing, said spindle having reduced diam-
eter areas interposed between four seal ring areas, each
ring area adapted to restrict flow of pressurized fluid
along said bore;
(i) means for sealing the ends of the finished bore so that
pressurized fluid does not escape from said bore as the
spindle is moved therein;
(j) a pair of arm member means carried on and movably
secured to the reciprocable rod as it is cycled;
(k) a pair of pilot valves each carried in a bore in a boss
portion provided within the main pump housing, each of
said pilot valves arranges as a mirror pair and having a
shaft within said pilot valve and with an extending end
disposed to be engaged and moved by an arm member
means, each of said valves having a bias means adapted to
urge the shaft toward the central portion of the main
housing, said pilot valves additionally having a pair of
spaced disk portions adapted to alternately engage rib
portions disposed between inwardly facing portions car-
ried by the shaft of the pilot valve and with these disk
portions adapted to be alternately brought into engage-
ment with the rib faces so as to shut off fluid flow to and
from the interior of the pilot valve and with each pilot
valve providing conduit means disposed between the ribs;
(1) a conduit from the inner side of the diaphragm chamber
and to a position adjacent the inlet of pressurized fluid
from the source and to the spindle reduced area;
(m) a conduit from the diaphragm chamber and through the
pilot valve and to the conduit means between the ribs of a
pilot valve, and
(n) a discharge conduit from the main pump housing,
whereby pressurized fluid is fed to the inlet thence to the
reduced area of the spindle intermediate its ends and
between the second and third seal ring areas and with the
spindle at its left position the pressurized fluid between the
second and third seal ring areas flows therefrom to the
inner side of the first diaphragm to provide a pumping
actuation, and the first pilot valve is closed to pressurized
fluid flow from the first diaphragm chamber and pressur-
ized fiuid flows from the reduced area of the spindle
between the third and fourth seals and exterior of the
fourth seal to and through the second pilot valve and from
this pilot valve to and through the discharge conduit in
the main pump housing, and when the first pilot valve is
actuated by the first arm member pressurized fluid flow is
reversed as to the first pilot valve and pressurized fluid
from the diaphragm chamber and the first pilot valve is
caused to fiow into the closed bore exterior of the first seal
to move the spindle to the other limit of motion to un-
cover a passageway to the second diaphragm and pressur-
ized fiuid enters the second diaphragm chamber and
moves the diaphragm to a pumping actuation and this
actuation is reciprocably and alternately made in response
to actuations of the pilot valves and their actuation by said
arm members.
second ferromagnetic core members angularly displaced
therefrom;
electromagnetic means in surrounding relationship to said
conduit, said electromagnetic means including at least first
and second windings angularly displaced with respect to
spacing between said at least first and second ferromagnetic
core members for inducing unidirectional rotation of said
impeller in response to energization of said windings in a
preselected sequence; and
means for energizing said windings in the preselected se-
quence.
4,381,182
FUEL INJECTION PUMP
Brian E. Broadwith, Hadleigh, England, assignor to Lucas In-
dustries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,384
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 27, 1979,
7926294
Int. a.3 P04B 39/00, 27/08, 19/22
U.S. a. 417—435 1 Qaim
r~^
4,381,181
SOLENOID-ACTUATED CENTRIFUGAL PUMP AND
METHOD
Warren P. Qegg, 630 Augusta, Houston, Tex. 77057
ContiouatioB of Ser. No. 914,411, Jun. 12, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 177,139
Int. a.}F04B 17/04
US. a. 417—423 R 6 Claims
1. A centrifugal pump comprising:
a circular closM loop conduit;
a fluid outlet intersecting said conduit and providing an outlet
path exterior of a circle defined by the conduit;
a fluid inlet intersecting said conduit means and being dis-
placed from said outlet in a first direction of travel along an
arc defined by said conduit, said inlet directing fiuid into said
conduit means from a direction interior of the circle defined
by the conduit;
an impeller within said conduit and including at least first and
1. A fuel injection pump for use with an internal combustion
engine comprising a body part, a rotary distributor member
housed in said body part, a fuel delivery passage in said rotary
part, a plurality of fuel inlet passages defined in said rotary part
to periodically fiuidly connect said delivery passage with fuel
inlet passages defined in said body part and to disconnect such
passages at other times as said rotary part rotates, a main pump-
ing chamber formed within said distributor member housing a
main plunger, an auxiliary pumping chamber formed within
said distributor member housing an auxiliary plunger, the
pumping plungers being operable to pressurize charges of fuel
in the chambers to a pressure suitable for delivery to the associ-
ated engine, valve means operable upon the attainment of a
predetermined engine speed to disable the auxiliary pumping
chamber so that the supply of fuel to the engine is from the
main chamber only, means for supplying fuel to the pumping
chambers, a spill passage means formed in said rotary distribu-
tor member and having an inlet end thereof fiuidly connected
with said auxiliary pumping chamber and an outlet end thereof
fiuidly connected with any one of a plurality of spill ports
formed in said body part, said spill passage means being located
in said distributor member and said spill ports being located in
said body part so that said distributor located outer end is in
fluid communication with one of said body located spill ports
when said inlet and fuel delivery passages are in fluid conunu-
April 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
923
nication with each other and are out of fluid communication
with each other when said fuel delivery passages are out of
communication with each other, so that said spill means outlet
end and one of said spill ports are brought into fluid communi-
cation with each other during essentially the entire time fuel is
being supplied to said auxiliary chamber.
4^1,183
APPARATUS FOR REMOVING WASTE MATERIAL
FROM A PLASTIC ARTICLE
Kenneth E. Bowers, Prairie Village, Kans., and Charles E.
Markley, Kansas City, Mo., assignors to Ethyl Development
Corporation, Richmond, Va.
Filed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 314,007
Int. a.5B29C7 7/07. 17/12
U.S. a. 425—182 15 Qaims
from its respective gripping means and in a horizontal plane
in which lies that portion of the respective gnpping means
which is closest to said bottom formmg ends of said mold
halves, said first and second grippmg means being located
immediately adjacent to the bottom-forming end of said
mold halves and together adapted to engage between them
the depending tail for removal from said hollow article upon
actuation of said first and second power means.
4,381,184
EXTRUDER APPARATUS
Samuel Hurni, Aeschstrasse 89b, CH 4202 Duggingen, and Hans
R. Weber, Hinterberg 24, CH 9014 St. Gallen, both of Swit-
zerland
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,025
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 19, 1979,
6721/79
Int. a.' B29F i/OA
U.S. a. 425—202 15 Oaims
20 15 19 VI —1 16 8 2^ 2 11 1
22 23
18 17
1. In an apparatus for blow molding a hollow, plastic article
from a tubular plastic parison in which said apparatus includes,
a split blow mold having two halves, two individual mold
support means, one of each support means being attached to
one of each mold half ^nd extending below a bottom forming
end of each respective mold half, power means to move each
individual support means and each associated mold half to
open and close said split blow mold and in which said hollow
plastic article, while being enclosed and supported by said
mold halves, has a tail attached thereto which depends from
the bottom forming ends of said mold halves; an improved tail
grasping assembly for removing said Uil from said hollow
article, which assembly comprises:
a. first and second assembly support frames, said first assembly
support frame being adjustably attached to one of said two
mold support means and said second assembly support frame
being adjustably attached to the other of said mold support
means, said first and second assembly support frames being
positioned below said bottom-forming ends of said mold
halves;
b. first and second power means, said first power means being
attached to said first assembly support frame and said second
power means being attached to said second support frame,
said first and second power means each having a connecting
rod extending therefrom towards said bottom-forming ends
of said mold halves; and
c. first and second gripping means, said first gripping arm being
attached to said first power means and said second gripping
means being attached to said second power means, said first
and second gripping means being pivoubly mounted to said
first and second assembly support frames respectively, each
pivotal mounting being about a point which is laterally offset
1. Apparatus for extruding pieces of an extrudable stock,
comprising:
(a) a housing having a nozzle head;
(b) a tubular bore in said housing;
(c) a rotatable worm mounted in said bore having an outlet end
located at said nozzle head;
(d) an interrupter mounted on said worm at said outlet end for
rotation therewith;
(e) at least one nozzle in said nozzle head;
(0 at least one recess in said interrupter, formed and positioned
to provide intermittent communication between said worm
and said nozzle during roUtion of said worm and interrupter;
(g) said interrupter further having a sealing face adjacent each
recess to intermittently close said nozzle during rotation of
said worm and interrupter, said recess and sealing face being
so arranged as to alternately open and close said nozzler
once per rotation of said worm and interrupter; and
(h) a nozzle construction wherein an axially extending slot is
formed in the nozzle head and has a base surface at an end
thereof, said nozzle construction having an axially moveable
wedge with an end surface positioned within the slot, and
means for firmly and adjustably holding the wedge in the
slot at a selected distance from the base surface of the slot,
said nozzle being formed between the end surface of said
wedge and the base surface of said slot, said selected distance
determining the nozzle size and being adjustable to vary the
latter;
(i) said wedge being attached to the periphery of a piston that
is axially displaceable in the tubular bore, said piston having
a piston rod extending in a direction away from said worm,
wherein the piston rod extends through an axial bore of a
threaded ring which is threaded into the bore of said hous-
ing, and wherein means are provided to prevent movement
of said rod relative to said threaded ring, said ring being
axially adjustable to permit positioning of said wedge in said
slot.
CHEMICAL
4,381,185
WATER-FAST PRINTING WITH WATER-SOLUBLE
DYES
Sally A. Swanson, San Jose; Ned M, Weinsbenker, Palo Alto;
Robert E. Wingard, Jr., Mountain View, and Daniel J. Daw-
son, Los Altos, all of Calif., assignors to Dynapol, Palo Alto,
Calif.
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,912
Int. a.5 C09B 69/10
U.S. a. 8—506 13 Qaims
1. A process for the water-fast printing of paper using a true
solution containing one or more water-soluble polymeric dyes
which comprises the steps of
a. selecting a paper stock characterized as containing not less
than 250 parts per million by weight, basis paper weight,
of polyvalent metal cation,
b. applying to said paper stock effective printing amounts of
a colorant solution that comprises an aqueous solvent
having dissolved therein at least about 500 parts per mil-
lion by weight, basis solution, of a polymeric colorant or
colorants characterized as nonchromophoric groups link-
ing a plurality of units of chromophore, as containing
anionic groups, and from 2 to 30% basis total solution of
a water-soluble oxygen-containing organic paper-pene-
trating aid selected from three to eight carbon atom alka-
nols, glycols, glycol ethers and lactones thereby forming
an unflnished print, and
c. removing said solvent from said unfinished print.
tion, a liquid heavy hydrocarbon fuel having an end boiling
point of 650° F. or greater, comprising the steps of:
introducing the liquid fuel and heated air at 4>o greater than
3 into a prevaporization and mixing zone and vaporizing
in said zone less than 50% of the liquid fuel using only
sensible heat in said air forming a mixture of air. vaporized
fuel, and unvaporized fuel;
passing the entire mixture from said prevaporization and
mixing zone through a catalyst zone disposed immediately
downstream of said prevaporization and mixing zone said
catalyst zone including a catalyst monolith consisting
essentially of a ceramic or metal substrate having catalytic
wall surfaces, said catalytic wall surfaces extending in a
downstream direction defining a plurality of parallel cells
with a cell dimension of between 0.05 and 0.50 inch said
catalyst having been initially preheated sufficiently to
initiate catalytic combustion of the vaporized fuel and air
upon start-up of the process;
the catalyst, the length of the catalyst zone, the catolyst cell
dimension, and the fuel flow rate having been preselected
such that continuous vaporization and gasification of
unvaporized liquid fuel is sustained within the catalyst
zone after start-up using only the heat generated by the
reactions within the catalyst zone and no significant soot is
formed.
4,381,186
PROCESS FOR DYEING POLYAMIDIC TEXTILE
MATERIALS, IN PARTICULAR HIGH DYEING SPEED
POLY AMIDES WITH AUD DYES AND ALKALINE
REACTANTS
Eugenio Magni, Busto Arsizio, and Claudio Pemetti, Milan,
both of Italy, assignors to Snia Viscosa Societa' Nazionale
Industria Applicazioni Viscosa SpA, Milan, Italy
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 244,923
Claims priority, application Italy, Mar. 19, 1980, 20782 A/80
Int. a.3 D06P 3/06. 1/67
U.S. a. 8—620 17 Claims
1. A process for dyeing quick dyeing synthetic polyamides
consisting essentially of dyeing said polyamides in a bath con-
taining acid dyes, an ammonium salt and an alkali metal hy-
droxide, and having an initial pH between 8 and 9.5, and heat-
ing said bath to a final temperature of 60' C, said alkali metal
hydroxide and said ammonium salt being added in an amount
sufficient to lower the pH of the bath, at the final temperature
by 0.5-0.9.
4,381,187 "
PROCESS FOR GASIFYING LIQUID HYDROCARBON
FUELS
Richard A. Sederquist, Newington, Conn., assignor to United
Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 132,760, Mar. 24, 1980, abandoned.
This application Not. 27, IMI^ Ser. No. 325,413 \
4,381,188
GRINDING DISK
Walter Waizer, Innsbruck; Harald Helletsberger, Wattens;
Christof Kriegsbaber, Scbwaz, and Volker Selgrad, Innsbruck,
all of Austria, assignors to Tyrolit-Scbleifmittelwerke Swarov-
ski KG, Scbwaz, Austria
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,671
Oaims priority, application Austria, Apr. 1, 1980, 1753/80
Int. a.' B24D 3/04. 3/28
U.S. a. 51—298 23 Claims
Int. a.J ClOG 11/28; COIB 2/16
1. An abrasive article comprising abrasive grains, a bonding
agent and pellets, wherein said pellets comprise (1) a bonding
agent, (2) a matrix of at least one stable pulverulent filler resis-
tant to water and air and to temperatures below the abrasive
article manufacturing temperature, selected from the group
consisting of graphite, pyrite, potassium, fiuoboratc, zinc sul-
fide, cryolite, calcium fluoride and sodium chiolite, and (3) at
least one active filler imbedded in said matrix, selected from
the group consisting of an alkali metol halogenide, an alkaline
earth metal halogenide, elemental sulfur, ferric chloride, zinc
chloride, tin chloride, manganese chloride, AICI3, C0CI3,
CrCb, FeCh and NH4CI.
U.S. a. 48—212
7 Claims
^'1
^-'.■
1. A process for gasifying, at an overall fuel/air equivalence
ratio <^o of greater than 3.0 and without significant soot forma-
4,381,189
PRESSURE SWING ADSORPTION PROCESS AND
SYSTEM
AndrUa Fuderer, Antwerp, Belgium, assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
FUed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,418
Int a.' BOID 53/04
U.S. a. 55—26 41 Claims
1. In an adiabatic pressure swing adsorption process for
selectively adsorbing at least one gas component from a feed
gas mixture in a main multiple adsorption bed system in which
each main bed undergoes the processing cycle of (a) introduc-
tion of feed gas to the bed inlet end at a superatmospheric
925
926
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
adsorption pressure with discharge of unadsorbed effluent
from the discharge end thereof; (b) partial cocurrent depres-
surization of said bed with release of void space gas from the
discharge end of the bed; (c) introduction of the released void
space gas to the discharge end of an adsorption bed(s), initially
at lower pressure to equalize the pressure therebetween; (d)
release of gas from the inlet end of the bed partially depressur-
ized during said cocurrent depressurization step (b) above for
countercurrent blowdown to its desorption pressure; (e) re-
pressurization of the purged bed to the adsorption pressure;
and (0 repetition of the cycle of steps (a)-(e) with additional
quantities of feed gas, the improvement comprising terminat-
ing said cocurrent depressurization at an intermediate pressure
such that the ratio of adsorption pressure/intermediate pres-
sure is less than about 5/1, and
(i) releasing void space gas from the inlet end of said main
bed for partial countercurrent depressurization thereof
prior to said countercurrent blowdown of step (d) above;
(ii) introducing the released void space gas of step (i) above
to the inlet end of a satellite bed at about said intermediate
pressure, said satellite bed being one of a satellite group of
adsorption beds containing a lesser number and smaller
beds than in said mam bed system; and
(iii) releasing gas from the discharge end of said satellite bed,
whereby main bed utilization is enhanced, thus enabling re-
duced bed volume and less adsorbent to be employed, while
product recovery is also enhanced.
4,381,190
PROCESS FOR DRYING AND COMPRESSING
CHLORINE GAS
Mark S. Carron, Spring Valley, N.Y., and Desmond C. McCar-
thy, Weston, Conn., assignors to Stauffer Chemical Company,
Westport, Conn.
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 306,983
Int. a.' BOID 33/26
L.S. CI. 55—30 11 Claims
WIUTE « '—3-*
"a*« FBtSH
^^^ CONC
M25a4
1. A method of drying and compressing wet chlorine gas
which comprises: passing the chlorine gas to be dried and
compressed into at least one compression stage comprising a
liquid ring compressor using sulfuric acid as the liquid medium
and a second mechanical compressor.
LaVoice B.
Robert L
4,381,191
DRILLING MUD DEGASSER
Brand, 117 Ruskin, Chickasha, Okla. 73018, and
Brand, P.O. Box 135, Alex, Okla. 73002
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 277,019
Int. a.^ BOID 19/00
U.S. a. 55—193 6 Qaims
1. An apparatus for degassing drilling mud, comprising:
a tank having an upper end and a lower end, wherein a mud
inlet is formed in central portions of the upper end of the
tank and a mud outlet is formed in lower portions of the
tank;
a plurality of partitions mounted in the tank between the
mud inlet and the mud outlet so as to form a plurality of
vertically stacked compartments between the upper and
lower ends of the tank, wherein alternate partitions are
characterized as alternatively having a peripheral edge
spaced from the inner surface of the wall of the tank and
a central aperture formed therethrough, the uppermost
partition being of the type having a peripheral edge
spaced from the wall of the tank;
pumping means for directing a jet of the drilling mud to be
degassed against central portions of said uppermost parti-
tion via said mud inlet, the pumping means comrpising:
a mud input conduit having a discharge opening disposed
above the uppermost partition, the mud input conduit
extending through the mud inlet, across a portion of the
upper end of the tank and downwardly along side the
tank to a mud pit wherein said drilling mud to be de-
gassed is disposed;
a submersible pump disposed in said mud pit and con-
nected to the mud input conduit for forcing drilling
mud from the mud pit into the mud input conduit; and
means for driving the submersible pump; and
means for discharging gas evolved from said drilling mud
from said tank
wherein the tank is characterized as having a cover portion
attached to said wall and extending across the upper end of the
tank; wherein the mud inlet is formed in central portions of said
cover portion; wherein a plurality of apertures are formed
through said cover portion of the tank adjacent the wall
thereof; and wherein the means for discharging gas from the
tank comprises a plurality of tubes extending through said
apertures in the cover portion, said tubes having means fluidly
communicating the interiors thereof with the interior of the
tank and said tubes having open upper ends disposed above the
tank.
4,381,192
nLTER BAG FOR VACUUM CLEANER
Jean P. Grimard, 9, rue du 11 Novembre, Saint-Genis-Laval,
France (69230)
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,316
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 30, 1980, 80 10128
Int. a.i BOID 46/02
U.S. a. 55—376 10 Claims
1. In a vacuum cleaner, the combination comprising:
(a) a filter bag made of Altering material, said bag deflned by
superposed inner and outer layers that are separated from
each other to provide a space between said layers;
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
927
(b) means for providing access to said space between said
layers;
(c) an inlet pipe connected with said vacuum cleaner and
said filter bag;
(d) said inner and outer layers provided with concentric
openings which receive said inlet pipe for conveying fluid
to be filtered to the interior of the filter bag;
(e) a rigid base member removably attached to the vacuum
cleaner and having at least a first part thereof received in
said accessible space and extending through said means for
providing access to said space;
(0 said base member including another part which consti-
tutes a support element for engaging the vacuum cleaner
and supporting said bag within the vacuum cleaner;
(g) each part of said base member including an opening
located substantially in alignment with said concentric bag
openings;
(h) flexible seal means connected to the periphery of at least
one of said openings and extending circumferentially
inwardly from said periphery; whereby, said seal means
extends in sealing engagement with said inlet pipe when
said inlet pipe is received into said aligned openings.
tion with a lignin, the improvement of forming the combina-
tion by
(a) forming a pseudoplastic aqueous suspension concentrate
of a water-insoluble alkali lignin containing minor
amounts of at least one surfactant selected from the group
consisting of humectants, wetting agents, dispersing
agents and anti-freeze agents wherein the lignin has a
mean particle size of from 0.5 to S microns in diameter,
and
(b) combining a phytotoxicity reducing amount of the lignin
suspension concentrate with the pesticide prior to the
application.
4,381,193
INTERNAL TREATMENT SYSTEM FOR GLASSWARE
Wayne A. Wallding, Horseheads, and Leiand Sills, Bath, both of
N.Y., assignors to Thatcher Glass Corporation, Greenwich,
Conn.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,252
Int. a.' C03B 35/00
U.S. a. 65—158 7 Qaims
S-
'?)
roj
foj
r'
- ' PHiMAR'
il.J>— STST£M
-^ — CONTWX
ll .1 '^
MICH I ^J* \_J , , M» I ' ,
' t-^" "I l» i 'J , '
— -— •- L 1 FLO* *
liHARY 1
VSTEM I
iCATOHS I
fllTtB
TREATMCNrWS
rr— r
~J \ ^ D ^
^Q.^^ SYSTIM X- :^ LJli, FLO* IL0»
»i — r — J ' J sc
TBtATMthT WS
1. Apparatus for treating glassware, comprising:
primary means operative to apply a fluid treatment to the
glassware;
secondary means selectably operative to apply said fluid treat-
ment to the glassware, said secondary means being normally
nonoperative,
means responsive to the failure of said primary means to initi-
ate operation of said secondary means; and
means responsive to failure of said secondary means to reject
the glassware untreated by either the primary or secondary
means.
4,381,194
ALKALI LIGNIN BASED PESTIODE PHYTOTOXICITY
REDUaNG COMPOSITION
Humbert T. DelliColU, Hanahan; Thomas F. McPartiand,
Charleston Heights, and Walter A. Bauer, Johns Island, all of
S.C., assignors to Westraco Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,647
Int C\? AOIN 25/12
U.S. a. 71—65 29 Claims
1. In a method of protecting crops from injury caused by
application to the crops of one or more pesticides selected from
the group consisting of herbicides and fungicides, in combina-
4,381,195
N-METHYLCARBAMOYLOXY ANILIDES AS
HERBIODE EXTENDERS
Daniel L. Hyzak, Saratoga, Calif., assignor to StaufTer Chemical
Company, Westport, Conn.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,590
Int. a.' AOIN 25/22
U.S. a. 71—100 15 Qaims
1. An herbicidai composition of extended soil life comprising
(a) an herbicidally effective amount of a thiolcarbamate
having the formula
O
Rl— S— C— N
/
\
R2
in which R', R^, and R^ are independently C2-C4 alkyl;
and
(b) an amount of N-methylcarbamoyloxy anilide sufficient to
extend the soil life of said thiolcarbamate, said N-methyl-
carbamoyloxy anilide having the formula
R* X
N— C— r5
CH3NHCO
CO— ^ ^
M
in which
R* is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and
carbethoxymethyl,
R' is selected from the group consisting of Ci-Ct alkyl.
halogenated Ci-Ce alkyl, Q\-Ct, alkoxy, C3-C6 cycloal-
kyl, C3-C5 alkanoylmethyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3
dialkyl-amino, carbamylthiomethyl, and C2-C4carbalkox-
yamino, R^is selected from the group consisting of C1-C3
alkyl, C2-C4 alkanoylamino, and halogen,
X is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur,
and
n is zero or one,
wherein the weight ratio of (a) to (b) ranges from about 1 : 1 to
about 5:1, and
(c) an inert diluent carrier.
4,381,196
0-(SUBSTmJTED PHENYL) N-METHYLCARBAMATES
AS HERBIODE EXTENDERS
Daniel L. Hyzak, Saratoga, Calif., assignor to Stauffer Chemical
Company, Westport, Conn.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,924
Int a.3 AOIN 25/22
U.S. a. 71—100 15 Claims
1. An herbicidai composition of extended soil life comprising
928
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
(a) an herbicidally effective amount of a thiolcarbamate
having the formula
alloy at a substantially uniform temperature throughout of
at least its plastic transition temperature, but less than its
crystallization temperature.
R'— S— C— N
\
R2
R3
in which R', R2, and R^ are independently C2-C4 alkyl;
and
(b) an amount of an 0-(substituted phenyl) N-methylcarba-
mate sufficient to extend the soil life of said thiolcarba-
mate, said ©-(substituted phenyl) N-methylcarbamate
having the formula
CH3NHCO
in which
R^ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and
C1-C3 alkyl,
R' is C1-C3 alkyl,
R^ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
formyl, Ci-Csalkoxy, and N-methylcarbamoyloxy, and
X is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and
sulfur.
4,381,198
CERAMIC METALLIZING INK
Masani Kondo; Hisahani Shiromizu, and Yoshio leda, all of
Aichi, Japan, assignors to NGK Spark Plug Co., Ltd., Nagoya,
Japan
Filed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,368
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 12, 1981, 56-91015
Int. a.3 C23C 3/00
U.S. a. 106—1.12 4 Claims
1. A ceramic metallizing ink for forming low resistance
conductors, said ink comprising a metal powder component
comprising tungsten, molybdenum or a combination thereof as
the main ingredient, and (i) from about 0.03 to about 5.00% by
weight nickel, (ii) from about 0.03 to about 5.00% by weight of
nickel and from about 0.02 to about 0.90% by weight of cop-
per, or (iii) from about 0.03 to about 5.00% by weight of nickel
and from about 0.02 to about 0.70% by weight of cobalt, which
are contained in the ink in a sate of soluble salts thereof, to-
gether with an organic binder and a solvent.
4,381,197
WARM CONSOLIDATION OF GLASSY METALLIC
ALLOY nLAMENTS
Howard H. Liebemiann, Gloversville, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,714
Int. a.3 B22F 3/00
U.S. a. 419—24
4,381,199
AQUEOUS DISPERSION OF GLASS HBERS AND
METHOD AND COMPOSITION FOR PRODUCING
SAME
17 Qaims ^°^ ** Graham, Lexington, N.C., assignor to PPG Industries,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 221,741, Dec. 31, 1980. This application
Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,013
Int. a.3 C04B 43/02: D21F 11/00; C08L 97/00
U.S. O. 106—186 15 Claims
2000 «00 «00 1400
MWENUMtCn IC«-<1
1. The method of producing a consolidated dense discrete
netallic body comprising the steps of:
(a) defming an open-ended compacting volume;
(b) distributing a preselected amount of intertwined filamen-
tary glassy metallic alloy substantially uniformly into said
open-ended compacting volume, said filamentary alloy
having a width-to-thickness ratio of less than about 600:1;
and
(c) uniaxially compressing said preselected amount of said
filamentary alloy with a pressure for a period of time
sufficient to produce thereby a consolidated dense dis-
crete metallic body that is at least 50% glassy, with any
remainder crystalline, while maintaining said filamentary
1. Glass fibers having filament diameters larger than around
13 microns that are readily dispersible in aqueous solutions
having thereon an aqueous sizing composition, comprising:
a. about 0.1 to about 50 weight percent of a blend of alkyl
sulfate quaternary of an alkyl amino fatty acid amine or
amide and a liquid mineral oil-inorganic silica defoaming
agent made water dispersible with a compatible surfac-
tant, where the amount of the quaternary material is in the
range of about 50 to about 95 weight percent of the blend
and the amount of the defoaming agent is around 5 to
about 50 weight percent of the blend;
b. a glass fiber lubricant; and
c. water.
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
929
4,38 UOO
GLASS INSULATION WITH AN INSOLUBILIZED
ASPHALT BINDER
Charles E. Rolen, Heath; Edward R. Harrington, Newark; Al-
fred Marzocchi, Newark, and Michael G. Roberts, Newark,
all of Ohio, assignors to Owens*Coming Fiberglas Corpora-
tion, Toledo, Ohio
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,037
Int. a.3 C08L 95/00
U.S. a. 106— 282 SQaims
1. In a process for forming an acoustical or thermal insulat-
ing fibrous glass product comprising spraying a binder onto a
downwardly flowing stream of glass flbers, collecting said
sprayed flbers on a conveyor in the form of a blanket, and
heating said blanket so as to bind the flbers with said binder,
the improvement wherein said binder is a rubber-free, non-
chemically modifled asphalt emulsion and said heating com-
prises heating said asphalt for a sufficient period of time to bind
said fibers and to convert said asphalt to a substantially insolu-
bilized form, wherein said heating is done at a temperature of
at least about 140° C. for a period of time of at least about 50
hours.
Ql
4,381,202
SELECTIVE EPITAXY BY BEAM ENERGY AND
DEVICES THEREON
Hanihisa Mori, Yokohama; Tsutomu Ogawa, Tokyo, and Taka-
shi Matsumoto, Kawasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu
Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,376
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1980, 55-39288
Int. a.' HOIL 21/263. 21/265
U.S. a. 148—1.5 5 Oaims
21
15 16 210
15 16
4,381,201
METHOD FOR PRODUCTION OF SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICES
Junji Sakurai, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Fujitsu Limited, Kawa-
saki, Japan
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,130
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 11, 1980, 55-30623;
Mar. 11, 1980, 55-30624; Apr. 10, 1980, 55-47346; Apr. 11, 1980,
55-47656
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/263: B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 148—1.5 20 Oaims
i&mhpk
I7p
133 I8p
^777:
I8n 135 I7h
1. A method for the manufacture of a semiconductor device
comprising the steps of:
forming an insulating fllm on the surface of a semiconductor
substrate having a predetermined conductivity type, the
insulating fllm being selectively removed to form therein
a window at a predetermined position;
forming a semiconductor layer on the insulating fllm and the
semiconductor substrate exposed through the window;
melting the portion of the semiconductor layer corre-
sponding to the window and the portion of the semicon-
ductor substrate corresponding to the window by irradia-
tion with an energy beam to a predetermined depth, by
which an impurity in the semiconductor substrate is dif-
fused into the semiconductor layer to impart thereto a
predetermined conductivity type of relatively low impu-
rity concentration and, at the same time, make monocrys-
talline at least that portion of the semiconductor layer
corresponding to the window; and
in the substrate is diffused into the semiconductor layer
portion and the molten semiconductor layer portion is
rendered to single crystalline.
1. A method for production of a semiconductor device
comprising the steps of:
(a) forming an insulating layer on the top surface of a semi-
conductor substrate;
(b) forming a window in the insulating layer along a linear
area defining crystal nuclei and a scribe line;
(c) growing a non-single crystalline semiconductor layer on
the top surface of the insulating layer;
(d) irradiating the non-single crystalline semiconductor layer
with an energy ray selected from a group including a
photon beam, an ion beam and an electron beam, to form
a single crystalline silicon layer in contact with the sub-
strate at the crystal nuclei; and
(e) forming semiconductor elements on the single crystalline
silicon layer.
4,381,203
COATING SOLUTIONS FOR ZINC SURFACES
Earl R. Reinbold, Levittown, Pa., assignor to Amchem Products,
Inc., Ambler, Pa.
FUed Not. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,565
Int. a.3 C23C 1/10
VS. a. 148—6.14 R 32 Claims
1. An aqueous solution for applying a conversion coating to
a zinc or zinc alloy surface consisting essentially of
(a) a coating accelerating quantity of at least one of the
following anions — bromate, nitrite, persulfate, and hypo-
chlorite;
(b) at least about 0.01 grams per liter of at least one of the
following metals in the form of a cation — cobalt, nickel,
iron, and tin;
(c) a complexing agent present in an amount sufficient to
hold the cation in (b) above in solution; and
930
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
(d) sufficient alkaline material to produce a pH of at least 17 weight percent and of a purity in the range of about 99
10.5 in the solution percent or greater.
4,381,204
ADHESION OF RUBBER TO BRASS
David E. Erickson, Stow, Ohio, assignor to The General Tire &
Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 152,235, May 22, 1980, Pat. No. 4,333,787.
This application Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,050
Int. CI.' A23F 5/00
U.S. a. 148—6.31 4 Qaims
1 The method which comprises treating brass plated steel
cord in an aqueous ammonia solution containing from about
0.2 to 5% by weight of ammonia for a time and at a tempera-
ture sufficient to remove at least a substantial amount of the
corrosion products on the outer surface layers of said cord,
rinsing said cord and drying the same treating said aqueous
ammonia treated, rinsed and dried cord with H2S gas for a time
and at a temperature sufficient to provide a thin sulfide layer
on the surface of said cord and storing said treated cord in an
inert or dry atmosphere.
4,381,205
METAL QUENCHING PROCESS
Joseph F. Warchol, West Norriton, Pa., assignor to E. F.
Houghton A Company, Valley Forge, Pa.
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,531
Int. CI.' C21D 1/56
U.S. CI. 148—18 7 Qaims
1. In a process of quenching which is useful in the heat
treatment of metals wherein a metal is heated to an elevated
temperature and said heated metal is then quenched in a bath
comprising a liquid quenching medium to effect desirable
metallurgical changes in the metal, the improvement which
comprises using as said quenching medium an aqueous solution
containing from about 0.5% to about 50%, by weight, based on
the total weight of the quenching medium, of a liquid, water-
soluble or water-dispersible capped polyether polyol obtained
by reacting ethylene oxide and at least one lower alkylene
oxide having 3 to 4 carbon atoms with an active hydrogen
compound to prepare a heteric or block copolymer having a
molecular weight of from about 7,000 to about 15,000, and
further reacting said copolymer with an alpha olefin oxide.
4381,206
ADVANCED SOLID REACTANTS FOR H2/D2
GENERATION
Louis R. Grant, Los Angeles, and Joseph E. Flanagan, Woodland
Hills, both of Calif., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,163
Int. a.3 C06B 43/00
U.S. a. 149—22 1 Qaim
1. An all amine borane gas generating system consisting of
hydrazine bis-borane or its deuterated derivative and diborane
diammoniate or its deuterated derivative in the form of a com-
pacted solid propellant pellet for producing high purity hydro-
gen or deuterium in high yield from a self-sustaining reaction
after said reaction is initiated by a heat source sufficient to
initiate said reaction, said hydrazine bis-borane being an igni-
tion source for said all amine borane gas generating system by
serving as a thermal stimulus for decomposition of itself and
additionally as a thermal stimulus for decomposition of said
diborane diammoniate or its deuterated derivative, said igni-
tion source being present in said compacted solid propellant
pellet in an amount from about 60 to about 40 weight percent
while said diborane diammoniate is present in an amount from
about 40 to about 60 weight percent in said compacted solid
propellant pellet for producing a high yield of hydrogen or
deuterium in the range from about 1 5 weight percent to about
4,381,207
PYROTECHNIC COMPOSITION
Donald E. Olander, Huntington Beach, and Donald W. Petersen,
Tehachapi, both of Calif., assignors to Hi-Shear Corporation,
Torrance, Calif.
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,437
Int. a.^ C06B 33/12
U.S. CI. 149—40 8 Qaims
1. A pyrotechnic product produced by mixing fully divided
aluminum metal, calcium sulfate, magnesium sulfate, and wa-
ter, the weight ratio of aluminum to calcium sulfate hemihy-
drate being between about 15%/85% to about 60%/40%, the
magnesium sulfate being in the molar ratio relative to calcium
sulfate of about 1/2, and about 6 moles of water per mole of
magnesium sulfate, all of the foregoing ratios being based upon
anhydrous sulfates, the calcium sulfate being calculated as
hemihydrate.
4381,208
METHOD OF MAKING A RIBBON CABLE
John R. Baverstock, Stoke-on-Trent, England, assignor to Lucas
Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Aug. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 65,854
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 15, 1978,
33340/78
Int. Q.3 HOIB J3/06
U.S. Q. 156—52 10 Qaims
— EZ
— E
1. A method of manufacturing multi-core cable of the kind in
which a plurality of leads, each including a conductive core in
an insulating sheath, are held in parallel and side-by-side rela-
tion, the method including the steps of arranging individual
separate leads in parallel and side-by-side relation, retaining
said leads in said relation, and, while so retained, continuously
applying heat to bond by fusion the insulating sheaths of a
plurality of leads each to its neighbour or to a backing strip on
at least one side of the cable throughout major portions of the
lengths of said leads, and stopping the application of heat at
intervals to interrupt the bonding of the leads at predetermined
intervals along the length of the cable to produce regions
which separate the said major portions of said cable, and which
regions are short compared to said major portions and at which
regions the sheaths are not bonded either to each other or to a
backing strip.
4381,209
METHOD OF CURING A NON-METALLIC BAND
Angelo A. DeLaurentis, South Pymatuning, Pa., assignor to
Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
DiTision of Ser. No. 216313, Dec. 12, 1980, Pat. No. 4345332,
which is a continuatioii of Ser. No. 22,126, Mar. 20, 1979,
abandoned. This application Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,437
Int. Q.3 B65H 8/00
U.S. Q. 156—162 5 Claims
1. A method of curing a resin impregnated non-metallic band
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
931
such that the band retains a degree of flexibihty,
the steps of:
tensioning the band to a predetermined tension;
w»
comprising hng site; and a cychcal drive source for providing a periodic
mechanical input for the shuttle rolls and other moving parts of
the label transfer machine, wherein the improvement com-
prises means for controlling the routing of the web comprismg:
electro-optical registration means for generating a timing
signal in response to a predetermined optical contrast
within a label;
means for generating an enabling signal at a first point within
each drive cycle;
subjecting the band to a predetermined vacuum while spray-
ing the band with oil maintained at a predetermined tem-
perature for a predetermined length of time.
4,381,210
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING POLYIMIDE TUBES
Takashi Ishizuka; Yasuhiro Moriyama, and Masao Nakamura,
all of Ibaraki, Japan, assignors to Nitto Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,270
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 25, 1980, 55/23017
Int. a.3 B65H 81/00: C09J 5/00
U.S. CI. 156—195 7 Oaims
1. A process for producing a polyimide tube which com-
prises
applying a solution of polyamide acid obtained by reacting a
biphenyltetracarboxylic acid dianhydride represented by
the general formula
O
o
o
H
II
,^v
^
1
(^^^
c
\\
c-
^
y
^^^^
^r
II
II
o
■^
o
o
means for generating a disabling signal at a second point
within each drive cycle;
means for starting the rotation of the metering roll in re-
sponse to a given disabling signal; and
means for halting the rotation of the metering roll in re-
sponse to a given timing signal, subsequent to an enabling
signal but prior to the next disabling signal.
4,381,212
nNGERLESS SINGLE FACER
Webster C. Roberts, Cherry Hill, N.J., assignor to Molins Ma-
chine Company, Inc., Cherry Hill, N J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 122,924, Feb. 20, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,515
Int. a.3 B31F 1/28
U.S. a. 156—473 11 Claims
with an aromatic diamine in an organic polar solvent to at least
one surface of a polyimide film,
drying thereafter the film with heating to convert a part of
said polyamide acid into the imide form while controlling
the volatile material content to about 5 to 50% by weight,
by which a compound film having a heat-fusible layer
composed of a polyimide precursor is obtained,
winding said compound film on a heat resistant core mate-
rial,
heating to unify the compound film by said heat-fusible
layer, and removing the heat resistant core material to
obtain said polyimide tube.
4^1,211
WEB TRANSPORT SYSTEM WITH ELECTRO-OPTICAL
LABEL DETECnON
Jacek A. Nechay, Northboro, Mass., assignor to Dennison Man-
ufacturing Company, Framingham, Mass.
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,841
Int. a.5 B32B 31/00
U.S. a. 156—361 7 Claims
1. An improved label transfer machine of the type including
a web bearing a plurality of labels; means for routing the web
through a transport path sequentially including a web source,
a rotatable metering roll for controlling web advance, a label-
ling site and means for collecting the web; shuttle rolls strad-
dling the labelling site for regulating web advance at the label-
ling site; means for transferring labels onto articles at the label-
1. In a single facer machine having first and second corrugat-
ing rolls provided with longitudinally extending meshing fiutes
for corrugating a web of material passing therebetween, and
suction means for retaining the corrugated web on approxi-
mately one-half the perimeter of said second roll, the improve-
ment comprising:
(a) said second roll having a central hollow core for receiv-
ing a heated fluid, the outer periphery of said hollow core
having a plurality of circumferential grooves at spaced
locations therealong;
(b) a sleeve surrounding and secured to said hollow core,
said sleeve having a plurality of spaced annular slots in the
perimeter thereof, the longitudinally extending flutes of
932
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
the second roll being on the perimeter of said sleeve, said
sleeve having a plurality of passages extending radially
from the inner periphery of each of said annular slots to
the interior of said sleeve;
(c) means for applying suction to said second corrugating
roll by way of said grooves and slots to hold the corru-
gated web on a portion thereof, including a housing dis-
posed diametrically opposite said one-half perimeter, said
housing having strippers, each stripper being disposed in
one of said slots for stripping the corrugated web from
said flutes in said second corrugating roll.
the associated said axes being such that at least one pair of seed
crystals may be interfaced at their said surfaces with a zero
mutual crystallographic orientation; said process comprising
the steps of mutually aligning said pair of seed crystals into said
orientation, directly bonding their said flat surfaces together
S
4,381,213
PARTIAL VACUUM BORON DIFFUSION PROCESS
Derrin L. Flowers, Scottsdale, and Sylvia B. Thompson, Phoe-
nix, both of Ariz., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Sctaaumburg,
III.
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,873
Int. aj C30B 25/02
U.S. a. 156—606 15 Qaims
' ' ' /////■ / /
JMy/Z/M/A
JO
J tKMAUST
SOU»rE END
with an inert bonding material to form a seed crystal composite
of locally uniform crystallographic orientation having at least
one registering surface region, and depositing said substance
from said solution on to said composite so as to substantially
enclose said registering surface region.
4,381,214
PROCESS FOR GROWING CRYSTALS
Ian R. A. Christie, Middlesex; Derek F. Croxall, London, and
Brian J. Isherwood, Middlesex, all of United Kingdom, as-
signors to The General Electric Company Limited, London,
England
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Scr. No. 273,263
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 26, 1980,
8021023
Int. a.' C30B 7/10
U.S. a. 456—623 Q 10 Claims
1. A process for forming a crystal of a substance from a
solution capable of depositing said substance, utilizing at least
two seed crystals of said substance, the seed crystals defining
crystallographic axes and being provided with respective flat
surfaces, the orientations of the said surfaces with respect to
4,381,215
METHOD OF FABRICATING A MISALIGNED,
COMPOSITE ELECTRICAL CONTACT ON A
SEMICONDUCTOR SUBSTRATE
Paul D. Reynolds, Cardiff, and Norman W. Jones, Poway, both
of Calif., assignors to Burroughs Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,090
Int. C1.3 HOIL 2l/2ii, 21/308. 21/316
U.S. a. 156—643 12 Qaims
1. A method for substantially uniformly and reproducibly
boron doping a silicon body within a reaction chamber com-
prising the steps of:
forming a protective layer on said silicon body to resist
etching by gases present in said reaction chamber during
subsequent steps;
introducing a composite gas mixture which comprises a
boron containing gas and a first oxidant gas of proportions
differing from stoichiometric proportions for production
of substantially pure boron oxide by a predetermined mole
fraction A in the range —3 to —0.03 or 0.06 to 6;
forming a boron source layer on said silicon body by react-
ing said composite gas mixture in the presence of said
silicon body;
maintaining throughout the two proceeding steps a total gas
pressure around said silicon body of less than 10 Torr (1.3
kPa);
heating thereafter said silicon body and boron source layer
in a controlled atmosphere to achieve a specified redistri-
bution of boron and its incorporation within said silicon
body to a desired depth.
10. In a method of fabricating an electrical contact to a
region which lies at the surface of a semiconductor substrate
and is exposed through a rectangular opening in an insulating
layer that overlies said surface; the improvement comprising
the steps of forming a silicide of a noble metal throughout the
exposed surface of said region; thereafter forming a layer of a
barrier metal over said silicide and said insulating layer; there-
after forming a patterned conductor on a portion of said barrier
metal layer, said patterned conductor being of substantially the
same width as said opening and in misalignment with it as to
cover only part of said exposed region and an adjacent portion
of said insulating layer; and thereafter oxidizing at least a
portion of said barrier metal layer which is not covered by said
patterned conductor.
4,381,216
METHOD OF ETCHING TO FORM
CATIONICALLY-CONDUCnVE CERAMIC BODY
Raj N. Singh, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,579
Int. a.5 C23F 1/00
U.S. a. 156—667 8 Claims
1. A process for producing a cationically-conductive ce-
ramic body having an etched surface and a specific resistivity
at its surface portion which is at least not significantly different
from its specific intrinsic resistivity which comprises providing
a cationically-conductive ceramic body having a specific resis-
tivity at its surface portion significantly higher than its specific
intrinsic resistivity, said ceramic body ranging in composition
from an alkali metal beta-alumina phase to an alkali metal
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
933
beta"-alumina phase including all combinations of said alkali
metal beta-alumina phase and said alkali metal beta"-alumina
phase, said alkali metal being selected from the group consist-
ing of sodium, potassium, lithium, mixtures thereof and alloys
thereof, and etching the surface portion of said ceramic body
with phosphoric acid to produce said cationically-conductive
ceramic body with a specific resistivity at its surface portion
which is at least not significantly different from its specific
intrinsic resistivity, said phosphoric acid having a concentra-
tion of P2O5 which etches said ceramic body, said etching
having no significant deleterious effect on said ceramic body.
4^1^18
APPARATUS FOR TESTING COMBUSTIBILITY OF
WOOD PULP BLOW GASES
Nicholas T. Kern, Covington, Va., assignor to Westraco Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 32,023
Int. a.3 D21C 7/76, 11/08; GOIL 23/08
U.S. a. 162-252 2 Claims
r^«.'
4,381,217
METHOD OF INCREASING THE TEMPERATURE OF
SHOWER WATER USED IN A WOOD GRINDING
PROCESS
Erkki Turkia, Inkeroinen, Finland, assignor to Oy. Tampella
AB, Tampere, Finland
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,637
Qaims priority, application Finland, Nov. 18, 1980, 803601
Int. a.3 D21B 1/24
U.S. a. 162-23 1 Qaim
1. In a method of increasing the temperature of shower
water used in a wood grinding process,
grinding wood by a rotating grinding member (2) in a grind-
ing space (3) under a pressure exceeding atmospheric
pressure,
spraying warm shower water (G) into the grinding space,
conveying groundwood pulp (A) from the grinding sapce
through a groundwood pit (8) and a pipe (9) into a steam
separator (11) wherein the heat energy of the ground
wood pulp is released as steam (H), and
adding replacement water (E) to compensate for losses of
shower water, the improvement comprising conveying
the groundwood pulp from the steam separator into a
thickener (18) from which the released water is fed back
into the grinding space (3) as shower water and feeding
said replacement water (E) having a temperature lower
than the temperature of said shower water to the ground-
wood pulp (A) at a point in said pipe (9) located after said
groundwood pit (8) but before the steam separator (11).
1. The combination of:
A. A wood pulping digester blow tank having means to
substantially isolate vaporous constituents from the liquid
and solid constituents of a blow charge of cooked wood
pulp;
B. Means to substantially isolate non-condensible gases from
said vaporous constituents within a primary flow stream
carrier duct;
C. Means to combine said non-condensible gases with fire-
box draft for a heating appliance;
D. First conduit means connecting combustion chamber
means with said carrier duct to continuously draw a sam-
ple flow of said gas from said primary flow stream into
said combustion chamber;
E. Second conduit means for continuously venting said
combustion chamber;
F. Intermittent Ignition means within said combustion cham-
ber to ignite combustible portions of said gas;
G. Pressure responsive means connected to said combustion
chamber for emitting control signals when pressures
within said combustion chamber exceed a first predeter-
mined magnitude; and,
H. Means to divert said primary flow stream away from said
firebox draft in response to said control signals.
4,381 219
HEADBOX ARRANGEMENT FOR A PAPERMAKING
MACHINE
Alfred Bubik; Werner Seider, both of Ravensburg, and Joaef
Hefter, Fenken, ail of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Esther Wyss GmbH, Ravensburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Apr. 16, 1682, Ser. No. 368,909
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 14, 1981,
3137/81
Int. a.J D21F 1/02. 11/04
U.S. a. 162—299 9 Claims
1. A headbox arrangement for a papermaking machine for
forming multi-ply paper webs upon a moved water impervious
web forming member, comprising:
at least two independent headboxes forming a group;
each of said headboxes being provided with stock infeed
means for a stock suspension, stock guide means, a nozzle
channel and an outlet slice located at an end of said nozzle
channel;
934
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
a flexible divider member located between each two neigh-
bonng headboxes; and
11 ^6 11
said flexible divider member extending past the outlet slice
of a neighboring headbox.
4,381,220
PRODUCTION OF CONCENTRATED ALCOHOL AND
DISTILLERY SLOP
Ferris C. Standiford, Greenbank, Wash., assignor to Resources
Conservation Company, Seattle, Wash.
Division of Ser. No. 206,170, Nov. 12, 1980, Pat. No. 4,328,074.
This application Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,205
Int. CI.' BOID 1/26. 1/28, 3/02. 3/14
U.S. a. 202—154 7 Claims
1. A system for producing concentrated alcohol and distill-
ery slop from fermented beer with a reduced amount of energy
comprising:
(a) a beer still;
(b) means for feeding said beer to said still;
(c) means for feeding a portion of a water vapor, withdrawn
from evaporating means (f) hereinbelow, to said still;
(d) means for withdrawing an alcohol-rich vapor as the
overhead from said still;
(e) means for withdrawing an alcohol-poor distillery slop as
the bottom stream from said still;
(0 evaporator means for concentrating said slop by evapo-
rating water vapor therefrom;
(g) means for passing said slop from said still to said evapora-
tor means;
(h) means for passing said vapor from said overhead of said
still to said evaporator means into indirect heat exchange
contact with said slop to condense a portion of said vapor
and form a condensate;
(i) condensate stripper means for separating said condensate
into an alcohol-rich overhead stream and an alcohol-poor
bottom stream;
(j) means for passing said condensate from said evaporator
means, to condensate stripper means;
(k) means for feeding a portion of said water vapor with-
drawn from said evaporator means to said stripper means;
(1) rectifier means for separating uncondensed vapor from
said evaporator means into a concentrated alcohol over-
head stream and an alcohol-containing mixture as a bot-
tom stream;
(m) means for passing the uncondensed vapor from said
evaporator means to said rectiHer means;
(n) means for passing said alcohol-containing mixture from
said rectifier means to said stripper means for admixture
with said condensate from said evaporator;
(o) compressor means for forming a compressed vapor;
(p) means for passing at least a portion of at least one of said
water vapor from said evaporator means and said vapor
from said still to said compressor means; and
(q) means for withdrawing said concentrated slop from said
evaporator means.
4,381,221
PROCESS FOR RECOVERING A REACTION PRODUCT
WHILE PREVENTING DECOMPOSITION OF THE
CATALYST
Tomiya Isshiki, Tokyo; Hisashi Yoshino, Matsudo, and Kaoru
Tsuyuki, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Gas
Chemical Company, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 136,484, Apr. 2, 1980, abandoned. This
application Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,924
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 3, 1979, 54-39920
Int. CI.' BOID 3/34
U.S. a. 203—6 4 Oaims
1. In a process for recovering an aliphatic carboxylic acid
and/or an ester thereof by distilling a liquid mixture containing
the aliphatic carboxylic acid and/or the ester thereof and a
catalyst of a metal of Group VIII of the periodic table of
elements, the improvement wherein carbon monoxide is intro-
duced into the distillation system to carry out the distillation in
the presence of carbon monoxide at a partial pressure of at least
0.05 kg/cm'2 (absolute) in the distillation system to prevent the
decomposition of said catalyst, there being no catalyst re-
moved from said liquid mixture to be distilled, the amount of
said catalyst in said liquid mixture to be distilled being 10^^ to
10 ' mole per liter of the total of the starting material and
solvent used to obtain said liquid mixture.
4,381,222
PROCESS FOR THE DISTILLATIVE SEPARATION OF
TERTIARY ALKYL HYDROPEROXIDES AND
DITERTIARY ALKYL PEROXIDES
Gottfried Brossmann, Hiillriegelskreuth, and Fritz Diem, Mu-
nich, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Peroxide-
Chemie GmbH, Hollriegelskreuth, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 138,782, Apr. 10, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,389
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 24,
1979, 2916572
Int. a.' BOID 3/34
U.S. a. 203—33 10 Qaims
1. Process for the production of tertiary alkyl hydroperox-
ides of the formula ^
R— OOH
wherein
R is a tertiary alkyl group with 4 to 6 carbon atoms, which
process comprises reacting the corresponding tertiary
alkyl alcohol with the hydrogen peroxide to obtain the
desired tertiary alkyl hydroperoxide including dialkyl-
peroxide impurities, neutralizing the reaction mixture,
subjecting same to vacuum distillation in the presence of
water at a temperature of less than about 45° C, and
recovering, as a bottoms product, the purified tertiary
alkyl hydroperoxide in a yield of at least about 83.5%.
4,381,223
PROCESS FOR THE TREATMENT OF ORGANIC AMINE
COMPOSITIONS
Charles A. Gibson; Moinuddin Ahmed, and Michael Haben-
schuss, all of South Charleston, W. Va., assignors to Union
Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,223
Int. d? BOID 3/00
U.S. a. 203—91 6 Qaims
1. A process for the treatment of organic amine composi-
tions which are under such temperature and pressure that with
time at least a portion of the components thereof can undergo
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
935
molecular chemical change and which can change desirable
components and undesirable components, the desirable com-
ponent being more volatile than the undesirable component,
which process comprises arresting such molecular chemical
change by subjecting such amine composition to a component
separation at a pressure and temperature at which such more
volatile component becomes, during separation, a supercritical
fluid and the amine composition is converted into a multi-phase
system, forming from such separation two enriched streams,
one which is more enriched in the more volatile amine compo-
nents of such amine composition than is such amine composi-
tion, arid the other of which is less rich in such more volatile
amine components than is said other stream and such amine
composition but more enriched in the less volatile components
of the amine composition than is said other stream and the
amine composition.
the relative magnitude of the oxygen partial pressure with
respect to said first and second oxygen partial pressures.
4,381,224
STEP FUNCTION LEAN BURN OXYGEN SENSOR
William A. Fate, Ann Arbor, and Robert E. Hetrick, Dearborn
Heights, both of Mich., assignors to Ford Motor Company,
Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,185
Int. a.3 COIN 27/46
U.S. a. 204-1 T 13 Qaims
/So. ■
/eh
/ec
'SC J.
1. An electrochemical apparatus for making a measurement
of oxygen partial pressure in an ambient environment including
other gaseous materials, said electrochemical apparatus includ-
ing:
a single solid electrochemical pump cell formed of a platelet
of solid ionic conductors capable of conducting oxygen
ions and including two electrode layers attached to oppos-
ing faces of said platelet, and lead wires attached to each
of said electrodes for providing electrical coupling to said
pump cell;
a leaky structure coupled to said electrochemical pump cell
having an enclosed casing defining an enclosed volume
and a leak orifice coupling the enclosed volume to the
ambient;
an external circuit means coupled to said pump cell for
applying a current to said pump cell so that oxygen can be
withdrawn from the enclosed volume thereby providing
an electrical output indicative of oxygen partial pressure;
said external circuit means including:
a constant current source means coupled to said electro-
chemical pump cell thereby generating said electrical
output wherein a voltage, V, is a function of the oxygen
partial pressure;
a first reference voltage means coupled to said constant
current source means for producing a first step voltage
output with the step occurring at a first output voltage
related to a first oxygen partial pressure;
a second reference voltage means coupled to said constant
current means for producing a second step voltage output
with the step occurring at a second output voltage related
to a second oxygen partial pressure;
an output means coupled to said first and second reference
voltage means for generating a voltage step output having
at least three voltage levels with steps occurring at said
first and second partial pressure of oxygen thus indicating
4,381,225
PRODUCTION OF LEAD FROM ORES AND
CONCENTRATES
Peter K. Everett, Chatswood, Australia, assignor to Dextec
Metallurgical Pty. Ltd., North Sydney, Australia
per No. PCr/AU80/00001, § 371 Date Dec. 9, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 8, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02164, PCT Pub
Date Oct. 16, 1980
PCT Filed Apr. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 220,031
Gains priority, application Australia, Apr. 9, 1979, PD8329
Int. a.^ C25C 1/J8
U.S. a. 204-117 21 Qaims
1. A process for selectively recovering lead from a lead
bearing ore or concentrate also containing base metal sulphides
other than lead sulphides in an electrolytic cell including at
least one anode and one cathode, said process including
(1) contacting the ore or concentrate with an electrolyte
containing chloride ions,
(2) agitating the electrolyte and ore or concentrate wherein
the agitation of said electrolyte and ore or concentrate is
controlled to minimize the amount of said ore or concen-
trate in close proximity to said at least one anode so that
the base metal of such sulphides other than lead existing in
the ore or concentrate remains substantially undissolved,
(3) maintaining the electrolyte at a temperature rangmg up
to the boiling point of the electrolyte and at a pH of up to
7 while applymg a low anode current density and employ-
ing low oxidation conditions, whereby sulphur present in
the ore or concentrate is substantially converted to ele-
mental form and lead is taken into solution and cathodi-
cally selectively recovering said lead.
4,381,226
ELECTROCHEMICAL TREATMENT OF ALUMINUM IN
NON-AQUEOUS POLYMERIC POLYBASIC ORGANIC
ACTD CONTAINING ELECTROLYTES
Thomas N. Gilllch, Readlngton Township, Hunterdon County,
and John E. Walls, Annandale, both of NJ., assignors to
American Hoechst Corporation, Somemlle, N J.
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,585
Int. a.3 C25D 9/02. 9/06
U.S, a. 204—14 N II Claims
1. A process for treating an aluminum containing sheet
substrate which comprises electrolyzing said substrate as an
anode in a non-aqueous electrolyte comprising a solvent hav-
ing a dipole moment of at least 1.5 and a compatible polymeric
polybasic organic acid, wherein said electrolysis is conducted
at a voltage of from about 5 to about 120 volts, with a charge
application of from about I to about 1 50 coulombs per square
decimeter of substrate, in an electrolyte maintained at a tem-
perature of from about -5* to about 60* C, with a cathode to
anode distance of from about 1 to about 25 centimeters.
936
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,227
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
ABRASIVE-COATED TOOLS
Harold Narcus, Worcester, Mass., assignor to Norton Company,
Worcester, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 174,076, JuL 31, 1980, abandoned. This
application Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,668
Int. a.3 C25D 5/12, 5/54, 15/00
U.S. a. 204—16 1 Qaim
1. A flexible coated abrasive product comprising a non-con-
ductive polymer film, a first conductive layer applied to one
side of said film, a second, electrolytically applied, layer on
said conductive layer, a third layer on said second layer, said
third layer containing electrolytically applied nickel and, hold-
ing diamond abrasive particles to said second layer, a fourth
layer electrolessly applied with electrolytic assistance of at
least 50 amperes per square foot and containing, in addition to
nickel, a combined element selected from the group consisting
of boron and phosphorous and combinations thereof, said third
and fourth layers amounting to 20 to 50% of the height of the
diamond particles perpendicular to the plane of the backing.
4,381,228
PROCESS AND COMPOSITION FOR THE
ELECTRODEPOSITION OF TIN AND TIN ALLOYS
Robert J. Teichmann, Belleville, and Linda J. Mayer, Denville,
both of N.J., assignors to Occidental Chemical Corporation,
Warren, Mich.
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,084
Int. a.' C25D 3/32. 3/60
U.S. CI. 204—44 14 Qaims
1. An aqueous electroplating bath for the eiectrodeposition
of bright, metallic tin or alloys of tin with copper or rhodium
which comprises from 5 to 50 g/1 of a bath soluble di-valent tin
compound, sulfuric acid in an amount sufficient to maintain the
bath pH not in excess of about 2.0, 0.01 to 10 g/1 of a perfluoro-
alkyl sulfonate wetting agent, 0.3 to 15 cc/1 of an aromatic
amine brightener, 0. 1 to 20 g/1 of a non-ionic surfactant, and
0.5 to 30 g/1 of an aromatic sulfonic acid, said bath being
substantially free of other sulfur components.
hydroxide at the cell's cathode, which cell contains a permse-
lective cation exchange membrane disposed between the anode
and cathode to form an anolyte and catholyte compartment so
as to separate the cell's anolyte from its catholyte, which
method comprises the combination of steps of:
A. during at least 50% of the cell's normal electrolysis oper-
ation, feeding to and electrolyzing in said cell a brine
which, at least at the time immediately prior to the brine's
becoming part of the anolyte, contains no more than about
5 ppm hardness (expressed as ppm calcium) and no more
than about 70 ppm "carbon oxide" (expressed as ppm
CO2);
4,381,229
PROCESS FOR ELECTROCHEMICAL REDUCTION OF
TEREPHTHALIC ACID
John A. Donohue, Elmhurst, III., assignor to Standard Oil Com-
pany (Indiana), Chicago, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 201,139, Oct. 27, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,120
Int. a.3 C25B 3/00
U.S. a. 204—75 23 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of p-hydroxymethylbenzoic
acid which comprises electrochemical reduction of tereph-
thalic acid in an electrolysis cell wherein (a) the cathode is
solid and metal, said solid, metal cathode having an overlay
surface of an amalgam of mercury, said metal of said cathode
having a hydrogen overvoltage which is greater than the
potential for the reduction of terephthalic acid to p-hydrox-
ymethylbenzoic acid, and (b) sufficient mercury is added
therein as a mercury compound to maintain said process.
B. regenerating the membrane (after it has become fouled
with compounds of multivalent cations accumulated from
the brine fed to the cell during the normal cell electrolysis
step of Step (A) above) by contacting the membrane on at
least one of its sides with a solution capable of dissolving
the multivalent cation compounds fouling the membrane
for a time sufficient to dissolve a substantial amount of said
compounds fouling said membrane, said solution having a
pH lower than the pH of the electrolyte which contacted
that side of the membrane during the normal cell electrol-
ysis step. Step (A) above.
4,381,231
DC ETCHING OF ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC
CAPAaTOR FOIL
Mulk R. Arora, Wiiliamstown, Mass., assignor to Sprague Elec-
tric Company, North Adams, Mass.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,510
Int. C\? C25F 3/04
U.S, a. 204—129.75 3 Clwms
4,381,230
OPERATION AND REGENERATION OF
PERMSELECnVE ION-EXCHANGE MEMBRANES IN
BRINE ELECTROLYSIS CELLS
Harry S. Bumey, Jr., Gute, and Gary R. Gantt, Brazoria, both
of Tex., aai ignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,095
lot. a.J C25B 1/34
MS. a. 204—98 20 Claims
1. A method of operating and regenerating an electrolysis
cell which electrolyzes an aqueous alkali metal halide solution
(brine) to a halogen at the cell's anode and an alkali metal
1. A process for etching aluminum electrolytic capacitor foil
comprising passing the foil through an electrolyte bath con-
taining substantially 2.5 moles/liter of sodium chloride and a
compound selected from the group consisting of boric acid and
citrate ion source, wherein the concentration of said com-
pound is 0.08 up to 0.48 moles/liter of boric acid and 0.05 to
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
937
0.07 moles/liter of citrate ion source under the influence of
direct current at a temperature of 90' to 95° C. and a charge
passed of 500 to 540 coulombs to provide an etched foil with a
central metallic core.
4,381^2
MULTI-STAGE ELECTRODIALYSIS STACK
ELECTRODE REVERSAL SYSTEM AND METHOD OF
OPERATION
Douglas R. Brown, Arlington, Mass., assignor to Ionics, Incor-
porated, Watertown, Mass.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,412
Int. a.3 BOID 57/02
U.S. a. 204—180 P 7 Claims
ment comprising at least one layer which is constituted by at
least a first thin film composed of intrinsic amorphous silicon,
having a carrier life of 10- ^ sec or longer, an average localized
state density in the forbidden gap of not more than 10' Vcm^
and an active region in which carrier mobility is
lO-'cm^A'.sec or more, or N-type amorphous silicon pre-
pared by doping said intrinsic amorphous silicon with an N-
type impurity, or both thereof, and a second thin film which is
formed on one surface of the active region of said first thin
film, thereby forming a potential barrier therewith, said second
thin film being light transmissive.
1. In a multi-stage electrodialysis fluid treatment system
comprised of a plurality of series connected stages, each stage
arranged to further desalt the dilute product stream output of
the previous stage, each stage composed of an anode and a
cathode separated by at least one cell pair of salt diluting and
salt concentrating chambers defined by alternating anion and
cation permselective membranes, each stage connected to its
associate stages by fluid passage means for each of the dilute
and concentrated product streams generated by said stages,
each stage further having polarity reversing means for periodi-
cally changing the polarity of said electrodes, said system
further having fluid passage control means for directing the
flow of said dilute and concentrated product streams, the
improvement which comprises switching means for sequen-
tially activating said polarity reversing means stage by stage on
a time staggered basis in order of the dilute product salt con-
tent.
4,381,234
SOLVENT EXTRACTION PRODUCTION OF LUBE OIL
FRACTIONS
Costandi A. Audeh; Israel J. HeilweU; James R. White, all of
Princeton, N.J., and Tsoung Y. Yan, Philadelphia, Pa., assign-
ors to MobU Oil Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 37,967, May 11, 1979, Pat. No. 4,273,645.
This application Not. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 208,905
Int. a.3 ClOG 21/10. 21/16
U.S. a. 208—327 8 Claims
1. In an improved method for producing lubricating oils by
solvent extraction which comprises contacting a lube oil-con-
taining hydrocarbon charge under conditions of solvent selec-
tivity to permit the recovery of a raffinate phase which upon
dewaxing will provide a lube oil product, the improvement
whereby there is present in the extraction system from about
0.002% to about 0.2% by weight of the solvent of a metal or
ammonium alkylbenzene sulfonate to facilitate phase separa-
tion and to increase raffinate yield, the solvent being selected
from the group consisting of furfural, phenol, cresilic acid and
sulfur dioxide, wherein the metal is selected from sodium and
Group IIB of the Period Table, and the ammonium group has
the formula R'4N + , wherein R' is hydrogen or a Ci-Q alkyl
group.
4,381,235
SCREENING APPARATUS
Lee Mallaghan, Maynooth, Ireland, assignor to Powerscreen
Limited, Maynooth, Ireland
Filed Not. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,777
Int. a.3 B07B 1/12
U.S. a. 209—400 11 Claims
4,381,233
PHOTOELECTROLYZER
Toshio Adachi, and Tatsumi Arakawa, both of Fiyi, Japan,
assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka,
Japan
Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,055 '
Oalms priority, application Japan, May 19, 1980, 55-65288;
Jun. 26, 1980, 55-85873
Int. a.3 C25B 7/00, 1/02. 9/00
U.S. a. 204— 242 16aaims
1. A screening apparatus comprising a rectangular screening
frame, a multiplicity of parallel laterally spaced wires releas-
ably fixed to and tensioned between two oppositely disposed
frame ends so as to extend across the screening frame, a plural-
ity of support bars extending between side members of the
frame and transversely with respect to the wires, said suppori
bars having spaced guide slots releasably receiving and guiding
the individual tensioned wires but otherwise not connected
with or contacting said wires, said wires contacting only part
of the peripheral surfaces of said support bars, and releasable
fixing means releasably securing said support bars to said
screening frame so as to permit removal and replacement of
1. A photoelectrolyzer comprising a number of minute solar one or more of said support bars without disassembling said
cell elements suspended in an electrolyte, each solar cell ele- screening frame.
938
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,236
HIGH PRESSURE ROTARY CENTRIFUGAL
SEPARATOR HAVING APPARATUS FOR
AUTOMATICALLY CYCLICALLY REaPROCATING A
COROTATING SEPARATOR BASKET SCRAPER
Bradley G. Cox, Saginaw, Mich., assignor to Baker Perkins Inc.,
Saginaw, Mich.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,033
Int. a.^ BOID 33/02. 45/14
U.S. a. 210—112 17 Oaims
on said valve body received in sliding sealed engagement with
the wall of said second axial section, and an end section on said
valve body received in sliding sealed engagement within said
guide bore, said Tirst and second lands deflning a flrst annular
valve chamber therebetween and said second land deflning a
second annular valve chamber with said opposite end of said
main valve chamber, said flrst annular valve chamber consti-
tuting a portion of said flrst passage means and said second
annular valve chamber constituting the terminus of said second
passage means.
*» ,M
4,381,237
SLUDGE ROBOT
Tord Svensson, Dammgatan 8, S-552 76 Jonkoping, Sweden
PCT No. PCr/SE80/00260, § 371 Date Jul. 17, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 17, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01372, PCT Pub.
Date May 28, 1981
per Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 285,107
Claims priority, application Sweden, Nov. 20, 1979, 7909592
Int. a.3 BOID 21/20
U.S. a. 210—138 9 Oaims
1. In a centrifugal separator assembly or the like wherein an
element is mounted upon a rotary shaft means to be driven by
said shaft means simultaneously in both rotation and axial
reciprocation; the improvement wherein said rotary shaft
means has a first chamber closed at one end and a bore extend-
ing coaxially from the other end of said first chamber, said first
chamber having an internal diameter greater than that of said
bore, a piston having a head section sealingly slidably received
in said first chamber and a guide section sealingly slidably
received in said bore, said piston being axially reciprocable
within said shaft means between a first end limit wherein said
head section is adjacent said one end of said first chamber and
a second end limit wherein said head section is adjacent said
other end of said first chamber, a source of hydraulic fluid
under pressure, inlet passage means in said shaft means for
conducting fluid under pressure from said source to said other
end of said first chamber to bias said piston toward its first end
limit, a pilot valve slidably mounted within a main valve cham-
ber within said piston for reciprocatory movement within said
piston between first and second end limits, first passage means
in said piston and said valve op>erable when said valve is at its
first end limit to conduct fluid under pressure from said other
end of said first chamber through said head section to said one
end of said first chamber to drive said piston to its second end
limit, second passage means in said piston and said valve opera-
ble when said piston is at its flrst end limit to conduct fluid
under pressure from said inlet passage means to a portion of
said main valve chamber to bias said valve to its flrst end limit,
third passage means in said piston and said shaft means for
venting said portion of said main valve chamber upon arrival
of said piston at its second end limit to allow said valve to
move to its second end limit, and fourth passage means in said
valve, said piston and said shaft means operable when said
valve is at its second end limit for venting said one end of said
flrst chamber to allow the bias of fluid under pressure in said
other end of said flrst chamber to restore said piston to its flrst
end limit; said main valve chamber being closed at one end,
means deflning a flrst axial section of said main valve chamber
of a flrst diameter extending from said closed end of said main
valve chamber and terminating at a flrst location intermediate
the ends of said main valve chamber and, a second axial section
of said main valve chamber of a diameter greater than that of
said flrst section extending from said flrst location to the oppo-
site end of said main valve chamber, means deflning a coaxial
guide bore extending from said opposite end of said main valve
chamber, said guide bore having a diameter less than that of
said second axial section, a valve body having a first annular
land at one end thereof received in sliding sealed engagement
with the wall of said flrst axial section, a second annular land
••-Oa I
1. A sludge robot for removal of sludge and sedimental
particles from a sedimentation tank or the like and comprising
a rising tube and at least two tube arms of which one is rotat-
ably connected to the rising tube at its one end and the second
tube arm is rotatably connected to the other end of said one
tube arm and at its one end and has a suction inlet at its other,
free end, characterized by the provision of motor couplings,
which interconnect said one tube arm with the rising tube on
one hand and the second tube arm on the other hand, for
rotating the two tube arms which are provided in the lower
portion of the tank, adjacent to its bottom according to a
predetermined program, and control means for steering the
motor couplings in such a way that the suction inlet moves in
a predetermined movement pattern over substantially the
whole bottom of the tank.
4,381,238
CLAMPING DEVICE
William T. Maxant, P.O. Box 454, Ayer, Mass. 04132
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,802
Int. a.3 B04B 3/00
U.S. a. 210—231 7 aaims
1. In combination,
an open reel type centrifuge for extracting honey from a
honeycomb frame which may be mounted therein, said
centrifuge including a reel supported for rotation therein,
said reel having an axel and flrst and second wheel sec-
tions mounted for rotation with said axel in axially spaced
apart relationship, and each wheel section aligned gener-
ally perpendicular to the axis of said axel and said reel
having transverse supports flxed to and extending be-
tween said wheel sections to provide structural support
for said reel and to provide hangers for said honeycomb
frames; and,
a clamp for retaining honeycomb frames between said first
and second wheels and against said transverse supports of
said open reel type centrifuge to hold said honeycomb
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
939
frames in position against the centrifugal force developed
when said reel rotates, said clamp comprising:
first and second clamp bars extending between the wheels of
said open reel;
a plurality of spring pins extending between said clamp bars
and spaced longitudinally along said clamp bars at points
removed from the ends of said clamp bars;
springs disposed about each of said spring pins and biasing
said clamp bars apart;
means for pivotably attaching one end of said first and sec-
ond clamp bars to said first wheel adjacent the circumfer-
ence thereof so that said clamp may be pivoted out of the
compound (I) being bonded to the carrier directly or through
a spacer.
way to permit honeycomb frames to be loaded into said
reel;
means fixed to said second wheel adjacent the circumference
thereof for removebly engaging the other end of said first
and second clamp bars whereby said clamp bars may be
moved together against the bias force of said springs and
pivoted into position against said honeycomb frames and
then said clamp bars may be released to engage said other
end of said first and second clamp bars with said engage-
ment means to securely hold said honeycomb frames in
said reel against the influence of the centrifugal force
developed when said reel rotates in said centrifuge.
4,381,239
METHOD FOR REDUCING THE PYROGEN CONTENT
OF OR REMOVING PYROGENS FROM SUBSTANCES
CONTAMINATED THEREWITH
Ichiro ChibaU, Suita; Tetsuya Tosa, Kyoto; Tadashi Sato,
Takatsuki; Taizo Watanabe, Nagaokakyo, and Satoshi
Minobe, Osaka, all of Japan, assignors to Tanabe Seiyaku
Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,269
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 10, 1981,
8103972
Int. a.^ BQID 15/00
U.S. a. 210—679 15 Qaims
1. A method for removing a pyrogen from a pyrogen-con-
taining solution comprising contacting the solution with an
adsorbent to adsorb the pyrogen, which is characterized in that
the adsorbent comprises a water-insoluble carrier and a nitro-
gen-containing heterocyclic compound of the formula:
R— A— X
a)
wherein R is a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group; A is
single bond, alkylene or alkenylene; X is hydrogen or func-
tional group; and the heterocyclic group and alkylene may be
optionally substituted by one or more substituents, and the
4,381,240
SWIMMING POOL WATER CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Thomas V. Russell, Mesa, Ariz,, assignor to Harry M. Weiss,
Scottsdale, Ariz.
Filed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,681
Int. a.5 C02F 1/76
U.S. a. 210—746 2 Qaims
1. In a swimming pool, a water conditioning system, com-
prising:
means for circulating a fiow of pool water into a first cham-
ber;
a second chamber adjoining said first chamber and having a
vented upper- and enclosed lower- volume portions in
communication;
hydrochloric acid filling said lower volume portion;
electrode means having an anode and a cathode in said lower
volume portion for conducting a current through said
hydrochloric acid so that chlorine gas is freed thereby;
manifold means having a venturi in communication with said
upper portion and with said means for circulating for
drawing said chlorine gas into said first chamber and
mixing said chlorine gas with said pool water; means for
terminating the operation of said electrode means; and
control means for sustaining operation of said means for
circulating after terminating operation of said electrode
means so that said chlorine gas is purged from said upper
volume portion when said system is turned off.
2. A method of safely conditioning water in a swimmmg
pool comprising the steps of
circulating a fiow of pool water into a first chamber;
providing a second chamber adjoining said first chamber,
said second chamber having vented upper and enclosed
lower volume portions in communication;
filling said lower volume portion with hydrochloric acid;
conducting a current through said hydrochloric acid by the
use of electrode means having an anode and a cathode
located in said lower volume portion so that chlorine gas
is freed thereby;
providing manifold means having a venturi in communica-
tion with said upper portion and with said pool water
circulated into said first chamber for drawing said chlo-
rine gas into said first chamber and mixing said chlorine
gas with said pool water;
terminating the operation of said electrode means; and
providing control means for sustaining the operation of
circulating said flow of pool water after terminating the
operation of said electrode means so that said chlorine gas
is purged from said upper volume portion.
940
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,241
INVERT EMULSIONS FOR WELL-DRILLING
COMPRISING A POLYDIORGANOSILOXANE AND
METHOD THEREFOR
David J. Romenesko, and Harry M. Schiefer, both of Midland,
Mich., assignors to Dow Coming Corporation, Midland,
Mich.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,968
Int. aj C09K 7/06: E21B 43/00
U.S. a. 252—8.5 P 20 Qaims
1. An emulsion composition to be used in well-drilling and
comprising
(A) 1 to 75 parts by volume of a brine as a discontinuous phase,
(B) 25 to 99 parts by volume of a liquid hydrocarbon selected
from the group consistmg of kerosene, diesel oil, crude oil,
turbine fuel, mineral oil, gas oil and paraffms having a flash
point of at least 100° P. as a continuous phase, and
(C) 0.05 to 15 parts by weight, for every 100 parts by weight of
brine plus liquid hydrocarbon, of a polydiorganosiloxane
having the formula
Z3SiO{(CH3)2SiO};,{(CH3KR)SiOy(CH3)(Q)Si-
0}zSiZ3
wherein
Q denotes a polyoxyalkylene radical having the formula
— R (OCH2CH2);XOCH2CHCH3)/)R ',
R denotes a monovalent hydrocarbon radical having from 6
to 18 carbon atoms, inclusive,
R' denotes a divalent radical bonded to a silicon atom by a
silicon-carbon bond,
R" denotes a monovalent radical selected from the group
consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloaliphatic, aryl, arylal-
kyl and acyl radicals,
Z denotes a monovalent hydrocarbon radical having from 1
to 5 carbon atoms, inclusive, or a Q radical, or an R radi-
cal,
X has an average value of from 0 to 400,
y has an average value of from 0 to 400,
z has an average value of from 0 to 5,
x-f-y + z has an average value of from 30 to 400,
p has an average value equal to or greater than the average
value of q and
p-f-q has an average value sufficient to provide a formula
weight of from 600 to 3500 for the — (OCH2CH2)-
^OCH2CHCH3),— portion of the Q radical, there being
an average of at least one Q radical and an average of at
least one R radical per molecule of the polydiorganosilox-
ane.
tic PBOFIK FOB CUKPlE 1
4^1^2
ORGANOLEPTIC USE OF PRINS REACTION
PRODUCTS OF DIISOAMYLENE, DERIVATIVES
THEREOF, ORGANOLEPTIC USES THEREOF AND
PROCESSES FOR PREPARING SAME
Richard M. Boden, Monmoutta Beach, N,J., assignor to Intema-
tional Flavors St Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 267,850, May 28, 1981, Pat. No. 4,359,412.
This application Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,597
Int. a.J D06M 13/16. 13/18
VS. a. 252—8.6 1 Qaim
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
fabric softener article or fabric softener composition compris-
ing the step of adding to a fabric softener article component or
a fabric softener composition, an aroma augmenting or enhanc-
ing quantity of at least one compound defined according to the
structure:
O — Z
wherein one of the dashed lines is a carbon-carbon double
bond and each of the other of the dashed lines is a carbon-car-
bon single bond; wherein the wavy line: .«»<<<»<»<»*».w« is a car-
bon-carbon single bond or no bond at all; wherein Z represents-
hydrogen, — CH2 — , or C2-C4 acyl; with the proviso that
when the wavy line: -*«*.N^-s*«-»*»^is no bond at all, Z represents
hydrogen or C2-C4 acyl and when the wavy line: «>.»*»* w.w»»w>
is a carbon-carbon single bond, then Z represents — CH2 — .
4,381,243
ALIPHATIC BRANCHED OLERN DIOXOLANES,
DITHIOLANES, AND OXATHIOLANES AND USES
THEREOF IN AUGMENTING OR ENHANQNG THE
AROMA AND/OR TASTE OF CONSUMABLE
MATERIALS
Richard M. Boden, Monmouth Beach, N.J., assignor to Interna-
tional Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 212,993, Dec. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,315,952. This application Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 322,871
Int. a.3 D06M 13/18
U.S. CI. 252—8.9 5 Qaims
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
fabric softener composition or fabric softener article compris-
ing the step of intimately admixing with a fabric softener com-
position or a component of a fabric softener article, an aroma
augmenting or enhancing quantity of at least one dioxolane,
oxathiolane or dithiolane compound defined according to the
structure:
R4^
Ri
wherein Ri represents C1-C4 lower alkyl; R2, R3. R4 and R5
represent hydrogen or C1-C3 lower alkyl; X and Y are the
same or different and each represents oxygen or sulfur and
wherein one of the dashed lines represents a carbon-carbon
double bond and each of the other of the dashed lines represent
carbon-carbon single bonds.
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
941
4,381,244
FERROFLUID
Ami E. Berkowitz, and John L. Walter, both of Schenectady,
N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company, Schenectady,
N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 133,587, Mar. 24, 1980, abandoned. This
application Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,569
Int. aj C09K 5/00
U.S. a. 252—62.52 10 Qaims
1. A ferrofluid consisting essentially of a carrier fluid having
in indefinite suspension therein composite particles consisting
essentially of magnetic metallic particles adherently enmeshed
in organic polymer, said polymer being in a fibrous or filamen-
tary form, said composite particles being in the form of fila-
mentary rafts or membranes of a size and density which main-
tains them in indefinite suspension in said carrier fluid.
4,381,245
SUPERCOOLING INHIBITOR AND PROCESS FOR
PREPARING THE SAME
Takahiro Wada; Shoichi Ishihara, both of Katano, and Ryoichi
Yamamoto, Neyagawa, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,456
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 27, 1980, 55-150517;
Mar. 17, 1981, 56-38969
Int. a.3 C09K 3/18; COIB 25/42
U.S. a. 252—70 3 Qaims
1. A supercooling inhibitor comprising:
a supercooling inhibitor base comprising at least one mem-
ber selected from the group consisting of sodium pyro-
phosphate (Na4P207), trisodium monohydrogen phos-
phate (Na3HP207), disodium dihydrogen phosphate
(Na2H2P207), monosodium trihydrogen pyrophosphate
(NaH3P207), sodium pyrophosphate decahydrate (Na4P-
2O7.IOH2O) and disodium dihydrogen pyrophosphate
hexahydrate (Na2H2P207.6H20); and
a heat regenerating material utilizing heat of fusion compris-
ing sodium acetote trihydrate (CH3COONa.3H20), the
surface of said supercooling inhibitor base being at least
partially coated with said heat regenerating material.
4,381,246
NON-FOGGING PREMOISTENED WIPER
Ralph L. Anderson, Boothwyn, Pa., assignor to Scott Paper
Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,006
Int. a.3 CUD 77/00
U.S. a. 252—91 3 Claims
1. A fibrous web for cleaning and rendering surfaces non-
fogging comprising a fibrous web bonded with a latex selected
from the group consisting of natural rubber, butadiene rubber
and styrene-butadiene rubber and impregnated with an aque-
ous cleaning solution comprising 0.2-1.0% by weight zinc
chloride.
4,381,247
ENZYME-CONTAINING BLEACHING COMPOSITION
Yunosuke Nakagawa, Soka, and Shoichiro Anunatsu, Ichikawa,
both of Japan, assignors to Kao Soap Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,129
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 24, 1980, 55/149138
Int. Q.^ CUD 7/10. 7/18. 7/42: D06L 3/16
U.S. Q. 252-95 7 Qaims
1. A dry, powder, enzyme-containing, bleaching composi-
tion comprising from 5 to 98 percent by weight of an inorganic
peroxide effective for bleaching fabrics; from 0.01 to 5 percent
by weight of one or more enzymes capable of functioning in a
bleaching composition for the removal of organic stains from
fabrics; and from 0. 1 to 20 percent by weight of at least one
anhydrous salt selected from the group consisting of anhy-
drous sodium citrate, anhydrous magnesium sulfate, anhydrous
calcium chloride and anhydrous zinc sulfate.
4,381,248
COMPOSITION FOR REMOVING CYANOACRYLATE
ADHESIVES FROM SURFACES
Warren G. Lazar, 8401 N. Rancho Catalina Dr., Tucson, Ariz.
85704
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,872
Int. a.3 CUD 7/12. 7/32, 7/50; C23D 77/00
U.S. Q. 252—118 I Claim
1. A composition consisting essentially of from 1 50- 160
parts by weight of a mixture, formed by mixing 60 parts by
weight of acetonitrile with 40 parts by weight of water and 1-2
parts by weight of synthetic surfactont until a homogeneous
mixture is obtained, with 40 parts by weight of a compound
selected from the group consisting of sodium bicarbonate and
sodium carbonate and from 40-50 parts by weight of a filler
selected from the group consisting of ethyl cellulose, bentonite
montmorillonite clay, sodium stearate, sodium oleate, silica,
starch and aluminum octonoate.
4,381,249
RUST REMOVING AND METAL SURFACE
PROTECTING COMPOSITION
Joseph O. Bouffard, 77, rue Hebert, Granby, Quebec, Canada
(J2G 7V7)
FUed May 14, 1979, Ser. No. 38,825
Int. a.3 CUD 1/44; C23F 9/02; C23G 7/06, 1/08
U.S. Q. 252—136 9 Claims
1. A rust removing and metal surface protecting composi-
tion, which consists essentially of about 99.5% by weight of
phosphoric acid at 85% concentration, from O.I 1 to 0.14% by
weight of 1,3-dibutyl thiourea, from 0.09 to 0.11% by weight
of 1,3-diethyl thiourea, about 0.025% by weight of a non-ionic
surface active agent, from 0.10 to 0.20% by weight of a lower
monohydric alcohol, and from 0.08 to 0.18% by weight of an
amine selected from the group consisting of polyoxyethylene
fatty alkyl amines containing 2 to 15 moles of ethylene oxide,
the fatty alkyl group of which being derived from fatty acids
containing 12 to 18 carbon atoms.
4,381,250
CURING OF TETRABASIC LEAD PASTED BATTERY
ELECTRODES
John F. Rittenhouse, Lafayette Hill, Pa., aarignor to Allied
CorporatioB, Toledo, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 212,480, Dec. 3, 1980, Pat No. 4438,163.
This appUcation Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 344,911
Int a.3 HOIM 4/58. 4/20
U.S. Q. 252—182.1 4 Claims
1. A paste for coating at least one electrode for fabricating a
plate of a lead acid battery, comprising water, tetrabasic lead
sulfate and an effective amount of ammonium cartwnate.
942
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4381,251
OXIDATION INHIBITOR
Minoni KJtayama, and Hisao Odashima, both of Himeji, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 21, 1977, Ser. No. 808,668
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 29, 1976, 51-76878;
Sep. 10, 1976, 51-108591
Int. a.2 C09K 15/32
U.S. a. 252—400 R 2 Qaims
1. An oxidation inhibitor comprising:
(A) 10 to 200 parts by weight of at least one selected from
the group consisting of
Silica powder
Kaoline
Magnesia powder
MgO-Cr203 refractories
Mg-Si02 refractories, and
Mica
(B) 10 to 200 parts by weight of silicic anhydride (Si02),
(C) 10 to 200 parts by weight of at least one selected from the
group consisting of Cr, V, Al, Ti, Nb, Ni and Cu in the
powder form,
(D) 5 to 50 parts by weight orat, least one selected from the
group consisUflg^f colloidal sinca and alumina sol, and
(E) 1 to 20 parts by weight of water-soluble resin,
wherein the ratio'iaf the metal powder to the total solid compo-
nents is within a range defined by the following formula:
WgigfiTof metal powder
Weighv of total solid components
X 100 = 20-50%
(the total solid components is the sum of (A)-f (B)-f (C)-l--
(solid component of D) + (E)).
4,381,252
CATALYST FOR PRODUCING POLYOLEnNS
Hisaya Sakurai; Yoshihiko Katayama; Tadashi Ikegami, and
Masayasu Furusato, all of Kurashiki, Japan, assignors to
Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabusbiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 231,183, Jan. 29, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 91,326, Nov. 5,
1979, abandoned. This application Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,240
Int. a.' C08F 4/64
U.S. a. 252—429 B 30 Qaims
1. A catalyst suitable for polymerizing an a-olefin, compris-
ing a solid catalyst component (A) and an organocompound
selected from the group consisting of an organometal, organo-
boron and organosilicon compound (B), the solid catalyst
component (A) being prepared by reacting an organomag-
nesium compound (1) soluble in a hydrocarbon medium and
represented by the general formula,
MgRpiR,2x,.Z,
wherein
R' is a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 3 carbon atoms;
R2 is a hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms and
the difference in number of carbon atoms between R' and
R2 is at least 2;
X is an electronegative group having an oxygen atom, a
nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom;
Z is an organocompound of aluminum, boron, beryllium,
zinc, silicon or lithium;
p and q each is a number above 0 to 1;
r is a number from 0 to 1;
p + q + r = 2; and
s is a number from 0.02 to 0.09
with a titanium and/or vanadium compound (2) having at least
one halogen atom directly connected to the titanium and/or
vanadium.
4,381,253
ULTRA HIGH EITiaENCY CATALYST FOR
POLYMERIZING OLEnNS
Randall S. Shipley, Alvin, Tex., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,542
Int. a.3 C08F 4/64
U.S. O. 252—431 C 15 Qaims
1. A reaction product or complex formed from the admix-
ture of
(a) a reaction product or complex formed from a mixture of
(i) at least one transition metal compound represented by
the empirical formulae Tm(OR)pC;t.^ TmOXx.2 or
Tm(0R);t.20 wherein Tm is a transition metal selected
from groups IVB, VB or VIB; each R is independently
a hydrocarbyl group having from 1 to about 20 carbon
atoms; each X is independently a halogen; x has a value
equal to the valence of Tm and y has a value from 1 to
the valence of Tm; and
(ii) at least one non-metallic oxygen-containing compound
selected from the group consisting of molecular oxy-
gen, alcohols, ketones, aldehydes, carboxylic acids,
esters of carboxylic acids, peroxides, water and mix-
tures thereof; and
(b) an essentially non-reducing alkylating agent represented
by the empirical formula R2Zn or RZnX wherein X is a
halogen and each R is independently an alkyl group hav-
ing from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms;
and wherein components (a) and (b) are mixed in proportions
such that the atomic ratio of Zn:Tm is from about 0.1:1 to
about 10:1 and the atomic ratio of 0:Tm is from about 0.1:1 to
about 4:1 and wherein such admixture is evidenced by a color
change.
4,381,254
METHOD FOR PREPARING CATALYSTS FOR
PRODUCTION MALEIC ANHYDRIDE
James T. Wrobleski, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to Monsanto
Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,311
Int. a J BOIJ 27/14.- F25D 25/00. 17/02
U.S. Q. 252—437 7 Qaims
1. In a method for the preparation of a phosphorus-vanadi-
um-oxygen-containing complex catalyst comprising:
(a) contacting vanadium and phosphorus compounds under
conditions which will provide catalyst precursor wherein
greater than SO atom % of the vanadium is in the tetrava-
lent state;
(b) recovering the catalyst precursor;
(c) forming the catalyst precursor into agglomerates; and
(d) calcining the catalyst precursor agglomerations at a
temperature between about 300° C. and 600° C.
the improvement wherein the catalyst precursor is subjected
and reduced to temperatures less than about —78* C. before
calcinating.
4,381,255
BINDERLESS ZEOLITE EXTRUDATES AND METHOD
OF PRODUONG
Richard J. Nozemack, Reisterstown; Chang W. Chi, Columbia,
and John J. Schwonke, Brooklandnlle, all of Md., assignors
to W. R. Grace & Co., New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,075
Int. Q.3 BOIJ 21/16. 29/06. 37/00
U.S. Q. 252—455 Z 9 Claims
1. Process of producing binderless zeolite sieve extnidates
containing at least Type A Zeolite from clay and a synthetic
zeolite, said extnidates having a higher adsorption capacity, a
faster adsorption rate, improved selectivity, and improved
attrition resistance, said process comprising
(a) forming an extrudable mixture of
(i) a synthetic zeolite.
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
943
(ii) metakaolin clay,
(iii) sodium hydroxide solution said clay comprising about
40-60% by weight of the total weight of the clay and
the zeolite on a dry basis and the amount of sodium
hydroxide being in the range of about 90-120% of the
stoichiometric amount to convert the clay to a zeolite;
(b) extruding the mixture of step (a) to form extrudates;
(c) aging the extrudates;
(d) treating the extrudates with a dilute solution of sodium
hydroxide at an elevated temperature to complete the
crystallization of the aged extrudates;
(e) washing the extrudates; and
(0 recovering the washed extrudates and dry calcining them
whereby they can be used as selected adsorbents.
3. The process of claim 1, wherein the amount of sodium
hydroxide in step (a) is 1 10% of the stoichiometric amount.
4,381,256
METHOD OF PRODUaNG BINDERLESS ZEOLITE
EXTRUDATES
Darrell E. Hildebrandt, Baltimore, Md., assignor to W. R. Grace
& Co., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,076
Int. a.3 BOIJ 21/16. 29/06. 37/00
U.S. a. 252—455 Z 8 Qaims
1. In a process of producing binderless zeolite sieve extrud-
ates containing at least Type A Zeolite from clay and a syn-
thetic zeolite, said extrudates having a higher adsorption ca-
pacity, a faster adsorption rate, improved selectivity, and im-
proved attrition resistance, said process comprising
(a) forming an extrudable mixture of
(i) a synthetic zeolite,
(ii) metakaolin clay,
(iii) sodium hydroxide solution
said clay comprising about 40-60% by weight of the total
weight of the clay and the zeolite on a dry basis and the
amount of sodium hydroxide being in the range of about
90-120% of the stoichiometric amount to convert the clay
to a zeolite;
(b) extruding the mixture of step (a) to form extrudates;
(c) aging the extrudates;
(d) treating the extrudates with a dilute solution of sodium
hydroxide at an elevated temperature to complete the
crystallization of the aged extrudates;
(e) washing the extrudates; and
(0 recovering the washed extrudates and dry calcining them
whereby they can be used as selective adsorbents;
the improvement comprising aging the extrudates in step (c)
under dry, bulk storage in a container whereby autogenous
heat develops to crystallize a substantial portion of the clay.
3. The process of claim 1, wherein the amount of sodium
hydroxide in step (a) is 1 10% of the stoichiometric amount.
earth component; wherein the platinum group, catalytically
available cobalt, tantalum and alkali or alkaline earth compo-
nents are uniformly dispersed throughout the porous carrier
material; wherein substantially all of the platinum group com-
ponent is present in the elemental metallic stote; wherein sub-
stantially all of the catalytically available cobalt component is
present in the elemental metallic state or in a sute which is
reducible to the elemental metallic state under hydrocarbon
dehydrogenation conditions or in a mixture of these states;
wherein substantially all of the tantalum component is present
in a positive oxidation state; and wherein substantially all of the
alkali or alkaline earth component is present in a positive oxi-
dation state.
4,381,257
NONAaDIC MULTIMETALLIC CATALYTIC
COMPOSITE FOR HYDROCARBON
DEHYDROGENATION
George J. Antos, Bartlett, lU., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
PIaines,Ill.
Diiision of Ser. No. 203,016, Not. 3, 1980, Pat No. 4,304,950,
which is a division of Ser. No. 130,675, Mar. 17, 1980, Pat No.
4,268,706, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 9054N)7,
May 15, 1978, Pat No. 4,199,438. This appUcation Sep. 11,
1981. Ser. No. 301,069
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 18,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int a.J BOIJ 23/58
U.S. a. 252—466 B 8 Claims
1. A nonacidic catalytic composite comprising a porous
carrier material containing, on an elemental basis, about 0.01 to
about 2 wt.% platinum group component, about 0.05 to about
S wt.% cobalt component and 0.01 to about 5 wt.% tantalum
component, and about 0.1 to about S wt.% alkali or alkaline
4 381 258
ELECTRONIC CELL WITH A NON-AQUEOUS
ELECTROLYTE
Alain Le Mehaute, Gif sur Yvette; Jean Rouxel, Nantes, and
Annie Le Blanc-Soreau, La ChapeUe sur Erdre, all of France,
assignors to Societe Anonyme dite Compagnie Generate d'E-
lectricite, Paris, France
Division of Ser. No. 175,327, Aug. 4, 1980. This application Not.
13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,074
Gaims priority, application France, Sep. 11, 1979, 79 22643
Int. a.3 HOIB 1/06
U.S. a. 252-519 2 Qainu
1. A method of manufacturing a positive electrode for an
electric cell having a negative electrode, whose active material
includes an alkali metal, and an electrolyte, said positive elec-
trode including at least one compound chosen from the group
consisting of Fe2SiS4, Fe2GeS4. Cu2Fe2SnS4, Fe2SnS4,
Cu2MnSnS4, Cu4SnS4 and mixtures thereof, wherein the
method comprises, in sequence:
preparing said compound in powdered form;
dispersing said powdered compound in a polytetrafluoroethyl-
ene emulsion in the proportion of 15 to 5% of emulsion for
85 to 95% of powdered compound, by weight,
adding alcohol to the dispersion of powdered compound in the
emulsion to form a consolidated compound; and
compressing said consolidated compound onto a conductive
support.
4,381,259
SHAMPOO COMPOSITION EMPLOYING ANIONIC
PHOSPHORIC AOD ESTER SURFACTANT AND
CATIONIC POLYMER
Itomi Homma, and Noriko Okada, both of Funabashi, Japan,
assignors to Kao Soap Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Not. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,466
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 28, 1979, 54/173440
Int a.3 CUD 3/36. 1/14
U.S. a. 252-542 9 Claims
1. A shampoo composition, consisting essentially of
(A) from 0.1 to 2.5% by weight of at least one anionic phos-
phoric acid ester having the formula
O
II
A— P— OX|
B
wherein A is
RO-eCH2CHO))B or RCONH-^CH2CHO^;
Rl Ri
R is alkyl having an average carbon atom number of 8 to
18 or alkenyl having an average carbon atom number of 8
to 18; Ri is hydrogen or methyl; m is from 0 to 8; n is from
1 to 8; B is —0X2 or —A; and X] and Xj. which can be
944
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
the same or difTerent, are hydrogen, alkali metal, alkyl
(Ci-C3)-substituted ammonium or hydroxyalkyl (C1-C3)-
substituted ammonium;
(B) from 0.05 to 2.5% by weight of at least one cationic
polymer effective for conditioning hair selected from the
group consisting of
(i) copolymers of quaternized vinylpyrrolidone and ami-
noethyl methacrylate,
(ii) copolymers of adipic acid and dimethylaminohydroxy-
propylene diethylenetriamine,
(iii) poly-(N,N-dimethyl-3,5-methylenepiperidinium chlo-
ride),
(iv) copolymers of N,N-dimethyl-3,5-
methylenepiperidinium chloride and acrylamide,
(v) copolymers of acrylamide and /3-methacryloxyethyl
trimethyl ammonium,
(vi) polyethyleneimines,
(vii) cationized cellulose, and
(viii) condensates of polyamines and polyglycols;
(C) from 1 to 30% by weight of at least one member selected
from the group consisting of water-soluble anionic or-
ganic surfactant effective for washing hair and different
from said anionic phosphoric acid ester, water-soluble
nonionic organic surfactant effective for washing hair and
water-soluble amphoteric organic surfactant effective for
washing hair; and
(D) the balance is essentially water, said shampoo composi-
tion having a pH of 4 to 8.
H3C
H2C
H2C
O
CH2
CH2
CH2'
,o=c
CH
I I
o=cO=c
I I
CH
O
O
=«4^l
CH2
CH
I
c=o
I
o
I
NH
I
(CH2)6
NH
I
,CH2''
-CH
P=C
-O
CH2
CH2
o
I
c=o
I
NH
I
(CH2)6
NH
I
c=o
I
o
(XXVII)
CH2
CH2
CH2
II
CH
CH CH
c=o v~" c=o
I I I
? ?
CHr— ^c
o
I
,CH2
4,381,260
AROMATIC CHROMOPHORIC SUBSTITUTED
POLYSILOXANE DYES
Nan S. Chu, Hartsdale, and Lawrence Marlin, Yorktown
Heights, both of N.Y., assignors to Union Carbide Corpora-
tion, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,388
Int. a.5 C09B 5/42. 39/00; A23L 1/27; A61K 47/00
U.S. a. 260—144 9 Qaims
1. A polymeric dye of the formula:
(CH3)3SiO [(CH3)SiO];. [(CH3)2SiO];, Si(CH3)
L— Chromo
wherein x ranges from 2 to 100, y ranges from 20 to 300, the
ratio of x:y is at least 1:10, L is a divalent unsaturated aliphatic
linkage which connects the silicon atom to Chromo by non-
hydrolyzable covalent bonds, and Chromo is an aromatic
chromophoric radical derived from either azo or anthrone
dyes and wherein the molecular weight of the polymeric dye is
from 200 to 50,000.
4,381,262
WATER-INSOLUBLE AZO DYESTUFFS, THEIR
MANUFACTURE AND THEIR USE
Ulrich Biihler, Schoneck; Dieter Cornelius, Darmstadt; Rudolf
Lowenfeld, Dreieich; Uwe Kosubek, Biittelbom; Reinhard
Hahnle, Konigstein, and Rudolf Schickfluss, Kelkheim, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Cassella Aktiengesell-
schaft, Frankfurt am Main Fechenheim, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Continuation of Ser. No. 241,586, Mar. 9, 1981. This application
Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,574
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 13,
1980, 3009635
Int. a.3 C09B 29/08
U.S. a. 260—207.1 4 Qaims
1. An azo dyestuff of the formula
CN
O2N
\
CN
NHCOR'
wherein R is a linear alkyl having 2 to 4 carbon atoms and R'
is a linear alkyl having 3 to 5 carbon atoms or isopropyl.
4,381,261
STRUCTURALLY COLORED CROSS-LINKABLE
COMPOUNDS, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR
UTILIZATION IN COATING COMPOSITIONS
Evelyne J. M. Bonnet, AmfireTille-sous-les-Monts, France, as-
signor to PCUK Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann, Cour-
bevoie, France
Filed Not. 14, 1979, Ser. No. 94,143
Claims priority, application France, Not. 21, 1978, 78 32738
Int a.3 C09B 29/22
VJS. a. 260—162 7 Claims
1. A structurally colored compound of the formula:
4,381,263
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF PENICILLANIC
ACID ESTERS
Vytautas J. Jasys, New London, Conn., assignor to Pfizer Inc.,
New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 246,482, Mar. 23, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jan. 25, 1982, Set. No. 341,081
Int. a.3 C07D 499/08
U.S. a. 260—239.1 20 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a compound selected
from those of the formula
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
945
(0)„
y " s
^L- N \
4,381,265
AROMATIC NITRILE-CONTAINING COMPOUNDS
USEFUL AS DYESTUFF INTERMEDIATES
wW^H} Edward W. Kluger, Pauline, and Joe T. Burchette, Mayo, both
CH3 of S.C., assignors to Miliiken Research Corporation, Spartan-
burg, S.C.
CO2CH2CI Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,731
Int. a.' C07C 121/78
wherein n is an integer of 0 or 2, R is selected from the group ^•^' ^- ^W 465 E II Qainu
consisting of '• Aromatic nitrile-containing compounds of the formula:
(a) hydrogen,
V
CH2— CH— O— CH2CH2— CN
(b)
^'^
CHCONH— , and
I
Rl
(c)
-^-{j-^";
CO.
N—
HN
-^CH3
.CH3
wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydro-
gen and hydroxy and Ri is selected from the group con-
sisting of azido, amino, carbobenzyloxyamino and I-
methoxycarbonylpropen-2-ylamino, which comprises
contacting one mole of a compound of the formula
H H
-*•— N
(0)„
S
.^
PCH3
— r///,,
%/i
'C02N(R3)4
wherein R3 is alkyl having from one to four carbon atoms,
with at least one mole of a solvent selected from the group
consisting of bromochloromethane and iodochlorome-
thane at from about -20* C. to about 25' C. with the
proviso that when n is 2, R is hydrogen.
N
/
i
\
R2
where n is 1 or 2; R is selected from H, CI, Br, NO2, a lower
alkyl group containing from 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, and a
lower alkoxy group containing from 1 to about 4 carbon atoms;
R| is selected from H and CH3; and R2 is selected from
CH2CH2CN, and:
V
CH2— CH— O— CH2CH2CN
where R| has the value given above.
4,381,266
(N-SUBSTITUTED BENZOYDHALOBENZOIC AQD
ANHYDRIDES
Robert Gamer, Bury, and Michael J. Whitehead, Failsworth,
both of England, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ards-
ley, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 38,024, May 10, 1979, Pat. No. 4,277,400.
This application Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,201
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 18, 1978,
20456/78; Apr. 3, 1979, 7911660
Int. a.3 C07C 51/56; C07D 295/06
U.S. a. 260—546 6 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
4,381,264
PROCESS FOR THE CONJUGATION OF THE DOUBLE
BONDS OF POLYUNSATURATED FATTY AODS AND
FATTY ACID MIXTURES
Alfred Stnive, Hilden, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Hen-
kel Kommanditgesellschaft Auf Aktien, Dusseldorf-Hol-
thausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,541
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 24,
1980, 3019963
Int. C1.3 C09F 7/08
U.S. a. 260—405.6 11 Claims
1. A process for the conjugation of the double bonds of
polyunsaturated fatty acids consisting essentially of treating an
acidic material consisting essentially of polyunsaturated fatty
acids or mixtures of fatty acids containing polyunsaturated
fatty acids with SO2 in the presence of a substoichiometric
amount of at least one soap-forming base at a temperature
range of from 170' C. to 260" C, and recovering conjugated
double bond polyunsaturated fatty acids, wherein said treating
step is performed in the presence of from 0.5 to 25 mol %,
based on said acidic material of SO2; from 0.5 to 25 mol %,
based on said acidic material of at least one soap-forraing base
selected from the group consisting of alkali metal compounds
and alkaline earth metal compounds; and from 0.05 to 2% by
weight, based on said acidic material, of water.
CO— o— coz
wherein
Rl and R2 are each independently hydrogen, Ci-Ci2-alkyl,
C2-Ci2-alkenyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, phenyl, benzyl,
halophenyl, halobenzyl, nitrophenyl, nitrobenzyl, lower
alkylphenyl, lower alkylbenzyl, lower alkoxybenzyl or
lower alkoxybenzyl, or K\ and R2. together with the
nitrogen atom to which they are attached are pyrrolidino,
piperidino, pipecolino, morpholino, thiomorpholino or
piperazino;
X is one or more of halo, nitro, — NRi(R2), hydrogen,
Ci-Ci2-alkyI, C2-Ci2-alkenyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl,
phenyl, benzyl, halophenyl, halobenzyl, nitrophenyl, ni-
trobenzyl, lower alkylphenyl, lower alkylbenzyl, lower
alkoxyphenyl or lower alkoxybenzyl;
1029 O.G.— 42
946
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
Hal is halo;
Z is hydrogen, Ci-C4-aIkyl, phenyl, halophenyl, methyl-
phenyl. methoxyphenyl, ethoxyphenyl, lower alkyiamino
or di-lower alkyiamino; and
n is 1 to 4.
4,381,268
DEVICE FOR GASSING LIQUIDS OR SUSPENSIONS
Gerhard Miiller, Keikheim, and Giinther Sell, Hattersheim am
Main, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst
Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,659
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 17,
1980, 3027035
Int. a.3 BOIF 3/04
U.S. a. 261-109 5 Qaims
4,381,267
AIRWAY HUMIDIHER FOR THE RESPIRATORY
TRACT
Richard R, Jackson, One Atlantic Ave., Swampscott, Mass.
01907
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 46,943, Jun. 8, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 923,905,
Jul. 12, 1978, abandoned. This application May 28, 1981, Ser.
No. 267,867
Int. a.J A61M 15/00
U.S. a. 261-104 16 Oaims
Da
1. An airway humidifier for directly humidifying the air flow
requirement of a respiratory tract of a living being breathing
directly through the humidifier during the inspiration phase of
a breathing cycle,
said humidifier comprising a nest comprising a large multi-
plicity of relatively large bore, thin-walled-air-transmit-
ting elongated hollow fibers terminating at an output end
that is adapted to communicate the merged fiow through
a tube to the respiratory tract,
said fibers having an internal diameter of the order of 0.050
inch, up to about 0.080 inch, and being present in sufficient
number and length to enable the peak air fiow rate of said
air fiow requirement to proceed through said nest with a
characteristic pressure drop of less than 5 centimeters of
water,
a water chamber surrounding said fibers and having suffi-
cient rigidity to resist collapse when subjected to negative
operational water pressure,
a water source for water heated to about 105° P.,
and a water pump connected to exhaust said chamber, said
water chamber connected to said water source whereby
said pump is adapted to maintain said chamber filled with
water under negative pressure by drawing water through
said chamber from said source,
said fibers incorporating a wetting agent whereby the walls
of said fibers having a wettable surface and under said
negative pressure water conditions being permeable to
water vapor and impermeable to liquid water, and the
aggregate wetted surface area of said fibers being suffi-
cient to humidify the peak flow rate of said air flow re-
quirement of said respiratory tract, whereby pulsing air
flow into the respiratory tract can be humidified by a
compact, closely-located unit.
1. A device for gassing liquids which comprises an inlet
having a jet orifice for projecting a coherent jet of liquid, a
conical surface substantially without obstructions thereon
opposite the orifice for piercing the jet of liquid and inducing
flow of a liquid film over the conical surface, a frustro-conical
surface under the conical surface and spaced therefrom to
cause liquid flowing over the conical surface to continue its
flow over the frustro-conical surface at a distance therefrom,
means for introducing a stream of gas or vapor into the space
between the conical and frustro-conical surfaces for intimate
admixture with the flow of liquid thereover, and guide means
spaced from the base of the frustro-conical surface forming an
annular zone for withdrawing gassed liquid therefrom.
4,381,269
FABRICATION OF A LOW-LOSS PLASTIC OPTICAL
HBER
Toshikuni Kaino; Michiya FiOiki; Shigeo Nara, all of Mito, and
Shigeru Oikawa, Katsuta, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon
Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation, Japan
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,834
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 11, 1980, 55-157599;
Nov. 14, 1980, 55-159599
Int. C\? B29D 11/00: G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 264-1.5 22 Claims
1. In a fabrication method of low-loss plastic optical fibers by
using a polymer prepared from methyl methacrylate as the
principal constituent for a core material, and forming a clad-
ding of a synthetic macromolecular compound having a lower
refractive index than that of said core material therearound,
the improvement comprises, in a sealed system, the steps of
adding a polymerization initiator and chain transfer agent via a
distillation step of said polymerization initiator and chain
transfer to a methyl methacrylate monomer distilled under a
reduced pressure condition,
subjecting succeedingly said monomer to polymerization to
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
947
produce a core polymer while maintaining said reduced
pressure condition, and then
subjecting said core polymer produced to melt spinning to
form a core fiber.
4,381,270
METHOD OF PRODUCING A FLASH SUPPRESSED
PRESSED ROCKET PROPELLANT
Lars- Erik Bjorn; Mats Olsson, and Olof Oman, all of Karlskoga,
Sweden, assignors to Aktiebolaget Bofors, Bofors, Sweden
Filed Apr. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 141,731
Claims priority, application Sweden, Apr. 24, 1980, 7903578
Int. a.3 C06B 45/12
U.S. a. 264—3 B 11 Qaims
1. A method of producing pressed double base rocket pro-
pellant with good flash suppression and high burning velocity
which comprises providing a powder paste of double base type
free from the necessary catalysts and flash reducing agent;
taking a small batch of said powder paste and mixing thereof
a flash reducing agent in a quantity adapted to the entire
quantity of said powder paste;
mixing into the larger remaining batch of powder paste
catalysts in a quantity adapted to the entire quantity of
powder paste;
converting the two batches separately through mechanical
processing into desired form;
then mixing the two batches of powder together in layers or
in its entirety, and then compressing through a die into a
coherent body of propellant under such conditions that
the two batches of propellant form longitudinal veins in
the body of propellant obtained.
4,381,271
USE OF HRED HBROUS GRAPHITE IN FABRICATING
POLYCRYSTALLINE DIAMOND AND/OR CUBIC
BORON NITRIDE/SILICON CARBIDE/SILICON
COMPOSITE BODIES
Stephen C. Hayden, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Worthington, Ohio
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,219
Int. a.3 C04B 35/60
U.S. a. 264—29.5 7 Qaima
1. In a process for making a shaped polycrystalline body
having a volume greater than 10 cubic millimeters comprised
of a mass of crystals selected from diamond, cubic boron ni-
tride, and combinations thereof adherently bonded together by
a bonding medium of silicon carbide and elemental silicon, said
crystals comprising between 1 and 70 volume percent of said
body, which process comprises:
(a) inflltrating a substantially uniform mixture of said crystals
and fibrous graphite with fluid silicon under a partial
vacuum at a temperature above 1400* C; and
(b) cooling and recovering the infiltrated mass of crystals;
the improvement which comprises vacuum heat treating the
fibrous graphite at a temperature between about 800* C.
and 1700° C. followed by cooling and release of the vac-
uum prior to inclusion of the fibrous graphite into the said
crystal mixture.
4,381,272
METHOD OF AND SYSTEM FOR INJECTING A FLUID
INTO A PLASTIHED MASS IN AN EXTRUDER
Jiirgen Ehritt, Hiichenbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Battenfeld Maschinenfabrik GmbH, Meinerzhagen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 266,098
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 27,
1980, 3020122
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264—40.3 10 Qaims
T"
(..1
I;
.1 " y
1. A method of operating an extruder system having;
an extruder having a barrel and an extruder worm therein,
a source of an additive fluid under pressure,
a conduit connected to said source and openmg into said
barrel,
a closable upstream valve in said conduit between said
source and said barrel,
a closable downstream valve in said conduit between said
upstream valve and said barrel, and
a pressurizable fluid reservoir in said conduit between said
valves,
said method comprising the steps of:
routing said extruder in said barrel to plastify a resin therein;
alternatively opening and closing said valves, whereby when
said upstream valve is open and said downstream valve is
closed said additive fluid flows into and pressurizes said
reservoir and when said upstream valve is closed and said
downstream valve is open the pressurized additive fluid in
said reservoir flows into said barrel;
detecting the roUtion rate of said worm in said barrel; and
pressurizing said reservoir at a level generally proportional
948
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
to the detected worm rotation rate, whereby as said worm
rotates rapidly to greatly pressurize a resin therein said
reservoir is pressurized correspondingly with great pres-
sure.
2. An extruder system comprising:
an extruder having a barrel and an extruder worm therein;
a source of an additive fluid under pressure;
a conduit connected to said source and opening into said
barrel, whereby said fluid can flow along said conduit
from said source to said barrel;
a closable upstream valve in said conduit between said
source and said barrel;
a closable downstream valve in said conduit between said
upstream valve and said barrel;
a fluid reservoir in said conduit between said valves;
means for alternatively opening and closing said valves,
whereby when said upstream valve is open and said down-
stream valve is closed said additive fluid flows into and
pressurizes said reservoir and when said upstream valve is
closed and said downstream valve is open the pressurized
additive fluid in said reservoir flows into said barrel;
drive means for rotating said worm in said barrel; and
control means connected to said drive means and to said
reservoir for pressuring same at a pressure proportional to
the rotation rate of said worm.
separated from each other by said matrix whereby said seg-
ments retain their shape and position in the cross section over
the length of the filament comprising feeding said matrix com-
ponent as a compact core stream to the spinning orifice of a
spinneret coaxially with said spinning orifice and injecting said
4,38U73
METHOD OF CO-EXTRUDING A REINFORCED
COMPOSITE FOAMED RESIN CHANNEL-SHAPED
SEALING STRIP HAVING AN ABRADED SURFACE
PORTION
Roberto Azzola, Turin, Italy, assignor to Saiag S.p.A. Industria
Articoii Gomma, Turin, Italy
Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 193,212
Oaims priority, application Italy, Dec. 21, 1979, 69460 A/79
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00: B29F i/lO; B29H 21/04
U.S. a. 264-45.9 4 Qaims
other polymer component as a plurality of spatially separated
partial streams aligned in at least two planes perpendicular to
the axis of said orifice radially into said matrix component
before said matrix component leaves the spinning orifice,
wherein at least one of said spacially separated partial streams
is injected at a point within said matrix component.
4,381,275
STABILIZED CORE INJECTION MOLDING OF PLASTIC
Jens O. Sorensen, Rancho Santa Fe, Calif., assignor to Trade
Finance International, Georgetown, Cayman Islands
FUed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,302
Int. a.3 B29F 7/00
U.S. a. 264-328.8 9 Claims
1* ■;: !i-»jR>
1 SI«K!llMia
1. A process for manufacturing a sealing strip for vehicle
bodies comprising a channel-shaped attachment profile of solid
rubber having embedded therein a metallic reinforcing strip,
comprising the steps of: co-extruding with the attachment
profile a layer of sponge rubber coating the outer surface of the
profile; co-vulcanizing the profile and the coating layer
thereon; and abrading the exposed surface of the coating layer
to render said surface velvety.
4,381,274
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF A
MULTICOMPONENT YARN COMPOSED OF AT LEAST
TWO SYNTHETIC POLYMER COMPONENTS
Erich Kessler, Hoclist, and Peter Birken, MUtenberg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Akzona Incorporated,
AshcTiUe, N.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 6,491, Jan. 25, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Ang. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,786
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 25,
1978, 2803136; Jan. 25, 1978, 7802110[U]
Int a.3 B29H 7/18
UA a. 264-147 11 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a multicomponent fila-
ment consisting of at least two synthetic polymer components,
comprising a matrix of one of said polymer components and a
plurality of segments of at least one other polymer component
1. A method of cyclic injection molding of hollow plastic
products, utilizing a mold chilling cavity with a core, in which
the dimensions of the plastic products are controlled by stabi-
lizing the core, wherein each production cycle comprises the
steps of:
(a) injecting a hot molten first plastic at a first temperature
and a first pressure from at least a first runner through a
first gate into the chilling cavity so that the cavity is not
filled and so that the injected plastic does not obstruct
injection from a second gate;
(b) cooling the injected first plastic in the chilling cavity to
thereby cool and at least partly solidify the first plastic;
(c) injecting, subsequent to injecting the first plastic, a hot
molten second plastic at a second temperature and a sec-
ond pressure from a second runner through the second
gate into the chilling cavity whereby the cooled injected
first plastic is sufficiently cooled and at least partly solidi-
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
949
fied to stabilize the core by imF>eding any movement of the
core caused by injecting the second plastic and whereby
the injected second plastic Tills the cavity and fuses with
the previously injected plastic;
(d) cooling the injected second plastic in the chilling cavity
to thereby solidify the fused unit; and
(e) ejecting the solidified molded unit of the hollow plastic
product.
as to permit at least one vacuum hole to be aligned with this
vacuum port before the mold closes.
4,381,276
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR THE FABRICATION
OF A FLAT-SHAPED HOLLOW BODY
Wilhelm Hegler, Goethestrasse 2, D-8790 Bad Kissingen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, and Ralph-Peter Hegler, Bad Kissingen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Wilhelm Hegler, Bad
Kissingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,837
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 17,
1980, 3027045
Int. a.3B29C; 7/07
U.S. a. 264—508 9 Oaims
a 37 f «
4,381,277
METHOD FOR PRODUONG CONTAINERS
Claes T. Nilsson, Liiddekopinge, Sweden, assignor to PLM AB,
Malmo, Sweden
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,425
Qaims priority, application Sweden, May 29, 1980, 8004003;
Dec. 10, 1980, 8008652
Int. a.3 B29C J 7/07: B29D 9/04
U.S. a. 264—512 10 Oaims
1. Process for the continuous manufacture of a flat-shaped
body, particularly a ventilation and drainage panel or mat or a
heat exchange panel or mat, equipped with fluid transport
ducts, which have fluid entry ports and fluid exit ports,
through the use of a mold consisting of continuously-moving
mold segment halves, moving along a forming line which,
upon entering the forming die, are moved through the forming
die in close contact with each other in the operating direction
and with the forming die closed on pairs of mold segment
halves, wherein a warm thermoplastic hose is introduced into
the forming die and formed there under vacuum, wherein said
hose has a relatively large waTl thickness, and wherein the hose
stock, in at least a portion of its cross section, is subjected to
vacuum action before the (wo mold segment halves are
brought together and is then pressed together thereby forming
' voids and welds over at least a portion of its cross section.
7. Apparatus for continuously forming a flat-shaped hollow
body comprising a forming die consisting of movable and
continuously guided mold segment halves which, upon enter-
ing the forming die, are guidable into close facing proximity to
each other and move in an operating direction, wherein the
two paired mold segment halves have mold recesses which
correspond with the desired profile of the hollow body and
wherein the mold segment halves are equipped with at least
one vacuum port which leads in one direction to their under-
side and in another direction to the mold recess on their other
side and which can be aligned with at least one vacuum port in
a machine table which holds the forming die in place, and
wherein at least one vacuum port is formed in such a manner
1. A method for producing a barrier-coated container of a
thermoplastic material from a preform, said method compris-
ing stretching a preform of amorphous thermoplastic material
axially while reducing the wall thickness of the preform to
form an axially stretched preform having monoaxially oriented
crystallinity, applying a barrier layer on the axially stretched
preform, heating the thus coated preform to a molding temper-
ature therefor and circumferentially expanding the axially
stretched and coated preform to form the barrier-coated con-
tainer, wherein said axial stretching represents the total axial
stretching of the preform and said barrier layer only undergoes
circumferential expansion and corresponding reduction in
thickness.
4,381,278
METHOD FOR FORMING A COATED PAPERBOARD
CONTAINER
Dominic D. Ingraffea, Ringwood, N.J., assignor to James River-
Dixie/Northem, Inc., Greenwich, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 208,624, Nov. 20, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 65,581, Aug. 10, 1979,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 968,014, Dec. 11,
1978, abandoned. This application Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No.
331,507
Int. 0.'B29C7 7/04
U.S. O. 264—512 19 Oaims
l;:;;:■■.■:'.■;■■.■:■^•^:^■^•^^y■■■■■^■•~7'
1. A method of deep drawing a container from a paperboard
blank having a layer of polymeric material on at least one side
thereof, comprising the steps of: providing a female mold and
a mandrel having the shape of the outside and inside, respec-
tively, of said container, and movable between an open posi-
tion and a blank forming closed position; disposing said blank
between said female mold and said mandrel in said open posi-
950
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
tion thereof, so that said sidf having said layer is presented
toward said mandrel; heating said female mold and said man-
drel to temperatures in a range of from about 200° F. to about
350' F . said temperatures being sufficient to set the paper-
board blank and capable of damaging said layer; relatively
moving said heated female mold and said heated mandrel
toward one another into the recited closed position thereof to
engage said blank and urge the latter into conformity with said
female mold and said mandrel; and, just prior to movement to
the recited closed position of said female mold and said man-
drel, introducing and confining a film of compressible fluid
between said mandrel and said side of said blank and said layer
to ensure against damage to the latter by said heated mandrel.
1. A process for the manufacture of an article from polyeth-
ylene terephthlate or similar materials comprising providing a
substantially flat blank of amorphous, polyethylene terephth-
late having a crystallinity of less than 10%, clamping said blank
between clamping devices to form at least one inner zone
completely surrounded by a closed, band-like, clamped section
of material, applying a press element against said inner zone
over a region smaller than the total area of said inner zone,
whereby a second closed, band-like zone is formed between
said clamped band-like section and said inner zone to which
the press element is applied, relatively displacing said press
element and said clamping devices with the thermoplastic
material at a temperature below the glass transition tempera-
ture (Tg) while maintaining said press element in contact with
said inner zone, the second band-like zone being substantially
greater than the thickness of the blank whereby the material in
said second band-like zone is freely stretched by drawing in a
drawing region between the outer surface of the press element
and the inner surface of the clamping devices without contact
of the drawn material with the surfaces of the clamping de-
vices, the material in said drawing region forming a transition
zone at which flow takes place in the material reducing the
original thickness of the blank by a factor of about 3 to effect
crystallization thereof and monoaxial orientation whereby a
drawn element is formed which comprises an edge part com-
posed of said clamped section and a body which is drawn
relative to said edge part and includes material drawn until it
news to form the monoaxially oriented crystallized material,
the crystallinity of said material of said body being between
10% and 25%, while the crystallinity of the material in said
edge part and in any undrawn part of the body retains its
3riginal value of less than 10%, and reshaping said body at a
temperature above the glass transition temperature (Tg) by
}iow-moulding to achieve the shape of the final product.
4,381,280
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PRODUCING NUCLEAR
FUSION
Thomas G. Roberts, Huntsville, Ala., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,811
Int. CI.' G21B 1/02
U.S. a. 376— 105 6aaims
4,381,279
MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES BY DRAWING AND
BLOW-MOULDING
Kjel! M. Jakobsen, Skanor, and Claes T. Nilsson, Loddekopinge,
both of Sweden, assignors to PLM Aktiebolag, Malmo, Swe-
den
Filed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 154,890
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 11, 1979, 7905047
Int. CI.' B29C 17/03. 17/04
U.S. CI. 264—522 12 Claims
1. A trigger device for directing electron beam pulses
toward a target comprising: an electron accelerator having a
cathode for emitting electrons and an accelerating electrode
having plural openings therein through which electrons exit
said accelerator, said cathode being a multi-element cathode
having a plurality of separate emitting portions for simulta-
neously generating separate electron beam pulses from a com-
mon source, said emitting portions being positioned adjacent
respective openings, in said accelerating electrode for direct-
ing electrons from an emitting portion through a particular
electrode opening, a plurality of curved dielectric linear pinch
discharge tubes of equal length for directing the separate elec-
tron beam pulses to the target from different directions for
symmetrically and simultaneously irradiating the target uni-
formly, each tube having a first end adjacent said accelerating
electrode for receiving electrons therein from only one of said
cathode emitting portions, a second end adjacent said target,
and being filled with a plasma producing medium for provid-
ing electron transport through said tube.
4,381,281
REACTOR AND PROCESS FOR PRODUCTION OF
NOVEL NUCLEAR FUEL
Linton W. Lang, Richland, Wash., and Robert L. Stetson, Pacif-
ica, Calif., assignors to Pacific Nuclear Fuels, Inc., Richland,
Wash.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 861,285, Jan. 20, 1978,
abandoned. This application May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 215,161
Int. a.3 G21C 3/28
U.S. a. 376—172 3 Claims
1. A method of production of a novel nuclear fuel compris-
ing the steps:
(A) initially charging a light-water nuclear reactor with fertile
thorium fuel elements and fissile uranium core elements in
predetermined arrangements; wherein the thorium is segre-
gated from the uranium and wherein some of said thorium
fuel elements are extra-core fuel elements;
(B) irradiating said thorium fuel elements and said fissile ura-
nium core elements at an averge driver fuel rod power
output of approximately 7 kw thermal per foot;
(C) continuing said irradiation of said extra-core thorium fuel
elements for a ]}eriod of two to three years at a power den-
sity of 50 to 100 kw thermal per liter;
(D) thereafter removing and replacing preselected ones of said
thorium fuel elements and said fissile uranium fuel elements;
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
951
(E) further continuing said irradiation of the non-removed
thorium fuel elements until the U-232 content in the U-233
averages 300 to 500 parts per million;
(F) removing and co-dissolving only said thorium fuel ele-
ments together with natural uranium in the proportion of 2
to 3% U-233 in total uranium;
the deflection in the direction of the cooling gas flowing
along said inner conduit;
means for mounting said shielding annulus within said con-
duit housing, said means and the outer surface of said
shielding annulus defming a second annular flow path for
reactor cooling gas communicating with said outer con-
duit; and
a plurality of mounting elements fixedly securing said dis-
placement body to said shielding annulus.
4,381,283
CONTROL COMPONENT STRUCTURE
Lewis A. Walton, Lynchburg, Va., assignor to The Babcock A
Wilcox Company, New Orleans, La.
Continuation of Ser. No. 952,522, Oct. 18, 1978, abandoned.
This application Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,396
Int. a.3 G21C 7/04
U.S. a. 376—327 4 Qaims
(G) separating the uranium isotopes from those of other ele-
ments present;
thereby producing a fissile fuel comprising U-233 with a U-232
content of less than 10 parts per million in total uranium.
4,381,282
RADIATION SHIELD AND SHIELDED GAS CONDUIT
FOR A REACTOR PRESSURE VESSEL
Claus Elter, Bad Duerkheim; Hans-Juergen Kolodzey, Ketsch;
Josef Schoening, Hambruecken; Hans-Georg Schwiers,
Kietsch, and Wilfried Stracke, Oftersheim, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Hochtemperatur-Reaktorbau GmbH,
Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 177,494
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 22,
1979, 2933899
Int. a.5 G21C 9/00
U.S. a. 376—292 4 Qaims
1. A shielded gas conduit for a reactor pressure vessel com-
prising:
a conduit housing forming a passageway for cooling gas,
said passageway comprising two separate coaxially ar-
ranged conduits with cooling gas flowing in one direction
in the outer conduit and cooling gas flowing in the oppo-
site direction in the inner conduit;
a displacement body arranged centrally within said housing
and having a symmetrical shape about an axis of rotation
coinciding with the longitudinal axis of said conduit hous-
ing;
a shielding annulus surrounding said displacement body at a
distance to deflne a flrst annular flow path for reactor
cooling gas communicating with said inner conduit within
said conduit housing, said shielding annulus having an
inner surface substantially following the contour of the
said displacement body and a cavity area located behind
1. A control component structure comprising:
a spider having a plurality of arms, at least one spider bore
formed in said plurality of arms, said spider bore including
an enlarged recess and a small recess with an upright
truncated conical section forming a transition from the
enlarged recess to the small recess, and
a burnable poison rod including a tube terminating in a
transverse end, a plug with a chamfered end that leads into
a cylindrical portion, said cylindrical portion of the plug
snuggly fitting within the tube and terminating in a radi-
ally protruding shoulder which engages the transverse
end of the tube to which it is welded, and a stem protrud-
ing in the longitudinal direction from the central portion
of the shoulder having a longitudinal stem bore extending
through about half of the length of the stem, at least part
of the stem which defines the stem bore is fixed within the
truncated conical section, the enlarged recess and the
small recess of the spider by outward deformation of that
portion of the stem in order to releasably attach the rod to
the spider, said stem adapted to substantially reshape itself
by movement of the rod in a longitudinal direction with
respect to the spider bore, while maintaining the structural
integrity of the poison rod and maintaining the structural
integrity of the spider.
4,381,284
FUEL ASSEMBLY FOR A NUCLEAR REACTOR
Robert K. Gjertsen, Monroerille, Pa., assignor to Westingbouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 217,059
Int. a.5 F16L 15/00
U.S. a. 376—364 10 Claims
1. A fuel assembly for a nuclear reactor comprising:
a top nozzle;
a bottom nozzle;
a plurality of fuel elements containing nuclear fuel disposed
between said top nozzle and said bottom nozzle;
a guide tube extending from said top nozzle to said bottom
nozzle;
952
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
1 lower member attached to the lower end of said guide tube
and having external threads thereon for engagement the
core plate of said nuclear reactor thereby attaching said
fuel assembly to said core plate; and
locking means attached to said top nozzle for preventing
disengagement of said external threads.
4,381,285
co^r^ACT lens sterilizing device
Sidney Wittenberg, 52 Surrey La., Sudbury, Mass. 01776
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,755
Int. CIJ A61L 2/18
U.S. a. 422-116 18 Qaims
40-^
52
v--*-T-Tfl3o7M ------r-t-i
6 J ^28
22
S^KSt^
1. A device for sterilizing articles with a sterilizing solution
and for subsequently transferring the articles to a storage envi-
ronment after completion of the sterilization process, said
device comprising:
(a) a first receptacle containing sterilizing solution;
(b) a second receptacle containing storage solution;
(c) support means disposed in said first receptacle for hold-
ing the articles in fluid contact with the sterilizing solu-
tion;
(d) momentum generating means movable between a first
position and a second position to generate momentum; and
(e) means for transmitting the momentum generated by said
momentum generating means to said support means to
impart motion to said support means and to forcefully
drive the articles along a trajectory from said first recepta-
cle to said second receptacle.
2. A device for sterilizing articles with a sterilizing solution
and for subsequently transferring said articles to a storage
environment at the completion of the sterilization process, said
device comprising:
(a) a first cell structure containing sterilizing solution;
(b) a second cell structure containing storage solution;
(c) a cage means disposed in said first cell structure for
holding the articles in fluid contact with the sterilizing
solution;
(d) timer means for measuring a predetermined interval of
time, said timer means including a striker arm which
generates momentum by moving from a first position to a
second position at the expiration of said predetermined
interval of time; and
(e) means for transmitting the momentum generated by said
striker arm to said cage means to propel said cage means
from said first cell structure to said second cell structure at
the expiration of said predetermined interval of time.
4,381,286
PROCESS FOR THE SELECTIVE SEPARATION OF
URANIUM AND MOLYBDENUM WHICH ARE
CONTAINED IN AN AMINO SOLVENT
Antoine Floreancig, Saint Genis Laval, France, assignor
Uranium Pechiney Ugine Kuhlmann, Paris, France
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No, 271,941
Oaims priority, application France, Jun. 19, 1980, 80 13912
Int. a.3 COIG 43/00. 39/00
U.S. a. 423—9 5 Qaims
to
^'
• At.tack
■-0
B
s~~~~---i '
C
^ , E.tr.ctior,
3
Be-cxt ract ion
n
Pe-ext faction
Rt'-fxt racti
1. In a process for the selective separation of the uranium
and molybenum which are contained in an extract resulting
from the treatment by liquid-liquid extraction by means of an
amino solvent of a solution resulting from the attack using
sulphuric acid on a molybdo-uraniferous ore comprising aque-
ous re-extraction of the uranium contained in said extract by
means of an acid solution of an alkali metal chloride, followed
by re-extraction of the molybdenum by treatment of the resid-
ual extract by means of an alkali metal carbonate solution and
recycling of the solvent to achieve selective separation, the
improvement comprising the step of adding an oxidizing agent
to the acid alkali metal chloride solution before the latter is
brought into contact with the extract.
4^1,287
SEPARATION OF ZIRCONIUM AND URANIUM
David J. MacDonald, and Helen G. Henry, both of Reno, Nev.,
assignors to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of the Interior, Washington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,367
Int. a.J COIG 25/00
U.S. a. 423—70 5 aaims
1. A process for separation of zirconium and uranium com-
prising:
stripping a zirconium- and uranium-containing hydrocar-
bon-amine organic solution with an aqueous chloride
solution, whereby zirconium is selectively extracted from
the organic solution, with extraction of only minor
amounts of uranium, and
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
953
scrubbing the resulting zirconium- and uranium-containing
aqueous solution with a chloride-loaded hydrocarbon-
amine organic solution to selectively extract uranium.
LEAN ORGANIC
ZBCONIUM AND
SOLUTION TO
L«ANiUM-8tARING
CHLORIDE -LOftDER
OftOAMCSO- JTION
-r
- 10
1
2
\
5 J 6 15
^?£^#^^
"~%ErS
1.
'— ^ ^
i^^- '" '
1 1
\
12 1
\
he
i.
STRIPPIN
G STRIP
SOLUTO
N LIQUOR
9-
whereby the uranium content of the solution is further
lowered to yield an aqueous zirconium solution substan-
tially free of uranium.
4,381,288
MERCURY BRINE SLUDGE TREATMENT
Samuel Weiss, River Edge, N.J., and Andrew R. Lechuga, Baton
Rouge, La., assignors to Stauffer Chemical Company, West-
port, Conn.
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,566
Int. a.3 COIG 13/00
U.S. a. 423—101 7 Qaims
BRINE VEMT«
SLUDGE
FBESH MjO
o — a
1. A process for removing leachable mercury values from
mercury containing waste sludge which comprises depositing
the sludge on a horizontal belt filter, dewatering the sludge,
and then subjecting the dewatered sludge to at least one water
washing to remove therefrom leachable mercury to a leachable
content of less than 20 ppb.
4,381,289
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ZIRCONIUM PHOSPHATE
Derek V. Nowell, Hatfield, and Koteswararao Rentala, Steven-
age, both of England, assignors to National Research Develop-
ment Corporation, London, England
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,927
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 10, 1980,
8039546
Int. a.' COIB 15/16, 25/26
U.S. a. 423—311 10 Claims
1. A process for preparing zirconium phosphate comprising:
(1) forming a solution of zirconyl chloride in hydrochloric
acid, the solution having a pH not exceeding 0.3;
(2) adding sodium fluoride to a minimum molar ratio sodium:-
zirconium of 4:1 and subject to a maximum of 5.0:1 at a
zirconium concentration of 0.1 M, of 5.2 at 0.07 M and 9 at
0.05 M;
(3) ensuring that the solution is homogeneous, at a maximum
pH of 1.6, and at a concentration of from 0.05 to 0.1 M in
zirconium;
(4) mixing the solution with phosphoric acid such that in the
mixture the molar ratio phosphate:zirconium is substantially
always at least 3, whereby zirconium phosphate precipitates;
and
(5) recovering said precipitated zirconium phosphate.
4381,290
METHOD AND CATALYST FOR MAKING CHLORINE
DIOXIDE
Kenneth L. Hardee, Middlefield; Arnold Z. Gordon, Lyndhuret;
Charles B. Pyle, Chardon, and Ra^M K. Sen, Qeveland
Heights, all of Ohio, assignors to Diamond Shamrock Corpo-
ration, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 256,969, Apr. 23, 1981, Pat. No.
4,362,707. This application Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344^04
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 7, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 COIB 11/02
U.S. a. 423—478 17 Qaims
1. A heterogeneous catalytic process for the generation of
CIO2 comprising the steps of:
(1) providing a chlorate containing feedstock selected from
a group consisting of aqueous solutions of alkali metal
chlorates and alkaline earth metal chlorates;
(2) providing an acid feedstock;
(3) providing a heterogeneous catalyst substantially insolu-
ble in the feedstocks comprising at least one of ruthenium
oxide, iridium oxide, palladium oxide, rhodium oxide and
platinum oxide;
(4) combining the feedstocks and reacting the combined
feedstocks in contact with the catalyst at a temperature
greater than 20* C; and
(5) stripping and recovering CIO2 from the combined feed-
stocks.
4,381,291
MEASUREMENT OF FREE LIGANDS
Roger P. Ekins, Friday Street, near Dorking, England, assignor
to AB Fortia, Uppsala, Sweden
Filed Feb. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 123,328
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 23, 1979,
7906525
Int. a.5 GOIN 33/16: A61K 43/00
U.S. a. 424—1 5 Qaims
1. A method for indirect measurement of the concentration
of a free ligand in a liquid sample also containing the ligand
bound to endogenous binding material, comprising the steps of
performing two separate measurements, wherein the first mea-
surement is used to determine the total concentration of free
and reversibly bound ligand in the sample to be tested, and the
second measurement comprises the steps:
(i) exposing separately to a known amount of labelled ligand
(a) the sample to be tested, and (b) each of a plurality of
standard solutions containing known concentrations of
the free ligand,
(ii) thereafter exposing each resulting mixture from (i) (a)
and (i) (b) separately to an immobilized binding agent to
bind a proportion of the free labelled ligand and a similar
proportion of the free unlabelled ligand to the immobi-
lized binding agent in each mixture,
(iii) separating the immobilized binding agent with its bound
ligand from the residual material in each mixture,
(iv) measuring the proportion of labelled ligand bound to the
immobilized binding agent in each mixture,
(v) computing, from this proportion and the total concentra-
tion of free and reversibly bound ligand determined in the
first measurement, the total amount of ligand bound to the
immobilized binding agent in each case, and
(vi) estimating from this figure the concentration of free
954
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
ligand in the sample to be tested using as calibration the
known concentrations in the standard solutions.
4,381,292
^NTI-HUMAN T-LYMPHOCYTE MONOCLONAL
ANTIBODY
Charles P. Bieber, Los Altos Hills, and Frank D. Howard, Los
Altos, both of Calif., assignors to The Board of Trustees of the
Leiand Stanford Jr. University, Stanford, Calif.
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,915
Int. a.^ A61K 43/00, 39/00: COIN 33/54
U.S. a. 424—1 9 Qaims
1. Mammalian monoclonal antibodies specific for the lym-
phocyte antigen Leu-5, specifically binding to thymocytes and
E-rosette forming peripheral blood lymphocytes and inhibiting
human thymocyte rosette formation.
3. Mammalian monoclonal antibodies specific for the lym-
phocyte surface antigen Leu-5 having a label providing a
detectible signal, specifically binding to human thymocytes
and human peripheral blood lymphocytes which form E-
rosettes and inhibiting E-rosette formation of human thymo-
cytes. ^'
4,381,293
SHAVING COMPOSITION
George H. Michel, 343 Oak Knoll Dr., Glendora, Calif. 91740
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,349
Int. a.3 A61K 9/00. 7/15: B26B 2//40
U.S. a. 424-14 10 Claims
1. A solid shaving composition comprising:
a. i water soluble polyethylene oxide polymer of a molecu-
lar weight of 400,000 or less in an amount ranging from
about 1 to about 65 weight percent;
b. a trackability component in an amount ranging from about
20 to about 80 weight percent;
c. a preservative component in an amount ranging from
about 0.005 to about 7.5 weight percent;
d. an anti-caking component in an amount ranging from
about 1 to about 20 weight percent;
e. a humectant component in an amount ranging from about
0.0 to about 20 weight percent; and,
f a lubricant component in an amount ranging from about
0.0 to about 10 weight percent.
7. A shaving composition comprising:
a. a water soluble polyethylene oxide polymer of a molecu-
lar weight of 400,000 or less in an amount ranging from
about 1 to about 65 weight percent;
b. a trackability component in an amount ranging from about
20 to about 80 weight percent;
c. a preservative component in an amount ranging from
about 0.005 to about 7.5 weight percent;
d. an anti-caking component in an amount ranging from
about I to about 20 weight percent;
e. a humectant component in an amount ranging from about
' 0.0 to about 20 weight percent; and,
f a lubricant component in an amount ranging from about
0.0 to about 10 weight percent
wherein, the composition is formed into a solid of suitable
size and shape for topical application by a user.
8. The shaving composition of claim 7 wherein the solid
emprises a disc having a diameter in a range of from about 1 .0
nches to about 3.0 inches and a thickness in a range of from
bout 1/16 inch to about i inch.
4,381,294
PROCESS FOR REINFORCING FRAGILE OR BRITTLE
NAILS AND A COMPOSITION CONTAINING A
CATIONIC POLYMER FOR USE IN SAID PROCESS
Claude Bouillon, Eaubonne; Jean-Louis Abegg; Constantin
Koulbanis, both of Paris, and Patrick Darmenton, Villejuif, ail
of France, assignors to Societe Anonyme dite: L'OREAL,
Paris, France
Filed Nov. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 98,330
Oaims priority, application France, Dec. 1, 1978, 78 33965
Int. a.3 A61K 7/04
U.S. CI. 424-61 24 Qaims
1. A process for reinforcing fragile or brittle nails compris-
ing applying to the nail surface an effective amount of a com-
position consisting essentially of at least one cationic polymer
selected from the group consisting of
(1) a crosslinked polyamino-polyamide having the formula
-{-OC-R-CO-Z^
wherein
R represents a radical selected from the group consisting of
(i)
<y-
(ii) -(CH2)4-.
and
(ill) — (CH2)2— NH— (CH2)2— NH— (CH2)2— .
(IV) — CH— CH2— NH— {CH2)2— NH— CH2— CH— and
CH3 CH3
(V) -CH-CH2 CH2-CH-
\ /
N— {CH2)2— N . and
/ \
CH2 C c CH2
o o
represents:
(a) in an amount from 60 to 100 mole percent, the radical,
+NH— (CH2)x+NH-)-„ wherein x = 2 and n = 2 or 3,
or X = 3 and n — 2,
(b) in an amount from 0 to 40 mole percent, a radical
selected from the group consisting of:
(a') —NH— (CH2);t— NH-}-„ wherein x = 2 and n= 1,
(b')
— N
N-.
y
\ /
and
(c) in an amount from 0 to 20 mole percent, the radical,
— NH-(-(CH2)6— NH-j-, crosslinked with a crosslinking
agent selected from the group consisting of an epihalo-
hydrin, a diepoxide, a dianhydride and a bis-unsaturated
derivative;
(2) an adipic acid-dimethylaminohydroxypropyl diethylene-
triamine polymer having a nitrogen content of 17.0-18.0
weight percent thereof, and a viscosity measured in a 30%
aqueous solution of 350-800 centipoises at 20° C;
(3) a polymer obtained by the reaction of a polyalkylene-
polyamine having two primary amine groups and at least
one secondary amine group with a dicarboxylic acid se-
lected from the group consisting of diglycolic acid and a
saturated aliphatic acid having 3-8 carbon atoms, the
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
955
molar ratio of said polyalkylene polyamine to said dicar-
boxylic acid being about 0.8:1 to 1.4:1 and by the reaction
of the resulting poiyaminoamide with epichlorohydrin,
the molar ratio of said epichlorohydrin to the secondary
amine group of said poiyaminoamide being from 0.5:1 to
1.8:1; and
(4) a cyclopolymer selected from the group consisting of
(i) a homopolymer of dimethylammonium chloride having
a molecular weight lower than 100,000, and
(ii) a cyclopolymer of dimethyldiallylammonium chloride
and acrylamide having a molecular weight greater than
500,000.
4,381,297
SUBSTITUTED CARBONYL PHOSPHINYL-ALKANOYL
COMPOUNDS
Donald S. Karanewsky, Princeton Junction, and Edward W.
Petrillo, Jr., Pennington, both of N.J., assignors to E. R.
Squibb & Sons, Inc., Princeton, N.J.
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,659
Int. a.3 A61K il/675: C07F 9/iO 9/i2
U.S. CI. 424—200 15 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
4,381,295
MONOCLONAL ANTIBODY TO HUMAN HELPER T
CELLS AND METHODS OF PREPARING SAME
Patrick C. Kung, Bridgewater, and Gideon Goldstein, Short
Hills, both of N.J., assignors to Ortho Pharmaceutical Corpo-
- ration, Raritan, N.J.
Filed Apr. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 33,639
Int. a.3 A61K i9/395; C12N 5/00. 5/02. 15/00; C12Q 1/00:
GOIN 33/48. 33/68. 33/96
U.S. a. 424—85 11 Qaims
1. A monoclonal antibody of class IgG produced by a hy-
bridoma formed by fusion of cells from a mouse myeloma line
and spleen cells from a mouse previously immunized with
human T cells, which antibody:
(a) reacts with essentially all norma! human peripheral
helper T cells (being about 55% of all normal human
peripheral T cells), but not with normal human peripheral
B cells, null cells or macrophages;
(b) reacts with about 80% of normal human thymocytes;
(c) does not react with leukemic cells from humans with T
cell chronic lymphoblastic leukemia, B cell chronic lym-
phoblastic leukemia, T cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia,
or null cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia;
(d) reacts with the human T cell line GEM, but not with
HJD-1, L-az 191, or HMl;
(e) does not react with Epstein-Barr virus-transformed
human B cell lines Laz 007, Laz 1 56, Laz 256, or SB;
(0 reacts with about 55% of Rhesus monkey peripheral T
cells;
(g) fixes complement; and
(h) defines a T cell population which is unreactive with
anti-TH2 serum and is only minimally cytotoxic.
4. Mouse monoclonal antibody which reacts with essentially
all normal human peripheral helper T cells but not with normal
human peripheral B cells, null cells, or macrophages.
5. A method of preparing monoclonal antibody which reacts
with essentially all normal human peripheral helper T cells but
not with normal human peripheral B cells, null cells, or macro-
phages, which comprises culturing the hybridoma ATCC
CRL 8002 in a suitable medium and recovering the antibody
from the supernatant above said hybridoma.
O R2
O
R; O
I II
R4— C— CH— CH— P— (CH2)n— CH— C — X
I I
R| OR3
wherein
X is an imino acid of the formula
R?
X
H2C CH2
I
— N C— COOR6 ■ — N
CH2
H2C^ "^Rg
C— CCX)R6.
R9
T
CH2
CH2
H2C
'°x
Rio
CH2
— N C— COORb , — N C— COORb ,
l(W l(L.
r^
Rn^ >
— N C— COORft — N
R|2
C— COORft
l(L)
H
R7 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halogen, keto, hydroxy,
—NH—C— lower alkyl,
azido, amino.
4,381,296
TREATMENT FOR HERPES VIRUS
James E. Tinnell, 3121 S. Maryland Parkway, Las Vegas, Nev.
89109
Continuatioii-in-part of Ser. No. 162,252, Jun. 23, 1980, Pat. No.
4,285,934, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 57,453,
Jul. 13, 1979, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 879,085, Feb. 21, 1978, abandoned. This application Jun. 29,
1981, Ser. No. 278,837
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 25,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61K 33/22. 35/78. 31/60
U.S. a. 424—148 2 Qalms
2. A method for treatment of herpes virus lesions in a human
host comprising topically applying to the lesions an effective
amount of a composition comprising boric acid, tannic acid
and salicylic acid in the weight ratios of about 2-12:2-12:1-6.
^Rl9 II
•N^ . -NH-C-(CH2)m
R20
{R|4)p
'HTl'
-(CH2)m-|- |. -{CH2)„
S N
a I- or 2-naphthyl of the formula
956
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
-(CH2)
— (CH2)m-cycloalkyl,
(Ri4V
O
-O-C-N^
Rl5
— O — lower alkyl,
-0-(CH2)„
(RbV
a 1- or 2-naphthyloxy of the formula
-0-(CH2)m
(Rl4)p
— S — lower alkyl,
-S-(CH2)„,
(RbV
or a 1- or 2-naphthylthio of the formula
-S-(CH2)
R9 is keto or
(R|4)/,;
-0-(CH2)„
o
— S — lower alkyl,
(Rl4);=
-(CH2)„
(Rl3)p
Rlo is halogen or — Y— Ri6;
Rll, Rii', R12 and R12' are independently selected from
hydrogen and lower alkyl or Ri 1', Ri2and R12' are hydro-
gen and Rll is
-S-(CH2),„-
(Ri3V
or a 1- or 2-naphthylthio of the formula
-S-(CH2);„
Rg is keto, halogen,
O
H ^Ri5
— O— C— N^ ,
Rl5
-0-(CH2,.-/0i
> ' (Rl3)p
—O— lower alkyl, a I- or 2-naphthyloxy of the formula
(R14V;
Rl3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons, lower alkoxy
of 1 to 4 carbons, lower alkylthio of 1 to 4 carbons, chloro,
bromo, fluoro, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, phenyl, phe-
noxy, phenylthio, or phenylmethyl;
Rl4 is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons, lower alkoxy
of 1 to 4 carbons, lower alkylthio of 1 to 4 carbons, chloro,
bromo, fluoro, trifluoromethyl, or hydroxy;
m is zero, one, two or three;
p is one, two or three provided that p is more than one only
if Rl3 or Ri4 is hydrogen, methyl, methoxy, chloro, or
fluoro;
Rl5 is hydrogen or lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons;
Y is oxygen or sulfur;
R16 is lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons.
-(CH2U-/Q\ ,
> ^(Rl3V
or the R 16 groups join to complete an unsubstituted 5- or
6-membered ring or said ring in which one or more of the
carbons has a lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons or a di(lower
alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons) substituent;
n is zero or one;
Rs is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo substituted lower alkyl,
benzyl or phenethyl;
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
957
R3 and Re are independently selected from hydrogen, lower 4^381^298
alkyl, benzyl, benzhydryl, or ORAL MALE CONTRACEPTIVE COMPOSITION
Patricia B. Coulson, 7417 Sheffield Dr., Knoxnlle, Tenn. 37919
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,390
Int. a.5 A61K 31/56
O U.S. a. 424— 240 18 CUims
— CH— O— C— Rig
Rl7
wherein Rp is hydrogen, lower alkyl, or phenyl, and Rig
is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, phenyl, or Rt? and
Rig taken together are
— (CH2)2— . -(CH2)3— . — CH=CH-. or
z
o
SPERM COUNT
C G G C G*t
y ht\
VtNTRAl. P»0ST»7t WIIOMT
0 10 1.0 to 0* to* 0 to 10 O.t Dt r 0*
GOSSYPOL DOSE (mj/kg t>«.)
R4 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo substituted lower alkyl.
-(CH2),
(Rl3)p
wherein R13 and p are as defined above and q is zero or an
integer from 1 to 7, cycloalkyl.
-(CH2),
o s
or
-(CH2)m
N
-{CH2),
. -(CH2)m
^n-
(R|3)p
-(CH2)m
11. An orally active male animal contraceptive composition
for substantially inhibiting sperm production without substan-
tially affecting the activity of secondary sex organs during
administration periods, which comprises:
a biologically acceptable and orally active form of gossypol
in a dosage of 3-30 milligrams per kilogram body weight
per day; and
a biologically acceptable and orally active replacement
androgen selected from the group consisting of fluox-
ymcsterone and medroxyprogesterone in a dosage of 1 to
5 milligrams per kilogram per day.
12. A method of substantially inhibiting sperm production in
male animals without substantially inhibiting the activity of
secondary sex organs during administration periods, which
comprises:
orally administrating a biologically acceptable binaphthala-
mine structure compound selected from gossypol and
gossypol derivatives at a dosage whereby said sperm
production is substantially inhibited to below the azoo-
spermia level; and
orally administering a biologically acceptable orally active
replacement androgen at a dosage whereby said activity
of secondary sex organs is substantially unaffected by said
gossypol and gossypol derivatives.
Rl9 is lower alkyl, benzyl or phenethyl;
R20 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, benzyl or pheaethyl;
Ri and R2 are independently selected from the group con-
sisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo substituted lower
alkyl.
—I- J and -(CH2)m— P ^ 1
^ N
4,381,299
7-AMINO-THIADIAZOLE OXYIMINO DERIVATIVES
OF CEPHEM AND CEPHAM COMPOUNDS
Tsutomu Tengi, Osaka; Kazuo Sakane, Amaganaki, and Jiro
Goto, Suita, all of Japan, assignors to Fiyisawa Pharmaceuti-
cal Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 128,260, Mar. 7, 1980, Pat. No.
4,331,665, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 116,S^,
Jan. 30, 1980, Pat. No. 4,332,798, which is a continuation-in-part
of Ser. No. 108,161, Dec. 28, 1979, abandoned. This appUcation
Jun. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 160,904
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 19,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.5 A61K 31/545
U.S. a. 424—246 39 Claims
1. 7-substituted-3-cephem and cepham-4-carboxylic acid of
the formula:
wherein q, R13, p and m are as deflned above; and when either
or both of R3 and R(, are hydrogen a basic addition salt or an
amino acid addition salt thereof.
14. A pharmaceutical composition useful for treating hyper-
tension comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and
one or more compounds of claim 1 or pharmaceutically ac-
ceptable salts thereof.
R'
S
N — r C— CONH— 1 1^ ^P-
- I
Ri
R*
958
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
where R' is amino or a protected amino;
R^ is hydrogen; carbamoyl; lower alkanoyl; lower alkoxy-
carbonyl; aroyl; ar(lower) alkanoyl; cyclo(lower) alkyl(-
lower) alkanoyl; ar(lower) alkoxycarbonyl; (lower) al-
kanesulfonyl; arenesulfonyl; aryl; alkaryl; aryl and alkaryl
substituted in the aryl nucleus with 1 to 3 substituents
selected from the group consisting of halogen, lower
alkoxy, nitro, halo(lower)alkyl, and protected carboxy;
substituted lower alkyl selected from the group consisting
of ar(lower)alkyI. lower alkylthio(lower)alkyl, halo(low-
er)alkyl, aryIoxy(lower)alkyl. cyano(lower)alkyl, pro-
tected carboxy(lower)alkyl, di(lower)alkyIcarbamoyl(-
lower)alkyl, lower alkoxy(lower)alkoxy(lower)alkyl.
lower alkanesulfonyl(lower)alkyl, protected amino(low-
er)alkyl, amino(lower)alkyl. carboxyl(lower)alkyl, ar(-
lower)alkyl substituted with protected carboxy, ar(lower-
)alkyl substituted with carboxy, ar(lower)aIkyl substituted
with protected amino(lower)alkyl, and ar(lower)alkyl
substituted with amino(lower)alkyl; lower alkenyl; lower
alkynyl; cycloalkyl; cycloalkyl substituted with carboxy
or protected carboxy; cyclo(lower)alkenyl; or S or O
containing 5-membered heterocyclic group substituted
with an oxo group;
R^ is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
R** is hydrogen; acyloxy(Iower)alkyl; acylthio(lower)alkyl;
pyridinium(lower)alkyl; pyridinium(Iower)alkyl substi-
tuted with carbamoyl, lower alkanoyl, hydroxy(lower)al-
kyl. carboxy(lower)alkyl, or hydroxy iminomethyl;
thiazolium(lower)alkyl; thiazolium(lower)alkyl substi-
tuted with lower alkyl or hydroxy(lower)alkyl; heterocy-
clicthio(lower)alkyl; heterocyclicthio(lower)aIkyl substi-
tuted with 1 to 3 substituent(s) selected from the group
consisting of lower alkyl, hydroxy(lower)alkyl, protected
ammo(Iower)aIkyl, amino(lower)alkyl, di(lower)al-
kylamino(lower)alkyl, lower alkenyl, carboxy(lower)al-
kyl, protected carboxy(lower)alkyl, aryl, morpholino(-
lower)alkyl, piperidino(lower)alkyl, lower alkyl substi-
tuted piperazinyl(lower)alkyl, oxo and hydroxy; lower
alkyl; halogen; or hydroxy;
R' is carboxy or a protected carboxy; wherein R' is COO
when R^is pyridinium(lower)alkyl or substituted pyridini-
um(lower)aIkyl, or thiazolium(lower)alkyl or substituted
thiazolium(lower)alkyl; and the heavy solid line means
single or double bond; and pharmaceutically acceptable
salt thereof.
39. An antibacterial composition comprising an effective
imount of a compound of claim 1 or pharmaceutically accept-
ible salt thereof in association with a pharmaceutically accept-
ible, substantially non-toxic carrier or excipient.
4,381,300
SULPHUR ANALOGS OF CEPHALOSPORINS HAVING
A NUCLEOPHILE SUBSTITUTED IN THE 7 POSITION
John C. Sheehan, Lexington, and Thomas J. Commons, Boston,
both of Mass., assignors to Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology, Cambridge, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 838,874, Oct. 3, 1977, Pat. No. 4,265,882.
This application Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,260
Int. a.5 C07D 501/57; A61K 31/545
V.S. a. 424-246 15 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula:
X H ^
moiety, R2 is a pharmaceutically acceptable group, and X is a
halogen or an organic nucleophile.
C02R
vhere R is a protective group for acids or a pharmaceutically
iicceptable group, R' is hydrogen or an organic electrophilic
4,381,301
SUBSTITUTED TRICYCLIC THIENO COMPOUNDS,
THEIR SYNTHESIS, THEIR USE, THEIR
COMPOSITIONS AND THEIR MEDICAMENTS
Georg Rainer, Constance, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
BYK Gulden Lomberg Chemische Fabrik GmbH, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,244
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, May 7, 1980,
3581/80
Int. a.3 A61K 31/495: C07D 521/00
U.S. a. 424-250 14 Qaims
1. A substituted thienobenzodiazepinone of the formula
CO— A— r3
wherein
R' denotes a hydrogen atom (-H) or alkyl with from 1 to 4
carbon atoms,
R^ represents halo or has one of the meanings of R',
R^ denotes halo or -N(R^)R5,
R^ denotes alkyl with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms or alkenyl with
from 3 to 5 carbon atoms,
R5 denotes one of the meanings of R^ or — (CH2)m— N(R6)R7
or N(R^)R5 denotes morpholino, pyrrolidino, piperidino,
hexahydroazepin-1-yl, piperazin-I-yl which is optionally
substituted in the 4-position by methyl, ethyl or benzyl,
2,4-dimethylpiperazin-l-yl or hexahydro-lH-l,4-diazepin-
1-yl which is substituted in the 4-position by methyl or ethyl,
R^ denotes alkyl with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
R^ denotes alkyl with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
A denotes straight-chain or branched alkylene with from 1 to
5 carbon atoms and
m denotes 2 or 3, ..
or an acid-addition salt thereof.
3. A thienobenzodiazepinone according to claim 1 wherein
R' denotes — H or alkyl with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
R2 represents halo or has one of the meanings of R',
R3 denotes — N(R*)R5,
R* denotes alkyl with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms or alkenyl with
from 3 to 5 carbon atoms,
R' has one of the meanings of R* or represents — (CH2-
)m— N(R6)R7, or N(R'*)R5 denotes morpholino, pyrrolidino,
piperidino, hexahydroazepin-l-y], piperazin-1-yl which is
optionally substituted in the 4-position by methyl, ethyl or
benzyl, 2,4-dimethylpiperazin-l-yl or hexahydro-lH-1,4-
diazepin-1-yl which is substituted in the 4-position by methyl
or ethyl,
R* denotes alkyl with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
R^ denotes alkyl with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
A denotes straight-chain or branched alkylene with from 1 to
S carbon atoms and
m denotes 2 or 3,
or a pharmacologically-acceptable acid-addition salt thereof.
14. A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of acute and
chronic ulcus ventriculi and ulcus duodeni, gastritis and hyper-
acid gastric irritation which comprises administering to a mam-
mal subject to or afflicted with such a disorder an efTective
amount of a compound according to claim 3.
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
959
4,381,302
(6Aa,10Aa,llAa)-2-(2.PYRIDINYL)-l,3,4,6,6A,7,8,9,10,-
10A,11,I1A-DODECAHYDRO-2H-PYRAZINO]1,2-
BJISOQUINOLINE AND DERIVATIVES
Joel R. Hufr, Gwynedd; Stella W. King, and Walfred S. Saari,
both of Lansdale, all of Pa., assignors to Merck & Co., Inc.,
Rahway, N.J.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,325
Int. a.3 A61K 31/495; C07D 471/04
U.S. a. 424—250 9 Qaims
1. A method of selectively antagonizing a2-adrenergic re-
ceptors in a patient in need of such treatment which comprises
the administration of an effective amount of a compound of
structural formula:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof wherein
R is
(1) hydrogen,
(2) halo,
(3) Ci.4alkyl,
(4) cyano,
(5) CMalkoxy,
(6) trifluoromethyl, or
(7) nitro.
4. A compound of structural formula:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein
R is
(1) hydrogen,
(2) halo,
(3) Ci-4alkyl,
(4) cyano,
(5) CMalkoxy,
(6) trifluoromethyl, or
(7) nitro.
m
.R2
N
2 N
wherein
R] is hydrogen or an alkyl of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
R2 is an alkyl of from 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R3 is hydrogen or an alkyl of from 1 to 3 carbon atoms; and
R4 is hydrogen or an alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
20. A method of inducing analgesic, antiphlogistic and anti-
pyretic activity in a host which comprises administering to a
host in need of such treatment an analgesically effective
amount of active ingredient comprising at least one compound
of claim 1.
4,381,303
1,4,9,10-TETRAHYDRO-PYRAZOLO
[4,3-]PYRIDO[-3,2-b][l,4]DIAZEPIN-I0-ONES
Giinther Schmidt; Wolfhard Engel; Wolfgang Eberlein, all of
Biberach; Giinter Tnimmlitz, Warthausen, and Giinther En-
gelhardt, Biberach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Dr. Karl Thbmae GmbH, Biberach an der Riss, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,911
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 6,
1981, 3122670
Int. a.J A61K 31/55: C07D 471/14
US. a. 424—252 30 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
4,381,304
4,9-DIHYDRO-4,9.DIOXO-lH.CYCLOHEPTA[B]PYRI-
DINE DERIVATIVES
Bozidar Palameta, Dollard des Ormeaux; Tibor Bogri, St. Lau-
rent, and Jehan Bagli, Kirkland, all of Canada, assignors to
Ayerst, McKenna A Harrison, Inc., Montreal, Canada
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,179
Int. a.' C07D 221/04; A61K 31/435
U.S. a. 424—256 9 Qaims
1. A compound of formula I
I
in which R' is COOH and R^ is hydrogen, 8-halo or 6-
hydroxy; or R' is CON(R^)— CH2COOH wherein R^ is lower
alkyl and R^ is hydrogen or 8-halo; or a therapeutically accept-
able salt thereof with an organic or inorganic base.
8. A pharmaceutical composition for preventing or relieving
diabetic complications, selected from neuropathy, nephropa-
thy, retinopathy and cataracts, in a diabetic mammal, which
comprises a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of
claim 1, or a therapeutically acceptable salt thereof with an
organic or inorganic base, and a pharmaceutically acceptable
carrier.
4,381,305
ETHYLENEDIAMINE DERIVATIVES AND
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING
SAME
Cesare Casagrande, Arese, and Giorgio Ferrari, Milan, both of
Italy, assignors to Simes S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,808
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jun. 10, 1980, 22677 A/80
Int. a.3 A61K 31/165; C07C 103/82. 87/28; A61K 31/135
U.S. a. 424—263 5 Claims
1. A compound of formula
R2
Arz
Ari— C— N— CH2— CH2N— CH2— CH— C
Ai A2 A3 Ar3
(I)
wherein
960
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
APRIL 26, 1983
Rl is a hydrogen atom, a lower alkyl, or an arylalkyi radical;
R2 is a lower alkyl radical;
Ari is an aryl radical which may be substituted by one or
more radicals selected from the group consisting of nitro,
chlorine and methoxy, an arylalkyi radical, or a heterocy-
clic radical selected from the group consisting of furanyl.
thienyl and pyridinyl;
Ar2 and Ar3 are the same or different aryl radicals which
may be substituted by one or more radicals selected from
the group consisting of chlorine, fluorine, methyl and
methoxy;
A 1 is an oxygen atom or 2 hydrogen atoms;
A2 is hydrogen;
A3 is a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl radical, or, together with
A2, is a bond of a double bond.
4. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a vascular
antispasmodic or antiallergic amount of a compound of for-
mula
Rl R: Ar2
I I /
Ari— C— N— CH2— CH2— N— CH2— CH— C
II I I \
Ai A2 A3 Ar3
wherein
R] is a hydrogen atom, a lower alkyl, or an arylalkyi radical;
R2 is a lower alkyl radical;
Ari is an aryl radical which may be substituted by one or
more radicals selected from the group consisting of nitro,
chlorine and methoxy, an arylalkyi radical, or a heterocy-
clic radical selected from the group consisting of furanyl,
thienyl and pyridinyl;
Ar2 and Ar3 are the same or different aryl radicals which
may be substituted by one or more radicals selected from
the group consisting of chlorine, fluorine, methyl and
methoxy;
Ai is an oxygen atom or 2 hydrogen atoms;
A 2 is hydrogen;
A3 is a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl radical, or, together with
A2, is a bond of a double bond,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof together with a
pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
4,381,306
HYDROXYPROPYL-TRIAZOLE COMPOUNDS, THEIR
PRODUCTION AND THEIR MEDICINAL USE
Erik Regel; Karl H. Biichel; Ingo Haller, and Manfired Plempel,
all of Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer
Aktiengesellschafl, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 92,805
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 25,
1978, 2851086
Int. a.3 A61K 31/41; C07D 249/08
U.S. a. 424—269 16 Oaims
1. A hydroxypropyltriazole of the formula
(I)
or a salt thereof,
in which
Az denotes a 1,2,4-triazol-l-yl or 1,3,4-triazol-l-yl radical,
R denotes phenyl, naphthyl or tetrahydronaphthyl radical
which is unsubstituted or substituted by halogen, C1-C4-
alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy or halogenoalkyl with 1 to 4 carbon
atoms and up to S halogen atoms,
R' denotes a phenyl or C3-C7 cycloalkyl radical which is
unsubstituted or substituted by halogen or Ci-C4-alkyl
and
R2 denotes a hydrogen atom, or
R' and R2 together, in the o-position relative to one another,
represent an optionally halogen or C|-C4-alkyl substi-
tuted methylene bridge with 3 to 5 methylene groups, or,
together with the phenyl ring, represent naphthyl,
R^ represents halogen, an alkyl or alkoxy group with in each
case 1 to 4 carbon atoms or halogenoalkyl with 1 to 4
carbon atoms and up to 5 halogen atoms and
n is 0, 1, 2 or 3.
9. A pharmaceutical composition containing as an active
ingredient an antimycotically effective amount of a compound
according to claim 1 in admixture with a diluent.
4,381,307
SOFT TERTIARY AMINE ESTERS OF BIO-AFFECTING
CARBOXYLIC ACIDS
Kenneth B. Sloan, Gainesville, Fla., assignor to Merck & Co.,
Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,750
Int. a.^ A61K 31/43. 31/56; C07J 7/00
U.S. a. 424-271 31 Qaims
1. A compound selected from the group consisting of:
(a) compounds having the structural formula:
R— COO
wherein R— COO— is the acyloxy residue of the cephalo-
sporin antibiotic containing one carboxylic acid function;
Y and Y', which can be the same or different, and each
hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; n is zero or one;
the depicted phenylene group is oriented such that R —
COO— and
— CH— N
\
Rl
R2
are positioned ortho or para to each other; R| and R2,
which can be the same or different, are each alkyl or 1 to
10 carbon atoms; alkenyl of 2 to 10 carbon atoms; aryl of
6 to 10 carbon atoms; cycloalkyl or 3 to 8 carbon atoms;
cycloalkenyl of 4 to 8 carbon atoms; alkynyl or 2 to 10
carbon atoms; aralkyl, alkaryl, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, al-
kenylaryl, or alkynylaryl, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl,
alkynyl, and aryl portions are deflned as above; or a substi-
tuted derivative of one of the above-defined alkyl, alkenyl,
aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, aralkyl, alkaryl,
aralkenyl, aralkynyl, alkenylaryl and alkynylaryl radicals,
said derivative having one or more substituents each of
which are selected from the group consisting of Ci-Csal-
kyl, Ci-Csalkoxy, Ci-Cgalkanoyl, Ci-Cgalkanoyloxy,
halo, cyano, C2-C9carbalkoxy, Ci-Cgalkylthio, nitro,
Ci-Cghaloalkyl having 1 or more halo substituents, dial-
kylamino wherein the alkyl portions each contain 1 to 8
carbon atoms, carboxy, dialkylcarbamyl wherein the alkyl
portions each contain 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and Cj-Cgalk-
ylsulfonyl; or Ri and R2 are combined so that — NR1R2
represents the residue of a saturated or unsaturated hetero-
cyclic compound containing one secondary nitrogen
atom; and R3 is hydrogen, Ry,
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
961
o
II
-C— Ri
— C— OR| , carboxy, — C— N
/
i
\
Ri
R2
— CHzOCORi, — CH2ONO2, CX3, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl,
4-pyridyl, 2-furyl, cyano, carbamyl or C2-C9alkylcarba-
myl, wherein Ri and R2 are as defined above, X is CI or Br
and Rr is any radical encompassed by the definition of Ri
above; and
(b) the non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition
salts and N-oxides thereof.
15. A pharmaceutical composition of matter comprising an
antibiotic effective amount of a compound selected from the
group consisting of:
(a) compounds having the structural formula:
R— COO
wherein R — COO — is the acyloxy residue of a cephalo-
sporin antibiotic containing one carboxylic acid function;
Y and Y', which can be the same or different, and each
hydrogen or allcyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; n is zero or one;
the depicted phenylene group is oriented such that R —
COO— and '
-CH— N
/
\
Ri
R2
are positioned ortho or para to each other; Ri and R2,
which can be the same or different, are each alkyl or 1 to
10 carbon atoms; alkenyl of 2 to 10 carbon atoms; aryl of
6 to 10 carbon 'atoms; cycloalkyl or 3 to 8 carbon atoms;
cycloalkenyl of 4 to 8 carbon atoms; alkynyl or 2 to 10
carbon atoms; , aralkyl, alkaryl, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, al-
kenylaryl, or alkynylaryl, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl,
alkynyl, and aryl portions are defined as above; or a substi-
tuted derivative of one of the above-defined alkyl, alkenyl,
aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, aralkyl, alkaryl,
aralkenyl, aralkynyl, alkenylaryl and alkynylaryl radicals,
said derivative having one or more substituents each of
which are selected from the group consisting of C|-Cgal-
kyl, Ci-Cgalkoxy, Ci-Cgalkanoyl, Ci-Cgalkanoyloxy,
halo, cyano, C2-C9carbalkoxy, Ci-Cg-alkylthio, nitro,
C|-Cghaloalkyl having 1 or more halo substitutents, dial-
kylamino wherein the alkyl portions each contain 1 to 8
carbon atoms, carboxy, dialkylcarbamyl wherein the alkyl
portions each contain 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and C|-Cgalk-
ylsulfonyl; or Ri and R2 are combined so that — NR1R2
represents the residue of a saturated or unsaturated hetero-
cyclic compound containing one secondary nitrogen
atom; and R3 is hydrogen, Rr,
00 O Ri
II II II /
— C— Ri', — C— ORr, carboxy, — C— N
and R| and R2, which can be the same or different, are
each alkyl or 1 to 10 carbon atoms; alkenyl of 2 to 10
carbon atoms; aryl of 6 to 10 carbon atoms; cycloalkyl or
3 to 8 carbon atoms; cycloalkenyl of 4 to 8 carbon atoms;
alkynyl or 2 to 10 carbon atoms; aralkyl, alkaryl, aralke-
nyl, aralkynyl, alkenylaryl, or alkynylaryl, wherein the
alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and aryl portions are defined as
above; or a substituted derivative of one of the above-
defined alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl,
alkynyl, aralkyl, alkaryl, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, alkenylaryl
and alkynylaryl radicals, said derivative having one or
more substituents each of which are selected from the
group consisting of C|-Cgalkyl, Ci-Cgalkoxy, Ci-Cgal-
kanoyl, C|-Cgalkanoyloxy, halo, cyano, C2-C9carbalk-
oxy, Ci-Cgalkylthio, nitro, Ci-Cghaloalkyl having 1 or
more halo substituents, dialkylamino wherein the alkyl
portions each contain 1 to 8 carbon atoms, carboxy, dialk-
ylcarbamyl wherein the alkyl portions each contain 1 to 8
carbon atoms, and C|-Cgalkylsulfonyl; or Ri and R2 are
combined so that — NR1R2 represents the residue of a
saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic compound contain-
ing one secondary nitrogen atom; and R3 is hydrogen, Rr,
00 O R|
H II II /
-C— Ri , — C— OR| , carboxy, — C— N
R2
— CH2OCOR1 , — CH2ONO2, CXj, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyndyl,
4-pyridyl, 2-furyl, cyano, carbamyl or C2-C9alkylcarba-
myl, wherein R] and R2 are as defined above, X is CI or Br
Rl' is any radical encompassed by the definition of R]
above; and
(b) the non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition
salts and N-oxides thereof, and a pharmaceutically accept-
able carrier therefor.
4^1,308
HYPOGLYCEMIC S-SUBSTTTUTED
OXAZOLIDINE-2,4-DIONES
Rodney C. Schnur, Noank, Conn., assignor to Pfizer Inc., New
York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 252,961, Apr. 23, 1981, Pat. No. 4,332,952,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 173,206, Jul. 28, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,458
Int. a.3 A61K 31/42; C07D 263/32
U.S. a. 424—272 23 Claims
1. A method of lowering the blood glucose in a hyperglyce-
mic mammal which comprises administering a blood glucose
lowering amount of a compound of the formula
X'
± o^^
o
(I)
-e\<j
NR
or
R2
(11)
— CH2OCOR1 , — CH2ONO2, CX3, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, wherein
4-pyridyl, 2-furyl, cyano, carbamyl or C2-C9alkylcarba- R is hydrogen. (Ci-QM^anoyl, benzoyl, (C2-C4)<*rbalk-
myl, wherein Ri and R2 are as defined above, X is CI or Br oxy, (Ci-C3)-alkylcarbamoyl or di(Ci-C3)-alkylcarbamoyl;
962
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
Y is sulfur or oxygen;
X is hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, bromo, iodo, methyl, phenyl,
benzoyl, or (C|-C3)-alkoxy;
X' is hydrogen or methyl; and
X^ is hydrogen, fluoro, bromo, chloro or iodo; or a pharmaceu-
tically acceptable cationic salt thereof when R is hydrogen.
4,381,310
ANTIMYCOTIC SUBSTITUTED
2,4-DICHLOROPHENYL-IMIDAZOLYL-VINYL-CAR-
BINOLS
Wolf Reiser, Ludwig Elbe, both of Wuppertal; Karl H. Biichel,
Burscheid, and Manfred Plempel, Wuppertal, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leyerku-
sen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,276
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 9,
1980, 3033917
Int. a.3 A61K 31/415; C07D 233/60
U.S. a. 424—273 R 16 Qaims
1. A compound which is a substituted 2,4-dichlorophenyl-
imidazolyl-vinyl carbinol of the formula
4,381,309
l-ARYLOXY-2-HYDROXY-3-((HETEROCYCLIC-SUB-
STFTUTED ALKYD-AMINO-PROPANES AND SALTS
THEREOF
Herbert Koppe, Ingelheim; Anton Mentnip, Mainz-Kastel;
Ernst-Otto Renth; Kurt Schromm, both of Ingelheim; Wolf-
gang Hoefke, Budenheim, and Gojko Muacevic, Ingelheim, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Boehringer Ingelheim
GmbH, Ingelheim am Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 103,724, Dec. 14, 1979, Pat. No.
4,255,430, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 4,280, Jan.
17, 1979, Pat. No. 4,212,877, which is a continuation-in-part of
Ser. No. 838,450, Oct. 3, 1977, abandoned, and a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 112,640, Jan. 16, 1980, Pat. No.
4,296,177, which is a division of Ser. No. 4,279, Jan. 17, 1979,
Pat. No. 4,256,756, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
838,450, Oct. 3, 1977, abandoned. This application Oct. 9, 1980,
Ser. No. 195,650
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 5,
1976, 2644833
Int. a.3 A61K 31/415: C07D 233/36, 235/26
U.S. a. 424—273 B 6 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
NSC
O— CH2— CH— CH2— N— D— Rj
I
OH
R4
wherein
R4 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or aralkyi of 7
to 14 carbon atoms;
Rsis
where Rio and Rn are each hydrogen, halogen, alkyl of 1
to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, trifluo-
romethyl, carboxamido or, together with each other,
— O — (CH2)> — O — , where y is 1 or 2, attached to carbon
atoms of the phenyl ring in o-position with respect to each
other; and
D is alkylene of 1 to 12 carbon atoms,
or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt
thereof
6. The method of blocking the a- and /3-adrenergic receptors
in a warm-blooded animal in need thereof, which comprises
perorally, parenterally or rectally administering to said animal
an effective amount of a compound of claims 1 or 3.
°^
(I)
OH
I
CH— C=CH— R
t
N
1
N
or a salt thereof,
in which
R represents a cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl radical which has
in each case 5 to 7 carbon atoms and is optionally substi-
tuted by alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; a cycloalkyl-alkyl
or cycloalkenylalkyl radical which has in each case 5 or 7
carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl part and in
each case 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the straight-chain or
branched alkyl part and is optionally substituted by alkyl
with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; an optionally substituted
straight-chain or branched alkenyl or alkinyl radical with
in each case up to 6 carbon atoms, the substituents being
selected from: hydroxyl, alkoxy with 1 to 4 carbon atom§,
and phenyl, which is optionally substituted by halogen or
alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; phenyl substituted by
phenoxy or chlorophenoxy; or optionally substituted
phenylalkyl radical with I to 4 carbon atoms in the alkyl
part in the racemic form and/or in the form of the geomet-
ric and/or optical isomers.
14. A method of combating mycoses in warm-blooded ani-
mals which comprises administering to the animals an an-
timycotically effective amount of an active compound accord-
ing to claim 1 either alone or in admixture with a diluent or in
the form of a medicament.
4,381,311
ANTIINFLAMMATORY
4,5.DIARYL-a-(POLYHALOMETHYL)-2-THIO-
PHENEMETHANOLS
Stephen B. Haber, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 220,773, Dec. 29, 1980,
abandoned. This application Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 295,781
Int. a.3 A61K 31/38. 31/44; C07D 333/16. 401/00
U.S. a. 424—275 48 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
R3
R6
R4
R2
Ri
ORj
where
Ri and R2 independently = CF3, CF2H, CFCI2, CF2CI,
CCIFH, CCI2H, CH2F, CF3CF2 or C1-C2 alkyl with the
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
963
provisos (1) that no more than one of Ri and R2 can be
selected from the group consisting of CH2F and C1-C2
alkyl and (2) that no more than one of Ri and R2 can be
CF3CF2;
R3 and R4 independently = pyridyl or
o
4^U13
PHENYLALKANOIC COMPOUNDS AND
THERAPEUTIC USE THEREOF
Jean Heusser, Adliswil, and Max Glasbrenner, Zurich, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Honunel AG, Adliswil, Switzerland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 618,636, Oct. 1, 1975,
abandoned. This application May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,221
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Oct. 8, 1974,
13516/74; Oct. 8, 1974, 13517/74
Int. a.5 C07C 101/00; A61K 31/215
U.S. a. 424—308 8 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula (I)
where
X = H, F, CI, Br, NO2, C1-C2 alkyl, Ci-C2aIkoxy, di(Ci-C2
alkyl) amino or C1-C2 alkyl S(0)„; where n = 0, 1 or 2;
Y = H, F or CI with the proviso that when Y is F or CI, then
X is F or CI;
R5=H, C1-C4 alkyl, (C1-C3 alkyl)C(O) or CO2R7;
R6 = H or C1-C2 alkyl; and
R7 = Ci-C4 alkyl.
(I)
4,381,312
2,4,6-TRINITRODIPHENYLAMINES FOR CONTROL OF
FOLIAR PHYTOPATHOGENS
Barry A. Dreikom, and Kenneth E. Kramer, both of Indianap-
olis, Ind., assignors to Eli Lilly and Company, Indianapolis,
Ind.
Filed I>ec. 13, 1974, Ser. No. 532,436
Int. a.3 AOIN 33/02. 37/10, 37/34
U.S. a. 424—304 9 Qaims
1. A method of reducing the adverse effects of downy mil-
dew phytopathogens which comprises contacting the phyto-
pathogens on the foliage of plants with an effective phytopa-
thogen-inhibiting amount of a compound of the formula
O2N
Isobutyl
^
CH— CCX)— CHZ-CH2-O— C2H<-N
C2H5
/
i
\
R2
wherein Ri and R2 independently from each other represent
hydrogen or alkyl with 1 to 8 carbon atoms and pharmacologi-
cally safe salts of such compound.
4,38U14
CONTACT LENS DISINFECTING AND PRESERVING
SOLUTION
Lawrence D. Mandt, Fairport; Thomas M. Riedharamer, and
Francis X. Smith, both of Rochester, all of N.Y., assignors to
Bausch A Lomb Incorporated, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 208,919
Int. Q.^ A61K 31/11: AOIN 35/00
U.S. Q. 424—333 4 Qaims
1. A method for preserving or disinfecting soft contact
lenses comprising contacting said lenses with an aqueous solu-
tion having as the active antimicrobial agent l,S-pentanedial
present in an amount from about 0.00001 to about 0.1 weight
percent of said composition, said composition being buffered
for eye comfort (pH compatible) with at least one buffer in an
amount from about 0.05 to 2.5 weight percent.
NO2
4,381,315
REFRIGERATED DOUGH AND METHOD OF
MANUFACTURE
Samuel H. Yong, Minneapolis; Douglas A. Edmonson, Maple
Grove; Leah G. Evans, Minneapolis; Deena G. Hohle, St.
Louis Park; Susan H. Jensen, Minneapolis; Leslie S. O'Kecfe,
Tonka Bay, and Debra S. Laatsch, Inver Grove Heights, all of
Minn., assignors to The Pillsbury Company, Minneapolis,
Minn.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,584
Int. Q.3 A21D 8/00, 10/02
U.S. Q. 426—94 37 Claims
wherein R represents
nitro,
trifluoromethyl,
hydroxy,
cyano,
benzoyl, or
C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl;
n represents 1-3;
R' represents
hydrogen, —
chloro, or
Ci-C3alkyl;
provided that benzoyl and C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl do not oc-
cupy either the 2'- or 6'-position; that nitro does not occupy
either the 2'- or 6'-position when n represents 1; that n must
represent 1 when R represents cyano, benzoyl or C1-C3 alk-
oxycarbonyl; and that R' represents hydrogen when n repre-
sents 3.
5^
1. An improved sheeted fresh dough product which is con-
tained in a container for storage and is at least partially chemi-
cally leavened said dough product containing flour, shorten-
ing, water and chemical leaveners, including a leavening acid
and a leavening base, in amounts sufficient to form a dough
mass said improvement comprising:
at least one of the group of water, leavening acid and leaven-
964
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
ing base being substantially isolated from the remainder of
the group wherein at least one of the leavening acid and
leavening base is unreacted in the range of between about
40% and about 85% after sheeting of the dough is com-
pleted; and
alternating layers of shortening and flour/water matrix.
4,381,316
WHEY PROTEIN FORTinED CURED MEAT AND
PROCESS FOR PREPARATION
Eugene Brotsky, Pittsburgh; Charles W. Everson, McMurrsy,
and William E. Swartz, Upper St. Qair, all of Pa., assignors to
Nutrisearch Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 108,734, Dec. 31, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,655
Int. a.5 A23B 4/00: A23L 1/3}
U.S. a. 426—265 26 Qaims
1. A protein fortified cured meat, comprising cured intact
skeletal meat muscle tissue as the sole cured meat source,
having incorporated into the muscle tissue of said meat a whey
protein composition having more than about 30% by weight
whey protein on a dry solids basis wherein said whey protein
composition consists essentially of about 100% of a whey
protein concentrate as the sole protein source, wherein said
whey protein concentrate is prepared by neutrailizing whey
prior to protein concentration, and wherein said whey protein
concentrate is hydratable for incorporation into said meat.
4,381,317
METHOD OF MAKING A PIZZA
Robert L. Fournier, and Priscilla J. Fournier, both of 5607 N.
22nd St., Arlington, Va. 22205
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,620
Int. a.3 A21D 6/00
U.S. a. 426—302 4 Qaims
1. A method of making a pizza product comprising prepar-
ing the pizza in a pizza skillet and first cooking the pizza in the
skillet on a stove top burner until the crust reaches the desired
preparedness and then placing the pizza in the skillet under the
broiler of an oven in order to cook the top of the pizza without
applying direct heat to the bottom of the pizza skillet until the
top of the pizza is fully cooked.
4,381,318
MALTITOL CONTAINING GEL BASE SYSTEMS
Matthew J. Lynch, Wilmington, Del., assignor to ICI Americas
Inc., Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 222,300, Jan. 5, 1981. This
application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,465
Int. a.3 A23L 1/09. 1/04
U.S. a. 426—658 2 Qaims
1. An aqueous maltitol containing syrup resistant to mold
growth resulting from the hydrogenation of maltitol rich syrup
which comprises 36-49% by weight maltitol, 11-14% by
weight sorbitol, minor amounts of higher saccharides and
reducing sugars when said ingredients are calculated on a dry
basis said syrup having a total dissolved solids content of 75 to
85% by weight when calculated on a wet basis.
4,381,319
METHOD OF BONDING ROTATING BANDS ON
PROJECTILES
Charles R. Hargreaves, Maple Plain, and Stephen J. Price,
Crystal, both of Minn., assignors to Honeywell Inc., Minneap-
olis, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 193,680, Oct. 3, 1980,
abandoned. This application Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,232
Int. G.^ B05D 1/10
MS. Q. 427—34 17 Qaims
1. A method of bonding a thermoplastic rotating band to a
metallic projectile body, comprising the steps of:
designating a band seat zone on a metallic projectile body;
coating said band seat zone with a sprayed metallic coating,
said coating being characterized by (i) having a relatively
rough external surface, i.e., a large number of irregularly
shaped projections comprising a maze of mechanical at-
tachments to said body, (ii) being about 0.003 inches to
0.012 inches thick so as to be metallurgically continuous,
thereby to prevent oxidation of said body at said band seat
zone thereof, and (iii) being metallurgically bonded to said
SEE FI6 5
APPARATUS OF EITHER FIG 2 OR FIG 3 PLUS MOLDING OF POLYMER
TO FORM HOMOGENEOUS PLASTIC ROTATING BAND
projectile body so as to have a metal-to-metal bond
strength; and
applying a thermoplastic polymer in liquid form around said
zone and to said sprayed metallic coating to form, after
hardening, a thermoplastic rotating band, said polymer,
while in fiuid form, permeating into intimate contact with
said irregularly shaped projections so that, after said poly-
mer becomes solid, a high torque transmittal interface is
provided between said plastic rotating band and said
projectile body.
4,381,320
NON-IONIC ABSORBENT POLYMERS
Hien V. Nguyen, East Windsor, N.J., assignor to Johnson &
Johnson, New Brunswick, N.J.
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,166
Int. Q.5 B05D 3/06
U.S. Q. 427—44 11 Qaims
1. Process which comprises exposing an aqueous solution of
polyvinyl alcohol and a low molecular weight, water-soluble
copolymer containing polymerized oxyethylene and oxypro-
pylene units to electromagnetic or corpuscular ionizing radia-
tion of sufficient dosage to form a gel, wherein the molecular
weight of said copolymer is below about 12,000.
4,381,321
METHOD OF PROCESSING MINIATURE ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS SUCH AS CAPACITORS OR RESISTORS
Denver Braden, Carlsbad, Calif., assignor to Palomar Systems A.
Machines, Inc., Escondido, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 123,201, Feb. 21, 1980. This
application Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,950
Int. Q.3 B05D 5/00
U.S. Q. 427—79 10 Qaims
44
42-
Ir^
J6
'ST^
ti so
/:
fji
S^.
V ■
4 A
■10
-u^
*Jl
1. The process of coating ends of a multiplicity of like minia-
ture electronic parts such as capacitors, resistors or the like,
comprising:
(a) forming a body with a multiplicity of juxtaposed parallel
passageways extending from face to face of said body,
(b) forming said passageways with resilient walls substan-
tially from end to end of said passageways,
(c) sizing said passageways so that at least one cross-sec-
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
965
tional dimension in each passageway is shorter than the
corresponding cross-sectional dimension of the parts,
(d) first disposing said parts in a bani< juxtaposed to one
another and each ahgned with one said passgeways and
loading the parts by pushing said parts together in a bank
into said passageways until their first ends are exposed at
a first face of said body,
(e) coating the exposed first ends of said parts and curing the
coating thereon,
(0 second pushing all of said parts together in a bank in said
passageways until their second ends are exposed at a
second face of said body,
(g) coating the exposed second ends of said parts and curing
the coating thereon,
(h) continuously resiliently gripping the sides of said parts in
all positions in said passageways whether protruding from
either end of said passageways or whether inbetween,
(i) pushing said parts together in a bank out of said passage-
ways to unload the parts, and
(j) the lengths of said passageways being greater than the
lengths of said parts to be coated and the second pushing
step occurring only after the first coating step.
4,381,322
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING A SLIDING LAYER ON
THE SURFACE OF AN ALUMINUM-COATED RECORD
CARRIER
Dietrich J. Bahr, Herrenberg, and Marian Briska, Boblingen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,224
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 28,
1980, 3040485
Int. a.3 B05D 5/10, 5/08
U.S. a. 427-179 3aaims
1. A process for forming a record carrier having a sliding
layer on an aluminum-coated front surface of a substrate hav-
ing a nitrocellulose lacquer layer, said process comprising the
steps of:
(1) coating the back surface of the substrate with one or
several nitrocellulose lacquer layers with from about 0. 1
to 2% by weight, as referred to the wet lacquer, of one or
several fatty acids being added to the last lacquer layer,
il) coating the front surface of the substrate with aluminum
in a vacuum;
(3) winding the record carrier into the form t)f a roll,
whereby the aluminum layer is in contact with the fatty
acid, and a sliding layer is formed by reaction between the
aluminum layer and the fatty acid, and
(4) aging the roll for at least one month.
4,381,323
LOW-TEMPERATURE CURING COATING
COMPOSITION
Jean C. Lowe, Lansdale; James M. Klotz, Quakertown, both of
Pa., and Glenn A. Collins, Jr., deceased, late of Lansdale, Pa.
(by Jean C. Lowe, executrix), assignors to Coatings for Indus-
try, Inc., Souderton, Pa.
DiYision of Ser. No. 144,013, Apr. 28, 1980, Pat. No. 4,319,924,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 931,674, Aug. 7, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 677,495, Apr. 15,
1976, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 441,887,
Feb. 12, 1974, abandoned. This application Mar. 15, 1982, Ser.
No. 358,384
Int. a.3 B05D 3/02
U.S. a. 427—383.7 12 Qaims
1. In a method for coating a substrate comprising applying to
said substrate an acidic aqueous coating composition compris-
ing in coating-forming proportions, materials which are a
source of: dissolved phosphate; dissolved dichromate; dis-
solved aluminum; and inorganic solid particulate material
having a particle size of at least about one micron and capable
of being bonded to a metallic surface by phosphate bonding;
wherein said composition is capable of being heat-cured at
elevated temperature within a pre-determmed time into a
water insoluble coating in which particulate matenal of the
coating is phosphate bonded to said surface; the improvement
comprising including diethanolamine into said composition in
an amount sufficient to reduce the temperature at which said
composition can be cured within said predetermined time into
said water insoluble coating; and thereafter curing said compo-
sition into said coating.
4,381,324
COUPLING MEMBER FOR FLOOR COVERING
SECTIONS
Chester W. Ellingson, Jr., Bumsrille, Minn., assignor to Reese
Enterprises, Inc., Rosemount, Minn.
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,336
Int. a.5 B32B 3/06
U.S. a. 428—58 4 Qaims
1. A floor covering consisting of coupled sections, having in
combination
a fioor covering section substantially rectangular in plan,
a flange formed at each side edge portion of said section,
each fiange having a longitudinal bore therethrough, said
bores respectively having oppositely facing slots,
a coupling member comprising
a pair of closely spaced rods,
a web connecting said rods, said web having a thickness less
than the height of said slots,
said rods respectively being disposed through adjacent pairs
of said slots connecting a pair of said sections, and
a tread surface carried by said sections.
4,381,325
LIQUID RETAINING SYNTHETIC HBER, PROCESS
FOR PRODUONG THE SAME, AND PRODUCTS
Yutaka Masuda, Otsu; Yoshiteru Kiyomura, Shiga, and Koichi
Nishizakura, Otsu, all of Japan, assignors to Toray Industries,
Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,160
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 10, 1979, 54-115171;
Sep. 12, 1979, 54-116622
Int. a.3 D02G 3/00; D06M 5/02; A46B 15/00
U.S. a. 428—91 15 Chums
1. A tapered synthetic fiber comprising an elongated body
poriion, a tapered poriion terminating in a single point at its
free end, said tapered poriion having an acute ridgeline formed
with neighboring arcuate concave grooves extending length-
wise along its upered poriion, said pointed free end having a
diameter of less than about 15% of the diameter of the body
poriion.
966
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381.326
RETICULATED THEMOPLASTIC RUBBER PRODUCTS
William G. F. Kelly, Middlesex, N.J., assignor to Chicopee, New
Brunswick, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 179,593, Aug. 19, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,329,309, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 67,850,
Aug. 20, 1979, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 36,726, May 5, 1979, Pat. No. 4,305,990, which is a division
of Ser. No. 848,439, Nov. 3, 1977, Pat. No. 4,173,612. This
application Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,331
Int. a.' B32B 3/10: A61F 13/16
U.S. a. 428—134 7 Qaims
1. Reticulated sheet material consisting essentially of a mix-
ture of (a) thermoplastic rubber comprising a block copolymer
of styrene and butadiene or isoprene, and (b) sufficient olefin
polymer to improve the processability of said block copoly-
mer, as evidenced by the ability to achieve a draw ratio of
greater than one while extruding said mixture of (a) and (b),
wherein said olefin polymer is selected from the group consist-
ing of isotactic polypropylene, polyethylene, amorphous poly-
propylene, polybutylene, ethylene/vinyl acetate copolymer,
ethylene/ethyl acrylate copolymer, ethylene/methyl acrylate
copolymer, and polystyrene, and wherein said reticulated
sheet material has an open area of from about 40 percent to
about 75 percent, and tensile strength at 100 percent elongation
of about 0.4 to about I pound for a ^-inch wide strip.
4,381,328
PAVING AND FLOOR BLOCK COMPOSITION AND
METHOD OF PRODUCTION
Matthew R. Bunner, and William H. Heinhuis, both of Elkhart,
Ind., assignors to Industrial Wood Products, Inc., Elkhart,
Ind.
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,221
Int. a.^ B32B 3/26. 5/16
U.S. a. 428—171 13 Qaims
^8
24-
1. A paving and floor block comprising a body having an
upper wear surface and being composed of a compressed and
cured mixture of wood particles of a size range between about
6 and 200 mesh, formaldehyde resin, and parafTm base wax
mixed with said wood particles, said resin comprising between
about five percent (5%) and about forty percent (40%) by
weight of said mixture, and said wax comprising up to about
ten percent (10%) by weight of said mixture for said block, said
body having a plurality of spaced holes extending upwardly
therein, and relatively dense areas of said mixture disposed
around said holes and extending upwardly therefrom to form a
plurality of relatively hard regions in said wear surface.
4,381,327
MICA-FOIL LAMINATIONS
Richard L. Briere, Hopkinton, Mass., assignor to Dennison
Manufacturing Company, Framingham, Mass.
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,649
Int. a.3 B32B 3/10: B44C 1/22
U.S. a. 428—137 25 Qaims
w///////^y/////m^A
1. A method of fabricating a dielectric-electrode laminate
comprising the steps of:
(a) applying a layer of pressure sensitive adhesive to a sheet
of mica, said pressure sensitive adhesive comprising a
thermoplastic material selected from the class consisting
of organopolysiloxane pressure sensitive adhesives,
(b) bonding a face of a metallic sheet to a face of said mica
sheet with said thermoplastic pressure sensitive adhesive,
and
(c) selectively removing portions of said metallic sheet to
create an electrode pattern,
wherein the dielectric-electrode laminate resists delamina-
tion due to moisture, and erosion due to ozone and nitric
acid.
4,381,329
THERMOPLASTIC RLM FOR USE IN THE
MANUFACTURE OF FORGERY-RESISTANT
IDENTinCATION DOCUMENTS
Hermann Dallmann, Wiesbaden, and Hans J. Palmen, Walluf,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktien-
gesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,381
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 9,
1980, 3025931
Int. a.5 B32B 3/00, 27/32. 27/30
U.S. a. 428—204 26 Qaims
1. A forgery-resistant identification document comprising a
core carrying identifying information, said core having lami-
nated thereto the cover layer side of a thermoplastic protective
fllm comprising a base layer and a cover layer comprising a
partially hydrolyzed olefin/vinyl ester copolymer, the degree
of hydrolysis of said copolymer lying in the range from 20 to
99 percent, said laminated protective film being impossible to
detach from said document at temperatures up to and as high
as 120° C. without destroying said document.
14. A method of protecting an identiflc'ation document
against forgery comprising laminating to said document the
cover layer side of a thermoplastic protective film comprising
a base layer and a cover layer comprising a partially hydro-
lyzed olefin/vinyl ester copolymer, the degree of hydrolysis of
said copolymer lying in the range from 20 to 99 percent, said
laminated protective film being impossible to detach from said
document at temperatures up to and as high as 120* C. without
destroying said document.
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
967
4^U30
SURFACE TREATED GLASS-WOOL MAT AND THE
METHOD FOR MAKING THE SAME
Yasuo Gotomyo, Hiroshima, and Yukihiro Nakagawa, Aichi,
both of Japan, assignors to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd., Hiroshima
and Nakagawa Sangyo Co., Ltd., Aichi, both of, Japan
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 289,080
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 2, 1980, 55-106537
Int. a.3 B32B 7/02
U.S. a. 428—218 8 Claims
having a number average molecular weight of about at least
3,000 of a polyether polyol having essentially all of the OH
groups capped with an aliphatic polyisocyanate.
4,381,333
HIGH TEMPERATURE GLASS THERMAL CONTROL
STRUCTURE AND COATING
James M. Beggs, Administrator of the National Aeronautics and
Space Administration, with respect to an invention of; David
A. Stewart, SanU Cruz, Calif.; Howard E. Goldstein,
Saratoga, Calif., and Daniel B. Leiser, San Jose, Calif.
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 308,007
Int. a.5 B32B 5//5. 17/06
U.S. a. 428—312.6 13 Qaims
1. A glass-wool mat including a plurality of glass fibers
which are entangled with each other to form a sheet having an
inner layer and at least one outer layer, said outer layer being
comprised of glass fibers having rounded ends and being
crimped to provide a stronger entanglement among the fibers,
the glass fibers in the outer layer being more condensed than
those in the inner layer.
--/«
f •^«
-It
4,381,331
NON-STICKING PLY END TURN-OVER BLADDER AND
METHOD OF MANUFACTURE THEREOF
James L. Johnson, Indiana, Pa., assignor to McCreary Tire &
Rubber Company, Indiana, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 157,950, Jun. 9, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,229
Int. a.3 D03D i/00
U.S. a. 428—224 6 Qaims
1. A re-usable, thermal control structure comprising ceramic
substrate and a coating including a first, high emittance glass
layer on said substrate and a second, high scattering coefficient
glass layer on said first layer, said second layer including dis-
crete but sintered together glass particles in said layer which
are of a size which will scatter incident short wavelength
radiation, but which is substantially transparent to thermal
radiation.
7. A thermal control coating comprising a inner, high emit-
tance glass layer and a outer high scattering coefficient glass
layer on said inner layer, said outer layer including discrete but
sintered together glass particles of a size which will scatter
incident short wavelength radiation, but which is substantially
transparent to thermal radiation.
1. A ply turn-over bladder formed of a rubbery polymer at
least a portion of its outer surface having reduced adhesion to
unvulcanized rubbery polymers, said portion comprising a
fabric layer of spaced cords calendered with a coating of un-
vulcanized uncured rubbery polymer partially embedded in
the rubbery polymer surface, the spaces between the cords
being free of said polymer at said surface so that such cords
project above said surface.
4,381,332
ADHESIVE AND RESULTING NONWOVEN FABRIC
Glenn E. Fulmer, Qarksville, and Louis L. Wood, Rockville,
both of Md., assignors to W. R. Grace & Co., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,826
Int. Q\} C08G Wn
U.S. a. 428—288 26 Qaims
1. A method of adhering fibers to form a nonwoven fabric
comprising applying to the fibers an elastomeric cross-linked
polyurethane gel composition which is formed by reacting
together water and a water soluble or dispersible prepolymer
4,381,334
ZINC-RICH POWDERS
Leizer Balk, deceased, late of Pittsburgh, Pa. (by Lois Balk,
executrix), and James S. Sojkowski, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignors
to Pratt A Lambert, Inc., Buffalo, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 154,462, May 29, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 740,731, Nov. 10, 1976,
abandoned. This application Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,917
Int. Q.3 B32B 15/08. 27/38; C04B 9/02
U.S. Q. 428—332 n Claims
1. An iron or steel substrate having a continuous sacrificial
coating of the product obtained by curing a homogeneous
zinc-rich powder composition consisting of zinc powder, a
curable epoxy resin powder, a curing agent and a flow modi-
fier, thereon, prepared by a process comprising blending the
zinc powder with the epoxy resin, curing agent and flow modi-
fier in molten state until a homogeneous mixture is produced,
the zinc being 75%-90% by weight of the toUl of zinc and
epoxy resin, cooling the mixture to solid form and then grind-
ing the solid to a powder form.
968
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4^U35
MULTI-COMPONENT COMPOSITE RLAMENT
Miyoshi Oluunoto, Takatsukishi, Japan, assignor to Toray In-
dustries, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 91,161, Nov. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,846
Int. a.^ D02G 3/00
U.S. a. 428—373 10 Qaims
1. An "islands-in-sea" type multi-component composite
filament, for preparing a bundle of puffy superfine filaments
upon separation from said sea component and upon differential
contraction comprising at least three components including at
least two different kinds of filamentary island components each
dispersed independently in said sea component, one such com-
ponent being a single component, interposing therebetween
without maldistribution of such filamentary components to
either side of said sea component as viewed in said cross-sec-
tional configuration, said composite filament being further
characterized by having a difference in coefficient of free
contraction between the respective kinds of filamentary island
components of at least 5%, and the sum of the weights of said
island components being greater than the weight of said sea
component.
4,381,336
CAST PIECE
Fritz Ostwald, Dreieich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to ITT
Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,123
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 7,
1980, 3025636
Int. a.3 B22D 19/02
U.S. a. 428—614 6 Qaims
JL
11
1. A cast brake caliper having a U-shape with two legs
interconnected by a bridge portion, said bridge portion being
subjected to bending forces, said cast caliper comprising:
a cast member having said U-shape; and
a core element cast in said cast member in said bridge por-
tion, said core element having a flat plate-like portion
extending between and into each of said two legs com-
pletely encased on the top and bottom by said cast mem-
ber and extending to and exposed in both outer edges of
said bridge portion, said core element having a density
lower than the density of said cast member.
4,381,337
POLYESTER ADHESIVE LAYER FOR
PHOTOSENSITIVE ELEMENTS
Mike S. H. Chang, Danbury, Conn., assignor to Pitney Bowes
Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,164
lnt.a,^G03G 5/14. 5/04
U.S. a. 430—58 6 Qaims
1. An organic photoconductive element comprising an elec-
troconductive plastic film support, a bonding layer of an adhe-
sive material on said support, a charge generating layer com-
prising a particulate charge generating organic chemical ad-
hered to said bonding layer, and a charge transport layer com-
prising a charge transport organic chemical and a binder mate-
rial for the charge transport chemical adhered to said charge
generating layer, characterized by said adhesive bonding layer
and said binder material comprising a mixture of a first polyes-
ter having a Tg larger than about 60° C. and a second polyester
having a Tg smaller than about 30° C, the amount of the first
polyester varying from about 40 to about 70 weight percent of
the total mixture and the amount of the second polyester vary-
ing from about 30 to about 60 weight percent of the total
mixture.
4,381,338
PROCESS FOR PREPARING PHOTOCONDUCHVE
PARTICLES
Kiyoshi Suzuki, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,229
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 21, 1979, 54-121750
Int. a.3 G03G 5/08
U.S. a. 430—135 6 Oaims
1. A process for preparing cadmium sulfide photoconduc-
tive particles comprising:
reacting a water-soluble metal salt with an ion exchange
resin having an anion which reacts with the metal ion of
the water-soluble metal salt to produce a water insoluble
metal compound and deix)siting the water insoluble metal
compound resulting from the reaction on the surface of
cadmium sulfide photoconductive particles.
4,381,339
PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING MATERIAL AND
NON-DIFFUSING COMPOUNDS TO BE USED IN THE
MATERIAL WHICH CONTAINS A
PHOTOGRAPHICALLY ACTIVE GROUP WHICH CAN
BE SPLIT OFF
Giinter Renner, Cologne, and Erich Wolff, Leverkusen, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,572
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 16,
1980, 3014669
Int. Q.' G03C 5/00
U.S. Q. 430—223 7 Qaims
1. Photographic recording material having at least one light-
sensitive silver halide emulsion layer and in association with
said silver halide emulsion layer, a non-diffusing reducible
compound which can be split to release a diffusible photo-
graphically useful compound, the non-diffusing reducible com-
pound corresponding to the following formula I
I
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
969
photographically ac-
in which the substituents W, XR^, G— R' and E may be ar-
ranged in any positions in relation to each other and in which:
R** represents the atoms required to complete a ring system
comprising at least one aromatic or heteroaromatic ring;
W represents a group which reduces the electron density in the
ring at the position of E and is selected from the group
consisting of a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group,
a nitroso group, a trifluoromethyl group, a quaternary am-
monium group and an acyl group;
m represents an integer of from 1 to 3;
G represents a group from which R' can be split ofT under
photographic development conditions;
R' represents the residue of a diffusible i
tive compound;
X represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or the group
— NR3— ;
R2 represents hydrogen or a group which can be split off in
alkaline medium, and
E represents a reducible substituent selected from the group
consisting of
— NO2, —NO, — CO— R\ — C=N— R^ — N=N— r3
I
R3
— N=N— R3, — N=N— R^and — C=N— OR^
I I
O O
R^ represents hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, a heterocyclic group or
aralkyl,
and the compound of formula I contains at least one substituent
conferring diffusion resistance. _
4,381,340
METHOD OF TREATING LITHOGRAPHIC PRINTING
PLATES WITH 2.PROPOXYETHANOL
John E. Walls, Annandale, N.J., assignor to American Hoechst
Corporation, Somerville, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 176,363, Aug. 8, 1980, Pat. No. 4^8,340.
This application Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,051
Int. a.i G03C 5/00
U.S. a. 430—302 12 Qaims
1. The method of developing a lithographic printing plate
having resin binders in photosensitive coatings adherent there-
upon, comprising treating said printing plate with a solution
comprising 2-propoxyethanol as a detackifying agent, to re-
move the nonimage portions.
4,381,341
TWO STAGE ETCHING PROCESS FOR THROUGH THE
SUBSTRATE CONTACTS
John X. Przybysz, Penn Hills; Michael C. Driver, Monroeville,
and Harvey C. Nathanson, Pittsburgh, all of Pa., assignors to
Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,467
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/312; B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
U.S. a. 430—312 4 Qaims
54-
56-
"]Q
plurality of transistor devices are formed on one side of the
substrate with a plurality of transistor contacts disposed on the
substrate surface in electrical contact with transistor regions,
wherein the respective interconnection vias are aligned with
and are smaller in area than the transistor contacts with which
they are respectively aligned, which method comprises;
(a) selectively thinning the substrate from the side opposed
to the side on which the transistor devices and transistor
contacts are disposed, which selectively thinned substrate
area exceeds the transistor contact area;
(b) etching through portions of the selectively thinned sub-
strate area which is aligned with the transistor contacts to
produce electrical interconnection vias of an area smaller
than the transistor contact area.
4,381,342
LIQUID JET METHOD FOR COATING
PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING MEDIA
Roger S. Van Heyningen, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman
Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,154
Int. a.J B05D 1/04. 1/06. 5/00: G03C 1/76
U.S. a. 430-496 14 Qaims
1. A method of coating a photographic support of the kind
having a major surface of substantially uniform transverse
dimension and a plurality of cell walls upstanding from said
surface in a regular pattern to defme a plurality of minute,
open-topped, discrete cells, said method comprising:
(a) moving said support through a coating zone in a direction
orthogonal to said transverse dimension and at a substan-
tially constant velocity;
(b) generating at least one stream of equally sized and spaced
drops of photographic coating liquid directed toward the
coating zone; and
(c) synchronizing the support movement and the rate of drop
generation so that the drops of said stream are deposited in
predetermined cells of said support.
4,381,343
DETERMINATION OF ANTIBACTERIAL AGENTS
Nathan Citri, Jerusalem, Israel, assignor to Teva Pharmaceuti-
cal Industries Ltd., Har Hotsvim and Yissum Research Devel-
opment Co., Jerusalem, both of, Israel
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,408
Qaims priority, application Israel, Mar. 27, 1980, 59723
Int. a.3 C12Q 1/36. 1/18; C12R 1/085. 1/10
U.S. a. 435—24 10 Claims
1. A method for the simultaneous determination of a /3-lac-
tam antibiotic (BLA) and a non-BLA antibacterial agent in a
test material, comprising:
(i) seeding a nutrient medium with a strain of /3-lactamase
generating bacterium or spores thereof;
(ii) applying to the seeded nutrient medium at two discrete
sites two samples of the test material, one of them together
with a BLA;
(iii) then incubating the nutrient medium under conditions
inducive to the generation of /3-lactamase by said bacteria;
(iv) assaying said discrete sites for /3-lactamase (develop-
ment); and
(v) comparing the development of said two sites.
1. Method of providing a plurality of electrical interconnec-
tion vias through an integrated circuit substrate wherein a
4,381,344
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING DEOXYRIBOSIDES USING
BACTERIAL PHOSPHORYLASE
Janet L. Rideout, Raleigh, and Thomas A. Krenitsky, Chapel
Hill, both of N.C., aasisoors to Burroughs Wellcome Co.,
Research Triangle Park, N.C.
FUed Apr. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 143^36
Int. a.' C12P 19/38
MS. a. 435—87 5 Claim
1. A process for producing compounds of formula (II)
970
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
(ID
separating the plasminogen activator from the fibrin.
9. A plasminogen activator enzyme concentrate isolated
from a biological source by the methods of any of the claims
1-6 and comprising urokinase (human) of molecular weight of
about 56,(XX) Daltons, having high affinity for binding to fibrin
on an adsorptive matrix and having the appearance of a single
chain molecular structure.
wherein R is halogen, amino or substituted amino including
protected amino which process comprises reacting a 4-sub-
stituted-lH-imidazo-[4,5-c]-pyridine base of formula (III)
(III)
wherein R is as hereinbefore defined with a 2-deoxyribosyl
donor system comprising 2-deoxyribose-l -phosphate and a
bacterial purine nucleoside phosphorylase enzyme.
4,381,347
HBRE GLASS COMPOSITION
Vlastimil Carbol« Vaxjo, Sweden, assignor to Oy Partek AB,
Pargas, Finland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 139,423, Apr. 11, 1980, Pat. No.
4,312,952. This application Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,143
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 26,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C03C 3/08, 13/00
U.S. a. 501—36 1 Qaim
1. Fibre glass composition, characterized in that it consists of
4,381,345
PRETREATMENT OF GLUCOSE FEEDSTOCK WITH
REDUONG AGENTS
Ronald P. Rohrbach, Forest Lake, and Mary J. Maliarik, Lake
Forest, both of 111., assignors to UOP Inc., Des Plaines, 111.
Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,996
Int. a.' C12P 7/00. 19/24
U.S. a. 435—94 8 Oaims
1. In a method of converting glucose to fructose using an
immobilized glucose isomerase system, the improvement
wherein a feedstock containing glucose and minor amounts of
isomerase poisons, prior to contacting with the immobilized
glucose isomerase system, is treated with a water soluble and
water stable metal hydride at a pH from about 7 to about 9 at
a temperature from about 10° to about 80° C. for a time and in
an amount effective to increase the productivity of said immo-
bilized glucose isomerase system above that productivity oc-
curring when the enzymatic isomerization is carried out with-
out the presence of said metal hydride, the treatment being for
a time sufficient to destroy said poisons.
4,381,346
ISOLATION OF PLASMINOGEN ACTIVATORS USEFUL
AS THERAPEUTIC AND DIAGNOSTIC AGENTS
Syed S. Huasin, 139 Upland Ave., Newton Highland, Md. 02161;
Boguslaw Lipinski, 97 Beaumount Ave., Newtonville, Md.
02160, and Victor Gurewich, 300 Mt. Auburn St., Suite 309,
Cambridge, Md. 02138
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 93,246, Nov. 13, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 182,976
Int. a.3 C12N 9/72. 9/48
U.S. a. 435—215 10 Oaims
1. The method of isolating a plasminogen activator from
urine or culture medium, comprising
providing an adsorptive matrix having fibrin precipitated on
its surface,
exposing a mother liquid based upon urine or culture me-
dium and containing high fibrin-affinity plasminogen acti-
vator to the fibrin-containing matrix, whereby those plas-
minogen activator molecules which have high affinity
therefor are bound to molecules of fibrin,
removing the remaining mother liquid, and
% by weight
Si02
55-65
AI2O3
1-2
CaO
6-9.5
MgO
1-4.5
Na20
13-17
K2O
0-2
B2O3
1-7
BaO
0-3
Li20
O-I
Fe203
traces
ZnO
0.5-6.
4,381,348
BLUE COLORED ARTinaAL STONE STOCKS AND
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING THE SAME
Toshio Kamatani, Kosugi; Hirohisa Ishiguro, Sinminato; Kensei
Itakura, Shinminato, and Kazuo Yamagishi, Niigata, all of
Japan, assignors to Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,186
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1980, 55-188612;
Aug. 26, 1981, 56-132592
Int. C1.3 C04B 35/00
U.S. a. 501—153 10 Claims
1. A blue colored artificial stone stock containing 40-70%
by weight of Si02, 0.1-5% by weight of chromium oxide
having an oxidation number up to 2 and the balance of CaO,
MgO and AI2O3
4,381,349
ALUMINA COMPOUNDS IN ION EXCHANGE RESINS
John M. Lee, and William C. Bauman, both of Lake Jackson,
Tex., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 939,545, Sep. 5, 1978, Pat. No.
4,221,767, which is a division of Ser. No. 812,534, Jul. 5, 1977,
Pat. No. 4,116,856. This application Nov. 19, 1979, Ser. No.
95,691
Int. a.3 BOIJ 41/00. 41/12
U.S. a. 521—28 12 Claims
1. In a process for precipitating AI(OH)3 in the reticules of a
weak -base anion exchange resin by the in situ ammonia precipi-
tation of Al halide in aqueous media, thereby forming a com-
posite consisting essentially of anion exchange resin having
AI(OH)3 dispersed therein, the improvement which comprises
the additional steps of
1. slightly acidifying the so-formed composite in an aqueous
medium with HX, X being halide, where the amount of
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
971
HX is an amount sufficient to provide an acid pH of not
lower than about 5.0, thereby converting the anion ex-
change resin to the halide salt form,
2. substantially separating the composite from the aqueous
portion,
3. substantially flooding the composite with an aqueous
solution of Al halide, draining the excess solution, and
4. adding NH4OH to precipitate additional Al(OH)3 in the
resin.
4,381,350
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF HIGH DENSITY
ION EXCHANGE RESINS AND ION EXCHANGE RESINS
THUS OBTAINED
Edouard Grimaud, Courbevoie, and Maurice Troussier, Pierre
Benite, both of France, assignors to Uranium Pechiney Ugine
Kuhimann, Paris, France
Filed Nov. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 97,335
Int. a.^ C08F 8/20; BOIJ 41/08
U.S. a. 521—31 8 aaims
1. A process for increasing the density of an ion-exchange
anionic resin based on a copolymer of styrene and divinylben-
zene comprising in a liquid phase treatment, contacting the
resin with bromine in a liquid phase and simultaneously charg-
ing the liquid phase with gaseous chlorine while in contact
with the resin for reaction to provide a styrene-divinylbenzene
copolymer ion-exchange anionic resin containing bromine and
chlorine groups.
4,381,351
COMBUSTION MODIHED FLEXIBLE
POLYURETHANE FOAM
John F. Szabat, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to Mobay Chemical
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,675
Int. a.3 C08G 18/14
U.S. a. 521—107 10 aaims
1. A combustion modified flexible polyurethane foam pro-
duced by reacting:
(A) an organic polyisocyanate,
(B) a polyether polyol selected from the group consisting of
(i) a dispersion of a polyurea and/or polyhydrazodicar-
bonamide in a relatively high molecular weight organic
compound containing at least two hydroxy! groups,
wherein the concentration of the polyurea and/or
polyhydrazodicarbonamide is from 1 to 40% by weight
of the dispersion based on 100 parts by weight of said
organic compound,
(ii) a polyoxyalkylene triol having an OH number of from
about 2S to about 40, and,
(iii) mixtures thereof,
(C) from about 80 to about 150 parts by weight of hydrated
alumina of an average particle size of from about 1.5 to
about 5 microns,
(D) from about 4 to about 12 parts by weight of antimony
trioxide,
(E) from about 5 to about 30 parts by weight of deca-
bromodiphenyl oxide,
(F) from about 15 to about 30 parts by weight of a haloge-
nated phosphate ester,
(G) from 0 to about 5 parts by weight of a char former,
(H) from about 1.5 to about 3.5 parts by weight of water,
and,
(I) from 0 to about 20 parts by weight of an organic blowing
agent, said parts by weight of components (C) through (I)
being based on 100 parts by weight of component (B), the
ratio of components being such that the isocyanate index
is from about 105 to about 115.
4,381,352
PROCESS FOR REINFORCED REACTION INJECHON
MOLDING OF POLYURETHANES
Robert L. McBrayer, Lincoln Park, Mich., assignor to BASF
Wyandotte Corporation, Wyandotte, Mich.
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,258
Int. C\? CD8G 18/14
U.S. a. 521—115 8 aaims
1. A process for the preparation of reinforced reaction injec-
tion molded polyurethane foam comprising reactmg an or-
ganic polyisocyanate, a polyoxyalkylene polyether polyol,
chain extending agent, catalyst, optionally a blowing agent,
and milled glass fibers dispersed in said polyol employing an
effective amount of a suspending agent which is a salt of the
acid diester of the formula
Rl— CO— O— (X— 0)„— OC— R2— COOH N— R4
\
Rs
wherein
X represents an alkylene radical with 2 to 3 carbon atoms; R)
represents a member selected from the group consisting of a
saturated acyclic hydrocarbon radical having 11 to 23 car-
bon atoms, a saturated acyclic hydrocarbon having 11 to 23
carbon atoms and being substituted by a hydroxyl group, an
olefinic acyclic hydrocarbon radical having 1 1 to 23 carbon
atoms; and an olefinic acyclic hydrocarbon radical having 1 1
to 23 carbon atoms and being substituted by a hydroxyl
group;
R2 represents a member selected from the group consisting of
a phenylene radical, a divalent saturated acyclic hydrocar-
bon radical, a divalent saturated acyclic hydrocarbon radical
being substituted by a hydroxy group, a divalent saturated
acyclic hydrocarbon radical being substituted by a carboxyl
group, a divalent olefinic acyclic hydrocarbon radical, a
divalent olefinic acyclic hydrocarbon radical being substi-
tuted by a hydroxyl group, and a divalent olefinic acyclic
hydrocarbon radical being substituted by a carboxyl group,
said divalent saturated and olefinic acyclic hydrocarbon
radicals having 2 to 3 carbon atoms;
R3 and R4 represent members selected from the group consist-
ing of hydrogen, a lower alkyl radical, a lower alkyl radical
being substituted by hydroxyl group, and a cyclohexyl radi-
cal, said radicals containing from 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
R5 represents a member selected from the group consisting of
a lower alkyl radical, a lower alkyl radical substituted by a
hydroxyl group, and a cyclohexyl radical, said radicals
containing from 1 to 6 carbon atoms and n is an integer
ranging from 4 to 25.
4,381,353
SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAMS EMPLOYING
REACTIVE AMINES TO IMPROVE THE FOAM
SURFACE
Kenneth G. McDaniel, Round Rock, Tex., assigBor to Texaco
Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Nor. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,708
Int. a.J C08G 18/14
U.S. a. 521—131 6 Claims
1. A rigid polyurethane foam formulation suitable for spray
application comprising
a. a polyether or polyester polyol,
b. an organic polyisocyanate,
c. a halocarbon blowing agent,
d. a catalytic amount of a urethane catalyst and
e. 1 to 4 weight percent of an alkanolamine surface-improv-
ing additive where the alkanolamine additive is diethanol-
amine.
972
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4^U54
RESIN COATED SAND AND CASTING MOLDS
PREPARED THEREFROM
Isao Kai; Hirotami Hosokawa, and Takayuki Oda, all of Aichi,
Japan, assignors to Asahi Yuklzai Kogyo Co., Ltd., Nobeoka,
Japan
Filed Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 296,208
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 23, 1981, 56-25036;
Aug. 11, 1981, 56-125816
Int. a.J B22C 1/22
U.S. a. 523—139 2 Qaims
1. A resin-coated sand having a surface coating comprising,
based on 100 wt. parts of the sand, 0.3-10 wt. parts of harden-
able resin, and 0.001-10 wt. parts of halogen-containing or-
ganic compound having a strong tendency of carburizing said
hardenable resin under heat, further comprising 0.0001-10 wt.
parts of pulverized metal capable of acting with halogen under
heat.
binder comprising a ratio of 95-75 paris by weight of bitumen
homogenized hot with 5-25 parts by weight of a thermoplastic
polymer.
4,381,355
RESORONOL POLYMER BONDED TAPHOLE MIX
AND SPEOALTY MATERIALS
Francis W. Henry, Jr., Glen Bumie; Henry E. Anthonis, III,
Annapolis, and Subrata Banerjee, Glen Bumie, all of Md.,
assignors to General Refractories Company, Bala Cynwyd,
Pa.
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,777
Int. Q\? C08K ^/i4, 3/04. 3/06
U.S. a. 523—140 20 Gaims
1. A non-aqueous taphole mix comprising a binder, a non-
aqueous solvent for the binder and a refractory filler, said
binder comprising a mixture of polymers formed by the homo-
polymerization of resorcinol and a hardening agent, said mix-
ture of polymers formed by the homopolymerization of resor-
cinol comprising about 2-8% resorcinol, about 12-20% iso-
mers of dihydroxydiphenyl, about 10-45% isomers of trihy-
droxydiphenyi, and the balance being higher polymers of
resorcinol, and said hardening agent being selected from the
group consisting of lignosulphonate, sulphur, tris-(hydroxyme-
thyl)-nitromethane, hexamethylene tetramine, or hexamethox-
ymethylmelamine.
4381,356
STABILIZED POLYPROPYLENE COMPOSITIONS
Harold P. Marsh, Kingsport, Tenn., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,491
Int. a.i'C08L 23/12
U.S. a. 523—521 4 Qaims
1. Composition comprising polypropylene, about 10-60%
by weight based on the weight of polypropylene, of talc, and
about 0.5-3.0% based on the weight of polypropylene of an
amorphous copolyester derived from at least 50 mole percent
terephthalic acid, and at least 50 mole percent ethylene glycol
and about 20-50 mole percent diethylene glycol or 1,4-
cyclohexanedimethanol, said copolyester characterized by
having a glass transition temperature of about 40°-85° C. and
an inherent viscosity of about 0.2-10.
4,381,357
COVERING, A PROCESS OF PRODUONG IT AND THE
USE THEREOF
Walter von der Wettem, Bergisch-Gladbach-Sand, and Harald
Albrecht, Cologne, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Gebr. von der Wettem GmbH, Koln-Deutz, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,185
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 3,
1980, 3037390
Int. a.3 C08L 95/00
U.S. a. 524—68 12 Claims
1. A road covering comprising a mixture of mineral fillers, 5
to 30% by weight of small particles of reclaimed rubber and a
4,381,358
COPOLYESTER-CARBONATES CONTAINING
ALIPHATIC DIOL CO-MONOMERS
Niles R. Rosenquist, Evansnile, Ind., assignor to General Elec-
trie Co., Mt. Vemon, Ind.
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,318
Int. a.3 C08G 63/64
U.S. O. 524—114 28 Qaims
1. A copolyester-carbonate resin comp>osition exhibiting
improved processability comprised of the polymerized reac-
tion product of:
(i) at least one dihydric phenol;
(ii) a carbonyl halide carbonate precursor;
(iii) at least one difunctional carboxylic acid or a reactive
derivative thereof; and
(iv) a processability improving amount of at least one bish-
aloformate represented by the formula
O O
II II
X— C— O— (R)— O— C— X
wherein X represents a halide radical and R represents an
alkylene radical containing from 2 to about 20 carbon atoms.
4,381,359
STABILIZED THERMOPLASTIC MOULDING
COMPOSITIONS
Karsten Idel; Hans-Josef Buysch; Dieter Margotte, all of Kre-
feld, and Horst Peters, Leverkusen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 169,305, Jul. 16, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,797
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 19,
1979, 2929229
Int. Q.J C08K 5/52
U.S. Q. 524—117 2 Qaims
1. A stabilized thermoplastic moulding composition com-
prising a mixture of
(1) from 10 to 90 parts by weight of a polycarbonate of an
aromatic dihydroxy compound and
(2) from 90 to 10 parts by weight of a mixture of
(a) from 25 to 100 paris by weight of graft copolymer
comprising styrene, methyl methacrylate or a mixture
thereof as one constituent and acrylonitrile, methacry-
lonitrile or a mixture thereof as the other constituent
polymerized on a rubber;
(b) from 0 to 20 parts by weight of a butadiene polymer
having a butadiene content of at least 5% by weight and
(c) from 0 to 75 parts by weight of a copolymer of at least
one monomer selected from the group consisting of
styrene, a-methyl styrene and mixtures thereof and
another monomer selected from the group consisting of
methyl methacrylate, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile
and mixtures thereof,
said composition containing 0.01 to 3% by weight, based on
the mixture of (1) and (2) of a phosphite of the formula
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
973
.OH
4,381,360
1,3-DICARBONYL COMPOUNDS AND POLYVINYL
HALIDE RESIN COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THE
SAME
William E. Leistner, Atlantic Beach, N.Y.; Motonobu
Minagawa, Kosigaya, Japan; Koiyi Tsuruga, Omiya, Japan,
and Masashi Harada, Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Phoenix
Chemical Corporation, Atlantic Beach, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,064
Int. a.3 C08K 5/57. 5/10. 5/09
U.S. a. 524-178 48 Qaims
1. A polyvinyl halide resin composition having improved
resistance to deterioration by light and/or when heated at 350°
F., comprising a polyvinyl halide resin formed at least in part
of the recurring group:
— CH— C—
I I
Xi
X2
and having a halogen content in excess of 40%, where Xi is
halogen and X2 is either hydrogen or halogen, and a 1,3-dicar-
bonyl compound having the formula:
O
N
C-C(Ri)2-C-R2
COOR3
wherein:
Ri is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
groups having from one to about eighteen carbon atoms;
cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkylene, and alkylcycloalkyl
groups having from five to about eighteen carbon atoms;
and aryl, aralkyl and alkaryl groups having from six to
about eighteen carbon atoms; and such groups substituted
with one or more groups selected from the group consist-
ing of halogen, hydroxy, and alkoxy having from one to
about eighteen carbon atoms;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl groups
having from one to about eighteen carbon atoms; cycloal-
kyl, cycloalkylalkylene, and alkylcycloalkyl groups hav-
ing from five to about eighteen carbon atoms; and aryl,
aralkyl and alkaryl groups having from six to about eigh-
teen carbon atow; ind such groups substituted with one
or more groups selected from the group consisting of
halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy ORi, ester COORi, alkyl and
alkoxycarbonyl alkyl having one to about eighteen carbon
atoms; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
groups having from one to about eighteen carbon atoms;
cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkylene, and alkylcycloalkyl
groups having from five to about eighteen carbon atoms;
and aryl, aralkyl and alkaryl groups having from six to
about eighteen carbon atoms; and such groups substituted
with one or more groups selected from the group consist-
ing of halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy ORj and ester COORi,
having from one to about eighteen carbon atoms or the
corresponding metal enolate salt thereof.
•wherein R3 is C1-C9 alkyl, Cj-Ce cycloalkyl, C7-C9 aralkyl or
C6-C10 aryl; R* is benzyl, methylbenzyl, dimethyl benzyl,
methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, tertiary butyl, tertiary amyl, isononyl,
cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl and Y is S or HCR' wherein R' is
hydrogen, Ci-Ce alkyl, cyclohexenyl or cyclohexyl.
4,381,361
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE MOULDING COMPOSITION
Dietrich K. A. Hardt, deceased, late of LeTcrkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany (by Helga Hardt, heir); Fritz Mietzich, Cologne,
and Otto Billinger, Linz, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Bayer AktiengescUschaft, Leverknsen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Oct 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,620
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Not, 3.
1980, 3041231
Int a.^ C08K 5/54
U.S. a. 524-265 2 Claims
1. A notched-impact-resistant moulding composition having
a low shrinkage value selected from the group consisting of
I. a mixture consisting of (a) from 99 to 85% by weight of
polyvinyl chloride, (b) from 1 to 15% by weight of ethy-
lene-vinyl aceute copolymer containing from 25 to 60%
by weight of vinyl acetate and having a molecular weight
of from 20,000 to 500,000 and (c) from 0.01 to 5% by
weight, based on the total weight of (a) plus (b), of a
polysiloxane;
II. a mixture consisting of a graft polymer of 3 to 15% by
weight of ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer containing
from 25 to 60% by weight of vinyl aceute and having a
molecular weight of from 20,000 to 500,000 having
grafted thereon from 97 to 85% by weight of polymerized
units of vinyl chloride and from 0.01 to 5% by weight,
based on the weight of said graft polymer, of a polysilox-
ane and
III. a mixture consisting of polyvinyl chloride, a graft poly-
mer of from 60 to 4% by weight of ethylene-vinyl aceute
copolymer containing from 25 to 60% by weight of vinyl
aceute and having a molecular weight of from 20,000 to
500,000 having grafted thereon from 40 to 96% by weight
of polymerized units of vinyl chloride, the total content of
said ethylene-vinyl aceute copolymer in said mixture
being from 3 to 15% by weight, based on the weight of
polyvinyl chloride and said graft polymer, and from 0.0 1
to 5% by weight, based on the total polyvinyl chloride
and graft polymer, of a polysiloxane,
said polysiloxane of each of I, II and III being selected from
the group consisting of polydimethylsiloxane having methyl
terminal groups and a viscosity of 20 cSt; polydimethylsiloxane
having methyl terminal groups and a viscosity of 140 cSt;
polymethylphenylsiloxane having methyl terminal groups and
a viscosity of 350 cSt; polymethylphenylsiloxane having
methyl terminal groups and a viscosity of 1,000 cSt; polydi-
methylsiloxane having OH terminal groups and a molecular
weight MW of 90,000 and polydimethylsiloxane having vinyl
terminal groups and a molecular weight MW of 500,000.
974
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,362
FLAME RETARDANT POLYMERIC COMPOSITIONS
CAPABLE OF PASSING THE CSA VARNISH TEST
James W. Biggs. Lebanon, and Melvin F, Maringer, Cincinnati,
both of Ohio, assignors to National Distillers A Chemical
Corp., New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 185,461, Sep. 9, 1980, abandoned. This
application Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,188
Int. a.3 C08K 5/38
U.S. a. 524—305 19 Qaims
1. A crosslinkable polymeric composition capable of passing
the CSA varnish test which comprises:
(a) a polymeric component containing at least 66% by
weight of a copolymer of ethylene and a vinyl ester of a
C2-C6 aliphatic carboxylic acid, a Ci-Cealkyl acrylate or
a Ci-Ca alkyl methacrylate,
(b) from 80 to 400 parts of hydrated inorganic filler per 100
parts of the polymer component,
(c) 0.5 to 5 parts of an alkoxy silane per 100 parts of hydrated
inorganic filler, and
(d) an amount effective to enable said polymeric composi-
tion to pass the CSA varnish test of an antioxidant compo-
sition comprising at least 25% distearyl-3,3'-thiodipro-
pionate.
consists essentially of the following sequential steps (a) subject-
ing to emulsion polymerization a mixture of starting monomers
comprising the whole amount of the aliphatic conjugated diene
monomer, the whole amount of the ethylenically unsaturated
carboxylic acid monomer and a portion of the monoolefinic
monomer, the combined amount of them being from 45 to 99%
by weight on the basis of the total amount of the starting
monomers, and (b) after conversion of said starting monomers
reaches 70% or more the remainder of the monoolefinic mono-
mer in an amount of from 1 to 55% by weight of the basis of
the total amount of the starting monomers is added to the
reaction mixture, whereupon further emulsion polymerization
is carried out; and wherein in each step said monoolefinic
monomer is selected from the group consisting of styrene and
mixtures of styrene with another monoolefinic monomer.
4,381,363
CURE RETARDING ADDITIVES FOR
ACETYLENE-TERMINATED POLYMERS
Theodore J. Reinhart, Jr., Dayton, Ohio, assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Air
Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,838
Int. a.3 C08G 73/10. 73/12
U.S. a. 524—324 8 Qaims
1. A curable polymeric composition composed of a mixture
of a major amount of an acetylene-terminated polymeric resin
and a minor amount of a cure retarding additive selected from
the group consisting of napthol, napthalenediol, monohydrox-
yanthraquinone, dihydroxyanthraquinone and 2-chloro-l, 4-
dihydroxybenzene.
4,381,364
FLAME RETARDANT TERTIARY POLYMER BLEND
Costas N. Georgacopoulos, Berlin, and Curtis P. Smith, Chesh-
ire, both of Conn., assignors to The Upjohn Company, Kala-
mazoo, Mich.
Filed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 387,799
Int. a.' C08K 5/06; C08L 75/06. 75/08
U.S. a. 524—373 15 Qaims
1. A thermoplastic composition comprising a blend of about
50 to about 85 percent by weight of a thermoplastic polyure-
thane and the balance of the blend comprising (a) a polyvinyl
halide resin and (b) a diene-nitrile copolymer, the weight ratio
of (a) to (b) being within the range of from about 1 :4 to about
1.5:1.
4,381,365
COPOLYMER LATEX AND ITS PRODUCTION
Saburo Mishiba; Junkoh Hyoda, both of Niihama; Akira
Uchida, Nara; Hisao Usami, Izumi, and Akira Watanabe,
Yao, all of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Naugatuck Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Continaation of Ser. No. 187,883, Sep. 17, 1980, abandoned. This
application Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,519
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1979, 54-120998;
Sep. 19, 1979, 54-121123
Int. a.5 C08F 279/02
VJS. a. 524—460 13 Claims
1. A process for preparing a copolymer latex by polymeriza-
tion of at least one aJiphatic conjugated diene monomer, at
least one ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid mononier
and at least one monoolefinic monomer copolymerizable with
them in a weight proportion of 19.5-80:0.5-10:10-80, which
4,381,366
FIBRE REINFORCED POLY AMIDE MOULDING
COMPOUNDS
John R. Sanderson; Rudolf Binsack; Dietrich Michael, and
Heirtrich Bonten, all of Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 163,693, Jun. 27, 1980, abandoned.
This application May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,957
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 3,
1979, 2926778
Int. a.5 C08L 77/00, 51/00
U.S. a. 524—504 4 Qaims
1. Polyamide moulding blends comprising
(1) polyamide,
(2) 10 to 60% by weight of fibres, glass pellets, or mixtures
thereof
(3) 0 to 20% by weight of other usual additives and
(4) 1 to 30% by weight of graft products consisting of
(a) 70 to 99% by weight of a homopolymer of aliphatic
and/or aromatic monoolefines or mixtures thereof or a
copolymer of these olefines, up to 50% by weight of
other monoolefinically unsaturated compounds capable
of radical- polymerisation and/or up to 5% by weight of
diolefines or mixtures thereof as graft substrate and
(b) 1 to 30% by weight of grafted units of
(a) 0 to 100% by weight of a,;3-unsaturated acids corre-
sjxjnding to the general formula
R- R3 (I)
\ /
c=c
r2 c— o-h
N
o
in which Ri, R2 and R3 which may be the same or
different represent hydrogen, a Ci to C5 alkyl group,
a C6 to C12 aryl group or a C7 to C13 alkylaryl group;
03) 0 to 100% by weight of esters of the unsaturated
acid of formula (I) having 1 to 8 carbon atoms in the
alcohol moiety,
(y) 0 to 30% by weight of acrylamide and/or
(6) 0 to 30% by weight of acrylonitrile or styrene, or
mixtures thereof
wherein the sum of 1, to 4, and of a, to b and of a, to 8, must
in each case be 100% by weight, characterised in that the graft
products have a peroxide graft (as OOH) of 0 to 5000 ppm and
have been prepared by bringing the molten graft substrate (a)
into contact with oxygen or oxygen-conuining gases for a
maximum of 10 minutes under conditions of vigorous mixing at
a pressure of 1 to 150 bar and a temperature of 80" to 300' C,
the monomers (b) which are to be grafted on the graft substrate
are added immediately thereafter under conditions of vigorous
mixing under pressure with exclusion of oxygen or oxygen-
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
975
containing gases, and the residual monomers are removed after
graft polymerisation.
4,381,367
SIZING AGENTS FOR PAPER AND A PROCESS FOR
THE PRODUCTION THEREOF
Wulf von Bonin, Leverkusen; Peter MummenhofT, Cologne, and
Heinz Baumgen, Leverkusen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,009
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 12,
1980, 3046906; Dec. 12, 1980, 3046980; Dec. 12, 1980, 3046981
Int. a.3 C08F 8/32
U.S. a. 524-549 5 Oaims
1. A paper sizing agent in the form of an aqueous preparation
of a maleic acid anhydride copolymer whose anhydride groups
have been reacted with from 0.2 to 10 times the molar quantity
of ammonia or a primary-tertiary diamine whose primary and
tertiary amino groups are separated by a linear or branched
chain having 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the resultant reaction
product is subsequently reacted with epichlorohydrin or acetic
acid, said copolymers containing polymerized units of
(a) from 5 to 75% by weight of styrene,
(b) from 10 to 75% by. weight of a Ci-Cig alkyl ester of
acrylic acid, a C1-C18 alkyl ester of methacrylic acid or a
mixture thereof,
(c) from 5 to 30% by weight of maleic acid anhydride,
(d) from 0 to 25% by weight of acrylonitrile, an a-olefin or
a mixture thereof and
(e) from 0.1 to 10% by weight, based on the weight of (a)-
(d), of 1,2,5,6-tetrahydrobenzaldehyde, the benzyl enol
ether of 1,2,5,6-tetrahydrobenzaldehyde or a mixture of
3-methyl and 4-methyl 1,2,5,6-tetrahydrobenzaldehyde.
4,381,368
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
UREA-FORMALDEHYDE RESINS
Harold N. Spurlock, 2031 Woodland Rd., Petersburg, Va. 23805
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,303
Int. a.^ C08L 61/20
U.S. a. 524—598 2 Claims
1. A process comprising mixing an aqueous solution of form-
aldehyde and urea in a mole ratio of from 2.0: 1 to 2.2:1, adjust-
ing the pH to from 6. 1 to 7.0, heating the mixture at from 90'
to 100" C. for from 20 to 40 minutes, while at this temperature
adjusting the pH to from 4.5 to 5.5, adding from 0.06 to 0.13
mole of additional urea per mole of formaldehyde originally
present, continuing heating the mixture until the viscosity of
the reaction mixture is from about W to about Y on the Gard-
ner-Holt scale, adjusting the pH of the reaction mixture to
from 6.8 to 7.2, cooling the reaction mixture to from 30* to 70°
C, adding from 0.1 to 0.3 mole urea per mole of formaldehyde
originally present, cooling the reaction mixture to from 30' to
40" C, and adding from 0.05 to 0.2 mole of formaldehyde per
mole of formaldehyde originally present and from 0.1 to 0.3
mole of urea per mole of formaldehyde originally present to
bring the total mole ratio of formaldehyde to urea to from 1.05
to 1.15 whereby a urea-formaldehyde resin containing less than
0.2 ppm free formaldehyde is produced.
4381,369
DRILLING FLUID CONTAINING A FLUID LOSS
CONTROL AGENT OF A SULFONATED
PHENOL-FORMALDEHYDE-PHENOL RESIN
Howard W. Holmquist, Bellingham, Wash., assignor to Georgia-
Pacific Corporation, Atlanta, Ga.
Division of Ser. No. 153,608, May 27, 1930, Pat. No. 4,322,300.
This application Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,237
Int. a.^ C08L 61/08; C08G 8/18
U.S. a. 524-841 2 Claims
1. A water-soluble sulfonated phenol-formaldehyde-phenol
resin prepared by
(a) reacting phenol sulfonic acid with formaldehyde in an
aqueous medium at a pH in the range of 8 to 9.5 until from
about 0.9 to 1.3 moles of formaldehyde per mole of phenol
sulfonic acid has reacted with the phenol sulfonic acid,
(b) adding phenol to the pre-reacted mixture in a mole ratio
of 0.5 to 0.7 moles of phenol per mole of phenol sulfonic
acid and reacting the resulting mixture in the presence of
formaldehyde and additional alkali until a cloud point is
obtained at a pH in the range of 10 to 1 1, said formalde-
hyde being present in the resulting mixture in an amount
such that the mole ratio of the sum of formaldehyde pres-
ent in the resulting reaction mixture and the formaldehyde
reacted with the phenol sulfonic acid is in the range of
from 1 to 1.6 per mole of the sum of the phenol sulfonic
acid and the added phenol, and
(c) adding additional alkali and continuing the reaction at a
pH in the range of 1 1 to 12 until the viscosity of the final
reaction mixture is at least 30 cps at a solids concentration
of about 45 to 50% at 25° C.
4,381,370
METHOD FOR PRODUONG HRE-RETARDED
CELLULOSIC FIBERS AND HRE-RETARDED
CELLULOSIC HBERS
Olli Aaltonen; Martti Alkio, both of Espoo; Eero Avela, and
Riitta-Maga Housh, both of Helsinki, all of Finland, assign-
ors to The Technical Research Centre of Finland, Espoo,
Finland
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 246,102
Qaims priority, application Finland, Mar. 28, 1980, 800963
Int. a.J DOIF 8/02
U.S. a. 525-54.21 6 Qaims
1. A method of producing fire-retarded blend fibers having
a fire resistance LOI-value of at least 21% O2, from cellulose
which consists of forming a solution of cellulose of about 7%
content in dimethyl sulfoxide/formaldehyde, mixing said solu-
tion with at least one chlorine-containing polymer, having a
chlorine content of at least 30% but not more than 75% by
weight to yield a non-gellable blend with at least 10% but not
more than 70% by weight of at least one said chlorine-contain-
ing polymer, based on the total amount of cellulose and at least
one said chlorine-containing polymer, extruding the blend
through a spinnerette, into contact with a coagulating bath of
an aqueous or alcoholic solution whereby fire retarded blend
fibers are obtained.
4,381,371
POLYMER MIXTURES
Werner Nielinger, Bert Brassat; Rudolf Binsack, and Dieter
Neuray, all of Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 121,368, Feb. 14, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,567
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 17,
1979, 2906222
Int. Q.J C08L 77/00. 55/02
U.S. Q. 525—66 3 Qains
1. A polymer composition comprising:
(I) from 95 to 70%, by weight, of one or more amorphous
polyamides; and
976
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
(II) from 5 to 30%, by weight, of one or more graft polymers
consisting of
(a) as graft base, from 50 to 90%, by weight, of a polymer
of butadiene and optionally up to 30%, by weight, of
one or more a,)3-unsaturated monomers; and
(b) as a grafted unit, from 5 to 55%, by weight, of styrene
and acrylonitrile.
-continued
4,381,372
POLYMERS DERIVED FROM
4-BIS(CARBALKOXYETHYL).PHOSPHINOXY-2,2,6,6-
TETRAMETHYLPIPERIDINE
Frank F. LofTelman, Bridgewater, N.J., assignor to American
Cyanamid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,115
Int. aJ C08G 69/26; C08L 23/12
U.S. a. 525—181 12 Qaims
1. A composition of matter represented by formula (I):
RO-
O
O O R' r5
n II I I
C— CH2CH2— P— CH2CH2C— N— X— N-
H
R^
N
I'
H
R3
(I)
•H
wherein R represents hydrogen, Ci-Cig alkyl, or benzyl; R',
R2, and R^ independently represent hydrogen Ci-Ce alkyl,
benzyl, or phenethyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon to
which they are attached form a C5-C10 cycloalkyl; R* is hy-
drogen, C1-C6 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxyl; R' is hydrogen, C1-C6
alkyl, or
N—R*
H r3
wherein R', R^, R^, and R* are as previously defined; X is
C2-C12 alkylene optionally interrupted by an oxy, thio, or
R»
I
— N—
radical; or X is Cs-Ciocycloalkylene,
-CH2— / VcH2-.
— CH2CH2
-/ \-CH2CH2-,
_/ \_ CH2CH2— ^ V.
:h2-/ y-CH2— ^ V-CH2-.
H2CH2— ^ N— CH2-/ V-CH2,
:H2-/ y-CH2CH2-/ >— CH:
C6-C12 arylene, or Cg-Cu aralkylene; and, n is an integer
greater than 1.
5. A method for stabilizing a polymer which is normally
subject to degradation by ultraviolet radiation which com-
prises incorporating into said polymer an ultraviolet stabiliz-
ingly effective amount of a stabilizer of claim 1.
4,381,373
HEAT RESISTANT RESIN COMPOSITION
Sadao Ikuma, Suzuka, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi Monsanto
Chemical Company, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 323,078
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 11, 1980, 55/175116;
Feb. 9, 1981, 56/17776
Int. a.^ C08L 25/12, 33/24, 25/08
U.S. a. 525—194 7 Qaims
1. A heat resistant resin composition which consists essen-
tially of 10 to 90 wt. % of a copolymer (A) having 15 to 50
wt.parts of N-phenylmaleimide component, 85 to 40 wt.parts
of a vinyl aromatic monomer component and 0 to 30 wt.parts
of a vinyl comonomer component to be 100 wt.parts in total,
which is obtained by imidization of vinyl aromatic/maleic
anhydride copolymer with an aromatic amine; and 90 to 10 wt.
% of a copolymer (B) having 15 to 30 wt.parts of a cyanovinyl
monomer component, 85 to 65 wt.parts of a vinyl aromatic
monomer component and 0 to 30 wt.parts of vinyl comonomer
component.
4,381,374
HALOGENATION OF BUTADIENE POLYMERS IN
MIXED SOLVENTS
Patrick E. Hillman, Corpus Christi, Tex., assignor to PPG
Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Not. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,983
Int. a.3 C08F 8/22
U.S. a. 525—356 24 Claims
1. In a process for producing substantially thermoplastic
halogenated butadiene polymer wherein butadiene polymer
dissolved in liquid organic solvent is reacted with chlorine,
bromine or a mixture thereof, the improvement wherein
a. said solvent consists essentially of a mixture of one or
more prehalogenated alkanes having one to about two
carbon atoms and one or more partially halogenated al-
kanes having one to about two carbon atoms,
b. fine particles of said substantially thermoplastic haloge-
nated butadiene polymer having a solubility index of at
least about 50 precipitate from said solvent during said
reaction, and
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
977
c. said precipitated flne particles are separated from the bulk
of said solvent.
4,381,375
METHOD FOR VULCANIZING ETHYLENE/ACRYLIC
OR VINYL ESTER/GLYaDYIXMETH) ACRYLATE
COPOLYMER WITH PIPERAZINIUM DIPHENOXIDE
SALT OF CHLORO-SUBSTTTUTED PHENOL
Leon L. HarreU, Jr., Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,894
Int. C1.3 C08L 33/08
U.S. a. 525— 359.2 12 Oaims
1. A vulcanizable elastomeric composition comprising a
copolymer consisting essentially of copolymerized units of:
(a) 25-65 weight percent of a comonomer selected from the
group consisting of acrylic and vinyl ester, provided that
the acrylic ester is other than glycidyl acrylate and glyci-
dyl methacrylate,
(b) 2-10 weight precent of a cure-site monomer selected
from the group consisting of glycidyl acrylate and glyci-
dyl methacrylate,
(c) 0-15 weight percent carbon monoxide,
(d) a complemental amount of ethylene from 30-70 weight
percent,
and a curing agent selected from the group consisting of
piperazinium diphenoxide salts of chloro-substituted phenols.
4.381,376
PREPARATION OF LOW MOLECULAR WEIGHT
COPOLYMER SALTS
Paul J. Albee, Jr., Bensalem, Pa.; Patricia E. Burdick, Lake
Hiawatha, and Joseph I. Wrozina, Tenafly, both of N.J.,
assignors to Allied Corporation, Morris Township, Morris
County, N.J.
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,872
Int. a.3 C08F 8/44
U.S. a. 525—366 39 Qaims
1. A method of making ionic copolymer salts from copoly-
mer acids formed from ethylene and an alpha,beta-ethyleni-
cally unsaturated carboxylic acid having at least one carbox-
ylic acid group, the copolymer acid having a number average
molecular weight of from 500 to 5000, and at least 50 mol
percent ethylene, the copolymer acid being neutralized by
cations selected from a group having a valence of 1 to 3, com-
prising the steps of:
feeding the copolymer acid and a cation containing material to
a reacting vessel;
maintaining a vacuum in the reaction vessel;
mixing the reacting mixture within the reaction vessel; and
maintaining the temperature within the reaction vessel above
the melting point of the copolymer acid.
4,381,377
HOMO- OR COPOLYMERS OF 1,3-DIENES CARRYING
REACnVE SILYL GROUPS, THEIR PREPARATION
AND USE
Wolfgang Kampf, Haltem; Roland Streck, and Horst-guenter
Haag, both of Marl, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Chemiscbe Werke Huels, AG, Marl, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,483
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 2,
1980, 3003893
Int. a.J C07F 7/10. 7/18. 7/04 '
U.S. CI. 525—375 10 Claims
1. A homo- or copolymer of a 1,3-diene bound to reactive
silyl groups, whereby it contains 0.4-12% by weight of bound
silicon,
prepared by reacting, at a temperature of 190-300° C, a
1,3-diene homo- or coi>olymer, with more than 1% of its
aliphatic double bonds in conjugation and having a molec-
ular weight (Mn) of 400-6,000, with a silane of the formula
X
/
R— Si— Y
\
Z
wherein
R is an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon radical of 2-20
carbon atoms,
X is halogen, Ci-6alkoxy, Ci-6alkoxyalkoxy, Cfr-i2aryloxy,
Ci-8 alkanoyloxy, C|-6 ketoximato, C1-12 hydrocar-
bylamido,
Y and Z are independently one of the X groups, hydrogen,
alky] of 1-8 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 5-12 carbon
atoms, or optionally substituted phenyl.
4,381,378
METHOD FOR VULCANIZING ETHYLENE/ACRYLIC
OR VINYL ESTER/GLYaDYUMETH)ACRYLATE
COPOLYMER WITH PIPERAZINIUM
DICARBOXYLATE SALT AND COMPOSITION FOR
SAME
Leon L. Harrell, Jr., Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,893
Int. a.3 C08L 33/08
U.S. a. 525—375 12 Qaims
1. A vulcanizable elastomeric composition comprising a
copolymer consisting essentially of copolymerized units of:
(a) 25-65 weight percent of a comonomer selected from the
group consisting of acrylic and vinyl esters, provided that
the acrylic ester is other than glycidyl acrylate and glycidyl
methacrylate,
(b) 2-10 weight percent of a cure-site monomer selected from
the group consisting of glycidyl acrylate and glycidyl meth-
acrylate,
(c) 0-15 weight percent carbon monoxide, and
(d) a complemental amount of ethylene from 30-70 weight
percent,
and a curing agent selected from the group consisting of
piperazinium dicarboxylate salts derived from the acids with
pKa values in the range of 4.0-5.2.
4,381,379
POLYESTER CONTAINING
2-METHYL-l,3-PROPYLENE TEREPHTHALATE UNITS
Yuzo Toga; Toshio Shimada, and Hi^ime Komada, all of Himeji,
Japan, assignors to Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,493
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 25, 1981, 56-44286;
Apr. 15, 1981, 56-56766
Int. CI.3 O08F 283/00, 283/02: C08G 63/76
U.S. a. 525—444 9 Claims
7. A polyester resin composition which comprises a blend of
a first resin which consists essentially of polytetramethylene
terephthalate and a second resin which consists essentially of a
member selected from the group consisting of (a) poly-2-meth-
yl-l,3-propylene terephthalate resin, (b) a copolyester obtained
by copolymerizing terephthalic acid with 2-methyl-l,3-
propanediol and tetramethylene glycol, and (c) mixtures of (a)
and (b), said blend containing from 0. 1 to 25 percent by weight,
of 2-methyl-l,3-propylene terephthalate units.
1029 O.G.— 43
978
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,380
THERMOPLASTIC POLYURETHANE ARTICLE
TREATED WITH IODINE FOR ANTIBACTERIAL USE
Harry H. LeVeen; Jeanette L. Rubricius, both of 321 Confeder-
ate Cir., Charleston, S.C. 29407; Eric G. LeVeen, 3-3 Wood-
lake Rd., Albany, N.Y. 12203, and Robert F. UVeen, 312
Lombard St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19147
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,432
Int. a.^ C08G 18/83; A61M 25/00; A61K 31/74; C08G 71/02
U.S. a. 525—452 18 Qaims
1. A polymeric bacteriocidal shaped form for medical use
comprising a thermoplastic, sparingly cross-linked polyure-
thane having — NH— {C=0)— O— urethane linkages and/or
urea linkages — NH— (C=0)— NH— and iodine complexed
therewith, said complexed linkages being formed within said
polyurethane so that said iodine provides bacteriocidal proper-
ties to said polyurethane, said bacteriocidal properties being at
least sufficient to inhibit growth of 5. Aureus and Proteus Vul-
garis type bacteria, said polyurethane having an average mo-
lecular weight between 35,000 and 50,000, an ultimate elonga-
tion of 200 to 800 percent and a Shore A scale hardness of 60
to 95, said polyurethane being molded into said shaped medical
article and thereafter being treated with a solution of iodine to
increase the amount of iodine complexed at the linkage sites.
8. The method of producing the shaped form of claim 1,
comprising shaping the said polyurethane and contacting the
preformed shape with a solution of iodine.
4,381,381
HYDROCARBONACEOUS RESINS, METHOD FOR
THEIR PREPARATION AND MEANS THEREFOR
Giuseppe Ferraris, and Sebastiano Cesca, both of San Donato
Milanese, Italy, assignors to Anic S.p.A., Palermo, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 16,431, Mar. 1, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,206
Qaims priority, application Italy, Apr. 12, 1978, 22219 A/78
Int. a.^ C08F 2/00. 110/00
U.S. a. 526—75 14 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of hydrocarbonaceous
resins from C5 hydrocarbon fractions containing at least 22%
by weight of cis-piperylene comprising passing a hydrocarbo-
naceous fraction exiting a steam-cracker to a dimerizer and
subsequently to a plurality of distillation columns, separating
said hydrocarbonaceous fraction into light components and
heavy components, passing said heavy components through a
rectification column, recovering as heads a fraction containing
a high percenUge of cis-piperylene and trans-piperylene, intro-
ducing the heads fraction into a polymerization reactor with
butadiene and forming a copolymer of butadiene and transpi-
perylene, removing said copolymer and unreacted butadiene
from the polymerization reaction and obtaining a C5 hydrocar-
bon fraction enriched with at least 22% by weight of cis-
piperylene, polymerizing the enriched C5 hydrocarbon frac-
tion in the presence of a catalyst selected from an aluminum
halide of the formula AIX3, wherein X is a halogen atom or an
organic metallic compound of aluminum having the general
formula:
"mAiXs — wf
wherein X is a halogen atom, R is hydrogen or a monovalent
alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyi, aralkyl, alkaryl, alkoxy or ester radical
having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms and m is a number from 1
and 3, in a solvent selected from the group consisting of aro-
matic hydrocarbon solvents and aliphatic, halogen-substituted
hydrocarbon solvents containing from 1 to 12 carbon atoms
and obtaining a hydrocarbonaceous resin adhesive enriched
with cis-piperylene having a softening point from below 20° C.
up to 140" C.
4381,382
POLYMERIZATION OF OLEFINS FROM CATALYSTS
PREPARED FROM ORGANO ZIRCONIUM-CHROMIUM
COMPOUNDS
Randall S. Shipley, Alrin, and Fred L. Vance, Lake Jackson,
both of Tex., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Mid-
land, Mich.
FUed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,233
Int. a.5 C08F 4/02. 10/00
U.S. a. 526—97 13 Qaims
1. A process for polymerizing one or more a-oleflns which
comprises conducting polymerization under Ziegler polymeri-
zation conditions in the presence of a catalyst which comprises
(A) the reaction product of
(1) at least one zirconium compound represented by the
empirical formula (RO);„ZrX4 - m wherein R is a mono-
valent hydrocarbyl group having from 1 to about 20
carbon atoms, X is chlorine or bromine and m has a
value from 0 to 4; and
(2) an inorganic oxygen-containing chromium compound
in a mole ratio of component (2) to component (1) of
from about 0.05:1 to about 6:1;
(B) a solid catalyst support containing magnesium;
(C) a tetrahydrocarbyloxy titanium or titanium halide com-
pound; and
(D) an organometallic activating agent;
wherein the Mg:Cr atomic ratio is from about 1:1 to about
200:1, the AI:Cr atomic ratio is from about 1:1 to about 250:1;
the Cr:Ti atomic ratio is from about 0.1:1 to about 50:1; and the
excess X:A1 atomic ratio is from about 0.005 to about 10:1.
4,381,383
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING POLYOLEnNS
Masayoshi Hasuo, Yokohama; Yoshinori Suga, Machida;
Masatoshi Suzuki, Fujisawa; Nobuaki Goko, and Yasuhiro
Nishihara, both of Kurashiki, all of Japan, assignors to Mit-
subishi Chemical Industries Limited, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,602
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 2, 1980, 55-59295
Int. Q.3 C08F 4/64. 10/04
U.S. Q. 526—142 H Claims
1. A process for producing a highly stereoregular olefm
polymer, comprising:
polymerizing an olefin in the vapor phase in the presence of
a catalytic system composed of a (1) solid titanium trichlo-
ride containing material of the formula: TiCl3.(AlR'yPC3-
p)s(.C)t wherein R' is a hydrocarbon group of 1-20 carbon
atoms, X represents halogen, p is a value of 0=p=2, s is
a value of no more than 0. 15, C is a complexing agent and
t is at least 0.001; (2) an organoaluminum compound of the
formula:
AlRn^Cb _ „ wherein R* is a C 1 -C20 hydrocarbon group and
n is a value of 1.95-2. 10; (3) an aromatic hydrocarbon and
(4) a monocarboxylic acid ester having an olefinic double
bond or an aromatic ring in the molecule thereof, the
molar ratio of the titanium trichloride: organoaluminum
compound: aromatic hydrocarbon: monocarboxylic acid
ester components ranging from 1:2-40:100-5000:0.05-2 in
a hydrocarbon solvent.
4,381,384
CONTINUOUS POLYMERIZATION PROCESS
Ausat A. Khan, Newark, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,333
Int. Q.3 C08F 2/00. 14/18
U.S. Q. 526—206 12 Claims
1. A continuous process for preparing tetrafluoroethylene
homopolymer or copolymers of tetrafluoroethylene and at
least one copolymerizable fluorinated ethylenically unsatu-
rated comonomer which comprises feeding tetrafluoroethyl-
ene alone or with at least one said comonomer present in an
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
979
amount sufficient to produce a comonomer unit content in the
copolymer of between 0.005 mole percent and 20 mole per-
cent, into an aqueous polymerization medium containing a free
radical initiator and 0.5-3.0 percent dispersing agent, based on
weight of aqueous medium, in which the dispersing agent is (1)
a mixture of compounds of the formula
F-(-CF2— CF„^-CH2— CH2— Y
wherein n is a cardinal number of 2-8 and the average value of
n is between 3 and 6, or (2) a compound of said formula
wherein n is a cardinal number selected from between 2-6; and
Y is — SO3M or — OSO3M' wherein M is a cation having the
valence of 1 and M' is an alkali metal cation or ammonium.
R'
\
I
R'
B— R<, or
\
I
/
B-Ro
wherein R' and R, separately or together, represent an ali-
phatic monocycle or dicycle with 3 to 25 carbon atoms and R^
is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and linear or
branched or cyclic hydrocarbon having from 3 to 1 5 carbon
atoms.
4,381,385
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF POLYMERS
AND COPOLYMERS BASED ON VINYL
CHLOROFORMATE
Sylvie L. Boileau, Paris; GiUes F. Meunier, Boulogne Billan-
court, and Sabine M. Journeau, Arp^jon, all of France, assign-
ors to Societe Nationale des Poudres et Explosifs, Paris,
France
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,483
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 7, 1980, 80 02651
Int. a.3 C08F 18/00
U.S. CI. 526—230.5 14 Qaims
11. An essentially colorless, transparent copolymer consist-
ing essentially of vinyl chloroformate and a vinylic monomer
which is a member selected from the group consisting of acry-
lonitrile, methyl methacrylat, styrene, vinyl chloride and vinyl
acetate which contains 0.5-50% of said chloroformate and
50-99.5% of said vinylic monomer, of number average molec-
ular weight of 8000-100,000 which is prepared by reacting
vinyl chloroformate and said vinylic monomer in the presence
of an initiator which is an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic percar-
bonate and wherein said percarbonate has the formula:
Ri— O— C— O— O— C— O— R2
II II
o o
in which R| and R2 are the same or different and are a linear or
branched alkyl containing from 3 to 8 carbon atoms or cyclo-
hexyl and isolating said copolymer from the reaction mixture.
4,381,387
QUATERPOLYMERS OF THE
TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE/ETHYLENE TYPE
Reinhard A. Sulzbach, Burghansen, Fed. Rep. of GenBany,
assignor to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,888
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 28,
1980, 3024456; Apr. 14, 1981, 3115030
Int. a.' C08F 18/20. 16/24. 14/18
U.S. a. 526—247 18 Clains
1. A thermoplastic fluorine-containing quaterpolymer hav-
ing a melting point between 245* and 280* C. measured as the
minimum of the melting curve by differential thermal analysis
and consisting essentially of copolymerized units, in mole
percent, of
(a) from 55% to 30% tetrafluoroethylene,
(b) from 60% to 40% ethylene,
(c) from 10% to 1.5% hexafluoropropylene, and
(d) from 2.5% to 0.05% of a vinyl monomer selected from
one of the classes consisting of
(di) perfluorinated olefins of the formula
CF2=CF— Rn
wherein RFl is a perfluoroalkyl group having from 2 to
10 carbon atoms,
(d2) perfluorinated vinyl ethers of the formula
CF2=CF— O— RfZ
wherein RfZ is a perfluoroalkyl group having from 2 to
10 carbon atoms,
(d3) perfluorinated vinyl ethers of the formula
CF2=CF— O— rCF2— CF— O "I — CF2— CF2— CF3
rCF2— CF— o -j
L "' J
4381386
POLYMERIZABLE ADHESIVES CONTAINING BORON
INITIATORS
Wolfgang Ritter, Diisseldorf, and Werner Gruber, Korschen-
Hroich, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Henkel
Kommanditgesellschaft auf Aktien, DUsseldorf-Holthausen,
htux. Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,444
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Not. 6,
1980 3041843
Int. a.' C08F 30/06. 130/06. 230/06
U.S. a. 526—239 6 Qaims
1. A two-component reaction adhesive consisting essentially
of a polymerizable system hardenable at room temperature and
containing polymerizable ethylenic double bonds and an
amont sufficient to initiate polymerization of an organoboron
compound with sterically hindering groups and containing at
least one boron-carbon bond or one boron-hydrogen bond and
having practically no spontaneous combustibility in air and
having the formula:
wherein n is an integer from 1 to 4,
(d4) perfluorinated vinyl ethers of the formula
CF2=CF— O— rCF2
?'
wherein n is 1 or zero,
(ds) perfluoro-2-methylene-4-methyl- 1 . 3-dioxolane,
(d6) perfluorinated vinyl ethers of the formula
CF2=CF-0— (CF2)„-COX 1
wherein Xi is F, OH, ORi, or NR2R3, Ri is an alkyl
group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R2 and R3 each
980
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
are H or identical with Ri, and n is an integer from 1 to
10.
(di) perfluorinated vinyl ethers of the formula
) — FCF2— CF— 0-=|— <
CF2=CF— O pCF2— CF— 0-=^CF2— CF2— X2
CF3
wherein X2 is COOR4, COOH, or CN, R4 is an alkyl
group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and n is an
integer from 1 to 4,
(dg) perfluoroalkyl -substituted vinyl compounds of the
formula
CH2=CH— RO
wherein Rf3 is a perfluoroalkyl group having from 2 to
10 carbon atoms,
(dg) 1.1.1 -trifluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-pentene-2-ol,
(dio) allyl-2-hydroxyhexafluoroisopropyl ether,
(dii) fluorinated allyl ethers of the formula
CH2=CR5— CH2— O— CF2— CFX3H
wherein X3 is F, CI or trifluoromethyl, and R5 is H or
CH3 and
(di2) fluorinated vinyl ethers of the formula
CH2=CH— O— CF2— CFX3H
wherein X3 is F, CI or trifluoromethyl.
4,381,388
STORAGE STABLE ONE COMPONENT URETHANES
AND METHOD FOR USING SAME
Gerald Naples, Hamburg, N.Y., assignor to Textron Inc., Provi-
dence, R.I.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,719
Int. a.3 C08G 18/10
U.S. a. 528—59 26 Qaims
1. A storage stable, weather resistant, one-component air
cured urethane composition which comprises a moisture acti-
vated curing agent and a polyisocyanate prepolymer, said
moisture activated curing agent comprising an oxazolidine ring
and said polyisocyanate prepolymer comprising at least two
unreacted isocyanate groups and being the reaction product of
a polyester polyol, a low molecular weight polyol having at
least three hydroxy groups at an equivalent weight ratio of
polyester polyol to low molecular weight polyol of from 0.25:1
to 5:1 and isophorone diisocyanate.
4,381,389
OPTICALLY ANISOTROPIC MELT FORMING
COPOLYESTERS
Robert S. Irwin, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Jul. IS, 1982, Ser. No. 398,563
Int. a.3 C08G 63/60
U.S. a. 528—128 9 Qaims
1. A copolyester consisting essentially of (a) Units I, 11, 111
and IV or (b) Units 1. 11 and 111, said units having the structural
formulas:
-continued
II
— o
III
Y—
— O
IV
where x is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
halo-, lower alkyl, and aryl, Y is selected from the group
consisting of oxygen and carbonyl and wherein said copolyes-
ters consisting essentially of Units 1, II, 111 and IV contain from
about 10 to 15 mole % of Unit 1, from about 10 to 20 mole %
of Unit II, from about 10 to 15 mole % of Unit 111 and from
about 50 to 70 mole % of Unit IV; and wherein said copolyes-
ters consisting essentially of Units 1, 11 and 111 contain from
about 40 to 45 mole % of Unit 1, from about 40 to 50 mole %
of Unit 11 and from about 10 to 15 mole % of Unit 111.
4,381,390
THERMOPLASTIC POLYPHOSPHONATOPHENYL
ESTER CARBONATE FROM
ARYLOXYCARBONYLOXY-BENZOIC AOD ARYL
ESTER AND PREPARATION THEREOF
Manfred Schmidt, New Martinsville, W. Va., and Ludwig Bot-
tenbnich, Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Mobay
Chemical Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa. and Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,360
Int. aJ C08G 63/32
U.S. a. 528—167 7 Oalms
1. A process for the preparation of thermoplastic aromatic
polyphosphonatophenyl ester carbonates comprising
(i) reacting a hydroxy benzoic acid with a molar excess of
diaryl carbonate of the structure
Ar— O— C— O— Ar
II
O
wherein Ar is an aryl radical, in the presence of an alkaline
or neutral transesterification catalyst, to obtain a arylox-
ycarbonyloxybenzoic acid aryl ester of the structure
(1)
COOAr
Ar— O— C— O
N
O
wherein Ar is as defined above, and
(ii) transesterifying said (1) with phosphonic acid diaryl ester
of the structure
.0-A-0-,
O (2)
r
Ar'— O— P— O— Ar'
I
R
wherein Ar'is a substituted or an unsubstituted aromatic
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
9^1
radical and R is selected from the group consisting of at
least one of C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C6-C30 cy-
cloalkenyl, C6-C30 aryl, C7-C30 arylalkyl or Cg-Cso ary-
lalkenyl and (3) a diphenol reactant in continuous contact
with said catalyst, at a temperature of about 80° to 400° C.
under vacuum, with the proviso that the molar amount of
said diphenol equals the total molar amount of said ( 1 ) and
said (2).
4,381,391
INTERFACTAL PROCESS FOR PREPARING
POLY AROMATIC ESTERS
Paul Y. Chen, Dayton, Ohio, and Carl S. Marvel, Tucson, Ariz.,
assignors to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 239,961
Int. a.3 C08G 63/24
U.S. a. 528—173 12 Qalms
1. A process for synthesizing polyaromatic esters which
comprises the steps of (A) forming a reaction mixture com-
posed of equi-molar proportions of (1) a mixture 2,2'-dii-
ododiphenyl-4,4'-dicarbonyl dichloride, isophthaloyl chloride,
and terephthaloyl chloride; and (2) a dihydric phenol selected
from the group consisting of 4,4'-isopropylidenediphenol,
4,4'-sulfonyldiphenol and resorcinol; (B) effecting a two-phase
condensation reaction between said (1) and (2) to form a reac-
tion product; and (C) separating the resultant reaction product.
4,381,392
METHOD FOR REMOVING CHLORINATED SOLVENTS
FROM CHLORINATED POLYMERS
Enrico Pontoglio, Brescia, Italy, assignor to Caffaro S.p.A.,
Milan, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 78,510, Sep. 24, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,206
Qaims priority, application Italy, Oct. 2, 1978, 28330 A/78;
Oct. 2, 1978, 51322 A/78
Int. a.3 C08F 6/00. 6/12
U.S. a. 528—493 9 Qaims
1. A method for removing chlorinated solvents contained in
chlorinated polymers comprising treating said chlorinated
polymer in dry powder form with an inert gas saturated with
acetone vapour.
O
, II
R'— C
X
R2
CH— NRJR*
— N
N— R6
wherein R^ is lower alkyl of 1-4 C, phenyl, halophenyl, meth-
ylphenyl, methoxyphenyl or trifluoromethylphenyl; and the
pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts and the lower
alkyl quartemary ammonium salts of the aforesaid compounds.
4,381,393
4-AMINOMETHYL-5-ACYL-l,3-DIHYDRO-2H.
IMIDAZOL-2-ONES
J. Martin Grisar, Richard A. Schnettler, and Richard C. Dage,
all of Cincinnati, Ohio, assignors to Merrell Dow Pharmaceu-
ticals Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,446
Int. a.3 C07D 40i/00, 401/00. 233/30
U.S. a. 544—370 10 Claims
1. A compound of the formula ^
4,381,394
6,7-DICHLORO-2-[(METHYL-2-PYR-
ROLIDYLIDENE)AMINO]-4.THIOCYANATOBENZO-
THIAZOLE
Robert J. Alaimo, Norwich, N.Y., assignor to Norwich ELaton
Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Norwich, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,898
Int. C1.3 COID 31/425; A61K 417/02
U.S. Q. 548—161 1 Qaim
1. The compound 6,7-dichloro-2-[(l-methyI-2-pyr-
rolidylidene)amino]-4-thiocyanatobenzothiazole.
4,381,395
PROCESS FOR PREPARING AN IMIDAZOLE
DERIVATIVE
Tsutomu Tenyi, Osaka; Yoshihani Nakai, Otsu, both of Japan,
and Graham J. Durant, Welwyn, England, assignors to SK A
F Lab Co., Carolina, P.R.
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,796
Int. a.3 C07D 233/64
U.S. a. 548—342 2 Qaims
1. A process for preparing an imidazole derivative of the
formula:
NCN
CH3^ ^CH2— S— CH2CH2— NH— C
HN N
which comprises
(1) reacting a compound of the formula:
CHa^^ ,CH2— S— CH2CH2— NH2
/=\
HN N
with a compound of the formula:
NH— CH3
^N . ^ N^
^ T *
o
wherein R is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1-4 C, lower alkanoyl of
2-4 C, or benzoyl; R' is lower alkyl of 1-4 C, phenyl, halo-
phenyl, methylphenyl, methoxyphenyl, methylsulfonylphenyl,
dimethylaminophenyl, dimethoxyphenyl, 3,4-methylenediox-
yphenyl, 2-furyl, 2-thienyl or pyridyl; R^ is hydrogen or lower
alkyl of 1-4 C; and — NR^R* is (lower alkyl^amino, l-pyr-
rolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl,
X'— C
\
NCN
NH— CH3
wherein X' is an aromatic S-membered N-containing
heterocyclc-N-yl or a group of the formula: —S(0)n—Z
in which Z is hydroxy or alkyl, and n is 1 or 2, provided
that X' is not a pyrazolyl ring; or
(2) reacting a compound of the formula:
982
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
CH3^ ^CH2— S— CH2CH2— NH-C
X \
HN N
NCN
X2
/
CH3^ ^CH2— S— CH2CH2— NH— C
HN N
X3
N— CH3
wherein X^ is a group of the formula:
— S(0)n— Z in which Z is hydroxy or alkyl, and n is 1 or
2,
with cyanamide or a salt thereof
4381,396
SILYNORBORNANE ANHYDRIDES AND METHOD FOR
MAKING
Hong-Son Ryang, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 395,932
Int. a.3 C07D i07/i9. 307/93
U.S. a. 549—237 18 Claims
1. Silylnorbomane anhydrides of the formula
X(3-j)— Si
where R-R' are members selected from hydrogen, halogen,
C(i-i3) monovalent hydrocarbon radicals and substituted
monovalent hydrocarbon radicals, Z is selected from — O—
and C — (R)2, R^ is a member selected from monovalent hydro-
carbon radicals and substituted monovalent hydrocarbon radi-
cals, and X is a member selected from the class consisting of,
(a) a hydrolyzable radical selected from the class consisting of
halo, hydrogen, Qi-s) alkoxy, acyloxy, — N(R^)2, cyano,
hydrogen, amido, carbamato, enoxy, imidato, isocyanato,
oximato, isocyanate, oximato, thioisocyanato and ureido,
(b) siloxanes having the formula,
(Y)c--Si04_(/,^t» "nd
f
(c) polysiloxanes having the formula.
yr yl
I I
Y— (SiO)„— SiOs.
Y» Y»
R^ is selected from monovalent hydrocarbon radicals and Y
is selected from a radical having the formula.
wherein X^ is cyanamide, an aromatic 5-membered N-con-
taining heterocycle-N-yl or a group of the formula: — S-
(0)n— Z in which Z is hydroxy or alkyl, and n is 1 or 2,
provided that X^ is not a pyrazolyl ring, with methyl-
amine; or
(3) reacting a compound of the formula:
R 1 R* II
I z o
R' Tr6 jf
R3
and (a) radicals, Y' is selected from R* radicals, Y radicals
and mixtures thereof, a is a whole number equal to 0 to 3
inclusive, b is a whole number equal to 0 to 3 inclusive; c is
a whole number equal to 0 to 3 inclusive, the sum of b-i-c is
equal to 0 to 3 inclusive and n is an integer equal to 1 to 2000
inclusive.
4,381,397
METHOD FOR SYNTHESIZING TRIOXANE
Koichi Yoshida; Toshiyuki Iwaisako; Jiinzo Masamoto; Kat-
suhiko Hamanaka, all of Fi^i, and H^jime Komaki, Kama-
kura, all of Japan, assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
FUed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,414
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 22, 1980, 55-21988
Int. C1.3 C07D 323/06
U.S. a. 549—368 4 Claims
1. A method of synthesizing trioxane which comprises heat-
ing formaldehyde at a temperature from 60° to 200' C. in the
presence of an aqueous solution of a heterop>olyacid selected
from the group consisting of tungstosilicic acid, tungstophos-
phoric acid and mixtures of these acids.
4,381,398
AMINO- ALCOHOL DERIVATIVES
Hiroshi Takizawa; Yoshimasa Olji, and Kazuhiro Kubo, all of
Shizuoka, Japan, assignors to Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 131,490
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 20, 1979, 54-31750
Int. a? C07D 317/44
U.S. a. 549—366 13 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
OH R,
I I
R4--CH— CH2— NH— CH2
wherein Rj represents
m
or
OID
and R4 represents
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
983
O
II
-continued
Me
-N
H
o
o
CN
H3C
CH3
H3C H
Me
Me
Me
O
O
Me
N
H
o
or
H2N
wherein Me represents a methyl group, and the pharmaceuti-
cally acceptable acid addition salts thereof.
4^1^99
PURinCATION OF
TETRAHYDRODIBENZO[B4)]PYRANS FROM CRUDE
SYNTHETIC MIXTURES
Robert E. Olsen, Placeirille, and Stephen J. Backlund, Fair
Oaks, both of Calif., assignors to Aerojet-General Corpora-
tion, LaJoUa, Calif.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,644
Int. a.' C07D 311/80
U.S. a. 549—390 16 Claims
1. A process for the isolation of a compound of the formula:
in which R is hydrogen or Ci-Cioalkyl from a crude synthetic
mixture, comprising the steps of:
(a) esterifying at least a portion of the components of said
mixture to form perfluorinated alkanoic acid esters
thereof,
(b) removing low-boiling components and non-volatile com-
ponents from said mixture,
(c) passing said mixture through a first preparative gas chro-
matographic column containing a packing consisting es-
sentially of a slightly polar phenyl-substituted silicone oil
on a porous, inert solid support to separate said mixture
into a plurality of substantially discrete portions, and
recovering therefrom the portion containing the highest
proportion of the perfluorinated alkanoic acid ester of said
compound, or a substantial fraction of said portion,
(d) passing said recovered portion or fraction through a
second preparative gas chromatographic column contain-
ing a packing consisting essentially of a non-phenyl-sub-
stituted silicone oil on a porous, inert solid support to
further separate said portion or fraction into a plurality of
substantially discrete subportions, and recovering there-
from the subportion containing the highest proportion of
the perfluorinated alkanoic acid ester of said compound,
or a substantial subfraction of said subportion,
(e) hydrolyzing said recovered subportion or subfraction to
convert the perfluorinated allcanoic ester moieties con-
tained therein to hydroxyl groups, and
(0 recovering said compound from said hydrolyzed subpor-
tion or subfraction.
4,381,400
PROCESS FOR THE SYNTHESIS OF ISOSORBIDE
MONONITRATES
Jean-Marie Emeury, and Eric Winuner, both of Sorgucs, France,
assignors to Societe Nationale Des Pondres et Explosifs,
Paris, France
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,073
Oaims priority, application France, Feb. 27, 1981, 81 03906
Int. a.3 C07D 493/04
VJS. a. 549—464 12 Claims
1. Process for the synthesis of isosorbide mononitrates, cha-
racterised in that isosorbide dinitrate is denitrated by means of
a hydrazine derivative, in a polar solvent medium.
4,381,401
AMINOETHYLATION PROCESS
Graham S. Poindexter, ETansrille, Ind., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Oct 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,959
Int a.3 O07C 85/00
U.S. a. 556-410 5 Claims
1. A process for preparing 1,2-ethanediamines of the formula
R3-(NR iCH2CH2NHR2)„
where
n is one or two;
Ri is hydrogen or C).20 hydrocarbyl;
R2 is hydrogen, C1.20 alkyl, Ci-20 hydroxyalkyl, RiC(0>— ,
984
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
or (R^St^an?"' ^^'^'^*~' ^^'^'^' ^^^^^^PiO)-, amount of from about 0.01 to 30 mole percent based on the
when n 'is \, the'n^Rj is aromatic primary amine employed of a tertiary amine which
may be an aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryliphatic or aromatic
amine containing from 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
Y
wherein Y independently each occurrence is selected
from the group consisting of halogen, amino, Ri and
RlX — where X is oxygen or sulfur; and
when n is 2, then R3 is:
comprising contacting 2-oxazoIidinone or a derivative thereof
having the formula
O
II
O N— R2
\ /
4,381,404
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
N.O-DISUBSTrnJTED URETHANES AND USE
THEREOF AS STARTING MATERIALS FOR THE
PRODUCTION OF ORGANIC ISOCYANATES
Hans-Josef Buysch; Heinrich Krimm, and Wolfgang Richter, all
of Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,070
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 1.
1980, 3036966
Int. a.3 C07C 125/065. 125/073
U.S. a. 560-24 6 Claims
1. A process for the production of N.O-disubstituted ure-
thanes comprising reacting N-mono or N,N'-disubstituted
ureas or linear polyureas with aliphatic carbonic esters in the
presence of inorganic or organic compounds of aluminum,
lead, magnesium, titanium, tin, zinc or zirconium as catalyst.
where R2 is as previously defmed, with the hydrochloride
derivative of an aromatic amine or diamine of the formula:
R3-NRiH),.n(HCI),
where n, Ri and Rj are as previously deflned, at a temperature
of from about 140° C. to about 250° C. for a time sufficient to
form substantial amounts of the corresponding 1,2-ethanedia-
mine hydrochloride salt and thereafter contacting with base.
4,381,402
STEVIOL COMPOUNDS
Grant E. DuBois, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to Dynapol, Palo
Alto, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 189,243, Sep. 22, 1980, Pat. No. 4,332,830.
This appUcation Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,810
Int. a.J C07C 69/753. 69/74
U.S. a. 560—6 2 Claims
2. A physiologically acceptable alkali metal salt of 13-O-sul-
fopropyl steviol.
4381,403
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
N-MONOSUBSTFTUTED CARBAMIC ACID ESTERS
Samuel J. Falcone, West Chester, and John J. McCoy, Media,
both of Pa., assignors to Atlantic Richfield Company, Los
Angeles, Calif.
FUed Mar. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 135,946
Int. a.3 C07C 125/065. 125/073
U.S. a. 560—24 21 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of an N-monosubstituted
carbamic acid ester which comprises reacting an unsubstituted
carbamic acid ester having the formula NH2CO2R wherein R
is a straight or branched chain alkyl group containing from 1 to
10 carbon atoms, with an aromatic primary amine having the
formula R'(NH2)n wherein R' is a substituted or unsubstituted
aryl or aralkyl group containing one or more benzenoid rings
which may be fused or joined by single valency bonds and n is
an integer of 1 to 6, at a temperature in the range of from about
125° C. to 250* C. in the presence of a monohydric aliphatic
alcohol having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and a catalytic
4,381,405
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
POLYMETHYLENE POLYPHENYL POLYISOCYANATE
COMPOSITION
Koichi Takeuchi, and Katsuharu Miyata, both of Yokohama,
Japan, assignors to Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals, Incorporated,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 212,022
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 5, 1979, 54-156919
Int. a.3 C07C 125/06, 69/00; C08G 18/76
U.S. a. 560—25 6 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a polymethylene poly-
phenyl polyisocyanate composition, which is comprised of
polymethylene polyphenyl polyisocyanates, at least a part of
the isocyanate groups contained therein being substituted by
carbamate groups, or a mixture of polymethylene polyphenyl
polyisocyanates having the substituted carbamate groups and
polymethylene polyphenyl polyisocyanates not having any
carbamate groups, the amount of the carbamate groups in said
composition being 0.1 to 10 percent by mole based on the
amount of the isocyanate groups in said composition, compris-
ing subjecting a mixture of polymethylene polyphenyl car-
bamic acid esters having the formula:
OH
III
ROCN
HO
III
NCX>R
<H^"^<fe_?^-0
HO
III
NCOR
wherein R represents a lower alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon
atoms and n repesents an integer of one or more, to thermal
decomposition reaction at 200* to 350* in an organic solvent
having a boiling point of up to 300* C. under atmospheric
pressure to such an extent that 0.1 to 10 percent by weight of
alkoxycarbonylamino group remains unreacted.
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
985
4,381,406
PROCESS FOR MAKING ALLYLIC ESTERS OF
TETRACHLOROPHTHALIC AOD
Joseph H. Finley, Metuchen, N J., assignor to FMC Corpora-
tion, Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,648
Int. a.3 C07C 67/00. 67/08
U.S. a. 560—83 17 Claims
1. llie method of producing a diallylic ester of tetrachlor-
ophthalic acid comprising the steps of:
(a) forming a salt of the monoallylic ester of tetrachloroph-
thalic acid by reacting tetrachlorophthalic anhydride with
(i) a sufficient excess of allylic alcohol, over the amount to
form the said monoallylic ester, to comprise at least part
of a solvent to maintain in solution or suspension the
said salt formed in (a), and
(ii) a sufficient amount of a base to form said salt,
(b) adding to the product of step (a) a sufficient amount of an
allylic halide to convert the salt of the monoallylic ester to
the diester of tetrachlorophthalic acid and heating to
accelerate the reaction,
(c) cooling the solution produced in step (b) to crystallize the
said allylic diester of tetrachlorophthalic acid from solu-
tion, and
(d) separating the thus-created allylic diester of tetrachlor-
ophthalic acid from the remaining solvent.
4,381,407
PROCESS FOR THE CONTINUOUS PRODUCnON OF
TRIACETIN
Norbert Bremus, Ijungenfeld; Gerliard Dieckelmann, Hilden;
Lutz Jeromin, Diisseldorf-Holthausen; Wolfgang Rupilius,
Diisseldorf-Urdenbach, and Hartwig Schiitt, Diisseldorf-Ben-
rath, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Henliel Kom-
manditgesellschaft auf Aktien, Diisseldorf-Holthausen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,452
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 8,
1980 3004660
Int. a.J C07C 67/08. 67/54. 69/18
U.S. a. 560—263 10 Qaims
1. A process for the continuous production of triacetin con-
sisting essentially of continuousy charging liquid glycerol into
a first liquid reaction area through which acetic acid vapors
and water vapors flow, said liquid reaction area being divided
into a number of separate individual areas through which
liquid glycerol and liquid acetin reaction products flow in one
direction and gaseous acetic acid and water flow in a counter-
current direction, continuously charging acetic acid vapor to a
separate individual area where said liquid mixture has an OH
number of less than 600, said liquid reaction areas being main-
tained at a pressure of from 0.2 to 30 bar and a temperature of
from lOO* to 250* C, the number of said separate individual
areas and the amount of liquid glycerol and gaseous acetic acid
charged being so selected that the total contact time of the
reactants is at least one hour, continuously separating a liquid
mixture of acetins and water having an OH number of less than
600, continuously passing said liquid mixture into a second
liquid reaction area, continuously adding thereto liquid acetic
acid anhydride in an amount sufficient to react with water
dissolved in said liquid mixture to form acetic acid and to react
with monoacetin and diacetin present to form triacetin, contin-
uously recovemg triacetin, continuously passing vaporized
acetic acid formed into said separate individual area where said
liquid mixture has an OH number of less than 600, and continu-
ously recovering a mixture of water vapors and acetic acid
vapors having a content after condensation of less than 3% by
weight of acetic acid.
4,381,408
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXTRACnON OF
AIRBORNE AMINE COMPOUNDS
David P. Roonbehler, Concord, and John W. Reisch, Brooklinc,
both of Mass., assignors to Thermo Electron Corporation,
Waltfaam, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 61,552, Jnl. 27, 1979,' Pat No.
4,249,904. This appUcation Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 225,285
Int a.' GOIN 31/06. 31/08
VJS. a. 564—112 3 Claims
1. Method of extracting amine compounds and nitrosamine
compounds from an air sample for quantitative analysis with-
out loss due to formation of nitrosamine artifacts comprising
the successive steps of:
A. passing said sample through a first port, a flrst interior
zone, a second zone, and a second port of a cartridge in
succession, said first interior zone containing an air pervi-
ous packing of a first granular, solid-phase amine complex-
ing agent and said second zone containing an air pervious
packing of a mixture of a second granular, solid-phase
amine complexing agent and a particulate sorbent adapted
to extract and concentrate nitrosamines from air; and
passing an eluent through said second port, said second
interior zone, said flrst interior zone, and said first port in
succession, said eluent being a solvent for amine com-
pounds, nitrosamines, and said amine complexing agents.
B.
4,381,409
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF
2,4-DINITROANILINES
Istran Toth, Bottmingen, Switzerland, assignor to Sandoz Ltd.,
Basel, Switzerland
FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,979
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 18,
1980, 3035140
Int. a.' C07C 85/04
U.S. a. 564—406 12 Claims
1. In a process for the production of 2,4-dinitroaniline by
reacting l-chloro-2,4-dinitrobenzene with ammonia, the im-
provement which comprises adding the ammonia to melted
l-chloro-2,4-dinitrobenzene in such dosages that the tempera-
ture of the reaction mixture does not exceed 120* C. and the
pressure does not exceed 2 bar. .
4,381,410
a,/3-UNSATURATED ALDEHYDES AND THEIR USE AS
FLAVOR-MODIFYING INGREDIENTS
Wilhebn Pinkenbagen, Chavanncs-des-Bois, Switzerland, as-
signor to Firmenich SA, GeneTa, Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 73,466, Sep. 7, 1979. This appUcation Feb.
5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,791
Claims priority, qipUcatloa SwitnrlamI, Sep. 14, 1978,
9632/78
Int a.' C07C 47/21
VS. a. 568—448 1 Claim
1. An a,/3-unsaturated aldehyde selected from the group
consisting of:
2,5-dimethyI-oct-2-cn- 1 -al,
2,S-dimethyl-hept-2-en-l-al and
986
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
2-ethyl-7-methyl-oct-2-en-l-al.
the amount of water, based on the feedstock, is in the range of
about 0.5 to about 10 weight percent.
4,381,411
PRODUCTION OF METHACROLEIN FROM
ISOBUTYRALDEHYDE UTILIZING PROMOTED IRON
PHOSPHORUS OXIDE CATALYSTS
S. Erik Pederacn, Mentor, and Louis F. Wagner, Solon, both of
Ohio, assignors to The Standard Oil Company, Cleveland,
Ohio
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,312
Int. C1.3 C07C 45/32
U.S. a. 568—459 12 Claims
1. A process for the production of methacrolein comprising
contacting isobutyraldehyde with molecular oxygen or an
oxygen containing gas in the vapor phase at a reaction temper-
ature of about 250° C. to about 600° C. in the presence of a
catalyst having the empirical formula
AaFcftP^O;,
wherein
A is selected from the group Ag, Al, Be, Cd, Co, Cr, Cu, Ga,
Ge. In, Mn, Ni, Te, Th, Ti, Tl, U, V, Zn, Zr, rare earths
and mixtures thereof and wherein
a is about 0.01 to about 2.0
b is about 0.5 to about 2.0
c is about 1.0 to about 3.5 and
X is the number of oxygens needed to satisfy the valence
requirements of the remaining elements.
4,381,412
4-FLUORO-3-PHENOXY-BENZYL ETHERS
Rainer Fuchs; Fritz Maurer, both of Wnppertal; Uwe Priesnitz,
Unna-Massen; Hans-Jochem Riebel, Wuppertal, and Erich
Klaoke, Odenthal, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 173,544, Jul. 30, 1980, Pat. No. 4,326,087.
This appUcation Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,854
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 22,
1979, 2933985
Int a.3 C07C 43/29
U.S. a. 568—637 1 Claim
1. A 4-nuoro-3-phenoxy-benzyl ether of the formula
CH2— O— R
in which
R is phenyl or benzyl.
4,381,413
PROCESS FOR CONVERTING ANISOLES TO
ORTHO-METHYLATED PHENOUC PRODUCTS
John R. Dodd, Poaca City, Okla^ aadgnor to Conoco Inc.,
Ponca aty, Okla.
Filed Jnl. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286^1
Int a.J C07C 39/04
UJS. CL 568—716 9 Claims
1. A process for converting a feedstock comprising me-
thoxybenzene, o-methylmethoxybenzene, 2,6-dimethyline-
thoxybenzene, or mixtures thereof, to a product mixture con-
taining o-cresol and 2,6-xylenol in high selectivity, said process
comprising passing the feedstock in vapor phase over an effec-
tive amount of gamma-alumina in the presence of an effective
amount of water at a temperature in the range of about 225* to
about 295* C, said process being characterized further in that
4,381,414
FUEL HAVING REDUCED TENDENCY TO
PARTICULATE DISSEMINATION UNDER SHOCK
David L. Beach, Gibsonia, and Charles M. Selwitz, MonroeviUe,
both of Pa., assignors to Gulf Research A Development Com-
pany, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,256
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/04
U.S. a. 585—10 5 Claims
1. A fuel having reduced tendency to particulate dissemina-
tion under shock comprising a liquid hydrocarbon jet aviation
fuel of flash point at least 90* F. containing dissolved atactic
polypropylene carrying methyl groups randomly disposed
spatially along its backbone, with an average of about one
methyl group for each two carbon atoms on said backbone,
and having an intrinsic viscosity of at least about three decili-
ters per gram.
4,381,415
PROCESS FOR DEALKYLATING AROMATIC
HYDROCARBONS IN THE PRESENCE OF STEAM
Philippe Courty, Houilles, France; Georgy L. Rabinovich, Len-
ingrad; Victor N. Mojaiko, Otradnoe, both of U.S.S.R., and
Jean-Francois LePage, Rueil Malmaison, France, assignors to
Institut Francais du Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison, France
Division of Ser. No. 206,408, Nov. 12, 1980, Pat. No. 4,340,509.
This appUcation Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,177
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 12, 1979, 79 28029
Int. a.3 C07C 4/12
U.S. a. 585—487 20 Claims
1. In a process for dealkylating, in the presence of steam, at
least one alkyl aromatic hydrocarbon, the improvement which
comprises conducting the process in the presence of a catalyst
containing (a) an alumina carrier and, by weight with respect
to the catalyst, (b) from 0.1 to 2% of rhodium, (c) from 0.05 to
2% of at least one metal from group I B of the periodic classifi-
cation of elements, selected from copper, silver and gold, (d)
from 0.05 to 2% of rhenium and (e) from 0.02 to 5% of at least
one additional metal selected from lithium, sodium, potassium,
rubidium, cesium, beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium,
barium and uranium.
4,381.416
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING ISOPRENE
Sonao Kyo; Tnmoni Renge, and Katsumi Omnra, aU of Hasakit
Japan, assignors to Kuraray Co., Ltd., Okayama, Japan
FUed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,712
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 4, 1979, 54-157866
Int a.J ar7c 1/24. 11 /is
U.S. Q. 585—606 14 Claims
1. A process for producing isoprene, which comprises de-
composing a mixture of at least two compounds represented by
the general formula
CH3
I
CH2— C— CH— CH2
i I I I
W X Y Z
<D
wherein (i) W and Y each represent a hydrogen atom, and X
and Z are identical or different and each represent the group
OR, (ii) W and X together form a single bond, Y represents a
hydrogen atom and Z represents the group OR, (iii) W repre-
sents a hydrogen atom, X and Y together form a single bond,
and Z represents the group OR, or (iv) W represents a hydro-
gen atom, X represents the group OR, and Y and Z together
form a single bond, in which R represents a hydrogen atom, a
methyl group, a methoxymethyl group, a methylbutenyl
April 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
W7
group, a methylbutenyloxymethyl group, a l,l-dimethyI-3-
hydroxypropyl group, a l,l-<limethyl-3-hydroxypropylox-
ymethyl group, a 3-methyl-3-hydroxybutyl group, a 3-methyl-
3-hydroxybutyloxymethyl group, a l,l-dimethyl-3-niethoxy-
propyl group, a l,l-dimethyl-3-methoxypropyloxymethyI
group, a 3-methyl-3-methoxybutyl group or a 3-methyl-3-
methoxybutyloxymethyl group,
and which contains both at least one formal linkage-free
compound of general formula (I) in which R is a hydrogen
atom, a methyl group, a methylbutenyl group, a 1,1-
dimetftyl-3-hydroxypropyl group, a 3-methyl-3-hydrox-
ybutyl group, a l,l-dimethyl-3-methoxypropyl group or a
3-methyl-3-methoxybutyl group and at least one formal
linkage-containing compound of the general formula (I) in
which R is a methoxymethyl group, a methylbutenylox-
ymethyl group, a l,l-dimethyl-3-hydroxypropylox-
ymethyl group, a 3-methyl-3-hydroxybutyloxymethyl
group, a l,l-dimethyl-3-methoxypropyloxymethyl group
or a 3-methyl-3-methoxybutyloxymethyl group, in the
presence of water and an oxygen-containing boron com-
pound selected from the group consisting of boron-oxya-
cids and boron compounds capable of generating the
boronoxyacids in situ, in the liquid phase at a temperature
of at least ISO* C. while adjusting the ratio of the oxygen-
containing boron compound to the entire water present in
the reaction system such that the weight ratio of orthobo-
ric acid to water, calculated on the assumption that all the
oxygen-containing boron compound changes in aqueous
solution to orthoboric acid, is at least maintained at 1S:8S.
4,381,417
CATALYTIC DEHYDROGENATION PROCESS
Bipin V. Vora, Elk Grove Village; Dennis E. O'Brien, and Nor-
man H. Scott, both of Arlington Heights, all of III., assignors
to UOP Inc., Des Plaines, 111.
FUed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,655
Int. aJ C07C 5/36
U.S. a. 585—655 8 Claims
1. A catalytic dehydrogenation process which comprises the
steps of:
(a) charging a C2-C6 paraffmic hydrocarbon into a reaction
zone in admixture with hydrogen and contacting said
mixture therein with a dehydrogenation catalyst at dehy-
drogenation conditions of temperature and pressure ef-
fecting the formation of a reaction zone effluent stream
comprising hydrogen, an oleflnic hydrocarbon product,
and unreacted paraffinic hydrocarbon;
(b) compressing and cooling said effluent stream to a pres-
sure and temperature effecting the formation of a liquid
phase comprising said hydrocarbons and a hydrogen-rich
vapor phase, and introducing said effluent stream into a
gas-liquid separation zone maintained at said conditions of
temperature and pressure;
(c) recovering said hydrocarbon phase;
(d) recovering one portion of said vapor phase substantially
equivalent to the net hydrogen make;
(e) expanding the remaining portion of said vapor phase and
effecting a substantial reduction in the pressure and tem-
perature thereof;
(0 passing the thus cooled vapor phase in indirect heat
exchange relationship with the effluent stream of step (b)
to promote said temperature conditions in said gas-liquid
separation zone;
(g) thereafter combining one portion of the vapor phase with
the effluent stream from step (a) whereby said vapor phase
is recycled to said gas-liquid separation zone to control the
amount of vapor expanded in accordance with step (e) and
the temperature of said separation zone in accordance
with step (0; and,
(h) recycling the remaining portion of the hydrogen-rich
vapor phase to said reaction zone in admixture with the
paraffmic hydrocarbon charged thereto in accordance
with step (a).
4,381,418
CATALYTIC DEHYDROGENATION PROCESS
Steve A. Gewartowski, Mt. Prospect, and Dennis E. O'Brien,
Arlington Heights, both of 111., anignore to HOP Inc., Des
Plaines, lU.
FUed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,656
Int. a.3 C07C 5/36
U.S. a. 585—655 9 Qaims
. — = 1. — .
1. A catalytic dehydrogenation process which comprises the
steps of:
(a) heat exchanging a C2+ normally gaseous paraffmic
hydrocarbon feed stream with a net hydrogen product
stream and a net hydrocarbon product stream chilled in
accordance with step (g);
(b) further cooling said hydrocarbon feed stream by admix-
ture with a hydrogen recycle stream chilled in accordance
with step (g) and recycled in accordance with step (h);
(c) heating the combinnl hydrogen/hydrocarbon stream by
indirect heat exchange with a reaction zone effluent
stream compressed in accordance with step (e);
(d) contacting the heated combined stream with a dehydro-
genation catalyst in a reaction zone at dehydrogenation
conditions producing a reaction zone effluent stream
comprising hydrogen, olefinic hydrocarbon product and
unreacted paraffinic hydrocarbons;
(e) compressing said effluent stream and cooling the same by
indirect heat exchange with the combined stream in accor-
dance with step (c) and forming a liquid hydrocarbon
phase and a hydrogen-rich vapor phase;
(0 separating the thus cooled liquid hydrocarbon phase;
(g) expanding the hydrogen-rich vapor phase to effect a
furiher chilling and condensation of a residual hydrocar-
bon phase therefrom;
(h) combining one portion of the chilled vapor phase with
the hydrocarbon feed stream as recycle hydrogen in ac-
cordance with step (b);
(i) heat exchanging the renuuning portion of the chilled
hydrogen-rich vapor phase with the hydrocarbon feed
stream in accordance with step (a) and thereafter recover-
ing said vapor phase as a net hydrogen product stream;
988
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
(j) combining the cooled liquid hydrocarbon phase from step
(0 and the chilled residual hydrocarbon phase from step
(g), heat exchanging the combined hydrocarbon stream
with the hydrocarbon feed stream in accordance with step
(a), and thereafter recovering the combined stream as a
net hydrocarbon products stream comprising oleflnic
hydrocarbon products stream comprising oleflnic hydro-
carbon products and unreacted parafflnic hydrocarbons.
4,381,419
ADSORPTION-DESORPTION SEPARATION PROCESS
WITH INTEGRATED LIGHT AND HEAVY DESORBENTS
Roger Wylje, Baytown, Tex., assignor to Exxon Research &
Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,651
Int. a.3 C07C 7/12
U.S. a. 585—828 5 Qaims
1. In an adsorption-desorption process for separating close
boiling materials or isomers in which a liquid desorbent is used
to produce an extract of desired materials in said desorbent and
also a rafTinate of byproduct materials in said desorbent, the
improvement which comprises:
carrying out an adsorption-desorption step in a first unit with
a desorbent lower boiling than the feedstream to be sepa-
rated to obtain a light extract and a light rafiinate;
carrying out an adsorption-desorption step in a second unit
with a desorbent higher boiling than said feedstream to
obtain a heavy extract and a heavy raffmate;
passing light raffmate and heavy raffinate into a fractionat-
ing column and separating the same by fractionation into
light desorbent, heavy desorbent and byproduct raffinate
materials;
passing light extract and heavy extract into a second frac-
tionating column and separating the same by fractionation
into light desorbent, heavy desorbent and product ex-
tracted materials; and recycling light desorbent streams
1
-"C^'^
*®-
^ HAFF
M-'
P-
-^
^
•I U— :'
^
PftHAIYLENE
from both fractionators to said first unit and recycling
heavy desorbent streams from both fractionators to said
second unit.
ELECTRICAL
4^1,420
MULTI<X)NDUCrOR FLAT CABLE
William A. Elliott, Reynoldsburg, and Thomas J. Taylor,
Gahaima, both of Ohio, assignors to Western Electric Com-
pany, Inc., New York, N.Y.
DiTision of Ser. No. 106,599, Dec. 26, 1979, Pat. No. 4,310,365.
This appUcation Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,217
Int. a.3 HOIB im
U.S. a. 174—34 31 Qaims
ripheral portion of said transparent material, said central por-
tion of said transparent material being rigid, said peripheral
portion being flexible.
4,381,422
SPACER-DAMPER FOR WIRES OF AERIAL
ELECTRICAL LINES
Oscar Traini, Cardano al Campo, Italy, assignor to DAMP,
S.p.A., Bergamo, Italy
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,670
Claims priority, appUcation ItaTy, Jul. 4, 1980, 2923 A/80
Int. a.3 H02G 7/14. 7/12
U.S. a. 174—42 12 Claims
1. A flat cable comprised of:
at least two conductor arrays, with the conductors in one
array being slightly offset by a predetermined amount
from the respectively associated conductors in the other
array;
an initially bare center insulative plastic film, of the type that
will not adhere to said conductors, interposed between
said conductor arrays, and
two outer insulative plastic films, each having an adhesive
backing on the side thereof which faces a different one of
said two conductor arrays, and being dimensioned to
extend coextensively with said center film, each of said
outer films, through said adhesive backing thereon, being
bonded to both the adjacent surfaces of the associated
array of conductors and to the adjacent longitudinally
disposed surface regions of said center film defined both
between adjacent conductors, and along border regions
on opposite sides of the array thereof, said conductors in
each array thus being permanently positioned and encap-
sulated between said center film and the associated one of
said outer films.
1. A spacer-damper for a plurality of suspended aerial lines
comprising:
a central body carrying a plurality of arms, each of said plural-
ity of arms terminating with means for clamping around a
respective one of said lines;
and an aerodynamic surface coupled to said body and indepen-
dent of said arms, said aerodynamic surface including a first
surface extending horizontally away from said body and a
second surface forming an acute angle with said first surface
whereby said aerodynamic surface acts to impede line gal-
loping in response to wind.
4,381,421 4,381,423 ^^
ELECTROMAGNETIC SHIELD FOR ELECTRONIC HIGH CAPACITANCE BUS BAR MANUFACTURING
EQUIPMENT TECHNIQUE
Warren D. Coats, Newberg, Oreg., and Marc A. Kamerling, Michael J. Taylor, Mesa, Ariz., assignor to Rogers Corporation,
SanU Rosa, Calif., assignors to Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Rogers, Conn. ,^„,„,
FUed Jul. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 164,874
Int a? HOIB 5/00. 5/14
Int. a.^ H05K 9/00
U.S. a. 174—72 B
34 Claims
U.S. a. 174—35 R
15 Claims
1. An interference shield for limiting non-visual emanations
from an electronic device, said shield comprising an electri-
cally conductive screen pariially encapsulated within an opti-
cally transparent material defining a central portion of first
uniform thickness and a peripheral portion of second thickness
substantially less than said first thickness, and with a portion of
said screen extending without encapsulation beyond said pe-
1. A high capacitance bus bar assembly comprising:
at least a pair of spatially separated elongated bus bar con-
ductors, said bus bar conductors having inwardly facing
planar surfaces;
a layer of ceramic dielectric material, said layer being dis-
posed between said bus bar conductors, said layer being
flame sprayed or flame cast on and in intimate contact
with the inwardly facing surface of one of said bus bar
conductors; and
electrically conductive means on said dielectric layer and
connected to the other of said bus bar conductors for
establishing electrical contact with the other of said bus
bar conductors.
989
990
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4^1,424
MULTI-CORE CABLE CONNECnON FOR MEDIUM
VOLTAGE CABLE
Harold C. Henig, Maplewood, Minn.; Dieter Kehr, and Ray-
mond Krabs, both of Hambnrg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, Saint
Paul, Minn.
FUed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,421
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 30,
1980, 3016585
Int. a.3 H02G 15/184
U.S. a. 174—73 R
1. A multi core cable connection for medium voltage cables,
comprising:
a conductor connector providing a core connection for each
cable core, and
a stress control envelope surrounding each core connection
and extending a distance along the core insulation and
lying in close contact with it, each stress control envelope
including
two prefabricated permanently elastic stress control ele-
ments, each of the stress control elements comprising
a sleeve-like main body of permanently elastic insulating
material which extends a distance on the core insulation
and terminates there with a gradually decreasing diame-
ter and towards its end adjacent the conductor connec-
tor extends a distance over the conductor connector
and terminates there with a gradually decreasing diame-
ter, and
a permanently elastic, conductive, sleeve-like insert in the
main body and bridging the core insulation and the
conductor connector; and
an electrically insulating filling material bridging the ends of
the stress control elements on the conductor connector.
4,381,425
UNIVERSAL JOINT BOX FOR TELECOMMUNICATION
OR POWER CABLES
Milenlto Mari£eri6, OdTOjak N. Demoi^e 12/4, 41000 Zagreb;
Janko Adamovi^, J. Andri6a 2, 21203 Vetemik, and Zdravko
Mari^evi^, M. Tita 68, 75000 Tuzia, all of Yugoslavia
Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,430
Claims priority, application Yugoslavia, Feb. 6, 1980, 312/80
Int. a.3 H02G 15/08
U.S. a. 174—93 10 Claims
1. A cable joint box for enclosing the connection of the ends
of a pair of cables, said cable joint box comprising:
a. a tubular enclosure open at each end;
b. a pair of end members adapted to close the respective ends
of said tubular enclosure, said end members including an
opening to p>ermit a cable to pass therethrough;
c. means to interconnect said end members to position the
same at a predetermined spacing;
d. tightening means carried by said end members and en-
gageable therewith for axial movement relative thereto,
said tightening means engageable with said tubular enclo-
sure;
e. annular sealing means positioned between said tightening
means and an end of said tubular member, whereby said
sealing means is compressed to provide a fluid-tight seal
between said tubular member, said tightening means, and
8Claims
said end member when said tightening means is moved
axially toward the end of said tubular enclosure; and
f. each of said end members including means to secure the
respective cables thereto.
4,381,426
LOW CROSSTALK RIBBON CABLE
Michael O. Cronkite, Huntington Beach, Calif., and Patrick J.
Paquin, Hamden, Conn., assignors to Allied Corporation,
Toledo, Ohio
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,799
Int. a.3 HOIB 11/04
U.S. a. 174—117 F 14 Qaims
~5 -r-' 44^ so'' S,i>^ )
34^ 3bJ^ n.46 32-'
'42
52-
eU "iaV 34^
56^ 36'
13. A multi-conductor cable, comprising: a plurality of later-
ally spaced, longitudinally extending, insulated wire conductor
pairs, each of said insulated wire conductor pairs having alter-
nating twisted portions and straight portions;
said plurality of insulated wire conductor pairs including a
plurality of first insulated wire conductor pairs and a
plurality of second insulated wire conductor pairs;
said first insulated wire conductor pairs and said second wire
conductor pairs being alternately laterally spaced across
said multi-conductor cable;
said twisted portion of each said first insulated wire conduc-
tor pair and said twisted portion of each said second insu-
lated wire conductor pair having a first predetermined
lay;
said twisted portion of each said first insulated wire conduc-
tor pair having a plurality of first beginning portions
longitudinally spaced along said cable;
said twisted poriion of each said second insulated wire con-
ductor pair having a plurality of second beginning por-
tions longitudinally spaced along said cable;
said second beginning portions being longitudinally offset by
a predetermined distance from said first beginning por-
tion, said lay of each said first insulated wire conductor
pair being offset from the lay of each said second insulated
wire conductor pair within said twisted portion of said
cable;
individual insulated wire conductors of said insulated wire
conductor pairs being equally laterally spaced within said
straight portions of said cable;
a longitudinally extending plastic film underlying said
spaced insulated wire conductor pairs;
said insulated wire conductor pairs being at least intermit-
tently bonded to said plastic film to maintain said insulated
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
991
wire conductor pairs in a predetermined lateral relation-
ship along their entire length within said cable, said insu-
lated wire conductor pairs having a first lateral spacing
within said twisted portion and each said individual insu-
lated wire having a second lateral spacing within said
straight portions.
4,381,427
SUBSCRIBER LOOP SYSTEM FOR VOICE AND DATA
William E. Cheal, San Jose; Gokal C. Gupta, Fremont; Fan-
marz Sepahmansour, Milpitas, and Avnish K. Aggarwal, San
Jose, all of Calif., assignors to Northern Telecom Limited,
Nashville, Tenn.
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,246
Int. a.3 H04M 9/00; H04B 3/00; H04J i/00
U.S. a. 179—2 DP 8 Claims
H
■lom
TDK SPG«*L W-
WIO STSTtM
103
■TM» SiWAk MT«
(xjT or s»STri»
'CM
^1?
^.
•'mm
' CNUlC _
, tMJg
u«ir
• I r&'^.^
1 ,u
I ' 3? I PtHOTE
- t^^ 7*^ iNTlwraCE
3> I ClSCuiT
43? ,
TW
1. A subscriber loop system for providing a voice call opera-
tion along a first conductor path between a user multiline
function (UMF) telephone terminal and a time division multi-
plex (TDM) telephone system, and for providing a data call
operation along a second conductor path between a data port
and the TDM telephone system, the TDM system providing at
least one signalling and supervision (SS) path for communica-
tion with a controller in the TDM telephone system, and
providing a plurality of time divided communication paths for
communication through the TDM telephone system, the UMF
telephone terminal including an SS circuit for storing dial pad
and key depressions for transmission to the controller and for
storing signalling states transmitted from the controller, the
subscriber loop system comprising:
a line interface means including;
a codec responsive to an enable signal directed thereto by
the TDM telephone system, for receiving analog informa-
tion signals from the first conductor path and encoding
said information signals to provide corresponding digital
information signals for transmission along one of the plu-
rality of communication paths as designated by the enable
signal and for receiving digital information signals from
the designated communication path and decoding said
information signals to provide corresponding analog in-
formation signals for transmission along the first conduc-
tor path,
digital circuits for exchanging data and SS information sig-
nals between the second conductor path and the TDM
telephone system, the digital circuits being responsive to
an enable signal directed thereto by the TDM telephone
system for receiving digital information signals from one
of the plurality of communication paths as designated by
the enable signal and converting said information signals
to corresponding information signals in an operating sig-
nal format of the second conductor path, for transmission
along the second conductor path, and for receiving infor-
mation signals in the operating signal format of the second
conductor path and converting said information signals to
corresponding information signals in an operating signal
format of the plurality of communication paths,
a voice call storage means and a data call storage means,
included in the digital circuits, for storing digital SS infor-
mation signals corresponding to SS information signals
received by the digital circuits in the operating signal
format of the second conductor path and pertaining to SS
functions of voice calls and of data calls respectively, for
transmission along the SS path, and;
a line controller connected to the digital circuit for control-
ling operation of the digital circuits in exchanges of SS
information signals between the second conductor path
and the SS path, the line controller being responsive to the
designation of the SS path and an assertion of either of the
two previously mentioned enable signals to;
(a) cause the digital circuits to receive digital SS informa-
tion signals from the SS path,
(b) label the received SS information signals to provide
voice call and data call information signals in accor-
dance with which of the two enable signals is asserted,
(c) cause the digital circuits to transmit SS information
signals corresponding to the labelled SS information
signals along the second conductor path,
(d) cue SS information signals, received by the digital
• circuits from the second conductor path, in the voice
■s^ call storage means and in the data call storage means in
accordance with voice call and data call labels received
in association with the SS information signals, and
(e) cause the digital circuits to pass signal contents of the
voice call storage means and the data call storage means
to the SS path in accordance with respective assertions
of the enable signals;
a remote line interface means including;
digital circuits for exchanging data information signals be-
tween the data port and the second conductor path and
for exchanging SS information signals between the SS
circuit of the UMF telephone terminal and the second
conductor path, the ditigal circuits being responsive to a
time defming characteristics in the information signals
transmitted from the first line interface means along the
second conductor path for converting data information
signals received from the second conductor path to corre-
sponding digital signals compatible with a predetermined
operating signal format of the data port for transmission to
the data port, and for converting data information signals
received from the data port to corresponding data infor-
mation signals compatible with the operating signal for-
mat of the second conductor path for transmission along
the second conductor path to the first line interface means,
and also, for converting SS information signals received
from the second conductor path to corresponding SS
information in a signal format compatible with operation
of the SS circuit for transmission to the SS circuits and for
receiving SS information signals from the SS circuit and
converting said SS information signals to corresponding
SS information signals compatible with the operating
signal format of the second conductor path for transmis-
sion along the second conductor path to the first line
interface means,
a shift key manually operable by a user for designating func-
tions of SS information signals originating at the UMF
telephone terminal as pertaining to a voice call and alter-
nately to a data call,
a directory number key and a directory number indicator,
the directory number key being manually operable by a
user to request service for a data call,
a remote line controller connected to the digital circuits and
being responsive to designation at the shift key to label SS
information signals for transmission along the second
conductor path as pertaining to one of a voice call and a
data call, and being responsive to a request for service at
the directory number key for generating data call labelled
SS information signals corresponding to a request for
service code for transmission via the digital circuits and
the second conductor path to the first line interface means,
and
being responsive to SS information signals labelled as per-
992
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
taining to a data call and corresponding to either of ser-
vice initiated and service terminated codes for accord-
ingly causing a corresponding indication at the directory
number indicator.
4,381,428
ADAPTIVE QUANTIZER FOR ACOUSTIC BINARY
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION
Robert R. Kolesan John T. Rickard, and James R. Zeidler, all of
San Diego, Calif., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington,
D.C.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,362
Int. a.3 GIOL 7/00
U.S. a. 179—15.55 R 3 Qaims
BIT
Allocations
INPU
SiGNA
.TT^To |_J
(Al ' I
I ADAPTIVE
-INE
I ENMANCEB
OUANTIZtO
FFT
COEFFICIENTS
ing an apparatus for suppressing noise within a wide range of
advance angles, said distributor comprising:
a rotor made of insulating material having a first discharging
electrode and being rotated by a driving shaft of the inter-
nal combustion engine;
a plurality of stationary terminals fixed to an insulating
support member, each stationary terminal provided with a
second discharging electrode, said stationary terminals
arranged around a circular locus with said rotor at the
center of the circular locus, each of said second discharg-
ing electrodes being separated from said first discharging
electrode by a discharging air gap through which a spark
discharge is generated;
said apparatus for suppressing noise comprising means for
preventing the random motion of combustible gaseous
molecules in said discharge gap when said spark discharge
is generated, said apparatus for suppressing noise compris-
ing a tubular insulating member having a first end secured
in abutment with said first discharging electrode and a
second end extending into said discharge gap;
said tubular member forming a cylindrical passage in said
discharge gap through which said spark discharge passes;
said second end of said insulating member being arc-shaped,
said arc-shaped second end being concentric with said
circular locus.
1. An apparatus for reducing the data transmission rate for
acoustic signals comprising:
means providing a source of analog signals representative of
acoustic energy;
means coupled to the analog signal providing means for
converting them to digiul fo'rm;
means coupled to the converting means for processing the
digitized signals in an adaptive line enhancer;
first means coupled to the adaptive line enhancer processing
means for computing the FFT coefficient signals of the
input signals;
means coupled to the FFT computing means for multiplex-
ing the FFT coefficient signals of the input signals;
means interposed between the FFT computing means and
the multiplexing means for averaging FFT coefficient
signal variances; and
means coupled between the FFT computing means and the
multiplexing means and to the averaging means for pro-
gramming an included quantizer.
4,381,429
DISTRIBUTOR FOR AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE CONTAINING AN APPARATUS FOR
SUPPRESSING NOISE
Hanihiko Nakayama; Masahiko Nagai, and Minoru Yano, all of
Toyota, Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki
KaJsha, Aichi, Japan
FUed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,610
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 22, 1980, 55-130588
Int. a.3 HOIH 79/00
VJS. a. 200—19 R 9 Qaims
4,381,430
COIN OPERATED TIMING MECHANISM
Steven W. Smock, Indianapolis, and George W. Adams, Green-
wood, both of Ind., assignors to Emhart Industries, Inc., Indi-
anapolis, Ind.
Continuation of Ser. No. 174,498, Aug. 1, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,720
Int. a.3 HOIH 43/02
U.S. a. 200—35 R
3 Claims
\l^^«
1. A distributor for.an internal combustion engine, compris-
1. In a coin operated controller wherein insertion of at least
one coin into a receiving means associated with a timing mech-
anism causes a motor drive means to drive cam means to open
and close electrical switches associated therewith, an improve-
ment characterized in a means providing extended cycles for
said timing mechanism comprising:
(a) a drive shaft,
(b) at least one cam fixedly carried on said drive shaft and
having a plurality of lobes providing a cam outer periph-
ery and notches therein,
(c) at least one electrical switch biased in an open position
when engaging said outer periphery and biased in a closed
position when engaging said notices,
(d) a ratchet fixedly carried on said drive shaft and including
teeth synchronized with said lobes, and actuator means
engaging said ratchet and rotating same a predetermined
amount upon an inseriion of a coin in said receiving
means,
(e) a rotating means rotatably carried on said drive shaft and
a gear carried on said rotating member and coupled to said
motor drive means, and
(0 a tab extending radially from a periphery of said rotating
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
993
member and a cooperating tab extending from a face of
said cam means near its periphery,
insertion of a coin causing rotation of said ratchet and said
cam means and displacing said tabs with respect to each
other.
4,381,431
HAND SET TIMER
Donald R. Ritzenthaler, Reedsburgh, and Thomas J. Bottelson,
Baraboo, both of Wis., assignors to Gulf St Western Manufac-
turing Company, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,258
Int. a.3 HOIH 43/10. 9/00
U.S. a. 200—38 R 21 Oaims
200
first cam-following member and biased into cam-follow-
ing engagement with said cam track by said second
contact arm;
said first and second cam-following members being opera-
tive to control movement of said first and second contact
arms, resf)ectively, into and out of electrical contact with
each other in accordance with said cam track profile;
said first and second cam-following members having effec-
tive dimensions radially of said cam such that said second
cam-following member engages said second contact arm
to hold said second contact arm out of electrical contact
1. In a hand set timer including a housing, means for mount-
ing a constant speed motor onto said housing, said motor
having a driven output shaft, a drive shaft supported for rota-
tion in said housing, a switch actuating element in said housing
and driven by said drive shaft between a manual set position
and a switch actuated position, means connecting said output
shaft to said drive shaft for driving said switch actuating ele-
ment in a first direction by said motor from said set position to
said switch actuated position, manual means connected to said
drive shaft for moving said switch actuating element, indepen-
dently of said motor, in a second direction between said actu-
ated position and said set position, the improvement compris-
ing: said housing including first and second complementary
housing components, said first component having a first outer
surface facing outwardly and forwardly in a direction axially
of said drive shaft, said second component having a second
outer surface facing outwardly and rearwardly from said hous-
ing in a direction axially of said drive shaft, said first and sec-
ond housing components having interlocking peripheral edges,
and locking means comprising cooperating locking shoulder
means respectively affixed to said motor and to said first hous-
ing component and engaged with one another for locking said
housing components axially together and locking said motor
onto said housing at said second surface.
4,381,432
ELECTROMECHANICAL TIMER WITH IMPROVED
SHORT INTERVAL ACCURACY
Donald S. Gushing, Louisrille, Ky., assignor to General Electric
Company, Louisrille, Ky.
FUed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,939
Int. a.3 HOIH 43/10
U.S. a. 200—38 B 6 Claims
1. An electromechanical timer comprising:
a control cam having a circumferential edge cam track; said
cam track comprising a plurality of arcuate segments,
each segment having a fixed radius different than the fixed
radius of an adjacent segment defining a stepped cam
track profile;
switch means comprising first and second resilient contact
arms extending generally adjacent said cam track, said
first contact arm extending between said second contact
arm and said cam track;
a first cam-following member rigidly mounted to said first
contact arm and biased into cam-following engagement
with said cam track by said first contact arm;
a second cam-following member pivotally mounted to said
with said «first contact arm when said first and second
cam-following members engage the same segment of said
cam track; and
the difference in the fixed radii of said cam track segments
being sufficient that said second cam-following member
permits said second contact arm to come into electrical
contact with said first contact arm when said second
cam-following member is aligned with one cam track
segment and said first cam-following member is aligned
with another cam track segment having a longer fixed
radius than said one cam track segment.
4,381,433
DRIVE MEANS FOR A TIMING MECHANISM
William E. Wagle, Bloomington, Ind., assignor to Emhart Indus-
tries, Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
Continuation of Ser. No. 205,012, Nov. 7, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,470
Int. a.3 HOIH 43/10
U.S. CI. 200—38 R 6 Claims
1. A timing mechanism comprising
(a) a cam means rotatably carried on a shaft and providing a
program and electrical switches opening and closing in
response to said program.
994
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
(b) rotatable first ratchet teeth of a first major diameter
carried on said shaft and coupled to said cam means for
intermittent rotation therewith,
(c) rotatable second ratchet teeth coupled to and in axial
alignment with said first rotatable ratchet teeth and of a
second major diameter which is less than said first major
diameter,
(d) rotatable third ratchet teeth carried by said shaft in axial
alignment with said first and second ratchet teeth and
independently rotatable from said first and second ratchet
teeth and having a third major diameter which is less than
said first major diameter but greater than said second
major diameter and further having at least one notch of
sufficient depth to provide a minor diameter at least as
small as a minor diameter of said second ratchet teeth,
(e) a drive pawl selectively engaging said first and third
rotatable rachet teeth and said second ratchet teeth when
engaged with said notch, and
(0 individual stop means engaging said first and third ratchet
teeth.
4^1,435
VACUUM aRCUTT BREAKER WITH MEANS FOR
SELECTIVELY LATCHING A WIPE CAGE
Philip Barkan, Stanford, Calif., assignor to General Dectric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,183
Int CL^ HOIH 33/66
U.S. a. 200—144 B 11 Claims
4,381,434
PRESSURE OPERATED ELECTRIC SWITCH AND
ALARM SYSTEM USING SUCH SWITCH
Noel Nicholas, 6, Verona Villas, O'Connell Ave., Limerick,
Ireland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 907,461, May 19, 1978, Pat.
No. 4,263,586, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
826,957, Aug. 22, 1977, abandoned. This application Dec. 18,
1980, Ser. No. 217,605
Claims priority, application Ireland, Aug. 20, 1976, 1867/76
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 21,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 HOIH 21/00
U.S. a. 200—85 R 7 Oaims
"5 1^5
1. A pressure-operated electric switch for use in conjunction
with a bed and adapted for insertion under one leg of the bed
to signal the absence of a patient therefrom, the switch com-
prising: a housing having a base portion and an overlying
cover portion, at least a part of the cover portion being verti-
cally movable relative to the base portion and being biased
upwardly by compression spring means within the housing, the
cover portion being recessed to provide a stable support for the
leg of the bed on the vertically movable part, and switch means
mounted in the housing for actuation upon vertical movement
of said at least part of the cover portion with respect to the base
[>ortion, the switch means being actuated when an external
downward load provided by the bed on said at least part of the
cover portion exceeds a selected threshold value, and the
compression spring means being supported at one end in the
housing by a support member separate from the cover and base
portions and vertically adjustable relative to the base portion in
order to adjust the degree of compression of the compression
spring means and thus the upward bias exerted by the compres-
sion spring means, such adjustment being provided by a screw-
threaded element rotatable from outside the housing and oper-
atively associated with the housing and support member in
such manner that rotation of the element effects vertical move-
ment of the support member relative to the base portion,
whereby the threshold value at which said switch means is
actuated is adjustable in respect of different weights of bed by
rotation of the screw-threaded element.
1. A vacuum circuit breaker comprising:
(a) a sealed, evacuated envelope;
(b) first and second separable, electrical contacts contained
in said envelope, said first contact being movable with
respect to said second contact from a closed f)Osition
when abutting said second contact and carrying normal
current to a fully open position when separated from said
second contact and not carrying current;
(c) wipe means having first and second ends, means for
resiliently biasing apart said ends, and means to limit the
maximum distance of separation between said ends, said
wipe means providing contact wipe when said first
contact is in said closed position;
(d) means for coupling said first contact to said wipe means
first end, said coupling means extending into said enve-
lope;
(e) bellows means for providing a gas-tight seal between said
coupling means and said envelope;
(0 an operating member coupled to said wipe means second
end, for moving said contacts from said closed position to
said fully open position during an opening stroke thereof
and for moving said contacts from said fully open position
to said closed position during a closing stroke thereof;
(g) latch means rendered actuated during said opening
stroke of said operating member for fixedly biasing apart
said wipe means ends to a distance equaling said maximum
distance of separation reduced by a distance substantially
less than the maximum attainable contact wipe; and
(h) latch disabling means rendered actuated during said
closing stroke of said operating member for disabling said
latch means.
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
995
4^1,436
ROTARY ARC TYPE C3RCUIT BREAKER
Yoshifami Nagaoka; Kaiyi Morishima; Hiromi Ishii, all c/o
Nissin Electric Co., Ltd., 47 Umezu-Takase<ho, Ukyo-ku,
Kyoto, 615, Japan, and Georges Bernard, 24, me de la Ri-
charde, 38120 St Egreve, France
FUed Jun. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 162,595
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 2, 1979, 54-91828[U]
Int. a.3 HOIH 33/88
U.S. a. 200—148 A 5 Claims
36 54 48 17 22
1. A gas-blast circuit interrupter comprising:
a gastight enclosure containing an arc extinguishing gas,
a pair of contact members axially separable to draw an arc
between the end portions of said contact members, one of
said contact members being tubular and movable,
a partition wall dividing the enclosure into two chambers of
constant volume, an arc extinguishing chamber and an
expansion chamber,
an opening provided in the partition wall for the gas tight
passage of the tubular movable contact,
a gas aspiration device having a piston and a cylinder coop-
erating so as to produce a flow of gas through said tubular
contact and a blast of gas directed towards said arc,
an opening provided in the tubular movable contact for
establishing a communication between the interior of the
tubular contact and said gas aspiration device during an
initial phase of the opening movement of the contacts and
a communication between the interior of the tubular
contact and the expansion chamber during the further
phase of the opening movement thereby permitting a flow
of blast gas through the tubular contact towards the gas
aspiration device during said initial phase and towards the
gas expansion chamber after said initial phase.
4,381,437
SWITCHING DEVICE
Leo F. Geremia, Wallingford, Conn., assignor to Tri-tech, Inc.,
Waterbury, Conn.
FUed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,404
Int a.3 HOIH 21/82
UJS. Q. 200—153 LB 7 Claims
1. In a switching device comprising a control shaft rotatable
from a neutral position to and beyond a switch actuating posi-
tion, centering means coupled to said control shaft for resil-
iently biasing the same to said neutral position, a switch mecha-
nism having a resiliently depressible actuating member, and
switch actuating means for depressing said actuating member
in response to rotation of said control shaft to said switch
actuating position; the improvement wherein said switch actu-
ating means comprises a cam, coupled to said control shaft,
including a cam flnger extending generally radially with re-
spect to the axis of said control shaft and having a free end
remote from said control shaft and a base end coupled to said
control shaft; a cam follower slidably contacting said cam
fmger to deflect in response to rotation of said cam; and linkage
means coupled with said cam follower for depressing the
actuating member of said switch mechanism when said control
shaft has rotated to or beyond its switch actuating position.
4,381,438
ELECTRIC CONTROL APPARATUS FOR
CONTROLLING INDUCTIVE HEATING
Gerhard Goessler, and Friedrich Koch, both of Oberderdingen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to E.G.O. Regeltechnik
GmbH, Waghaeusel, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 112,679, Jan. 16, 1980, Pat No.
4,303,816. This appUcation Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,141
Oaims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 16,
1979, 2901556
Int a.3 H05B 5/04
U.S. a. 219—10.49 R 11 Claims
*v^
~w
n 2t
s
.::i:^
'carmoL
-
-
P0»0>
nvctK
1 :
j.^c»™a
21 I
1
4^-
1. 1
1: 1
h
1. An electric control apparatus for controlling inductive
heating of a cooking pot at least partly comprising an electri-
cally conductive material, said apparatus comprising:
an electric induction heating coil, for heating the pot by
inducing an electric current thereof;
a device for controlling the electrical power delivered to the
induction heating coil, the control device having a tem-
perature-dependent guiding and control means; and,
a temperature sensing unit adapted to be so positioned on the
cooking pot, over matter being heated therein, as to be
there subjected to rising steam formed in the cooking pot
by the matter being heated, the sensing unit having means
for transmitting control signals to the guiding and control
means.
4,381,439
SELF-CONTROLLED MICROWAVE OVEN
Sttsumu Miyazawa, Chlgasaki, and Norisnke Fnkuda, Tokyo,
both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibanra Denki Kahmhtu
Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 214,978
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 21, 1979, 54-166419
Int. a.3 H05B 6/68; GOIK 5/42
VJS. CI. 219—10.55 B 3 Claims
1. A self-controlled microwave oven comprising:
an oven cavity;
high frequency oscillating means for producing microwaves
for heating of food inside said cavity to be cooked;
a hollow skewer having a closed end inserted in the food and
an open end protruding from the food and which is
formed of a thermal conductive material;
996
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
an expandable hollow bellows secured to the open end of
said skewer which has a hollow inside for communicating
with the hollow inside of said skewer;
a liquid sealed inside said bellows and skewer which is
heated through said skewer and has said bellows expanded
when the food is heated;
sound generating means operably connected to said skewer
and proximate to said bellows, for generating a sound
whenever said bellows expand to a prescribed distance,
wherein said sound generating means includes a plate
spring which is pressed by said bellows when the bellows
is expanded and which generates a sound when the press-
ing force of said bellows overcomes the biasing force of
the plate spring; and
control means communicating with said cavity and con-
nected to said high frequency oscillating means which
supplies an energy control signal to said high frequency
mining the nature of the mode of operation of said elec-
tronic speed controller means;
c. potentiometer means operatively connected to both said
motorized clutch means and said electronic speed control-
ler means, said potentiometer means being operative in
combination with said electronic speed controller means
and said motorized clutch means for effectuating control
over the operation of the rotational motor means, the
linear travel motor means and the weld wire feed motor
means of the welding means;
d. a dual purpose electronic speed controller means opera-
tively connected to said electronic speed controller
means, said dual purpose electronic speed controller
JOO /'"
FWO I REV FWO REV
'\^ 11 vt ■ '°^7 11; 1 ,
ELECTRONIC
SPEED
CONTROLLER
oscillating means in response to a sound generated by said
sound generating means and which thereby controls heat-
ing of the food in said cavity, wherein said control means
includes a microphone for detecting a sound of said sound
generating means to convert it into an electrical signal, a
signal generator having an op)erating member for generat-
ing a signal by operation of the operating member, a first
flip-flop which is reset when power is supplied and set in
response to an output signal of said signal generator, a
second flip-fiop which is reset when power is supplied and
set in response to an output signal of said microphone, an
EXCLUSIVE-OR gate which is connected to the output
terminals of said first and second flip-flops and a switching
element connected to the output terminal of said EXCLU-
SIVE-OR gate for controlling the supply of power to said
high frequency oscillating means and wherein said control
means generates an energizing interruption signal in re-
sponse to a sound of said sound generating means.
4,381,440
CONTROL aRCUTTRY FOR PRODUCING VARIABLY
RIFLED TUBES
George R. Madewell, Soddy, Tenn., assignor to Combustion
Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,511
Int. a.3 B23K 9/04
U.S. a. 219—62 11 Claims
1. An electrical control circuit, employable in cooperative
association with welding means embodying rotational motor
means, linear travel motor means and weld wire feed motor
means, for purposes of effecting the exercise of control over
the deposition by the welding means of ribbing on the inner
wall surface of a tubular member comprising:
a. electronic speed controller means connected in electrical
circuit relation with the rotational motor means, the linear
travel motor means and the weld wire feed motor means
of the welding means, said electronic speed controller
means being operative to control the rotational, linear
travel and weld wire feed of the welding means;
b. motorized clutch means operatively connected to said
electronic speed controller means and operative for deter-
means possessing the dual capability of being able to oper-
ate in either a manual operating mode or an automatic
operating mode, and of being able to operate in either an
increasing operating mode or a decreasing operating
mode; and
e. a speed adjusting switch means connected in electrical
circuit relation with said dual purpose electronic speed
controller means, said speed adjusting switch means being
operative for purposes of coordinating through said dual
purpose electronic speed controller means the speed of
operation established by said electronic speed controller
means for the rotational motor means, the linear travel
motor means and the weld wire feed motor means of the
welding means.
4,381,441
METHODS OF AND APPARATUS FOR TRIMMING
HLM RESISTORS
Patrizia R. Desmarais, and Anthony J. DiTroia, both of Ando-
ver, Mass., assignors to Western Electric Company, Inc., New
York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,284
Int. a.3 B23K 26/00
U.S. a. 219—121 LJ 13 Claims
misiimc M
full I — ^
lOl lint
'7»n
_J
1
umi
C'IC.'I
fomi
Sl/Plr
\ iiiianfo t—
7. An apparatus for trimming a film resistor, which com-
prises:
a gain-producing circuit;
means for determining the resistance value of the resistor;
April 26. 1983
ELECTRICAL
997
means for connecting the resistor in the gain-producing
circuit;
means for establishing a gain level for the gain-producing
circuit related to a basic resistance value of the resistor;
means for selectively adding resistance to the resistor in the
gain-producing circuit to increase the gain to a level not to
exceed the gain level determined by the establishing
means;
means for adding the determined value of the resistor and
the value of resistance determined by the selectively add-
ing means to produce the basic resistance value;
means for trimming the resistor to increase the value thereof;
and
means for stopping the trimming of the resistor when the
trimmed value thereof is equal to the basic value.
11 Claims
/^fop
JLL
1. A unit for reheating pack&ges containing cold pre-cooked
meals, the unit being adapted to rapidly heat up the meals to a
service temperature level and to thereafter hold the meals at
this level, said unit comprising:
A. a case having an apertured partition mounted therein to
form a compartment accessible from the front of the case
for accommodating a stack of said food packages with
air-flow spaces therebetween, the compartment being
spaced from the rear of the case to define a plenum and the
front to define an air curtain passage which communicates
with upper and lower air passages leading to the plenum;
and
B . heating means to heat air drawn from the upper passage
and means to blow the heated air into the plenum to create
a pressure differential between the plenum and the com-
partment, as a result of which the heated air is forced
through the partition into the flow spaces between the
packages to heat the food therein, the heated air also
flovdng from the plenum in a continuous recirculating
loop into the lower air passage, from which the air goes
through the air curtain passage and the upper passage
back to the plenum to thermally isolate the compartment.
MS1,443
PORTABLE UNIT FOR HEATING PACKAGED FOOD
Raul Gulbert, Lot Angelct, Calif., aatignor to Svnaet Ltd., Los
Angeles, Calif.
ContiBuatioB-io-part of Set. No. 277,027, Jua. 24, 1981. ThU
appUcatioB Nov. 17, 1981, Scr. No. 322,084
iBt a? H05B I/OO
MS. a. 219—400 12 Claims
4,381,442
COUNTER-TOP UNIT FOR HEATING PACKAGED FOOD
Raul Guibert, Lot Angelea, Calif., asiignor to Sunset Ltd., Los
Angeles, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 221,208, Dec. 30, 1980, Pat. No.
4,327,279, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 97,787,
No?. 27, 1979, Pat. No. 4,307,286, said Scr. No. 97,787, is a
continuatioB-in-part of Ser. No. 971,381, Dec. 20, 1978, Pat. No.
4,326,497, which is a dlTlsion of Ser. No. 809,775, Jun. 24, 1977,
Pat. No. 4,132,216. This applicatioB Jub. 24, 1981, Scr. No.
277,027
iBt. a.i H05B 1/00
U.S. a. 219—400
1. A unit for reheating packages containing cold precooked
meals, the unit being adapted to rapidly heat up the meals to a
service temperature level and to thereafter hold the meals at
this level, said unit comprising:
(A) a case having a rack therein divided into a series of
compartments each adapted to receive at least one of the
food packages, said rack being positioned in the case to
define a rear space therein;
(B) an air modulator vertically positioned in said rear space,
said modulator having an outer tube provided with a
series of longitudinally-aligned ports each communicating
with a rear opening in a respective compartment, a rotat-
ing inner tube disposed within the outer tube and provided
with a series of angularly-displaced holes which, in the
course of a rotary cycle, sequentially register with a re-
spective port, and means for rotating said inner tube; and
(C) heating means to heat air and means to blow heated air
drawn from the region in front of said rack into the inner
tube to create a pressure differential between said inner
tube and said region, whereby the heated air is sequen-
tially projected at high velocity into the series of compart-
ments through said holes.
4381,444
RANGE SURFACE UNIT RECEPTACLE
Ronald B. DeLoBg, Lowell, aad AItIb J. ScbcttI, Keatwood, both
of Mich., aaaigBort to White Conaolidated iBdustrica, Ibc.,
ClcfclaBd, Ohio
FUed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,047
iBt. a? H05B 3/68
U.S. a. 219—451 8 ClaiBU
1. In a domestic range of the electric type having a horizon-
tal cooking platform supporting at least one electrical resis-
tance type surface heating element, a clip structure for receiv-
ing and supporting a socket member engageable with the ter-
998
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
minal pins of the electrical resistance type surface heating
element, the clip structure comprising:
a fixed hinge portion fastened to the cooking platform;
a movable hinge portion hingedly connected to the fixed
hinge portion and movable relative thereto, the movable
hinge portion being adapted to receive and support the
socket member; and
a spring member connected between the hinge portions, the
spring member biasing the hinge portions at a normal
heating position relative to each other, a section of the
cooking platform being positioned between the spring
member and the heating surface of the heating element at
its normal heating position, the section shielding the
spring member from radiant heat generated by the heating
surface of the heating element, the fixed hinge portion
including a first projection, the movable hinge portion
including a second projection, the spring member being
connected between the projections and supported by the
projections in spaced relation from the remainder of the
hinge portions at their normal positions to minimize ther-
mal conductivity between the hinge portions and the
spring member.
door is moved to its open position and to unblock the inlet
aperture when the door is returned to its closed position.
4,381,445
CASH DISPENSER WITH REJECT DUMP MEANS
Stuart M. Jenkins, Bognor Regis; John Wood, Southsea, and
David Martin, Milton, all of England, assignors )o De La Rue
Systems Limited, London, England
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,365
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 19, 1980,
8005481
Int. a.3 G07F 7/10: G06K 77/00
U.S. a. 235—379 10 Qaims
51-1 ^ K
^' \''.4t''-\
1. A banknote access station for an automatic banknote
dispenser having a banknote delivering device, the banknote
access station comprising:
an enclosure formed with an inlet aperture and a reject
outlet aperture;
means within the enclosure for receiving banknotes from the
delivery device through the inlet aperture, the banknote
receiving means being formed by a platform pivotable
between a first position, in which the platform receives
and supports banknotes fed from the inlet aperture and
also is accessible to the user when the door is open, and a
second position in which banknotes are ejected from the
platform through the reject outlet aperture, in the case of
an incorrect delivery;
a door to the enclosure giving a user access to the platform;
locking means to secure the door in a closed position;
control means for controlling the movement of the platform
and the operation of the locking means, the control means
operating after each dispensing operation either to release
the locking means to allow the user to open the door and
remove the banknotes or to cause the platform to pivot so
as to eject any banknotes thereon along a reject path and
thereafter to return the platform to its first position; and
an inlet aperture cover formed integrally with the door and
moving with the door to block the inlet aperture when the
4,381,446
PHOTOELECTRIC SWTTCH
Toshifuni Fukuyama, Otokuni, and Norio Oi^i, Kyoto, botii of
Japan, assignors to Omron Tateisi Electronics Co., Kyoto,
Japan
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Scr. No. 278,426
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 30, 1980, 55-89555
Int. a.3 HOIJ 40/14
U.S. a. 250—214 R 5 Claims
gT
1. A photoelectric switch comprising a light projecting
segment including a pulse oscillator and a light-emitting ele-
ment adapted to give a pulse light emission in response to an
output pulse of said pulse oscillator, a light reception segment
including a light reception element adapted to yield a light
reception signal on incidence of light, a gate circuit adapted to
gate said light reception signal according to said output pulse
of said pulse oscillator and an integration circuit for integrating
outputs of said gate circuit, and a control circuit for varying
the pulse frequency by controlling said pulse oscillator on
generation of a light reception signal from said light reception
element.
4,381,447
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EVALUATING AND
SORTING SHEETS IN A HIGH SPEED MANNER
Stephen J. Horvath, Bensalem, Pa., and Steven R. Wilcox,
Mount Laurel, N.J., assignors to Brandt, Inc., Bensalem, Pa.
FUed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,891
Int. a.J GOIV 9/04
U.S. a. 250—223 R 12 Claims
•ft,' ..Si: If - I -i, /V iTTta . ~^
1. Microprocessor-based control means for operating docu-
ment handling apparatus comprising means for moving sheets
in a first direction at spaced intervals along a predetermined
path;
sensing means for detecting the passage of sheets and for
detecting predetermined characteristics of said sheets;
at least one of said sensing means being adapted to generate
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
999
a signal upon the passage of the leading edge of each sheet
at the location of said one sensing means;
means for generating timing pulses at a rate which is a func-
tion of the velocity of said sheets moving along said prede-
termined path;
multi-stage counter means being pulsed by said timing
means;
memory storage means;
means responsive to a leading edge signal for transferring
the contents of said multi-stage counter means to a prede-
termined location in said memory storage means;
said microprocessor-based control means further including
means for periodically sampling the contents of said
counter means and for determining the difference between
the count storcu in said predetermined location in said
memory storage means and the count developed by said
multi-stage counter means at the time said counter means
is sampled wherein the difference in said count represents
the location of said sheet along said predetermined path;
document condition examining means positioned at spaced
intervals along said path;
means for temporarily storing examined conditions;
means responsive to predetermined difference values be-
tween the status count stored in said predetermined loca-
tion in said memory storage means and the count sampled
from said multi-stage counter means for examining the
conditions in said teniporary storing means.
4^1,449
NEUTRON-INELASTIC GAMMA RADIATION WELL
LOGGING METHOD AND APPARATUS WITH
BACKGROUND RADIATION ACCOUNTED FOR
Harry D. Smith, Jr^ Hootton, Tex^ MdgBor to Texaco lac,
White Plalaa, N.Y.
DiTlaioii of Scr. No. 44S,091, Mw. 4, 1974, Pat No. 3,946026,
which if a coBtiBuatioB of Ser. No. 322,573, Jaa. 10, 1973, Pat.
No. 3,796377, which is a coatiBoatioB of Scr. No. 145,815. May
21, 1971, abuidoBed. This applicatioa Dec. 26, 1974, Ser. No.
536,700
lat a.3 GOIV 5/00
U.S. a. 250—270 31 Claims
n
y
%
10
"^~M#"
~ Jit
4,381,448
WIDE ANGLE INTENSITY PICKOFF
Aubrey Rodgers, HuntSTille, Ala., aaaignor to The United Statei
of America ai represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Scr. No. 297,795
Int. a.3 G02B 5/J4
U.S. a. 250—227 12 Claims
1. A wide angle light intensity pickoff comprising: a light
source, a light detector, and a light coupling means disposed
between said light source and said light detector, said light
source being adapted for movement with respect to said cou-
pling means, said coupling means having a light receiving face
adjacent to said light source and having a second or output
face adjacent to and coaxial with said light detector, said light
source being positioned for directing a light beam at an acute
angle toward said receiving face for providing a variable light
intensity on said face in response to movement of said light
source with respect to said receiving face.
1. A system for observing earth formation properties com-
prising:
means for irradiating the earth formation with a pulse of
high energy neutrons;
means for detecting over a broad energy band gamma radia-
tion produced by the inelastic scattering of neutrons by
nuclei of the formation elements during an interval of 10^
seconds or less in the early part of said neutron pulse and
for producing signals in response thereto; and
circuit means for converting said inelastic gamma ray signals
to an output signal functionally related to inelastic gamma
rays over a selected, broad energy band to provide an
indication Of the hydrogenous matter content of the earth
formations under observation.
4,381,450
PULSED RADIATION DOSIMETRY APPARATUS
John R. CappeUl, North Reading, Mass., assigBor to IW United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Air
Force, WasUagtoo, D.C.
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Scr. No. 227,558
bit a.i GOIT J/22
VS. a. 250—370 7 Claims
1. A pulsed radiation dosimetry apparatus comprising in
combination:
a radiation detector means to receive a pulsed radiation
signal, said radiation detecting means providing a voltage
signal in response to said pulsed radiation signal,
an attenuator means receiving said voltage signal from said
radiation detector means, said attenuator means providing
more than one level of attenuation,
an integrator means receiving said voltage signal from said
attenuator means, said integrator means integrating said
voltage signal and providing a ramp signal in response
thereto,
a sample and hold means receiving said ramp signal from
1000
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
said integrator means, said sample and hold means sam-
pling and holding said ramp signal for a predetermined
length of time, said sample and hold means providing a
dose rate signal,
a gate driver means receiving a trigger signal, said trigger
signal being coincident with the test of said pulsed radia-
tion signal, said gate driver means providing a first and
It
-^- — 1
11
14
^rreMunTi't
/vre^it/rrut
<i
.Z-
.J^
* X/Jfc »y
equilibrium point proportional to moisture content of said
fluid stream,
means for continuously directing at least a representative
portion of said fluid stream through said moisture-adsorb-
ent means,
SAMPLE n^
second control signal, said first control signal enabling
said sample and hold means to sample and hold said ramp
signal, and,
a display means receiving said dose rate signal from said
sample and hold means, said display means receiving said
second control signal from said gate driver means, said
second control signal enabling said display means to con-
tinuously display said dose rate signal.
4381,451
CORE SELF-POWERED RADIATION DETECTOR FOR
DETERMINING THERMAL AND EPITHERMAL FLUX
Cheng L. Chen, Pittsburgh; Norman P. Goldstein, Mnrrysrille,
both of Pa^ SBd WilUaa H. Todt, Elmini Heights, N.Y„
asdgnors to Westinghoase Electric Corp^ Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Nov. 5, 1900, Ser. No. 204,139
Int CL3 GOIT 3/00
VS. CL 250—390 5 Claims
.^'?
^
^/////////////A
V///////////ZZZ
v///////yyyyyyy^
4,381,452
SYCTEM FOR MEASURING TRACE MOISTURE IN A
GASEOUS STREAM
Mkhei L. Jcncboauie, Darica, DL, assignor to GCA Corpora-
tion, Bedford, Mass.
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,303
Int CL' GOIT i/Oft: GOIN 23/09
UJS. CL 250-392 10 Claims
1. A system for measuring trace moisture in a fluid stream,
comprising
moisture-adsorbent means for accumulating moisture to an
means for irradiating said moisture-adsorbent means with
fast neutrons, and
means for detecting slow neutrons coming from said mois-
txire-adsorbent means indicative of interaction with hy-
drogen nuclei.
4,381,453
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEFLECTING AND
FOCUSING A BROAD ION BEAM
Jerome J. Coomo, Lincolndale, and James M. E. Harper, York-
town Heights, both of N.Y., assignors to Intemational Busi-
ness Machines Corporation, Annonk, N.Y.
FUed Dec 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,661
Int CL' HOIJ 37/08
U.S. CL 250-398 17 Claims
1. A self-powered neutron detector which is responsive to
thermal and epithermal neutron flux from a nuclear reactor
core to generate signal currents which more accurately mea-
sure reactor power, which detector comprises two separate
neutron responsive emitters of two different neutron respon-
sive materials which have differing responses to thermal and
epithermal neutron flux, insulating means about the emitter,
and a relatively non-neutron responsive conductive collector
about the insulating means.
' ■' ^ '
1. A system for deflecting a broad ion plasma beam, compris-
ing:
a ion source for forming an ion plasma;
extraction means for extracting a broad ion plasma beam
from said ion plasma in said ion source;
deflection means including a non-grounded surface located
in the path of said ion plasma beam and positioned at an
angle to said path for deflecting said ion plasma beam to a
target material; and
a grounded screen grid located in front of said deflection
means in the path of said ion plasma beam, said screen grid
having openings which permit passage of the ions in said
ion plasma beam but which block passage of the electrons
in said ion plasma beam;
whereby said ion plasma beam is deflected by said deflection
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1001
means and said grounded screen grid onto said target
material.
4381,454
DOSE EQUIVALENT NEUTRON DOSIMETER
Richard V. GrifBtli, Pteuanton; Dale E. Hankiiis, LiTeniiore,
both of Califs Lnigi Tomasino, Rome, Italy, and Mohamed A.
M. Gomaa, Heli<^lis, Egypt, assignors to The United States
of America as represented by tbe United States Department of
Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 222,867
Int CL' GOIT 1/Oi. 3/00
U.S. CL 250—472.1 8 Claims
12 'IS
1. A neutron dosimeter comprising:
a detecting sheet of material which includes polymer chains
that are easily broken by energetic particles, to detect
charged particles, primarily protons but including alpha
particles and recoiling nuclei, from the interaction of
energetic neutrons with the material; and
a radiator layer which includes a quantity of neutron-to-
alpha particle conversion material which generates ener-
getic alpha particles when struck by neutrons, said layer
lying adjacent to said detecting sheet so that the resulting
alpha particles produce tracks in said detecting sheet;
the density of said conversion material in said radiator layer
being in an amount that produces a number of tracks in
said sheet for moderate energy neutrons striking the layer,
so that the number of tracks produced in the detecting
sheet is roughly proportional to the biological effect of the
neutrons causing the tracks, both for moderate energy
neutrons that strike said radiator layer and cause the gen-
eration of energetic alpha particles that produce tracks in
said detecting sheet, and for high energy neutrons that
strike said detecting sheet to produce tracks, whereby the
track density in said detecting sheet provides a dose equiv-
alent indication for a wide range of neutron energies;
said radiator layer having a mass density of at least 2 milli-
grams per square centimeter, said conversion material
being selected from the group consisting of ^LI and '^,
and said radiator layer incluiding between about 0.01%
and about 3% by weight of said conversion material.
transparent, said photo shielding element being electri-
cally actuated to be opaque or transparent; means for
converting said current of said photoelectric element to a
constant-current; a load for varying the terminal voltage
thereof according to said constant-current, said load being
appUed to a power source through said constant-current;
a testing signal circuit constituting a filter circuit for said
a
19,
POWER
SOURCf
A
PHOTO
SENSOR
J
DETECTING
CIRCUIT
power source; a switch for connecting said testing signal
circuit to said power source, said switch being open to
output a voltage containing a testing signal from said
power source; a circuit for separating the testing signal
from the output voltage of said power source when said
testing signal circuit is separated while said switch is open;
and a driver circuit for actuating said photo shielding
element to be opaque according to said testing signal.
4,381,456
INPUT INTERFACE UNIT FOR PROGRAMMABLE
LOGIC CONTROLLER
YosUtaae Saito; Akibiro Yamada, and Satoshi Yano, all of
Nagaokakyo, Japan, assignors to Onron Tateisi Electronics
Co., Kyoto, Japan
FOed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,684
Claims priority, implication Japan, Mar. 19, 1980, 55-35088
Int CL' H02J 3/00: HOIH 19/14
U.S. CL 307—40 5 n.t»«
S<:
1 • jj
r:f- M
j:
4^L455
FLAME DETECTOR INCLUDING DETECTOR TECTING
APPARATUS
ToaUyaU KoiMri, Fado, Japm, assizor to Tokyo Shibava
DcbU WahwhiH Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
FDed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 2^,605
CUm priority, appHcatioa Japaa, Jn. 20, 1980, 55/82879
IbL CL^ G06K 7/10
UJ5. CL 250—554 8 OaiM
1. A flame detector comprising:
a photoelectric element for detecting a light firom a flame
and imxlncing a cnrrent; a photo shielding element for
shielding the light of the flame from the photoelectric
element when the photo shielding element is opaque and
for permitting said photoelectric element to detect tbe
hght of the flame when said photo shielding element is
1. An input interface unit for a programmable logic control-
ler comprising plural input terminals divided into plural groups
to which external switches are to be connected; a current-volt-
age converter circuit provided for each of said groups of input
terminals for converting current signals applied to each of said
input terminals to voltage signals; plural output terminals con-
nected to input bus lines of a central control unit (CPU) to
which outputs firom said current-voltage converter circuit are
led; generating group assignment data input terminals con-
nected to control bus lines of the central control unit (CPU),
and a power supply controlling means which allows supply of
power for converting operation only to said current-voltage
converter circuit for specific terminal gronps corresponding to
tbe contents of the generating groop assignment data applied
to said generating group assignment data input terminals.
1002
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,457
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING LOSS
OF DATA FROM VOLATILE MEMORY
James P. Wiles, Olean, N.Y^ assignor to Ladco Development
Co^ Inc^ Olean, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,278
Int a.J H02J 9/00
U.S. a. 307— 64 6 Claims
''^;
lO^TASE
ENSOIf.
JO
AC iOUl>C£
CCNTf!OLL£R
--*'-»
AUXiLLARy
A C
70 — '
,.a^
P/STHI
8UTI0N
'L
4,381,458
BACK-UP ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLIES
Michael J. Anstey, Wokingham, and David F. Brown, Thorp-
lands, hoth of FjigianH, assignors to Racal Microelectronic
System Limited, Bracknell, England
Filed Aog. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 290,104
CtaiflM priority, application United Kingdom, Ang. 6, 1980,
8025573; Sep. 24, 1980, 8030819; Feb. 9, 1981, 8103834; Jon. 29,
1981, 8119921
Int a.3 HQ2J 9/02
U.S. CL 307—66 14 Claims
1. A back-up electrical power supply in combination with an
electrically powered device which requires a continuous elec-
trical supply and which is connected to input and output con-
nections and to a normal power supply via plug and socket
means,
plug and socket means connecting the back-up power supply
to the electrical device and to the normal power supply to
enable the back-up power supply and the electrical device
to be removed as a unit from the input and output connec-
tions and the normal power supply, and
4. In an apparatus for preventing loss of data from volatile
memory of user equipment, the improvement comprising:
a portable housing attachable between an AC supply and
said user equipment and having control means for receiv-
ing said AC supply and controlling power to said user
equipment;
means for separably attaching and supplying auxiliary AC
supply to said housing and control means;
means for fdtering electromagnetic interference from said
AC supply and providing a filtered AC supply;
distribution means, remote from and electrically attached to
said housing control means, for distributing said filtered
AC supply and said auxiliary AC supply to plural pieces
of user equipment according to said controlling;
relay means for selectively supplying said filtered AC supply
and said auxiliary AC supply to said distribution means
upon command;
means for switching said AC supply off and on;
means for indicating said switching means is on and said AC
supply is received by said control means;
means for protecting said apparatus from power surges in
said AC supply;
means for presetting adjustable upper and lower limits of a
voltage window;
means for monitoring said filtered AC supply and sensing
voltage dexiations of said filtered AC supply outside of
said window, providing a deviation output signal in re-
sponse to a sensed voltage deviation outside of said win-
dow, and actuating said relay means in resi>onse to said
deviation output signal to disconnect said filtered AC
supply from said distribution means and connect said
auxiliary AC supply to said distribution means in response
to said deviation output signal and to disconnect said
auxiliary AC supply and reconnect said filtered AC sup-
ply to said distribution means upon cessation of said devia-
tion output signal.
circuit means for causing the back-up power supply to take
over the function of providing said electrical supply to the
said device when the device is unplugged together with
the back-up electrical power supply, from the normal
power supply.
4,381,459
POWER-UP aRCUTT FOR MICROPROCESSOR BASED
APPUANCE CONTROL
Curran D. Cotton, Newton, Iowa, assignor to The Maytag Com-
pany, Newton, Iowa
FUed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,559
Int. a.3 HOIH 3/00
U.S. a. 307—139 10 Claims
1. A power-up circuit for a microprocessor based appliance
control, the combination comprising: a power source provid-
ing power between first and second conductors; a first circuit
portion connected across said conductors; a second circuit
portion electrically disconnected from one of said conductors
and from said power source by a normally open switch means
and including a microprocessor control, said first circuit por-
tion including means for controlling said normally open switch
means; means for operatively coupling said first and second
circuit portions including light actuated means in said first
circuit portion for energizing said means for controlling and
further including light emitting means in said second circuit
portion for illuminating said light actuated means; means in-
cluding a touch switch responsive to manual actuation for
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1003
energizing said means for controlling independently of said
light emitting means to effect initial closing of said normally
open switch means and connection of said second circuit por-
tion to said power source, said light emitting means being
operable upon connection of said second circuit portion to said
power source for emitting light to maintain said light actuated
means operable for energizing said means for controlling; and
means connected to said microprocessor control for control-
ling operation of said light emitting means responsive to said
microprocessor control.
4,381,460
BOOTSTRAP DRIVER aRCUIT
Abraham Menachem, Herzlia, Israel, assignor to National Semi-
conductor Corporation, Santa Clara, Calif.
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,485
Int. a.J H03K won. 19/096. 19/20; GllC i/OO
U.S. a. 307—449 5 Claims
Vce
o
Plo-
10 I
20
JlIi.
PI 1/
IMl
I_
H
T41
PZc
'SI
< R
I
I
4,381,461
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER
Peter D. Steensma, Midland Park, N J., assignor to Interna-
tional Telephone and Telegraph Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,860
Int a.J H03B 79/00. 21/02
VS. CL 307—529 23 Claims
1. A frequency synthesizer to generate a selected, adjustable
discrete frequency output signal comprising:
a pair of acoustic means each providing an output signal
having a predetermined frequency versus time character-
istic;
first means coupled to each of said pair of acoustic means to
excite one of said pair of acoustic means with pulses hav-
ing a given repetition frequency and to excite the other of
said pair of means by said pulses after being delayed a
given variable amount; and
second means coupled to each of said pair of acoustic means
to provide said selected discrete frequency output signal;
each of said pair of acoustic means including
a surface acoustic wave interdigital transducer having a
predetermined spatially varying periodicity therealong;
and
said first means including
a source of timing pulses having a repetition frequency
greater than said given repetition frequency,
a programmable frequency divider to provide said vari-
able delay having its output coupled to said other of said
pair of transducers.
^^rd^ZL
«^2'X£U-
J
, l"^"
-
S'trr^fir •
t -
*#*
—
L
'. -
1. A two-phase field effect transistor circuit for selectively
providing an output signal on an output line in response to an
input signal comprising:
means for providing a reference voltage;
means for providing a supply voltage;
means for providing alternating first and second clock sig-
nals;
. a first transistor having a gate coupled to receive the input
signal, a first terminal coupled to receive the supply volt-
age and a second terminal;
a second transistor having a gate coupled to receive the
second clock signal, a first terminal coupled to the gate of
the first transistor, and a second terminal coupled to the
second terminal of the first transistor;
a third transistor having a gate coupled to receive the second
clock signal, a first terminal coupled to the second termi-
nal of the first transistor, and a second terminal;
a fourth transistor having a gate coupled to receive the
second clock signal, a first terminal coupled to the output
line, and a second terminal coupled to receive the refer-
ence voltage;
a fifth transistor having a gate coupled to the second termi-
nal of the third transistor, a first terminal coupled to the
output line and a second terminal coupled to receive the
first clock signal; and
means for providing, a capacitance between the gate of the
fifth transistor and the output line.
a fixed frequency divider having its input coupled to said
source of timing pulses to provide said pulses on its
output which is coupled to said one of said pair of
transducers, and
a gate means having an output coupled to an input of said
programmable divider, a first input coupled to said
source of timing pulses, a second input coupled to said
output of said fixed divider to activate said gate means
to pass said timing pulses to said programmable divider
and a third input coupled to said output of said pro-
grammable divider to block passage of said timing pulse
when a pulse appears at said output of said programma-
ble divider.
4^81,462
CONVERSION OF AVAILABLE ENERGY
Reinhart Radebold, Quastenbornweb 14 a, 1 Berlin 22, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 545,133, Jan. 29, 1975, Pat. No. 4,127,453.
This appUcation Sep. 11, 1978, Ser. No. 941,406
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 30,
1974, 2405134
Int. Q\? G21D 7/02: H02K 44/00
U.S. a. 310—11 39 Claims
1. A system for converting thermal energy into different
forms of energy including electrical energy, comprising:
first means for providing a first circulation of a Uquidous
1004
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
medium, the first circulation including means for heating
the liquidous medium;
second means for providing a second circulation of a differ-
ent gaseous medium, including means (a) for mixing it
with the heated liquidous medium, thereby combining the
first and second circulations; means (b) for causing the
gaseous medium as mixed to expand, thereby accelerating
the liquidous medium; and means (c) for separating the
gaseous medium to continue separately in the second
circulation;
means included in the first circulation for extracting energy
from the accelerated liquid, the liquid being returned to
the means for heating pursuant to said first circulation;
third means included in the second circulation to provide for
recuperative heat exchange of the gaseous medium with
itself whereby the gaseous medium discharging thermal
energy is taken from the means for separating, the gaseous
medium receiving thermal energy being fed to the means
for mixing; and
a thermocompressor included in the second circulation and
including a diffusion for compressing the gaseous medium
having discharged thermal energy in the third means at a
low constant temperature and feeding the gaseous me-
dium following the compressing to the third means to
receive therein discharged thermal energy from the gase-
ous medium taken from the means for separating.
4,381,464
EXTENDED LIFE, MOISTURE RESISTANT ELECTRIC
MOTOR
William J. Schnyder, St. Louis County, Mo., aasignor to Emer-
son Electric Co., St Louis, Mo.
Division of Ser. No. 59,589, Jul. 23, 1979, Pat No. 4,291,455.
This appUcation Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,579
Int a.3 H02K 3/44
U.S. a. 310—45 10 Claims
4,381,463
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRODUONG
ELECTRICAL POWER AND FOR THE SIMULTANEOUS
HEATING OF FLUID, UTILIZING A
MAGNETOHYDRODYNAMIC GENERATOR
Herman Branover, Beer-Sheva, Israel, assignor to Ben-Gurion
University of the Negev Research and Development Author-
ity, Beer Sheva, Israel
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 78,786, Sep. 28, 1979,
abandoned. This application Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,612
Int. Q\? H02K 45/00
U.S. a. 310—11 14 Claims
1. A method for producing electrical power by means of a
magnetohydrodynamic (MHD) generator, comprising
(a) heating a mixture of liquid metal and a low boiling tem-
perature propelling liquid at a relatively low temperature
to form a two-phase liquid metal-vapor flow, the heating
temperature being such as to effect substantially isother-
mal expansion of the vapor bubbles, thereby to accelerate
the two-phase flow;
(b) directing said two-phase metal-vapor flow through an
MHD-generator to generate electricity;
(c) condensing the vapor phase from said two-phase liquid
metal to form liquid metal carrying propelling liquid
droplets; and
(d) recycling and reheating said liquid metal and said propel-
ling liquid droplets to again form the two-phase liquid
metal-vapor flow.
1. An electric motor having a superior service life in high
moisture environments, said motor comprising a stator assem-
bly, a rotor assembly, and means for rotatably mounting said
rotor assembly within said stator assembly, the latter compris-
ing a core made of a plurality of laminations of suitable mag-
netic sheet-like material formed in a stack, each of said lamina-
tions having a central opening and a plurality of notches ex-
tending radially outwardly from said central opening with the
latter forming a bore of said stator assembly and with said
notches forming a plurality of slots extending longitudinally
through said core when said laminations are stacked to form
said core, sheet insulation material of non-water absorbing
synthetic resin material inserted in each of said slots so as to
electrically insulate the sides and bases of said slots, a plurality
of coils of magnet wire, the latter having a coating of electrical
insulation material thereon of suitable non-moisture absorbent
synthetic resin material, said coils being inserted in said slots so
as to constitute the stator windings of the motor, wedges of
suitable non-moisture absorbent synthetic resin material insert-
able into said slots so as to hold said coils therein and to insulate
said coils, said coils being electrically connected to one another
in a predetermined manner so as to form the poles of the motor,
certain of said coils being electrically connected to power
leads with the connections of the magnet wires of these certain
coils and the conductors of said power leads also being re-
ferred to as junctions, an electrical connection insulator being
installed on each of said junctions, said connection insulators
each having a heat shrinkable outer cover and a coating of
mastic-like material on the inside thereof, said coating adhere-
ing said connection insulators to their respective junctions
prior to heat shrinking, said connection insulators being of
larger internal cross section than the diameter of said power
lead and magnet wire constituting a junction so as to permit
said connection insulators to be readily installed on said junc-
tions and to permit liquid electrical insulation to flow into said
connection insulators and around said junctions upon dipping
of the stator assembly into said liquid electrical insulation, said
coating being flowable around said junctions upon heat shrink-
ing of the cover thereby to seal said junctions against moisture,
said stator assembly being insulated as a unit and having at least
one coat of the cured liquid insulation, whereby, upon curing,
excess liquid electrical insulation is forced out of said connec-
tion insulators and said mastic-like coating effectively seals
moisture from said junctions.
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
lOOS
4381,465
STATOR ARRANGEMENT FOR SMALL MOTORS
iOaiu Renkl, Kiiniach, and Helmut Schmidt, Reicbcnberg, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens AktiengescU-
schaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,377
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 30,
1980, 3024674
Int. a.3 H02K 37/00
U.S. a. 310—49 R 6 Claims
1. A stator arrangement for a motor of the type having first
and second stator systems arranged axially in tandem, the
arrangement further comprising:
housing means for enclosing the two stator systems, said
housing means being integrally formed in a substantially
cylindrical shape with first and second end faces, said first
and second end faces being each provided with a plurality
of axial slots; and
a plurality of pole laminations for forming the first and
second stator systems, each of said pole laminations being
associated with one of the first and second stator systems
and having a substantially circular configuration with a
plurality of radial protrusions distributed at unequal angu-
lar intervals around a circumference of said circular con-
figuration, whereby said radial protrusions of said pole
laminations associated with the first and second stator
systems engage respective ones of said axial slots of said
first and second end faces, respectively, of said housing
means, the axial and rotational orientation of said pole
laminations within said housing means being determined
by the axial depth and circumferential position of said
axial slots, so as to provide a specific position within said
housing means for each of said pole laminations.
4,381,466
MAGNETIC CENTRAL ROTARY COUPLING
Werner Laenens, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,080
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 28,
1980, 3012740
Int. Q\? H02K 49/06
U.S. a. 310—103 6 Claims
w. 1
axis of rotation, said inner magnetic device including two
pairs of magnet poles, one pair at each longitudinal end
thereof; and
(b) an outer coupling half having fu^t and second outer
magnetic devices disposed thereon symmetrical to the
longitudinal axis of the inner magnetic device, the magnet
poles of said outer magnetic device adjacent to those of
the inner magnetic device and aligned at an angle of ap-
proximately 30* to the longitudinal axis of the inner mag-
netic device, the improvement comprising said inner and
first and second outer magnetic devices each containing
two rod shaped permanent magnets, the rod shaped per-
manent magnets of the outer magnetic devices being situ-
ated at the locations of the magnet poles of said devices
and the rod shaf>ed permanent magnets of said inner mag-
netic device situated so that their magnet poles are aligned
at an angle of 90* to the longitudinal axis.
4381,467
MULTIPLANAR CONDUCTOR BAR FOR ELECTRIC
MACHINES, ESPECIALLY FOR TURBOGENERATORS
Peter Griinewald, Essen; Peter Jung, Miilbeim, and Rudolf ron
Musil, Berlin, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Kraft-
werk Union Aktiengesellschaft, Miilheim, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Continuation of Ser. No. 20,027, Mar. 13, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,027
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 15,
1978, 2811249
Int. a.3 H02K i/14
U.S. a. 310—213 1 Claim
1. Magnetic central rotary coupling with
(a) an inner coupling half having disposed thereon an inner
magnetic device with its longitudinal axis transverse to the
1. Multiplanar conductor bar for electric machines compris-
ing:
(a) subconductors superimposed radially in a number n of
circumferentially mutually adjacent planes, n being a
whole, even number between six and ten, inclusive, and
transposed by at least 360*;
(b) a total of two groups of two adjacent subconductor
planes, respectively, formed at upper and lower sides of
the multiplanar conductor bar by exclusively mutual
crossover of the semiconductors of said two adjacent
planes;
(c) a total of (n/2)— 1 groups of four adjacent subconductor
planes, respectively, formed at said upper and lower sides
of the multiplanar conductor bar by exclusively mutual
crossover of the subconductors of the respective four
adjacent subconductor planes and exclusively in a transi-
tion between the respective outer and the respective inner
planes of said four planes;
(d) the respective groups of four adjacent planes being mutu-
ally offset at said lower side with respect to said upper side
by two subconductor planes;
(e) each of said subconductors traversing all layer levels
between two crossover points in each subconductor plane
altematingly in descending and ascending order in succes-
sive planes;
(0 the individual crossed-over subconductors of each of said
subconductor planes being stacked so as to form a respec-
tive subconductor column, the subconductor columns
1006
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
being mutually telescoped and united into the multiplanar
conductor bar.
4,381,468
COMMUTATOR MOTOR BRUSH MOUNTING
ARRANGEMENT
Peter Adam, Hochberg, and Ewald Wehner, Wiirzberg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, aasignors to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,380
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 25,
1980,3023803
Int a.3 H02K 13/00
U.S. a. 310—239 8 Claims
being in direct contact with substantially all exposed sur-
faces of said plate except said acoustic wave propagation
region such that a gap is formed between said plate and
said resin layer in said propagation region;
1^^^
1. A commutator motor brush mounting arrangement, the
arrangement being of the type which is secured to a housing of
a commutator motor at a longitudinally axial opening therein,
the longitudinally axial opening being arranged near a commu-
tator of the commutator motor, the arrangement being pro-
vided with a front plate arranged substantially transverse to
the longitudinally axial direction of the motor, the front plate
being arranged at one end of a brush support plate and having
mounting bars projecting axially parallel with the commutator
of the commutator motor and disposed so as to be within the
housing of the commutator motor when the arrangement is
installed thereon, the arrangement being further provided with
a plurality of hammer-shaped brush holders having open bear-
ing shells which are rotatably engaged with, so as to depend
from, respective ones of the mounting bars, the hammer-
shaped brush holders being secured against axial displacement
in one direction by being in contact with the front plate of the
brush support plate, and rotatably displaceable about the
mounting bars, the arrangement further comprising an end
plate affixed to the brush support plate at the mounting bars,
whereby predeterminol portions of the hammer-shaped brush
holders are arranged axially intermediate of the front and end
plates, said end plate being provided with at least one guide
portion for engaging said predetermined portion of a respec-
tive one of the hammer-shaped brush holders, said end plate
securing the hammer-shaped brush holders from being dis-
placed in a second axial direction.
4,381,469
TEMPERATURE STABLE PIEZOELECTRIC DEVICE
Toahio Ogawa, Kyoto, and Klkno Waldmi, Mnko, both of Japan,
aarignors to Mnrata ManofMtiiring Company, Ltd., Japan
FUcd JbL 15, 1980, Ser. No. 169,165
Claims priority, application Japan, Jnl. 20, 1979, 54/92803;
Sep. 3, 1979, 54/113412; Oct 2, 1979, 54/137176[U]
Lit CL' HOIL 41/08
MS. CL 310—313 R 17 Claims
1. A surface acoustic wave device, comprising:
a ferroelectric plate which is polarized in a polarization axis
direction and which has first and second opposing sur-
faces intersecting said polarization axis direction;
an interdigital electrode formed on said first surface of said
ferroelectric plate such that an acoustic wave propagation
region is defined on said plate; and
a resin layer covering said ferroelectric plate, said resin layer
said resin layer including a resistive resin material which
shunts an electric charge produced by the pyroelectric
effect on said first and second surfaces of said ferroelectric
plate.
4,381,470
STRATinED PARTICLE ABSORBER
Jerry G. Leach, Hudson, N.H., and James T. Feamside, Lexing-
ton, Mass., assignors to Hewlett-Packard Company, Palo
Alto, Calif.
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,633
Int a.3 HOIL 41/08
U.S. a. 310—327 3 Gaims
1. A transducer, comprising
an acoustic energy absorbing base,
an array of piezoelectric crystals mounted in spaced parallel
relationship on said base, there being cuts in said base
aligned with the spaces between said crystals,
said base having been molded from a mixture of high acous-
tic impedance particles of different sizes and a binder for
the particles, the portion of the particles of a smaller size
decreasing in a direction away from the interface of said
base and said array of crystals, but the density of the
particles by weight being the same throughout the base so
as to have an acoustic impedance approximately equal to
that of said crystals.
4^1,471
SC-CUT QUARTZ RESONATORS WITH SUPPRESSED
B-MODE
Raymond L. FlUer, Freehold, and John R. Vig, Colts Neck, both
of N J., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,519
Int CV HOIL 41/08
U.S. CL 31&-^353 SCIalma.
1. An SC-cut quartz crystal resonator blank adapted to
oscillate in its desired fimdamental c-mode, comprising: a disc
shaped blank of an SC-cut crystal resonator, a pair of mounting
clips contacting said blank at diametrically of^XMed points on
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1007
the edges ofsaid blank, with said blank oriented so that the ZZ' passage holes and sleeve-shaped electrodes drawn from the
crystallographic axis thereof passes through both of said dia- bottom of the cup at peripheral edges of the electron beam
metrically opposed points, the position of the mounting clips passage holes, the bottom of one electrode assembly opposing
that of a similar electrode assembly, said sleeve shaped elec-
trodes for the opposed assemblies extending in opposite axial
directions and aligned for passage of their respective beams for
establishment of an electron lens and each sleeve-shaped elec-
trode terminating in a substantially field-free region and having
a length equal to at least 50% of an inner diameter thereof and
said inner diameter of said sleeve-shaped electrodes tapered to
gradually increase in diameter to a precision circle toward a
free end thereof from an intermediate point along the length of
Ji D7
the sleeve-shaped electrode.
increasing the b-mode resonator resistance with respect to the
c-mode resistance to a ratio greater than unity to suppress
undesired b-mode oscillation.
4,381,472
ELECTRONIC TUBES
Yoshitada Sakauchi, Mobara, and Masayuki Hikiba, Musa-
shino, both of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 174,230
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 1, 1979, 54-97265
Int a.^ HOIJ 5/50
VJS. a. 313—331 6 Claims
ab'
r 1
k
1
1
1
^6
!
—^ t *-
1. In an electronic tube of the type having a hermetic seal
structure in which a metal cylindrical member having at least
a cylindrical joint portion at the end is bonded to the end of a
ceramic cylindrical member by brazing, the improvement of
said hermetic seal structure wherein said metal cylindrical
member is made of iron, and said cylindrical joint portion has
a wall thickness of O.S mm or less and a height of 1 mm or
more.
4,381,473
IN-LINE TYPE ELECTRON GUN STRUCTURE
Satoru Endoh; Mamom Ikeda; Minoni Yabe; Mitsuru Igarashi,
all of Mobara, and Masaaki Yamauchi, Togane, all of Japan,
assignon to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 172,416
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 25, 1979, 54-93762
Int a.3 HOIJ 29/50
VS. a. 313—414 3 Claims
4,381,474
SOLID STATE STORAGE DEVICES AND SYSTEMS
Dominic A. Cusano, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 30, 1962, Ser. No. 184,642
Int. a.J HOIJ 29/50. 31/00
U.S. a. 315—13 ST 16 Claims
1. In an electron gun structure for a color picture tube as-
sembly having integ^ly formed lenses comprising a plurality
of tubular electrode assemblies, each electrode assembly hav-
ing a cup formed, in its bottom, with three electron beam
1. A solid state storage device comprising: a luminescent
screen including a continuous, crystalline, homogeneous, non-
granular layer of a material consisting of one of a photoclec-
troluminescent phosphor and a cathodoelectroluminescent
phosphor; means including a pair of electrically conducting
layers in contact with opposite surfaces of said phosphor layer
for establishing a unidirectional, transverse electric field
therein; means directing information-containing energy upon
one surface of said phosphor layer, said energy in combination
with the transverse electric field being effective to produce an
intensified visible light image from said screen and to form
within the phosphor layer thereof a volume positive space
charge latent image; and means for flooding said phosphor
layer with energy less effective to produce a visible light image
than said information-containing energy to cause the latent
image previously formed within the phosphor layer to be
displayed as a visible light image.
4,381,475
VARIABLE COUPLING RESISTANCE DELAY LINE FX)R
CROSSED FIELD TUBE
Jean P. Morizot, and Rene Gerber, both of Paris, France, as-
signors to Thomson • CSF, Paris, France
Filed Oct 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,483
Claims priority, appUcation France, Oct 13, 1979, 79 26886
Int a.J HOIJ 25/34
U.S. a. 315— 39J 8 Claims
1. A variable coupling resistance delay line for a crossed
field tube, said tube having two parallel electrodes one a posi-
tive and the other a negative electrode and between which
there is a continuous electrical field £«, the positive electrode
being constituted by a delay line incorporating a sequence of
fingers facing the negative electrode, the structure of the delay
line ensuring the synchronism of the microwave travelling
through it and of an electron beam moving between the nega-
tive electrode and the delay line and the pitch of the fingers
and their distance from the negative electrode being constant,
wherein there is between two successive fingers an interdigital
1008
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
which varies, by modifying the structure of the fingers, sub-
stantially porportionally to the product P///r x(dl/dx) in which
?HF prepresents the microwave power at the point x on the
line and in which dl/dx represents the current gradient deliv-
thyristor, a nonlinear trigger element coupled between a
common connection point of said second and third resis-
tors and said gate electrode of said thyristor, and a capaci-
tor coupled between said common connection point and
said cathode electrode of said thyristor, said thyristor and
said nonlinear trigger element comprising semiconductor
chips, said first through third resistors comprising thick
film resistors, and said capacitor comprising a chip-type
capacitor;
a nonlinear capacitor of a size substantially equal to the size
of said substrate having first and second terminals con-
nected to said first and second leads, respectively, said
nonlinear capacitor being in the form of a thin plate, and
said first and second leads supporting said nonlinear ca-
pacitor in a position adjacent and parallel to said substrate;
a case substantially equal in size to a conventional glow
starter case; and
first and second connecting terminals mechanically coupled
to said case and electrically insulated from said case, said
first and second connecting terminals being adapted to be
electrically and mechanically connected directly to a
conventional glow starter socket, and said first and second
leads being coupled to said first and second connecting
terminals, respectively.
«t»
—7
ered by the voltage supply creating the field E^as a function of
the position x on the line, Py/f and I being measured on the tube
having a constant coupling resistance or calculated by a com-
puter programme, the variation in the interdigital capacitance
bringing about an inverse variation of the coupling resistance.
4,381,476
FLUORESCENT LAMP INSTANTANEOUS STARTING
DEVICE
Hiromi Adachi; Kazunari Inoue, and Hiroshi Ohshita, all of
Kamakura, Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 217,076
Gmbs priority, application Japan, Dec. 20, 1979, 54-166035
Int C\? H05B 39/00
U.S. a. 315—101 : 1 Oaim
8a 9
1. A flourescent lamp starting device for substantially instan-
taneously starting a flourescent lamp, comprising:
a ceramic substrate having components forming a semicon-
ductor switch mounted thereon, said semiconductor
switch comprising a thyristor having anode and cathode
terminals coupled to first and second lead wires, respec-
tively, a first resistor coupled between a gate electrode of
said thyristor and said cathode electrode of said thyristor,
second and third resistors coupled in series with one an-
other between said anode and cathode electrodes of said
4,381,477
aRCUIT FOR A PICTURE DISPLAY DEVICE FOR
CONVERTING AN INPUT D.C. VOLTAGE INTO AN
OUTPUT D.C. VOLTAGE
Christianus H. J. Bergmans, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor
to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,937
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Nov. 4, 1980,
8006018
Int. a.3 HOIJ 29/70 29/76
U.S. a. 315—408 8 Claims
1. A circuit for a picture display device for converting an
input d.c. voltage into an output d.c. voltage which is substan-
tially independent of variations of the input voltage and/or
variations of a load connected to the output voltage, compris-
ing a transformer whose primary winding is part of a first re-
sonant network which also includes a first and a second
capacitor, switching means at line frequency operative to
apply the voltage across the first capacitor to the primary
winding, the switching means comprising a controllable
switch connected in series with a first diode and with a
second diode connected in parallel with the series connection
of the switch and the first diode an inductance having one
end connected to a first terminal of the input voltage and
the other end to the primary winding, means connecting
the switch to a second terminal of the input voltage, means
coupling the inductance to the resonant network via a
third diode, means connecting a secondary winding of the
transformer to a fourth diode connected in turn to a
smoothing capacitor for generating the output voltage, a saw-
tooth current fiowing during operation through the primary
winding flowing during a first portion of the trace period
thereof through the first diode and during the remaining, sec-
ond portion of the trace period through the second diode and
through the switch, a supply current flowing through the
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1009
inductance causing energy to be stored therein while a current
flowing during the cut-ofT period of the switch through the
third diode and through the inductance replenishes energy
losses, the retrace period of the said sawtooth current being
determined by the elements of the first resonant network
and the conduction period of the switch being dependent
on the output voltage, a fifth diode serially connected to
the controllable switch and a sixth diode coupled in parallel
with the series connection of the switch and the fifth diode,
a second resonant network comprising a second inductance,
a trace and a retrace capacitor being included between
the connecting point of the fifth and the sixth diode and
the connecting point of the fourth diode and the smoothing
capacitor, through which second inductance there flows dur-
ing operation a second sawtooth current of line frequency
which flows during a first portion of the trace period thereof
through the sixth diode and during the remaining, second
portion thereof through the fifth diode and the switch, the
retrace period of the second sawtooth current being deter-
mined by the elements of the second resonant network and the
starting moment of the retrace period of the second sawtooth
current coinciding with the starting moment of the retrace
period of the first sawtooth current.
4^1,479
ELECTRIC MOTOR CHOPPER CO^f^ROL APPARATUS
AND METHOD
Henry J. Wealing, Pittibiirgh, and Junes H. Franz, Jr^ Morryt-
Tille, both of Pa., iMignora to Wettingiioiisc Electric Corp.,
Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,227
Int a.J H02P 5/06
VJS. a. 318—317 10 Claims
4,381,478
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A LINEAR SYNCHRONOUS
MOTOR
Takashige Sa^jo, Kunitachi; Hanio Ikeda, Hyuga; Kiyoshl
Nakamura, and Shigeyoshi Koike, both of Katsuta, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd. and Japanese National Rail-
ways, both of Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,372
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 7, 1980, 55-27974;
Mar. 7, 1980, 55-27975; Mar. 7, 1980, 55-27976; Mar. 7, 1980,
55-27977
Int. a? H02P 5/40; H02K 41/00
U.S. a. 318—135 21 Qaims
^p-^p^ZHjA-
CUBHENT
MaVEFOm
P*TTEWl
GtKIUTOd
7
IB
L
POWtfi
F
-i aTCCTMW
Device
1. In control apparatus for a chopper having an ON opera-
tion and an OFF operation, said chopper having a commuta-
tion capacitor with a charge voltage and being operative to
control the energization current of an electric motor, the com-
bination of:
means for providing a first pulse signal for determining the ON
operation of said chopper,
means for providing a second pulse signal for determining the
OFF operation of said chopper,
means for comparing the actual value of at least one of said
charge voltage and said motor current with a predetermined
reference value, and
controlling the time period relationship between said second
pulse signal and said first pulse signal to increase the charge
voltage when said actual value is less than said predeter-
mined reference value.
4,381,480
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A BLOWER MOTOR
Toshizo Hara, Kawashima; Shii^i Sutoh, Annaka, and Toshio
Kojima, Kounan, all of Japan, assignors to Diesel Kiki Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,835
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55-40230
Int. a.3 G05B 5/00
U.S. a. 318—471 10 Claims
1. A control system for a linear synchronous motor compris-
ing:
a linear synchronous motor having a field magnet and arma-
ture coils;
power converter means for supplying a polyphase AC power
of a variable frequency and a variable voltage to said arma-
ture coils;
position detecting means for detecting a relative position of
said field magnet to said armature coils;
means responsive to an external speed pattern and for generat-
ing a frequency pattern of said motor;
means for producing a propulsion force pattern in accordance
with a phase difference between the output of said frequency
pattern generator and the output of said position detecting
means;
means for generating a current waveform pattern synchro-
nized with the output of said position detecting means;
means for producing a current pattern of said armature coils by
computing the output of said current waveform pattern
generator means and the output of said propulsion force
pattern producing means; and
means for controlling said power converter means in accor-
dance with said current pattern.
2D
1
— 1 * r
!9
^-iu^sT^?]
:*1 i i
1. An apparatus for controlling the blower motor of a device
having a heater core receiving coolant from the engine of a
vehicle for heating at least a portion of the air discharged into
the passenger compartment of the vehicle, comprising:
means for producing a first signal having a level varying in
accordance with the difference between a desired temper-
ature in the passenger compartment and the actual tem-
perature in the passenger compartment;
means for generating a second signal having a level propor-
1029 O.G
1010
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
tional to the temperature of the coolant for the engine of
the vehicle;
means responsive to said first and said second signals for
producing a control signal having a level varying in accor-
dance with the level of said first signal but limited in
accordance with said second signal; and
means responsive to said control signal for driving the
blower motor at a speed proportional to the level of the
control signal so that the maximum speed of the blower
motor is proportional to the temperature of the engine
coolant.
4^1,482
SINGLE-PHASE, REVERSIBLE INDUCTION MOTOR
Tabito Doniwa, Atsngi, Japan, assignor to Daiichi Dentso Kaba-
shiki Kaisha, Japan
FUed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,672
Gainis priority, application Japan, Mar. 14, 1980, 55-31544
Int. a.3 H02K 16/02
U.S. Q. 318—816 7 Oaims
4,381,481
CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A STEPPING MOTOR IN
BATTERY-OPERATED INSTRUMENTS
Frieder Knppers, Schramberg; Bemhard Scherzinger, Berkheim;
Friedrich Assmus, and Hans Flaig, both of Schramberg, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Gebruder Junghans
GmbH, Schramberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,783
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 7,
1979, 2944872
Int aj H02K 37/00
U.S. Q. 318— 696 13 Claims
osciLLtm
I ^-
--1 OimOEl
\ r^
sricran
DO 'an
oniti
t^
oettr
11^
12,
m
1. A circuit for the control of a stepping motor, comprising:
an oscillator circuit;
a divider circuit for producing timing signals from the out-
put signals of said oscillator circuit;
a drive circuit for the generation of pulses to actuate a field
coil of a stepping motor;
a measuring device for detecting current flowing through
the field coil of the stepping motor and producing an
output signal related thereto;
a detection circuit for detecting the variation over time of
the flow of the current through the field coil, and for
terminating said actuating pulses upon detection of a
predetermined change in the current;
a delay circuit for inhibiting operation of said detection
circuit for a first predetermined period of time with re-
spect to the onset of each actuating pulse, wherein said
first predetermined period of time is determined so as to
insure that a derivative of the variation over time of the
current under all operating conditions of the stepping
motor has at least attained a minimum value, to thereby
insure that the duration of said actuating pulses is not less
than said first predetermined period of time; and
a timing circuit for insuring that the duration of said actuat-
ing pulses does not exceed a second predetermined period
of time.
1. A single-phase, reversible induction motor comprising:
two cylinderical rotors disposed side by side on the same axis
of rotation, the rotors being composed of laminated iron cores
and provided with grooves of the same number disposed in
parallel with the shaft and on respective surfaces of the cylin-
drical rotors at regular intervals; two two-pole fisld systems
respectively composed of laminated iron cores and surround-
ing the rotors, and coils for exciting the field systems, respec-
tively, the field systems and the coils being arranged so that the
directions of passage through the rotors of magnetic fluxes
emanating therefrom be perpendicular to each other; a switch-
ing circuit for reversing the phase of a single-phase alternating
current supplied to one of the coils; conductors of a magneti-
cally permeable material fixedly secured to all the grooves of
one of the rotors but electrically isolated from the rotor iron
core; and conductors of a magnetically-non-permeable mate-
rial are fixedly secured to all the grooves of the other rotor but
electrically isolated from the rotor iron core, corresponding
conductors of the two rotors being interconnected at one ends
for each groove and connected at the other ends to respective
conductors for common connection use.
4,381,483
CHANGE SYSTEM FOR VEHICLE BATTERY WITH
RELAY ACTUATED CHARGE INDICATOR
Katsuya Muto, Kariya; Takeshi Nakamoto, Obu; Isamu Nagase,
and Shigeru Sawada, both of Kariya, all of Japan, assignors to
Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
FUed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,515
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 21, 1980, 55-36612
Int a.3 H02J 7/14
U.S. a. 322—99 15 Claims
1. A charging system for a vehicle battery, comprising:
an alternator assembly having an alternator, main and auxil-
iary rectifiers and a voltage regulator, said alternator
having a field coil and a three-phase generating coU, said
main and auxiliary rectifiers being respectively interposed
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1011
between said generating coil and said battery, and be-
tween said generating coil and said field coil;
a switch for supplying said field coil with an initial exciting
current from said battery;
a voltage detector responsive to the voltage from said auxil-
iary rectifier, and having at least one element whose impe-
dance is variable in accordance with said voltage;
means for indicating whether the voltage generated by said
alternator and applied through said auxiliary rectifier is
above a predetermined value or not; and
a switching circuit having a relay with a winding and nor-
mally closed contacts, said relay being arranged such that
current flowing through said winding is controlled in
accordance with the variation in impedance of said ele-
ment, said indicating means being connected to one of said
normally closed contacts so as to be energized when said
normally closed contacts are in a closed state, said relay
being energized when said voltage detector detects that
the voltage from said auxiliary rectifier is greater than said
predetermined voltage, to open said normally closed
'contacts.
ond transistor substantially independent of the beta ampli-
fication factor of said first and second transistors.
4,381,485
MICROWAVE TEST APPARATUS AND METHOD
Donald H. Steiobrecher, Carlisle, Mass., assignor to Stein-
brecher Corporation, Woburn, Mass.
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,575
Int. a.' GOIR 27/04
U.S. a. 324—58 C 8 Claims
4,381,484
TRANSISTOR CURRENT SOURCE
Robert B. Jarrett, Tempe, Ariz., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, 111.
FUed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,117
Int. a.3 G05F 3/0%
U.S. a. 323—316 17 Claims
lloul'i^^r^f
^r.ViW^n
1. A method of monitoring the characteristics of an absorb-
tion type resonant cavity comprising:
a. electronically tracking the resonant frequency of the
cavity and obtaining in the course thereof an electrical
signal related to resonant frequency, and
b. concurrently therewith, electronically tracking the ab-
sorbtion level of the cavity at resonance and obtaining in
the course thereof an electrical signal related to the ab-
sorbtion level.
1. A current source, comprising:
a pair of transistors each having an emitter, a collector and
a base, the base and emitter of each of said pair of transis-
tors being commonly coupled to each other respectively
and coupled to a first terminal at which is supplied a first
operating potential, said collector of the first one of said
transistors being coupled to an output of the current
source, said emitter of said first transistor having an
area N times greater than the area of said emitter of said
second transistor;
amplifying circuit means having an output coupled to said
bases of said pair of transistors and an input including an
input and an output transistor coupled respectively to said
input and output of said amplifying circuit means and
resistive means coupled between said output transistor and
a second terminal at which is supplied a ground reference
potential such that a system, low frequency dominant pole
is formed at said input of said amplifying means;
current source means for supplying a constant reference
current at an output, said output being coupled to said
input of said amplifying means;
current mirror means having first and second inputs coupled
respectively to said collector to said second transistor and
said current source means; and
said current mirror means and said amplifying means provid-
ing a feedback loop for causing the current sourced from
said collector of said first transistor to be N times greater
than the current sourced from said collector of said sec-
4,381,486
APPARATUS FOR CHECKING FOR ELECTRICAL FRFT
BREAKDOWN IN KINESCOPES
Merle E. Hertzler, El?erson, Pa., and James S. Stelzer, Marion,
Ind., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,846
Int. a.' GOIR il/024
U.S. a. 324—404 12 Claims
1. An apparatus for checking for electrical breakdown of the
frit seal between the funnel and the screen of a kinescope
envelope having an internal conductive coating in said funnel
and in a neck affixed to said funnel comprising:
means for loosely supporting said kinescope envelope in the
vicinity of a particular location of said apparatus;
floating positioning means for closely receiving said neck
1012
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
when said kinescope envelope is positioned in said vicin-
ity;
means for orientating said funnel in a selected orientation
with respect to said apparatus, said means for orientating
including a plurality of brackets arranged for simultaneous
movement toward the sides of said kinescope envelope,
each of said brackets including at least one bumper for
rotating said kinescope envelope toward said selected
orientation;
means for positioning and securely maintaining said floating
positioning means and said kinescope envelope in said
particular location;
drape-like electrical contact means suspended from said
means for orientating for movement against a substantial
portion of said frit seal to establish electrical continuity
between said frit seal and said drape-like contact;
probe means, including a movable electrical contact, ar-
ranged for insertion into said funnel portion through said
neck portion;
and means for moving said movable electrical contact
against said conductive coating.
4,381,487
RESONATOR COUPLED DIFFERE>fnAL AMPLIHER
Bert K. Erickson, Fayetteville, N.Y., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, New York, N.Y.
Continiiatioii of Ser. No. 102,226, Dec. 10, 1979. This application
Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,494
Int. a.3 H03F 3/191
U.S. CI. 330—306 8 Oaims
1. A bandpass amplifier circuit of the type which is respon-
sive to a DC power supply, for band limiting and voltage
amplifying a signal applied thereto comprising:
(a) a first transistor having a base, a collector, and an emitter
the first transistor being connected in base input configu-
ration;
(b) a second transistor having a base, a collector, and an
emitter, said base being connected to ground through a
capacitor;
(c) means adapted for connection to the power supply for
coupling a first voltage to the collector of the first transis-
tor;
(d) impedance means, adapted for coupling to the power
supply, coupled to the collector of the second transistor;
(e) means responsive to the power supply and coupled to the
bases of the transistors for biasing each of the transistors in
their active regions;
(0 a first semiconductor current source circuit connected in
series with the emitter of the first transistor;
(g) a second semiconductor current source circuit connected
in series >vith the emitter of the second transistor;
(h) a series resonator coupling the emitters of the first and
second transistors.
4,381,488
DYNAMIC VOLUME EXPANDER VARYING AS A
FUNCTION OF AMBIENT NOISE LEVEL
Jobst P. Fricke, Wulinerstrasse 100, Koln, and Ulrich R. Mul-
ler, Carl v. Linndstrasse 36, Frechen, both of Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,514
Int. a.3 H04B ]/64
U.S. O. 333—14 9 Qaims
AMPLITOe DETECTOB
l"^
SONAl. "^ ^-,
1
AUDC 3KiNAL
mOM RAOK)
RECerVER FITER
LOW PASS FITEB
BAND PASS f LTER
BAND PASS FITER
BAND PASS FlTEn
BAND PASS FLTER
2ei>
1. Audiosignal amplifier circuit for an audiosignal repro-
ducer which is adapted for use in low noise level surroundings
for high fidelity reproduction of audiosignals which have
undergone volume compression at a source,
comprising, in accordance with the invention
a controllable dynamic volume expander (20) having the
precompressed audio signals applied thereto;
and means (12, 32, 32a) connected to and for controlling the
degree of dynamic expansion by the dynamic volume
expander of the precompressed signals as a function of
ambient noise levels, in a direction of increasing the dy-
namic range of expansion of the expander with decreasing
noise levels.
4,381,489
PASS HLTER ORCUIT ARRANGEMENT
Jonathan R. Canning, deceased, late of Burgess Hill, England
(by Francis R. Canning, administrator); Kenneth W. Mould-
ing, Horley, and Gordon A. Wilson, Reigate, both of England,
assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 142,940, Apr. 23, 1980, abandoned.
This application Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,435
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 9, 1979,
7916112
Int. a.3 H03H 11/08
U.S. a. 333—215 3 Qalms
1. A pass filter circuit arrangement having (a) a first resonant
circuit including a first inductive element and a first capaci-
tance, (b) a second resonant circuit including a second induc-
tive element and a second capacitance, and (c) a bilateral cou-
pling between said inductive elements, said first inductive
element being constituted by the impedance presented by a
first port of a first gyrator circuit which has a third capacitance
in parallel with its second port, said second inductive element
being constituted by the impedance presented by a first port of
a second gyrator circuit which has a fourth capacitance in
parallel with its second port, and said bilateral coupling includ-
ing a first substantially unilateral signal path from one port of
the first gyrator circuit to one port of the second gyrator
circuit and a second substantially unilateral signal path from
the other port of the second gyrator circuit to the other port of
the first gyrator circuit, said first signal path bypassing each of
said other ports of said gyrator circuits and said second signal
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1013
path bypassing each of said one ports of said gyrator circuits,
whereby a loop is formed by said gyrator circuits and said flrst
and second signal paths, each of said signal paths being devoid
of elements having substantial reactance at the resonant fre-
quency of either of said resonant circuits, characterized in that
each of the gyrator circuits comprises a first and a second
voltage-controlled current source, each of said first current
sources having a first and a second input, which constitute a
differential pair of inputs, and a first and a second output,
which constitute a differential pair of outputs, the first input of
each first current source being connected to the output of the
second current source of the corresponding gyrator circuit and
the input of each second current source being connected to the
first output of the first current source of the corresponding
gyrator circuit, one of the current sources of each gyrator
circuit being inverting from the input thereof, which is con-
I 1
20^
/-
14
15
r
16
18 20A 21 A 19
^21
17
> •IP2
nected to an output of the other current source of the corre-
sponding gyrator circuit, to the output thereof, to which an
input of the other current source of the corresponding gyrator
circuit is connected, and the other of said current sources of
each gyrator circuit being non-inverting from the input
thereof, which is connected to an output of the one current
source of the corresponding gyrator circuit, to the output
thereof, to which an input of the one current source of the
corresponding gyrator circuit is connected; said first signal
path includes a coupling from the second output of the first
current source of one gyrator circuit to the second input of the
first current source of the other gyrator circuit, and said sec-
ond signal path includes a coupling from the second output of
the first current source of said other gyrator circuit to the
second input of the first current source of said one gyrator
circuit.
4^1,490
MAGNETIC STATE SELECTOR
Harry E. Peters, P.O. Box 1877, Tuscaloosa, Ala. 35403
FUed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,603
Int. a.3 HOIF 5/00
U.S. a. 335—210 3 aaims
1. An improved magnetic state selector comprising multiple
even numbered magnets, pole pieces, side plates, and connect-
ing posts wherein the pole pieces are adjustable in five degrees
of freedom;
said magnets having attached thereto the said pole pieces,
said pole pieces being tapered in the horizontal plane from
the approximate width of the magnets to a narrow vertical
face;
said magnets and attached pole pieces being regularly
spaced in the horizontal plane about a bore point and
radial to said point, the narrow faces of said pole pieces
being spaced equidistant from and near to and, selectively,
adjustable in a range from nearly parallel to an axis to
parallel to an axis perpendicular to said horizontal plane
and passing through said bore point;
each of said magnets being attached to a side plate, the side
of the magnet being attached to the side plate being on the
opposite face of the magnet from the pole piece of said
magnet;
said side plate, in the horizontal plane, being perpendicular
to a radial from the bore point at the center of the side
plate; said radial, in the horizontal plane, being the center-
line of the pole piece and magnet;
said connector posts being perpendicular to said horizontal
plane and perpendicular to and centered on a radial from
the said bore point angularly equidistant from the radials
to the centerlines of the adjoining magnets and pole
pieces;
r ""
A --1 -L
J .1
j
fe
said connector posts having a multiplicity of holes and posi-
tioning fasteners therein, in the vertical plane of each
adjoining side plate, said holes and positioning fasteners
having a horizontal centerline, and the diameter of each
positioning fastener hole being slightly larger than the
diameter of the positioning fastener therein, said position-
ing fasteners extending into and fastened to each adjoining
side plate;
said f>ole pieces, side plates and connecting posts being made
of structurally rigid high permeability soft magnetic mate-
rial;
said side plates being so centered about said connecting posts
as to allow radial movement relative therto in an amount
not exceeding the difference between the diameters of the
connector post holes and the positioning fasteners therein.
4,381,491
DEVICE TO SLOW SOLENOID ACTUATION MOTION
Peter J. Vogelgesang, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, Saint Paul, Minn.
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,260
Int. a.3 HOIF 7/08
U.S. a. 335—257 6 Claims
18
ID
n <
1. A noise reduction device for use with a solenoid having a
movable armature therein, said device comprising
1014
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
resilient means for defining a container having a predeter-
mined internal volume,
a dilatant material filling said container, which material has
as one of its properties at ambient temperatures, a non-
resilient deformation when subjected to slow steady state
stress, and a highly resilient resistance to deformation
when subjected to a rapid shock-like stress, and
means for mounting said device in the path of the armature
and in opposition to the movement of the armature, to
afford a resistance to rapid changes in the acceleration of
the armature while slowly deforming in response to the
force applied by the armature.
4,381,492
APPARATUS FOR MAGNETIZING MULTIPOLAR
PERMANENT MAGNETS
Erich Steingroever, Flensburger Strasse 33, 53 Bonn, and Die-
trich Steingroever, Bergisch-Gladbach, both of Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,922
Galms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 25,
1980, 3031983
Int. aj HOIF 13/00
U.S. a. 335—284 u Qaims
'»ls<« S'«IS «IS
* " 1
« (
I , -
i 5b
U » ^V« '-7,
1. Apparatus for magnetizing a permanent magnet body to
produce magnetic poles of successively alternating polarities
on at least one surface of the body, comprising:
an array of pairs of elongated electrical conductors to be
disposed in close proximity to said surface to be magne-
tized, the conductors of each pair being laterally spaced
from each other and each of the pairs of conductors being
laterally spaced from each other to define in the spaces
between conductors of each pair a magnetic pole of one
polarity and to define in the spaces between adjacent pairs
of conductors a magnetic pole of the opposite polarity;
a pair of magnetizing direct current supply leads disposed in
a predetermined path along a first portion of said array;
one end of each of the conductors in each of said pairs of
conductors being connected to a respective one of said
pair of current supply leads at said first portion of said
array;
the other ends of each of the conductors in each pair of
conductors being connected to each other at a location in
said array remote from said first portion and having at said
remote location the same electrical potential in each of
said pairs of conductors, and;
a bridge conductor connected to all of said pairs of conduc-
tors at said remote locations.
4,381,493
VISUAL DISPLAY SYSTEM
Robert S. Mason, 7311 Alpine Way, Tujunga, Calif. 91042
FUed Oct 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,777
Int a.J G06F 3/14
VJS. a. 340—27 R 6 Claims
1. A visual display system for aircraft flight personnel, said
system comprising, in combination:
(a) a plurality of separate visual display devices;
(b) a manually operable control panel connected to all of
said display devices; and
(c) power means connected to said display devices and said
control panel, said control panel including:
i. on-off switch means connected to said power means and
said display devices; and
ii. visual display input means, including:
a. multi-position selector switch means, adapted to
simultaneously activate both
(1) a selected one of a plurality of legends relating to
flight characteristics positioned on said display
devices for display, and
^,T-' v. '►. -* " '
!' •
^1 m'i' -Vi";i'
I 1 t 1 1 T'
•^■■.L.t v,t Ltd -ivA^ ^^
\ '•■'■fit., £*\ ' .«_Vtn. i,-
* :. ■ ■.T'b
K I >, ' "-^
"O . L'BiT ^ , W1 *0 I L>O.T ■< I r T
.rrir^rV. -v-:v.
r ! !
r. .,<-,,
M
- Air. . '
I
to ■ rc> ro re ro
^*ll. BCt- BC'-. "^ftCL-^ :b(.Lt BCtTl
ILAILH tAIt-w; lArf" L*'C*«' i>''.H lAI^M
!=< 5€. 5B
o .:) o
(2) circuit means for selectively allowing or prevent-
ing the display of a numeral in a display window on
said display devices,
b. multi-position numeral selector switch means to pro-
vide input of preselected numbers to said display
devices for display, and
c. visual display selector means to determine which of
said display devices is provided with and displays said
input.
4,381,494
INTERCHARACTER GAP DETECTOR FOR MICRS
Daniel A. Wisner, Milan, Mich., assignor to Burroaghs Corpora-
tion, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Oct (, 1980, Ser. No. 194,045
Int a.} G06K 9/20
VJS. a. 382^-64 9 daims
1. In a character recognition system, means for determining
whether magnetic material is present in a particular concentra-
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1015
tion in an area of a document scanned by a magnetic character
read head, comprising:
means responsive to raw signals from a magnetic character
read head for providing output signals, said output signals
including fu^t signals which are generated by passage of
the read head past magnetic material which is present in a
particular concentration and second signals denoting pas-
sage of the read head past areas where magnetic material
is present in less than the particular concentration;
|ClOC»[r?0
_J
said means responsive to raw signals including a threshold
detector including two differential comparators coupled
to produce said fu^t signals and said second signals, where
the first signals include extraneous noise and the second
signals are substantially free of noise; and
means coupled responsive to said first signals and said sec-
ond signals to establish the presence or absence of mag-
netic material in the particular concentration for periods
determined in accordance with said signals.
(f) means coupled to one of said terminals to sample and hold
the output of said digital-to-analog converter;
(g) means for detecting a linearity error in said digital-to-
analog converter output signal when said digital signal for
error detection is coupled as an input thereto, coupled to
the other terminal of said means to couple the input;
(h) a memory for storing the output of said means for detect-
ing an error;
(i) means to write the output of said means for detecting into
said memory; and
(j) means to read the dato from said memory and couple it as
the signal for error compensation at the input to said
digital-to-analog converter.
4,381,496
ANALOG TO DIGITAL COMVERTER
Ernest A. Carter, Austiii, Tex., anignor to Motorola, Inc^
Schaumburg, 111.
FUed Not. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 202,953
Int. a.' H03K 13/02
U.S. a. 340—347 AD 2 CtaiuM
4,381 495
DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER WITH ERROR
COMPENSATION
Masao Hotta, Hachioiui; Keiyi Maio, Tokyo; Norio Yokozawa,
Fuchu, and Hiromi Nagaishi, Hachioi^i, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,137
' Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct 24, 1979, 54/136412
Int. a.3 H03K 13/02
U.S. a. 340—347 DA 6 Claims
UbJ
is 5 >- ?c a
44 "JT A^
, 1 1 I
1. A digital-to-analog conversion system comprising:
(a) a digital-to-analog converter;
(b) means for selectively supplying to said analog digital
converter:
(i) at least one set of digital input signals and a signal for
error compensation; and
(ii) a digital signal for error detection;
(c) means to selectively couple either said one set of digital
input signals and said signal for error compensation or said
signal for error detection to said converter;
(d) means to generate a switching signal having a predeter-
mined period and duration, said switching signal coupled
to control said means to selectively couple to thereby
cause it to alternately couple said one set of digital input
signals and said signal for error compensation and said
signal for error detection to said converter;
(e) distribution means for selectively coupling the output of
said digital-to-analog converter to two different terminals,
said means receiving a control input from said means to
generate;
1. A successive-approximation analog -to-digital converter
comprising:
comparator means for producing an output in response to an
input thereto exceeding a predetermined threshold volt-
age;
a plurality of binary weighted capacitors, including first and
second one-half unit capacitors comprising a unit capaci-
tance, each of the capacitors having a first terminal cou-
pled in common to the input of the comparator means, and
a second terminal;
voltage reference means for producing at least first and
second predetermined reference voltages, and an offset
voltage having a predetermined value between the first
and second reference voltages;
sample means, operative during a sample phase, for storing a
sample of an unknown analog input voluge on the largest
of the capacitors while shorting the comparator means,
and for simultaneously coupling the second terminals of
each of the other capacitors except the first one-half unit
capacitor to the first reference voltage while coupling the
second terminal of the first one-half unit capacitor to the
offset voltage; and
successive-approximation means, operative during a conver-
sion phase following said sample phase, for converting
said sample to a binary representation thereof by succes-
sively coupling the second terminals of the capacitors,
from the largest to the smallest, to the second reference
voltoge, and, in response to each such coupling which
produces the output from the comparator means, recou-
pling such second terminal to the first reference voltoge.
1016
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4^1,497
DIGITAL-TO-ANAtOG CONVERTER HAVING
OPEN-LOOP VOLTAGE REFERENCE FOR
REGULATING BIT SWITCH CURRENTS
Willuun J. Lillis; Jimmy R. Naylor, Anthony D. Wang, and
Robert L. White, all of Tucson, Ariz., assignors to Burr-
Brown Research Corporation, Tucson, Ariz.
FUed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,858
Int. a.3 H03K 13/05
U.S. a. 340—347 DA 25 Qaims
^S^(V ^A^ "V^
^'V^- •v^/v
» . 1 . -I
-If- ^
■«• f*- »» »
-.J
taining the bias voltage in a predetermined relationship
with the reference voltage for maintaining said plurality of
bit switch currents substantially constant, said circuit
means including an emitter follower drive leg for provid-
ing a low impedance source of the bias voltage and for
isolating said reference voltage conductor from transients
imposed upon the bias voltage due to switching of the
plurality of bit switch currents, said emitter follower drive
leg including an emitter follower transistor having base
and emitter terminals, the base terminal of said emitter
follower transistor being coupled to said reference voltage
conductor and the emitter terminal of said emitter fol-
lower transistor providing said bias voltage.
-a ,,
It
a-r
.>'f
i':^-f^. K
' i .IK
'HI.
■wki.t ^
4,381,498
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTING APPARATUS
Thomas C. Goodale, Reading, Mass., assignor to GTE Laborato-
ries Incorporated, Waltham, Mass.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,642
Int. a.3 H03K 13/02. 13/20
U.S. CI. 340—347 AD
2 Qaims
moa nui
i
i^
iif i^Ki^o^
L^^
1. A digital-to-analog converter circuit having a plurality of
bit switch current sources responsive to a bias voltage for
generating a plurality of bit switch currents, said digital-to-
analog converter circuit including an open-loop voltage refer-
ence circuit for regulating the bias voltage, said open-loop
voltage reference circuit comprising in combination:
a. first and second power supply voltage conductors for
conducting first and second power supply voltages, re-
spectively;
b. a reference voltage conductor for conducting a reference
voltage;
c. a first current leg coupled between said reference voltage
A conductor and said first power supply voltage conductor
for conducting a first current and generating a reference
voltage on said reference voltage conductor in response
thereto, said first current leg including a zener diode
junction;
d. a second current leg coupled between said reference
voltage conductor and said first power supply voltage
conductor, said second current leg including a biasing
transistor having first, second, and third terminals, said
first terminal being coupled to said first power supply
voltage conductor and said second terminal being coupled
to said reference voltage conductor, said biasing transistor
being biased by the reference voltage for conducting a
second current in response thereto;
e. current mirror means coupled to said second power sup-
ply voltage conductor, said current mirror means being
coupled to said reference voltage conductor for providing
the first current thereto, said current mirror means also
being coupled to. the third terminal of said biasing transis-
tor and being responsive to the magnitude of the second
current for maintaining the magnitude of the first current
in a predetermined relationship therewith; and
f. circuit means coupled to said reference voltage conductor
for receiving the reference voltage and for providing the
bias voltage in response thereto, said circuit means main-
1. Analog-to-digital converting apparatus including
a plurality of analog signal input lines;
a like plurality of comparator means each having first and
second input terminals and an output terminal, and being
operable to produce a first output signal at the output
terminal when the voltage at the first input terminal is
greater than the voltage at the second input terminal and
to produce a second output signal at the output terminal
when the voltage at the second input terminal is greater
than the voltage at the first input terminal;
each analog signal input line being connected to the first
input terminal of a different one of said comparator means;
ramp generator means connected to the second input termi-
nals of all the comparator means and being operable to
produce a ramp voltage which increases in predetermined
steps in response to toggle signals applied thereto;
a single comparator output line;
a like plurality of switching means, each being operable to
connect the output terminal of a different one of said
comparator means to said comparator output line;
multiplexing means coupled to said plurality of switching
means, said multiplexing means being operable in response
to select signals applied thereto to cause the switching
means designated by the select signals to connect the
output terminal of the associated comparator means to
said comparator output line, and said multiplexing means
being operable in response to de-select signals applied
thereto to cause the switching means to disconnect the
output terminal of the associated comparator means from
said comparator output line;
processing means comprising
a single storage means for storing an accumulated count
coupled to the comparator output line;
means for applying select signals to said multiplexing
means designating a selected one of said plurality of
switching means whereby said multiplexing means
causes the designated switching means to connect the
output terminal of the associated comparator means to
the comparator output line;
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1017
means for resetting said ramp generator means to a start-
ing ramp voltage;
means for applying a toggle signal to said ramp generator
means whereby the ramp voltage produced by the ramp
generator means increases by a predetermined step;
means operable in response to said first output signal from
the selected comparator means subsequent to a toggle
signal to cause the storage means to add a count to the
accumulated count and to cause said means for applying
a toggle signal to said ramp generator means to apply a
toggle signal to said ramp generator means; and
means operable in response to said second output signal
from the selected comparator means subsequent to a
toggle signal to apply de-select signals to said multiplex-
ing means whereby said multiplexing means causes the
switching means to disconnect the output terminal of
the associated comparator means from the comparator
output line;
whereby the count accumulated in the storage means when the
selected comparator means is disconnected from the compara-
tor output line is a digital representation of the analog voluge
present on the analog signal input line associated with the
selected comparator means.
4,381,500
KEYBOARD APPARATUS
Yoshihito Urata, Katano; Hideyuki Kubo, Suits, and Toaiiiharu
Sasaki, Kawanishl, ail of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,647
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 13, 1980, 55-17049;
Oct. 1, 1980, 55-138166
Int. a.3 G08C 9/0*
U.S. Q. 340—365 VL 5 Claims
4,381,499
MONOLITHIC INTEGRABLE R-2R NETWORK
Holger Struthoff, Freiburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
ITT Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Not. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,887
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 27,
1980, 80107406
Int. a.J H03K 13/02
U.S. a. 340—347 DA 9 Qaims
Y^f r},^ ;^y ^ 'f; ^ y, < }^ < )^ i y i.. ^ ^^
b^:J_]:j"
J
1. A monolithic integrated R-2R network comprising:
a plurality of R resistors, a last one of which is coupled to a
terminal resistor;
a plurality of switch structures, one of which is coupled in
series with a first of said plurality of resistors, another one
of which is coupled in series between said last one of said
plurality of resistors and said terminal resistor and each of
the remainder of said plurality of switch structures is
coupled in series between different adjacent ones of the
remainder of said plurality of resistors, each of said plural-
ity of switch structures being in a conducting state; and
a plurality of 2R resistor units each having two electronic
switches to connect the associated one of said plurality of
units to a selected one of ground and another reference
point, each of said two switches of each of said plurality of
units having a common terminal directly connected to
each other and one terminal of a different one of said
plurality of switch structures.
1. A keyboard apparatus, comprising:
key switch means having a set of item keys for performing
data entry and having means associated with each item
key for displaying a data item to be entered by the corre-
sponding data key, said set of item keys being arranged in
a display position, and a set of select keys for selecting sets
of input data items corresponding to said item keys and to
be displayed in said display means;
a plurality of sheets on which respective sets of input data
items are positioned in positions corresponding to the
positions of said display means;
a cartridge having a tray means for storing said sheets in
piles and which is movable transversely of said cartridge
means;
cartridge holding means for holding said cartridge in a first
position from which said tray means is movable trans-
versely of said cartridge means to a position correspond-
ing to said display position in which the input data items
on the top sheet in said tray means are displayed in the
corresponding display means;
selecting means operable in response to said select keys for
separating said sheets in said tray means into two groups
and holding the sheets in the first group out of said tray
means and leaving the sheets in the second group in said
tray means; and
translating means engagable with said tray means and opera-
ble in response to said select keys for moving said tray
means from said position corresponding to said display
condition to said first position and holding said tray means
in said first position while said selecting means operates to
release a previously held first group of sheets and allow
them to return into said tray means and to separate and
hold a new first group of sheets, and then moving said tray
means back to said position corresponding to said display
position.
4,381,501
ENCODING APPARATUS UTILIZING ACOUSTIC
WAVES OF CONTROLLED INITIAL POLARITY
Raymond T. P^jer, Southbury, Conn., and Pedro T. Guzman,
Ithaca, N.Y., assignors to SCM Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,820
Int a.5 G06F 3/02; H04L 15/03
VJS. a. 340—365 R 29 Claims
1. In an encoding apparatus of the acoustic type comprising
an acoustic member, means for inducing acoustic energy
within the member in the form of a wave traveling within the
member, and means spaced from the inducing means and oper-
atively connected to the member for sensing the wave; the
improvement comprising first control means on said member
cooperating with said inducing means and providing a wave
1018
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
having a wave front of particular polarity, second control
means on said member cooperating with said inducing means
and providing a wave having an opposite polarity for said
wave front, and means connected to said sensing means and
responsive to the pwlarity of the wave front for providing first
^ilB
code information on sensing of said particular polarity and
second code information on sensing of said opposite polarity,
said first code indicating cooperation of said inducing means
with said first control means, whereas said second code indi-
cates cooperation thereof with said second control means.
4,381,502
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHARACTER
GENERATION
Eric S. Prame, Lidingo, Sweden, assignor to International Busi-
ness Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 95,897, Nov. 19, 1979, Pat. No. 4^4,069.
This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,778
Claims priority, application Sweden, Nov. 21, 1978, 7811983
Int. a.3 G08C 9/00; B41J 5/06
U.S. a. 340—365 R 3 Qaims
first key being maintained in a depressed state contempo-
raneously with the depression of said second key;
depressing a third key in said array of keys on said keyboard
while maintaining said first and second keys in a depressed
state;
detecting the coincidence of contemporaneous depression of
said first, second and third keys; and
encoding a character code corresponding to the desired
character selected by said combined first, second and third
key depression codes.
4,381,503
COMBINATION TYPE ORE DETECTOR
Shigeru Kobayashi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nittan Company,
Limited, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,306
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 23, 1980, 55-
103347[U]
Int. a.3 G08B J 7/04. 17/06
U.S. a. 340—584 3 Qaims
3^
^■)
1
Tl
NO KEY
DEPRESSED
/
- /
^
55
/3T
T2
(",
TJ
TWO KEXS
DEPRESSED
/".
,.
OEP
HESSE
D
DEPRE
iSEO 1
1. A method of generating character codes by means of a
keyboard having a plurality of keys arranged spatially in rows
and columns, an electronic scanning means for scanning said
keys to detect actuations thereof, and to produce key identifi-
cation codes for said actuated keys, each of said keys bearing a
plurality of potential symbols to be generated by depression of
that key, said symbols being arranged in a spatial array on the
face of said key, said keyboard also having an encoding means
for generating character codes in response to the detection of
actuated key codes produced by said scanning means, said
method comprising steps of:
selecting a first key for depression from among the spatial
array of said keys on said keyboard, said selection being in
accordance with the relative spatial position in said array
that said first key bears to the other keys on said keyboard,
which relative spatial position corresponds to the relative
position of the desired character symbol in its said spatial
array of possible character symbols on the face of a second
said key in said array;
depressing said first key and generating a key code therefor
as the result of said scanning;
depressing said second key and generating a key code there-
for in response to said scanning, said second key being the
one on which said desired character symbol appears in the
relative spatial relationship to other possible character
codes on the face of said key, said relative spatial position
corresponding to the relative spatial position of said first
depressed key in said array of keys on said keyboard, said
1. A combination type fire detector having a rate of rise
thermal sensor in combination with a thermal sensor operative
at a predetermined temf>erature,
wherein said rate of rise thermal sensor comprises: a support-
ing member (8) of electrical insulating material; a metal
casing (2) underlying said supporting member and being
attached in supported spaced relation thereto, said casing
having a hollow body (21) with a lid plate (23) including
a restricted vent (7) placing the interior (1) of said hollow
body in communication with the space between said cas-
ing and said supporting member, said lid plate being pro-
vided with an apertured central depression facing said
supporting member; a diaphragm (5) carried by said lid
plate and covering said central depression thereof so that
the lower side of said diaphragm communicates through
the aperture (23) of said central depression with said hol-
low body interior, whereby thermally expending air in
said hollow body interior will deform said diaphragm
upwardly when the expansion rate exceeds the leakage
rate through said vent; and an alarm switch (6) having
contacts which are respectively associated with said dia-
phragm and said supporting member and which are closed
by upward deformation of said diaphragm; and
wherein said thermal sensor comprises a heat sensitive thy-
ristor (3) disposed in said space between said lid plate (23)
and said supporting member (8), said thyristor having
leads for connection to an alarm circuit and being bodily
embraced by an arcuate arm of a flat metal strip (4) which
lies atop said lid plate, there being a hollow open-ended
cylindrical spacer (10) fitted between said flat strip and an
overlying portion of said supporting member, and a screw
(9) passing through said spacer and aligned holes in said
lid plate, strip and supporting member, with a nut (11)
tightened on a projecting end of said screw to securely
clamp said strip against said lid plate.
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1019
4,381,504
SWITCH AND ALARM SYSTEM RESPONSIVE TO
SUDDEN MOVEMENT, ANGULAR TILT AND
VIBRATION
Darid Bitko, Brunswick, NJ., assignor to Fifth Dimension Inc.,
Trenton, N J.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,942
Int. aj G08B 21/00
U.S. a. 340—689 9 Claims
1. A switch having variable sensitivity to tilt and movement,
comprising:
a fixed contact comprised of ah apertured plate;
a conically shaped movable contact suspended within the
aperture of said fixed contact and normally out of contact
with said fixed contact; and
means for adjusting the height of said movable contact
relative to said fixed contact and for adjusting the radial
position of said movable contact relative to said fixed
contact to thereby vary the spacing between said fixed
and movable contacts and vary the sensitivity of said
switch to tilt or movement.
4,381,505
SYSTEM FOR DISPLAYING ALPHANUMERICAL
MESSAGES HAVING STORED AND REAL TIME
COMPONENTS
Warren E. Dion, Terryrille, Conn., assignor to The Arthur G.
Russell Company, Incorporated, Bristol, Conn.
FUed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 214,643
Int. a.3 G09G 3/00
U.S. a. 340—756 15 Claims
'■J '^^ S '■ •' 8 S ''o'-.' -P ''■■'■'• '»'■*
1 • • ^
^•i'!'i:iri:i:i.i:i.'i'niiJ-
;.;:.n
_^^
■1
1. A system for displaying messages, said system comprising:
(a) a unitary visual display device having a plurality of
character stations at each of which stations any one of a
given set of characters may be displayed by the applica-
tion thereto of a set of binary codMl signals,
(b) a memory having means for storing a plurality of stored
message fragments each consisting of a plurality of stored
sets of binary coded signals representing a corresponding
plurality of characters,
(c) a real time signal means associated with a plurality of real
time conditions and providing a selection of real time
message fragments each of which real time message frag-
ments corresponds to a respective one of said real time
conditions and each of which real time message fragments
consists of at least one real time set of binary coded signals
representing at least one character, each of said real time
message fragments varying in time with variations in the
value of its corresponding real time condition so as to
represent at any given instant the instantaneous value of
said corresponding condition,
(d) a message selector having means for simltaneously select-
ing one of said stored message fragments and one of said
real time message fragments, and
(e) routing means for substantially simultaneously applying
said stored sets of binary coded signals of said selected
stored message fragment to corresponding first ones of
said character stations in a one-signal-set-to-a-one-charac-
ter-station manner such that each stored set of binary
coded signals is transmitted directly to its corresponding
character station without being transmitted to any other
of said character stations and for applying substantially
lultaneously with the applicaton of said stored sets of
binWy coded signals to said first ones of said character
stations said at least one set of binary coded signals of said
selecte^^c^ time message fragment to a corresponding at
least one ^er of said character stations different from
said first ones^of said character stations in a one-signal-set-
to-a-one-character-station manner such that each real time
set of binary coded signals is transmitted directly to its
corresponding character station without being transmitted
to any other of said character stations to cause said device
to immediately display a complete unitary visual message
made up in part of characters derived from said selected
stored message fragment and in part of at least one charac-
ter derived from said selected real time message fragment,
and which at least one character derived from said se-
lected real time message fragment may vary indepen-
dently of the characters derived from said selected stored
message fragment in keeping with variations in the value
of the corresponding real time condition.
4,381,506
POSmON-ELECTRICAL SIGNAL TRANSDUCER
Karl-Otto Linn, Karlsruhe; Walter Janachc, Durmersheim; Die-
trich Adolph, Albershansen, and Artnr Danncmann, Gdppin-
gen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Boach
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,347
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 23,
1980, 3002233
Int a.5 G08C 19/06
VS. a. 340—870.32 12 CSaiam
•ILJT"
1. Position-electrical signal transducer to provide an electri-
cal output signal representative of displacement (A) of an
element comprising
a core including magnetically conductive material;
a coil (6) wound on the core and adapted for connection to
a source of alternating current;
a movable short-circuit ring coupled to said element placed
on the core and coupled, at least in part, to the magnetic
field generated by the coil upon being energized, the
short-circuit ring being movable in a direction transverse
to the plane defined by the ring;
1020
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
and wherein, in accordance with the invention, the core
4^1,508
compnses C3.UTTER COMPENSATED SIDELOBE CANCELLING
the combination of a carrier body (8) of electrically insulat- COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
ing material, and a foil or layer (9) of a material of high Is««c N. Durboraw, III, Scottsdale, Ariz., assignor to Motorola
magnetic permeability located and supported on at least ^^•» Schaumburg, III.
FUed Mar. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 19,379
one surface of said carrier body.
Int. a.3 GOIS 1/14
U.S. a. 343—100 LE
10 Claims
4,381,507
FLUID CYLINDER POSITIONAL INDICATOR AND
METHOD
Carl L. Parmer, Harrisburg, N.C., assignor to D. E. McCraw,
Jr., Charlotte, N.C.
FUed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,503
Int. Q\? G08C 19/04
U.S. a. 340—870.38 6 Oaims
1. A fluid cylinder apparatus constructed for being mounted
at its opposite ends to the working environment and having
means for providing a signal accurately indicating the position
of the piston thereof; said apparatus comprising a cylinder
defined by an elongate cylindrical body portion and first and
second end caps at opposite ends of said cylindrical body
portion; piston means provided in said cylinder and including
a piston head and a piston rod carried by the piston head, the
piston head cooperating with said cylindrical body portion to
form a fluid seal, and the piston rod extending longitudinally
from the cylinder through said second end cap; connector
means carried by the distal end of said piston rod to permit
connection of the piston rod to the working environment; a
longitudinal bore extending through said piston head and a
predetermined distance into said piston rod; a female threaded
member carried by said piston means for displacement there-
with, said female threaded member having a longitudinally
oriented threaded opening aligned with the axis of said longitu-
dinal bore; an elongate threaded rod axially aligned with and
extending longitudinally through the threaded opening of said
female threaded member and having first and second ends, the
first end thereof residing in said longitudinal bore, and the
second end extending into said first end cap so as to project
externally of said cylinder, and said threaded rod having exter-
nal threads threadingly engaged with said female threaded
member throughout the stroke of said piston means such that
longitudinal displacement of said piston means and the female
threaded member carried thereby imparts rotation to said
elongate threaded rod; electrical sensing means mounted exter-
nally of said cylinder and coupled to the externally projecting
end portion of said threaded rod for being rotatably driven
thereby and being operable upon rotation thereof for obtaining
an electrical signal functionally related to the rotational dis-
placement of said threaded rod; a protective housing enclosing
said electrical sensing means; and connector means carried by
said cylinder apparatus at the end thereof opposite said longitu-
dinally extending piston rod and cooperating with the cylinder
apparatus to permit connection thereof to the working envi-
ronment.
<0 so SI S3 SS Bl 60 BO
CLK
I A
v_«
— TX^ j, process
1. In communications systems including circuitry for cancel-
ling sidelobe interference wherein signals from a main antenna
and weighted signals from an auxiliary antenna are combined,
with the combined signal being used to control the weight of
the auxiliary antenna signal to substantially eliminate portions
of the signal from the main antenna which correlate with
signals from the auxiliary antenna, clutter compensating cir-
cuitry comprising estimation means for providing an output
signal which is an estimate of clutter in the combined signal
and circuitry connected to subtract the output signal from the
combined signal prior to using the combined signal to control
the weight.
4,381,509
CYLINDRICAL MICROWAVE LENS ANTENNA FOR
WIDEBAND SCANNING APPLICATIONS
Walter Rotman, Boston, and Peter R. Franchi, Winchester, both
of Mass., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,020
Int. a.3 HOIQ 3/24, 15/06
U.S. a. 343—754 6 Qaims
18-
1. A three dimensional space fed wideband scanning micro-
wave antenna comprising:
a multiplicity of two dimensioned parallel plate contrained
cylindrical lens elements arranged in a vertical stack to
effect a three dimensional cylindrical lens, each said two
dimensional parallel plate constrained cylindrical lens
elements including a linear array of n pickup elements
disposed along the inner surface thereof, a liner array of n
radiating elements disposed along the outer surface
thereof, each radiating element having a corresponding
substantially adjacent pick up element, and a transmission
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1021
line connecting each radiating element with its corre-
sponding pick up element,
a plurality of discrete feeds positioned in spaced relation-
ship in an arc having substantially the same radius as the
focal arc of said three dimensional cylindrical lens, said
plurality of discrete feeds being spaced from and oriented
to illuminate the inner surface of said three dimensional
cylindrical lens whereby pick up elements ^can be illumi-
nated from different directions along the arc of feeds to
effect beam radiation from said radiating elements in the
same direction,
an input for receiving the output of a microwave transmitter,
and
switch means for selectively connecting any one of said
discrete feeds to said input whereby the sequential con-
necting of feeds effects scanning of a beam radiating from
said radiating elements.
4,381,510
MICROWAVE ABSORBER
Lloyd W. Wren, Valley Center, Kans., assignor to The Boeing
Co., Seattle, Wash.
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 294,046
Int. a.3 HOIQ 15/02
U.S. a. 343—909 17 Qaims
printing surface of the time card a transverse distance
which is short compared to the width of the time card;
(e) means, including a cam having a cam surface, a contact
member engaging said cam surface, and means for rotating
one of said cam and said contact member in response to a
displacement signal, fixed to said dot printer and said
frame, for reciprocally moving said dot printer said trans-
verse distance when said rotary means is rotating said one
of said cam and said contact member; and
(0 means for providing said print signal to said dot printer
and said displacement signal to said rotating means so that
said dot printer is displaced said transverse distance as it
prints on the printing surface of the time card, whereby
the printing surface of the time card is printed upon along
a horizontal segment thereof of substantially the same
width as said transverse distance.
1. A microwave absorber for a reflecting surface, the ab-
sorber coupling and absorbing radio frequency energy at dif-
ferent angles of incidence, the absorber including:
an energy receiving surface adapted for receipt on the re-
flecting surface;
a first transmission line wall mounted on the receiving sur-
face and having a lossy wall covering; and
a second transmission line wall mounted on the receiving
surface and having a lossy wall covering, the second
transmission line wall disposed in a spaced relationship
from the first transmission line wall, the receiving surface
and the first and second wall forming an open channel
configuration.
4,381,511
PRINTING DEVICE FOR A TIME RECORDER
Masamichl Suzuki, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Amano Cor-
poration, Yokohama, Japan
FUed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,053
Claims priority, application Japan, May 2, 1980, 55-60757[U]
Int a.3 GOID 9/00
U.S. a. 346—20 7 Claims
1. A time recording device comprising:
(a) a frame;
(b) a card pocket for vertically receiving a time card, dis-
posed in said frame and being horizontally, transversely
displaceable therein;
(c) a dot printer having a printing head opposing the printing
surface of the time card when the time card is in said card
pocket, for printing on the printing surface of the time
card in response to a print signal;
(d) printer guiding means, mounted to said frame, for slid-
ably supporting said dot printer such that said dot printer
is slidably movable horizontally and transversely of the
4,381,512
CONTROLLER FOR PEN, PAPER AND CHART OF A
RECORDER
Keith C. Butler, Newark, Del., assignor to Hewlett-Packard
Company, Palo Alto, Calif.
FUed Feb. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 11,738
Int a.3 GOID 9/10
U.S. a. 346—33 R 3 ClaioM
1. Apparatus for moving the pen and chart of a recorder in
such manner that dau which changes faster than the pen can
follow may be recorded with fideUty, comprising
means for buffering daU points representing the amplitude
of the data to be recorded at successive time intervals,
means for reading data points from said buffer,
means for forming signals for moving a pen from a position
corresponding to a previous data point to a position corre-
sponding to the current daU point at speeds up to and
including its maximum,
means for causing said means for reading data points to read
a new data point whenever signals have been given to the
1022
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
pen that are necessary for it to move to the current data with a notch parallel with said ink drop issuing axis whereby
point, and the gradient in the electrostatic field is reduced.
>»w**t* wa^t'-ro *u*i
', ^ X.-.,
''•laCii-L:
I2JSES"-iI5.
:--: R
_^ If
»;: -W Wd-
[."".r^?;;-
I MAC- eii'i
■ •: ftc \i s"
.-'-^ ,
H:-
T .« I, « -
4,381,514
TRANSVERSE MODE CONVERTER FOR USE WITH A
LONGITUDINAL MODE OSaLLOGRAPHIC
RECORDER
Peter M. Calandrino, 2114 McGowan Pkwy., MarysTille, Calif.
95901
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,397
Int. a.3 GOID 9/42
U.S. a. 346-110 R 12 Claims
( ^oMT ^jeefii/^/rcY OST^)
IT ^
/
r
la o
-. o
0 0 0
t">0 0
ooo
o
o
J
^J
3w££P, ViD£0 Dfil^£.
<rMai~£S
/
r/M£ coo£ / TiMe COQ£
3 r.** T sjufv^t-
•t<3 MC
> •••€■
T— — -
••■;v
means for controlling the advance of the chart in response to
the reading of a new data point.
4381 513
DEFLECnON PLATES FOR ELECTROSTATIC INK-JET
PRINTER
Yutaka Ebi, Kawasaki, and Yutaka Kodama, Tokyo, both of
Japan, assignors to Ricoh Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 6, 1980, Ser. No. 147,278
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 10, 1979, 54/56351
Int a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—75 8 Claims
1. Deflection plates for an electrostatic ink-jet printer char-
acterized in that the leaving end of said deflection plate which
is adjacent tathe aus along which the ink drops issue is formed
1. In a longitudinal mode oscillographic recording apparatus
for continuously recording a low frequency signal by continu-
ously drawing a radiation sensitive medium over the face of a
cathode ray tube having a control element for emitting an
electron beam capable of exposing the radiation sensitive me-
dium, and including a yoke for transversely sweeping the
electron beam across the radiation sensitive mediun in response
to the output of a horizontal sweep generator triggered by the
low frequency signal, and further including a video drive chain
responsive to the low frequency signal for driving the control
element, the improvement comprising:
a. means for producing a gating signal and a synchronous
horizontal sweep signal, in response to a high frequency
signal;
b. a transverse mode converter including:
(1) synchronization means interconnected to the high
frequency signal and to said gating signal for producing
a synchronized signal corresponding to the portion of
the high frequency signal to be recorded;
(2) first amplifying means for amplifying said synchro-
nized signal to produce a video drive signal;
(3) second amplifier means for amplifying said horizontal
sweep signal;
(4) mode control means, operative in a first longitudinal
mode position to interconnect the video drive chain
with the control element and to interconnect the hori-
zontal sweep generator with the yoke for longitudinally
recording the low frequency signal; and said mode
control means being operative in a second transverse
mode position alternatively to interconnect the output
of said first amplifier means with the control element
and to interconnect the output of said second amplifier
means with the yoke for transversely recording the high
frequency signal.
4381,515
REDUCnON OF PULSED DROPLET ARRAY
CROSSTALK
Lee L. Bain, Arlington, Tex., assignor to Xerox Corporation,
Stamford, Conn.
FUed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,699
Int a.3 GOID 15/1%
U.S. a. 346—140 R 8 Claims
1. A method for reducing or eliminating mechanical cross-
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1023
talk in a drop-on-demand droplet ejector array, which com-
prises:
next storage site responding to signals impressed on said
electrode thereon.
LI
L2
LJ
n-^
a
fi'
'^4
■vs^
SS
Ok-
^P^-
; I It
providing an induced electrical crosstalk, which at least
partly offsets the mechanical crosstalk.
4,381,517
SOLID STATE IMAGE SENSOR
Nozomu Harada, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,660
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 21, 1979, 54/165506
Int. a.3 HOIL 27/14
U.S. a. 357—30 12 Qaims
4,381,516
CHARGE-COUPLED DEVICE HAVING A CHANNEL
AND AN ELECTRODE FOR CHANGING A TRANSFER
DIRECnON OF CHARGE SIGNALS
Hiroshi Kadota, Toyonalia, Japan, assignor to Matsushita Elec-
tric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 137,294, Apr. 3, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,873
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/78: GllC J9/28
U.S. a. 357—24 4 Qaims
S7 S8
513
c:—^
IFe3
1. A charge-coupled device having one input and one output
terminal for signal charge and unique charge transfer channel
between said input and output terminal comprising:
a first transferring channel region to transfer signal charges
to a first direction consisting of a plurality of rectangular
storage sites whose both longer sides have a right angle to
said first direction,
a second transferring channel region to transfer signal
charges to a second direction consisting of a plurality of
rectangular storage sites, whose both longer sides have a
right angle to said second direction,
a third transferring channel region to change transfer direc-
tion from said first direction to said second direction,
which region is disposed between said first and second
transferring channel regions consisting of a plurality of
bent storage sites having an electrode thereon and those of
which comprise a first rectangular part, one pair of whose
sides having a right angle to said first direction, a second
rectangular part one pair of whose sides having a right
angle to said second direction, and a third rectangular part
one pair of wb :s- sides having a right angle to a specified
direction which is between said first and second direc-
tions, and having the charge transfer path to said next
storage site through one side of said each pair, and the
distance between the sides of said each pair being shorter
or equal to that of the longer sides of said first or second
transferring channel region,
each of said storage sites in said first, second and third trans-
ferring channel regions being defmed by an edge of said
channel region and an edge of electrode disposed thereon
in a semiconductor substrate, with signal charge being
stored or being transferred from one storage site to the
^
38
22 36 (8 16 \i 26 28 34
1. A solid state image sensor comprising:
a semiconductor substrate of a first conductivity type having
a surface portion;
an active region of a second conductivity type opposite to
said first conductivity type and formed at the surface
portion of said substrate;
field insulation layers formed on said substrate and surround-
ing said active region;
a photosensing layer of a semiconductor material formed on
said substrate and said insulation layers and generating a
charge packet corresponding to the incident light; and
charge transfer means for generating within said photosens-
ing layer an electric field having substantial components
extending substantially parallel to the surface of said sub-
strate to transfer the charge packet generated by the inci-
dent light within said photosensing layer toward said
active region, said charge transfer means including elec-
trode means formed in said photosensing layer and made
of conductive material for receiving a bias potential ap-
plied thereto and for generating said electric field between
said active region and said electrode means.
4^81,518
SEMICONDUCTOR COMPONENT WITH SEVERAL
SEMICONDUCTOR ELEMENTS
Walter Bahlinger, Monich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens AktiengeseUschaft, Berlin and Municli, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,455
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct 19,
1979, 2942401
Int a.5 HOIL 23/42. 23/02
VS. a. 357—79 5 Claims
1. Semiconductor component with a plurality of semicon-
ductor elements disposed in a case having a metallic bottom
being in heatconducting contact with the semiconductor ele-
ments, electrical leads, and a leaf spring having ends and pro-
1024
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
viding electrical pressure contact between the semiconductor
elements and the leads, comprising yokes each holding a re-
M ^i M5
spective end of the spring, and at least two screws anchoring
said yokes and the semiconductor elements to the bottom.
continuously storing an indication as to which of said first
and second comparisons gives a result closer to zero; and
on occurrence of an error sample signal substituting a cor-
rected sample signal for said error sample signal so as to
conceal the error, said corrected sample signal being
generated using said first or second algorithm in depen-
dence on said indication.
4,381,520
AUTOMATIC WHITE ADJUSTING CIRCUIT FOR A
TELEVISION CAMERA
Toyotaka Machida; Teruaki Noda, and Yuichi Ikemura, all of
Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Victor Company of Japan,
Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,126
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 2, 1980, 55-73856
Int. a.3 H04N 9/535
U.S. a. 358—29 6 Qaims
4,381,519
ERROR CONCEALMENT IN DIGITAL TELEVISION
SIGNALS
James H. Wilkinson, and Mark C. Collins, both of Tadley, Near
Basingstoke, England, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Sep. 14, 1981; Ser. No. 302,153
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 18, 1980,
8030149
Int. a.5 H04N 9/535. 9/491
U.S. a. 358—21 R 7 Qaims
H SAMPLE SraUCf
_!__
SAHPIE MATRII
5TME
TTTT7TTT
SAMPLE MATflIX AV
, I
mwm\ Ai» "
COWAUIOK
1— s
t^6
-^
Auwirm
SfLKlKW
ORCUII
t1
--1STIK3H
A2
ALGiniTIM
A2
— T
SAMPLE MAimi
A2Vr
J CUMPARArOR
-T
A»
[J
SAMPLE HH
VALUE
CAUULAIM
riMiiK
dCUTS
T
-12 SAMftE MAimx
^A^^
FLAG SICWU. ^~^
1. A method of concealing errors in a composite PAL or
NTSC digital television signal, which television signal com-
prises a plurality of sample signals corresponding respectively
to sample positions along a horizontal scan line of a television
picture made up of a plurality of said horizontal lines, the
method comprising, in respect of each said sample signal:
using a first algorithm to calculate a first expected value of
said sample signal, said first algorithm using actual values
of adjacent sample signals in the same horizontal line as
said sample signal for said calculation;
performing a first comparison between said first expected
value and the actual value of said sample signal;
using a second algorithm to calculate a second expected
value of said sample signal, said second algorithm using
actual values of adjacent sample signals in the same hori-
zontal line as said sample signal and actual values of adja-
cent sample signals in the horizontal lines preceding and
following the horizontal line of said sample signal; ^
performing a second comparison between said second ex-
pected value and the actual value of said sample signal;
"H
VAR GAIN
AMP
i7 D/A
oil Qc Qb QqI lOdOcObOa
22-
20 h
50 J^ ^
OdCXQbOa
REV
— ^[^^
COUNT 7 (Sunt
^J
48
CCWVERT
^
MATRIX
CKT
7^ rt
_« 28
1. An automatic white adjusting circuit for a television
camera having a color image pick-up tube, said automatic
white adjusting circuit comprising:
first variable gain amplifying means applied with a first pri-
mary color signal;
second variable gain amplifying means applied with a second
primary color signal;
matrixing means applied with a third primary color signal and
outputs of said first and second variable gain amplifying
means;
first, second, and third low-pass filters respectively applied
with the outputs of said first and second variable gain ampli-
fying means and said third primary color signal;
first and second comparing means respectively supplied with
an output of said third low-pass filter to their non-inverting
terminals, and supplied with respective outputs of said first
and second low-pass filters to their respective inverting
input terminals;
first and third reversible counter means respectively supplied
with an output of said first comparing means to their respec-
tive up/down input terminals;
second and fourth reversible counter means respectively sup-
plied with an output of said second comparing means to their
respective up/down input terminals;
first, second, third, and fourth digital-to-analog converters
respectively supplied with parallel outputs of said first,
second, third, and fourth reversible counter means;
first reference gain establishing means supplied with outputs of
said first and third digital-to-analog converters;
second reference gain establishing means supplied with outputs
of said second and fourth digital-to-analog converters; and
switching means for selectively switching over an incoming
clock pulse, to supply said clock pulse to respective clock
pulse input terminals of said first and second reversible
counter means or said third and fourth reversible counter
means,
said clock pulse input terminals of said first and second revers-
ible counter means being respectively connected to load
terminals of said third and fourth reversible counter means,
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1025
said first and second variable gain amplifying means respec-
tively being supplied with gain varying control voltage from
said first and second reference gain establishing means,
said matrixing means producing a luminance signal and two
color difference signals.
4^1,521
OPTICAL FINDER SYSTEM FOR A VIDEO CAMERA
Yozo lida, Komae, and Soichi Nakamnra, Kamakura, both of
Japan, assignors to Nippon Kogaku K.K., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,747
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 22, 1981, 56-8386
Int. a.3 H04N 9/04
U.S.a.358— 55 SOaims
200 ?
"^ if
i-,'via.o„j jo-;
6 S 100
1. In a video camera including a pickup device for convert-
ing a first optical image of an object formed on an image
pickup surface by an imaging optical system into an electric
signal, and an optical finder system whereby a second optical
image substantially identical with said first optical image is
formed on an imaging surface such that said second optical
image on said imaging surface is observable through an eye-
piece, said pickup device including color separating filter
means disposed on said image pickup surface and having a fme
stripe or mosaic pattern, the improvement comprising:
optical means disposed in close proximity to said imaging
surface of said optical finder system across an optical axis
in such a manner that said second optical image is pro-
jected onto a surface of said optical means, said optical
means including a plurality of fine optical elements ar-
ranged in a pattern similar to said fine pattern of said filter
means.
4,381,522
SELECTIVE VIEWING
Trevor Lambert, Sherbom, Mass., assignor to Atens-Rossell
Co., Inc., Waltham, Mass.
Filed Diec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,759
Int. a.3 HMN 7/16
U.S. a. 358—86 3 Oaims
viding a plurality of television signals on a plurality of
channels,
means at said central location for combining said television
signals to provide a combined signal for transmission over
a common transmission path to said remote receiving
locations,
means for transmitting said combined signal over said com-
mon path to said remote receiving locations,
a plurality of sources of selectable television program video
signals,
computer means coupled to said sources and said television
transmitting means and responsive to a selecting signal
from a remote receiving location designating a selected
television program for viewing for providing selecting
control signals for enabling a corresponding one of said
program sources to provide the corresponding television
video signal at a predetermined time and for providing
switching control signals for coupling the latter video
signal for broadcast by said television transmitting means
on a designated one of said channels,
video switching means responsive to said switching control
signals for coupling the television program video signals
from the enabled sources to said television transmitting
means for broadcast on designated ones of said channels,
said computer means also continuously providing a schedule
video signal to said television transmitting means on a
predetermined program schedule channel of said channels
representative of the selected television programs to be
transmitted, the time of transmission and the transmission
channel,
whereby a viewer at a remote receiving location may tune a
television receiver thereat to said program schedule chan-
nel, observe the time and channel for transmission of a
selected television program and switch said television
receiver to the designated channel at the designated time.
4J81 523
AUTOMATIC FOCUSING DEVICE
Mitsuo Eguchi, Ageo; Masahito Yoshida, Urawa; Yoshifumi
Kato, Oomiya; Nobuyuki Ichino, Warabi, and Yoshimi Kiku-
chi, Kitamoto, all of Japan, assignors to Mamiya Koki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,464
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 14, 1980, 55-3233
Int. a.^ H04N 3/26
U.S. a. 358—227 18 C^«™»
v.
* i
_ DRIVING
y
n
/
1
\
1 7
c«iieL
r
Z!
^
TFlEViSir*
TRMSaiTrEtS
TfLEyisiOn
SKIIIL
COIi«i«E«
\
1 -.
...
/
1 /
• ••
1 -•
01 scon m«
■- •
VIDEO
SflTCH
-•
1
1
1
'0
L^
vlOiO KPf
CUSSEITi.
OlSC.MFIlll
1
•EMTE
•FCfumc
lOWiOIS
•
CIS
noto.
SFIIFS . f
■• /
HBfO W{
cussnif,
DISC.O«FILII
.
•EHOIF
lECEIVIK
L0Cl'iO«S
ri
* 2
e
-
2i
I
N
OTHfR
I[IEVISI0«
F>RNIIM SOmCES
-^
T[LEP»0«£
Srslfn
J-
_
J
1. Apparatus for remotely viewing selected television pro-
gram material at remote receiving locations comprising,
television transmitting means at a central location for pro-
tCNSOR
t>«coor>!
' ' . It
9 COBWl.«TO«f-
^» .0
sfoufNa aOK'»OLLt*t
■^'Afl" SW^f>
1. An automatic focusing device for use with a photograph-
ing device having a photographing optical system, the auto-
matic focusing device comprising:
detecting means for detecting as video signals the intensity
distributions of the images on an image pickup plane of an
object to be photographed which arc formed by different
light beams passing through different portions of a photo-
graphing otpical system of a photographing device, the
1026
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
detecting means comprising a detecting array disposed at
a position in conjugation with the position of said image
pickup plane for receiving a light beam picked up from
said photographing optical system;
light beam splitting means interposed in said photographing
optical system for splitting the light beam in said photo-
graphing optical system into said different light beams
which are applied to said detecting means;
signal processing means for receiving and processing a rela-
tive positional relation of said video signals and producing
a corresponding output signal; and
driving means for driving said photographing optical system
or said image pickup plane to the focusing position of said
object irrespective of the focal distance of said photo-
graphing optical system according to an output signal of
said signal processing means.
4381 525
SYNCHRONOUSLY OPERATABLE PCM RECORDING
PROCESSOR
Takanori Senoo, Hindcata; Nobuyasu Takeguciii, Osaka, and
Kazuo Nomura, Itami, alJ of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,115
Qaims priority, application Japan, Not. 10, 1980, 55-156968
Int. a.3 GllB 5/00, 5/09
U.S. a. 360—32 2 Claims
4,381,524
SELF-CLOCKING WRITE HEAD
Robert J. E. Shay, Salisbury, and Wendell L. Smith, Concord,
both of N.C., assignors to International Business Machines
Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,317
Int. a.3 GllB 25/04, 5/09
U.S. a. 360—2 7 Oaims
^ ^
13-3^
^rrr-
" »i
JT. -
&
^"#^
J- \%_
iH^=^
OSCl~.4cOuNTe»[— '
I/:
,>r
- - '.1
J SHifT REGISTER M
'I
]
^
J ill ' ' r
a j DATa REG
1. In a magnetic recording system wherein a magnetic re-
cord form and a transducing assembly including a data record-
ing means are moved relatively, one with respect to the other,
along a path and wherein the system includes control circuitry
responsive to a time base control and a data signal for control-
ling the recording of data on said record form, the improved
transducing assembly comprising, in combination:
a writing device,
a reading device aligned with said writing device along said
path and spaced downstream therefrom in relation to the
direction of said relative movement,
variable frequency generating means connected to said con-
trol circuitry,
a reference signal generator for delivering a reference signal
to said writing device to record an indication thereof on
said record,
said reading device producing a derived signal in response to
reading of said recorded indication of said reference sig-
nal,
means for measuring the time lapse between said reference
signal and said derived signal,
time base control computing means responsive to said mea-
suring means for controlling said variable frequency gen-
erating means in accordance with the relative velocity of
said record form and said transducing assembly, and
means automatically causing a further operation of said
reference signal generator to deUver a further reference
signal to said writing device whereby a revised variable
frequency is obtained upon changes in relative velocity.
1. A PCM recording processor comprising: an A/D con-
verting means for converting an analog input signal to a digital
signal; a recording means coupled to said A/D converting
means for recording said digital signal on a recording medium;
a reproducing means for reading out said digital signal from
said recording medium; a D/A converting means coupled to
said reproducing means for converting said digital signal to an
analog signal; an A/D timing generating means comprising
gates for controlling said A/D converting means; a D/A tim-
ing generating means comprising gates for controlling said
D/A converting means; a first timing generating means com-
prising counters for providing timing signals to both said A/D
timing generating means and said D/A timing generating
means; a first synchronizing signal generator coupled to said
first timing generating means for generating a first synchroniz-
ing signal; a first synchronizing signal port; a first switching
means for (a) connecting an output of said first synchronizing
signal generator to said first synchronizing signal port when
said PCM recording processor is in a master mode and for (b)
connecting said first synchronizing signal port to a reset termi-
nal of said first timing generating means in order to reset said
first timing generating means when said PCM recording pro-
cessor is in a slave mode; a second timing generating means for
controlling said recording means and for driving said record-
ing medium; a second synchronizing signal generator coupled
to said second timing generating means for generating a second
synchronizing signal; a second synchronizing signal port; a
second switching means for (a) connecting an output of said
second synchronizing signal generator to said second synchro-
nizing signal port when said PCM recording processor is in the
master mode and for (b) connecting said second synchronizing
signal port to a reset terminal of said second_ timing generator
in order to reset said second timing generator when said PCM
recording processor is in the slave mode; a clock generator for
generating a first clock signal for said first timing generating
means and a second clock signal for said second timing genera-
tor; a first clock signal port; a third switching means for (a)
connecting said first clock signal to both said first clock signal
port and said first timing generating means when said PCM
recording processor is in the master mode and for (b) connect-
ing said first clock signal port to said first timing generating
means when said PCM recording processor is in the slave
mode; a second clock signal port; and a fourth switching means
for (a) connecting said second clock signal to both said second
clock signal port and said second timing generator when said
PCM recording processor is in the master mode and for (b)
connecting said second clock signal port to said second timing
generator when said PCM recording processor is in the slave
mode.
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1027
4,381,526
VELOCITY CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A DATA STORAGE
APPARATUS
David G. McLangiiliii, San Jose, and Andrew M. Rose, Moun-
tain View, botli of Calif., assignon to Memorex Corporation,
Santa Clara, Calif .
FUed Not. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,679
Int a.s GllB 21/10
U.S. a. 360—78 10 Claims
/'2
/2'
-^
i;nFTWABE
ACCESS
CONTROL SV5TEM
r
MECHANICAL
ASSEMBLY
COMMAND
in
o
O
VELOCITV
VELOCITY
TRANSDUCER
^16
10-*-
O
/8
,-«
\~
TRACK CROSSING
POSITION
L
DETECTOR
TRANSDUCER
1. In an access control system, for controlling the velocity of
a head assembly in a direct access storage device, having dif-
ference counting means for indicating the distance to move for
the assembly, memory means for storing a plurality of values of
velocity, DAG conversion means for converting a digital to an
analogue signal, said analogue signal for controlling the veloc-
ity of said head assembly, and an integrator means for generat-
ing a signal corresponding to movement of one track, wherein
the improvement comprises:
pulsing means for generating a plurality of pulses, during the
time for said assembly to move across one track, all of said
pulses having the same frequency with each pulse having
two states;
said memory means resjxjnsive to the output from the differ-
ence counting means for generating a modulated velocity
signal, said modulated velocity signal being further re-
sponsive to each pulse;
said modulated velocity signal being one value of velocity in
response to one state of each pulse and said modulated
velocity being another value of velocity in response to the
other state of each pulse; and
said modulated velocity signal being supplied to said DAC
conversion means.
4,381,527
CASSETTE CHANGING METHOD AND APPARATUS
Theodore Titus, IV, Tucker, and Timothy D. Cutler, Atlanta,
both of Ga., assignors to Lanier Business Products, Inc.,
Atlanta, Ga.
FUed Sep. 24, 1979, Ser. No. 78,232
Int. a.J GllB 15/68. 15/24
U.S. a. 360—92 9 Claims
1. A changing apparatus for successively engaging a plural-
ity of discrete recording media with a transport mechanism
associated with a record/listen head comprising
a channel defining a longitudinally extending path running
adjacent to said transport mechanism;
an input magazine adjacent to said channel for storing a
plurality of said recording media;
an output magazine adjacent to said channel and longitudi-
nally spaced from said input magazine;
means for urging said recording media from said input maga-
zine into said channel;
a first and a second carriage means within said channel for
carrying said recording media along said channel;
a drive means for moving said first and second carriage
means in either of two opposite directions along said
channel;
a first stop along said channel for arresting motion of said
first carriage means moving from said input magazine
toward said transport mechanism at said locations oppo-
site said transport mechanism;
a second stop for arresting motion of said second carriage
means moving from said transport mechanism toward said
output magazine at a location opposite said output maga-
zine;
said arresting of said carriage means being independent of
continued operation of said drive means;
transport load means for moving a recording medium in said
channel transversely from said path into and out of en-
gagement with said transport mechanism; and
an ejecting means simultaneously operative with said trans-
port load means for moving a recording medium carried
by said second carriage means transversely of said path
into said output magazine.
4,381,528
ENCLOSED-TYPE MAGNETIC DISC RECORDING
AND/OR REPRODUONG APPARATUS
Masahiko Figioka, Hamura, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Electric Co., Ltd., Kawasaki, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 42,786, May 29, 1979, which U a division of
Ser. No. 835,060, Sep. 25, 1977, Pat. No. 4,185,308. This
appUcation Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 228,888
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 24, 1976, 51-114436
Int. a.3 GllB 77/00
U.S. a. 360—97 2 Claims
1. An enclosed-type magnetic disc recording and/or repro-
ducing apparatus for use in conjunction with a magnetic disc,
comprising:
a base;
a disc cover attached to said base and defining an enclosed
chamber between said cover and said base;
a bearing unit having a first end protruding into said en-
closed chamber from said base and a second end exposed
to open air;
a shaft supported by said bearing unit and having a tip end
protruding into said enclosed chamber;
a flange attached to the tip end of said shaft and adapted to
have said disc attached thereto;
a first cylindrical projecting member projecting toward said
flange from said base concentrically with said shaft;
a second cylindrical projecting member projecting toward
said base from said flange and overlapping said first cylin-
drical projecting member to form a narrow gap between
the overlapping portions of said cylindrical projecting
members, whereby a separate pressure chamber sur-
rounded by said flange, said base and both cylindrical
projecting members is formed;
1028
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
means for rotating said shaft, said flange, said disc, and said
second cylindrical projecting member; and
a pressure supply system for introducing high-pressure air
into said separate pressure chamber through an air inlet
bored in said base, at least during operation of said record-
ing and/or reproducing apparatus;
wherein said gap between the overlapping portions of said
first and second cylindrical projecting members is suffi-
ciently narrow and sufficiently long to restrict air leakage
from said separate pressure chamber through said gap to
maintain said separate pressure chamber at higher than
atmospheric pressure.
4,381,530
MOVABLE TAPE GUIDE DEVICES FOR USE IN
HELICAL-SCAN VIDEO TAPE RECORDERS
Nobuyoshi Owada, Kodaira, and Tamotsu Tominaga, Akishima,
both of Japan, assignors to Hitachi Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,275
Int. a.3 GllB 15/60, 5/08
U.S. a. 360—130.23 10 Qaims
4,381,529
MAGNETIC HEAD CONSTRUCTION
Jan Bouwma, Heerlen, and Johannes Kerssen, Eindhoven, both
of Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 208,968
Oaims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 3, 1979,
7908713
Int. a.3 GllB 5/20. 5/14
U.S. a. 360—123 2 Qaims
ry <^ o o o o o o b^
23 23'
U
- 24
29
4
zzzzzzzzzzzzz
1. A magnetic head construction comprising a substrate of
non-electrically conductive material, a number of layer-wise
formed electromagnetic transducer elements supported on the
substrate, and first connection conductors connecting the
elements to connection surfaces on the substrate, characterized
in that the construction further comprises a synthetic resin
casing in which the substrate with the transducer elements
integrated thereon is embedded, and a number of spaced strip-
shaped current conductors situated mainly in one plane and
having flat parts projecting from the casing, one of the current
conductors, at its end situated inside the casing, having a flat
portion on which the substrate is provided, the current con-
ductor parts being connected to the connection surfaces of the
transducer elements by respective second connection conduc-
tors.
1. A movable tape guide device comprising:
a deck establishing a reference plane;
a guide for a tape;
a slider supporting the tape guide;
guide means supported by the deck for guiding reciprocat-
ing motion of said slider which is straightforward and in
parallel with the reference plane;
drive means for reciprocating said slider;
stop means for preventing said slider from moving beyond a
predetermined limit;
detecting and controlling means responsive to a position of
said slider for controlling said drive means; and
spring means for applying a predetermined force, which is
larger than a maximum resultant force in the slider motion
direction of the tension forces of the tape acting on the
tape guide, to said stop means when said slider is stopped
by said stop- means.
4,381,531
ALTERNATING CURRENT MOTOR PROTECnON
SYSTEM
Virgil E. Eisenhauer, Camillus, N.Y., assignor to Carrier Corpo-
ration, Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 280,161
Int. a.3 H02H 3/08. 3/26
U.S. a. 361—87 7 Qaims
1. A system for protecting a three-phase alternating current
motor from current overload and from current imbalance
comprising:
means for sensing the current magnitude of each phase of the
alternating current supplied to the motor;
signal conditioning means for generating a three-phase elec-
trical output signal in response to the current magnitudes
APRIL 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1029
sensed by the current sensing means, the magnitude of the
first, second and third phase of said output signal being
proportional to the magnitude of the first, second and
third phase, respectively, of the alternating current;
signal processing means for monitoring the magnitude of
each phase of the output signal to determine the absolute
magnitude of each phase of the alternating current and to
determine the relative magnitude of each phase of the
alternating current relative to the magnitude of each of the
other phases of the alternating current; and
means for terminating the oijeration of the motor when the
absolute magnitude of a current phase exceeds a prese-
lected value or when the relative magnitude of a current
phase exceeds a preselected value.
fying electrode to earth; the electrode being so sited relative to
the spray-head surface that when the spray-head surface is
charged, the electrostatic field thereat causes liquid thereon to
4,381,532
CONSTANT ENERGY DRIVE ORCUIT FOR
ELECTROMAGNETIC PRINT HAMMERS
Robert W. Arnold, Glen Aubrey, N.Y., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,933
Int. a.3 HOIH 47/i2
atomise without substantial corona discharge to form electri-
cally charged particles which are projected past the electrode
and into contact with the plant.
U.S. a. 361—154
13 Claims
1. A constant energy drive circuit for an electromagnet
having a coil connectable to an unregulated source of drive
voltage by a switch means activated by a turn on signal of fixed
time duration causing current to flow in said coil, and a chop-
ping circuit means for cycling said switch means activatable at
a preset level of current in said coil during said time duration
for chopping the current in said coil during said time duration
at an average peak current for at least a portion of the remain-
der period of said time duration, characterized by,
said chopping circuit including means for altering the
switching rate of said switch means in response to changes
in said drive voltage to vary the average peak current in
said coil during said remainder period to compensate for
changes in the drive voltage of said source.
4,381,534
PROCESS AND ARRANGEMENT FOR THE
POLARIZATION OF SHAPED OBJECTS MADE FROM
POLYMERS
Rudi Danz, Teltow; Wolfgang Stark, KleinmachDow; Borkhard
Elling, Potsdam; Christian Rnscher, Teltow-Seehof, and Wolf-
gang Schwarz, Stahnsdorf, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Akademie der Wissenschaften der DDR, Berlin,
German Democratic Rep.
FUed Dec. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 102,946
Claims priority, application German Democratic Rep., Dec.
29, 1978, 210275; Apr. 24, 1979, 212341
Int. a.5 HOIG 7/02
U.S. a. 361—233 5 Claims
4,381,533
ATOMIZATION OF LIQUIDS
Ronald A. Coffee, Haslemere, England, assignor to Imperial
Chemical Industries PLC, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 79,950, Sep. 28, 1979, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 812,440, Jul. 1, 1977,
abandoned. This application Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,687
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 15, 1976,
29539/76; Feb. 21, 1977, 7186/77
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 26,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B05B 5/02
U.S. a. 361—228 4 Claims
1. A spraying apparatus for spraying a liquid onto a plant
comprising at least two spraying devices mounted on a boom
each such spraying device comprising: a spray-head having an
at least electrically semi-conducting surface; means for electri-
cally charging the spray-head surface to a potential of the
order of 1-20 kilovolts; means for delivering spray liquid to the
surface; a field intensifying electrode mounted adjacent to the
spray-head surface; and means for connecting the field intensi-
1. Method for polarizing at high field strengths, shaped
articles made from polymers provided at both sides with elec-
trically conducting contacts, characterized by the polarization
voltage U;<t) corresponding at least to an initial field strength
of 4000 kVcm- ' which is applied to the shaped articles made
from polymers having with their contacts a capacity C| at
temperatures preferably above i the melting temperature of
the shaped articles, by means of variable, high-voltage resis-
tance, charge-limiting polarization capacitors of a capacity C2,
wherein C2> >Ci is valid as initial state, and wherein C2 is
selected in such a way that the initial maximum polarization
voltage U;, (to) is applied only momentarily to the shaped
article and will drop after completed polarization to a value
\}p (t) which will amount to approximately one half of U^ (t<,).
1030
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,535
DIELECTRIC FLUID
Vandos Staedigiaii, and Gerald A. Voyles, both of lodianapolis,
Ind^ assignors to Emhart Industries, Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 241,002
Int. a.3 HOIG 4/22
U.S. CL 361—318 4 Claims
said circuit being arranged and constructed to sequentially
turn on and turn off said lamps in a desired sequence, and
4,381,536
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACTTOR
Sidney D. Ross, Williamstown, and Manuel Finkelstein, North
Adams, both of Mass., assignors to Sprague Electric Com-
pany, North Adams, Mass.
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,834
Int. K^? HOIG 9/02
U.S. a. 361—433 5 Qaims
1. An electrolytic capacitor comprising a plurality of spaced
aluminum electrodes, at least one of which is coated with a
barrier layer dielectric oxide, interleaved spacers, and an elec-
trolyte in contact therewith, said electrolyte comprising about
12-15 wt. % of ammonium difluoroacetate salt as solute dis-
solved in a solvent selected from the group consisting of ethyl-
ene glycol and ethylene glycol-butyrolactone mixture and
containing about 3-19 wt. % water and said electrolyte having
a room-temperature resistivity of 150 ohm-cm or lower and a
-40" C. resistivity of less than 11,000 ohm-cm to provide a
low-voltage capacitor that retains at least 70% capacitance at
-40* C.
4,381,537
ILLUSIONARY WHEEL COVER STRUCTURE
David K. Hinrichs, 3232 BlaisdeU Ate. S., Minneapolis, Minn.
55408
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 337,074
Int a.3 B60Q 1/QO
U.S. a. 362—78 5 claims
1. An illusionary movement wheel cover for an automative
vehicle, having in combination
a translucent wheel cover for an automative vehicle,
non-rotatable axle supported means carrying said wheel
cover,
said means comprising
an axle extension,
a plate member carried by said axle extension having radially
disposed channels therein underlying said wheel cover,
lamps respectfully recessed in said channels,
a circuit including said lamps,
switching means and a line to a power source,
1. In a capacitor, a dielectric fluid consisting of a phthalate
ester, dodecylbenzene in a percent by volume amount of sub-
stantially 20% and 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene in a percent by vol-
ume amount of substantially 10%.
said channels appearing through said cover giving the ap-
pearance of a rotatable movement of said wheel cover as
said lamps are turned on and turned off.
4,381,538
LAMP SWIVEL
Jerome Warshawsky, Baldwin, N.Y., assignor to I. W. Indus-
tries, Inc., MelvUle, N.Y.
■ FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,445
Int. a.3 F21V 21/26
U.S. a. 362-269 13 Qaims
1. A lamp swivel mountable between a lamp base and a lamp
body, said lamp body having an associated light-generating
means, so that said lamp body together with its associated
light-generating means may be swivelably pivoted and rotated
on linear support means and about an axis, said axis being the
principal axis of the lamp swivel, which comprises.
(a) a first member, said first member having a first central
axis, a body disposed along said first central axis, and a
dependent cylindrical extension, said extension being
coaxial with said first central axis, said first central axis
lying along said principal axis, said first member body
being provided with means to receive one end of said
linear support means, said linear support means extending
from said one end to an other end connection to said lamp
body,
(b) pin means, said pin means extending laterally outwards
from the outer surface of said extension, and
(c) a second member, said second member having a second
central axis and a body disposed along said second central
axis, one end of said second member body having a cylin-
drical recess, said body recess being coaxial with said
second central axis and having a diameter slightly greater
than the diameter of said extension of said first member, so
that said extension is contiguously insertable into said
recess, the lateral surface of said recess having a slot and
a circular groove, said surface slot extending from one end
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1031
of said second member body to said circular groove in the
surface of said recess, said groove being coaxial with said
second central axis, so that when said extension is inserted
into said recess, at least a portion of said first central axis
is coaxial with said second central axis, said pin means
being then receivable through said slot and into said
groove, whereby said first member is detachably attached
to said second member, and said first member is at least
partially rotatable about said first central axis, while said
second member either remains stationary or concomi-
tantly rotates about said second central axis, said second
central axis lying along said principal axis, said second
member body being detachably attachable to means ex-
tending to said lamp base.
CPU asynchronously to the placement of said I/O events on
the I/O event stack, a plurality of I/O adapters connected to
control I/O devices, a channel connecting the plurality of I/O
adapters to the CPU and the storage, said channel including
polling means for polling said I/O adapters on a priority basis
4^1,539
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Shoji Sakurai, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Matsushita Electric
Works, Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
FUed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,146
Claims priority, application Japan, May 29, 1980, 55-
75031[U]
Int C1.3 F21V 21/16
U.S. a. 362—285 17 Qaims
1. A lighting equipment of pendant type comprising;
a plural number of strings strung between a principal body
of the lighting equipment and a holding means such as a
ceiling or a beam from which said principal body of said
lighting equipment is to be suspended,
a string winder for winding and paying out said plural
number of strings in each-other related manner for vari-
ation of distance from said holding means to said princi-
pal body, said string winder being to be fixed either to
said principal body or on said holding means,
string guiding means for guiding each string and disp>osed
with a predetermined distance from each other, corres-
ponding to said string winder.
4^1,540
ASYNCHRONOUS CHANNEL ERROR MECHANISM
Da?id O. Lewis, Rocbeiter, and John W. Reed, Fine Iiland, both
of Mion^ aaiignon to Intemational BnsiiieM Machines Cor-
poration, Annonk, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 953,651, Oct 23, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Jan. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,161
Int CL3 G06F 11/34
U.S. CL 364-200 8 Clainis
1. In channel error logging apparatus for a compute, system
having an addressable storage for storing an input/output
(I/O) event stack with the capacity to store a plurality of I/O
events, a central processing unit (CPU) for retrieving I/O
events from the I/O event stack in storage and for processing
said I/O events where the retrieving and processing of said
I/O events from said I/O event stack is performed by said
Q=
MfMOAv DATI
0=
©=
0^
«^0»VD*Ti
9i5?£5)
if I' BiT ■
scT in aiT9
CmaNKCl UOCKS
vnrnT"
£3
for service requirements, said polling means, upon finding an
I/O adapter requiring service, halting polling of other I/O
adapters until released by the channel upon completion of
servicing of the I/O adapter requiring service, and a plurality
of I/O registers accessible by the channel and the CPU,
1032
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
wherein each register is individually identifiable and where at
least one I/O register contains an address for addressing said
I/O event stack and where other I/O registers are used in
association with an I/O adapter to maintain command and data
addresses for performing an I/O operation, the improvement
comprising:
means for selectively giving said CPU or said channel access
to said at least one I/O register which contains an address
usable by said CPU or said channel for addressing the I/O
event stack to store or retrieve a channel error I/O event
on said stack;
means in said channel for indicating the occurrence and type
of channel errors occurring in the channel and in the
plurality of I/O adapters in connection with an I/O opera-
tion;
means responsive to the means for indicating the occurrence
and type of channel errors for forming a channel error
I/O event, said event including,
a channel function field for identifying the type of I/O
operation being performed at the occurrence of the
channel error,
a first identification field for identifying the I/O register in
use at the occurrence of the channel error,
a second identification field for identifying the I/O
adapter using the channel at the occurrence of the
channel error, and
a third identification field for identifying the type of chan-
nel error which occurred;
means for storing the formed channel error I/O event in the
I/O event stack at a location in addressable storage desig-
nated by the contents of said at least one I/O register; and
means responsive to the termination of a channel error
I/O event storage operation for signalling said channel to
release said polling means to resume normal polling and
servicing of the I/O adapters, independently of the CPU
retrieving the stored event from the I/O event stack, said
CPU retrieving said stored I/O events asynchronously to
the placement of said I/O events on said I/O event stack.
non-residency of either or both of said two consecutive
addressed data words; and
102 i
_C1
OW X - FOUR
SELECTOR
t 4 t M
92 0
92 I
'JDD *<W0
106-t
£-
one-qf- four
WOHD
SELECTOR
TTTT
EVEN
'±
ACC*
184 V
TL
96-2
-96 3
ODD
*OR0 SUFFER
AOOi)
ODD *ORD
WRITE H£G
euFFE«
*R|TE
CONTROL
r^
FUNCTION
■64
±=t:
A
■
m
4 5
AliWESS * I HEG
^82
FROM PROCESSOR
AGING a
B. OCX
REt-LACEMEN^
T"
TT
• r J WOW!. SE-ECT I
^ Vd — ^^^^r^ I — ;:ss^n^
|- _|_j *m;. SE-ECT I I «0«D SELECT |».
HI54 150-T I 166 -J 1'4
, * '-M E.'N SET )0D SET 1*-^
' - H- UiSS niT/MiSS U— r
^
FROM PROCESSOR
4,381,541
BUFFER MEMORY REFERENaNG SYSTEM FOR TWO
DATA WORDS
Charles G. Baumann, Jr., Centervillc, and Michael Danilenko,
West St. Paul, both of Minn., assignors to Sperry Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,020
Int. a.3 G06F li/00
U.S. a. 364—200 22 Oaims
1. In a set associative memory system having an addressable
main memory for storing data words arranged in blocks and
sets, first and second buffer memories coupled to said main
memory for storing associated blocks of data words including
addressed ones of the data words, and means for receiving two
consecutive addresses of two data words to be accessed from
said main memory or said first and second buffer memories, a
two data word access control comprising:
residency determining means for determining whether two
consecutive addressed data words are resident in the
buffer memories, and for providing first signals indicative
of residency of either or both of said two consecutive
addressed data words and second signals indicative of
access means coupled to said residency determining means
for simultaneously accessing said two consecutive ad-
dressed words in response to said first signals.
4,381,542
SYSTEM FOR INTERRUPT ARBITRATION
Paul Binder, Tyngsboro, and David A. Cane, Sudbury, both of
Mass., assignors to Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynord,
Mass.
FUed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,528
Int. a.5 G06F i/04
U.S. a. 364—200 8 Qaims
1. A data processing system comprising:
(A) System interconnection means including means for
transferring interrupt request signals, interrupt grant sig-
nals, bus access control signals and information signals;
(B) a processor unit means for processing data in response to
instructions, said processor unit means including
(i) means for establishing an operating priority level for
said processing means, and
(ii) processor interruption arbitration means connected to
said interrupt request signal transfer means, and said
operating priority level means for interrupting the oper-
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1033
ation of said processor unit means in response to the
receipt of an interrupt request signal having a priority
level exceeding the operating priority level of said
processor unit means, and for transmitting an interrupt
grant signal;
(C) At least one data unit means for controlling a transfer of
signals over said system interconnection means, said data
unit means including:
(i) processor interruption means connected to said inter-
rupt request signal transfer means and said interrupt
grant signal transfer means for transmitting an interrupt
request signal and for receiving an interrupt grant sig-
nal;
(ii) bus access' control means connected to said processor
interruption means and said bus access control signal
transfer means for transmitting and receiving bus access
control signals and for controlling the access of said
.]T..TT-,J I "^;™;i^-[=—
C-MO-L C
J
/*'
42
Tfi»N$F[R
r
45
S^A'."
'/*'.■:
44
H--;
"-■•
45
^ty
b-' I •
46
•SrtROjFT
utootr' B«
47
••.TtOP-jPt
48
Dft^.'
Of".'
49
:,■:
:lX'
wiu". "!;«
. «IUS •■*
controllers in response to connection request commands from
said controllers, said arrangement comprising in combination;
a plurality of subchannels, each of which includes:
(a) a first port switch associated with said first controller and
a second port switch associated with said second control-
ler;
(b) at least one of said devices;
(c) interlocking means interconnecting said switches; and
(d) bus means connecting said first and second device con-
trollers to said at least one said device through said first
and second port switches;
each said port switch including:
data unit means to said system interconnection means
for transfers of information signals in response to the
processor interruption means receipt of an interrupt
grant signal and to the receipt of bus access control
signals; and
(iii) interrupt vector transmitting means connected to said
information transfer means, said bus access control
means and said processor interruption means for trans-
ferring an interrupt vector over said information trans-
fer means in response to the receipt of an interrupt grant
signal and to the data unit means obtaining access to
said system interconnection means whereby said data
means first receives an interrupt grant signal and then
receives access to said system interconnection means
for transfers of information signals before transferring
an interrupt vector over the information signal transfer
means.
4,381,543
CONTROLLER PORT SWITCH ARRANGEMENT FOR
SHARING STORED DATA AMONG DIFFERENT
SYSTEMS
Roland J. Bunten, III, and John E. Hickman, both of San Jose,
Calif., assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Annonk, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,937
Int. a.3 G06F 13/00
VJS. a. 364—200 10 Claims
1. In a storage subsystem comprising a plurality of storage
devices and first and second device controllers, each controller
is connectable to at least one data processing system through a
first interface and selectively to one of said plurality of devices
through a second interface in response to a command which
originates from said data processing system and identifies one
of said devices, an improved arrangement for controlling the
selective connection of each of said devices to either of said
Pu.
(1) gating means for selectively connecting said bus means
from said second interface of said associated controller to
said device; and
(2) control means, operable in response to a connection
request command from its associated controller identify-
ing one of said devices for:
(a) controlling said gating means provided said switch is
associated with said device identified in said command
and provided said device is available; and
(b) operating said interlocking means to prevent said port
switch associated with said other controller from respond-
ing to a request connection command for said selected
device.
4,381,544
PROCESS AND APPARi^TUS FOR GEOTECHNIC
EX^I.ORATION
Michael E. Stamm, Sandy, Utahr assignor to Northwest Energy
Company, Salt Lake City, Utah
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204,781
Int. a.3 GOIV 3/12
U.S. a. 364—420 10 Claims
OSCILltTOli
pt
(cO»MiT| f 113(0 "I
?t ]l
COM
of:
1. A process for geotechnic exploration comprising the steps
(a) Emitting at least three electromagnetic pulses toward the
ground from an airborne platform at regular intervals,
based on the airspeed of the platform and the area being
surveyed the wavelengths, frequencies, cyclicity and
timing of the pulses being selected to provide, upon reflec-
tion, satisfactory indicia of the physical characteristics of
the area being measured;
1034
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
(b) Receiving the reflections of said pulses at said platform;
(c) Amplifying the reflected pulses to a readily processible
level;
(d) Processing the reflected pulses to enhance the spatial
resolutioa of images produced therefrom;
(e) Further processing the reflected pulses by selecting those
variables represented by the pulses that are deemed rele-
vant;
(0 Displaying the reflected pulses in visual form represent-
ing a cross-section of an area;
(g) If desired, storing in recoverable form the pulses repre-
senting said variables; and
(h) Repeating said process as often as desired.
CONTROL MEANS AND METHOD FOR POWDER
BAGGING
Nicholas Biddle, III, and Stephen R. Craig, both of Wilmington,
Del., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and Company,
Wilmington, Del.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,854
Int. a.5 B67D 5/30
U.S. a. 364—479 10 Oaims
run i
cmnoi 1
gill
4,381,546
SYSTEM FOR THE QUANTITATIVE MEASUREMENT
OF IMPAIRMENTS IN THE COMMUNICATION
CHANNEL OF A QUADRATURE AMPLITUDE
MODULATION DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Thomas R. Armstrong, Largo, FUu, assignor to Paradyne Corpo-
ration, Largo, Fla.
FUed Mar. 2, 1979, Ser. No. 16,912
Int a.3 H04B 3/14
VS. a. 364—514 16 Claims
1. In a data communications system employing quadrature
amplitude modulation comprising; a transmitter receiver, and a
communication channel linking said transmitter and receiver,
said receiver producing sampled eye diagram point informa-
tion wherein each received point is defined in a coordinate
system in which a first axis is the in-phase channel axis and a
second axis is the quadrature channel axis, the improvement
comprising: means for rotating said received points by an
operand determined by the ideal value of the receiving point
information so that each rotated point has a first nominally
1. A method for automatically controlling a powder bagging
machine, said powder bagging machine having a weighing
means for measuring the weight of powder dispensed and a
means for dispensing the powder into a container, said method
comprising the following steps in sequence:
(a) operating said dispensing means during a first stage at a
predetermined high speed for a predetermined time,
(b) measuring the weight of powder dispensed during said
first stage and comparing said measured weight with a
desired total weight,
(c) operating said dispensing means during a second stage at
a decelerating speed, the rate of deceleration determined
by the measurement taken in step (b).
Tronimilltr 1^
j^
CalCuloting ,
22 fy» dota
Choon#l Impairmtnl
Information
pho»# )'tt»r
nois*
distortion I int#rmod»la1«n.
tiormonic)
fr»quoncir oIlMt
t^it« ( ompt t phow I
dittortion(otTipl/d»toyl
vtc
maximum component on a new first axis and a nominal second
component on a new second axis and means for determining
the characteristics of said communication channel from vari-
ances and means of the components.
4,381,547
PICTURE DEFORMING PROCESS
Koichi Ejiri, Chiba, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,273
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 28, 1979, 54-154110
Int. a.J G06F 15/20. 3/14
U.S. a. 382—47 2 Claims
r' — "--.Fd,)
O- 4^^ 9
px r-:^ 1— ?:
q« ;
S(k,L)
-<>
1. A process of deforming an original picture by changing
picture element pitches among the data of the original picture
which are read by sampling the original picture by the picture
element, comprising the steps of:
selecting a deformation percentage to be performed on the
original picture;
calculating a set of weight coefficients for all the picture
elements according to said selected deformation percent-
age and storing said weight coefficients in a first memory
means;
successively reading original picture data and simulta-
neously reading out said stored weight coefficients in said
first memory means;
calculating the product of said original picture data and said
weight coeflicients and storing the result of said calcula-
tion in a second memory means;
reading out of said second memory means said product
calculation according to addressed defmed by the original
picture data and the data of the weight coefficients previ-
ously stored;
adding together each of said read out calculation product of
said original picture data and said weight coefficient and
each of the data of the weight coeflicients, respectively;
dividing the addition result of the original picture data by
the addition result of the weight coefficient data; and
outputting a deformed picture processed signal.
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1035
4^1,548
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GUIDING VEHICLE
WHEEL ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS TO KNOWN
AUGNMENT REQUIREMENTS
James M. Grossman, Chesterfield, aod Daniel B. January, Bel
Ridge, both of Mo., assignors to Hunter Engineering Com-
pany, Bridgeton, Mo.
FUed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 178,747
Int. a.3 GOIB 5/24
U.S. a. 364—551 19 Claims
59 ^. . -
Wi*-"
1. Apparatus for guiding vehicle wheel alignment adjust-
ments to known alignment specifications and tolerances, the
apparatus comprising:
(a) means for storing known alignment specification and
tolerance data for a known vehicle;
(b) means connected into said alignment specification and
tolerance storing means for supplying thereto known
vehicle alignment specification and tolerance data;
(c) alignment adjustment display means for visually guiding
the adjustments performed on the wheels of the known
vehicle, said display means being connected into said
storing means for receiving information therefrom;
(d) vehicle wheel alignment instruments carried by the vehi-
cle wheels for generating signals representative of the
wheel positions of such vehicle, each said instrument
being connected into said storing means for feeding said
wheel position signals thereto; and
(e) means in said apparatus for selecting specific alignment
data generated by said instruments for comparison with
similar known alignment data stored in said storing means,
whereby said display means is activated to visually indi-
cate the existence of differences between the specific
alignment data generated by said instruments and corre-
sponding similar known alignment data stored in said
storing means.
4381,549
AUTOMATIC FAULT DIAGNOSTIC APPARATUS FOR A
HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Custis L. Stamp, Jr., Tyler, Tex., and Rollie R. Herzog, Louis-
yille, Ky., anignors to Trane CAC, Inc., La Crosse, Wis.
FUed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,412
Int. a.3 GOIM WOO
U.S. a. 364—557 20 Claims
1. Automatic fault diagnostic apparatus for use with a heat
pump air conditioning system of the type having refrigerant
system functional operating components including an indoor
heat exchanger, an outdoor heat exchanger, a refrigerant com-
pressor and a switchover valve all interconnected by refriger-
ant lines, said diagnostic apparatus adapted to provide data
representative of system faults to a service technician, said
apparatus comprising:
means for sensing temperatures at a plurality of predeter-
mined points on the system's functional operating compo-
nents and for sensing indoor and outdoor air temperatures;
means jointly responsive to at least a pair of the temperature
sensing means for performing one or more predetermined
comparative temperature measurement tests comparing
the sensed temperature to predetermined tolerance limits
to derive a measurement based on the temperature differ-
ential between said at least a pair of sensors to determine
if measured temperature differentials are outside predeter-
mined tolerance limits;
means responsive to the test means for generating a fault
signal for each test in which an out-of-tolerance tempera-
ture differential is found;
means for storing each fault signal with a distinctive identifi-
cation representative of the particular test in which the
out-of-tolerance temperature differential was found;
and means operable by a service technician to read out from
the storage means data including said distinctive identifi-
cation representative of each stored fault signal whereby
the nature of the respective causative fault can then be
determined by the service technician.
4,381,550
HIGH SPEED DIVIDING aRCUTT
Dan C. Baker, Bountiful, Utah, assignor to Sperry Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 201,895
Int. a.3 G06F 7/S2
U.S. a. 364—766 8 Claims
1. Apparatus for producing a quotient from a binary number
dividend and a binary number divisor comprising:
a data bus for sequential transmission of said dividend and
said divider as parallel bit numbers,
two's complement adder means connected to said data bus
and adapted to receive said dividend and said divisor and
to sense the sign bit to determine if the dividend and/or
the divisor shall be complemented,
a parallel dividend shift register coupled to said two's com-
plement adder means for receiving and storing the divi-
dend number from said adder means prior to a division
operation,
a parallel divisor register coupled to said two's complement
adder means for receiving and storing the divisor number
from said adder means prior to a division operation,
a paraUel adder having its inputs connected to the output of
the divisor register and the output of said dividend shift
register, said parallel adder having a sign position output,
the output of said parallel adder being connected to the input
of said dividend shift register,
control means, coupled to said data bus and including a flag
bit comparator for comparing the sign of the dividend and
the divisor,
quotient shift register means coupled to said control means
1036
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
and coupled to the sign position output of said parallel
adder, and
said control means being coupled to said adder means, said
divisor register and said dividend shift register for produc-
ing timing signals for first loading the dividend number
input means for addressing said memory means for re-
trieving the second words;
similarity detection means responsive to said access means
for detecting similarity between letters of the first word
and letters of the second words;
means responsive to said similarity detection means for
2li*T« decode-
displaying a translated word corresponding to a deter-
mined one of the second words when the determined
second word is the same as the first word; and
means responsive to said similarity detection means for
displaying a selected one of the second words which is
most similar to the first word when none of t|ie second
words are the same as the first word.
FIG
4,381,552
STANBY MODE CONTROLLER UTILIZING
MICROPROCESSOR
John D. Nocilini, Margate; Ronald E. Sharp, Sunrise, and
Emilio J. Cuadra, Miami, all of Fla., assignors to Motorola
Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 967,761, Dec. 8, 1978, abandoned. This
application Nov. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 208,101
Int. a.5 G06F 13/00. 1/00; GllC 7/00
U.S. a. 364—900 7 Qaims
and then the divisor number from said adder means into
said dividend and said divisor registers and subsequently
initiating a dividing operation whereby, the number in
said dividend shift register is added to the number in said
divisor register and the resulting sign position output is
processed and stored in said quotient register means.
4,381,551
ELECTRONIC TRANSLATOR
Ikiio Kanou, Yamatokoriyama; Shigenobu Yanagiuchi, Tenri,
and Taknro Omori, Yamatokoriyama, all of Japan, assignors
to Sharp Kabnshiki Kaisha, Osdca, Japan
FUed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,323
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 13, 1979, 54-118146;
Sep. 13, 1979, 54-118149
Int a.3 G06F 15/38
UJS. a. 364—900 6 Claims
1. An electronic language interpreter device wherein a first
word represented in a first language is entered to obtain a
translated word in a second language equivalent to the first
word, comprising:
input means for entering the first word;
memory means for storing a plurality of second words in the
first language;
access means responsive to the first word entered by said
^ I ti A j7 I *~«J (uu U~i
— _ ^ _J 20B-'
1. A power conserving circuit for a two-way communica-
tions device having high and low power-level operating modes
and having two operative states in the higher power mode, the
device including a microprocessor, ROM memories, RAM
memories and a battery, the circuit comprising in combination:
delay means coupled to receiving and delaying a RAM
enabling signal indicative of the operating mode of the
device;
first input means coupled to an output of the microprocessor
for receiving a signal indicative of one of the two opera-
tive states of the device while operating in the high power
mode;
clock means for providing a low duty cycle signal;
first logic means coupled to receive the output signals of the
first input means, the clock means and the delay means for
providing an operating level control signal for portions of
the device;
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1037
second input means coupled to an output of the micro-
processor for providing memory select signals from the
microprocessor;
third input means coupled to the battery for providing a
power input;
fourth input means coupled to an output of the microproces-
sor for providing a first memory control signal;
fifth input means coupled to an output of the microprocessor
for providing a second memory control signal;
second logic means coupled to receive the output signals of
the first logic means and the second, third, and fourth
input means for controlling power to ones of said ROM
memories;
third logic means coupled to receive the inverted output
signals of the second input means and the output signals of
the third, fourth and fifth input means and to the first logic
means for providing an enabling signal to said RAM
memories, the RAM enabling signal also being coupled to
the delay means input to provide the mode indicative
signal.
examined and an associated set of print commands to the
printer interface, (iii) to post a flag signifying the incom-
plete status of said first incomplete line when processing
said one block, and (iv) upon receipt of said next succeed-
ing block to check such flag and to link the fu^t and
second incomplete lines by initializing horizontal and
vertical escapement values for continuance of printing
from the end of such first incomplete line; and
output means including the printer interface responsive to
control signals to provide to the printer the textual charac-
ters and any associated print commands.
4,381,553
PROGRAMMABLE PRINTER CX>NTROLLER WITH
MULTILINE BUFFERING AND OVERSTRIKE FEATURE
Donald C. Ferguson, Los Gatos, Calif., assignor to Mohawk
Data Science Corp., Parsippany, N.J.
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,281
Int. a.3 G06F 3/12. 9/00. 15/20
U.S. a. 364—900 5 Claims
COMM CtUNNiL ID D<Ta lOjDCI
V.0
Mwnca ■■Tcunci
1. A programmable controller for a printer comprising:
a memory means, a processor unit, a data source interface
and a printer interface interconnected with one another;
input means including the data source interface for sequen-
tially receiving a plurality of blocks of characters, at least
one of such blocks including at least one complete line of
(f^xtual characters followed by a first incomplete line of
textual characters and the next succeeding block including
a second incomplete line such that the first and second
incomplete lines when linked together form a complete
line;
control means including the processing unit and a program
stored in the memory means for operating the processing
unit for each such block in a processing loop which in-
cludes a line examination mode followed by a print line
mode, the processing unit acting (i) during each line exam-
ination mode to examine each character in the line being
examined and upon detection of either an end of line
condition or an end of block condition to exit to the print
line mode, (ii) during each print line mode to provide a set
of control signals, the textual characters of the line just
4381,554
CALCULATOR FOR STORING SOURCE DATA AND
EVALUATING NUMERICAL ANSWERS TO PROBLEMS
Roy W. Reach, Sudbury; Wiliiam M. Kahn, Brighton, and David
Shapiro, Lincoln, all of Mass., assignors to Hewlett-Packard
Company, Palo Alto, Calif.
DiTision of Ser. No. 604^50, Jul. 26, 1979, Pat No. 4,309,761,
which is a division of Ser. No. 731,611, Oct. 13, 1976, Pat No.
4,198,684, which is a division of Ser. No. 390,645, Aug. 22, 1973,
Pat No. 3,996,562, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 378,221,
Jun. 26, 1964, abandoned. This application Aug. 13, 1981, Ser.
No. 292,371
Int a.3 G06F 3/023. 3/06. 3/14
U.S. a. 364—900 21 Claims
1. A source data entry device for capturing and storing data
for future processing or the like, comprising in combination a
keyboard data entry means for producing coded data represen-
tative of different keys upon actuation thereof; display means
for visual character read-out of such data; coupling means for
coupling coded data entered into said device to a recorder for
recording data; and a programmed microprocessor interfaced
to each of said entry means, said display means and said cou-
pling means; said microprocessor including a fixed-program
unit and a central logic unit embodying substantially all of the
control logic for said entry means and display means; said
fixed-program unit having a built-in program dedicating said
device to a particular functional configuration and establishing
an instruction set which time-shares said logic unit with said
entry means and display means to control the same in confor-
mance with such functional configuration.
1038
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
4,381,555
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING THE BRAKING TIME
OF A MOTOR VEHICLE
Karl-W. Heinle, Ingolstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Audi NSU Ante Union Aktiengeseilschaft, Neckarsulm, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 138,746
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 10,
1979, 2914411
int a.' Giic um
U.S. a. 365—78 8 Claims
" ¥^\
1'
Pl
-i
! I M
O L Ol L L L O O
e6
1. Apparatus for measuring the time elapsed between appli-
cation of a vehicle brake and occurrence of a predetermined
event, comprising:
a shift register having a number of register locations, each of
which is capable of assuming one of two binary states and
having a means for receiving shift pulses which cause the
contents of a given register location to shift to the next
succeeding register location upon application of each shift
pulse,
oscillator means for supplying shift pulses to said means for
receiving shift pulses in said shift register,
brake signal generator means connected to a signal input of
said shift register for changing the binary state of a first
location in said shift register upon application of the vehi-
cle brake,
switch means operable responsive to a predetermined accel-
eration value experienced by said vehicle to disconnect
said oscillator means from said means for receiving shift
pulses, and
interrogation terminal means for determining the number of
locations in said shift register containing bits of changed
binary state for providing a measure of time elapsed be-
tween application of the vehicle brake and occurrence of
the predetermined event.
4,381,556
VIDEODISC READER WITH LONGITUDINALLY
DISPLACED TURNTABLE
Guy Bourdon, and Jean-Claude Lehureau, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
FUed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,549
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 21, 1979, 79 31486
Int. a.3 GllB 77/00
U.S. a. 369—44 5 Claims
1. A device for providing a rectilinear displacement, with
respect to a fixed support, of a rotary engine having a shaft,
said displacement being in a direction perpendicular to the axis
of rotation of said shaft, said device comprising:
a movable carriage rigidly locked with said engine;
means to guide said carriage along said perpendicular direc-
tion;
magnetic means producing a first air gap provided on said
suppori and producing a magnetic output across of said
first air gap;
a conductive disk fixed on said shaft and crossing said air gap
wherein the magnetic output of said magnetic means
produces said displacement; and
ELECTROMAGNET
LI
100 rt
SUPPORT
V-"6 "5-/^
^ ELECTRO- J , — L .lu f ^
z^;^^;-^ ] -MAGNET ^..^ ^ ,3^ \_rl^^^^^
frn, I ; - C3L-th
' I COUPLING SLEEVE CONDUCTING I ^ -^ \
y p'sc \ I
electronic control means for controlling the magnetic output
of said magnetic means in order to control said displace-
ment of said rotary engine.
4,381,557
OPTICAL FOCUS SENSOR
Robert W. Jebens, Skillman, N^I., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,100
Int. a.J GllB 7/12
U.S. a. 369—45 4 Gaims
1. A focus control apparatus for use with a disc-shaped
record medium having information stored in a spiral groove
formed on a flat, reflective surface thereof, the apparatus com-
prising:
a first light source emitting a beam of light of a first given
wavelength;
a first light path optically coupling said first light source and
said reflective surface of said record medium, said first
light path including means for focusing said light beam
emitted by said first light source to a diffraction limited
spot on said surface of said record medium;
first light detection means having a photosensitive surface,
said light detection means being used to detect said infor-
mation stored in said spiral groove;
a second light path optically coupling said focused light spot
on said surface of said record medium to said photosensi-
tive surface of said first light detection means;
a second light source emitting a beam of light of a second
given wavelength;
a third light path optically coupling said second light source
and said reflective surface of said record medium, said
third light path including said means for focusing, said
light beam emitted by said second light source being
projected by said means for focusing to impinge on said
reflective surface as a circular region having a diameter
sufficiently large to span a plurality of groove convolu-
tions of said spiral groove;
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1039
second light detection means having four photosensitive
regions arranged to measure the diameter of an illumi-
nated spot incident on said second light detection means;
a fourth light path coupling said circular region on said
reflective surface to said second light detection means and
including means for imaging a conjugate image of said
circular region onto said second light detection means;
and
means, responsive to said second light detection means, for
generating a signal representative of the diameter of said
conjugate image; and
means, responsive to said signal generated by said generating
means, for varying the distance between said focusing lens
and said reflective surface of said record medium to main-
tain said light beam emitted by said first source in-focus on
said reflective surface.
jacket, and a lid member inserted through said opening of said
jacket for closing said opening of said jacket, said reproducing
apparatus comprising:
an inserting opening part through which said case is inserted
into said reproducing apparatus;
a turntable for rotating said disc-shaped recording medium;
clamping means for clamping at least one of said disc-shaped
recording medium or said lid member, provided at the
innermost part on the opposite side from said inserting
opening part with respect to said turntable;
a pickup frame having a reproducing transducer for repro-
ducing the disc -shaped recording medium placed on said
turntable;
moving means for moving said pickup frame between a
waiting position and a reproducing position with respect
to the disc-shaped recording medium;
4,381,558
TALKING GREETING CARD
Robert Bearden, 33571 Divers Ct., Dana Point, Calif. 92629
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,037
Int. a.3 GllB 7/00. 3/00
U.S. a. 369—68 1 Claim
1. In a greeting card assembly, the combination of: a front
display panel having side edges, two rear panels joined to
opposite side edges of said front panel, said three panels being
adapted to lie substantially flat in one configuration, means for
joining said rear panels together in tension and in a second
configuration to cause said front panel to bow in a convex
manner and thereby form a space between the joined rear
panels and the bowed front panel, the front panel having a slot,
a flexible sound record strip extending through the slot in close
contact with said front panel and having an abutment posi-
tioned within said space, the abutment being too large to pass
through said slot, said sound record strip having a prepared
surface which produces audible sounds upon sliding contact
with a moving element such as the thumb nail of a user, the
front and rear panels serving as an acoustic ampUfier for such
sounds.
a pair of guide rails provided extending between a position
of said inserting opening part and a position at an inner-
most part of said apparatus, at right and left sides of a
moving passage of said case, and allowing slider means for
supporting said case to move therealong in response to the
inserting and pulling out operation of said case, among the
pair of guide rail, the guide rail at the side of said pickup
frame comprising fixed front and rear guide rail parts
respectively fixed at the front end and the rear end of said
apparatus in coincidence with a linear line extending in the
case inserting direction, and a moving guide rail provided
on said pickup frame to move together therewith; and
position restricting means for restricting the final position of
said moving guide rail part so as to align with said fixed
front and rear guide rail parts, when said pickup frame is
returned to the waiting position.
4,381,560
MULTIPLEX TRANSMITTER APPARATUS
Cecil W. Farrow, Highlands, N J., aadgnor to BeU Telephone
Laboratoriei, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N J.
FUed Oct 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,414
Int a.^ H04J 3/02
\3S. CL 370—11 5 OdM
4,381,559
DISC-SHAPED RECORDING MEDIUM REPRODUCING
APPARATUS
Takashi Saito, Ayase, Japan, aiaignor to Victor Company of
Japan, Ltd^ Yokohama, Japan
FUed JnL 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,468
Claims iviority, appUcation Japan, JnL 28, 1960, 55-103270
Int CL^ GllB 23/04. 23/30. WOO
MS. CL 369—77 6 Claims
1. A reproducing apparatus for reproducing a disc-shaped
recording medium which is accommodated within a case, said
case comprising a jacket which has a space for accommodating
said disc-shaped recording medium and an <ypewa% for aUow-
ing said disc-shaped recording medium to go in and out of said
en a
' IKIC -
leoiiiikr
l'_^
1»_ " 4 '«
Jl^
1. Apparatus for generating a composite waveform having a
1040
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
first component signal corresponding to a supplied serial bit
stream and a second component signal corresponding to a
timing signal, the supplied serial bit stream capable of being
partitioned into either consecutive symbols or consecutive
frames, the apparatus comprising angle modulation means
responsive to consecutive symbols of the supplied serial bit
stream for generating the first component signal of the com-
posite waveform, the apparatus characterized by,
means for generating the timing signal at a predetermined pulse
rate corresponding to a rate of occurrence for consecutive
groups of (NM)/GCD(N,M) bits of the supplied serial bit
stream, where M is the number of bits in each symbol, N is
the number of bits in each frame, GCD(N,M) is the greatest
common divisor of N and M and M/N is a nonintegral
rational number, and
means responsive to the timing signal for amplitude modulat-
ing the first comp)onent signal therewith to generate the
second component signal of the composite waveform.
4,381,562
BROADCAST TYPE SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
Antbony Acampora, Freehold, N.J., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N^J.
Filed May 1, 1980, Ser. No. 145,618
Int. a.3 H04J 3/06
U.S. a. 370—97 10 Claims
u
9C,
'oi.'aoiJft. i:^
4,381,561
ALL DIGITAL LSI LINE aRCUIT FOR ANALOG LINES
Robert Treiber, Fairfield, Conn., assignor to International Tele-
phone and Telegraph Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,806
Int. Q\? H04B 1/58
U.S. a. 370—24 19 Qaims
.Jl
* "*"
•s "(■'
*
'^'X\^-I\^^^".
-- "
* JS J-
V
f
■
^a»r»». .'01'* 'T f't
_l 1- f .
-<f
. X^f^M*. i
.:?;
-J
<*#.
/»
*•
■•.
'tf -*j*f ._ , ' '
-r
10. A radio repeater capable of providing point-to-mul-
tipoint distribution comprising:
antenna means comprising a receiving antenna port
(10i-10a/, 60) capable of receiving information remotely
transmitted in a message unit signal during a portion of a
predetermined time period; and
an amplifying means (28i-28Af, 29, 84 1 -842)
characterized in that the repeater further comprises:
means (14 and 24, 38i-38m> 82i-822) capable of directing the
information of the message unit signal initially received at
the receiving antenna port to the amplifying means at least
once during an interval corresponding to the predeter-
mined time period; and
the antenna means further comprises a transmitting antenna
port (30 1 -30a/, 88 1 -88a/) capable of transforming an out-
put message unit signal from the amplifying means into a
plurality of separate electromagnetic spot beams for radia-
tion in a plurality of sequential or concurrent spotbeams to
a predetermined plurality of remote and spaced-apart
receiving sites destined to receive such message unit signal
during said interval correspxjnding to the predetermined
time period.
1. A digital telephone line circuit providing an interface
between a full duplex analog telephone subscriber line and a
digital switching system, comprising:
means for automatically digitally synthesizing an output
matching transmission line terminating impedance;
two-to-four wire conversion means for digitally separating
fidl duplex transmit and receive information signals on
said subscriber line into a pair of digital signals, each
separate from the other;
automatic recursive equalizer means coupled to said two-to-
four wire conversion means for providing time multi-
plexed signal optimization/equalization of said informa-
tion signals by
time multiplexing said recursive equalizer means to said full
duplex line sucb-that automatic equalization is provided
for said line in accordance with its individual transmission
line characteristics during the interval that said equalizer
means is coupled to said two-to-four wire conversion
means and to said means for digitally synthesizing an
output matching transmission line terminating impedance.
4,381,563
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VISUALLY
PRESENTING ANALYTICAL REPRESENTATIONS OF
DIGITAL SIGNALS
Jay L. Groom, Jr., Weld; John D. Ferine, Boulder; John W.
Snyder, Boulder, and Gary G. Vair, Boulder, all of Colo.,
assignors to International Business Machines Corporation,
Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,966
Int a.3 GOIR 31/28
UJS. a. 371—29 4 Claims
PROCESSOR 105
1. Apparatus for displaying, as symbols, representations of
time varying electrical si^ials indicative of the operations of a
monitored device present at selectable test points on the device
during specified time intervals, comprising:
selection means, connected to the test points on the moni-
tored device, operable to select for monitoring desired
April 26, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1041
ones of the test points and supply at outputs signals from
the selected test points;
a plurality of test ports, connected to the selection means
outputs;
timing means for supplying timing signals and operable to
specify time intervals during which electrical signals from
the selected test points are to be monitored;
transition recognition means, connected to the test ports and
timing means, for receiving the selected electrical signals
and timing signals, and operable to generate, for each test
point, transition signals indicating changes in the magni-
tude of the signals at that test point; and
utilization means, connected to the transition recognition
means, for utilizing the transition signals for each p>oint to
visually present symbols representing information describ-
ing the electrical signals at selected test points on the
monitoring device, said utilization means including:
display means, connected to the timing means, for visually
presenting, for each selected test point a sequence of sym-
bols indicating by its values and its physical displacements
the directions of signal magnitude changes.
4,381,565
RADIATIVE REMOVAL OF LOWER LASER LEVEL
BOTTLENECKING
Lyie H. Taylor, Murrysrille, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Not. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210.436
Int. a.3 HOIS 3/09
U.S. a. 372— 91 SQalns
4,381,564
WAVEGUIDE LASER HAVING A CAPACITIVELY
COUPLED DISCHARGE
Leon A. Newman, South Windsor, Conn., assignor to United
Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 52,887, Jun. 28, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,225
Int. a.3 HOIS 3m
U.S. a. 372—87 ^ 7 Gaims
STIWUTED
TIMSFEi
CO;
-H t-»j-
lO'-O-
iCIti Ma*
-oA
■^
i4»a It* aecniCM
LUfii \ I fiontiot
(■SSW \f
-0(l0
DCKTIirlTIOi
1. A method for minimizing lower laser level bottlenecking
of the primary lasing transition to improve the performance of
a laser system, comprising the step of,
applying stimulated emission to transfer a portion of the
lower laser level population to a third energy level which
is not involved in the prima'y lasing when the lower laser
level population is inverted with respect to the population
of said third energy level.
4,381,566
ELECTRONIC TUNING ANTENNA SYSTEM
Jol^ji Kane, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Matsushita Electric Indus-
trial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 158,132
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 14, 1979, 54-76245-
Jun. 14, 1979, 54-76246; Jun. 14, 1979, 54-76249; Jun. 14, 1979,
54-76251
Int. a.^ HOIQ 9/26: H04B 1/lS
U.S. a. 455—193 4 Clainu
,?J 16 ' I .16 y»
Y
1. An optical apparatus comprising:
an optical resonant cavity bounded by flrst and second mir-
rors, said mirrors disposed along an axis extending
through said cavity;
a dielectric waveguide having an outside surface and a capil-
lary bore disposed along said axis within said cavity for
guiding radiation within said capillary bore;
a gaseous optical gain medium disposed within said wave-
guide;
energizing means for creating a population inversion by
capacitive coupling within said gain medium, whereby
optical radiation is resonated between said mirrors and
guided by said waveguide;
wherein the improvement comprises that said energizing
means for creating a population inversion includes an
electrode structure comprising a first electrode disposed
outside said waveguide and a second electrode having an
active end disposed within said gaseous gain medium and
further improved in that said energizing means includes
means for applying a voltage pulse between said first and
second electrodes, whereby said population inversion is
created in said gain medium by coupling energy from said
electrodes to said gain medium.
»1
1
.J--
20
1. An electronic tuning antenna system comprising a pair of
antenna elements having a distributed constant inductance
resulting from meandering transmitting conductor paths of
said elements; variable reactance circuits connected to each of
said pair of antenna elements and having variable capacity
diodes; an antenna circuit having an impedance adjusting ca-
pacitor interconnected between feed terminals of said pair of
antenna elements; and a receiver for regenerating a high-fre-
quency received signal from said antenna circuit; wherein an
output terminal of said antenna circuit and an input terminal of
said receiver are connected by a high-frequency coaxial cable
for transmitting said high-frequency received signal from said
antenna circuit by way of said high-frequency coaxial cable to
said receiver, and wherein a d.c. voltage having a correspon-
dence to a tuning element of said receiver is applied as a bias
voltage to said variable capacity diodes of said variable reac-
tance circuits through said high-frequency coaxial cable.
1029 O.G.-45
DESIGNS
APRIL 26, 1983
268,709 268,712
COWBOY BOOT RACQUET BAG
Harry Vise, Nashville, Tenn., assignor to Texas Boot Company, Barry W. Hoberman, Hazlet, and Joseph Y. Pelavin, North
Nashville, Tenn. Bergen, both of N J., assignors to CPG Products Corp., Min-
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,467 neapolis, Minn.
Term of patent 14 years Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,515
Int. CI. D2 — 04 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D2— 273 Int. CI. D3— 0/
U.S. a. D3— 36
268,710
SHOE
Wolf Anderie, Strasbourg, France, assignor to ADIDAS Fab-
rique de Chaussures de Sport, Landersheim, France
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,742
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 11, 1980, 80 2277
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Yil—04
U.S. a. D2— 290
268,711
CAMERA BAG
Miller Outcalt, 225 Notteargenta, Pacific Palisades, Calif.
90272
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,682
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 02
U.S. a. D3~33
268,713
SHOULDER TOTE BAG
Joseph Y. Pelavin, North Bergen, and Barry W. Hoberman,
Hazlet, both of N J., assignors to CPG Products Corp., Min-
neapolis, Minn.
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,514
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— o;
U.S. a. D3— 48
1043
1044
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,714 268,716
ACODENT DOCUMENT CASE CHAIR OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Walter Goedel, Roemerstrasse 11, 6308 Butzbach 1, Fed. Rep. of Koni Ochsner, Wettingen, Switzerland, assignor to Giroflex-
Germany Entwicklungs AG, Koblenz, Switzerland
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,036 Filed Mar. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 127,460
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 10, Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 10, 1979,
1980, MR35 DMA/000007
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 02 Int. Q. D6— 0/
U.S. a. D3— 74 U.S. a. D6— 56
268,717
UPHOLSTERED SETTEE
Ernst Liithy, Klingnau, Switzerland, assignor to C A C Consult-
ing A Design AG, Engelberg, Switzerland
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,466
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 18, 1980,
70689/80
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D&—01
U.S. a. D6— 63
268,715
CLOVERLEAF TABLE
Myrtle H. Curry, P.O. Box 205, Louisville, Ky. 40201
FUed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,587
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 03
U.S. a. D6— 29
268,718
CHAIR
David DeCristoforo, P.O. Box 57, Silver City, Nev. 89428
FUed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,201
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 01
U.S. a. D6— 73
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1045
268,719 268,721
CXOTHES RACK OR SIMILAR ARTICLE FRAME FOR A CHAIR
Daniel W. Leo, Jr., Edgewater, N J, assignor to Ledan Inc. TTiomas E. Jemigan, Birmingham, Ala, assignor to Maratbon
M-_ York N Y Corporation, Birmingham, Ala.
F1i;d'oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 2004^74 FUed Oct 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,310
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Inta.D6— 06 Inta. D6— 06
VJS. a. D6— 116 ^-S- Ci- D6— I'l
268 722
^ 268,720 PULL CAP FOR WATERBED FILLER NECK
DISPLAY COUNTER FOR FOODS Anthony^LT9S^E. LldVnoak, Stockton, CaUf. 95207
William J. Potetz, Qeveland, «hI Edward T. Bopp. WiclcbfTe, Antnony ik.^ ^ ^^ ^^^^^
both of Ohio, assignors to First National Supermarkets, Inc., ^^^ ^^ ' ^ j^ ^^^
Maple Heights, Ohio
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,944
Term of patent 14 years
Int.a. D06— 04 ^
U.S. CI. D6— 181
Int. a. D6— 09, 99
VJS. a. D6— 201
\
^-^T I 1
1046
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,723 268,725
CX)RN HOLDER OR THE LIKE BEVERAGE SERVER
Martin J. Wolff, North Provideiice, R.L, assignor to Dart Indus- Edgar F. Trombly, Grosse Pointe Farms, Mich., assignor to
tries Inc., Northbrook, III. Thermo-Serr, Inc., Anoka, Minn.
FUed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,482 FUed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,041
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DOn—06 Int. Q. D07— 07
U.S. a. D7— 42 U.S.a. D7— 317
I-
^
268,726
BEVERAGE SERVER
Edgar F. Trombly, Grosse Pointe Farms, Mich., assignor to
Thermo Senr, Inc., Anoka, Minn.
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,045
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 0/
U.S. a. D7— 317
268,724
CREAM PITCHER OR THE LIKE
Richard V. Haner, Elmira, N.Y., assignor to Coming Glass
Works, Coming, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,892
Term of patent 14 years
Int CL D07— O;
U.S. a. D7~319
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1047
THH 727 268,7*9
VACUUM INSia^^^O ^- 0« SIMILAR HAND -^,^,^r^^^^°^^i^'^'""
Term Of patent 14 years ^ ^„ ,^ Int. U. U8-<^/
Int.a.D07-07 U.S.a.D8-14
U.S. a. D7— 77
268,730
METALLIZING TORCH
Wayne E. Daub, R.R. #5, Box 82, Three Rivers, Mich. 49093
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,538
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. m—05
U.S. a. D8— 30
268,728
NUT BOX
Betty A. Poling, 2380 N. Richmond, Wichita, Kans. 67204
FUed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,694
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D7— 07
U.S. a. D7— 98
268,731
BOTTLE OPENER
Walter Karg, 132-1064 BeaverhiU Blvd^ Winnipeg, Manitoba,
Canada
FUed Dec 29, 1980, Ser. No. 221,349
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D7— 06
U.S. a. D8— 38
1048
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,732 268 735
MITRE BLOCK HOSE CLAMP
Terence C- O^Neill, Crwalington, England, assignor to Interna. Shiro Kanao, 18 9 4.chome, Nanpeidai Takatsukishi Osaka,
tionale Octrool Maatschappij "Octropa" B.V., Rotterdam, Japan i«««ujasni usaxa,
Netherlands pi,^ Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,622
n. P"e^ Dec 29 1980 Ser. No. 220,855 Term of patent 14 years
Claims pnority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 25, 1980, int. Q. DS— 08
''**** U.S. a. D8— 396
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DS— 05
U.S. a. D8— 71
268,733
HINGE PIN
Robert H. Bisbing, Springfield, Pa., assignor to Southco, Inc.,
Concordville, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 111,884, Jan. 14, 1980, Pat. No. Des.
263,370. This application Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,362
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DS— 06
U.S. a. D8— 323
268,736
BOTTLE
268,734 Robert J. Kleckauskas, Downers Grove, 111., assignor to Lamp-
CORD RETAINING REEL light Farms, Inc., Brookfield, Wis.
Isaac B. Soltes, 1923 S. McPherrin Ave., Monterey Park, Calif. FUed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,416
9i^S^ Term of patent 14 years
FUed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 213,850 Int. CI. D9—0]
Term of patent 14 years U.S. CI. D9— 349
Int. a. D8— 99
U.S. a. D8— 358
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1049
268,737 268,739
WRIST WATCH ELECTRONIC CAUPER
Alain D. Perrin, Rueil-Malmaisoii, France, assignor to Interdica Jan Hampf, Saeroe, Sweden, assignor to C. E. Johansson AB,
S.A., Villars-sur-Glane-Suisse, France Esldlstnna, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 951,058, Oct. 12, 1978, abandoned, and FUed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,780
Ser. No. 951,059, Oct. 12, 1978, abandoned. This application Claims priority, application Sweden, Aug. 14, 1980, 80-1522
Sep. 10. 1980, Ser. No. 185,928 Term of patent 14 years
Qaims priority, appUcation Hague, Apr. 17, 1978, 66 780 Int Q. DIO— 04
Term of patent 14 years U.S. Q. DIO— 73
Int. a. DIO— 02
U.S. a. DIO— 39
268,740
MICROMETER
Tetsunori Tanada, Hiroshima, Japan, assignor to Mitntoyo Mfg.
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,103
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 29, 1980, 55-45285
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DIO— 0^
U.S. a. DIO— 73
268,738
HEIGHT GAUGE
Susumu Yoshioka, Utsunomiya, Japan, assignor to Mitutoyo
Mfg. Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,887
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 14, 1980, 55-33296
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DIO— 04
U.S. a. DIO— 70
268,741
MOTORCYCLE EMBLEM
James M. Preisler, Mound, and Alwin J. Stahel, Saint Paul,
both of Minn., assignors to Drag Specialties, Inc., Minneapo-
lis, Minn.
FUed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,772
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. Dll— Oi
U.S. a. Dll— 107
1050
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,742 268 744
MOTORCYCLE EMBLEM BEAR FIGURE
Junes M. PreUler, Mound, and Alwin J. Stahel, Saint Paul, Julian Gibsone, Chobham; Michael Brown, Weybridge, both of
both of Minn., assignors to Drag Specialties, Inc., Minneapo-
lis, Minn.
FUed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 286,012
T^nn of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dn—03
U.S. a. Dll— 107
England; Eduard Steiner, Berne, Switzerland, and Nicholas
Maley, High Wycombe, England, assignors to Venture Pro-
duction Corporation, Panama
FUed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,198
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Not. 3, 1980,
997366
U.S. a. Dll— 158
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— 02
^
268,743
DISPLAY STAND
Eunice E. Lubin, 832 S. Sycamore Ave., Los Angeles, Calif.
90036
FUed May 31, 1979, Ser. No. 44,153
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— 02
U.S. a. Dll— 131
268,745
PENNANT
Larry B. Omatek, 100 - 14th St., North Chicago, lU. 60064
FUed Mar. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 116,164
Term of patent 3i years
Int. a. Dll— 05
U.S. a. Dll— 166
u_
J
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1051
268,746
FRAME FOR A RACING CART
Dennis L. Greenhalgh, and Dale R. Greenhalgh, both of Vancou-
ver, Wash., assignors to West Coast Marine Boat ft Tug, Inc.,
Vancouver, Wash.
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 197,141
Term of patent 14 years
Int.a. D12— 0«
U.S. a. D12— 88
268,748
TIRE
Jacques Champod, and Jean-Rene Simon, both of Qermont-Fer-
rand, France, assignors to Compagnie Gcnerale des Etablisse-
ments Michelin, Clermont-Ferrand, France
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,792
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 24, 1980, 35
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 73
U.S. a. D12— 146
268,747
MOTOR TRICYCLE
Jun Ito, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,503
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1980, 55-54960
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 77
\JJS. a. D12— 110
268,749
VAN EXTENSION MODULE
Vincent SorBello, Kelowna, Canada, assignor to Vanamera
Industries, Ltd., Kelowna, Canada
FUed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,186
Claims priority, application Canada, May 28, 1960, 28-05-80-2
The portion of the terra of this patent snbseqnent to Sep. 21,
1999, has been disclaiaied.
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D12— 76
U.S. a. D12— 196
10S2
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,750 268,753
WHEEL COVER REMOTE CONTROLLED SLAVE
Flruk T. Eichstadt, Wcttminfter, Calif., assignor to Orion In- Kenneth R. Fenne, Glen EUyn, lU., assignor to Pittway Corpora-
dnstrics. Inc., Carson, Calif. tion, Aurora, 111.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,735 FUed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,206
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int.a. D12— 76 Int. a. D13— 03
U.S. a. D12-209 l).S. a. D13-32
268,751
COMBINED ELECTRICAL TERMINAL CASING AND
INTEGRAL FASTENING LUG THEREOF
Frank D. Froh, 33635 Coachman La., Solon, Ohio 44139
FUed Jun. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 163,824
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 24
268,754
CARD CAGE MODULE
John W. Chaney, SharoniiUe, Ohio, and Roger G. Royer, Madi-
son, Ind., assignors to Cincinnati Milacron Inc., Cincinnati,
Ohio
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,600
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— 03
VJS. a. D13— 40
268,752
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR POST FOR VEHICLE
STARTER
Richard L. Parrott, 2592 Carol La^ Arnold, Mo. 63010
FUed Oct 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,879
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. 013—03
U.S.a. D13— 24
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1053
268 755 268,757
COMBINED CASSETTE RECORDER AND PLAYER AND TAPE RECORDER AND PLAYER OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
KXDIO Paul J- Klocznik, Fayetteville, N.Y., SMignor to General Elec-
Richard Culbertson, Onondaga, N.Y., assignor to General Elec- trie Company, New York, N.Y.
trie Company, New York, N.Y. ™ed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,944
FUed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 256,989 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. Q. D14— 07
Int. a. D14— 07, 03 U.S. O. D14— 6
U.S. a. D14— 5
268,758
COMBINED TELEPHONE AND CLOCK RADIO
Melrin H. Boldt, Glenriew; Darid P. Chuboff, North Barring-
ton; Wayne J. Franek, Palatine, and Marilyn M. Johnson,
Northbrook, all of 111., assignors to Zenith Radio Corporation,
Glenriew, 111.
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,948
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 53
268,756
COMBINED TAPE RECORDER AND RADIO OR
SIMILAR ARTICLE
Fuminori Yamagata, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to General
Electric Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 258,944
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 07. 03
U.S. a. D14— 5
268,759
FLUID METERING VALVE
Willard J. Hoebeke, 366 Kantor Bird., Casselberry, Seminole
County, Fla. 32707
FUed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,676
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 07
U.S. a. D15— 5
1029 O.G.-46
1054
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,760 268,762
SEWING MACHINE FRAME OR SIMILAR ARTICXE SAW
Wayne A. Current, Holmdel, N J., issignor to The Singer Com- Peter Lawson, Sao Paulo, Brazil, assignor to Rockwell do Brasil,
pany, Stamford, Conn. Rio de Janeiro, Brazil
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,628 FUed No?. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 95,719
Term of patent 14 years Claims priority, application Brazil, May 21, 1979, MI
Int. a. D15— 06 3900360
U.S, a. D15— 76 Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 09
U.S. a. D15— 134
^*^t-^^
268,761
CAN CRUSHER
Edwin J. Brown, Rte. 5, Box 612, Rogers, Ark. 72756
FUed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,871
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 99
U.S. a. D15— 123
268,763
CARTON-ERECnNG MACHINE
Minor E. Gee, Sanger, Calif., assignor to Maxco Supply, Inc.,
Reedley, Calif.
FUed Not. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,733
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 99
U.S. a. D15— 145
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1055
268 764 268,767
WRICTWORN DISK CAMERA BOW FOR EYEGLASS FRAME
Bernard A. Seckendorf, noshing, and John Sanchez, Osrining, Ginaeppe Zomer , Via Cerrone 4, VillarDora (Tnrin), Italy
both of N.Y, aasignors to Wriat-A-Matic, Ltd., Elmhurrt, Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 172,037
Doio oi i .1., -«»»« ^^^^^ priority, appUcation Italy, Feb. 18, 1980, 5295^B/80
FUed Not. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 205,215 Term of patent Myeara
Term of patent 14 years I^ CI- T016— 06
Int a. D16-<?7 U-S. a. D16-127
U.S. a. D16— 1
268,765
INFEED COVER FOR X-RAY HLM PROCESSOR
Jeffrey A. Campbell, Kalamazoo, Mich., assignor to William J.
Antos, Niles, Mich., a part interest
FUed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,127
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— Oi
U.S. a. D16— 37
268,766
EYEGLASSES
Larry W. Uwis, 2012 Grove Ave., Richmond, Va. 23220
FUed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,556
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— 06
U.S. a. D16— 119
268,768
TELESCOPE
Frank M. Melsheimer, Boulder, Thomas T. Melsheimer, Lay-
fayette; Scott C. Johnson, Boulder, aU of Colo., and John C.
Diebel, Newport Beach, Calif., assignors to Meade Instru-
ments Corporation, Costa Mesa, Calif.
FUed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,617
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— 06
U.S. a. D16— 132
1056
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,769
GAME BOARD
Wayne D. Woolwine, P.O. Box 178, Seminary, Miss. 39479
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 246,048
Term of patent 14 years
lat. a. D21— o;
U.S. a. D21— 20
268,770
GAME BOARD
Daniel E. Flveash, 108 Lincoln, Big Spring, Tex. 79720
FUed Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 229,010
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 23
268,771
ROTATABLE GAME BOARD
John Daugherty, 3611 Bangor St., SE., Wasliington, D.C. 20020
FUed Jul. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 169,006
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 0/
U.S. a. D21— 33
268,772
TOY MOTORCYCLE
Tsuneo Hanzawa, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Entex Industries,
Inc., Compton, Calif.
FUed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,362
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. CI. D21— 81
268,773
TOY SPACE VEHICLE
NUo Rodis-Jamero, San Jose, Calif., assignor to LucasfUm, Ltd.,
San Ra^l, CaUf.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,669
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D21— 07
UJS, a. D21— 87
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1057
268,774 268,777
TOY ANIMAL HGURE BOAT ROPE CONTROLLER
Kazue Kudo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc., Richard W. Donalies, 1545 Newcastle La., HofTinan Estates, lU.
Tokyo, Japan 60194
FUed Oct. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 80,478 Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,204
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 30, 1979, 54-12722 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. CI. D12— 76
Int. a. D21— 07 U.S. Q. D21— 236
U.S. a. D21— 162
268,775
GOLF CLUB HEAD
Jerry L. Pace, 415 Enterprise Dr., Charlotte, N.C. 28206
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,774
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 02
U.S. a. D21— 220
268,776
HEEL UNIT OF A SKI SAFETY BINDING
Jean J. A. Beyl, Nevers, France, assignor to LOOK, Nevers,
France
FUed Feb. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 117,446
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 7, 1979, 124
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 02, 022
VJS. a. D21— 230
268,778
PAINT SPRAYER
Howard R. Moon, Ft. Atkinson, Wis., assignor to Acme Burgess,
Inc., Grayslake, 111.
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,480
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 18
10S8
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,779 268,781
BIDET SUPERIMPOSED TOILET SEAT FOR INVALIDS OR
Donald W. Doman, Janesville, Wis., assignor to Kohler Co., THE LIKE
KohJer, Wis. Joseph Battiston, Jr., 47 E. Eighth St., Qifton, N.J. 07011
FUed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 199,061 Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,806
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 02 Int. Q. D23— 02
U.S. a. D23— 51 U.S. a. D23— 71
268,780
WATER CLOSET 268,782
Donald W. Doman, JanesTiUe, and Norman J. Jaekels, Sheboy- COMBINED SUPPORTING FRAMEWORK AND nLTER
gan, both of Wis., assignors to Kohler Co., Kohler, Wis. HOUSINGS OF A MULTIPLE STAGE AIR nLTERING
FUed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,453 SYSTEM
Term of patent 14 years Donald F. Minnick, Jr., Hamburg, N.Y., assignor to Engineered
Int. a. D23— 02 ^y^ Division of Thermal Components, Inc., Buffalo, N.Y.
U.S. a. D23— 65 pUej Apr. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 137,793
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23—04
U.S. a. D23— 149
ffi
gV
t^fe
^^
fc3|f;
'■-■---
^^■v||
^m
^Sffl
m
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OITICE
1059
268,783 268,785
CARDIAC TELEMONITOR TRANSMITTER HOUSING COMBINED SPECIMEN TUBE AND PAPERWORK
John F. Henshaw, Mill VaUey, Calif., assignor to Keuffel A POUCH
Esser Company, Morristown, NJ. Philip B. Sommere, 923 Garden RiL, Orange, Conn. 06477
FUed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,497 FUed Jun. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 162,727
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 02 Int. Q. D24— 99
U.S. CI. D24— 17 U.S. a. D24— 99
E33
r-p-i
}
268,784
BODY SUPPORT FOR CONSUMMATING AN ACT OF 268,786
MARITAL UNION SUSPENDED CEILING GRID
Arthur E. Forseth, Halstad, Minn. 56548, assignor to Arthur Rudolph D. Galindo, 6561 E. Carnegie Ave., Anaheim, Calif.
Everett Forseth, Halstad, Minn. 92807
FUed Dec. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 106,666 FUed May 7, 1979, Ser. No. 36^30
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 99 Int Q. D25— 02
U.S. a. D24-99 U.S. Q. D25-58
1060
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
April 26, 1983
268,787 268,790
BUILDING FACADE DUST MOP COVER
Andrew J. Franklin, Jr^ and Jean H. Franklin, both of Castles Virginia Hicks, 3943 W. BeU Plaine, Chicago, Dl. ^18
Unlimited, Inc^ Hompty's Storybook Castle, Rte. 8, Box 86, FUed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,734
Fredericksburg, Va. 22401 Term of patent 14 years
FUed No?. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,295 Int. Q. D7— 05
Term of patent 14 years U.S. Q. D32— 50
Int. a. D25— Oi
U.S. a. D25— 59
268,788
LAMP
Kathy L. Sweetman, 936 W. Isabella, Mesa, Ariz. 85202
FUed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 208,882
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D26— 02
U.S. a. D26— 8
268,789
CANDLE GLASS 268,791
Barry D. Harper, Palos Verdes Estates, and Robert M. Court- CARRIER FOR CONTAINERS OR THE LIKE
ney, Encino, both of CaUf., assignors to Continental Candle Prentice J. Wood, 3244 N. Fulton Ave., Apt. G-10, HaperiUe,
Company, Compton, Calif. Ga. 30354
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,735 FUed May 19, 1980, Ser. No. 151,114
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D26— 07, D7— O; Int. Q. D9— 0^
U.S.a. D26— 11 U.S.a. D34— 44
April 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1061
268,792
TEXTILE FABRIC WALL COVERING OR THE LIKE
Florence J. Marganne, Paris, France, assignor to Peintures
Corona S.A., Velenciennes, France
FUed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,764
Claims priority, application France, May 9, 1980, 801516
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D5— 05
U.S. a. D92— 29
268,793
ROLL OF FLOOR COVERING OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Oscar Tejeda, New York, N.Y., and Leonard A. Ludovico, Park
Ridge, NJ., assignors to Congoleum Corporation, Kearny,
NJ.
FUed Jul. 30, 1979, Ser. No. 61,965
Term of patent 14 years
Int CI. DS— 06
VJS. a. D92— 31
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 26TH DAY OF APRIL, 1983
Note.— Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfabrikker: See—
Gudbrandsen, Hans, 4.380.858, CI. 29-418.000.
Aaltonen, Olli; Alkio, Martti; Avela, Eero; and Housh. RiitU-Maija, to
Technical Research Centre of Finland, The. Method for producing
fire-retarded cellulosic fibers and fire-retarded cellulosic fibers.
4,381,370, CI. 525-54.210.
AB Portia: See—
Ekins, Roger P., 4,381,291. CI. 424-1.000.
Abbott Laboratories: See—
Bujan, Albert P., 4,381,005, CI. 604-152.000.
Genese, Joseph N., 4,381,006, CI. 128-218.00A.
Abe, Katsuo; Nishio, Masahiro; and MaUubara, Akira, to Toyo Seikan
Kaisha, Ltd. Holding spindle for printing and coating cylindrical
containers. 4,380,964, CI. 118-50.000.
Abegg, Jean-Louis: See-
Bouillon, Claude; Abegg, Jean-Louis; Koulbanis, Constantin; and
Dannenton, Patrick, 4,381,294, CI. 424-61.000.
Abex Corporation: See—
Kouns. Herbert H.; and Clark, Richard A.. 4.381,176. CI.
417-222.000.
Abo, Toshimi; and Iwatsu, Hideo, to Nissan Motor Company. Limited.
Puel supply control system for a turbine engine. 4,380.894. CI.
60-39.161.
Acampora, Anthony, to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Broadcast type satellite communication systems. 4.381,562, CI.
370-97.000.
Adachi, Hiromi; Inoue, Kazunari; and Ohshita, Hiroshi, to Mitsubishi
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Fluorescent lamp instantaneous starting
device. 4,381,476, CI 315-101.000.
Adachi, Toshio; and Arakawa. Tatsumi, to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Photoelectrolyzer. 4,381,233, CI. 204-242.000.
Adam, Peter; and Wehner, Ewald. to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
Commutator motor brush mounting arrangement. 4.381.468. CI.
310-239.000.
Adamovic, Janko: See —
Maricevic, Milenko; Adamovic, Janko; and Maricevic, Zdravko.
4,381.425. CI. 174-93.000.
Adams, George W.: See-
Smock, Steven W.; and Adams, George W., 4,381.430. CI
35.00R.
Adams, Milton R.: See-
Stokes, Richard P.; Timm, James D.; LaCroix, Stephen R
Adams, Milton R., 4,380,893, CI. 60-39.070.
Adams-Russell Co., Inc.: See-
Lambert, Trevor, 4,381,522, CI. 358-86.000.
Adkins, Richard C, to Rolls-Royce Limited. Combustion chamber for
a gas turbine engine having a variable rate diffuser upstream of air
inlet means. 4,380,895, CI. 60-39.230.
Adkison, Prank L.; and Kress, Jack L.. to Oscar Mayer Poods Corpora-
tion. Apparatus for removing meat from poultry drumsticks.
4.380,849, CI. 17-11.000.
Adleman, Larry G., to Ex-Cell-O Corporation. Mechanical punch
driver. 4,380,871, CI. 30-360.000.
Adolph, Dietrich: See-
Linn, Karl-Otto; Jansche, Walter, Adolph, Dietrich; and Dan-
nemann, Artur, 4,381,506, Q. 340-870.320.
Aerojet-General Corporation: See—
Olsen, Robert E.; and Backlund. Stephen J.. 4,381,399. CI.
549-390.000.
Agence Nationale de Valorisation de la Recherche: See-
Raisin, Jean-Pierre; and Pion, Jacques, 4,381,068, O. 223-2.000.
Agency of Industrial Science & Technology: See—
Sakuragi. Shiro; and Kotani. Haruo, 4,381,141, Q. 350-96.340.
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Renner, Gunter; and Wolff, Erich, 4,381,339, Q. 430-223.000.
Aggarwal, Avnish K.: See—
Cheal. William E.; Gupta, Gokal C; Sepahmanaour, Faramarz; and
Aggarwal. Avnish K.. 4,381,427, Q. 179-2.0DP
Ahlman, Esko A. O.: See—
Rautimo, Pertti V.; Pelto-Huikko, Raimo; and Ahlman, Esko A. O..
4,380,901, CI. 60^18.000.
Ahmed, Moinuddin: See-
Gibson, Charles A.; Ahmed, Moinuddin; and Habenschuss, Mi-
chael. 4,381,223, CI. 203-9 l.OOa
Aida Engineering Ltd.: See—
Mattui, Makoto, 4,380,921, CI 72-165.000.
Aisin Seiki Company, Limited: See—
Iwasaki, Shinichiro, 4,380,928, CI. 73-518.000.
Akademie der WissenschaJften der DDR: See—
Danz, Rudi; Stark, Wolfgang; Elling, Burkhard; Ruscher. Chris-
tian; and Schwarz, Wolfgang. 4,381,534, CI. 361-233.000.
200-
and
Aktiebolaget Bofors: See—
Bjom, Lars-Erik; Olsson, Mats; and Oman, Olof, 4,381,270. CI.
264-3.00B.
Akzona Incorporated: See —
Kessler. Erich; and Birken. Peter. 4,381,274. CI 264-147.000.
Alaimo, Robert J., to Norwich Eaton Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 6,7-
Dichloro-2-[(methyl-2-pyrrolidylidene)amino]-4-thiocyanatobcnzo-
thiazole. 4.381,394, CI. 548-161.000.
Albce, Paul J.. Jr.; Burdick, Patricia E.; and Wrozina, Joseph I., to
Allied Corporation. Preparation of low molecular weight copolymer
salts. 4.381.376. CI. 525-366.000.
Albers, Friedemann: See —
Tholen, Paul; Lichtblau. Leo; Albers, Friedemann; and Esche,
EHeter. 4.380.971, CI. 123-41.310.
Albrecht, Harald: See—
von der Wettem, Walter; and Albrecht, Harald, 4,381,357, CI
524-68.000.
Alfemess. Rodney C. to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated
Velocity mismatched modulator. 4.381,139, CI 350-96.140
Alkio. Martti: See—
Aaltonen. Olli; Alkio, Martti; Avela, Eero; and Housh, Riitu-
Maija, 4.381.370. CI. 525-54.210.
Allen. Harold T., to Ransburg Corporation. Atomizing device motor
4.381.079. CI. 239-214.130.
Allied Corporation: See —
Albee. Paul J., Jr.; Burdick, Patricia E.; and Wrozina, Joseph I.,
4.381,376. CI. 525-366.000.
Cronkite. Michael O.; and Paquin, Patrick J.. 4,381,426. CI 174-
117.00F.
Pfeiffer, Robert C, 4.381,086. CI. 242-107.40R.
Rittenhouse. John F.. 4.381.250. CI. 252-182.100.
Stephenson. Robert L.; and Frankila. John W.. 4,381.085. CI
242-107.300.
Allis-Chalmers Corporation: See-
James. Mark C; and Borushaski, Ronald G., 4,381,165, CI
414-526.000.
Alsthom-Atlantique: See—
Poux, Jacques, 4.380,877, CI. 34-225.000.
Alvarez. Pedro: See—
Gregoire. Gabriel; Robles, Vincent; and Alvarez, Pedro, 4,381,047,
CI. 188-71.800.
Amano Corporation: See-
Suzuki, Masamichi. 4.381.511, CI. 346-20.000.
Amchem Products. Inc.: See —
Reinhold. Earl R.. 4,381,203. CI. 148-6.14R.
American Cyanamid Company: See—
Loffehnan. Frank P.. 4.381.372. CI. 525-181.000.
American Hoechst Corporation: See—
Gillich. Thomas N.; and Walls, John E., 4.381.226. CI. 204-14.00N
Walls, John E.. 4.381.340. CI. 430-302.000.
American Sign & Indicator Corporation: See—
Seibert, Lloyd, 4.380,879, CI. 40^7.000.
American Standard Inc.: See —
Olson, Paul E.. 4.380,938. CI. 74-473.0OR.
Anderson. Byron D. Pickup truck bed sidewall adaptor for a stake-
frame assembly. 4,381,123. CI. 296-43.000.
Anderson-Cook Inc.: See—
KUlop, James T.. 4,380,918, CI. 72-88.000.
Anderson, David M.; and Ert, John C. to Filper Corporation. Transfer
mechanism in a peach pitter. 4.380.953, CI. 99-549.000.
Anderson, Michael C: See-
Morrow, James G.. Sr.; and Anderson. Michael C. 4,381,060, CI
212-195.000.
Anderson, Ralph L., to Scott Paper Company. Non-fogging premoist-
ened wiper. 4,381,246. CI. 252-91.000.
Anic S.p.A.: See-
Ferraris, Giuseppe; and Cesca, Sebastiano, 4,381,381, CI.
526-75.000.
Anselmo, Donald R.; and Grau, Thomas G.. to Bell Telephone Labora-
tories, Incorporated. Electrical connector for plated-through holes
4,381,134, CI. 339-220.00R.
Anstey, Michael J.; and Brown, David F., to Racal Microelectronic
Systems Limited. Back-up electrical power supplies. 4.381,458, CI.
307-66.000.
Anthonis, Henry E., Ill: See-
Henry. Francis W.. Jr.; Anthonis, Henry E., Ill; and Banerjee,
Subrata, 4.381,355, CI. 523-140.000.
Antos, George J., to UOP Inc. Nonacidic multimetallic catalytic com-
posite for hydrocarbon dehydrogenation. 4.381.257. CI. 252-466.00B.
Antson. Jorma O.. to Oy LohJa AB. Method for making electrically
conductive penetrations into thin films. 4.380,867. CI. 29-590.000.
PI
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Arakawa, Tatsumi: See —
Adachi, Toshio; and Arakawa, Tatsumi, 4,381,233, CI. 204-242.000.
Araki, Nobuyuki: See —
Nakayama, Shozo; Kato, Kimio; Araki, Nobuyuki; and Takenaka,
Kcnji, 4,381.178, CI. 417-269.000.
Aramatsu, Shoichiro: See —
Nakagawa, Yunosuke; and Aramatsu, Shoichiro, 4,381,247, CI.
252-95.000.
Arbuthnot, Gerald R.: See —
Walling, Jorg-Hein; Dumoulin, Andre; and Arbuthnot, Gerald R.,
4,380,965, CI. 118-621.000.
Armiger, John W., to Armiger, John W. Cutting and collating method
and apparatus for tickets. 4,381.107. CI. 270-58.000.
Armstrong. Thomas R., to Paradyne Corporation. System for the
quantitative measurement of impairments in the communication
channel of a quadrature amplitude modulation data communication
system. 4,381,546. CI. 364-514.000.
Arnold, Robert W.. to International Business Machines Corporation.
ConsUnt energy drive circuit for electromagnetic print hammers.
4,381,532, CN 361-154.000.
Arora, Mulk R., to Sprague Electric Company. DC Etching of alumi-
num electrolytic capacitor foil. 4.381.231, CI. 204-129.750
Arthur G. Russell Company. Incorporated, The: See —
Dion. Warren E., 4.381,505, CI. 340-756.000.
Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Adachi. Toshio; and Arakawa, Tatsumi, 4,381,233, CI. 204-242.000.
Sakurai, Hisaya; KaUyama, Yoshihiko; Ikegami, Tadashi; and
Furusato. Masayasu. 4,381.252. CI. 252-429.00B.
Yoshida, Koichi; Iwaisako, Toshiyuki; Masamoto. Junzo;
Hamanaka, Katsuhiko; and Komaki, Hajime, 4,381,397, CI.
549-368.000.
Asahi Yukizai Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See —
Kai, Isao; Hosokawa, HiroUmi; and Oda, Takayuki, 4,381,354, CI.
523-139.000.
Asayama, Yoshiaki: See —
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,380,934, CI, 73-861.230.
Assmus, Friedrich: See —
Kuppers, Frieder; Scherzinger, Bemhard; Assmus. Friedrich; and
Flaig. Hans. 4.381.481, CI. 318-696.000.
Atlantic Richfleld Company: See —
Falcone, Samuel J.; and McCoy, John J.. 4.381,403, CI. 560-24.000.
Atlas Copco Aktiebolag: See —
Emmerich. Wolfgang, 4,380.923. CI. 72-482.000.
Atto Corporation: See —
Matsumoto, Tetsuo; and Okumura, Akira, 4,381,072, CI.
494-10.000.
Auburn Manufacturing Co., Inc.: See —
Kite, James M., 4,381,122, CI. 293-125.000.
Audeh, Costandi A.; Heilweil, Israel J.; White, James R.; and Yan,
Tsoung Y., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Solvent extraction production
of lube oil fractions. 4,381,234, CI. 208-327.000.
Audi NSU Auto Union Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Heinle, Karl-W.. 4.381.555. CI. 365-78.000.
Avela, Eero: See —
Aaltonen. Olli; Alkio. Martti; Avela, Eero; and Housh, Riitta-
Maija, 4,381,370, CI. 525-54.210.
Ayerst, McKenna & Harrison. Inc.: See —
Palameu. Bozidar; Bogri, Tibor; and Bagli, Jehan. 4.381,304. CI.
424-256.000.
Ayres. John W.; and James. Harold S., to Babcock & Wilcox Company,
The. Reset circuit for zero force touch probe. 4,380,873. CI. 33-
174.00P.
Aztech International. Ltd.: See —
Hood. Larry M.; and West, Doy M.. 4,380,910, CI. 62-91.000.
Azzola, Roberto, to Saiag S.p.A. Industria Articoli Gomma. Method of
co-extruding a reinforced composite foamed resin channel-shaped
sealing strip having an abraded surface portion. 4.381.273, CI.
264-45.900.
B.S.L. (Bignier Schmid-Laurent): See —
Taquoi, Jean-Pierre, 4,381,062, CI. 220-71.000.
Babb, Albert L., to Biomedics, Inc. Extracorporeal system for treat-
ment of infectious and parasitic diseases. 4,381,004, CI. 128-214.0OR.
Babcock & Wilcox Company, The: See —
Ayres, John W.; and James, Harold S., 4,380,873, CI. 33-174.0OP.
Bohl, Thomas L.; Hall, George R., Jr.; and Zimmerlin, Sharon L.,
4.381,153, CI. 356-437.000.
Walton, Lewis A.. 4,381,283, CI. 376-327.000.
Babiuka, Rudolf: See—
Linder, Ernst; Babitzka, Rudolf; Brettschneider, Johannes; Polach,
Wilhelm; Wessel. Wolf; and Stumpp. Gerhard. 4,380,900, CI.
60-275.000.
Backlund, Stephen J.: See —
Olsen, Robert E.; and Backlund, Stephen J., 4,381,399, CI.
549-390.000.
Bagli, Jehan: See —
Palameta, Bozidar; Bogri, Tibor; and Bagli, Jehan, 4,381,304, CI.
424-256.000.
Bahlinger, Walter, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Semiconductor com-
ponent with several semiconductor elements. 4,381,518, CI.
357-79.000.
Bahr. Dietrich J.; and Briska, Marian, to International Business Ma-
chines Corporation. Process for producing a sliding layer on the
surface of an aluminum-coated record carrier. 4.381.322. CI.
427-179.000.
Bain. Lee L., to Xerox Corporation. Reduction of pulsed droplet array
crosstalk. 4,381,515, CI. 346-140.00R.
Baker, Dan C., to Sperry Corporation. High speed dividing circuit.
4,381,550, CI. 364-766.000.
Baker Perkins Inc.: See —
Cox, Bradley G., 4,381,236, CI. 210-112.000.
Balaz, Anton, to Plaspack Kunststoff GmbH & Co.. KG. Golf trainer
device. 4,381,110. CI. 273-182.00R.
Balk. Leizer. deceased (by Balk, Lois, executrix); and Sojkowski, James
S., to Pratt & Lambert. Inc. Zinc-rich powders. 4,381,334, CI.
428-332.000.
Balk. Lois, executrix: See —
Balk, Leizer, deceased; and Sojkowski, James S., 4,381,334, CI.
428-332.000.
Ball Corporation: See —
Cemy, Daryl D.; and Diebolt, Edwin J., 4,381,061, CI. 215-l.OOC.
Banerjee, Subrata: See —
Henry, Francis W., Jr.; Anthonis, Henry E., Ill; and Banerjee;
Subrata, 4,381,355, CI. 523-140.000.
Barkan, Philip, to General Electric Company. Vacuum circuit breaker
with means for selectively latching a wipe cage. 4,381.435, CI. 200-
144.00B.
Barker, Walter F., to Martin Marietta Corporation. Magnetic docking
probe for soft docking of space vehicles. 4,381,092, CI. 244-161.000.
Barnes, Robert S.; and Harper, Raymond, to Cryoplants, Ltd. Method
of boiling liquefied gas. 4,380,907, CI. 62-52.000.
Barozzi, Gian P.; and Horeschi, Giancarlo, to Tokyo Juki Industrial
Co., Ltd. Tab setting device of typewriter. 4,381,156, CI. 400-296.100.
BASF Wyandotte Corporation: See—
McBrayer, Robert L., 4,381,352, CI. 521-115.000.
Batchelder, J. Samuel: See —
Koslow, Evan E.; and Batchelder, J. Samuel, 4,380,886, CI.
47-58.000.
Battenfeld Maschinenfabrik GmbH: See —
Ehritt, Jurgen, 4.381,272, CI. 264-40.300.
Baty, Mark A., to Deere & Company. Excavator bucket linkage.
4,381,167, CI. 414-697.000.
Bauer, Walter A.: See—
DelliColli, Humbert T.; McPartland, Thomas F.; and Bauer, Wal-
ter A., 4,381,194, CI. 71-65.000.
Bauman, William C.: See —
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C, 4,381.349, CI. 521-28.000.
Baumann, Charles G., Jr.; and Danilenko, Michael, to Sperry Corpora-
tion. Buffer memory referencing system for two data words.
4,381,541, CI. 364-200.000.
Baumgen, Heinz: See —
von Bonin, Wulf; Mummenhoff, Peter; and Baumgen, Heinz,
4,381,367. CI. 524-549.000.
Bausch & Lomb Incorporated: See —
Mandt, Lawrence D.; Riedhammer, Thomas M.; and Smith, Fran-
cis X., 4,381.314. CI. 424-333.000.
Baverstock, John R., to Lucas Industries Limited. Method of making a
ribbon cable. 4,381,208, CI. 156-52.000.
Baxter, Ivor R.: See —
Hair, Thomas; and Baxter, Ivor R., 4,381.149, CI. 356-4.000.
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Buysch, Hans-Josef; Krimm, Heinrich; and Richter, Wolfgang,
4,381,404, CI. 560-24.000.
Fuchs, Rainer; Maurer, Fritz; Priesnitz, Uwe; Riebel, Hans-
Jochem; and Klauke. Erich, 4.381,412, CI. 568-637.000.
Hardt, Dietrich K. A., deceased; Mietzsch, Fritz; and Billinger,
Otto, 4,381.361. CI. 524-265.000.
Idel, Karsten; Buysch, Hans-Josef; Margotte, Dieter; and Peters,
Horst, 4,381,359, CI. 524-117.000.
Nielinger, Werner; Brassat, Bert; Binsack, Rudolf; and Neuray,
Dieter, 4.381,371. CI. 525-66.000.
Regel. Erik; Buchel, Karl H.; Haller. Ingo; and Plempel, Manfred,
4,381,306, CI. 424-269.000.
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Ludwig; Buchel, Karl H.; and Plempel, Man-
fred. 4,381,310, CI. 424-273.00R.
Sanderson, John R.; Binsack, Rudolf; Michael, Dietrich; and
Bonten, Heinrich, 4,381,366, CI. 524-504.000.
Schmidt, Manfred; and Bottenbnich, Ludwig, 4,381,390, CI.
528-167.000.
von Bonin. Wulf; Mummenhoff, Peter; and Baumgen, Heinz,
4,381,367, CI. 524-549.000.
BBC Brown, Boveri & Company Limited: See —
Zaba, Tadeusz, 4.380,897. CI. 60-39.330.
Beach. David L.; and Selwiu, Charles M.. to Gulf Research & Devel-
opment Company. Fuel having reduced tendency to particulate
dissemination under shock. 4.381.414, CI. 585-10.000.
Bearden, Robert. Talking greeung card. 4,381,558, CI. 369-68.000.
Becker, Andrew R., to Koppers Company, Inc. Filter bag weighted
holder. 4,381.039. CI. 177-160.000.
Beckman Instruments. Inc.: See —
Johnson. Wayne S.; and Tangherlini, Vincent C, 4,381,168, CI.
414-737.000.
Beier. Hanns W., to Magic Novelty Co., Inc. Twist key holder.
4,380,914, CI. 70-456.00R.
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See—
Acampora, Anthony, 4,381,562, CI. 370-97.000.
Alfemess, Rodney C, 4,381,139, CI. 350-96.140.
Anselmo, Donald R.; and Grau, Thomas G., 4,381,134, CI. 339-
220.00R.
Buhl, Lawrence L., 4,381,138, CI. 350-96.140.
Farrow, Cecil W., 4,381,560, CI. 370-11.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
Frye, Robert C; and Leamy, Harry J., 4,380.865, CI. 29-576.00W.
Beloit Corporation: See —
Guild, Gerald A.; and Frye, Kenneth G., 4,380,945, CI. 83-482.000.
Ben-Gurion University of the Negev Research and Development Au-
thority: See —
Branover, Herman, 4,381,463, CI. 310-11.000.
Bendix Corporation, The: See —
Hemmer, Valentine J.; and Piscitelli, R. Amelia, 4,381,135, CI.
339-258.00R.
Bendrik, Valery G.: See—
Leschinsky, Leonid K.; Gulakov, Sergei V.; Stepnov, Xenofont X.;
Nosovsky, Boris L; Bendrik, Valery G.; Dubinsky, Boris E.;
Isirov. Dmitry L; and Zelensky, Viktor E., 4,380,852, CI.
29-121.200.
Bentley, Arthur P. Sonic pressure wave surface operated pump.
4,381,177, CI. 417-240.000.
Berg, David M.; and Teegarden, Kenneth J., to Hydroacoustics Inc.
Optical fiber mode separation systems. 4,381,137, CI. 350-96.180.
Bergmans, Christianus H. J., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Circuit for a
picture display device for converting an input d.c. voltage into an
output d.c. volUge. 4,381,477. CI. 315-408.000.
Berkowitz, Ami E.; and Walter, John L., to General Electric Company.
Ferrofluid. 4,381,244, CI. 252-62.520.
Bernard, Georges: See —
Nagaoka, Yoshifumi; Morishima, Kanji; Ishii, Hiromi; and Bernard,
Georges, 4,381,436, CI. 20O-I48.00A.
Bemey, Jean, to Les Fabriques d'Assortiments Reunies. Movable limit
markers for viewing glass of measuring instruments. 4,380.963. CI.
116-324.000.
Betta, Walter, to Wabing S.r.l. Braided stranded rope forming machine.
4.380.949. CI. 87-48.000.
Belts, Robert E., to United Sutes of America, Army. ElectrosUtic safe
electric match. 4,380,958. CI. 102-202.200.
Bianchi. Valerio: Sec —
Latsch, Reinhard; Schober, Heinz; Muller, Gerhard; and Bianchi.
Valerio, 4,380,986, CI. 123-489.000.
Biddle, Nicholas, III; and Craig, Stephen R., to Du Pont de Nemours,
E. I., and Company. Control means and method for powder bagging.
4,381,545, CI. 364-479.000.
Bieber, Charles P.; and Howard, Frank D., to Leland Stanford Jr.
University, The Board of Trustees of the. Anti-human T-lymphocyte
monoclonal antibody. 4,381,292. CI. 424-1.000.
Biggs, James W.; and Maringer, Melvin F., to National Distillers &
Chemical Corp. Flame retardant polymeric compositions capable of
passing the CSA varnish test. 4,381,362, CI. 524-305.000.
Billinger, Otto: See—
Hardt, Dietrich K. A., deceased; Mietzsch, Fritz; and Billinger,
Otto, 4,381,361, CI. 524-265.000.
Binder, Paul; and Cane, David A., to Digital Equipment Corporation.
System for interrupt arbitration. 4,381,542, CI. 364-200.000.
Binsack, Rudolf: See —
Nielinger, Werner; Brassat, Bert; Binsack, Rudolf; and Neuray,
Dieter. 4.381,371, CI. 525-66.000.
Sanderson, John R.; Binsack, Rudolf; Michael, Dietrich; and
Bonten, Heinrich, 4,381,366, CI. 524-504.000.
Biomedics, Inc.: See —
Babb, Albert L., 4,381,004, CI. 128-214.00R.
Birken, Peter: See—
Kessler, Erich; and Birken, Peter, 4,381,274, Q. 264-147.000.
Bissinger, Norbert, to Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit
beschraenkter Haftung. Air inlet, especially a two-dimensional air
inlet set at an angle on one side for gas turbine jet propulsion plants
for driving airplanes. 4,381,017, CI. 137-15.100.
Bitko, David, to Fifth Dimension Inc. Switch and alarm system respon-
sive to sudden movement, angular tilt and vibration. 4,381,504, CI.
340-689.000.
BJ-Hughes Inc.: See—
Novotny, Rudolf J.; and Gandy, Richard G., 4,381,034, CI.
166-292.000.
Bjom, Lars-Erik; Olsson, Mats; and Oman, Olof, to Aktiebolaget Bo-
fors. Method of producing a flash suppressed pressed rocket propel-
lant. 4,381,270, CI. 264-3.00B.
Black & E>ecker Inc.: See—
Cuneo, Giuseppe, 4,38 1 ,037, CI. 1 73- 1 70.000.
Blais, Marcel H.: See-
Coma, John F.; and Blais. Marcel H., 4,380,837. CI. 4-510.000.
Boden, Richard M., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Organo-
leptic use of Prins reaction products of diisoamylene, derivatives
thereof, organoleptic uses thereof and processes for preparing same.
4,381.242, CI. 252-8.600.
Boden, Richard M., to International Flavors A. Fragrances Inc. Ali-
phatic branched olefin dioxolanes, dithiolanes, and oxathiolanes and
uses thereof in augmenting or enhancing the aroma and/or taste of
consumable materials. 4,381,243, CI. 252-8.900.
Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH: See—
Koppe, Herbert; Mentrup, Anton; Renth, Emst-Otto; Schromm,
Kurt; Hoefke, Wolfgang; and Muacevic, Gojko, 4,381,309, CI.
424-273.00B.
Boeing Company, The: See —
Nelsen, Arnold, 4.381,104, CI. 269-43.000.
Rudolph, Peter K. C, 4,381,093. CI. 244-216.000.
Wren, Lloyd W., 4,381,510, CI. 343-909.000.
Bogri, Tibor: See—
Palameta, Bozidar; Bogri, Tibor; and BagU, Jehan, 4,381,304, CI.
424-256.000.
Bohl, Thomas L.; Hall, George R., Jr.; and Zimmerlin, Sharon L., to
Babcock & Wilcox Company, The. Opacity monitor. 4,381,153, CI.
356-437.000.
Boileau, Sylvie L.; Meunier, Gilles F.; and Joumeau, Sabine M., to
Societe flationale des Poudres et Explosifs. Process for the prepara-
tion of polymers and copolymers based on vinyl chlorofonnate.
4,381,385, CI. 526-230.500.
Bolen. Charles E.; Harrington, Edward R.; Marzocchi, Alfred; and
Roberts, Michael G., to Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation.
Glass insulation with an insolubilized asphalt binder. 4,381,200, CI.
106-282.000.
Bom, Coraelis J. G.: See —
van der Lely, Ary; and Bom, Comelis J. G., 4,381,080, CI.
239-666.000.
Bommarito, Paul F. Ophthalmic test lens holder. 4,381,143, CI.
351-22.000.
Bonnet, Evelyne J. M., to PCUK Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann.
Structurally colored cross-linkable compounds, their preparation and
their utilization in coating compositions. 4,381,261, CI. 260-162.000.
Bonten, Heinrich: See —
Sanderson, John R.; Binsack, Rudolf; Michael, Dietrich; and
Bonten, Heinrich, 4,381,366, CI. 524-504.000.
Borushaski, Ronald G.: See —
James, Mark C; and Borushaski, Ronald G., 4,381,165, CI.
414^526.000.
Bottelson, Thomas J.: See —
Ritzenthaler, Donald R.; and Bottelson. Thomas J.. 4,381,431, CI.
200-38.00R.
Bottenbruch, Ludwig: See —
Schmidt, Manfred; and Bottenbruch, Ludwig. 4,381,390, CI.
528-167.000.
Bottiglieri, Peter. Fuel flow arrestor. 4,380,976, CI. 123-198.0DB.
Bottoms, Clifford C. Mud pump piston assembly. 4.380.951, CI.
92-244.000.
Bouffard, Joseph O. Rust removing and metal surface protecting com-
position. 4,381,249, CI. 252-136.000.
Bouillon, Claude; Abegg, Jean-Louis; Koulbanis, Constantin; and Dar-
menton, Patrick, to Societe Anonyme dite: L'OREAL. Process for
reinforcing fragile or brittle nails and a composition containing a
cationic polymer for use in said process. 4,381,294, CI. 424-61.000.
Bourdon, Guy; and Lehureau, Jean-Claude, to Thomson-CSF. Video-
disc reader with longitudinally displaced turntable. 4,381,556, CI.
369-44.000.
Bouwma, Jan; and Kerssen, Johannes, to U.S. Philips Corporation.
Magnetic head construction. 4,381,529, CI. 360-123.000.
Bowers, Kenneth E.; and Markley, Charles E., to Ethyl Development
Corporation. Apparatus for removing waste material from a plastic
article. 4,381,183, CI. 425-182.000.
Braden, Denver, to Palomar Systems A. Machines, Inc. Method of
processing miniature electronic components such as capaciton or
resistors. 4,381,321, CI. 427-79.000.
Brand, La Voice B.; and Brand. Robert L. Drilling mud degasser.
4,381,191, CI. 55-193.000.
Brand, Robert L.: See-
Brand, LaVoice B.; and Brand, Robert L., 4,381,191, CI.
55-193.000.
Brandt, Inc.: See—
Horvath, Stephen J.; and Wilcox, Steven R., 4,381,447, CI. 250-
223.00R.
Branover, Herman, to Ben-Gurion University of the Negev Research
and Development Authority. Method and apparatus for producing
electrical power and for the simultaneous heating of fluid, utilizing a
magnetohydrodynamic generator. 4,381,463, CI. 310-11.000.
Brassat, Bert: See —
Nielinger, Wemer; Brassat, Bert; Binsack, Rudolf; and Neuray.
Dieter. 4,381,371, CI. 525-66.000.
Braxton, Earl J. Collapsible toilet shelter. 4,380,836, CI. 4-460.000.
Brems, John H.; and Graham, James T., to F. Jos. Lamb Company, a
part interest. Speed control for gravity operated trolleys. 4,380,959,
CI. 104-93.000.
Bremus, Norbert; Dieckelmann, Gerhard; Jeromin, Lutz; Rupilius,
Wolfgang; and Schutt, Hartwig, to Henkel Kommanditgeaellschaft
auf Aktien. Process for the continuous production of triacetin.
4,381,407, CI. 560-263.000.
Breslau, Lloyd. Underwater camera enclosure including sonar range
fmding device. 4,381.144, CI. 354-64.000.
Brettschneider, Johannes: See —
Linder, Ernst; Babitzka, Rudolf; Brettschneider, Johannes; Polach,
WUhelm; Wessel. Wolf; and Stumpp, Gerhard, 4,380,900, CI.
60-275.000.
Briere, Richard L., to Dennison Manufacturing Company. Mica-foil
laminations. 4,381,327, CI. 428-137.000.
Briska, Marian: See —
Bahr. Dietrich J.; and Briska, Marian. 4.381,322, CI. 427-179.000.
British Aerospace Public Limited Company: See—
Pegram, Barry V., 4,381,091, CI. 244-87.000.
British Gas Corporation: See-
Morgan, Ronald E.; and Pearce, Thomas, 4,380,940, CI. 81-57.160.
Broadwith, Brian E., to Lucas Industries Limited. Fuel injection pump.
4,381,182, CI. 417-435.000.
Brossmann, Gottfried; and Diem, Friu, to Peroxide-Chemie GmbH.
Process for the distillative separation of tertiary alkyl hydroperoxides
and ditertiary alkyl peroxides. 4,381,222, CI. 203-33.000.
Brotsky, Eugene; Everson, Charles W.; and Swartz, William E., to
Nutrisearch Company. Whey protein fortified cured nueat and pro-
cess for preparation. 4,381,316, CI. 426-265.000.
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Brouwer, Frans, to Pelouze Scale Co. Weighing scale with capacitor
transducer. 4,381,040. CI. 177-210.00C.
Brown, David F.: See —
Anstey, Michael J.; and Brown, David F., 4,381,458, CI.
307-66.000.
Brown, Douglas R., to Ionics, Incorporated. Multi-stage electrodialysis
stack electrode reversal system and method of operation. •4,38 1,232,
CI. 204-180.00P.
Brown, Robert S., to Milliken Research Corporation. Rug cleaner.
4,381,157, CI. 401-21.000.
Bryant, Randy E., to Dayco Corporation. Bobbin core. 4,381,088, CI.
242-118.700.
Bubik, Alfred; Seider, Werner; and Hefter,, Josef, to Escher Wyss
GmbH. Headbox arrangement for a papermaking machine. 4,381,219,
CI. 162-299.000.
Buchel, Karl H.: See—
Regel, Erik; Buchel, Karl H.; Haller, Ingo; and Plempel, Manfred,
4.381,306, CI. 424-269.000.
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Ludwig; Buchel, Karl H.; and Plempel, Man-
fred, 4.381,310, CI. 424-273.00R.
Buchwalder, Jean-Pierre, to Cyctfes Peugeot. Exhaust gas silencer for a
heat engine. 4,381,045, CI. 181-265.000.
Buhl, Lawrence L., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Electrooptic devices. 4,381,138, CI. 350-96.140.
Buhler, Ulrich; Cornelius, Dieter; Lowenfeld, Rudolf; Kosubek, Uwe;
Hahnle, Reinhard; and Schickfluss, Rudolf, to Cassella Aktiengesell-
schaft. Water-insoluble azo dyestufTs, their manufacture and their use.
4.381,262, CI. 260-207.100.
Bujan, Albert F., to Abbott Laboratories. Intravenous pump chamber.
4,381,005, CI. 604-152.000.
Bunner, Matthew R.; and Heinhuis, William H., to Industrial Wood
Products, Inc. Paving and floor block composition and method of
production. 4,381,328. CI. 428-171.000.
Bunten. Roland J., Ill; and Hickman, John E., to International Business
Machines Corporation. Controller port switch arrangement for
sharing stored data among different systems. 4,381,543, CI.
364-200.000.
Bunten, Theodore M.: See —
Cargill, N. Allen; and Bunten, Theodore M., 4,381,075, CI. 237-
8.00R.
Buoncristiani, Vincenzo. Method and apparatus for the automatic
semicontinuous peritoneal dialysis. 4,381,003, CI. 128-2 13.00A.
Burchette, Joe T.: See—
Kluger. Edward W.; and Burchette, Joe T., 4,381,265, CI. 260-
465.00E.
Burdick, Patricia E.: See —
Albee, Paul J., Jr.; Burdick, Patricia E.; and Wrozina, Joseph I.,
4,381,376, CI. 525-366.000.
Bumey, Harry S.. Jr.; and Gantt, Gary R., to Dow Chemical Company,
The. Operation and regeneration of permselective ion-exchange
membranes in brine electrolysis cells. 4,381,230. CI. 204-98.000.
Burr-Brown Research Corporation: See —
Lillis, William J.; Naylor, Jimmy R.; Wang, Anthony D.; and
White, Robert L., 4,381,497, CI. 34O-347.0DA.
Burroughs Corporation: See —
Demnianiuk, Eugene F., 4,381,131, CI. 339-75.00M.
Reynolds, Paul D.; and Jones, Norman W., 4.381,215, CI.
156-643.000.
Sprenkle, George J., 4,381,130, CI. 339-74.00R.
Vosh, Lawrence J.; and D'Angelo, Kenneth R., 4,381,119, CI.
282-1 1.50A.
Wisner, Daniel A., 4,381,494, CI. 340-146.30C.
Burroughs Wellcome Co.: See —
Rideout, Janet L.; and Krenitsky, Thomas A., 4,381,344. CI.
435-87.000.
Butler. Keith C. to Hewlett-Packard Company. Controller for pen,
paper and chart of a recorder. 4,381,512, CI. 346-33.00R.
Butoi, Aristotel. Electric power generating system. 4,381,041, CI. 180-
65.00D.
Buysch, Hans-Josef; Krimm, Heinrich; and Richter. Wolfgang, to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the production of N,0-disub-
stituted urethanes and use thereof as starting materials for the produc-
tion of organic isocyanatcs. 4,381,404, CI. 560-24.000.
Buysch, Hans-Josef: See —
Idel, Karsten; Buysch, Hans-Josef; Margotte, Dieter; and Peters,
Horst, 4,381,359. CI. 524-117.000.
BYK Gulden Lomberg Chemische Fabrik GmbH: See—
Rainer, Georg, 4,381,301, CI. 424-250.000.
C. Itch Electronics, Inc.: See —
Kondur, Nicholas, Jr., 4,381,155, CI. 400-220.100.
C. Van der Lely N.V.: See-
van der Lely, Ary; and Bom, Comelis J. G., 4,381,080, CI.
239-666.000.
Caffaro S.p.A.: See—
Pontoglio. Enrico, 4.381.392, CI. 528^93.000.
Calandrino. Peter M. Transverse mode converter for use with a longitu-
dinal mode oscillographic recorder. 4.381,514, CI. 346-1 lO.OOR.
Camardella, Giuseppe, to Tekma Kinomat S.p.A. Coil winding ma-
chine. 4,380,919, CI. 72-132.000.
Cameron Iron Works, Inc.: See —
Gardner. Richard E.. 4,380,939, CI. 74-813.00L.
Vanderford, Delbert E., Jr., 4.381,114, CI. 277-34.600.
Cue. David A.: See-
Binder, Paul; and Cane, David A., 4,381,542, CI. 364-200.000.
Canning, Francis R., administrator: See —
Canning, Jonathan R., deceased; Moulding, Kenneth W.; and
WUson, Gordon A., 4,381,489, CI. 333-215.000.
Canning, Jonathan R., deceased (by Caiming, Francis R., administra-
tor); Moulding, Kenneth W.; and Wilson, Gordon A., to U.S. Philips
Corporation. Pass filter circuit arrangement. 4,381,489, CI.
333-215.000.
Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Senuma, Michio; and Shibuya, Jun, 4,380,857, CI. 29-417.000.
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Isaka, Kazuo; Nakahata, Kimio; Sakurai, Masaaki; Watanabe,
Tsuyoshi; Kan, Fumitaka; and Takeda, Kenji, 4,380,966, CI.
118-651.000.
Momiyama, Kikuo; and Kumazawa, Kenichi, 4,381,145, CI.
354-155.000.
Senuma, Michio; and Shibuya, Jun, 4,380,857, CI. 29-417.000.
Suzuki, Kiyoshi, 4,381,338, CI. 430-135.000.
Cantwcll, Hugh F., to Rolls-Royce Limited. Fuel control system for a
gas turbine engine. 4,380,898, CI. 60-243.000.
Cappelli, John R., to United States of America, Air Force. Pulsed
radiation dosimetry apparatus. 4,381.450. CI. 250-370.000.
Caradonna. Charles. Golf iron washer. 4,380,839, CI. 15-104.920.
Carbol, Vlastimil, to Oy Partek AB. Fibre glass composition. 4,381,347,
CI. 501-36.000.
Cargill, N. Allen; and Bunten, Theodore M., to Thermonic Corp.
Microprocessor based controller for heating system. 4,381,075, CI.
237-8.00R.
Carrier Corporation: See —
Eisenhauer. Virgil E., 4,381,531, CI. 361-87.000.
Carron, Mark S.; and McCarthy, Desmond C, to StaufTer Chemical
Company. Process for drying and compressing chlorine gas.
4,381,190, CI. 55-30.000.
Carter, Ernest A., to Motorola, Inc. Analog to digital converter.
4,381,496, CI. 34O-347.0AD.
Carver, Robert G., to Don Cobum, Inc. Display carriers for articles.
4,381,057, CI. 206-434.000.
Casagrande, Cesare; and Ferrari, Giorgio, to Simes S.p.A. Ethylenedi-
amine derivatives and pharmaceutical compositions containing same.
4,381,305, CI. 424-263.000.
Cassella Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Buhler, Ulrich; Cornelius, Dieter; Lowenfeld, Rudolf; Kosubek,
Uwe; Hahnle, Reinhard; and Schickfluss, Rudolf, 4,381,262, CI.
260-207.100.
Catelli, Camillo, to Ing, Rossi & Catelli di Catelli & C. S.n.C. Feeding
device for pre-sterilized objects contained in internally sterile recep-
tacles, for sterile packing plants. 4,381,067, CI. 222-450.000.
Cecil, John, Jr.: See —
KiefTer, Joseph D., Ill; Cecil, John, Jr.; and Conroe, Barden A.,
4,380,998, CI. 128-9.000.
Cemy, Daryl D.; and EMebolt, Edwin J., to Ball Corporation. Non-
paneling container. 4,381,061, CI. 215-l.OOC.
Cesca, Sebastiano: See —
Ferraris, Giuseppe; and Cesca, Sebastiano, 4,381,381, CI.
526-75.000.
Champion International Corporation: See —
Golden, Ronald, 4,381,120, CI. 282-27.500.
Chang, Mike S. H., to Pitney Bowes Inc. Polyester adhesive layer for
photosensitive elements. 4,381,337, CI. 430-58.000.
Chappie, Paul M., to Cummins Engine Company, Inc. Casting for a
turbine wheel. 4,381,171, CI. 415-204.000.
Chaussadas, Jean; Coudoin, Gisele; Martin, Claude; and Milliens,
Andre, to Mead Corporation, The. Materials for forming composite
packages and methoid of producing such packages. 4,381,058, CI.
206-497.000.
Cheal, William E.; Gupta, Gokal C; Sepahmansour, Faramarz; and
Aggarwal, Avnish K., to Northern Telecom Limited. Subscriber
loop system for voice and daU. 4,381,427, CI. 179-2.0DP.
Chemische Werke Huels, AG: See—
Kampf, Wolfgang; Streck, Roland; and Haag, Horst-guenter,
4,381,377, CI. 525-375.000.
Chen, Cheng L.; Goldstein, Norman P.; and Todt, William H., to
Westinghouse Electric Corp. Core self-powered radiation detector
for determining thermal and epithermal flux. 4,381,451, CI.
250-390.000.
Chen, Paul Y.; and Marvel, Carl S., to United States of America, Air
Force. Interfacial process for preparing polyaromatic esters.
4,381,391, CI. 528-173.000.
Chevron Research Company: See —
Sung, Harry M., 4,380,909, CI. 62-79.000.
Chi, Chang W.: See—
Nozemack, Richard J.; Chi, Chang W.; and Schwonke, John J.,
4,381,255, CI. 252-455.00Z.
Chibata, Ichiro; Tosa, Tetsuya; Sato, Tadashi; Watanabe, Taizo; and
Minobe, Satoshi, to Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Method for reducing
the pyrogen content of or removing pyrogens from substances con-
taminated therewith. 4,381,239, CI. 210-679.000.
Chicopee: See —
Kelly, William G. F., 4,381,326, CI. 428-134.000.
Chrisp, David: See —
Erickson, Lowell H.; Merrill, Marcellus S.; and Chrisp, David,
4,380,875, CI. 33-203.130.
Christie, Ian R. A.; Croxall, Derek F.; and Isherwood, Brian J., to
General Electric Company Limited, The. Process for growing crys-
tals. 4,381,214, CI. 456-623.00Q.
Chrysler Corporation: See —
Perry, John J., 4,381,042, CI. 180-272.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 5
Chu, Nan S.; and Mariin, Lawrence, to Union Carbide Corporation.
Aromatic chromophoric substituted polysiloxane dyes. 4,381,260, CI.
260-144.000.
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See —
Gamer, Robert; and Whitehead, Michael J., 4,381,266, CI.
260-546.000.
Citri, Nathan, to Teva Pharmaceutical Industries Ltd.; and Yissum
Research Development Co. Determination of antibacterial agents.
4,381,343, CI. 435-24.000.
Clark, Richard A.: See—
Kouns, Herbert H.; and Clark, Richard A., 4,381,176, CI.
417-222.000.
Clegg, Warren P. Solenoid-actuated centrifugal pump and method.
4,381,181, CI. 417-423.00R.
Clough, Douglas O.: See—
Parker, Alan; Dickinson, Peter J.; Clough, Douglas O.; and Fam-
hill, William M., 4,380,892, CI. 57-401.000.
Coatings for Industry, Inc.: See —
Lowe, Jean C; Klotz, James M.; and Collins, Glenn A., Jr., de-
ceased, 4,381,323, CI. 427-383.700.
Coats, Warren D.; and Kamerling, Marc A., to Tektronix, Inc. Electro-
magnetic shield for electronic equipment. 4,381,421, CI. 174-35.00R.
Cobum, Edwin H. Hand operated steak tenderizer and cuber. 4,380,850,
CI. 17-29.000.
Coffee, Ronald A., to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. Atomization
of liquids. 4,381,533, CI. 361-228.000.
Collins, Glenn A., Jr., deceased: See-
Lowe, Jean C; KJotz, James M.; and Collins, Glenn A., Jr., de-
ceased, 4,381,323, CI. 427-383.700.
Collins, Mark C: See-
Wilkinson, James H.; and Collins, Mark C, 4,381,519, CI. 358-
21.00R.
Collins, William J. Sampler for a hot liquid. 4,380,937, CI. 73-864.560.
Combustion Engineering, Inc.: See —
Madewell, George R.. 4.381,440, CI. 219-62.000.
Sullivan, Robert P.; and Jacobs, Clyde L., 4,380.843, CI. 15-
316.00R.
Commons, Thomas J.: See — \
Sheehan. John C; and Commons, Thomas J.. 4,381,300, CI.
424-246.000.
Compagnie Europeenne pour I'Equipement Menager "CEPEM": See —
Gemez, Alain, 4,381,018, CI. 137-592.000.
Conc&st AG* Sec
Knell, Bemhard, 4,381,030, CI. 164-446.000.
Conoco Inc.: See —
Dodd, John R., 4,381,413, CI. 568-716.000.
Doerr, Richard E.; Dahl, Hilbert D.; and Umphrey, Ronald W.,
4,381,161, CI. 406-109.000.
Conrad, Earl: See-
Jones, W. Richard; and Conrad, Earl, 4,380,952, CI. 98-59.000.
Conroe, Harden A.: See —
Kieffer, Joseph D., Ill; Cecil, John, Jr.; and Conroe, Barden A.,
4,380,998, CI. 128-9.000.
Coop, Jeffrey W., Jr.: See-
Coop, Jeffrey W., Sr.; and Coop, Jeffrey W.. Jr., 4,380,920, CI.
72-158.000.
Coop, Jeffrey W., Sr.; and Coop, Jeffrey W., Jr. Adjustable wiper die
for bending tubular members. 4,380,920, CI. 72-158.000.
Cooper Industries, Inc.: See —
Ford, James A.; and Haarer, Steven R., 4,381.029. CI. 160-172.000.
Lovrenich, Rodger T., 4,381,133, CI. 339-198.00R.
Coma, John F.; and Blais. Marcel H., to Statewide Pools, Inc. Method
and apparatus for controlling the flow in swimming pool gutters.
4,380,837, CI. 4-510.000.
Comeil, Dennis J.: See—
Waldhauser. Steven A.; and Comeil, Dennis J., 4,380,844, CI.
15-320.000.
ComeUus, Dieter: See —
Buhler, Ulrich; Comelius, Dieter; Lowenfeld, Rudolf; Kosubek,
Uwe; Hahnle, Reinhard; and SchickHuss, Rudolf, 4,381,262, CI.
260-207.100.
Cotton, Curran D., to Maytag Company, The. Power-up circuit for
microprocessor based appUaace control. 4,381,459, CI. 307-139.000.
Coudoin, Gisele: See —
Chaussadas, Jean; Coudoin, Gisele; Martin, Claude; and Milliens,
Andre, 4,381,058, CI. 206-497.000.
Coulson, Patricia B. Oral male contraceptive composition. 4,381,298,
CI. 424-240.000.
Countryman, Roger S., Jr.; and Lin, Paul T., to Motorola, Inc. Method
of programming ROM by offset masking of selected gates. 4.380,866,
CI. 29-577.00C.
Courty, Philippe; Rabinovich. Georgy L.; Mojaiko. Victor N.; and
LePage. Jean-Francois, to Institut Francais du Petrole. Process for
dealkylating aromatic hydrocarbons in the presence of steam.
4,381,415, CI. 585-487.000.
Cox, Bradley G., to Baker Perkins Inc. High pressure rotary centrifugal
separator having apparatus for automatically cyclically reciprocating
a corouting separator basket scraper. 4,381,236, CI. 210-112.000.
Crabb, Richard V.. Jr.. to Growers Ice Company. Method and appara-
tus for chUling produce. 4,380,908, CI. 62-64.000.
Craig, Stephen R.: See—
Biddle, Nicholas. Ill; and Craig, Stephen R., 4,381,545, CI.
364-479.000.
Crain, Theron H. Circulating fuel heating system for internal combus-
tion engines. 4,380,987, CI. 123-558.000.
Cronkite, Michael O.; and Paquin, Patrick J., to Allied Corporation.
Low crosstalk ribbon cable. 4,381,426. CI. 174-117.00F.
Crossman, Richard L., to Goodyear Aerospace Corporation. Electri-
cally actuated aircraft brakes. 4,381,049, CI. 188-72.700
Croxall, Derek P.: See-
Christie, Ian R. A.; Croxall, Derek F.; and Isherwood, Brian J.,
4,381,214, CI. 456-623.00Q.
Cryoplants, Ltd.: See —
Barnes, Robert S.; and Harper. Raymond, 4,380,907. CI. 62-52.000.
Cuadra, Emilio J.: See —
Nocilini, John D.; Sharp, Ronald E.; and Cuadra, Emilio J ,
4.381.552, CI. 364-900.000.
Cummins Engine Company, Inc.: See—
Chappie, Paul M.. 4,381.171, CI. 415-204.000.
Cuneo, Giuseppe, to Black &. Decker Inc. Portable electric tool
4,381,037, CI. 173-170.000.
Cuomo, Jerome J.; and Harper, James M. E., to International Business
Machines Corporation. System and method for deflecting and focus-
ing a broad ion beam. 4,381,453, CI. 250-398.000.
Curtis, Richard A., to United States of America, Army. Laser beam
pointing aid. 4,381,150, CI. 356-247.000.
Cusano, Dominic A., to General Electric Company. Solid state storage
devices and systems. 4,381,474. CI. 315-13.0ST.
Cushing. Donald S., to General Electric Company. Electromechanical
timer with improved short interval accuracy. 4,381.432, CI. 200-
38.00B.
Cutchaw. John M. Apparatus for cooling high-density integrated cir-
cuit packages. 4.381.032. CI. 165-46.000.
Cutler, Timothy D.: See-
Titus, Theodore, IV; and Cutler, Timothy D., 4,381,527. CI.
360-92.000.
Cycles Peugeot: See —
Buchwalder. Jean-Pierre, 4,381,045, CI. 181-265.000.
Dage, Richard C: See—
Grisar, J. Martin; Schnettler. Richard A.; and Dage. Richard C.
4.381.393. CI. 544-370.000.
Daghe. Joseph L.; Hauffe, William L.; and Terrill, Garrett D.. to
Mueller Co. Single and multiple section pipe repair or service clamps.
4.381.020, CI. 138-99.000.
Dahl, Hilbert D.: See—
Doerr, Richard E.; Dahl, Hilbert D.; and Umphrey. Ronald W..
4.381,161, CI. 406-109.000.
Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See —
Toga, Yuzo; Shimada, Toshio; and Komada, Hajime. 4.381.379, CI.
525-444.000.
Daidotokushuko Kabushikikaisha: See —
Tanaka, Teruaki, 4,380,916, CI. 72-7.000.
Daiichi Dentsu Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Doniwa, Tabito, 4,381,482, CI. 318-816.000.
Dallmann, Hermann; and Palmen, Hans J., to Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schaft. Thermoplastic film for use in the manufacture of forgery-
resistant identification documents. 4,381,329, CI. 428-204.000.
DAMP, S.p.A.: See—
Traini, Oscar, 4,381,422, CI. 174-42.000.
D'Angelo, Kenneth R.: See—
Vosh, Lawrence J.; and D'Angelo, Kenneth R., 4,381,119. CI
282-1 1. 50A.
Danilenko, Michael: See —
Baumann, Charles G., Jr.; and Danilenko, Michael, 4,381,541, Q.
364-200.000.
Dannemann, Artur: See —
Linn, Karl-Otto; Jansche. Walter; Adolph, Dietrich; and Dan-
nemann. Artur. 4.381.506, CI. 340-870.320.
Danz, Rudi; Stark, Wolfgang; Elling, Burkhard; Ruscher, Chnstian;
and Schwarz, Wolfgang, to Akademie der Wissenschaften der DDR.
Process and arrangement for the polarization of shaped objecu made
from polymers. 4,381,534, CI. 361-233.000.
Darmenton, Patrick: See-
Bouillon, Claude; Abegg, Jean-Louis; Koulbanis, Constantin; and
Darmenton, Patrick, 4,381,294, CI. 424-61.000.
Das, Narayan; and Misra, Surya K., to National Can Corporation.
Coated sheet material and container therefrom. 4,381,064, CI.
220-458.000.
Das, Pankaj K., to United States of America, Air Force. Method for
providing in-situ non-destructive monitoring of semiconductors
during laser annealing process. 4,380,864, CI. 29-574.000.
Davidson, Donald R.: See—
Reinert, Gerhard; and Davidson, Donald R.. 4,380,961, Q.
112-231.000.
Davies, David O.; and Sherwood, Michael, to Rolls-Royce Limited.
Reheat systems for gas turbine engines. 4,380,899, CI. 60-261.000.
Davis, Roy A. Combustion engines. 4,380,970, CI. 123-3.000.
Dawson, Daniel J.: See —
Swanson, Sally A.; Weinshenker, Ned M.; Wingard, Robert E., Jr.;
and Dawson, Daniel J., 4,381,185, CI. 8-506.000.
Dayco Corporation: See —
Bryant, Randy E., 4,381,088, CI. 242-118.700.
Daystrom Limited: See —
Riech, Volker; and Sorgenicht, Dietrich, 4,381,152. CI.
356-385.000.
De La Rue Systems Limited: See-
Jenkins. Stuart M.; Wood, John; and Martin. David, 4,381,445, CI.
235-379.000.
E>eckman, Harry W.; Halpem, Gerald M.; and Dunsmuir, John G.. to
University of Rochester. Method for fUUng hoUow shells with gas for
use as laser fusion targett. 4,380.855, CI. 29-407.000.
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Deere ft Company: See —
Baty, Mark A., 4,381,167. Q. 414-697.000.
Hamm, Nicholas, 4,380,853, CI. 29-148.300.
DeLaurentis, Angcio A., to Wcstinghouse Electric Corp. Method of
curing a non-metallic band. 4,381,209, CI. 156-162.000.
Del Bon, Franco. Hand-held device for the local heat-treatment of the
skin. 4,381,009, CI. 128-399.000.
Delfino, Nicholas A. Ceramic belt buckle and the method of making.
4,381,098, CI. 249-94.000.
DelliCoUi, Humbert T.; McPartland, Thomas F.; and Bauer, Walter A.,
to Westvaco Corporation. Alkali lignin based pesticide phytotoxicity
reducing composition. 4,381,194, CI. 71-65.000.
DeLong, Ronald B.; and Schettl, Alvin J., to White Consolidated
Industries, Inc. Range surface unit receptacle. 4,381,444, CI.
219-451.000.
Demnianiuk, Eugene F., to Burroughs Corporation. Levered system
connector for an integrated circuit package. 4,381,131, CI. 339-
75.00M.
Dennison Manufacturing Company: See —
Briere. Richard L., 4,381,327, CI. 428-137.000.
Nechay, Jacek A., 4,381.211, CI. 156-361.000.
Desmarais, Patrizia R.; and DiTroia, Anthony J., to Western Electric
Company, Inc. Methods of and apparatus for trimming film resistors.
4.381,441, CI. 219-121.0U.
Dextec Metallurgical Pty. Ltd.: See—
Everett. Peter K., 4.381,225. CI. 204-117.000.
Diamond Shamrock Corporation: See —
Hardee, Kenneth L.; Gordon, Arnold Z.; Pyle, Charles B.; and Sen,
Rajat K., 4.381.290. CI. 423-478.000.
Dickinson, Lawrence C. Roller burnishing tool. 4,380,851, CI. 29-
90.00R.
Dickinson, Norman L. Pollution-free low temperature slurry combus-
tion process utilizing the super-critical state. 4,380,960, CI.
1 10-347.000.
Dickinson, Peter J.: See —
Parker, Alan; Dickinson, Peter J.; Clough, Douglas O.; and Fam-
hill, WUliam M., 4,380,892, CI. 57-401.000.
Diebolt, Edwin J.: See—
Cemy, Daryl D.; and Diebolt, Edwin J., 4,381,061, CI. 215-l.OOC.
Dieckelmann, Gerhard: See —
Bremus, Norbert; Dieckelmann, Gerhard; Jeromin, Lutz; Rupilius,
Wolfgang; and Schutt, Hartwig, 4.381.407, CI. 560-263.000.
Diem, Fritz: See —
Brossmann. Gottfried; and Diem, Fritz, 4,381,222, CI. 203-33.000.
Dierberger, James A., to United Technologies Corporation. Combus-
tion liner cooling scheme. 4,380,906, CI. 60-757.000.
Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd.: See—
Hara, Toshizo; Sutoh, Shinji; and Kojima, Toshio, 4,381,480, CI.
318-471.000.
Digital Equipment Corporation: See —
Binder, Paul; and Cane, David A., 4,381,542, CI. 364-200.000.
Dion, Warren E., to Arthur G. Russell Company, Incorporated, The.
System for displaying alphanumerical messages having stored and
real time components. 4,381,505, CI. 340-756.000.
DiTroia, Anthony J.: See —
Desmarais. Patrizia R.; and DiTroia. Anthony J.. 4,381.441. CI.
219-121.0U.
Dr. Karl Thomae GmbH: See-
Schmidt, Gunther; Engel, Wolfhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Trumm-
litz, Gunter; and Engelhardt, Gunther, 4,381,303, CI.
424-252.000.
Dodd, John R., to Conoco Inc. Process for converting anisoles to
ortho-methylated phenolic products. 4,381,413, CI. 568-716.000.
Doerr, Richard E.; Dahl, Hilbert D.; and Umphrey, Ronald W., to
Conoco Inc. Slurry recovery from a circular sump. 4,381,161, CI.
406-109.000.
Don Cobum, Inc.: See —
Carver, Robert G., 4.381,057, CI. 206-434.000.
Doniwa, Tabito, to Daiichi Dentsu Kabushiki Kaisha. Single-phase,
reversible induction motor. 4.381.482, CI. 318-816.000.
Donohue, John A., to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Process for
electrochemical reduction of terephthalic acid. 4,381,229, CI.
204-75.000.
Doryokuro Kakunenryo Kaihatsu Jigyodan: See —
Nakamoto, Koichiro; Ishii, Kiyokazu; and Ohyama, Nobumi,
4,380,924, CI. 73-19.000.
Doss, James D., to United States of America, Energy. Multipolar
comeal-shaping electrode with flexible removable skirt. 4.381.007.
CI. 128-303.100.
Douglas, Robin S.; and Sweeney. John M. Cleaning fluid distribution
head. 4.381,016. CI. 134-170.000.
Dow Chemical Company. The: See —
Bumey. Harry S., Jr.; and Gantt. Gary R., 4,381,230, CI.
204-98.000.
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C, 4,381,349, CI. 521-28.000.
Poindexter, Graham S., 4,381,401, CI. 556-410.000.
Shipley, Randall S., 4,381,253, CI. 252-43 l.OOC.
Shipley. Randall S.; and Vance. Fred L.. 4.381.382, CI. 526-97.000.
Dow Coming Corporation: See —
Romenesko, David J.; and Schiefer, Harry M., 4,381,241, CI. 252-
8.50P.
Dreier, Raymond C. Hack saw. 4,381,024, CI. 14S-33.00R.
Dreikom, Barry A.; and Kramer, Kenneth E.. to Eli Lilly and Com-
pany. 2,4,6-Trinitrodiphenylamines for control of foliar phytopatho-
gens. 4,381,312, CI. 424-304.000.
Drevet, Michel P.; and Trouillet, Jean, to Jeumont Schneider Corpora-
tion. Hydrostatic bearing with rotating sleeve. 4,381,126, CI.
384-114.000.
Driver, Michael C: See —
Przybysz, John X.; Driver, Michael C; and Nathanson. Harvey C,
4.381,341, CI. 430-312.000.
Dubinsky. Boris E.: See—
Leschinsky. Leonid K.; Gulakov. Sergei V.; Stepnov. Xenofont X.;
Nosovsky. Boris I.; Bendrik, Valery G.; Dubinsky. Boris E.;
Isirov, Dmitry I.; and Zelensky, Viktor E., 4,380,852, CI.
29-121.200.
DuBois. Grant E., to Dynapol. Steviol compounds. 4.381,402, CI.
560-6.000.
Dumoulin, Andre: See —
Walling, Jorg-Hein; Dumoulin, Andre; and Arbuthnot, Gerald R.,
4,380,965, CI. 118-621.000.
Duncan, Lee G. Device for use in human copulation. 4,381,000, CI.
128-79.000.
Dunsmuir, John G.: See —
Deckman, Harry W.; Halpem, Gerald M.; and Dunsmuir. John G.,
4.380.855, CI. 29-407.000.
Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company: See —
Biddle, Nicholas, III; and Craig, Stephen R., 4,381.545, CI.
364-479.000.
Haber, Stephen B., 4.381.311, CI. 424-275.000.
Harrell, Leon L., Jr., 4,381,375, CI. 525-359.200.
Harrell, Leon L., Jr., 4,381,378, CI. 525-375.000.
Irwin, Robert S., 4.381,389. CI. 528-128.000.
Khan. Ausat A., 4,381,384, CI. 526-206.000.
Loving, Frank A., Jr.; and Simmons, Walter J.. 4,380,948, CI.
86-20.00C.
Dupuy, Stanley T. Game apparatus. 4,381,112, CI. 273-239.000.
Durant, Graham J.: See —
Teraji, Tsutomu; Nakai, Yoshiharu; and Durant, Graham J.,
4,381,395, CI. 548-342.000.
Durboraw, Isaac N., Ill, to Motorola Inc. Clutter compensated sidelobe
cancelling communications system. 4,381,508, CI. 343-lOO.OLE.
Dutcher, Robert G., to Medtronic, Inc. "J" Stylet wire. 4,381,013, CI.
128-785.000.
Dutcher, Robert G.: See—
Sandstrom. Richard D.; Dutcher. Robert G.; and Ufford, Keith A.,
4.381,014. CI. 128-786.000.
Dynapol: See —
DuBois. Grant E., 4,381,402, CI. 560-6.000.
Swanson, Sally A.; Weinshenker, Ned M.; Wingard. Robert E.. Jr.;
and Dawson. Daniel J., 4,381.185. CI. 8-506.000.
E. F. Houghton & Company: See —
Warchol. Joseph F., 4.381.205. CI. 148-18.000.
E.G.O. Regeltechnik GmbH: See—
Goessler. Gerhard; and Koch. Friedrich. 4.381,438, CI. 219-10.49R.
E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc.: See —
Karanewsky, Donald S.; and Petrillo. Edward W., Jr.. 4,381,297,
CI. 424-200.000.
Eastern Company, The: See —
Kincaid, Herbert; and Wray, Michael L., 4,380,915, CI. 70-224.000.
Eastman Kodak Company: See —
Marsh, Harold P., 4.381.356, CI. 523-521.000.
Van Heyningen, Roger S., 4,381,342. CI. 430-496.000.
Eberle. Jurg. to Ferag AG. Conveyor apparatus, especially for printed
products. 4,381,056, CI. 198-696.000.
Eberlein, Wolfgang: See —
Schmidt, Gunther; Engel, Wolfhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Trumm-
litz, Gunter; and Engelhardt, Gunther, 4,381.303, CI.
424-252.000.
Ebi, Yutaka; and Kodama, Yutaka, to Ricoh Co., Ltd. Deflection plates
for electrostatic ink-jet printer. 4.381,513, CI. 346-75.000.
Edele. Eugen. to Kleinewefers GmbH. Method and apparatus for
controlling the pressure exerted on a material web in the roller nip of
a rolling mill. 4.380.954, CI. 100-35.000.
Edmonson, Douglas A.: See —
Yong, Samuel H.; Edmonson, Douglas A.; Evans, Leah G.; Hohle,
Deena G.; Jensen, Susan H.; O'Keefe, Leslie S.; and Laatsch,
Debra S., 4,381,315, CI. 426-94.000.
Edwards Engineering Corp.: See —
Edwards, Ray C, 4,380,912, CI. 62-506.000.
Edwards, Ray C. to Edwards Engineering Corp. Double wall tube
assembly for use in heat exchangers. 4,380,912, CI. 62-506.000.
Eguchi, Mitsuo; Yoshida, Masahito; Kato, Yoshifumi; Ichino,
Nobuyuki; and Kikuchi, Yoshimi, to Mamiya Koki Kabushiki Kaisha.
Automatic focusing device. 4,381,523, CI. 358-227.000.
Ehritt, Jurgen, to Battenfeld Maschinenfabrik GmbH. Method of and
system for injecting a fluid into a plastifled mass in an extruder.
4.381.272. CI. 264-40.300.
Eisenhauer. Virgil E.. to Carrier Corporation. Alternating current
motor protection system. 4.381.531. CI. 361-87.000.
Ejiri. Koichi, to Ricoh Co., Ltd. Picture deforming process. 4,381,547,
CI. 382-47.000.
Ekins, Roger P., to AB Fortia. Measurement of free ligands. 4,381,291,
CI. 424-1.000.
Elbe, Ludwig: See —
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Ludwig; Buchel, Karl H.; and Plempel. Man-
fred. 4.381.310. CI. 424-273.00R.
Eli Lilly and Company: See—
Dreikom. Barry A.; and Kramer, Kenneth E., 4,381,312, CI.
424-304.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
Elling, Burkhard: See —
Danz, Rudi; Stark, Wolfgang; Elling, Burkhard; Ruscher, Chris-
tian; and Schwarz, Wolfgang, 4,381,534, CI. 361-233.000.
Ellingson, Chester W., Jr., to Reese Enterprises, Inc. Coupling member
for floor covering sections. 4,381,324, CI. 428-S8.000.
Elliott, Donald; Gahres, Charles A.; and Nelson, Dorsey C, to FMC
Corporation. Particulate material handling means. 4,381,082, CI.
241-186.00A.
Elliott, William A.; and Taylor, Thomas J., to Western Electric Com-
pany, Inc. Multi-conductor flat cable. 4,381,420, CI. 174-34.000.
Elter, Claus; Kolodzey, Hans-Juergen; Schoening, Josef; Schwiers,
Hans-Georg; and Stracke, Wilfrid, to Hochtemperatur-Reaktorbau
GmbH. Radiation shield and shielded gas conduit for a reactor pres-
sure vessel. 4,381,282, CI. 376-292.000.
Elworthy, Graham J., to Protocol Engineering Limited. Mounting of
flexible printing plates. 4,380,956, CI. 101-401.100.
Emerson Electric Co.: See —
Schnyder, William J., 4,381,464, CI. 310-45.000.
Emeury, Jean-Marie; and Wimmer, Eric, to Societe Nationale Des
Poudres et Explosifs. Process for the synthesis of isosorbide mononi-
trates. 4,381,400, CI. 549-464.000.
Emhart Industries, Inc.: See —
Shedigian, Vandos; and Voyles, Gerald A., 4,381,535, CI.
361-318.000.
Smock, Steven W.; and Adams, George W., 4,381,430, CI. 200-
35.00R.
Wagle, William E., 4,381,433, CI. 200-38.00R.
Emmerich, Wolfgang, to Atlas Copco Aktiebolag. Vibration damped
rivet bucking tool. 4,380,923, CI. 72-482.000.
Endoh, Satoru; Ikeda, Mamoru; Yabe, Minoni; Igarashi, Mitsuru; and
Yamauchi, Masaaki, to HitiK:hi, Ltd. In-line type electron gun struc-
ture. 4,381,473, CI. 313-414.000.
Engel, Wolfliard: Sec-
Schmidt, Gunther; Engel, Wolfliard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Trumm-
litz, Gunter; and Engelhardt, Gunther, 4,381,303, CI.
424-252.000.
Engelhardt, Gunther: See —
Schmidt, Gunther; Engel, Wolfliard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Trumm-
litz, Gunter; and Engelhardt, Gunther. 4,381,303, CI.
424-252.000.
Enoshima, Toshio; Furuhashi, Shoji; and Tamura, Hideyuki, to Nissan
Motor Company, Limited. Knocking control system for use with
spark ignition internal combustion engine. 4,380,981, CI. 123-415.000.
Erb, John C: See-
Anderson, David M.; and Erb, John C, 4,380,953, CI. 99-549.000.
Erdt, Wolfgang: See—
Richter, Martin; and Erdt, Wolfgang, 4,380,991, CI. 125-20.000.
Erickson, Bert K., to General Electric Company. Resonator coupled
differential amplifier. 4,381,487, CI. 330-306.000.
Erickson, David E., to General Tire & Rubber Company, The. Adhe-
sion of rubber to brass. 4,381,204, CI. 148-6.310.
Erickson, John W., to Kobe, Inc. Jet electric pump. 4,381,175, CI.
417-80.000.
Erickson, Lowell H.; Merrill, Marcellus S.; and Chrisp, David. Wheel
alignment apparatus and method. 4,380,875, CI. 33-203.130.
Esche, Dieter: See —
Tholen, Paul; Lichtblau, Leo; Albers, Friedemann; and Esche,
Dieter, 4,380,971, CI. 123-41.310.
Escher Wyss GmbH: See—
Bubik, Alfred; Seider, Werner; and Hefter, Josef. 4,381,219, CI.
162-299.000.
Ethyl Development Corporation: See —
Bowers, Kenneth E.; and Markley, Charles E., 4,381,183, CI.
425-182.000.
Evans. Donald J., to Molins Machine Company, Inc. Automated cut-to-
mark control for cut-off machine. 4,380,943, CI. 83-38.000.
Evans, Leah G.: See —
Yong, Samuel H.; Edmonson, Douglas A.; Evans, Leah G.; Hohle,
Deena G.; Jensen, Susan H.; O'Keefe, Leslie S.; and Laatsch,
Debra S., 4,381,315, CI. 426-94.000.
Everett, Peter K., to Dextec Metallurgical Pty. Ltd. Production of lead
from ores and concentrates. 4,381,225, CI. 204-1 17.000.
Everson, Charles W.: See—
Brotsky, Eugene; Everson, Charles W.; and Swartz, William E.,
4.381.316, CI. 426-265.000.
Ex-Cell-O Corporation: See—
Adleman, Larry G., 4.380,871, CI. 30-360.000.
Exxon Production Research Co.: See—
Kirby, Robert A., 4,381,044, CI. 181-118.000.
Exxon Research & Engineering Co.: See—
Wylie, Roger, 4,381,419, CI. 585-828.000.
F. Jos. Lamb Company: See —
Brems, John H.; and Graham, James T., 4,380,959, CI. 104-93.000.
Fairchild Industries, Inc.: See —
Schoenberg, John, 4,381,100, CI. 251-368.000.
Falcone, Samuel J.; and McCoy, John J., to Atlantic Richfield Com-
pany. Process for the preparation of N-monosubstituted carbamic
acid esters. 4,381,403, CI. 560-24.000.
Fardal. Randolph G.; Robinson, Edward L.. Jr.; and Swanson. William
C. to International Harvester Co. Planter height and marker control
system. 4.381.036. CI. 172-2.000.
Famhill. William M.: See-
Parker, Alan; Dickinson. Peter J.; Clough. Douglas O.; and Fam-
hill, William M.. 4.380.892, CI. 57-401.000.
Farrow, Cecil W., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Multiplex transmitter apparatus. 4,381.560. CI. 370-11.000.
Fate, William A.; and Hetrick, Robert E., to Ford Motor Company.
Step function lean bum oxygen sensor. 4,381,224, CI. 204- LOOT.
Feamside, James T.: See —
Leach, Jerry G.; and Feamside, James T., 4,381,470. CI.
310-327.000.
Feather Quick Companies, Inc.: See —
Otto. Gary D., 4,380,870, CI. 30-133.000.
Fegan, Richard M.: See —
Miller, Jonathan O.; Strouse, Kerry E.; and Fegan, Richard M..
4.380,845, CI. 15-344.000.
Fenton, John W. Torque-transmitting tool assembly. 4,380,942, CI.
81-436.000.
Ferag AG: See —
Eberle, Jurg, 4,381.056. CI. 198-696.000.
Ferdinand, Irwin J.; Sylvan, Richard; and Peterson, Michael, to Hirsh
Company. Straight edge guide. 4,381,103, CI. 269-1.000.
Ferguson, Donald C, to Mohawk Data Science Corp. Programmable
printer controller with multiline buffering and overstrike feature.
4,381,553, CI. 364-900.000.
Ferrari, Giorgio: See —
Casagrande, Cesare; and Ferrari, Giorgio, 4,381,305, CI.
424-263.000.
Ferraris, Giuseppe; and Cesca, Sebastiano, to Anic S.p.A. Hydrocarbo-
naceous resins, method for their preparation and means therefor.
4,381,381, CI. 526-75.000.
Fiat Auto S.p.A.: See—
Grosso, Carlo, 4,380,974, CI. 123-179.00G.
Fifth Dimension Inc.: See —
Bitko, David, 4,381,504, CI. 340-689.000.
Filler, Raymond L.; and Vig, John R., to United Sutes of America,
Army. SC-Cut quartz resonators with suppressed b-modc. 4,381,471,
CI. 310-353.000.
Filper Corporation: See —
Anderson, David M.; and Erb, John C, 4,380,953, CI. 99-549.000.
Finkelstein, Manuel: See —
Ross, Sidney D.; and Finkelstein, Manuel, 4,381,536, CI.
361-433.000.
Finley, Joseph H., to FMC Corporation. Process for making allylic
esters of tetrachlorophthalic acid. 4,381,406, CI. 560-83.000.
Firmenich SA: See —
Pinkenhagen, Wilhelm, 4,381,410, CI. 568-448.000.
Flaig, Hans: See —
Kuppers, Frieder; Scherzinger, Bemhard; Assmus, Friedrich; and
Flaig, Hans, 4,381,481, CI. 318-696.000.
Flammini, E>ominick J. Long life purse seine ring. 4,380,882, CI.
43-14.000.
Flanagan, Joseph E.: See —
Grant, Louis R.; and Flanagan, Joseph E., 4,381,206, CI.
149-22.000.
Flo-Con Systems, Inc.: See —
King, Patrick D., 4,381,102. CI. 266-44.000.
Floreancig, Antoine, to Uranium Pechiney Ugine Kuhlmann. Process
for the selective separation of uranium and molybdenum which are
contained in an amino solvent. 4,381,286, CI. 423-9.000.
Flowers, Dcrvin L.; and Thompson, Sylvia B., to Motorola, Inc. Partial
vacuum boron diffusion process. 4,381,213, CI. 156-606.000.
FMC Corporation: See —
Elliott, Donald; Gahres, Charles A.; and Nelson, Doney C.
4,381,082. CI. 241-186.00A.
Finley. Joseph H., 4,381,406, CI. 560-83.000.
Fohl, Artur, to REPA Fcinstanzwerk GmbH. Re-tightener with pyro-
technic propellant charge for safety belt automatic wind-up devices.
4,381,084, CI. 242-107.000.
Ford, James A.; and Haarer, Steven R., to Cooper Industries, Inc.
Traverse rod for a vertical blind. 4,381.029, CI. 160-172.000.
Ford Motor Company: See —
Fate. William A.; and Hetrick. Robert E., 4.381.224. CI. 204-l.OOT.
Giardini. Dante S.. 4.380.990. CI. 125-20.000.
Foumier, Priscilla J.: See —
Foumier, Robert L.; and Foumier, Priscilla J., 4,381,317, CI.
426-302.000.
Foumier, Robert L.; and Foumier, Priscilla J. Method of making a
pizza. 4,381,317, CI. 426-302.000.
Foxboro Company, The: See —
Sgourakes, George E.; and Lefebvre, Paul J., 4,380,935, CI.
73-861.240.
Franchi, Peter R.: See—
Rotman, Walter; and Franchi, Peter R., 4,381,509, CI. 343-754.000.
Frankila, John W.: See —
Stephenson, Robert L.; and Frankila, John W., 4,381.085. Q.
242-107.300.
Franz. James H., Jr.: See—
Wesling. Henry J.; and Franz, James H.. Jr.. 4.381,479, CI.
318-317.000.
Freling, Melvin, to United Technologies Corporation. Coolable rotor
blade assembly for an axial flow rotary machine. 4,381,173, CI. 416-
96.00A.
French, David J.; and Hirsch, Wayne L., to French-Hirsch, Inc. Bicy-
cle tote cart. 4,381,117, CI. 280-204.000.
French-Hirsch, Inc.: See-
French, David J.; and Hirsch, Wayne L., 4.381.117. CI.
280-204.000.
Fricke. Jobst P.; and Muller, Ulrich R. Dynamic volume expander
varying as a function of ambient noise level. 4,381,488, CI. 333-14.000.
Fritts, David H.; and Leonard. John F.. to United Sutes of America,
Air Force. Battery electrode hardness tester. 4.380,926, CI. 73-83.000.
1029 O.G.— 47
iPI 8
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Froncrak, Frank J.; and Hunt, John F., to United Sutes of America,
Agriculture. Auxiliary torque back-up roll. 4,381,023, CI.
144-365.000.
Frost, Harold M.; Frout, James H.; and Reed, Robert W., to United
States of America, Navy. Apparatus and method for quantitative
nondestructive wire testing. 4,380,931, CI. 73-643.000.
Frye, Kenneth G.: See—
Guild, Gerald A.; and Frye, Kenneth G., 4,380,945, CI. 83-482.000.
Frye, Robiert C; and Leamy, Harry J., to Bell Telephone Laboratories,
Incorporated. Method of forming dielectrically isolated silicon semi-
conductor materials utilizing porous silicon formation. 4,380,865, CI.
29-576.00W.
Fuchs, Rainer; Maurer, Fritz; Friesnitz, Uwe; Riebel, Hans-Jochem;
and Klauke, Erich, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. 4-Fluoro-3-phenoxy-
benzyl ethers. 4,381,412, CI. 568-637.000.
Fuderer, Andrija, to Union Carbide Corporation. Pressure swing ad-
sorption process and system. 4,381,189, CI. 55-26.000.
Fujiki, Michiya: See —
Kaino, Toshikuni; Fujiki, Michiya; Nara, Shigeo; and Oikawa,
Shigeru. 4,381,269, CI. 264-1.500.
Fujioka, Masahiko, to Tokyo Shibaura Electric Co.. Ltd. Enclosed-type
magnetic disc recording and/or reproducing apparatus. 4,381,528, CI.
360-97.000.
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See —
Teraji, Tsutomu; Sakane, lCk»uo; and Goto, Jiro, 4,381,299, CI.
424-246.000.
Fujitsu Limited: See —
Mori, Hanihisa; Ogawa, Tsutooiu; and Matsumoto, Takashi,
4,381,202. CI. 148-1.500.
Sakurai, Junji, 4,381,C01, CI. 148-1.500.
Fukami, Teruki: See —
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,380,934, CI. 73-861.230.
Fukuda, Norisuke: See —
Miyazawa, Susumu; and Fukuda, Norisuke, 4,381,439, CI. 219-
10.55B.
Fukushima, Masao. to Nissan Motor Company. Limited. Engine mount-
ing structure. 4,381,043, CI. 180-300.000.
Fukuyama, Toshifumi; and Onji, Norio, to Omron Tateisi Electronics
Co. Photoelectric switch. 4,381,446, CI. 250-2 14.00R.
Fulmer, Glenn E.; and Wood, Louis L., to W. R. Grace & Co. Adhesive
and resulting nonwoven fabric. 4,381,332, CI. 428-288.000.
Furuhashi, Shoji: See —
Enoshima, Toshio; Furuhashi, Shoji; and Tamura, Hideyuki,
4,380.981, CI. 123-415.000.
Furusato, Masayasu: See —
Sakurai, Hisaya; Katayama, Yoshihiko; Ikegami, Tadashi; and
Furusato, Masayasu. 4.381.252, CI. 252-429.00B.
Futter, Friedrich P. Futter chuck. 4,381.116, CI. 279-62.000.
Gahres, Charles A. See —
Elliott, Donald; Gahres, Charles A.; and Nelson, Dorsey C,
4,381,082, CI. 241-186.00A.
Gandy, James, to Signtech Inc. Illuminated sign assembly. 4,380,880,
CI. 40-564.000.
Gandy. Richard G.: See —
Novotny, Rudolf J.; and Gandy, Richard G., 4,381,034, CI.
166-292.000.
Gantt, Gary R.: See—
Bumey, Harry S., Jr.; and Gantt, Gary R., 4,381,230. CI.
204-98.000.
Gardner, Richard E., to Cameron Iron Works, Inc. Rotary indexing
Uble. 4.380.939, CI. 74-813.00L.
Garganese, Dino L.: See —
Garganese, Richard S., 4,381,158, CI. 401-111.000.
Garganese, Richard S., to Garganese, Dino L. Writing instrument.
4,381,158, CI. 401-111.000.
Gamer, Robert; and Whitehead, Michael J., to Ciba-Geigy Corpora-
tion. (N-Substituted benzoyI)haIobenzoic acid anhydrides. 4,381,266,
CI. 260-546.000.
Gamer, William G.. to United States of America. Army. Missile steer-
ing system using a segmented target detector and steering by roll and
pitch maneuvers. 4,381,090. CI. 244-3.160.
Garrett Corporation. The: See —
Stokes, Richard F.; Timm, James D.; LaCroix, Stephen R.; and
Adams. Milton R.. 4,380,893. CI. 60-39.070.
GCA Corporation: See —
Jeunehommc. Michel L.. 4.381.452, CI. 250-392.000.
Gebr. von der Wettem GmbH: See—
von der Wettem, Walter; and Albrecht, Harald, 4,381,357, CI.
524-68.000.
Gebrudler Junghans GmbH: See —
Kuppers, Frieder; Scherzinger, Bemhard; Assmus, Friedrich; and
Raig, Hans. 4,381.481, CI. 318-696.000.
General Electric Company: See —
Barkan, Philip, 4,381,435, CI. 200-144.00B.
Berkowitz, Ami E.; and Walter. John L., 4,381,244, CI. 252-62.520.
Cusano, Dominic A., 4.381.474, CI. 315-13.0ST.
Cushing, Donald S., 4,381,432, CI. 20O-38.00B. •
Erickson, Bert K., 4,381,487. CI. 330-306.000.
Hayden, Stephen C, 4.381.271. CI. 264-29.500.
Liebermann. Howard H.. 4.381.197, CI. 419-24.000.
Rosenquist, Niles R., 4,381,358, CI. 524-114.000.
Ryang, Hong-Son. 4,381,396, CI. 549-237.000.
Singh, Raj N.. 4,381,216. CI. 156-667.000.
Vohr. John H., 4.381,128, CI. 384-154.000.
General Electric Company Limited, The: Sec-
Christie, Ian R. A.; Croxall, Derek F.; and Isherwood, Brian J.,
4,381,214, CI. 456-623.00Q.
General Motors Corporation: See—
Gregoire, Gabriel; Robles, Vincent; and Alvarez, Pedro, 4,381,047,
CI. 188-71.800.
Powell, Thomas M., 4,380,975, CI. 123-179.00H.
Yu, Mason K., 4,381,172. CI. 415-205.000.
General Refractories Company: See-
Henry. Francis W., Jr.; Anthonis. Henry E., Ill; and Banerjee,
Subrata. 4.381.355. CI. 523-140.000.
General Tire & Rubber Company. The: See—
Erickson. David E.. 4.381.204, CI. 148-6.310.
Genese. Joseph N., to Abbott Laboratories. Continuous low flow rate
fluid dispenser. 4,381,006, CI. 128-2I8.00A.
Georgacopoulos, Costas N.; and Smith, Curtis P., to Upjohn Company,
The. Flame retardant tertiary polymer blend. 4,381,364, CI.
524-373.000.
Georgia-Pacific Corporation: See —
Holmquist, Howard W., 4,381.369, CI. 524-841.000.
Gerber Garment Technology, Inc.: See —
Gerber, H. Joseph; and Rich, Leonard G., 4,380,944, CI. 83-49.000.
Gerber, H. Joseph; and Rich. Leonard G., to Gerber Garment Technol-
ogy, Inc. Method for cutting sheet material with variable gain closed
loop. 4,380,944, CI. 83-49.000.
Gerber, Rene: See —
Morizot, Jean P.; and Gerber, Rene, 4,381,475, CI. 315-39.300.
Geremia, Leo F., to Tri-tech, Inc. Switching device. 4,381,437, CI.
200-153.0LB.
Gemez, Alain, to Compagnie Europeenne pour I'Equipement Menager
"CEPEM". Fluidization unit. 4,381,018, CI. 137-592.000.
Gewartowski, Steve A.; and O'Brien, Dennis E., to UOP Inc. Catalytic
dehydrogenation process. 4,381,418, CI. 585-655.000.
Giardini, Dante S., to Ford Motor Company. Portable core drill cutter
for hard brittle sheets. 4,380,990, CI. 125-20.000.
Gibson, Charles A.; Ahmed, Moinuddin; and Habenschuss, Michael, to
Union Carbide Corporation. Process for the treatment of organic
amine compositions. 4,381,223, CI. 203-91.000.
Gillich, Thomas N.; and Walls, John E., to American Hoechst Corpora-
tion. Electrochemical treatment of aluminum in non-aqueous poly-
meric polybasic organic acid containing electrolytes. 4,381,226, CI.
204-14.00N.
Gjertsen, Robert K., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Fuel assembly for
a nuclear reactor. 4,381,284, CI. 376-364.000.
Glasbrenner, Max: See —
Heusser, Jean; and Glasbrenner, Max, 4,381,313, CI. 424-308.000.
Gloor, Roland. ThermosUtically controlled cold and hot water mixer.
4,381,073, CI. 236-12.00A.
Gnest. Horst-Guenter; Granzow, Wolfgang-Dieter; Hartkopf, Hans-
Otto; and Zillmer, Adalbert, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Appara-
tus for determining the signal term to be transmitted to a railroad
traction vehicle. 4,381,094, CI. 246-182.00R.
Goessler, Gerhard; and Koch, Friedrich, to E.G.O. Regeltechnik
GmbH. Electric control apparatus for controlling inductive heating.
4,381,438, CI. 219-10.49R.
Goff, Melvin J.: See—
Goff, Otis W.; and Goff, Melvin J., 4,381,105, CI. 269-210.000.
Goff, Otis W.; and Goff, Melvin J., to Hueschen, Gordon W. Clamp.
4,381,105, CI. 269-210.000.
Goko, Nobuaki: See —
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga. Yoshinori; Suzuki, Masatoshi; Goko,
Nobuaki; and Nishihara, Yasuhiro, 4,381,383, CI. 526-142.000.
Golden, Ronald, to Champion International Corporation. Desensitiza-
tion system for carbonless copy paper. 4,381,120, CI. 282-27.500.
Goldstein, Gideon: See —
Kung, Patrick C; and Goldstein, Gideon, 4,381,295, CI. 424-85.000.
Goldstein, Howard E.: See —
United States of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; Stewart, David A.; Goldstein, Howard E.; and Leiser,
Daniel B., 4,381,333, CI. 428-312.600.
Goldstein, Norman P.: See —
Chen, Cheng L.; Goldstein, Norman P.; and Todt, William H.,
4,381,451, CI. 250-390.000.
Gomaa, Mohamed A. M.: See —
Griffith, Richard V.; Hankins, Dale E.; Tomasino, Luigi; and
Gomaa, Mohamed A. M., 4,381,454, CI. 250-472.100.
Goodale, Thomas C, to GTE Laboratories Incorporated. Analog-to-
digital converting apparatus. 4,381,498, CI. 34a-347.0AD.
Goodyear Aerospace Corporation: See —
Grossman, Richard L., 4,381,049, CI. 188-72.700.
Gordon, Arnold Z.: See —
Hardee, Kenneth L.; Gordon, Amold Z.; Pyle, Charles B.; and Sen,
Rajat K., 4,381,290, CI. 423-478.000.
Goto, Jiro: See —
Teraji, Tsutomu; Sakane, Kazuo; and Goto, Jiro, 4,381,299, CI.
424-246.000.
Gotomyo, Yasuo; and Nakagawa, Yukihiro, to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd.;
and Nakagawa Sangyo Co., Ltd. Surface treated glass-wool mat and
the method for making the same. 4,381,330, CI. 428-218.000.
Graham, James T.: See —
Brems, John H.; and Graham, James T., 4,380,959, CI. 104-93.000.
Graham, Roy R., to PPG Industries, Inc. Aqueous dispersion of glass
fibers and method and composition for producing same. 4,381,199, CI.
106-186.000.
Granges Metallverken Aktiebolag: See—
Jonason, Karl G., 4,380,854, CI. 29-I57.30A.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
Grant, Louis R.; and Flanagan, Joseph E., to United States of America,
Anny. Advanced solid reactants for H2/D2 generation. 4,38 1,206, CI.
149-22.(XX).
Granzow, Wolfgang-Dieter: See —
Gnest, Horst-Guenter; Granzow, Wolfgang-Dieter; Hartkopf,
Hans-Otto; and ZUlmer, Adalbert, 4.381.094, CI. 246-182.00R.
Grau, Thomas G.: See —
Anselmo. Donald R.; and Grau. Thomas G., 4.381,134, CI. 339-
22O.0OR.
Greaux, Edward. Fishing signal apparatus. 4.380,883, CI. 43-17.000.
Gregoire, Gabriel; Robles, Vincent; and Alvarez, Pedro, to General
Motors Corporation. Piston anti-knock back assemblies. 4,381.047.
CI. 188-71.800.
Griffith. Richard V.; Hankins, Dale E.; Tomasino, Luigi; and Gomaa,
Mohamed A. M.. to United States of America, Energy. Dose equiva-
lent neutron dosimeter. 4,381.454. CI. 250-472.100.
Grimard, Jean P. Filter bag for vacuum cleaner. 4.381,192. CI.
55-376.000.
Grimaud. Edouard; and Troussier. Maurice, to Uranium Pechiney
Ugine Kuhlmann. Process for the preparation of high density ion
exchange resins and ion exchange resins thus obtained. 4.381,350, CI.
521-31.000.
Grimm, William G.; and Pott, Ronald W. Post support bracket assem-
bly. 4.381.160. CI. 403-230.000.
Grisar, J. Martin; Schnettler. Richard A.; and Dage, Richard C, to
Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals Inc. 4-Aminomethyl-5-acyl-l,3-dihy-
dro-2H-imidazol-2-ones. 4,381.393. CI. 544-370.000.
Groom, Jay L.. Jr.; Ferine, John D.; Snyder. John W.; and Vair, Gary
G., to International Business Machines Corporation. Apparatus and
method for visually presenting analytical representations of digital
signals. 4,381,563. CI. 371-29.000.
Grossman, James M.; and January. Daniel B.. to Hunter Engineering
Company. Apparatus and method for guiding vehicle wheel align-
ment adjustments to known alignment requirements. 4,381,548, CI.
364-551.000.
Grosso. Carlo, to Fiat Auto S.p.A. Fuel supply system for an internal
combustion engine. 4,380,974, CI. 123-179.00G.
Grove Valve and Regulator Company: See —
Van Scoy. Davis A.. 4,380.936. CI. 73-861.620.
Growers Ice Company: See —
Crabb, Richard V., Jr.. 4.380,908. CI. 62-64.000.
Gruber, Werner: See —
Ritter, Wolfgang; and Gruber. Werner. 4,381,386, CI. 526-239.000.
Grunewald. Peter; Jung. Peter; and von Musil. Rudolf, to Kraftwerk
Union Aktiengesellschaft. Multiplanar conductor bar for electric
machines, especially for turbo-generators. 4.381.467, CI. 310-213.000.
GTE Laboratories Incorporated: See —
Goodale, Thomas C. 4.381.498, CI. 340-347.0AD.
GTE Products Corporation: See —
Leong, Henry. 4.381.063. CI. 220-242.000.
Gudbrandsen. Hans, to A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfabrikker. Method of
making a composite profile. 4,380.858, CI. 29-418.000.
Guibert, Raul, to Sunset Ltd. Counter-top unit for heating packaged
food. 4.381.442, CI. 219-400.000.
Guibert, Raul, to Sunset Ltd. Portable unit for heating packaged food.
4.381.443, CI. 219-400.000.
Guild. Gerald A.; and Frye. Kenneth G.. to Beloit Corporation. Pread-
justable web slitter and non-deflecting mounting therefor. 4,380,945,
CI. 83-482.000.
Guionie, Paul; and Roudier, Rene, to Paumellerie Electrique. Stop
device for a pivotal door, in particular for an automobile vehicle
door. 4.380,848, CI. 16-85.000.
Gulakov, Sergei V.: See —
Leschinsky, Leonid K.; Gulakov. Sergei V.; Stepnov. Xenofont X.;
Nosovsky. Boris I.; Bendrik, Valery G.; Dubinsky, Boris E.;
Isirov. Dmitry I.; and Zelensky. Viktor E.. 4.380.852, CI.
29-121.200.
Gulf Research & Development Company: See —
Beach. David L.; and Selwitz, Charles M., 4,381.414, CI.
585-10.000.
Gulf & Western Manufacturing Company: See—
Ritzenthaler. Donald R.; and Bottelson, Thomas J., 4.381,431. CI.
200-38.00R.
Gunneman, Paul, to Ruti-Te Strake B.V. Handtool for threading yams
in yam-processing apparatus. 4,381.021. CI. 139-380.000.
Gupta. Gokal C: See—
Cheal, William E.; Gupta, Gokal C; Sepahmansour. Faramarz; and
Aggarwal, Avnish K., 4,381,427, CI. 179-2.0DP.
Gurewich. Victor: See —
Huasin, Syed S.; Lipinski. Boguslaw; and Gurewich. Victor,
4.381,346. CI. 435-215.000.
Gurov, Evgeny I.: See —
Verty. Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.; Gurov, Evgeny I.; Zub-
kov, Vitaly S.; Obrezkov. Alexandr I.; Tabakov, Vladimir P.;
Khvoschinsky. Boris B.; and Judin, Vladimir N., 4,381,124, CI.
299-2.000.
Guzman, Pedro T.: See —
Pajer, Raymond T.; and Guzman. Pedro T., 4,381,501. CI. 340-
36S.00R.
Haag, Horst-guenter: See—
Kampf, Wolfgang; Streck. Roland; and Haag, Horst-guenter.
4.381,377. CI. 525-375.000.
Haarer, Steven R.: See-
Ford, James A.; and Haarer, Steven R., 4,381,029, CI. 160-172.000.
Habenschuss, Michael: See —
Gibson, Charles A.; Ahmed. Moinuddin; and Habenschuss, Mi-
chael, 4,381.223, CI. 203-91.000.
Haber, Stephen B.. to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company.
Antiinflammatory 4,5-diaryl-a-(polyhalomethyl>-2-thiopheneme-
thanols. 4.381.311, CI. 424-275.000.
Hahnle. Reinhard: See —
Buhler, Ulrich; Comelius, Dieter; Lowenfeld, Rudolf; Kosubek,
Uwe; Hahnle, Reinhard; and Schickfluss, Rudolf, 4,381.262, CI.
260-207. 100.
Hair, Thomas; and Baxter, Ivor R., to Marconi Co. Ltd., The. Range
responsive apparatus. 4,381,149, CI. 356-4.000.
Hall. George R.. Jr.: See—
Bohl. Thomas L.; Hall, George R., Jr.; and Zimmerlin, Sharon L.,
4,381,153, CI. 356-437.000.
Hall. Robert E., to United Aircraft Products, Inc. Tube loading appara-
tus. 4.380.868. CI. 29-726.000.
Haller. Ingo: See —
Regel. Erik; Buchel. Karl H.; Haller, Ingo; and Plempel. Manfred.
4.381.306. CI. 424-269.000.
Halliburton Company: See —
Hcrrin, Sam W.. 4.381,101, CI. 254-9.00R.
Halpem, Gerald M : See—
Deckman. Harry W.; Halpem. Gerald M.; and Dunsmuir, John G.,
4,380,855, CI. 29-407.000.
Hamanaka, Katsuhiko: See —
Yoshida, Koichi; Iwaisako. Toshiyuki; Masamoto. Junzo;
Hamanaka. Katsuhiko; and Komaki, Hajime, 4,381.397, CI.
549-368.000.
Hamm, Nicholas, to Deere & Company. Tool mount assembly method.
4,380,853. CI. 29-148.300.
Hammond, Ogden H., Ill, to Hetra Corporation, The. Method of and
apparatus for nondestructively dctermming the composition of an
unknown material sample. 4,381,154. CI. 374-43.000.
Hankins, Dale E.: See—
Griffith, Richard V.; Hankins, Dale E.; Tomasino. Luigi; and
Gomaa, Mohamed A. M., 4.381,454, CI. 250-472 100
Hanley, John P. Human reproduction indexing device. 4,381,121, CI.
283-l.OOA.
Hanning Elektro-Werke GmbH & Co.: See—
Haverkamp, Hans; and Wistinghausen, Walter, 4,381.048, CI.
188-171.000.
Hara, Toshizo; Sutoh, Shinji; and Kojima, Toshio, to Diesel Kiki Co.,
Ltd. Apparatus for controlling a blower motor. 4,381,480, CI.
318-471.000.
Harada, Masashi: See —
Leistner, William E.; Minagawa, Motonobu; Tsuruga, Kouji; and
Harada, Masashi, 4,381,360, CI. 524-178.000.
Harada, Nozomu, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Solid
state image sensor. 4.381,517, CI. 357-30.000.
Hardee, Kenneth L.; Gordon, Arnold Z.; Pyle. Charles B.; and Sen,
Rajat K., to Diamond Shamrock Corporation. Method and catalyst
for making chlorine dioxide. 4,381,290, CI. 423-478.000.
Hardt, Dietrich K. A., deceased (by Hardt, Helga, heir); Mietzsch,
Fritz; and Billinger, Otto, to Bayer AktiengesellschaA. Polyvinyl
chloride moulding composition. 4.381. 361. CI. 524-265.000.
Hardt. Helga, heir: See —
Hardt, Dietrich K. A., deceased; Mietzsch, Fritz; and Billinger,
Otto, 4.381.361, CI. 524-265.000.
Hargreaves, Charles R.; and Price, Stephen J., to Honeywell Inc.
Method of bonding routing bands on projectiles. 4,381,319, CI.
427-34.000.
Harper, James M. E.: See —
Cuomo, Jerome J.; and Harper, James M. E.. 4,381.453, CI.
250-398.000.
Harper. Raymond: See —
Barnes. Robert S.; and Harper, Raymond, 4,380,907. CI 62-52.000
Harrell. Leon L., Jr., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company
Method for vulcanizing ethylene/acrylic or vinyl ester/-
glycidyl(meth) acrylate copolymer with piperazinium diphenoxide
salt of chloro-substituted phenol. 4,381,375, CI. 525-359 200.
Harrell, Leon L., Jr., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company
Method for vulcanizing ethylene/acrylic or vinyl ester/glycidyl(-
meth)acrylate copolymer with piperazinium dicarboxylate salt and
composition for same. 4.381,378, CI. 525-375.000.
Harrington, Edward R.: See —
Bolen, Charles E.; Harrington, Edward R.; Marzocchi, Alfred; and
Roberts, Michael G., 4,381,200, CI. 106-282.000.
Harsco Corporation: See—
Koster, Richard A.; and Hoffman, James S., 4.381.164, CI.
414-416.000.
Hartkopf, Hans-Otto: See—
Gnest, Horst-Guenter; Granzow, Wolfgang -Dieter; Hartkopf,
Hans-Otto; and Zillmer, Adalbert, 4,381.094, CI. 246-182.00R.
Harvath. Rickie. Hair cutting guide. 4,381,015, CI. I32-45.00R.
Hasegawa. Shumpei: See —
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa. Shumpet,
4.380.985, CI. 123-440.000.
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei,
4.380,988, CI. 123-571.000.
Hastings, Donald R.. to Nordaon Corporation. Nozzle assembly for
spray coaung systems. 4,381.081, CI. 239-707.000.
Hasuo. Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Suzuki, Masatoshi; Goko.
Nobuaki; and Nishihara, Yasuhiro. to MiUubishi Chemical Industries
Limited. Process for producing polyolefms. 4,381.383. CI.
526-142.000.
PI 10
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
HaufTe, William L.: See—
Daghe. Joseph L.; HaufTe, William L.; and Terrill, Garrett D..
4,381.020. CI. 138-99.000.
Haverkamp, Hans; and Wistinghausen, Walter, to Hanning Elektro-
Werke GmbH & Co. Electric motor with automatically acting brake.
4.381.048. CI. 188-171.000.
Hayden, Stephen C. to General Electric Company. Use of fired fibrous
graphite in fabricating polycrystalline diamond and/or cubic boron
nitride/silicon carbide/silicon composite bodies. 4,381.271, CI.
264-29.500.
Hayes. Thomas, to Precision Valve Corporation. Continuous discharge
aerosol actuator. 4,381,065, CI. 222-153.000.
Healy, Keelin E. Stepped surgical retractor. 4,380,999, CI. 128-20.000.
Hefter. Josef: See—
Bubik. Alfred; Seider. Werner; and Hefter, Josef, 4,381,219, CI.
162-299.000.
Hegler, Ralph-Peter: See—
Hegler, Wilhelm; and Hegler, Ralph-Peter, 4,381,276, CI.
264-508.000.
Hegler, Wilhelm; and Hegler, Ralph-Peter, to Hegler, Wilhelm. Process
and apparatus for the fabrication of a flat-shaped hollow body.
4,381,276, CI. 264-508.000.
Heilweil, Israel J.: See—
Audeh, Costandi A.; Heilweil, Israel J.; White, James R.; and Yan,
Tsoung Y., 4,381,234. CI. 208-327.000.
Heinhuis. William H.: See—
Bunner. Matthew R.; and Heinhuis, William H., 4,381,328, CI.
428-171.000.
Heinle, Karl-W., to Audi NSU Auto Union Aktiengesellschaft. Appara-
tus for measuring the braking time of a motor vehicle. 4,381,555, CI.
365-78.000.
Heinrich Wunder GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Langbauer, Josef, 4,381,070, CI. 224-321.000.
Helleteberger, Harald: See —
Waizer, Walter; Helletsberger, Harald; Kriegshaber, Christof; and
Selgrad, Volker, 4,381,188, CI. 51-298.000.
Hemmer, Valentine J.; and Piscitelli, R. Amelia, to Bendix Corporation,
The. Socket type conuct assembly. 4,381,135, CI. 339-258.00R.
Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft auf Aktien: See—
Bremus, Norbert; Dieckelmann, Gerhard; Jeromin, Lutz; Rupilius,
Wolfgang; and Schutt, Hartwig, 4,381,407, CI. 560-263.000.
Ritter, Wolfgang; and Grubcr, Werner, 4,381,386, CI. 526-239.000.
Struve, Alfred, 4,381,264, CI. 260-405.600.
Henry, Francis W., Jr.; Anthonis, Henry E., Ill; and Banerjee, Subrata,
to General Refractories Company. Resorcinol polymer bonded
uphoie mix and specialty materials. 4,381,355, CI. 523-140.000.
Henry, Helen G.: See—
MacDonald, David J.; and Henry, Helen G., 4,381,287, CI.
423-70.000.
Henwebcor, Incorporated: See —
Rumpel. Donald D., 4,381,054, CI. 193-35.0MD.
Herrin, Sam W., to Halliburton Company. Draft gear removal appara-
tus. 4,381,101, CI. 254-9.00R.
Herriott, Donald M.: See —
Whitaker, Larry D.; and Herriott, Donald M., 4,381,031, CI.
165-39.000.
Hertzler, Merle E.; and Stelzer, James S., to RCA Corporation. Appa-
ratus for checking for electrical frit breakdown in kinescopes.
4,381,486, CI. 324-404.000.
Hervig, Harold C; Kehr, Dieter; and Krabs, Raymond, to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company. Multi-core cable connection
for medium voltage cable. 4.381,424, CI. 174-73.00R.
Herzog, RoUie R.: See-
Stamp, Custis L., Jr.; and Herzog, Rollie R., 4,381,549, CI.
364-557.000.
Hetra Corporation, The: See —
Hammond, Ogden H., Ill, 4,381,154. CI. 374-43.000.
Hetrick, Robert E.: See-
Fate, William A.; and Hetrick. Robert E., 4,381.224, CI. 204-l.OOT.
Heusser, Jean; and Glasbrenner, Max. to Hommel AG. Phenylalkanoic
compounds and therapeutic use thereof. 4,381.313. CI. 424-308.000.
Hewlett-Packard Company: See —
Butler, Keith C. 4.381.512, CI. 346-33.00R.
Leach, Jerry G.; and Feamside, James T.. 4.381.470, CI.
310-327.000.
Reach. Roy W.; Kahn. William M.; and Shapiro. David, 4.381,554,
CI. 364-900.000.
Hi-Shear Corporation: See —
Olander, Donald E.; and Petersen, Donald W., 4.381,207, CI.
149-40.000.
Hickman. John E.: See —
Bunten, Roland J.. Ill; and Hickman, John E., 4,381.543, CI.
364-200.000.
Hikiba, Masayuki: See—
Sakauchi, Yoshitada; and Hikiba, Masayuki, 4.381,472, CI.
313-331.000.
Hildebrandt, Darrell E.. to W. R. Grace & Co. Method of producing
binderless zeolite extrudates. 4.381.2S6. Q. 2S2-4SS.00Z.
Hillman, Patrick E., to PPG Industries, Inc. Halogenation of butadiene
polymers in mixed solvents. 4.381.374. CI. 525-356.000.
Hilti Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Richter, Martin; and Erdt, Wolfgang, 4,380,991, CI. 125-20.000.
Hinrichs, David K. Illusionary wheel cover structure. 4.381.537, CI.
362-78.000.
Hirsch, Wayne L.: See —
French, David J.; and Hirsch, Wayne L., 4,381,117, CI.
280-204.000.
Hirsh Company: See —
Ferdinand, Irwin J.; Sylvan, Richard; and Peterson, Michael.
4,381,103, CI. 269-1.000.
Hispano-Suiza: See —
Renoux, Lucien H., 4,380,950, CI. 89-33.0BA.
Hitachi Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Owada, Nobuyoshi; and Tominaga, Tamotsu. 4,381,530, CI.
360-130.230.
HiUchi. Ltd.: See—
Endoh. Satoru; Ikeda, Mamoru; Yabe, Minoru; Igarashi, Mitsuru;
and Yamauchi. Masaaki. 4.381,473. CI. 313-414.000.
Hotta, Masao; Maio, Kenji; Yokozawa, Norio; and Nagaishi.
Hiromi. 4,381.495, CI. 340-347.0DA.
Saijo, Takashige; Ikeda. Haruo; Nakamura. Kiyoshi; and Koike.
Shigeyoshi. 4,381,478, CI. 318-135.000.
Sakauchi, Yoshitada; and Hikiba, Masayuki, 4,381,472, CI.
313-331.000.
Uchida, Fumihiko; Sato, Kazuo; and Takahashi, Soji. 4,380.917. CI.
72-8.000.
Hochtemperatur-Reaktorbau GmbH: See —
Elter, Claus; Kolodzey, Hans-Juergen; Schoening, Josef; Schwiers.
Hans-Georg; and Stracke, Wilfried, 4.381.282, CI. 376-292.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Dallmann, Hermann; and Palmen, Mans J.. 4,381.329, CI.
428-204.000.
MuUer, Gerhard; and Sell, Gunther, 4,381,268, CI. 261-109.000.
Sulzbach, Reinhard A., 4,381,387, CI. 526-247.000.
Hoefke, Wolfgang: See —
Koppe, Herbert; Mentrup, Anton; Renth, Ernst-Otto; Schromm,
Kurt; Hoefle, Wolfgang; and Muacevic, Gojko, 4,381,309, CI.
424-273.00B.
Hoffman, James S.: See —
Koster, Richard A.; and Hoffman, James S., 4,381,164, CI.
414416.000.
Hohle, Deena G.: See —
Yong, Samuel H.; Edmonson, Douglas A.; Evans, Leah G.; Hohle,
Deena G.; Jensen, Susan H.; O'Keefe, Leslie S.; and Laatsch,
Debra S., 4,381,315, CI. 426-94000.
Holmquist, Howard W., to Georgia-Pacific Corporation. Drilling fluid
containing a fluid loss control agent of a sulfonated phenol-formalde-
hyde-phenol resin. 4,381,369. CI. 524-841.000.
Holstein, Edward. Device for selectively controlling the number of
operative cylinders in multi-cylinder engines. 4,380,977. CI. 123-
198.00F.
Homma, Itomi; and Okada, Noriko. to Kao Soap Co., Ltd. Shampoo
composition employing anionic phosphoric acid ester surfactant and
cationic polymer. 4,381,259, CI. 252-542.000.
Hommel AG: See —
Heusser, Jean; and Glasbrenner, Max, 4,381,313. CI. 424-308.000.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei.
Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei,
Price. Stephen J.. 4.381,319, CI.
4,380,932, CI.
4,380.985, CI. 123-440.000.
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka,
4,380,988, CI. 123-571.000.
Honeywell Inc.: See —
Hargreaves, Charles R.; and
427-34.000.
Mott. Richard C; and Stamm, Thomas A.,
73-749.000.
Hood, Larry M.; and West, Doy M., to Aztech International. Ltd.
Multi-stage indirect-direct evaporative cooling process and appara-
tus. 4.380,910. CI. 62-91.000.
Hoover Company. The: See —
Maurer. Edgar A.. 4,380.846, CI. 15-391.000.
Hopkins Manufacturing Corporation: See —
Thomas, Robert R., 4.380.841, CI. 15-210.00B.
Horeschi. Giancarlo: See —
Barozzi. Gian P.; and Horeschi, Giancarlo. 4,381,156. CI.
400-296.100.
Horvath. Stephen J.; and Wilcox. Steven R., to Brandt, Inc. Method
and apparatus for evaluating and sorting sheets in a high speed man-
ner. 4,381.447. CI. 250-223.00R.
Hosch. Ludwig; and Ittmann, Guenther. to Rohm GmbH. Method for
covering ultraviolet sources. 4,381.136. CI. 350-1.100.
Hosoi. Ryosuke. Drill having cutting edges with the greatest curvature
at the central portion thereof 4.381.162. CI. 408-l.OOR.
Hosokawa, Hirotami: See —
Kai, Isao; Hosokawa, Hirotami; and Oda, Takayuki, 4,381.354, CI.
523-139.000.
Hotta, Masao; Maio. Kenji; Yokozawa, Norio; and Nagaishi, Hiromi. to
Hitachi. Ltd. Digital-to-analog converter with error compensation.
4.381.495, CI. 340-347.0DA.
Housh, Riitta-Maija: See —
Aaltonen, Olh; Alkio, Martti; Avela, Eero; and Housh, RiitU-
Maija, 4,381,370, CI. 525-54.210.
Howard, Frank D.: See —
Bieber, Charles P.; and Howard, Frank D., 4,381,292, CI. 424-1.000.
Hradel, Joseph R. Simultaneous recovery of thermal values and organic
materials n-om solid carbonaceous fuels and waste disposal process.
4,381.035, CI. 166-307.000.
Huasin, Syed S.; Lipinski, Boguslaw; and Gurewich, Victor. Isolation
of plasminogen activators useful as therapeutic and diagnostic agents.
4,381.346, CI. 435-215.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
Hueschen, Gordon W.: See— ^
Goff, Otis W.; and GofT. Mclvin J., 4,381,105, CI. 269-210.000.
Huff, Joel R.; King, Stella W.; and Saari, Walfred S., to Merck & Co.,
Inc. (6aa.lOaa,ll8a)-2-(2-Pyridinyl)-l,3,4,6,6a.7,8.9.10,10a,ll,lla-
dodecahydro-2H-pyrazino]l,2-b]isoquinoline and derivatives.
4,381,302, CI. 424-250.000.
Hunt, John F.: See— . . _ ,,, „^
Fronczak, Frank J.; and Hunt, John F., 4,381,023, CI. 144-365.000.
Hunter Engineering Company: See— ,„. r^o i-i
Grossman, James M.; and January, Daniel B.. 4,381,548, CI.
364-551.000.
Humi, Samuel; and Weber, Hans R. Extruder apparatus. 4,381,184, CI.
425-202.000.
Hydroacoustics Inc.: See— ,„,.,, -^,
Berg, David M.; and Teegarden, Kenneth J., 4,381,137, CI.
350-96.180.
Hyoda, Junkoh: See—
Mishiba, Saburo; Hyoda, Junkoh; Uchida, Akira; Usami, Hisao; and
Watanabe, Akira, 4,381,365, CI. 524-460.000.
Hyodo, Youichi, to ToyoU Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Cable-
type clutch release device for usually contacting-type clutch.
4,381.053, CI. 192-1 ll.OOA.
Hyzak, Daniel L., to Suuffer Chemical Company. N-Methylcar-
bamoyloxy anilides as herbicide extenders. 4,381,195, CI. 71-100.000.
Hyzak, Daniel L., to Stauffer Chemical Company. 0-(Substituted
phenyl) N-methylcarbamates as herbicide extenders. 4,381,196, CI.
71-100.000.
I. W. Industries, Inc.: See—
Warshawsky, Jerome, 4,381,538, CI. 362-269.000.
Ichino, Nobuyuki: See— ....
Eguchi, Mitsuo; Yoshida, Masahito; Kato, Yoshifumi; Ichmo,
Nobuyuki; and Kikuchi, Yoshimi. 4,381,523, CI. 358-227.000.
ICI Americas Inc.: See —
Lynch, Matthew J., 4,381,318, CI. 426-658.000.
Idel, Karsten; Buysch, Hans- Josef; Margotte, Dieter; and Peters, Horst,
to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Subilized thermoplastic moulding com-
positions. 4,381,359, CI. 524-117.000.
leda, Yoshio: See —
Kondo, Masaru; Shiromizu, Hisaharu; and leda, Yoshio, 4,381,198,
CI. 106-1.120.
Igarashi, Mitsuni: See— .
Endoh, Satoru; Ikeda, Mamoru; Yabe, Minoru; Igarashi, Mitsuru;
and Yamauchi, Masaaki, 4,381,473, CI. 313-414.000.
IHC Holland N.V.: See—
Visser,Teunis, 4,381,127, CI. 384-151.000. „„ ^ ■ ,
lida, Yozo; and Nakamura, Soichi, to Nippon Kogaku K.K. Optical
flnder system for a video camera. 4,381,521, CI. 358-55.000.
lijima, Tetsuya; and Takahashi, Seiichi, to Nissan Motor Company,
Limited. Air-conditioning method and system for an automotive
vehicle. 4,381,074, CI. 236-13.000.
Ikeda, Haruo: See— ^ „ .,
Saijo, Takashige; Ikeda, Haruo; Nakamura, Kiyoshi; and Koike,
Shigeyoshi, 4,381,478, CI. 318-135.000.
Ikeda, Mamoru: See—
Endoh, Satoru; Ikeda, Mamoru; Yabe, Minoru; Igarashi, Mitsuru;
and Yamauchi, Masaaki, 4,381.473, CI. 313-414.000.
Ikegami. Tadashi: See—
Sakurai, Hisaya; KaUyama, Yoshihiko; Ikegami, Tadashi; and
Furusato. Masayasu, 4.381.252, CI. 252-429.00B.
Ikemura. Yuichi: See— „ . .
Machida. Toyotaka; Noda, Teruaki; and Ikemura, Yuichi,
4,381,520, CI. 358-29.000.
Ikuma. Sadao. to Miteubishi Monsanto Chemical Company. Heat resis-
tant resin composition. 4,381,373, CI. 525-194.000.
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC: See-
Coffee, Ronald A., 4,381,533, CI. 361-228.000.
Imperial Clevite Inc.: See—
Kowal, Leonard J., 4.380,922, CI. 72-388.000.
Industrial Wood Products, Inc.: See—
Bunner, Matthew R., and Heinhuis, William H., 4,381,328, CI.
428-171.000.
Ing, Rossi & Catelli di Catelli & C. S.n.C: See—
Catelli, CamiUo. 4,381,067, CI. 222-450.000.
Ingraffea, Dominic D.. to James River-Dixie/Northem, Inc. Method
for forming a coated paperboard container. 4,381.278, CI.
264-512.000.
Inoue, Kazunari: See—
'Adachi, Hiromi; Inoi ", Kazunari; and Ohshita, Hiroshi, 4,381,476,
CI. 315-101.000.
Institut Francais du Petrole: See—
Courty, Philippe; Rabinovich, Georgy L.; Mojaiko, Victor N.; and
LePage, Jean-Francois. 4.381,415, CI. 585-487.000.
Institut Textile de France: See—
Raisin, Jean-Pierre; and Pion, Jacques, 4,381,068, CI. 223-2.000.
International Business Machines Corporation: See —
Arnold. Robert W., 4,381,532, CI. 361-154.000.
Bahr, Dietrich J.; and Briska, Marian, 4,381,322, CI. 427-179.000.
Bunten, Roland J., Ill; and Hickman, John E., 4,381,543, CI.
364-200.000. , ^,
Cuomo, Jerome J.; and Harper, James M. E., 4,381,453, CI.
250-398.000. „, ^ ,, .
Groom, Jay L., Jr.; Perine, John D.; Snyder, John W.; and Vair,
Gary G.. 4,381.563. CI. 371-29.000.
Uwis. David O.; and Reed, John W.. 4,381,540. CI. 364-200.000.
Prame, Eric S.. 4,381,502, CI. 340-365.00R.
Shay, Robert J. E.; and Smith, Wendell L.. 4,381.524. CI. 360-2.000.
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.: See—
Boden, Richard M., 4.381,242, CI. 252-8.600.
Boden, Richard M., 4,381.243. CI. 252-8.900
International Harvester Co.; See—
Fardal, Randolph G.; Robinson, Edward L., Jr.; and Swanson,
William C, 4,381,036, CI. 172-2.000.
International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation: See —
Steensma, Peter D., 4,381,461, CI. 307-529.000.
Treiber, Robert, 4,381.561, CI. 370-24.000.
Ionics, Incorporated: See —
Brown, Douglas R., 4,381.232. CI. 204-180.00P
Irvin, William A. Electrical control mercury monometer. 4,380.933. CI.
73-749.000.
Irwin, Robert S., to Du Pont de Nemours. E I., and Company Opti-
cally anisotropic melt forming copolyesters. 4,381.389. CI
528-128.000.
Isaka, Kazuo; NakahaU, Kimio; Sakurai, Masaaki; Watanabe, Tsuyoshi;
Kan, Fumitaka; and Takeda, Kenji, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
Development apparatus. 4,380,966. CI. 118-651.000.
Isbell. Benny. Cutter bar for rice combines. 4.380.889, CI 56-296 000
Isherwood, Brian J.: See —
Christie, Ian R. A.; Croxall, Derek F.; and Isherwood. Brian J .
4,381,214, CI. 456-623.00Q.
Ishiguro, Hirohisa: See—
Kamatani, Toshio; Ishiguro. Hirohisa; lukura. Kensei; and
Yamagishi. Kazuo. 4.381.348. CI. 501-153 000
Ishihara, Shoichi: See —
Wada, Takahiro; Ishihara, Shoichi; and Yamamoto, Ryoichi,
4,381,245. CI. 252-70.000.
Ishii, Hiromi: See—
Nagaoka, Yoshifumi; Morishima. Kanji; Ishii. Hiromi; and Bernard,
Georges, 4,381,436, CI. 200-148.00A.
Ishii, Kiyokazu: See —
Nakamoto, Koichiro; Ishii, Kiyokazu; and Ohyama. Nobumi.
4,380,924, CI. 73-19.000.
Ishizuka, Takashi; Moriyama, Yasuhiro; and Nakamura, Masao. to Nitto
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Process for producing polyimidc tubes
4,381,210, CI. 156-195.000.
Isirov, Dmitry I.: See—
Leschinsky. Leonid K.; Gulakov, Sergei V.; Stepnov, Xenofont X.;
Nosovsky. Boris I.; Bcndrik. Valery G.; Dubinsky. Bons E ;
Isirov, Dmitry I.; and Zelensky. Viktor E.. 4.380,852, CI.
29-121.200.
Isshiki, Tomiya; Yoshino, Hisashi; and Tsuyuki. Kaoru. to Mitsubishi
Gas Chemical Company, Inc. Process for recovering a reaction
product while preventing decomposition of the catalyst. 4,381.221.
CI. 203-6.000.
Itakura, Kensei: See—
Kamauni. Toshio; Ishiguro, Hirohisa; Itakura. Kensei; and
Yamagishi, Kazuo, 4,381,348, CI. 501-153.000.
Itoh, Kunio: See—
Sugino, Takashi; and Itoh, Kunio. 4.380.861. CI. 29-569.00L.
ITT: See—
Toumier. Gilles F. A., 4.381.132. CI. 339-99.00R.
ITT Industries, Inc.: See—
Ostwald, Fritz, 4,381.336, CI. 428-614.000
StruthofT, Holger, 4,381,499, CI. 340-347.0DA.
Ittmann, Guenther: See— ,,„ , .^
Hosch, Ludwig; and Ittmann. Guenther, 4,381,136, CI. 350-1.100.
luchi, Munenori: See—
Oda. Ryoichi; and luchi, Munenori, 4,380.927, CI. 73-146.000.
Iwaisako, Toshiyuki: See—
Yoshida, Koichi; Iwaisako, Toshiyuki; Masamoto. Junzo;
Hamanaka, Katsuhiko; and Komaki, Hajime. 4,381.397, CI.
549-368.000.
Iwasaki, Shinichiro, to Aisin Seiki Company, Limited. Routional angle
sensor. 4,380,928. CI. 73-518.000.
Iwata, Hiroshi: See— ,,.^^.„^
Yoshino, Tsunemi; and Iwata, Hiroshi, 4,381,146, CI. 354-271.000.
Iwata, Masatoshi: See— ^^ ^^^^
Tsumura, Yuzo; and IwaU, Masatoshi, 4,381,077, CI. 239-89.000.
Iwatsu, Hideo: See —
Abo, Toshimi; and Iwatsu, Hideo, 4,380,894, CI. 60-39.161.
Jackson, Richard R. Airway humidifier for the respiratory tract.
4,381,267, CI. 261-104.000.
Jacobs, Clyde L: See— „_ ^, ,,
Sullivan, Robert P.; and Jacobs, Clyde L., 4,380,843, CI. 15-
3I6.00R.
Jakobsen, Kjell M.; and Nilsson. Claes T . to PLM Aktiebolag. Manu-
facture of articles by drawing and blow-moulding. 4,381,279, CI.
264-522.000.
James, Harold S.: See —
Ayres, John W.; and James, Harold S., 4,380,873. CI. 33-174.00P.
James. Mark C; and Borushaski, Ronald G, to AUis-Chalmers Corpo-
ration. Clutch for belt drive with means for limiting start-up torque.
4,381,165, CI. 414-526.000.
James River-Dixie/Northem, Inc.: See—
Ingraffea, Dominic D.. 4.381,278, CI. 264-512.000.
Jansche, Walter: See— . ^ .. ^ ,>
Linn, Karl-Otto; Jansche, Walter; Adolph. Dietnch; and Dan-
nemann, Artur. 4,381,506, CI. 340-870.320.
January, Daniel B.: See — * o r>t
Grossman, James M.; and January, Daniel B., 4,381,548, CI.
364-551.000.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Japanese Nationa] Railways: See—
Saijo, Takashige; Ikeda, Haruo; Nakamura, Kiyoshi; and Koike,
Shigeyoshi, 4.381,478, CI. 318-135.000.
Jarrett, Robert B., to Motorola, Inc. Transistor current source.
4,381,484, CI 323-316.000.
Jasys, Vyuutas J., to Pfizer Inc. Process for the preparation of penicil-
lanic acid esters. 4,381,263, CI. 260-239.100.
Javen. Rupin J., to Motorola Inc. Ignition spark timing circuit.
4.380.980, CI. 123^14.000.
Jebens, Robert W., to RCA Corporation. Optical focus sensor.
4.381.557. CI. 369-45.000.
Jenkins. Stuart M.; Wood. John; and Martin, David, to De La Rue
Systems Limited. Cash dispenser with reject dump means. 4,381,445.
CI. 235-379.000.
Jensen. Susan H.: See—
Yong. Samuel H.; Edmonson, Douglas A.; Evans, Leah G.; Hohle,
Deena C; Jensen, Susan H.; O'Keefe. Leslie S.; and Laatsch,
Debra S., 4,381,315, CI. 426-94.000.
Jeromin, Lutz: See —
Bremus, Norbert; Dieckelmann. Gerhard; Jeromin, Lutz; Rupilius,
Wolfgang; and Schutt, Hartwig, 4,381,407, CI. 560-263.000.
Jeumont Schneider Corporation: See —
Drevet, Michel P.; and Trouillet. Jean. 4.381.126. CI. 384-114.000.
Jeunehomme. Michel L.. to GCA Corporation. System for measuring
trace moisture in a gaseous stream. 4,381.452. CI. 250-392.000.
Johnson, James L.. to McCreary Tire & Rubber Company. Non-stick-
ing ply end turn-over bladder and method of manufacture thereof
4.381.331. CI. 428-224.000.
Johnson & Johnson: See —
Nguyen. Hien V.. 4.381.320. CI. 427-44.000.
Thomas, Joseph J.; and Sobel, Martin, 4,381,008, CI. 604-265.000.
Johnson, Wayne S.; and Tangherlini, Vincent C, to Beckman Instru-
ments, Inc. Method and apparatus for separating a layer of flexible
material from a surface. 4,381.168, CI. 414-737.000
Jonason. Karl G., to Granges Metallverken Aktiebolag. Assembly
apparatus. 4.380.854. CI. 29-157.30A.
Jones, Norman W.: See —
Reynolds, Paul D.; and Jones, Norman W., 4,381,215, CI.
156-643.000.
Jones, W Richard; and Conrad, Earl, to Mercury Metal Products.
Cover assembly for vertical exhaust pipes. 4,380,952, CI. 98-59.000.
Joumeau, Sabine M.: See—
Boileau. Sylvie L.; Meunier, Gilles F.; and Journeau, Sabine M.,
4,381.385, CI. 526-230.500
Judin, Vladimir N.: See—
Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.; Gurov, Evgeny I.; Zub-
kov. Vitaly S.; Obrezkov, Alexandr I,; Tabakov, Vladimir P.;
Khvoschinsky, Bons B.; and Judin, Vladimir N., 4,381,124, CI
299-2.000.
Jung, Peter: See—
Grunewald, Peter; Jung, Peter; and von Musil, Rudolf, 4,381,467,
CI. 310-213.000
Junker, Warren R.: See —
Taszarek, Bruce J.; and Junker, Warren R.. 4,380,929. CI
73-579.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho: See—
Tsumura, Yuzo; and IwaU, Masatoshi, 4,381,077, CI. 239-89.000
Kabushiki Kaisha Orii Jidoki Seisakusho: See—
Oni, Masaru, 4,381,170, CI. 414-758.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda Jidoshokki Seisakusho: See—
Nakayama, Shozo; Kato. Kimio; Araki. Nobuyuki; and Takenaka
Kenji. 4.381.178, CI. 417-269.000.
Kabuto. Masami: See—
Okuda. Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada.
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,380,934. CI. 73-861.230.
KadoU. Hiroshi, to Matsushiu Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Charge-
coupled device having a channel and an electrode for changing a
transfer direction of charge signals. 4,381,516, CI 357-24.000
Kahn. William M.: See—
Reach, Roy W.; Kahn, William M.; and Shapiro, David, 4,381,554,
CI. 364-900.000.
Kai, Isao; Hosokawa. Hiroumi; and Oda, Takayuki, to Asahi Yukizai
Kogyo Co., Ltd. Resin coated sand and casting molds prepared
therefrom. 4.381,354, CI. 523-139.000.
Kaino, Toshikuni; Fujiki, Michiya; Nara, Shigeo; and Oikawa. Shigeru,
to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation. Fabrication
of a low-loss plastic optical fiber 4,381,269, CI 264-1.500.
KamaUni. Toshio; Ishiguro, Hirohisa; Itakura. Kensei; and Yamagishi.
Kazuo. to Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha. Blue colored artificial
stone stocks and method of manufacturing the same 4.381.348, CI.
501-153.000.
Kamerling, Marc A.: See —
Coats, Warren D.; and Kameriing, Marc A., 4,381,421, CI. 174-
35.0OR.
Kampf, Wolfgang; Streck, Roland; and Haag, Horst-guenter, to Che-
mische Werke Huels, AG. Homo- or copolymers of 1,3-dienes carry-
ing reactive silyl groups, their preparation and use. 4,381,377, CI.
525-375.000.
Kan, Fumitaka: See —
Isaka, Kazuo; Nakahata, Kimio; Sakurai, Masaaki; Watanabe,
Tsuyoshi; Kan, Fumitaka; and Takeda, Kenji, 4,380,966, CI
118-651.000.
Kane, Johji. to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Electronic
tuning antenna system. 4,381,566, CI. 455-193.000.
Kanou, Ikuo; Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu; and Omori, Takuro, to Sharp
Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronic translator. 4,381,551. CI. 364-900.000.
Kao Soap Co., Ltd.: See —
Homma, Itomi; and Okada, Noriko, 4,381,259, CI. 252-542.000.
Nakagawa, Yunosuke; and Aramatsu, Shoichiro, 4,381,247, CI.
252-95.000.
Karanewsky, Donald S.; and Petrillo, Edward W., Jr., to E. R. Squibb
& Sons, Inc. Substituted carbonyl phosphinyl-alkanoyl compounds.
4,381,297, CI. 424-200.000.
Karl Mayer Testilmaschinenfabrik GmbH: See—
Wilkens, Christian, 4,380,913, CI. 66-84.00A.
Karmazin Products Corporation: See —
Woodhull, Ivan D,, Jr.; and Liedel, Thomas H., 4,381,033, CI
165-175.000.
Kasamura, Toshirou. Apparatus for forming plural images from a latent
image. 4,381,147. CI. 355-14.00R.
Katayama, Yoshihiko: See —
Sakurai, Hisaya; Katayama, Yoshihiko; Ikegami, Tadashi; and
Furusato. Masayasu, 4,381,252, CI. 252-429.00B.
Kato, Kimio: See —
Nakayama, Shozo; Kato, Kimio; Araki, Nobuyuki; and Takenaka,
Kenji, 4.381,178, CI. 417-269.000.
Kato, Yoshifumi: See —
Eguchi, Mitsuo; Yoshida, Masahito; Kato, Yoshifumi; Ichino,
Nobuyuki; and Kikuchi, Yoshimi, 4,381,523, CI. 358-227.000.
Keds Corporation: See —
Skaja, Joseph J., 4,380,878, CI. 36-67.00D.
Kehr, Dieter: See—
Hervig, Harold C; Kehr, Dieter; and Krabs, Raymond, 4,381,424,
CI. 174-73.00R.
Kelly, William G. F., to Chicopee. Reticulated themoplastic rubber
products. 4,381,326, CI. 428-134.000.
Kern, Nicholas T., to Westvaco Corporation. Apparatus for testing
combustibility of wood pulp blow gases. 4,381,218, CI. 162-252.000.
Kerssen, Johannes: See —
Bouwma, Jan; and Kerssen, Johannes, 4,381,529, CI. 360-123.000.
Kessler, Erich; and Birken, Peter, to Akzona Incorporated. Process for
the production of a multicomponent yam composed of at least two
synthetic polymer components. 4,381,274, CI. 264-147.000.
Khan, Ausat A., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Continu-
ous polymerization process. 4,381,384, CI. 526-206.000.
Khvoschinsky, Boris B.: See —
Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.; Gurov, Evgeny I.; Zub-
kov, Vitaly S.; Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Tabakov, Vladimir P.;
Khvoschinsky, Boris B.; and Judin, Vladimir N., 4,381,124, CI.
299-2.000.
Kieffer, Joseph D., Ill; Cecil, John, Jr.; and Conroe, Barden A., to
Welch Allyn, Inc. Soft tip speculum. 4,380,998, CI. 128-9.000.
Kikuchi, Yasubee, to Usui Kokusai Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Temper-
ature-sensitive fluid coupler. 4,381,051, CI. 192-82.00T.
Kikuchi, Yoshimi: See —
Eguchi, Mitsuo; Yoshida, Masahito; Kato, Yoshifumi; Ichino,
Nobuyuki; and Kikuchi, Yoshimi, 4,381,523, CI. 358-227.000.
Killop, James T., to Anderson-Cook Inc. Thin-wall spline forming
machine. 4,380.918, CI. 72-88.000.
Kincaid, Herbert; and Wray, Michael L., to Eastern Company, The.
Latch having a removable lock. 4,380,915, CI. 70-224.000.
King, Patrick D., to Flo-Con Systems, Inc. Shroud support and method
for shroud engagement with teeming valve. 4,381,102, CI. 266-44.000.
King, Stella W.: Set-
Huff, Joel R.; King, Stella W.; and Saari, Walfred S., 4,381,302, 01.
424-250.000.
Kirby, Robert A., to Exxon Production Research Co. Multiple cham-
bered gas powered seismic source. 4,381,044, CI. 181-118.000.
Kitayama, Minoru; and Odashima, Hisao, to Nippon Steel Corporation.
Oxidation inhibitor. 4,381,251, CI. 252-400.00R.
Kite, James M., to Auburn Manufacturing Co., Inc. Safety attachment
for a front vehicle bumper. 4,381,122, CI. 293-125.000.
Kiyomura, Yoshiteru: See —
Masuda, Yutaka; Kiyomura, Yoshiteru; and Nishizakura, Koichi,
4,381,325, CI. 428-91.000.
Klauke, Erich: See —
Fuchs, Rainer; Maurer, Fritz; Priesnitz, Uwe; Riebel, Hans-
Jochem; and Klauke, Erich, 4,381,412, CI. 568-637.000.
Klavestad, Osborne, to Olde Savannah Arms Company, The. High
speed firing mechanism for single-trigger double-barreled flrearm. "
4.380,881, CI. 42-42.00R.
Kleinewefers GmbH: See —
Edele, Eugen, 4,380,954, CI. 100-35.000.
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Tholen, Paul; Lichtblau, Leo; Albers, Friedemann; and Esche,
Dieter, 4,380,971, CI. 123-41.310.
Klotz, James M.: See —
Lowe, Jean C; Klotz, James M.; and Collins. Glenn A., Jr., de-
ceased, 4,381,323, CI. 427-383.700.
Kluger. Edward W.; and Burchette, Joe T., to Milliken Research
Corporation. Aromatic nitrile-containing compounds useful as dye-
stuff intermediates. 4,381,265, CI. 260-465.00E.
Knedlik, Omar S., to Penmont Company, The. Faucet for frozen car-
bonated beverage machine. 4,381,099, CI. 251-14.000.
Knell, Bemhard, to Concast AG. Dummy bar head for a steel continu-
ous casting insuUation containing an open-ended mold. 4,381,030, CI.
164-446.000.
Ko, Yoshimasa, to Nishikawa Rubber Co., Ltd. Door weather-strip.
4,381,115. CI. 277-207.00R.
Kobashi, Mamoru. to Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha. Ignition timing
control method. 4,380,982. CI. 123-416.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
Kobashi, Mamoru; and Miyagi, Hideo, to Toyoto Jidosha Kabushiki
Kaisha. Ignition timing control apparatus. 4,380,983, CI. 123-424.000.
Kobayashi, Shigeru, to Nittan Company, Limited. Combination type
fire detector. 4,381,503, CI. 340-584.000.
Kobe, Inc.: See —
Erickson, John W., 4,381,175, CI. 417-80.000.
Koch, Friedrich: See—
Goessler, Gerhard; and Koch, Friedrich, 4,381,438, CI. 219-10.49R.
Kodama, Yutaka: See —
Ebi. Yutaka; and Kodama, Yutaka, 4,381,513, CI. 346-75.000.
Koike, Shigeyoshi: See—
Saijo. Takashige; Ikeda, Haruo; Nakamura, Kiyoshi; and Koike,
Shigeyoshi, 4,381,478, CI. 318-135.000.
Kojima, Toshio: See —
Hara, Toshizo; Sutoh, Shinji; and Kojima, Toshio, 4,381,480, CI.
318-471.000.
Kolesar, Robert R.; Rickard, John T.; and Zeidler, James R., to United
States of America, Navy. Adaptive quantizer for acoustic binary
information transmission. 4,381,428, CI. 179-15.55R.
Kolodzey, Hans-Juergen: See—
Elter, Claus; Kolodzey, Hans-Juergen; Schoening, Josef; Schwicrs,
Hans-Georg; and Stracke, Wilfried, 4,381,282, CI. 376-292.000.
Komada, Hajime: See—
Toga, Yuzo; Shimada, Toshio; and Komada, Hajime, 4,381,379, CI.
525-444.000.
Komagata, Tadashi, to Tsukuda Co., Ltd. Hoop toy. 4,380,885, CI.
46-220.000.
Komaki, Hajime: See—
Yoshida, Koichi; Iwaisako, Toshiyuki; Masamoto, Junzo;
Hamanaka, Katsuhiko; and Komaki, Hajime, 4,381,397, CI.
549-368.000.
Komori, Toshiyuki, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Rame
detector including detector testing apparatus. 4,381.455, CI.
250-554.000.
Kondo, Masaru; Shiromizu, Hisaharu; and leda, Yoshio, to NGK Spark
Plug Co., Ltd. Ceramic meUllizing ink. 4,381,198, CI. 106-1.120.
Kondo, Shigeyuki, to Nippon Electric Industries, Co., Ltd. Wound-
tape radius detection system for a tape recorder. 4,381,089, CI.
242-191.000.
Kondur, Nicholas, Jr., to C. Itoh Electronics, Inc. Inked nbbon ad-
vance and reverse mechanism. 4,381,155, CI. 400-220.100.
Kone Oy: See— ^^
Rautimo, Pertti V^,Peho^Huikko, Raimo; and Ahlman, Esko A. O.,
4,38q;991,^€r60-418.000.
Koppe/HSbert; Mentrup, Anton; Renth, Emst-Otto; Schromm, Kurt;
Hoeflte, Wolfgang; and Muacevic, Gojko, to Boehringer Ingelheim
GmbH. l-Aryloxy-2-hydroxy-3-((heterocyclic-substituted alkyl)-
amind)-propanes and salts thereof 4,381,309, CI. 424-273.00B.
Koppers Company, Inc.: See-
Becker, Andrew R., 4,381,039, CI. 177-160.000.
Koslow, Evan E.; and Batchelder, J. Samuel, to Koslow Technologies,
Inc. Method of promoting water transport through soil. 4,380,886, CI.
47-58.000.
Koslow Technologies, Inc.: See—
Koslow, Evan E.; and Batchelder, J. Samuel, 4,380,886, CI.
47-58.000.
Koster, Richard A.; and Hoffman, James S., to Harsco Corporation.
Ammunition transfer sling and method of using. 4,381,164, CI.
414-416.000.
ICo^iibck Tjii/C' Sec
Buhl'er, Ulrich; Cornelius, Dieter; Lowenfeld, Rudolf; Kosubek,
Uwe; Hahnle, Reinhard; and Schickfluss, Rudolf, 4,381,262, CI.
260-207.100.
Kotani, Haruo: See —
Sakuragi, Shiro; and Kotani, Haruo, 4,381,141, CI. 350-96.340.
Koulbanis, Constantin: See-
Bouillon, Claude; Abegg, Jean-Louis; Koulbanis, Constantin; and
Darmenton, Patrick, 4,381,294, CI. 424-61.000.
Kouns, Herbert H.; and Clark, Richard A., to Abex Corporation.
Destroking start valve for variable displacement pump. 4,381,176, CI.
417-222.000.
Kowal, Leonard J., to Imperial Clevite Inc. Tube bender construction.
4,380,922, CI. 72-388.000.
Krabs, Raymond: See—
Hervig, Harold C; Kehr, Dieter; and Krabs, Raymond, 4,381.424,
CI. 174-73.00R.
Kraftwerk Union Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Gruncwald, Peter; Jung, Peter; and von Musil, Rudolf, 4,381,467,
CI. 310-213.000.
Kramer, Kenneth E.: See —
Dreikom, Barry A.; and Kramer, Kenneth E., 4,381,312, CI.
424-304.000.
Kreck, Steven C. Outboard motor carrier for motor vehicle. 4,381,069,
CI. 224-42.440.
Krenitsky, Thomas A.: See—
Rideout, Janet L.; and Krenitsky, Thomas A., 4,381,344, CI.
435-87.000.
Krenz, Horst M., to Zenith Radio Corporation. Grounded, multi-pin
connector for shielded flat cable. 4,381,129, CI. 339-14.0OR.
ICrcss J&ck L * Sec
Adkison, Frank L.; and Kress, Jack L., 4,380,849, CI. 17-11.000.
Kriegshaber, Christof; See—
Waizer, Walter; Helletsberger, Harald; Kriegshaber, Christof; and
Selgrad, Volker, 4,381,188, CI. 51-298.000.
and Sasaki, Toshiharu,
and Kubo, Kazuhiro,
Kenichi, 4,381.145. CI
and Kubo, Kazuhiro,
; Evans, Leah G.; Hohle,
Leslie S., and Laatsch,
and
Krimm, Heinrich: See—
Buysch. Hans-Josef; Krimm, Heinrich; and Richter, Wolfgang,
4,381,404, Gl. 560-24.000.
Kritske, Victor J., to Mayline Co., Inc. Apparatus for supporting a
work surface. 4,381.095, CI. 248-161.000.
Kubo, Hideyuki: See—
Urata, Yoshihito; Kubo, Hideyuki;
4,381.500, CI. 340-365.0VL
Kubo, Kazuhiro: See—
Takizawa, Hiroshi; Oiji, Yoshimasa;
4,381,398, CI. 549-366.000
Kumazawa, Kenichi: See—
Momiyama, Kikuo; and Kumazawa,
354-155.000.
Kung, Patrick C; and Goldstein, Gideon, to Ortho Pharmaceutical
Corporation. Monoclonal antibody to human helper T cells and
methods of preparing same. 4,381,295, CI. 424-85.000
Kuppers, Frieder; Scherzinger. Bemhard; Assmus, Friedrich; and
Flaig, Hans, to Gebruder Junghans GmbH. Control circuit for a
stepping motor in battery-operated instruments 4,381,481, CI.
318-696.000.
Kuraray Co., Ltd.: See—
Kyo, Sunao; Renge, Tumoru; and Omura, Katsumi, 4,381.416, CI.
585-606.000.
Kyo, Sunao; Renge. Tumoru; and Omura, Katsumi. to Kuraray Co.,
Ltd. Process for producing isoprene. 4.381,416. CI 585-606.000.
Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co.. Ltd.: See—
Takizawa, Hiroshi; Oiji, Yoshimasa;
4,381,398. CI. 549-366.000.
Laatsch, Debra S.: See —
Yong. Samuel H.; Edmonson. Douglas A
Deena G.; Jensen. Susan H.. O'Kecfe,
Debra S., 4,381,315. CI. 426-94.000.
LaCroix, Stephen R. See-
Stokes, Richard F.; Timm. James D.; LaCroix. Stephen R.;
Adams. Milton R.. 4.380.893. CI. 60-39.070.
Ladco Development Co.. Inc.; See —
Wiles. James P.. 4.381.457. CI. 307-64.000
Laenens, Werner, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Magnetic central
roury coupling. 4,381,466, CI. 310-103.000.
Lambert, Trevor, to Adams-Russell Co., Inc Selective viewing.
4,381,522, CI. 358-86.000.
Landem, Roy H., to Ridge Producte, Inc Fire escape ladder storage
and deployment device. 4,381,046. CI. 182-70.000.
Lang, Linton W.; and Stetson, Robert L., to Pacific Nuclear Fuels, Inc.
Reactor and process for production of novel nuclear fuel. 4,381,281,
CI. 376-172.000.
Langbauer, Josef, to Heinrich Wunder GmbH & Co. KG. Device for
securing surfboards or the like on the roof carriers of automotive
vehicles. 4,381,070, CI. 224-321.000.
Lanham, Dennie C, to Williams, Raymond M. Mouthplate for hones
or the like. 4,380,888. CI. 54-8.000.
Lanier Business Products, Inc.; See—
Titus, Theodore, IV; and Cutler, Timothy D., 4,381,527, CI.
360-92.000.
Latsch, Reinhard; Schober, Heinz; Muller, Gerhard; and Bianchi,
Valeric, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Method and apparatus for closed-
loop control of the air number in a self-igniting internal combustion
engine. 4,380,986. CI. 123-489.000.
Lazar. Warren G. Composition for removing cyanoacrylate adhesive*
from surfaces. 4,381,248, CI. 252-1 18.000.
Leach, Jerry G.; and Feamside, James T., to Hewlett-Packard Com-
pany. Stratified particle absorber. 4,381,470, CI. 310-327.000.
^^?ye, Robert C^wd Lcamy, Harry J.. 4,380,865, CI 29-576.0OW.
Lear Siegler, Inc.: See—
Pareja, Ramon, 4,381,179, CI. 417-273.000.
Le Blanc-Soreau, Annie; See—
Le Mehaute, Alain; Rouxel, Jean; and Le Blanc-Soreau, Annie.
4,381,258, CI. 252-519.000.
Lechuga, Andrew R.; See— ^,-,100 /-i
Weiss, Samuel; and Lechuga. Andrew R., 4,381,288, CI
423-101.000 . . , ^
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C, to Dow Chemical Company,
The. Alumina compounds in ion exchange resins. 4.381.349. CI
521-28 000
Lee. Kenneth S. Insulated structural block. 4.380.887. CI. 52-405.000.
Lefebvre, Paul J; See— „ , , ^,o«ai€ r-i
Sgourakps, George E.; and Lefebvre, Paul J., 4,380,935, CI.
73-86.. 240.
Lehureau, Jean-Claude: See—
Bourdon, Guy; and Lehureau, Jean-Claude, 4,381.556, Ci
369-44.000. . , ^ ^ . -
Lcibo Stanley P., to Rio VisU International, Inc Embryo transfer
method and apparatus. 4,380,997, CI. 128-l.OOR.
Leiser, Daniel B.; See—
United Sutes of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; Stewart, David A.; Goldstein, Howard E.; and Leiaer.
Daniel B. 4,381,333, CI. 428-312.600. ^ .
Leistner, William E.; Minagawa. Motonobu; Tsuruga, KouJ"; "d
Harada, Masashi, to Phoenix Chemical Corporation 1,3-DicarbonyI
compounds and polyvinyl halide resin compositions containmg the
same. 4,381,360, CI. 524-178.000.
Leiand Stanford Jr.' University, "">« Bo"^ of Tnute« of the. See-
Bieber, Charles P.; and Howard, Frank D.. 4.381.^92. CI. 424-1.000.
PI 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Le Mchaute, Alain; Rouxel, Jean; and Le Blanc-Soreau, Annie, to
Societe Anonyme dite Compagnie Generale d'Electricite. Electronic
cell with a non-aqueous electrolyte. 4,381,258, CI. 252-519.000.
Leonard, John F.: See —
Fritts, David H.; and Leonard, John F., 4,380,926, CI. 73-83.000.
Leong, Henry, to GTE Products Corporation. Weatherproof cover
assembly for electrical wiring devices. 4,381,063, CI. 220-242.000.
LePage, Jean-Francois: See —
Courty, Philippe; Rabinovich, Georgy L.; Mojaiko, Victor N.; and
LePage, Jean-Francois, 4,381,415, CI. 585-487.000.
Les Fabriques d'Assortiments Reunies: See —
Bcmey, Jean, 4,380,963, CI. 116-324.000.
Leschinsky, Leonid K.; Gulakov, Sergei V.; Stepnov, Xenofont X.;
Nosovsky, Boris I.; Bendrik, Valery G.; Dubinsky, Boris E.; Isirov,
Ehnitry I.; and Zelensky, Viktor E. MUl roll. 4,380,852, CI.
29-121.200.
Leslie, Daniel H.: See —
Ulrich, Peter B.; Trusty, Gary L.; and Leslie. Daniel H., 4,381,148,
CI. 356-213.000.
LeVeen, Eric G.: See —
LeVeen, Harry H.; Rubricius, Jeanette L.; LeVeen, Eric G.; and
LeVeen. Robert F., 4,381,380, CI. 525-452.000.
LeVeen, Harry H.; Rubricius, Jeanette L.; LeVeen. Eric G.; and Le-
Veen. Robert F. Thermoplastic polyurethane article treated with
iodine for antibacterial use. 4,381,380, CI. 525-452.000.
LeVeen, Robert F.: See—
LeVeen, Harry H.; Rubricius, Jeanette L.; LeVeen, Eric G.; and
LeVeen, Robert F., 4,381,380, CI. 525-452.000.
Lewis, David O.; and Reed, John W., to International Business Ma-
chines Corporation. Asynchronous channel error mechanism.
4,381,540, CI. 364-200.000.
Lichtblau, Leo: See —
Tholen, Paul; Lichtblau, Leof Albers, Friedemann; and Esche,
Dieter, 4,380,971, CI. 123-41.310.
Liebermann, Howard H., to General Electric Company. Warm consoli-
dation of glassy metallic alloy filaments. 4,381,197, CI. 419-24.000.
Liedel, Thomas H.: See —
Woodhull, Ivan D., Jr.; and Liedel, Thomas H., 4,381,033, CI.
165-175.000.
Lillis, William J.; Naylor, Jimmy R.; Wang, Anthony D.; and White,
Robert L., to Burr-Brown Research Corporation. Digital-to-analog
converter having open-loop voltage reference for regulating bit
switch currents. 4,381,497, CI. 34O-347.0DA.
Lin, Paul T.: See—
Countryman, Roger S., Jr.; and Lin, Paul T.. 4.380.866, CI. 29-
577.00C.
Linder, Ernst; Babitzka. Rudolf; Brettschneider, Johannes; Polach.
Wilhelm; Wessel. Wolf; and Stumpp. Gerhard, to Robert Bosch
GmbH. Apparatus for removing solid components from the exhaust
gas of internal combustion engines, in particular soot components.
4,380.900. CI. 60-275.000.
Lindtveit. Herbert E.. to Sid Harvey, Inc. Pressure responsive valve.
4,381,019, CI. 137-843.000.
Linn, Karl-Otto; Jansche. Walter; Adolph. Dietrich; and Dannemann,
Artur. to Robert Bosch GmbH. Position-electrical signal transducer.
4,381.506. CI. 340-870.320.
Lipinski. Boguslaw: See —
Huasin. Syed S.; Lipinski. Boguslaw; and Gurewich, Victor.
4,381.346. CI. 435-215.000.
Loebach. Michael H.. to Motter Printing Press Co. Collect cylinder for
a rotary folder. 4.381.106. CI. 270-47.000.
Loffelman, Frank F.. to American Cyanamid Company. Polymers
derived from 4-bis(carbalkoxyethyl)-phosphinoxy-2,2,6,6-tetrame-
thylpiperidine. 4,381,372, CI. 525-181.000.
Loving, Frank A.. Jr.; and Simmons. Walter J., to Du Pont de Nemours.
E. I., and Company. Loading of wellbores with explosives. 4.380,948,
CI. 86-20.00C.
Lovrcnich, Rodger T.. to Cooper Industries, Inc. Variable center
disunce terminal strip and method of making same. 4,381,133, CI
339-198.00R.
Lowe, Jean C; Klotz, James M.; and Collins, Glenn A., Jr., deceased
(by Lowe, Jean C, executrix), to Coatings for Industry, Inc. Low-
temperature curing coating composition. 4.381,323, CI. 427-383.700.
Lowe, Jean C, executrix: See—
Lowe. Jean C; Klotz, James M.; and Collins, Glenn A., Jr., de-
ceased, 4.381,323, CI. 427-383.700.
Lowenfeld, Rudolf: See—
Buhler. Ulrich; Cornelius, Dieter; Lowenfeld, Rudolf; Kosubek,
Uwe; Hahnle, Reinhard; and Schicknuss, Rudolf, 4,381.262, CI.
260-207.100.
Lucas Industries Limited: See —
Baverstock. John R., 4.381,208. CI. 156-52.000.
Broadwith. Brian E.. 4.381.182. CI. 417-435.000.
Wilson. Alexander J., 4,381,125. CI. 303-116.000.
LuK Lamellen und Kupplungsbau GmbH: See—
Maucher. Paul. 4.381.052. CI. 192-106.200.
Lutchansky. Milton. Conformable support system for furniture
4.380.838. CI. 5-66.000.
Lynch. Matthew J., to ICI Americas Inc. Maltitol containing gel base
systems. 4,381,318, CI. 426-658.000.
MacDonald, David J.; and Henry, Helen G., to United Sutes of Amer-
ica, Interior. Separation of zirconium and uranium. 4,381,287, CI.
423-70.000.
Machida. Toyotaka; Noda, Teruaki; and Ikemura, Yuichi, to Victor
Company of Japan, Limited. Automatic white adjusting circuit for a
television camera. 4,381,520, CI. 358-29.000.
CI.
CI.
Madewell, George R., to Combustion Engineering, Inc. Control cir-
cuitry for producing variably rifled tubes. 4,381,440, CI. 219-62.000.
Magic Novelty Co., Inc.: See—
Beier, Hanns W., 4,380,914, CI. 70-456.00R.
Magni, Eugenio; and Pemetti, Claudio, to Snia Viscosa Societa' Na-
zionale Industria Applicazioni Viscosa SpA. Process for dyeing
polyamidic textile materials, in particular high dyeing speed polyam-
ides with acid dyes and alkaline reactants. 4,381,186, CI. 8-620.000.
Maio, Kenji: See —
Hotta, Masao; Maio, Kenji; Yokozawa, Norio; and Nagaishi,
Hiromi, 4,381,495, CI. 340-347.0DA.
Makainai, Jesse K.. Jr. Flare with improved starter cap. 4,380,957. CI
102-202.100.
Maliarik. Mary J.: See—
Rohrbach, Ronald P.; and Maliarik, Mary J., 4,381,345, CI.
435-94.000. _
Mallaghan, Lee, to Powerscreen Limited. Screening apparatus.
4,381,235, CI. 209-400.000.
Mamiya Koki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Eguchi, Mitsuo; Yoshida, Masahito; Kato, Yoshifumi; Ichino,
Nobuyuki; and Kikuchi, Yoshimi, 4,381,523, CI. 358-227.000.
Mandt, Lawrence D.; Riedhammer, Thomas M.; and Smith, Francis X.,
to Bausch & Lomb Incorporated. Contact lens disinfecting and
preserving solution. 4,381,314, CI. 424-333.000.
Manitowoc Company, Inc., The: See —
Morrow, James G., Sr.; and Anderson, Michael C, 4,381,060, CI.
212-195.000.
Marconi Co. Ltd., The: See-
Hair, Thomas; and Baxter, Ivor R., 4,381,149, CI. 356-4.000.
Margotte, Dieter: See —
Idel, Karsten; Buysch, Hans-Josef; Margotte, Dieter; and Peters,
Horst, 4,381,359, CI. 524-117.000.
Maricevic, Milenko; Adamovic, Janko; and Maricevic, Zdravko. Uni-
versal joint box for telecommunication or power cables. 4,381,425.
CI. 174-93.000.
Maricevic, Zdravko: See —
Maricevic, Milenko; Adamovic, Janko; and Maricevic, Zdravko,
4,381,425, CI. 174-93.000.
Maringer, Melvin F.: See —
Biggs, James W.; and Maringer, Melvin F., 4,381,362,
524-305.000.
Markley, Charles E.: See-
Bowers, Kenneth E.; and Markley, Charles E., 4,381,183,
425-182.000.
Marlin, Lawrence: See —
Chu, Nan S.; and Mariin, Lawrence, 4,381,260, CI. 260-144.000.
Marsh, Harold P., to Eastman Kodak Company. Stabilized polypropyl-
ene compositions. 4,381,356, CI. 523-521.000.
Martin, Claude: See —
Chaussadas, Jean; Coudoin, Gisele; Martin, Claude; and Milliens,
Andre, 4,381,058, CI. 206-497.000.
Martin, David: See —
Jenkins, Stuart M.; Wood, John; and Martin, David, 4,381,445, CI.
235-379.000.
Martin Marietta Corporation: See —
Barker, Walter F., 4,381,092, CI. 244-161.000.
Martino, Michael S., to United Technologies Corporation. Device for
balancing disks. 4,380,925, CI. 73-66.000.
Marvel, Carl S.: See-
Chen, Paul Y.; and Marvel, Carl S.. 4,381,391, CI. 528-173.000.
Marzocchi. Alfred: See —
Bolen, Charles E.; Harrington, Edward R.; Marzocchi, Alfred; and
Roberts, Michael G., 4,381,200, CI. 106-282.000.
Masamoto, Junzo: See —
Yoshida, Koichi; Iwaisako, Toshiyuki; Masamoto, Junzo;
Hamanaka, Katsuhiko; and Komaki, Hajime, 4,381,397, CI.
549-368.000.
Mason, Robert S. Visual display system. 4,381,493, CI. 34O-27.00R.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology: See —
Sheehan, John C; and Commons, Thomas J., 4,381,300, CI.
424-246.000.
Masuda, Yutaka; Kiyomura, Yoshiteru; and Nishizakura, Koichi, to
Toray Industries, Inc. Liquid retaining synthetic fiber, process for
producing the same, and products. 4,381,325, CI. 428-91.000.
Matsubara, Akira: See —
Abe, Katsuo; Nishio, Masahiro; and Matsubara, Akira, 4,380,964,
CI. 118-50.000.
Matsui, Makoto, to Aida Engineering Ltd. Roll leveller. 4,380,921, CI.
72-165.000.
Matsumoto, Masao: See —
Shirakawa, Kenzo; Matsumoto, Masao; and Yasunaka, Shinsaku,
4,380,869. CI. 30-34.100.
Matsumoto. Takashi: See —
Mori. Haruhisa; Ogawa, Tsutomu; and Matsumoto, Takashi,
4,381,202, CI. 148-1.500.
Matsumoto, Tetsuo; and Okumura, Akira, to Atto Corporation. Method
and device for separately collecting components of a liquid by means
of a centrifugal rotor. 4,381,072, CI. 494-10.000.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See —
Kadota, Hiroshi, 4,381,516, CI. 357-24.000.
Kane, Johji, 4,381,566, CI. 455-193.000.
Senoo, Takanori; Takeguchi, Nobuyasu; and Nomura, Kazuo,
4,381,525, CI. 360-32.000.
Sugino, Takashi; and Itoh, Kunio, 4,380,861, CI. 29-569.00L.
Urate, Yoshihito; Kubo, Hideyuki; and Sasaki, Toshihani,
4,381,500, CI. 34O-365.0VL.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 15
Wada, Takahiro; Ishihara, Shoichi; and Yamamoto, Ryoichi.
4,381.245, CI. 252-70.000.
Matsushito Electric Works, Ltd.: See—
Sakurai, Shoji. 4.381,539. CI. 362-285.000. , cu u
Shirakawa, Kcnzo; Matsumoto, Masao; and Yasunaka, Shmsalcu,
4,380,869, CI. 30-34.100. ^ . „
Matt, Timothy S., to Nordson Corporation. System for automatically
coating objects with a plurality of quantities of a coatmg matenal
using a single discharge apparatus. 4,380,967. CI. 118-669.000.
Matthews, Hugh B., to Sperry Corporation, ^t^alpy restoration m
geothermal energy processing system. 4,380,903, CI. «><>*1**'
Maucher. Paul, to LuK Lamellen und Kupplungsbau GmbH. Clutch
disk assembly. 4,381,052, CI. 192-106.200.
Maurer, Edgar A., to Hoover Company, The. Idler pulley belt drive
arrangement for suction cleaner. 4,380,846, CI. 15-391.000.
Maurer, Fritz: Sec— „ . , u
Fuchs, Rainer; Maurer, Fritz; Pnesnitz. Uwe; Riebel. Hans-
Jochem; and Klauke. Erich. 4.381.412. CI. 568-637.000^^
Maxant, William T. Clamping device. 4.381.238, CI. 210-231.000.
Mayer. Linda J.: Sec— ,^ , Aifii->?8 ri
Teichmann. Robert J.; and Mayer. Linda J., 4.381,228, CI.
204-44.000.
Mayline Co., Inc.: See— ^
Kritske, Victor J., 4,381.095, CI. 248-161.000.
Maynard, Bruce W., Jr.; and Webber, William T., to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation. ElectrosUtic diesel fuel injector. 4,380,978, CI.
123-275.000. .......
Mayston, Donald, to Protocol Engineering Limited. Film punch regis-
tration. 4,380,946. CI. 83-521.000.
Maytog Company. The: See—
Cotton. Curran D.. 4.381.459. CI. 307-139.000.
McBrayer, Robert L.. to BASF Wyandotte Corporation^ Proc^ for
reinforced reaction injection molding of polyurethanes. 4,381,352, CI.
521-115.000.
McCarthy, Desmond C: See— ^ ^ ^ «, .on «-i
Carron, Mark S.; and McCarthy, Desmond C. 4,381.190. CI.
55-30.000. . ,o, ,4-, r-i
McColgan, Christopher. Rear view mirror attachment. 4,381.142, t,i.
350-304.000.
'^*^?^coSe."samud7.; and McCoy. John J.. 4.381.403. CI. 560-24.000.
McCraw. D. E.. Jr.: See—
Parmer. Carl L.. 4,381.507. CI. 340-870.380.
McCreary Tire & Rubber Company: Sec-
Johnson. James L.. 4.381.331, CI. 428-224.000.
McDaniel, Kenneth G., to Texaco Inc. Sprayed polyurethane foams
employing reactive amines to improve the foam surface. 4,381,353,
CI. 521-131.000.
McLaughlin, David G.; and Rose, Andrew M., to Memorex ^^^l^'
tion. Velocity control system for a daU storage apparatus. 4,381,526,
CI. 360-78.000.
McPartland, Thomas F.: See— ^ . „ «, ,
DelliColli. Humbert T.; McPartland, Thomas F.; and Bauer, Wal-
ter A., 4,381,194, CI. 71-65.000.
Mead Corporation, The: See— . ■ ^, ^ j »* n
Chaussadas, Jean; Coudoin, Gisele; Martin, Claude; and Milliens,
Andre, 4,381,058, CI. 206-497.000.
Mechanical Technology Incorporated: See— —
Vitale, Nicholas G., 4,380,902, CI. 60-520.000.
Medtronic, Inc.: See—
Dutcher. Robert G.. 4.381,013, CI. 128-785.000. ^ „ .^^
Sandstrom, Richard D.; Dutcher, Robert G.; and Ufford, Keith A.,
4,381,014, CI. 128-786.000. . .,„
Thompson, David L.; and Zobel, Donald W., 4,381,010, CI. 128-
419.0PG.
Medynski, Joseph M. Holy water font. 4.381.022. CI. 141-86.000.
Memorex Corporation: See— w a^bioa ri
McLaughlin. David G.; and Rose. Andrew M.. 4.381.526, CI.
360-78.000. ^ o .
Menachem, Abraham, to National Semiconductor Corporation. Boot-
strap driver circuit. 4,381,460, CI. 307-449.000.
Mengeringhausen, Max. to MERO-Raumstruktur GmbH & Co. Roof
construction for buildings. 4.380.996. CI. 126-450.000.
Mentrup, Anton: See— ^ e u
Koppe, Herbert; Mentrup. Anton; Renth. Ernst-Otto; Schromm,
Kurt; Hoefke, Wolfgang; and Muacevic, Gojko, 4,381,309, CI.
424-273.00B. —
"Huff, Joei R.!king, Stella W.; and Saari, Walfred S., 4,381,302, CI.
424-250.000.
Sloan, Kenneth B., 4,381,307. CI. 424-271.000.
Mercury Metal Products: See—
Jones. W. Richard; and Conrad. Earl. 4.380.952. CI. 98-59.000.
MERO-Raumstruktur GmbH & Co.: See—
Mengeringhausen. Max. 4,380,996, CI. 126-450.000.
Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals Inc.: See—
Grisar, J. Martin; Schnettler, Richard A.; and Dage. Richard C.
4,381,393, CI. 544-370.000.
Merrill, Marcellus S.: See—
Erickson. Lowell H.; MerriU. Marcellus S.; and Chnsp. David.
4,380.875. CI. 33-203.130. ^ . ^ , ^ „ ^
Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit beschracnkter Haft-
ung: See —
Bissinger, Norbert. 4,381,017, CI. 137-15.100.
Meunier. Gilles F.: See—
Boileau, Sylvie L.; Meunier, Gilles F ; and Joumeau. Sabine M.,
4,381,385, CI. 526-230.500.
Michael, Dietrich: See— ^. . ..
Sanderson. John R.; Binsack, Rudolf; Michael. Dietnch; and
Bontcn, Heinrich, 4,381,366, CI. 524-504.000.
Michel, George H. Shaving composition. 4,381.293, CI. 424-14.000.
Microdot Inc.: See— .,0,..,, ^,
Witte, Erwin C; and Myers, William D., 4,381,163. CI.
411-311.000.
Mietzsch, Fritz: See—
Hardt, Dietrich K. A., deceased; Mietzsch, Fntz; and Billmger,
Otto, 4,381,361, CI. 524-265.000.
Miller. Jonathan O.; Strouse. Kerry E.; and Fegan, Richard M. to
Shop- Vac Corporation. Nozzle for hand-held vacuum. 4,380.845, CI.
15-344.000.
Milliens. Andre: See— . ^. j _, ., „
Chaussadas. Jean; Coudoin. Gisele; Martin, Claude; and Milliens.
Andre. 4,381.058, CI. 206-497.000.
Milliken Research Corporation: See-
Brown, Robert S., 4.381.157. CI. 401-21.000^
Kluger. Edward W.; and Burchette. Joe T.. 4,381.265. CI. 260-
465.00E.
Stewart. William H.. Jr.. 4.380.890. CI. 57-286.000.
Minagawa. Motonobu: See— „ j
Leistner. William E.; Minagawa. Motonobu; Tsuruga. Kouji; and
Harada, Masashi. 4,381.360, CI. 524-178.000.
Ministry of International Trade & Industry: See—
Sakuragi, Shiro; and Kotani, Haruo, 4.381,141, CI. 350-96.340.
Minnesou Mining and Manufacturing Company: See—
Hervig, Harold C; Kehr, Dieter; and Krabs, Raymond, 4,381,424,
CI. 174-73.00R.
Vogelgesang, Peter J., 4,381.491. CI. 335-257.000.
Minobe. Satoshi: See— _....., . -r
Chibata. Ichiro; Tosa, Tetsuya; Sato, Tadashi; Watanabc. Taizo;
and Minobe, Satoshi. 4.381.239. CI. 210-679.000.
Mishiba. Saburo; Hyoda, Junkoh; Uchida, Akira; Usami. Hisao; and
Watanabe, Akira, to Sumitomo Naugatuck Co., Ltd. Copolymer latex
and its production. 4,381,365, CI. 524-460.000.
'^"' DJ,"Narayan;l![iid Misra, Surya K., 4,381,064, CI. 220458.000.
Mitsubishi Chemical Industries Limited: See—
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Suzuki, Masatoshi; Goko,
Nobuaki; and Nishihara, Yasuhiro. 4,381,383, CI. 526-142.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See— . . „, .1^
Adachi, Hiromi; Inoue, Kazunari; and Ohshit*. Hiroshi. 4.381.476,
CI. 315-101.000. ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
Okuda, Kuniteni; Fukami. Teruki; Asayama. Yoshiaki; Wada.
Shunichi; and Kabuto. Masami. 4,380,934. CI. 73-861.230.
Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company. Inc.: See— ^ ,», -,,,
Isshiki. Tomiya; Yoshino. Hisashi; and Tsuyuki, Kaoru. 4,381,221.
CI. 203-6.000.
MiUubishi Monsanto Chemical Company: See—
Ikuma. Sadao, 4.381.373. CI. 525-194.000.
Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals. Incorporated: See—
Takeuchi. Koichi; and Miyata. Katsuharu, 4,381.405. CI.
560-25.000.
^'^tob^h^ul^oni- and Miyagi. Hideo. 4.380.983. CI. 123^24.000.
Miyata, Katsuharu: See— ^ 101 ^< r'l
Takeuchi. Koichi; and Miyata, Katsuharu, 4.381.405, Cl.
560-25.000. ^ , ^^.^ _ .
Miyazawa, Susumu; and Fukuda, Norisuke. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Self-controlled microwave oven. 4.381.439. CI.
219-10.55B.
Mobay Chemical Corporation: See— Aittion n
Schmidt. Manfred; and Bottenbruch. Ludwig. 4.381.390. CI.
528-167.000.
Szabat. John F.. 4.381.351. CI. 521-107.000.
Mobil Oil Corporation: See— o j v.-
Audeh. Costandi A.; Heilweil. Israel J.; White, James R.; and Yan,
Tsouna Y , 4,381,234, CI. 208-327.000.
Podhrasky, Julius; and Sprunt, Eve S., 4,380.930, CI. 73-594.000.
Mohawk Data Science Corp.: See— . ,_ „^,^
Ferguson, Donald C, 4,381.553, CI. 364-900.000.
Mojaiko. Victor N.: See— », . . ,, . w ._j
Courty, PhUippe; Rabinovich. Georgy L.; Mojaiko. Victor N.; and
LePage. Jean-Francois. 4.381.415, CI. 585-487.000.
Molen, James O.; and Molen, Stephen C. Tire inOation safety cage.
4,381,027, CI. 157-1.000.
*^° MoleM*S|;ofL;^ Molen, Stephen C. 4,381.027. CI. 157-1.000
Molins MachineCompMy. Inc.; See—
Evans. Donald J. 4J380.943. CI. 83-38.000.
Roberu, Webster C. 4,381,212. CI. 156-473.000.
Momiyama, Kikuo; and Kumazawa, ,^f™f»"-t°CMon Kabushiki
Kaisha. Single lens reflex camera. 4.381.145, CI. 354-155.000.
Mon. George, to United Sutes of Ajnerica, Army^FIuidic^^olW
oxygen intermittent demand flow device. 4,381.002. CI. 128-Z04.Z4O.
Monsanto Company: See—
Wrobleski. James T. 4.381.254. CI. 252-437.0OO.
Moraca, Daniel A. Apparatus for and method of suspendmg a load.
4.381,097. CI. 248-546.000. .^,Bn«7-)ri
Moran, Claude D. Pipe fitter's combination instrument. A.iw.tii, »-i
33-174.00N.
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Morgan, Ronald E.; and Pearce, Thomas, to British Gas Corporation
No torque tool. 4,380,940, CI. 81-57.160.
Mori, Haruhisa; Ogawa, Tsutomu; and Matsumoto, Takashi, to Fujitsu
Limited. Selective epitaxy by beam energy and devices thereon
4,381.202, CI. 148-1.500.
Morishima, Kanji. See —
Nagaoka, Yoshifumi; Morishima, Kanji; Ishii, Hiromi; and Bernard
Georges, 4,381,436, CI. 20O-I48.00A
Moriyama, Yasuhiro: See—
Ishizuka, Takashi; Moriyama, Yasuhiro; and Nakamura, Masao
4,381,210. CI. 156-195.000.
Morizot, Jean P.; and Gerber, Rene, to Thomson - CSF. Variable
coupling resistance delay line for crossed field tube. 4,381,475 CI
315-39.300.
Morrow. James G.. St.; and Anderson, Michael C, to Manitowoc
Company, Inc., The. Ring supported mobile tower crane. 4.381,060,
CI. 212-195.000.
Motorola, Inc.: See —
Carter, Ernest A., 4,381,496. CI. 340-347.0AD.
Countryman, Roger S., Jr.; and Lin, Paul T., 4,380,866, CI 29-
577.00C.
Durboraw, Isaac N., Ill, 4,381.508, CI. 343-lOO.OLE.
Flowers, Dervin L.; and Thompson, Sylvia B., 4,381 213 CI
156-606.000. . .
Jarrett, Robert B., 4,381,484, CI. 323-316.000.
Javcri, Rupin J.. 4,380.980, CI. 123-414.000.
Nocilini, John D.; Sharp, Ronald E.; and Cuadra, Emilio J
4,381,552, CI. 364-900.000.
Mott, Richard C; and Stamm, Thomas A., to Honeywell Inc. Capaci-
tance manometer differential pressure sensor. 4,380,932 CI
73-749.000. ' »• ^
Motter Printing Press Co.: See—
Loebach, Michael H.. 4.381.106. CI. 270-47.000.
Moulding. Kenneth W.: S«—
Canning, Jonathan R., deceased; Moulding, Kenneth W and
Wilson, Gordon A.. 4.381.489. CI. 333-215.000
Muacevic, Gojko: See —
Koppe, Herbert; Mentrup, Anton; Renth, Emst-Otto; Schromm,
Kurt; Hoefke. Wolfgang; and Muacevic, Gojko, 4,381,309. CI
424-273.00B.
Mueller Co.: See—
Daghe. Joseph L.; Hauffe. William L ; and Ternll. Garrett D
4,381.020, CI. 138-99.000.
Muhr, Richard; and Steinhoff, Karl, to Muhr und Bender. Manipulator
4.381.169. CI. 414-753.000.
Muhr und Bender: See—
Muhr, Richard; and Steinhoff, Karl, 4,381,169, CI. 414-753 000
Muller. Gerhard; and Sell, Gunther, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft
Device for gassing liquids or suspensions. 4,381,268, CI 261-109 000
Muller, Gerhard: See—
Latsch, Reinhard; Schober, Heinz; Muller, Gerhard: and Bianchi
Valerio, 4,380,986, CI. 123^89.000.
Muller, Ulrich R. See—
Fncke, Jobst P.; and Muller, Ulrich R., 4.381,488. CI 333-14 000
MummenhofT. Peter: See—
von Bonin, Wulf; Mummenhoff, Peter; and Baumeen, Heinz
4,381,367. CI. 524-549.000. ^
Munier, Rene, to Regie Nationale des Usines Renault. Dropped railroad
tie for railway without ballast. 4.381.076. CI. 238-115.000.
Murata Manufacturing Company. Ltd.: See
Ogawa. Toshio; and Wakino, Kikuo. 4.381.469, CI. 310-313 OOR
Muto, Katsuya; Nakamoto, Takeshi; Nagase, Isamu; and Sawada.
bhigeru. to Nippondenso Co.. Ltd. Change system for vehicle battery
with relay actuated charge indicator. 4.381.483. CI 322-99 000
Myers. William D.: See—
^'}\^.\^^ ^- *"'* ^*y"s. William D.. 4.381,163, CI
41 1-31 1.000.
Nagai. Masahiko: See—
^^38^429. ?L m^°9.00^R.*^^ ^'^^'^°- '""^ ^'^°- '^*"0^"-
Nagai. Tadashi; Nakamura, Ken; and Nakajima. Yasuo. to Nissan
J?.°^°,^S?^£^y• ^"* Electronic controlled carburetor. 4,380,984.
t,l. 123-440.000.
Nagaishi, Hiromi: See—
Hotu. Masao; Maio. Kenji; Yokozawa, Norio; and Naeaishi
Hiromi, 4,381,495, CI. 34O-347,0DA.
Nagaoka, Yoshifumi; Morishima, Kanji; Ishii. Hiromi; and Bernard.
Oeorges. Roury arc type circuit breaker. 4.381,436, CI. 20O-148.00A
Nagase, Isamu: See —
Muto, Katsuya; Nakamoto, Takeshi; Nagase, Isamu; and Sawada,
Shigeru, 4,381,483. CI. 322-99.000.
See —
Nakagawa. Yukihiro. 4,381.330. CI.
Nakagawa, Yukihiro. 4,381.330. CI
Nakagawa Sangyo Co.. Ltd
Gotomyo. Yasuo; and
428-218.000.
Nakagawa. Yukihiro: See—
Gotomyo. Yasuo; and
428-218.000.
N^agawa, Yunosuke; and Aramatsu. Shoichiro, to Kao Soap Co , Ltd
Enzyme-containmg bleaching composition. 4,381.247. CI 252-95 000
Nakahata, Kimio: See —
Isaka. Kazuo; Nakahata, Kimio; Sakurai, Masaaki Watanabe
Jfol^}^}iJ^- F"'"'^''a; and Takeda, Kenji, 4,380,966. Cl!
1 18-651.000.
Nakai, Yoshihani: See—
'"Sl.3'^?'cT"548o1'"6oo''"'"'*"'^ ■"' ''"""'• °^^^ •'-
Nakajima. Yasuo: See —
Nagai. Tadashi; Nakamura. Ken; and Nakajima, Yasuo, 4 380 984
CI. 123-440.000.
Nakamoto, Koichiro; Ishii, Kiyokazu; and Ohyama, Nobumi, to
Doryokuro Kakunenryo Kaihatsu Jigyodan. Method for monitoring
flow condition of liquid metal. 4,380,924. CI. 73-19.000.
Nakamoto, Takeshi: See—
Muto, Katsuya; Nakamoto, Takeshi; Nagase, Isamu; and Sawada
Shigeru, 4.381.483. CI. 322-99.000.
Nakamura. Ken: See —
Nagai. Tadashi; Nakamura, Ken; and Nakajima, Yasuo. 4.380 984
CI. 123-440.000. ....
Nakamura. Kiyoshi: See —
Saijo, Takashige; Ikeda. Haruo; Nakamura. Kiyoshi- and Koike
Shigeyoshi. 4,381.478. CI. 318-135.000.
Nakamura, Masao: See —
Ishizuka, Takashi; Moriyama, Yasuhiro; and Nakamura, Masao
4,381,210. CI. 156-195.000.
Nakamura. Soichi: See —
lida. Yozo; and Nakamura, Soichi, 4.381.521. CI. 358-55 000
Nakayama, Haruhiko; Nagai, Masahiko; and Yano, Minoru, to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Distributor for an internal combus-
tion engine containing an apparatus for suppressing noise. 4,381,429,
\^i. zUU- 1 V.UUK.
Nakayama, Shozo; Kato, Kimio; Araki, Nobuyuki; and Takenaka
Kenji, to Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda Jidoshokki Seisakusho. Swash-
plate type compressor. 4,381,178, CI. 417-269.000.
Naples, Gerald, to Textron Inc. Storage stable one component ure-
thanes and method for using same. 4,381,388, CI. 528-59 000
Nara, Shigeo: See —
Kaino, Toshikuni; Fujiki, Michiya; Nara, Shigeo; and Oikawa
Shigeru, 4,381,269, CI. 264-1.500.
Narasaka, Shin: See-
Shin; and
Hasegawa, Shumpei,
Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei,
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka,
4,380.985, CI. 123-440.000.
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka,
4,380.988. CI. 123-571.000.
Narcus. Harold, to Norton Company. Process for the manufacture of
abrasive-coated tools. 4.381,227, CI. 204-16.000.
Nathanson, Harvey C: See —
Przybysz, John X.; Driver, Michael C; and Nathanson, Harvey C .
4,381,341, CI. 430-312.000.
National Can Corporation: See-
Das, Narayan; and Misra, Surya K.. 4.381,064. CI. 220-458.000
National Distillers & Chemical Corp.: See-
Biggs. James W.; and Maringer, Melvin F., 4,381,362. CI
524-305.000.
National Research Development Corporation: See—
Nowell, Derek V.; and Rentala, Koteswararao, 4.381,289. CI
423-311.000.
National Semiconductor Corporation: See—
Menachem, Abraham. 4,381.460, CI. 307-449.000.
Nay lor, Jimmy R.: See —
Lillis, William J.; Naylor, Jimmy R.; Wang, Anthony D.- and
White, Robert L., 4,381,497, CI. 340-347.0DA.
Nechay, Jacek A., to Dennison Manufacturing Company. Web trans-
port system with electro-optical label detection. 4,381,211, CI
156-361.000.
Nelsen, Arnold, to Boeing Company, The. Stringer clamp. 4,381,104,
Nelson, Dorsey C: See-
Elliott, Donald; Gahres, Charles A.; and Nelson, Dorsey C,
4,381,082, CI. 241-186.00A.
Neuray, Dieter: See —
Nielinger, Werner; Brassat. Bert; Binsack, Rudolf: and Neuray.
Dieter, 4,381,371, CI. 525-66.000.
Newman. Leon A., to United Technologies Corporation. Waveguide
laser having a capacitively coupled discharge. 4,381,564, CI.
372-87.000.
Newsome, John R. Device for aligning signatures fed in shingled rela-
tion. 4,381,108, CI. 271-198.000.
NGK Spark Plug Co., Ltd.: See—
Kondo, Masaru; Shiromizu, Hisaharu; and leda, Yoshio, 4,381,198.
CI. 106-1.120.
Nguyen, Hien V., to Johnson & Johnson. Non-ionic absorbent poly-
mers. 4.381.320, CI. 427-44.000.
Nicholas. Noel. Pressure operated electric switch and alarm system
using such switch. 4,381.434, CI. 200-85.00R.
Nielinger. Werner; Brassat, Bert; Binsack, Rudolf; and Neuray, Dieter,
to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Polymer mixtures. 4,381,371, CI.
AB. Method for producing containers.
525-66.000
Nilsson, Claes T., to PLM
4,381,277, CI. 264-512.000.
Nilsson, Claes T.: See—
Jakobsen, Kjell M.; and Nilsson, Claes T., 4,381,279, CI
264-522.000.
Nippon Electric Industries, Co., Ltd.: See—
Kondo, Shigeyuki. 4.381,089. CI. 242-191.000.
Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Nishimoto. Tetsuo. 4,380,947, CI. 84-176.000.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See—
lida, Yozo; and Nakamura, Soichi, 4,381,521, CI. 358-55.000.
Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kamatani, Toshio; Ishiguro, Hirohisa; Itakura, Kensei; and
Yamagishi, Kazuo, 4,381,348, CI. 501-153.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 17
Nippon Steel Corporation: See—
Kitayama, Minoru; and Odashima, Hisao, 4,381,251, CI. 252-
400.00R.
Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation: See—
Kaino, Toshikuni; Fujiki, Michiya; Nara, Shigeo; and Oikawa,
Shigeru. 4,381,269, CI. 264-1.500.
Nippondenso Co., Ltd.: See —
Muto, Katsuya; Nakamoto, Takeshi; Nagase, Isamu; and Sawada,
Shigeru, 4.381,483, CI. 322-99.000.
Takaki, Iwao, 4.380,989, CI. 123-644.000.
Nishihara, Yasuhiro: See— . ^ ,
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Suzuki, Masatoshi; Ooko,
Nobuaki; and Nishihara, Yasuhiro. 4.381.383. CI. 526-142.000.
Nishikawa Rubber Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ko,Yoshimasa, 4,381,115, CI. 277-207.00R.
Nishimoto, Tetsuo, to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Portable
electronic musical instrument having separable controlling panel and
keyboard. 4,380,947, CI. 84-176.000.
Nishio, Masahiro: See—
Abe, Katsuo; Nishio, Masahiro; and Matsubara, Akira, 4,380,964,
CI. 118-50.000.
Nishizakura, Koichi: See— ^ .
Masuda, Yutaka; Kiyomura, Yoshiteru; and Nishizakura, Koichi,
4,381,325,0.428-91.000.
Nissan Motor Company, Limited: See —
Abo, Toshimi; and Iwatsu. Hideo, 4,380,894. CI. 60-39.161.
Enoshima. Toshio; Furuhashi, Shoji; and Tar.iura, Hideyuki,
4,380,981, CI. 123-415.000.
Fukushima, Masao, 4,381,043, CI. 180-300.000.
lijima. Tetsuya; and Takahashi, Seiichi, 4,381,074, CI. 236-13.000.
Nagai. Tadashi; Nakamura, Ken; and Nakajima, Yasuo, 4,380,984,
CI. 123-440.000.-
Sunohara, Yoshio; Ohtsuka, Kunio; and Sakamoto, Kenichi.
4,381,050, CI. 192-1.000.
Takase. Sadao, 4,380,979, CI. 123-339.000.
Nittan Company, Limited; See—
Kobayashi, Shigeru. 4.381,503, CI. 340-584.000.
Nitto Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishizuka, Takashi; Moriyama, Yasuhiro; and Nakamura, Masao,
4,381,210. CI. 156-195.000.
Nocilini. John D.; Sharp. Ronald E.; and Cuadra. Emilio J., to Motorola
Inc. Stanby mode controller utilizing microprocessor. 4,381,552, CI.
364-900.000
Kenichi,
Noda, Teniaki: See— „ .
Machida, Toyotaka; Noda, Teruaki; and Ikemura, Yuichi,
4,381,520, CI. 358-29.000.
Nomura, Kazuo: See—
Senoo, Takanori; Takeguchi, Nobuyasu; and Nomura, Kazuo.
4,381,525, CI. 360-32.000.
Nordson Corporation: See-
Hastings, Donald R., 4,381,081, CI. 239-707.000.
Matt, Timothy S., 4,380.967, CI. 118-669.000.
Northern Telecom Limited: See—
Cheal, William E.; Gupta, Gokal C; Sepahmansour. Faramarz; and
Aggarwal. Avnish K.. 4.381.427. CI. 179-2.0DP.
Walling. Jorg-Hein; Dumoulin, Andre; and Arbuthnot, Gerald R.,
4.380.965. CI. 118-621.000.
Northwest Energy Company: See—
Stamm, Michael E., 4,381,544. CI. 364-420.000.
Norton Company: See —
Narcus, Harold, 4,381,227, CI. 204-16.000.
Norwich Eaton Pharmaceuticals. Inc.: See—
Alaimo, Robert J.. 4.381.394. CI. 548-161.000.
Nosovsky, Boris I.: See— ^ r v
Leschinsky, Leonid K.; Gulakov, Sergei V.; Stepnov, Xenofont X.;
Nosovsky, Boris I.; Bendrik. Valery G.; Dubinsky, Bons E.;
Isirov, Dmitry I.; and Zelensky, Viktor E., 4,380,852, CI.
29-121.200. . ^
Novotny. Rudolf J.; and Gandy, Richard G., to BJ-Hughes Inc. Zero
free water cement composition and method. 4,381,034, CI.
166-292.000. , . , „
Nowell, Derek V; and Rentala, Koteswararao, to National Research
Development Corporation. Process for preparing zirconium phos-
phate. 4,381,289, CI. 423-311.000. , , u , . u;
Nozemack, Richard J.; Chi, Chang W.; and Schwonke, John J., to W.
R Grace & Co. Binderless zeolite extrudates and method of produc-
ing. 4,381,255, CI. 252-455.00Z.
Nutrisearch Company: See—
Brotsky, Eugene; Everson, Charles W.; and Swartz, William E.,
4,381,316, CI. 426-265.000. . .
Nyul, Paul, to RCA Corporation. Method for supplying a low resistiv-
ity electrical contact to a semiconductor laser device. 4,380.862. CI.
29-569.00L. , . . .
Obler. Henry D., to United States of America. National Aeronautics
and Space Administration. Variable speed drive. 4.381.174. CI.
417-15.000.
Obrezkov, Aleundr I.: See— , -, .
Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.; Gurov, Evgeny I.; Zub-
kov, Vitaly S.; Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Tabakov, Vladimir P.;
Khvoschinsky, Boris B.; and Judin, Vladimir N., 4,381,124, CI.
299-2.000.
O'Brien, Dennis E.: See— . -.ot Ato ^t
Gewartowski, Steve A.; and O'Brien, Dennis E., 4,381,418, CI.
585-655.000. o v, u
Vora, Bipin V.; O'Brien, Dennis E.; and Scott. Norman H.,
4.381,417. CI. 585-655.000.
Occidental Chemical Corporation: See—
Teichmann, Robert J; and Mayer. Linda J. 4,381,228, CI
204-44.000.
Oda, Ryoichi; and luchi, Munenon, to Sumitomo Rubber Industnes,
Ltd. Rim mechanism for tire inspection arrangement 4,380.927. CI
73-146.000.
Oda, Takayuki: See—
Kai, Isao; Hosokawa, Hirotami, and Oda, Takayuki, 4,381,354, CI
523-139.000
Odashima, Hisao: See—
Kitayama, Minoru; and Odashima, Hisao, 4,381,251, CI 252-
400.00R.
Ogawa, Toshio; and Wakino, Kikuo, to Murata Manufacturing Com-
pany, Ltd. Temperature stable piczoelectnc device. 4.381,469, CI
310-313.00R.
Ogawa, Tsutomu: See-
Mori. Haruhisa; Ogawa, Tsutomu; and Matsumoto, Takashi,
4,381,202, CI. 148-1.500.
Ohshita, Hiroshi: See—
Adachi, Hiromi; Inoue, Kazunari; and Ohshita, Hiroshi, 4.381.476,
CI. 315-101.000.
Ohtsuka, Kunio: Spe—
Sunohara, Yoshio; Ohtsuka, Kunio; and Sakamoto,
4,381,050, CI. 192-1.000.
Ohyama, Nobumi: See — " vi
Nakamoto, Koichiro; Ishii, Kiyokazu; and Ohyama, Nobumi,
4,380,924, CI. 73-19.000.
Oiji, Yoshimasa: See —
Takizawa, Hiroshi; Oiji, Yoshimasa; and Kubo, Kazuhiro,
4.381,398, CI. 549-366.000.
Oikawa, Shigeru: See—
Kaino, Toshikuni; Fujiki, Michiya; Nara, Shigeo; and Oikawa.
Shigeru, 4,381,269, CI. 264-1 500
Okada, Noriko: See—
Homma, Itomi; and Okada, Nonko, 4,381,259, CI 252-542.000
Okamoto, Miyoshi, to Toray Industries, Inc Multi-component compos-
ite filament. 4,381,335. CI. 428-373.000
OKeefe, Leslie S.: See- . ^ „ u.
Yong, Samuel H.; Edmonson, Douglas A.; Evans, Leah G.; Hohle,
Deena G.; Jensen, Susan H.; O'Keefe. Leslie S., and Laatsch,
Debra S., 4,381,315, CI. 426-94.000.
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada, Shunichi,
and Kabuto, Masami, to Oval Engineering Co , Ltd., and Mitsubishi
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Gaseous fluid flow meter utilizing karman
vortex street. 4,380,934, CI. 73-861.230.
Okumura, Akira: See— . ,0, nti *-i
Matsumoto, Tetsuo; and Okumura, Akira, 4,381,072, f-l
494-10.000.
Okura, Tsunehiko. Rotary type tapered part trichromatic pnnter.
4,380,955, CI. 101-38.00A
Olander, Donald E.; and Petersen, Donald W., to Hi-Shear Corpora-
tion. Pyrotechnic composition. 4,381,207, CI. 149-40.000
Olde Savannah Arms Company, The: See—
Klavestad, Osborne, 4,380,881, CI. 42-42.00R
Olsen, Robert E.; and Backlund, Stephen J., to Aerojet-General Corpo-
ration Purification of tetrahydrodibenzo[b,d]pyrans from crude
synthetic mixtures. 4,381.399, CI. 549-390.000
Olson, Paul E., to American Standard Inc Combination transmission
gear selector valve for automotive vehicles. 4,380,938, CI. 74-
473.00R.
Olsson, Mats: See—
Bjom, Lars-Erik; Olsson,
264-3.00B.
Oman, Olof: See—
Bjom, Lars-Erik; Olsson,
264-3.00B.
Omori, Takuro: See— t- l
Kanou, Ikuo; Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu; and Omon. Takuro.
4,381,551, CI. 364-900.000.
Omron Tateisi Electronics Co.: See— „„ ,, . ^no
Fukuyama, Toshifumi; and Onji, Norio. 4,381,446, CI. 250-2 14.00R.
Saito, Yoshitane; Yamada, Akihiro; and Yano, Satoshi, 4,381,456,
CI. 307-40.000.
Omura, Katsumi: See— . .,„,.,, ^,
Kyo, Sunao; Renge, Tumoru; and Omura, Katsumi, 4,381,416, CI.
585-606.000.
Fukuyama, Toshifumi; and Onji, Norio, 4,381,446, CI. 25O-214.00R.
Orii Masaru, to Kabushiki Kaisha Orii Jidoki Seisakusho Reversing
device for press worked goods. 4,381,170, CI. 414-758 000.
Ortho Pharmaceutical Corporation: See—
Kung, Patrick C; and Goldstein, Gideon, 4,381,295, CI. 424-85.000.
Oscar Mayer Foods Corporation: See —
Adkison, Frank L.; and Kress, Jack L.. 4,380,849, CI. IJ-H «»
Ostwald, Fritz, to ITT Industries, Inc. Cast piece. 4,381,336, CI
428-614.000. ^^ ri A
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shm; and Hasegawa, Shumpei. to Honda
Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Flow rate control system for Huid
being supplied to an internal combustion engine, having initial jxwi-
tion setting function for flow rate control valve actuator. 4,380,985,
CI 123-440.000.
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei, to Honda
Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Air/fuel ratio control system for
internal combustion engines, having exhaust gas recirculation control
function. 4,380,988. CI. 123-571.000.
Mats; and Oman. Olof. 4,381,270, CI.
Mats; and Oman, Olof. 4.381.270, CI.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Otto, Gary D.. to Feather Quick Companies, Inc. Vacuum hair cuttine
device. 4.380.870, CI. 30-133.000.
Oval Engineering Co.. Ltd.: See—
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami. Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,380,934, CI. 73-861.230.
Owada, Nobuyoshi; and Tominaga, Tamotsu, to Hiuchi Denshi Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Movable Upe guide devices for use in helical-scan video
tape recorders. 4,381,530, CI. 360-130.230.
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation: See—
Bolen. Charles E.; Harrington, Edward R.; Marzocchi, Alfred and
Roberts, Michael G.. 4,381.200, CI. 106-282.000
Oy LohJa AB: See—
Antson. Jorma O., 4,380.867. CI. 29-590 000
Oy Partek AB: See—
Carbol. Vlastimil, 4.381.347. CI. 501-36.000
Oy Tampella AB: See—
Turkia. Erkki. 4,381.217. CI. 162-23.000.
Pacific Nuclear Fuels. Inc.: 5*^ —
Lang, Linton W.; and Stetson. Robert L., 4,381.281. CI
376-172.000.
Page, Edward H.; and Scotti. Frank. Polymeric foam caulking composi-
tions. 4.381.066. CI. 222-394.000.
Pajer, Raymond T; and Guzman, Pedro T., to SCM Corporation.
Encoding apparatus utilizing acoustic waves of controlled initial
polarity. 4.381,501, CI. 340-365.00R. ,
PalameU, Bozidar; Bogri, Tibor; and Bagli. Jehan. to Ayerst, McKenna
& Harrison, Inc. 4,9-Dihydro-4,9-dioxo-lH-cycloheptarb]pyridine
derivatives. 4.381,304. CI. 424-256.000.
Palmen, Hans J.: See —
Dallmann, Hermann; and Palmen, Hans J.. 4.381,329. CI
428-204.000.
Palomar Systems & Machines, Inc.: See—
Braden, Denver, 4.381.321. CI. 427-79.000.
Papadatos. Dionysios D.: See —
Riester, William C; and Papadatos, Dionysios D., 4,380,860, CI.
Paquin, Patrick J.: See—
Cronkite, Michael O.; and Paquin. Patrick J., 4,381,426, CI. 174-
117.00F.
Paradyne Corporation: See-
Armstrong, Thomas R., 4,381,546. CI. 364-514.000.
Pareja. Ramon, to Lear Siegler. Inc. Pumps with floating wrist pins
4,381,179, CI. 417-273.000. e f ■
Parker, Alan; Dickinson, Peter J.; Clough, Douglas O.; and Famhill,
William M. Friction spinning apparatus and method for cleanine
4,380.892, CI. 57-401.000.
Parker-Hannifm Corporation: See-
Wallace, Joseph E., 4,380,856, CI. 29-412.000.
Parkins, Malcolm F. Internal combustion engines. 4,380,972, CI. 123-
78. OOF.
Parmer, Carl L., to McCraw. D. E., Jr. Fluid cylinder positional indica-
tor and method. 4,381,507, CI. 340-870.380.
P«ry, Leuison. Apparatus for removing a tire from or fitting a tire to a
wfiee!-nm. 4,381,028, CI. 157-1.240.
Paumellerie Electrique: See—
Guionie. Paul; and Roudier, Rene. 4.380,848, CI. 16-85.000.
Payne, John M.. to Sirchie Fingerprint Laboratories, Inc. Magnetic
fingerpnnt dusting brush. 4,381,159, CI. 401-1 18.000.
PCUK Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann: See-
Bonnet, Evelyne J. M., 4,381,261, CI. 260-162 000
Pearce, Thomas: See-
Morgan. Ronald E.; and Pearce, Thomas, 4,380,940, CI. 81-57 160
Pedersen S. Enk; and Wagner, Louis F.. to Standard Oil Company,
The. Production of methacrolein from isobutyraldehyde utilizing
promoted iron phosphorus oxide catalysts. 4,381,41 1, CI 568-459 000
Pegram, Barry V , to Bntish Aerospace Public Limited Company.
438r09T 1 ' enhancement of tiltable aircraft stabilizing member.
Pelouze Scale Co.: See—
Brouwer, Frans, 4,381,040, CI. 177-210 OOC
Pelto-Huikko, Raimo: See—
Rautimo. Pertti V.; Pelto-Huikko, Raimo; and Ahlman, Esko A O
4,380.901, CI. 60-418.000.
Penmont Company, The: See—
Knedlik, Omar S., 4,381,099, CI. 251-14.000.
Penne, John D.: See-
Groom, Jay L., Jr.; Penne. John D.; Snyder, John W.; and Vair,
Gary G., 4,381,563, CI. 371-29.000.
Pemetti, Claudio: See—
Magni, Eugenio; and Pemetti, Claudio. 4.381,186. CI 8-620 000
Peroxide-Chemie GmbH: See—
Brossmann, Gottfried; and Diem, Fritz, 4.381.222, CI 203-33 000
Perry, John J to Chrysler Corporation. Excessive idle termination
system. 4,381,042, CI. 180-272.000.
Peters, Harry E. Magnetic sute selector. 4,381,490. CI 335-210 000
Peters, Horst: See—
Idel, Karsten; Buysch. Hans-Josef; Margotte, Dieter; and Peters
Horst. 4.381.359. CI. 524-1 17.000.
Peters, Sherry. Doll dress and crenelle. 4,380,833, CI 2-105 000
Petersen, Donald W.: See—
Olander, Donald E.; and Petersen, Donald W, 4 381207 CI
149-40.000. .joi.^u/, v,i.
Petersen, Hyrum D. Detachable jaw-locking device for an adjustoble
pipe wrench. 4,380.941, CI. 81-180.00R.
Peterson, Michael: See —
Ferdinand. Irwin J.; Sylvan, Richard; and Peterson, Michael
4.381.103, CI. 269-1.000. '
Petrillo, Edward W., Jr.: See—
Karanewsky, Donald S.; and Petrillo, Edward W., Jr.. 4.381 297
CI. 424-200.000. .^oi.^y,,
Pfeiffer, Robert C, to Allied Corporation. Seat belt retractor structure
4,381,086, CI. 242-107.40R.
Pfizer Inc.: See —
Jasys, Vytautas J., 4.381.263, CI. 260-239. 100.
Schnur, Rodney C. 4,381.308, CI. 424-272.000.
Phoenix Chemical Corporation: See—
Leistner. William E.; Minagawa, Motonobu; Tsuruga, Kouji- and
Harada, Masashi, 4,381,360, CI. 524-178.000.
Picaud, Emile, to Regie Nationale des Usines Renault. Polyvalent
suspension balance for assembly lines for manufactured goods, esoe-
cially motor vehicles. 4,381,055, CI. 198-653.000.
Pillsbury Company. The: See—
Yong, Samuel H.; Edmonson, Douglas A.; Evans, Leah G • Hohle
Deena G.; Jensen, Susan H.; O'Keefe, Leslie S.: and Laatsch!
DebraS, 4.381,315, CI. 426-94.000.
Pinkenhagen, Wilhelm, to Firmenich SA. a,^-Unsaturated aldehydes
!^o *^*!IL."^ ^ navor-modifying Ingredients. 4,381,410, 01.
568-448.000.
Pion, Jacques: See —
Raisin, Jean-Pierre; and Pion, Jacques, 4,381,068, CI. 223-2.000
Piscitelli, R. Amelia: See—
Hemmer, Valentine J.; and Piscitelli, R. Amelia, 4,381,135, 01.
J JV*i jo.UUIx.
Pitney Bowes Inc.: See —
Chang, Mike S. H., 4,381,337. CI. 430-58.000.
Plaspack Kunststoff GmbH & Co., KG: See—
Balaz. Anton, 4,381,110, CI. 273-I82.0OR.
Plempel, Manfred: See—
^^&hm: Cr424l2'6"000 ' """"' '"*°' '^'^ ^'*'"^'' '^"'''"*'
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Ludwig; Buchel, Karl H.; and Plempel, Man-
fred, 4,381,310, CI. 424-273.00R.
PLM AB: See—
Nilsson, Claes T., 4,381.277, CI. 264-512.000.
PLM Aktiebolag: See—
Jakobsen, Kjell M.; and Nilsson, Claes T., 4,381,279, Q.
Podhrasky, Julius; and Spnint, Eve S., to Mobil OU Corporation.
System for transmitting ultrasonic energy through core samples.
Poindexter, Graham S., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Aminoethy-
lation process. 4,381,401, CI. 556-410.000.
Polach, Wilhelm: See—
Linder, Ernst; Babitzka, Rudolf; Brettschneider, Johannes; Polach,
Wilhelm; Wessel, Wolf; and Stumpp, Gerhard, 4,380,900, CI.
60-275.000.
Pond, Robert B. Fishing lure. 4,380,884, CI. 43-42.090.
Pontoglio, Enrico, to Caffaro S.p.A. Method for removing chlorinated
solvents from chlorinated polymers. 4,381,392, CI. 528-493.000
Pott, Ronald W.: See-
Grimm, William G.; and Pott, Ronald W., 4,381,160, CI.
403-230.000.
Poux, Jacques, to Alsthom-Atlantique. Fluid circulation apparatus
using fluid flow deflection grating. 4,380,877, CI. 34-225.000.
Powell, Thomas M., to General Motors Corporation. Cold starting
system for alcohol fueled engine. 4.380,975, CI. 123-179.00H.
Powerscreen Limited: See —
Mallaghan, Lee, 4,381,235, CI. 209-400.000.
PPG Industries, Inc.: See-
Graham, Roy R., 4,381,199, CI. 106-186.000.
Hillman, Patrick E., 4,381,374, CI. 525-356.000.
Frame, Eric S., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Method and apparatus for character generation. 4,381,502, CI. 340-
365. OOR.
Pratt & Lambert, Inc.: See-
Balk, Leizer, deceased; and Sojkowski, James S., 4,381,334, CI.
428-332.000.
Precision Valve Corporation: See-
Hayes, Thomas, 4,381,065, CI. 222-153.000.
Price, Stephen J.: See—
Hargreaves, Charles R.; and Price, Stephen J., 4,381,319, CI.
427-34.000.
Priesnitz, Uwe: See —
Fuchs, Rainer; Maurer, Fritz; Priesnitz, Uwe; Riebel, Hans-
Jochem; and Klauke, Erich, 4,381.412, CI. 568-637.000.
Protocol Engineering Limited: See —
Elworthy, Graham J, 4,380,956, CI. 101-401.100.
Mayston, Donald, 4,380,946, CI. 83-521.000.
Prout, James H.: See —
Frost, Harold M.; Prout, James H.; and Reed, Robert W., 4,380,931,
CI. 73-643.000.
Przybysz, John X.; Driver, Michael C; and Nathanson, Harvey C, to
Westinghouse Electric Corp. Two suge etching process for through
the substrate contacts. 4,381,341, CI. 430-312.000.
Pyle, Charles B.: See—
Hardee, Kenneth L.; Gordon, Arnold Z.; Pyle, Charles B.; and Sen,
Rajat K., 4,381,290, CI. 423-478.000.
Rabinovich. Georgy L.: See —
Courty, Philippe; Rabinovich, Georgy L.; Mojaiko, Victor N.; and
LePage, Jean-Francois, 4,381,415, CI. 585-487.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
Racal Microelectronic Systems Limited: See—
Anstey, Michael J.; and Brown, David F., 4,381,458, CI.
307-66.000.
Radebold, Reinhart. Conversion of available energy. 4,381,462, CI.
310-11.000.
Rainer, Georg, to BYK Gulden Lomberg Chemische Fabrik GmbH.
Substituted tricyclic thieno compounds, their synthesis, their use,
their compositions and their medicaments. 4,381,301, CI. 424-250.000.
Raisin, Jean-Pierre; and Pion, Jacques, to Institut Textile de France; and
Agence Nationale de Valorisation de la Recherche. Continuous
method and device for making a sleeve with a turned back edge.
4,381,068, CI. 223-2.000.
Ransburg Corporation: See —
Allen, Harold T., 4,381.079, CI. 239-214.130.
Rao, G. R. Mohan, to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Method of
making double level polysilicon series transistor devices. 4,380,863,
CI. 29-571.000.
Rautimo, Pertti V.; Pelto-Huikko, Raimo; and Ahlman, Esko A. O., to
Kone Oy. Hydraulic percussion machine. 4,380,901, CI. 60-418.000.
RCA Corporation; See —
Hertzler, Merle E.; and Stelzer, James S., 4,381,486, CI.
324-404.000.
Jebens, Robert W., 4,381,557, CI. 369-45.000.
Nyul, Paul, 4,380,862, CI. 29-569.00L.
Reach, Roy W.; Kahn, William M.; and Shapiro, David, to Hewlett-
Packard Company. Calculator for storing source data and evaluating
numerical answers to problems. 4,381,554, CI. 364-900.000.
Reed John W ■ See
Lewis, David O.; and Reed, John W., 4,381,540, CI. 364-200.000.
Rccd Robert W * S€€
Frost, Harold M.; Prout, James H.; and Reed, Robert W., 4,380,931,
CI. 73-643.000.
Reese Enterprises, Inc.: See —
Ellingson, Chester W., Jr., 4,381,324, CI. 428-58.000.
Regel, Erik; Buchel. Karl H.; Haller, Ingo; and Plempel, Manfred, to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Hydroxypropyl-triazole compounds, their
production and their medicinal use. 4,381,306, CI. 424-269.000.
Regie Nationale des Usines Renault: See —
Munier, Rene, 4,381,076, CI. 238-115.000.
Picaud, Emile, 4,381,055, CI. 198-653.000.
Reinert, Gerhard; and Davidson, Donald R., to Singer Company, The.
Variably controllable bobbin thread pull-off mechanism. 4,380,961,
CI. 112-231.000.
Reinhart, Theodore J., Jr., to United Sutes of America, Air Force.
Cure retarding additives for acetylene-terminated polymers.
4,381,363, CI. 524-324.000.
Reinhold, Earl R., to Amchem P^oduct^, Inc. Coating solutions for zinc
surfaces. 4,381.203, CI. 148-6. 14R.
Reisch, John W.: See—
Rounbehler, David P.; and Reisch, John W., 4,381,408. CI.
564-112.000.
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Ludwig; Buchel, Karl H.; and Plempel, Manfred, to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Antimycotic substituted 2,4-dichlorophe-
nyl-imidazolyl-vinyl-carbinols. 4,381,310, CI. 424-273.00.
Renge, Tumoni: See—
Kyo, Sunao; Renge, Tumoru; and Omura. Katsumi, 4.381,416, CI.
585-606.000.
Renkl. Klaus; and Schmidt. Helmut, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
Stator arrangement for small motors. 4,381,465, CI. 310-49.00R.
Renner, Gunter; and Wolff, Erich, to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft.
Photographic recording material and non-diffusing compounds to be
used in the material which contains a photographically active group
which can be split off. 4,381,339, CI. 430-223.000.
Renny, Arthur B. Art of exhibiting fish. 4,380,968, CI. 119-5.000.
Renoux, Lucien H.. to Hispano-Suiza. Loading apparatus for a medium
caliber weapon. 4.380.950. CI. 89-33.0BA.
Rentala. Koteswararao: See—
Nowell, Derek V.; and Rentala, Koteswararao, 4,381,289, CI.
423-311.000.
Renth, Ernst-Otto: See—
Koppe, Herbert; Mentrup, Anton; Renth, Ernst-Otto; Schromm.
Kurt; Hoefke. Wolfgang; and Muacevic, Gojko. 4.381,309, CI.
424-273.00B.
REPA Feinstanzwerk GmbH: See—
Fohl, Artur, 4,381,084, CI. 242-107.000.
Resources Conservation Company: See —
Standiford, Ferris C. 4.381.220, CI. 202-154.000.
Reynolds, Paul D.; and Jones, Norman W., to Burroughs Corporation.
Method of fabricating a misaligned, composite electrical contact on a
semiconductor substrate. 4,381.215. CI. 156-643.000.
Rich, Leonard G.: See —
Gerber, H. Joseph; and Rich, Leonard G., 4,380.944, CI. 83-49.000.
Richards, Ralph H. A. Golf swing simulator device. 4,381,111, CI.
273-191.00R.
Richter, Martin; and Erdt, Wolfgang, to Hilti Aktiengesellschaft. Dril-
ling device. 4.380.991. CI. 125-20.000.
Richter, Wolfgang: See—
Buysch, Hans-Josef; Krimm, Heinrich; and Richter, Wolfgang,
4,381,404, CI. 560-24.000.
Rickard, John T.: See —
Kolesar, Robert R.; Rickard, John T.; and Zeidler, James R.,
4,381,428, CI. 179-15.55R.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.: See—
Ebi, Yutaka; and Kodama. Yutaka. 4.381,513, CI. 346-75.000.
Ejiri, Koichi, 4,381,547, CI. 382-47.000.
Rideout, Janet L.; and Krenitsky, Thomas A., to Burroughs Wellcome
Co. Process for producing deoxyribosides using bacterial phosphory-
lase. 4,381,344, CI. 435-87.000.
Ridge Products, Inc.: See—
Landem, Roy H., 4.381.046. CI. 182-70.000.
Riebel, Hans-Jochem; See —
Fuchs, Rainer; Maurer, Fntz; Priesnitz, Uwe; Riebel, Hans-
Jochem; and Klauke, Erich, 4,381.412. CI. 568-637.000.
Riech, Volker; and Sorgenicht, Dietrich, to Daystrom Limited. Dimen-
sion measuring apparatus. 4,381,152, CI. 356-385.000.
Rieckenberg, Ivan L. Bottle cleaning device. 4,380,840, CI. 15-105.000.
Riedhammer, Thomas M.: See —
Mandt. Lawrence D.; Riedhammer, Thomas M.; and Smith, Fran-
cis X., 4,381,314, CI. 424-333.000.
Riester, William C; and Papadatos, Dionysios D., to Trico Producte
Corporation. Method of assembling bearing and lever. 4,380,860, Q.
29-453.000.
Rio Vista International, Inc.: See —
Leibo, Stanley P., 4,380,997, CI. 128-l.OOR.
Rittenhouse, John F.. to Allied Corporation. Curing of tetrabasic lead
pasted battery electrodes. 4.381.250. CI. 252-182.100.
Ritter. Wolfgang; and Gruber. Werner, to Henkel Kommanditgesell-
schaft auf Aktien. Polymerizable adhesives containing boron initia-
tors. 4,381.386, CI. 526-239.000.
Ritzenthaler, Donald R.; and Bottelson, Thomas J, to Gulf & Western
Manufacturing Company. Hand set timer. 4,381,431, CI. 200-38.00R.
Robbins Company. The: See—
Sugden, David B., 4,381,038, CI. 175-344.000.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See—
Latsch, Reinhard; Schober, Heinz; Muller, Gerhard; and Bianchi,
Valeric. 4,380,986, CI. 123-489.000.
Linder, Ernst; Babitzka, Rudolf; Brettschncider, Johannes; Polach,
Wilhelm; Wessel, Wolf; and Stumpp. Gerhard. 4.380,900. CI.
60-275.000.
Linn, Karl-Otto; Jansche, Walter; Adolph. Dietrich; and Dan-
nemann. Artur. 4.381.506. CI. 340-870.320.
Steinke. Leo, 4,380,973, CI. 123-145.00A.
Roberts. Michael G.: See—
Bolen. Charles E.; Harrington. Edward R.; Marzocchi. Alfred; and
Roberts. Michael G., 4,381,200, CI. 106-282.000.
Roberts, Thomas G., to United Sutes of America, Army. Method and
device for producing nuclear fusion. 4.381,280, CI. 376-105.000.
Roberts, Webster C, to Molins Machine Company, Inc. Fingerless
single facer. 4,381,212, CI. 156-473.000.
Robertson, AlasUir. Solar energy converters and absorbers therefor.
4.380.995. CI. 126-438.000.
Robinson, Edward L., Jr.; See —
Fardal, Randolph G.; Robinson, Edward L., Jr.; and Swanson,
William C, 4,381,036, CI. 172-2.000.
Robles, Vincent: See—
Gregoire, Gabriel; Robles, Vincent; and Alvarez, Pedro. 4,381.047.
CI. 188-71.800.
Rockwell International Corporation: See—
Maynard, Bruce W., Jr.; and Webber, William T.. 4,380.978. CI.
123-275.000.
Roper. Daniel W., 4,381,096, CI. 248-429.000.
Touret, Jean P., 4,380,962, CI. 1 12-274.000.
Rodgers, Aubrey, to United States of America, Army. Wide angle
intensity pickoff. 4.381.448. CI. 250-227.000.
Rogers Corporation; See-
Taylor, Michael J., 4,381,423, CI. 174-72.00B.
Rohm GmbH: See—
Hosch, Ludwig; and Ittmann, Guenther, 4,381,136, CI. 350-1.100
Rohrbach, Ronald P.; and Maliarik, Mary J., to UOP Inc. Pretreatment
of glucose feedstock with reducing agents. 4,381,345, CI. 435-94 000.
Rolls-Royce Limited: See—
Adkins, Richard C, 4,380,895, CI. 60-39.230
Cantwell, Hugh F., 4,380,898, CI. 60-243.000.
Davies, David O.; and Sherwood, Michael, 4,380,899, CI
60-261.000.
Smart, Richard B.; and Slattery, Sidney E., 4.380,905, CI.
60-756.000.
Romenesko. David J; and Schiefer, Harry M, to Dow Coming Corpo-
ration. Invert emulsions for well-drilling comprising a polydiorgano-
siloxane and method therefor. 4,381,241, CI. 252-8.50P.
Roper, Daniel W., to Rockwell International Corporation. Scat posi-
tioner. 4,381,096, CI. 248-429.000.
Rose, Andrew M.; See —
McLaughlin, David G.; and Rose, Andrew M., 4,381.526, CI.
360-78.000.
Rosenquist, Niles R., to General Electric Co. Copolyester-carbonates
containing aliphatic diol co-monomers. 4,381,358, CI. 524-114.000
Ross, Sidney D.; and Finkelstein, Manuel, to Sprague Electric Com-
pany. Low voluge electrolytic capacitor. 4,381,536, CI. 361-433.000.
Rotman, Walter; and Franchi, Peter R., to United Sutes of America.
Air Force. Cylindrical microwave lens antenna for wideband scan-
ning applications. 4,381,509, CI. 343-754.000.
Roudier, Rene; See —
Guionie, Paul; and Roudier, Rene, 4,380,848, CI. 16-85.000.
Rounbehler. David P.; and Reisch. John W.. to Thermo Electron
Corporation. Method and apparatus for extraction of airborne amine
compounds. 4,381,408. CI. 564-112.000.
Rouxel, Jean; See —
Le Mehaute, Alain; Rouxel, Jean; and Le Blanc-Soreau. Annie,
4.381,258, CI. 252-519.000.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Rubricius, Jeanette L.: See —
LeVeen, Harry H.; Rubricius, Jeanette L.; LeVeen, Eric G.; and
LeVeen, Robert F.. 4.381.380, CI. 525-452.000.
Rudolph, Peter K C. to Boeing Company, The. Flap assembly for
aircraft wmg. 4,381,093, CI. 244-216.000.
Rumpel. Donald D., to Henwebcor, Incorporated. Multidirectional
board support. 4,381,054, CI. 193-35.0MD.
Rupilius, Wolfgang: See —
Bremus, Norbert; Dieckelmann, Gerhard; Jeromin, Lutz; Rupilius,
Wolfgang; and Schutt, Hartwig, 4,381,407, CI. 560-263.000.
Ruscher. Christian: See —
Danz, Rudi; Stark, Wolfgang; Elling, Burkhard; Ruscher, Chris-
tian; and Schwarz, Wolfgang, 4,381,534, CI. 361-233.000.
Russek, Allen S., to Wallant International Trade, Inc. Electrode place-
ment device. 4,381,012, CI. 128-644.000.
Russell, TTiomas V., to Weiss. Harry M. Swimming pool water condi-
tioning system. 4.381,240, CI. 210-746.000.
Ruti-Te Strake B.V ; See—
Gunneman, Paul, 4,381,021, CI. 139-380.000.
Ryang, Hong-Son, to General Electric Company. Silynorbomane
anhydrides and method for making. 4,381,396, CI. 549-237.000.
Huff, Joel R.; King, Stella W.; and Saari, Walfred S., 4,381,302, CI.
424-250.000.
Saiag S.p.A. Industria Articoli Gomma: See —
Azzola. Roberto, 4,381,273, CI. 264-45.900.
Saijo. Takashige; Ikeda, Hanio; Nakamura, Kiyoshi; and Koike,
Shigeyoshi, to Hitachi, Ltd.; and Japanese National Railways. Con-
trol system for a linear synchronous motor. 4,381,478, CI.
318-135.000.
Saito, Takashi, to Victor Company of Japan, Ltd. Disc -shaped record-
ing medium reproducing apparatus. 4,381,559, CI. 369-77.000.
Saito, Yoshitane; Yamada, Akihiro; and Yano, Satoshi, to Omron
Tateisi Electronics Co. Input interface unit for programmable logic
controller. 4,381,456, CI. 307-40.000.
Sakamoto, Kenichi: See —
Sunohara, Yoshio; Ohtsuka. Kunio; and Sakamoto, Kenichi,
4,381.050, CI. 192-1.000.
Sakane. Kazuo: See —
Teraji. Tsutomu; Sakane, Kazuo; and Goto, Jiro, 4,381,299, CI.
424-246.000.
Sakauchi, Yoshitada; and Hikiba. Masayuki, to Hitachi. Ltd. Electronic
tubes. 4.381,472, CI. 313-331.000.
Sakuragi, Shiro; and Kotani, Haruo, to Agency of Industrial Science &
Technology; and Ministry of International Trade & Industry. Infra-
red optic^ fiber and method for manufacture thereof 4,381,141, CI.
350-96.340.
Sakurai, Hisaya; Katayama, Yoshihiko; Ikegami, Tadashi; and Furusato,
Masayasu, to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Catalyst for
producing polyolefins. 4,381,252, CI. 252-429.00B.
Sakurai, Junji, to Fujitsu Limited. Method for production of semicon-
ductor devices. 4,381,201, CI. 148-1.500.
Sakurai, Masaaki: See —
Isaka, Kazuo; Nakahata, Kimio; Sakurai, Masaaki; Watanabe,
Tsuyoshi; Kan, Fumitaka; and Takeda, Kenji, 4,380,966, CI.
118-651.000.
Sakurai, Shoji, to Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. Lighting equipment.
4,381.539. CI. 362-285.000.
Sanderson, John R.; Binsack, Rudolf; Michael, Dietrich; and Bonten,
Heinrich. to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Fibre reinforced polyamide
moulding compounds. 4.381,366. CI. 524-504.000.
Sandoz Ltd.; See —
Toth. Istvan. 4.381,409, CI. 564-406.000.
Sandstrom, Richard D.; Dutcher, Robert G.; and Ufford, Keith A., to
Medtronic, Inc. Ring electrode for pacing lead and method of making
same. 4,381,014, CI. 128-786.000.
Sasaki, Toshihani: See —
Urata. Yoshihito; Kubo, Hideyuki; and Sasaki, Toshihani,
4.381,500. CI. 34O-365.0VL.
Sato, Kazuo: See —
Uchida, Fumihiko; Sato, Kazuo; and Takahashi, Soji, 4,380,917, CI.
72-8.000.
Sato, Tadashi: See —
Chibata, Ichiro; Tosa. Tctsuya; Sato. Tadashi; Watanabe, Taizo;
and Minobe. Satoshi. 4,381,239. CI. 210-679.000.
Saurer-Allma GmbH: See —
Wehrmeister, Gerhard, 4,380,891, CI. 57-296.000.
Sawada, Shigeru: See —
Muto, Katsuya; Nakamoto, Takeshi; Nagase, Isamu; and Sawada,
Shigeru. 4,381,483, CI. 322-99.000.
Scherzingcr, Bemhard: See —
Kuppers, Frieder; Scherzingcr, Bemhard; Assmus, Friedrich; and
Flaig, Hans, 4,381,481, CI. 318-696.000.
Schettl, Alvin J.: See—
DeLong, Ronald B.; and Schettl, Alvin J., 4,381,444. CI.
219-451.000.
Schickfluss, Rudolf: See—
Buhler, Ulrich; Cornelius, Dieter; Lowenfeld, Rudolf; Kosubek,
Uwe; Hahnle, Reinhard; and Schickfluss, Rudolf, 4,381.262, CI.
260-207.100.
Schiefer, Harry M.: See—
Romenesko, David J.; and Schiefer, Harry M., 4,381,241, CI. 252-
8.50P.
Schmidt, Gunther; Engcl, Wolfhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Tnimmlitz,
Gunter; and Engelhardt, Gunther, to Dr. Karl Thomae GmbH.
1,4,9, 10-Tetrahydro-pyrazolo [4,3-]pyrido[-3,2-b][l,4]diazepin-
10-ones. 4,381,303, CI. 424-252.000.
Schmidt, Helmut: See —
Renkl, Klaus; and Schmidt, Helmut, 4,381,465, CI. 310-49.00R.
Schmidt, Manfred; and Bottenbruch, Ludwig, to Mobay Chemical
Corporation; and Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Thermoplastic polyphos-
phonatophenyl ester carbonate from aryloxycarbonyloxy-benzoic
acid aryl ester and preparation thereof 4,381,390, CI. 528-167.000.
Schnettler, Richard A.: See —
Grisar, J. Martin; Schnettler, Richard A.; and Dage, Richard C.r
4,381.393. CI. 544-370.000.
Schnur, Rodney C, to Pfizer Inc. Hypoglycemic 5-substituted oxazoli-
dine-2,4-diones. 4,381,308, CI. 424-272.000.
Schnyder, William J., to Emerson Electric Co. Extended life, moisture
resistant electric motor. 4,381,464, CI. 310-45.000.
Schober, Heinz: See —
Latsch, Reinhard; Schober, Heinz; Muller, Gerhard; and Bianchi,
Valerio, 4,380,986, CI. 123-489.000.
Schoenberg, John, to Fairchild Industries, Inc. Valve and valving
apparatus. 4,381,100, CI. 251-368.000.
Schoening, Josef: See —
Elter, Claus; Kolodzey, Hans-Juergen; Schoening, Josef; Schwiers,
Hans-Georg; and Stracke, Wilfried, 4,381,282, CI. 376-292.000.
Schooley, Constance E. Cover for instant hot or cold pack. 4,381,025,
CI. 150-2.400.
Schromm, Kurt: See —
Koppe, Herbert; Mentrup, Anton; Renth, Ernst-Otto; Schromm,
Kurt; Hoefke, Wolfgang; and Muacevic, Gojko, 4,381,309, CI.
424-273.00B.
Schurman, Charles E.: See —
Schurman, Edwin A., 4,381,059, CI. 206-533.000.
Schurman, Edwin A., to Schurman, Charles E. Puzzle-locking con-
tainer and method for storing and dispensing articles. 4,381,059, CI.
206-533.000.
Schutt, Hartwig: See —
Bremus, Norbert; Dieckelmann, Gerhard; Jeromin, Lutz; Rupilius,
Wolfgang; and Schutt, Hartwig, 4,381,407, CI. 560-263.000.
Schwarz, Wolfgang: See —
Danz, Rudi; Stark, Wolfgang; Elling, Burkhard; Ruscher, Chris-
tian; and Schwarz, Wolfgang, 4,381,534, CI. 361-233.000.
Schwiers, Hans-Georg: See —
Elter, Claus; Kolodzey, Hans-Juergen; Schoening, Josef; Schwiers,
Hans-Georg; and Stracke, Wilfried, 4,381,282, CI. 376-292.000.
Schwonke, John J.: See —
Nozemack, Richard J.; Chi, Chang W.; and Schwonke, John J.,
4,381,255, CI. 252-455.00Z.
SCM Corporation: See —
Pajer, Raymond T.; and Guzman, Pedro T., 4,381,501, CI. 340-
365.00R.
Scott Machine Development Corporation: See —
Waldron, Gregory R., 4,380,874, CI. 33-184.500.
Scott, Norman H.: See —
Vora, Bipin V.; O'Brien, Dennis E.; and Scott, Norman H.,
4,381,417, CI. 585-655.000.
Scott Paper Company: See —
Anderson, Ralph L., 4,381,246, CI. 252-91.000.
Scotti, Frank: See —
Page, Edward H.; and Scotti, Frank, 4,381,066, CI. 222-394.000.
Sederquist, Richard A., to United Technologies Corporation. Process
for gasifying liquid hydrocarbon fuels. 4,381,187, CI. 48-212.000.
Seemann, Robert A. All season window. 4,380,994, CI. 126-431.000.
Seibert, Lloyd, to American Sign & Indicator Corporation. Matrix
display. 4,380,879, CI. 40-447.000.
Seider, Werner: See —
Bubik, Alfred; Seider, Werner; and Hefter, Josef, 4,381,219, CI.
162-299.000.
Selgrad, Volker: See —
Waizer, Walter; Helletsberger, Harald; Kriegshaber, Christof; and
Selgrad, Volker, 4,381,188, CI. 51-298.000.
Sell, Gunther: See —
Muller, Gerhard; and Sell, Gunther, 4,381,268, CI. 261-109.000.
Sell, John R. E>ouble diaphragm pump with controlling slide valve and
adjusuble stroke. 4,381,180, CI. 417-393.000.
Selwitz, Charles M.: See —
Beach, David L.; and Selwitz, Charles M., 4,381,414, CI.
585-10.000.
Sen, Rajat K.: See —
Hardee, Kenneth L.; Gordon, Arnold Z.; Pyle, Charles B.; and Sen,
Rajat K., 4,381,290, CI. 423-478.000.
Senoo, Takanori; Takeguchi, Nobuyasu; and Nomura, Kazuo, to Mat-
sushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Synchronously operatable PCM
recording processor. 4,381,525, CI. 360-32.000.
Senuma. Michio; and Shibuya, Jun, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha; and
Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha. Process for manufacturing shutter
screen blades. 4,380,857, CI. 29-417.000.
Sepahmansour, Faramarz: See —
Cheal, William E.; Gupta, Gokal C; Sepahmansour, Faramarz; and
Aggarwal, Avnish K., 4,381,427, CI. 179-2.0DP.
Sgourakes, George E.; and Lefebvre, Paul J., to Foxboro Company,
The. External sensing vortex flowmeter. 4,380,935, CI. 73-861.240.
Shapiro, David: See —
Reach, Roy W.; Kahn, William M.; and Shapiro, David, 4,381,554,
CI. 364-900.000.
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kanou, Ikuo; Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu; and Omori, Takuro,
4,381,551, CI. 364-900.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 21
Sharp, Ronald E.: See —
Nocilini, John D.; Sharp, Ronald E.; and Cuadra, Emilio J.,
4,381,552, CI. 364-900.000.
Shaw, Seth T., Jr. lUD Arrangement. 4,381,001, CI. 128-130.000.
Shay, Robert J. E.; and Smith, Wendell L., to International Business
Machines Corporation. Self-clocking write head. 4,381,524, CI.
360-2.000.
Shedigian, Vandos; and Voyles, Gerald A., to Emhart Industries, Inc.
Dielectric rtuid. 4,381,535, CI. 361-318.000.
Sheehan, John C; and Commons, Thomas J., to Massachusetts Institute
of Technology. Sulphur analogs of cephalosporins having a nucleo-
phile substituted in the 7 position. 4,381,300, CI. 424-246.000.
Shenango Incorporated: See —
Thomas, John W., 4,380,842, CI. 15-304.000.
Sherwood, Michael: See —
Davies, David O.; and Sherwood, Michael, 4,380,899. CI.
60-261.000.
Shibuya, Jun: See —
Senuma, Michio; and Shibuya, Jun, 4,380,857, CI. 29-417.000.
Shimada, Toshio: See —
Toga, Yuzo; Shimada, Toshio; and Komada, Hajime, 4,381,379, Ci.
525-444.000.
Shipley, Randall S., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Ultra high
efficiency catalyst for polymerizing olefms. 4,381,253, CI. 252-
431.00C.
Shipley, Randall S.; and Vance, Fred L., to Dow Chemical Company,
The. Polymerization of olefins from catalysts prepared from organo
zirconium-chromium compounds. 4,381,382, CI. 526-97.000.
Shirakawa, Kenzo; Matsumoto, Masao; and Yasunaka, Shinsaku, to
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. Electric shaver of reciprocating
drive type having trimmer blade. 4,380,869, CI. 30-34.100.
Shiromizu, Hisahani: See —
Kondo, Masaru; Shiromizu, Hisaharu; and leda, Yoshio, 4,381,198.
CI. 106-1.120.
Shop- Vac Corporation: See —
Miller, Jonathan O.; Strouse, Kerry E.; and Fegan, Richard M..
4.380,845, CI. 15-344.000.
Showa Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: See —
Tajima. Yasuari, 4,380,847, CI. 16-85.000.
Sidllarvey, Inc.: See—
Lindtveit, Herbert E.. 4,381,019, CI. 137-843.000. "^
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Adam, Peter; and Wehner, Ewald, 4,381,468, CI. 310-239.000.
Bahlinger, Walter, 4,381,518, CI. 357-79.000.
Gnest, Horst-Guenter; Granzow, Wolfgang-Dieter; Hartkopf,
Hans-Otto; and Zillmer. Adalbert, 4,381,094. CI. 246-182.00R.
Laenens, Werner, 4,381,466, CI. 310-103.000.
Renkl, Klaus; and Schmidt, Helmut. 4.381.465. CI. 310-49.00R
Signtech Inc.: See —
Gandy. James. 4,380,880, CI. 40-564.000.
Sills, Leland: See—
Wallding, Wayne A.; and Sills, Leland, 4,381,193, CI. 65-158.000.
Simes S.p.A.: See —
Casagrande, Cesare; and Ferrari, Giorgio, 4,381.305. CI.
424-263.000.
Simmons, Walter J.: See —
Loving, Frank A., Jr.; and Simmons, Walter J., 4,380,948. CI.
86-20.00C.
Simons. Charles R. Gameboard and carrying case. 4,381.113, CI.
273-286.000.
Singer Company, The: See —
Reinert. Gerhard; and Davidson, Donald R., 4,380,961, CI.
112-231.000.
Singh, Raj N., to General Electric Company. Method of etching to
form cationically-conductive ceramic body. 4,381,216, CI.
156-667.000.
Sirchie Fingerprint Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Payne, John M., 4,381,159, CI. 401-118.000.
SK & F Lab Co.: See—
Teraji, Tsutomu; Nakai, Yoshiharu; and Durant, Graham J.,
4,381,395, CI. 548-342.000.
Skaja, Joseph J., to Keds Corporation. Outsole. 4,380,878, CI. 36-
67.00D.
Skidmore, Frank O. Tire cooling structure. 4,381,026, CI. 152-153.000.
Slattery, Sidney E.: Sec-
Smart, Richard B.; and Slattery, Sidney E., 4,380.905. CI.
60-756.000.
Sloan, Kenneth B., to Merck & Co., Inc. Soft tertiary amine esters of
bio-affecting carboxylic acids. 4,381,307, CI. 424-271.000.
Smart, Richard B.; and Slattery, Sidney E., to Rolls-Royce Limited.
Gas turbine engine combustion chambers. 4,380,905, CI. 60-756.000.
Smart, Robert L. Fork unit having adjustable forks. 4,381,166, CI.
414-685.000.
Smith, Curtis P.: See—
Georgacopoulos, Costas N.; and Smith, Curtis P., 4,381,364, CI.
524-373.000.
Smith, Francis X.: See —
Mandt, Lawrence D.; Riedhammer, Thomas M.; and Smith, Fran-
cis X., 4.381.314. CI. 424-333.000.
Smith. Harry D., Jr., to Texaco Inc. Neutron-inelastic gamma radiation
well logging method and apparatus with background radiation ac-
counted for. 4,381,449, CI. 250-270.000.
Smith, Tennyson, to United States of America, Air Force. Hand-holda-
ble contamination tester. 4,381,151, CI. 356-369.000.
Smith, Wendell L.: See-
Shay, Robert J. E.; and Smith, Wendell L., 4,381,524, CI. 360-2.000.
Smock, Steven W.; and Adams. George W., to Emhart Industnes, Inc
Coin operated timing mechanism. 4,381,430, CI 200-35. OOR
Snia Viscosa Societa' Nazionale Industna Applicazioni Viscosa SpA:
See —
Magni, Eugenio; and Pemetti. Claudio, 4.381,186, CI 8-620000
Snyder, John W : See-
Groom, Jay L., Jr.; Perine, John D.; Snyder, John W.; and Vair,
Gary G., 4,381,563, CI. 371-29.000.
Sobel, Martin: See —
Thomas, Joseph J.; and Sobel, Martin, 4,381,008, CI 604-265 000.
Societe Anonyme dite Compagnie Generate d'Electricite: See —
Le Mehaute, Alain; Rouxel, Jean; and Le Blanc-Soreau, Annie.
4,381,258. CI. 252-519.000.
Societe Anonyme dite: L'OREAL: See-
Bouillon, Claude; Abegg, Jean-Louis; Koulbanis, Constantin. and
Darmenton, Patrick, 4,381,294, CI. 424-61.000
Societe Nationale des Poudres et Explosifs: See—
Boileau, Sylvie L.; Meunier, Gilles F.; and Joumeau. Sabme M.,
4,381,385, CI. 526-230.500.
Emeury, Jean-Marie; and Wimmer, Enc, 4,381.400. CI.
549-464.000.
Sojkowski, James S.: See —
Balk, Leizer. deceased; and Sojkowski, James S.. 4.381.334, CI
428-332.000.
Somers. Lewis S.. 3rd. Enteral feeding apparatus and method
4,381,011, CI. 128-635.000.
Sony Corporation: See —
Wilkinson, James H.; and Collins, Mark C, 4,381,519. CI 358-
21. OOR.
Sorensen, Jens O., to Trade Finance International. Stabilized core
injection molding of plastic 4,381,275, CI 264-328.800
Sorgenicht, Dietrich: See —
Riech, Volker; and Sorgenicht, Dietrich. 4,381.152. CI
356-385.000.
Sperry Corporation: See —
Baker, Dan C, 4,381,550, CI. 364-766.000
Baumann, Charles G., Jr.; and Danilenko, Michael. 4,381,541, CI.
364-200.000.
Matthews, Hugh B., 4,380,903, CI. 60-641 400.
Spitzer, Hermann J. Combined solar collector and storage pond.
4,380,993, CI. 126-415.000.
Sprague Electric Company: See —
Arora, Mulk R., 4,381,231. CI. 204-129.750.
Ross. Sidney D.; and Finkelstein, Manuel, 4,381,536. CI.
361-433.000.
Sprenkle, George J., to Burroughs Corporation Zero insertion force
connector for integrated circuit packages. 4,381,130, CI. 339-74.00R.
Spring AG, Metollwarenfabrik: See-
Spring, Markus, 4,380,992, CI. 126-43.000
Spring, Markus, to Spring AG, MeUllwarenfabrik Burner, especially
for a flambe portable stove or the like. 4,380,992, CI. 126-43.000.
Sprunt, Eve S.: See —
Podhrasky, Julius; and Sprunt, Eve S., 4,380,930, CI 73-594.000
Spurlock, Harold N. Process for the preparation of urea-formaldehyde
resins. 4,381,368, CI. 524-598.000.
Stamm, Michael E., to Northwest Energy Company. Process and
apparatus for geotechnic exploration. 4,381,544, CI. 364-420.000.
Stamm, Thomas A.; See —
Mott, Richard C; and Stamm, Thomas A.. 4,380.932, CI
73-749.000.
Stamp, Custis L., Jr.; and Herzog, Rollie R., to Trane CAC, Inc. Auto-
matic fault diagnostic apparatus for a heat pump air conditioning
system. 4,381,549, CI. 364-557.000.
Standard Oil Company, The: See—
Pedersen, S. Erik; and Wagner, Louis F., 4,381,411, CI
568-459.000.
Standard Oil Company (Indiana): See —
Donohue, John A., 4,381,229, CI. 204-75.000.
Standiford, Ferris C, to Resources Conservation Company. Production
of concentrated alcohol and distillery slop. 4,381,220, CI. 202-154.000.
Stark, Wolfgang: See—
Danz, Rudi; Surk, Wolfgang; Elling, Burkhard; Ruscher, Chris-
tian; and Schwarz, Wolfgang, 4,381,534, CI. 361-233.000.
Sutewide Pools, Inc.: See-
Coma, John F.; and Blais, Marcel H., 4.380,837, CI. 4-510.000.
Stauffer Chemical Company: See—
Carron, Mark S.; and McCarthy, Desmond C, 4,381,190, CI.
55-30.000.
Hyzak, Daniel L., 4,381,195, CI. 71-100.000.
Hyzak, Daniel L., 4,381,196, CI. 71-100.000.
Weiss, Samuel; and Lechuga, Andrew R., 4,381,288, CI.
423-101.000.
Steensma, Peter D., to International Telephone and Telegraph Corpo-
ration. Frequency synthesizer. 4,381,461, CI. 307-529.000.
Steinbrecher Corporation: See—
Steinbrecher, Donald H., 4,381,485, CI. 324-58.00C.
Steinbrecher, Donald H., to Steinbrecher Corporation. Microwave test
apparatus and method. 4,381,485, CI. 324-58.00C.
Steingroever, Dietrich: See —
Steingroever, Erich; and Steingroever, Dietnch, 4,381,492, CI.
335-284.000.
Steingroever, Erich; and Steingroever, Dietrich. Apparatus for magne-
tizing multipolar permanent magnets. 4,381,492, CI. 335-284.000.
Steinhoff, Karl: See—
Muhr, Richard; and Steinhoff, Karl, 4,381,169, CI. 414-753.000.
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Steinke. Leo, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Glow plug for diesel engines.
4.380.973. CI. 123-145.00A.
Stelzer, James S.: See —
Hertzler. Merle E.; and Stelzer. James S., 4,381,486, CI.
324-404.000.
Stephenson. Robert L.; and Frankila, John W., to Allied Corporation.
Seat belt retractor with reduced spooling. 4,381,085, CI. 242-107.300.
Stepnov, Xenofont X.: See —
Leschinsky, Leonid K.; Gulakov, Sergei V.; Stepnov, Xenofont X.;
Nosovsky, Boris I.; Bendrik, Valery G.; Dubinsky, Boris E.;
Isirov, Dmitry I.; and Zelensky, Viktor E., 4,380,852,
29-121.200.
Stetson, Robert L.:
Lang. Linton
376-172.000.
Stewart. David A.:
See —
W.;
CI.
and Stetson, Robert L., 4,381,281, CI.
See —
United Sutes of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; Stewart, David A.; Goldstein, Howard E.; and Leiser,
Daniel B., 4,381.333, CI. 428-312.600.
Stewart, William H., Jr., to Milliken Research Corporation. Belt false
twistmg apparatus. 4,380,890. CI. 57-286.000.
Stokes. Richard F.; Timm. James D.; LaCroix. Stephen R.; and Adams.
Milton R., to Garrett Corporation, The. Compressor bleed air control
apparatus and method. 4,380,893, CI. 60-39.070.
Stracke. Wilfried: See—
Elter, Claus; Kolodzey, Hans-Juergen; Schoening, Josef; Schwiers,
Hans-Georg; and Stracke. Wilfried. 4.381,282, CI. 376-292.000.
Strassburg, Ronald A., to W. R. Weaver Co. Reticle a.id method of
making the same. 4.380,876. CI. 33-297.000.
Streck. Roland; See —
Kampf. Wolfgang; Streck. Roland; and Haag, Horst-guenter.
4,381.377. CI. 525-375.000.
Strouse. Kerry E.: See-
Miller. Jonathan O.; Strouse, Kerry E.; and Fegan. Richard M..
4.380.845. CI. 15-344.000.
StruthofT. Holger, to ITT Industries, Inc. Monolithic integrable R-2R
network. 4,381,499, CI. 34O-347.0DA.
Struve, Alfred, to Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft Auf Aktien. Process
for the conjugation of the double bonds of F)oly unsaturated fatty acids
and fatty acid mixtures. 4,381.264, CI. 260-405.600.
Stumpp, Gerhard: See —
Linder, Ernst; Babitzka, Rudolf; Brettschneider, Johannes; Poiach,
Wilhelm; Wessel. Wolf; and Stumpp, Gerhard, 4,380,900, CI.
60-275.000.
Suga, Yoshinori: See—
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Suzuki, Masatoshi; Goko,
Nobuaki; and Nishihara, Yasuhiro. 4,381,383, CI. 526-142.000.
Sugden, David B., to Robbins Company. The. Raise bit with cutters
stepped in a spiral and nywheel. 4.381.038, CI. 175-344.000.
Sugmo, Takashi; and Itoh, Kunio, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd. Method of making a semiconductor laser by liquid phase epitax-
ial growths. 4,380,861, CI. 29-569.00L.
Sullivan, Robert P.; and Jacobs, Clyde L., to Combustion Engineering,
Inc. Droop correction structure and condensate control in sootblow-
ers. 4.380.843, CI. 15-316.00R.
Sulzbach. Reinhard A., to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Quaterpolymers
of the tetrafluoroethylene/ethylene type. 4,381.387. CI. 526-247.000.
Sumitomo Metal Industries, Ltd.: See—
Yamazakj, Akira, 4,380.859. CI. 29-428.000.
Sumitomo Naugatuck Co.. Ltd.: See —
Mishiba, Saburo; Hyoda, Junkoh; Uchida. Akira; Usami. Hisao; and
Waunabe, Akira, 4,381,365. CI. 524-460.000.
Sumitomo Rubber Industries. Ltd.: See—
Oda, Ryoichi; and luchi, Munenori, 4,380,927, CI. 73-146.000.
Sung, Harry M., to Chevron Research Company. Method and appara-
tus for co-generation of electrical power and absorption-type heat
pump air conditioning. 4.380.909, CI. 62-79.000.
Sunohara. Yoshio; Ohtsuka, Kunio; and Sakamoto, Kenichi, to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd. Vacuum modulator arrangement for an automatic
transmission. 4.381.050. CI. 192-1.000.
Sunset Ltd.: See—
Guibert, Raul, 4,381,442, CI. 219-400.000.
Guibert, Raul, 4,381,443, CI. 219-400.000.
Sutoh, Shinji: See —
Hara, Toshizo; Sutoh, Shinji; and Kojima, Toshio, 4,381,480, CI.
318-471.000.
Suzuki, Kiyoshi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Process for preparing
photoconductive particles. 4,381,338, CI. 430-135.000.
Suzuki, Masamichi, to Amano Corporation. Printing device for a time
recorder. 4,381,511, CI. 346-20.000.
Suzuki, Masatoshi: See —
Hasuo, Masayoshi; Suga, Yoshinori; Suzuki, Masatoshi; Goko,
Nobuaki; and Nishihara. Yasuhiro. 4,381,383, CI. 526-142.000.
Svensson, Tord. Sludge robot. 4,381,237, CI. 210-138.000.
Swanson, Sally A.; Weinshenker, Ned M.; Wingard. Robert E.. Jr.; and
Dawson. Daniel J., to Dynapol. Water-fast printing with water-solu-
ble dyes. 4.381.185. CI. 8-506.000.
Swanson. William C: See—
Fardal. Randolph G.; Robinson, Edward L., Jr.; and Swanson.
William C. 4.381,036. CI. 172-2.000.
Swartz, William E.: See—
Brotsky, Eugene; Everson, Charles W.; and Swartz, William E ,
4,381,316. CI. 426-265.000.
Sweeney, John M.: See—
Douglas, Robin S.; and Sweeney, John M., 4,381,016, CI
134-170.000.
Sylvan, Richard: See —
Ferdinand, Irwin J.; Sylvan, Richard; and Peterson. Michael.
. 4.381,103. CI. 269-1.000.
Szabat, John F., to Mobay Chemical Corporation. Combustion modi-
fied flexible polyurethane foam. 4.381,351. CI. 521-107.000.
Tabakov, Vladimir P.: See —
Verty. Vladimir G.; Voronin. Pavel G.; Gurov, Evgeny I.; Zub-
kov, Vitaly S.; Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Tabakov, Vladimir P.;
Khvoschinsky, Boris B.; and Judin, Vladimir N., 4.381,124. CI
299-2.000.
Tajima, Yasuari, to Showa Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Device for mount-
ing gas spring for opening automobile hatch door. 4,380,847, CI
16-85.000.
Takahashi, Seiichi: See —
lijima, Tetsuya; and Takahashi, Seiichi, 4.381,074, CI. 236-13.000.
Takahashi, Soji: See —
Uchida, Fumihiko; Sato, Kazuo; and Takahashi, Soji, 4,380,917, CI.
72-8.000.
Takaki, Iwao, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Ignition system for internal
combustion engine. 4,380,989. CI. 123-644.000.
Takase. Sadao. to Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd. Idling revolution control
device for an internal combustion engine. 4,380.979, CI. 123-339.000.
Takeda. Kenji: See —
Isaka. Kazuo; Nakahata. Kimio; Sakurai, Masaaki; Watanabe,
Tsuyoshi; Kan, Fumitaka; and Takeda, Kenji. 4.380.966. CI.
118-651.000.
Takeguchi. Nobuyasu: See —
Senoo. Takanori; Takeguchi, Nobuyasu; and Nomura, Kazuo,
4,381,525, CI. 360-32.000.
Takenaka, Kenji: See —
Nakayama, Shozo; Kato, Kimio; Araki, Nobuyuki; and Takenaka,
Kenji, 4,381,178, CI. 417-269.000.
Takeuchi, Koichi; and Miyata, Katsuharu, to Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals,
Incorporated. Process for the preparation of polymefhylene poly-
phenyl polyisocyanate composition. 4.381,405, CI. 560-25.000.
Takizawa, Hiroshi; Oiji, Yoshimasa; and Kubo, Kazuhiro, to Kyowa
Hakko Kogyo Co.. Ltd. Amino-alcohol derivatives. 4.381,398, CI.
549-366.000.
Tamura. Hideyuki: See —
Enoshima, Toshio; Furuhashi, Shoji; and Tamura, Hideyuki,
4,380,981, CI. 123-415.000.
Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd.: See —
Chibata, Ichiro; Tosa, Tetsuya; Sato, Tadashi; Watanabe, Taizo;
and Minobe, Satoshi, 4,381,239, CI. 210-679.000.
Tanaka, Teruaki, to Daidotokushuko Kabushikikaisha. Rolling appara-
tus for sequential rolling. 4,380,916, CI 72-7.000.
Tangherlini, Vincent C: See —
Johnson, Wayne S.; and Tangherlini, Vincent C, 4,381,168, CI.
414-737.000.
Taquoi, Jean-Pierre, to B.S.L. (Bignier Schmid-Laurent). Container.
4,381,062, CI. 220-71.000.
Taszarek, Bruce J.; and Junker. Warren R.. to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. Method and apparatus for ultrasonic detection of near-surface
discontinuities. 4.380,929. CI. 73-579.000.
Taylor, Lyle H., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Radiative removal of
lower laser level bottlenecking. 4,381,565, CI. 372-91.000.
Taylor, Michael J., to Rogers Corporation. High capacitance bus bar
manufacturing technique. 4,381,423, CI. 174-72.00B.
Taylor, Thomas J.: See —
Elliott, William A.; and Taylor, Thomas J., 4,381,420, CI.
174-34.000.
Technical Research Centre of Finland, The: See—
Aaltonen, OUi; Alkio, Martti; Avela, Eero; and Housh, Riitta-
Maija, 4,381,370, CI. 525-54.210.
Tecumseh Corrugated Box Company: See—
Vergiels, Vem O., 4,381,071, CI. 229-16.00R. .
Teegarden, Kenneth J.: See —
Berg, David M.; and Teegarden, Kenneth J., 4,381,137, CI.
350-96.180.
Teichmann, Robert J.; and Mayer, Linda J., to Occidental Chemical
Corporation. Process and composition for the electrodeposition of tin
and tin alloys. 4,381,228, CI. 204-44.000.
Tekma Kinomat S.p.A.: See —
Camardella, Giuseppe, 4,380,919, CI. 72-132.000.
Tektronix, Inc.: See —
Coats, Warren D.; and Kamerling, Marc A.. 4,381,421, CI. 174-
35.00R.
Teraji, Tsutomu; Sakane, Kazuo; and Goto, Jiro, to Fujisawa Pharma-
ceutical Co., Ltd. 7-Amino-thiadiazole oxyimino derivatives of
cephem and cepham compounds. 4,381,299, CI. 424-246.000.
Teraji, Tsutomu; Nakai, Yoshiharu; and Durant, Graham J., to SK & F
Lab Co. Process for preparing an imidazole derivative. 4,381,395, CI.
548-342.000.
Terrill, Garrett D.: See—
Daghe, Joseph L.; Hauffe, William L.; and Terrill, Garrett D.,
4,381,020, CI. 138-99.000.
Teva Pharmaceutical Industries Ltd.: See —
Citri. Nathan, 4,381,343, CI. 435-24.000.
Texaco Inc.: See —
McDaniel, Kenneth G., 4,381,353, CI. 521-131.000.
Smith, Harry D., Jr., 4,381,449, CI. 250-270.000.
Texas Instruments Incorporated: See —
Rao, G. R. Mohan, 4,380,863, CI. 29-571.000.
Textron Inc.: See —
Naples, Gerald, 4,381,388, CI. 528-59.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Thatcher Glass Corporation: See —
Wallding, Wayne A.; and Sills, Leland, 4.381,193. CI. 65-158.000.
Thermo Electron Corporation: See —
Rounbehler, David P.; and Reisch. John W.. 4.381,408, CI.
564-112.000.
Thermonic Corp.: See —
Cargill, N. Allen; and Bunten, Theodore M., 4,381,075, CI. 237-
8.00R.
Tholen, Paul; Lichtblau, Leo; Albers, Friedemann; and Esche, Dieter,
to Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz Aktiengesellschaft. Internal combus-
tion engine having a retarder. 4,380,971, CI. 123-41.310.
Thomas, Doverd E. Apparatus for unloading poultry. 4,380,969, CI.
119-82.000.
Thomas, John W., to Shenango Incorporated. Tool support apparatus.
4,380,842, CI. 15-304.000.
Thomas, Joseph J.; and Sobel, Martin, to Johnson & Johnson. Methods
of improving surface characteristics of extruded thermoplastic tubing
and products produced thereby. 4,381,008, CI. 604-265.000.
Thomas, Robert R., to Hopkins Manufacturing Corporation. Oil dip
stick wiper unit. 4,380,841, CI. 15-210.00B.
Thompson, David L.; and Zobel, Donald W., to Medtronic, Inc. Heart
pacemaker with integrated injection logic energy saving circuitry.
4,381,010, CI. 128-419.0PG.
Thompson, Sylvia B.: See —
Flowers, Dervin L.; and Thompson, Sylvia B., 4,381,213, CI.
156-606.000.
Thomson-CSF: See-
Bourdon, Guy; and Lehureau, Jean-Claude, 4,381,556, CI.
369-44.000.
Morizot, Jean P.; and Gerber, Rene, 4,381,475, CI. 315-39.300.
Timm, James D.: See —
Stokes, Richard F.; Timm, James D.; LaCroix, Stephen R.; and
Adams, Milton R., 4,380,893, CI. 60-39.070.
Tinnell, James E. Treatment for herpes virus. 4,381,296, CI.
424-148.000.
Titus, Theodore, IV; and Cutler, Timothy D., to Lanier Business Prod-
ucts, Inc. Cassette changing method and apparatus. 4,381,527, CI.
360-92.000.
Todt, William H.: See-
Chen, Cheng L.; Goldstein, Norman P.; and Todt, William H.,
4,381,451, CI. 250-390.000.
Toga, Yuzo; Shimada, Toshio; and Komada, Hajime, to Daicel Chemi-
cal Industries, Ltd. Polyester containing 2-methyl-l,3-propylene
terephthalate units. 4,381,379, CI. 525-444.000.
Tokyo Juki Industrial Co., Ltd.: See —
Barozzi, Gian P.; and Horeschi, Giancarlo, 4,381,156, CI.
400-296.100.
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Harada, Nozomu, 4,381,517, CI. 357-30.000.
Komori, Toshiyuki, 4,381,455, CI. 250-554.000.
Miyazawa, Susumu; and Fukuda, Norisuke, 4,381,439, CI. 219-
10.55B.
Tokyo Shibaura Electric Co., Ltd.: See —
Fujioka, Masahiko, 4,381,528, CI. 360-97.000.
Tomasino, Luigi: See —
Griffith, Richard V.; Hankins, Dale E.; Tomasino, Luigi; and
Gomaa, Mohamed A. M., 4,381,454, CI. 250-472.100.
Tominaga, Tamotsu: See —
Owada, Nobuyoshi; and Tominaga, Tamotsu, 4,381,530, CI.
360-130.230.
Toray Industries, Inc.: See —
Masuda, Yutaka; Kiyomura, Yoshiteni; and Nishizakura, Koichi,
4,381,325, CI. 428-91.000.
Okamoto, Miyoshi, 4,381,335, CI. 428-373.000.
Tosa, Tetsuya: See —
Chibata, Ichiro; Tosa, Tetsuya; Sato, Tadashi; Waunabe. Taizo;
and Minobe, Satoshi, 4,381,239, CI. 210-679.000.
Toth, Istvan, to Sandoz Ltd. Process for the production of 2,4-dini-
troanilines. 4,381,409, CI. 564-406.000.
Touret, Jean P., to Rockwell International Corporation. Needle posi-
tioning device for sewing machines. 4,380,962, CI. 112-274.000.
Toumier, Gilles F. A., to ITT. Flat cable connector. 4,381,132, CI.
339-99.00R.
Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Gotomyo, Yasuo; and Nakagawa, Yukihiro, 4,381,330, CI.
428-218.000.
Toyo Seikan Kaisha, Ltd.: See —
Abe, Katsuo; Nishio, Masahiro; and Matsubara, Akira, 4,380,964,
CI. 118-50.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kobashi, Mamoru, 4,380,982, CI. 123-416.000.
Kobashi, Mamoru; and Miyagi, Hideo, 4,380,983, CI. 123-424.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Hyodo, Youichi, 4,381,053, CI. 192-1 1 l.OOA.
Nakayama, Haruhiko; Nagai, Masahiko; and Yano, Minoru,
4,381,429, CI. 20O-19.00R.
Trade Finance International: See —
Sorensen, Jens O., 4,381,275, CI. 264-328.800.
Traini, Oscar, to DAMP, S.p.A. Spacer-damper for wires of aerial
electrical lines. 4,381,422, CI. 174-42.000.
Trane CAC, Inc.: See —
Sump, Custis L., Jr.; and Herzog, Rollie R., 4,381,549, CI.
364-557.000.
Treiber, Robert, to International Telephone and Telegraph Corpora-
tion. All digital LSI line circuit for analog lines. 4,381,561, CI.
370-24.000.
Tri-tech, Inc.: See —
Geremia. Leo F., 4,381.437, CI. 20O-153.0LB.
Trico Products Corporation: See —
Riester, William C; and Papadatos, Dionysios D., 4.380.860. CI.
29-453.000.
Trouillet, Jean: See —
Drevet, Michel P.; and Trouillet, Jean, 4,381,126, CI. 384-114.000.
Troussier, Maurice: See —
Grimaud. Edouard; and Troussier, Maurice, 4,381,350, CI.
521-31.000.
Trummlitz. Gunter: See —
Schmidt. Gunther; Engel, Wolfhard; Eberlein, Wolfgang; Trumm-
litz, Gunter; and Engelhardt, Gunther. 4,381,303, CI.
424-252.000.
Trusty, Gary L.: See —
Ulrich, Peter B.; Trusty, Gary L.; and Leslie, Daniel H., 4.381,148,
CI. 356-213.000.
Tsukuda Co., Ltd.: See —
Komagata, Tadashi, 4,380,885, CI. 46-220.000.
Tsumura, Yuzo; and Iwata, Masatoshi, to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu
Seisakusho. Diesel fuel injection nozzle. 4,381,077, CI. 239-89.000.
Tsunetsugu, Takaaki. Toilet paper holder. 4,381,083, CI. 242-55.200
Tsuruga, Kouji: See —
Leistner, William E.; Minagawa, Motonobu; Tsuruga, Kouji; and
Harada, Masashi, 4,381,360, CI. 524-178.000.
Tsuyuki, Kaoru: See —
Isshiki, Tomiya; Yoshino, Hisashi; and Tsuyuki, Kaoru, 4,381,221,
CI. 203-6.000.
Tuin, Hermanus N.: See —
van der Hoek, Willem; and Tuin, Hermanus N., 4,381,140, CI.
350-96.230.
Turkia, Erkki, to Oy. Tampella AB. Method of increasing the tempera-
ture of shower water used in a wood grinding process. 4,381,217, CI.
162-23.000.
Tyrolit-Schleifmittelwerke Swarovski KG: See —
Waizer, Walter; Helletsberger, Harald; Kriegshaber, Christof; and
Selgrad, Volker, 4,381,188, CI. 51-298.000.
Uchida, Akira: See —
Mishiba, Saburo; Hyoda, Junkoh; Uchida, Akira; Usami, Hisao; and
Watanabe, Akira, 4,381,365, CI. 524-460.000.
Uchida, Fumihiko; Sato, Kazuo; and Takahashi, Soji, to Hitachi, Ltd.
Tube-bending machine. 4,380,917. CI. 72-8.000.
UfTord, Keith A.: See—
Sandstrom, Richard D.; Dutcher, Robert G.; and UfTord, Keith A.,
4,381,014, CI. 128-786.000.
Ulrich, Peter B.; Trusty, Gary L.; and Leslie, Daniel H., to United
States of America, Navy. Power meter for high energy lasers.
4,381,148, CI. 356-213.000.
Umphrey, Ronald W.: See —
Doerr, Richard E.; Dahl, Hilbert D.; and Umphrey, Ronald W.,
4,381,161, CI. 406-109.000.
Union Carbide Corporation: See —
Chu, Nan S.; and Marlin, Uwrence, 4,381,260, CI. 260- 144.000.
Fuderer, Andrija, 4,381,189, CI. 55-26.000.
Gibson, Charles A.; Ahmed, Moinuddin; and Habenschuss, Mi-
chael, 4,381,223, CI. 203-91.000.
United Aircraft Products, Inc.: See —
Hall, Robert E., 4,380,868, CI. 29-726.000.
United States of America
Agriculture: See —
Fronczak, Frank J.; and Hunt, John F., 4,381,023, CI.
144-365.000.
Air Force: See —
Cappelli, John R., 4,381,450, CI. 250-370.000.
Chen, Paul Y.; and Marvel, Carl S., 4,381,391, CI. 528-173.000.
Das, Pankaj K., 4,380,864, CI. 29-574.000.
Fritts, David H.; and Leonard, John F., 4,380,926, CI. 73-83.000.
Reinhart, Theodore J., Jr., 4,381,363, CI. 524-324.000.
Rotman, Walter; and Franchi, Peter R., 4,381,509, CI.
343-754.000.
Smith, Tennyson, 4,381,151, CI. 356-369.000.
Army: See —
Betts, Robert E., 4,380,958, CI. 102-202.200.
Curtis, Richard A., 4.381,150, CI. 356-247.000.
Filler, Raymond L.; and Vig, John R., 4,381,471, CI. 310-353.000.
Gamer, William G., 4,381,090, CI. 244-3.160.
Grant, Louis R.; and Flanagan, Joseph E., 4,381,206, Q.
149-22.000.
Mon, George, 4,381,002, CI. 128-204.240.
Roberts. Thomas G., 4,381.280, CI. 376-105.000.
Rodgers, Aubrey, 4,381,448, CI. 250-227.000.
Wiebe, David J.. 4.380,896. CI. 60-39.320.
Energy: See —
Doss, James D., 4,381,007, CI. 128-303.100.
Griffith, Richard V.; Hankins, Dale E.; Tomasino, Luigi; and
Gomaa, Mohamed A. M., 4,381,454, CI. 250-472.100.
Interior: See —
MacDonald, David J.; and Henry, Helen G., 4,381,287, CI.
423-70.000.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration; administrator;
with respect to an invention of:
Stewart, David A.; Goldstein, Howard E.; and Leiser, Daniel B.
High temperature glass thermal control structure and coating.
4,381,333, CI. 428-312.600.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration: See —
Obler, Henry D., 4,381,174. CI. 417-15.000.
f
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
April 26, 1983
Navy: See —
Frost, Harold M.; Prout, James H.; and Reed, Robert W.,
4,380,931, CI. 73-643.000.
Kolesar. Robert R.; Rickard, John T.; and Zeidler, James R.,
4,381.428. CI. 179-15.55R.
Ulrich, Peter B.; Tnisty. Gary L.; and Leslie, Daniel H.,
4,381,148, CI. 356-213.000.
U.S. Philips Corporation: See —
Bergmans, Christianus H. J., 4,381,477. CI. 315-408.000.
Bouwma, Jan; and Kerssen, Johannes. 4,381,529, CI. 360-123.000.
Canning, Jonathan R., deceased; Moulding, Kenneth W. and
Wilson, Gordon A., 4,381,489. CI. 333-215.000.
van der Hoek, Willem; and Tuin, Hermanus N., 4.381,140, CI.
350-96.230.
United Technologies Corporation: See —
Dierberger, James A., 4,380,906, CI. 60-757.000.
Freling, Melvin, 4.381.173. CI. 416-96.00A.
Martino. Michael S., 4,380,925, CI. 73-66.000.
Newman, Leon A., 4,381,564, CI. 372-87.000.
Sederquist, Richard A., 4,381,187, CI. 48-212.000.
University of Rochester: See —
Deckman, Harry W.; Halpem, Gerald M.; and Dunsmuir, John G.,
4,380,855, CI. 29-407.000.
UOP Inc : See—
Antos, George J., 4,381,257, CI. 252-466.00B.
Gewartowski, Steve A.; and O'Brien, Dennis E., 4,381,418, CI.
585-655.000.
Rohrbach, Ronald P.; and Maliarik, Mary J.. 4.381.345. CI
435-94.000.
Vora, Bipin V.; O'Brien, Dennis E.; and Scott. Norman H..
4.381.417. CI. 585-655.000
Upjohn Company. The: See —
Georgacopoulos, Costas N.; and Smith, Curtis P., 4,381,364, CI.
524-373.000.
Uranium Pechiney Uginc Kuhlmann: See—
Floreancig, Antoine, 4,381,286, CI. 423-9.000,
Grimaud. Edouard; and Troussier, Maurice. 4.381.350, CI
521-31.000.
Urata, Yoshihito; Kubo, Hideyuki; and Sasaki. Toshiharu. to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Keyboard apparatus. 4,381.500, CI.
34O-365.0VL.
Usami, Hisao: See—
Mishiba, Saburo; Hyoda, Junkoh; Uchida, Akira; Usami, Hisao; and
Watanabe. Akira, 4.381,365, CI. 524-460.000.
Usui Kokusai Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kikuchi, Yasubee, 4,381.051, CI. 192-82.00T.
Vair, Gary G.: See —
Groom. Jay L., Jr.; Perine, John D.; Snyder, John W.; and Vair,
Gary G.. 4.381.563, CI. 371-29.000.
Vance. Fred L.: See-
Shipley, Randall S.; and Vance. Fred L., 4,381,382, CI. 526-97.000.
Vanderford, Delbert E., Jr.. to Cameron Iron Works. Inc. PackofT and
seal nng assembly with injected plastic packing. 4,381,114. CI
277-34.600.
van der Hoek. Willem; and Tuin. Hermanus N., to U.S. Philips Corpo-
ration. Optical fiber cable. 4,381,140, CI. 350-96.230.
van der Lely. Ary; and Bom, Comelis J. G., to C. Van der Lely N.V.
Spreading device for effecting a uniform distribution of material such
as fertilizer. 4,381.080. CI. 239-666.000.
Van Heyningen. Roger S., to Eastman Kodak Company. Liquid jet
method for coating photographic recording media. 4.381,342. CI
430-496.000.
Van Scoy. Davis A., to Grove Valve and Regulator Company. Tube
mounting for orifice meter. 4,380,936, CI. 73-861.620.
Vergiels. Vem O., to Tecumseh Corrugated Box Company. Foldable
blank box. 4,381,071, CI. 229-16.00R.
Verty. Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.; Gurov, Evgeny I.; Zubkov.
Viuly S.; Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Tabakov, Vladimir P.; Khvos-
chinsky, Boris B.; and Judin, Vladimir N. Method of mining and oil
deposit. 4,381,124. CI. 299-2.000.
Vessels. John B. Agricultural spray nozzle with fluid operated orifice
cleaning member. 4.381,078. CI. 239-118.000.
Victor Company of Japan, Limited: See—
Machida, Toyotaka; Noda, Teniaki; and Ikemura, Yuichi,
4,381,520. CI. 358-29.000.
Saito. Takashi, 4,381,559. CI. 369-77.000.
Vig, John R.: See—
.Filler, Raymond L.; and Vig, John R., 4,381,471, CI. 310-353.000.
Visser. Teunis, to IHC Holland N.V. Sealed bearing 4 381 127 CI
384-151.000. 6 . . . •
Vitale. Nicholas G., to Mechanical Technology Incorporated. Sealed
oil-backed displacer suspension diaphragm. 4.380,902. CI. 60-520.000.
Vogelgesang. Peter J., to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Com-
pany Device to slow solenoid actuation motion. 4,381,491 CI
335-257.000.
Vohr, John H., to General Electric Company. Vibration damping
tilting pad journal bearing. 4.381,128, CI. 384-154.000.
von Bonin, Wulf; Mummenhoff, Peter; and Baumgen, Heinz, to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft. Sizing agents for paper and a process for the
production thereof 4,381,367, CI. 524-549.000.
von der Wettem, Walter; and Albrecht, Harald, to Gebr. von der
Wettem GmbH. Covering, a process of producing it and the use
thereof 4,381,357, CI. 524-68.000.
Von Kohom. Henry. Conductive ball. 4,381,109, CI. 273-61.00R.
W.
w.
CI.
and
KG.
von Musil, Rudolf: See —
Grunewald, Peter; Jung, Peter; and von Musil, Rudolf, 4,381,467.
CI. 310-213.000.
Vora, Bipin V.; O'Brien, Dennis E.; and Scott, Norman H., to UOP Inc.
Catalytic dehydrogenation process. 4,381,417, CI. 585-655.000.
Voronin, Pavel G.: See —
Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.; Gurov, Evgeny I.; Zub-
kov. Vitaly S.; Obrezkov. Alexandr I.; Tabakov, Vladimir P.;
Khvoschinsky, Boris B.; and Judin, Vladimir N., 4,381,124, CI
299-2.000.
Vosh, Lawrence J.; and D'Angelo, Kenneth R., to Burroughs Corpora-
tion. Multipart continuous form. 4,381,119, CI. 282-1 1.50A.
Voyles, Gerald A.: See —
Shedigian, Vandos; and Voyles, Gerald A., 4,381,535. CI
361-318.000.
R. Grace & Co.: See —
Fulmer, Glenn E.; and Wood, Louis L., 4,381,332, CI. 428-288 000
Hildebrandt, Darrell E., 4,381,256, CI. 252-455.00Z.
Nozemack, Richard J.; Chi, Chang W.; and Schwonke, John J .
4,381,255, CI. 252-455.00Z.
R. Weaver Co.: See—
Strassburg, Ronald A., 4,380,876, CI. 33-297.000.
Wabing S.r.l.: See—
Betta, Walter, 4,380,949, CI. 87-48.000.
Wada, Shunichi: See —
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,380,934, CI. 73-861.230.
Wada, Takahiro; Ishihara, Shoichi; and Yamamoto, Ryoichi, to Matsu-
shita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Supercooling inhibitor and process
for preparing the same. 4,381,245, CI. 252-70.000.
Wagle, William E., to Emhart Industries, Inc. Drive means for a timing
mechanism. 4,381,433, CI. 200-38.00R.
Wagner. Louis F.: See —
Pedersen, S. Erik; and Wagner. Louis F., 4,381,411.
568-459.000.
Waizer, Walter; Helletsberger, Harald; Kriegshaber, Christof;
Selgrad, Volker, to Tyrolit-Schleifmittelwerke Swarovski
Grinding disk. 4,381,188, CI. 51-298.000.
Wakino, Kikuo: See—
Ogawa, Toshio; and Wakino, Kikuo, 4,381,469, CI. 310-313.00R.
Waldhauser, Steven A.; and Comeil, Dennis J., to Wetrok, Inc. Auto-
matic floor cleaning machine. 4,380,844, CI. 15-320.000.
Waldron, Gregory R., to Scott Machine Development Corporation.
Sign-making method. 4,380,874, CI. 33-184.500.
Wallace, Joseph E., to Parker-Hannifin Corporation. Segmented seal
4,380,856, CI. 29-412.000.
Wallant International Trade, Inc.: See —
Russek, Allen S., 4,381,012, CI. 128-644.000.
Wallding, Wayne A.; and Sills, Leiand, to Thatcher Glass Corporation.
Internal treatment system for glassware. 4,381,193, CI. 65-158.000.
Walling, Jorg-Hein; Dumoulin, Andre; and Arbuthnot, Gerald R., to
Northern Telecom Limited. Electrode for a fluidizable bed coating
apparatus. 4,380,965, CI. 118-621.000.
Walls, John E., to American Hoechst Corporation. Method of treating
lithographic printing plates with 2-propoxyethanol. 4,381,340, CI.
430-302.000.
Walls, John E.: See—
Gillich, Thomas N.
Walter, John L.: See—
Berkowitz, Ami E.;
Walton, Lewis A., to
component structure.
Wang, Anthony D.: See—
Lillis, William J.; Naylor, Jimmy R.; Wang, Anthony D.; and
White, Robert L., 4,381,497, CI. 34O-347.0DA.
Warchol, Joseph F., to E. F. Houghton & Company. Metal quenching
process. 4,381,205, CI. 148-18.000.
Warshawsky, Jerome, to I. W. Industries, Inc. Lamp swivel. 4,381,538,
CI. 362-269.000.
Watanabe, Akira: See—
Mishiba, Saburo; Hyoda, Junkoh; Uchida, Akira; Usami, Hisao; and
Watanabe, Akira, 4,381,365, CI. 524-460.000.
Watanabe, Taizo: See —
Chibata, Ichiro; Tosa, Tetsuya; Sato, Tadashi; WaUnabe, Taizo;
and Minobe, Satoshi, 4,381,239, CI. 210-679.000.
Watanabe, Tsuyoshi: See —
Isaka, Kazuo; Nakahata, Kimio; Sakurai, Masaaki; Watanabe,
Tsuyoshi; Kan, Fumitaka; and Takeda, Kenji, 4,380,966, CI.
118-651.000.
Webber, William T.: See—
Maynard, Bruce W., Jr.; and Webber, William T., 4,380,978, CI.
<r 123-275.000.
Weber, Hans R.: See—
Hurni, Samuel; and Weber, Hans R., 4.381,184, CI. 425-202.000.
Weeks, Harry D. Multi-hitch apparatus for tandem towing of farm
implements. 4,381,118, CI. 280-412.000.
Wehner, Ewald: See —
Adam, Peter; and Wehner, Ewald, 4,381,468, CI. 310-239.000.
Wehrmeister, Gerhard, to Saurer-Allma GmbH. Device for feeding a
liquid thread-treating medium to the thread in a double thread twist-
ing machine. 4,380,891, CI. 57-296.000.
Weinshenker, Ned M.: See —
Swanson, Sally A.; Weinshenker, Ned M.; Wingard, Robert E., Jr •
and Dawson, Daniel J., 4,381,185, CI. 8-506.000.
Weiss, Harry M.: See-
Russell, Thomas V., 4,381,240, CI. 210-746.000.
and Walls, John E., 4,381,226, CI. 204-14.00N.
i and Walter, John L., 4,381,244, CI. 252-62.520.
Babcock & Wilcox Company, The. Control
4,381,283, CI. 376-327.000.
April 26, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
ci.
H.
Weiss, Samuel; and Lechuga, Andrew R., to SUuffer Chemical Com-
pany. Mercury brine sludge treatment. 4,381,288, CI. 423-101.000.
Welch AUyn, Inc.: See—
Kieffer, Joseph D., Ill; Cecil, John, Jr.; and Conroe, Barden A.,
4,380,998, CI. 128-9.000.
Wentz, Frederick E. Pop-up plunger. 4,380,834, CI. 4-287.000.
Wesling, Henry J.; and Franz, James H., Jr., to Westmghouse Electric
Corp. Electric motor chopper control apparatus and method.
4,381,479, CI. 318-317.000.
Wessel Wolf' Sec
Linder, Ernst; Babitzka, Rudolf; Brettschneider, Johannes; Polach,
Wilhelm; Wessel. Wolf; and Stumpp, Gerhard, 4,380,900, CI.
60-275.000.
West, Doy M.: See-
Hood, Larry M.; and West, Doy M., 4,380,910, CI. 62-91.000.
West Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Yoshino, Tsunemi; and Iwata, Hiroshi, 4,381,146, CI. 354-271.000.
Western Electric Company, Inc.: See—
Desmarais, Patrizia R.; and DiTroia, Anthony J., 4,381,441, CI.
219-121.0U.
Elliott, William A.; and Taylor, Thomas J., 4,381,420,
174-34.000.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See-
Chen, Cheng L.; Goldstein, Norman P.; and Todt, William
4,381,451, CI. 250-390.000.
DeLaurentis, Angelo A., 4,381,209, CI. 156-162.000.
Gjertsen, Robert K., 4,381,284. CI. 376-364.000.
Przybysz, John X.; Driver, Michael C; and Nathanson, Harvey C,
4,381,341, CI. 430-312.000.
Taszarek, Bruce J.; and Junker, Warren R., 4,380,929, CI.
73-579.000.
Taylor, Lyle H., 4,381,565, CI. 372-91.000.
Weshng, Henry J.; and Franz, James H.. Jr.. 4,381.479, CI.
318-317.000.
Westvaco Corporation: See —
DelliColli, Humbert T.; McPartland. Thomas F.; and Bauer, Wal-
ter A.. 4.381.194, CI. 71-65.000.
Kern. Nicholas T.. 4,381,218, CI. 162-252.000.
Wetrok, Inc.: See—
Waldhauser, Steven A.; and Comeil, Dennis J., 4.380.844, CI.
15-320.000.
Whitaker, Larry D.; and Herriott, Donald M. Spa-domestic hot water
heat exchanger. 4,381,031, CI. 165-39.000.
White Consolidated Industries, Inc.: See—
DeLong, Ronald B.; and Schettl, Alvin J.. 4,381,444, CI.
219-451.000.
White, James R.: See—
Audeh, Costandi A.; Heilweil, Israel J.; White, James R.; and Yan,
Tsoung Y., 4,381,234, CI. 208-327.000.
AVhitc Robert L. ' Sec—
Li'llis, William J.; Naylor, Jimmy R.; Wang, Anthony D.; and
White, Robert L., 4,381,497, CI. 34O-347.0DA.
Whitehead, Michael J.: See-
Gamer, Robert; and Whitehead, Michael J., 4,381,266, CI.
260-546.000.
Wiebe, David J., to United States of America, Army. Annular combus-
tor having ceramic liner. 4,380,896, CI. 60-39.320.
Wilcox, Steven R.: See—
'- Horvath, Stephen J.; and Wilcox, Steven R.. 4.381.447, CI. 250-
223.00R.
Wiles, James P., to Ladco Development Co., Inc. Method and appara-
tus for preventing loss of data from volatile memory. 4,381,457, CI.
307-64.000.
Wilkens, Christian, to Kari Mayer Testilmaschinenfabnk GmbH. Weft
thread laying apparatus with combing element. 4.380,913, CI. 66-
84.00A.
Wilkinson, James H.; and Collins, Mark C, to Sony Corporation. Error
concealment in digital television signals. 4,381,519, CI. 358-2 l.OOR.
Williams, Loren J. Adjustable wire reel. 4,381,087, CI. 242-110.000.
Williams, Raymond M.: See —
Lanham, Dennie C, 4,380,888, CI. 54-8.000.
Wilson, Alexander J., to Lucas Industries Limited. Hydraulically-
operated anti-skid vehicle braking system with pump. 4,381,125, CI.
303-116.000.
Wilson, Gordon A.: See —
Canning, Jonathan R., deceased; Moulding, Kenneth W.
Wilson, Gordon A., 4,381,489, CI. 333-215.000.
Wimmer, Eric: See —
Emeury, Jean-Marie; and Wimmer, Eric, 4,381,400,
549-464.000.
Wingard, Robert E., Jr.: See—
Swanson, Sally A.; Weinshenker, Ned M.; Wingard, Robert E., Jr.;
and Dawson, Daniel J., 4,381,185, CI. 8-506.000.
Wisner, Daniel A., to Burroughs Corporation. Intercharacter gap
detector for MICRS. 4,381,494, CI. 34O-146.30C.
Wistinghausen, Walter: See—
Haverkamp, Hans; and Wistinghausen, Walter, 4,381,048, CI.
188-171.000.
Witte, Erwin C; and Myers, William D., to Microdot Inc. Self-locking
nut. 4,381,163, CI. 411-311.000.
Wittenberg, Sidney. Contact lens sterilizing device. 4,381,285, CI.
422-116.000.
WoHT, Erich: See—
Renner, Gunter; and Wolff, Erich, 4,381,339, CI. 430-223.000.
Wood, John: See-
Jenkins, Stuart M.; Wood, John; and Martin, David, 4,381,445, CI.
235-379.000.
Wood, Louis L.: See—
Fulmer, Glenn E.; and Wood, Louis L., 4,381,332, CI. 428-288.000.
and
CI
Woodhull, Ivan D., Jr.; and Liedel, Thomas H., to Karmazin Products
Corporation. Header construction. 4,381.033, CI. 165-175.000
Wray, Michael L.: See—
Kincaid, Herbert; and Wray. Michael L.. 4,380.915. CI. 70-224.000.
Wren. Lloyd W., to Boeing Co.. The. Microwave absorber. 4,381,510,
CI. 343-909.000.
Wrobleski, James T., to Monsanto Company. Method for preparing
catalysts for production maleic anhydnde. 4,381,254, CI. 25z-437.00(I
Wrozina, Joseph I.: See—
Albee, Paul J., Jr.; Burdick. Patricia E.; and Wrozina. Joseph I ,
4,381,376, CI. 525-366.000.
Wylie, Roger, to Exxon Research & Engineering Co. Adsorption-
desorption separation process with integrated light and heavy desor-
bents. 4,381,419, CI. 5&5-828.000.
Xerox Corporation: See —
Bain, Lee L., 4,381.515, CI 346-14000R
Yabe. Minoru: See —
Endoh. Satoru; Ikeda, Mamoru; Yabe, Minoru; Igarashi. Mitsuru;
and Yamauchi, Masaaki, 4.381,473, CI. 313-414.000
Yamada, Akihiro: See —
Saito, Yoshitane; Yamada. Akihiro; and Yano. Satoshi. 4.381.456,
CI. 307-40.000.
Yamagishi. Kazuo: See—
Kamatani. Toshio; Ishiguro. Hirohisa; lukura, Kensei; and
Yamagishi. Kazuo. 4.381.348. CI. 501-153.000.
Yamamoto. Ryoichi: See —
Wada, Takahiro; Ishihara, Shoichi; and Yamamoto, Ryoichi,
4,381,245, CI. 252-70.000.
Yamauchi, Masaaki: See —
Endoh, Satoru; Ikeda, Mamoru; Yabe. Minoru; Igarashi. Mitsuru,
and Yamauchi, Masaaki, 4,381,473, CI. 3I3-414jOOO.
Yamazaki, Akira, to Sumitomo Metal Industries. Ltd. Method for
tightening fastener on axially connected rod-like members. 4,380,859,
CT. 29-428.000.
Yan, Tsoung Y.: See —
Audeh, Costandi A.; Heilweil, Israel J.; White. James R ; and Yan,
Tsoung Y., 4,381,234, CI. 208-327.000.
Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu: See —
iCanou. Ikuo; Yanagiuchi. Shigenobu; and Omon, Takuro,
4,381.551, CI. 364-900.000.
Yano, Minoru: See—
Nakayama, Haruhiko; Nagai, Masahiko; and Yano, Minoru,
4,381,429, CI. 200-19.00R.
Yano, Satoshi: See—
Saito, Yoshitane; Yamada, Akihiro; and Yano, Satoshi, 4,381,456,
CI. 307-40.000.
Yao, Li-Ho. Electric flush tank. 4.380,835, CI 4-406 000.
Yasunaka, Shinsaku: See —
Shirakawa, Kenzo; Matsumoto, Masao; and Yasunaka, Shinsaku,
4,380,869, CI. 30-34.100.
Yissum Research Development Co.: See—
Citri. Nathan. 4.381.343. CI. 435-24.000.
Yokozawa, Norio: See—
HotU, Masao; Maio. Kenii; Yokozawa, Norio; and Nagaishi,
Hiromi, 4,381,495, CI. 340-347.0DA.
Yong. Samuel H.; Edmonson. Douglas A ; Evans. Leah G ; Hohle,
Deena G.; Jensen. Susan H.; O'Keefe. Leslie S ; and Laatsch, Debra
S.. to Pillsbury Company, The. Refngerated dough and method of
manufacture. 4,381,315, CI. 426-94.00a
Yoshida, Koichi; Iwaisako, Toshiyuki; Masamoto, Junzo; Hamanaka,
Katsuhiko; and Komaki, Hajime, to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Method for synthesizing trioxane. 4,381,397, CI. 549-368.000
Yoshida, Masahito: See —
Eguchi, Mitsuo; Yoshida, Masahito; Kato, Yoshifumi; Ichino,
Nobuyuki; and Kikuchi, Yoshimi, 4,381,523, CI. 358-227.000
Yoshino, Hisashi: See —
Isshiki, Tomiya; Yoshino. Hisashi; and Tsuyuki. Kaoru. 4,381.221.
CI. 203-6.000.
Yoshino, Tsunemi; and Iwata, Hiroshi, to West Electnc Co., Ltd
Piezoelectric aperture size control device 4.381.146. CI 354-271 000
Yu. Mason K.. to General Motors Corporation. Centripeul flow gas
turbine. 4.381.172. CI. 415-205.000.
Zaba, Tadeusz, to BBC Brown, Boveri &. Company Limited Gas
turbine containing an additional combustion gas compressor.
4,380,897. CI. 60-39.330.
Zappia, Anthony T. Air fuel engine. 4,380,904, CI. 60-712.000
Zeialer, James R.: See —
Kolesar, Robert R ; Rickard, John T.; and Zeidler, James R.,
4,381,428, CI. 179-15.55R.
2^lensky. Viktor E.: See—
Leschinsky. Leonid K.; Gulakov. Sergei V.; Stepnov, Xenofont X.;
~ " Bendrik, Valery G.; Dubinsky, Boris E.;
and Zelensky. Viktor E.. 4.380.852. CI
Nosovsky. Boris I.
Isirov. Dmitry I.;
29-121.200.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See—
Krenz. Horst M.. 4.381,129. CI. 339-14.00R.
Zillmer, Adalbert: See—
Gnest, Horst-Guenter; Granzow, Wolfgang-Dieter; Hartkopf,
Hans-Otto; and Zillmer, Adalbert, 4,381,094, CI. 246-182.00R
Zimmerlin, Sharon L.: See —
Bohl, Thomas L.; Hall, George R., Jr.; and Zimmerlin, Sharon L.,
4,381,153, CI. 356-437.000.
Zobel, Donald W.: See-
Thompson, David L.; and Zobel, Donald W., 4.381.010, CI. 128-
419.0PG.
Zubkov, Vitaly S.: See— ^ . , ^
Verty, Vladimir G.; Voronin, Pavel G.; Gurov. Evgeny I.; Zub-
kov, Vitaly S.; Obrezkov, Alexandr I.; Tabakov, Vladimir P ;
Khvoschinsky. Boris B.; and Judin. Vladimir N.. 4,381.124. CI.
299-2.000.
Zumbiel, William A. Refrigeration control apparatus. 4.380,911, CI.
62-228.000.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 26th DAY OF APRIL, 1983
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Armco Inc.: See —
Ehas, James A., deceased; Newby, John R.; and Pierson, Marvin
B.. Re. 31,221, CI. 148-31.000.
Bleazey. John C, to RCA Corporation. Track skipper for video disc
player. Re. 31,223, CI. 369-221.000.
Caterpillar Tractor Co.: See —
Hicks, George E.; Litherland, John W.; Martin, Arlan G. and
Williams, Lawrence, Re. 31,218, CI. 123-l.OOA.
Elias, James A., deceased (by Elias, June G., executrix); Newby. John
R.; and Pierson, Marvin B., to Armco Inc. Cold rolled, ductile, high
strength steel strip and sheet and method therefor. Re. 31,221, CI.
148-31.000.
Elias, June G., executrix: See —
Elias, James A., deceased; Newby, John R.; and Pierson, Marvin
B., Re. 31,221, CI. 148-31.000.
Emsberger, Fred M., to PPG Industries, Inc. Electromigration method
for making stained glass photomasks. Re. 31,220. CI. 65-30.130.
Hicks, George E.; Litherland, John W.; Martin, Arlan G.; and Williams,
Lawrence, to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Fuel additive injection system
for diesel engines. Re. 31,218, CI. 123-l.OOA.
Litherland, John W.: See-
Hicks, George E.; Litherland, John W.; Martin, Arlan G and
Williams, Lawrence, Re. 31,218. CI. 123-l.OOA.
Martin, Arlan G.: See —
Hicks. George E.; Litherland, John W.; Martin, Arlan G and
Williams, Lawrence. Re. 31.218. CI. 123-l.OOA.
McCracken, Oliver W.. to Otis Engineering Corporation. Microproces-
sor computerized pressure/temperature/time [down-holel re-
corder. Re. 31,222, CI. 364-571.000.
Neptune Eastech, Inc.: See —
Rodely, Alan E., Re. 31,217, CI. 73-861.220.
Newby, John R.: See—
Elias, James A., deceased; Newby. John R.; and Pierson, Marvin
B., Re. 31,221, CI. 148-31.000.
Otis Engineering Corporation: See —
McCracken, Oliver W., Re. 31,222, CI. 364-571.000.
Pierson, Marvin B.: See —
Elias, James A., deceased; Newby. John R.; and Pierson, Marvin
B.. Re. 31,221, CI. 148-31.000.
Polaroid Corporation: See —
Shenk, Edwin K., Re. 31,219, CI. 354-195.000.
PPG Industries, Inc.: See—
Emsberger, Fred M., Re. 31.220. CI. 65-30.130.
RCA Corporation: See —
Bleazey, John C, Re. 31,223, CI. 369-221.000.
Rodely, Alan E., to Neptune Eastech. Inc. Bluff body flowmeter
Re. 31.217, CI. 73-861.220.
Shenk, Edwin K.. to Polaroid Corporation. Automatic focusing cam-
era. Re. 31,219, CI. 354-195.000.
Williams, Lawrence: See —
Hicks, George E.; Litherland, John W.; Martin, Arlan G • and
Williams, Lawrence, Re. 31.218, CI. 123-l.OOA.
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Schramm. Peter; Schuhmann, Siegfried; Schoneberger. Edgar F.;
Dom, Alfred; and Cappel, Bert, to Roland Offsetmaschinenfa-
brik Faber & Schleicher AG. Means for the control and regula-
tion of the printing process on printing presses. Bl 4,200 932
CI. 364—519.
Roland Offsermaschinenfabrik Faber & Schleicher AG.: See—
Schramm, Peter; Schuhmann, Siegfried; Schoneberger,
Edgar F.; Dorn, Alfred; and Cappel, Bert. Bl 4,200.932, CI.
364—519.
Shringarpurey, Sudhir K.; and Maurer, Gerald L., to National
Research Laboratories. Metalworking fluid compositions and
methods of stabilizing same. Bl 4,129,509, CI. 252—49.5.
National Research Laboratories: See —
Shringarpurey, Sudhir K.; and Maurer, Gerald L. Bl 4,129
509. CI. 252—49.5.
Mekelburg, Clayton G., to Rent-A-Vac International Ltd. Gravel
and dust separator and container for vacuum cleaning systems
Bl 4,162,149, CI. 55—315.
Rent- A- Vac International Ltd.: See—
Mekelburg, Clayton G., Bl 4,162.149, CI. 55—315.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Acme Burgess. Inc.: See —
Moon, Howard R.. 268,778, CI. D23- 18.000.
ADIDAS Fabnque de Chaussures de Sport: See—
Anderie, Wolf 268,710, CI. D2-290.000.
Anderie. Wolf to ADIDAS Fabrique de Chaussures de Sport Shoe
268.710. 4-26-83, CI. D2-290.000.
Antos. William J.: See-
Campbell, Jeffrey A., 268.765, CI DI6-37.000.
Battiston, Joseph. Jr. Superimposed toilet seat for invalids or the like
268,781. 4-26-83. CI. D23-7 1.000.
Beyl. Jean J. A., to LOOK. Heel unit of a ski safety binding. 268,776
4-26-83, CI. D2 1-230.000. 6 - •
Bisbing, Robert H., to Southco, Inc. Hinge pin. 268,733, 4-26-83 CI
D8-323.000. '
Boldt, Melvin H.; Chuboff, David P.; Franek, Wayne J.; and Johnson,
Manlyn M., to Zenith Radio Corporation. Combined telephone and
clock radio. 268,758, 4-26-83, CI. D14-53.000.
Bopp, Edward T.: See—
Potetz, William J.; and Bopp, Edward T.. 268,720. CI. D6-181.000.
Bova, Anthony J. Pull cap for waterbed filler neck. 268.722, 4-26-83 CI
D6-201.000.
Brown, Charles A. Hand tool for permitting removal of swing arms
from a centrifugal clutch. 268,729, 4-26-83, CI. D8- 14.000.
Brown, Edwin J. Can crusher. 268.761. 4-26-83. CI. D 15- 123.000.
Brown. Michael: See —
Gibsone. Julian; Brown, Michael; Steiner, Eduard; and Maley
Nicholas. 268,744, CI. D 1 1 - 1 58.000.
C & C Consulting & Design AG: See—
Luthy, Ernst. 268,717, CI. D6-63.000.
C. E. Johansson AB: See —
Hampf Jan, 268,739, CI. D 10-73.000.
Campbell, Jeffrey A., to Antos, William J., a part interest. Infeed cover
for X-ray film processor. 268.765. 4-26-83, CI. D16-37.000.
Champed, Jacques; and Simon, Jean-Rene, to Compagnie Generale des
Etablissements Michelin. Tire. 268,748, 4-26-83, CI. D12-146.000.
Chaney, John W.; and Royer, Roger G., to Cincinnati Milacron Inc.
Card cage module. 268,754, 4-26-83, CI. D 13-40.000.
PI 26
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 27
Chubofr, David P.: See—
Boldt, Melvin H.; ChubofT, David P.; Franek, Wayne J.; and John-
son, Marilyn M., 268,758, CI. D14-53.000.
Cincinnati Milacron Inc.: See —
Chaney, John W.; and Royer, Roger G., 268,754, CI. D13-40.000.
Compagnie Generale des Eubhssements Michelin: See—
Champod, Jacques; and Simon, Jean-Rene, 268,748, CI. D12-
146.000.
Congoleum Corporation: See —
Tejeda, Oscar; and Ludovico, Leonard A., 268,793, CI. D92-3 1.000.
Continental Candle Company: See-
Harper, Barry D.; and Courtney, Robert M., 268,789, CI. D26-
11.000.
Coming Glass Works: See—
Haner, Richard V., 268,724, CI. D7-319.000.
Courtney, Robert M.: See-
Harper, Barry D.; and Courtney, Robert M., 268,789, CI. D26-
11.000.
CPG Products Corp.: See—
Hoberman, Barry W.; and Pelavin, Joseph Y., 268,712, CI. D3-
36.000.
Pelavin, Joseph Y.; and Hoberman, Barry W., 268,713, CI. D3-
48.000.
Culbertson, Richard, to General Electric Company. Combined cassette
recorder and player and radio. 268,755, 4-26-83, CI. D 14-5.000.
Current, Wayne A., to Singer Company, The. Sewing machine frame or
similar article. 268,760, 4-26-83, CI. D 15-76.000.
Curry, Myrtle H. Cloverleaf table. 268.715, 4-26-83, CI. D6-29.000.
Dart Industries Inc.: See —
WolfT, Martin J., 268,723, CI. D7-42.000.
Daub, Wayne E. MeUllizing torch. 268,730, 4-26-83, CI. D8-30.000.
Daugherty, John. RoUtable game board. 268,771, 4-26-83, CI. D21-
33.000.
DeCristoforo, David. Chair. 268,718, 4-26-83, CI. D6-73.000.
Diebel, John C: See—
Melsheimer, Frank M.; Melsheimer, Thomas T.; Johnson, Scott C;
and Diebel, John C, 268,768, CI. D16-132.000.
Doman, Donald W., to Kohler Co. Bidet. 268,779, 4-26-83, CI. D23-
51.000.
Doman, Donald W.; and Jaekels, Norman J., to Kohler Co. Water
closet. 268,780, 4-26-83, CI. D23-65.000.
Donalies, Richard W. Boat rope controller. 268,777, 4-26-83, CI. D21-
236.000.
Drag Specialties, Inc.: See^r
Preisler, James M.; and Stahel, Alwin J., 268,741, CI. Dl 1-107.000.
Preisler, James M.; and Stahel, Alwin J., 268,742, CI. Dl 1-107.000.
Eichstadt, Frank T., to Orion Industries, Inc. Wheel cover. 268,750,
4-26-83, CI. D12-209.000.
Engineered Air Division of Thermal Components, Inc.: See —
Minnick, Donald F., Jr., 268,782, CI. D23-149.000.
Entex Industries, Inc.: See —
Hanzawa, Tsuneo, 268,772, CI. D2 1-8 1.000.
Fenne, Kenneth R., to Pittway Corporation. Remote controlled slave.
268,753, 4-26-83, CI. D 13-32.000.
First National Supermarkets, Inc.: See —
Potetz, William J.; and Bopp, Edward T., 268,720, CI. D6- 18 1.000.
Fiveash, Daniel E. Game board. 268,770, 4-26-83, CI. D2 1-23.000.
Forseth, Arthur E., to Forseth, Arthur Everett. Body support for
consummating an act of mariul union. 268,784, 4-26-83, CI. D24-
99.000.
Forseth, Arthur Everett: See —
Forseth, Arthur E., 268,784, CI. D24-99.000.
Franek, Wayne J.: See —
Boldt, Melvin H.; ChubofT, David P.; Franek, Wayne J.; and John-
son, Marilyn M., 268,758, CI. D14-53.000.
Franklin, Andrew J., Jr.; and Franklin, Jean H. Building facade.
268,787, 4-26-83, CI. D25-59.000.
Franklin, Jean H.: See —
Franklin, Andrew J., Jr.; and Franklin, Jean H., 268,787, CI. D25-
59.000.
Froh, Frank D. Combined electrical terminal casing and integral fasten-
ing lug thereof 268,751, 4-26-83, CI. D 13-24.000.
Galindo, Rudolph D. Suspended ceiling grid. 268,786, 4-26-83, CI.
D25-58.000.
Gee, Minor E., to Maxco Supply, Inc. Carton-erecting machine.
268,763, 4-26-83, CI. D15-145.000.
General Electric Company: See —
Culbertson, Richard, 268,755, CI. D 14-5.000.
Klucznik, Paul J., 268,757, CI. D14-6.000.
Yamagata, Fuminori, 268,756, CI. D 14-5.000.
Gibsone, Julian; Brown, Michael; Steiner, Eduard; and Maley, Nicho-
las, to Venture Production Corporation. Bear figure. 268,744,
4-26-83, CI. Dl 1-158.000.
Giroflex-Entwicklungs AG: See —
Ochsner, Koni, 268,716, CI. D6-56.000.
Goedel; Walter. Accident document case. 268,714, 4-26-83, C1..D3-
74.000.
Greenhalgh, Dale R.: See—
Greenhaigh, Dennis L.; and Greenhalgh, Dale R., 268,746, CI.
D12-88.000,
Greenhalgh, Dennis L.; and Greenhalgh, Dale R., to West Coast Ma-
rine Boat & Tug, Inc. Frame for a racing cart. 268,746. 4-26-83, CI.
D 12-88.000.
Hampf, Jan, to C. E. Johansson AB Electronic caliper 268.739.
4-26-83. CI. DlO-73.000.
Haner. Richard V.. to Commg Glass Works Cream pitcher or the like
268.724, 4-26-83, CI. D7-319,000.
Hanzawa, Tsuneo, to Entex Industries, Inc. Toy motorcycle. 268,772.
4-26-83. CI. D21-81.000
Harper. Barry D.; and Courtney. Robert M.. to Continental Candle
Company. Candle glass. 268.789. 4-26-83. CI. D26- 11.000.
Henshaw. John F.. to Keuffel & Esser Company. Cardiac telemonitor
transmitter housing, 268.783. 4-26-83. CI 024-17.000
Hicks. Virginia. Dust mop cover. 268.790. 4-26-83. CI D32-50.000.
Hoberman. Barry W.; and Pelavin. Joseph Y . to CPG Products Corp
Racquet bag. 268.712. 4-26-83. CI. D3-36.000.
Hoberman. Barry W.: See—
Pelavin. Joseph Y.; and Hoberman. Barry W., 268,713, CI D3-
48.000.
Hoebeke, Willard J. Fluid metering valve 268,759, 4-26-83, CI. D15-
5.000.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Ito, Jun, 268,747, CI. D12-1 10.000.
Interdica S.A.: See—
Perrin, Alain D., 268,737, CI. D 10-39.000.
Internationale Octrooi Maatschappij "Octropa" B.V.: See —
O'Neill, Terence C, 268,732, CI. D8-7I.OOO.
Ito, Jun. to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Motor tncycle
268.747. 4-26-83. CI. D 12- 110.000.
Jaekels. Norman J.: See —
Doman. Donald W.; and Jaekels. Norman J., 268,780. CI. D23-
65.000.
Jemigan. Thomas E.. to Marathon Corporation. Frame for a chair.
268,721, 4-26-83, CI. D6-19I.000.
Johnson, Marilyn M.: See —
Boldt, Melvin H.; ChubofT, David P.; Franek. Wayne J.; and John-
son, Marilyn M., 268,758, CI. D14-53.000.
Johnson, Scott C: See —
Melsheimer, Frank M.; Melsheimer, Thomas T.; Johnson, Scott C;
and Diebel, John C, 268,768, CI. D16-132.000.
Kanao, Shiro. Hose clamp. 268,735, 4-26-83. CI. D8-396.000.
Karg, Walter. Bottle opener. 268.731, 4-26-83, CI. D8-38.OO0.
Keuffel & Esser Company: See —
Henshaw, John F., 268,783, CI. D24- 17.000
Kleckauskas, Robert J., to Lamplight Farms, Inc. Bottle. 268,736,
4-26-83, CI. D9-349.000.
Klucznik, Paul J., to General Electric Company. Tape recorder and
player or similar article. 268,757. 4-26-83. CI. D14-6.000.
Kohler Co.: See—
Doman, Donald W., 268,779, CI. D23-5 1.000.
Doman, Donald W.; and Jaekels, Norman J . 268.780. CI. D23-
65.000.
Kudo, Kazue, to Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc. Toy animal figure. 268,774,
4-26-83, CI. D2I-162.000.
Lamplight Farms, Inc.: See —
Kleckauskas, Robert J., 268,736, CI. D9-349.000.
Lawson, Peter, to Rockwell do Brasil. Saw. 268,762, 4-26-83, CI. D15-
134.000.
Ledan Inc.: See —
Leo, Daniel W.. Jr.. 268.719. CI. D6-1 16.000.
Leo, Daniel W., Jr., to Ledan Inc. Clothes rack or similar article.
268,719, 4-26-83, CI. D6-1 16.000.
Lewis, Larry W. Eyeglasses. 268,766, 4-26-83, CI. D16-1 19.000.
LOOK: See—
Beyl, Jean J. A., 268,776. CI. D2 1-230.000.
Lubin. Eunice E. Display sund. 268.743. 4-26-83, CI. Dl 1-131.000.
Lucasfilm, Ltd.: See —
Rodis-Jamero, Nilo, 268,773, CI. D2 1-87.000.
Ludovico, Leonard A.: See —
Tejeda, Oscar; and Ludovico, Leonard A., 268.793, CI. D92-3 1.000.
Luthy, Ernst, to C & C Consulting & Design AG. Upholstered settee.
268,717, 4-26-83, CI. D6-63.000.
Maley, Nicholas: See —
Gibsone, Julian; Brown, Michael; Steiner, Eduard; and Maley,
Nicholas, 268,744. CI. Dl 1-158.000.
Marathon Corporation: See —
Jemigan, Thomas E., 268,721, CI. D6- 19 1.000.
Marganne, Florence J., to Peintures Corona S.A. Textile fabric wall
covering or the like. 268,792, 4-26-83, CI. D92-29.000.
Maxco Supply, Inc.: See —
Gee, Minor E., 268,763, CI. D 15- 145.000.
Meade Instruments Corporation: See —
Melsheimer, Frank M.; Melsheimer, Thomas T.; Johnson, Scott C;
and Diebel, John C, 268,768, CI. D16-132.000.
Melsheimer, Frank M.; Melsheimer, Thomas T.; Johnson. Scott C; and
Diebel, John C, to Meade Instruments Corporation. Telescope.
268,768, 4-26-83, CI. D 1 6- 132.000.
Melsheimer, Thomas T.: See —
Melsheimer, Frank M.; Melsheimer, Thomas T.; Johnson, Scott C;
and Diebel, John C, 268,768. CI. D16-1 32.000.
Minnick. Donald F.. Jr.. to Engineered Air Division of Thermal Com-
ponents. Inc. Combined supporting framework and filter housings of
a multiple suge air Tittering system. 268,782. 4-26-83. CI D23-
149.000.
Mitutoyo Mfg. Co., Ltd.: See —
Tanada. Tetsunori, 268.740. CI. DlO-73.000.
Yoshioka, Susumu. 268.738. CI. D 10- 70.000
PI 28
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Moon, Howard R., to Acme Burgess, Inc. Paint sprayer. 268,778,
4-26-83, CI. 023-18.000.
Nestrock, Frederick L., to Union Manufacturing Company. Vacuum
insulated food jar or similar article. 268,727, 4-26-83, CI. D7-77.0OO.
Ochsner, Koni, to Giroflex-Entwicklungs AG. Chair or similar article.
268.716. 4-26-83. CI. D6-56.00O.
O'Neill, Terence C, to Internationale Octrooi Maatschappij "Octropa"
B V Mitre block. 268,732, 4-26-83, CI. D8-71.000.
Orion Industries, Inc.: See —
Eichstadt, Frank T., 268,750, CI. D 12-209.000.
Omatek, Larry B. Pennant. 268,745, 4-26-83, CI. Dl 1-166.000.
Outcalt, Miller. Camera bag. 268,711, 4-26-83, CI. D3-33.000.
Pace, Jerry L. Golf club head. 268,775, 4-26-83, CI. D21-220.000.
Parrott, Richard L. Electrical connector post for vehicle starter.
268.752, 4-26-83, CI. D13-24.000.
Peintures Corona S.A.: See —
Marganne, PHorence J., 268,792, CI. D92-29.000.
Pelavin, Joseph Y.; and Hoberman, Barry W., to CPG Products Corp.
Shoulder tote bag. 268,713, 4-26-83, CI. D3-48.000.
Pelavin, Joseph Y.: See —
Hoberman, Barry W.; and Pelavin, Joseph Y., 268,712, CI. D3-
36.000.
Perrin, Alain D.. to Interdica S.A. Wrist watch. 268,737, 4-26-83, CI.
DlO-39.000.
Pittway Corporation: See —
Fenne, Kenneth R., 268,753, CI. Dl 3-32.000.
Poling, Betty A. Nut box. 268,728, 4-26-83, CI. D7-98.000.
Potetz, William J.; and Bopp, Edward T., to First National Supermar-
kets, Inc. Display counter for foods. 268,720, 4-26-83, CI. D6- 18 1.000.
Preisler, James M.; and Stahel, Alwin J., to Drag Specialties, Inc.
Motorcycle emblem. 268,741, 4-26-83, CI. Dl 1-107.000.
Preisler, James M.; and Stahel, Alwin J., to Drag Specialties, Inc.
Motorcycle emblem. 268,742, 4-26-83, CI. Dl 1-107.000.
Rockwell do Brasil: See —
Lawson, Peter, 268,762, CI. D 15- 134.000.
Rodis-Jamero, Nilo, to LucasHlm, Ltd. Toy space vehicle. 268,773,
4-26-83. CI. D2 1-87.000.
Royer. Roger G.: See —
Chaney, John W.; and Royer, Roger G., 268,754, CI. D13-40.000.
Sanchez, John: See —
Seckendorf, Bernard A.; and Sanchez, John, 268,764, CI. D16-
1.000.
Seckendorf. Bernard A.; and Sanchez, John, to Wrist-A-Matic, Ltd.
Wrist-worn disk camera. 268,764. 4-26-83, CI. D16-1.000.
Simon, Jean-Rene: See —
Champod, Jacques; and Simon, Jean-Rene, 268,748, CI. D12-
146.000.
Singer Company, The: See —
Current, Wayne A., 268,760. CI. D15-76.000.
Soltes, Isaac B. Cord retaining reel. 268,734, 4-26-83, CI. D8-358.000.
Sommers, Philip B. Combined specimen tube and paperwork pouch.
268,785, 4-26-83, CI. D24-99.000.
SorBello. Vincent, to Vanamera Industries, Ltd. Van extension module.
268,749. 4-26-83, CI. D 12- 196.000.
Southco, Inc.: See —
Bisbing, Robert H., 268,733, CI. D8-323.000.
Stahel, Alwin J.: See —
Preisler, James M.; and Stahel, Alwin J., 268,741, CI. Dl 1-107.000.
Preisler, James M.; and Stahel, Alwin J., 268,742, CI. Dl 1-107.000.
Steiner, Eduard: See —
Gibsone, Julian; Brown, Michael; Steiner, Eduard; and Maley,
Nicholas, 268,744, CI. Dl 1-158.000.
Sweetman, Kathy L. Lamp. 268,788, 4-26-83, CI. D26-8.000.
Tanada, Tetsunori, to Mitutoyo Mfg. Co., Ltd. Micrometer. 268,740,
4-26-83, CI. DlO-73.000.
Tejeda, Oscar; and Ludovico, Leonard A., to Congoleum Corporation.
Roll of floor covering or similar article. 268,793, 4-26-83, CI. D92-
31.000.
Texas Boot Company; See —
Vise, Harry, 268,709, CI. D2-273.000.
Thermo-Serv, Inc.: See —
Trombly, Edgar F., 268,725, CI. D7-3 17.000.
Trombly, Edgar F., 268,726, CI. D7-3 17.000.
Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc.: See —
Kudo, Kazue, 268,774, CI. D21-162.000.
Trombly, Edgar F., to Thermo-Serv, Inc. Beverage server. 268,725,
4-26-83, CI. D7-3 17.000.
Trombly, Edgar F., to Thermo Serv, Inc. Beverage server. 268,726,
4-26-83, CI. D7-3 17.000.
Union Manufacturing Company: See —
Nestrock, Frederick L., 268,727, CI. D7-77.000.
Vanamera Industries, Ltd.: See —
SorBello, Vincent, 268,749, CI. D 12- 196.000.
Venture Production Corporation: See —
Gibsone, Julian; Brown, Michael; Steiner, Eduard; and Maley,
Nicholas, 268,744, CI. Dl 1-158.000.
Vise, Harry, to Texas Boot Company. Cowboy boot. 268,709, 4-26-83,
CI. D2-273.0OO.
West Coast Marine Boat & Tug, Inc.: See —
Greenhalgh, Dennis L.; and Greenhalgh, Dale R., 268,746, CI.
D 12-88.000.
Wolff, Martin J., to Dart Industries Inc. Com holder or the like.
268,723, 4-26-83, CI. D7-42.000.
Wood, Prentice J. Carrier for containers or the like. 268,791, 4-26-83,
CI. D34-44.000.
Woolwine, Wayne D. Game board. 268,769, 4-26-83, CI. D21-20.000.
Wrist-A-Matic, Ltd.: See—
Seckendorf, Bernard A.; and Sanchez, John, 268,764, CI. D16-
1.000.
Yamagata, Fuminori, to General Electric Company. Combined tape
recorder and radio or similar article. 268,756, 4-26-83, CI. D14-5.000.
Yoshioka, Susumu, to Mitutoyo Mfg. Co., Ltd. Height gauge. 268,738,
4-26-83, CI. D 10-70.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See —
Boldt, Melvin H.; Chuboff, David P.; Franek, Wayne J.; and John-
son. Marilyn M.. 268,758, CI. D14-53.000.
Zomer, Giuseppe. Bow for eyeglass frame. 268,767, 4-26-83, CI. D16-
127.000.
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
Conard-Pyle Company, The: See —
Meilland, Mane L., 5,042, CI. 15.000.
Meilland, Mane L., to Conard-Pyle Company, The. Rose plan-
t— Meirobidor variety. 5,042, 4-26-83, CI. 15.000.
Pan American Plant Company: See —
Shoesmith, Leonard H., 5,043, CI. 74.000.
Shoesmith, Leonard H., to Pan American Plant Company. Chrysanthe-
mum named Twilight. 5,043. 4-26-83, CI. 74.000.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED APRIL 26, 1983
Note. — First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
CLAW? 2
CLASS 51
CLASS 81
4,380,991
CLASS 165
242 4,381,233
105 4,380,833
298 4.381.188
57.16 4,380,940
CLASS 126
39 4,381,031
CLASS 206
CLASS4
CLASS 52
180 R 4,380.941
436 4.380,942
43 4,380,992
415 4,380,993
46 4,381.032
175 4,381,033
434 4,381.057
497 4,381.058
287 4,380,834
405 4.380,887
CLASS 83
431 4,380,994
CLASS 166
533 4,381.059
406 4,380,835
CLAS,SS4
438 4,380,995
^"^V A ^^^^ M 11 fi
460 4,380,836
510 4,380,837
8 4,380,888
CLASS 55
38 4,380,943
49 4,380,944
482 4,380,945
450 4,380,996
CLASS 128
292 4,381,034
307 4,381.035
CLASS 208
327 4.381,234
CLASS5
-fLS Bl 4.162.149
521 4,380,946
1 R 4,380.997
CLASS 172
CLASS 209
66 4,380,838
26 4,381,189
CLASS 84
9 4.380.998
2 4,381,036
400 4.381.235
CLASS8
30 4,381,190
193 4,381.191
176 4,380,947
20 4.380,999
79 4,381,000
CLASS 173
CLASS 210
506 4,381,185
376 4.381,192
CLASS 86
130 4,381,001
170 4.381,037
112 4.381.236
620 4,381,186
CLASS 15
CLASS 56
296 4,380.889
20 C 4,380,948
CLASS 87
204.24 4,381,002
213 A 4,381,003
214 R 4,381,004
CLASS 174
34 4,381.420
138 4,381.237
231 4.381.238
679 4,381.239
104.92 4,380,839
CLA.SS 57
48 4,380,949
218 A 4,381,006
35 R 4,381,421
42 4,381,422
72 B 4,381,423
73 R 4.381,424
93 4,381.425
117 F 4.381.426
CLAS^ 175
746 4.381,240
105 4,380,840
210 B 4,380,841
304 4,380,842
316 R 4,380,843
320 4,380,844
344 4,380,845
286 4.380.890
296 4.380,891
401 4,380,892
CLASS 60
39.07 4,380,893
CLASS 89
33 BA 4,380,950
CLASS 92
244 4,380,951
303.1 4.381,007
399 4,381,009
419 PG 4,381,010
635 4,381,011
644 4,381,012
785 4,381.013
CLASS 212
195 4.381,060
CLASS 215
1 C 4,381.061
391 4,380,846
39.161 4,380,894
CLASS 98
786 4,381,014
344 4,381,038
CLASS 219
CLASS 16
39.23 4.380,895
39.32 4.380,896
59 4,380.952
CLASS 132
CLASS 177
1049 R 4.381,438
1055 B 4.381,439
8S 4,380,847
39.33 4.380,897
CLASS 99
45 R 4,381,015
160 4,381,039
62 4.381,440
4,380,848
243 4,380,898
549 4,380.953
CLASS 134
210 C 4,381.040
121 U 4,381.441
CLASS 17
11 4.380,849
261 4,380,899
275 4,380,900
418 4,380.901
CLASS 100
35 4,380,954
170 4,381,016
CLASS 137
CLASS 179
2 DP 4,381,427
400 4.381.442
4.381,443
451 4.381,444
29 4,380,850
CLASS 29
520 4,380.902
641.4 4,380.903
CLASS 101
38 A 4,380,955
15.1 4,381,017
592 4,381,018
15.55 R 4.381,428
CLASS 180
CLASS 220
71 4,381.062
242 4.381.063
90 R 4.380,851
712 4,380.904
756 4,380,905
401.1 4,380,956
843 4,381,019
65 D 4,381,041
121.2 4,380.852
148.3 4.380,853
157.3 A 4,380,854
757 4,380,906
CLASS 62
CLASS 102
202.1 4,380,957
CLASS 138
99 4,381,020
272 4,381,042
300 4.381.043
458 4.381,064
CLASS 222
407 4,380.855
52 4,380,907
202.2 4,380,958
CLASS 139
CLASS 181
153 4,381,065
412 4.380.856
64 4,380.908
CLASS 104
380 4 381021
118 4.381.044
394 4.381.066
417 4.380.857
79 4,380.909
93 4.380,959
m^ \M\J ^ t ^ \J 1 ^\J^ 1
265 ' 4.381,045
450 4.381.067
418 4,380,858
428 4,380,859
91 4.380,910
228 4,380.911
CLASS 106
CLASS 141
86 4,381,022
CLASS 182
CLASS 223
453 4,380,860
506 4.380.912
1.12 4,381,198
^'W A r^rH « d ^
70 4,381.046
2 4.381.068
569 L 4,380,861
^*TV A tf^tf^ ^0
186 4,381,199
CLASS 144
CLASS 188
CLASS 224
4,380,862
571 4,380,863
574 4,380,864
576 W 4,380,865
CLASS 65
30.13 Re. 3 1,220
158 4,381,193
CLASS 66
84 A 4,380,913
CLASS 70
282 4.381,200
CLASS 110
347 4,380,960
365 4,381,023
CLASS 145
33 R 4.381,024
71.8 4.381.047
72.7 4.381.049
171 4.381.048
42 44 4.381,069
321 4,381,070
CLASS 229
577 C 4,380,866
590 4,380,867
726 4,380,868
CLASS 112
231 4,380,961
274 4,380,962
CLASS 148
1.5 4,381,201
4,381,202
CLASS 192
1 4,381,050
82 T 4,381,051
16 R 4.381.071
CLASS 235
CLASS 30
224 4,380,915
CLASS 116
6.14 R 4!38r,203
106.2 4.381,052
379 4,381.445
34.1 4,380,869
456 R 4,380,914
324 4,380,963
6.31 4.381,204
1 1 1 A 4,381,053
CLASS 236
133 4,380,870
360 4.380,871
CLASS 33
CLASS 71
65 4,381,194
100 4,381,195
CLASS 118
50 4,380,964
621 4,380,965
18 4,381,205
31 Re.3I,221
CLASS 149
CLASS 193
35 MD 4,381,054
CLASS 198
12 A 4.381.073
13 4.381.074
CLASS 237
174 N 4,380,872
4,381,196
651 4,380,966
22 4,381.206
40 4.381.207
653 4,381,055
8 R 4,381.075
174 P 4,380,873
CLASS 72
669 4,380,967
696 4,381.056
CLASS 238
115 4.381,076
CLASS 239
184.5 4,380,874
203.13 4,380,875
297 4,380,876
7 4,380.916
8 4.380.917
88 4.380,918
CLASS 119
5 4,380,968
82 4,380,969
CLASS 150
2.4 4,381.025
CLASS 152
CLASS 200
19 R 4,381,429
35 R 4,381,430
CLASS 34
225 4,380.877
132 4,380,919
158 4,380,920
CLASS 123
153 4.381,026
38 B 4,381,432
38 R 4,381.431
89 4.381,077
118 4.381,078
165 4,380,921
1 A Re.31,218
CLASS 156
4,381,433
214.13 4,381.079
CLASS 36
388 4,380,922
3 4,380,970
52 4.381.208
85 R 4,381,434
666 4.381.080
67 D 4,380.878
482 4,380,923
41.31 4,380,971
162 4,381.209
144 B 4,381,435
707 4.381,081
CLASS 40
447 4,380.879
564 4.380.880
CLASS 42
CLASS 73
19 4,380,924
66 4,380,925
83 4,380.926
146 4.380.927
78 F 4,380,972
145 A 4,380,973
179 G 4,380,974
179 H 4,380,975
198 DB 4,380.976
198 F 4,380,977
195 4.381.210
361 4.381.211
473 4.381.212
606 4.381.213
643 4,381.215
667 4.381.216
148 A 4,381,436
153 LB 4,381.437
CLASS 202
154 4.381,220
CLASS 241
186 A 4.381.082
ClASS 242
55.2 4.381,083
42 R 4.380.881
518 4.380.928
275 4,380,978
CLASS 203
107 4.381,084
579 4.380.929
339 4,380,979
CLASS 157
6 4.381,221
107 3 4.381.085
CLASS 43
594 4.380,930
414 4,380,980
1 4.381.027
33 4,381,222
107 4 R 4.381.086
14 4.380.882
643 4.380,931
415 4,380,981
1.24 4,381,028
91 4,381.223
110 4.381.087
17 4,380,883
749 4,380,932
416 4,380,982
CLASS 204
118 7 4.381.088
42.09 4,380.884
4,380,933
424 4,380,983
CLASS 160
191 4.381.089
861.22 Re.31.217
440 4,380,984
172 4 381029
1 T 4.381.224
^^tm A ^^^> ^ A ^
CLASS 46
861.23 4,380.934
4,380,985
■ r^ ^ \mf \f A y^^^ f
14 N 4.381.226
CLASS 244
220 4.380.885
861.24 4,380,935
489 4.380,986
CLASS 162
16 4,381.227
3 16 4.381.090
CLASS 47
861.62 4,380,936
558 4,380,987
23 4,381,217
44 4,381.228
87 4.381.091
864.56 4,380,937
571 4,380,988
252 4,381,218
75 4,381.229
161 4.381.092
58 4,380,886
CLASS 74
644 4,380,989
299 4,381,219
98 4,381.230
117 4.381.225
12975 4.381.231
216 4.381.093
CLASS 48
473 R 4,380,938
CLASS 125
CLASS 164
CLASS 346
212 4,381,187
813 L 4,380,939
20 4,380,990
446 . 4,381,030
180 P 4,381.232
182 R 4,381.094
PI 29
PI 30
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
CLASS Z48
207 R 4.381.115
CLASS 279
4.381,498
347 DA 4.381,495
571
766
Re.31,222
4,381,550
CLASS 422
31
107
4,381,350
4,381,351
161 4.381,095
4,381,497
900
4,381,551
116
4.381.285
115
4,381.352
429 4,381,096
62 4,381.116
4,381,499
4,381,552
CLASS 423
131
4.381.353
546 4.381,097
CLASS 249
CLASS 280
204 4.381.117
365 R 4,381,501
4,381,502
365 VL 4,381,500
584 4,381.503
689 4.381.504
4,381,553
4,381,554
9
70
4,381,286
4,381,287
139
CLASS 523
4.381.354
94 4,381.098
412 4.381,118
CLASS 365
101
4,381,288
140
4,381.355
CLASS 250
CLASS 282
78
4,381,555
311
4,381,289
521
4.381.356
214 R 4.381.446
223 R 4.381.447
227 4.381.448
270 4.381,449
11.5 A 4,381,119
27.5 4,381,120
CLASS 283
756 4.381.505
870.32 4.381.506
870.38 4.381,507
44
45
CLASS 369
4,381,556
4,381.557
4.381.558
4.381.559
Re.31.223
CLASS 370
478
1
4,381,290
CLASS 424
4,381.291
68
114
CLASS 524
4,381.357
4,381,358
370 4,381,450
390 4,381,451
392 4,381,452
398 4,381,453
472.1 4.381.454
1 A 4,381,121
CLASS 293
125 4,381,122
CLASS 343
100 LE 4,381,508
754 4,381.509
909 4.381.510
68
77
221
14
61
85
148
4.381.292
4.381.293
4.381,294
4.381.295
4,381,296
117
178
265
305
324
4,381,359
4,381,360
4,381,361
4,381,362
4,381,363
554 4,381.455
CLASS 251
14 4.381.099
368 4.381.100
CLASS 252
CLASS 296
43 4,381,123
CLASS 299
2 4.381,124
CLASS 303
CLASS 346
20 4,381,511
33 R 4,381,512
75 4,381.513
IIOR 4.381,514
140 R 4,381,515
11
24
97
29
4.381.560
4,381,561
4.381.562
CLASS 371
4,381,563
200
240
246
250
4,381,297
4,381,298
4,381,299
4,381,300
4,381,301
4,381,302
373
460
504
549
598
841
4,381,364
4.381,365
4.381.366
4.381.367
4.381.368
4,381,369
49 S BI4.I29..S(N
8.5 P 4.381.241
116 4,381,125
CLASS 350
CLASS 372
252
256
4,381,303
4,381,304
CLASS 525
54.21 4.381.370
8.6 4.381.242
CLASS 307
1.1 4,381,136
87
4,381,564
263
4,381,305
66
4,381,371
8.9 4.381.243
40 4 381456
96.14 4,381.138
91
4,381,565
269
4,381,306
181
4,381.372
62.52 4.381.244
70 4.381.245
64 4,381.457
66 4.381.458
139 4.381,459
449 4,381,460
4.381.139
96.18 4.381.137
CLASS 374
271
272
4,381,307
4,381,308
194
356
4,381,373
4,381,374
91 4.381.246
96.23 4.381.140
43
4,381,154
273 E
1 4,381,309
359.2
4,381,375
95 4.381.247
96.34 4.381.141
CLASS 376
273 R 4.381.310
366
4,381,376
118 4.381.248
529 4 381461
304 4.381.142
M ^ r\ * 4 rt ^\
275
4,381,311
375
4,381,377
136 4,381.249
^ ^ f —W^^\J%^^'\Jt
CLASS 351
105
4,381,280
304
4,381,312
4,381,378
182.1 4,381.250
CLASS 310
172
4,381,281
308
4,381,313
444
4.381,379
♦00 R 4.381.251
11 4,381,462
22 4.381.143
292
4,381,282
333
4,381,314
452
4,381,380
♦29 B 4,381,252
4,381,463
CLASS 354
327
4,381,283
CLASS 425
CLASS 526
♦31 C 4,381,253
♦37 4,381.254
♦55 Z 4.381.255
4,381,256
♦66 B 4,381,257
519 4.381,258
542 4,381,259
45 4,381,464
49 R 4,381,465
103 4,381,466
213 4,381,467
239 4.381,468
313 R 4,381,469
327 4,381,470
353 4,381,471
64 4,381.144
155 4,381,145
195 Re.31,219
271 4,381,146
CLASS355
14 R 4,381,147
364
47
114
151
4,381,284
CLASS 382
4.381.547
CLASS 384
4.381.126
4.381.127
182
202
94
265
302
4,381,183
4.381.184
CLASS 426
4.381.315
4.381.316
4.381.317
75
97
142
206
230.5
239
247
4.381.381
4.381,382
4.381,383
4,381,384
4,381.385
4,381,386
4,381.387
CLA.SS 254
CLASS 356
154
4.381.128
658
4.381.318
CLASS 528
9R 4.381.101
CLASS 313
4 4,381,149
CLASS 400
CLASS 427
59
4,381,388
CLASS 260
144 4.381,260
331 4,381,472
414 4,381,473
213 4,381,148
247 4.381,150
369 4,381,151
385 4,381,152
437 4,381,153
220.1
296.1
4.381.155
4.381,156
34
44
4.381.319
4.381.320
128
167
4,381,389
4,381,390
162 4.381.261
101. \ 4.381,262
CLASS 315
13 ST 4,381,474
CLASS 401
79
179
4.381.321
4.381.322
173
493
4,381,391
4,381,392
239.1 4,381,263
39.3 4,381,475
21
4.381.157
383.7
4.381.323
CLASS 544
W56 4,381,264
101 4,381,476
CLASS 357
111
4.381,158
CLASS 428
370
4,381,393
CLASS 548
\bi E 4,381.265
546 4.381.266
408 4,381,477
CLASS 318
24 4,381,516
30 4,381,517
118
4.381,159
CLASS 403
58
91
4,381,324
4,381,325
CLASS 261
135 4,381,478
79 4,381,518
230
4,381,160
134
4,381,326
161
342
4,381,394
4.381.395
104 4.381,267
317 4.381.479
CLASS 358
CLASS 406
137
4,381,327
109 4,381,268
471 4.381,480
21 R /4,381,519
171
4,381,328
CLASS 549
CLASS 264
696 4,381,481
29 4,381,520
109
4,381.161
204
4,381,329
4,381,330
4,381,331
4,381,332
237
4,381,396
1.5 4,381.269
3 B 4.381,270
816 4,381,482
CLASS 322
55 4,381.521
86 4.381.522
227 4 381 523
CLASS 408
1 R 4,381,162
218
224
288
366
368
390
4.381,398
4.381.397
4.381.399
29.5 4.381,271
99 4.381,483
fc^ ' ^1 a^ \J A f ■/ A« a,/
CLASS 411
312.6
4,381,333
464
4.381.400
40.3 4,381.272
^"^w A rHf^ 'Vjh'*
CLASS 360
V^ Li/%h7k7 ^ * *
332
4,381,334
45.9 4.381.273
CLASS 323
2 4.381.524
311
4.381.163
373
4.381.335
CLASS 556
47 4.381.274
316 4.381.484
32 4.381.525
CLASS 414
614
4.381.336
410
4.381.401
128.8 4.381.275
i08 4,381,276
>12 4,381,177
CLASS 324
58 C 4.381.485
78 4.381.526
92 4.381.527
97 4.381.528
123 4.381.529
130.23 4.381.530
416
526
4.381.164
4.381.165
58
CLASS 430
4.381,337
6
CLASS 560
4.381,402
4,381,278
404 4.381.486
685
4.381.166
135
4,381,338
24
4.381,403
i22 4,381.279
CLASS 330
697
737
4.381.167
4.381.168
223
302
4,381,339
4,381.340
25
4,381,404
4,381,405
CLASS 266
306 4.381.487
CLASS 361
753
4.381,169
312
4,381,341
83
4,381.406
44 4.381.102
CLASS 333
87 4.381.531
758
4.381.170
496
4,381,342
263
4.381.407
CLASS 269
14 4.381.488
154 4.381,532
CLASS 415
CLASS 435
CLASS 564
1 4,381.103
215 4.381.489
228 4.381.533
233 4,381,534
318 4.381.535
433 4,381.536
204
4,381.171
24
4,381,343
112
4.381,408
43 4.381.104
CLASS 335
205
4.381.172
87
4,381,344
406
4,381,409
110 4.381.105
210 4.381.490
CLASS 416
94
215
4,381,345
4,381,346
CLASS 568
CLASS 270
257 4,381.491
CLASS 362
q<, A A ISI 171
448
4.381,410
47 4.381.106
284 4,381,492
.S19 Bl 4.200.932
yv f
' '
CLASS 455
459
4,381,411
58 4.381.107
CLASS 339
78 4.381.537
CLASS 417
193
4.381.566
637
4,381,412
CLASS 271
98 4.381.108
14 R 4.381,129
74 R 4.381.130
75 M 4.381.131
269 4.381.538
285 4.381.539
CLASS 364
15
80
222
4.381,174
4,381,175
4,381,176
CLASS 456
623 Q 4.381,214
716
10
4,381,413
CLASS 585
4,381,414
CLASS 273
99 R 4.381.132
200 4.381.540
240
4,381.177
CLASS 494
487
4,381,415
61 R 4.381.109
198 R 4.381.133
4.381.541
269
4.381.178
10
4.381,072
606
4,381,416
182 R 4.381.110
220 R 4.381.134
4.381.542
273
4.381.179
^"^^ A r%r^ ^#fc«
655
4,381,417
191 R 4.381.111
258 R 4.381.135
4,381,543
393
4.381.180
CLASS 501
4,381,418
!39 4.381.112
CLASS 340
420 4,381,544
423 R 4,381,181
36
4.381.347
828
4,381,419
!86 4.381.113
479 4,381,545
435
4.381.182
153
4.381.348
CLASS 604
27 R 4,381,493
514 4,381,546
CLASS 277
146.3 C 4,381,494
551 4,381,548
CLASS 419
CLASS 521
152
- 4,381,005
34.6 4.381.114
347 AD 4,381,496
557 4,381,549
24
4.381.197
28
4.381.349
265
4,381,008
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
PI 31
D2-
273
268,709
77
268,727
70
268,738
268,752
119
268,766
65
268,780
290
268,710
98
268,728
73
268,739
32
268,753
127
268,767
71
268.781
D3—
33
268,711
317
268.725
268,740
40
268.754
132
268,768
149
268,782
36
268,712
268,726
Dll-
107
268,741
D14—
5
268.755
D21- 20
268,769
D24—
17
268.783
48
268.713
319
268,724
268.742
268,756
23
268,770
99
268,784
74
268,714
D8— 14
268,729
131
268.743
6
268,757
33
268,771
268.785
D6—
29
268,715
30
268.730
158
268,744
53
268.758
81
268.772
D25-
58
268.786
56
63
73
116
181
268,716
268,717
268,718
268,719
268,720
268 721
38
268,731
166
268,745
D15-
5
268,759
87
268.773
59
268.787
71
323
268,732
268,733
D12—
88
110
268,746
268,747
76
123
268,760
268,761
162
220
268.774
268.775
D26—
8
11
268.788
268.789
358
268,734
146
268,748
134
268.762
230
268,776
D32-
50
268.790
191
396
268,735
196
268,749
145
268,763
236
268,777
D34—
44
268.791
201
268,722
D9- 349
268,736
209
268,750
D16-
1
268,764
D23- 18
268,778
D92-
29
268,792
D7-
42
268,723
DIO— 39
268,737
DI3-
24
268,751
37
268,765
51
268,779
Jl
268.793
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
p.- 15
5,042
74
5,043
Alabama 1
Alaska 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California 6
Canal Zone 7
Colorado 8
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 11
Florida 12
Georgia 13
Guam 14
Hawaii 15
Idaho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana 18
Iowa 19
Kansas 20
(First number in listing denotes location according to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the Official Gazette to obtain details
as to inventor name, location, etc.)
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. States, Territories and Armed Forces, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
Kentucky 21
Louisiana 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota 27
Mississippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York 36
North Carolina 37
North Dakota 38
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 45
South Dakota 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 48
Utah 49
Vermont 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
West Virginia 54
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army s.... 58
U.S. Navy 59
PATENTS
01
04
05
06
4,380.958
4,380,969
4,381,042
4,381.090
4,381,150
4.381,280
4.381,448
4,381,490
4,380,893
4,381,032
4,381,097
-^,381,107
4,381.116
4,381.213
4.381.240
4.381.248
4.381,423
4,381,484
4.381.497
4.381.508
4.380.889
4.380.856
4.380,882
4,380,908
4,380,909
4,380,920
4,380,953
4,380,960
4,380,978
4.381.001
4.381.016
4.381.024
4.381,027
4,381,031
4,381,087
4,381,100
4,381,123
4,381.131
4.381.143
4.381,151
4,381.163
4.381.168
4,381,175
4.381,176
4,381.185
4.381.195
4.381.196
4.381.206
4,381,207
4,381,215
4,381.275
4.381.292
4.381,293
08
09
10
12
4.381.321
4.381.333
4.381.399
4.381.402
4,381,426
4.381.427
4.381.428
4,381.435
4.381.442
4.381,443
4,381,454
4,381,493
4,381,514
4,381,526
4,381,543
4,381,553
4,381.558
4,380.875
4,381,092
4,381.117
4.381.155
4.381.160
4.381.563
4.380.886
4.380,906
4,380,925
4,380,944
4,380,994
4,381,065
4,381.109
U,381.144
4,381.173
4.381.187
4.381,263
4,381.308
4.381.337
4,381,364
4,381,437
4,381,501
4,381,505
4,381,561
4,381,564
4,381,311
4.381.318
4.381.375
4.381.378
4.381,384
4.381,389
4,381.512
4,381.545
4.380,850
4,380,896
4.380.933
13
15
16
17
18
19
4.381.025
4.380.937
4,380,928
) 4,381,008
4,381,098
4.381.167
4,380,959
4,381,022
4,381,307
4,381.459
4,380,968
4,381,063
4,381,546
20 : 4.380.841
4,380,975
4,381,066
4,381,552
4.381.099
4,380,990
" 4,381,138
Re.31.217
4.381.183
4,381,029
4,381,139
4.380.999
4,381,510
4,381,033
4.381,180
4,381,000
21 : 4.380.911
4,381,035
4,381,212
4,381.527
4.380,938
4,381,071
4,381,226
4.380.942
4,381,078
4,381,085
4,381,228
4.380.957
4,381.432
4,381,086
4,381,234
4.380,879
22 : 4,381.112
4,381,096
4,381,242
4.381.054
23 : 4.381.015
4,381,105
4,381,243
Re.31.218
24 : 4.380,948
4,381.113
4,381,278
4.380.840
4,381,002
4,381.129
4,381,288
4,380,871
4,381.039
4,381,172
4,381,295
4.380.915
4,381.148
4,381,224
4.381,297
4.380.922
4.381.174
4,381,236
4,381,320
4.380.932
4,381,255
4,381,241
4,381,326
4,380,952
4,381,256
4,381,352
4,381,340
4,380,980
4,381,332
4,381,444
■ 4,381.372
4.381.005
4,381.355
4,381,494
4,381,406
4.381,006
25 : Re.3I,219
27 : 4,380.881
4,381,461
4,381,020
4.380,878
4,381,010
4,381,471
4,381,036
4,380,884
4,381,013
-4,381,504
4,381,040
4,380,903
4,381,014
4,381,557
4,381.046
4,380,935
4,381,179
4,381,560
4.381.064
4,380,945
4,381,315
4,381,562
4,381,102
4.381,154
4,381,319
35 : 4,380,876
4,381,103
4,381,211
4,381,324
4,380.910
4,381,108
4.381,227
4,381,424
4,381,007
4,381,120
4.381,231
4,381,491
4,381.133
4,381.121
4.381,232
4,381,537
4,381,177
4.381.122
4.381.238
4,381,540
36 : 4,380,844
4.381,134
4.381,267
4,381,541
4,380,860
4.381.229
4.381.285 .
29 : 4,381.165
4,380,864
4.381.257
4.381,300
4,381,254
4,380,874
4,381,345
4,381,327
4,381,464
4,380,902
4,381,417
4,381,346
4,381,548
4,380,914
4,381,418
4,381,408
31 : 4.381,088
4,380,961
4.381,452
4,381,441
32 : 4,380,851
4,380,998
4,380.833
4,381,450
4,381,069
4,381,012
4.380,904
4,381,485
4,381,287
4,381,019
4,381.079
4,381,498
4,381,296
4,381,041
4.381,171
4,381,509
33 : 4,381,470
4,381,119
4.381.312
4,381,522
34 : Re. 3 1.223
4,381,128
4.381,328
4,381,536
4.380,838
4,381,135
4,381,358
4,381,542
4,380,845
4,381,137
4,381,401
4,381,554
4,380,855
4,381,190
4.381.430
26 : 4,380,836
4,380,865
4,381,193
4.381.433
4,380,839
4,380,883
4,381,197
4.381.535
4,380,887
4,380,912
4,381,216
4,380,849
4,380,918
4,380,943
4,381,244
PI 32
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS PI 33
4.381,260
4.380.967
4.381,413
4,381,323
48 : 4.380.863
4.381,549
4,381,314
4.381,026
41 : 4,381,421
4,381.331
4.380,866
49 4,380.941
4,381.342
4,381.049
42 ; Re.3 1,220
4.381.334
4.380,930
4,381.544
4.381.360
4,381,057
4,380.834
4,381,341
4,380.936
4.381,550
4.381.388
4,381,061
4.380.842
4,381.351
4.380.939
51 4.380,873
4.381.394
4,381,081
4.380.862
4,381,376
4,380,951
4.380,993
4.381.396
4,381,118
4.380.872
4,381.403
4,380,997
4.381.218
4,381,453
4,381,153
4.380.929
4.381.414
4,381.034
4.381.283
4,381,457
4,381,166
4.380,931
4.381.447
4.381.044
4.381,317
4,381,474
4,381,487
4,381,531
4,381,532
4,381,538
4,380,888
4,381,199
4,381,344
4,381,200
4,381,011
4.381.451
4,381,059
4.381.368
4,381,204
4,381,075
4,381,479
4.381,101
53 4.381.004
4,381,271
4,381,082
4,381,486
4,381.114
4.381,093
4,381,290
4,381,106
4,381.565
4,381,181
4.381,104
37 •
4,381,362
4,381,130
44 : 4.381.158
4,381,230
4.381.220
Jr
4,381,363
4,381.164
45 : 4.380.890
4,381,253
4.381.281
4,381.391
4.381.203
4.381.157
4,381,349
4,381.369
4^381,507
4,381,393
4,381,205
4,381.194
4,381,353
54 4.381.161
4,381,524
4,381,411
4,381,209
4.381.265
4,381.374
4,381.223
39 :
Re.31,221
4,381,420
4.381.246
4.381.380
4.381,382
4.381.390
4,380,837
40 : Re.31,222
4.381.250
47 : 4.380.843
4.381,419
55 4.381.023
4,380,846
4,380,870
4.381.284
4.381.298
4.381,449
4.381.060
4.380.868
4,380,987
4.381.302
4.381,356
4.381,496
4.381,095
4.380.926
4.381.191
4,381,316
4,381,440
4.381,515
4.381.431
DESIGN PATENTS
01 :
268.721
268,786
268,758
. 268,742
36 : 268,724
42
268.73.^
04 :
268,788
268,789
268,777
268,784
268,755
44
268.723
05 :
268.761
08 :
268,768
268,790
28 : 268,769
268,757
47
268.709
06 :
268,711
09 :
268,727
20
268,728
29 : 268,752
268,764
48
268.770
268,722
268,734
268,743
268,750
11 :
12 :
13 :
268,785
268,771
268,759
268,791
21
24
26
268,715
268,729
268,725
268,726
32 : 268,718
34 : 268,712
268,713
268,782
268,793
37 : 268,775
51
53
268.766
268.787
268,746
268,763
17 :
268,736
268,730
268,719
39 268,720
55
268.778
268,773
268,745
268,765
268,760
268,751
268,779
268,783
268,753
27
268,741
268,781
268,754
268.780
US GOVHRNMHNT PRINTING OFUCH (V I9K^
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
NAME— FIRST. LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
STATE
(or) COUNTRY
ZIP CODE
I I I I
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20A02
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
@ $
Domestic; @ $
Foreign.
NAME— FIRST. LAST
1 i M M 1 II
1
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
1 1 II 1
STREET ADDRESS
1 1
CITY
1 1 1
STATE
ZIP CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
(or) COUNTRY
Q Remittance Enclosed (M»ke
checks payable to Superin
tendent of Documents)
Q Charge to my Deposit
Account No
MAIL ORDER FORM TO
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC. 20402
<;'*'^-
-•' l\
4
"!?>*'
«.<
't m"
'4'
ir,'
"^-^^ ■
mm
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11